The Strongest Dull Prince Battl - Tamba
Uploaded by
Anh LêThe Strongest Dull Prince Battl - Tamba
Uploaded by
Anh Lê1
Table of Contents
Prologue: The Beginning of the Two.
Secret Maneuver Begin
Double Roles
SS Rank Adventurer
Sharer of Secret
Imperial Capital Tour
Rivals
My Natural Enemy The Hero
The Strongest Knight and The Strongest Adventurer
Those Who Move Behind the Scene
Commence
A Good Start
Tsunami Outbreak
S Class Bounty
The Eastern Knights
Noble
Price of the Plan
Black and White
Schemer gets caught in his own Scheme
Mother of Three
Choose your Bride carefully.
The Fisherman’s gain
The Emperor’s Feelings
House of the Heroes
2
Escort Request
Hat Girl
Immigrant’s Problem
People have things they are not good at
Prince and Princess of Albatro
Bitter Rescue
Will to live, Will to save
Meanwhile, they…..
A Decision that cannot be made
Situation at the Imperial Capital
SPT Chapter 34
The Silver Haired Vampire
The Scene I have seen many times
The Situation in Rondine
The Sea Route to Rondine
The Switch
Alliance Signed
Remote Consultation
The one and only Sharer
The Fourth Prince Traugott
Eva’s plea
The Hero and the Masked Adventurer
Oath of the Childhood Friend
Steadfast Resolution – First Part
Inspector
3
The Second and The Fifth Consort
How to use Finne
The Outermost layer of the Imperial Capital
Her Name is Rita
Sometime the Elder, Always the Younger
Heading to the South
The Earnest Duke
Reason for the Weight
Manpower Shortage
The Best Sword
Malice and Good Will
The First Princess
The Unreasonable Sister
The Blau Mowe Effect
The Leaked Secret
The Approaching Future
The Changing Conclusion
Those that lurk in the dark
The Current State of The South
Cry of Collapse
Mistake Three Years Ago
Path of Light
Reason for Trying
Black Sphere
Blue Seagull’s Rescue
4
SPT Chapter 81
SPT Chapter 82
SPT Chapter 83
SPT Chapter 84
SPT Chapter 85
SPT Chapter 86
SPT Chapter 87
SPT Chapter 88
SPT Chapter 89
SPT Chapter 90
SPT Chapter 91
SPT Chapter 92
SPT Chapter 93
SPT Chapter 94
SPT Chapter 95
Night Battle Begin
SPT Chapter 97
SPT Chapter 98
SPT Chapter 99
SPT Chapter 100
SPT Chapter 101
SPT Chapter 102
SPT Chapter 103
SPT Chapter 104
SPT Chapter 105
5
SPT Chapter 106
SPT Chapter 107
SPT Chapter 108
SPT Chapter 109
SPT Chapter 110
SPT Chapter 111
SPT Chapter 112
SPT Chapter 113
SPT Chapter 114
SPT Chapter 115
SPT Chapter 116
SPT Chapter 117
SPT Chapter 118
SPT Chapter 119
SPT Chapter 120
SPT Chapter 121
SPT Chapter 122
SPT Chapter 123
SPT Chapter 124
SPT Chapter 125
SPT Chapter 126
Alois
SPT Chapter 129
SPT Chapter 130
SPT Chapter 131
6
SPT Chapter 132
SPT Chapter 133
SPT Chapter 134
SPT Chapter 135
SPT Chapter 136
SPT Chapter 137
SPT Chapter 138
SPT Chapter 139
SPT Chapter 140
SPT Chapter 141
SPT Chapter 142
SPT Chapter 143
SPT Chapter 144
SPT Chapter 145
SPT Chapter 146
SPT Chapter 147
SPT Chapter 148
SPT Chapter 149
SPT Chapter 150
SPT Chapter 151
SPT Chapter 152
SPT Chapter 153
SPT Chapter 154
SPT Chapter 155
SPT Chapter 156
7
SPT Chapter 157
SPT Chapter 158
SPT Chapter 159
SPT Chapter 160
SPT Chapter 161
SPT Chapter 162
SPT Chapter 163
SPT Chapter 164
SPT Chapter 165
SPT Chapter 166
SPT Chapter 167
SPT Chapter 168
SPT Chapter 169
SPT Chapter 170
SPT Chapter 171
SPT Chapter 172
SPT Chapter 173
SPT Character Introductions
SPT Chapter 174
SPT Chapter 175
SPT Chapter 176
SPT Chapter 177
SPT Chapter 178
SPT Chapter 179
SPT Chapter 180
8
SPT Chapter 181
SPT Chapter 182
SPT Chapter 183
SPT Chapter 184
SPT Chapter 185
SPT Chapter 186
SPT Chapter 187
SPT Chapter 188
SPT Chapter 189
SPT Chapter 190
SPT Chapter 191
SPT Chapter 192
SPT Chapter 193
SPT Chapter 194
SPT Chapter 195
SPT Chapter 196
SPT Chapter 197
SPT Chapter 198
SPT Chapter 199
SPT Chapter 200
SPT Chapter 201
SPT Chapter 202
SPT Chapter 203
SPT Chapter 204
SPT Chapter 205
9
SPT Chapter 206
SPT Chapter 207
SPT Chapter 208
SPT Chapter 209
SPT Chapter 210
SPT Chapter 211
SPT Chapter 212
SPT Chapter 213
SPT Chapter 214
SPT Chapter 215
SPT Chapter 216
SPT Chapter 217
SPT Chapter 218
SPT Chapter 219
SPT Chapter 220
SPT Chapter 221
SPT Chapter 222
SPT Chapter 223
SPT Chapter 224
SPT Chapter 225
SPT Chapter 226
SPT Chapter 227
SPT Chapter 228
SPT Chapter 229
SPT Chapter 230
10
SPT Chapter 231
SPT Chapter 232
SPT Chapter 233
SPT Chapter 234
SPT Chapter 235
SPT Chapter 236
SPT Chapter 237
SPT Chapter 238
SPT Chapter 239
SPT Chapter 240
SPT Chapter 241
SPT Chapter 242
SPT Chapter 243
SPT Chapter 244
SPT Chapter 245
SPT Chapter 246
SPT Chapter 247
SPT Chapter 248
SPT Chapter 249
SPT Chapter 250
SPT Chapter 251
SPT Chapter 252
SPT Chapter 253
SPT Chapter 254
SPT Chapter 255
11
SPT Chapter 256
SPT Chapter 257
SPT Chapter 258
SPT Chapter 259
SPT Chapter 260
SPT Chapter 261
SPT Chapter 262
SPT Chapter 263
SPT Chapter 264
SPT Chapter 265
SPT Chapter 266
SPT Chapter 267
SPT Chapter 268
SPT Chapter 269
SPT Chapter 270
SPT Chapter 271
SPT Chapter 272
SPT Chapter 273
SPT Chapter 274
SPT Chapter 275
SPT Chapter 276
SPT Chapter 277
SPT Chapter 278
SPT Chapter 279
SPT Chapter 280
12
SPT Chapter 281
SPT Chapter 282
SPT Chapter 283
SPT Chapter 284
SPT Chapter 285
SPT Chapter 286
SPT Chapter 287
SPT Chapter 288
SPT Chapter 289
SPT Chapter 290
SPT Chapter 291
SPT Chapter 292
SPT Chapter 293
SPT Chapter 294
SPT Chapter 295
SPT Chapter 296
SPT Chapter 297
SPT Chapter 298
SPT Chapter 299
SPT Chapter 300
SPT Chapter 301
SPT Chapter 302
SPT Chapter 303
SPT Chapter 304
SPT Chapter 305
13
SPT Chapter 306
SPT Chapter 307
SPT Chapter 308
SPT Chapter 309
SPT Chapter 310
SPT Chapter 311
SPT Chapter 312
SPT Chapter 313
SPT Chapter 314
SPT Chapter 315
SPT Chapter 316
SPT Chapter 317
SPT Chapter 318
SPT Chapter 319
SPT Chapter 320
SPT Chapter 321
SPT Chapter 322
SPT Chapter 323
SPT Chapter 324
SPT Chapter 325
SPT Chapter 326
SPT Chapter 327
SPT Chapter 328
SPT Chapter 329
SPT Chapter 330
14
SPT Chapter 331
SPT Chapter 332
SPT Chapter 333
SPT Chapter 334
SPT Chapter 335
SPT Chapter 336
SPT Chapter 337
SPT Chapter 338
SPT Chapter 339
SPT Chapter 340
SPT Chapter 341
SPT Chapter 342
SPT Chapter 343
SPT Chapter 344
SPT Chapter 345
SPT Chapter 346
SPT Chapter 347
SPT Chapter 348
SPT Chapter 349
SPT Chapter 350
SPT Chapter 351
SPT Chapter 352
SPT Chapter 353
SPT Chapter 354
SPT Chapter 355
15
SPT Chapter 356
SPT Chapter 357
SPT Chapter 358
SPT Chapter 359
SPT Chapter 360
SPT Chapter 361
SPT Chapter 362
SPT Chapter 363
SPT Chapter 364
SPT Chapter 365
SPT Chapter 366
SPT Chapter 367
SPT Chapter 368
SPT Chapter 369
SPT Chapter 370
SPT Chapter 371
SPT Chapter 372
SPT Chapter 373
SPT SS1
16
Prologue: The Beginning of the Two.
The Adrasia empire, the empire that rules over the central part of the Vogel continent.
(TLN: The raw used Fogel as there’s no V in Japanese so tell me which one you prefer, Fogel or Vogel)
Bearing the symbol of the Golden Eagle, it is one of the three most powerful countries of the continent.
Its imperial capital, Wirth is still prospering to this day.
At the Adventurer Guild of that imperial capital, a big-shot appeared.
“Whoa–……it’s really him……”
“Hey, look at that horn. Isn’t that the horn of King Minotaur……..?”
“Seriously……They are AAA class rare monsters you know…..did he took one down..….?”
Each and every one of the onlookers are speaking wonder about him.
The person that has been gathering everyone’s attention is a wizard that is carrying a large horn. He is
covered in black from his hair to his long robe. However, only his face is hidden behind a conspicuous
silver mask.
The receptionist greets him normally as she already used to his appearance.
“Thank you for your work. Silver-san, this is the reward for this time.”
The SS rank adventurer, Silver. Calling my temporary name, the receptionist gave me the reward with
a smile like usual.
Gold coins were present to me with the amount that the other adventurers here never seen before.
It’s a matter of course. The King Minotaur hunt was a special assignment from the guild. A high
amount of bounty was placed on its head.
It originally wasn’t present in the imperial territory but a while ago the large-scale party formed by
the A rank adventurers that went to subjugate it failed, as a result, the King Minotaur relocated itself
into the imperial territory.
That’s why “ I ” subjugated it.
“Thank you, I’ve always been in your care.”
“No no, You are a great help for us. To have one of the only five SS rank adventurers like Silver-san
with us at our imperial capital branch is something for us to be proud of!”
The brown-haired receptionist said so and smile.
17
Seeing her like that, I let out a bitter smile and head toward the guild entrance while leaving behind
some gold coins.
“Umm……? Silver-san. This is?”
“It’s a treat for everyone here. Can you order alcohol or something for them? In exchange, if there’s a
high difficulty quest coming in I want you to give me the priority.”
“Ah, Yes! I understand!”
The receptionist happily picks up the gold coins while the adventurers inside are happily making a
ruckus.
I can only accept high-level quests, that’s why when it comes to such quests the guild also gives me a
priority. However, there are also adventurers that don’t think well of such a method. That’s why
letting them vent like this is also important.
I’m not in a position that can move freely as well.
With that in mind, I left the guild and head to my inn.
There, I take off my mask and black robe then changed into a high-class outfit while being careful of
my surroundings.
18
“Even incompetent, if it was found out that a prince has been acting as an adventurer it would turn
into a serious matter after all.”
“If you are aware of that then please do restraint yourselves, Prince Arnold.”
The one who appears without a sound and called out to me was the butler that has been serving us
since my mother’s generation, Sebastian (TLN: Of course). He is an old man with golden hair despite
being over fifty years old, his back is straight while wearing a fine butler outfit.
19
20
As you can see from the fact that he can appear without any sound, not just his ability as a butler, his
real abilities didn’t decline despite his age, He’s an outrageous old man.
And as this butler said, My name is Arnold Lakes Adler. The seventh prince of this empire.
“I told you that you shouldn’t show up silently like that right? Sebas.”
“Please forgive me as it is a habit of mine.”
“And I don’t want to hear your lecture either. A dull prince like me can do whatever I want, right?”
I have a little twin brother.
Excellent in martial arts, bright mind, and good personality. He is a genius that can immediately
become first-class no matter what he does.
Even though we have the same face, he is praised for his elegance and grace. On the other hand, I was
told by many that I have no ambition and lack courage. There’s an endless amount of marriage
proposal for my brother that it made him irritated.
On the contrary, I am an incompetent, lethargic prince. As a child, I have always played around, seeing
me wasting my talent away, many talented individuals were hired as my tutor but they all gave up. My
reputation quickly spread throughout the imperial capital and later, the entire empire. The name that
stuck was the prince that got all his good parts sucked out by his little brother, [The Dull Prince]. Even
now, the people inside the castle always look down on me and gossip behind my back.
21
A guy with a poor reputation despite being a part of the imperial family with no expectations
whatsoever placed on him. That is the prince me.
“Please don’t mind about those petty comments. There’s no one who aware of your real power after
all.”
“It’s not that I mind. I am used to that kind of treatment already. It’s no use bringing up the duty of
prince with me you know.”
Even though I say that, a shabby excuse is still a shabby excuse. However, thanks to that excuse, I can
live freely like this.
22
However.
“I understand your point but the situation has progressed to the point that such an excuse is not going
to work anymore. Please return to the castle right away.”
“……..What happened?”
“General Dominique has passed away.”
“That old general?”
He was an honorary general of the imperial capital city guard. He finally retired with nothing to note
on his battle record but he did survive the front-line for more than fifty years.
As a result of his achievement, he was appointed as an honorary general of the imperial capital city
guard, the position that was close to an advisor.
He was old and had a heart condition but it’s still unlikely that he suddenly passed away naturally.
This smells like an assassination.
“It’s one of [Those Three] huh……”
“We still don’t know the details but I think there will be no one conducting an investigation on this.”
He was a person that says everything frankly and easily makes enemies so if it was an assassination
then that should be one of the factors.
Recently, general Dominique was involved with the battle for the throne. He always said that the
princes and princesses are no good but there’s one prince that he began to take a liking to.
Then he was assassinated by those who saw him as a dangerous individual, in other words, the
leaders in this battle for the throne. I think.
Since he was just an honorary general, his death wouldn’t do much damage to the empire and his
death would be treated as the result of his illness.
The one who took damage would be only his ally.
And that ally was the eighth prince, Leonard Lakes Adler. My little twin brother.
“Leo is a person that would naturally attract allies after all…….It doesn’t like he is gathering power to
aim for the throne though……”
“The problem is that he was perceived that he was gathering power. With this, Prince Leonard is
recognized by the people that are aiming for the throne as an [enemy].”
Listening to Sebas, I let out a sigh.
23
Among the throne successors, there are three influential people in the currently on-going battle for
the throne. The second prince, the second princess, and the third prince.
Each of the three has their own power base so there’s a high probability that the next emperor will be
among those three.
There are two paths for the other successors. First is to choose a side or at least staying neutral. The
other is to be hostile toward them and aim for the throne.
If you choose the latter and lost then considering those three’s personalities you will get exile at best
and the death penalty at worst. The punishment will apply to those who are involved with them as
well. In the case of Leo then that would be our mother and me.
So without consulting with Leo, I choose the latter.
There’s no meaning to ally ourselves with them or stay neutral now. If the situation has progressed
this much then there’s no other choice.
“The only way left is to make Leo the emperor huh……”
“Is there no way for you to become the emperor yourselves………?”
“Me being the emperor? I am a man that throws every troublesome thing at my little brother you
know? It is the same this time.”
I want to keep living as an adventurer like this but I will be killed at this rate.
It’s troublesome but there’s no other way.
Let’s move behind the scene for my brother.
At the center of the imperial capital is a sword-like castle. I immediately head to Leonard’s room as I
got back to the castle.
However, I met several ministers and aristocrats along the way.
“Oh if it isn’t Prince Arnold. You look fine today as well.
“Thanks to you.”
“Yes, I am really jealous that you can look so happy every day. On the other hand, Prince Leonard has
always been working so hard on his training.”
“He was made differently from me after all.”
“It is seriously as you said! To think that he would join the battle for the throne like three of your
esteemed siblings. Prince Arnold mustn’t lose too.”
24
“Hey, his highness looks pitiful when you compare him to Prince Leonard right!? Even if Prince Arnold
and Prince Leonard are twins, there’s a difference in their talent you know!”
“OOH! That’s right That’s right. Forgive my rudeness.”
“Don’t sweat it. It’s all true after all.”
I said that and walk passed them.
They all respectfully bow to me but every single one of them is making fun of me. I won’t rat them out
to the emperor though, even if I do that he won’t listen to me after all.
Among the imperial family, only me hasn’t been treated as its member. Leaving the territory Lords
aside, the aristocrats and the ministers in the imperial capital are all looking down on me.
Well, it’s because I have been acting like this though.
I don’t want to change my behavior because I think it is ok for me to behave like this. Since no one
cares about me, I can move around doing what I like as Silver.
If I do what I like as a prince then I would have to always consider my standing.
I arrived at Leo’s room while thinking about that.
“I’m coming in—”
“Nii-san……”
I entered the room without knocking and found Leo sitting inside. He is eighteen years old, of course,
he is the same age as me but because of his calm personality, people often mistake Leo as the older
one.
Our appearance is exactly the same but Leo’s hair was trimmed while mine is always unkempt. On the
clothes side, Leo’s is always neat while mine is always loose. His back is always straight up but mine is
bent. As we grew up, there’s no one who mistakes us for the other anymore.
On my little twin brother’s face is a trace of haggardness
When you see your own face looking so depressed, it would me your tension drop too.
“I heard the story. That old man passed away right?”
“Un…..”
“It’s probably an assassination right?”
“…..Probably.”
I wasn’t so immature as to say that it is probably our elder brothers or sisters’ doing.
25
Considering the situation, the possibility of this being an assassination is the highest.
“What are you going to do?”
“….I don’t want to fight my own siblings.”
“I thought you would say that.”
Leo doesn’t want the throne.
People just naturally attracted to his personality and become his ally. That ally is General Dominique.
As he said just now, Leo doesn’t want to compete for the throne.
However, as Leo is blessed with talent and excellent personality, he has become the fourth contender
along with the second prince, second princess, and third prince regardless of his intention.
That is why they put out the ember by assassination.
However, it doesn’t mean that Leo is safe with this. No matter who among the three become the
emperor, only dark fate awaits him.
“You are already recognized as an enemy. If you are not going to compete for the throne then the only
thing waiting for you is death. The same goes for me and mother.”
“Yeah….I know…..sorry.”
“Don’t apologize. I want to hear what you are going to do.”
“….I have to compete for the throne.”
Leo said with a difficult expression.
If Leo is alone in this then he would withdraw from it even if it takes his life. However, if there’s a
possibility that it would bring harm to those around him, he is ready to aim for the throne.
After all, since he has that kind of personality, he is going to ask for everyone’s cooperation to become
the emperor.
I think that he is too kind to become an emperor……but even if I told him that, he wouldn’t change.
Since it has already turned out like this, I had no choice but to make him into one.
“It might not be much but I am going to help you. For now, you just focus on finding allies and build up
your power. If you build a big faction then it would be hard for them to lay their hand on you as well.”
“Yeah…What about Nii-san?”
26
“I will look for an ally as well. But don’t expect much, all of the influential ministers and aristocrats are
already belong to the top three factions after all.”
“I know…Thank you. Nii-san. Rather than me, I think that Nii-san is more fitting to become the
emperor you know……”
“Don’t even joke about it. I can’t play around if I become the emperor right? I already have a life plan
to find a beautiful wife and play around all forever. For that sake, I will have you become the emperor
for me.”
I hit Leo’s shoulder while saying something selfish.
His body is slightly trembling.
Well, it can’t be helped. From the perspective of the excellent Leo, those three are monsters.
In terms of ability, the empire is safe no matter who becomes the emperor. Naturally, the power that
comes with it is also great.
However, no matter how good they are it doesn’t mean that they are invincible. Since they are fighting
among themselves, it serves as a chance for Leo as well.
“Let’s start with increasing your allies and get father to recognize you first.”
“Right. In the end, the person who decides the outcome will be our father after all.”
“Now, how do we get an approval of his majesty the emperor.”
Thus, start the twin’s journey to take the throne.
27
Secret Maneuver Begin
“How about we start by revealing the true identity of the SS rank adventurer Silver?”
“Rejected.”
Once I returned to my room, I consult Sebas about our future course of action.
The only one who knows that I am Silver is Sebas. Certainly, there are merits to reveal my identity.
However, there are also disadvantages.
“My great grandfather devoted himself to ancient magic and it corrupted him. Ever since then, the
ancient magic has been a taboo among the imperial family. The magic I use is also ancient magic. It’s
bad to reveal that I use such magic while my twin brother is aiming for the throne.”
“However, Silver has his own fame and track record. He is said to be the best adventurer in the history
of the empire. Wouldn’t that be beneficial to Prince Leonard?”
“It is still too soon. If there’s nothing left we can do then we will use it as our last resort. As long as Leo
is aiming for the throne, it is more convenient for me to remain as an incompetent prince for a while.”
“However……..”
“It is easier for me that way.”
“……If you have already decided then I will not say anything more. However, what are you planning to
do? There are only a few moves you can play if you don’t reveal your identity, no?”
“Sebas. Is there any Ducal house that hasn’t participate in this succession war yet?”
“There is one. The only Ducal house that hasn’t participate in the battle yet.”
“Which one?”
“It is the Kleinert House.”
Quite a prestigious one huh.
A Ducal house is a blood-relative of the imperial family. It is the status given to the emperor’s brothers
who were judged to be excellent but did not become the emperor. There are those who were given
such status by leaving behind great achievements but at that time they will be given a member of the
imperial family as their spouse so there’s no problem to think of them as the imperial family’s relative.
To such Ducal houses, the battle for the throne is an important event.
If you correctly support the next emperor, you will be able to enjoy great rewards. That’s why every
Ducal house will have a close tie with the successor candidates one way or another. To not do such a
thing would mean that they have a greater problem on their hands.
28
“The fact that they still haven’t participated at this point in time would mean that they have something
to worried about right?”
“It is as you discerned. There seems to be a horrible monster rampaging in their territory, they have
asked the adventurers for help but it seems like they still have no clues about how to resolve the
situation.”
The adventurer’s guild has branches all over the continent.
There are a lot of their branches in the empire as well but the ability of the adventurers are varying
from branch to branch.
For adventurer guild inside the empire, aside from the imperial capital branch, the level of the other
branches are not very high. Excluding me from the imperial capital branch, its level would only be
slightly higher than the others.
The reason is that only a few monsters appear inside the empire. It is a good thing that the empire is
peaceful but the lack of monsters also means a lack of demand. Powerful adventurers would move
away to a place with more monsters to hunt.
Therefore, the empire tends to take some time to resolve a problem once monsters start getting
involved. It costs money to bring in adventurers from the outside after all.
“Should I help them?”
“I think that is a good idea but how would you establish the connection between Silver and Prince
Leonard?”
“It’s fine if I just say that I was dispatched on Leo’s request. I will explain the details to Leo later so
there’s no problem.”
“They would be more on guard against Prince Leonard if he can move the SS rank adventurer who
never moves away from the imperial capital like Silver. If it comes to that then they would be able to
make a connection between Prince Arnold and Silver, right?”
“It’s fine if they start to be wary of him. If they have his connection with Silver in mind, they can’t
easily move against him. The identity of Silver is also not a problem. It’s fine as long as I am being
careful.”
“I will not stop you if you are that confident. However, please be aware that a reveal is much different
than a discovery.”
“I know. So, how about I head to the Kleinert duchy now.”
Saying so, I change into the appearance of Silver which I am already accustomed to and ask Sebas to
take care of the things here while preparing transfer magic.
29
It is an abandoned magic from ancient civilization. The thing that is being called ancient magics are
magics that are harder to handle and has a lot more characteristics than present-day magic. However,
its effect is also immense.
My transfer magic can reach almost the entirety of the empire. So for me, the empire is like my
backyard. I can go where I want, whenever I want. In exchange, it requires a tremendous amount of
magic power from the user but I have no choice but to close my eyes to such a downside.
When I was preparing for that great magic, Sebas gave me a piece of advice.
“Speaking of which, the daughter of Duke Kleinert is that [BLAUE MÖWE] (TLN: the word means blue
seagull in german). The peerless beauty. Please be careful not to let yourselves be distracted by her
beauty and forget your objective.”
“Sebas. I’ve always thought about this but you really can’t calm down if you don’t scold me huh?”
“That is my duty after all.”
“Haa…..I will leave the rest to you.”
“As you wish.”
After I completed the transfer magic, I immediately transfer from the imperial capital to the Kleinert
duchy which normally at least takes five days to arrive.
——————–
The Kleinert duchy is a vast territory located on the west side of the empire. I transferred to the
[Capital] of the duchy at the central part of the territory where its lord lived and immediately visited
the Duke’s mansion.
However.
“I am the SS rank adventurer, Silver. I would like to request an audience with the Duke.”
“You? Silver? Don’t joke around. If a big shot like that would come to visit us then the Adventurer
Guild would contact us several days beforehand. Drop your charade and go back already.”
That was what the young blond-haired gatekeeper told me.
The thought of whole roasting him came up to my mind for a moment but that would defeat the
purpose of my visit.
Suppressing my irritation, I take out the adventurer card that can serve to identify my identity.
What written in there are the adventurer’s name, rank and other information. These cards were
created using the secret technique of the guild so it is impossible to make a counterfeit one.
If I show him this.
30
“You don’t have to show me your card. Just go back already! I’m busy right now!”
“Wha!?”
Without even looking at the card, the gatekeeper turns me away.
His attitude made my cheeks cramped up but this also serves as a good opportunity.
Originally I planned to save them and have them be indebted to us but if it turns out like this then
there is a way that can make them even more indebted to us.
“Even when I came all the way here because of Prince Leonard’s special request…..It seems that the
prince is too good for you. Tell this to the Duke—you have desecrated both mine and the prince’s
dignity.”
“Why would I do that! Just go away already!”
The gatekeeper remained arrogant from the beginning to the end. The Duke of Kleinert is certainly
prestigious but they don’t have that long of a history when compared to other aristocrats.
To think that such a rude person was protecting their prestigious mansion. Though, It might be
because of the monster crisis that they are lacking manpower.
Well, it is mostly the fault of this guy but the fault of a vassal is also the fault of his Lord. I felt sorry for
the Duke but I will have him panic a little.
When the calculating smile appeared behind my mask, I spotted a girl staring at me from the second-
floor window of the mansion.
The golden-haired and blue-eyed girl look so beautiful even from a distance. I recalled that figure.
Two years ago, the emperor ordered the craftsmen of our country to make hair ornaments in the
shape of a bird. Then, a splendid blue hair ornament that was made into the shape of a seagull caught
the eye of the emperor.
The emperor who took a liking to it said that only the most beautiful woman in the empire is suitable
to such an ornament and gathered all the beauty from all over the empire at the imperial capital.
Although she was only fourteen years old at that time, the daughter of Duke Kleinert, Finne von
Kleinert was chosen as the finest beauty.
She was given the blue seagull ornament and was called the [BLAU MÖWE] and became the target of
admiration from the men throughout the empire.
After two years, her beauty has increased much more than I thought.
But.
“She is certainly beautiful but she wasn’t as alluring as Sebas said.”
31
Remembering Sebas’s words, I regrettably left the duchy and return to the imperial capital.
“……That was fast.”
“I already did what I can! We are going to Kleinert duchy. Get ready.”
“….Didn’t you just came back?”
“That was Silver. The one who will be going next is Prince Arnold. Fu, The Duke can only come crying
to Leo now. It is certain now that the Duke will become our ally.”
“You are making an evil smile you know?”
I ignore Sebas and prepare for my journey.
Seeing me hum while preparing my luggage, Sebas gave up with a sigh and started doing his own
preparation.
Then we rode there on horses and arrived at the Kleinert Duchy five days later.
——————
After we enter the Duchy capital, we immediately head towards the Duke’s mansion, this time Duke
Kleinert personally come out to welcome us. It is only natural. That was why we deliberately let him
know of our visit in advance. However, the reason that the Duke personally came out to receive me
was that I am a member of the imperial family.
The other Dukes wouldn’t come out personally like this.
After all, I am a prince with a bad reputation that doesn’t compete for the throne, a wasteful prince
that only plays around and relegate everything to his brother, the dull prince. I wonder why Duke
Kleinert came out to greet me with such respect and courtesy.
“Your highness. It has been a while.”
“It’s been a while, Duke Kleinert. How long was it?”
“Ever since we celebrated your tenth birthday, your highness.”
A middle-aged man with a well-arranged blond hair and mustache.
Duke Elmer von Kleinert.
He is the Lord who ruled his territory for decades ever since he succeeded the previous Duke at a
young age, his gentle personality was well-received among his people and other aristocrats and is one
of the Dukes that the current emperor trusted in.
“That long huh. I rarely get out of the capital after all. It seems like I have become estranged from the
feudal lords. Do forgive me.”
32
“There is not such a thing. It is my fault that I can’t leave my territory and show my face at the capital.”
We enter the mansion while having such a formal conversation.
A lot of servants follow us but only the Duke, I and Sebas enter the guest room.
“Now then, Duke. I don’t have much time so I will get right to the business.”
“Yes, Your Highness. What is your purpose for visiting us this time?”
“You are quite evil to ask for our business as well. Of course, we are here to discuss our
compensation.”
“Compensation?”
“My brother doesn’t wish for anything in return but since he is getting involved in the succession war,
we can’t afford to do that right now. That’s why I came here to remind you. Duke Kleinert, if you felt
any gratitude to Leo at all I want you to support him.”
“Pl, Please wait a moment. What should I be grateful for?”
“……Duke. Are you going to pretend that you don’t know?”
Duke Kleinert who doesn’t understand the situation made a confused expression.
There’s no way that our conversation would progress. Between us who sent out Silver to help him and
the Duke that doesn’t even know about Silver’s visit. I know that well. I know that but if we start out
on the same page then the situation would get lighter.
“You are the Duke that earned the trust of the emperor and your people. Leo knew that and go out of
his way to help you in good faith but what would he think if he knows that you would repay him like
this?”
“Your Highness Arnold. I really don’t know what you are talking about. My apologies but I am not
aware of anything that His Highness Leonard done for our Duchy.”
“What?”
I stepped one foot out as if to say that I can’t stand it anymore.
Sebas who was waiting for that moment stopped me in a timely manner.
“Your Highness. It seems like the Duke really doesn’t know.”
“Is that something that can be concluded by saying that he doesn’t know? Leo deliberately moved an
SS rank adventurer for him you know!? Moreover, he did that when he was in a tight spot because of
the succession war you know!? That was why Silver moved for his in the first place!?”
“S, Silver. You mean that Silver?”
33
“Yeah, that’s right! Leo heard that you were troubled by the monsters in your territory and wrote a
letter to ask Silver to assist you. Silver responded that he would deal with it soon. He is a user of
ancient magic, I heard that he could use the lost transfer magic too so there’s no way that he hasn’t
arrived yet!”
“Is, is that true!?”
“Are you going to say that I am lying!?”
As I continue acting furiously, I look at Sebas.
Sebas noticed my gaze and throw the Duke a lifeboat.
“Your highness, you must not get so angry. Judging from his appearance, it seems like the Duke really
wasn’t lying. He might really not know what happened. Isn’t it better to give the Duke sometime to
investigate this matter?”
“Investigation? Even if the results come out, there’s nothing more to learn here, right?”
“At that time, we can ask Silver directly. If his highness Leonard calls for him, Silver should also show
himself.”
“Hmph! If Sebas said that much then I will give you some time. However, you know what will happen
if you hide anything from us right? We will directly get the details from Silver anyway. If we find out
that the fault lies on your side, we will make sure that no adventurer ever comes to your territory
again.”
“…..I understand. We will collect the information from those inside our house as soon as possible.
Please wait here for a while.”
Duke Kleinert hurriedly went out of the room.
If they are the words that come from someone who isn’t directly competing for the throne like me the
duke wouldn’t get so worked up like that. The problem this time was because Silver is involved.
There are only five SS rank adventurers in this continent. They are the greatest talent for monster
extermination. They are not people who would move because of money, it is no exaggeration to say
that they are the highest peak of adventurers. If you smear mud on Silver’s face, the other adventurers
would never visit such a place. If even the likes of Silver got treated badly, there’s no way that the
other adventurers would be treated well.
“That went well.”
“That is quite an evil plan. Isn’t that almost a self-playing charade?”
“You are quite cruel to put it as a charade. It was this family that chased away Silver. I just widened the
wound, I am not the one who inflicted it.”
34
“If you got chased away then you can just sneak back in. You saw the opportunity and act accordingly,
no? Moreover, you emphasized the greatness of his highness Leonard by acting out haughtily. I will
praise you for being such a great strategist.”
“That’s my role. Leo is too nice. If you compared him to water, he is too clean that no fish would ever
survive. He needs someone to pollute the water for him.”
“If you have decided that role for yourselves then I will not stop you, but you will be the only one who
loses you know?”
“That’s fine. What necessary to us right now is Leo’s reputation. I don’t care no matter how much of
my reputation will fall.”
“I do care. That also applied to your esteemed mother and His Highness Leonard as well.”
“If there are three people that care about me then that is plenty enough.”
When we had such a conversation, I heard the Duke’s yelling outside.
“YOU IDIOT SON!! ARE YOU INTENDING TO DESTROY OUR HOUSE!?”
It seems like the Duke has finished gathering his information.
Now now, I wonder how this will turn out.
—————-
TLN: You know, translating this new series remind me of when I just started out with MGE. Back then
I was like [ Wow, I got 3k views a day]. But today [Wow, not even 20k……].
With that said, it has only been a few month though lol
35
Double Roles
“OUR DEEPEST APOLOGIES!”
Duke Kleinert said so and bow his head. On his side, the blond young gatekeeper is also bowing.
However, it seems like the duke forcefully brought him here, he looked dissatisfied as he still doesn’t
fully understand the situation.
To be able to look like that in this situation, he has quite a nerve.
“Duke. We don’t care about your apologies, tell us what happened.”
“Y, yes……apparently, Silver visited us five days ago but this idiot son of mine turned him away
without properly confirming his identity…….”
“You turned him away……?”
“But father! It’s weird that an SS rank adventurer would suddenly show up at our door right?
Normally you would think that he is a fake isn’t it?”
“SHUT UP! You idiot! Because you couldn’t do much I left you to guard the mansion gate while I was
out subjugating monsters! To think that you couldn’t even that!”
“B, but father said so right…..? To turn away all the men that came to see Finne…….”
“I never told you to turn away an SS rank adventurer! It would be fine if you just confirm Silver’s
adventurer card right!? Why couldn’t you do that!?”
“Th, That is……..”
The son’s eyes start swimming. That’s the eyes of someone who is considering to lie his way out.
You can immediately tell when an idiot going to lie. Even if he lied that Silver didn’t show his
adventurer card here, we would immediately find out when we directly ask Silver. If it comes to this
then the best course of action is to properly apologize and bow your head to keep damage to the
minimum.
“Duke. You can leave preaching your son for later. I am sorry that I have to say this but you are also
bear his fault.”
“Y, yes, I understand! Can we settle this with a formal written apology for Prince Arnold and Prince
Leonard…….”
“Written apology? A written apology for chasing away the SS rank adventurer that a prince dispatched
for you!? Let’s hear it! How are you going to apologize? You have thrown mud on Silver’s face, he
might not cooperate with us anymore! How are you going to make up for that!?”
“That is…..Please forgive us with this old man’s head!”
36
“You bastard, I don’t want your head! I don’t want the head of your incompetent son who chased away
the SS rank adventurer either!”
Duke Kleinert despaired at my words, his son, on the other hand, exhaled in relief. To think that such
an excellent parent can have a son like this.
As long as his life couldn’t make up for it, Duke Kleinert has to offer us something else that can
compensate us.
And that thing has to be something important to the Duke family and something that is valuable for
me and Leo.
In other words.
“—–Then I will offer myself. That’s why, please forgive my father and brother, You Highness.”
Finne who is dressed in blue entered the room.
Looking up close, I can’t suppress the admiration I have for her beauty. Even when I am in this kind of
situation, I can’t take my eyes off Finne.
37
Her long blonde hair is swaying lightly and shines by reflecting the light. Her blue eyes looked so deep
as the ocean which gives off the light that can wrap you whole with her magnanimity. Although her
body is small, I can feel the glamour from the top of her dress.
Her expression is a little tense but it is not to the extent that it would take away her beauty. To be
honest, since she said that she wants to come with us herself I want to welcome her with open arms.
No matter who you are, if you are a man then you would want to do the same, I almost gave her a
reply on instinct. However, this is not the place that I can just follow such an instinct.
Finne showing up here was outside of my expectations. I planned to corner the Duke a bit more and
get him to join the succession war to support us.
“—-! Finne!? Please forgive us! You Highness! My daughter is still a child!”
38
The figure of the Duke desperately prostrating himself transmitted the love for his daughter to me. He
offered me his head first instead of his son’s who made the mistake and prostrate himself to save his
daughter, he must be a good father.
“Please spare my father and brother! I also saw Silver-sama’s figure when he visited us! If that is a sin
then I also bare it!”
“M, my sister did nothing wrong! It is all my fault! Please forgive me!”
The son also prostrates himself this time.
This is that right? That one scenario that I am totally the bad guy.
I never thought that it would turn out like this. And here I thought that I should continue the
psychological battle with the duke a little further.
I look at Sebas for help. He let out a sigh and opened his mouth.
“Your Highness. Everyone from the Duke family is willing to do this much already. Isn’t it better to
calm your anger as well?”
“You want me to forgive them? They have humiliated both of us you know!? If we just forgive this one
case then where can we show our dignity anymore!”
“It is fine as long as this matter is being kept confidential. Let’s make this case never happened.”
“Then what about Silver!?”
“He is a man with a great sense of responsibility. He wouldn’t give up after only being turned away
once and he might be still nearby as well. Let’s deploy someone to look for him. If we apologize in
good faith, he should be able to understand our circumstances as well.”
“So, if Silver can resolve the problem in this territory, you are telling me that the fact which Duke
Kleinert has soiled our dignity would also disappear?”
I think we can finally settle this with a good feeling.
After that, if Sebas points out my arbitrary judgment then I can withdraw as well.
Well, I would look like a man who borrowed the power from his brother to the Duke family though.
But that is exactly what I want.
The one who is competing for the throne here is only Leo, not me.
“It will be fine as I will consult with His Highness Leonard about this at a later date.”
“It’s no use consulting with him! He would forgive anything anyway right!?”
39
“Because His Highness is like that that people are gathering around him. Moreover, Your Highness
Arnold. You are certainly the elder brother of Prince Leonard but the place that people are attracted to
is still Prince Leonard’s. Even if you are His Highness’s elder brother if you further worsen the
relationship between His Highness and the Duke without telling him you would worsen your position
as well.”
“Tsk…Got it. It is as you said. Duke, deploy some of your men to look for Silver. If you found him then I
will talk to him for you. Sebas, you go and help too.”
I put everything together while acting reluctantly.
The rest is to act as Silver and help this territory solve its crisis. If I do that then Duke Kleinert will
become Leo’s ally.
You could say that this is the very first step into the battle for the throne.
With that in mind, I start planning how I should act out my double roles.
———————-
“So you are still remaining in the duchy. This is unexpected.”
“I thought that you would dispatch someone to find me sooner or later. I am more surprised that the
Dull Prince came out here himself though.”
Silver is staying at an ordinary inn. To be precise, it was made to be seen that way.
I used ancient magic on the innkeeper to make him think that there was a weird customer who has
been staying in the inn since five days ago and arranged that Sebas would find this place then I would
meet with Silver myself.
“Then? Who is that lady?”
“A pleasure to meet you for the first time, Silver-sama. I am called Finne von Kleinert.”
“This is not our first meeting. Our eyes met five days ago.”
Hearing what I said, Finne slightly faltered.
As she is still only sixteen years old, talking with an SS rank adventurer is no easy matter. Even more
so when you are trying to make him forgive you for the thing rudeness you committed.
Duke Kleinert has to deal with the monster in the territory so he can’t come himself. That’s why I told
him that it’s fine to leave the talk with Silver to me alone. However, Finne said that a representative of
the Duke family should be present as well.
Thanks to that, I have to create Silver with illusion magic and play double roles in front of Finne. The
reason why I chose to create the illusion of Silver is even if she noticed that Silver in front of her is an
illusion, I can give an excuse that he is being on guard against us. On the contrary, if I chose to make an
40
illusion of myself as the prince then I will have to create one with super-advanced illusion magic that
can reproduce not just my appearance but my voice as well.
By the way, it is impossible that the truth would be found out by Silver’s voice. The silver mask Silver
is wearing is an extremely powerful magic tool. It can be used to change my voice at will, it can also
manipulate Silver’s perceived characteristic and the impression he leaves behind. Even if we are
together at the same place, there’s absolutely no way that people would think that we are the same
person.
“….Our house has been rude towards you…I am sincerely sorry for our rudeness…..”
“Enough with the apologies. My evaluation of your house is already driven down to the ground. I
heard that your house was a wise one that took good care of its people but it seems like that is just a
reputation after all.”
“That is……”
“It is normal for adventurers to visit the land that monsters are running rampant. If your house really
thought about your people then you would have prepared yourselves to receive any kind of
adventurer that comes your way. The fact that your elder brother turned me away was enough as a
proof that the Duke never did such preparation at all.”
This is an important point.
This is not just a matter of his son’s negligence but the responsibility of the entire Ducal House. As
such, it wouldn’t be enough even if the Duke passes judgment on his son. Well, if it is that Duke then
he would never do such a thing.
“That is true……it was an oversight from our Kleinert house……”
Looking at the depressed Finne, this should be about the right time for me to start negotiating with
Silver.
If I show them that I can somehow able to persuade Silver then my goal would be achieved.
The reason I didn’t bring Sebas with me to this room was that I don’t know what he would say to me if
he saw such a third-rate play like this. Anyway, now I will have to persuade myself.
“Silver. Do you still willing to continue with our request?”
“If I don’t, then I would not be here. However, there is one thing that I have to confirm before that.”
“What is it?”
“Did you managed to recruit the Duke as your ally? Dull Prince.”
“…..They haven’t given me their word yet.”
“As expected of the Dull Prince. You are a far cry from your little brother.”
41
Silver exaggeratedly sigh.
It feels weird that I have to speak ill of myself but if Silver himself is the one who said so then we will
almost certainly gain the Duke’s cooperation.
“I will definitely get them to give us their full cooperation. Rest assured.”
“You will get their full cooperation huh. If you can do that then I will fulfill your request. I have my
reason to make your little brother into the emperor no matter what. The reason I went out of my way
to leave the imperial capital and come to this place was to recruit the Duke as an ally for Leonard after
all. If he is like what the rumor says he is then he will surely be grateful for the help and support
Leonard. However, it seems like everything is not as the rumor says. If you don’t have him write a
written oath then he might betray you in the future you know?”
“My father will never do something like that!”
“Your words are useless against me. Miss Finne. You have already lost my trust.”
Silver told her indifferently.
There is a reason that I said it like that.
I want to convince her that Silver is not eager to do this. This will surely get to the Duke’s ear
through’s Finne’s words. Naturally, I am talking about Silver’s goal as well.
If we have already come this far then the Duke will surely come to Leo’s side. This might be a
roundabout method but the cooperation of Duke Kleinert is that important for us in the battle for the
throne.
“Silver. You are saying that you have no plan to help him unless he promised us his full cooperation
right?”
“Of course.”
“……I want you to compromise there and help him subjugate the monsters. I will definitely make sure
to get his cooperation myself.”
“……You are asking me to put my trust in the Dull Prince? Do you know that you are making me an
unreasonable request?”
“Of course. But still, I will ask. Please understand.”
I said so and lower my head.
I can bow down to anyone because I have no pride whatsoever. Moreover, there’s nothing to lose for
bowing down to an illusion I created anyway.
“To think that you would immediately lower your head, it seems like you don’t have any pride as an
imperial family huh.”
42
“If Leo is here he would do the same…… I know that you can’t trust me. But even looking like this I am
still Leo’s elder brother. At least I will show you that I can do my job. That’s why I want you to deal
with those monsters. I don’t want this issue to last longer than this.”
“…..Fine. As an adventurer, I can’t let the monsters keep rampaging like this. I will accept your request.
However, Miss Finne. I am expecting a lot from the Duke. Don’t forget about the matter of our
cooperation.”
“Th, thank you very much! I will make sure that we meet your expectations!”
Thus we finished persuading Silver and let the inn.
We entered the carriage that Sebas prepared outside and took a deep breath.
Seeing me like that, Finne apologetically lowers her head.
“Thank you very much…….”
“…..? what are you thanking me for?”
“Your Highness lowered your head for us……Even though the fault lies on our side, you were able to
persuade Silver to help our people. My gratitude is a matter of course.”
It seems like there’s some big misunderstanding here huh.
Is this child the same type as Leo that sees everyone as a good person?
I have to correct her. If she misunderstands that I am a good person then it would be difficult for me to
move from now on.
“I lowered my head for myself. It is not for the reason you think. You are just misunderstanding.”
“Is that so….. Then I will keep misunderstanding you on my own. I have…slightly misunderstood you,
Your Highness. I thought that Your Highness was a scary person but that is not actually the case.”
“No, like I said…..”
“Yes. It is my misunderstanding. Your highness lowered your head for your own sake, right? Not for
our people, Not for us. But……will you allow me to keep misunderstanding so?”
Saying so, Finne shows a soft smile.
That smile is much more beautiful than the smile that captivated the people of the capital when the
emperor bestowed her the blue seagull hair ornament.
Should I say that I am moved? Her smile moved me like the time my mother brought me to see the
meteor show that only occurs once every decade. The shooting stars that fill up the clear night sky,
43
that scene was simply beautiful. The happiness of being able to witness them. That is the feeling I had
when I saw Finne’s smile.
Unexpectedly admiring her smile, I turn my gaze outside to hide my red face.
Thanks to that, I lost my chance to correct her misunderstanding.
I ended up thinking that being misunderstood as a good person by Finne might not be a bad thing.
In the end, I couldn’t correct her misunderstanding.
44
SS Rank Adventurer
TLN: You sir, just found yourselves an extra chapter. Consider this as your lucky day and give
yourselves a cookie.
Edit* That message was for the people who found it yesterday lol.
“Good grief, what a terrible situation.”
Donning the appearance of Silver, I look at the monster nest in question with Sebas from a distance.
The rank of the monster that appeared in the territory of Duke Kleinert is AA.
It is the fourth highest rank from the top of the system that ranks monsters into ranks of F to SS. They
are monsters that would require a party of five A rank adventurers to deal with. They are a little too
much for the adventurer guild inside the empire.
In fact, Duke Kleinert already issued a request to the guild and they dispatched a six-man party of four
B ranks and two A ranks adventurers. However, they couldn’t complete the request.
“It couldn’t be helped since they have to deal with the Mother Slimes huh.”
At a mountain a little away from the duchy’s capital.
There were countless slimes there. A single slime is a trash monster but it tends to gather together.
These guys travel around and devour crops in the territory so the Duke has to dispatch the knights to
chase them away.
If you asked me the reason why the slimes have gathered this much then the answer would be the
presence of a rare monster called Mother Slime that is lurking in the mountain.
As the name suggests, Mother Slime is the parent of those slimes, it is a monster that has the ability to
reproduce children. It absorbs everything, changes them into nutrition and continues to produce more
slimes. It is a troublesome monster that can even destroy a country.
Its countermeasure is to seek out the Mother Slime’s nest before it can start breeding and subjugate it.
However, by the time the Duke issues the request to the adventurer guild, it was already too late.
According to the record, the amount of slimes that was produced by Mother Slime is already reached
the number of an army.
“For now we have to get rid of the Mother Slime or there will be no end to it.”
“It is as you said but how do you plan to explain to the adventurers who have already accepted the
request?”
45
“That’s the problem.”
Adventurers are basically outlaws.
Unlike the noble society, there is no need for you to yield to others even when the other party has a
higher standing. They are fully committed to the request they received for themselves to protect the
trust that was placed in them.
Such adventurers will not forgive even an SS rank adventurer if he interferes with their quest. It
would be a different matter if there is an official letter from the guild but right now I am completely
interfering with their quest.
“That is the part I like about adventurers but right now that is exactly the root of our problem.”
“Depending on their attitude this might take some time.”
“Honestly, we don’t have time for that. I can only ask for the local adventurers’ understanding. You
head back first. I will do something about this myself.”
“May the fortune of war be with you.”
I part ways with Sebas and head down to the adventurers that are camping near the mountain.
After all, if I take Sebas with me they might get suspicious and they might be able to connect the dots
to my real identity.
“My my. Everyone, seems like SS rank adventurer-sama came out of his way here to meet us.”
Hearing the words of the red-haired young man who acts as a lookout, the adventurers come out of
their tent.
Five men and one woman.
Their eyes look stern.
“I’m Abel, the leader of this party. The rank is A. I must look like a small fry from your perspective
though?”
“I am SS rank adventurer, Silver.”
I hold the hand that Abel offered.
I lightly hold on to his hand but Abel strongly grabbed my hand as if he is trying to break it off..
As expected, he is pissed with me.
“I heard from the Duke that you came as reinforcements but if I just say [Yes, I understand] I wouldn’t
be an adventurer anymore. You know that right?”
46
“Yeah, I know.”
“Interfering with other adventurer’s quest is a violation of our manner. You also know that right?”
“Yeah, of course.”
When I lower my hand, I turn to the other five adventurers.
Looking at the way they are standing, the other A rank seems to be the woman.
She has her brown hair made into a short ponytail, her face is being hidden by the hat but I think that
she is definitely a woman.
Her clothes are completely that of a boy, I think people who mistook her for a man were not few.
She is probably acting as a support for Abel’s party since she remains silent it means that she has no
intention to interrupt Abel.
If that is the case then I have to convince Abel somehow.
“Of course you say? If you understand that then why are you trying to interfere with our business!?
You even used your noble connection! An adventurer like you shouldn’t have any problem getting
your own quest right!?”
“What you want to say is reasonable. I also understand your dissatisfaction. So if you want to shout at
me or beat me up, I will not complain.”
“What?”
“But…… I want to ask you as an adventurer to another adventurer. Can you manage this situation?”
“……..”
Abel doesn’t answer.
The same applies to the other adventurers. It is easier to say that they can. However, to an adventurer,
the trust itself is their life. They can’t afford to say that they can do it when the request at hand is the
one that couldn’t be easily resolved.
These six adventurers here are the highest level adventurers in this region. Perhaps they did not
accept this quest on their own but were persuaded by the guild staff themselves.
However, what they found was a much worse situation than they first heard about. Mother Slime is a
monster that varies in strength. If it continues to take in nourishment inside its nest then it will keep
becoming stronger. Then it will keep birthing more slimes. Each time it births more slimes, it will be
weakened. However, each child slimes will bring more and more nutrients back to its mother and
eventually the Mother Slime will become unstoppable.
47
If the situation keeps worsening like this, the whole region will be threatened if the Mother Slime is
not cleaned up quickly.
“—–The Mother Slime was much bigger than we had heard. We tried challenging it several times but
we can’t inflict a fatal wound to it and have to withdraw. We clearly don’t have enough firepower.”
The female adventurer who didn’t say anything until now opens her mouth.
Hearing her words, Abel clicked his tongue. It seems like Abel also understood that as well.
“If you absolutely don’t want me to interfere with your quest then I will not. However, for the safety of
this area, I will directly report the current situation to the guild headquarter and have them issue an
emergency quest. I will accept that quest and come here again. However, that will surely take a few
days. If you can subjugate it in that time frame, then I will not stop you. However…..in the next few
days, this area will surely be in great danger.”
“….I know that. An adventurer at your level wouldn’t come all the way out here because of money……”
“You can receive all the rewards. But please leave the subjugation of Mother Slime to me. As an
adventurer, I can’t let such a threat intensifying more than this.”
“….Okay. We admit that we don’t have enough power to do this…. You do as you please.”
Abel hangs down his head and sits on the spot.
Adventurers are people who built themselves up with their own strength. There is no greater disgrace
for adventurers than being unable to complete the quest they received.
There are even adventurers out there that would never give up and recklessly continue with their
quest and end up dying. In that sense, Abel is a smart adventurer who can take the hints from his
surroundings.
“Sorry, everyone……”
Abel apologized to all of his party members. If he was alone then he might recklessly push on but he
properly thought about his party members. He is a good leader.
“It is thanks to your attacks on the Mother Slime that the situation only progressed this much. If you
guys were not here then this area would be overrun with slimes already. Originally this is a quest that
required a party consisted of A-rank adventurers or higher. You have done well. The guild must be
grateful for your work as well.”
“Ha…to think that there would be a day an SS-rank adventurer would give me praise.”
“Lay down the sarcasm. I am really grateful to you, I will consider that I am in your debt. If something
happened, reach out to the imperial capital branch. I will help you.”
Saying so, I reach out my hand toward the mountain.
48
I ignore the six adventurers’ doubtful gazes and started chanting.
[[I am an agent of the divine・ I act on behalf of heaven and earth・The time of judgment has come・
Tremble Sinner-Delight Innocent・My word is the word of God・My blow is the blow of God・In my
hand is the flame that can torch the world ・Oh Flame of Heaven reduce the Sinner to Ashes—–
EXECUTION PROMINENCE]]
Eight verse long chanting. A stupidly huge magic circle deployed from my outstretched hand.
The magic that has been passed down to the present day don’t have a magic that requires a chant this
long. The longest is only seven verses long. To use a magic that requires eight verses chanting would
mean that magic is not of the present day magics.
A magic that was invented in the time that magic once flourished. That is ancient magic.
Because it can only be performed by those with talent, as a result, it was forgotten and disappeared
into the legend.
The only way to revive them is to read from the precious tomes that were left behind. That is why
there are only a few practitioners of ancient magic on the continent.
Of course, there are only a few of them that people are aware of.
So in a sense, you can say that these six people have experienced something truly valuable.
A huge amount of magic power rise from the giant magic circle. Then six small magic circles appeared
around the original magic circle.
The small magic circles spin around the giant magic circle.
Then as the magic power has risen to the point that it would collapse.
A flash of bright flame was released from the magic circle.
It burns down the mountain in a blink of an eye along with the Slimes that made that mountain into its
nest. Not only that, the mountain itself was completely burned out.
The only thing left behind is the darkened land.
“With this, the slime’s number will not increase anymore.”
“Seriously…..”
“….This is the ancient magic of an SS rank adventurer…..?”
Abel and the female adventurer whisper.
The others remain silent, trying to understand what just happened in front of them.
49
A magic that can blow away a mountain. That is something that is already close to a legend.
It is normal that you can’t wrap your head around it when it suddenly happened in front of you.
“Can I leave reporting to the guild to you?”
“….You should go yourself. We didn’t do anything. You are the hero that saved the duchy you know?”
“Sorry but I am not interested. I have other businesses as well. I will leave the rest to you.”
I said so and left the place using transfer magic.
The destination is a room inside the mansion of Duke Kleinert. It is the room that was assigned to me.
Prince Arnold is supposed to remain in the Duchy. He would receive Silver’s report about how he
subjugated the Mother Slime alongside the Duke and finish the talk regarding his cooperation. After
that, my job would be over.
Until then I can’t let my guard down.
Thinking so I remove my silver mask.
“Eh…….?”
It was only after I heard the voice that I realized how fatally careless I was.
A situation that one never expected just occurred.
It was such a tone of voice.
Hearing the familiar voice, the first thing I felt was regret.
I thought that no one was in the room. It is the room that was assigned to a prince so I thought that no
one would ever enter it unless they received permission.
I turned around to look. When I look at the face I saw, the regret well up inside me again.
“…….Finne.”
“……Prince Arnold…….?”
Standing there is the peerless beauty and the daughter of the Duke.
A girl that I couldn’t seal her lips so easily, Finne is there.
50
Sharer of Secret
TLN: What’s this? Another spooky extra chappapano!?
There is a tray of sweets in Finne’s Hand. She was probably going to bring me some refreshments and
entered the room when I didn’t answer her call.
I told them that I don’t need any food so I thought that no one would come into my room. To think that
there is such a miscalculation.
“P, Prince Arnold.….? The person that transferred in just now was, and that appearance……..Isn’t that
Silver-sama’s……..?”
“…………”
Can I trick her if I say that it is my hobby to dress up like this? No, that’s probably impossible.
Then should I kill her? That’s impossible too. Finne is a favorite of the emperor. If something were to
happen to her then the emperor will personally investigate it and the prime suspect would definitely
be me. If I became such a suspect then Leo’s part in the succession war will be over.
I can’t trick her and I can’t seal her lips either.
I don’t see the way out of this situation.
“……..Why did you enter my room?”
“Ah, umm…..I baked some sweet so I thought that I should bring some to Your Highness…..and since
Your Highness didn’t answer the door, I thought that something happened so……….”
“Haa…..”
Seeing Finne’s sorry expression while her body getting smaller and smaller made my hostility
dissipated as well.
My willingness to take hard measures against her also disappeared.
However, I can’t leave her like this.
“You know my secret. As long as that is the case, I can’t afford to let you go without doing anything.”
“I, I will not tell anyone! That the true identity of Silver is a prince.”
“You are saying it in such a loud voice though.”
“Ah….”
51
“Calm down. I already erected a soundproof barrier. No matter what you say, it will never leak
outside.”
“Is, Is that so…….Thank you very much……”
Finne’s cheeks blushed embarrassingly.
It seems like she doesn’t realize how bad the situation she is in. If the outside can’t hear anything from
this room, that means no matter what I do to Finne right now she can’t call for help……
“Don’t you think that I will do something to you?”
“Like what?”
“I might kill you to keep your mouth shut for example.”
“Your Highness is? That is not possible. But if that is the thing that Your Highness must do then I will
accept it.”
“……I don’t remember being trusted that much though?”
“If you are Silver then you must have already defeated the monsters right? Then you are the hero who
saved our Duchy. And the fact that you came here as a prince and performed various elaborate
performances is also for your little brother’s sake, right? That is why I trust you. A person who can
move for someone else’s sake like you must be a kind person.”
Saying so, Finne shows a smile filled with kindness.
She is really a good person since she is willing to believe that much in others.
As she knows that I am Silver, she must also know that every step I took was to cause the downfall of
the Duke and to have him support us using the debt of gratitude. Even so, Finne still believes in me.
That trust can not be betrayed.
“The only one who knows my secret is Sebas. And Sebas will never betray me. If the secret leaks out, I
will never forgive you. So never tell anyone about this.”
“Yes! I understand.”
Hearing her cheerful reply, I sigh.
I thought about using illusion magic to make her think that everything is a dream but surely it will
eventually get exposed.
And after it was exposed, it will become a fatal opening against us. Then it is better to have Finne
believe in me like this.
52
From our exchanges, I can mostly understand Finne’s personality. If the secret is leaked, it will only be
to the people that are close to her. It will not be too late even if I leave the hard measures for that time.
“To think that the secret I have been guarding for such a long time would be exposed like this……..”
“Please cheer up. you can have some sweets. Ah, I will pour you some tea as well.”
While looking at Finne who is happily arranging her sweets on the table and started preparing the tea,
I retort in my mind.
It’s your fault alright…….
——————
“That concluded the report for this incident.”
Abel who just returned to the Duchy capital kneeled in front of the Duke and gave his report.
Hearing everything, the Duke nodded along a few times and conveys his thanks to Abel.
“Truly well done. I am sorry that it turned into such a harsh request. This is separate from the quest
reward but I want you to have it.”
Saying so he puts pouches in front of Abel.
There is some money inside.
However, Abel shook his head and refused.
“The reward from the quest will be enough for us sir. It is as my statement in the earlier report, Silver
was the one who led us to resolve the situation. Please forgive us.”
“I see …Umu, understood. If something happens I will ask for you again. I will leave it to you at that
time.”
“Yessir. We will definitely answer your expectations and fulfill your quest with our own hands”
Abel leaves after saying so.
The only ones left inside are me and the Duke.
“With this, we are at the conclusion.”
“Yes. I couldn’t have enough gratitude for you Your Highness. Thank you very much.”
“Direct that gratitude to Leo. Both me and Silver are here for Leo’s sake after all.”
“Yes…..Your Highness, the Ducal House of Kleinert will give our full cooperation and backing to Prince
Leonard. We will definitely repay your kindness.”
53
I can finally exhale in relief after hearing his word. I offer my right hand to the Duke. Seeing that, the
Duke take my hand.
“We will be in your care.”
“We will put His Highness Leonard on the throne without fail.”
“Yeah.”
With this, Leo will be able to establish himself as the fourth faction in the current three-ways
succession war.
With the prestigious Duke of Kleinert on our side, those that are waiting to see which direction the
wind will blow will also come to Leo’s side.
Our father will also recognize Leo as one of his successor candidates, we are finally standing on the
start line.
I still can’t let my guard down but I still am in a good mood after a job well done.
However, the Duke started talking to me looking slightly uneasy.
“Your Highness……do you have enough manpower on your side?”
“Manpower huh…..I want to say that we have but it completely isn’t enough. There are still nobles that
decided to stay neutral as well. To start a negotiation with those nobles we would need more
individuals that we can trust in.”
“I see. I am relieved.”
“Are you going to lend someone to us?”
“Yes, I am thinking about having my daughter accompany you.”
“Wh—at?”
I replied without thinking.
The Duke return my reaction with a bitter smile.
“It is normal that Your Highness will be surprised. I was surprised as well when Finne told me
yesterday. Apparently, she wants to repay the princes who saved our territory no matter
what……Since my daughter never asked for anything before….I am deeply moved that she said such a
thing.”
“No, wait…..I am troubled if you put it like that….”
“Don’t say that my prince. That girl is a really famous person in the imperial capital. His Majesty the
Emperor also took a liking on her as well. She will definitely be useful to you.”
54
“I admit that but…..is that fine with you, Duke?”
There are too many merits to count if we have her on our side. Finne is that useful.
However, the reason that she suddenly wants to go to the capital must be the fact that she discovered
my true identity yesterday. Honestly speaking, if she remains silently inside her territory then that
would better give me peace of mind.
In the imperial capital, she will have the opportunity to contact a lot of people and I will not know for
sure where the information leaks.
So I tried to appeal to the Duke’s doting parent heart but.
“It is what that girl wishes for. Please make use of her somehow.”
“……”
I wanted to appeal to him with his daughter cuteness but it gave him a boost instead. Just how much of
a capable parent are you?
I ran out of the excuse to refuse him.
In the end, I allowed Finne to accompany me
And then.
“Then I will be going. Otou-sama, Onii-sama.”
“Yeah, make sure that you become useful okay?”
“Be careful with your body too.”
Seeing off by her father and brother, Finne gets into the carriage.
She waved to them from the carriage window until their figures disappeared then she stares at me
who is sitting on the opposite side with my eyes shut.
“Prince Arnold. Although I am not a talented person but please take care of me.”
“Haa……”
“Are you, angry…….?”
“I am simply amazed. From now on, we will fight the battle for the throne. It is a dark battle filled with
countless bloodshed. If you want to withdraw then you can only do it now you know?”
55
“I understand that well. Even so, I want to be helpful. Besides, if I am at Your Highness’ side, wouldn’t
it be easier for you to keep an eye on me?”
“No, if you stay inside your territory then it would give me a much better peace of mind.”
“Ehhhhhhh!?”
Looking at Finne waving her hands around in a panic, I sigh again.
Letting this kind of girl expose my secret, will I be okay I wonder…….
56
Imperial Capital Tour
Immediately after we returned to the capital we head to see Leo.
Leo knows that I am making my move but he doesn’t know about my connection with Silver.
Therefore, it is necessary to answer his questions about that first.
“To think that Nii-san has a connection with Silver as well….. I know that you have many
acquaintances but I didn’t know that you know such an important person.”
“He is not my acquaintance. He was the one that contacted me. He told me that as a proof of trust, he is
going to help pull Duke Kleinert to our side. That’s why I created the story that Silver moved because
you asked for his help. Sorry that I have to get your approval after it has already happened.”
After I give Leo the report about what happened in Leo’s room I explained about Silver to him.
If I don’t make it like Silver was the one who took the initiative it would become harder for me to
move in the future.
Eventually, my connection with Silver will be exposed. I have to prepare for that time as well.
“It’s okay. Nii-san also has your own thoughts on the matter as well right?”
“Yeah, I didn’t immediately tell you because I didn’t completely trust Silver. But he accomplished what
he said he would do. I think it is fine to trust him for now. However, it is certain that he is a man with
many mysteries. We don’t know his reason to cooperate with us either. It would be wise not to trust
him completely for now.”
“I see…..I want to meet him too.”
“I will relay that to him but since he went out of his way to reach out to me, I don’t think that man has
any plans to meet you directly right now. I know how to contact him but it still depends on him
whether he would respond or not. Since he won’t follow our order directly, I think he is something like
a Joker that only moves as he pleases so let’s not rely too much on him.”
“Understood. But thanks to him, the Kleinert Duchy was saved and the Duke also gave us his
cooperation right? So I think that he must be a good person.”
“Everyone is a good person with you……..”
Giving up, I sigh.
I feel like I have been sighing like this a lot lately. The reason is needless to say since there is another
person with the same type of personality as Leo.
“By the way, I heard that the Duke sent a person to help us but, who did he send? The Duke can’t come
here personally after all……”
57
“Yeah, that’s right. Sebas, can you call her for me?”
“Yes, sir.”
I ask Sebas who was standing by in the corner of the room to bring Finne who is in the nearby room
here.
“Pleased to make your acquaintance, Your Highness Leonard. I am the eldest daughter of Duke
Kleinert, Finne von Kleinert. Please take care of me.”
Finne gracefully pinches the helm of her skirt and perform a curtsy.
Without being surprised, Leo responds to her in a perfect manner.
“I am the eighth prince, Leonard Lakes Adler. I never thought there would be an opportunity for me to
speak with the Blau Mowe herself. You are much more beautiful up close. It is my honor to finally
meet you.”
“My, what a skilled person. It is my honor to be able to meet Arnold-sama’s little brother. I am relieved
since Your Highness is a gentle person like Arnold-sama said you would be.”
“Nii-san spoke about me? That is intriguing. Can I hear what he said?”
“Yes, I would be happy to. Ah, I will prepare some tea.”
“Thank you.”
It took them less than a minute to have a heart to heart. My brother is so scary. His ability to slip into
other people’s good side is already a talent.
There are a few common topics between the two. Naturally, since they don’t have many points of
contact, they are often rising the topic about me.
I can only make a cramped expression when they are talking about me. Leo must have noticed that
and direct the conversation toward me.
“Speaking of which Nii-san. What kind of cooperation from Finne-san do you have in mind?”
“Basically, I will have her be our negotiator. And later, I will have her frequently travel from her
mansion in the capital to our place. That will show that Duke Kleinert is on our side. That is about it
for now. Ah, I have already talked about Silver with her. You don’t have to worry about that. She
knows that I tricked her family and still cooperate with us.”
“You made it sound like I am a bad person again…….the fact that our house has angered Silver-sama
was the truth, but it is also true that Arnold-sama has mediated between us. Wouldn’t it be fine if we
leave it at that?”
“That’s good. I think so as well. Nii-san’s flaw is that he tends to put himself down too much after all.”
58
“Haa…..”
It is like there are two Leo.
Well, if we are going to gather more ally then it would be good to collect more people like this. My
trouble will increase though.
“This is my style so don’t worry about me. More importantly, Leo, did you gather allies in the capital?”
“Unnnn, it’s hard to say. The influential people inside the capital were already taken by those three
after all.”
I tried to change the topic by asking how Leo is doing on his end but it was as I expected.
Even if they know that Duke Kleinert is backing Leo, the only one who will move is the neutral faction.
In the first place, those who are already taken in by the three rivals cannot move. That should be what
was going on when they don’t know that the Duke supported us.
“Um…I don’t know much about the imperial capital’s circumstances so…..can you tell me about the
three rivals that you were talking about?”
“Haven’t you tell her?”
“She keeps asking unrelated questions on the way here so I don’t have enough power left for the
explanation.”
“I am sorry…..”
“It’s fine, it is normal that he would be troubled. He is basically a person that always deflects a talk like
that after all.”
“He is!?”
“It was because that was too troublesome to deflect though.”
“Aw……”
I took a sidelong glance at the sad-looking Finne and grab three jewels inside the room then arrange
them on the table to make the explanation easy to understand.
“These are our three rivals. The first one is this blue jewel. The second prince, Eric Lakes Adler,
twenty-eight years old. He has most of the cabinet ministers on his side and is known as the intelligent
prince. The second one is this red jewel. The third prince, Gordon Lakes Adler, twenty-six years old.
He heads out to the battlefield as the most powerful asset of our army, he is in the military faction.
And the third one is this green jewel. The second princess, Zandra Lakes Adler, twenty-two years old.
She is excellent in magic and has a lot of support from the magicians throughout the empire. These
59
three are aiming for the throne while expanding their power. There are other members of the imperial
family that are aiming for the throne but you cannot compare them to these three.”
“The civil officials, the military and the magician. They have their own solid support base. The state
that the nobles are taking advantage of this and build up their own power, that is the current
succession war. This began three years ago…..when our eldest brother, the crown prince passed away
on the battlefield.”
“I have heard…..my father used to say that if the wise First Prince is still alive, something like a
succession war would never happen.”
“I couldn’t agree more. If that person is still alive then this annoying stuff would never exist in the first
place.”
On the contrary, it is exactly because that person died that the others got the chance.
I remember the sense of wrongness about that. He was both dignified and brave. His personality was
also excellent like an upgraded version of Leo, would a person like that went and die on the
battlefield?
There was an investigation and the emperor himself was the one who personally investigated the case
so it is proven that it was not plotted by someone but I can’t shake off the feeling that there is some
scheme hidden deep inside all of that.
However, bringing up the dead will not help us.
“That person is no longer here and our three elder siblings are merciless to their enemy. Leo, unless
you take the place of our eldest brother and become the emperor, there will be no path left for us.”
“I know. But, will I be able to do it……”
“Rest assured. I guarantee you can do it.”
Saying so, I slap Leo’s back.
Seeing Leo break into a fit of coughs, I and Finne laughed.
————————-
The streets of the Capital are always busy.
Finne looked at such a street and turn around toward me.
“Arnold-sama. What is that?”
“That is an appraisal store. That place has a certificate so their fees are quite high. And you can just
call me Al.”
“Will that be okay? Using a nickname?”
60
“I will be troubled if people noticed my identity by chance so just call me Al.”
“….Even if I call you with that afterward as well?”
Finne turns to look at me expectantly.
There are only a few people who call me Al. However, if she wants to call me that there is no reason to
stop her.
“Do as you like.”
“Yes! Al-sama!”
What are you looking so happy about?
While I am impressed that such a small thing like this can make her happy, I keep guiding her around
the capital.
On the way, we dine at a local restaurant. After that, I show her the important facilities of the capital.
We don’t have much time so just guiding her around the capital took us quite some time.
When the time comes when I thought that we should head back soon, Finne found an accessory store.
“Ha~a…..don’t take long okay?”
“Yes!”
Since she looked at me like she was pleading to take a look inside, I give her my permission.
Since she doesn’t say anything herself I can’t say that she is willful. However, as one’s eyes can convey
the feeling as much as one’s mouth, the power of the thing she said with her eyes wasn’t half baked at
all.
How many times has it been?
As I am tired I didn’t enter the store. I lean my back on the pillar in front of the store and wait.
However, one of the customers did not let me rest at all.
“My My? If it isn’t the Dull Prince?”
Hearing an unpleasant voice laden with sarcasm, I knit my eyebrows.
Honestly, I have to run into a guy that I don’t want to meet.
The person that appeared is a young man with brown hair made into a bob hairstyle surrounded by
his entourage.
61
His long lanky clothes and his hairstyle senses are simply put, bad. However, it seems like he thinks
that it looks cool so he is brimming with confidence.
His name is Gied von Horsvath. He descended from Horsvath house which is the house that ranked
No.two of the oldest noble houses in the empire. And despite my unwillingness, my childhood friend.
The Horsvath house possesses a territory near the imperial capital. Thus, he has a residence in the
imperial capital and often came to the castle. Since we are the same age, adults around us stuck me
and Leo with him. He often accompanies us in lessons and training, that is the relationship we have.
However, he only put on a good face in front of Leo and bully me behind his back. His entourage is also
his bully comrades from that time. I never retaliate nor have I never tell the adults. Moreover, the
adults that noticed also overlooked him. It must have been quite a sight for them.
Seeing a prince with a much higher status than their own getting bully might give them a sense of
superiority after all.
After we grew up, he often gets involved with me like this.
“Gied…..it’s rare to meet you in a place like this.”
“I spotted a shabby looky face that shouldn’t even be considered a prince when I was riding on my
carriage you see. I thought I had to call out to you as one of the imperial nobles.”
“Well, thanks.”
“What is that attitude?”
Gied pushes my face with the walking stick in his hand and speaks with an irritated expression.
“Do you think that I can’t hit you because we are in public? No one would raise a voice even if I beat
you up you know? Nobody cares about your face anyway.”
“I wonder. Leo has gotten famous recently, people might already come to know my face right?”
It’s not like every citizen can remember the faces of all the imperial family members. Even with my
notoriety, they should only know that I have black hair and black eyes. I appeared in front of the
people in some ceremonies but since they were far away, there’s no way that they can grasp our
accurate appearance.
However, recently Leo has become famous. There’s no doubt that it would become a big problem if he
hit me who has the same face.
“You are not Leonard. People can tell just by looking at you. You always dressed sloppily and your
eyes are always looking downward. It’s the sign of how unconfidence you are. Who would think that
you are a member of the imperial family? Your behavior itself is nothing close to one!”
Saying so, Gied hit my shin with his stick. My face grimaced with a sharp pain but I don’t fall down.
62
I can’t afford to make a scene here. It still looks like someone is being picked on by the noble but if
people recognize my face as a member of the imperial family then it will cause a fuss. If it becomes like
that, then it will be troublesome no matter the result.
Now, what to do?
“What is happening?”
I almost click my tongue.
To think that she would show up now.
Can you please do not mess up the situation?
Finne look at the stick Gied used to hit me with and openly show her anger.
“Insolent!!”
“Nn? Who is that? Your servant?
“I see so you are a rude person.”
Saying so Finne removed her hood.
For a moment, Gied absentmindedly admires her beauty, but once he knows who he is talking to he
jumped in surprise.
“Y, you are…Fii, Miss Finne!?”
“Yes, I am Finne von Kleinert. And you are?”
“I, I am Gied von Horsvath. The eldest son of Duke Horsvath.”
“The son of the venerable Duke Horsvath? That is unfortunate. I thought that you would be a person
who behaves himself with more honor.”
Gied begins to make an excuse for Finne who has a disappointed expression.
He looks extremely unsightly. It was unthinkable coming from Gied who always fuss over his dignity.
To be criticized in front of a crowd like this, it is probably something his pride wouldn’t allow.
“It, it’s a misunderstanding! This guy is..”
“Prince Arnold Lakes Adler. You think that it would be okay no matter what you do to the Dull Prince?
Do you have no respect or loyalty toward the imperial family?”
“N, No, it’s not like that……..”
I look at Finne.
63
It would be bad if Finne makes Gied lose face here. Finne is the Blaue Mowe. On top of the fact that she
is extremely famous in the capital, she is also the emperor’s favorite. It would be easy to have her save
me here but I can’t allow her to antagonize Gied.
There is no need to make a useless enemy like this. If I let him do as he pleases then Gied would be
satisfied and if he one-sidedly hit me then only his reputation will fall.
I tried to tell her to stop with my eye but Finne doesn’t pay it any mind.
Then she says something outrageous.
“In the first place…..do you think that I am accompanying Prince Arnold?”
“Eh…..?”
Finne looks straight at me.
Recognizing what she wanted to do, I sigh.
If it’s like this then I can do nothing but follow through with Finne’s plan.
“This is troubling, Finne-san. Since you don’t want this to become a rumor, I was pretending to be Nii-
san you know…..”
“My deepest apologies. Leo-sama.”
“Eh, ah, eh, Leonard……?”
“Yeah, that’s right. Gied-san.”
I fix my hair and stand up straight. I imitate Leo’s tone of voice and change my expression into a gentle
one.
Seeing my transformation, Gied’s face turned blue immediately after he remembered what he had
done.
“Le, Leonard……it’s not like that. This is umm…….”
“It’s fine Gied-san. I know that you have been doing something like that to Nii-san, as long as Nii-san
doesn’t say anything I also have no intention to move as well. But we have to excuse ourselves for
today. I am in the middle of guiding Finne-san after all.”
“A, Aa….G, got it……”
Gied head back with a bad expression.
If it’s me, in case something happened to Leo then I might bring up the respect and loyalty toward the
imperial family like Finne did as well. At the very least, Leo is the fourth faction in the succession war.
Unlike me, he is a prince that might become an emperor.
64
Gied must understand that it would be bad if he let the situation worsen like that as well. I hurriedly
return my appearance back to normal.
However.
“You really have to do that?”
“I am sorry…..”
“Ha~a….let’s go.”
First, we have to get away from this place. We gathered too much attention.
We walk toward the castle at a quick pace. I stopped when we are close to the castle and look at Finne.
Finne is looking at me with a face like she wanted to cry.
“….You arbitrary did that right?”
“I am truly sorry……”
“If you just leave it alone then it only would lower that guy’s reputation. But with this, that guy will at
the very least be hostile toward you and Leo. Moreover, because they have the information that Leo
might be moving around while pretending to be me, that information would make it harder for me to
move.”
“………….”
If I keep on like this then she might really cry as tears are already accumulating in Finne’s eyes.
Seeing that, I look away.
No matter what I say to Finne now, nothing will change. I can’t blame her for what happened.
“If you have learned then next time don’t do something like that by yourself. It can be dangerous for
you too, so don’t do it again.”
“Yes.”
She is still looking like she is about to cry.
Looking at Finne hanging her head, I am at a loss. In the end, since I can’t do anything I open my
mouth.
“But…..I understand that you did that for my sake. Thanks.”
“……Al-sama…….”
65
“Sorry that it has to end with a bad aftertaste when you were having a lot of fun.”
“N, No! It is not Al-sama’s fault! It was all because of my thoughtlessness! I will be more careful next
time! Th, that’s why……can you guide me around again?”
“Yeah, next time I will disguise myself as well.”
Hearing so, Finne’s expression immediately got better and she smiled brightly.
It was worth going out of my way to guide her around the capital to see that smile. Thinking so, I bring
Finne back to the castle.
————————
TLN: With this we are done with the first arc/chapter of the story. I actually want to translate more of
this before I go because this is a story that need a certain amount of world building before it become
gold.
Well, I’m off to Japan in four days so I will have to leave it at this for now
-Mr.Graverobber
66
Rivals
Even if you are a child of the Emperor, it doesn’t mean that you get to see him every day. The reason is
simple, it is because the Emperor who rules over such a vast empire is always busy.
Almost every day the Emperor has a meeting with his subjects and the only ones who can participate
are those who hold important positions. “The Privy Council”, the only one who can participate in such
an imperial council among the Emperor’s children is only the Second Prince.
However, on that day, the princes and princesses in the imperial capital were ordered to participate in
that privy council.
“This is unusual. I wonder what is happening?”
“It is not the once a year thing either. Is there some kind of an announcement, I wonder.
I don’t expect him to stop this blood-soaked succession war either. Rather, he is a person who would
think that only the one who won such a succession war is worthy to become the next emperor.
He is an Emperor before being a parent. Some would say that it is an emperor’s duty to prepare a
suitable successor who can protect and develop this vast empire. For that, he has to turn a blind eye to
some sacrifices.
“Announcement huh…..I hope it is a good one.”
“Ten to one, it is going to be bad.”
While having such a conversation, we headed toward the throne room.
“Everyone, thank you for coming.”
“We are honored by your summon Your Majesty.”
Everyone bows to the blond-haired man on the throne.
The 31st emperor of the Adracia empire, Johannes Lakes Adler. Even though he is already 51 years old
but he looks like he is still in his early 40s.
He is the reigning emperor of this empire that aged for more than 600 years as well as our father.
The people around him consisted of only high-ranking civil and military officials.
Their gazes point straight at us, the Emperor’s children. There are eleven of us today.
“Nine princes and two princesses. No one seems to be absent. It’s a shame that my eldest daughter is
still at the border. Well, we let’s put that aside. I am happy, my children.”
67
Including our eldest brother who passed away, my father has 13 children.
He is looking at us with satisfaction in his eyes.
The eldest is 28 years old while the youngest is 10 years old. It is rare for us to gather together like
this.
Among us, a man with a big body frame speaks up.
“Your Majesty. What is the occasion today? If it’s a war then please send me out by all means. Without
sparing the might of the empire, I will crush the enemy for you.”
He is a red-haired man with huge armor. The Third Prince, Gordon Lakes Adler. He is one of the
empire’s generals and among the “Prince”, he is the one who possesses the most military might.
Some people describe him as intimidating but for me, the word I would use is arrogant. He is that
much of a self-important man.
The pro-war faction and high-ranking military officials are Gordon’s ally. If he becomes the emperor,
undoubtedly the empire will continue to take the territorial expansion policy. He might lead us to fight
against the other continental powers (TLN: Other big countries on the continent) and we might be
able to unify the continent under his rule. He would be a good emperor who those who are hungry for
war.
For those who don’t wish for war, he would be close to the worst emperor they could ask for though.
“Gordon. You never change huh.”
“The only thing you talk about is war this, war that. Do you still have a brain left in there? Look, His
Majesty is troubled too you know?”
Seeing father making a bitter smile, a woman with long green hair spoke out.
Covering her body in a black robe, she is the Second Princess, Zandra Lakes Adler. Her face is good but
her eyes give off a bad vibe. Thanks to that, she gives an overall severe impression. Perhaps her bad
personality is as bad as her eyes suggested. In fact, the impression you got from her isn’t wrong.
Among our elder sisters, the one who has the most brutal personality is unmistakably Zandra. Maybe
it was because she has such a personality, she is delving into the forbidden magic technique and
revive them one after another. That’s the reason she is popular among the magicians.
If she becomes the empress then the empire would surely become a magical superpower. However, it
might also become a mad country where inhumane researches are permitted.
“Fuhn, a weak magician like you probably wouldn’t understand. It is a warrior honor to fight and
perish on the battlefield. If you are going to deny me that I will crush you.”
“Ara? What a dangerous thing to say. If you want honor that much then shall I gift wrapped it for you?”
68
The atmosphere turned severe in an instant.
I wonder who is the dangerous one here. Aren’t both of you offer to kill each other just now?
Well, they wouldn’t go that far in front of the Emperor. The nerves these guys have.
As I thought so, a blue-haired man cough.
“Please forgive my younger brother and sister’s rudeness, Your Majesty.”
Saying so, he lowers his head.
Among the children, he is the one closest to the Emperor. Wearing a pair of glasses, he is a tall man
with sharp eyes.
The Second Prince, Eric Lakes Adler.
The only one among the children who have the right to attend the privy council, holding the position
of the Minister of Foreign Affair, he is the genius who oversee the empire diplomacy. As an intellectual,
he is considered to be better than the Crown Prince and is currently the man who is closest to the
throne.
If he becomes the emperor, the empire will definitely be safe. However, the people under his rule of
logic and reason will undoubtedly feel suffocated. And to this realist man, he will never leave the seed
of the future rebel alone. If this man becomes the emperor, we will definitely be killed.
That’s why we have no choice but to participate in this succession war.
Eric who apologizes in their places is being stared at by Gordon and Zandra. The good part was taken
by Eric after all.
“It’s fine. Competition is a good thing. I did just that when I became the Emperor after all.”
This competition will eventually end up as a slaughter.
Everyone here knows that. Even so, the emperor still approves it. That’s because he believes that it is
for the good of the empire.
“Now, that is why I thought up a way for everyone to compete. It is the reason that I gathered all of
you today.”
“If it is a competition of strength then it is exactly what I want.”
“Well, slow down Gordon. Don’t take things so simple like that. What would you do if you have to
compete with your ten years old brother? So, to that end, for the first time, I am thinking about
reviving a festival that has been abandoned for decades.”
“Festival, Your Majesty?”
69
Hearing Eric’s question, the Emperor nod and give him a daring smile.
In his younger days, he was a warrior whose name resounded on the battlefield. The army he led has
the reputation of being undefeated. That side of him often comes out with his fearless smile.
“The Knight’s Hunting Festival. It is the festival where each of the imperial knight orders competes
against each other with the rarity and the size of the monster they hunted. It was a festival that often
organized during the old days when there were still many monsters running rampant in the empire
but we no longer organize it now a day because the adventurers are so excellent. I want to revive that
festival.”
The imperial knight order is the most elite of the empire. Different from the knights that serve the
feudal lords, they are the knights that report directly to the emperor.
They act as the trump card of the empire. When the army hit a roadblock, they are the ones we sent
out to assure the victory of the empire, they are the Emperor’s sword whose loyalty lies solely in the
Emperor.
If it is the festival that mobilize such a knight order then it must be quite big.
“I see. The monster has been active as of late after all. However, will the adventurer guild allow this?”
The adventurer’s job is to protect the people of this continent from the monsters. In other words, their
job is monster hunting. Of course, there are other requests besides that but most of the requests are
still monster related jobs.
To those adventurers, they wouldn’t find a festival that takes away their job to be enjoyable.
“Don’t worry. I have already got permission from the guild’s headquarter. Since their branch offices
around the empire can’t deal with the rare monsters that appeared recently, it seems like they really
want us to give them a hand. I heard that Duke Kleinert was troubled by such monsters too. Consider
it as cooperation between us and the guild.”
It’s not something I can just accept. What he said about the guild.
The reason why guild branch offices are in the location with a few monsters is that the empire has to
pay the maintenance fee for it. It is like when a monster appears, the empire says: Hey there’s a
monster, take care of it. However, the branch office in Duke Kleinert’s territory didn’t do the thing that
they were paid to do. Since Silver didn’t solve the incident on the guild’s behalf as he took a different
route to do the job, you cannot say that the guild did it.
Considering all that, the correct exchange between them would be this.
[What do you mean you can’t even take care of a single monster even after we paid so much money to
you?]
[We’re sorry……]
70
[I want to hold a monster hunting festival, you are going to approve that right?]
[No, Um,……that is……getting an approval is a little……]
[Haa? Then give us some good adventurers then.]
[Th, that is……]
[Which is it?]
[…..w, we will approve of the festival…….]
Something like that, I think.
He is the father of these villainous children after all. There’s no way he wouldn’t use what happened at
Kleinert Ducal as a bargaining chip.
The guild headquarter must be in a tight spot between the local adventurers and the empire as well.
Well, it is certainly true that monsters that never appear in the imperial territory before have been
appearing recently. Moreover, they are high-level monsters too.
If no countermeasures are taken, the damage will start to spread to the people, their crops and even
the adventurers themselves. In that sense, it is a sound strategy to have the imperial knight order hunt
down those rare monsters. If we organize a festival we can make money, improve morale and people
can feel safe as well.
As expected of the Emperor. He thought up a good strategy.
However, the problem is that he is planning to use us at this festival too.
“Understood. In other words, you want us to lead the knight order to hunt the monsters, correct?”
“As expected of you, Eric. you guessed it. I have allocated the knights to each of you. You can go out to
hunt the monster together with them, I don’t mind if you sit back and wait for the result either.
Anyhow, I want this festival to be exciting.”
Saying so, the Emperor bring the conversation to an end. The reason that he goes out of his way to
allocate the knights himself must be because he wanted to prevent his children from recruit all the
excellent knights to themselves.
Moreover, what he said about going out hunting with the knights or relax and wait for the result, at
first it looked like he was being considerate for those who are not good at leading the troop. However,
the knights will never swear their loyalty to those who can’t go out to the frontline with them. It is a
fatal weakness for those who are aiming for the throne.
The Emperor must want to say that even if you can’t fight, you must at least have enough resolve to
stand on the same battlefield as them. If we can’t show him that then we don’t have the right to aim for
the throne huh.
71
“Your Majesty. I understand about the festival but I have a question I would like to ask.”
“What is it? Gordon.”
“What will be the reward for the winner? If it is something cheap then that wouldn’t serve as a
motivation.”
“Fumu, that’s right. What do you want?”
“Of course, I want the seat of the crown prince.”
Gordon fearlessly said so.
Zandra is staring at him. If a look could kill then he would already be dead right now. Eric still seems
to be cool on the surface but inside he must be quite irritated.
“You really are honest huh. Alright, as an answer to your honesty, I will be honest with you as well. I
will not decide on the next crown prince at this kind of festival.”
“Naturally, if a crown prince was decided at a festival like this we would become a laughing stock of
the other countries.”
“That’s right, Zandra. However, it doesn’t mean I am not going to give you a reward. So, I will appoint
the winner as my ambassador plenipotentiary (TLN: a diplomat, invested with the full power of
independent action on behalf of the emperor in a foreign country) To which country they will be
dispatched to will be decided after we consider the future movements of other countries.”
Everyone stop breathing.
If a prince or princess was appointed as the ambassador plenipotentiary, at the very least they would
treat you as a successor candidate in their dispatched country. And you would be able to connect the
pipe between the empire and that country as well.
For those participating in the succession war, it would be an irresistible post.
As the minister of foreign affairs, it wouldn’t be as beneficial to Eric but even so, he would want the
position. Above all, it would damage his pride as the minister of foreign affairs if other candidates
were to deprive him of his complete authority over diplomatic affairs.
As long as he has something to lose, Eric will probably get serious.
The Knight Order is the most elite of the empire. The knights will probably give their all no matter
who they were assigned to, in the end, it will be depending on the prince or princess’s disposition
It seems like things are going to get troublesome.
Thinking so, I started concocting a plan to let Leo win this.
72
My Natural Enemy The Hero
“It has become really troublesome.”
“Seriously. This is a pinch for us.”
The next morning. I immediately invited Sebas and Finne to my room for a strategy meeting.
As expected, Sebas seems to understand the seriousness of the situation.
“A pinch? Isn’t this a chance for Leo-sama to show off his ability?…..the knights were equally allocated
by His Majesty as well and Al-sama should know how excellence Leo-sama is right?”
“Haa….”
“Th, that sigh just now is to make fun of me right!? I know that much!”
Hearing Finne’s shout, I reluctantly start explaining.
Actually, Finne’s idea is not wrong. Only half of it that is.
“This festival is both a chance and a pinch. It is a chance because there’s a possibility for Leo to
become the ambassador plenipotentiary. The reason that it is a pinch at the same time is if one of our
three rivals become the ambassador plenipotentiary, the distance between us that we finally managed
to close will widen again. Although we are now the fourth faction, we are still considerably weaker
than the other three. If one of them takes the position, the other two can still somehow manage but we
don’t have that kind of leeway. Unless there is a drastic change, we will have to drop out of the
succession war.”
“Is, is that the case!? Th, this is bad! We have to hurry and do something about it!”
Finne started to panic. She gets up from her chair and pacing around the room.
I leave her alone and address Sebas.
“Did you gathered the information?”
“There aren’t many available, Your Highness. It seems like the knight order just heard about it
yesterday themselves. This matter must be mostly decided by His Majesty and his close aid alone.”
“If that’s the case then the tricks we have up our sleeves are limited. The issue here is all depending on
each of the candidate’s ability and luck huh…..”
Will a rare monster appear? Will we encounter them? These things really depend on luck.
No matter how strong you are, there’s no meaning if you don’t have the opportunity to show it.
73
“There is another piece of information. The knights are expecting the venue of this festival to be the
eastern part of the empire.”
“Eastern part? Why?”
“ The eastern part is originally the area where the damage from the monsters is the greatest, it is also
the area that the adventurer’s subjugation can’t keep up with the monster population. Also, our knight
order was dispatched to other areas but the eastern part was untouched by the previous knight
dispatch.”
“So he left the eastern part alone to let it serve as the festival venue huh. That’s certainly what my
father would do.”
As expected, the knight can’t be expected to hunt monsters in every corner of the empire. I thought
that there would be some places they couldn’t cover but it seems that place is the eastern part huh. If
the area that was damaged by the monster becomes the center of the festival it surely will be crowded
with tourists. The rebuild will be easier as well.
This is really like father.
“The festival’s flow is like this, the knights will be dispatched to the eastern part and hunt the
monsters there for several days, after that you will have to pick a unit that you are confident in then
His Majesty will give out his judgment and decide the winner. Additionally, the story has already
spread so the merchants are starting to flow to the eastern part as we speak.”
“It is their business opportunity after all, the merchants will not miss it. The scale of this festival has
gotten bigger huh…..The influential people from all over the world will come to see it, this is going to
be troublesome.”
“A, Al-sama! I came up with a plan!”
“Let’s hear it then.”
Finne claps her hand and raised it up.
I don’t expect anything from her but it would be a waste not to hear it. Finne is not a good strategist
but she isn’t an idiot.
She might be able to come up with something strange as well.
“I think it is fine as long as Al-sama is the winner!”
“It was idiotic of me to placed hope in you…….”
“Finne-sama. Arnold-sama must act as an incompetence one. It would be unnatural for him to
suddenly show some competency here.”
“Ah, that’s right…..b, but there’s no other way we can win with a certainty left isn’t it……..?”
74
It is as Finne says, for me to take the first place is the most certain way to do this. This is because of
the participation of Silver. Of course, the other candidates and their knights can’t possibly hold a
candle to him.
However, if we do that, we will lose our trump card and it would be difficult to make Leo the emperor.
If I carry it out, it will lead to separating the valuable popularity.
No matter how I think about it, it is a bad move.
“We have to come up with something else.”
“But there are only a few hands we can play in this situation. The other candidates can play the hand
like luring a rare monster to the eastern part or they could find out the location of a rare monster in
advance but our side lacks human resources to do that.”
“I know. They will definitely do that but I can also do something similar as well. I can just drive the
monster to the east as Silver myself.”
“Y, you can’t! Doing something like that….!”
Finne was the first to oppose my proposal.
Looking at her, I and Sebas make a bitter smile.
She is really similar to Leo.
“Right, if I do that I might put the people living in the eastern part in harm’s way after all. That’s why
we will not do that. Leo would never approve of such a method as well.”
In terms of personal feeling, it is the plan that I absolutely don’t want to take. My pride as an
adventurer won’t allow me to do that. But if there’s no other way left, I might have to do it. However,
that’s not the case now. If the other candidates besides Leo turn out to be tyrants then it would be a
different story but what is at stake right now is only mine, Leo’s and our mother’s life. As expected, I
can’t make the people suffer just for mine and my relatives’ life.
“Is that so……I’m glad.”
Feeling relieved, Finne takes a breath and immediately lowers her head.
“M, my deepest apologies…I have blurted out a hasty remark again! Of course, Al-sama would do
something like that!”
“It’s fine, just say what you thought. Your opinion is always just after all.”
“What do you mean…..?”
“It means that he likes you Finne-sama.”
“Ma, Maa!!”
75
Even though I didn’t say it myself, Finne’s face turned red and she covers it with both hands.
It’s fine for you to get embarrassed by yourself but the one who said that was Sebas. Not my word.
“I don’t remember saying that I like her though?”
“Then do you hate her?”
“No, that is…..”
“So, let’s settle that you like her then. Isn’t that great Finne-sama.”
“Yes!”
Looking at Finne’s cheerful smile, I am getting exhausted.
In the end, we can’t come up with a good idea so we decided to make it our homework and end the
meeting.
————-
The next day, I took a guild request as Silver.
This is because the guild has notified me that a high-rank quest has come in.
I rarely move out twice in a month before. It seems like the matter about the increase in the monster
population inside the empire is true.
Well, it doesn’t mean that the monster that appeared is strong enough to trouble an SS-rank
adventurer like me. The monster that appeared this time is a Red Cerberus. It is an extremely strong
variant that turned the table on many adventurers before so the guild has issued out a bounty for its
head. Its rank is AAA, the same rank as the King-Minotaur I took down previously.
Cerberus itself is a rare monster that originally doesn’t exist inside the empire. It must’ve run away
from other adventurers and entered the empire’s territory.
I quickly subjugated it, while thinking: don’t go wander into the empire when the empire is so busy
right now!
As expected, it wasn’t killed in a single blow, it went down after I hit it three times with magic. At the
last blow, its body was almost gone but its fang was still intact so I decided to bring that back as
evidence of subjugation.
As I was performing such adventurer’s work, a group of cavalry approached me from a distance away.
They are riding here with quite a speed. I wonder whose cavalry it is? The lord in this area should
have been informed by the guild that Silver was heading here for Cerberus subjugation though……
“You there! Was the explosion just now your doing?”
76
“What if it is? How about giving me your name first?”
While answering the question that came over my back, I recovered the fang and turned around to face
the cavalry.
Then I froze.
Because I found an unexpected person.
“…….! ?”
Riding on top of the horse was a beautiful girl.
She has long sakura-colored hair and jade-colored eyes. Her straight back and strong look give me the
impression of a strong elegant sword.
I know who she is. I know her well.
Since I haven’t gotten involved with her for several years, I didn’t recognize her voice but as soon as I
saw her figure I know who she is. Rather, if you are talking about a person with sakura-colored hair
and jade-colored eyes, there’s only one person who fits that description in the empire.
“I am the captain of the third corps of the imperial knight order, Elna von Amsberg. I heard that a
Cerberus has been rampaging in this area but, perhaps you already subjugated it?”
77
78
Amsberg.
Just by hearing that name, the surrounding countries would start to tremble.
They are the descendant of the hero who took down the demon king who shook the continent 500
years ago.
After defeating the demon king, the emperor at the time want to pull the hero to his side however, the
hero said he did not need the status of the duke, marquis or count. He refused every reward offered to
him and was about to set out on a journey. The emperor came up with a proposal to that hero, he
offered the hero a special peerage, a peerage that only one exists in the whole continent.
It was called the “Brave” it is the highest rank among the imperial aristocrats, its standing is even
higher than that of a prince, and they practically don’t need to bow down to anyone except the
emperor.
But no one ever complains about such treatment. That is because they are worthy of it, no they are
more than worthy of it because of their military gains that have accumulated for hundreds of years.
The guardian of the empire. Elna is the successor of that “Brave House of Amsberg”.
And she was the one who protected my weak self from the bullies when I was young. She called me a
weakling and gave me a spartan training and the thing she planted inside me made me unconsciously
can’t deal with her, my natural enemy. I dare say, what she did back then was actually bullying.
Because of that I unconsciously step back, I couldn’t speak but then I remembered that right now my
face is hidden behind a silver mask so I managed to pull myself back together.
That’s right, right now I am not Arnold, I am Silver.
I am not afraid of Elna!
“Don’t you know just by looking? Seem like the lady from the Brave house doesn’t have such a good
eye huh.”
“What did you just say……?”
Ah….
C, Crap ! ! ? ?
I have been talking like this for years so I unconsciously used such a tone on her.
Th, this is bad!!
“Judging from that appearance, you are the SS-rank adventurer Silver, right? Just because you are a
little well off you seem to be quite cocky huh?”
79
Elna smile at me.
But I know. Elna often smiles while she is angry. This is undoubtedly her angry smile.
Th, this is bad….. I don’t want to get involved with Elna. if I don’t smooth things over now…..
“You have been active around the imperial capital so they start calling you the guardian of the capital
lately right? Is it that? Can I take this as a challenge toward our Amsberg house?”
“Guardian of the Capital is only something that the people called me. I didn’t call myself with such a
name and I am not interested in such a nickname either.”
Al, Alright. How this.
I appealed to her that I am not her enem-………….
“Are you saying an insignificant nickname like our Amsberg house’s is uninteresting to you? Or are
you saying that you thought nothing of our name in the first place? Either way, that is clearly a
provocation right?”
AHHH—! ! ? ?
It’s over! Her first impression of me is so bad, no matter what I say she will take it the wrong way! In
the first place, Elna super hated losing. Once you start a fight with her, she won’t be satisfied unless
she wipes the floor with her opponent.
Kuh! If it comes to this then!
Let’s clear away this long-standing resentment. It seems impossible to build a friendly relationship
with her like this anyway.
As I collected myself, I give Elna a condescending laugh.
“Fuu, you seem to be quite conscious of my reputation. The Brave house really values their fame huh.
To think that you are so small-minded to the extent that you can’t even tolerate others being
complimented.”
“Wha!? You! I will not forgive anyone who dares to say such an insolent thing about my house!”
“Who is the insolent one here? I was subjugating a monster according to the guild’s request. But from
what you said, you intended to hunt it if I haven’t already right? Isn’t that a provocation toward the
adventurer guild as a whole?”
“I have no such intention! It was for the people!”
“Captain. Please calm down. Even if there was a miscommunication, if there was a request from the
adventurer guild, we would be in trouble. Moreover, we have to hurry to the capital as well.”
80
“Kuh….! Silver! Remember this! The one who is protecting the empire is us the Brave house, the
knights, and the soldiers! Not some adventurers like you!”
“I will remember it. I might immediately forget about it afterward though.”
“Damn you…..!”
Looking at the enraged Elna leaving, I thought to myself that I’ve finally done it. But at the same time, I
feel refreshed after I managed to let out my long years of resentment.
Elna joined the imperial knight order when she was eleven, she is a genius among geniuses. Since she
was often assigned important missions, we hardly met since she became a knight. When we met once
in a while, because she doesn’t have much time, all we managed to do was a short conversation.
However, this time I was able to gain an upper hand against her. Ahh, it felt so good! Now I understand
how a bullied child feels when they get their revenge on the bully.
“It doesn’t change the fact that I created an unnecessary enemy though……”
What am I doing…….
If the Amsberg house decided to be hostile toward us then it will entirely be on me…..
“I screwed up……..”
I head back while scratching my head.
81
The Strongest Knight and The Strongest
Adventurer
A few days after I returned to the imperial capital.
The fateful day has come as many people are busy preparing for the festival.
“Who do you think would come?”
“It must be some of the high-ranking captains.”
I was waiting for a person in my room at the castle.
Today is the day that the Emperor’s children will know which of the knight corp will be their for the
festival. The method is simple. Each of the knight captains will visit the children’s room.
Each corp of the imperial knight order has its own number. The smaller the number the more elite
that corp is. Especially the top three, they are being led by captains of the strongest class. To evenly
distribute the war potential, they must have some of the army dropouts included in their rank as well.
“Anyone is fine as long as it isn’t Elna……”
“Saying something like that again…..She is the prodigious child of the Brave house of Amsberg who
joined the imperial knight order at 11 and became a captain at 14 you know? Won’t it be great if we
can pull her to our side?”
“Her ability alone that is. I can’t deal with her as a person.”
“She is reputed for her high moral and is said to be the next head of the imperial knight order though?”
“That’s just only on the outside. Both the people and the knights don’t know her true nature. I will
never forget the moment I met her. It was when I was 7 years old. Do you know what she said to me
after she saved me from the bullies?”
“Well, I wonder.”
“She called me a “weakling” you know? Is that a word you would use on a bullied child? And after that,
she handed me a wooden sword and start “practicing” with me. I got beat up one-sidedly and after
that day I start playing inside my house so that I don’t have to meet her anymore. I can’t deal with her
on the subconscious level! It is a terrible story no matter how you take it right? That woman is the
devil herself.”
I was enthusiastically explaining about her to Sebas but Sebas only shrugs his shoulders like I am a
hopeless child.
Damn it! Why doesn’t he get it!
82
As I grew restless, the door suddenly opened.
There appeared,
“What is this about a devilish woman?”
Said the smiling Devil (Elna) herself.
The moment I see her figure, my face immediately contorted. Then.
“SEBAS! CALL THE KNIGHT! THERE’S A DEVIL HERE!!”
“Unfortunately Your Highness, I think nobody would come. The strongest knight is already here after
all.”
“As expected of you Sebas. Your Highness the Prince, Arnold Lake Adler. I, Elna von Amsberg, captain
of the 3rd corp of the imperial knight order, reporting for duty. It has been a few years since we last
met but it seems you are still the same Your Highness.”
“Tsk…..! Is that sarcasm?”
“Yes, of course. It seems you have become quite popular in the capital huh. I heard they are calling you
the dull prince. Isn’t that great?”
“Yeah, thanks to you. I was having the time of my life.”
We laugh at each other.
Even if we haven’t met for several years, we are still childhood friends. Even though I am a prince and
she is the daughter of the Brave family, we know each other well.
We were staring at each other with a smile but it was me who looks away first.
“What are you doing here? I don’t remember calling for you?”
“Of course I am here because of that festival. Don’t you already know?”
“I don’t believe it…..”
“That’s rude. I went through a lot of trouble you know? I even asked the Emperor to let me partner up
with you.”
“Don’t do anything unnecessary!? Are you asking to be targeted by my brother and sister!?”
“It’s not that I didn’t think about it. But you aren’t aiming for the throne in the first place right, Al?”
“That’s not the problem here! Argh damn it! Why do you have to be like this even from back then!?”
I know that she did it while thinking about me but it doesn’t help me accomplish my own goal.
83
For a time like this, I want her to ask father to let her partner with Leo. Well, I don’t know if she will do
it if I tell her to go over to Leo’s side though.
At the very least because Elna is now working with me, my status has changed from a nobody to one
of the aces. This made it harder for me to move. Elna is a person that naturally attracts attention. It’s
safe to say that any covert operation on my part is now impossible.
If she joined the other camp I would be troubled but I am even more troubled because she joined
mine. That’s Elna for you. It isn’t just the problem with our compatibility, I just really don’t want her to
work under me.
“I will make sure you win this. Let’s make everyone who calls you the dull prince eat their own word!”
“I don’t want that…..”
“Don’t be like that. I already declared so to His Majesty so we will have to undergo special training! For
now, let’s see how much you have improved in your horse-riding. Now, let’s head to the training
ground.”
“…..Sebas. I have a headache. I think it is serious……..”
“That’s certainly sound bad. It must be some kind of serious mental illness. If you train your mind and
body you might be cured, Your Highness.”
I begrudgingly stare at Sebas but he totally ignored me.
There’s not much time left until the Knight’s Hunting festival. Nothing would change even if I train for
a few days.
Having that in mind, I was dragged to the training ground.
———
“ ! ! ? ? It hurts…..”
“M, my deepest apologies! I will do it more gently.”
The Next Day.
I couldn’t move from my bed because of the muscle pain so Finne is applying ointment on me.
Anyway, my back is totally out of commission. It is so painful that I don’t want to move at all.
This is because Elna thoroughly whipped me into shape at her horse-riding lessons. That was the first
time for me to swing a sword or a spear on horseback. That was extremely harsh. I fell off the horse
and hit my back so many times.
If this keeps on going every day I will surely die.
84
“Arnold-sama. Elna-sama told me that she prepared another training for you this afternoon.”
“Does her dictionary doesn’t have the word rest in it…..?”
“As expected of the person who is said to be the second coming of the hero. But, Al-sama, as Silver-
sama shouldn’t your ability be on par with her? Are you intentionally acting like you can’t ride a
horse?”
“Arnold-sama is an ancient magic specialist. His basic physical strength is even lesser than that of a
normal person. Horse-riding, swordsmanship, modern magic he slacked off on all of those subjects so
his abilities in that regard are nothing special, Finne-sama.”
“Is that so? I thought that the adventurers were all physically strong.”
“Most of them are like that…..but I used ancient magic to cover for my poor physical ability and I don’t
intend to train my physical ability in the first place.”
“His Highness often use transfer magic to cover his long-distance travel. The time when His Highness
went out without using transfer magic like when he went to the Kleinert Ducal is rare after all. Even
then, he used ancient magic to strengthen his body. Without ancient magic, he is a “weakling” just like
Elna-sama said.”
I don’t have the energy left to refute Sebas’s poisonous tongue.
I let out a sigh while lying on the bed.
However, Sebas calls out to me with a brighter voice.
“But depending on how you look at it, even if it is a hard time for Your Highness, it has become a good
opportunity for Leo-sama.”
“Right…..”
“Eh? What do you mean?”
I decided to give a brief explanation to Finne who looked like she doesn’t understand the situation.
Even so, I don’t have to give her a detailed explanation either.
“Elna is said to be the strongest knight. So, even if I won no one would think that it is my
achievement.”
“That is right. It is as Finne-sama said, if we can’t make Leonard-sama the winner, the method with the
most certainty is to make Arnold-sama the winner. However, it would be unnatural if Arnold-sama
suddenly wins the competition out of the blue….but now we have the strongest card on our hand.”
“I see! Arnold-sama will get serious right!”
85
“Well, even if I don’t do anything, Elna would have done it by herself anyway. Either case, I think we
will win. Elna is that skilled. If I don’t get in her way it is almost certain that we will win.”
“That must be why His Majesty the Emperor paired Arnold-sama with Elna-sama. He must be
expecting Arnold-sama to pull Elna-sama’s leg in this competition.”
“The Emperor would never have thought that he just created a tag team between the empire’s
strongest knight and the strongest adventurer!”
Amazed at the happy looking Finne, I put on my jacket.
There are a few more days until the Knight’s Hunting festival. I have to do what I can before then.
“Even in the worst case, I would win and keep the ambassador position away from the others. But the
best result here would be Leo’s victory.”
“Why is that? Even if Al-sama becomes the ambassador plenipotentiary and builds a connection with
other countries, wouldn’t it eventually become Leo-sama’s in the end?”
“Even so, it would be better if Leo wins this. There will be a lot of influential people who come to visit
the festival after all.”
“You said such a dignified thing but aren’t you actually just find the position to be troublesome?”
My shoulders jumped.
Seeing that he hit the bull’s eye Sebas let out a sigh, Finne, on the other hand, call out to me.
“Al-sama….aren’t you giving up too much for Leo-sama?”
“Nn? Give up?”
“Al-sama is saying something like that to hand everything to Leo-sama. I know that.”
“Haa…Finne-sama. It seems like you have misunderstood His Highness, the prince in front of your
eyes is really a troublesome person you know?”
“I can’t hide it from Finne huh….it’s my habit from a long time ago you see. I really want to give
everything to Leo. the throne for example.”
“That’s exactly it! As an elder brother, that is great but it is no good if you overdo it. I think Leo-sama
will be sad too.”
I managed to use Finne’s misunderstanding to evade Sebas’s sermon.
Seeing I skillfully tricked Finne, Sebas frowned.
“Tricking a woman is not really something I can approve of.”
86
“I didn’t trick her. I just made her misunderstand.”
“Saying something like that again. Elna-sama will get angry at you, you know?”
“Is she my mother or something…….”
“I am envious of you to have such a caring childhood friend. I don’t have anyone from my childhood
after all.”
“Don’t be, it will just be annoying. Especially since she often does lots of unnecessary things too.”
“Ara? Unnecessary things you say?”
A voice flew into the room.
When I take a look I saw Elna standing by the door.
She is smiling but I feel like I can see the angry mark exuding from her.
For a moment, the deep fear she planted in me made me look away but since it shows no sign of going
away, I reluctantly open my mouth.
“You came even without me calling, aren’t you too much of a busybody …?”
“That’s rude. I even went out of my way to bring an ointment to a certain someone who can’t move
because of muscle pain you know?”
“I’m fine. I already got some applied to me by a person who is a hundred times kinder than you.”
“Ara? Are you perhaps talking about Ms.Blaue Mowe over there?”
“Ah, Yes. Pleased to meet you. I am Finne von Kleinert.”
“I’m Elna von Amsberg. Leo’s room is one thing but I never thought I would find you at this hopeless
prince’s room.”
Saying so, Elna gives Finne a gentle smile.
The nature of her smile is completely different than the one that she gave me. It is a smile to
manipulate other’s impressions.
“Al, I get the feeling that you tried to make fun of me just now?”
“It’s just an imagination.”
“Good. now, shall we.
Saying so, Elna dragged me off the bed by the neck.
Seeing me panicked, Elna gives me an explanation with her usual smile.
87
“Just now you said that you were fine right? Now, let’s head to the training ground.”
“Wha!? That’s not what I mean! Ouch! That hurts!? Stop-! ! I am an injured person you know!?”
“A muscle pain doesn’t count as an injury. Move your body and it will go away on its own.”
Saying so, Elna dragged me to the training ground and we started training just like yesterday.
88
Those Who Move Behind the Scene
Night.
I head to the castle basement, there I place my hand on an inconspicuous wall. Doing so, line of light
ran through the wall and the wall slid open.
Without finding such a phenomenon surprising, I enter the now open passage.
Inside was a staircase leading further down. I continue forward until I found a wooden door.
What was waiting behind the door was a beautiful study room.
There are countless old books and candles that are always lit even though nobody ever tends to it.
Because the person who was using this room was lazy, he used magic to make the candles lit all the
time.
“Your magic research is as amazing as always Gramp (TLN: Jii-san)”
“The mystery of magic won’t be solved no matter how many years it takes after all.”
The one who answered me was a small old man. Moreover, he is half-transparent too.
He is sitting on a chair while happily reading a book. When he has to turn the page, he skillfully uses
his magic to do so.
You wouldn’t be able to judge from his appearance but even like this, he was once an emperor.
“You are so carefree even though your magic research led you to be sealed inside a book. The people
outside are calling you the Mad Emperor you know?”
“That was just a mistake. To think that my body was taken by a demon. Such a foolish mistake.”
Said the old man, Gustav Lakes Adler.
My great-grandfather as well as the emperor of two generations ago.
As you can see, he is a magic maniac who has no eyes for anything besides magic. He even created this
secret room for his magic research.
Thanks to that, his body was hijacked by a demon that was sealed inside a book. The demon used his
body to lay waste to the imperial capital. It is written in the history that he went crazy at the end of his
research on ancient magic.
That is why ancient magic is a taboo for the imperial family.
However, time passed. After he met me, he taught me how to use ancient magic and is now my master.
89
Now, only his spirit remained inside the book, he has no body. What I am seeing right now is just his
thoughtform. (TLN: For more information https://psi-encyclopedia.spr.ac.uk/articles/thoughtforms)
I released him from the sealed book when I opened it but it seems he doesn’t want to get a new body.
He seems happy to be able to leisurely perform his magic research in peace.
“You really are carefree huh, seriously. Even though it is your fault that I have to hide the fact that I
can use ancient magic like this too.”
“Think it the other way around. You can learn to use ancient magic because I was sealed here right?
My treasured silver mask is also useful, correct?”
“Well, moderately.”
“You really are an ungrateful great-grandson.”
Even when he said that his eyes never leave the book.
He read through books that are related to magic and when he thought up an original magic or new
theory he would start writing it down. He has been continuing to do that all this time.
In fact, he is so satisfied with that to the extent that I don’t want to disturb him.
Even so, there is a reason that I am here.
And it seems like he noticed that too.
“You have something to consult with me, right? Just say it. Don’t be reserved.”
“……My little brother got involved in the succession war.”
“If he is excellent, he will eventually be involved. That’s the succession war.”
“As I thought….I should see if someone intentionally got him involved huh.”
“That’s what I would do. If it turns out to be an enemy then I can openly settle it after all.”
It has been on the back of my mind.
Because the old general was assassinated, there were only two choices left for us. However, no matter
how much that old general favor Leo, he wouldn’t post a threat to the other three candidates. Still,
someone chose to assassinate him at such an early stage.
They may have been wary of Leo but the real intention was to use dealing with Leo as an excuse to be
hostile toward us huh.
“I have another question.”
Here is the former emperor.
90
In other words, he was the winner of his succession war. If he is my ancestor who overcame all the
tricks and schemes of his time, he should be able to answer my question. I was about to open my
mouth, but Gramp gave me a reply faster than I could even ask.
“If I was the second or the third son then I would assassinate the crown prince. That is your answer.”
“…..I haven’t asked anything yet though?”
“I thought that would be the thing you would eventually ask if you are talking about the succession
war. I was the eldest so I have been exposed to a lot of assassinations. Coming from me, the crown
prince who got himself assassinated is the bad one. The thing that will wait for you after the most
promising candidate was assassinated is just a muddy strife after all.”
“The only result from my father’s investigation was just death in action you know?”
“Maybe it was cleverly covered up or the Emperor’s close aids themselves were involved. Or…..maybe
the Emperor himself was involved. In any case, it is weird for a crown prince who is the closest one to
win the succession war to die on the battlefield. If your little brother entered the battlefield you would
do your best to protect him, correct?”
“Of course.”
“That’s your answer. There must have been many people who think so too. Even if they tried their best
to protect him but couldn’t it would still smell like a conspiracy. Considering the history of the
succession war up until now, something like this isn’t rare.”
Gramp said such a depressing thing.
However, he is persuasive.
And if all his guesses are correct, then everything that will happen from now on is a conspiracy of
someone.
In other words, there is something behind this Knight’s Hunting festival as well.
“Gramp. Do you have any magic that can command monsters?”
“ARE WE TALKING ABOUT MAGIC! GOOD! LET ME HEAR MORE ABOUT IT!”
Seeing Gramp suddenly turned to look at me, I let out a sigh.
Is it because he really doesn’t care about anything besides magic? He only shows that much interest
when we are talking about it after all.
For him to prioritize a topic about magic before his disciple as well as his great-grandson’s serious
consultation. This person might really be crazy as they say.
91
“Recently there has been an increase in the number of monsters in the empire. Among them, there are
some that are powerful rare monsters. I have been thinking if someone is manipulating them from
behind the scenes.”
“Fumu..….if it is just several monsters then there is a magic that can be used to command them but
such a magic that can command that amount of monsters doesn’t exist.”
“Is that so…..so I was just overthinking it huh.”
I thought that if it is magic related then it might be the second princess, Zandra’s doing but if Gramp
said that such a magic doesn’t exist then that must be the case.
If that is the case then the monster appearances are just a coincidence huh.
“Well, there’s no such magic but if it is a magic tool then there is one.”
“Magic tool?”
“It’s an ancient magic tool. It plays the tune that monsters like and it can be used to lure out monsters.
Depending on the user’s magic power, you can lure out quite a lot of them too.”
“Such a thing really exist?”
“According to the book it is. I think it was a flute called “Hameln”. If a person with a lot of magic power
used it, that person could make the monsters appear all over the empire.”
The people of old sure developed both useful and troublesome things huh.
In the era that magic was more developed than this one, the magic tools would also be much more
superior to ours. Such magic tools have been excavated from the ruins and have been made into
national treasures in various countries but there are also those that suddenly appeared as well.
“So there is something like that……Actually, the Knight’s Hunting festival will be held soon. The one
that each of the imperial family members leads the knights.”
“Hou? The current generation Emperor sure did something interesting huh. What’s the reward?”
“It’s the ambassador plenipotentiary position. Because of our circumstances, we can’t afford to lose
here either. But if the opponent has that flute in their hand then there’s no chance for us to win…..”
“That’s true. They can summon the monsters anywhere they like after all. If they don’t recklessly use it
then their victory is but guaranteed. But, if it’s me I would never choose such a stupid method.”
Gramp declared so.
I also agree with his words. I would not do such a stupid thing like that either.
At first glance, it would look like a good idea but in fact, it will only provide you with an immediate
profit.
92
If any of the three of my elder siblings are using that magic tool, I would, of course, join hands with the
other two. Even if it is a succession war if you do something that would disadvantage the empire you
wouldn’t be able to escape from your sin. If they keep persisting on doing such a thing, undoubtedly it
would greatly damage their power base.
I don’t think that those three would risk doing that. In other words.
“The person who is moving behind the scenes is not the main contender of this succession war huh.”
“That’s right. Regardless of whether that person is connected to the main contender or not, for that
person to lure the monsters into the empire and put the country in harm’s way, that person wouldn’t
be satisfied with just the position of ambassador plenipotentiary.”
“….Another troublesome thing has appeared huh.”
I can’t just look at it from the surface, I have to look at the bottom of it too.
It isn’t a simple problem of winning or losing the festival anymore. If I don’t find out the person behind
those monsters, this Knight’s Hunting festival will not just be a battle for the ambassador
plenipotentiary seat alone.
“Is there any way to obstruct the effect of that Hameln?”
“You can only break it. As long as there’s a sound that only monsters can hear, obstructing its effect
would be difficult.”
“So I can only focus on the Knight’s Hunting festival huh.”
“That’s right. But it is the same for their side as well. They judged that they can’t use the flute at the
festival, In other words, they have to use it before the festival begins. There is definitely something
going on behind this festival. Be careful.”
I received that advice and left the room.
———–
On my way back to the room.
I sensed a presence behind me. I was about to turn to face this unknown presence when the man
shouted toward me.
“Freeze.”
“…..You know that I am Arnold Lakes Adler right?”
“Of course.”
Saying so the man pulls out a knife.
93
To think that they would move this fast.
“I won’t kill you but I will have you sleep for a while.”
“I can’t really just say yes to that though.”
I slowly turn around.
During the moment that I was full of openings, the man did not move.
After I turned around, what I found is a man dressed in back. A typical assassin look. But since he said
that he won’t kill me,
“Wh, What did you do…..!?”
“I stopped your movement with a barrier. Calling out and say that you won’t kill me really bite you
back isn’t it.”
There is no doubt that he is a skilled assassin.
He was able to infiltrate the castle with such heavy security after all. But even such a skilled assassin
couldn’t guarantee that he can inflict a wound that would make the target out of commission without
endangering the target’s life.
That’s why he called out to stop me. And that gave me the time to construct this barrier.
Well, even if he didn’t do that, I always have a detection barrier deployed around me anyway. There’s
no way that anyone could approach me without me noticing.
It would be a suicide to go out in the middle of the night without caution after all.
“Tsk….! You are not just an incompetent prince huh!?”
“Well, calm down and just answer my questions. When you infiltrated the castle you have someone to
guide you right? Who is that?”
“Fuh! I will not talk! If I say the name of my client I die!”
“So you don’t deny it. Okay, I get the gist of it.”
“! ?”
Only those three can interfere with the castle’s security.
If someone other than that wants to guide an assassin into the castle then it would take a lot of
preparation. That is unthinkable. After all, the reason someone would target me would be because of
Elna.
94
“To sent assassins to attack me to prevent Elna from taking part in the Knight’s Hunting festival, that
is quite underhanded huh. It is only natural for me to prepare for that.”
“Fu…that’s the same on our side! Get him!”
At the same time, someone appeared behind me without showing his presence.
The man that appeared there was Sebas.
“It seems they are acting in a group of four. I’ve already put the other three out of commission, Arnold-
sama.”
“Good work, Sebas.”
“Wh, at…..?”
“Do you really think that I would let Arnold-sama walk alone in the middle of the night? You seem to
be looking down on us huh.”
“Kuh…..!”
“Now….spit it out. Who are you working for?”
I erect a soundproof barrier and start casting an illusion spell, it is a spell that shows you the thing
that you are most terrified of. I can’t see what he is seeing but the image should be vivid for him.
Surprisingly, I got to know the name of his client with just that.
“HII ! ! ? ? F, FORGIVE ME! ? PLEASE FOR GIVE MEEE! ! ! ! ZANDRA-SAMAAA! ! ! ! I, I DIDN’T TALK ! I
DIDN’T SAY A WORD ! !”
“Hee….so you are an assassin of Zandra’s apprentice huh. Seem like you underwent some tough
training, aren’t you.”
“To bind her subordinates with fear, it really seems like what that person would do. What shall we do
with them?”
“Even if we get rid of them, we can’t do any damage to Zandra. But if we kill them the clean up would
be troublesome. Just find some suitable place to put them in, we might have a use for them later after
all.”
“As you wish.”
I took a sidelong glance at the man who is still seeing the illusion of Zandra and turn away from him.
For her to send an assassin at this timing, it would mean that Zandra has nothing to do with the
monster appearances. She was trying to get rid of me because she was aiming for the seat of the
ambassador plenipotentiary at the Knight’s Hunting festival. If she willing to go this far, she shouldn’t
be the one who is behind the monster appearances.
95
“Now, I wonder who did it.”
Leaving behind that word, I returned to my room.
96
Commence
The largest city in the eastern part of the empire: Kiel
This city that is the center of the Knight’s Hunting festival is now jam-packed with people.
The merchants mustered their wit and come up with various kinds of stalls on the street of Kiel. Just
by walking around you would find a lot of strange things that you never have seen before being sold
on the street.
After buying and eating a lot of stuff, I and Leo are currently standing on the wall of Kiel.
“It is really a big crowd huh.”
“Yeah. it’s a good thing. The eastern people have been under the threat of monsters all this time after
all, I think something like this is necessary for them.”
“Right. They seem to think that it is father’s fault that the problem hasn’t been dealt with sooner. It is
like he is trying to use the money to please them. Like: Just enjoy the festival, or something like that.”
He must have guessed that the people’s dissatisfaction wouldn’t be dispelled just by doing this festival.
It would be meaningless to have a festival if the people don’t loosen their wallets after all. He just
spent his money as a trigger for them to do so.
The eastern people who were troubled by the monsters are very cautious. They wouldn’t spend their
money unless we do so first.
In a sense, he is quite a great person.
“So you are here?”
As we heard a voice coming from behind, we turn around at the same time.
Doing so, we found Elna standing there.
“Hey, Elna. How are you doing?”
“Unn, as usual, I guess. What about you?”
“It is as usual for me too. But I’m feeling better now.”
“Ara? Why is that?”
It is unusual for Leo to say something like this.
He is a guy who always plays it safe after all.
97
I sense troublesome things coming my way again.
“On our way here, I have been looking around the villages that were damaged by monsters. I think it is
our duty as a member of the imperial family to help them. If I win I will get the reward money anyway
so I donated the money I have to those people on our way here.”
“…..So you’ve been doing something like that………”
“Haa…and what were you doing in the meantime, Al?”
“Shopping at the stalls.”
Elna touched her forehead and sighed when I showed her my spoil of war, the grilled earth-lizard.
You don’t have to let out such a huge sigh.
“If Al has at least one of Leo’s good points then I can feel relieved as your childhood friend though…..”
“Nii-san has a lot of good points you know? People just don’t notice them.”
“Well said. As expected of you, Leo. As a reward, I will let you take a bite.”
“Thank you. Nn? It is unexpectedly good huh.”
“Right? I have a talent for finding good stuff from the stalls you know.”
“That talent, I don’t think it is necessary for a prince though…..Alright, we’re going. Leo too, the festival
will start soon so you should head back too.”
Urged by Elna, I quickly stuffed the grilled earth-lizard into my mouth.
The Knight’s Hunting will soon begin.
———–
“Our empire is a country with little experience of monster damages. Because of that, our response is
lagging behind. This time the people of the east have suffered because of the lack of ability on my part.
I am truly sorry. I want you to please forgive this foolish emperor of yours.”
Father is giving a speech in front of the crowd.
Our turn will come a little later.
I was using a room inside the lord’s mansion as a waiting room when a guest has come in.
I thought that it would be Elna or Finne but the person that appeared there was a little unexpected.
“Christa….? What’s wrong?”
“Nii-sama…..”
98
That person is Christa Lakes Adler, the 12 years old third princess of the empire.
My little sister with glossy blond hair and purple eyes. In the future, her beauty should be able to rival
that of Finne. People said that her beauty is like that of a doll. That is because Christa is a child that
usually shows little of her facial expression.
Carrying her favorite bunny doll, she expressionlessly staring at me. Looking at her appearance, she is
really like a doll. However, her eyes are slightly shaken. This is a sign that she is feeling anxious.
“Come in. What’s wrong? Something is troubling you?”
“UUn…Christa isn’t troubled….the people here are the one in trouble.”
Such a confusing answer.
Most people would just dismiss her with that but I can’t do that with Christa.
I sit Christa on a chair and crouch down to match her eyes level.
This child is a special existent among the imperial family.
No one has noticed it. No, they might be pretending to not noticed it but this child was born with an
innate magic.
Normally, magic is something that you have to train in order to use it but there are few people in this
world who can naturally use magic. Those who can use innate magics are extremely valuable and
powerful. The reason is because that person is the only one who can use such magic. It is something
that can never be used by others.
Christa is one of them.
Her ability is probably a future prediction or something similar. When the Crown Prince passed away,
she was crying in front of me and saying that our brother is dead.
If the fact that she can do such a thing get out, someone like Zandra would gladly make use of her.
That’s why I told her not to talk about it with anyone and if she sees something, she should come to
me. The fact that she came here must mean that something will happen.
“What did you see this time?”
“….This city was surrounded by monsters…….”
Christa’s ability is still unstable.
Sometimes she would see the image of the future but to Christa, those images are something close to a
nightmare.
Moreover, it doesn’t mean her vision will come true every time. Though, there are times that she was
correct as well.
99
That’s why I can’t leave it alone.
“You didn’t clearly see the death of anyone right?”
“Un…..”
“I see. You did well telling me this. You made it much easier for me to act.”
“…..Nii-sama is going too?”
“Yeah. I can’t stay with you.”
“……….”
Christa has a dissatisfied expression.
She probably doesn’t like having to be left alone with her anxiety. Even so, I have to go.
In the first place, if the city is surrounded by monsters, it would be easier to deal with if I am outside.
“Excuse me. It’s Finne.”
Finne entered the room at a good timing.
She has sweets in her hand as well.
Nice.
“Christa, I will introduce you. This is my friend, Finne.”
“Pl, Pleased to meet you, Your Highness Christa. I am Finne von Kleinert.”
“I know. Blaue Mowe. the most beautiful person in the empire.
“You know well.”
I am stroking her head but Christa’s expression doesn’t change. But it doesn’t seem like she dislikes it.
Christa is only emotionally attached to me, Leo and our eldest sister who is currently at the border.
She doesn’t let her guard down even to our real father so her surrounding doesn’t know how to treat
her.
Of course, this time she has to remain here, but I can’t really leave her alone like this.
“Finne. Sorry, but can you stay with Christa for me?”
“Nii-sama is enough…….”
“Finne is trustworthy. Of course, much more than a guy like me. Moreover, her sweets are superb you
know? You like that right?”
100
Saying so I take out the candy from the candy bag that Finne is carrying and show it to Christa.
It is a rabbit-shaped cookie.
Christa whose mouth is now timidly shaking has her gaze fixed at Finne.
Seeing that, I made a bitter smile.
“Congratulation. It seems she likes you.”
“Eh? She is…..?”
“Unless this child took a liking to someone, she wouldn’t be staring at them like this. She has no
interest in others after all. Christa. Until I and Leo come back, you have to stay with Finne alright?”
“Un……”
“So that’s that. Sorry, but can you stay with Christa as much as possible?”
“Understood. If that’s Al-sama’s wish then I will happily comply.”
Saying so, Finne smile and start giving more sweets to Christa.
For a moment, the word “Feeding” came to my mind but since it would be rude of me I swallowed it
down.
Then I heard a loud cheer from outside.
Perhaps father’s speech is already over.
From here on, we must play the leading role.
“Now, let’s go. Christa. We have to show our faces to the people.”
“…….”
“Don’t make such a face. It couldn’t be helped right? We are the imperial family after all.”
“…….Nii-sama always slacks off.”
“I don’t this time, right? C’mon, let’s go.”
I pull Christa’s hand and leave the room. Finne is following behind us.
Then at the same time, a troublesome person also came out of her room.
“Ara? Baby-sitting is it, you sure are carefree Arnold. Is it because you partnered up with the Amsberg
house?”
The Second Princess Zandra.
101
Christa immediately hid behind me. Seeing that, Zandra’s expression unpleasantly distorted.
“Sister. Isn’t Putting it as babysitting is a little harsh. It’s natural for a brother to take care of his little
sister right?”
“Annoying, it seems you still have some leeway to give me such an answer huh.”
“You looked irritated my sister. What’s wrong? Was there something that didn’t go as you planned?”
Hearing my comeback, Zandra’s expression turned wrathful for a moment but it immediately turns
back to normal. She must have realized that resorting to violent here would just be an unnecessary
show of her weakness.
Well, even if she doesn’t get angry, I already know that she was the one who sent those assassins. But I
don’t have to say that.
“Prepare yourself. I will teach you that no matter how powerful a sword is it’s meaningless if you can’t
use it.”
“Fuhn! What can someone like you teach anything to anyone?”
Hearing our conversation, Gordon appeared.
Seriously, these two can’t be satisfied unless they duke it out with each other huh.
However, Gordon’s sharp gaze landed on me. For a moment, I felt like my heart was grabbed.
As expected of someone who has been so successful on the battlefield. His bloodthirst is quite
something. I don’t use my magic then he would definitely instant-kill me.
“How is it? Arnold. Don’t you want to hand your sword over to me? It is still in time you know? Ask
our father, cry and beg him that you are not suitable for her and tell him that the worthy one is me.”
“Unfortunately, I have no such intention, brother. It would make me appeared like I am questioning
father’s decision. Father is really scary after all.”
“Hmph, you don’t want to share your treasure with others huh. That treasure would end up rotting.
Well fine. I will crush you together with the woman over there.”
“That’s my line.”
Zandra stares daggers at Gordon.
We used that chance to sneak away from that place.
Nothing good would come out if I get involved with such a fight.
“Nii-sama….I’m scared…..”
102
“It’s okay. Finne is with you. Moreover, if something happens, I will come and save you. I promise.”
“Really…..?”
“Yeah, really.”
Saying so I squeeze Krista’s small hand.
Maybe she was assured by that, Christa show me a small smile.
Then after all the children of the Emperor gathered on the balcony, the Emperor announce with a loud
voice.
“For this festival! The knights of our imperial knight order are swearing their loyalty to each of my
children! My children respect the knights and the knights honor my children, together they will work
with each other and confront powerful monsters! We are the imperial family! If there’s an enemy of
the empire, it is our duty to annihilate them! Go! My children! My Knight! From this moment, I hereby
commence the Knight’s Hunting festival! ! !”
“OOHHHHH ! ! ! !”
“GO FOR IT, PRINCE ERIC! !”
“No, this time it is for Prince Gordon’s time to shine right?”
“Princess Zandra will surely show us a fantastic tactic!”
“I will support Prince Leonard! It’s the first time I met such a kind person!”
The knights led by each of the children left the mansion and go to the frontline.
This time, only Christa remains in the mansion while everyone else goes with their knights to hunt the
monsters.
Those children are flying their own banners that were created just for this day.
My banner is a white cross on a black background. On the contrary, Leo’s is a black cross on a white
background. They are quite easy to understand. The pattern is completely opposite of Leo’s after all, it
is easy to tell which banner is mine.
But it doesn’t like I hate the design.
“Are you ready?”
“Of course, let’s go.”
Saying so, I make my horse go forward.
Behind me is the third knight order led by Elna.
103
The only one who received the cheers is just Elna but that is fine with me.
I am the shadow that works behind the scenes after all.
If there’s someone planning something from the shadow then I can just go behind their back and take
them down.
TLN: Been meaning to ask y’all this but do you prefer Aniue, Aneue, Chichiue over brother, sister and
father…….leave comment down below.
BTW, that’s the end of second Arc…….Next chapter will come out after Takioto-kun got his Ninja skill.
104
A Good Start
“HAAAAA! !”
“Oi oi……does anything goes for her…….”
My face cramped after I see how Elna is fighting.
Elna is fighting a pack of dark red wolves monsters called Bloodhound. Their number is more than
thirty. They are monsters that hunt as a pack and each has a rating of A-rank. As a pack of over thirty
bloodhounds, they are troublesome monsters that have the equivalent difficulty of AAA class.
However, Elna is kicking their asses without minding their number. Even a high-ranked adventurer
would be surprised by this.
Elna eliminated all the bloodhounds in a matter of minutes and took out a crystal magic tool to record
her result.
The result then immediately transmitted to the HQ in Kiel and be announced to the people. Our group
now takes the lead with the defeat of the monsters with the equivalent strength of AAA.
However, due to the nature of the festival, if the other groups just defeat a big one later, this result will
surely reverse.
“Al ! I saw a monster over there! We’re pursuing it !”
“No, I’m already tired. Can’t we just rest in a town around here?”
“Why are you being so careless? We are winning this alright?”
“I don’t remember saying that I want to win though….”
I can’t allow Elna and her knights to advance on their own like this.
The children of the emperor that headed out with the knights were equipped with a bracelet-shaped
magic device. The captains of each knight corp are wearing the same thing as a pair, these things were
designed to break if they are a certain distance away from each other. Around one kilometer I think.
With this, it is impossible for the knights to work alone.
“You may be fine but the others are already tired. It’s just the first day so the score won’t be that far
apart. The festival is three days long anyway, let’s take this slowly.”
“You are really…..”
“Ehh? I am under the impression that I am your superior officer though? Are you going to disobey my
order?”
“Kuh…..Understood. I will follow your order…..”
105
“Good. Then, let’s head to a nearby town.”
Saying so, we moved to the town.
This town is also in a festive mood, we head to the inn that the Emperor booked in advance.
The whole eastern region is in a festive mood. Normally, a town like this would be in an uproar when
royalty and famous knights visit them like this. In this case, this town is all excited over Elna though.
Well, it’s good that they have a reason to get excited.
“They are really excited huh.”
“This is the Emperor’s aim. This festival exists to reduce the satisfaction of the eastern people after
all.”
Elna enters the room that was assigned to me.
What a rude fellow, she didn’t even knock. I was the one who opened the door for her though.
“At least knock the door can you.”
“Ara? Do I really need to?”
“Then let me ask you this. What would you do if I enter your room without knocking?”
“Immediate slash I guess.”
“ISN’T THAT TOO UNREASONABLE ! ?”
I retorted without thinking.
Thanks to that, the wine in my hand spilled a little. AAa, what a waste.
“You really aren’t suited to be a royalty huh……You just spill a drink don’t make your face like it is the
end of the world.”
“To think that you don’t value the drink even though you are a knight. You are really an Ojou-sama
before a knight huh. You don’t understand anything at all.”
“I don’t want to hear that from a young master who never even left the imperial capital……Rather, is it
okay to start drinking now? I won’t help you if you get a hangover tomorrow alright?”
Elna tiredly says that while sitting in a chair right across from me.
Without her armor, Elna’s rough appearance is much more vulnerable than usual. She is wearing a
white shirt and a short red skirt that allowed ease of movement. My eyes naturally went to her
generously exposed beautiful legs. Then I noticed something.
106
Yes. it was several years in the past when I was still a kid. I was a healthy and evil young man. If there
are beautiful girls, I would surely check them out. If I may say it, I feel like Elna’s chest hasn’t grown
any bigger ever since several years ago.
“Al~? Where are you looking at I wonder?”
“Your chest.”
“AT LEAST TRY LYING TO ME! MOU…….!”
Saying so, Elna hides her modest chest.
However, without minding that, I keep staring at her chest. Elna is 17 years old, one year older than
me. But considering that and the size of her chest, it is, how should I put this, unfortunate. The word
miserable might be more accurate though.
Finne, on the other hand, is definitely big. Rather, even with her loose clothes, she is still bigger. With
all that training, it seems like the nutrient never gets to her chest after all huh.
“Stay strong.”
“Don’t say that so seriously! What! Is that the only thing you can say after staring at it all this time ! ?”
“I just thought that it hasn’t grown at all. So it really doesn’t get any bigger huh…….”
“IT IS! IT JUST GROWING SLOWER THAN OTHER PEOPLE! IT’S NOT SMALL OKAY! !”
“…….I see.”
It is a painful theory but I will accept it. This is for Elna’s sake.
As I was thinking so, Elna’s shoulder began to shake with anger. Oops, this is not good.
“I, I think it is a good thing you know! There will be someone somewhere that will lust after that
flatness you know!”
“DON’T SAY FLAT! It just developing slower than other people! A few more years and it will be huge!”
“Isn’t that impossible……at best it would just be average right?”
“Al…., do you want to do some post-meal exercise……?”
“IT WILL IT WILL! IT WILL DEFINITELY GROW BIGGER SO CALM DOWN!”
Saying so, I get away from Elna who started breathing deeply as she did in battle.
Seeing me trembling in the corner of the room, Elna sat down again in her chair as if she had lost her
will to fight.
107
“Seriously…..you never change, Al.”
“People don’t change in just a few years. Just what kind of fantasy did you picture me in?”
“A normal prince you know, a normal one. At the very least, I don’t want others to make a fool out of
you……”
“It’s nothing you should be concerned about right? I have always been making a fool of after all.
Talentless and always play around without working, the dull prince who put everything on Leo. It is
strange when I am saying it myself huh.”
“I am dejected and bitter in your stead though……”
“Well, thanks.”
As I lightly thanked her, she glared at me.
Elna dropped her shoulder and sigh. She worried too much. And she isn’t a person that has enough
free time to be worried about me too.
“Do you really understand? It is exactly because you never said or done anything that they are making
fun of the imperial family. Some nobles are openly making fun of you, you know? I understand why
they are dissatisfying with you, you never do anything befitting of being a part of the imperial family.
But, the nobles are your subjects too, they have a duty to respect you, even if it just on the surface.”
“Even the nobles have the right to ridicule me. It’s normal to tell a no good guy that he is no good
right? I think that’s a good thing you know.”
“You are saying something like that again! They are not trying to advise you, you know? They are just
having fun looking down on you! This is different from the childish bullying when we were young!”
It is unusual for her to get heated up like this.
Did Gied let something slipped in front of her? Or was it the Minister? Either way, I’m sure that it upset
Elna.
Is that why Elna came to me so strongly.
“So? Do you think that you winning this for me would wipe away my bad reputation? What do you
want me to do?”
“As long as Leonard is aiming to become the Emperor, you will get serious too. Al, I believe in you. You
just always don’t take things seriously. You always are. Lazily avoid everything. The lower your
reputation, the higher Leo’s get. That’s why you never do anything seriously right.”
She is a person who is really looking at me.
As expected of a childhood friend.
108
However, if you understand that then you must already know my answer as well.
“I am fine as I am now. You too should stop getting involved with me after this festival.”
“BUT I ! “
“I was almost Assassinated.”
“……Eh?”
With that sudden word, Ella froze.
From the window, I can see the people of the town making merry.
I started explaining while looking at such scenery.
“At night, I was attacked when I was walking inside the castle. If Sebas was not there, I don’t know
what would happen. I don’t have to tell you the reason right?”
“…..is it…my fault…..?”
“This festival is important for the succession war. The position of ambassador plenipotentiary is on
the line after all. Naturally, my brothers and sister wouldn’t want to lose such a position. They would,
of course, want to get rid of their competitors. Even if that’s me.”
“That’s…..”
“Since you have been away doing your missions you might not know this but recently, my siblings are
quite merciless. They plan to do anything to get the throne. They know that only death is waiting for
them if they lose after all. They will not give up nor show any mercy. Even I, if Leo couldn’t become the
Emperor would be killed too. But, since a powerless guy like me suddenly grow in power, they
resorted to something like that. So don’t get involved. You are too powerful.”
Saying so, I effectively push Elna away.
This is also for Elna’s own good. It is not good for the renowned prodigy of the Amsberg house like
Elna to support an individual.
In the future, my siblings will surely move to undermine Elna. Not in her ability but in her political
power.
The Amsberg house was isolated in the past as well. That’s why they basically don’t step into politics.
It is the reason that Elna shouldn’t be participating in the succession war, the biggest political struggle
of the empire.
You will certainly have a powerful ally but you will surely create an equally powerful enemy. It’s best
to keep Elna at a distance, both emotionally and situationally.
109
“………I am sorry.”
“Don’t worry about it. Do your best in the festival alright.”
“……Un.”
Saying so, Elna dejectedly left the room.
Her back looked incredibly lonely but I couldn’t say anything.
Since then, our performance is in a rapid decline.
110
Tsunami Outbreak
For those who don’t know, Tsunami mean Tidal wave. It is a natural disaster that occur after a
volcanic eruption, earthquake.
————————————————————
“Kuh…..! How did it become like this ! !”
The morning of the third day. Despite Elna being bitter about the result, I think that this is just right.
Because of what Christa said, I was trying to stay as close to Kiel as possible and I am currently only
moving southward. Ever since the first night, the downhearted Elna didn’t object to my decision.
There’s no feeling that I would win this at all.
As a result, our monster encounter rate from the second day was greatly reduced. Well, factoring in
the monster’s habit, this is only natural.
Monster’s survival instincts are stronger than humans. That’s why they will not want to get involved
with those that are stronger than themselves.
“Al. are we stopping here…..?”
“Wait a minute. I’m thinking.”
Saying so, I felt an uncomfortable feeling that things have been going too much according to the
calculation.
Because of Elna’s rampage on the first day, the nearby monsters judged that she is dangerous and
decided not to approach her.
This might be common knowledge among the adventurers but to a knight like Elna, it was foreign to
her. They might be able to exterminate monsters but their monster knowledge can’t be compared to
the adventurers. If we are adventurers then we would proceed with caution and make sure to hunt
the big game on the third day.
The reason that I didn’t stop them despite that is that I was hoping for this kind of development.
Currently, the only ones who defeated the AAA-rank monster are only Gordon’s, Leo’s, and our group.
Each has defeated one of such monsters. For the time being, the three groups are in the lead including
us since we defeated the bloodhounds but that will soon change.
Even so, I continue moving south. The reason is that only Leo and his troops are in the south. If the
monsters are running away from Elna, they will definitely be fleeing to the south. As a result, those
monsters will be guided to Leo.
When I was planning this, I thought that I would be guiding the monsters to him as Silver but now I
am trying to do it with Elna. Thanks to that, Leo managed to defeat an AAA-rank monster.
111
The most certain way was for our group to win but the best result would be the victorious Leo.
Because of the result of the first day, I am assisting Leo like this because we have a possibility to win
the competition with the bloodhound achievement but it has been going too well.
If Leo gets to defeat another AAA rank monster it would be perfect but I guess that would be hoping
too much?
A captain-class in imperial knight order would be able to defeat an AAA monster. However, the ones
that have enough leeway while doing it might only be the top class captains. If Leo can’t manage to
defeat them then it would be useless to guide monsters toward him.
Moreover,
“It is almost time if they are going to make a move huh……”
“Al……?”
“Nn? Ah, sorry. I was thinking that Eric-aniue and Zandra-aneue were acting weird…….”
“I can’t find any more AAA-rank monster, I’m surprised we were able to find three just in the eastern
region though.”
“That’s true…..”
“Ca, Captain! Your Highness! P, Please take a look at this!”
When I was talking with Elna, a knight interrupted us and show us the crystal as if in a hurry.
What was reflected there was the current ranking.
We dropped to second place. The person that climbed to the first place is the Fifth Prince, Carlos Lakes
Adler.
“What’s the meaning of this?”
“Th, the rank suddenly changed M’am……maybe he has defeated two of the AAA rank monsters at the
same time……..”
“That’s impossible! You can’t do that unless you are an SS-rank adventurer or a top-class captain you
know! The captain that was dispatched with Prince Carlos was Captain of the Seventh Corp. I won’t
say that he’s weak but it is impossible for him.”
“He may not be fighting them directly. They might defeat them while they were sleeping or while they
are fighting each other. There are a lot of possibilities.”
“Isn’t that too much of a coincidence! ?”
Well, it’s normal to think that something like that is impossible. But it already happened.
112
I see. So you can’t bear it and finally show your tail huh. I was wondering if they were hiding it to
prepare for something bigger but if it’s Carlos then I’m convinced. He’s simply an idiot so he must be
used by someone.
The Fifth Prince Carlos is 23 years old. He is a man without any characteristics. He was never
described as excellent or incompetent. However, he always talked about his dream of becoming a
hero.
It is not difficult to control him if you stimulate that desire of his.
“What if it isn’t by chance? What if it is by some kind of foul play?”
“That is……”
“It’s useless to say anything here. The deadline is until the night of the third day. We are going to do
everything we can.”
Saying so, I mostly gave up looking for monsters.
Sorry but there are no monsters that approach Elna without escaping. It is impossible for us to make a
comeback at this point.
However, I don’t care that Carlos took first place.
Gramps said that his goal was not to win the festival. That came from the man who came out
victorious from the trickery of succession war and became an Emperor. He has enough credit to be
fully believed in.
And the nightmare that Christa saw.
If you believe in her nightmare that Kiel is besieged by monsters, I can only expect the worst
development.
Of course, Kiel is being guarded by its garrison but the imperial knights that have the duty to defend
the Emperor are now dispatched with his children. He is now vulnerable like never before.
The ones that are close to Kiel are only me, Leo and Carlos. The others are getting farther away from
Kiel as we speak.
He is planning to save the Emperor from the monsters while intentionally keep himself close to the
city huh, that Carlos.
He is an idiot but he shouldn’t think that it would go that smoothly.
“Please, be smart………..”
Muttering with a small voice, I wished to heaven for my brother to be more clever.
113
The ground is shaking.
The first person to notice this was Elna.
“Don’t tell me…..this is.”
“ELNA ! WHAT’S HAPPENING ! ?”
I get down from the panicked horse and asked Elna.
There’s certainly something going on but I can’t find out anything from where I am. I can’t even use
magic in front of Elna after all.
I will have to rely on her here.
Elna gets down from her horse and presses her ear against the ground.
Then she slowly gets up.
“….a horde of monsters is running …it’s a [Tsunami].”
“[Tsunami]……?”
“In a monster-rich area, sometimes the monster’s movement overlaps and becomes a huge
move……because we cornered the eastern monsters too much they are now fleeing together, there’s
no mistake…..!”
I see. That explanation.
That is the most reasonable, and it is easy to explain such a phenomenon with this.
It is definitely better than bringing up a flute that can command monsters. Carlos is probably going
with this explanation as well.
However, given my opinion as an adventurer, it is strange that monsters are fleeing in the same
direction all at once. The word [Tsunami] is related to volcanic eruptions, large storms, and natural
disasters. In this case, the only one who can be compared to such a thing is Elna. It would be one thing
if they are escaping from her but the footsteps are pretty close. It is too unnatural for them to ignore
her like this.
“Where are they heading?”
“At this rate……I think it will reach Kiel soon……”
“Can the garrison in Kiel hold them off?”
“I think that’s impossible……The Knight Commander is escorting the concubines from the imperial
capital for the result announcement tomorrow. There’s only a minimum number of imperial knights
by His Majesty’s side…….They can’t possibly hold on……”
114
It’s fine as long as the Emperor manages to escape.
They must have prepared enough escort to make sure of that. But that is meaningless.
This festival has the purpose to elevate the dissatisfaction in the eastern region, if the Emperor run
away on his own and abandon Kiel to the monster tsunami, the people will definitely become even
more dissatisfied.
At worst, it will cause a rebellion. If it goes that far then the person behind Carlos is quite vicious.
If there’s a war you can distinguish yourself. Whether it is Eric or Gordon, it is a plan that ignores the
safety of the people.
Even though they have the duty to protect civilians if they become an Emperor….
“That guy can’t be allowed to become an Emperor….”
“Al ?”
“….Elna. If I tell you to save Kiel Can you do it?”
“….Of course. It is our duty to protect His Majesty and the people after all.”
“You don’t even know the number of those monsters. You might die you know?”
“I am not afraid of death.”
“…..Does that apply to everyone?”
“Yes, Your Highness! We will protect it even if it cost us our lives!”
“We will definitely save Kiel !”
Elna’s subordinates each saying such a brave thing.
Don’t be afraid of death, putting their lives on the line. All of them are the words I hate.
I don’t want to hear those self-satisfying words.
“….Swear one thing to me. Elna. with that sword of yours.”
“Eh….? what?”
“To live. Everyone too. Swear that you will survive. If you guys do not swear this I will not let you
move a step.”
“Al……”
Elna muttered my name in surprise. She gets down to her knee with her sword to the ground and her
forehead on the hilt. Then her subordinates follow suit.
115
“I, Elna von Amsberg of the imperial knight order swears on my sword, I will not die.”
Everyone also swears the same.
With this, there should be no problem.
“Now, Let’s go! Al ! there are a lot of monsters so they might be able to turn the table on us…….”
“No…I will just be a burden. You guys go on without me.”
I said that and forcibly remove my bracelet. The bracelet that should never be removed, at this point I
am disqualified for violating the rules.
“A, Al……?”
“Ah, it came off. Can’t be helped then, how clumsy of me. Since it already came off, guess I will go have
a drink in the nearby town huh.”
“Why…..we still have a chance to make a comeback you know ! ? WHY! ?”
“I am already disqualified. Don’t worry about it. I was not disqualified because you guys are going off
on your own. I disqualified myself. So don’t worry about it.”
If I order them to leave me here alone they would just hesitate. That’s why I get rid of that seed of
hesitation.
Compared to the lives of the Emperor and the people of Kiel, the festival ranking is only a secondary
concern.
“Al…..you are……”
“Make sure to tell my father alright. That I broke the bracelet on my own.”
Since the Emperor has uttered his vow, the knights must never abandon the prince. Even if that’s the
prince’s order.
That’s why the responsibility fell to me who removed the bracelet.
This will not become something that can make the others put their blame on the knights. Well, if they
managed to save Kiel then there won’t be such a problem though. I have to think about what happens
if they fail after all. If they fail then the blame game will start. I won’t give them any chance to do that.
Maybe she guessed my intention, Elna’s face is like she is about to cry.
The other knights are also hanging their heads.
To those knights, I say.
“Knights, listen to my command.”
116
“…..”
“Save the Emperor and the citizen of Kiel. I don’t mind if Kiel is lost. Prioritize the citizen’s life.”
“Your Highness’s order…..we gladly accepted.”
“Oh and, Christa and Finne are there as well they must be terrified right now but could you do
something about them too.”
“Yes Your Highness. I myself will………I will leave some subordinates to look for them.”
Elna responds with a mixture of regret, helplessness, and sadness on her face.
The knights are the same.
Meanwhile, Sebas appeared behind me without any sound.
“Please leave escorting His Highness to me. Please don’t be worried, everyone.”
“Sebas….why…..”
“I was just worried, about my lord’s life that is. That’s why please leave him to me, Elna-sama.”
Elna who was told that she is not needed as an escort seemed slightly shocked. She might have taken it
as she isn’t even allowed to protect me. It’s not like that but I don’t have time to fix her
misunderstanding.
However, as expected of the knights. They all started to prepare their horses.
Then when they are leaving, I give them a parting word.
“[My] knights. I am leaving them to you. Only you guys can do it.”
The moment she heard that Elna’s eyes began tearing up.
However, she drew her sword and shook it off.
“Imperial knight, Elna von Amsberg will definitely answer Your Highness’s wish! I swear on my sword
and upon my name, I will annihilate all the enemies and save Kiel !”
“Yeah, I will leave it to you.”
After that, Elna and her knights set off at an amazing speed.
I felt that they were fast when I ride together with them but it seems they were still holding back a lot.
As they disappeared.
I called out to my one and only butler.
117
“Sebas.”
“Sir.”
“Make a preparation. From now on, it’s time for secret manoeuvering.”
“Certainly.”
Putting on my usual black robe and silver mask, I teleported away from that place as Silver.
118
S Class Bounty
Since the MC doesn’t appear, it will be a third-person perspective.
—————————————————–
“Your Majesty! Please run away!”
“I will not. Prepare the defense.”
When Emperor Johannes was informed of the approaching Tsunami, he chooses to stay.
He is thinking about his people……of course not. Such personal feelings were sealed when he became
Emperor. He simply judged that if he escapes this incident would lead to a riot or even a rebellion in
the eastern region.
To this end, he posted his small amount of imperial knights on the wall of Kiel and appointed a
commander. Then he donned his armor, took up his sword and went to the frontline himself.
“Everyone! Don’t let the eastern people suffer any longer! We will save everyone even if it cost us our
life ! !”
With the Emperor personally stand at the frontline himself, the morale has risen dramatically.
However, that is not enough to hold off the monsters that came attacking wave after wave.
Swarms of monsters were constantly coming from the east side of Kiel, and the area outside the city
walls was quickly filled with monsters. The garrison forces are fighting off the excited, mindless
monsters that are rushing at Kiel.
Johannes himself cut down many monsters with his sword but he was outnumbered.
There are three thousand men in the defensive force however the number of monsters is nearly three
times that.
Seeing his men inevitably falling one after another, Johannes clicks his tongue. They are clearly at a
disadvantage. He should be escaping but if he does the enemy won’t be just the monsters.
As Johannes was trying to come up with something.
He heard a burst of laughter from the sky.
“Ahahahaha! ! Look Look ! Nii-chan! The Emperor is having a sour face !”
“Yes, my little brother. This is truly amusing.”
Hearing the sudden slander, Johannes glare at the sky.
119
At that place is a pair of men.
One was a boy with silver hair. He has a short stature and laughing innocently like a child.
Another is a man with long blonde hair. The well-featured man lightly smiles as he looks straight
down at the Emperor.
What they both had in common were their strangely pale skin and their beauty.
“Who are you?”
“I’m Sam.”
“I am Dean.”
The Emperor was familiar with their names.
Then, when the Emperor saw their characteristic canines in their mouths, he laughed.
Those are one of the several demi-human species on this continent. The characteristic of a vampire.
Long-lived and powerful, the vampires rule over a part of the continent with only a few vampire clans
forming their nation.
Once considered a monster, they were a race that had been in conflict with humans in the past. But
now they have non-interference agreement and rarely show themselves before the humans.
Meanwhile, there was a duo whose name was widely spread among humans.
“It was the story I heard from my predecessor but…..there was once a vampire duo that committed an
act of cruelty and was chased out of their clan. The adventurer guild issue a bounty for both of them. If
I remember correctly, their name was Sam and Dean. The two-man group that was appointed the S-
rank monster designation. That’s you?”
“Yeah, That’s us!”
“The adventurer guild put us together with those lowly monster is something unforgivable. We will
never forget such humiliation. Of course, that applies to those who supported them as well.”
“Hou? What relentless revenge. My predecessor is no longer in this world. Are you planning to exact
your revenge on me instead?”
“OF COURSE! Humans are too fragile and easy to die after all.!”
“We gave up taking my revenge on the person. Our life span is different after all. That’s why we
decided to take our revenge on their offspring and their possessions.”
120
Hearing they said that they would take their revenge on the empire as a whole, Johannes clicks his
tongue. Normally he would have something to say back to them but the current situation suggested
that the Tsunami was caused by these two.
He was having his hands full dealing with the Tsunami, now that an S-rank enemy vampire has
appeared in addition to that, Johannes can’t possibly defeat them on his own.
If only his proud imperial knights were with him.
He was thinking that but he already handed those proud knights of his to his children.
They are far away from Kiel and even if they reacted immediately, those who would return to his side
would only be in a small number.
“Now then, if you are going to say something great like an Emperor, now is your chance you know. I
will suck your blood dry until you become a mummy and throw your corpse at the imperial capital
after all !”
“Fuhn! Try it if you can ! Even if I died, the empire will survive! My empire’s elites will hunt you down!
If you are not afraid of that then come and get me !”
“I will acknowledge that will of yours. However, no matter how much you howl there’s no changing
your disadvantage.”
Dean raised his right hand.
Magic power gathers in his hand and a black sphere emerges. It is different from the magic used by
humans. It is an attack magic that only possible for the vampires that possessed an enormous amount
of magic power.
“Regret making an enemy out of us and DIE! !”
A mass of magic power was thrown at Johannes.
Dean shows a terrible smile as he was sure of his victory but his smile immediately turned cold.
Before the lump of magic power hit Johannes, it was bisected.
“—Are you safe? Your Majesty.”
“Ooh…Elna, I’m glad you came. Don’t you have to protect Arnold?”
“….Please forgive me. I wasn’t able to obey your direct order…..”
Looking at the depressed expression on Elna, Johannes gets the general idea of what happened.
If she was riding along with Arnold, she wouldn’t be able to make it in time.
However, seeing that Elna, Johannes let out a smile.
121
“It’s a good feeling to be able to witness my son’s growth like this. It’s thanks to you, Elna.”
“Your Majesty….I am…….”
“Arnold sent you in. You accepted his feelings and able to make it in time. This really makes me happy.
With that said, will you let me witness your growth as well?”
Elna nodded at Johannes’s question.
She looks straight at the two enemies and prepares her sword.
“As you wish, Your Majesty. I will show you the sword of the Amsberg house.!”
“Hmph! What can a single human do! I know you, you are the knight that was paired with that
incompetent dull prince right! Since your prince was incompetent, he didn’t get that far huh. Ah good
grief, to think that such incompetence would get in the way of my brother’s plan.”
“Don’t let your guard down, Sam. Amsberg house is the family of heroes. They can’t be gauged with a
human standard. You must not think about that woman as a normal human.”
Dean warned, but Sam doesn’t seem like he is going to heed that warning.
However, the moment he saw Elna’s eyes, Sam renew his posture to full caution.
“ ! ! ? ? ?”
Sam’s body breaks out into a cold sweat like never before.
He took a stance with his magic-created scythe and take a little distance away from Elna. That was
completely a retreat but Sam didn’t notice that.
On the other hand, Elna hits Sam with violent killing intent and slowly rise up to the sky.
For an excellent mage, a magic that lets you float up into the sky is not difficult. However, a magic that
lets you freely roam the sky is rare. Elna herself is not a mage but she has already reached that
territory.
The Amsberg family has no shortage of skills needed for battle.
And there’s Sam who just stepped on a landmine of that prodigy of the Amsberg house.
“You just said something I hated the most……how dare you said that in front of me ! ! I will give you a
death sentence. Prepare yourself!”
“ ! Don’t look down on me HUMAN!!!”
Only a moment after, Sam attacks Elna with his scythe.
However, Elna evades his sickle and immediately counterattack.
122
Sam managed to block the blow with his scythe but the blow was heavier than he thought so he looks
at his brother.
“As expected of the prodigy of the Amsberg house. I understand why people called you this generation
hero. However, we will make you regret the day that you chose to oppose us, vampires!”
Dean joins the fight.
The three violently clashing above the city of Kiel.
Below, the Emperor is shouting to try to raise the morale of his force. The reinforcement from Elna’s
third knight corp pushed the monsters back a bit but there seems to be no end to the monster assault.
In a situation where he had to hold on for more reinforcements, a prince appeared.
“Father! Carlos is here!! This Carlos has come back, father ! !”
The fifth prince, Carlos. 23 years old.
A prince with a brown hair and gentle temper, the prince known for his gentleness. However, he has a
dreamy personality and long to show his brilliant in battle like the heroes’ tales of old.
To that Carlos, rushing to his father and the citizen’s side in crisis was his ideal development.
Many people look at him and rejoice at the reinforcements. To their rejoice, Carlos joyously leads his
troops to assist them.
“Your Highness! Please stand back! It is dangerous!”
“It’s fine! For I am the Hero!.”
It was the word like he was intoxicated in the moment but it was also grounded.
Not long ago, Carlos met Sam and Dean through a middle man. The plan was for Sam and Dean to
cause a scene and have Carlos solve the incident. In return, after Carlos becomes the emperor, he
would appeal to the adventurer guild to remove Sam and Dean’s bounty.
Carlos was convinced that Sam and Dean have a reason to cooperate with him. There hasn’t been a
case where the guild retracts their bounty. However, that’s within the power of the emperor. Even the
guild couldn’t ignore the will of an emperor of such a big empire.
That’s why Carlos believed in Sam and Dean. that they would retreat as soon as Carlos shows himself.
After he wiped out the remaining monsters he would be able to become the crown prince and live his
dream of becoming a hero.
That Carlos was blown away by Sam’s magic bullet.
“To think he actually came. That prince is really an idiot huh.”
123
“Don’t worry about such a small fry. Focus on your enemy! She’s coming!”
They never pay any attention to Carlos.
The reason was that they never see him as an equal business partner from the start.
The two just used Carlos. Similarly, if Carlos was only planning to use them he wouldn’t end up like
this. It was due to his naive nature that he trusted them.
With no time to regret his decision, Carlos’s consciousness flew away after he was hit by that magic
bullet.
One of the knights managed to catch him but his wounds were life-threatening.
However, the knights who came with Carlos were inspired by his appearance earlier and fiercely
fighting back the monsters.
The only thing Carlos managed to do, albeit poorly was turning the tide of the battle.
And with the little time, Carlos’s knights have bought, the situation is changing little by little.
124
The Eastern Knights
125
Back to Al POV.
I transferred to Leo’s side.
Nevertheless, transferring to an individual is very rough so I can’t do it with pinpoint accuracy.
Because my aim was off, I started flying toward him while blowing the dust cloud below me.
To already started moving at this timing, as expected of Leo. He is heading for Kiel and is rushing full
speed together with the knights.
I landed a distance away in front and wait for Leo to arrive.
After a little while, Leo noticed my presence and put his horse to a halt.
“……Silver right?”
“That’s right. Pleased to meet you Your Highness Leonard.”
“I don’t have time for a formal introduction right now. For you to appear like this, I can take it that you
are here as a reinforcement correct?”
“Yeah, that’s my intention. However, you should give up rushing there like this.”
“What do you mean?”
Leo asked with an unusually angry tone.
He must know that the tsunami has occurred and doesn’t want to waste any time heading to Kiel.
That’s exactly why I chose to show myself here.
I can’t let him head into that horde of monsters with this small group of knights.
“With that number of monsters attacking Kiel, even if you have the imperial knights with you, it would
be like pouring water on a hot stone.” (TLN: JP proverb meaning doing something that is bound to
fail.)
“You won’t know if you won’t try! There should at least be a single life that we can save!”
“That’s a splendid resolve but you can’t save the people with your feelings alone. Those knights
around you should know that right?”
Leo looks at his knights.
His expression seemed slightly upset after he saw the serious expression of the knights.
I press him once again.
“As long as the tsunami already occurred, you need an army to stop it.”
126
“Where can you find such army…..? Are you saying that I should stand aside because I can’t do
anything? My father, sister and the citizen, there are people I must protect there! If I forsake them I
will not be able to forgive myself!”
“Haa….I don’t remember ever saying that you should abandon them. I am just telling you that you
should prepare more war potential before you go.”
“…….?”
Leo was heated up but after he heard my roundabout words he gradually calmed down.
Finally, I cut to the main point.
“Prince Leonard, the knights of the east are not just the imperial knights around you.”
“….You are telling me to ask for help from the Lords in the area?”
“Such a foolish proposal! To use the knights under those local Lords, even if it is a prince’s order that
is still exceeding your authority! Even if they close their eyes and give up their knights, how many
days do you think it will take to mobilize those knights!”
The Knight Captain said that sounding irritated.
He must think that such a proposal was unrealistic. Well, it is true that it takes days to mobilize those
knights.
It is unrealistic to gather those knights however if it’s me, I can turn that into a reality.
“Leave the method to me. The question here is whether the prince has the will to do it or not. You
might be reprimanded after everything is over after all. Are you willing to accept that possibility? How
serious are you when you said that you want to save your family and citizen?”
“…..If I can save them I have no interest in my position. You can mobilize the knights under my name.
Tell me how.”
“Your Highness! ?”
“This is an emergency. If it is to protect His Majesty, I can endure anything. There’s no problem. Now,
Silver. Tell me how to save them.”
“…..that is a splendid determination. The method is simple. I will use transfer magic to open the gates
on the hill near Kiel. Using those gates, you will give them a speech. Explain the situation to those
knights and guide them to the gate.”
It was a ridiculous method.
With no proof that he is really the prince, he has to convince the confused knights to jump into a
suspicious magic portal.
127
Their immediate master is their Lord. If their Lord commanded them not to do it then it will all be
over.”
Everything will depend on Leo.
If he can only gather a few knights then I would be wasting my precious time and magic power.
However, it is still worth trying. The festival is still on going.
Carlos who is in the first place will probably be disqualified as well as I who was in second place. The
tied in the third place will be just Leo and Gordon. If he managed to put together the knights and hunt
those monster he should be able to win. Moreover, by organizing the confusing knights we can solve
this situation at the same time.
The only problem is whether Kiel can hold on until then. That’s why I sent Elna there. There should be
no problem on that end. If it is a situation where even Elna has a hard time with then charging with
Leo’s small number of knights wouldn’t solve anything anyway.
“What are you going to do? Are you not confident?”
“Right…..I don’t have such confidence. But, I will do it. Nii-san will probably tell me to give it a try after
all.”
“I can’t picture the dull prince doing that though.”
“You just don’t know him. My brother’s decisiveness is really outstanding, you know. Even now, he
must have decided to do something about this already after all.”
Hearing him, my eyes went rounded behind my mask.
To think that Leo thinks of me like that.
It doesn’t feel bad though.
“I see…. try it.”
Saying so I put my hands together. What I am right now is not a transfer magic for my personal use. It
is a magic to open a hole for others to pass through.
After a short time, a hole that connects to the hill is completed. It is large enough for about ten people
to enter at once.
Such a hole that is unstably distorting is not something anyone would want to jump into. So, I jump in
first.
Then without hesitation, Leo follows me.
My vision distorted for a moment but then I am now standing on the hill.
128
“So this is transfer magic…..”
“The real thing is after this.”
After I said those self-convincing words, I open the same hole in the seven major towns around Kiel.
Now, it all depends on Leo.
“I used a magic to amplify your voice. You can start now.”
“….Knights of the east who can hear my voice, please listen to me. I am Leonard Lakes Adler. The
eighth prince of the empire.”
Leo slowly speaks.
He knows that he can’t fail this. Without rushing, he makes sure that they are properly listening to his
voice.
He is being calm. This might actually work huh.
“At the moment, A Tsunami has occurred in the east and Kiel is in the middle of its path, they are in a
dangerous situation. Right now, I am gathering knights to go there with me. If you can hear my voice, I
want you to enter the transfer magic hole nearby and join me. You don’t have to ask for your Lord’s
permission. I want you to decide to do it by yourself. I will bear all the responsibilities.”
Though the speech has ended, Leo breathes in and pulls out his sword.
He then declares with a louder and more ecstatic voice.
“Protect the people of Kiel! Knights who still have their hearts! Knights who still have their courage!
Those who share my ideals, Join me! ! I look forward to your decision!”
As Leo concluded his speech, his figure was like father’s on the battlefield.
The imperial knights around him must also be affected, they are staring at Leo in awe.
However, only Leo stares at the hole with a serious expression.
There’s no one coming through them.
When I thought that we have failed. A young man emerged from one of the holes.
The young man was surprised by his first-ever transfer magic but once he saw Leo’s figure, he
hurriedly gets down from his horse and lowers his head.
“Knight of Hessen! Hans, reporting for duty! I have come to join you, Your Highness Leonard!”
“You did well, Hans. you have my gratitude.”
129
“No! It is I who should feel grateful! Ever since I heard that Your Highness has been visiting various
villages, it is my wish to fight under you, Prince Leonard ! ! Those who think so are not just myself!
They are currently gathering! Please wait for them!”
The thing that attracts people’s eyes and naturally gathers them is charisma.
Right now, by that definition, Leo is that charisma itself.
Through the holes, the knights are gathering one after another.
And at the end.
“My name is Folker, the Lord of Ulm! I have brought 500 knights to join you, Your Highness!”
An old man appeared riding on a horse.
He must already pass his sixties. His body build is good and all but the grey hairs on his head is
making me worry.
“Folker, I’m glad that you joined us but will you be okay?”
“I possess both heart and courage! Do you have something you are not satisfied with!”
“….No, if you are fine then don’t mind it. Thank you for joining us. You can charge in with me. I will be
relying on you.”
Looking at the strength in Folker’s eyes, Leo said that with a smile.
It may have taken him by surprise, Folker opens his eyes wide and immediately reply with a loud
voice.
“Ha, HaHa! Allow me to show you my power!”
“I will look forward to it.”
The Eastern Knights gradually gathered together, their number now exceeded three thousand. They
might be disorderly but their morale is high because they did not gather here by someone else order,
they are here because of their own will.
Seeing them, I feel assured.
With this, there should be no problem.
“Silver. Thank you for your cooperation.”
“I just act for the sake of the people as an adventurer. And it is still too early to thank me. You can tell
that to me again after we saved Kiel. Well, I’m going ahead.”
Saying so, I transferred to Kiel using transfer magic.
130
There, I saw a ridiculous sight above the city.
131
Noble
Finne POV
————————
“I’m scared…..!”
“It’s okay Your Highness. The knights will be here soon.”
Inside the mansion, Finne tried to sooth Christa by gently stroking her hair.
The maids came up to Finne with a troubled expression.
“Fi, Finne-sama….Umm….”
“What is it?”
“That’s….the town folks are demanding to enter the mansion…….”
The Emperor forbid them from leaving their homes.
However, they must be anxious from the battle that is happening nearby so they want to seek refuge
in the Lord’s mansion.
Finne has no intention to blame them for that.
“What about the countess?”
“She can’t decide so she said that it is up to Her Highness Christa and Finne-sama to decide……”
“I see….Your Highness. What do you want to do…….”
“…..I don’t know…….but, I’m scared…..”
Christa tightly grasps Finne’s clothes out of anxiety.
Holding that small hand, Finne give her a reply.
The Lord is now fighting at the Emperor’s side. The countess can’t make her decision because right
now Christa’s opinion is the most prioritized.
“I see…..then, are you going to forsake people who have those same feelings as yours?”
“That’s…..no good…..”
“Why is that?”
“…Nii-sama will get angry.”
132
“Yes, His Highness will get angry isn’t he. Now, how about we take the old, the young and the sick into
the mansion first?”
“Okay….”
“I will head out for a bit. Are you fine alone? Everyone is being anxious, I have to give them some
peace of mind.”
“……Un…….”
Christa still looks lamenting but Finne sits her on a chair with a smile. She then leaves the room after
she asked the maid to take care of Christa.
Finne head to the entrance.
There she saw the guards drew their swords at the people.
“Hurry up and return to your house! Didn’t you hear His Majesty’s order!?”
“I’m asking you! Please let us in!”
“YOU!”
“STOP THIS AT ONCE!”
At that dangerous situation, Finne shouted at the guards.
Although Finne herself is a daughter of the Duke, she was known for her reputation as the Blue Seagull
Princess, the name was bestowed by the Emperor himself and she was treated like a part of the
imperial family.
Here, the voice of royalty is the loudest. Therefore, the soldiers immediately let go of their swords and
kneeled.
“Fi, Finne-sama…..”
“The thing that you should draw your sword against is not the people right?”
“Yes, it is as you say. Forgive my rashness……”
Satisfied with their reply, Finne looks at the crowd in front of the gate.
Their number is not just a hundred or two.
She can see both commoners and nobles that came to visit the festival as well as the merchants. Each
and every one of them looked anxious.
“I am Finne von Kleinert. You may better recognize me by the name of Blau Mowe.”
133
Saying so she points at her blue seagull hair ornament.
It is the testimony of the eternal beauty given by the Emperor himself.
The people who know that the Emperor love this daughter of the Duke like his own all kneeled at
once.
However, among them, there were some young people who came to the front by pushing the other out
of the way.
“Oh! Finne-sama! It’s me! Gied!”
To Finne, that is the voice that she doesn’t want to hear the most.
The person that hit Arnold, his childhood friend whose action she can’t possibly overlook. Gied von
Horsvath and his entourage are smiling as they spotted Finne.
He selfishly pushes the other people aside with not a doubt in his mind that she would let them in.
Without joining the battle, he self-importantly finds a safe place to hide.
Looking at them, Finne felt like the noble’s blood in her had been defiled.
She had never felt that when she looked at her father. Even her good for nothing brother’s action
never makes her felt that way. Gied’s action has turned the word noble meaningless.
In order to gain respect, you have to be deserving of it.
That’s why Finne ignored him.
“We will accept the children, the elderly and the sick. People who are healthy please gather together in
the largest building that you can find and barricade the entrance. Tsunami is simply a big monster
movement. They are not interested in human life. In the unlikely event that the monsters enter Kiel,
everything will be alright if we can earn some time. I will open the gate now.”
“Fi, Finne-sama? It’s me! Gied! Have you forget?”
“I remember you well. Gied-sama of the ducal house of Horsvath.”
“Aah, I’m glad. Then can we get in?”
He tries to enter the mansion as though it is only natural.
If you think about Arnold, the wise choice would be to let him in. there’s no need to create an
unnecessary enemy after all.
However, Finne chooses not to do it. Even it is in contrast to Arnold’s wish.
That’s why.
134
“Know some shame! You didn’t even consider fighting at His Majesty’s side and look for a place to
guarantee your safety! Don’t you feel sorry for your predecessors who created those lineages of the
Horsvath house!?”
“Wha…..!? You! Who do you think I am!”
“It doesn’t matter who you are. The only ones who can enter the mansion are the children, the elderly
and the sick. The others please go somewhere else. This is the decision of Her Imperial Highness
Christa. If you insist on wasting any more time than this, you can make an appeal to His Majesty later.
However, at that time I wonder who will be the person that will be punished for this, it is clear as day
to me though!”
“Kuh….! Don’t get carried away just because Leonard is backing you! Remember this! I will never
forgive you!”
With that, Gied leaves the mansion with his entourage.
After seeing that Gied went away, Finne deeply exhales and orders the guards to open the gate with a
smile.
Seeing Finne’s earlier action, the people leave their children, elderly and sick people in their care and
went away without any complaint.
After she took in the people, Finne returned inside the mansion and ordered the servants to barricade
the entrances.
“Please barricade it as tightly as possible! When the monsters arrive let hold it down together. It will
be fine as long as we can manage to hold them off until the change their course.”
“Yes! Finne-sama!”
“Finne-sama! Her Highness Christa is calling for you!”
“I’ll go right away. Everyone, you don’t have to be scared. The knights will definitely come to save us.”
Finne tells that to everyone inside the mansion as brightly as possible.
She thought that at least she has to be the one who has a smile on her face. In fact, that is all she can
do.
As a daughter of the Duke, she can use some magic but she is only good at recovery magic. She can’t
use any combat magics that are often used in battle.
She can’t fight as brilliantly as Elna.
She felt bitter about that. She left her territory to be useful to Arnold but so far she hasn’t been useful
to him at all.
135
For Finne, taking care of Christa is the first task that Arnold asked her to do. That’s why she thought
that she wouldn’t leave her side no matter what, but.
“If we don’t take the flute the monsters will keep coming! !”
Seeing Christa screaming, Finne remembered something.
It is the conversation between Arnold and Christa.
Christa said that Kiel would be surrounded by monsters. And it actually happened.
As long as Arnold took her words seriously, Finne judged that she has to believe her as well. That’s
why Finne tightly hugged Christa.
“Your Highness. It’s okay. I will look for that flute. Can you tell me where it is?”
“No….you will die…….”
“It’s fine. I am lucky after all. And if it’s getting dangerous, Al-sama will surely come to save me.”
“…..Really?”
“Yes. it’s true. That’s why please tell me. Where can I find that flute?”
“….I saw it falling off the clock tower……..it is the cause…….”
“Understood. I will go and get it.”
Saying so, despite the maid’s protest Finne headed to the clock tower, the tallest building at the center
of the city.
The scale of Kiel’s clock tower is different from that of the other cities.
It has the height of dozens of meters and is a tourist attraction of Kiel, a precious landmark.
Finne climbs up that clock tower with a ragged breath.
On the other hand, Elna is in a stalemate battle with Sam and Dean in the sky.
“Tsk! So irritating!”
Dean gave up attacking Elna straightforwardly. It is not impossible for both of them to defeat her
together but it will take too much time.
It’s time for them to resort to underhanded means.
Dean takes out the magic flute that can command monsters, [Hameln]. If he increased the number of
monsters, as a knight Elna will have to protect the Emperor.
136
If that happens, Dean and Sam will be able to gain the upper hand.
In an attempt to lure more monsters to Kiel, Dean put the Hameln to his mouth. However, Elna
intuitively felt that she can’t allow that to happen so she heads to attack Dean.
“I won’t let you!”
“Kuh!?”
Dean managed to evade her attack but the Hameln fell off his hand and is falling to the city of Kiel.
Seeing that, Dean hurriedly chases after it.
“Shit!”
“Come back here!”
That flute is not dean’s. It is something that their cooperator gave to them. Using that, Dean made a
plan involving Carlos to create this event.
However, their cooperator told them that they have to absolutely dispose of it afterward. It was their
promise to that cooperator.
Without that cooperator, it will be difficult to escape or even survive this place. Destroying that flute is
connected to their survival.
That’s why Dean desperately chased after it. Seeing Dean like that, Elna also felt that something was
off and chased after the flute.
Both of them clash in the sky many times, during which the flute rapidly falls toward the ground.
And when it approached the clock tower, a white hand extended from it and caught the flute.
“ ! ! ?”
Receiving the flute that was falling with strong momentum, Finne somehow managed to stay inside
the clock tower.
She let out a sigh in relief that she managed to catch it but soon she heard a sharp voice from Elna.
“Run away! Finne!!”
When she raised her face, Dean shot a mass of magic power toward the clock tower.
As a result, she lost her footing and fall.
However, Finne ignored that.
137
She knew of the danger from the start. This is why Finne threw the flute toward Elna who is heading
toward her. Then as she saw Elna caught that flute with a surprised look on her face, she smiles.
“Aah….I am finally useful.”
“Damn you!!”
To his anger, Dean shot another lump of magic power at the falling Finne.
She doesn’t have a way to avoid that lump of magic midair.
“FIIINNNNEEEEE! ! ? ?”
Elna shouted.
Entrusting Arnold to Elna, Finne closes her eyes.
The moment she did that, she felt something is flashing from the sky but Finne had no time to worry
about it.
Even though she already prepared to face death and close her eyes, the pain and shock she was
expecting never come.
Rather, she felt warmth.
When she fearfully opens her eyes, Finne was embraced by an adventurer wearing a silver mask.
Her words were robbed away by her surprise. She only told Christa that he would come to help her to
calm her down. She never thought that he would actually come to save her.
At the same time, there is someone who is as surprised as Finne.
It was Dean.
“You bastard……to be able to cancel out my magic bullet, Who are you……? Give me your name! !”
“……..Adventurer under the imperial capital adventurer guild, SS-rank adventurer, Silver……I have
come to defeat you.”
The characteristic silver mask and a black robe.
The adventurer who was known as the strongest adventurer in all of the empire’s history appeared.
138
Price of the Plan
The scene I saw when I transferred in was Elna fighting what seems to be a group of two vampires.
That much, I wouldn’t be surprised.
What surprised me was that Finne was nearby.
She kept looking up while she climbed up the clock tower.
Then when she saw Elna hit the flute off from one of the vampires’ hands, she reached out and caught
it.
The moment I saw that I already began to move.
Descending at maximum speed, I used as much magic as I could to descend toward Finne like a
meteor.
The vampire that got his flute hit off his hand destroys the clock tower and Finne was thrown out.
At that time, Finne didn’t reach her hand out to Elna but threw the flute toward her instead.
Her expression as she keeps falling looked satisfied. I hate that kind of expression so I accelerated
even further.
“Damn you!!”
The vampire releases a magic bullet toward her.
The moment it is going to hit Finne, I blocked it and hugged her midair.
Confirming her warmth, I was relieved. I made it. I saved her in time.
This might be the most panicked I have been recently.
And…..It has been a long time since I am this irritated.
“You bastard……to be able to cancel out my magic bullet, Who are you……? Give me your name! !”
“……..Adventurer under the imperial capital adventurer guild, SS-rank adventurer, Silver……I have
come to defeat you.”
The anger infused into my quiet voice.
This is an oath. I will never let him escape.
“Sil,ver-sama…..”?”
“….Don’t force yourself.”
139
“I am really sorry …I will not do such thoughtless things aga—……”
“….I will hear you out later. But….you did well. Leave the rest to me.”
When I gently stroke her head, Finne’s cheeks begin to dye red.
I put the still embarrassing Finne on the ground and stare up at the vampires on the sky.
Among the vampires, only two would plan such a large scale crime like this.
The vampire heretics that the guild placed a bounty on their heads. S-Class bounty, Sam and Dean
brother.
“Silver-sama! Good luck…..”
“Yeah, leave it to me.”
After answering her, I immediately soar to the sky.
Both Sam and Dean are on guard and stare at me.
Well, that’s only natural. The condition to become an SS-rank adventurer was to defeat an S-rank
monster. In other words, I have defeated something that is on the same level as them or even
something stronger before.
“To think that an SS-rank adventurer would show up here…..I am surprised.”
“Damn it! Troublesome guys appearing one after another! Don’t get in the way of Nii-chan’s plan,
damn it! !”
The shorter one that screamed out first is the younger Sam huh.
In other words, the stronger one is the Elder.
“It is a surprise for me too. I thought that you guys were behaving yourselves when the guild put a
bounty on your head. If you guys make a scene an SS-rank adventurer would come for you after all.
Are you tired of living in fear?”
“Don’t make fun of us! We were just being careful!”
“But it seems like your patient ran out huh. The garrison force and the knights will deal with the
monsters, and since I am already here, your plan is over.”
“Hmph! Do you think you have won? You took the flute away but what of it? The monsters are still
rampaging, if we defeat you and the hero here it will be our win! !”
What is up with these guys.
They want to fight me and Elna at the same time?
140
Surprised, I glance at Elna. She is making an unamused expression.
“You are looking down on me huh. Even though they barely able to fight with me together.”
“It’s you who is looking down on us! We are still haven’t got serious yet!”
“Then show me! I will destroy you in the name of Amsberg!”
“No, Elna von Amsberg. I know that you are enthusiastic about this but the one who is going to put
them down is me.”
I said that while looking at Elna who is taking a cool stance with her sword.
Hearing so, Elna turned toward me.
She knitted her eyebrows and her expression is saying that she finds me unbelievable. That’s not an
expression that should be on a girl’s face anymore.
“Silver? I don’t know if there is something wrong with my ears but I felt like you said that you want to
steal my prey?”
“I don’t remember putting it like that. There might be something wrong with your ears after all. If you
are a knight then go protect the Emperor. I will be their opponent.”
“You! The meaning is the same isn’t it! It’s you who should back down! I set my eyes on them first!”
“The Emperor’s surrounding seems unprotected though?”
“It is the order from that same Emperor! And I can’t forgive them! They said the words that I hate the
most! I already decided to cut them down myself……Back down or I will cut you down too.”
Scary.
Isn’t she completely enraged. What did they say to her? Seriously.
And I want her to go assist Leo too.
“Ha! so carefree huh. Isn’t it good that a hero and an SS-rank adventurer are here? Now we are nice
and equal right?”
“Equal? I think that you are completely outnumbered though?”
“Silver. Don’t you know what the situation is like below? Even now the Emperor might get killed you
know? It couldn’t be helped since that hero over there seem like she wants to fight with us no matter
what. How about you go help him instead? If you are an adventurer of the imperial capital, the
Emperor must be important to you right?”
Certainly, they are outnumbered now.
141
It is better for one of us to go down and help them. If it’s now that is.
However, these guys have a huge misunderstanding.
“I do not belong to the empire. I belong to the guild. Adventurers work to protect people across the
continent but we are not obliged to protect their nation. We weren’t accepting payment from the
countries after all. Honestly, it doesn’t matter to me even if the Emperor’s life ends here.”
“What?”
“If you don’t want him to die then you just have to have someone else protect him. I am here to protect
this city and its people, not the privileged. I am protecting the people of this country not the country
itself. There must be those who were living off the tax money or those that were promised some kind
of position in this country. It is the duty of those imperial family and their knights to protect the
empire. If they do not work now then there’s no worth to their existence. That’s why I will never
perform that job for them.”
“Their job?”
Dean seems to question my wording.
And as if to immediately answer his question, they appeared.
At the south of Kiel.
The sound of feet kicking the ground was heard from the other side of the horde of monsters. Like the
sound of lightning, the sound is gradually getting louder. Then one of the members of the imperial
family appeared.
“That is……!?”
“Knights! I, the 8th Prince Leonard Lakes Adler command you! Protect the city of Kiel! ADVANCE! !”
Saying so, Leo led the charge with thousands of knights.
The monsters couldn’t react to the sudden appearance of the knights.
Sam and Dean tried to put them to a stop but I and Elna stand in front of them.
“Silver, let’s do it like this. I will give that one to you, this one is mine.”
“That’s a good proposal. I accept.”
Once we settled on our target, we prepare for battle.
Below, the knights led by Leo sweep away the monsters like a flood. The agitated monsters can’t see
anything except what is in front of them. There’s no way for them to react when they are attacked
from the side.
142
Well, after a while they should be considered the reinforcement as a threat and begin their
counterattack. It should be fine for now though.
In the meantime, let’s get rid of this guy.
Now the Defence of Kiel has entered its final phase.
“Kuh! Damn you HUMAN!!”
Dean unleashes countless magic bullet while moving around but I follow after him while intercepting
them.
The sky shines bright like there’s a firework.
Dean seemed to be frustrated by that scene.
It seems these guys really weren’t serious when they were fighting with Elna. He is clearly increased
in power. Perhaps he was saving his power to get away but it seems that’s no longer an option
anymore so he finally got serious.
Dean approaches me with the vampire characteristic sharp fangs.
He must have judged that he can’t beat me in a magic fight. As expected, he is really used to fighting.
“Tsk!”
I clicked my tongue while using magic to intercept him but he splendidly evades it.
I was thinking about widening some distance but before I could do that, Dean punched me in the gut.
“Guh!”
“Ha! What’s wrong!? SS-rank adventurer!”
“Shut up!”
He avoided the magic that I fired in return and circle around my back.
This is bad. I used magic to protect my body.
He put his hands together and slam it down at me.
Feeling a shock like I was hit by a hammer, I felt the impact of my body hitting the city street.
“That’s hurt! Don’t just do whatever you want damn it…….”
“What’s wrong? Can’t you do anything against the serious me?”
143
“The heck are you doing!? You are not that strong right!? Are you still holding back? You are still
holding back right!! Do you think that your stance is so cool or something? It’s super lame!!”
Being looked down by the opponent, and my ally somehow bad mouthing me.
Seriously, being an adventurer is not that easy.
However, I will accept this much.
For my precious brother and the knights that got involved in this for his sake. For the soldier that
should be running away but chose to stay and fight.
And for the people in this city.
If it is for them I won’t feel even an itch to this level of pain.
However, there is a limit to how irritated I can be.
“Hmph! I was a fool for being afraid and hide away from the likes of you! You are just human in the
end!”
“So you really were in hiding. Even vampires have their low point huh.”
Saying so, I stand up as if nothing has happened.
There’s no wound on my body. Of course, there’s no damage either.
Dean was surprised by that but he immediately noticed that his surroundings were strange.
“Guwahhh!! MY ARM! ! Ah, ARe?”
“Ouch! Ouch….? It healed?”
Not only the garrisons force fighting at the wall of Kiel but also the knights led by Leo who assaulted
the horde of monsters, no one has died ever since I showed myself here.
If you get hurt, you will instantly recover.
“You bastard…..!? Don’t tell me, you were fighting while erecting a healing barrier!?”
“You are half right.”
The things I cast was not just the healing barrier.
When I arrived, I formed a healing barrier and started fighting while maintaining that barrier while
preparing another magic.
And that preparation is now completed.
“I was fighting while casting two barrier spells. Well, the other one was just completed though.”
144
At that moment,
A huge magic circle emerges from the whole city of Kiel. From there countless chains sprout out and
tied up Dean and Sam.
“Wha!? This is!!”
“Damn it! Let me go!!”
“You can’t break it. Those chains were formed with ancient curse magic. Those who got entangled by
those chains will be weakened by the curse. Well…..have you prepare yourselves yet?”
Punching me all over when I was busy preparing the barrier.
Now it’s time for a punishment.
145
Black and White
The chains continue to tangle them.
That means the weakening curse will continue to get stronger.
After I caught them, I slowly rose to the sky. Right now they are even weaker than insects. The rest is
just to dispose of them.
“The strength of a vampire came from their enormous magic power. You guys may be long-lived but
without your magic, your physical strength isn’t that much different from humans. In other words, if I
just seal your magic there would be nothing to be afraid of.”
“Hey!!?? Why are these chains chasing after me too!?”
“…………”
I was trying something cool but this woman has to ruin it.
Looking at her, it seems like the chains are really chasing after her. Perhaps it just performing its job
to capture those who have hostility toward me.
Rather, why isn’t she got caught yet? Is she really a human? The spell was activated when she was
completely unguarded against me though.
“Sorry about that. It seems like they were just trying to capture those who are hostile toward me.”
When I stopped the chains with my eyes, Elna heavily breathing like she is out of breath and glares at
me.
When I laugh at her, her face turned red.
“You!! Why were you trying to capture your ally with the chains!?”
“The chains don’t react to anyone who considers me an ally. You were just too hostile toward me.
Moreover, you shouldn’t have any trouble dealing with some chains cast by a guy like me right?”
“You little! You were holding a grudge from before right!? There’s a limit on how small-minded you
can be alright! I was even worried about you when you were hit by that guy too!!”
“You were worried huh. The people around you must have their work cut out for them eh.”
Elna’s face is now completely red. It seems I can’t describe her state as just being angry anymore.
It is fun to make fun of this kind of Elna but my first customers are waiting for me.
“My apology. I was delayed by the tomboy hero over there. Where were we? Ah, there’s no need to be
afraid of a vampire that has their magic sealed was it?”
146
“YOU BASTARD!! DON’T LOOK DOWN ON US!”
“UNTIE US! IF I CAN JUST TEAR THESE OFF I CAN SLAUGHTER SOMEONE LIKE YOU IN NO TIME!!”
“If you think you can take them off then please do it by all means. You won’t be able to do it even if you
spend your whole life though. Now then…..it’s time to repent. Do you have anything left to say?”
Saying that, I concentrate a huge amount of magic power on my hands.
It was to cast a magic different from what I have been using so far.
Looking at that, Sam and Dean start breaking into a cold sweat.
“Wa, wait a minute……! You don’t have any grudge against us right! If you let us go we will be in your
debt!”
“Grudge huh……it’s not like there isn’t one though.”
The person that aimed his magic at Finne earlier was Dean. It is enough to kill them a thousand times
over when I remember those anger.
The fact that he aimed his magic at her. The fact that he put her in danger. Even if Finne wasn’t
actually hurt, that alone deserves a punishment.
“W, What did we ever do to you!? You are not here because of the guild’s request right!? If you are
going to kill us then it should be under the guild’s order right!”
“Humans are complicated you see. You won’t know where those grudges came from. Moreover, even if
I am not on a guild request, I am still an adventurer. There’s no change in that fact wherever I am. It is
my duty to protect the people of this continent from the monsters. With or without the request that
is.”
“W, WE ARE NOT MONSTERS!”
“The guild designated you guys as monsters. Moreover, your action is no different from a monster’s
right. Hey, don’t you have anything else to say? If you tell me the identity of the person who ordered
you to do this then I might be able to stop that hero for you, you know?”
As I speak to them, my magic power gradually increases.
No matter how you think about it, it is clear that the attack I am preparing is overkill. Those two must
understand that they would certainly die if they are hit with this.
However, despite Sam and Dean’s fearful expression, they never talk.
Either they just tight lips or they that afraid. I can’t imagine these two being affectionate or loyal
toward someone. So it must be fear huh.
A mastermind that even an S-class bounty afraid of huh.
147
Just who is it?
“Hurry up and spill it. If you don’t I am going to kill you.”
“W, We are proud vampires! Don’t think we will ever succumb to some humans!!”
“Is that so. Then let’s end this. I already finished my preparation as well.”
The person that was most surprised by those words was me.
The vampires may not have noticed it but if it is something that Elna has to prepare for then it is
surely that.
“E, Elna von Amsberg! ! Don’t tell me, you are going to summon the holy sword! ?”
“What if I am?”
“My magic is enough for this! Are you intending to destroy the whole town!?”
“I will adjust the power so it will be fine. A certain someone restrained the enemies for me so I can
carefully summon it after all.”
“O, Oi…….”
“I am one of the Amsberg house. Destroying the empire’s enemies is my duty. I will never forgive
them!”
Elna raises her right hand to heaven.
Then.
“Hear my voice and descend! The brilliant star sword! Now, the hero needs you!!”
White light falls from heaven.
Elna grabbed it and with white sparkles turns it into a shining silver sword.
Five hundred years ago, the sword that the hero used to defeated the Demon King, Aurora. It is said to
have been forged from a meteorite, the sword can cut all things in creation and does not allow any
kind of evil.
Due to its tremendous power, it was sealed by the first generation of the Amsberg Hero House and can
only be summoned by those with a talent for it.
In other words, to be able to summon this sword meant that person has the qualification to be a Hero.
Elna summoned this sword only at the age of twelve. This is the reason why people call her a prodigy.
“! ?”
148
As expected of the sword that defeated the Demon King, its presence alone is already ridiculous.
If used by someone who is at Elna’s caliber, that person will be that invincible. It is the reason why the
Amsberg house is being feared by other countries. Using this holy sword of the star, even an army can
be annihilated in one strike. With that said, there were only a few cases in the past where the sword
was summoned to combat the army though.
It is rarely summoned in the first place after all. The only one who uselessly summons it because she
was simply irritated is probably Elna.
“Now…..prepare yourselves.”
“Good grief….I will let you have one then.”
“Hmph! They are my prey in the first place! It was me who gave one to you!”
“Well, let’s leave it at that.”
I take a step back and start chanting.
I haven’t chant anything so far but it is best to use a chant to maximize the power of the magic and
ensure their destruction.
[[I am the usurper・Usurpation is darker than the dept of underworld・The darkness is darker than the
abyss・The darkness is deeper than the night・The darkness of creation・The darkness of death・Return
all those born from darkness to where it from —- INFINITY DARKNESS]]
A huge black sphere emerges above me.
As opposed to the blackness that swallows everything, the white light from Elna’s holy sword
stretches out to heaven.
Black and White. Darkness and Light.
The attacks with attributes that are never compatible. However, the consequence of those who got
swallowed by it is the same.
We adjust the attack direction. It is easier to blow away the monsters at the same time. At that time,
Leo is still in the middle of preparation to break through the monster horde.
As long as I can see, there’s no one in that horde of monsters.
But to be sure, let’s give them some warning.
“If you are still in the middle of the horde, run away!”
“I can’t guarantee you won’t get caught up in this!”
149
We both said our warning.
Perhaps they felt the danger, Leo and his troops immediately moved away from the monsters while
the garrison’s soldiers climb down the rampart and start fleeing.
Meanwhile, the monsters which are the target of the attack just blankly stare at the sky.
There are monsters that have been living in small groups without harming humans among them as
well. But forgive me. Even if they were used, I can’t overlook the fact that they attacked humans.
Just as they attack humans to protect their comrades, we have to fight to protect humans as well.
The only remorse inside my heart was that.
There’s no remorse toward the two in front of me.
“Now….clench your teeth.”
“It’s time to repent!”
“Hiiiiiiiiiiiiii! ?”
“Uwaaaaaaaaaaa! ! ? ?”
The black sphere swallows Dean along with the swarm of monsters.
The light from Elna’s holy sword swallows Sam and continue to swallow the swarm of monsters as
well.
As we were competing with each other, the attack erases everything and eventually, there’s nothing
left.
There is no cry of victory. When we take a look, the Emperor is tiredly looking at us. Perhaps he wants
to say that we overdid it.
Well, it’s alright since the only one who will get scold is Elna.
Ah, that’s right that’s right.
“Your Majesty! This time I only participated in this as an individual but……I hope that you will refrain
from neglecting the guild after this.”
“Fuh….I see. Thank you for your cooperation Silver.”
“With this, the guild can save face, they shouldn’t pursue the empire for this matter either.”
When I bow to the Emperor and prepare my transfer magic, Elna called out to me.
“Silver.”
150
“What is it? Do you still have any complaints?”
“Yeah, there’s a lot. But, I won’t say it now. You saved us this time. Especially, thank you for saving
Finne. That girl is…..she is the friend of my childhood friend after all.”
“Is that childhood friend perhaps the dull prince?”
“Really you….you still call him like that after you saw what happened to the vampire who said it
before huh? Take that back. My childhood friend is the best prince there is. I won’t forgive anyone who
makes fun of him to my face!”
Elna turns her holy sword toward me.
Her eyes are serious.
She seems like she really wants to seriously fight an SS-rank adventurer to protect my name.
While smiling bitterly at such Elna, I correct myself.
“My apology. If you said that much then it must really be rude to refer to him as the dull prince.
However, it is a pity as well. Having a childhood friend like you must be tiring huh.”
“Wha!?”
“Well, I will have to excuse myself here.”
Saying that, I teleported away before Elna could complain.
I arrived at the room where Sebas is waiting for me and fire up my languid body to take the robe and
the mask off.
“Thank you for your hard work. Please have some tea.”
“Thanks……sorry about that…….”
“You look really tired.”
“Yeah….it is as expected……”
Transfer magic, healing barrier, cursed chain barrier, and that final attack magic. I used a considerable
amount of magic power. Honestly, my magic power already close to its limit. The same goes for my
physical strength.
“I’m tired…..I’m gonna go to sleep…..”
“Please leave the rest to me.”
After drinking a little tea, I began to doze off in my chair. I want to sleep in a bed but my body won’t
listen to me.
151
Looking at my state, Sebas whispers to me with a gentle voice.
“Truly, thank you for your hard work. You were splendid, Arnold-sama.”
“Is that so….then I can rest without any punishment huh……”
It was a long time ago when Sebas last praised me like this.
With that in mind, I let go of my consciousness and fell into a comfortable sleep.
152
Schemer gets caught in his own Scheme
Three days after the incident.
I was the last of the Emperor’s children to arrive at Kiel
Although the others were not in time for the defense battle, they still rushed back with their knights,
so almost all of them arrived back at Kiel around the evening of that day.
“It seems like you will be made fun of again.”
“Let it go.”
As I was having such a conversation with Sebas, I get off the carriage in front of the mansion.
At that place, I found an unusual group of people wait to welcome me.
“Nii-sama……!”
“Oh, Christa. How are you?”
“It was scary……”
Carrying her bunny doll as usual, she comes up and hugs me with baby steps.
After stroking her head several times, I hold her hand proceed inside.
The people who were there to welcome me were Finne, Leo and.
“Welcome back. Al.”
“Welcome back Your Highness Arnold.”
“Yeah, I’m back.”
Elna and her men formed lines to welcome me.
As far as I can see, no one seems to be injured. Letting out a sigh in release for that, I head over to Leo.
“Elna is a matter of course but you were able to make it in time right?”
“Yeah, Silver helped me.”
“As expected of an SS-rank adventurer. He is a pretty capable man isn’t he.”
“Al, just which part of that man appeared human to you?”
Said Elna with a disgruntled expression.
153
I give her a reply with a shrug.
“Didn’t he saved the Emperor?”
“Just on a whim. I know that just by looking at him.”
“It’s fine even if it was on a whim isn’t it. He did save him after all. Right, Christa?”
“Un.”
“There, see.”
“Ge, getting Her Highness Christa to agree with you is unfair you know!”
While having such a conversation, we enter the mansion.
Along the way, I met eyes with Finne and she returns me with a soft smile. Is she saying that our talk
can be postponed? Interpreting her smile in a convenient way, I continue into the mansion with
Christa who refused to let go of my hand.
It is because father told me that he would start the meeting as soon as I arrived.
However.
“You are late, Arnold. What were you doing?”
“If it isn’t Eric-aniue. I was waiting for an escort because there’s no knight there to escort me back. I
apologize for the late arrival.”
“I don’t need your apology. I bet you didn’t even feel sorry in the first place, right?”
The blue-haired man in glasses.
The Second Prince Eric stands in front of us.
Even though he is wearing glasses his eyes are sharp. It’s like he is always judging the worth of
everything besides himself.
Perhaps she finds those eyes to be scary, Christa hides behind me.
“I do feel sorry. More or less.”
“Perhaps I was being unclear. You don’t feel sorry for us, right? You’ve always been like that.”
“Well, if you put it like that, then I have to say that’s true. I didn’t bother anyone after all.”
Those who I feel sorry for are only those who are close to me.
I don’t feel a shred of that emotion toward Eric, my other siblings or even to father.
154
Hearing that answer, Eric smiles.
“You are interesting after all Arnold. It was a good decision for you to let Elna go on ahead. Do keep
making the right decision from now on as well. If you have worth to me then, like Leonard, I won’t do
anything bad to you.”
“You are putting it like you are already an Emperor?”
“I am the next Emperor. Of course, no matter how hard you, Gordon or Zandra try, you will never be
able to change that fact. Remember it well.”
Saying so Eric sweeps his eyes over all of us and stops at Leo.
Leo took that gaze head-on.
That’s right, he isn’t afraid even if his opponent is Eric.
“Don’t get too full of yourself.”
“I will keep that in mind. Eric Aniue.”
We stand still as Eric turns his heels and heads further into the mansion.
That just now was a declaration of war.
This time, it could be said that we both raised our credit with me sending Elna ahead and Leo leading
the knights into battle.
We received help from Silver but those actions still increased our credibility.
What Eric declared was that if we get too full of ourselves by that he will crush us.
So we can’t ignore the most influential emperor candidate anymore huh. Even so, that was just a
warning. There’s no way that he has some easy hand he can use to crush us conveniently around.
If we get too big then he would surely join hands with Gordon and Zandra to crush us. That’s
something I would do.
“Nii-sama………”
“What’s wrong? Were you scared?”
“It’s okay. He won’t do anything to you, Christa. Of course, we will be fine too.”
Seeing Christa nodded with a smile, we continue inside.
“Ah, Leo. if father asks, just answer him with this.”
On the way, I whispered to Leo.
155
Leo opens his eyes wide but I continue to make sure that he listened properly.
“You got that?”
“Is it really okay?”
“Yeah, only you can say it. And this will be good for him as well.”
Father stayed in Kiel after the incident and take command of the reconstruction. Even so, it was just
an official stance. The damage from the Tsunami was not that great.
What father is actually doing is investigating who else involved in causing that uproar.
And perhaps because that investigation made progress, he waited for my arrival and gather his
children along with the imperial knights for a meeting.
“Everyone, good work.”
Said father, his face looked clearly tired.
Well, that is understandable since he personally went out to the battlefield, even though he is not that
young anymore and continue to work without rest afterward. Moreover, he must have found out that
his stupid son was deeply involved in the incident too.
“This time I only gathered those that are on a need to know basis. What I am about to say is
confidential. Last night, Carlos who was seriously injured, woke up. After examining the evidence
gathered over the past few days, I determined that he was involved with those two vampires. Carlos
hunted the monsters lured out by the flute possessed by those two and reached first place. Moreover,
he cooperated with them on the attack on Kiel on the condition that they would retreat when he
arrives and in return, he would retract their bounty. Absolutely foolish !”
“In other words……it was Carlos’s plan to lure those monster out from the start?”
“That’s right. He was ultimately used by those vampires but he also did it for his own benefit, putting
me, and of course, the empire at risk. I absolutely can not forgive that!”
Father’s eyes were bloodshot. I guess he can’t suppress his anger.
However, to that father, Eric gets down on his knee.
“Your Majesty. Please be lenient on his punishment. As foolish as he is, he is still my brother.”
That’s a barefaced lie.
Gordon and Zandra also follow him.
156
Of course, they are not pleading for Carlos out of empathy. And yes, it doesn’t matter if anyone notices
this.
Because everyone knows exactly that this is what the Emperor wanted.
If he wanted to execute Carlos he would have done so already. There’s no need for him to gather us
and show his anger like this. It is because the Emperor can’t forgive him on his own.
He needs Eric and the others to make him forgive Carlos. Otherwise, he can’t maintain his dignity as
an Emperor.
Well, there’s no need to kill him anyway.
After he received Sam’s attack, Carlos lost his right hand and the control of the lower half of his body.
He will be bedridden for life. Seeing his son like that, even if it’s father he wouldn’t be able to kill his
own son.
However, it is not good to go on like this.
If everyone pleads for Carlos’s life then it would look like the Emperor lost to the petition. It would be
bad for his reputation.
“Leonard. It could be said that this is your first achievement. What do you think about this?”
“Then allow me to say it. Your Majesty shouldn’t forgive him. He should be beheaded instead.”
At that moment, everyone’s faces froze.
That is because the most unlikely words came out from the most unlikely person.
Father seems to be quite surprised himself.
“…..Why do you say that? He’s your brother right?”
“Before being my brother, he is a rebel against the empire. If Your Majesty forgives him here it will
become a bad precedent. How can I explain that to the knights who had spilled their blood protecting
us?”
“This will not be relayed to the people nor the knights. It will only be just us here. You don’t have to
worry about it.”
“Even so, that’s still not acceptable. Your Majesty should be honest and present them with the rebel’s
head to show them that Your Majesty is fair and just. Even if he is your son, you will judge him for his
sin. That will give the people peace of mind.”
Leo spoke in a strong tone.
Now there’s a split in opinions. Whichever choice he takes, he will have a justification.
157
In other words, now father can take it as an excuse.
If he saves Carlos, it doesn’t mean that he slights Leo. That’s why even if Leo is in a tie with Gordon,
the flow has been adjusted to make Leo the ambassador plenipotentiary.
Everything is for father’s desired development.
Satisfied, father glance at me. He looked at my carefree expression and make a kinda pouty
expression.
“Was that your suggestion?”
“Whatever do you mean?”
“Haa…..well, fine. I will respect Eric and the other’s opinion and spare Carlos. However, Leonard. Your
achievement can no longer be ignored.”
Saying so, father called Leo to stand before him.
Leo graciously heads there and kneels.
Father took his sword out and hand it to Leo.
Leo received it.
“Put up with this since I didn’t prepare to do this beforehand. Leonard, I will make you into the winner
of this festival. Carlos was disqualified, Arnold who was in second place was also disqualified. That left
you tied at third place with Gordon. However, Leonard led the knights to the rescue of Kiel. You now
have the popularity in the east. Leonard has to be the winner here to ease the people’s dissatisfaction.
You understand that right? Gordon.”
“……I am at Your Majesty’s pleasure.”
Gordon bows down with a vexing expression.
Since his voice is shaking, he must really be frustrated.
However, he can’t refute the Emperor’s decision. There’s no basis to do that.
At that time, Elna went before the Emperor.
“Your Majesty. Please allow me to make a plea.”
“What is it?”
“Please cancel His Highness Arnold’s disqualification. He did it to sent us knights to Kiel. His action
was praiseworthy. The stigma of being disqualified is unsuitable for him.”
“We beg you, Your Majesty!”
158
Following Elna, her men kneel down.
Father closes his eyes.
Then.
“Arnold….you broke your bracelet by [MISTAKE] right?”
“Yes. I accidentally broke it.”
“Then the disqualification can’t be undone. It is another thing if you broke it on purpose and sent Elna
to me on purpose, but rules are rules. The victory shall be Leonard’s.”
Elna looks at me like she can’t believe my actions but I ignore her.
Even if I said I sent Elna here on purpose, I will not be made into the ambassador plenipotentiary.
At best, I would receive some praise but as father said earlier, Leonard has to be the winner because of
his popularity in the east.
No one would accept my victory.
That’s why it is fine to leave me as a foolish prince who broke his bracelet by accident.
I thought so but.
“However, it is also true that I was saved because of Elna. In other words, I was saved by Arnold’s
mistake. And I will reward you for that mistake.”
“Yes?”
“I will assign Arnold as the deputy ambassador. Go with Leonard and assist him.”
“…..Fa, Father?”
“It’s Your Majesty, Arnold.”
“Umm….I… I don’t think I have that kind of skill.”
“You can leave everything to Leonard. At least find a job you can do and prove to me that you can do it.
This talk is over. I will officially announce this tomorrow. Everyone, get some rest.”
Saying so, father gets up from his chair.
Then as he left, he turned toward me with a mischievous smile.
That damn father, he did it on purpose……!
Damn it! He wrecked my plans!?
159
If both I and Leo left the empire, who would be there to lead our faction!?
Seriously!?
I was stunned by the unexpected event. On the other hand, my rivals have a [Serve you right]
expression on their faces.
This is bad…..If we don’t do anything, our faction will be dismantled while we are away.
“It’s great, isn’t it! Al”
“…..”
“What’s wrong? Al?”
“As expected, don’t get involved with me anymore…….”
“WHYYYY!?”
I hold down my forehead and shoo away the rejoicing Elna.
However, I understand. It is not Elna’s fault.
I expected her to plead for my disqualification to be undone. What I find unexpected was father’s
respond.
The reason why father acted that way must be because of how carefree I looked. He must be irritated
because he felt like he was dancing on my palm.
This is completely my fault…….
The meeting ended with me holding my head because of how ridiculous the situation has become.
160
Mother of Three
Starting of the second arc!
TLN: Al and Leo are referring to their mother with Hahaue.
———————————–
Two weeks have passed since the uproar. Because there was a lot of confusion, there has been no
noticeable movement in the succession war.
Meanwhile, I and Leo are making our way to visit a certain place.
That place is called the Inner Palace.
It is the place where the Emperor’s concubines living in.
It is located behind the Imperial sword palace, the woman-only palace where only the Emperor and
the people he has given permission to, can set foot in.
There is only one reason why we come to such a place.
It is to meet our Mother.
How long was it since I last met her. Probably around three months I guess. Well, that only applies to
me though.
Leo seems to visits her whenever he has free time. Such a devoted son he is.
“Mother, Al and Leo have come to visit.”
“Welcome. I baked some sweets. Eat some.”
The only one who can be so frank with her son even when he doesn’t visit her for such a long time is
perhaps only my Mother.
Her name is Mitsuba. She has long black hair and black eyes. She looks so young and beautiful that you
can’t imagine her to have two grown sons. I have to avoid that topic around her though.
She is a dancer from the east, she is a legendary that father fell in love with her beauty and proposed
to her on the spot. Their story is still famous in the imperial capital even now.
Well, the legendary part came from how fast he proposed but she really has no input on our education.
She’s quite eccentric regarding that but well, that does sound like my Mother.
In fact, she did not speak a single thing to the Emperor regarding that.
161
Thanks to that, someone like me was created but since Leo turned out properly it seems like it does
work out though.
We sit down at the prepared table and reach out for the sweets. Then.
“It’s been a long time isn’t it, Al.”
“Yes, it’s been a long time. Mother.”
“Was it because you were playing around too much and forgot your Mother? Or could it be that you
found yourself a lover?”
“It’s the former.”
“Such a boring answer. You two have too few female acquaintances you know. Share some amorous
tales with your Mother once in a while will you.”
Sometimes I think that this person forgot that her sons are a prince.
Leaving me aside, it would be big news if Leo has a lover. You have to investigate who his partner is or
whether or not she comes from a good family after all.
Well, we were raised as ordinary children without worrying about those kinds of stuff. The bare
minimum manners were taught to us but that’s all.
Her education policy was to let her kids do anything they want. Because our Mother is like this, even if
I found the lessons boring and escaped, she never got angry at us. However, she always told us that [if
you think that it will be necessary for the future then make sure to study them] and that’s it.
Thinking about it now, that was terrifying. Just what did she think a prince’s education was?
As a result of our independence, the elder one turned out as a good-for-nothing while the younger
grew up to be splendid. You could say that her method completely brought out our personality.
“So, why are you two here together this time?”
“Mother. This time, I have been appointed as an ambassador plenipotentiary and Nii-san has been
assigned as my aide. We will probably have to leave the empire in the near future. That’s why we want
to let you know before that.”
“Ara? Is that the case? Then, can I have something I can eat as my souvenir? If you bought me an
ornament I would be troubled after all.”
“Haa……”
Even though she has this kind of personality, she still did well living here in the inner palace.
Currently, the inner palace is also in the midst of a power struggle. Apparently, the Mothers who want
their child to become an emperor are plotting something. Due to the eyes of the Empress and the
162
Emperor that watch over the inner palace, they can’t make that big of a move but there’s no doubt that
this is a place that requires you to be careful.
“Mother, aren’t you worried?”
“You want me to? You are still a child huh, Leo. I don’t plan to tell my eighteen years old sons what to
do but if His Majesty assigned work for you to do, then I think that he already judged that you are
capable to do so you know.”
“I see…..Then I will confidently do my job.”
“He finally gave me work to do so I will put in a suitable effort.”
“Do as you like. You won’t get killed if you fail after all.”
Said Mother, while sipping her tea.
If it’s the others then they would definitely tell us that we are absolutely not allowed to fail or that this
is the chance to appeal to His Majesty.
When I was thinking about that, I heard a knock coming from the door.
When Mother answers the door, unexpectedly, it was Christa that showed up.
“Ara, Christa. Welcome.”
“Okaa-sama!.”
With an unusually bright expression, Christa ran up to Mother and sat on her lap.
The small Christa adjusts her position on Mother’s lap and stares at the sweets on the table.
It seems she understands that those sweets were prepared for us.
“You can have it you know. Al and Leon don’t eat much anyway.”
“Really? Al-niisama, Leo-niisama.”
“Yeah, eat up. Have as much as you like.”
“I already have some so how about we eat it together, Christa.”
“Un!”
Looking at Christa reaching for the candy really gives me peace of mind.
It looks like they are really parent and child.
Christa’s mother passed away ever since Christa was young. At the time the person who said she
would take care of Christa was my Mother.
163
Since then, Christa treated Mother as if she is her real parent. Seeing them like that, we were just
feeling nostalgic.
“Speaking of which, Elna came by the other day. She apologized to me about Al but what did you do?”
“Well, she did something unnecessary. Thanks to that, I’m now stuck with a troublesome position.”
“Nii-sama is the one who is troublesome—!”
Christa uses the arm of her bunny doll to point at me.
Apparently, I am being scolded by the doll huh. When I frowned at her, everyone laughs.
164
Why? it’s cute that’s why.
The time continues to pass peacefully like that until Mother suddenly raises a question when I was
thinking about heading back.
“Ah, that’s right. I forgot to ask this.”
“What is it?”
“Which of you will take the Blau Mowe as your princess?”
“ “ Buh! ! “ “
165
Both Leo and I spat out the tea at the same time.
We were choking on the tea while wiping our mouths with the towel offered by Christa.
What are you asking all of a sudden, geez Mother.
“We are not in that kind of relationship with Finne-san, Mother…….”
“But it’s unusual for both of you to have a woman in your life right? So, is she Leo’s after all?”
“Well, the people did say that they look good together.”
Let’s push the matter to Leo here.
Leo’s expression is saying [You betrayed me! ?] or the complaint along those lines but please spare me
such a troublesome topic.
When I thought that it would be better to start leaving right away, an ambush came from an
unexpected direction.
“Okaa-sama. Finne is Al-niisama’s friend you know.”
“Oh dear! Is that so?”
“Yes. Finne is so beautiful and she also looks good with Al-niisama too.”
“Ara Ara.”
“No no…….”
It seems like I can’t underestimate you either huh, or so my Mother is looking at me with such a
bewildered gaze.
How dare you telling her such a story, little girl. Finne looks good with me? If you spread that story
inside the capital you will be laughed at you know.
“We were just together longer because of the matter with Duke Kleinert. There’s nothing between us.”
“Still she is the number one beauty of the Empire you know? Right, Christa?”
“U–n……Okaa-sama is more beautiful!”
“Thank you, Christa. I also think that Christa is the most beautiful too you know.”
Looking at the two huggings each other for some reason, I let out a sigh and stand up.
I bow and preparing to leave.
“Are you leaving already?”
166
“It’s been a while after all. I have to meet someone today too. You stay here a little more.”
“Al-niisama, see you later.”
“Yeah, see you. Mother too.”
“Yeah, take care. You are always pushing yourself after all.”
“I’ve never been pushing myself a single day in my life you know. I’ve been living my life suitably after
all.”
“Is that so? Well, let’s put it like that then. Alright, do your best.”
Being sent off by Mother, I left the inner palace with a renewed motivation.
I still have to think about what comes next.
I have to protect that place.
I can’t afford to rest.
“Sebas.”
“Sir.”
“Find out the weaknesses of the nobles in the neutral faction. I have to do what I can while I am still
inside the imperial capital.”
“Certainly.”
Thus, I continue my secret maneuvers.
167
Choose your Bride carefully.
“Good day, Earl Baelz.”
“Oh if it isn’t Prince Arnold. How can I help you today?”
Earl Baelz is a court noble with no territory who lives inside the imperial capital.
For generations, the Earl of Baelz has been in charge of important offices within the empire. The
current Earl Baelz is also a Deputy Minister of Engineering who works in the field of civil engineering
and flood control.
Such Earl Baelz was consistently maintaining his distance away from the succession war. Since his
position doesn’t directly influence the tide of the succession war, the other three were not actively
involved with him as well.
The reason I came here to the residence of Earl Baelz was because I heard a certain rumor.
“Actually, I have heard a rumor you see.”
Earl Baelz is a man in his thirties.
His bald hair combined with his timid appearance made him a person that no woman ever spare a
gaze.
However, a few years ago, he was finally settled down. Originally, he is a talented man who succeeded
a famous family and even held the position of deputy minister. If he doesn’t make any mistakes in how
he looks for a bride, there should be a countless number of good candidates for him.
But, he did make a mistake.
“Ru, rumor you say…….?”
“Yeah, it’s just a rumor but it seems your wife has been flashily playing around every night. She goes
around presenting herself like she is a royalty and everyone is wondering where all those money
came from. I heard such a rumor you see.”
“Th, that is……that’s just an exaggeration. Certainly, my wife loves to play around but she never did it
like that, she was, she was………”
Earl Baelz wipes the sweat on his forehead with a handkerchief.
It seems the information that Sebas investigated is accurate huh.
According to Sebas, apparently, the Earl has been complaining about his wife with his acquaintances.
His dissatisfaction with her was extreme, he often says that he wants a divorce or if he couldn’t he
would commit suicide.
168
Judging from his reactions, I guess that he finds the action of his wife to be unpleasant. The question
here is how far does this man go for her.
“Earl Baelz.”
“Y, Yes!”
He changed his tone of voice, when I stare at him, I can clearly see that he straightened his back.
Is it because a guilty conscience? Or is it perhaps his usual temperament?
“There’s this rumor too. It said that you are using the money embezzled from the empire for your
wife.”
“I, I have never done anything like that! I’ve always worked hard as a loyal minister of the empire!
Please believe me!”
“Even if you say that. This time, I came here because the rumor has already reached the castle. It will
be a big deal if it gets to my father’s ears you know? I want to clear it up before that.”
The blood disappeared from the Earl’s face.
He is an easy to understand man. It might be due to his timid nature that he doesn’t want such a
rumor to reach the Emperor.
Can I expect something from this?
“Y, Your Highness! Please lend me your power! Please help me!”
“I have no plan to help a criminal. Of course, Leo as well.”
“I, I really didn’t touch any of our empire’s fund!”
“Then where did that money come from? Your wife couldn’t possibly play around like that with an
earl’s salary.”
“It, it came from our savings so it was fine at first……..but it immediately depleted so I borrowed
money from my acquaintances and recently I have to borrow from the merchants as well…..I feel bad
for my acquaintances but the deadline is already approaching, what should I do…………”
Why did you marry such a woman?
When I was having that incredibly rude thought, the door violently opened.
“Dear! There’s not enough money this month!?”
“Be, Bethina!? Leave at once! I am having an important talk with the Prince!”
169
The person that came in was a flashy beauty with golden hair. Her age should be the same as mine or
slightly older. A young woman when you considered that she married a thirty-ish years old man.
Everything she is wearing is flashy. Her dress is what I often see the women inside the inner palace
wearing and the precious metals that adorn her body seem to be real as well.
I can see why he wants a divorce.
“Prince? Which one?”
“H, Hey!?”
“It’s Arnold Lakes Adler. Sorry for disturbing you, Madam Baelz.”
“Arnold? Ah! That dull prince? I heard about you from the son of Duke Horsvath. The miserable prince
who got all his good part taken away by his brother right?. What does an incompetent like you doing
in our house?”
“……..”
Earl Baelz turned speechless.
Well, the same goes for me. The only person who ever makes a fool out of me in public like this is only
Gied so far. She’s probably thinking that it’s fine for her to do it too since Gied can get away with it. But
Gied is both my childhood friend and a son of a duke. Their positions are completely different.
Aah, this woman, she’s an idiot. Seeing her in action, I felt sympathy for the Earl.
“G, Get out now…….”
“Haa? Are you ordering me?”
“Whatever just get out already! !”
This is probably the first time the Earl being so enraged with his wife.
Taken aback, Bethina left the room with an unpleasant expression.
“Please forgive my wife’s disrespect! Your Highness!”
“I don’t really care. I’m already used to it after all. But she’s quite an absurd wife isn’t she.”
“…..my wife came to me when she was seventeen. She is the daughter of a local noble that was famous
for her beauty, I fell for her the first time we met. After that, I gave her everything she wants because I
don’t want to get hated but things escalated. Right now she misunderstands that she herself is some
kind of royalty or a high-ranking noble…..”
170
“Of course, I think that it is your wife’s fault but it is also your responsibility as her husband for
encouraging her as well. If you are her husband then you should give her a scold for her behavior
right.”
“Yes….it is as Your Highness says.”
Perhaps his heart is already completely broken.
The figure of the Earl hanging his head down is really tragic.
Well, what to do now. It seems I will have to adjust my plan from this point on.
The original plan was to gradually gain the Earl’s trust but if I left him alone, perhaps this might
actually lead to suicide.
Can’t be helped then.
“Is the reason you haven’t divorce her yet because you still love her?”
“Yes but….when I report to His Majesty that I married her, he was very pleased….we received a lot of
congratulatory gifts as well.”
“I see. That would make it hard to divorce her huh.”
The reason I took notice of Earl Baelz wasn’t just his weakness regarding his wife.
It is also because Father took a liking to him too.
I am probably looking at the next Minister of Engineering right now. Earl Baelz who is loyal to his job
and doesn’t play around too much is very easy to trust from an employer’s perspective.
If he knew the Earl’s circumstances, the Emperor would support the divorce himself. However, there’s
no way that he can know so deeply about every single one of his subjects.
Right now, he needs someone to act as an intermediary.
“Earl Baelz. I know that you are not an idiot. You must know the reason why I am here right?”
“Y, yes….to add me to Prince Leonard’s faction correct?”
“Yeah. if possible I want to spend more time to gain your trust but…..it seems that we can’t afford that
much time huh. I will ask Leo to convey your situation to Father. Then, if Father’s response is in
support of your divorce then do it immediately. I will handle the letter to your wife’s parental house so
don’t worry about it.”
“Is, is that true!?”
Earl Baelz looks at me as if he is looking at his savior. Just how much cornered are you.
171
Well, it’s a little selfish but this is also for the succession war. Let have the madam taste a little tear
shall we. It is all about suffering the consequence. The difference is that the Earl has his uses while his
wife has none.
But how do I explain this to Leo? It’s him after all, let’s have a talk with him face to face.
But I want to spare him the sight of that woman if possible. The madam could give Leo a women
trauma after all.
“Earl Baelz. Sorry, but can you write an appeal letter to Leo?”
“A, a letter?”
“Yeah, immediately. It would be easier to persuade him that way.”
“Persuade?”
“Leo is a good guy you see. If I just talked about the matter myself, you might end up having me as a
middleman right. You don’t want that correct?”
“Y, yes, I will write the letter right away!”
As prompted by me, the Earl began writing the appeal letter to Leo.
Even though he is an Elite that was born into a house of a court noble and succeeded the house as its
head, to think that one woman could make him become this miserable.
As I thought, you have to choose your wife carefully huh.
For a moment, the women in my surroundings such as Finne and Elna cross my mind.
Just imagining them as my wife is already terrifying. There seems to be a lot of trouble no matter
which one of them becomes my wife. Let’s stop thinking about this.
No matter what, I like my woman to be normal.
“Y, Your Highness, is this alright….?”
“Let me see it.”
My face distorted when I take a look at his letter.
What is written there is the Earl’s statement, complaining about his wife’s wrongdoings. All of the
dissatisfaction he has with his wife seep through each letter.
I sighed at the letter’s content which already could be more accurately described as a curse.
“Make sure to be careful with honey traps after you start cooperating with us alright.”
172
“Y, yes! I will no longer look at any woman! I will faithfully serve Prince Leonard and Prince Arnold to
the utmost of my ability!”
“Don’t get me wrong. We just need your help. Your Lord is still His Majesty the Emperor. Not us.”
“Pl, please forgive my rudeness.”
I need to put a nail in that.
If he treated Leo like his lord we would only create ourselves an extra enemy. I want to get rid of those
possibilities as much as possible.
“Alright, I certainly received your letter. You will know the result in a few days so wait patiently.”
“Yes! Thank you very much.”
After that, I left the Earl’s mansion.
When I left the mansion the madam stared at Earl Baelz from behind his back but well, I hope he can
be more patient for a few more days.
In the end, when I let Leo read the letter, [Why did he marry such a person?], such a natural question
was voiced by Leo. Well, after I convinced Leo and have him relayed that to father, father fully support
the Earl’s divorce and the divorce itself proceeded in no time.
Well, to father, it must be unbearable to see his ministerial candidate’s future get crushed by some
local noble’s daughter.
With this, Earl Baelz joined Leo’s faction and Leo’s influence grew slightly stronger.
TLN: by the way Bethina is the name of the most beautiful woman in heaven that can lure any man to
death.
173
The Fisherman’s gain
TLN: the title is a Japanese idiom, its meaning is to profiting while others are fighting
—————
“Was that really okay?”
When I was putting together some paperwork, Finne is brewing tea while raising such a question.
“What are you talking about?”
“Adding Earl Baelz as our ally. I certainly felt some sympathy for him but you can’t deny that he was
also suffering the consequences for his actions. If he gave his young wife anything she asked for and
then divorce her because he eventually loses control of her……..I don’t think I can accept that as a
woman.”
“Well, if you look at him with that perspective the Earl must look like the worst kind of man huh.”
“Are there any other perspectives?”
If she said it directly to me like that she must be quite dissatisfied huh. Well, we are talking about love
after all, you can’t just throw it away once it turns inconvenient for you. From a woman’s perspective,
it is natural for them to find it unpleasant.
However, this matter is not about the two of them alone.
I start explaining to her while keep putting together the documents.
“Bethina, the Earl’s ex-wife is from the southern noble lineage, the Daum Earl house. This Earl Daum is
a relative of one of the most powerful noble in the south, Duke Kruger. Are you familiar with the
name?”
“Of course. I certainly remember that one of His Majesty’s concubines was from the Kruger house
correct?”
“Yeah, the fifth concubine is the sister of the current Duke of Kruger. In other words, it is a ducal house
with a close tie with the imperial family. Now, answer me this, who is the child of the fifth concubine?”
After mulling over my question for a while, Finne clapped her hands as she remembered the answer.
She then immediately confidently answered.
“Princess Zandra…….”
“The ninth prince as well. But her little brother doesn’t have anything to do with this for now. The
important link is the one between Zandra and Bethina.”
174
“A link…..? I don’t think the relatives from a mother’s parents’ house are that deeply connected
though?”
“Normally that would be the case. But, in this case, it is a bit different. By the way, Finne, do you
remember what kind of power base does our rivals have?”
“Ah, yes. Prince Erik has the support of the civil officials, Prince Gordon was supported by the military,
and Princess Zandra has support from the mages right?”
So she does remember.
Well, if she couldn’t remember that much then it would be troublesome for me though.
When I told her that she delivered the correct answer, Finne rejoices and while saying [I did it]. I
continue the talk while thinking about how she set the bar so low.
“So whose supporters do you think is the weakest inside the imperial capital?”
“Inside the capital? Not that empire?”
“Yes, the capital.”
“Uhm…the strongest one should be Prince Eric’s so that left Prince Gordon and Princess Zandra
but…….Unn, I got it! It’s Prince Gordon’s!”
“Reason being?”
“Since the military officers are on the front line, his influence should be weaker in the capital.”
“The idea isn’t wrong but that’s incorrect. There are military officers that are not on the front line too.
The correct answer here is Zandra’s.”
“Auuu, I got it wrong…… but why does Princess Zandra’s support is the weakest?”
Thinking about how to explain it to her so that she could easily understand, I pick up the sweets that
were on my desk. Perhaps it is due to Christa’s reception, the sweets today are animal-shaped cookies.
I took Lion, bird and wolf cookies. I placed the Lion and the Bird on a plate and crush the wolf cookie
and scatter it around them.
“Aaah…..and I was able to make it well this time too…….”
“Well, sorry about that. Now, on this plate are Eric and Gordon’s supports okay, the scattered one is
Zandra’s. Now, do you understand what I am trying to say?”
“????”
“So you don’t huh. Okay. Civil and military officers are often inside the imperial capital. However,
mages have no official position in our government. Of course, some officials are mages but they scatter
175
across various positions like court noble, local noble, military officers at the border. They are too
spread out.”
“I see! So there aren’t many who can support Princess Zandra inside the capital right?”
“Well, that’s the case. But here’s the main point.”
“Eh….? That wasn’t the main point…..?”
Finne quivering slightly as she is afraid that the talk will get even more difficult.
Giving her a bitter smile, I tried to give as simple an explanation as possible.
“Simply put, Zandra has fewer supporters in the key positions of the empire because of the nature of
her power base. Gordon has the military officials and Eric is on good terms with the civil servants,
those people can convey their will to the Emperor. Zandra, on the other hand, has no pipeline to do
that. That is troublesome for Zandra isn’t it?”
“I see. I think it will really make a difference if your supporters have a seat in the privy council.”
“Correct. That’s why Zandra has always been trying to get her supporters the seat of a minister.”
“Is that possible? Isn’t the appointment of the minister can only be done by the Emperor himself?”
“Well, there’s a way around it.”
With that said, this time I stack the cookies on the plate vertically.
Seeing that, Finne tilts her head. If you are unfamiliar with such a thing you would get your heart
stolen because that action looks totally adorable. I can’t show this to Earl Baelz. He might suddenly
apply for marriage with her after all.
However, I wasn’t distracted by that and proceed to crush the lion cookie I placed on top.
“AA!? Again!?”
“It would be eaten anyway right? Well, this is how you install the person you want into the position of
a minister.”
“What do you mean?”
“Let me put it like this then. The Lion is the current minister. The Bird below is a candidate for that
minister position. If the Lion above breaks, the position will fall down to the Bird.”
“I see! So you prepare a candidate for the next minister while undermining the current one isn’t it!”
She has quite an imagination huh. Normally she is just poor at this kind of cunning plot but that
doesn’t mean that she is stupid or anything. Sometimes she’s too simple that she gave me a scare
though.
176
“That’s the case. If your supporter is a deputy minister or a position close to that you can bring down
the current top person and install your own minister.”
“I see….and what’s that has to do with Earl Baelz?”
“Haa….what’s Earl Baelz’s current position?”
“Deputy Minister of Engineeri………….eh!?”
So she finally connected the dots huh.
Well, it’s quite complicated so there’s no helping it huh.
“Zandra was manipulating Bethina through her parents’ house, Bethina herself must have been
ordered to play around as well. She happily dances to the tune though. And recently Zandra has given
another order to her as well.”
“There’s still more……”
“This is important after all. Bethina is having an affair with the current Minister of Engineering. It
seems the minister himself starts the relationship but it is probably Bethina who tempted him first.
Moreover, the wife of the minister is the daughter of a close friend of the Emperor. Apparently, the
Emperor was the one who paired them up. If he knows about the affair he would surely be furious.”
“……don’t tell me, from the beginning?”
“That’s right. It was a scenario designed by Zandra. She sent a beauty to Earl Baelz who isn’t good with
women and make him suffer. At the same time, she works on the minister as a preparation to get rid
of him. Then later she will help the Earl out by telling the Emperor about the affair at a suitable time.
Then, oh, what a surprise, my supporter is suddenly a minister.”
“Wai, please wait a minute! If, if that’s the case then………..”
I grinned at Finne’s unbelievable expression.
She did great for enacting this kind of plan for so many years. Perhaps, she started this around the
time the crown prince passed away. it was only a step away from completion.
“Yeah, I just totally wrecked Zandra’s plan in its entirety. She is probably fuming right now.”
“No way!? Al-sama and Leo-sama will leave the empire soon, right? Why are you angering Her
Highness Zandra now!?”
“It is exactly because we are leaving that we have to disrupt her plan. As long as we are not in the
capital, they will inevitably come to attack our faction. However, what if we disrupt the balance of
their three ways struggle? With a single move, we were able to destroy Zandra’s plan. The balance
should be upset right now. Eric and Gordon will not miss that. They can get rid of us anytime but there
are only a few moments where they can attack the weakened Zandra. If it was me, I would take this
chance to chip away Zandra’s power.”
177
“You have considered it that far……….?”
“It’s all thanks to Sebas. He managed to pull out important information from the assassins, he was the
one who investigated Earl Baelz for me as well.”
Zandra also did something stupid.
To think that she sent the assassins she used to manipulated Earl Baelz to take care of me. Thanks to
that, her plan got taken away from her. Well, I don’t want to badmouth her but it seems she is looking
down on us quite a bit huh.
“Um…I’ve been wondering for a while but what exactly is Sebas-san?”
“Nn? I never told you? Sebas was formerly an assassin. Moreover, he was quite famous to the extent
that he was known by the nickname of [Death] throughout the continent you know.”
“!? What is such a person doing as Al-sama’s butler!?”
“I will tell you about that later. It will be long after all. Now, hearing the explanations so far do you still
have any complaint about me lending the Earl a hand?”
“N, no…..”
“Right. The reason he is so weak against women like that is probably Zandra’s work too. He has been a
deputy minister for three years after all. Normally, it would be the women’s side that goes after him
after all.”
“Somehow, he’s quite pitiful isn’t he…..”
“Yeah, he must have been dancing on Zandra’s palm for years after his marriage and we finally
managed to help such a pitiful Earl. Well, he is still being used by us though.”
Saying so, I continue going through the paperwork.
It is a document on the Minister of Engineering’s affair. I will have Earl Baelz submit it to the Emperor.
With this Zandra will be under some secret feud for a while. Gordon will definitely make a move
without missing this chance and the succession war will intensify.
But that’s fine. Gordon will surely make an enemy out of Zandra and Gordon alone is the one person
that Zandra doesn’t want to get done in by.
If they crush each other, we will benefit. Moreover, in such a situation, Eric will not make any
aggressive move as well.
Just let them exhaust each other as much as they want while we are away from the capital.
With that in mind, I put the broken cookies in my mouth.
178
TLN: In case you missed it, here’s the discord invite: DISCORD
Also, for the loli, jail is just a room. all hail the bunny lord.
179
The Emperor’s Feelings
“Is this true!?”
Emperor Johannes thrust the documents submitted by Earl Baelz before the Minister of Engineering.
A flame of anger swirling in his eyes.
The Minister whose affair got exposed immediately kneels down and begs for forgiveness.
“Please forgive me, Your Majesty! I was misguided!”
“It’s a crime to dabble with someone else’s wife! As a minister, you know this, didn’t you!? Moreover,
she was your subordinate’s wife wasn’t she!? What were you thinking!?”
“Tha, that is…..Be, Bethina was the one who approached me herself! Please I beg for your forgiveness!
I was seduced! This must be the work of someone who wants to undermine me!”
“Do you think it’s fine to have an affair with your subordinate’s wife if she seduced you!? Then if one of
my concubines were to seduce you, you would have an affair with her!?”
“Th, that is………..”
“It’s the same thing! How dare you blame the woman for your unfaithfulness!?”
Johannes’s anger is unstoppable.
He has been entrusting the Minister with his work for many years. He even introduced his friend’s
daughter to be his wife, the fact that the Minister return his favor like this anger him to no end.
But that’s not the only reason. The partner in his affair is the wife of Earl Baelz, the man he has his
eyes on. the man who was made to suffer by his wife.
He was the one who green-lighted the investigation on the Earl’s wife. He even told the reluctant Earl
that if there are any problems he would be the one who passes the judgment himself. That’s how
much he took a liking to the Earl.
The major premise of Zandra’s plan was relying on how much Johannes trust in the Earl. She used the
fact that the Emperor believed in Earl Baelz that he would never do anything to undermine his
superior and in fact, the Earl is such a person himself.
That’s why in the eyes of Johannes, this matter looks like the Minister had attempted to corner his
excellent subordinate by using his subordinate’s wife to protect his own position.
In that regard, everything went according to Zandra’s plan. Normally, it could be seen that the Earl
was using his wife to frame his boss but due to Johannes’s trust in the Earl’s personality it didn’t turn
out like that.
180
Additionally, Johannes who had already heard from the Earl of how he was suffering because of his
wife was also sympathetic to Earl Baelz.
That’s why Johannes’s decision was swift.
“Resign yourself from the position! Go back to your home and wait for the punishment!”
“Pl, please forgive me! Forgive me, Your Majesty!”
“Call Earl Baelz here!”
Johannes declared with no sign of him letting go of his wrath.
Earl Baelz who seems to have shrunken a little, comes before Johannes.
and then, the Earl gives his apologies.
“My deepest apologies! This was all due to my lack of supervision on my ex-wife!”
“Baelz…what are you saying? You don’t have to be responsible for that.”
“B, But……”
“I trust you. You might have been too naive that you got tricked by some bad woman but I do like that
part about you. I appreciate the seriousness and eagerness you shown on your job. I wanted someone
like you for my minister. How about it, will you consider being my Minister of Engineering?”
“I, I can’t accept such a position! It was my wife who committed a sin! Please hand down your
punishment Your Majesty!”
“She is not your wife anymore. Moreover, the Minister also share the blame in this matter as well. He
can’t just be forgiven even if he was seduced. I have no intention to punish you for this case and I will
punish anyone who slanders you as well.”
“Y, Your Majesty……”
“Let me give my order again. I appoint Earl Baelz as the Minister of Engineering. You must work
harder for the Empire than you ever before.”
“……I will never forget Your Majesty’s kindness. In the name of the Baelz house allow me to accept this
responsibility.”
Thus the Earl accept the post of Minister of Engineering.
Johannes exchanged a few words with him and dismissed the Earl for the day.
Then he dropped his hips deep into the throne and let out a sigh.
“It’s finally getting more intense isn’t it.”
181
“Franz huh……”
The man who appeared before him without permission was a man of the same age as Johannes.
The man has pale silver hair and dressed in white civil-official-like clothing. There’s only one position
in this empire that was permitted to wear it.
The chief of all the civil servants, the Prime Minister.
The man’s name is Franz Seebeck. As you can guess from the lack of von in his name, this man is not a
noble. With his wisdom alone, he was the man who climbed from being a son of an inn owner into the
position of the prime minister, the most important post in the empire.
Johannes starts speaking to Franz.
“The struggle for a minister position is always connected to the succession war. All of the current
ministers should know that well. That’s why they have to be cautious. Being seduced to have an affair
with a subordinate’s wife is out of the question. He will eventually bring harm to the empire. If I don’t
replace him now, the damage might spread to me as well.”
“I have no complaint on how Your Majesty handles the matter. However, what were you thinking
when you appointed Earl Baelz as a minister? This matter smells of a plot after all.”
In Franz’s eyes, who was Johannes’s staff officer since he was still a prince, the Earl’s surroundings
seemed suspicious.
The reason that he didn’t look deeply into it was because he was barred from interfering with the
succession war. Otherwise, he would have already thoroughly conducted an investigation on the
matter.
“I don’t mind even if it’s some kind of plot. Baelz himself has the ability for the job and he was not the
person who came up with it himself. With that being the case, I don’t mind leaving him with the
position. Moreover, if they can’t orchestrate at least this kind of plot they wouldn’t be suitable to be an
emperor anyway.”
“Your Majesty sure say some bizarre things? Was I not the one who came up with all the plots when
Your Majesty was a prince?”
“That’s just how an emperor is. The power to see others’ talents and the ability to make use of them,
both are needed in order to become an emperor. I was able to notice your talents quickly enough.
That’s why I left all the plotting to you. Thanks to that, I am the one who is sitting on this right now.”
“Please don’t make such a joke. Even if I wasn’t there, Your Majesty would have taken the throne all
the same. You were that ingenious, Your Majesty.”
Saying so, Franz briefly thinks about the past. Johannes as well.
182
The children are trying to follow the path they once traveled. It was the path that was soaked with
blood. He knew that but Johannes couldn’t stop them.
It was because of such battle for the throne that there’s the current Johannes. When he became the
Emperor with that experience, he has enjoyed his life to his heart’s content.
The Empire is certainly a strong country but that doesn’t mean that it is unrivaled. There are rivals
and you have to fight for it to exist. That’s why it needs a strong and excellent emperor. The succession
war is a trial for that purpose, a practice run before they become an emperor.
If they can’t overcome that then they have no right to be an emperor. It is something like a tradition
that passed down from generation to generation.
“Your Majesty has played a fool yourself. Despite being the eldest, you were once called the prodigal
prince, No?”
“Being in the lead of a succession war is dangerous after all. There’s the danger of being assassinated
too. My son was like that as well…….”
“We were not able to find evidence that the Crown Prince was assassinated. Both I and Your Majesty
had investigated everything regarding that. Even so, are you still suspect that he was assassinated?”
“Yeah, I’m confident. The Crown Prince was assassinated. He was excellent but he was too kind for his
own good. Someone must have made use of that. I wish there was at least someone who can
compensate him on that part.”
“Such is fate. But speaking of that, don’t you think that the fourth faction is interesting?”
Johannes grins at Franz’s words.
That’s because Johannes agreed with him.
“You think so too? At first glance, it looks like it was due to Leonard’s charismatic power but there’s
definitely someone who is moving behind the scene for him. Otherwise, his faction wouldn’t be able to
expand so quickly.”
“Perhaps, are you thinking about Prince Arnold?”
“Yeah, he is certainly similar to me. I have a feeling that he was just acting like an incompetent for
show.”
“I have the same opinion but unlike Your Majesty, I can’t feel any ambition for the throne from him.
Moreover, it seems like he has been working on stigmatizing himself. In fact, he never does anything in
retaliation no matter what was done to him. Currently, he is being completely looked down upon by
the nobles as well.”
“I don’t know what he’s thinking but last time during the incident, he was the first one who took action
and sent Elna to me. Moreover, he broke his bracelet so that Elna and the knights wouldn’t get the
183
blame in case something happened as well. That is the evidence that he considered various outcomes
that could happen at Kiel. at the very least, he is not as incompetent as the public says. Of course, that
might just be an overestimation on my part.”
“Is that why you had him act as His Highness Leonard’s aide? That is no good, isn’t it? There would be
no one to command Prince Leonard’s faction once he’s gone.”
“Well, I will admit that I was a little emotional at the time. I don’t like the carefree look on Arnold’s
face you see. He was making a face like everything has gone according to his plan, I was kind of
irritated…..”
Franz was about to say, Weren’t you just irritated because he was similar to you? But he swallows the
words back down his throat.
He would deny it even if he says that anyway.
But, Franz knew.
Arnold is more similar to Johannes more than he thinks.
The difference is that Johannes had the will. The will to become the Emperor. However, he can’t feel
anything like that from Arnold.
Those who have no will nor a strong conviction will only send the battlefield into chaos. Even more so
if they have power.
If Arnold possesses such a strong desire, he will overcome this crisis with every hand he got. That’s
what Johannes wants to see.
Then, only when they survived everything, would Arnold and Leonard will be recognized by Johannes.
“It seems we will have to wait and see what our Dark Twin Princes have got isn’t it.”
“Dark Twin huh……that’s a nice name. Those two are one and the same. The righteous Leonard does
give the feeling of a Crown Prince. If Arnold acts as his shadow and helps him from the dark, they
might really take the throne huh.”
“I wonder. The other princes and princesses who walked on such a path are all excellent. In different
times, it wouldn’t be strange if any of them became an emperor.”
“That’s a good thing. When excellent people compete for the throne, a wise emperor will be born. The
Empire will be safe with this huh.”
To Johannes who always thought of the Empire, it was certainly good news.
But inside Johannes’s heart, he has another feeling.
He wishes that his children wouldn’t have to shed so much blood.
184
Knowing that he can’t voice such feelings as an emperor, Johannes departed to his next meeting.
185
House of the Heroes
“Reporting! Viscount Helmer is expanding his control!”
“Persuade them! Do not allow any more people to change side!”
“Reporting! Captain Remer of the Imperial Garrison has been taken in by Her Highness Zandra.!”
“What!? Kuh! We can’t let there be another deserter! Use all the people that we can move, we have to
protect our supporters! I will move out as well!”
Night, inside the imperial capital, a battle is unfolding.
Ever since I took over Zandra’s plan, Zandra has started robbing Leo of his supporters as a retaliation.
Right now, Leo has his hands full dealing with it.
“Must be hard on you huh.”
“Help us out here too Nii-san! The one who started this was Nii-san in the first place right!?”
“No no, I was certainly the one who suggested to help the poor Earl out but you were the one who
agreed to do it right? I will apologize that it has come to this but even if we stay still, the other side will
come to us anyway right. Isn’t that good.”
“Lend me a hand then…….”
“A fistfight is not my field. There’s nothing I can do anyway.”
“If there’s nothing Nii-san could do then there’s nothing I can do either right.”
“Oi oi, too much modesty is a bad thing, you know. If you personally head out, your supporters will
hesitate to leave your faction aren’t they. In the end, the only ones left will be your true supporters.
Well, hang in there.”
“You make it sound like you are not related to this. Seriously, I will absolutely have you help with the
ambassador work alright?”
Leo puts on his jacket and leaves the room.
Seeing that, I let out a huge sigh.
Zandra has launched an attack on us but the central figure of our faction still hasn’t made any move.
The only ones that got pulled away were those who only recently came to support us. Losing them
won’t hugely affect our faction’s influence.
The problem is how to keep those who are at the core of our faction. Well, that’s Leo’s job to deal with.
186
What I should think about right now is what are our enemies planning behind the scenes.
“Sebas.”
“Sir, what’s the matter.”
“If you are Zandra what would you do? Who would you target?”
“If it’s me I will not launch any attack. Evidently, I can use other tricks to achieve the same result after
all. Moreover, in the case that I plan to do something I would wait for a little time to pass first. I believe
that the most important matter is to protect my own supporters first after all.”
“I know that but we are dealing with Zandra whose blood already rushed to her head. If that’s the case
what do you think she is planning?”
After pondering a little over my question, Sebas looked at the bag of sweets on the desk and muttered.
Did he notice? Right. Anyone will notice with a little bit of thinking.
“It’s Finne-sama isn’t it. If it’s me I would target Finne-sama.”
“Right. Only Finne will be left with our faction once we’re gone. That’s why if they are going to aim for
anyone it would be Finne.”
“Yes. However, it will cause a problem if they simply attack Finne-sama aren’t they.”
“Yeah, my dad wouldn’t keep silent about it. But, for example, what if Finne got attacked by some
thugs when she is running around trying to protect our supporters? Father’s anger will be directed
toward us instead right?”
“Then should we leave Finne-sama in the castle? I can not see that happening though?”
“No, I already sent her to a safe place. I can’t say that this place is safe either, I would be troubled if
they use someone from the castle and bring her outside after all.”
The security at the Imperial sword castle is thorough. But that only applied to the outside threat. The
same can’t be said for the inside. Well, the security around the upper level where the Emperor lives is
perfect but just because there’s danger doesn’t mean I can just send Finne to him.
“A safe place? As far as I know, I think that the safest place is by your side though?”
“No, since they knew that I was the one who got Earl Baelz to join our side, the person that Zandra
want to slaughter the most right now is probably me. I can’t put her at my side knowing that.”
“I see. Then, wasn’t it a mistake to bring Earl Baelz to our side in the first place? It might be possible
that Her Highness Zandra has noticed that you are hiding your claws after all. I don’t think that the
earl is worth the risk for that.”
187
“That fact can’t remain hidden forever anyway, Father probably already has some idea when I sent
Elna to him as well. Moreover, they will know that you are originally a famous assassin with a little bit
of research. Right now, I will let them misunderstand that everything is your work for a while.”
“It will be bad if you are looking down on your siblings too much. Optimism is a taboo you know?
Those three siblings of your all have the blood of your esteemed father in their vein too after all.”
“I know. Don’t worry, I’m not underestimating them. Rather, I don’t think anyone recognizes their
abilities more than myself.”
It is because I took the utmost caution that I keep her away from me.
This attack of Zandra is undoubtedly aiming for Finne. If she can’t drag Finne away from me then she
will keep peeling away our supporters. Well, it will more or less do some damage to our faction but it
is definitely better than losing Finne.
“It seems you really are not looking down on them. You seem a lot more serious than usual. Is it
because Finne-sama is involved after all?”
“Well yeah. Finne is Duke Kleinert’s daughter. If she got taken away by this then you can consider us
retired from the race.”
“Is that really the case? If you know your opponent’s aim, the usual Arnold-sama would immediately
make a counterattack. But this time not only have you not set up such a counter, but you’ve also
planned out such a perfectly defensive plan. Isn’t this because you don’t want to see Finne-sama in
danger?”
“What do you want to say?”
“No, I think it is a good thing. Mitsuba-sama will be happy as well.”
When I tried to complain to Sebas, I immediately shut my mouth when I saw the know-it-all look on
his face.
It’s clear that no matter what I say back to this butler he will still have a perfect comeback anyway.
That’s why I started preparing to go out without saying anything.
“Are you heading out?”
“Yeah, a certain butler told me not to look down on my enemy so I’m going out to check the security a
little bit.”
“That’s great. If you told her that you were worried when you met then it would be perfect.”
“I won’t.”
“That’s a shame. Even so, where did you hide Finne-sama?”
188
“It’s a place you know well. The safest place in this imperial capital and it is also where the strongest
people of the Empire live.”
“I see. The Amsberg mansion is it. Certainly, no one would be able to lift a finger to that place.”
That’s how it is.
Leaving behind the convinced Sebas, I head to the Amsberg mansion.
————————————
The residence of the Amsbergs is near the castle.
When I arrived at the mansion I was immediately allowed to go inside. Among the princes, the only
one who they allow to enter this easily is probably me.
Elna, I and Leo are childhood friends but ever since we were children, the one that got involved with
them the most is me.
I don’t know how many times Elna made me cried while dragging me to this mansion.
After a while, the knights at the gate started to say welcome back every time they see me. Their
familiarity at that time was quite scary.
Even though this was the first time I visit in a few years, the gatekeeper still said welcome home to me.
To the people of this house, I am the friend of their cute little princess after all.
“If you really think about it, why were you saying welcome home to a crying child though…….”
“From the adults’ point of view, it would look like the kids are getting along isn’t it.”
“How about you?”
“I know that Arnold-sama hated it, of course.”
“………”
The words [Then stop doing that] came to my mouth but I swallowed it down. If I give them some
appropriate reply my pace would just get swept away by them anyway. It’s all in the past, and thanks
to that past, I was able to entrust Finne with them so easily.
With that in mind, I arrived at the entrance. There was a woman with the same hair color as Elna
there. Her eyes are blue. She looks young and beautiful. If no one says anything, people would think
that she is Elna’s elder sister……..
“It’s been a long time, Al.”
“Sorry for the long absence Anna-san.”
189
“Nothing unusual with you too, Sebas?”
“Yes. Madam Amsberg.”
This person is Anna von Amsberg. She is the wife of the Amsberg’s family head and also Elna’s mother.
My mother is almost the same but this person’s youthfulness is truly magical. It seems that the
concept of time doesn’t apply to her at all. Thanks to that I have been hesitating to call her Oba-san
and ended up just attached -san to her name instead.
Anna-san smilingly guides me inside the mansion.
“Unfortunately, my husband is away right now. Ah, you are already a full-fledged prince right. Talking
with you like this might be disrespectful perhaps?”
“No, please remain as you are. I will feel uncomfortable if Anna-san starts using polite speech with me
after all.”
“Arara, let me take on your words then. Elna and Finne-san are in the bath right now. You can enter
with them if you want, you know?”
“I don’t want to die so please allow me to decline.”
“You are so difficult now. You used to enter the bath together in the past, right?”
“That was when I was a child and do you still remember that I was almost drowned by Elna in the bath
here?”
“That did happen, wasn’t it. Then do you still remember when you were crying together? You cried
when Elna was training you to beat up the bullies and Elna ended up crying too because you never
improve no matter what she did wasn’t it.”
“It’s unreasonable for you to ask me that now.”
As I thought, that girl is my natural enemy.
It’s strange that I haven’t received some serious trauma from that.
If I have a weak mind that might lead to suicide you know.
This person is quite dangerous when she is smiling as well.
“For now, can I have you wait at the innermost guestroom?”
“Understood.”
“Sebas, can you help me serving the tea?”
“Certainly.”
190
The fact that I came here often means that Sebas also came along.
He is following after Anna-san like he is her butler.
As I was told, I headed to the farthest guestroom and turn the doorknob without thinking.
However, when I opened the door a little, I felt humans presence inside. Additionally, I also heard a
woman’s voice.
However, I thought that the maid was making the bed so I decided to open the door anyway.
That proves to be a mistake.
“……”
“You really look good in a dress Elna-sama, how about we try on this white dress next.”
“Fi, Finne…..can you stop changing me into a dress-up doll…….”
Inside the room are figures of two women in their underwear. Finne is wearing a pure white one
while Elna’s is pink. Surprisingly, the one Elna’s wearing has cute frills adorning it.
Her white skin that she wouldn’t normally show to anyone is exposed. Perhaps, they thought that
there are only girls here so both of them have felt no need to hide their bodies. Since Finne usually
wore loose clothes there’s not much emphasis on her chest but she is much more glamorous than I
thought. Elna hasn’t grown much since I last checked but there’s a lot of people who like it slender too.
When I was having such a thought, the two of them notice me.
They were confused for a moment but their expressions immediately turned completely red.
Then Elna grabbed a nearby pillow and enter a throwing posture.
It’s already meaningless to resist, the rest is to just accept the punishment.
I forgot. The most troublesome person here was Anna-san. To think that she would guide me to peek
at her unmarried daughter. She is already a villain who takes pleasure in people’s reactions to her
crimes.
“Al!? You!”
“Al-sama!?”
With the realization that I had fallen into a trap, I end up receiving a pillow thrown at ridiculous speed
on my face.
———
191
Escort Request
“Ghuhaa!?”
Receiving her full force pillow throw, I was sent rolling back and hit my head on the wall.
“Ahg!? My heaaaad!?”
The pain ran through both my face and the back of my head.
I roll on the floor while wondering what I did to deserve this.
Meanwhile, Elna shut the door.
At the same time, Anna and Sebas arrived with tea and sweets in their hands.
“What’s wrong? Al? Did you remember some embarrassing past?”
“No, I didn’t! Elna and Finne were changing inside the room so they attacked me!”
I told that to the criminal mastermind, Anna-san but she still acts innocently about it
This person is really……..!
Just what did you plan to do?
“I told you that they were taking a bath though…….well, whatever. Rather than that, how was Elna?
Were you charmed?”
“Not exactly a pleasant experience, before being charmed I thought I was going to be killed…….”
Why are you just [Well, whatever] and brush it away like that? Are you an idiot.
If it wasn’t a pillow then I would be dead you know.
I stroke my still hurting face. Even a soft pillow can do this much damage. What would happen if it was
something hard?
While I was shaking with that thought, the door forcefully opens.
The person that came out of the room was, of course, Elna.
“Al〜? You did well not escaping huh. I will praise you for that. That’s why I will give you a chance to
explain. Now, explain yourself you peeping tom.”
“O, Oi! That isn’t a practice sword, isn’t it!? Calm down! It was Anna-san who–!”
“Don’t you blame my mother for it! It’s your fault because you didn’t knock the door!”
192
“You never knock when you enter my room too, aren’t you!?”
“It’s alright if it’s me!”
“Isn’t that unreasonable!?”
Elna swings down her sword so I start rolling to avoid it.
As I thought, she is not serious but if it’s Elna even if it’s an edgeless practice sword, it would still post
enough threat. I think I won’t die If I got hit by that but there’s a good chance that I can say goodbye to
my memory.
“Elna. that’s unseemly you know”
“B, But Okaa-sama! Al was–!”
“Just being seen in your underwear isn’t that big of a deal isn’t it, you children used to take a bath
together in the past, right?”
“Th, that’s just an old story! We are both adults now!”
“If you are already an adult then keep your composure.”
Still, Elna keep staring daggers at me.
Why me………
The word unreasonable has been popping up in my mind for a while now. That’s right. It was like this
too when we were children. Whenever I’m with Elna the word unreasonable always came to my mind.
“For now, how about some tea.”
Saying so, Anna-san enters the room with a grin on her face.
Elna followed after her and closed the door with a bang for some reason. That woman…….
The ones left behind are just me and Sebas.
“That must be rough.”
“Oi, Sebas…..”
“What is it? Ah, let me say this first, I don’t know about this you know. I would never have thought that
they were changing in the room. I did think that she was up to something though.”
If you know that she was up to something then let me know, I swallowed the voice of my screaming
heart.
This is also the same as my childhood. Sebas will never say or do anything unless there’s danger.
193
“I’m surprised myself…..to think that I have grown up so straightlaced.”
“Straightlaced? That’s a funny joke you say.”
“I dare you to say it again.”
I enter the room while lightly staring at Sebas.
This time I did not forget to knock.
—————
“Sorry about that Al. I didn’t think that they were trying on clothes in this room.”
“No, please, enough of that…….”
“My deepest apologies……it was because I did something unnecessary.”
“It’s not your fault Finne. It’s all Al’s fault.”
Finne is apologizing while Elna acts so self-importantly. Their personalities really show huh.
To summarize the story:
Because there are plenty of clothes for the guest, Elna and Finne dropped by to choose them before
the bath. And for some reason, they started a fashion show and time flew by surprisingly fast when
they were doing that.
Naturally, Anna-san who thought that they had already entered the bath directed me to this room.
Thus the tragedy.
Well, there’s nothing suspicious about that but I still feel that the story was artificial. Why did she
deliberately point me to this room? I can’t help but think that she was aiming for this to happen.
However, it’s useless to pursue the matter. I can’t possibly beat Anna-san in a conversation.
“Well, since I already paid for my sin, we are good right, Elna.”
“Do you think I can forgive you with just that!? You peeked on two unmarried women you know!?
Moreover, we are a daughter of the Brave house and the Duke too!”
“Then you want him to take responsibility? Alright, that’s fine by me.”
“Wha!?”
“Eehhhhhh!!??”
“Haa…….”
194
Elna turns her flushed face to Anna-san who just calmly dropped the bomb into our conversation
while Finne was completely caught off guard and don’t know what to do.
Seriously, this person is……..
“If it’s Al then that person won’t be objecting too you know? What do you want to do?”
“Wh, what do I want to do?……th, that is…..I, I am a knight so about that…….”
“If you can’t forgive him for seeing you in your underwear no matter what then, of course, this would
be the case right? But the problem would be striking a deal with Duke Kleinert huh. You sure are
popular, Al.”
“Certainly, we must contact Finne-sama’s home about this as well.”
“Hawawawa!? C, contacting Otou-sama!? Th, that is…….”
“Please don’t decide the matter about my life so amusingly. My apology but I have no intention to
marry anyone yet.”
“You won’t take responsibility?”
“I will not.”
“Ara, that’s a shame.”
After she said that, Anna-san put a snack to her mouth.
At that point, Elna realizes that she has been teased all along so she turned her flushed face away from
me.
Finne must have noticed that it was a joke too as her face turned completely red as well.
“Well, Al. Isn’t it about time you get to the main subject? You didn’t just come here to play right?”
As expected of Madam Amsberg. She knows huh.
I turn to face Anna-san.
“This might be a shameless request but can I leave Finne in your care for a while? And, I want her to
be together with Elna as much as possible.”
“It’s related to the succession war, isn’t it? Then that’s impossible. We are the Brave house. We will not
involve ourselves with the succession war.”
Well, of course.
I knew that she would give me such an obvious reply.
195
Having Finne stay here for a few days is one thing but if I leave her here for a period of time then it
wouldn’t be weird if people start to think that the Brave house is supporting our faction.
They can’t let something like that happen.
However.
“The Blau Mowe is the Emperor’s favorite. If something happens to her, His Majesty will be furious. I
don’t think it would be strange for the Brave house to protect such a person.”
“Ara? You are going with that kind of story?”
“Can you take her in with that?”
“Even if you don’t say that, if you just say please do it for me, I would take her in though. As always,
you are so poor at appealing to others with your emotions. It’s a waste you know?”
Anna-san indifferently said so.
In other words, she accepted my request.
This will guarantee Finne’s safety until Zandra stops her attack. As long as the Brave house is with her,
there’s no way that anything can happen to her.
“I will keep that in mind. And thank you very much for your help. I will make sure to return this
gratitude someday.”
“Yes, I will have you do that. But….time sure flies. To think that Al would be involved with the
succession war already……you were always a crybaby to me but, that’s not the case anymore is it.”
“I can’t keep crying forever after all. Then, Finne. Please stay here for a while. Don’t worry, it will be
over in a few days.”
“Yes….Uhm, are you not in danger yourself Al-sama?”
“It’s because you will be in danger at my side that I want you to stay at the Brave house. Honestly, it’s
totally possible that Zandra will ignore all reasons and come to attack me. Right now, she wants to kill
me that badly.”
Zandra’s personality is brutal. Her temper is also wild. As her attack this time suggests, the other side
has no one that can completely control Zandra. At least such a person is not with her right now.
With that, I can’t expect her to act according to my expectations.
These few days are terribly dangerous. In this period Gordon will surely attack Zandra’s faction. That
will weaken her offensive on our side but no matter how powerful Gordon is, we have no choice but to
wait for a few days more.
It is a challenge whether we can hold up until then.
196
“Th, then wouldn’t it be better for Al-sama to hide too…….”
“If I go into hiding, Leo will be targeted. I can’t hide because I have to attract Zandra’s attention to
myself. Well, she will at least send some assassins to get me at least once I guess.”
“But that’s!?”
“Well, don’t worry. I have Sebas with me and there’s someone who will help us out if we get into
trouble as well.”
Hearing so, Finne finally withdraws.
Sorry that you have to make such a worried face but I will not be assassinated.
They are probably thinking that they can get me if they can break through Sebas but I also have my
own defense as well.
Unless they realize that I am Silver, it’s impossible for anyone to assassinate me.
197
Hat Girl
With the Brave house protecting Finne, we were able to make our move with peace of mind.
It has been two days. Zandra continues to pull away all of the supporters that we expected to turncoat.
However, on the second night, Zandra finally springs her trap.
“Enemy huh.”
“So they’re finally here.”
Sebas muttered while we are driving on the carriage.
Even if I already expected them, I end up heaving a sigh. Blood really rushed to her head huh. To think
that she would do it here of all places. it is like opening the gap in her defense for Eric and Gordon
herself. I have Sebas on my side and even if she did assassinate me, her power will be decreased.
Despite having to deal with attacks from two different factions, she must really want to make an
example out of me huh.
“She’s a short-sighted woman isn’t she.”
“In a way, you could say that she’s really formidable. She must have quite an eye to target you first.”
“Why thank you. But her attack is welcome still.”
“Yes. Her Highness Zandra’s supporters must really want some work to do aren’t they.”
Zandra’s influence came from the mages who support her.
Of course, some of her supporters are not a mage but all of the excellent civil and military officers
already joined Eric or Gordon’s camp. As a result, there are only a few of Zandra supporters that
possess strong political sense. That’s why despite having many powerful mages on her side, she still
can’t win against Gordon and Eric.
It would be totally different if Zandra has a competent advisor on her side though.
“I will clean this up.”
“Got it. I will head to the castle.”
“Please be careful. There might be an ambush waiting for you on the way.”
“I will deal with it when the time comes.”
After having such a conversation, Sebas jumps out of the moving carriage.
198
Well, 8 or 9 out of ten, there would be some soldiers waiting to ambush me. On the other hand, I only
have the carriage driver with me. From the enemy’s point of view, it must look like they were able to
successfully lured Sebas away from me. If that’s the case, there should be some assassins who know
about their inside information with them again this time.
Let’s take this opportunity to collect some information again, shall we?
When I was planning my evil deed, the carriage driver let out a scream.
“Hiiii!!?? Y, Your Highness! There’s a person in front of us!?”
“Don’t worry about it, keep driving.”
“N, No way!? I, I don’t want to die!”
As expected, the assassins are already lying in wait in front of us.
The young driver stopped the carriage and immediately ran away, leaving me behind.
I let out a sigh inside the carriage. I knew this would happen and it is certainly easier to deal with the
assassin like this but I still sighed at how low my popularity is. If the person riding in this carriage was
Leo instead then the driver would never escape by himself.
“Get down from there. If you won’t, I will drag you down myself.”
“You just want to confirm my face aren’t you.”
While muttering a reply to the assassin, I obediently get off the carriage.
In front of the carriage was a middle-aged man with swept up brown hair. His face brimming with
dignity signify that he is a man with long military service. Apparently, Zandra is quite serious this
time. Even among Zandra’s men, he is probably in her top five.
At a glance, I think that he should have the power equivalent to an A-rank adventurer.
The fact that he can pull off a surprise attack like this means that he is quite a skilled assassin. Even
the same A-rank adventurer could easily be killed if you have a person of equal ability suddenly
appearing behind you. Assassins are different from adventurers because they are a pro at killing
people after all.
“For your servant to run off by himself, you are quite pitiful aren’t you.”
“It’s not like I’m popular from the beginning though.”
“I see. So you don’t care about something like that huh. Is it because you have that much trust in your
butler?”
“Yeah. Sebas will immediately come over to end you anyway.”
199
“That’s a beautiful relationship between master and servant but he will not be able to save you this
time. No matter how skilled a butler he is, it will take time for him to rush here while dealing with
twelve assassins after all.”
“Guess we’ll see about that.”
I didn’t break my carefree attitude.
Perhaps, he thinks that it was a bluff, the man approached me with a bitter smile on his face.
Then he creates a dagger with fire magic in his hand.
“The order was to assassinate you but I won’t take your life. I will render you helpless and have you
come to meet my Lord.”
“I don’t really want to visit my torture-loving sister though.”
He is quite a thoughtful subordinate.
Rather than an assassination, abducting me is better in this case. If I’ve gone missing, they can do
whatever they want with me. Eric and Gordon wouldn’t put in that much effort to rescue me and in a
best-case scenario, they can even become my substitute for Leo’s aide as well.
For the time being, they can just take me outside the capital before the search begins and torture me
there. If my heart breaks, Zandra can do whatever she wants with me. Even if I’m rescued, a person
that was broken by Zandra’s torture will never talk about her being involved. She can even break my
mind and make me a cripple too. That way, they would be able to do more damage to us and it has a
lot less risk than an assassination as well.
“That’s a shame. If you want to hate someone then you can hate your own excellent little brother for
this.”
Saying so, he threw the flame dagger at me.
But I have a defensive barrier erected around me. He can’t break through it with that level of magic.
I was acting carefree because of that but that flame dagger was suddenly deflected away by a sword
that appeared from the side.
“!?”
“Who are you?”
“A passing adventurer.”
Surprised, I turn to look at the intruder.
A girl with brown hair in a ponytail was there. However, the fact that she is wearing a hat combining
with her rough appearance made her look like a boy.
200
I remembered seeing this girl before.
She was one of the A-rank adventurers that came to defeat the Mother Slime at Duke Kleinert’s
territory.
“If you are an adventurer then back off. It’s not like you received a request to protect him aren’t you?”
“Yes, I didn’t receive such a request. Of course, I don’t know who is standing behind me or why he was
being attacked. I have no duty or obligation to help him.”
“Then-”
“But seeing a person get killed in front of me will leave a bad aftertaste. Moreover, he was abandoned
by his servant as well. If I don’t help him now he would be too pitiful isn’t he?”
“You bastard….to be his ally means that you are willing to turn a person of great power into your
enemy you know? Are you willing to do that?”
“Rather than regretting abandoning him, it would be better if I start regretting after I saved him.”
Upon hearing her answer, the man completely judged the girl as his enemy.
He takes out daggers in both hands and starts throwing them at the girl. Unlike before, his daggers
were not created by magic.
The girl parries them with her sword but there were daggers made of ice follow immediately behind
the first attack. If she dodges, those daggers will hit me who is standing behind her.
She counters such unusual move with an even more unusual one.
She turned her sword into a shield and block the ice daggers.
“A magic sword that can change its shape huh, you sure carrying some odd thing around…..”
“I got it at a certain ruin. It can even do something like this you know.”
Saying so, the girl turned her sword into a spear. She swings it around a little and slowly approaches
the man.
At first glance, it seems like a simple spear but soon he discovered how peculiar it is.
“Kuh….!?”
“As expected, you didn’t immediately go to sleep huh. The sound emitted by this can even send a
powerful monster to sleep though.”
“Sound huh…..!”
201
So it emitting sound that lulls the target to sleep huh. I don’t know how it sounds from where I’m
standing but it seems the man is hearing some kind of lullaby over there.
What a troublesome ability. It’s not funny to fall asleep in a serious fight. Even if you could endure the
drowsiness, no one would be able to fight well in that condition.
The man must understand that as well.
He immediately took distance from the girl. He clicked his tongue as he glanced at me and retreated.
Shortly after, Sebas arrives at the scene.
“So, what did I get myself into?”
“You rescued me from a tight spot. Thank you, you saved me.”
“No, I can’t just stand by while seeing people getting killed after all. By the way, judging from the
carriage you must be some kind of important person correct?”
“Yeah, sorry. I’m Arnold Lakes Adler, the seventh prince of the Empire.”
“Seventh prince? I see, so it’s the rumored succession war after all. I just tried to help people but it
seems I’m able to make a big step toward my goal huh.”
The girl takes her hat off and kneels on the ground.
I can see her slightly gender-neutral and well-featured face. Her age is probably the same as mine.
“Your Highness. My name is Lynfia. You could say that I am collecting on the debt of saving your life
but would you please listen to my request?”
No, no, I don’t remember asking for your help though. And I lost the chance to catch an enemy’s
assassin too.
Even if that’s what I wanted to say, she doesn’t know that I’m Silver. And as Arnold, I can’t possibly
refuse her request as she just saved my life. If I refuse her then there will be no one who will be willing
to help me or Leo in the future.
But, I can tell from experience.
This will definitely be troublesome.
However,
“Let’s continue this at the castle. Help yourself into the carriage. I don’t know whether I can grant your
request with my power or not though.”
With the last precautionary line, I invite Lynfia into the carriage.
202
Seriously, one after another, troubles really don’t go away that easily huh.
Letting out a small sigh, I can only lament at my misfortune.
TLN: Yes, the author said that she’s the new heroine.
This is her picture by the way…..
203
204
Lynfia
205
Immigrant’s Problem
After we returned to the castle, I invited Lynfia to my room.
I sat down on the sofa across of her and starts the conversation.
“Let me thank you again Lynfia. If you weren’t there I would already be dead.”
“I wonder about that. That assassin wasn’t trying to kill you. That being the case, the butler standing
behind you should be able to make it in time, no?”
“Even so, I was able to survive that incident without a scratch. Thank you.”
“I did that for myself. And I don’t want you to thank me with your word alone either”
Lynfia said that without a change in her expression.
She’s a collected child. Her tone of voice was plain and she doesn’t let anything show on her
expression as well. As a solo adventurer, I guess she’s a little lacking in charm though. Well, she must
have enough ability to compensate for it.
“Right. Let’s hear it then.”
“Thank you very much. I was born in a village to the south of the Empire border. If I say that I came
from the immigrant village, you must have some general idea correct?”
Immigrant village.
I frown at that word. I thought that it would be troublesome but this is going to be more problematic
than I expected.
The immigrants here refer to the people who have flowed into the empire together with their whole
village. They are not originally citizens of the Empire. These are people who have been displaced from
their homes due to wars or monster outbreaks.
“Of course I do. It’s a matter that’s over my head, I’m afraid. Well, tell me more about it.”
“Yes. As you know, there are various ethnic groups inside the immigrant village but most of them are
not recognized by the empire. It’s only natural. They entered the Empire and established their village
as they pleased. I have no intention to complain about that. I am one of them after all. But…..right now
we need help from the Empire.”
“Did something happen?”
“Yes. our village has become the target of human trafficking. Young women and children are being
kidnapped. The reason we were targeted is that our village is one made up of multiple races. Including
me, a lot of people in my village are mixed races.”
206
Mixed race people are not that uncommon.
If we are talking about that then I am one as well.
Black hair isn’t rare inside the Empire but it is unusual to see people with black eyes around here.
Well, it’s so rare that people would think that you came from the east.
In other words, that’s not the reason that her people are being taken away.
“What’s wrong with the mixed races in your village?”
“……..they have odd eyes.”
The moment I heard that, the words [it’s that after all] came up to my head. The reason why mixed-
race people are kidnapped is only that or they have the blood of other Demi-Human races.”
I involuntarily clicked my tongue and cross my legs.
It’s a disgusting topic. Odd eyes are the phenomenon where a person has different iris colors in each
of their eyes. The problem here is that they can be sold at high prices. The reason is that they are rare
and most of them often possess high magic power.
“I can’t overlook human trafficking but the southern border is a well-managed place. Wouldn’t it be
better for you to contact the local Lords in the nearby big cities or military personnel in that area
rather than deliberately getting help from the imperial capital?”
“I did that. But no one would make a move. They told me that there was no evidence or that there’s no
such village in the Empire…. That’s why I left the village to get the help of influential people in the
capital. Luckily, I don’t have the odd eyes myself. Then, when I accept the request to subjugate the
monsters in the west region, I was able to make contact with Silver there. Since there’s a rumor that
Silver is somehow connected to the imperial family, I came to the imperial capital in hopes to get in
contact with him. But in the end, before I could meet him, I met you first.”
“That’s one strange meeting. but, they won’t move huh…..”
The worst scenario came to mind. The worst kind of development this incident could have.
That scenario is the local lords and military in the area are in cahoot with the human trafficking
organization. If that’s the case then this is no longer just a matter of the immigrant village.
It will become the corruption problem of the nobles and the army.
And if that’s really the case, I will not have enough time to resolve the incident with just me alone.
“Arnold-sama, even if it’s the wish of your life savior, you must admit when you know that the matter
is impossible for you.”
“Sebas…..”
207
“Why?”
“Arnold-sama and his little brother Leonard-sama will soon be sent to another country as an
ambassador and his aide. He will not be able to return to the empire for half a month at the very least,
and several months at the longest. Even if he wants to help, he will not have enough time to do it.”
“Is…that so………then can you at least provide us with some funds? I have been hiring the adventurers
I trusted to protect the village. The village will be safe for the time being but soon they will not have
enough money to hire the adventurers. I gave them my earning as an advance payment too but it will
not be enough to keep them at the village forever…..”
I see. So that’s why she became an adventurer.
Making money while scouting out adventurers she could trust. To do that it would be best to go out on
a request together.
She did put a lot of thought into it huh.
Well, what to do.
Things will be easier if I abandon her. I don’t need another troublesome problem on my plate in busy
time like this.
Even if she says that she saved my life, that is just on the surface. It not like I asked her to save me.
Moreover, there are wishes that you can ask people to grant for you and those that you can’t.
No matter how you think about it, this is the latter.
However, there are people who would complain if I abandon her here. I don’t mind they complaining
but it would be troublesome if they start acting on their own.
No choice huh.
“Lynfia. I understand your situation. Are you alright with accepting a compromise?”
“A compromise?”
“Yeah, I and Leo will leave for another country. That’s unavoidable. However, I will do the best within
my ability to help you when I come back. I want you to wait for me until then. Of course, I will put out
another request to the adventurers I trusted to guarantee the village’s safety for the time being. We
have enough money for that. How about it?”
“Is that really alright…..?
“Arnold-sama……that’s too dangerous. We are in the middle of the succession war you know? If you
get involved with another problem now you will create a new opening. What happened today will
definitely happen again in the future.”
“If that’s the case I will offer my help as well. Are you alright with that?”
208
Saying so, Lynfia puts her sword on the desk.
It looks thin at first glance but as demonstrated earlier, this is a magic sword. It can change its form to
things like spear or shield. Judging from what I saw with the spear, each of its forms has its own
ability.
Lynfia showed it to us without a change in her expression.
“If you are going to protect the village for me then I will offer you my protection. I will protect what
you want to protect as well. Can we agree on such a deal? Although I don’t have much confidence, I am
good at protecting important people.”
“I’m thankful for your proposal but are you alright not being at your village?”
“There will be no problem as long as you send adventurers to protect them. The human trafficking
organization doesn’t have any skilled people. When I was in the village, I alone was enough to fend
them off. If there’s an A-rank class adventurer at the village, the safety should be pretty much
guaranteed.”
To deliberately say that, she must be a cautious child with a strong sense of duty huh.
Considering the possibility that I might not act on my words, Lynfia is saying that she wants to stay by
my side to guarantee my side of the deal.
In fact, depending on the situation I might do just that. That’s why I phrased the word [within my
ability] in my offer.
This is quite a find huh?
Let’s try testing her a little bit more.
“Lynfia. In that case, what would you do if I break my promise?”
“I will run to another camp with something that can disadvantage you. I will have them help my village
in exchange for that.”
I and Sebas look at each other at the same time.
An A-rank adventurer with combat abilities that can handle various kinds of situations and make such
a bargain. Since she is also living as a solo adventurer, she must also have other kinds of knowledge as
well.
I can’t leave Finne in Elna’s care forever. Elna also has her own missions after all.
If that’s the case then Lynfia is a great resource to fill that hole.
Frankly, both her personality and ability are far more suitable than Elna’s.
“Then, what if I back out of the deal right now?”
209
“I’m alright with that. I will bring this to another emperor’s candidates. If I told them that you refused
to help me, they would probably accept me.:
“Fumu……..”
So she has the ability to look at the big picture too huh.
In this situation, even the calmness that she shows by not moving a single muscle on her face adds a
point to her evaluation. Right now, Lynfia is threading on a tightrope after all.
If I refused her here, Lynfia will definitely fall into a predicament. I can’t imagine the other candidates
offering her the same offer as mine either. She said that she will join another faction if I refuse to help
her but that’s just something she said to make herself looked stronger, a bluff.
Still, Lynfia herself doesn’t act agitated or try to get on my good side.
That’s because she knew. She knew that she is being tested.
“Sebas. What do you think?”
“I have no objection. She will definitely become a strong ally if you choose to cooperate with her.
However, you will have to solve her village’s problem though.”
“Weighing options huh……well, can’t be helped. I have no choice, Lynfia, I will accept your proposal.
Give me your cooperation and I will give you mine. That’s alright with you?”
“I don’t mind but…why did you say that you don’t have any choice?”
“My little brother is a good guy you see. The daughter of the Duke who is our biggest collaborator is
one as well. If I abandon you now, they will get angry at me and try to help you on their own anyway.
If that’s the case then it would be best if I agree to help you from the beginning.”
“…..honestly, I’m surprised. There was nothing good about your reputation after all. Incompetent and
lethargic. The prodigal prince that only playing around without doing anything. The prince that got all
his good parts taken away by his own little brother, the dull prince. That’s how a lot of people
described you. But, the impression I got once I talked with you is the exact opposite. You are neither
incompetent nor lethargic. Aren’t you actually prince Leonard in disguise?”
Lynfia looks at me with a slightly suspicious look.
To that, I smiled bitterly.
Come to think of it, the problem was too troublesome that I forgot to act like an incompetent. At this
point, it’s useless to perform a do-over with Lynfia huh.
“Rest assured. I’m definitely Arnold. Well, we struck a deal for the time being. I will in your care then,
Lynfia.”
“…….Thank you, I will be in your care as well.”
210
Saying so, I and Lynfia have a firm handshake.
…………………………….
TLN: And that’s the end of the first episode of the 2nd Arc. In the next episode we will be heading to
another country.
211
People have things they are not good at
New episode
——————
The shape of the Vogel continent is sometimes described as a bird with its wings spread.
The land that spread to both left and right side combining with the one that protrudes slightly on the
north and south side appeared exactly like wings, head, and tail of a bird.
At the center/torso of the Vogel continent, is the Adraxia Empire.
The place that Leo and I were dispatched to is located at the tail.
The name of that country is the Principality of Rondine. It is one of the two countries situated in the
tail part of the continent.
“One of the two countries that survived the Southern Warring period huh……”
I am reading the document about the said country on top of a ship.
It is an imperial envoy fleet led by Leo on his mission as the ambassador plenipotentiary.
It consists of two vessels, each carrying gifts for Rondine.
Just in case of an accident, I and Leo are on a different ship. Well, this is a moderately calm sea so
nothing should happen.
But there’s one person who is currently relentlessly shaking on my ship.
“If you already shaking this much on such a calm sea, you won’t be able to visit any other ones you
know?”
“I, I don’t even want to visit one in the first place………..”
That person was Elna who is covering herself in a blanket on top of her bed.
Why is she shaking so much and why is she here in the first place?
Well, it will be quite a lengthy explanation.
Normally, an ambassador plenipotentiary would be escorted by a member of the Imperial knight
order. The reason Elna is here is simply because she was nominated. This must be an act to separate
those who support us from the Imperial capital. Well, I was anticipating that and already had Lynfia
stationed with Finne in advance so things should be fine.
212
Well, sending a person of the Brave house who can wield holy sword away from the Empire is already
a problem in and of itself but it also has the benefit of showing how serious we are willing to exhibit
our goodwill.
In the end, Father accepted that suggestion to send her with us but he must have already realized that
it was a hand they played.
Incidentally, A person from the Brave house that can use the holy sword is one of the Empire’s most
important war potential. Sending such a person to another country will lessen the Empire’s option to
defend itself in case other nations choose to attack us. That’s one problem. Another one is that the
Brave house can’t use the power of the holy sword outside the Empire’s ground without the
Emperor’s permission. It was a safety measure taken in case the Brave house betrayed the Empire and
was accepted by their first-generation head.
I didn’t look deeply into this. It is rare for a person from the Brave house to head outside the Empire’s
territory after all.
“Curse them……! I won’t forget this grudge…..! I will never forgive those three…..!”
“You don’t sound convincing when you are shaking so much though.”
And, the reason why she is shaking like this now is because she is simply afraid of the sea.
Elna is fine with baths but she’s the type that turned useless in rivers and ocean. It’s something called
Aquaphobia I think. To the almost perfect Elna, one could say that this is her only weakness. Even
though Elna herself hates losing, this is the one weakness that she couldn’t overcome.
Looking at the sea, she will start feeling nausea and dizziness due to anxiety and when she gets on a
ship her body can’t stop shaking due to her unexplainable fear. If she went to the deck right now she
would probably faint from shock.
“But well, you sure hid it well up until now huh? I thought for sure that it’s already exposed you
know.”
“A person from the Brave house who can use the holy sword will not often leave the Empire……Since I
know that the Empire’s territory is mostly in-land I desperately summoned the holy sword when I
was twelve……..I don’t want to get on a ship after all……..”
Elna sheds a small tear.
The first person who summoned the holy sword for such an idiotic reason is probably Elna. Rather
than that, I smirk at how useless her effort has now become.
“Y, you smiled just now right…..!? What are you doing that for when your childhood friend is trembling
in fear like this……!?”
“If anyone knew how you became so afraid of water then they would do it too. Especially me.”
213
“A. Al, you also have some responsibilities on this, aren’t you…..!? I was so scared of it now because of
how I saw you drown you know…..!”
Exactly, it was around when I was eight years old. I was taking a bath with Elna, at that time, it seems I
said something that annoyed her and ended up eating a body blow from her. After that, I fainted and
sank down in the bath. I almost drowned back then.
And when that happened she freaked out for some reason and ended up afraid of water ever since.
That’s the most unreasonable cause ever. Her unreasonableness wouldn’t be beaten by any Tyrant out
there.
“You were just suffering the consequences of your own actions. Normally, it wouldn’t be weird if I am
the one who ends up scared of water you know. It’s a divine punishment, yeah clearly a divine
punishment.”
“Uuuuuu…..you are enjoying this too much……..”
Before I notice, Elna is already weakly half-crying.
Seriously, if you are that scared then you should just decline the nomination in the first place.
Just why did you come with me.
“I think that if you talk to Father, he would consider let you off though?”
“It, it will become a scandal if people know that the daughter of the Brave house is afraid of
water……….! B, besides, if I told him that I am afraid of going to the sea then it would feel like I lost
right…….”
“Just what are you competing at, seriously…..”
When I was astounded by her words, the ship shook a little.
It wasn’t shaking a lot but it seemed Elna is taking it as a huge impact.
“KYAAAAA!!?? Ouch!?”
She rolled around her small bed, struck her head and now crouching in pain.
This scene is absolutely impossible to witness on land so it felt rather refreshing seeing her like this
now.
“You really are useless on water huh. If we were attacked by pirates then it would be over for us
right?”
“D, don’t look down on me……! If push comes to shove, I…..! KYAAAAA!!?? That was a big one, wasn’t
it!? Did it make a hole in the ship!?
214
“If push comes to shove then you will totally be useless right. I guess that it won’t come to that but it
would be a different story if a Sea Dragon showed up though.”
The scariest thing on the sea is the Sea Dragon, the king of the sea.
It is a dragon that adapts to the sea and is the highest class of monsters that are rampaging in the
ocean. Its horror is stronger than its land counterpart. There are countless sailors who died by getting
their ship sunk in the middle of the sea after all.
Fleets of two opposing nations engaging in a naval battle were sometimes sunk together by it.
Naturally, Elna must have known of such a horror story as well.
Once she heard the word Sea Dragon, the look on her face was like her mind was completely broken.
“Am I…..going to die here?”
“You are not going to die, idiot. You looked like a completely different person. Is that the face of an
Imperial knight. Even if you have some obstacle in your mission, it is still the mission you accepted
right.”
“But……”
“Haa……..”
Well, it doesn’t like I don’t understand not wanting to show your weakness. Moreover, it’s not like we
have to fight anything in the middle of the ocean and I can’t imagine a pirate deliberately attacking
such a well-guarded fleet either.
If we get on land, Elna will return to her usual self. Let’s stop bullying her for now.
Feeling refreshed after having plenty of revenge, I secretly cast a barrier around Elna. It’s a barrier
that cuts her off from the outside. With this, the shaking she has to deal with will get a little better.
Normally I wouldn’t be able to use it without her noticing but it should be fine since the current Elna
wouldn’t be able to notice the barrier.
“Th, the shaking subsided a little hasn’t it…….”
“It didn’t shake that strongly in the first place though.”
“A, Al, you are too carefree……. What would you do if the ship sunk?”
“In the long history of the Empire, there are only two incidents that an envoy ship sunk you know.”
“But there’s no guarantee that today will not be the third time right…….?”
Unlike usual, she is annoyingly negative in her thinking. Why are you scared of the thing I said to
reassure you?
It’s no use no matter what I say huh. Let’s scare her more then.
215
When I was having that thought, I heard a modest knock from the door.
Elna reacts scarily even to that knocking sound. Since she’s in no shape to answer the door, I do it in
her stead.
When I did, a middle-aged knight who is Elna’s subordinate came in.
“Come in.”
“Excuse me…… Um, where’s Captain?”
“St, still breathing……..”
“Will you be alright going to the deck?”
“Are you telling me to die…..!? I will get blown off the deck by the wind and drown won’t I…..!”
“You think we are in the middle of a storm or something? It’s sunny today you know. Seriously….well,
it’s as you see.”
When I looked at the knight with the tired look on my face, the knight made a bitter smile. As
expected, it seems her direct subordinate knows about her phobia. Well, she can’t possibly hide it that
well anyway.
“I will just make my report in that case. A ship from the Principality of Albatro is asking for a dialogue.
For the time being, both our and Prince Leonard’s ship have been anchored but what should we do
next?”
“Principality of Albatro is it. So we already entered their waters huh.”
The Principality of Albatro is a country that is located next to the Principality of Rondine. It is a
maritime nation and a country with extensive sea trading. Their relationship with the Empire was
estranged because they allied themselves in a war with the enemy of the Empire in the past.
To request a dialogue at this time, it seems they don’t want us to head to Rondine huh. Instead of a
talk, this must essentially be an inspection.
“H, have the knights stay inside their room….it’s not good to agitate them……”
“I agree. What did Leo say about this?”
“That is….it seems Prince Leonard is feeling bad so he sent me here to ask Captain for direction.”
“Haa…..can’t be helped then. I will pretend to be Leo and talk with them.”
With that said, I left the room together with the middle-aged knight.
Anchored next to mine, is Leo’s ship. If I give the sign that we are willing to accept the dialogue, the
people from the Principality of Albatro will probably get on board the ship.
216
Well, since they wouldn’t have looked into every detail of the Empire’s envoy, this should be fine.
When I move to the next ship, I head to Leo’s room.
Inside was a blue-faced Leo. As expected, I can’t let him have a dialogue looking like this.
“Yo, you don’t look so good huh. Seasick?”
“Yeah…..it seems……”
“Pull yourself together, you are not Elna alright.”
“Sorry…..”
“I will switch places with you for now. You go rest on the other ship.”
“But……”
“It’s fine, go. And tell them that Prince Arnold is feeling sick for me.”
“But, if I say that, Your Highness’s reputation will……..”
“It’s fine. It won’t change anything after all this time.”
When I told that to Elna’s subordinate, I sent Leo off to the next ship. Of course, everyone in the
surroundings thinks that he is Prince Arnold.
Left behind, I set my hair and adjusted my clothes then went out of the room with a firm expression.
“Receive their dialogue request. Make preparation.
“Yes, Your Highness.”
Thus, I switched places with Leo in the middle of the sea.
217
Prince and Princess of Albatro
Approaching us are three Albatro’s warships.
They are sailboats equipped with cannons that fire magic bullets. At present they are the latest model
of warships. A close quarter battle is one thing but we won’t be able to do anything if we are engaged
in a long-range one.
“As expected, they are not here to attack us huh.”
“If they do, it would start a war after all.”
“Thanks for escorting them. How are those two doing on the other ship?”
“They are still groggy Your Highness. If they are in a competition then you would need to call a referee
to stop the match.”
After he escorted Leo to my ship, the middle-aged knight returned to my side. Only he knows that we
switched places so it would be helpful having him with me.
“Well, since I’m substituting for him, am I considered disqualified?”
“It’s fine as long as they don’t find out isn’t it.”
He replied.
He is so flexible that I can’t imagine him working under Elna. Rather, I want him as my own
subordinate.
“I see. Then I will have to play this thorough huh.”
“Allow me to accompany you.”
With that said, we head to receive the approaching Albatro ships.
————–
“Thank you for accepting our dialogue request. Ambassador-dono.”
(TLN: -dono mean sir, lord, formal way of addressing someone)
The person that came aboard our ship was a girl with pale brown hair. Her shoulder-length hair sways
slightly in the wind.
Her age must be around 14 or 15. Her green colored eyes look into me with interest.
I never thought that I would be dealing with a younger person here, so I was a little surprised.
218
She must have realized that so she immediately bowed her head.
“Sorry for my rudeness. I’m Evangelina di Albatro. I’m the Princess of the Principality of Albatro.
Please call me Eva.”
“Ah, Aneue, wait for me〜……”
“The stupid one over there is my little brother, Julio di Albatro.”
The appearances of Julio and Eva are like two peas in a pod. It’s not that Eva looks masculine but it is
Julio who looks feminine.
If they stand side by side, I would be convinced that they are sisters.
Eva is a beautiful girl but I can feel a strong will from her eyes. On the other hand, Julio seems timid
and indecisive. If I’m asked which one is more woman-like then excuse my rudeness but it would be
Julio.
To think that the prince and princess of Albatro are twins. Rather, what do they want by boarding our
ship?
I bowed gracefully as Leo would in return while thinking that It’s good that I took the sick Leo’s place
rather than letting him force himself to be here.
Before our departure, Albatro has been informed that Leo was dispatched as the ambassador
plenipotentiary to Rondine.
Naturally, these two must know about that as well.
That’s why their reason for requesting this dialogue isn’t to stop us. If they want to stop us they can
just bar our passage when we cross Albatro’s water after all. If Albatro deliberately allows our passage
through their territory and then change their mind later they would lose the trust from other
countries.
So, Eva and Julio must be here because of a different reason.
“I have heard a rumor about you, Prince Leonard. When a monster tsunami happened in the Empire,
you gain the loyalty of the knights and led an assault on the monsters. As expected of a prince of the
Empire, you possess both bravery and military talent.”
“That’s not true. It was all due to the knights’ strenuous effort. Moreover, if we are talking about
military talent, both of you also possess them are you not? Your Highnesses weren’t dispatching the
warships just to meet with me correct?”
Hearing that, Eva’s eyes turned a little sharper while Julio’s expression grew timid.
As expected, they have another reason to visit us.
219
Rather than an action against us, they are out here on a different objective and we were just passing
by.
The question here is what kind of goal does this prince and princess set out to achieve. Judging from
their behaviors it doesn’t seem that these two are proficient in battle.
Eva seems to have some knowledge about it but I can’t feel a shred of that from Julio. He is perhaps
even worse than me in handling a sword. Why would you bring someone like him to a battle?
When I was thinking about probing them more about it, Eva raised her voice.
“You showed too much on your face! Stupid! Seriously…..”
“S, Sorry, Aneue…….”
“Haa….Your Highness Leonard. If you already understand that much then please allow me to get
directly to the point. We would like you to change your course. We won’t stop you from going to
Rondine but, please take a detour as much as you can.”
“Can you tell me the reason?”
“….I don’t want to say it if possible. We can’t trust you or the Empire after all.”
“I see.”
To be able to express her distrust toward the Empire so clearly, this girl has quite a firm character.
The Principality of Albatro is but a weak country when compared to the Empire. Their sea trading is
thriving so if the Empire attacked them, other countries will also become their allies. However, if the
Empire decided to do it, we have enough power to crush them.
Albatro must know that as well.
Even so, if she put it like that, it means that it is a problem that they would be troubled if it became
known by us.
I look around a little.
Then.
“Change the course. We will take a detour to Rondine.”
“Y, Your Highness!? If we do that we will be several days later than the schedule!”
“I don’t mind. We have plenty of food and water to spare, and Rondine wouldn’t mind a little delay
either.”
“But!”
220
“I already decided. Will that be good enough? Your Highness Eva.”
I let out a laugh inside my mind when I saw the dumbfounded look on Eva’s face.
I see. So this is the reaction I can get when I act like Leo huh. Was Leo acting like this because he
enjoyed seeing such an expression?
Eva’s reaction was very interesting.
“……as expected from someone who is actively participating in a succession war. You are a very broad-
minded person. We are grateful for your wise decision, Your Highness Leonard.”
“Th, Thank you very much.”
“Now, please allow us to excuse ourselves.”
“Ex, excuse us.”
With their business over, Eva and Julio head back to their ship.
At the same time, we start preparing for our own departure. I want to stop acting as Leo as soon as I
could but I can’t do anything suspicious because they will be keeping an eye on us to see if we really
changed our course.
In the end, we departed with me still swapping places with Leo.
Well, that’s not the problem. If he stays in the room he won’t stand out and I don’t have to perform
Leo’s work until we reach the shore either. The problem here is Albatro’s objective.
“What exactly do they want?”
“I’m wondering about that too.”
To the middle-aged knight’s question, I also tilted my head.
Honestly, I have no clue. They dispatched three warships with a princess and a prince on board. If they
want to fight, the princess and the prince wouldn’t be necessary. And if they don’t want to fight,
dispatching three warships would be an overkill.
If I considered that this might just be their force-oriented reconnaissance. If those two have some sort
of reconnaissance oriented ability it would be convincing.
However, what are they scouting for?
This place is within the Principality of Albatro territory and I haven’t heard any news about any large
scale pirate fleet either.
After I pondering about the earlier meeting for a while, the ship suddenly shook.
221
“WHAT’S HAPPENING!?”
“REPORTING! WE GOT CAUGHT UP IN A STORM!”
“What!?”
That’s crazy.
The weather was fine until just now, where would a storm suddenly came from.
With that in mind, I went up to the deck in a hurry.
On the deck, strong gales and high waves are assaulting the ships.
Moreover, when I look to the side, things are going into a troublesome direction.
“Captain! We are getting separate from Nii-san’s ship!”
“Please forgive me! We have our hands full just to keep our ship afloat! We can’t catch up to them!”
“Is there anything you can do!?”
“It’s impossible! This is not a natural storm! It suddenly appeared without any signs! This must
definitely be a work of some kind of sea monster Your Highness!”
Hearing the captain’s scream, I remember what I said to Elna.
I told her about the Sea Dragon.
A story that often circulates about a Sea Dragon is that they can sink a ship by summoning a storm out
of nowhere. That’s exactly the situation right now.
The attitude of Albatro also backs it up.
The princess and the prince brought three warships and told us to change our course.
Is it possible that the Principality of Albatro knew that a Sea Dragon was spotted near this location
and came to investigate it?
If that’s the case then there’s no way that they couldn’t tell us about that. Albatro is a thriving
maritime nation. However if words got out that there’s a Sea Dragon lurking in their sea, no country
would set sail toward their country. It would be suicide if they do.
With that in mind, I immediately used detection magic. What I am looking into is the magnitude of the
storm.
Once I knew how strong the wind is, I clicked my tongue.
This storm is huge and we are on the edge of it. In other words, the point of origin is not here.
222
Perhaps, the center is located in Albatro’s water.
Even worse, our ship is being swept into the center.
If it keeps going like this, at worst, we will have to fight the Sea Dragon in the middle of the sea.
Spare me from that.
“Captain! Get us out of this storm!”
“I’m doing it right now!”
Thus, I swapped places with Leo in a rampaging storm.
223
Bitter Rescue
“Captain, where are we now?”
Keeping up my Leo act, I visit the captain.
The storm has gone but we still got caught up in it and were separated from the ship Leo was
boarding. It has been quite some time since then and the sun is beginning to set.
The storm was on the level that it wouldn’t be weird if the ship flipped over but this ship is an imperial
envoy with trained imperial navy personnel on board so we managed to get through it somehow.
“We are probably in the waters of the Principality of Albatro. We didn’t capsize but we have
considerably washed away from our original course. It might be more accurate to say that we were
pulled instead of washed away though. That storm was clearly not normal.”
“If that’s the case then was it caused by monsters after all?”
“Yes, no doubt about it. I have been sailing together with my grandfather’ since his generation, that
storm was exactly like the story I heard about the Sea Dragon Storm.”
“Sea Dragon Storm……what kind of storm is that?”
“As its name suggested, it is a storm caused by a Sea Dragon. It’s a storm that gradually pulls your ship
in its direction. Even if you survived the storm, you will be faced with the Sea Dragon. It’s like a ghost
story for a sailor. After all, the Sea Dragon is one of the most powerful monsters in the sea, seeing one
would mean that your life is over, Your Highness.”
Fumu, the characteristic of the storm from the story conforms with the one we just experienced.
So is it alright to assume that there’s a Sea Dragon in this area?
If that’s the case then this is going to be a big problem.
In the first place, dragons are monsters that repeat their cycle of active and dormant periods. Their
dormant period is usually immensely long. There was even a report on a dragon that stayed dormant
for a hundred years.
Long dormant period and short time of activity. That’s the nature of the creatures called dragons. The
same is true of the Sea Dragon.
I can’t say for sure without looking at the records but it seems that the Sea Dragon that lay dormant in
this area has become active again. The problem is that the Principality of Albatro is a maritime nation.
They are considerably far away from the Empire but they have an extensive trading network with
other countries. If a Sea Dragon shows up in their territory, imagine how much damage it would cause.
224
Understanding that, Albatro must have started investigating it secretly but it seems they touched its
reverse scale huh. (TLN: The dragon’s reverse scale had become a figurative expression of something
you should not touch)
The cause of the previous storm is probably Eva.
It was that kind of storm so she’s probably not alive anymore. That poor girl.
“Is that so…..then it wouldn’t be good to stay here too long. Nii-san and the others must be worried
about us too. Immediately set the course toward Rondine.”
“O, Oi! Look at that!!”
When I gave my order, one of the sailors shouted.
With a bad feeling, I looked at the direction he was pointing at and as if to answer my expectation, the
wreckage of a ship was flowing our way.
“The Principality’s ship huh……”
“So it seems. They must have gotten caught up in the storm like us.”
“It’s a shame……”
I was about to put an end to the incident and order the sailors to set sail but the middle-aged knight
whispered something to me from my side.
“Your Highness….Prince Leonard would definitely order for a rescue operation…..!”
“We don’t have time for that. There might be a Sea Dragon lurking around this area you know?
Normally, we should prioritize leaving this place right……?”
“I understand that but, Your Highness still has to act like Prince Leonard. It would be a big scandal if it
was known that the ambassador dispatched to another nation has switched places with his twin
brother isn’t it…..!”
“I know that but the crew was upset by the previous storm. They won’t notice something small like
this….!”
“It is exactly because they are upset that Your Highness has to behave yourself like Prince Leonard. If
they know about the switch then they will definitely panic. We probably couldn’t prevent them from
talking either, there’s no way to know what they will say once we arrive at Rondine you know…..?”
The middle-aged knight’s opinion was plausible.
Yeah, it’s plausible. However, acting like Leo means doing what I don’t want to do the most.
225
In this case, there’s no merit for us to rescue them. In the first place, the Principality of Albatro is
neither our ally nor a nation with close ties with us. It’s completely idiotic to rescue the survivors of
such a country in an area that might have a Sea Dragon lurking nearby.
We don’t have any time to spare either. We have already lost days because of the storm. Starting a
rescue operation here would definitely delay our arrival in Rondine. It doesn’t matter even if Leo
arrives there first. The reason is that he is now Arnold and Arnold is an incompetent prince. If he
started a negotiation with Rondine on his own, there would certainly be suspicion.
As expected, I want to head to Rondine right now. Even if he has Elna by his side, I’m worried that Leo
wouldn’t be able to behave like me.
Also, if we began our rescue operation and found any survivors, we must stop by Albatro to deliver
them. That would be the most troublesome scenario. There’s no way that they would just allow the
imperial prince who knew of their secret to leave without doing anything.
If it’s me, I would detain such a person until I resolved the incident. If that’s the case then Leo and I
have to swap places for a long time.
That’s no good at all.
“The survivors are probably desperate right now, bring them here quickly.”
“Look! Someone is clinging to the wreckage! He’s alive!!”
“……”
What will you do? Abandon them?”
The middle-aged knight asked the question that he already knew the answer to.
If it has already come to this then there’s no choice but to help them.
Just why are there so many troubles finding their way toward me! Jeez!
If a god really exists then I want to curse them!
“Throw them the rope! Rescue them immediately! Watch out for the surroundings, there might be
more survivors, Look out for them!”
I issued out a Leo-like command with dark clouds swirling inside my heart.
I want to run away and be Arnold again. It’s not that I’m afraid, if the Sea Dragon showed up then I will
willingly fight it.
But if that happens it will cause us huge trouble. The situation will probably turn into a chaotic one
that I can’t handle alone. I have to avoid that at all costs.
Still, being such a good person, Leonard will never let this go.
226
“We have rescued the survivors! According to them, it seems there are still more survivors out there
Your Highness!”
The crew’s report brought my mind back to the situation.
A large number of survivors mean more time we have to stay in his place, and more space we have to
clear up in order to accommodate them. In addition, we have to calculate our supply of food and water
as well.
“Is Albatro the plague god or something….!”
“Please be careful with your words….!”
“Like I can’t say it….! Argh, damn it…..! This is the worst….!”
“Please endure it. This will spread the word of Prince Leonard’s virtue in the future. If people know
that you have rescued the survivors in such a dangerous situation, Rondine would applaud your deed
and probably won’t criticize you for it either.”
“Rondine and Albatro’s relationship is like cats and dogs you know? They have been fighting each
other over the control over the southern region for a long time. Why would they praise a person who
rescued the people of their rival country…..?”
“Our empire has nothing to do with their struggle in the south and we are a powerful country as well.
It will be alright if you just act dignified. If Your Highness is already convinced then please make up
your mind.”
Prompted by the middle-aged knight, I let out a huge sigh and raised my face up then lower it down
and sigh again.
Aah, I don’t want to do this anymore. Is there no way to get through this without damaging Leo’s
reputation?
No, there’s none. If it’s Leo, he will definitely help them. Even if he has to abandon everything to do so.
if he’s a guy who considers how his action would profit him before he acts then he would be able to
become the emperor without my help.
That’s exactly why he’s worth helping but because of such a goody-two-shoes personality and
reputation that I’m so bitter about the situation right now.
“Captain. Rescue the survivors.”
“Are you sane!? There might be a Sea Dragon lurking nearby you know!? If we are attacked during the
rescue operations then we will be defenseless and the monsters will swarm in to eat our dead bodies!
Even monsters other than the Sea Dragon are still a threat to us Your Highness.”
227
“The storm has already gone. The Sea Dragon must have been satisfied for now. Moreover, normal
monsters won’t wander close to where a powerful monster lives. Our opponent is the Sea Dragon
alone. I think we should still be fine for a few days.”
“But the sun is about to set! It will be dangerous to continue our rescue operation in the dark! If we
use light to illuminate the surroundings, we might attract the Sea Dragon toward us as well!”
“Even so, we will continue rescuing them as much as we can. I want you to decide on our course based
on the information we got from the survivors. Sorry, captain. This is an order as an ambassador. Use
everything we can spare and rescue the Albatro’s survivors. Do not miss any single one of them.”
“…..I heard the rumor but you are genuinely a good person Your Highness. I can’t approve of your
command as a captain who has to take care of his ship but if it’s an order from you then it can’t be
helped. Let’s rescue them.”
The captain resigned himself and gave in.
I understand his feelings. I agree with you that this is ridiculous.
However, this is Leo.
There’s no other way so can you not look at me with those reproachful eyes.
Thus, on our way to Rondine, we began a rescuing operation in the sea where there might be a Sea
Dragon rampaging in, an action too stupid to comprehend.
228
Will to live, Will to save
“EVERYONE—-…..HOLD IT TOGETHER…..WE ARE GOING TO LIVE THROUGH THIS!……..”
Julio shouted while clinging to the small lifeboat. His throat was starting to hurt from shouting the
same thing over and over. Still, he keeps shouting for he believes that it is his duty to do so.
There are dozens of his crew floating around Julio. Giving priority to the injured, they loaded them on
to the small boat while other crews were clinging around the small boat or wreckages that used to be
their ship.
“Y, Your Highness…..you must get on the boat as well……”
“I’m fine…..I’m still alright……”
Julio says that, but in actuality, he doesn’t have that much energy to spare either. It has already been
more than ten hours since their ships were sunk and they were dumped into the sea. They survived
the night of hell while trembling from fear and coldness of the water but there’s still no sign of help
coming their way.
No one had imagined that this would happen.
They had been informed that the Sea Dragon may have resurrected so Eva and Julio set out to
investigate the matter. They brought three warships with them as escorts for precaution but it wasn’t
because they wanted to fight the Sea Dragon themselves, it was just them being as careful as possible.
Confirming whether the Sea Dragon had been resurrected or not, that was what their father told them
to do. The reason he chose them for this task was because the two of them could use innate magic that
can utilize sound. To the two of them, exploring the sea was but a simple thing to do.
If there was a miscalculation in that plan then it would be that the Sea Dragon followed the sound
emitted by them and attacked their ships. They ended up touching its reverse scale.
The Sea Dragon summoned the storm and destroyed all of our ships but fortunately, it retreated once
it wrecked our ships. With that said, the situation didn’t turn any better.
“Uwaaaa!!?? Monster!? A monster just touched my feet!?”
“Calm down! It’s just a fish!”
The surviving crews are struggling with fears.
Fear of death. Fear that help will never come. Fear that they are going to freeze to death. And the fear
that sea monsters will come to feast on them.
Combining all those fears together, the survivors were exhausted and impoverished.
Still, Julio kept shouting.
229
“HELP WILL COME….! REMEMBER YOUR FAMILY…..! WE ARE GOING TO LIVE……!”
Julio continued to encourage the survivors with those words. They were the words he kept telling
himself.
However, the usual Julio isn’t someone who would do that. No, he was someone who couldn’t do that.
He wasn’t someone who asserted himself. Even if he’s a prince he’s not someone who could carry
himself like a great person.
It was Eva who always pulled such Julio along. But now Eva is currently sleeping on top of the boat.
When they were thrown into the sea, she lost consciousness because she protected him and crashed
on the water surface.
Since then, Julio has been acting like Eva. Both because of the sister in front of his eyes and in order to
live.
The sense of responsibility that grew due to the emergency situation made Julio behave like a prince.
Even so, no matter how much Julio encouraged them, it is still not enough.
“Help?…..help will never come….it takes more than a day to get here even if they set sail at night you
know…..?”
One of his crew weakly leaks a small voice.
That was what everybody here was thinking.
The rescue boat from Albatro probably won’t make it in time. Even so, Julio still has hope.
“Considering the size of the storm, it wouldn’t be weird if the Empire’s ship was also caught up in
it….Prince Leonard will definitely come to help us……”
“The Empire saving us….? We lent our hand to their enemy nation you know…..? We made a business
out of their blood……they won’t risk themselves searching for us in dangerous waters like this…….”
“Prince Leonard has a reputation for being a kind person and not abandoning the troubled…..it will be
alright! I’m sure that he will come to help us!”
“In a time like this, even an ally could abandon us, I wonder if he will really come……”
“If I survived the storm I would say goodbye to this place immediately you know…….who would want
to be in a sea with a rampaging Sea Dragon…..”
“Everyone……”
Everyone’s hearts were breaking.
230
It was the same for Julio. Looking at Eva, he managed to act strong but both his physical and mental
strength has reached its limit.
In the first place, Julio’s physical ability is far behind that of the other crew members. The first one
who would normally drop out first is him after all.
Still, Julio continued to cling to the boat with just his will. However, that strong will is still getting
exhausted by the depressed mood around him.
It might be useless already.
When such thoughts crossed his mind.
He saw something in the distance.
It was a ship.
“It’s, it’s a ship……..! THERE’S A SHIP OVER THERE……!!”
“Ah!! We are saved! O-I! O—I!!”
His exhausted mind recovered.
Everyone is shouting and waving trying to get the ship to notice.
They continue doing that for a while but someone mutters.
“Th, that’s an imperial ship…….”
That was enough for them to stop waving.
The fluttering flag is an imperial one.
From its appearance, it was one of the two imperial ships they met the day before.
The fact that they are here means that they got caught up in the storm as well.
And them being here meant that they were considerably pulled away from their original course.
Everyone here knew that their destination was Rondine.
Will they take their time rescuing us when their arrival is already delayed.
In addition, the Sea Dragon is also lurking in this area, they don’t know when they will be attacked
again.
There are all kinds of reasons for them not to help us.
Then, the imperial ship turned its bow.
Despair rushes to Julio’s chest.
231
However, a voice entered Julio’s ear.
A voice amplified by a magic tool.
[[I’m the Eighth Prince of the Empire, Leonard Lakes Adler. My ship is currently rescuing the survivors
of the Principality of Albatro. We will rescue you one by one, but those who still have power left
should swim to our ship. If you don’t, please endure a little more. We will definitely save you.]]
Hearing his voice, Tears naturally spill from Julio’s eyes.
However, immediately shake them off.
“LET’S GO, EVERYONE! KEEP AN EYE ON THE INJURED!”
“Y, Yes sir!”
“Let’s go! We are almost there!”
Julio and the other survivors rushed to the imperial ship a little distance away.
—————
Al who has been acting as Leo hangs up the handheld magic voice amplifier and exhales.
“It would be great if the rescue gets easier with this.”
“Whether it has been difficult or not, most of the survivors who you helped so far haven’t been able to
get up on their own. They have been adrift for a long time so I think that it couldn’t be helped, Your
Highness.”
“I know that….. Captain! Leave only the minimum personnel for lookout duty and focus the crew effort
on the rescue operation!”
“Saying something like that again…..!? What would you do if the Sea Dragon shows up!?”
“Everything will be over once it spots us. Rather than keep the lookout, it would be better to focus our
effort and finish the rescue as fast as possible.”
“What about other monsters!?”
“There are no monsters nearby. There’s no monster that would wander into an area where a Sea
Dragon just passed through after all.”
Saying so, Al heads out to help with the rescue.
Because that’s what Leo would do. Al himself wanted to stay back to observe the situation and give
out commands but he told himself that right now he is Leo and went to join the operation.
232
At the moment, the sailors just pulled up a group of 4 – 5 people who were huddled together. Every
one of them is shivering from the cold so Al puts the blankets prepared for survivors on them.
“You did great. It’s alright now.”
“Thank, thank you……”
Looking at the survivors who were crying while expressing their gratitude, I realized then how
horrible and terrifying their experience was.
Meanwhile, a new report came in.
“Multiple survivors spotted on port side! Their number is fifty!”
“Fifty! We don’t have enough space for that many!?”
We already rescued dozens of survivors, if we added fifty more, we won’t have enough space to
accommodate them. Originally, the number of our crew is less than a hundred. We can’t possibly take
in fifty more people on this ship.
That’s why Al was forced to make a decision.
He must choose what he must sacrifice.
“What are you going to do Your Highness? There are a lot more survivors than we expected.”
“Well, I kind of expected this…….they have three ships while we only have one. If there were a lot of
lucky people then this would be an obvious result.”
“Then, have you already thought about the countermeasure?”
The middle-aged knight asked expectantly.
In response, Al made an expression as if he just took a bite at a worm.
For Al, it’s the worst decision he could make. Still, he had to make it.
“Dump everything inside our cargo hold except our food supply into the sea.”
“….including our gifts for Rondine?”
“Yes, everything.”
As expected, even the middle-aged knight becomes speechless.
This ship is originally Leo’s so the items this ship is carrying are more valuable than the one which Al
was riding on. Inside, are the latest weapons and treasures made of gold and silver that were
scheduled to be handed over to Rondine.
233
The treasures that have enough value for a person to play around all their life, Al decided to dump all
of it into the sea.
“Is it really alright? Doing something like that?”
“There’s no way it’s alright. With that many survivors, we can’t go to Rondine with the amount of
supply we have. There’s not enough food nor water. In other words, we had to go to Albatro for
resupply. At this point, it will cause a significant delay to our mission. Moreover, there’s a Sea Dragon
lurking nearby as well. I don’t know when we will be able to get to Rondine. Even so, I decided to save
them. The only thing I have left to protect is Leo’s reputation. That’s why no matter what I have to
abandon, I have to rescue the survivors. This is absolute. Don’t lament on the treasures, save their life.
I won’t let anyone alive now to die. You got that?”
“U, Understood……”
Seeing the determination in Al’s eyes, the middle-aged knight faltered for a moment.
He was overawed by him.
While surprised, the middle-aged knight remembers that day.
The day Al broke the bracelet for Elna.
Elna participated in the knight hunting festival for Al’s sake. To Elna, doing something that can
disqualify Al was unacceptable. That’s why Al did it himself for her to be able to move freely.
It was a splendid action.
It was not a behavior that anyone would imagine from the man who is known to the general public as
the dull prince.
And now, his act as Leo is more than perfect.
His instructions are also accurate.
“So you are a capable falcon after all…..”
“Did you say something?”
“It’s nothing. Please leave dumping the goods to the imperial knights.”
“Yeah, I will leave it to you. All hands, resume the rescue! Save everyone who can be saved! I will take
all the responsibility!”
While giving out the instructions, Al saw the approaching group of survivors.
There’s a small boat with injured people on board, and Al could spot Eva among them. He can see the
figure of Julio nearby as well.
234
“So the prince and the princess are safe….Now we have more hands to make a negotiation with the
King huh.”
With that in mind, Al throws a rope ladder toward the approaching Julio. However, Julio doesn’t try to
catch it.
“Prince Julio! Grab on!”
“Please prioritize the injured first!”
Saying so, Julio points to the injured people on the boat.
It will take time to rescue the injured people who can’t climb up on their own.
It will delay the rescue of Julio and his crews but they still want us to prioritize the injured.
“Understood! Wait for us a little!”
We started rescuing the injured at a fast pace.
The crews descend on the boat and carry the injured people up to the ship one by one.
Meanwhile, more and more survivors from other locations were rescued.
After we get all the injured people including Eva on board, Al throws a rope toward Julio.
It might be because of the relief he felt, the moment Julio grabbed on to the rope, he lost all strength in
his body.
His mind has reached its limit.
“Prince Julio!?”
After seeing Julio slowly sinking while losing his consciousness, Al immediately moved.
It was like how he dived down to save Finne.
It was not a calculated action, he did that out of instinct.
Al jumped into the sea where the Sea Dragon might be lurking around and lifted up the sinking Julio.
The people who are panicking this time are on the Empire side.
“Your Highness!?”
“The Prince jumped down!”
Even though the crews descended down to the small boat to rescue the injured, no one jumped into
the sea. Even if they were told that there’s no monster nor a Sea Dragon around, they are still afraid.
235
With that being the case, the Prince who they were supposed to protect jumped in.
After seeing that, the imperial crew resolved themselves and started jumping into the sea to continue
the rescue.
“Give me a rope!!”
“Here you go!!”
It was the middle-aged knight who threw it at me.
I wrap the rope around Julio’s unconscious body and have him pull it up.
After that, Al climbed up the rope ladder.
There, a hand was offered to him.
Grabbing it, he sees the middle-aged knight with an astonished expression on his face.
“Thanks.”
“It’s alright, I’m already used to lifting you out of water.”
“? what do you mean?”
“It’s no wonder that you don’t remember me since you fainted at that time.”
“Just what are you talking about?”
“I was the one who pulled you up when you almost drowned at the Braves mansion, I was originally a
knight who served the Brave house after all.”
“……seriously?”
“Yes, as soon as Captain became an imperial knight, I also joined the order. I never thought that I
would be pulling Your Highness out of water again after I became an imperial knight myself.
“Can you not say it like I did that on purpose? The first time I got punched and the second time I did it
to save someone alright. I don’t think I bother anyone you know?”
“Certainly, It is exactly like you say.”
Seeing the grin on his face, Al sighs.
The reason Al didn’t honestly express his gratitude is because he is a person from the Brave house.
After a short while, Al noticed something.
“Speaking of which, I haven’t heard your name yet have I? What’s your name?”
236
“Deputy Commander of the Third Knights corp, Marc Tyber, at your service.”
“I see….I hope we can keep this relationship as short as possible, Marc.”
“Right. That would be great.”
Both of us speak of such wishful thinking.
After all, it would be impossible to cut short our relationship in this situation.
Afterward, Without leaving any survivors behind, Al stops his ship from time to time to rescue the
survivors that are still at sea.
After rescuing over eighty survivors in total, their ship headed straight toward Albatro’s capital, its
biggest port city.
237
Meanwhile, they…..
At the time Al is acting as Leo.
Leo was desperately trying to pass as Al.
“Prince Arnold. The captain is asking whether it is really okay for us not to search for Prince Leonard’s
ship?”
“That again huh. It’s Leo so he will do something about it himself. Keep the course as is. And I’m
feeling sick. Don’t bother me with the useless questions. It’s a pain.”
“Y, Yes Your Highness…..anything you say.”
Leo lets out a huge sigh as the knight walks away from his room.
Still, there is a person there who gives the impression of how bad his impersonation was.
“It’s fifty points. If it’s the real Al, he would just leave everything to the captain you know.”
“This is so difficult……”
Leo mutters and turns his eyes to Elna.
Unlike Al’s ship that was pulled in by the storm, their ship managed to escape before being dragged in.
Nevertheless, Elna was full-on panic because of all the shaking. Until the shaking calmed down, she
didn’t even notice that Leo had switched places with Al.
However, after she noticed that, she has been acting as an advisor to Leo. the barrier Al erected is still
in place so she wasn’t affected too much by the usual small shaking of the ship.
“For now, let’s get through this without being found out. If people know that you switched places it
will be a big scandal after all.”
“Yeah….I have to keep my act together…..I wonder if Nii-san is alright?
“Al will be fine. Marc is with him and he is pretty reliable in a situation like this. The problem here is
you.”
“That’s right…..I can’t imitate Nii-san at all……..”
“Fortunately, there are only a few people that know Al personally. it will be alright as long as you do
something he would do”
“Something Nii-san would do, what’s that? And Elna, even if you wear spats, I don’t think it would be a
good idea for you to do that in front of me you know.”
238
Leo warns Elna who is putting her leg on the bed.
From where Leo is sitting, the angle made him able to see inside Elna’s skirt. Of course, Elna didn’t
care much about it since her underwear was hidden under her spats.
“That’s where you two are not alike. If it’s Al then he would never say something like that.”
“But you looked too vulnerable. It would be better if you don’t do that.”
“Yeah yeah, I will be careful. But really, Al would never say that alright. You will be found out
immediately if you let your guard down just because you are talking with me you know?”
“Even if you say that……then if it’s Nii-san what would he say?”
“Right….Something like [you forgot to wear your spats] or [so it’s white today huh], I think. Anyway,
he would say something to get a reaction from me then laugh at it, I guess.”
“Something like that, I can’t say it…….”
He’s probably imagining saying it himself, Leo blushed and turned his eyes away from her.
This is going to be a serious problem, Elna thought.
Al who is used to acting like Leo and Leo who is not. The big difference that he’s showing is his sense
of distance and how he responds to women. Al can adjust himself to his conversation partner but Leo
is always polite while keeping a certain distance.
It is a bottleneck for Leo when he has to act like Al.
“Even if it’s easy for Al to become Leo, it’s difficult for Leo to become Al huh…..You are both a prince
but how did you grow up so differently……”
“Nii-san loves his freedom and basically plays around as much as he wants after all. He spent all day
outside the castle but he always came back crying for some reason though.”
“Tha, that’s just me helping him out because he was always one-sidedly beat up alright!”
“I know. Elna has always taken care of Nii-san right.”
“….He thinks that it was a pain though.”
Haa~
Elna sighs.
Recently, she got the feeling that she can’t just stand around doing nothing.
After not meeting him for a long time, she wanted to do something to raise Al’s reputation, that’s why
she joined the Knight Hunting festival. Still, he ended up disqualified. When Elna was having a hard
239
time deciding her course of action, he inadvertently disqualified himself. Everything completely
backfired on her.
And this time, she came along hoping that she could help just a little, but after all, she couldn’t do
anything. She held herself up in her room when the emergency situation came along. Even if he told
her that she is dragging his feet, she couldn’t deny it.
Elna thinks that it’s a good thing that Al is working hard to make Leo an emperor. However, Elna
wanted Al himself to be evaluated the same as Leo.
Elna knew that it was different from what Al wanted and it caused his plan to slip up. Still, Elna
doesn’t want Al to have such an unfair reputation.
However, recently she started to think that it was just her own selfishness.
Al doesn’t care about his reputation. Rather, he even goes out of his way to lower it himself while
raising Leo’s up. To Al, Elna’s actions are nothing but a nuisance.
She said that because of such a reason, however, Leo laughed at her.
“Well, he probably thinks like that.”
“Uu….”
“But, I think that he doesn’t consider you to be a nuisance you know. Ever since Elna came Nii-san
seems happy and I think that you gave room for him to breathe. Inside, I think that he has been relying
on you, you know.”
“Really….?”
“I guarantee it.”
“But….”
“But?”
“….he still hired that adventurer even though I was there.”
Wanting to complain, Elna sourly muttered.
She was hesitating whether to say it or not but she decided to let it out since an opportunity presented
itself.
Immediately understood that she is talking about Lynfia, Leo smiles.
“She is working with us to save her village. Nii-san didn’t hire her because he thought that you did a
bad job or anything you know.”
240
“I know that much…..but, can’t he tell me anything as a follow-up? I thought that I would do my best
for him there.”
As a person from the Brave house, Elna can’t directly involve herself in political strife.
She has been irritated by such limitations. To Elna, protecting Finne was a rare chance for her to help
Al and Leo. If Finne is targeted, she can make an excuse that the Emperor would be upset if something
were to happen to her and they can even use that excuse to land a blow on their opponent.
Despite that, the one who ended up being targeted was Al and he was saved by an adventurer. That
adventurer is now acting as Finne’s protective detail which was supposed to be Elna’s job.
Honestly, Elna doesn’t find that funny at all. Even when she considered the possibility that she has to
leave Finne’s side for her mission, she still can’t find that funny at all.
“Are you sulking?”
“I’M NOT SULKING! I’M ANGRY!”
“I see. But you know, wasn’t it because Nii-san wanted Elna to come along that he hired Lynfia? It
would be dangerous to leave Finne alone right? We left Sebas with her just in case too.”
“Why can you be so positive, Leo…..I understand what Al is thinking. He thinks that rather than an
escort that has a difficult position to move in like me, it would be better to hire a smart adventurer
that can move freely as an escort you know. Yes, I praised her. She’s smart.”
Leo was about to say [You are smart yourself aren’t you Elna] but he swallowed it down.
Certainly, Elna was very good at learning things. He can say that she has been better than him ever
since they were children. However, the word smart Elna said just now doesn’t have such meaning.
What she meant was the ability to deceive someone or read people, the smartness necessary for a
political struggle. Elna herself knows that she doesn’t have that. You could say that it isn’t in her
nature so she doesn’t want to learn it in the first place.
If someone from the Brave house learned something like that, it would threaten the influential nobles
and royalties. The Brave house should only be a sword. That’s the basic stance of the Brave house.
That’s why the Brave house doesn’t have the power to survive the secret feud ridden capital. Outside
rather than inside, that’s the right way to use the power of the Brave house.
“Elna has Elna’s own good points. I think it’s fine if Elna helps Nii-san on the thing that only you can do
right? Is that convincing enough?”
“I understand but I still can’t accept it…..protecting Finne was supposed to be my job……..”
“As always, You really hate losing aren’t you. But Lynfia probably doesn’t want to compete with Elna
you know. Moreover, your role doesn’t overlap with her either. Our faction is inferior to others. Our
allies are few in number. And there are a lot of people targeting us. I can defend myself but Finne and
241
Nii-san couldn’t do that. They have to secure the people who are able to protect them as our allies. I
think he made a decision based on that and if Elna’s hands are free then I think Nii-san will rely on
you, you know.”
“Is that really the case? Al seems like he would continue to treat me as a nuisance though?”
“He won’t. You really are stubborn huh. Let’s take this as an example, right now the only person I can
rely on is Elna right? Please don’t sulk anymore and give me some advice. What should I do when I
meet the king of Rondine?”
“Seriously Leo, you are really……. Alright, since Al also knows the minimum courtesy, you can greet
him normally. But don’t say anything unnecessary alright. No flattery, you really have to keep your
greeting at the bare minimum okay?”
“Un, I understand.”
Thus, their ship is heading toward Rondine.
They don’t know that Al has got himself involved in a disaster while pretending to be Leo.
242
A Decision that cannot be made
“Your Highness. We have too many people with unstable conditions here. The things we can do here
are very limited…….”
The old ship physician reported.
We somehow managed to get to the capital of Albatro but many of the survivors who have been adrift
at sea for a long time started to come down with illnesses. In the first place, some of them were
injured before they were thrown into the sea and their conditions have worsened.
I can use healing magic on them but I can only heal their injuries. Illnesses and other internal
abnormalities are beyond my specialty.
“Understood. Please keep them alive.”
“Of course I will do our best but…..I can not guarantee it.”
“I understand…..sorry that I have to burden you with this.”
“No, this is nothing compared to what you have to bear, Your Highness.”
The ship physician says so and leaves the room.
Looking at him, I loudly clicked my tongue.
Seeing that, Marc smiles at me.
“Something like this couldn’t be helped. There’s nothing we can do but leave it to them.”
“Don’t just wrap it over with it can’t be helped. I said it didn’t I. I will not let anyone who’s alive now to
die.”
“But….we have our own limitations. It would be impossible to save every one of them.”
“It would be impossible if you give up but if you don’t we can still do something about it. Most things
in this world were made to work. Compared to the population of the world this is just a few lives. If
they can’t be saved then this world is unreasonable. Moreover, we have already paid the price for it as
well.”
I remember the treasure I had thrown away.
Ah, what a waste. I could do so much with that.
It was absolutely wasteful. I told Marc not to have any regret throwing them away but I myself still
have a lingering attachment to it.
243
Are the survivors worth it? No, they’re not. Helping them has offered no benefit toward the Empire
and it is not worth it for Leo either because if it brings no benefit to the Empire, no one would
appreciate his work.
Even so, I still helped them. I helped them all the while taking those losses. I bought their lives with a
large amount of treasure. If that’s the case then their lives are mine. Like I would just let them die
without doing anything.
“It’s almost time. I’m going up to the deck.”
“Yes, it’s about time we get caught on their defensive line.”
The moment Marc said that a voice reached us.
There are noises mixed in that voice, the characteristic of a voice that was amplified by a magic tool.
“The approaching imperial ship. State your purpose. We have not been informed of your arrival.
Repeat. State your purpose. Our country has not been informed of your arrival.”
They are the naval fleet that protects their capital.
They have no information on any on-coming imperial ship so they probably want to find out as much
as they can.
The fact that they didn’t immediately open fire, was as expected of the Albatro navy. It’s really helpful
that they are so well-trained.
I got up on the deck and picked up the voice amplifier device.
“My name is Leonard Lakes Adler, the eighth prince of the Empire. On my way to Rondine, I found
your country’s ships that were involved in maritime accidents. We rescued about 80 survivors, your
prince and princess included. I’d like to get permission to enter the port.”
The warships which were a little distance away were visibly getting restless.
They know that the three warships they sent out have not returned and they know that Eva and Julio
were on board those ships.
Meanwhile, we keep moving towards the port.
The sooner we get there, the sooner the survivors can get professional treatment.
“We understand the purpose of your ship. For safety, we want to confirm that there are really
survivors on board. Please halt your ship.”
“Understood. We also have a few survivors that are severely ill. They need immediate treatment. I
want to transfer them to your ship so that they can get professional help at the port immediately.”
244
“We want to do that but by our rule, no one onboard your ship can enter the port without permission.
We would like you to wait for His Majesty the King’s approval.”
What are they taking their time for!
I unintentionally glare at the approaching ship.
This is not the time to be cautious of a spy.
Julio and Eva are also here. They should just confirm the identity of the crew members here!
“Where’s the Princess and the Prince?”
“They have not opened their eyes yet……”
“Tsk!”
If either of them is awake, there’s a way that we can get permission to enter the port without waiting
for the King. But if they are still unconscious then there’s no way around it.
Should I just wait for the permission here just like this?
How long does it take for them to arrive at the port from their castle? How long until the King passes
down his decision? And will we be able to get the sicks to the port in time?
Even though this is a race against time, the complicated procedures are in our way.
“This is already their problem. It doesn’t matter what we do at this point. We already brought them all
the way here so all the responsibility here lies with them.”
“It’s not like that…..! It was their responsibility from the beginning! I already stick my head out for
these people so I will take care of them until the end!”
I tell that to Marc while tightly gripping the voice receiver.
If we forcibly proceed here, the Albatro navy will have no choice but to attack us.
Do I have to wait for them after all?
“Please grant my request. There are those who will die if they don’t receive immediate treatment.
They managed to survive the hellish sea. Only you can save their lives. Please get them to the port first
without waiting for permission.”
“….I can’t thank you enough that you are willing to go so far for my countrymen. However, rules are
rules. No ship can enter the port without permission, even if that ship has our royalties on board, we
still have to wait for His Majesty’s decision.”
“Who’s the captain of your ship….?”
245
“I am. Your Highness.”
“…..Captain. I have sacrificed many things in order to save their lives. I risked my people’s lives to save
them. No, we are still risking ourselves even now. There’s only one reason I did that. I don’t want them
to die. Someone who spent their life in the sea like you should understand how terrifying being adrift
in the sea is. Please make a wise decision.”
Hearing my words, the captain’s response was delayed.
Their ship is steadily approaching us but they are probably hesitating over this.
Then.
“…..Your Highness. Two of my sons were on board the ships that set sail a few days ago. I sincerely
hope that they are still alive. But……I am a soldier. No matter what happens, I can’t go against the
protocol. Please forgive me.”
“That damn blockhead……!”
“Your Highness. This is it. We are already….”
Snapped, I threw away the receiver.
When Marc tried to admonish me, the physician screamed out.
“Your Highness! Their condition!”
It has worsened.
The moment I realized that I immediately made a decision.
“Captain! Enter the port!”
“Yes–!? What are you saying, Your Highness!? We still haven’t received their permission yet, right!?”
“I know that. But if we can’t give these people specialized treatment soon their conditions will turn to
the worst.”
“Pl, please wait a minute! Even if we do this the Principality won’t be grateful toward us you know!?
It’s their rule and this is their country! We have to do as they say!”
“If you follow their rules people will die.”
“The Princess and the Prince won’t! They are just sailors with no political value! You are willing to
ignore their warning and enter the port without permission!? We can’t complain if we get sunk you
know!?”
246
“As long as we have the Princess and the Prince with us they will not sink us. Right now, I am going to
save the lives of those in front of me with everything I can do. I won’t change my order. Enter the
port.”
Hearing my decision, everyone went silent.
Only one person, only Marc faces me and raises his voice.
“You are going too far……! Prince Leonard wouldn’t do something like this….! No, Prince Leonard
wouldn’t be able to do something so forcefully like this….!”
“Yeah, that’s true. So what…..?”
“Then why…….”
“This is a good opportunity. I’m going to impress a lot of people in Leo’s place. Leonard Lakes Adler is
the man who won’t back down on his decision. He’s not simply some naive guy. Even if that’s the
decision that Leo couldn’t make himself, that reputation will change how people view him.”
“If you do something like that Prince Leonard will be forced to make a much more difficult decision
someday…….!”
“It’s alright. He’s my little brother. There’s nothing I can do that he can’t.”
I declared and pressure him with my eyes.
I face the silent captain who is standing behind Marc.
The captain had a complicated look on his face.
“Did you understand…..? Your Highness. Certainly, they might open fire at us but everything will be
over once we enter the port. We will not be able to escape.”
“I know.”
“You will be in the worst position among us! If we proceed with this, you will surely be arrested for
illegal entry you know!? We should just ask for food and water then head to Rondine instead! There’s
no need for Your Highness to risk yourselves over a few lives aren’t you!?”
“Even if they are only a few lives to us, they are still someone precious to their family. I’ve decided.
Once I save them I will never abandon them. If we abandon them here, all the risk our crew took will
become meaningless.”
“….Your Highness is fighting for the throne, right? If your opponent uses this against you, you will be
further away from the throne aren’t you?”
“I will think about it at that time. Please follow my order, Captain. This is your ship. The crew
entrusted their lives with you. Don’t make me do such a rude thing like taking the helm from you.”
247
The captain thinks for a short while.
Then he suddenly laughed and showed me a refreshing smile.
“I have thought of you as some naive prince. But….it doesn’t seem like you are just that. I have come to
like you a little you know. ALL HANDS! PREPARE TO ENTER THE PORT! WE ARE GOING IN!”
The crew complies with the captain’s decision.
With the sail unfolded, I call out to the principality ship as we start moving.
“Wait a minute! Your Highness! What are you doing!?”
“We are entering the port. We have no more time to discuss this.”
“We can’t allow you to do that! If you are going to illegally enter the port, even if His and Her
Highnesses are on board, we will sink your ship!”
Declaring so, the Principality’s ship turned its bow and faced its side toward us.
They are aiming their magic canons at our ship. At the same time, sirens rang throughout the harbor,
signaling an emergency.
Warships are coming at us from the port one after another.
Meanwhile, the captain presented a proposal while he was steering the helm.
“Your Highness! I have a plan!”
“What is it?”
“We will raise the white flag.”
The moment the crew heard that they all looked surprised. However, the captain alone looks like he is
enjoying himself.
I smile at the proposal. To think that a navy like him would propose that.
“You do know that our Imperial Navy has never raised a white flag right?”
“Of course. We will be the first memorable vessel to do that.”
“Certainly, they won’t shoot at a ship bearing a white flag but, is this really necessary?”
“If that many ships came out then there must be a lot of those blockhead captains with them too. Let’s
be cautious and prepare some excuses for them. As a captain myself, I know full well how bitter they
are about this.”
“I see….then hand me the white flag. I will do what I can.”
248
Then, as the crew gave me their consent, I raised the white flag.
The Principality’s ships were taken by surprise.
The Empire is a country with great power. Albeit a single ship, the fact that an imperial ship raised a
white flag to the Principality is a big incident.
To give them the final blow, I raised the volume of the voice amplifier to the maximum and addressed
the people in the harbor behind them.
“To everyone in the harbor. I am Leonard Lakes Adler, the eighth prince of the Empire. Currently, my
ship carries the survivors of the Principality’s ships that were in an accident. Due to the deterioration
of some of the survivors’ condition, we will now enter the port illegally. However, my ship has no
intention to harm you. If there are any doctors around the port, I want your cooperation. For others, I
want you to prepare hot drinks and food if you can. They have been through hell. Please give me a
hand. And—to all the captains of the Principality Navy. Right now, the lives of your brother in arms
are in your hands. We look forward to your wise decision, captains of the Principality Navy.”
Hearing my voice, the harbor grew noisy.
At the same time, the ships trying to block our path stops moving.
Then, while slowly sailing past the several Principality’s ships, we entered the port of their capital.
“PRIORITIZE TRANSPORTING THE INJURED! HURRY!”
After hearing my instructions, the crew carried out the injured.
Many people gathered at the port to help them.
It is only natural. the people here are their families after all.
“HURRY! WE NEED A WELL EQUIPPED PLACE!”
“I have everything at my clinic! This way!”
“Hot drinks here! We got food too!”
As the survivors left the ship, they found themselves surrounded by hot meals. We gave them food
onboard but the warm food they eat on land would be able to also warm their hearts.
Everyone was eating while crying.
“We completed the first stage but…..we are now a war prisoner aren’t we.”
“Yeah. we did raise the white flag after all.”
While hearing the sound of multiple horseshoes hitting the ground from a distance away, I look up at
the sky.
249
An ambassador plenipotentiary becoming a prisoner of war is unprecedented. However, it depends on
us whether this will turn out ugly or not.
“Let’s go. We need to tell the King about the Sea Dragon. They are probably hoping for the same thing
as well.”
Saying so, I pulled Marc along and set my first step in the Principality of Albatro.
250
Situation at the Imperial Capital
At the time Al and Leo departed south.
There was a movement in the Imperial Capital.
“Damn it! What’s happening! Damn it! Damn it!”
“Guh! Arghh!! Gyaaaa!! Please forgive me! F, fo….forgive me…..”
Haa, Haaa…
Zandra had been whipping one of her assassins to relieve her stress.
When she saw that the assassin had already fainted, she threw the rope away while panting.
“Useless! Damn it! Argh, I’m irritated! Just what is going on!”
Zandra pacing around while biting her fingernail.
Seeing his mistress like that, the middle-aged assassin who tried to abduct Al, Gunther, opened his
mouth.
“It seems like all our hands are being read.”
“I already know something like that! Think about how they are doing it! They don’t have Leonard or
Arnold with them you know!? Are you saying that ignorant blue seagull is toying with me?”
“It seems like the Leonard faction has some sharp and able person with them. They are probably
reading our moves and giving that information to the Gordon faction immediately once we try to start
something.”
“Tsk! This is vexing! They are just a newly formed faction, how dare they irritate me to this extent! I
will never forgive them!”
Even with that said, Zandra still has no choice.
Every time Zandra tries to attack Leonard faction, Gordon come to attack hers
When she tried to steal away Leonard’s supporters, her supporters were also taken away and Zandra
was forced to go defensive.
Even so, when she sometimes attacks the Leonard faction, Gordon’s always shows up as if he was
waiting for that exact timing and steals away Zandra’s supporters.
If the situation keeps on going like this, the only winner here will be Gordon. That alone is the thing
she wanted to avoid.
251
“Let’s lay your hands off Leonard’s faction for a while. Your Highness can get your revenge on him for
stealing your Minister at a later time.”
“Kuh….Alright. In exchange, bring some suitable ones to my place! My irritation won’t easily go away
like this!”
“As you wish.”
Zandra is a person who has excessive brutality. If her pent up emotion reaches a certain threshold she
will not be able to calm down unless she can release her cruel and aggressive side.”
The assassins who don’t have any mission at the time are often sent to appease Zandra.
While thinking about who would be appropriate to send to her today, Gunther braces himself for
tomorrow.
“That was splendid. Reading their movement from such a small piece of information, truly a fine job.”
“It’s the same as reading a monster attack. In a situation where their actions are limited, usually, they
would play their best hand. I only watch out for that while sending that information to the other
faction. Since the Second Princess has grown more cautious, she probably won’t be so aggressive
anymore.”
“Amazing! Lynfia-san!”
Lynfia was a little confused by Finne’s honest praise.
Al had put Lynfia as an escort for Finne and told Finne to listen to Lynfia’s advice.
Because of that, Finne listens to all of her opinions.
Of course, Finne didn’t simply listen, she told her what she wanted to do and Lynfia offered the way to
accomplish it and they adopted that into their course of action.
It’s not a bad thing to be treated so well but Lynfia finds that a little strange.
“Is there something wrong?”
“No,….it’s just, I was wondering why do you trust me so much?”
“Why you said, it’s because Al-sama trusted you. Also, Al-sama understands my importance so he will
never put any untrustworthy person at my side.”
There’s no malice in Finne’s smile.
There’s only one reason why she can smile so much. There’s no doubt in her thought process.
252
Finne understood her position well. A Duke’s daughter, the blue seagull princess title. She
understands that is all she is.
She is not here because of her personal abilities. She is important to both Al and Leo, just by being
[Alive]. Other than that no one expected much from her.
That’s why they can’t place someone they can’t trust at her side. That’s the reason Finne was being so
confident. With that train of thought, Finne fully trusted Lynfia.
“Um….don’t you find me unpleasant? A newcomer like me showing up like this.”
To be honest, Lynfia was prepared to be jealous of.
Finne is the daughter of a Duke while Lynfia is just a child of refugees. There’s a good deal of
difference between them. she never thought that someone like that would listen to anything she says.
However, that wasn’t the case.
Even if she has her trust toward Al, Lynfia couldn’t help but find Finne who was listening to her
opinions so far to be strange.
At the very least, she is far from the image Lynfia has about nobles.
“ ? If I can be of use to Al-sama and Leo-sama then I don’t mind no matter what happens. If I’m useful
then Lynifia-san will also be useful right?”
“…..I see. You don’t value yourself at all aren’t you.”
“That’s quite perceptive of you. Finne-sama is certainly someone like that. She always puts others first
and herself second.”
Convinced, Lynfia nodded to Sebas’s words.
While thinking that there’s a noble like her too, she wonders why such a person participates in
political strife like this. That’s the new question that popped up in her mind.
“Why did you get yourself involved with this succession war? Forgive my rudeness but I don’t think
that such a thing is suitable for you.”
“AUu…..I know right….I think so too as well…..”
Finne said that with her expression like she just received a shock.
It seems like she was honestly shocked so Lynfia started to panic herself.
“Eh, Ah…..was it really that shocking to you?”
“It was….I’ve never been useful to Al-sama and the others after all…..I also want to be useful to him
too……”
253
As long as she can provide Al with good results, she doesn’t mind no matter who she has to cooperate
with.
That was basically how Finne’s thinking. However, it doesn’t mean that she is fine with being useless
either.
She always wanted to be useful without the use of her position and title.
It is just because Finne herself understands that she doesn’t have the ability to do so that she doesn’t
make any noticeable move.
“It’s nothing but good luck for the two of them just by having you being here, Finne-sama. Please don’t
worry yourself so much about it.”
“I hope so…….”
The figure of Finne hanging her head is beautiful even from the eyes of Lynfia who is also a woman.
This is not simply because of her beautiful facial features.
She really conveyed the feeling of wanting to be of use to someone to her. That’s the reason for her
worries.
When he departed, Al left behind a parting word.
Take care of Finne for me.
She doesn’t know to what extent he wants her to take care of Finne but Lynfia decided to go a little
further for her.
He wants Finne to accomplish something. That’s how she chose to interpret his words.
“Then let’s be useful together. Finne-sama”
“Eh? Is there something I can do?”
“There are things that only you can do. You are very famous in the capital and there are those who
want to obtain that fame of yours.”
“Who would that be?”
“The merchants. I think building a strong connection with them before His Highnesses return will
surely be a big plus to this faction.”
While she indifferently delivers her proposal, Lynfia glances at Sebas.
If he has dissatisfaction with this proposal, Sebas would surely voice his opinion.
However, if Sebas doesn’t say anything.
254
Lynfia will continue the talk.
“Right now, there are, of course, companies inside the capital that want to utilize your popularity but
they are probably already talking to the other candidates. So, we will aim for a different company that
eagerly wants to make a debut inside the capital’s market instead.”
“Is there really such a company?”
“There is. Perhaps Finne-sama already heard about them as well. Have you ever heard of a big
company called [Ajin]?”
“I see. It seems I have to raise your evaluation up another level. The Ajin company also caught the eyes
of Leonard-sama and Arnold-sama as well. However, they still haven’t contacted them yet. You surely
must understand their reason?”
“Yes, it was because the person who leads that firm is a vampire woman. The people of the Empire
don’t have a good impression of vampires due to the recent event. I understand why they delayed
their contact with them but we will surely be able to build a strong connection with them using this
situation. Don’t you think that this is a good opportunity?”
Finne nods several times to Lynfia’s proposal.
She doesn’t just simply nod. She also thinks about it as much as she can as well.
If she goes through with this, Who will turn into their enemies? Who will become their allies? What
kind of impact will this have on the Imperial Capital?
After she considered everything, Finne came to a conclusion.
“Let’s try meeting the vampire woman. I think I have to judge her personality with my own eyes
before I can make my decisions.”
“Understood. I think we will be able to set up a meeting if we send someone over. Can I leave the
arrangement in your hand?”
“That will not be a problem. Well, we should be able to get their reply within 2 – 3 days.”
“I see……Al-sama. I will do my best.”
Saying so, Finne raises her voice to the south, the direction Al is currently in.
At that time, Finne had no way of knowing what Al had to deal with on his side.
(TLN: Ajin = Demihuman/Subhuman, should I translate this into Subhuman Company? I’m against it
because I’m a weeb tho…..)
255
SPT Chapter 34
We return to Al’s side on this one…..and Sea Dragon?
The next 2 chapters will be from Finne/Lynfia though
>>>>>CLICKHERE FOR GOODNESS GRACIOUS OH RIGHTEOUS PRINCE<<<<<
-Mr.Graverobber
256
The Silver Haired Vampire
As its name implies, the Ajin company is a firm run by demi-human.
All of their members are demi-human. Although it tends to attract attention because of that, due to the
variety of their members, the quality of their work is much greater than other firms.
Luggage carrying jobs are assigned to physically strong demi-human. Deliver work for those who are
quick on their feet. Harvesting work for those who possess a great sense of smell.
Each of these demi-human has their own specialized field in which they can perform better than
humans. If they were to be put into the right field of work, it was natural that they would be able to
produce better results.
Doing so, this great company gradually expanded its influence starting from the eastern side of the
continent and now they have set up a branch inside the imperial capital. Furthermore, this company is
being led by a mysterious vampire who never shows her face in public.
That is the Ajin Company.
Lynfia and Finne are heading to that imperial capital branch.
“They just finished setting up the branch office and were about to begin their business here but that
incident in the east suddenly happened. That’s why they didn’t open it in the end, there’s no signboard
at their office either. Their leader is a vampire and the Emperor just got attacked by one. The Empire
has become more sensitive toward them as demi-humans. I think it was a wise decision on their part.”
“Is that really the case? I don’t think that they should be bothered by that since they didn’t do anything
wrong. It doesn’t like they were the ones who attacked the Emperor right……?”
“There wouldn’t be a problem if everyone can think like Finne-sama but there are not only nice people
such as yourself in this world. Many people don’t see the assailants as individuals but they are viewing
them as demi-humans as a whole. Of course, with their prejudice attached.”
Lynfia thought of that as Finne’s virtue.
She wasn’t just an onlooker, she was one of the victims of the incident. Still, she held no prejudice
toward vampires or other demi-human races.
It’s the evidence that she doesn’t judge a person by their titles or races. Since she views the assailants
as individuals, she doesn’t link them with something or someone else to place her animosity toward.
However, Lynfia thought that Finne should know that her way of thinking is unique.
That’s why she wants to remind Finne who seems to be oblivious about that fact.
“Finne-sama. Humans are creatures with their own thoughts. You do understand that, correct?”
257
“Yes, of course.”
“Then you should understand that there are cases that your thoughts on things are not the same as
others as well. I don’t have any particular opinion about the demi-humans but if you said what you did
to a person who held prejudice toward the demi-humans, it might be taken that you are an advocate
for the demi-human. That will be a disadvantage for you and for your faction as well. If you think of
the princes then you should be careful when you want to voice your personal thoughts like that.”
“Th, that’s right…..that is certainly true. It was my mistake…..”
Seeing the shrinking Finne, Lynfia felt like she did something bad. However, Lynfia still won’t do
anything to comfort her.
Since Al asked her to take care of Finne in exchange for saving her village, Lynfia felt that she has a
responsibility toward Finne.
As an adventurer, she has to work to get her reward.
At least she has to protect the faction and make Finne take credit for something. She can’t ask for a
reward if she couldn’t at least do that.
Moreover, Al had already hired Abel’s party to protect the village for her.
Any amount of work would be overshadowed by the sum of money he already paid.
As Silver, Al possesses an enormous amount of money so he just paid it without a second thought but
as a prince, that amount of money would be quite hard to pull out so easily.
That was what stimulated Lynfia’s sense of responsibility.
“Your opponent this time is a representative of a big company. If you make a careless statement, it is
highly likely that you will be coaxed into something by them. Please be careful.”
“Ye, Yes!”
Lynfia nodded as she saw Finne’s face tense up.
At the same time, the carriage stopped.
They have arrived at Ajin Company’s imperial capital branch office.
——————
The branch office that is located in the prime location of the Imperial capital was quiet.
There was almost no one around.
258
Entering the office, they met a blonde elf who seems to be the secretary of the representative, she acts
as a guide to show their way inside the office.
No one says a word.
They kept following the secretary inside the big office building and stopped in front of a red door.
“The representative is waiting for you inside. Please enter.”
“Yes.”
Saying so, the secretary opens the door.
The two entered the room but there was no one inside.
By the time they noticed, the secretary had already backed away and left the room.
“Did we come to the wrong room?”
“I don’t think that the guide would make such a mistake. It’s a common thing to do to let the other
party wait so let’s sit down and wait for her.”
Lynfia calmly urges Finne to sit down on the sofa.
After a little hesitation, Finne starts brewing tea using the tools on the table.
“Do you want some as well, Lynfia-san?”
“I’m acting as your escort right now so please don’t mind me. I will trouble you again once we get
back.”
“Is that so….drinking tea alone is no fun though……”
Looking lonely, Finne drinks her tea alone.
Behind Finne, a hand suddenly reached out from Lynfia’s side.
Although taken by surprise, Lynfia managed to catch it before it reached Finne.
However.
“Arara, that’s a shame. I wanted to enjoy the feeling of the Blau Mowe but it’s fine, the escort is also a
cute one after all.”
Saying so, the person who suddenly appeared next to Lynfia used the gap from when Lynfia protected
Finne to circle around her back and began to fondle her boobs with both hands from behind.
“Wha!?”
“Yup, a little unsatisfactory I guess? But there is still room for growth! Hang in there!”
259
“Kuh!”
Lynfia who committed a blunder tried to draw her magic sword but Finne stopped her.
“Lynfia-san. Please bear with it.”
“Finne-sama….?”
“It’s a pleasure to meet you. I’m Finne von Kleinert. I assumed that you are the representative of the
Ajin Company, correct? And please release my escort. If you insist to play around more than this I
don’t mind going back right now though?”
“Ahaha, don’t make such a scary face. This is just a simple skinship you know, skinship. That’s right, I
am the representative of this company.”
Said the silver-haired woman with a cramped smile.
She has wavy semi-short hair and purplish-red pupils.
She has an adult atmosphere but she has a very young appearance. She looks like she is in her late
teens to the early twenties however, you can’t predict a vampire’s age by their appearance so Finne
stopped thinking about it.
The woman has the characteristic white skin and beauty of the vampires. Her appearance shouldn’t be
considered inferior even when compared to Finne. If you have a hundred men as judges, the vote
would be split in half.
That silver-haired woman showed a cheerful smile that exuded a friendly atmosphere and headed to
her desk.
She sat on the desk, crossed her legs and looked straight at Lynfia and Finne.
“I am the representative of the Ajin Company, Yuriya. You might already know this but I’m a vampire. I
love cute girls and money as well. What I enjoy is feeling up a cute girl and making money. Nice to
meet you!.”
Seeing the too frank a self-introduction of Yuriya, Lynfia instantly realized her mistake.
This might be the place that she shouldn’t bring the peerless beauty like Finne to.
However, Finne, the person in question calmly accepted Yuriya’s self-introduction.
“I like cute women as well, Yuriya-san.”
“Oh! To think that we are on the same wavelength, we might really get along, Finne.”
Finne doesn’t get work up by suddenly being called without any honorifics so Lynfia couldn’t do
anything but she unusually finds it hard to cope up with her instead.
260
Seeing such Lynfia, Yuriya smiles.
“Don’t be so nervous. We will have a proper business talk alright. If you can bring me a profit then I
can give you a gift in return. You want us to be your ally in the succession war, correct? Let’s start the
negotiation then.”
Saying so, Yuriya dominates the negotiation field.
Seeing that, Lynfia started regretting her decision again.
Yuriya is not just a simple merchant. Perhaps she has lived even longer than Finne or Lynfia’s
grandparents, she has gone through hundreds of merchant’s battles while being shackled down by a
label of being a demi-human to develop the Ajin company from a small-time business to a large
company it is today.
She thought that she would be able to carry the negotiation to their advantage but from Yuriya’s
appearance, she’s like the word composure incarnated. She has completely taken the flow of this
negotiation.
Now, what should I do?
When Lynfia thought so.
Albeit too quickly, Finne played their strongest card.
“The bargaining chip is me. I will give you the right to use me so in return please lend us your power.”
Lynfia was stunned by a sudden All-in but what’s more important was that Yuriya was taken by
surprise.
However, she quickly recovered and showed a fearless smile.
“If you give me that right then I might make you do something unbecoming of a lady of the duke house
you know?”
“Please feel free to do so.”
Replied, an immediate answer.
It was now Yuriya’s turn to be pressured by Finne’s smile.
261
The Scene I have seen many times
“Fuu–…..”
Alone inside my room in Albatro castle, I breathed my lungs out.
I was pent up. Ever since I swapped places with Leo, just how much suffering have I been through.
Honestly, I’m tired. Forcing myself to do something is too bothersome for me.
“I wonder what Leo is doing right now…..”
I’m worried about their side.
Since Elna’s there as well I want to believe that he can imitate the Al-like things properly.
As long as I have to act like Leo, that side also has to put up the act as well.
However, I know that he will have a harder time than me. Leo really can’t act like a good-for-nothing,
rather, he doesn’t even have a lazy-bone in him.
After all, it would naturally be difficult to do something you have no experience in.
“Well, worrying alone is useless huh….”
I can’t do anything but believe that they are doing well.
More importantly, I have another thing to think about.
The Sea Dragon Leviathan.
It is undoubtedly a monster that exceeds S-class. There are two ways to quickly subjugate it that I can
think of right now.
Whether I go out to fight it as Silver or have the Empire side get us the Emperor’s permission for Elna
to use her holy sword. Which path should
I choose?
There’s no reason for Silver to come to the south. We haven’t even put in a request at the adventurer
guild yet.
On the other hand, it takes time to send a request for the Emperor’s permission and wait for their
reply to arrive.
Both ways are far from ideal.
“What should I do.”
262
When I was considering my options, someone knocked on the door.
Just leave me alone already, while thinking so, I adjusted my wrinkled clothes and unkempt hair and
answer the door.
“Please come in.”
“Excuse me. It’s Eva, I want to say thank you for earlier.”
The person who entered the room is Eva who is wearing a dress.
So she regained her consciousness. I wanted that to happen sooner if possible though. If she did, I
wouldn’t have to force my way through like that, with that in mind, I hide my real thought and show
her a sweet smile.
“What’s important is that you are safe, Princess Eva. Are you already recovered enough to walk
around by yourself?”
“Y, yes…umm…thank you very much for saving me. Everyone told me that we were saved thanks to
Prince Leonard. They also told me that you were very kind and courageous.”
“That’s just an exaggeration. The people who tried their hardest to rescue the survivors including
yourself were the crew of my ship. If you want to praise someone then they are the ones who deserve
it.”
“Then…..as Julio’s elder sister please allow me to express my gratitude. I heard that you dived into the
sea to save him without any hesitation. Diving into a place where there might be a Sea Dragon lurking
around was absolutely not something anyone could do. You were very heroic to act like that.”
“It’s nothing, I was just carried away by the situation.”
Eva smiles gently to my answer.
Because of that, my cheeks have turned stiff.
This situation, it’s the scene I have seen many times already. From the side that is.
It’s the feverish face noble ladies made when Leo did some great deed. Eva’s reaction is close to that.
In short, she’s blushing. For Leo who did a heroic task of saving her people without fearing even the
Sea Dragon.
Don’t use that heated gaze to stare at me anymore.
I’m actually Al so I will be troubled if you looked at me like that. Very.
“C, come to think of it how is Prince Julio doing?”
“He just regained his consciousness. He wanted me to thank you for saving his life. He said that you
were the ideal prince and want to become like you someday too.”
263
“Is, Is that so…….”
The elder sister is all heated up while the little brother has nothing but admiration for Leo.
This is bad. If we swapped back this will definitely become troublesome.
What to do? Should I make her hate me?”
No, that’s impossible. I can’t do anything too noticeable to the princess or the prince within Albatro’s
territory. There’s also the possibility that they will notice the switch if I did something drastic too.
But if I continue to act like Leo like this, she will fall even further and it will turn into love in the end. I
have seen it happen many times already.
Eva’s eyes are already engrossed with a cool prince from a big country.
It’s nothing unusual. Girls her age often prefer the dreamy type and easy to fall in love. Leonard Lakes
Adler has qualities that fit the spec of those girls.
He’s a prince, he’s handsome, he’s gentle and most importantly, he can do anything.
I won’t lose to him in the first three departments but the last one is definitely where he is different
from me. Yup.
I have the same face but no one ever told me that I’m handsome though.
“Prince Leonard. We have been standing for a while now so how about we continue this inside?”
“Eh, Ahh…..”
Aren’t you unexpectedly bold. This girl. She might be the type that I’m bad with.
I am bad with pushy women because of the trauma Elna gave me ever since I was young. Of course,
I’m bad at dealing with Elna herself as well. But she’s a childhood friend and I can understand how she
thinks so I can somehow come up with some countermeasures against her.
But when a girl I don’t know that well comes at me boldly like this, I don’t know how to deal with her.
“Ah, am I bothering you…..?”
“No, um….I was writing a report for the Empire. I have to keep writing it for a while so I’m worried
that this might be boring to you, Princess Eva.”
“Oh……”
Eva’s face dyes red as she covers it with both of her hands.
Arghhh…… What should I do with her?
264
I often went out to play in the town, I even played with women before. But I’ve never been approached
so forcefully before. Not even once.
I don’t know how to politely refuse her and as long as I’m acting as Leo, I can’t do anything that will
tarnish his reputation.
“I’m sorry for disturbing you. I will pay you a visit again. How about we have a meal together next
time?”
“If schedule allows then, gladly.”
I delivered a safe answer with a smile, the moment Eva left, I hurriedly closed the door.
“Crap crap crap crap……This is bad…..”
How do I explain this to Leo?
Sorry, the princess fell in love with you?
No no, that’s no good at all.
I have to break her out of it somehow. She’s just admiring the prince who saved her and her brother’s
life. If I don’t do anything unnecessary, that feeling of her should calm down.
“Calm down, me. It’s fine. Rather than worrying about this, don’t I have a bigger problem to think
about. Let’s do this.”
With such determination, I head to the desk.
Whatever the case, right now I’m Leo. I have to send a letter to the empire to report our status.
But how do I report this?
Should I tell them that we switched places? No, if I do that the upper stratum of the Empire will find
out that what Leo has been doing until now was actually my doing. That means they will know that I
have enough ability to act as Leo as well.
That will be bad. Very bad.
I want them to keep underestimating me a little while longer.
Is there no choice but to write the report as Leo after all.
“If I’m Leo, how would I report this.”
The situation will definitely change by the time this report reaches them anyway.
I should report the current situation, and write down my prediction on the future huh.
265
There’s a high chance that the appearance of the Sea Dragon will cause damage to the Empire.
Should I write something like asking Father for permission to use the holy sword to form a good
relationship with Albatro as the ambassador plenipotentiary?
By the time this arrives, at worst, one of the countries in the south might have already disappeared,
that’s quite a scary story.
“It would be great if they hurry up and put in a request at the Adventurer Guild…..it’s probably
impossible though.”
The Principality of Albatro has a thriving maritime trade, their Navy is strong but the army leaves
much to be desired. On the other hand, the Principality of Rondine is the opposite. Their army is
powerful while their Navy is not.
That’s why every time Rondine attacks, they always use the land route.
To fight the militant Rondine, Albatro has been borrowing troops and weapons from other countries
that it has close ties with. Because of that, even though Albatro looks like a wealthy nation, they
actually aren’t that rich.
Of course, they are not poor either but if they ask the Adventurer Guild to defeat the Sea Dragon for
them, they will have trouble when they have to borrow troops and weapons from other countries.
That’s why Albatro didn’t rely on the Adventurer Guild from the start.
The only way to improve their situation is for them to do something about Rondine.
The Principality of Albatro is now stuck between the dragon and Rondine. If they can somehow deal
with Rondine they can focus on the Sea Dragon.
“For now I have to do something with Rondine.”
Thus, the course of action was decided.
With the prediction of future events, I started writing a report to the Empire.
266
The Situation in Rondine
“I, Arnold Lakes Adler, the Seventh Prince of the Empire have come to seek an audience with you, Your
Majesty the King of Rondine.”
“Oh, Prince Arnold. I’m glad that you came. I heard that your little brother’s ship was hit by a storm. I
pray for his safety.”
“Thank you very much.”
Leonard greeted the King of Rondine as Arnold.
The King of Rondine is a plump man with a splendid mustache and beard. His age should be around
the late forty.
His name is Carlo di Rondine.
He continues waging war against Albatro ever since his father’s generation. When he noticed that
Albatro has been seeking cooperation from other nations in order to fight, he personally sent a
goodwill ambassador to the Empire to ask for the Empire’s cooperation, this man is the person who
created the reason for their visit this time.
“This is sudden but, Prince Arnold. Since your brother is absent, I assume that the head of your
mission here is now you, correct?”
“Yes, that is so.”
Leo only answers the question without saying anything more than necessary.
This was the point that Elna who is now kneeling behind him repeatedly reminded him of.
However, the world is not so kind that it would let him off with just that.
“Very well then, can I hear the Emperor’s reply?”
Saying so, King Rondine got down from his throne.
The Principality of Rondine was seeking the Empire’s assistance to fight against the Principality of
Albatro.
The Emperor’s response was a no. However, among the various gifts the Empire brought are weapons
and their blueprints. Although the official response was negative, the Emperor had no intention to cut
ties with Rondine. That was his intended answer but most of the weapons were loaded on the ship Al
was riding on and everything has already sunk to the bottom of the sea.
Leo wondered how to answer and give him a safe reply he prepared in advance.
“Regarding that, I want Your Majesty to hear it from one of our imperial knights herself. Elna.”
267
“Yes. How do you do, Your Majesty. I am Elna von Amsberg, Commander of the Third Corps of the
Imperial Knight Order.”
“A, Amsberg…..the rumored prodigy of the Brave house huh….th, this is surprising. I heard that you
would be accompanied by the Imperial Knights but I never thought……..”
“Your Majesty did not expect the wielder of the Holy Sword to come here herself, correct?”
The King of Rondine repeatedly nodded at Elna’s words.
Elna, on the other hand, returns his surprise with a smile to relax the tension.
From her outside appearance, Elna is a lovely and beautiful girl so her smile lightly softens the
atmosphere.
“Please rest assured. I can not use the Holy Sword outside of the Empire’s territory.”
“W, well, it’s not that I doubt you or anything…..I apologize if I offended you somehow.”
“No, I understand well that the Brave house of Amsberg is such an existence. And this is the answer.
Your Majesty.”
“Wh, what do you mean….? Can you explain this to me?”
Elna begins explaining to the King of Rondine who can’t make sense of this situation.
“Our Empire is a military superpower. For the Empire to make a move would mean that a high-
ranking general such as myself would also be dispatched. To put it simply, the Empire can easily
destroy both your country and the Principality of Albatro, Your Majesty.”
“Y, Yeah, that’s right. I understand that.”
“As expected of Your Majesty. You are really wise. However, our Empire also has its rivals. If the
Empire officially sent me here as a reinforcement for your country, our rival will also send a
reinforcement to assist Albatro as well. If that’s the case, the only future waiting for both countries
would be exhaustion and eventually the destruction of the south.”
“Th, that’s…..”
“Unfortunately, that’s our answer, Your Majesty. Because our Empire is too strong, if we make a move,
other nations will also respond in kind. Therefore, His Imperial Majesty can not agree to your request.
Especially when your nation is the dominant one in this conflict.”
“U, Umu….As expected of His Imperial Majesty. He even included the situation of the continent in his
decision. However, it would be hard for my country to defeat the Principality of Albatro alone. There
are other countries that give them assistance after all.”
Elna nods.
268
Of course, Elna and Leo are aware of that. That’s why they brought weapons and blueprints with them
as a gift to imply to Rondine that they have to settle with this but as long as Elna and Leo don’t have
that, they can only stay silent.
“Of course, I am aware of that. That’s why the Emperor is hoping that we can continue our friendly
relationship while we provide you the assistance you need little by little. As a start of that, the
Emperor sent me to Your Majesty’s side this time. This is to show you the military might of the
Empire. Will this be acceptable? Your Majesty, are you interested in testing the power of a hero’s
descendant?”
“OH! So that is the case! That is great!”
Finally aware of our intention, King Rondine’s expression brightened.
After all, If they were refused by the Empire then they have to make a huge adjustment to their course
of action.
The Principality of Rondine can no longer defeat Albatro alone. It wouldn’t be impossible if they take
their time but the King finds that unacceptable.
The King wanted to unite the south within his generation. If he can’t do that then his country wouldn’t
be able to beat the countries in the central part of the continent which keeps on growing bigger and
bigger and will eventually get swallowed up by them.
For that reason, the plan of becoming the King of a unified southern country has been engraved in his
mind. It was certainly an ambitious plan but this was also because he wanted to protect the south.
To this King Rondine, he absolutely wants to witness the power of the hero’s descendant, humanity’s
strongest.
“Umu, But you know, we don’t have anyone who can compete with you one on one in our country. So,
Prince Arnold. Can our side have more than one fighter?”
“If the person herself doesn’t have a problem with it then I won’t object.”
“I don’t mind.”
“I see, I see. Then how about 10 people from our side? That should be suitable for a person of your
caliber.”
“Understood. 10 people it is.”
Elna carefreely accepted.
The King did not think that she would accept it so easily but since nothing good would come out from
changing the terms now, he called out 10 skilled knights who are stationing in the castle.
Thus, inside the space made in front of the throne, a 1 v 10 battle began.
269
“OOOOOHHHHH! !”
The first person who moved was a large-framed knight.
He charged in with a practice sword but from Elna’s point of view, he was full of openings.
While thinking that, she would thoroughly retrain him if he is her subordinate, she lightly hit his
sword.
The practice sword the large-framed knight is carrying was cut in half in the middle with a dry
breaking sound.
“Eh……?”
“I’d recommend that you come at me all at once you know?”
The large-framed knight’s face turned blue like he was cut by a sharp blade.
Disregarding him, Elna glances at the 9 remaining knights.
For a moment, the knights were frightened by Elna’s gaze but soon they recalled that they were
standing in front of their King so they mustered up their courage.
First, three of them simultaneously come to attack her from three different directions.
From Elna’s point of view, their attacks were so slow that she could yawn, she cut all the approaching
practice swords in the middle at the same time.
Seeing the practice swords get cut in half by Elna who is also using a practice sword again, the
remaining knights unconsciously stepped back. Seeing them like that, Elna shouted at the knights.
“IF YOU ARE A KNIGHT THEN DON’T EVER TAKE A STEP BACK IN FRONT OF YOUR LORD! PEOPLE
WILL SAY THAT THERE’S NO KNIGHT IN RONDINE YOU KNOW!”
“Y. YES! We are coming! “
Like an instructor training her pupils.
That’s what Leo thought as he looked at the scene.
The knights who were shouted at approach Elna without fear. And for the first time, Elna blocks their
swords.
That alone brings out the shout of joy from the Rondine side.
However, that was staged by Elna. The only ones who noticed that are probably Leo and Elna’s
subordinates.
270
Showing them the overwhelming might then slightly holding back to let them save face. This is the
technique that the imperial knights often use when they have a noble as their opponent.
Fortunately, no one on Rondine’s side noticed that.
Relieved, Leo let out a small sigh while thinking how much longer will this continue for.
“I wonder if Nii-san is having a hard time over there too………”
He mutters that with a voice that no one can hear it but himself.
For Leo, Al has always been a great brother who can do things that he cannot do.
As a child, there was a tree that no one could climb. Among the children, they were talking about who
would be the first who can climb that tree. Leo was training earnestly to climb it but no one, not even
Leo was able to do it and eventually the tree climbing fad passed.
However, shortly after that, Leo found a small bird injured on the top of that tree.
However, Leo couldn’t help it because he couldn’t get to the bird.
At that time, Al passed by and asked him what’s wrong. Then, he told him to wait at the tree and
disappeared somewhere.
After a while, Al came back and easily helped it. He gets it healed and brought it back to its nest.
Al solved the situation by borrowing a valuable magic tool that allows you to float in mid-air, without
permission.
That was how Al solved the situation in a way that Leo couldn’t even imagine. If it is that brother of his
then he would be able to easily act like him.
Thinking so, Leo focuses on himself.
He decided to act out this good for nothing role with all his power.
271
The Sea Route to Rondine
The next day, King Albatro finally decided to bridge the relationship between Albatro and Rondine.
I’m glad that I have to think things over but as a country, this decision was too slow.
I understand that they have a long history of conflict with Rondine but everything will be gone once
their country is in ruin.
“I will leave it in your capable hand. Prince Leonard.”
“Yes, Your Majesty, please leave it to me.”
“B, but, are you really going to use the sea route…..?”
The King looks at the sea with a fearful expression.
We are currently at the harbor. Upon receiving their request, I immediately ordered the ship to make
preparations.
The people of the Principality of Albatro all thought that I would be using the land route and acted like
they were scared out of their minds. Even now, they are looking at me like they still couldn’t believe it.
“It will be faster by sea. The capital of Rondine is also a port city so I should arrive there within two
days. I don’t want to waste unnecessary time on this matter after all.”
“But….Leviathan is still lurking in there.”
“I have the magic cannons your country lent me. And above all, if I don’t provoke it, Leviathan
shouldn’t come to attack my ship either. Considering this from its perspective, the thing that it would
be most cautious about should be the resealing. In other words, Leviathan is probably focusing its
attention here. Please be careful.”
“U,umu….I’m sorry for everything. Please, we are in your care.”
“Although my abilities are limited, please do leave it to me.”
Saying so, I was about to part way with the King but someone called out to me.
“Pr, Prince Leonard! Please wait a minute!”
“If it isn’t Prince Julio. Is your body already alright now?”
The person that appeared along with his escort was Julio.
It would be better for him to stay still in his condition.
Still, Julio walked up to me and deeply bowed his head.
272
“I wanted to say thank you before you leave. I am deeply grateful to you for saving many of my
people.”
He didn’t say it because I saved his and his sister’s life, he expressed his gratitude because I saved the
survivors.
That idealist way of thinking was really similar to Leo.
Julio is also a gentle person huh.
“I only saved the people who were looking for help in front of me. I did not do anything worthy of your
praise.”
“Even so, it doesn’t change the fact that you saved us. I will never forget this debt of gratitude.”
“…..you are exaggerating. But, it doesn’t feel bad at all. Very well, I will look forward to collecting that
debt someday.”
Saying so, I smile like Leo would and turn my back to him.
Still, Julio stopped me again.
“Prince Leonard! I…..I want to become someone like you! What should I do to become such a
wonderful prince like yourself!?”
The answer to that question is quite difficult.
I think of Leo as a great guy but I never thought of him as a wonderful person.
Leo has both strengths and weaknesses.
Can’t be helped then. Let’s answer him honestly.
“Prince Julio. Leonard Lakes Adler isn’t someone as great as you think. Some people may think of me
as gentle but there are also people who think that I am naive as well. Some people think that I am
courageous but there are people who think that I am reckless at the same time. I myself think that my
idealistic thinking is a flaw for a position that needs to make realistic judgments like an emperor or a
prince. You may idolize me as a hero but I am not someone as heroic as you think.”
“B, But……!”
“Yes, I know. If you insist that you are fine with all that then let me give you some advice. I never
hesitate to do what I thought was right. This is something I take pride in. You can have your retainers
compensate you for your other weaknesses but making a decision is the loneliness of the king. That’s
why if it is something I think is right, I will never hesitate. The time I rescued the survivors was the
same. I thought that I have to help them so I did. Whatever the result maybe, if I think it is right I will
immediately make that decision. If you want to be proud of yourself as a prince then never second
thought what you considered to be right.”
273
“Y, Yes! Those words! I will carve it into my heart!”
Julio lowers his head.
Those were my frank impressions of Leo.
Honestly, Leo is not suitable to become an emperor. Our eldest brother, the crown prince was also a
gentle person but he was also someone who doesn’t let that affect his judgment. However, Leo is too
naive in that regard. His judgment will definitely be affected by his feelings.
However, Leo never hesitates. Being too naive or too idealistic can be compensated by his retainers.
What’s needed for an emperor is an ability to make a judgment call.
He doesn’t have to be perfect.
What’s important is to be strong. He doesn’t need to come up with plots to undermine others. If he can
simply make decisions with the benefit of the Empire as his top priority he would be a good emperor.
That’s why I push Leo to become the emperor.
The other three also have the capability but they are too egoistic. They put themselves before the
Empire. That’s the kind of emperor they would become.
They have to be stopped.
“Leo would say, If you put it like that then isn’t it fine if Nii-san becomes the emperor yourself,
though.”
I muttered with a small voice and boarded the ship.
I am not suitable to become the emperor.
That was what my master as well as great-grandfather who was once an emperor judged.
In his words, an emperor needs the will. As long as you don’t have that even if you have all of the other
qualifications you would still unsuited to be an emperor, or so it seems.
The will he meant was not something like the ambition to become the emperor. It was the willingness
to do things. In other words, a person who hates troublesome things like me is not suitable to become
an emperor.
I wholeheartedly agree with him.
Just a few days of pretending to be Leo already deteriorated so much of my mental health. I can’t help
but want to go back to being a good for nothing again.
“Set sail! Our destination is the Principality of Rondine!”
With that in mind, I give my order.
274
If I can meet up with Leo things will be a little easier.
Calming down my restless mind, I set sail into the sea where the Sea Dragon is lurking in.
The day I departed from Albatro passed without any incident.
Then come the second day.
Leaving the Albatro’s water, our ship entered Rondine’s territory.
That was when it happened.
A roaring sound suddenly echoes from the bottom of the sea.
“Wha, What!?”
“The sea is roaring!?”
“Kuh! All hands to battle stations!”
Everyone onboard is getting restless.
On the other hand, I calmly came out of my room and went up to the deck.
I already erected a barrier around this ship. It’s a barrier to cut our presence from outside perception.
I chose the sea route because I have this magic. But to think that we would meet it here of all places.
“EVERYONE, CALM DOWN! It is already too late. There’s nothing we can do but wait for it to pass.”
“Y, Your Highness…..”
“It is already below us.”
I can’t see it.
It is probably moving deep in the depth.
Still, if I haven’t erected the presence concealment barrier then our ship might already have been
sunk.
According to the legend in Albatro, its body should be well over fifty meters long with a pair of dragon
wings and four legs but I can’t confirm that legend at all.
However, I’m certain that it is directly below us.
Not just me, it seems that everyone on board is also aware of this because of their human instinct. The
fact that everyone is holding their breath is proof.
They all felt the grave danger to their lives.
275
Dragons are predators and humans are just their prey. That rule is almost an absolute certainty in this
world.
After a while, I confirmed that it had already passed us. However, I won’t tell them.
Eventually, after more than an hour passed with nobody moving a muscle, Marc says that it should be
alright now and we continue heading toward Rondine.
“I thought that we were finished……..”
“Yeah, I didn’t think that we would come across it in such a place. I was careless.”
“Yes, but why was it there?”
“…..For Leviathan, all human beings must be its enemy. It has no concept of a country so it might have
gone to do something in Rondine, or perhaps it was on its way back from doing that. Either way, it
would be better for Rondine to see this as their problem as well.”
As if to back up my ominous words, a report came in.
“Your Highness! Rondine is currently being attacked by monsters!”
“As I thought…..”
“Your Highness, can you refrain from speaking your mind next time?”
“Isn’t it better to be able to prepare in advance?”
“It might become true exactly because you said it though.”
“I don’t have such a god-like ability you know.”
With that said, I go up to the deck and look at the capital of Rondine in the distance.
Certainly, they are being attacked by monsters of various sizes.
Meanwhile, there was a single ship that was fighting off the monsters.
It is bearing an imperial flag.
As expected, his decision was fast.
“ADVANCE AT FULL SPEED. WE ARE SUPPORTING MY BROTHER!”
“Acknowledged! ALL HANDS TO BATTLE STATION! MAKE SURE YOU USE THE MAGIC CANONS WE
BORROWED FROM ALBATRO AS WELL!”
Saying so, Captain gave out his instruction in high spirit.
He is probably happy that he got to use the weapon we borrowed from Albatro.
276
Just in case, I have Leo’s sword hanging at my waist but it’s heavy. I probably won’t be able to swing it
that well.
“Now then, will I get a chance to switch back?”
While thinking about such a thing, we headed straight toward Rondine.
277
The Switch
Leo was able to set sail when the incident abruptly happened was basically an accident.
The moment the monsters appeared, Leo was on board his ship to check their supplies Though He did
act like Al and made himself look unwilling to do it.
However, the moment the monster started appearing, Leo immediately recognized the abnormal
situation and ordered his ship to head out.
He managed to stop the monsters at sea and prevent the damage from spreading.
But that also meant that his ship is now the lone target of the monsters.
“Kuh! There’s a monster on our left too!”
“Leave it alone! Focus on the monsters in front first!”
Every sailor turns their eyes to the front as ordered by their captain’s order.
There was a 10-meters long Sea Serpent in front of them.
Sea Serpent. A monster that was called a pseudo dragon due to its body size and strength. A monster’s
rank is determined by judging how much damage it can do to humans and where they appear. A
monster that can sink a ship and appear in the deep sea often ranks from AA to AAA.
Half of the maritime accidents are said to be the work of the Sea Serpents. Compared to the Sea
Dragons that rarely appear, the Sea Serpents are monsters that the sailors are most terrified of.
However, it is rare for a Sea Serpent to appear so close to land.
Monsters that often appear near the coast are monsters that adapted themselves to living on land.
However, Sea Serpents are basically marine monsters. They can neither move on land nor can it leave
the sea.
Yet, this one is still trying to approach the port.
“Captain! Don’t recklessly fight it! We just need to lure its attention!”
“Don’t be unreasonable Your Highness! If you are scared then please stay inside your room!”
Leo gives his instructions as Al but no one listens to him. Everyone just dismissed his orders.
Because this is the only ship that was able to set sail, if this ship went down, there will be nothing to
stop the monsters from attacking the port. Even if the Sea Serpent can’t leave the sea, if it can destroy
the ships at the harbor, it will deal enormous damage to Rondine. That’s why he ordered them to lure
the Sea Serpent’s attention until they can get rid of all the monsters that can get on land, a decision
278
made from a calm analysis of the battle. Still, the captain ignored it and started fighting against the Sea
Serpent.
Leo frowns at that.
“Just how does Nii-san normally get people to move……?”
People don’t listen to instructions from someone they don’t trust. Especially during a battle.
Confused at the unthinkable level of the people distrust in Arnold, Leo decided to do something.
But at that time,
A figure of a ship became visible on his right-hand side.
The moment he saw that Leo smiled and forcefully gave the captain an order.
“Captain! Turn the Sea Serpent to the left!”
“Your Highness, I told you not to be unreasonable! We are not that—.”
“Just do it! Leo is coming! We will turn it around and pincer the Sea serpent!”
While saying so, Leo gazes at the ship that is approaching them with confidence.
“Captain. Turn us to the left.”
“Understood! Prepare the starboard cannon! Let that snake monster have its fill with our magic
canons!”
Guessing Leo’s plan, Al turned his ship to the left.
As their ships passed by each other and the Sea Serpent caught between them, they gave their order at
the exact same time.
There was not even a single moment of missed timing in their attack.
“OPEN FIRE!”
At the command of Al and Leo, shells were fired simultaneously from both of their ships.
A magic cannon is a weapon in which a gunner inserts their magic power inside and fires a round of
magic power. The state-of-the-art magic canon from the Principality of Albatro has a further range
and consumes less magic power per shot.
“Good! As expected of the new model’s firepower! Shoot it more!”
The captain enjoys this like a child.
279
Well, of course. Al thought. Being able to one-sidedly attack the Sea Serpent, the creature feared by all
sailors. If you are a sailor then this is probably a joyous moment.
After the bombardment, the Sea Serpent sank down into the sea.
Cheers raised from both ships. However, it is not over yet.
“Other monsters are targeting Nii-san’s ship. Captain! Can you get us next to them?”
“No problem!”
“Knights, prepare for boarding! We are going to fight off the monsters that get on board Nii-san’s
ship!”
While giving that order, Al searched for Marc.
If Al can switch places with Leo during the battle, the one in the bad situation will be Leo. Despite not
understanding the situation, there are a lot of things that he has to do.
That’s why Al looked for Marc. If he doesn’t say something to Marc first it will be troublesome later.
“Sir Marc!”
“Yes Your Highness! What do you need?”
“I am going out to help Nii-san. I will leave the rest to you.”
“I see. Understood. Please leave it to me.”
With that short conversation, Marc guessed my intention and lowered his head.
It’s really helpful when you have someone around that can understand you without the need to
explain every little thing. Al appreciated his subordinate cleverness and sigh in relief.
Anyway, now Al has to wield a sword, the thing he’s not familiar with while heading over to Leo’s side.
There was no room for any extra explanation.
There are several small monsters on Leo’s ship.
Rather than his ship, he determined that their ship is under a lot more threat.
As the ships lined up side by side, Al led the knights to Leo’s ship.
“LET’S GO! !”
Despite its heaviness, Al swung down the sword and commanded the knight to start boarding Leo’s
ship. With the toll it took on his arm, Al frowned.
Seriously, he sure used some heavy sword huh.
280
With that in mind, Al started running straight toward Leo.
Al wanted to at least switch places inside a room but things were not that simple.
“GYAAAA!”
The Sea Serpent that was just sunk into the sea raised up with a deafening roar.
A lot of seawater rains on Al.
Everyone turns their attention toward the Sea Serpent. However, Al and Leo don’t.
Al slid down the slippery deck soaked with seawater and threw both the sword and its sheath toward
Leo.
Leo caught it without difficulty, he jumped at the Sea Serpent that came to attack the ship with its
mouth wide open and give it a heavy blow.
Leo precisely cut the Sea Serpent’s eye. It screamed out in agony and retreated.
When Leo landed back at the ship, he stood back to back with Al. At that moment, Al straightened back
bend down while Leo standing up straight. With the raining seawater, their hairstyles and clothes
were messed up, their differences were only that much. And thus they perfectly switched back.
“You are late……!”
“My bad. I got caught in some trouble.”
“I think that this is already troublesome enough though?”
“You are in for a whole lot of surprise. It will get even more troublesome than this.”
“Yeah, such good news……..”
As they are talking with each other, a frog-shaped monster is heading toward Al.
Al rotates counterclockwise and without saying anything, Leo gets in front of it and cuts it down in
one strike.
“You sure can swing such a heavy sword huh? I’m already prepared to get muscle pain tomorrow you
know.”
“You are exaggerating it. Weren’t you just carrying it around.”
“Nah, I did properly use it you know.”
“You only swing it once didn’t you? Won’t you take this opportunity to start training your sword
again? If you do that it would be easier for me too……”
281
“I don’t want to. And I will never switch places with you ever again. Spare me from that.”
“Did something happen? You didn’t do something weird while pretending to be me right?”
“I didn’t. I did a perfect impression of you that’s why I’m this tired.”
“The same goes for me. I also tried my best pretending to be Nii-san too you know.”
“The fact that you said you [tried your best] while pretending to be me is where you went wrong
though.”
While we were chatting, the knights were getting rid of the monsters.
Now, Al stretches while thinking that he will leave the rest to them. Returning to his usual languid
appearance, Al says that to Leo.
“Leo〜I will leave the rest to you. I will block more monsters from entering the port.”
“Yeah yeah. I just have to clean this up right?”
“So you know what to do. Elna will do something about the monsters that already entered the port so I
will leave the sea to you.”
“The usual huh. Well, whatever. Let’s do this.”
Saying so, Leo returns to the ship Al was riding on while Al remains on Leo’s ship.
With this, the two finally returned to their original positions.
“Your Highness. How long should we expand the defense line?”
“Leave that to the captain. I will be sleeping in my room.”
“Y, Yes?”
“Just do whatever you want. Leo will take care of everything anyway.:
“……Seriously. And I thought that he was a little more decent while His Highness Leonard was away
too……”
Hearing the captain’s muttering, Al grinned at Leo’s hard work and returned to the bed in his room.
In the end, Al’s ship wasn’t caught up in any battle after that and Al was finally able to enjoy slacking
off for the first time in a while.
282
Alliance Signed
I woke up when the loud noise of magic cannons firing already stopped.
The battle had already ended when I got up on the deck.
Leo and the others seem to be searching for any remaining monsters.
“If we are done then hurry up and bring me back to the shore. I want to sleep in the castle.”
“Haa……we are going back.”
Being tiredly looked at by the sailors, we headed to the harbor and I set foot on Rondine for the first
time.
Well, the harbor itself is not much different from Albatro. Albatro seems to be more prosperous
though.
While I was having that impression, Elna came over, jumping over the roof.
“Al!”
“Oh, Elna. Good work.”
Waving my hand at her, I say my thanks.
Judging by my surroundings, most monsters that got on land are probably already annihilated by Elna.
Almost all of the remains of monsters that are rolling around here and there looked like they were
slain with only one blow, that’s enough proof.
“I didn’t really have a hard time you know. The one who had it hard should be you right?”
“Yeah. I’m really tired right now.”
As expected of my childhood friend.
She immediately noticed that I’m the real Al.
To be able to see through me so easily like that, I really can’t underestimate her eyes huh.
With that in mind, I look up. In doing so, my position was one that can peek under Elna’s skirt.
Of course, I can’t see her underwear because of the black spat she is wearing. If it’s Leo he would be
complaining that her appearance is improper though.
“Oi, Elna. I don’t think climbing to a high place like that is a good idea you know?”
“What? Are you pretending to be Leo now? That won’t work on me you know?”
283
“No, well, if you don’t mind it then there’s no problem I guess.”
Elna doesn’t break her confident expression.
It seems she has absolute confidence in herself.
When she is that confident it’s only natural that I would want to break it right.
“It’s useless! I’m wearing it properly alright!”
“Ah, yeah….but it’s tearing though?”
All expressions disappeared from Elna’s face.
Then she shouts back at me with her slightly red face.
“I, I won’t fall for that you know!?”
“That’s why I told you that if you don’t mind then there’s no problem. But I got to say, your black spat
makes your light-colored underwear stand out you know?”
“!!??“
That was what decided the match.
Elna turns back and peeks at her skirt.
Elna basically prefers to wear white or light-colored underwear. I kept it vague to make her
misunderstand on her own but it seems she really fell for it huh.
“W, where is it!? Where did it tear at!? Al〜…….?”
“That was obviously a lie. Notice that already.”
Saying so, I nonchalantly head to the castle.
After this, Leo will greet the King again, he will probably ask to speak with me privately due to an
emergency situation. Or rather, that’s his only choice
I am free until then so let’s get some sleep at the castle.
“Al….? where do you think you are going?”
“That would be the castle.”
“You think I will just let you go?”
“You are in the position that you can do nothing but let me go right?”
284
This place was a battlefield until a moment ago.
She has no way to know when the monsters will be back again.
Leo is one thing but I have to quickly evacuate.
“You will be safe if you stay by side so just stay with me.”
“Bring your hand up to your chest and ask yourself. Have I ever been safe by your side? Until now I felt
like I almost died several times though?”
“It’s because Al always says something unnecessary! Seriously! Why do you have to make a lie like
that!?”
“It’s that you know. You seemed so confident so I wanted to mess with you.”
“That part about you is exactly like the Emperor….His Majesty often says the same thing too.”
“He’s my father after all. Well sorry, it’s my bad. But, it would be better if you wear some adventurous
underwear once in a while you know.”
“Mind your own business!”
She grabbed me by the collar and violently shook me back and forth.
Oh, the world is shaking……
When I thought about saying goodbye to my consciousness, she finally let me go.
In the end, I couldn’t move for a while so I ended up riding the carriage that was meant to pick up Leo
back to the castle.
—————————
“Wha, What!? The Sea Dragon has awakened!?”
“Yes, Your Majesty. Three of Albatro’s state-of-the-art warships have already been sunk. There is also
a possibility that the previous monsters attack was also related to that Sea Dragon as well.”
“If, if something like that has awakened then…..will my country be able to survive…..?
Watching the panicking King Rondine, I sigh in my heart.
When I finally thought that I can finally relax, Elna said that [Isn’t it fine if you guys switch places
again] and now I am speaking to the King of Rondine as Leo.
Sure, it’s faster to pretend to be Leo and get this done rather than explain all the details to him but….
I am still not convinced.
285
“Yes. Regarding that, the King of Albatro asked the Empire to bridge the relationship between the
Principality of Albatro and the Principality of Rondine. Your Majesty. Allow me to ask you this as the
Empire’s ambassador plenipotentiary. To combat this emergency situation, please set aside your past
conflict and join hands with the Principality of Albatro in the Anti-Sea-Dragon alliance. I promise you
that our Empire will support this alliance as well.”
“U, Umu…..but you see.”
“Is there any problem?”
“Will it really bring harm to my country?”
“I see. Certainly, I do not have any proof. However, I did encounter the Sea Dragon on my way to
Rondine. I managed to slip past it but then I found a Sea Serpent which is a creature that rarely
approaches the shore approaching your port. I suspect that the recent monster attack happened
because the Sea Dragon has entered your water.”
“B, But…..”
“The important thing is that the Sea Dragon’s range of activity also included Rondine’s water. Your
Majesty. What this meant is that the sea route to your country is now being blocked by a Sea Dragon.
This situation is surely disadvantageous for the Principality of Rondine is it not?”
If possible I don’t want to convince him like this but since I don’t know how long the King will keep
hesitating like this I will just explain how disadvantageous the situation Rondine will be in.
“If the sea route is blocked, you will only be able to trade using your land route. Although the
Principality of Rondine occupies about two-thirds of the peninsula, most of the gateways to the central
part of the continent are still being controlled by the Principality of Albatro. If they have control over
the land route then the one that will be at disadvantages here will be the Principality of Rondine, Your
Majesty.”
“Is, Is that true!?”
“Our Empire will have no way to support you once the sea route is blocked. Do you understand? If
Your Majesty chose to ignore the Sea Dragon’s threat now, it will be the same as accepting that
situation. Of course, I will not stop you if you are still confident that you can defeat Albatro in that
situation. However, I don’t know which side the Empire will choose to support at that time.”
With that final sentence, King Rondine’s face turned blue.
The Empire is a superpower. Just a hint that the Empire will make such a move will send most small
and medium-sized countries into a panic.
Even more so when the Principality of Rondine was trying to get help from the Empire. My words just
now might have worked better than I thought.
286
“U, Understood! We will accept the alliance. My country will spare no expense to help the Principality
of Albatro to combat the Sea Dragon.”
He finally made his decision.
The Principality of Albatro can now commission the Adventurer’s Guild.
Rather, they are probably put in a request already. They wouldn’t expect that we would fail after they
asked the Empire to intervene after all.
Now then, Arnold’s work is over with this.
I already told Elna and Leo that after I persuaded the King I will have them let me do as I please.
Rondine will probably send a fleet to assist Albatro to fight the Sea dragon but I will not accompany it.
It’s time for a secret maneuver after all.
287
Remote Consultation
“Then I will be going now.”
“Yeah, see you later.”
I say goodbye to Leo.
King Rondine finished preparing his fleet on the next day after he agreed to the alliance. He worked
fast. Such a difference in skill is probably the characteristic of the southern nations.
This time, King Rondine himself will personally head out to form a formal alliance with the
Principality of Albatro. Even with that said, he is probably thinking that it would be best to fight
against the Sea Dragon while it is still in Albatro’s territory.
“Al. will you be fine by yourself?”
Elna asks with a worried expression. She stubbornly prevents herself from looking at the sea.
So she still finds it scary from here huh.
Marc will be joining Leo this time. There is only the minimum personnel at my side.
But I don’t need any talented person to stay with me in Rondine.
“As long as you enter Albatro water, the Sea Dragon’s attention will be focused on the Principality
of Albatro. I can rest easy here for a while. Rather, I am more worried about you. Hey, Look. the sea is
so pretty right?”
288
“I, I, I will be fine!! If, if it’s a battle then…..L, Leave it to me. An, and like you said….the sea sure is pr,
pretty……it’s, it’s like I just jumped into a painting…….”
Just by looking at the sea from the harbor, Elna’s face gradually turned blue as she said that. Her eyes
are already dead.
I am almost certain that she will not really be that useful in battle.
Elna is better to fight on land. Well, Leo should already be aware of this so it will be fine even if I don’t
tell him myself.
“I will leave the rest to you. Follow up for Elna for me alright.”
“Yeah, leave it to me. Nii-san can rest easy here.”
“Right. I will leave the battle to you. Bring this to an end for me. It will be hard to return to the Empire
with a Sea Dragon lurking around after all.”
In that manner, I bid farewell to the two of them.
When the fleet disappeared from view, I returned to the room that was given to me inside the castle. I
want to go to sleep just like this but as expected, I can’t afford to do that.
Just in case, I created an illusion of myself sleeping on the bed before I leave the room through the
window.
My destination is the Rondine branch of Adventurer Guild.
289
Of course, I am not heading there as Arnold. I will be going there as Silver, using illusion magic to
falsify my appearance.
However, it will create a fuss if the general adventurers know that Silver is here so I will make them
sleep with magic before entering the branch’s office.
As every adventurer inside falls asleep, I head inside.
The receptionist which I left as an exception was still awake. However, she’s getting confused by what
is happening around her.
“Wh, Who are you…….!?”
“I am Silver, an SS-class adventurer affiliated with the Imperial Capital branch. I don’t want to make a
fuss so I made all the adventurers here fall asleep. Sorry if that scared you.”
“S, Silver? That famous adventurer?”
“I don’t know anything about being famous.”
Saying so, I showed my adventurer card to the receptionist.
The receptionist scarily accepted it and confirmed its content while raising a startling voice.
“Th, the real deal!?”
“That’s what I told you. Sorry but I want to use the remote communication room.”
290
Each branch of the Adventurer Guild has its own remote communication room.
It is a room with a special barrier erected by a crystal located at the center of the room which connects
to another remote communication room in the Adventurer Guild Headquarter and its other branches.
It is the Guild’s hidden technique that allows the Guild branches to quickly respond to monster threats
across the continent.
“Un, Understood! Please follow me this way!”
Only the Guild staff or S-class or above adventurers are allowed to use the remote communication
room.
Adventurers of S-class or higher that can fight toe to toe with high-ranked monsters are treated
exceptionally well among the Guild members.
The receptionist led me to the remote communication room and immediately connected the line to the
Headquarter.
Then.
“This is SS-class adventurer Silver. Please connect me to the Deputy Guild Chef.”
“Certainly.”
As expected of the headquarters staff. They are used to this.
Their responses are calm and composed.
291
After waiting for a while, the face of a bearded man appeared on the crystal.
Black hair and blue eyes. The name of this man who is suited to be described as [Nice Middle] is Clyde.
(TLN: Nice Middle is a JP slang for an attractive middle-aged man)
He was once an S-class adventurer who fiercely roamed through the continent. He is now retired and
acting as the Deputy Guild Chief at the Adventurer Guild Headquarters.
[[So, why are you calling me from the Southern branch?]]
“I just came here to see an acquaintance.”
[[An acquaintance huh. I’m surprised that you have someone you could call an acquaintance.]]
“I am a human too after all. I do have a few acquaintances. Putting that aside, I’ve heard a strange
rumor. Is it true?”
[[No use hiding it huh…..it’s true. There’s a formal request from the Principality of Albatro to subjugate
a Sea Dragon. Right now the Headquarter is in an uproar you know]]
“Supposed so. What rank did the Headquarter assign it to?”
[[They are going to put it at S-rank. But depending on how much destruction it will bring its rank
might rise to SS. if that’s the case then it will be turned into a top-level request that requires more than
one SS-class adventurers.]]
“Don’t do that. Even if they can defeat the Sea Dragon, the Principality of Albatro will be in ruin.”
292
Gathering multiple SS-class adventurers.
That is something even the Adventurer Guild wants to avoid. Although each one of them possesses
monstrous strength, they have no common sense.
If someone like that gathered, all living beings in the sea might perish along with the Sea Dragon, the
port town might be left in a state beyond recovery. The damage of that magnitude is a possibility.
[[I don’t want to gather them either. Sorry but since you are already in the area, could you defeat it for
me?]]
“Don’t treat me like I am your errand boy. I will be returning to the Imperial Capital to take care of
some business first. I will deal with it later.”
[[Is that so….it would be nice if you take care of it soon though.]]
“Is there any problem?”
[[……This information is a secret but somehow this matter has already been leaked to the Empire. It
seems they already started talking about some kind of intervention as well.]]
“If their intervention were successful then they would create a big debt for the southern countries
after all. But…..there’s a possibility that a secondary disaster may happen.”
Rather, it will definitely happen.
Even if they dispatched a fleet, they will just be sunk by the storm.
293
What the Empire can do is to dispatch their elites but if it comes to that, it would be better to leave it
to Elna who is already on the scene.
Perhaps what my father is considering right now is whether he should grant Elna the permission to
use the holy sword.
[[Exactly. Before the Empire come in and mess things up, I want the Adventurer Guild to deal with it
first.]]
“I understand your feelings but spare me from waiting around for a Sea Dragon that can show up
wherever and whenever it wants. If it showed up I will head over immediately. How does that sound?”
[[Well, let’s go with that. I will put in a word for you. Recently the Empire is a pain because of their
succession war. I don’t want to get involved with them if possible. Take care of it immediately when
you get the report of its sighting.]]
“I will be using my discretion then.”
I answered so and ended the communication.
A guild’s secret leaked to the Empire huh…..I got a bad feeling about this.
I think there’s someone trying to take advantage of this situation.
If I don’t prevent that then this might get messy.
I should return to the Imperial Capital once to check this out.
“Thank you. I will be excusing myself now.”
294
“Y, Yes!”
I thanked the receptionist and left the guild.
I guess I will head back to the Imperial Capital tomorrow.
Let’s confirm the situation with Finne and find out how the Empire is planning to intervene.
If the Empire is going to go all out then it wouldn’t be good to squash their plan as Silver.
The Empire and the Adventurer Guild, both of them have a reputation to uphold. It would be best to
resolve this while letting both of them save their faces.
“Well, I guess I will think about it after I return.”
I mutter so after I dispel the illusion and return to being Arnold.
In the worst-case scenario, Finne and the other might already be cornered after all. As I thought, I can
only find out for sure after I return and take a look myself.
“I hope that at least she didn’t do anything crazy though.”
Even if she looked like that Finne is quite reckless.
When we were fighting against the vampires, she climbed up the clock tower without any hesitation.
Even when she was falling, she prioritized the flute over herself.
295
She has a point in her personality where she doesn’t care about herself.
It would be great if that side of her doesn’t surface though.
I returned to the castle while worrying about her.
296
The one and only Sharer
Next morning,
I told everyone that I was sick and held myself up in my room.
Leaving an illusion of myself on the bed, now everyone who sees it will think that I am sleeping in my
room.
From there, I use transfer magic to move to a city near the southern border of the Empire and use it
again to go directly from there to the Imperial Capital.
The place I transferred to is Gramp’s hidden room.
There is a familiar face waiting there for me. But that’s not gramps. He is probably resting in his book
right now. He may only be in his thoughtform but it doesn’t mean that he stays awake all the time. If
he doesn’t take proper rest then his spirit might collapse.
“Welcome back.”
“Sebas huh. How did you know that I will be coming back today?”
“I do not. I just waited here every day.”
“Every day…..you are really diligent huh.”
“You can’t work as a butler unless you are diligent after all.”
Saying so, Sebas handed me a silver mask and a black robe.
297
While putting on Silver’s outfit, I ask Sebas about the current situation.
“How is it going?”
“The faction war is going well. Lynfia-dono was very excellent.”
“Is that so. It seems I made the right choice huh.”
“So it seems. But Finne-sama is a little……”
“Did Finne do something?”
From the way he speaks, it doesn’t look like Finne something happened to Finne herself.
If something happened to Finne, Sebas wouldn’t be so composed like this. While calming myself down
with that, Sebas gave me his answer.
“She had a meeting with the representative of the Ajin company on Lynfia-dono’s suggestion. Finne-
sama was able to convince their representative to cooperate with us but……..”
“But? I thought I told you not to leave her side right? I do trust Lynfia but it’s too early to put my full
confidence in her.”
“I am very sorry. I thought that if I go together with Lynfia-dono, the other side would be more
cautious of us.”
“….Whatever. So? How did Finne persuade their representative?”
298
“She has made herself a bargaining chip. She offered the right to do as they please with her and asked
them what they have in exchange. In the end, they folded without being able to present something of
equal value and easily complied with our demands. In exchange for their cooperation, they only want
to utilize Finne-sama’s name, an obvious request if I may say so.”
“Haa……”
Seriously.
She sure did something reckless.
I know that she was a child who doesn’t value herself but it is to that extent huh.
What would she do if they have something of equal value to offer.
“She’s really a troublesome child isn’t she.”
“That’s rich coming from you.”
An old man with a slightly transparent body suddenly appeared.
That’s my master as well as my great-grandfather. Gramps.
“What do you mean by that Gramps?”
“You always put your reputation as a secondary concern. That self-abandoning part about yourself is
the same as her isn’t it?”
299
“Leave me alone. Having a position like this makes it easier for me to move.”
“That girl is probably having a similar idea. I’m fine like this. It’s better that way. The world sure is
depressing isn’t it, Sebas. It is saddening when children can’t just be children.”
“Absolutely.”
The two old men sighed together.
Somehow, this is making me feel awkward.
It’s like I am the bad one here. Don’t mess with me.
“I would be able to live like a normal child forever if a certain someone changed the custom of the
succession war when he was an emperor though.”
“Well, if a wise emperor naturally born then it would be possible…..but that will never happen. That’s
why the succession war exists. It was made for those with the ability to be able to become an emperor.
It’s rare to have so many excellent candidates after all.”
He imposed such a logic.
The dissatisfaction that has accumulated inside me is about to explode but since nothing will come out
even if I let that out so I just head to the door without saying anything.
“Al.”
“What?”
300
“Don’t reproach the girl. You understand that right?”
“…..You don’t have to tell me.”
I have no qualification to lecture her.
I muttered in my heart while concealing myself with illusion magic and left the room.
—————
Leo’s room.
Even when I and Leo aren’t here, it is still Finne and the other’s base of operation.
That’s why I stood there, waiting for Finne.
Perhaps they just finished talking with our supporters, Finne and Lynfia returned to the room.
“ ! ? S, Silver-sama!?”
“Silver…….”
“Good day. Finne-sama. I have something to talk with you.”
“Y, Yes…..”
301
I turn my gaze to Lynfia.
Of course, Lynfia seems to be wanting to listen to the talk as well but I can’t allow that.
“Can you leave us alone for a moment? Adventurer woman, I met in Duke Kleinert’s territory.”
“I’m honored that you remembered me but right now I am acting as this person’s escort.”
“I want to talk with her alone. Give me some time.”
“….I am not doubting you but I can’t just say [Yes, alright] to this. Please forgive me.”
The never back down attitude of Lynfia is very dependable.
I wouldn’t entrust Finne to her if she is someone that would fold so easily.
But right now she is in the way.
While I was thinking that, Sebas threw me a lifeboat.
“Then allow me to stay here as her guard. Please don’t worry, I will not disturb you.”
“….all right.”
“Well then, Lynfia-dono. Can you remain standby in another room?”
302
“……If Sebas-san said so.”
With that said, Lynfia finally leaves the room.
After confirming that Lynfia left, Sebas moved to an adjacent room.
Now we are finally alone.
“Welcome back. Since you came back here, something must have happened over there right?”
“Well, a lot happened but….that’s a story for another time.”
“? for another time?”
Surprised, Finne curiously tilted her head
She’s probably thinking that there’s nothing to talk about other than that.
That is because the priority she set for herself is very low.
“…..I heard that you had a meeting with the representative of the Ajin company.”
“Yes! The negotiation went smoothly! Representative-san was also a good person as well.”
Saying so, Finne smiles.
303
It’s hard seeing her smile like that.
The reason for the bitterness I felt is obvious. It is like I am looking at my twisted self in a mirror.
I don’t regret what I have done. It was necessary and I will also do the same thing in the future as well.
But I am feeling guilty that I made the people around me feel like this.
“…..Hey, Finne. I know that this is not something that you should be hearing from me. You might even
hate me for this. Even so, I still want to say this to you.”
“Yes?”
“I want you to take better care of yourself.”
It’s like throwing a boomerang. Just how many times did Leo tell that very same thing to me? But I was
in such a position because I wanted to. I didn’t try my best and sacrifice myself for something like
Finne.
How will Finne respond to that?
I could easily imagine. But this is the thing I must say to her.
While thinking that this is tough, I continue speaking.
“It’s hard for me to see you put yourself so low like that Finne. I know that you only wanted to be
useful but you don’t have to try so hard.”
304
“….E, even so…..I….I want to be useful to Al-sama……..”
Finne mutters, her face is like she is about to cry.
Seeing her like that, regret grew inside me. I was inconsiderate. I thought that if I don’t complain or
make a fuss about it, it would be all right.
Finne has never been away from the Duke’s territory. It’s obvious that she will be lost when she comes
to the capital with me. Even so, she desperately wants to be useful.
I haven’t done anything for her in that regard. How many times have I taken her outside? Have I ever
let her have a break?
My head was only filled with the thought of the succession war. To be honest, I don’t have any such
leeway either.
The words of my mother crossed my mind.
You are always like this. That’s what my mother said when I left her at the inner palace.
At that time, I lightly brushed it away but maybe I have been reckless all this time.
I didn’t have time to rest but I should still be making one.
Had such a twisted situation continued, I might have lost Finne.
“Finne…..you are special.”
305
Saying so, I remove my silver mask.
The people who I can take off my mask in front of them are only Sebas and Finne.
Since Sebas knew from the very beginning the only person who found out my identity is only Finne.
“Al-sama……”
“The only people who I can show both of my faces to like this are only Sebas and you. Sebas is my
guardian, he is something like a parent to me. That’s why….the first person I can show my faces to like
this is you. The moment you know my secret, you are not just another person to me. Leo is my one and
only little brother and you are my one and only sharer. Nothing will change that. It’s fine just by
having you stay by my side. Having a person I can share my secret with like this, do you know how
much you make things feel easier for me…..”
That’s right. It was easier.
I may have been spoiled by her.
Realizing that made me feel even more guilty.
“I, I’m……..I’m not someone special like that…..I am not a great person like Al-sama or Leo-sama…..b,
but, since I know Al-sama’s secret…..I have to be useful to you……”
“Yeah, I was saved by you. Thank you. And sorry, I should have said this sooner.”
What I needed was happiness as a human being.
306
Even so, I didn’t tell that to Finne. That must be the reason Finne was so anxious about it. The fact that
she knew of my secret alone already put Finne under pressure.
That’s why she cares less and less about herself. She was only prioritizing the interests of our faction.
She must have thought that it would make me happy.
If I have to say it myself, that was despicable. I hate that part of my personality.
Hearing my words, tears fall from Finne’s eyes. It didn’t stop there, Finne covering her face with both
of her hands and started crying.
Finne is still a 16-years-old girl. Even if it was her own will, I took her out of her territory and got her
involved with the succession war where people do not hesitate to kill each other.
I have the obligation to take care of her mental health.
“Forgive me. I didn’t have room to think about you before.”
“Hic, Hic! It’s….not like that…..it…wasn’t…A, Al-sama’s…..fault…..”
“Then let’s make it our fault. Let’s reflect on it together.”
Saying so, I gently stroke Finne’s hair.
Finne is my one and only sharer.
307
We should reflect on it and be happy together.
I continued to stroke her hair until she calmed down.
Then.
“…..it’s….all right now….”
“Is that so?”
“Yes…..I’m fine now.”
With that said, Finne looked straight at me with her reddened eyes.
Her eyes are pure and strong. I can feel an immovable will from it.
“Please tell me…..what is happening in the south. I will help.”
“Yeah, I will be relying on you.”
Saying so, I started explaining the situation in the south to her without hiding anything.
The fact that the Sea Dragon will make its move soon. The fact that someone is trying to take
advantage of the situation in the empire. And the fact that they must be stopped.
308
“Well, that’s about it. There’s only one man who plans to run the army to intervene in the situation in
the south. It’s all right if he fails but the soldiers that will be sacrificed in the process are pitiful. I think
that the best course of action here is to minimize the scale of the Empire’s intervention and defeat the
Sea Dragon on our own.”
“Yes. I think so as well. So….I have an idea……a way to minimize the Empire’s intervention and save
the south.”
“What a coincidence. I also have an idea as well. The problem is whether we can persuade the key
person to do it or not. But I can’t do this myself. Can I leave that to you?”
“Please leave it to me. I will persuade them for you.”
At my request, Finne showed a soft smile and gracefully bowed.
309
The Fourth Prince Traugott
After I finished talking with Finne, I have Lynfia join us.
Lynfia noticed that Finne’s eyes were slightly red and turned a sharp glance at me.
“What happened?”
“A Sea Dragon appeared in the south. If I tell you that, how bad do you think the situation is?”
“S, Sea Dragon!?”
“Would Silver-sama be able to move without the request from the Adventurer Guild……”
“The situation is different from when I defeated the vampires in the east. The two southern nations
are starting to form an alliance. In this situation, if I intervene as an individual, it will make things
more confusing for them. In the first place, even if it has the same S class as those two vampires, the
Sea Dragon is much more troublesome to deal with than them. If I have to defeat it, I would want some
reinforcement.”
“It’s natural if your opponent is a dragon.”
Lynfia immediately understood the severity of the situation.
As expected of a fellow adventurer. Well, a dragon is so dangerous that you can understand that even
if you are not an adventurer.
“So what’s your aim here?”
“The holy sword user is in the south. If she can use her holy sword then she and I would be enough.
That’s why I want the Emperor to send out his proxy.”
“The restriction that the holy sword of the Amsberg family cannot be used outside of the Empire.
Where did you get this information? I didn’t know this until the princes told me though?”
“When you become an SS-class adventurer, you will get to know a lot of things that ordinary
adventurers wouldn’t be able to know. Will you be satisfied with that explanation?”
“Including the Empire’s state secret?”
“The restrictions on the holy sword are not state secrets. The Empire is not hiding them, the
information just isn’t that widespread. There are only a few opportunities to use it after all.”
“……I see. I understand.”
Lynfia still looks at me suspiciously but she gave up pursuing the matter.
She’s probably thinking that there’s no use trying to get it out of me now.
310
Rather than interrogating where I got that information from, it’s better to deal with the situation in
the south after all.
“Since you came all the way here, you must have something to ask of Finne-sama correct?. Is it really
okay for the upper crust of the Empire to intervene with the southern issues?”
“That’s a good speculation. Yes, that’s right. But somehow the internal secret of the Adventurer’s Guild
was leaked to the Empire so the Guild is also being cautious of the Empire’s intervention right now.
The Guild has no intention to let the Empire get involved in this but I personally want them to at least
give permission to use the holy sword. However, as it is now, the Empire will probably send out one of
the imperial family along with the army to intervene. That army is unnecessary. I want to get them out
of the picture if possible.”
“You are here to ask Finne-sama to do that? Just what kind of hand do you expect us to use?”
“The three candidates for the thrones are all nominating their names. The most likely to be sent out
here is Prince Gordon who is originally a general. Even so, the other two can also move the army as
well. I want to avoid that. What I want to happen here is the Emperor to give his permission for the
release of the holy sword and send a member of the imperial family as a proxy along with a few elite
guards to deliver it. If it’s only that much then I can bring them all along with transfer magic. This case
can be solved with only that much war potential.”
“In other words, you want Finne-sama to persuade another imperial family member besides the three
emperor candidates?”
As expected of Lynfia.
It’s very helpful that she understands things so easily.
When I nodded, Lynfia seemed convinced.
The question is who we should approach.
“The three who are actively participating in the succession war will never hear my proposal. They all
want to get credit when the holy sword user resolved the incident after all. They will surely want to
lead the force themselves. Even if the holy sword user succeeds, they will not be able to claim it as
their personal achievement in the end after all. Desirably, I want a prince who has not participated in
the succession war so far.”
However, there are few of such princes.
There are a lot of them who have connections with Eric, Gordon, or Zandra through their mothers.
Among them, there’s one that best fits that description.
“Then, His Highness the Fourth Prince is the most desirable person correct?”
“Yeah.”
311
She gave a pinpoint answer immediately.
She probably studied the current succession war huh.
She’s a hard worker.
The mother of the fourth prince is the Empress. In other words, he has the same mother as the Crown
Prince. With that being the case, he has nothing to do with the power squabbling of the inner palace.
He himself only has an interest in writing his book so he has no interest in the throne.
This might be a bad way to put it but he wouldn’t object to doing a simple task of delivering the holy
sword.
The question is will he be willing to head outside the Empire, not to mention to the place where a Sea
Dragon is rampaging for us.
This part will depend on Finne’s persuasion.
“Well then, let’s go.”
Finne said.
Her eyes motivated.
Now, let’s negotiate.
—————-
“Nah, don’t want to.”
A swift refusal from a large-framed man.
That said, his body isn’t a healthy fit body like Gordon. Well, his body size is quite close to him but his
stomach is much bigger.
He is the man with the biggest and the fattest body in the imperial family.
Anyway, his body is both big and round.
That is the Fourth Prince, Traugott Lakes Adler.
Blue eyes, brown hair and ugly pair of glasses.
The person that is the most looked down upon among the imperial family is probably me but the
person that is the laughingstock of the imperial family is probably him. Since our eldest brother was
that much of an Ikemen, everyone ended up wondering how he turned out like this.
“But, Your Highness.”
312
“Even if it’s a request from Miss Finne, what impossible is still impossible you know. And right now I
am in the middle of finishing my masterpiece too.”
Saying so Trau-niisan shows us what he is writing.
Politely receiving that, Finne gives it a light reading and closes it immediately. That’s right. It’s a
shame but Trau-niisan has no talent. Compared to that, he is more talented in horse riding and
swordplay. At the very least his motor nerves are better than mine. I wonder why……
Trau-niisan turns to look at the silent me.
“Are you perhaps Mr.Silver from the rumor?”
“Indeed. It’s my pleasure to meet you.”
“The request this time is from Mr.Silver, am I correct to assume that?”
“Mostly. In the situation that a Sea Dragon emerged in the south, It will be troublesome if the Empire
dispatch the army too after all. If it’s you, you can act as the Emperor’s proxy to deliver the holy sword
and head to the south with only a few elite guards.”
“I am exactly what you are looking for huh. But right now I am working on this masterpiece so please
allow me to decline.”
Trau-niisan might look like a fool but that doesn’t mean his mind is the same. Rather, he is the little
brother of that eldest brother of mine. He is not that stupid.
After fully seeing through my intentions, he used that stupid reason to turn me down.
Why is that……
“Your Highness! I beg you, please do this for the people of the south as well as the soldiers of our
imperial Navy!”
“I wanted to accept Miss Finne’s request but I am a member of the imperial family and the people of
the south are not my citizens. I don’t have any obligation to do anything for them you know. Moreover,
the soldiers all willingly doing their job, correct? There will be no end to it if you prevent them from
doing that just because it is dangerous isn’t it?”
A simple and to the point reply.
I wonder why he can’t write something like this in his book.
“That is…..”
“Please accept it. I don’t have any intention to move after all.”
“…..what are you going to do about your brothers in the south then?”
313
Finne still hasn’t given up after being turned down.
Knowing that he wouldn’t move for the people nor the soldiers, she brought up me and Leo.
This time there’s a bigger reaction from Trau-niisan.
“You put it where it hurts huh. But both Arnold and Leonard are already adults. They will do
something about it by themselves.”
“Then what about those who are not an adult? If you declined, I will have no choice but to ask this
from those who you must protect, Your Highness.”
Finne is probably talking about Christa and my youngest brother.
She is saying that if he refused her here she will have to get either one of them involved.
The moment he heard that Trau-niisan sharply stares at Finne.
“Are you going to threaten me with my brother and sister?”
“I don’t mind if Your Highness takes it like that.”
“….my youngest brother aside, Christa is the treasure of my imperial family. I will not let anyone send
that cute little blonde girl into danger. If something like that happened, it would inevitably be cursed
by all mankind.”
“Y, Yeah……”
That’s an exaggeration, he is saying something crazy again.
Moreover, he doesn’t care about his younger brother? He’s still 10 you know?
I almost let out a sigh but I managed to hold it in.
“But it’s also true that I am working on this masterpiece too……this is troubling.”
“If you are worried about your masterpiece then it’s all the more reason you need to move! From
ancient times, all the good writers have their fair share of great experiences! Isn’t this a great
opportunity that you can both help your little sister and gain an exciting experience at the same time!?
Moreover, if Your Highness saved the south your fame will definitely attract more fans to your work!
Won’t that be more beneficial than finishing your masterpiece!?”
Pressing for a positive answer, Finne lists all the things that would benefit him.
Hearing that, Trau-niisan is a little swayed.
And.
“Can I ask you one question? Miss Finne.”
314
“Yes.”
“Why would you go so far for this Miss Finne? Is it for the succession war? Or was there another
reason?”
“Do I need any reason other than saving the people who are important to me?”
That was a straightforward answer.
After hearing that, Trau-niisan was a little surprised and gave her a single nod.
“Precious, that’s precious. All right. That beautiful straightforward answer of yours. If that doesn’t
move me, I, Traugott, would be a shame as a man of culture. Those words, I have accepted it. You can
consider that to be my reward as well.”
Saying so, Trau-niisan stands up and pushes his glasses.
I have no idea what is going on but it seems something inside Trau-niisan must have been moved.
Thus, by Finne’s persuasion, we got ourselves the key-man.
315
Eva’s plea
Winding time back a little bit.
Leo who was accompanying Rondine’s fleet had arrived at the Principality of Albatro.
To not unnecessarily raise their caution, Only Leo and King Rondine’s ships enter the port and were
welcomed by King Albatro.
“I am glad that you came, King Rondine.”
“I can’t afford to stay still in this emergency situation, King Albatro.”
Saying so, they firmly shake hands.
It was a historic moment for the kings of countries that have long been in conflict to shake hands with
each other.
The fleets of the two nations which were staying vigilant of one another also relaxed a little after their
kings met without any incident.
Leo and Elna who met him for the first time are also relieved that they cleared the first step.
“It seems we somehow cleared the first stage huh.”
“Yeah. It’s about how we are going to fight the Sea Dragon from now on.”
Leo and Elna are following the kings to the castle while chatting with each other.
However, Elna suddenly turned back to look at the sea. Her hand had already reached for her sword.
She immediately pulled it out of the sheath.
“Elna!?”
“Men, be on the lookout! Protect His Highness and His Majesties! It’s coming!”
Hearing Elna’s order, the imperial knights move in to escort them.
Almost at the same time, a tornado formed out in the sea.
It formed at the center between Rondine and Albatro fleets and swallowed a part of both fleets in.
Everyone turned speechless at the sudden abnormal situation.
After swallowing about one-third of both fleets and turning them into mere wreckages, the storm
suddenly disappeared.
Then it came.
316
“The Sea Dragon Leviathan…..!?”
A Dragon with a long body wrapped up in beautiful blue scales that looked like they were formed with
clear water.
It has a pair of wings and arms. Its feet are probably submerged underwater. A dragon that adapted to
the sea. Its appearance was close to a snake but too big to be one.
Just the part that emerges from the water is already over 50 meters long. Everyone is shaken by its
figure that was much larger and more terrifying than the legend.
uninterested in those people’s reactions, Leviathan slowly opens its mouth.
And shoots out a giant water bullet.
It was incomparable to what one can create using normal water magic.
Immediately aware of the danger, Elna gave her order.
“Evasive maneuver!”
The captains trust in the imperial knight’s judgment and evacuate the kings who are standing nearby.
Elna also escaped with Leo. At almost the same time, the place where Elna and the others were
standing was hit but a ginormous water bullet.
Together with a loud noise, a huge crater was formed as if the place just got hit by a meteorite.
Looking at that, Leo and Elna’s faces turn pale.
It was not because of the danger to their lives. It was because they realized what would happen to this
city if they are going to fight against the Sea Dragon here.
“! Elna! Take command and evacuate the people!”
“Leo! What are you going to do!?”
“I will get out there on a ship! I have to at least lure it away from the city or this city will be
destroyed!”
“Don’t be reckless! What are you going to do with only one ship!?”
“I have to command the panicked fleets! They need a commander!”
“They are not our fleets you know!? Moreover, they were people who have been fighting each other
until recently if you do it poorly you will get shot in the back from the confusion you know!?”
“Nii-san took my place and created this alliance for me! I will not just sit back and watch it collapse!”
317
After he said that, Leo started running.
Elna tried to stop him but she couldn’t do it.
That is because the second water bullet from Leviathan is coming.
The water bullet is flying over her head into the city center, Elna has to deflect it.
The second water bullet landed near the first crater and created a new one.
“I wonder how long I can keep this up…..”
Elna mutters while looking at her numb right arms and her beloved sword.
If only she can use the holy sword while thinking so Elna started giving out instructions and evacuate
the kings and the citizens while defending them from the water bullet bombardment.
———–
“Captain! Start counterattacking!”
“Against that big thing, our cannons would only be like a pea shooter you know!?”
“Do it!”
“You are seriously an unreasonable person you know! WE ARE MOVING IN! PREPARE YOURSELVES
YOU BASTARDS!”
Receiving Leo’s order, the captain bring Leo’s ship into attacking position and fire their magic
cannons.
However, that doesn’t even leave a scratch on the dragon’s hard scales.
Still, Leo ordered his crew to keep attacking.
He then picked up the magic voice amplifier.
“To Rondine and Albatro fleets in the vicinity! I am the Eight Prince of the Empire, Leonard Lakes
Adler! We are luring the attention of Leviathan by attacking it right now! If there are still ships in both
of your fleets that are not afraid of the Sea Dragon, please follow our lead! Just a little bit is fine! We
need to lure it away from the port! Are there any ships that are ready to sink together with me!?”
One ship immediately responded to Leo’s call.
The moment they spotted Leo’s ship, they turned their ship toward Leviathan and moved in to
support Leo.
“Allow me to accompany you, Your Highness.”
318
It was the first ship that stopped Al when he was trying to enter the port.
The first one who noticed that was the captain of Leo’s ship.
“Your Highness! It’s the ship from that time!”
“That time?”
“It’s the ship that came to stop us when we were trying to enter the port!”
Informed by the captain, Leo remembered the story he heard from Al.
However, since Al had only said he had entered the harbor, Leo had no choice but to go along with the
talk.
“The ship from that time huh.”
If there were some special circumstances then tell me sooner, Leo grumbled inside.
Still, Leo also thinks that was just how his brother is. If Al did not tell him then it must be something
that he doesn’t think that it is absolutely necessary to tell Leo.
“There’s a lot he is not telling me huh.”
Muttering so, Leo is looking forward to hearing it from him.
Al has always been a great brother for Leo. That’s why it was always a pleasure for Leo to hear of his
amazing deeds. and tell them,
See, my brother is amazing right.
While thinking so, the ships from the Principality of Albatro are gathering around him.
As if to not lose against them, the ships from Rondine also started to join in.
Looking at that, Leo let out a huge sigh and gave out his commands.
“Brave ships from both countries, you have my gratitude. Commence simultaneous attack! Bring
Leviathan’s attention toward us!”
Thus, an improvised fleet began firing at Leviathan.
However, Leviathan’s eyes remained on Albatro’s capital.
Leo managed to inspire the ships to lure its attention to them but Leviathan continues to fire its water
bullets without caring.
At the port, Elna managed to change the bullet trajectory but that doesn’t mean that they just went
away.
319
The redirected water bullets land in deserted areas and terraform the building and the terrain in its
landing spot.
In that hellish picture, a girl wanders into the Adventurer Guild branch office. However, the branch
had already been partially destroyed and the staff was long evacuated.
Still, the girl heads into the branch office.
The remote communication room was in there. It was the place that they used to report the sighting of
the Sea Dragon a while ago. At that place, the girl, Eva, gets down on her knees.
“Please…..please……I don’t mind who it is…..please save my country…..if this keeps going, my country
will be destroyed……! The Sea Dragon will devour our people whole……! Anyone is fine…..Please save
our country……Please accept the request and defeat the Sea Dragon for us…..!”
Eva abandoned her escorts and separate from the other evacuating citizens and headed for this place.
She knew that the Adventurer Guild had a remote communication room that can contact other
branches. So Eva continues earnestly plead as if she is praying to God.
The only one she can rely on right now is the adventurers.
An SS-class adventurer from the Guild should be able to do something about this situation.
Thinking so, Eva keeps pleading for help.
This act actually is leaps and bound over Eva’s expectation as her pleas are being broadcast to all the
Adventurer Guild throughout the continent.
When the building was partially destroyed, the room has changed the broadcasting mode to the one
that transmitted the communication to all of the Adventurer Guild branches. Originally, it was a mode
used to make emergency reports of the occurrence of the highest rank crisis situation to all of the
Adventurer Guild branches across the continent. Right now Eva’s plea has been spread across the
continent.
Elva’s plea was not only heard by the guild staff but to all of the adventurers inside each branch.
After hearing her plea, some adventurers wanted to do something to help her but they have no way of
going to the south.
That is also happening inside the Imperial Capital branch.
“Damn it…..!”
“Can’t we do anything at all!?”
“Shut up! Even if we raised our voice here nothing will change isn’t it!?”
“What!? A woman is pleading for our help you know!?”
320
“And how does getting worked up like this going to help her!?”
The adventurers who were drinking their alcohol heard the girl’s plea for help and cursed their own
powerlessness.
They stopped cursing and drown themselves in alcohol, they are waiting for someone to raise their
voice.
However, Eva’s plea is still continuing in the meantime.
Because it was the mode that was designed for emergency, her voice is being broadcast throughout
the branch.
The staff also have a sad expression on their faces.
Meanwhile, a man entered the guild. He advanced inside the branch office and responded to her plea.
“I will be there right away. Wait for me.”
It was an unexpected response for Eva.
She never thought that someone would really respond.
Moreover, he said that he is coming right away.
As Eva was confused about what he meant, a crack form at the space near Eva.
From there emerged a man in a black robe and silver mask.
“Who….?”
“SS-class adventurer affiliated with the Imperial Capital branch, Silver. I am here to answer your
request.”
That voice was, of course, being broadcast to all the Adventurer Guild branches across the continent.
At that moment, many adventurers cheered upon the arrival of their representatives.
321
The Hero and the Masked Adventurer
“Don’t be a deadweight now alright? Masked adventurer.”
“That’s my line, Hero woman.”
“Haaaaa!? There’s no way I would be a deadweight right!?”
“Is that so? You seem to be struggling a lot just now though? How about you being honest and thank
me for bringing the Emperor’s proxy here for once?”
Elna’s shoulders shook at my provocative words.
Oh, she’s angry, she’s angry.
While enjoying such a reaction from Elna, I erected a defensive barrier and healing barrier to cover
the whole Albatro’s capital city.
Through Elna’s struggle, it seems that the area where the citizens were concentrated didn’t receive
any damage. However, there are still many injured people and those who are still haven’t evacuated
yet.
But right now they are calmer than before.
Because of Trau-niisan’s exaggerated speech when he gave Elna the permission to use her holy sword,
the people in the capital have been informed that rescue has arrived.
He probably didn’t aim for this to happen. Half of the reason for his speech was his hobby and the
other half was a performance to give his permission to Elna. It was Trau-niisan’s role to be as
exaggerated as possible and show the Empire’s prestige and presence so he just did it that way.
Still, it’s thanks to Trau-niisan that the confusion in the capital has been eased.
If he doesn’t have such a disappointing personality I would definitely want to support him to become
the emperor.
“Are you listening!? Silver!”
“Nn? What? Did you say something?”
“Ara, I see…..you want to say that my words aren’t worth listening to aren’t you?”
Elna smiles while her vein is popping up on her head.
I bitterly smile at her and ask her a question.
“Sorry about that. I was thinking about other things. So about that. Are you perhaps asking for the way
to defeat that Sea Dragon?”
322
“If you understand then give me an answer already. Do you have any plans? If you have none then, we
will go with mine alright?”
“Well, it’s not like I don’t have one but let’s see what kind of plan a hero came up with shall we. What
do you want me to do?”
“For now, you can focus on defending the capital and lure its attention to you. I will cut that dragon
down myself.”
“So I am the decoy huh. That strategy is so like you.”
While saying so, I step a little forward.
Perhaps she received that as my acknowledgment, Elna moves away from me.
[[To think that there would actually be a human who can receive my water bullet. I’m surprised.]]
“The same goes for me. Dragons are smart monsters. Why did you choose to come into direct conflict
with humans like this?”
[[Hmph, they forced me to fall asleep. If I can’t get them back for this humiliation then I will lose my
pride as a dragon. I am a Dragon that reigns over at the top of all living beings! Do you think I will
tolerate being looked down by humans!]]
“Pride huh…..worthless. Is that pride of yours more important than your life?”
[[You are saying that as if you can defeat me?]]
“I can. Don’t underestimate humans.”
At that moment, a large number of water bullets emerged in front of Leviathan.
It is not just a hundred or two. Is it meaning to say that it wasn’t being serious before?
[[Let me say it again. I won’t tolerate being looked down by the like of humans!]]
“Then let me repeat my answer. Don’t look down on humans.”
With that said, I deployed the same number of magic circles behind me.
Since it can’t beat me with a single blow, perhaps it is thinking that it can beat me in number.
“Don’t think you can defeat me with numbers now aren’t you?”
[[You damn human!]]
Countless water bullets and magic collide in the sky above the capital.
It’s like a battlefield.
323
A battle of attrition that lacks the decisive blow to finish each other off. If those are not enough then
Leviathan will add more water bullets and I will add more and more magic to keep up this exchange.
There are many colorful sparks scattered in the sky.
If seen by those who don’t know the situation, they might think that this is some kind of fireworks
show.
[[Kuh! Don’t get cocky!]]
Leviathan opens its mouth wide.
The water bullets so far were only something created using its power, they are not the special attack
of the dragons, the [Dragon Breath].
So it finally decided to use its trump card huh.
As those words came up in my mind, more and more water is being compressed inside Leviathan’s
mouth. It was compressed into a small ball, and from there, a water breath fired out like a beam.
I try to stack up my defensive magic to deflect it away but the water breath treated it like it was non-
existent as the water breath pierce through everything and continue toward me.
“Seriously!?”
After I quickly moved out of the way, the water breath passed through the place I was standing on and
easily pierce the mountain behind the capital.
“That was close…..”
Looking at that scenery, cold sweat started to form on me.
Piercing through my stacked up defense magic like that, isn’t that firepower too absurd?
Was it something like a super compressed water cutter? So that’s Leviathan’s version of the holy
sword huh.
It can cut and pierce through anything like butter.
If that’s the case then it would be a disadvantage to remain on the defensive. It’s better to go ahead
and finish this.
But as expected, that move can’t be fire repeatedly huh.
Leviathan starts to bombard me with water bullets again. I look up at the sky while defending against
it.
Elna is focusing her mind up there.
324
Looks like she is really intending to cut a dragon down huh. It’s been a while since I last saw Elna
being that focused.
But,
“Hurry it up will you……”
I complain while deflecting a ginormous water bullet that was incomparable to the one that was used
to aim at Trau-niisan.
However, such a voice cannot enter Elna’s ear now.
When Leviathan and I ceased our attack for a moment,
Elna dives down from the sky. Her target is, of course, Leviathan.
[[Don’t get carried away!!]]
Leviathan fires a water bullet at Elna but she just avoided it with minimal movement.
She then swings down her holy sword at Leviathan’s head.
Seeing the shining holy sword, Leviathan judged it as a threat.
Leviathan twists its body to avoid the approaching blade. However, with Leviathan’s ginormous body,
it couldn’t completely avoid it.
A chunk of its body was severely cut off along with its left wing.
[[Guohhhh! ! ? ?]]
With pain and surprise, Leviathan sank into the sea.
With the biggest opening, she should immediately do a follow-up attack to finish it off but….
“That woman…..”
Elna descended in an attempt to deliver a finishing blow but as I thought, she is still scared of water so
she performed a strange turn and rose back up to the sky.
I head to Elna’s side.
“So you really are useless at sea huh.”
“Shut up! Scary things are scary right!?”
Most of Leviathan’s body is submerged in the sea. The finishing blow can only be delivered from up
close. However, Elna couldn’t do that.
325
So she was that focused because of this? Well, if she can’t finish it in one blow, she has to get close to
the sea to finish it off after all.
Seriously, this woman…..
“Can’t be helped then. Let’s change our roles.”
“D, Don’t make fun of me! You act as the decoy and I will finish it off, I’m not changing that!”
While saying so, Elna didn’t even try to approach Leviathan.
As I tiredly sigh, Elna suddenly noticed something.
That is,
“Silver……why do you know that I’m not good around water?”
Ah……..
I accidentally talk with her casually like usual.
In his history as Silver, that was the most careless word he let slipped.
326
Oath of the Childhood Friend
“This is bad, This is real bad……!”
It was a few days after we defeated the Sea Dragon.
After they contacted me, I set sail from Rondine to Albatro port.
However, I had something that I am extremely worried about.
“How could I forget to tell him such an important thing……!”
That’s right, I forgot to tell something to Leo.
It was the fact that Eva fell in love with him.
There was too much to deal with at the time so I completely forgot about such a personal matter.
It’s Leo so I think he will somehow manage it but this is a love affair between a man and a woman.
This might be more troublesome than I thought. Moreover, Eva is a princess.
Apparently Leviathan appeared shortly after Rondine’s fleet arrived at the port. That means Leo and
Eva didn’t have the chance to talk at that point. However, it has been a few days since then.
Given Eva’s personality, there’s no way that she doesn’t make a move yet.
“I hope he kept a safe attitude somehow……..”
With that in mind, I landed at the Principality of Albatro. Since the setting is that this is my first time
here, I act like I am curiously looking around.
After that, Leo walked over to welcome me.
And beside him,
“Nnnn?”
Eva is having fun chatting with Leo.
What? What is going on here?
Why are they getting along like that? How?
Is this that thing? Does Leo think that women are naturally attracted to him?
Can I interpret this as he naturally accepted Eva’s attack? Does he think that this is only natural
because of how much of a handsome man he is?
While I was shaken by my little brother’s common sense, Eva came over to greet me.
327
“It’s my honor to meet you, Prince Arnold. I am Albatro’s first princess, Evangelina di Albatro. My
father is busy with his work so I have come to welcome you instead of him. Please feel free to call me
Eva.”
“Ah, Yeah, nice to meet you……”
“I’m glad you got here safely, Nii-san. I have a lot of things I want to talk with you but do you want to
get some rest first?”
“Yeah…..I was just a little shocked……”
With that said, I head to the carriage they prepared for me.
Apparently, Eva and Leo have something to do after this and went away somewhere.
Ahh, this is so sad.
“My brother is tainted…..”
“What are you talking about Your Highness?”
“Ah, Marc huh. Hear me out….Leo has become a womanizer…….”
“I want to know how you arrived at that conclusion but if I remember correctly, aren’t Your Highness
the person who made Princess Eva fell in love with him?”
“Hmm? You noticed?”
“Anybody would. She asked the knights about you and her expression was completely that of a girl in
love after all.”
“I see. So it was that easy to understand huh.”
That means,
I stare at Marc with a serious expression.
“Yes. I was the one who told Prince Leonard.”
“Oh, aren’t you capable?”
“Did you think of me as an incompetent?”
“It’s not like that. Ah, I see, I see. You really saved me….that was really weighing on my mind.”
“I’m glad that I can be of help. The next thing is something that I couldn’t do anything about so I’m glad
that I can relieve Your Highness of your stress with this.”
Saying so, Marc opened the carriage door.
328
Inside is the grumpy looking Elna.
For a moment, I thought about running away but there’s no chance I can get away from her without
using transfer magic so I gave up.
“….Marc. I’ve got more things to worry about now.”
“What would that be?”
“Hear me and be surprised. My life is in danger.”
“The usual then. If Your Highness’s life is in danger I will save you again so please don’t worry about
it.”
“It’s strange to treat that like usual isn’t it!? Moreover, you can’t save me if it’s an instant death right!?”
“It will be fine. She will go easy on you after all.”
Saying so, Marc pushes my back.
Without being able to resist, I was pushed inside the carriage and left alone with Elna.
“…..Y, Yo……..”
“……..”
Elna stays silent.
Seems like she’s totally angry huh.
I know why. It is probably because I told Silver about her Weakness.
Being silently stared at, I sat down in front of her with an uncomfortable feeling.
From what I see, it seems there is a soundproof barrier erected around us. This barrier is often being
used when you want to have a private talk.
While I was thinking that is going to be a long talk, Elna opened her mouth.
“Do you have anything to say?”
“Unn, are you hurt?”
“ !? th, there’s no way I would be right! Who do you think I am!?”
Elna shouted with a slightly flushed face.
“he messed up my pace……..”
It seems like she didn’t expect me to say that as she started to mumbles in a small voice.
329
“Even you can get hurt right? Of course, the chances are very low when you fight against a normal
person but this time the main battlefield was the sea right? That’s why I was worried. I might be a
busybody but I asked Silver to look out for you. If you don’t like that then I will apologize. Sorry. But
the only one who would worry about you is only me, right? You are my important childhood friend so
at least let me worry about you.”
“….What’s that…..that’s unfair……If I get angry at you now, it will be like I have a short fuse isn’t it.”
“No, you really are short fuse right. What are you saying after all this time.”
“Al〜? I will cut that tongue out if you keep saying something unnecessary you know〜?
“Yes ma’am…..I won’t say any unnecessary things anymore……”
Elna slightly pulled her sword out and intimidated me with a smile.
Her intimidation power is like that of a dragon roar, any faint of heart person would surely faint if
they have to face the current Elna.
However, contrary to the scared me, Elna has a beaming smile on her face. And she was all grumpy
when I got on this carriage too.
Right now she seems to be in a good mood.
“Well whatever. I will let slide the fact that you told that masked adventurer about my weakness. But,
the thing that made me mad wasn’t that you know? Do you know what I want to say?”
Saying so, Elna stares straight at me.
Until now she may have intimidated me but I felt like she was sulking. However, it is different now.
Receiving her anxious and slightly angry gaze, I sigh.
“How much did Silver tell you?”
“He said that you guys are conspirators. Since you told him about my weakness, you must have trusted
him quite a bit right? Just what are you guys planning to do?”
“…..Do I have to say it?”
“Yes, you do. If you don’t I won’t let you off this carriage.”
“Is that so…….couldn’t be helped then…….I and Silver have the same goal of making Leo the emperor
and we are both moving behind the scenes for that.”
“Behind the scenes……?”
330
“Yeah, It’s the secret maneuver you so despised. I use my status as a member of the imperial family
while he uses his status as an SS-class adventurer. From time to time we use it to increase our ally by
acting like our encounter was an accident. We recruited Duke Kleinert with that method as well.”
Elna knows that I am trying to make Leo an emperor.
Of course, she knows that we have been fighting against the other three factions as well.
However, she only thinks that I worked as Leo’s assistant.
Apart from that, Elna wouldn’t even think that I have been moving behind the scenes with the help of
an SS-class adventurer. Right now, Elna turned speechless.
“I was in contact with Silver when the vampires attacked us in the east as well. This time too. He has
been moving around to support Leo. But if Leo has a direct connection with Silver it will be too
conspicuous. My role is to conceal that connection.”
“…..Does Leo know about that?”
“I did tell him about it but he doesn’t know about the behind the scenes stuff we did. This time Silver
was actually in the south from the beginning. Even so, I asked him to go to the Imperial Capital to use
this to our advantage in the succession war. He made contact with Finne and stopped the other three
from getting the imperial military involved. in other words, I prioritized the succession war first and
caused many citizens to be sacrificed.”
“…..You did that to stay alive right? Do you really…….do you think that your brothers and sisters are
going to really kill you and Leo?”
That was Elna’s final confirmation.
I once told Elna about it but there were still doubts in her mind. About the fact that I almost got
assassinated, there was still some doubt in her mind that made her think that it wasn’t a serious
attempt on my life. She thinks that maybe it was just an act to intimidate me.
At the very least that was her thought when she was with us. In other words, there were no such
things when the Crown Prince was still alive.
Eric worked hard alongside the Crown Prince, he wasn’t an Elder brother who would consider
murdering someone. Gordon was an honest man, a straightlaced warrior. Zandra also worked hard as
a mage as well.
That’s right. That time, things were peaceful.
However, the throne was freed when the Crown Prince died. The ambitions of the three who had been
held down by a giant lid called the Crown Prince overflowed.
After years of fighting among each other, they all lost their kindness.
I can affirm it.
331
“They will definitely kill both me and Leo. Everyone around us too……that’s why no matter what hand
I have to use, I will make Leo into an emperor. I told you at the festival, right? Don’t get involved. You
almost crossed a dangerous line. If you continue to help us any more than this then the Amsberg
house will be considered their enemy as well. Are you fine with that?”
“……The Amsberg can’t be involved in politics…….I have been taught since I was young that we only
live as a sword.”
“Yeah. That is wise. For better or worse, the Brave house is too strong.”
“But…..I’ve decided, Al. This is something I have decided to not forsake since long ago.”
“What is that?”
Elna takes a deep breath.
I feel like she is going to say something outrageous.
But I can’t stop her.
I have never been able to stop her since a long time ago.
“I will not abandon Al. I swore this since I was a child. I will never break that oath even if I have to go
against His Majesty. If you seriously want to put Leo on the throne then I will cooperate with you. If
you are willing to do anything then I’m willing to do the same. If my house got in my way, I don’t mind
throwing my surname away either. This oath is more important above everything else.”
“……you disqualified as an imperial knight you know. Will you be fine even if you can no longer be the
heiress of the Brave house?”
“I am quite stubborn you know. You should know that well, right?”
“I guess…..honestly, I’m thankful that you are willing to go that far to cooperate with us but I want you
to lay low for a while longer. If the Brave house openly takes our side, our faction will end up
becoming the most prominent one. If that happens they will definitely go all out to attack us.”
“That much I understand. I will cooperate with you while being careful not to get found out.”
“I think that is impossible for you though.”
“Don’t treat me like I’m stupid! I can do it properly alright!”
Saying so, Elna puffs up her chest.
No matter how I look at it, that figure of her is unreliable at all.
But, that’s alright.
Elna is a sword. It is up to the person who wields her (Me) how well she performs.
332
“Ok! That was refreshing! If that’s already decided then let’s do our best together!”
“I just told you not to do that though……..”
“It’s alright being a little enthusiastic right. Ah, that’s right. Since I already become your cooperator
you can’t keep any secret from me okay. You don’t have anything you are hiding from me right? If you
have then spill it out now. I will forgive you this time.”
“Unnn….Ah. I did give you a pearl when you became an imperial knight right?”
“Yeah, you were running around all over the place to buy it for me weren’t you?”
“Actually, it was a pain so I made Leo buy it for m—- GOHOH!?”
“You are the worst!”
Being punched in the gut, I fainted inside the carriage.
Didn’t you said that you would forgive me…….
I can’t put those words to my mouth.
While frowning at the pain, I am relieved that I managed to hide the important part from her.
Somehow, I managed to hide the fact that Silver and I are the same person and gained her full
cooperation.
333
Steadfast Resolution – First Part
Eleven years ago.
At that time, the Empire was at war with the Kingdom of Perlan.
At the same time, the Sokal Empire in the east had invaded and destroyed the Dwarven nation located
adjacent to the Adraxia Empire.
Many dwarves fled to the Empire and some of their royal families were under the Empire’s protection.
However, the Sokal Empire’s aim wasn’t gold and silver the dwarves had accumulated but the
smithing skill they had amassed so they have issued several warnings to the Empire.
The Empire’s response was [It’s impossible to completely bar the immigrants] but the Emperor of the
Sokal Empire had run out of patience and dispatched his son as the ambassador to the Empire.
“This has become quite a problem hasn’t it.”
“Totally.”
Emperor Johannes nodded to the words from Franz, his Prime Minister.
The three largest nations of this continent are the Adraxia Empire, the Kingdom of Perlan, and the
Sokal Empire. Geographically, the Empire is sandwiched in the middle of the two countries.
Getting in conflict with the Sokal Empire while they are at war with Perlan is something that the
Empire absolutely wanted to avoid.
“If we revoke our protection of the dwarves, the demihuman across the continent will turn into our
enemies. Of course, that also applies to the demihumans living inside our Empire as well. If that’s the
case then we can not afford to be at war with other countries anymore.”
“So we have to choose between antagonizing the Sokal empire or the demihumans huh.”
“That is not necessarily true. If we hand over the Dwarf’s Technique the situation should be able to
calm down for the time being.”
“What should we hand over then?”
“The Sokal Empire is a magical superpower. However, they have a shortage of jewels production that
is dispensable for their development of magic tools. In particular, they are severely lacking in huge
jewels that are necessary to develop magic weapons.”
Jewel is a general term for ores that have the capability to store magic power. With its magic power
storing property, it is a valuable material that can be reused even if you depleted the magic power
stored inside.
334
The amount of magic power that can be stored is proportional to the size of the jewel. The larger a
jewel, the higher the capacity.
“Are you saying that I should just hand it to them? I don’t like it. Do we really have to show such a
weak attitude toward them? We only gave asylum to those who have fled from them right?”
“Yes. We have to do that to avoid engaging enemies on two fronts. Fortunately, our country doesn’t
have any trouble with jewel production. With that being the case, giving them what they want in order
to avoid the war is a cheap price. It doesn’t like we are handing our mines either so there will be no
harm to our country.”
For more than a hundred years, the Sokal Empire has been digging jewels at the mine inside their
territory to develop magic tools and as a result, the amount of jewels that can be mined has decreased
year by year.
On the other hand, the Empire did not focus on mining jewels and with the existence of excellence ore
veins inside their territory, the Empire doesn’t have any problem with their jewel supply.
“Feeding them some scraps to shut them up huh. Well, I don’t want to put anymore burden on our
military as well.”
“Exactly. Let’s hand them the huge jewel and silence them for now. The western front is also in a
stalemate so we might be able to have a cease-fire with them soon as well.”
“Alright then. We have the upper hand anyway. The Kingdom will probably agree to our proposal.”
Saying so, Johannes and Franz concluded the talk.
——————————————————————-
The day has come when Franz prepared the huge jewel and head to welcome the ambassador.
On that day, a girl was visiting the castle.
That cherry-colored hair girl was the six-years-old Elna.
Brimming with curiosity, Elna had too much time to spare as her father was having a conversation
with others and went away on her own.
“Eh?”
When she noticed, Elna was in an unknown place.
She looks around a little but there is nothing she could recognize around her.
Well, there’s no doubt that I am still inside the castle. Thinking so, Elna headed out to find someone
she could ask for directions.
Then, she found a small hole in the castle wall. It was big enough for a small child to pass through.
335
Hidden behind bushes, it looked like an air vent but it looked somehow well-maintained as if it was an
entrance to a secret base.
Her curiosity piqued, Elna crouches down and infiltrates the vent.
After going through the darkness for a while, she arrived in a dark room.
The closed-off room was illuminated by a faint glow and Elna soon realized that she was standing in a
treasure vault.
“Uwaa…….”
The place was much larger than the treasure vault at the Brave house and there are various treasures
inside.
Then Elna spotted a certain thing.
“A magic sword!”
Magic swords are weapons that can exhibit magical power like fire or wind.
In addition, what was placed inside the treasure chest was not a modern magic sword but an ancient
one.
Elna takes it up with one hand and pulls it out of its sheath.
Elna was spellbound by its intense gleam and sharpness and try swinging it around several times.
“Unnn! This is a good sword!”
The sword is too long for a child like Elna to wield but she’s still one of the Brave house. She could
easily handle it with her physical ability.
Fond of the sword’s performance, Elna began to test it out with her swordplay.
Even if it’s a large treasure vault, what would happen in a place with so many valuable treasures if
someone started to do something violent inside?
Elna who was absorbed in testing her new sword didn’t think of that.
“Ah…..”
The sword she swung sideways crashed on to a box covered with cloth.
The box was cut in half by Elna’s sharp slash. Moreover, the magic power released from the box
destroyed the magic tool that was illuminating the treasure vault and the light goes out.
In the darkness, Elna heard a *Gongz* sound and her heart started to get cold. After a while, Elna’s
eyes become accustomed to the darkness.
336
Peeking inside the box, there were two parts of giant jewels that were cut in half, its size was larger
than a person’s head.
I cut down something in the treasure vault.
When Elna realized that she panicked, she tried to put it back together but it was clean-cut and it was
impossible to fix it.
After a while, Elna started crying because of the feeling of helplessness and anxiety.
“U…Uuu….Hic……Otou-sama—…….”
“Hm? Is someone there? Wa, Why is it so dark.”
At that time, a boy came in through the vent she had entered through.
Black hair and black eyes. It was the seven years old Arnold.
Al was surprised because there is a guest in the place he usually used as his personal hideout and by
the complete darkness inside but he soon noticed that a girl was crying.
“Are you crying?”
“Uu…hic…..”
Al who is blinded by darkness has no idea of the person who was crying inside the vault.
He only knew that it was a girl who was about the same age as him.
Al was groping around to advance forward but soon he realized that something was broken.
“Quite flashy huh….isn’t this the rumored jewel.”
“Je, wel……?”
“Yeah. it seems that it was intended to be a gift for the ambassador.”
“Am..bassador…..? UuUu…?”
“Ah–! Don’t cry! I will do something about it.”
He only said that to calm down the young girl.
He simply thought that it would be troublesome if the girl kept crying anymore than this.
However, the situation turned for the worst.
“This way. Ambassador-dono.”
It was the Emperor’s voice.
337
Al was panicked for a moment but he immediately understood the situation and sent Elna to the vent.
“Hurry up and get in! Run!”
“But…..”
“Quickly!”
Although he was still young, Al knew that the situation was very serious.
The Emperor came here to personally show the jewel to the ambassador. If he knew that it was
broken he would definitely be furious.
There might be some leniency for a prince but he has no idea what the punishment will be if he knows
that the culprit is an unknown child.
Considering the worst, Al quickly made Elna escape through the vent.
When Elna finally got out, the door to the vault opened.
Al sighed at the thing that will happen from now on and take a deep breath in preparation to face it.
“This is the treasure vault of our Empire. The jewel is…….Nn?”
“I am very sorry! Father! I broke it!”
Al immediately bowed and apologized to the Emperor who has no clue what is going on.
The Emperor and the ambassador along with the people in their surrounding couldn’t understand
what’s going on for a moment.
There was a prince in the treasure vault that was supposed to be tightly guarded with a jewel that was
broken in half beside him.
No one spoke a word. They had no courage to say anything before the Emperor.
It was not just that. No one dared to look at the Emperor’s expression.
The Emperor slowly walks toward Al.
“Did you really do it? Arnold.”
“Yes…..”
“Really?”
“Yes, I did it.”
Al raises his face and answers.
338
That’s why only Al knew that the Emperor had a complicated expression on his face.
The Emperor closes his eyes and slowly takes a breath in.
Then.
*Pan* a dry sound of something being hit echoed.
“You! Damn fool! That jewel was a sign of friendship Between Adraxia and Sokal you know!? Why did
you break it!? Have you no awareness as a prince!”
“………I’m sorry……..”
Holding down the pain in his cheek, tears started accumulating in Al’s eyes.
However, he did not cry.
He thought that he must not do it.
Because he knew.
That Elna still hasn’t left yet.
That’s why Al didn’t cry. He thought that she might come back if he started crying.
On the other hand, when Elna saw Al being hit, she cried even harder.
Doesn’t know what to do, she was honestly thinking about admitting her fault. However, the
Emperor’s wrath scared her and she couldn’t move.
“Someone! Put this idiot son in prison! Don’t let him out for a week! I don’t want to see his face!”
“……I’m sorry………”
Al only apologizes and doesn’t defend himself.
Elna who had watched Al being taken away realized that she couldn’t do anything and ran out of the
vent.
Crying, she ran through the castle and finally found her father.
“Elna. Where have you been?”
“Otou-sama! Otou-sama! The prince! The prince is!”
“Wait. calm down first. Settle down and tell me what happened.”
Being told by her father, Elna explained the matter while crying her eyes out.
339
Seeing her father’s expression which gradually got cloudier and cloudier, Elna’s heart was filled with
anxiety.
340
Inspector
In the throne room, the Emperor and his children have gathered.
There, Leo reports on the events that happened so far. Just in case, I silently kneeling behind him.
“After the defeat of the Sea Dragon, the Principality of Albatro and the Principality of Rondin have
reaffirmed their alliance. The conflict in the south should calm down for the time being.”
“Umu, good work. It seems like I gave you a much harsher work than I thought. Still, you have shown
me how skillful you are when you resolved the incident.”
“Thank you very much.”
Father looked satisfied as he praised Leo.
Well, that’s only natural.
We don’t have to deal with the southern conflict anymore and the Empire’s reputation has grown with
the defeat of the Sea Dragon.
The Principality of Albatro has officially stated that they want to have a diplomatic relationship with
the Empire as well. There are only good things coming out of this incident.
And everything is credited to Leo.
“It seems I have to give you a reward. Leonard, do you have something you wish for? With such an
achievement, you can even ask for a minister position you know?”
At that moment, the faces of the ministers together with our elder brothers and sisters froze.
Eric is the only imperial family member who holds a ministerial position and Father just said that he
would give a position with equal power to Leo.
This development is surely unpleasant for Gordon and Zandra whose factions want to install their
own minister into the government.
Eric’s expression doesn’t change but the gaze behind his glasses is colder than usual.
However, gaining a half baked power like that will stir up unnecessary trouble, we might be the target
of an assault from all sides.
The Minister of Industry is already ours. There is no need to go out of our way to get another such
position. I have already talked with Leo about that.
“I am grateful for Your Majesty’s offer but the current me is still not suitable for such a position.”
“I see. Is there anything else you wish for?”
341
Father also can’t afford to not give any reward to him either.
If he doesn’t do that, he can no longer award any achievements that are inferior to Leo. Those who
offered to be rewarded would also have to decline because Prince Leonard has declined his after all.
“Yes. Before I left on the mission, I was asked by a girl from the southern region to look into the
incident at her village. I told her that I couldn’t do it right away because I have to leave the country as
an ambassador but since I have safely come back, I want to help her.”
“Hou? You want another work to do huh. You really are hardworking. Don’t you think so too? Arnold.”
“Yes. I can’t imitate him at all.”
“Fuh, that might be true. So? What is the incident that she wants your help with?”
“It seems that the people of her village have been kidnapped.”
“Why didn’t she go to the local Lord, why did she come directly to you?”
“…..She said that the Lord didn’t move even after she had reported the incident.”
“What?”
The face of the Emperor who was in a good mood up until now immediately turned sore.
Eleven years ago.
Father accepted all immigrants as citizens of the Empire against the demand from the Sokal empire. In
other words, the various villages of all races inside the Empire have been accepted as the Empire’s
villages since then.
“When was that village built?”
“Since the girl said that she was born in that village, the village should already exist more than eleven
years ago.”
“Those damn fools! They dare ignore my decree!?”
The enraged emperor rises from the throne.
Everyone inside the throne room kneeled down and bowed to the Emperor.
Prime Minister Franz tried to calm him down.
“Please calm your anger, Your Majesty.”
“How can I be calm with this!? Eleven years ago I issued a decree to all the lords! I told them that all
the immigrants are to be considered citizens of the Empire! And now that they have blatantly ignored
my order!? To ignore my decree is the same as looking down on me!”
342
“We still haven’t made sure of that yet. That’s why Prince Leonard said that he wants to investigate
this matter.”
“No! I will personally lead the investigation myself and if it’s true I will take the head of those lords!”
“The country can’t run itself while its emperor personally intervening in a problem at the frontier.
Please leave this matter to Prince Leonard, Your Majesty.”
Franz’s advice managed to calm the Emperor’s wrath.
I thought that this would conclude with Leo being ordered to investigate the southern region but
instead, two people nominate themselves.
“Your Majesty. Leonard was just done with his mission. Please leave this matter to me.”
“No, Your Majesty. Leonard just came back and Zandra is a girl, please leave this to me, I can handle
this matter. My body is getting frail from being idle for so long. I will show them the meaning of
imperial law.”
The first to nominate herself was Zandra. Of course, the southern region is where Zandra’s mother’s
family has a strong influence. If anything happens in the south, Zandra’s faction will have a lot to
suffer.
On Gordon’s side, he only wants to make some achievements soon. Gordon is a general but without
war, there is no way for him to exhibit his military talent.
However, they both should have take Father’s mood into consideration first.
“You two! Are you intending to use this to your advantage in the succession war!”
Saying so, Father’s wrath got ignited again.
They were too reckless to get their achievement. The immigrant problem is something that Father has
always been worried about.
Just because the Emperor has decreed so, it doesn’t mean that everyone would recognize the
immigrants as imperial citizens. Apart from the Imperial Capital and its surroundings, discrimination
against these immigrants still exists, especially in the frontier. The stories of Lynfia’s village are not
that uncommon.
What was unusual this time was that Lynfia came to the Imperial Capital herself with the idea that if
this matter can be resolved somehow if it reached an ear of someone from the imperial family.
And that is exactly it. This is the problem that directly involved Father’s pride. Father’s impression of
anyone who can resolve such an incident would definitely improve.
“This is not your problem, this is mine! I won’t let you use it for the succession war! Fools! Zandra!
Your mother is from the south! You may be deeply involved in this! Gordon! You have always use
343
brute force to solve your problem so there’s no way I can leave such a delicate matter like this to you!
Use your heads a little, Both of you!”
“ “ We, We are sorry……” “
The two stepped down with Father’s reprimand.
Because Father was quite angry at them, he exhaled to calm himself down first before he looked at
Leo.
“Leonard. I appoint you as the inspector. Thoroughly investigate this matter.”
“Yes, Your Majesty!”
“Do not make any compromises. Drag out all their sins to the open. Kidnapping is a serious crime in
the Empire. Ignoring them is also a crime. Don’t show any mercy to anyone involved.”
Father ordered Leo with a strong tone.
Peeking at Zandra, I saw an anxious expression on her face.
With how she looks, Zandra’s mother’s house is probably involved. If what Lynfia said is true and the
local lords are involved in these kidnapping cases then it means that Zandra’s mother’s house is
probably behind it.
This is a very difficult case but if we can solve it then that alone will give a strong blow to Zandra’s
faction.
She can start regretting that she couldn’t crush Leo’s faction when we were away right now.
With this, Leo will become an emperor candidate both in name and in reality. More people will come
to his side and our faction will not be crushed so easily.
Our foundation has solidified and from now on it is the real battle.
“That’s all for the meeting. Everyone is dismissed.”
When Father said so, I was about to leave the place.
But.
“Arnold. Stay behind for a bit.”
“Yes?”
“Stay.”
“Yes…..”
344
Why me alone……
With that in mind, I stay behind inside the throne room.
Then, only me, my father and Prime Minister Franz remained inside the throne room.
As I wondered what he was going to say, Father opened his mouth to say something for a few times
but he gave up and threw the matter to Franz.
“I leave it to you! Franz!”
“Didn’t you say that you are going to say it yourself.”
“Whatever, you say it!”
“Haa…….Prince Arnold. The reason we want you to remain here alone is that there’s a matter
involving Her Highness the First Princess who is now at the eastern border.”
“Is there something wrong with her?”
“Actually…..we have received a marriage proposal for her.”
“I refuse.”
Hearing my immediate refusal, Father and Franz have a miserable expression on their faces.
Seriously, no one would expect such an expression coming from the Emperor and Prime Minister of
the Empire.
“Pl, please don’t say that…..His Majesty only has three daughters. Her Highness Christa is still too
young and Her Highness Zandra keeps saying that she will never get married.”
“That’s why it’s just ridiculous to propose marriage to her. She is the marshal who is in charge of the
entire eastern front you know? Our Empire only has three marshals right? The only person who can
give her order is Father alone you know?”
“Even so, if things keep going on like this she will never become a bride! She is already twenty-five you
know!?”
“If you think so then why don’t you tell her yourself?”
“I’ve already sent out a lot of letters! And she refused it every time too! She said that she will quit
being a royalty if we forced a marriage on her you know! That ungrateful daughter.!”
“Isn’t it fine even if she doesn’t want to get married…….”
“I’m her father! I have a duty to worry about my daughter’s future! Listen here, Arnold! You are on
good terms with Christa and that elder sister of yours like you too. Write a letter to her and convince
345
her to come to the capital. If you can’t convince her then you have to go to the eastern border
yourself!”
That was quite an unreasonable order.
If you are going to do that then can’t you just order her to come here as an emperor?
I do understand his reason though. He doesn’t want to be hated.
My eldest sister and Christa are the daughters of my father’s beloved second consort. In particular, my
father can’t be too harsh on my elder sister who looks almost identical to the second consort.
I sighed and gave him a nod like there are no other choices but to do so. Rather, there’s nothing I can
do here except nodding.
Aaaaaah, I feel like things are going to be troublesome again.
346
The Second and The Fifth Consort
“A marriage proposal for the First Princess?”
“Yeah, It’s so troublesome.”
When I returned to my room, Finne greeted me with sweets and tea.
I heave out a huge sigh as I pinch up one of the snacks.
“I have never met her before but I have heard some rumors. The Princess General who has made many
military achievements on various battlefields. Her fame has even reached other countries, some even
say that she is the Empire’s strongest as well.”
“That’s not an exaggeration you know. In fact, five years ago, Sokal’s invasion was stopped because
she was guarding the eastern border at the time. She fundamentally reformed the border defenses and
made them stronger than ever.”
“She’s an amazing person, isn’t she. What’s she like as a person?”
Finne asked as she poured tea into the empty cup.
While thanking her, I sip the tea and think about my elder sister’s personality.
Hmmmm………….
“If I have to use one word to describe her then it would be a soldier I guess?”
“S, Soldier……?”
“Yeah, a soldier. Not a knight but a soldier. She is the embodiment of that word.”
“I can’t imagine what she’s like at all…….”
“I think you will see when you actually met her. She’s not a knight like Elna you know. She’s a soldier.
Her lover is the battlefield. She doesn’t have any beautiful ideal like a one on one battle either. She’s
fine with anything as long as she can win. She is very thorough about that. When our eldest brother,
the Crown Prince died, she even declared that she would not join the succession war. She said that she
would serve as a marshal to whoever becomes the emperor.”
Thanks to that many military officers turned to support Gordon instead.
For the military officers who want to make a military achievement, they would want an emperor who
has a deep connection with the army. Their only options are her or Gordon.
If she had participated in the succession war then Gordon would already have joined side with her by
now.
347
“The military shouldn’t get involved in politics. They should only be concerned about protecting the
country. She thinks that is the right mindset for a soldier and actually puts it into practice.”
“Somehow I think that she is different from the rumors I heard…….in the story, she sounds more like a
gorgeous person though……..”
“She’s gorgeous alright. She’s a tall blond beauty. She can turn quite a few heads just by standing still.
The atmosphere around her is completely different but she is quite similar to you, you know.”
“Eh….T, Thank you very much.”
For some reason, Finne’s face turned red and she turns her face down
When I was wondering what is happening, Sebas suddenly appeared.
“Finne-sama is being bashful because you described your sister as gorgeous and tell Finne-sama that
she’s similar to her you know. It is like you directly say that Finne-sama is gorgeous after all.”
“You should already be used to something like that right? Is it embarrassing or something?”
“Y, Yes! Of course……it depends on the person who says it though………”
“Is that so. I don’t understand such a feeling at all.”
While Finne was still being bashful about that, Sebas handed me a document.
Sebas had looked into the person who proposes to my elder sister in advance. As expected, my father
wouldn’t accept such a proposal from some strange person. Still, if it is the type that my sister hates
then she might even be angry at me too.
Even so, there is nothing strange as far as I can see.
Well, of course, he did propose to my sister after all.
“Since he proposed marriage to my sister, he must be quite bold huh, this person.”
“That’s true. She is the famous undefeated princess general who looked exactly like the second
consort after all. The Emperor seems to be pleased with him as well.”
“The second consort. Isn’t that Her Highness Christa’s.”
“They have the same mother. The second consort was a beauty with golden hair as well. I remember
that she was a gentle person who was kind to everyone.”
“I guess that’s why Father took a liking to you, Finne. Since my elder sister grew up to be the opposite
of the second consort, you are exactly what my father wanted her to be like. If we line both of you up
and ask a person, who is the daughter of the second consort, anyone will definitely choose Finne after
all.”
348
“Is that so? I am very honored.”
Is she really?
Finne gives me a wide smile.
I guess such an obedient part of her really scored high with father huh.
“Well, since she’s like that my father is so worried that she couldn’t become a bride you know. She’s
the eldest sister so when he brings a marriage proposal to Zandra, she can make an excuse that our
eldest sister still hasn’t married yet too.”
“In the first place, the Emperor doesn’t like the fifth consort so he wouldn’t be that concerned about
Zandra-sama’s marriage as well.”
“His Majesty doesn’t like her? I have heard that His Majesty loves all of his consorts equally though?”
Finne tilts her head at Sebas’s words.
Hmm, is it a good idea to talk about something like this with Finne.
As I wondered so, my eyes met with Sebas’s and he silently gave me a nod.
I see. So he talked about that to make me tell her everything huh.
Well, if that’s what he thinks then I don’t have any objection.
“On the surface, they are on good terms. He doesn’t discriminate against their kids either. But there’s a
certain rumor going around about the Fifth Consort.”
“A certain rumor?”
“It’s a rumor that the Fifth Consort assassinated the Second Consort.”
“A consort assassinating one another…..?”
“It’s not something unusual for the inner palace. Especially in important turning points like a
succession war or when they gave birth to a child. At that time the Crown Prince was still alive, and
Christa was just born. Even though she was loved by the Emperor, the Second Consort only has
daughters so she doesn’t have that important of a position. She was not someone who would be
targetted in an assassination.
“Then why is there such a rumor?”
Yes. that’s the point.
The consort who shouldn’t be the target of assassination suddenly passed away.
The investigation was conducted but the cause of death is still unknown.
349
Because of that, the most suspicious person was the Fifth Consort.
“Since the Second and the Fifth Consorts were young and had been often compared because both of
them is a daughter of a duke. However, unlike the Second Consort whose Father married out of love,
the Fifth Consort was someone he married through a political marriage. Both of them gave birth to a
daughter but the Second Consort was the one who gave birth first. Comparing their daughter’s
reputation, the Second Consort’s is still better. Zandra has been excellent since she was a child but her
personality is still a problem after all. Because of that ill will and that unilateral rivalry between them,
that kind of rumor started to go around.”
“Is that the source of the rumor? She assassinated her because of jealousy?”
“I don’t know. At that time the Fifth Consort had a clear alibi. When the Second Consort passed away
the Fifth Consort was together with the Empress. She can’t kill her, directly at least. Moreover, the
investigation did not find anything that could lead to murder. Still, the Fifth Princess is suspected
because she is the one who taught Zandra magic.”
“She is Her Highness Zandra’s mentor?”
“The magic I use is ancient magic. In other words, it’s a magic that can not be handed down to others.
Modern magic, on the other hand, is the magic that is commonly used across the world. Among those
modern magics, Zandra specializes in forbidden magic, a magic that was forbidden by our
predecessors who spread modern magic to the world.”
Well, there are all sorts of forbidden magic.
While some question why they had forbidden such magic, there are also people who say that those
magic should be forbidden.
Zandra has studied those forbidden magics. Her contributions to the research of forbidden magic
were recognized by many mages throughout the Empire.
From the mages’ point of view, Zandra is someone that they are extremely grateful for as she has
solved many of the mysteries surrounding forbidden magic. There is more magic that can be learned
and there are all sorts of forbidden magic that can be utilized. Moreover, most of those magic is
powerful.
And the first person who started this movement is none other than Zandra’s mother, the Fifth Consort.
“Zandra has been appealing that forbidden magic can be used for good but no matter how anyone
thinks about it, there’s no doubt that the process she has to learn such forbidden magic is dangerous.
Naturally, Zandra’s mother, the Fifth Consort is the same. The rumor started because people doubt
that there might be some spell in the forbidden magic that can be used to curse someone to death.”
“Does a spell like that really exist?”
“I don’t know. I can’t use anything besides ancient magic too. Well, if we look for one then we might
actually find it. A curse that even the Emperor’s investigation couldn’t find a trace of. It’s not strange
350
for something like that to exist among the forbidden magic and the ones who can discover such magic
are only the Fifth Consort or Zandra who have gathered books and grimoires on forbidden magic from
all across the continent.”
“But…if there was such magic then……..”
“Yeah, anyone can be assassinated. That’s why she has been under suspicion. But, three years ago, the
Crown Prince died. The investigation was conducted and there was no evidence of assassination. It’s
just like the Second Consort case……..Since then, Father has always been suspicious of the Fifth
Consort. Since officially there is no evidence, he couldn’t stop Zandra from studying the forbidden
magic as well.”
Another reason for not banning Zandra’s research was also because it was successful.
Many of the magic that Zandra has released from being forbidden magic has been introduced to the
military as military magic and has contributed to the development of new magic weapons.
As long as there is still a magical superpower like the Sokal empire, we can’t afford to stop the
research on that or all of our excellent mages will flow out to Sokal.
Father probably has a dilemma about this. Personally, he surely wants to put a stop on it immediately.
Well, he is such a great emperor because he doesn’t let personal feelings interfere with his decision
though.
“A person who has a grudge against the Second Consort which was the person who shouldn’t be
anyone target for assassination and can perform that assassination without leaving behind any
evidence. That’s the reason why she is the suspect right?”
“That’s right. But it is still just a speculation. There is no evidence. When the Crown Prince died, both
the Fifth Consort and Zandra were inside the Imperial Capital while the Crown Prince was on the front
line. No matter what, it is still too much of a stretch. Even among ancient magic, there is probably no
curse that can be used from such a far distance. Still, it was enough ground to make people start
doubting them.”
Zandra’s mother’s house is in the south.
It is the place that Leo has to conduct his investigation.
A position like an inspector is perfect for Leo. He is a serious and earnest person so he will not miss
any attempt to tamper the evidence no matter how minor it is.
But the southern region is the place where that woman holds strong influence.
It would be good if she doesn’t try anything.
I will not be able to openly help him either.
351
The reason we were given separate tasks at the same time was also that Father wanted to test our
personal competence as well.
“I can only follow up for him from the shadow huh.”
“Then it will be fine, isn’t it. That’s always how we do things anyway.”
“Yeah.”
While having such a conversation, I smiled as I ate the delicious sweets Finne prepared for me.
352
How to use Finne
Although I and Leo were given tasks to do, we didn’t leave the capital immediately.
of course, there are preparations to do but in my case, it’s up to my sister’s decision.
So right now, we are doing everything we could during the time we have.
Leo is out negotiating with the influential peoples and invites them in as our supporters.
Meanwhile, I head out to deal with the representative of the Ajin company.
“What kind of person is she?”
“She’s a good person.”
“I can’t count on Finne’s definition of good people though.”
“No way!?”
As if she was shocked by what I said, Finne shouted.
But that’s the truth. To Finne and Leo, most of the people in this world would be good a good person.
They see the good in people rather than the bad.
They are the opposite of me. Looking at Trau-niisan, those two would look for his good parts first
while the first thing I notice is how much of a fatty he is. This is probably the difference in humans.
But sadly, it is easier to live with my point of view in this world.
That’s why I am worried about who they take into our camp.
“Welcome. Your Highness, Finne-sama. Our representative is waiting inside.”
“I heard it beforehand but an elf secretary huh. How did you come to work for the Ajin company?”
It was the elf secretary who greeted us in front of the room.
I heard it from Finne but this is still unusual.
Normally, Elves live in hidden villages located all over the country.
Their villages are sealed off with barriers surrounding its entirety so Elves usually don’t leave their
village. Many people may have heard of them but there are only a few people who have seen an elf.
Longevity and good looks, I heard that some of their elders lived for over a thousand years.
353
It’s surprising enough that an elf is getting involved with so many people outside of their village. Still,
it is hard to believe that an elf like her is working as a secretary at a vampire’s company.
“We elves really are an isolated race. It is our racial trait. However, I wanted to see people from the
outside. I am an irregular among the elves. That is why I left my village and came to the outside world.
But the world outside is much harsher than I thought. At that time, our representative recruited me
into this company. This company is the kind that gathers such demihumans such as myself.”
“That’s a good story, isn’t it. Al-sama.”
“If it’s not a made-up one that is.”
Finne is looking at me with the eyes of, how could you say such a thing, but I don’t mind.
After hearing my words, the elven secretary squinted her eyes a little. With a somewhat dissatisfied
attitude, the elf said, I will leave it to your discretion whether Your Highness believe it or not, and took
a step back.
It seems like she was telling the truth huh.
“My apology.”
Saying so, I head inside the representative’s room.
That’s when something different from what I heard happened.
“It’s my honor to meet you, Your Highness Arnold. I am called Yuriya, the representative of the Ajin
company.”
Loose and wavy silver hair trimmed at the shoulder.
Her jewel-like red eyes are looking at me with interest.
Her beauty is vampire-like. Her white skin reminds me of those vampires that I met in the east. When I
remember them, I also remember the figure of Finne falling from that clock tower.
My expression probably looked quite unpleasant right now so Yuriya bitterly smiled and bowed her
head.
“I have absolutely no connection with them but please allow me to offer a sincere apology for what my
brethren have done. I am sorry.”
“…….My bad. I’m the Seventh Prince, Arnold Lakes Adler.”
I can’t break off the connection that Finne gone out of her way to make for me.
I immediately apologized and sat down with Finne.
“Your Highness. What kind of business do you have with us this time?”
354
“I’m going to be straight. How do you plan to use Finne?”
‘I want to borrow the name of Finne-sama.’
That was her condition for cooperating with us.
If my thoughts are correct then she will start selling her first product inside the imperial capital soon.
“Putting it as how do we plan to use her is a little rude isn’t it, Your Highness.”
“Leave the formality. Just talk naturally. Hearing you talk like that made me uncomfortable.”
“Ara, really? I even put on my [Dealing with a Prince] mode too.”
“I am not your customer. I am your business partner so stop using that probing tone of yours already.”
“Well, if that’s the case then I will stop. It’s easier for me this way too.”
Saying so, Yuriya showed a charming smile.
That’s the case for most merchants but their smiles are not sincere.
Gradually reeling in their opponents and before they know it, they will already be in their pocket.
Yuriya is no exception.
“We are talking about how to use Finne here but………..what do you have in mind?”
“Don’t return a question with another question.”
“It’s fine, isn’t it. I’m curious just how far the dull prince can go.”
“If you know the nickname then that should be enough. It’s exactly because I am incompetent that
they are calling me the dull prince isn’t it.”
After a series of exchanges, Yuriya glanced at Finne.
Shit.
When I thought so, it was already too late.
Yuriya grins.
“Even though you are saying that you are incompetent, Finne doesn’t look at all panicked you know.
Rather, I feel that she completely trusts you right now though?”
“Eh? Ah, Umm……”
“You are probably planning to advertise the products that Finne used and if possible put a picture of
her at your stores as well right.”
355
Since she noticed Finne’s reaction, it’s no longer viable to deceive her.
To move the talk along, I told her the business plan I had come up with.
Hearing that plan, Yuriya looked a little surprised.
“That was surprising……I thought that you were pretending to be incompetent but you are much
smarter than I thought. They said that a skilled hawk hides its talons but it seems that is really the
case here huh.”
“It’s not like I was pretending or hiding it. Since I just showed people that I don’t have motivation for
anything, people just started calling me that way.”
“Is it different now?”
“I decided to make my brother the emperor. My brother is like Finne, they are too honest to live in a
world like this. That’s why I have to protect them. I am in charge of their strategy and negotiating.
Anyone who deceives Leo or Finne, I will crush them.”
“……I will keep that in mind.”
I glared at Yuriya with the intention to put her in check.
She must have been quite shaken by the unknown variable since her attitude has grown a little
nervous.
Seeing that, I released the tension and asked her with a casual tone.
“So? How do you plan to use Finne?”
“…..Most of it is exactly like you said. We plan to use her to sell our cosmetics first. The cosmetics used
by the Blau Mowe herself will definitely fly off the shelves.”
“I guess. The negative image of the Ajin Company will be wiped clean with that too. Is it possible for
you to set up inside the imperial capital formally with that?”
“Can you stop putting it like we are the only one who benefits out of this deal. We will properly meet
our end of the bargain alright.”
“Well, let’s talk about the future. First, destroy the firms that are working with our enemies. If we can
cut their funding then their movement will be limited.”
Hearing I said it like those were easy tasks, Yuriya lets out a small sigh.
Well, that’s the correct reaction.
Any firms that cooperate with the other factions are large firms that have deep roots inside the
imperial capital. Crushing them is almost impossible.
356
“How about hitting them so hard that they can no longer cooperate with the enemy’s factions…..can
we leave them half-dead?”
“No, you need to go a little further. At least make them ¾ dead.”
“That’s practically dead, isn’t it…..Well, we will do what we can. And about the funding, how much do
you need?”
“We don’t need anything right now. When the time comes, just prepare only the necessary amount for
us.”
“Do you think money can conveniently sprout out of the floor? If you need a large amount of money, it
doesn’t like we can just summon it up for you immediately you know.”
“I know. But I am still telling you to do it.”
Yuriya shook her head at my terribly harsh request.
But in the end, she nodded.
If she can’t meet such a demanding request, she won’t be able to borrow Finne after all.
“Seriously…..it seems like I have lent a hand to a ridiculous faction.”
“If you have a grudge then you can direct it toward Finne.”
“No way. I can’t bring myself to hate such a cute girl. If I am going to hold a grudge then it will be
against you.”
“Do whatever you want. Alright, let’s go, Finne.”
“Ah, Y, Yes!”
Finne who had been enjoying the tea and confectionery ate them in a hurry and started preparing to
leave.
Looking at that, Yuriya’s lips turned sour.
“You don’t have to be in such a hurry aren’t you.”
“Unfortunately, there are a lot of things we have to do. Just get your products ready. We will contact
you again at a suitable time.”
“Hmm. Hey, Arnold. If you say that you really want my help then I can give it my all you know? If I say
it, almost all the demihumans will be on your side you know.”
“I might ask you to do that when the time comes. This is not that time and since I don’t know what the
price will be I will have to decline for now.”
357
While being stared at with Yuriya’s bewitching look, I turned down her invitation.
For some reason, I can feel devilishness from this woman.
She doesn’t leave any bad impression but there’s no good one either.
Somehow, she felt like a curious cat.
It felt like she is going to take me to places I don’t want to go to.
There’s no problem if I have got nothing to hide but unfortunately, I have a whole lot of them.
There’s no doubt that she is an excellent merchant but I have to stay as far away as possible from her
for the time being.
With that determination, I leave Yuriya behind.
358
The Outermost layer of the Imperial Capital
After leaving the Ajin company, I get on a carriage together with Finne.
For the time being, Finne is wearing a cloak to disguise herself.
Looking at her, I thought of something.
“Is there something wrong?”
“Finne….how are you around small children?”
“Umm…..D, do you mean my own children!?”
Finne nervously asks me back.
What kind of misunderstanding does she have this time.
“No no. I mean are you fine playing with small children in general.”
“Ah, I see……I’m totally fine! Ah, it doesn’t mean that I’m not fine with my own children you know!”
“I know. Can we take a short detour then?”
“Hau…a detour?”
“Yeah, I am thinking about visiting an old friend.”
Saying so I direct the driver to our destination.
The Imperial Capital has a vast castle town centered on the Castle of the Imperial Sword.
The castle town is divided into several layers and the poorer you are, the farther your house will be
from the center of the city.
We headed to the outermost wall of the castle town.
There was a small sword dojo there.
“This place is?”
“It’s a dojo that an old adventurer acquaintance of mine is running. He teaches swordplay to the kids
living in the outermost layer of the imperial capital for free.”
“For free?”
359
“Most of the outermost layer people have to struggle to make ends meet. The way out of that is to
become strong as fast as possible but since they have no money to properly learn swordsmanship, he
teaches them how to wield a sword for free.”
While explaining so, I look into the dojo from the window.
Finne also took a peek with me.
There.
“Doryaaaaaaa! !”
“ARHGGG! !”
“UOOOO! !”
“TTTTTEEEEEEI! !”
“IDIOT! Oi! KNOCK IT OUT ALREADY! DON’T HOLD BACK JUST BECAUSE THE STICK IS SOFT!”
“….bully?”
“No, he is just playing with the kids…….”
In the dojo, a man is being beaten up by several children.
Light brown hair and eyes, there is a cut scar from his cheek down to his neck, he looked somewhat
strong but seeing him getting beat up by the kids like this make that impression completely
disappeared.
His name is Gai. When we were children we often played with each other.
Right now he is working as an adventurer while taking care of the children here.
“Sensei. There is someone outside.”
“Ha! Who would fall for such a cheap trick! I don’t see anyone!”
“Ahh, he is looking like he already gave up on you too. He is definitely your acquaintance, Sensei.”
“He is looking at Sensei like that because Sensei is an idiot right!”
“I AM NOT AN IDIOT!”
“Then just turn back and look.”
“These brats…..EEEIII! FINE! I WILL TAKE A LOOK!”
Saying so, Gai turned this way and met eyes with me.
360
Gai’s eyes opened wide in surprise but the kids behind him are smiling.
When I sigh at him, the kids all attacked him together.
“Now’s the chance! DO IT!”
“I did saw him alright!”
“He really is a big idiot!”
“GUWAA! YOU BRATS! THAT’S A GUEST! WAIT! WAIT A MINUTE! CALM DOOOWN!”
“Fufu……look like they are having fun, aren’t they.”
“Fun huh………”
Well, it doesn’t look like he hated it but having fun is kind of a stretch here. If I have to deal with those
energetic kids every day then my bones gonna break.
In the end, the kids never listened to him so Gai smacked them in the head with his fist and head our
way.
“YO! Al! Long time no see!”
“Yeah, you look healthy Gai. By the way…..are they alright? It looks like they all fainted though?”
“It’s alright. Don’t look down on the outermost layer kids!”
“Well, it’s fine if that’s the case……..”
The children here are probably a little younger than Christa.
It’s the age that kids are most energetic.
There are only boys in the dojo. Girls are probably attending places that aim toward them huh.
“But why did you come here all of a sudden?”
“Nah, I was just wondering how you are doing. Since I haven’t seen you around lately I was a little
worried.”
“Never changed huh! Unlike you guys we are tough! I won’t kick the bucket anytime soon alright!”
Saying so, Gai flexes his bicep.
That’s the arm of a person who wields a sword. Despite its leanness, the muscles needed to do that are
tightly packed in there.
His scars also have increased a little. Gai is a B-class adventurer. He is almost at A-class but it doesn’t
mean that he is super strong or anything.
361
“Seems so. I’m relieved. Even so, isn’t this a swordsman dojo? You were just playing with them right?”
“It’s fine! It’s alright to start like this. If they hit someone, it hurts when that someone hit them back. If
they can learn that much then it will be alright. It’s not like everyone here will become an adventurer
anyway. If they have talents or a dream, they will eventually think about what path they will take
themselves. If that’s the case then I can just teach them when the time comes.”
“Like you?”
“Of course! I told you not to look down on the outermost layer kid right. We don’t need to be molded
like those nobles. All we have to teach our children is that they will be hit back if they attack someone.
If they know that then they won’t blindly attack anyone. They should be taught the pain of that early. If
they don’t know that, they will turn out to be like that shady noble who bullied you back then.”
“Gied huh…….Certainly, that guy is a typical example of growing up without knowing any pain.”
While I was making a bitter smile, Gai urges me to introduce Finne with his eyes.
Ah,
I mutter and put my hand over my mouth.
Then I signal Finne to reveal her face.
“Yes.”
“Nnnn, nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn! ! ? ?”
“Yes yes. Be quiet, will you. If you scream now there’s no point that we went out of our way to visit
you anonymously right.”
As expected, Gai was taken by surprise and almost screamed out.
Perhaps he is probably trying to shout the word Blau Mowe.
“ ! ? W, What kind of trouble did you bring me this time…..!?
“I didn’t bring any trouble, I’m just on my way back from a business with Finne.”
“Work? With the Blau Mowe!? Don’t get cocky Al! I won’t forgive you!!”
“Wai….m, my neck, my neck……”
“Shut up! Take the grudge of all the men in the imperial capital!!”
“U, Uncle…..”
“A, Um…..Al-sama is going to collapse……”
362
“Ah, Yes ma’am. But it’s alright. This guy always plays with death so he is surprisingly tough.”
Releasing his hands from my neck, Gai’s face immediately turned into a smile as he turned toward
Finne.
This bastard……
Saying something like that.
When I was thinking about such a thing, one of the children came out of the dojo.
He then rushed to Finne and hugged her.
Well, since her eyesight is low, children would find her easy to approach huh.
“It’s a beautiful woman!”
“Hey! You! I’m jealous, you know!”
“Ehehe! She smells so good. Hey Hey, Onee-san, are you Sensei’s girlfriend?”
“Fufu, I wonder?”
Finne said while stroking the kid’s hair without showing any discomfort from being hugged by the kid.
Perhaps he was glad that she smiled at him, the kid hugs her even tighter like he wanted to be spoiled.
Meanwhile, Gai is looking at him while clenching his teeth.
“Seriously? You are jealous of a child……”
“Shut up! You will never understand my feeling!”
“This way!”
“Kya! Umm……”
“It’s fine. Play with them for me.”
“Y, Yes!”
Apparently, Finne still want to play with them more as well.
She immediately entered the dojo and started playing with the children.
Seeing Finne playing with the children, Gai began to shake with jealousy.
“Aaaaaaaaah…..what should I do…..if they don’t stop soon I will want to lop my head off………..but
Finne-sama’s smile when she is looking at the children…..Aah what to do……I’m so jealous…….”
363
“Whether you are jealous or worry about your own body, just make up your mind already.”
“Worry would be better yeah. As I thought, cutting my own head is a little……”
“You just strangled a prince a little while ago you know, you understand that right?”
“It’s fine. If you are the type that cares about something like this, Elna would be the one who gets
caught before I do right? So it’s fine, yeah.”
“What kind of reasoning is that…..”
Well, it’s exactly because of that that we are still talking like this though.
Leaving aside when we were children when you become an adult, you would become more aware of
your position.
A prince is still a prince even if you have messed around with each other before. There are many who
think like that and distance themselves.
Among that, Gai is kind of a special existent.
“How nostalgic. Elna was such a good rival.”
“I don’t think rival is a good word when you lost to her about 200 times already though.”
“It’s 197. Don’t miscount alright.”
“Is that going to change anything……..”
As a child, Gai was like the general of the brats in the outermost layer.
It’s a daily thing for him to go up to the middle and play pranks on people. That’s when I and Elna met
him.
If I remember correctly, at first, Gai stole a loaf of bread from a bakery and was hiding from his
pursuer. Then Elna found him and beat him up.
Since then, Gai considered her as his rival and challenged her many times, of course, he lost.
But that experience made Gai stronger. It’s true that the outermost layer people are tough. These guys
absolutely will never give up.
“So? What did you actually come here for? You didn’t come here just to see me, right?”
“You are strangely sharp sometimes you know. Actually, Leo has been assigned to investigate an
incident with the immigrants in the south. I want to ask you about the discrimination at the southern
frontier since you are originally from there, what do you think?”
Gai is an immigrant.
364
His parents were immigrants and he grew up surrounded by discrimination.
Perhaps that might be the source of his rebelliousness.
That’s why Gai was aiming to become an adventurer so that he doesn’t have to deal with the
immigrant stuff anymore. Even when Father accepted the immigrants as the Empire’s citizens, the
discrimination inside the imperial capital was still going on for several more years.
“Yeah, no doubt. Has it been 11 years since the Emperor declared that us immigrants are citizens of
the Empire? For me, it is still just 11 years. The discrimination won’t go away that easily. Especially
the mindset of those nobles. They were educated that way after all.”
“……I see. I’m relieved to hear that.”
“Relieved?”
“What happened at the southern frontier was kidnapping cases of the people at the immigrant
villages. If no nobles were involved it wouldn’t cause so much problem that the Emperor would have
to dispatch Leo. This case worth sending Leo over because there is still discrimination running
rampant in the area with the local nobles being involved in the practice. Leo has the ability to solve the
case, that’s why the Emperor decided to send him there.”
“You still put your little brother on the pedestal huh. He might be similar to the Crown Prince but
people like that don’t come around so easily you know. It was thanks to him that the discrimination
inside the capital has lessened to this extent. That person is special…..he was special.”
“That might be the case…..but, Leo also has half the blood of that man you know.”
“The same goes for you right?”
“Leave me alone.”
I said so while making a bitter smile.
In the dojo, Finne is happily playing with the children.
I brought Finne here to give her some time to relax and it seems that’s the right choice huh.
“Aah, that’s right. One of my students is at the castle right now. If you guys meet, take care of that guy
for me alright.”
“Student?”
“Yeah, quite a talented child too. I recommended that fellow to take the knight training at the castle.
Should be living at the castle right about now.”
“Hee, what’s he like?”
“It’s a she but she’s quite a noisy guy you see. Anyway, she’s quite noisy so you will know when you
meet her. She’s super noooooisy.”
365
Gai’s face was full of smiles when he said that.
I guess he really likes children huh.
In the end, after letting Finne play with the children for a while, I and Finne head back.
366
Her Name is Rita
The Imperial Sword Castle is a large place.
Unless you are part of the imperial family who lives in this castle, it is not a place you can easily find
your way around. Even the Emperor himself doesn’t know of all the hidden rooms and passages as
each generation of the emperor newly construct their own.
At the middle floor of such a castle.
One girl is lost.
“Unnn……I’m lost!”
With a troubled expression, the girl shouted out.
The upper area of the castle is where the Emperor lives while the middle area is for other imperial
family members and nobles. The reports that need not be sent to the Emperor are being examined
here.
Al and Leo’s rooms are also in this area. However, it was too dangerous for a lone unidentified girl to
be lost here.
If she is caught, she will be detained until her identity can be confirmed.
However, the girl is still carefree.
The girl whose blond hair is being arranged into a side ponytail is probably eleven to twelve years old
at the oldest.
With a wooden sword on her waist, anyone in the castle can recognize her as a knight apprentice or
something close to that.
However, most knight apprentices will not be in such a place.
“What to do, What to do………..what would I do if someone ate all my lunch……”
If Al saw her then he might have a disappointed look on his face while saying, [so you were worrying
about food!?].
The girl raised her face up and started walking again.
She has embraced the reckless idea that she will find a place she recognizes before long if she keeps
walking.
“A stair, should I go up or down? Instructor told me not to go up the stairs didn’t he, eh, was it not to
go down, hmmmm.”
367
“Oi! The kid over there!”
When she heard that, she immediately straightened her back.
She then slowly turned her head back to look at the source of the voice like a broken doll.
At that place were two guards carrying a spear. Both of them are looking at her with suspicion.
“Who are you? How did you get in here?”
“Isn’t she a knight apprentice? I guess she broke the rule and came up here. Those who can’t keep the
rules can’t be a knight you know.”
“Umm, you see……”
“A dropout huh. Come with us! We will take you to your instructor.”
Saying so, the guards reach out to the girl.
However, as if to stop them, a black-haired man calls out to the girl.
“Oh, so you are here. That’s a no go, isn’t it. Leaving my side like that.”
“Y, Your Highness Leonard!?”
“Aah, sorry. I called this girl up here. Since she looked like she had nothing to do I was having her
helping me carrying my luggage. Can you lend me a hand too?”
“N, no! We have our prior duty!”
“We are sorry, we didn’t know that you were called here by His Highness Leonard! We will return to
our post now!”
“I see. Thanks for the good work.”
Smiling and waving to the guards as they are leaving, Leonard takes a look around and confirms that
there’s no one around. After confirming that they are gone, he let out a sigh and spoke to the girl.
“That was dangerous.”
“…I, I.”
“I?”
“An Ikemen! Nii-chan! Nii-chan is exactly like the Ikemen that Sensei told me about! Thank you for
saving me!”
The girl smiles cheerfully.
368
Leo was a little confused because of her overly familiar attitude but he immediately smiled at her and
beckoned her over.
“You really are an energetic one huh. Are you perhaps a knight apprentice?”
“Un!”
“I see. Then I will accompany you to your instructor later. If I go with you, you shouldn’t get scolded
right. But you have to help me with my work first okay?”
“OOH! This is called a deal right! OKAY! I accept it!”
“Alright then. I am Leonard. My friend calls me Leo. And you are?”
“Rita’s name is—-.”
“Nn, so your name is Rita huh.”
“How did you know!?”
“Ahaha, you are quite an interesting child aren’t you.”
Saying so, Leo took Rita to his room.
369
(TLN:( ͡° ͜ʖ ͡°) )
“Alright, Rita. This is an important task. Can I trust Rita to do it?”
“U, Un! I will do my best!”
Leo places a lot of sweets in front of Rita.
All of them are gifts from noble ladies and women from the castle town. The poison tasting has
already been done but the total amount is still too large.
After returning from the south, Leo’s popularity has increased tremendously, especially among
women. With that said, Leo thought that most of this was his brother’s fault.
The story of how he has done everything he can to save the survivor of the wrecked principality’s ship
has reached the imperial capital, especially the one where he leaped into the sea to rescue a survivor
and the story of how he raised the white flag in order to save the seriously injured people on board his
ship has become the most popular story inside the imperial capital.
Because both are Al’s actions, even if Leo wanted to tell everyone that it was all thanks to Nii-san, he
couldn’t do it and have to eat all the sweets being sent to him every day.
However, no matter how much Leo’s stomach can take in, there is still a limit.
“Ca, Can I eat everything!?”
“Yeah, it’s fine. It’s Rita’s job to eat all of it after all.”
“GOT IT! Rita will do her best!”
Rita began to open the bag containing the sweets with sparkling eyes.
Her face is beaming with a smile at the sweets she has never seen before.
Looking at such Rita, Leo felt a little guilty. Luring a little girl to his room and making her do what he
doesn’t want to. It somehow felt cowardly.
(TLN:( ͡° ͜ʖ ͡°) )
However, Leo can’t eat anymore of that and Al wouldn’t even think about eating them. It would be a
waste to throw away what he couldn’t finish so it’s better to have someone else eat it.
Leo convinced himself and started pouring tea for Rita.
“Delicious! It’s super delicious!”
“Is that so, I’m glad. Here, have some tea. It’s hot so be careful okay.”
“Thank you! Leo-nii.”
370
“Leo-nii?”
“Un! Leonard-oniichan. Leo-nii for short! I can’t?”
“No, it’s alright. Call me whatever you like. I will do my paperwork for a bit so when I’m done, let’s go
to your instructor together okay.”
“ROGER!”
A natural smile bloomed on his face as Leo looked at the energetic Rita.
Rita’s cheerful and unreserved atmosphere was refreshing to Leo. Inside the castle, everybody always
behaves themselves carefully.
Their smiles are fake, and there are a lot of occasions that felt so suffocating. It has become even
worse since they know of his success in the south.
In such an environment, Rita’s pure and cheerful attitude is like a tonic that heals Leo’s heart.
“Hey, Leo-nii. Is Leo-nii some kind of a big shot?”
“Why are you asking this so suddenly?”
“Un, you see. The person earlier used -sama to call Leo-nii right. Sensei said that people who have -
sama following their name is a big shot you see.”
“Well, my father is certainly a great person you see. People just use -sama to refer to me because of
that. I am not someone great. Incidentally, is that sensei referring to your instructor?”
“UUn. He’s the adventurer-oniichan that taught Rita her swordplay. He probably is as old as Leo-nii
too. But Leo-nii is way more cooler than him! Sensei always gets bullied by the kids at his dojo and he
always gets dumped by women too.”
“He sounds like an interesting person isn’t he. Since Rita likes him as well, should I try meeting him?”
“Un! Rita loves Sensei! It’s thanks to Sensei that Rita can train in the castle like this too! Rita will
become a great knight or an adventurer like him in the future.”
Rita took a bite on the fruit on top of the pie.
“You don’t have to push yourself you know?”
“N, No…….Rita is a woman who keeps her promise….Rita has to eat it all……..”
“Fufu, good girl. Then you can eat everything you got in your hand alright, I will eat the rest.”
“Ro, Roger…….th, this is nothing……”
While saying such a thing, Rita puts the last piece of chocolate in her mouth
371
During that time, Leo eats all the remaining sweets. However, with only a handful left, Leo doesn’t
rush to eat it. He slowly takes his time to eat it while looking at Rita.
Then.
“A, All Done ! !”
“Good job.”
“Ehe!”
Leo strokes Rita’s head and Rita is having a wide smile on her face while receiving it.
After that, Leo walks Rita back downstairs.
“Hey, Leo-nii. Can I see you again?”
“Sure. come over whenever you want.”
“Un! I will come again!”
With that said, Rita parts way with Leo.
He gave her detailed instructions so that the instructor won’t get angry at her and told the guards to
let her pass when they saw her.
Leo returned to his room, tidying up the leftover trashes and wondering if she would be a good friend
to Christa.
372
Sometime the Elder, Always the Younger
“She’s such a cheerful child? I want to try meeting her.”
“Yeah, I think Mother will love her too.”
Saying so, Leo started drinking his tea.
The next day, Leo was visiting Mitsuba to tell her that he has to head to the south soon.
Mitsuba didn’t say anything special to her busy son. If she told him to do his best then he will
unnecessarily try even harder than he needs to and even if she told him to restrain himself he is a
child that would tell her that he would do his best anyway.
Therefore, Mitsuba did not mention anything related to his mission and asked him about something
else. that’s how the topic turned toward Rita.
“I think it would be great if Rita could be Christa’s friend.”
There was not a shred of possibility that his mother would deny his idea.
Normally one would expect a question like, which house does she come from but that kind of subject
is unrelated to Mitsuba. Regardless of your status, you should associate yourself with good people and
not with bad people. That’s what Mitsuba always tells them.
“Since Christa is a girl, she doesn’t have many friends. The noble will only get along with you well on
the surface but it would be reassuring if she can have a friend of the same age she can trust.”
“Yes, that’s right. If there’s a chance I will bring her along next time.”
“Ara Ara, for you to support that child to such extent, you must really take a liking to her aren’t you.”
“I like that kind of child. Christa is a quiet one so I think she would be a good match for her.”
“Really? Then in a few more years, won’t you take her as a bride?”
Leo smiled at his mother’s teasing words.
He doesn’t look at Rita that way since she is still a child.
However, if he is going to take a wife then he thinks it would be nice to have a cheerful girl like her.
Still, since he doesn’t know what to follow up after he said that, he chooses to give his mother a vague
reply instead.
“I can’t think about having a wife in such a situation. If things calm down a bit I might consider having
one if I meet a nice woman like Rita.”
373
“You are such a boring child. If you are like that then she might be taken by Al you know?”
“Hahaha, certainly, Nii-san really is surrounded by good women isn’t he.”
“It’s not a time to laugh right. Listen, Leo! A good woman doesn’t fall in love with a perfect man you
know.”
“Then it’s alright. I have a lot of disappointing parts too after all.”
“It might be true from my point of view but that’s not how other girls see you right? Show more of
your disappointing places to the world will you? You should be a little more selfish. Anyone needs to
have some part of them that is different from others you know.”
“I will keep it in mind.”
Saying so, Leo drinks all his tea and gets up from his chair.
His mother might start to lecture him on how to make a good woman fall for him after all.
“Then I will be excusing myself.”
“Seriously…..take care of yourself okay.”
“Yes.”
Saying so, Leo left Mitsuba behind.
On the way back.
Leo headed to the castle square on a whim.
As the name implies, Castle of the Imperial Sword has a shape similar to a sword with the part of it
protruding from both sides like a sword guard. That part became an open space where the training of
the knight candidates took place.
Originally, what is being done at the castle is not the training of regular knight candidates.
Normal knight candidates have a proper school to train them while the training at the castle square is
for the talented people who are too poor and can’t afford to enter knight school. Even immigrants and
the poor should be given a chance to become a knight if they have potential, that was the Crown
Prince’s proposal.
None of them ever entered the imperial knight order but after they graduated they became knights
serving the local lords, adventurers or join the army. Each of them carves out their own path.
At that square, it seems that the training is already over for the day.
374
The trainees are no longer there, Leo is somewhat disappointed but.
“KUU-CHAN! !”
He immediately got sent flying.
Leo smiles at the loud voice of a child.
However, when he looked at the source of the voice, he hid himself behind a pillar.
The reason is.
“Ri, Rita…..you are too loud……”
The Ku-chan that Rita was waving at was actually Christa.
(TLN: Christa – Kurisutaa – Ku – Kuu-chan.)
She is nervously talking to Rita while holding her usual bunny doll.
Leo was impressed at the unexpected sight.
“I see….they were friends already huh…..it seems my help is unnecessary then.”
“What help?”
“! ?”
“Alright, don’t shout.”
A finger was put over his mouth to prevent him from screaming.
It was Elna who showed up.
Elna gently peers at Christa from the shadow of the pillar where Leo was hiding.
Then,
“As I thought, blood is really thicker than water huh…..”
“Yeah. Christa is more or less our little sister after all. It seems she managed to find herself a good
friend isn’t she.”
“Not that, I was talking about you and His Highness Traugott. Peeking at Her Highness Christa from
the shadow like this is exactly like what His Highness Traugott would do. And if you were peeking at
the other girl then as your childhood friend, let me take some distance away from you now.”
“….Unn?”
“Don’t tell me, both of them……?”
375
“It, It’s, It’s now like that! You got the wrong idea…..!”
Seeing Elna seriously widen the distance between them, Leo understands that there must be some
kind of serious misunderstanding going on so he tried to solve it but hearing his loud voice, Rita
curiously came over to investigate.
“AaH! Leo-nii!”
Saying so, Rita happily hugs Leo.
After seeing that, Elna’s face turned serious.
Leo who thought that the situation has turned dangerous tried to say something to get out of this
situation.
“Th, this is a misunderstanding! It’s not like that, we don’t have that kind of relationship, Uh,
Ummmm.”
“……….”
With his suspicious attitude, her suspicion only grew stronger.
At that time, Christa came over.
“Leo-niisama? Elna too……”
“It’s been a long time, Your Highness.”
“Long time no see…..Does Rita know Leo-niisama…..?”
“Un! He took me to his room the day before!!”
For a moment, Leo and Elna’s minds shut down.
Christa said, Oh so that was the case, but Elna is now worked up by the unlikely possibility.
“D, D, D, Don’t tell me………you really……..”
“I, It’s not like that you know? Elna, this is a misunderstanding, see……..”
Leo is wondering what to say to counter Rita’s well-timed statement.
In the meantime, Rita is doing whatever she wants by hugging Leo and hanging from his arm.
However, the situation was really dangerous.
Feeling the presence of a person, Leo looks at the entrance of the square.
At that place, Finne is standing while holding her mouth with both of her hands.
376
Realizing that the situation is getting more and more complicated, Leo tried to explain the situation to
her but before he could do that Finne started nervously fidgeting.
“A, Al-sama! Le, Leo-sama has awakened to his little girl’s hobby! W, What should I do!? How should I
put this to not hurt Leo-sama!?”
Without being able to say that he is already hurt, Leo drops his shoulders.
As he was prepared to be made fun of, Al showed his face.
Then,
“What are you talking about?”
“A, Al! Leo has fallen on the same path as His Highness Traugott!?”
“W, What shall we do!?”
“The same path as Traugott-niisan huh. That person’s level of pervertedness is too high to be imitated
by Leo you know. He still hasn’t fallen yet so calm down.”
“What kind of explanation is that!? There’s nothing comforting about that at all! Properly solve the
misunderstanding for me Nii-san”
“Ha Ha Ha, I know so calm down.”
Saying so, Al approaches Rita who was hanging on Leo’s hand.
Rita notices Al and opens her mouth in surprise.
“Wha, What!!?? Two people with the same face!?”
“No doubt about it then. You are the girl Gai was talking about right.”
“Wha, How did you know Sensei’s name!? You have the same face as Leo-nii as well…..you must be a
powerful mage in disguise right! Return Leo-nii’s face now!!”
Saying so, Rita thrusts at Al.
However, Al uses the difference in their reach and hold Rita’s head at a distance.
“You coward!”
“As expected of Gai’s pupil. She’s quite a stupid one. Alright, listen here. I am Arnold. I am Leo’s elder
twin brother.”
“T, win…..?”
“Un….Al-nii-sama…..both of them are Christa’s nii-sama.”
377
Perhaps her processing power is quite low, Rita was mulling over that for a while and smack her fist
on her palm as she understood what I told her.
Then she points at Al.
“Al-nii’s main feature is his ruffled hair!”
Next, she points at Leo.
“And Leo-nii’s is that he is an Ikemen!”
“What is that. We have the same face, right?”
“Tsk tsk Tsk! Don’t look down on Rita! Rita knows what an Ikemen looks like you know! Right! Leo-
nii!”
“That is Nii-san you know.”
Rita hugged the same place she did before and look at the source of the voice.
There was a well-dressed and tidied hair man there.
Looking back, she found a man in the opposite direction with the same face, clothes, and hair.
“U, Uwoooooo!!?? Leo-nii has a clone!!?? H, how terrifying! This is the power of twin huh!”
“Al-niisama…..please don’t tease Rita so much….”
“Hahaha. Sorry, sorry.”
Al ruffles his hair back to its original appearance and undone the button on his shirt.
He then ruffles Rita’s hair and turns back.
“See you then. I have something to do so you three can play together by yourselves.”
“Something Nii-san have to do?”
“I will do the job in your stead. You have to go to the south soon right? Play with Christa and that girl
as much as you want. Christa also wants to play with Leo right?”
“Un……”
“Rita wants to play too!”
“Yeah, take care of my little brother and sister.”
“Eh!? Nii-san!?”
“Don’t take her into your room alright.”
378
“Wait! It’s not like that!? Don’t strangely put it like that!? It’s not like that at all alright!?”
Taking Finne and Elna with him, Al leaves behind Leo who is waving at him in panic.
“Why are you in such a good mood?”
“Yes, Al-sama looks so happy somehow.”
“Really? Well, that might be the case. I get to see Leo acting as himself after a long time after all. It’s
been quite a long time since he can relax his shoulder like that. I guess I will have to thank Rita for that
huh.”
With that said, Al fixes his appearance and adjusts his hair.
He then straightens his back and unusually shows his motivation.
“Alright, guess I will have to try harder for Leo as well huh.”
“Geez….you really do your best when it comes to Leo don’t you, Al.”
“He’s my little brother after all.”
“Such a great brotherly love!”
While having such a conversation, they climbed up the stairs.
In the end, Al has no idea that Leo would be abused by the two little girls at the square until sunset.
“Damn it…….so this is your plan, Nii-san………”
379
Heading to the South
“Leonard. I will leave this in your hand.”
“Yes. I will act as Your Majesty’s eyes and ears. if there is any injustice being done in the south, I will
bring it all to light.”
“Umu.”
Leo was given a purple mantle from Father.
It is proof of an imperial inspector.
As long as he has this mantle, no one can stand in Leo’s way.
“Do not compromise. Thoroughly investigate the matter until you are satisfied.”
“Yes.”
Leo puts on the mantle and leaves the throne room.
Others started to leave as well but I remain behind.
The reason is that Father seems like he wants me to.
“Are you worried?”
“There’s no need to. Leo is excellent after all.”
“But he can be inflexible at times too. You have been the one who made up for that. And this time you
are not by his side.”
“You are thinking about seeing how far can Leo go by himself right? I can say that it won’t work that
well though.”
“Hou? and why is that?”
“That guy is good at helping others. He’s a guy who can move people. That’s why even if I’m not there,
someone else will be there for him.”
“I see. That’s fine. But what about you?”
I frown at my father’s words.
Like Leo, I also have my own task. The task is too lightweight to call a mission though.
“I wonder. I will do as much as I can but please don’t expect too much from me.”
380
“That is unacceptable. Your elder sister’s marriage is entirely in your hands after all. If she doesn’t get
married, Zandra won’t be able to get married either.”
“That’s quite a serious responsibility, isn’t it. But please don’t get angry at me if I fail though. I am
going up against her after all.”
“Yeah, I know that. But Arnold. I am already over fifty years old you know. There’s not much time left.
That’s why I want to see my daughter become a bride.”
“I don’t remember hearing that you are sick though?”
“I don’t have any sickness but I am getting old. I can’t suppress things much longer. I will eventually be
eliminated someday. Who will become the next emperor, that’s all I can think of.”
With a little distant eye, Father looks over the view of the castle town.
How long will I be able to enjoy this scenery? Maybe that’s what he is thinking right now.
His children are waging war among each other and their goal is the throne he is currently sitting on.
Naturally, the winner will overthrow Father. That being the case, this is no time for him to want to see
his daughter become a bride.
“You are unusually timid today.”
“Today, the Second Consort and the Crown Prince came out in my dream. It was very nostalgic………I
wonder how many people I have to miss like this.”
“If you don’t like it then you can just stop the succession war. Name a new crown prince and while you
still have power send your children to the countryside, you can spare their lives that way.”
“That’s not possible. The worth of the winner and the worth of someone who has their victory handed
to him are different. The throne is only for the victorious. That’s how you create a strong emperor.”
“Then please stop looking so timid like that. You have the power to stop all of this but you choose not
to. Because of that, my brother has to get involved in this stupid conflict. There are a lot who think as
you do but the reason that no one voice out against it is because you yourself approve of it. They
convinced themselves that this is something necessary and abided by it. Your timidness right now is
an insult to all those who participate in this succession war. If you back out after all this time, I will
never forgive you……”
This kind of conflict wouldn’t happen if the emperor appoints a successor.
However, an emperor who won that conflict is stronger than someone who is appointed. I understand
that reasoning. A winner will not allow his price to be taken away. But those who have victory handed
to them have little awareness of that. That’s where the root of such awareness came from.
If one wants to create an emperor who would fight to protect the empire then the succession war is
necessary. Because of that, this stupid conflict has been repeated for so many generations.
381
“……to think that I would get lectured by my own son. Even more so it’s Arnold too.”
“Please forgive my rudeness.”
“Alright. Since Franz is not here I ended up showing you such timidness. I am sorry. Forget about what
I said.”
“Yes.”
“…..Arnold. Do you still remember what I showed you?”
“Please rest assured. I never forget it. I still remember the words you said to me at that time.”
“I see…….then I am relieved.”
Saying so, Father dismissed me.
Since the succession war has intensified, Father must have a lot of things to think about too.
If Leo were to become an emperor, Father would be safe but he would never appoint Leo as the crown
prince because of that.
Even if he shows me his timid side, he is a person who would prioritize his responsibility as an
emperor before himself.
“After all, we have to win huh.”
I muttered so and went to see Leo off.
“Well, take care of your body.”
“Yeah, Do your best too, Nii-san.”
“I will keep it moderately.”
Saying so, we said our goodbye.
We don’t need a long-winded conversation. It’s not like we are saying goodbye for life.
“Your Highness Arnold.”
“As stiff as always huh, Lynfia.”
“I don’t have a status that could use such a familiar term with Your Highness like everyone else after
all.”
“I don’t care about status. Well, if you are fine with it then do whatever you like. You came all the way
here after all, sorry that I took up your time.”
382
“No, it’s me who has to thank you for everything.”
“It’s my repayment for saving my life and protecting Finne while we were away. This is not nearly
enough at all though.”
“I haven’t been that useful either. Even so, you have been very gracious to me. Honestly, I am feeling
bad about it myself.”
Saying so, Lynfia looks down.
However, that was just her being modest.
She splendidly protected Finne for me. That’s like she helped us avert our biggest crisis so far.
Our debt can not be paid to her by just dispatching some adventurers to protect her village and
investigate her case.
“Well, you might think so, Lynfia but we are really grateful toward you. That’s why we will definitely
help your village.”
I give Lynfia a pouch that is slightly larger than my fist.
As it is quite heavy, Lynfia peeks inside.
There were gold coins in it.
Additionally, the inside of the pouch is much larger than it appears.
“Th, this is…….!?”
“It is a magic enchanted pouch. The inside is ten times wider than its appearance. And the gold coins
inside are mine. I had no chance to spend any money but the country still allocated some to me you
see. I thought I would use it to fund our succession war but for the time being, I have no need for it,
you went out of your way to establish a connection with that company for us after all. I will entrust it
to you.”
“N, No way! How will I be able to spend all this money!?”
“Even if I gave it to Leo, he wouldn’t be able to use it effectively. If it’s you then I’m sure you will be
able to use it well. Leo is always straightforward. I want you to help him out. I think that will
eventually lead to the salvation of your village. And you don’t have to be stingy when you want to use
it. You don’t have to worry about returning it to me, use it to help reconstruct your village, alright?”
“Your Highness……”
“I’d like to go with you but I can’t afford to do that this time. I am sorry that I can’t see it through to the
end but at least let me do this much for you.”
383
“…..Thank you very much. I will never forget this debt. I will definitely be useful to His Highness
Leonard for you.”
Saying so, Lynfia lowered her head.
It’s only natural. Inside that pouch are ten years worth of gold coins for a prince.
Normally, It might not be such a good idea to hand it over so easily but I still have the money I earned
as Silver. That money is being managed by Sebas but its amount is way more than a prince salary.
Even so, it doesn’t mean that it was an amount of money that could be easily thrown away either.
However, with that money, they would be able to nudge the southern nobles to move. If it’s Lynfia
then she will definitely be able to spend it in a way that Leo couldn’t be able to imagine.
“You are exaggerating. We are the ones that are in debt to you. Consider it as our thanks. You don’t
have to worry about it.”
“…..It might be impudence of me to say this now but I’m glad that you were attacked at that time.
Because of that, we were able to meet like this. The relief and joy I felt when you offered to help me at
that time was something only I could understand. Now I know. The reason why Finne-sama trusted
you to such an extent. After the village is safe, I will definitely return to join you. Please leave His
Highness Leonard to me.”
“Fuh, that was really stiff. But since you are like that, I can leave him to you. Lynfia, take care of my
brother for me.”
“Yes. Please leave him to me.”
Lynfia deeply bows and boards the carriage that Leo just got on.
There are imperial knights escorting Leo but Leo’s personal protection was entrusted to Lynfia. That
also shows how much Leo trusts her as well.
“All right, I’m off!”
“Yeah. if it’s getting too difficult then just give up and come back alright.”
“Ahaha, Nii-san too, if it’s getting too difficult on your side you can give up as well you know. The
southern nobles are more forgiving than our elder sister after all.”
“No doubt.”
While talking to Leo who popped his head out from the carriage, I looked at the carriage which was
slowing moving away.
Well, there’s no need to worry about him anymore.
“Guess I will have to start doing my own things then.”
384
First, let’s try meeting the guy who proposed to my elder sister. After that I will have him write a letter
to her, that will surely be able to move her heart.
Alright, it’s time to get busy.
385
The Earnest Duke
Jurgen von Reinfeld. 26 years old.
The young head of the Duchy of Reinfeld located between the eastern and southern parts of the
Empire. In other words, he’s a duke.
The territory of the Reinfeld house isn’t that big. It is a relatively new ducal house in the first place.
Nevertheless, it has flourished in trading its specialty products and minerals. In that respect, he has
enough prestige to marry my elder sister.
“That being said, his status is not the problem here in the first place.”
I muttered while reading his file.
The bottleneck here is the word [Bad at martial arts] written in the document Sebas has gathered for
me.
My sister is a soldier through and through, she judges things by determining whether it will be useful
on the battlefield or not. If she wanted a husband, she would probably prefer a strong man. Whether
being a good martial artist or a good commander is fine. For the time being, I need to find something
that relates to battle to appeal to my sister.
“Now what to do.”
“Arnold-sama. I have something to report.”
“What is it? Sebas.”
“It seems that the Duke of Reinfeld who proposed to Her Imperial Highness has sneaked into the
Imperial Capital.”
“Haa!? Sneaked in!? He’s a duke you know!?”
“It seems that he has quite a light footwork. He sneaked in to informally express his gratitude to His
Majesty.”
“Gratitude? The matter about him assisting his marriage proposal?”
“That is…….Apparently, the Duke of Reinfeld has applied for marriage to Her Highness the First
Princess many times since over ten years ago.”
…..more than ten years ago?
What the heck.
Did he keep getting denied and repeatedly pushed forward all this time?
386
The fact that such a story did not spread means that he was refused every time. And it’s that father of
mine after all, there’s no way that he wouldn’t talk to my sister about this. So in other words.
“For more than ten years, my sister personally has been declining the Duke’s proposal!?”
“That seems to be the case.”
“That seems to be the case!?…….there’s already no chance for him isn’t it!?”
“Perhaps there were quite a few Ducal houses who approached Her Highness with the marriage
proposal. I think that His Majesty was impressed by his perseverance and decided to move for him.”
“He just throws it at me because he kept getting refused over and over. Don’t make this into some
moving tales.”
This task has become unexpectedly impossibly difficult.
Just what kind of person is this guy? This Duke of Reinfeld.
He is probably far from my sister’s preference.
“There’s no other way. I will meet him.”
“Perhaps that is the only way. That is probably what His Majesty is thinking as well.”
After I said so, my door was knocked.
Perhaps, Father is calling for me.
Alright, I guess it’s time to meet my brother-in-law candidate then.
Whoa, He’s intense.
That was my first impression of Jurgen von Reinfeld.
After he had an incognito meeting with Father, I visited the room where Jurgen was staying.
“Pleased to meet you, Your Highness Arnold. I am Jurgen von Reinfeld. I took over my father as the
Duke of Reinfeld a short while ago.”
Saying so, Jurgen shows me a good-natured smile. His height is a little shorter than me.
Since he is around my height, he should be considered short for an average adult man.
The problem is the width. He surely weighs more than me.
The impression he gives off is that of a plump bear cub. Seeing the good-natured smile on his face, I
can feel that he is a gentle person but unfortunately, my sister’s preference is the exact opposite.
387
His face isn’t ugly or anything but he is not particularly handsome either. Moreover, his overall
appearance is quite unfortunate.
“Nice to meet you, I am Arnold Lakes Adler, the Seventh Prince. It is a pleasure to meet you as well.”
Jurgen’s good-natured feeling made me naturally make me more polite than usual.
It is kind of impossible for me to be harsh on this man.
He is probably a super good person like his appearance suggested after all.
Still.
“I heard from His Majesty that Your Highness Arnold will act as a mediator between myself and Her
Highness Lizelotte, is that true?”
That damn Father, he said something unnecessary again…….
Lizelotte Lakes Adler.
The Empire’s First Princess and its Marshal.
The Strongest General of the Imperial family.
Acting as a mediator for someone like that is quite an impossible task for me, does he understand
that?
“Yes. Well……His Majesty did say that but……..”
“Then I am reassured. I heard that among the imperial family members, Her Highness Lizelotte only
fully open up to Her Highness Christa and Your Highness after all.”
“………..Sorry for my rudeness but who did you hear that from?”
“I heard it from the person herself though?”
“……Have you been in contact with Lize-aneue?”
Somehow I got a bad feeling about this.
It’s true that among the imperial family members, Lize-aneue only opens up me and Christa.
It’s rare for Lize-aneue to be inside the imperial capital since she is always at the frontline. That’s why
she often writes letters to us.
She used to send one each to me, Christa and Leo but around three years ago Leo hasn’t received any
letter from her.
388
I asked Leo if something happened but he never gave me an answer. Aneue herself doesn’t explain it
either.
Only a few people know of this.
If he said that he heard it directly from my sister then just what kind of relationship do they have
between them?
“Yes. I have sent many letters to Her Highness in the past. At first, I thought that we could become pen
pals but it surprisingly doesn’t go that well. If I send three letters, I would get around one reply you
see.”
“I, I see…….”
Th, that is indeed surprising.
To be able to keep on attacking my sister to such extent, in a certain sense, this man is quite fearless.
I surely can’t imitate him. Moreover, he got one letter for every three letters he sent? Wasn’t she just
ignoring the first two then? I won’t be able to endure that.
“Have Your Highness heard of how I first met Her Highness Lizelotte from His Majesty?”
“No, my father didn’t say anything……”
“It was twenty years ago.”
“Twenty years!?”
It’s been twenty years since they met…..
This person knew Aneue since she was six years old!?
“Yes. When I first visit the imperial capital there was a swordsman tournament for noble children but
my opponent was both larger and older than me. When I cried my eyes out at the unfairness, there
was this little girl who came up to me and said this, [it’s bad to try to win without putting in any effort.
Age and physique don’t matter, your opponent was simply one of those who have worked hard for it].
When that small girl jumped in and participated in the tournament, she splendidly won. That’s when I
know that the girl was actually the five-year-old princess Lizelotte. I was one-sidedly ashamed of how
I cried at my own immatureness and I fell in love with Lizelotte-sama at that time. I remember her
figure well. She was very beautiful. Even now I still think that she is the most beautiful person in the
world.”
“…..In other words, love at first sight?”
“Yes. That’s right. I fell in love the moment I saw her.”
Jurgen said without being embarrassed about it.
389
This person……isn’t he surprisingly aggressive?
“So after the tournament, I immediately proposed to her.”
“Nn? Eh? Ehh? Right on the spot?”
“Yes, I thought that she was the only person for me so I nervously did it. I was mercilessly rejected at
that time. Then she told me this, [I will consider it if you have become a man worthy of me]. That’s
why I have decided to become a suitable man for her. I started doing that by expanding my house. I am
no good with martial arts at all so I learned how to conduct business and enriched my territory. It was
around when I turned fifteen that it started to show results so I went to propose to her again. This
time I applied it through His Majesty but her answer was still no. After that, I have been repeatedly
redoing this process for all this time.”
Jurgen is making a bitter smile but I definitely can’t do the same.
So he has been longing for my sister for the last twenty years huh.
I am impressed with his effort. So there’s such a splendid person like this too huh.
Unfortunately, if it is still not enough after all he did then I think there’s already no chance left. My
sister is someone who doesn’t change her mind after all.
“Personally, I have been sending her letters and precious swords but it seems like it wasn’t very
effective. I tried to join the army but I was immediately kicked out too. It seems that it had reached the
ear of Lizelotte-sama somehow. Since then, I couldn’t approach any of the army’s sites anymore.”
“…….why did you go that far? Was it just because my sister is an attractive woman?”
“Let’s see. That might be the case at first. That person is extremely beautiful after all. I guess it is
because she is my ideal of a woman that I came to like her. However, right now that doesn’t matter, I
only do it simply because I like Lizelotte-sama. I love her. Please lend me your help, Your Highness. I
can not love anyone else besides that person.”
S, so intense…….
Just how intense can he be.
If you have an unrequited love for twenty years then you would normally give up right.
My sister who keeps refusing him is one thing but there is surely something wrong with this person
too.
The only duke who is seeking marriage with my sister is probably this person. If he gives up, my
sister’s marriage will become ridiculously difficult. This might be why my father hurriedly bring this
to me so that I can help finalize this marriage.
He is a good person.
390
I understand that much. I’m happy that he held such a feeling for my sister for twenty years and what
he did to become suitable for her is simply amazing.
If he has eyes on other women besides my sister then his wife will never have to worry about a thing
in her life.
Still, this person doesn’t have eyes for anyone besides my sister.
Because when he said, I love you, he was completely sincere.
Haa……this is difficult.
I can’t leave such a hardworking person like this alone.
Being earnest might just be in his nature after all.
“Understood. I will do what I can. But please don’t get your hope too high.”
“Please! Your help is very encouraging! Usually, the letters that I received a reply from her are the
ones where I wrote that I will visit the imperial capital. She said that I don’t have to personally get in
touch but she wants me to check how Your Highness and Her Highness Christa are doing for her. I
know from what she wrote. She is definitely worried about Her Highness Christa and you, Your
Highness.”
“Is…that so……my sister was.”
In the past, Leo was included in that.
If I earnestly help him with this, I might be able to get her to explain that to me.
I take a deep breath and make my determination.
Even if I fail, Father will not be angry but since he said that he wants to see my sister becoming a
bride, I want to do this for him.
I want to help this earnest duke as well.
“Duke Reinfeld. I will use everything I can to help you appeal to my sister. And in return,”
“My cooperation in the succession war isn’t it. I understand. At first, when I heard that His Highness is
now participating in the succession war, I thought that Your Highness might be a part of it as well, I
have been intending to help you from the start. Although my help is limited, the Duchy of Reinfeld will
support you. This will not change even if you don’t succeed.”
“If that’s the case then let’s get straight to the point. Let’s start with a strategy meeting then. My sister
is quite a strong opponent after all.”
With that said, I smiled and started a strategic meeting with Jurgen.
391
Reason for the Weight
“Y, You’re quite good…….!”
“Your Highness as well! There has been no one who can have a tie with me before!”
Saying so, we started swinging the practice swords again.
As we are both bad at martial arts, our stances are unstable and lack power.
So I intended to have something like a close bout with him. I intended to.
After the bout, I asked Sebas who had observed us for his opinion.
“Haa, Haa……how was it?”
“Nothing was standing out at all. It felt so bland as if I was watching children playing make-believe.”
“As I thought…….”
Jurgen drops his shoulders.
thinking of it as a battle between equally bad swordsmen, it seems that children playing make-believe
is better than this farce.
Well, this is well within my expectations. Since he keeps saying that he is no good about it at all, I just
wanted to see how bad he actually is.
We each wipe away our sweat with our towels and think about our next move.
“So it seems that using swords is a dead end……do you have anything else you are good at?”
“What I am good at is it?……There is one thing that I have been practicing for quite some time now.”
“And that is?”
“A Halberd.”
Sebas retrieves a practice halberd from the weapons we prepared in advance.
Halberd is a weapon that is a mix between a spear and an ax with the ax blade attached at the tip of
the spear. It is a versatile weapon but it is heavy and difficult to handle. The dwarves developed it to
compensate for their short reach.
If you can master it, it is a strong weapon but for an amateur human, a spear would be better.
“Why did you choose the halberd?”
392
“When I was fifteen, the time I applied for marriage with Lizelotte-sama, I met her directly then and
she told me that she wouldn’t marry anyone who couldn’t wield a weapon. I already expected that so I
trained to use a spear but I couldn’t beat Lizelotte-sama with it at all.”
“Well, of course…….”
Lize-aneue is certainly strong as a general but she is a terribly strong person by herself as well.
No matter what weapon she uses, she is a master at it.
Someone with a superficial knowledge of a weapon wouldn’t be able to compete with her.
“That time she told me that my attack was too light. I was quite scrawny at the time you see. My height
is much shorter as well. Because of that, I couldn’t deliver a blow that would convince Lizelotte-sama.
That’s why I chose a heavy weapon but since it is quite heavy I always lost my balance when swinging
it so I…..”
“Don’t tell me…….”
“Yes, I ate a lot and gained some weight. There are limits to how much I can build up my muscle after
all.”
How pitiful……
Certainly, a halberd in the current Jurgen’s hands would, how should I put this, it looks like he can
maintain balance when he swings it and from his bearing, I guess it should hold quite a force as well. I
can imagine him swinging one but……don’t tell me he sacrificed his physical figure for that.
Aneue…….there’s a person whose life has changed because of your words here. I can’t help but find
him pitiful right.
Talking to my sister who is currently far away inside my mind, I look at Sebas.
“What do you think?”
“His form is pretty good. It is uncertain that this level of skill would be able to impress Her Highness
Lizelotte though.”
“If we are setting the bar with Aneue’s standard then only our generals and imperial knights would be
qualified. I’m sure that she doesn’t set such a standard for him either.”
“That would be reassuring but this certainly looks more promising than a sword. You don’t need any
skill if you can use your weight behind your attack. It would work out if you can maintain balance to
handle that weight. The Duke must have trained quite hard for it as well. As far as I see from his
swordsmanship, his martial arts talents should be on the same level as you, Arnold-sama.”
“Nonexistent huh. Even if it is just one, to be able to actually use it as a weapon like this……he is quite a
man. I definitely can’t imitate that.”
393
Jurgen learned the business and enriched his newly established duke house. He probably has a talent
for a merchant. There’s no doubt that he is an excellent person in that regard.
Still, Jurgen continued to train. He knew what he was actually good at but he did not spare any effort
to get my sister to acknowledge him by turning his weakness into his strong point.
“Duke Reinfeld.”
“Yes? What is it?”
“Have you ever looked at another woman?”
“Never. I declared my love to that person. Since I already told her that, I can’t turn my words into a lie.
My father told me that honesty is my only merit but I like being honest like this. That’s why I want to
live like this. I love only one woman and I want to get my love through to her. I thought that this love is
beautiful and I believe that if I don’t do that much, Lizelotte-sama wouldn’t turn to look at me.”
“……Sebas. I’ve got the feeling that I am doing something bad right now………”
“Whether Her Highness chooses to accept or not is up to her after all. If she would marry any
hardworking man, everyone would already do it. She may value effort but it is not a certainty.
Women’s hearts are especially fickle like the autumn sky. There were many stories about a woman
choosing a sloppy man over a hardworking one after all.”
“Oi, Duke Reinfeld is already on his knees you know!?”
“That is just how the stories go, in the end, it will be up to Her Highness decision.”
Maybe he tried to shut off all the voices around him.
Without thinking that he might be going in the wrong direction, he has been working so hard after all.
Those stories might be a bit harsh for Jurgen.
I try to approach and call out to him.
“Duke Reinfeld, cheer up.”
“Kuh! If I’m getting depressed from this then I won’t be suitable for Lizelotte-sama! How am I so
weak!”
“…….”
“If she says that like a sloppy guy then I will just become both! Your Highness Arnold! Please tell me
how to become more sloppy!”
Jurgen raised up and asked me.
He suddenly approached me so I unintentionally backpedaled toward Sebas.
394
“He is really someone that couldn’t be broken isn’t he.”
“And he asked me how to become sloppier too, isn’t that rude?”
“It’s the truth though. There is no one who walked down the path of sloppiness better than Your
Highness in the imperial capital after all.”
“What path of sloppiness, don’t make up something ridiculous. I don’t remember walking down such a
path. I just never choose any path at all.”
“I see! So you don’t choose to do anything in the first place! This has become quite a study for me!”
“………”
“………”
What is this.
That’s one cruel word.
When people are in love they can really go this far huh. I have underestimated love.
“My elder sister basically likes strong people. If we can find something in Duke Reinfeld that can
appeal to that side of her then we should have a chance right?”
“Even so, Her Highness has observed the Duke’s hard work for the past twenty years hasn’t she?
Shouldn’t she already recognize his strength by now?”
“She just saw the result. We need to show her the process. She will be moved if we show her how hard
he is working, don’t you think so?”
“That sounds reasonable.”
“Your Highness Arnold, um, it might be rude of me to ask you this now but,”
“You were plenty rude enough already so please ask away.”
“Oh, then I am relieved. I just want to ask how did Lizelotte-sama come to like you, Your Highness?”
He really is such an unreserved person huh.
While thinking so, I remember the time when Lize-aneue came to like me.
It was eleven years ago. It was the time when I was in prison for a week to save a girl.
It seems that my eldest brother knew of the matter from Father and told Aneue that I went to prison
to protect a girl so she came to visit me in prison every day.
She told me that if I admit that I did it to protect someone, she will talk to Father for me.
395
Of course, I didn’t know that she already knew everything so I persistently said that I did it alone until
the very end. Now that I think about it, wasn’t she quite mean?
Imprisoned for a week to protect a girl, I thought that if I told her the truth, everything I have done
will become meaningless.
That’s why I kept it a secret until I left the prison.
At that time Aneue gently stroked my head.
“As expected of my little brother……”
“Yes?”
“I was told that when I was a kid. Aneue was praising me for my determination to see things through
to the end. Since then, she has been paying more and more attention to me. Maybe it was because of
my attitude at the time that my sister started to take a liking to me.”
“This is good news. At the very least, this means that Duke Reinfeld’s action so far wasn’t wrong.”
“Right. Duke Reinfeld’s actions so far should be what my sister likes. She like hardworking people
after all. Well, I don’t really know her preference in men but…….letting you two meet each other
should be faster to confirm this.”
Saying so, I stood up.
In the first place, it is wrong to do something important like this through a letter.
“Sebas, make a preparation. We will first head toward Duke Reinfeld’s territory.”
“Certainly. I will arrange it immediately.”
“Y, Your Highness!?”
“Your territory is closer to where Aneue is than the imperial capital after all. If I went there, she might
come to visit me. If she doesn’t come then we can just go to her place as well.”
Saying so I smile.
Dealing with that sister of mine, if I do all this while I am remaining inside the imperial capital, I would
be looking down on her too much.
I will have to go to the frontline myself.
Now, with that decided, let’s get ready.
396
Manpower Shortage
“I see. You are going to see her huh.”
“Yes. I judged that this is the best course of action.”
“Well, since her personality is like that, even if we sent a letter she wouldn’t move after all.”
“Yes. If she can’t come to the Imperial Capital then she might come to visit us at the Duke’s territory.”
Father gives several nods to my words.
Franz is by his side, and there is no trace of the timidness he showed me last time.
“Your Highness. May I voice a personal request?”
“Please, Prime Minister.”
“Thank you very much. Duke Reinfeld has been in love with Her Highness Lizelotte for the past twenty
years but he has never sent a letter directly to her. Even when Her Highness is at the imperial capital,
he has always come through me first. The imperial capital and his territory are not close enough that
he can easily move between both cities. Nevertheless, the Duke always handed his letter to me every
time. Do you know the reason why he did that?”
“He thought that if he sent it to her directly it would only trouble her?”
“Yes, that is exactly the reason. If it is not too much trouble please send this letter to Her Highness for
me, if she hates it then you can just throw it away as well. That was what he said. Among all the
suitors, Duke Reinfeld is the only one who took such consideration for Her Highness. That’s why Her
Highness only read the letter and received the gift from Duke Reinfeld. This is the story I heard from
the generals who have accompanied Her Highness to the battlefield.”
That is quite a surprising piece of information.
It’s not the fact that Duke Reinfeld was being considerate.
It was surprising that my sister always read his letters.
Does this mean?
“For nobles who live far apart because their territories are far away from each other, letters and gifts
are their method for them to maintain their relationship. They might not be able to meet each other
even once a year after all. Among the nobles who excessively sent many of such gifts to her, one could
say that Duke Reinfeld is quite a gentleman. That’s why, even though Lizelotte-sama declined his
marriage proposal, she never once refused his letter or gift.”
“I see. So she doesn’t personally hate him huh.”
397
“Yes. She must have some reason for doing this. Perhaps she decided that she would never marry or
maybe it is because of another reason. Nothing could be done if it is the former but if Her Highness has
another reason then I want Your Highness to persuade her. If Her Highness clearly shows a dislike
toward Duke Reinfeld then we can give up but I don’t think that Her Highness Lizelotte finds him to be
unpleasant. That’s why the person himself is quite pitiful.”
The fact that he knows that she read all of his letters means that Franz must have looked through it
beforehand.
Since he knew what the Duke was giving her, he must know my sister’s reaction when she received
those gifts too.
Franz is good at taking care of others so he must have been giving him advice.
It seems Franz also wanted to see this love bear fruit as well.
“Twenty years……others would find such a person to be persistent. I am one of those people. I told him
many times to give up, it’s for your own sake, there’s no use no matter how hard you try, that’s what I
told him. Still, Duke Reinfeld was determined, he only said that if his actions are troubling Lizelotte he
will stop. To him, Lizelotte is his whole world. No matter how this will turn out, I want to do this for
him.”
As I thought, my father is a human too.
He must feel bad for the man who has been trying so hard alone for the past twenty years.
Depending on how one looks at it, it only looks like Aneue is keeping him around because he is
convenient after all.
It’s that Aneue. She probably doesn’t notice it but if she doesn’t clearly tell the Duke to not care about
her anymore then there might still be hope.
“What if……Aneue says that she doesn’t want to marry anyone? Should we just give up?”
“……if she says that then I don’t see any other way.”
Father grimly muttered.
I want to see her as a bride.
That might be Father’s real feeling but one could say that it is just his own selfishness.
It’s Father. He probably thinks that if Aneue got married, she can distance herself from the succession
war.
If Gordon or Zandra took the throne, Aneue might be pinned with some crime and eliminated.
But if she becomes someone else’s wife, she will no longer have the position of an imperial family
member. It can mitigate the danger to her to some extent and the Empire will not have to lose a good
general as well.
398
Even if you are an emperor, it doesn’t like you can do anything you like after all.
“Then I will proceed with that. I don’t know whether I can bring back good news but I will do the best I
can, please wait for me.”
“I understand. I will leave it in your hand.”
Saying so, I left the throne room.
After I left the throne room I headed to my mother’s place.
I might not go as far as the frontier like Leo but I will still be leaving the imperial capital.
The faction is in Finne’s hands and since the conflict between factions is still calm, it should be fine.
Gordon and Zandra have been exhausting each other while we were out of the country while Eric’s
faction that is still intact will not risk upsetting father by making a move in a situation like this.
My father is very sensitive toward the immigrant’s issue. If someone aims to take Leo’s down while he
is moving to resolve that issue, Father will definitely be furious. Eric will not do such a stupid thing
like that. That’s why there shouldn’t be any conflict inside the capital for the moment, at least on the
surface.
Of course, there is still a lot going on behind the scene. The conflict between merchants of each faction
is one of those. That’s why I can’t bring Finne with me this time. She is the trump card of the Ajin
company after all.
“Looking at it like this, we really do have a shortage of manpower huh.”
Sebas must be left here for Finne’s escort too.
The defense around me might be thinner but it’s way better than letting Finne be defenseless. I only
have to worry about my identity being exposed, there’s no danger to my life. I can just be more careful
than usual.
Leo has Lynfia with him and Finne has Sebas to protect her. It would be easier for me if there was an
escort who could move around freely, but there’s no one like that around after all.
Unfortunately, I can’t rely on Elna this time because she has another mission assigned to her.
“It’s not like I can just settle with any strong person too. I can’t let someone I can’t trust to guard me
after all. Haa……excuse me. It’s Al.”
“Al!? Come in now!”
When I visited my mother’s room inside the inner palace, she told me to get inside with a loud voice.
Immediately realizing that there is something wrong, I quietly enter the room.
399
Mother is hugging the shivering Christa.
“Christa!?”
“UuUu….Uuu……..”
“She suddenly started crying without saying anything. She probably saw something again.”
my mother who is acting as Christa’s parent naturally knows about her precognition ability.
She always comforts Christa and letting it pass but if Christa became like this then letting it go away
on its own is not an option here.
I lower myself down to Christa’s eye level.
“Christa. Are you alright? It’s me, Al.”
“……Al-niisama………..Al-niisama!”
Christa who has been hugging Mother came to hug me.
Her body is slightly shaking.
I continue to stroke her head until she calms down.
When Christa finally calmed down, she tried to open her mouth but she couldn’t.
“……Christa. What did you see? Did you see something scary?”
“Christa. Talk to Al. He might be able to do something about it.”
“….Uu….UU………”
“Christa?”
“…..a small hut……and a lot of children……”
Christa begins to speak little by little.
She talked about what she saw in bits and pieces but at the end, she muttered this,
“Ri, Rita is……”
“Rita?”
“She’s dead……! Right in front of me…..!”
“Wha!?”
“No way……”
400
That gave me a shock.
In the past, Christa’s vision has been a hit and miss.
However, in terms of accuracy, the futures that directly involved Christa are more accurate.
The death of our eldest brother was the death of her close relative, and she was there when Kiel was
under attack.
In that sense, the future that happens before Christa herself is a very probable future.
But this timing is the worst!
“Al-niisama……save Rita……!”
“Al……”
“…..I just said goodbye to Father………..”
“Eh……? No! Al-niisama! Don’t go!”
Christa desperately clings to me. Her small hands are tightly holding my clothes.
What to do?
Should I tell father that we should give up?
No, he will not accept it. I need a reason. And if I explain about Christa to him, Christa’s ability will be
known. Although it doesn’t have absolute certainty, a magic that let you see the future is very
beneficial to the country.
That’s the worst-case scenario. It will put Christa in danger and she will be forced to see something
that she doesn’t want to.
However, we don’t have anyone we can rely on right now.
“Al. I will ask the Emperor somehow. If I do that.”
“……even if I stay, I will not be able to remain inside the inner palace all the time.”
Besides the consorts and their guards, the only ones that are allowed to stay inside the inner palace
are female members of the imperial family or princes that are less than twelve years old.
Even if you are a prince, you will not be allowed to stay in the inner palace after a certain age.
If something happens in this place, my reaction will be delayed.
If Lynfia is here then I can ask Mother to assign her as her guard but that option is impossible to me
right now.
401
Even if it’s Silver, if I suddenly appeared inside the inner palace, there will definitely be punishment.
“Looking at the situation, it seems that Christa herself will be involved in some kind of incident. We
need to place an escort as close as possible by her side. And the woman who is skilled enough to be
her guard is…….”
“……..there’s only one I can think of.”
“Right.”
If the situation is like this then I can only ask Elna.
I have to ask her to turn down her mission and stay by Christa’s side.
If that doesn’t work then I will have to come up with a new move.
“But Elna was assigned a mission. In terms of risk, she is on the same level or even greater than mine.”
She was assigned a mission as an imperial knight while I was assigned as a prince. Even children can
tell which one of us should choose their own assignment over this.
Depending on the reason she uses, she might even be removed from the imperial knight order.
Still, we have no choice but to rely on Elna.
402
The Best Sword
I was thinking about a lot of things on my way to Elna’s.
How should I ask her.
What should I do if she refuses?
There are a lot of things going on inside my head right now.
I was welcomed at the gate as usual and I entered the Brave mansion.
“Al. What’s wrong?”
“Elna…….”
Elna came out to greet me.
I would have liked it if it is Anna-san instead.
To be honest, I can’t bring myself to look at Elna in the face.
But this unnatural attitude wouldn’t be overlooked by this childhood friend of mine.
“What happened?”
“Well…..”
“It’s useless even if you tried to hide it. Let’s head inside..
Saying so, Elna guided me to a guest room.
The maids were preparing us tea and sweets in there.
Seeing that, Elna asked them to leave the room. Immediately after they left, Elna sat on a chair facing
me and get straight to the matter.
“I will ask you again. What happened?”
“……something terrible.”
“Is that so. Do you need my help then?”
“…..yeah.”
I nod without looking at her face.
What a way to make a request.
403
Still, I couldn’t bring myself to look at Elna’s face.
Just what kind of face should I make?
My mission, in the end, is for our advantage in the succession war. With Father’s evaluation on the
line, I can’t turn my mission down this time.
That’s right. I am weighing my sister’s safety against the throne. And because I couldn’t choose either
one of them over another, I came to Elna.
The inner palace is the world of women. Even a guard has to be one. That’s the superficial reason, not
the fundamental one.
We finally gain the upper hand. Father is looking at us favorably. I don’t want to throw away such an
advantage.
However, I can not forsake Christa.
I can’t choose.
That’s why I want to rely on Elna. Being such a miserable person, I don’t dare to look Elna in the face.
Even so.
“Alright. I will go to His Majesty and decline the mission.”
“!? Is that okay…..?”
“What?”
To such a swift reply, I unintentionally raised my head.
Doing so, I saw Elna with the usual expression on her face.
Her face looked like there’s no problem at all.
“But……what would happen to your honor if you decline……?”
“It’s not just a problem with my honor here. But you need my help, right? Then there’s nothing else to
consider.”
“…..I have to leave the capital to deal with the matter about a marriage proposal to my sister. To
smoothly advance our progress in the succession war, I have to prioritize making this marriage talk as
favorable as possible…….that’s the reason I came to you, you know?”
“You can’t let it go because it is important right? I don’t know what you want me to do but if it is
something necessary I will lend you a hand.”
404
“Why……”
“I told you right? I will never abandon Al. did you notice? You have been making a very difficult
expression since you got here you know? I don’t know what happened but you need me right? If that’s
the case then I can abandon a mission or two for that. You already thought about it and came to me
because it is something that you can only rely on me aren’t you?”
Elna indifferently said so.
It is not as simple as that.
If that’s the case then I wouldn’t feel this guilty.
As the daughter of the Brave house and one of the imperial knights, declining a mission is a big deal
for Elna. Of course, Father doesn’t like forcing people either. The Brave house who can wield the holy
sword is important to the Empire, Father wouldn’t want to deteriorate the relationship between them
and the imperial family.
Still, this will bring shame to her name.
“Isn’t honor important to you……?”
“It is. But, my oath is more important than my honor. If you say that it is necessary then I will do
anything. Alright, tell me. What do you need me to do?”
Elna is making an unusually soft smile.
That smile pierced my heart.
But I can’t help but feel guilty at that smile.
“……Christa has an innate magic ability. It’s precognition.”
“….that’s surprising. Have you been hiding that all this time?”
“It manifested around three years ago when Christa saw the death of the Crown Prince. Since then,
there are a lot of futures that she saw both ones that came true and ones that don’t but pretty much all
of the future that directly involves her will come true.”
“So it is that pattern this time right.”
“Yeah. Do you remember Rita? The girl that played with Leo before.”
“Of course. Is that girl involved?”
“…..Christa said that she died. Right in front of her.”
Elna’s eyes turned sharp at my words.
405
Christa basically never leaves the castle or the inner palace. The fact that Christa is directly involved
means that someone from the castle or the inner palace is involved.
In that regard, it is advantageous for us to have Elna who holds the highest court rank of the Brave to
escort her.
Even if someone tried to do something, only a few people have the ability to do so with Elna around.
“I can just remain by Her Highness Christa to guard her right? that way I can protect Rita as well.”
“Yeah…..there are only a few who know of Christa’s precognition ability. Even Father doesn’t know
about it. You can’t use this as the reason to turn down your mission you know?”
“It’s alright. My next mission will be near the big lake after all.”
“…..You, don’t tell me?”
“If I told His Majesty that I am not good with water, there shouldn’t be any problem right?”
“That might be the case but…….you will be leaking your weakness you know? Is that okay? You hated
that right?”
“I still hate the idea even now. It would be like admitting my loss if I turn down a mission and I will be
laughed at if people know that the daughter of the Brave house is afraid of water after all.”
“Then…..”
“But my oath is more important than that. You are in trouble, right? Will you be fine without my help?
What would you do? You came to me because there’s no other choice left right? Then I will help you.
There’s no meaning if my oath is just a word after all.”
Saying so, Elna rises up and comes to me.
She then put her forehead on mine.
I’m surprised at her sudden action but Elna started speaking with a small voice.
“Don’t worry about it. It’s alright. I will protect everything Al wants to protect. I won’t let anything be
taken away from you. I will be your power. So don’t make such a painful expression like that
anymore.”
“Elna……”
“It’s alright. Al, you didn’t abandon Her Highness Christa. The succession war is important, so is Her
Highness Christa. If you can’t protect either one of them, I will protect them for you. Al has to work on
that marriage proposal for the succession war right? I will protect Her Highness Christa for you.”
406
“…..I don’t want that child to feel sad anymore…..when her mother died, she looked like an empty shell
but she finally started to smile….take care of my sister…..take care of Christa for me. There’s no one
else beside you……”
“Leave her to me. We are both childhood friends and cooperators, right? You can tell me anything. No
matter what happens, I will be your power.”
Saying so, Elna took a step back.
She then showed me a cheerful smile.
I’ve seen that smile before.
When I met her for the first time, that was her smile when she told me that she would protect me.
I see. She has never changed since then huh.
Elna was and is still my friend.
—————————————————————
“Al-niisama! Don’t go…….!”
“Christa. You can’t trouble Al you know.”
In the end, Elna turned down her mission using the lake as the reason.
She honestly confessed her fear of water to Father.
For me and Leo, she forced herself to act as our guard last time but since she knows that she will
definitely be a hindrance to the mission this time, she wants to turn down her assignment.
As expected, Father acknowledged that and dispatched another imperial knight on the mission
instead.
Then Mother told Father that she wants Elna to act as her guard because she wants to hear more
stories about us, a plausible reason.
Father gave his permission. He is probably thinking that it is a good opportunity to give Elna a
vacation as well.
And right now I am saying goodbye to Mother and Christa before I leave the capital.
“Elna will be with us you know.”
“No……! I want to stay with Al-niisama…..!”
“….Christa. Do you trust me?”
407
“Un…..”
“I see.”
While stroking Christa’s head as she is hugging me, I am a loss.
Even if I forcefully left, Christa probably wouldn’t trust Elna here.
Well, I don’t mind that but I want her to be able to trust Elna if possible.
So I voice my thoughts out loud.
“Then I will leave my most trusted sword with you.”
“A sword…..?”
“Yeah. it’s the best sword in the whole continent. It will protect you from any opponent. So if you have
any trouble you can rely on it. If you feel like it is helpless then you can call its name instead of mine. It
will definitely come to save you.”
“But….”
“Still unsatisfied? It’s the sword that I trusted the most you know? It has protected me many times
already. even so, are you still unsatisfied?”
“…..uUn.”
“Good girl. It’s alright. Elna will protect you and Rita for me.”
With that said, I tightly hugged Christa and turned away.
Elna was standing there.
“Take care of my sister.”
“Please leave her to me.”
With that short exchange, I started walking forward.
I didn’t look back.
There is nothing to worry about anymore after all.
408
Malice and Good Will
In front of the room inside the inner palace.
Zandra just arrived there
“Okaa-sama! Okaa-sama!”
Treating the maids as if they were nonexistent, Zandra barged into the room.
It was the room of the Emperor’s Fifth Consort. The room of Zandra’s mother.
There’s a woman with glossy dark-green-hair inside, she let out a sigh and greeted her daughter.
“What happened? Zandra. Making such a fuss.”
“Of course I am making a fuss! Leonard just went to the south as an imperial inspector you know!? He
is bearing down on our support base!”
While watching her hysterical daughter, the dark green-haired woman, Zuzan smiled at her.
Perhaps irritated at her mother’s carefree smile, Zandra made a whip of wind and whipped it at one of
the maids.
“Kyaaaa!!?? Pl, Please forgive me!!”
“Shut up! Shut up! That damn Leonard! He just went to Oji-sama’s place!? No matter how much we are
pushed down, he has no right to do this!”
“Ahh!! Guh! F, Fo, Forgive me……….”
“Shut the hell up! Keep your trap shut! Your only purpose here is just to be a punching bag!”
Saying so, Zandra relentlessly continues to whip the already unconscious maid.
When Zandra finally calmed down, the maid already turned into a bloody mess.
Normally, she would feel a little guilty after she calmed down but without having any of that, Zandra
started speaking to her mother.
“It’s Leonard we are talking about. He will definitely investigate it thoroughly. If he found out about
that then we won’t be able to deny it.”
“You don’t have to worry about the matter in the south. Onii-sama is the one taking care of it. He will
definitely do a good job for us. Even if he fails, all the responsibility will be his after all. The fire won’t
spread to us.”
“Even so, we will lose support from the south.”
409
“It’s alright. If your research goes well, there’s nothing to be scared about right?”
“That’s true but……..”
“It will be fine as long as you and I are safe. We can reward those nobles after we take the throne. They
should let it slide before long. They can only obey the strong after all.”
Saying so, Zuzan smiles.
It was both a bewitching and brutal smile.
As Zandra usually doesn’t show much emotion on her face, Zuzan is a woman that usually keeps things
quiet inside as well.
Zuzan’s smile which was built on her violent nature over the years was already looked like the
definition of insanity.
“With the Emperor’s order, I can’t conduct any forbidden magic research anymore. The only one who
can do that is you.”
“I understand. Okaa-sama.”
“You are an excellent child. You are more qualified to be an empress than anyone else. You have taken
that part after me. The slave merchant should bring the children to you soon. They are your guinea
pigs. You have to perfect it. The perfect curse.”
“Yes. I will show you. And I will put them on anyone who dares to irritate me. They have no right to
irritate me like this. I will kill them all.”
“That’s right. That’s the spirit.”
While stroking her dark green hair, Zuzan stares at her daughter.
Her daughter has taken all the parts that she wanted her to have.
A daughter that could be said to be a copy of her.
Making Zandra into an empress is the same as making herself one.
“If push comes to shove, I will get rid of all those who get in your way again. You just have to do what
you can. It’s alright. We have a lot of allies after all.”
“Yes. Okaa-sama.”
Saying so, the mother and child hug each other.
If the Emperor saw them, he would definitely doubt that the two of them are really his consort and
daughter.
410
Both of them are having smiles that exude insanity that engrave pure horror onto the eyes of the
viewers.
The maids who saw such a smile desperately lower their heads down.
Then they pray.
A prayer to make this hell come to an end soon.
——————
Heading to the south, Leo arrived at a certain city.
It is the largest city in the south, Wumme.
It is a city ruled by the noble who has influence over all the southern region, Duke Kruger.
“Thank you very much for your cooperation, Duke Kruger.”
“No no, it is only natural for a noble to cooperate with the imperial inspector.”
Said the dark-green-haired man with a smile.
He is already over fifty but he still looked youthful.
He is a tall and slender man with a sword hanging on his waist. He was once a warrior who have
roamed many battlefields.
His name is Sven von Kruger.
He is the elder brother of the Fifth Consort as well as the Emperor’s brother in law.
“I think that you are the best person to ask about the matter of the south, Duke Kruger. Let me be
frank, have you seen any nobles here behave suspiciously?”
Leo stares straight at Duke Kruger.
Duke Kruger is involved in many things that happened in the south in some way or another. However,
Leonard can’t suddenly start accusing him.
First, he has to start with the matter at Lynfia’s village but he was wondering if the Duke will give up
any name before he starts.
“A suspicious noble? As far as I can see, there is no one that comes to mind but I can’t say for sure for
the nobles at the border since I don’t have a full grip of them after all.”
“Hou.”
411
He is saying that he doesn’t have complete control over them huh. It is quite fishy for him to keep it
ambiguous like that.
He can use that as an excuse to dodge the responsibility later after all.
However, that will not be enough.
Leo smiled while paying close attention to Kruger’s every move and continued their meeting.
——————————
While Leo was having a meeting with Duke Kruger, Lynfia was out shopping in the city.
Of course, she is gathering information around the city at the same time.
“And that one too.”
“Here ya go, thanks for your patronage.”
“You noticed any changes around here recently?”
“Changes? Hmm, I don’t really notice anything.”
That was the answer from the shopkeeper of a fruit stall.
This is the fifth time that she was given the same answer.
At least on the surface, there’s nothing wrong with this city.
“I see. Thank you.”
Saying so, Lynfia looks around while holding what she bought.
She already bought everything she needs and there is no point in gathering more information either.
When she was wondering what she should do next, Lynfia found a troubled gray-haired old man on
the side of the road.
“Sorry. can I ask you something……”
“……..”
“Hmm. people around here are really cold huh.”
Saying so, the old man sighed.
He is short and his ears are slightly pointy.
The old man is a dwarf. A normal dwarf looked old already but this old man seemed to be the oldest
dwarf she ever saw.
412
Instead of having a stout build, this dwarf has a long white beard and is very thin.
Couldn’t leave the old dwarf who has a crooked waist and walking with a white cane alone, Lynfia
lowers her knee and talks to him.
“Ojii-san. What’s wrong?”
“OOh, there’s still a good-natured girl here huh. Sorry, but can you guide me to the city’s gate? I’m lost
here for three days already.”
“Three days? That must have been terrible, let’s go, I will show you the way.”
Lynfia doesn’t let it show on her face but she was very surprised to know that this old dwarf has been
lost in the city for three days already.
She shows a smile to put the old man at ease and guide him.
The old man also smiles at her.
“Well, thank you, thank you. Nobody listens to me since I am a dwarf you see. I was really troubled
there.”
“Is that so. That was quite a disaster isn’t it.”
Lynfia’s tone may be normal but her words are full of sympathy.
The old man who felt that gave her a wide smile.
“Don’t worry don’t worry, I am really lucky to have a nice young lady like you helping me like this.”
“Me too…..I was helped when I was in trouble as well. No, I am still being helped right now.”
“Hou? You are troubled too huh, young lady.”
“Yes, well.”
“I see, I see. That must be difficult for you. Hm, this must be some kind of fate. I wonder if there is
anything I can do.”
Saying so, the old man opens his bag and begins to rummage its content.
Lynfia was trying to be reserved but the old man told her not to worry about it and continue looking
through his bag.
“Ojii-san. This way, this way.”
“Uun? Oh, this way huh.”
413
Since he was focusing on his bag, the old man almost went in the wrong direction the moment Lynfia
looks away.
With that being the case, Lynfia repeatedly put the old dwarf back on the right course and finally
noticed that they already arrived at the city gate.
“Ojii-san, we have arrived you know.”
“Un? Arrived? Where?”
“The gate.”
“Ohh! That’s right, I was finding my way to the gate! I was looking for something to give you as my
thanks, I forgot!”
The old man raised his face and gave her a hearty laugh.
Maybe you got lost in the first place because you have such a personality, Lynfia thought while
worrying if he will be okay heading home alone like this.
However.
“Young lady, I will give you this. It’s a whistle made of spirit wood. Blow it when you are in trouble.
Your ally will know where you are right away.”
“I can’t accept such a thing! Please take it back Ojii-san!”
“I don’t need it. You should have it, young lady. You have to blow it when you need to, you know. It’s
not a bad thing to rely on someone after all.”
The old man grins and leaves through the city gate.
Since the figure of his back looked so unreliable, Lynfia was very worried about him but since she has
her own mission, she can not afford to take care of him.
Bowing to the old man’s back, Lynfia heads back inside the city.
“It seems like I can not abandon the humans yet huh. Alright, where should I go next? I wonder if
someone will call me soon.”
The old man went off the road while muttering such a thing and disappeared into the mountain.
414
The First Princess
One week has passed since I left the Imperial Capital.
I finally arrived at the capital of the Duchy of Reinfeld.
“Welcome to Eltz, the capital city of the Duchy of Reinfeld. This is my mansion.”
“So we finally arrived.”
When I got off the carriage, I made a big stretch. In front of me is a big mansion. It’s plenty large for
living in but for a residence of a duke, it is probably considered a small mansion.
Well, compared to other ducal houses, the Reinfeld house who rule the southeastern area is not that
big. This size might be just right.
“It was a long journey so shall we take a rest first?”
“That’s true. I’m certainly tired.”
It took me five days to reach the Duchy of Kleinert on horseback. my horse almost collapsed because I
wanted to get there as soon as possible back then. However this time I’m not in a hurry. That’s why I
used the carriage and have a laid back trip this time.
Still, we used a state-of-the-art magic carriage reserved for royalties and dukes so we arrived here
much faster than a normal carriage would.
“I’m sorry. Your Highness must be tired because I kept on talking all the time.”
Jurgen said that with an apologetic expression.
I give him a bitter smile in return. Certainly, Jurgen has been talking non-stop in the carriage.
I did not find that unpleasant but it doesn’t mean that I’m not tired.
“I want to enter a bath if possible.”
“Please leave it to me. There is a large bath in my mansion. My mother is really particular about that
you see.”
“I will be looking forward to it then.”
While we were chatting with each other, Jurgen guided me inside the mansion.
However, once we entered the mansion, an elderly man who must have been Jurgen’s butler rushed
toward us.
“What happened? Rushing like that.”
415
“M, My lord, It’s terrible! Please be calm and listen to this!”
“You calm down first. Tell me what happened.”
Saying so, Jurgen calmed the butler down.
The butler who took a deep breath started speaking in a somewhat calm manner.
“H, Highness has just arrived.”
“Yeah, I know. He just came in here with me.”
“Th, That’s not it! I am not talking about His Highness Arnold my lord!”
“You are confusing him because you keep using the word Highness. Just refer to me as Her Excellency
the Marshal from now on.
A voice that made me want to kneel down on the spot suddenly reached my ears.
It was not intimidating but the voice made you feel like you can’t go against it, the voice of a natural-
born ruler.
The owner of that voice, who I would totally believe if someone told me that she was born to
command others, slowly descends down the stairs.
Abundant blonde hair and purple colored eyes. A height that is tall for a woman. Her glamorous and
tight military uniforms told of her good style. She is a beauty that can easily captivate the viewers but
she is wearing a blue mantle over her black military uniform. The ones who can wear such mantles
are only the three marshals of the Empire.
The name of this woman who is the adult version of Christa plus the bewitching beauty, invincibility,
and might is Lizelotte Lakes Adler.
She is the First Princess of the Empire as well as our strongest general.
“Lize-aneue….! Why are you here!?”
“Is that how you greet your sister who you haven’t seen for a long time? Do it again.”
“Eh….”
“Do it again.”
“…….It’s been a while. Lize-aneue. I am glad that you are in good health.”
“Good.”
Without making any excuses, I reluctantly redo my greeting again.
416
Perhaps she is already satisfied, Lize-aneue comes over with a smile.
“It’s been a while, Al. I’m glad that you are doing well as well. How is Christa doing?”
She suddenly started chatting with me. Her [my pace] attitude never changes huh.
Jurgen was taken by surprise and currently is kneeling down.
Normally, you would greet him because he is the owner of the house first right?
Well, there’s no use saying anything to this sister of mine after all. It doesn’t like she does not care
about others, she just doesn’t feel like doing so. This person is the personification of self-centeredness
after all.
“Christa is doing fine. She recently made a friend of the same age and started smiling a lot lately.”
“I see. Sorry that I always have you taking care of her.”
“No, she’s my little sister after all. And it’s Mother who was taking care of her in the first place.”
“Is that so. Is Mother doing fine as well?”
“Yes. she’s the same as usual.”
After hearing a series of reports, Lize-aneue satisfyingly nodded.
Finally, she turned her gaze toward Jurgen.
“Jurgen, sorry for barging in while you are away.”
“No, I’m sorry that I couldn’t welcome you.”
“Lize-aneue. Let me ask you again, why did you come here?”
The plan was to send her a letter after we arrived at the mansion.
Her being here like this is really unexpected.
This place is not that far from the eastern border, compared to the imperial capital that is.
It’s certainly not a great distance especially if we are talking about my sister here. Nevertheless, my
sister is a marshal who is in charge of the entire eastern border. She should n’t be able to move around
so easily.
“I heard that you were coming here when I was performing a drill for the new recruit in the rear so I
came to visit.”
“You heard that we were coming…….”
What kind of information network does she have?
417
Not only the speed in which the news arrived at her ears but also the ability to gather such intel as
well.
“Now, I told you my reason. It’s time for you to tell me your reason for coming here with Jurgen right?”
“Eh……that is……..”
This is bad. Did I just dig my own grave?
Should I tell her the truth?
When I was hesitating, Lize-aneue suddenly smiled.
“You don’t have to say it. It was Father who put you up to this right?”
“……you understand me well.”
“It’s Father we are talking about after all. I know well what he’s like.”
Letting out an astonished sigh, Lize-aneue turned to Jurgen.
Jurgen looks awkward but it doesn’t look like he is intending to hide anything from her.
“You never learned huh, Jurgen. You even got my brother involved in all this too, what are you
intending to do?”
“The same as usual, Lizelotte-sama.”
“I see. Then my reply is still the same. I will not marry you. I will not marry anyone who can’t die
together with me.”
“I know that well. Even so, I………!”
“Enough. I haven’t seen Al in a while, I want to talk with him so I will be borrowing one of your
rooms.”
“….Yes.”
Turning her mantle, Lize-aneue walks off like it is her own mansion.
Her back told me to follow after her but I can’t just comply with her here.
“Lize-aneue. I’m tired because of the long journey, can I have some time to wipe my sweat first?”
“I don’t mind that.”
“I do mind.”
“You are saying such a maiden-like thing. Well, fine. I want to refresh myself as well. It’s been a long
time so let’s enter together.”
418
“Yes…..?”
What did she just say. This sister.
There’s no way I would enter the bath with you right!
“N, no, I will refrain from that……!”
“Don’t be shy. I will wash your back for you.”
“I, I will enter it with Duke Reinfeld! We have become good friends on our way here so I want to talk
with him more!”
It’s painful but there’s no other way to decline my sister.
Maybe he guessed what I was thinking, Jurgen also supported me.
“Lizelotte-sama. I will wash His Highness Arnold’s back so please rest assured.”
“I see.”
“Yes. so Lize-aneue, please wait inside the……….”
“Can’t be helped then. Let’s all get in the bath together.”
“Yes!?”
“It would be troublesome to go in separately right? What? It’s fine. I don’t have a body that I would be
ashamed to be looked at after all.”
“Buh!!”
He must have unintentionally imagined it.
Jurgen spilled a large amount of nosebleed and crouches down on the floor.
Seeing that, Lize-aneue merrily smiles.
“HaHaHa, you are immature as usual, Jurgen.”
“This is not a laughing matter you know! For the time being, please wait in your room! Alright,
Aneue?”
“What? Don’t you want to enter a bath with your sister?”
“Yes, I don’t want to so please wait in your room!”
“Is that so. There’s no helping it then. You two go enjoy yourselves.”
Saying so, Lize-aneue climbed up the stairs with a bored expression.
419
That was dangerous. She was about to get the Duke killed. A murder case where the Empire’s marshal,
as well as the First Princess, caused a Duke to bleed out to death from his nose is not a laughing
matter. She will literally bleed him dry after all.
“Duke, are you okay?”
“I, I’m fine……but, as expected of Lizelotte-sama. She is so manly……”
“That would be her throwing away her womanly part though…..”
“No, she just loves teasing me as usual……but that’s exactly why Her Highness is so lovely…….”
“If it’s my sister then anything goes for you isn’t it…..”
Realizing that both of them are equally strange in the head, I let out a sigh. Just like that, I entered the
bath with Jurgen to wipe away our fatigue from the long journey.
TLN: So basically this
420
The Unreasonable Sister
After taking a bath to wash away all the dirt and fatigue we got from the long trip, I and Jurgen talked
about our future course of action while dressing up.
“We are riding on Aneue’s pace right now. We have to get away from that somehow.”
“Yes, but she really did take away the first strike hasn’t she.”
The expression on Jurgen’s face was not one of regret but that of admiration.
Well, she did brilliantly shattered our plan but it’s not the time to be impressed with that.
“As her little brother, I got the impression that she doesn’t dislike you, Duke Reinfeld. Rather, I think
that she took a liking to you actually.”
“Is that true!?”
“It was just my gut feeling but that is just how Lize-aneue is. Even if I am here at your mansion, she
would never visit a mansion of someone she dislikes. As I thought, there must be another reason for
her to not accept your proposal, maybe it was about the thing she said earlier.”
“ [ I will not marry anyone who can’t die together with me], was it………”
“Yes. conversely, if we can meet that condition, she might not be against the idea of marriage anymore
as well. There’s nothing we can do if she hates the idea of marriage itself but she is still the Emperor’s
daughter. She should have been told from a young age that one day she will have to get married. That’s
why if we can meet her requirement, you might still have a chance.”
“I see….but for me to die together with her, I would have to be by her side.”
That’s the problem.
Aneue went out of her way to kick Jurgen out of the army when he enlisted.
She blocked the chance for Jurgen to be by her side.
That one point is unlike what my sister would do. It wasn’t because Jurgen messed up inside the army,
she herself moved to kick him out.
There’s something suspicious about that.
“In any case, we have to prove to her that you can fight.”
“Understood. let’s show Lizelotte-sama the result of my training.”
Saying so, Jurgen proudly hits his belly.
421
When I saw that fluttering flap of meat, it somehow made me anxious, I won’t say that out loud
though.
—————————-
“You sure took your time. Does it take that long to wash your body?”
“You will be punished by the god of bath if you say that the bath only exists to wash your body, you
know.”
That’s the first thing she says to us but Lize-aneue’s hair is still so glossy.
From her figure of speech, she is probably only washing it normally as well.
Women all over the world are going to frown at you, you know.
Me and Jurgen head to the round table Aneue is sitting at. Teas are already prepared on the table.
There are sweets too but I can’t reach out to grab it because Aneue pulled the plate toward her.
“Is that so? Water is precious on the battlefield after all. I don’t really have that much chance to use
one.”
“You didn’t like it ever since when we were at the Imperial Capital though?”
“It was real annoying at the Imperial Capital since the maids were so persistent. Because of that I
always took a quick bath no matter where I am. I really don’t understand how you enjoy taking it.”
In a way, those maids were quite amazing huh.
Don’t they afraid for their lives when they have to enter the bath with this sister of mine and wash her
back?
Well, if they care about that then they won’t be able to do their job though.
Being a maid is full of hardships huh. I guess I will have to bring some sweets for my mother’s maids
next time.
“There are a lot of opportunities to take a bath then after all. Lizelotte-sama might have unconsciously
come to head it because of that.”
“Ohh! That’s it! You sure said something good, Jurgen.”
Lize-aneue praises Jurgen with a smile.
She then gave one of the sweets in front of her to Jurgen as a reward.
That Aneue gave away something of hers!?
422
This is a shock. Lize-aneue is quite possessive about her stuff. Even in my case, I have only received
something from her a handful of times.
In the past, one of Lize-aneue’s subordinates offended a high-ranking noble and got beaten black and
blue. When she heard about that, Lize-aneue went up to that noble and said this.
My subordinates are mine. They gave even their lives to me. That means you people just damaged my
property without my permission.
After that, Lize-aneue beat up that noble.
It was quite a scandal at the time but I remember the Crown Prince mediated between them before
the matter escalated.
And that sister is now giving away her sweets to Jurgen……. Well, reasonably speaking, that sweets
originally belonged to Jurgen and it was served to be enough for three people to eat though.
Still, this is very unusual. This alone already shows that she took quite a liking to Jurgen.
“I gratefully accept.”
“Umu.”
Jurgen is grateful for receiving the sweets and my sister has accepted that attitude as a matter of
course.
She might just be in a good mood today.
Let’s try reaching out for one and check out that theory.
Immediately, Aneue turned around toward me and I received a shock on my back. Before I noticed, I
was already lying on the floor.
“We haven’t met in a while but it seems your manner has grown unruly huh? Al.”
“You never changed, Lize-aneue……”
my outstretched right hand was grabbed at the wrist by my sister.
It seems she twisted my wrist and caused me to completely lose my balance. Moreover, she ensured
that I landed softly on the floor as well.
To did all that for just some sweets, what a scary sister…….
“That’s weird….I thought that you were in a good mood?”
“I am. I get to meet you after a long time after all. Even though you were a cold little brother who
doesn’t even come to visit me when you have free time and only played around inside the Imperial
Capital, I am still in a good mood just because I get to meet you. Aren’t I a great sister?”
423
“I wonder about that. Do you think people find a sister who throws his brother on the ground just
because he tried to grab some sweets, a great sister?”
“It’s because you silently tried to take my sweets right.”
“Isn’t that just strange? It was prepared for three people, isn’t it? It should be alright for everyone to
share it.”
“It was there in front of me, that means it’s mine.”
“………”
Saying so, Aneue deliciously picked up one of the sweets and ate it.
There are not many sweets at the front line. As a marshal, she can live there extravagantly but since it
will make a bad example in front of her soldiers, she lives mundanely among them.
I guess it’s her first sweets after a long while so she is fully enjoying it.
Looking at such Aneue, Jurgen also seems happy.
But why. Why do I have to be the only one who got my wrist twisted? This is unreasonable.
Even though I have been struggling for a while now, I still couldn’t escape my sister’s restraint.
“Aneue. Isn’t it time you let me go already?”
“Why?”
“WHY NOT!?”
“I can’t let go because you still haven’t apologized, right?”
“I told you, it was prepared for three people.”
“It’s mine.”
“………….I’m sorry that I tried to steal the sweets.”
“Isn’t that a bit lacking?”
“I am sorry that I tried to steal [Your] sweets.”
“Good.”
She finally released me.
When I returned to my chair while rubbing at my wrist, there were almost no sweets left in front of
my sister.
424
“Hm? Jurgen. The sweets have already run out you know?”
“Please don’t say it like they naturally disappeared. Aneue was the one who ate it right.”
“I will immediately prepare more.”
“Umu.”
“…….”
Why do I have to be the butt of the joke here?
Jurgen clapped his hands and the maids brought the cake in on a small plate. I can tell that it is sweet
from the smell but it’s not an unpleasant sweetness. Is that a cheesecake? It looks delicious.
The first one was placed in front of Aneue, the next one is for m———–Aneue stretched her hand out
from the side and snatched it away.
I can’t stand it anymore!
“Hey!! Isn’t that just strange!!”
“What?”
“EVERYTHING! WHY DID YOU SNATCH AWAY MY PLATE!? ANEUE ALREADY HAVE YOURS RIGHT!?”
“There’s none though?”
“YOU ATE IT ALREADY!? So fast!? WAIT, THAT’S MINE! Pleas don’t just eat it!”
“My brother’s thing is also mine.”
“WHAT’S THAT TYRANT OF A REASONING? THEN IF I TOLD YOU THAT MY SISTER’S THINGS ARE
ALSO MINE YOU WOULD BE ALRIGHT WITH THAT TOO RIGHT!?”
“I will not bow down to tyranny.”
“WHA!? HIYA!”
Realizing that it is useless to argue with her I recklessly reached out for the cake.
However, she easily parries my attack with one hand and uses the other hand to eat the cake.
Damn it!
I decided to accept her challenge and attack her with both hands but all of it was parried away with
one hand.
During that time, Aneue already ate all my cake.
425
“Ahhh……”
“Your Highness Arnold. Please, have mine.”
“Duke….thank you. I will eat it now.”
“I just told you that my brother’s things are mine, you know?”
The cake Jurgen offered was intercepted before it reached my hand.
Then, in the end, it all went into my sister’s belly.
How unreasonable…..
at the end of the day, I couldn’t eat anything on that table.
426
The Blau Mowe Effect
Around the time Al arrived at the Duchy of Reinfeld.
Things get busied inside the Imperial Capital for Finne.
“Hawawa!!?? Wh, What should I do! What should we do!? Yuriya-san!”
“Just stay still alright.”
“We are ope——n!”
At the same time that the opening of the Imperial Capital branch of Ajin company was announced, a
flood of people who have been forming a long line in front started pouring in.
Their aim is the [Beauty water], a new product launched by the Ajin company.
It is a good product in itself but the Ajin company has added a catchphrase to it.
“Everyone! Our Beauty water, the product that the Blau Mowe herself currently uses is now on sale!
There are only 300 bottles of [Seagull water] available today, please make sure to buy it!”
(TLN: reminder, Blau Mowe = blue seagull)
The beastman clerk is cutely advertising the product.
What inside the bottle appeared to be clear water.
There are a lot of people mixed inside but the customers’ eyes all point toward Finne.
“It’s really Finne-sama! I will take one of these!”
“She’s the real deal! Give me three!”
“Five bottles!”
“This is annoying! Give me ten!!”
The beauty water that was used by the most beautiful woman in the Empire.
That was the magic word that attracts the women of the Imperial capital. Customers were rushing into
the store to grab the beauty water and the only three hundred available bottles were quickly sold out.
The catchphrase alone might not have been this effective but Finne herself was waving at the
customers from the second storey of the store as well.
The presence of the real Finne being there had a huge effect and within a few days after its launch, the
Seagull water became the best selling product inside the Imperial Capital.
427
“Thank you for your hard work, Finne.”
“Th, that was really surprising…….”
Yuriya was smiling the whole time as she saw her strategy become a success.
On the other hand, Finne couldn’t help but worry about all the female customers who rushed in to buy
the product like knights rushing into an enemy camp.
“Even before the store opened, everyone was staring at me so……I was wondering what to do if they
all came at me…….”
“Sorry, but get used to it. I will compensate you later.”
“Yes! I will do my best!”
The figure of Finne gripping her small hands still looks beautiful from the perspective of a woman like
Yuriya.
When the male customers saw that, they wanted to rush inside the store as well but they have to give
up because Yuriya did not allow any non-female customers into the store today.
Although some of the customers were trying to forcibly enter, all of them were turned away by the
Ajin company’s proud demihumans bouncers.
As a result, words started to spread inside the Imperial Capital that no violence will be forgiven inside
their store.
And after seeing that, Yuriya decided to make the next move.
“Finne. We will move to the next strategy tomorrow.”
“Next strategy? What should I do?”
“The same as this one. For now, just wave your hand and show your affection. I will double the
security for you.”
“Double…..?”
Finne looks around her.
There are already three strong demihuman bodyguards surrounding her. If she is going to double this
then she would have six total guards around her.
Imagined herself being surrounded by six people, Finne started to panic.
“T, they will completely bury me……!”
428
“It’s fine. Just letting them have a glimpse is enough. Just by knowing that the Blau Mowe is here the
men will come running in.”
“Is, is that so?”
“Yes. we will be wringing out the money from those stupid men. Fu fu fu, I won’t let them touch even a
single strand of your hair.”
“P, please don’t overdo it……”
“I know. I will keep it moderately. Yeah, moderately.”
Saying so Yuiriya is showing off an evil smile.
Seeing that smile, Finne thought that she looked like Al but she didn’t say it out loud.
The next day. Finne started to think that Yuriya’s evil plan might be even eviler than Al’s.
“Everyo–ne! The Ajin company, Imperial capital branch is now op–en!”
When the demihuman clerk dressed in a cute costume announced that, a large number of male
customers came into the store.
Finne waved at those male customers with an awkward smile on her face.
“UOooo!!!! It’s Finne-sama!! It’s really Finne-sama!! She is even cuter in person than in the portrait and
the illusion flyers!!”
“She’s so beautiful! So dazzling! She’s the light that is shining upon us!”
“I have to burn this sight into my eyes! I will never forget it until I die!”
The Ajin company had previously advertised Finne using portraits and posters along with illusion
flyers that were mass-produced by the mages, those flyers can show them the image of Finne for a
short period of time.
Just the opportunity to be able to see the real Blau Mowe already attracted the male customers to visit
the store after all.
However, some people did not read those flyers thoroughly.
“Finne-sama! Please look this way! Finne-sama!”
“You bastard! If you didn’t come here to buy something then get the hell out!”
“Shut up! I don’t feel like buying anything here!”
A young man who loudly said that was restrained by the large demihuman bouncer and escorted out
of the store.
429
“Wh, what are you doing!?”
“Dear customer. Did you read the note on the flyers?”
“Wha!? What note!?”
Seeing the customer’s reaction, the bouncer sighed and pointed at the bottom of the nearby poster.
There was a fairly large text saying, [Customers who do not intend to buy any products will be turned
away, in case you refused to comply you will be charged a penalty fee].
The face of the young man who did not read it thoroughly turned blue but it was already too late.
He was taken to the back of the store by a bouncer.
“Yu, Yuriya-san.”
“It’s alright. We won’t hurt him. We will just make him buy something, that’s all. If they don’t have any
money then they will have to pay with their labor though.”
“Is, is that so………”
Relieved, Finne exhaled.
Looking at such Finne, Yuriya smiled.
“Wh, what is it?”
“No, I just thought that you are really kind. Normally, no one would worry about a guy like that right.”
“Is, is that really so?”
“It is. But I think you are fine just like that. There’s already a villain like me here, after all, a good girl
like you being here might be better for us.”
“I think Yuriya-san is already a kind person!”
“You think so? I am only thinking about how to wring out all the money from the guys here though?”
“You can’t hide it! I know. Yuriya-san has been focusing all the posters on the places where wealthy
people live and you have been feeding people of the outer wall district as well. I know that you have
been doing a lot of things like that.”
It doesn’t matter what you do if they have money but it is still Yuriya’s policy to not target poor
people.
There are many isolated demihumans who are unable to blend into the human society gathering at the
Ajin company. At the same time, there are many poor demihumans living in the outer wall district so
after seeing that, Yuriya decided to regularly open a soup kitchen for them there.
430
And that was still when the imperial branch didn’t open yet.
Yuriya has been using money from her own pocket to do that without aiming for any profit.
“How did you know about that?”
Yuriya muttered in suspicion but Finne only smiles as she looks at the bouncers.
Since the security at the store couldn’t be said that it is on the same level as the castle, the bouncers
always stick themselves close to Finne.
Finne was chatting with them and got to hear a lot of things from them.
“You talked.”
“I’m sorry……I did it without thinking.”
“Haaa…….”
“Everyone has been praising Yuriya-san you know! They told me what a wonderful person you are!
You started the Ajin company because there are a lot of demihumans in the continent that were hated
by humans because of the bad rumors about them right! I am very impressed that you have created a
place for the lonely demihumans and even if it’s just a little, you have better their reputation too!”
“Seriously…..you made me sound like some kind of a gentle lady.”
“But it’s a fact.”
Yuriya lightly kicked the bouncer’s leg.
And that’s the end of it.
She said that she is going to oversee the sale and went downstairs.
“Did she get angry?”
“I think she is just being shy.”
“Is that so. Yuriya-san is really a cute person isn’t she.”
While saying something that would surely get Yuriya angry, Finne continued to wave her hand at the
customers below.
After continuing that for a while, at the time people finished buying their stuff, Finne retired to the
back of the store.
If she’s there, customers will keep coming in after all.
“Fuu, I’m tired.”
431
“Good work.”
Yuriya handed Finne a cup of tea while thanking her.
In her hands was a piece of paper with today’s sales record.
The amount of money written there was an amount that Yuriya had never seen even though she has
been doing business for a long time.
“It seems I have misunderstood the effect of the Blau Mowe. I guess I will have to review this again.”
“Was it too low!?”
“It’s the opposite you know, the opposite. If I don’t start restocking now, we will immediately run out
of merchandise after all.”
“Ah, is that so! I’m glad!”
Finne drinks her tea with the satisfaction that she has been of use today.
However, all of a sudden, Sebas appeared in the room.
The bouncers reacted immediately but Yuiriya told them to stand down.
“Stop! It’s His Highness Arnold’s butler.”
“Sebas-san? Is there something wrong? Appearing all of a sudden.”
“It’s terrible! Please return to the castle immediately!”
“Eh…..”
“Her Highness Christa has been kidnapped. Right now, Elna-sama is currently pursuing them but
there’s a possibility that Finne-sama might become a target as well. Please hurry!”
It was a report terrible enough to ruin Finne’s good mood.
432
433
The Leaked Secret
Going back a little in time.
Elna was assigned as Mitsuba’s escort at the inner palace but the big part of that job was guarding
Christa.
When Mitsuba and Christa took separate actions, she is always with Christa and Mitsuba accepted it as
a matter of course.
That day, Christa went to visit Rita who is training inside the castle and Elna also went with her.
“Tadahhh! Look look! Kuu-chan!”
“What is that….?”
Rita who was at the castle square took out a coin to show it off to Christa.
At first glance, it looks like some shabby coin.
Still, Rita shows it off proudly to Christa.
“I wonder–? Do you want to kn–ow?”
“Eh, tell me…..!”
“Unn, what should I do? I wonder?”
“Fine! I will ask Elna! Elna, tell me.”
“Eehhhh! ! ? ?”
Christa walked with her small steps toward Elna who was watching over then nearby and asked her.
Seeing that Elna shows a bitter smile.
Naturally, it is something that Rita, a knight candidate, uses so as an imperial knight herself, Elna also
knows what it is.
However, Elna turns her gaze toward Rita while wondering if she should really intervene in a
children’s conversation.
Seeing the look of wanting to show off a new toy to her friend on Rita’s face, Elna thinks about the old
days.
She thinks of herself when she proudly shows off new swords or magic tools she got her hands on to
Al and Leo.
434
“Right….it’s a secret tool for the knights so I can’t simply tell you what it is. If you win against me in a
game then I will tell you.”
“Game….?”
“Yes. it’s an easy game. I will hide a stone somewhere and if Your Highness can find it then it will be
Your Highness’s victory. Rita, you come here too.”
“Ye–s.”
Rita said so curiously while paying close attention to Elna’s actions.
It might not be on the level of admiration but Elna who is a famous Onee-san is still someone
interesting to her.
Elna picks up the stone that had fallen on the flowerbed and places it on her palm to show them.
“Rita. you join too. I won’t tell Her Highness Christa what it is if you win against me.”
“Really!? Rita will do it!”
“Un, it’s good that you are so energetic. Alright, this here is a simple stone. I will now hide this stone.
Please pay attention okay.”
“Un……!”
“I won’t let it out of my sight–!”
Elna moves the stone in her right hand to her left while thinking that the two of them who are staring
so intensely at it looked amusing. Then she switched the stone back and forth between her hands.
At first, it was at a speed that the children were able to catch up, but eventually, she sped it up until it
became invisible to their eyes.
Unable to understand what is happening in front of them, the two only staring blankly at the scene but
Elna soon stops her hands.
The hands that were opened have now become a fist and Elna pushed them out in front of the two
with a smile.
“Alright, where do you think it is?”
“Unn, which one〜〜?”
“I have no clue……”
“It must be this one!”
“Y, you can’t! Rita! We have to cooperate here! I will take the right and Rita should take the left.”
435
“OOHH!! Kuu-chan is so smart! That’s it! Rita will take the left!”
“I will pick the right….!”
Elna’s smile got even wider after seeing the children used their child-like logic and came up with the
answer.
However, Elna had no stone in both of her hands.
Since the stone that should have been there disappeared, their eyes turned into dots but soon Christa
shiveringly muttered something.
“E, Elna ate it……….”
“I, I didn’t! It’s in your breast pockets!”
Elna points to the breast pockets of the children to clear that huge misunderstanding.
Hearing that, they notice that their breast pockets are bulging and look inside them.
Then.
“OOHH!!?? THERE ARE TWO STONES IN RITA’S POCKET!?”
“Two stone………Elna, cheating……..?”
“I didn’t cheat. It’s the stone Your Highness just saw.”
“But there’s two now!”
“I cut it.”
“Woww!! Amazing! You are so amazing, Elna-nee!!”
“……….”
Despite Rita’s excitement, Christa remembered what Al said to her.
The word he said was [My Sword].
At that time, Christa thought that he was just saying it as a metaphor.
Christa looked at Elna and convincingly nodded.
“Elna is a sword…..touching is dangerous……”
“W, why!?”
While having such a conversation, Elna was a little relieved.
436
When she first began escorting her, Christa made a small wall between them.
To get rid of that wall, Elna told her stories about Al. she wouldn’t be able to act as her escort if she is
on guard against her after all.
In return, however, she ended up telling Christa many stories about Al’s uncool side but Elna put it as
a necessary expense. Al was the one who asked her to do this after all.
Now that she opens up to her, Elna is confident that Christa is now trusting her properly.
“Elna, since both of us were wrong, who is the winner…..?”
“Hmmm, since it is my victory then I will be the one who will explain it to Your Highness. Rita, let me
borrow the coin. Both of them.”
“Yes! Elna-nee.”
So she is going to call me that from now on huh, while thinking so, Elna receives two shabby coins
from Rita. Then she handed one to Christa.
“Please hold it properly alright.”
“Un…..”
“Alright then, like before, I will hide this coin again, please do pay attention.”
Saying so, Elna switches the coin back and forth between her hand like she previously did
She then raised the speed until they couldn’t see the coin anymore and put her fists in front of them.
“Alright, where do you think it is?”
“Breast pocket!”
“Your left side back pocket.”
“Both of you are incorrect.”
Elna opens her hands.
There were no coins in there nor in their breast pocket.
The two keep looking for them but they couldn’t find it in the end.
“Now, Your Highness Christa, please take out the coin I handed you earlier.”
“This…….?”
“Yes. please place it on your hand just like that, Rita too, put your finger on that coin.”
437
“Yes!”
“Alright, please look closely okay. [Bande].”
With Elna muttered a word infused with a small amount of magic power, a thin thread of light extends
out from the coin.
It then led to a pocket on Elna’s skirt.
Elna takes out the coin from her skirt pocket with her free hand and shows how it is being connected
by a thread to Christa’s.
“These coins are called [Munze] (TLN: Kanji, Bond coin). They are magic tools that act as one. If you
say the password while touching one a thread will extend from it to its counterpart. This thread is
basically visible only to the person touching the coin. People who are good at magic are one thing but
there should only be a few people who can see through it.”
“Amazing….then I can contact my friend with this?”
“Sometimes it is used for setting up a secret meeting and there are some that use it for its tracking
purpose as well. One person can hold on to a coin and sneak inside the enemy’s camp while another
person carries the second coin to stealthily follow in. As the production can not keep up with the
usage, only the knights in the area around the imperial capital have it but it will eventually spread
throughout the Empire. That being the case, Rita, don’t lose it okay? Since you are a knight apprentice,
it is only being lent to you after all. Your instructor gave it to you because he wanted to see if you can
take care of it right?”
“Y—es!”
It’s great that she’s energetic but Elna still sighed at her laid back reply.
Ignoring such Elna, Rita and Christa went away to play at the castle square.
“Will she really be able to become a knight like that……….”
There has never been a case where a knight apprentice at the castle became an imperial knight.
However, Elna expected Rita to be the first person to do it. She thought that Rita needed to be by
Christa’s side after all.
If she becomes an imperial knight, she will be able to become an escort of the imperial family
members. Rita, who is not from the Brave house like Elna, could become Christa’s personal guard if
Christa wishes for it.
With such a future in mind, Elna focuses her mind.
To protect that future, Elna must crush that cruel future first.
As Elna affirmed her resolve, she heard Christa’s screaming voice as she was calling Rita’s name.
438
“RITA!”
“I’m fine! I’m fine! Ah.”
Rita climbs up a pillar in the square and when she looks down at Rita, she loses her balance and
releases her hand.
Rita is falling down to the ground.
However, Elna instantly responded and lightly caught her.
“Seriously, a knight shouldn’t make a royalty worry about her alright? Rita.”
“Ahaha…..sorry.”
“Rita! Are you okay!? Are you hurt!?”
The pillar was not that high.
Even if she falls, there shouldn’t be many injuries. That was something that Elna learned from
experience.
In the past, she once called Al out here for a special training session. As expected, Al who couldn’t do
exercise at all fell from it and he only received some scratches.
However, Christa’s dismay here was abnormal.
It must have been related to the future she saw.
“I’m fine, see. I usually do this much you know.”
“Stop it! Don’t do something so dangerous anymore!”
“Your Highness, please calm down a bit.”
“Rita! I can see the future you know! Rita will be in danger! That’s why, Nghn!?”
Elna quickly closed her mouth.
Elna watches the surroundings while keeping her hand on Christa’s mouth.
After she confirms that there is no one around them, Elna lets out a sigh and looks at Christa.
“Your Highness, Al told you that you have to keep that a secret right?”
“……..He did…….I’m sorry.”
“Since you already told her it couldn’t be helped but Rita you have to forget what she said earlier
alright.”
439
“The earlier thing? I got it!”
“Rita answers her with a smile.
Elna didn’t forbid her to speak about it.
Even if Rita told others about it, it will be treated as childish nonsense, and even if Elna didn’t tell her
to be silent about it, she doesn’t think that Rita is the type that would start spreading rumors.
Rita, who grew up among various children can read the mood as a child could so it should be fine,
that’s what Elna thought.
However, Elna did not know.
There is someone whose presence even Elna couldn’t detect nearby.
And the fact that she is a maid of a person who they should keep this secret away from the most.
“I have to report this to Zandra-sama.”
Saying so, the brown-haired maid shows a thin smile.
She has been tailing Elna according to Zandra’s order and she just got an unexpected windfall.
She was extraordinary to be able to tail Elna around without her noticing.
Even when she had been thoroughly trained, she still had cold sweat at the fear of getting noticed. If
she is just another one of Zandra’s assassins then she would probably have been found already.
However, for Elna to be her guard also added credibility to that truth.
The truth that the Third Princess Christa has the ability to see the future. In other words, she is
someone who possesses an innate magic.
Harboring such confidence, the maid slowly disappeared into the darkness.
440
The Approaching Future
The Inner Palace.
Inside the room of the Fifth Consort, the brown-haired maid was making her report to Zandra and
Zuzan.
“Is there no doubt about that?”
“Yes, there’s no mistake. Their vigilance was clearly abnormal.”
“If it’s coming from you who have been trained as an assassin from a young age then there shouldn’t
be any mistake here.”
Zuzan speaks to the maid while sitting on top of her chair. Her expression was full of trust.
Zandra also doesn’t look down on that maid.
Because she knew. Among their many maids, this one maid in front of her is exceptional
“I thought that an innate magic that allows you to see the future only exists in legend but…..Okaa-
sama. I want it.”
“Right. she will surely be a worthy specimen. Don’t you think so too? Xiaomei.”
The maid, Xiaomei, raises her face and agrees to her master’s words.
Satisfied with her reply, Zuzan started thinking.
No matter how much they want her as their specimen, the other side is an imperial princess. Directly
taking her is too dangerous. Moreover, she is the daughter of the Second Consort. If anything happens
to her, she will be the first person to be under suspicion.
“Wouldn’t it be fine to have Xiaomei grab her for us?”
“Use your head a little. If you do it directly, they will surely start to suspect me. I am already under
suspicion even if I don’t do anything anyway. It’s fine if they are suspicious of me but if their
investigation led to me, you will be ruined too you know.”
“It would be too much for me to fool the eyes of the heir of the Amsberg house as well……but I have a
good proposal.”
“Ara? Do tell.”
“Let’s use the merchant that Zandra-sama has been getting supplies from to do the kidnapping for us.”
“What are you saying!? If they get caught, the fact that someone has been supplying me with children
will come out you know!?”
441
“Zandra. Keep quiet.”
Zuzan calms Zandra down and urges Xiaomei to continue.
Xiaomei who is used to Zandra’s outburst gives her a nod and continues talking with no shred of fear.
“Since His Highness Leonard has been dispatched to the south, it is only a matter of time before that
merchant will be connected to the kidnapping cases.”
“That’s not necessarily the case! Oji-sama won’t let the likes of Leonard get the better of him!”
“But there is still a risk, am I correct?”
“Yes. that’s why we should use them here. If they succeed, they will bring Her Highness Christa to us
and in case they failed, we can just destroy them ourselves.”
“What if there are survivors who can rat us out?”
“Please do not worry. I will be the one who does the cleaning up myself.”
Saying so, Xiaomei shows them a smile.
Her smile was terrifyingly creepy even from Zuzan and Zandra’s perspective.
Still, Zuzan and Zandra do not let go of her. She is overwhelmingly outstanding and like the other
maids of theirs, Xiaomei also has a [Curse] put on her.”
She is a powerful assassin with a collar that can not be removed.
That’s why she is the favorite of both Zandra and Zuzan.
So they accepted Xiaomei’s proposal.
Zandra and Zuzan are smiling. Zandra is thrilled by the innate magic she has never got her hand on
before while Zuzan is enjoying the future where the daughter of the hated Second Consort will be
experimented on.
Thus the plan was put into practice.
—————————————————–
“The Fifth Consort has extended her invitation for Your Highness Christa and Elna-sama, she said that
she has something to talk with the two of you, my ladies.”
Hearing the maid relayed that message, Elna frowned.
Elna has heard the story between the Second Consort and Zuzan before.
442
Bringing the daughter of the Second Consort like Christa to Zuzan’s place is like bringing a small
animal into a beast lair. There’s no way to know what she will do to her.
However, inside the inner palace, the word of a consort is absolute. Starting from the Empress, the
higher one position is, the more powerful influence they have. The Third and the Fifth Consorts who
also participated in the succession war are especially powerful. Mitsuba’s influence is incomparable to
them as she is not actively involved in the succession war.
“Since Mitsuba-sama is not available today we will accept the invitation another day.”
“Her Highness is inviting the two of you while being aware of that.”
It would have been possible to refuse if Mitsuba was here but unfortunately Mitsuba has been called
away by the Emperor.
Since he has sent both Al and Leo on a mission, the Emperor also has to take care of Mitsuba.
Elna looks at Christa who is hiding behind her.
If she brings her there it will be hell. Even if I go there alone it will be the same.
Refusing is not an option here either. If she does that, they will use that as a reason to attack Mitsuba.
However, it is unfair to bring Christa to a woman who might be her mother’s enemy.
Nevertheless, there is a matter about that future to consider as well. Leaving her side is too dangerous
of an option.
“Tell the Fifth Consort that we need a little time to prepare ourselves.”
“Understood.”
Saying so, the maid leaves the room.
However, this is but a borrowed time.
“Are you alright? Your Highness.”
“Elna….I don’t want to go…..”
“Of course. Your Highness will remain here and I will be going there alone.”
“Elna is going…….?”
“If I don’t go Mitsuba-sama will be in a tough spot. So Your Highness must never leave this room. You
guys understand?”
After she talked to Christa, Elna gave a command to the guards that were assigned to Mitsuba.
443
The inner palace guards only consist of women and are in charge of the security inside the inner
palace. A portion of them are assigned to each consort and even if another consort has a higher
standing, they are not allowed to speak to other consort’s guards. They are something like their
private soldiers.
The only exception to this rule is the Empress who oversees the inner palace but since the current
Empress will not intervene unless something big happens, they are acting more like the consorts’
private soldiers at the present.
“Yes, please leave her to us.”
“No matter what, even if Her Highness herself told you she wanted to leave, you mustn’t let her out of
this room alright.”
“Yes!”
Under this special circumstance, Elna was given command over Mitsuba and Christa’s guards.
However, Elna is still worried because she couldn’t use her direct subordinates.
There is not enough manpower.
The situation would be different if she can bring Marc along but the inner palace is a palace
exclusively for women. No man can enter this place without permission.
“Listen, Your Highness. Please promise me that you will not leave this room.”
“Okay……I won’t leave this room…….”
“Thank you very much. Even if they used my name, you must never come out alright.”
Saying so, Elna strokes Christa’s head and leaves the room.
The sudden disappearance of Elna is making Christa anxious.
So Christa wrapped herself with the futon on her bed and hugged her favorite bunny doll.
However, a report came in and shook Christa’s heart.
“Y, Your Highness! It’s terrible! H, His Highness Arnold is!”
“Al-niisama!? Did he return already!?”
Christa responded to the report with a voice filled with anxiety and noticed that the maid that came in
to report to her was covered in blood. Since the maid looked fine, she understood that those are not
the maid’s blood.
Something happened.
444
Christa’s body intuitively shakes.
“Wh ,what is ……”
“They’ve encountered monsters on their way here. It seems he was injured while he was protecting
Duke Reinfeld from a monster’s attack…..it is quite serious.”
“No……”
“He was calling for Your Highness Christa so I have come to relay the message……please hurry.”
The maid’s cold voice shook Christa.
Christa tries to run out immediately but the guards stopped her.
“Please wait Your Highness!”
“Release me! Al-niisama is!”
“Elna-sama told us that we mustn’t leave the room no matter what!”
“Nii-sama is in danger! Please, let me go!”
“Mitsuba-sama is already at the scene! Please hurry!”
Following the maid, Christa shakes off the guards and started running.
The guards now have no choice but to follow after her.
The bloody maid is leading the way.
“Oi! How far are you intending to go!? Isn’t this the merchant entrance!?”
“I use this path to avoid the commotion! He is unable to move so we have to treat him on the spot!”
“Hurry!”
Christa ran so fast like never before.
She was so worried about him that she threw away her rabbit doll as it was a hindrance to her
running.
When Christa turned the corner, she saw a bloody person collapsed on the side of the carriage
undergoing treatment.
“Nii-sama!!”
Christa rushes to the fallen person.
445
However, when she approached, it was a different person who happens to have the same black hair as
Al.
“It’s not…..Nii-sama…..?”
“Yes, it’s a trap after all.”
Saying so, a fat man by the side of the fallen man covers her mouth with a hand towel.
“NNNNnn!!?? Nn…..”
Christa tried to make a noise but she couldn’t as she couldn’t beat an adult’s strength.
The smell of the medicine that was soaked into the hand towel rendered Christa unconscious.
When that happened, it was accompanied by the sound of people falling.
The three guards who followed behind Christa bleed from their necks and fall down.
“Wonderful job as always, Gunther.”
“Leave the compliment, just hurry.”
Gunther was the middle-aged assassin who once targeted Al.
He usually used his magic when performing assassination but this time he opted to use a simple knife.
He can’t be connected to this crime after all.
“Then I will leave the rest to you.”
“Ahh, I think you already know this but,”
“Of course. I won’t do anything to her. Yes, of course.”
Seeing the vulgar smile on the fat man’s face, Gunther glances suspiciously at him.
Gunther knew that this man was one of the top merchants of the imperial capital but behind the scene,
he was a kid-loving slave trader who kidnapped and sold children from all over the country.
A girl around Christa’s age is his favorite.
“We won’t stand by if you treat this as a joke. You know that right?”
“Ye, Yes. I understand.”
Looking Gunther in the eyes, the fat merchant was frightened.
After that he has his subordinate carry Christa to the carriage.
446
The place they put the sleeping Christa in is a hidden luggage compartment in their carriage. The
double-layer floor of their carriage is there for them to transport illegal goods to the castle.
There are only a few inspections when they leave but they are carrying out an imperial princess this
time so they must be very cautious.
The merchant doesn’t feel any guilt. Of course, it is the first time they kidnap a princess but they often
kidnap noble ladies and turn them into slaves.
Of course, they also have fear, their opponent this time is a real bigshot after all. However, since the
person who made the request this time was none other than Zandra, the merchant thought that it
would still be okay.
As long as they don’t commit any mistake, it will be fine.
After seeing the merchant get into their carriage with a smile, Gunther ordered his men to clean up the
corpse of the guards.
Then the carriage slowly started to move away.
However, there is a child running after that carriage.
It was Rita.
In Rita’s hand was a bunny doll belonging to Christa. Rita manages to somehow get on to the carriage’s
luggage compartment and throw the bunny doll behind her.
“Rita will save you……Kuu-chan.”
Shortly afterward, Christa’s disappearance became known throughout the castle, setting it on an
unprecedented high alert.
But the carriage had long left the castle at that time.
Thus, the Imperial Capital was steadily approaching the future that Christa saw.
447
The Changing Conclusion
Elna who visits the room of Zuzan, the Fifth Consort, is now standing in front of the person herself.
“I thought I request you to bring Christa together with you though?”
Elna clenches her fist at Zuzan’s innocent act.
That was clearly not a request but a threat.
However, Elna stares back at Zuzan and gives her a reply.
“Her Highness Christa couldn’t come because she is feeling sick. That’s why I came here alone.”
“Really. She is feeling sick huh…..Well, fine.”
Zuzan said so and urged Elna to sit.
Unable to refuse, Elna sat down on the chair but she didn’t reach out to anything on the table.
Elna remembers that Zuzan was crying at the Second Consort Funeral.
Her tears were real. That’s why she was terrified.
She was terrified at a woman called Zuzan who can even shed tears to her nemesis. For her to be able
to deceive herself to that extent, deceiving others must also be easy for her.
Elna’s father described Zuzan as a snake-like woman.
Right now she once again understood what he meant.
“The reason I called you this time is that I want you to join our side.”
Seeing Zuzan said that with a smile, Elna imagined a snake showing its tongue and slowly approaching
her while waiting for the moment it would plunge in to take a bite at her.
Before you notice, you will be squeezed tight and eaten.
Elna closes her eyes and shakes off that vision.
“If you are asking for my help in the succession war then I will have to decline.”
“Ara…..and why is that?”
“Amsberg house has not been involved in the succession war for generations. Our stance is one that
will not get involved in politics.”
“But you have been helping Leonard right? You are even guarding his mother right now.”
448
“He is my childhood friend after all. My help is only on a personal level. They just felt safer that I am
there to act as an escort. Did you find it unpleasant?”
“No, that’s a great friendship you have there. Won’t you extend such friendship to Zandra as well?”
Absolutely not.
That was what Elna thought but she couldn’t say it out loud so she gave her a vague reply instead.
“I will consider it if the opportunity arises.”
“That’s one cold reply. Both that girl and I evaluate you highly, you know?”
“Is that so.”
While giving her that blunt reply, Elna thought that something was strange.
People don’t normally use the word [evaluate] to a member of the Amsberg family. The position of the
Amsberg house is solid. No one would judge their value.
However, the question here is why Zuzan said some meaningless things like that. Elna frowns at the
discomfort she is feeling.
“You will get a lot of rewards if you cooperate with Zandra you know? We can promise you that we
won’t touch your childhood friends either.”
“I’m grateful for your offer……..but there is one thing that I would like to ask, may I?”
Such blunt recruitment.
It’s not good to refuse her aggressively. It’s better to dodge the topic and wrap this up soon.
Elna understands that. Which is why it was strange.
To counteract that, Elna rises her own question and tried to take control of the conversation.
“And what would that be?”
“Why did you call Her Highness Christa here as well?”
“That girl is the sister of Lizelotte who is always at the border. I thought that if I asked her, she might
come to join my side.”
“Join you…….?”
Elna couldn’t believe what Zuzan was saying.
There’s no way that such a thing would happen.
449
It is very unlikely that the daughters of the Second Consort like Lizelotte and Christa would join
Zuzan’s side. Even if she is found innocent, she is still under suspicion, there’s no way that they would
cooperate with such a person.
Then why would she give such an answer?
“Right now Christa is not here. Rather than that, I want to talk with you more.”
“She was buying time……….”
Elna became alert and muttered so.
On the other hand, Zuzan only tilts her head a little as if she was surprised.
“What might you be talking about?”
“ ! ! ? ?”
Seeing such a reaction, Elna was convinced.
She was the one that Zuzan wanted to lure out.
When she got up, Elna ran out of the room without saying anything.
Zuzan didn’t try to stop her.
The inner palace is large and a quarter of each consort is far apart. The time Elna took to come to here
was already enough.
Elna curses her carelessness while jumping to the roof of the inner palace and takes the shortest route
back to Christa.
The reason she called Christa too was that she knew that Elna would have to leave Christa’s side.
The original aim was to separate them.
“Kuh!”
By caring for Christa’s feelings, she put Christa herself in danger.
She should have stayed by her side no matter what happened.
With such regret, Elna arrives back at the area near Mitsuba’s room.
Their opponent shouldn’t be able to do anything as long as they are within the inner palace.
Thinking so, Elna looks into the room. Finding that Christa is absent, Elna makes a bitter expression.
“Your Highness!? Where is she!?”
450
“Y, Yes! A report came in that His Highness Arnold was injured on his return so…”
“If that’s true then it would already be an uproar right now! Follow me!”
Taking the nearby palace guard with her, Elna follows after Christa.
Asking from the people nearby, she knows the direction in which Christa headed.
Seeing that the direction is the one that leads to the luggage loading area for merchants, Elna leaves
behind the guards and moves on ahead.
After Elna arrives at the luggage loading area, she sweeps her eyes over the merchants there.
Everyone was surprised at Elna’s sudden appearance but she ignores them and quickly looks around.
Then she found a spot on the ground.
It was a mark of the wiped bloodstain. And there is more than one of them.
Wiping bloodstain like this is another technique often used by assassins.
Reflectively clicking her tongue, Elna raises her face up.
Looking around for clues, she found a familiar bunny doll. It belongs to Christa.
“Your Highness……!”
Unintentionally calling out to her, Elna rushes to the doll.
The white plush is dirty but it is not bloody. For now, she isn’t hurt. Elna realizes that and exhales.
At that time, she felt something hard inside of it.
Something was put inside the doll. When she took a look, she found a coin.
Thinking of the possibility, Elna mutters with a small voice.
“……..[Bande].”
A thin thread made of magic power extends out from the coin.
It was extending far outside the castle.
“Rita….!”
Elna calls her name without thinking.
It was both out of gratitude and worry.
Having put this in here, Rita must have followed after Christa. However, her being with Christa means
that the future Christa saw is now likely to become a reality.
451
“Report this to His Majesty immediately! Her Highness Christa has been abducted! Call all VIPs back to
the castle and close it down! Hurry!”
A captain of the Imperial Knight Order has this much authority.
In an emergency, they are allowed to make judgment calls to a certain extent.
Elna continues to give out more commands.
“I will go on pursuit! Ask His Majesty for permission to dispatch the imperial knights for me!”
Saying so, Elna jumped high into the sky and started flying.
This way is faster than going through the crowd of the Imperial Capital.
The reason why she didn’t always do this is that the Emperor forbids her from selfishly flying on her
own.
However, now is no time to worry about that.
Elna flew straight toward the direction the coin is leading her.
———————————————————————————–
“Alright, this should be good enough.”
Christa, who was placed inside the carriage, woke up but she did not know where she was.
She can’t put strength into her body and she is being tied with a rope.
She feels like she was moved down the stairs but she doesn’t know exactly where she is.
She only knows that it is a dark, humid room.
“Now, Princess, wait for me here, I will bring you the perfect collar.”
Said the bald man who tied up Christa.
The merchant’s aide who was left in charge of the slaves happily walked to the back of the room.
He is going to put a collar on her. That fact made Christa feel hopeless.
Putting a collar on a person often means that he will put on her a magic tool that will deprive her of
her freedom. Slavery was already outlawed in the Empire in the first place so it is a magic item that
was banned inside the Empire.
Realizing that she was caught by people who would use such a thing, Christa’s body started to shake.
However, the voice of a friend who couldn’t be here reached Christa’s ears.
452
“Kuu-chan…….!”
“Rita….?”
Rita calls out to Christa in a whisper and Christa smiles to see her friend.
However, she couldn’t immediately cut the rope that Christa was tied in with her dagger.
“How…….?”
“Rita found Kuu-chan’s doll so Rita ran after you. And when Rita saw Kuu-chan on the carriage, Rita
hopped on too.”
“Why……it was so dangerous…..?”
“Rita is not a coward who would abandon her friend.”
Saying so, Rita finally managed to cut the rope and lend her shoulder to Christa for her to stand up.
“No…..we won’t be able to escape…..”
“It’s alright. Rita will protect you.”
Rita shows her usual smile and takes Christa toward the exit.
The two go one step at a time through the complicated tunnel but they are still children and one of
them couldn’t walk properly.
Soon, the earlier bald man caught up to them.
“So a rat wandered in huh. Well, whatever. I will make you a merchandise too.”
“He caught up!?”
“Rita, run away…..!”
“I won’t!”
Being chased by the bald man, Rita and Christa changed course.
Although it is not the way to the exit, if they keep going that way, he will catch up.
After several turns, Rita and Christa entered a room and closed the door.
“Fuu…..we somehow got away.”
“Oh No…….”
Rita was relieved while Christa was in despair.
453
It was the room where the children are going to be sold as slaves. The room was separated from
others and looks like a hut at first glance.
Christa clearly remembered this room.
It was the room where she saw Rita died.
This is the place where Rita will be killed by something.
“Rita!! You have to escape!!”
“Nn? We are escaping you know?”
“It’s not like that! Please!”
Christa begged so but her voice was drowned out by another voice inside the room.
“F〜ound〜yo〜u〜”
The low voice that grip their hearts belonged to the bald man.
The man entered the room from a door that at first glance seemed like a part of the wall.
“There are hidden doors all over this place. You can’t hide from me.”
“No way……”
“Damn it!!”
Rita tries to open the door they came through but it was stuck and didn’t open.
The bald man must have done something to it.
“Now then, let’s put an end to this hide and seek game shall we.”
“D, Don’t come any closer!”
Rita hides Christa behind her back and takes out her dagger.
The bald man looked at it and a show mocking smile.
“Whoa Whoa, so scary. Are you pretending to be a knight now.”
“Shut up!”
Rita raises up her dagger, her stance was unlike that of a child.
The man carelessly approached them but then a small amount of blood trickled down to his foot.
454
“Tsk……you damn brat…..put that dagger down right now. If you do that I will let you live alright?”
“No!”
“Rita! Stop!”
“Your Princess already commanded you, you know?”
“Rita won’t abandon her friend!”
Rita holds up her dagger.
When the bald man enters Rita’s range again, she tries to intercept him as before but the man who had
seen her dagger once already lowered himself a little to dodge the blade and took the chance to kick
Rita away.
“Auu!!”
“Ahh, a full hit huh.”
“Cough, Cough! Uuu…..”
“Rita! Rita!”
The kicked Rita rolls through the ground and hits a wall.
Seeing Rita coughing up blood, Christa runs toward her but Rita stood up with her face still wet with
tears. She then went forward to cover Christa again.
“You are still standing up huh. Did the knights teach you to protect the princess?”
“I, it’s not like that……”
“What? They only grew up in their warm castle without knowing any hardship right? You are a
commoner yourself, aren’t you? I won’t say anything bad so drop that dagger already. Being a slave is
better than death right?”
“I refuse……”
“Ahh, what a pain. Even a child like you would say something like a knight’s pride huh.”
The man said that as if he wanted to vomit.
However, Rita glares at that man.
Then she tremblingly holds up her dagger again.
“Rita is not a knight…..Kuu-chan is my friend so I will protect her…..Rita will not abandon her friend!!”
“Is that right.”
455
Saying so the bald man picks up the nearby iron bar.
Its tip was sharp. It probably has been used to hurt the slaves.
The bald man headed toward Rita.
That scene overlapped with Christa’s vision.
That’s when resignation started to sprout in Christa’s heart.
Since the day she saw the future where the Crown Prince died, Christa has seen various futures. There
are futures that she didn’t talk about with Al and Mitsuba as well.
That’s why Christa knows the difference between the future that can be changed and the future that
already set in stone.
The future where a person’s death is clearly visible can not be changed. No matter what she does, the
result will be the same.
She has tried many things so far but the future that shows a person’s death has never changed. This
doesn’t only apply to the death of the Crown Prince but the soldiers who served under Lizelotte and
her own maids as well, nothing ever changed.
Nevertheless, the reason for her struggle this time is that she doesn’t want Rita to die.
But in the end, that action itself is now causing her death.
Doing something about it is useless, and leaving it alone is no good.
The future can not be changed.
“Then die.”
Saying so, the bald man slowly pulled back the iron bar.
Seeing that, Christa despairs.
Both because of her powerlessness and vexation.
However, she still can’t give up.
Rita’s death is the only thing she won’t accept.
So Christa clung to her last hope.
Believing in the words of her brother, she shouted.
“ELNAAAAAAAAAAA!!!!”
“There’s no use shouting now.”
456
Said the bald man as he pushed the iron bar at Rita.
At that moment.
The room’s wall collapses and something strikes the bald man.
For a moment the bald man did not know what had happened.
He simply understood that he got hit by something and that his body is now stuck to the wall.
“Wha…..”
“Sorry for being late, Your Highness, Rita. Are you two alright?”
“Elna…….”
Then he understands.
There is a streak of broken walls on the opposite side.
The knight in front of him just flew toward them in a straight line.
And the fact that the knight’s sword has deeply penetrated his body.
The man has understood.
That woman has cherry color hair and a jade-colored pair of eyes.
“Ams…berg……”
“Yeah….was it you who hurt my junior?”
“What if……I am……..?”
“I will give you a certain death.”
Saying so, Elna exerts more power into the sword that currently skewered the man to the wall.
That alone destroys the wall and blows the man through it.
Elna doesn’t know where the man is. That’s because there is no reason to confirm that anymore.
“Rita…..!”
“Elna-nee…..”
“Ah, Rita…..”
Elna supports the swaying Rita and checks her abdomen.
457
Her stomach already turned purple so there must be bones broken inside.
She casts a simple healing spell on her but it seems that the bone was badly broken so it could only
alleviate her pain. She must take her to a professional healer immediately.
“Elna…..!”
“Your Highness….! I’m very sorry. It’s all my fault……”
“UUn……I’m sorry……I broke my promise…..”
Elna embraces the crying Christa.
She then gently hugged Rita so as to not affect her wounds.
“Thank you….it’s all thanks to you, Rita…..”
“HeHe….Rita is great…..?”
“Yes, you really are. Splendid work.”
Elna stands up with Rita on her back.
“Elna……the children……..”
“I understand.”
Elna lightly shakes her sword.
The collars attached to the necks of the slave children are cut off one after another.
“Come with me if you want to live.”
Elna leaves the room together with Rita and Christa.
The children then followed after them without any hesitation.
458
Low effort meme, sorry couldn’t resist……..
459
Those that lurk in the dark
“What!? What was that shock just now!?”
“President Gentner, What is happening!?!”
“It’s alright, please calm down. A few slaves just rampaged a little.”
The fat merchant, Gentner explains the situation in a calm manner to the customers who came to buy
slaves from him.
Gentner was standing on a theatre-like stage while his customers are watching him from the audience
seats. There are 20 customers with him today, all of them are nobles who support slavery who live
inside the imperial capital.
This place is the basement of the Gentner company and this room is their secret auction house.
The underground tunnel is complicated and many guards were stationed at the entrance to take care
of their security.
Confident that no intruder would be able to get to him, Gentner was calm.
However.
“This is surprising, to think that President Gentner himself is running a slave business.”
“What!? Guha!? Agh!! M, M, My leg…….”
The person who slowly came up to the stage was none other than Elna. The place she came out from
was originally the slave entrance for the captured slaves that would be auctioned off and was the
place where Gentner’s guards were stationed at.
Those guards were all finished off by Elna and now Christa and the other children are watching Elna
from there.
Gentner tried to think of how is this happening and that now he couldn’t escape. Elna had slashed at
both of his feet. The wound was shallow enough for him not to die but it is deep enough that he
couldn’t run away. Her slash was that precise.
“Captain of the Third Knight Corp of the Imperial Knight Order, Elna von Amsberg is here. You are
under arrest under the charge of abduction of Her Imperial Highness the Princess and slave trading.”
“A, Amsberg!? Wh, Wh, Why!?”
“Why? It’s because you are a criminal that’s why. I will cut you down if you try to move. Don’t think
you can easily escape from an Amsberg now.”
The customers put their waists back on their seats.
460
They are all nobles of the imperial capital.
They know the horror of the Amsberg well. if one of them appeared in front of you, you are done. They
are something like a grim reaper to them.
“H, Hiii! H, Help me……..!”
“Help? You just abducted an imperial princess and that’s all you are saying?”
“I, It was a request!”
“Right. That’s why I am not going to kill you. I will have you spit out everything later alright?”
“That would be troubling.”
Accompanying the voice, a dagger flew toward Elna.
Elna parrys it.
The Masked Assassin uses that gap and goes for Gentner.
Elna then blocks the dagger that the Assassin stabbed out with her sword.
“There’s no way I would let you silent him now would I.”
“So I have to deal with you first after all.”
The voice was muffled. Elna couldn’t tell if the owner is a man or a woman because of the mask the
Assassin is wearing.
Irritating that the mask has been catching on lately, she keeps stopping the Assassin’s attacks.
The assassin’s attacks were quick and the assault of daggers from both left and right hands of the
Assassin managed to drive Elna to the corner of the stage.
However,
“It seems you are holding back because you are trying not to collapse the building aren’t you.”
“I am. But,”
Elna Raises her sword up the moment the Assassin aims for her torso. The Assassin who plunge
deeper toward Elna than intended couldn’t dodge Elna’s counter.
It was a counter-attack that was born from completely reading her opponent’s intention.
The Assassin who wanted to quickly settle the match will aim for an area where the most damage can
be dealt and Elna knows that attack would be coming from her experience.
“Guh……!”
461
The Assassin’s shoulder is severely cut.
The Assassin tried to quickly move away but at that moment, Elna uses the difference in their speed to
close the gap.
While taking care not to collapse the building, she judges how much power she could use and goes at
the Assassin.
At that moment, the Assassin immediately switched objective.
Using the right hand, a dagger was thrown toward Gentner.
In exchange for that, Elna’s sword pierces the Assassin’s abdomen.
“Uwaaaa!! Blood, there’s blood everywhere!!??”
“Cough……”
“Tsk!.”
Immediately pulling out her sword, Elna rushes toward Gentner.
The dagger stuck deep inside Gentner’s chest. It’s a heavy wound. If she leaves him alone he will die.
While she was thinking so, the building greatly shook.
Almost at the same time, it starts to collapse.
“This is…….!?”
“I think it’s better for you to escape quickly……..”
Holding their abdomen, the Assassin was moving away from Elna.
Given the shaking and the current situation, there’s no doubt that the Assassin did something to the
building.
Not to mention Christa, Rita, and the other children slaves, Gentner is an important source of
information that she must protect.
Elna gave up pursuing the Assassin and chose to escape.
“Everyone, follow me!”
Tightly tied Gentner’s wound, Elna started carries him with her.
With the current situation, there’s no choice but to quickly get everyone to the surface.
With that in mind, Elna leads the children and Gentner’s customers toward the exit.
462
“This one has important key information! Absolutely do not let him die! And arrest all those following
behind me as well! “
Arriving at the surface, Elna instructed the knights stationed there and ordered the arrest of the
nobles.
The Imperial Knights were immediately dispatched via the Emperor’s direct order. They head toward
the direction where Elna flew straight at and surround the headquarter of Gentner company.
They were joined by the Imperial Capital Garrison and were about to storm the place but Elna came
out just before that.
“Don’t overlook anyone who came out of that place! Those who have nothing to do go and check out
all of the Gentner company’s branch offices now.”
After giving her directions, Elna speaks to one of the imperial knights she familiar with.
It was a knight who excelled at healing magic.
She leaves Rita to that knight.
“It’s already alright. Rita……you did great.”
“Unnn…..my belly hurt……”
“It will be cured soon.”
“Rita……..”
Rita who is laid down is receiving treatment on the spot.
Christa is grabbing her hand and staying beside her.
Rita was working hard until now but perhaps she finally felt relieved, she slowly lost her
consciousness.
“Rita!?”
“It’s alright, Your Highness. Please let her rest.”
“But….”
“Your Highness. Please leave her to him.”
Urged by Elna, Christa stands up.
There were tears in her eyes but she managed to leave Rita’s side.
463
For now, it’s best to let the Emperor know that she’s safe.
That was what Elna thought but she immediately knelt down quietly after she heard the sound of a
large number of horses galloping.
“Christa!”
It was Emperor Johannes himself who called out to Christa as he rushed toward their direction.
Behind him were a large number of his escort knights and Franz.
Without being able to wait for their return, he came to the scene himself.
“Ooh! Christa! You are safe!? You are not hurt!?”
“Y, Yes….Otou-sama. Ah, no, Your Majesty.”
“Otou-sama is fine, don’t mind it! I’m glad, I truly am……”
Johannes quietly repeats how glad he felt many times while hugging Christa.
In the meantime, Franz turns away the nearby ordinary citizens. This is both for the Emperor’s
security and to avoid getting the citizens involved.
Then, when the only ones left are the knights and the soldiers from the imperial capital garrison.
Johannes stands up and looks at Elna.
His eyes are burning with anger.
“Otou-sama…….?”
“Even though you were by her side, how could this happen! Elna! You are one of the captains of the
imperial knight order and you can’t even protect a single princess!!”
“My deepest apologies……everything was my responsibility.”
“Exactly! You just drove the reputation of the Amsberg to the ground!”
“O, Otou-sama……Elna is……”
“Be quiet. I am talking to Elna right now.”
“I’m, I’m sorry…..”
Being stared at with stern eyes, Christa was scared and her body visibly shrinks.
She then looks at Elna who is slowly shaking her head sideways at her.
“Elna. do you have any excuse?”
464
“I have none.”
It’s simple to tell him that Zuzan called her away. At that time, Zuzan was also calling for Christa.
Nevertheless, the fact that she went to Zuzan alone was Elna’s decision.
Even if Zuzan and Zandra become suspects with the investigation, that decision was Elna’s
responsibility.
One can’t afford a forceful method inside the inner palace. It was because of that preconception that
Elna left Christa’s side. That was Elna’s mistake no matter how one looked at it.
“I will hand down your punishment later. Until then you are to stay at your house.”
“Yes……”
Saying so, Johannes takes Christa back to the castle.
Elna kept staying down like that for a while.
“How did it go?”
“The assassination has failed. However, even if they can save his life, he shouldn’t be able to talk for a
while.”
“I see. Good work.”
Hearing so, the masked assassin, Xiaomei makes her report.
Her body is under severe pain because of the curse but it is a tolerable pain for Xiaomei who has
undergone intense training since a young age.
“With this Leonard will not stay quiet, they will surely have an all-out war with Zandra’s faction soon.
This is a good development.”
“But Amsberg’s prodigy will probably be relieved from the imperial knight order with this incident.”
“It will be temporary. She was punished because the Emperor has no other choice after all. He will
probably take her back in when the situation calms down.”
“Even if it’s just temporary, Leonard’s faction will be free to use Elna von Amsberg during that time.
That woman is dangerous. When she didn’t hold her sword I thought that I could somehow manage
her but once she started wielding one she was like a completely different person. I thought that she
was some kind of monster back then.”
“That’s the Amsbergs for you. Their minds switch during battle. It was nothing surprising. If she
became too much of a problem then I can just pull her back to the imperial knight order myself.”
465
“Shouldn’t she be eliminated instead?”
“She is my promising future subject. There hasn’t been any emperor who has a bad relationship with
the Amsbergs after all. It’s a good time to sell them a favor as well.”
“However…..”
Xiaomei appeals while enduring the pain.
it was true that she seems manageable when she doesn’t hold her sword.
If you can keep her away from the succession war then there should be nothing to worry about.
Even though she is holding a grudge against her, Xiaomei felt that Elna was a worthy enemy.
However,
“I am different from the other candidates. They only desperately aim for the throne not what to do
with it afterward. In that sense, I am different from them. Spare me from dealing with the resentment
from my own subjects. Besides, even if I don’t move, Zandra and Gordon will.”
“…….Understood.”
“Continue to follow my mother’s instruction in the inner palace. Get your wounds healed for now. This
is not the time for us to move yet.”
“Yes…….as you wish, Your Highness Eric.”
Saying so, Xiaomei disappears from Eric’s sight.
Seeing her off, Eric slowly starts walking.
All the while having a smile on his face.
466
The Current State of The South
“Nice to meet you, the village chief. I am the Eight Prince, Leonard Lakes Adler.”
Saying so Leo bows to the gray-haired old woman who lives in the largest house in the village.
The old lady called the village chief shakily bow her head in reply.
“I am Mao…….the village chief of this Hina village. For extending your help to a village such as ours,
thank you very much.”
“No, no matter what kind of village it is, yours is still considered a village of the Empire. As a member
of the Imperial family, it is my responsibility to help my subjects.”
Leo replies with a soft smile on his face.
Hearing Leo’s words, another person in the house whistles.
“I was surprised. who would have thought that twins could be this much different.”
“What kind of image do you have of my brother?”
“He looked haughty.”
A red-haired man is leaning against the wall.
At Al’s request, Abel led the adventurers to this village to act as its guard.
He left a strong impression on Leo on how adventurer-like and unreserved he is.
“Is that so. You might be in for a surprise when you saw how he normally is you know.”
“I wish. That prince offered a stupid amount of reward for us to protect this remote village. I was
scared shitless thinking about what kind of monsters are roaming around here you know?”
“And what did you find?”
“There are no monsters around at all. This is such a peaceful village. But it’s exactly like I’ve heard,
there are some thugs that seem like kidnappers coming out around here. Seeing that we already
solidified the village’s defense, they don’t really try anything on the villagers so far but I still see them
sneaking around here and there. That said, this is still not worth that stupid amount of money.
Something like this is only a simple request after all.”
That should be a good thing for an adventurer like Abel but he seems to be unsatisfied about it.
As he’s not a pro on the matter, Leo shows him a bitter smile.
467
If the reward is cheap, they will get angry and if it’s too high, they get frustrated. Adventurers really
are hard to please. However, Leo likes how they freely live their lives.
“The hard part is soon to come. I will be investigating the organization behind these kidnapping cases
and it is likely that the Lord who is governing this area is involved as well.”
“Hou? Base on what?”
“I visited the Lord’s city before I came here and I saw their suspicious attitudes. The Lord himself
seems nervous and there are some suspicious guys moving around as well. If he just doesn’t recognize
the existence of the frontier villages and ignore their request out of pure negligence then he could just
normally welcome me. But that Lord did try to contact someone. That action was enough to make me
deepen my suspicion.”
“He might just be very nervous about your visit you know?”
“That might be the case but the Southern Nobles should already be notified of the purpose of my visit.
If they really didn’t notice the existence of those villages or it was a case of oversight from their part
then they should show me their minimum effort about the matter. In fact, other Lords near the border
area have already started to act for the immigrant villages in their area but the Lord in question is still
yet to move.”
“I thought that you were taking a detour but you did look into them while doing that huh. You are
really competent just like the rumor says.”
“I wonder about that. I still haven’t done anything yet after all.”
Saying so, Leo looks down.
That was Leo’s honest feelings.
At the Knight Hunting festival, he led the Knights to the city rescue but that couldn’t be considered the
decisive blow. As the ambassador plenipotentiary, it wasn’t him who won the trust of the two
countries but Al dressed as Leo.
He hasn’t done anything ever since he joined the succession war.
That’s why he was obsessed with this case.
He couldn’t afford to become someone that was installed as an emperor. He has to show the will to
become one and act. Those who can not take action by themselves are not worthy to become an
emperor.
If he can’t solve this case then being an emperor would be just a dream within a dream for him.
His words came from that thought.
“Well, it must be like that if you think so. It’s a good thing that you are not cocky. But if you are going
to quickly solve this case then be careful not to lose sight of what’s important alright?”
468
“Of course. The first thing I am considering is the well-being of the village and the kidnapped people
after all.”
“……Lyn is a kind girl……… she should be the one who took it the hardest but she put that behind her
and acted for the village, for us.”
“……I haven’t heard anything like that from Lynfia but I thought that something terrible must have
happened to her since she decided to leave the village and went all the way to us.”
“Yes……the earliest kidnapping case was eleven years ago. It was Lyn’s sister who was three years
older than Lyn. Lyn was only five years old at the time. The latest child who was kidnapped was also
her sister six years younger than her. It was on the day that Lyn fell asleep because she had fallen
ill………….”
“They kidnapped both of her sisters………”
“Among the siblings, Lyn was the only one who didn’t have odd eyes. It must have been thanks to that,
that she wasn’t kidnapped as well. The kidnappers were targeting children with odd eyes. Eleven
years ago, many dwarves immigrated into the Empire and there was a great deal of hunting for
demihumans and children with special abilities. The frequency of such cases has decreased since His
Majesty the Emperor declared that all the immigrants are to be imperial subjects but my village was
still continued to be targeted. No one came to help us just because we are all immigrants.”
The village chief said so and let out a deep sigh.
It doesn’t like they are immigrants because they choose to be.
Those that migrated to the Empire are people who lost their home to the southern conflict in the
warring era or those who have suffered from demihuman persecution of the Sokal Empire who drove
out all demihumans from their country.
The Empire is tolerant of the immigrants but that was to incorporate the excellent demihumans to
their side, the Empire can’t just go on with humans alone after all. Demihumans who have exceptional
skills are useful in various places but those that do not have such skills still have to live under
discrimination.
Eleven years ago, they were treated as if they did not exist. However, because of the Emperor’s decree,
their situation changed.
The immigrants were happy about the change but that doesn’t mean that it changes everything.
At the time the Emperor gave out his decree, the immigrants who were recognized as imperial citizens
were exempt from paying taxes for five years. It was a burden for the Lords but in reality, the
immigrants couldn’t afford to pay the taxes at the time. That was why they were given five years to
blend into society, start trading, or reclaim the land. That was the Emperor’s order but some of the
Lord intentionally ignored it.
Such things don’t benefit them after all.
469
Leo understands that to an extent. He thought that if that was the case then there was still a room to
pardon them. The Lords’ point was valid after all.
However, that is not the case this time.
This village is special. People with odd eyes are often born here, it gave birth to someone as excellent
as Lynfia, and there are a lot of competent hunters in the village. If they are incorporated into the local
Lord’s territory they will surely bring many benefits to him. It was something that could be found
right away if they had conducted an investigation after all.
However,
If they did that, the existence of this village would be known to the central part of the Empire. They
must have something that they want to hide in this place.
“That’s why Lynfia came to us. It was the responsibility of us at the center of the Empire for
overlooking this until now. Please forgive me.”
“N, No! That’s out of the question! Please don’t say such a thing! And please raise your head!”
“No matter how many apologies I offer, it would not be enough to heal your scar……. I can’t promise
you that I can get all of them home but I will do my best to search for all the kidnapped villagers. I will
bring all the sins of the Lord to the open. The Emperor himself will deliver a fair judgment for you all.”
“Thank you very much…..! Thank you……!”
The village chief repeatedly bows to him.
That was the end of their discussion and Leo left the place together with Abel.
“You sure said it huh, I think that it’s not gonna be easy you know?”
“I guess so.”
“From their bearings and equipment, the people who are lurking around the village are professionals.
I thought that normally only thugs and bandits would do these kinds of kidnapping but I have never
seen such a serious group like them before. They are completely all business here.”
“I see. It means that the organization behind them is that big. The Lord who governs this area is not
that influential. Perhaps, the Lord himself might just only be a pawn as well.”
“It’s possible that all the Southern Nobles are involved in this case too. If you do a poor job at this it
will cause a rebellion you know?”
“That sure sounds like a big problem.”
Saying so, Leo laughs.
470
The issue of the Southern Frontier is a perfect way for him to win the Emperor’s favor but if the
Southern Nobles are allowed to rebel, all the responsibility may be shifted to Leo.
This is a dangerous mission.
Investigating them without digging in too deep and round them up.
That was a valid strategy.
However,
“But since I heard their story, I wanted to help them. Do you think someone who couldn’t help those
he wanted to help can become an emperor?”
“I don’t know about that. But, if I have to say which one I want for my emperor, I guess I would prefer
someone who can do that huh.”
“Right. That’s why I came here. Sorry but, since you have been paid such a high salary, I will have to
ask you to earn your wages okay?”
“Sure sure, as you command…….”
His adventurer’s instinct told him that he just accepted some terrible request.
But since he already accepted the money, as an adventurer, he can’t turn down a request he already
accepted.
There’s nothing Abel could do but shrug and giving Leo his answer.
471
Cry of Collapse
Earl Sitterheim’s POV
—————————————
Bassau, one of the cities inside the Southern part of the Empire. Among the mansions of the Nobles of
the south, the mansion in this city should be counted from the bottom in terms of its size.
That’s where the Lord of the area where Lynfia’s village was located and the person who should be the
one offering help to them, Earl Dennis von Sitterheim, reside.
“So……..Duke Kruger has no intention to help me. Is that correct?”
“That seems to be the case.”
Hearing the reply of the messenger serving under Sven von Kruger, Dennis’s expression was like he
just took a bite out of worms.
“Then what should I do?”
“He wants you to take the blame for being the mastermind of this case. Everything will be your
responsibility.”
Saying so the messenger’s face turned into a smile.
He wholeheartedly believed that Dennis would accept the deal.
“For the South huh……”
“Exactly. Including you, one-third of the Southern Nobles are cooperating with Duke Kruger. He wants
you to sacrifice yourself to protect our fellow Southern Noblemen.”
How did it come to this.
Dennis takes a deep sigh.
Dennis only turned 33 years old this year. He became a Lord ten years ago but now he felt ashamed of
that.
At first, he only acted according to his father’s will.
It was only one year after the Emperor decreed all the immigrants to be imperial citizens that his
father passed away. At that time, his father told him that the immigrants will never be considered a
citizen in their territory.
Dennis’s father was once injured by a rampaging immigrant which rendered his legs paralyzed. He
held a grudge against them because of that and the young Dennis understands him.
472
Then a few years later, that fact was revealed to Duke Kruger. If the news were to reach the capital, his
lordship would be over and he was forced to help the Duke with his kidnapping operation.
There is now a base for the kidnapping organization underneath his mansion with the knights from
Duke Kruger patrolling his mansion to guarantee his loyalty.
He has been cornered to the point where he can not turn back and right now he is being discarded.
“If I obey, will the security of my people be guaranteed?”
“But of course.”
The messenger’s words terribly smell of lies.
In the past, Dennis once tried to reach out to the Emperor because of the guilt he felt. At that time, the
Earldom of Sitterheim was heavily harassed by the Southern Nobles. Their crops were destroyed,
their lands couldn’t satisfyingly grow anything, and his people were starved because the crop
distribution itself was hindered.
After that, Dennis apologized to Duke Kruger and swore his allegiance. It was to protect his people.
He has no way to know what kind of terrible things Duke Kruger would rain down on his people if he
decides to betray him again this time.
That’s why Dennis decided to give up.
“Fine then. I will take all the blame as the mastermind.”
“Thank you, I won’t forget the sacrifice you made for the South.”
“Never mind that. How about you just say that this is all for Duke Kruger’s sake? He already took
control of most of the South and has been acting like King for a while now. Just what is planning to
do?”
“That has nothing to do with you.”
“It has. I am being a stepping stone for Duke Kruger after all. Is he planning an uprising?”
“Fuh….My Lord doesn’t have such a thing in mind. Let’s just say that this is all for the throne shall we.”
“I see……so if push comes to shove he planned to start a rebellion in the south and put Her Highness
Zandra on the throne huh. If that’s the case then Duke Kruger will become a close relative of the
throne. It’s the Fifth Consort we are talking about. She must have planted Duke Kruger’s people there
already. Certainly, this is not a usurpation. This is a takeover.”
At Dennis’s bitter analysis, the messenger did not move. This is because something like this is not
surprising given the history of the Empire. However, an emperor who relies on their relatives like that
does not last long. They will eventually lose power and be eaten alive by other nobles after all.
473
What does Duke Kruger think about that.
He is the man who has been manipulating the kidnapping organization and incorporates many of the
Southern Nobles into his faction, he must already have thought things like this.
But that doesn’t matter now. When Dennis has that self-ridiculing thought, a blade suddenly
protruded from the messenger’s chest.
“Goho…..”
“Wha!?”
“Forgive me……My Lord.”
Said a young female knight.
To Dennis, this light-brown hair that almost seemed orange was not just a simple knight.
“Rebecca!? What are you trying to do!?”
“You must not believe his words! They were planning to kill you, my Lord!”
“What!?”
“They are going to kill you after you have written a confession letter and handed it to Prince Leonard!
Please, you must hurry and escape!”
Looking around, he saw that there are many knights in the room beside Rebecca.
They were the few knights in the mansion who swore their loyalty to the Ducal House of Sitterheim.
“Let’s head to Prince Leonard’s side and reveal the evil acts of the Duke! He is the prince who never
gives up on the victims in the Principality of Albatro! He will definitely help us!”
“……”
Dennis keeps silent for a while after hearing Rebecca’s plea.
He should be able to escape from this city.
But can they really escape?
There’s no way that the Duke would not be cautious against betrayal at this crucial moment and he is
also aware that Dennis tried to betray him once before.
There will definitely be an ambush on his way to join Prince Leonard.
Dennis read the situation as such and let out a heavy breath.
He then laughed at his own foolishness.
474
“Hahaha……what a useless man I am.”
“My Lord?”
“…..Sir Rebecca. I am giving you a mission.”
Saying so, Dennis steps on the floor at the corner of the room.
Doing so, it opened and revealed a letter inside. It was a letter Dennis had written describing all the
evil deeds of Duke Kruger and other Southern Nobles.
It was all in his handwriting with a special magical blood stamp used in writing important contracts.
The presence of this stamp will increase the letter’s credibility.
“Take this letter and head to the Imperial Capital.”
“No!? Are you saying that I should escape alone!?”
“You are the daughter of my best friend. For me who has no children, you were like a
daughter……that’s why I am entrusting this to you. Please head to the Imperial Capital and hand this to
the Emperor.”
“No! Please let me stay with you!”
“You can’t. You are still young. This is no place for you to throw your life away.”
Saying so, Dennis picks up the sword lying against the wall.
Seeing him, Rebecca realized that Dennis was planning to die.
It has been over ten years since her parents passed away when she was young and the Lord who has
been acting as her new parent is now about to die.
Rebecca couldn’t accept that.
“I will fight too! I will repay you for raising me!”
“I didn’t raise you so that you could die! Live on……..please grant this miserable wish of mine.”
“No! I won’t! At least please run away together with me My Lord!”
“I have abandoned many children……I don’t think I can live with that any longer. Of course, this will
not be an honorable death. There is no longer honor left in this house anymore. But, at the very least I
have to fulfill my duty as a noble.”
Saying so, Dennis looks over his knights except for Rebecca.
475
Their faces are determined. Originally, they were prepared to give their lives in order to let their Lord
escape. However, if the Lord himself said that he has one last thing to do then no one among them is
going to stop him.
“What duty of a noble…….is it your duty to die!?”
“Wrong. It is to save. All the children who were kidnapped in the South will at some point be gathered
here once. It was to determine their value. There are still many children left in the mansion. I can not
escape by myself now can I.”
“But…..I am your knight as well!”
“The mission of a knight is to obey their Lord’s order. I won’t allow you to be selfish any longer. Go! Sir
Rebecca!”
His voice was firm like never before.
Receiving her order, Rebecca sheds her tears while kneeling down and accepts the letter.
Then, footsteps can be heard from outside.
Dennis who heard it give out his last order.
“Use the window to get out. While we are fighting, spread the words that there’s a rebellion and use
the confusion to run to the capital!”
“Yes…..”
Receiving her order, Rebecca standby waiting at the window.
Dennis kicked open the door and began to engage with Duke Kruger’s knights who were taken by
surprise.
With his back burned to her eyes, Rebecca jumped out of the window.
Then.
“IT’S A REBELLION! THERE ARE REBELS AT THE LORD’S MANSION! EVERYONE, RUN AWAY- – – !!”
Leaving the mansion, Rebecca screamed at the top of her lungs and began her long journey to the
imperial capital.
———————————————
“WOAAAAAH!!”
Dennis cut down one knight after another.
He has finally reached the basement of his mansion.
476
There were a lot of knights who swore their loyalty toward him more than he thought and they are
now furiously fighting against Duke Kruger’s knights who haughtily walk around the mansion like
they own the place.
“Hiiiii!!??”
“Get out of my way!”
The slave merchant who fell on his butt was decapitated by Dennis without any hesitation.
They were merchants associated with the Kruger house who were there to determine the value of the
slave children.
Dennis doesn’t have any compassion for them.
After that, Dennis and a small number of knights accompanying him arrived at the prison where the
children are being held.
Dozens of children were collared and put inside the dimly lit prison.
After seeing the unsanitary prison cell and how thin the children have become, Dennis thought to
himself that he should have done this sooner.
“It’s okay! I came to save you!”
Dennis then took the key from the corpse of the guard and opened the cell.
However, the children did not try to move as if they were solidified.
Seeing that, Dennis sheathed his sword and slowly entered the cell.
“It’s alright……I will get you out of here……”
“Really…….?”
One girl mutters.
She is around ten years old with odd eyes of red and blue irises.
Guessing that she is a child from the immigrant village, Dennis bites his lips.
“Yeah, really……”
“I can return to the village……?”
“Yes, you can……”
“I can meet Lyn-oneechan……..?”
477
“Yes, you can. There’s a gentle prince called Prince Leonard coming to rescue you. He will definitely
take care of you.”
Saying so, Dennis slowly approaches the girl.
He then gently embraced the dirty girl.
“I’m sorry………I’m sorry……..”
“I want to go home…….I want to go back……”
Stroking the hair of the sobbing girl, Dennis nods.
Dennis looks over and tells the other children.
“Everyone, I will get you home. I swear.”
Smiles appear on the children’s faces with his words.
However,
“I won’t let you do that.”
“Gohoh……”
A man in black appeared behind him and pierced Dennis’s chest.
Dennis coughs up blood and squeezes his power to pull out his sword and slash at the man.
However, his attack did not hit.
This man was the instructor who trained talented children into an assassin. He’s not an enemy he can
defeat with superficial swordsmanship.
Not to mention his pierced chest, it is clear that he is now at death’s door
Still, Dennis did not give up.
He didn’t have any right to.
Even so.
There was a wall called real ability that he wouldn’t be able to overcome no matter how determined
he is.
Dennis rushes at the man in desperation.
“WOAHHHHHHH!!!!”
“How unsightly.”
478
The instructor cut off Dennis’ head as he lunged past him.
His neck fluttered through the air, rolling underneath the feet of the girl with odd-eyes.
Seeing the head of the man who said he came to save her, for a moment, the girl did not know what
just happened.
However, the moment her eyes met with Dennis’s, her faint hope was shattered and fear and despair
took over her heart.
“NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!!!!”
The cry of the girl was loud and echoed through the place.
At the same time, the girl’s eyes glow and the prison was then wrapped in something black.
479
Mistake Three Years Ago
“Aneue! Lize-aneue!”
“What? You still have something to say?”
Lize-aneue grumpily reply.
Her voice, expression, bearing, everything screamed [Don’t get close to me now]. She is clearly in a
bad mood. Normally, I wouldn’t approach her when she’s like this either.
But this time is an exception.
“Yes, there’s a lot I want to say to you. You haven’t even cleared up anything yet either.”
“I already refused Jurgen once and for all like you told me to right? What are you dissatisfied with
now?”
“I have no problem if you were being honest. But you weren’t right?”
“What are you saying? I was being completely honest.”
“You really are a bad liar you know.”
From the expression on her face, there’s no way she was being honest.
Rather, she looked like she regretted it instead.
“How about we talk while we walk? I have something I wanted to ask you.”
“I don’t feel like it.”
“Is that so…..actually, Christa just found herself a male friend you see.”
“What!? What kind of man is he!? Is he competent!? How old!?”
“That was a lie.”
For a moment, Aneue’s face turned blank.
Then,
“I see. It seems you want to take my lesson after a long time huh?”
“Wa!? It’s just a joke! A joke! But if you couldn’t tell that was a lie then there’s a lot of things you still
don’t know yet right?”
Stopping my sister’s hand from reaching the sword on her belt, I bitterly smile.
480
Aneue thought for a while and then exhaled.
“…..only a short while alright.”
“That will depend on you Aneue. Let’s walk together then.”
I say so and start walking next to her.
Aneue stays silent all the time.
As I thought, I have to create an atmosphere where she can talk to me.
“I have a lot of things I am curious about.”
“Narrow it to one.”
“Alright……only one then. What happened between you and Leo three years ago?”
She probably doesn’t expect that question.
Lize-aneue opens her eyes wide.
She then averted them away from me.
“You said you will answer one question right?”
“…..it’s not related to this.”
“Probably. You haven’t visited the capital too often since then, right? We have only exchanged letters
since then too. From my point of view, it looked like you were trying to avoid people you know.”
Lize-aneue looked at me annoyingly and looked up at the sky.
Then.
“…..Three years ago, at the Crown Prince’s funeral. I tried to do something and Leo stopped me.”
“What were you trying to do?”
“I was going to kill Zuzan.”
“That’s…..”
That’s certainly like what Aneue would do.
And stopping her was also what Leo would do.
So something like that happened.
He also has his own secret huh.
481
“She was both involved with the death of my mother and the Crown Prince. I was convinced that I
have to get rid of her before a calamity befalls the Empire……but Leo stood in front of me.”
“Even so…..I wanted to kill that woman. I thought that I could never forgive her. That’s why I try to get
past him with brute force but……Leo didn’t give up. No matter how many times I beat him down, he
told me that I was wrong and stood in my way.”
“That’s very like him.”
“…….Leo said that justice should be done by the law. But the law is powerless. Aniue was killed but
there was no evidence of murder. That’s why I have no choice but to kill her myself……that’s what I
thought. That’s why I was trying to make him faint. But he didn’t. Even after I beat him over and over
and over……….”
Come to think of it, he locked himself up in his room for a while after the Crown Prince’s funeral.
I thought that he was in shock but maybe he was just hiding his beat-up self.
“Despite all that…..Leo didn’t back down. He said that I was wrong and that Aniue wouldn’t want this.
Still…..two of the imperial family members are dead……I just couldn’t shut up and take it so I told him
to stop talking about his ideal. I asked him if he understands the feeling of losing their own mother
and the brother you have sworn to support. Whether he understands the feeling of those left
behind………then he asked me, would happen to Christa if I am gone. My other family members? The
Empire? What Aniue was trying to protect? He said what I was trying to do was only throwing away
my responsibility and running away.”
“……So how did you reply to Leo?”
Lize-aneue turns her sight from the sky down to the ground. Her expression was very sad.
This is my first time seeing her making such a face.
“….I couldn’t say anything…….I realized that blood got to my head. And before I noticed……I just
couldn’t stand being there anymore. I have no right to face the tattered Leo back then…….that’s why I
returned to the border like I was running away from him.”
“I see. You can’t forgive yourself so you stop yourself from meeting more people.”
“…..Yeah. I couldn’t forgive myself. I was scared. If Leo didn’t stop me I would have done something
stupid. I was scared of myself……I stopped making friends after that. I turned down anyone who
attempted to get close to me. Still, I couldn’t abandon you, Christa…….and Jurgen. At first, I thought
Jurgen was annoying because how he relentlessly came at me but……… I was grateful for him.”
Before we noticed we were climbing up a hill near the mansion.
Aneue silently climbed it until she reached the top then she just sat there at the bench on top of that
hill.
482
That figure of her was like a different person from my pushy elder sister.
“I will only marry [someone who can die together with me]. Those words were the cornerstone for all
this right.”
“……If I am left behind, I don’t know what I would do. That being said…….I don’t want to make
someone else feel that pain either. I am a soldier. I have already prepared for my death. But…… I can’t
accept the death of someone who is not a soldier.”
“That’s why you kicked Duke Reinfeld out of the army right? “
“Jurgen is excellent. I can leave him to manage the troops or I could have him be my chief of staff. But
he can’t die together with me. I couldn’t let him feel the pain I felt.”
“But you still can’t cut ties with him. He is your closest friend isn’t he?”
“……I don’t know how he thinks but from my point of view, he is an old friend. But like you said. I
shouldn’t be binding him with me. I……….was spoiled by him.”
That’s why she said that huh.
She was clumsy, or how should I put this.
Perhaps her time has stopped since that day three years ago.
She turned her mind away from everything and only focused on her duty as a soldier.
I can’t blame her. Aneue was the one who was the closest to the Crown Prince. She was watching him,
supporting him. Like I am with Leo.
If Leo is gone…….I wonder what would I do?
This is difficult. I will probably act the same way as Aneue.
But what would I do if someone stopped me?
Aneue has been living with feelings that have nowhere to go.
“I can’t say that I understand Aneue’s feelings. I haven’t lost anyone after all. The Crown Prince was
someone I looked up to but our relationship as a family was shallow. I only have my mother and little
brother. No one important to me has been taken away. But I have something that I can say.”
“What is it…..?”
“I think of you as a family. Christa too, Mother too, Leo’s probably too. That’s why the life you lived
makes me sad. I don’t think you will be able to find happiness if you keep living like this.”
“I am not looking for happiness. The happy ideal I drew…….it was already shattered three years ago.”
483
“Leo will make a happier deal for you. that’s why please look toward the future too, Aneue.”
There was no persuasive power behind those words.
It was only an advertisement that Leo who just entered the succession war will be able to make a
better ideal than the late Crown prince.
Leo is often compared to the Crown Prince and He himself is trying to be like him.
However, no one ever says that he was comparable to the Crown Prince. The current Leo is like an
inferior version of him.
But.
“I will make up for what Leo is missing. We can surpass even our elder brother. We will show you
something much better than the ideal future you drew with him. That’s why please try to see it.”
“….You have grown. The ideal I drew together with Aniue was much grander than you think you
know?”
“That’s how I want it.”
Saying so, I stare into Lize-aneue’s eyes.
Her eyes are different from usual.
They were peaceful.
“…..it really is a strange feeling to see my little brother grow up.”
“Is that so? Then you might even feel strange if you saw Leo now you know. That guy also grew up
after all. Everyone has grown since the Crown Prince passed away. Duke Reinfeld as well. There’s no
way that was a good ending for a man who has been striving to be a man suitable for you. I don’t mind
if you don’t want to marry him but you don’t hate him right?”
“I guess…..he is a man who works hard for my sake. I think I like him quite a bit. Of course, I don’t see
him as a member of the opposite sex though.”
“Then let’s tell that to him. It would be wasteful to break ties with him after all.”
“That’s true but……”
Aneue seems nervous.
Don’t tell me.
“It’s awkward for you isn’t it?”
484
“O, Of course, it’s going to be awkward!? I just said that to him right? What should I say if I meet him
now!?”
“It’s fine, isn’t it. If you properly being honest with him, I’m sure that person wouldn’t mind it at all.”
“But I do! I can’t fix this on my own! You have to talk with him and told him what I say! That’s the best
method!”
“You really are a troublesome person…….”
“What are you saying? If you are my little brother then you should put in the effort to help your sister
here! Since you lent your hand to Jurgen, I won’t let you say no to me now alright!?”
Haa, I should be helping Jurgen with his proposal but how did it come to this.
If it’s Jurgen then if Aneue just said [Sorry, I said too much] then he would break down with tears of
joy in no time. But it seems her pride won’t allow her to say that huh.
As I thought, she really is a troublesome person.
Well even if it’s just a little, it’s good that Aneue has returned to herself.
Let’s do this slowly. Nothing good comes from rushing things after all.
While I was thinking so, someone came up on the hill.
“Nn? Aren’t you the butler of Duke Reinfeld?”
“I, I finally found you! Th, there’s a report coming for both of you, Your Highness! There was a purple
signal fire rising from the South. It seems that something is happening there that will threaten the
whole Empire!”
Purple signal fire is signifying the highest level of emergency. Once you lit it up, it will be relayed to
the Imperial Capital via relay stations installed in various places.
It was the signal that was used when the Crown Prince passed away on the battlefield three years ago.
And now that signal has risen from the south.
“Leo…….?”
I involuntarily look to the south.
It was the same as that day.
It seems that the turning point of fate always comes when you are least prepared.
Together with Aneue, we started running out at the same time.
485
Path of Light
“Where’s Jurgen!?”
Returning to the mansion, that was the first thing Lize-aneue asked.
Jurgen, who should have been at the mansion, was absent.
“The Duke has already led the knights out to answer the emergency.”
“He already left!?”
As expected of him, his response was really fast.
But it was too fast.
It means that he left with only the knights that were already ready to deploy.
“Call him back immediately! We still don’t know what happened in the south you know!? Why did he
leave without confirming that first!?”
“We tried to stop him but……..the Duke said that he is going to pave the way for you, Your Highness…..”
“Paving the way!? Just what is he going to do!?”
“The Duke said that he is going to get rid of the monsters on your path……”
I see.
Then it’s understandable why he only led out the available knights.
But it is still dangerous. The route from this place to the south is quite difficult to travel after all.
Not to mention that it is far away, the south is dense with forests. Since the path is an unpaved road,
monsters often appear from the forests.
“Aneue. What about the unit that was undergoing the drill?”
“We can’t use the recruits. The only one I can use here would be the cavalry regiment I brought along
as the exercise partner.”
A regiment consists of five companies. One company is about two hundred men, so the cavalry
regiment should consist of a thousand cavalries. Well, it might not be that exact number because we
have to count on the injured and the vacant positions but their number should be near a thousand.
“Only one regiment?………we don’t have enough men do we.”
486
“It’s a lot considering that we can assemble them in a hurry but…….their number is not enough to face
this kind of emergency.”
Purple signal fire is a big matter in this nation.
The one who ordered it to be lit was probably Leo. At present, only the generals at the southern
border or Leo who is the imperial inspector has that kind of authority.
That signal fire was that big of a deal.
I don’t know if that’s reassuring or not but that was a signal fire that will be lit in case of Leo’s death.
If there’s an even more emergency event than that happening in the south then the situation there is
that much more dangerous.
“At best we only have enough men for reconnaissance right.”
“Even so, it is necessary for us to ascertain the situation. Depending on what’s happening over there,
we might have to move the southern army. Anyway, we have no choice but to go to the scene
ourselves.”
Aneue was overflowing with determination when she said that.
This is my sister, the Imperial Marshal.
Now, what should I do?
It’s easy for me to go to the south with transfer magic. I can even bring Aneue along with me. However,
it’s impossible to designate an accurate transfer point. I don’t know what or where the emergency is
happening. Is it originating from Lynfia’s village or somewhere else? The place might not have any
significant landmarks as well.
At worst, I might have to consider revealing my identity as Silver and carry Aneue along with the
entire cavalry regiment to the South. That is the kind of situation we are in right now.
However, if I carry a thousand people to the South, it will take a lot of my magic power. It’s different
from going there alone.
In any case, if I have to make a transfer gate, I want a more accurate destination.
“Anyway, we have to wait for the regiment to arrive first right.”
“Yeah……..”
As she replied, Aneue’s face was full of worry.
“Your Excellency, the Seventh Cavalry Regiment has arrived.”
487
“Good work, Regiment Leader.”
With the Regiment Leader put his hand on his head, performing a salute. Seeing that Aneue also salute
back in return.
Looking at her like this, it really made me think that she is really a soldier.
“What about the recruits?”
“They are on standby at the training ground. I sent a messenger to the eastern border but before the
messenger arrived they should have already sent out the reinforcement. Let’s hurry and head to the
site now.”
The Imperial Army usually concentrates its force on the border.
Of course, they have men stationed at the central part of the country as well but each of the Lord has
their own knights in their territory while the imperial capital is being guarded by the imperial knight
order.
That’s why the Imperial Army is basically there to combat the foreign threat.
The eastern and western borders are stationed by elite troops in which the marshal has full control
over. If there is something happening at the other borders, they have enough capability to send in
reinforcements. They probably had countless training to prepare for such a situation.
In the past, while visiting the Northern front, the Prince was accidentally caught in a battle and died
while taking command. Aneue regretted that she couldn’t get to his side in time.
It was because of that lesson that the speed of deployment of the eastern border has been significantly
improved.
However.
“Considering the time, I don’t think that we can march at full speed.”
“There’s no other way. We have to go as fast as we can.”
The outside is already dim.
It will keep getting darker and darker from now on.
Marching at night is dangerous. They can try to take a shortcut through the forest but many monsters
will be active at night.
A detour can be avoided but it will still take time to get through.
I consider my options.
Should I reveal that Silver is here and transfer them to the place.
488
But if we transfer right into a Southern City there will be a problem with the local lord and if we land
far away from the scene we will still have to do a night march.
As I was wondering what to do, the Duke’s butler ran up to us with ragged breath.
“What happened?”
“N, no……Haaa, haa….the preparation is completed so I have come to inform you, Your Highness…..”
“Preparation? What of?”
“You haven’t heard……?”
The butler has an unbelievable expression on his face as he stares at Aneue.
Aneue had a suspicious look on her face but the butler immediately returned to normal.
“That’s very like the Duke……..Please, this way.”
Saying so, the butler guides us upstairs.
There, we saw an unbelievable scene.
“This is…..a road?”
There is a glowing road leading to the south.
It continues on and on.
“Three years ago, the Duke cooperated with the Lords in the surrounding area to create this [Licht –
Weg (Path of Light)]. It is still under construction but it will extend toward both the north and the
south. Once it is finished it will be a road that directly connects both borders together.”
“Why did he………?”
“His reason on the surface is to secure a transportation route for the merchants but…..”
“His real aim was to allow Aneue to be able to quickly head to both the southern and northern border,
right…….”
The butler nods quietly.
That day three years ago.
The thought that, if only there is such a road, must have come to Jurgen’s mind.
So that when such incidents happen again, he can prevent Aneue from having any more regret.
“What a guy……..”
489
“Your Excellency! If we use this path we can march to the south at full speed!”
“Is, that so……..begin preparation immediately.”
Aneue gave her command and the Regiment Leader started running. Seeing that, the butler quietly
leaves.
For a while, Aneue looks at the path of light and mutters.
“He really is an idiot…..don’t you think so too? Al.”
“Yes. Duke Reinfeld is already plenty rich. Once this road is completed, the ones who will benefit more
from it will be the surrounding Lords after all.”
Of course, Duke Reinfeld will benefit from it as well but considering its large-scale construction, it will
have quite a big negative effect on him.
This will surely take years to recover his loss.
The Lords around here are not very influential. Most of the construction cost probably came out of
Jurgen’s pocket.
“Why…….why did he go this far?”
“I wonder? Even I don’t know. How about you ask the person himself?”
That was a lie.
The answer is obvious.
I love you. He simply kept himself true to those words. So that the one he loves doesn’t have any more
regrets.
Three years ago, Jurgen may have felt the change in Aneue. No, it might be him who felt it the most.
“……Al.”
“What is it?”
“What should I do……?”
“I don’t know that either. But I think Aneue should behave more like yourself you know. If you accept
his proposal simply because you felt guilty toward him then the Duke will probably be quite
disappointed you know. He would say, I didn’t fall in love with this kind of person or something like
that.”
“What a troublesome guy……”
490
“Right. I think he is one of the three most troublesome people in the Empire. He did all this and never
say a single word to you after all. There are a lot of people who would say that they have already done
this much so you must marry them you know.”
I did this for you so marry me. That was simply not how he thinks. He did not do it to get something in
return.
Not for himself, but for the person he loves.
When he said that he wants to be true to his love, I thought that his feeling was super heavy but now I
understand.
When he can go this far for her, I wanted to praise him instead.
He is a frighteningly straightforward person.
“How about not feeling sorry for him and just start from thinking that wouldn’t it be nice to marry this
person, isn’t that a good enough start?”
“No. No matter how far he goes, Jurgen is still a good friend of mine.”
“Is that so. Well, it’s Aneue’s problem so I think that you should be the one who decides how you want
this but.”
“But?”
I turn back and silently walk away.
It’s about time the cavalry regiment is ready after all.
While I was looking at them, Aneue followed after me.
“But what?”
“You curious?”
“Of course, just say it already.”
“Well….I just thought that it would be nice to call him my brother-in-law. I couldn’t accept anyone as
my brother-in-law unless he can do this much after all.”
“Fuh…..is that so.”
Aneue lightly smiles at my words. Her blue mantle fluttered as she quickened her pace.
Her appearance was dignified and full of determination.
That’s the figure of my sister I used to.
491
“Let’s go, Leo is waiting.”
“Yes.”
Thus, Lize-aneue and I went straight to the South.
492
Reason for Trying
I and Lize-aneue along with the cavalry regiment marched at full speed toward the South. We
marched all night but we still couldn’t catch up with Jurgen.
The path of light was constructed by fixing special glowing stones on poles along the road. They will
appear as normal stones in the daytime and start glowing at night. These stones are not particularly
expensive. A child can even find one on a mountain.
However, the ridiculous thing here is its sheer amount of number.
I heard that it is still unfinished but how far will this road going to extend.
“To think that he was able to do this much without any help from the Empire.”
“Jurgen has many ties with the merchants after all. He was also in a cooperative relationship with Eric
until recently as well. That should help him quite a lot.”
“What a scary person.”
He even made use of Eric?
But as a duke, he still isn’t considered to be involved in the succession war.
Certainly, he has connections with merchants under Eric. He must have chosen Eric’s faction because
it is the most prominent one. However, that might not be his main reason
“Gordon is not hostile to me so far but if I show a sign that I want to become a candidate myself, he
will surely get in conflict with me. I shouldn’t have to say anything about Zandra at this point. That’s
why Jurgen chose to contact Eric. The person himself told me this so there’s no doubt about that.”
“He always gives his priority to Aneue isn’t he.”
“I only told him to do what he likes. It’s not like I’m asking him to do anything.”
Aneue mutters as she rides on her horse.
Her face looks a little displeased. It seems she doesn’t like him making her worried like this.
“Eric-aniue must also understand his aim and went along with it. This road will greatly benefit the
Empire once it finishes after all.”
“Jurgen is meticulous after all. He will probably sell it to the country to make some profit later.”
“That sounds like him.”
Even if his stance is one that prioritizes Aneue’s benefit, he will still take everything he can. He must
have several plans in the work already as well.
493
As I thought, he’s a scary person.
“We were saved because he fell in love with you Aneue.”
“What do you mean?”
“If he didn’t fall in love with you, he would have objectively looked at the situation and joined the
succession war based on that. He will surely become quite a troublesome opponent. He has money
and connections everywhere. It would surely be a headache if we have him as our enemy.”
“Yeah, Jurgen is certainly excellent. He would be quite a troublesome opponent if he became an
enemy.”
“It would be disastrous if he fell in love with Zandra-aneue don’t you think.”
“Don’t look down on Jurgen. Even if he’s like that, he’s still the man who fell in love with me alright?
There’s no way that he would be deceived by the likes of Zandra.”
“…………”
For some reason, her tone was slightly angry.
With my eyes round, I turn my eyes to the Regiment Leader running slightly behind us
He smiled and gave me a small nod.
So this is that huh.
“Aneue……”
“What?”
“Hmm, never mind. Saying it out loud would still be useless after all.”
Did you just speak fondly of him without knowing? I was about to say that but I swallowed it down.
She would just deny it after all.
Well, she didn’t look like it on the surface but,
It’s true that Aneue has acknowledged Jurgen.
While having that thought, there is a light flickering in front of us.
“Soldiers over there! We have prepared food for you! Please have them on your way!”
Saying so the villagers hand portable food packages to the soldiers.
Aneue and I stopped there but the Regiment Leader took one and immediately set off.
494
“Excuse me! Who told you to do this!?”
“N? What? Nii-san, haven’t you heard?”
Said the old woman as she handed me water and portable food.
Then.
“It’s the Duke you know. He said that there will be soldiers following behind him so he asked us to
prepare food for them when they get here. When he constructed this road he went out of his way and
made this space for us you know. He asked us to make something that the soldier can eat while they
march.”
“I see.”
“Hey! Ms.Beauty over there, have some too!”
Saying so the old woman pushes the portable food on to Aneue.
Aneue obediently receives it and looks around.
The cavalry regiment has been marching all night so they were tired. However, their expression looks
better now that they receive food and kind words from the villagers.
It’s because of Jurgen’s consideration.
“…….I gladly accept it. How much do I own you?”
“Don’t worry about that! The Duke gives money to the village every month. He won’t listen when we
tell him that we don’t need that much money either. He only told us to take good care of people who
travel on this road. Still, you guys are the first group of people we saw you know. You are following
after Duke-sama, right? If you catch up to him please thank him for us alright.”
“I see……..understood. I will definitely tell him that.”
Saying so, Aneue got up on her horse and took off.
As I follow her, I open the bag containing the food.
There was a cookie inside.
“Aneue loves her sweets after all.”
“Shut up. All soldiers are more or less like the sweets alright. You can’t find it at the front line after all.
This should energize them quite well.”
“What about you Aneue?”
“Don’t be stupid. I’m not tired from the start.”
495
Saying so, Aneue gradually raises the speed of her horse.
It’s Jurgen we are talking about, he must have made places for the horses to rest along the way as well.
I see, I see.
“He really loves my sister huh.”
Saying so, I followed after her.
Noon of the next day.
The fatigue of the regiment is about to reach their limit.
The path of light was over and a little earlier they have found recently defeated monster’s carcasses.
“This one is still new.”
“We are already close huh.”
The closer we are to Jurgen the more monsters it will be.
When constructing this road he must have someone exterminate the monsters along the path already.
In the first place, monsters won’t approach strange sources of light like this road since they are very
cautious. He should already have other countermeasures in place as well.
However, the completed path has already stopped.
Still, we have already arrived in the South. We don’t know where exactly Leo is but it is only a matter
of time before we meet up with him.
I was thinking about that when I heard the sound of battle a little ahead.
“It seems to be Duke Reinfeld’s group.”
“Yeah.”
That’s cold.
Her expression hasn’t changed but she quickened her pace by kicking the horse’s side.
She must be quite worried.
“My Lord…..! We can’t hold them much longer!”
“Those who are injured fall back!”
The voice that I got used to recently echoes.
496
Looking at the source of that voice, Jurgen and his men are facing a big bear-shaped monster a
distance away from the road.
Double Headed Bear. An A rank monster. However, one of its signature characteristic twin heads was
already crushed.
Still, it seems that it is going on a rampage. There are several small monsters around them as well.
Jurgen and his knights who have defeated monsters along the way here are struggling with this group
of monsters as their movements are sluggish from their fatigue.
The Double Headed Bear uses its claws to attack Jurgen.
Jurgen defended against it with his halberd but he was sent flying.
“Jurgen!”
Without realizing, Aneue called out his name.
She then tried to run toward him but once Jurgen stood up and saw her he shouted back.
“There’s no need to help me! Please go on ahead!”
“Don’t be unreasonable! Leave the rest to my subordinates.”
“If you still have energy left then please use it at the South! Please leave this place to us!”
That being said, there are only a few knights around Jurgen.
Perhaps he wanted to lessen our burden so he split up his group to cover more areas.
Aneue ignores Jurgen’s words and tries to order her subordinates to defeat the bear for him but
Jurgen stops her with his ogre-like stare.
“Please do not underestimate us! I and my knights are at least good enough to pave the way for you!”
“Enough already! You have already done enough!”
“Please don’t mind us and go on ahead! Why did you come all this way!? You are here because
something is happening in the South, aren’t you!? There are people waiting for you there! Please hurry
up and go!!”
Saying so, Jurgen charges toward the Double-Headed Bear and seals its movement.
Seeing that, the Regiment Leader ordered his men to advance.
“Regiment Leader!”
“Please forgive me. It is as the Duke says. We have to hurry.”
497
Saying so, the Regiment Leader excuses himself and hurries to the front.
Still, Aneue doesn’t move.
“Jurgen……why did you go that far? You already did enough, you have already done enough to support
me. You don’t have to go that far anymore…..you are not the type to be fighting like this…….”
That must have been the question she had for a long time.
In reply to that, Jurgen gets into a competition of power with the bear.
“It’s simple……! I just want to look good……!”
It was a blunt reply.
However, that might just be what Jurgen would do.
Jurgen is certainly a merchant type. He doesn’t need to go out of his way to the front and fight the
monsters himself. This might be his own foolishness.
But.
“I just want to look cool in front of the person I love….! I want to look like a dependable man in front of
you……! Is there any other reason why a man would train his body……..!?”
“What’s with that……”
“A man is such a creature! It doesn’t matter if it’s stupid! I just train myself to look cool in front of
you!!”
Jurgen shouts and pushes the Double-Headed Bear back.
The bear was getting afraid of the sudden burst in Jurgen’s power.
Jurgen did not miss that chance and splendidly send the bear’s remaining head flying with his halberd.
“YEAHHHHHH!!!!”
“The Duke did it! Charges!”
“HAAAAAAAA!!”
“WOAAAAHHHHH!!”
The Knights revive as Jurgen raises his halberd up and shouts in a loud voice.
I lightly glanced at my sister and she still looked worried.
Good. it seems she hasn’t noticed.
498
It might be unnecessary but I did help him a little bit.
I deployed a fatigue recovery barrier for them but that’s it.
It’s still a mystery how Jurgen pushed back that bear as the barrier doesn’t enhance his strength.
At best he would have the same amount of strength he originally has. Right now, if someone were to
say that it was a power of love, I would surely believe him.
“He looks alright isn’t he?”
“………..”
“Haa…..I will stay with him. If I am with him then won’t he be able to push himself anymore so please
don’t worry about him.”
“Are you sure?”
“I am already tired and when I think about it I wouldn’t be able to do anything even if I’m there with
you after all. Please take care of Leo for me.”
“I see……understood. Leave Leo to me. And don’t push yourself down too much. You have been able to
follow our forced march so far haven’t you….. You have grown up well. Both in mind and body. I will
leave Jurgen in your care alright?”
“Please leave him to me. He’s my future brother-in-law after all.”
“I haven’t decided that yet.”
“Really? I thought that he looked very cool earlier though.”
“Don’t look down on him. If it’s Jurgen then he should be able to do that much already.”
Saying, Aneue runs off with her horse.
When her figure disappeared, Jurgen and his knights also finished with the monsters as well.
However, maybe it was because I removed the barrier, everyone fell down to their knees.
Now, let’s take them back to a safe place.
“These people really are hard to take care of.”
Muttering such a thing, I drive my horse toward Jurgen.
499
Black Sphere
500
Leo’s POV
“Protect the fleeing people! Don’t let them chase the civilians!”
Leo uses all his voice to give out his command.
Leo was heading to Bassau when he noticed a giant black sphere emerging above the city.
After seeing that anomaly, Leo immediately began preparing for combat and ordered the emergency
purple signal fire to be lit. He immediately understood that the sphere was an anomaly and intuitively
know that it is dangerous.
It was something he has never seen before. At the same time, how it appeared was also beyond his
understanding.
The only grace here would be that he could prevent his imperial knights from doing anything rash and
immediately raised the purple signal fire.
“Kuh!”
Leo swings his sword as he rides on his horse.
The thing he swung his sword at was a monster made of bones.
It was a lower-class monster called skeleton. It is a rare type of monster called undead which wouldn’t
appear under normal circumstances.
Leo crushed its weak point at its chest area but it is like dripping water on a hot stone.
Skeletons are pouring out from Bassau as though water overflowing from a cup.
From what he saw, their number is not just a few hundreds.
Right now the people of Bassau are fleeing from that skeleton army.
“Your Highness Leonard! Please fall back!”
Saying so, the imperial knights cut down the skeletons around Leo.
However, no matter how much they cut down, more still come at them.
“They will keep coming! Let’s retreat for now!”
“No, we have to stop them here.”
“Are you sane, Your Highness!?”
The knight screams at Leo’s decision.
501
There are only Leo and the imperial knights who are acting as his guard here. Other than that there
are only Lynfia, Abel and his party members. Counting all of them it is doubtful whether their number
reaches twenty or not.
Stopping hundreds of skeletons is impossible for them no matter how you look at it.
“If we fall back here, they will get to the fleeing civilians. We can’t retreat. The front line must be
established here.”
“Then please at least fall back by yourself Your Highness!”
“I will not. Do you have anything else to say?”
Leo asks as he cut down another skeleton.
It’s easy to retreat. But doing so would put the people he wants to protect at risk.
He can’t endanger the people just to save himself.
Right now Leo is not an emperor. He may consider retreating if he has to consider the impact he will
have on the Empire. However, right now Leo is just an emperor candidate.
His life doesn’t have the same weight as the Emperor.
“I came to the South for a reason. I am here because I wish to save people from suffering. That still
hasn’t changed even now. What about you? When you were given your sword as an imperial knight,
do you still remember the oath you gave to the Emperor?”
The knight who proposed for a retreat against the growing number of skeletons was silent.
The imperial knights swore to become the Emperor’s sword. They swore that on their sword and
honor.
“I have vowed to devote myself to the Empire and its people. That vow will never disappear from my
heart.”
“Good. Then fight. The time we can earn here will definitely have meaning!”
“Yes, Your Highness!”
No one was urging Leo to withdraw anymore.
Leo doesn’t decide to do this purely out of his feelings either.
The skeletons overflowing from the city aren’t just behaving randomly. They are gathering at the
enemy closest to them.
In other words, Leo and his men are attracting the attention of the skeletons.
502
If he retreats here, the skeletons that lost their target will be scattered throughout the South.
In that case, the Southern Lords will be forced to defend their territory by themselves and it will take
more time to defeat all of them.
He decided to stay here as a [Decoy] because he considered that this action would be better for the
Empire.
“Your Highness Leonard. May I propose something?”
“What is it, Lynfia. You are not going to ask me to retreat too right?”
“My village is behind us, my apologies but it would be troubling for me if Your Highness decided to
withdraw here.”
“As I thought, so you understand huh.”
Knowing that Lynfia also has a similar thought, Leo shows a bitter smile.
Among the Southern Nobles under his suspicion, if the South were to fall to the skeletons, the one who
will receive the most damage would be the immigrant villages. There should be a few Lords who want
to protect them but the Lords who have such determination and enough power to protect themselves
and the villages will be even fewer.
“So, what do you propose?”
“Let’s call for reinforcements.”
Lynfia sweeps down the skeletons around them as she speaks with Leo.
Just a short while is fine, she wanted the time she can properly talk with him.
“Reinforcement? From where?”
“From all the South. We can send a messenger to the nearest city now.”
“Do you intend to move the Lords?”
“No, we can’t count on them. We will be relying on the adventurers instead. If we pay the reward, they
will not betray us and will only work for you, Your Highness. Like Abel-san and his party here.”
“Yeah, that’s right! We already received that sum of reward, after all. There’s no way we can just run
away by ourselves right! Even now I still want to run away as fast as I could though!”
Abel who was fighting nearby cut down a skeleton while saying so. His party members also start to
raise their complaints.
“Our leader is easily lured in by reward after all……”
503
“It’s my fault!? We talked with each other before we accept this quest right!?”
“No no, everyone was against it you know. We only accepted this quest because you suddenly felt like
being righteous and said that you couldn’t ignore a village in trouble right?”
“Oi Oi!? We already came all this way so don’t put all the blame on me alright!? We are a party aren’t
we!?”
Abel’s party members have such a merry conversation while maintaining their formation and looking
out for each other.
Adventurers are pro at dealing with monsters.
Certainly, if they have adventurers as reinforcement they will have powerful allies.
However,
“There are only small branches of adventurer guild in the south, I don’t think they will be much help
for us though.”
“I understand that. That’s why we will put out a request to every branch.”
“What do you mean?”
“We will issue a Raid Quest.”
Raid Quest. Leo searches his memory for that word.
He heard of it before.
At the bottom of his memory, that word came out from the story his mother told him when he was
young.
“It’s a large scale quest that many adventurers can accept right?”
“Yes. it’s rarely done these days but this is a great time to issue one.”
“By the way, why is it rarely done nowadays?”
“To put it simply, it is because the quest costs a lot of money to set up.”
Leo then understands what Lynfia was trying to say.
It is better to deploy a high-rank adventurer rather than many low-rank ones. The best example of this
is the SS rank adventurers.
It is much cheaper to ask for an SS rank adventurer than issuing a Raid Quest. A Raid Quest costs that
much money.
504
“Do you have funds for that? I don’t have that much money lying around you know?”
“His Highness Arnold has given me a lot of money. Let’s use it.”
“Seriously……he never spent any money on himself at all and now he just simply gave it away for
others.”
“Isn’t that like His Highness Arnold. He is a kind person isn’t he.”
Lynfia smiles and hands Leo the pouch she received from Al.
Leo, who thought that Lynfia was going to go herself, tilted his head.
“I think that if you go instead of me it would be much faster to go through the procedure you know?”
“I can’t say that there’s no possibility that I would betray you so leaving something like this to an
imperial knight would give Your Highness a peace of mind right.”
Leo frowns at Lynfia’s words.
Leo had already trusted Lynfia. He thought that there’s no way that she would betray him now.
However, that was Leo’s personal trust.
In this emergency of a situation, he can’t afford to assign this important task to a random adventurer.
Lynfia’s proposal was based on Leo’s position.
“I will remain fighting at Your Highness Leonard’s side. I have already made my promise to His
Highness Arnold that I will definitely become your power after all.”
“You have already helped me enough you know. Can anyone act as a messenger!? Anyone who is
confident that you will definitely not run away by yourself!?”
Leo asks the imperial knights.
The imperial knights do not react when he asks for a messenger. It’s like running away from the
enemy for them after all. Even more so in a situation where a prince who they must protect is fighting.
However, Leo added that he wanted someone who definitely will not run away by himself for the task.
If they do not name themselves here, it will show that they do not have that confidence.
Thus all the imperial knights nominate themselves. Leo gives the pouch to the knight who is the best
at horse handling and gives him his instructions.
“Head to the nearest city and ask the adventurer guild to issue a Raid Quest! The guild can contact all
of its branches throughout the continent! Make sure that they share this quest to the imperial capital
branch as well!”
505
“Yes, Your Highness! I will return here as soon as I can! May the fortune of war be with you!”
“You too, now go!”
Saying so, the knight started running.
Sending him off, Leo turns his eyes to the city of Bassau.
The black sphere is exuding even more malice and he already lost count of the skeletons.
It was as if the city itself has turned into the gate to hell.
While having such an impression, Leo focuses on swinging his sword.
506
Blue Seagull’s Rescue
“Alright, take a rest now Duke.”
I am currently at a nearby resting point with Jurgen.
Originally this is a place was designed to be one of the temporary resting points along the road. It is
now acting as a field hospital.
The tattered knights were coming in and out while the necessary treatment was performed on them.
“Sorry…….Your Highness……”
“What are you apologizing for?”
“Your Highness must have wanted to go to your brother’s side………it’s all because I am too weak.”
“Weak? You?”
Jurgen who is lying down in the hut with his armor removed makes a bitter expression.
I can only smile at his words.
No one would be able to say that Jurgen was weak.
“You were splendid. If anyone dares to laugh at you then they will surely get murdered by Aneue.”
“But……Your Highness…..”
“I’m fine. If it means that Aneue can move forward then I think I have already fulfilled my duty by
staying behind here.”
When I said that Jurgen replied with [Is that so.] and slowly closed his eyes.
Perhaps he is getting sleepy because he has been running all night without any sleep.
“Thank you, Duke. It may not be long before I can call you my brother-in-law now.”
I said that to the sleeping Jurgen and stood up.
Fortunately, Jurgen’s knights that have been scattered here and there are already gathered here.
Let’s leave the rest to them.
I leave the hut where Jurgen is resting and head to the hut allocated for me.
There, I set up a barrier to turn away the people and create an illusion of myself sleeping inside.
507
The people warding barrier is not very effective when maintaining it from far away but it should work
well enough against these exhausted people. On top of that, there shouldn’t be anyone who enters a
prince’s room without permission here but since Jurgen might come in when he wakes up, I set up the
illusion just in case. Finne did enter my room back then so I will have to be careful against people in
Ducal houses.
With that in mind, I transfer from the hut to the secret room at the imperial capital.
There, my butler is waiting for me as if he was already expecting my arrival.
“Welcome back, Arnold-sama.”
“The preparation is complete right?”
“Of course.”
“Good. Let’s go, it’s time for a secret maneuver.”
Saying so, donning my usual black robe and silver mask, I turned into Silver.
—————————————————————–
“What’s the situation?”
“Apparently, a mysterious black sphere has appeared in the South and a lot of undead monsters are
pouring out from it.”
“What about Leo?”
“According to the information from the adventurer guild, he is safe. His Highness Leonard has asked
the guild to issue out a Raid Quest to combat the monster threat as well.”
“Raid Quest? I see. It’s must have been Lynfia’s idea.”
It seems she wants to make use of the money I gave her.
I was right to leave the money with her.
Her adventurer’s wisdom really came in handy.
“How is Father going to respond?”
“That is……there is a problem regarding that. The Emperor ordered the army and the nearby Lords to
send reinforcement to His Highness Leonard but His Majesty didn’t mobilize the imperial knights.”
“Did something happen when they saved Christa and Rita?”
“……why did you assume that they were saved?”
508
“Elna won’t fail me. When Christa saw the death of a specific person, that future will be almost
inevitable. Long ago, when Christa saw the death of a maid, I kept her safe inside a house with my
barrier erected to protect her. But in the end, the scene that Christa saw became a reality. I protecting
that maid was also included in her vision. No matter how I move, the scene that she saw will come
true. That was why I left the strongest person I can think of at her side. Elna should be able to do
something about it through her power.”
“I see. Your thinking was correct. Both Her Highness Christa and Rta are safe.”
I nodded quietly to Sebas’s words.
It’s a good thing that I didn’t tell her that the future will always come true.
No matter how she moves, if she knows beforehand that the future will come true, she will not be able
to do anything aggressive. The reason is that she will end up worrying whether her action will lead to
Rita’s death. If that’s the case then she won’t be able to change the future.
That’s why I bet on Elna.
If it’s Elna, I thought that she would be able to do something about it.
“However, Elna-sama was removed from the imperial knight order because she was charged with
jeopardizing Her Highness Christa’s security. She was ordered to confine herself inside her mansion as
well. That’s the reason His Majesty did not mobilize the imperial knights.”
“I see……Elna was…….it seems I will have to make it up to her later. But Father chose to prioritize the
castle’s defense huh. Well, it couldn’t be helped. A princess just got kidnapped after all.”
“As expected, the place that Arnold-sama placed the highest hope on is the adventurer guild isn’t it.”
“As expected?”
Sebas nodded quietly as I repeated his words.
It seems he has seen through what I am thinking.
Certainly, I am not aiming to borrow the power of the Empire.
The Empire is huge after all. I can not expect it to move that fast in response to an emergency. As a
member of the imperial family, I know that well. Just because some anomaly has occurred in the South
doesn’t mean that the army can be mobilized immediately.
In the case of a foreign invasion then the army would immediately be deployed to the border but their
response to an internal emergency is sluggish.
Should the one who responds be the central government or the southern army. That decision is hard
to make.
509
Since the Emperor’s command can’t be transmitted instantly, the time it took to relay the command is
already a problem. The distance between the imperial capital and the southern border is too great
after all.
In that regard, adventurers are more flexible. In cases like this, they are more reliable than the
military or the local Lord’s knights.
“Well, I certainly am counting on the adventurers but how did you know?”
“Finne-sama said that Arnold-sama will definitely do that so she has already moved out in advance.
She is currently calling on the adventurers in the capital and its surroundings to take part in the Raid
Quest for His Highness Leonard.”
“Finne is?”
“She doesn’t have any ground on it when she said that though…….”
“That’s so like her. I can expect the adventurers standing by inside the guild then?”
Sebas nods.
If that’s the case then this will be quick.
It depends on the situation in the South but if I can bring along the adventurers from the imperial
capital branch then it will be a big help.
“Let’s head out then.”
“Certainly. Please leave guarding Finne-sama to me.”
I told Sebas that I will be leaving her to him and transfer to the guild’s entrance.
The people nearby were surprised since I suddenly appeared but I paid them no mind and entered the
guild.
However, at the same time, a voice can be heard from within the guild. it is now spreading toward the
whole capital.
[[To everyone who lives in the imperial capital. My name is Finne von Kleinert. At present, the
Adventurer Guild is now looking for adventurers who are willing to participate in the Raid Quest to
respond to the Southern emergency. Please, I beg all adventurers who can hear this to lend us your
help. There are people who are suffering in the South. We need your help to save them]]
Finne’s speech echoed throughout the capital.
Listening to her speech, I smile.
It really sounds like her. Not an order, simply a sincere wish can move people.
510
“This is an announcement from the guild. Currently, the situation is as Finne-sama has described, the
guild is now issuing a Raid Quest. The Quest name is [Blue Seagull’s Rescue]. Adventurers of rank B
and above can join this quest! This is the first Raid Quest after a long time! It’s your time to make a
fortune! Please make sure to participate!”
That must be the guild receptionist.
This must be good publicity for them as well.
Still, Blue Seagull’s Rescue? The guild is certainly the one who decides on the quest’s name but aren’t
they being too cheap?
It might sound good to adventurers who often just ride the flow though.
They should be happy that they get a chance to fight for the Princess of the Blue Seagull as well.
“Whoa? Even Silver is here? This one must be quite important then.
The man who said that was Gai.
He must have come here in a hurry. He still has his bed hair and his clothes are a mess.
“Are you going to participate as well?”
“That’s a given right? If it’s the request of the Blue Seagull Princess herself then there’s no man who
would refuse you know!”
Saying so, Gai cheerfully smiled.
Usually, I would sigh at him.
But.
“And my buddy’s little brother is in the south right now. There’s no way that I wouldn’t go and help
him right?”
“Is that so……”
Gai grins and enters the guild.
More and more adventurers hurriedly gather at the guild.
Not only the ones that are going to participate in the quest, there are also those who came to cheer
them on as well.
I step into the guild full of such adventurers.
The moment they saw me, the noisy guild turned silent in an instant.
511
Among them, only the receptionist who was writing down the name of the participant spoke to me.
“Y, Your name and rank please.”
“SS rank adventurer, Silver. I have come to join the Raid Quest.”
The receptionist nervously wrote my name down.
No matter how proficient the adventurer guild is, there’s no way for them to quickly transfer the
adventurers to the South. Nevertheless, the reason for the guild to gather their adventurers here in
this branch is because of me.
The adventurers must also understand that as well.
The person they have been waiting for has arrived.
Seeing that, the adventurers shout all at once.
“You finally came huh! Silver!”
“If you are here then it’s like we have a thousand men already!”
“Let’s go and help them together, yeah!”
Behind the noisy adventurers.
I found Finne together with the guild staff.
Once she spotted me, Finne bowed and smiled softly at me.
We didn’t exchange words but we conveyed our thoughts to each other.
I gave her a nod and addressed everyone inside the guild.
“Normally, someone with the highest rank will act as the commander for a Raid Quest. In this case,
that would be me but does anyone have any objection?”
No one raises any.
It’s natural for this to happen since the highest rank of this branch is SS rank and the one behind that
would fall down to AA rank.
However, it doesn’t mean that they are unreliable.
They are veteran adventurers who have been protecting the Empire in their own way.
“If you guys have no objection then I will assume the role of your commander. Your lives, I gladly
accepted it”
There is no reply.
512
Instead, a loud cheer echoed throughout the guild.
The morale is good. We can put up a fight with this.
513
SPT Chapter 81
So the new wordpress update really messed with my post format so I am go in to revert to the old one
for now. I want to separate an announcement like this to another post though…….
I also reset a lot of my plugins to default setting so if you notice anything weird, do tell me.
Enjoy the chapter.
-Mr.Graverobber
—————————
Appearance of the Demon
Lynfia/Leo’s POV
—————————-
“Abel-san! Are you alright!?”
“Yeah, some-HOW!!”
Abel kicks away the skeleton while answering Lynfia.
The half encirclement along with the front line that held back the undead has already collapsed.
Leo, on the other hand, refused to withdraw and formed a defensive circle formation around himself.
With that being the case, they were almost surrounded on all sides by the enemies but he managed to
maintain a strong defensive ground.
However, there was no time to rest because they were being attacked from all sides. Since earlier, the
top adventurers like Abel and Lynfia along with the skilled knights have to struggle to hold the circle.
“Lynfia, how long will we have to keep this up?”
“I think that we should be able to move soon but…….”
“Even you don’t know huh.”
Abel looks around while saying so.
Little by little, their allies started to get done in. they managed to pull them back inside the circle so
there’s no casualty but if this keeps up there will be no one left to keep up the fight.
“It would be great if those who ran away decided to come back but….”
“Counting on those cowards wouldn’t solve anything.”
514
There are only about a thousand men gathering under Leo. the other thousand ran away after the
front line collapsed.
Most of them were knights and the people who remained by Leo’s side are mostly adventurers. The
difference in mindset between adventurers who accepted the Raid Quest by their own will and the
Knights who were ordered to be here by their Lords really show here.
Of course, there are many knights who stay but she couldn’t help but think how different a situation it
would be if those who left decided to stay.
What Abel found especially unpleasant was the disappearance of some of the imperial knights who
should be acting as Leo’s guard.
“Tsk! As I thought, I shouldn’t have accepted this request in the first place! I have got nothing but bad
feelings since I came here!”
“Then why don’t you run away?”
“Don’t be stupid. We are adventurers. There’s no way we can just abandon the quest we already
accepted!”
“Isn’t this outside the scope of your quest?”
“The quest we received was to protect the village. Fending off the monsters here and protecting that
Prince is the best chance we got right?”
Abel’s party members also agree with him.
Unlike Abel who was considered to be a veteran among adventurers, his party members were full of
wounds. Still, they smile.
They know well that there’s no use making a dark expression in a life and death situation like this.
“Leader! Once this is all over please make sure to ask Prince Leonard for a raise okay!”
“Yeah Yeah! We worked too hard for the pay!”
“Seriously, let’s do that.”
At the time Abel and his party were having such a light conversation.
Leo who was at the center of the formation muttered,
“They came back huh.”
At the same time, cavalries were approaching them from the north.
They are part of knights who retreat when the front line was broken earlier.
515
“Open the circle! We charge on Bassau! All men follow me!!!”
Leo leads the knights remaining with him and charges toward Bassau.
Meanwhile, the cavalries approaching from the north make their way through the horde of skeletons
to join Leo.
“Oi Oi!? The hell is this!? Did they change their mind or something!?”
“It was His Highness Leonard’s plan.”
“His plan?”
“He purposefully ordered some of his imperial knights to withdraw from the fight and lead the knights
who ran away back to him. There are those who just followed the flow and retreated along with those
who wanted to run away after all.”
“He did that in such a chaotic situation…….?”
“Normally, the first thought anyone would have in that situation would be to retreat. But His Highness
Leonard didn’t consider that to be an option from the start. That’s why he simply planned his next
move from there.”
“If he decided to retreat it would be much easier for us though.”
“Yes, as expected of someone who aims for the throne right.”
Lynfia commented on such Leo and followed after him.
With Leo and his knights cut open the way for them, the adventurers follow behind them.
Their target was Bassau where the black sphere is.
“Your Highness! Please retreat! You have already done enough!”
“This is nowhere near enough!”
The imperial knight advises Leo to fall back but Leo stubbornly doesn’t give up.
He keeps confidently cut his way through the horde of skeletons, creating a path behind him.
Morale has risen enough. All that is left is to pass his baton to the imperial knights ahead.
Another squad is already nearby. if they can just meet up then their advancing power will increase.
There seems to be no reason for Leo to work this hard.
“At least please fall back to the second or the third line!”
516
“Don’t speak nonsense! Whether they are knights or adventurers, the one who put them into danger is
me! Even so, they still choose to stick with us! It is because I am fighting alongside them! Who would
follow someone who only takes command from a safe place!?”
The knights turned speechless.
Leo just showed them a completely different side of him they have known so far.
Despite being good at martial arts, Leo was not a fierce person. He has the impression of a good-
natured and kind prince.
However, right now, the prince leading them on the battlefield is like a general.
“Your Highness……”
“Shut up and follow me! We will definitely get through this!”
Saying so, Leo made his horse run even faster.
After that, they met up with the other squad and their momentum increased even further.
Bassau that once was far away is now within their sight.
“Bassau is near! Use all your power and push through!”
When Leo issues that command, someone swings his sword at Leo.
Leo managed to intercept it but his horse’s legs stopped.
When Leo stopped, it meant that everyone had to stop and right now they are currently in the middle
of a sea of monsters.
Stopping here means death.
Leo tried to rush ahead but there is a man standing in his path of advance.
“Who are you!?”
“Fuh…..who knows?”
The person who said that was a man in black.
He is the instructor who killed Dennis in the basement of the mansion. However, right now his eyes
are dyed black.
Even the parts that are not supposed to be black are completely darkened.
The man’s appearance was obviously strange but what stood out the most to Leo is his ability.
His strength couldn’t be described with only the word strong.
517
The imperial knights who saw that Leo was struggling also went and assisted him but they still
couldn’t push him back.
“Kuh!? The heck is this guy!?”
“Why is there such a strong guy here!?”
Leo aside, even the Empire’s elite like the imperial knights regard him as abnormal.
A man who they can’t lay a finger on even though they keep attacking him at the same time.
Someone with this level of ability should already be known to the world.
“Who are you?”
Leo asks again.
He repeated his question because the surrounding skeletons don’t even show a sign of attacking the
man.
“If you are going to ask my name then how about giving yours first?”
“…….Leonard Lakes Adler. Eighth Prince of the Empire.”
“I see. A royalty huh. Then it is only appropriate for me to give my name. My name is Balaam. For you
lowly humans it might be easier to call me a Demon.”
“A Demon!?”
That was a shocking statement.
Demons are considered to be residents of a world different from this one, the Demon World. In many
cases, they are existences that are much stronger than humans.
There have been cases where they were summoned by mages and brought disaster to the continent. It
was said that the Demon King the Hero defeated in the past was also a Demon.
And now that Demon has appeared in front of them.
Why?
“Don’t tell me….these monsters came from the Demon World……?”
“Correct. They are just the vanguard. There is a summon gate connecting the Demon World and this
world together at the center of this city. Eventually, a large number of Demons will flow into this land.
There is no tomorrow for you.”
“Then we will just close that gate!”
518
Leo then slashes at Balaam but he only lightly intercepts it.
“Give up. There is no way to seal that gate.”
“Unfortunately for you, I have already decided to never give up!”
“Hmph, foolish. You are already too late.”
“——That’s not necessarily the truth.”
A clear voice resounds.
At the same time, Balaam’s left hand flew through the air.
Balaam immediately took a distance and stared at the opponent who took his left hand.
“Woman…..who are you?”
“Marshal of the Imperial Army, Lizelotte Lakes Adler. Leo’s elder sister.”
“Aneue……..!?”
Leo’s eyes open wide as he stares at his sister who he hasn’t seen in a long time.
Engulfed with determination, her mantle flutters in the air.
Lize is still the same as Leo remembers her.
519
SPT Chapter 82
EARLY COFFEE APPRECIATION DAY!!! didn’t expect a release today didn’t ya.
Well, I have something to do later in the week so I just pushed it earlier though. Special thanks to
Putin and RiantoSunarjo for the coffee this week
Ciao,
-Mr.Graverobber
Spirit Tree Whistle
Going back a little in time.
Around the time when Leo joined up with the second group that got separated when their front line
collapsed and made their way through the skeleton army toward Bassau.
Lize was finally able to see Bassau from a distance.
“There are monsters everywhere.”
“But in there, some are still trying to break through it.”
She can’t be sure since they are still quite far away.
Even so, Lize was certain that Leo was there.
As she sped up her horse, Lize shut her eyes.
The younger brother who gritted his teeth and stopped her. The younger brother who was
straightforward in what he believes. Even now he is probably still trying hard to do what is right.
Then there is only one thing she can do as his elder sister.
“We are charging in!”
“Yes, Your Excellency!”
When Lize charges in, a thousand cavalries follow after her.
They are neither adventurers nor knights. They are an elite cavalry regiment that has long fought
under Lize.
There is no need for her to give some big speeches to increase their morale.
520
Every single one of them is a soldier who is willing to give her their lives. Even if she were to tell them
to die, they would gladly obey.
“Regiment Leader! We will be using that!”
“Understood!”
Upon receiving the instruction, the Regiment Leader raises his right hand.
Seeing that signal, a hundred cavalries in the rear come up to the front.
Each of them is wielding a crossbow. However, what they are holding right now is not just a simple
crossbow.
A circular tube was attached to the bottom of the crossbow and a small jewel was embedded right at
its center.
(TLN: Reminder, Jewels are magic containing ore in this universe.)
“The [Prototype Magic Rotating Crossbow] is ready Ma’am!”
“Good. Eradicate anything that gets in my way.”
“Understood! TARGET THE MONSTERS IN FRONT! NO NEED TO AIM CAREFULLY! THERE ARE ONLY
ENEMIES IN FRONT OF US! PULL THE TRIGGER AND THE ARROW WILL HIT THE TARGET! —
STEADY! FIREEEE!!”
Responding to the Regiment Leader’s command, a hundred soldiers pull the trigger at the same time.
Holding the trigger down, arrows rapidly fired from the crossbow using the magic power contained
inside the jewel.
The circular tube containing arrows attached to the lower part of the crossbow automatically rotates
the arrow to the top, achieving the function of rapid-fire.
The arrows shot with an unimaginable rate of fire hit the skeletons one after another, pulverizing
their body.
With the opening created by that, Lize charges in.
“It’s a good weapon but the problem is when we finished shooting it.”
“That’s the developer’s problem. All we can do is to place an order for it.”
The prototype magic rotating crossbow’s fault is that once the magic power stored within the jewel
run out it can not be fired using human hands and can only be used as a blunt weapon afterward.
Lize was conducting a test run for this weapon in the rear along with training the new recruits.
521
But unexpectedly she gets to conduct a field test using a real battlefield here.
“When we make a report for this incident, let’s tell them to make the under-barrel replaceable. its use
will be very limited if it is only a single-use weapon after all.”
“Yeah. let’s put in an order for anti-monster weapons as well.”
“That’s a good idea, Ma’am.”
While having such a conversation, Lize and the Regiment Leader raise their weapons and pave the
way for their men.
Since the rotating crossbow was made to be used against humans their effectiveness on the skeletons
has much left to be desired. Since the skeletons can continue to move without feeling any pain until
their core gets destroyed, the rotating crossbow has really poor compatibility against them.
“Hmpm……it’s been a long time since I got to do this.”
Leading a small number of her subordinates and charging into the enemy.
She used to do this quite often in the past but there are only a few occasions for her to do so now.
Leaving the fact that there is no enemy for her to charge into aside, her position doesn’t allow her to
do so.
Feeling her enemies’ malice from up close, she continues to move forward. Now allowing their enemy
even a single momentary rest, she treads the fragile path to victory.
That’s right.
“This is the battlefield……!”
Saying so, Lize bears a fierce smile as she cuts through the enemy’s army.
Seeing that, the Regiment Leader who has been serving under Lize for a long time remembered the
image of the Princess General who raged through the battlefield which was the object of fear for many
foreign nations.
When the Crown Prince passed away, she lost her fierceness and she only focused herself on the
border defense.
The image of Lize who once shone brightly on the battlefield.
“What’s wrong! Regiment Leader! You are getting slow, you know.”
“Yes, Ma’am! I am coming right away!”
Getting called by Lize, the Regiment Leader immediately followed her.
That’s when the figure of Leo finally came into her sight.
522
“Aneue…….!?”
Seeing the surprised look on Leo, Lize let out a small smile.
When she saw Al, she thought that he finally grew into an adult.
However, that impression was even stronger on Leo.
His appearance as he fought at the forefront of an army was the exact figure of a general and he is also
exuding the charisma that makes people around him want to fight for him.
His appearance resembled that of the young prince she once swore to support as his general.
“It seems that wasn’t just a big talk huh……..”
The two of us can surpass our elder brother.
Al certainly said that. Looking at the current Leo, she can see that what he said was not just a bluff.
His image made her think about what would happen if the straight-laced Leo was being supported by
the flexible Al.
“Did you grow taller?”
Maybe that’s why Lize said that with joy even though they are currently facing off the enemy.
“Eh, Ah……Yes, a little.”
“I see. It’s a good thing. You have to grow even bigger.”
Until then, I will protect you.
Lize then looked at Balaam whose left hand had been cut off.
Balaam tried to attack several times while Leo and Lize were talking but each time, Lize’s right arm
would react to counter him.
“Even though you said that you are a Demon, you sure look like human huh.”
Lize looks at the red blood flowing out from Balaam’s left arm that didn’t regenerate back.
Although it was a wound that it wouldn’t be strange for a high ranking monster to be able to
regenerate from, the Demon in front of her eyes doesn’t show any sign of any regeneration.
Lize derives one answer from that.
“So you are possessing a human huh?”
523
“That’s some good insight…….But what good would that do to you?”
“It means that it still isn’t too late yet.”
“I wonder about that? If you bastard came here as reinforcement then it only means that the playtime
is over.”
Saying so, Balaam raises his remaining right hand to the sky.
Then, black light started to glow on the tip of his hand.
From the town of Bassau, High ranking undead monsters such as three-meters huge skeletons, and
dragon zombies with rotten bodies emerged.
“Quickly running away right now would be a wise choice, don’t you think?”
Saying so, Balaam became transparent and disappeared from there.
Lize and Leo who were left behind were forced to make a decision.
“As I thought, the difference in strength between our forces is too large.”
“But if we fall back here, I don’t know when we will get the next chance to approach Bassau again.”
“……..It seems you already have your answer huh?”
“I have no intention of retreating from the start. If that Demon has to call in reinforcement then now is
the time we must fight. If we leave him alone, he will surely disappear into our society.”
“Do you have any guarantee that you can win?”
“None. However, that will still be true even if we retreat here. No matter how big an army we lead, the
Demon will just summon enough monsters to match our number. This may be a crisis but it is also our
chance at the same time.”
When Leo said that with so much determination, Lize smiles again.
Shen then bisected the huge skeleton that rushed at them.
“Shall we go then. Don’t get left behind okay?”
“But of course.”
“WE ARE ATTACKING! OUR TARGET IS BASSAU!”
“CHARGE!!”
Thus Leo and Lize charged at Bassau together.
524
A while after Leo and Lize started charging toward Bassau.
Lynfia and Abel’s party finally joined up with the leading group.
However, the closer they get to Bassau the stronger their enemy’s resistance becomes.
“Kuh!?”
The number around Abel and Lynfia began to increase and their advancing speed naturally started to
slow down.
If this keeps going then….
Such anxiety begins to sprout in Lynfia’s heart.
Then, a fireball fired by a dragon zombie landed near Lynfia.
She was blown away by the shock and got herself separated from the leading group.
“Guh…….”
Resisting the pain, Lynfia stands up using her sword as a cane.
Looking around, she realized that she was blown into the skeleton army.
The skeletons around her are inching closer little by little.
When she tried to move, she noticed that she couldn’t move her body as she desired.
At that time, a whistle spilled out from her pocket.
It was a whistle made from a spirit tree that the old dwarf had given her.
It’s not a bad thing to rely on someone. That was the word that the elderly dwarf said back then. She
thought that she couldn’t call her allies into a place filled with death like this.
However, the thought that she can’t afford to die before she finds her sister was stronger.
“I will be borrowing this……!”
Lynfia grabs the whistle out and blows on it.
However, no sound came out.
There was no sound no matter how many times she blew on it.
Maybe it was defective.
Thinking that it is fully possible, she exhales and gently puts the whistle back in her pocket.
525
However, the whistle did make a sound.
It echoes far far away.
To the Imperial Capital.
Maintaining her composure, Lynfia grabs her magic sword and faces the approaching skeletons.
At that time,
All the skeletons near Lynfia were blown away in an instant.
“ ! ? What……?”
She thought that the dragon zombie fired its fireball at her again but she finally relaxed after she
heard the voice coming from behind her.
“Are you alright? Female Adventurer.”
“……Why..are you here…….?”
“I heard there was a Raid Quest. I brought the other guys as well.”
At that moment.
Adventurers from the imperial capital rushed toward the skeleton army from the huge transfer gate
opened behind Lynfia.
Hundreds of adventurers appear one after another and defeat the skeletons around them.
At the center of those adventurers.
Her greatest savior stood.
“If you can stand then come along as well. It’s time to make money.”
“Yes…..! Silver…..!”
Saying so, Lynfia followed after the masked adventurer.
TLN: I read your comment btw, I will keep up with this format for a while since the plugin still acting
weird and it is honestly easier this way……
I will revert to the old one when I have lengthy announcement though.
526
SPT Chapter 83
Anyone have any tip in killing Demeter with Caenis in FGO? I want my brown waifu to release her
rage.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Headless Demon
Around the time when adventurers were gathering at the imperial capital guild and Silver was about
to open the transfer gate.
Suddenly, a messenger from the castle entered the guild.
“Why, if it isn’t His Highness the Second Prince. How can we help you today?”
“We are having a meeting about the Southern Incident at the castle. Your transfer magic is a valuable
asset to us so we want you to wait a little longer.”
When he finished saying that, Eric unexpectedly lowered his head.
Unlike me, normally a royalty would never lower their head to anyone. that is the kind of position we
have.
“Plenty of time has already passed. If you still can’t determine your course of action, what guarantees
that you can quickly make up your mind this time?”
“I already proposed gathering all the troops near the imperial capital to guard the castle so that we
can dispatch our imperial knights. That proposal will probably pass soon.”
“Hou? Don’t you have to worry about which one of you is going to take the credit first?”
With that said, I think that his solution was quite realistic.
If the Imperial Knights can’t be dispatched due to the castle security concern then they can just call on
the army to substitute for them.
Although they may not be as powerful as the Imperial Knight, the army will be enough to ensure the
castle protection.
“I have recommended Gordon to lead the Imperial Knights so the process shouldn’t take that long.”
“That’s strange. When the problem occurred in another country you guys want to compete with each
other to take the credit but when it is your own country you are willing to hand it to your little brother
huh?”
527
“I am a royalty and the Minister of Foreign Affair of the Empire. I might be able to ignore other
country’s problem but when it is a problem of my own country, the power struggle is a secondary
concern to me. What I prioritize first will always be the Empire.”
Saying so, Eric stares straight at me.
It’s not a bad proposal.
It would be encouraging if the Imperial Knights can join us as well.
It may be a good idea to wait for them. If I am going to put the power struggle as my secondary
concern too that is.
If I am being stubborn and refuse him here, this incident might strain the relationship between the
upper echelon of the Empire and the adventurers as well.
When I was wavering, I heard a clear sound from somewhere far away.
I don’t know where it comes from but strangely I felt that Lynfia was the one who made it and that she
is in grave danger.
Lynfia is seeking help. I have no evidence of that but I was convinced. That clear sound was what
transmitted that to me.
“But……some of them might have to sacrifice their lives in the time we wait. While the Empire is
perfecting its preparation, there are people who will be sacrificed to buy you time. What are you going
to do for those people?”
“I will do everything I can.”
“Then I can’t accept your proposal. Adventurers are not knights or soldiers. We are there to save the
people who your government doesn’t notice and those who were abandoned by it. Leave. We are
adventurers. We will not take orders from anyone. We will do what we always do.”
“This country’s fate is at stake you know. Don’t you think that we should guarantee the highest chance
of success?”
“We do not know what will happen to the country. What we always prioritize first is the people.
Return and tell the Emperor, Silver will take care of this incident.”
“Do you think that such selfishness will be allowed?”
“SS rank adventurers are those are allowed such selfishness. And don’t look down on us too much.
Adventurers of the Empire are many times stronger than you royalties think.”
Saying so, I turned back and created a huge transfer gate inside the adventurer guild.
“Now, it’s time to make some money. Follow me.”
528
I stepped inside and said so.
With that parting word, I transferred away.
The moment I stepped out of the transfer gate.
The whole area was filled with monsters.
However, I saw a girl standing amidst all that.
No matter how you look at it, the situation was filled with despair. However, she silently stood there,
unwavering.
She is probably thinking about her next action. Like she always does.
While smiling at such Lynfia, I blow away all the monsters in her vicinity.
This should make it easier for adventurers who will enter the transfer gate.
“Are you alright? Female Adventurer.”
When I approached her, Lynfia opened her eyes wide in surprise.
“…….Why….are you here……..?”
“I heard there was a Raid Quest. I brought the other guys as well.”
After I said that.
Adventurers from the imperial capital rushed out of the opened transfer gate behind me.
They are quite lively. From what I see, the enemy’s main force is skeleton monsters.
If that’s the case then it would be fine to leave it to them.
“If you can stand then come along as well. It’s time to make money.”
“Yes…..! Silver…..!”
Saying so, Lynfia stands up.
After applying healing magic on her, I and Lynfia look to the front.
What we are looking at is Leo and Aneue who are fighting their way through the monsters.
“SILVER! IT’S A DRAGON ZOMBIE!”
Hearing Lynfia, I looked at the sky.
529
A dragon with a rotten body over ten meters in width is plunging at us with tremendous speed.
Seriously.
That’s a monster that one would only find in a book right.
“They won’t let us past that easily huh.”
I went up to the sky and intercepted the dragon zombie.
In the meantime, Lynfia and the adventurers from the capital are clearing a path toward Leo.
We are still inferior in number but we do have the momentum with us.
If I can suppress the high-rank monsters, they should be able to reach the city.
“So that’s the black sphere in question huh.”
While blocking the dragon zombie that plunged in to bite me, I look at the black sphere floating above
the city.
Unbelievable amount of magic power is emitting from that black sphere. However, it doesn’t look like
it is being used to send out an attack.
“What is it being used for.”
“GUGIHHHH!!”
“You are noisy.”
The dragon zombie that plunged at me was wrapped inside a barrier and got sent flying to the ground.
Since I dropped it inside the skeletons horde, the skeletons were blown away by the impact.
Then, I thrust my right hand towards the dragon zombies that fell to the ground.
[[Pierce — Bloody ・Lance]]
The magic was activated immediately due to the shortened chant.
A huge spear made of blood emerged from the magic circle and accelerated toward the dragon zombie
that was still trapped inside the barrier.
The moment it hit, the barrier was broken and the bloody spear pierced the dragon zombie.
“GUGAHHHH…..!!”
The spear of blood emits high temperature and melts the dragon’s rotten body.
530
The skeletons around it also melted away from the heat as well.
However, their total number of casualties was very small.
To get rid of this many skeletons, I would have no choice but to chant the spell and shoot a big one at
them.
When I was having that thought, I felt a huge amount of magic power swelled up so I looked toward its
source.
It was the black sphere.
A man is floating in front of it.
However, the man is holding his head on his side.
“Dullahan….?”
Dullahans are AAA rank undead monsters but the magic power being emitted by that man is on a
whole different level.
He may look like a headless human but despite that similar feature, he is not a dullahan.
Deciding so, I tried to launch an attack at him before he moved but he suddenly moved to the front of
Leo and the others.
“Tsk!”
Clicking my tongue, I transferred in front of Leo and Aneue and protected them from the sword
brandishing from that headless man.
“Kuh!!”
The multi-layers barrier I deployed was destroyed.
The power behind that attack. He is definitely not a Dullahan.
“I don’t remember asking for help you know? Masked Adventurer.”
“I can’t let the enemy take the head of our commander. So bear with it, Sir Marshal.”
Stared at by my sister, cold sweat started to break out behind my mask.
It will be okay.
This mask is one of Gramp’s prized magic items.
Voice and smell are one thing but this mask can also change the impression I left on others. Even a
close family member like her wouldn’t be able to notice that it’s me.
531
Despite her displeased tone, Aneue knows that the opponent in front of her is dangerous so she
immediately took a distance from me and started attacking another monster.
It seems she didn’t notice.
On the other hand, Leo is still by my side.
“Silver huh…..it’s been a while isn’t it.”
“You look fine. Prince Leonard.”
“Yeah, I’m glad you came. If we are not on a battlefield I would love to sit down and talk with you
though.”
“That’s unfortunate. Let’s do that when the opportunity arises.”
Leo nodded and left.
When I confirmed that he was already a distance away, I looked at the man in front of me.
He is just standing there but there is something that gives me a feeling that he is something foreign.
It’s not that he is headless. Something made me feel that this guy is fundamentally not a human.
The man with pitch-black eyes turned toward me and smiled.
“To think that there would be a human who can defend against my attack. That gave me a surprise you
know.”
“Finding a guy who can make such an attack is surprising for me as well.”
“A cocky human huh. Well, I don’t mind. It’s been a while since I’ve been on the surface world. It
wouldn’t be fun if you couldn’t do that much after all.”
“A while?”
“Oh, I still haven’t given you my name yet have I. The name’s Furcas. I am borrowing this body right
now but I am a demon.”
Saying so, Furcas smiles.
His smile may look cruel to a human but for the person himself, he probably intended to smile
normally.
Hearing the word Demon, one thing came to mind.
The one that snatched away my great grandfather’s body was also a demon.
At that time, it seems that the imperial knights and the Brave house were mobilized to subdue it.
532
“It’s surprising to find a resident of the Demon World like Demon. I see that you already have a vessel
but there should be a summoner too right?”
Technically, Demons can not exist in this world. The exception for that is to have the Demon possess a
vessel prepared by the summoner.
It seems that once there was a magician who used that method to control the Demons but now there
should be no one left who can summon them.
Binding a Demon to you is very hard and it costs a lot of magic power for their upkeep.
If you do it poorly, you will not be able to control it properly and the one who will be killed is yourself.
One of the abolished spells in modern magic is Demon summoning.
To think that there is still someone who could do that.
“I have no summoner….”
“Lie.”
I stare intently at the black sphere.
The summoner is probably in there.
“Good guess. But that girl is in no condition to order me around. In other words, she is as good as
doesn’t exist.”
“But you will be troubled if she’s gone right? That summoner is the one who stabilizes your existence
here after all.”
“What about it?”
“I can just rescue the summoner from that black sphere. If I do that then this ridiculous amount of
monster will disappear along with you correct?”
“Good job. Your answer was almost perfect. Certainly, there is a hole at the center of this center that
connects this world with the Demon World and both those monsters and I were summoned through it.
If left alone, that hole will expand more and more and monsters will keep pouring in from the Demon
World. Everything is exactly as you say. Except for one thing.”
“It’s not me that was summoned but [Us].”
At that moment, an owner of tremendous magic power appeared on the spot.
When I turned around a man in a black was approaching Leo.
That guy is also a Demon!?
That’s ridiculous!
533
He just slipped through my detection barrier!
I tried to set up a barrier to defend Leo but before I could do that, the sword that the man swung down
was intercepted by Lynfia who just caught up with them.
“LYNFIA!?”
“Are you safe, Your Highness Leonard.”
“Tsk!”
Irritated that his attack was blocked, the man disappeared
His attack speed was not high so he is probably a stealth type. However, in this battlefield where allies
and enemies are mixing with each other, he is a very troublesome enemy.
I tried to head to Lynfia’s side but Furcas blocked my way.
“Don’t get in my way!”
“It’s a Demon’s job to mess with humans, don’t you know.”
While he says that, the man in black appears again behind Lynfia’s back and swings his sword at her.
Shit.
At that time a voice suddenly echoed in my head.
[[NO!]]
The voice was infused with strong magic power and caused Furcas and the man in black to stop their
movement.
This is…….?
“Tsk…..I am retreating, Balaam.”
“Understood. It seems this woman is off-limit huh.”
Furcas retreated back to the city and the man in black called Balaam also disappeared.
No way, that was the summoner’s voice?
No matter how I heard it, that was the voice of a child.
“Xinfa……?”
“What?”
“That voice just now……Xinfa!?”
534
Following Lynfia’s unusual disturbed gaze I look towards the city.
Furcas fell back to the black sphere.
If the owner of that voice is the summoner then,
“You are familiar with that voice?”
“That voice belongs to Xinfa……she’s my little sister that was kidnapped!”
“……I see. Things are getting clearer now.”
All the people that got abducted had odd eyes. It wouldn’t be weird if they have in-born magic.
If she has summoning as her innate magic then it would explain the situation if the cause of this
incident is that her magic has gone berserk.
Still, the scale is too big.
“Your sister is probably inside that black sphere. From what I saw earlier, she probably forbade them
to attack you. If we can use that to our advantage then we might be able to do something about this.”
“Are you going to save them…….?”
“It will depend on you. Anyway, I need to get you to the city. Using transfer magic………no, it’s too
dangerous. They might be there waiting to ambush us. There is no choice but to escort you there on
the ground.”
“If that’s the case then we will open the way for you. We originally want to get to that black sphere
from the start after all.”
Leo then turns toward his aide.
Then, a knight got off his horse and urged Lynfia to take the rein.
Receiving it, Lynfia straddles the horse.
Then,
“If Xinfa is there…….I have to go. I am her sister after all.”
“You have a good reason. I will take the lead and escort you midway there. Follow me.”
Perhaps responding to the word [Sister], Lize-aneue smiled and immediately rushed ahead.
With Leo following behind her, many knights and soldiers follow suit.
They used to have the vague target of getting to the city but now everyone has a clear objective of
getting Lynfia to the black sphere.
535
“Silver……My name is Lynfia. I am just an adventurer from a remote village. A normal adventurer.
Xinfa is my little sister and she is a child from an immigrant village. Still…..are you willing to save her
with all your power?”
“Of course. Don’t ask me such a boorish question.”
Lynfia smiled a little and accelerated her horse.
536
SPT Chapter 84
I mistranslated one of the Demon name’s yesterday. Prop to Arash for correcting me.
So, Flukas is actually Furcas, the knight of hell from Ars Goetia. No wonder their names sound so
familiar. Can we assume that Al will have to fight all 72 Demons from Ars Goetia though?
-Mr.Graverobber
On the unrelated note: STELLLARRRRRR
Holy Flame
“Just ignore the small fries!”
Lize, who is leading everyone, gave her instruction.
As her words suggested, Lize is prioritizing advancing ahead instead of defeating the surrounding
enemies.
They only have one goal.
Bringing Lynfia to the black sphere.
“Having an SS rank adventurer with us really saves us a lot of work huh.”
Abel who was near Lynfia mutters as he looks at the sky.
“Yes. We were lucky that he came.”
While escorting her to the city he gets rid of the strong enemies like dragon zombies and giant
skeletons around Lize and the others as much as possible.
He was the best reinforcement she could possibly wish for.
However, why did Silver appear when she blew the whistle?
That doubt exists in her mind but she shakes it off immediately.
Now is not the time to think about it.
Lynfia swings her sword which is now in spear shape and clears the skeleton away from her way.
“I am going to the front.”
“O, Oi!? Everyone is here to protect you, you know!?”
537
“I can’t reach the city without doing anything myself.”
“Hmph……I like you, adventurer. Give me your name.”
“Please call me Lynfia.”
“I am Lizelotte. Have you heard of me before?”
“Yes. Your Excellency is the strongest Marshal of the imperial family and the elder sister of His
Highness Lenoard and His Highness Arnold, correct?”
“You know Al as well?”
Lize was used to being called Leo’s older sister but it’s rare for someone to call her Al’s older sister.
Al is a prince that people often don’t bring up as a topic. In the meantime, he is also a prince who has
no shortage of topics about him.
However, Lynfia favorably smiled at the mention of him.
“Yes. the very first one who reached out to me was actually His Highness Arnold.”
“Al did? That’s unexpected.”
“It was surprising for me as well. But he was not like what people described him as at all. Both His
Highness Leonard and His Highness Arnold are someone who can move for the sake of others. They
even lend their power to someone like me.”
“Leo aside, you really have a high opinion of Al huh. Don’t you think so too? Leo.”
Lize talked to Leo who was dealing with a giant skeleton.
“Eh? What did you say just now!?”
Leo couldn’t hear her properly so he asked what she said in a loud voice.
“Properly listen to your sister would you.”
“If you have to talk about something important then please choose a more appropriate time and place!
I will stop that monster so go on ahead! Take care of Lynfia please!”
“Yeah, leave her to me. You be careful too.”
“Yes, Aneue as well.”
After such an exchange, Leo along with a number of knights separated a little distance away from the
group and started dealing with the giant skeletons.
Meanwhile, Silver is facing multiple dragon zombies in the sky.
538
They almost reached the city.
“Is that okay? Leaving His Highness Leonard there.”
“He’s my little brother. Don’t worry about him. What were we talking about again?”
“It’s about how I have a high opinion about His Highness Arnold.”
“Ah, that’s right. Leo might save people out of pure goodwill but Al is different. He doesn’t help anyone
who isn’t worth saving.”
“Is that so?”
“Yeah. he will only help someone when he judges that person is worth saving. From most people’s
point of view, he might look whimsical but Al has his standard. Does he have the power to save them,
Does he have the cause to save them, Does he have the conviction to save them, those are what he asks
himself before he saves someone. So you can be proud. The fact that Al saved you meant that he has
acknowledged you.”
Saying so, Lize slashes at the skeletons in front of her.
She stopped her horse there and started cutting down the skeletons.
“Al reached his hand out to you and Leo walked alongside you. From here on I will pave the path for
you. I will not let my little brothers’ effort go to waste. Make sure you rescue your sister. Never give
up.”
“Yes!”
Replying to Lize, Lynfia advances.
Shortly thereafter, Lynfias and Lize entered the city of Bassau.
“Now! Attack its legs!”
Leo led the knights to fight against the giant skeleton.
The knights attack the giant skeleton’s legs all at once and the giant skeleton falls back. Without
missing that chance, the knights went in to finish it off.
“Another one is coming!”
“Get to offensive position! Don’t let them get close to where Aneue and the others are!”
Gathering all the knights around him, Leo leads them to defeat the giant skeleton.
However, Leo suddenly felt a presence behind him.
539
Leo jumps off his horse and escapes from it.
“Guh….”
Fell to the ground, his side felt strangely hot.
When he gently touched it, the place was moist and bloody.
“You have quite an instinct, Prince.”
“Balaam……”
It was the Demon who has the ability to turn invisible, Balaam.
The sword he held has red blood dripping from it.
That was Leo’s blood. He might have died if he hadn’t jumped off.
Thinking so, Leo stands up.
The bleeding is severe but the wound was shallow. It won’t prevent him from fighting.
“Your Highness! We are coming!”
“Half of you go stop the giant skeleton! The other half take care of monsters around me……..I will be
Balaam’s opponent.”
“However, your injury!”
“Balaam’s target is me. Since he can turn himself invisible, there’s no choice but to face him directly.”
Leo held up his sword.
Thinking of attacking Leo from the back again once he escaped, Balaam clicked his tongue.
There are two types of Demons, those that are suitable for combat and those that are not. Balaam is
the latter and his human possession wasn’t perfect either.
Furcas possessed an already dead human but the one Balaam is possessing is still alive. Therefore, his
current vessel could not exhibit the true power of a demon.
It was more convenient for Balaam to let Leo escape but Leo saw through that and chose to challenge
him directly.
“You are one cunning prince.”
“I will accept that as a compliment.”
The tension increases between the two.
540
Meanwhile, Silver came down from the sky.
“I will help.”
Balaam frowns at the arrival of a powerful enemy.
Balaam has no chance of winning against someone who can block an attack from Furcas.
However, the fact that this masked man is here means that there will be no one who can go against
Furcas at the other front.
Balaam wanted to destroy his enemy’s morale by crushing their leader but since his action is now
having a pleasant side effect, he grins.
However,
“No need. Please go to Lynfia’s side.”
“You do seem like you need help though?”
“She needs you. Please go.”
Leo steps in front and says that to Silver.
However, Silver does not withdraw.
“I can’t simply comply with that. it will be a problem for me if you die here.”
Silver then heals the wound on Leo’s side with healing magic.
However, Leo didn’t express any gratitude or turn toward Silver.
“Don’t mess with me……! Don’t worry about my life, worry more about the lives of those children! You
came here because of that right! ?”
“After I get rid of this guy I will follow after her. Don’t worry.”
“Don’t worry about me…….. Just go.”
“But…..”
“But what! If you recognized me then go!”
Leo turns his eyes to Silver.
The strength behind Leo’s eyes right now is something that Silver, no, Al has never seen before.
“What I aim to become is my ideal emperor……the first step toward that is to rescue those children. I
have mobilized many knights and adventurers to pursue that ideal. If I still can’t save those children
541
despite all that…….I will never accept it! I will definitely save those children and solve this incident!
Go! Silver! If you call yourself an SS rank Adventurer then let me witness your power!!!!!”
it would be putting it nicely to call that an angry bellow.
It was the first time for Al to see Leo like that.
That’s why Al gently kicked the ground and floated up to the sky.
“Then witness me well. Don’t die before I get to show you that. Prince Leonard.”
“It’s alright…….I am a man who would one day become the emperor. I will not die here.”
“Is that so…….”
Saying so, Al headed toward the city.
Leo then directed his strong gaze at Balaam.
“Come…..Balaam. With the name of the imperial prince, I will cut you down for unleashing this
disaster on the Empire!”
“If you think you can do it then come!”
With that said, the fight between Balaam and Leo begins.
Their swords collide. The usual Leo may have fought while calmly assessing his opponent.
However, the current Leo was different.
“HAAAAAA!!!”
“Kuh.”
Due to the series of fierce attacks, Balaam who only has one arm took a step back.
Then Leo hits Balaam’s sword with a powerful strike.
“UOOAAAA!!”
“Tsk!!”
Leo twists his wrist and aims at Balaam’s remaining arm.
At that moment, Balaam turned himself invisible and fled.
“He disappeared……”
Leo concentrates on the sound and presence in his surroundings.
542
If Balaam would retreat from just that level of attack then he wouldn’t come at him from the start.
He will definitely come to attack him.
Leo is confident in that.
And he was right.
“HA!”
“Guh……”
Balaam who suddenly appeared behind Leo leaves a shallow cut on Leo’s back.
In his hand was a dagger.
Leo turned around and waved his sword but Balaam had already disappeared.
Clicking his tongue, Leo looks around again.
However, he could not find any trace of Balaam and this time Balaam appeared from the side and
stabbed his left leg.
“Uhg…..”
“It’s useless, Prince.”
“Damn you!”
Leo swung his sword at Balaam but he slowly turned invisible and disappeared again.
Aware that blood rushed to his head, Leo let out a huge breath.
Where will he attack next? How should he fight back?
When he was thinking about that, Al’s face crossed Leo’s mind.
Deception is Al’s forte. He is a master of getting his enemy by surprise.
“If it’s Nii-san then…….”
Leo thought about it a little and put his sword back into the sheath. He then concentrated on detecting
the presence around him.
His opponent’s weapon is a dagger. Balaam has no choice but to aim at a critical point to cause a fatal
injury. The attack with the highest possibility of doing that is a thrust. Balaam himself still has a
leeway, he will not recklessly make an illogical attack.
Then the place he will aim at will be his heart.
543
Putting a hand on his heart, the moment Leo felt a presence behind him, he shifted his body to the
right.
However, heat runs through his left shoulder causing sharp pain.
Looking at it, he saw a dagger embedded in his left shoulder.
“Did you think you could avoid my attack by giving up counter-attacking?”
“No…..I haven’t given up anything…….”
Leo clenches his teeth, shifts his body and grabs Balaam’s neck with his right hand.
He then concentrates his mind and starts casting.
[[Flame descended from heaven・Save the virtuous・O supreme holy flame・Nobly burn・And destroy
the evil before me——-Holy Blaze]]
A five verses modern magic.
It is a holy magic spell that has a great effect on undead monsters. Although it is a highly advanced
spell that has few users among the widespread modern magic, Leo who had equally learned many
schools of magic so that the lack of knowledge would not trouble him someday has already mastered
this magic as well.
The holy flame was born on Leo’s right hand, burning Balaam.
Even though Leo’s hand is aflame, it has no effect on Leo.
“GUOHHHHHH!!??”
“I won’t let you get away this time…….”
Balaam, who tried to escape, strongly grabs Leo’s right arm but unwilling to let him go, Leo
strengthens the power of the holy flame.
Eventually, Balaam stopped resisting but Leo continued to burn him until Balaam’s body completely
turned to dust.
“Haa, Haa…….”
Turning to dust, the wind blows and scatters Balaam’s body to the air.
Leo pulled his sword out of the sheath and raised it high in the sky.
“The Eighth Prince of the Empire, Leonard Lakes Adler has defeated the Demon!!!!!”
At that moment, the knights around him raise a loud cry of victory.
544
Leo looks at the city.
“It’s in your hands now, Lynfia…….”
At that moment, the black sphere emitted a strong light.
TLN: Balaam/Balam is one of the kings of hell so if he has a proper vessel he might be stronger than
this?
545
SPT Chapter 85
Haven’t been able to play Monster Hunter World lately…….is there anything new? I heard that they
added Furious Rajang but #$%@ that ape.
-Mr.Graverobber
At the End of the Outstretched Hand
Entering the city of Bassau, Lynfia and the others are looking at the black sphere that is floating above
the city and the giant black hole underneath it.
“No need for explanation huh. This must be the hole that connects to the Demon World.”
Since Balaam called the monsters away all at once, there are not many monsters here but skeletons
are still gradually coming out from the hole.
If they leave it alone, more and more monsters will continue to come out.
“We have to do something about this black sphere before that happens….”
“If my sister is inside I think that there should be some kind of reaction if I call out to her.”
“So we have to find our way up there huh.”
Lize looks up at the floating sphere.
That sphere is not floating within a jumpable distance.
While thinking about that, Lize suddenly got attacked from the side.
She was blown quite a distance away but she managed to rotate her body midair and safely landed.
However, the sword that Lize was holding was broken in half.
“Hmm, it received this much damage from just one attack huh.”
“That was intended to be a killing blow though.”
Furcas lightly swings his sword and speaks.
He couldn’t hide his surprise that two people were able to take an attack from a combat-type Demon
like him.
However, there is a difference between blocking an attack and putting up a fight.
Furcas slowly approaches Lize but Lynfia and the soldiers stand in his way.
546
“It would be wise for you to back down here, don’t you think?”
“What about you? Wouldn’t it be bad for you to attack me?”
“There is no need to worry about that anymore. I already made my summoner go into sleep. In that
black sphere that is.”
“What did you do to my sister…….!”
“Your anger is illogical. That kid was the one who called us. In despair, she was looking for someone to
protect her, she thought that anyone is fine you know. She was only wishing for a safe place to be,
that’s why I protected her with that sphere.”
“Protected……!?”
A Demon can not directly defy the summoner. However, how it will fulfill their wish is up to the
Demon’s interpretation.
If you asked it to help you, it will. However, with such an ambiguous order, the method it chooses will
be free for the Demon to choose.
Because of such risk, the technique to summon the demons was abolished. In most cases, Demons are
more clever and cunning than the Humans so the summoner will be the one who will be at a
disadvantage due to the Demon’s freedom of interpretation.
Lynfia may look angry because of what Furcas said but she doesn’t recklessly attack him.
Furcas takes a step towards Lynfia but at that moment, Silver transfers in front of her.
“Your opponent is me.”
“Hou? You decided to leave Balaam with him huh?”
“That Prince is not someone who can get done in by that level of opponent.”
“Don’t look down on Demons would you.”
“Let me return that to you then. Don’t underestimate humans.”
The magic power of both of them suddenly increased.
In the meantime, Lynfia and the others take a distance away from them. They thought that they would
only be a hindrance if they are too close.
“Your Highness, are you hurt?”
“I’m fine. More importantly, we need to find a way to get up there.”
When Lize said that, a staircase-shaped barrier was created in front of them.
547
It stretched up and reached the black sphere.
“Aren’t you quite considerate, Masked Adventurer.”
“I’m honored by your compliment. Lynfia, go. That is also a type of barrier. If you can wake up the
summoner inside we should be able to do something about this situation.”
“Yes! Thank you! Silver.”
To prevent them from climbing up, skeletons gathered and surrounded them but Lize’s men formed a
circular defensive formation around her.
“We will defend this place to the last man!”
Under Lize’s command, The skeletons are being fended off for now but they will eventually be
defeated as their enemy has no limit on how much they can increase their number.
Thinking that she must hurry, Lynfia runs at full speed.
In front of her, Flukas appeared to block her way.
“You think that I would let you go?”
“Of course, I will make you.”
Lynfia keeps running at full speed.
Supporting her, several magics fly toward Flukas.
Flukas simply wards them away with his sword but as if surrounding him, magic fires at him from all
sides, pushing him off Lynfia’s path.
“Kuh!”
“I said that your opponent is me right?”
“It seems I will have to deal with you bastard first huh!”
With that as the signal, the two started battling.
Meanwhile, Lynfia took that chance and headed toward the black sphere.
“Xinfa! Xinfa!!”
Without any concrete idea what she should do, she called the name of her sister.
However, there was no reaction from the black sphere.
Lynfia made up her mind and plunges her right hand into the black sphere.
548
“GuUh!!”
A sharp electric shock runs through her right arm.
However, Lynfia doesn’t give up and pushes her right arm on the black sphere.
“Xinfa…..! It’s me…..! It’s Lynfia!!”
She gradually lost the feeling in her right arm. Still, she continues to push her arm further in little by
little.
As a result, Lynfia’s right arm began to dive inside the black sphere.
However, the electric shock is getting stronger as if the black sphere was trying to eliminate a foreign
object.
“Uuuuu!! Arghhhhh!!”
Groaning in pain, Lynfia grits her teeth.
She keeps telling herself that it’s not painful over and over.
“I’m sorry……I couldn’t protect you…..Xinfa……it’s alright now…..Onee-chan has come to save you…….”
Lynfia’s right arm sank deeper and deeper into the sphere.
Then, when her shoulder began to sink in as well.
A voice echoed in her head.
[[Lyn-….onee-chan……?]]
“Xinfa!? Xinfa!! Are you in there!?”
[[I’m scared….Lyn-oneechan…..]]
“It’s alright…..I’m here……”
However, Lynfia couldn’t feel anything at the tip of her right hand.
While continuing to reach her hand out, Lynfia speaks with her sister.
“It’s alright now…..let’s go home together…….”
[[But…..]]
“Don’t be scared……..I will protect you……”
[[The person who tried to help me was dead……Lyn-oneechan will die too…..]]
549
“What are you saying…..I won’t die…….I have a lot of friends after all.”
[[Friend…..? Those adult people are your friend…..?]]
“That’s right……they are here to help you Xinfa….”
[[……Adults are scary……]]
Hearing her sister’s words of doubt, Lynfia clenches her teeth.
Xinfa was a child who got along well with people back in the village.
For a child like her to say something like this. What kind of things did she have to experience? What
kind of eyes did she have to face?
“…..I’m sorry…..I’m sorry……Xinfa…….”
[[Lyn-oneechan, are you crying…….?]]
“No……I’m fine…….I’m just glad that Xinfa is safe……you don’t have to be scared anymore…….I will
protect you from everything……even if there are scary adults out there I will protect you…..”
[[Really…..? Is it really not scary……? Not just me…..will you protect everyone too?]]
“Everyone…..? There are other children with you? Are they safe?”
“Un…….”
“You protected them weren’t you……good girl…..it’s alright now…….I will protect them all for you.”
The electric shock didn’t stop.
However, Lynfia never showed any expression of pain.
She doesn’t want to make them worry about her.
If she scares Xinfa now everything will come to naught.
Many people have given her their support. She is not alone.
If she fails because of some electric shock here she wouldn’t be able to face those people.
“Grab my hand! Xinfa!”
[[Un…..but Lyn-oneechan, where are you?]]
“Just reach out your hand! I will reach mine out too!”
Saying so, Lynfia extends her hand out as far as possible.
550
Then, something touched the tip of her hand.
Confident that it was her sister’s hand, Lynfia made up her mind and plunged her upper body into the
black sphere.
The electric shock ran through her body and she couldn’t breathe.
Still, Lynfia reaches out without minding any of that.
Something important is right in front of her.
Leo said that he would follow his ideal no matter what and she decided to do the same.
To never surrender.
Full of conviction, Lynfia reaches out with her right hand.
Then, something touched her right hand again. Lynfia did not miss that, she firmly grasped it and pull
it up in one go.
What she pulled up from that black sphere was a girl with maroon color hair.
The colors of her eyes are red and blue.
“Ahh….Xinfa…..”
“Lyn-oneechan……”
The child she pulled up was certainly her little sister, Xinfa.
The sister she swore to protect. The sister she couldn’t protect.
Decided that she would never let her go again, Lynfia hugs her tight.
However, that moment doesn’t last long.
Since Xinfa, who was the heart of it, has already gone outside, the black sphere begins to crack.
Then, the black sphere emitted light and disappeared. With the sphere gone, the children inside begin
to fall.
“!?“
Lynfia jumps off and shouts at the bottom of her lungs.
“SILVERRRRRRRR!!!!”
Lynfia screams and catches as many children as she can. However, she can’t hold them all.
551
Noticing that, Lize who was underneath them started to move but it doesn’t seem like she will make it
in time. If it goes on like this, they will fall into the hole that is connected to the Demon World.
At that time, a huge silver eagle suddenly appeared in front of Lynfia and the children.
The eagle catches them on its back and powerfully flutters its wings.
“Wow….it’s a beautiful Mr.bird…….”
“This is…..”
“It’s a magically replicated eagle. I actually wanted to try summoning it though.”
Saying so, Silver appeared parallel to the silver eagle.
When Silver sees Xinfa and the fainted children in Lynfia arms, he smiles.
“You did great. Leave the rest to me.”
“Yes…..I will leave it to you.”
“Nee Nee, Does Mr.Bird have a name?”
“Name? Right. I haven’t named it yet. Why don’t you give it one.”
“Really!? Unn, what name would be good.”
After smiling at the happy looking Xinfa, Silver catches an incoming magic with his barrier.
Behind him is the angry-looking Furcas.
“Unforgivable…..how dare you hinder my plan……!”
“Unforgivable? That’s my line. Don’t think I will let you off with just dying here alright.”
“Don’t start bluffing now. I already understand the extent of your power. Your power is nothing close
to mine.”
“Is that so…..try me then.”
The moment he said that, magic power emanating from Silver is getting stronger and bigger than
before.
Seeing that, Lynfia understands something.
He was being mindful of his surroundings so he still hasn’t shown his full power yet.
From now on, Silver is getting serious
552
553
SPT Chapter 86
We finally reached the final chapter of Arc 3. So tune in tomorrow for the beginning of the next major
Arc.
On MHW note, I went in and found those Guild Palace weapons……one thing I want to to say is I HATE
ARENA QUEST!! that’s all.
Resident evil Resistance is quite fun as well btw……..when have I become Capcom’s fanboy?
-Mr.Graverobber
The Wizard of Silver Destruction
“Don’t start bluffing now. I already understand the extent of your power. Your power is nothing close
to mine.”
Furcas turns his belittling gaze at me.
Judging from our battle so far, he must have thought that there is no way for him to lose.
Certainly, I haven’t been able to do any significant damage to Furcas until now and it was clear that he
still hasn’t got serious yet either. He is probably saving up his power for an emergency in case he has
to resist an order from his summoner.
However, the one who hasn’t got serious yet is not just him.
“Is that so…..try me then.”
I released my suppressed magic power.
I kept it at bay to not scare Lynfia’s little sister but since Lynfia already rescued her, there is no need
to hold back anymore.
“How many times do I have to tell you. Your power is nothing close……to………mine….”
“What’s wrong? If you are that confident then come at me.”
It seems Furcas also released his suppressed power but at most his power now is only twice the
amount of earlier.
On the other hand, my power is ten times greater than before.
The vast amount and highly concentrated magic power can be seen with naked eyes.
554
It’s rare for me to get serious and release this amount of power. After all, it’s hard to fight like this
while avoid causing collateral damage.
“There are only a few people that I have to worry about this time………..I will get moderately serious
now alright.”
“A FEW!? THERE ARE THOUSANDS OF PEOPLE DOWN THERE RIGHT!?”
“Comparing that number to the people in the places I had to fight in recently, this is already on a fewer
side.”
Thousands is not a big number compared to the number of citizens of Kiel or Albatro.
Just in case, I also deployed a healing barrier like the one I used in Kiel here as well but since they are
all located in a small area, the one I deployed this time is on a smaller scale.
There’s no need to worry about the damage to the buildings either so this place is quite decent for a
battlefield.
Furcas grit his teeth and held up his sword.
“No matter how powerful your power is, there’s no point if you can’t use it!”
Saying so, Furcas approached me at great speed.
Magicians are vulnerable in close combat. He must have chosen that tactic because he knows that.
Certainly, I’m hopeless when it comes to weapons. My physical ability is also below average. That fact
doesn’t change even after I turned into Silver.
No matter how much I can strengthen my body, my physical sense wouldn’t improve along with it.
However, if that’s the case then all I have to do is fight in a way that I don’t have to rely on that.
“Got you!!”
Furcas comes at me from the left.
I lowered my body and instantly transferred away.
The place I transferred to is the sky above the city, away from Furcas.
Then, I extended my right hand toward him and chanted.
[[Surge, Thunder of Blood——-Bloody Lightning]]
A ginormous reddish-black thunder runs straight toward Furcas.
Furcas guarded it with his sword but he couldn’t withstand it and was blown quite a distance away.
555
“UOAAAAAA!!”
Furcas managed to escape direct hit by deflecting the blood thunder upward but his body was left
with severe burns. However, the burns that would render a normal human immobile was healed in an
instant.
Perhaps because he possessed a dead body unlike Balaam, he can exhibit more of his Demon power
than him.
“How was it? Have you understood the extent of my power yet?”
“Don’t get carried away!!!”
Furcas then created five giant swords, each with several meters in length, and sent them toward me.
Like ferocious birds, the giant swords are flying at me with high speed.
They are working in sync and homing after me.
I flew up to avoid it but another giant sword came at me from a blind spot.
Then while I was playing chase with those giant swords, Furcas was approaching me from
underneath.
“Now you can’t transfer away!!”
“Don’t look down on me.”
I stopped the movement of the giant swords with my barrier and threw out a right straight punch to
counter Furcas who was approaching me from below.
My right straight took the shape of a huge semi-transparent fist and sent Furcas, who was still a
distance away, flying back toward the ground.
“Guohh!!??”
The technique called Magic Hand is a magic that creates virtual hands and feet.
Furcas, who received a blown from my magic fist, was struck on the ground.
As he bounced greatly off the ground I performed a kicking motion. If Elna sees me she might say that
it was a poor low-kick but if I only want to just blow this guy away then this is plenty enough.
A giant leg was formed and blew Furcas away horizontally.
“Ugh! Kuh! UoaaAAA!!!!!!!”
While bouncing off the ground many times, Furcas stabbed his sword down and somehow managed to
stop the momentum.
556
However, as a result of staying still, Furcas was once again the target of an attack.
[[O King of Earth, Give death to the insolence—–Earth・Quake.]]
The land on which Furcas was standing rapidly rises up and eventually becomes a huge spear made of
earth and attacks him.
Furcas tries to escape to the sky but the spear keeps getting higher and higher, it will not stop until it
can catch Furcas.
“Tsk! One annoying magic after another!!”
Judging that it will not let him go, Furcas cloaks his sword with darkness and slashes at it with all his
power.
With that move, the earth spear was shattered and returned to normal soil.
“Haa Haa…….”
“You look tired, shall we take a break?”
“Kuh….Why? Why didn’t you fight seriously from the beginning?”
“If I get serious from the start she will get scared right. Your summoner that is.”
“That’s all…..? You were holding back just because of that!?”
Furcas opens his eyes wide as if he couldn’t believe it.
Well, that’s the normal reaction I guess.
I only move to get the best result. Some people criticize me for that. Fighting in a disadvantageous
place just to protect one village. Prolonging the battle for the sake of one person.
Many people say that someone just has to make sacrifices, that it was an inevitable sacrifice so that the
many don’t have to be sacrificed as well.
That was a sound argument.
However, I have neither duty or obligation to listen to them.
“That’s all. There are guys who say that those with power have the responsibility to do that. I do think
that idea was half-baked at best but it still has some valid points. If they are within your reach then
you should save them but as painful as it is, I am also a human. I can’t save anyone outside my reach.
That’s why I decided to save those within mine with all my power. Even if it’s illogical, even if people
call me foolish, that is still my belief as an adventurer.”
“I can’t understand that……The Strongs are right! That’s the rule of Demon World!”
557
“That might be true in the Demon World. However, this is the surface world. This world has its own
rules.”
“Aren’t those rules also decided by the strong!!??”
“Yeah, that’s right. And the strongest one here is me. In other words—–Here, I am the rule.”
“DON’T FUCK WITH ME!!!!!!!”
Furcas was furious at my words and started wrapping his sword in darkness again.
He then swings them toward me.
As a Demon, it seems that he can’t bear being looked down by me. His pride as a Demon couldn’t
endure being humiliated by the likes of humans.
However, that was simply a pure fact.
The darkness slash that Furcas brandished at me was stopped by the barrier I deployed. It was a
barrier that absorbs my opponent’s attack.
“You should have started moving the moment you were summoned. It was your arrogance that gave
you the idea to create your base here and summon other Demons.”
“THE MOST ARROGANT ONE HERE IS YOU!!!!!”
“I won’t deny that.”
Furcas puts more effort to break my barrier by increasing the power of his slashes but this barrier can
not be broken using normal means.
He should have given up breaking through from the front once I finished my preparation.
Furcas glares at me but I ignore him.
The one who is looking at me is not just Furcas. Right now, many people are looking at me.
At this SS rank adventurer Silver.
“An SS rank adventurer is different from other adventurers. Everyone is thinking [If it’s Silver then he
can do it]. So, I have to become an existence that inspires people to think like that. And today I have
told the future emperor that I would let him witness my power. He said that he will selfishly follow his
own ideal and still, asked me to lend him my power. That’s why in reply to his determination, I have to
show my power to him.”
Saying so, I converted the absorbed power from Furcas’s attacks into magic power and started
preparing a great magic.
Realizing that, Furcas tried to stop me but he was bound by the chains that came out of nowhere.
558
“This is……!!??”
“Just stay still and watch. This magic takes time to prepare.”
I wonder when was the last time I used this magic.
Since the succession war began I was occupied with thoughts of how to assist Leo from the shadow.
The things I have to protect also increased and there were a lot of things I have to do so I can’t focus
myself only on fighting like before.
It used to be so easy.
To fight alone and win against a strong opponent, that was all I wanted. It was simple and clear.
Fighting as Silver was so easy.
Despite that, I threw it all away and decided to help Leo.
Today he already proved to me that it wasn’t a wrong choice. He has grown and is getting closer to the
figure of the ideal emperor I once saw. Someday Leo can become the emperor who will be praised by
all. He showed me that possibility today.
In that case, I can’t laze around doing nothing either.
In this place, I have to remind them once and for all.
Of the awe-inspiring existence known as Silver.
[[I am one who know the principle of silver・I am one who has been chosen as the true silver]]
‘He’s Silver because he is wearing a silver mask.’
I didn’t call myself that because of such a simple reason.
[[Silver star of the star ocean・Illuminate the earth and frighten the heaven]].
There are several schools among ancient magic.
Among them, there was one magic that is more powerful than others.
And that magic was from the school I most specialized in.
The name of that school was Silver Magic of Destruction.
It was the magic I once used to subjugate an Ancient Dragon, and the first magic I ever used as an
adventurer. The symbol of Silver.
[[The brilliance of silver is the truth of god・That silver brilliance is the divine protection of heaven]].
559
When I decided to become an adventurer, the first thing I did was defeating an Ancient Dragon that
had entered its active period near the Empire and dropped it off at the Adventurer Guild
Headquarters as a souvenir.
I was not registered as an adventurer back then but the adventurers that were dispatched as the
subjugation team reported what I did to the guild and I was appointed as an SS rank adventurer
through an exception.
[[The silent flash of silver・Silver’s brilliance is eternal]].
The name Silver was given to me at that time. In a certain sense, it was something close to my second
name.
It means that the name Silver is not just for show.
[[O silver light, dwell in my hand・And destroy the arrogant——]]
Between my hands appeared a silver ball that is letting out a strong brilliance.
Feeling immense power emanates from it, Furcas squeezes all his power out and breaks free of the
power-draining cursed chains and prepares his defense.
He’s quite a guy. Being able to escape from those chains meant that he is definitely stronger than the
vampire duo that was treated as S-class monsters. Still, it was already too late.
The silver light is already in my hands.
[[Silvery・Ray]].
Crushing the silver ball, a huge ball of light appears behind me.
It aimed at Furcas and fired a silver light.
“UOAAAAAA!!!!”
Trying to offset the approaching silver light, Furcas brandished the strongest attack he could.
After a long period of stalemate, Furcas managed to offset it.
“See! Your greatest magic is……..”
Furcas’s triumph was cut short.
Behind me are seven balls of light, each firing that same silver light at the monsters below me. That
image must have looked like God’s punishment.
Silvery Ray was a super wide range destruction spell. It’s magic that creates balls of light that shoot
out silver beams of light at anyone I designated as an enemy.
560
Unfortunately for him, Furcas was only able to offset one of them.
“Ridiculous…….”
(TLN: For the cultured, Baka na.)
All of the monsters below me were wiped out.
The only one remaining is Furcas.
I use the cursed chain to bind Furcas again and bring him to the top of the hole at the center of the city.
At the same time, all seven balls of lights aimed at Furcas.
“You bastard…..what are you…….?”
“SS rank adventurer Silver. If you manage to survive and return to Demon World make sure to spread
that name. Tell them that there is a dangerous guy here on the surface world.”
“DAMN YOUUU…….!”
“This is a gift from me. You guys came all this way together after all. It would be pitiful for them if they
couldn’t see the light right?”
Saying so I raise up my right arm.
If I swing it down, all seven balls of light will shoot the silver light at Furcas all at once.
Realizing that, he raises his voice to stop me.
“Wa, WAIT!?”
“No.”
Saying so, I swing my arm down.
The balls of light emitted an intense glow and released a focused ray of silver light at Furcas.
Like the light of the stars, it was shining dazzlingly.
In an instant, the silver light swallows Furcas and annihilates the monsters and Demons who tried to
enter the hole and headed toward this world.
As the hole gradually shrinks, the silver lights become thinner and thinner.
when the hole was completely closed, I slowly grasped my hand into a fist and stopped the silver light
All the monsters were wiped out by Silvery Ray.
The Demons also disappeared.
561
The children trapped in the black sphere were rescued.
I also assisted the knights and adventurers in their battle as much as I could.
I can say that this is quite a good battle result.
So I declared it to all the adventurers.
“THE SUBJUGATION OF THE TARGETED MONSTER HAS BEEN CONFIRMED! THIS MARKS THE END
OF THE SOUTHERN INCIDENT! THEREFORE! I HEREBY DECLARE THE END OF THE RAID QUEST
[BLUE SEAGULL’S RESCUE]! ! IT’S OUR VICTORY!!”
As if the adventurers were waiting for that moment, they all cheer.
Seeing that, the knights also raise their swords high and shout the cry of victory.
The Southern Incident that almost shaken the Empire has been put to an end.
There is still much more to do. Cleaning all this up will probably take time.
Still, let us rejoice in this victory.
Even so, there was something more valuable than this victory.
What we gained is big.
Leo is now a hero, and since he originally came to the South as the Emperor’s inspector,
“It may be time to fight back huh.”
While muttering so, I started creating a transfer gate to send the adventurer back to the imperial
capital.
TLN: There might be a delay for next week release cuz I will be working on Dahlia release for a few
days……..this all depend on my laziness meter…….
562
SPT Chapter 87
It’s the start of the new Arc!! well, the first part of this arc is like the after story of last Arc though.
So, I played Unlock! with friends yesterday…..it was quite fun but there’s no replayability……Back to
RE Resistance I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
Return
The Southern Incident was resolved.
Since the situation escalated too much than first anticipated, Leo was called back to the imperial
capital.
To ask them about the situation in detail, Aneue and Jurgen were also called back to the imperial
capital to be given their reward for their quick response as a pretext.
The group of people that were called also included me but……….
“Ah, this is bad……”
In front of my eyes is a group of people crowding at the gate of the imperial capital.
Leo and the imperial knights along with the knights from the southern local Lords who fought
alongside them are marching into the capital. Leo was leading them into the capital gate but a fervent
welcome was waiting for them so they can’t proceed normally.
“Prince Leonard——!!!!”
“It’s the triumph of the Hero Prince!!”
“Leonard-samaaaaaaa!!!”
“Please look at me!!!!”
Everyone knows that the purple signal fire has risen from the south.
The last time it was lit, the news of the Crown Prince’s death was delivered to them.
Everybody was prepared for the same thing this time but what was delivered was some mildly bad
news about the damage done to the city of Bassau and that the scale of the incident was small for a
national level incident.
563
Then comes the good news that their Prince had led knights and adventurers to fight and won against
a large number of monsters and powerful Demons.
The people’s joy was just as much as the amount of sadness they were prepared to face.
Cheers were raised from the crowd to Leo and the others as if they were celebrating in a festival.
“It’s Lizelotte-sama!”
“Marshal-sama!!”
“Long live the Princess General!!”
When Leo and his group passed by, this time it was Aneue and her soldiers from her cavalry regiment.
She gave up the leading position to Leo since he was the main protagonist of this incident but she still
received the same cheers as Leo.
She is a beautiful princess who defends their border and has the greatest military achievements
among all the members of the imperial family. After they were able to witness her appearance after a
long time, the people seem to be getting excited.
After her, it was mine and Jurgen’s turn.
The first person that the people started cheering for was Jurgen.
“That’s Duke Reinfeld!”
“It seemed he paved the way for Lizelotte-sama you know!”
“I heard that it was because of the Duke’s effort that Lizelotte-sama was able to arrive in the South in
time!”
“Duke-sama!!”
There are quite a lot of people cheering for him.
Somehow, the people here seem to have quite a fast information network.
“There he is, it’s the Dull Prince.”
“I heard that he tried to go to help his younger brother at first but he got tired halfway there so he just
left.”
“Even if he went there he would just be pulling their legs anyway.”
“That prince is really useless. I can’t believe that he and Prince Leonard are twins.”
“Why is he marching together with them? He should be a little ashamed.”
564
“That’s right That’s right! You damn Leech!”
“He is such a disgrace to the imperial family!”
Mocking voices and slanders were raised sporadically among the crowd.
There’s no end to such to it.
They are all mocking me with the same mouth they used to cheer for Leo.
I understand that is just how people are. So I push up my chest and take it. If I avert my eyes, the
mockery will just start getting louder. After all, no one would want to recognize a pathetic royalty.
In fact, the one who will be in trouble if they can’t control their feelings is them.
They are plenty disrespectful enough but I am the only one in the imperial family that has a different
outlook on such disrespects. They probably won’t get caught unless they throw something at me.
However, if they start doing that then the city guards from the capital garrison who are taking care of
the security will move.
It would be pitiful for them to get caught just because they throw something at me.
The satisfaction they are having is natural after all.
“Your Highness……if you wish, I can silent them for you.”
Jurgen concerningly offered.
If I wish for it huh, that does sound like what he would say.
I gently shake my head.
Seeing that, Jurgen smiles and looks forward.
Then,
“Please rest assured. Your kindness and strength, My knights and I, Jurgen von Reinfeld know about it
well. Please hold yourself up with pride. Your Highness deserves it.”
“You think too highly of me.”
“In this world, the easiest thing to do is to do nothing. You certainly weren’t able to go to His Highness
Leonard’s side. However, you have chosen to stop. I think the choice you made requires courage. At
the very least, I and my knights have been saved by you. Even if it’s His Majesty himself, I will not
allow anyone to deny that fact.”
“Stopping requires courage huh……..you really are strange, Duke.”
“Is that right? It sounds like a normal thing to say for me though.”
565
While having such a conversation, I can no longer hear the voices of the people.
Feeling thankful for his consideration, I headed to the castle with Jurgen.
“Welcome back! My children! My subjects! I am glad that everyone made it back safely!”
We were welcomed by Father in the throne room.
Everyone kneels down and lowers their heads to Father who is sitting on the throne.
“The adventurers who returned told us all about your fight. Solving such a big incident like this, you all
can consider yourselves a hero! I have prepared a small feast tonight. I want every one of you to heal
your fatigue there to your heart’s content.”
After saying that, Father clears his throat and looks at Franz, the prime minister.
Knowing what he wanted to say, Franz nodded and started talking.
“On this occasion, everyone who participated in the resolution of the Southern incident will receive a
reward. Among you, those who have performed exceptional deeds will be bestowed a special reward
directly from His Majesty here. Please step in front when your name is called.”
Saying so, the maids holding the rewards come standby near Father.
Upon confirming them, Franz started announcing the name of the receivers with a loud voice.
“First reward! The Eighth Prince, His Imperial Highness Leonard Lakes Adler, step forward!”
“Yes!”
After he replied, Leonard stepped in front and kneels before Father.
Seeing that, Father receives a sword from one of the maids.
It was a long sword with a golden falcon symbol engraved on its sheath.
It was the ceremonial sword used in appointing important positions for military officers.
“Eighth Prince Leonard had made the wise decision of raising the signal fire and leading many knights
to prevent the situation from worsening during the Southern Incident. After that, to tackle the root of
the problem, he led the charge at the forefront and defeated a Demon. For his meritorious deed, he is
now hereby appointed the vacant position of the Honorary General of the Imperial Capital Garrison
along with the right to attend the Privy Council.”
“I thankfully accepted.”
Leonard reverently accepted the sword.
566
Hearing that, there was an uproar among the ceremony attendees.
“Not just the Honorary General but the right to attend the Privy Council……!?”
“Isn’t that a bit too much…….?”
“So his achievement was that great huh……”
“This will make things unpredictable again you know……”
Even an Honorary General is still a General. This means that he just acquired the position equivalent
to Gordon’s who is also an emperor candidate. Moreover, he now has an influence over the Imperial
Capital Garrison. An Honorary General is an honorary position but due to the influence of his
predecessor, the late General Dominique, Leo can move a considerable amount of force in the Imperial
Capital if he needs to.
In addition, he was allowed to attend the Privy Council which Eric was originally the only one who
was allowed to among the candidates. With this, he is now able to convey his opinion directly to
Father without going through the ministers. And with Earl Baelz who had become the Minister of
Industry, we now have two votes in the council.
In other words, this means that he has gained a solid voice and influence over national politics.
With this, the power structure of the succession war has changed.
Thanks to this incident, Leo is no longer just a newly emerging fourth candidate but one of the leading
candidates who can even threaten Eric.
“Next, the second reward! Marshal Lizelotte Lakes Adler. Step forward!”
“Yes!”
This time, Lize-aneue stepped forward.
To such Lize-aneue, Father handed her a cane.
“Marshal Lizelotte had swiftly responded to Leonard’s signal fire and swiftly moved to action, leading
the elite soldiers of the Eastern Border Army to the scene. Later, together with Leonard, she had paved
the way to the city. For that meritorious deed, the Eastern Border Army will receive additional troops
and expansion of its budget.”
“I thankfully accepted.”
As expected of Father.
He understands well that Aneue doesn’t need something like a medal.
Aneue who received the cane looked quite happy herself.
567
“Last, the third reward! Jurgen von Reinfeld. Step forward!”
“Yes!”
The last person called was Jurgen.
Father has prepared a large gem for Jurgen.
“Duke Jurgen, along with his knights, defeated the monsters and paved the way for Lizelotte to
advance together with his foresight in creating an efficient route in case of an emergency, he is hereby
bestowed treasures and an expansion of his territory.”
“I thankfully accepted.”
Jurgen who received the box filled with gems back down.
Now the special awarding ceremony is over.
After that, Father finishes the formal greeting and steps down.
Now, the rest is just the party tonight.
While thinking about such a thing, I heard the conversation of the participating ministers and
influential nobles.
“It might be better to start approaching Prince Leonard huh…..”
“But it is already this late in the game……..”
“Attitudes are important you know, attitudes. You better present yourself to the emperor candidates
too you know. It has become unpredictable who will become the next emperor after all……”
“But no matter how much bigger Prince Leonard is going to grow, Prince Eric’s faction still has the
advantage of manpower. At least, Prince Leonard even has to use that Dull Prince. Their difference in
personnel is obvious you know…..?”
“Certainly, that Prince has always causing problems…..it seems he didn’t even play an active role this
time as well. Someday, he might just drag Prince Leonard down with him……..”
“But it makes you think right? If he even has to use that Dull Prince then right now he is obviously
looking for more capable human resources. I think that now is our opportunity you know…….”
It seems they started to come up with various theories.
Playing an incompetent has its worth.
If Leo has to use even an incompetent like me, it means that he is having a manpower problem. With
that line of thinking, I thought that people might decide to become Leo’s ally.
568
Even if we are siblings, he still utilized an incompetent like me. Those who don’t have much
confidence in themselves and those who felt dissatisfied with their current position should decide to
gather under Leo because of that.
That’s why I still have to remain incompetent.
Affirming my belief again, I left the place.
569
SPT Chapter 88
Edit* I stared at the screen too much today I practically turned blind. let’s list the things I forgot to add
so far.
1.Forgot to add Chapter’s name
2.Forgot foreword.
3.left behind a pair of unnecessary quotation…..
let’s see what else will come up……..
-Mr.Graverobber
A Miserable Day
“Al-niisama!”
At the castle party venue
I was standing there waiting at its entrance.
There, Christa came toward me with small steps.
“Christa.”
I let Christa hug me for a while.
She must have been quite anxious while I was away.
When I stroke her head, Christa hugged me even tighter.
“Were you scared?”
“Un…..but…..Elna protected me…..”
“I see…..”
“Nee, Al-niisama…….Elna was……..”
“It’s okay, I heard about it. Don’t worry, I will do something about it. You don’t have to worry about
her. Just enjoy the party tonight alright.”
Hearing so, Christa’s expression got a little brighter.
Seeing that, I started talking to Christa about something else.
570
“Have you met Leo and Lize-aneue yet?”
“Un! Lize-neesama chose this dress for me!”
Christa spins around to show off her new purple dress.
It seems she is very happy that Lize-aneue chose it for her.
Even though we are of the same imperial family, the stars of today’s party are Leo and Lize-aneue so I
will be heading to the party venue together with Christa first.
“I see. Then you should show it off to everyone. Rita should already be inside as well.”
“Un!”
Saying so, I walked into the party venue with Christa.
When the knight at the gate announced mine and Christa’s arrival, applause and gazes were directed
toward us. However, it was Christa who was the center of their attention.
The kidnapped princess, and the younger sister of Lize-aneue.
Unlike the other princesses who have various problems attached to them, there are many nobles who
want to marry their son to Christa in the future.
While keeping those nobles at bay, I head over to Rita with Christa.
“Ah, Al-nii! Kuu-chan!”
Rita waving her hand cheerfully at us but it seems that she hasn’t noticed that her instructor was
tiredly staring at her.
That’s so like Rita.
“Rita…..those clothes look good on you.”
Rita was wearing ceremonial clothes for a knight apprentice with a sword hanging at her waist.
Her clothes are so neat that it doesn’t seem like it was Rita at first but it seems that she likes it very
much.
“It does!? Really!?”
“Un.”
“Thank you! Kuu-chan! Kuu-chan’s dress is nice as well!”
“Lize-neesama chose it for me.”
“That Princess General!? Will I be able to meet her!?”
571
“Un, you will.”
“YEAHH!”
While watching the two happily chatting, the crowd was making noise at the entrance of the venue.
At that time, the names of Leo and Lize-aneue were announced.
The venue was filled with applause that was incomparable to mine and Christa.
“Prince Leonard! Congratulations on your big success!”
“Marshal Lizelotte! Your battle was astounding as always! It seems that you never lose your touch!”
The two were immediately surrounded.
There might have been those that were told by their parents that now is a good time to approach them
too.
There are children around the same age as Christa around her as well but with Rita here, they can’t
recklessly approach her.
It’s a good relationship they have between them.
While thinking about that, I silently left the place and leaned back against the wall.
In the opposite direction, Leo, Lize-aniue, and Finne are once again surrounded by nobles.
It might have something to do with the blue seagull ornament but she does look very good in her blue
dress today, it seems I won’t be able to call her out for now.
I could see Jurgen from here as well but due to his social connection, he is being surrounded by his
acquaintances in the imperial capital.
If I go to him now, the people around him will surely disperse.
“This is really a problem……”
A party with no one to talk to is so boring.
Of course, I can enjoy just watching people like this too.
After a while, my father arrived and the party finally started in earnest.
Many people start dancing to the music with happy laughter echoing the whole venue.
Every time someone tried to invite Lize-aneue for a dance she would sway the sword hanging at the
waist of her military uniform. If someone actually invited her she would probably say [If you want to
dance with me then win against me in a duel first].
572
On the other hand, Finne and Leo are smiling while dealing with many nobles. It’s their job after all.
Right now is a good time for us to increase our allies.
Surprisingly, Jurgen politely declined all the invitation from the ladies as well. As always, he is such a
polite person.
Christa and Rita are still surrounded by the children.
There is no place for me here.
With such feelings, I make fun of myself.
The one who wished for this kind of position was none other than me. Still, I want to have fun
spending time with someone too. However, envying them for that would be too much of a luxury.
There was also a way that I can walk the same path as Leo but I didn’t choose it.
If Leo’s was a path filled with light then mine was one in the shadow.
There’s no need for me to be praised by anyone. There’s no need for anyone to notice me.
I chose my path with that kind of feeling that.
I thought that it was for the best.
“Yo, Arnold.”
A noisy guy appeared disrupting my thought process.
It’s none other than Gied and his entourages.
Even though he is wearing a tailcoat, it doesn’t look like formal attire because he seems to arrange it
according to his own fashion sense.
He sure likes wearing something like this huh. As I thought, this guy’s sense is really off.
“Gied huh.”
“Hmmn? What? I went out of my way to talk to a Dull Prince like you and that’s what you say to me?
Shouldn’t you be crying tear of joy right now?”
“Haa…..yeah, yeah, thank you very much.”
“I don’t like your tone. You, have you been getting cocky lately? Leonard’s achievement is not even
yours alright. The more Leonard is growing, the more incompetent you will look. There’s even a
rumor going around that someday you will be the downfall of Leonard’s faction too you know?”
“Right…..”
573
I don’t need a guy like him who can only think that far.
I want someone who feels like he or she can make a difference to join the faction.
Leo needs allies like that.
The succession war isn’t just a fight between the candidates but also their factions. No matter how
much Leo can compete with the other three, if his faction is inferior he will never be able to become
the emperor.
“What? Getting depressed now? Right. Even you would want to be in the limelight too right? But you
see, it’s impossible for an incompetent like you!”
Saying so, Gied and his entourages laughed.
Seriously, these guys sure are free. I wonder if Father will get back to his quarter soon. I can’t leave
this place before him after all. I have somewhere else to go after this too.
As my expression is getting tired, Gied grins.
“I have good news for you Arnold. Get me into Leonard’s faction. I will personally join your side.”
“…….What?”
“Didn’t you hear me? Well, that’s understandable. I am the eldest son of the prestigious Duke Horsvath
after all. There would be no one else you would want to have as your ally right.”
Gied playfully brushes his bangs.
But I don’t care about that.
A guy like Gied running headfirst into a power struggle? This is undoubtedly the order of his father,
Duke Horsvath.
Certainly, Duke Horsvath himself is approaching Gordon while his second son was sent to Eric’s side.
And if Gied can get closer to Leonard here then he will be able to sell his favor no matter who wins in
the end.
The reason Duke Horsvath didn’t approach Zandra was that he has been on bad terms with the
Southern nobles for a long time.
Judging from this, it seems that the Duke has already recognized Leo.
It will be painful to miss this opportunity but ……honestly, I don’t need Gied. Gied is certainly the
eldest son of Duke Horsvath but his second son is actually the one who is well-respected and excellent.
A good evidence of that would be the fact that the Duke had sent him to join Eric, the candidate with
the best chance to win.
If we pull Gied in as our ally now, our faction might collapse.
574
“Oh, you can give yourself credit for recruiting me too, you know. How about it? Arnold.”
“Sorry, but I will be refraining myself. If you want to join him then go ask Leo himself.”
“wHaT?”
I guess he never thought that I would refuse. His cheeks are cramping up.
Gied can’t ask Leo himself. Up until now, Gied had been acting good in front of Leo on the surface but
when Finne and I went out together, Gied beat me up and I pretended to be Leo back then.
In other words, from Gied’s point of view, he thinks that Leo is already aware of his wrongdoing. Well,
something like this, Leo should already have noticed long ago.
That must be why he chose to approach me.
What an idiot.
“Don’t get cocky with me now. This is not a request, you know that right.”
“No matter what you say, I will not introduce you to Leo’s faction.”
“You shit! What are you getting conceited about! Since she was already under house arrest a failure
like Elna won’t be able to protect you anymore alright! No one is going to help you, you know!”
He just said something he shouldn’t have.
I know that I should just let it slide. There was another me who kept telling me to calm down.
However, I shook off that self-control.
“Just now…..what did you say?”
“What? No one is going to help you.”
“Before that…….did you said a failure?”
“Hm? Yeah, I said it! Elna was such a fai—–!!!????”
I glared at Gied.
I wanted to blast him away with Silvery Ray right this moment. How refreshing it would be if I can
remove a guy like him from this world.
Being glared at with such intent, Gied was overcome with fear and unable to breathe. He took a few
steps and fell on his butt.
“A, ah……….”
“Take it back……Gied.”
575
With only a quiet voice I convey my feelings.
However, Gied doesn’t show any sign that he would answer that at all.
His entourages also solidified and no one tried to step between Gied and me. What a cheap bond they
have.
“Elna saved Christa’s life. That’s a fact that no one can change. Insulting Elna in front of me while
knowing full well of that, Gied von Horsvath, do you want to die?”
“A, it, it’s, I’m not……”
“Just say it.”
“I, I, I take it back……”
“Anything else?”
“So, Sorr……”
“Sorry?”
“I, I’m, I’M SORRY…….!”
After I got Gied to take his insult back and apologize, I immediately left the venue.
Father still hasn’t left the venue yet but I feel nauseous just by breathing the same air as Gied and
since we had already gathered a few attention to us, I decided to leave the place.
It will be troublesome to get involved in trouble now.
Right now I am far from composed.
While thinking so, I grabbed a bottle of alcohol on the table and left the venue.
“……Haa.”
“If it was enough for you to sigh about, isn’t it better for you to just endure it?”
Thinking about my own stupidity, I sighed once I left the venue. Even though I just decided to remain
an incompetent, I ended up doing something that betrayed all that right afterward. There’s nothing
more pathetic than this.
While I was drowning in all that, Sebas called out to me from behind as if to pick a fight with me.
Argghhh. I don’t want to get preached on right now.
The one who understands best that what I did was stupid is me after all.
576
“I did it because I couldn’t alright. I am calm right now so I do think that what I did was stupid okay. I
just revealed my hand even though I have nothing to gain at all.”
“Silencing him with only your glare, that was quite a thing you did there. From the point of view of the
people around you, they must have thought that he stepped on quite a landmine you know.”
“Yeah, yeah. I said I already understand right?”
“Then that’s fine. Elna-sama is someone special to Arnold-sama after all, it couldn’t be helped.
Considering what happened, it could be said that he was just surprised because you who normally
wouldn’t get angry was glaring at him so they probably wouldn’t think too much about it.”
Saying so, Sebas followed after me.
I got angry because she is someone special. Because of that, it’s easy to say that it couldn’t be helped
but if I got angry because of that, do I have to get angry more often from now on?
“Today I felt the most miserable than I ever felt…….”
“Days like this do come by. Nobody is perfect after all. There is no one who can always push down
their emotions. Ah, leaving that aside, I have already prepared a carriage for you.”
“…..you really are always perfect. I didn’t even say anything yet though?”
“I am a butler after all.”
“Is that so…..shall we go then.”
Saying so, I climbed into the carriage.
TLN: So yeah, I made it. praise me!!
577
SPT Chapter 89
So, one more thing to confess……….I put the wrong chapter name in yesterday………….
the chapter yesterday was supposed to be [A Miserable Day] and today is [A Modest Party]………
Releasing 5 chapters in one day really messed up my head huh
-Mr.Graverobber.
A Modest Party
“Welcome back. Arnold-sama.”
“Yeah, yeah, I’m home.”
With such an exchange with the knight on guarding duty, I entered the Amsberg mansion.
Entering inside, the familiar butler was there to greet me. He told me that Elna and Anna-san are
having dinner and started guiding me to them without confirming with the two first.
This is usually the case when I visit them.
Are they just that open?
While having that thought, I arrived in front of the two of them.
“Ara? If it isn’t Al. welcome.”
“Sorry for intruding. Anna-san.”
Anna-san wasn’t surprised and normally welcomed me with a smile.
She then stands up and takes Sebas off somewhere. She probably went off to prepare some food for
me.
I accept her hospitality and sit down opposite of Elna.
“Al? What’s wrong? I heard that you are supposed to be at the party today though?”
“It was boring so I left.”
I said so and put the alcohol I brought on the table.
The wine from the castle is quite good. Its taste is perfect.
“It’s still too early…….did you leave before His Majesty?”
578
“It’s okay. Nobody cares about me anyway. The stars tonight are Leo and Lize-aneue after all.”
“You are saying something like that again…….”
Elna said with a fed-up expression.
Elna is the same as usual. She doesn’t seem depressed at all.
Still, the one that was different from usual here is probably me.
When I picked up two glasses from the table, Elna stopped me.
“You know that I don’t drink right?”
“Even when hanging out with a friend?”
“Haa……just a little okay?”
As I got Elna to compromise, I pour a little wine in one glass and pour another one to the brim.
Then, I handed the one with less wine to Elna.
A short moment of silence took over us.
Elna says nothing. Perhaps she already knew what I wanted to say but she doesn’t want to rush me.
While feeling thankful to her, I lower my head.
“Sorry…….”
“What are you apologizing for.”
“…….The scene from Christa’s future vision can never be changed. No matter how you move, the future
was already decided that Christa will be kidnapped. Still, I asked you to be her escort…….”
“Is that so? I managed to save Rita in the end though?”
“I thought that you could do something about it with your power. but…….I didn’t tell you that the
future can’t be changed because I don’t want you to doubt yourself. That’s why I kept it a secret from
you. I…….tricked you into it……..”
“….that’s insulting.”
Elna murmured.
However, her tone wasn’t angry.
When I raised my face, Elna was staring straight at me.
“Your apology is an insult to me, Al.”
579
“…..but…….the Order was your…….”
“Yes, it was my dream. I tried hard to get in it. I was raised while being told that joining the Imperial
Knight Order and protecting the Imperial family is the Amsbergs’ duty and responsibility after all.
That’s why I was really happy when I managed to join the Order. I even aimed for the position of the
Captain Commander. Still, I took it all for granted. It seems because of this incident, that dream might
be getting far away from me now but it’s all right.”
Saying so, Elna smiles.
Her smile was one that shows that she truly doesn’t mind about it.
But I know. I know how much effort she put in to become an imperial knight without relying on the
name of the Amsbergs.
Even though I just rendered all her effort meaningless, Elna still didn’t get angry and just smiled at me.
It was painful.
It would be much better if she got angry at me.
“………”
“That look again. I told you already right. My oath is much more important than my honor. So don’t
worry about it. I will never forsake you, Al. I simply acted according to my oath. It wasn’t your fault. I
am aware of what could happen and took those risks by myself. So don’t just take it all as your
responsibility. Moreover, I was helpful right?”
“…….yeah, of course, you are.”
“I’m glad. If that’s the case then it’s all good. Christa and Rita were safe and I was able to be helpful to
you. I think that’s already my victory. Honestly, it would be better if I can help you more though.”
Elna says so while playfully smiling at the wine glass she is holding.
Then.
“If you already understand then stop looking so depressed. What did you come here for? If it’s just
apologizing then you are already done, right? So, let’s celebrate. To this modest victory of mine.”
Elna holds up the glass while bearing a proud smile.
Seeing her like that, I can’t just keep brooding over what happened.
Shaking off my hesitation and regret, I hold up my glass. Elna called the chain of events so far her
victory. Most people will say that it was her loss, I know for sure that this is her victory.
I have to celebrate with her.
580
After all, it was the victory of my sword.
“To your humble victory.”
“Yeah, to my humble victory.”
Saying so we clink our glasses and make a toast.
Elna gently tilts her glass but I drink its content all at once and pour another.
“You will regret it later if you keep drinking it like that you know?”
“It’s alright. If we are having a toast then it’s better to drink like this.”
“You said it like you are an adventurer. Well, I don’t hate it though.”
The moment Elna said that I stopped my hand.
The guilt I felt wanted me to confess everything to her.
However, I stopped myself before I could do that and swallowed it all down with the wine.
Right now, there is no benefit in revealing this secret to her. If I do it now, I will just be putting some
unnecessary secrets for her to carry.
I will have to tell her someday but today is not that day.
It will only trouble her. It’s easy to let her spoil me but I can’t let myself get spoiled by her any more
than this.
Even I have a backbone after all.
“Elna…….I will definitely make Leo the emperor.”
“What’s wrong all of a sudden?”
“I might be a little drunk I guess……”
“Fufu, you are not such a lightweight right?”
“I get like this once in a while……if Leo becomes the emperor, he will surely abolish this ridiculous
custom. The succession war certainly was effective in raising competent emperors. Compared to other
countries, our empire has considerably less foolish leaders. but to spill so much blood just for that is
too ridiculous……if it’s him, he will definitely be able to find another way, that’s what I think.”
I have no intention to die.
I want to live on my own terms, be an adventurer on my own terms, and die on my own terms. That is
my life plan.
581
That’s why the best way for that to happen is for Leo to become the emperor. It was one of the reasons
I pushed for Leo to become the emperor.
However, as long as this ridiculous custom continues, I will never be able to achieve that.
Even if we survive, our children will be involved in the next generation’s succession war.
When I got involved in the succession war, I was reluctant but I still have the power to participate in it.
But that was not the case for Christa. It might not be the case for most of the imperial family who will
be born in the future as well.
It is just too unreasonable to get caught up and push around even though they don’t have any wish for
the throne.
“I wonder about that. It has continued for so long you know? It is the duty of the imperial family to
produce a good leader. If there is a stupid emperor who can’t control this vast empire then blood will
flow even more than in this succession war. And that will be the blood of the citizens you know.”
“I know. I do think that what I wish for is selfish. As long as you are born in the imperial family, you
can’t escape its duty. I know that it was our price to pay………but if I was satisfied with that, nothing
would change. There should have been others in my family who thought like me. Still, no one did
anything. Nothing will change if we just leave it up to the future.”
“Then why don’t you just become the emperor yourself?”
“Don’t be stupid…..even if I think that it is an unreasonable custom, it still has its own merit. If I have
to make a realistic judgment call then I’m sure that I wouldn’t choose to abolish it. That’s why I chose
to support Leo to become the emperor.”
“And what if Leo arrives at the same conclusion as you?”
“He won’t. He’s not like me. Rather than a realistic and effective method, he would find another way
that suits his ideal.”
Hearing my words, Elna smiles.
She then holds up her glass toward me.
“That’s right. I think so too. Leo has something that makes people want to place their hopes on him.
That’s why people are supporting him right”
“So you get it?”
“You are happy now because I just praised your brother?”
“Well, yeah.”
While having such a conversation, I and Elna emptied the bottle.
582
While thinking about opening a new one, Anna-san and Sebas returned.
Bringing along a large number of guests.
“Elna…….!”
“El-nee!”
Christa and Rita who were guided here by Anna-san rushed to hug Elna.
“Your Highness Christa, Rita too…..why are you here?”
“I brought her.”
Saying so, Lize-aneue head over to Elna’s side.
Elna who was surprised by the appearance of Aneue stands up in haste.
“Your Highness Lizelotte!? It’s, it’s been a long time!”
“Yeah, long time no see. You don’t have to be so stiff. I came to thank you today. You have my gratitude
for protecting Christa and her friend.”
“No, your words are wasted on me…..”
“Don’t be so modest. It seems you have been taking good care of Al and Leo right. I can’t thank you
enough for that.”
“Aneue, I don’t bother Elna that much you know.”
While I was saying that, Leo showed up holding a lot of wines and snacks in both hands.
Did you really have to carry all that on your own? Isn’t he kinda pitiful even though he is supposed to
be the star tonight?
“Alright…..will this be enough I wonder?”
“Both of you have the leading roles tonight right?…..you will get scolded by Father later you know?”
“Father already headed back and the one who wanted to do this was Aneue you know. I can’t go
against her, right.”
“Aneue was…….”
“I noticed that you were gone. A celebration should be held with the people who did something to
deserve it, don’t you think so?”
“For such a reason?……..but you did well knowing that I am here?”
I asked Leo since I thought that Leo was naturally the one who would know but he shakes his head.
583
Leo turns his sight to the back.
Finne is standing there in her blue dress.
“Finne-san said that she was sure that you would be at Elna’s place so we decided to come here. Aneue
said that she wanted to thank Elna too so I think that it’s a good opportunity.”
“Finne did?”
“Yes, I thought for sure that Al-sama would go to Elna-sama’s place.”
To think that there would be someone else who could read me other than Sebas.
Even Leo didn’t know where I went. As expected of Finne huh. Or perhaps, the me today is that easy to
read?
While I was thinking about that, everyone sits down.
Finne is sitting next to me while Leo is sitting next to Christa and Rita.
Perhaps he wanted to take care of them.
Lize-aneue sits beside Elna and starts having a heated talk about sword techniques.
“Pleased to meet you, Madam Amsberg. I am called Jurgen von Reinfeld.”
“Ara, nice to meet you. I’ve heard rumors about you, Duke Reinfeld. You were moving around quite a
lot weren’t you?”
“That’s embarrassing of me. Actually, a good mineral was recently mined in my territory and it was a
perfect mineral for making armor you see.”
“Ara, isn’t that interesting. My husband is currently away right now so can I speak to you about it in
his stead?”
“Of course.”
Jurgen who also came over is now having a business talk with Anna-san.
This person is suitable to be a merchant. His habit of never abandoning an opportunity will really be a
waste if he chooses to be a warrior after all.
“Um, Al-sama…..were we perhaps interrupted something?”
“…..no, I’m glad you came.”
“Is that so! Then I’m glad!”
Saying so, Finne makes a wide smile.
584
I don’t know if it was because of the alcohol or the loneliness somewhere in my heart but.
She looked really attractive to me right now.
That’s why I decided to honestly tell her the words that came up in my mind.
“I couldn’t say this at the party but……that dress looks great on you. It’s beautiful.”
“R, Really!? Thank you very much!”
Saying so, Finne happily smiles while her cheeks were dyed red.
After that, the fun time continued for a while.
I thought that parties are boring in general but the modest party here is a lot of fun.
585
SPT Chapter 90
10 more chapters until we reach the hundredth chapter huh. next month perhaps.
This chapter is from Gied’s father pov btw.
-Mr.Graverobber.
The Duke of Horsvath
There is a huge mansion located in the prime location of the imperial capital.
Inside a room of that mansion, Gied is currently in a very awkward situation.
“Gied……what did I tell you to do?”
“F, Father……Uh, Uhh……”
“Answer my question. What did I tell you to do?”
This mansion is owned by the second oldest Duke family of the Empire.
The person that is bearing down on Gied is Rolf von Horsvath, the current head of the Ducal house of
Horsvath.
He is a tall man with long brown hair that gives off a mature and calm atmosphere.
However, the eyes he is staring at Gied with are terribly cold.
“T, To get into Leonard’s…….”
“His Highness.”
“T, To get into His Highness Leonard’s faction…..”
“That’s right. I asked you to join His Highness Leonard whose faction is currently rising in power for
the sake of the Horsvath house. So that no matter the result, our Horsvath house can maintain our
influence. And what did you do toward that?”
Rolf silently urges Gied to speak with his eyes.
Seeing that, Gied shakes his head with a frightened expression.
“B, but there was no way around it! Arnold suddenly snapped and didn’t listen to anything I said! It
was all his fault!”
586
“Gied……don’t disappoint me any further than this. Just answer my question. What on earth did you
do?”
He asked with a soft and gentle voice.
However, there was a tremendous pressure hidden inside it.
Gied cowers and answered him while averting his eyes.
“I, I made Arnold angry…….”
“It’s His Highness. Why can’t you learn to remember that?”
“He’s just the Dull Prince! He never got up to do anything and just idle around! He has been inferior to
me ever since we were children! I couldn’t possibly attach such honorifics to a pathetic guy like him!”
“And? Just by being glared at by that lazy, pathetic guy…….you unsightly fell on your butt?”
“Th, that is…..I, I was just surprised because I never thought that he would get angry, that’s all!”
“To attack another person is something dangerous. You risked yourself being counterattacked in
return. That’s why you have to assume that you would get counterattacked when you decided to
attack someone. You not only chose to attack a prince whose standing was higher than you but you
also never thought that he would do something to you in return? There’s no word to describe you but
idiotic.”
“I, Idiotic!? Me!?”
Surprised, Gied’s expression turned sour as his pride was hurt and stared at Rolf with eyes that were
severe than before but he immediately averted his eyes away as Rolf narrowed his eyes at him.
Turning his anger that has nowhere to go on the floor, he stomps it again and again and again.
“I knew you were bullying His Highness Arnold. I know that you hate him who has always been doing
what he pleases. Maybe it was because you have undergone strict training from a young age that you
hate him so much. Bullying is one way to let that emotion out, I understand that. But do you know why
I never tried to stop you?”
“Th, That is……isn’t it because he is just an insignificant prince……?”
“You are getting more and more stupid. Listen. I wanted you to learn. I wanted you to have a good
lesson from it. I wanted you to realize that when you recklessly attack others, you will be in a world of
pain. But you never had a chance to learn that lesson. His Highness Arnold never fought you back after
all. I was disappointed, you know. After that, you two grew up and you started gathering more and
more entourages. I thought that you finally might have grown up in your own way. But you never
grew at all. You were more childish and stupid than I could imagine.”
“I, I am already a proper adult!”
587
“If you are a proper adult then at least smooth things over with him on the surface. Your opponent is a
son of His Majesty the Emperor. It should only be natural that you should speak with him politely as
an adult, not a banter between children. You never did that. And now you got counterattacked by His
Highness. You made him angry at this important and very crucial moment. It might be true when you
said that everything was His Highness’s fault if you two are still children. If you had a tough lesson
back then things wouldn’t turn out this way. His Highness Arnold was mature from a very young age
so he has been putting up with you and now you just grew up to be arrogant and childish. This is
terribly disappointing.”
Hearing his father said something as if he was praising Al, Gied bites down on his lips.
The reason is that inside Gied’s mind, he never imagined a situation where someone would speak
highly of Al while he is the one being berated.
“That guy is mature!? Which part of him is!? He hasn’t done anything until now!”
“Yes. And you did each and everything.”
“That’s right! I made an effort while that guy never did!”
“And this is the result. With the fruit of your efforts, you failed the task I placed upon you and exposed
your unsightly figure to other nobles while His Highness Arnold can create the result without putting
in any effort. I myself think that a lazy wise man is much more preferable than a hard-working
fool…..what about you?”
Unable to stand it anymore, Gied swung his hand around.
However, at that moment.
A sharp voice echoed.
“Stop moving.”
“ !! ???”
Hearing Rolf’s voice, Gied’s tantrum was suppressed.
Then, Rolf says this to Gied with a gentle but cruel voice.
“I left your education with my wife since she loves you very much. That’s why I never interfere unless
it was necessary. However, it seems that it was a mistake. Get back to your room. You need to cool
your head down a little.”
“F, Father! I !!”
“I dislike repeating myself, you know.”
Having no outlet for his anger, the silenced Gied violently storms our of the room.
588
After that, a noise like something breaking was heard from a distance.
Hearing that, Rolf let out a huge sigh.
“Excuse me. Father, may I enter?”
“Come in, Reiner.”
After he said that, a young man a little younger than Gied entered the room.
He is as tall as Gied but his body is fitter and his clothes don’t reek of terrible fashion sense. The soft
smile on his face would make people convinced that he is indeed Rolf’s son.
The young man’s name is Reiner von Horsvath. He is the second son of Duke Horsvath who is turning
16 years old this year. He is the one who was expected to succeed his father as the family head and to
be the next Duke of Horsvath.
Reiner doesn’t take after his mother as much as Gied so his mother didn’t show as much affection to
him as she showed to Gied. that’s why his education was opened to Rolf.
As a result, they have totally different personalities to the extent that people started to suspect
whether Gied and Reiner were actually brothers.
“Aniue seems to be in quite a bad mood just now though?”
“It’s the same as usual.”
“It was even worse than usual you know. He seems to be very upset when he was glared at by His
Highness Arnold after all.”
“Just leave him alone. It was all due to his own actions. Still, it was my responsibility for asking him to
do that and now we have to clean up after him.”
Leo’s faction has cut their way into the succession war.
Rolf tried to send Gied to Leo’s side so that he could sell his favor to Leo’s faction but Gied made them
angry instead.
With a simple glance, anyone would realize that Leo places a considerable amount of trust in Al.
Making Al angry means that you will be getting on Leo’s bad side.
“To be fully honest, I thought that as long as Aniue is with us, we would never be able to join hands
with His Highness Leonard you know.”
“I agree. After observing him for such a long time, His Highness Arnold never looked like a type to hold
a grudge but Gied said that His Highness got angry at him. The same His Highness who has been
putting up with him for so long. It seems that we can’t expect any good relationship from them
anymore.”
589
“I can’t reach out to them myself after all. So, what do we do now?”
“If push comes to shove then we have to get rid of them. If His Highness Leonard becomes the
emperor then we can’t assert our influence like what we have been doing so far. Even if we are
respected as a Ducal house with a long history, we will be kept away from the power struggle. The
measure to avoid that scenario has already failed after all.”
“That’s true but I think it will be hard to put them down you know.”
Rolf nods to Reiner’s words.
The two were properly watching the moment when Al glared at Gied.
Many people think that Gied was surprised because Al suddenly got angry at him but they have a
different opinion.
That was clearly the eyes of someone with power.
If their theory is correct then their opponents would be the Hero Prince who is currently riding a
strong tide and the Wise Prince who has hidden his claws for so many years.
If possible, they don’t want to be hostile with them.
However, his stupid son has already taken a step toward that.
“I should have interfered with Gied’s education sooner…….”
“Even if you say something to him, he will only just give you some suitable reply on the spot you know.
I was surprised too. Even though he was there to ask him a favor, he simply went in with that high
handed attitude. I think that was already ingrained in his personality so I don’t think that there is any
way to fix it anymore.”
“Do you think that we can win with Gied by our side?”
“We should use everything we can. If push comes to shove then we can abandon him later as well. If
Mother objects and threatens you with a divorce then that’s alright too. Father can just find another
lady to marry after all.”
“Well, that’s true. That’s a very rational choice. If we can take advantage of Gied’s troublemaking
nature then we might be able to get something out of it. It wouldn’t hurt us to try that first after all.”
While thinking about such a thing, Rolf and Reiner smile.
Their sinister smiles show that both of them are equally cold-hearted.
590
SPT Chapter 91
Anyone play Black Survival? it’s on Steam, IOS, and Android. I just got back playing it recently.
-Mr.Graverobber
Incident Report and Future Actions
“Alright, let’s hear your report.”
Father cut straight to the point.
Father is sitting on the throne with Franz, the prime minister, besides him. Facing them are only me
and Leo.
Leo was asked to give his report as the inspector at the Privy Council but he instead requested a
private audience with Father to give his report.
If that’s the case then I was intending to bail but Father said that it will be troublesome and have me
stay. He probably wanted to ask me about Lize-aneue and Jurgen later I guess.
“Yes. I will begin my report now. Speaking from the conclusion, it was confirmed that the people of the
south have been victimized by a kidnapping organization and it is likely the southern nobles are also
involved in the said organization as well.”
“…….continue.”
“Yes. The center of this incident was the basement in the mansion of the Lord of the city of Bassau. It
served as the base of operation for the kidnapping organization where they confined the abducted
women and children. I have confirmed this with the testimony from the rescued children so there is
no doubt that at least Earl Sitterheim who ruled over Bassau was involved in the incident.”
After the hole connecting to the Demon World was closed, the mansion along with its basement
appeared in its place.
It was not swallowed by the whole but rather overwritten by it.
Thanks to this, we were able to discover a lot of things after an investigation.
“And? Where is that Sitterheim?”
“He died. According to the knights that know Earl Sitterheim, it seems that the body of the Demon who
Silver fought against was actually his body. The Demon probably possessed him after his head was cut
off.”
“…….”
591
Father silently looks outside.
He probably doesn’t want to hear it but he must.
I heard the details from Leo to some extent but it seems that this incident still has much deeper roots.
“Your Highness Leonard. I heard from the story that the ones who summoned the Demons were
actually the children that managed to escape. Where are they now?”
“…..We faked their death and Lize-aneue transported them to the Eastern Border via a safe route.
Right now they are under the Eastern Army’s protection. The elder sister of the child who was the
center of the incident is also staying there with them. That elder sister was also the adventurer who
first brought this matter to our attention as well.”
Yes, right now, Lynfia is staying at the Eastern Border.
She is there to take care of her sister and the rescued children.
The person herself was worried about them and Leo readily agreed to dispatch her there. It seems she
said that she will come back to join us one day but it is undecided when that will be.
After all, the existence of those children makes this incident even more complicated.
“Why did you fake their death? Do you think that I would punish those children?”
Father asked with a slightly angry tone.
The previous incident was caused by the children summoning the Demons. They are both victims and
perpetrators. That’s why Father has a reason to punish them.
However, that was not the reason Leo faked their death.
“No, it was because we discovered a curious document.”
Leo then gives a piece of paper to Franz.
The paper had reddish-black blood on it. It was discovered in the basement so it was probably the
blood of the one who tried to dispose of it.
“This is…..!?”
Father raised a voice in surprise once he received the document from Franz.
When he showed it to Franz, he visibly frowned at its content.
What was written there was a manual.
It was a method to create a weapon with the combination of a child who holds strong power and
children who have the ability to amplify others’ power.
592
It was a document that described such a method.
In other words, an incident similar to what happened in the south could be recreated in another
country. Thus it can be assumed that there is someone in this country who thought up such a plan.
Moreover, there was one word that appeared many times in the document.
“Such a method……the [Military] is considering doing this……?
“From the document, it was made clear that the experiment was a request from our military. The
Eastern Army is safe since Aneue is the one who is in charge of it but we can not trust any other
military personnel with this, that’s why we decided to fake their death to prevent the children from
being pursued and used as weapons. Please forgive me.”
“It’s a wise decision. However, from the document, it seems that the incident this time was just a trial.
Is it safe to assume that they gathered the children because they were asked to perform such an
experiment?”
“Speaking from the result, it ended up being a success. If they can cause a similar incident to happen in
another country then it will be a great opportunity for us to invade. The Demons that will be
summoned through this are certainly terrifying however, considering that the Empire has the Brave
House in our arsenal, there would be nothing to be afraid of.”
That’s right. This is an invasion plan.
And it’s not just because Father has no intention to start any invasion so he wasn’t informed about it.
Someone is preparing their own future invasion and this is their preparation toward that.
That was what we could derive from the document.
“Gordon huh……”
“I have another report I want to make personally.”
“There’s more huh……”
“Unfortunately, while fighting against the monsters in the south, I witness the death of one of Earl
Sitterheim’s knights. If we believe his story, it seems that Earl Sitterheim was actually threatened to
take part in the kidnapping. Just before we arrived, he decided to rescue the children and rose up
against the kidnappers.”
“I see……in other words, that kidnapping organization has enough power to threaten a Lord huh.”
“Yes. there is a possibility that a powerful noble is behind them. Perhaps, every noble in the south
might be involved as well.”
The deeper you dig, the more darkness raised to the surface.
593
Anyone who got tainted by that darkness must be punished. After all, if that darkness spread too
much, the Empire might not be able to stand any longer.
Even when you don’t want to leave it alone, you have to choose an appropriate time to uncover such
darkness.
“This is getting complicated. Whether it be the request from the army to create humanoid weapons
through the kidnapping organization or the possible involvement of the southern noble, we have to
pick which thread we have to tread on first.”
“That’s why I wanted to hear Your Majesty’s judgment on this.”
“……..”
Father stays quiet for a while and turns his sight toward me.
I have a bad feeling so I shake my head left and right repeatedly but Father still turns that question
toward me.
“How do you think we should proceed? Arnold?”
“Why are you asking me……..”
I sigh and start thinking.
No matter how much I think, I still couldn’t find the right answer.
If we start digging into the military, we will be in conflict with Gordon and if we start investigating the
southern noble, we will have to go against Zandra again.
It would be safest for us to conclude this incident with the defeat of the Demons in the south.
However…….
“You don’t want to hear a safe answer right?”
“Of course.”
“Haa…….”
After a deep sigh, I came to a solution.
However, is this really a good answer?
Still, I will have to say it.
“I think that we should leave the military alone for now. Requesting humanoid weapons from a
kidnapping organization is certainly an unforgivable crime and we have to find out what they are
going to do with such a weapon but the root of the problem this time is the southern nobles. If we do
594
this poorly and most of the southern nobles are involved with that criminal organization……at worst
we might have a rebellion on our hands. In case we have to deal with that rebellion, we can use the
military to suppress them. The investigation can be done after we weaken them. If we do this in
reverse then we might not be able to have an appropriate response to the southern rebellion after all.”
“Taking both of them down at the same time huh. If that’s the case then we don’t have to prepare any
special measure. We can simply observe the actions of the military and come up with an appropriate
countermeasure. If they start something dangerous then we can start an investigation on them and if
not then we can leave them alone until we take care of the other. I think that is a good proposal.”
“……Did you finally decided to stop pretending to be incompetent?”
I shake my head to Father’s words.
Sorry but, I don’t remember ever playing incompetence with Father at all.
I simply never assert myself.
However, we can’t deal with this problem that way.
“I never heard of any important matter so I only kept to myself. But the incident this time is deep-
rooted. Plus, Leo probably came to the same conclusion himself already……..still, he probably couldn’t
say it himself considering his status.”
“…….You think that I would take it as he is using his proposal to his advantage in the succession war?”
“It simply wasn’t that strange for anyone to take it like that. It’s bad enough for me to propose it but it
would be even worse if Leo were to say it himself.”
When I said that, Father convincingly nodded.
Franz also looked as if he was impressed.
My sight matches with Leo. He relays his thanks with his eyes and I shrug my shoulders to tell him to
don’t mind it.
Then, Father reached his conclusion.
“We can’t leave this alone. Leonard, you will continue your investigation on the southern incident. Do
you have any clues to follow?”
“According to the knight’s story, Earl Sitterheim entrusted a letter to a person by the name of Rebecca.
I intend to start by searching for her first.”
“I see. Earl Sitterheim……he left a letter huh.”
The fact that he has a letter to entrust to someone means that he was looking for an opportunity to
come clean.
595
Father might not be able to forgive what Earl Sitterheim did but he has his own thoughts about this as
well.
“By the way, Arnold. Did anything happen to those two’s relationship? Any progress?”
“Eh?”
You are going to talk about that now?
With that retort in my mind, I told him that they made some progress.
Hearing that, Father blatantly frowned and began his sermon.
Arghh, so it ends up like this in the end? Seriously…..?
While wishing that the sermon would end soon, I let out a small sigh.
TLN: Planted evidence? or was it true? I find it unlikely that Gordon would willingly cooperate with
Zandra though…..
596
SPT Chapter 92
A little delay on this one. I tweaked it too many times I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Mysterious Thief
“I see. It was a disaster huh.”
“Right? They were so difficult that I want someone to praise me for improving their relationship even
just a little bit you know.”
While having such a conversation in my room, I look over the accumulated documents on my desk.
Each one of them had important details written on it and there were red marks marked over each of
the documents.
These marks indicate the matter written on the document had been resolved.
While I was away, Finne tried very hard and worked on them. These documents are the result of
Finne’s effort so to speak.
“Please have some black tea.”
“Thanks.”
Finne grinningly brews black tea and serves it to me with sweets.
This is the task that she refused to hand over to Sebas.
Sebas no longer offers his help with it anymore and obediently receives the tea from her.
“Hm? Finne. Has this issue already been solved?”
“Ah, it’s the thievery cases, isn’t it. Forgive me but after various investigations, I think that we should
leave that case alone……”
“Leave it alone?”
“Allow me to explain.”
Saying so, Sebas elegantly sip his black tea and start explaining.
Putting it shortly, several merchants came to us and requesting our help to deal with a certain thief.
597
However, upon closer inspection, it seems that those merchants were shady merchants who have
nothing but bad rumors about them.
Another fact that was uncovered is that whenever those merchants got robbed, there would be money
and valuables scattered for the people of the outer layers.
Moreover, from the sighting information, the thief seems to have a child-like figure. However, it seems
that even the city guard and the soldier of the imperial capital garrison couldn’t catch the thief.
That seems to be the reason why they came to Leo’s faction for help with the promise that they would
cooperate with us in return.
“A thief that can even elude the city guard and the imperial capital garrison. Not to mention that it
would require a lot of manpower to catch such a thief, the people’s dissatisfaction will rise if we do
catch him. That being the case, I advise Finne-sama to postpone our response.”
“I see. That seems like one interesting guy huh.”
The imperial capital garrison and the city guards are not incompetent.
Even if the victim was some evil merchant, they wouldn’t leave such a case alone. It’s a great feat for
the thief to be able to escape their serious arrest attempt.
“An assassin?”
“I don’t think so. Judging from the state of the crime scene and the witness’s testimonies, the thief’s
modus operandi was fairly aggressive. I don’t think that it would be a work of someone who was
trained as an assassin. Rather,”
“An adventurer huh?”
“Yes. considering the rough and aggressive methods, I would be convinced if it was the work of a high-
ranking adventurer.”
However, I never heard of any high-ranking adventurer who looks like a child.
Still, the fact remains that the thief was able to sneak past the imperial garrison and the city guards.
“Leo will be looking for a woman called Rebecca from the Earldom of Sitterheim. All he knows about
her is that she is a female knight in her mid-teens.”
“The name Rebecca is not uncommon as well. This will prove to be difficult.”
“That’s right. To make things even more troublesome, we can’t use flashy methods to find her. We can
not afford to let the other faction notice this. Still, if the scale of that kidnapping organization is as big
as we expected then they are probably hunting her down right now.”
“I see, they would know that the Lord of Bassau decided to go against them since they have eyes and
ears everywhere.”
598
If they get the report that one of the Lord’s trusted knights has left Bassau, they will definitely chase
after her.
Her objective is easy to see through after all.
“Her goal is definitely to reach the Emperor. She is carrying a letter with her which is probably the
Lord’s confession letter. If it reaches Father’s hand then the wrongdoing of the southern nobles will be
exposed. We have to find this Rebecca as soon as possible.”
“We need to recruit more people to do that, correct?”
“That’s right. Lynfia is not with us this time and I want someone who can move around freely. If
possible, it would be best if we can have someone who has enough power to fend off an assassin or a
former assassin that can work for us from the shadows.”
“Don’t you think that would be too much of a requirement?”
“I thought so too. Still, we can make do with someone who has a similar ability. there would be no
more effective way to boost our faction’s strength other than this.”
“But how do we recruit such a person?”
Hearing Finne’s question, I put up one finger.
“We already know someone that is qualified and has a lot of free time right.”
Saying so, I immediately moved out.
“Seriously……You roped me into this the day my house arrest was lifted……?”
Elna complained under her thick hood.
With Aneue, Leo, and Jurgen’s plea, Elna’s house arrest was lifted. However, she still can’t return to the
Imperial Knight Order. In other words, with no duty to perform, Elna is currently free.
“Sorry, but we do not have enough manpower at all. I can’t afford to let talented people loitering
around.”
“Still, having me guard some evil merchant’s merchandise is……..”
“Don’t worry. We will crush him once we are done with this.”
“Really?”
“Sebas already sneaked into their office. He probably grabbed some evidence and handed it over to
the city guard by now.”
599
“Then it’s fine.”
Elna looks at the wagon with a relief expression.
We are currently transporting the merchandise of said evil merchant. It is being guarded by Elna
along with other escorts from our faction. The merchant offered to dispatch some of their men as well
but we told them that it was unnecessary.
It would be troublesome if they are with us after all. If they were one of the prominent merchants of
the imperial capital then they would insist on dispatching their own escorts but this time we were
dealing with a mid-tier merchant.
They obediently entrusted their merchandise with us since they were robbed blind and their company
can no longer afford to operate normally anymore.
Well, these merchandises seem like they were obtained through some dirty means so they have no
one to blame but themselves though.
I pretend to be a merchant and stand on top of the wagon.
“Alright…..depart! Listen here, you morons! Don’t let any of my merchandise get stolen alright! Protect
my merchandise with your life! This stuff is way more valuable than your measly lives!”
While impersonating a villainous merchant, we proceed through the night street of the Imperial
Capital.
We will only be carrying these things from the warehouse to the store but the attack should come
during the transportation.
They could just move these merchandise during the day but some of the merchandise seems to be too
risky for them to move during the day.
For that reason, we steadily proceed through the Imperial Capital at night.
“Focus up! Don’t you dare get sleepy now! You don’t want to get paid!?”
“Haa….is that really necessary?”
“It made me look like a villain right?”
“Yeah, if I don’t know you I might end up truly believing it you know.”
I nod satisfyingly at Elna’s words.
If that’s the case then there’s no problem.
If the thief notices something unusual then he might not show up after all.
While I was thinking so, the two escorts who were walking in front of us suddenly collapsed.
600
“Finally huh.”
“Quite a young merchant aren’t you? Kid, if you don’t want to get hurt then leave your stuff and
scram.”
Saying so, a small man wearing a hood appeared with a spear. However, the only thing that indicated
that he is a man was only his voice.
His height is only around 1 meter tall. The spear in his hand is even taller than himself.
If I look at his body alone then he would look like a child but his tone of voice is much older than mine.
What’s this? This strange sense of wrongness.”
“Are you the thief who has been ruining my merchandise lately?”
“Your merchandise huh. Are you joking? The only thief here is you. I just came back to get what’s
mine.”
“I obtained these things legally you know.”
“Sure. if that’s the case then I have nothing left to talk with you. I will be taking those things off your
hands now!”
The man then jumped at me.
Defending me, Elna jumped out and blocked the man’s sharp blow.
“Hou? You managed to block my spear huh. You are quite something aren’t you?”
“I haven’t received such a sharp attack for a long time too you know. It was a pity that I couldn’t get a
match with Lizelotte-sama but it seems I can clear up my regret with you here.”
Saying so, Elna brandishes a series of attacks and pushes back the man.
Other escorts try to get into action as well but Elna stops them.
“Don’t come in! You will get in the way!”
“Quite a strong lady aren’t you. I like it. If the small fries mix in here it would only ruin the fun after
all.”
Saying so, the man holds up his spear.
He then speaks with a low voice.
“I can’t hold back so don’t die on me now okay.”
“That’s my line. It would be a problem for me if you die here so do your best to stay alive alright.”
“Hmph…..Fool!!”
601
With that as the signal, the battle of speed has begun.
The wind pressure of each blow damages the surrounding buildings. He’s an opponent that Elna has
to get serious with? Just who is this guy?
The man covers for his short reach with his spear and splendidly launches his attack on Elna. Is he a
dwarf or something? No, he’s too small for that.
While I was thinking about such a thing, Elna thrusts her sword at the man.
The man slipped through and avoided it then suddenly turned toward me.
“Sorry Kid, but this is not a duel. Teyahh!!”
Yelling so, the man’s spear plunged toward me.
However, Elna seems to have expected that and swept the man’s feet off the ground with a leg sweep.
“Too naive!”
“What!?”
Elna attacked the man who lost his balance but he managed to catch her attack with his spear and got
blown a great distance away.
The man was sent flying into a nearby pile of straw.
“Well done.”
“No. it felt strange.”
“Strange?”
“It seems you looked down on me huh. Fighting me while standing on such a thing.”
Looking at him, I certainly saw two wooden sticks rolling away from the man.
Don’t tell me he was standing on those while fighting? Against Elna to top it off?”
No, taking out those sticks, he is even shorter than that?
When such a question popped up in my mind, the man got up from the straw.
However, his appearance was far from what I imagined.
“You did quite a number on me, Jou-chan.”
(TLN: Young lady/ a way for an older man to playfully call a girl)
“……..”
602
“……..”
“Ha? What?”
The person himself may not have noticed it yet.
His hood was now lowered and the sticks he stood on were gone so his true appearance was exposed.
His appearance was,
“A bear cub?”
“Wha!? Shit!?”
Even though his speech was normal, his appearance was that of a small bear.
Brown hair, black eyes, his appearance looks no different from a bear stuff animal.
The man put on his hood in a hurry but it was already too late.
In the first place, it is just ridiculous for someone to stand on leg extensions while covering yourself
with a hood. There’s nothing intimidating about him left at all.
“Tsk! Can’t be helped then! I will let you off today!”
“Ah! Get back here!”
“Don’t chase him.”
Elna looked dissatisfied as I stopped her.
It seems that Elna wants to settle the score with him but she stops since she understands that our
objective was reached.
It was shocking but we were able to find out what we wanted. All that is left is to search for him.
From his act of distributing the stolen goods and money at the outer layers, we know his area of
operation.
“Let’s head back for now. Put the ones who fainted on the wagon.”
I gave the order.
Still dissatisfied, Elna gazes at me and turns to look at the direction the man disappeared to.
It seems this encounter just ignited her soul as a warrior.
“If you catch him then let me have a rematch.”
“It will depend on him right.”
603
While having such a conversation, we started making our way back through the Imperial Capital’s
night street.
Anyone care to comment………….
604
SPT Chapter 93
First chapter of the week! so much chapters left to do…….
NTW is it just me or is it start raining lately?
-Mr.Graverobber
Arrest
At the Outermost Layer of the Imperial Capital.
I came to visit Gai at his dojo together with Finne.
“Yo, Gai.”
“Oh, Al. Finne-sama as well, welcome! Please come in!”
The treatment he gave was so different that my cheeks cramped up while going inside the dojo.
There were no children inside the dojo today.
“Your day off?”
“Nah, I was teaching some children earlier but they left early today.”
“Why?”
“Recently, there’s a guy playing a chivalrous thief and giving away a lot of things. Well, it’s fine and all
but since there are some bad guys out looking for that thief right now I am trying to get the children
home early. It’s dangerous out there after all.”
“I see. Then this is just right. We came here to look for that chivalrous thief. Do you have any clue
where we can find him?”
“Nah, not at all.”
Gai said while averting his eyes away.
He surely knows something.
Letting out a small sigh, I tell Gai about our secret agenda.
“Last night Sebas brought back evidence of wrongdoing from those evil merchants and we already
handed them over to the city guard. They will be arrested soon but next is that thief’s turn. Stealing is
605
stealing no matter who you stole from. If he isn’t under someone’s protection he will be arrested you
know.”
“………You aren’t here to arrest him?”
“Do I look like such a straightlaced person?”
“Well, not at all.”
Saying so Gai scratches his head and sits down in a seiza position.
Then after mulling over things for a while, he turns to look at me.
“While you and Leo were out of the imperial capital, those shady merchants started harassing people
of the outermost layer, ripping them off a lot of things. They might have had an idea to earn some
small changes while all the big merchants are competing in the succession war. With that being the
case, the thief didn’t choose his methods and set out to get back all the items and money that have
been taken away from us. To the people of the outermost layer, he’s a hero.”
“I know that. We don’t have any intention to do anything bad to him.”
“Al-sama just has something that he wants that person’s help with. Please tell us where we can find
him. Do you have any idea where he might be?”
“……I don’t know specifically where he lives but there’s one place that might be possible.”
“Where?”
“It’s a recently abandoned house but little kids started bringing food there lately.”
“I see. Can you guide me to that house?”
“I don’t mind but the outermost layer of people are protecting him. If you are not careful you will get
mobbed, you know?”
“Don’t worry about that.”
Saying so, I look at Finne.
Seeing that, Finne gives me a strong nod.
Gai who doesn’t understand what we are intending to do was left stunned but we went out regardless.
“Everyon-e! We still have a lot left to give away so you don’t have to push okay!!”
Finne said so as she stood in front of the outermost layer people while wearing an apron.
606
The staff and guards of the Ajin company are surrounding her. There are some knights standing guard
nearby as well.
“You are distributing food to attract the people’s attention huh. By the Blue Seagull Princess herself on
top of that.”
“We didn’t intend to do that at first though.”
“Hm? Really?”
“This is kind of a compensation for them. Those shady merchants ripped off and threatened the poor
of the imperial capital, taking their money and valuables away from them. Now that we know what
has been going on, we intend to make it up to them.”
“Directly from you guys? Not from the country?”
“Don’t worry. The Ajin company is the one who pays for all this. This will serve as an advertisement
for them and it will spread the word of Leo’s kindness as well. It’s a necessary expense. By the way,
you can consult about things like this at the castle too but it will take some time before they can move
though.”
“I see. Both sides have something to gain huh.”
Saying so, I and Gai head to the abandoned house, our objective today.
After walking for a while, the ragged wooden house came into view.
“I will enter first.”
“Be careful. He’s a guy who can go toes to toes with Elna. Well, I am not here to start a fight with him
though.”
As to not alarm him, the only ones here are me and Gai.
Elna might say that I took too much precaution but if we make him put his guard up against us here
everything might come to naught.
Moreover, I am confident that we will be fine.
“It looks like he’s away.”
“He’s not here?”
Hearing Gai, I entered the house.
This place certainly looks like someone has been living here and it’s not wrong to say that no one’s
here. After all, there’s no human being inside the house.
However, there’s a but.
607
“………..”
“………..”
A small bear stuffed animal is sitting on the shelf.
Brown fur and rounded eyes, no matter how you look, that would only look like a stuffed animal to
you.
However, what was impossible yesterday can be possible today.
I started speaking to the thief.
“It’s totally obvious already so stop doing that.”
“……..”
“Hou? You really going to keep pretending to be a stuffed animal?”
“O, Oi……….Al. You alright there? Suddenly starting talking to a doll like that.”
For some reason, Gai is looking at me worryingly.
If he couldn’t understand from the current situation then this dude is quite thick in the head.
“Shut up for a bit.”
“Eh? Ah, yes……..you just wanted to talk to it right……”
Isn’t his understanding kind of off the mark? Well, whatever. I was really surprised last time after all.
I look around the room. If this guy is going to pretend to be a stuffed animal then I have my way of
doing things as well.
“It looked like you were about to have lunch. It’s a waste so I guess I will eat all this instead huh.”
I grabbed a piece of bread left on the table and bit it in front of him to show it off.
Although it is not a high-quality bread, eating for others to see still makes it delicious.
I feel that the expression on the small bear slightly changed. He’s getting angry with just this huh.
Alright, let’s push him a bit further.
“Let’s do some self-introduction shall we. I am Al. Arnold Lakes Adler. This country’s Eighth Prince. I
acted as a decoy yesterday to catch you.”
“A, Al…..are you really okay?”
“You are noisy, shut up.”
608
“…………Okay. self-introduction is really important in things like these after all.”
Gai is looking at me, his gaze filled with pity.
Really, this guy……….
I almost continue eating in front of Gai instead but unfortunately, my current target is not him.
I turn my eyes back to the bear.
“The bad guys you were dealing with have already been caught. If the investigation proceeds like this,
next will be your turn. No matter who you stole from, stealing is still a crime after all. That being said, I
am here to scout you. Cooperate with me. If you do that I will put you under my protection.”
“Oh, I see. You are practicing what to say to the thief right. Sorry, I thought you went nuts and started
feeling sorry for you.”
“Shut up. I am talking to this guy.”
“Sorry….hm, you were really…., I’m really sorry……..”
I ignore Gai who is looking at me as if I was already beyond saving and look at the small bear.
This is the person that raided us yesterday without a doubt. It would be nice if he is interested in my
proposal but there’s no movement from him at all.
I have never heard of a demihuman that looks like a talking bear before so there must have been a
reason behind his current appearance. The reason he is so cautious is probably because of that.
I have to get him to trust me somehow huh.
What should I do? How can I make him open up to me?
While I was desperately thinking up a way to do that, the door opens.
Then, Finne showed up.
“Al-sama, Gai-san. Is Mr.thief here?”
“Nah, it seems he’s out right now.”
I was distracted just for a short moment during Finne and Gai’s exchange.
When I returned my eyes back to the bear, he’s already gone from the shelf.
Crap!? He took the chance to escape when Finne opened the door!!
I thought, but when I looked at Finne.
There’s an unexpected sight.
609
“Hello, beautiful young lady……..it must be fate that we meet here. Can you tell me your name?”
“Ah, what a cute little Mr.bear. I am Finne von Kleinert.”
Smiling brightly, Finne gives him her name.
But isn’t that reaction too strange?
Normally a person would,
“A, a bear just spoke!?”
“I told you. That guy is the thief.”
“So it was true……sorry, I was thinking about consulting with Leo to see if we could do anything for
you.”
“You are really……..whatever. Right now I have business with this guy.”
“Can you tell me your name?”
“My name is Siegmund Eisler. My friends call me Sieg. Please call me Sieg too, Finne-sama.”
After hearing his name, mine and Gai’s expression changed.
The two of us look at each other. For us to react the same like this, this is probably not a
misunderstanding.”
“There’s an S-rank adventurer with the same name right?”
“Yeah, among all the adventurers on our continent, Siegmund is known as the strongest spearman.”
“Hou? So you know me as an adventurer huh. If you know what I can do then scram. I am having a talk
with this fine young lady here.”
Sieg said so and turned to Finne with a smile.
I have heard about him before. His thrust was dubbed the godspeed and known to be unavoidable. He
is a warrior who is known to be very strong in interpersonal combat.
If you count only the skill, he is among the top five most skilled adventurers.
Still, there is another rumor about him.
“I heard that Siegmund is a big skirt chaser and famous for making his moves on various women.
However, around six months ago, Siegmund disappeared. Moreover, he is supposed to be a human
though…….?”
“He might have got entangled with some women related problem huh.”
610
Naturally, a human wouldn’t be able to transform into a bear.
If this guy is the real deal then he would have transformed himself with some kind of magic or
medicine. Still, I don’t think he can revert to his original form at will. Something women related must
have happened to him.
While making such speculations, I stomp on Sieg who was trying to hug Finne.
“Ugh!?”
“Oi, womanizer. Answer my question.”
“What are you doing to me, brat!? Are you so depraved that you can stomp on a lovely little bear like
me without mercy!?”
“You are originally a human right.”
“You hear that!? Finne-sama! This guy is bullying m〜e.”
He said so and tried to hug Finne again but I put the collar I brought on Sieg’s neck.
It’s one of Gramp’s priced items. You can’t remove it unless you use the key I have.
“The heck is this?! Are you trying to ruin my lovely appearance!? Get this off me!!”
“It’s a magic tool. You can’t remove it without a specialized key. I didn’t want to use it but you left me
no choice.”
“Ha! What of it! It’s your failure to not attach a chain to this thing! I can just run away with it!”
Saying so, Sieg tried to escape outside.
Despite being a bear cub, his dexterous movement on two feet is really surreal.
Moreover, he’s quite fast. His figure is gradually going farther and farther away.
“So? What’s the effect of that magic tool?”
“Wait for it and you will understand.”
Looking at Sieg who has been running away on two legs, he has now switched to running on all four.
Moreover, his movement is now slowed down to a crawl.
Although it may look ridiculous from others’ point of view, this is the effect of that collar. The farther
away you are from the key holder, the heavier your body becomes.
After waiting for a while, Sieg dropped his shoulders and returned.
“Are you willing to cooperate with us now? It’s way better than getting caught right?”
611
“Yes…..please allow me to cooperate with you…….”
“But Al-sama. It will be inconvenient for him to look for a person for us while wearing that collar isn’t
it? Moreover, he is somehow pitiful isn’t he?”
“The weight can be adjusted by the key holder. And you don’t need to feel sorry for this guy. This guy
is undoubtedly a good for nothing you know.”
“Why!? I may have this kind of body now but I did my best for the people of the outermost layer you
know!”
“Is that right. Then tell me, what’s that?”
I point to the thing hidden under a cloth at the corner.
I already knew before I came here.
The items that this guy stole were given back to all the people of the outermost layer but he also stole
the money from the merchants and the amount he distributed back doesn’t match with the amount he
stole.
I take off the cloth.
There, a large amount of money was hidden under it.
“If you really tried to help the people then aren’t you supposed to return all the ripped off money to
the victims?”
“Well……about that. Being a hero of justice for free is a little……”
I look at Sieg who averts his eyes while saying that.
Together with Gai, I confiscate the money.
Then, Sieg clings to my leg.
“Please forgive me! I was going to use that money to ask the princess of this country to break the
curse! I beg you〜Think of it as helping this old man out!”
“By princess, do you mean Zandra?”
“Yes, yes. The green-haired princess that giving off bad vibes.”
“Then give up. She indeed loves studying forbidden magics but she doesn’t help people. She will just
use the treatment as an excuse to experiment on you.”
“Don’t say something so scary……but, you really know your stuff huh? Are you really a prince?”
“Yeah, that’s right. Didn’t I just introduce myself earlier?”
612
“Well, you don’t have that kind of aura at all so I thought, Nah, no way.”
For some reason,
Although I am already used to it, when it came out of this guy’s mouth, it kinda pissed me off.
With that in mind, I hold up Sieg.
Hm, isn’t he quite pleasant to hug like this?
“Stop it! I have no hobby to get hugged by a guy!”
“It can’t be helped right. It would be weird to see a bear cub walk around wearing a collar so just
pretend to be a stuffed animal for a while. We will talk about the details at the castle.”
“NO!! Ah! Finne-sama! If you stroke me like thaーt!!”
“You are so fluffy.”
“Oh! His fur really does feel great.”
“Stop! A man shouldn’t touch me like that! I’m only reserved for cute young ladies! Stoー!”
After Finne and Gai pat him all over, I carried the tired Sieg away.
The feelings his fur gave off was godlike. While deciding that I should let Christa and Rita feel him
later, I put Sieg in the carriage.
TLN: Yes, we now have a mascot. I’m not too sure about leaving it alone with Christa though……
613
SPT Chapter 94
Free SSR………
-Mr.Graverobber
New Comrade
“Aren’t you living in quite a nice room. As expected of a prince though.”
“Well, thanks. Now, let’s hear your story. How did you end up looking like that?”
As Finne started preparing tea for us, I asked him the question.
Sieg looks down with a serious expression and,
“It’s about half a year ago. I met a woman in a forest.”
“I see. So it’s your fault then.”
“I haven’t explained anything yet have I!?”
“I can already tell that much without hearing your story! You tried to make a pass on her right!?”
“Not yet! I was turned into this before I could even make a move on her!”
Sieg hits the desk regretfully.
The regret feeling can be felt from his gesture.
Just how much does this guy love chasing women
“Haa…..so? Was that woman the one who did this to you?”
“No. it was her elder sister……”
“Well, if some bad insects start coming close to her sister, of course, she would protect her.”
“That’s not it! I was turned into this after I was made to take some strange medicine! I thought she
was angry at me for aiming for her sister too but she just told her sister that I am cuter this way you
know!? She turned me into this just because she thinks a bear cub is cuter you know!!”
Sieg starts to cry but he says the word cute a lot so maybe he actually likes this appearance though.
But to think that someone would turn a human into a bear just because she thought that he would be
cuter. What is up with her.
614
“Just which forest did you go to?”
“That’s…..a secret. I went there on a request.”
Sieg averts his eyes.
As expected of a high-ranking adventurer, it seems he’s a splendid adventurer in that regard.
He climbed up to S rank but he was held down because he’s a womanizer huh.
“The tea is done.”
“Oh, Finne-sama’s tea! Thank you!”
“You can drink?”
“Yeah! I can eat normally. The only thing that changed is this appearance.”
“So you are not a simple stuffed animal huh.”
“My body just looks like a stuffed animal. Ouch! Fuu Fuu.”
Sieg tried to drink his tea but he frowned and hurriedly breathed on it.
I try drinking it too but the tea itself isn’t particularly hot. Is it just a common bear’s characteristic?
This might be surprisingly difficult huh.
“About a way to turn you back, I will look for it.”
“Hm? You got a clue?”
“Silver might know something about it.”
“……So you are acquainted with Silver!?”
He stopped blowing on his tea and looked at me with a surprised expression.
Rather than an acquaintance, I am the person himself though.
Well, I can’t tell him that anyway, let’s tell him some appropriate lie.
“Well, yeah. Silver is cooperating with me and my younger brother for a lot of things. I will ask him
about your case. Just look forward to it. Don’t get your hope up alright? Silver’s specialty is not
medicine after all.”
“Still, thank you! If it’s that masked adventurer then he might actually know something about it!”
“Okay, Sieg. Let me confirm this with you. We will put you under our protection and ask Silver about
the way to turn you back to normal. In return, you will give us your cooperation. Is that alright with
you?”
615
“Yeah! No problem. So can you remove this soon?”
Saying so he urged at the collar on his neck.
Still, I didn’t feel like removing it yet.
“No.”
“Why not!?”
“I will leave that on so that you can’t do anything weird.”
“No way!? Isn’t that too much! Finne-sama〜!”
Sieg then lightly jumps up and tries to hug Finne. Finne was also prepared to catch him but on his way
up, Sieg suddenly fell down.
“Guh!!”
“That’s exactly why I left that collar on you.”
“Are you okay? Sieg-san.”
“D, Damn you……”
The collar was instantly heavier.
Because of that Sieg suddenly fell to the floor.
Sieg who managed to raise his face, glared at me while bearing his fang like a ferocious carnivore.
“Then I will do it myself! Hand me the key!!”
Saying so, Sieg ran up to me and grabbed my arm.
His appearance looks like a koala rather than a bear now.
“How’s that! Want to give up now!?”
“What are you on about?”
“……Eh? I’m not heavy?”
“It only weighs so much that you can’t move. I do feel the weight but you are originally light though.”
While saying so, I continue increasing the weight on Sieg.
I feel the weight of a child hanging on my arm but Sieg already slowly falls down.
616
Despite that, Sieg desperately put more power in his arm but since his arm was trembling so much, he
might have reached his limit already.
“Damn it…..Don’t think you have won with this! I will definitely get that key away from you and let you
taste the sam–Ugh!!”
In the middle of his sentence, Sieg’s arm separated from mine, and Sieg himself fell flat on the floor in
a prone position.
He still tries to get up somehow so I put even more weight on him.
“Anything to say?”
“I’m sorry, please make it lighter please.”
“Good.”
Saying so, I remove the weight on him.
However, Sieg jumps towards me as if he was waiting for that chance.
“You fell for it!”
“No, you.”
“A-hhhhhh!!?? Ugeh!”
Sieg who jumped up at me slammed his face on the floor from an even higher height. He let out a
strange voice and no longer move.
I think he will stay like that for a while.
“Call me when you are willing to cooperate. Stay quiet until you decide to do so.”
“……Yes.”
After such an exchange, I moved toward my paperwork. Sieg slowly crawls on the floor and tries to get
back on a chair.
On his way, he tried to look under Finne’s skirt so I tripled the weight on him. Sieg screamed out and
collapsed right there but I decided to leave like that as a punishment.
Even though he became a bear cub he is still an S rank adventurer. There’s no doubt that he’s powerful
but I certainly just recruited a troublesome guy to our side.
Well, all I have to do is use him right.
I thought so while sipping on Finne’s tea.
617
“Hey, kid. Weren’t you out looking for me because you have a job for me?”
“Yeah, didn’t I just tell you about the job?”
“Kuu-chan! This bear can talk!”
“Wow, so fluffy……he feels so good.”
“You wanted me to babysit!!!?”
Sieg protests while making a slightly bear-like angry face.
Seeing Christa and Rita playing with him like this make it not that convincing though.
Since Rita and Christa came over to play, I have Sieg act as their playmate.
It seems Sieg isn’t just gunning for any woman, children seem to especially be his no go zone. Because
of that, there’s nothing to worry about even if Christa and Rita touch him. He just made it feel like it’s
troublesome for him but he isn’t angry at the children or anything after all.
“Hey, young ladies. Even like this, I am still a human you know?”
“OH! Rita wants to be a bear too!”
“But you are a bear…….”
“No, listen to me!”
He then got pulled around and stroked all over.
After being played with so much, Sieg desperately appeals to them but the two don’t seem like they
were listening at all.
They are still children and he’s a bear cub right now after all. His appearance is also adorable and soft
to the touch, so of course, they would want to pet him.
“I will be done with my work soon so just play with them until I’m done.”
“Work huh……Kid, I thought people are calling you the Dull Prince though? Aren’t you supposed to be
incompetent and lazy? Wai-! Don’t pull on me at the same time! I’m—gonna—rip—!!”
“The rumors are not wrong. There’s just a lot to do lately so even an incompetent like me got to work
that’s all.”
“So it’s not that you can’t do it but you simply didn’t huh. Aren’t you in quite an envious position, damn
it.”
618
“A prince can live comfortably without doing any work after all. Since I was born into a good family it
would be a waste to not get spoiled rotten right.”
While saying so, I organized various information that Sebas reported to me.
Most of the time it doesn’t have much use but there can be times that such information can be used as
well.
From now on I have to search for Rebecca and support the faction from the shadows. Information is
my lifeline.
This kind of work can not be neglected.
“Aren’t you quite a good brother to try so hard to make your little brother into an emperor. Oi! Stop
with the eye! Not the eye!”
“I’m not doing anything difficult at all. I just moderately put in my effort. If the other guys win I might
get executed after all.”
“Then isn’t it fine if you just run away by yourself. No matter how incompetent you are supposed to
be, you surely have the mean to do that right.”
“Well, alone that is.”
While saying so, I look at Christa and Rita.
If I run away, I have to bring these children with me. From now on the faction will gradually grow
bigger and bigger while the thing I have to protect will increase at the same time.
Escaping might be an unrealistic measure already.
“I see….you are quite soft huh.”
“Just say whatever you want.”
“Well, I don’t hate guys like you. But remember this. If you give me a job, I will do it my own way. You
can’t come back to complain about it later alright?”
He would look cool while saying that if not for the fact that Rita and Christa are pulling both his ears
and face making it stretched into a weird shape.
The word surreal might not be enough to describe him now.
“Well, I will leave the method to you. I will take the responsibilities so do whatever you want. If you
can get the result then I don’t have any complaints.”
“Nice. I will do that then. Oi! Stop pulling my ears already! At least play with my hands or feet!”
“One thing though, don’t bring any woman related problem to me okay?”
619
“I have this kind of body now after all. It will be tough you know. Well, maybe a woman or two might
fall in love with me but that’s not my fault alright.”
Sieg said such a thing while being pulled on both hands and is now floating in the air.
Well, at least there would be no woman who would fall for the current Sieg.
“that’s not what I am worried about so you don’t have to worry about that. Alright, I’m done. Christa,
Rita. what are you going to play today?”
“Sieg…..!”
“Rita wants to play tag! Sieg will be it!”
“Bring it! I will end this in an instant! Oi! Making me heavier is not fair right!?”
“You are playing against children so it’s a handicap.”
“You say that but you are playing too right!? You cheat!?”
Leaving Sieg who was stuck on the floor from the weight alone, I took both Christa and Rita and run
away from him.
620
SPT Chapter 95
I was bored so I read ahead a little, do look forward to the new character this Sunday. I like him/her a
lot.
-Mr.Graverobber
Night Battle Prelude
A few days after Sieg joined our faction.
I dispatched men to collect information in the imperial capital. What I was searching for is if anyone
sees someone unfamiliar or if there are any new faces in the imperial capital. Naturally, this is all for
the sake of looking for Rebecca.
“So? Is it still not my turn yet?”
“No, not yet. It will be your turn when we confirm that Rebecca has entered the imperial capital.”
“About that, is she really going to come here?”
I unhesitatingly nod at Sieg’s question.
She’s a knight that deliberately escaped after Earl Sitterheim entrusted his letter with her. The content
of that letter is almost certainly a confession.
If that’s the case then her destination is the capital.
If the Southern Nobles are involved in the case then the only one she can make an appeal to is the
Emperor himself.
“She will definitely come to the imperial capital.”
“You seem very confident huh. Well, I don’t really mind that but how would you go about looking for
someone when you don’t even know what she looks like?”
“There’s no problem about that. We already asked for information about her appearance from people
who know her in Bassau and have a portrait made. It should arrive today.”
“Quite a thorough preparation huh?”
“It was my younger brother’s instruction. Not mine.”
“Hee, as expected of the Hero Prince huh. He sure does a thorough job.”
621
“Of course, he gave that instruction because he already anticipated this kind of development,
still………..Leo felt responsible for her. He probably wants to protect that Rebecca woman.”
Earl Dennis von Sitterheim rose up against them because he knew that Leo was coming. Perhaps there
was some dissent among their organization before that as well. Still, there was no doubt that what
triggered him was Leo’s arrival.
Leo thought that if he was just a little bit faster or if he chose to stay in Bassau, perhaps the incident
could have been avoided.
If it’s Leo then he will surely feel responsible for it.
“He’s soft. Too soft.”
Sieg made a fed-up expression.
Well, it’s true. I also think that Leo shouldn’t worry so much about it either.
But, that’s Leo.
“Sometimes, that softness can save people.”
“Probably. But a half-ass softness can be an opening for you right?”
Sieg points that out with a sharp tone.
As expected of a veteran adventurer. He can be severe at a time like this.
Adventurers always put their lives on the line. Even if they lose their comrades, they have to defeat
the monsters. If they give up their request just because of that, everything will be meaningless.
Adventurers are great at controlling their own emotions.
“Don’t worry. Leo’s softness is hardcore. It’s definitely not some half-ass kindness.”
“I’m not trying to say that………”
“I know. But there won’t be any opening created because of that. I am here to guarantee that.”
“Then I don’t mind. I don’t want to do something reckless just because my client is too soft alright? I
will not take any responsibility for anyone’s lives besides mine. Especially now.”
“That’s enough for me. Rebecca will probably be in hiding after she enters the capital. Her pursuer will
be Zandra’s assassins. Maybe another candidate will be deploying some thugs for her as well. If they
can get the letter they can negotiate with Leo after all. I want someone who can act in a safe manner in
that environment and you cleared that requirement, Sieg.”
Whether or not Zandra is directly involved, the Southern Nobles are an important base of her faction.
She will not want anyone to attack them. If so, erasing Rebecca and disposing of that letter is the
622
quickest and surest solution. Still, the opposite is also true. Either way, Rebecca’s letter is the key to
get rid of Zandra.
That’s why if she enters the capital, she will definitely be targeted by multiple factions.
The power structure will completely change depending on the outcome of this battle for Rebecca.
It might be possible to make Zandra drop out of the succession war with this.
If that happens, we will be able to make a big step forward to the throne.
“Hey, Kid. Can I suggest to you the most efficient way I can think of right now?”
“Let them fight each other right? We can just stand by and let them crush each other then we can
snatch both Rebecca and the letter away at the final stage.”
“What. so you already thought of it huh. Why don’t you do that?”
Well, even if you ask me.
It is certainly the most efficient way to do this.
With Sebas and Sieg we have a high possibility of success. However, if we are going to do that, it
means that we will be using Rebecca as a bait.
“If you are Rebecca, would you give the letter to the guy who appeared before you at the very end?”
“I would. It’s a hassle after all. I have no use for it and it would only invite danger to me.”
“That’s a difference between your mindset and hers. She’s a knight. Her purpose is probably to restore
the honor of Earl Sitterheim. She will never give that letter to someone she can’t trust. No matter how
much she has to risk, that letter is still more valuable than her life. For her, that letter is her pride
itself.”
“Prioritizing her pride over her life? That’s just ridiculous.”
“Yeah, it’s ridiculous. No matter what, life must be your first priority. Still, a knight is someone who
ridiculously places their pride above their life. That’s how a knight is. They are not like us.”
You can’t do anything with pride.
Pride doesn’t make you stronger nor does it can feed you.
But the knights always sing of pride.
“Pride is unnecessary for you to live. Still, that unnecessary thing can attract people. The pride of a
knight isn’t just for an individual. It is something that accumulates. That woman also carries the pride
of Earl Sitterheim. Unless she can trust Leo, she will never hand the letter over.”
623
“They are really a difficult creature huh, those knights.”
“You say that but you also have your pride as an adventurer right?”
“Nope, the heck is an adventurer’s pride anyway.”
“Really? I do know of many proud adventurers you know?”
Adventurers are free. Therefore, the thing that they decide to do themselves will never be displaced.
Aside from that will, everything about them is terribly lawless so they tend to be looked at as outlaws
but most of the adventurers possess an iron will.
They feel responsible for the request they receive. If they don’t do that then their reputation will fall.
That’s why they will never do that.
The fact that Sieg never talked about the forest he went to shows that he also has that pride as an
adventurer. It’s clear that it would be better for him if he tells us about it but he still decided not to.
I can feel his strong will from that.
“Haa. for me, a proud adventurer is not an adventurer at all though.”
Saying so, Sieg put the teacup to his mouth and sip on the black tea.
Then, at the same time, the door opened.
“Excuse me. Arnold-sama.”
“What’s wrong? Sebas?”
“The portrait has arrived. We also received a report that someone who has a similar description
seems to have entered the capital.”
“I see……”
I received the portrait from him.
Brown almost orange hair trimmed at the shoulder with a face full of vigor.
I can say that she’s beautiful. This is still just a portrait though.
I show the portrait to Sieg.
He then showed a fearless smile.
“Well, looking for a beauty like this rather than a monster is more motivating anyway. Lucky me.”
Saying so, Sieg prepared to head out with the portrait.
624
I stopped him and asked Sebas to get the thing.
“Oi Oi, you still have more restraint for me?”
“It’s not that. It would be inconvenient for you to carry a spear looking like that right?”
“Well, yeah.”
Sebas soon returns with a small stick in his hand.
The length of the stick is about 30 cm. When I received it from Sebas, I pressed the button on the stick,
it then turned into a two meters long spear.
“Hou?”
“It’s a transformable magic tool. How about it?”
I put the spear back to its original form and threw it toward Sieg.
Sieg receives it and turns it into a spear again.
“It’s a bit light……..well, not bad I guess.”
Saying so, Sieg casually swung it around.
Even though the room is filled with many things, he doesn’t hit them at all.
Sieg stops swinging his spear and instantly thrust it out.
The speartip stops just before the teacup that Sieg had been drinking from.
“It’s a good spear. What’s its name?”
“Magic spear [Ruin]. If you like it then feel free to use it.”
“Yeah, I will—–Ah, that’s right.”
Sieg, who was about to leave the room, stopped his legs.
On the other hand, Sebas who was leaving left the room regardless.
“If I can’t save her life……I will be prioritizing the letter alright?”
“I told you that I will leave the method to you right?”
“You can’t complain to me later okay. That letter will be my top priority. You got that?”
“That’s fine with me. But……”
“But?”
625
I look straight at Sieg.
Sieg asked me that after he made his resolve.
If so, then I have to answer him with mine.
“You have to make sure. I will not forgive you if you do not try saving her. Help her with all your
power. If you still can’t save her then prioritize the letter.”
I gave him my command while placing my elbows on the desk and put my hands together.
Perhaps he didn’t expect such a strong sense of intimidation from me, Sieg’s eyes were opened in
surprise.
Then.
“I see, isn’t that a great eye you have there. Got it. Look forward to the results.”
“Thank you.”
Saying so, Sieg walks out following Sebas.
Leo will be searching for Rebecca as well but the move that will matter in this will probably be Sebas
and Sieg’s.
626
Whoever can get their hands on Rebecca will be able to decide the future of the succession war.
From now on, the night will be our main stage for a while.
The other side is prepared for a bloodbath as well.
That’s why we have to win.
“Now, I will have you exit the stage soon. Zandra.”
627
Night Battle Begin
Around the time Sebas and Sieg started to move out after we received information about Rebecca
sighting.
In the imperial capital, various factions were starting to move.
“Your Highness Zandra. Please give us your cooperation.”
The pursuers dispatched from the kidnapping organization came to the capital and asked for Zandra’s
help.
Their number is five. They are the best assassin the organization has to offer. Besides them, there are
quite a few pursuers that were dispatched in the imperial capital. The organization has done
everything to search for Rebecca.
The letter Rebecca has can deal a fatal blow to the organization. It also proves fatal to the Southern
Nobles and Zandra whose support came mainly from the south.
“Right, I would be in trouble if the relationship between the Southern Nobles and the organization
came to light. Gunther.”
“Yes, my lady.”
Gunther, an assassin who once aimed for Al’s life bows to Zandra from a distance away from her.
Behind him were assassins that Zandra recruited from all over the world. They numbered around 20.
“Use any means you can to make sure that I can get that letter.”
“As you wish. but…..I have one concern, my lady.”
“Leonard is it? You don’t have to worry about him. Leonard doesn’t have many assassins to deploy.
You only have to worry about Sebastian, the one who is acting as Arnold’s butler alone.”
“That is the case however, the one I am worried about is His Highness Gordon’s faction.”
“What about Gordon? I don’t think that muscle brain is an enemy that we would have to be cautious
about though?”
What Zandra said was right.
According to the information available, Gordon doesn’t have many men who are suitable for covert
work.
However, based on the information Gunther obtained a while ago, that impression has to be revised.
628
Actually……I have obtained information that he has started a covert unit that has been undergone
training in secret.”
“In the army?”
“Yes.”
“No matter what he does, would Gordon really be able to make a competent one?”
“I think that they might be an informal unit, my lady. It seems that the commander of that unit has
been called to the imperial capital recently as well.”
“And their goal is obviously the letter huh……..”
Zandra shuffles her legs while sitting on her chair.
While resting her cheek on her hand, she watches as the sun begins to set outside.
The imperial capital will soon be wrapped in the darkness of night and the battle will soon begin.
If she loses this battle, Zandra will suffer the most fatal blow. Her support base in the south will be
gone.
The mages from various places in the world will still continue to support Zandra but that is just on an
individual level. The succession war is not just a battle between the candidates but also their factions
and a weak faction will never be able to safeguard the throne.
As Leo is being backed by Duke Kleinert, she would lose a significant amount of her influence if she
loses Duke Kruger who is supporting her.
“So Gordon is trying to get ahead of me here huh.”
“His Highness Eric will probably be observing from the side this time as well.”
“If it’s Eric then I think he will. He will never get his hand dirty until the end. He is probably waiting for
us to exhaust each other. But this is our chance. If we can get back that letter then I don’t have to
worry about my support base anymore.”
‘More importantly, I’m more concerned about the experimental body.’
Zandra muttered in her heart. Personally, that was more important to her. For Zandra, the thing she
needs in order to win this succession war is not the military might nor her faction but her forbidden
arts.
If she can complete her research on the forbidden art then her faction will no longer be necessary.
There would be no one who would be able to defy Zandra.
Everyone will naturally kneel down to her. That’s Zandra’s ideal world.
629
“Gunther. For the time being, search for the letter that woman is holding on. But don’t touch her yet.”
“Will that be alright, my lady?”
“It’s fine. Let Leonard and Gordon’s minions fight each other for now. We will get them once they
exhaust each other out.”
“As you wish.”
Presently there are many assassins and trackers that the organization recruited in the imperial
capital.
If she mobilizes them all then she should be able to win through brute force but Zandra doesn’t want
to drop the number of her assassins any lower.
That’s why she gave such an instruction and Gunther isn’t opposed to it as well.
In the first place, she never thought that Rebecca would easily be found since she had eluded the
pursuit of the organization so far and managed to enter the capital.
“Alright, go. If it turns out to be a fight then I don’t mind no matter who you have to kill.”
“Understood. Move out.”
Saying so, Gunther disappeared together with the assassins behind him.
The pursuers the organization sent also disappeared before she noticed as well.
Left alone in the empty room, Zandra smiles.
“If I can’t get my hand on that letter……it seems I will have to abandon Oji-sama after all. But it can’t be
helped right? It’s for the sake of making me an empress after all.”
Zandra muttered so with a smile of madness.
“Oi Oi, what kind of situation is this?”
Sieg who went out together with Sebas muttered as he felt many presences moving around while lying
prone on top of a roof.
The time is already midnight. It was obviously strange that this number of people would be so active.
“That must be the assassins under Her Highness Zandra.”
“All of them?”
630
“They probably have the assassins in training and the pursuer that were dispatched after Rebecca-
dono as well. They have a common point of contact in the south so it wouldn’t be weird if they have a
cooperative relationship.”
“You say that but we only have the two of us on our side you know?”
“This is not a war so they won’t be able to gain superiority with just numbers. Sieg and I should suffice
to deal with them.”
“You said it……..”
Sieg exhales and looks around.
It was a daunting task to search for Rebecca when even their enemies who have spread out all over
the place couldn’t find her.
“But…for this many pursuers to gather, it seems she really arrived safely at the capital huh?”
“She might have a cooperator. If that’s the case then we need to move around cautiously as well.”
“It would be troubling if she thought of us as an enemy after all. Anyway, let’s find out where she is
first huh.”
Saying so, Sieg stood up and stepped forward.
However, a strong gust blew at that exact timing.
It wouldn’t be a problem for a human but the wind pushed Sieg’s body off balance.
“Ah.”
Sieg leaked a small voice and slid off the roof.
“ ! ! ? ?”
Sieg let out a voiceless scream while managing to avoid falling by grabbing on to a part of the house
that protruded out with his hand.
“Fuu……that was dangerous.”
“Are you okay?”
“Yeah, I’m f……….shit!?”
Besides Sieg.
The bowl that was placed on the protruding part of the house was rocking.
It then gets pulled down by gravity and falls downward.
631
It then cracked and made a loud noise.
“……..”
“……..”
Sebas and Sieg instinctively gaze silently at the broken bowl.
While they were doing that, the presence gathered all around them.
“It’s that right. It’s the wind’s fault. Yep, totally the wind’s fault here.”
“Agreed.”
Saying so, the two sharpened their minds and prepared their weapons.
Sebas takes out his dagger while Sieg transforms Ruin into a spear and climbs up to the roof.
Moments after the two finished preparing, three men jumped over the roof.
However, the three of them fell down with Sebas’s daggers pierced between their eyebrows.
“Good job.”
“They are still coming.”
More men climb up to the roof but this time Sieg swings Ruin. He knocks one down and slashes up
another’s throat. He then jumps on another roof and approaches the last one left.
“A bear!?”
“Correct.”
Saying so, Sieg pierced the man’s face.
The man had no time to scream and died. His body slipped off the roof.
“Sorry. A bear at night is scary you know.”
“That was a splendid spear technique. To think that you would be able to exhibit so much power with
that kind of body.”
“You too, despite being an old man, aren’t you quite active as well?”
“I’m glad to hear that. But this number is still too many.”
“Right. Let’s go with Plan B.”
“Plan B?”
632
Sebas who never heard of such a thing muttered puzzlingly but Sieg simply climbed up on Sebas’s
back.
As he grabbed Sebas’s shoulders, he shamelessly said.
“You carry me and run away.”
“You are being too harsh on this old man.”
“Don’t say that. I will give you a shoulder massage later.”
“Hahaha, I will be troubling you then.”
Laughing so, Sebas escaped from the scene with all his might.
After that, there was no noticeable movement in the capital.
No faction was able to obtain any useful information on the first night of the battle.
That fact alerted all factions.
Is Rebecca very good at hiding, or is she cooperating with some skilled person?
Either way, it became clear that the one who is holding on to that letter is not some straightlaced
person either.
633
SPT Chapter 97
Two thanks today!! First is Victor Diaz for becoming my new patron and TAP for the delicious coffees!!
Seeing the Coffee goal (Coffee Appreciation Week incoming) almost filled gave me anxiety though.
*Sweats profusely*
-Mr.Graverobber
An Excellent Strategist
“There are so many of them. If it wasn’t for your help then I would already be caught by now. Thank
you, Sonia.”
Rebecca, who was looking out at the capital from the window of her inn, called out to Sonia when she
entered her room.
Hearing her, Sonia takes off her hood and smiles.
“No, don’t worry about it. We got to stick together when we are in trouble right. I have a business in
the capital myself as well.”
The appearance of Sonia who took off her hood was beautiful.
Her skin is snow-white, her light purple hair is trimmed at the shoulders. Her reddish-purple eyes also
give off a mysterious light.
Sonia’s ears were long however, they were not as long as an elf’s.
Half-elf.
Neither an elf or a human. It is said that they are an incomplete existence and are quite despised
outside the Empire.
Sonia is one of such half-elves but her cheerful smile doesn’t even give off a speck of such feeling.
“Since they saw Rebecca at the outer layer around noon, they will probably be looking around there
for a while. It will buy us some time but this surely won’t serve as a permanent solution.”
“Right…..I have to hurry and get to the castle.”
“You were entrusted with a letter from your lord right?”
“That’s right. I have to get it to His Majesty…….so that my lord’s death was not in vain…….”
634
Rebecca sadly looks down.
On her way to the imperial capital, she heard about what happened in the South.
The Demon appeared and Bassau turned into a battlefield with Leo, Lizelotte and the adventurers
solved the incident.
Hearing the news, Rebecca gave up on Dennis’s survival.
A battle between humans aside, she couldn’t believe that Dennis would survive a battle where
Demons were involved.
Still, Rebecca never stopped moving. It was easy to be drowned in sorrow and give up but then she
will not be able to find the meaning of Dennis’s death if she stops now.
“I will deliver this letter to His Majesty and expose all the wrongdoings of the Southern Nobles. My
Lord was just threatened so he had to take a part in it……..even so, he tried to do the right thing at the
end. If people don’t know that, my lord’s honor will be tainted.”
“You really like him huh. Your lord.”
Rebecca silently nodded to Sonia’s question.
She thought of him as her own father. She became a knight because she wanted to do something for
Dennis.
However, in the end, she couldn’t even die together with him.
“I……I will surely clear the regret of my lord. Then I will take my revenge on the Southern Nobles who
threatened and cornered him.”
“……I won’t say anything if that’s what Rebecca wants to do but right now you should focus more on
how to get to the castle safely okay.”
Saying so, Sonia turns her eyes outside.
Assassins are lurking around in the capital that is shrouded in darkness.
The most important political struggle of the Empire, the succession war. Rebecca’s letter which had a
direct connection to it was something that every faction desired.
Up to now, she was able to fend off the pursuers by cooperating with Rebecca but that is no longer the
case in the imperial capital.
“We need some kind of strategy. By the way, is there a prince that you can trust?”
“I don’t know much details about him but, I heard that Prince Leonard is a man of character.”
635
“The rumored Hero Prince right. But I don’t think that we would be able to easily get in direct contact
with him though. He’s the inspector that was dispatched to the South so he is the prince that Rebecca
will most likely be trying to contact, that being the case your pursuers should be on alert around him.
If you approach him, you might get found out immediately.”
Sonia said as she analyzed the situation.
She needs to catch up on the events of the succession war as much as possible. That is something
necessary for Sonia.
Which camp is connected to which Duke and what kind of movement they are having, thinking about
all that, Sonia exhaled.
“For the time being, we have no choice but to run. Prince Leonard should currently be out looking for
Rebecca as well.”
“I hope so……..”
“There are many factions moving around right now so there is no doubt that he is also looking for you.
The problem would be how he is doing it and how much men did he mobilize. Right now, the capital is
crawling with assassins. If you get discovered by them, they might kill you immediately you know.”
“The question is whether he has enough power to protect us huh.”
“That’s right. For now, to find out all of that we need to run away for a few more days. At worst, I have
a hand to play but it would be something that Rebecca would certainly want to avoid, I don’t want to
do it.”
Rebecca tilts her head at Sonia’s words.
She met Sonia on her way to the imperial capital. There are many mysteries about her but she has
been helping her out so far.
She has been supporting Rebecca with her magic and came up with a way to elude her pursuers and
entered the imperial capital. It was unbelievable for her that she would find Sonia’s plan to be
disadvantageous toward her.
Rebecca tried to open her mouth to ask her about it but Sonia slightly smiled and cut off the topic.
“Let’s sleep for the time being. Which one of us should be the first lookout?”
“Eh? Ah, then, I will do it first.”
“Alright. Then I will leave it to you.”
Saying so, Sonia lay down on her bed and closed her eyes.
The ability to go to sleep immediately is a skill required by both military personnel and adventurer.
636
However, Rebecca didn’t think that Sonia was either. Still, there were many of her remarks that made
her think that she is familiar with tactics and strategies so Rebecca couldn’t grasp Sonia’s identity.
But there is no doubt that she is her ally.
“I trust you.”
Rebecca said that and began scanning the surrounding area.
“Prince———-! Prince Arnold!”
“Nn? Ah, sorry.”
Al apologizes as he was spacing out.
In front of Al is Earl Langheim, who has been gathering the nobles who want to support Leo inside the
Imperial Capital.
He is still in his early thirties so he is still quite young. He is someone who likes Leo’s personality and
chose to support Leo together with General Dominique.
His appearance is that of a glasses-wearing noble. Perhaps he has undergone some training as he
looks more fearless compared to other nobles. Al’s evaluation of him is that he is not a bad person nor
an incompetent. The only defect he has is that he can sometimes be inflexible.
“Seriously, please pay attention. Prince Leonard is out searching for Rebecca you know? If you have
time to take a nap then please properly listen to the report.”
“Sorry, sorry.”
Al wryly smiles at Earl Langheim who is having an unpleasant expression on his face while rubbing his
eyes to wipe away his sleepiness.
It has been three days since they started looking for Rebbecca. None of the factions were able to locate
her.
The reason for that is clear. The information of her sightings that were coming in from here and there
was clearly strange.
Since many people were gathered to look for her, the battles between them are more common than
progress in her search.
In the end, it didn’t become a search for her at all.
The sporadic report of her sighting is probably a decoy as well. Al read that it was an attempt from her
side so that no one can accurately locate her.
637
To combat that, Al had been giving his instructions to Sebas and Sieg all night without any sleep.
Because of that, he’s currently short on sleep.
“Baron Borman, who we had been trying to lure into our faction doesn’t look like he will come over to
us easily. He was someone originally being moved with a huge sum of money from Prince Gordon so I
think that he wouldn’t move unless we can present a larger amount to him.”
“Yeah.”
“Haa…..is that all?”
The clear disappointment was reflected through Earl Langheim’s eyes as he sighed.
Al muttered that he shouldn’t have brought this up to him from the start. Al had no right to make any
decisions so it was strange for him to approach him with this.
Still, Earl Langheim asked him such a question.
“Prince Arnold. Let me ask you a question.”
“What?”
“How do you think we should get Baron Borman to our side? Please tell me what you think.”
Just what I think huh, Al murmured in his mind.
There was clear irritability in the eyes of Earl Langheim. Al knew those eyes well.
They were the eyes of a person who couldn’t contain his irritation and tries to let it out. And the target
of that outlet is usually Al.
No matter what I say, he will just shoot it down so that he can let out his irritation anyway.
Al let out a sigh in his heart. The troublesome thing is that the person himself doesn’t do it
consciously.
“Can’t we just add more money?”
“Haa….please use your head a little bit.”
After a fed-up sigh, Earl Langheim enters preaching mode.
Thinking that it was a hassle, Al only pretended to listen to him.
“Listen, please. There is a difference in financial power between us and Prince Gordon. Because the
number of companies that back us is different, we can not win against him with just a simple money
game. Please at least understand that. You are the twin brother of Prince Leonard so when Prince
Leonard is absent, even if temporarily, you will be the head of our faction you know.”
638
“Sorry, sorry. I will be more careful.”
“Do you really understand……..you don’t have enough sleep because you were just playing around all
night anyway right? Please stop living that kind of life and help your brother out more already.”
Saying so, Earl Langheim bows and head out of the room.
However, as soon as he left the room, Earl Langheim suddenly tripped over and fell.
But there was nothing there that he would trip on.
There was a question mark floating on the Earl’s head as he irritatingly got up and walked off.
“Sieg. Stop with the prank.”
Al turns his eyes toward Sieg who was entering the room.
Sieg climbs on the desk and tells Al that the Earl wasn’t hurt.
“Don’t say that. I could hear his complaint even from outside you know? Let me at least do this much
alright?”
Using the time when Earl Langheim left the room, Sieg entered. He then tripped over Earl Langheim
on a whim.
‘Seriously’
Al muttered.
“He’s from our faction so there shouldn’t be much problem if he sees you but don’t make yourself
stand out too much alright.”
“Yeah, yeah, I will be careful. So? Have you thought about our next move yet?”
“I will do that once I see today’s sighting report. There’s no doubt that Rebecca is nowhere near those
locations so I will backwardly calculate it from there.”
“That’s hard to do right. Your younger brother is praised simply because he took along his
subordinates and foolishly searched around the capital straightforwardly while you are here racking
your brain out and still got made fun of. Quite a hardship you are in isn’t it.”
“Leo’s search is also necessary. As long as we have no clue where she is, his search will be useful.
Moreover, if Leo is out there looking for her personally, Rebecca will know where to find him in case
she wants to make contact with us as well.”
Leo is no idiot.
He knows well how to effectively move himself.
And it’s my job to move behind the scene. Thinking so, Al freshens up.
639
“We have to find her soon. It’s meaningless to keep this night battle up after all.”
“Yeah, I will leave it to you. The girl you’re looking for seems to be good at hide-and-seek as well. If
you can narrow down the search area for us then we will definitely find her for you.”
Nodding to Sieg’s words, Al takes out the map of the imperial capital from his desk.
Marked on them were all the Rebecca sighting reports so far. They are spreading in a disorderly
fashion so that the pattern can not be read.
“Rebecca seems to have an excellent strategist by her side but to think that she can toy with us to this
extent huh.”
While thinking about how troublesome it is, Al looked at the place where Rebecca was likely to hide in.
TLN: Yep, new character. I like her a lot because of the upcoming chapters though.
640
SPT Chapter 98
Firstly, thanks for the coffee Erik…….now that the goal was reached, coffee appreciation week starts
today.
Now for the new patrons, thank you for supporting my monthly crave of grilled meat Willie Jackson,
Drefly13, and Wacko.
Don’t forget to leave the suggestion for the new series selection though.
-Mr.Graverobber
Encounter of the Two
“No luck this time either.”
“I see…….”
“My deepest apologies.”
Sieg and Sebas gave their report after they came back at dawn.
It wasn’t their fault. Last night, they searched the place I pointed out. I found a blank area after
calculating back the sighting information and ordered them to search it but it seems that the other
side was still one step ahead of us.
“So we are inferior to them in a battle of brains huh.”
“As long as they can be the one who makes the first move, we are at a disadvantage after all.”
Sebas said that to comfort me but I can’t help but get depressed with all the failures piling up.
If we haven’t found her then it means that our enemies haven’t found her yet either. That’s the only
saving grace here but it is also bad news at the same time.
Even if the Imperial Capital is wide, it still has its limit. No matter how well she can escape, she will
eventually get cornered. Before that happens, it would be great if Rebecca chooses to contact Leo but
the lack of contact so far means that she can’t get close to him.
“Hmm……should I terminate the surveillance around Leo?”
“Nah, that’s not realistic. We don’t know where she might be lurking and if there’s a problem your
brother’s movement would be hindered in the first place right, Kid?”
“Exactly. As long as we have difficulty eliminating the other surveillance around him, it’s not a good
plan for us to pull ours out.”
I nodded at their opinions.
641
If he gets caught up in some conflict in the city, depending on how he handles it, Father might step in.
A lot has been happening in the Empire lately and Leo is having great expectations placed on him as
the Hero Prince. If something were to happen to him then the Empire will definitely be shaken.
“Can’t help it then. We have to continue as we are.”
“That seems to be the only way.”
“…….Sebas. I am going out. I will leave processing the information to you.”
“Do you need an escort?”
“No. I want to clear my head.”
“You want to clear your head by strolling in the city? You really are a strange prince alright.”
Hearing Sieg, Sebas smiles.
This is something like a habit to me. Strolling the city like a commoner. I can get to know how people
live their lives and a break from all the stiff atmosphere refreshes me.
“It’s troubling that you will be heading out without an escort though.”
“Is it really okay? Your brother is one of the candidates for the throne right now right?”
“Nobody would bother to target the Dull Prince. For now, there’s no one foolish enough to target me
either. Leo is still investigating the Southern Nobles. If someone targets me it will be considered as an
obstruction to his work. If that’s the case then Father will be more eager to investigate the Southern
matter and those who targeted me will be the ones in trouble instead.”
“Well, alright I guess. Be careful okay?”
Sieg doesn’t know that I’m Silver.
Although he may have acknowledged me, in terms of fighting power, he still considers me as
powerless so his worry about my well-being is sincere.
Really, Sieg is truly a pleasant man to have around huh.
“I will keep your feelings in mind.”
Saying so, I dismiss them and go out.
————————
“Aunty, how much is this?”
“That one? It’s two imperial red copper coins.”
642
“Two red copper coins? Isn’t it a bit too expensive?”
I point at the red fruit and ask. I remembered that it only costs one coin before.
The imperial coin is the currency used throughout the Empire and is the most circulated currency on
the entire continent.
The least valuable one is the Imperial Copper Coin. Red Copper Coin is ten times more valuable than
Copper Coin and Silver Coin ten times more valuable than Red Copper Coin and so on.
From the lowest to highest are Copper Coins, Red Copper Coins, Silver Coins, White Silver Coins, Gold
Coins, Platinum Coins, and Rainbow Coins.
There are not many Platinum Coins and Rainbow Coins circulating around. The reason is that it can
only be used for large transactions between merchants or nations.
In general, the monthly income of the people in the Imperial Capital is around 7 to 8 silver coins. At
most, the common coins that are circulating among the common citizens are gold coins.
“Sorry. There are troubles happening here and there a lot lately right? The goods circulation is stalled
because of that.”
“Is that so. I see. I will take two of these then.”
“Here you go. That will be four coins.”
I took out four red copper coins from my purse that I hung around my waist and handed them to her.
Then I received two fruits from her and kept strolling around the city while eating them.
The city is lively. However, goods prices are rising because of the major incidents like the monster
outbreak and the Southern incident.
“The cause is the succession war huh.”
I exhale and murmur.
It’s not something for someone who is actively participating in the succession war like me can start
complaining about. Moreover, I don’t have to work in order to live. This is just ridiculous.
The people’s monthly income is around 7 to 8 silver coins but a prince has at least 3 gold coins
provided to him each month as a subsidiary. A normal person can’t have that amount even if they save
their whole income up for three months.
For a prince, the more you do, the more you earn and if you get yourself a position, you can get even
more salary from it.
The gold coins I gave Lynfia were ten years’ worth of such a subsidiary. The total worth is around
three rainbow coins. That much money was necessary to issue a raid quest. It costs around the same
643
amount of money to nominate an SS-rank adventurer for a request. That was the reason for Lynfia’s
gratitude.
Silver is fairly cooperative to the guild among the SS-rank adventurers. With me accepting the request
directly from the guild, there was no need for the nomination fee.
The reason I do that is because I felt strange to accept such a nomination fee despite the fact that I am
already receiving a large amount of subsidiary as a prince.
“I’m still a hypocrite for not doing it for free though……”
While muttering such a thing, I saw a girl with a troubled expression at a stall a little ahead. Her light
purple hair was eye-catching but what stood out to me more was a certain characteristic.
The girl’s ears were slightly pointed, the characteristic of a half-elf. Since her clothes have a hood, she
probably normally hides it with that.
However, it seems that she was found out by the shopkeeper and is in an argument with him.
“You said that it was only two silver coins earlier!”
“Shut up! It’s a different story for a half-elf! If you want it then pay me two white silver coins!”
The girl’s bag is full of foodstuff so she is probably out to buy groceries today.
It seems that her hood was lowered at the checkout.
The Empire is a country that accepts many demihumans in. Still, that doesn’t mean that there is no
discrimination here. I heard that it is considered lucky for an immigrant to be able to find a merchant
who is willing to sell them their wares. Among them, it seems that the half-elves can’t even do that.
They are that hated.
Neither a human nor an elf, with the exclusive elves hating humans in the first place, they hate the
half-elves even more for their mixed blood.
Humans hold the half-elves in disdain because they are different from them and they tend to avoid the
Half-elves who are similar to the Elves.
To make the matter more troublesome, it seems that the merchant is not originally from the Empire
himself. He probably came in from somewhere else.
I get that from the people’s whispering around me.
“And here I am trying to refresh myself……..”
There are many people who feel sorry for her but no one speaks up.
It’s troublesome so they’re just going to pretend not to see it huh.
644
After a little pondering, the girl gave up and sighs. She then handed the bag containing the foodstuff
back to the shopkeeper.
“Wait a minute.”
It was only on a whim.
I simply don’t like what I see and it would feel bad to leave her alone.
I am lacking sleep so it was easy for me to do it.
I call out to the shopkeeper and the girl.
Then, I grabbed the bag from the shopkeeper and put two white silver coins in his hand.
“Is that enough?”
“Eh? Ah, Uh……..”
“How much do you want? Do you want at least a gold coin to be more amicable?”
“Wh, What! Where did you come from! This is my problem alright!”
“This is the Empire. We accept all demihumans.”
“That got nothing to do with this! Half-elves are neither demihumans or humans anyway!”
“Leave it at that. I already paid. We will be leaving now alright?”
“No! If you really want it then give me a gold coin!”
The shopkeep shows a disgusting smile.
He probably wants to keep milking me because he thought that I am a good person huh.
Idiotic.
The strong prey on the weak, it would be clear for the people with a sense of justice that he is trying to
take advantage of me.
With a show of clear high-handedness, voices are rising around us but the shopkeeper opens his
mouth again.
“Quiet down all of you! The food circulation to your empire is currently stagnant! I went out of my way
to bring my goods here alright!? It won’t even be worth my trouble if I can’t even choose who to sell it
to!”
Saying so the shopkeeper reached his hand out for the girl’s bag.
I grabbed his hand and glared at the shopkeeper.
645
I was already irritated by the lack of sleep but this made me even more irritated.
“I won’t let you complain anymore with this much.”
Saying so, I take out the gold coin with my free hand.
The shopkeeper smiled and reached for the gold coin.
At that moment, a voice came from outside.
“Hey!? What’s going on here!?”
An officer from the city guard said as he made his way here through the crowd.
He is probably on patrol.
“No, it’s nothing, officer. I just closed a deal with him. Everything is alright.”
“Closed a deal…….?”
The patrol officer then looked at me.
His eyes opened wide as he saluted in a panic.
“Y, Your Highness Arnold!?”
“You know me?”
“Y, Yes, Your Highness! I, I am supporting His Highness Leonard after all.”
Saying so, he corrected his posture.
From the way he says it, it seems he is from Leo’s faction or somehow related to it. So it’s impossible
to pretend to be Leo here.
Leo is out in the city right now so I guess it is impossible from the start huh.
“You arrived at a good time. Let me ask you this, is it okay to raise the price of your goods just because
your customer is a half-elf?”
“T, that’s unforgivable! Our Empire accepts all races and the merchants must pledge to not bring
prejudice into their transactions to receive their permit to do business in the Imperial Capital, Your
Highness!”
“Then confiscate the permit from this guy. He already raised his price twice now. If you don’t arrest
him, Leo will be angry you know?”
“Y, Yes! As you wish!”
“W, wait a minute! I didn’t know he was a prince! Pr, Prince! Please forgive me!”
646
“That’s not the problem here. You are not being arrested because you offended me. It is because you
broke the rule. This is the Empire. Keep the gold coin. Consider it a lesson fee.”
Saying so, I grab the girl’s hand and leave.
I can’t stand out any more than this.
After walking for a while, a voice called out to me from behind.
“U, Um….hand……”
“Hm? Ah, sorry.”
Saying so, I let go of her hand.
It’s rude to hold a hand of a girl I don’t even know the name of after all huh.
When I apologized, the girl shook her head and showed me a cheerful smile.
“No, thank you for helping me. Ah, that’s wrong. Please accept my sincere gratitude, Your Highness.”
“I am traveling anonymously right now. It would be good if you can lay off that kind of stuff. What is
your name?”
Perhaps I was too frank as the girl’s eyes turned round.
Then she smiled and held out her right hand.
“Alright. My name is Sonia. Sonia Laspade. As you can see, I am a half-elf.”
“I don’t mind. I’m Arnold. You can call me Al.”
“Un! Then I will call you Al-kun okay!”
And that is how I met Sonia.
647
SPT Chapter 99
A little note, Sonia refers to herself as Boku, a slightly boyish way to say I. in other words, Gentlemen,
we got ourselves a Bokukko.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Lovely Smile
“Al-kun, are you on a patrol?”
“Well, more or less.”
After leaving that shop, I am walking the street together with Sonia.
This is because Sonia still has to continue her shopping.
Also, as to not get involved in more trouble, I asked Sonia to put on her hood and let me buy the things
she needed for her.
“More or less?”
“I’m just here to take a breather. I’m a little stuck you see.”
“That’s why you have those black circles under your eyes?”
“Well, yeah.”
I touch under my eyes.
I don’t notice it myself since I don’t look into the mirror but my face is probably pale as well. I have
been up all night lately after all.
“Are you tackling a difficult task?”
“Do I look like such a person? People around here are calling me the Dull Prince you know?”
“Dull Prince?”
“You don’t know? I’m the prince who got all his good points absorbed by his twin brother, the Dull
Prince who is the laughing stock of the imperial capital you know.”
There is no one in the Imperial Capital who doesn’t know about my reputation.
With that said, this means that she came from the outside.
Well, she doesn’t look like she lives here and she looks more like a traveler as well.
648
“I’m not too familiar with the Imperial Capital you see. But is it true that Al-kun is being talked about
that way? The city guard earlier seems pretty respectful to you though?”
“It’s because my younger brother is one of the candidates for the throne. That guy is from my
brother’s faction so he just did that for appearance sake. There’s no one who really respects me like
that.”
I look at the sky as I say that.
Except for those who I can call relatives, that is simply a fact. I did something like a royalty would
earlier but something like that was only natural. It wouldn’t be weird to think that it was bad of me to
borrow the power of the city guard either.
People would say that if I’m a royalty then I should act like one but even before that, my bad
reputation was already too big. People won’t change their impression of me just because I did some
good once in a while.
Even if the people who saw the earlier scene now have a good impression of me, it was only
temporary. It has no effect on the people’s overall impression of me.
The impression and the title of the Dull Prince will not disappear unless I have some great
achievement.
I don’t mind if it doesn’t ever disappear and I don’t have any motivation to make it disappear. It might
be easy in the past to clear it up but it has already piled up too much.
“Don’t you feel bad? Being treated like that.”
“I don’t know. To be honest, I am already used to it.”
“I see……so we are the same huh.”
Sonia said that and lightly touched her ear.
It is the semi-long ear, the symbol of a half-elf.
Sonia must have been persecuted a lot because of it. There’s no way that her circumstance is the same
as mine.
Mine is the result of my actions while Sonia was born with it.
“We are not the same. If you are already used to it then you are definitely stronger than me. I can’t
possibly stand it. No matter what I do, I am still a prince after all…..I have been protected by my blood
since I was born.”
“Somehow……hearing you say it like that it was like you hate being a prince though?”
“I hate it. Both this position and myself who accept it. If I can give it away then I would love to. I know
that I am being spoiled for thinking like that. That’s why I hate myself more and more.”
649
My desire to live however I want came from that.
As a normal person admiring something special. I yearn for that sense of normalcy.
How good would it be if I can start a simple family in a simple house rather than a castle.
I want to live my days normally like the people here. But I am not allowed to do that. Even if I abandon
my position as a prince, my bloodline will never let me go. My father will probably mercilessly marry
me into some noble house.
The blood of the imperial family is powerful. Many excellent people are born from it. It has birthed
people with strong magic power like me and Zandra, people who are excellent in swordsmanship and
martial arts like Lize-aneue and Gordon, and even a versatile guy like Leo.
It is the result of us continuing to take in excellent blood for generations. Now, the blood of the
imperial family is too strong to simply let go.
“Is that so. Then we are the same. I hate my birth too you know. I don’t need the elf blood in me. I just
want to live like a human. Still, that is not something that is allowed to me.”
“……..it seems we really are similar in a strange place huh.”
“Seems so. Well, I have already accepted things as they are. It was tough when I was a kid but I was
able to endure it because there were gentle people around me. they were kind people like Al-kun you
know…………when I go out I would still be persecuted though.”
Saying so, Sonia smiles.
It was a cheerful and lovely smile. My lack of sleep and negative thoughts turned brighter just by
seeing it.
To think that I would get cheered up by the smile of a girl I just met today.
“Thank you. I am a little cheered up now.”
“I didn’t do anything though?”
“Your smile was wonderful.”
When I told her my honest feeling, Sonia’s face turned red.
Seeing her like that I laughed at her and Sonia frowned at me.
“Y, you were teasing me right…….”
“I’m not. You really did make me feel like giving it my all again.”
“Seriously……do you always say that to a girl?”
650
“It depends on my mood.”
“Al-kun really has a talent as a womanizer huh……”
“Well, thank you.”
I continue walking while laughing.
Talking with Sonia is fun. A part of the reason for that would be that Sonia is more sensitive to the
sense of distance between people.
She often observes the other party and right now she knows that I am in a good mood. Perhaps she
did that unconsciously.
It is sad thinking that the environment she lives in made her do that but right now I am grateful for it.
It’s great to hold a conversation where the other party doesn’t get irritated all the time.
“By the way, I haven’t asked you why you don’t have enough sleep yet right. What are you playing so
late at night?”
“Play?”
“Am I wrong? It wasn’t work right?”
“Yeah, right. It is kind of a play I guess. I was doing something like a quiz you see. I couldn’t solve it so I
don’t have enough sleep lately.”
“Because you are frustrated?”
“Do I look frustrated?”
“You are not right now but when I first met you at the store you looked very frustrated you know.”
“Well, a part of that is because of that shopkeeper though.”
But it wasn’t just because of that.
I was certainly frustrated.
At myself who can’t arrive at the answer in this crucial stage.
“The person who gave you that quiz must be quite terrible. Troubling Al-kun like that.”
“No, I don’t think so. I am only frustrated at myself. Well, I don’t really know but……..I think the answer
is somewhere nearby but I can’t reach it at all. I think that I must have missed something and if I can
find it I will be able to find the answer right away but I don’t have an opportunity to do that yet. That’s
why it’s even more frustrating for me to not be able to figure that out you see.”
651
“Do the people around you know the answer?”
“Probably not. The guy who gave me that quiz was amazing. To be honest, I am pretty confident with
my brain but now my confidence is shattered. The answer seems to be near and yet it is far away.
That’s why I want to refresh myself and come out here.”
“I see. Al-kun really is diligent huh. If it’s me, if I know that I can’t do it then I would probably give up
already you know.”
Sonia said with a cheerful smile.
Well, she looks like a person who would say that.
But this case is different.
Rebecca and the letters she has will greatly affect the development in the future. The person who
obtains it first will be able to decide how the situation will flow from now on.
No matter what, defeat is not allowed in this battle.
While I was thinking so, Sonia points at a stall.
She probably wants me to buy something from that stall.
We continue shopping while having a casual conversation with Sonia pointing out the things she
wants with her finger.
“Hey bro, you on a date?”
“Do we look like that?”
“Yeah. consider this service from a middle-aged man. Do enjoy it alright.”
After that exchange, the shopkeeper guy gave me a bottle of juice as a service.
Sonia, who didn’t think that she would get mistaken for my lover, panics and tries to deny it while
waving her hand but the shopkeeper only waves his hand in return.
“Ahh, he was so pushy…..and I already told him that we are not a lover too.”
“Well, it was a special service so just accept it.”
“It’s because Al-kun didn’t deny him in the first place alright! Wasn’t it like we were tricking him!”
“Don’t get angry now. it’s delicious you know.”
“Mou………”
The juice is much diluted than the one I drank at the castle.
652
Still, it tasted many times better. Perhaps it tastes better because I came out to buy it myself rather
than something that was served to me.
“Yeah. it’s so delicious.”
Sonia who was complaining earlier also drank the juice in a good mood.
I must thank that shopkeeper later.
“By the way, what does Al-kun think about your brother?”
“My brother? You want to know what I think of him?”
“You told me that he got all your good points so your little brother must be really excellent right?”
“Yeah, he solved the Southern incident and he is famous among the people here as the Hero Prince
right now.”
“…….Never mind. I know what you think of him just from your expression.”
“Nn? What do you mean?”
“I was thinking about asking you whether you like or dislike him but the answer already shows on
your face. When I mentioned your brother, you looked really proud, you know.”
Hearing Sonia, I look down.
Did I make that kind of face? I never noticed that.
Certainly, I am proud of Leo as my younger brother. But I have never heard anyone say that to me
before.
After all, it must have been because of what happened in the South. That case was a big deal. It was
when Leo declared himself to be the next emperor to me as well.
Yeah, I really am proud of him.
“That’s right. I admit. I don’t know anyone who is as kind and strong as he is.”
“Is that so…….then maybe he is trustworthy.”
Sonia muttered and took the bag I was holding from the side. She then turned around and headed
toward the back alley.
Seeing her like that I followed after her in a hurry but Sonia suddenly put the bag on the ground.
Then she suddenly hugged me.
“Wai!? What are you doing!?”
653
“Twelve o’clock today. I will take Rebecca to the clock tower that can be seen from the south gate.
Bring Prince Leonard there.”
“!?”
I was surprised and my eyes were wide opened.
When was it that I was this surprised.
After Sonia whispered that into my ear, she gently separated from me and pick up her bag.
“So, Sonia! You are!?”
“I believe in you Al-kun. I will give you 5 minutes. Only five minutes from twelve o’clock alright? If you
can’t make it in time I will be forced to use my hidden hand…….please don’t make me use it okay.”
After she says that, Sonia runs away.
I stretched my hand out to her but it only passed through air.
My hand couldn’t catch Sonia.
Then I slowly calm myself down. There is only one person who would mention Rebecca like that.
“Sonia is Rebecca’s strategist……?”
I stare at the direction Sonia left.
I expected Sonia to casually walk back to me but that didn’t happen.
It was not a joke someone as cheerful as her would make.
I should have forcefully stopped her but I was taken by surprise so I didn’t think of that.
“….no choice but to go huh.”
There’s no clue to follow anyway.
I can only trust in Sonia and go.
I decided so and hurried back to the castle.
654
Wait for Vol.4 and then we will have a proper meme
655
SPT Chapter 100
it’s the hundredth chapter. Hooray?
Another special thanks to Jasper Yu for becoming my patron.
now my gacha effort will be stronger than ever hehehe
-Mr.Graverobber
Sonia’s Identity
“How high is the possibility that this is a trap?”
“More than enough.”
I reply to Sieg’s question.”
Upon hearing my answer, Seig and Sebas frowned but Leo who was called here by me did not.
“That girl……does Nii-san think that we can trust her?”
“As an individual, yeah.”
No matter how much you trust someone, you might become an enemy or an ally with that person
depending on yours and their position.
Even Jurgen had a cooperative relationship with Eric just until recently. No matter how good a person
is, if he is in a different faction, he will become your enemy.
However, Sonia is Rebecca’s ally. I didn’t feel any lie from her and there is no merit for her to lie to me.
Luring me and Leo out will not benefit any faction. They can’t attack us and even if they try doing
anything to Leo right now, they will definitely receive Father’s wrath.
With that line of thinking, I have no doubt that Sonia is Rebecca’s ally.
“She is definitely Rebecca’s ally. That being the case, it isn’t strange for her to decide to entrust
Rebecca to us. There’s a limit on how long they can keep escaping and the only one who would
warmly welcome her is us after all.”
“Maybe her contact with Nii-san was intentional?”
“It was probably a coincidence. Perhaps the same goes for when she came to trust me.”
Still, I don’t fully understand Sonia’s intention.
656
To understand her, we have no choice but to meet her at the appointed location.
“Since we can’t pinpoint their location from the sighting information today, we have no choice but to
go.”
I look at the map on the desk.
The sightings from the last few days have been marked on it. It seems to be disorderly at first glance
but when I pay close attention I feel that there is some kind of hints or rules to it.
But I don’t know what it is. The only clear cut clue we have now is only Sonia’s words so we can only
trust her for now.
“Alright, I will go with you.”
“If it’s already decided then let’s move out shall we.”
“You siblings really know no fear huh? You two are under surveillance you know. If you two go out
together then they will definitely try to get in the way right?”
“I know that but we can not accomplish anything unless we go.”
Zandra and the pursuers from the organization are desperately looking for Rebecca.
There’s no doubt that they are monitoring our movement as well. If we go out, it’s safe to say that they
will try to stop us.
Right now, only Sieg and Sebas can fight against the assassins in the night battle. Even if we recklessly
bring soldiers with us, it will only increase the body count.
There’s no doubt that this is dangerous but this moment is crucial. There’s a big difference between
getting Rebecca here and letting her slip through our hand.
Sonia said that she will be forced to use her secret plan if we don’t go. I don’t know what that plan is
but I don’t want her to use it. If we don’t go, the trust that we finally earned from Sonia will be wasted
too.
“There won’t be an ambush. We already know the location and we are on alert as well. We have to
head out at the very last moment possible to make sure of that. That way they can’t read our route and
they can’t possibly wait for us outside at all times as well.”
“There is a possibility that we won’t make it in time you know? Shouldn’t we leave early in case of
that?”
“That’s a good idea if you only consider that it will only be us. But if we leave early, our enemies might
notice our movement. We are like a big landmark for them after all. At worst, if we are late, Rebecca
will go into hiding again, that’s a more preferable outcome. We have to make our trip to the clock
tower as short as possible.”
657
“Understood. Then let’s get ready.”
“Yeah, can I ask you two to be our escorts?”
Saying so, I and Leo started to move.
Sieg and Sebas let out a sigh at the same time and follow after us.
—————————————-
“Tsk!”
I clicked my tongue as I ran.
We are almost at the clock tower but there are more enemies than expected. Why are there so many of
them?
Sieg and Sebas are defeating the enemies while Leo is protecting me but we don’t have much time left.
It is already past noon. We only have a few minutes.
We can only run and hope we make it.
Still, the enemies keep appearing. Their reinforcements keep coming at us so we have to fend them off
each time.
“Nii-san! Go on ahead!”
“I was told to bring you there you know!?”
“Keep them there for me!”
Saying so, Leo pushes my back. At the same time, an assassin attacks Leo but he was able to pull out
his sword to defend himself.
With Sebas and Sieg, he should be okay.
I was a little worried but I left them and headed toward the clock tower.
When I arrived near the tower, 12:05 had already passed.
“Haa Haa…..”
While catching my breath, I look around.
Surely, they are not waiting at the top of the tower, right?
While I was thinking so, Sonia appeared from the shadows.
“Sonia……!”
658
“You are finally here.”
Saying so, a girl with orangish-brown hair appears from behind her.
She looks similar to the portrait so she is probably Rebecca.
While looking at me suspiciously, Rebecca asks Sonia.
“This person is Prince Arnold?”
“Un. you are not here alone right?”
“Leo is stalling the pursuers. He will be here soon so wait a bit.”
“I want to do that but we no longer have time.”
Saying so, Sonia approaches me.
She then looked me in the eyes.
Her magenta(Reddish-purple) eyes keep staring at me as if she wants to look into my heart.
Eventually, Sonia smiles and looks away.
“It doesn’t seem to be an ambush huh. Al-kun really is kind.”
“If I deploy the troops in advance, your location might be exposed to the other factions. I can’t make
you bear that risk.”
Hearing my explanation, Sonia repeatedly nods.
Rebecca seems to be on alert but it should be fine once Leo comes. Getting people to trust his is Leo’s
specialty after all.
If we can earn Rebecca’s trust here, it will be our victory.
I thought.
At that moment, Sonia said something that made my spine froze over.
“You haven’t won yet……..thinking that the victory is already in your hand is bad you know. Al-kun.”
“What……?”
Saying so, Sonia pushed Rebecca’s back and her body stumbled toward me.
I hurriedly caught Rebecca. It seems that Rebecca was also surprised at Sonia’s sudden action.
“Sonia!? What are you doing!?”
659
“Sorry. For Rebecca’s safety, this is the only way. Al-kun……you ran out of time. I have to use my
hidden plan now.”
The moment she said that, men dressed in black uniforms silently appeared.
To add to the surprise, they are all equipped with the state-of-the-art crossbow that had just been
adopted into the army recently.
These guys are…….
“The covert unit under Gordon huh………”
“Un, that’s right. Major, don’t move your men. I will handle the negotiation.”
“……..Understood.”
The leader-like man who Sonia called Major raised his hand and the other men in black took a
distance away from me and Rebecca.
Sonia then takes out a letter.
Seeing that, Rebecca hurriedly took out a letter from her pocket.
They look exactly the same.
“That’s one is a fake, Rebecca.”
“No way…….you betrayed me!?”
“It’s not betrayal. I originally belong to this side from the start. I actually wanted to hand you over to
Prince Leonard before the Major arrived, of course, along with the letter as well. But since he has
arrived, we need to give him something. It’s a shame……..”
Saying so, Sonia looked down.
Her expression looked really disappointed. That was probably not an act.
Perhaps Sonia tried to fulfill Rebecca’s wish to the extent that she could. She gave us those five
minutes and we couldn’t make it in time.
That’s how it is.
A little later, Sebas, Sieg, and Leo arrived.
The three who don’t know the situation are preparing for battle but I signal them to stand down with
my hand.
The other side doesn’t have any intention to attack us. In the first place, Sonia wouldn’t be stupid
enough to fight us here.
660
That being the case, the best course of action is to gain some information.
“Sonia……who are you exactly?”
“……I am Sonia Laspade. A half-elf recruited by Prince Gordon as a strategist.”
“Gordon’s strategist……?”
“Un, it’s just that I wasn’t bound by that position until now so I was acting on Rebecca’s side. But now
that the Major is here, it is a different story. I told you before right? Only five minutes. The time before
Major arrived was the last chance I gave you Al-kun.”
Sonia looks at me with a sad expression.
I have regret. I should have done this, I should have done that. I have too many regrets
However, what overwhelming me right now is this apologetic feeling.
Sonia probably didn’t want to hand Rebecca to Gordon immediately because she knows that he will
never treat her well.
Sonia cooperated with her and put Rebecca’s safety at the top of her priority. If that wasn’t the case
then she wouldn’t do something like this.
The one who called Gordon’s covert unit here is her. Since she can’t help Rebecca escape forever, it is
better to call for help. At that time she met me by chance so she used me to contact Leo. her reason is
that at the very least she wants to hand Rebecca to us.
Should I have used transfer or should I just blow them all away with magic? I can’t come up with an
answer.
The only thing I can say is that there’s nothing I can do here.
“Personally, I can give you the letter as well but………His Highness Gordon will not be satisfied with
that and Her Highness Zandra will keep on targeting you. The letter and Rebecca, if you considered the
safest choice, it would be to separate them right?”
You can take her by force but it is going to cost you, you know.
That was probably what she tried to say. And I agree with her.
The darkness of the imperial capital right now is full of Zandra’s assassins and the pursuers from the
organization. If they attack us while we are fighting here, both of us will risk collapsing together.
In that case, it is better to split the target in two and withdraw here.
If we meet up and withdraw without any incident, they will send the pursuers toward Sonia and her
unit. It will be clear to our enemies that some kind of negotiation took place here.
661
“…..what is your demand?”
“We will contact you about that in the future. I think our side will reach out to yours first. Rest
assured, I won’t do anything bad.”
Her words are not comforting at all.
Even if it doesn’t directly hurt us, it’s clear that nothing good will come out as long as Gordon is the
one who decides the flow of future development.
However, they’ve got the key. Rebecca alone won’t serve as sufficient evidence.
Now we are forced to negotiate with Gordon.
Sonia showed her ability and obtained her desired result. She managed to leave Rebecca with the
safest place possible and brought results to Gordon’s faction.
“I have been dancing on your palm huh……”
“Sorry. I thought that this is for the best…..goodbye. Al-kun. Take care of Rebecca okay……from now on
I am your enemy.”
Saying so, Sonia turns back.
She then disappeared into the darkness along with the covert unit.
Her back somehow looked sad. Still, there is nothing I can do. It will render all her effort meaningless
if I do it.
“Arnold-sama…..we should withdraw as well.”
“…….Right.”
While replying to Sebas, we also leave the place.
That day was the first crushing defeat we had after we joined the succession war.
And the strategist who orchestrated that defeat went to Gordon’s side. With the letter in Gordon’s
hand, he will be the one who will decide how things will develop from now on.
Thus, the power structure of the succession war has completely changed.
662
SPT Chapter 101
Solving the Puzzle
Morning.
I was waiting for Sebas’s return without any sleep.
I have something that I need to find out no matter what.
“You have been up all night”
“Yeah, I can’t sleep.”
After that exchange, Sebas gave me a bunch of documents.
They are confidential information of the military.
According to Rebecca’s story, Sonia rarely left her alone. It’s hard to think that she would contact
anyone.
The only exception for that is the day she met me. She did say that she might run into us when she
went out to buy the supply but considering the time I was with her, it was unlikely that she made
contact with others. She was with me almost all the time after all.
“If she didn’t contact anyone, how did she communicate with her unit.”
“There might be a special method in the army for that.”
“Right.”
While saying that, I look through the documents. Sonia was involved with Gordon. She must have
some record inside the military. The hint must be hidden in here.
After looking through them for a while, I noticed a certain document.
“This one huh……”
“Let me see. Emergency plan in case the imperial capital falls into the enemy’s hand huh.”
“It’s information that only some of the upper crust of the army know about. And that place was the
meeting point in case the imperial capital got invaded.”
What was written on the next page was a map. The circled area corresponds to the spots where
Rebecca was sighted.
Not only one or two spots, all of them concise with the plan except the last one. It was not a
coincidence.
663
The sighting areas overlapped with this. I didn’t notice it back then but the common point of all these
places is that they are suited to be an assembly point. The fact that Rebecca was witnessed at these
places was the cause of my discomfort.
“Only the last sighting report was not according to the plan huh.”
“Yeah, the supposed meeting point was……..the clock tower that is visible from the southern gate. In
case the sighting information doesn’t match with the planned assembly point, the people in the area
who know of this will gather up at the supposed place.”
“I see. So that’s the reason there were so many pursuers.”
Sebas convincingly nods.
Normally, Sebas and Sieg should be able to break through the enemy’s surveillance. I was counting on
that but there were a lot more enemies than we expected.
It was only natural. The other side was gathering all their force and headed there.
“Gordon naturally knows about this but even Zandra too huh……”
“Her Highness Zandra’s faction also has someone in the upper crust of the army. She must have gotten
the information from there.”
“Even if that’s the case it was information that wouldn’t normally come out unless she asked. In other
words, she is interested in sieging the imperial capital. At worst, she might be planning an attack on
the capital herself.”
I let out a small sigh and leaned back on my chair.
I can see the big picture now.
“Leo’s faction doesn’t have anyone in the upper crust of the army. The imperial garrison belongs to the
army but they lack the general who takes command of them. That was why such information didn’t
come to us.”
“They wouldn’t provide such information to someone who might later become their enemy after all.
Now we know that the number of our enemies is higher than we expected. But I still don’t know the
meaning of that woman’s time limit.”
That 5 minutes time limit.
At first, I thought that she couldn’t stay because Zandra’s men might have found them.
That’s why I went ahead. In case of emergency, I was thinking of using magic to elude their pursuers.
But that wasn’t the case.
664
“It was written on this. In case of a night attack from the infiltration force, it was decided that 12
o’clock would be the time they would carry out the plan. Sonia read that the covert unit would move
out at exactly 12 o’clock and probably anticipated that they would take at least five minutes to arrive.”
“She is quite thorough. She used us to buy time for her by letting us distract their pursuers. But what
would she do if we decided not to go there.”
I sigh again at Sebas’s words.
Sonia was also considering the possibility that Zandra might know the secret plan. In other words, she
knew that the meeting place might be read by them.
In that case, she has to fortify the place and defend the meeting point.
That’s why she called us out to serve as a decoy.
“……she should already consider that we might not come but she still bet on us. She did probe me for
information and got what she wanted after all.”
“It seems you have been thoroughly used weren’t you.”
I nod to Sebas. The reason Sonia went out was probably not to contact the covert unit but to look for a
decoy.
Maybe she might contact Leo if she didn’t meet me.
“Right. But……it was a risk for her to give us five minutes to reach them.”
“Yes, if the covert unit arrives behind us then they will lose both Rebecca and the letter after all.”
It was the finest bait but Sonia was probably considering handing her to us with the letter as well.
It would be good if we can make it but if we can’t she can just stick to her plan.
Sonia moved in a way that she can adapt no matter the outcome. Still, in the case of the former, Sonia
herself will fall into a dangerous position.
Despite knowing that, she called out to us. We were certainly a decoy but we are also an insurance for
Rebecca’s protection.
“So she went all-in for Rebecca huh…….”
“That was quite splendid on her part. His Highness Gordon’s troops wouldn’t be interested in
Rebecca-dono’s safety after all. They won’t kill her but they will not do anything to protect her either.
In that case, she needs to entrust Rebecca-dono to someone that will protect her. Her Highness
Zandra’s assassins and the organization will never let her live after all. Even if we didn’t make it in
time, she will probably convince them to protect her anyway.”
“…….we really got done in this time huh.”
665
“Please don’t worry about it. Our odds were unfavorable from the start. Unless you are planning to
attack the capital, you wouldn’t know about such information. We don’t have a chance of winning this
time.”
“We were defeated because of the lack of intel. There’s no excuse for that……moreover, I didn’t even
make use of my hidden hand.”
I didn’t use the power of Silver this time.
The reason is that if I use such power in a situation where there are assassins spreading out all over
the place, it will lead to an actual exposure of my secret. Within the range of my barrier is one thing
but I have no way to notice a gaze that came from beyond that.
That was why I ran without using any magic.
After that, I could steal the letter away from Sonia but I didn’t. I didn’t want to expose my secret.
But was it the right choice?
“Gordon’s aim is definitely a war. As soon as he gets the letter, he will be one step closer to it. The war
with the South, in other words, he wants to start a civil war. Considering that……..should I use my
magic back then?”
“I have told you this before. There is a huge difference between a disclosure and being exposed. His
Majesty, the nobles, the ministers, and the people around their age have seen the Mad Emperor laid
waste to the capital as a child. There is no doubt that they will have some complicated feelings about
ancient magic. However, Silver is allowed to use it because he is an ally of the Empire. Still, the story
will completely change if you add an imperial family member to that. Everyone will think that the Mad
Emperor has returned. That is why it is an information that must be published in the right place and
the right time. Recklessly revealing it would be a bad move. If you get exposed, it will lead to wild
speculation from the people and at worst you might get arrested without any trial at all.”
“I know that…….”
“If that’s the case then the answer is clear. Even if the chance of exposure was low, it was the right
choice that you didn’t use your magic back then. It is meaningless to bother yourselves with the civil
war as well. Even if we obtained the letter, the possibility that a civil war might happen still exists
after all. If you insist then there is also a possibility that you tell His Highness Leonard everything and
use transfer magic to go there together with him though.”
“I can’t do that. This is not a secret that can be kept forever. Eventually, my identity will be exposed or
I will make it public myself. At that time, the result will be different depending on whether Leo knows
about it or not. Leo must not know about it. It won’t work unless that is the case.”
It would be fine if he is good at pretending but if Father asks him, Leo will surely not be able to fool
him. And then it will be the worst-case scenario where the two of us will get punished.
666
However, if he doesn’t know about it then there will be no cause to punish him. If they are going to
punish him because he is my younger brother then the entire imperial family must be punished as
well. Father will not do such an unreasonable thing.
“Then please settle that as there was no other way. The letter didn’t go to Her Highness Zandra. This is
not the worst outcome. We should look ahead rather than regretting the past here.”
“I know. This time the letter was taken from us but there will be no next time. I will definitely
outsmart Sonia.”
“That’s the feeling. Then, please get some sleep first. What His Highness Gordon aims for is a war. He
will probably keep the letter to himself to make time for the South to make their war preparation. For
now, we still have time.”
I give Sebas a nod.
Gordon obtained the letter but the Southern Investigation is still Leo’s job. Having Leo submitting that
letter is the most effective way to do this.
If he immediately submitted the letter then the South will not have enough time to prepare. I was
impatient because the letter was taken away but it will be sometime before the South will finish their
preparation. Gordon will definitely wait for them to be ready and hand that letter to us. Then he will
be able to take the central role in the war against the South.
That must be Gordon’s plan.
But that was it.
We still have a chance to recover. If a war breaks out, Leo will be able to make an achievement and if
he does well, he will be able to restrain Gordon’s movement.
The problem is Sonia…….
“An enemy huh…..”
I remembered the sadness on Sonia’s face.
I don’t think she serves Gordon willingly.
When we met Gordon’s men, she said that she is one of his men but she also said that she didn’t
consider herself one before that.
She has some reasons to cooperate with Gordon huh.
There are a lot of things to worry about.
However, as Sebas said, now is the time to get some sleep.
I thought so and went to bed.
667
SPT Chapter 102
Still, not dead yet……only two days to go……
I need some energizing enhancer…….
-Mr.Graverobber
The War Maniac
“It seems you got the letter huh. Good work.”
Said Gordon who is fearlessly sitting on his chair.
Before him is Sonia. The eyes that she stares at Gordon with have no shred of loyalty.
“That was the promise after all.”
Sonia said indifferently.
Gordon laughs derisively at Sonia.
“What an unfriendly subordinate you are. But you did great getting that letter. As expected of the
adopted child of the genius strategist huh. I would rather have your father by my side though. It was a
shame that he can’t move because of that old wound of his.”
“!? What did you say!?”
Light of hatred shines from Sonia’s eyes.
Ten years ago. Sonia was forced to leave her village together with her mother because she was a half-
elf and had to live quietly on the outskirts of the village on the border between the Perlan Kingdom
and the Empire.
However, the village was devastated by the conflict between the Empire’s army and the Kingdom’s
army, making Sonia separated from her mother. She was saved by her adoptive father when she was
attacked by the remnants of the Kingdom’s Army that resorted to banditry and set fire to her village.
However, at that time, her adoptive father was seriously injured and his body couldn’t afford him to
continue his military career any longer. Still, he took Sonia in and raised her as his own daughter.
He is a great benefactor for Sonia. Both as an irreplaceable father, and her beloved teacher.
How did such a war that harms the citizens’ lives exist when such a man is in the army?
The reason is the man in front of her, Gordon.
668
At the time, it was Gordon’s first skirmish so he charged into the enemy, hungry for his own military
achievement. The war front pointlessly expanded and caused the fire of war to spread to the village,
resulting in Sonia becoming an orphan and severely injuring her adoptive father.
Gordon was praised by many because the assault he led took down many enemies but at the same
time, a lot of blood had flowed because of Gordon’s recklessness.
That Gordon just nonchalantly said that [It was a shame]. That was unforgivable for Sonia.
However,
“From your eyes, it looks like you want to kill me huh? But don’t forget. Your father and all your foster
parents are under my surveillance.”
“……I understand that.”
Sonia bit down on her lips with regret and squeezed out such words.
Many of the army staff have an opposite view to Gordon’s. They do not wish for war.
That’s why there was no strategist at Gordon’s side who was proficient at fighting the political war. So
Gordon set his sight on Sonia’s step-father who has already retired and threatened him into
cooperating with him.
However, Sonia’s step-father is not physically strong enough to travel to the Imperial Capital so Sonia
offered herself as his replacement. She wanted to repay him for bringing her up. At the same time,
Gordon is a person who will resort to taking a hostage if he has to, Sonia thought of becoming a brake
for Gordon who rarely listens to others’ opinions.
If she lets a man like him rampage as he likes, the number of people who will have to suffer the same
fate as she and her father will increase.
It was painful for Sonia to serve Gordon, who could be said to be her mortal enemy, but the sense of
gratitude to her father compelled her to make that choice.
“No, you don’t. I heard that you wanted to hand not only the knight but the letter to Leonard right? If
you are my strategist then move in a way that only benefits me.”
“My promise to you was to become your strategist once I reached you. I was still free when I arrived at
the capital. It was my freedom to do as I pleased back then.”
“Are you forgetting about the hostages? You have no choice but to obey me you know?”
“And aren’t you forgetting it yourself? You can not win against His Highness Eric without a strategist.
You know that, so you called me here, correct?”
Sonia doesn’t avert her eyes away from Gordon’s sharp gaze.
669
Gordon’s biggest enemy is Eric and if he can’t defeat Eric, there won’t be any chance for him to even
see the throne.
However, there are many talented people under Eric, making his faction the largest. Above all, Eric’s
faction is better suited for a political conflict than Gordon’s whose support base is the military.
That’s why Gordon called in Sonia to manage the situation.
“Hmph…..whatever. Now, let me see your result.”
Gordon urges Sonia to hand him the letter.
Sonia takes out the letter from her pocket but she doesn’t hand it to Gordon immediately.
Sonia gazed at Gordon and pulled it away from him.
“I can burn this if I want to.”
“……you don’t care what will happen to the hostages?”
Sonia slowly shook her head sideways to Gordon’s words.
If she truly doesn’t care about them she wouldn’t bring the letter with her but even if she brought him
the letter, it doesn’t mean that she will let him do whatever he wants.
“I simply want you to hear me out first.”
“Hou? Let’s hear it then.”
“….Your Highness will not give the letter to His Highness Leonard immediately to give the South time
to prepare for their rebellion, correct?”
“Of course.”
Sonia frowned at Gordon’s obvious answer.
It was as she expected.
She thought that if it is Gordon then he will definitely do that.
That’s why she has to change his mind.
“There are two risks attached to that. One is that His Highness Leonard might make an appeal to His
Majesty. The Southern Investigation was originally his responsibility so your interception of this letter
will be regarded as an obstruction to his work.”
“You don’t have to worry about that. Right now, we are in the middle of the succession war. If he goes
to cry to Father just because the letter was intercepted by his opponent then Father will never make
Leonard into a crown prince. There’s no place for such a weak person on the throne after all.”
670
If you go cry to your father every time there is a problem, what would you do once your father’s gone?
Sonia understands his reasoning. The right thing to do is definitely to report the matter to the
Emperor but it would come at a huge loss for him.
Even if Leo wants to, everyone around him will stop him.
“On the second point, this will be too detrimental to the Empire. Such a thing will eventually earn His
Majesty the Emperor’s distrust in you, Your Highness. The Southern rebellion should be nipped in the
bud.”
“What I want is war. I will give the South time and have them start a rebellion for me. The bigger the
conflict, the bigger my military achievement will be.”
“As a result, the Empire will be weakened and we will be open for invasions from other countries.”
“Then I will have more opportunity to act. The larger the war, the more my power will grow. If
someone is going to invade us then it will be the Kingdom, I can just lightly kick them off the Empire’s
territory and maybe I can take the chance to lead the army to crush Eric as well.”
Saying so, Gordon smiled at his ideal future.
Sonia felt disgusted by his smile. His smile was one that belonged to someone who never thought
about how many lives will be lost in his plan.
Still, Sonia continues talking to him.
“That kind of future will not come to pass. There is no doubt that His Highness Eric will try to get in
your way. What you wish for shouldn’t be a war but the throne. War is simply a means to the throne.
You mustn’t confuse the means with the result you hope for. If Your Highness wants to become an
emperor, you must look for more options other than the war.”
“………then what should I do?”
“Firstly, you must immediately talk to His Highness Leonard and give him the letter. At that time, you
must make him promise to not interfere with Your Highness’s plan. If the letter reaches His Majesty’s
hand, Her Highness Zandra will lose her support base in the South. Without her main supporters,
those who are supporting Her Highness Zandra will disperse to join the other factions. We can take
them in and close the gap in personnel between yours and His Highness Eric’s faction. Moreover, with
the earlier promise, even if His Highness Leonard wanted to interfere, he will not be able to. This is the
closest path Your Highness can take to the throne.”
“And what if Leonard breaks his promise?”
“We can start spreading the words that His Highness Leonard betrayed you even though you helped
him secure the letter. His Highness Leonard’s strength is his sincerity. If we can attach a negative
image to him, he will lose the momentum he built up so far. That move will be available to us if we
hand the letter to him immediately.”
671
If you are aiming for the throne, it is a foolish idea to keep the letter to yourselves and give the South
time to prepare.
It is one thing if Gordon only wants to start a war but he is, in fact, a prince who is fighting for the
throne. His final goal should be the seat of the emperor.
Sonia doesn’t want to support Gordon to become the emperor but she must do it because he is holding
her parents as hostages.
Eventually, Gordon will relax his surveillance and she will be able to slip away from him.
Until then, she must keep Gordon from rampaging as he likes by making his faction bigger. When the
faction grows bigger to the extent that Gordon can’t take control of it by himself anymore, if she
disappears at that point, Gordon will eventually self-destruct.
The seat of the emperor can be obtained by Eric or Leo. That was what Sonia is thinking.
“…….that way, can I become an emperor?”
“Yes, if you do what I say.”
“…….Alright. I will give the letter to Leonard immediately. Keep using that skill of yours for my sake in
the future as well.”
“Will you promise that you will adopt my plan?”
“Yeah, I promise. I won’t betray a good strategist like you.”
Saying so, Gordon holds out his hand.
Sonia timidly placed the letter in it.
Gordon snorts as he opens the letter and begins to read its content.
I managed to persuade him.
Relieved with that thought, Sonia let out a sigh.
That was why she missed it, the distortion on Gordon’s face.
————————————
“What are you trying to do!?”
A week has passed.
Over the past week, Gordon showed no sign of getting into contact with Leo’s faction. He didn’t even
try to meet Sonia during that time.
672
Sonia was finally able to meet Gordon but she was fed-up on how oblivious he is.
“I have explained it to you already right! If Your Highness is aiming for the throne, you must hand that
letter to His Highness Leonard immediately!”
“Yeah, I was listening. But your proposal was rejected.”
Said Gordon as he easily broke his promise.
With an expression of disbelief on her face, Sonia stares at Gordon.
The fact that he will break his promise is understandable. He is a man who resorted to taking hostages
after all. Breaking a promise or two is nothing to him.
However, what Sonia told him wasn’t a lie. If Gordon wanted the throne, his best bet would be to
follow her plan and by not adopting it would mean that his end goal was not the throne.
“Do you not want the throne!?”
“I do. But I don’t want to obtain it without any war. I want to grow the Southern rebellion bud bigger
and lead the army to defeat them. Then I will take control of the central army and drive out Eric. this is
the kind of development I like.”
“Like……the Empire might get invaded by other countries you know!? Do you not understand how
dangerous that is!?”
“I understand it well. The troop at the border should be able to hold them back for a while. In the
meantime, I will become the crown prince and launch a counterattack. There’s no need to fear other
countries. The Empire is a strong country and under me, it will be reborn into a Hegemony.”
Saying so, Gordon lightly swings his hand.
Then, Sonia was grabbed by two guards.
“What are you!? Without me, you can’t beat His Highness Eric you know!?”
“I don’t feel like winning against him in a political conflict. I will crush him with my army. I have to
thank you for setting up the perfect stage for that. I will call you again when I have business with you.
Until then stay quietly in your room. And don’t try anything strange. The hostages’ lives are still in my
hand.”
With such a threat from Gordon, Sonia was taken out of the room.
As she was being forced out of the room by the two guards, Sonia stared at Gordon in disbelief.
It was as if he was a monster.
Participating in the succession war while wishing to start an actual war.
673
Sonia misread him. Gordon certainly wanted the throne but what he wanted more is war. He is a
genuine War Maniac.
For Gordon, War is not a means but an end. The throne is only there to facilitate that.
Sonia who finally realized that was dragged away, still in disbelief.
674
SPT Chapter 103
For the new series, anyone has a memeable story? I want to make more memes……
-Mr.Graverobber
Inspiration
“Not today either huh……..”
Around ten days have passed since the letter was taken.
There is still no contact from Gordon’s side today.
So this would mean that things are going as I expected huh.
I let out a small sigh.
“Is it a difficult situation after all?”
Finne asks worriedly as she serves me tea.
I tried to give her an assuring smile but Finne’s expression only gets cloudier.
“Yeah, a little bit.”
“That’s a lie……it is actually really difficult right?”
“So you notice after all huh.”
I scratched my head and let out a huge sigh.
At first, we were supposed to get that letter and expose the wrongdoings of the Southern Nobles. On
top of that, if the South resorts to a rebellion, we plan to use the extremist in the military to suppress
them.
However, Gordon keeps the letter to himself so that the battle will not end with just a small skirmish.
That’s really Gordon’s way of doing things.
With that as the case, we can no longer use our original plan. If a large-scale civil war does happen, the
Empire will definitely be weakened.
Gordon probably understands that as well.
Worst of all, even if he doesn’t understand that, Sonia should.
If they insist on doing that then that means they have some kind of plan ahead of them.
675
“If there’s a civil war, the only way for us would be to use it to make an achievement for Leo. That’s the
only option. But until then we still have a grace period. I want to prevent the civil war but I don’t know
how to go about it.”
“We can’t report this to His Majesty?”
“Leo already tried to do that and I already stopped him. I understand his feelings but……the succession
war won’t end with just this one case. If Leo reports what happened to Father, he will definitely look
into it but in return, it will ruin Leo’s future. Moreover, even that might not be enough to solve the
matter. We need to come up with another way to do something about it.”
“Can’t we make Rebecca-san be the one who makes the appeal?”
“There is no way to confirm that she is the knight that Earl Sitterheim entrusted his letter to. We were
robbed of the evidence to back up her statement. Gordon will just pretend to be oblivious even if
Rebecca makes an appeal anyway. Well, it will be the same even if Leo makes an appeal himself, they
surely won’t hide the letter where we can easily find either so Father’s evaluation of Leo will grow
worse. At worst, he might be taken off the Southern investigation altogether. If that happens, they
won’t need Leo to hand in the letter anymore, we will be completely treated as an outsider after all. No
matter how we move, Gordon still has the advantage.”
I still doubt Gordon would be capable of such a cunning move but right now he has a strategist called
Sonia by his side.
If we make a poor move, we can definitely expect a counter.
However, if we give up on stopping the civil war, Gordon will be able to do whatever he wants.
Sebas said that I shouldn’t worry so much about it since the civil war is likely to happen anyway
regardless of whether we obtain that letter or not but to me, giving up without doing anything will
leave a bad taste.
We can’t just settle it as we don’t have enough power to stop it.
The best outcome that could come out is that we can avoid the civil war.
Even if I set aside my feelings, if a large-scale civil war occurs, Leo’s evaluation will be lowered to
some extent because he will be blamed for the fact that he discovered that letter too late.
The Empire, the people, and our progress in the succession war. Stopping the civil war will benefit all
of those.
“Au……this is bad…….”
“I have ordered Sebas to search for the letter but I supposed even Sebas wouldn’t be able to pull it off
either. Should I start preparing and cooperate with Leo as Silver……?”
I can’t help but regret it. Time will never come back.
676
I still can’t help wondering if I should have done more at that time.
That defeat came from our lack of intelligence and understanding of the situation. If we don’t have
that then we can’t perfect our preparation. Even so, I should have been able to cautiously move
around as Silver back then.
If I started to move as Silver from the start then I wouldn’t have to be worrying about exposing my
secret.
Still, that has a fatal flaw.
“If you do that, it will be exposed that Silver is cooperating with Leo-sama personally. Up until now we
still have the excuse of suppressing the monsters after all……..”
“Right, an ancient magic user plunging himself into the succession war. There’s no doubt that there
will be a backlash from that.”
If I assist Leo by using transfer magic back then, the line that I have drawn so far will crumble.
Silver was allowed to use ancient magic because he is the Guardian of the Imperial Capital and its
people. If Silver moves to assist a single person in a political conflict instead of a monster outbreak or
the Empire’s crisis, I don’t know what kind of rumor will spread. With Sonia on their side, she will
definitely use it well to our disadvantage. Even if they give the letter to us, it doesn’t change the fact
that Sonia is still on Gordon’s side. On top of that, those who support Zandra will definitely use it to
their advantage as well.
At worst, Silver might be branded as a threat and I will not be able to act as him anymore. The Empire
has that much trauma regarding ancient magic and the imperial family.
In that case, we will exchange our trump card for the letter. That’s a risk I can not take.
“Haa….it’s useless to think about it huh. At that time, my movement was too much restricted.”
Well, it doesn’t strictly apply to only that time though.
Moving as Silver comes with a number of restrictions in the Imperial Capital.
That’s why the timing I can do that is very limited.
“If I can’t find any way to solve this soon, I will probably tell Leo to go report to Father…….”
“Can’t we negotiate with the Southern Nobles?”
“They most certainly have a hand in the Southern Incident you know? Negotiating with them is…….”
I stopped my words there.
They certainly refuse to negotiate with us so far.
677
However, from now on, there will definitely be a moment when they want to do that at least once.
“Finne……..you are a genius.”
“Yes?”
“Sorry, but can you call Leo here for me? I have come up with a good plan.”
Saying so, I started writing down the plan that came up in my head on paper.
Seeing that, Finne was confused but she immediately left to call Leo for me.
——————
“Nii-san, did you really come up with a good plan?”
“Wait a minute. Hmm, that’s all the problem I guess? The rest is the escort. We are stuck unless we can
find one huh.”
Hmm, I grumble in deep thought.
Looking at me, Leo takes up the paper I messily wrote my plan down and looks at its content.
“……Nii-san, are you sane?”
“Of course. Even so, I am not the one who will enact it though.”
Leo’s cheeks cramp up at my light reply.
The one who will implement the plan I thought up will be Leo.
“What kind of plan is it?”
“In a nutshell, it’s a bait and switch.”
“Eh……?”
“We will get into the enemy’s base and quickly take control of it. Most of the Southern Nobles only fall
in line because they are afraid of Duke Kruger. If we defeat the Duke, they will all give up
immediately.”
They don’t have a second in command who can take his place and it will be meaningless for them to
continue with the civil war.
The reason they start a civil war this time is not to take over the Empire. They only want to force the
Emperor to make a compromise to secure their own safety.
If we can capture Duke Kruger, they will lose their leader who can negotiate on an equal footing with
the Emperor, and their organization will be disbanded.
678
If the civil war is too small-scale it will serve no use. The Emperor will not compromise because of a
small skirmish. In other words, it is a plan that won’t be effective unless it is large-scale.
“I think that it would be nice if we could really negotiate with them though……”
“That’s how ingenious this plan is. No matter how much they refuse to negotiate, there will at least be
a chance for them to do so.”
“Right before the civil war started. They will definitely accept negotiation if the Emperor sends out a
messenger. I understand what you want to say but……..”
“You are in a position that has a direct responsibility in case of the Southern Rebellion. You can claim
the role of the negotiator by appealing to Father that you want to recover your honor. Of course, if you
are motivated that is.”
“That’s not the problem for me. I personally agree with this plan. It can reduce the damage we can
expect from a civil war. It will be for the best if this plan works out.”
That’s right.
A surprise infiltration into the enemy’s headquarters. If we can make a decisive blow with this, it will
completely stop Gordon’s plot and the people of the South will not be sacrificed in vain.
However, there are many challenges.
First is the infiltration unit.
“The unit you can bring along will be a small number of escorts. Unless they are elite forces, this won’t
go well. Even if you bring Sebas and Sieg, you still need a unit with a considerable fighting power.”
“But we can’t use imperial guards, you know. Our intention will be too clear and they will be on guard
against us if we do that.”
“That’s right. That’s why I have to seek out such a unit.”
Onto the second point.
The negotiation with Gordon.
“The other challenge is the negotiation between us and Gordon when he hands that letter to us. We
can’t make any poor promise to him.”
“It would be troublesome if he told us not to move at all huh.”
“Well, yeah. Now onto the last one”
The third one.
To raise our chance of success, we need approval from the Emperor.
679
“I don’t think Father will approve of our plan.”
“The plan is obviously dangerous, and if you are taken hostage, it will affect your future. Compared to
deploying the army, there are a lot of factors to consider. That’s why we need to find more materials
to convince him.”
“How should we raise the chance of our success?”
“For the time being, I will assemble an elite force that won’t raise our opponent’s guard up. the unit we
use this time must meet those two requirements.”
Despite the fact that Leo will head out as the envoy we will not be using the imperial guards.
Our enemy will definitely let their guard down but that is still not enough.
We need to find a way to keep the enemy off their guard and find another elite unit beside the
imperial guards.
“This is tough.”
“Well, it’s way better than having no plan at all. We can minimize the damage and stop the civil war
that way. The hurdles are high but it is worth trying.”
Thus began our strategy meeting.
680
SPT Chapter 104
Special thanks today go to Ezequiel Dominguez for the support on my patreon and Rector the usual
coffee donor!!
I’m finally done with most of the chapters so I guess I will be playing Resident Evil today hehehehe
-Mr.Graverobber
—————————————-
Knights of the Imperial Army
The next day.
I decided to ask an expert about this operation.
“That strategy is so like you, Al.”
“You think so? I think it is quite a nice plan right?”
“Yeah, it seems deception is really your forte.”
I grimaced at Elna’s honest comment.
Certainly, I am a man that has no shred of chivalry.
In a sense, sending a surprise special ops as a messenger would be an extremely cowardly plan.
However, if that plan can reduce the number of sacrifices then it must be done.
“But it is effective right?”
“Right. But I don’t think it will succeed with things as it is.”
Elna declares.
Elna has traveled to various places as an imperial knight. In her work, she may have been to Wumme,
the largest city in the South, and the home of Duke Kruger, before.
The fact that Elna said that the plan will not succeed meant that Wumme’s defense was solid.
“Wumme is that tough huh?”
“You can breach the outer wall just fine as a messenger but the problem is the inside. The castle he
lives in is big and the paths inside are very complicated. Since the structure is so complex it will be
hard for you to reach its upper part you know.”
“So we need a map for the inside huh……”
681
“Seems so. If you don’t have that then there’s not even a chance of success. So, about that map…….”
Elna stops talking and looks at me.
Her green eyes glow as if she wants to imply something, then she points at herself and smiles.
“If I go I can lead the way you know?”
“There’s no castle in the continent that would let a messenger in knowing you are there……..”
“Think of something then. A disguise for example.”
“Do you think that they would be deceived by some disguise? It might be worth a try if we use a magic
medicine though…..for now, let’s come up with a plan that doesn’t require your power first.”
“And I could just annihilate the castle with a single blow from the holy sword too.”
“It would be the worst outcome if people find out that a person from the Brave house disguised as a
messenger and deceive a negotiation partner though…….”
The power of the Brave house should be used outside the Empire. If we use such power inside the
Empire, it will spread fear and that might lead to a huge source of antagonism.
The Brave house shouldn’t be used unless there’s no other choice.
“Plus, going to the South means that you can’t be sent to the border in case of an emergency.”
“So I have to remain behind in case we have to suppress the other countries’ invasion?”
“Some countries will try to take advantage of the civil war and invade us after all.”
“Well, if Al says that much then I will come up with other plans.”
Elna said so and put her hand on her chin and started pondering.
She then nodded several times and raised two fingers.
“There are only two units that can make this plan a success.”
“I can imagine the first one already.”
“I guess. As you know, the imperial knight order has the power to do that but that proposal will be
rejected right?”
“Duke Kruger is the elder brother of the Fifth Consort. He has visited the capital many times before so
he surely must be familiar with the imperial knights himself. I wouldn’t want to risk including a face
that he would recognize in this operation.”
“I think so too. That’s why the only one left is…….”
682
Elna’s expression turned complicated.
What is it. Her face suggests that she doesn’t want to talk about it if possible. That’s a rare expression
coming from her.
“What’s wrong?”
“I don’t really want to recommend them.”
“Tell me anyway.”
“Haa…it was originally Al’s fault that the letter was robbed away by His Highness Gordon, why do I
have to worry about you now……..”
Elna looked at me with a grudge.
I blink my eyes several times at the sudden complaint.
What’s wrong with her all of a sudden.
“Are you angry?”
“I’m not. I’m just amazed. In the first place, if you called on me, everything would be fine……..”.
“I can’t possibly do that right……:
“At least I want you to let me know. When I heard that Al and Leo went to a place full of assassins, I
almost fainted you know. Moreover, you only brought along that bear and Sebas as your guards,
what’s wrong with you.”
“If I told you, you would rush to our side right?”
“Of course.”
“That’s why I didn’t tell you.”
When I told her that, Elna snorted and turned away.
I didn’t think she would be in a bad mood here.
Certainly, I think that I did something wrong but if I called her then, there will surely be another
problem for us.
“My bad…..I will be more careful next time. I failed because I haven’t properly estimated the situation.
So please lend me your wisdom.”
“…….I am cooperating with you from now on. Understand that.”
“Cooperate, you mean…….”
683
“Of course, as long as there is no problem for me. As expected, sitting still and waiting for the news at
home is impossible for me.”
Elna said that to me and looked straight into my eyes.
Elna is strong. However, like Silver, she also has many restrictions.
Well, I think the person herself already knows that so I can only give her a nod.
“Only as long as it is not causing a problem for you alright?”
“Of course. It’s decided then.”
Saying so, Elna happily smiles.
The fact that she made such a proposal means that there is something that Elna thinks she can help
with. Or perhaps, she knows of someone who can help us.
However, we have no clues about other units besides the Imperial Guards who can be used in our
operation. We need a unit that doesn’t stand out too much. That’s really not a problem in itself but we
need a competent unit that is not noticeable.
“The unit is inferior to the Imperial Knight Order in power but I think that they are suited for
infiltration than the Imperial Knights. Maybe you have heard of their name before, Al? The only Knight
Order in the imperial army, the [Narbe Ritter].”
(TLN: Narbe Ritter = Scarred Knights in German)
“!? the Scarred Knights……..!”
Of course, I know of their name.
Narbe Ritter. The independent unit of the imperial army known as its single knight order.
The unit is made up of former knights.
The reason why former knights were gathered in the imperial knights is their past.
“They are the knights who accused or raised their sword against their lords for their wrongdoings. For
whatever reason it is, they chose to uphold justice rather than their loyalty, making them lose their
position. They are the knights who carry the scarred crest of their lords thus they are called the
Scarred Knights.”
“They are the knights of justice who expose the wrongdoings of their lords but there are only a few
nobles who would approach a knight who already betrayed their lord once. I heard that the unit was
created to gather those knights though.”
684
Although they were praised as the knight of justice, no one actually tries to put them by their side. In
fact, there are very few nobles who are confident enough to do that. There are not that many innocent
lords and sometimes even a virtuous one also has to do questionable things as well.
However, if you accept them in, the moment you go against their principle you might be cut down. It is
just a possibility. It’s not like they are that inflexible. However, if such a possibility exists, no one
would dare to recruit them.
“Yes, your impression of them is not wrong. I used to have a spar with them once but their training
was really amazing. The bar they set is really high and they have a lot of veterans in their unit. They
are probably the most elite unit in the imperial army. Moreover, they do not belong to any faction
either.”
The points Elna raised were almost perfect.
However, it’s probably because of their past that Elna doesn’t want to recommend them to me.
“A mission to infiltrate the enemy’s base. Coupled with escorting a prince, you are saying that it is too
dangerous a mission to leave to them?”
“Well, that played a part too…..but it will be very tough if you can’t fully trust your ally inside the
enemy’s territory right. They each have a strong sense of independence. If we can not earn their
trust then they will just accomplish the mission their way you know.”
“So it comes down to cooperation huh.”
“Of course, if we give them an order then they will act as the escort but I think that if they are not
willing to do the mission this plan will not work.”
So it is ideal to make them participate in the mission willingly rather than giving them an order huh.
This is quite difficult. The mission is dangerous in the first place after all.
The vital thing here is to create a trusting relationship.
“Guess I will leave persuading them to Leo huh……..”
“Hmm, I think that it’s more complicated than that. I think Leo will look very fascinating for a pure
knight but I don’t think his charisma is going to work on them.”
“Then what should we do?”
“If Leo can’t do it then it is your turn right, Al?”
Elna said that as if it was the only natural thing in the world.
Oi Oi, you are kidding me right. Me persuading them? Those clearly hard to handle former knights?
“No, isn’t that too high a hurdle for me………”
685
“It will be fine. I will go with you and this is just my hunch but I think that they should be more
susceptible to Al. If Al just confidently says that you want their help to protect your brother, I think
they will give you their cooperation you know.”
Elna easily said that with a smile.
“What is your basis for that?”
I ask her back with my cheeks cramped.
“Ara? Don’t you know? I am also a former knight you know? And as a former knight, I think that Al will
be better suited for such a task. That’s my basis.”
While thinking about what great basis she has there, I let out a huge sigh as there’s no other way.
686
SPT Chapter 105
Why is it so hot lately…….I need winter…..
Viscount Sitterheim
It’s been a month since Gordon got the letter.
Finally, Gordon has reached out to us.
“He sure took his time.”
“Thanks to that, our preparation is almost ready.”
“Well, there’s still a lot of work to do though.”
Our preparation is almost ready.
However, the negotiation with the Narbe Ritter is still hasn’t completed yet. They have been out on a
secret exercise so we couldn’t reach them.
After this, I will ask for Elna’s help to set up a meeting with them. But before that, we have to negotiate
with Gordon first.
“I will leave that to you, Nii-san.”
“I think that Leo would be more suited to such a thing though……think about it, who would follow
someone like me?”
“Elna thinks that you are more suitable than me right? I’m sure that will definitely be the case.”
I sometimes don’t understand what Elna is thinking.
However, Elna’s intuition is reliable.
“I will do what I can…….don’t expect too much alright?”
“No no, I expect a lot from you here.”
“And I just told you not to.”
With such an exchange, we arrived at Gordon’s room.
He is waiting for us inside.
It’s him after all, there shouldn’t be any pointless talk here.
687
“According to Sebas, it seems that the strategist called Sonia has been arrested.”
“Asking for someone’s help then arresting them, that’s so like Aniue.”
“Yeah, he probably didn’t like her proposal.”
Among Eric, Gordon, and Zandra, the one who least listens to the advice from people around them is
Gordon.
It’s not that Gordon is stupid. He is simply the most idealist out of all of them.
The problem with that is the fact that his ideal is so far removed from others. If you want to support
Gordon then you have to grasp his ideal first.
No matter how excellent a person is, it is impossible for them to read Gordon’s intention the first time
they meet. After all, even us, his own brothers still don’t know what he is thinking.
“Alright, shall we.”
“Yeah.”
Leo knocks at the door and enters the room.
Inside, Gordon is waiting in his chair.
On the table in front of him is a letter.
“Finally huh.”
“……Let’s get straight to the point. Can we have that letter back?”
Gordon silently nods to Leo’s question.
He then states his condition.
“I don’t mind returning it but there is one condition. Don’t interfere with my business.”
“We can’t possibly agree to such a vague condition right, Aniue.”
Gordon stares at me when I opened my mouth.
I confidently look back at him.
We need it to be more specific. If we make such a broad promise to not interfere with him, he will
bring it up over and over again as an excuse.
“Then what kind of condition would you be satisfied with?”
“Right. Please set a period for it.”
688
“Hou.”
Gordon grins.
Perhaps he finds my proposal to be convenient.
When we are talking about the time period, people would think about a day or a month but what’s
currently on Gordon’s mind right now is probably different.
“Then [Never interfere with me during the war]. How about that?”
“….it seems you are not willing to compromise any more than this right.”
“Yeah, that’s right.”
Gordon nods to Leo’s words.
From Gordon’s tone, he thinks that it is natural that a war will happen. An already decided outcome.
He probably judges that it would be fine as long as we do not interfere with him during that time.
“There’s no other way. We will comply with that condition.”
“Then just take the letter. If you break your promise, no one will negotiate with you ever again. Don’t
do anything stupid now.”
“I understand.”
“Let’s properly record this in a document then.”
Gordon quickly wrote down the condition and signed on a paper. He then urges Leo to sign it as well.
Leo gives his signature and picks up the letter on the table.
Seeing that, Gordon looked at me.
“Arnold. You sign it too.”
“Me too?”
“Of course. There’s no point if he’s the only one who signs this. You two are one and the same after
all.”
“I don’t think that there will be any meaning to it though.”
Saying so, I grabbed a pen and quickly signed it.
With both our signature, we can no longer interfere with Gordon during the war.
A question suddenly came to me so I asked Gordon.
689
“Aniue. By war do you only mean the next one?”
“Of course.”
“Is that so. I will write it down then.”
“Hmph, do whatever you want.”
I add to the condition that it only applies to the next war.
As I planned.
We left Gordon’s room without saying a single word.
“It went well somehow huh.”
“He wasn’t cautious about it after all.”
Gordon simply didn’t care because he thought that it would be useless no matter what we do.
Does he think that everything will be fine as long as the war happens or perhaps he is confident that
he can crush any petty tricks that we throw at him?
Well, it’s fine either way.
“Now the condition is met.”
The rest will depend on my effort.
————————————–
“My sincere apologies for being late.”
“Seriously.”
Leo lowers his head as he gives his apologies.
Father received the letter in a somewhat displeased manner.
As the Emperor, Father has many works to do. That’s why he never interfered with the task he gave to
Leo.
He doesn’t have time to do such a thing. The large monster outbreak has affected the entire empire
and the East is still under reconstruction. To add to that, demons appeared in the South and the earl
house of Sitterheim has disappeared.
There were many things for the Emperor to do that’s why Father entrusted Leo with such a task. And
the result of the said task was delayed.
“…….Curse you, Duke Kruger.”
690
After reading the letter, Father passes it to Franz as if he wants to throw it away right then and there.
Receiving it, Franz also looks over its contents.
The letter is the accusation from Earl Sitterheim. Centered around Duke Kruger, the most powerful
noble in the South, the Southern Nobles were connected to the kidnapping organization and
committed a lot of crimes. The same was true of Earl Sitterheim.
Even if he was being threatened, it doesn’t change what he did.
Still, he tried to correct his mistake. His courage is something to be celebrated.
“Regarding Earl Sitterheim, should we strip him of his title because he couldn’t protect Your Majesty’s
decree to protect the immigrants……..”
“That’s right. The fact that he lent his hand to commit such a crime will not disappear. I will deprive
Earl Sitterheim of his title.”
Well, that’s natural I guess.
Courage should be celebrated but the sin he committed will not disappear.
I take a look behind me.
The face of Rebecca who was kneeling behind us turned blue.
Perhaps she was already prepared for this. Earl Sitterheim threw away his honor to do the right thing.
There’s no restoration for that this late in the game.
However, such Rebecca is still pitiful.
While I was thinking so, Leo started talking to the Emperor.
“Your Majesty. May I say something?”
“What?”
“I would like to reward Sir Rebecca. It was her achievement that the letter was able to be delivered to
Your Majesty’s hand.”
“Hm, that’s right.”
Saying so, Father nodded.
It seems that Leo promised one of the knights of Earl Sitterheim to restore his honor but it would be
difficult to do that.
Still, there’s a way.
691
“Then I, the Eighth Prince, Leonard Lakes Adler, will nominate Sir Rebecca to receive a noble title.
Please bestow her a peerage.”
“……Alright.”
I guess he understands what Leo wanted to say.
“Sir Rebecca. Which title do you want?”
“Y, Your Majesty……I, I don’t need any title…..s, so please…..”
“Don’t say anything more than that. Dennis has committed a crime. No matter what reason he had,
there must be punishment.”
“H, he wasn’t such a criminal Your Majesty! He was a proud imperial noble! Stripping him off his title
is too much!”
“I can not praise the wrongdoer for doing a good deed at the end of his life. The crime he committed
preceded that.”
Getting told by Father, tear spilled from Rebecca’s eyes.
Looking at such Rebecca, Father continues.
“Sir Rebecca. I will bestow a title upon you.”
“…..yes.”
“—-Sir Rebecca will receive the noble title of Viscount Sitterheim. Viscount Sitterheim will also receive
the imperial bronze cross medal for her achievement. [You did good].”
The imperial bronze medal can only be given to those who made a great contribution to the Empire.
Although there are silver crosses and gold crosses as well, it is still rare for a bronze cross to be
rewarded.
This is the sign of Father’s gratitude.
He can’t give praise to Earl Sitterheim who committed a crime so he transferred his name to Rebecca
and praised her.
That’s why Leo nominated her for a noble title. There are several such examples in the past.
If the Emperor was prevented from giving honest praise, it can be accomplished by using an indirect
means like this.
“Viscount Rebecca von Sitterheim. Give your thanks to His Majesty.”
“…..,Thank you for your kindness…..Your Majesty.”
692
The meaning of the tears she spilled changed.
Father’s word at the end was not to only praise Rebecca for her accomplishment but for Earl
Sitterheim as well.
Rebecca understands that.
She kept crying like that for a while.
“…..the Southern problems are deep-rooted. I will not forgive them. Franz, you understand right?’
“If we show them a strong attitude, they will also respond in kind though?”
“You think I will tolerate being looked down upon by my own vassals? I am the Emperor of this
country. The people and nobles of this country are parts of me. I am the only one who can do whatever
I like to them. I will personally investigate the South. Tell that to all the Southern Nobles.”
Saying so, Father shows his stance.
It means that even if it comes to a civil war he will not back down. Even if the country will be
weakened in the process, the wrongdoings of his vassals will not be overlooked. He intends to show
that to all his subjects.
The situation proceeded according to Gordon’s expectations. Still, I will not let him do whatever he
wants.
693
SPT Chapter 106
And that’s the end of the coffee appreciation week. Time to set a new goal lol
Hmm, Cyberpunk2077 and Masquerade bloodline 2 are still several months away so let’s settle with
Sims 4 Discover University then.
I will be posting the summaries of the new series candidates here next week as well so tune in for that
-Mr.Graverobber
The Knight Commander
“The letter has reached Father’s hand and he already placed both Zandra and the Fifth Consort under
house arrest. It seems that they denied any involvement though.”
I explained the situation to Elna on the carriage as we are on our way to the Narbe Ritter Garrison.
Elna doesn’t have a good history with Zandra and the Fifth Consort so I thought that it might be
refreshing for her but there’s not much reaction from her at all.
“Yeah. they would certainly say that.”
“You seem indifferent to the news though?”
“I don’t care about them. It just…….when their brother and uncle are under suspicion from His
Majesty, the first thing they do is to deny any involvement? I think that is very much like what they
would do. I am convinced of that but I still can’t understand them.”
Do they even have the concept of family?
Surely, those two’s concept of a family is different from ours. I can’t understand them either.
“The South is Zandra’s important support base. If it is lost, Zandra will definitely drop out of the
succession war. That’s why Father immediately put her under house arrest. It would be troublesome if
Zandra suddenly claimed the throne using the Southern rebellion as a chance after all.”
“It seems His Majesty also has it tough huh. He has to continue keeping tabs on the succession war
while running the Empire after all.”
“That’s just how a succession war is. It’s not something that’s easy to handle in the first place.”
“…….recently, Otou-sama, said something strange.”
Elna mutters while looking out from the window of the carriage.
It’s rare for Elna to talk about the Brave. He is someone who is always traveling around. There are
only a few opportunities for them to meet in the first place.
694
“What did the Brave say?”
“He said that the succession war this time is strange.”
“Strange?”
“To be specific, what he meant was the recent development. From my father’s perspective, it looks like
that it has gone too far this time.”
“Gone too far?”
What does he mean?
Elna doesn’t seem to fully understand either.
She tilts her head while answering my question.
“He said that Her Highness Zandra and His Highness Gordon have changed a lot.”
“They kept it hidden until now but isn’t it just because their true nature finally emerged?”
“I told him that as well but Otou-sama said that he wasn’t convinced. Even if it was their true nature,
he said that both of them should be capable enough to suppress it.”
“The Brave have known them ever since they were children after all. Maybe he just finds it hard to
believe what they are truly capable of?”
It’s a common story. It’s understandable to be in disbelief when you see a good child changed into a
bad person.
Still, I think that the Brave may have understood something like that more than I do.
If he said it like that then there must be something that aroused his suspicion.
“I think so too……but he said that recently, they began to stop caring about the benefit of the Empire.
I’m certain that every candidate never did something like that up until now. It would be a disaster if
you inherit a ruined empire after all.”
“That’s right. If you put it like that then it is certainly strange.”
We can settle it with that they have been affected by the poisonous nature of the succession war
but……
Let’s ask Gramps next time.
He is the person who has witnessed the most succession wars among us. He may be able to grasp
something. Well, I don’t know whether he will give me a serious answer though.
“Let’s leave it at that for the time being. We can’t afford to think about their changes right now.”
695
“That’s true…..they are already watching us.”
Saying so, Elna’s gaze turned sharp.
We are currently traveling on a straight path in the woods.
So they already started observing us from the forest huh. Quite thorough of them.
“Do you think I can convince them?”
“Have some confidence. It will be fine since it’s you, Al.”
“Even if you say that……they are the former knights of justice you know?”
“That’s exactly why it will be fine. I’m here with you too. If push comes to shove then I will just beat
them all up.”
“That will break down the negotiation and there won’t be any meaning that I come here right…….”
While sighing at Elna’s words, the carriage stopped.
It seems we have arrived.
The one single Knight Order in the Imperial Army.
The Narbe Ritter Garrison.
———————————-
It is a garrison that gives off the feeling of a military base.
I step foot inside.
“They should already have been notified of our arrival right……..”
“It seems that the notification may not reach them yet.”
The Narbe Ritter inside the garrison only observes us from a distance without approaching us. They
don’t seem like they have any intention to come to talk to us either.
It is truly uncomfortable to be stared at by such a large number of soldiers.
“This feels bad.”
“Let’s go.”
“They still haven’t sent out a guide yet you know?”
“They probably don’t have one in the first place.”
696
If you want to look, look, if you want to find someone then do it by yourself.
Getting such an impression from them, I begin walking into the garrison.
The facilities are quite good. Since they are a special unit created by the Emperor, they must have
received a lot of budgets.
When I was thinking about that, I heard a voice from behind.
“Look, it’s that rumored prince.”
“Is he here on a social call or something?”
“So he can’t even do a social call without someone from the Brave house as an escort huh. Pathetic.”
Two soldiers pointed at me and grinned.
At that moment, I immediately grab Elna’s arm.
Elna’s right hand had already touched the handle of her sword.
“Let go.”
“I don’t mind so calm down.”
“I do mind…….just let go already.”
“If you really want to you can just pull it off right?”
Hearing that, Elna releases her hand from her sword with an expression that is a mix of sadness and
anger.
If she pulls her sword out here it causes an uproar and we can forget about negotiation.
But they are quite something. They can stay calm while looking at the angry Elna after all. They should
have known how strong she is but their courage to stay calm in the face of that is really impressive.
As expected of the former knights who have corrected the wrongdoings of their lords huh.
“What’s wrong? Your Highness? Are you fine without being protected by that young lady from the
Brave house?”
“My knight has been rude. She is a real knight after all. It’s normal for her to get angry when her
master got ridiculed. She’s different from someone who doesn’t have any sense of loyalty don’t you
think.”
When I provoked them in a loud voice, the atmosphere in the garrison completely changed.
It has been only lighthearted ridicule before but now the whole place grew tense.
697
No matter how I think about it, the words I said were a step too far. Well, the one who started all this
was the other side though.
“What are you trying to do by provoking us?”
“It’s fine, isn’t it. You have been the one trying to test me earlier after all.”
“Why did you stop me in the first place then.”
“The one they were testing was me right.”
While I was saying that, the soldiers kept gathering around us.
They are all robust men. Being as well trained as they are, they can probably kill me without using any
magic or weapons.
“What? Are you angry now?”
“I will have you take it back. Your Highness.”
“That thing about loyalty? The Scarred Knights that scarred the family crest of their lords. Don’t you
think that description is quite fitting for you guys?”
The soldiers who couldn’t stand such ridicule close the distance.
I was completely surrounded. The fact that they are able to have such an attitude toward a royalty like
me clearly shows each of their strengths of will.
They will never lower their heads for someone they do not recognize. That’s the kind of will they have.
Quite an interesting bunch huh.
“Your Highness…….this our last piece of advice. Retract your words.”
“If you want me to retract it then show me something else with your action. You guys are the ones
who started it first. Don’t tell me the glorious Narbe Ritters don’t even have the resolve to be hit back
when they nonchalantly started ridiculing others?”
I can hear the sound of them gritting their teeth.
When a young knight took a step in front, a voice came toward us.
“The Knight Commander is here! Make way!”
The moment they heard that all the soldiers stepped aside and immediately stood upright.
That’s quite a big change.
However, it seems that the Knight Commander has complete control of them huh.
698
The soldiers who were full of vigor until now turned nervous.
Then, a man walks toward us using the path opened by the soldiers.
He is probably in his mid-thirties I guess. He is a man full of adult’s charms. His face was so beautiful
like a stone statue crafted by an artist.
The man looks at me with a fearless smile on his face.
His smile was as if he just found something interesting.
“I didn’t stop them because I thought that you were just a prince that visited us on a whim so I was
thinking about having my subordinates chase you off. Forgive me.”
Saying so, the man salutes.
Following him, all the soldiers also saluted me.
“I am Colonel Lars Weigl, Commander of the Narbe Ritter. Please forgive my subordinates for their
rudeness, Your Highness Arnold.”
“No, it was quite an interesting performance, Colonel. If Elna wasn’t with me I would have run away
already.”
“Please, you are joking. I can spot a coward with a glance, Your Highness. Please, this way. We’d love to
hear what you want to say.”
Thus I met the leader of the Scarred Knights.
699
SPT Chapter 107
Wait, should I put a goal for Gacha supply instead?
-Mr.Graverobber
Personal Feelings
“Allow me to apologize again for my subordinates’ rude behavior. Please accept my apology.”
“It’s fine, don’t worry about it.”
“About that. It seems that Miss Elna is angrier about it than you do.”
“…..I think that you guys were more gentlemanly when I visited you last time though?”
Hearing Elna, Lars smiles as we keep walking.
He then drops the bomb.
“It’s because my subordinates hate Prince Arnold type.”
“Hate…..?”
Elna raised her eyebrows.
Lars plainly nodded.
I involuntarily laughed. He really is a blunt man.
“Hahaha, well, of course. Considering their past, I would be the type of person that they hate the most
huh.”
“Yes, we don’t like those who sit at the top. Of course, that also includes me as well.”
Lars stares straight at me.
If a woman looks at me like this my heart would already skip a beat but unfortunately, he’s a man. It
seems this Lars guy is still trying to test me huh.
When I shrugged and responded, Lars also lightly laughed as we kept walking forward.
Lars guided us into a room inside the garrison.
The room was decorated with a shield bearing a diagonal cross, the symbol of Narbe Ritter.
“Please, sit down.”
“Excuse me then.”
700
I said so and sat down on a chair.
Elna also sits next to me but her gaze is still sharp.
No matter how you look at it, the Narbe Ritters do not welcome my arrival.
“Now, what kind of work can we help Your Highness with this time?”
“We have a request for you but……..I guess it is kind of impossible huh.”
I smiled bitterly at the soldier who stood next to Lars.
The eyes he looked at me with were clearly different from the ones he used to look at Elna.
He is giving her his respect but there was not a shred of that for me. I’m already used to it but I can
feel that it is kind of different from usual.
I can feel that there is a deep trench between him and me.
“We won’t know if it’s impossible or not if you don’t tell us. I can have my subordinate leave for the
time being though?”
“No, it’s fine. More importantly, I want to hear more about you guys.”
“About us?”
“Yeah, you guys are former knights who chose justice over loyalty right. I heard about you guys before
but it seems you guys are kind of different from what I was told.”
Hearing me, Lars smiles.
It’s not just some small impression. I can say that their image is the total opposite of their reputation
that was known to the general public.
They are so crude that I doubted if they were real knights.
There must be a reason for that. Unless I can get that answer from them, I can not ask for their help.
“Justice is it……”
Lars murmured.
He then sat down on a chair and looked straight at me.
His gaze was one that if he used it on those who are faint of heart, they would already start shaking. It
is the gaze of a man who has crossed many dangerous lines in his life.
While staring at me with such a gaze, he started talking.
“We do not like that word as much as the people think we are.”
701
“Hou.”
I turn my sight toward Elna.
Then I ask her in a small voice.
“Is this why you don’t want to recommend them?”
“Yes, but this might be even more serious than I expected.”
The reason why Elna said that I am more suited to this task than Leo is probably they have a fault or
two.
If they don’t idolize Justice then I am certainly better to negotiate with them than Leo…….
“Your Highness. We all are those who once showed our disloyalty. We can not deny that we betrayed
our lords.”
“But the one who truly committed the crime were your lords right.”
“Exactly. That was why we resolved to break our oath and betrayed our lords. We thought that what
we did was for the country and the people. However, what was waiting for us was a hell where we
have no place to belong. Everyone sings us praise but no one dares to approach. That was how we got
here.”
“You lost the place you belong for justice. That’s why they turned more coarse?”
“Well, to summarize it, yes. For His Majesty, he felt that it would be a shame to not have someone like
us around but once we betrayed our lords, we can no longer be trusted. On the other hand, if things
went on as it was, we would disappear. That’s why this unit was created. We were formed because of
justice but we are being treated like a nuisance despite the fact that we did what we did for country
and people.”
What he said is true.
If there are people like the Narbe Ritters, it will keep the nobles in check. Well, the effect of that is not
significant but it’s better to have them than not.
However, they can’t expect to be welcomed. This is because people who prioritize their own justice
are difficult to handle in an organization.
Even if it is for the sake of the country or the people, the ones who choose to move are them as an
individual. They did not move because they received an order from the emperor.
“But the Narbe Ritters strength is even recognized by Elna. For what reason have they become so
strong?”
“It can’t be helped being rough or rotten as they like right? Their values are something they created
themselves. Strength is simple. The stronger you become, the more of their value they can assert.”
702
I see.
I mostly understand them now. They are both former knights and former upholders of justice.
They have been those who put their ideal and justice above everything else in the past. As a result of
their decision, they have become a realist and their nature changed from a knight to that of a soldier.
But the essence of a person doesn’t change so easily.
“People say that you guys betrayed your lords but from your perspective, it would be more correct to
say that you guys have been betrayed by your country and people right? Even so, you still train
yourselves. Is it because you are still loyal to the country and the people?”
“We are soldiers. We have the duty to serve our country and its people. There’s no room for personal
feelings in there.”
“Don’t dodge the question, Colonel. How about you giving it to me directly? You guys still want a place
where you can be active. You still want to be needed. Am I wrong?”
“And what if we are?”
Lars returned the question as if to test me out.
I understood them now.
All that is left is to persuade them.
We can’t mobilize them by giving them orders. What we need is for them to willingly offer their help.
“I will prepare it for you. The place that you wish for.”
“Let me ask you then. Where is this place you speak of?”
“Do you know about the situation in the South?”
“To a certain extent, yes. I think we can expect a civil war soon.”
“I want to stop that. We will strike their base with a surprise attack using an elite unit and takedown
Duke Kruger. We can end the war before it can even begin.”
“……I don’t think such a plan will succeed though.”
“Leonard will be the one who leads this operation using the guise of the Emperor’s envoy. We need an
elite unit to escort him. If we use the Imperial guards they will be cautious of us so we need a unit that
is comparable to them in strength. That’s why I came here to ask you to play that role.”
Lars’s subordinate frowned at my plan.
He immediately realized that the plan is too dangerous.
703
The same goes for Lars.
“So we need to act as a shield that protects your brother?”
“Right. I guess you can put it like that as well.”
“……we will comply if we receive a formal order. Unless that happens, I will have to turn you down.”
“That’s no good. I don’t need those who have to be forced by an order to take part in this operation.
Sorry but I need someone who would happily throw away their life for this mission.”
I made it to be voluntary.
These guys are disappointed by the country and the people. Still, I told them to give up their lives.
Moreover, those words came from me who won’t even head out to the field myself.
“That will be difficult. We are no one’s pawn after all.”
“I know. I ask you while fully aware of that.”
“Is it for the people? If a civil war happens, many people will suffer. Do you want us to march to our
death for that precious ideal of yours?”
“That’s wrong. That’s Leo’s ideal, not mine. The feelings I used to ask you to do this is much more
personal.”
“And what kind of feeling is that?”
“My brother is important to me. I don’t want him to die. So protect him for me.”
Lars opens his eyes in surprise.
He probably never thought that such words would come up here.
I grinned and looked straight back into Lars’s eyes.
“I don’t care whether it is for the succession war, for the country, or for the people. If my brother is
walking into certain death, I want to find the strongest ally for him. That is my desire. You guys are
strong. If you are willing to protect Leo then I can be assured.”
“…….that’s an unexpected answer. But, personally, that kind of answer is more preferable to me.”
Lars says that with a smile and stands up.
He then slowly lowered his head.
704
“Personally, I wouldn’t mind laying down my life for you. However, it is probably different for my
subordinate. Your aim would be for us all to give you our cooperation correct? Will you be able to
convince them?”
“Can you set up a place for me to do that?”
“I can. However, if you do not put anything at stake, I doubt my subordinates will be willing to throw
away their lives for you. Do you have enough confidence to do that?”
To Lars’s question, I shook my head sideways.
Seeing that, Lars’s smile grew even wider.
Then, he opened the door and said this.
“I will gather my subordinates. It will be quite a sight to see you convince them.”
“Don’t expect too much. I’m the Dull Prince after all. I’m not someone great you know.”
“I think there are two types of people that people would be willing to lay down their lives for. The first
one is a person who has everything, a very charismatic person that people naturally want to follow.
The other one is a person who lacks many things, a person that people want to offer their help to. You
seem like the latter but strangely, to me, you also have the characteristics of the former as well.”
“Is that a compliment?”
“Just an honest evaluation.”
After such an exchange, I stood in front of the Narbe Ritter.
705
SPT Chapter 108
Bonus chapter for a little quiz game in discord yesterday.
Who knew a shrimp donut is so international as a dish.
Deep fried shrimp donut shape
Special thanks to Erik Tadeo for the first coffee of the new goal. another bonus this weekend huh.
-Mr.Graverobber
Pledge of the Dull Prince
The Narbe Ritter has around a thousand men. They are something like an independent battalion.
Now, those men have gathered before me with Lars’s command.
706
“His Highness the Prince has something to say to you all.”
Lars said that and went down from the stand to yield the spot to me.
I climbed up and looked at the face of the thousand members of the Narbe Ritter.
Every one of them is looking at me with a sharp expression.
Without saying anything unnecessary, I cut straight to the point.
“There is a sign of conflict in the South. If a civil war happens, it will be a large one. Me and my
brother, Leonard, came up with a plan to attack them by surprise to stop that from happening. To that
end, we require an elite unit. I am here in front of you today to talk about that.”
After briefly explaining the situation, I paused.
Most of their expressions indicated that they have already expected that kind of development. It
means the South is that active.
Weapons and food, if you follow their trail, you will notice when and where they have begun to flow
unnaturally. To a soldier, the Southern Nobles’ intention should be clear as day.
“The plan is for Leo to infiltrate the enemy’s base as an envoy and defeat the enemy’s leader, Duke
Kruger. If I am to give you an order then your mission would be to protect Leo. However, this mission
is a dangerous and difficult one. I don’t want to leave my younger brother’s life in the hands of
someone who just following orders. I want you to volunteer.”
After I said that, silence took over for a while.
There are those who are honestly surprised by the ridiculous proposal and those who are clearly
showing their disdain.
There are various kinds of expressions but none of them are positive ones.
Well, that’s only natural I guess. I am the one who said it but I can’t help but find it just as ridiculous.
“A lot of people will suffer if the civil war happens in the South. The Empire will also be weakened.
That’s why Leo decided to head to the South despite knowing full well of the danger. Even if I am not
his brother, I think that his resolve to do that is splendid. His ideal is also wonderful.
However, I am different from Leo. no matter how beautiful you put it, my heart will not change. I don’t
want my younger brother to die. That’s why I want you to keep him alive. Terrible as it is, this is my
personal request.”
Nobles are selfish but what’s even more selfish than them are royalties.
Most things will be forgiven as long as you are one and the value of your life is incomparable to others.
It has been protecting me since I was born and continues to do so even to this moment.
707
It won’t stop protecting you even if you live like me or Trau-niisan. You won’t starve even if you don’t
work and at worst, people would just ridicule or complain to your face.
Such words from a royalty like me would be unthinkable for the members of the Narbe Ritter.
“Your Highness. May I ask you something?”
“I allow it.”
A young soldier raised his hand and asked me a question.
His gaze was very direct. He probably corrected his lord with the same gaze as well.
While I was thinking about such a thing, the soldier stated his question.
“Will Your Highness be taking part in this operation as well?”
“I will not.”
“I see. So you asked us to throw away our lives without nothing to lose huh.”
Contempt appeared on many of the unit members’ faces.
Whatever I say from an ivory tower, it will not reach these people.
Taking no risk nor responsibility, nobody would choose to follow such a person.
You need a resolve in order to move people.
“No, I will properly place something on the line as well.”
“What is it? Money? Your position?”
“I don’t think the Narbe Ritters would move for such insignificant things. What I will bet is my life.”
For a moment, everyone’s expressions turned blank.
Then a roar of laughter followed.
The heck is that prince saying? It was that kind of laughter.
A nonsense from a young prince who doesn’t know the weight of life or the meaning of resolve.
They probably think that I just said that I will bet my life for the sake of it. I can get that kind of feeling
just by looking at them.
In front of them, I hold up a dagger.
“Everyone calls me the Dull Prince. There’s nothing wrong with that. I may have many things taken
away from me by Leo inside my mother’s womb but that doesn’t mean I don’t have anything left.”
708
Saying so, I aim the dagger in my right hand at my left.
There is a ritual called [Blood Oath] in the imperial family. It is a ritual where a member of the
imperial family who is normally in a position where they will never shed their blood, injures themself
and makes an oath with the spilled blood and pain.
It is already an obsolete ritual. Just from studying the record, there hasn’t been anyone who has done
it in a hundred years. The reason is that there’s no meaning to it.
It is not a ritual that has any magical compulsion, simply an action that provides self-satisfaction. It is
a pledge that will only hold if the other party believes in the pledger’s determination.
Once upon a time, an emperor had succeeded in making a peace declaration through this ritual but it
was only succeeded because the king of the other country was also a wise king. It would be
meaningless if the other party just looked down on you and laughed.
The only thing that will remain would be the pain and a scar.
Still, to a member of the imperial family, it doesn’t change the fact that this ritual is absolute.
“No matter how much people tell me to live properly, I only laugh at them. I’ve lived as I like. However,
this time I have a responsibility to fulfill. That is my responsibility to my younger brother. I was born
before him so I became his older brother. At that moment, I took responsibility as his older brother.
Being incompetent as I am, that is an important responsibility I was left with.”
I stare at Elna.
Elna shakes her head as her face is turning blue but I tell her what I want without averting my eyes.
“Elna von Amsberg. You will be the witness to my pledge.”
“……Al.”
“Can you?”
Hearing my question, Elna silently kneels down.
Then.
“…….I accept the duty.”
“Good. Listen well. This is the pledge of the dull prince. A pledge from someone who is the laughing
stock of the whole empire. Witness it well.”
Then I pierced my left hand with the dagger.
The dagger penetrated my skin and deeply pierced my palm.
“! ! ? ?”
709
Intense pain and heat run through my body. I want to roll around screaming how painful it was right
now.
However, I can’t do that. I have to make my pledge without losing to the pain.
“I, Seventh Prince……Arnold Lakes Adler hereby swears. If the operation in the South fails……I swear
that I will take the responsibility with my life……I swear upon this blood and pain that this pledge is
absolute. Elna von Amsberg…….as the witness, if the content of this pledge is not fulfilled…….you must
kill me.”
“……..I accept.”
Elna nods with a crying face.
Seeing that, I pull out the dagger from my left hand.
A large amount of blood flows out and a reddish-black wound enters my sight. Rather than the pain,
the heat I felt was overwhelming.
My consciousness grew faint but I endured it and showed that wound to all the Narbe Ritters.
“Look at this wound……! This is the proof that I bet everything for my brother’s life……! Even if you
will not respond to my resolve, this will never change! This wound is something that I should be proud
of! This must be the same for you guys! The moment you scarred the crest of your lords, you did not
receive any reward! You didn’t do it because you wanted to become an imperial knight! You didn’t do
it because you want to be bestowed a peerage! You did it because you thought that you can’t leave
things as they are and decided to do it out of your own free will! “
I didn’t say that they did it while not hoping for something in return.
I simply said that even though they didn’t receive anything in return, what they decided to do never
changed.
“Your resolve never changes……you stood up for our country and its people. If you believe that what
you did was correct then don’t waver just from how the others see you! Just because you didn’t
receive any reward doesn’t mean that what you did has no meaning! The scarred crest you bear
should be the symbol of your pride! Even if people say that it was a symbol of betrayal if your will is
still unshaken then push out your chest! The scars you carved are no different than mine………. Stop
looking down on yourself because you chose to make that scar for the sake of someone else!”
Righteousness is not something indestructible. It is something fickle that can be changed depending
on your position and each person has their own view on it.
Still, when they did it, they believed that they were doing the right thing. And the unchanging fact is
that their lords were punished.
Afterward, they may not be accepted, they may not be welcomed.
However, that is not important.
710
“Even if you are scarred, you have kept your pride. You have kept your belief. That’s what’s important.
You don’t have to care about what others are saying. As long as you believe in it, those voices are
insignificant. You are the one who decides the meaning of your scar! Let me ask you! Knights of Scar!
Our enemy is Duke Kruger, leader of the Southern Nobles! It is a dangerous mission where we have to
infiltrate the enemy’s territory! Is there anyone who wants to accompany my brother on such a
mission!? You might die in this mission. So that’s why I only want those who can keep moving forward
according to their own pride and belief!”
Pain and heat increase over time.
Despite that, I do not stop raising my left hand.
Blood kept dripping down to my arm.
If it is going to flow then just flow. If this blood can buy Leo allies then this is but a cheap price.
Silence enveloped the scene.
In that silence, the young soldier who first asked me the question opened his pendant with a clicking
noise.
Inside is an old family crest. It was a crest that he himself damaged.
Then, the young soldier raised his face and performed a salute with his right hand.
“I, Second Lieutenant Bernd Lerner volunteers for the mission.”
The step he took surely required a lot of courage.
Still, his expression was bright.
“I will leave my brother in your hand. Second Lieutenant Lerner.”
“Yes sir! I will do my best to not bring shame to your scar, Your Highness Arnold!”
With that as the start, many people started to salute and volunteer.
In a blink of an eye, everyone stood upright and saluted.
Then, Lars, who was standing beside me, took a step forward and saluted.
“The Narbe Ritters hereby volunteer for your mission, Your Highness Arnold.”
“You have my thanks. Colonel.”
“We are the ones who should express our gratitude. You have understood the value of our scars. With
that, we have understood the value of yours. We shall swear upon your scar. We will protect His
Highness Leonard without fail and we will not let you die.”
711
“I appreciate that. Then I will have to ask you to immediately make preparations. My brother is
waiting after all.”
“Roger that. All men, prepare for sorties! We are heading to the Imperial Capital!”
Upon receiving Lars’s command, everyone swiftly moves out.
While looking at them, my vision turned blurry but I did not fall.
I have a knight who continues to support me at my side after all.
“You really are stupid…….”
“Sorry……I thought that they wouldn’t take it seriously without a witness……..”
Elna sits me down on the spot and treats my wound with a bandage.
I stabbed it pretty deep so it might leave a scar.
“If you have a skilled healer at the capital look at it the wound should close up immediately. If you
wish for it that is.”
“I’m alright. Having a scar isn’t a bad thing. It’s like a medal to me.”
“Idiot…..let me tell you this first, I’m a woman who can throw away her pride and honor to break a
promise you know? I will never kill Al.”
What are you saying immediately after I made the pledge?
However, I can’t say anything to her. It was I who rashly acted first after all.
“Now there’s even more reason that we can’t afford to lose huh.”
“It’s alright. They should put even more effort into the mission than usual this time. The Dull Prince
who they have ridiculed showed such a resolve after all. I’m sure they will give it their all.”
“Then it should be okay huh. Haa……I already said I’m sorry right. Don’t make that kind of face
anymore.”
Perhaps she doesn’t like that I was smiling as she put even more power into tying the bandage.
“Ow!?”
“There’s no next time okay! I will cut everything down the next time you try to do something reckless
and make me worry alright! Spare me from worrying about you more than this.
Saying so, Elna turned around and hid her face from me.
That’s an Elna-like advice.
712
Elna might really destroy the Empire for real if I make her worry about me again huh.
I have to be careful not to let that happen.
But I guess I don’t have to worry much about that huh.
Our preparations are completed. The rest is to infiltrate them without rousing their caution.
With that, Zandra will drop out of the rest and Gordon’s ambition will be destroyed.
From now on it’s time to strike back.
713
SPT Chapter 109
alright, it’s the start of this week release. the series suggestion is still open so keep it coming. I will
start posting the synopsis tomorrow.
-Mr.Graverobber
Worth a Try
At the time Al and the others are heading back to the capital.
The ministers, princes, and influential nobles were gathered by the Emperor.
“The South has refused my investigation.”
Emperor Johannes briefly declares in front of the gathered people.
The Emperor holds absolute power in the Empire. Declining his request for an investigation is nothing
less than a rebellion.
What’s on everyone’s mind is that it is finally happening.
“Most of the Southern Nobles and their cities have gathered under Duke Kruger and formed a
Southern Confederacy. They have closed their gates and started preparing for defense.”
Everyone was angry at Franz’s report.
By doing whatever they pleased, they are showing that they are making light of the central
government.
It’s a show that they don’t take them seriously.
“We should immediately dispatch the army!”
The majority of the people gathered propose to dispatch the army.
Franz, on the other hand, gives his calm opinion.
“The Confederacy’s aim is probably His Majesty’s concession. If we give them that, the situation should
not develop into a civil war.”
“If we make such a precedent it will only cause more rebellion to follow!”
“That’s right! We have to be firm in our actions!”
714
Franz is accused of being soft but he simply did it to observe the attitude of the meeting participants
for everyone’s opinions.
The reason for this meeting is to find a more effective response. Franz wasn’t looking for such a simple
answer like sending out the army. The same goes for the Emperor.
“Time may come that we will eventually have to send out the army but what can we do before that?
That’s the question I would like to ask everyone here.”
“Your Majesty! Forgive my rudeness but the time for that has already passed! They are raising their
weapons against us! We must respond in kind!”
That’s right That’s right.
Such voices continue affirming that opinion.
The Emperor let out a small sigh. Eric, who has an influence over the nobles and ministers, did not
participate in this meeting. The reason being, he has to restrain the movement of other countries as
the Minister of Foreign Affair. Perhaps, that’s the reason the opinions of the nobles and ministers here
are being concentrated on one side.
“Your Majesty.”
Among the heated up voices of the nobles, Gordon raises his voice.
He then stepped in front of Johannes, looking straight at him with a gallant expression.
“What is it? Gordon.”
“Please give me control over the central army. I will immediately annihilate the Southern Rebels for
you.”
The nobles and ministers were delighted at his words.
Though not as much as Lize, Gordon is a general who has been consistently showing his strong
military might on the battlefield. He hates the job of defending the border and he has no opportunity
to act lately but he is still one of the most valuable generals of the Imperial Capital.
If that Gordon would lead the army then as he stated, he would soon annihilate the Southern rebels.
But of course, some were still against such a proposal.
“Please wait. Your Highness Gordon. As the Minister of Finance, I can’t approve of this.”
Said the old man who has served the Empire as the Minister of Finance for a long time.
Gordon glances at the old minister.
“What did you say?”
715
“At the moment, the Empire’s financial status can not be said to be in good shape. Starting with the
mass outbreak of monsters and the previous Southern Incident, the supply chain was delayed and the
people are suffering because of it. If we start a large scale civil war now it will cause a major blow to
the Empire’s economy.”
“I will end it immediately. This war will not last long.”
“I can not agree with that. This is not the matter of simply finishing the war early, Your Highness.”
Hearing the words of the old minister, Gordon angrily takes a step forward but at that moment, Leo
who was silent until then spoke up.
“Your Majesty.”
Everyone focuses their attention on Leo.
Leo lined up next to Gordon, knelt down, and started stating his proposal.
“The Southern Rebellion is my responsibility. Could Your Majesty give me a chance to correct my
error?”
“Correcting your error? Do you want to be dispatched as a general?”
The ministers who had placed their expectations on Leo looked disappointed for a moment.
However, Leo shook his head.
“No, I have a plan.”
“Hou? You have a plan to deal with this situation?”
“Yes, I have.”
“Let’s hear it then.”
“Yes. Please appoint me as the envoy to negotiate with Duke Kruger. I will enter his base as Your
Majesty’s envoy and launch an ambush from the inside. If I can capture or defeat him before the war
begins, the Confederates will collapse.”
Johannes leans on the plan.
Among all the proposals to dispatch the army, Leo’s proposal is very attractive.
“For you to bring this up means that you are aware of the danger attached to this plan, correct?”
“Yes, the mistake I made must be corrected with my own hands.”
Saying so, Leo glances at Gordon beside him.
716
He met eyes with Gordon who was glaring sharply at him but he only lightly smiled in return.
The promise he made with Gordon is that he won’t interfere with him during the war. As long as the
Emperor hasn’t decided to start the war, it could not be said that the war is on-going. Again, the fact
that the Emperor is sending out an envoy means that the war still officially hasn’t started yet.
Since he will be perceived as conducting a negotiation as the Emperor’s envoy, he will not be breaking
any promise with Gordon.
Gordon is probably also aware of that as he glare at Leo with an irritated look but Leo simply acts
nonchalantly as if he doesn’t notice anything.
However, the upper hand Leo finally obtained was interrupted by an unexpected person.
“I think that is quite a good plan. What do you think, Franz.”
“The plan is certainly sound but…….I am against it.”
“Prime Minister? Why?”
“Prince Leonard is excellent in both military and civil affairs and has a great reputation among our
people. Although I do think that he would be a great envoy…….he is also the hero who solved the
southern incident. Duke Kruger wouldn’t let down his vigilance against him.”
“So how about we send someone else?”
“Prince Gordon has too much military achievement. The one Duke Kruger will let his guard down to
the most would be His Highness Arnold but it would be difficult for him to lead the ambush after he
entered the Duke’s castle. Not to mention that leaving such an important task to him would arouse the
Duke’s caution in the first place.”
Johannes thinks over Franz’s words.
The plan itself is good but there are problems with the people who will execute it.
With the feeling that it needs some improvement, Johannes asks Franz for a suggestion.
“Do we have someone who suits the job?”
“The envoy needs to have a decent rank. We need someone who has a rank that can speak on Your
Majesty’s behalf. A member of the Imperial Family is preferable but someone who has a status
comparable to that would be fine as well.”
“Then who?”
“I really do not want to say it.”
Franz mutters.
717
Johannes frowns at him but Franz pays no mind to that and keeps his mouth shut.
At that time, a person entered the throne room.
Everyone’s gaze gathered at the newcomer.
“Excuse my rudeness. Your Majesty.”
“Finne……what’s wrong? Did something happen?”
“I came here thinking that there might be something I can do but it seems I am not wrong.”
Saying so, Finne smiled and looked at Franz.
Franz slightly averted his eyes from her.
With that, Johannes was able to understand the meaning of Franz’s words.
“Franz…..don’t tell me, you are proposing for Finne to lead the envoy!?”
“She’s a good fit. If we attach His Highness Leonard as her adviser, the plan should probably work.
Duke Kruger would never think that Your Majesty would endanger the Blau Mowe after all.”
“Obviously! Finne is neither a soldier nor a knight! She has no official position in the Empire either!
It’s one thing If it’s the problem related to Duke Kleinert but are you going to risk her life in the
Southern conflict!?”
“Ever since Your Majesty bestowed that hair ornament to her, in a certain sense, she has already been
given an official position.”
“Don’t bring up such sophism! Sending a girl who doesn’t even have the ability to fight to the enemy
territory!? What would happen if they fail!?”
“In the case of failure, His Highness Leonard also bears the same risk, Your Majesty.”
“Leonard is a prince! He is involved in it from the start as the inspector! The responsibility he bears is
incomparable to Finne!”
Johannes strongly stares at Franz and turns to Finne.
Then.
“Back down, Finne. We will come up with another plan.”
“No, Your Majesty. Please leave that role to me.”
“I won’t!”
718
“…..Your Majesty. The people are suffering because of the problems caused by the nobles. Even in
different territories, the obligation of a noble is still the same. The role of the imperial nobles is to
protect the people of the Empire. By avoiding this civil war, many people will be saved. The Southern
People will not be sacrificed and our citizens will not suffer from hunger. I’m Finne von Kleinert. A
daughter of a duke. That’s all the reason I need to risk my life. If I can’t stand up in the face of people’s
suffering then there’s no value for me to be a noble.”
Finne coming here was both coincidence and inevitability.
When everyone is desperately moving around, what can she do? Thinking long and hard on that
question, Finne decided to come to this place.
Neither Al nor Leo told her to do anything. Both of them never took Finne into account after all.
However, Finne understood her own strengths.
The fact that the Emperor bestowed that hair ornament and that she is important to him.
These two points will be the greatest weapon to keep their opponent’s vigilance at bay.
Finne understood it better than anyone.
“Fine……”
“Please allow me to go, Your Majesty. The gathering of the Southern Nobles is not so solid. I’m sure
that there are many who had to cooperate because they don’t have a choice, not to mention the
knights and soldiers who serve under them. However, once you cross blades with them, hatred will be
born. It could eventually cause future disaster for the Empire. I want to stop that from happening.”
“……..”
“Your Majesty. This is for the Empire.”
“…….take the imperial knights with you.”
Johannes said with a distressing look.
However, Finne declines that.
“The imperial knights will make the enemy more cautious of us. It will not make sense to include them
in this operation.”
Saying so, Finne smiles.
When Al and Elna went off to persuade the Narbe Ritter, there was not a shred of worry in her mind.
The fact that she fearlessly nominated herself was also because of her complete trust in Al.
If she will be accompanied by the troop Al went out of his way to persuade, there will be no problem.
719
The only thing she worried about was whether Al would be upset at her for arbitrary doing things
again.
Only that small worry exists in Finne’s mind.
She has such an easygoing attitude for someone who bears the responsibility to take a group of
soldiers behind the enemy’s line.
“I can’t leave your protection to anyone other than the imperial knights!”
“But Your Majesty, it is true that the imperial knights will surely arouse their suspicion.”
“Then what should we do!?”
The Emperor’s wrath echoes through the throne room.
What remained was only silence.
Everyone was at a loss.
At that timing, a Prince finally decided to show his face.
“Umm…..Father.”
“……Arnold…..where did you go when we are having such an important meeting!?”
“Well, I have a little work to do.”
The scolded Al frowned as he entered the throne room.
For a moment, his sight met with Finne’s. Looking at the apologetic expression on her face, Al smiles.
Then, he decided to state his business quickly before the next scold came flying at him.
“About the escort unit, there is a unit I would like to recommend.”
“What?”
“Come in.”
The moment Al said that Lars entered the throne room wearing his military uniform.
His chest is bearing the Narbe Ritter badge.
“Lars Weigl……why are you here?”
“His Highness Arnold has told us the details. We Narbe Ritters will be volunteering for this operation.”
Saying so, Lars salutes.
720
It was quite a rare sight.
The Narbe Ritter has been mobilized many times in the past but every time they were ordered. There
have been none of the cases where they volunteer.
Just now, the said Narbe Ritter states that they have volunteered for the mission.
The nobles’ voices are buzzing at such an abnormal situation.
“W, wait a minute! Are you saying that you want us to leave His Highness Leonard and Finne-sama to
you!?”
“Please rest assured. We will protect them without fail.”
“Don’t mess around! Who would be able to leave them to a betrayer like you!”
“…….we certainly betrayed our lords before. We couldn’t overlook the injustice committed by our
lords back then. However, please do not worry. It is exactly because of that that we will never turncoat
to the like of the Southern Nobles. We are the Scarred Knights. Injustice itself is our enemy.”
The nobles were silent at Lars’s words.
This is because circumstances speaking, Lars was right.
The expression of everyone there is not exactly a good one either.
However, on his throne, Johannes raises a question at Lars.
“There have been many such opportunities before but you never move. Why do you decide to do it
now?”
“……we were asked so strongly to protect his younger brother, Your Majesty. To not respond to
that…….the few remaining pride as a knight in us would never allow it.”
Lars then looks at Al.
Johannes also turned his sight toward him and noticed the bandage that was wrapped around his
hand.
Generally understanding what Al did, he let out a huge sigh and gave his order.
“The Narbe Ritter will escort Leonard and Finne. I will leave Leonard to lead this operation. The
details of the operation will be at your discretion.”
“Your Majesty. Instead of using such an uncertain plan, please entrust the army to me!”
“It is surely an uncertain plan but it is still worth a try. But be prepared. I will allow you to gather the
army but I will not allow you to mobilize yet.”
721
“…….understood.”
Saying so, Gordon withdraws.
A dark light lurking in his eyes.
722
SPT Chapter 110
Here it is The Potential Series thread.
-Mr.Graverobber
Encouraging Guests
“Seriously, you are so reckless.”
“My apologies…….”
After the meeting was over, I and Finne returned to my room.
Finne seems to be apologetic.
If possible, I don’t want to put her in danger.
“Well, since you already nominated yourself, there’s no helping it anymore. It is as the Prime Minister
said, you are certainly the most suited person for this. That being said, let’s make this operation as
foolproof as possible.”
“I’m sorry for troubling you again……”
“It’s alright. I understand why you did it.”
It’s really like Finne to want to do something in this situation.
And this time Finne’s feelings match with various kind benefits.
It’s not something that I should blame her for.
“Arnold-sama.”
Saying so, Sebas appears without a sound.
I asked Sebas to collect information while I was away from the capital but the purpose of his
appearance is kind of different this time.
“What is it? Sebas.”
“Encouraging guests have arrived at a good time, sir.”
Saying so, Sebas opens the door.
Emerging from the other side of the door were two familiar faces.
723
“It’s been a long time, Your Highness Arnold.”
“Duke Reinfeld! And…….”
Jurgen entered the room.
As always, his smile can easily make people around him relax.
Behind him, a boyish brown-haired girl quietly entered the room.
“Lynfia.”
“Lizelotte-sama told me that I can leave my sister to her so, to repay your favor I have come to swing
my sword for both Your Highnesses once again.”
“You haven’t changed huh. But thank you for coming back to us. I have just the right work for you.”
“I heard the details from Sebas-san. It seems that Finne-sama is also going this time correct?”
“Yes. I thought that I could do something about this situation so I nominated myself.”
Lynfia gazing at Finne softly and lightly smiles.
She then says in a strong voice.
“I think that’s very like you, Finne-sama. Please rest assured. I will do everything I can to assist you.”
“Yes!”
“It seems our force is mostly ready.”
Sebas, Sieg, and Lynfia with the addition of Lars and his Narbe Ritters.
With Leo leading them, if they can safely sneak into the enemy’s base, the chance of success is very
high.
“However, there’s no way that disguising an ambush using an imperial envoy is His Highness
Leonard’s idea. It is Your Highness Arnold’s plan correct?”
“Yeah, Elna told me that I really have a bad personality earlier as well.”
“Hahaha, for a knight it would certainly look like that. But won’t this cause a problem for His Highness
Leonard’s image?”
“We have thought about that.”
Finne will go as the leader of the envoy with Leo leading her escorts.
The South will almost certainly accept the envoy.
724
After all, it’s the Emperor’s envoy. If they refuse, there might be no more negotiation in the future.
That would be unacceptable for the Southern Nobles.
Even if all the South join forces, the Empire still has an overwhelming advantage. If they want to get
their concession, they have to take this chance.
“The plan is like this, His Majesty is sending an envoy to the Southern Confederation but the content is
actually the final warning for Duke Kruger. The final message to the Duke is that if he doesn’t bend the
knees, he will face the consequence. Finne will be the one who relays that message. It will show that
we are offering him a chance to turn over a new leaf but if the other side still insists on attacking us,
the fault will lie with them.”
“But I think they would confirm the content of the negotiation before we set out though?”
“We will prepare two letters and switch them immediately right before we start the negotiation. If
they refuse the letter they will be subjected to punishment. The story will change from us using an
imperial envoy as a ploy to capture them into the envoy handing down the righteous punishment. It
would be illogical for other countries to criticize us and it will not affect their trust for both the Empire
and Leo.”
In the first place, the relationship between the Emperor and the Southern Nobles is that of a lord and
his subject. They are not in a position where they can start negotiating on equal footing. This is simply
a one-sided order.
The Southern Nobles would rejoice as they mistakenly think that the Emperor is willing to negotiate
with them but in truth, the Emperor is unwilling to make that concession and sent Finne out to relay
his final warning to Duke Kruger.
That is the scenario. This plan is available to us because it is clear which side is at a higher standing
than the other since this is not a negotiation between two equal countries.
Well, some factions in the foreign countries may have their distrust toward us but it is hard to say that
it would be a consensus between all of them.
“I see. As expected from Your Highness Arnold.”
“If possible I want to do this more straightforwardly but there’s no other way.”
“There’s no way around it since you have been acting on the defensive from the start. However, this
time you have taken the initiative. No, it would be more correct to say that you took it back. This is
very important for the plan to succeed. However, such an initiative can easily be taken by anyone. Is
the information control going well?”
That’s a Jurgen-like question.
To answer that, I gave him a firm nod.
“The Imperial Capital Garrison is already checking anyone who comes in and out of the capital.”
725
“Is that all?”
“No, I asked the Brave house to block all the route to the South. With the knights from the Brave house
manning every route, it would be impossible even to someone who is familiar with covert operations
to slip through unnoticed.”
As far as the Southern Civil War itself is concerned, there are not many of its elements that would
affect the succession war.
Since the Emperor has already adopted our strategy, there is no problem for the Brave house to assist
us in safekeeping the intel about our mission.
With this, information leakage is unlikely.
There is still some concern but I have an idea of how to deal with it.
“It seems your preparation is quite thorough. I have nothing left to say. Do you have anything I can
assist with?”
“Right. Are you going to stay in the imperial capital for a while?”
“Yes, I intend to.”
“Then can you use your connection as a duke and move the merchants for us?”
“I don’t mind but how do you want me to move them?”
“Even if it is only for a brief period, the South is going to be hostile toward the Empire. There is a
concern about the deterioration of security so the people will face a shortage of food supply. I would
like to prepare for that.”
“I see. That would be my specialty. I will do it.”
Saying so, Jurgen gives me a refreshing smile.
If Jurgen and the Ajin company move, it should be possible to secure us more manpower.
If we hire adventurers and use them as escorts, we should be able to more or less circulate the money
around as well.
In case of an emergency, using the money I earned as Silver is also a reasonable option.
The problem won’t easily end with just the defeat of Duke Kruger. Rather, the hard part will be coming
afterward.
“That’s right, Finne-sama. Please take this.”
As if she just remembered, Lynfia handed Finne a flute.
726
It’s clear just by seeing it that it is a fairly high-ranking magic tool.
“This is?”
“I was given this by an old dwarf who got lost in the city. It seems that if you blow it, its sound will be
able to reach your allies.”
“Isn’t this quite an amazing item?”
“I think Finne-sama will be needing it more than me.”
Saying so, Lynfia gave Finne the flute.
Finne looks at me as if she was in trouble but I quietly nod at her.
The situation in which Finne would use it would surely be a dangerous one. In that case, it shouldn’t
be a problem if I go to her aid as Silver even if it will cause more problems later, that’s not something
that I would risk overlooking.
I probably will throw everything away and go to her side when such time arrives.
“It would be more assuring for me if Finne holds on to it too.”
“…..I understand. I will be borrowing it this time.”
Saying so, Finne politely received the flute from Lynfia.
But a lost dwarf huh. Moreover, an old one too.
I thought of a person for a moment but immediately dismissed it.
I haven’t heard of him being in the Empire. There’s no way he would be here.
Well, even in the off chance that he’s here, he would never cooperate with the Southern Nobles so he
probably wouldn’t show his face this time.
“Then I will get to work immediately.”
“I will also go to Leo-sama’s place as well.”
Jurgen immediately started moving while Finne and the other left to join Leo.
Only Sebas and I are left in the room.
“You have something to report?”
“Yes. It seems that Sonia-dono is being forced to serve under His Highness Gordon because he has
taken hostages to use them against her. This is simply what I heard but it seems that her adoptive
father was originally considered to be a genius strategist.”
727
“I see. Then her movement is understandable.”
No matter how far you fall, you can get a certain degree of success.
That was certainly a move an intelligent guy would make.
Still, it seems she misread Gordon huh.
That guy can’t be measured using a normal standard. This time he will perhaps be using some
unorthodox means as well.
“We will leave Sonia’s matter alone. We can not afford to worry about her right now.”
“Understood. Then I will be standing by at His Highness Leonard’s side. How do you intend to move
from now on, Arnold-sama?”
“The flow of information has been almost cut off but there is still a guy who would leak our
information to the outside.”
“I see………His Highness Gordon is it?”
“Yeah, I will keep watch on him. We don’t know what he is going to do after all. Sorry, but I will leave
Leo to you. If something bad happens I will come flying to you. Still, the trouble will probably be
originating from my side though.”
While thinking about such a thing, I started anticipating Gordon’s next move.
728
SPT Chapter 111
Updated series thread. check it out.
The Potential Series Thread 2
on the side note, Nemesis just got added to Resident Evil Resistance. I’m gonna be in there for a while
lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
Departure
The day of departure.
Only me and Finne are in the room.
“It’s almost time isn’t it.”
“Right. Well, the preparations are completed. Unless something unexpected happens, everything
should be okay.”
“Yes, there’s no need to worry.”
Saying so, Finne smiles to reassure me.
Seeing her like that, I stay silent for a little.
There have been many cases that something unexpected happened so far. I can’t say that it won’t
happen this time.
Finne will be standing at the center of it. She is now in danger more than ever.
“……I will be honest. I don’t want you to go if possible .”
“I’m really sorry.”
“You are….strong huh.”
Finne quietly lowers her head and raises it up. There was not a shred of worry on her face.
What made it possible is her trust in others. She really is strong to be able to place so much trust in
others.
“I’m not strong at all. I have been reminded of how helpless I am every day after all.
729
“You are?”
“Is it surprising? I have always wanted to help Al-sama you know?”
“I’m thankful for that but you have already helped me enough as you are.”
“No, it’s not enough at all. I’m your sharer of secrets. I should be lightening your burden. But…….all I
can do is helplessly watch as you get hurt.”
Finne’s line of sight turned to my left hand.
The bandaged left-hand looks a little painful as it has not been fully cured yet.
However, thanks to this wound, the Narbe Ritters will do their best to protect them.
“It’s not a big deal.”
“…….even small scratches can turn into a big scar. My duty is to prevent you from getting seriously
hurt. I take pride in that.”
When Finne looked straight at me, I made a bitter smile.
Then, Finne’s cheeks inflated a little bit.
“I, I’m being serious here, you know!”
“Yeah, I know. I just thought that your serious expression was a little unexpected that’s all.”
“A, Are you making fun of me!?”
“I’m not. I understand that you really are worried about me. So let me tell you this. I am worried about
you too. You are gentle and always tread on the right path. To me, you are an important guiding
beacon. I would be troubled if you are gone.”
Since the succession war started, my three older brothers have changed.
For that to not happen to me as well, I need Finne by my side.
So that no matter how many evil plans I have to use, I do not become a fiend. I will never use a plan
that Finne shows clear disapproval of.
If I do that, I too will also fall into the darkness of the succession war.
Leo would never do anything that Finne clearly disapproved of as well.
To not let that happen, I want Finne to stay as our guiding light
“So……if something happens you must blow the flute right away. I will definitely come to help you. No
matter what I’m doing, no matter who I’m with, I will give you my top priority”
730
“If you put it like that then it will be troubling for me………there must be more important things that
Al-sama has to do right.”
“No, you are my top priority. Of course, I will finish other tasks as much as I can.”
“Is that so…….then I will be counting on you when the time comes.”
“Yeah, leave it to me.”
Saying so, I fearlessly smile.
I have to give Finne as much peace of mind as I can. So that she doesn’t have to worry about me.
“It’s almost time.”
“It’s that time already huh……..”
Looking at the clock, I get up.
After this, Finne will join Leo and the others for their departure. I will also be keeping watch on
Gordon after this.
With that being the case, there won’t be many chances for us to meet. We do not have time for that
after all.
So I was thinking if I haven’t talked enough with her.
But I couldn’t think of anything.
While I was thinking about that, Finne opened the door.
“Let’s go.”
“Y, Yeah.”
As I scratched my head as I was being awkward.
While I was doing that, Finne grinned.
Then.
“Al-sama. Al-sama has been helping me ever since the first time we met. I will always believe in you.
So I am not worried. No matter what happens I will not be afraid. So please send me off without worry
about me.”
“…..I don’t remember helping you out that much though.”
“Even unconsciously, Al-sama has always helped people out. I am proof of that.”
“The matter with Duke Kleinert was simply a calculated move you know?”
731
When I said that, Finne cheerfully smiled.
Unable to read the true meaning of her smile, Finne went on ahead, leaving me confused.
What does that smile mean?
While pondering about that new mystery, I follow after Finne.
“Be careful out there.”
“Of course.”
Saying so, I and Leo say goodbye to each other.
It is obviously dangerous for Finne but the same also goes for Leo.
But Leo also seems to be enthusiastic about this as well. I mean, he seems so fearless.
The place he is heading to is the South, the place where Duke Kruger holds the most power in.
“It seems Nii-san is worried about something right.”
“Of course.”
“You can be relieved you know. I will be escorted by those powerful guards you recruited for me after
all.”
Saying so, Leo looks at the Narbe Ritters lining up in front of us.
With Lars leading them, they saluted us all at once when they noticed our gazes.
“Your Highness Arnold. Please push out your chest more when you send us off. It will affect our
morale.”
“Don’t be unreasonable……”
“Are we not worthy of your trust?”
The top 300 strongest Narbe Ritters will be acting as escorts for the envoy. The other members are
currently working on the information blockade around the imperial capital.
This means that Leo will have to take down that castle with only 300 men.
No matter how strong they are, I can’t help but worry about them.
“If I don’t trust you then I would never leave my brother in your care.”
732
“Then please push our your chest. What we want to see is your confidence. Please let us see the trust
you placed upon us.”
When he told me that, I lifted up my face and pushed out my chest.
Then I address the 300 Narbe Ritters.
“I will leave them in your care.”
Instead of an answer, they gave me a salute.
Lars then lined up with his comrades.
It’s almost time for them to leave huh.
“Isn’t it quite something for you to be able to earn the loyalty of such powerful men, Kid.”
The one who suddenly called out to me was Sieg who is currently sitting on Sebas’s shoulder.
Lynfia is also next to them.
All the power our faction has is gathered to protect Leo.
“We will be leaving now. Your Highness Arnold.”
“Yeah, take care of them. Still, can’t you do something about the way you call me, Lynfia?”
“Do you hate it?”
“It’s like I’m being put at a distance.”
“Is that so……..I will change it when I get back.”
“Alright. I will be looking forward to it then.”
“Please do.”
Lynfia said that as she performed a polite bow and left.
The place she walked toward is the carriage that Finne boarded. Aside from protecting her, Lynfia will
be providing various kinds of support for Finne this time.
For a moment, my eyes caught Finne as she grins and waves at me.
“So carefree huh.”
“I think it is better than being nervous though.”
“Right. If she is that relaxed then the opponent wouldn’t be so cautious either. She’s quite a good
woman. She’s a beauty, her style is good, there’s nothing to complain about at all.”
733
Saying so, Sieg made a loose smile that doesn’t suit his appearance at all.
This guy is also carefree huh.
“I’m begging you, don’t start hitting on her on your trip alright…..”
“I can’t promise you that. It’s natural for me to seduce a beauty right.”
“What about Elna?”
“Hmm, you think of her as a beauty huh?”
I frown at the skillful reply.
Seeing me like that, Sieg grins.
“Unfortunately it’s against my policy you see. I see a woman who can catch my spear as a warrior
before a woman. It’s a waste, right? She can provide me with a good fight after all.”
Saying so, Sieg smiles.
It seems Sieg drew a firm line there.
“That’s why even though that missy’s appearance is perfect, she’s outside of my strike zone. She’s a
warrior after all.”
“On the contrary, if she couldn’t catch your spear you would treat her like a lady right?”
“Well, of course. there’s no way I would leave such a beauty alone.”
“Oi Oi…….I’m begging you here alright?”
“Don’t worry. Believe in me.”
Sieg replies to me as he clings on Sebas’s shoulder.
That doesn’t look reliable at all though.
After such a conversation, Sebas bows and leaves.
Then, only me and Leo were left.
“They really are reliable right.”
“You think so?”
“They are the people that Nii-san gave your all to gather after all. There’s no one more reliable than
them you know.”
Leo said as he pushes his right fist out to me.
734
I saw that and I pushed my fist out in the same way.
When our fists met, Leo made a serious expression.
“I will put a stop to it. This war.”
“Yeah, I will leave it to you.”
After such exchange, Leo gets into his carriage.
Thus the envoy set off.
Climbing up to the rampart, I see them off until they left the capital.
“They left huh.”
“Yes, they left.”
Jurgen murmured the same thing as me.
Then, I turn back.
“Where are you going?”
“I have something to do so I will be leaving the imperial capital for a while. If someone asks for me
could you give them an appropriate excuse.”
“I don’t mind but……are you going to monitor His Highness Gordon’s rumored strategist?”
“So you are aware after all.”
“Of course. But please don’t do anything reckless. I can’t show my face to Lizelotte-sama if something
were to happen to you after all.”
“I see. I will be careful then. Don’t worry. I will just observe the situation from a distance.”
“That should be fine but……..what about your escort?”
“I already have one.”
Jurgen nods several times and sends me off with a smile while saying that I should be careful.
With this, there shouldn’t be a problem for me to leave the capital for a while.
I don’t have Sebas to cover for me this time so I have Jurgen fill that role instead.
It’s normal for me to suddenly leave for somewhere so no one would find it suspicious.
“Don’t think that I will let you do anything as you please now, Gordon.”
735
Muttering that in a small voice, I speed up my pace.
It would be easier for me to move once I left the capital.
Now, it’s time for the secret maneuver.
736
SPT Chapter 112
Just bought Tekken7 on sales the other days. I do enjoy it but it seems getting crushed online is
unavoidable huh.
-Mr.Graverobber.
Gordon’s Plan
Gordon left the Imperial Capital and assembled the central army southward of the capital
The number is 30,000.
If everything goes smoothly, the number is expected to increase by two folds.
“Your Highness Gordon! Are we going to just wait around and do nothing!?”
At Gordon’s tent which serves as their headquarters, a bearded middle-aged man appeals to him.
His body is firm but part of his stomach is still protruding out. The name of the man whose height is on
the short side which makes people associate him with a barrel is Adam Gulver.
He is one of the generals stationed in the Imperial Capital who will be serving as Gordon’s second in
command in this skirmish. He is also Gordon’s avid supporter.
“His Majesty ordered us to assemble not to commence an attack.”
“But!”
Gulver hounds at Gordon.
It was Gordon’s faction that purposely cultivated the situation into a large-scale civil war. However, all
of their planning is about to go to waste because of Leo.
Knowing that, Gulver finds it hard to sit still and wait for a report from Leo.
“Well, calm down, Gulver. Until the army is completely ready I will stay here. Before that happens, I
want you to go on a reconnaissance mission.”
“We do not need to conduct any reconnaissance, Your Highness! Our enemies are a bunch of
disorderly mobs! If we launch an attack at them, we will be able to make a hole in their front line and
advance deep into their territory in no time!”
That was not just Gulver’s opinion. It was a consensus among many of Gordon’s military staff.
737
The Southern cities especially those on the front line were low in morale and did not have much force
in the first place. It would be a painful job for Gulver to lead a recon mission even though the cities
that would immediately surrender to them with a simple attack are right in front of his eyes.
However,
“Don’t say that. Gulver, I will give you 10,000 men. Your mission is to scout out the town of Gers
located at their front line.”
His order is unprecedented.
There has never been a case where a general would dispatch one-third of their army on a
reconnaissance mission.
For a moment, Gulver doubted the order that was given to him but he soon realized that Gordon was
having a smile on his face.
“Your Highness has some kind of plan correct!?”
Gulver asked, his face full of expectations.
Gordon simply gives him a nod without saying anything.
To such Gordon, Gulver repeated his reply over and over.
“I understand! I understand now! I will lead 10,000 men out on a reconnaissance mission!”
“I will leave it to you. I will appoint these two as your adjutants as well.”
Saying so, Gordon called two people into the tent.
One of them is Sonia, Gordon’s strategist.
Another is a tall soldier with gray hair. Seeing him, Gulver let out a grin.
“If it isn’t Colonel Letts. It would be encouraging to have your support.”
“It is my honor to serve as your adjutant, General Gulver.”
Letts perform an emotionless salute.
Letts is one of Gordon’s supporters and the commander of his cavalry.
With his ability proven, he is one of Gordon’s confidants despite only holding the rank of colonel.
From Gulver’s perspective he is an irritating man but it still slightly delights him to have Letts as his
adjutant.
Seeing the exchange between the two, Sonia looks straight at Gordon.
738
“There’s no way to know what others will say when they hear that you sent out 10,000 men for a
reconnaissance you know?”
“It’s just a reconnaissance. It never hurt to be cautious after all.”
“……if you are trying to do something then I would advise you to stop. This is my advice as your
strategist. His Majesty the Emperor has already agreed to adopt His Highness Leonard’s plan. I don’t
know what kind of punishment would befall those who try to obstruct it, you know?’
“As I just said, this is a simple reconnaissance.”
Brushing Sonia’s words aside, Gordon nonchalantly answers.
Sonia understands that he isn’t willing to listen to her advice but she couldn’t help but say it.
Even if he succeeds in starting a war, it’s not something that he would be praised for.
Sonia sees that Gordon is walking down a path of self-destruction. If the only thing he is going to
destroy is only himself then that is fine by her but his self-destruction will spread the damage far and
wide.
Sonia wants to stop him but she has no power to do that.
“You will assist Gulver. This is both for your father and for your own sake.”
“…….you have gone mad.”
“Unfortunately, I am completely sane.”
Saying so, Gordon dismisses Sonia and Gulver.
Only Letts remains with him in the tent.
Gordon then asks Letts a question in a small voice.
“Is everything going according to the schedule?”
“Yes, Your Highness! I have arranged everything according to your instructions!”
Letts salute and answer.
Gordon nodded satisfactorily at the work of his trusted subordinate.
He then looked toward the South and grinned.
“This is the end for Leonard huh.”
“But if this strategy succeeds, wouldn’t your next plan turn meaningless?”
739
“There is still a chance. This time the Brave family is also involved. In case we can’t inform Duke
Kruger about our plan, we will enact the second one. I will leave it to you.”
“Understood. I will give it my all to meet your expectation.”
“Yeah. Once Gers fall, you just need to keep pushing from there. Push as far as you can. I will follow
right behind you.”
“Yes, sir! I will definitely pave the way for you!”
Letts confidently declares.
Seeing such confidence from him, Gordon smiles.
Most of the commanders gathered here belong to Gordon’s faction.
No matter what the order is, they will follow Gordon’s command.
“The war will definitely happen and the South will be crushed……..and next will be the Imperial
Capital’s turn.”
“It’s almost time isn’t it.”
“Yeah, this is the end of this petty and troublesome power struggle. I will become the emperor…….the
continent will be unified. After I unify the continent, next we will cross the ocean. Everything in this
world will be united as one under the name of the Empire.”
“I will accompany you, Your Highness!”
Gordon and Letts are imagining their ideal future.
However, the future the two drew up has already started to go mad.
One the side of the covert unit that Gordon called to the capital.
Due to them being an unofficial unit whose existence is only known to a selected few, their number is
small. Despite that, their individual ability boasts some of the finest in the imperial army.
Excellent soldiers have been gathered and subjected to severe training.
They are cooperating with Gordon because they want an emperor who has close ties with the military
so that they can have more ability to shine.
However, the unit was stalled on its way to the south.
“Damn it! What’s going on here!?”
740
The commander of the unit could not believe what was happening to them.
Gordon has dispatched the unit to the South in order to deliver information to Duke Kruger.
That information is, of course, Leo’s strategy.
100 people in the unit are moving to fulfill this mission.
However, the unit is no longer functioning as one.
“No one told me about this damn fog!?”
The cause of their distress was a fog that suddenly enveloped the area.
The fog made it impossible for them to even recognize nearby people and scattered them all over the
place.
Even though they are an elite unit, they have to look for the slightest clue in their surroundings to
move forward.
“This fog clearly is unnatural……..”
Sensing that, the Major erases his presence and cautiously proceeds.
If it didn’t occur naturally then the first possibility is that it is the work of monsters.
A monster that emits fog and hunts for prey inside it. He has never heard of such a monster before but
he can’t dismiss the possibility that there is one.
Without making any loud noise, the Major proceeded quietly.
No matter how thick the fog is, it won’t be a problem for the covert unit to keep proceeding. Those
who have scattered because of the fog can also keep moving forward without a problem albeit slower.
After judging that to be the case, the Major moves forward.
His judgment was both right and wrong.
If it was a normal fog, there’s no need to hesitate while cautiously moving forward. However, the fog
they are seeing right now was not normal.
“How’s the taste of the illusionary fog? Major?”
Floating above the sky was a mage in a silver mask and black robe, Silver.
In his line of sight was the Major and his men walking into the mountain as if they were sleepwalking.
They are being shown an illusionary fog that numbed their sense of direction.
No matter how hard they train, they can’t get anywhere with their senses numbed.
741
Screams can be heard from all over the places.
Being attacked by monsters, walking off the cliff.
All the members of the covert unit had been completely trapped here.
“What a shame, Gordon. It seems your secret unit will be annihilated here.”
Saying so, Silver disappears from the spot.
The covert unit will be trapped in the illusionary fog for several days. After that, when they begin to
recover their sanity, they will not be able to reach Duke Kruger in time.
After all, no matter how fast they are, Leo and the others would arrive at Duke Kruger’s castle by then.
They can’t possibly catch up to them with the several days they lost.
Thus, Silver effortlessly crushed Gordon’s first plan.
742
SPT Chapter 113
Yup, it’s the coffee appreciation day. Do enjoy the double release.
on the side note, guess I will have to start working on Dahlia release soon huh.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Released Arrow
Gers is one of the largest cities on the Southern front.
However, within the Empire, it is only a medium-sized city with about 500 knights. Even if you add all
the men who can fight, there are only about 1,000 men in total.
And now, Gulver is threatening such a town with his 10,000 elite soldiers.
“WAHAHAHA!! Those weakling knights of the South must be shaking in their boots right now!”
Saying so, Gulver gazes upon Gers in good humor.
The town has a reasonably high gate and a fairly high outer wall. It would be quite formidable as a fort
city if properly manned but Gulver knows that Gers only have about a thousand men to defend it.
Once Gordon commences his plan and they are allowed to engage, the town will definitely fall in no
time.
“Colonel Letts. Have you heard anything from His Highness Gordon yet?”
“No, I haven’t heard anything. He simply said that we should try our best to scout out the area.”
“I see. He is doing something somewhere else huh.”
“Perhaps. For now, let’s follow his instructions. There is a hill further ahead. We should be able to have
a good view of the battlefield from there.”
“Good. Guide me there.”
When Gordon becomes emperor, those who support him will be promoted. That being the case, only a
few will be able to get promoted to the rank of Marshal. For Gulver, Letts is his rival.
However, now that Letts is serving under him, it means that Gordon has clearly recognized Gulver as
the one who has a higher standing.
Now, Gulver could see himself as an imperial marshal.
743
When he was immersed in such an image of his future, Sonia interrupted him.
“General. That hill is too close to Gers. Shouldn’t we use an observation point that is a little farther
away?”
“Hmph! What are you saying? Are you saying that they will start attacking us first? Ridiculous.”
“It is not impossible if they have a sniper. As the commander, you should be more careful.”
“Even if it is near, it is still far away from the city. If anyone can snipe at us from Gers then I would
have already heard of such a person.”
“The problem here is that such a person might exist, General.”
“This is why a half-elf girl like you is……….you are being too cowardly.”
While dismissing Sonia’s caution, Gulver steading climbs up the hill.
Letts follows slightly behind him.
Sonia exhales and follows behind them.
However, for a moment, Letts who was walking in front of her slowed down. The escorts around them
also reduced their pace to match him.
Because of that, Gulver reached the hilltop alone.
Then a unique noise of the wind reaches Sonia’s ears.
It then turned into a sound of something being pierced.
“Ah……”
At the top of the hill.
An arrow stuck between Gulver’s eyebrows.
Gulver slowly falls and rolls down the hill.
Letts quickly moved to confirm Gulver’s safety.
“General!? General Gulver!?”
Gulver whose head was pierced by an arrow died instantly.
Letts confirm that and give out his command.
“Alert all men! The General was assassinated! Gers has willingly opened the attack on us!”
Hearing such an instruction, Sonia confirms the look on Letts’s face, expecting the worst.
744
There was a smile on his face, celebrating a successful operation.
“You have your own ally sniped…….?”
“It was the enemy’s doing.”
While saying so, Letts cleans up Gulver’s body.
He then declares.
“From now on I will take command. Sonia, as the strategist, you must draft up the plan to capture
Gers.”
“You went that far……do you want to start a war!?”
“I didn’t want any of this. The one who desired such a thing is them. They have assassinated our
general. As we are under an abnormal circumstance, we will be acting according to my discretion.”
Saying so, Letts walks away without a shred of sadness on his face.
As things went according to Gordon’s schedule, Sonia strengthened her conviction.
She then gazes at the direction of Gers.
“What have they done……”
Did they send a sniper to Gers or did someone from Gers prepare the sniper?
In any case, if Gers, the largest city on the front line falls, the other cities will soon surrender. If that
happens, war will be unavoidable.
The safety of Leo and the others who are at the enemy’s headquarters can not be guaranteed.
If Gers falls this war will turn muddy. The trouble is that Sonia has the power to topple Gers
effortlessly.
“What should I do……”
Sonia had many advantages when she was dealing with Al in the capital. She had both the letter,
Rebecca, and the initiative to act.
However, this time it is different.
It is Gordon who has the initiative and Sonia has little advantage at her disposal.
Still, even if that’s the case.
“I have to do it.”
Thinking that there must be something she can do, Sonia encouraged herself.
745
————————————-
The state of turmoil also happens on the side of the sniper.
“What have you done!? Uncle!!”
The lord of Gers, Earl Alois von Simmel was still a twelve years old boy. His hair is bright brown, the
same with his eyes. He is an ordinary boy who cares about little things in his life like boys his age.
He succeeded as a lord when his father passed away last year while being assisted by his mother and
uncle.
In front of such Alois is his uncle along with his guards.
“Whatever are you talking about?”
“Please stop pretending you don’t know! That sniper was surely acting according to your order!”
“I don’t know anything about that.”
“Uncle! Please explain yourself!”
“Explain myself? You are still too foolish to understand huh, Alois. I have joined forces with the
imperial army.”
“The imperial army…..? Then why did you use the sniper!?”
Alois couldn’t make sense of what his uncle was saying.
Most of the Southern Nobles have their relatives taken hostage by Duke Kruger. Alois’s mother was
also taken hostage by him.
That’s why he can’t surrender. Still, he doesn’t want to be proactive in the war either. This is because
he knows that he will definitely lose.
There may be a chance to win if Duke Kruger leads the whole Southern army but their chance as a
single city is non-existent.
Despite such a delicate situation they are in, his uncle just ordered a sniper to attack a general of the
imperial army while saying that he has joined forces with them.
Alois is now seriously considering that his uncle might have gone crazy.
“The reason is war. His Highness Gordon wants to start a war. Sniping that general gave birth to a
cause for that. They will be enraged by his death and it will turn into a large-scale civil war.”
“You are being crazy……what would His Highness earn by doing all of this!?”
746
“His Highness Gordon will get control of the army and will take the throne with it. After that, I will be
appointed as a lord. That would be a much more preferable situation than the one we are currently
in.”
Saying so, Alois’s uncle smiles.
Seeing the ambitious smile on his face, Alois realized that it is meaningless to say anything more to
him.
The situation is now unsalvageable.
“The imperial army will soon attack. You must not do anything until then, Alois.”
“Do nothing….? This land has been inherited by our house for generations, we must protect our
people!”
“They are not my people.”
Seeing his uncle said that, Alois powerlessly drops his shoulders.
It is impossible to resist.
What can a child like him do?
While Alois was depreciating himself, his eyes found the sword resting on the lord’s chair.
It was the sword his father gave him at his last moment. It was still too big for Alois and he never once
pulled it out.
His eyes still fixed on it, Alois had a determined expression on his face.
He pulled out the sword.
“What are you doing?”
“I’m Earl Simmel. The lord of this territory……I will protect my people!”
“What are you saying when you are rebelling against the Emperor? Your responsibility to them is
already long gone!”
“Even so…this is the pride I inherited! Don’t think that everything will go the way you think!”
Alois glares at his uncle while holding the sword that is still too big for himself.
His uncle who was taken aback by the determined look of a child gave an order to his guards.
“Ca,…..Capture him!”
However, there is no reaction from the guards.
747
Wondering what is happening, his uncle looked back at them.
His guards were sleeping on their feet.
Why thinking how ridiculous the scene is, his eyelids also became heavy as he grew sleepier and
sleepier.
“This is……magic…..?”
“Indeed. I made them go to sleep for a while. I have a little thing to talk about with the young lord after
all.”
When he heard such a voice, his uncle fell to the floor, sleeping.
Only one man remained standing in front of Alois.
“You are…..?”
“SS-rank adventurer, Silver. If you want to do something about this situation, I will offer you my help.”
“Silver!? Why is the guardian of the capital here……”
“As an adventurer, I don’t want the war to happen and spur up the monsters. It will affect public
security. Some people will certainly have more jobs to do but it will cost much more than it worth in
the long run. With that said, having peace is for the best right.”
Saying so, Silver slowly approaches Alois.
Then, Silver’s appearance changed in an instant.
He turned into a mysterious person wearing a gray robe from head to toes. With the hood covering his
face, no matter how you look at him, he looks very suspicious.
“That being said, as an adventurer, it would be a problem for me to involve myself in the Empire’s
problem in a major way. So, I will be disguising myself but if you are fine with this arrangement, I will
serve you until this matter is over.”
“…..are you serious? Why would someone as great as you go so far for us?”
“Currently, the Emperor’s envoy is heading to Duke Kruger. Their intention is to capture the Duke and
end this conflict with as little damage as possible. The reason the army is doing so much to make the
war happen is that they want them to fail. Still, when there are people who want to sabotage the plan,
there are also those who want to protect it.”
“You are here because the person who wants to protect the plan asked you to…….?”
“I don’t mind if you take it like that. How about it? Do you want my help? Or is my help unnecessary?”
Alois who was faced with the simple alternative was a little lost.
748
However, he immediately made his decision.
“I will be borrowing your power.”
“Good. then let’s start our strategy meeting. Hmm….when I come out, can you introduce me as a
wandering strategist?. Now a name huh……..how about you call me [Grau].”
(TLN: Grau = Gray in German)
“Gray huh…….after your appearance I see.”
“A name should be simple.”
Saying so, Silver became Grau, Alois’s vassal.
749
SPT Chapter 114
Second part of the release…..
any way, can anyone buy me more shrimp donuts?
-Mr.Graverobber
The Small Hope
I, who entered Gers as a wandering military strategist, asked the young lord Alois to explain the
situation.
“For the time being can you tell me why it is so restless around here?”
“You are not aware?”
“I was stalling the covert unit sent out by the army. I flew here afterward but the army looked
unusually restless that’s why I came here to ask about the situation. That’s where I caught you earlier.”
“I see……to put it shortly, someone from our side sniped at and assassinated an imperial army’s
general.”
So he has a backup plan huh. This kind of plan is too much for Gordon and for Sonia, it is too rough.
This must be suggested by his other aides.
However, forcefully pushing for war won’t earn any praise from Father.
His intention after the war is over is clear with this.
“That’s an interesting situation you are in. Was that sniper prepared by your uncle?”
“Most likely.”
In that case, the blame is on this side.
Since their general got assassinated, they have to retaliate. Well, it was quite forceful but it allowed
them to act according to their discretion on the field. Moreover, once they break through this city, it
will turn into an all-out war with the South.
If that happens, there’s no way back. The only option left will be to seriously crush the South.
That is probably the best scenario for Gordon.
750
However, if this city doesn’t fall, it will be a different story. We have to limit the conflict to this place.
The information about this will soon reach Duke Kruger. By then Leo and the others should have
already arrived and settled the matter.
If we can hold out for a few days and confine the battle here it will be somewhat manageable.
If the information reaches the capital there’s no doubt that Gordon would be told to stop immediately
so he probably wouldn’t report this. Like us who have to safeguard our information, he is now in a
similar situation.
“The army’s movement was too well ordered. That was probably because things went the way they
expected. Battle is now unavoidable. How many men do you have here?”
“500 knights and 500 soldiers, we have a thousand men in total but…….our soldiers didn’t receive any
proper training……”
“Conscripted soldiers huh. Well, that’s better than nothing……..still, the enemy has 10,000 elites of the
imperial army while we only have a thousand men that were assembled in a hurry. They have ten
times our number but their individual strengths are probably worlds apart from us too.”
Even if our winning condition is to hold out for a few days, the odds they have against us are
despairingly high.
If they seriously try, they should be able to siege the city in a few days.
“Can we really win……?”
Alois asks anxiously.
I pat his head to reassure him.
“There is still a chance. Of course, it will require you to do a lot of things as well. Are you up for it?”
“I, it’s alright! I will show you!”
“Good. First, introduce me to your vassals. What you must do first is to convince them.”
“Yes!”
With his lively reply, Alois and I started walking.
———————————-
“I understand the situation now.”
Said an old knight.
Still, for an old knight, his eyes are sharp and he doesn’t move like an old man at all.
751
This old man who has the atmosphere of a veteran is the Knight Commander of Earl Simmel, Foct.
“If that sniper truly belongs to the Simmel house then offering an apology is no longer possible. No
matter how much Alois-sama is going to plead, the imperial army will never be convinced. Your will to
fight for your esteemed mother and the people of the South is truly splendid. However, who is that
suspicious man beside you?”
Foct stared at me as he said that.
The same is true for others. They are his loyal vassals who have been in the service of his house for a
long time.
They were unrelated to Alois’s uncle’s action and were standing guard at the city wall.
It is only natural for them to fight for Alois but they can’t fully accept the situation with a suspicious
person like me standing beside him.
“Grau saved me. You can trust him.”
“Even if he did save you, trusting him is a different story, my lord.”
Hmm, so we are going that route huh.
In a situation where we must band together, there is no time for infighting.
“Knight Commander Foct. can I say something?”
“What? Wandering strategist.”
“From your perspective, how do you see the current situation?”
“This is the end of the Simmel house.”
“Hmph……naive. Your perception of this situation is too naive, Knight Commander.”
“What?”
When Foct said that, I pointed at the map that was spread on the table for our strategy meeting.
Gers is at the forefront of the South. To let the army through here would mean that the war will spread
to every part of the Southern region.
“If we let them through here, the imperial army will immediately push deep into the South. The war
front will surely spread and it will greatly weaken the Empire. And what is the trigger for that? Yes, it
is none other than the Simmel house. Even if you survive the battle, the Emperor will surely execute
your entire family for it.”
“Th, that is…….”
752
“Still, surrender is no longer an option. You will be faced with the charge of assassinating a general
and getting executed. Simmel house is only a step away from destruction. Moreover, your soldiers will
doubt the reason why they have to fight the imperial army in the first place. Even if the lord’s mother
got taken hostage, that is the problem of the lord’s alone. It will be hard to convince them to fight for
you, you know? Our force is weak while the enemy is strong. The problems only pile up. Still, that is
our reality. You must know the value of someone who offers you their help in this situation, correct?”
“…….even so, I can not trust you immediately.”
“Then you can keep a watch on me. The imperial army will commence their attack soon.”
“…….fine. If you offer us your help while realizing how hopeless the situation is then it means that
there is still a chance for us to win right?”
I nod to Foct’s question.
I then shifted my gaze toward everyone here.
“There is no situation that fits the words absolute despair better than this. However, we still have a
little ray of hope. The imperial army is in the middle of concocting their plan. Within a few days, Duke
Kruger will be caught in a surprise ambush. In other words, we will be fine as long as we hold them
back until then.”
“I have never heard of such a thing before though?”
“It’s a secret after all. Returning to the topic. The Simmel house’s situation may be absolute despair
but if we can hold out for a few days, the situation will completely change. Holding back 10,000 men
with only 1,000 to prevent the war from intensifying is surely an action that even the Emperor can’t
overlook. Moreover, with the matter about your mother that has been taken hostage by Duke Kruger
coupled with the fact that this war has many ties with the succession war that has been going on in the
capital, your situation will definitely change if you can overcome this crisis.”
“…..to be honest, the survival of Simmel house is already a secondary concern to me. What’s more
important is to keep this war from intensifying. That’s what I think. I understand that you all can’t
immediately trust in Grau and that he has no credit to back him up but we have no choice but to trust
him and cooperate. We will simply lose if we fight this by ourselves after all.”
His vassals showed a look of hesitation for a moment but they all hung their head as if they gave up.
Seeing that, Alois shifts his gaze toward me.
“Now, please tell us your strategy.”
“Understood. When the imperial army launches an attack on a fortified city, it is a common practice
for them to concentrate their force at the main gate and send out another group to attack another gate
with less fortification. If they act according to my expectation, they will surely use such a conventional
means to attack us.”
753
“Then should we distribute our force to all four gates?”
“No, the difference between our force and theirs is tenfold. If you want to hold back the attack on the
main gate, you will have to allocate an appropriate amount of force to defend it.”
The attack on the main gate should be a decoy but the scale of our forces are too different in the first
place. That decoy might turn out to be an actual attack from them so it is unwise to move our force
away from the main gate.
Foct’s eyes squint at my words.
“So you have a plan to defeat the flanking unit?”
“Indeed. Our enemy is a large army and a well-trained one at that. On the other hand, ours is small in
number and not even a proper army. They will definitely let their guard down against us. Even if they
are veterans, that is unavoidable. That’s why they will be vulnerable to our trap.”
No matter how vigilant they are, their perception of us is but a rural city.
As the difference in our force is clear, they will not waste much time to be cautious against us.
Their purpose is to break through the city as soon as possible to take control of the Southern front.
If that happens, the Emperor will no longer be able to stop them.
The army will definitely come at us with all their power using conventional strategy.
“Alois-sama. Can you lend me a hundred soldiers?”
“A hundred?……can you defeat the flanking unit with only that many?”
“The army will be aiming for a gate with less defense. We don’t need to defend all three so 100 men
will be enough. And one more thing.”
“You can ask for anything. I will prepare it immediately.”
“It’s not anything big but there should be oils that were prepared for a defensive battle. Can I borrow a
little of it?”
“Attack them with fire huh. But, I don’t think a simple fire attack would defeat the flanking unit
though?”
“I have a plan for that. Don’t worry.”
I said so and lightly smiled.
They can’t see my face but they should be able to tell by the atmosphere.
Feeling a chill, Foct took a step back.
754
Thus I joined the fight against the imperial army.
755
SPT Chapter 115
It’s Wednesday, let’s get started
Special thanks to Erik Tadeo the usual novel addict and Semperfi201 for the extra caffeine!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Wind to the East
Now, it’s time to enact the plan.
Right now, Alois is standing in front of his knights and soldiers.
The knights’ have moderate morale but the soldiers’ morale is clearly low.
Well, that’s a given I guess. From their perspective, even if their lord’s mother got taken hostage, they
don’t have any sense of belonging when they are being suddenly incorporated into the confederation.
The consciousness of being citizens of the Empire still doesn’t change inside them.
That’s why they can’t bring themselves to be fully motivated in this fight.
And the only one who can send them into battle,
is only Alois.
“Sorry that for suddenly gathered you all like this. But there is something that I must truthfully tell
you…….the one who ordered the assassination of the imperial general was my uncle. I have nothing to
do with it but I think the army will not be convinced with that.”
“No way………we have to fight them head-on!?”
“Didn’t you say that we just have to wait until the situation calms down!”
“They have ten thousand men you know! There’s no way we would win!”
The soldiers voice their complaints and anxiety.
Accepting all of that with a firm attitude, Alois gives them a strong nod.
“I have decided to fight. Not for the sake of the Confederation or the Empire. I will fight for the
responsibility that I have inherited for generations. The Simmel house is the lord of this territory. I
have the duty to protect our people. Even if we surrender, the army will surely take many things from
us for the sake of Southern conquest. As a city that rebels against the Empire, not to mention the fact
that we surrender, we will definitely be subjected to punishment. That will definitely lead to the
decline of this territory and that is the only future we must avoid.”
756
If he is being fully honest, he would probably say that he wants to fight for his mother.
For a twelve years old boy who lost his father, how important would his mother be to him?
Still, Alois carries himself with calmness. He is the lord of these people after all.
“His Majesty the Emperor has sent an envoy to Duke Kruger. When the envoy arrives and the
negotiation begins, the war might not occur according to the result. However, if we let the imperial
army through here, that negotiation will become meaningless. Only a few days! We only have to hold
out for a few days and the situation will change! If the negotiation fails, the confederation will have no
choice but to send us reinforcement. On the other hand, His Majesty does not wish for a large-scale
civil war. He will definitely reach out to the cities that put up strong resistance. If we surrender at that
time, the damage to our land will be minimized. So…….Now, I will fight.”
Saying so, Alois unsheathes the sword he inherited from his father.
He then continues to address his knights and soldiers.
“I will not punish anyone who wishes to flee. If you don’t have the resolve to die together with me then
you should leave. I’m sorry for being such a worthless lord…….”
After being told that, his men stay silent for a moment.
In that silence, a soldier carrying a spear shouted.
“Don’t make up some grandeur reason. If you want our help to save your mother then just say it.”
He’s a crude man.
His age is around forty.
Among the amateurish soldiers, he is the only one who carries himself well.
He is probably a retired adventurer.
Perhaps he already stood out in the first place, the eyes around naturally gathered at him.
“Jordan-san…….”
“Now, My Lord. Just give it to me straight. What do you want to do?”
“…….I want to protect my mother…….and, I want to protect this city…….”
“Your predecessor had taken care of all of us.…..of course, we will want to pay him back by helping his
child! Like hell, I can stay still when a kid just said something like that to me! I will chase those
imperial soldiers out of here for you!”
From the words of the man called Jordan, strength returned to the soldiers’ eyes.
757
Their feeling of wanting to flee turned into the will to fight.
They have just now become soldiers.
“That’s right! We will fight!”
“Leave it to me!”
The trust they have in Earl Simmel made them into soldiers.
The soldiers’ morale rose all at once and took the knights by surprise.
Alois then looks at me with happiness in his eyes.
Alright, with this, we can put up a fight.
“Now, I will start explaining our strategy!”
Following the momentum, Foct announced in a loud voice.
Hearing his voice, the men’s morale increased even further.
“WOUAAAHHH!!!!!”
A war cry can be heard from the other side of the gate.
The source of that is the first attack of the imperial army concentrated at the main gate.
Their vanguard doesn’t seem to carry any siege weapon. They are probably doing that on purpose to
create the image that they got drawn into battle by coincidence.
That’s why they will be using classic combat methods in which bows and arrows are used to suppress
us while the soldiers use hammers to destroy the gate and setting up ladders to climb up the wall.
Most of their force is concentrated at the main gate. In a normal battle, the defending side has the
advantage in this kind of battle. No matter how much of an elite they are, the army doesn’t have a
soldier that can match a thousand men and most of their state-of-the-art-weapons are being given to
the border army as they have higher priority.
Thus there is no groundbreaking weapon they can use to overcome our defending advantage.
That’s why they are relying on their number.
“Hey Mr.Strategist, can we really win?”
Jordan, one of the hundred soldiers assigned to me said as he looked over the east gate.
The terrain beyond the east gate is unique.
758
The road leading to the gate is but a single slope.
It is originally the most difficult gate to attack.
That’s why they will be aiming for this gate.
“If we are wrong then it is just a matter of us moving to another gate. Well, it’s not like we are going to
be wrong though.”
“Where did you get that kind of confidence?”
“It’s a common practice of the imperial army. Attacking the main gate while sending out a unit to
attack another gate. They will be commencing a surprise attack so they will be attacking the gate that
is the most difficult to attack, incorporating the psychological effect that we would never expect them
to attack such a gate. That was what they were taught.”
The moment I said that, enemies appeared in front of the east gate.
Their number is around a thousand. They are rushing straight to the gate with a few cavalries in the
lead and soldiers following behind them.
“They arrived huh. Shoot arrows at them.”
“They really came…….that was surprising…….”
Following my instruction, the few men on the wall release their arrows.
The reason why there are only a few men here is that there are only a small number of soldiers who
can accurately fire their arrows. Naturally, the enemies couldn’t be stopped by just this.
As expected, the other side also doesn’t think that we would leave the gate unmanned either.
Their expectations should be strengthened with the few arrows we released at them.
Hit by an arrow, the cavalry leading them collapsed with a loud noise hitting several people running
behind him.
However, they don’t stop.
“KEEP PUSHING!!”
The man who seems to be their leader raises a loud voice while leading them on his horse.
The archers on the wall started to get frightened but I told them to calm down in a calm voice.
“Don’t worry. Just keep shooting.”
“Y, Yes!”
759
“Take care of the preparation below.”
“Sure.”
Hearing my instruction, Jordan and the men started to hold down the gate.
Soon after, the soldiers in the lead arrived at the gate and began to hit it with their hammers.
They also tried to set up a ladder but they were stopped by the archers who pushed it off or shot the
soldiers below. However, the same can not be said about the gate that is gradually being torn down by
the hammer.
“PUSH! HURRY UP AND TEAR DOWN THAT GATE!”
“UWAAA!! The gate won’t hold anymore!”
The wooden pillars that were attached to reinforce the gate began to creak.
The soldiers somehow managed to hold the gate but their attackers are clearly stronger.
However, all of this is within my expectation.
Checking the time, I sent a signal to Jordan.
As he saw the signal, Jordan evacuated the soldiers from the gate.
“IT WON’T HOLD ANYMORE! FALL BACK! RUN!!!”
“ARHGHHH!!”
“RUN AWAY!!”
Their retreat isn’t an act.
Only a few people know the details about this plan so their terrified screams were real.
That’s why it will be even easier for the enemy to believe,
the fact that their attack is successful.
“ALRIGHT! TAKE IT DOWN!”
Their hammer finally broke the gate.
At that moment, Jordan and the others who fell back earlier threw their javelins.
The soldiers who were trying to break through suddenly get skewered but the enemies are not
frightened.
“HAA! WEAK! DON’T BE SCARED! CHARGE!!”
760
With their commander encouraging them, the flanking unit broke through the east gate all at once and
flowed inside.
However, they were careless.
A large amount of oil has been spread inside the gate and the soldiers that rushed in slipped and fell.
“Wha, the hell is this!?”
“Uwa!!”
“Oil!? IT’S OIL SIR!!”
The scene of chaos immediately unfolds inside the gate.
Unfortunately for them, the soldiers that rushed in behind them with great momentum pushed them
even further into the oily trap.
Meanwhile, Jordan prepared a torch and walked toward me.
“Oi! Mr.Strategist! Should I do it now!?”
“Sure, go ahead.”
“The wind is blowing westward you know!? Won’t the fire spread into the city!?”
“Don’t worry about that. Today, at this time…….the wind will blow east.”
“You sure!? I don’t care anymore alright!!”
Saying so, Jordan threw the torch at the oil-covered soldiers.
At that moment.
The wind suddenly changed direction to the east. And when the fire came into contact with the oil, an
explosion erupted.
A large fiery explosion occurred and the gust of wind blew the fire to the east so the city was left
unaffected.
Instead, the fire envelope the rest of the attacking soldiers that were lining up vertically up the slope.
It was as if a dragon just released a fiery breath from the east gate.
The fire burned down the flanking unit and those who managed to somehow survive are those who
are at the back.
Right now, the survivors are busy rescuing the people who got burned by the fire.
They no longer have enough leeway to attack us anymore.
761
“To all survivors! I, Grau, the wandering strategist is here in this city of Gers! I will never let any single
one of you set foot in this city! Tell that to your commander!”
After I said that I see the retreating soldiers off with a smile.
Meanwhile, Jordan approaches me with a surprised expression on his face.
“You……are you a mage?”
“No, that was purely a calculation.”
“Seriously……..”
Saying so, I stick my tongue out under my hood.
Of course, that was magic.
The direction of the wind wouldn’t naturally change in such a timely manner.
However, a strategist who utilizes an ingenious plan is way more scarier than a strategist who uses
magic.
It’s fine as long as they don’t find out that I was using magic and most things would just pass if I tell
them that it was all a part of my plan. To deceive the enemy, first, you need to deceive your ally.
Eventually, the rumor will spread and they will come to fear me.
With this, the imperial army has to come up with countermeasures against me. This will buy us time
and it will make them lose their calm.
After all, they don’t have much time.
“Alright, please move according to the plan after this.”
“Yeah, I got it. Leave it to me.”
Saying so, Jordan gathers his subordinates.
Our next move has already been decided.
We also have to set things up ahead of time after all.
“Now, I wonder what kind of plan they would come up next?”
While saying such a thing, I gaze at the imperial army.
762
SPT Chapter 116
The war(?) continues. let’s see what these people are going to do next.
BTW, anyone heard that rumor about Justice League Snyder’s cut? I don’t have HBO though……
-Mr.Graverobber
Battle against time
The next day, the army gave up on their surprise attack and came at us with a frontal assault.
For their commanders, that is certainly a wise plan.
Divided their force into four, they have surrounded us and pushed their attack at all four gates.
With that, our force will have to spread even thinner despite us having a clear disadvantage in
number———or it was supposed to.
However, the result is different.
“UOOOOOOOOOO!!”
“GET THE HELL DOWN!!”
The knights and soldiers of Gers are defending against their attack with high morale.
Arrows and rocks are raining down on the imperial army.
We are on the defending side but it’s more like we are on the offensive.
There are many reasons for this.
Their strategy was seen through, the loss of a thousand elite soldiers, the fire attack yesterday, and the
appearance of the mysterious strategist who orchestrated that attack.
These created rumors that rise the vigilance and anxiety inside the imperial soldiers.
There might be some kind of trap near the gate, or if they use fire something might happen.
Such vigilance and anxiety dulled their judgment.
“BREACH THAT GATE!”
“Yes, sir!”
Acknowledging the commander’s order, the soldiers move to the front.
763
However, the moment they saw the gate.
The image of the burned soldiers who were carried into their camp yesterday flicker in their minds.
Instead of moving directly to the gate, they choose to go at it from the side.
However, such unnecessary action causes the soldiers to become prey to the raining arrows.
That being the case, even if they had to split up their force to cover all four gates, they are still elite
soldiers fighting against conscripted commoners. There’s no reason for them to lose.
The cause of the current situation is basically from Gers.
They never missed the opening shown by the confused soldiers and strictly followed the command of
their commander. They continue exhibiting an outstanding ability to focus on the situation and
continue to take the best course of action.
The quality they showed makes all wonder which side is the well-trained soldiers.
Continuing to be attacked by such opponents, their casualties continued to increase at each of the
gates, realizing that there was no prospect of breaking through any of the gates, the acting commander
Letts eventually ordered a temporary withdrawal.
“Is the enemy soldiers a monster or something!?”
Letts hit the table and yelled in his commanding tent.
The feeling of wanting to yell the same thing is shared among the commanders gathered inside
They were the commanders who led the attack on each of the gates who did everything in their power
to breach the city but still faced a crushing defeat. They have lost both their precious time and
soldiers.
They were doing great halfway there but it all went south afterward.
All because of a single man.
“It’s as if they were using magic…….the enemy soldiers are too different from the ones we fought
yesterday.”
“I’ve never heard of any magic that can turn amateur soldiers into elites…….I can understand that they
gained confidence from their victory yesterday and their morale increased but their changes today are
completely ridiculous……”
“Reading the flow of the wind and turning a mere fire into a dragon breath……fear is spreading among
our soldiers because of such rumors.”
Letts bites down his lips at the words of the commanders.
764
Their original plan was to immediately occupy the city and push forward but in reality, he lost many of
his soldiers and they haven’t moved even a single step.
The person from the Simmel house who prepared the sniper for him has gone silent so it is impossible
to stir things up from the inside. There is almost no plan left available to Letts.
If he can’t break through Gers, Gordon’s plan will be ruined and Letts himself will be in danger. Even if
their general got assassinated, the Emperor doesn’t wish for war. Since he has already opened attacks
on them, there will surely be some kind of punishment waiting for him.
Moreover, the power structure inside Gordon’s faction will change.
Letts has many things hanging on the line here that’s why he immediately made the decision.
“Call Sonia…..we need a strategist of our own to combat theirs.”
“Can we really trust that half-elf?”
“She might corner us even further sir!”
“That won’t happen. As long as we have the hostages, Sonia has no choice but to obey us.”
“But…..”
“Enough….I have already decided. Just bring her to me.”
Following Letts’s command, a soldier left to call Sonia.
After a while, Sonia entered the tent with a dissatisfied expression on her face.
“You called me?”
“Our enemy has a strategist. We need you to come up with a countermeasure against him.”
“I think I have already submitted one though?”
“We can’t afford to have a battle of endurance here!”
Before the battle began, Sonia proposed to surround the city to weaken their enemy.
Still, for Gordon’s plan, they have to breach the city within a few days so they didn’t adopt her plan.
However, for Sonia, that was a far better plan.
“We lost a thousand men on the first day and another thousand today, no? We only have eight
thousand men left. I can already see the result if we decide to continue our assault like this. Your plan
already failed when we failed the surprise attack yesterday. Our enemy has already united and they
are defending the city with high morale. I wouldn’t attack such an enemy.”
765
“We have to keep attacking! If you call yourself a strategist then come up with a plan! Don’t you care
what will happen to the hostages!?”
“……no matter what you say, my answer won’t change. If you want to reach your goal, you have to
breach Gers on the first day. The second way is to siege the city and don’t give them the chance to
unite. From the start, I intend to give you as much cooperation as I can.”
She already suggested a solution. Right now she is saying that it was their fault for not adopting it.
That being said, she knew full well that they would never adopt such a plan.
Even from Sonia’s perspective, their surprise attack has a high possibility of success.
Their enemy is an amateur. No, they were supposed to be. But it all changed because of just one
strategist.
“They have a strategist that cleverly unites their soldiers under their lord and comes up with a way to
intercept our attack. Right now, Gers is no longer a city that we could easily crush. If we forcibly attack
them now, we can expect to suffer a counterattack from them.”
“There’s no other way left for us but to forcibly attack them! Just come up with a good plan for us!”
Being pressed by Letts, Sonia sighs.
They will face a huge loss if they attack the city without a siege weapon.
It would be a different story if they have a mage unit but such a unit wouldn’t be accompanying the
soldiers on a reconnaissance mission.
As far as she can think, there is no immediate way to effectively breach the city.
However, if she doesn’t come up with some kind of countermeasure, she doesn’t know what kind of
fate will await the hostages.
Even so, if Gers falls, it will plunge the South and the Empire into an all-out war.
Sonia mulling over it for a while and raises a question.
“How much time do we have left?”
“Probably two days. After that, the envoy should arrive at Duke Kruger’s territory.”
Even if they manage to break through Gers, there would be no war if the enemy’s leader is already
captured.
What the imperial army must fight against is not Gers but time.
Thus Sonia offers them a solution.
“Then let’s take one day off the offensive and build siege weapons.”
766
“Didn’t I just tell you that we have no time!? Are you planning to stall us!? At the earliest, the envoy
might arrive tomorrow you know!?”
“That is just one possibility. We have no choice but to bet against it. If we have that two days grace
period then we will use it. Let me ask you back, are you still underestimating the enemy?”
Letts stay silent.
Cutting down trees and making siege weapons. With that, she can buy more time and provide them
with the possibility to breach Gers.
The only fault in this is that the imperial army might really be able to break through Gers but Sonia
decided to trust in Gers’s strategist.
Normally, if your enemy suddenly stopped attacking you for a day, you would let your guard down but
a master at reading the flow of the situation like Grau, wouldn’t make such a mistake. He must have
some kind of plan in place against their move.
As long as Gers keeps this up, it is entirely possible for them to hold out for a few more days.
Sonia read Grau’s thinking and presented the plan with a fifty percent chance of success.
This can go either way.
This is the limit of what Sonia could do, and it is a plan that is worth a try for the imperial army.
“Alright…..then let’s get started. Order the men to immediately build the siege weapons!”
Letts gives his order.
Seeing him, Sonia left the tent and began to slowly walk away.
Her destination is the hill where Gulver was assassinated.
She climbs up the hill and looks at the state of Gers.
She doesn’t know specifically why but they seem to be lively. It’s the characteristic of a strong enemy.
If she has time she would be able to come up with a way to defeat them but time is something she
doesn’t have.
Thinking that, she realized. Before she knew it, she already thinking about how to defeat the enemy’s
strategist.
“I wonder what kind of person you are, Grau? A gentle one, or a ruthless one.”
Sonia looks at Gers, asking the question that shouldn’t be heard by anyone.
Then, a man came up on the wall of Gers.
767
He is covered from head to toes with a gray robe.
He looks in Sonia’s direction.
Then he gives her a bow.
When she was taken aback by his action, he raised a loud voice.
“You sure are carefree enough to visit your enemy huh! Ms.Strategist! I heard the rumor of a half-elf
strategist that outwitted the succession war candidates at the capital! I will look forward to seeing
what you are going to do in this situation!”
“……to even know about something like that, you are quite informative aren’t you!”
“Yeah, I know a lot of things! Your folks are being taken hostages right? Quite a hardship you are going
through huh! I do feel sorry that you are not able to choose your own master!”
“!?”
Sonia opened her eyes wide in surprise.
Seeing such Sonia, Grau lightly laughs. He then fixes his appearance and speaks again.
“Just move with the hostages in mind! I don’t mind even if you come at us with all your power! I will
render your efforts to ashes!”
“……I will take up on your offer then.”
Hearing Grau, Sonia looks ahead.
That was a provocation.
Don’t use the hostages as an excuse and give come at me with everything. I will win anyway.
If that’s the case then I will get serious as well.
Thinking so, Sonia enters the command tent and brushes the soldier who was drawing up the plan for
the siege weapons away.
“Give me that. I will do it myself.”
If he went as far as to provoke her then he must already have some kind of preparation in places.
She can’t afford to go against him with some half-baked siege weapons.
Sonia does her best and draws up the plan for a siege weapon as Grau advised so that later Gordon
can’t say that she is uncooperative with him.
768
SPT Chapter 117
I’m hangry again……
Help……send shrimp donuts…….
-Mr.Graverobber
PS. This one is from Leo/Finne’s POV
The Small War
Around the time Al is posting as Grau in the defense of Gers.
Earlier than Gordon’s expectation, Leo and the others were arriving at Wumme, the home of Duke
Kruger.
This is all thanks to the Southern cities they have passed through so far.
“I never thought that they would let us through so easily.”
Leo who was expecting some obstruction muttered as he passed through the gate of Wumme.
While observing the surrounding area, Sebas who was there with Leo replied.
“That must have been because there are only a few people who actually side with Duke Kruger. The
expressions of the people I have seen so far were also not lively. This rebellion surely is not the
consensus of all the Southern people.”
“Then there is really a meaning for us to come here huh.”
“There isn’t any meaning by just arriving alone, Your Highness.”
Lars said so after he put his horse next to Leo’s.
The elite soldiers of the Narbe Ritter are escorting Finne’s carriage but it doesn’t mean that they have
to stay with her at all times.
“Something must be done about Duke Kruger”
“Of course, I know that. Colonel.”
“Then allow me to confirm the plan. Once we arrive at his castle, Duke Kruger will probably come out
to welcome us. That is our opening. If we let it slip, he will surely have the chance to alert his guards.”
“But if we use that chance, Finne-san will be in danger.”
769
“Please rest assured. Lynfia-dono and I will be there to protect her. Moreover, if push comes to shove,
we still have that secret plan in place as well.”
Saying so, Sebas looks at Leo.
To Leo who looks like he wants to ask if it will really be okay, Sebas quietly nods to assure him.
Despite how strong the Narbe Ritters are as her escort, it will arouse his suspicion if Finne has too
many guards with her when she conducts the negotiation as an envoy directly with the Duke.
That’s why the role of Finne’s guard is entrusted to someone who can naturally stay at her side like
Sebas who came along as her butler.
“…….Okay, Colonel. I will leave the timing to you.”
“Understood. Please make sure to stay slightly away from the Duke, Your Highness.”
“You don’t have to worry about me. I can protect myself.”
“…….if something were to happen to you, we wouldn’t be able to face His Highness Arnold when we
return, Your Highness.”
“Colonel. I didn’t come here to be protected. I came here to capture Duke Kruger. If we fail, it would be
me who wouldn’t be able to face Nii-san.”
Seeing Leo staring straight at him, Lars’s eyes slightly opened and he bows his head to apologize.
“Forgive me, Your Highness. It seems my worry is unnecessary.”
“Colonel Lars. What His Highness said is true. Unlike Arnold-sama, Leonard-sama never slacked off in
his exercise after all.”
“So he can carry himself in combat? Sebas?”
“Yes, even though there shouldn’t be much difference between them. For twins to have this much gap
in physical ability really is rare. That person really is lacking after all. It made me worry a little about
him when he complained about muscle pain just by holding up a sword.”
“It would be fine if he gradually practices but he always swings his sword at full power every time.
Seriously, Nii-san.”
“He was trying to put up a good impression after all.”
“Agreed. He was trying to look good. Still, that is definitely why he stabbed his left hand. He always
tries to look cool in his own way after all.”
Hearing such an impression from Leo, a smile appears on Lars’s face.
770
Leo never enjoyed participating in the succession war but there are a lot of things that made him glad
that he did.
One of that is the fact that people are starting to appreciate Al.
Being lazy bones, Al who tried to move as little as possible started to move after they participated in
the succession war. Seeing him moving around, the people begin to realize that the Dull Prince is
nothing but a false facade.
It was a happy development for Leo.
“You look very happy about it though?”
“I am. I’m glad that Nii-san is finally appreciated. And…..I’m happy that I can do something together
with him. He set this stage for me. The best stage I could ask for. When I told him that I want to have as
little sacrifices as possible, he went along with my selfishness and forcibly prepared everything for
me. I’m happy that I am now standing on the stage he set. It made me feel that I can fight alongside
him.”
Saying so, Leo moves his horse ahead.
In front of him was the main gate to Duke Kruger’s castle.
“I am the Eighth Imperial Prince, Leonard Lakes Adler! I have escorted His Majesty the Emperor’s
envoy! Open the gate!!”
At Leo’s words, the main gate slowly opened.
Leo advances inside on his horse. Entering the place is the last part of the preparation.
With the conviction that he can not leave until everything is over, Leo entered the castle.
After Leo and the others got off their horses, they were guided by the knights.
Right now, they are currently under the castle’s balcony.
“This is?”
“If it isn’t, Prince Leonard. It’s been a while.”
Hearing that voice, Leo slightly squints his eyes.
The reason is that Duke Kruger has appeared on the balcony.
It was too rude to welcome an imperial envoy like that.
“It’s been a while. Duke Kruger. What is the meaning of this?”
771
“No no, this is simply a small safety measure. It’s not like I am doubting you or anything but my life is
prone to get targeted lately. Please stay there and send up the imperial envoy alone.”
That was synonymous with entering the beast’s lair alone.
Leo frowns as he protests.
“Don’t you think that you are being too rude. Please come down here and receive the letter from us.
The contents of the letter should have already been confirmed by the knight you dispatched earlier.”
“Unfortunately, I will only confirm the content of that letter up here. If you find this arrangement
unagreeable then please feel free to leave.”
“Then I will be accompanying the envoy as well.”
“The imperial envoy must come up here alone.”
Hearing Duke Kruger, Leo unconsciously reach for his sword. The reason is that the Duke is being too
rude toward them.
However, the plan can’t be enacted before the Duke checks the letter’s contents. This is to justify their
actions with Duke Kruger’s refusal. If they spring their trap here, they will be perceived as nothing but
a group of assassins posting as an imperial envoy.
However, Finne immediately accepted the Duke’s proposal.
“I understand. I will be heading up there then.”
“Finne-san……..”
“I don’t mind. Duke Kruger would never harm His Majesty’s envoy, no?”
“But of course. Blau Mowe.”
“Then I’m relieved. My mission is to deliver His Majesty’s letter to Duke Kruger. If that’s what Duke
Kruger wants, I will comply.”
Saying so, Finne urges the knight to guide her up with her eyes.
After getting an okay from us, the knight begins to guide Finne upstairs.
“Uhmm……that is?”
“He’s the stuffed animal I took a liking to recently. Isn’t he cute?”
Saying so, Finne shows off the bear to the knight.
The knight can’t keep up with Finne’s uplifting attitude and guide her to the balcony without saying
anything more.
772
“Good day. Blau Mowe. Your beauty shines even more from up close.”
“Thank you very much. Duke Kruger. This is the letter from His Majesty.”
“Allow me.”
Saying so, Kruger opens the letter surrounded by his knights.
He read through it without even moving an eyebrow.
“I see. So this is His Majesty’s answer?”
“Yes.”
“What a cruel person he is. To think that he would send you out here personally and declare war
against me.”
“Unfortunately, that was not a declaration of war, Duke Kruger. By the name of His Majesty the
Emperor, I am ordering you. Bend the knee and immediately lay down your weapons. If you do not
comply………I will issue a punishment.”
“HaHaHa! Punish me? What can you do in this situation? Unfortunately, the answer is no. Let’s have
you become our hostage and then we can start anew.”
“Are you challenging His Majesty’s decree?”
“His Majesty, His Majesty, even if you mention him there won’t be any effect on me you know? My
Kruger house was originally the king of our own country until it was annexed by the Empire. It was
the imperial family who forcibly took that from us and label our house as a ducal one. My house never
forgot our grudges and hatred ever since. I have never thought of that man as anyone respectable!”
“I see……a long-standing grudge is it. I don’t know how much such a thing has accumulated but one
thing that I can say is that this land once belonged under your rule. Even if it were to be annexed by
the Empire, the people of this land should still be your subjects. Still, you have put your people
through suffering. The moment you did that you have no right to call yourself their monarch.
No…….you can’t even call yourself a noble!”
“I will not argue with you about the obligation of royalty or the noble here. Let me say this one thing.
Only the strong shall rule.”
“Then you certainly don’t have any caliber as a king. A king is much stronger than you think, a king is
someone who shoulders their subjects.”
At that moment, the stuffed bear in Finne’s hand started to move.
It suddenly pulled out a spear and took down the knights around Finne.
As expected, Kruger doubted his eyes at the scene.
773
“Wha!?”
“Argh, if you just keep talking then I would be able to enjoy the paradise even longer……..it’s your fault
alright, Duke. but thanks to you, I get to enjoy such a good feeling so, Thanks!”
Saying so, Sieg, the stuffed bear, rushes through the knights.
Kruger escapes with his knights shielding him but Leo and his subordinates already invade the castle
from below.
“You won’t escape! Kruger!”
“Kuh! Kill them all!”
Hearing Kruger’s command, the knights stand in front of Leo.
However, the Narbe Ritters led by lars blow them away and open the path for Leo.”
“Finne-san!”
“I’m alright! Please go on ahead!”
“Understood! Please be careful, Finne-san!”
“Yes! Good luck, Leo-sama! Sieg-san, please go and support Leo-sama.”
“Can’t be helped then. I would be more motivated to escort a beauty though. Still, guess I can’t deny
the beauty’s request huh.”
Saying so, Sieg chases after Leo.
Meanwhile, Finne leaves the scene together with several Narbe Ritters and Lynfia.
Thus, a small war has started inside the castle of Wumme.
774
SPT Chapter 118
Honestly, I think some of the details in this chapter should be added to the first two arc of this story.
it would really fleshed out the character…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Each of their Battle
“Don’t let him get away!”
Following Leo’s order, the Narbe Ritters chase after Kruger.
However, a group of knights rushed toward them to stop their pursuit.
During the battle between the knights and the Narbe Ritters, Leo’s and Kruger’s eyes met.
“You will never escape!”
“Hmph! How many knights do you think I have in this castle! It seems you brought an elite unit with
you but my castle will never fall to some mercenaries!”
“It would be nice if you don’t underestimate us so much.”
Saying so, Lars then swings his dual swords and cuts through the enemy knights.
Seeing that, Kruger immediately turned back and started to run away.
Leo took some of his men and followed Kruger through the path Lars paved.
775
“It seems he is heading to the upper level.”
“He must have something there. He is Zandra’s uncle after all.”
“Doesn’t matter. We came this far already, the rest is just to break through anything he throws at us.”
Saying So, Sieg climbs on Leo’s back.
Seeing that, Lars let out a sigh.
“Being able to ride on His Highness like that, aren’t you in quite a high position.”
“My legs are short after all. Well, since we are working cut me some slack okay.”
“It’s fine. I will count on you when the time comes alright.”
Without minding Sieg, Leo continues to run.
The Narbe Ritters also don’t have anything to say anymore.
It’s a battlefield so they understand that voicing something Leo doesn’t mind about would be
meaningless.
“Enemy soldiers incoming from the left!”
“Third and Fourth platoon! Go and intercept them!”
“Yes, sir!”
Upon receiving Las’s command, the platoons split off to intercept the enemy.
If they stop, they will not be able to push through them with force anymore. Even if he has to split up a
few of his men, Leo has no choice but to keep advancing.
Still, Leo anxiously looks at the soldiers who head off to intercept the enemy.
Seeing Leo like that, a soldier says this to Leo.
“Please do not worry about them. We are prepared for any kind of situation.”
“…….You, what’s your name?”
“Second lieutenant Bernd Lerner, sir.”
“I heard that name before. Nii-san told me that you were the first to volunteer right.”
“Yes, sir! I thought that this is something worth putting my life on the line for. So please keep looking
forward and leave escorting you to us.”
“……I understand. I will leave my back to you.”
776
“Please leave it to me.”
When Lerner and Leo were having such a conversation, Sieg who was riding on Leo detected
something and started to get alert.
“Be careful. I got a bad feeling about this.”
“Hearing the word bad feeling from an adventurer sure gave me a chill.”
While Lars says that, perhaps everyone also felt the same feeling, they all raise their vigilance.
Something is there that worth them prioritize their vigilance rather than speed.
That’s what Lars and Sieg felt.
And that feeling wasn’t wrong.
Loud noises echoed from the wall next to the passage Leo and the others are on.
And it is getting closer and closer.
“Scatter!”
Receiving Lars’s instruction, everyone jumped away from the place.
Then, after a moment, the walls of the passage burst open.
“UOHHHHHHH!!”
“What!?”
“Careful!”
The Narbe Ritters take position.
Then it emerged from the smoke of the collapsed walls.
Its body length is around two meters and its width took up half of the large passage.
Surprisingly it was a human. However, no matter how one looks at it, that is no doubt a monster.
“That gave me a surprise. It seems this castle also breeds monsters huh.”
“This is not the time to joke around! Hold your position!”
Without going along with Sieg’s light comment, Leo gave his order.
However, Sieg took over.
“Give it up. This thing is not something you can go against with number alone.”
777
Saying so, Sieg gets down fro Leo’s back and held his spear in front of the man-like monster.
Then.
“Go. I will take care of this guy.”
“Sieg….can you take it down alone?”
“Don’t be stupid. Of course it’s the job of adventurers to take care of monsters. Leave this to me.”
Hearing Sieg, Leo gives Lars a nod.
Lars immediately understands his intention and gives a command to his subordinates.
“Join the platoons that split off earlier and stop the enemy’s advance! The rest, follow me!”
With the map of the castle inside the imperial castle’s library, the Narbe Ritters have already
memorized the layout of this place.
Thus, the soldiers who received the instruction immediately move out.
“Sieg! Be careful!”
“You too. They might have something similar to this guy ahead after all.”
“I will do something about it when the time comes.”
Smiling bitterly at Leo’s reply, Sieg sees Leo and the others off.
Then, he turned his sight back to the man in front of him.
“Either magic or some drugs huh…..either way, this is still too inhuman. Sorry but, I am not free
enough to go easy on you. I will come at you for real alright?”
“UOHHHHH!!”
The man responds to Sieg with a scream.
Sieg then turned his spear to the man and disappeared.
“Uoh?”
“It seems that you are numb to pain huh.”
Sieg said that as he stood behind the man.
A large amount of blood was dripping from the tip of his spear.
The man looks at it mysteriously and slowly turns to look at his left hand. He tried to move it but it
won’t budge.
778
His left hand was cut halfway at the elbow and dangling around.
“Uohhhhh!!??”
“You are slow huh. The joint seems pretty weak so I will be shaving that off. Now, come at me.”
In response to Sieg’s provocation, the man swings his right hand with all his might. The force
destroyed the floor but Sieg lightly jumped up and planted his feet on the ceiling.
He then uses it as a foothold and lunges the man. After he landed, he jumped up again.
Sieg continued to leap around like a bouncing ball attacking the man’s weak points and eventually, the
man became unable to move.
“TERYAAA!!”
“!?”
Sieg’s spear sent the man’s neck flying.
The man’s neck then falls to the floor with a heavy sound.
“Sorry. I’m not such a good guy that would be thinking about a way to save you.”
Saying so, Sieg looks at the man’s corpse a little dejected.
“Making a human into a monster huh………to hell with that.”
Sieg angrily muttered and turned his sight toward the approaching knight unit that heard the sound
and came to investigate.
“It’s a bear!”
“It’s the enemy in the report!”
The knights pulled out their swords and approached Sieg but he only silently pointed his spear at
them.
With just that, the knights stopped, cold sweat ran down their back.
“Uuu…..”
“Kuh! Ch, Charge!!”
A knight braves his way forward but Sieg emotionlessly pierces his chest.
Then, he pulled out his spear and started talking to them amidst the geyser of blood.
“If you want to get past me then don’t come at me with a half baked courage. Charge at me with the
resolve to die. I’m quite pissed right now.”
779
Saying so, Sieg blocked the passage.
After Leo and the others rushed into the castle, Finne and her guards are also being chased.
However, with Lynfia and the Narbe Ritters, they couldn’t get close to Finne.
“Please step back a little bit.”
“Yes……”
Finne took a step back, following Lynfia’s instruction.
Then, the knight that tried to grab Finne was cut down by Lynfia.
Seeing that, Finne silently makes a saddened expression.
The loss of life. She came here with the resolve to witness it.
Instead of herself who couldn’t fight, many people have to stain their hands with blood in her place.
it’s not like she could tell her men to lay down their weapons because their enemies are pitiful either.
Still, she couldn’t just turn off her feelings just because they are enemies.
“It’s done. Finne-sama?”
“…….”
Finne quietly crouched near the knight who was cut down earlier.
The Narbe Ritters tried to stop her because it was dangerous but Lynfia stopped them.
“I’m Finne von Kleinert. Do you have a final word?”
“Augh…..I, I am…….a knight who serves the Talnath house……..”
“? Why are you here?”
“M, my lord…..has been taken hostage…….I have to catch you……or they will kill him……..”
“…..Is there anything I can do?”
“Please…..my lord……..”
Saying so, the knight reaches out to Finne.
Finne tried to grasp his hand but before she could, the knight’s hand powerlessly fell.
“I understand…….”
780
“Finne-sama. We have to move.”
One of the Narbe Ritters impatiently said.
In response, Finne gives them a small nod.
She then looks at Lynfia.
Lynfia who understands the meaning behind Finne’s expression was a little surprised but she smiled
and nodded.
“As you wish, Finne-sama.”
“Lynfia-san…..”
“I am only here to protect you. And I also think that what you are trying to do is splendid as well,
Finne-sama.”
“…..Sorry. Thank you very much.”
Saying so, Finne looks at the elites of the Narbe Ritters who are acting as her guards.
For Finne’s guards, only the most talented of the Narbe Ritters were selected.
To them, they couldn’t understand why Finne would do something meaningless like she earlier did in
such a situation.
Escorting her to a safe place as soon as possible is their job so staying still and talking is only a
meaningless act to them.
However, immediately after, they were told something in a language that they could understand.
“I……..will rescue the hostages.”
“Wha!? Are you sane!?”
“This is no time for that Finne-sama!”
“Please reconsider!”
All the soldiers oppose her decision.
However, after a quick glance at them, Finne declared.
“I understand how dangerous this will be. However, as the Emperor’s envoy, I have an obligation to
save them.”
“But!”
781
“I know why everyone wants to stop me. And probably…….you are correct after all it is smarter to just
evacuate from here.”
Saying so, Finne slowly touches her blue seagull ornament.
Ever since she received this hair ornament, she was no longer just a daughter of a duke.
She hates that idea and refused to leave her territory. Still, she left and forcibly stayed by Al’s side.
The reason for that is the special feeling inside her. The feeling of wanting to be useful to Al. the
feeling of wanting to repay him. Those kinds of feelings.
A long time ago, beauties all across the Empire were gathered at the imperial capital to decide who
will be the owner of this ornament. Of course, Finne was there. However, with that as her first time in
the imperial capital, the fact she had never seen such a large crowd before coupled with how she will
meet the Emperor in person for the first time made her very nervous. For Finne, who was still only 14
years old at the time, the pressure was too much for her to handle.
As she was hanging her head as anxiety took over her, there was a boy who cheerfully encouraged
such Finne.
Finne, whose face was hidden under a veil, was told by the boy that the Emperor was just an ordinary
old man and there’s nothing that she should be nervous about. It was quite silly because he was there
with her because he just escaped from the stage she will be standing on because he thought it was
troublesome.
Still, Finne was able to calm down after talking with him. And then, she obtained the title of the blue
seagull princess. For that boy, it must have been something trivial but for Finne, that was a big
moment. Ever since then, Finne has admired the boy, Al.
When Al arrived at her home, Finne thought that it was her chance to thank him. That’s why she never
said [Nice to meet you] to Al back then. However, back then, Al furiously berated her father. It
depressed Finne when she thought that the boy had changed.
However, Al actually never changed.
The same as he was that day, he still remained a kind person. Knowing his secret, Finne begged her
father. She wanted to stay by Al’s side and help him. She might be a dead weight to him but she still
wanted to stay at Al’s side. She wanted to help Al however she could.
She thought that she was willing to do anything for him.
That kind of courage welled up inside her.
“But……it’s against my principle to not do anything just because it was correct or it was the smart
thing to do. I came here to save people. Everyone here is the same, are you not? Were you not here
because Al-sama’s words moved you? Do you think that anyone who once called themselves a
knight……would be able to overlook something like this?”
782
“…….However! If something were to happen to you–!”
“Nothing will happen to me. I have excellent knights by my side after all.”
“What are you saying…….?”
“Everyone here was carefully selected to protect me, the Emperor’s envoy, your strength should be
equal to the imperial knights. I believe that everyone here has that much power. I believe in the
knights that Al-sama personally recruited……and I will never say that I have no confidence in your
ability. You all are the Narbe Ritters. The most elite unit of the imperial army after all.”
Hearing that, the soldiers avert their eyes.
They then nodded as though they made up their mind.
It was because they thought that they wouldn’t be able to persuade Finne no matter what they say.
Personally, they couldn’t leave things as it is either.
She placed her trust in them. That’s why they are prepared to protect this girl no matter what.
Still, they have to take as many safety measures as possible.
She is someone the prince who inspired them entrusted them with after all.
But if the girl said that she would go then there is no stopping her.
“We will protect you with all our power. However, if we judge that your life is in danger, we will
forcibly evacuate you.”
“Yes. I will be relying on you.”
Finne smiles as she says so.
After the talk concluded, Lynfia opened a new topic.
“Now, where should we search for them? If we can find them soon, we will be able to help our
infiltrating unit as well so we should hurry.”
“There’s no need to worry about that. Sebas-san.”
Finne confidently called Sebas.
Hearing that, Sebas appears behind Finne.
“At your service.”
“Do you know where the hostages are likely to be?”
“I have looked around the castle and there’s one place that I found suspicious.”
783
“Can you guide us there?”
“As you wish. However…..Finne-sama, you really are similar to Al-sama.”
“Is that so?”
“Yes, very.”
Hearing that, Finne cheerfully smiles.
For that was the finest compliment Finne could ask for.
784
SPT Chapter 119
Coffee appreciation day desu!! it’s a double release–su!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Hostage Rescue
Behind the castle of Wumme.
There was a place prepared as an annex.
Its inside held the hostages Duke Kruger used against the Southern Nobles.
“Marquis Traut! Let us out of here!”
A man in his early thirties appealed.
This young noble is Earl Talnath.
He is the leader of the nobles who support the Empire among the Southern Nobles.
Facing such Earl Talnath is a plump man.
It was Marquis Traut, a man who could be said to be the kindred soul of Duke Kruger.
“You are still saying that huh, Earl Talnath.”
Laughing at Earl Talnath, Marquis Traut slowly begins to walk over.
There are several knights by his side to guard him against the unarmed hostages including Earl
Talnath so that they have no chance to rise up against him.
“The Emperor already deemed the South as an enemy. Isn’t it time for you to cooperate with us and
counterattack?”
“That was because you and Duke Kruger colluded with that criminal organization! It has nothing to do
with us!”
“Oh my. Don’t you know that over a third of the Southern Nobles are involved with that organization?
Aren’t you being too harsh on your fellow nobles?”
“Don’t spout nonsense! Most of them were threatened to cooperate with you anyway right! Like what
you did to Earl Sitterheim!”
785
Earl Talnath lunged at Marquis Traut out of anger but the knights brandished their spears to block his
way.
Earl Talnath clicked his tongue as he stepped away and continued.
“Judging from your attitude, it seems that you still haven’t changed your mind huh?”
“Obviously! We will not join your Confederacy! We are nobles of the Empire!”
“Ha! What splendid resolve. But all the Southern Nobles including your territory have already got
labeled as confederate you know?”
“That’s because you took us hostages!”
“Who would believe in your words? Just now, the Emperor’s envoy arrived at the castle. The Emperor
panicked because of our movement and set up a negotiation. Now you are no different from us. All of
the Southern Nobles are already in the same boat!”
Marquis Traut pridefully told him that.
Hearing so, Earl Talnath’s face distorted.
Many nobles were called here by the fake invitation from Duke Kruger and taken hostage. They were
captured when the Duke invited them here to discuss the future of the South.
Everyone was surprised. They never thought that Kruger would really rebel against the Empire.
“Where is the evidence that it was really a negotiation? Isn’t it actually a declaration of war?”
“If so we will fight. We have already made contact with other countries in advance after all.”
“The Empire has enough power to overturn that kind of thing! If the imperial knight order joins the
battle, the South will turn into scorched earth you know!?”
“Before that happens, a peace treaty will be concluded! One that will guarantee mine and Duke
Kruger’s safety that is.”
Saying so, Marquis shows a disgusting smile.
In the first place, Marquis Traut only sees Earl Talnath as a bargaining piece.
If it turns out to be an all-out war, he could just trade him away for his own safety. Until then, the
knights who will fight against the Empire will be those that belong to the nobles that he took hostages.
His hand will be completely clean.
Clearly seen through his way of thinking, Earl Talnath expresses his disgust.
“You bastard……! You are still calling yourself a noble!!?”
786
“Of course, I myself am a venerable noble.”
Earl Talnath lunged at Marquis Traut’s proud attitude.
The knights stopped him again but this time, another male noble also attacked the knights.
With that opportunity, Earl Talnath snatched a sword from the knight.
However, at the same time, another knight was pointing his spear at a noble lady in the corner of the
room.
“S, such impudent……don’t you care what will happen to the other hostages!?”
Marquis Traut raises his arm in a threatening manner.
If he swings it down, the knight will mercilessly execute the hostages.
Earl Talnath looks down with regret in his eyes.
However,
“Earl Talnath. Don’t worry about us.”
Said a noble lady a little older than the Earl.
She looks at Earl Talnath with determined eyes. It is almost unbelievable that she was being pointed at
with a spear.
“Lady Simmel………”
“I will not say that this is for the sake of the Empire…..but if I only live to be a chain that shackles down
my family then I would rather choose death.”
“Ha! A bluff huh!”
“Marquis Traut…..someone who only cares about themselves like you will never understand. A mother
who thinks about her child is stronger than you can ever imagine. If you are going to kill me then do it
already!”
Saying so, Lady Simmel draws closer to the knight.
Troubled, the knight looks over at Marquis Traut.
The Marquis shakes his head while making a distorted expression.
If he kills her here, Earl Talnath will surely come to attack him.
Marquis Traut decided that should be avoided at all costs and urged the knight to grab Lady Simmel
with his chin.
787
“Bring her to me!”
“Let me go!”
“How about it? Earl Talnath. Are you still going to fight?”
Marquis Traut pulls out his dagger and points it at Lady Simmel’s neck.
Clear hesitation showed on the Earl’s face.
Seeing that, Lady Simmel closed her eyes and prepared herself.
Then.
“Earl Talnath……please.”
“…….I accepted your resolve.”
The two made up their minds.
Seeing that, Marquis Traut took a step back.
However, the Marquis irritatedly laughs.
“Ha, Haha, HaHaHa!! So you want to die that much huh!? You fool! Humans are living beings! Only
fools would choose to throw their lives away! Putting your life on the line to protect something you
say? There’s nothing you can protect by giving up your measly lives! The Empire will never help you!”
“No, His Majesty would never abandon nobles who still have their soul.”
The voice echoes.
At the same time, the whole room was echoed with a mysterious sound.
Hearing that sound, everyone eyes turned heavier and some even fell down to their knees. They were
attacked by sudden drowsiness. It was a magic that even the knights find hard to resist.
“Ugh…..what……?”
All the knights were incapacitated.
“My apology. It is difficult to adjust.”
The girl said as she entered the room while swinging her spear.
When the girl stopped swinging her spear, the drowsiness inducing sound finally stopped.
“Thank you. Lynfia-san.”
“No, I am simply doing my job.”
788
While giving Finne her usual stiff reply, Lynfia separates Lady Simmel from Marquis Traut.
She then apologetically speaks to the sleepy lady.
“My sincere apology for getting you caught up in its effect as well.”
The spear form of Lynfia’s magic sword emits a sound that can lure people to sleep by swinging it in a
circle but in a narrow room, its effect can not be used on a specific person.
At best, she can only swing it in front of her or aim it in a certain direction. In a situation where she
has to use it in a crowded room like earlier, it will affect everyone.
However, she was able to neutralize all the knights.
Seeing the girl in front of him, Marquis Traut still couldn’t grasp the situation.
“Kuh….who……?”
“Finne von Kleinert. His Majesty the Emperor’s envoy.”
“Blau Mowe……? Why are you here…….?”
“I came to rescue the hostages.”
“Ridiculous…..gu, guards!? Get in here!”
“They were already put to sleep. The security was so tight so I might miss some though.”
Said Sebas as he appeared at Finne’s side.
Sebas has neutralized all the security in the building without any noise. As a result, Marquis Traut was
completely unaware of their advance and got ambushed by Lynfia.
“N, No way…..D, Duke Kruger would never allow such a thing to happen!”
“If it’s Duke Kruger then Prince Leonard should be chasing him down right about now. That was our
original plan after all.”
“W, was the envoy just a ploy to ambush us!? You damn coward!?”
“It was not an ambush. His Majesty’s order for Duke Kruger was for him to [Bend the knees]. We are
punishing him because he refused to comply. Even so, I do not deny that it was underhanded.
However, if lives can be saved by doing such a thing then no matter how cowardly it is, we will do it.
Even if we are cowards, you are simply vile. Plus, I don’t remember denying that we are cowards
either.”
When Finne shut down the conversation, Lynfia struck the Marquis with her spear and put him out.
After seeing that, Finne looks at Earl Talnath.
789
“Allow me to introduce myself again, I am His Majesty the Emperor’s envoy, Finne von Kleinert. We
are sorry that it took us so long to come to your rescue.”
“H, His Majesty……he didn’t forsake us……….”
“Thank you……..”
The elderly nobles in the back began to cry tears of gratitude.
Finne looks at them with a soft smile on her face.
She then waits for them to settle down and start explaining the situation.
“I have a request I’d like to make to everyone here. There are many of your vassals in this castle. They
have to fight against us because everyone was taken hostage. Please, convince them to lay down their
arms.”
“Certainly.”
“……Earl Talnath, correct?”
“Yes.”
“We….we have cut down one of your knights. Before he passed, he told us that you were taken
hostage……you had a good vassal serving you.”
Finne does not apologize.
She thought that neither Earl Talnath or the dead knight wanted her to.
Biting down his lips, the Earl quietly nods.
“Then we should move right away. Let’s head to a place that we can stand out and let the knights know
that everyone is safe.”
“I don’t mind but……there are still other hostages.”
“Other?”
“Only half of us were being held here. Several nobles have been taken to the castle in the past few
days.”
Hearing Earl Talnath, Finne looks at Lynfia anxiously.
Lynfia also has a similar look on her face.
There’s no way that it was just a simple hostage transfer.
“There must be something going on.”
790
“……It would be good if they are safe.”
“We can’t confirm that right now. For the time being, we must let the knights in the castle know that
the people here are safe. If the knights stop resisting our advance even a little, it would be easier for us
to search for the rest of the hostage.”
Lynfia sets their immediate goal and explains it to Finne.
Agreeing with her, Finne gives her a nod.
However, anxiety doesn’t disappear inside her heart.
Something bad is happening.
With that feeling, Finne touches her hair ornament.
It was to gain the courage to move forward.
791
SPT Chapter 120
Second part of the release–su!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Capture
“To all the knights in the castle, I am Finne von Kleinert, the envoy of His Majesty the Emperor.”
Finne addresses everyone from the castle’s main gate.
A loudspeaker is placed at her side. It was originally meant for the people in the castle to make an
announcement to the city but they took it and directed it at the castle.
“We have rescued many of your lords that were taken hostages. We are currently moving out to
rescue the rest of the hostages so please, lay down your swords! There is no longer any reason for you
to fight us!”
There is no response to Finne’s voice.
Still, Finne continues calling out to them.
“I know that you were forced to fight us because your lords have been taken. By the authority His
Majesty vested in me, you will not be subjected to any punishment. Please, listen to my voice. There is
no need for you to fight the battle that goes against your pride like this anymore. I’m sure that the one
everyone wants to protect certainly is not Duke Kruger!”
Announcing such a thing in a loud voice will obviously reveal their location.
The knights gathered at Finne’s location.
Their armors all bear Duke Kruger’s sigil.
Lynfia and the Narbe Ritters hold up their swords but Finne tells them to stand down.
“If you say that you will continue to fight then I will not stop you……but you must come at us with a
resolve. If you are going to take that step then consider carefully the meaning of turning your blade
against the Emperor’s envoy. The only ones who deserve to fight against my knights are those whose
justice is not clouded with doubt.”
Being questioned about their resolve and sense of justice, the knights suddenly stopped.
Not all of them are bad. Most of them simply serve under Duke Kruger as a knight.
792
They were only fighting because they were following orders not because of their own will. After all, If
they start thinking about such things, they will be punished.
However, when they are told to their faces to think about their actions, they can’t help but consider it.
Meanwhile, more knights rush to the scene.
“Earl Talnath! My Lord!!”
“OH! You guys!”
The group of knights that rushed over was the knights of those who have been taken hostages.
When they confirm the safety of their lords, they cry and kneel down on the spot.
Seeing them apologize to their lords over and over again, doubt started to rise up in the mind of Duke
Kruger’s knights.
“We might be able to persuade them now. Finne-sama.”
“Understood.”
When Lynfia whispered that to Finne, Finne began to persuade the knights.
“Everyone simply fought at the command of your lord. You will not bear any sin if you lay down your
swords and cooperate with us now. However, if you still wish to point your blade at us then that sin
will extend to your family as well. After all, you will be turning your blades against the Empire if you
continue to fight us.”
Lynfia was surprised at Finne’s tone which was stronger than she thought she is capable of.
It is not like Finne to include a threat into her persuasion.
Then, Lynfia remembers Sebas’s words.
He said that she is similar to Arnold-sama. Remembering that, Lynfia smiles.
“I see. She might really be similar to him huh.”
That prince would probably resort to threatening without batting an eye.
After all, that is the most effective in this situation.
They didn’t continue to fight because they like it. They only follow Duke Kruger to protect themselves
and their important families.
However, Duke Kruger has already lost his control over them.
People like that tend to flock to the strong.
793
“W, will we really not receive any punishment!?”
“Yes, you will not. No matter what terrible thing you have done, you will not bear any sin. However,
that is only as long as those things were committed under Duke Kruger’s order.”
The knights were frightened by Finne’s words.
The knights are aware that what Duke Kruger did was evil. Of course, they also understand that they
lent their hands toward that.
Finne was aware of it. Still, the reason she said that the knights will not bear any sin is Duke Kruger’s
personality. Judging by his attitude, she thinks that he would never leave any important task to the
low-level knights.
Then, Duke Kruger’s knights who had been silent for a while began to kneel.
“—-we will follow His Majesty’s envoy.”
“Thank you for showing me your courage. Now, could you tell me where the rest of the hostages are
being held?”
“That is……..”
The knights look at each other.
It is not that they are reluctant to provide the information.
It is because they don’t know.
“We only know that they were taken to the castle’s basement. Since us knights are not allowed to get
close to it, we don’t know specifically where they are…….”
“The basement……”
Hearing that, unpleasant feeling welled up inside Lynfia.
The children who were kidnapped were also held in the basement of Bassau’s castle. Moreover, it is
clear that Duke Kruger is conducting some kind of experiment on them.
Knowing that, Lynfia’s expression distorted with that bad feeling.
After all, this is the headquarter of the mastermind behind the incident.
“Finne-sama. It is hard for me to say this but I think it is better to delay our investigation into the
basement.”
“Why?”
794
“If it is only being guarded by the knights then we can protect you but at worst, a Demon might
appear. If that happens, we will not have enough power to fight it. I think it is better for us to wait
until we can take complete control of the castle first.”
“…….you think that this is the same as Bassau?”
“We can’t say that the possibility of that doesn’t exist. At worst, this entire castle might disappear. We
should wait until our group upstairs finishes their business first.”
“I agree. We should be prepared in case something comes out of that basement as well. If there is no
one to defend against it then it will be impossible for Leonard-sama to withdraw after all.”
Sebas gave his advice from a strategic point of view.
Finne is a little lost. She already put their group in danger because of her own selfishness so she can’t
insist on doing something even more dangerous when the two advised against it.
“I understand. I will keep persuading the knights here.”
Finne, who declared their course of action, addressed the knights in the castle again.
With the hope that she can end this battle even if it is only a second earlier.
————————-
“Hurry up!”
Kruger who escaped to the top floor of the castle stopped running.
What Kruger is urging for is the newly developed drugs that he and Zandra created in their joint
research.
He is rushing an old researcher for such a drug so that he can take it himself.
“Please wait a little bit longer!”
The purification of this drug takes time. Moreover, Kruger never expected to use it on himself.
To create this drug, they have suffered many failures.
This new drug couldn’t be said to be safe. Still, Kruger chose to use it for it in order to survive.
However, there are people who stood in Kruger’s way.
“HAAAAAAAAA!!!!”
Breaking through the locked door, Leo rolls into the room.
795
The knights turn their swords towards Leo but Leo instantly cuts them down without giving them any
chance to resist.
“Your Highness! It’s dangerous!”
Lars advises Leo who advanced forward by himself but Leo pays no mind to him.
That is because Leo’s intuition is telling him.
It will be bad if Kruger can get his hand on that drug. Everything will come to waste if he drinks it.
Listening to his intuition, Leo pushes in even further.
He dashed into the group of knights and cut them all down alone by himself.
“Amazing…….”
A soldier of Narbe Ritter mutters as he fights another knight outside the room.
Even from the perspective of the elites of the Narbe Ritter, Leo’s skill really stood out.
He advanced at the enemy by himself and wiped them all out alone.
Isn’t he the same as that rumored Princess General?
With such an impression, the Narbe Ritters rushed into the room and fought off any knight who tried
to approach Leo.
On the other hand, Leo only stares at Duke Kruger.
He avoids all the blades that come at him from all directions using only his reflex. Up until now, Leo
would never take such a risky action. He would look for a safe way to win and would never leave
everything to his intuition.
However, this time Leo leaves everything to it. Of course, he didn’t abandon thinking altogether.
He doesn’t think about it deeply, he only calmly predicts the next movement of his opponents and
leaves his body to his reflex as he slashes at the enemy knights.
He optimally moves his body with the best judgment his mind can make.
It is a fighting style in the situation where he has to fight multiple enemies. It was the way Lize carried
herself during the battle and Leo learned it during the Southern incident.
His way of fighting that prioritized breaking through his enemies as quickly as possible was far
beyond Kruger’s imagination.
796
Even if he heard that Leo is good at martial arts, he thought that he is only a good swordsman. That
was the only information available to Kruger. However, right now, the current Leo has an atmosphere
like he could be a match for a thousand men.
Judging that the drug won’t be completed in time, he picks up the newly developed drug that is in the
middle of refining.
“It is not yet complete sir!”
“I don’t care!”
Turning into a monster here would be far better than getting captured here.
His action came from such a way of thinking.
It was close to a gamble. It was quite a brave decision on Kruger’s part.
However, Leo who saw that also followed his intuition and made his own gamble. He abandoned his
own defense just as Kruger abandoned his safety.
He had been helped many times in order to get this far. Many people have offered him their help. If it
all comes to naught here then he has no right to face the people who are waiting for him at the capital.
With such determination, Leo grips his sword and holds it up while being surrounded by enemy
knights.
“LIKE HELL I WOULD LET YOU!!!!”
Yelling so, he threw his sword at Kruger.
The sword headed straight to Kruger and cut off the arm that Kruger was using to hold the drug.
“UWAAAAAAA!!!”
Kruger let out a scream but this doesn’t mean that Leo is out of danger.
Surrounded by fully armed knights, Leo is completely unarmed.
He can avoid the incoming swords but he wouldn’t be able to keep this up without anything to block
them.
A blade approaches Leo’s chest.
I’m done for, Leo thought.
However, that blade never reached Leo.
“Good grief, you really are a troubling man.”
797
It was Lars who intercepted the blade and said that to Leo.
“Thank you…..Colonel.”
“No, our job is to protect you.”
Lars smiles as he says so. Then, he looks at the still screaming Kruger.
“Capture him. Don’t forget to take care of his wound.”
“Yes, sir!”
“This is all thanks to you, Your Highness. that was splendid.”
“My body just moved on its own, that’s all.”
Leo humbly says so.
However, his face is full of pride.
The man who could be said to be the mastermind of the incident was caught and he was able to stop
him from using his last resort.
“Oi, you. What is this drug?”
“HII!? Pl, please…..”
“Whatever, just answer the question!”
“Th, that is a vampire drug! We take the blood of a vampire to make a drug that can turn a human into
a vampire!”
Hearing that, Leo frowns.
Since the word vampire came out, he can’t help but associate it with the eastern monster outbreak.
“Were you behind the eastern incident as well.”
“Uuu….fu, Hahaha…..I only procured the blood then……don’t start pointlessly throw out accusations
now……”
“So if we trace the route you got that blood from, we can find the real culprit right.”
“Do you have enough leeway to do that I wonder…….?”
“What…..?”
“While we were developing this drug, we also created a curious medicine……I think you should be able
to witness its result soon…….”
798
The moment Kruger said that.
Many screams can be heard from the lower floors of the castle.
The Southern battle is not yet over.
TLN: Nice cliff right?
799
SPT Chapter 121
Well, let’s see it’s the start of the week and there are some new recommendations for the new series
so I will be updating the page later.
-Mr.Graverobber
Grau’s Preparation
The day after Gers repelled the imperial army’s attack.
“What kind of magic did you use?”
Alois asked such a question to me who is looking at the imperial army pulling back to their
encampment from the city wall.
“Which time?”
“Yesterday. Honestly, I never thought that we would be able to hold them back.”
“Hm…..if the young lord personally took command of the field himself then anyone would be
motivated right.”
“That was what you told me to do. I think that also helped but I can’t believe that we managed to stop
ten thousand soldiers with just that.”
“You really are insisting that it was because of my magic huh?”
“I simply want to know the truth.”
When he told me that, I went silent for a moment.
I don’t mind just telling it to him but I felt that it would be kind of a waste.
“Hm…..then let me put it into a question. What kind of magic do you think I used?”
“If I can arrive at such an answer myself I wouldn’t be asking you………”
“Knowing when to ask others for help is important but it is also important to think about it before
that. Try to figure it out. How were we doing yesterday?”
I advise him like a teacher would his student.
Alois then obediently begins to think.
Tracing back his memory, he tries to think about how we won yesterday.
800
Then, Alois put up two fingers with a little confidence.
“Two……I think our victory yesterday was due to two factors.”
“Tell me.”
“First was that the enemy was weaker than we expected. The other was that our soldiers were
stronger than they expected.”
“So you think that I weakened them while strengthening our soldiers huh. You think that I used those
two magic?”
“Yes…..that’s what I think.”
Alois said with not much confidence.
For the time being I gave him a nod and started explaining to Alois.
“Your answer is half right and half wrong.”
“So you used one of those magic?”
“Yeah, I used a magic to keep our soldiers’ composure so that they won’t panic during the battle.
Thanks to that, everyone was able to calmly observe their enemies, defeat them, and composedly
follow their orders. That was the only magic I used.”
Staying composed.
That alone is a huge advantage in battle. Normally, if you don’t have much confidence in yourself you
wouldn’t be able to stay calm in front of your enemy. This is especially true for an amateur who never
fought before.
The army often trains soldiers to keep their composure in such situations.
It could be said that my magic pushed an amateur into veteran soldiers.
“That was all? Then why were the enemy soldiers yesterday………..?”
“The day before, a huge fire attack was fired from the gate, burning a thousand of their elite soldiers.
Seeing their injuries, it’s inevitable that they would be cautious around the gate. There might be some
traps at the gate, our strategy might be read again this time, those hesitations made them lose their
composure. The army soldiers may be well trained but they are not invincible. Once they lose their
composure, they won’t post a big threat.”
“Just because of that…….”
“When you fight for your life such a thing will make a difference. In the first place, the defender side
has an advantage in a battle like this. If the enemy hesitates to act, this is the result you can expect.”
801
“Did you defeat their surprise attack unit that way because you were aiming for that?”
“Well, yeah. When your opponent comes to attack you by such a by the book method it is easy for you
to come up with countermeasures against them. It might be simple in theory but from the soldiers’
point of view, such a thing is scary. If you cling to the theory once you read it then you will be the one
who loses your life. Their commander gave them orders according to those theories. We simply
created doubt in their minds causing them to lose their composure and their movement turned
sluggish. Our knights and soldiers simply didn’t miss the opening they showed. That’s all.”
All we need is to hold them off for a day.
If we accomplish that, they will judge us as a difficult enemy to deal with.
And in that case, the ways they can defeat us in a short time will be limited.
“Then I take it that you already took your next step, right?”
“Why do you think so?”
“You have taken advantage of their discomposure by planting fear in their minds the day before. With
that line of thinking, it wouldn’t be weird if you used what happened yesterday to plan something
ahead.”
“You have a good head on your shoulders. But that is still too naive.”
What do you mean?”
“It wasn’t yesterday that I made my preparation.”
It was the day that we defeated their surprise attack unit.
I already took a step toward my plan on that day.
“You have already done something before yesterday!?”
The surprised Alois tries to ask me about it but he immediately starts to think about it by himself.
I smile at such honest behavior of his and put my hand on Alois’s head.
“You were busy yesterday so you might not notice but it should already be visible to you by now.”
“Visible?”
“Yeah, take a look. What is missing since yesterday’s battle.”
Hearing my hint, Alois hurriedly looks around himself.
Something was missing. Since yesterday, something was missing that he normally would have noticed.
802
Alois then curiously tilts his head.
However, as if he realized something, his eyes opened wide.
So he noticed huh.
“So?”
“Since yesterday……I haven’t seen Jordan-san……..”
I smiled at his answer.
I then pat his head with my left hand, telling him well done.
“When they are faced with a difficult opponent, they can’t afford to use the same tactic. The enemy will
try something to break us with all their power. That is our biggest chance. Even such an elite army can
be dispersed if we attack them using such timing. However, they will surely be on guard against that.
They probably posted lookouts for us already. If we dispatch a unit outside, they will definitely be
notified.”
“Then…..you already sent out a unit when you defeated the surprise attack unit!? Those hundred!?”
“The knight commander Foct was really excellent. He acted in a way that prevented our enemy from
noticing the missing soldiers. Even if a thousand men become nine hundred, there shouldn’t be much
changed from the enemy’s perspective after all. It might be because we wiped out a thousand of their
soldiers first too.”
“So you did something like that……….then are you going out for a surprise attack?”
“Yeah, it’s a surprise attack………but it is not just any surprise attack.”
If we have a unit of a hundred soldiers outside the city, the enemy might notice.
That’s why I told them to hide.
The hiding spots are the nearby villages.
With Jordan being widely known by the people around Gers, he has many acquaintances who he could
ask for help.
“Why do you think our enemy is so quiet today?”
“They must be preparing something to breach our city.”
“Yes, but they have some restrictions. The first is time. Another is their cover as a reconnaissance unit.
That cover prevents them from asking their HQ for reinforcements or calling in a powerful mage. This
is a fatal weakness for an army that wishes for a short-term battle. That being the case, their options
are limited to coming up with some clever scheme to capture the city or constructing new weapons.”
803
“Constructing weapons? Are you talking about siege weaponry?”
“They can do something about that if they decide to mobilize their soldiers. Even if it is a simple siege
weapon, it will make their battle much easier. Seeing the battle from the past two days, they must
realize that we don’t have a mage on our side as well. That’s why there won’t be a problem if they
decide to make a large-scale siege weapon either.”
However, that is their blind spot.
Since they want to drop the city as soon as possible, they will surely resort to making a desperate
decision.
“If they want to make a huge and complicated siege weapon, they will need more manpower. That
being the case, the army will surely hire workers from the nearby villages to help them with their
project.”
“Don’t tell me……”
“Our hundred men unit have already infiltrated the enemy camp. Well, if it is only that then it won’t
post much of a threat for them. They wouldn’t go against the army’s request without my instruction
after all. At most, it would end up with just some simple harassment. But what if I personally go there
myself?”
“But, the enemy is watching us……..”
“That doesn’t matter to me. I can go wherever I wish after all.”
“Ah……”
“From the enemy perspective, it would seem like I appear out of thin air. Of course, I won’t say that I
use magic either. We will destroy their food supply and siege weapons then it will be over. They will
have no choice but to retreat. Even if they can capture the city, they can’t push in any further and
without their siege weapons, they won’t make it anyway.”
After explaining my plan, I look at Alois.
Despite his young age, he is still a lord.
I have to properly explain something like this to him.
“I will leave after I’m done with the raid. You can be relieved since they will no longer post any threat
to you. But what you have to work hard for is the thing that will come afterward.”
“I understand…..we fought against the imperial army after all.”
“He is still working with the imperial envoy right now but you can rely on Prince Leonard. After they
take down Duke Kruger, you should immediately apologize to the Emperor when you can confirm the
safety of the hostages. Your circumstances should leave plenty of room for consideration and he is not
804
a foolish emperor who would punish a lord who holds back ten thousand elite soldiers of the imperial
army either. I’m sure your punishment will not be a heavy one.”
“Understood…..I will follow your instructions.”
“Good. let’s head down. It’s getting cold.”
“When do you leave?”
“That is a secret.”
I said so as I pat Alois in the head and the two of us went down from the wall.
805
SPT Chapter 122
Reminder that the new series I will be picking up this time will be modern or scifi genre so do keep
that in my with your suggestion.
Special thanks today for Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior for becoming my new patron.
On another note, we are a few chapters away from the end of this arc so the vote for the new series
will begin on patreon soon. if you have series suggestions make sure to leave them in the comment or
at my discord channel.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Raid
Night.
I quietly transferred to the enemy camp and called Jordan while hiding in the shadow of the tree.
“Please casually walk to the east. I am hiding near the big tree.”
Using wind to carry my words, only Jordan can hear my voice.
Jordan, who was probably chatting with the other gathered villagers, opened his eyes in surprise at
the sudden voice he was hearing but he immediately walked over naturally without arousing any
suspicion.
“Oi Oi, what was that? Strategist-sama.”
“It was something like a parlor trick. More importantly, what’s the situation?”
“Their siege weapons are almost complete. Our men are scattered right now. Of course, we don’t have
any weapons either.”
“I brought the weapons. But it seems there are a lot of villagers here?”
“Yeah, they paid one-third of the wage in advance. It seems they will pay them the rest tomorrow.”
“That’s a shame.”
“It’s alright. Even those who came don’t like these pompous military guys anyway.”
“That’s good news. We will start the operation in two hours. Please make the preparation.”
“Alright, but there are a lot of guards you know?”
806
“They are only being vigilant toward the outside threat. There won’t be any problem.”
“If Strategist-sama said so then that must be the case. I will notify everyone about the time we will
launch our attack then.”
Jordan says so and leaves.
As far as I can see, it seems that they have recruited a considerable amount of villagers. As I thought,
they are making large scale siege weapons.
Well, the bigger the weapons are, the bigger the damage we will do once we destroy them.
“Now, let’s make this grand.”
Muttering so, I left the place using transfer magic.
——————
At the time when many people went to bed.
Jordan and the hundred men unit were quietly moving among the trees with me on the lead.
“Catapult, ballista, siege tower. Quite impressive of them to make these in such a short time”
There are two of each weapon. Moreover, their structures are fairly complicated. They were probably
designed by Sonia. It seems my provocation triggered her huh.
Thanks to that, they gathered the villagers and their eyes pointed to the outside. Still, if we failed here,
they would come after us.
This might be quite a dangerous gamble huh.
“It seems there are still a lot of watchmen left.”
“No, I think this is probably a little different.”
The watchmen looked tense.
Maybe their commander is coming to inspect the progress.
As if to confirm my speculation, a uniformed officer walked toward them soon after.
“That guy…….!?”
“Who is it?”
“That’s Colonel Letts. He’s their temporary field commander.”
“I see. So he came out to inspect the progress personally huh.”
807
It seems they are quite cornered.
He probably couldn’t sit still before he can confirm that his precious siege weapons are safe and
secure.
After all, this is his only hope.
However, it was a bad idea for him to show up like this. The soldiers were already overwhelmed as
they are but now they grow even tenser.
Letts confirm that the siege weapons are safe and head back together with his subordinates.
Since their commander left, the atmosphere relaxes.
I can see that the watchmen were starting to slack off but I decided to push it even further.
I quietly set up a barrier around them. Its effect is not that strong but it’s a barrier that induces
drowsiness. For those that are already sleepy, its effect should be considerable.
They might endure their sleepiness but that’s it. It should take their all just remain standing up.
“Now, let’s commence our operation.”
“I, is it really fine? They must be vigilant against our attack…..and our equipment is…….”
One soldier muttered anxiously.
The weapons I gave them were daggers.
It was impossible to bring large weapons for this number of people.
However, for killing those sleepy guards, this should be enough.
“They are only cautious about the outside threat. What they are waiting for is the report from their
lookouts outside. I don’t think they will immediately gather at our location. In other words, they are
indeed cautious but also being lax at the same time.”
“Lax………”
“It will be alright. You have already deceived the eyes of the imperial army. Everything will be fine.
Let’s win this and return to Gers. I am sure that great rewards await you.”
The strength returned to the eyes of the anxious men.
Seeing that, I make a small gesture with my hand to give them instructions to proceed slowly.
Under the cover of darkness, we are getting closer and closer as we lower our waist and approach
them in a crouching position. Even when we arrived at the distance they would normally notice us,
they are oblivious to our approach.
808
Right until the moment the dagger was thrust at their neck.
The same goes for others who are half asleep with their guard lowered. With Jordan leading them, the
soldiers gradually proceed to quietly eliminate all the watchmen.
It didn’t take long before all the guards were eliminated.
As I surveyed the area for any guards that are still alive, my eyes found one of the dead watchmen
with their eyes open.
I slowly approach him and close his eyes.
I wonder if he had a family. He probably didn’t join Gordon because he supported him either.
Foot soldiers don’t have the right to choose their commander.
Still, they are those who always end up the victims. This is exactly why the succession war is so
ridiculous. The lives of those who we should be protecting are being easily discarded just because of a
siblings quarrel.
“I’m sorry……you can complain to me later when I head over to your side someday.”
Leaving such words, I walk over to the siege weapons and cover them with oil that I brought.
It was also because I was carrying this oil that I couldn’t take any large weapon with me. However, this
oil is the thing that will drive the imperial army into despair.
After dousing all the siege weapons, I give Jordan my final order.
“Let’s head back. I am going to set them aflame so if you take advantage of the chaos you should be
able to escape easily.”
“What about Strategist-sama?”
“I still have something to do after I set fire to these.”
“…….is it something necessary?”
“Yes, it is necessary.”
“I see…….don’t die on me now alright? You are our benefactor. We will have to repay our debt
someday.”
“I understand. I will be looking forward to that.”
Saying so, I send off Jordan and his men.
After confirming that they are already a distance away, I set fire to the siege weapons. Then, I create a
breeze and fuel the fire even further.
809
“Now….time for the final task huh.”
I walked away as I watched the fire envelope the siege weapons.
———————-
“What is going on!?”
“I don’t know! There was suddenly a fire!”
“Fire wouldn’t just start burning out of thin air right! What were the watchmen doing!? Why didn’t
they notice the surprise attack!?”
“There was no movement from the enemy, sir!”
“What!?”
The command center was a mess.
For such a command center I set up a stronger version of the drowsiness barrier which causes the
soldiers inside to fall asleep one after another.
“Wh, at……..?”
“Good day. Colonel Letts.”
Slowly entering the command tent, I called out to Letts.
If I left this guy alive, he might order an unreasonable charge and increase the damage even further.
I can’t let this guy live.
“Bastard, who are you……..?”
“Grau….the wandering strategist.”
“You…..! Damn you! What did you do!?”
“I was just playing a little trick on your food supply.”
“What……?”
Letts look at the water in his command tent.
Although that was totally a ruse, I shrug at him to affirm his speculation.
Letts bitterly frowned and I pull out a dagger and point it toward him.
“Wait……if you kill me…….His Highness Gordon won’t stay silent alright…..?”
810
“So what?”
“You will be targeted by the next emperor you know…..? Rather than killing me, just cooperate with
His Highness…….he will surely be able to use your ability effectively……..”
“I heard the rumor that you are treating your strategist quite coldly though?”
“Th, that’s not true……”
“It seems you are a bad liar huh. People wouldn’t gather under a guy who resorts to tricks and cuts off
their subordinates when it’s inconvenient you know.”
Saying so, I pierced Letts’s chest with the dagger.
Those words also apply to me so I was also hurt by it.
A liar can not be a good leader.
“With this, the imperial army will be forced to withdraw. Right? Half-elf strategist.”
“Haa Haa……you have done it………Grau!”
“Hm……I told you that I will render all your effort to ashes right? “
Out of breath, Sonia jumps into the command tent.
She arrived considerably fast. Perhaps she gave up on the siege weapons once she saw it aflame so she
rushed here in the case that her enemy aimed for the headquarters.
I have always moved with the next step in mind after all. She probably thought that the fire might be
the next step toward something as well.
And that is exactly right.
“I have been on watch. But the surprise attack still arrived…..you, did you already move them even
before we posted the lookouts……..”
Sonia walks towards me but she staggers and has to support herself with the desk.
The barrier is still in place. Entering the command tent means that she will receive its effect.
“That’s right. I sent out the unit before you posted your lookouts. The method I used to come here is
my secret though.”
“…….? this is…… a barrier?”
“As expected of a half-elf, it seems you won’t be tricked easily huh.”
Elves are originally sensitive to magic.
811
Sonia who draws blood from them is of course resistant toward it as well. Even if it’s the barrier I
made an effort to hide, she would still notice it once she entered inside huh.
She probably wouldn’t enter carelessly if she knows that I can use magic though.
Well, this is also a win for my strategy huh.
“To be able to hide your magic so well like this…….just who are you……?”
“I wonder? What meaning does my identity have for you?”
Saying so, I point the bloody dagger at Sonia.
Sonia looked like she was about to put up a fight for a moment but she immediately lowered her hand
as though she gave up.
“If you want to kill me then……that is fine by me……..”
“You are quite quick to give up huh. You should have enough power to put up a fight right? You should
be experienced in self-defense technique as well, no? This is embarrassing but my sword arm is quite
weak you know.”
“Hahaha………you are funny…….it’s like you want me to resist or something……it’s okay. I’m done
already.”
“What do you mean?”
“I couldn’t protect the commander nor capture the city…..I’m sure that I will have to shoulder the
responsibility for this. You already killed him after all. The man who should bear it.”
“He is too dangerous to be kept alive. And I don’t think that you are in the position to take the fault for
this though?”
“It doesn’t matter…….I will be killed when I exhausted my usefulness. I’m sure that His Highness
Gordon is such a person……..a beast that couldn’t be controlled……..I was too naive……so just kill
me………”
There was no will or strength behind Sonia’s eyes.
There were some when I met her before but it seems those are completely lost by now.
Surely, Sonia was looking forward to the future when she helped Rebecca back then. She thought that
her action still has meaning.
However, there is no such thing in Sonia today.
“Even if you let me live……I’m sure I will be killed……even if I’m not killed…….Someone I care about
will be killed in my place……..if that’s the case then I would rather die here……..”
812
“You are too naive.”
“……You don’t even know wha–……..!”
“I know. You are being forced to cooperate with Prince Gordon because he took someone you care
about hostages right? So what? Anyone can lament at their own misfortune.”
“…….I did all I could already…….! To not intensify the war! To not endanger the hostages! I did
everything…….I did it all but still……..”
“There is rarely a plan that would go well on your first try. That’s why you come up with your next
move. You turn your wisdom to overturn the situation at the next opportunity. That is what a
schemer……no, that is what it is to be a strategist. Someone who folds after their plan fails has no right
to call themselves a strategist. If you are a strategist then come up with plans until you can resolve
your situation!”
“!!??”
Feeling the shock from my words, Sonia collapsed on the floor.
Certainly, Sonia failed to control Gordon. Then she should have devised a plan to rescue the hostages
and contact the other factions.
You can’t overcome the obstruction if you do nothing after your first plan fails. The problem won’t
wait for you to recover, it always comes at you all of a sudden.
Sonia who was trained by the genius strategist should be capable of coming up with many plans and I
think that she already has some in her mind but she still lacks experience in the field.
That is the most necessary thing for a strategist.
“Half-elf strategist…….Sonia Laspade. I investigated you. It seems you were raised up by your step-
father who was a genius strategist right. I know that you follow Gordon because he was taken hostage
but….your life was saved. Don’t give it up so easily! Your stepfather didn’t raise you up so that you can
get killed by me! You are incredibly arrogant to think that your life is yours alone!”
Saying so I throw the dagger at Sonia with all my might.
Seeing that, Sonia guards herself with both hands.
Passing beside Sonia’s face, my dagger plant itself into the ground.
“Ah……”
“I can kill you here but if I do, your stepfather will be too pitiful. If you still have the will to live then try
putting up a fight.”
“…….!! Don’t be so selfish…..! I….! I just don’t want people to get hurt! I don’t want anyone to get hurt
because of me! But still…….I…….!”
813
Tears spill from Sonia’s eyes.
Her folks got taken hostage, and she has been pushing herself for them.
No matter how good a strategist she is, someone who has never been on the battlefield would be too
immature to call themselves a strategist.
Originally she should be gradually gaining experiences but she was suddenly thrown into the
battlefield, a life or death situation.
Many people will die with just one command. The pieces on the board turned into living and breathing
humans. If she couldn’t overcome such reality then she can not become a strategist.
Sonia forced herself to make that resolve. And it was Gordon’s fault who forced her to do that.
“I…….I just want to live in peace…….!”
“I can sympathize with that.”
“Then…..help me…..”
I did not immediately give my answer.
The reason is that I heard the sound of a flute echoes from a distance.
That’s why I immediately walked past Sonia.
“Sorry but I have some previous engagement. Moreover, you must do something about it yourself first.
Don’t simply ask others for help. Do everything you can. From my point of view, I still don’t think you
have given it your all yet. Do it even if it is something small. If you do that, I’m sure that your situation
will improve someday.”
Saying so, I left the command tent.
I can hear the loud sound of crying from the inside.
It may have been cruel and I should have extended my hand to her.
But if I reach out to her, the only one I will be able to save is Sonia herself. I’m sure that I won’t be able
to help the hostages. As long as I don’t know where they are, I can’t save them.
If she wants to acquire the best possible future then she has no choice but to struggle for it herself.
With such a thing in mind, I left the place with transfer magic.
814
SPT Chapter 123
TLN: There’s a new kind of creature in this chapter that I have to name myself because there is no
official english(?) name for it yet.
So, do comment on my naming sense.
-Mr.Graverobber
Maneater
“Hurry! Outside!”
Lars has the Narbe Ritter soldiers carry Kruger and orders everyone to evacuate the castle.
The reason was the suspicious roar they heard from the castle basement. Relying on his intuition, Lars
decided to immediately leave the castle without investigating it.
And his decision was not wrong.
“Oi! What was that roar!?”
“Th, that is……..!”
Lars questions the old researcher.
As he ran with his hands tied, the researcher pushed his chest out proudly for some reason.
“It was the roar of our masterpiece!”
“I don’t care! Just tell me what it is!”
“HIII!!? Please don’t hit me……w, we tried to make an artificial vampire using their blood but all our
attempts failed since the blood was just too strong. Even though their muscle mass grew and their
strength multiplied, they lost all their reason…….we uhh, we call them the Failures.”
“So that was one of them huh…….”
On their way up the tower, they encountered a huge monster.
Reminded of that, Lars’s expression distorted from the discomfort he felt. After all, that man was also
a victim.
“So? Was that scream their mating call or something?”
815
“No no! That was not something remotely close to those Failures! To overcome the strength of the
vampire blood, we used a little something. With that, we managed to dramatically improve them!”
“What did you do!?”
“We used the blood of the human that was possessed by the Demon! We combined the blood of the
demon and the blood of the vampire together!”
“!!??”
Hearing that, Everyone was at a loss for words.
That concept was just too unorthodox.
In that silence, Leo asks the researcher in a small voice.
“That Demon blood……..where did you get it?”
“I don’t know. However, the effect it produced was immense! They may have lost their ability to speak
but the alteration on their appearance was minimal and they were blessed with special power! They
can turn everyone they bite into a similar state with them.”
Leo looks away from the old researcher who is proudly presenting his creation.
As you can get from their name, vampires prefer to drink blood but it is only a superstition that those
who got their blood sucked by them would become a vampire themselves.
Vampires originally don’t possess such ability.
It was something like a myth made to scare children but now they have turned that into reality.
Leo couldn’t understand why someone would do something like that and shut his eyes. The more he
thinks about it, the more his head aches.
“We named them the [Maneater]! Once we send one of these Maneaters to enemy territory, the
infection will explosively spread and we can easily attack and crush them!”
(TLN: Yup, its name borrow kanji from Demon and Vampire, 悪⻤ (Click if you are interested), the literal
meaning is Fiend as it is a combination of the word Evil and Demon.)
“……Duke Kruger. Who did you use it on?”
Leo looked at Kruger who was being carried.
When they caught him, Kruger looked carefree for some reason.
Even though his winning chance should already have been completely erased by then.
816
“Surely, you must have already had some guesses……? Of course, we used it on the Southern Nobles!
Naturally, we did not use it on anyone who cooperated with us but those we took hostages!”
“……….You have gone insane.”
“Hahaha!! Such a poor loser you are! If you don’t kill those Maneaters, disaster will befall the Empire.
But if you kill them, all Southern Nobles will bear a grudge against you! Eventually, the second me will
be created! And someday the Empire will be crushed under all the resentment!!”
Having said that, Kruger continues to laugh.
Leo frowned as he silently went down the stairs of the castle.
When he reaches the entrance, Sieg and many knights are holding back the Failures.
“You are alright huh! Hurry up and get out of here!”
“Sieg! I’m glad you are safe!”
“Finne-sama already rescued the hostages! Thanks to that, a good number of knights joined our side
and it got a lot easier to move around now!”
“I’m grateful! Are those the only things that came out!?”
“What!? There’s something more!?”
“There should be another type of them too!”
“No, haven’t seen anything like that yet!”
“Good! All men withdraw to the main gate! Colonel! Close off all the routes connecting this castle to
the city!”
“Your Highness, You must escape first!”
“No…..i don’t think I can afford to do that……”
A large number of footsteps can be heard from deep underground.
Hearing the ground shaking by the footsteps, Leo urged Lars to hurry.
“Quick!”
“Kuh! Understood! SEAL OFF THE CASTLE!”
Lars ordered his men to block all four gates that connected the castle to the city.
During that time, Leo held back the enemy at the main gate.
“It’s useless! We already unlocked everything in the basement! Monsters will overflow from it soon!”
817
“Shut up! There are still people here! Colonel! I don’t care who they are, get everyone to the main
gate!”
“Understood!”
Combining the number of Narbe Ritters and the knights.
Approximately 600 people have gathered in front of the main gate.
“Finne-san and the others safely got out right…….”
“Oi oi, is this the time to be relieved? You don’t have an escape route anymore you know?”
“We can leap out from the top of the gate but………I don’t think that they will wait for us to do so.”
“I don’t mind if any of you want to escape but we still need people to hold them back. As long as we are
here, the enemy won’t head outside. Using that time, Finne-san should be able to evacuate the
citizens.”
Hearing Leo, no one chose to escape. In the first place, every knight who stayed behind already made
the resolve to give up their lives.
Some of them are Duke Kruger’s knights and some of them are of the other Southern Noble houses.
They chose this place to make their redemption. Of course, some of them did not make that choice.
However, even they did not just simply escape and chose to join Finne to assist her.
On the other hand, the Maneaters haven’t left the castle yet.
They are attacking Duke Kruger’s knights who were late to escape.
“If what we heard is true then every knight left in the castle should already be turned into Maneater
by now………”
“Duke Kruger. How many knights did you have in the castle?”
“Hmph…..around two thousand I guess.”
“If we estimate that 500 people were killed and 500 have joined us, the remaining 1,000 should
already have been turned into Maneaters. What about their combat ability?”
“It, it should only be a slight improvement. The Demon blood mixed with the vampire blood so there
should be a huge change in its original effect…….”
“Even if it’s a slight improvement, it still posts a high enough threat.”
It is not the case where a demon possesses a vampire. Instead, both of their blood were combined and
injected into humans.
It was a miracle that the person who got injected with it managed to stay alive.
818
Leo stared silently at the castle as he thought that the reason it had such an effect was that the
strength of two powerful blood is repulsing each other.
As he stared at the castle, a man emerged from it. He is wearing fine clothes. Perhaps he is one of the
Southern Nobles. However, the way he walked was shaky like he is a sick person.
Then, when he raised his face.
His eyes are completely white. That abnormality sent chills down Leo’s spine.
However, the Maneater did not immediately rush toward Leo.
He waited for a large number of Failures to come out from the castle and set up the formation first.
“Is he leading them!?”
“Th, there was nothing like that in the report!”
The old researcher panicked.
Thinking that this is going to be a hard battle, Leo ordered the men to form a semicircle with their
back against the gate.
Then, the Failures rushed at them.
“STOP THEM!”
“Your Highness! Even alone, you must escape!”
“I didn’t come this far just to retreat!”
“However! We don’t have any way to deal with the Maneater that is commanding them at the castle! If
we crash with them directly, our side will have casualties!”
If that happens, they will not be able to thin the number of the Maneaters.
To beat them, they have no choice but to annihilate them all with a force that is three times or at least
twice their number.
Lars thought.
However, Leo has a different idea.
“I have a plan…….”
“What!? If you have a plan then now’s the time to spill it!”
Sieg spoke as he dealt with one of the failures.
819
The knights are also struggling and appear to be locked in a stalemate. If the Maneaters jumped into
the fray in this situation, it would surely cause a lot of casualties.
“This is just a guess but……if the Maneater is the production of Demon and Vampire blood then…..they
should be something close to a possessed human.”
“That’s true but……”
“If so then I might be able to purify them using holy magic.”
Holy magic that can purify Demons is an advanced magic.
However, its effect is that much potent.
“The body of those who are possessed by demons are altered but…..with just the diluted blood, the
effect it has on them should be weaker, I might be able to save them by purifying their blood.”
“That is too reckless, Your Highness! We don’t know whether that is possible or not! What if only the
blood of the demon is purified? We will have a lot of casualties on our hands!”
“What do you think?”
Leo asks the old researcher who is standing nearby.
The old researcher was reluctant to give his answer but he immediately speaks once Leo reaches for
his sword.
“I, I don’t think that will be the case…….we mixed the demon blood with the vampire’s so if the demon
blood can be removed, they should revert back to a normal human……..I, I wouldn’t recommend trying
it though……..”
“That’s what he said.”
“Please don’t make it sound so easy……to purify all the Maneaters in the castle, you would need to use
a holy magic with a wide range of effects. If my memory serves me right, the only one who can use
holy magic here is you, Your Highness.”
“Yeah, I planned to do it myself from the start.”
“You are being too unreasonable! A wide range of holy magic couldn’t be used unless you are a master
of holy magic! I have heard of a lot of mages who lost their lives trying to use magic that was beyond
their capability! We can’t let you do such a reckless thing! Please order us to wipe them out! We will
definitely accomplish it!”
“Rather than risking the Narbe Ritters turning into Maneaters…..I think this is a much better choice. If
it works, we will be able to save a lot of lives. Even if it doesn’t, it should be able to do something about
this situation.”
820
“If something goes wrong you might lose your life! Even if you survive, you will be right in the middle
of the danger! Please realize your importance, Your Highness!”
Lars desperately tries to convince Leo.
Sieg also agreed with him.
“I also agree with the Colonel. If we have you, we will be able to mobilize the Southern Knight and the
army, but if you die here, there will be no one left to solve this situation.”
“I understand what you are trying to say…..but when I have the opportunity to save everyone, I do not
want to throw it away. And if I let even a single maneater escape, the infection will surely spread
through the Empire. Even if I survive, I will not be able to do anything. Now is that the time to act.”
Leo had already thrown away his survival instinct.
His mind focuses on the way to stop the Maneaters here.
Seeing the determination in his eyes, Lars regrets his naivety.
If push comes to shove he planned to take him and escape. However, such a thing never existed in
Leo’s mind. What is currently in his mind is the question of whether to do it now or not.
Recognizing his resolution, Lars clenches his teeth and speaks to Leo.
“If you realize that it is dangerous please immediately stop. I will cut everything down and solve this
situation for you.”
“Thank you, Colonel.”
“…..His Highness is preparing a great magic! Focus on defending! Don’t let them lay even a scratch on
him!!”
The Narbe Ritters and the Knights’ morale were raised by Lars’s command.
Seeing them, Leo begins the preparation for his magic.
On the other hand, Sieg tiredly speaks to Lars in a small voice.
“Even though he’s an imperial prince, this guy is quite an idiot huh……”
“I’m with you there.”
“…….if it gets dangerous I will drag him out of there. Got it?”
“I will leave it to you. I made a promise with His Highness Arnold…..I will buy you the time to escape
even if it costs me my life.”
Decided so, Lars held his sword up.
821
At that time, the sound of the whistle echoes.
That sound is inaudible to those who are there.
However, there was certainly a person who heard it.
822
SPT Chapter 124
Alright after reading through your comments yesterday, let’s see if we can choose something to
replace the Maneater.
Here are the viable choices,
1.The Fiend (Most accurate translation)
2.Akki (Transliterated name)
3.Nevermore (Dota?)
4.Vamprid (Took quite a liberty there huh lol)
5.Manfiend (Quite accurate for English name actually)
Note: I cut out some of the choices since it might overlap with other creatures that might come out in
the future.
Side note: we are only 2 chapters away from the end of this arc so the vote for the new series on
Patreon will begin next week. For all my patrons it will be ongoing for the next two weeks so make
sure that you do not miss it. More information and links will be added to this site later.
Mr.Graverobber
The Older Brother’s Encouragement
Appearing in the sky above Wumme in the appearance of Grau, Al tilts his head at the situation he sees
below.
“Nn? What is going on here?”
Al, who thought that Finne was in danger, immediately searched for her.
Soon after, he spotted her.
With the flute in hand, she climbed up the city wall alone.
“I’m surprised. I rushed here because I thought you were in danger.”
“Al-sama……”
Finne calls Al without any hesitation even though he is still under the disguise of Grau.
For some reason, she looked like she was about to cry.
823
“What happened?”
“Please…..! Leo-sama will die……!”
“…….Sebas.”
“Sir.”
Looking at Finne, Al gave up asking about the situation from her.
So, he called his butler who could briefly explain the situation for him.”
“Explain.”
“Yes. Duke Kruger was developing a drug that is the product of combining the blood of Demon and
Vampire together and half of the Southern Nobles who have been taken hostage were turned into
monsters called Maneater. This Maneater has the ability to turn anyone they bite into another
Maneater and a thousand knights in the castle were already turned. Currently, we have sealed off the
castle and the evacuation of the citizens is in place.”
“I see. So what did Leo choose to do?”
“…..he is planning to use a large scale holy magic to purify the demon blood and save everyone who
got turned into the Maneater……but since a short while ago the progress of his magic has stopped…..”
Finne jumped in and explained.
Looking at Sebas, he gives me a nod to confirm it.
That was a Leo-like decision, Al thought.
In a situation where he should be satisfied getting a 6/10 score, Leo is still aiming for the 10 out of 10.
It is an obvious thing for him to do where the situation involved human lives.
He will never give up the lives of the people and try to reduce the damage to zero. That is exactly what
Leo would choose to do. That was Al’s impression of him.
However.
“That idiot…….if he just seals off the city and takes command of the Southern border army he would be
able to save all the lives that could be saved.”
“That is certainly a splendid plan! But…..that won’t be enough for Leo-sama! Please, Al-sama, you
must…….”
“I refuse.”
With one word.
824
Hearing that from Al, Finne’s eyes opened wide in surprise.
A strong wind blows on the walls.
After the wind stopped, Al muttered.
“It’s a family rule…..”
“A family rule…….?”
“Do whatever you want but you will be the one responsible for it. That is our family rule. Leo decided
that this is the better choice. It may not be the best but it was a decision that could save a lot of lives. A
grudge might be born if you kill the Southern Nobles. If you sacrifice the city, a grudge might be born
from the citizens. Even so, he needs to stop the war and protect the people. But Leo threw all of that
away……he tries to save everything. That is the responsibility he chooses to bear. This is Leo’s
problem, he will have to do something about it himself.”
“B, But! Up until now!”
“Until now the opponent that Silver helped Leo with were those that were out of his reach. Vampires,
Dragon, Demons, each and every one of them were too much for a human to handle and needed to be
dealt with through raw power. But this time is different. This is a situation where Leo could manage if
he prepared to make sacrifices. If those Maneaters are overwhelmingly strong then I can blast them all
away with my magic but Leo should be able to lock them in this city with this level of opponent. In that
case…..many Narbe Ritters might be lost. Still, Leo turned away from that and decided to aim for a
better outcome. He threw it away and decided on the best result where both his enemy and ally can be
saved. All with his own power.”
“That is….you might be wrong, right…..? Right now, Leo-sama is trying to save a large number of
lives…..! Like what Al-sama has been doing!”
“That’s a matter of course…..Finne. I know that there are lives that can be saved by reaching out to
them from a safety zone but if you want to save more lives you will have to take a step further into the
danger. Not just the lives of the people who follow him, Leo is now setting out to save everyone here.
That is why it is only natural for him to put his life on the line.”
The act of helping someone is not easy.
If you want to save a thousand lives, the risk of it would increase accordingly.
As long as he is also risking the lives of his own followers, it is only natural that he would also risk his
own. That is what Al thinks. After all, if he couldn’t do that much, he would never be able to lead the
people.
“…..even if it is so……Leo-sama is in a desperate situation right now! He needs Al-sama’s help! Please, I
beg you!”
Finne begs and lowers her head.
825
It was because there is nothing else she can do.
However, in return to that, Al’s words were cruel.
“Finne…..I can’t save them. There is no ancient magic that can purify a demon. After all, holy magic was
created 500 years ago when the Demon King appeared. Naturally, the ancient magic which existed
before that didn’t have such magics. The only thing I can do is……destroy. It is something that both I
and you can’t do. Do you want me to tell Leo to stop and destroy the lives he bet his life to save?”
“No…..Al-sama must have some way to……”
“I am not omnipotent. I have no shred of talent for modern magic after all. The result Leo wants can
only be brought out by Leo. Well, even if there is something I can do, I won’t interfere. Still, it would be
unreasonable for Leo to risk the lives of his followers for his ideal so I will lend a hand when the time
comes but as long as Leo is desperately trying, I will not get involved. After all, this is Leo’s problem, it
is his responsibility to bear.”
“But…..even so…..”
Al looks at Finne and smiles.
Large teardrop spilled from Finne’s eyes.
Al smiles at her while wiping it away with his right hand.
“Don’t worry. There is nothing sad about this.”
“I’m not……crying….because I am sad…..I am just so worthless……”
“All the more reason that you don’t need to cry. You did what you could. I did what I could. And Leo is
doing what he can. He’s a little overstretched right now though…..well, just looks. He is my younger
brother. No matter how high the wall is, he will overcome it.”
Saying so, Al looks at Leo who is focusing on his magic.
Perhaps he doesn’t have enough magic power to cast it, he doesn’t even start the aria yet. It’s a classic
case of insufficient magic power where you would normally stop casting. If he doesn’t stop it will
surely endanger his life.
“Your trust is fine but it doesn’t change that this is still dangerous, sir.”
“If he dies then that’s it. But……my little brother won’t die.”
“Leonard-sama also has it hard, his closest relative placed so much expectation on him after all.”
“Obviously. I know best how amazing he is.”
“Isn’t the same goes for his weaknesses though?”
826
“Hmph…..I guess. Well, I should give him a cheer like a good elder brother would huh.”
Saying so, Al took a quick breath.
He then started slowly speaking.
“Leo….can you hear me?”
“Guh, Ugh!!”
Leo felt the power being drained out of his body.
The bleeding-like sensation makes it hard for him to stay conscious.
Leo looks down with a rough breath as he sweats.
Just a little more, he really felt that it needed only a little more before it completed.
It may not be possible, it might be better for him to stop.
Such weak thoughts pass through his mind and his heart shaken.
At that time, a voice reached Leo.
[[Leo….can you hear me?]]
“N,ii…..san…..?”
Leo thought that it was a hallucination.
A hallucination that occurs because of his weakened mind.
Leo laments that he was pushed to that point already. Even though he made a decision to save
everyone, he failed at the first step and now he is starting to hallucinate.
However, that hallucination shook him back to reality.
[[What’s wrong? Looking down like that, is there something funny on the ground?]]
“Haa Haa….you are so strict……”
[[I’m your big brother after all. That was why you pushed yourself so much even though people
around you tried to stop you right? No matter how many cautions they threw at you the only word
you came up with was [Even so] right? You didn’t want to sacrifice anyone. Am I wrong?]]
“I really can’t compete with you……Nii-san……”
The hallucination came in the form of his brother’s voice.
827
Leo smiles at such a situation. However, now he has recovered to the point that he could smile. How?
It was because he could hear Al’s voice.
[[Your decision really was idiotic. Choosing the easier way makes living life easier. You can’t get the
perfect score every time. It’s important to know when to give up.]]
“May, be…….”
[[Still, that was the choice you made right? Then don’t give up. Whether how hard or difficult it is, just
clench your teeth and endure it. You involved a lot of people in this. You don’t have the right to give up
now.]]
“……that’s true…….but……..my magic power is……”
His feeling got a little better.
However, none of his problems have been solved yet.
He doesn’t have enough magic power and he can’t cast the magic.
However, the hallucination doesn’t tolerate that.
[[No “But”. this is not the question of whether you can do it or not. “You are doing it”. Not enough
magic power? Did you squeeze every bit of it out of your body? You can still talk right. Your mind
might think that this is the limit but it is not. If you are the man who decided to save everyone then
overcome that limit!]]
The voice that will not forgive any half baked resolve corners Leo.
However, every time he heard that voice, the power returned to Leo’s body.
As if agreeing with that voice, a fire lit inside him again.
He hasn’t vomited blood yet. He can still stand. He can still do more.
Leo realizes that he was being too naive and begins to release his magic power, intending to exhaust
every bit of it from his body.
[[Someone will deny your decision, saying that you are too much of an idealist. Some will laugh and
gloss over it. Certainly, it might be a decision where if you gathered a hundred people, none of them
would choose to make. But you are that 101st person. Only someone like that can create a miracle. It
doesn’t matter how they deny you or laugh at you, shut them all up with the result!]]
“Un…..that’s right…..I will save everyone….I already decided to do that…….!!”
[[Good! Now, look forward. The people who you wish to save and those who are waiting for your
salvation aren’t at your feet.]]
828
Leo slowly looks to the front.
A little ahead, the Narbe Ritters and the knights are fighting against the Failures. And beyond that are
the Maneaters looking in their direction from the castle.
Their white eyes and shaky movement were abnormal and it makes you think that they couldn’t be
saved anymore.
Still, Leo thought. You can’t save anyone if you give up on them. No one can be saved unless you make
an effort.
Because I am powerless? Because I am weak? Those are not the reasons to give up.
He has to overcome it. That is the root of the reason he came here.
He will save them because he wants to. Even if everyone says that they can’t be saved, he will save
them.
He wanted to become a person who can say that. He aspired to be one.
Now, the real worth of Leo is being questioned.
“I…..came here to save them……to stop the war…….I came here to save everyone……!”
The figure of the Maneaters gives him strength.
It pushed himself to save them.
Pushing himself, blood rose up to his throat. But Leo swallowed it down.
He can’t show a pathetic appearance here. He has to look bold, and proper.
This is what it’s like for someone who aspires to be an emperor.
If he can’t do it now then, there’s no way he would be able to do it in the future.
“I……I will become an emperor who can save people…….!! I will help up anyone who fell on the road!
Even if someone says that it is impossible ……those who do not pursue their own ideals can not
become an emperor!”
[[Yeah…you will become one. You are my proud younger brother. Don’t worry about the rest. Focus
on what’s in front of you. If you exhaust everything you can then I will do something about it myself—
—I am your older brother after all.]]
“Un…..!!”
At that moment, Leo felt like his back was pushed.
With the power he received, Leo puts his hands together.
829
He clenches his teeth and squeezes out all his magic power into his magic.
Then, the golden light begins to shine around Leo.
[[The light of salvation poured down from heaven—]]
He started chanting the aria.
Seeing that, Al smiles satisfactorily.
“See, there’s no need to worry right?”
“The only one who doesn’t worry here is Arnold-sama though.”
Relieved Finne covers her face with both her hands.
While patting the head of such Finne, Al slowly looks around.
“It seems some rats are lurking around huh.”
“Perhaps they are from the organization.”
“They probably plan to disturb Leo huh.”
Al said and grins.
I told him not to worry about anything else.
That he only has to focus on what in front of him.
To protect those words, Al moves out.
“I leave Finne to you, Sebas.”
“Yes, sir.”
“Al-sama!”
“Wait there. I will finish this right away.”
Al said so and transferred away.
To protect his younger brother.
830
SPT Chapter 125
The next one is the epilogue. I want to take a few days break after we finish this arc so I will be
releasing it either tomorrow or tuesday.
I have to prepare for the vote too…………
Now, enjoy
-Mr.Graverobber
Golden Light of Purification
I wonder when it began.
The time I started consciously acting like an elder brother.
My mother treated me and Leo equally. I have never been told that I am the elder brother.
I was never raised as an elder brother but after a while, it changed.
I started treating myself like one.
Just when did it begin.
While thinking about such a thing, I finished my transfer.
There are many tall towers in the city. On top of each of them is a mage aiming their magic at Leo.
That’s why I mercilessly pierce his chest. There was no finesse or technique, simply relying on the
brute force of magic power.
But that’s fine. That way, it would be harder for them to notice my presence.
“Ugha…….?”
While being surprised at my sudden appearance, the mage life was snuffed out.
At the same time, I started my magic again and transferred to another mage.
“Wha!?”
He probably never expected someone to suddenly transfer in.
Appearing in front of him, I pierced his chest without him putting up any effective resistance.
Finally, the mages who were targeting Leo noticed that something strange was going on.
831
However, my transfer magic was faster than their reaction.
I transfer to their location and pierce their chest.
I keep repeating that action with high speed.
While transferring from tower to tower, I remember something.
The figure of an ideal older brother I once saw.
When I was put in prison, he came to see me every day. No matter how busy he was, he visited and
talked to me, that was all he did.
He never said that he would get me out of the prison nor does he ever bring snacks for me.
He knew that I didn’t want such a thing so he only came to talk to me so that I won’t be lonely.
Then, when I got out of prison, he gently patted my head.
The only word he said was, [You did great].
I wanted to be like that person.
To be a brother who can support his younger brother’s recklessness and a brother who can follow up
for it
That’s right. He was someone that Leo also admired.
I admired him.
My eldest brother, the Crown Prince. I wanted to be an elder brother like him.
“We are siblings after all……even the person we look up to is the same huh.”
While muttering so, I pierce the chest of another mage.
Blood spatters.
But I have no sympathy for them. They are not soldiers that fell victim to the succession war.
They are people who decided to dye their hands with crimes of their own volition, and they want to
spread the damage here even further.
They should be punished by law but they would be given the death penalty.
So, there shouldn’t be any problem for me to clean them all up here.
“HIIIII!!??”
There are only two left.
832
One of them raised a scream.
However, I didn’t hesitate. I pierced his chest and immediately transferred away.
The last one gives up his defense against me and turns his hands toward Leo.
Leo, who is pouring all his concentration toward his magic, has no way to avoid it. The Narbe Ritters
also focus their attention on the front. They probably couldn’t intercept his attack either.
That’s why I grabbed the mage’s arm and broke it.
“GYAAAHHH!!??”
“My little brother is working hard right now—-could you not disturb him?”
“L, little brother……!?”
“It’s hard you know, seriously. [Scolding him when he does something stupid], [Follow up for him so
that he won’t fail]. Having to do both is really the tough part of being an [Elder Brother] you know.”
“Don’t, tell me……you are, Ar, no………!!??”
He didn’t get to finish his word.
After all, I already pierced his chest.
Letting him go, the mage fell like a marionette with its strings cut and lay down on the ground.
Meanwhile, Leo’s chant is going smoothly.
[[Bringing salvation to the people ・The brilliance is the mercy of the god ・ The golden light is the
miracle of heaven・O evildoers, repent—–]]
The chant continues.
7 verses chanting. It is the highest type of magic in modern magic.
Considering the difficulty of mastering holy magic, this magic is more advanced than the low-level
ancient magics. It is of course the highest level of holy magic.
Holy magic was developed to combat Demons. It was magic that didn’t allow any impurity, the
weapon of humanity.
Why can Leo use such a magic? Perhaps he studied it after the Southern incident. He probably thought
about what would happen if he could use such a magic at that time.
The result of that incident was not something that Leo satisfied with.
833
Such thought made him study this magic. However, putting something he just learned immediately
into practice is simply ridiculous.
His chant still has strange pauses.
Perhaps, his internal organs are strained and blood is rising to his throat.
Desperately swallows them down, Leo makes an effort to continue his chant.
So I decided to create an environment where that will make it a little easier for him to do so.
[[O god of time・I am one who defied your providence・The flow you decided is unchanging・time
continues to flow without interruption・it does not stop nor does it interrupted・this great current is
endless・I shall rebel against that current ・and peer into that instant of future———Deja Vu Clock.]]
Usually, ancient magics that manipulate time is hard to use. In the first place, the user can not use
most of their magic during it and at best it would be better to have others use magic for them.
Despite that, it requires a large amount of magic power to cast so it is not practical.
Among those magic, this one is moderately reasonable to use.
This magic is one that shows people the possibilities of their future through Deja Vu.
It doesn’t show their definite future, only some possibilities that have not been realized yet.
Moreover, since it is only limited to the immediate future, it has very limited use.
Still, it is useful enough during battle. They will be shown what would happen if they choose to do
something by the Deja Vu. If there are lives that can be saved by that, there will be people who choose
to act on it.
A young soldier suddenly jumped in front of a big monster. that was dangerous. However, to him, it
shouldn’t be. I don’t know what kind of possibilities he saw but I am sure that he chose the best one
and committed to it.
Then, when the soldier thrusts his sword at the neck of the big monster and he falls down together
with it.
Through the dust cloud, the soldier rolled out.
“So you kept your promise huh. Second Lieutenant Lerner.”
The young soldier, Second Lieutenant Lerner, showed a splendid performance. He then takes out a
new sword and started moving again.
Everyone is fighting for Leo.
834
Even if they think that his decision was ridiculous, they decided to follow him. That surely wasn’t
because Leo is a prince.
“He’s an idiot that is worth supporting after all…….”
Simple honesty.
I think that word is the perfect fit for Leo. he is an honest idiot. Even though giving something up is the
wiser choice, he never decided to do so.
Still, people gather around Leo because they themselves don’t have such stupidity.
People long for things that they don’t have.
It is also a good quality of a leader to have something that others don’t.
And it is the duty of the subjects to stop and follow up for him. Leo has the ability to gather those
subjects at his side.
Like when Father put the Prime Minister by his side, Leo will definitely be able to find someone like
that someday.
“Now, Leo. Everyone already opened the path for you——let them eat it.”
[[Heaven does not abandon the virtuous・Let this golden light destroy all that evil——Holy・
Glitter!!!!!]]
A golden circle emerges around the castle and golden light begins to shine from it. It is a barrier.
A barrier that will not let any evil escape their coming demise.
A complex magic circle emerged above the castle and a huge pillar of golden light fell from the sky. It
wraps up the entire castle and purifies everything inside.
Before long, the light fades away.
If the demon blood is deeply fused with their body then they can’t be saved. Their bodies will probably
be completely purified and disappear.
However, after the golden light faded, there are many people collapsed on the ground.
A big cheer rises up. With Lars and his men defeated all the big monsters, the crisis was over.
Many are shouting Leo’s name. Leo was trying to answer them but it seems he has already reached his
limit.
Leo collapsed. However, the moment before his body hit the ground, Sieg supported him like a
cushion. It seems that the person himself intended to catch him but due to their size difference, he
ended up as a pillow instead.
835
After a light laugh from Sieg’s predicament. I returned to Finne with transfer magic.
“It all worked out somehow right.”
“Thank you for your hard work.”
“I didn’t do anything great. I was completely working behind the scene this time after all.”
“Um….Al-sama……I……”
“Nn?”
Finne muttered as if she found something difficult to say.
She then lowers her head with all her might.
“MY DEEPEST APOLOGY! I said so many selfish things to you!”
“You are not at fault. Whether about calling me here or the things you said. I prioritize the trust in my
brother more than the big picture this time. If that ended up causing people to lose their lives then I
would be no different from a criminal. Sorry. It was all because of my stupid brother.”
When I said that and made a bitter smile, Finne panicked and waved her hand. Without being able to
come up with anything to say, her mouth opens and shut repeatedly.
After a burst of laughter at such Finne, I say this to her.
“But, I believed in Leo this time. I thought about a lot of things and decided that Leo would be able to
save them. For you, that must have been a dangerous and cold decision. Sorry. It seems I have done
nothing but troubling you.”
“Th, that’s not true! I am not troubled at all! The one that always causes trouble……is me…..I am sorry
for being so useless…….”
Seeing Finne drop her shoulders, I turn my eyes to Sebas.
I don’t know what Finne has been doing so far.
I thought that she made some fatal mistake but Sebas shook his head.
“Finne-sama was doing very great. Nobody would dare say that she is useless.”
“Hear that?”
“Th, that is…..”
“It’s alright isn’t it. People have different roles to play. No one can do everything. You, me, of course,
Leo as well. If you can’t do something then I will help you out. You might not have the strength to help
836
us in battle but you have the power to help us outside of it. It is a power that I don’t have. That’s why I
am always relying on you.”
“Al-sama…….”
“That being said, I have a request. Can you take care of my stupid little brother that is sleeping over
there for me? He’s such a troublesome guy so I can only ask you to do it. It will be quite a trip before
you get back to the capital so take care of him until then alright.”
“Yes! Please leave him to me!”
I looked at the rejuvenated Finne and opened the transfer gate with a smile.
Then I glance at Sebas.
It was a gaze that told him to take care of Finne but being the omnipotent butler that he is, he
probably already understood what I wanted to say as he said ‘As you wish’ and politely bowed to me.
He really has no opening.
Next time, I will definitely look up some of his weaknesses once we are back in the capital.
With that in mind, I headed back to the capital using the transfer gate.
837
SPT Chapter 126
Finally done. this conclude the fourth arc.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Black Twin Princes
“Second Princess Zandra Lakes Adler. I hereby subject you to an indefinite house arrest. Until you
receive my permission, you may not leave your quarter in the inner palace, you will not be allowed to
meet with others either. Of course, your right to participate in the succession war——is now
confiscated.”
The Southern turmoil is over.
We have now entered the cleaning up phase and the first to one to drop out of the race is Zandra.
“Your Majesty…….Duke Kruger is certainly my uncle but more importantly, I am of the imperial family.
I have no intention of revolting against the Empire. I do apologize for not noticing Duke Kruger’s plan
but I have never once cooperated with him.”
“I shall believe in your words. However, the situation remains the same. You are still related by blood
with Duke Kruger and the fact that Duke Kruger supported you. Those facts will never change no
matter what you say. I will say this as your father, so listen carefully………….give up the throne,
Zandra.”
For Zandra, those words would be something close to a death sentence.
She was told that she will no longer be a contender for the throne in front of many influential nobles
that are gathered here.
Zandra’s face distorted from the humiliation. She then stares straight at Father and says.
“Do you…….hate Okaa-sama that much?”
“This is not something personal.”
“No, Otou-sama. This is personal. You really believe in those stupid rumors that Okaa-sama was the
one who assassinated the Second Consort right!? I know that ever since that day you no longer look at
me as your daughter!”
Zandra takes a step forward.
The Imperial Knights standing nearby reached for their swords but Father stopped them.
838
“I do think of you as my daughter. If I didn’t care about you, I would have married you off to another
noble long ago.”
“That’s a barefaced lie! Whenever you look at me or Okaa-sama, there was never a moment where you
don’t have anger in your eyes! I have been trying to tell you so many times ever since that day! The
one who assassinated the Second Consort was not Okaa-sama! Why can’t you accept that!”
“Zandra. This incident is unrelated to the Second Consort.”
“If you really think of me as your child then you should believe my words! Isn’t it too unreasonable
that the sin of uncle fell on me as his niece!”
“Zandra……the house arrest you received was from my kindness.”
“That is no kindness! I have already put everything on the line to become the Crown Princess!”
“……as I thought, you are not suited to become an empress. Give it up.”
Father lonelily said.
The weight of those words was different from what he said before.
Father looks straight at Zandra and says.
“A person who can only think about herself cannot be an emperor. The emperor must first think about
the country, the people second, and yourself last. Duke Kruger’s evil deeds have become known to our
people. He cooperated with an organization that deprived people of their children. That was
something obvious and you do not understand it at all.”
“I do understand!”
“If you really understand then…….why did you only talk about yourself? The state of our country and
the sentiment of the people. No matter which side you look at it from, the fact that you will be aiming
for the throne is forgivable. The bloodline of the person who caused the rebellion, the person who
connected with the criminals who afflicted pain on people. Even if you didn’t know what was going on,
it is still true that you are connected to them. The people are angry. They need someone to get
punished. Just consider it a mercy that you didn’t lose your head for this.”
“O, Otou-sama…..I, I’m…….”
“Withdraw. I don’t want to hear another word from a person who can only think about herself.”
Saying so, Father gave a command to the Imperial Knights with his hand.
Two imperial knights grab Zandra’s arms.
Seeing that, Zandra glares at the knights.
“Insolent! Who do you think I am!? I am a princess you know!? Release me!”
839
“Forgive us. Your Highness.”
“Kuh! You! I will not forgive you! Let me go!! Otou-sama! Otou-sama! Otou-samaaaaaaaa!!!!”
Father tiredly exhales and leans back on the throne.
His eyes turned to Gordon next.
“Seeing Zandra like that……do you have anything to say? Gordon?”
“No.”
“I see……Losing grasp on your subordinates, endangered the envoy, and started a full-scale war with
the South. The punishment for those crimes will not be light, you know?”
“Yes. it was all due to my incompetence. I am willing to accept any kind of punishment.”
Seeing Gordon being so upright is a rare sight.
However, in a sense, this might be because he still has some leeways left.
The skirmish that happened was because a general was assassinated. One could argue that what
happened was out of Gordon’s control.
If he stands upright and takes the punishment then his penalty won’t be a heavy one. That is probably
what Gordon is aiming for.
And in fact, it didn’t end up as a big deal. Well, one could say that it was a big deal since war did
happen with the South but Gordon is not in the place where he could be punished for it.
“It seems like you are reflecting on it. Still, punishment is punishment. You will be sent to join the
Northern Border Defense Army. You may not come back here for two months. Go and remind yourself
what protecting your own country is like on the frontline.”
“…….I understand.”
Gordon said as he clenched his teeth.
Gordon was once told to take command of the Northern Border Defense Army. He turned it down
because of the succession war and the low priority of the Northern defense. But I know his real reason
for turning it down. He doesn’t want to be compared to Lize-aneue who is commanding the defense of
another border.
Being sent to the place he once refused to station at is a humiliation for Gordon not to mention that he
will not be its commander.
The reason why he didn’t get sent to the South is probably that Father is being cautious about the
turmoil it might cause when the South is in its reconstruction phase.
840
There are powerful countries on both our western and eastern borders. He didn’t send him there
because Gordon is hard to utilize so the better choice for that is to send him to the Northern Border
where he will receive the most humiliation.
“That’s all for the punishment. Everyone, it seems you all had a hard time. With help from all of you,
the damage has been minimized.”
Father said so and thanked everyone there.
He is not here right now but Eric has been fending off other countries as the Minister of Foreign
Affairs. The reason for that is for him to prevent other countries from using the opening the unrest in
the Empire created to invade us. It might be plain but it is an honest work.
Leo may earn points this time but Eric also earned a point as well.
Zandra dropped out, we lined up next to Gordon maybe even overtake him but we are still far away
from Eric.
“Especially Eric who is not here and Leonard, you all did great.”
“I only did what is natural as a prince.”
“Don’t be so modest. You cast a great magic in the end, right? Is your body alright?”
“Yes. there is no problem.”
“I see…..Arnold seemed to work hard this time too right? You did well.”
Father looks at me.
He is probably talking about the thing with the Narbe Ritters.
I made a bitter smile and scratched my head while making up my mind before I said my next words.
“Yeah, I didn’t really do much. Well, a lot of things went well this time. In the end, [War didn’t happen]
after all. We can say that all is well right?”
Making it look like I was swept away from being praised, I said those words.
The ministers who were waiting to hear my reply all frowned at once. That is because they all know
what Father will do next.
He just told Zandra about the importance of the people. In other words, Father is well aware of how
our people view this situation.
That being the case, it is clear what is coming next.
841
“War didn’t happen you say……? YOU FOOL! [WAR DID HAPPEN]! From our perspective, it might have
been only a small skirmish but one city had become a frontline! To them, what happened was a big
war! [War did happen] fool!!”
“I, it was a slip of tongue…..please forgive me.”
“You didn’t understand a thing! Our role is to run this country so that our people do not have to bear
such a feeling! If you can only look at things from a higher standpoint then you are no different than
Zandra you know! Do you want to be disciplined too! Think carefully about what you said!!”
Being scolded at, I turned my face to the ground.
Well, it’s natural for him to get angry. However, I already got what I wanted.
The Emperor himself admitted that what happened at Gers was a war, not a simple skirmish.
In other words, it means that the [Next War] in our promise with Gordon is now over.
I peek a glance at Gordon. Perhaps he noticed it as he strongly glared at me.
I grin at such Gordon.
Serve you right. I would never leave such a troublesome promise unattended to.
However, the price for that is high. My father’s sermon never ends.
While thinking that it was quite an expensive price to pay, I continue listening to his sermon while
praying that it would be over soon.
A party with nobody to talk to is boring.
The party was held to celebrate the conclusion of the Southern turmoil.
Like the time when Leo came back after subjugating the Demons, I have no acquaintance here.
Once again, I stay at the venue wall while hoping that Father would leave early so that I can leave as
well.
While I was thinking so, Father stood up and raised his glass.
“Thank you for gathering here tonight. I will properly hand out the reward for the heroes who solved
the Southern turmoil at a later date but tonight I would like to offer them this toast.”
Saying so, Father raised his glass at the participants.
Then he started speaking.
842
“Everyone expected a war to happen in the South. I would like to make the first toast for our Blau
Mowe, Finne von Kleinert who bravely nominated herself to be the imperial envoy! Cheers!!”
“Cheers to the blue seagull princess!!”
“Cheers to Finne-sama!!”
Everyone at the venue raises their cup.
Finne’s name and the cheering sound continued to echo within the venue.
“Next, I’d like to offer a toast to my proud soldiers. A surprise attack with only a small number, it was
indeed a dangerous mission. The only one who could accomplish such a thing is definitely them! To
the elites of my imperial army! Raise your cup for the Narbe Ritters!! Cheers!!”
“To the Scarred Knights!”
“Cheers for the Narbe Ritters!!”
This incident changed the evaluation of the Narbe Ritters completely.
Everyone was reminded that even though they are soldiers, they are knights at the same time.
The only knight order in the imperial army. From now on, they will be more recognized.
The final one will probably be for Leo huh. After that, Father should finally head back.
While I was thinking so.
An unexpected thing happened.
“I would like to dedicate the last toasts to my son[s]! Leonard presented me with a plan to make a
surprise attack with a small number of soldiers and brilliantly pulled it out! In the end, he even saved
all the Southern Nobles by performing a great magic! His action is nothing short of magnificent!”
“Absolutely! I wholeheartedly admire Prince Leonard!”
“This might make His Highness Leonard be the one closest to the Crown Prince position!”
Everyone begins to talk cheerfully.
However, Father’s talk is still not over.
There was a continuation.
“And—-my other son who supported Leonard. Arnold persuaded the strict Narbe Ritters to volunteer
for the mission. He has earned the right to have his own toast, no?”
“Eh…….?”
843
I didn’t expect my name to be called so I let out such a stupid voice.
However, Father was looking straight at me.
His eyes were not joking.
“Wai-, F, Father? I, didn’t……..”
“You wouldn’t accept the reward even if I told you to, right. So just accept the toast. The Narbe Ritters
came to me. When I was praising them, they all said the same thing. [We fought for His Highness
Arnold] they said. Making them saying something like is nothing less than a job well done. Your
concern for your younger brother brought out their power to the fullest. Your achievement is no less
important to Leonard.”
Saying so, Father holds up his glass higher than ever.
He then loudly says.
“Let’s make a toast! To our Empire’s Princes! Well done my sons! I am proud of you! Let this be known
through the Empire! This accomplishment is theirs! Cheers to [the Black Twin Princes]!!!!”
After Father said that, everyone loudly cheers for [The Black Twin Princes].
After that, the names of me and Leo echo loudly through the venue.
“For Prince Leonard!”
“For Prince Arnold!”
“For the Empire’s Black Twin Princes!!”
“Cheers!”
“Long live the Empire!!”
No, no, give me a break here.
A party with no one to talk to is boring but a party where I am the center of attention is very
uncomfortable for me.
The noble ladies who definitely have no interest in me are approaching me. A male noble whose name
I don’t even know came to talk to me like a friend.
When I tried to escape from them, I found Leo who was taking a breather outside.
“Ah, Nii-san. Good work.”
“Yeah, good work to you too. It is a little sudden but, sorry.”
844
“Eh?”
I apologize and after messing up Leo’s neatly arranged hair, I leave Leo there as a decoy and leave the
party venue.
Hang out with them for me alright.
“Wait!? Nii-san!!?? Wa! Wait, I’m not Nii-san! I’m Leonard!”
“My bad, Leo! Forgive me! Even I have a situation where I can’t help you from!
While whispering such a thing, I pushed everything to my brother and fled the scene.
TLN: Yup, finally done. I will take a break for a few days, maybe a week before I start the next arc. The
vote for next series will begin tomorrow so tune in for that. if you want to check it out please go to
https://www.patreon.com/graverobbertl
-Mr.Graverobber
845
Alois
A month has passed since the battle with Duke Kruger. With the army and the magistrates dispatched
by my father, things are starting to get calm in the south again.
As things started to calm down, a problem arose.
Main gate of the imperial capital.
Passing through it is a group of gray figures riding on horses and I am approaching them in the
appearance of Grau.
“Keep it walking just like that.”
“Yes…..it’s been a while. Grau.”
“Yeah, Alois.”
The group of gray figures was Alois’s party.
Since his mother safely got back to his territory, he is here to apologize to Father. The reason for him
to travel here incognito is for his own safety.
Alois has crushed the plans of two powerful factions namely Gordon’s and Kruger’s. Even if you take
that out of the calculation, he is a young lord who endured the assault of 10,000 imperial soldiers with
only 1,000 men. There are many reasons for him to be targeted.
“Is your mother alright?”
“Yes, thanks to you.”
“I didn’t do anything. It was Prince Leonard who rescued your mother.”
“It was thanks to Grau that I got to meet her safely.”
Saying so, Alois makes a charming smile under his hood. While smiling at such Alois, I get to the main
subject. That said, I should finish this soon.
“Alois. Your position is a delicate one. There won’t be any punishment for you but there is no doubt
that you will be used politically here.”
“Yes…..but I am prepared. I was able to protect my territory and the south. If I wish for anything more
than this then I would be asking too much.”
The eyes of Alois as he said were ones of a person who made his resolve.
846
So he made up his mind before he came here huh. Even if I told him that there won’t be any
punishment, it is still not certain that it will be the case. A death sentence for him is still a possibility.
Still, with that resolve of his, he should be able to get through it no matter what happens.
He is quite an accomplished guy. If I was at the same age, would I be able to prepare myself to face
death?
No, I still can’t do it even now. In that sense, Alois is much better than me. That is exactly why he is
worth helping.
“I prepared a present for you.”
“A present?”
“It’s all up to you. If you be yourself things will definitely develop in a good direction for you.”
“I see….I will keep that in mind.”
“Yeah.”
After telling him as much, I left.
There were already many eyes watching Alois. Since there are imperial knights guarding his group,
there must be assassins aiming for his life as well. Some of them followed me but after I entered a
black alley, I transferred away and disappeared.
The room that I transferred into was an inn facing the main street where Sebas is waiting for me.
“Welcome back, sir.”
“Yeah, how is the target?”
“Right on schedule, sir.”
Hearing so I look out the window.
Many carriages and horses are traveling through the main street.
Stopping at the side of the main street is a simple but well-built carriage.
“He really hates standing out as always huh.”
“It is probably in his nature.”
Onboard that carriage is Franz the Prime Minister. Franz is a known devoted husband and whenever
his work gets busy it is known that he will always buy a gift for her. Right now his attendant is buying
it for him. After all, he would stand out too much if he goes himself.
847
I apologized to Franz in my heart and lightly snapped my finger. As a result, the horses pulling Franz’s
carriage started to panic.
Then the connecting rope snapped and the carriage began to run out of control.
“Forgive me, Prime Minister…..”
“It couldn’t be helped, sir. This is the best way to get him to ally himself with Alois-dono.”
“I know but I feel sorry for him you know. I still did it though.”
It would be bad for your heart to stay alone on a runaway carriage. Well, since it was intentional, the
direction the horses are pulling him toward is adjusted by the barrier so there shouldn’t be any
damage to the surroundings. There won’t be anyone hurt by this but Franz who is inside might have
started to hate riding on a carriage from now on though. Well, it should be fine.
The runaway carriage accelerates more and more. The horses are excited and there is no driver to
control it nor does Franz have any way to stop them from rampaging.
No matter what happens, I can save him using magic but there is no need for that.
“He is quite an able man for his age isn’t he.”
That compliment came from Sebas. At the end of his line of sight is Alois galloping his horse side by
side with Franz’s carriage.
“How do you think he will do it?”
“To make sure of the result, rescuing the Prime Minister from that carriage is the best choice. It
shouldn’t be hard considering the knights following behind him. However.”
“The runaway horse might hurt people in the surroundings right.”
“Yes. His first priority should be given to calm the horse down. However, it is dangerous to approach
the already excited horses with another horse. At worst, his horse might get excited as well and he
might end up shaken off its back.”
“Well, it is certainly dangerous……but he is a guy who took up arms against 10,000 imperial soldiers
you know. That kind of decision, he would be able to make it easy.”
It is true that he got the help of Silver. There is no denying that I pushed his back. Even so, Alois
himself chose to point his sword against an army ten times the number of his. He didn’t run away and
chose to stay to protect his territory as its lord. He decided to protect all the people as an imperial
noble.
That was the decision of a twelve years old boy.
“He will surely be a good subject for Leo once he becomes the emperor.”
848
“The Empire is vast. It can not be governed by one emperor. After all, a trustworthy noble is
necessary.”
That’s right, I nod. The south lost an influential noble. Surely, his territory will get distributed.
However, it is true that there is no noble who can act as its center at the moment.
However, Alois is an outstanding talent to play that role. He has taken enough credit to do that. There
are many things he will have to learn but I am still looking forward to seeing his future.
Apparently, it seems Alois chose to calm the horse. While desperately galloping his horse in parallel
with them he tried to calm them down.
After a while, the horses pulling Franz’s carriage slowly stopped.
Animals are sensitive to those who are afraid. To be able to calm them down meant that Alois himself
was calm.
“With this, it should be safe for Alois now. The Prime Minister isn’t someone who helps someone out
of sympathy but he is someone who always looking into the future. Once he places expectations on
Alois’s future, he will definitely stop Father even if he tries to punish him.”
“His Majesty wouldn’t punish him in the first place though.”
“Well, that’s true. If he punishes Alois now, it will stir up an uproar in the south again. To tell you the
truth, having him make contact with the Prime Minister has another purpose.”
“And that would be?”
“If the Prime Minister has expectations for Alois, he will try to keep him within the Emperor’s reach. In
other words, he will try to keep him at the castle and educate him. If that is the case then he will have
the opportunities to get in contact with Leo and he will be able to learn various kinds of things.”
“If His Majesty takes a liking to Alois-dono then the number of the nobles trying to approach him will
also increase. Shouldn’t you take the possibility that he will be taken by another faction into the
calculation as well?”
“Thinking about something like that, you really have a bad personality, you know that?”
“One can not work as a butler without having a bad personality. If I can not come up with trickery and
sinister plots, some might start finding fault in my work after all.”
“……….”
I silently stare at Sebas but he simply acts oblivious to it.
Seriously, he has no respect for his master at all.
“It’s your influence that I am so pessimistic you know. I’m certain of it.”
849
“I am honored.”
Seeing the proud Sebas, I give up since it seems that nothing affects him at all.
“Let’s go. We are done here. Thanks to Father, people started to pay attention to me lately so I can’t
really move around as freely as before.”
“His Majesty did call you the black twin prince after all. If everything keeps going as it is, your standing
will definitely improve. His Majesty really did utilize a good plan.”
“It’s a bother.”
While having such a conversation, we leave the inn. The arrival of Alois is evidence that the south has
calmed down. I was doing post-processing until for the previous incident but from here on things will
certainly get busy again.
850
SPT Chapter 129
this one is the proper start of the new arc I guess
-Mr.Graverobber
Ceasefire Order
The day after Alois arrived.
I, Leo, and Eric were called by Father. It was just about when I was thinking of going out so I walked
down the corridor with a sigh.
At that time, someone called out to me.
“Your Highness Arnold.”
“What is it? Prime Minister?”
It was Franz who called out to me.
The fact that we were called means that Franz was probably called as well. Our destination is probably
the same so I started walking together with Franz.
“Was Your Highness also summoned by His Majesty?”
“Yeah, and I was thinking about heading out to play too.”
“That must be hard on you but please do keep entertaining yourself in moderation. Playing pranks on
an elderly is especially not commendable.”
Saying so, he gives me a slightly reproving look.
As expected of the Prime Minister. He sure is sharp.
“I wonder what you are talking about? Even like this, I do properly respect the elderly you know?”
“There is no need to pretend here Your Highness. For His Highness Eric, it was too lukewarm and for
His Highness Leonard, that act was simply too villainous. You wanted to establish a connection
between Earl Simmel and me, yes?”
He has served as Father’s chief of staff since he was a prince. So after he assessed the current situation
he immediately noticed that it was likely to be me who is behind it huh.
851
Franz is the Prime Minister. Normally, he would be someone that people are afraid to touch. Only the
candidates for the throne are likely to lay a hand on someone like Franz. And as he said, it was only me
who would do such a half-baked thing in the entire imperial capital.
“So? What if I did something?”
“This is just a precaution but please refrain from doing such a thing [at the moment].”
“At the moment?”
“Yes. it is Your Highness we are talking about after all. You probably wanted Earl Simmel to get in
contact with me to secure an ally. Moreover, with the assumption that I would place my expectations
on him, you aimed to use the Earl as the point of contact and gather more nobles to your side——-still,
you are aware that I would notice and inform His Majesty about your action so he would lower his
evaluation of your, correct? You have started to stand out ever since His Majesty dubbed you the black
twin princes after all.”
“………….”
Some say that the Emperor’s greatest achievement was to make Franz his Prime Minister. And that
would not be wrong.
As Father’s right-hand man, he is the most important piece that supports the foundation of the
Empire. As I thought, he could easily read the thought of a greenhorn like me huh.
“I give up. So? What do you mean that I shouldn’t do such a thing for now?”
I raise both hands to signify my surrender.
Franz is not surprised to see that. He wasn’t goading me into confessing. He simply gives me advice
because he already knows everything.
“His Majesty will explain that later.”
Saying so, Franz bowed and started walking ahead but as though he remembered something, he
stopped and turned back to face me.
“Speaking of which…..immediately after entering the capital, it seems that Earl Simmel got in contact
with a person wearing a gray hood. That was probably Grau, the wandering strategist who cooperated
with the Earl in the defense of his city. Immediately after they parted ways, my carriage ran
wild…..was that a coincidence?”
“This is the first time I heard of it.”
I acted surprised. It must have been a performance with nothing natural about it.
Seeing that, Franz shows a small smile.
852
“I see. I must have been overthinking. Earl Simmel repelled 10,000 strong imperial troops so he is
getting a lot of attention but it seems that it was Grau who read all the plans of the imperial army. I
thought that he might be an insider who is familiar with the tactic of our imperial army.”
“I am completely clueless in that area you know.”
“Is that right. Certainly, Your Highness really hates studying. I must be overthinking it. Excuse my
rudeness.”
Saying so, Franz walks away.
With only a few clues, he managed to arrive at the truth. What a scary person. With this person as his
chief of staff, no wonder Father won the succession war.
“As I thought, standing out really is troublesome…….”
If I stand out, there will be more eyes watching me. It is hard to work in the shadow when there is so
much surveillance around.
I want my evaluation to drop and make people underestimate me again but,
I just got warned to drop the idea.
“Things are going troublesome again huh?”
While having a bad feeling about this, I continued heading toward Father’s place.
“How do you do? Your Majesty, I am Alois von Simmel.”
Said Alois as he kneels in front of Father. Receiving his greeting, Father greets him back in return.
“Welcome, Earl Simmel. I take it that you came here to explain yourself, correct?”
“Yes, the earldom of Simmel was hostile against the imperial army because of the hostages. We do not
have any intention to rebel against Your Majesty in any way. I beg for your forgiveness.”
He probably knows about it without Alois telling him but there is a meaning for the person himself to
personally come and explain the situation to the Emperor. Most importantly, it is faster to hear about
the details from his mouth.
“I shall believe in your words. However, I heard that it was the earldom of Simmel that murdered one
of the imperial army generals and started the conflict, yes? How do you justify that action?”
“I have no explanation but……it was my uncle who ordered it. If what my uncle said is to be believed, it
seems that he has hired a sniper at the request from the imperial army, Your Majesty.”
853
Father’s eyebrows slightly move. He probably received the report about it. Before he arrived, Alois
had sent a written report here in advance.
However, the difference between reading it and hearing it directly is clear.
“In other word…….you are saying that there is a traitor in the army?”
“If my uncle’s words were to be believed, yes……however, what he said was simply outrageous so
there might be a possibility that it was one of Duke Kruger’s plans as well.”
Alois dared not to name Gordon. If he gives up Gordon’s name here, it will only direct Gordon’s wrath
toward him. It is for Alois’s own sake to push all the crime to the already caught Kruger.
Still, even without him saying it, Father can guess what happened.
Certainly, there is no doubt that Gordon wishes for war. It is apparent in his actions. Of course, there is
a possibility that Kruger was lurking behind the scene so it doesn’t mean that Gordon can be punished
with this.
However, it still aroused suspicions. That is already enough. After all, Alois isn’t hostile toward Gordon
to the extent that he would attack him.
When it comes to responsibility, Alois could be taken responsible for not being able to stop his uncle.
For everyone’s sake, it is better to keep things vague.
“He took hostages and forces the nobles who won’t obey him to fight. If it’s Kruger then he certainly
might do that. I understand the story now. If we only look at the result, you stopped the advance of the
imperial army by successfully defending against their surprise attack. In that sense, you have
contributed to the Empire. You did well, Earl Simmel.”
“I humbly accept your praise.”
“You had no choice but to point your sword at the imperial army so I shall treat this matter as water
under the bridge.”
In this situation, he can’t punish Alois. Father himself doesn’t want to pursue it any further and he also
doesn’t want to charge Alois with a crime. Above all, if he punishes him, it would only invite more
troubles. It is better to play it safe by blaming it all on Kruger who was already caught.
“Stay in the castle for a while. This place is where the talents of the Empire gather. You will find many
things to learn here.”
“Yes, as you wish.”
Like that, Father dismisses Alois.
Now, only Father and Franz along with me, Leo, and Eric are in the room. This will surely be
something about the succession war.
854
“Do you know why you are the only people who remain here?”
“Is it about the succession war?”
“Exactly. The succession war…….it is there to decide the next person who will lead the Empire. If many
talented candidates are born, there will be some damage coming out of it. However, this time it is
intolerable. A civil war born of a sibling rivalry is simply ridiculous!”
Saying so, Father sternly looks at us.
Well, it’s natural for him to get angry. The succession war must be contained to the extent that it won’t
damage the benefit of the Empire. However, with the previous case, it already far exceeds that scope.
“It is fine to fight among yourselves but if you can’t stop to think about the benefit of the Empire then
just give up the throne. Engrave this into your head, the succession war is for the Empire’s sake. What
comes first is always our country.”
“I understand.”
“I will bear that in mind.”
Eric and Leo bowed.
Since I thought that I am not a candidate, I was taking some carefree attitude but Father turned his
gaze toward me.
“Arnold…..you understand right?”
“I do. But I never wish for the throne in the first place and above all, I am troubled to hear that since
the radical party you spoke about aren’t even here.”
“Do you have any guarantee that you all won’t turn radical yourselves?”
“None, I guess.”
“That’s right. If you understand that then give me your reply.”
“Yes, yes, I understand.”
When I bowed my head, Father let out a sigh.
He then leaned back on the throne and said.
“Cease fighting for the throne for a while. It is almost my birthday. In other words, the 25th year
anniversary of my coronation is near. You all do understand the stupidity of fighting among each other
at such a time right?”
“Of course.”
855
“Good. a festival will be held to celebrate my 25th coronation. I invited guests from other countries
this time. You all will play the central part of it and show your hospitality to the dignitaries. Until that
is over, forget about the succession war. I will not think about it as well. You all understand the
consequence of insisting on fighting, right?”
Eric and Leo silently bowed to Father’s words. However, only I do not. The reason for that is because I
noticed Father’s intention.
So that’s why he gave us the name black twin princes huh. By giving me status, he can use me to
entertain the guests. After all, it would be rude to have the famous Dull Prince welcome a dignitary.
However, it will be a different story when I am being called the black twin princes together with Leo.
While I was frowning at that, Father hit the final nail in the coffin.
“You must behave for a while. You can’t do something that will detract from your reputation, alright? I
will regard that as neglecting the interests of the country.”
This man……he really has a bad personality.
Father smiles as if he just pulled off a prank. So this is the reason for Franz’s warning huh. It’s all
connected.
Damn it. So I have to protect the reputation of the black twin princes for a while huh.
“Behave yourselves with dignity, you hear me? Arnold.”
“…….Yes. I understand.”
Seeing I squeezing out a reply, Father smiles happily.
Even if the succession war is on pause, another battle is waiting for me.
Staying idle and letting my reputation worsen. That was not really something I consciously did.
However, now it was prohibited. In other words, I am forbidden to behave the same as usual.
Damn it all. It is exactly because I hate doing this that I am trying to make Leo into an Emperor, why
did this have to happen…….
While feeling the fatigue from such an order, I experienced my greatest despair in a long while.
856
SPT Chapter 130
Special thanks to Rector for another cup of coffee today. Bonus chap incoming I guess…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Distributing Food
“A temporary ceasefire…….is it?”
“Yeah, it is undecided when we can continue either.”
The Next Day.
I was talking about yesterday’s audience with Finne.
“Is this the thing called a public stance?”
While brewing the tea, Finne asks in a curious voice.
“No, it’s the real deal. Making a move now means that you are willing to drop out. If someone wants to
move behind the scene then it would be bad unless you do it skillfully. Still, there is Franz by Father’s
side. I don’t think anything will escape his eyes.”
“That is true, sir. His Highness Eric is surely aware of that as well. This means that the succession war
will have to be suspended for a while.”
“I see. That is great isn’t it!”
Saying so, Finne smiles and offers me tea.
When she handed a cup to Sebas, he thanked her and gracefully sip it.
“This is a new tea correct?”
“Yes, I got it from the Ajin company earlier. How is it?”
“I can’t find fault with its taste and it seems to have a calming taste as well.”
“That’s right! I think that it has a relaxing taste as well.”
“Your skill is superb as always.”
Sebas praised Finne’s skill.
While thinking, is it actually that good? I sip on the tea as well.
857
It’s delicious. But I don’t feel relaxed at all. The only thing I notice is that the scent is different than
usual. Perhaps it is because I am in no mood to enjoy it.
“How is it?”
“Delicious.”
“Such a dull reply. Since it is a truce, why don’t you simply enjoy yourself and do what you like, sir?”
“Nn, Alright, I will go to sleep then.”
“Weren’t you instructed to keep up your reputation?”
“I am going to sleep exactly because of that. If I go out, my reputation would only decrease after all. I
did lower it intentionally before but most of the time it would just lower on its own when I behave
normally. That being the case, the best way to maintain it is to just stay in my room.”
“That is quite a reasoning coming from such a hopeless person. If you hold yourself up in the room,
your reputation will worsen, you know.”
“Don’t care. Just spread the rumor that I am doing paperwork or something.”
“Such a rumor also has its limit, sir. His Majesty will be observing you as well so I do recommend that
you head outside.”
“Too troublesome.”
Looking away from him, I take a sip at the tea.
Seeing that, Sebas sighs at me and,
“I see, there is nothing I can do then. I have a little business to attend to so may I excuse myself?”
“Eh? Sebas-san?”
“Yeah, just go.”
“Understood. Please take care of him, Finne-sama.”
For some reason, Sebas entrusted me to her and disappeared.
Since the noisy butler is gone, I crack my neck and lay down on the desk. It is troublesome to go to bed
so I guess I will just take a nap here.
When I was thinking so.
“U, Uhm, Al-sama?”
“What?”
858
“Um…I, I plan to go out after this……..”
“Yeah, don’t mind me. Just go.”
“No, it’s not that……..Umm, Sebas-san was supposed to escort me……….”
“……..What?”
I involuntarily raise my face.
Then, I understood exactly what he meant by [Please take care of him].
“That damn butler……..he wanted you to take me out from the start……”
“Uhh, Al-sama, if you don’t want to go then I can find another………”
“Your escorting duty can only be left to someone we can trust. If Sebas can’t do it then I will do it
myself. Lynfia and Sieg are at Leo’s place after all.”
I lift my head up from the desk while thinking about others that could escort her but everyone should
have a plan now and only I am free at the moment. Sebas probably went away because he took that
into his calculation.
Seriously, he is really excellent to the extent that I could hate him for it.
“Are you……going to come with me?”
“If you don’t hate the idea that is.”
“I would never! I will go and change immediately!”
Sayin so, Finne half ran out of the room. After I was wondering whether I should change clothes as
well, that idea immediately drowned out of my mind.
Changing is a hassle after all. At a time like this, it made me think that I am quite a troublesome human
being.
“As I thought, I am a good for nothing after all.”
I sigh as I said so.
The fact that I don’t really feel bad or embarrassed to admit to myself that I am a good for nothing
human being means that I really am already beyond saving.
Well, even if I am like that, I am not lazy enough to skip out on escorting Finne. Even if the succession
war is on hold, there are a whole lot of problems that can happen that are not related to it after all.
“Haa…guess I will have to do my best today huh.”
859
After making such a weak determination, I stood up.
“Here you go.”
“Thank you, Finne-sama.”
“It’s fine. It’s still hot so please be careful okay.”
“Finne-sama, me too!”
“Yes, here. Don’t rush okay.”
Saying so, Finne smiled and poured hot soup on to a plate and handed it to the child.
Next to her are the people from Ajin company distributing bread and salad.
We are currently at the outermost layer of the capital.
Finne’s plan today is to distribute food here. Originally, the Ajin company can only make a small soup
kitchen but with the addition of Finne, it became larger. There are quite a few people who came here
just to receive their food directly from her. Well, except the residence of the outermost layer, the
outsider would be barred from approaching her by the powerful beastemen of the Ajin company
though.
“You came again? This is for the people of the outermost layer you know.”
“No, you misunderstand! I am also a residence of the outermost layer too!”
“We only serve the current residence.”
“M, my disciples are living here right!”
“That is unrelated.”
“WAi, let me go! Damn it! I want to get soup from Finne-sama too!!!”
Somehow, I heard a familiar voice of a man earlier but I will just ignore it. I am busy at the moment
after all.
“Heave, ho.”
While making such a voice, I put a box containing the bread on the ground.
For a large number of people to queue up means that it is necessary to prepare a large amount of food.
It would be difficult for a small business to prepare such an amount but it is possible for the Ajin
company which is now making a lot of money by utilizing Finne’s name.
860
It seems that if they only focus on making profit then their reputation will drop but since they have
been feeding the people of the outermost layer like this, their reputation only goes up and up. It has
already been established that the company is cooperating with Finne’s charitable activities. That being
the case, Finne’s reputation has also risen further as well.
“She is quite a big shot huh.”
While saying so, I walk out to the nearby parked carriage and pick up another box.
There are still a lot of boxes in the carriage. Now that I am here, I can’t just stand by and look. I was
ordered to keep up appearances after all. With that as a reason, I told them that I would help and
started carrying these boxes. Still, this is unexpectedly hard huh.
The physically weak me already has a hard time just carrying a box. While I was carrying one, a
person from the Ajin company carried two or even three. This is so sad. This is the difference between
a demihuman and a human. Well, you could say that this is the difference between a physically fit
person and a poor one though.
“My waist hurt………”
“Prince, how about stopping pushing yourself and rest?”
A big beastman spoke to me. He is a tiger beastman with tiger ears and tail.
His muscles are so big he even carried two or three boxes at once.
“Am I in the way?”
“You are not but I don’t think that there would be any different even if you take a break now.”
“I see. Then there’s no problem if I stay right?”
“None at all. Still, we would be troubled if a prince suddenly collapsed on us.”
“I am not that stupid. If I can’t do it anymore then I will rest. Don’t worry.”
“Understood.”
After saying so, the tiger beastman smiled and began to transport the boxes again.
I don’t have enough energy to care about winning or losing here so I am doing it at my own pace and
carry one box at a time.
After a while, the sun set, and the kitchen is closed.
By that time, I couldn’t even lift up my hands.
“Haa……my arms hurt.”
861
“Al-sama…..are you okay?”
While I was resting on the empty carriage, Finne came up to me and asked worriedly.
Her face looked tired but she is still full of energy. A completely different look from mine.
“Can’t say I am…….”
“I am so sorry……you only came here to look after me too.”
“It’s alright, I told you that I would do it myself after all.”
When I was saying such a thing, I heard irritating laughter from the outside.
Looking out, a few people were hanging around the carriage.
“Did you see the Dull Prince today!”
“I saw him! He can only carry one box at a time because he’s too weak! He is so useless I could laugh!”
“Just what did he come here for anyway! We ain’t calling for him!”
“Yeah, Yeah! Finne-sama alone is enough! If he’s going to come then I would rather have Prince
Leonard!”
Saying all they want again huh.
Well, I certainly was useless so I can’t say anything back though.
However, Finne intently stares at them. She then took a step forward to complain to them.
“Leave them alone, Finne.”
“But!?”
“It’s alright. There is no point in dealing with them. They are not particularly wrong after all.”
“But, Al-sama did your best!”
“It would be a different story if I am just an ordinary citizen but I am from the imperial family. I have
more advantages than these people. As long as I am not filling that role, I have no right to refute their
complaints.”
“That isn’t true! Al-sama has always-!”
“I haven’t done anything for the Empire. Right?”
To calm the heated up Finne down, I asked her that question.
Hearing that, Finne’s expression looked like she was about to cry. I don’t want her to look like that.
862
“Because of the chaos from the succession war, supply distribution has slowed down and prices are
rising. If prices rise while their wages are not, they will fall into poverty. We are trying to make Leo
into an emperor but in the end, the ones paying the price for that are the people. They need something
to distract themselves. Considering their suffering, letting them make fun of the Dull Prine like me is
cute in exchange.”
“Then Al-sama…..won’t be rewarded.”
“I am being rewarded. I already have you. I don’t need anything else.”
The reason I don’t increase the number of people who share my secret is that I don’t feel any need for
it. It certainly will be easier for me to move but the secret will also be easier to be revealed.
I might increase the number if my mental state is unstable but right now I have no wish for that.
This accidental secret sharer of mine is quite understanding as well.
“I…….want Al-sama to be recognized more……”
“On the outside, I am only doing some insignificant tasks. A person who only does little things will
only be repaid with little things.”
“Even so…..!”
“It’s alright. Even little things will come back to you eventually.”
I said so and smiled.
The big tiger beastman from earlier came up to the rowdy bunch.
“Yo, Brothers, aren’t you all talking about something interesting.”
“Eh? W, Well, we didn’t…….”
“It’s true that the Prince was useless but he did help us. On the other hand, what about all of you?
What did you do? The one who carried those boxes and the ones who didn’t, even a child would know
which one is the better one.”
“Wa, What!? Are you looking for trouble!?”
“Why don’t you come with me to the store? The lady at my shop has decided that those who laughed
at our comrade are unforgivable, you know. I will have you work for the amount that you laughed at
him earlier.”
“Oi!? Let me go!? This is tyranny you know!?”
“It’s way better than being tossed into the castle’s dungeon for disrespectful behavior right”
“What’s wrong with laughing at the Dull Prince, damn it!?”
863
“I won’t say that you can’t laugh at him but if you laughed at him, I will have you work for it. You can’t
laugh at someone when you didn’t even do anything after all.”
Saying so, the beastman dragged the rowdy bunch away.
I kinda feel sorry for them, they will probably put through quite a hard work now. Well, since it is the
Ajin company, they should be paid a proper wage I guess.
Those guys didn’t look like they have a job after all.
“See, even small things have it worth right?”
“That is true but……..you shouldn’t be ridiculed in the first place…….”
Finne pursed her lips dissatisfiedly. It’s rare to see her like this. To think that she would hold so much
grudge against them.
While making a bitter smile, I stood up.
“Alright, let’s get back. I’m tired.”
“Yes, I understand. Ah, Al-sama. Actually, I heard that Yuriya-san owns this delicious restaurant……..”
Said Finne as though she just remembered it.
I immediately understood what she wanted to say but she probably didn’t say it further because she
considered that I am tired huh.
“Sounds nice, how about we have dinner there? As long as you are free that is.”
“Eh, ah, Yes! Gladly!”
Seeing Finne happily replied, I let out a sigh in my mind. To be honest, my arms are pretty heavy right
now. It would be hard to enjoy a good meal like this but it can’t be helped I guess.
Once a man escorted a woman out, he needed to look cool until the very end after all.
With that decision made, I went out for dinner with Finne.
864
SPT Chapter 131
Patron shoutout V2
Waifu Tier
Ezequiel Dominguez
Thanks as always for supporting me.
Now, time for some meme,
-Mr.Graverobber
Ps. 3 days left for the new series poll on Patreon
Lynfia’s worry: First Part
“Haa……”
The next day after I went out to distribute the food with Finne. I saw something unusual.
Lynfia is sighing. Moreover, she looked like she is troubled.
865
It is very rare for Lynfia who normally doesn’t show many of her emotions to be like this.
“What’s wrong? Lynfia.”
“It’s nothing, please don’t mind me.”
Lynfia said as she bows.
When she puts it like that I can’t help but get more worried. If Lynfia is in trouble then I want to help
her. I have received plenty of help from her after all.
“If you have something you are worrying about then tell me. I will help.”
“That is……I can’t. It is a personal matter so please do not worry about it. There is no need for Your
Highness Arnold to trouble yourself.”
Lynfia then bowed again and left the room with the necessary documents.
Hmm?
What’s this?
“Sebas.”
“Is there something wrong, sir?”
When I called his name, Sebas silently appeared.
It is always like this so I stopped bothering asking where he was hiding.
“Do you know anything?”
“I can’t say that it is a good hobby to investigate a woman’s private life, sir.”
“Is it such a private problem?”
Is she having a problem with a man?
If that’s the case then it would be too nosy of me to investigate further huh. Still, it is hard for me to
imagine that Lynfia would be troubled by a man. That’s a little rude of me though.
“If you say that it is a private problem then it is indeed a private one.”
“If it is not something that you have trouble sharing then just tell me. If not then just keep your mouth
shut. Which is it?”
“Certainly, there is no problem for me to share this but it is not a problem that can be simply solved
you know?”
866
That was Sebas’s way of warning that it would be troublesome. Whether I am willing to stick my neck
out for her or not, that is what Sebas is asking me.
I frown at such Sebas.
Honestly, I would like to be spared from any more trouble. Since I worked hard yesterday, my whole
body is having mild muscle pain right now.
However, it is not good to leave Lynfia troubling like this. If Lynfia makes a mistake because of that, it
would be our side that suffers and if it causes Lynfia to quit, it would be a big blow for us.
“Haa……tell me.”
“As you wish. As far as I know, Lynfia-dono received a letter from her sister the other day. Her sister’s
birthday is near. And that Lynfia-dono had sent most of her reward back to her village. These three
points, sir.”
“I see……a birthday present huh.”
She wants to buy something as a gift for her sister but she doesn’t have much budget. So that’s her
worry.
Lynfia’s little sister along with the children we rescued from the south are staying at the border while
being protected by Lize-aneue right now. Of course, Lize-aneue is properly taking care of them but it
would be hard to find a toy inside a military facility after all.
As long as she can’t stay with her, it is only natural to think about buying her a gift.
However, Lynfia is sending money to her village. She can’t reduce the amount so she is probably
thinking about a way to raise some money.
“It’s Lynfia we are talking about, she wouldn’t just accept money for personal problems even if I give it
to her after all.”
“That is right. We certainly can’t simply hand her the money and solve the problem.”
It is easy for me to buy a present for her myself but Lynfia would never accept it so, what to do?
Lynfia’s worry will not go away. I do feel guilty that I can’t let Lynfia go to her sister’s side. That guilt
probably won’t go away even if I buy her a gift with money as well.
“What do you think I should do?”
“I can’t say.”
“I see.”
Despite being so good at everything, Sebas is not omnipotent. Is there a way to come up with the right
answer here?
867
What should I do?
It is useless to give her money, I can’t buy the gift for her either.
This sure is troubling.
“Can’t help it then. I will go get some advice.”
“From whom?”
“Your ex-master.”
“I see. She is certainly a good person to ask.”
With that decided, I stood up.
“And that’s the story. I want some advice.”
I am currently at the inner palace.
In front of me is a black-haired woman.
Mitsuba, the Sixth Consort, also my mother.
“Ara Ara, your mother is more than happy to talk with you about a girl you know.”
“No, this is not about a girl, I just want to ask you about a gift for one of our cooperators’ sister.”
“It’s the same. You took a liking to her so you recruited her help right?”
“It is just to thank her since she has been helping me.”
“A simple thank you? You are so boring.”
“I’m fine with being boring.”
“What a boring son you are. But for you to take an initiative in when you are always complain about
about troublesome this bothersome that, you must trust that child quite a bit aren’t you.”
“Well, moderately.”
Hearing such a reply, my mother’s smile deepened.
She seems to be enjoying this. Well, I and Leo rarely ask anything from her after all. She probably
enjoys this since it’s rare for me to come to her like this.
“So, what do you think I should do?”
868
“What do you think is the best way to help the starving people?”
That’s rare. Mother rarely said something like this.
Moreover, it’s a question without a correct answer. After all, each person has their own answer.
“Are you asking me how I would do it?”
“Well, you can take it like that. Now, how would you help a lot of starving people?”
The question changed a little.
How to save a large amount of starving people. If I give them a lot of food, the food will probably run
out. That way, many won’t be saved.
“To save a lot of starving people—–I would give them jobs and integrate them into society.”
“Correct. And the answer you seek can be found in that. If it is a reward for your work then neither
you nor the people around you would be able to complain. If you favor one person, dissatisfaction
might be born. The person who received your favor will also feel that burden. To prevent that, it
would be better for you to give them a job.”
“I see. That makes sense.”
“Well, there are things in this world that won’t go the way you expect it to though. To give a person
work and integrate them into society, you would need to create more work and if you can’t, you will
fail. The one who will be affected by that failure will be the people at the bottom. You have to
prioritize those people first. I think distributing food to them is a good idea. Still, that won’t be
enough.”
“It’s Leo’s job to do something about it. And what I am asking your advice for isn’t that deep of a
problem so don’t bring it into that direction please.”
Creating jobs is the duty of the people at the top.
Distributing food will not be a fundamental solution. If you are going to get involved then show me
that you can solve it. With her implying that to me, I frowned and cut the conversation short.
Such a thing is not within my jurisdiction. In the first place, I came here to ask for her help regarding
Lynfia’s worry. I have no intention to tackle such a big problem.
“So you don’t like having a deep conversation with your mother?”
“Yes, I can’t say that I do.”
“Then let’s have a light one. Who are you going to take as your bride?”
“I have no plan to marry anyone you know.”
869
Astounded at her question, I sigh, and sip on the tea.
Seeing me like that, Mother muttered something without changing her expression.
“The other day, His Majesty came to talk to me about your marriage.”
“Pbfst!”
I inadvertently spit the tea back out.
What did she say just now?”
Father came to talk to her about my marriage? In other words, he is trying to use me for political
marriage?
No, I understand that I am easier to use for that purpose than Leo. maybe he gave me the title because
of that? So he was trying to erase my reputation as the Dull Prince?”
Did he order me to keep up my reputation because the negotiation will be easier that way?
Who is it? Is she from the Empire? Is she from another country?’
Looking at this timing, it is probably someone from the outside. Dignitaries from other countries will
come to the 25th coronation anniversary. Is he planning to wed me to someone using that timing?
This is bad. That damn Father. He went behind my back.
“It was a story from my dream though.”
“…….Yes?”
“As I said, it was a story from my dream. I woke up when we were about to get to the good part
though. I wonder who His Majesty would be willing to let you marry?”
“…………”
Mom……..
Seeing my attitude, Mother started grinning.
With these Father and Mother, no wonder my personality is like this. Leo really is a special case huh.
I wiped the spouted tea and silently stood up.
I don’t know how she would tease me next if I stay with her any longer.
“Ara? Leaving already?”
“Yes, I already heard what I came here for after all.”
870
“You don’t have fun chatting with your mother?”
“I think Mother is the only one who enjoyed it.”
“You don’t know? A child is always his mother’s toy you know?”
She just stated something ridiculous so nonchalantly.
It wouldn’t be weird if the child breaks off his relationship in a normal family you know.
While I was thinking so, Mother grins.
“Do come again. Bring someone with you next time alright.”
“You just called me a toy though…….”
“Then you can just grow up so that you won’t get toyed with any longer right.”
“No matter how much I grow, I don’t think that will be possible.”
“True. no matter what, my son will always be my son after all. You can’t beat your mother. Come back
so that I can play with you more okay.”
Saying so, Mother smiled at me and waved her hand.
Seeing that, I sigh and turn away. However, she leaves a parting word.
“Al, did you hear anything from Elna?”
“? What do you mean?”
“If you don’t know then that’s fine. Right, it is still too early after huh.”
She muttered as if she was troubled by something.
What on earth is she talking about now?
I was tilting my head curiously but Mother says nothing more. It seems she doesn’t feel like telling me
huh.
I gave up and left. My original aim was already fulfilled after all.
Let’s prepare a job for Lynfia.
Now, what kind of job would be good.
871
SPT Chapter 132
It’s da coffefe appreciation day!!!
Plus special thanks to my new patron Artaril, another vote for the mob model huh…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Lynfia’s worry: Second Part
“A job is it?”
“Yeah, I can only ask you for this. Can you go out with me today?”
“If Your Highness says so then there I will comply. However, I have to notify His Highness Leonard
first.”
“I already told him. I am only waiting for your answer. It is a little troublesome job so I will give you a
special reward, how about it?”
“If that is the case then I accepted. Allow me to accompany you.”
Lynfia replied stiffly as usual without changing her expression.
The first obstacle is now cleared.
“Alright, let’s go then.”
“Where to? What are you planning to do today, Your Highness?”
“To the adventurer guild. I am thinking about doing some adventurer work.”
“Your Highness doing an adventurer’s work? Why so?”
“Father told me to keep up appearances you see. I plan to do something a little bit different to raise
my reputation. The adventurer guild provides other works besides hunting monsters too right? I am
thinking about doing those jobs.”
“I think that is splendid but……I don’t think that such a work would be suitable for you, Your
Highness.”
Lynfia straightforwardly said.
While making a bitter smile, I told her that I knew and left the room.
————————
872
“We have been waiting for you, Your Highness Arnold. I heard that Your Highness would like to
experience some adventurer’s work today, correct?”
The familiar receptionist welcomed me.
The castle probably contacted them in advance. Hers was quite a polite response but the adventurers
around me are acting slightly surprised.
“Oi, that’s the Dull Prince right?”
“Experience some adventurer’s work? What wind is blowing today?”
They are in the right to question my action but I have no obligation to answer them.
Ignoring them, I give a small nod to the receptionist. Seeing that, she takes me to the bulletin board
where the requests were pinned at.
“The normal procedure is to choose the request you would like to take from this board here and solve
it, Your Highness.”
“Anything is fine?”
“Yes, there are proper ranks associated with them and the guild will stop anyone who tries to take the
job that is outside their capability.”
“I see. What would be the easiest quest here?”
“There is a category called the simple quest but…….they are basically quests that do not involve
monster subjugation.”
The receptionist picked up some of them and showed them to me.
Searching for lost pets, solving conflict. Such citizens’ worries were lined up.
Since they are all simple problems, the reward for them is not that great.
Most of these requests should be under the guard or the capital garrison’s jurisdiction but it seems
that they can’t wait for their response and want to hire help from the guild instead.
“Then I will take this one and this one. Also, this one as well.”
“Three quests is it. Understood. May I set the deadlines for all three quests to today?”
“Yeah, I will get them done today.”
“Then we will process the quests as such. Also, please report to the guild later whether you have
completed the request or not.”
“It’s alright. I do have an A-rank adventurer following me around after all.”
873
Saying so, I look at Lynfia. However, Lynifa’s expression is a little unsettled. It seems she doesn’t think
that this is a good idea huh.
Well, of course. If we talk about the quest significance here, these quests are so plain that no normal
adventurer would choose to do them. My reputation won’t rise even if I complete these quests.
But that’s fine.
“You look dissatisfied huh?”
“Your Highness, It is still not too late. Shouldn’t Your Highness take other quests instead?”
“It’s fine. Even like this, I will still gain some experience as an adventurer. Father can’t complain with
this. The quest’s content doesn’t matter after all.”
“Your Highness. The quests you took are not as easy as you think. The reward may be low but the
quests themselves are also troublesome that is why no one wants to take them.”
“Probably. But that is exactly why I want you here with me. I will be counting on you okay.”
I carefreely said that to Lynfia.
On the other hand, Lynfia let out a small sigh. She probably gave up huh. Well, that’s fine.
It is more convenient this way.
“Your Highness. The process is completed. Your first job is to clean the house of a certain earl.”
“Got it.”
Replying so, I left the guild in high spirit.
——————-
“It seems the first one will be an easy victory huh.”
“I don’t think a job from a noble would be so easy though.”
“No, it will be. You will know once we arrive.”
Saying so, we head to a certain Earl’s mansion.
It was a mansion that I had visited before.
“If I remember correctly, this place is……”
“The mansion of the current Minister of industry, Earl Baelz.”
Saying so, I entered the mansion without even waiting for permission.
874
Then, the butler who saw me entered panicked and called his master.
“Y, Your Highness!? How can I help you today!?”
“Oh, it’s been a long time, Earl Baelz. I am actually trying to experience some adventurer’s work today
so I took up your request.”
“T, Taking my request!? It’s, it’s alright Your Highness! Please accept my apologies! I will withdraw the
quest immediately!”
“The job is to clean up your ex-wife’s room anyway right? It’s okay. Show me the way.”
“Th, that is correct but…….is it really okay?”
“I just told you that it is. Now, show me the way.”
“Yes…..this way please.”
Earl Baelz guides me to the room of his ex-wife looking a little sorry.
The room we were guided to was large. Moreover, the decorations are uselessly extravagant as well.
Furthermore, there are artworks and ornaments scattered here and there. It seems like a beast just
rampaged through here.
“It is quite awful huh.”
“My ex-wife was enraged when she was told that she has to divorce……she even told me that she
would curse anyone who touched the items in this room…..that is why the people in my house are
really hesitant to clean this up.”
“I see. So that’s why you asked the adventurer guild huh. Alright, I will clean this up then.”
“Thank you very much. I am thinking about selling everything here as well.”
“Alright. I will put the valuables in a pile then.”
“Thank you very much.”
Earl Baelz bows at me. As always, he is quite a timid person. He still hasn’t changed even after
becoming a minister.
While thinking so, I look at the room. Black mists are leaking from here and there.
These things are definitely cursed. That ex-wife of his really has a bad personality. She purposely left
these behind so that it can curse anyone who touches them huh.
Even so, if I notice it myself it would be too unnatural. Thus, I carefreely reach my hand out toward an
artwork. However, Lynfia immediately unsheathed her sword and blocked my way.
875
“What’s wrong?”
“Please wait a minute.”
Sayings so, she pokes at the artwork with her sword. Then, in response to the touch from Lynfia’s
magic sword, the artwork shattered with a small spark.
Seeing that, Earl Baelz opened his eyes wide.
“Th, this is……!?”
“It is a magic that causes light electric shock to those who touch it. Basically said, this is a curse magic.”
“Th, that woman……! Just how far!?”
“Th, that was dangerous……thank you, Lynfia.”
“It’s nothing…..Your Highness. This is the reason why adventurers don’t want to take this kind of
quest. If the client doesn’t realize the nature of the quest and only put in a small amount of reward, it
is possible that they are actually a high-rank quest. Earl, please notify the guild about this, the guild
should send over another adventurer with magical knowledge to you later.”
“Ah, yeah. Forgive me. I will do as you say. My sincerest apologies, Your Highness…..”
“No, it’s not your fault, Earl. a woman’s grudge really is terrifying huh……”
I left the room while telling the Earl not to worry about me.
Lynfia will probably be able to handle dispelling the curse on those artworks but it would require a
mage to dispel it without destroying them.
It would be better to review the details of the quest. It is a coincidence but I’m glad that I came. The
servants would get hurt if they touch them without knowing after all.
“Your Highness, do you understand now? There is no such a thing as an easy quest for an adventurer.”
“Yeah, I was too naive. Still, since I already took it I can only complete them. Sorry, but can you
accompany me a little longer?”
“I do not mind but please do not carelessly touch anything again. Do you understand?”
I repeatedly nodded at Lynfia’s advice.
After that, we left Earl Baelz’s mansion and headed to a store on the main street to mediate a fight
between the owner and the merchants who set up next door.
The client is claiming that his sales dropped because the other side is robbing him of his customers.
They were in a state where they won’t listen to me at all but Lynfia immediately analyzed the
characteristics of each of their stores and calmly explained to the shopkeepers that their customer
876
demographic doesn’t match at all. Hearing so, both shopkeepers who were flaring up like a monster
were tamed like a pet.
In the end, it was concluded that it is because of the recent turmoil that caused their customers to
decrease. Lynfia also further tells them that their customers should return soon since the 25th
anniversary coronation day is near. Thus the shopkeepers are convinced and the conflict is resolved.
After we were done with that, it was time to take care of a dog in the noble’s house. However, the dog
itself was very willful to the point that it doesn’t listen to us at all.
However, when Lynfia pulled out her magic sword with a cold look and changed it into the spear form,
the dog was soon put to sleep by its power.
In the end, the dog slept until the owner returned.
“We are finally done…….I’m so tired.”
“We completed three requests but the reward is so insignificant. This is why most adventurers
prioritize taking monster subjugation quests. No one would want to take on a job that isn’t worth the
effort after all.”
“I understand now. This is mentally tiring. Without increasing the reward, no one would take on these
jobs.”
While saying so, I and Lynfia returned to the adventurer guild and reported today’s event.
These requests were probably put up for a while now. Two of three have been resolved and the other
one has to be revised into a high-rank quest.
The receptionist was in a good mood from beginning to end. She successfully made use of us after all.
If it was only me then I would never be able to complete them but as long as I have an A-rank
adventurer like Lynfia with me, the quests can be solved cheaply without hiring the actual A-rank.
Well, you can’t become a guild’s receptionist without being able to do that much.
“This marks the end of the quests. Here is the reward.”
The receptionist handed me a small amount of reward. It took me a day to complete them all and this
is all I get, this is quite harsh huh.
In a sense, humans can grow stronger from hardship but it doesn’t mean that you can get stronger as
an adventurer with it. Well, no one would be willing to do a job like this.
After I was convinced of that when I received the reward, I left the guild with Lynfia.
Then, the two of us head back to the castle in a carriage.
“Sorry for today. All I did was bothering you.”
877
“No, it is my job after all.”
As usual, Lynfia gently muttered without changing her expression. While smiling at such Lynfia, I took
out a bag that I prepared from my pocket and handed it to her.
“This is?”
“Today’s special reward. I somehow successfully get to experience the adventurer’s life today after all.
With this, Father won’t be able to complain. There is no problem as long as I show him that I am
raising my reputation after all.”
“I do think that there are easier ways to do this though……”
Saying so, Lynfia paused and opened the bag because the bag she received was heavier than she
expected.
Then, she opens her eyes wide at the amount of money inside.
“So many gold coins!? I can’t accept this!”
“It was Lynfia who solved the quests and you perfectly acted as my escort as well. Since I was
troubling you today, I think that is the appropriate reward you know.”
“I can’t receive it! I have already received plenty enough from you, Your Highness!”
“That’s why I told you it is a special reward. I was being unreasonable too so accept it.”
Saying so, I pressed the bag on Lynfia.
Lynfia was panicked but after that, she hesitatingly opened her mouth.
“Was it……on purpose?”
“What was?”
“Did Your Highness deliberately went out of your way to experience the adventurer’s life because you
wanted to give me a special reward? You are aware of my worry after all.”
“You think too much. I wouldn’t do that right.”
“It is surely possible for you, Your Highness.”
She sure is sharp huh. Guess I can’t easily fool her here.
While sighing at Lynfia who will use that as an excuse to not accept the reward, I mutter.
“Christa lost her mother when she was very young. It was my mother who brought her up. I and Leo
love her very much. However, as I thought, she probably wanted her to be together with her real
sister, Lize-aneue. She probably feels lonely from time to time. On every of her birthday, Lize-aneue
878
would send her a present. To be honest, they were all kind of lacking as a present but Christa was
always happy to receive it. She was happy that her sister gave her a gift. She can feel the bond between
herself and her sister. That’s why I want you to buy your sister a present with that money. This is my
way of apologizing to you as well. It is because you have to work for us that you can’t be with your
sister after all.”
“An apology…..Your Highness has already rescued my sister. You gave me your maximum support
even though you have no obligation to. Even right now, you are trying to give me a reward that I am
undeserved. I am here to repay that debt. There is no need for Your Highness to apologize to me.”
“The one who saved your sister was Leo and the other. I simply gave you the money. Honestly, I don’t
think I was useful at all. Still, that was the only thing I could do. Even now, I can’t let you go to visit
your sister at the border. No one can substitute you after all. That’s why at least allow me to do this
much.”
“However…..”
“Then let’s do it like this. Consider this an investment. I believe that you will be able to overcome my
expectations at some point. That’s why I am investing in you. You will be able to repay me someday.”
Hearing that, Lynfia pondered on it for a while and quietly bowed at me.
“——I understand. Your Highness Arnold, I shall receive your money as a deposit. I will definitely
work hard to repay you.”
“Your current effort is plenty enough but I will be looking forward to it.”
She looked very apologetic. It seems Lynfia doesn’t have a high evaluation of herself. I do evaluate her
highly though.
Well, that’s a good thing about Lynfia. She doesn’t get ahead of herself so she never lets her guard
down.
Even an insignificant job like this one, she would do her best to accomplish it. This is why she is
indispensable for our faction.
While I was thinking so, a small smile came to my face.
“By the way, how long are you going to call me Your Highness?”
“What do you mean?”
“Didn’t you say that you would change the way you address me when you get back?”
“Ah……”
That is quite unusual for Lynfia. She must have forgotten huh.
It wouldn’t do to have such a distance between myself and a talented individual in my faction.
879
“Isn’t it time for you to stop calling me Your Highness? I don’t need -sama too though.”
“I, I can’t do that……”
I smiled at Lynfia being panicked.
It is certainly difficult for her to throw away the honorific considering her personality.
After thinking for a while, Lynfia mumbles.
“Th, Then…..Can I call you Arnold-sama from now on?”
“Not Al-sama huh?”
“I, I can’t possibly refer to you that way…….”
“That’s a shame. Well, I guess that’s okay. You already stopped using Your Highness too. I don’t really
like it. I can’t really handle being called Your Highness after all.”
Saying so, I held out my right hand to Lynfia.
and.
“Continue taking care of me in the future as well, Lynfia.”
“……yes, Arnold-sama.”
Saying so, Lynfia softly smiled and firmly grip my right hand.
880
SPT Chapter 133
A joke chapter?
Hot Spring: First Part
“Hot spring?”
“Yes, hot spring. How about we visit it together with everyone?”
That was sudden.
It is the day after I went out to gain some adventurer experience with Lynfia.
Perhaps seeing that I am suffering from muscle pain since I have been going out every day lately, Elna
suggested that I should visit a hot spring.
The place is a long-established hot spring near the imperial capital called [Heilung] it is known to heal
wounds and fatigue and is known to have been used by emperors and famous warriors since ancient
times.
However, I honestly don’t want to go there. First off, it is too troublesome. I’m so tired, I don’t want to
go out. Why do I have to get myself tired to not be tired?
Another reason is the fact that Elna brought it up at this timing. I kind of get a feeling that something is
going on here.
Why I was having that thought, Elna saw through what I am thinking and sighed.
“I don’t have any hidden agenda alright.”
“Then why do you suddenly invite me out?”
“It’s because Okaa-sama, okay. She said ‘Al looks like he is working hard right now so you should take
him out so that he can rest at the hot spring’. And I can’t visit that place unless I am on a mission as an
imperial knight too.”
Although Elna’s house arrest has been lifted, it doesn’t mean that she can return to her previous
position in the imperial knight order.
Even Father who personally punished her because she couldn’t protect Christa probably wanted to get
her back with the order as well. Still, he can’t just reinstate her so he is probably waiting for an
opportunity to do so.
881
However, with the 25th coronation anniversary approaching, he can’t afford to let Elna idles around
like this forever. He will definitely issue and order for her return soon enough. If that’s the case then
Elna will be busy again.
There shouldn’t be anything wrong for her to take things easy for now.
However,
“If that’s the reason then just leave me alone…..I don’t feel like going out.”
“You are so pathetic.”
Elna sighs and sits down on a chair.
She then crossed her legs and says.
“Al might not want to go but can you say the same about the others?”
“There’s no need to deliberately bring me along right…….”
“There’s no need but I think there will be people who want you to go you know.”
“And who is that?”
“I wonder.”
Elna said as she feigned ignorance.
What is this, why is she so carefree. Normally she would just say, [Whatever, just come] or something
along that line already.
I have a bad feeling about this.
When I thought so, the room door opened.
“Nii-san! If you are going to the hot spring then I will go too!”
Leo burst into the room all grinning.
He is smiling more than usual. His tension completely rose up.
I involuntarily sigh and look at Elna.
Elna avert her eyes away from mine.
“……Leon. I never said that I would go you know.”
“Ehhh, I’ve already invited Christa and Finne-san you know.”
“How can you be so……..”
882
Astounded, I hold my head.
Leo really likes this kind of group activity.
He has been longing for a family trip since he was a child. However, that is simply a dream. The
Emperor, his consorts, and the princes. An entourage of escorts would be necessary if we want to go
out and it would always be exaggerated. It won’t become a family only trip that he would enjoy.
We were occupied with the succession war ever since we grew up so there is no opportunity for that
so this might be a good chance for Leo to fulfill his dream.
“Don’t you have to oversee the work of the capital garrison?”
“It is only one day so it should be fine. I am only an honorary general after all.”
“We are in the middle of a succession war you know?”
“Eric-aniue will leave the capital at noon today. He’s our Foreign Minister after all. Gordon-aniue’s
faction wouldn’t move either so it will be fine.”
“………..”
Tsk, the situations allow it huh.
It will make a good impression if Leo goes to the hot spring now. If he chooses to do nothing in the
situation where it would be good to make a move, it will show Father that we have no plan to go
against his will.
It is a good idea from the viewpoint of the succession war. But that is no reason for me to accompany
them.
“If you want to go then you can just go with Elna.”
“I can’t leave you alone here Nii-san.”
“No, it’s alright. Just leave me here.”
“You haven’t taken any break recently, right? Sometimes, relaxing with your friends is good too you
know.”
“Listen here……I want you all to go without me because I want to relax alright.”
While we are at a stalemate, this time Finne burst into the room.
This one seems to be excited too huh.
“Al-sama! Are you going to a hot spring!? I want to go too!”
“No, I haven’t decided to go yet…….”
883
“See, Finne-san is all fired up too right?”
Leo says so and presses me to make a choice.
Leo, Finne, Elna. to think that they are all teamed up like this.
As my final hope, I look at Lynfia.
“I am also in favor of going to the hot spring. It may be a pain to move now but once you soak yourself
in the hot spring, it will completely cure you of your fatigue.”
“Even Lynfia……..”
I thought you were my ally…….
I dropped my shoulders dejectedly but I still can’t give up yet.
Hot spring? My fatigue is not to the extent that I would require one. I’m just tired so if I can just get a
proper sleep I will recover.
Rather, going to a hot spring might even make me more fatigued.
“I don’t want to go.”
“No way……”
“Nii-san. This is for your sake you know.”
You liar.
It’s written all over your face that you are raring to go, Leo.
Like hell, I would be deceived. While I was telling myself that, another visitor arrived.
“Al-niisama…….hot spring……..”
With only her face peeked out from the room entrance, Christa gazes at me.
The feeling of wanting to go transmitted from her eyes.
Behind such Christa, Rita is also peeking at me.
“Rita wants to go too!! Let’s go Al-nii!!”
“Rita too……”
“With these members, the schedule adjustment would…”
“Please leave it to me, sir. I have already made all the preparations.”
884
“………..”
Sebas who silently appeared declared that all the preparations are done.
Why!? Your master is me you know!?
I have been relying on his excellence but at a time like this, he is just too nosy.
I glare at Sebas with all my might but he nonchalantly ignores me. Moreover.
“If Arnold-sama wouldn’t go, there might be a rumor that Prince Leonard is sneaking out for a
vacation with Elna-sama and Finne-sama you know. The image of Leonard-sama might collapse right.”
“Wouldn’t that be the same even if I go!?”
“It is well known that Arnold-sama, Leonard-sama, and Elna-sama are childhood friends. With the
three friends bringing along Finne-sama, Christa-sama, and her friends together, it would
unmistakably be taken as a family trip.”
What’s that, that reasoning.
The citizens of the capital can be satisfied with just that?
The rumor about Leo who is being admired by the women and Finne who is popular among the men
can be subdued just because I am between?
“Everything will be alright if Arnold-sama agreeing to go to the hot spring. In other words, you are
indispensable for this trip, Arnold-sama.”
“Why are you trying so hard to get me there…….”
“The succession war is getting more intense so Arnold-sama, as well as Leonard-sama, are being
overwhelmed. You will eventually suffer injuries or fatigue. If you both can take some time off now,
you should do your best to relax.”
“Haa…..I got it. I just have to go right.”
“Really!? We did it!!”
Leo innocently rejoices like a child while Christa and Rita are celebrating.
Just how much do these guys want to go.
“The members are me, Leo, Elna, Finne, Lynfia, Christa, Rita, and Sebas. 8 people, right? I guess we
don’t need escorts then.”
“Oi oi, I will be troubled if you forget about me now, Kid.”
Sieg entered the room with a grin.
885
“Hot spring……that’s the man Utopia! The view beyond the wall is paradise itself! To go or not to go!
That’s the ultimate test of a man’s courage. Rest assured! This Sieg will definitely make your dream
come true! Kid! Follow me!!”
“You will take care of the house sitting.”
“WHATTTTTTT!!??”
Sieg who was being delusional on his own was brought back to reality with a shocked expression
Well, I am more surprised that he would be so shocked about it.
There’s no way that I would bring along an obvious peeping tom right.
“You are going to peep right. You did declare it yourself just now too.”
“I, I wouldn’t. I was just talking about the courage to get into the hot water just now.”
What kind of analogy is that?
No matter how I think about it, he just fully declared that he will be peeking at the girls.
“Whatever, you will be house sitting.”
“Oi!? Are you still calling yourself a man!? Don’t you think this is too much!? Don’t you feel sorry for
your fellow man!?”
“Nope, not at all.”
“You devil incarnate! You are going to peek yourself right!? Even after you said that you don’t want to
go, you are actually concocting an elaborate plan to peek right!? Don’t you think that I will allow you
to hog all the fun to yourself! The soft skin of a beautiful girl is shared by all men you know!”
Saying so, Sieg jumped at me. However, at that moment, his collar grew heavier and face planted into
the ground.
“Abhe!!”
“We are leaving you here for your own sake. You might be able to get a peek but Elna will murder you
in the end you know?”
“Like hell, I would stop peeking because I am afraid of the hero……br, bring me along…….just bring me
along!!”
“Your resolve is splendid but, no.”
“WHY! Just bring me too! I want to go! I wAnT tO Go!”
Saying so, Siege rolls around on the ground like a spoiled brat.
886
The difference he has from a simple spoiled brat is that he is trying to peek under Finne’s skirt while
doing so.
Before he could approach her though, Lynfia sent him flying.
“We are settled then. If we are going then let’s go already. Did you prepare a carriage yet?”
“Of course, sir.”
“Nn, alright, let’s go.”
“Damn you…..remember this, kid. If you leave me here, the second and third me will appear……!!”
“The second and third you will be killed by Elna anyway so you can rest assured.”
Saying so, we departed to the long-established hot spring, [Heilung].
887
SPT Chapter 134
Alright the poll result is out.
it seems the Mob Model is the winner here. Thank you all patrons for supporting me. let’s see if I can
get the first chapter out this weekend.
-Mr.Graverobber
Hot Spring: Second Part
“Ahh…….what lovely weather.”
888
When we arrived at Heilung, we split up into rooms for men and women. Even with that said, since
our goal was to enter the hot spring, I and Leo immediately decided to go in.
The water source of Heilung is located on the mountain and the water flows down to the spring below.
It has the effect of healing minor wounds and fatigue and is also one of the best tourist attractions in
the empire.
We have the whole place to ourselves today. It isn’t a coincidence that there is no one else here today.
It seems that the Brave house rented the whole place. This is probably Anna-san’s work.
Well, thanks to that we can carefreely relax today so she has my thanks.
“Glad you came right?”
Saying so Leo sinks into the hot water. Perhaps since he never slacked off on training like me, his body
is toned and there are small scratches here and there is one big wound on his shoulder. It’s the scar he
got from getting stabbed by the demon in the south.
He splashes the spring water there.
“Nii-san, make sure you soak up your left hand to okay? With this, it shouldn’t hurt anymore.”
“There’s no problem. I’m already doing it.”
Saying so, I sink my body in. it feels like the fatigue I accumulated lately melts into the hot water.
Aah, this feels so good……..
“It would be fine if Sebas got in here too.”
“He said that he would be keeping watch outside after all. He should be getting in once we leave.”
“I see. Then I should get out early then. Nii-san can take your time alright?”
“Yeah, I know.”
Saying so Leo got up.
After I saw him off, I slowly closed my eyes.
The fatigue healing property of the spring here seems to be true. I can feel the magic power from the
hot water. It might have the effect of recovering magic power too. Maybe I have been using a lot of
magic power lately, it seems that I am not at full recovery yet.
I managed to make do with it until now but I might not be able to leave it like this from now on. I
should exercise the utmost caution when fighting against Eric.
Perhaps it was the reason Sebas insisted on bringing me here.
889
“Fuu…..”
I deeply exhale and expel my worries. Let’s stop thinking.
I should simply leave myself to the hot water and just pass the time like this.
While I was thoroughly relaxing in the hot spring like that, I was called from the neighboring room.
“Al-nii! Leo-nii!”
It’s Rita’s voice.
When I was wondering whether I should respond but since she would be too pitiful if I ignored her, I
gave my reply.
“Leo already got out.”
“Ehh, how does it feel like on that side?”
“It shouldn’t be different from your side. This side also serves as a woman’s bath depending on the
time after all.”
Both sides got water from the same source but since it flows down to this side first and flows into the
other springs, this one should be a little hotter.
That’s about the difference here.
“Hey! Rita! Wash your body before you get in!”
“Ehh! I want to get in quickly!!”
“No can do! You have to wash your body first!”
Elna scolded Rita.
The other side is getting noisy, it seems that the women are getting in. they probably relaxed in their
room quite a bit. Well, we rented the whole place today so I guess it’s fine not hurrying in like me.
“Your Highness, is it too hot?”
“Un……I’m fine.”
Now it’s the voices of Finne and Christa.
Finne is probably washing Christa’s hair.
Judging from her voice, Finne seems to be having fun. Taking care of children is no problem from her I
guess.
I felt sorry leaving taking care of Christa and Rita to them but it seems I was just overthinking it.
890
While hearing their voices, I open my eyes and look up at the sky.
It is already evening, the sun has started to set and the color of the sky looks magical.
Perhaps because I am soaking myself in this water, the view seems special to me.
It is a strange sensation. I was not enthusiastic before I came but now I’m glad that I am here.
It felt so good that I wouldn’t mind staying in here forever.
When I was having such a silly idea, I heard a strange noise all of a sudden.
“Chuppii”
“Chuppii……?”
While wondering what it was, I look away from the sky.
Then I saw a penguin-like animal with a black coat. It is small. Its appearance is that of a cute little
penguin. It looks a little plump though.
Is it someone’s pet? It is wearing quite a fine cloth.
Well, I couldn’t care less about that.
“Oi……..you……..that plank, where did you get it………?”
The problem was that the penguin-like creature is casually lifting a large plank.
That plank is clearly a part of some kind of equipment and it is probably something that shouldn’t be
here.
The penguin-like creature seems to understand my words as it points up at a place halfway up the
mountain.
“There…….you got it from there…..?”
“Chuppii”
The penguin-like creature squeals as if to affirm it.
The water source is there. With the hot spring drawing water from there, there should be a
mechanism in place to prevent the water from flowing down here too much.
If that’s gone then.
“ISN’T THAT A FLOOD BARRIER!?”
“Chuppii”
891
The moment I screamed out, a loud noise echoed from the hillside.
This is bad!
I tried to get out of the hot spring and run away but I couldn’t run well in the water and I was swept
away by the flood of hot water.
Getting swept away by the water, I couldn’t know left from right. However, when I struggled to secure
some breathing room, I managed to get my face out of the water.
“PuHa!! Haa Haa……”
I thought I was a goner…..
Am I cursed to not get a proper bath or something?
I got drowned by Elna one time and now I’m almost drowned because of some random animal this
time.
“Damn it……what a cruel world……”
For the time being, I’m relieved that I’m alive so I try to hurry up and get out of the water.
Then I realized. The scene around me is slightly different from earlier.
It’s a trivial difference. The water source is farther away. There is not much difference besides that.
The problem here is that this place should be the other side of the wooden partition.
“!!??”
The scream without a voice reached my ears.
Apparently, the wooden partition broke from the flood.
Yes——I am currently in the women’s bath.
In front of my eyes is the stark naked Elna, and in the back were Finne, Christa, and Rita who are all
naked. As though trying to protect them, Lynfia is standing in front of them with her sword. However,
in this case, a towel might be better than a sword.
Finne’s massive chest, Lynfia’s well-balanced body, their dazzling white skin is in clear view.
Her sword is too thin to hide her body. The same could be said for Elna in front of me.
She is covering her body with both hands but that alone won’t be able to hide anything.
Her chest is still disappointing but many people would say that it is fine as is. Her body has feminine
curves and her tight and slender lower body is still worth a look. Well, my life is in danger just by
seeing it though.
892
“Al….? Do you have anything left to say……?”
“Right…..Elna has a well rounded lower body and slender figure, your body line is great. Lynfia’s is
well-balanced, very nice overall. Finne’s chest is perfect and your waist is in golden proportion.”
When I said so, the three’s faces flushed all at once and they tried even harder to hide their bodies.
It’s no use playing a fool or making excuses now. The punishment is sure to come so I guess I should
just give my honest opinion.
A man’s honest evaluation should be useful for them in the future. The view here is beautiful and all
but if I can be of help then I want to.
I can’t comment on Christa and Rita though. Well, Trau-niisan might be driven to tears but I have no
such hobby.
“THAT’S ALL YOU CAN SAY AFTER ENTERING A WOMEN’S BATH!?”
“I won’t make any excuse. It was completely an accident but……it was a nice view. You have my
gratitude.”
When I lowered my head, I felt a strong impact and I was sent flying into the water.
With a single blow, my consciousness flies away. Thinking, this is just like old-time, I let go of my
consciousness.
In my fleeting consciousness, I heard the cry of that penguin-like creature.
Right…..that guy, I will definitely roast it whole next time I see it.
With that decision made, my body sunk to the bottle of the spring.
893
Chuppii
TLN: Nope this one is Eclair from Overlord.
894
SPT Chapter 135
Special thanks today go to the mysterious person who bought me coffee yesterday. thank you for the
caffeine
-Mr.Graverobber
The Seagull Covenant
“So peaceful.”
“I can’t think that is something a man who just almost died should be saying though.”
When I muttered to myself while looking out the castle’s window, Sebas retorted.
It has been a few days since we went to the hot spring.
I ended up drowning. It was the second time that happened in my life. However, it was not that bad of
an experience for me. Some people say that no harm is done just by seeing a naked girl’s body but it is
the girl who decides that stuff.
After that, the three were behaving awkwardly around me but things are gradually returning back to
usual. I’m grateful.
What I am even more grateful for is that no one tries to take me outside these days. Maybe they were
being considerate because I almost drowned. Anyway, it has been very peaceful for the last few days.
“Well, I lost my consciousness in the water after all. Maybe I got off easy given that I was inside a
woman’s bath where the hero was in. if it’s me then I would totally hold a grudge against the perp you
know.”
“That is certainly reasonable.”
“Plus, it’s not just me that is currently peaceful.”
Saying so, I squint at the castle town.
After the rebellion caused by Duke Kruger, the Imperial Capital had been visibly declining but its vigor
is gradually returning.
The distribution network which was slightly paralyzed before is beginning to recover and
commodities and people have begun to flow again.
“The chain of turmoil has hit the Empire. There was no time for us to fully recover with problems
arising one after another. I think this ceasefire is a good thing.”
895
“However, it is also true that the momentum we had has disappeared.”
I sigh at Sebas’s words.
It is true.
Leo has been solving incident after incident. His fame was rising so more and more people were
starting to follow him. Then there’s this ceasefire.
It was our opportunity for us to catch up with Eric. The timing was just too bad.
“Our momentum has certainly disappeared but Eric is not an opponent we can win against with just
momentum alone. In his case, the moment we make a move against him, he will say that it will impact
the lives of the people and create this kind of situation anyway. If that’s the case then we will be
undoubtedly made out to be the bad guy. We were involved in all the incidents after all.”
“If it is His Highness Eric then that is certainly plausible. He has been observing the situation from the
side and showing the attitude that he would put the Empire’s interest first, at least on the surface that
is. However, I can not fathom his true intention. It may have been an arrogance of the strong but he
never sought out to destroy his competitors. One might say that it is exactly because of him that the
succession war was intensified to this extent.”
It is exactly as Sebas says. The succession war wouldn’t have intensified to this extent if Eric, who has
the biggest faction gets up and does something about his rivals. Whether it’s Gordon or Zandra, they
are all small fry in Eric’s view. Of course, that included us as well.
However, Eric doesn’t nib his competitors in the bud. He maintains his superiority and only
counterattack when provoked and rarely goes on an offense himself.
The strongest bystander. That is my impression of Eric.
“I don’t know what he intends to do but I am sure that he is troublesome as an enemy. If we make a
move on him, the succession war would only get more intense. It’s not a bad idea to give the Empire
some time to recover. If he sees the people suffer, Leo will surely stop running. That is what I want to
avoid.”
“Then we will not make any move at this time?”
“Yeah, at least we will not be the one who starts it.”
Father prohibited us from making a move. Even so, there are many things we can do that he will not
notice. However, there will be no point to it if the public well-being deteriorates.
Let’s leave that until the 25th-anniversary festival is over and the ban is lifted.
Still, it doesn’t mean that we shouldn’t do anything.
“So? Even if I was playing around, it doesn’t mean that you have been enjoying your time off right?
Have you uncovered any usable information?”
896
“Yes, sir. There is some information that might pique your interest.”
Information collection is Sebas’s job. Even during this ceasefire period, Sebas is still actively working
to collect information.
In terms of scale, let alone Eric, our faction is still inferior to Gordon. Now that we have lost our
momentum, we may be blind if we do not gather new information and anticipate the future.
“Let’s hear it then.”
“First, it is about Heilung, the place we went to the other day, the place was supposed to be reserved
for us but it seems that there were some customers staying in its annex.”
“What? Even though the Brave house reserved it?”
That’s quite a daring thing to do. Even when the Brave house rented a place out for me, and Leo from
the imperial family, Finne, Father’s favorite, and Elna, the next head of the house. If it is known to the
public then Heilung’s reputation will fall.
“Yes, the customer who was using it was accompanied by an imperial knight. To be precise, it was the
Captain of the second Corp of the Imperial Knight Order, sir.”
“The Second Corp Captain?”
The first to the Third Corp Captain of the imperial knight order boast exceptional strength. That being
the case, tasks that are being assigned to them are considerably important. Especially now that Elna is
not among them, the importance of the two Captains has increased.
“The Captain wouldn’t have been relaxing in the annex alone and he wasn’t assigned to protect us
either right.”
“Yes, that person was definitely on escort duty for someone else at the annex.”
“Then there was a VIP that warrants the mobilization of the Second Corp Captain huh. This smells like
trouble.”
Was that a VIP from our country or from a foreign one? Either way, if that person stayed there
overnight, their destination should be near the capital. I guess I will have to look out for someone who
is visiting Father huh.
Since the information has been completely blocked, that person must be traveling here incognito. So it
must be the case where the VIP would be in trouble if their identity got found out.
“I will be heading out to collect more information, sir.”
“Yeah, I will leave that to you. Anything else?”
“There is another piece of troublesome information. Arnold-sama, are you aware of the [Seagull
Covenant]?”
897
“Can’t say that I do but if it’s seagull then it should be related to Finne right?”
“Yes. The [Seagull Covenant] is like a non-aggression pact between gentlemen of the Empire. In other
words, they all swore to not make any move on Finne-sama, sir.”
“They have a pact for something like that?………they sure have a lot of free time huh.”
“It will make sense if you imagine the situation where all those free gentlemen propose to Finne-sama
all at once, sir.”
“I guess.”
If their proposal came flooding in when Finne arrived at the capital, Finne might even return to her
territory in fear. In that sense, that is a sound reason.
“Thanks to this covenant, no one has ever directly applied for marriage with Finne-sama or pushed for
a matchmaking interview with her. However, it seems that the covenant is about to collapse.”
“Why?”
“The cause is you, sir. Your reputation has been improved recently. Leonard-sama is one thing but for
them, at worst, Finne-sama might end up getting taken by Arnold-sama. For many aristocrats, there is
nothing to complain about if she ends up with Leonard-sama but their pride won’t allow them to let
her be taken by you, sir.”
“So idiotic…….”
I mutter that from the bottom of my heart. It’s just ridiculous that they can give up if it’s Leo but not
me.
If it is for Finne then if it’s Leo he would be willing to give up no matter who she chooses.
Blau Mowe, the Emperor’s favorite, the unrivaled beauty, the lady of house Kleinert. Most of them are
probably aiming at her for those extra things. That’s why they will not let her end up with me.
They probably couldn’t allow someone who they have been looking down on to rise above them. If Leo
marries Finne, his current position will not change but mine would definitely rise up. That is what
they can’t allow. How pathetic of them to raise their voices in protest now.
“They have been using the handoff approach until now but considering recent events, it is not
impossible for Arnold-sama and Finne-sama to get engaged. Of course, most people still see Leonard-
sama as the prime candidate though.”
“And now they are burning with jealousy? they will give up if it’s Leo but they will be irritated if it’s
with the Dull Prince? Ridiculous.”
“That’s true. I’d love for them to take a lesson from Duke Reinfeld here.”
“Seriously. That person never gives up after all.”
898
I mutter while being a little annoyed.
A person who thinks of Finne and has the will to never give up might celebrate with her but those who
joined in on that stupid covenant and back out for even a stupider reason will not be able to do it.
“So? Who’s their leader?”
“One person has already announced his withdrawal from the covenant, sir. His name is Marquis
Laurenz von Weitling.”
“Marquis Weitling you say…….?”
“I couldn’t hide my surprise that his name was not unheard of to me.”
To think that someone like him would agree to such a covenant.
“Since he had withdrawn from the covenant, he should be making a move on Finne-sama in the near
future. He will probably bring it up directly with His Majesty, sir.”
Marquis Weitling is a 20 years old young court noble.
He is the successor to the famous Marquis Weitling, who succeeded in his house and became the
center of the attention of the high society due to his neatly arranged facial features.
However, the reason that he is the focus of attention is not just his face alone. It also involved his two
older sisters.
“Marquis Weitling has two older sisters, the eldest one is married into the imperial family and the
second eldest one is the current commander of the First Corp of the Imperial Knight Order. He holds
quite an extraordinary amount of influence.”
The problematic one here is his eldest sister.
The person she married is already dead.
In other words, she was the wife of my eldest brother, the Crown Prince.
“This is going to be troublesome……”
“Since this is unrelated to the succession war at first glance, His Majesty will not interfere as well.”
“You made it sound like this will be related to the succession war though?”
“Within that covenant, there is also Reiner-sama from the Ducal house of Horsvath, sir. It seems that
he is on a good term with Marquis Weitling as well.”
“I see…..Gied’s younger brother huh. Unlike his brother, isn’t he supposed to be a more decent one?”
this is probably not an instruction from Eric.
899
So it is probably the will of Duke Horsvath huh.
The Empire seems to be able to maintain its peace but I guess my peaceful days are at its end.
900
SPT Chapter 136
just watched the last of us 2’s story.
honestly disappointed.
-Mr.Graverobber
Bulwark
A few days after I received the report from Sebas.
I got summoned by Father. This time, the only one who was called is only me, not together with Leo.
“Arnold, do you know why I called you here today?”
“Well, I wonder why. I have been keeping my promise though?”
I haven’t gone against his instruction to not lower my reputation so it shouldn’t be about that.
This is probably related to the Seagull Covenant Sebas told me about. More specifically, it should be
about Marquis Weitling.
“I don’t have any complaints about that. The reason I summoned you today is about Finne.”
“About Finne? Is there any problem?”
“Do you know the reason why the nobles in the capital don’t apply for marriage with Finne?”
“Finne is Father’s favorite right. Wasn’t it because they were being mindful about that?”
“That is one of the reasons but the main reason is that the nobles have agreed to a non-aggression
pact. That being said, that pact already collapsed the other day.”
“We have already received more than 20 marriage applications for her, Your Highness.”
I frown at Franz’s report. It is because there are more than 20 fools who immediately applied for
marriage with her.
Are the nobles in the capital all idiot?
“Wouldn’t the problem be solved if Father just says that you have no intention to let her marry yet?”
“Finne is certainly like a daughter to me but I can’t tie her down to such extent.”
“Tie her down or not, if Finne doesn’t want it, refusing them is all for her sake though.”
901
“That’s true but……….”
Father looks at Franz as if he has something hard to say.
Franz, who was asked for help, looked straight at me and lightly sighed.
“As your Highness says, I’ve already declined all the applications. But when they received that reply,
how would they think? Let’s say that they can take it as His Majesty is planning to have Finne-sama
marry one of the princes, Your Highness.”
“Isn’t it fine just leaving this to the person herself?”
“The Blau Mowe is one of the symbols of the Empire. Letting such a person marry some inept suitor
might impair the image of the Empire.”
Father showed a bitter look. There are many nobles involved so he probably can’t silence them all.
The Emperor has an obligation to listen to their voices. Especially when the matter concerns the
interest of the Empire.
“Are you implying that it would be bad if there is a rumor about the Blau Mowe getting married to the
Dull Prince?”
“In short, yes.”
“Haa…..I and Finne are not in that kind of relationship.”
“But you are still the man that is closest to her. You should be closer to her even more than Leonard.”
“We just happen to be together a lot that’s all.”
“The nobles that complain really don’t like that.”
“Then what should I do?”
Just because a noble complains doesn’t mean that he can interfere with our actions.
I don’t have any problem if the one who complains can do what Finne does but even if they all group
up together, they still can’t replace her.
“I want you to refrain from staying with her for a while.”
“……you are saying that the nobles would behave themselves if I do that? Do you really think so?
Prime Minister?”
“………”
902
“They just want to get rid of all the guys near Finne. Once the nuisances disappear, they will surely
make a move on her. If Finne is okay with it then I don’t mind but personally, I think that is
impossible.”
“Are you intending to act as a bulwark for her?”
“There is no doubt that I am a nuisance to them. If you really think about Finne then having me by her
side is for the best you know.”
When I advised Father, he frowned for a while.
Now that the 25th anniversary is near, I don’t want to stir up the nobles. However, if I just dismiss
them here, the situation will just worsen.
I can’t imagine those who immediately applied for marriage with her being all gentlemanly and
politely approach her at all.
“And…..you are fine with it?”
“What do you mean?”
“Literally what I said. If you stay near Finne, you will be the target of the nobles’ hatred. You will
definitely be on their crossfire you know?”
“That’s just the same as usual right.”
“Being looked down on and being hostile against are two different things. A woman related problem is
messy you know?”
“Is that your advice as a father?”
“Yeah, that’s right. Finne is the target of the yearning of all the Empire. Until now no one complained
that she has stayed by your side. They thought that you two wouldn’t match after all. But I just
improved your reputation, you are going to be the target of their malice from now on.”
“That’s true. It is almost all Father’s fault isn’t it.”
“That’s why I am grateful for your offer right. If it continues on like this, you will end up turning all
single nobles of the Empire into your enemy you know? There are many powerful nobles among them
as well. It’s not a good idea to just turn them to your enemy right.”
“Excuse my rudeness but……it was Father who told me to keep up my reputation. Getting afraid of
them and being pushed around by them would just making them make light of me. Moreover……I
personally don’t like their actions as well.”
“Hou?”
Father squints in surprise. He probably thinks that it is rare for me to take an initiative to do
something troublesome. However, there is no other choice in this case.
903
If I just do what they want they will become arrogant. They can turn hostile all they want. If I leave her
side, Finne’s daily life will collapse. That is what I want to avoid.
“After I saw Duke Reinfeld, I think that the actions of the nobles who are trying to court Finne are
simply childish. I am sure that they will say that they love Finne but to me, that is not love. I think that
it is an insult to Duke Reinfeld if they can justify their action like that.”
“If you compare them to that then it is certainly true I guess…..”
“If they want her then they can not choose the method. Do you think that a person who can’t even get
rid of the Dull Prince is suitable for the Blau Mowe?”
Finne is the Blau Mowe, one of the symbols of the Empire.
The other party must be suitable for her. In that sense, I might be a good opponent for them. If they
can’t even deal with me then they have no right to court her.
“Won’t that be a burden to Your Highness though?”
“It’s better than limiting Finne’s freedom. At least Finne can live in peace when the nobles try to get
rid of me.”
“I don’t know what they will do you know?”
“If they go too far then wouldn’t it be convenient? That would give Father a reason to tell them to give
up too.”
“…..are you planning to taunt them?”
“They can just come up with a way to get rid of me without getting punished themselves right. If they
can’t do that much then there is no chance that they would be suitable for her anyway.”
I wonder how many guys would be able to maintain such a balance.
Almost none I guess. The possibility that they will lose their calm when it comes to Finne is high after
all.
“That will jeopardize your safety, Your Highness.”
“I have Sebas with me so it will be alright.”
“Then how would you react if Sebas is in no condition to intervene, Your Highness?”
“If that time comes I will think about it. I will do what I can.”
I can think of some situations that Sebas will not be able to intervene. If they are going to do that then
I will take them on.
“…..you are surprisingly motivated about this huh?”
904
“Is it strange for me to be motivated?”
“No, it’s not strange but……aren’t you actually thinking about marrying Finne yourself?”
“I am not. I am not confident that I would be a good enough person to marry someone. It’s just
that…..Finne has done so much for us. She didn’t just help me and Leo but the Empire as well. Thinking
about all the works she has done, I can’t allow anyone who is even worse than me to stay by her side.”
“Even if you have to go against all single nobles in the Empire?
“That’s how I want it. I will test them first and see if they are suitable enough to lay their hands on the
symbol of the Empire………I will judge them all.”
Saying so, I bowed and left the place.
Seeing me left, Franz muttered.
“The nobles of the Seagull Covenant might be looking to prey on some weak bird but they might
actually just picked a fight against an eagle huh.”
His words make me smile.
Of course, being looked down on is way better. That way it would be easy for me to move.
However, if my secret sharer is at risk, I can’t keep silent about it.
If they are going to attack me then they can come at me with everything they got. I will turn
everything back to the sender.
With that determination, I head off toward the new battle.
905
SPT Chapter 137
Ahh, I want to go to japan again………curse this damn pandemic.
-Mr.Graverobber
Leo’s move
“That concludes the report, Your Highness. It seems that His Highness Arnold plans to remain by
Finne-sama’s side.”
Leo was receiving the report in his room.
Reporting to him is a young man with brown hair who is slightly younger than Leo.
“I see…that is so like Nii-san isn’t it.”
“His determination may be splendid but a determination without an ability to back it up is
meaningless, Your Highness.”
The name of the brown-hair young man who evaluated Arnold as such is Utz von Lermann.
He is the son of Marquis Lermann, one of the first nobles who gave Leo his cooperation. When Leo’s
faction was still weak, he went around to the rural areas to convince various nobles to give their
support. It could be said that he is one of Leo’s most trusted nobles.
“You are saying that Nii-san’s action is meaningless?”
“His decision to stay with Finne-sama is splendid but I do not think that he would be able to last long
against the nobles. I think that it would be wiser for him to take his distance here.”
“What you say is reasonable Utz. Certainly, it would be wiser to withdraw from the start if he will
eventually be eliminated. Still, it is a good choice as long as he’s not, right.”
“That is the problem, Your Highness. His abilities and the decision he made doesn’t match. The nobles
aiming for Finne-sama will try everything to eliminate His Highness Arnold. After all, if they can’t do
that then they certainly are not suitable for her. That was the reason His Highness Arnold gave. I am
worried that he won’t even last a week.”
Leo bitterly smiles at Utz’s evaluation of his brother.
Considering the general reputation of Al, a week is already a long period of time. This means that Utz
does properly evaluate him.
However, Leo’s evaluation of his brother was far above Utz’s.
906
“I think that he can deal with anything that they will throw at him though.”
“Haa…..Your Highness. Please stop overestimating him. Even though you two are twins, His Highness
Arnold is still different from you.”
“That’s true. Nii-san is not like me. That’s why I am sure that he will find his own way to get through
this.”
Full confidence. Seeing him like that, Utz let out another sigh.
One of Leo’s few shortcomings is that he has too much faith in his family.
It is alright to believe in them but being too trusting is a flaw. Even if he is his twin brother, he needs
to draw a line here.
“Your Highness, the faction is gradually growing. We are not as small as before. If Your Highness put
too much trust in His Highness Arnold I am afraid it will cause dissatisfaction in the future.”
“I am not. Even like this, I do draw a line even if he is my relative you know.”
Leo unhesitantly tells Utz while looking straight into his eyes.
Seeing him like that, Utz involuntarily put to silence. He never thought that he would put that much
faith in Arnold.
“Well, I get it that it would look like I am favoring my own relative. So how about this? Won’t you try
staying by Nii-san’s side for a while?”
“I am to serve under His Highness Arnold?”
“He might need some human resource you see.”
“Your Highness really is going to leave this to His Highness Arnold?”
The results were visible to Utz.
Their opponent is a large number of nobles who joined the Seagull Covenant. If they really set out on
eliminating Al then Al will surely suffer a series of disasters.
Being on the receiving end, Al would retire in just a week. That is what Utz is thinking. Plus, it will also
cause damage to Leo’s faction if Al loses here as well.
“The number of nobles that support us because of Finne-sama is not a few, Your Highness. We also
have the case of the Ajin company as well. It will negatively affect us if we do not provide sufficient
protection for Finne-sama. I think that Your Highness should spearhead this endeavor, no one could
complain about it that way.”
907
The Hero Prince who solved incidents after incidents. Leo has become prominent in the succession
war to the extent that it is not unrealistic to see him as the next emperor. His fame and achievement
are in no way inferior to the Blau Mowe.
In the first place, the dissatisfaction here stemmed from the nobles who are getting jealous because
they are afraid that Finne might be taken away by the Dull Prince.
The situation will calm down if someone who they can not be jealous of stands at the forefront. That is
what Utz is thinking. However, Leo has a different idea.
“If I step out the problem may temporarily subside but the nobles who lost will cause a fuss again. I
will bet that they will start to cooperate with Eric-aniue in retaliation. After all, he is someone that has
the ability to eliminate me. Once that happens, the battle for Finne-san will happen. I think the reason
why Nii-san personally put himself on the line was that he wanted to avoid that development. Their
pride won’t hold if they can’t even get rid of the opponent they are looking down on after all. I’m sure
that they will just put up with it and give up.”
Still, there will be people who can’t give up but since they will be in a smaller number, there is no
problem if Leo steps up and shuts them down then.
Leo explains so but Utz’s expression was only half convinced. He can’t believe that Al would be
thinking that hard about it.
“I understand what Your Highness is trying to say but……….”
“In the end, it will all depend on whether or not Nii-san can reject them. So, Utz, I want you to stay by
Nii-san’s side.”
“I shall obey your order but what will you do in the meantime, Your Highness?”
“I have something that I have to do by myself. I will leave this one to Nii-san. If I go out myself, the
problem will only get more complicated after all.”
Saying so, Leo makes a bitter smile.
The problem might be over if he declares that Finne is his but doing so will create him a lot of
enemies. That is not what Leo wishes for.
Some of the nobles who participated in the Seagull Covenant are also taking part in the succession war
but a large number of them still maintain their neutrality. For young nobles, the succession war is still
unknown territory and is often advised to stay away from it by their parents and surroundings.
They certainly can ride on a winning horse now but it is also possible that they will become a purge
target as well. If they want something out of it then they would need a strong political power and that
is hardly something that a young noble possess.
“I know that this day would come when we started to utilize Finne-san’s popularity. It is still sooner
than I thought though. I will leave Nii-san to you then.”
908
“As you wish. I shall support him with all my power.”
“Un, Even if you think that it is irrational, please follow Nii-san’s instructions okay.”
“Even if I consider it to be a bad move?”
“Yeah. Nii-san often does something that would look like a bad move at first glance after all. I think
you will be able to see something interesting you know. It is rare for him to take initiative like this
after all.”
“Your Highness really believes…..that His Highness Arnold will be able to solve this problem?”
“Of course. If Nii-san can’t do it then no one can. This problem is that complicated. After all, our
opponent this time is moving with emotions you see.”
Since they are moving with emotion, you can’t persuade them to stop using logic.
The best choice would be to avoid creating such an opponent but that is no longer an option.
Thinking that troublesome thing keeps coming up one after another, Leo internally sighs.
It is clear that this case is not an instruction from Eric. After all, Eric himself is currently away from the
capital and he is not a person who would do some unnecessary things that can’t give a definite result
like this.
This is either the work of someone under Eric or a third party. That being said, as long as it can not be
linked directly to the candidate for the throne, the Emperor will not get involved in this.
“I guess this is the only opportunity I can use huh.”
“What is it, Your Highness?”
“Our strategist. This ceasefire period is an opportunity for us to prepare ourselves for the next
conflict. It is as Utz said, a determination without an ability to back it up is meaningless. Looking back,
all those who won the succession war in the past all have a wise man by their side. Just as Father has
the Prime Minister, we need our own strategist as well.”
“Are you going to search for that strategist?”
“I have someone in mind. It’s just that it won’t go well unless I personally visit him myself. I have no
chance to go out and persuade him until now after all. Well, it is not guaranteed that it will be a
success even if I go out myself though.”
Saying so, Leo stands up.
He already packed his bag and ready to head out anytime.
There is also information that he is always on the move so he might already be too late as well.
909
“Alright, take care of Nii-san for me okay. I will be away from the capital for a while.”
“For Your Highness to go out personally like this, he must be quite a famous person isn’t he.”
“No, he doesn’t have that much achievement you know. It’s just that he once lived here at the castle.
He often played with me and Nii-san as well. His talent is top notch but his personality is a little
problematic though.”
“That is……is he an old friend?”
“Well, you can put it like that.”
Leo smiles as he says so.
There is no worry on his face. He will simply do everything he can and he isn’t worried about Al either.
After all, Al is a person who would immediately run away if he thinks that there is no chance of
winning. And this time, he decided to stay and stood his ground.
In other words, there’s a chance of winning.
While looking forward to the result, Leo departs from the imperial capital.
910
SPT Chapter 138
Coffee Appreciation Day!! Enjoy zi zouble releaze.
BTW I forgot to address this the other day but the analogy of bird and eagle came from the symbol of
the imperial family. So, yeah. Eagles are a little glorified here.
-Mr.Graverobber
The White Seagull Alliance
The young nobles who agreed on the Seagull Covenant have received the response from the Emperor
through their fathers and secretly formed an organization called the White Seagull Alliance with
Laurenz as its leader.
It was formed with the purpose of eliminating the Dull Prince. If the prince taunts them to try and
eliminate him then that is exactly what they will do. I can get the feeling that they will come to
eliminate me with all their power.
Moreover, Father doesn’t say anything about how I should deal with them either. He probably decided
to leave this entirely to me. This is mostly his fault in the first place so if he can’t do this much for me
then I would be troubled.
“But, white seagull alliance huh.”
They probably used to color white to signify their hostility toward me. I’m quite impressed at their
naming sense.
“What do you think? Sebas?”
“Even if you ask me that, I can only say that young nobles really are fearless, sir.”
“Well, I guess. The people surrounding them probably can’t control them either.”
They are people who are already in the position of the head of their house or expected to become the
next head after all. I’m sure that they must have received some warnings but they are probably out of
control already.
“They are all gungho about saving Finne from me too.”
“It is the thinking of young men after all.”
“The problem here is that there are so many fools here though.”
“You are already regarded as their enemy, Arnold-sama. How do you plan to handle them? It is useless
to convince an emotional opponent with logic you know?”
911
“I know that. So, of course, I will crush them.”
Saying so, I finished writing two letters.
The situation is heading into a messy direction. It is not a situation where I can just give up and
everything will go away nor a situation where a third party can forcefully intervene.
The reason is that the opponent this time is being emotional.
For the time being, I should cool their head first.
Thinking so, I sealed the two letters.
————————
“This is Utz von Lermann. By the order of His Highness Leonard, I am here to assist you, Your
Highness.”
“No need. Just go back.”
The one who came to assist me with a slightly dissatisfied expression on his face is the son of Marquis
Lermann. He is one of Leo’s close aides who recently returned to the capital. He was originally in
charge of gathering support from the rural nobles but it seems someone else is in charge of that now
so that he can come back to support Leo who has become busy lately.
Blue hair and brown eyes, his features are quite good but his eyes give a slightly mean vibe. He
probably finds me disagreeable huh.
“I can not do that, Your Highness.”
He doesn’t really mean it. He probably wants to head back as well. Just how does he convince others to
support us when his emotion is clearly showing on his face.
“I don’t need your help. Sebas alone is enough.”
“No matter how proud Your Highness is proud of your butler, won’t this problem prove to be too
much for him alone?”
“You are saying that you are going to be useful?”
“Reasonably, yes.”
I could see the confidence on Utz’s face. I’m sure that he takes some pride in convincing the rural
nobles.
Well, if he has that much confidence then how about I test him out.
“Then I will have you answer some questions.”
912
“Please, ask me anything.”
“Who will be the one to make the first move against me?”
It was a very simple question.
Therefore, someone who has acquired basic knowledge about their internal working would be able to
answer it.
However.
“Please do not ask me a question with no answer. There is no way to know about such a thing.”
“Haa……as I thought, just go back. I don’t need your help.”
“Evaluating me like that is simply high-handed, Your Highness!”
He probably thinks that I am making light of him huh.
Utz takes a step forward but I shut him down with my eyes.
“It seems you misunderstood something huh?”
“!!??”
“The question earlier wasn’t that difficult. There are some radical nobles near their leader, Laurenz.
Among them is Earl Farner who doesn’t even bother hiding his disdain of me. As long as it won’t cause
much fuss, he will be the first to move. If you have at least the minimum knowledge of their internal
affair then you would be able to answer my question.”
“Th, that is…….”
“I can’t use someone who self-importantly came to help me but don’t even know about the opponent’s
basic internal circumstances. Just go back.”
I told Utz to go back again. I feel sorry for Leo but leaving someone who can’t at least figure this out at
my side would mess up my coordination.
Spare me from taking care of some dead weight.
“…….I will come again tomorrow. Please evaluate me again at that time.”
“You don’t have to. If you wanted to faithfully follow Leo’s order then you should already have the
minimum information in your head by today. You are not willing to cooperate with me so you
neglected that. That’s why I don’t need you. Just go.”
“…….I will come again.”
While clenching his teeth with regret, Utz bowed and left the room.
913
He doesn’t have to though. What a troublesome guy.
“He is quite an interesting young man isn’t he.”
“He doesn’t like giving up just like Leo’s aides. he really doesn’t have to take after his master that
much though.”
“Birds of the same feather flock together after all. I am sure that he will come again tomorrow. What
do you plan to do with him, sir?”
“Chase him back.”
“I think that would be a waste of time though. Why not give him another chance? He will surely come
again the next day after all. I think that he is that type of person.”
“Why should I do that? I don’t need anyone who can’t even do the minimum amount of work.”
“It is necessary for the person at the top to know forgiveness and how to use a person, sir.”
“That’s a shame, I am not one who stands on top of others.”
“You were instructed to maintain your honor though.”
“………”
He brings that up in a time like this huh.
There should be a limit on how troublesome things can be.
It is because that damn order that I can’t do things my own way.
If I don’t give Utz a chance here I will be described as a narrow-minded man. I don’t personally care
about it but that rumor would go against Father’s order to maintain my honor.
It doesn’t matter what kind of reputation the enemy has of me but it would be bothersome to have
such a reputation among our allies.
“I do think that you need to consider raising your reputation a little through your actions from now
on.”
“Haa…..that is just a useless effort you know?”
“It is still better than doing nothing.”
Hearing Sebas, I reluctantly accepted his proposal.
He won’t be useful as a human resource but I should accept him to keep up my reputation huh.
“Haa…..is the preparation going smoothly?”
914
“Yes, sir. However, we have spent quite a lot of money this time.”
“It’s fine. You don’t have to use it sparingly. Use it as much as you want whenever the need arises.
Don’t give the white seagull alliance even a single chance for victory. The only thing they deserve is
despair.”
It is a necessary expense for future development and it also came from my personal feeling.
I don’t like them. That is my honest feeling.
It was not because they are trying to do something to me. It was because they are trying to get me
away from Finne. And that they only see Finne as a tool to increase their own value.
These things are amplifying my irritation.
Some of them might be doing this purely out of love but their method is still wrong. I can’t understand
their logic that it is fine if it’s Leo and they would hate it if it’s me.
They one-sidedly think that Finne would have to suffer misfortune if she married me but at the
moment, the probability that she would end up with Leo is over 80%. If they are going to raise their
voices just to eliminate some 20% chance then that is simply irritating.
I am not suitable for her. That’s what they are using as their excuse but then who would be?
“This is ridiculous.”
If she can’t even get to choose the people she can be with then Finne is no different than a bird in a
cage.
Birds are the most beautiful when they fly.
They probably haven’t noticed that.
“However, is it really all right? If this all goes according to the plan then not only among the nobles,
your reputation among the citizens will plummet as well you know?”
“It’s fine. If I don’t go that far then I won’t be able to solve this problem. Leaving me aside, this won’t
work unless the nobles and citizens distrust me. Plus, if we don’t do this then they will never give up.”
“This is quite difficult.”
“Things are always difficult when you are dealing with fools.”
While evaluating our opponents as such, I and Sebas continue to work on our strategy.
915
SPT Chapter 139
Second part of the release. Anyone play Soul Calibur?
-Mr.Graverobber
The Preparation
“Please accept my apologies for yesterday. My study was inadequate. I beg for your forgiveness, Your
Highness.”
“I told you that you don’t have to come back though?”
“I was ordered by His Highness Leonard to assist you, Your Highness.”
“And I told you that you were incompetent and I don’t need your help right?”
“I have no excuse.”
Hearing me, Utz hangs his head down but it doesn’t seem like he will leave.
Rather than give up, it’s more like he is more persistent now.
“Haa……who is the most harmless noble in the white seagull alliance?”
“It is the son of Baron Becker, Damien von Becker. He does have a feeling for Finne-sama but he only
joined the alliance because he was invited by his friends.”
“Hmph…….it seems that you have studied them. Still, that information is already outdated since
yesterday.”
Saying so, I showed Utz a few sheets of paper.
It was a long written apology letter with a signature at the bottom. Of course, that signature belongs to
Damien.
“This is……!?”
“I’ve already removed a few harmless nobles from their alliance. Damien is one of them.”
“This fast…….how did Your Highness do it?”
“There are various kinds of nobles in the white seagull alliance. Their main members might actually be
those who have the chance to become Finne’s fiance but there are also those who can only dream of it.
A lot of them only joined because of their friends and acquaintances. Those guys usually are not
916
wealthy. So, by digging up their debt record, I bought up all their debt. In other words, their debtor is
now me.”
“That is certainly an effective measure but………where did you get that kind of money?”
“I don’t spend my money. I leave them all to Sebas for a long time. He has been managing that money
for me.”
That’s the truth. I left managing my asset to Sebas and he has been using it well and it has now
increased dozens of times the original amount. Even so, that story is only there so that people won’t
get suspicious of me when I spend the money. Our true source of income is the reward I received as
Silver. Inside the Empire, perhaps I might be one of the tops in terms of personal assets.
“You have been doing that……….but, Um….”
“You want to ask me why I spent that amount of money to get rid of those harmless nobles right?”
“Yes, exactly.”
“You will understand. If you are willing to help me then move according to Sebas’s instructions.
Sebas.”
“Yes, sir.”
Utz opened his eyes wide at Sebas who suddenly appeared out of nowhere. Well, normally anyone
would be surprised huh.
Leaving such Utz aside, I handed a list to Sebas.
“My my, this is quite an expense isn’t it?”
“It’s okay. Use as much as you want. After all, I will have to thoroughly teach a lesson those idiots at
the white seagull alliance. To know their place that is.”
“In other words, we have to thoroughly crush them, yes?”
“That’s right. Show all the nobles inside the capital how to properly use money.”
Hearing so, Sebas beautifully bowed and left the room with Utz.
Now, let’s leave the preparation to those two.
While I was thinking so, a new guest arrived at my room.
“Your Highness Arnold. It’s me, Alois von Simmel.”
“Welcome, Earl Simmel. I am sorry that I have to call you here suddenly like this.”
“It’s nothing, I have a lot of time to spare after all.”
917
There was no lie on Alois’s face. I heard that he has been studying a lot but he still has a lot of free time
huh. As expected of him.
I smile at such Alois.
“That’s good then. I have a little work I would like you to do for me, can you?”
“That will depend on the content, Your Highness. Unfortunately, I am not such a talented person.
Alois doesn’t guarantee that he will do it. He’s good.
So he has been studying in this kind of area as well huh. That’s a good thing.
“Silver did vouch for you though?”
“!?”
“Oh, should I say that it was Grau instead?”
“You are……how……..?”
That is something that only Silver and Alois are supposed to know. However, now someone else
knows about it too.
“I was the one who asked Silver to assist you. I don’t want anything to interfere with Leo’s work after
all.”
“You were……the one who ordered Grau?”
“That would be correct.”
Hearing that, Alois took a step back and immediately kneeled down.
“What’s wrong?”
“I must express my gratitude……Your Highness. It was because of Your Highness that I was able to
save my territory……..”
“I wasn’t the one who protected your territory. It was you and Silver. However—–if you really feel
gratitude toward me then I want you to lend me your help.”
“Yes, please ask me to do anything. I will accomplish it with all my power.”
“You exaggerated. I just want you to spread some rumors about me, that’s all.”
“To spread the good words about you, isn’t it! Please leave it to me!”
Alois’s face brightens.
But I shook my head.
918
“Eh?”
“It’s the opposite. I want you to start a bad rumor about me. A rumor that I am a scary and frightening
person.”
“W, won’t that worsen your image, Your Highness?”
“It’s all right. And, I already talked about it with Silver. This is his plan, not mine.”
I gave Silver’s name to ease Alois’s worry.
Still, Alois was half suspicious about it but he reluctantly nodded at my request.
“Your Highness, please promise me one thing.”
“What is it?”
“Once the situation calms down, please allow me to correct the rumor. I will not be able to face the
people of my territory if I do something like that to our benefactor.”
“That is……….it will depend on the situation. I can’t promise you that.”
“No way…..”
Seeing the pained look on Alois’s face made me feel like I did something wrong. Well, I am indeed
doing something bad though.
Can’t help it then. If Alois doesn’t agree to help me here the plan might fail after all.
“Alright. Do whatever you like.”
“Is that true!? Thank you very much!”
Alois vigorously bowed.
Well, even if Alois corrects it, there is not much difference between a man who uses a child to conduct
an information operation and a man who performs an information operation on a child though. The
situation won’t change that much.
“That’s all I want you to do. Can I leave it to you?”
“Yes! Please leave it to me!”
Alois cheerfully replies.
When such Alois was about to leave the room, I stopped him. There is something I want to confirm
after all.
“Earl Simmel, no, Alois.”
919
“Yes?”
“Ah, no…..uhh…..aside from me, have you met any other imperial family member?”
“I have talked with His Highness Eric and His Highness Leonard several times but unfortunately, I
haven’t the opportunity to meet with anyone else, Your Highness.”
Hearing that, I internally sighed.
The reason why Father left Alois in the castle was not just that he can learn a lot here but also because
he thinks that he is a good candidate for Christa’s husband. It’s Father we are talking about. He will
never marry Christa off to another country. If that’s the case then, the only partners for her would be
among the nobles of the Empire.
If she will marry someone anyway, it would be better to prepare a good partner for her. That is
probably his thought but the fact that Alois still doesn’t have the chance to meet her yet means that
Father is probably still hesitating.
“It would be great if he can stop being so useless when it comes to his daughter……..”
“Yes?”
“Just talking to myself. Well, why don’t we have a meal together next time? I’d like to introduce you to
someone.”
“Is that true? Gladly!”
Alois then smiles innocently.
Alois is a boy with a promising future. His capability has been proven with the last civil war. He is also
the first on the list of Christa’s husband candidates. But in the end, it would depend on whether they
like each other or not.
For now, let’s have them meet and see their reaction.
Thinking so, I dismiss Alois.
Then, passing each other, Finne stepped into the room.
Her expression was terribly dejected.
“What’s wrong? It’s not like you to make such a cloudy face.”
“My apologies…..it is all because of me……”
Saying so, Finne looked even more dejected. It seems she thinks that the problem this time is her fault
huh.
That’s just absurd.
920
“It’s not your fault. Half of the responsibility lies with those foolish nobles and the other half is from
my father.”
“However,…..it is because I stay at Al-sama’s side……”
“Don’t misunderstand. If I think that you are annoying then I would have sent you back to your
territory a long time ago. The fact that you are still by my side means that I don’t think so. You got
that?”
When I pressed Finne with a strong tone, she nodded with a slightly surprised look. While smiling at
such Finne, I ask her to brew me tea as usual.
“Good. then can you get me some tea? I want something strong.”
“Y, Yes! I will prepare it immediately! Uh, Uhh…..Al-sama…..?”
“Hm?”
“Um…..I also have some sweets……”
“Of course, bring that too.”
“Y, Yes! I hope it will be to your liking.”
Saying so, Finne starts preparing them while humming some tunes.
The usual scene. The usual daily life.
Now, there are people that are trying to destroy it. More importantly, those who seek to destroy this
modest daily life of mine only have the status of my vassal.
“I will not show any mercy……”
I muttered my determination in a small voice so that Finne wouldn’t hear it.
When I muttered that, anger rose from the bottom of my heart but I calmed myself down.
I want to smile at least in front of Finne. If I make a scary face, she might get worried about me again
after all.
“It’s ready! Here, Al-sama!”
“Yeah, thanks.”
The black tea I sip was delicious as usual.
921
SPT Chapter 140
This chapter is from Leo/Elna’s perspective
-Mr.Graverobber
The Second Childhood Friend
“To be honest, I’m surprised”
“About what?”
“The fact that you decided to leave Al’s problem alone.”
Inside the running carriage, Leo smiles at Elna. Seeing such Leo, Elna who is accompanying him as an
escort gives him a suspicious look.
“What?”
“Elna is the same right? Is it alright for you to leave it all to Nii-san?”
“Leave me alone. Even if I stayed with him, I would be useless anyway. The opponents this time are
imperial nobles. They are not someone I can just point my sword at.”
“Then I am the same right. Even if I moved, the problem wouldn’t be solved anyway so I think that I
should just leave it all to him you see.”
“You put a lot of trust in Al huh? Don’t you think that they would do something terrible to him?”
“There are many nobles involved in the succession war but the ones that are picking a fight with Nii-
san right now are mostly those that were stopped by their surroundings from participating in it. They
won’t even serve as his enemy you know.”
“Well, I do agree with that. I know how much a gathering of second rates and third rates can do
anyway. I guess I can say this but the ones that will get something done to them are probably those
nobles. Al doesn’t show his mercy when someone close to him is involved after all. Do you still
remember the time when Gai got lynched by that Baron’s son and his entourages?”
Elna murmured and looked out the carriage window.
Leo nodded and smiled with nostalgia.
“We picked up our swords and were about to go at them right.”
“Yeah, I was about to mess them up good but……when we arrived there were so many knights and
soldiers at their mansion. Tax embezzlement, slave trading, theft of imperial treasures, so many of the
922
Baron’s crimes were revealed all at once and he got punished by the Emperor along with his son. That
was probably Al’s work right?”
“I think so. With Sebas around, he can do almost everything after all.”
“Well, maybe it was Sebas that moved but…….unless Al gave his order, he would never do it. I think
that it was definitely him who orchestrated the whole thing.”
It was a time when they still were very young.
However, unlike Elna and Leo who can only hold a simple power, Al was already holding on to a
different kind of power.
That being the case, she doesn’t think that Al would lose to some nobles.
They are sure that Al will make them suffer something that even they couldn’t imagine. That was their
shared opinion.
“But I’m still surprised…….you suddenly wanted to recruit Vin as your strategist. It’s been three years
since he went missing you know? Do you have any idea where he is?”
“None at all.”
“Haa……you took me out without even a clue huh…….”
“Don’t put it like that. I have no concrete clue but we are talking about Vin right, I think that he is
probably in his hometown.”
“Impossible. He hated his hometown because it is a backwater village wasn’t he?”
“That’s why I think he is there. We can’t say that his personality is that good after all.”
Saying so, Leo looks like he is enjoying himself.
Seeing him like that, Elna sighed once more. However, judging from the personality of the person they
are looking for, it is not entirely impossible.
“Well, I will leave the matter about Vin to you, Leo. You two are childhood friends after all.”
“Rather than a childhood friend, I think he is more like another kind of elder brother I never have
though.”
Saying so, Leo reminisced about Vin.
——————-
The village was outside the central part of the Empire.
923
Located far away from the main road, Leo and Elna stand out very much inside the village that lacks
the usual liveliness.
“Is he really here?”
“I wonder.”
Leo heads to Vin’s parents’ house with no hesitation.
Then once he confirmed that the old house was Vin’s home, Leo immediately opened the door.
“Excuse me, is there anyone here?”
“Wait Leo……”
“Who is it?”
Elna tried to stop Leo who immediately opened on the door but before she could do that, there was a
reply from inside the house.
It was the voice of an old man.
Looking at the source of the voice, there is an old man sitting in an armchair. His long white hair and
beard made it impossible to see his facial features but since he is living here, he is probably Vin’s
relative.
“Sorry for bothering you, my name is Leonard Lakes Adler. I am looking for Vinfried.”
“Ah, Your Highness…….my apologies but my grandson hasn’t returned home for a long time…….”
“Vin’s grandfather……..”
Elna feels sympathetic toward the lonely old man.
Vinfried is three years older than Leo and Al.
His talent was recognized by the Crown Prince so even though he is a commoner, he was studying at
the castle in the past. If Elna who often played with Al outside the castle is Al’s childhood friend then
Vin who was studying hard at the castle is Leo’s.
Six years ago, Vin at the age of fifteen had set out on a journey around the world to deepen his
wisdom. He had a dream that one day he could serve as the prime minister under the rule of the
Crown Prince.
However, that dream is already gone. The death of the Crown Prince three years ago made his reason
to live disappeared and so he cut all ties with everyone and disappeared.
924
Leo has searched for him many times but he always comes back empty-handed. Not even a single clue
of his whereabouts was found. Naturally, many knights have come to look for him here but they
couldn’t find him.
“Is that so……Do you have any idea where he might have gone?”
“My apologies…..I have already tried searching for him many times but……..”
“Leo, any more than this would…….”
Elna warned Leo but he shook his head and laughed.
His laughter looked very inappropriate in this situation but Leo would never laugh at someone
without a reason.
While Elna was left dumbfounded, Leo slowly approaches the old man.
Then.
“You are as tiny as ever, Vin.”
“!?”
“Leo!?”
Leo pulls out the sword on his waist and swings it at the old man.
The old man jumped out of the armchair and dodged Leo’s sword. However, as a result, Leo managed
to pull his long white hair off.
No, to be exact, what Leo pulled off his head was a [long white wig].
“Yo……..it’s been a long time hasn’t it, Vin.”
“……How did you know?”
Vin who got his wig taken away from him no longer tries to disguise himself and takes off his fake
beard and magic tool that changes his voice.
He has dark golden eyes, his height is small and looks like a child at first glance but the look in his eyes
looks too terrible to be that of a child.
His sharp sanpaku eyes are more than enough to restrain others with just a look and his well-
organized appearance gives others a sharp dagger-like impression.
(TLN: Sanpaku eyes: the eyes which neither the white space above or below the iris is revealed.)
925
The man’s name is Vinfried Torres. He is Leo’s childhood friend, whose talent got recognized by the
Crown Prince which he aspired to serve one day, a childhood friend of Leo that treated him like his
little brother.
“First, if we couldn’t find you after that much effort, I think that you are hiding somewhere in plain
sight. Somewhere we can see but simply didn’t notice. Second, this house was too clean. It is like you
to keep things clean but such cleanliness would be impossible to achieve by such an old man. He
doesn’t look that wealthy so it is hard to imagine that he would hire someone as well.”
“You swing your sword at an old man just because of that? I haven’t seen you in a while but isn’t your
personality worsen quite a bit?”
“I would stop if you couldn’t react, you know. And I was confident. If it’s you, you would definitely
impersonate your grandfather.”
“Tsk……”
Vin clicked his tongue and threw away the fake beard on the table then casually sat back in his
armchair.
His attitude and tone of voice are rude considering that he is talking to a prince but this is how he has
always been. In the first place, it was Leo who told Vin who kept using polite speech with him that it
was not necessary.
Since then, Vin has never used polite speech with Leo again. After all, it was the Crown Prince himself
that asked him to treat Leo like his real younger brother.
“So what have you gone out of your way to visit me for?”
“You don’t know?”
“Hmph, are you trying to recruit me? Just give up. I am not as good a strategist as you think.”
“If you are incompetent then most of the world would be too you know.”
“Sure, I may not be incompetent but I am not that good either. Compared to other strategists, I am no
different than them. If you wish for it, someone better than me should readily offer their service to
you. That being the case, just go back.”
Vin said so while directing a sharp glance at Leo.
However, Leo doesn’t seem to mind that and reaches his hand out toward Vin.
“It is because you say something like that that I need you. Your ability is only a secondary concern, I
need someone like you as my strategist, Vin.”
“That is quite convenient for you, isn’t it. I don’t think that I have any obligation to help you though?”
Saying so, Vin lightly swats Leo’s hand away. Seeing that, Elna frowned and stepped forward.
926
“You never change huh? Vin.”
“You don’t look like you have changed yourself too, Elna.”
“People don’t change that easily you know. The same as your height, that is.”
Saying so, Elna looks down on him. The fact that he never gets any taller is a complex for Vin and he
often gets angry when others touch that subject.
However.
“Yeah. Like how there’s no growth in your chest department either right. We both sure are pitiful.”
“Wha!?”
“If you attacked someone with their physical appearance you should be prepared for the same thing
right? Washboard.”
“YOU!”
“Elna. you can’t win against Vin with words you know.”
Saying so, Leo holds back Elna.
He then withdrew with a smile.
“It was a sudden visit today so I will leave for now. I will come back tomorrow so let’s have a talk then
alright.”
“No matter how many times you come, my answer will still be the same. I will not become your
strategist.”
“Then I will come again until you change your mind.”
Saying so, Leo takes Elna and leaves the house.
Seeing him left, Vin who got left behind clicked his tongue.
“Tsk….so you are just going to try convincing me huh. You are still as naive as ever.”
Whether it be taking someone by force or forcing someone to obey, Leo’s weakness is that he will
never resort to those measures.
It may also serve as his virtue at the same time but the weakness he presents is still bigger. after all,
the conflict he is currently fighting in is the succession war.
With his evaluation unknown to Leo, Vin started to clean the room with an annoyed expression on his
face.
927
SPT Chapter 141
We are still with Leo/Elna today. Next up is some curb stomping though.
-Mr.Graverobber
Third Rate Strategist
“He is exactly like how he was before! Still attacking people’s complex without having any shred of
decency at all! ”
“Didn’t Elna make fun of his height first?”
“Normally a person wouldn’t go for someone’s chest so readily like that right! Even though we finally
got to see him after a long time he is still the worst!!”
Said Elna with her face bright red.
Seeing her like that, Leo decided to leave a sleeping dog lie and keep his mouth shut. If it’s Al then he
would say that it was the truth so there’s no helping it or something along that line and keep getting
on Elna’s nerve but Leo is a gentleman to all women so he wouldn’t say that kind of thing.
However, it is exactly because of that that Elna’s anger will last for quite some time. Anger can’t just go
away without an outlet. Now, Leo thinks that Al might have done that on purpose exactly because of
that.
And this is why Leo wants to recruit Vin no matter what.
“Remember this, Vin! I won’t show you any mercy once we get back to the capital!”
“You are saying that but what if Vin really doesn’t come back to the capital with us?”
“Even if Vin is not with you, you will be fine Leo!”
“I hope so………unfortunately, I am far from perfect myself. I don’t have enough power or prudence. I
want to stick with what I decided on no matter what but I am not good enough to do that and have to
rely on others all the time. If it’s Vin then he will definitely be able to come up with a safe way to fulfill
my wishes. He will have some complaints though.”
“Right, I can imagine a lot of sarcasm flying your way you know?”
“It’s alright. If I am really aiming to become an emperor then I need someone like the Prime Minister is
to my father…….I can’t think of someone who can do that beside Vin.”
Saying so, Leo made sure of his decision.
928
A person that can put him in check. That is what Leo is searching for.
“Morning, Vin.”
The next morning. Leo cheerfully arrived at Vin’s house.
Vin, who was reading, gives Leo a reply with an annoyed look.
“I’m reading. Just go back.”
“I won’t disturb you.”
“You are disturbing me enough just by being here. Don’t come in.”
“Then I will be waiting outside until you finish alright.”
“…………..”
Saying so, Leo leaves the house with a smile.
He then started talking with the villagers. Helping a housewife carry her luggage, plowing the field
with farmers, Vin clicks his tongue at Leo’s actions that are unsuitable for a prince.
He looked virtuous. No, he is unmistakably virtuous. Just like how the Crown Prince was like in the
past.
“………….”
“I think that Leo is a good lord though?”
“Tsk…….don’t just barge into people’s houses.”
“I did properly call out to you, you know?”
“I didn’t hear any of it.”
“Maybe it’s just your ears that went bad? You were pretending to be your grandfather after all.”
As she says that, Elna looks at the books around Vin.
They are books about politics and military strategies. Rather than reading to pass his time, it seems
that he is still studying. All the books here have that kind of content.
“It seems you haven’t given up being a strategist huh.”
“…….after all, this is all I have.”
929
“If that’s the case then wasn’t Leo’s invitation quite desirable for you? The succession war in a strong
nation like the Empire, isn’t that exactly the stage where a strategist would want to push his lord into
an emperor? You will be guaranteed a position of one of the emperor’s close aides after all.”
“I didn’t say that it was without merits. I certainly want to leave my name in the history of the Empire.
Outsmarting others and putting my lord on the throne, I’m sure that I can get the most satisfaction
from that…….But, I have no such power to accomplish such a thing.”
Vin looks a little depressed.
Seeing that, Elna was surprised.
“It’s rare for you to lose your confidence like that you know.”
“I don’t have much confidence in myself in the first place. I have always told myself that I am only a
second rate. But with my lord being [His Highness the Crown Prince] I was content with that. With so
many excellent subjects under him, there is no doubt that he was first-rate as a lord. What was
necessary for that person was a subject that can answer his wish like a matter of course. That was
what I was striving to become.”
“Isn’t it fine if you start serving Leo as your lord instead then.”
“Leo is different from His Highness the Crown Prince. He is indeed excellent but he still has many
shortcomings. Moreover, if I were to become his strategist, I would become his chief of staff. What he
is looking for is beyond my ability.”
“So you can’t help Leo because of that? He is relying on you, you know? Didn’t the Crown Prince
himself tell you to treat Leo like your little brother……”
“That was in the past…..I realized one thing when I went around other countries. All the strategists I
met were monsters. Compared to them instead of a second rate, I would have been a third rate. If I
become Leo’s strategist………Leo will definitely lose. If that happens I can’t bring myself to face the
Crown Prince anymore……”
The Crown Prince passed away and those who closely served him have followed their own separate
paths. However, only a few of them chose to serve other imperial family members. Many have lost
their ideal lord and chose to retire. The same goes for Vin.
The thing they envisioned was to serve the Crown Prince and live under the administration he will
create. After all of it had collapsed, many couldn’t picture what to do next.
“You are saying that you can’t help him exactly because you think of him as your brother huh. You are
afraid that Leo would lose if you serve under him right.”
“It will be a different story if there is another excellent strategist at Leo’s side. A person who can come
up with novel plans, if he has such a person then I can be the one to move with a more solid plan. You
will lose if you do everything according to the book. My field is one that my victory can be guaranteed.
No recklessness, no useless sacrifices, I do what necessary to win. That is my style.”
930
“Right. Then that’s a relief. There is already another strategist at Leo’s side after all.”
“What?”
Vin doubtfully mutters.
Seeing Vin like that, a smile appears on Elna’s face.
“Al will be able to give you the novel idea you are looking for. If you need some unusual plan then you
can always rely on Al, right.”
“Al as a strategist?”
For Vin, Al was simply a prodigal prince who always escaped the study sessions.
Despite him showing some excellent points as Leo’s elder brother from time to time, he couldn’t think
of him as an excellent strategist Elna has described.
“Hmph, ridiculous. His reputation even reached this village you know?”
“How about you see him with your own eyes rather than listening to some rumors then?”
“I have been watching him in the past. I don’t think that guy has such talent.”
“As expected of a third rate huh. You have no eyes to see people at all.”
“What?”
Even though he described himself as a third rate, he can’t just remain silent when he was told that by
someone else, Elna no less.
An ordinary woman would already cry if she was being stared by such a gaze but the smile on Elna’s
face never faded.
“This is a good time. Al is currently dealing with the nobles at the capital. How about you make your
decision after you see his result? If Al is a person who can come up with unusual strategies as you said
earlier then you will become Leo’s strategist. If Al fails to impress you, you get to enjoy your quiet life.
There’s no problem with this right?”
“Betting my decision on Al’s result huh. Quite a dangerous bet you make there isn’t it? That guy always
runs away at first sight when things become troublesome after all.”
“Al doesn’t run away when he has people to protect. If I can say it then there’s no doubt about it right.”
“…….so he is approved by the next head of the Brave house huh.”
“Yes. So, how about it? I don’t think that it is such a bad deal though?”
“……….”
931
Elna smiles as she sees Vin who is still hesitating.
The fact that he thinks about it so much is evidence that he deeply cares about Leo.
He calmly analyzes how he would affect the faction once he joined it, whether it be when the faction is
in the lead or when it falls behind others. What Elna valued about him is his calmness and how he
doesn’t overestimate himself.
It could be said that he is a perfect stopper for Leo who always pursues his ideal.
The rest is up to his decision.
Elna thinks so and leaves the house. Then, Leo came over as if to change places with her.
“Did the talk with Elna change your mind?”
“……you deliberately let her tried to convince me? Why?”
“You won’t change your mind no matter what I say right? I thought that if someone could convince
you, it would be Elna you see.”
“That’s why you brought her here?”
“Nah, it’s just an idea that popped up to me. I was usually followed by a lot of escorts you see. If I
brought so many escorts, it would trouble the villagers right.”
Saying so, Leo looks out the window.
A farmer plowing his field, a hunter going into a mountain, a housewife knitting her clothes, and the
children playing with each other.
It was the picture of peacefulness.
“This is a good village.”
“You can find a rural village like this everywhere.”
“Good. If there are villages like this everywhere then that is good. But it’s still not enough. I know that
if I set out to look for them then I can find an endless number of them. and I also understand the fact
that I can’t save them all. But I want to lessen the number of people who have to cry with sorrow. I
don’t want to stop doing that. I……will continue the work of Crown Prince Wilhelm. I need you in
order to do that, Vin. Please lend me your help.”
Saying so, Leo reaches his hand out.
When he was a kid, the Crown Prince had once reached his hand out to him in the same way when he
recognized his talent.
Remembering that time, Vin closed his eyes.
932
Then.
“………I will follow you back to the capital. However, it will be up to Al whether I decide to become
your strategist or not.”
“Up to Nii-san?”
“To see if Al can really compensate for my shortcomings or not. That is what I want to confirm.”
“I see……..then welcome to my faction.”
“You……have you listen to anything that came out of my mouth?”
“I was listening, you know. But if it’s up to Nii-san then, everything is already decided right. He is my
proud Nii-san so he will definitely be up to your standard, Vin.”
Leo said so without any hesitation.
The trust in his twin brother. He doesn’t think it is simply because of that but Vin felt that there is
something between the two of them. It was like what comrades in arms shared on the battlefield.
Confidence not born from blood. Finding that interesting, Vin grins.
“It’s on then. If you trust him so much then show me what Al is capable of.”
Vin said so as he took Leo’s hand.
933
SPT Chapter 142
We are back on Al’s POV finally. It’s the first long chapter in a while. now, let’s begin.
-Mr.Graverobber
A Line That Should Not be Crossed
About a week after the White Seagull Alliance was formed.
On the early morning of that day.
I arrived in front of Father’s room.
“Your Highness. His Majesty is still sleeping.”
The knight guarding his room told me that I can’t see him because he is sleeping but that doesn’t
matter to me right now.
“This is an urgent matter. Let me through.”
“I can not do that, Your Highness.”
“It’s mostly Father’s fault that I am in trouble. Even if I wake him up a little earlier than usual there
won’t be any punishment.”
Saying so, I shook off the knights and opened the door.
Then, my father rose up from his bed.
“My deepest apology, Your Majesty.”
“It’s alright, Stand down. What do you need, Arnold.”
Saying so, Father commanded the knights to back down.
He then looked at me and sighed.
“Do you sometimes forget that I am the Emperor?”
“Please forgive my rudeness. This is an urgent matter.”
“You are strangely polite today huh?”
As I bowed my head down obediently, Father made a confused expression.
After all, I would normally talk back to him already.
934
Well, that kind of attitude is not a problem but now it is better to be polite. It will serve me in case of
an emergency after all.
“I can not be rude when I disturbed your rest, Your Majesty.”
“Is that right. So? What do you need?”
“I came to ask you for permission to visit the imperial capital, Your Majesty.”
“A visit? Can’t you just go out like you usually do?”
“I want to receive your permission this time, Your Majesty.”
Realizing the meaning behind my words, Father sighed and threw a ring on the side of his bed at me.
A golden eagle was carved on it. It is one of the Emperor’s personal items and the fact that you have it
means that you have the acknowledgment of the Emperor.
“Just do whatever you like with it.”
“Thank you very much, Your Majesty.”
“[Your Majesty] huh……..you are strangely well behaved today you know?”
“After all, my behavior will be much worse after this……..”
Saying so, I bowed and left Father’s room.
On my way back, Sebas appears behind my back.
“Any surveillance?”
“None, sir.”
“Such a bunch of fools.”
“If they are so cautious they would never have picked a fight with the imperial family, sir.”
“I guess so. Now then…….I am going to thoroughly crush them.”
“As you wish, sir”
What it means to pick a fight against the imperial family.
I will thoroughly teach those fools that lesson.
“Al-sama, where are we going today?”
935
“A lot of places. I will be going around the capital to inspect it today. Leo is not here so I am doing it in
his place you see.”
I explained to Finne inside the carriage.
The official reason for my outing today is to inspect the city in Leo’s place. That information should
already have arrived at the white seagull alliance. After all, I have been spreading that information
over the past few days.
They will probably try to harass me today. After all, they can’t get close to Finne with me around and
that was the purpose of their little organization in the first place.
Do not allow anyone who they don’t approve of to approach Finne. That is an extremist idea but it is
theirs nonetheless.
They never put Finne’s thoughts and feelings into consideration.
Fools. If they are going to push such an idiotic idea at her then I will respond in kind.
“We arrived huh.”
Saying so, I confirm that the carriage has stopped and stepped out.
Our first destination is a luxury inn with a good reputation. Looking at the famous inn in front of us, I
enter the place together with Finne. From the inside, the shopkeeper came out to greet us with a faint
smile.
“Oh my, if it isn’t Your Highness. How can we help you today?”
“We are conducting a little inspection you see. So, how’s business?”
“We are doing moderately well, Your Highness.”
“I see. Can I see the inside as well?”
As if waiting for me to say that, the shopkeeper bowed without stepping aside to open the path for us.
Well, that reaction was expected.
“My deepest apologies. Our accommodation has been recently switched to women only…..even if it’s
Your Highness, allowing a male inside is……..”
“You are saying that I can’t go in?”
“No, that is not the case………if it is someone with a reputation on the level of His Highness Leonard
then we would be able to allow it but……..no, no, I have no intention to make light of your reputation
Your Highness.”
With a frivolous smile, the shopkeeper continues barring my entry.
936
He has been going on and on about it but in the end, what he says is that he can’t allow me inside
because it will damage the reputation of his establishment.
“When did you switch into a women-only inn?”
“It was just recently, Your Highness. Ahh, such bad timing. How about this? Your Highness can wait
here while we can show Finne-sama inside so that she can do the inspection for you?”
The shopkeeper offers such a proposal.
They are probably planning to keep harassing me like this until I feel bad to stay by Finne’s side huh.
Seriously…….they are hopelessly shallow.
“Shopkeeper….let me confirm this…..you are sure that your inn is only for women right?”
“Yes, of course.”
“I see. Then can you see this?”
Saying so, I show him my ring.
There is no one in the capital that doesn’t know the meaning of the golden eagle carved on this ring.
Golden Eagle is the symbol of the Empire and only the Emperor is allowed to use it.
“Th, that is!?”
“My inspection here is already approved by the Emperor. Denying me means defying His Majesty’s
order but……you are fine with that right?”
“I, I have no such intention!?”
“But you said that you can’t allow me inside right?”
“Th, that is not the case, Your Highness! I have no intention to disrespect you!”
I put my hand on the shoulder of the shopkeeper who is desperately trying to explain himself.
And then mutter in a small voice so that nobody else could hear it.
“Did you think that I don’t know that you have been promoting that female-only nonsense just three
days ago?”
“Hiii……! Y, Your Highness……”
“There shouldn’t be any male customers inside a female-only inn, right? Shopkeep.”
I stare at the shopkeeper.
His body begins to tremble and sweat profusely.
937
Anyone who has planned to harass me will probably want to see it happen in the first-class seat. For
example, a room inside this inn.
“Search inside. If you find any male customers, bring them to me regardless of their status. I suspect
that they might be trying to harm Finne.”
“Yes, sir!”
The knights who were accompanying me as escorts began to search the inn.
The shopkeeper has already turned silent.
I left that shopkeeper alone and entered inside.
Once inside, I found a female clerk looking at the knights and me with a frightened expression.
After waiting for a while, a man was dragged in front of me by the knights.
“My my if it isn’t Earl Farner. What might you be doing here today?”
“Your Highness, what is the meaning of this? No matter how great an authority you have, this is simply
tyranny you know?”
Earl Farner is a big guy with blond hair. He is in his mid-twenties and is one of the nobles that often
complain about me.
Being restrained by the knights, Earl Farner knitted his eyebrows.
It seems he still doesn’t understand the situation yet.
“Tyranny? Be careful with your words, Earl. I am searching this inn under a justifiable cause.”
Saying so, I show the Earl my ring. Then, the expression on his face completely changed.
His expression changed from one of the men that knows that he has a way out into one of despair.
“Now, Earl Farner. Let me ask you this. What were you doing in a female-only inn?”
“Th, that is…….”
“It is a place that even turned away a prince like me. there is no way that you can enter this place
through a proper means, isn’t that right?”
“Y, Your Highness…..there must be some kind of misunderstanding…..”
“The shopkeeper barred me from entering this place and tried to get Finne to enter this place
alone……isn’t that because you were trying to do something to her?”
“Th, that’s not it!”
938
Earl Farner denies my accusation and tries to struggle out of the Knights’ restraint but he was made to
kneel down instead.
That being the case, I continue speaking to Earl Farner.
“Then why are you here?”
“…..it, it was to harass you, Your Highness.”
He probably couldn’t bear being suspected of trying to harm Finne.
That’s why the earl decided to just honestly come clean. However, that is a bad move.
“Hou? In other words, I can take it that an earl was trying to obstruct His Imperial Majesty’s business
huh?”
“Th, that’s wrong!”
“What is?”
“I, I didn’t know that Your Highness was here on His Majesty’s behalf…….”
I smile derisively at Earl Farner.
The earl hangs his head down but I grabbed his hair and pulled his head up to face me.
Then.
“People have been ridiculing me because I haven’t fulfilled the duty of the imperial family. But this
time, even without His Majesty’s approval, I am still fulfilling my duty as a member of the imperial
family in this visit. Trying to obstruct my business is already enough as a crime, Earl.”
“N, No way!”
“You are free to make light of me as much as you want as an individual but this is what happens when
you make light of the imperial family. What will happen after this, I think you can imagine.”
Saying so, I let go of Earl Farner’s hair.
Being released, Earl Farner began to plead with a strained voice.
“My, my deepest apology…….please forgive my rudeness……”
“Forgive? The time for that has already passed. You have already crossed the line that you shouldn’t
have crossed!”
Saying so, I planted a fist at Earl Farner’s cheek.
939
Earl Farner who got struck by a strong blow is bleeding from his mouth. Still, I give my order
regardless.
“Detain Earl Farner and put him into jail.”
“Yes, sir!”
Hearing their reply, I immediately turned back. If I mess around here and spend more time here
longer than this the others might notice what happened here.
Sebas will incapacitate any nearby surveillance so if I don’t cause much noise those that are far away
shouldn’t notice anything out of the ordinary.
As I thought about such a thing and tried to leave the inn, my foot got caught by the kneeling
shopkeeper.
“Y, Your Highness! Please forgive me! I was doing it because of debt!”
The owner rubs his head on the floor.
However, I pay no heed to his apology.
“So you are saying that you were forced to do it with money right?”
“Yes! My deepest apology!”
“So, that debt. Did you return it?”
“Yes! Already! I immediately returned it!”
I can easily tell that this idiot is lying.
I put my hand on the shoulder of the shopkeeper and lowered myself down.
Then.
“All your debt has already been transferred to me. So in other words, your debt is now mine to collect.
You used the money to found this inn, didn’t you? If you are saying that you have already returned it,
you catch my meaning right?”
“Eh……?”
“First, you barred me from entering the inn. Second, you refused an inspection from His Majesty.
Third, you didn’t even welcome your debtor. This is already rude enough but what I can’t forgive you
for is the last point. You lied.”
“Ah, a, Ah…..Pl, Please forgive me……..”
940
“Arrest all the people in the store. Not only the shopkeeper, get the employees and those who were
involved here as well.”
“Your Highness…….if you do something like that……”
Utz, who was quietly watching me, gave me advice.
Certainly, there is no point in arresting the shopkeeper here.
It will only increase the problem at hand but that is fine.
“There is no point for me to be mindful about my reputation anymore right? Or are you saying that
these guys are not guilty?”
“That is not the case but……these are just small crimes, Your Highness.”
“Whether big or small, a crime is a crime. Seize them all. Oh, shopkeeper, this is a matter of course but
I will be crushing your inn. You were out of luck when you mistake the difference in power between a
noble and the imperial family. Even children can understand that much you know.”
The shopkeeper can no longer speak.
Leaving such a shopkeeper, I headed outside.
Finne was waiting for me there, looking like she is about to cry.
“Al-sama……”
“Bear with it for a while.”
“……Yes.”
Finne said so and bows.
Then we ride in the carriage together to our next destination.
In order to arrest more of these insolent people.
941
SPT Chapter 143
The curb stomping continues.
-Mr.Graverobber
A Bad Meal
The next place we visit is a popular restaurant in the capital.
When I entered the shop with Finne, there were already a few customers inside.
“We have been expecting you, Your Highness Arnold, Finne-sama.”
Saying so, we were guided to the seat at the center of the restaurant.
There is nothing unnatural about their behavior so far.
Without putting an inspection as a front, I made a reservation for this place so this should be their
natural reaction. After all, from this restaurant’s perspective, we are customers.
However, I know that this shop is in contact with the nobles in the white seagull alliance.
Now, what kind of hand would they use here.
When I was thinking so, a nice smelling soup was served respectively in front of us.
Finne is having it first and smiled at how delicious it is.
“This is delicious!”
“Is that so.”
Saying so, I scoop up mine and put it into my mouth.
Then, both spiciness and bitterness attacked my tongue all at once.
I unintentionally distorted my face and stared at the soup.
“I see…..so that is how they want to play huh.”
Such lukewarm harassment.
Although it is fine for me to make a complaint here, it would probably end up as that I have poor taste
huh.
Let’s see how this will play out for a bit then.
942
I already know the result though.
————————-
“CALL THE CHEF!!”
I loudly shouted so.
The unpleasant aftertaste of the meat dish I just had is still lingering in my mouth.
Even though I just ate a meat dish, it tasted so sweet like I was eating a dessert. There’s no way that
this thing is supposed to taste good.
I already know it but this is not a problem with my taste.
“Did you call me, Your Highness.”
Said a man in his thirties who came up to us.
He is a chef that built his restaurant purely through his skill. Not just the Empire’s dishes, he also
serves dishes from various countries as well.
If Finne who has been eating nothing but excellent dishes praises his food then there is no doubt
about his skill. This is why it is a shame.
“Have you served different dishes only for me?”
“No way! There is no way that is the case! Perhaps, the dishes were just not to your taste?”
“Yeah right, THIS IS NOT EVEN EDIBLE!”
When I shouted so, the people around us started to whispering among themselves.
“It seems the Dull Prince has a dull taste as well huh.”
“To think that he can’t even appreciate the food here…..I feel sorry for him.”
“To shout at the chef because he doesn’t like his food……….there’s no decency left in him it seems!”
“Stop it. He’s a prince that is always playing around. There’s no way that he has any decency in him.”
“I still can’t believe he is the twin brother of His Highness Leonard. I think highly of Prince Leonard
but I can not acknowledge that he has that kind of brother….”
“Don’t you think that he should try to change his behavior. Have he no shame being called the Dull
Prince.”
“Seriously, that guy is the shame of the imperial family.”
Such bad-mouthing is flying around all over the place.
943
Finne frowned at them and tried to stand up but I stopped her with my hand.
Then, I address the chef.
“Chef, do you take pride in cooking?”
“Of course.”
“Good. Then, eat this and tell me your honest impression of it. With your pride as a chef on the line
that is.”
Saying so, I offer the chef the dish I just took a bite from.
The chef picks up the fork with familiar movement and eats the meat dish he made.
He then swallows it down with his face slightly distorting.
“How was it?”
“Th, the dish might have been a little too sweet…..however, it is supposed to taste this way, Your
Highness.”
“I see…..so you choose to waste your last chance huh.”
Saying so, I put the ring on the table.
Seeing that, the chef’s face turned pale.
“Golden Eagle Ring…..”
“That’s right. It’s a ring that signifies that I am the Emperor’s representative. I am currently visiting
the capital on behalf of his Majesty the Emperor.”
When I made that declaration, one of the guests who bad-mouthed me earlier stood up and tried to
leave.
However, he was blocked by Lynfia and the knights who were watching the entrance.
“Please sit down. His Highness is talking.”
“I, I have an urgent business…..”
“Are you disregarding the work of His Majesty the Emperor?”
The guest was threatened by Lynfia and returned to his seat with a crying expression.
All customers in this place turned pale.
I don’t know how much they got paid but what they did was still stupid.
944
“Now, do you realize whose words I am speaking on behalf of? Chef?”
“Y, yes……”
“Then let’s hear the answer to that question again. What do you think about this dish?”
“…..pl, please forgive me…….! Your Highness…..!!”
The chef kneels on the spots and begs for forgiveness.
Seeing him like that, I didn’t change my question.
“What do you think about this dish?”
“…..it was bad…….”
“Was it intentional or accidental?”
“…….”
“I have already been lied to once. I won’t be so forgiving the second time.
“…..it was intentional, Your Highness. I deliberately made a terrible dish for you…….”
“I see. I don’t remember doing something that would make you hold a grudge against me though?”
“Yes……”
The chef doesn’t move and continues hanging his head.
Well, of course, I guess. What he did was the worst thing that a cook can do. And he just admitted that
he did it.
If he is still fine after doing something like that then this place wouldn’t have become so popular in the
first place.
Such a saddening thing.
I shift my eyes to Lynfia and give my order.
“Search the place. There must be someone here.”
“Yes. as you wish.”
Lynfia led a few knights with her to search the store.
Even if they try to escape through the back door, that place was already being watched. Escaping is
impossible.
After a while, a short man was brought before me by Lynfia.
945
“RELEASE ME! WHO DO YOU THINK I AM!?”
“Of course we are aware. Earl Zeffern.”
This man in his late twenties is Earl Zeffern.
Among the nobles inside the capital he is quite rich, he is also known for how he spends his money
extensively. Another thing he is famous about is how he applied for marriage with every beauty inside
the imperial capital. If I remember correctly, he even applied for Elna’s hand in marriage before as
well. It seems that the Brave house shut it down on the spot though.
“Good day. Earl Zeffern.”
“Your Highness Arnold! Your men have been violent to me! How will you take responsibility for this!?”
Getting caught red-handed and still acting so self-importantly huh.
Well, unlike Earl Farner, this time what he is doing is completely harassment. He can even insist that
the chef was lying as well.
He is not in a despair-inducing position like Earl Farner. That being said, I can still be bullish here.
“Responsibility? That should be my line though?”
“What did I do to you?”
“Just now, I was deliberately served a bad meal. And for some reason, you were here. Just what were
you doing here, may I ask?”
“I am touring the place! I was thinking about having my meal here next time!”
Earl Zeffern exaggeratedly said so.
His story still sounds strange but he seems to think that he is off the hook with such a sorry excuse.
I show the ring to Earl Zeffern. He seemed like he still didn’t understand the situation after all.
“Do you know what this is?”
“Th, that is……His Majesty’s ring!? How did Your Highness–!?”
“Because I am inspecting the capital on his Majesty’s behalf. And during that time, I was purposefully
served a bad meal. Don’t you think that this is synonymous with serving His Majesty a bad meal as
well?”
“Th, that is a leap of logic…..right?”
“Well, I am not the judge for that. So, I will arrest everyone here to find out who the mastermind is. Of
course, that will be including you as well.”
946
“Isn’t that simply tyranny! Why!? I am innocent!?”
“It is to find out who is truly innocent.”
Saying so, the knights start arresting the customers and all employees.
Seeing that, Earl Zeffern seemed to lose his cool. After all, an investigation on this place would reveal
that Earl Zeffern gave money to this restaurant.
“Earl Zeffern. If you lie, your punishment will be heavier alright. This is equivalent to an investigation
from His Majesty himself. If you try to lie here, it will be punishable by death.”
“Death sentence!? Th, that’s nonsense!?”
“That wasn’t nonsense. It is quite possible actually.”
Earl Zeffern was silent by my words.
If he lies his punishment will grow heavier and if he tells the truth he will be admitting to his crime.
After a moment of silence, Earl Zeffern chose the latter.
“…….I ordered it…….”
“I see. Why?”
“I, I thought that, if I harassed Your Highness……you would leave Finne-sama’s side………”
“So shallow.”
Hearing that, Earl Zeffern glares at me but I glare straight back at him. With my serious eyes, that is.
Seeing that, Earl Zeffern began to tremble and sweat heavily.
“Ah, ahh……”
“You never thought about Finne and just moved to suit your own convenience. You people at the white
seagull alliance are truly repulsive. If you already admit to your crime then I will send you to the jail,
yes?”
“Ye, Yes……”
Earl Zeffern whose will got broken from my glare quietly replied.
However, if I leave him with just that he would not be disciplined.
That is why I tell him a despairing fact.
“And after the trial is over, it would be troubling for me if you try to do something again so I bought up
all your stores. Plus, I am also investigating your illegal money lending business as well. After this case
947
is over, you will probably be on trial for that. I wonder how much money you would have left by then,
Earl?”
“N,…..No…way…….please wait! Why have you gone that far!? What did I do!?”
“Try asking yourself.”
“….no way…..with just this level of harassment…..you are planning to crush my house!?”
“This level? You don’t understand anything. There is no way that a subject like you would be allowed
to harass the imperial family who is their ruler right.”
“No! There should be a lot of people who ridiculed you! Why only me!?”
“Don’t worry. You are not the only one. Not only those who made a fool out of me, I will thoroughly
show those who openly acted against me hell. Of course, all those who were cooperating with them as
well.”
Saying so, I turn my eyes to the other customers around me.
“Hiii……”
“F, Forgive me.”
“I was just ordered……!”
The customers are looking at me with frightened looks like they were looking at some kind of demon.
There’s a limit to how thoughtless they can be. To make a fool out of the imperial family, no matter
how insignificant the act is, is too risky for them. Well, let’s have them properly taste the fear, shall
we?
Still, the problem here is not with them.
I look at the chef who is still hanging his head.
The chef looks like he is at the end of the world but when he notices my gaze, he raises his face to
match my eyes.
“Y, Your Highness…..”
“It’s over for you when you sell out your pride as a chef for money. With this, even if I don’t do
anything, your restaurant would be closed down in no time. No customers in their right mind would
visit a place that deliberately served a bad meal after all.”
“…..Yes…….my deepest apologies…..”
The chef continues to weep with tears.
Leaving him like this, he might even commit suicide in prison.
948
It is his own fault for being lured in by money but it still isn’t a crime that would be worth his death.
When I was thinking so, Finne offered her handkerchief to the chef.
“Please.”
“I can not receive it……please forgive me…..”
“Is that so. Then I will leave it here. Please wipe off your tears once you calm down. Reflect on what
you did and once you are done with that, please start anew.”
“Finne-sama…..”
“It was very delicious. Your true dish. Please allow Al-sama to taste it next time okay.”
“….Yes…..”
The chef replies like he was squeezing it out.
Seeing that, Finne took a step back and lowered her head.
That was probably her way to apologize for doing something unnecessary.
To be honest, she saved me……well, right now I can’t show that kind of attitude.
“Lynfia. I leave this place to you. Restrain them all.”
“Yes. as you wish, Arnold-sama.”
“Finne. Let’s go.”
“Yes……”
Since we are going to continue this Finne sadly cast her eyes downward but she doesn’t resist me.
She probably understands that this is necessary.
“That’s two down. Let’s hurry up and get the rest.”
Saying so, I climbed into the carriage together with Finne.
949
SPT Chapter 144
The rampage has come to an end……..part one of it that is…….
-Mr.Graverobber
All according to the Calculation
After the restaurant, we went to two more shops and arrested two barons.
There is only one place left to visit today. As long as they follow my schedule, there should also be a
noble waiting for us at that place.
Well, I guess it won’t go as smoothly at the last place though. After all, that place is-.
“The final place we are going today is in the outermost layer right……”
“Yeah, that being the case, you can consider that this is over already.”
“Eh?”
Finne tilts her head in confusion.
She probably thought that we would be continuing what we did so far as her expression looked really
confused.
With a bitter smile on my face, I started talking to Finne.
“I know the person they would make contact with if they plan to do something at the place we are
visiting. I can say it here, those nobles won’t be able to do anything.”
“Then…..it is over…..?
“Yeah, but I can’t let my guard down yet. There shouldn’t be anything there that would make you feel
bad though. I’m sorry.”
Seeing I lowered my head to apologize to her, Finne began to panic.
“P, Please raise your head! It…..it was originally my fault…….Al-sama hasn’t done anything bad at
all……they were just suffering the consequence of their actions……..”
“It was not your fault. I knew that this would happen someday. Don’t worry about it.”
“But….Al-sama……I know that I have no right to say this…….but!”
Finne looked straight at me with tears in her eyes.
950
I can feel her strong will to tell me something from those eyes.
That’s why I took the initiative and spoke first.
“I intentionally escalated the problem this time.”
“…..Eh?”
“Right about now, the Minister of Justice is probably holding his head while consulting this matter
with Father. I already sent him the name of the arrested nobles and their cooperators to him. 2 Earls
and 2 Barons. Plus, a large number of people who were involved in the act. The arrest number today
should have gone through the roof.”
“Intentionally?…….you did that on purpose….?”
“Obviously right? I wouldn’t just go around arresting commoners meaninglessly after all. Rest assured,
they won’t be accused of any heavy crimes. They should be held in the prison for a few days
but…….Well, that is probably it.”
When I lightly answered her that, Finne covered her face and started crying.
My heart aches when I see her like that.
I couldn’t afford to let the cat out of the bag. That’s why I didn’t tell her anything beforehand.
However, I think that it was a great burden on Finne.
“I’m sorry. I couldn’t ask you to play along.”
“Ugh….Hic……I…….I thought that…….Al-sama was very angry at them…….”
“I was angry. I don’t like their way of doing things after all. However, it is not like I want to condemn
the people who were just following their orders. Even so……to end this mess as soon as possible, I
have to make them think that I was on a rampage.”
“A rampage……?”
“Yeah. if I went for their throat with enough power to take them down, those idiots at the white
seagull alliance would start to panic, right. But the one that will be the most panicked is their parents.
The guys that joined the white seagull alliance are still young. The ones who hold real power are their
parents, of course, even after they inherited their title as well. And with the uproar this time, they will
think that I went on a rampage so they can’t just treat this like someone else’s problem anymore. My
rampage could potentially destroy their entire house after all.”
“But…..if that happens……”
Finne says with a worried voice despite her face still looking like she is about to cry.
They might hold a grudge and there will be more people who will be hostile toward me. She is
probably afraid of that huh.
951
“It’s fine. Their parents won’t try to take on someone who possesses more power than them. I’m sure
they will try to find some way to reconcile with me. Still, how do you think they would try to reconcile
with a person who just went on a rampage? They probably couldn’t ask that from my father, and the
Brave house is too close to me as well.”
“Then the question is who will they depend on is it……?”
“Yeah, I have already sent letters to the people they could rely on for that. A person who knows me
and has high enough status to mediate a reconciliation with me. One of them is the person you know
very well, you know.”
“I do……?”
Finne finally stopped crying and thought about it a little.
I used my right hand to wipe away the last teardrop from Finne’s eye and smile at her to ease her
worry.
“It’s your father. Sorry but I already invited him here.”
“Otou-sama!?”
“Even so, your father might be too close to the center of the problem and may lack the neutrality for it.
That’s why I called Duke Reinfeld here as well. With those two, they should be able to mediate the
matter without any problem. To make it easier for them to attack the two, I have already let go of
some harmless nobles in their alliance. Those guys should be able to contact them. I have already
instructed them to do so when I let them go after all.”
You can’t negotiate with the white seagull alliance which is filled with young nobles.
I have to pull their parents into this so that I can negotiate with them but some of them have already
retired. For those people, they would only take it as their sons were doing something stupid after all.
In order to change that recognition of theirs, I had to go on a rampage.
Aside from the nobles who got arrested for causing problems, the people who were involved in the act
should be released after we reached our agreement. That should be how it goes, after all the Minister
of Justice is not that free and we also have a limited number of prison cells.
Well, I won’t allow any nobles to be released though. Those guys are no good. One thing is their
attitude toward Finne, another thing was how they involved the citizens in harassing me.
I wouldn’t call for capital punishment but I will at least take away their titles.
“In other words……everything went according to Al-sama calculation wasn’t it……..?”
“For now that is. I am still not sure what Marquis Weitling who still hasn’t shown up yet would do.
Well, I am already prepared no matter what kind of plan he is concocting though. There are some
952
plans that I don’t want to use but…….one thing I can say is that you will not have to cry because of it.
So rest assured. It’s already over. Just smile like you usually do.”
That was quite a convenient request from me.
I was the one who made her cry with all the burden I pushed on her. It is just ridiculous for me to ask
her to smile afterward.
However, Finne responded to such a ridiculous request with a soft smile.
“Yes!”
“I’m saved. As I thought, it is for the best if you remain smiling.”
“Al-sama is good as long as you remain as gentle as you are too!”
“Is that so. I will keep that in mind then.”
I answered Finne’s wish with a bitter smile.
The outermost layer of the imperial capital.
There is a dojo there.
That is my final destination today.
“You sure took your sweet time huh.”
“My bad.”
A small dojo.
Upon entering the place, Gai was standing in the middle of such a dojo looking angry. In front of Gai is
a man in glasses whose nose is bleeding.
“Guh, Gh……you! You just struck a baron you know! I won’t let you off with just an apology!”
“Why don’t you just give it to me straight here huh? Can’t you at least school this commoner eh?
Baron-sama.”
“Damn you! Your Highness Arnold! I was assaulted by your friend! This is a big problem! There’s no
way you can protect him! If you are going to apologize then this is the time!”
Saying so, the glasses baron looks at me. He probably knows that it won’t make any difference saying
anything to Gai huh. Still, it is his mistake for speaking to me.
“If Gai hit you then he surely has his reasons.”
953
“I got beaten without even doing anything, Your Highness.”
“Yeah, he really didn’t do anything yet. He told me to cooperate with him to harass you, Al. I hate the
idea so I punched him in the face.”
“Th, that’s nonsense!”
Saying so, the glasses baron started to get upset.
Why are the nobles of the white seagull alliance so dumb? Well, maybe it was because they were that
stupid that they were stopped from participating in the succession war and joined in on their stupid
alliance.
“Say whatever you like. But remember this, people of the outermost layer won’t sell out their friend
for money! We are certainly poor and we really do need some money but it is exactly because of that
that we can’t be bought. The connection between people that are so cheap to you nobles is precious to
us here alright!”
“What are you saying so self-importantly! That still won’t erase the fact that you assaulted me!”
“If you want to take me to court then just do it! I will say the same thing in front of His Majesty the
Emperor! If I sell out my friend because of money then I won’t have the right to stand in front of those
kids! This is my pride as their teacher alright!”
Gai said so as he unsheathed his sword and pointed it at the glasses baron.
Gai is a B-rank adventurer. He is average in terms of strength but he is still an adventurer who fought
against many monsters and dived into many conflicts.
With only just a glare from him, the glasses baron was already scared witless.
“Oi! Al! How do you want to handle this guy?!”
“Put him to prison I guess.”
“Pr, Prison!? Why!?”
“Haa….do you know the meaning of this ring?”
I have shown this ring so many times today already.
Seeing it, the baron’s face turned blue in a blink of an eye.
“Th, that is……”
“I have been inspecting the capital with direct approval from His Majesty the Emperor. This is my final
destination. The problem here, Baron, is what are you doing here? Ah, you can give up on lying alright.
I have already arrested a lot of nobles on my way here.”
954
“N, no way…..I, I was…..Uhh…….”
“Just tell me the truth. You were out here to harass me right?”
When I asked, the glasses baron nodded, thinking that any more resistance is already futile.
When I confirmed that he had admitted to his crime, I commanded the knights to restrain him.
“So? What is this commotion all about?”
“To put it shortly, they are nobles who don’t like me being near Finne I guess.”
“Hah! The time finally came huh. I thought that this would happen someday.”
Gai cheerfully said so.
Seriously, this guy is……..
“You look happy about it though?”
“Well, of course. You are allowed to remain beside Finne-sama right. If you don’t suffer that much then
I would be troubled.”
“Hey……”
“Well, don’t worry about it. I don’t think about doing anything forcefully. The person she is happiest to
be with, it would be clear just by looking at her smiling face.”
Saying so, Gai turns his gaze to Finne outside the dojo.
The children in the neighborhood who noticed that Finne is here gathered around her and Finne
responded to those children with a smile.
“Her smile is the most beautiful when she is near you. That’s the answer.”
“Is that so…….”
“How-e-ver, just try laying a finger on her alright? I will send you straight to hell. Don’t think that you
are safe just because Elna is around okay? A grudge of an unpopular guy can even take down the hero
you know?”
“That’s scary…..well, there is nothing that you have to worry about though.”
Saying so, I appeased Gai.
Thus, this long day of me and Finne finally come to an end.
955
SPT Chapter 145
Shoutout to new Patron Thomas Kosko, Thank you for joining
Now, let’s continue on to the political side of things.
-Mr.Graverobber
The day after Al went on a rampage.
The castle fell into chaos.
Not only due to a large number of arrests yesterday, but the castle is also now jam-packed with the
prisoners’ relatives and friends.
The Minister of Justice and his subordinates had to rush around and receive them all.
Then they collect all their pleas and bring it to the Emperor. However, since the Emperor himself told
Al to do whatever he wanted with the ring, he is in no position to say anything about this matter.
In this chaotic castle, Alois was chatting with the nobles he recently made acquaintances with.
“Still, is it really true? I can’t imagine that Dull Prince acting like that at all?”
“I doubt it too. This is totally not like the Dull Prince at all.”
Only young nobles are around Alois. They are people who did not join the white seagull alliance and
were simply observing the situation from the side this time.
To such people, Alois tells them his impression of Al.
“The moment I met him in person, I think that it is not that surprising you know.”
“What do you mean? Earl Simmel.”
“Exactly what I said. The other day, I met His Highness Arnold in person but I don’t have the
impression that he is as dull as the rumor says at all. Rather, I should say that he has some kind of an
undescribed power…….honestly, he scared me a bit.”
“That is an impression from someone who repelled ten thousand men of the imperial army……?”
“So in other words, His Highness Arnold might be the real deal huh? If that is the case then the stance
of my house may have to change as well.”
The people around nodded at the words of the young nobles.
956
However, hearing that, Alois tilts his head.
“What do you mean by that?”
“His Highness Leonard has great talent and skills……but he is too kind. This is not just my personal
impression. A lot of nobles think that he might not be able to make the tough decision when the time
comes.”
“A tough decision…….I think that he can properly make his decision though……”
“He might be able to make a normal decision but a tough one?……I don’t think that he is someone that
is capable of making a ruthless decision. That is his shortcoming. However, if what you said about His
Highness Arnold is true then such worry will disappear. His Highness Arnold can help His Highness
Leonard with that after all.”
Then, the young nobles started to discuss the future of the succession war.
Now that Zandra has dropped out, there are only three candidates left for the throne. Eric still has the
lead but he is surrounded by people who have followed him for a long time. That being the case, it is
hard for newcomers to break into his inner circle.
Then the next best choice for them would be Leonard.
Who should they support? Now that the candidates have been narrowed down, the nobles are trying
to carefully come up with the answer for that question.
Thinking that Al might have been aiming for such an effect on these nobles, Alois was impressed by his
strategy.
While he was thinking so, he was suddenly called from behind.
“Earl Simmel.”
“Yes?”
Being called by name, Alois turned around and found a tall old man standing there. Judging from his
appearance, he seems to be in his late 50’s to early ’60s. His expression looked slightly uncomfortable.
Although he is a total stranger, Alois bowed to him because he thought that he might be a high-ranking
noble based on his clothes and atmosphere.
“Nice to meet you. I am Alois von Simmel.”
“Nice to meet you as well. I am sorry for calling out to you all of a sudden, I am Edmund von Weitling.”
“Marquis Weitling?”
“Former. I have already relinquished that title to my son. Many are calling Elder Weitling nowadays.”
957
“I see. Then how may I help you today, Elder Weitling?”
The young nobles who were chatting near Alois noticed the presence of Edmund and stood with their
backs straight.
This man is a powerful noble who once served as the current emperor’s confidant. If his health didn’t
deteriorate, he would still be holding an important position within the Empire.
For young nobles, this man’s status is above the clouds.
However, he had already retired and did not appear on the front stage for a long time. Why did he
decide to come out now?
Thinking that it might be a matter related to his son, Alois was proven that he was correct.
“I want to confirm a little something with you. Is it true that you felt scared when you met His
Highness Arnold?”
“Yes. he was totally different from what I heard in the rumors.”
“I see……it was like he was a different person right?”
“Yes. exactly.”
Edmund then nodded several times and smiled at him like he was his own grandson and walked off.
The young nobles who can finally relax let out a sigh but Alois was still worried.
It seems that Edmund has noticed something.
He might have noticed something that Alois himself missed.
Thinking about it further, maybe he has noticed some kind of plan that he didn’t notice.
If it’s Grau, he might be able to understand something. Embracing that thought, Alois started
pondering about the things he missed.
“It has been a long time, Your Majesty.”
“Yeah, it indeed has. Edmund.”
Emperor Johannes shows a nostalgic smile.
It has been several years since he retired due to his health and this is the first time Edmund visited the
castle after that.
However, there is not much time for him to be all nostalgic.
958
After all, it was clear that he visited the castle because he has urgent business to discuss with him.
“Please accept my apology. My son has caused much turmoil in the capital. It was all because I am
lacking as his father.”
“There is no need to apologize. If the sin of a son is the sin of the father then I must apologize to you
too.”
“…….His Highness Arnold wasn’t in the wrong. I have come here in a hurry but I understand that my
son was being disrespectful toward the imperial family, Your Majesty.”
“Hm….I am aware. That’s why I can’t say anything about it.”
Edmund made a bitter smile at the Emperor’s words and shook his head.
“I am not here to force you to do anything, Your Majesty. I understand your position well. Please rest
assured, I will do all I can to solve this situation.”
“Sorry.”
With a short apology, Johannes let out a sigh.
He then changes the topic with a bitter smile.
“When they were young, I never thought that there would be a day where our sons would fight each
other like this you know.”
“I completely agree, Your Majesty. I thought that he was a polite boy but it seems that I was too naive.”
“Arnold is special. I am surprised by this too. He wasn’t the type to escalate the problem like this.
That’s why I handed him that ring.”
Johannes sighed again and said that it was his miscalculation.
Seeing such Johannes, Edmund asks him a question.
“From Your Majesty’s perspective…….was His Highness Arnold seemed different from usual this
time?”
“Yeah, he’s different. Hasty and bullish. Those are the words that are always far away from him. He
always looked so aloof and never showed his anger. Was it simply because blood was rushing to his
head, or perhaps there is a different reason, even I don’t know.”
Johannes leans back on the throne and lets out a big sigh as if he is troubled.
The succession was on hold but this time it is a conflict between the imperial family and the nobles
instead.
“To be honest, I am not that free you know.”
959
“My apology……..Your Majesty. Will you hear my thoughts on this?”
“What is it?”
“I also know His Highness Arnold. Earlier, I heard in the castle that the nobles find His Highness
Arnold scary. I have doubts about that. That person never acted out no matter how many times he was
ridiculed or made light of. Could such a person really instill fear in others?”
“What do you want to say? It’s your old habit you know? Just cut to the chase.”
“Yes. I think that the words hasty and bullish might be more aligned with His Highness Leonard more
than His Highness Arnold, Your Majesty.”
Johannes squinted his eyes at Edmund’s words.
It is easy to dismiss him.
However, his words reminded him of the conversation he had with Arnold who visited his room
yesterday morning.
“………Arnold normally calls me [Father]. Especially so when there is no one around. But…….”
“It seems you have some ideas about this, Your Majesty?”
“Even if you say that they switched places, his impersonation would be too perfect. Do you think that
he is capable of such a thing?”
“I do not know. However, rather than His Highness Arnold has changed, it is more plausible that His
Highness Leonard is pretending to be His Highness Arnold right now. In the first place, would His
Highness Leonard leave the capital and left His Highness Arnold to deal with the problem alone?”
“That’s true……..then what would you do?”
It was Johannes who was still skeptical but if that were the case, this conflict would not just be simply
one between a prince who has always been ridiculed and the nobles but one of a candidate for the
throne and the nobles.
If it is prolonged, a serious crack might form between the lord and the subjects.
“I would seek to make the reconciliation happen as soon as possible, Your Majesty. No matter what
hand I have to use.”
“I guess that is the only choice huh…….”
“Your Majesty…..if His Highness Leonard truly pretended to be His Highness Arnold, my son and of
course, myself, might not be forgiven. That’s why…..please think of this as our last conversation.”
“Don’t say stupid things. No matter how much I trust my son to handle the situation, I won’t let him go
that far. My subjects’ lives belong to me. I won’t let my son do as he pleases with it.”
960
“Thank you very much. However, if I am His Highness Leonard, I would never show any mercy. If
blood must be shed then please only spilled mine and my son’s. Please take care of my two daughters,
Your Majesty. Please protect them.”
“……I won’t allow the matter to escalate that far but I acknowledged your wish.”
“You have my gratitude, Your Majesty.”
Edmund said so and deeply bowed to the Emperor.
He then quickly raises up.
“Please allow me to excuse myself here. I must search for a means to make the reconciliation happen.”
“Yeah, take care of your health.”
“Yes.”
Saying so, Edmund leaves the place and heads out of the castle.
He has already contacted the parents of the nobles who have joined the white seagull alliance.
He planned to meet with them to determine their next course of action.
“Cough, Cough……..”
It has been a long time since he walks around so much like and dry coughs escape him.
Still, Edmund doesn’t stop walking.
He had built the current Empire up together with Johannes and Franz.
He will not allow his own son to destroy it.
961
SPT Chapter 146
Monthly Patreon Shout out!!!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
Alfonzom6
Ezequiel Dominguez
Main Heroine Tier
Jasper Yu
drefly13
Tyler Fukuda
Sub Heroine Tier
Anon A Moose
Artaril
Loh Joo Hoe
Willie Jackson
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Knifewolf
Tinsoldaat
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Kei
Nelson N
Thank you as always. Enjoy the chapter
962
-Mr.Graverobber
Nobles of the Imperial Capital
“Everyone, I’m sorry for calling all of you here in such a busy time.”
Inside a luxurious inn, Edmund said so and bowed to the ten nobles he invited today.
There are no young nobles here. These nobles are all in the same generation or have a similar age as
the Emperor.
There are a lot of people like Edmund who relinquished their title to their children and retired.
However, with this big incident, they are all gathered here.
“The one who should be the busiest here is you, Elder Weitling.”
“Everything happened because my education was lacking. I should have taught my son more before
handing him the title.”
Edmund said with a dark expression.
At the time, his physical condition worsened so he gave his title to his teenage son. He thought that he
had done enough. After all, in his eyes, his son was that excellent.
However, excellent ability alone is not enough to hold a noble title.
“It is hard when you are shown how much of a fool your own son can be after all.”
“Seriously.”
All the participants sigh to those words.
It can be said that the cause of the turmoil this time stemmed from the young nobles becoming
arrogant.
“The Dull Prince……it was our failure to leave the problem alone for so long.”
“Yeah, that’s right. I didn’t say anything because the person himself and His Majesty never say
anything but we have arrived at the worst situation possible exactly because we didn’t say
anything…….”
Despite being made light of and insulted, Al never did anything. He dismissed any insult thrown at him
and endured all the bullying. When Elna was with him, she would glare at the bullies who are at the
same age as them but since she had to be away from him because of her job as an imperial knight, no
one was there to stop them.
963
And then it has become normal. He became an existence that anyone can ridicule. Although he is of the
imperial family, he is at the lowest caste. Thus, the existence of the Dull Prince was formed.
However, that is also an illusion. No matter how much a fool he may be, a royalty is still a royalty.
“We mistook how he overlooked their actions as forgiveness…..it is not just the fault of our children.
We should have taken the initiative. Regardless of how he is, the imperial family is the imperial family.
We should have warned them of their disrespect.”
“There’s a difference when the citizens are disrespecting the imperial family and when us nobles do it.
I thought that they would understand that someday but…..it must have already been ingrained in the
commonsense of the children in this generation to ridicule His Highness Arnold.”
“There’s no point in saying this now. There are those within this generation of nobles making light of
His Highness Arnold. That is the current situation. Our children will not stop even if we tell them to.
Honestly, His Highness Arnold is also at fault here. Even though he has enough ability to trap our
children like this he was acting all lazy in the past. One could say that this trap might be what he has
prepared for years.”
Everyone nodded at his word.
Still, everyone here knew. That in the end, the fault is still lying with their children.
That is why they are here.
“I think his Highness Arnold will not stop. He has shown that he is willing to take down the whole
white seagull alliance. We must avoid that development. The survival of our houses should of course
be taken as the first priority but think of how that development will damage the Empire. Even if we
are in the middle of a succession war, there shouldn’t be a conflict between the imperial family and
nobles over a single girl.”
Everyone makes a complicated expression after hearing Edmund.
The nobles who gathered here are all the people who have contributed to the Empire for many years.
To them, sending the Empire into chaos is against the path they chose.
“It wouldn’t happen if that girl never chose to come to the capital……”
“Stop that. Miss Finne bears no responsibility in this.”
“Even if you say that, Elder Weitling. That girl is a beauty everyone is yearning for. When she received
that blue seagull ornament that day, all the youth of the capital were fascinated by her. Your son
should be one of them, no?”
“Certainly, Laurenz was fascinated by Miss Finne. If this doesn’t involve her, he would have used an
appropriate attitude toward His Highness Arnold. However, how important can a relationship
between subjects be? It should never be allowed to destroy the relationship between us and our lord.
964
If Miss Finne is to be by His Highness Arnold’s side then he should have given up. Even if His Highness
Arnold were to marry Miss Finne.”
“That would be difficult. Especially for the young ones. What they desire is the most beautiful lady in
the Empire. That beauty is a curse. They might be able to let it go if she ends up with someone with as
good a reputation as His Highness Leonard but…..their jealousy couldn’t bear it if she is together with
His Highness Arnold who they have been looking down on all this time.”
Edmund shut his eyes at those words.
He couldn’t bear how pathetic his son who he had brought up with great care has become.
If it’s Leo then anyone could give up and hand her over. He understands that much. However, if they
could let Leo have her then they should be mature enough to endure this.
Everyone around Laurenz always praises him. That is how excellent he seems to everyone around
him.
However, perhaps because he is an excellent young man with a great title, he never knew the suffering
of the people. That was Edmund’s mistake.
He never knows the suffering and his thinking is too naive, that’s why he can not place himself in
someone else’s shoes.
And now, he has become a narrow-minded person.
“…….Was the Crown Prince simply too great?”
Edmund whispers with a small voice.
The Emperor’s firstborn was the ideal successor. None of his siblings could compete with him. That
was the consensus of all the nobles. Thus the Empire was peaceful. After all, as long as the Crown
Prince is there, there would be no need for a succession war.
And exactly because of that peacefulness, the younger generation has fewer opportunities to gain
experience.
He thought that it was all right. If the Crown Prince became the emperor, the Empire would have been
safe. The moment he realized that he was too naive was when they lost their ideal successor.
Edmund’s thoughts went to the past but it was immediately pulled back to the present by the guest
who newly arrived.
“Sorry for being late, everyone.”
“…….glad you are here, Duke Horsvath.”
Edmund bitterly welcomes the loathsome visitor, Rolf von Horsvath.
965
Edmund’s attitude was not uncommon here. The reason was that no one here welcomes Rolf’s
presence.
Rolf is also aware of that.
“It seems I am quite hated here.”
“You should be the one who best knows the reason for that though?”
“Yes. I admit that my son was indeed the one who incited Marquis Weitling and gave him the
opportunity to create the white seagull alliance. However, my son was not included in that alliance. He
was part of the Covenant of the seagull in the past but was it not your sons who chose to antagonize
His Highness Arnold?”
Saying such a thing without even a shred of guilty conscience, Rolf smiles as though he tries to fan the
flame inside all the people gathered here.
But that is the truth.
Rolf’s son, Reiner did not join the white seagull alliance. Why didn’t he join it even though he was the
one who gave it the opportunity to be formed?
The reason is that the Horsvath house can mediate the matter from a neutral position when a
situation such as this arises.
“I have no intention to hold a grudge against you. It was all my son’s fault. I hope you can help us
resolve this situation.”
Saying so, Edmund quietly bowed to Rolf.
Seeing that, Rolf smiles and nods.
“That is all right with me. Let us reconcile with His Highness Arnold using my contacts.”
“Will that really be possible? I heard that there is bad blood between your other son and His Highness
Arnold though?”
“That is the truth. However, we will not apply for this reconciliation directly to His Highness Arnold.
We would bring this up with his mother, Mitsuba-sama instead. I have someone that can act as an
intermediary so please rest assured.”
“I see. That would be a relief.”
Even though he wanted to ask if all of this has gone according to his plan, he couldn’t say it.
All the nobles here are mildly irritated at this. After all, this is clearly a loan. They have no way to
know what he will ask in return after this.
However, they have no choice but to ask for Rolf’s help.
966
Thus, the story progresses in this direction.
During that time, Edmund was wondering whether to tell the meeting that there is a possibility that Al
and Leo might have swapped places but he decided to keep his mouth shut.
After all, even if he tells them it would do nothing but fuels their anxiety.
There is no confirmation about it yet so if the reconciliation proceeds as it is, it would be better to
keep this to himself.
The moment Edmund thought so, his attendant came into the room in a hurry.
“What happened?”
“Yes! Duke Kleinert and Duke Reinfeld have arrived in the capital, sir! Duke Kleinert seems to be
aware of the circumstances and he is currently in the talk with other nobles, Duke Reinfeld also giving
him his cooperation as well, sir!”
“What!? Miss Finne’s father came here!?”
Edmund stands up from his chair, looking surprised.
He then immediately switched his eyes over to Rolf and says.
“Duke Horsvath. That is how it is. Can we return this talk to a blank slate?”
“……that can’t be helped. They would certainly be more appropriate as an intermediary.
However……doesn’t it feel artificial for those two to arrive in the capital at this time?”
“I do not mind if that is truly the case. There are only a few people who can move those people. If it is
the work of that person then this is how we want to proceed.”
Saying so, Edmund bows and leaves the room. Following him, the gathered nobles also began to stand
up.
All that remained in the room was only Rolf who was clicking his tongue.
967
SPT Chapter 147
My bad for missing the upload yesterday. I suddenly got called to help moving my office lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
Sister in Law
“Duke Kleinert has come into contact with Elder Weitling, sir.”
“Is that so.”
After my rampaging stunt, I was waiting for the situation to unfold inside my room.
Fortunately, Sebas can act as my eyes and ears during that time.
I am already a target of surveillance of the people inside the capital so it’s better to stay still now
rather than make a poor move.
“Also, due to the impression manipulation by Earl Simmel, it seems that Elder Weitling is doubting
that Arnold-sama might have been replaced by Leonard-sama, sir.”
“I see. So he took it that way huh.”
When I muttered so, Finne who was brewing tea asked me a question while slightly tilting her head.
“What do you mean by that way?”
“It’s simple. I did something Leo-like. Getting angry, persecuting nobles, I did it all in the way that
people would never think that I would do it. It doesn’t matter that people’s evaluations of me change
and it doesn’t matter that people think that Leo might have swapped places with me. I can move no
matter which way they take it.”
“You have been doing that?……..I didn’t notice it at all.”
“The more people know about me, the more strange my actions would seem to them. It is easier for
people to think ‘maybe Leo switched places with him?’. Well, it is alright either way. They can think
that I have changed into someone frightening and this is still okay. After all, it is impossible to play
being incompetent forever, this will put an end to any foolish noble who will try to make light of me
and this will also compensate for Leo’s weakness, his naivety, as well. With this, we can move the
nobles who are still hesitant because of Leo’s lack of ruthlessness. If we let them think that Leo also
has a scary side to him, they will no longer be able to stay on the sidelines after all.”
Eric and Gordon will not show any mercy. The nobles who are not on their side will definitely get
weakened, if not executed. However, Leo is different. Since he gives off the impression that he is kind
968
and generous, many people think that they might be forgiven even if they just keep observing the
situation from the side.
If we can make them fear him then it would be easier to move them.
I feel sorry for Leo but since there will be no loss for the faction with this, I will have him forgive me
here.
“I don’t think that Leo-sama would resort to that kind of method though……”
“The people who are close to him might think so. But that’s just them. And even among those people,
they will still feel some sense of wrongness from me. I already laid some groundwork with Father,
depending on how this plays out, I might have to act as Leo as well.”
“That should be the last resort, sir. I am sure that Elder Weitling isn’t entirely convinced that you two
have swapped places either. He shouldn’t cause any fuss basing on suspicion alone. The best result
here would be to create a situation where your actions can be interpreted either way, sir.”
“Right. There is a big disadvantage of pretending to be Leo too.”
The impression that Leo had swapped places with me can be manipulated by just circulating rumors.
No matter what the facts are, the nobles will still be panicked at the possibility that Leo might have
swapped places with me.
To be honest, I don’t want to pretend to be Leo in front of them.
“What kind of disadvantage is it?”
“It’s a big disadvantage. Let’s say that I told them that I am actually Leo who swapped places with
me…….if that happens, I will have no choice but to act as him until he comes back. That is too painful
for me.”
“I think that Al-sama can do it though?”
“There is a difference between can and want. Humans can learn by experience. I have already learned
the hard way how painful pretending to be Leo is……..”
I remember when we visited the southern nations.
At that time, it was already a pain impersonating him. but as if to add salt to the injury, a sea dragon
even showed up. Nothing good ever came to me when I switched places with Leo.
As I thought, I should let them take this either way in the end as Sebas said.
“Sebas. Keep the rumors flowing for me.”
“Yes, as you wish, sir.”
969
“Finne, you just act like you usually do. Depending on the situation I might have you do something for
me but we will see how they will handle this situation for now.”
“Yes. Here, please take this.”
Saying so, Finne smiles and serves me a cup of tea.
In the chaotic castle, only my room was still the same as usual.
The next day.
I was called by a certain person and is currently making my way to her room.
On the east side of the inner palace, there is a place called [the East Palace] reserved for the wife of the
Crown Prince. Once the crown prince becomes the emperor, the royal consort will move from this
place to the palace at the center of the inner palace as the empress.
In other words, the person who can live here is the Crown Princess. However, there is no one holding
that title at the moment. Still, there is a person who is living here.
The Former Crown Princess. The woman who became a widow after the Crown Prince passed away.
My sister in law.
Therese Lakes Adler. Her former name is Therese von Weitling.
The eldest daughter of Marquis Weitling.
“It’s been a while. Arnold.”
“Yes, it’s been a long time. Sister in law. I am glad you are in good health.”
Saying so, I bowed to the beauty with long honey-colored hair, my sister in law, Therese. Before she
became my eldest brother’s wife, she was the center of the attention of high society. She is still 26 and
her beauty still hasn’t changed but the death of my brother began to cast a shadow on her.
My sister in law was allowed to live in the East Palace at the discretion of the Emperor after the Crown
Prince’s death.
The reason was that she couldn’t forget the Crown Prince and can’t bring herself to keep living from
the shock of losing him.
It is inevitable for people to sympathize with her and let her live quietly in the East Palace.
It was surprising for her to call me. After all, she is someone that would never move except for events
related to the Crown Prince.
970
“I’m sorry for calling you here so suddenly……I wanted to apologize to you on my brother’s behalf. As
his sister, I’m sorry for his actions.”
“It’s all right, please don’t worry about that.”
I put one hand forward to stop my sister in law from lowering her head.
She shouldn’t lower her head over something like this. This person was someone who was supposed
to become the empress after all.
“It is not my place to say this but……..can you forgive my brother, will you forgive Laurenz?”
I’m sure that is the wish she has from the bottom of her heart.
She already lost the Crown Prince, that’s why she is worried about losing her brother, Marquis
Weitling.
However, she has misunderstood something here.
“I am very disappointed. I didn’t expect such words to come from you.”
“……..you can not forgive him can you.”
“Yes, I have no intention to let this go. If he wants to be forgiven then he should have come to
apologize to me directly. Moreover, it seems that you are misunderstanding something, Sister-in-
law……..the moment you married Aniue, you have already become a member of the imperial family.
Isn’t it my side that you supposed to be on?”
“That is…….”
“Laurenz von Weitling has done a great deal of disrespect toward me as a member of the imperial
family. His actions are a show that he is holding the whole imperial family in contempt. The honor of
the imperial family will be tainted if I simply forgive him.”
“…….Arnold. Please. I have no blood-related family left beside him……..”
“Unfortunately, if you are my sister in law, your priority should be given to protecting the honor of the
imperial family over your blood connections. I will keep silent about it this time but please do not
forget that many people find your presence here in the East Palace to be unpleasant.”
Advising her so, I turned back.
I might have been too harsh but this is something that someone should say to her.
She shouldn’t want to part from this place, after all, this place was where she spent memorable days
with my brother.
This place is that important to her.
971
“Arnold……the Crown Prince…..Will had a high opinion of you, you know.”
“This is the first time I hear it.”
“If it’s you then you must be aware that there is no point in cornering the Weitling house…..my brother
is still young. Please, give him a chance to start over…….”
“He is still older than me. Moreover, if he can at least make the right decision here, the worst-case
scenario can still be avoided. He simply will suffer the consequence of picking a fight with the imperial
family. As the head of an influential noble house, one could say that he is still lacking. Chaos will be
created when someone incompetent acquires power. You should be able to understand that much,
Sister in law.”
“Arnold……”
“I will have to excuse myself here.”
Saying so, I left the place for good.
972
SPT Chapter 148
Shoutout to Rector for the 4th celebration coffee and my new patron Xenepth!!
Enjoy the beginning of the main event. if I’m not too busy I will post the new chapter tomorrow or
tuesday.
-Mr.Graverobber.
Laurenz
A few days after Duke Kleinert contacted the Weitling house.
They finally reached out to us. Still, I did not personally meet them and appointed Sebas to act as my
proxy instead.
“Are they angry?”
“Rather than angry, I think that they are bewildered, sir. That should be obvious given that you have
dispatched your butler to handle such an important negotiation.”
“The result will not change no matter who went there. So, what did they propose?”
“The arrested nobles will relinquish their titles, the other nobles who were involved will be demoted
one rank by his Majesty, and the rest will pay you a settlement fee, sir.”
Their proposal is certainly reasonable.
However, I am not looking for that kind of conclusion.
“Rejected.”
“Yes. I have already turned down their proposal.”
I intended to reject their first proposal in the first place.
My stance is to remain a strong front. That is why I rejected my sister in law’s plea.
“With this, they would think that I will not accept any half baked proposal.”
“Yes, sir. I am sure that the next time they will include the resignation of Marquis Weitling into the
condition as well.”
“That is the minimum requirement.”
973
“But is it alright, sir? If you keep up such a strong stance, this might lead to an even stronger
resistance from them.”
I nod to Sebas’s words.
There might be someone who holds animosity against me and do not seek reconciliation.
However,
“That is how I want it. What I want is not reconciliation but a guarantee that this will never happen
again. It’s fine if they want to put up a resistance. It is just a matter of crushing them down.”
“You are afraid that they might seek to undermine you someday if you reconcile with them?”
“Correct. With a temporary settlement, this will bound to happen again. I have to thoroughly break
their will here. I will not take any half baked measure against them.”
“Killing them might be easier to serve that purpose, sir.”
“Probably. But I will not do that. I don’t want to shed blood meaninglessly in this stupid conflict.”
After all, the strong front I put up was so that we can settle this quickly.
If they understand that they will not be let off easily if they mess with me then they will no longer try
to do it again.
If things do not reach the breaking point they will only press down their dissatisfaction. So, if their
dissatisfaction is going to blow up anyway then I want them to let it all out here.
That way I can completely beat them down so that there won’t be the next time.
“You have an evil smile on your face, sir.”
“You think so?”
“Not just your smile, what you are currently doing is also evil though. I don’t know about cornering
your opponent so much and wait for the matter to explode but in case the other side manages to hold
themselves back, someone with deep hatred against you will be born, sir. It would be a disadvantage
for you if such a person were to join Eric-dono, no?”
“They are not much of an adult in the first place. I don’t know who among them will lose their patience
first but……if their dissatisfaction in me peaked, they will surely make a move somewhere.”
Well, I had two dukes traveled all the way here after all.
The best ending they could achieve is to endure this but I can’t imagine that they would be able to do
so.
Those guys were being emotional. They will continue to be like that until the end.
974
Thinking so, I quietly waited for their next contact.
——————————-
A week has passed.
The day of reconciliation arrived. During the past week, the nobles have put forth various proposals
for me.
The final proposal is one that the leaders of their alliance including Marquis Weitling will relinquish
their titles, pay a large amount of compensation, and submit a paper that pays respect to the imperial
family. The other nobles will pay the compensation fee. The arrested nobles will be punished
according to the law. The citizens who cooperated with them are acquitted of their crimes and the
monetary compensation for their actions will be paid by the noble who used them.
It must have been a tough decision to make. No matter how great the Weitling house is, they will have
no choice but to adopt a new heir from houses that are related to them by blood. Their eldest
daughter, Therese, will never remarry, and the second daughter, one of the captains of the imperial
knight corps is too busy with her work that she will only become a decoration even if she becomes the
head of the house. Even so, they submitted such a proposal was because they desired a reconciliation
that much.
“Now, let’s go. If possible, I hope that Finne won’t have to move.”
“It all depends on the other side, sir. Do you think that [That Person] will really move?”
“I have no clue. It’s a possibility though…..well, that person might move if they are faced with the
worst-case scenario right? That’s why I prepared a countermeasure in the first place.”
“It has become quite an important matter hasn’t it.”
“The people involved are that important after all. That person still doesn’t have that self-awareness
though.”
While chatting about that, we enter the throne room.
Father and Franz will also be present at this reconciliation.
After all, this matter will be mediated by two dukes. It is quite exaggerated but this is the biggest
conflict in the capital right now so it is a given that they will be present.
Well, it could be taken as they are pressuring us to not cause any more trouble than this though.
Let’s see if there’s anyone who can act under such pressure.
“This is quite a sight huh.”
Inside the throne room are Duke Kleinert and Duke Reinfeld who are waiting for us.
975
On the right side of the entrance are the people involved with the white seagull alliance with Elder
Weitling standing at the forefront. The handsome young man with honey-colored hair standing beside
him is the current Marquis Weitling, Laurenz von Weitling.
He stared at me as I entered the room.
Other nobles at his side are also looking at me. Their eyes hold nothing but animosity.
It seems I am quite hated huh.
Thinking so, I headed to the left side from the entrance of the throne room.
Utz who arrived earlier is waiting for me there and once I arrived at my position, he confirmed the
details of this reconciliation with me in a small voice.
“This reconciliation will be handled mostly by the two dukes, Your Highness. The final proposal will be
reviewed by both dukes in text form and the settlement will be effective once Your Highness and
Marquis Weitling who will be acting as their representative sign the agreement.”
“I see. I hope this will be over soon.”
While saying so, I look at Elder Weitling who seems to be unsettled about something on the opposite
side.
When our eyes met, Elder Weitling quietly lowered his head.
“It’s been a long time, Elder Weitling.”
“It’s been a while. Your Highness Arnold.”
“Sorry for bringing you out of your retirement. Is your body all right? Are you not pushing yourself?”
“I am completely fine, Your Highness. Thank you for worrying about me.”
Elder Weitling politely replied even though I took a self-important tone toward him.
He is very humble. After all, this is the throne room, if your opponent is a member of the imperial
family, his attitude is only natural. However, it seems that the young nobles behind him don’t like that.
The thorn in their eyes as they looked at me increased. But I simply keep talking with him without
paying them any mind.
“I see. Then make sure to educate your next heir. It wouldn’t do if Elder Weitling has to come out
because of this kind of matter again.”
“Your Highness….everything happened because my education was lacking. Please have mercy on us.”
“I will. If you adhere to the proposal you presented that is.”
976
“Of course, we will abide by it.”
That was the end of our conversation.
The young nobles’ eyes only got sharper and sharper but once Father and Franz arrived, they settled
down.
Everyone knelt on the spot and bowed to Father.
“Everyone, thanks for coming. I am glad that we can set up this reconciliation. Also, I have troubled
you this time, Duke Kleinert, Duke Reinfeld. My apology.”
“There is no need for an apology, Your Majesty.”
“I simply perform my duty as your humble subject.”
The two dukes replied while they are kneeling.
Satisfied with their answers, Father leans back on the throne and starts the event.
“I will leave this to you two. You may begin .”
“Yes, Your Majesty.”
“Certainly.”
Duke Kleinert and Jurgen stand up with permission from Father.
We also stand up and turn our eyes to the other side.
After that, Jurgen act as a moderator and explains us the details and proceed to confirm the conditions
for this reconciliation
The event proceeded normally so far. There is nothing unusual and there is no sign of someone
starting anything.
Maybe it is because we are doing this in front of Father or perhaps it is because this event is being
mediated by two dukes.
In the end, things proceeded to the final task of signing the agreement without anything out of the
ordinary.
“Your Highness Arnold, Marquis Weitling, this way please.”
Duke Kleinert called me and Laurenz to the table where the agreement was prepared.
We step forward at the same time.
977
Laurenz is a tall handsome young man. He seems like the type that women would naturally flock to
him without him doing anything. The word nobleman described him perfectly.
However, his action is far from that of a nobleman. Emotion has corrupted him.
His jealousy must be the root of this. If Leo was the opponent he might be able to suppress it but since
it’s me it exploded all at once.
A man’s jealousy is unsightly and pitch-black. I’m sure that he can’t make a calm decision.
Laurenz who is glaring at me like I am his sworn enemy took off his glove and threw it at me.
My my.
Laurenz then made a statement while everyone was bewildered at his action.
“Your Highness Arnold. I …..Laurenz von Weitling challenges you to a duel. You are unjust and
arrogant. I can not recognize you as a member of the imperial family. Please pick up the glove and
have a duel with me. Put everything on the line and fight!”
This must have been the most foolish and courageous act since the Weitling house was found.
Throwing a glove at a prince in front of the Emperor in the negotiation mediated by two dukes.
In some sense, this person might really be a prodigy.
However, this has gone beyond what I imagined.
To think that he would challenge me to a duel here.
This seems like trouble.
Thinking so, I started adjusting my unruly hair.
Now, it’s time to put on a performance.
978
SPT Chapter 149
Alright, let’s continue this. only a few more chapters until we conclude this event.
-Mr.Graverobber
Influence
“If possible……..I want to settle this as Nii-san but since you challenged me to a duel, it seems I can’t
continue acting any longer.”
Saying so, I neatly adjust my appearance.
Then, I stretch up my back and put a Leo-like smile on my face and turn to face Father.
“Your Majesty, I, Leonard would like to beg for your forgiveness. My deepest apology for deceiving
you.”
“I had my doubt but……is it really you, Leonard?”
“Yes. it is a big sin to deceive Your Majesty but this is what Nii-san had entrusted me with. It is a part
of our strategy so please forgive us.”
“I do not mind such a minor thing. But……when did you switch places with him?”
“I switched places with Nii-san since the time I was preparing to leave the capital.”
When I told him so, Father nodded to himself several times as if he was convinced.
Seeing that, I turned my attention toward Laurenz.
It seems that he was surprised that I suddenly acted like Leo but his hostility toward me still persists.
“My father mentioned the possibility that you might actually be His Highness Leonard but……you can’t
deceive me. His Highness Leonard is not someone who would commit such an outrageous act!”
“I am troubled that you would say that but…..in the first place, could you clarify what was it that is so
outrageous about my action? Marquis Weitling.”
“We followed your provocation and act to eliminate you, Your Highness Arnold! Your Highness said so
yourself! That we should use any means necessary to eliminate you!”
“Certainly, Nii-san did say that. If you are saying that is the reason you acted then I shall accept it.
However, what happened to that? You tried to eliminate Nii-san through any means necessary but
who is it that got the table turned on him now?”
979
“That is where the problem lies! After you provoked us, now you try to defeat us using His Majesty’s
power! If that is not outrageous then what is!?”
The young nobles of the white seagull alliance voice their support of Laurenz’s words.
I see. That’s where they are dissatisfied with huh.
They made their move because they were provoked. Now that they are being beaten by me who
utilized the Emperor’s power, they are saying that this is outrageous.
Don’t make me laugh.
“I have one question for you, Marquis Weitling.”
“What is it? [Your Highness Arnold]?”
It seems that he has no intention to accept me as Leo huh.
What a fool. And this is his final chance to withdraw as well.
If this keeps going, it will be out of my control soon. Even though I tried so hard to not shed blood
unnecessarily.
“Nii-san provoked you to eliminate him. That’s why you acted according to his words. You are saying
that you simply did what you were told and you think that it is unreasonable for you to be punished
even after you were caught. That is your point right?”
“Exactly!”
“I see……then let me ask you this. If you are able to [use any means necessary] to eliminate Nii-san,
isn’t it unreasonable for you to find fault with him when Nii-san did the same thing? His first move
happened to be to switch places with me. I don’t think that this is the case but you all really do not
think that you can do anything to him and while he isn’t allowed to retaliate right? Nii-san’s words
were [I will not accept anyone who can not at least eliminate me]. And without being able to eliminate
him, you were defeated. You all should be aware of the consequence for that now, yes?”
That is the summary of this incident.
The white seagull alliance claimed that the Dull Prince is unsuitable to be near Finne and in response, I
told them that if they have any complaints they can come and try to get rid of me.
Then, they made their move, and splendidly got the table turned on them.
That’s why they are now being treated one-sidedly as the losers.
“Th, that is just sophistry! You laid the trap out for us and now you blame us for stepping on it!?”
980
“I thought that was what I said just now. Was I not being clear? This is not some honorable duel from
the start. This was, so to speak, politics. And in politics, the winner is absolute. That’s why you are not
allowed to lose. Well…….it is only recently that I have learned that lesson though.”
“That is irrational! I can not acknowledge such an outrageous action! Even if you really are His
Highness Leonard, I can not allow a prince with such a bullish way of thinking to become an emperor!”
“If my actions seem outrageous to you then it just means that you are simply naive and ignorant. Let’s
say that I go along with your reasoning that I am being outrageous and unsuited to become an
emperor. I wonder how you will justify this situation? You just challenged a prince to a duel in front of
His Majesty. You know that I can take your action as a show of contempt toward the imperial family
right?”
Observing Laurenz, I can see that he is at a loss for words.
He probably challenged me to a duel because he was carried away by the situation.
He should be well aware that such an action will not be allowed to pass.
“Th, this is a personal duel! A simple challenge from an individual called Laurenz to Arnold!”
“Stop it already……..it is unsightly.”
Elder Weitling muttered as if he couldn’t endure it anymore.
Elder Weitling then turned toward father, got down on his knees, and rub his head on the floor.
“It has already come to this, Your Majesty. Please take both my son’s neck and mine. I can’t bear seeing
my son bringing shame to himself any more than this…….”
“F, Father!?”
Laurenz looks at Elder Weitling in disbelief.
Well, this is not surprising. After all, challenging me to a duel here means that he has no respect
toward the Emperor.
“Raise your head. Edmund.”
“I can not……..”
“Fuu……..Marquis Weitling. I was under the impression that you, along with the white seagull alliance
already admitted [your loss], was I wrong? Are you not here in this manner because you
acknowledged your defeat?”
“Y, Your Majesty! We are not defeated yet! His Highness Arnold simply borrowed your power, Your
Majesty! Moreover, he acted as if it was his own power and tried to force his way with us! He is simply
being arrogant!”
981
“Arrogant huh….then what about you? This meeting was set up by the two dukes and your father.
Including me and the Prime Minister, you have disrespect every single one of us here, do you not think
that you yourself are being arrogant, Marquis?”
“Th, that is……my deepest apology for my rudeness. I couldn’t suppress my emotion………however, I
have no intention to withdraw this challenge!”
Father looks down on Laurenz as if he was a child throwing a tantrum and turns toward Franz.
As if he understands what Father has in mind, Franz nods.
“Marquis Weitling. Will you allow me a question?”
“Yes, Prime Minister.”
“If you have not accepted your loss then why did you seek this reconciliation?”
“This reconciliation was not according to our will. It was our fathers who moved. We simply couldn’t
stop them…….”
“I see. Then you do admit that you are in a disadvantageous position, correct?”
“U, Uhh…..yes.”
Laurenz tried to say something back but perhaps seeing Franz stare straight at him, he lost his will to
make an argument and admit it with a small voice.
The moment he heard that Franz nodded and concluded the matter.
“Then this duel can not be allowed. A duel must be applied from a person with equal standing. Since
you admitted that you are at a disadvantage here, you can not apply for a duel with an opponent that
is in a superior position to you. A noble is not supposed to challenge a member of the imperial family
to a duel in the first place, there is no such precedent either.”
“No way!”
“My answer will be the same no matter how much you raise your voice. And since your duel challenge
is not allowed here, the question left is what to do with your rudeness so far. If you can not accept His
Highness, you can simply stand against him. We are in the middle of a succession war after all. There
was no need for you to disrespect His Majesty and insist on a duel here. As you are surely aware, there
is a huge gap of power between a prince and an emperor. His Majesty is the absolute inside the
Empire. Disrespecting him outperforms all of your crimes. Of course, anyone who agrees with your
actions is also guilty of this.”
Franz’s eyes rest on the young nobles behind Laurenz.
They should be aware that they will share his blame for this but all of their faces turned blue at once.
Well, of course, they would be like that. Just how thoughtless they can be.
982
And Laurenz is also to blame. I have already revealed myself as Leo so that he can avoid the worst-
case scenario. If only he says that he is willing to withdraw since it’s His Highness Leonard, then the
final result would be much different.
“Is that so…….so you are on the side of His Highness Arnold huh.”
“It doesn’t matter how you take my words. You should learn that your father kept you away from
politics because you will only be emotional like this. I don’t know if you will be allowed to act like this
a second time though.”
Saying so, Franz looks at Father.
What Franz is implying is whether or not Laurenz will be decapitated.
What he did here deserves such punishment. Knowing that, Elder Weitling quickly offered his head so
that the punishment will not extend to the other nobles here.
Laurenz is Marquis Weitling and the leader of the white seagull alliance. He said that he only
challenged me as an individual but as long as he has the status of a Marquis, he can not act as an
individual. There is also the fact that he is the leader of their organization as well.
This matter will not be concluded with just Laurenz losing his head. It is far more complicated than
that.
Will all the nobles in the white seagull alliance get beheaded to share his responsibility or will his
head be sufficed for the crime of his organization.
There will be problems either way.
In the former case, many nobles will be decapitated just before the 25th coronation anniversary. It is
an indication that the Empire’s internal affairs are not stable. The guests from other countries will not
visit us and dark shadows will fall over the ceremony.
In the latter case, the whole Weitling house will be implicated. This will include a commander of the
imperial knight corp. If the Emperor shows mercy here it will be received as him being indecisive and
if he punishes her, we will lose one of our important knight commanders.
The reason why Laurenz is a big idiot here is that he doesn’t consider his influence on others. He does
as he pleased, but a marquis house is not one that can be moved however he likes.
“……too much is too much. If we are calling someone arrogant here it would be you, Marquis Weitling.
Even though you are a subject, you hold the imperial family in contempt. Marquis Weitling will be
beheaded along with all the major nobles inside the white seagull alliance.”
So he chooses to lose face and protect a knight captain huh. Well, of course, I guess.
She is an important force of the Empire. Losing her would be a waste.
When I was thinking about such a thing, a female voice echoed inside the throne room.
983
“Please wait, Your Majesty.”
It’s been a while since I last heard that voice.
Really. To think that she would come out here.
This will only make the situation more complicated, seriously.
The fact they can pull in such an influential person into this clearly shows how troublesome the
Weitling house is. I really want the head of that house to move around while being more aware of his
influence in the first place though.
I sigh internally at the middle-aged woman who entered the room.
“It’s been a long time. Your Majesty the Empress.”
She is the wife of the Emperor and the lord of the inner palace.
The highest seat of power for all the women of the Empire.
The Empress, Brunhild Lakes Adler.
It goes without saying who pulled her into this.
Therese appeared from behind the Empress.
She probably moved at the request of the wife of the Crown Prince and her daughter in law……..
Making things even more complicated.
I glance at Father’s face.
Deep anger is shown on his face. Franz who is standing beside him is also frowning.
The worst scenario I expected had become a reality.
984
SPT Chapter 150
This week’s chapters are quite long. I’m getting sleepy.
Also shout out to an anonymous person who just bought be a coffee. I bought a sweetened milk
instead though……
-Mr.Graverobber
Compromise
“Brunhild…….what are you doing here?”
Father who had his decision challenged asked the intruding Empress in an angry tone.
Truthfully speaking, these two do not get along.
Originally, their education policies for the Crown Prince were against each other and their
relationship took a decisive blow when he passed away three years ago.
The Crown Prince died on the battlefield. But why did he enter one in the first place?
The answer is that my father, the Emperor ordered him to. As the Crown Prince, Father wanted him to
work suitably so that no one could find fault with him.
On the other hand, the Empress wanted her precious son, the Crown Prince, by her side. She was
always the one that brought up the question of what would we do in the off chance that something
happens to him. She even directly appealed to Father before the Crown Prince’s departure.
Then her fear was realized. The Crown Prince died and the Empire lost its ideal successor.
Since then, the relationship between the two has gone cold. The Empress thinks that the Crown Prince
died because Father ordered him to go and Father grew distant from her because she never tried to
hide that.
Despite that, there was no problem occurring because of their cold relationship. She doesn’t lose her
privilege even if she lost her child, and the Empress lost her vitality after the death of the Crown
Prince and she desired to live peacefully inside the inner palace. That was a great development for
Father. This is because he needs the Empress to maintain the order inside the inner palace.
However, that Empress was pulled into this mess by Therese.
This development is the most troublesome scenario. With the two who hold the highest authority in
this place colliding with each other, I have no way to stop them.
“I came here to stop the blood from flowing.”
985
Saying so, the Empress stepped forward.
Seeing that, Father frowned angrily at her.
“This is no stage for a woman. Back down now!”
“I can not do that.”
“You may have been pulled into this by Therese but these guys disrespected the imperial family far
too much. If they are not punished, the honor of the imperial family will be damaged.”
“I am aware of that but I did not come here simply due to Therese’s request. I am stopping you this
time because if we let the blood of our subjects flow now it will damage the national interest.”
“I know that it will. But they still needed to be punished.”
“The person who has the closest contact with the other royal families is me. I have been exchanging
letters with them so that they will visit the ceremony. Your Majesty also planned various things
together with the [Adventurer Guild] for this event as well. Don’t you think that by punishing them,
everything we have done so far will be for naught?”
Adventurer guild?
I have no such information. I did not actively look for the information from the guild but an SS-rank
adventurer is someone that such information will arrive at their ears without the need to look it up.
Well, I am curious. Guess I will look into it once this matter is done huh.
What’s more important now is the matter unfolding in front of me. I do understand the Empress’s
point in this.
Eric’s job as the Minister of Foreign Affairs is basically to negotiate with other major countries. Of
course, Eric’s subordinates are also moving around to keep diplomatic relationships with other
countries as well but the Empress and the consorts are the ones exchanging letters with the royal
family of each country.
Not just the letters. They also send gifts and exchange information with them. The consorts at the
inner palace also have a lot of work to do.
That’s the reason she can’t overlook the punishment that will destroy their effort. I understand that.
But the question now is what will she propose us to do?
There is no way that we can just acquit them.
“Then what do you want me to do? You surely are not proposing that I should forgive them right?”
“Of course, punishment is necessary. But we shouldn’t allow blood to flow for this. The timing is
simply too bad. Why don’t we imprison them and punish them once the ceremony is over?”
986
“There is a pardon after the ceremony. If I acquit others of their crime, I will have to acquit them too!
This is the only moment that they can be punished.”
“If that’s the case then it is better for Your Majesty to stay your punishment. If Your Majesty executed
many of our powerful nobles, the number of guests for the ceremony will be dramatically decreased.
The honor of the imperial family is certainly important but our national interest is important as well.
Please do not forget. Your Majesty once ignored my plea, do you see how much our nation has lost
because of that.”
“Can you stop bringing up the Crown Prince!”
Father yelled at the Empress and turned toward Franz.
Franz also has a troubled expression himself.
The Empress is right. Her argument is sound when you compare the honor of the imperial family to
the national interest. However, if he let them off this time, there will be more people like them
showing up. And that will surely damage the national interest as well.
Either way, there is no benefit for the Empire.
Father removes his eyes from the Empress and angrily glares at Laurenz.
Laurenz is frightened by the glares. Well, of course, he would be glaring at you. You rampaged without
thinking about what your influence could cause and now the situation has already escalated to the
point that your head alone won’t be able to settle the matter.
You should have withdrawn when I revealed myself as Leo. this is already out of my hands.
As I was thinking so, I heard more footsteps from the outside.
I didn’t want to rely on such a measure if possible but since the Empress already showed up, I have no
other choice.
It seems that the helper Finne called has arrived.
“Ara? I thought that it was Al but why is Leo here?”
With a smile like she just pulled off a prank, my mother, Mitsuba enters the throne room. Judging from
the smile she has while she said that, she must have known that I am Al. as expected of my mother.
I asked Finne to be at my mother’s side and told her that if the Empress makes a move, she has to ask
my mother to move as well.
I can’t see Finne here but this is probably my mother’s consideration.
Finne is in no way responsible for this mess but she is prone to blame herself after all.
“I was pretending to be Nii-san, Mother.”
987
“You’ve always been good at switching places but stop doing that in front of His Majesty already. It’s
rude.”
“Yes, my deepest apology.”
“Please accept my apology on Leo’s behalf, Your Majesty.”
“Mitsuba…..why are you here too?”
Father was confused when he saw her and Franz had an expression like he is having a stomachache.
He already has a conflict between the Emperor and the Empress on his hands, he probably has a great
deal of anxiety now since my mother joined in as well.
This is no longer a conflict between a prince and the nobles after all.
“I heard that Her Majesty went to the throne room so I came to observe but it seems your opinions are
in conflict right.”
In such a scene of chaos, my mother states so as if she doesn’t worry about anything at all.
“Mitsuba-san……you should back down from this”
“Your Majesty. I do not want to cause trouble. I simply want to lend a hand in finding a compromise.”
“You are Leonard’s mother. Will you not try to settle the matter in a way that is favorable for him?”
“Your doubt is completely understandable. However, doesn’t that hold true for Your Majesty as well?”
With my mother’s reply, the Empress quiet down.
As the Empress, she can’t go against Father forever. After all, if Father is killed, the Empress will not be
safe either.
The words of the Emperor are absolute. If my father feels like it, he can ignore everything and execute
everyone here. That is the kind of existence an emperor is, he simply doesn’t like doing things that
way. If something were to make my father snap or someone can convince him, this matter will be over.
Seeing the Empress that has gone silent, Mother turns her eyes to Father.
Father also decided to not interrupt her and nodded.
“Now let us find a middle ground. That being said, I only have one suggestion. [Pretend this never
happened].”
Everyone puzzlingly looks at her.
However, only I narrowed my eyes at her proposal.
988
It was the same solution I was thinking of.
“Leo, will you explain it for me? I think you should be able to explain this better than I do.”
“Yes, I understand.”
“What do you mean? You also know about this, Leonard?”
“Yes, Your Majesty. My mother and I have the same idea. The biggest problem here is that Marquis
Laurenz von Weitling is the head of a prestigious noble house and also the leader of the white seagull
alliance.”
“I know that. What I want to know is how should we proceed from now on.”
My father is quite irritated, this is probably because of the presence of the Empress.
I guess I have to quickly end this.
“Yes, that being said, we should forget that his duel challenge ever happened.”
“I see. That is a good idea.”
Franz immediately noticed my intention and nodded.
However, since blood had already rushed to his head, Father still has a suspicious expression on his
face.
I have to explain this carefully to him.
“Marquis von Weitling did not challenge me to a duel, He accepted the settlement and after that, he
found out that I am actually Leonard so he sought to cancel the agreement and challenged me to a
duel. Let’s make that an official story.”
“You are saying that we should twist the truth huh? Is this because of his rudeness toward the
imperial family and me?”
“Yes. we are within the throne room so if none of us speaks, what actually happened here will not leak
to the outside.”
“That’s good……but that doesn’t solve the matter of the honor of the imperial family though?”
Father irritatedly looks at me.
He probably thinks that there is no other way to preserve our family honor but executing Laurenz
huh.
Blood rushed to his head because the Empress brought up the Crown Prince.
This is already like a fight between a couple.
989
“That will be solved by the punishment after the duel. It is rude to challenge a member of the imperial
family to a duel in the first place. Therefore, there will be a condition attached to this duel. If Marquis
Laurenz von Weitling loses……he along with the major nobles in the white seagull alliance will have to
drink the [Emperor Poison Wine]. That way, it will be known to the people what it means to
disrespect the imperial family.”
Everyone inside the throne room froze at the wine I mentioned.
The Emperor Poison Wine is a poisonous liquor held by the Empire’s imperial family. It is the
strongest and the worst poison in the Empire.
Simply with one sip, you will experience various symptoms for seven days and seven nights. It has the
effect of various poisons mixed together, the drinker’s condition will change each day that passed and
strangely enough, during that time, the drinker will not die. They will continue to suffer, wandering
between the boundaries of life and death.
Then after continuing to experience the pain of death over and over, the drinker will face certain
death.
It is a poison used only to punish felons and has never been used since my Father took the throne.
“…..do you think that guests from other countries will visit us if they know that we feed our nobles
such a poison?”
“Your Majesty will not be the one who makes them drink it. This will be the condition that Laurenz
von Weitling proposed to make me accept the duel. With that, we should be able to protect the honor
of the imperial family. He took on the risk of drinking deadly poison in order to avoid his punishment
and challenged me to a duel. The challenger will bear all the responsibility even if he dies.”
Hearing my words, the young nobles of the white seagull alliance turned even bluer. What I meant by
major nobles are all the young nobles inside this room.
If Laurenz loses, they will all have to drink the Emperor Poison Wine.
“Won’t all the death row criminals do the same thing if we made such a precedent?”
“Please do not worry about that, Your Majesty. All we have to do is to make a law that prohibits it after
this is over. This will be a one time case.”
“…….I see.”
“What do you think? I think that this way, the honor of the imperial family and the reputation of the
Empire will not be damaged .”
Hearing that, the Empress glances at Therese.
Therese gave her a nod as if she had given up.
990
They probably understand that I gave them the one single chance to reverse this situation. Even if that
meant her brother will have to face certain death after he is defeated.
“…..I understand that it is a good plan but what do you gain in all this? Leonard.”
Father looks straight at me.
That’s right, there is no merit for me here.
There is no benefit for me to accept this duel. I am in the position of the victim at the moment and
these guys will die even if I don’t do anything. There is no point in me lending my hand to reverse the
situation for them.
However, that is exactly why this is worth doing.
“I….am aiming to become an emperor. It is the truth that this incident has plunged the Empire into
chaos. I have the duty to take responsibility for it.”
“Hou? Then what would you do if you lose? Are you saying that your victory is already set in stone?”
“If I lose Your Majesty can do whatever you want with me. You can expel me from the imperial family
or even take my head. After all, there is no place for me on the throne if I were to lose here.”
That was quite a statement. I selfishly borrowed Leo’s name and now I am betting Leo’s everything
away. However, I do think that if it’s Leo he will surely say that. Even if he doesn’t say it, I will be
troubled if he can’t become someone that can say that.
Hearing my words, Father smiles.
It was a smile that he showed when he took a liking to someone.
With this, Leo’s evaluation has gone up.
“Well said! Your will is truly splendid! That is how those who aim for the throne should be! I was
worried that you would stay naive……..but it seems you have grown up through this succession war
huh.”
“I am still immature.”
“Humble as always. I understand. Let’s go with your proposal. After the agreement was signed, it was
revealed that you are actually Leonard, and Laurenz challenged you to a duel on behalf of the white
seagull alliance. That is the story you want right? I shall make it so.”
The Emperor’s words are absolute.
Father has invoked his power to do that. He probably thinks that it is fine even if he does that.
Everyone in the throne room kneels and gives their voice of approval at once.
991
However, the voice of Laurenz I heard from my side was shaking.
The situation has already turned into one in which he only has two choices. Getting executed without
doing anything or having a duel with me.
If he protests the decision, it will become a death sentence for him. As expected, he seems to
understand that and stay quiet while quivering in fear.
By the time Therese dragged the Empress into this, there was already no escape for him.
“Now then, Marquis Weitling. Sign the agreement.”
Duke Kleinert urges.
Laurenz tries to sign the agreement with his quivering hand but he drops the pen.
I picked it up and firmly handed it to him.
“Now, please.”
“Ah……”
Prompted by me, Laurenz tries to sign his name again.
The agreement only had one correction. Perhaps it was Jurgen or Duke Kleinert who rewrote it during
the turmoil.
A line saying that the guilty party will be removed from the position of the family head was crossed
out and replaced with a condition that says, the guilty party will be expelled from their family.
In other words, the major nobles of the alliance including Laurenz will become commoners when he
signs this agreement. Their house will not bear any of the blame for this. It is the so-called duel as an
individual that Laurenz desired.
Well, that kind of thing can be done with a single word from the Emperor but this is a nice assist on
their part.
Still shivering, Laurenz doesn’t notice that.
Then after Laurenz finally signed the agreement, I immediately put in my signature.
With this, the signing part is over. And now Laurenz has effectively become a commoner. Then, I
slowly picked up the fallen glove.
“—–I, Leonard Lakes Adler, accepted your challenge.”
Thus, as Leo, I will be having a duel with Laurenz.
Hearing my acceptance, Laurenz’s shoulders quiver.
992
What his face is bearing is simply fear. He might have made his resolve and prepared to bet his life but
he probably wasn’t prepared to drink the Empire’s strongest poison.
There is no will behind his eyes.
To some extent, a person who can read an outcome of the duel can see it just by seeing Laurenz.
Victory does not come to those who are scared of death.
Well, I feel sorry for you but since it has already come to this, there are no other choices. I wanted to
avoid meaningless death as much as I can but it was them that rendered all my effort to waste.
I shall have you become a stepping stone for Leo now, Laurenz.
993
SPT Chapter 151
Special thanks to Lesoru for more delicious coffee!!
This is the end of the first part of this arc, enjoy.
-Mr.Graverobber.
Closing the Curtain
“You will not be faulted even if you accidentally kill each other. But do avoid shedding blood as much
as possible.”
Father gave me quite a tall order.
At his signal, the knights handed a sheathed sword to each of us.
Being physically poor, it is too heavy for me.
It’s impossible for me to move like Leo in a fight. Moreover, Father even requested such a thing since
he thinks that I am Leo.
Laurenz on the other hand is acting awkward when he receives the sword since his body is still
shivering.
He should be confident in his ability since he was the one who challenged me to a duel but the price
for losing this duel is simply too heavy. He can not fight normally anymore.
Emperor Poison Wine is a legendary poison. It is said that an assassin would sell out his employer just
by mentioning it. There is no end to such tales about the Emperor Poison Wine.
Thinking about the possibility that he has to drink that poison, Laurenz’s body visibly trembling. Well,
he thought that I am Arnold when he challenged me to duel in the first place.
That being said, the moment Mother called me Leonard, everyone here is convinced that I am indeed
him.
Leo’s heroism is clear from his recent activities. Moreover, from an early age, he has never lost in a
sword fight. A mere noble has no chance against him.
That’s why I can’t show some unsightly performance here.
“Both sides, get ready.”
In response to my father’s words, I pull out the sword from the sheath.
994
Laurenz also unsheathed his sword and held it in his hands. It is a stance that is true to the basics. He
must have a minimum knowledge of swordsmanship. I’m certain that I can’t win against him in a
normal duel.
Seriously…….time after time, he forced me to use something that I don’t want to use.
This duel shouldn’t be happening in the first place.
He was supposed to sign the agreement without knowing for certain whether I am Al or Leo.
Laurenz crushed all my plans. He moved without a moment to think about his own influence and
things have become so complicated that it is now inevitable to make sacrifices.
Finne will be saddened. I tried to avoid this development but………..the fool in front of me involved
another unnecessary person and now the situation was already out of my hands.
I have no choice but to keep up my Leo act and use this situation to raise Leo’s reputation.
He’s free to die for his own actions but I can’t forgive him for taking away the possibility that I can end
this without saddening Finne.
I told Finne that I would not do something that would make her cry. Those words will surely become a
lie.
Finne will feel responsible for their death. No matter what I say, she will blame herself.
To avoid that future, I can reveal that I am actually Arnold here at this moment.
That way, no one will have to be sacrificed. As usual, I will bear all the blame and people will just keep
ridiculing me. The only difference is that if I do that, I will have to leave Finne’s side.
I won’t starve even if I am no longer a royalty. I can continue to support Leo even if I am no longer one
as well.
However, If I am no longer a part of the imperial family, I can’t stay by Finne’s side.
I like how things are right now. I like the days that I can spend my time with Finne.
This is surely an act of selfishness.
Since I did not consider Finne’s feelings, maybe I am the same as these guys. Even if Finne will be
saddened, —— I still want to stay by her side.
I selfishly want to stay beside Finne. I want her to always be my sharer of secrets.
Shutting off my heart, I bring the sword in front of my face.
It is a knight’s ritual before a duel. I did it uprightly like Leo would and activated an ancient magic
spell.
995
A magic that I forbid myself to use.
Its name is [Epigonen].
(TLN: Meaning Imitators)
It is a magic that can perfectly imitate the targeted person from the user’s memory. It can also imitate
the target’s physical ability and combat techniques.
It is a convenient and useful spell but such a spell has a severe side effect. I forbid myself from using it
because of that. But now I have no choice but to use it.
My body is filled with power. My field of vision widens and even Laurenz’s subtle movement can be
read through my eyes.
This is the vision of Leo from my memory.
Now, at this moment. I completely transformed into Leo.
“Begin!!”
“UOAAHHH!!”
Laurenz rushes at me.
There was no technique behind it but his charge still has a lot of momentum.
He probably wants to decide this with a surprise attack.
If he loses he dies, that is why he has no choice but to go for the winning move. Laurenz has the
strength to make that blow.
However, the differences in ability here will not be compensated with just that.
I smoothly spin my body to avoid him.
With his attack avoided, Laurenz who couldn’t stop himself unsightly plunged himself at the floor. He
stays crouching down in pain for a moment but he immediately realizes that he is currently fighting in
a serious duel so he grips his sword and turns around.
I can see that he is full of openings but I did not make a move against him.
Leo will not do that. He might do it in a fight but this is a duel. He will surely choose to fight fair and
square here.
“Haa Haa……..Ugh, UWAAAAAAA!!”
Unable to bear the tension, Laurenz charges at me again. However, his momentum this time isn’t as
high. Probably because I avoided him earlier.
996
An attack that lacks both technique and momentum will not work on Leo.
I parried his stabbing attack and fling his sword upward.
Then, the sword escaped Laurenz’s hand and flew up into the air.
At that moment, despair appears on Laurenz’s face.
Laurenz slowly kneels down as he looks at his sword dancing in the air.
Laurenz smiled seeing the sword falling directly toward him. However, I grab Laurenz’s falling sword
with my other hand and hold both swords at Laurenz’s neck.
“Do you want to continue?”
“Ah…..Y, Your Highness….Pl, please, forgive me……I, no, I…..I was simply thinking about Finne-
sama……..”
“If you really think about her then this would never happen. You have taken action. You have involved
His Majesty the Emperor and Her Majesty the Empress into this, it is no longer possible to solve this
situation without making sacrifices. If you take pride in being an imperial noble then…….become a
sacrifice and protect the honor of the imperial family.”
“N, No……I don’t want to! If I have to drink that poison I would rather die here!!”
Laurenz then thrusts himself at my swords.
However, in anticipation of that, I took a few steps back and prevented him from committing suicide.
“That’s it! Apprehend him!”
“Your Majesty! Please forgive me! Your Majesty! Father!! Father!! Please help me!!”
Laurenz is half-mad as he tries to crawl his way toward Father and Elder Weitling.
Seeing such Laurenz, Father’s face distorted.
“It seems you have made a mistake in raising him, Edmund.”
“Please forgive me….I can not bear to live with this. Please bestow the Emperor Poison Wine to me as
well.”
Elder Weitling requested for the poison himself.
Even though he is this great of a person, why has his son turned out like that?
He shouldn’t be someone that raises his children poorly. His eldest daughter married the Crown
Prince and his second eldest daughter climbed up into the position of a captain of the imperial knight
order corp.
997
It would be wrong to blame it on his parenting.
When I was thinking so, Father shook his head.
“I will not. You have to take responsibility and raise the next Marquis of Weitling. Until then you have
to take good care of your life.”
“Your Majesty……”
“Everyone is dismissed. This is the end of this case. Take them to prison. Do not allow them to commit
suicide, you hear me?”
Saying so, Father stood up from the throne and left the room.
Franz who was left behind starts the cleanup process and gives his instructions.
In the meantime, the Empress and my mother take their leave.
The only ones left were me, Therese, and Elder Weitling.
“….it would be wrong for me to hate you. Leonard.”
“I do not mind even if you hate me.”
“No…I’m grateful that you gave him a chance…… And don’t you want to blame me for this too? I who
moved out to save my foolish little brother…….”
“I do not blame you. I am sure that the feeling of wanting to help someone is important. It’s just
that……You have made a mistake, Sister-in-law. The way you did it…….you can not save his life that
way.”
Therese has locked herself up inside the East Palace for all this time.
With no contact on the outside world, the Empress would have been the only person she could count
on.
She must have no other choice. After all, she has turned into a recluse after the Crown Prince passed
away.
However, even such a recluse wouldn’t have been abandoned by her family.
“Elder Weitling. Can you stand?”
“…..Please leave me like this for a while……he may have been foolish and disgraceful…….but he is still
my son………”
“…..I understand. Sister-in-law. Please take care of Elder Weitling.”
Saying so, I let Therese care for him and leave the throne room.
998
It would be a problem if something happened to them so I instruct Sebas to keep watch on them. After
he acknowledged my command, Sebas disappeared. Now, even if those two lost their mind, Sebas will
be able to stop them.
After that, I went back to my room.
I think that Finne will definitely be waiting for me there.
“……….”
“Welcome back. Al-sama.”
Finne welcomed me.
To such Finne, I simply stand still without saying anything.
“Al-sama?”
“……Sorry.”
“Why are you apologizing, Al-sama?”
“…..in the end, Laurenz and the others would die. There was a way to save their lives……but I chose not
to do it even though I know that you will be sad.”
Saying so, I took a step forward.
But at that moment, the imitation spell wore out.
The demerit of the spell that allowed the user to go beyond their ability assaulted me.
“Ugh……”
“Al-sama!?”
Holding my head, I kneel down on the spot.
I have a severe headache and my vision is distorted. The feeling in my body has also become a blur.
This is its demerit. At the price of being able to perform movements that were originally impossible
for the user, the brain is overloaded and causes intense headaches. Moreover, by becoming someone
else, the senses in my body are also jumbled.
I’m trying to move my hand but I can’t move it like I want to. The feeling of being Leo and the feeling of
being myself mixed together and my body is confused by that.
Unable to stand up on my own, Finne supported me to the sofa.
999
I collapse down on Finne but since I can’t move my body well, I can’t adjust my posture.
“Haa Haa…..this is exactly why I didn’t want to use it………”
“Is it a side effect from your spell…..?”
“Yeah…..this headache will last for two days…..it will be a while until my lost senses return. I forbid
this spell because its demerit is too huge for only a few minutes of advantages……”
“Oh, no……”
“I didn’t have a choice…..I had to keep being Leo…….If I were to lose, I would lose [This moment].”
After I said that, I frowned from the headache.
I couldn’t get a proper look at Finne but she laid me down on the sofa. Now I am using Finne’s knees as
a pillow and the headache subsided a bit.
When I slowly opened my eyes, I saw Finne’s worried expression.
“You didn’t……cry right……?”
“Mitsuba-sama told me…… that I mustn’t cry.”
“Mother did…..?”
“When welcoming back a hard-working man, a woman shouldn’t cry……I was taught it is polite to
welcome you back with a smile……..”
Finne said so with a smile. Her eyes look slightly moistened.
As expected of my mother. She did say something good.
That’s right. Rather than her crying face, I want to see her smile like this.
“…….please forgive me. I was being selfish. I went through a lot of preparations to make sure that you
don’t have to be saddened…….but leaving your side…….was the only thing that I couldn’t let go.”
“Is that so……please rest assured. I will never leave your side. I will follow you wherever you go. What
I desire is right here. No matter what anyone says, this is where I belong.”
“I see…..I’m glad. Now I’m relieved…….I was a little worried about what to do if you start to hate
me…..”
Saying so, I smiled and closed my eyes.
My body wants to shut down. The headache is quite harsh so I want to go to sleep just like this.
“Finne…..”
1000
“Yes?”
“I am pretending to be Leo right now so……..treat me like Leo until he comes back…….”
“I understand. Go to sleep, Leo-sama. Please leave the rest to me.”
Saying so, Finne gently strokes my head. Every time she does that, my headache gradually goes away.
Now I can sleep with peace of mind.
While thinking that my place is surely here as well.
1001
SPT Chapter 152
Coffee Appreciation day!! I decided to do it today since I don’t want to edit 5 chapters tomorrow lol.
Additional thanks to one annonymous coffee doner and Puregold. Thank you!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Reminder: Jewel aka Hogyoku is a material that can contain magic power in this world. it acts like a
battery for magic tools and magic weapons.
Important Things
“This is the body strengthening talisman you requested, sir.”
It has been approximately five days since the duel.
Inside my room, Sebas put a sheet of paper on my table.
There is a small but fine quality jewel embedded at its center.
It is quite an old item. For those who have eyes for such a thing, they should find it to be quite
valuable. However, the small jewel at the center has already lost its color.
This kind of talisman is a disposable item. If you use up all the magic power inside the jewel
embedded at the center it will turn into a simple piece of paper.
In the present age, it is unthinkable to expend a jewel like this.
This talisman was made in the ancient era where magic was more developed and Jewel is a common
commodity.
“Sorry for the trouble.”
“It’s nothing, sir. It would simply go to waste if it remained inside His Majesty Gustav’s room after all.
His Majesty was upset that this is not a good use for his precious collection though.”
“It’s fine. I would be troubled if you don’t use up its charge to make it look like I used it in the duel.
Gramps can’t use this anymore in the first place. A tool exists to be used so it should be happy that it
finally has some use right.”
“You should say that to His Majesty Gustav, sir.”
“Spare me from his sermon please.”
1002
While frowning, I reach for the talisman.
However, I failed to grab it.
I clicked my tongue and successfully grasp it this time.
“It seems that you still haven’t regained your lost senses yet, sir.”
“It was a week last time. I wonder how long it will take this time…….”
“That is quite a steep price to pay.”
“Absolutely. I spent money to contain those young nobles’ rampage, exposing our hand when I
pretended to switch places with Leo and now I have to suffer this troublesome aftereffect. He did quite
a number on us, that Duke Horsvath.”
“They also suffer some damage, sir. This time they tried to manipulate a large number of nobles to
own them a favor but it seems they have created many enemies instead.”
“The same goes for us. With many noble houses losing their heirs, we can’t expect a favorable
reception from them anymore. There will be some who will side with Eric when the time comes when
we have to fight him. I can say that eliminating those young nobles here isn’t a mistake but……when a
person dies, a grudge will be born.”
“We have already done what we could, sir. Since it was them that went out of control, there was
nothing we could do. Moreover, there are many nobles who changed their view of Leonard-sama with
this incident. If we look at this result, it’s not like everything is bad isn’t it.”
I nod at Sebas’s words.
That’s right. It wasn’t all bad. But truthfully speaking, it cost us too much effort to crush the opponents
that are obviously inferior to us.
“There’s a mountain of problems waiting for us. Putting aside Leo, Elna will definitely get suspicious
about me. Father is also secretly working on something with the adventurer guild. Since the
information about that was completely shut off, it is highly likely that the big guys at the headquarters
are involved in this.
“This might be related to the VIP that was being escorted by the second imperial knight corp at the hot
spring, sir.”
“Probably. The adventurer guild will only move when the matter concerns monsters. If they want to
make a big move, they will try to move the SS-rank adventurers. There is something suspicious about
this since they didn’t get in touch with Silver whose base is located in the Empire.”
“I get the feeling that this will become quite a hassle, sir.”
“It’s the same as usual right.”
1003
I let out a sigh but Sebas was smiling.
I stare at him to ask what is so funny but, Sebas’s smile did not fade away.
“Are you happy seeing me suffer?”
“I take no joy in that, sir. I simply thought that Arnold-sama has grown, that is all.”
“Grown? Me?”
“Yes, you have always disliked troublesome things, sir. You never think that competing with someone
was worth your while and there were only a few things you hold dear that you want to protect. But
this time, you made up your mind to face the trouble and fought them directly. I thought that you
would say [I shouldn’t have done that] afterward but you never did. You probably realized how
important being near Finne-sama is to you much more than avoiding troubles. I think having more
things that are [important] to you is good, sir.”
The less important things I have, the easier I can move.
It is way easier when you don’t have something you are attached to.
I have lived with such a stance. Even if I was ridiculed, if there is no harm done, I left it alone. It is
troublesome to be prideful and competes with others after all.
This time as well, everything would still be fine even if I just take it lying down. But why didn’t I do
that?
Because I don’t want to leave Finne’s side.
Because I don’t want Finne’s peace to collapse.
“…….having more important things count as a growth?”
“It is. It might have been easier for you to move alone but the more important things you have to
protect, the richer your life becomes, and the better you can grow as a person. I was once like that as
well.”
“You are saying that rather than being called the Death God as an assassin, you are more mature as a
butler of the Dull Prince?”
“Yes, I can say that with confidence. People carry their worries on their shoulders and grow up. That is
why I want Arnold-sama to take an initiative to tackle on these troublesome things from now on.”
“I refuse. Spare me from that life.”
I am not interested in a rich and colorful life.
My life is more suited to being in monotone color.
1004
This will be the only exception that appears in my life.
“Alright, let’s head out. Leo and the others are coming back. Let’s go pick them up so that I can change
places with him inside the carriage.”
“Certainly, sir. Sieg-dono has already informed the other side about the switch, I don’t think that there
will be any problem in that regard.”
“I hope so…..”
While saying so, I stood up.
Since my sense is still jumbled, I can feel the sense of incompatibility even with such a trivial
movement. Still, I have no choice but to endure this.
——————————
“You brought along someone strange again huh.”
When I went to the main gate of the capital, I spotted a certain midget with mean eyes inside Leo and
Elna’s carriage.
Vinfried Torres.
Leo’s genius childhood friend. I know him but we are not so close to calling each other childhood
friends.
Vin folded his arms and turned his ill-meaning eyes toward me.
“You are still the same as usual huh? Vin.”
“It doesn’t seem that you have changed either, Al.”
It’s our reunion after a long time. It would be polite to shake each other’s hands here but that is not
the kind of relationship we have.
The Vin inside my memory is a boring guy who always studies and to him, I am a sloppy guy that
always runs off to play.
However, Vin is a man who the Crown Prince placed his expectations on like a younger brother. He
had traveled to foreign countries to gain experiences to come back to serve the Crown Prince in the
future.
However, he disappeared after the Crown Prince passed away.
“How did you manage to find him?”
“We are childhood friends after all.”
1005
“Your thought was read huh? What about your pride as a strategist?”
“I would have already escaped if I wanted to. I simply tagged along with him since he’s my childhood
friend.”
Vin said such a sore loser thing.
I glance at Elna. No matter how smart Vin is, escaping Elna would be impossible for him.
“So you have a way to escape the grasp of the hero huh?”
“Twisting a baby’s arm would be harder than escaping this washboard.”
“Who’s a washboard !? You damn midget!”
“See, you can just make her lose her composure just like that.”
“I see.”
It is valid to say that his method was effective but I think that he will only be chased down by the
angry Elna though……
If it’s me I would be scared so much that I can’t do it. Well, let’s keep this in mind just in case.
“And Al, I still haven’t agreed to become Leo’s strategist yet.”
“Hee, and you still came back to the capital despite that?”
“I agreed to decide on that once I see what you can do, Al.”
“Me? What do you want to see?”
“How you resolved the conflict with the nobles this time. If you passed my evaluation then I will
become Leo’s strategist.”
Vin self-importantly said so.
This guy still likes looking down on others from above. Despite that, he is a troublesome guy with low
self-esteem. It seems that part about him still hasn’t changed.
Vin’s talent is assured by the fact that the Crown Prince was the one who discovered him.
After all, at the time, the Crown Prince had no problem with human resources. The fact that he had
gone out of his way to recruit and educate Vin despite that means something.
Maybe he simply took a liking to him but at the same time, he must have detected Vin’s talent as well.
The problem would be whether I will be recognized by him or not.
“What would you do if I don’t pass?”
1006
“I will just disappear somewhere again.”
“Is that so. That would be troubling huh.”
“Are you not confident?”
“I did what I could but the result was far from perfect. Well, you can ask Sebas for more details about
that.”
The three who have just arrived back at the capital shouldn’t know the details about the uproar that
happened here.
I can explain it to them myself but Sebas would be able to do it more objectively.
“I heard some stories about it. You pretended to be Leo and dueled with them right?”
“Rumors travel fast huh.”
“It was gossip among the merchants. They say that Marquis Weitling challenged Leo to a duel and he
easily won.”
“That is not wrong. Well, it is a little more complicated than that though.”
“……I also heard about the Emperor Poison Wine too though?”
“That is also true. The situation turned into a mess so I suggested it. Sorry, Leo. everything that
happened will be perceived as your actions this time.”
“I am fine with that. You didn’t do it meaninglessly right?”
“Well, that’s true, but…….”
I glance at Vin for a moment.
I don’t know how Vin will judge that. I don’t know what Vin is expecting of me and I can’t do anything
about it since it is already done.
“I have a lot to say about that but is your body alright after the duel?”
“Can’t say that I am. I used a magic talisman in the duel so my body is tattered right now.”
Elna’s eyebrows instantly raised after she heard that.
It is not uncommon to use a talisman to overload your body. However, the strength that you can gain
by using it is almost fixed.
It is impossible for me to move like Leo even if I use a fairly good talisman. That fact should be obvious
for Elna.
1007
I intend to make them think that I was able to pull it off using an ancient magic talisman but, I don’t
know whether Elna will buy that or not.
She didn’t pursue the topic since she doesn’t feel like investigating it in detail.
That is good for me but there is no doubt that she has her suspicion.
There is a huge difference between announcing something and getting discovered.
I recall the words Sebas once said to me.
Maybe it is almost time for that.
I was swayed inside the carriage while thinking about such a thing.
1008
SPT Chapter 153
Second part of the release
My Strategist (Leo)
“That is all, sir.”
Sebas politely concluded the explanation.
Inside the room are Vin, me, Elna, and Leo.
Elna and Leo had a dark expression on their faces but Vin was calmly jotting down the details from
Sebas’s explanation.
After compiling all the notes he made, Vin nods once.
“No good at all.”
Well, since it’s Vin I was expecting this to happen so I asked him a question without being surprised.
“Can you tell which part of it was no good for my future reference?”
“Your first move was the worst. Choosing to challenge the nobles who want to eliminate you head-on
was a bad move.”
“Then what should I do instead.”
Anyone can dismiss my actions. Only when a person can give suggestions is when that person is able
to stand on the lowest line as a strategist.
Of course, Vin has easily surpassed that line already.
“If it’s me, I would leave the Blau Mowe’s side as I was told.”
“That will make Finne a target for of those nobles though?”
“They can try to approach her. There will be fools who don’t understand the difference between their
status and the imperial family’s, they will only be rude to the Blau Mowe and they will start fighting
among themselves as well. If you can solve the uproar they will cause and prove your worth to the
others, the nobles will have no choice but to shut up.”
“Vin, all I hear is that you planned to use Finne as a decoy though?”
1009
Elna’s eyes sharpened at Vin.
Taking on her sharp gaze, Vin answers her.
“You are not wrong. That was my intention.”
“You are the worst……..Finne is not a tool you know?”
“So it is okay for Al to bear the full brunt of their action? Let me tell you this, the reason why the
matter escalated to this extent was that Al is a member of the imperial family you know? If you use the
Blau Mowe as a decoy from the start and wait for those nobles to destroy themselves, the chaos will be
kept to a minimum.”
“Waiting for them to make a mistake is quite passive of you huh. What would happen if they try to
approach Finne without being rude? You will lose the opportunity to eliminate them and Al will have
to leave Finne’s side you know? Finne’s position will only be shaken that way.”
“It’s fine if Leo is by her side instead. That is enough of a proof that she is in Leo’s faction. You can turn
away the persistent nobles and you could just have Leo announce an engagement with her as well.”
Elna squints her eyes at Vin’s plan.
His plan was a strategist-like course of action that doesn’t consider the feelings of others. It would be
the best plan if we only consider efficiency.
Unlike when we started out, our faction now has grown into a moderate size one. Finn’s popularity
has little merit for us to acquire more collaborators.
If we announce her engagement, we will surely be disliked by the young nobles but Finne’s true
believer will still be on our side.
“…..I have been thinking about this for a long time but, Vin, you really are not popular aren’t you?”
“What good will being popular with women bring me? If you eliminate all unnecessary things and only
consider making the most efficient choice, you would arrive at the same plan. If it’s you…..you would
understand, right? That is what you have always been doing, Al. Why did you not do it this time?”
“Right…..I can’t say that I didn’t think about it. But I immediately dismissed the idea.”
“Your reason being?”
“…….. if the nobles of the white seagull alliance approached Finne all at once, she would surely be
scared. Certainly, there is no guarantee that it would happen but the possibility still exists. If we
jeopardize Finne’s well-being, Duke Kleinert will not stay still. After all, he had entrusted her to us.
That’s why I did not use that plan.”
If we ignore Finne’s well-being, Duke Kleinert will not be silent. He will probably try to take Finne
back with him even by force.
1010
If that happens, it will be a big blow to our faction.
“Well, that is just half of the reason though.”
“What is the other half?”
“Why do I have to listen to the request of some nobles that don’t even guarantee that they will join our
side? Their offered price for me to let go of my [current daily life] was too cheap. That’s why I chose to
oppose them.”
I am sure that I would regret it.
I wouldn’t be able to forgive myself if I leave Finne alone as a decoy for the men that will surely flock
to her.
There is no place for feelings in the succession war. You need a complete cool-headedness.
However, there are some points that I am not willing to compromise.
“Vin…..I and Leo are different from the other candidates. We are certainly determined to win this
succession war. But…..we do not see the value of a throne that we have to throw away something that
we can afford to protect to acquire.”
“That’s right. Since we are fighting to protect what is important to us, it would be our failure if we
have to throw that away.”
“Well…..I do think that it was my failure that I had to make sacrifices. Their foolishness went beyond
my expectations. I never thought that he would actually challenge me to a duel in front of Father. I
thought that if he would challenge me to a duel, he would do it after the agreement is over. That was
why I was being provocative toward him. If he challenges me after the agreement is completed, I could
do whatever I want with him after all. It backfired because of my mistake.”
Vin sullenly listens to me and Leo while resting his cheek on his hand.
It’s a habit he often does while thinking. Ever since he was a kid, Vin leaves the impression that he is a
scary guy because of this bad habit and scary eyes.
Well, he is definitely a scary guy but he is also an intelligent man.
“What a wishy-washy bunch.”
Vin who was silent for a while finally muttered so.
Hearing that, Elna stands up and points at Vin as though she can’t endure it anymore.
“You have only been complaining for a while now! Just who do you think you are!?”
“A strategist I guess.”
1011
“You haven’t agreed to be one yet right!?”
“I just decided to.”
“Haa? You complained about everything and now you are saying that you agree to become our
strategist? Just how convenient a person you can be?”
Elna glares at Vin while saying that with a cold voice.
How scary. A weak-minded person would be fainting already.
However, her opponent this time is Vin. That kind of threat won’t work with him.
“His Highness Eric’s faction is powerful and His Highness Eric himself is also capable. Going up against
him, these two naive princes don’t stand a chance. They might be if I help them though.”
“So self importantly……you said it yourself first right! That you will decide after you see what Al can
do! If you have so much complaint about what Al did, you shouldn’t be agreeing to this now right!?“
“Just listen to the end. You small breast Hero. Don’t just feed your chest the nutrition, feed some to
your brain too.”
“…..so you want to die huh?”
Elna smiled thinly and tried to pull out her sword. Maybe she really is angry huh.
While calming her down, Leo asks Vin a question.
“Alright alright…….Vin. I am curious too. How did Nii-san pass your test?”
“…..his final plan. The situation was completely out of Al’s hand when Her Majesty came out. However,
even with the support from his mother, he still managed to regain the initiative and found a good
compromise. That is something that I can’t do. Even the Prime Minister was at a loss too after all.”
“That is something you lack?”
“That’s right. When the opponent surpasses my expectations, I am no good at improvising and
regaining control. In this case, the opponent was stupider than I imagined. Because of that idiot, Her
Majesty the Empress had to get involved as well. I can know just by hearing the details that the
situation back then was a complete mess. It was Al’s skill that created a situation where all sides could
be convinced. After all, if both sides continue to conflict, the victim would not only be limited to the
nobles there.”
Vin’s analysis is accurate.
If the Empress was persistent, at worst, Father might forcefully execute those nobles.
There was a possibility that the damage from that would spread like fire.
1012
Of course, it might spread to us as well.
When I accepted the duel, I told him that I would accept the responsibility as Leo but if I did nothing
back then, I might have that responsibility forcefully placed on me.
In that sense, it could be said that my proposal back then was masterfully done. It feels weird saying
so myself though.
“I see. Nii-san is quick-witted after all.”
“That certainly was a wise choice. But Al, you should stop impersonating Leo from now on.”
“I know. It should be better if I don’t do it anymore.”
“Because you might get found out?”
“That is one reason but if they switch places too much, suspicion will be born. Suspicion can diminish
trust and loyalty. Still, when you did it, you intentionally planted the impression that you are
incompetent while Leo is a prince that can do anything right?”
“It is easier to move when people look down on you, you see.”
“Well, I don’t mind if you want to continue that stance. But there is no need to push yourself down
while raising Leo’s reputation anymore. I will do that job in your place.”
Saying so, Vin stands up.
He looks at me and Leo then speaks to us in a small voice.
“This knee…..it won’t be cheap.”
“Of course. I know that well.”
“Is that so……can you promise me that you will become like Prince Wilhelm someday? Working under
that person has been my wish.”
“I am lacking but I swear that I will make an effort.”
Hearing that, Vin quietly kneels.
Then.
“I, Vinfried Torres, swear that I will serve His Highness Leonard. From now one, as your strategist I
will bet my everything. I shall support your royal path with my wisdom.”
“Un, I will be counting on you, my strategist, Vin.”
Thus, Leo obtained his long-awaited strategist.
1013
TLN: Vinfried Torres, King of Sick Burn
1014
SPT Chapter 154
And that’s it for this week folk, see you next wednesday.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Secret Plan
With Vin serving under Leo, I have a lot of time to focus on other things.
Quickly after he became Leo’s strategist, he spread the rumor that it was he who directed everything
from behind the scene of the previous turmoil.
Manipulating the information that Leo has recruited a strategist and that he can compensate Leo’s
weakness was the answer those two arrived at.
Now, Vin has taken charge of Leo’s reputation adjustment that I was originally responsible for.
In my case, I raised Leo’s reputation by lowering my own but Vin doesn’t have to resort to such
methods. It could be said that he is well-qualified for the job.
Thus, I use the free time I gained to look into the adventurer guild.
Well, it was Sebas who did that for me though.
After I learned that the person who has the information I am looking for is currently inside the capital,
I transferred to his place as Silver.
“OOHH!? Don’t just appear like that…..you almost gave me a heart attack.”
That person was graciously sipping his tea but he did not even spill his tea and naturally reached for
his sword.
However, when he realized that it was me, he tiredly sighs.
The one who should be sighing here is me.
“If you don’t want me to suddenly appear like this then don’t sneak behind my back.”
“As fast as always huh. It was supposed to be a secret that the Empire is working together with the
guild you know?”
“The Imperial Capital is my backyard.”
I said so that to Clyde Schauer, the deputy guild chief of the adventurer guild headquarters.
1015
This charming middle-aged guy with black hair and blue eyes is a member of the upper echelon of the
guild and once was an S-rank adventurer.
It’s not normal for such a big shot to secretly enter the imperial capital like this and it is even stranger
that the news of his arrival never reached Silver’s ears.
“Now…..talk to me.”
“You already know most of the details, right? You wouldn’t pay me a visit if you are not after all.”
“Just talk.”
Clyde shrugs at my persistence and stands up while sipping his tea.
He then heads to the corner of the room.
There, a map of the continent is being displayed.
“You know that the 25th anniversary of the Emperor’s coronation is coming up right?”
“Yeah, I know that they are inviting various guests from other countries.”
“Then this will be fast. For the guests to safely arrive here, they would require a safe route, you get it
right.”
Saying so, Clyde traces the line of the Empire’s border with his sheathed sword.
Since the Empire is located at the center of the continent, its border is wide.
Of course, the imperial army is there to maintain a strong line of defense but they are specialized in
interpersonal combat. Dealing with monsters is not their specialty.
“So the guild is intending to help the Empire defeat the monsters near the border?”
“The adventurer guild is a neutral organization. We normally don’t move preferentially for a national
event like this……but it is also true that the environment where we can defeat monsters with the full
support of the Empire is attractive.”
“That’s why they kept it a secret?”
“That’s one of the reasons. But that is not all. Do you still remember the vampire incident you
intervened in the east?”
“Of course. It’s the case that the vampire siblings went on a rampage right.”
“Correct. The problem here is the flute they used, Hameln. This is a top-secret but the headquarters is
the one who is taking care of it right now.”
“As I thought, they wouldn’t leave such a thing with the Empire huh.”
1016
A magic flute that can call monsters.
It was used by that vampire sibling but that vampire sibling had a connection with an imperial prince.
A person with a good head on their shoulder would never entrust such a wicked item with the Empire.
It is the right decision.
“I discovered this while researching about it in old literature but……it seems that not only the Hameln
can attract monsters, it can activate them as well.”
“Activate them?”
“It can activate the dormant monsters. Dormant monsters are sensitive to external changes. With the
activations of a large number of monsters in the east, the monsters around the Empire are entering
their active periods”
“I have received no such information though?”
As creatures, monsters are not efficient.
Like the dragons, there are quite a few monsters that use dormancy to maintain their huge body.
Those monsters are mostly powerful.
It is strange that when those powerful monsters are starting to move, the only SS-rank adventurer in
the Empire, namely me, was not notified.
“The headquarters intentionally blocked that information from reaching the adventurers of the
Empire.”
“……what are they planning?”
“Don’t make such a scary voice. There are a lot of people that don’t like giving only the SS-rank
adventurer time to shine. The quality of the adventurer of the empire is not that high. If high-rank
monsters appear, you will definitely be the one to move. That is what they want to avoid.”
“A factional dispute at the headquarters huh…..pointless.”
“Don’t say that. It’s natural for an organization to want to avoid having only one individual to stand
out. If you kill everything here yourself, we might have to create the SSS-rank just for you, you know.”
“Not interested.”
“I know. I did explain that to them but the guys upstairs hate the idea that if they give too much power
to Silver you will be harder to control. That being said, all the SS-rank adventurers are problem
children right. It’s understandable that they don’t want to make a guy that is relatively amicable like
you harder to control.”
Clyde said as he smiles as though he finds it funny.
1017
This is no laughing matter for me at all though.
It’s a pain that I am being linked with the reputation of being difficult because of the other problem
children. It is also annoying that they would think that I will become arrogant if I gain more
achievement.
Above all.
“The adventurers are there to protect the people. Doesn’t it go against the Guild’s ideal to not use me
to solve the problems as quickly as possible?”
“You are absolutely right. That is really harsh to hear. Well, it’s not that they refuse to do anything
though. Instead of relying on you, they are dispatching S-rank adventurers to form parties and have
them enter the Empire. The headquarters is hoping for another SS-rank adventurer to emerge from
them, you see.”
“I don’t mind if they are enough to do the job but, from your perspective, do you think that they can?”
“It would be difficult for them. That’s why we are borrowing the power of the Empire. Fortunately, the
Empire has that Brave house you see.”
“So they are going to utilize that Female Hero huh…..Well, there should be no problem in terms of
ability but will there be any monster that will require her strength?”
“There is at least one for sure. We used a certain method to limit its activities until now but…….that
person shouldn’t be able to seal it much longer.”
Saying so, Clyde walked back to his chair and started brewing new tea.
He is implying that there is nothing left to share.
“You can’t include me in this at all?”
“I would do it if I can. To not issue any quest for you. That was the condition for the Empire and the
adventurer guild to cooperate this time.”
“I see….then, last question. That monster that requires the use of Hero’s holy sword. Who is the one
keeping it at bay?”
Monsters that require Elna are only those of S-rank or higher.
It should be very difficult to limit its movement. Even if I were to shut it down in a barrier, it would
take a great deal of effort and I should only be able to contain it for a day.
Clyde is making a difficult expression at my question.
He is probably hesitating if he should answer me or not huh.
“If you won’t say it then I don’t mind looking into it myself though?”
1018
“Alright alright. Don’t go off on your own, would you. If you do it they will get angry at me again.”
Saying so, Clyde sips his tea and lets out a huge sigh.
He then surprisingly said the name of a country.
“The nation on the far east peninsula. The small nation that is being protected by a barrier that even
the Sokol empire couldn’t touch, that Black Country. Have you ever heard of the country where
humans and beastmen live in harmony, the Celestial Country of Mizuho?”
“Of course, there should be a lot of people in this country that know about it.”
“I guess so. The Sixth Consort hailed from that country after all. With that said, you are aware that that
country also has something like a Brave house of their own right?”
“Yeah….the namesake of the country. The house that has been protecting that country using their
barrier, the country’s guardian, the Celestial House. There is rarely a boy born from that house so they
mostly only have princesses. That is why their house is only inherited by women and the women of
that house are being worshipped as the [Celestial Princess].”
“That’s right. This time the Empire and the adventurer guild asked for cooperation with the Celestial
Princess. After all, if the Empire fell into chaos, Sokol might try to invade them using all of their
military might. That’s why we already got a positive reply from them.”
“In other words….there is both the Hero and the Celestial Princess in this country now?”
“That is right.”
Clyde replied as though it was a matter of fact but this will prove to be a headache for the Empire.
The Celestial Princess is comparable to the Hero.
If the Hero is the strongest offense, the Celestial Princess is the strongest shield.
People will surely start making such an extravagant comparison.
The problem is that the person who is sensitive to such stories and absolutely hates losing is now the
holder of the holy sword.
It would be great if she doesn’t cause any problem……
With that in mind, I left the place.
1019
SPT Chapter 155
Patron shoutout!! Thank you Omar Cruz for becoming my new Patron
Now, let’s Chuppii
-Mr.Graverobber
Hood Girl
That day.
I went to the town to clear up my pent up fatigue.
Since Vin has shown a great level of his ability to adjust Leo’s reputation, I don’t have many things to
do when the succession war is on hold.
With the latest incident. The nobles saw that Leo now has a strategist with him and that the faction is
currently in a good shape so they are approaching him to join the faction.
With the help of their fear of being purged since they were being opportunistic and only observed Leo
from the distance at first, the number of a considerable number of nobles is approaching him but Vin
is doing a good job at handling them.
Since we have a truce going on right now, it would be quite dangerous if this is viewed as a move to
expand our faction but there shouldn’t be any problem if it is only on the level of greeting. Using that
kind of reasoning, Leo is gradually planning more and more of such greetings with the nobles.
They are being quite thorough to win the succession war. When I saw them like that, I thought that I
should head out to enjoy myself a little bit.
Well, that was my original plan…….
“Seems like I have an unexpected fortune today huh.”
“Chuppii!!”
I said so as I grabbed the black penguin with both of my hands.
I never thought that I would find it walking around inside the city. You are out of luck when you
foolishly walk around like that, penguin.
“Now, I wonder if penguins are delicious?”
“Chuppii!!??”
1020
Perhaps it has judged that its life is now under threat, it tries to shake its slightly fat body out of my
grasp but with only that much strength, it can’t escape my hands.
Let’s take it to a restaurant and have the chef cook this thing for me.
Some people may think that I am being cruel but I almost got killed by a Hero because of this thing.
What I experienced was much more cruel. In a sense, this guy attempted to have me killed. With that
crime, I can safely categorize this thing as a monster.
With that in mind, I start thinking about which restaurant I should bring it to.
It would be a restaurant that wouldn’t reject my request and can cook this thing into something
delicious. Well, this thing is a penguin after all.
“Hmm, as I thought, bringing it back to the castle would be best huh?”
The chef at the castle should be able to fit all of my criteria.
While I was thinking so.
“AHHHH!! What are you doing to my Enta!!?”
I heard a loud voice from behind.
When I turned around, there was a small girl whose head was entirely covered by a black hood.
She looked very self-important by making such a daunting pose and pointing at me like that.
“Well, I am thinking about where to cook this thing?”
“WHaTt!? You are trying to eat such a cute and lovely animal!?”
“Cute……?”
Hearing that word from the girl, I take a look at the penguin in my hands.
“Chu, Chuppii…….”
It does look like a pet animal but my hungry belly cut down its cuteness factor in half. It is not that
cute in the first place.
No matter how much I have to back down on that comment, I can’t say that this thing is cute.
“I don’t think that it is cute at all though?”
“What!? You don’t understand his cuteness!? Umu, maybe the people of the Empire really have
problems with their aesthetic sense huh?”
Suddenly denying the whole Empire’s sense like that, this child is quite unreasonable huh.
1021
Just how self-important is she.
Well, I don’t hate her honesty though.
Still, releasing this penguin or not is an entirely different matter.
“Everyone has their own aesthetic senses after all. By the way, this thing is yours?”
“Don’t treat it like a thing! Enta is my friend!”
“Chuppii!”
The girl unexpectedly screamed so and the penguin raised its voice in response.
However, that doesn’t matter to me.
“Is that so, it seems you chose a wrong friend to have huh.”
“AAHH!? HEY! DON’T JUST TAKE ENTA AWAY!”
“CHUPPII!”
“SHUT UP! I ALMOST GOT KILLED BECAUSE OF THIS GUY YOU KNOW!? I WON’T BE SATISFIED
UNLESS I WHOLE ROAST THIS THING!”
“Almost got killed……? For Enta to almost kill you, you must be really weak huh.”
The little girl is making fun of me.
Irritated, I silently tried to take the penguin away but the little girl grabbed my arm and held me back.
“Don’t take him away! This is an abduction!”
“This is just a monster subjugation.”
“Monster!? What an insult! Enta is a swallow!”
1022
……….
“…..Nn?”
“Mm?”
I involuntarily paused at the girl’s word.
In response, the girl also stopped moving.
The silence continued for a while and I finally muttered a word.
“Swallow…..?”
“What? Didn’t you notice? No matter how you look at Enta, he’s a swallow right?”
“Nope, no, no, no, it’s a penguin no matter how you look at it right?”
“No! Enta is a swallow!”
“NO MATTER WHICH ANGLE I LOOK AT IT FROM IT’S STILL A PENGUIN ISN’T IT!? Do you think that
this guy can fly!?”
1023
……
“ENTA IS JUST TOO FAT TO FLY RIGHT NOW! HE USED TO BE SLIM!”
“DON’T BE ABSURD!?”
It doesn’t matter whether it is slim or fat.
A swallow doesn’t walk like a penguin. At least the swallows I know don’t behave like this.
However, the girl won’t acknowledge that.
“EIIII! He’s a swallow because I said he’s a swallow! I know best about him!”
“Chuppii!”
“Haa….really. Well, whatever.”
“OOH! You finally understand huh!”
“Yeah, I got it. Since it would be a disgrace for a swallow to not be able to fly, it would be better for it to
become my meal.”
“WHAATTT!?”
Astonished, the girl unintentionally releases my arm.
Using that chance, I tried to dash to the castle but when I ran ahead a little bit, I crashed into an
invisible wall.
A barrier. Moreover, it was both strong and very fast.
1024
If someone set it up in advance I would have noticed it.
“Oww! My nose…..”
“Hahahh! Divine punishment befall the sinner! I will take Enta back now!”
“Chuppii!!”
The penguin escaped my arms and ran toward the girl who picked it up and hugged it.
No, if I let it escape here, the disaster I suffered last time will repeat again.
If it does something like that again I won’t be able to escape with my life. If I can’t eat that penguin
then I will have to catch it here.
“Hmpm….Fine. Let’s make a deal.”
“A deal you say?”
“…..I will give you a cuter pet than that guy. He can talk and he is a very strong bear.”
Well, that’s not a real bear but at least he looks the part so there shouldn’t be a problem.
If I just give him to her then run away then it won’t be my problem anymore.
“A, A talking bear!? Such wonder! Is, is he cute!?”
“He’s popular among children.”
“Really!? N, No no! My love for Enta won’t be shaken by this!”
“Oh, yeah. Well, I can give him to another kid I guess.”
“Ahh…if, if you put it like that then I don’t mind switching for a day! But you can’t eat him alright!”
For some reason, the girl still says that like she still has a higher position.
I sighed and approached the girl.
I reached out for the penguin as the negotiation was concluded.
However,
“Ouch!? This damn penguin, you bit me!?”
“CHUPPII!!”
“E, Enta….if you don’t like it that much then……forgive me, I didn’t know what I was thinking. That’s
how it is, just give up!”
1025
Saying so, the girl ran away with Enta in her hands.
However, after she ran a certain distance away, she turned this way and shouted back as if she just
remembered something.
“That’s right! I know your face now! You fiend who tried to eat my friend! I will return this debt by ten
folds! Remember that!”
The girl said so with the same self-important attitude as when she first appeared.
On the other hand, I shook my bitten hand and shouted in return.
“Want to declare war with me, FINE. But do you know where I live?”
“Mu? That’s right. Give me your name! I will definitely pay you a visit!”
Does she think that there would be a stupid enough guy to give you his name after you declared war
on him?
Well, she does mistake a penguin for a swallow so she must be lacking in that department.
Her personality fits the word innocence after all.
“I don’t have a name to give to you, I will just tell you where I live.”
“Hou? Quite brave of you to tell that to me honestly! This must be due to the good deeds I do every
day!”
“What does it have to do with what you do everyday……Fine, whatever. The place I live in is there.”
Saying so, I pointed at the castle that could be seen a distance away.
The girl looked at it and backed away a little in surprise.
“Come at me if you can.”
“I accepted your challenge! Don’t regret it now, okay!”
Saying so, the girl ran away.
Seeing her off, I muttered while letting out a sigh.
“Find out where she lives. That is most certainly the Celestial Princess. It will be a lot convenient for us
if we get involved with her.”
“Certainly.”
I gave Sebas my instructions and slowly walk back to the castle.
She certainly has some weird quirks but she is also convenient to have around.
1026
However,
“I have to make sure Elna doesn’t spot her huh.”
Carving that into my mind, I returned to the castle.
1027
SPT Chapter 156
Let’s continue with the Chuppii. BTW anyone has some easy to cook recipe with air fryer? I just got
one and don’t know what to do with it beside chicken nugget and french fries.
-Mr.Graveroober
The Bully Prince
“My deepest apology. I lost sight of her.”
“Is that so…..”
Receiving that report from Sebas, I was a little dejected inside.
I honestly can’t believe that there is someone who can elude Sebas.
There must have been something that made him abandon his pursuit.
“You can’t get close to her barrier?”
“No, I was following her normally until halfway but after a while, I lost my sense of direction and the
surroundings became like a maze for me. I thought that it would be bad to pursue her any more than
that so I decided to withdraw, sir.”
“You made the right decision. It would be bad if you get lost inside a labyrinth. If you keep pursuing
her, you will just play into her hands.”
“It was all due to my lack of ability. However,…..the Celestial Princess might be more powerful than
the rumor said, sir. It has been a long time since I am at wit’s end like this.”
Sebas bowed and said so.
It is really rare for Sebas to declare his complete defeat and praise his opponent like this. After all,
Sebas has been able to manage all of his opponents whether weak or strong.
“As expected of the strongest shield huh. It doesn’t seem that she got that reputation from only the
strongest barrier. She is versatile for all kinds of defenses. Their capability is really comparable to the
Brave house.”
“Yes. She will certainly be hard to handle but…..now it is confirmed, sir.”
“Yeah. that is unmistakable the Celestial Princess.”
Now her identity is confirmed.
1028
If that penguin is that girl’s pet, it would make sense that she was the VIP the second imperial knight
corp was protecting at the hot spring.
“But it seems that Father has been busy behind the scenes. Involving the adventurer guild, summoning
the Celestial Princess from the Far East, he sure did a lot of things this time.”
“As expected of His Majesty, sir.”
“That being said, if he would call Silver, it would all be easier.”
If he would rely on Silver without doing those extra things, it wouldn’t become so troublesome.
Well, the main culprit this time is probably the adventurer guild, they must have included the term
that they will not use Silver for this cooperative relationship.
No matter how powerful the Empire is, the adventurer guild is the one specialized in dealing with
monsters. Unless you are with the guild, you won’t be able to notice that the monsters are entering
their active period because of Hameln so quickly.
“There must have been a lot going on at the guild headquarters as well.”
“I can understand that they might think that if they rely on Silver too much, they will lose their chance
to cultivate more skilled adventurers. I am sure that there are some that are moving behind the scenes
because of that.”
“Maybe you worry about it too much, sir? Even if someone is working behind this, this development
also benefits us. If Elna and the other S-rank adventurers are able to do the job as the guild and the
Empire planned, it will save us power and if they fail, it will be up to Silver to clean up after them.”
That’s right.
The Empire’s aim is to secure safe routes for the anniversary festival while the guild aims to subdue
the monsters that are entering their active period and searching for a new SS-rank adventurer. If the
S-rank they gathered this time failed to fulfill their job, Silver will still be there to finish it.
If the damage spreads, the blame will fall to the upper management of the guild who did not use their
available personnel from the start.
Maybe that is what Clyde is aiming for.
But things that can go wrong will go wrong.
“There are only very few who dislike Silver’s current standing. The S-ranker who loses their chance to
get promoted might be a little displeased with me but the number of the SS-rank adventurer’s seat is
not limited. There is no reason for them to hold that much animosity against me. Rather than the
people at a lower position than myself, those at the same and higher position than me are more likely
to be behind this.”
1029
“Clyde-dono told us that the upper management of the guild is afraid that Silver will become more
difficult to handle but it seems that this is likely to be the work of someone of the same standing as
you, sir.”
“….the problem children might be the one who prompted the upper management to work huh. They
are afraid that I might get promoted to the SSS-rank if I defeat the S-rank monster in quick succession.
I guess the SS-rankers won’t find that funny.
How foolish.
However, it is exactly because they are SS-rank that they care about such a foolish thing huh.
“It would be troublesome if they are involved….each and every one of them is ruffians after all.”
“You said it like you are any different, sir.”
“What are you talking about, I am [the only] decent person among them right.”
“Unfortunately, the other four might be sharing that thought, sir.”
“Quite a big misunderstanding on their part huh.”
Social outcasts like them are decent? They should get their brains checked.
As I laugh at that thought, Sebas let out a sigh for some reason.
The Next Day.
I was suddenly called by my mother.
For some reason, she told me to visit her alone.
While wondering what is this all about, I went to visit my mother at the inner palace alone like I was
told.
“Excuse me.”
Saying so, I opened the door to my mother’s room and entered it as usual.
However, there is something different than usual inside.
“Gah!?”
For some reason, there was a rope stretched just in front of the door.
My motor skill doesn’t allow me to avoid that so I got caught by it and fell.
And like yesterday, my nose got smack again.
1030
Then I heard a familiar voice.
“Alright! Good job! Enta!”
“Chuppii!!”
On the right side of the rope, I can see Enta and the girl from yesterday holding the rope. She is still
wearing her hood from yesterday.
As I held my nose and stared at her, the girl started speaking with a self-important attitude.
“HaHaa! How’s that! You see that!”
“Chuppii!”
Similar to its owner, the penguin also looks at me with a smug face.
Of course, that is irritating for me so I grab the penguin and hold it out the window.
“WAAAA!!?? WHAT ARE YOU DOING!?”
“Don’t worry. It’s a swallow so it should be able to fly if its life is in danger.”
“Chu, Chuppii!?”
“S, Stop that!! Stop that barbarous act this instant! Enta is a swallow that can’t fly!”
“I’m helping it remember how to fly right now! Release me!”
When I tried to throw Enta out the window, the girl desperately grabbed my arm and stopped me.
I managed to shake off the girl somehow but when I was about to throw Enta out the window, the girl
clung to me again.
“STOPP! RELEASE ENTA!!”
“SHUT UP! I WILL SHOW YOU RIGHT NOW THAT THIS GUY IS A PENGUIN!! JUST WATCH!”
“CHUPPII!!??”
“ENTA IS A SWALLOW! HE JUST CAN’T FLY!”
“LIKE HELL A SWALLOW THAT CAN NOT FLY IS A SWALLOW!”
“STOPPPPP!! HAVE YOU NO AFFECTION FOR ANIMALS!?”
“LIKE HELL I CAN LOVE SUCH AN ILL-NATURED ANIMAL!”
After going back and forth for a while, we got tired and had a rough breath as we stared at each other.
1031
A complete stalemate.
In that chaos, the owner of the room finally opened her mouth.
“I finished preparing the tea.”
“OOH! You have my thanks, Mitsuba. But I have to get my friend back from this bullish son of yours
first. I will have tea later. Oh, can I trouble you for some sweet too!”
“Understood. Al, don’t bully Her Grace too much, okay.”
“I am not bullying her, Mother. This is simply a punishment.”
“That’s even worse! You, I won’t forgive you!”
Saying so, she hid herself behind my mother before I could make a counterattack.
“Hahahh! How’s that! Admit your defeat yet!?”
“Why should I do that?”
“It doesn’t seem like you understand yet huh. I shall explain! I am the beautiful princess of the Far East
country Mizuho, the Celestial Princess, Orihime Kuon!!”
Saying so, the girl took down her hood and revealed her face.
She has long black hair and golden eyes. Her beauty is like that of a doll but I am sure that no puppet
craftsman can make a doll like her.
That is how cheerful she is.
Her confident smile shows that she is truly innocent.
There was a small black fox ear on her head. Looking at her closely, I can see a black tail behind her as
well.
The Celestial Princess’s clan is a clan of beastman called the [Celestial Fox Clan]. In exchange for
physical power, they have exceptionally high magic power among the clans of beastmen that normally
have great physical ability. Using that power, they established themselves as the super prestigious
clan that used their power to protect their country.
That being the case, they are the same as the Brave house. In foreign countries, their treatment is the
same as that of a royal family.
She probably thought that I would be surprised if she revealed that she is in fact the Celestial Princess.
Orihime is fidgety awaiting my reaction. However, the reply that I give her is an indifferent one.
“Yeah, I know.”
1032
“N? Eh….? That’s strange…..I am the Celestial Princess!”
“I already know that.”
“…..W, when did you find out!?”
“Yesterday, when you used the barrier.”
“Wh, What!? I see…..so you knew huh……”
Orihime drops her shoulders and sits down on a chair with her ears hanging down.
My mother serves such Orihime tea with practiced skill.
“I thought that I could surprise him……MITSUBA! THIS IS NOT FUNNY YOU KNOW!”
“This child is always like this after all.”
“Even if you say that…..if you are a royalty, you should at least act a little surprise you know…….read
the mood. Isn’t that what you call manners?”
“I have no recollection of there being such a manner.”
Saying so, I sit in a chair and get tea from my mother.
Playing with her so much, I can’t help but get thirsty.
Seriously, can’t this Celestial Princess at least be a little more prim and proper.
Thinking so, I realized that the young lady from the Brave house is also the same so I gave up on
complaining about that. It would be useless anyway.
“Al, I will introduce her again. This is the Celestial Princess of Mizuho, my hometown, Orihime Kuon.”
“Umu! I am a very great person from your mother’s hometown you know! Do you understand what
that means now?”
“I absolutely have no idea.”
“It means that I am greater than you! I am the Celestial Princess after all!”
“……….”
I was wondering how I should reply but when I look at my mother, it doesn’t seem like she cares
about it at all. Replying to her using common sense wouldn’t work huh.
Now I’m convinced. This girl is probably like a frog in a well. To put it frankly it would be that she is
self-absorbed.
1033
“Your Grace. This is my eldest son, Arnold. There is no doubt that the person you were looking for is
Al, right, Your Grace?”
“Umu! No doubt about it!”
“Allow me a question, what did he say to you?”
“A mean guy with black hair told me that he lives in the castle. I thought that if it’s a mean person with
black hair, you would know about him so I called you.”
“Outrageous…..”
“Isn’t that exactly a bully! Being mean to Enta and me! This wicked prince! You remember when I told
you that I will get you back right!? WAAA!? My sleeve!!”
Orihime knocks the tea she was drinking on the table as she points at me.
The impact from that spill the tea and wets her sleeve.
She exaggeratedly screamed and after Mother wiped it for her, she got her act together and pointed at
me again.
“—-I shall exact my revenge!”
“Hou? What are you going to do then?”
“Hear me and be surprised! You can rejoice! Arnold! You are now appointed as my Entertainer.”
It is certainly a big statement but I am not surprised.
After all, I expected her to say that much
But, an Entertainer huh……
“My imperial family should be of higher standing than yours though.”
“I am the guest! It is only natural for the host to entertain me! You can do your best to entertain me
now!”
Orihime said as her tail is wagging around.
1034
SPT Chapter 157
Chuppii is getting sleepy, Chuppii needs sleep.
Thanks for the air fryer dishes btw.
-Mr.Graverobber
Loneliness
“Alright! It’s time for you to entertain me!”
Saying so, Orihime sat down on the sofa, twitch her ears, and fluttered her legs.
Currently, I and Orihime are in the annex outside the inner palace. This place is currently her to use
and it is being guarded by the second imperial knight corp.
That being said, she just moved here today. It seems that she has been staying in another place until
yesterday.
The reason she was moved here seems to be because she escaped the eyes of the imperial knights who
were guarding her and went on a walk with Enta yesterday. Well, that is their expected reaction.
Orihime is our nation’s guest but she is not a foreign delegate. If her identity is revealed, it will cause a
lot of confusion. It doesn’t matter to me since I already know that a Celestial Princess is in our country
but for everyone else, it will probably be chaos.
“I still haven’t decided that I would be your entertainer yet though?”
“That is what I wish for. Isn’t that enough?”
“Unfortunately, this is the Empire.”
That might be enough of a reason for her in her country but here she will have to respect the will of
the Emperor.
I just follow the mood and follow her here but the captain of the second imperial knight corp is
already heading to see the Prime Minister. I told them to inform him of the situation.
As expected, we can’t just contact Father over this. I’m sure the Prime Minister will come over once he
hears about the situation.
Until then, I am not her entertainer.
“I see……so boring.”
1035
Saying so, Orihime dropped her shoulders looking dejected. Her ears also drooped down to match
that.
Such an easy to understand person.
“It seems Arnold doesn’t want to entertain us, Enta.”
“Chuppii…….”
Enta curls itself on Orihime knees and slowly closes its eyes.
It seems to have become sleepy. Seeing that, Orihime slowly strokes him and put him to sleep.
After a while, Enta rolled up on Orihime’s knees and quietly slept.
“Such a carefree penguin isn’t he.”
“He’s a swallow. Don’t make me repeat myself…..”
Responding so, Orihime let out a small yawn and closed her eyes. It seems that she is getting sleepy as
well.
She tried to open her eyes a few times but soon she couldn’t keep her eyelids up.
Then.
“Umu…Arnold. Come here.”
“What? You want to chat?”
“Something like that.”
Orihime taps the place next to her to invite me to sit down.
If she wants to sleep then there is no problem with that but it seems she doesn’t want to be treated
like that huh.
I sat down next to Orihime as I thought that I could at least keep her company.
Now, what should we talk about.
I thought so but something fell on my leg.
“…….Oi.”
“Umu, not a bad place to sleep. You pass the passing mark as my pillow.”
Orihime lay down on the sofa and used my knees as her pillow.
This girl, doing whatever she wants again. For the record, I am still a prince alright.
1036
“Listen you…..don’t you know anything about diplomacy etiquette?”
“I know how important etiquette is. But I am an unofficial guest. No matter how I behave, there’s no
problem. Fumu, it’s your fault for foolishly approaching me, well, it’s not so bad at all.”
Orihime was shuffling herself to find a good position but once she settled with the face-up position,
she smiled happily at me.
It really felt like I am caring for a dog or cat here but the things that come out of her mouth are still
irritating.
Certainly, since Orihime is here unofficially, there won’t be any problem no matter how she behaves.
Her visit is unofficial after all.
Of course, it would be a different matter if she behaves rudely toward the Emperor but if it’s me there
shouldn’t be that much of an impact. After all, it was the Empire that asked for her presence here.
The Prime Minister will probably allow me to act as her entertainer as well. After all, spoiling
Orihime’s mood here is out of the question.
The plan will proceed normally through the Empire cooperation with the adventurer guild but the
monsters’ movement is difficult to predict.
In case of an emergency, we can rely on Orihime’s barrier. No one is more reliable than her in that
regard.
“Haa….do you often do this in your country?”
“No way. There’s no one in Mizuho who would act so carefreely toward me. The people close to me are
one thing but they can’t act all friendly toward me either. I am the Celestial Princess after all.”
Saying so, Orihime’s expression turned lonely.
She then gazes at Enta whose round body lies on top of her.
“The only one I can call my friend is Enta. The Celestial Princess is a special existence in Mizuho…..the
relationship I have in my country is different from the Empire and the Brave house. For the Empire,
the Brave house is the trump card, not someone that you need to rely on. But Mizuho is different.
Against the mighty Sokol Empire, Mizuho is but a small country. The Celestial Princess’s barrier is
essential to defend against their invasion. Mizuho needs to rely on the Celestial Princess to stand on
its feet.”
“Then why is such an important Celestial Princess came to the Empire? I think that the risk is too high
for your country though?”
“If something happens to me, another member of the Celestial Fox Clan will inherit the title. Without
exception, all of us in the Celestial Fox Clan are powerful barrier users. The country affords to dispatch
me because they have insurance. However, this time coming here is what I personally wished for.”
1037
“You wanted to come here?”
“I wanted to see the outside world. I wanted to meet people from different countries. This is a unique
chance. I wanted to see the imperial capital I heard from the rumor. Well…..I don’t have a chance to
really see it though.”
So that’s why she went out by herself huh.
But that time she got separated with Enta and she had to spend time looking for him.
She may be an idiot but she is still pitiful.
Even though she is not alone, she is still lonely.
“…..are you lonely?”
That word came out of my mouth.
Hearing that, Orihime looks slightly surprised and then answers with a shy smile.
“Umu, I’m lonely.”
“I see…..”
“That’s why the time I spend with you isn’t bad. You are really casual with me after all. When you
found out that I am the Celestial Princess, why didn’t your attitude toward me change?”
“I don’t want others to experience the unpleasant feeling I used to have.”
When I was a kid, I had commoner friends who played with me without minding the differences in our
status but once they found out who I am, they gradually grew distant.
It was sad and painful.
However, I am grateful for Gai who never changed how he treated me.
Since I have that experience, unless it will cause trouble, I will not change how I treat others because
of their standing. Of course, I will do it if it becomes necessary.
“I see…..then don’t ever change that. Since I finally left my country, at least I want to have a friendly
talk with someone.”
“That’s why you want me as your entertainer?”
“I got carried away by the mood.”
“Carried away……..”
“Umu, carried away. Yawn….I’m getting sleepy. Arnold, you may stroke my head.”
1038
Orihime said so as she closed her eyes and slightly lifted her neck.
Stroke her head huh…..you are not a child you know. Her words and behavior may seem like a child
but from her appearance, Orihime should already be 15 to 16 years old. It’s a little too much for me to
stroke a girl’s head like that.
When I was hesitating, Orihime opened one of her eyes and made a dejected expression. Her ears
drooped down and her expression turned depressed.
Seeing that, I was stimulated by guilt and started moving my hand. Seeing that, Orihime seems like she
is looking forward to more.
Her tail is wagging and her ears are standing up.
I will be troubled if you are looking forward to it so much though…….
“Haa….”
I Sighed as I gently stroked Orihime’s head.
Her ears moved in response and Orihime showed a satisfying smile.
“Umu! Not bad! You may keep going!”
“Keep going?……you are not planning to sleep here right?”
“Of course I am. Now, keep your hand moving!”
Orihime said so and wagged her tail.
Since I had no other choice, I kept stroking her head and Orihime smiled pleasantly as she gradually
closed her eyes and started to quietly fall asleep.
“She really fell asleep……”
Confirming that she is sleeping, I stopped my hand.
In response, Orihime frowns as she sleeps.
Isn’t she actually awake…….
I gave up and continued stroking her head.
While I kept doing that, Franz, the Prime Minister quietly entered the room.
“Your Highness, my deepest apologies.”
“I don’t mind. It’s just her whim after all.”
“I am grateful. Her Grace seems to take a liking to Your Highness, could you comply with her request?”
1039
“Being her entertainer huh…..”
No matter how I think about it, this will be tiring for me and the distance between us is too close. I
thought that it would be good to have contact with her but being her entertainer means that I will
become the person closest to her here.
This may prove troublesome given how the future will develop…..
As I pondered about what to do, the face as Orihime told me that she was lonely flashed up in my
mind.
If I decline her request, she will make that kind of expression again. I don’t like it.
“Well, that is what the Celestial Princess wants. I guess it would be better for us if we grant her wish
huh.”
“Thank you very much. However, since when have you two met?”
“Yesterday, I had a little grudge with this penguin you see. It’s good that the one she met is me isn’t it.”
“About that…..How did you become aware that the Celestial Princess is here you met her?”
The yesterday case was already reported to him by the second imperial knight corp.
It’s a given that he knows that I know she is the Celestial Princess beforehand.
From Franz’s perspective, that is something worth worrying about. Of course, I can give him a reason
for that.
“I heard it from Silver.”
“Silver……? Why would he tell you, Your Highness?”
“Stop with the charade. You should already know that Silver is cooperating with me and Leo. With that
said, that man is still a mystery, there’s no doubt about that. Sometimes he lends us a hand, sometimes
he doesn’t. Since he’s an SS-rank adventurer, I guess he has his own things to do huh.”
Franz also has his own information network.
He should already know that we are working with Silver.
However, he should see that Silver is not actively on our side and thinks that Silver comes to help us
from time to time.
It is dangerous for an SS-rank adventurer to involve himself in the succession war but if it’s only this
much cooperation then he should be able to turn the other way.
“As Your Highness says, I am aware. However, from what I can see, that man shouldn’t be the type that
actively cooperates with you though?”
1040
“It seems that there is something different about it this time. He was quick to pass on the information.
He probably irritated that you left him out of this event.”
“…….it was an agreement with the guild.”
“I guess so. Still, that shouldn’t be amusing for Silver either. It is Silver that has been protecting the
Empire from monsters. The Empire has borrowed his help many times already, I think it’s best to stop
doing things that will break the trust between him and us right?”
“……The Empire is wide, Your Highness. We must find the solution to get rid of the situations where
we can only rely on Silver to solve as soon as possible.”
I understand Franz’s point.
The guild rarely exercises their power on an adventurer. At most, it would be a request.
That’s why adventurers don’t gather in places that aren’t popular. And recently that unpopular place
turned out to be the Empire.
After all, the Empire was peaceful and stable with only a few monsters.
However, recently the situation has changed. With problems occurring one after another, the Empire
is hoping for S-rank adventurers to set up base in its territory.
No matter how strong Silver is, one person cannot cover the entire Empire.
“I understand the idea. Does Father also share the same opinion?”
“Yes. That is why I am grateful that you are keeping contact with him, Your Highness.”
“Unfortunately, I can only wait for him to contact us though. It’s just…..He took a liking to Leo……I
kinda get that feeling. If he’s in a bad mood then try to bring Leo up, alright.”
“I hope that it doesn’t come to that…..but if we really have to rely on Silver, we will make sure to ask
His Highness Leonard.”
Franz left after I kept talking with Franz for a while.
With this, the contact with Silver is established in case of the unlikely event. And if Silver moves, the
credit would go to Leo. At least, we are now prepared for the worst-case scenario but…
The problem is that I became Orihime’s entertainer.
The person herself is pleasantly asleep though.
“Sleeping so comfortably, this girl.”
When I got a little irritated and flicked her forehead, she raised her eyebrows.
1041
Seeing that, my gloom lifted a little bit.
After that, I kept stroking her head until she woke up.
1042
SPT Chapter 158
Special thanks to Alfonzom5 for the whole tankard of coffee. You even breached the goal again
Enjoy Coffee Appreciation Day.
-Mr.Graverobber
Play Catch
“Go! Enta!”
“Chuppii!”
With such a high tension voice, Orihime throws a small ball for Enta to fetch.
Even though it is a penguin, Enta is quite clever. It picks up the ball and dexterously brings it back to
Orihime.
On the other hand, Orihime is very excited.
“OOH! Good boy! You are amazing! Enta!”
“Chuppii!!”
Honestly, they are noisy.
Well, it’s not like they just started getting noisy now so there’s nothing wrong with that, the problem
here is.
“I have a question.”
“N? What?”
“Don’t ‘what?’ me. What are you doing in my room?”
“Because you are here?”
Orihime answered like it is a matter of course.
But it is not.
“Your room is not here right!? Do you not remember that you are here unofficially!?”
“What? So you are talking about that? Don’t worry. I’ve already got permission.”
“Whose permission……”
1043
“The Prime Minister’s. I was bored staying inside the same room the entire time so I asked him to let
me visit Arnold’s room.”
“And he just allowed that……”
“Of course, he attached some conditions. The condition is that I have to set up barriers around the
room. A barrier for avoiding people, and a strong defensive barrier at the door. No one will come here
since they will be turned away by the barrier and even if someone tries to enter, they can’t open the
door. So it’s totally fine!”
“There’s nothing fine about this though…..it will be a big deal if someone finds out that a prince’s room
is being blocked off by barriers you know……”
“They won’t be able to get in right away so I can open the window and use my barrier as a foothold to
retreat. My plan is perfect!”
“What would you do if it caused a fuss?”
“Don’t care. Do something about that yourself.”
She said that so confidently……
Well, to think that she would be so free-spirit like this. Should I be amazed?
“Haa…..”
“Don’t sigh when you are with me. It would be like you are bored because you are accompanying me
right.”
“I’m not bored, just tired……”
“Can’t be helped right. You are my entertainer after all!”
For some reason, Orihime said that with a smug face.
I planned to say that she is so troublesome that it made me tired but……
Orihime is free. She can play if she wants, she can sleep if she wants. She can immediately do whatever
she wants but when I get angry at her, she will be dejected.
I ought to pay her some respect as she is the Celestial Princess but when I took some distance just to
do that she would say that she doesn’t mind about such a thing.
It’s already like I am dealing with a cat here.
If I say that she might get angry though.
When I thought so, I turned my gaze to Orihime who is getting back to play with her ball.
1044
She throws the ball and when Enta fetches it back for her, she praises it and pats it in a grand manner.
I have no idea what is so fun about it.
And why is she doing this in my room in the first place?”
I ended up thinking about such pointless things and realized that it’s pointless to find reasons behind
Orihime’s actions.
“N? What’s wrong? Arnold.”
“No, it’s nothing.”
“Hmm? OH! I see, I see!”
It seems that Orihime picked up on something while I was trying to hold down my headache. Well, she
is probably misunderstanding something again.
It’s a short relationship we have but I’ve come to understand that much about her.
“I was wondering why you have been staring so much at me today, so it’s like that huh. I’m sorry. I was
being insensitive.”
“Well, I guess you are correct about that.”
“But I noticed now! You wanted to join us right! Being so shy that you couldn’t directly ask to join me,
aren’t you quite a cute one!”
“No, you are completely wrong there.”
“Don’t be shy. I am not a demon either. If you really want to play then I don’t mind letting you throw
the ball you know!”
Orihime said as she smugly crossed her arms and proudly pushed her chest out.
How can someone be so wrong and so confident at the same time?
As I thought, this is amazing.
“No, like I told you……”
“DON’T BE SHY!”
Saying so, Orihime hands me the ball.
Her tail is wagging behind her and her eyes are glowing with anticipation.
This is that right? She wanted me to play with her.
“…….”
1045
“Here! It’s fun you know!”
Orihime encourages me to play the ball with her, however, I still don’t know what is so fun about it so
I stay still.
Seeing that, Orihime’s ears drooped down and her expression getting visibly darker.
“…..if you don’t want to then I can’t force you. I will keep playing with Enta……..”
Orihime returns to play with Enta but she is clearly dejected and both the strength of her throw and
how she pats Enta looked very depressing.
Seeing Orihime being so depressed, I started feeling bad even though I did nothing wrong.
“Alright alright…….I just have to play right.”
“Really!? Hahah! You should have said so from the beginning, what a troublesome fellow!”
Orihime said so and handed me the ball.
Then she wagged her tail as she waits for me to move.
“I just have to throw this right?”
“Umu! You will be the thrower. I will try to catch it before it hits the floor! That’s the rule!”
Saying so, Orihime prompted me to throw the ball.
I don’t understand what’s fun about this but when I halfheartedly throw the ball, Orihime instantly
reacts and moves toward the ball landing point and catches it.
“Mumu? I can’t enjoy myself with such a weak throw you know.”
“…..so we are being serious here huh.”
Her reaction was like a carnivorous animal.
She moved to catch it in an instant. Well, she is a beast person so I shouldn’t be surprised by that but
the fact that she used that kind of ability in a play is a little astonishing.
Telling me to throw it harder, Orihime tossed the ball back toward me.
Since she requested that, I must comply.
This time I aim toward the wall and seriously throw the ball at it.
Now it will bounce and she shouldn’t be able to catch it.
That’s what I thought but the ball was easily caught even before it hit the wall.
1046
“Umu! That was a pretty good throw!”
“….Tsk.”
“Just now, did you click your tongue!?”
“I didn’t. You must be imagining things.”
“Is that right? I thought I clearly heard it just now……”
Orihime tosses the ball back at me while tilting her head.
As expected, that hurt my pride a little bit. Even though I seriously threw that she caught it so easily…..
I probably inherited this from Father but when I see someone being so smug like this I can’t settle
down I unless I teach them a lesson.
If you are that looking forward to it then allow me to entertain you with all my power. Suffer your
failure and despair.
Gaze upon my full power pitch!
Thinking so, I threw the ball in the direction of the sun with all my might. It’s not a throw that you
should be doing in a room. This is how you throw a ball outside.
However, Orihime easily caught even that.
My best pitch.
“Umu! That’s more like it!”
“H, How can this be….!?”
I was shocked while receiving the ball Orihime tossed back at me.
No matter how fast Orihime is, to think that she would be able to catch that……it’s more like she didn’t
follow the ball with her eyes but she used her entire body instead.
Damn it. She is wagging her tail so fast right now. Her expression looks like she is having so much fun.
That throw was supposed to teach her a lesson damn it!
I won’t let this end as it is. If you are chasing the ball with your instinct then I just have to make use of
that instinct of yours.
If pushing doesn’t work then I can just pull it.
1047
If farther is no good then I just have to throw it shorter. Don’t look down on me, Orihime. I am not the
type that would take an initiative to do something dirty to my opponent but if you made me do it then
I am a genius.
I will teach you that lesson.
“Alright, here I go!”
“Come at me!”
Facing Orihime, I raise my foot upward to give the ball the utmost momentum.
Seeing that, Orihime prepared to receive it.
However, I immediately drop my foot and weakly throw the ball in front of me.
“See that! Now you can’t catch—!!??”
Orihime pulled back because of feint for a moment but she uses her animal-like reaction and lunges at
me.
She caught the ball before it reached the ground and just like that, she rolled forward and taking me
with her.
Getting tackled by Orihime with all her power, I lie on my back while holding the back of my head. It
seems when I fell, I hit the back of my head.
“That hurt…….and you are heavy!”
“Hahah! How’s that! I caught it!!”
On top of me is Orihime. The expression on her face is the smuggest I see her today.
She then shows off the ball she splendidly caught.
“What would you do if I get hurt…..”
“Oh! I didn’t think of that! Sorry! But it’s your fault, you know. This happened because you were
scheming something.”
After saying that, Orihime turns her head toward me.
While I was wondering what she is planning now, Orihime speaks to me with a cheerful smile on her
face.
“I wonderfully caught it you know! You may praise me now!”
“Ahh……”
1048
“You may praise me now! Praise me!”
She said it like she has a higher standing but it was like a cat or a dog waiting for me to pat it on the
head.
Her ears are twitching as she is prompting me to pat her head.
She would keep urging me to do that anyway even if I refuse her here so I pat her head with my right
hand.
“Yes, yes, well done.”
“Umu! You may praise me more!”
“More you say……”
What are you telling me to do?
When I was thinking so, suddenly the glass-breaking-like sound echoed. It’s a sound that only those
who are well-versed in magic know well. That is the sound that couldn’t be heard by ordinary people,
the sound of a barrier breaking.
Then, the door slowly opened.
“Hey! Al! What was that about!? On top of a people dispersing barrier, you even have a barrier at your
door! It was pointlessly strong too! It was a pain to….break……in……..”
Elna was standing at the door.
According to what she said, it seems that she had a hard time breaking that barrier. She has a sword in
her hand and she is breathing heavily.
However, when she saw Orihime who is currently mounting me, her expression turned sharp.
At the same time, my body started to let out cold sweat.
Thus, the sword and shield met each other at the worst timing.
1049
SPT Chapter 159
Let the cat fight begin
-Mr.Graverobber
Sword and Shield
Why is Elna here?
That question is circling in my head. On top of the barrier, any visitor that is going to visit me should
be turned away by the imperial knights. Unless they do that, Orihime couldn’t possibly come to play in
my room.
But it is useless to think about that now.
First, I have to think about how to survive this situation.
“Al…….you erected a barrier and have fun with a girl inside your room? Aren’t you living quite a happy
life right now?”
“No, calm down. It’s a misunderstanding.”
“HOW CAN I CALM DOWN IN THIS SITUATION!? I SAW THE SECOND CORP LURKING AROUND HERE
SO I CAME TO HAVE A LOOK AND THIS IS WHAT I FOUND!?”
It’s their fault!?
How can this be! Instead of keeping away the danger, they are the ones inviting the danger my way!
Damn it! If possible I don’t want Elna to know that Orihime is the Celestial Princess.
“Elna, calm down first. You are having a huge misunderstanding.”
“Yeah. You suspicious person. You should leave us now. I and Arnold are busy.”
“!?”
My eyes opened wide at Orihime.
You idiot. Did you abandon your animal instinct? You acted like that in front of the woman that you
shouldn’t piss off the most in the Empire?
As expected of the Celestial Princess I guess.
1050
“Suspicious person….? That’s my line! What are you doing on top of Al! Even like this, he is still a
prince you know! Get off him now!”
“Why should I listen to you. I am on top of him using my winner privilege. I won’t get off until I am
satisfied.”
“Wha!? Hey! Al! What is she talking about!? Who is this woman!!”
“Ahh…..it’s a long story…….”
“If you want to ask someone’s name then how about giving yours first. Well, if you have a name to give
that is.”
Saying so, Orihime smiles mockingly at Elna.
On the other hand, Elna snapped.
She points the sword that she used to break the barrier toward Orihime and angrily gives her name.
“Fine! I am Elna von Amsberg! The next head of the Brave house of Amsberg! Now! Give me your
name!!”
“Wait, Elna, this girl is not someone importa–”
“Hou? A member of the Brave house huh! I am Orihime Kuon! The Celestial Princess of the Far East
country of Mizuho!”
Orihime cut me off and introduced herself with a smug face. She really gave out her name.
The Empire’s Brave house and the Celestial Fox Clan of Mizuho. The strongest sword and the
strongest shield.
It will obviously become a problem when two opposing existences of this continent encounter each
other.
It would have been okay if this was an official visit but Orihime is here unofficially. As Orihime can do
whatever she pleases right now, there is no problem if someone is rude to her either.
In the first place, she officially isn’t here. That’s why I can be in direct contact with the Celestial
Princess like this. Still, the perceptions of the Celestial Princess between me and Elna are different.
From my point of view, she has the same standing as some great person from another country. But the
Brave house is different.
The Brave house has always taken pride in being the strongest. A descendant of the hero who saved
the continent, the clan that uses the holy sword, the strongest weapon.
The Brave house always has a strong rivalry with those that are close to them in power. That is
because they are confident in their power and they have been proving their prowess for a long time.
1051
That’s why I don’t want her to meet the Celestial Princess whose barrier is said to be able to block
even the blow from the holy sword.
Elna is not so mature as to be able to deal with this like an adult right now.
“The Celestial Princess….? I haven’t heard that such a person visited the Empire though?”
“It’s a secret so it couldn’t be helped. Even if you are from the Brave house, it seems that you are not
aware of important information of the Empire huh.”
“Hee…..well, I can see why they don’t inform us about a visitor from such a small Far East country
though. The Brave house isn’t that free after all. Unlike someone here.”
Sparks are flying between these two.
It seems that the Brave house is not alone on how competitive they can be as Orihime doesn’t seem to
lose in that department.
Rather, can’t they just back down……..
“Hou? It doesn’t seem like you are that busy to me though? I am on an official business here but what
about you?”
“I am also here on official business. My job is to escort the prince that you are currently sitting on.”
“Oh, I see, I see. If you are his escort then you can go away now. He has me after all. No matter what
happens, I can use barriers to protect him.”
“I can’t do that. Such a soft barrier is making me worried.”
“I was under the impression that you had a hard time breaking the weak barrier earlier though?
Something like that I can even create it with one eye closed you know.”
“Ara, such a coincidence. I was trying to break it quietly since the noise might trouble others you see.
If I do it seriously, I wouldn’t break a sweat breaking that kind of barrier.”
They are fuelling each other anger.
It is adult-like of the Hero and the Celestial to exchange only their words so far but this is just the calm
before the storm.
Both of them are desperate to make it seem like they are being carefree about this but both of their
cheeks are twitching.
They are probably at their limit huh.
“Hey! I won’t allow any more insults from you! My barrier is the strongest in the world.! I won’t lose to
a hero who is nothing without the holy sword!”
1052
“What! You inherited some kind of legendary tool too right!? I know about it! You are using it to
maintain the barrier surrounding your country, aren’t you!? Maybe the strong one here is just the tool
you use right!?”
“What did you say!? You cheeky Hero who got overshadowed by adventurers!”
“Who got overshadowed!? The fame of the Brave house hasn’t fallen! Maybe you just didn’t hear about
us because your country is such a backwater place isn’t it!?”
“Mizuho is not a backwater country! We are an advanced nation with a lot of maritime trade! It seems
your study is still lacking huh!”
“I know that you are flourishing in the Far East! But compared to the Empire that the Brave house
protects and raises, your country would be mediocre at best!”
“What!? Don’t be so proud because your country just got bigger because there are only a few monsters
in your land! Fighting only humans won’t make you the strongest alright!”
“What did you say!?”
Provocation and tit for tat.
They are escalating the situation by themselves.
This is really bad. I might currently be in the most dangerous place in the world right now.
For the time being, if I keep lying down, I will not be able to run away so I get up and get Orihime off
me.
“What are you doing!?”
“Ha! Maybe you are just too heavy right?”
“Gununu!! Don’t get ahead of yourself! If I am heavy it is because of my chest! I can’t say the same for
you though!”
“Wha!? They are just fat right!?”
“It’s the symbol of motherhood! Something that a woman who can only swing a sword like you
wouldn’t understand!”
“KIIIIII!! I can’t let you off anymore!”
What a low-level argument.
Elna and Orihime approach each other until they are at the distance where they are glaring at each
other face to face.
1053
Elna looks down on the petite Orihime but Orihime just gazes at Elna’s chest and sneer at it which
makes Elna even angrier.
This is the battle between the Hero and the Celestial Princess that the whole continent was waiting to
see? There should be a limit on how miserable this can be.
“Al! You say something too!”
“It’s no use relying on Arnold! Arnold is already my captive!”
“What!?”
“My chest is bigger than yours. In the first place, I am cuter than you!”
“That is just you praising yourself right!”
Orihime said as she confidently pushes her chest out.
I started to see the difference in self-confidence here. Orihime will always believe in herself. She will
never back down on an argument and have no qualm with showing her unfounded confidence to
others.
Elna has no such self-confidence. Or rather, her confidence doesn’t cover that.
The Brave house is a noble house, they have to pay respect to the imperial family. On the other hand,
the Celestial Princess is something like Mizuho’s guardian deity. She has a higher population than her
royal family and her words held influence on their politics. Well, that’s natural. After all, Mizuho needs
to rely on the Celestial Princess.
That is the difference between the two.
It is not a matter of inferiority or superiority but in a battle of words, Orihime is stronger. Well, it can
be said that she just doesn’t listen to others though.
“I am obviously cuter, and men obviously like cute girls! So you can leave now! There’s no place for a
girl who only knows how to swing a sword here!”
“Gununu!! What! Al! Just which part do you like about this girl!? Her ears!? Her tails!?”
Elna’s target changed to me.
This is bad. I never thought that their target would switch over to me at this timing.
When I was wondering how to survive this, I realized that I have no time for that.
“No, I……”
“That would be the ears! I get that kind of feeling from him!”
1054
“You Pervert!”
“I didn’t say anything yet right…..”
I let out a huge sigh.
Now, no matter what I say, I think I am gonna get beat up anyway…….and staying silent is not on the
table too.
If it keeps going like this, at worst, they might really compete with each other with force.
While I was thinking so,
“Your Highness! His Majesty is calling for you! He said to bring Her Grace with you as well!”
A knight of the second imperial knight corp entered my room and told that to me.
If it’s a call from Father then his plan may be advancing huh.
Well, I don’t mind that.
“Got it. I will go immediately. Also, tell Father that I will bring Elna along as well.”
“Eh? No, Your Highness….His Majesty said….”
“I know that he didn’t call for her but she will be summoned later anyway so it’s fine. She already
knows that Orihime is here as well. There’s no use hiding it from her.”
It would be bad if I leave Elna here as she is and she goes on a rampage later anyway.
I won’t say that out loud though.
1055
SPT Chapter 160
Final one for this week so how about some foreshadowing.
-Mr.Graverobber
Immortal Monster
“What is the meaning of this? Arnold?”
“Please ask the details from the Prime Minister. I am the victim here.”
As soon as I entered the throne room with Elna and Orihime, I was immediately questioned by Father.
However, I am not going to say sorry here.
It was not something I could control so this is definitely not my fault.
“My apologies, Your Majesty. Her Grace asked me for permission to visit His Highness Arnold so I
granted her that permission.”
“Unconditionally?”
“No, we agreed that she have to erect barriers around the room for her visit but-”
“Elna was suspicious of the knights patrolling around my room so she broke the barrier and came in.”
“……….”
“……….”
Father and Franz held their heads at the same time.
1056
Accurate Depiction
Seeing that, Elna seemed to be guilty about it but Orihime on the other hand has a smug expression on
her face that seems to say ‘serve you right’.
“Well, you were going to talk about this with Elna later anyway right? Isn’t it okay if we just do it a
little earlier.”
“I guess so……..How much do you know about this? Arnold.”
“I know that due to the Incident in the East, the dormant monsters near the Empire are beginning to
enter their active phase and the Empire is dealing with that by joining forces with the Adventurer
Guild. If you leave it alone it might affect the anniversary ceremony after all.”
“So you know almost everything already huh. It was supposed to be a secret though.
While muttering so as if he was amazed, Father doesn’t ask about how I get to know that information
any further.
Probably this is not the time to worry about my information source huh.
“Elna. it is as you heard. I invited the Celestial Princess to assist us with this problem. According to the
report from the adventurer guild, there is at least one monster that we must rely on you to subjugate.”
“I shall fulfill your wish with my life, Your Majesty, no matter what kind of monster it is I shall defeat
it. However……if you want me to fight together with her, I will have to think about it.”
“HoHou? Expecting to count on others’ power before the fight even starts huh, the Brave house isn’t
that great it seems. If you are not confident then just say it. If you do that I might consider lending you
my strength you know.”
“Who is not confident…….? And I am only saying it hypothetically! Spare me from fighting alongside
someone like you!”
“That’s my line here! I won’t help you unless you beg me alright!”
With me in the middle, sparks are flying around between the two.
Honestly, I want them to think about where they are right now though. Someone just died because he
disrespected the Emperor you know.
Well, it would be rude to compare Laurenz to these two though. Their status and power are orders of
magnitude higher. At most, they will probably get scolded for minor rudeness like this.
That being said, the person who should be reprimanding them right now is having a difficult
expression on his face.
This might be worse than I expected.
1057
“Orihime.”
“Nn? What, Arnold! If Arnold really insists I will consider it you know!”
“Shut up.”
“*GANN*……..!!?”
More Accurate Depiction
“Elna too. We are in front of Father you know.”
“Uu….my deepest apology. Your Majesty.”
Both of them drop their shoulders dejectedly.
Now it’s quiet. Finally, we can talk in peace.
“What kind of monster is it? The one that requires Elna’s power.”
“….it’s a monster called the [Spirit Turtle]. It is a monster that can naturally appear out of nowhere
and its enormous size makes it a walking disaster.”
“From nowhere? Weren’t we talking about the dormant monster?”
“That’s right. That Spirit Turtle appeared 200 years ago. It has been dormant since then.”
“Staying dormant for 200 years? What on earth happened?”
Some monsters sleep for hundreds of years but they are extremely rare.
The Sea Dragon Leviathan I fought last time was forced to sleep. Unless it has some special
circumstances like that, even a powerful monster usually only stays dormant for several decades.
There is no doubt that something was done to it.
1058
“The Spirit Turtle is called an immortal monster. The reason being it can’t be killed in a normal way.”
“How does that work?”
“From the adventure guild’s observation, they say that the Spirit Turtle’s body is made of magic
power. When severely injured, the Spirit Turtle will make its body extremely hard and lay dormant.
Once it finishes strengthening its body, it will continue to move again. Even if in the off chance that
someone can defeat it before it enters that state since its body is originally made of magic power, it
will just reconstruct its body. It seems that the Spirit Turtle that appeared last time is the same as the
one that is emerging. That’s why they call it an immortal monster.”
“Isn’t it strange that such a nasty monster hasn’t been talked about until now?”
“It seems that when the Spirit Turtle’s body gets its magic power cut off, the next time it appears, its
body will become smaller. Its growth probably got reset as well. That being the case, subjugating it
again won’t post that much of a danger, Your Highness.”
I see. Even if it is immortal, it is not invincible huh.
Certainly, defeating it shouldn’t be that dangerous.
However, since it has been dormant for 200 years, that means that the subjugation 200 years ago has
failed.
“So? Why did the subjugation 200 years ago didn’t go well?”
“200 years ago, it seems that the guild dispatched an SS-rank adventurer to subjugate it. The SS-rank
adventurer chased it down and was about to destroy it but it seems that something got in the way and
the turtle was able to enter its dormant state.”
“Getting in the way of an SS-rank adventurer? Just who could do that?”
“It was the Ancient Dragon that Silver subjugated. That troublesome ancient dragon was preying on
mankind back then and it got in the way of the subjugation 200 years ago. Well, it got counterattacked
but it managed to escape and entered its dormant period. Still, it did leave quite a troublesome
souvenir for us.”
Father said so with an irritated look.
To think that the Ancient Dragon I defeated did something like that.
Despite its strong power, it never went head to head with the Brave house but prey on the people of
the center part of the continent and caused damage to the Empire. It was quite a cunning dragon.
Even when it fought me, it was trying to escape until the end. I was under the impression that it is a
dragon that is good at escaping but it even deliberately got in the way of that SS-rank adventurer to
save that Spirit Turtle too huh.
1059
For the turtle to enter its dormant period means that it is trying to strengthen its body until it can beat
its opponent. That is probably why it has been dormant for 200 years.
If such a monster exists then the dragon probably thinks that it will be easier for it to move. Maybe it
even hoped that the turtle would be able to defeat the Brave house for it. It probably helped the turtle
with that intention.
In the end, it ended up getting defeated by me but it seems that it left quite a gift for us huh.
“If it strengthened its body until it can defeat an SS-rank adventurer then even if it’s Elna it could still
be dangerous isn’t it?”
“I already took that into consideration. That’s why it would be great if the Celestial Princess could lend
us her power this time.”
“Fumu, Your Majesty. Don’t get me wrong. I wasn’t called here to defeat a monster. I was called here to
seal the dangerous ones. I will fight if it tries to harm me but I have no plan to enter a fight that only
benefits the Empire. Of course, if you offer my country a large amount of reward then, I don’t mind
rethinking that though!”
Putting quite a tough front huh.
The Empire wants to make the anniversary ceremony a success. That’s why Father promised his full
support to the adventurer guild. Together with the cost of the ceremony itself, that would cost us a
considerable expense.
It will be difficult for us to offer a reward that can move the Celestial Princess. As expected, she has too
little to gain from this.
The Celestial Princess is just a barrier specialist. When defeating a giant monster, she couldn’t
possibly deal the finishing blow. We can appreciate the fact that she is willing to help us but it isn’t like
we absolutely need her to go and help with the subjugation.
“That’s a shame. We will be seeking help from the adventurer guild then.”
“That masked man isn’t it…..Well, he should be more reliable than a Celestial Princess.”
“Elna, we will not be counting on Silver this time. The adventurer guild cooperated with us under that
condition.”
“–!? What has that man done!?”
“It’s not like that. The adventurer guild said that they want to cultivate their human resource so that
they can avoid relying heavily on Silver alone. Our Empire is also wishing for other adventurers to set
up base within our border so it is good for us as well.”
1060
“Your Majesty kept him away for such a reason? I do not like that man but…..it’s an undeniable fact
that he has been protecting the Empire. I do think we should be relying on Silver first. What would
Your Majesty do if Silver grew distant from the Empire?”
“I was thinking about that too. Arnold. I heard that you are connected to that man, is that true?”
“We are connected but, it is more like a one-sided contact from him though.”
“I don’t mind, do you have a way to get in touch with him?”
“I do but I don’t know if the other side will respond or not. The imperial capital adventurer guild is in
the same shoes as well. Silver is like a phantom. It is impossible to keep track of his whereabouts.”
“If he doesn’t respond then there is no helping it but nothing good comes out of quitting before you
try. Tell him that I want to see him.”
“…..what are you planning to do?”
“Just having a talk. A slow one that is.”
Saying so, Father slowly turned his eyes outside the castle.
Although Silver is an SS-rank adventurer, it is unusual for the Emperor to call for a person whose
identity is unknown.
It is different from when I came here by myself last time.
So Father is planning to maintain the relationship with Silver himself huh.
This is an unexpected development.
1061
SPT Chapter 161
Hi, let’s start the week with a friendly chat chapter.
Patron shout out to DigitalPanic, thank you for supporting me
-Mr.Graverobber
The Emperor and the Adventurer
The Invitation from the Emperor.
It is easy to turn down but if I use this incident as a reason not to go, the gap between the Empire and
Silver will only widen.
The Emperor also has his own reputation to care about, he would never rely on an adventurer who
turned down his invitation again. If that is the case, the opportunity for Silver to get involved in the
matter this time will be gone.
That is why, as Silver, I accepted his invitation.
Using transfer magic, I teleported to the plaza in the Imperial Sword Castle.
A table and chairs were prepared, and my father is already sitting there waiting for me.
“Thanks for coming, Silver.”
“Since it is a direct invitation from Your Majesty, I can only comply but whether I will stay or not will
depend on what you want to talk about.”
“Hmpm, that sounds like you.”
Saying so, Father urged me to sit on the chair opposite him.
He wants me to sit and talk with him equally. No matter how much of an SS-rank adventurer Silver is,
this treatment is unusual.
Moreover.
“I don’t see that many escorts around you though?”
“I cut that down to the bare minimum. If you wanted to try something, any amount of escort wouldn’t
be able to stop you after all.”
“I see, I will take that as proof of trust then.”
1062
There are only around a few guards in the plaza.
That is the most nearby escort he has. There is no one around Father other than me. This is also
unusual in and of itself.
“That’s right. I do trust you. It is a fact that you have been protecting the Empire after all.”
“Unfortunately, I don’t remember ever protecting the Empire. What I have always protected are the
people.”
“In the end, the result is the same. Protecting my people leads to protecting my country. My people are
now less likely to voice their worries ever since you appeared. After all, it is beneficial to us having an
SS-rank adventurer inside the Empire when it is likely that powerful monsters will appear.”
“I am operating within the Empire because I don’t have to worry about a conflict with other
adventurers here. Where there are high-ranking monsters, there are quests for adventurers. I want to
avoid causing turf wars so I choose to stay in the Empire.”
Saying so, I stared at my father’s face.
Although It was through a mask, my father smiled when he noticed the meaning of my gaze.
“So from your point of view, my empire’s action this time is unpleasant for you right?”
“It’s natural for a country to want to attract more adventurers. I am not going to deny that. But if this
place becomes uncomfortable for me, I will leave. That is all.”
“That would be troubling for the Empire then. No matter how many S-rank adventurers we gather,
they won’t be able to replace an SS-rank adventurer like you after all. This is not just about your
ability but your fame as well. People will surely be worried if you leave.”
“I don’t care about the Empire’s circumstances. If anyone came into the Empire, I would move out to
keep the balance of the continent. There are many places where a service of high-ranking adventurers
is needed after all. That would originally be the job of the Guild Headquarters but….it would probably
be pointless to expect anything from the current headquarters”
Recently, the upper management of the adventurer guild has become dominated by those who have
never been on the field before.
There were many retired adventurers among them in the past but when it comes to faction battles, the
guild staff will always be superior to the ex-adventurers.
The current Guild Headquarters, which is now dominated by the guild staff, became a troublesome
place.
To not provoke the five SS-rank adventurers on the continent, they are trying to make us controllable.
Well, it is not like those guys can be controlled and since the headquarters understand that, they are
trying to find a new SS-rank adventurer.
1063
It is pointless. If an SS-rank adventurer can be easily found if you look for one, their situation wouldn’t
be so difficult in the first place.
“So simply put your first priority is the people huh.”
“That is what adventurers are. Regardless of rank or status, we maintain our neutrality and protect
the people, that is our rule.”
“A simple rule huh. I don’t hate it.”
Saying so, Father slowly sips his tea.
From the smell, it seems that there is some alcohol mixed in there too. That’s the drink my father
loves.
“Your Majesty. You are not that free as well right? How about you get down to the main topic already?”
“Well, relax. I don’t often have someone to accompany me like this. It wouldn’t be so bad if we can
enjoy this a bit more right?”
“I am not that free.”
“Hasty men are hated, you know?”
“Can I leave now?”
When I said that, Father shrugged and made a bitter smile.
It is rare for him to stop acting like the Emperor like this. This is probably his natural self.
“Well, calm down. I have something important to discuss with you after this.”
“Then let’s make this quick.”
“I will be direct then. Do you have anyone you are interested in right now?”
“……What on earth are you talking about?”
“Well, if you currently don’t have any significant other right now, I am thinking about giving you my
daughter you see.”
“……do you understand what that means?”
“Of course. It would be counterproductive to marry my daughter to an ancient-magic-user. The
Imperial family and ancient magic, that combination is synonymous with fear for those who live in the
imperial capital. In the past, my grandfather who was researching ancient magic went mad and
terrorized the capital. There are people who still remember what happened then and the story of it
even passed down to this generation.”
1064
“If I marry one of your princesses and a child is born, there is a chance that another ancient-magic-
user will be born of the imperial family blood again. I don’t think that future is desirable for anyone
though?”
Of course, as Silver, I have no intention to accept such a marriage.
But talk about being bold.
That plan shouldn’t be something that Father would want to go with.
I guess he wanted Silver to stay with the Empire that much huh.
“You can not move forward if you are only ridden by fear. This continent was once under threat of the
Demon King. While the Hero can defeat the Demon King, can anyone say that another similar threat
won’t arise again? That was why the emperor of 500 years ago chose to give peerage to the hero and
protect his lineage. Both for the sake of protecting the Empire and this continent. At the same time, the
imperial family also doesn’t neglect to strengthen our own bloodline. By bringing in excellent blood,
the Adler house grew stronger. That will not change. I can give you the title of a duke and have my
daughter marry you. Then, your child will be taken in by the imperial family. This is for the Empire
and all the people who live on this continent.”
“That is a fine idea but I have no obligation to go along with it. What happens in the future will be
dependent on the actions of the people of that era. Ancient magic especially depends on the individual.
It is not always something that will be inherited through blood. Doing that will only put unnecessary
weight on the child.”
“Hmm, as I thought it is no good huh.”
You probably brought that up knowing that it is no good in the first place right.
Father let out a small sigh and sips on his tea again.
“And I wanted to see my daughter get married too……that’s right. If you want, Finne or Elna is fine too
you know?”
“You are being persistent. Marrying any of those two would be even worse than the princesses. If I
make the most beautiful woman in the Empire my wife, I would be making unnecessary enemies, and
if I make the Hero my wife, my daily life will collapse. Stop pressing them on me.”
“HaHaHa!! I guess you would be the only man who refused the right to marry Finne and Elna huh. If
you do not find any value in women then why don’t we move to a more realistic subject.”
“Finally…..I would love it if you stopped your joke at that.”
“I was not joking. You are a hero. It would be better if I can give you a title and have you become my
relative though. Well, it doesn’t like that everything can go my way after all. Now, under what
condition would you choose to stay with the Empire? Will my support for your friend, the deputy guild
chief be enough?”
1065
I swallow down my answer at Father’s proposal.
I was just about to make that same proposal.
The Guild is a neutral organization. However, the influence of the countries can not be ruled out
entirely.
The influence of a country becomes important when the guild has to decide on its top position.
At the moment, the only one among the upper management of the guild who has been on the field
before is Clyde. If Clyde stands at the top, the headquarters will surely change.
That is good for me. That is why I was planning to use this matter as the reason and ask Father to
cooperate with Clyde.
He said it first though.
“What’s wrong? Is that not enough?”
“What would you do if I object to this?”
“I would only be looking for a compromise.”
“Does that compromise also include the matters concerning the succession war?”
“It doesn’t. Even if it is a request from you…..I am not willing to favor any candidate. They will have to
take the seat of the crown prince with their own hands.”
“I see. Then I am fine with your proposal, Your Majesty. Please back Clyde up for me.”
I said so and stood up.
There is no point in staying here anymore.
However, I was stopped by my father.
“Silver.”
“Is there anything else?”
“This is a personal question. You don’t have to answer if you don’t want to. Who was it that taught you
to use ancient magic?”
“—–I have no obligation to answer that.”
“I see……on top of its heavily dependent on an individual, you need to read valuable literature to learn
ancient magic. It is not easy for commoners born in some villages to learn to use it. Without a good
enough status, ancient magic is hard to learn. I do think that you are from a house with high status, am
I correct?”
1066
“I will leave that to your imagination.”
“I see. Then let my imagination run wild a bit then. Perhaps my grandfather managed to stay alive
somehow or he had an apprentice. Maybe one of them is your mentor?”
“That is not a bad setting for a fairy tale. How about you start writing a book in your retirement?”
“Hm, I think that my reasoning should be on the spot though.”
While making a bitter smile at my father, I leave the place through transfer magic.
I might get found out if I stay with Father any longer after all.
Al be like.
1067
SPT Chapter 162
Alright, things are beginning to move. BTW my nasuverse addiction is coming back. Do send help.
-Mr.Graverobber
S‐rank Adventurers
“We have quite a promising bunch this time huh.”
“It seems so, sir.”
I mutter while looking at the list of the S-rank adventurers the guild has gathered that Sebas obtained.
Since I have made a secret deal with Father, I don’t have to worry about this problem as Silver
anymore. If the plan proceeded accordingly there would be no problem and if the situation became
dangerous, I have a way to intervene.
Even if that will cause problems with the guild, the Empire will be backing Clyde.
Honestly, this development is most desirable.
“Don’t you think it would be more prudent if we expect them to fail?”
“These are S-rank adventurers, sir. If they fail, they will have no choice but to raise the danger level of
the monster.”
Nodding to Sebas’s input, I look at the S-rank adventurer on top of the list.
Of the adventurers the guild gathered to the Empire this time, only two of them are individually an S-
rank adventurer.
“Bruce Tarrant. The ice magician who has been active in the United Kingdom of Egret in the north huh.
He just got promoted to S-rank too, isn’t he quite a hard-working one.”
“He is still young after all. He’s a young man in his early twenties but he has been constantly rising
through the ranks. He is also famous in the United Kingdom as the [Freezing Noble] because of his
gentleman demeanor and neat appearance.”
“He is probably the one the guild wants to support the most huh. He is a good boy after all.”
“He indeed has the ability to back up his rank, sir. After all, he has gotten up to this rank by hunting
down many of the high-value subjugation targets by himself.”
“He rose to S-rank as a solo magician so I don’t doubt his skill. Still, I think that this is his limit. Modern
magic alone is insufficient for him to become SS-rank after all.”
1068
“You are being quite strict aren’t you, sir.”
“I have to. The gap between S-rank and SS-rank is more than just a rank difference. The monsters we
have to deal with are in different leagues. If he doesn’t have enough ability, he will just end up dying.”
Saying so, I look at the name written under Bruce.
I do not know him personally but from the rumors I have heard, he is bad news.
“So they even called Ignat too huh. They are getting their priority wrong here. Even as he is right now,
he is a problem child who doesn’t listen to the guild you know?”
“The fire magic swordsman from the Sokol empire. It is rumored that he is a spontaneous person who
goes on a rampage while ignoring the damage to the surroundings but It is curious what he is actually
like, sir.”
“He naturally would be worse than the rumor. Because his ability is real, the guild should already be
suppressing the bad information about him from spreading once or twice already.”
After I said that, I let out a big sigh.
They called in quite a troublesome guy.
There is no problem with Bruce’s personality but Ignat is different. At worst, Ignat might be the one
who worsens the situation himself.
He has the ability but his personality is bad.
“It would be nice if the guild can control him.”
“It doesn’t seem that we can expect much from them in that department, sir.”
“I guess so. Let’s put our hope on the other S-rank adventurers then.”
Saying so, I look under Ignat’s name.
There are two names written there.
It is not uncommon for adventurers to be active in pairs but this duo is still an irregular among that.
“A couple who has been certified as S-rank adventurers. Sydney and Auguste huh.”
“The 2-person group of the Kingdom isn’t it. They have a long history as adventurers so they are
probably selected to keep order in this operation.”
“Sydney of Offense and Auguste of Defense. They are seasoned veterans so they should have a lot of
experience participating in a special operation like this. If they can handle themselves well in a fight,
we can expect a lot from them. For stability in this operation, they are the best among the S-rankers
gathered this time.”
1069
“If I recalled correctly, you have met them personally before, sir?”
“Yeah, I met them once at the headquarters. I didn’t get any bad impression from them back then.”
Among all the adventurers the guild gathered this time, they are the only reasonable ones.
One of them is a young man who only knows success and another is a troublemaker who always
causes problems to his surroundings. They are certainly different from those two.
Normally, they should have chosen someone stable like this.
“The last one is the Grom Soldat huh” (TLN: Kanji read Thunder Brigade, it seems these guys are
Slavs.)
“They are a 5-man party operating within the central part of the Sokol empire, sir. I hear that they are
unique in group battle but……”
“Well, these guys are probably the bottom of the barrel this time. They have no outstanding
achievement as well. I am a little suspicious of how they are certified as S-rank in the first place.”
Being an S-rank adventurer means that you can deal with most monsters.
However, the Grom Soldat rarely left the Sokol empire and they have no credit in defeating any new
monsters.
They are a party that became S-rank by defeating a large number of monsters that already have
information on how to defeat them available to the guild.
Naturally, it doesn’t mean that they are weak but it would be doubtful at best if they can deal with the
dormant monsters.
They are the only ones I am concerned about their real ability this time.
“That’s all the S-rankers they called huh. Are they planning to allot monsters to these guys?”
“It seems so, sir. However, there is one big problem.”
“Just say it. What happened?”
“It seems that the Grom Soldat alone has not arrived at the imperial capital yet, sir. They have ceased
contact with the guild so we currently have no information regarding their whereabouts.”
“…..when did they cross the border?”
“The last contact from them was two weeks ago. The last information we have about them says that
they entered the Empire through the Northern border, sir.”
“2 weeks ago from the North? Why would they enter the Empire from there? They shouldn’t have any
problem crossing the border since the guild facilitates that right.”
1070
“That was what alarmed me, sir. Perhaps they are trying to take an independent action?”
“This operation is being led by the Guild and the Empire you know. Wouldn’t it be too risky for them
to act as they please now?”
Ignoring both the Guild and the Empire would make it harder for them to operate in the future.
The plan was supposed to be that each party would start to take action after they gathered at the
Imperial capital first.
“If they choose to act on their own then—-
“……it might be an intervention from Sokol huh.”
“The Sokol empire wouldn’t want us to successfully defeat the monsters, hold the anniversary
ceremony, and let the adventurers set up base inside the Empire after all.”
“It doesn’t like everything will go as planned in the first place. Still, it is possible that Sokol is trying to
secretly cause chaos within the Empire.”
Taking the Grom Soldat in and making them act wildly to cause chaos in the Empire, that would be a
desirable development for Sokol.
Even if the Empire has become restless lately, the Eastern border that is being guarded by Lize-aneue
is an iron wall. They might be trying something behind the scenes since they can’t break through her
defense huh.
“If they have been given information prior to their participation, they should know what kind of
monster is dormant in the north. What are the target monsters there?”
“—–the Spirit Turtle, sir.”
“….tsk.”
The moment I clicked my tongue, the door suddenly opened.
Standing there is the flustered Orihime.
“What’s wrong? Orihime.”
“My barrier…..it broke. The Spirit Turtle might have begun to move.”
“I see…..I understand. I will inform Father about this. Let’s go, Sebas.”
“Yes, sir.”
“Arnold…..the barrier I erected around the Spirit Turtle was a barrier to buy time. It is supposed to
have given us 3 more days. The evacuation will not be over yet…..the people are in danger. It was
because my barrier wasn’t good enough…..I’m sorry.”
1071
Since Orihime sensed that her barrier was broken, she must understand well the urgency of this
situation.
Her words were very heavy.
However, I responded to her with a smile.
“It’s okay. Even in the Empire, there are people that you can count on.”
Saying so, I stroked the uneasy Orihime’s head and left the room with Sebas.
Then.
“It seems I will have no choice but to move huh.”
“It seems that you really can’t catch a break, sir.”
“There’s no choice. Alright, it’s time for secret maneuver.”
“As you wish, sir.”
With such an exchange, I and Sebas headed for the throne room.
1072
SPT Chapter 163
Hmmmmmm
-Mr.Graverobber
Orihime’s Request
Once Father received my report, he immediately summoned the S-rank adventurers to the castle and
gathered all the involved key people.
With that said, since I am not in a position to be involved in this, I left the throne room and Leo went in
instead of me.
This is convenient.
I didn’t have to find the reason to leave the room.
This is a race against time. The reason why Orihime’s barrier collapsed may be the arbitrary action
taken by the Grom Soldat but we can not rule out that it was broken because of other causes.
The important thing now is the fact that the barrier was broken and the Spirit Turtle has begun to
move. This is like a mountain started moving on its own so we need all the help that we can get.
“I will be off then. Cover for me.”
“Certainly. Please have a safe trip.”
Sebas bowed to me who had put up the guise of Silver. I have already left the illusion of myself in the
room. Sebas should be able to handle the rest.
However, I stop myself before I use transfer magic.
“Sebas……do you think that this secret should be revealed soon?”
This is the first time I ask him such a question
That’s why I thought that it would be okay even if he doesn’t answer.
However, Sebas immediately replied.
“Does it hurt your conscience? Is it hard for you to keep this secret?”
“…..I don’t know. It wouldn’t be weird if Elna started getting suspicious by now. If that’s the case then-”
1073
“You think that it would be easier to reveal your secret? Please do not disappoint me so much, Arnold-
sama.”
“Sebas……”
“You had your chance to reveal your secret but you chose not to. You have kept this secret for so long.
Your reason for revealing it shouldn’t be because it will be [Easier], sir. A secret has its worth when it
produces a benefit that can make a difference. There is not much benefit for you to reveal this secret
to Elna-sama and continue supporting her from the shadow. Once you have decided to keep this a
secret, you must keep it so. If you desire to support Leonard-sama until the end then you must not
waver. If you have decided to see this through, you must stick to it until the end. This is what it means
to see things through, sir.”
It was a sermon.
Not the usual sarcasm.
That’s why I obediently give him a nod. That’s right. I chose to deceive everyone around me. If I quit
because it is getting hard for me to do so, I shouldn’t have done it from the start.
It surely isn’t like me to waver since I have done nothing but placing my wishes on Leo.
“Right….I have to see this through.”
“Yes. You must thoroughly keep your secret. Over time, your secret will grow heavier. This is different
from the time with Finne-sama, sir. You must be decisive and completely become Silver.”
“Yeah, I understand. I will do that.”
“After all, If you can not even deceive one childhood friend, it would be impossible to deceive His
Highness Eric, sir. Even though I am lacking, please allow me to assist you.”
“…..I will be relying on you.”
Saying so, I left the place with transfer magic.
After I transferred to the lower level of the castle, I climbed up the stairs to the throne room.
All the people who passed by me were making a surprised expression and rushed around.
While observing such actions from them, I arrived at the throne room.
Before the throne room are nobles who probably want to inform Father of my arrival but they had
stopped themselves before they entered the room.
Angry yells can be heard from the inside. It seems that there is some chaos during the meeting. The
nobles probably didn’t enter because of that.
1074
The knights guarding the door are probably aware of what is happening, once they spot me, they
salute and ask me a question.
“His Majesty is currently inside. Excuse me but can we ask for your name?”
“Silver, the SS-rank adventurer of the imperial capital branch adventurer guild.”
“May I check your adventurer card?”
Being told that, I offered him my adventurer card.
The last time I was with Trau-niisan and Finne but now I am alone. Even if I appear to be Silver, they
will not let me pass unchecked.
“We have certainly identified your identity. However, an important meeting is being held inside right
now.”
“I won’t ask you to open the door. I can just enter myself.”
I said so and pushed the door open with my hands and arbitrarily entered the throne room.
The knights didn’t try to stop me. They probably knew that they would be brushed off anyway.
“I have told you many times already! The adventurer must be given first priority regarding our prey!”
Said a crude man with blood-red hair. He carries a large sword on his back and has a provocative
smile on his face.
A rude guy that can’t even behave himself in front of the Emperor. This guy must be Ignat.
“And I have told you this many times before! Ignat-dono! Now is not the time to fight over who will
take the credit! The monsters in the northern region are starting to move because the Spirit Turtle has
woken up! Please follow the original plan, the S-rank adventurers should handle the other monsters
and leave the Spirit Turtle to the Empire!”
“That plan went down the drain already! We have no plan whatsoever now! You are saying that the
Empire will handle this but who will you send? Even if you send out your proud Hero here, the
location is too close to the border. If she has to use her holy sword, what would you do if the turtle
crosses the border? Are you willing to let her wield the holy sword on another country’s soil? If you
use the monster as a reason, I don’t know how the other nations will respond, you know? Leave the
Spirit Turtle to us, the adventurers!”
Franz and Ignat are currently in a heated argument
I understand Franz’s point in having the Empire handle the Spirit Turtle but the problem is the off
chance that if they dispatch Elna and the turtle crosses the northern border.
If the Spirit Turtle crosses the border, it will become a diplomatic problem and Elna can not cross the
border either. It’s not the question of whether she can use the holy sword there or not but it will set a
1075
bad precedent if the other nations allow her to cross the border because she has to chase down a
monster.
If such precedent is set, the holy sword user might be able to use such a reason as a shield and cross
the border in the future. No country will tolerate that. If that happens, any action taken by Elna will
look suspicious to them.
However, it is not safe to leave the Spirit Turtle solely to the adventurers. If we rely on them, we can
not count on Elna’s power.
In the first place, the reason this plan incorporated Elna was that there is no guarantee that the
gathered adventurer can win against the Spirit Turtle.
“Leave it to us! We are the most suitable and the most capable to deal with this! It’s not a big deal for
us to take down a monster that can only boast of its size! Or are you saying that there is someone else
more suitable to deal with it than us!?”
Due to the ongoing argument, no one noticed that I entered the room.
That’s why I raise my voice to make them aware of my presence.
“If that is what you want then I am right here.”
“Ahn?”
Ignat’s eyes which have the same color as his hair turned toward me.
Then, after he confirmed my identity, he scoffed lightly.
“Ha, isn’t it Silver-sama the SS-rank adventurer. What are you here for? No one called for you. Right?
Clyde-san.”
Ignat then turns to Clyde who is standing nearby.
Clyde nodded to him with a bitter expression.
“That’s how it is, Silver. You can not take part in this operation.”
“Maybe I heard you wrong earlier? Didn’t you say that your plan has already gone down the drain?”
In response to my words, Ignat looks at me with an undisguised hostile expression.
It seems I am quite hated. Well, from his point of view, all the SS-rank adventurers including me are
annoying I guess.
“The monster that you planned to subjugate has begun to move earlier than you expected. You may
plan to be the one who makes the first move but that is already no longer an option. I personally
believe that it would be foolish to stick to the plan so zealously. Don’t you think so, Your Majesty?”
1076
“……I have made a promise with the adventurer guild that I will not involve you in this matter.”
“Risking the life of your citizens for that would be putting a cart before the horse isn’t it?”
Father receives my words and gazes at Clyde.
Clyde frowns because of the difficult position he is currently in. If he allows me to interfere here, he
will go against the will of the guild’s upper management. That would worsen Clyde’s position.
However, if he refuses, he will be going against the principle of adventurers. Adventurers act for the
people. That is our number one principle and it is the most important of all. Adventurer’s selfish
behaviors are acceptable because we save lives.
Seeing Clyde staying silent, Father tries to open his mouth. He is probably trying to make all the fault
lies with the Empire and allow me to get involved in this.
From the Empire’s point of view, if I can get involved, a lot of lives can be saved and the incident can
be contained early. After all, there is no adventurer more suitable for deploying their troop than me.
However, before Father can speak, someone raises her voice first.
“I will hire him.”
Her voice is different than usual.
I turned around and behind me was Orihime.
Then.
“The Empire and the Adventurer Guild can proceed with the original plan. On a separate note, I will
hire you, Silver. I want you to defeat the hateful turtle that destroyed my barrier!!”
“What? What is a brat like her doing here.”
“Watch your mouth! Ignat! You are addressing the Celestial Princess!”
“That’s the Celestial Princess!?”
Ignat who got called out by Clyde opens his eyes wide. It seems the image inside his head is quite
different from reality.
However, how Ignat thinks about her doesn’t matter.
Orihime may seem very self-important placing such a request on me but it was a request that has the
Empire, the Guild, and even me in mind.
This will make a good excuse. The Empire can say that it is Orihime’s arbitrary action and the Guild
can say the same.
1077
Moreover, Orihime is a powerful individual called the Celestial Princess. Even the upper management
of the guild wouldn’t be able to do anything against her.
If any, it would only be harassment at best and that won’t be a problem.
“…..you have my gratitude. Celestial Princess.”
“Umu! You may thank me more! This is a big debt! If something happens in my country, you must
come to assist us. That is how big of a debt you have with me.”
No matter what kind of harassment they throw at her, I will be there to help her deal with it.
“I understand. One request—–No matter what kind of request it is, I will accept a request from you for
free. Whether it is a Dragon or a Demon King, this Silver will defeat it for you. Is that good enough?”
“OH! You are quite generous huh, Masked Adventurer! You are a good guy! What kind of reward do
you want?”
“A reward is it…….”
A normal fee for hiring an SS-rank adventurer is 3 rainbow coins.
As expected, Orihime wouldn’t carry that kind of money around.
I can do this for free but this will reduce the worth of SS-rank adventurers as a whole.
If that is the case then I will have to request something from her that is of the equal value.
That’s why I asked for the thing Orihime is proud of.
“Then I would like to witness the strongest barrier of this continent. I can use barriers myself but I
never have a chance to see a Celestial Princess’s barrier. Allow me to study it.”
“HoHou! So you do have an eye! You understand the value of my barrier huh! Umu! Alright! I shall let
you witness a Celestial Princess’s barrier!”
“Now, the negotiation is concluded. Your Majesty, that is the case. I have accepted a personal request
from the Celestial Princess to travel to the north……does anyone would like to come along?”
“Wait a while. I will select some personnel. Other S-rank adventurers will be in charge of dealing with
the other monsters as planned. Is that alright with you, Deputy Guild Chief?”
“We have no problem.”
Clyde calms Ignat who was trying to voice complaints and lowers his head.
Now, the talk is over.
The rest is for us to take action.
1078
SPT Chapter 164
Downloaded Exos Heroes yesterday…..why does it crash so often…..?
-Mr.Graverobber
Confusion at the Imperial Capital Guild
Adventurer Guild: Imperial Capital Branch.
I designated this place as the rendezvous point and traveled here with Orihime first.
“Hou! This is the Imperial Capital Branch huh!? They have quite a good sense don’t they!”
“Oi……Silver brought along a weird kid…”
“Don’t get involved. He’s a weirdo wearing a mask you know. There’s no way that there’s a decent
human being beneath that mask.”
“But she’s cute you know? Should we try calling her?”
“STOP! What would you do if she’s his woman? You want to get incinerated by ancient magic?”
“Even Silver wouldn’t go that far, right…….”
“Just give up the idea. He can use transfer magic. What would you do if he starts harassing you using
it?”
“Ah, make sense. He’s a creepy guy in a mask after all.”
WHO WOULD HARASS YOU USING TRANSFER MAGIC!
I want to deny their weird accusation with a yell but that would go against Silver’s character.
Giving up, I talk to the receptionist.
“Sorry for the commotion.”
“It is always noisy around here so it is alright, sir. Is she your sister?”
“No, a client. A lot happened you see.”
“Wha!? Silver-san accepted a personal request without going through the guild……! And we always got
ignored too…….”
The receptionist dejectedly dropped her shoulder and hung her head.
1079
The gazes from the guild staff and adventurers in the guild are getting painful.
“S, sorry…..I will be more careful next time.”
“Is that true!? There are actually a lot of quests that we would like Silver-san to take a look at!”
“Put them together and I will take a look next time. Is that alright?”
“Yes! We will be waiting! By the way.”
“Hm?”
The receptionist points at the edge of the guild.
Following that with my eyes, I see Orihime holding something white in her hand. When I raise my
sight a little, I see that the dragon fang, the guild’s decoration was missing its tip.
Noticing my sight, Orihime instantly froze.
But.
“TeHe.”
TLN: Accurate Depiction (The subject may be too old)
1080
“AHHHHHHH!!?? The symbol of the Imperial Capital Branch!!! THE DRAGON FAAAANG!!????”
“Oi Oi! How much do you think that’s worth!?”
“D, don’t be so loud…..It just broke when I grabbed it. It’s not my fault since it’s so fragile.”
She only looked guilty for a moment and immediately switched to a confident attitude. Classic
Orihime.
I let out a huge sigh and shifted my eyes to the receptionist.
“Where should we send the bill?”
“The castle.”
I have not revealed the Orihime is the Celestial Princess but the receptionist should notice from the
fact that I accepted her request.
Without getting surprised, she said that she would send the bill to the castle and started preparing it.
How reliable.
Orihime being Orihime, she doesn’t learn from her mistake and starts touching this and that inside the
guild, angering the adventurers.
It’s not anything unusual. I was walking here with Orihime. The reason being, she said that she had no
chance to see the capital.
Since it will take some time to select which personnel they will dispatch, I took my time and walked
here with Orihime. Naturally, she causes trouble all the way here. It would have become a big problem
if she wasn’t with me.
I will have to think a lot before I let her roam free huh.
“Ah!? Hey! Release me!!”
“Silver! Take care of this kid will you!”
“You brat! You just ate my snack! I was saving that cheese for last you know!”
“Umu, it was delicious.”
“Damn it!! Silver! You better take responsibility for this alright!!”
Orihime who had her arms grabbed by the adventurers is swinging her legs in protest while her
mouth spouting more things that would add more oil to the fire.
There are dishes that are only available inside the guild, maybe she saw it and immediately put it in
her mouth huh.
1081
“Silver! I want to try that bubbly drink!”
“It is too soon for a child.”
“Mumu! It’s rude to treat me like a child alright!”
“You are plenty a child yourself though.”
The one who outright denied Orihime’s words was Elna.
Elna did not participate in the earlier meeting because she was preparing herself to head north but
since I joined up in this operation, she came here.
Her appearance surprised everyone in the adventurer guild.
“Elna von Amsberg!!??”
“What is the Hero doing in the Guild!?”
“This is bad! She finally came to fight Silver for the title of the Empire’s strongest!”
“If you are going to do it then do it outside! No, just do it outside the capital! Don’t get us involved!”
“Oi! Silver! It’s your fault alright! It’s because you claimed the title of the guardian of the imperial
capital isn’t it!”
“I don’t recall calling myself that though.”
As I retorted the panicking adventurers, Elna and Orihime are glaring at each other without caring
what is happening around them.
“It seems you are feared quite a bit huh? Isn’t this because your daily conduct is that bad?”
“You are being treated like a child yourself though, isn’t that because there is nothing adult-like about
you at all?”
“What! I was just being reserved! If I get serious they might notice that I am the Celestial Princess after
all!!”
Orihime proudly said so.
A moment after that, the face of the adventurers who got excited because of me and Elna turned blue
all at once.
“The Celestial Princess——!!??”
“Why is the Guardian Deity of Mizuho here!?”
“Oh? It seems they noticed huh. My brilliance is too much to hide I guess!!”
1082
“You just said it yourself didn’t you!”
Orihime and Elna’s glare intensified, making the atmosphere feel like they might start fighting each
other at any moment.
Seeing that, the adventurers immediately took their distance.
“Wh, wha, what the hell…..this is too much for one day……..”
“The strongest defense and the strongest Offense of the continent…….are they planning to find out
who is stronger here…..?”
“Ah…..it’s over. Today is the last day of the Imperial Capital Branch…….”
It seems that the rowdy adventurers who have been playing around until now can’t keep doing it in
front of such famous individuals huh.
They did treat Orihime like a brat earlier too.
Enjoying the rare sight of these adventurers, Orihime turns toward me.
“Silver! How do I look in your eyes!?”
“What do you mean?”
“Of course, I am asking you which one of us is stronger! Someone of your caliber should be able to tell
right!”
“Hmph, you don’t have to rely on Silver for that. Even a child would be able to tell which one of us is
stronger. Right?”
The two stared at me.
Now, how should I answer this?
I sweep my eyes at the adventurers who have taken their distance.
Everyone is shaking their heads. In other words, they are telling me to not escalate this huh.
I got you. I will tell them off now.
“I can’t tell which one of you is stronger.”
“What!?”
“You don’t have eyes huh.”
The adventurers all sigh in relief……
Seeing that, I added.
1083
“I can’t tell which one of you is stronger but let me say this, I don’t think I will lose to either of you.”
“!!??”
The silent scream echoed inside the guild.
The adventurers’ eyes are asking me whether I’m sane or not. then I heard a rattling sound from
behind me.
Looking at the source, the receptionist is foaming from her mouth and faint. It seems she couldn’t take
it since she is so close to where we are.
It seems I did something bad here huh.
“Hey….what do we do now……”
“He provoked them even in this situation…….that damn idiot……”
“This is why I don’t like SS-rank adventurers……read the mood damn it…….”
The adventurers are gathered at the corner of the building, their legs are shaking.
Meanwhile, Orihime is staring at me with a visibly angry face.
“What are you saying!? My barrier is the strongest you know!”
“If it can be broken by a monster then I can do it too.”
“Heee, then how would you plan to win against me? Have you not already witnessed the power of my
holy sword?”
“It doesn’t matter if you can’t hit me.”
Thus, the three ways glaring is on.
Each of us thinks that we can defeat each other so no one is backing down.
Amid such a heated situation, a large number of horses arrive in front of the guild.
“They are finally here huh.”
“Sorry for being late, Silver.”
Said Leo as he got off his horse.
Behind him are Sieg and Lynfia along with the imperial knights.
So they are sending just enough amount of men huh.
“The Prince himself will personally come with us too huh?”
1084
“Of course. If Elna has to fight at the border, a member of the imperial family needs to be there to
authorize the use of the holy sword in case she crosses the border and we also need an ambassador
that can explain our intention to the other country as well. I am the right person for that.”
“So you won’t be participating in the battle right.”
“Yes. our duty is to rescue the people who couldn’t evacuate in time. I will leave the monster
subjugation to you. I don’t want to get in your way after all.”
“…..that is fine.”
Answering so, I created a transfer gate large enough for the cavalry to rush in.
But before I passed through it, the adventurers inside the guild stopped me.
“Hey! Silver! If it’s something important then we can lend a hand you know!”
“Monsters are adventurer’s specialty right!”
Those words are reliable.
Since the Spirit Turtle started to move, the monsters in the surrounding area will also be going on a
rampage.
That being the case, I do want more manpower.
However, I can not accept their help this time.
“I am happy about your offer but I have to turn you down this time. The problem this time has the
dignity of the Empire on the line. The Emperor wouldn’t be happy if adventurers get involved too
much. Let them have the credit this time. Well,…….if they are not enough to handle it I will be cleaning
up after them though.”
“You sure said it huh. There won’t even be your turn alright.”
“Very well, let me see what you can do then.”
Saying so, Elna went through the transfer gate first, followed by the cavalry led by Leo.
Then
“Let us go then! Be relieved! Even if they are the people of the Empire, people are people! I will protect
them all! Then I will prove it! The fact that I am more amazing than the Hero!”
“I will look forward to that.”
Saying so, I went through the transfer gate together with Orihime, Our destination: the Northern
Region.
1085
SPT Chapter 165
Final one for this week. I’m ordering pizza….
Peace out!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Rostock
We transferred to Rostock, a big city located in the Northern Region of the Empire.
Since the adventurer guild of this city was informed of the plan in advance, they are the ones in charge
of observing the Spirit Turtle.
However, the Rostock we found was an empty city.
Although the transfer gate opened near the guild office, there is no sign of people around nor anyone
inside.
“They already evacuated huh.”
“For a city of this size to be evacuated so quickly…..the Lord here must have made the preparation
beforehand. I could think of this as that he doesn’t believe in the power of my barrier but in this case,
he made a wise choice huh.”
Orihime is dissatisfied but she still praises the local lord’s decision.
It was certainly a wise decision.
But if he is capable of making such a decision then he must have left someone behind for us as well.
I float up in the air and look over the city.
Then, I saw a group of knights on horseback a distance away.
Perhaps they have noticed me, the knights rushed toward my direction.
“I saw a group of local knights. They are making their way here.”
“The Lord is quite thorough huh. He must have stationed them here as a countermeasure for bandits
and to report to him when reinforcements arrive.”
I nod at Elna.
Soon after, the knights arrived.
1086
Being cautious, the knights ask for my name.
“Identify yourself.”
“SS-rank adventurer of the Imperial Capital Branch Adventurer Guild, Silver.”
“Adventurer……”
The knights have a bitter expression on their faces.
His expression clearly has contempt mixed in.
I guess the Grom Soldat must have done something. As expected, the reason the barrier got broken
involved adventurers huh.
“Silver-dono. We were stationed here by our Lord to explain the situation to the reinforcements.
However,……”
“You can’t trust an adventurer huh. Then explain the situation to the Prince. Tell him what happened
here.”
I cut him off and turned my eyes toward Leo behind me.
I have no time to loiter around here.
“I am the Eighth Prince, Leonard Lakes Adler. Can you tell me what happened?”
“Y, Your Highness!? Please excuse my rudeness!”
Immediately after the knights recognize Leo’s presence, they dismount and bow.
Seeing that, Leo gently asks them to explain the situation.
“Don’t worry about courtesy. Please explain the situation to me. What happened here?”
“Yes, Your Highness! The Adventurer Guild of this city was monitoring the movement of the Spirit
Turtle that was trapped inside the barrier. We were informed that we still have a few more days but
some adventurers tried to subjugate the Spirit Turtle on their own and launched an attack on the
Spirit Turtle which caused the barrier to collapse…….”
“Where are those adventurers right now?”
“It seems that they and the adventurers who were there to monitor the Spirit Turtle were blown away
by its attack. The other adventurers who managed to survive immediately withdrew to the city and
the Lord ordered the citizen to evacuate with only the bare minimum luggage, the citizens are already
evacuated from this place, Your Highness.”
“I see……what happened to the Spirit Turtle?”
1087
“It hasn’t moved since it launched a counterattack against the surveillance unit. However, we have
confirmed that its previously closed eyes are now opened. It has surely awakened, Your Highness.”
Leo’s eyebrows raised after hearing the knight’s report.
Leo might not be able to grasp the big picture here. Unlike me, he wasn’t aware of the plan after all.
Even so, Leo immediately changed gear.
To do what he can do now.
“Even if the city evacuation is completed, the small villages in the surrounding area shouldn’t have
been able to completely evacuate yet. We will head to those villages and take care of the evacuation.
Once the evacuation is completed please take care of the battle, Silver.”
“Of course. But what should I do in case the Spirit Turtle starts moving?”
“I want you to stall it as much as possible. In the meantime, I will do my best to evacuate the citizens.”
“That is fine but the monsters in the northern region must have sensed the danger and started moving
already. This entire region has already become a danger zone. It would be very difficult to evacuate
the people while protecting them, no? Celestial Princess-dono and the Hero will be stuck on dealing
with the Spirit Turtle. Of course, myself included.”
“Don’t worry, I have brought along the knights for that purpose. Let me ask you this. Since this can be
counted as the adventurer guild’s blunder, Are you confident that you can compensate for their
failure?”
The knights turned fearful at Leo’s words.
That was clearly a provocation.
Even if he is a prince, one can say that provoking an SS-rank adventurer is going overboard.
However, Leo should already be aware of that. He was probably being provocative to make Silver
focus on the Spirit Turtle.
“Hmph……don’t look down on me. I did not take on the title of SS-rank adventurer in vain. Us SS-rank
adventurers have this title because we are the strongest in battles against monsters. You do not need
to worry. If this is the adventurer guild’s blunder, I will defeat the Spirit Turtle and erase that failure.”
“Is that so. Then I’m relieved.”
“That being the case, will you be all right? You came all the way here to save your people but if you
have to run away it will damage your fame, no?”
“No problem. I wouldn’t be here if I am afraid of dying. The same goes for all the knights here. Don’t
look down on the knights of the Empire too much.”
1088
Saying so, Leo straddles his horse and pulls out his sword.
Then.
“We are departing! Do not forget! We are here to evacuate the citizens! Save as many lives as
possible!”
Hearing Leo’s command, the knights also pull out their swords and respond.
Every one of them is a warrior who came here while fully aware of the danger. Their morale is
incomparable to your ordinary knights.
“Lead the way!”
“Yes, Your Highness!”
Leo told the knights of Rostock to guide them.
He then turned back to us and muttered.
“I will leave it to you.”
Were those words aimed at me, Elna, or Orihime?
Was it aimed at the three of us or each of us as an individual?
Still, each of us gave him an answer.
“You may leave it to me!”
“I will take care of it.”
“Of course! You be careful too, Leo!”
Receiving the response from each of us, Leo slightly smiled and rushed out of Rostock on his horse.
After seeing him off, I and Elna look away and start floating up to the air.
First, We will be monitoring the movement of the Spirit Turtle.
However, below us, Orihime voices a complaint.
“I-C-A-N’T-F-L-Y!”
“…..that’s what she said.”
“Yeah. then isn’t it fine if we just leave her here?”
I implied to Elna to make her carry Orihime but her reply was negative.
1089
I tiredly sighed and descended while holding out my hand for Orihime.
However, it seems that Orihime is dissatisfied.
“How do you plan to carry me?”
“By your arm?”
“That is painful isn’t it!?”
“Bear with it.”
“EEI! I’m the client here you know! I won’t let you treat me so carelessly!”
Orihime quickly circled around me and wrapped her arms around my neck.
Now we are in the so-called piggyback position. From others’ point of view, this sight probably looks
very stupid.
“Get off. Celestial Princess-dono.”
“It’s fine, isn’t it! You are not half bad as a ride! Depart!”
Said Orihime as she selfishly commanded for departure.
She wouldn’t get down no matter what I say so I gave up and floated up.
Then, Elna who was waiting in the sky mockingly smiles at me.
“What a shame, it seems your effort to look cool has gone to waste huh. You know what? You look
really stupid right now.”
“Shut up.”
“What is stupid! Silver is now my horse! He should be honored!”
“I’m going to drop you, you know?”
“WHY!?”
Amazed at Orihime being honestly surprised, I and Elna head for the Spirit Turtle.
We do not need any guide.
After all, it is giving off a tremendous amount of magic reaction.
My feeling is telling me that this turtle is truly dangerous.
The reaction I am getting from it is stronger than any monsters I have faced so far.
1090
Even if I have Elna and Orihime, I might not be able to afford to care about our surroundings.
And I will not be able to support Leo since I have to focus on the battle.
If possible, I want him to withdraw immediately and doesn’t push himself when the situation
escalated.
“That would be impossible huh.”
“What?”
“Just talking to myself. Hold on tight. I won’t catch you if you fall off alright.”
“OOH! SO FAST! THIS IS SO FUN!”
I can’t be all serious when Orihime is around after all.
Well, even like this she is the strongest barrier user on the continent.
She should be reliable.
If not then there would be no meaning bringing her along after all.
Thinking so, I grabbed Orihime’s feet which seem to slip off my side and adjust the balance.
1091
SPT Chapter 166
First of the week. we will be done with this arc earlier next week I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
Paving the way
Without stopping, Leo’s group headed to the village located some distance away from Rostock.
The reason that they couldn’t afford to take even a single break was that they had no idea when the
Spirit Turtle would start to move again.
However,
“Ugh! We are too late!”
What appeared before Leo are villagers that were desperately fleeing out of the forest.
They are being chased by monsters that are shaped like a wolf.
The desperate villagers didn’t even have any luggage with them. They were probably attacked by the
monsters that got excited by the movement of the Spirit Turtle with no time to prepare themselves.
Looking at what is happening before him, Leo sees a little girl being pulled by her mother as they ran
away from the monsters.
The girl was desperately running but she couldn’t keep up with her mother, her feet got tangled up
and she fell down.
“!? Ma, Mama——!!”
“Stand up! Hurry!”
The mother urged her child and tried to help her stand back up but during that time the wolf monsters
have already caught up to them.
The mother hugged the girl and put herself between her child and the wolf monster.
Still, as if her action doesn’t matter at all, the wolf monster rushed in to attack them.
However,
“I won’t let you!!”
Leo threw his sword from a distance away and it stuck in between the wolf monsters.
1092
Accelerating, Leo rushes at them without slowing down.
The wolf monsters switched their target to the weaponless Leo but when they saw his eyes, their
bodies got stiff from fear.
Without missing that chance, Leo pulls out the sword that was stuck on the ground and cuts down the
wolf monsters around him.
However, in front of Leo who rushed ahead by himself is a large number of monsters.
Seeing that, Leo fearlessly commands his men while pointing his sword forward.
“—-Destroy them!”
After his voice echoed through the battlefield, the knights charged at the monsters following his
command.
Because they are the elite selected from the imperial knight order, the monsters chasing the villagers
were dispersed in an instant.
After Leo dispatched the last monster with his sword, the area is secured.
“Th, thank you! Sir Knight!”
The mother who was hugging her child earlier bowed to Leo.
Seeing that, Leo shows her a soft smile.
“It’s nothing, are you injured?”
“Y, Yes! I am fine!”
“I see. Are you the last one who made it out? Are there any other villagers?”
“This is everyone from our village m’ lord. But there are many villages east of here. I don’t know what
happened to them……..”
“I see…….everyone, prepare to head out.”
Leo gives a command but a knight of Rostock raises his voice.
“Won’t entering the forest be dangerous, Your Highness?”
“I know the danger but if there are people still stuck inside then I will not abandon them.”
“However……if something were to happen to Your Highness……”
“Y, Your Highness!?”
1093
Hearing the knight, the mother realized that the person she was talking to was not a knight but was
royalty.
While the mother apologizes for her rudeness, the child asks Leo a question.
“Onii-chan, are you a great person?”
“H, Hey! What are you saying!? M, my deepest apology, Your Highness!”
“It’s alright. I’m not a great person. It just happens that my father is a great person you see. Whether I
am the same or not……What I do from now on will decide that.”
Saying so, Leo slowly turns his horse at the forest and unsheathes his sword.
Many monsters appeared from the forest due to the smell of blood.
“First we will have to clear out the monsters here. Knights of Rostock, you will be in charge of
escorting these people to a safe place.”
“Are you planning to personally act as rear guard, Your Highness!?”
“Not a rear guard. I will be the vanguard. We will be paving the way so that Silver’s group can fight
with peace of mind. They can’t fight to their fullest if there are civilians in the area after all. To create
an environment that they can fight at their best……..we need to get the people out of the area first.”
Leo then slowly began to advance his horse.
With the exception of the knights of Rostock, the other knights slowly follow Leo as he makes his way
to the horde of monsters.
Then.
“—Protect the civilians! Advance!!”
With Leo leading the charge, the knights started engaging the monsters.
Engaging the monsters, Leo’s group spreads out so that the monster can’t pursue the evacuating
villagers.
Normally, an effective way of fighting the monsters would be to group up against them but this battle
relies heavily on individual ability instead.
However, Leo did not give any special instructions.
He is confident in the ability of each and every one of the elite men he brought along.
“Seriously! This prince is such a slavedriver!”
“If you have time to open your mouth then please put more effort into swinging your spear.”
1094
“You sure are diligent huh.”
While having such a conversation, Sieg and Lynfia are getting rid of the monsters with a momentum
that doesn’t lose even to the imperial knights.
The two who are originally adventurers have an easier time dealing with monsters rather than
fighting humans.
Even with his weakened state, Sieg was originally an S-rank adventurer. No matter how many small
fries gather before him, they won’t even serve as his opponent.
“C’mon! Try approaching me and your life is forfeit alright?”
His words contrast with his adorable appearance. Sieg kills the approaching monsters with a ferocious
smile.
On the other hand, Lynfia changes the shape of her magic sword into a spear and effectively hunts the
weakened monsters.
The two who were pushing back the monsters heard an abnormal noise from the sky and looked up.
“Tsk! A bird-type huh!”
“It seems to be the Red Ravens. They are A-rank monsters.”
“And we have three on our hands huh.”
A group of large crow approaching them from the sky.
The noise they heard was the sound of their wings fluttering.
The two adventurers were familiar with how troublesome these bird-type monsters that suddenly
appeared before them are.
This is an opponent that you would normally need long-range support like an archer and mage to take
it down.
Some of the imperial knights may be able to use magic but it would be impossible to strategically
group up in this situation.
“It seems that we have no choice but to take them down when they approach.”
“No, we don’t have enough leeway for that.”
“Then what should we do?”
Sieg shows a fearless smile at Lynfia’s question and starts running toward her.
“I will jump up! Be the base for me!”
1095
“Denied.”
“No way!?”
Refusing the proposal, Lynfia holds her spear at the base and prepares to launch Sieg with it.
For a moment, Sieg thought that he could get a chance to hug Lynfia when she launched him up but
when he saw the coldness from Lynfia’s eyes he chose to obediently use the spear as a launcher.
“Use my spear as the base. If you fail I will make a hot pot out of you alright.”
“So harsh!? But jokes on you, I recently think that being looked at so coldly like that is nice too, you
know!”
“Please just go already.”
Lynfia swings her spear as hard as she can as Sieg rides on it.
Like a bullet, Sieg soars into the sky.
Then.
“Hi folks, I’m a flying bear.”
Cutting off the head of the first Red Raven he targeted, he steps on its torso.
From there, he jumps to his next target and takes down the ravens one by one.
A Red Raven tries to evade him but Sieg cuts off its wings in an instant to prevent it from escaping.
“ORAHH! You are the last one left!!”
Saying so, Sieg aims at the last raven. He ran on the raven’s body and jumped up to even greater
height.
Passing the last Red Raven, Sieg descends down and thrust his spear at it with great momentum.
“TERYAHHHHH!!!!”
Sieg’s spear deeply penetrated through the Raven’s body.
The Red Raven screams in anguish and spins in the air but Sieg keeps himself from being shaken off
and pulls out his spear and then proceeds to cut off its neck.
“Fuu, with this Lynfia-chan wouldn’t give me an earful later huh.”
While wiping off his sweat, Sieg makes a satisfying smile as he rides on the falling Red Raven.
However, as he kept descending, he noticed something serious.
1096
“Wait? How do I land?”
Shortly after, the body of the Red Raven crashed into the ground accompanied by Sieg’s loud scream.
Seeing that unfold, Lynfia speaks to a nearby knight.
“I will take care of this place so please check on him. If he’s alive then please collect him but if he’s
dead then nothing of value would be lost so please don’t worry.”
The knight bitterly smiles at Lynfia’s words and head to the location where Sieg crashed.
Then after the knight found Sieg half crying from the fear of falling, he shrugged and retrieved him.
1097
SPT Chapter 167
Opened up FGO late yesterday and found this.
Now I’m hyped………if Muramasa drops I might even open up a commission lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Lost Sword Saint
Around the time Leo arrived in Rostock.
The imperial army was deployed further to the east.
This unit was dispatched from the Northern Border Defense Force that protects the northern border.
Leading that unit is Gordon who was appointed as the vice-general of the defense force.
The order he received was to monitor the movement of the Spirit Turtle and rescue as many civilians
as possible.
However.
“Just now…..what did you say……!?”
At the command center, Sonia slammed the desk as she stood before Gordon.
That was how unbelievable Gordon’s order was.
“Don’t make me repeat myself. We will not deploy our troops”
“Have you not heard of the report that there are many villages in the forest!?”
“I heard it.”
“Then we should be dispatching a rescue unit right now!”
“The monsters are rampaging because of the Spirit Turtle’s movement. Dispatching our men would
incur a considerable loss. This is no time to be wasting human resources.”
Saying so, Gordon puts his arms together and looks at Sonia who is voicing her opinion.
Gordon was separated from his aides since he was appointed to the northern defense. As a result, he is
utilizing Sonia as a valuable human resource despite her failure in the south.
1098
Sonia who had lost the will to live after facing failure after failure regained her energy after seeing the
crisis that befell the people and tried to get Gordon to dispatch the troops but she was rejected.
“A waste…..? Isn’t it exactly the duty of the military to protect the citizens!?”
“My duty is to my subordinates.”
“Isn’t that just self-justification! Your Highness was given a command to save as many lives as you
could! Swinging your sword to protect the people would be helping your subordinates! That is what
you should be doing!”
“This is my decision. I will not change that.”
Saying so, Gordon waved her away as if she was a nuisance.
Seeing that, the guard grabs Sonia’s arm but Sonia glares at the guard with a bloodcurdling expression.
“Release me.”
“!….”
“…..Your Highness. This is your last chance. You must immediately dispatch a rescue unit. That is the
way for you to become an emperor.”
“Annoying. I will not participate in a worthless fight.”
Hearing that, Sonia let out a deep sigh.
If you are aiming for the throne, the natural course of action would be saving the people. At the very
least, you must show that you are doing everything in your power to do so.
If you become an emperor, you must help the people. That is what an emperor is.
However, Gordon doesn’t have the people in his eyes. He only thinks about his own subordinates. His
reason is that he sees them as what he needs to win the succession war.
But if you don’t protect the people that you don’t need, you will not be able to become the emperor.
“As I thought, you are not suitable for the throne…..”
“Whether I am suitable or not is not for you to decide.”
“That might be so, but I will never recognize you as an emperor. Since you are not protecting the
people I won’t even recognize you as a soldier. You’re disqualified both as a soldier and a prince.”
Gordon doesn’t make a move against what Sonia said.
He could cut her head off on the spot but that would be a waste. If she is going to die then it would be
better if her death could benefit him.
1099
Seeing through his thought process, Sonia suggested an idea.
“I will lead the troops out myself. It will only be those who volunteer. You will be able to get rid of me
and the subordinates who annoy you all at once, everyone will see that you have put in a minimum
effort as well. How about that?”
“Hou? You are planning to die for me huh?”
“It is not for you…..I….am only doing what I can.”
It was the word Grau said to her.
Sonia, who was told to do what she could, has been struggling with it for a long time.
What could she have done? What can she do now?
Thinking of such questions, Sonia looked back at her father’s teaching. Sonia’s father taught her
strategies. It was both to help Sonia and the people.
Like how he helped Sonia, her father was a strategist who always worked for the good of the people.
That is why Sonia admires the appearance of her father.
However, after her family got taken hostage, Sonia was getting farther and farther away from the
image of the step-father she adores.
She was always developing a fifty-fifty plan that would be fine no matter what the result is.
It was a convenient way for her to make excuses and it was far away from what her father had taught
her.
What would her father do?
Surely, he would do what is best for the people.
What she has been doing until now was like an opportunist. That was why Grau reprimanded her.
Even though she did not do everything that she could, she wanted to be saved.
Not only will no one come to save her, she will not be able to save anyone.
What Sonia, who was once prepared to face her death, set her sight on is clear. Simply commit herself
for the people. To act in the way that her father wouldn’t be ashamed of.
Even if that action will cost her, her father’s life.
“This strategy……it is for the people. If your sword is true then you should be swinging it for the
people as well. Victory will not come to those who forget that. Just like I was.”
1100
“I am different from you. Death will not stop me. Just go off and die if you like. For my sake that is.”
Sonia realizes that her words no longer have any meaning and turns her heels.
Then, she gathered all the soldiers and recruited the volunteers.
Among 3,000 soldiers under Gordon, only 37 volunteered to rescue the civilians with Sonia.
Given that this is Gordon’s unit, the number is surprisingly high.
With Sonia as the lead, they made their way toward the forest.
—————————-
Sonia’s rescue unit was attacked by a large number of monsters once they entered the forest.
Due to the movement of the Spirit Turtle, the survival instincts of these monsters made them
aggressive and confused.
Currently, Sonia’s unit is trying to evacuate the citizens out of the forest while intercepting the
monsters’ pursuit.
“It is just a little further! Don’t stop running!”
Sonia found a group of fleeing villagers and successfully protected them from the monsters.
The number of villagers is more than fifty.
It is a number that is too much for Sonia’s unit to protect while fighting off the monsters, but Sonia still
guides them out of the forest while giving her unit appropriate instructions.
“Ojii-san. I’m sorry, please try your best. Just a little more.”
(TLN: Old man)
“No, no, I am fine. Are you alright yourself young lady?”
Sonia speaks with an old dwarven man who joined up with the group of villagers she is protecting.
The old man seemed to be lost by himself in the forest so Sonia took him under her protection.
She is worried about the old man because he is carrying a short white cane with him, but each time
she asks him if he is okay, he always answers that he is fine.
“But despite being an elf, you are so kind, young lady.”
“Eh?”
“I am a dwarf so it’s been a while since I met a kind young elf lady like you. You are nice, young lady.”
“I……am a half-elf.”
1101
Hearing him mention the elves, Sonia told him so with a dejected expression.
But after the old dwarf’s eyes went round for a moment, he smiled.
“I see, I see. I understand now. Elves are beautiful and good at magic but they are quite exclusive. That
being the case, you also have the blood of a human, young lady. That is why you are beautiful, good at
magic, and kind like a human. You have all of their good parts right.”
“Good parts…….?”
His reply was unexpected for Sonia.
After all, she had never met anyone who sees the existence of a half-elf like her in such a good light.
Moreover, he is a dwarf, a race that has a cat and dog relationship with the elves.
“Ojii-san…….you don’t hate the elves?”
“There are guys I don’t like. But among the elves, there are good folks as well. Humans are the same. It
would be too narrow-minded to generalize them all as a race.”
“I see……Ojii-san, you are kind.”
“Kind huh…..I don’t know about that. I have been living the way I like. Listening to the voices,
following it, traveling by it. I don’t think that doing whatever I pleased is the same as being kind. That
being said, there is no doubt that you are kind, young lady.”
“I…..I’m not kind.”
“You are. You are protecting others while putting your life on the line after all.”
“That is because……I am a soldier.”
She doesn’t formally belong to the military.
However, Sonia consciously considered herself as a soldier. Just like how her father was.
She wanted to be a soldier who protected the people.
“That is not something that you should lump together like that. If there is a good soldier, a bad one
must exist as well. You are a good soldier, young lady. You are wearing that uniform with this nation’s
coat of arms. You must know well of its meaning.”
The old man smiles at Sonia.
He then turns his sight ahead.
The place he is looking at is the edge of the forest.
1102
Sonia and the others rushed and made it out of the forest.
However, what she is seeing is a fierce battle between Leo’s group and the monsters. From Sonia’s
group’s point of view, the battle is diagonal to their right. Seeing the battle so up close, the villagers
are frightened.
“This is….”
For a moment, Sonia didn’t understand what was happening but she immediately sorted out the
situation.
The knights are fighting monsters and spread their front to the right.
They are probably trying to prevent the monsters from going behind them.
That information is enough for her to make the decision.
“Run straight at them! Don’t turn back!!”
Sonia said and instructed her men to spread out to form a line.
This is to prevent the advance of the monsters that are pursuing behind them.
If they are maintaining a line of defense there, it means that behind them is a safe zone.
She has to take the villagers there.
Judging so, Sonia has all her soldiers take out their bow.
“Nock the arrow and wait for my signal! Now, run!”
Responding to Sonia’s words, the villagers suppress their fear and start running.
Meanwhile, the old man was looking over the other side of the forest.
“Ojii-san, hurry!”
“Umu, it seems that is the direction I wanted to go.”
“It is impossible to get there right now! Please hurry!”
Sonia forces the old man on the horse she was riding and makes the horse run to the defense line.
“OOh! Young lady! Isn’t this a little reckless?”
“It’s fine……I will definitely protect you.”
Sonia said so and lures the monsters toward her men.
Then, at the last minute, she gave the signal.
1103
“Fire!!”
She also shoots out a fire attack magic herself as her men release their arrows at the monsters.
The salvo scare off the monsters.
At the same time, Sonia continues to command her men.
“Ten steps back!!”
Widening the distance, her men prepare for the next shot.
This is an effective way to buy time.
However, it is not the best strategy for the situation.
It could be said that this is a strategy that abandons their own safety but this is the plan Sonia chose.
A half-hearted measure can not save anyone.
Right now, civilian safety is her top priority. If they can clear that objective, they can struggle to break
through this situation if they still have power left.
“I will see it through to the end today……!”
Sonia repeats her interception tactics and lures the monsters toward them.
Thanks to that, most of the monsters turned their attention toward them.
Leo and his subordinates who have been freed from the battle move in to protect the villagers from
Sonia’s group.
Among the people who moved in to protect the civilians, Lynfia raises her voice in surprise.
“Ojii-san?”
“Oh! Isn’t it the kind young lady I met back then! How are you doing?”
Lynfia is confused by the old dwarf who speaks so loudly even though he is being chased by monsters.
He was the old man who got lost in the south. Why is he here?
“Why are you here?”
“I was thinking about finishing my old business you see. It was going well until I entered the forest but
I ended up getting lost in it for a week. That was quite a hardship you know.”
“For a week? Why didn’t you take a guide with you……”
1104
“It’s hard to find nice and kind people. When I was troubled about what to do, the young lady over
there helped me out you see.”
Saying so, the old man points at Sonia who is being surrounded by monsters.
Seeing that, Leo immediately reacted.
“That woman……She is..”
“You know her eh? Prince Leonard.”
“Eh, ah, we are not acquaintances or anything……Um, have we met somewhere before?”
“I met you once when you were still a kid. Is your father doing well? Recently, the management of this
country isn’t going quite well though.”
“Eh, ah, Yes. he is fine but……”
“A country ridden with sadness is no good. A country would be better if no voice calls for me.
The old man slowly got off the horse and looked forward while carrying his white cane.
Within his sight, Sonia’s group is being surrounded by a large number of monsters. It is no longer
possible for them to escape.
Then, the old man lightly swings his white cane and pulls out a katana from inside of it.
Taking a stance, the old man mutters.
“[That Guy] will notice so I don’t want to swing it too much but…….I will not abandon the people that
are waiting for my help.”
Saying so, the old man casually swings his katana.
No, it simply looked like that but in fact, he has already swung his katana many times with a speed
that could be called God Speed.
Then, the slashes that occurred from that accurately cut all the monsters surrounding Sonia’s group.
Seeing the monsters in front of her fall down in an instant, Sonia looks in surprise at the origin of the
slashing attack. The old dwarf stood calmly there.
“You are……?”
“My name is Egor. SS-rank adventurer, Egor. People call me [The Lost Sword Saint]. I have come to
defeat the Spirit Turtle.”
Saying so, the old dwarf cheerfully laughs.
1105
(TLN: The Lost Sword Saint is not a cool name or anything, he simply always ended up lost……….)
1106
SPT Chapter 168
Battle begins? Anyway, I started watching hololive yesterday. God help me…..
-Mr.Graverobber
—————–
Worthy Opponent
“Mumu! It’s so big! That’s not just on the level of a mountain anymore!”
That was Orihime’s impression once she saw the Spirit Turtle. Well, I and Elna also have that same
impression.
Long neck and thick limbs. A shell that is like a wall of rock. On top of that shell is a real mountain that
probably formed over the course of 200 years.
With a quick glance, I think that it is probably hundreds of meters in both height and length. Leviathan
would look cute in comparison.
It was called a turtle because of its shell but it would be more appropriate to call it a dragon with a
shell.
Even though we are looking at it from the sky, the turtle doesn’t make any move. It would be great if it
stayed quiet like that until Leo finished evacuating the citizens.
When dealing with a giant monster at this size, I would have to use magic with high firepower. That
being the case, I can not afford to care about my surroundings.
“It doesn’t seem to move huh?”
“Do you want it to?”
“That’s not the case but normally when a creature senses a threat to their life it would be more
vigilant right?”
Orihime is correct.
Why doesn’t it move when the three of us approached it like this?
I think that we do post enough threat.
“Surely, It isn’t saying that we don’t even worth being vigilant against right?”
Elna gazes at the Spirit Turtle with a little irritated look.
Elna hates being looked down on after all. Plus, the opponent is a monster.
1107
She seems like she was about to summon her holy sword and slash at it so I give her a warning.
“I don’t mind that you are burning with fighting spirit but if you do something now, the people down
there will get involved you know?”
“I know that! Shut up!”
“This is exactly why Hero is so troubling. You are such a war maniac that you don’t care what happens
around you at all.”
“You have a lot to say huh…..are you saying that you properly keep an eye on your surroundings
here?”
“I am! I am different from you after all!”
“Then can you tell me? What did you understand from your ‘keen observation’.”
“Umu! I was thinking about why the turtle didn’t move! And I got the answer! Right now, the Spirit
Turtle is sleepy!”
“………….”
“…………”
“It has slept for 200 years after all! Maybe it is just sleepy because it just wakes up, right! That’s why it
doesn’t have any reaction toward us! My head spins when I wake up after a long sleep too. It is sleepy,
there’s no doubt about it!”
Hearing Orihime’s conjecture, I and Elna sighed at the same time. She probably wasn’t trying to be
funny but her reasoning is just too bad.
“I will take that as one of the possibilities.”
“You don’t have to, alright. It’s definitely not the case after all.”
“What!? Then what do you think is happening here!?”
“If I know that we wouldn’t be so troubled right!”
“Then how can you say that I’m wrong!?”
Taking my eyes away from the two, I look at the Spirit Turtle’s eyes.
It isn’t looking at us. Instead, it looks like it is looking somewhere far away.
It is definitely wide awake. Being sleepy isn’t the case here.
It probably doesn’t see us as a threat since we didn’t show any sign of attacking it huh.
1108
If we attack it, it will surely have some kind of reaction.
Well, I don’t care what it is thinking.
As long as it doesn’t move, it is convenient for us after all.
I will gladly accept the time that Leo can use to evacuate the citizens.
While I was thinking so, the Spirit Turtle’s neck suddenly started to move.
It is staring in the direction of the forest where Leo is evacuating the villagers.
The turtle that hasn’t reacted to anything until now begun to react to something.
I immediately set up a detection barrier to look for anything unusual in the surrounding area.
Leo’s group is fighting against the monsters.
A unit from the imperial army is holding back the monsters some distance away from him.
It’s a dangerous situation.
I thought about going over to help them for a moment.
But suddenly, magic power swelled up at Leo’s area.
Sensing that, Orihime and Elna also look in the same direction as me.
Then, the Spirit Turtle slowly opened its mouth. Its face looked somewhat happy.
It is as if it has found a worthy opponent.
Then, a huge amount of energy gathered in its mouth.
“A Blaze!? We are going!”
I grab Elna’s arm and transfer us to where Leo is.
There, the imperial army group has joined up with Leo and his knights as they protect dozens of
villagers.
However, what surprised me was the existence of the old dwarf.
“Elder Egor. So it was you.”
“Oh! It’s been a while, Silver.”
A simple greeting.
This is quite a tame greeting between SS-rank adventurers.
1109
This white-haired dwarf called [The Lost Sword Saint] is an SS-rank adventurer who the guild has no
way to contact.
There is no problem with his personality. He is an adventurer who crushes the tyrants and helps the
weak. However, due to him always moving on his own accord, he doesn’t respond to any demand from
the guild. In the first place, the guild couldn’t even figure out his location.
In some sense, he is also a problem child.
Being over 300 years old, he is the oldest SS-rank adventurer and he has held that title for over 200
years.
“I have something I would like to ask.”
“Ask away.”
“Was it you who failed the subjugation 200 years ago?”
“That’s right, that’s right. This is really embarrassing.”
Saying so, Egor scratches his head.
I’d like it if he doesn’t talk like it was some small mistake. After all, because of his failure, an SS-rank
monster has been born.
“Celestial Princess-dono.”
“Already on it.”
Before I gave my instruction, Orihime had already erected a strong defensive barrier in front of us.
A huge amount of magic power gradually swells from the other side of the forest.
It was a terror that even a normal person could feel. They may not know why but their body would
start to tremble. That would be the villagers’ impression.
It is an instinct as a living being that tells them of danger.
Then it immediately became a reality.
A deafening sound of an explosion could be heard from the other side of the forest. At the same time, a
huge black sphere is flying toward us.
It destroys the forest in an instant and collides with the barrier Orihime erected.
A strong light is emitted on impact and a thunderous roar could be heard over the distance.
The impact lasts for some time and finally the light and sound cease.
1110
“No, way…..”
Someone whispered.
The surrounding terrain had changed.
The forest in front of me was destroyed and there was nothing blocking the way between us and the
Spirit Turtle.
With the changed terrain, the Spirit Turtle is clearly visible from our location.
Its red eyes are looking straight at us.
“It seems it has been waiting for you, Elder Egor.”
“I have that feeling too. That’s why, I thought that I should approach it in a way that it wouldn’t notice
at first, you see.”
“You should have come to me if that was your plan.”
“That plan came to me after I got lost in the forest for a week so it was already too late. Well, I have no
sense of direction anyway. It couldn’t be helped.”
I tiredly looked at Elder Egor who was laughing ‘Wahaha’ while opening the transfer gate.
The Lord of Rostock took his people to another city in the area. The destination of the gate is that
town.
I can’t say that it would be safe there but it is way better than being here.
“This ends the evacuation. Head through that gate immediately. Tell the Lord there to get his people
ready and evacuate from the city.”
“For you to say that, is the situation that grim, Silver?”
“Yeah, that’s right. The guild gave that turtle the S-rank designation but that is clearly an SS-rank
monster. It is a monster that you would normally have to call multiple SS-rank adventurers to subdue.
Well, by chance, we have 2 SS-rank adventurers and others who have equivalent fighting power here
already so we should be able to manage it but——-I am not confident that we will not involve the
nearby people.”
So hurry up and go.
Understanding that, Leo immediately sent the people through the transfer gate.
Fortunately, Orihime’s barrier is still holding.
As expected of the strongest barrier user on the continent huh. She could erect a barrier that
completely absorbed a blaze from the Spirit Turtle in such a short time.
1111
However, Orihime looked unsatisfied with the result.
“Is there any problem?”
“That guy……it wasn’t being serious but my barrier almost collapsed from the blow just now.
Unforgivable……!”
“That wasn’t a serious attack?……How much stronger is it compared to when you faced it, Elder Egor?”
“About a hundred times stronger. In the first place, it wasn’t that big before.
Hearing that from Egor, I let out a small sigh.
It would be dangerous to fight it alone. If it becomes a fierce fight, the whole Empire’s northern region
might be destroyed.
We have to stop it as soon as possible, failure is not an option here.
“Let’s join hands. Fighting that thing separately is not a good idea.”
“Seems so. I will take the command.”
“What are you saying! It’s me who should be taking the command right!”
“What are you saying, young ladies. The eldest one here is me.”
“I will take the command. You two will be fighting on the front line so you are not suitable for the job
and Celestial Princess-dono has to maintain the barrier and stop its attack. The only versatile one here
is me and I can support you with the transfer gate too. I trust that there isn’t any objection.”
It is doubtful whether these three can cooperate or not but if I don’t manage them well, the Empire
will be hit hard.
There is no choice but to do it.
“I am worried that we have to do a party battle with this lineup but our opponent is that strong. If we
fail, I will take all the responsibility.”
“Ara? So you are thinking about losing as well?”
“I will tell you something interesting. If I really think about losing, the word responsibility would
never come out of my mouth. Let me tell you this, this man called Silver has never been defeated by
anyone.”
Saying so, I slowly step forward.
Leo and the others have already evacuated through the transfer gate. I am sorry but if there are any
other survivors left, they can’t be saved anymore.
1112
The battle that will occur from now on is not a battle that I can afford to do that.
“Now, let’s do this.”
As I whispered so, the Spirit Turtle thunderously roared as if to challenge us.
1113
SPT Chapter 169
Haa……so tired, work increased a lot lately. I need refreshments.
By the way, does Haachama’s cooking count as refreshment?
………I hate myself.
Special thanks to Rector for the coffee!! I plan a mass release next week so do look forward to it.
-Mr.Graverobber
Testing the waters
[[I am an agent of the divine・ I act on behalf of heaven and earth・The time of judgment has come・
Tremble Sinner-Delight Innocent・My word is the word of God・My blow is the blow of God・In my
hand is the flame that can torch the world ・Oh Flame of Heaven reduce the Sinner to Ashes—–
EXECUTION PROMINENCE]]
A giant magic circle emerges and shoots out a blinding flash of flame toward the Spirit Turtle.
It is a greeting blow.
It was a spell that once annihilated the Mother Slime along with a mountain but let’s see how it will
work against this Spirit Turtle.
The Spirit Turtle doesn’t even try to avoid my magic. Well, I’d be surprised if a giant monster could
move fast enough to avoid such an attack.
“OOH!? Isn’t that a direct hit!?”
“No…..”
“It’s not working at all huh.”
The turtle emerges from the smoke. I thought that there would be some damage but aside from the
mountain on top of its shell that was blown away, there is not even a scratch on its main body. Rather,
it probably feels thankful that I got rid of the extra weight on its back.
It seems I won’t be able to deal with it unless I repeatedly barrage it with multiple high power magic
huh.
“For the time being, I want to see what it can do, Elder Egor.”
“Understood.”
1114
In response to my words, Egor rushed at the Spirit Turtle in an instant and started running up its leg.
His aim is probably its neck and its face beyond it. As expected, those areas would be less protected
than others huh.
However, the Spirit Turtle wasn’t easy going enough to allow that.
Its opponent this time is Egor who once gave it much trouble in the past. Its reaction toward him
would be accordingly fierce.
“Muh?”
While running at high speed, Egor jumps away to evade something that flew in at him from the side.
It was a scale.
The scale attached to the Spirit Turtle’s shell is flying toward him. And it is not just one. Hundreds or
even thousands of its scales are autonomously launching attacks on him.
They are scales that withstood my magic. Something like that flying at you at high speed would be
sharper than any normal high-grade sword.
Finding that interesting, Egor directs his attack at the scales.
“Naive!!”
Egor parries the scales that attack him one after another without breaking a sweat.
He completely blocked the Spirit Turtle’s attack. Swordsmen all over the continent would applaud his
feat but unfortunately, the only ones here are a mage and a princess that don’t care much about the
way of the sword and a Hero who has the same level of ability as him. Moreover, his opponent is the
Spirit Turtle. With such a level of swordsmanship, its attack would never reach him.
“Oh.”
Egor quietly mutters.
In front of him, a scale that was twice as big as before was charging at him.
He probably couldn’t cut that down.
Judging so, I transferred to Egor’s side and took him back to where I was before.
“Celestial Princess-dono.”
“I know!!”
Orihime erects an omnidirectional barrier against the scales that come to attack us from all sides.
1115
The scales that pursued after Egor slowly returned back to the Spirit Turtle without being able to
break Orihime’s barrier, putting an end to our first exchange.
“So? Any plan?”
“It seems that its defense is perfect. Do you think you can slip through that?”
“Only fifty-fifty. With that number, some might manage to make me stop midway.”
“If we stop, we will be attacked from all directions huh. Defending against it would be possible but we
will lose our chance to attack.”
“How useless, swordsmen. I’m amazed to hear those words from the Sword Saint and a Hero you
know?”
Orihime unnecessarily provokes both Egor and Elna.
Egor laughs as he comments on how harsh she is while wrinkles form between Elna’s eyebrows. Her
expression would be one that a normal woman would never show to others.
“You are quite cheeky even though you can do nothing but defend huh.”
“Wha-t?”
The two violently glare at each other.
Seriously, fighting each other in front of the Spirit Turtle, what a carefree bunch.
“Even so, our opponent is not something that we can overcome individually. If you do not understand
that much then I have no choice but to transfer you out of here though?”
“……I know that.”
Elna poutily turns her face away.
Orihime also looks dissatisfied but she doesn’t refute my words.
If I can’t use them well, it will become a battle of attrition. It would be troubling if they started to fight
with each other now.
“If we individually can’t break its defense then what do you suggest we do, Silver?”
“Breaking through its defense using a long-range attack is not possible. Our goal should be attacking
its weak points.”
“Its face huh.”
“I see. It has scales protecting its neck. What we should aim at are targets like its eyes or mouth huh.”
1116
“I will support the Female Hero. Celestial Princess-dono, please support Elder Egor. we will attack its
face in groups of two. The main attacker will be our respective swordsman.”
Everyone nodded as I gave them a simple strategy.
I will not go into detail here. In the first place, I don’t even know what kind of hidden ability the turtle
still has available. There is no choice but to deal with it with their individual ability. Rather, I am
confident that they can do it.
“Move as you like. I will do the follow-up.”
“I will do that without you telling me to. If you are late to react, I will leave you behind alright?”
“That’s my line. If your offense is too poor then I won’t support you.”
“What did you say!? Just do it! It’s your job to follow up for me right!?”
“Be relieved! Sword Saint! I will protect you!”
“I’m thankful. I wonder how long it has been since I am being protected by someone.”
“Umu! Go at it with a bang! But if I do forget to set up the barrier, do forgive me!”
“I wonder why I am so anxious at these supporters……..”
The same goes for the swordsmen right.
While I was thinking so, Elna tiredly sighed and extended her right hand up to the sky.
“Hear my voice and descend! The brilliant sword of the stars! Now, the Hero has need of you!!”
White light falls from heaven.
Elna grabbed it and with white sparkles turns it into a shining silver sword.
The sword that the hero used to cut down the Demon King five hundred years ago, Aurora. It is said to
have been forged from a meteorite, the sword can cut all things in creation and does not allow any
existence of evil.
The strongest sword one could imagine.
Egor certainly has more experience than Elna but she also possesses the raw power that can easily
brush that difference off.
There is no question that Elna with her holy sword possesses the highest offensive power on the
continent.
Still, even with such power, Elna has no advantage against the Spirit Turtle’s defense in a direct fight.
The holy sword is the strongest weapon in the continent but it doesn’t mean that Elna can use all of its
power. She probably couldn’t use it at the same level as the First Hero. In the past, Elna said it herself.
‘Just because I can summon it, it doesn’t mean that I can master it.’
1117
“The holy sword huh. It’s been quite a while since I last saw it. You are quite something to be able to
summon it at such a young age.”
“I am honored by your praise, Elder Egor.”
“Wait, wait. Why is your attitude completely different toward me?”
“As someone who uses a sword, I do respect a master like him. It’s only natural right?”
“Are you saying that I am inferior to that old man with no sense of direction!?”
“It doesn’t matter if he has no sense of direction. The Sword Saint is the Sword Saint. He’s different
from a Celestial Princess that can only use barriers.”
“MUKIIIIII!!”
“WAHAHA!! How cheerful you are, young ladies!”
“I beg you, focus…..”
I wonder why I can’t feel any tension in this situation at all…..
Well, it’s better than being grim I guess.
And no matter how carefree they appear to be, these people are some of the strongest individuals in
this continent.
They should know well how to sort out their feelings.
While I was thinking so, Elna and Egor start walking slowly toward the turtle. The atmosphere from
them is now completely different.
The sharp atmosphere around them felt like a blade.
Perhaps she is getting inspired by it, Orihime also enters a state of readiness. Her appearance seems
like a beast approaching its prey.
Feeling relieved at their appearance, I open a transfer gate in front of Elna.
“I pray for your luck.”
“I don’t need it. Even if you don’t, there is someone who would do that for me without me asking. I will
not lose to anyone——-I am a sword after all.”
Elna said so as she jumped through the transfer gate.
She appeared right above the Spirit Turtle. Seeing that, Egor rushes straight at the turtle.
Sky and land, a simultaneous attack has been launched by the two best swordsmen in the continent.
1118
On the side of their opponent, the Spirit Turtle loudly howls and intercepts them with its scales.
After parrying many of the scales, Egor makes a big leap up and stands still in the air.
No, rather than standing, he just landed. Orihime made a scaffolding for him using her barrier.
However, Egor is now being surrounded by scales.
Even so, the scales never move.
“Don’t think that barriers can only be used to protect alone.”
Orihime seems to have blocked each of the Spirit Turtle’s attacks by confining each scale in a small
barrier.
Thus, she created a gap in its absolute defense.
Without missing that opportunity, Egor moves in to attack.
Meanwhile, in the sky, Elna is defending herself against the scales as she descends. However, there are
many of them.
The scales immediately gather around Elna.
At that time, I transferred myself next to her.
“I will take it from here.”
“Ara, that’s quite considerate of you.”
After such an exchange, I opened a new transfer gate for her.
Elna passes through it and escapes the scales encirclement.
Meanwhile, I generate a myriad of wind bullets around me and intercept the incoming scales.
With this, the turtle will not be able to ignore me and recall its scales.
And while its defense is thin, it will be attacked by both Egor and Elna.
Now, how will you deal with that?
1119
SPT Chapter 170
Yo yo, my site just exploded yo, enjoy the new theme Yo.
Special Thank to my new patron, Jerry. Thanks for the new pledge
Now let’s be corrupted together, enjoy the mentos cola grilled meat. Guess I will post this to one of
Dahlia’s cooking chapter next hehehehehehehehehe
-Mr.Graverobber
Spirit Turtle’s Counterattack
The Spirit Turtle intercepts the oncoming attack with its remaining scales but such a half-hearted
defense couldn’t stop the advance of the two.
The two swordsmen dived into the barrage of scales and headed for the Spirit Turtle’s defenseless
face. They are probably aiming for its eyes.
“HAAAAAAA!!”
“HMPH!!”
The two all-out attack approaches the eyes of the Spirit Turtle.
They pulled it off. The moment I thought so, the movements of the two stopped in mid-air.
“Guh!!”
“Tsk!!”
The two grumble as they struggle to move but they couldn’t even twitch. Then, they were dived down
to the ground.
Although they managed to land, they were unable to move. It was as if they were being weighed down
and couldn’t move.
“Gravity huh…..!”
While intercepting the scales, I realized the true nature of the Spirit Turtle’s ability.
So moving these scales is one of the applications of its ability huh.
1120
If that’s the case then those two are in a bad position. If it has the power to control gravity, a
downward attack would be much stronger than normal.
The scales that were circling around me gathered near the face of the Spirit Turtle all at once.
The scales kept gathering together and formed 2 giant spears.
Then, it immediately descended down to the two swordsmen on the ground.
“Don’t get carried away!!”
I open the transfer gate near Elna and bind one of the scale spears with cursed chains.
The descending spear stopped its movement as it was bound by the cursed chains as Elna made her
way to the transfer gate while under the effect of the heavy gravity.
It seems the spear that was headed for Egor was stopped by Orihime’s barrier and he managed to
escape the gravity like Elna.
That being the case, the one who is in the most dangerous position now is me.
I immediately released the cursed chains and got away from the Spirit Turtle’s vicinity while using
transfer magic to group the others up.
“It seems that it has quite a troublesome ability huh.”
“That got me. I was so surprised that the stiff shoulders I have for so many years have healed.
WaHaHa.”
Egor said as he laughed.
Just what kind of constitution do you have for stiff shoulders to be cured by being surprised?
When I turned my eyes to Elna, she glared at the Spirit Turtle without bothering to hide her bitterness.
“Diving me to the ground……what a humiliation!”
“I’m glad that you didn’t lose your fighting spirit.”
“No way I would lose it right! I will definitely chop that thing up!”
“That is easier said than done. I don’t think that it would be easy for us to get close to it though?
Orihime posts the question.
Not a provocation. She probably means that there would be no meaning unless we come up with a
plan huh.
1121
Well, I completely agree. If fighting spirit alone can break through this predicament then we would
already have done it.
“If we try the same thing we will simply get the same result. It seems we have to come up with a new
way of attack huh.”
“What should we do then?”
“If we can’t break through its defense to aim for its weakness up close then our only choice is to attack
it from a distance.”
I wanted to avoid it if possible but I will have to break through the Spirit Turtle’s defense with brute
force.
If we go on an all-out attack with these members then the terrain here will probably change. But we
don’t have to worry so much about that.
If we can’t stop it here, the cities in the northern region will fall victim to it.
But.
“That being said, it seems that we should be focusing on our defense first.”
It probably saw a chance to strike.
The Spirit Turtle gathers back its scales and scatters them around its body.
What is it doing now?
“No matter what kind of attack it is, I will stop it!”
“I am grateful for that. I don’t want to use much of my strength before an all-out attack.”
“True. I will leave defending entirely to you. That’s your specialty anyway right.”
“Hey, don’t say it like that is the only thing I can do! I have a lot of good parts alright!”
“Ara? Is that right? So can you tell me some of those good parts for future reference?”
“Hear me then! The first good part about me is my cute ears! The second is my cute tail! And the third
is that I am already cute in general!”
“Isn’t that just your appearance! It’s totally useless in this situation right!”
“The fourth one is that despite my age, my chest is big! It’s way bigger than yours!”
“WHAT DID YOU SAY!?”
Haa…….
1122
What an idiotic thing to say even though the enemy is about to commence its attack.
I get the feeling that even if they are facing against the Demon King they would still be having the
same argument like this.
“Elder Egor. it’s a rumor that the Sword Saint can cut anything if he has three chances. Do you think
that you can cut those scales any time soon?”
“Fumu, well, I already remembered their hardness. The next time I will slice through it like thin
paper.”
Saying so, Egor shows an expression full of fighting spirit.
No matter how much he behaves like a good-natured old man, his true nature is that of a swordsman.
He wouldn’t be so kind to something that could block his blade.
I don’t think a master at Egor’s level would bluff about this. He probably feels that he can pull it off.
Then.
“Female Hero. Can you swing your holy sword at full power?”
“What are you saying? That’s a matter of course right?”
“What I am asking here is whether you can bring out even more power from that holy sword.”
“…..you are quite familiar with the holy sword huh?”
“I learned about it when I studied ancient magic. So how is it? The sword that once defeated the
Demons King shouldn’t be only at this level right?”
“Yes. There are several seals on the holy sword. Removing them would increase its power but……if I
do that the terrain here will be changed.”
“Your worry is reasonable. I had thought the same as well. However, we can’t leave that thing as it is.
You need to make your resolve.”
To my words, Elna quietly closed her eyes and nodded.
If Elna seriously wields the holy sword, the damage to the surrounding area would be unavoidable but
if we left the Spirit Turtle alone, the damage will only increase.
When I think so, the Spirit Turtle opens its mouth. It is probably going to fire another blaze.
We stand guard against it but the Spirit Turtle doesn’t immediately release its blaze.
Then, the Spirit Turtle released its blaze that accumulated its power to the limit to the sky.
“Mumu!? Has it gone senile in the past 200 years!?”
1123
“No way that’s the case right! It is coming back down!”
As Elna said, the blaze diffused in the sky and rained back down in the shape of countless spheres.
It was like a barrage of meteorites.
To make things worse, its scales adjust their position to an irregular trajectory to receive the falling
spheres.
Like a mirror that reflects light, the scales redirect the black spheres toward us.
“This is bad! I can’t defend against it if that attack comes from all directions!”
“That is probably its aim! Avoid it as much as possible!”
I gave the instruction and moved away.
Although the attack power was diluted, it is still a Blaze attack from a Spirit Turtle. No matter how
strong Orihime’s barrier is, if she has to defend against it from all directions then it will eventually
breakthrough.
Evading the black spheres, Egor and Orihime flew to the left while I and Elna went to the right.
However, the attack doesn’t end with just one sphere.
Second and third spheres continue to follow us.
In that situation, I tried to transfer away with Elna but Elna’s eyes were pinned to another place.
When I was following her line of sight.
Elna was already dashed out at full speed.
“No..way……”
Beyond Elna’s line of sight were two children.
A boy and a girl. They probably got separated from their parents.
They both look at the sky with a frightened expression.
The black spheres that are raining down here and there might not directly hit them but the aftermath
will easily blow them away.
That’s why Elna dashed toward them.
To protect the children.
However, in this situation, that is a fatal opening.
1124
“WAIT! ELNA!”
My voice was blocked out by the falling black spheres.
I clicked my tongue and opened the transfer gate but during that time Elna was already prepared for
the danger.
Then, as Elna head to the children’s side, a black sphere directly heads toward them.
It was a split second that decided whether she can make it or not.
Elna is probably fully aware of that.
Despite that, Elna dashed in front of the two children and deflected the incoming black sphere.
“HAAAA!!”
However, because of that, Elna’s movement stopped.
Rather than directing its attack at someone who might evade them, the Spirit Turtle directs multiple
black spheres at Elna.
Elna who couldn’t deal with all the black spheres directing toward her was blown away.
TLN: Now, suffer the cliff mortal!!!
1125
SPT Chapter 171
A new month, the usual Patreon shoutout.
Monthly Patreon Shout out!!!!
Waifu Tier
Alfonzom6
Ezequiel Dominguez
Main Heroine Tier
Jasper Yu
drefly13
Omar Cruz
DigitalPanic
Tyler Fukuda
Sub Heroine Tier
Anon A Moose
Artaril
Loh Joo Hoe
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Knifewolf
Tinsoldaat
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Kei
Nelson N
Wacko
1126
Also thank you to Corrupted for the new pledge smiley face
-Mr.Graverobber
Silvery Lightning
The moment I saw Elna got blown away, my mind became pure white.
In that state, I turn toward the Spirit Turtle.
“What are you doing to my childhood friend…..!!”
Muttering so in a small voice, I gather magic power in both of my hands to prepare a large-scale magic.
However, I got stopped by Orihime.
“WHAT ARE YOU DOING! HURRY UP AND GET THEM AWAY FROM THERE!!”
Hearing Orihime, I turned my eyes to the place where the children were…..
Inside the barrier Orihime erected, the children are still there, crying.
Seeing that, I managed to regain a little of my calm.
They are the children that Elna was prepared to die for. It was because Elna stood her ground that
Orihime managed to protect them in time.
I can’t let her effort go to waste.
“Kuh!”
When I went to the children’s side using transfer magic, I found a boy and a girl.
The strong-willed looking girl is crying at the scene of disaster before her eyes while the boy is trying
to comfort her.
“The soldier……said that we would be saved if we come this way…..!!”
“D, don’t cry……everything will be alright……..”
For some reason, this scene overlapped with how I and Elna used to be.
I have always been the one that cried but there are times that Elna cried as well, in a time like that, I
tried my best to suppress my tears.
It was because I felt that I needed to do something.
“It’s alright now.”
1127
Gently put my hands on the children’s heads, I opened the transfer gate. This gate will transfer them to
the city Leo and the others escaped to.
“After you go through here, shout for Prince Leonard. If you do that you will surely be saved.”
The girl kept crying and couldn’t reply to me.
That’s why I look at the boy.
“You can do it, right? You have to be the one who protects her now.”
“…..Un!”
Replying so, the boy takes the girl’s hand and enters the transfer gate.
Now, one problem is gone.
After seeing them off, I use the transfer again to go to Elna’s side.
“Elna…..!”
I rush over to her as I call out her name.
Elna was lying down, unconscious.
To not let go of the holy sword even in such a condition, as expected of her huh. As far as I can see, she
didn’t suffer any heavy injury but if she’s unconscious then she can’t fight anymore.
When I was trying to get her away from this place, I was suddenly crushed by gravity.
“Tsk!”
Clicking my tongue, I set up a barrier around Elna and me.
It saw a chance to attack because Elna is unconscious huh. Well, of course, it did.
I would never let an opportunity like this go too.
After I set up a barrier to lessen the effect of the crushing gravity, I turned toward the Spirit Turtle.
The Spirit Turtle also turned toward me while opening its mouth.
“Trying to finish us off with a full power blaze huh…….”
As expected of an SS-rank monster.
Seems like it knows when it should attack.
But since it is a monster, there is something that it doesn’t know as well.
1128
“That’s how I want it…….I will take you head on…..!!”
Sometimes human beings also do unreasonable things.
Facing it directly would be disadvantageous for me.
In a time like this, avoiding it would be better. I know that well.
However.
“I pay you back in full here, Spirit Turtle! When it’s time for payback I always return it twofold!!”
Elna is my important childhood friend.
When we were children.
She was the one who always protected me when I couldn’t use ancient magic. I couldn’t count how
many times I got saved by Elna.
It was because she was there that I am here.
It hurt her, not to mention that it took the chance when she tried to protect the children.
It may be strange to get angry at a monster but even if she wasn’t at her full readiness, it did hurt her.
Even if she wasn’t fully prepared, Elna’s pride would be hurt by that.
Elna is always strong and confident.
Someone that taints that figure of her is unforgivable.
[[I am one who know the principle of silver・I am one who has been chosen as the true silver]]
Whispering the common chant of Silver Destruction magic, I stretch my hands out and release my
magic power.
Something like a blaze, I will just annihilate it.
[[Silver thunder appears from the sky・Descend down and razes the earth]]
Perhaps it understands what I am intending to do, the Spirit Turtle also gathers more power into its
blaze to match my magic.
Its eyes are saying that a mere human shouldn’t get in its way but what I want to say in return is ‘Don’t
get cocky you damn turtle’.
[[The heat of this Silver Thunder is the symbol of heaven’s might・The sound of this Silver Thunder is
the word of God]]
1129
A huge magic circle emerges from my hand and Silver Thunder begins to make a crackling noise.
On the other hand, the Spirit Turtle is beginning to release its black blaze that is far stronger than
what it shot out before.
It would be completely different from the one it just released.
That is probably how dangerous it judges me and Elna to be.
Fine by me.
“Bright Heavenly Lightning of Destruction・Dark Heavenly Lightning Blade・O’ Silver Thunder roaring
within my hand・Show the Will of the Silver Heaven]]
The magic circle grew even bigger and the silver lightning showed its form completely. Joining my
hands together, I shout out the name of my magic.
[[Silvery・Lightning]]
A huge silver thunder is shot at the Spirit Turtle. At the same time, the Spirit Turtle also released a
black spherical blaze from its mouth.
Both made contact at the space between me and the Spirit Turtle. The black and silver collide and emit
enough energy to terraform the surrounding area.
“Kuh…..!!”
But I have a little disadvantage here.
Silver Destruction magic does not exert its full power unless you spend enough time to let it
accumulate magic power.
This Silvery Lightning is about 80 percent of its power. Its lack of power is undeniable.
Even so, I will push that blaze back with what magic power I have.
Perhaps it found me troublesome, the Spirit Turtle strengthens the gravity on me and Elna.
Feeling the effect of the strong gravity, I dispel the barrier around myself and strengthen the barrier
around Elna.
With the sudden heaviness, my knee hit the ground.
Despite that, my focus was never interrupted. If I lose my consciousness here, Elna would be
swallowed by the blaze.
And the undefeated legend of Silver will end.
1130
If the two greatest powers of the Empire disappear at the same time, what waiting for the Empire
would be hell.
I am carrying the future of the Empire on my shoulders.
I thought so for a moment and laughed.
“Ridiculous…..like hell I would care about the Empire’s future……
In the first place, that is not like me at all.
It was because I hate things like that I became an adventurer to live freely.
What I am always trying to protect is those that are important to me.
The Empire is important but it is not what I most care about.
I raise from my knee.
Remember who I truly am, I regained my energy.
“Come at me as hard as you want………I have already decided that I will not let any harm be done to
those around me!”
The silver thunder that was gradually pushed back little by little push back against the black sphere all
at once.
It then penetrates through the black blaze and reaches the Spirit Turtle.
However, the silver thunder weakened by the black blaze would not damage it.
With no damage done to it, the Spirit Turtle looks my way.
However, that is a mistake.
It paid too much attention to us.
“To not notice even when I am this close. Silver must be that dangerous in your eyes huh.”
Egor takes a stance with his cane on top of the turtle’s shell.
His sword sheathed into a sword drawing stance.
Then.
“Why do you think people call me the Sword Saint?”
After that question, Egor draws his sword and slashes at the shell with the speed of god.
“It’s because there is nothing I can’t cut.”
1131
“GUGAHHHHH!!!!!!”
A long and large wound runs on the shell of the Spirit Turtle and blood gushes from it.
Egor retreats from the thrashing Spirit Turtle but now there is a gap on its absolute defense.
Just one more push.
At that moment, I heard a voice from behind me.
“…..Al…….?”
TLN: So this is arguably a better cliff right? Muhahahahha
1132
SPT Chapter 172
Fine, no more cliff. With the completion of the Kofi-goal, I now announce the start of Coffee
Appreciation week.
-Mr.Graverobber
Silver and Gold
She found out.
Those words repeatedly float inside my head. The voice she used to say my name was the one I am
familiar with.
A tone of voice that she would never use on Silver.
How did she find out? How I called her earlier? Or was it a different reason?
While I was thinking about all the possibilities, I decided to look back.
Even if the secret is out, I have to keep lying. I have to deceive her somehow.
However, my resolve quickly disappeared.
Elna stood up. But her eyes are still unfocused.
“You don’t have to……….sound so worried…..I won’t lose…….”
She is probably still hazy.
Elna is speaking to me who is not here.
“I…….will protect you, Al…….”
Elna holds up her holy sword as her voice is still shaking.
I want to take my mask off this instant and tell her that I am right here and tell her that I am Silver so
you don’t have to fight anymore. I want to tell her that she has already done enough.
But, that would probably be unfair.
My knight who showed me such determination wouldn’t desire such a thing.
Once you’ve decided on something, you must stick to it until the end. That was what Sebas said to me.
1133
I think I finally understood the meaning of those words.
I have been lying to someone who thinks so much about me. It would be rude to her if I reveal my
secret because of my emotions.
Such selfishness is not allowed to me.
“—-that’s surprising. So you were fighting for that Dull Prince huh?”
I asked Elna with Silver’s voice.
Elna looks at me with a flustered expression and slowly collects herself.
Then when she recognized that I am Silver, she frowned at me.
“…..such humiliation……..you looked like Al a little just now.”
“That’s my line. I would like it if you don’t compare me to the Dull Prince.”
“You……..I thought I told you that you shouldn’t talk about him like that, right…….?”
Saying so, Elna holds her right flank with her left hand.
The fact that she didn’t immediately get angry at me is probably because she couldn’t afford to do that.
“Your rib is broken but it seems that your mouth is still working huh.”
“…….can you drop that know-it-all look already? I might accidentally cut you down with the holy
sword you know.”
“How scary. I guess even I can’t stop a blow from that holy sword of yours.”
I shrug my shoulders and look at the Spirit Turtle.
The turtle whose body was deeply cut concentrated its scales on its wound.
That’s why it couldn’t afford to pay attention to us.
This time, the role of the decoy and the attacker are reversed.
Elna probably understood that too. However, she doesn’t move out immediately.
She might be fine with one rib broken but if multiple of it got broken then there might be damage to
her internal organs.
I was a little worried about her but Elna opened her mouth first.
“Before I fainted…….I heard Al’s voice.”
“Wasn’t that just a hallucination?”
1134
“You must be unpopular with girls right…..? I’m sure that Al is worried about me. No, I know that he
is.”
“Such a girly way of thinking is not like you.”
“You are quite irritating, you know that?…..I know that he is worried about me, I am his childhood
friend after all………Even now, I’m sure that he is still worrying. That’s why I will put an end to this
now……After all, it is my job to end this before Al tries to push himself too hard again.
Elna slowly raises the holy sword up with both of her hands.
She frowned from the pain she felt there but she took a deep breath several times and stabilized her
stance and looked at the Spirit Turtle with a sharp gaze.
So she switched her mind into battle mode and temporarily shut out the pain huh.
“That’s how it is, Silver. Lend me a hand.”
“What do you mean? I don’t think that I have any obligation to help you on your personal agenda
though?”
“You called him the Dull Prince right? I will forgive you now if you lend me a hand.”
“What a scary woman. I was only saying that to get your spirit up though.”
“Yes, it did the job, thanks.”
“I can’t feel any gratitude at all. Honestly, I pushed myself quite a bit to protect you when you fainted,
you know?”
That’s not a lie.
I soloed the Spirit Turtle to protect her.
My magic power doesn’t run out yet but shooting any more great magic is hard for me now. At least it
will take time for me to do it.
However, ignoring my circumstances, Elna says this to me.
“Cut that out. You still have some kind of secret move hiding away right? Use it now.”
“Good grief……the job to finish that thing off supposed to be yours but I have to help you do it huh.
This debt will be big, you know?”
“Don’t spout nonsense. The debt you own me is bigger than that.”
With such an exchange, I slowly raise one hand up above my head.
As Elna said, I do have a secret move.
1135
I’ve already laid the groundwork in case Elna didn’t regain her consciousness but I never thought that
I would be using it alongside her.
She probably intends to erase that Spirit Turtle from existence here.
[[I am one who know the principle of silver・I am one who has been chosen as the true silver]]
Silver Destruction magic is a special type of magic among ancient magics.
It shines silver light and all the magic power used in it is converted to a special attribute of magic
power called silver-attribute.
[[Azure sky filled with the divinity of silver・True silver scatters across the green earth]]
Silver-attribute magic power will be scattered where you use Silver Destruction magic.
Normally, when magic power gets converted into a special attribute, you will not be able to make use
of it again.
However.
[[At times, that silver becomes lightning・At times, that silver become the light that illuminates the
darkness of night]]
You can reuse that silver magic power if you use another Silver Destruction magic.
However, not any magic can use the scattered silver magic power.
You must use a magic that collects the scattered magic powers.
That is my secret move.
[[Sacred divine silver・Pure and white silver]]
It is a magic that gathers all the scattered silver magic powers and forms one single sword.
[[O’ true silver gather in my hand・Annihilate the enemy before me —–]]
The silver magic power gatherers around my hand and form a sword.
It is a dazzling silver sword that is a concentration of an enormous amount of silver magic power, its
power will vary on the Silver Destruction magic that you use beforehand.
It is using the magic power from when I used Silvery Lightning earlier but it is far from its full power.
1136
Even so, it is powerful enough to cut that Spirit Turtle. After all, it is a spell that concentrates silver
magic power at one point, which is rare among Silver Destruction magic’s many areas of effect spells.
That’s why its power is guaranteed even among all the Silver Destruction magic.
The name of that magic is.
[[Silvery・End・Saber]]
The Silver Sword of Silver Extinction.
My own holy sword.
At the same time, Elna’s holy sword also let out the shine that doesn’t lose to mine.
If my holy sword was silver then Elna’s was golden.
The holy sword that is shining so bright that you can’t look at it with naked eyes is completely
different from how it was before.
“Hear my voice and awaken! O’ Shining Sword of Life of the Star! The Hero now needs a miracle!!”
Responding to Elna’s words, golden light spills from the holy sword at once.
The brightness was so strong that the silver light in my hand looked dim.
“Holy sword・Aurora – Second Release…….”
Elna probably removed one of the seals on the holy sword.
Although it is not at full power, the appearance of the holy sword grew closer to when it was used to
defeat the Demon King.
“Are you ready? Silver.”
“Of course. It seems yours is ready as well huh.”
Saying so, I turn my eyes to the sides of the Spirit Turtle.
A ginormous barrier is forming around it layer by layer.
Seeing us preparing our attack, Orihime probably tries to contain the aftermath by deploying multiple
layers barrier around the turtle.
Quite considerate on her part.
“Trying to contain my attack with barriers like that……it seems she is looking down on me quite a bit
huh.”
1137
“Let me say this first. Your target is not the barrier you know?
“I know. My aim is at that weak looking turtle.”
Elna then looks at the Spirit Turtle.
It probably felt the threat to its life as it is now transitioning to its superhardened mode.
But it’s too late. Our preparation is already completed.
Elna: “Remember well. This place is the Empire.”
Silver: “The country that is being protected by the Hero and the Silver Mage.”
Elna: “You”
Silver: “You bastard”
Elna&Silver: “ “CHOSE THE WRONG PLACE TO MESS WITH” “
I and Elna swing our swords down at the same time.
The Silver and Golden Swords of Lights race to assault the Spirit Turtle.
1138
SPT Chapter 173
Second part of the release and finally the end of this arc.
-Mr.Graverobber
A Place to Rest
The torrent of gold and silver rush toward the Spirit Turtle.
Perhaps it judges that it couldn’t go into its hardened state in time, the Spirit Turtle opens its mouth to
fire its blaze to intercept our attack.
However, its blaze couldn’t stop the torrent of gold and silver light.
The light swallowed both the Spirit Turtle’s blaze and crashes into its body.
The Spirit Turtle tries to endure the attack with its prided hardened body but with the wound on its
shell, it couldn’t handle the attack.
Then, its entire body got swallowed whole by the light.
“GUGGAGAAA!!!!!!!”
With its final death throes, the Spirit Turtle gradually disappears within the golden and silver light.
However, that is not the end.
The torrents of silver and gold combined and kept going.
This time, it was Orihime’s barrier that took the hit.
When it crashes into the barrier a dull sound resonates from it and with each of its layer broken, a
high pitched sound echoes.
However, the torrents of light’s momentum gradually weaken.
Then
“It stopped huh……”
I muttered and sigh in relief.
I got carried away and made an all-out attack together with Elna. it was an attack that would cause
damage greater than the Spirit Turtle so I will have to thank Orihime for her barrier.
“Of the twelve layers, it only destroyed ten……”
1139
“Stop being so shocked that you couldn’t break through her barrier……”
I looked around after I voiced some warning to Elna who was having a surprised expression.
The Spirit Turtle completely disappeared and there is no trace of other monsters around.
This is probably the end.
Thinking so, Elna sat down on the spot.
“What’s wrong?’
“I’m tired.”
“So you can get tired too huh?”
“What are you saying? I’m a fragile girl you know.”
“In what world would you be considered fragile I wonder.”
“Of course, it’s this world right. Just open the transfer gate already. It would be a pain to walk back like
this.”
“So there’s a selfish Hero like you too huh.”
After I tiredly muttered so, I opened a transfer gate to head to where Orihime is. Egor is probably with
her there.
Let’s group up and head to Leo’s place.
While I was thinking so, Elna entered the transfer gate.
Stepping out of the gate, we found Orihime with a smug expression on her face.
“HaHa!! With this, it is proven that my barrier is superior!”
“Whatever. I am not so energetic to be arguing with you right now.”
Elna sat down again, she seemed really tired.
Seeing that the reaction she received was lighter than she expected, Orihime’s eyes opened wide.
While she was making such an expression, Egor appeared from behind her.
“I’m sorry for using you as a decoy, Silver.”
“The same goes for me too. But, as expected of the Sword Saint. I didn’t expect that you would be able
to actually cut the shell.”
“I never thought that you would use two great magics in succession too. As expected of you, Silver.”
1140
We professionally admire each other’s works.
While showing Orihime such an adult attitude, Egor slowly approached Elna.
Then after asking for her permission, he touches her right flank.
“Umu. this is quite serious. Five of your ribs are broken. It will hurt a little alright?”
“Yes….”
Egor instantly moves his hand on Elna’s right flank. It was only a moment but he probably returned
Elna’s ribs to their original position.
“It should heal up in no time once you apply healing magic on it. Silver, why don’t you try using it on
her?”
“Unfortunately, I only know a large barrier type of healing magic. It would be a waste to use it on a
single person.”
“You are the worst.”
“I might use it if there was another injured person but it would be too wasteful to use it on you alone.”
While saying such a thing, I opened the transfer gate to the city I sent Leo and the others to earlier.
Among the knights that Leo brought along, there should be some imperial knights who can use healing
magic.
I should leave Elna’s treatment to them.
Thinking so, I sent the three through the transfer gate.
———————–
I get busy after returning back to the city.
When I reported that the Spirit Turtle had been subjugated, the whole town got into a festive mood,
and Leo and the knights were busy taking the evacuated people from Rostock back to their places.
“Prince Leonard. Sorry for bothering you while you are busy but I have something to ask.”
“What is it? Silver.”
Elna was treated with healing magic but because of her fatigue, I was asked to send her back to the
Imperial capital.
However, I have something to ask Leo before that.
1141
“There were two small children that should have come here through a transfer gate. Did you meet
them?”
“I took them in under my protection. They are sleeping in a separate room right now.
The one who answered so wasn‘t Leo.
When I turned my eyes to the voice, Sonia was standing there.
“You are…….the strategist under Prince Gordon huh. The one who attacked Gers.”
“I don’t know why you remember me like that but…….I am no longer a strategist for that person.”
“My apologies then. So, what did the children say?”
“……they were told by a group of soldiers to head to the forest. I’m sure that it was the surveillance
unit under Prince Gordon.”
Hearing that, Leo got angry for a moment.
The fatigued Elna also frowned at that news.
“The soldiers that were supposed to protect the country and its people refused to protect them
huh……”
“I’m sure that Prince Gordon will give an excuse that since the unit I led was in the forest, he told them
to come to me. Still, they should have given the children some escorts and if they were prioritizing
reporting to the main unit then they should have just dispatched a messenger. In the end, all he
wanted was to get away from the battlefield. That prince.”
“A surveillance unit wouldn’t be able to do anything about the Spirit Turtle after all. That may be why
he made that decision but it is impossible for me to understand how he chose to do it.”
“……this can not be simply water under the bridge. I can’t forgive a member of the imperial family who
abandoned our people.”
Leo said so as he couldn’t stand such an action.
Certainly, this matter shouldn’t end without consequence.
However, it is a fact that no matter how much we try to accuse him, it would be judged as a mistake in
the soldiers’ decision.
It all depends on whether they know that the Spirit Turtle started to move or not. If they know then it
was intentional and if they don’t then it was simply a mistake. There is no way to prove that it was the
former.
Their withdrawal was not a mistake in itself. It can be said that it was a decision to avoid the
unnecessary loss of their unit.
1142
It would be difficult to persecute Gordon with this case. Although it is entirely possible to worsen his
image in Father’s eyes, the demerit for escalating the matter to such extent is too big.
“Hmm….Prince Leonard. Can you let me handle this?”
“……what are you planning to do?”
“What. it is just some harassment. Do you mind if I use your elder brother a little bit?”
“If Nii-san approves of it then I don’t mind.”
“Then I will handle this matter myself. Rest assured. It will be just a normal protest from an
adventurer.”
Saying so, I took Elna with me through the transfer gate back to the capital.
—————————-
“Welcome back, sir.”
“I’m back.”
Sebas welcomes me who has transferred back to my room.
I took off Silver’s costume and sat on a chair.
We transferred back to the adventurer guild and Elna already took a carriage back to the Brave
house’s manor.
She looked tired but if it is just fatigue then there’s no need to worry.
“It was quite bad this time……”
“Then it is something to celebrate that you are back here safely, sir.”
Saying so, Sebas brews me black tea.
After that, I chatted with Sebas for a while but then he noticed something and gave me a wide smile.
“It seems that my presence here will be in the way so allow me to excuse myself.”
“Ha?”
Sebas suddenly disappeared.
In the way of what……..
I thought about such a thing when the door suddenly swung open without any knock.
It was Elna.
1143
“Elna!? What’s wrong!?”
“I’m tired so I came to see you, Al.”
“If you are tired then just go home……since you are here, it means that everything ended safely right?”
“Yeah. The turtle was already subjugated. I’m tired so I had Silver bring me back here with him.”
Saying so, Elna sits on the sofa.
“What are you doing?”
“Come here.”
As I was told in a silent tone, I gave up asking and obediently sit down next to her.
Then, Elna suddenly lies down and uses my knees as her pillow.
“Oi.”
“I told you right? I’m tired. The turtle bullied me.”
“Bullied? You sure about that?”
“Don’t be rude…..I did my best so don’t be mean to me alright…….”
Said Elna as she pouted a little.
Seeing that, I sigh and place my hand on Elna’s head.
“Resting in your manor would be better you know?”
“If I head back to my house then everyone would just get worried and I would end up can’t take a
proper rest anyway. It’s calmer here.”
“Is that so. Then do what you want.”
“Yeah, that’s my plan.”
Elna immediately closed her eyes and prepared to sleep.
What a change.
Well, she’s a knight so it would be bad if she can’t rest when she needs to.
Thinking that she is going to sleep just like this, I stroke Elna’s head.
She tried her best as a knight, let’s allow her this one selfishness.
“Thank you for your work. You did your best right.”
1144
“Yeah…….I, did my best.”
Saying so, Elna quietly closed her eyes. Immediately afterward I could hear her the sound of her sleep
breathing.
Her sleeping face was very calm.
TLN: Pat pat
1145
SPT Character Introductions
*This Character sheet may contain minor spoilers*
Main Characters
Arnold Lakes Adler
Title: [The Dull Prince]
[Ore], People close to me call me Al.
Ardraxia Empire’s Seventh Prince.
18 years old with black hair and black eyes. The only twins in the Imperial Family. He is the elder
brother. His appearance is the same as Leonard but not so uptight. A fearless prince. He is inelegant
and is evaluated lowly.
Being called the prince that got every good part sucked out of him by his younger brother, he is seen
as incompetent and lethargic. With his lack of ambition, it is said that his standing is the lowest in the
succession war.
In truth, he is certainly lethargic but he is not incompetent. He can wield powerful ancient magic.
However, he hid this fact because ancient magic and the Imperial family together does not look well in
the eyes of the Empire’s citizens. [His Great-Grandfather devoted himself entirely to ancient magic and
once caused destruction to the Imperial Capital.]
If another leading candidate in the succession war takes the throne, he and his mother will be killed.
That’s why he decided to conduct secret maneuvers to make his younger brother, Leonard become the
emperor.
Silver
Title: [The Strongest Adventurer of the Empire]
One of the only five SS-rank adventurers on the continent. He earned that rank by defeating an ancient
dragon. His appearance is that of a man wearing a black robe and a silver mask.
An Adventurer who does not move away from the Imperial Capital. Unless he receives a request from
the Imperial Capital Adventurer Guild, he will only accept the requests around the Imperial Capital.
His real identity is Arnold, who uses ancient magic to protect the Empire from the shadows.
His mentor is the spiritual body of his great-grandfather, the Mad Emperor, who taught him ancient
magic and various tactics.
Leonard Lakes Adler
1146
Title: [Banner]
[Boku] People close to him call him Leo.
The Adraxia Empire’s Eighth Prince
18 years old with black hair and black eyes. Although his appearance is the same as his brother, he is
evaluated highly from his fearless yet graceful appearance. He is flooded with marriage proposals.
Excels in swordsmanship, magic, and politics. He is one of the leading candidates for the next emperor.
With his gentle personality, he has doubts about being in the bloodshed conflict of his family.
Arnold thinks that he is too kind and naive to win the succession war. He often chooses to look at the
positive side of a person rather than their negative side, It is a rare trait that is hard to find but it also
serves as a disadvantage.
He trusts in Arnold, his elder brother, more than anyone else.
Sebastian
Title: [The Omnipotent Butler]
The butler Al called Sebas.
An assassin who was once feared as a god of death. With various circumstances, he became a butler.
Al’s follower who understands him.
His specialty lies in his ability to stay alive. His information collecting skill is also outstanding. For that
reason, he provides a valuable advantage for the weak Leonard’s faction
Finne von Kleinert
16 years old
Title: [The Blue Seagull Princess, Sharer of Secret]
The unrivaled beauty with the title of the Blue Seagull Princess (Blau Mowe)
A petite girl with beautiful wavy blonde hair and deep blue eyes, the color of the sea.
Despite her small body, she is quite glamorous.
Two years ago, Emperor Johannes ordered the nation’s craftsmen to make hair ornaments in the
shape of birds. Among them, the beauty of a blue seagull shaped hair ornament caught the eyes of the
Emperor. Taking a liking to it, the Emperor held a beauty contest saying that only the most beautiful
woman in the Empire is suitable for it. At that time, Finne who was known as a beautiful woman won
the competition when she was only 14 years old.
1147
She is the only one who knows Silver’s identity other than Sebas.
Elna von Amsberg
17 years old
Title: [Prodigy of the Brave house, the Strongest Childhood Friend]
Al and Leo’s childhood friend.
A beautiful girl with cherry-colored hair and jade-colored eyes. She has a modest chest.
Reputed as a perfect superwoman, she was excellent in everything she has done ever since she was a
child.
Boasting the highest class of ability, together with the Holy Sword handed down by the Brave house,
she is almost invincible.
The heiress of the Brave house of Amsberg, the descendant of the Hero who defeated the Demon King.
She always helps Al when he is bullied. She is both his savior and natural enemy at the same time.
A genius who became an Imperial Knight at the age of 11 and became a Knight-Captain at 14. She is a
candidate for the next Knight Commander.
Being the strongest among the Brave house bloodline, she is said to be the return of the First
Generation.
Lynfia
Title: [Competent Adventurer]
A-rank adventurer who saved Al.
Her brown hair is tied up into a short ponytail.
With her hat, she looks like a boy.
She was born in an immigrant village at the Southern Frontier.
She requested Al to help her village and cooperate with him in return.
She also possesses a magic sword that can change shape.
Candidates for the Throne
Eric Lakes Adler
1148
The Second Prince.
Blue-haired with glasses.
The most influential prince who serves as the Empire’s Minister of Foreign Affairs.
Cold and realist, his power base is the civil officers.
Gordon Lakes Adler
The Third Prince.
The prince who holds the position of a general.
A simple-minded and warlike prince, his power base is the military.
Zandra Lakes Adler
The Second Princess.
A green-haired beauty with a scary face.
A mage studying forbidden arts
The cruelest of the Imperial Family, her power base is the mages.
The Empire
Johannes Lakes Adler
Emperor of the Adraxia Empire
Blonde hair blue eyes
He is an emperor with 13 children. He thinks that his children should fight for the throne so that the
strongest one may rule the Empire. He also became an emperor through such methods.
He has many wives and possesses the ability to love them equally.
The ruler of the vast Adraxia Empire who continues to expand it if the chance presents itself. He is the
one who judges whether his children are suited for the throne.
He is aware of the pride and the duty of the Imperial Family who believe that it is their duty to create a
successor who can rule the vast territory of the Empire.
Gustav Lakes Adler
1149
The Great-Grandfather of Al. One of the past emperors.
After handing over the throne to his son, he devoted himself to ancient magic and eventually went
mad and laid waste to the Capital.
Since then, ancient magic has become taboo among the Imperial Family.
However, in reality, his consciousness was sealed inside a magic tome inside the hidden room in the
castle as his body was taken over by a demon that was sealed inside it previously.
Al’s mentor in ancient magic.
Franz Seabeck
The Empire’s Prime Minister.
A rare genius who climbed up the social ladder from a son of a small inn owner to the most powerful
position of the Empire. It is said that Johannes’s greatest achievement was the discovery of Franz.
Mitsuba
The Emperor’s Sixth Consort.
Al and Leo’s mother.
A black-haired dancer who enchanted the Emperor with only a single glance.
She raised Al and Leo without intervening with their growth and turned them into who they are today.
Christa Lakes Adler
12 years old.
The Third Princess with blonde hair and purple eyes
After she lost her mother, she is being raised by Mitsuba, Al and Leo’s mother.
She has a precognition ability that very few people know about.
Traugott Lakes Adler
25 years old.
Brown hair and Blue eyes. He is wearing signature lame glasses.
A fat prince whose aim is to be an author despite having no talent for it.
A hobbyist.
Gied von Horsvath
1150
18 years old.
Bob-brown hair. Bad sense of fashion.
He is the son of Duke Horsvath, the house with the second-most longest history in the Empire.
A childhood friend of Al and Leo and the bully who has always bullied Al.
Marc Tiber
A middle-aged man.
A Knight who belongs to the Imperial Knight Order serving as deputy captain to Elna’s unit.
He is a knight who originally served under the Brave house. He became an Imperial Knight after Elna
joined the Order.
He once saved Al from a life-threatening crisis.
The Principalities
Evangelina di Albatro
First Princess of the Principality of Albatro.
Elder sister of the twin.
She is a girl with light brown hair with green eyes. Her hair is trimmed at shoulder length.
Together with her twin younger brother Julio, they can use innate sound magic.
She is very active compared to the quiet Julio
Julio di Albatro
The First Prince of the Principality of Albatro.
The younger brother of the twin.
A young boy who looks exactly like Eva.
His worry is that his personality is often viewed as more feminine than Eva.
Longing to be more masculine, he longs to be a hero like Leo.
1151
Additional Characters after the third arc.
Gai
19 years old.
An adventurer who takes care of the children at the outermost layer of the Imperial Capital. He is a B-
rank adventurer but he is soon to be promoted to A-rank.
He always has some kind of injuries on him but he is extremely bright.
Al’s amiable friend.
Rita
11 years old
A girl who was taught swordsmanship under Gai.
She has dirty blond hair done into a side ponytail.
Lively and always smiling.
She met Christa and became her close friend.
Sonia Laspade
Short cut light purple hair and reddish purple eyes.
She is a half-elf with slightly pointed ears.
She was banished from the Elven Village together with her mother 11 years ago. Getting caught up in
the battle between the Empire and the Kingdom, she got separated from her mother. She was picked
up by a strategist of the Imperial Army and raised up to become an excellent strategist herself.
Like a normal elf, she excels in various kinds of magic and can fight to defend herself.
In response to Gordon’s request for cooperation, she headed to the Imperial Capital to act as his
strategist. On her way, she met Rebecca who she helped evading her ruthless pursuers to get to the
Imperial Capital.
Narbe Ritter
The only independent knight order of the Imperial Army. They are dubbed the Scarred Knights.
Although they are currently soldiers, they were all formerly knights who were stripped of their rank
when they chose to act against their lords.
1152
Through intense training, they are known as one of the forces with the greatest fighting power in the
Imperial Army however, they are regarded to be difficult to handle.
Orihime Kuon
A beautiful girl with black hair and golden eyes. She looks like she is 15 to 16 years old. Always talk in
a self-important manner.
The Guardian Miko of Mizuho, called the Celestial Princess. The Nine-tailed Miko.
She is of the Celestial Fox tribe that has high magical power and specialize in barrier magic. Due to the
barrier that the Celestial Princess of each generation deploys, the Celestial Country of Mizuho is
impregnable, escaping the hand of the Sokol empire.
Compared to the Adraxia Empire, they are the equivalent to the Brave house that receives equal
treatment to their royalty.
She has long black hair, short stature, and small ears. In contrast, her chest is big. She also has a tail.
Cheerful and open-minded, she doesn’t think too deeply about anything. Although she always seems
like she is looking down on others, due to her friendliness, she is not unpleasant to be around.
Bruce Tarrant
S-rank Adventurer
The United Kingdom
A mage who mainly acts solo, being called the [Freezing Noble].
Handsome man with light blue hair.
Sydney & Auguste
The Kingdom
A couple in their thirties.
A team of two that together considered an S-rank party.
The Husband Auguste is in charge of defense while the Wife, Sydney is in charge of the offense.
Ignat
An S-rank adventurer from the Sokol empire.
1153
He has a rough and radical personality. He is a problem child among the S-ranks but his ability is
certain.
Grom Soldat
An S-rank party with five members that active in the Sokol empire.
Continent overview
The continent has the shape of a bird spreading its wings.
The Adraxia Empire (Modeled after Germany) is located in the central part of the continent which
corresponds to the body of the bird.
The west wing is the Kingdom of Perlan (Modeled after France) and the east wing is the Sokol empire
(Modeled after Russia).
These three countries are the top three superpowers of the continent.
At the south is the Principality of Albatro and the Principality of Rondine located at the peninsula
(Imagine Italy) that protrudes like a tail.
On the head is the Cornix Dominion and above them is the island nation, the United Kingdom of Egret.
Imperial Family overview
The Empress/ Crown Prince(Deceased)/ Fourth Prince
Second Consort(Deceased)/ First Princess/ Third Princess
Third Consort/ Second Prince/ Fifth Prince
Fourth Consort/Third Prince/ Sixth Prince
Fifth Consort/ Second Princess/ Ninth Prince
Sixth Consort, Mitsuba/ Seventh Prince/Eighth Prince
Seventh Consort/Tenth Prince
First Prince, Wilhelm, 27 years old (At the time of his death)
1154
First Princess, Lizelotte, 25 years old
Second Prince, Eric, 28 years old
Second Princess, Zandra, 22 years old
Third Prince, Gordon, 26 years old
Fourth Prince, Traugott, 25 years old
Fifth Prince, Carlos, 23 years old
Sixth Prince, Conrad, 21 years old
Seventh Prince, Arnold, 18 years old
Eighth Prince, Leonard, 18 years old
Ninth Prince, Henrick, 16 years old
Third Princess, Christa, 12 years old
Tenth Prince, Rupert, 10 years old
First Prince Wilhelm Lakes Adler
27 years old at the time of his death
The Crown Prince who died three years ago. During his lifetime, he has received great expectations
from all of the Empire as the ideal Crown Prince. Due to his popularity and ability, the succession war
did not occur. His death is the trigger for the start of the succession war. His mother is the Empress.
First Princess Lizelotte Lakes Adler
25 years old
An Imperial Marshal who leads the Eastern Border Defense Forces. Feared by the neighboring
countries as the strongest princess general of the Imperial Family. She does not participate in the
succession war and declared that she will serve as an Imperial Marshal no matter who becomes the
emperor. Her mother is the Second Consort.
Fifth Prince Carlos Lakes Adler
23 years old
1155
An ordinary prince who has never been described as incompetent nor excellent. However, contrary to
his ability, he has a dream to become a hero. In the succession war, officially, he gives his support to
his brother of the same mother, Eric. His mother is the Third Consort.
Sixth Prince Conrad Lakes Adler
21 years old
Gordon’s younger brother of the same mother. However, unlike Gordon, he has a light personality and
holds no interest in the succession war. Officially, he gives his support to Gordon. His mother is the
Fourth Consort.
Ninth Prince Henrick Lakes Adler
16 years old
Zandra’s younger brother of the same mother. He looks down on Al and considers Leo as his rival. In
the succession war, he gives his official support for his sister, Zandra. He is also on good terms with
Gied von Horsvath. His mother is the Fifth Consort.
Tenth Prince Rupert Lakes Adler
10 years old
The only child of the Seventh Consort. He is still young and has not participated in the succession war.
He has no support, and he lives his life according to the Seventh Consort’s instructions. He has a timid
personality. His mother is the Seventh Consort.
1156
SPT Chapter 174
Day 2, I start to crave Yakiniku
-Mr.Graverobber
A Favor
“I am surprised that you are still here.”
A few days after I returned to the imperial capital with Elna, I headed back to the city where Rostock’s
citizens and the villagers evacuated to.
Leos and his men are still taking care of refugees but what was surprising was that Egor was still in
town.
“Don’t say that. I am already old. A fight like that would tire me.”
“I see.”
I don’t buy that.
The oldest SS-rank adventurer is a man who wanders the continent. It’s very rare for such a person to
stay in the same place for a long period of time just because he is tired.
“Speaking of which, Miss Celestial Princess was angry you know. She was saying, [What is he thinking
leaving me here!?] earlier.”
“Ah, I’ve completely forgotten about her.”
“Since she is your client you should have taken her with you. It will be troublesome later you know.”
“She’s always troublesome so it wouldn’t be a problem even if she gets slightly more annoying.”
Egor cheerfully laughs at my words.
As I was chatting with Egor, Sonia entered the room.
“Ojii-san. It’s lunchtime.”
“Oh, sorry for the trouble. Elf young lady.”
Sonia was surprised by my presence but she immediately collected herself and placed Egor’s meal on
the table.
Thinking that she might bother us, Sonia bowed and silently left the room.
1157
“So you stay here because you are happy to be served by that girl huh?”
“That is one of the reasons.”
“Hmph, seems like you have taken a liking to her. It’s rare for you to stay behind for someone like
this.”
If Egor is a perverted grandpa who likes the company of young girls then the people at the guild
wouldn’t have so much trouble tracking him down.
This grandpa’s hobby is helping people. That’s why he kept wandering around the continent. It is rare
for him to stay behind for a specific person.
That Egor is now here for Sonia. Maybe if Clyde was here, Sonia would have been scouted to the Guild
already.
“It’s my duty to help those who ask for help. But…….even after the Spirit Turtle was subjugated, that
girl still seems like she asking for help………”
“Do you know about her circumstances?”
“I haven’t asked. I don’t think that she is willing to tell me.”
With an SS-rank adventurer like Egor, there is a high chance that Sonia can be saved.
However, Sonia herself probably hates the idea of involving him in her problem so she decided not to
say anything.
I can see that Sonia has changed.
I could say that she has grown up since the last time I met her. Compared to when she only used those
half-hearted plans back then, she is certainly different.
It seems that she is willing to be responsible for her actions now.
Thinking so, I briefly explain Sonia’s situation to Egor.
Hearing my explanation, Egor stays silent for a while.
“What you do with that information is up to you. I have a business to attend to so I will be excusing
myself now.”
Saying so, I was about to leave the place.
After all, I am only here to see how things go.
My real destination today is not this place.
However, when I was about to use transfer magic, Egor opened his mouth.
1158
“…….are you on your way to see the Third Prince?”
“That’s my plan. As an adventurer who must protect the people, I can’t overlook his actions. I will go
threaten him a bit.”
“I see…….hey, Silver. Will you be willing to do me a favor?”
“A favor for you huh? What on earth do you want me to do?”
Making an SS-rank adventurer indebted to me, not to mention the Lost Sword Saint himself, is a rare
opportunity.
Therefore, my interest was piqued.
“I want you to help the elf young lady.”
“If you want to help her, why don’t you do it yourself?”
“I am not good at negotiation. I can do nothing but cut. I can’t think of a way to save her parents
without bloodshed.”
“I am not a person who fancies a gentle method myself though?’
“But you have a way to save her right? For me, I can only think of finding out the hostages’ location
and forcefully take them away. That will not save that girl. I want that child to be free.”
“…….so you really like her huh.”
“Umu, I do like her. What about you? She chose to help the people even though her family was taken
hostage, don’t you think that someone like that is worth saving?”
Egor looks straight at me.
He is probably trying to assess what kind of person I am.
Egor is an SS-rank adventurer. If he decides to help her, he will definitely do it. If I refuse him, he will
surely resort to a forceful means.
It will surely cause confusion in the succession war and what more is that Egor will not be able to
enter the Empire anymore.
That is not a favorable development.
In the first place, what Gordon did can be judged to be a mistake as a soldier. A simple mistake.
Looking at it with the big picture, it was simply that two children were late to the evacuation, and
that’s the end of it. What made me couldn’t let such a thing pass is that I am an adventurer.
1159
It is impossible to defeat Gordon with this case. I can damage his reputation using Silver’s name but
that is still only harassment.
Then it would be far better if I can make Egor indebted to me now.
“Haa…..I understand. I will negotiate with the Third Prince and save her parents.”
“OH! I am grateful!”
“But since they have been involved in the succession war, their safety is no longer guaranteed. What
are you planning to do with that girl?”
“I will hide her parents in a safe place. For the elf young lady herself…….I’d love for her to be my
assistant. I have no sense of direction after all.”
“That is surprising. So you are finally willing to solve the problem that you have been ignoring for
hundreds of years huh?”
“Don’t put it like that. I have been trying to fix that many times already. I’ve even had people to stay by
myself. It is just that, they all couldn’t keep up with me.”
“To be fair, I think there are only a few people who can keep up with you.”
Since he’s a person that travels everywhere on a whim. He doesn’t listen to others and casually travels
across the continent with his own senses.
Surely, it would be hard to keep up with him. Moreover, he has an extreme case of having no sense of
direction.
It will be tough for Sonia but if she is by his side, her safety will be certain.
“Moreover, if I have the elf young lady by my side, the relationship between dwarves and elves might
be able to improve a little too.”
“That would be too optimistic. The elves won’t accept any half-elf.”
“I am not aiming for something so big. Not every elf accepts half-elves but it’s fine to do this little by
little. That is enough for me.”
His words carry the weight that only he who has been alive for so long could give.
Egor who is unrivaled in terms of life experience must have seen many unpleasant things in his life as
an SS-rank adventurer.
Despite that, Egor continues to help those who seek to be helped.
He believes that his action will eventually lead to something good.
“Little by little, huh…… that certainly sounds like you. Alright, I will believe in that too.”
1160
“Yes, that’s good. After all, all we can do is to influence the world to change little by little.”
I nod to Egor’s words and leave the place with transfer magic.
My destination is a fort at the northern border.
The hateful place for the Empire. It was the fort that the Crown Prince sortie from and met his tragic
end.
Gordon is now defending the northern border at this fort as the vice general of the northern border
defense force.
—————————
The place I transferred to was the entrance of that fort.
“Wh, Who are you!?”
“B, Black robe and silver mask!?”
“No way……don’t tell me……!?”
The soldiers who were guarding the gate gathered and hardened their defense but once they saw my
figure, all of them froze.
Well, that’s a matter of course I guess.
After all, it is unlikely for an SS-rank adventurer to come to a fort on the border like this.
“Tell Prince Gordon. Silver has come to see him.”
“Y, Yes sir!”
One of the soldiers salutes and rushes into the fort.
The rest of the soldiers took up their weapons and surrounded me in a half-circle formation. This is
probably due to their instinct as a soldier.
As long as they don’t know what I am going to do, they can’t just relax and wait around.
That situation continues for a while then the soldier who ran off as a messenger returned.
His face is terribly blue.
“Hm….quite a terrible complexion you have there.”
“Pr, Prince Gordon…..said that he will not see you, sir…….”
“I see. What is his reason?”
1161
“H, he said that he has no reason to meet you…….”
The soldier mutters as though he is about to collapse.
Hearing that, I put my hand on the soldier’s shoulder.
“I see. Good work.”
“Ah, m, my deepest apologies…..”
“No, it’s not your fault.”
Saying so, I slowly stepped forward.
The soldier who probably thought that the talk was finished and I am leaving made a frightening
expression.
To that soldier, I speak to him in a low voice.
“Even if he doesn’t have any reason to see me, I do have a reason to see him. I’m coming in.”
“Pl, please stop! Even if you are an SS-rank adventurer, forcing your way into a military facility
is…….Ah..Ahhh…..”
The surrounding soldiers who were holding their spears at me were hit by an intense magic power I
released fell on their butts.
I pass by the soldiers and open the gate.
“Think of this as me being polite since I didn’t just transfer directly inside. I am only here for a polite
visit. My aim is to only meet Prince Gordon after all. I have no intention to hurt anyone or break
anything. Of course, I will be counterattacking though.”
Saying so, I casually entered the fort.
At the same time, a soldier watching the event unfolded from a distance rings a bell that signals an
emergency.
“Emergency! It’s an emergency! S, Silver has invaded the fort!”
The report was so shocking for the northern border fort no less than the news of the Crown Prince’s
tragic end.
TLN: To be honest, the thought of leaving this chapter as a cliff crossed my mind. Well, if I do too many
cliffs my head might be on the spike though.
1162
SPT Chapter 175
Day 2.5, Considering heading out for the nearest Yakiniku restaurant
-Mr.Graverobber
A Warm Welcome
Seeing I entered the fort, the soldiers that fell on their butts stood up and tried to stop me.
They probably remembered their job as a soldier huh.
However, the moment they stood up, they staggered and stopped.
“It’s better not to overdo it. I have increased the concentration of magic power here. Those who are
not used to magic power won’t be able to endure it.”
Even if it’s just a little, everyone has magic power inside them. Only a few people can project that
power outside to produce magic.
These few become mages, excellent adventurers, and knights. It is rare for ordinary people to be
exposed to a large amount of magic power.
Now, the concentration of magic power I scattered is much higher than places that are said to be rich
in magic power. It may be possible for those who are familiar with magic to stand it but for ordinary
people, it would be hard to even stand.
“W, Wait……, Silver……..”
One of the soldiers crawls up to me and tries to grab my foot.
Nice guts he has there. But I can not afford to comply.
I walk out before the soldier grabs my foot.
Passing through the gate, I walked into an open area. In front of me is a group of bows carrying
soldiers.
“STOP! SILVER!”
“You are quite well trained huh.”
Dozens of soldiers managed to gather with bows and arrows within only a few minutes huh.
The man who seems to be their captain is raising his arm. If he swings that hand down, the soldiers
will probably shoot their arrows at me.
1163
However, I do not stop walking.
“Ugh! STOP! SILVER! This is a fort under command of the imperial army! Even if you are an SS-rank
adventurer, you can not have your way here!”
“If you can’t let me have my way then try to stop me. Rest assured. I will not fight back.”
“You bastard! Don’t look down on us! FIRE!! He’s an SS-rank adventurer, he won’t die from it!!”
Saying so, the captain gave his order to shoot.
Dozens of arrows enter my vision. However, I kept on walking without worrying about it.
The arrows approach me but when it enters within a certain distance from my body, it loses all
momentum and falls down.
The rain of arrows fell in front of me. As I looked at the scene before me, I spoke to them.
“You underestimated me quite a bit huh. Do you think that something like this can stop an SS-rank
adventurer?”
“Tsk! Magic huh! Surround him! He shouldn’t be able to defend against it from all directions!”
Saying so, the captain gave his order and reinforcements began to appear.
When the reinforcements took their position around me, the captain gave an order to fire arrows at
me from all directions.
However, the result doesn’t change. At a certain distance, the arrows simply lose their momentum and
fall to the ground.
As they were shooting their arrows at me, the soldiers experienced the concentrated magic power and
kneel down one after another.
“I don’t want you to call a child play like this a magic though.”
“A, Ahhh……”
Walking past the commander, I tap his shoulder. It’s not particularly a strong tap but the captain
collapses on the spot.
I was invading deeper inside but then a large soldier appeared in front of me. Behind him was a
platoon of about ten soldiers.
They have an unfamiliar weapon in their hands.
It looks like a crossbow but it isn’t a simple crossbow.
1164
A circular tube was attached at the bottom of the crossbow and there is a small jewel embedded in the
center of it.
The prototype weapon of the imperial army huh.
“Don’t move! Silver! Even if you can defend against ordinary bows, you will not leave unscathed with
this!”
“I can’t say that I can block it since it is a weapon I don’t know but I think that it would be impossible
to stop me with that you know?”
“Hmph! Know this! These are the [Prototype Magic Rotating Crossbows] that were used to battle
against the demons in the south!!”
In response to the command of the large soldier who should be their platoon leader, the soldiers
behind him pulled and held down the triggers.
Doing so, the magic power contained inside the jewel released and constantly fired arrows at me.
The rotation of the cylinder attached at the bottom of the crossbow repeatedly reloaded the crossbow
and allowed these crossbows a rapid-fire function.
The arrows that were fired at an unprecedented rate rapidly approaching me but the result is still the
same. The arrows lose their momentum and fall. The only difference is the amount of dust that rises
up as the arrows hit the ground.
Even seeing the risen dust, they didn’t stop firing.
So wasteful. That weapon turned a jewel into a disposable item. They might think that I am a good
guinea pig for their prototype weapon but this is just too reckless.
“Did we do it!!??”
“—Since it seems that your research was not enough, let me tell you this. No matter how prideful you
are about that crossbow, the one who defeated the demons in the south was not the army using that
weapon. It was me.”
“Un, Unscathed!?”
“Monsters, Demons, even a child knows which one is stronger. And I am stronger than a demon. Did
you really think that such a weapon would even leave a scratch on me?”
“HIIIIIIII!!!??”
As I walked toward them, they all threw down their crossbows and fell back.
That must have been their trump card huh. But as a trump card, those things are too weak.
While I was thinking so, I heard the sound of multiple horses galloping toward me.
1165
“All men, fall back!! We will take it from here!!”
“Cavalry!? Go get him!!”
Thinking that they are saved, the platoon cheers for the cavalries.
Five men on horseback rush at me with lance in hands.
However, when I glanced at it, the horses suddenly halted.
Due to that, their riders were thrown into the air.
They might get injured if they land just like that so I lightly wave my right hand and catch them with a
barrier.
“It is shallow of you to think that approaching me would work when the long-range attack did not.
Animals are more sensitive than humans. They won’t plunge themselves at someone who they
perceived as unbeatable unless you established a great deal of trust with them.”
I lower the riders that were caught inside a barrier to the ground.
While doing so, over a hundred soldiers gathered around me.
They have swords with them so they are probably trying to resort to close-quarter combat here.
“Just stop him! It would bring shame to our fort if words get out that a single man managed to breach
it!”
The commander holding up his sword to inspire his men.
However, the soldiers’ morale is low. It’s written on their face that they think that it is impossible to
stop me. Well, it is exactly the case so they might be the smarter one here huh.
However, being a soldier means that they have to obey the command from their superior.
And a reckless command to attack me was given.
“CHARGE!!”
The soldiers unwillingly approach me.
Blowing them away would be easy but it would be distasteful to hurt them.
Thinking so, I concentrated my magic power on my feet and instantly moved to the commander’s side.
The commander froze up when he noticed my sudden presence.
“Wha!?”
“What’s wrong? Aren’t you going to charge at me?”
1166
From behind my mask, I peer into the commander’s eyes.
The commander couldn’t move as if he was being stared down by a demon and fell down on the spot.
“You gave quite a reckless command earlier. Why don’t you lead your men by example then?”
“A, Ahhh….pl, please…….”
“I am not planning to eat you or anything. I just advise you to think about your order. If you order
them to recklessly come to attack me I will kill you. Keep that in mind.”
Saying so, I pass by the commander and head inside.
There is no longer any soldier who tries to stop me. They all are staring at me from a distance away.
They should understand it. The fact that I can erase this fort from existence if I feel like it.
Since I am not doing that means that I am not hostile toward them. I simply want to see Gordon.
After a while, I reached the castle located at the center of the fort. This is probably the residence of the
fort commander. Gordon probably lives here as well.
When thinking about such a thing, a big man jumped down from the castle’s window.
“UOOAAHHH!!!!”
The man loudly roars as he wields a large sword.
The sword that was swung down from above combined with the descending momentum approached
me at tremendous speed. However, just like what happened to the arrows, he simply slowed down
and stopped before me.
Lightly pushing the large sword to the side, I speak to the attacker.
“Quite a warm welcome you have here, Prince Gordon.”
“You lowly adventurer……!”
I’d like to thank you for coming out to meet me even though I am only a lowly adventurer. Even if you
didn’t come out here yourself, I would have come in to greet you though.”
I rudely speak to Gordon.
Perhaps he hates my attitude, Gordon frowns.
“Greeting? You bastard just broke in here.”
1167
“You could say that. But it was your fault to turn me away at the gate. I did declare my visit here. You
should be able to predict that I would do this right? I’m the man who can casually enter the imperial
sword castle you know?”
While mocking him for his inability to predict this development, I took my eyes off Gordon and bowed
to the man who appeared behind him.
“Excuse me for the commotion. General.”
“No, no, that truly served as a good training for my men. My soldiers should be more alert from now
on.”
This person is the commander of this fort and the leader of the Northern Border Defense Force.
His name is Rohos. He is known to be a cool-headed general and was assigned to the northern border
exactly because of his reputation. It could be said that Father was able to send Gordon here because he
has that much trust in him.
“You have business with General Gordon, correct? I will prepare a room for you.”
“You have my thanks.”
“Fortress Commander!!”
“It’s a seed you sowed yourself. You must clean this up on your own. General Gordon.”
“I HAVEN’T DONE ANYTHING WRONG!!”
“That will be for Silver to decide.”
Saying so, Rohos invites me in.
Gordon still looks bitter but he went inside the castle because he has no other choice.
Inside a room inside the castle, I and Gordon face each other.
Gordon is shutting his mouth with no intention to say anything.
“Do you know the reason I came here?”
“……no idea.”
“I see. Then let me tell you. Two children wandered into the battlefield while we were fighting the
Spirit Turtle. Elna von Amsberg had to protect them and that put us at a disadvantage in the battle.”
“And how is that my fault?”
“It was the children’s testimony but they said they met a unit of the imperial army and were told to
head to the forest.”
1168
“……..that’s just a child’s story.”
“Then I can just tell that to the Emperor right.”
With the atmosphere that says, ‘if that is your attitude then the talk is over’, I open a transfer gate.
The Spirit Turtle subjugation was an important matter for the Empire. Any action that gets in the way
of that is unforgivable. Gordon will lose the trust of the Emperor and won’t be allowed to attend the
upcoming anniversary ceremony.
He will be left to dry in the north. Even so, that doesn’t mean that he is out of the succession war.
However, he will be left in the dust.
Thus, Gordon stood up and held me back.
“Wait!”
“I thought that the talk was over though?”
“……I also have something that I want to talk to you about. Hear me out.”
“I see.”
My business is already over.
Gordon pulls me back to my seat with a bitter expression.
It was a humiliation for Gordon when he was assigned to the north. He probably doesn’t want his stay
to be prolonged.
“…….what is your aim?”
“Nothing. I will just report that children wandered into a battlefield because they were told so by the
army.”
“……. it was a reconnaissance unit I was leading. I did certainly say that they can rely on the unit in the
forest for evacuation.”
“Hou? Without giving them any escort?”
“……I just prioritized reporting to the main unit as a soldier.”
“You can just send out a messenger. If it’s the Emperor then he would insist on helping them you
know?”
“…..I want you to not mention this matter to Father.”
Gordon quietly bowed his head.
1169
I can’t see it but I can imagine what kind of expression he has right now.
His voice is shaking. This is probably a humiliation for him huh.
However, the crime of neglecting the lives of the people can not be forgiven with just that.
“I can’t simply do that.”
“I AM ALREADY BOWING MY HEAD YOU KNOW!?”
“Do you think that your head has that much worth?”
When I threw ridicule at Gordon, he stood up and reached for his sword as though he couldn’t stand it
anymore.
But I am not moving.
There is an absolute power gap between me and Gordon. If he wants to resort to violence then he is
welcome to try.
“Solving your problem with violence. If that is how you live then you will be left behind in the
succession war. Have you forgot that the person in front of you is an SS-rank adventurer?”
“Kuh…..!!”
“If you draw your sword then I will take it as a breakdown in the negotiation. What do you want to
do?”
Gordon’s hand that is grabbing his sword handle shakes violently.
He tried to pull out his sword many times but he clenched his teeth and sat down in the end.
Seeing that, I finally decided to start the real negotiation.
“Then let me state my demand. Release the family of your former strategist and swear that you will
never get involved with her again.”
“…..what kind of relationship do you have with Sonia?”
“It’s not me. Egor took a liking to her so he asked me a favor for her freedom.”
Hearing my demand, Gordon thinks a little and grins.
He then takes a piece of paper and writes something down.
“This is the place where Sonia’s parents are being held. I’m already done with her as a strategist
anyway.”
“I see.”
1170
I receive the paper and stand up.
Detailed directions were written on the paper. They are probably held at the destination.
Judging so, I created a transfer gate again but before I passed through it, I paused.
Then.
“Oh, let me tell you beforehand. Don’t forget that you are dealing with two SS-rank adventurers here.
Do consider what will happen if you lie to me here.”
“Wh, what are you talking about…..?”
“It would be better if you give up on the idea of stalling me using fake information while using Sonia as
a hostage to control Elder Egor. He is even more unreasonable than me you know?”
Gordon begins to sweat profusely and doesn’t say anything.
As I thought, he did think about such a shallow plan.
Well, it’s a Gordon-like plan. With him as her master, Sonia’s tactic would certainly be a waste.
Gordon clenches his teeth and writes down another location on a new piece of paper.
“…..the first one was where the family of the parents who raised her is being held. This one is the place
where her parents are.”
“So you confined them separately huh. Well, it’s natural to spread the risk. But I’m glad that you
changed your mind. You just narrowly escaped death, literally. No matter how much you love war, a
war with two SS-rank adventurers would be too much for you after all.”
Gordon simply stares at the desk without saying anything.
Snorting at the scene, I entered the transfer gate and left the fort.
1171
SPT Chapter 176
Day 3. I bought fried chicken for lunch today…….I need more…..
-Mr.Graverobber
The Genius Strategist’s View
After I returned to Egor, I immediately took Egor and Sonia to the location Gordon gave me.
This is because if we don’t act fast, Gordon might have time to contact his underlings if he changes his
mind.
At the first location, we found Sonia’s adopted grandparents.
They were confined in a small remote house but their treatment was decent. There was no visible
injury and they don’t seem to be sick either.
Of course, there were guards around but Egor immediately incapacitated them.
Then, we proceed to transfer to where Sonia’s step-father, the genius strategist is being held.
Same as the previous location, he was confined in a small house in a remote location, and Egor
immediately neutralized the guards before they could react.
“This is the end huh.”
Hearing that, Sonia quickly runs into the house.
Seeing that, I follow after her.
“Otou-san!!”
When she finds a man with glasses sitting on a chair inside, Sonia rushes up and hugs him.
Looking at such Sonia, the glasses man strokes Sonia’s head with a bitter smile.
“Hey, Sonia. How are you?”
“I’m sorry……I’m so sorry…..”
“What are you apologizing for? It was my fault in the first place. The one he wanted was me you know.
I’m sorry.”
As the man gently comforts Sonia, he turns to look at me.
He’s a delicate man. Moreover, he looks sickly as well.
1172
No matter how I look at him, he doesn’t look strong at all. Still, he does possess a unique atmosphere
around him.
So this is the man who once was called the genius strategist huh.
“It seems that you have taken good care of my daughter. Even a man who lives in the sticks like me
would recognize your appearance. It’s an honor to meet you, SS-rank adventurer, Silver.”
“The one who took care of her was not me.”
Saying so, I moved aside and Egor slowly entered the house.
As expected, he doesn’t recognize who Egor is but he probably understands that Egor is not a normal
person.
Sonia’s step-father quietly bowed and introduced himself.
“I am Sonia’s step-father, Kevin Laspade. Thank you for taking care of my daughter.”
“No, no, I didn’t do anything. It was Silver who did everything up to this point. My role is to take care
of things from now on. I will guarantee everyone’s safety and make sure that you don’t have to be
involved with any political conflict ever again. Rest assured. Even like this, I am still an SS-rank
adventurer. The name is Egor. but it might be easier to recognize me if I say that I am the Lost Sword
Saint huh.”
At that revelation, Kevin was slightly surprised and his eyes opened a little.
He probably thought that Egor is a powerful dwarf but he probably didn’t think that two SS-rank
adventurers would be cooperating to help Sonia like this.
He looks at Sonia who is still hugging him while crying and speaks to her in a small voice.
“You have recruited such an excellent help huh. I have been thinking up all kinds of plans but it seems
that we will be safe with this.”
“It……was just a coincidence…….I have only been escalating the problem.”
“Your responsibility is my responsibility. You don’t have to worry so much about it. And you know, I
never thought two of the SS-rank adventurers would come to help us. There are only five of them in
this continent you know.”
“Well, your daughter was worth helping. That’s why I asked Silver to cooperate with me. I wonder
why Silver moved though.”
Saying so, Egor glances at me.
It seems that Egor is doubting why I gave him my cooperation so readily.
“This is a cheap price if I can sell you a favor, Elder Egor.”
1173
“You would never move with that kind of reason.”
Seeing him insist on finding out my reason, I sigh.
Egor is convinced that I have an ulterior motive. And in truth, I do have one.
“I didn’t do that for my own benefit though.”
“So it was a request from your collaborator huh?”
“You could say that. He regretted that he couldn’t save her so I just lent her my power in his place.”
There was something I could do to immediately save her.
I simply didn’t do it because there were too few benefits for me.
It was not an impossibility to rescue the hostages when I learned that Sonia’s parents were taken.
But in the end, I did temporarily abandon Sonia after I weighed the options. The benefits of helping
her simply don’t match the time and effort it would take.
Leo would have tried to help her immediately but that is the proof of both his strength and weakness.
I am here to make up for that. That is why I can not act like Leo.
“As her father, I want to hear the name of your collaborator. Could you tell me his name? Silver.”
“…..Sonia Laspade. Do you have any idea who it is?”
“…….Your collaborator that would regret not being able to help me……? Was it Prince Leonard?”
“Close. It was his elder brother.”
“No, way……Al-kun…….?”
With an unbelievable expression on her face, Sonia covers her mouth with both of her hands.
I could see the tears in her eyes.
“The Seventh Prince, Arnold Lakes Adler. That is the name of my collaborator and the man who
regretted not being able to help you.”
“Did you become friends with him?”
Sonia shakes her head at Kevin’s question.
“I am not his friend……I only……deceived him……”
“I don’t think that the other side thinks of you like that. He was worried about you. That was why I lent
you my help. This is probably the case of what goes around comes around huh.”
1174
“But…….I haven’t done anything……”
“That’s probably how twins are. Their naivety of not being able to abandon anyone is similar to each
other.”
Saying so, I turn back.
It would be fine to let Egor take care of the rest.
If Sonia is by Egor’s side she will be safe. Plus, Egor’s sense of direction might be able to improve a
little too.
Even if that is not the case, Sonia has the right to spend her time with her family.
No matter how much she is well-versed in tactic, Sonia is still an ordinary person. A victim of the
succession war. After all, she only served Gordon because she had no other choice.
No one can blame her even if she wants to spend her days in peace. Egor surely knows the place she
can do that.
“Then I will excuse myself here. I still have to help those naive twin princes. Someone like the Third
Prince might become an emperor if I don’t after all.”
I say so and step out of the house.
However, Kevin suddenly stopped me.
“Silver, please wait a moment.”
“What is it? I can introduce you if you want to become those princes’ strategist though.”
“Unfortunately, I am not brave enough to join the succession war. But please tell this to the princes.
[There is something wrong with this succession war].”
“….What do you mean?”
I’ve heard those words somewhere before.
Thinking back a little, I recalled that it came up in my conversation with Elna.
It was not Elna’s words but they were the words of Elna’s father, the Brave.
The same opinion comes up again huh. Moreover, this time it came from a man who was called the
genius strategist too.
“……A lot of horrible things have happened in the past succession wars. Family slaughtering each
other, that is how a succession war is.”
1175
“That’s right. It is as bloody as I have heard. From your perspective how does this succession war look
to you?”
“It seems that a few members of the imperial family have changed in this succession war. Surely, it is
normal for someone to change after experiencing a horrible conflict but the change this time is simply
too much.”
“Too much?”
“Three years ago, when the Crown Prince died, the succession war began. And the three prime
candidates have significantly changed. Princess Zandra became crueler, Prince Gordon became more
violent, and Prince Eric became cold-hearted.”
“Don’t you think that they simply show their true nature because of the allure of the throne?”
“People do not change that dramatically. At the very least, a person wouldn’t forget the lesson he has
already learned in the past.”
“What do you mean?”
At my question, Kevin looks straight at me.
There is no lie in my words. That was what his eyes were telling me.
“It might be hard to believe but…….as far as I know, Since his first campaign, Prince Gordon was a
general who listened to others’ opinions. At the very least, my old colleagues have advised Prince
Gordon for many years and he has taken their advice to heart. In his first campaign, he didn’t listen to
my advice and charge at the enemy head-on while aiming to gain military achievements. In exchange
for his achievement, many sacrifices were made. That was when he changed.”
“Is that true? That Third Prince really changed?”
“Yes. After that, Prince Gordon changed. Although he was still arrogant, he realized that he needed
advisers and began to listen to his staff. Through the lesson he learned from his first campaign, he
changed. He became a general after he repeatedly obtained military achievement one after another.
His Majesty isn’t so sweet on his son that he would promote him to a rank of general if his son always
solved any problem with violence. Such a person rejected all of Sonia’s proposals. I have received a lot
of letters from him. It said, ‘your daughter is useless so just come and take her place’. Even now, I still
can’t find his change to be believable.”
Maybe I didn’t notice it because I was too close to the problem.
Gordon has changed that much huh. I thought that he has always been arrogant and tends to solve any
problem with force.
That’s why I was elated to see Gordon’s humiliated expression earlier.
However, if he really learned his lesson in the past then—–his present condition is certainly strange.
1176
He learned his lesson after a failure and he has been successful ever since he changed himself.
Would he really throw away such a lesson after he became so successful because of it?
“So you think that his change came from him getting involved with the succession war?”
“That’s right. I don’t know the exact reason. Maybe something happened that I didn’t know
about……But….he did learn his lesson after he witnessed the disaster of his first campaign. And when I
served under him….even though he didn’t listen to my advice, he was serious about protecting the
Empire.”
“Time changes people……all the more so when all you think about are political maneuvering and how
to outdo your rivals. But you of all people should have known that already.”
“Yes…..but I do feel that something besides those factors has changed Prince Gordon.”
Kevin affirmed his point.
It was something that the Brave and the genius strategist himself noticed.
Moreover, Kevin’s opinion is based on how he views the succession war from a distance.
“When Prince Wilhelm became the Crown Prince, everyone was hopeful about the Empire’s future but
they also sympathized with the other candidates. Prince Eric, Prince Gordon, and Princess Zandra,
they all can become a great emperor in their own right. From simply what I heard, I know that they
were all evaluated highly by many people. I can’t believe that to be true when I see them as they are
now. If you are saying that their current condition is strange…..then it must be true. I understand, I
will tell that to the Princes.”
“Thank you. And please be careful. Even if you are an SS-rank adventurer, this succession war is
simply too dangerous. If you plunge yourself in any deeper, you will be drawn in and you will not be
able to return.”
“Don’t worry. I am fully aware of that.”
Saying so, I tried to transfer away but this time Sonia called out to me.
“Silver! Uh! Please tell Al-kun…….thank you……and that I am sorry……”
“Understood. I will just give him your thanks then. After all, that person wouldn’t want for anything
more than that.”
Saying so, I returned to the imperial capital through the transfer gate.
1177
SPT Chapter 177
Day 3.5, my Yakiniku craving is still unsatiated……..MEATT
-Mr.Graverobber
——————————-
The Thing He Forgot
When I got back to the imperial capital, Sebas welcomes me back.
“Welcome back, sir.”
“Yeah, I’m back.”
As usual, I remove my silver mask, take off the black robe, and change into my clothes.
After that, I sit down and tiredly lean back on my chair.
“You look tired, sir.”
“Yeah, I’m tired. In the first place, the magic power I used in the battle with the Spirit Turtle still hasn’t
recovered and the negotiation really took a strain on my mental health too.”
“A negotiation, sir?”
“Yeah, I’ve negotiated with Gordon to free Sonia. Her family that got taken hostage is under Egor’s
protection now.”
“That is good news. Now there is no one we have to watch out for in His Highness Gordon’s faction
anymore.”
I nod to Sebas’s words.
Looking at the Spirit Turtle incident, I can’t imagine Sonia comes up with any plan for Gordon but if
her family is still in his hand, anything can happen.
In the worst-case scenario, Kevin himself might be the one serving under Gordon with Sonia as a
hostage. In that regard, this one case is quite big.
“I was able to sell a favor to Elder Egor. it’s not a bad deal.”
“A weight has been lifted off your mind as well doesn’t it. Don’t you think that this is a thing to
celebrate, sir?”
I smile bitterly at Sebas’s words.
1178
After all, it seems that I can’t hide anything from this butler of mine.
“Well, that’s right. It’s great that Sonia was saved. I feel like I have been able to unload a burden off my
mind for once.”
“She was someone who you didn’t have the chance to save even though you want to after all. If
possible, I’d like her to be on our side though.”
“It’s well known that Sonia is Gordon’s strategist. Even if she wishes to join us, we wouldn’t be able to
take her in immediately.”
“That’s true. We already have Vin-dono as well.”
“Right, we already caused enough fusses by recruiting Vin as our strategist, if we recruit an enemy
strategist this time, our faction might be split in half after all. We don’t have time to deal with that.”
The 25th-anniversary celebration for my father’s coronation will begin soon.
Guests from all over the world will gather in the Empire and a big festival will be held inside the
imperial capital.
At that time, we, the Emperor’s children will be in charge of entertaining the VIP guests of each
country.
The Empire is one of the top three superpowers in the continent.
We still have two rivals to worry about.
One is the Kingdom of Perlan to the west, another is the Sokol empire in the east.
It is widely recognized that the Empire is by far the best in terms of size and influence but as long as
we stay at the top, the others will come to take our place. That’s why the Empire has been keeping a
certain balance.
The one who will receive one of the VIPs from those two countries will definitely be Eric.
The problem is another one.
By the time the ceremony begins, Father will call back Gordon. Will he appoint Gordon or Leo to do
that job? Looking at the result of the succession war so far, the answer is clear.
If things go well, Leo will be appointed but if a scandal occurs, that might change.
Since it is almost certain that Leo will get that job, I saved Sonia using the information that could be
used to damage Gordon.
Still, without that information, Gordon might be appointed to the job. With that being the case, Leo
might be seen as his substitute. We can not allow that to happen.
1179
“We have to show the foreign dignitaries that Leo has risen above Gordon. it’s time for people to know
that Leo has climbed up to the 2nd place in this succession war and start making foreign connections.”
“It is finally the time.”
“We are not there yet. The aim is to stand at the top, the Emperor’s throne. Leo isn’t let his guard
down either. After all, our strongest enemy is still reigning at the top.”
“Certainly, Prince Eric is still unharmed so far.”
“It is not just being unharmed. Gordon and Zandra’s supporters are flowing into his camp. His faction
is much better an option than us who were in direct conflict with them. No matter what kind of
struggle we have gone through, Eric’s position at the top is unwavering. It was because he is fully
aware of that, that he doesn’t move so far.”
“So he simply stayed still to strengthen his power.”
“Yes, and he doesn’t have to worry about Father’s mood as well. Zandra and Gordon wanted the seat
of the Emperor. That was clear in Father’s eyes. That was why the hit they took was so strong. But Eric
is different. He has shown no such ambition for the throne. He simply took it for granted that the
throne would be his. Father likes how confident he is and how he is thinking about what would
happen once he becomes the emperor.”
In the end, Eric is still the first choice. The other two were running out of control because Eric was
reigning supreme over them so they have to resort to extreme means.
Even so.
“Sebas…..do you think that those three have changed?”
“Compared to when His Highness the Crown Prince was still alive, sir?”
“Yeah, that’s right.”
“Yes, they have changed. Very much so.”
“I see……I was told the same by Sonia’s stepfather. He said that there is something wrong with this
succession war. Do you think so too?”
“…….a succession war is a conflict that will occur every half a century, sir. All of the emperors have
fought in such a battle before.”
“True. if it gets out of hands, it is the duty of the Emperor at the time to get it under control.”
“Yes. I have read the records of the past succession wars and I still remember the previous one as well.
If I take those things into account—–this succession war is definitely strange, sir.”
I turned silent at Sebas’s words.
1180
Now it’s three people. Sebas was active as an assassin in the last succession war. Of course, he would
have detailed information about it. As Sebas says, at least this succession war is different from the last
one.
“What do you think is strange about it?”
“In the past, there was rarely any candidate that would consider a move that would damage the
Empire. Even if they are completely cornered, both Princess Zandra and Prince Gordon resorted to
causing a civil war to create a situation where they can retain their power. Prince Eric who has been
looking down at this situation from above is the same. When you become an emperor, the Empire will
be yours. Intentionally damaging something that will eventually become yours is too illogical. This is
certainly strange, sir.”
“So they think that as long as their faction survives, they can reverse the situation later huh. This is
certainly unnatural.”
It would be too illogical to say that they were simply too stupid.
If I use that reason then there is a question of when have they become such an idiot.
At least when the Crown Prince was still alive, both Zandra and Gordon were highly evaluated by
everyone.
“…..this thing might be deeper than I thought huh.”
“Even so, the thing that you must do still hasn’t changed, sir.”
“Exactly. If the three of them have changed, it is all the more reason that we can’t let them become an
emperor. Both for mine and my family’s sake.”
“Shouldn’t you say that it is for the Empire’s sake, sir?”
“Thinking about that is Leo’s job.”
Sebas makes a troubled smile at my reply.
As we were chatting, I heard a knock from the door.
When I told them to come in, Finne came into the room with Christa and Rita behind her.
“Sorry for intruding.”
“What’s wrong? You have quite a party with you today.”
“You have been turning them away because of your busy work after all, sir.”
Sebas smoothly follows up for me.
I see, that’s the excuse he used while I was away huh. Thinking so, I stroke Christa’s head.
1181
“My bad, Christa. I’m sorry.”
“UUn…..Nii-sama is busy so I asked Finne to play with me.”
“Is that so. Sorry about that. Finne too.”
“No, it’s nothing. I wasn’t the one who played with Her Highness after all.”
Saying so, Finne directed her sympathy filled eyes in the direction of Rita.
Sieg is being hugged tight in Rita’s arms.
It seems that he was a toy rather than a playmate though.
He should have just arrived back on a fast horse together with Lynfia and Leo too. How pitiful.
“That’s right. Nii-sama. Look.”
Said Christa as she approached Rita.
He should have sensed the danger to himself but Sieg doesn’t react in any way. It seems his mind has
gone blank already.
To such Sieg, Christa holds his head while Rita grabs onto his foot.
Then they started slowly pulling him into opposite directions.
“I’m stretching, I’m stretching…….stretchin—g……”
Sieg repeatedly mutters in a small voice.
So he has broken already huh.
However, when he was stretched to a certain level, he suddenly shouted as though he regained his
consciousness.
“I’M STRETCHING TOO MUCH!? IT HURTS!!!”
“It’s amazing right!? Al-nii! Sieg can be stretched a lot you know!!”
“Sieg….fluffy.”
“That’s a weird way to play huh. How did you come up with it?”
“When Sieg tried to look under a woman’s skirt……Lynfia stopped him and taught us that we can play
with him like this.”
“I see. You can stretch him more, you know.”
“Like hell they can!? I’m stretching too much already! R-E-L-E-A-S-E-M-E!!”
1182
Sieg desperately shakes his body while shouting ‘Like hell I would become a children’s toy’.
Although he is swaying up and down, he couldn’t escape the hand of the two children.
The scene was too comical so I ended up laughing at it but without missing that Sieg flares up.
“DON’T YOU DARE LAUGH!!?? KID! YOU ARE THEIR GUARDIAN SO DO SOMETHING ABOUT THIS
SITUATION!!”
“I see. Sorry about that.”
I apologize and make the collar around his neck heavier.
Unable to support the sudden weight, Christa and Rita released their hands from Sieg.
Sieg then slammed onto the ground with a loud noise.
“Alright, done.”
“ISN’T THERE ANY BETTER WAY TO DO THAT!!?? YOU MIGHT ALREADY FORGET BUT I AM STILL AN
S-RANK ADVENTURER YOU KNOW!!”
After proclaiming so, Sieg became frozen for some reason.
Then he clapped his hands together as though he just remembered something.
“That’s right. I am an S-rank adventurer…..!”
So you forgot about it yourself huh.
Just how comfortable has he become with that body.
“Hey! Kid! What about the deal that you would try to turn me back to normal!”
“That’s quite a thing you say when you forget about it yourself. I will tell Silver about you where there
is an opportunity. Be patient until then.”
“Don’t joke around! Certainly, with this body, I can do all kinds of things with cute girls and since I can
see things from below, I can enjoy a lot of views too, wait, everything’s good isn’t it!”
“Then there’s no problem right. Just stay like that for a while.”
“But I can’t do the good stuff with the girls right! I want to do the good stuff with a cute girl!!”
“Good stuff?”
“I’m just talking to myself. Don’t mind me.”
Since he was making an inappropriate joke in front of the children, I made his collar turn super heavy.
1183
“GYAAAAA!!?? I’m going to sink into the floor!!!!”
Christa and Rita worriedly poke at him but Sieg only gets more riled up. However, he doesn’t resist the
two children and completely turns into their toy.
“The tea is ready.”
“GIVE ME ONE TOO!!!!!”
Since he was trying to crawl his way toward Finne, I made the collar even heavier.
He really is a relentless guy. If I keep quiet about it for a while, he will probably forget that he is an S-
rank adventurer again huh.
Let’s leave him like that until he forgets.
Thinking so, I sip on my tea.
1184
SPT Chapter 178
Warning, this chapter is very cultured. Please prepare to be cultured reading this cultured chapter.
Mr.Graverobber
Lolifu and Erofu
(TLN: Loli+Elf and Eroi + Elf)
“L, Lolifu is coming to the Imperial Capital!?”
“It’s Elf.”
I was so amazed at him, I had a headache.
In front of me is the Fourth Prince Traugott. The weirdest person in the Imperial Family.
Hearing what I came to say to him, Trau-niisan excitedly draws up a picture of a small elf.
“Lolifu! Oh! Lolifu! Why are you such a Lolifu!”
I can’t say that his painting is any good but, to find out why I am having this conversation with him, we
have to turn the time back a few hours.
—————————
“A dignitary from the Elf Village?”
“That’s right. I didn’t get my hope up when I sent over the messenger but they replied that they
absolutely want to participate this year.”
Father told me that inside the throne room.
The Elf Village is located in a large forest in the western part of the continent. It has a strong barrier
covering their territory and they don’t have much interaction with the outside world.
That’s why Father was surprised that they would send someone over.
“That’s surprising.”
“It seems that the eldest daughter of their Elder is deeply interested in humans. Perhaps, it was due to
her request, Your Highness.”
“The eldest daughter of the Elven Elder, so in other words, the elf princess will be coming to visit us?”
“That’s right.”
1185
The Elder of the Elf Hidden Village is the leader of the elves. Being connected to that Elder by blood
would mean that she is royalty.
“So, why did you call me here?”
“I want someone from the imperial family who will not stir up trouble to be the elf’s entertainer. You
are good at that right?”
“Well, I don’t like making things troublesome after all. But it’s a rare occasion that we will have a
dignitary from the Elf Village, will it really be fine for me to take that duty?”
“The others have too much personality. It would be no good to offend them after all. It’s just
that……there is one problem.”
“What is it? Please spare me from any trouble okay?”
“Your Highness Arnold. There is already someone who nominated you to be their entertainer…….”
A dignitary that would nominate me to be their entertainer.
Well, it must be her.
“I can pretty much guess who it is but…….who is it?”
“The Celestial Princess said that she wants you to be her entertainer for the event.”
“Haa……then what do you intend to do?”
“My apologies but……..could you take care of both of them?”
“So you want me to die from stress?”
“That’s how it is, Your Majesty.”
Franz looks at Father with a side glance and makes an expression that says ‘See, I told you.’
Seeing that, Father frowns.
I already have a hard enough time taking care of Orihime alone and they want to add an elf princess to
my laps too?
“Then do you have anyone else who would be suitable to take care of her?”
“If we leave aside the other three candidates for the throne then how about letting Trau-niisan do it?”
“Trau…….He’s the weirdest person in our family you know?”
“If it’s an elf then he should be fine right? His strike zone is very narrow after all.”
If you are cute you are Justice.
1186
Trau-niisan lives with that principle but his preference is only girls in the middle of their teens. He
doesn’t have any interest in anyone older than that.
In the first place, what he is most interested in is girls in their early teenage years. He likes them
enough to describe them as humanity’s treasure.
Therefore it should be fine for him to be around a girl whose age already past that period.
“Trau-niisan is capable if he gets serious and he is the son of the Empress as well. In terms of status, I
think that he should be enough to welcome an elf dignitary.”
“But……do you really think that he will judge people based on their age?”
“Well, he will definitely judge them from their appearance first.”
Age is also important but since he likes small and cute girls, if their appearance looks like a girl while
their age is different, he shouldn’t mind their age. He might just simply focus on her bust too.
“I don’t know the exact age of the Elf Elder’s eldest daughter. If her outer appearance looks young then
he might be the worst candidate for this right.”
“That is true……I can’t deny that.”
“However, leaving two dignitaries in His Highness Arnold’s care is not realistic as well.”
“That’s true. Arnold. For now, try bringing this up to Trau. You can judge if we can leave it to him from
his reaction.”
“Understood.”
————————————-
And that’s why I am having this conversation with Trau-niisan.
“AHH! GOD! How blessed I am to be able to entertain the Lolifu!!”
This is a mistake.
Trau-niisan’s love for Loli Elf is much greater than anticipated.
There would be no problem if an adult elf comes but in case of a young elf, this would be a huge
mistake. I will have to change places with him as their entertainer on the spot and Trau-niisan will
definitely resist.
As I thought, I can’t let him do this.
“Trau-niisan, we were just talking hypothetically you know? It’s not decided that you will be given the
job alright.”
1187
“Excluding the three candidates, I am the best person for the job in terms of status! Dufufu. This is as
good as a sealed deal!”
“…………”
He is being strangely smart now.
He takes a look at the situation as a whole and concludes that he has the highest chance of winning.
After all, he may act like a fool but he isn’t an idiot.
“In the end, Father will be the one who decides it. You might even be assigned to entertain the
Celestial Princess instead you know?”
“That is good too. I have been eyeing her fox ears all this time after all……Dufufu.”
“…..tsk.”
So this is a no go too huh.
I really can’t use Trau-niisan.
While looking at the still excited Trau-niisan, I made the decision and left the room with a sigh.
But this is bad.
If I can entrust neither the elf nor Orihime to Trau-niisan, my hands will be full during the event.
I have to avoid that.
Thinking so, I returned to my room.
“Welcome back. Oh? Is there something wrong, sir?”
Inside the room were Finne, Sebas, and Sieg.
Since Sieg seems to be tired, he must have just finished his duty as Christa and Rita’s toy huh.
“Yeah, something big.”
“What might it be?”
I thank Finne who brewed me the tea and briefly explained the situation to them.
“Dignitary from the Elf Village will be attending the ceremony. If I can’t find a suitable person to take
care of her, I will be stuck with both Orihime and the elf dignitary at the event.”
“Erofu you say!?”
“It’s Elf……”
1188
Why are there so many people with bad ears today?
Sieg was suddenly invigorated and excitedly joined the conversation.
“A Bombshell Erofu is coming!?”
“It’s Elf for god sake! In the first place, how can you know her figure! You don’t even know her age
right!”
“But elves are all beautiful right? I wonder what kind of Erofu will come.”
Seeing Sieg doing a dirty old man laugh while imagining the elf in his mind, I hold my head.
I wonder why there are so many idiots around me.
“What should we do…..if a really beautiful elf-san come to visit us then we might have to leave Sieg-san
outside the castle too…….”
“Finne-sama!? You are firing me!? No way! I won’t take a single step from here!!”
Wrapping his arms around the chair, Sieg declares that he will never move from this place.
Then, I heard a knocking sound from the door.
“Hey, Nii-san. Actually–”
“Elf.”
“Eh? Ah, that’s right. I was thinking about talking to you about that…….”
Leo got surprised a little when I brought up the elf before he could.
Good. it seems that my brother is still a decent person.
“Sorry. I misjudged you.”
“Umm, I don’t know what you are talking about but……Okay. A dignitary from the Elf Village is coming,
right? That’s why Nii-san is looking for a suitable person to be their entertainer.”
“That’s right. I am having a hard time finding a suitable person.”
“Yeah, about that. Can you leave that to Christa?”
“Christa? Well, I don’t have a problem with that but Father doesn’t consider using Christa and our
youngest brother for this ceremony you know?”
Any member of the imperial family is treated as a child before they reach 15.
That’s why Father is not considering Christa and my youngest brother.
1189
It could be taken as an insult if you assign a child for entertaining duty so it would be a problem if the
other party was offended by it.
“That is true but how about we have Finne-san and Christa do it together? Finne-san is the Emperor’s
favorite and she also has the title of the Blau Mowe. It is well-known that it is not an exaggeration to
treat her as a part of the imperial family as well. So, I think that it would be fine if we have Finne-san
help Christa do this.”
“Leo……you are a genius.”
That was a blind spot.
I couldn’t find a suitable person because my scope only covers the imperial family. Anyone would be
fine as long as the guest isn’t offended.
Christa with Finne’s support. The Elves wouldn’t be offended since their dignitary will be taken care of
by the Emperor’s favorite daughters.
Perfect. And more importantly, they are both girls.
“Let’s go with this.”
“N-O-W-A-Y-!! I want to meet Erofu!!”
“If you don’t cut that out I will throw you out of the castle you know?”
“Don’t treat me like a pet damn it!!”
I pulled Sieg, who clings to my leg in protest, off and threw him on the sofa.
After that, Leo’s proposal was accepted and it was decided that Christa and Finne will be taking care of
the elf dignitary.
After it was announced, Tru-niisan was crying while punching the floor but well, that couldn’t be
helped I guess.
After all, too much love is dangerous.
For the time being, a problem was solved.
1190
SPT Chapter 179
Special thanks to DeliciousBurgundy!! You, sir, just funded my FGO summer endeavor!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Saint and the Dominion
A few days after Christa and Finne were chosen to receive the elven dignitary.
Eric, Leo, and I were summoned by Father.
I understand why he called Eric and Leo. After all, he will probably tell them which dignitary of the
two major countries they will be assigned to welcome.
But why was I summoned too?
Orihime already nominated me as her entertainer so my assignment is set in stone already. If Father
goes out of his way to cancel that, not only it will lower the Empire’s reputation but Orihime will not
be so favorable toward the Empire as well.
While thinking about such a thing, I finally arrived at the throne room.
Father, Franz, Eric, and Leo were already waiting for me inside.
“You are late, Arnold.”
“I was intending to be here early though.”
“Just run here next time.”
“If you are fine with me being tired and couldn’t talk then I will do so.”
Father raised his brows at my reply but from his side, Franz cleared his throat to remind him to start
the meeting.
I guess this is no time to discuss such a topic huh.
“Hmph…..Eric, Leonard. I am going to decide which country you will be assigned to at the ceremony
now. Do you have any requests regarding that?”
“As long as it is Father’s decision, I have no qualm against it.”
Leo gives a safe answer first.
To that, Eric immediately replied.
1191
“I wish to welcome the dignitary from the Sokol empire.”
“Hou? And what is your reason?”
“It is a country that I have visited many times as the Minister of Foreign Affairs, they should be more
familiar with me than Leonard.”
“So you think that they would not be so favorable toward Leonard?”
“Eleven years ago, the dwarves have fled the Sokol empire to our Adraxia Empire. They know that at
the time Leonard’s mother, Mitsuba-dono was involved in allowing them into our country. Still, they
shouldn’t know the exact details of what happened.”
Saying so, Eric glances at me.
He is probably trying to imply that ‘it was the mess you made’ but well, it’s already in the past. There’s
nothing I can do about it now so I just shrug and let it pass.
Seeing that, Eric lightly exhales and continues speaking.
“With the dwarves incident, there are probably many who don’t have good feelings toward Mitsuba-
dono so I think that it would be better for me to entertain the guests from the Sokol empire myself.”
“Hmm, what do you think? Franz.”
“It is as His Highness Eric said. We do not have time to cause extra problems as well.”
“I see. Then Eric will be assigned to the dignitary from the empire. Are you alright with that? Leonard.”
“I do not mind.”
Saying so, Leo bows without saying anything more.
He knew that it would be like this, that’s why he gave Father a safe answer. Between the empire and
the Kingdom, the people of the Empire are more favorable toward the Sokol empire. The duty to
entertain the dignitary from the empire is important but Eric has many acquaintances in the Sokol
empire. If we can’t win no matter how much effort we put in then it would be better to not take that
fight in the first place.
After all, there are only two choices here. It’s not a bad thing for Leo to be left with the leftover one.
“Then Leonard, you will be assigned to the dignitary from the Kingdom.”
“I think that is good. The representative from the Kingdom also wanted either His Highness Leonard
or His Highness Arnold to be their host as well.”
“Me and Leo?”
I unintentionally reacted since it piqued my interest.
1192
The Kingdom has been at war with the Empire since eleven years ago. Since then, we have been
gradually deepening the relationship with each other.
We have been dispatching people to go to their side while the other side also sent someone over. It
should be someone who they sent over in the past but, was there anyone who got along with me and
Leo that well?
For a moment, I dive into the sea of my memory.
But before I remembered that person, Leo arrived at the answer.
“Don’t tell me…..[Saint]-sama will be coming to visit us?”
“Exactly. So you immediately know who it is huh?”
“…….I still remember her after all. She only stayed with us for 2 days though.”
“That’s right. It seems that she still remembers her time here. Arnold seems to have forgotten it
though.”
“If you mention her I would remember.”
That’s right.”
Five years ago. At the time when we were only 13 years old, we spent two days with a girl from the
Kingdom.
The girl who was one year older than us was called the [Saint].
Two years before we met, the girl who was 12 years old at the time held a legendary staff in her hands
and saved the Kingdom of Perlan which was at war with multiple countries.
As the Kingdom and the Empire were locked in a stalemate, that Saint came to visit the Empire as the
Kingdom’s ambassador.
It was a coincidence that we were able to become acquaintances. The two of us met her when she
happened to be talking with our mother.
I still remember how I enjoy those two days.
I see. So she still remembers us huh.
“The Saint Saviour of the Kingdom of Perlan, Leticia. So, she will be representing the Kingdom this
time huh.”
“That’s right. The Kingdom seems to want to conclude the treaty with us soon. The reason that the
Saint herself will be coming here is the declaration of that.”
1193
“It was always her who lessened the tension at the border after all. Her decision in nominating her
entertainer here might be a political one as well.”
“I will do my best.”
Leo said with a face full of motivation.
Seeing him like that, I lightly sigh. The important talk should be over now.
“So? Why did you call me here?”
“……there is a little troublesome matter.”
“Another troublesome thing again huh………please don’t push something like that to me anymore.”
“A dignitary from the Cornix Dominion will be coming, Your Highness.”
The moment Franz said that my head went blank for a moment.
The reason is that I just heard the name of a country that has no business coming here.
I, Leo, and Eric silently give Father a sharp gaze.
Father slightly narrowed his eyes and took it.
“Are you sane?”
The voice was so emotional that I was surprised that it was Eric’s voice.
The emotion imbued in that voice was anger. Both mine and Leo’s anger also doesn’t lose to him
“The Cornix Dominion…..It was them that killed Wilhelm three years ago you know!?”
“That’s right! Even if they are now a part of the Egret United Kingdom, a country that tried to evade
the responsibility and blame what happened on some random vassal has no right to be here!? Father!!
They took Wilhelm’s life!!”
The throne room is heating up.
That was how hated the country that took the life of the Crown Prince is.
The Cornix Dominion is a country to the north of the Empire. It used to be an independent nation but
since its defeat by the United Kingdom of Egret (TLN: Kanji read the Alliance of Island Nations), it was
now incorporated into the United Kingdom. However, because they are now a semi-independent
country, they still have a certain degree of autonomy.
Our eldest brother, Wilhelm the Crown Prince, died in the battle that took place at the border of the
Cornix Dominion. Their explanation was only that some of their vassals went out of control and only
offered us the head of some random vassal as an apology.
1194
Of course, the Empire was furious. Many voiced their opinions that we should destroy their whole
country but the death of the Crown Prince, who was the excellent successor, took a toll on Father and
he lost the energy to make a counterattack on them.
Apart from that, Father thought that what happened might have been an assassination that would
have been unrelated to the Dominion. One could say that he spent so much time investigating that and
eventually missed the chance for the counterattack.
That’s why the root of the problem is still unsolved.
To the mass, they see the Cornix Dominion as their sworn enemy
Even Leo who was usually calm was angry at the Dominion’s response when they denied all
responsibility and blamed everything on their vassal.
His anger from that time probably resurfaced.
“That matter——is already in the past. We must set our sights forward from now on. The other side
wanted to reconcile with us. Brushing them off would be ill-mannered.”
“However!”
Leo was still unconvinced but he didn’t say anything more when he saw Father’s eyes. Even Father
still couldn’t fully come to terms with this. That was what his eyes were saying.
“So you want me to be their entertainer for the event?”
“Can I ask you to do that? A VIP from the United Kingdom will be coming as well. I am intending to
have Gordon take care of that.”
“…….Can I have some time to think it over?”
“Very well. If you don’t think that you can do it you can refuse. I don’t mind.”
Father said so and dismissed us.
————
I and Leo are silently walking down the hallway of the castle.
“……you should refuse.”
“You think so?”
I finally smiled when Leo opened his mouth.
He’s still having a sour look on his face. This is rare.
“You don’t want to do it right?”
1195
“It’s not that I don’t want to do it. I asked Father for time to think it over because I want to know if that
person is okay with this.”
“That person?”
“We aren’t the ones who are the angriest at them. I’m sure the angriest one among us is Trau-niisan. If
Trau-niisan is okay with it then I will take the job.”
The day Trau-niisan, the real younger brother of our eldest brother, known of his death.
It was the first time that I ever saw Trau-niisan get angry.
Back then he even said that he would personally lead the army to attack the Dominion himself.
I can’t decide what to do with this case before asking Trau-niisan first.
“I am fine. It’s not that I am not angry. But Father was also enduring his anger. If Trau-niisan is willing
to endure that anger too then I will also do the same. That’s why you can just forget about this.”
“But……”
“Are you planning to welcome the Saint with that kind of face?”
Leo’s face that was clouded by anger is different than he usually is.
That is not a good face to show her.
Leo takes a deep breath and finally notices what kind of face he is making.
“—–Okay. I will leave this to you, Nii-san.”
“Do that. You can just think about how you should welcome the Saint. After all—-”
She is your first love.
When I said so with a grin on my face, Leo turned his blushed face away and turned silent.
1196
SPT Chapter 180
Chapter’s up……yes, I said it!!, I said it alright!!!!
Also, I’m adding salt here
-Mr.Graverobber
1197
Trau‐niisan
“That’s what happened.”
Heading to Trau-niisan’s place, I explain what happened to him.
I was expecting him to get upset and immediately head to Father’s place but Trau-niisan is very calm.
Even though I brought up the Dominion, He didn’t look at me and normally headed to his table.
“Umu, I can’t come up with a good idea for my work at all.”
“Trau-niisan…..did you listen to what I said?”
“I did. But I do not understand the reason you bring this to me.”
“….Aren’t you angry?”
Puzzled, I asked him that question.
After all, I can not feel any shred of anger from Trau-niisan at all.
And he actually nodded.
“The time for anger has already passed. Let’s put it like that.”
“You are saying that you will not obsess on the past?”
“I do obsess on the past.”
Now I’m confused…….
Trau-niisan really is a strange person. I can’t understand what he is thinking at all.
While I was thinking that way, Trau-niisan turned toward me.
“Arnold. Do you think that the Dominion was responsible for my brother’s, Wilhem’s death?”
“…….I think that they played a part in it.”
“I have the same opinion. However, they probably were only used. The aides who served at my
brother’s side at the time he headed to the north were limited in number. The battle took place when
his defense was the weakest and my brother died from a strayed arrow……..But do you truly think that
Wilhelm was someone who could be killed by some stray arrow? The possibility is that his condition
was bad at the time and couldn’t react to it……or someone drugged him.”
He may act like a fool but he is not an idiot.
That is my evaluation of Trau-niisan but I have never felt that as strongly as today.
1198
His straightforward gaze feels even more amazing than usual.
After all, this person is the actual younger brother of Prince Wilhelm. He must have witnessed a lot of
things as he looked on the back of his brother since he was a child.
“An assassination? But no evidence was found even though Father did all that investigation you
know?”
“They wouldn’t use anything that can be found. You need to guarantee success when you try to
assassinate the Crown Prince. They probably know how our investigation will be conducted in
advance as well.”
“……..are you suggesting that the person who murdered the Crown Prince was someone who knew
him, and how the Empire works?”
“There is no doubt that there is someone like that among them. However, that is not my job to find
out.”
Saying so, Trau-niisan looks out the window.
From there, he can see the vibrant castle town.
“The Imperial Family is here to support and prosper the Empire. Our eldest brother has lived with
such an ideal. If the Empire prospered, as a result, one could say that the death of our Eldest brother
was not in vain.”
“……are you fine with that?”
“……as a younger brother, it was painful to lose him. I have never doubt that he would become a great
emperor. But……as a father who lost his son, I think the one who has it harder than us would be
Father. If Father is willing to accept the people from the Dominion then it would be our duty as his
children to accept his decision.”
“…….I understand. The task of being their entertainer, I will–”
I will do it.
When I tried to say that, Trau-niisan stopped me with his hand.
Then.
“I will do it myself. That would be for the best.”
“Are you serious!?”
“I am serious. If they truly want to befriend us then it would be rude to brush them off. If we don’t give
them a proper welcome then we will not be able to overcome the past. Having me who was born from
the same mother as the Crown Prince would show our sincerity. Plus, I would rather not push
something unpleasant to my little brother.”
1199
“I have never thought of it like that……….and won’t it be hard for the other side as well?”
“I know that. But if they really want to improve the relationship between our countries then should be
able to overcome that much pressure.”
Trau-niisan said so and raised his body, which is the largest of all of us the Imperial family, from his
chair.
When I was a kid, I thought that he was like a big bear. Well, that impression wouldn‘t be wrong.
This person is a bear.
After all, there is still a strong light behind his eyes.
“If their intention to improve the relationship between our nations is a lie then……..I will personally
make them pay for it.”
“Trau-niisan…….”
“But…..my will might be broken if they sent over a cute girl though……..”
“So you won’t break character huh…….”
I tiredly open the door while being amazed by how Trau-niisan could care less about that comment.
If Trau-niisan is going to take on the role of the entertainer for the dignitary from the Dominion then
he must report it to Father.
To Father, if Trau-niisan is willing to take on that task, he will surely leave it to him.
After all, even like this, this person has no weakness except for beautiful girls.
“Arnold.”
When we left the room and started to walk down the corridor together, Trau-niisan suddenly called
out to me.
When I looked at him, the expression on his face was a serious one.
“What is it?”
“Tell Leonard to be careful. This ceremony will not end without any incident.”
“What do you mean?”
“The dignitaries that will be visiting the Empire during the ceremony will be the ones that favor the
Empire. If other nations are planning to do something then this will be the chance they would aim for.”
“Are they going to attack us? The Empire?”
1200
“I can’t say that the possibility doesn’t exist. Maybe it was because she was cautious of that,
Ms.Lizelotte refused Father’s request to come back and stay to guard the border. She has been
guarding the frontline all this time, she must have felt something there.”
“……I will let Leo know.”
“……even so, she can only be vigilant of the external threats. Well, I guess I can’t do anything about
that.”
After muttering those profound words, Trau-niisan hastens his pace.
While trying to match his pace, I asked him the question that has always been on my mind.
“Trau-niisan…….have you never thought about aiming for the throne?”
“….Wilhelm was an ideal Crown Prince. That’s why I was always doing what I pleased. In the end……I
couldn’t do anything to help him. No matter how much I regret what happened, there is a limit to my
regret. No matter how regrettable it was. That’s why I once thought about taking over from
him……..for a moment that is.”
“Only a moment….?”
“It immediately disappeared from my mind. I will never be able to become an emperor that can
surpass Wilhelm. Ever since his death, the succession war has begun. The next emperor who is the
winner of that succession war must be someone that can surpass Wilhelm. And I can not do that.”
As we almost arrived at the throne room, he stopped.
“That’s why,–”
He said so as he took a deep breath while looking at me, no, the person behind me.
“I have high hopes for Arnold and Leonard. You two will surely become the emperor that can surpass
Wilhelm. Unlike the other three.”
“……Can I take that as your declaration that you would be on Leonard’s side? Traugott.”
Looking back, Eric was standing there.
Trau-niisan and Eric’s eyes locked.
“It will be up to how you take it, Eric.”
“Are you saying that I can’t surpass Wilhelm?”
“The past you might be able to do that but now it is different. Eric who was working hard to support
Wilhelm back then would act in a way that will not escalate the succession war. Like the other two,
you have changed as well, Eric.”
1201
“If I move, the succession war will only get more chaotic. That will weaken the Empire. Why don’t you
understand that?”
“I’m telling you, you have changed. You should have enough power to act without undermining the
Empire and striving to keep our family from shedding blood. If you are saying that you want to
surpass Wilhem then that is the thing you must do. Still, you didn’t do it even though it was within
your power.”
“That is unrealistic. My way is better to minimize the damage.”
“I am not saying that you should act solely on an ideal. I am only saying that I will not accept someone
who does not try to pursue it. After all, there is no tomorrow for someone who doesn’t wish for a
better future.”
Saying so, Trau-niisan turned back. At the same time, Eric also does the same.
While showing me his broad back, he says this to me.
“Arnold……you can not beat Eric alone. You need to do it together with Leonard. Do not force
everything on to your brother. Don’t repeat my mistake.”
“…..Yes. I will keep that in mind.”
“Well then, let’s go.”
“Eh? Wai-!”
Trau-niisan said so and suddenly started running at the door.
I tried to stop him but before I could do that, he vigorously opened the door to the throne room.
“Father! I, Traugott will take care of the dignitary from the Dominion!”
“Noisy! Don’t barge in during a meeting!!”
“HIIII!!?? I’M SORRY!!”
While wondering why he is always like this, I lowered my head and ran after Trau-niisan who fled the
throne room half crying.
1202
SPT Chapter 181
Special thanks to Pascal Lepsy for new patreon pledge!!
Thanks for adding more salt……..they say that salt can crystallize into this
-Mr.Graverobber
PS. Long chapter of fools ahead
The Sixth and the Ninth Prince
“Then the Sixth Prince Conrad will take care of the dignitary from the Principality of Albatro and the
dignitary from the Principality of Rondine will be taken care of by the Ninth Prince Henrick. The
Seventh Prince Arnold will continue to be the entertainer of the Celestial Princess of Mizuho. That’s
good?”
Father assigned us the task at the throne room.
Including me, the three princes quietly bow our heads.
Father’s decision is absolute. There is no room for objection.
The gathered princes this time are the princes who have a supporting role in the succession war.
Thus we are only assigned to small countries.
The implication is that we are enough to take care of their country. Well, as for Mizuho, I was only
assigned because of Orihime’s nomination though.
1203
“There were some countries that did not accept our invitation but most of the major countries will be
coming to visit us. Do not judge the dignitaries based on the scale of their country. Try and take an
arrogant attitude toward them and I will rid you of your status as a prince, you hear me?”
Father narrows his eyes as he advises us.
It was the Ninth Prince Hendrick who responded to such advice.
“Please leave it to me, Your Majesty. As a part of the Imperial Family, I will never act in a way that will
compromise the honor of our family.”
“The one I am most worried about is you though…….”
Father tiredly said so.
The Ninth Prince Hendrick is 16 years old.
He has half-length green hair as his characteristic feature. His mother is the Fifth Consort Zuzan and is
the direct little brother of the Second Princess Zandra.
Since they have quite a distance between each other, he was let off with only a punishment.
Should I say that he took after his mother or his sister here?
His pride as a member of the Imperial Family is high and he always harsh on others. I understand why
Father is worried about him being arrogant.
He probably doesn’t understand what an entertainer is. Maybe he is thinking that it’s alright as long as
he shows up and welcomes the guest.
Even now, he is distorting his face when he was told that it was he who is the root of Father’s worry.
He probably felt humiliated by that.
The fact that he acted like that even to Father’s words is already enough for us to worry.
“Excuse me, Your Majesty. But rather than me shouldn’t you be more worried about Arnold?”
Henrick said so and directed the talk toward me.
This guy has been seeing me as his enemy for a long time and he has an intense feeling of rivalry
toward Leo.
Apparently, he can’t endure the fact that we were born from a commoner mother to rise above
himself. That’s why this guy doesn’t treat us like his older brother.
To be honest, he’s a pain.
“Yes, yes, I will be careful.”
1204
Henrick glares at me who casually let his comment pass.
He probably dislikes my reaction as well.
Well, if I take him seriously he will glare at me all the same so it’s the same result either way.
“Well, the young ones sure are cheerful. An old man like me really can’t keep up.”
“You are still only a young man in your twenties, what are you saying…….”
“I am already 21, Father. Compared to my teenage brothers, I am already an old man you know.”
The one who said such an old man thing is the Sixth Prince Conrad.
This prince is characterized by short red hair and a soft smile on his face.
His mother is the Fifth Consort and his older brother is Gordon. He was supposed to be raised as a
warrior but his lack of motivation is the same as me.
That soft smile and light attitude is probably some kind of mutation from his bloodline.
Well, maybe Father’s blood is just stronger in him.
The difference between him and me is that he does put in the bare minimum effort to not be scolded
at.
“That being the case, can I leave now? It is very tiring to mingle with young people after all.”
“Haa…..both you and Arnold, why have you two turn out like this?”
“We just took after you, Father.”
Saying so, Conrad turned back without waiting for Father’s permission.
Then without looking back.
“Please rest assured. I will properly do my job.”
“I am not worried about that part. Seriously……you two are dismissed too.”
Saying so, Father dismissed me and Henrick.
After I left the throne room, I immediately tried to head back to my room but I was stopped by
Henrick.
“Wait, Arnold.”
“What? Henrick.”
“Don’t address me without honorifics! Think of your position! You Dull Prince!”
1205
Henrick said so in anger.
Thinking about my position huh. I am the older one here so you are the one who should watch out
how you address me though.
“Don’t think that you are the same as me alright? I have my sister’s faction on my back. I will be
entering the succession war myself!”
“Okay. Well, do your best.”
After I casually brushed him off like earlier, I started walking.
Certainly, Zandra’s faction is now under Henrick.
However, its power is only about 60% of how it was during its prime. Half of the missing 40% went to
join Eric’s side and the other half just dropped out from the succession war.
It’s fine if he wants to prop himself up with it but his faction is too small to be considered the fourth
candidate.
It would be almost impossible for him to aim for the emperor’s seat. Moreover, when he flaunted the
power he borrowed from others, that ambition of his just looked pathetic.
“Wait! You are making fun of the fact that I will be joining the succession war!?”
“…..I won’t say anything bad about it but it would be better if you just give up.”
When I advised him so, Henrick started to laugh mockingly at me.
His laughter continued for a while.
What was so funny. I couldn’t understand that so I decided to wait for him to say something.
“Ahaha!! This is the best! Do you think that just because I will take part in the succession war, I am
aiming for the emperor seat myself?”
“Am I wrong?”
“Hmph, I am not thinking about winning the war with this faction. I have a smarter way. I will be
lending my help to other factions and secure a solid position for myself after the succession war is
over!”
“……..do you think that it would go well?”
“It will. I already have a collaborator after all.”
Saying so, Hendrick looks behind me.
Looking back, I saw Gied standing there.
1206
“Yo, Arnold.”
“…….Horsvath house huh.”
“That’s right! I already obtained the help of Duke Horsvath’s house! With this, you have no chance of
winning! Why? That is because I will never cooperate with you!”
“What a shame, Arnold. If you only accepted my invitation at that time, it wouldn’t turn out like this!”
Birds of the same feather really flock together huh.
They both begin to laugh mockingly at me.
They both possess a high amount of pride and they are the type of people that satisfy their self-esteem
by looking down on others.
I won’t say anything bad about them. After all, a person’s capacity varies from person to person.
Even so, as a person, these guys are just too small.
“I will look forward to your work then. I hope you can enjoy the succession war to your fullest.”
Saying so I tried to walk past Gied to leave the place.
However, Gied grabs my arm.
“Is there anything else you want from me?”
“This is mercy. Arnold. Grind your head on the ground and pathetically apologize to me. If you do that
I will convince His Highness Henrick to help yours and Leonard’s faction.”
“Haha, that’s good. Now, apologize to him, Arnold!”
Their noises echo in my head.
Seriously, these guys really are a bunch of idiots.
Even if I bend over and beg, nothing will change.
Henrick has hated us ever since he was born. As long as that hatred is there, he will never help us even
if Gied tries to convince him.
Since I know that, I brush Gied’s hand away.
“Sorry, but I can’t show such pathetic appearance like that anymore. It will damage Leo’s reputation.”
“Now you suddenly care about Leonard’s reputation!? You are making me laugh! You are already a
dirty spot on Leonard! Leonard is probably cursing himself for having a brother like you!”
The moment Gied said that to me.
1207
The hallway was filled with intense killing intent.
There is no need to look at the source of that. I can count the number of people who can release this
level of killing intent with one hand.
“Do you have any other last word? Gied.”
“E, Elna!?”
Seeing Elna walking toward us while glaring at him, Gied lost his balance and fell on his butt.
Her gaze moves from Gied to Henrick.
It seems that even Henrick couldn’t say anything in front of Elna’s killing intent. He only stepped back
in fright.
“Elna. don’t threaten them too much.”
“That’s rude. This is not a threat you know.”
Elna then put her right hand on her sword handle.
Didn’t expect that she would do that, Gied raised a scream while Henrick tried to threaten her.
“H, Hmph! Try it if you can! You should know how heavy a crime it is to turn your sword toward the
imperial family!”
“That’s true, Prince Henrick. Do you also know that blocking the way of the imperial family is also a
crime?”
“Th, that is…….I allowed it so it’s okay!”
Henrick uses sophism to let Gied escape Elna’s punishment.
Seriously, there’s no point in dealing with them.
Thinking so, I try to pull Elna’s hand and leave the place.
“—-then I will allow it. You can kill him, Elna.”
“Understood. Now I have the permission as well.”
“Haa…..”
Elna gladly tries to pull out her sword.
I put my hand over hers and looked at the person who gave her such a permission.
“Don’t stir up trouble, Leo.”
1208
“Retaliating when someone picks a fight with you. That is Nii-san’s policy right?”
Said Leo as he walks toward me with a large group of nobles behind him.
They are all nobles who are supporting Leo. He must have just finished the meeting with them.
The number of the nobles behind him signify Leo’s current power.
Then, Leo, who is being followed by so many supporters, looks straight at Henrick.
“Henrick. If you are planning to stand against me then I will not show you any mercy.”
“Kuh…..! Don’t get ahead of yourself, you lowborn! You people stand no chance against Eric-aniue!
Without my help, you will never stand a chance against him you know!”
“I have won many battles with no chance of victory just fine so far. We are not weak enough to be
scared by that attitude of yours. I’ve been aware of how harsh this path is from the beginning. Only
when I overcome its harshness, I will become the emperor everyone recognizes. It would be better for
you not to stand against us with that half-baked resolve of yours.”
Leo gave Henrick advice.
At the same time, it is the final warning.
This is his last chance to withdraw.
However, Henrick distorted his face and chose to continue.
“I am not joining this battle with a half-baked resolve! I am prepared to die for it!”
“And I am telling you that your resolve is half-baked. We are fighting because we don’t want us or
anyone to die! Spare me from any more senseless bloodshed. Get out of my way! Henrick!”
“I will not! I will never accept it! I will never accept the like of you!!”
Saying so Henrick ran away.
Gied who was left behind tries to escape without being noticed but Leo stops him.
“Gied von Horsvath.”
“Y, Yes!?”
“Tell this to your father. Don’t disturb the succession war any more than this.”
“Un, understood!”
“Also……you should change the way you treat Nii-san. Both mine and Elna’s hand tend to reach for the
sword when people make fun of him you see.”
1209
“HIII……!”
Gied leaves the scene with a frightened look.
After seeing that, I turned to Leo.
“You purposely did that right?”
“Henrick is being hostile toward us after all. If he is going to become our enemy anyway I thought that
I should scare him a bit.”
Saying so, Leo sticks his tongue out.
Seeing that playful gesture, I sigh.
At the beginning of the succession war, he would never play this trick on anyone. Talking about his
growth, I think this also counts as one but I think that his method has become a little similar to mine
lately.
“You look like you have some complicated feeling huh?”
“I feel like my pure brother has been tainted.”
“And who do you think is the one who tainted him.”
Hearing Elna’s retort, I frowned.
Should I be happy or sad about my brother’s growth?
Thinking so, I parted with Leo and his supporters.
“What are you doing here today?”
“I was summoned by His Majesty. Maybe it will be the talk about reinstating me into the Imperial
Knight Order.”
“Is that right. It is finally the time huh.”
“Yeah. I want to be free from that position a while longer but…..well, if he reinstates me I will obey.
After all, there is a lot I can help you with from inside the Imperial Knight Order too.”
Elna said so with a smile and headed to the throne room.
I can see Father’s intention in wanting to perfect his preparation to welcome the dignitaries at the
ceremony by reinstating Elna into the Imperial Knight Order.
The ceremony was about to begin.
I hope that nothing bad happens…..but I’m sure that it is a dream that won’t come true.
1210
Thinking so, I went back to my room.
1211
SPT Chapter 182
Special thanks to Alfonzom5 for moar coffee.
Just in time for this…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Dignitaries Reception
The 25th-anniversary celebration for Father’s coronation.
In order to participate in the event, the dignitaries of each country gathered at the Imperial Capital.
The peak of their arrival is likely to be today.
“OH!? Look! Arnold!”
“There’s no way I can see that right……”
I am currently observing the dignitaries’ arrival at the castle’s balcony but my view was obstructed by
Orihime who is currently riding on my back because she was free so she came over to play at my
room.
In the end, I can only see what is below me.”
“What!? People are riding on small dragons you know!? Are they the Dragon Knights I heard from the
rumor!”
“The proud Dragon Knights of the United Kingdom huh.”
I shift Orihime sideways and look up at the approaching Dragon Knights.
Orihime resisted but I am curious so it couldn’t be helped.
A dozen or so Dragon Knights were flying in the sky.
The ones they are riding are Flying Dragons. Although they are only a subspecies of the dragon, the
United Kingdom has the technology that managed to tame them.
The Dragon Knights that are riding on the Flying Dragons played a big role in their battle against the
Dominion. They also played an active role as the United Kingdom’s main force in their war against the
Kingdom.
1212
Leading those Dragon Knights is a man riding on a red flying dragon.
The man landed near the main gate of the Imperial Sword Castle and splendidly jumped off from his
dragon and has a firm handshake with Gordon who came out to meet him.
“Who is that?”
“William van Drummond. The Second Prince of the United Kingdom. His alias is the Dragon Prince. As
you can see, he is a dragon knight.”
“He rides a dragon even though he is of a royal family? That’s so dangerous. He has no common sense
at all.”
“I don’t want to hear that from you.”
“WHAT!?”
Getting angry at my words, Orihime leans back as a punishment.
Honestly, she is heavy.
“How’s that!? Give up yet!?’
“Yeah, yeah, I give up.”
“Muuuu, I can’t even feel a shred of sincerity………”
While saying so, Orihime jumps off me and stands at my side.
When she was doing so, William and Gordon entered the castle.
“It seems that they are strangely close to each other though……Ha!? Does that prince prefer men!?”
“Don’t ever say that in front of him alright? I’m begging you here, at least don’t do it when you are with
me, it will cause a diplomatic problem. Listen here, they are being friendly to each other because those
two are actually friends with each other.”
“Friend? Was the Empire an ally of the United Kingdom?”
“That’s right but Gordon had been studying in the United Kingdom for about six months. It seems that
was when they met. They are both warriors so they should get along well with each other. Their ages
are close too.”
“Hmm, so that was the case huh. I thought that he has that kind of hobby for a moment, that’s a relief.”
“It is strange that your mind went there in the first place…….”
While being amazed at Orihime’s thought process, my eyes found Leo near the castle’s main gate.
1213
“He is fidgeting too much……..”
“Mumu? Why is your younger brother so restless? Even I am calmer you know!”
“Nah.”
“WHAT!?”
“OwOw!? Don’t bite me!”
“Ish ur oalt!!”
“Don’t just try to talk! It hurts!”
Even when I try shaking my hand, my hand couldn’t escape Orihime’s jaw.
I don’t know what she is saying but she should be saying that it’s my fault or something along that line.
Since she is being so relentless, I decided to say the thing that has never even once crossed my mind.
“Alright alright! You are calm! You are very calm!”
“HHmph! That’s right! That’s right!”
Orihime finally released me with a smug face and crossed her arms while nodding to herself.
It seems that she was satisfied with how she was able to get me to say what she wanted.
How simpleminded.
“UWaa…..there’s even a bite mark………”
A bite mark was left on my right hand.
Well, if a beast person like Orihime seriously bit me then I wouldn’t be left with only this kind of light
bite mark. For Orihime, it must have been only a playful bite.
Maybe that is why she doesn’t look worried at all. Well, she is always like this though.
“Putting that aside, why is your little brother so nervous?”
“He probably gets nervous because he will be welcoming the famous Saint-sama I guess.”
“The Saint? The one from the Perlan Kingdom?”
“That’s right. The user of the holy staff, one of the four sacred treasures made from the same meteorite
that was used to forge the holy sword. She is like the Kingdom’s version of Elna.”
“The four sacred treasures huh. I know about them. There are four of them including the holy sword
right? I didn’t know that the Saint was holding onto one.”
1214
“To commoners, the staff was only something of a legend after all. In the first place, there are many
mysteries surrounding the four sacred treasures. It is said that they were made even before the age of
ancient magic and each of them has different power too. Still, even though they are all sacred
treasures, the holy sword was said to be about three levels above the other three.”
“Aren’t you quite knowledgeable about this?
“My childhood friend is the user of the holy sword after all.”
During such an exchange, I look up at the sky.
Seeing that, Orihime puzzlingly cocked her head.
“Why are you looking at the sky? There is no more dragon you know?”
“The Saint of the Perlan Kingdom doesn’t only have the holy staff. Although there are only a few in the
Kingdom, she also rides on a Griffon.”
At that moment, 7-8 griffons descend down from the sky.
Leading them is a woman with pale blond hair riding on a white griffon.
She has semi-long hair and is wearing a characteristic headband.
Although the woman possesses a mysterious atmosphere, she is beautiful. Her beauty doesn’t come
purely from her outer appearance. She has the beauty of pure white snow.
Like a woman who doesn’t know filth.
That is the Saintess of the Perlan Kingdom, Leticia.
Following Leticia was a black griffon with no rider on it and her escort knights riding on griffons.
Welcoming them is Leo who is respectfully lowering his head to welcome Leticia’s party.
I was a little curious so I used magic to eavesdrop on their conversation.
“Welcome to the Empire. Leticia-sama. Thank you for taking the long trip to visit us. I, the Eighth
Prince Leonard will serve as your entertainer during your stay at the Imperial Capital.”
“Thank you for your warm welcome, Prince Leonard. It has been a while. Has it been 5 years already?”
“Yes. it’s been a long time.”
That Leo, he is so nervous.
If it’s the usual him then he would praise how she has grown beautiful.
1215
He only says those safe lines for a while now. He probably doesn’t want to say anything weird to her
huh.
Seeing such Leo, Leticia smiles.
“My prince, has the friendship we have from 5 years ago faded away already?”
“N, No! It’s not like that!”
“Then please relax. When I see you being so tense, I would end up feeling nervous as well.”
“M, My apologies. Um…..it’s just that…….I was nervous because you are very beautiful……”
“Thank you very much. Prince Leonard has grown cooler yourself too, you know. No, putting it like
that wouldn’t do. You have become a splendid prince. Your fame even reaches the Kingdom as the
Hero Prince who saves the people you know.”
“No way…..I was only being helped by others.”
“Even so, it was you who decided to help them right? I am happy that your kindness still remains the
same.”
Saying so, Leticia reached her hand out for Leo.
Leo tensely took her hand and shook it.
After exchanging a few more words, the two walk to the castle.
During that time, Leticia looks up at me.
Catching my figure with her clear blue eyes, Leticia smiled and waved at me.
Since I can not wave back with my hand like this, I give her a small bow in return.
She doesn’t change. No matter where or when it is, she is still herself. It might be better to describe
her as a person that always does everything at her own pace.
“Muu—-……”
“What’s wrong?”
“As expected of the Saint. I was taken in by her for a moment! I shall recognize her as the third most
beautiful woman next to me then!!”
“So you are always on the top of that list huh……wait? Who is the second most beautiful woman after
you then?”
“That would be the most beautiful woman in the Empire.”
1216
Finne huh.
I haven’t seen them talking with each other but they must have at least greeted each other before.
Even Finne is the second most beautiful huh. That is so like Orihime.
I don’t mind that they each have their own pace but if she does it too much it would be hard for me to
keep up with her though.
“By the way, where is Elna in that ranking?”
“Out of bound, probably.”
“Don’t say that in front of her okay……”
I said so and sigh.
The fact that the dignitaries from each country have gathered here means that troublesome things will
increase as well.
I hope that there isn’t too many problems I have to deal with.
After making my wish, I left the balcony.
1217
SPT Chapter 183
A little busy this week so I will do coffee appreciation day next week…….since the goal was already
reach I will have to prep for the appreciation week as well………
BTW, for the appreciation week, do you want Double the Dull Prince or Mob Model everyday?
let me know in sa commento
-Mr.Graverobber
Excessive Force
“Your Highness Arnold, Your Grace, the Third Imperial Knight Corp is at your service.”
“Umu, Good work!”
Each of the Imperial Knight Corp is assigned as protective detail to each of the dignitaries.
Well, that’s good and all but.
“Isn’t the strength concentrated too much here?”
“The strongest sword and the strongest shield on the continent are here after all. Even if it was to
compensate for Arnold-sama’s lacking, this would still be overkill.”
“Don’t say lacking. Was it Father’s order?”
“Yes, His Majesty said that it should be easier for me to have my first mission after a long while with
someone I am familiar with.”
“It will be tough on me though.”
“Well, it’s not my business.”
Hearing that cold response, I sigh deeply.
If he wanted to assign her to someone she is familiar with, Leo should work just fine…….it’s useless to
think about it now huh. If she was assigned to him, two users of the sacred treasures would be at his
side after all.
Since the result would be almost the same, it is probably no coincidence that Father decided to push
the problem my way.
Seriously, what a troublesome father he is.
1218
“Captain Elna. Right now, you are my escort, correct?”
“I am Your Grace “and” Your Highness’s escort, yes.”
“In other words, you are my escort right!”
“…..that is not wrong.”
Orihime puts on a smug face and sits down on the sofa.
Seeing that, Elna’s expression turned visibly displeased.
Somehow, I have a bad feeling about this so I put some distance away from Orihime.
“Now Captain Elna! My shoulders are stiff!”
“Is that so.”
“Not like that! You are now my escort! You should give me a massage!”
Seeing Orihime’s triumph attitude, I can see Elna’s veins popping and her cheeks starting to cramp.
It would be fine if Elna says that massaging her shoulder is outside the scope of her duty but Elna
would never do that. It’s not that she can’t do it, she simply is not willing to.
The reason being, it would make her feel like she lost to Orihime.
Thanks to that, the situation goes in a complicated direction.
“Understood. Then allow me to give you a massage, Your Grace.”
Elna then slowly walks behind Orihime with a smile that can kill.
On the other hand, Orihime seems to be pleased to hear Elna’s reply.
That might be why she didn’t notice the fact that Elna’s smile only deepened when she got behind her.
“Will this amount of power be E-N-O-U-G-H for you?”
“UWAAAAA!!?? MY SHOULDERS ARE BEING CRUSHED!!??”
Elna grabs Orihime’s shoulders as though she was going to crush them.
I don’t think that can be called a massage anymore.
Orihime went wild as her shoulders are literally being crushed but Elna only increases the strength of
her grip.
“It hurts! IT HURTS! I SAID THAT IT HURTS RIGHT!??”
1219
“The pain means that the massage is working right? Don’t you know that?”
“I won’t have a shoulder after this! You are only jealous of my chest right!? Yours wouldn’t give you
shoulder pain after AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!??”
“It seems that your shoulders are quite stiff, Your Grace! I think it would be better if I increased my
strength a bit more!!”
Orihime’s careless comment hit Elna’s nerves. She looks like a demon as she literally tries to crush
Orihime’s shoulders.
It would be dangerous if this keeps on going so I move in to stop her.
“Elna.”
“Hmph!”
Hearing my voice, Elna releases Orihime’s shoulders and snorts as she looks away.
Finally released from Elna’s grip, Orihime half cryingly clung to my waist.
“Uuuuuuu…..it hurts…….it hurts so much……Arnold……..”
“Yes, yes, it was because you were trying to play a prank on Elna you know.”
I tiredly stroked Orihime’s head to ease her.
Orihime groaning about the pain for a while after the pain subsides, she half cryingly yells at Elna.
“WHY IS MY OWN ESCORT TRYING TO HURT ME!”
“I just gave you a shoulder massage though?”
“YOU LITERALLY TRIED TO CRUSHED it!”
“Then do you want a do-over?”
“Hiiii!!”
When Elna started to grip her right hand, Orihime screamed and hid behind me, probably reminded of
the pain she just felt.
“Arnold! Elna bullied me!”
“Haa…..you went too far. Elna.”
“What!? Are you intending to be on her side!?”
“Hahah! Arnold will always be on my side! He is my entertainer after all!”
1220
“That doesn’t matter! Al! Stop spoiling that fox already! She is up to no good you know!”
“She has always been up to no good though.”
Hearing that, Orihime peeked out from behind me and stuck her tongue out to provoke Elna.
Reacting to that cheap provocation, Elna tries to grab Orihime but she escapes while using me as her
shield.
“Come back here!”
“Why would I!”
“You little!”
“Uwa!? Arnold! This woman was about to hit me you know!?”
“I was only trying to pat your head!”
“Don’t lie!? That was clearly a fist right!?”
Thus the game of tag begins with me as the center.
Elna is trying to catch Orihime while she escapes from her while using me as her shield.
Although they are playing tag by circling around me, one of them is the Hero and the other is the
Celestial Princess.
Orihime who is running away creates barriers to obstruct Elna while Elna who is chasing after her
continues to break Orihime’s barrier one after another.
This game of tag is both simple and advanced at the same time. As I think so, the sound of glass
breaking continues to echo around me.
“Abandoning his master and escape alone, what kind of butler are you?”
“It is my principle to not poke my head into a conflict between women, sir.”
“That’s the first time I hear that you have such a principle.”
“This is the first time I mention it after all.”
I tried to jab at Sebas who evacuated the scene and observed the situation from a distance but he still
managed to give me a perfect reply.
Just like that, Sebas started to sip on his tea while observing the situation like it is none of his
business.
This butler. He is being serious about not interfering huh.
1221
I can’t expect outside help and even if I tell them to stop, they would start fighting over whose side I
will take again.
Then I should just wait quietly until this pointlessly advanced game of tag is over.
When I decided to give up, Finne came into the room.
“Excuse me. Al-sama.”
“Welcome, to the noisy room.”
“Fufu, it is very lively here.”
Smiling at the scene, Finne began to brew the tea with practiced hands.
It seems from Finne’s point of view, this situation seems to be lively.
“Orihime-sama, do you want some tea?”
“Umu! I will have some! Finne’s tea is always delicious!”
“Then please sit down and wait okay. What about you, Elna-sama?”
“I……”
Seeing Orihime who she was chasing after obediently sit on the sofa. Elna’s outstretched hand
wanders without knowing what to do.
Seeing such Elna, Finne smiles.
“We have sweets too so why don’t we eat it together?”
“……alright. I will join in.”
“Yes. then please sit down.”
With that said and done, Finne managed to have both the strongest sword and the strongest shield of
the continent behave themselves.
How skillful. To think that she would be able to make these two beasts behave like adults.
As expected of Finne huh.
“Here, Al-sama.”
“Thanks. You saved me there, really.
“No, I also have something to talk with you about after all. It seems that the dignitary from the elf
village still hasn’t arrived yet.”
1222
The dignitary from the Sokol empire, the Dominion, and the two principalities in the south have
already arrived.
The Sokol empire sent their prince, for the Dominion, the Lord came over himself. I was a bit nervous
when he arrived but since Trau-niisan was friendly with him, the atmosphere didn’t become so
serious.
From the two principalities are their Kings’ children. Representing the Principality of Albatro are the
twin, Eva, and Julio while the Principality of Rondine sent over a prince.
The only remaining major dignitary left is from the elf village but unfortunately, the elves are
secretive so we only know that they have already left their village.
We have sent out agents to look for information about them but currently, we don’t know where they
are.
“Is that so. Well, I guess we can only wait patiently for their arrival huh. Maybe it was because they
have long lives, they tend to take their time.”
“Yes. I don’t mind waiting for them but I am worried if they will be able to arrive here safely……..”
“It should be alright. The elves’ elites should be escorting them. We don’t have to worry as long as she
is not someone who ditched her escort like a certain someone here.”
Saying so, I look at Orihime.
However, she seems to not hear that because she is happily eating Finne’s sweets.
“She left her escort behind?”
“She left them at the guild headquarters. The Second Imperial Knight Corp took over from there so it
was fine but……that was certainly not normal.”
“She has no common sense at all.”
“Oh shut up, both of you. It will ruin the taste of the sweets alright. Well, even if it’s ruined it’s still
delicious though. In the first place, I did not ditch them okay. I just ordered them to wait for me there.”
“That’s exactly what ditching means.”
“I was being considerate for the Empire you know. They are all small noisy old people after all. If I
brought them over they would just say I can’t do this, I can’t do that right. It would delay my arrival for
at least several days.”
Orihime is spending her time freely here right now but back in Mizuho, she held a symbolic position
for them. Her position is some kind of a Miko (Shrine Maiden) to them.
There are many troublesome customs she has to abide by.
1223
She probably felt suffocated by all that.
“In the first place, I can’t play around if there are people keeping eyes on me right.”
“So that’s your true aim huh.”
“Umu!”
Saying so, Orihime continues to eat more sweets.
If she keeps eating them at this pace, she will end up finishing them all by herself.
While Orihime was chowing down on the sweets, another guest arrived.
“Al-nii! I brought Sieg over!”
“Chuppii!”
“Oh! Enta! So you played with her huh?”
“Chuppii!”
It was Christa and Rita who entered the room.
Christa is hugging the dead tired Sieg in her arms while Rita is carrying Enta.
Apparently, before I noticed, Enta already joined Christa’s party.
Well, that’s good but.
“Why is Sieg burnt?”
“Sieg tried to approach Saint-sama’s room and got caught in a barrier……that was what Lynfia said.”
“You can throw him away you know.”
“D, Damn it…….using barriers is cowardly you know…….”
Sieg who is being hugged by Christa muttered.
Seeing Sieg like that, Finne puts her hand on her cheek as though she is troubled.
“What should we do? Should we really leave him outside the castle?”
“He would cause trouble outside so I think it is better to throw him in jail you know.”
“Aren’t you people being too cruel toward me!?”
Sieg let out a heartbreaking scream but no one here sympathized with him.
1224
Well, he brought this on himself after all.
We spent our days like that as we wait for the day of the ceremony to arrive.
1225
SPT Chapter 184
Let’s start with this week update.
Special thanks to Beoraoga for the new patreon pledge
For those who are not in my discord, here’s some salt.
1226
1st – 30th roll BayBEEEEE
-Mr.Graverobber
Bad Premonition
Morning.
The castle was in an uproar.
“Alright, I will leave Christa in your care.”
“Yes, please leave her to me.”
Saying so, Finne leaves the room together with Christa.
The reason for the uproar was the sudden arrival of the elf dignitary.
Although the Empire has dispatched agents to look for them, we didn’t notice their presence until they
entered the imperial capital.
They probably didn’t use conventional magic to conceal themselves but some kind of elven secret
magic.
They must have used it to do some covert actions before they arrived here.
1227
Thanks to that our side were thrown into an uproar but the fact that they don’t seem to care is
probably how the elves are.
I head to the balcony and look down at the newly arrived elves.
The elf dignitary had already got off her carriage.
Down there, the blue-haired elf stood there surrounded by beautiful elves.
The other elves around her are beautiful but she is even more beautiful than them.
“So that is the granddaughter of their elder huh.”
She is a mature woman with a slender body.
She should be outside of Trau-niisan and Sieg’s preference.
She is neither loli nor erotic. Well, since it’s Sieg, he should be pleased as long as the opponent is
beautiful. He still prioritizes women with a rich proportion though.
I was preparing myself because the elves are all beautiful but I’m glad that she looks like this. I was
worried about what to do if her appearance is biased to either side.
However, when I looked at the blue-haired elf, I felt something was off about her.
I tried to find out the source of that feeling by carefully observing her but a person called out to me
from behind.
“Prince Arnold.”
Hearing that voice, I removed my gaze from the blue-haired elf and looked back.
I might give observing the blue-haired elf the priority if it was Orihime but I can not ignore this
person.
“If it isn’t Saint Leticia. It’s been a long time.”
“Yes, it’s been a long time.”
Saying so, Leticia stands in front of me.
Her height is about 160 centimeters huh. She didn’t change much from 5 years ago so it is a little
strange to be looking down on her like this.
“You both got taller.”
“We are twins after all. If Leo gets taller, I won’t just stay at the same height you know.”
“That’s true. But it seems that your personalities are still the exact opposite of each other.”
1228
“It would be unpleasant if we have the exact same personality too right? Leo is a serious guy so I am
fine with being like this. So, what do you need with me? Are you perhaps dissatisfied with Leo’s
reception?”
“No, Prince Leonard is doing well. I just want to say hello to you.”
Leticia said so with a smile.
It’s an innocent smile.
That smile hasn’t changed since I saw her last time.
Well, that’s not the only part that doesn’t change though.
“Is that so. I thought that you might be annoyed since he was so stiff but it seems that my worry is
unnecessary.”
“Annoyed…….I don’t think of it like that at all.”
“But you do think that he is being stiff right?”
“Th, that is not it…….but.”
“But?”
“I just think that it would be okay if he treated me a little intimately. It’s not like I am complaining you
see!! I just want to give him some points to improve on!”
I laugh at Leticia who desperately tries to deny that she is dissatisfied in any way with Leo.
She is still the same old clumsy person as before.
Although she can firmly deal with malicious actions against her, since she is weak to others’ goodwill,
she often has problems asking for help when she is troubled like this. That is her weakness.
That was what she talked with Mother about 5 years ago.
When the maids followed her into the bathroom like it was a normal thing to do, she troublingly
talked to my mother about that. After all, Leticia is not that high-born.
She is in her current position because she was recognized by the holy staff but her original standing
was not like that. It was strange for her to see someone else follow her into the bathroom.
That’s why she went to consult my mother who is also of a common birth for consultation.
She was told that she could tell them to back down if she feels uncomfortable but she couldn’t do it
since the maids were doing it out of their goodwill. In the end, it seemed that Mother sent a word
about her worry to the maids and the problem was solved.
1229
That same weakness of hers still hasn’t changed.
“Wh, What is it!? That laugh! It’s bad to laugh at someone in trouble you know!”
“You were troubled?”
“It, it was just a figure of speech! I was not troubled at all! I just think he was being too distant, that’s
all!”
“Then please tell that to the person himself.”
“Th, that is…….”
Leticia troubledly muttered.
Of course, she was being sincere when she went out of her way to say hello to me but she probably
wanted to ask me to deal with Leo’s excessive stiffness.
In the first place, she wanted either Leo or me to welcome her because she wanted to avoid this exact
thing.
It may seem obvious if you think about it but since Leo is a serious person, he is seriously trying to
entertain her.
He must be too stiff because of that. Still, since he was being so serious, she couldn’t bring herself to
tell him that.
That must be the problem.
“I understand. I will tell Leo to be more relaxed. That Saint-sama chose him because she didn’t want to
be so stiff.”
“Thank you very much! As I thought, Prince Arnold really is a good person……Ha!? You knew what I
was worried about and you still pretended not to know!?”
“Since you didn’t want to honestly say that you were troubled, I just teased you a little bit.”
“Teased!? I can feel nothing but evil intention from your action! Prince Arnold! You may forget this but
I am actually older than you, you know!”
“Is that right? I have never seen you acting like an older person before.”
“Wha!? I can’t turn a deaf ear to that you know!”
Since the old days, Leticia has been trying to appeal that she is older.
Back then, when she was a little taller than us, she used to insist that she was the older one but now
she can’t do that anymore.
1230
Since I am curious about how she would insist that she is older this time, I tease her again.
“No matter what angle you look at me, I am older than you! I am a prim and proper lady after all! This
is an adult’s composure you know!”
“Are you being prim and proper right now?”
“I am!”
Where so? I replied with that question but she only gave back a stubborn reply.
It is probably useless to say anything more than this. She probably thinks of herself as prim and
proper anyway. She’s that kind of person after all.
Still, I can say that a prim and proper lady wouldn’t ride on a griffon though.
“Well, let’s leave it at that.”
“Somehow…..the way you said that sounds like you have some hidden meaning………”
“There’s no hidden meaning at all.”
I hold back my laughter and reply.
She threw a suspicious gaze my way but immediately dismissed it afterward.
I guess it is about time I stop teasing her.
It would be bad if she’s in a bad mood after all.
“Then please take care of Leo. I will tell him to be more relaxed around you.”
“Thank you. I too…..want to keep it fun until the end.”
“Until the end?”
“I was just talking to myself. Don’t worry, there won’t be any trouble for you.”
Saying so, Leticia smiles and turns back.
Her back looked somewhat lonely.
I wanted to say something to her but I gave up.
Rushing headfirst into something without proper information is only asking for trouble.
“Sebas.”
“Right here, sir.”
1231
Thinking that he is lurking around here while erasing his presence, I called out to him.
He then appeared on the balcony.
“There seems to be something wrong with her.”
“It appeared so, sir.”
“Look into it. Anything is fine, I can’t move without any information.”
“I advise that it would be better to not look deeply into the affair of another country, sir.”
“I need more information to determine that. She said [until the end]. That is not like her. I’m sure that
there must be something going on.”
“From that alone? Perhaps she meant that this would be her last time visiting the Empire? She
wouldn’t be able to move so freely if she married someone after all. Maybe that was what she meant?”
“If it’s like that then it’s fine. No matter who she chooses to marry, it is the Kingdom’s affair. But if it is
something different then we have a problem on our hands.”
“In other words……Saint-sama’s life might be in danger?”
“That’s how it is. If she was to die during her visit to the Empire, it would cause a big problem.
Moreover, the person taking care of her now is Leo.”
“I think that you are overthinking it, sir………”
Sebas murmured.
That’s right. The possibility that I am only overthinking it is higher.
Anyone can say the word until the end after all.
But the moment I heard her say it.
“I had a bad feeling. Unfortunately, when I have a bad feeling about something, it often hits the mark.”
“If you insist then I shall begin the investigation. However, if I move, the escorts around Finne-sama
will be thinner.”
“I will appoint the imperial knights to her security details. If there’s nothing unusual happening then
that should be enough.”
In that sense, Leticia’s personal safety is guaranteed as well.
Still, I can’t dismiss this bad premonition of mine.
1232
“If someone is aiming for her life or her life is somehow in danger, there must be information about it
rolling around. She is that important of a person.”
“Understood. Please leave this to me.”
Saying so, Sebas disappeared from the spot.
I shifted my eyes down the balcony but the blue-haired elf is already gone. She must have already
entered the castle with Christa and Finne.
I guess I will have to look for that strange feeling again next time.
“Seriously, I can’t catch a break at all.”
After complaining so, I left the balcony.
1233
SPT Chapter 185
Shenanigan chapter?
-Mr.Graverobber
First Day
Father’s 25th anniversary of his coronation.
It is a nationwide event. Each city holds festivals in celebration on that day but the imperial capital
alone is different.
The festival at the imperial capital started three days before the ceremony and it will continue even
after the ceremony ends.
And today is three days before the ceremony.
It means that the imperial capital’s festival has started.
Of course, the ceremony did not officially begin yet. Even so, since the city has already gone into the
festival mode, the castle will have to give an appropriate response.
Since this is only the first day, Father will not be coming out yet. Instead, our guests, the dignitaries
from various countries will show themselves to the people.
That being said, not every one of them would do that.
In consideration of the sentiment of our people, the Lord of Cornix Dominion turned the offer down.
The elf dignitary didn’t want to appear in public and the Sokol empire dignitary said that he doesn’t
feel well and refused to appear.
However, for the Empire, there is no loss for getting rejected by them.
There are two people that the Empire absolutely wants to show to the people and those two will
almost certainly not refuse.
“Look! It’s Saint-sama!”
“Is that the Celestial Princess beside her!?”
“Long live the Saint! Long live the Empire!”
“Celestial Princess-sama–!!”
Appearing on the castle’s balcony are Leticia and Orihime.
1234
Appearing after them are Eva, Julio, and William. People are less excited about their arrival than the
previous two but that is inevitable.
Saint Leticia and Orihime the Celestial Princess is well known throughout the continent. Their
popularity is high even in the Empire.
With the two’s presence, they would overshadow the other dignitaries. I suppose the dignitary from
Sokol didn’t like that.
Even so, Eva and Julio who still came out despite that are excellent. One could say that William is good
at human relations as well.
Well, in the case of William, he might think that since the Saint is coming out herself, he can’t afford to
not show up though.
Saint Leticia played an active role in the Kingdom’s war against the United Kingdom.
Eleven years ago, the Kingdom was at war with the Empire and they managed to maintain their
frontline with the support of the Principality of Albatro. However, due to that, their national power
declined and they were invaded by many foreign countries with the United Kingdom at the helm.
In the situation where the Kingdom suffered losses on many fronts, Saint Leticia appeared.
Despite the overwhelming advantage the United Kingdom had, they repeatedly faced with defeat after
defeat. In the end, they couldn’t gain any more territory on the mainland aside from the Dominion.
If Leticia didn’t appear, the three superpowers of the continent might have changed.
It is no wonder that William feels some sort of rivalry with Leticia.
Well, in consideration of the relationship between their countries, their standing positions are far
apart.
Orihime and Leticia are standing at the center while William stands a little further away on their left
with Eva and Julio on their right.
Of course, since the dignitaries are showing their faces to the public, the princes and princess who
were assigned to take care of them also came out.
Since Orihime and Leticia are standing at the center, I and Leo are standing slightly behind them.
“Leticia-sama. Are you tired? You have just finished a long trip, if you are tired then you could head
bac–!?”
I silently step on Leo’s foot since he was being pointlessly polite to Leticia who is waving her hand at
the people.
Leo gives me a look that says ‘What are you doing!?’ but that is my line here.
1235
“Have you listened to anything I told you?
“But I have to be careful of her health!”
“And I am telling you that’s no good. We are here to take care of them. It is our job to provide them
with a comfortable space. She didn’t ask for you because she wants such a stiff reception. I already
told you that right?”
“I heard you the first time but……”
“If you heard me then put it into practice. What going back inside? No matter how you look at her, she
is enjoying looking at the people right.”
“But she might be tired.”
“If she’s tired then she will say it herself. She’s not a child so just treat her like you would an old friend
already.”
“Even if you say friend……I only spent a few days with her five years ago…….moreover, she is the saint
you know?”
It’s not to the level of worshipping but he probably idolized her quite a bit.
The inviolable existence that should not be approached. That must be the way he thinks of her.
“That doesn’t matter. Are you a person who judges someone based on their standing?”
“But…….”
“Seriously, why are you so useless at a time like this.”
While being amazed at my own brother, I shifted my eyes to Orihime.
Orihime is waving at the people while listening to their cheers. She is waving both of her hands while
leaning herself forward on the balcony.
“Orihime. That’s dangerous you know.”
“Mumu? Is that so? I can just catch myself with a barrier if I fall, you know?”
“That would give people a scare.”
“Muuuu, can’t be helped then.”
Saying so, Orihime steps slightly away from the railing.
“Like this. You do it too.”
“That’s impossible!? Leticia-sama is different from Orihime-sama right!”
1236
“Orihime is the Celestial Princess you know.”
“Their personality is different!”
“You are so troublesome. Whatever, just start by saying her name without honorifics.”
“I can’t just address Saint-sama without honorifics!?”
Attempting to draw the line, Leo repeatedly shakes his head.
That’s like Leo. In a time like this, it is really a bad manner to forcefully shorten the distance but since
Leticia herself wishes for it, there’s no other choice.
“Just try treating her like Finne.”
“She’s different from Finne-san…..I am used to dealing with a noble lady but Leticia-sama is
different…….”
“It’s because of that huh. You are bad at this because normally the ladies would just approach you
themselves. That’s why you are troubled at a time like this.”
“That’s unrelated, and I am not being approached by any noble ladies you know.”
“So you didn’t notice huh. How sinful of you.”
Saying so, since we are not making any progress, I decided to resort to a forceful method.
Don’t think badly of me, little brother.
“Saint Leticia.”
“Yes?”
“Can you see the big mansion over there?”
“Ahh, yes. I can see it.”
“Actually, there’s a demon living there. Can you purify it during your time in the capital? Personally if
possible.”
“That’s right, that’s right. There’s a demon living there! I don’t know how many times she made me cry
already!”
Orihime joined in on my conversation.
Then, unknowingly, she muttered the forbidden word.
“If you are the Saint then you should be able to purify her. You can purify everything about that
cutting board demon!”
1237
That is overkill.
Thinking so, I heard a loud noise coming from behind.
Elna, who was standing there as our escort, is flying toward us with a loud noise.
Seeing Elna whose expression is not one that a girl should be showing to others coming at us,
Orihime’s ears and tail started to shake as she hides behind me.
“Don’t move, Arnold! The demon will see me!”
“You idiot! Don’t make me your shield! You were the one who angered her right!”
“You were the one who started that topic didn’t you!?”
While saying so, we slowly get away from Leticia.
One reason is to escape from Elna’s terrifying gaze, another is to prompt Leo to do his best.
As I give Leo a small wink, Leo returns with an expression that says ‘What is happening!?’. Seeing him
being so panicked is rare.
Can’t be helped then. I guess I will have to lend him a little help huh.
“Saint Leticia. Ahh, it’s so troublesome to attach ‘Saint’ to your name every time so how about we drop
that?”
“Fufu, please, feel free.”
“Then, Leticia. If you have any questions about the imperial capital please feel free to ask Leo. Even
though he looks like this, he is still an honorary general of the imperial capital garrison. He should
know a lot about the capital you know.”
“Is that true? Then Prince Leonard. What is that building over there?”
“Eh, Ah, that is……..”
Then, the conversation between the two started.
The rest will depend on Leo’s effort.
I think that he was able to talk with her a little bit more familiarly. It’s probably because the existence
of Leticia inside Leo is just too big.
Still, I managed to damage that wall a little for him. That is the most I can do.
Well, Leo will do something about this himself.
The problem now is on my side.
1238
“Al〜?Do you have anything to say for yourself〜?”
“Arnold!? That woman, she is smiling! How terrifying! So she is really a demon huh!?”
“Don’t add fuel to the fire!? Wait! Elna! Listen to me!”
“If you want to talk then we can do it inside. Third Knight Corp, His Highness, and Her Grace are not
feeling well so I will take them back inside.”
“WhaTT!? I want the people to praise me more!”
“That is already enough. The people will be delighted with the Saint alone. Let’s head back, Your
Highness, Your Grace. Also, please do tell me in detail about this demon you talked about.”
Listening to Elna’s frosty voice, mine and Orihime’s body tremble at the same time.
After that, I and Orihime had to sit down in the seiza position and receive a sermon from her.
In the meantime, I was worried about Leo and Leticia. After all, the distance between them is not
shortened yet.
The fact that I can hear laughter from them might be that he has grown even if slightly.
“Al! Are you listening!?”
“I am, I am but…….hey, Elna. My legs are already getting numb.”
“I don’t care! Just sit there and listen to the history of the Brave House! You will know how foolish it is
to treat me like a demon!”
“But Arnold started it……..”
“Oi, don’t just push the blame on me.”
“But it’s true!”
While shifting the blame to each other, we stuck in seiza for a while after that.
1239
Now you can Seiza too!!!
1240
SPT Chapter 186
New Character will appear in this chapter……
BTW, do you find this image horrifying?
-Mr.Graverobber
Intruder
“Now, what should I do.”
Imperial Capital: Night
Sebas was running around searching for information.
To be exact, he was looking for someone who might have the information.
1241
A huge undertaking like assassinating the Saint will require many preparations. Thus when planning
such a thing, people will often leave trails behind.
He was following those trails.
And his hunch wasn’t wrong.
He has spotted a group of suspicious people lurking in the darkness of the imperial capital’s night.
They are chatting among themselves about something and their movement is obviously not that of an
amateur. If it wasn’t Sebas then there is a high chance that they might notice that someone is
shadowing them.
However, they couldn’t spot him since Sebas completely melted into the darkness.
Their talk seemed to be over, and they began to scatter. It would be easy for him to catch them but
someone who would move around at this level is most likely to be just an underling.
Even if their plan is not the assassination of the Saint, those who command such skilled henchmen can
not be left alone.
Thus Sebas decided to shadow them until he discovered the mastermind.
“I shall continue my pursuit then.”
When Sebas decided so.
[Arrows] attacked the suspicious people who were trying to scatter themselves.
“What!?”
“GUHHAA!?”
They seem to be overwhelmed and fall down without being able to react.
The only man left standing was a man carrying a shield.
Then, the person who appeared to have shot those arrows appeared in front of the man.
“Y, You!?”
“You know me, as I thought—–you people are a part of the [Organization] aren’t you.”
(TLN: This person refers to herself as Watakushi, very Ojou-sama-like, to be honest.)
That person is wearing a vermillion colored mask.
Based on the tone of voice, and body shape, he judges that the unknown assailant was a woman.
However, what surprised Sebas wasn’t that.
1242
The woman turns her bow at the man. However, that bow had no arrows.
“Ma, Magic Bow, and Vermillion mask……..You are the thief, Vermillion huh……!” (TLN: Kanji read
Knight of the Red Moon)
Magic Bow.
It is a technique where you unleash magic from a bow, it does require a special talent to use but the
unleashed magic can be several orders of magnitude more powerful than unleashing magic the
conventional way.
There was a chivalrous thief who utilized such a technique in the Dominion.
The chivalrous thief who focuses on attacking the nobles who favored the oppression of their people,
and steals the money back for the people while bringing the nobles’ injustices to the light, [Vermillion]
Since she wears a mask, many think that she is somehow connected to Silver. After all, One is a rare
ancient magic user while the other is a rare user of magic bow.
Remembering that Al regards her as a mild annoyance he can do nothing about, Sebas completely
agrees to his statement.
What is the chivalrous thief from the Dominion doing here?
With that question in his mind, Sebas quickly took out his knives. He is planning to catch her attention
and let the man escape.
After all, there is no useful information that can be obtained through the man here.
It was something that Sebas, who has been the denizen of the world of darkness, knows. However, the
woman did not understand that.
“Spit it all out. Why did the organization that operates inside the Dominion come to the Empire for?
What are you people planning to do?”
(TLN: This woman is the type that ends her sentence with [Desu wa], another Ojou-sama-like
behavior)
“Hmph, I don’t know what you are talking about.”
“Don’t try to play dumb. When I destroyed your Organization’s base in the Dominion, I found a plan
that you people are trying to start something in the Empire. You can’t worm your way out of this.”
Saying so Vermillion turns her bow at the man.
In response to that, Sebas throws his knives.
However, at that moment, several magic arrows flew toward Sebas.
1243
“!?”
Sebas was caught off guard but he managed to throw his knives precisely at the incoming magic
arrows and intercepted them.
No action indicated that Vermillion shot out those magic arrows.
Perhaps the arrow that she shot out before still remains and responded automatically to Sebas’s
action.
While analyzing the situation, Sebas clicked his tongue at the bad development he is heading in.
“Who are you!?”
Saying so, Vermillion shoots magic arrows at Sebas who was hiding in the back alley.
Sebas tries to intercept them but this time the number is larger than before so he has no choice but to
avoid them.
However, the magic arrows turned around and headed toward Sebas again.
This time he made sure to intercept them but during the time he did that, Vermillion had already
entered the back alley.
Seeing that, Sebas decided to prepare himself.
For the time being, although it was different from what he planned, he managed to separate her from
that man.
If it’s Sebas, he can still find him again by limiting the searching area by narrowing down the man’s
escape routes. After all, he can not afford to let the scarce information slip him by.
“It’s surprising that they would attach them with an escort.”
“Finding the chivalrous thief of the Dominion here surprised me as well……however, allow me to
withdraw here.”
Saying so, Sebas throws knives at her in succession.
Vermillion knocked them down with her bow without a problem and shot out magic arrows in return.
Taking out a black dagger, Sebas deflects the magic arrows and slips his dagger at Vermillion’s chest.
Although Vermillion is not their enemy, she is not their ally either. Fighting her here only brings
demerit. However, if he leaves such an unexpected intruder alone, many things might go wrong for his
master.
Like the time Sonia deceived him, an unexpected intruder like her might become Al’s obstacle.
1244
Sebas entered the combat while having no intention to kill her but wanting to leave her in a state
where she had no choice but to retreat.
“Hmph!!”
Vermillion blocks Sebas’s dagger with a short sword but since his blow was unexpectedly powerful,
Vermillion’s posture collapsed.
Without missing that opening, Sebas immediately closed the distance until the distance between them
was reduced to zero.
“With this, you can’t use your magic bow.”
“Sorry to disappoint. I am quite good at close quarters as well, you know?”
Saying so, Vermillion grabs Sebas’s arm and throws him into the air.
If he endured her grasp, his arm might be broken. Judging so, Sebas jumped up himself to reduce the
damage he would receive.
However.
“!?”
“Even if there is zero distance between us, shooting an arrow is no problem for me you know.”
Saying so, Vermillion releases her arm from Sebas’s who is still in midair and nocks her bow in a
flowing motion.
Despite the small opening he showed, she already released her arrow.
The arrow shot at Sebas.
In midair, Sebas forcibly rotated his body and managed to avoid the arrow.
“You are like an acrobat!”
“No, no, if I take that head-on it would be my loss.”
Saying so, Sebas takes a distance.
For Sebas, who is an assassin, fighting head-on is not something he is good at.
Even so, Sebas has the confidence to keep up with most of his opponents. However, such Sebas have
no choice but to admit that Vermillion is indeed strong.
As a chivalrous thief, Vermillion didn’t seem to think about killing Sebas and above all, she considered
the surroundings and appropriately reduced the power of her arrows.
1245
And now they are locked into a stalemate.
There is no chance for him to win in a frontal battle.
However, considering Vermillion’s ability, he should be able to disable her long enough for him to slip
away.
Although the man has already fled, the distance is still close enough for him to catch up if he seriously
pursues him.
He must engage her again and disable her somehow. Fortunately, the odds are still in Sebas’s favor.
However, Vermillion suddenly lowered her bow.
“………Have you changed your mind?”
“Well, I have a feeling that you are not from the Organization.”
“I have no idea what you are talking about though?”
“Those belong to the Organization basically would never help each other.”
Saying so, Vermillion turns her eyes to the roof.
There, Sieg is observing them while holding his spear.
“A sharp girl huh.”
“I completely agree.”
Sebas of course, realized that Sieg had arrived but it seems that Vermillion noticed his presence as
well.
That’s why she chose to end the battle before she has to face the two at the same time.
“I came here tracking the Organization. Do you people belong to the Empire(Desuno)?”
“You have quite a complicated way of speaking huh. Well, we are actually something like that.”
“Then I have no reason to fight you.”
“Please wait. Won’t you leave pursuing that man to me? Even like this, I used to be an assassin.”
Vermillion tried to chase after the man as soon as she finished talking but Sebas stopped her.
For a little while, Sebas and Vermillion’s eyes intersected.
It was Vermillion who broke eye contact first.
“….since you have better knowledge of the area, I will allow it.”
1246
“Thank you very much. I shall share whatever information I discover with you. How would you like
me to contact you in the future?”
“…….tomorrow night, meet me here again. And I forbid you to chase them too far. The name of their
organization is [Grimoire]. A continental crime organization.”
Sebas was familiar with the name.
It is a crime organization that grew from a group of researchers who were aiming to study the secret
of magic. It is a mysterious organization that appears at the turning point in history.
And they are currently lurking in the Empire.
“I see. That is certainly troubling. That person’s bad premonition is indeed correct.”
While muttering so while feeling amazed at his master, Sebas bows and acknowledges Vermillion’s
words.
Seeing that, Vermillion leaped up and left the place.
After seeing her off, Sieg and Sebas began to chase after the man who fled earlier.
TLN: for those who are not familiar with Ojou-sama speech
1247
SPT Chapter 187
I was actually editing for double release but……….if I do that tomorrow it will achieve a much higher
impact…..hehehehe…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Secret Maneuverer’s Speculation
“—-that concludes the report. After that, I shadowed the man who fled from Vermillion until he
entered a certain building, sir.”
The Next Morning.
I made a big frown after receiving the report from Sebas.
“What is the chivalrous thief of the Dominion doing in the Empire?”
“Apparently, she has been tracking the movement of the Organization.”
“Hm…..what kind of organization is Grimoire anyway? I think that you have mentioned it before.”
“I don’t know many details about it either. As far as I am aware, they were originally a gathering of
mages who wish to study magic, sir.”
“Why did such a research group like that turn into a crime organization? Are they studying the
forbidden arts?”
“That seems to be one of the reasons, sir.”
Forbidden arts fall under the category of modern magic. However, their property is close to that of
ancient magic. Those arts were forbidden by the sages of the past because the techniques involved are
simply too dangerous.
Each nation adheres to the teaching of those sages and bans the study of forbidden arts in their
country. Some people like Zandra can legally study it with permission from the country but if you are
studying it without said permission you will be arrested.
That is why Zandra was supported by the mages. Although it seems that Grimoire and similar
organizations didn’t do the same.
“They are those who wish to master the extremity of magic and no longer choose their means to do it,
sir. Researching forbidden arts and collecting magic items is one thing but they are also willing to go
as far as murdering people with innate magic for their research as well. They are the worst of the
crime organizations led by mages, sir.”
1248
“Government and adventurer guild are not doing anything about them?”
“They are at their root, a research organization, sir. They don’t appear at the front stage that often.
They are the kind of people that will lock themselves up in their room as long as they have what they
want to study after all.”
“I see. So you are saying that we have to strike the moment they crawl out of their hole huh.”
“Or we can catch the people that are connected with them. In that sense, it is reasonable that they
chose the Dominion as their base of operation, sir. Corruption is rampant among their nobles and it is
exactly because of that the adventurers have a hard time against them.”
“As long as they don’t bother the Empire then I couldn’t care less about them but……the problem now
is that they are trying to start something in the Empire. Even if they don’t have any plan to harm the
Saint we can’t leave them alone. Well,……. the user of one of the four sacred treasures like the Saint
would serve as an excellent subject of study for them huh.”
It’s not impossible to think that she would be more vulnerable inside the Empire rather than inside
the Kingdom.
The Kingdom’s security details for the Saint is strict. However, it is not like the protection the Empire
is giving her is weak.
“They should be able to predict that the Imperial Knights would be guarding her but they still decided
to aim for her nonetheless?”
“If it is me, I wouldn’t do it. If I am aiming for her life then I would choose the moment where she is on
the move, sir.”
“But aiming to do something to the Saint while she is riding her griffon would be difficult.”
“Yes. it would be impossible without any sort of special trick, sir. However,……..if Arnold-sama were to
conduct such a plan, how would you do it?”
“If it’s me huh…..”
I think about Sebas’s question for a moment.
I am not thinking about how to use ancient magic to break through her defense. After all, that was not
Sebas was asking.
He was asking how Arnold would do it, not Silver.
No matter how troublesome a crime organization is, it would be difficult for them to get past someone
strong like Elna. In that case, they would need to gather up a moderate amount of force.
“Hm, that would be impossible. So….if it’s me I would create a hole in her security. An inside job.”
“In other words, they would need to make a collaborator, correct?”
1249
“That’s right. It may be impossible from the outside but an inside job is another thing entirely. If they
look at it from that point of view then this country is perfect. We are in the middle of the Succession
War. There are many separate factions in our country right now. Depending on the conditions, some
may choose to cooperate with them. Judging from what happened so far that is.”
If the Saint died in the Empire, it will cause a liability issue.
If that is the case, the Empire will be at a disadvantage. Normally, no one in their right mind would do
that.
However, it is better to drop that mindset.
“Normally, thinking that someone from the Empire is considering assassinating the Saint would be
unrealistic…..but it has become a little more plausible now.”
“Do you think that the Saint herself also noticed? If that is not the case then she wouldn’t use the word
‘until the end’ after all…….”
“She said that she was only talking to herself, it means that she thinks of it as her personal matter. I
know her personality well. She will not change her mind. She is super stubborn after all. If she didn’t
want to talk then that means she doesn’t want to bother me. If it’s like that then it would be useless for
me to ask her myself. If someone can do it then it would be Leo……but I don’t think that things would
go well unless I explain the situation to him.”
“So we have no choice but to put our hope on Leonard-sama’s skill. Well, if it’s him then don’t you
think that it would be fine?”
“If it’s the usual Leo then he might be able to naturally pull it off but……it’s her we are talking about
after all. Well, I guess I will have to let him do his best then.”
This is not a problem that can be solved with a secret maneuver alone.
He must get through it with his own power.
“I will tag along with you tonight. I am interested in that masked thief.”
“Are you sure, sir? Your appearance will be exposed.”
“It’s not strange for a prince to move for the Empire right?”
“That is certainly true but will it not affect your reputation as the Dull Prince?”
“She came from another country. Moreover, she is a shady person hiding her identity under a mask.
There’s no problem for me to show her my serious side right?”
“I feel that this will come back to bite you later, well, I understand. Am I correct to assume that you
will be going all out, sir?”
1250
“That’s right. Father said that the succession war is on hold but the opponent this time is a crime
organization so that shouldn’t be a problem. In the end, even if the candidates are involved, this will
be a battle to protect the Empire. He should be able to let me off.”
“That is true. But what would you do if Grimoire is truly aiming for Saint-sama, sir? Won’t this prove
to be a bad development for us in case the threat to Saint-sama’s life can not be averted?”
I think about Sebas’s words for a while.
Certainly, that will be most troublesome. If that is the case then we can not leave it alone. However, if
the two are not connected, both problems can not be solved.
I will have to divide our force huh.
Using the force on Leo’s side, they should be able to strengthen the protection around the Saint.
However…..
“Since the Imperial Knights are already escorting her, a certain degree of protection is already
guaranteed. If they are trying to do something from the inside then…….adding one or two more guards
would not be able to prevent that. Let’s leave that to Leo as well.”
“Will that be all right? Being so vague like that.”
“We have no hand left to play. And Leo will be able to pull it off somehow. A large-scale assassination
plan involving a large crime organization, not to mention, the possibility of a traitor inside the
Kingdom’s ranks. He’s my twin brother, I’m sure that he already felt that something was off about
her.”
We twins are like each other’s alter ego.
There may be a difference in our ability, there may be a difference in our personality.
However, there are some things that we have in common that are unrelated to those things.
Just as how I have a bad feeling about Leticia’s words, Leo must have felt that something was off about
her behavior as well.
This is our strength.
We know each other well.
There is no need for us to exchange words.
“I will pursue the crime organization and Leo will remain at the Saint’s side. Let’s go with that.”
“Understood, sir. Do you want Sieg-dono to help us out again?”
“No, I will recruit that masked thief. I can’t have Sieg leave Christa’s side after all.”
1251
Saying so, I smile.
Grimoire might be conducting a secret maneuver but I will teach them that it’s not just them that are
capable of lurking in the shadow.
1252
SPT Chapter 188
C C C C Coffee Appreciation day!!!!
Special thanks to an annonymous person who donated the coffee for me yesterday………there’s no
name to shout again……
-Mr.Graverobber
Shooting Stall
“Delicious!”
“Pay before you eat!”
If we talk about the festival then we can not mention the stalls.
Being told that by Orihime, I was taken to the festival by her.
Of course, we are traveling incognito.
“Umu! My servant! You may pay it for me!”
“Seriously……”
I look at Orihime who eats food off the stall without paying and lower my head to the stall owner
while paying him the money.
It is not uncommon for a foreign dignitary to enjoy the festival incognito like this.
There are quite a few dignitaries who have asked for this exact thing in the past. The scale of the
festival inside the imperial capital is just that large.
That’s why the Empire has prepared in case of something like this.
The dignitaries will be provided with a hooded coat for their disguise with a perfect escort system in
place when they tour the festival. The coat is a magic tool made at the castle so its effect is guaranteed.
As long as you cover your head with the hood, no one will recognize the wearer. However, if the hood
is taken off, the effect will immediately cut off and its effect does not work on those who originally
know the wearer.
That’s why there are knights stationed around me and Orihime at regular intervals. Elna is observing
us from a distance and the other knights are blending in with the festival-goers.
1253
The setting for me and Orihime is that she is an Ojou-sama who sneaked out to play and I am her
servant. Since there is a chance that our cover might be blown, she is referring to me as her servant.
Other princes would reject this kind of setting but since I am basically treated like her servant so far
anyway, there’s no reason to reject it.
Still, with such elaborate security details for her incognito outing, Orihime seems to have no self-
awareness about it at all.
She is moving around as she pleased, it took me my all just to keep up with her. The guards around us
must have a hard time too.
“Let’s go that way next! My servant!”
“Oi! Wait!”
“No!”
Being so high tension, Orihime dexterously runs through the crowd.
She is letting out a strange laugh like ‘WaHaHa’ as she runs so I somehow managed to catch up with
her but I seriously worry that I might lose sight of her.
Well, that’s why Elna is observing us from a distance though.
Elna will surely catch Orihime if she runs off on her own. At that point, this incognito outing will be
ended.
To be honest, it would be easier for me that way but this also serves as a stress relief for Orihime who
always complains about having nothing to do in the castle. Not to mention that she would surely be in
a bad mood if she got caught by Elna.
“Things just don’t go my way huh……”
The only difference here is to take on the trouble now or deal with it later.
If that’s the case then it would be easier to deal with if I keep Orihime in a good mood so I desperately
chased after her. I have to visit that masked chivalrous thief tonight too. Such a waste of my physical
strength.
Then, when I thought that I finally caught up with her, Orihime is now glued to a stall.
“Haa Haa……I finally caught up…….”
“My servant! I want to try that!!”
Orihime said so with glittering eyes.
Wondering what kind of stall it is, I take my hands off my knees and lift my head up.
1254
Doing so, I saw a shooting stall in front of me.
It is a stall where you shoot at the prizes that are arranged on a shelf with a toy bow. You get the prize
if you can drop it with your arrow. It could be said that it is a classic stall you can find at any festival.
“Look here…….”
“I want to try it, I want to try it!! I WANT TO TRY IT!!”
When I openly show her an unpleasant expression, Orihime grabs onto my clothes and leans up to me
like a child.
Her begging appearance with her upturned eyes looked like a small animal so I feel like I want to let
her try it but it is clear that if I let her try it, she will be troublesome later.
At a stall like this, if all the prizes can be easily taken then it would be a bad business model. That’s
why it was designed to not let some prizes be dropped.
Orihime hates losing after all. She will definitely get absorbed in it and won’t stop until she gets what
she wants.
So I sighed and handed Orihime the money.
“If you run out of this just give up alright. That’s the condition.”
“Ohh!! This will be more than enough! FuFun! I will get all the prizes in this stall!!”
Orihime then triumphantly heads toward the stall.
Her appearance looks very brave, it was as if she is a general heading out to the battlefield.
“It would be great if I don’t have to carry her away after this……”
While thinking that this must be how a vassal seeing his lord heading into a reckless battle must feel, I
continue watching over Orihime.
————————-
“UWaaaahh!!!! WHYYYY!!??”
Orihime is screaming while holding her head.
The shopkeeper grins at the sight.
I handed Orihime a fair amount of money and she used almost all of it without being able to win any
prize.
“Uuuu……all the prizes were supposed to be mine………”
1255
Orihime stares at her remaining money with a half crying face and glances at me.
She probably wants to request an additional war fund but I have no intention to give it to her.
“Just do something with the amount you have left.”
“Why……..you are so cold even though you are supposed to be my servant…….Uuuuu…….I can only do
it one more time…….”
Disappointed, Orihime dropped her shoulders but she immediately regained her enthusiasm and paid
the shopkeeper for another try.
So she plans to make her final charge huh.
“I will aim for the general’s head!!”
Saying so, Orihime aimed the toy bow at a case containing gems.
There are two gems embedded in it, and it is probably the highlights of this stall.
That kind of prize will definitely not fall. She should be able to get one reward if she aims for
something else but Orihime has no eyes for other things besides that so she has been showing her
miserable appearance until now.
“UWAAAAA!!?? It won’t fall again!!”
The arrow Orihime shot out did slightly touch the case.
However, the case doesn’t budge at all. There is probably something supporting it from behind. It
probably won’t fall even if you managed to hit it directly from the front.
Even with such speculation in mind, I didn’t say it out loud. This is also one of the joys of the festival
plus my childhood friend did keep screaming about how unfair it is in the past and got into a fight so I
decided that I will never say anything about these stall tricks anymore.
“If you are done then let’s go.”
“UWahhh!! I want t-h-a-t-!!”
Orihime swings both of her hands and screams aloud like a child being selfish.
It’s something in a stall so it is probably not something valuable anyway.
However, Orihime seems to have taken a liking to it as she is throwing a tantrum while saying that she
needs it no matter what.
It’s not like I have no money left to give her but if I spoil her here she might try to have her way again
in the future. That case won’t budge no matter what she does in the first place.
1256
It would be a waste of money to spoil her here.
While I was thinking so, a woman suddenly appeared next to Orihime.
Her age should be about the same as me.
Her hair is braided and her eyes are amber-colored.
What stood out is her thick glasses. Maybe it was due to that, her appearance appeared to be
inelegant.
“Which one do you want?”
(TLN: This glasses girl’s way of talking just exudes the Ojou-sama vibe………)
“Uuu……that one.”
When she was asked so, Orihime pointed her finger at the case.
Hearing that, the woman grins and pays the shopkeeper for the toy bow.
“It seems that the cause is not the bow huh.”
After muttering so in a small voice and pulling the bowstring several times, the woman narrowed her
eyes and aimed the bow at the prize.
Then, she shot out the toy arrow.
The trajectory is completely different from when Orihime did it. In Orihime’s case, the arrow she shot
out hit slightly below the shelf but the arrow shot by this woman headed directly toward the prize as
if it was directed by a string.
However, the arrow hits the prize next to the case Orihime wants. Moreover, since it did not hit the
center, the prize only vigorously spun on the shelf.
For a moment, the shopkeeper breathes a sigh of relief. However, the spinning prize hit the case from
the side, and rather than pushing it to fall behind the shelf, it fell forward instead.
He probably was confident since there was something supporting the case from behind but he
probably didn’t expect the case to fall forward huh.
“Alright. I’d like to take that now.”
“Tsk! That doesn’t count! This game rewards only the prize that fell behind the shelf!”
The shopkeeper shouts and takes back the case that the woman knocked down with her godly skill.
Perhaps she didn’t expect such an excuse from the shopkeeper, the woman furrowed her brows as
though she was troubled.
1257
As expected, I can’t trouble her any more than this huh.
I quietly step forward and enter the stall to chat with the shopkeeper.
“Oi, don’t you think my face looks familiar?”
“Haa? Who the heck are……eh…..?”
I shifted the hood off a bit so that the shopkeeper alone could see my appearance.
I just showed my face together with Leo recently after all.
It seems that the shopkeeper immediately noticed who I am.
“Y, Y, You are……! O, O, Oh.”
“Stop there. You have something my companion wants. Can you give it to me? If you give it to me then
I can turn a blind eye to your little trick here.”
Being threatened, the shopkeeper silently nodded several times, and awkwardly gave the case to the
woman.
The woman tilts her head at the shopkeeper’s sudden change of attitude and hands the case to
Orihime.
“Here, you can have it.”
“OOOOOH!!!! Thank you, kind lady! I love you!!”
Saying so, Orihime joyfully hugged the woman.
After a while of hugging, Orihime lets her go and waving at the woman as we part ways with her.
“Farewell! Kind lady! I will never forget this favor!!”
“A favor is it, you are exaggerating(desuwa).”
Saying so, the woman disappears into the crowd.
Even so, her skill was godly. I doubt that even an imperial knight could pull such a thing off. Moreover,
that was only a toy bow too.
While I was wondering who she is, Orihime tries to put something on my arm.
“What are you doing?”
“Don’t move! Mumu! This is surprisingly difficult!”
Saying so, Orihime struggled for a while before she cheerfully announced a task well done.
1258
“Umu! It’s done!”
“This is…….”
The gem in the case is now on my right wrist. Apparently, it was a bracelet. To be honest, it is not
something so valuable.
However, she seems to like it so much that she put one on her wrist as well.
“How is it! Now it’s a match!”
“Seriously…….”
Satisfied that we are now wearing a matching bracelet, Orihime shows me an innocent smile and runs
into the crowd.
Thus I began chasing after her once again.
1259
SPT Chapter 189
It’s a desuwa chapter desuwa.
Enjoy the chapter desuwa!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Mouth is the source of Disaster
“Mumu!?
Around the time that the festival will be over for the day.
Orihime suddenly raised her head.
Her voice was clearly different than usual.
“Over there huh.”
Saying so, Orihime accelerated all at once and ran through the crowd.
She was not that fast but it was a speed that I am unable to catch up with.
“Your Highness.”
“Don’t worry about me. Go after her.”
I gave the order to the imperial knight, Marc, who was stationed nearby.
(TLN: He’s Elna’s second in command. Remember him from when he served under Al in Albatro?)
Immediately after that, the nearby imperial knights started moving.
My protection is now weaker but Elna is observing us from a distance so she probably already
assessed the situation and remains as my escort.
And even though we are far away from each other, this distance is well within Elna’s range. No matter
what comes at me, she should be able to intercept it.
Thinking so, I jog after Orihime.
————–
“You brat! Don’t get in my way!”
When I caught up with Orihime, I found a crowd of people there.
1260
At the center of the crowd are Orihime, the woman who showed her godly bow skill at the stall and a
collapsed old lady. Opposite them are two thugs. Both of them are quite big.
They are standing in front of a stall but the foodstuffs that should be displayed on the stall are
scattered around on the floor
I could easily see that something was going on.
“That’s my line here! Apologize to this Obaa-san immediately!”
“Like hell I would apologize to that old hag! You can’t open a stall here without permission! It’s the old
hag’s fault for opening the stall here!”
“I haven’t heard about such a thing before! And this Obaa-san has already obtained the
permission(desuwa)!”
“She didn’t get the permission from us!”
I see.
So these thugs are trying to extort the old lady huh.
This is our territory so pay up if you want to open a stall, or something like that I guess.
“They are looking down on us quite a bit here huh.”
Normally, they would be immediately arrested.
The festival’s security is carried out by the imperial capital garrison and the city guards are in charge
of cracking down on these people.
The former is an organization under Leo’s jurisdiction and the latter is a unit under the jurisdiction of
the Minister of Justice.
However, it seems that even with their combined strength, they are not enough to cover everything in
the festival huh.
Glancing at Marc, I can see that the imperial knights on our security details are ready to act.
They are probably waiting for my decision.
It would be easy to arrest them here but these guys are just small fries. There must be someone
behind them since they are confident enough to act so boldly in the public.
It wouldn’t be a bad idea to look into that.
Thinking so, I make my way through the crowd and stand between Orihime and the thugs.
“Excuse me. I’d like to apologize on my lady’s behalf.”
1261
“Ahn? Who the hell are you?”
“I am a servant of this lady. My deepest apologies. My lady doesn’t have common knowledge for this
kind of situation.”
“Servant! What are you trying to do!”
“Please keep quiet for a while, Ojou-sama.”
Turning back, I looked at Orihime who narrowed her eyes at me.
‘Don’t say anything unnecessary okay?’ That was what it meant. Understanding that, Orihime hid
herself behind the godly skilled woman while her body was trembling.
“I truly apologize for my lady’s action. Would you gentlemen be kind enough to forgive her with this?”
Saying so, I showed them a bag of gold coins and took one of the coins out to give it to the thugs.
Looking at a large number of gold coins in front of them, the thugs’ eyes began to shine.
Then, the thugs look at each other in the eye and grin.
I guess they are planning to extort more money from me huh.
“Oh! We can’t just let your Ojou-sama off the hook with just that much! It was that old hag who broke
our rule so you guys who are backing her up are guilty too alright?”
“Yes, that’s why I am apologizing.”
“If you are really feeling sorry then show us more sincerity!”
Saying so, the thugs demand more money.
Seriously, their ego sure got inflated by the festival huh.
It’s convenient for me though.
“Then how about this much?”
Saying so, I took out a few more gold coins.
However, the thugs are not satisfied with it.
“Hah! So that’s how much your sincerity amounts to huh? Oi, listen well! We are being backed by
Baron Gamlhi alright! If you don’t want that person to squeeze you dry then hand us that whole bag!”
Baron Gamlhi huh.
If I remember correctly, he’s one of Gied’s entourage.
1262
Well, those guys probably have connections with guys like this so it’s no surprise huh.
“Handing you the entire bag is a little……..can we settle this if I add a few more coins?”
I try showing them a weak attitude.
The matter could be settled by arresting these guys and interrogating them about their connection to
Baron Gamlhi but I would be troubled if my reputation rose in the process.
It would also be troublesome for me if the imperial knights think that I was tricking them for the name
of their backer if I have them arrest him. That will still cause my reputation to rise after all.
Without causing a scene, I have to make them think that I am a person who tries to solve everything
with money. The best outcome here is to have the city guards arrest them. That’s why I have been
buying time for them to arrive.
With such a plan in mind, I continue to extract information out of these guys for a while.
The faces of the onlookers around us are starting to get pale.
They are probably taking this as a servant trying to get rid of the thugs that bother his master huh.
While thinking that it should be about time, the thugs’ patient has reached its limit.
“Whatever, just hand it over already!”
Saying so, the thugs reach out to grab me.
Ahhn, they can’t wait until the city guards arrive huh.
While thinking so, I look at the hand of the approaching thug.
However, that hand never touched me.
“Wh, at………?”
The reason is that the undercover imperial knights all point their sword at the thug in an instant.
Surrounded by the imperial knights on four sides, the thugs stood still without moving.
“Forgive me, Your Highness. Any more than that and the Captain would have moved.”
“It’s fine. That’s your job after all. But still, I will have to report this to Father huh…….such a hassle.”
While I half-acting and half-serious said so, I remove the hood.
At that moment, the thugs gave me a dubious look.
They probably don’t recognize my face huh.
1263
“I’m Arnold Lakes Adler, Seventh Prince of the Empire. Would it be easier for you to recognize me if I
say the Dull Prince? Surrounding you guys are the imperial knights. You may try to resist but it would
be useless you know.”
“A, a prince!? Why is someone like that here!?”
“Well, it was due to Ojou-sama’s wish, you see.”
Saying so, I turned to Orihime and lowered my head.
“Please forgive the rudeness of my people, Your Grace.”
Hearing that, the people around me jumped.
After all, there is only one person who would be addressed with Your Grace here.
“It’s fine. I apologize for causing trouble for you as well.”
Saying so, Orihime removed her hood.
At that moment, the people around me all kneel down on the spot.
This is the effect of the Dull Prince huh. They didn’t kneel since they already knew me. Well, some
might actually kneel for me but most would just lower their heads though.
But the moment they find out Orihime’s identity, this is the result.
Seeing that the people are properly looking down on me, I make a bitter smile.
“Prince Arnold. What will you do with those people?”
“I will hand them to the city guards, Your Grace.”
“Then, before that, can I have them apologize to this Obaa-san?”
Orihime states her wish.
In response, I nodded and glanced at the thugs.
“What do you want? Want to apologize?”
“W, W, We will apologize! Please allow us to apologize!”
“I see.”
When I gave Marc a signal with my eyes, the imperial knights made the thugs kneel in front of the old
lady.
Seeing that, Orihime tells them.
1264
“Don’t do it again. If you try to exploit the weak, it will eventually come back to you. Live a proper life
from now on.”
“Y, Yes! Thank you very much! Celestial Princess-sama!”
The thugs repeatedly bowed to Orihime.
After all, if they displease Orihime, their heads won’t be on their shoulders anymore. In other words,
they are glad that they can at least keep their lives.
While that was happening, the city guards arrived.
They probably saw all the fuss around here. There’s a large crowd around us after all.
“I will let you handle it from here. Marc.”
“Yes, sir. Please leave this to me.”
I left Marc to hand them over to the city guard and explain the situation to them since it is
troublesome. Thus, I decided to take Orihime back to the castle.
“See you again! Kind lady, Obaa-san!”
“Thank you very much! Thank you very much!”
The old lady lowers her head while repeatedly offering her gratitude while the godly skilled woman
also bows her head accordingly.
However, for a moment, my line of sight intersected with that of the godly skilled woman.
At that time, the woman opened her mouth.
“Your Highness……what are you planning to do with the people behind them?”
“…….”
My plan was to reveal Orihime’s identity so that I can get the spotlight away from myself but………..
She is looking at me with quite an intensity.
It seems like she is not some random person that happens to be skilled with bow handling huh.
“My younger brother will give them the appropriate response.”
“Y, your brother……?”
“Yeah, I won’t do anything. That is my brother’s job after all. Well, see you again.”
Saying so, I left the place together with Orihime.
1265
After all, since it has already become quite an uproar, we can’t continue this incognito outing anymore.
——————
Night.
In the end, after returning to the castle, I have to report the matter to Father so I took the chance and
relayed the information Sebas discovered to him.
That being said, the information we have on hand is only fragmentary.
It was only speculation at best so Father and Franz are making a troubled expression.
In the end, the talk concluded that I will tell them more once Sebas discovers more information.
That meant this matter will be entrusted to me for the time being.
“The back alley at night is quite ominous huh.”
“It is also perfect for a secret talk, sir.”
When I was having such a conversation, I felt a presence from behind me.
I turned around slowly and found a woman in a vermillion colored mask standing there.
She has a bow in her hand.
So this is the chivalrous thief of the Dominion, Vermillion huh.
While I was thinking so, the moment she saw my face, she panicky muttered.
“Pr, Prince Arnold…….!?”
“Hou. So you know about me huh. As expected of the famous chivalrous thief of the Dominion. Perhaps
I was one of your targets?”
“Th, that is not the case(desuwa)!”
“…….desuwa?”
(TLN:………………)
I paused at her way of speaking.
After all, I just met a woman who ended her sentence in the same way at the festival.
I don’t think that many people would end their sentences like that. No matter how I think about it, the
only person who would talk like that and know me is—
“…..are you the godly skill woman I met at the stall earlier today?”
1266
“Th, that’s not me(suwa)! I don’t even use a bow(desuwa)!”
“……I see. So you don’t use a bow huh.”
“Aah…..I’ve done it now(desuwa)……”
I’ve never said anything about a bow.
Immediately realized that she just dug her own grave, Vermillion dejectedly dropped her shoulders.
TLN: A small cliff? is this enough cliffiness for the week?
1267
SPT Chapter 190
Early Coffee Appreciation week!!!! You all are happy right!? Right!?
-Mr.Graverobber
Hehehe, all according to keikaku…………
Secret Talk
“Despite that, you still did well operating as a masked thief huh?”
“Uuu…….I have nothing to say back(desuwa)…..”
(TLN: Alright, you get the point)
Vermillion hangs her head down at my words.
We are currently at an inn Sebas prepared.
Originally, I intended to finish the talk at the back alley but since I accidentally touched on the subject
of Vermillion’s real identity, I decided to move to this place.
After all, it is safer here.
“Haa…..I never thought that my expectations would crumble like this.”
I sat down on a chair and commented on her unexpected carelessness.
Sebas muttered from behind that I have no right to comment about such a thing but I ignored him.
He should be talking about the time with Finne but who would expect that someone would just enter a
prince room without permission? I’d like him to not group that up with Vermillion’s failure. That was
something I have no way to avoid alright.
“Let’s start by introducing ourselves then. I’m sure that you already know who I am but I am Arnold
Lakes Adler, this Empire’s prince. This is Sebastian, my butler.”
“Please feel free to call me Sebas. I am very sorry for what happened yesterday.
“N, No, it was my fault as well……”
After Sebas politely bowed to her, Vermillion also did the same.
Seeing her like this, it would be impossible to associate her with the famous masked chivalrous thief,
Vermillion.
1268
However, she is indeed the chivalrous thief of the Dominion and it is also true that she possesses
information that we don’t know about.
So I decided to ask her without hiding anything on my part.
“I told my father about Grimoire but the information I have is still uncertain so we can not move as a
country yet. That’s why I came out here to determine if Grimoire is really lurking in the imperial
capital and find out their objective. Can I recruit your help to do that?”
“……I am called a chivalrous thief. If a prince were to cooperate with someone like me, the relation this
country has with the Dominion will collapse you know?”
“……I understand that. That’s why I came out to meet you secretly like this. Well, the fact that I can
confidently come out here……is just that I am a prince that the imperial family can easily cut tie with if
necessary after all.”
“……at the festival, you were quite different from the rumors……”
Hearing my explanation, Vermillion looked confused.
Seeing her like that, I shift my leg up and answer her.
“You think that I am too decent to be the Dull Prince you heard from the rumors right?”
“……Yes, it is exactly as you said. The current you are completely different from the incompetent
prince I heard in the rumors.”
“Well, I guess so. I am just motivated about this one case though. After all, my brother might be
involved in this. I wouldn’t mind if this happens somewhere I don’t know about but if my family is
affected by it then that is entirely a different matter. I decided that I will never show any mercy to
those who try to harm the people around me after all.”
When she saw the look in my eyes as I said that, Vermillion took a step back.
She probably didn’t expect that I would say that, Vermillion herself seems to be surprised at my
words.
To such Vermillion, Sebas said to her with a troubled smile.
“It would be great if he is always this motivated though. Normally he is always a slacker after all.”
“Putting him as a slacker would be too cute……I would say that a smart falcon hides its talons but that
would be expected of the descendant of the golden falcon. All of you are highly skilled.”
Saying so, Vermillion slowly took off her mask.
The real face behind that mask was that of a beautiful girl.
I didn’t notice when she wore the glasses but her facial features were well arranged.
1269
She is different from Finne or Elna whose beauty attracts people’s eyes.
If those two are flowers that you can only look at like rose or hydrangea, the girl in front of me is a
bergenia that you can appreciate up close.
“My name is Mia. In the Dominion, I am called Vermillion. I came to the Empire because I discovered
Grimoire’s plan that was hidden in one of their bases that indicates that they are planning something
in the Empire.”
“Is it really alright for you to trust me?”
“I do not mind. I do not like nobles and royalty but……….I think that you are different.”
“Your reason is?”
“You are a person that doesn’t get serious even when people dubbed you the Dull Prince, despite that,
you get serious immediately for the sake of your family. Surely, your family must be important to you,
correct? I have no family that I have blood ties with but I do have people that I can call family. I
understand your feelings. That’s why I decided to believe in you.”
I smile bitterly at Mia’s words.
She is acting as a chivalrous thief but her criteria in trusting people are quite something.
However, it is convenient that she trusts me.
“Then let’s join hands. I will not abandon you until this case is over. In exchange, I want you to give me
your cooperation.”
“Understood. After all, I wouldn’t be able to collect information if the Empire sent out pursuers after
me. In exchange, I’d like to access the information from your side as well.”
Mia requests information from our side as well.
I see, I thought that she was a muscle brain who only solved her problem through power but it seems
she has a good head on her shoulders.
Since she knows that I had Sebas moved out to investigate the capital at night, she probably thinks
that I also possess some kind of information as well.
“I don’t mind but…..you can’t back out now you know?”
“I have no plan to turn back ever since I donned this mask in the first place.”
“I see……there are dignitaries from various countries inside the imperial capital right now to attend
the 25th anniversary of the Emperor’s coronation. You are aware of that right?”
“Of course. Orihime-sama who was with you earlier is also one of them right?”
1270
“Yeah, that’s correct Among the dignitaries is the Saintess of the Kingdom. The person who was
assigned to take care of her is my brother.”
“……are you saying that there is something strange with Saint-sama?”
“She was acting unnaturally. She is not a person that would use the word ‘until the end’ so carelessly.
That was when I felt that something was off. If her life is in danger then there must be something
going on behind the scenes. That’s why I had Sebas investigate for anything suspicious he could find.”
“……not because Saint-sama asked you to? You started moving because of a hunch……?”
“My bad premonition often hits the mark you see.”
I said so while letting out a small sigh.
Unfortunately, it seems like my hunch is right again this time.
The rest is to see how far that bad feeling will spread but depending on my effort, I should be able to
prevent it.
“Honestly, if they are planning to do something to the Saint then they would need a collaborator from
the inside. But there are a lot of people in the castle and with the succession war, there are many
factions inside the Empire. It is difficult to find such a person from the inside so there is no other
choice but to trace them from the connection they have with the Organization. You can say that they
are our only clue now.”
“It would be no surprise if Grimoire is trying to launch their attack on Saint-sama. That organization is
a group of abnormal people who took over the dark side of the Dominion to further their research
after all.”
“We have no evidence that they are aiming for her but……it is bad enough that they are here. We
should quickly crush them together. I will have Sebas follow after the man who belongs to the
Organization. Do you mind tagging along with him?”
“Of course.”
“Ah, be sure to follow Sebas’s instructions okay? You are quite careless after all.”
“C, Careless!?”
“You are careless alright? Your identity got found out because you didn’t ditch that way of talking after
all.”
“I, I was just not used to it!”
“Not used to it huh……then what would you do if you meet an enemy?”
“I’d knock them out from afar. I don’t usually get close to have a conversation with them and my shot
never misses in the first place.”
1271
“……….”
Mia said so as she showed off her bow.
I see, so she is so strong that she doesn’t have to worry about her identity huh.
It seems I have another seed of worry on my hand.
“Make sure to be careful alright.”
“Certainly.”
“Wh, what do you mean!? I need some pointers to change!”
“Start by fixing that weird speaking habit of yours and come back to me again.”
“Weird speaking habit!? It was my Ojii-sama that taught me that it is more lady-like to talk like this
you know!?”
“A real noble lady doesn’t speak like that.”
Looking at Mia who was in shock, I had a slight headache.
Will she really be alright.
While having such anxiety on my mind, the secret talk of that day finally wrapped up.
TLN: Funny enough, there seems to be more people who discovered the secret game than I
thought……no one seems to get the answer right though
1272
SPT Chapter 191
Second parts…….
-Mr.Graverobber
A Break and A Game
The Next Day.
I woke up and looked through the documents at my desk as usual when Finne entered my room.
I thought that it was Orihime at first so I was a bit surprised.
“Finne?”
“Good morning. Al-sama.”
“Yeah, good morning. Do you have business with me?”
“Yes. I brought you a light meal.”
“Thanks. But you are quite unusual today?”
Finne smiles bitterly at my words.
She then points at the clock.
Seeing it, the clock hand indicated that it was 10 o’clock. The time is much later than the usual time I
get up.
I didn’t think that I had slept that much so I didn’t check the time but it seems that I am oversleeping
quite a bit.
“I came to wake you up at the usual time but Al-sama seemed to be sound sleeping so I left. Aren’t you
tired?”
“I see…….well, a lot happened yesterday after all.”
“That’s why I asked Orihime-sama to play with Christa-sama today. The elf princess-sama seemed to
be interested in the Celestial Princess as well.”
“I see……sorry for the trouble.”
“Not at all, this is the only thing I can do after all. By the way, Elna-sama is looking after Orihime-sama
and there is Sieg-san there as well so I don’t think that there would be a problem regarding their
1273
protection. Orihime-sama said that it is boring but since she is a person that is good at taking care of
others, I asked her to take care of Christa-sama and Elf princess-sama since they are still awkward
around each other. I think they will be okay.”
Hearing Finne explaining the situation to me, I was impressed.
When she first came here she was only a naive and airhead girl but after she learned from her
experience here, she could deal with many things on her own.
And recently her airheadedness also impro–
“Au!? It hurts………”
“……….”
Never mind.
Looking at Finne when she tried to brew the tea and hit her leg on the desk, I affirmed that her
airheadedness is still the same.
How is it possible for her to hit her leg there. That’s a little mystery to solve.
The figure of her brewing tea with teary eyes looked somewhat unreliable and worrisome.
Well, that little airheadedness is certainly like Finne.
“Please have some teas….”
“How did you even hit your leg there?”
“Auuu…..I’m really sorry…..”
While looking at such Finne, I picked up the documents on my desk.
However, Finne immediately responded to that.
“Ah!? You can’t!”
Finne tries to get the documents from me and reaches her hand out to them with all her might.
When I evaded her grasp, Finne lost her balance since she put too much strength into it.
“Hawawa!?”
“Seriously……..”
I catch Finne with my free hand and support her so that she doesn’t fall.
Then, when I confirmed that Finne is properly back on her feet, I pointed at the documents.
1274
“Alright, can you explain yourself now?”
“Awawa…….Al-sama has entered interrogation mode……”
Finne jumped a little when she saw that I slightly narrowed my eyes.
After averting her eyes away for a while, she couldn’t bear the pressure and confess.
“I heard from Elna-sama that Al-sama was tired so……today, I thought that I should keep you away
from your work as much as possible……..”
“That Elna. She told me to work and now she is telling me to take a break, what a troublesome person
she is.”
Saying so, I returned the documents to the desk.
On my desk are various documents regarding the reconstruction of the Empire’s Southern region.
Originally, they were the documents that Leo should read but since he was busy, I wanted to read
through it first and organize them for him.
It’s an important work after all. It wouldn’t do to neglect it.
However, the current Leo doesn’t have enough leeway to organize them himself.
Well, a little delay wouldn’t hurt.
I’m sorry for the people of the south but let me take a break for today.
It isn’t good to have people around me getting worried after all.
“Is this enough?”
“Yes!”
I smiled bitterly at Finne who happily smiled at me and got up from my chair.
If I am not going to work then there’s no point staying behind the desk.
Moving to the sofa, I plunge my back onto it.
“But since you told me not to work then I will have nothing to do. If I leave the guest I am supposed to
take care of and go outside, Father will definitely yell at me.”
“Please leave that to me! I’ve thought that something like this would happen!”
Finne said so and placed a lot of games in front of me.
Basically, these are board games.
I haven’t played it recently but I used to play them a lot with Leo.
1275
“Hee, this sure is nostalgic.”
“Let’s play this game! Even like this, I am quite good at playing these kinds of games you know.”
“Hou? That’s surprising. I won’t lose alright.”
“Then let’s play it together! I won’t lose too you know!”
Saying so, Finne challenged me to a board game.
That’s quite a courage.
“Then you want to make a bet?’
“A bet is it? That is fine with me! What should we bet?”
“Loser will do the winner’s chores for a day.”
“Yes?”
“That was what I used to bet with Leo. if I lose, I will be forced to do the chores.”
“I understand. If that’s the case then I don’t mind! I will tell you this first but, I have never lost to
anyone in my family you know?”
“Is that so. Quite a coincidence isn’t it. I almost never lost to anyone as well.”
“Yes?”
Feeling some agitation from my words, Finne made a doubtful expression but I started setting up the
game without minding that.
————————————-
“Awawa!? My queen is!? I, I have to escape!”
“You can try, but your King will be wide open you know?”
“Eh!? Since when!? Pl, please wait!”
“How many times is it now? Well, it doesn’t matter though.”
The game was supposed to be over multiple times now but I allowed her to reverse her moves to the
state before she met her doom.
That being said, there are two choices here. The Queen or the King. there are only a few moves she can
try even if her moves were reversed.
Finne desperately tries to come up with a plan to reverse the situation but such recovery is
impossible. Whichever she chooses, she will be eventually cornered.
1276
Understanding that, Finne dropped her shoulders and admitted her loss.
“I lost……Uuuu…..I couldn’t do anything……”
“That will be my third win then.”
After losing the first game, Finne changed the game and challenged me again.
Unfortunately, I am good at board games in general.
“Alright, with this, you will have to do the chores for me for 3 days you know?”
“Uuu…….the wound only spread……”
It was a failure on her part to try to reverse the situation after her first defeat.
Well, Finne normally takes care of things here anyway so it’s not much different from how things
normally are though.
When I thought so, the door suddenly opened.
“Arnold! Are you awake yet!”
“Thanks to you.”
“Oh! So you are already up huh! The Elf princess said that she was tired so I came over to play!”
“Did she do something tiring?”
“What are you saying. We were just chatting with Christa.”
“If it’s only that then it should be fine.”
While I was chatting with her, Christa, Rita, and Elna followed her into the room.
I can’t see Sieg but he probably got abandoned somewhere.
Well, it’s Sieg so he should be alright.
“Al-niisama. Elf princess fell asleep…..”
“Is that so. Thanks for your work.”
“So, Al-nii, let’s play-!”
“Hey, Rita! You are acting as an escort now alright?”
When Elna scolds Rita and catches Rita who tried to rush over to me.
1277
Despite being a knight apprentice, Rita is supposed to be Christa’s escort during the ceremony. Well,
she mostly serves as Christa’s playmate though.
“Strict as usual huh. Ms.Imperial Knight Captain.”
“You just played with me earlier too right.”
“I didn’t!”
Orihime jabbed at Elna while Elna fully denied it.
As she argues with Elna, Orihime sits down with Finne on the seat opposite me.
“Master of board games is my title! I will take that as a challenge!”
“Ah, Orihime-sama…….Al-sama is-”
“Say no more! It would be cowardly to know my opponent’s tactic beforehand!”
After she said that, Orihime started laughing with WaHaHa.
Seeing that, Elna and Christa looked at her with a delicate expression.
“Orihime-sama…..Al-niisama won’t hold back you know…….?”
“There’s no need!”
“You should give up. It’s useless for you to play that kind of game with Al.”
“Mumu! I can see your confidence! That’s how my entertainer should be! Come at me!”
“Well, that’s what she wants, will you bet something?”
“Hmm…..how about today’s dinner?”
“I see. Then if I win you will go without dinner today alright.”
Saying so, I slowly crack my shoulder.
Seeing that, Elna tiredly sighed.
“Haa….I will tell you this first, Al is really serious when it comes to nonsensical things you know?”
Hearing that, I mercilessly started the game.
Then, a while later, Orihime’s crying sound echoes inside the room.
“UWahhh!! WHY!!?? ISN’T THIS STRANGE! THIS IS TOO STRANGE!! YOU CHEATED DIDN’T YOU!?
REMATCH!! I WANT A REMATCH!!”
1278
“This is already the third game you know? You lost in three different games. Just give up. No dinner for
you.”
“Don’t spout nonsense!? You were obviously cheating! How could you roll such a high point in a dice
game!? I won’t give up! I will never give up!!”
“Can’t you be a little more polite to a national guest……”
“A challenge is a challenge.”
I grin and choose the next game.
No matter what game it is, I don’t feel like losing at all.
Tonight dinner is settled already so let’s make her goes without dinner for tomorrow and the day after
as well.
“If you win the next game, you can reset all your losses, how about it?”
“Really!? Umu! I accept the challenge!”
“However, if you lose, you have to skip tomorrow’s dinner and the day after as well.”
“It started……Al’s exploitation.”
“Has he always been like this since he was a child…….?”
“Yeah….do you know how many times Leo and I have to suffer…….”
Elna recalls the past and makes an unpleasant expression.
A bad memory for Elna is a good memory for me.
“Al-niisama…..didn’t even go easy on Christa….”
From my side, Christa is pouting at me.
While patting Christa’s head, I enthusiastically started my game with Orihime.
“I will take your dinner!!”
Shortly thereafter, Orihime’s screams echoed throughout the room.
TLN: the next chapter will be updated when the next chapter release. wordpress somehow bugged out
on backend if I place the link there before hand……..
1279
SPT Chapter 192
So I had this weird dream………..but I forgot about it….
It was weird though, very weird.
-Mr.Graverobber
Chance
“I will run away from home! I am running away from home alright!”
After repeatedly losing to me, Orihime declared so and left the room.
Elna chased after her immediately while Christa and Rita followed after them a little afterward.
Now, only me and Finne are left in the room.
Since the storm had passed, I leaned back on the sofa to relax. However, when I was doing that,
someone called out to me.
“Arnold-sama.”
When I heard that voice, I lightly snap my fingers.
“Sebas huh. What is it? How was your investigation with Mia goes?”
“No good, sir. We discovered another of their agent from following the man who fled the other night
but we are still far away from reaching the bottom of this. It seems that we need a little more time to
find someone with important information, sir.”
“Hurry it up. Tomorrow is the day of the ceremony. If they want to do something in the imperial
capital then they should start moving soon.”
“Certainly, sir. I will hasten the investigation as much as possible.”
Saying so, Sebas disappears again.
Despite such a conversation taking place, Finne still brews the tea as usual. It seems she has already
gotten used to it huh.
“Please, here, it’s black tea.”
“Sorry, thanks.”
“Is there some kind of problem again?”
1280
“Yeah, this time it is a little troublesome too.”
“The same as always then.”
After saying that, Finne smiled and looked at the door.
I erected the barrier by snapping my fingers to prevent the knights outside from hearing my
conversation with Sebas.
Understanding that the soundproofing was taken care of, Finne nodded to herself.
While thinking that she really gets used to stuff like this, I break the barrier.
Finne then continues the conversation about Orihime without even changing her expression.
“Where did Orihime-sama go I wonder? She did say that she is going to run away from home too……”
“Who knows? Well, there are only a few places that girl can run off to anyway. It’s either my mother’s
or Leo’s place.”
“For running away from home, the locations are extremely close aren’t they…….”
She can’t leave the castle without permission in the first place.
If that’s the case then she will not go anywhere that can leave trails of her whereabouts. As expected,
Orihime wouldn’t go ask permission from Father for something like this.
And considering her personality, it’s hard to say that she has already given up. I’m sure that she is
recruiting reinforcements to help her take back her dinners.
Then, that would eliminate my mother from her possible escape route. That person will just politely
dismiss her after all.
In other words.
“Couldn’t be helped then. Let’s go to Leo’s place. She must be crying to Leticia or Leo right about now
anyway.”
“It would be bad if she disturbs the two of them after all, right.”
“Disturbing them huh…….”
I would be happy if they have that kind of relationship but it would be difficult considering Leo’s
personality.
It would be good if Leticia can say that she gets along well with him though.
“Finne, from a woman’s perspective how does Leo look like to you? You know, as a man.”
1281
“As a man is it? I don’t think that many would be able to raise a complaint about Leo-sama. He is a cool
and kind person after all.”
“Right.”
Then why doesn’t he make full use of that?
While I lamenting so, Finne smiles.
“Are you worried about Leticia-sama and Leo-sama’s relationship?”
“You noticed huh?”
“It is the first time I saw Leo-sama like that after all. But I don’t think that you have to worry so much
about them. They looked like they both wanted to get closer to each other too. I think they are only
waiting for a chance.”
“A chance huh.”
That is the most difficult thing to create.
Thinking so, I and Finne left the room.
—————-
“I don’t think that forcefully taking something away from someone is a good thing. That action is
certainly evil.”
The moment I entered Leo’s room, Leticia started preaching me.
Also, Orihime is hiding behind Leticia while nodding to her words.
“You conveniently only say your side of the story again huh?”
“I didn’t do anything like that!”
“I wonder about that. When I asked if we should bet something, the one who brought up betting our
own dinner was you right? Isn’t it a little cheap for you to cry at Leticia when you lost?”
“Gununu! I won’t accept such matches! You definitely cheated! I challenge you for another game in
front of the Saint! Leticia! Act as the witness for us!”
“I understand! I will not let any fraudulent act slip past me!”
After that, Leticia and Orihime enthusiastically set up a game on the table.
The game was the one I just played with Finne where you win once you eliminate your opponent’s
king.
1282
Honestly, it is the game I am best at but it seems that Orihime thinks that I can’t win against her if I
don’t cheat.
“That’s quite the courage you have there. And you lost so miserably just earlier too.”
“S, shut up! In a fair and square challenge, I will win! Leonard! You should monitor your brother as
well!”
“M, Me too?”
Although Leo was acting as if all of this had nothing to do with him, Orihime arbitrarily dragged him to
her side.
Leticia is enthusiastic about a fair fight while Orihime is all about winning.
When Leo saw them like that, his face cramped up a little bit.
“Orihime-sama……forgive my rudeness but, Nii-san is not just good at cheating, he is strong even
when he does it normally too.”
“There’s no way that’s true! When I cast the dices, only my result was bad! He must have cheated
somehow! No doubt about it! When a person cheats, it means that he lacks the skill to win! He won’t
be able to cheat in front of the Saint! In other words, my victory is assured!”
“Haa…….”
Leo tiredly dropped his shoulders. Well, he once saw a childhood friend of ours said the exact same
thing after all.
And after seeing what is unfolding in front of her, that childhood friend boringly leaves the room.
“Then I will wait outside. Call me once you are done.”
“What? You are not going to watch?”
“It’s not fun to see a game where you already know the results. And I already learned as a kid. That I
should never approach Al when he started a game.”
Saying so, Elna left the room.
It seems that Leticia sensed the bad feeling from what is happening around her but since she can’t
turn back anymore so she focuses her eyes on my movements.
Well, since I’m not cheating anyway, it doesn’t matter how many people are going to keep their eyes
on me.
“Well, let’s do this. By the way, if I win without cheating, it won’t settle with just your dinner you
know?”
1283
“Mumu! So my dinner is not enough for you!?”
“Obviously. If you can’t prove that I am cheating here then the other three games will be valid as well.
Considering that, your dinners are already as good as mine. I can’t feel motivated if there is nothing
new on the table.”
“MUUU…..Alright! Then I will bet Leticia’s dinner as well!”
“EHHHHHHH!!?? Y, you are betting my dinner too!?”
“It’s alright! Believe in me!”
“T, the Empire’s food is delicious so I have been enjoying it everyday……but, I understand! Once I
decide to help someone I must see it through to the end! I will put my dinner today on the line!”
“Alright. You two will go without dinner today then.”
Saying so, I started arranging the pieces on the board.
And soon after, Orihime’s scream echoed throughout the room.
“UWaaaaaa!! No!! It’s no good anymore! Don’t take away any more of my pieces!?”
“I will take your King then.”
“NOOOO! WAAA! They are taken away no matter what I do! Uuuuu……I only have two pieces left
now…….”
The match is already decided.
Orihime only has one other piece other than her King. recovery is impossible for her now.
At Orihime’s side, Leticia’s face also turned blue. That is probably because she didn’t spot any cheating
at all.
Behind them, Leo holds his head and sighs.
“Just give up. It’s your loss.”
“I, I still haven’t lost yet……!”
“You don’t know when to give up huh…..alright. How about changing the player then?”
“What? What do you mean?”
“If Leticia takes your place, we can start from the beginning. Leticia, you don’t want to skip dinner too
right? It’s not your loss after all.”
“Th, that’s right! Orihime-sama! Please let me take it from here!”
1284
“R, Right! I will leave it to you, Leticia!”
Accepting my suggestion, Leticia switched places with Orihime with her eyes shining like she just
witnessed God’s salvation.
She probably thinks that this is the chance to get her dinner back huh.
That’s a fatal mistake.
“That being said, I would only be at the disadvantage in this deal. The loser will have to do their
opponent’s chores for a day. How about it?”
“Th, that’s alright with me! If you can’t get anything from it then it doesn’t make sense to make a bet
after all!”
“Le, Leticia-san! Making a promise like that to Nii-san is–!”
“It’s fine! Even if I look like this, I have already experienced the battlefield! This game is a
reproduction of the battlefield so my experience will help me!”
“No, I think that probably doesn’t help…….”
Leo tries to stop her but Leticia is focused on taking me on.
While being impressed that he can now use -san to address her, I grin.
Seeing that grin, Leo’s body started to shake.
“N, Nii-san….y, you will hold back right……?”
“Dressing the Saint and the Celestial Princess in maid clothes is not a bad idea right.”
“Wh, What!? Where did that devilish smile and evil idea come from!?”
Fu Fu Fu.
My principle is to do everything thoroughly. Especially when it comes to a game.
Prepare yourselves!
——————
“Ahh……no way……..”
“That’s the end!”
Saying so, I immediately took down Leticia’s King without worrying that I would upset her.
With this, the victor is decided.
1285
“Maid outfit huh. You can wear them when I enjoy my dinner.”
“Wh, what a devilish smile……!? Is there no human emotion left in there at all!? Orihime-sama already
froze by the shock you know!?”
“Doesn’t matter to me. It’s you guys’ fault for challenging me.”
“Kuh….Le, Leonard-sama! Please, help us!”
“EHHHHH!!??”
He probably didn’t think that she would pass the baton to him.
Leo screamed out in surprise but Leticia didn’t care about that and quickly set him down in her seat.
“Please! This is for mine and Orihime-sama’s dinner! I don’t mind wearing the maid outfit but I will cry
if I have to watch him eat my dinner!”
“You are exaggerating…….Nii-san wouldn’t really take your dinner awa–…….”
“I have never backed down from a bet.”
“Right………”
When I told him so with a straight face, Leo held his forehead.
Then, after a while, he lifted his face up as though he had made his resolve.
“There is no other choice…….it’s a duel! Nii-san!”
“Hmph, have you already forgot the match record between us?”
“It’s, it’s already in the past!”
“A hundred matches, I won 99 of them. Even though I let you off since you said that you don’t want to
lose 100 matches straight, I never thought that you would forget them when you grew up. Prepare
yourself for the consequence alright?”
Holding up a piece from the board, I smile at him.
While letting out cold sweat, Leo started arranging the pieces on the board to avoid entering into my
pace.
Then the battle began.
As expected of my twin huh. Leo was able to read all my moves. In that sense, he proved himself to be
a tougher opponent than Orihime and Leticia.
1286
However, he can not go into the offensive. Him being able to read my move means that I can also read
his. This hasn’t changed since the time we were children.
The way to decide the victor is to take him by surprise.
In a game like this, Leo can never beat me.
“Your Queen is mine, Nii-san!”
Leo takes an offensive and takes down my Queen.
However, that is a trap.
He is as serious as always.
Just like that, I move my pawn toward his King.
“You are naive. This is the end.”
“……I wonder about that?”
Saying so, Leo moved another piece to intercept my pawn advance to his King.
Although he just launched a full offensive, he left one to defend his King huh.
I was one step behind him.
That was a fatal delay for me since all of Leo’s pieces were on an offensive against my King.
Then.
“I won…….!?”
Leo finally took down my King.
Leo murmured that as if he couldn’t believe what just happened.
Next to Leo, Leticia and Orihime were overjoyed.
“We did it! As expected of Leonard-sama! You protected my dinner!”
“As expected of you! I have always thought of you as a man that can do it you know!”
Being praised by both of them as their hero, Leo’s cheeks started to blush.
Seeing him like that, I smiled and stood up.
“Don’t get ahead of yourself alright? That’s only your second victory after 100 matches you know? I
am totally stronger than you.”
1287
“Un, I know.”
Saying so, Leo smiles.
Seeing his smile, I left the room looking biter about my defeat.
“Did you lose on purpose?”
“Maybe.”
Finne asked such a question from behind me but I only shrugged and gave her a vague reply.
Seeing me like that, Finne laughs.
“Fufufu…….you are not honest at all.”
“I didn’t hold back you know.”
“Is that true?”
“Of course, I gave it my all. I gave it my all to think up the best move for the game. Well, I was not
serious though.”
“??? is there a difference between giving your all and being serious?”
“I did give it my all. But I was not trying to win. That’s how it is.”
While explaining so, I heard laughter coming from the room I just left.
It seems my defeat did create the chance for him huh.
1288
SPT Chapter 193
Konlulu!!
Join the Cult…..
-Mr.Graverobber
The Kingdom’s Circumstance
Night.
I left the castle and headed toward the inn I had my secret talk with Mia.
“How is it? Have you been able to gather any more information?”
Mia immediately nodded in reply.
Tomorrow is the day of the ceremony.
Although the festival will continue afterward, it is still an important day.
So they made a move huh.
“I have found one of their leaders.”
“Hou? So you know his face huh?”
“No, it was the first time I saw his face.”
“Then how did you know that he is one of their leaders?”
Mia nods and takes out a piece of paper.
On the paper, a symbol that looks like a black book was drawn. It was not a simple book either. The
strange book symbol has a pair of demon wings sprouting from it.
My eyes narrowed at the strange book symbol in front of me.
“This is?”
“It is a symbol that the leaders of Grimoire tattoo on their bodies.”
“I see. So you found someone with this tattoo huh?”
“Yes.”
1289
Spotting a leader of Grimoire is a huge thing.
If we follow his movements, we will be able to understand what their plan here is.
A crime organization would be a very troublesome existence to the imperial capital during the
ceremony but the only thing we can do is to increase the security.
From what Father said, he wouldn’t launch an investigation on them either. After all, we don’t have
enough men to spare and if their plan is already underway then it is too late for an investigation
anyway.
Canceling the event is also impossible.
The thing we can do is limited.
“How about Leonard-sama, sir?”
Sebas asks about Leo’s side.
Leo is the only person who can get the secret the Saint is holding out of her.
Being curious about him is only natural.
“For now, I did follow up for him but……it’s up to Leo from here on.”
“If Saint-sama only says that she felt something was off then we could help her out.”
“I can come up with some theories from the fact that she isn’t willing to talk about it.”
“Theory?”
“…….Saint Leticia has fought for the Kingdom. The Kingdom and its people are what she wants to
protect. Even if they are trying to betray her.”
“The Kingdom is betraying the Saint?”
I nod to Sebas’s question.
The fact that Leticia isn’t willing to talk about it is because she thinks of it as her own problem.
“I can’t believe it……Saint-sama has only been supporting the Kingdom right……?”
“The Kingdom is not so united. Currently, there is a faction that supports making peace with the
Empire centered around Saint Leticia but there is also an anti-empire faction. They are those who
wish to join forces with the United Kingdom and take down the Empire. That’s why Leticia who
repelled the United Kingdom’s invasion and sought peace with the Empire is in their way.”
For the United Kingdom, Leticia is certainly a nuisance.
1290
As long as there is a Saint called Leticia, the United Kingdom will not be able to acquire more territory
of the Kingdom. In the first place, the main members of the United Kingdom will not go to war against
the Kingdom. No, they can’t.
That is how much they fear Leticia. Their defeat at her hands might be something close to trauma
here.
That’s why the presence of Leticia is a hindrance to the Kingdom’s effort to build a closer relationship
with the United Kingdom.
“Even though she is the Saint who rescued their country…….they still trying to get rid of her when
things become inconvenient for them …….they are the worst.”
“That’s how humans are. When Leticia stepped onto the battlefield, the Kingdom was on its last leg.
They managed to recover from that but when they regained a certain amount of power, it’s normal for
them to want to expand their territory. With that being the case, getting into a close relationship with
the Empire would be a problem. After all, what they want most is the territory at the center of the
continent, the Empire’s territory.”
“That’s quite ironic. Saint-sama was the one who saved them and allowed them to regain their power
but now they want to eliminate her exactly because of that.”
“Indeed. The fact that Leticia was able to come to the Empire at this time means that the Pro-Empire
faction is willing to conclude the peace treaty. If they are going to prevent that then the time to act is
now. If that is the intention of the Anti-Empire faction then I can understand why Leticia said that.
Certainly, this is an internal problem of the Kingdom but their stage will be the Empire.”
The United Kingdom had been seeking to acquire territory on the mainland for ages. A bigger land
than the Dominion. That’s why they invaded the Kingdom in the past but it doesn’t mean that they are
obsessed with the Kingdom’s land.
If the Saint is assassinated here, war tension will rise between the Kingdom and the Empire.
They only want territory on the mainland. Any land is fine with them.
In that case, them joining forces with the Kingdom to attack the Empire is possible. Sokol empire
might even be able to join in if they have the justification.
If that happens, no matter how strong the Empire’s military is, it will still be tough.
“From here on is completely my own speculation but….if the Empire fell into a decline, we would have
to cede our territory. Also, they would want someone from the Empire to take responsibility for the
Saint’s assassination. Leo who is her entertainer right now is likely to be the scapegoat here. In other
words……..it’s not a bad deal for other candidates.”
“Is there really a person who will do anything for the throne even though it will bring harm to their
own country? That would be an extremely short-sightedness.”
1291
“That is completely true but……with what happened so far, I can’t say that there is none who would
resort to such a method. Whether it be Grimoire or one of the other candidates, it is the truth that they
all have their motives. And having a motive means that there is a possibility.”
“However, as long as they work toward their own objective, I don’t think that their laid out scenario
would be able to unfold so smoothly.”
I nod to Sebas’s words.
The Anti-Empire faction will want to destroy the Empire and the other candidates wouldn’t want to
ally themselves to the Kingdom as well.
In that case, it is safe to assume that they will each take independent action after or soon before the
Saint is assassinated.
With various agendas mixing together like this, it is very hard to read them accurately.
“I’m not sure whether Grimoire is involved in the plot to assassinate the Saint but…….with them
deliberately infiltrating the Empire’s territory, they surely have some kind of plan in mind. Even if
Grimoire wasn’t involved, if we managed to stop their plan then it will be possible to send the
dignitaries back to their countries earlier than planned. We might be able to avoid more problems by
doing so as well. Search for more information about Grimoire. We need to know what they are
planning.”
“Understood. However, in case we can not find out more about them, what are you planning to do,
sir?”
“I will do my best when the time comes. I want to avoid it if possible though.”
If the Saint got assassinated, Leo will surely not be able to recover for a while.
If that happens, our faction will be shaken.
Most importantly, he will not be able to forgive himself.
“In the worst-case scenario, I will do something about the situation with my secret plan. But I don’t
want to use it if possible. You understand that right?”
“Yes, please leave it to me.”
Saying so, Sebas and Mia left to search for more information about Grimoire.
Now, how will this play out?
For the time being, I decided that I should keep my eyes on the other candidates.
Anyone who loves the word war will surely think about such a plan.
“No matter how you used to be, you are already an unsalvageable fool now. Gordon.”
1292
While muttering so, I returned to the castle.
1293
SPT Chapter 194
I’m working on the character sheet, will be sometime until I get to post it though.
-Mr.Gravrobber
The Blue Haired Elf
Early Morning.
The castle appeared to be much busier than usual. This is probably because today is the day of the
ceremony.
I was woken up by such restlessness so I took a walk around the castle as a morning exercise.
“Al-niisama…….?”
“Christa? You are up early today.”
When I was called from behind, I looked back and found Christa.
We are in the center part of the castle, a plaza-like area.
“Nii-sama is early too…..what are you doing?”
“Taking a walk.”
“Then we will join you.”
“We?”
Hearing that, Christa quietly nods and turns her eyes to the plaza direction.
The blue-haired elf and Rita are happily walking together there.
“Is that the elf princess? You seem to have gotten quite close with her huh?”
“Un, she’s a good person.”
“I see.”
It’s rare for Christa to get attached to someone.
Elves are an exclusive race. Many of them look down on humans. However, if she is that kind of
person, Christa will never get attached to her and Rita wouldn’t look so happy walking with her.
There is just one problem.
1294
I have a strange feeling when I look at her.
I couldn’t find the source of that strange feeling when she first came to the castle.
There is something wrong with her.
I thought so and carefully observed her. Then, I noticed that her line of sight was directed toward me.
“It is a pleasure to meet you. I am the Seventh Prince, Arnold. Your Highness.”
“It is embarrassing when Your Highness addresses me like royalty. My name is Wendy. I am from the
Elf Village.”
I couldn’t feel any strangeness from Wendy who politely returned my greeting.
There is no lie in that friendly smile of hers.
However, that sense of discomfort I felt still doesn’t disappear.
“Are you a good friend with His Highness Arnold, Your Highness Christa?”
“Un, Al-niisama and Christa get along well.”
Christa said so and hugged me.
While stroking Christa’s hair with a bitter smile on my face, I do not take my eyes off Wendy.
I feel that just a little more and I can grasp it.
While I thought so, Rita rushed between me and Wendy.
“A, Al-nii! We have to go soon!”
“U, Un! We have to go back soon!”
It’s strange that Rita and Christa are in such a hurry.
They both pull on Wendy’s hands and try to leave.
At that moment, I felt that Wendy’s figure blurred for a moment.
It’s only a slight change that seems like it could just be due to my imagination but I am used to seeing
that kind of phenomenon.
“Illusion huh.”
Hearing my words, Rita and Christa stopped and their bodies started to tremble.
Bingo huh?
1295
In contrast to the two of them, Wendy herself seemed to be calm.
“As expected of one of the imperial family. It seems you all have good eyes.”
“Christa noticed it too huh.”
“Yes. can we talk about this in the room?”
“Of course. It seems that you have some kind of circumstances after all.”
Thus, we moved to Wendy’s room with Christa and Rita.
—————————-
“First of all, allow me to apologize for my rudeness.”
“Please, I don’t mind. What I am curious about is only the reason why you used such an illusion.”
Wendy nodded to my question and dispelled the illusion on herself.
Wendy’s body slightly glowed brighter and Wendy’s real appearance appeared.
Wendy, who had the appearance of a slender adult woman, now has the same height as Christa.
In other words, she’s a child.
“I see. You think that being a child would lack the dignity of an adult dignitary right?”
“Yes. There are not many people in the Elf Village who want to visit a human nation. Only a few of us
have a high enough position to visit the Empire as a dignitary. There was also concern that it would be
rude if I go so I was forced to change my appearance with illusion.”
“If you informed us beforehand we would have shown an appropriate response but…….well, there is
no helping it anymore.”
Since she started this lie, she will have to see it through to the end.
Her circumstance is understandable. I don’t think Father would get angry at her if she gets caught
either. But there will be less trouble if she doesn’t.
Glancing at Christa and Rita, I see them expecting me to get angry.
Seeing them like that, I put my hands on the two’s heads.
“……you’re not angry…….?”
“I’m not. You are her entertainer. You properly did your job. Rita too.”
“Rita couldn’t do anything……..”
1296
Perhaps she is shocked that the lie was exposed, Rita seemed dejected.
I’m sure that she already felt the weight of her lack of power as their escort so she thought that she
should at least keep her secret hidden but it was still exposed.
I did something bad huh.
“Princess. Please take care of these children. If you have any problems at all, please rely on me.”
“You will not tell His Majesty…….?”
“My father doesn’t have time to listen to me right now. It’s better to see this through rather than
increasing his work. Well, there is no problem as long as no one finds out so please cheer up.”
Hearing my words, Wendy seemed relieved and let out a sigh.
She must have been quite nervous about it.
Elf’s growth stops at some point in their life but they still have the same growth rate as humans to
some extent. In other words, Wendy who looks like a child is definitely a real child here.
I’m sure that she felt suffocating having to keep up the lie in a foreign land like this. She must have
been able to endure it because she became friends with Christa and Rita.
“Did you tell Finne about her?”
“Uun….not yet.”
“Then you should tell her. If you have a problem, she can let either me or Leo know. I will do
something about it. If necessary, you can ask Mother to help you too.”
Dad is sweet on Christa.
Of course, he is also sweet on my mother who is acting in place of Christa’s real mother.
If Christa relies on Mother, Father will surely forgive her.
However, there surely will be someone who will escalate the matter after Father forgave her. After all,
there are some people in the Empire that dislike elves in general and there are some that are strict
with courtesy.
It would be a pain for Father to keep those guys silent. He will be busy with the ceremony after all.
“That being said, do try to avoid getting caught as much as possible. Especially when you are around
the imperial family members. If I can notice her illusion then it is possible that everyone can notice it
too.”
Well, some would feel the same strangeness I felt and try to figure it out.
1297
But the biggest problem isn’t there.
We have a huge pervert in our family that would find this appearance change fascinating.
“For the time being, don’t get close to Trau-niisan as much as possible, okay?”
“Un, I got it.”
Christa nods with a serious expression on her face.
It seems Christa also thinks that it would be bad to show Wendy’s real appearance to him.
Wendy is the [Lolifu] that Trau-niisan is seeking after.
I can’t predict what kind of reaction he will have when he sees Wendy like this.
“That’s all the points I think you need to be careful of I can think up right now. Now, excuse me,
Princess.”
“Y, Your Highness Arnold. Uhh……thank you very much.”
“Please don’t mind it. Do enjoy the Empire to your heart content. That is the reason you visit us,
correct?”
“Yes! I am interested in humans and I wanted to see the human nations! I also want to see the festival
as well!”
“Rita wants to go to the festival too!”
“Me too.”
“Then tell that to Finne. She will surely help you arrange it.”
Saying so, I left the room.
After I closed the door, I found that Sieg was leaning against the wall in front of the room.
“Did you try to approach the Saint’s room again?
“Hell no. I’m just getting sleepy from escorting your sister.”
“I see…….. sorry about that. I am always having you taking care of her.
I try to station Sieg as close as possible to Christa and Rita.
Maybe he was already aware of Wendy’s illusion in the process.
It seems that he was doing his best as their escort to not let anybody find out her secret.
1298
“It’s alright. This is a job too after all. I will do something about the situation here. How about your
side?”
“Can’t say that it is going well. At worst, there might be a big incident. Both Christa and Wendy, there’s
a good chance that they will be targeted. Can I leave them to you?’
“Hah……who do you think you are talking to? This Sieg is acting as their escort. I won’t let them suffer
even a single scratch.”
“Ah, it’s Sieg!”
In the middle of making a cool speech, Sieg was held up by Christa and taken into the room.
He probably will be used as their toy again.
While I was thinking so, I heard a scream from inside the room.
“THAT HURTTTTTTTS!! PLEASE DON’T PULL ON ME ANYMORE!!!!!”
Despite feeling a little sympathy from him, I leave the place.
Today is the day of the ceremony.
There are a lot of things left to do.
1299
SPT Chapter 195
so if a perfectly normal art student can grow back her eyes, a normal human like us can do too right?
-Mr.Graverobber
The Saint who gave up
“My reign has reached the 25th year. There surely are hard times for you. I can not say that it was all
good. I know, there are many points that I must reflect on. However, we are still here. It is all because
of you people who supported and followed me! Today is the day for everyone! Thank you for
supporting your Emperor! Celebrate, rejoice, and look forward to the future of the Empire that has
survived and prospered to this day! Make today a special day with me!!”
The opening ceremony of Emperor Johannes’s 25th coronation anniversary began with his speech.
Leticia and Leo who looked at him from their seats switched their gaze to the people.
“Long live the Emperor!!”
“Long live the Empire!”
“Empire forever!!”
Seeing the people’s wild enthusiasm, Leticia shows a soft smile.
“This is a good country isn’t it.”
“Yes. His Majesty…..no, my father made it so. I’m always hoping to be like him someday.”
“If it’s Prince Leonard then you will surely be able to do it.”
Saying so, Leticia smiles widely at Leo.
It wasn’t flattery. She truly believes that Leo would be able to do it.
“…….I hope that is the case.”
“Are you not confident?”
“Well…..I haven’t done anything that would make me confident I could do it after all.”
“Fufu, if you say that then a lot of people would be in a bind you know.”
1300
“I am not trying to be humble……I really did nothing so far. People call me a hero but I am not
someone as great as a hero. I have only been desperately trying to fulfill my duty as one of the
imperial family. I have only been helped by others.”
“I do think that it is the caliber of a king that makes others’ want to help him though?”
“That might be the case. Luckily, everyone around me is excellent. But if that is truly the most
important thing then………there is a person who is better suited than me.”
Saying so, Leo turned his eyes to Al who was watching the Emperor making his speech in a different
place.
With him were Orihime, Wendy, Christa, and Finne.
There, Al is talking to every one of them in a friendly manner.
To him who can’t even satisfy Leticia’s wish, Leo thinks that it is something that he couldn’t do.
“I do think that Prince Arnold is a wonderful person. He surely is a person that has the talent to earn
the support of others. I too……..sometimes think about how fun it would be if I have him as a little
brother.”
“L, Little brother is it?”
“Yes, little brother. I am older after all.”
After she emphasized that she is the older one, she turned a soft smile on Leo.
Receiving that smile, Leo’s face started to blush.
“Prince Leonard is worrying if you are really suitable to become an emperor right. You are wondering
if you should aim for the throne, that Prince Arnold might be more suitable than you.”
“……yes.”
“Then let me assure you. I think that Prince Leonard is definitely better suited to become an emperor.
Prince Arnold truly cares for those around him, however, I am sure that he couldn’t care less about
others. After all, even now his sight is set on the people around him rather than the people down
there. On the other hand, Prince Leonard can think of the citizens of your country as your family. You
have always been thinking about what you can do for your people, isn’t it clear which one of you is
more suited to become an emperor?”
“Is it really so……..”
“Yes. you are indeed better suited than him. Prince Leonard, you are someone befitting of the throne.
A king is the symbol of the country. A person who makes the decision and leads. Then it is appropriate
to think that someone who always thinks about the betterment of your country is indeed befitting of
the throne. Even though Prince Arnold has the caliber of a king, he lacks the will to do it. It is because
1301
you are here. As long as you are here, Prince Arnold will never aim for the throne. After all, he is the
person who recognizes you the most.”
Is that still not enough?
Leticia asks as she looks at him.
As a response, Leo shook his head.
He was desperately trying when the faction was still weak. If he didn’t do it, only death will be waiting
for him after all.
However, as the faction grew stronger, his ambition for the throne began to waver. He began to
hesitate. He was wondering to himself if he should be the one to do it.
He had enough leeway to think about such a thing. However, that hesitation was dispelled.
He now realized that it is useless to start hesitating now.
“I am fine now. Thank you very much.”
“Is that so. I’m glad.”
As Leo felt that Al is more suitable than him, Al also felt that Leo is more suitable.
Then if she says that he is more suitable, his answer is already decided.
Being an emperor doesn’t mean that he has to stop being Al’s brother. They can trust and support
each other as they have always done.
Such a future was made visible through Leticia’s words.
He felt that the fog clouding his mind was cleared up. The hesitation that he had for a long time
disappeared.
While looking at Al, Leo said his thanks again.
Al doesn’t look at Leo.
That surely because he trusts him. It was Al’s silent message.
Leo is not an idiot.
He has noticed all along.
He knew that Leticia was hiding something but he didn’t know what to do.
He thought that Al might notice the same thing and come to consult with him but Al never said
anything.
1302
There is no way that he didn’t notice. They are twins after all.
If so, there is only one answer.
“He is leaving this to me huh……”
“Yes?”
“It’s nothing……..I just arrived at the answer. Leticia.”
Without attaching the -san, he simply dropped the honorific entirely.
Leticia’s eyes opened wide in surprise when Leo suddenly changed his way to address her but Leo
continued to speak.
“Like how you hear me out, I want you to tell me your worry. If you truly trust me then——-won’t you
share it with me? Your worry.”
Leo said that to Leticia as he looked directly into her eyes.
Perhaps she wasn’t expecting such a straightforwardness from him, Leticia turned silent.
“I have noticed it all along. That you were carrying something with you. But I was afraid to ask. That’s
why I was waiting for Nii-san to bring it up. But he didn’t say anything. I’m sure that he trusts me with
this. That’s why I want to ask you. Can you share your worry with me?”
“Prince Leonard…….”
Without any hesitation, Leo straightly asks her.
Leticia was surprised at his straightforwardness at first but now she started to analyze the differences
between the twins.
Al will not ask her directly like this. He will try to find out about it using a roundabout method. Leo on
the other hand asked such a question directly.
Which one does she prefer? Leticia doesn’t have to think for a second to decide on the latter.
Leticia is weak against goodwill.
In that regard, Leo is more suitable to persuade Leticia.
Leticia shows a troubled smile and lets out a small sigh.
That is because she wants to talk about it now. After all, there is something in Leo that made her want
to talk to him.
If she tells him, he will get involved. She knows that was definitely not a good thing. However, what
spilled from Leticia’s mouth was something that contradicted her thoughts.
1303
“……..His Majesty the King has already grown old. At the moment, much of political affairs are being
taken care of by His Highness the First Prince. and…….His Highness has joined hands with the Anti-
Empire faction. Maybe that is why he started to see me as a nuisance. Eventually, I think that I will be
assassinated. After all, the Kingdom no longer needs me.”
“Assassination…….? You, who have always supported the Kingdom!?”
“Of course, there are those who support me but…….when I picked up the holy staff, I decided to devote
my everything to the Kingdom. The King is someone who leads the nation. If he wants me to
die…….then I will accept it.”
“No…..such a thing is……..”
“The Kingdom has changed. When I stood on the battlefield, the Kingdom was terribly weak. But now
it is different. The Kingdom is regaining its power as one of the three superpowers of the continent.
The people also regain their self-confidence, they believe that the Kingdom is the strongest in the
continent. However, in reality, we are considered the weakest and are treated as such. That has
become a common complaint of the people. Feeling that discontent from the atmosphere of the
Kingdom, the First Prince who had never experienced being the strongest or the weakest started to
move. He probably thinks that he could save lives by changing my mind and started a united front
against the Empire but……I don’t think that conflict can lead the Kingdom into the future. The Empire
is a strong country. I think that it is better for the Kingdom and the Empire to work and develop
together rather than fighting.”
“That’s right! Leticia, you are not in the wrong! I can help you!”
Leo says.
The popularity of Saint Leticia is on the continental scale. There should be many who support her. If
the Empire backs her up, the First Prince should change his mind.
Leo thought so but Leticia shows him a sad smile.
“If the Empire got involved, it would surely lead to a war between the Kingdom and the Empire. At
worst, the Kingdom will be split in two by civil war. That is not something I can allow to happen.”
“Then you will just wait to be killed…….?”
“I will not trouble the Empire. They will surely try to assassinate me during my stay here to use it as a
justification to start a war. However, assassinating me during the ceremony would be difficult. They
will surely aim for my life on my way back to the Kingdom. But I only take the people I can trust along
with me. They should only be able to assassinate me after I enter back into the Kingdom’s territory.
So…..this will be the last time. That’s why I asked for you two to be my entertainer. I think that my last
moment should be a happy one after all……..”
The Imperial Knight of the Empire can be said to be the strongest force on the continent.
With them as her escort, breaking through is unrealistic.
1304
However, she can not stay inside the Empire forever.
“This is my worry. And it is my own problem. It is not something that Prince Leonard should worry
about……….so please don’t look so sad anymore.”
“…….when the King die……..you will die too?”
“……that is how a country is. My staff is certainly powerful. It is the power of this staff that makes the
people confident in the power of the Kingdom. If I die, they should be able to calm down. That would
make it easier for the First Prince to change his policy. War is a sad thing. I don’t want to die if I don’t
have to. If I die within the Kingdom’s territory, war will be easier to avoid…….that will be my last
service to the Kingdom.”
There was no hesitation on Leticia’s face.
The holy staff was sealed deep inside the Kingdom.
Ever since she went there to unlock the seal to save her country, she no longer wished for a decent
way to die.
“This is my last selfishness. Please let me enjoy the rest of my time. Prince Leonard.”
Saying so, Leticia smiles.
How can he change Leticia’s mind?
That is something Leo doesn’t know. Leticia has given up on living. What should he say to persuade
such a person?
In the end, without exchanging any more words, the opening of the ceremony ended and the imperial
capital transformed back into a festival.
1305
SPT Chapter 196
Special thanks to Alfonzom5 for another 69 and I haven’t even reset the goal yet…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Al’s Answer
After the opening ceremony ended, Leo came to my room and said that he wanted to talk.
Seeing the serious look on his face, I decided to send Orihime to Finne’s place and hear him out.
“……….”
“……….”
But Leo didn’t say anything.
No, he couldn’t. He probably couldn’t organize his thoughts yet.
“What did Leticia tell you?”
“…….Nii-san. I……..”
The moment he heard Leticia’s name, Leo’s face distorted. His expression looked like he could cry at
any moment.
When I saw that, I had a rough idea of what kind of conversation he had with her.
“Someone is really aiming for her life huh…….”
“You also noticed, Nii-san……”
“I suspect that it might be the case. But she couldn’t talk to me. It was you who she decided to talk to.”
“I’m not happy about it at all……she already decided to give up on her own life…….!”
As if he had to squeeze those words out, Leo started talking to me about Leticia.
Leticia is targeted by the Kingdom’s Anti-Empire faction. The Anti-Empire faction also has the support
of the next king. Including its citizens, the Kingdom has an Anti-Empire mindset.
Leticia decided to give up on her life because the Kingdom will be split by a civil war if she doesn’t. She
asked for us to be her entertainer because she wanted to enjoy the time she has left.
Leo bitterly told me so.
1306
“So that is her decision huh…….”
For Leticia who devotes herself to the Kingdom, the Kingdom is all that she has.
She thinks that the Kingdom is the highest priority in whatever she does.
To such Leticia, it is necessary for her to do anything she can to prevent the Kingdom from warring
with the Empire. However, she couldn’t do it directly.
Then, she chooses to die as the holder of the holy staff and the symbol of the Kingdom. That is
probably what she is thinking.
Everything is for the Kingdom.
That’s like her.
“Is there…….nothing we can do at all? I want to save her!”
“It is splendid of you to say that but…….this problem is unrelated to us.”
“Eh…..?”
“She is a citizen of the Kingdom. It is normal for her to put the Kingdom as her first priority. Just as we
are princes of the Empire. We have the obligation to think of the Empire first. I agree that we have to
protect her life while she is in the Empire but after that, we have no obligation nor enough leeway to
get involved any longer.”
“No way……! Then are you telling me to let her die!?”
“That’s right. If she wants to die then let her. That is what she wants. It’s wrong for us to get involved.
it will surely trouble us if she dies within the Empire but there is no problem if she dies inside the
Kingdom.”
Hearing my cold words, Leo took a step back.
I closed my eyes because I don’t want to see the despair on his face.
“Nii-san……she is our friend you know!?”
“She is. But she is not a family. If she is a family then I will do everything I can to help her but in the
end, she is only our friend. As long as she lives by the Kingdom’s flag, we are not someone that can
help her.”
“How could you say that! She desperately devoted herself to save the Kingdom and supported it all
this time you know! What did she do to deserve this!”
“Right. I understand what you are trying to say. However, the ones that should do something about
that are those that belong to the Kingdom. After all, this is the Kingdom’s affair.”
1307
“Her parents were from the empire! Moreover, helping her would also benefit the Empire’s interest!”
“If you get involved with a half baked resolve, the Kingdom will be split in two as she says. She chose
to use her death to avoid that……..are you going to ignore her determination? Even if you don’t want
her to die, that is only your selfish desire.”
When I opened my eyes, Leo had an expression with mixed emotions.
Anger, sadness, resignation. It seems that he is experiencing a lot of emotions and couldn’t organize
them all.
I once saw a similar expression before.
“Back then……do you still remember the dying cat you picked up?”
“……I do.”
“At that time, Mother told you that it was your responsibility to look after it until the end. She told you
that she will save it [after] you assume all responsibility for its life. This time is the same. If you can’t
take the responsibility to the end then don’t act at all.”
“………She is not a cat.”
“Right. That’s why the responsibility you will have to bear will not be light. She is the Saint of the
Kingdom. To save her is to take responsibility for all the problems that will follow. And we are not in a
position to take that responsibility. So just make her time here as happy as possible. That is what she
wants.”
After he took that cat in, he took care of it until it died.
But this time, even with the two of us working together, it is still too overwhelming.
Leo hangs his head and looks down. He probably is well aware of this helplessness.
“According to Sebas’s investigation, a crime organization is infiltrating the Imperial Capital. I will ask
Silver to help us out. You just stay with her.”
“…….is there nothing,..we can do?”
“I wonder. I can only give you my own answer. My answer is what I just told you.”
Hearing that, Leo shows an awkward smile.
After that, he said that he understands and tries to leave the room.
At that time, the door was knocked.
“Come in.”
1308
“Excuse my rudeness. I am a servant of Wendy-sama. Please call me Paula.”
Saying so an elf woman in glasses entered the room.
The woman with an atmosphere of a capable woman politely bowed to us with a smile.
“Did you need something?”
“Wendy-sama said that she wanted to see the festival and the person on the scene couldn’t make the
judgment so I was directed to you, Your Highness Arnold.”
“I see. I understand. I will make an arrangement.”
“Thank you very much. You must be Your Highness Leonard? The rumors about Your Highness have
reached even the Elf Village. It is an honor to meet you, Your Highness. May I be allowed to shake your
hand?”
Paula asks Leo to shake hands.
Leo who is absolutely in no mood to do that manages to paste a smile on his face.
“If you go meet Leticia with that kind of face, she will be sad you know?”
“I know……I will do it properly.”
After Paula left, Leo told me so in a whisper.
While wondering if he will be okay, I see Leo off.
Then a voice came from behind me.
“Wasn’t that a little too tough, sir?”
“Should I have said that I would help her together with him?”
Sebas who appeared silently behind me shook his head.
“That is not the case, sir. I simply thought that you went too far in cornering him.”
“If he gives up with just that then that’s that. It would be better if he gives up if he isn’t willing to go
that far.”
“It was as if you don’t want him to give up though? ‘Leonard-sama will surely be able to arrive at a
different answer’. Is that what you are thinking?”
Sebas smiles and says so.
While I frowned at him, I changed the topic.
“Have you found the base of that leader guy?”
1309
“Yes. we still haven’t got found out either.”
“I see. I will do it myself. Keep Mia on standby.”
“You are quite proactive this time, sir.”
“There is definitely a traitor inside the castle. I have looked around but I don’t know who it is yet. Well,
the clue lies with Grimoire. Failure is not an option. I will take them down with all my power.”
“Understood.”
Saying so, Sebas prepares Silver’s clothes for me.
1310
SPT Chapter 197
Fish sauce?
-Mr.Graverobber
For the People
“Their base is located in the basement of an abandoned noble mansion, sir. They are a group of mages
so they should have a strong barrier in place so I do advise that you avoid using transfer magic.”
“Got it. Just in case, I want you to be on standby near their base.”
“As you wish.”
“Then I will be going.”
“Have a safe trip, sir.”
Saying so I transferred away as Silver.
I was told the location of the abandoned mansion in advance.
It seems that it had been left unused since the owner hadn’t used it for a few years prior. Since it is
now the base of a crime organization, no one can fault the Empire for their presence there.
“Well, we can’t keep track of each and every abandoned mansion after all.”
While muttering so, I entered the mansion.
Then, I found a door leading to the basement.
Of course, it is locked and there is also a barrier protecting it.
However, a barrier at this level is the same as nothing.
I put my hand on the door and pour in my magic power.
The barrier also got destroyed since it can’t handle the magic power I poured in and the door
exploded in an instant.
“Now they should notice my presence huh.”
As I went down the stairs, I increased the concentration of magic power around me.
Despite being an organization led by mages, in the end, they should only be on the level of human
beings.
1311
If they are at that level then I don’t even have to deal with them.
While I was thinking so, I arrived at the basement.
“Hou?”
There is a straight path in front of me.
Although it seems to be a normal straight corridor, there are invisible threads of magic power set up
there.
If I snap them something might happen huh.
Thinking so, I proceeded further without minding them.
Then, when my body touched the magic threads, an arrow flew out from the wall.
“A combination of magic and trap huh. As expected of a base of Grimoire.”
I think that it is an interesting mechanism but in the end, it is just interesting.
Considering the time until its activation, this will not work against a skilled person.
And in reality, the arrow that flew toward me slowed down and fell to the floor.
After I casually walked past the straight corridor, I arrived at a big open space.
There, dozens of men are waiting for me with weapons in hands.
“HE’S HERE! THROW IT!”
They probably anticipate that arrows would not work on someone who can break through the earlier
trap.
So, they started throwing javelins at me.
The javelins are also magically enhanced. With such quality, it wouldn’t be weird for the military to
adopt these javelins.
Even so.
“Is that all?
“No way………”
Someone muttered.
All the javelins stopped in front of me.
1312
Seeing the javelins that paused in midair, people with good instincts would start finding a place to
hide.
“Then I will return these.”
The javelins flip over and point at the men. Guessing what about to happen, many try to flee. But it is
already too late.
In an instant, the javelins in front of me shot out at them and penetrated their bodies.
Those who hid behind a cover were pierced through along with the object they were hiding behind.
With the majority of them dead, the rest were left unable to act.
However.
“Hou?”
“WOAAHHHHH!!!”
There is one capable enough to move huh.
The man unsheathes his sword and rushes at me from my left.
To be able to survive that rain of javelins, this man should at least be at the class of A-rank adventurer
huh.
However.
“You’re…..kidding me…….”
“Sorry. A halfhearted strike will never reach me.”
The body of the man stopped in front of me.
Seeing his sword that couldn’t move an inch, the man despair.
“Do you have anything left to say?”
“S……..”
“S?”
“S, IT’S SILVEEEEEEEEEEEER!!!!”
“Thanks for the introduction.”
I blew away the man with my left hand.
The man crashed into the wall and died on impact.
1313
Well, every one of them should notice my presence now.
As far as I can see, this basement is quite large. They must have expanded the original basement here.
“Well, I guess I will have to look for their leader now.”
Muttering so, I left the room that has already turned into a sea of blood.
—————————-
“Fire Fire!! Don’t let him advance any further!!”
As I progressed through the basement, the men who seemed to be the members of the organization
took the initiative and attacked me.
Some used magic and there’s even a squad of crossbowmen.
Although the result is still the same and their attack still couldn’t reach me, there are several men who
are on the same level as the man from the first room.
It made me understand how deep this organization goes.
“Out of my way.”
Seeing the men trying to construct a barricade by piling up their desks, I swung my right arm and
created a wind pressure and blew them off along with their barricade.
In such a tight space there is a limit to what I can do because I have to hold back. It is a disadvantage
for me but seeing the resistance they provided so far, I’m glad that I infiltrate this base myself.
Sebas and Mia should be able to manage them but it will surely take some time and the possibility that
they can hide crucial information will increase.
When I was analyzing the situation, a young man came out from deep inside the corridor.
He is a crude man with blood-red hair and a large sword on his back.
A provocative smile floats on his face.
“I never thought that there would be an S-rank adventurer who would get himself involved with a
crime organization. Ignat.”
The name of the man who appeared in front of me is Ignat. He is one of the S-rank adventurers the
guild gathered to subjugate the Spirit Turtle.
“Hah! Adventurers are like a jack of all trades, right? As long as there is a reward I will do it! And
thanks to a certain someone’s interruption, I just missed a fat paycheck. I am earning it back here.
These guys are the best you know? They paid me a lot. Unlike this damn Empire!”
1314
Ignat happily laughed after he said that.
Acting in exchange of money is basically what adventurers do. That is not wrong.
However, Adventurer Guild has declared that it will never allow any of its members to get involved
with any crime organization.
Because that action will violate their one and only iron rule.
To act for the People.
“Have you thrown away your pride as an adventurer?”
“That for the people crap? As expected of SS-rank adventurer-sama. Aren’t you a good boy? Here is my
answer, that damn rule can go eat shit. What can people do for us? All they do is complain after we
saved their asses. I fuckin hate them. Both them and a stiff like you who support that stupid rule!!”
Ignat pulled out the sword on his back.
Then, when he poured magic power into his sword, the blade was wrapped in flames.
“Magic sword huh.”
“That’s right! Whether it’s a monster or a human, this guy can burn them all away, the best partner I
have!”
Ignat straightly thrusts his sword at me.
An S-rank adventurer is strong, and I can’t use my full power in a tight space.
This is indeed a miscalculation on my part. A big miscalculation.
However.
“Kghaa……!?”
“——What a coincidence. I also hate it. A guy who broke an adventurer’s only rule like you.”
Ignat was hit by an attack from the side and sent into the wall before he reached me.
I further provoke Ignat who still doesn’t know what just happened.
“Stand up, Ignat. As an SS-rank adventurer, I will swat you down for breaking that iron rule.”
“Don’t fuck with me! YOU WEAK ASS MAGE!!”
Ignat got up and came to attack me. This time, he used a feint before he tried to approach me.
Then, when he swings down his magic sword from above, I take it with my barrier.
1315
“You think you stopped it? This time it’s your turn to disappear! Silver!”
“No, I was just curious about your partner since you boasted about it so much. It doesn’t look that
special to me though.”
“Damn you! I will fucking kill you then rip that lame-ass mask off your corpse!!”
Thus, the battle between an S-rank and an SS-rank adventurer began without anyone noticing under
the Imperial Capital.
1316
SPT Chapter 198
Went out to play board game with friend yesterday………so in a game that you can get converted to
your enemy side, does it count as a win if I started out as a good guy but get converted and the enemy
ended up winning?
I did win right?
-Mr.Graverobber
S‐Rank and SS‐Rank
“Hahaha!! What’s wrong! Silver!!”
“Tsk!”
Ignat skillfully uses feint and brings the fight to close quarters.
On the other hand, I was trying to keep the distance while concentrating my magic power on both
hands while parrying Ignat’s magic sword.
“All you do is defend! Is that how much an SS-rank adventurer amounts to!?”
“Your mouth made it look like you still have leeway left huh.”
Saying so, I swing my hand downward, sending a wind blade toward him.
Ignat receives it with his magic sword but he is pushed back by the impact and retreats a distance
away.
“Tsk! Damn mages!!”
“So the standard of S-ranker has already fallen so much that a close combatant can get cornered by a
mage huh.”
“You bastard…….! I will make you regret that!!”
Ignat adds more magic power into his sword.
Then, the flames wrapping around his sword hugely swelled up and immediately settled down with
only a thin layer around his sword.
That probably isn’t a misfire.
If that giant flame was compressed around that sword then its power must be stronger than before.
1317
“You need a special kind of battle to become SS-rank. The only thing I lack is a suitable monster to
fight!!”
“So you are saying that if you have the chance, you could become SS-rank adventurer?”
“That’s right! And I will prove that to you now!!”
Ignat rushed at me as he said so.
Since he only rushed straight at me, I created the wind blades with my hand again.
However, Ignat clashed into the wind blades. He cuts through it and keeps rushing at me.
“You think you can stop me with something like that!!?”
“Hou?”
As expected of an S-rank adventurer huh.
He has quite a power.
I set up a strong barrier in front of me and stopped the blow from Ignat’s sword. The barrier is
different from the one I used to test him out earlier.
This one is a proper barrier.
“So you’re saying that you still haven’t got serious too huh!”
“Who knows.”
I tried to pierce Ignat whose movement got stopped. Ignat twists his body to avoid my attack then
grabs my arm and performs a throw.
I was thrown but I managed to regain my balance midair and lands. However, using that moment,
Ignat rushes at me again.
He is aiming to settle this with close combat. He probably doesn’t want to give me a distance since he
can’t break through my defenses from afar and he knows that I am better at long-range attacks.
That strategy, even though he is rotten, he is still an adventurer huh.
“TAKE THIS!!”
“Kuh!”
I used both hands to catch his magic sword that tried to pierce my chest.
Normally, your hands would get burned if you catch such a hot sword but that was why I was
collecting magic power in my hands.
1318
However, for it to still make me feel its heat like this, this sword is quite dangerous.
“What? Can’t set up any more barriers now?”
“I guess……I’m bad at close-quarter combat you see.”
Saying so, I kicked at Ignat but he quickly let go of his sword and evaded it and proceeded to strike my
abdomen.
I was forced to retreat from his attack so I have to let go of his sword. Ignat then catches his sword
back from midair.
“Guh……”
“A kick strengthened by magic huh. It may be powerful but do you really think that you can hit anyone
with that technique of yours?”
No matter how much I can strengthen my body with magic, I don’t have even a shred of physical talent
after all.
I might be able to improve my power but against a professional combatant like him, I am nothing.
I can not beat Ignat with my physical skills.
Well, I already know that.
I stood up while holding down my stomach. There is not much damage but the odds are in his favor. I
will have to get in a good blow to offset this.
Understanding that, Ignat shows a carefree smile.
“What’s wrong? Just use your big magic! Well, if you use such a magic the capital above us might
crumble down to the ground though!”
“So you understand that huh. The reason I will not use big magic here.”
“For the people, huh. Fool! If you throw that ideal away you wouldn’t be cornered like this! Do you
think their lives are more important than yours!?”
I did not answer his question.
It was a question that I did not need to answer.
I am the SS-rank adventurer who uses ancient magic. Silver was accepted by the people of the Empire
because he has acted as their guardian.
‘For the people’, I can see what will happen if I break that iron rule.
Because he is an ideal adventurer, Silver is allowed to be in the Empire.
1319
Therefore, Silver can not abandon the people of the Empire.
Even if that will cost him his life.
“Hah! You can live by that ideal all you want but your life won’t be long you know!!”
Ignat held up his magic sword.
He finally decided to deal the finishing blow huh.
“I don’t usually give a name to the techniques I use but there is one of them that I gave a name to.”
“A trump card huh…….as expected of an S-rank adventurer. You have a lot of tricks up your sleeve.”
“That carefreeness…….will you be able to keep it after you take this!?”
His magic sword is wrapped in a big swirling flame.
The flame was redder than all the flame Ignat showed so far.
That blazing flame grows smaller and smaller as Ignant takes a deep breath. It was as if Ignat himself
breathe in the flame. From the look of it, he must be increasing the synchronization with his sword.
Eventually, the flame swirling around his sword disappeared.
However, it should be close to the calm before the storm.
“Final Cremation.”
At that moment, Ignat disappeared.
Before I knew it, he was already closing in on my chest.
Fast. his speed is totally different from before. The speed that was almost at the level of teleporting
must come from when he absorbed the flame from his sword.
His physical ability explosively increased.
As an S-rank adventurer, Ignat’s physical ability is already high but now it has grown even higher.
Ignat keeps closing in like that while thrusting his sword at me. I can feel a huge amount of magic
power emanating from his sword.
With my action limited, I can’t avoid his attack.
Originally, as a mage, I can’t go all out in such a tight space. Ignat already entered the range that I
should never have allowed him to in the first place.
Normally, I would eliminate him or take a distance away.
1320
However, I couldn’t do that here. I can use transfer magic but doing so I would lose the chance to
collect the scarce clues we managed to find.
But if I attack him with a large-scale magic, the basement will collapse and it will cause damage to the
imperial capital above us.
That was why I was in a helpless situation.
Therefore.
“Good work. I was waiting for you to make such an attack.”
“Wh…at……….?”
Ignat’s attack was stopped by a barrier before it reached me.
And it is not a simple barrier either.
“My magic is too strong for a tight space like this. It’s hard to even hold back. That’s why it is easier for
me to make use of your own attack.”
“Don’t tell me…….!?”
“Ah, don’t worry. I was fighting you seriously. I simply didn’t give it my all.”
“Kuh!?”
Trying to figure out what kind of barrier I was using, Ignat tried to get away from me. However, it was
too late.
In the first place, we are in a closed space. He has nowhere to escape to.
The name of the barrier I used is the [Reflective Barrier]. As the name implies, it reflects back the
opponent’s attack.
Ignat’s thrust released the accumulated energy he gathered up all at once but it was absorbed into the
barrier and released back at him.
“GWAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA!!??
Ignat, who took the brunt of his own trump card, tried to protect his body with his right arm that was
holding his magic sword. Thanks to that, his body was only slightly burned. Even so, since his whole
body was burned, his condition could be said to be serious.
The right arm he used to protect his body was also carbonized.
With his body tattered, and his right arm crumbling away, Ignat collapses as he loses his
consciousness.
1321
After catching Ignat with a barrier, I turn back.
“Now, let’s continue.”
As expected, they shouldn’t have any guard that is stronger than Ignat.
All that left is to capture their leader.
Let’s end this. This place stresses me up. I might end up shooting out magic to relieve some stress
after this.
1322
SPT Chapter 199
so I recently started rereading [I will live my second life] since Centini picked it up.
Looking at the raw and see that the Author has been updating it 1 chapter a year for 2 years straight
dampen my eagerness to read though.
Anyway, I stopped at chapter 98 since somebody decided to just dumped the raw into google translate
and post it just like that…….made me want to retranslate those chapters though.
Is this series cursed or something?
-Mr.Graverobber
Hex User
After defeating Ignat, I proceed further underground.
As expected, there was no one that was stronger than Ignat among their guards. What left are some
sporadic resistances scattered here and there.
Then, I arrived at a door.
I can feel magic power from it but I open the door without minding it. Doing so, a bolt of lightning flew
towards me.
Still, it was blocked by my barrier.
“As expected of an Ancient Magic-User. People didn’t call you the strongest mage in the Empire for
nothing. That was a great barrier.”
Said the young man with swept-back blonde hair as he applauded.
His irises are in different colors of purple and green. I can see that he possesses a good amount of
knowledge of magic.
The man sits imposingly on his chair as he looks straight at me.
This room is different from the others.
It is filled with books so this must be some kind of a study room, probably the personal quarter of the
man in front of me. It somehow feels similar to Gramps’ room.
They are the same in that they are both fascinated by magic and only live to study it. There is a huge
difference in their nature though.
1323
“So you are their leader?”
“Indeed I am. My name is Ian. One who bears the symbol of the winged book of Grimoire.”
Ian then shows the tattoo on his left hand.
The tattoo is one of a book with demonic wings. This is probably the symbol of their executives that
Mia was talking about.
People with odd eyes have a strong magic power by nature. The fact that he is one means that he must
be an excellent mage himself.
“Crime Organization that was born from a group of researchers, Grimoire. What exactly are you
people doing under the imperial capital?”
“So you paid us a visit without knowing that?”
“I only heard that there are maggots squirming underground. I don’t know what such maggots are
doing though.”
Ian’s eyebrows moved after my provocation.
Then he shows a thin smile.
“That’s cruel. Calling us maggots? Then maybe the people above ground are simple pebbles?”
“Maybe. Compared to you people they are as valuable as gems though.”
“As expected of the sole SS-rank adventurer of the Empire. You sure favor them.”
“I wonder about that. I think that you would get the same answer no matter which SS-rank adventurer
you ask you know? Even like this, I am still the gentlest of all SS-rank adventurers though. Maybe you
don’t like what I said?”
“Well, I do have the same sensibilities as the next guy you see. Being treated like a maggot hurt me
quite a bit.”
“I see. Sorry about that. I will rephrase it then. You trash who are obsessed with magic. What are you
doing inside the Empire?”
Ian doesn’t react this time.
However, I can see that his magic power is slowly increasing.
That being said, his carefree expression still remains the same.
He probably has some kind of plan huh.
“I think it is my business to conduct my magic research wherever I want though?”
1324
“Magic research? If you are not guilty then why bother holding yourself up underground like this?”
“I’m a shy person.”
“Is that right. So you are saying that what you are researching are healthy magics?”
“Of course.”
“……as a mage, my interest is piqued. Let’s hear it then. What are you studying?”
“I am thinking of challenging a grand magic with cooperation from a certain person. It’s a magic that
nobody has managed to cast before.”
“Cooperation huh……”
For him to infiltrate the Empire during such a time, there’s no way that he would be researching such
ordinary magic.
And his cooperating probably means becoming his research specimen. No one would willingly give
their cooperation to such a thing.
In other words.
“Rather than a cooperator, isn’t it more accurate to say a research specimen?”
“You could say that I guess.”
“I see. One more thing. Is it the Saint?”
“As expected of Silver, you are fast. That’s right. I am intending to have her cooperate with us.”
Ian grins.
There is no malicious intent on his face. His grin seems like that of someone who doesn’t think he has
done anything wrong.
He probably thinks of everyone else beside him as his specimen.
He does resemble Zandra. A person that doesn’t care about anyone except they serve a purpose.
“I see……then I am done asking questions. Have you prepared yourself?”
“You sure are carefree. So you went out of your way to let me finish my preparation huh?”
“It’s my interest as a mage. I am wondering how dull your magic would be when it was developed
through illegal means and at the expense of others.”
“Hmph…..then that dull magic will be your downfall!”
Saying so, Ian snapped his fingers.
1325
At that moment, Countless barriers that were set up around the room activated, and the place where I
am standing was surrounded by magic circles.
The magic circles formed a single crest and started to bind me.
“My specialty is hex. I have been collecting the hex barriers of the east and west, both old and new,
once it all combined it will completely neutralize the target! This is my new magic・Evil Eye Barrier!
You already lost the moment you stepped into my room!”
“It seems that this magic is certainly a combination of various kinds of barriers huh.”
There are more than 20 barriers set up in this room. Each of their powers probably stacks up and
creates a powerful hex at the magic circle below me.
Certainly, it is powerful. However, this is simply a mishmash combination.
“I am the strongest Hex User! You chose the wrong opponent! Silver!”
“Yeah, seriously. You really chose the wrong opponent.”
I slightly lift my right leg up and stomp back on the ground.
With that alone, the magic circle under me collapses and the barriers that were set up all over the
room also collapsed with the sound of glass shattering
“Im, possible…….”
“To be honest, I do think that it was a great barrier. You combined the barrier that normally would
repel each other into one barrier that has an exquisite balance. Still, if I break that balance, everything
will collapse immediately. That barrier won’t help you in actual combat.”
“I know that……..that’s why I used it as a trap……how could you move inside that barrier……?
“That is probably because my barrier is stronger than your hex.”
Ian seems to think that he would win if he can trap his opponent inside his barrier but that idea is too
naive.
Tentatively, I am the strongest mage of the Empire. Even if I have Orihime as my opponent, as long as I
have time, I can escape her barrier. And she is the strongest Barrier User on the continent. Of course, I
can move within the hex barrier at Ian’s level.
And if I can move as normal, it is an easy task to pour my magic power in his barrier to upset the
balance of the magic circles.
“No matter how much you research and combine various kinds of magic, you can not call it new magic.
At best, it is only a modification of its current capability. A new magic is one that you create by
overcoming the already existing wall. Don’t underestimate magic development.”
1326
“Fu…..fufufu……as expected……as expected of you, Silver…..I am so lucky. I thought that I drew a bad
lottery when I was assigned to lead the Imperial Capital operation but…….I am now being able to test
out my skill with the strongest mage!!!”
Saying so, Ian shoots a huge fireball from his right arm.
He certainly is skilled. That is not something a normal mage could cast without any chant.
However.
“Testing your skill? A Hex User like you who already abandoned relying on your hexes?”
“Kuh! Then take this!!”
Ian took out a stone from his pocket.
It was a jewel that has accumulated magic power inside. Ian threw it at me.
The moment the jewel came into contact with my barrier, the jewel shattered with smoke leaked from
the inside.
“Hahaha! It’s over! Silver! That jewel is a special item I developed! If you breathe in that smoke, you
will sleep for three days!”
“Is that so.”
Saying so, I contained the smoke inside a barrier.
Seeing the smoke being captured in a moment, Ian opened his eyes wide but I spoke to him without
caring that.
“Thanks for the explanation. I was thinking that it would be a pain to find a way to knock you out
without killing you, you see.”
“Wai-!”
“No.”
I throw the barrier containing the smoke at Ian.
The moment it reached him, the barrier broke and the smoke leaked out.
Ian who was bathed in it immediately lost consciousness and fell asleep.
“Now, the rest is to look for information huh.”
Muttering so, I started looking at the documents on Ian’s desk.
As I looked through it, I unintentionally clicked my tongue.
1327
“Tsk…..! this is more troublesome than I thought.”
Saying so, I started collecting all the necessary documents.
1328
SPT Chapter 200
200 Chapters eh…….well, 174 to go.
Gotta start translating mob model and dahlia today and I can get back to build my house in minecraft
hehehe
-Mr.Graverobber
Each of their position
I left the clean up to Sebas and transferred back to the castle.
At the hectic castle where the ceremony is being held, people are looking at me with shock as I walked
past them but I keep on without paying them any attention.
My destination is at the top floor. The throne room.
As I go up the stairs, I pass by many senior nobles and ministers.
Everybody panicked every time they saw me. They are all wondering what I am doing here but not
one of them shows any sign of following me. They probably have an idea of where I am trying to go
but it seems that they have no intention to get between an SS-rank adventurer and the Emperor.
Then, I reached the throne room.
After showing my adventurer card to the Imperial Knights on guarding duty, I open the door.
Looking inside, it seems that there are already several guests in there.
“Silver huh. Have you also come to celebrate my anniversary?”
Father sees me and sighs.
Instead of Father, it was William and Gordon who came to greet him that shouted at me.
“Silver! There should be a limit on how rude you can be!”
“Certainly, this is discourteous.”
Following Gordon’s shout was Eric.
Next to him is the dignitary from Sokol empire. He should be one of their ministers if I remember
correctly. He is certainly a person worthy of being a negotiation partner for Eric who both has the
blood of the imperial family and holding the position of Minister of Foreign Affairs.
1329
However, contrary to Gordon, Eric seems to be watching me with the intention to find out my aim. His
composure is one step higher than Gordon who readily shows his anger.
I ignored both princes including their guests.
“I need to talk with you. Please clear the room.”
“Hou? You have something to tell me that you don’t want my princes to hear?”
“That’s right. Unfortunately, I do not trust your sons.”
“I see……..withdrawn, both of you. Prince William, Minister Martin. I am sorry that I have to interrupt
your greeting. Can I have you visit me at another time?”
“Father! Are you giving priority to the like of this adventurer than our foreign dignitaries!?”
Gordon explodes in anger but Father’s reaction to his outburst was calm.
“That’s what I am saying. Back down already.”
“Kuh……”
Gordon had no choice but to shut up.
On the opposite, Eric and the dignitaries don’t give their verbal reply and leave after a polite bow.
They are certainly more mature than Gordon. Well, that’s to be expected.
With the four’s withdrawal, the only people left in the throne room are me, Father, and Franz besides
him.
“Do you want Franz to withdraw as well?”
“Unnecessary. I want the Prime Minister to take a look at this.”
Saying so, I handed the documents I recovered from the base of Grimoire to Franz.
“This is……?”
“I was asked by the Dull Prince to take control of the base of a crime organization. It was unpleasant to
have a criminal organization operating from under the Imperial Capital so I accepted the request but it
seems that this matter will be more troublesome than I expected.”
“I see. So it was Grimoire Arnold was talking about huh……it must have been hard huh.”
“Indeed. If he wanted to investigate them then he should have added more manpower. That prince has
been bringing trouble after trouble to me lately.”
Hearing that, Father made a bitter smile.
1330
He then received the documents from Franz and read through them. In doing so, his expression
gradually grows sharper.
“A magic experiment using the Saint huh…….”
“That was their plan.”
That’s right. What was left inside their base were documents on [How to utilize the Saint].
They poured their brains into a study when they still couldn’t acquire the specimen yet.
That was too unnatural.
“The security around the Saint is strict. Nevertheless, the plan they have was not how to kidnap her
but how to use her once she is in their hands. I am sure that you understand the meaning of this.”
It doesn’t matter how strong her security is.
The fact that they have such a plan means that they have the means to get to her. The Saint who is
being strictly guarded by the Imperial Knights.
Leticia herself is the user of one of the four sacred treasures. There is no way for them to capture her
through brute force.
They didn’t have any sign of preparation in regard to that. If you want to abduct the Saint, it will
certainly be a huge undertaking. There should be a trace of that somewhere but so far I haven’t seen
any.
In other words, the one who will be kidnapping the Saint is not Grimoire.
“Grimoire is a group of researchers who seek to uncover the secret of magic. I understand that their
aim is the Saint. If it is true that there is no other plan at their base as you said then they must have a
collaborator, that person will be responsible for the abduction. As we still couldn’t identify that
collaborator yet, you are saying that this situation is dangerous right, Silver?”
“That’s a good answer. You should send the Saint back to the Kingdom immediately.”
“Aren’t you quite motivated this time? This is a political issue you know?”
“A human life is at stake.”
“I see…….then I will tell you my decision. We will not send the Saint back to the Kingdom. She will be
enjoying the rest of the ceremony and the festival before she heads back as planned.”
“…….If you wait for something to happen first it will be too late you know!?”
Father nodded at my words.
1331
There’s no way that he didn’t understand the risk. He should know full well what will happen if the
Saint got kidnapped inside our country.
An assassination would be far better. If Grimoire got to her, she would only be treated as an
experimental subject and the Empire will be the one who suffers the result of that experiment.
We would have to deal with Grimoire from the inside and the Kingdom from the outside. It would be
the worst scenario.
“One question. Are you sure that other documents weren’t destroyed before your arrival?”
“I couldn’t find any trace of that. And what would change if that is the case? The fact that Grimoire is
aiming for the Saint still exists. We still don’t know how they would do it. Sending her back to the
Kingdom because of the danger to her life, what is wrong with that?”
“But you already destroyed their base, no? Isn’t it fair to say that the danger has dramatically
decreased already?”
“………Do you want the Saint to die? Do you wish for a war with the Kingdom?”
“Silver. His Majesty’s hands are tied in this matter.”
Franz opened his mouth.
His expression looked grim.
“What do you mean?”
“…..the Kingdom currently wishes for a war with the Empire. This ceremony also has the purpose of
appealing to the other countries that we are still staying strong since they believed that we have
weakened by the loss of the Crown Prince and the various incidents that happened. So, if we send her
back, the Kingdom will be convinced that the Empire is weakened.”
“Then the Kingdom will attack. The United Kingdom and the Dominion will move. That is why we can’t
show any weaknesses.”
“That is putting a cart before a horse. The same would happen if the Saint was abducted inside the
Empire.”
“However……the Kingdom will be severely weakened. They have both Pro-Empire and Anti-Empire
factions in their country. The Saint belongs to the former, if she was kidnapped, the Pro-Empire
faction will turn into the opposite. On the contrary, as long as they are not united, there are plenty of
opportunities we can exploit.”
“You are saying that if we are going to war anyway then it would be better to fight the Kingdom that
already lost the Saint……? If you move now, there is a life that you can save you know!?”
“Once she returns to the Kingdom, her life will not be long. The mainstream opinion of the Kingdom is
Anti-Empire. She will be assassinated eventually. She herself told her supporters that she wishes for
1332
peace with the Empire, that’s why they will not run wild in anger after her death. With that in place,
the Kingdom will never be united.”
If they are not united, we can divide them up as much as we want.
That was what my father was saying.
Understanding that, I bite my lips. I understand what he is saying but if I accept that then Leo will be
deeply scarred. That alone is unacceptable.
“Silver. We are in a different position. If we save her life just because we can, she will eventually be
killed or used in a war. The worst outcome for the Empire is the latter. The Kingdom is everything for
her. If push comes to shove, she will always choose the Kingdom. And when she does, she will oppose
the Empire. What followed would be the loss of our soldiers’ lives. I am the Emperor. What I must give
my priority is the Empire.”
“…..you are saying that it is better for her to die when it benefits the Empire? Is that your answer?”
“That’s right. Of course, we will protect her. Her security is perfect. I have already asked the Celestial
Princess to set up a barrier around her room. If she doesn’t open the door herself, no one can break-in.
Even for you, that barrier shouldn’t be something that you could break in a short time.”
“The Celestial Princess’s barrier is certainly strong. I admit that. But any protection has its
drawbacks.”
“We are doing our best. If something were to happen to her in the end then that’s that. I will work with
Franz to solve it when the time comes.”
To that realistic plan, I couldn’t say anything back.
Both as an adventurer and as a prince, I have nothing left to say.
I wanted to help her for Leo’s sake. As a prince, I have already accepted her death but as Silver, I still
could not.
Saving lives that can be saved. That is Silver’s creed.
However, this matter is a national problem. If so, then the Emperor’s decision is absolute.
“Is that so…….I understand what you are thinking.”
“Are you disappointed?”
“No……I can understand your position.”
“I see. I’m grateful. If……she belongs to the Empire, it would be a different matter.”
That’s right. As a prince, that is the conclusion I reached. For those who belong to the Empire, it is
impossible to help someone from the Kingdom.
1333
In the end, that is where she belongs.
As an adventurer, I can no longer save her. No matter how great Silver is, I can’t ignore a national
decision. After all, this is already politics.
In other words……I can only put my hope on Leo.
I gave up and turned back but I was stopped and asked Father one last question.
“Your Majesty. As long as they are aiming for the Saint, it is impossible for them to do this from the
outside. There will definitely be a collaborator from inside the castle. Do you have anyone in mind?”
“Franz will take care of the investigation.”
“…..be careful of the Princes.”
“You are saying that any of my sons would betray the Empire? Impossible. If they get the throne, the
throne will belong to them. What is the point in hurting your own belonging?”
“There are some who think that if they can’t have it, no one can.”
“My sons are not that stupid.”
Confidence can be seen hidden in my father’s expression.
He is fully convinced that his own flesh and blood will never betray the Empire. Of course, normally
that would be the case. However, this succession war is different.
Franz should feel it as well.
Besides Father, Franz is having a thoughtful expression on his face.
It is not so bad for the master to be unconvinced. If his trust was broken then it is fine as long as his
subordinate follows up for him.
My father has an excellent subordinate at his side.
Thinking that my worry is unnecessary, I left the throne room behind.
1334
SPT Chapter 201
Anyone play Mahjong Soul?
https://mahjongsoul.game.yo-star.com/
-Mr.Graverobber
Worry
I left the clean up to Sebas and transferred back to the castle.
In the end, I tried looking around the castle but I still couldn’t identify the traitor.
Night comes. A large party was being held at the castle.
The party where many nobles, as well as influential people from each country, were invited is
currently heated up.
“Finne! There are some rare foods over there!”
“Orihime-sama. It is dangerous to run around so much you know.”
Orihime who is wearing a black dress runs around without looking might accidentally tackle other
party goers so Finne gave her a warning.
Together with Finn who is currently donning a blue dress, they are gathering a lot of attention at the
party.
Walking behind the two of them, I am also attending the party.
Originally, the role of being Orihime’s entertainer was mine but Finne has been the one who took care
of her today. That is why they are getting along so well. Well, I can’t use that as an excuse to neglect
my duty though.
“Mumu! This also has a strange taste! But it sure is spicy. Arnold. I’m thirsty.”
“There’s some drink over there right.”
“I’m thirsty.”
Orihime stares at me.
You have been neglecting me the entire day and you can’t even do that much for me? That was the
message her stare was giving.
1335
With no other choice, I picked up the juice from a nearby table and gave it to her with a sigh.
“Here.”
“Umu. Good work.”
“Quite self-important today aren’t you?”
“Mu? Is there a problem? If that’s the case then I don’t mind complaining that you have been
neglecting me for an entire day you know?”
“Even if you say that, you were playing with Finne the whole day right?”
“Umu, Finne did a great job. I went out to see the festival with the Elf Princess too.”
“Then it’s all good right?”
“No way! I was lonely you know…….”
Orihime dejectedly lowers her shoulders.
Seeing that, Finne came over to comfort her with a bitter smile. It seems like I have done something
bad here though.
Well, Orihime did say that she wanted to see the festival again so I told her that I would go with her
again. I’m sorry that I had to break my promise with her.
“Sorry, it was my bad. Cheer up.”
“Muuuu……..”
“I will make it up to you.”
“Really? You are not lying?”
“Yeah, really.”
“Umu! Then I will forgive you!”
Saying so, Orihime gives me a cheerful smile.
It’s a quick switch. Well, I’m thankful since the awkward mood went away. Rather, I should be grateful
that she was only in a bad mood after I neglect the duty of being her entertainer huh.
It would be a big trouble if she complains about it to Father. Well, I was out investigating Grimoire so
it couldn’t be helped. Still, it doesn’t change that it will be troublesome.
Right now I simply don’t have the time. No matter what I do, time simply is not enough.
1336
I have Sebas look around the castle during the duration of this party but the question is whether he
will be able to find any clue.
“He probably can’t find it huh……”
I look around while muttering so.
On the other side of the party venue are Wendy, Christa, and Rita who are happily having their meal
together. A little away from them, the minister from Sokol is talking with Eva and Julio. It is probably
some kind of diplomatic talk.
Eric and Conrad were nearby and they were talking about something together. Even though it is out of
formality, Conrad is still a supporter of Gordon. What is he doing talking with Eric?
Well, Conrad is a pretty shrewd guy. He is easy going and has a good atmosphere around him. If he
wanted to get along with Eric then he would be able to do it.
Gordon and Prince William were at the exact opposite side. They are talking with the dignitary from
the Dominion with Trau-niisan beside him.
Trau-niisan’s eyes are looking away though. He is focusing his gaze in Christa’s direction.
I can say nothing but as expected of him.
Well, with that said, it seems that he is properly listening to the conversation and it seems that the
Dominion’s dignitary is having a hard time.
After all, if anyone wants to talk about something with him, Trau-niisan would be the first to hear it. It
will become super troublesome if Trau-niisan gets serious and it is hard to pull him away as well.
As expected, what I should be worried about is over there.
I thought so and moved my eyes to the center of the venue.
Leticia is standing there in a white dress.
The pure white dress that embodied purity suits her very well and she is currently gathering gazes at
the center of the hall.
She is someone suitable for the leading role as she is attracting the eyes of those around her and
fascinates them with her mannerism.
Next to her is the stiff Leo. He is also attracting the attention of women around him.
I should say that his presence stands out no less than Leticia’s huh.
One could say that both of them suit each other so well that the women around them can’t help but
sigh in admiration.
1337
However, Leo seems to have a sad expression. A noble lady nearby saw the current Leo and exclaims
that today’s Leo is more wonderful than ever! But from my point of view, I can only worry about him.
Then, my eyes suddenly met with Leo.
Can’t be helped. If possible, I want him to do this by himself though.
I moved my neck and signaled him to follow me. Leo, who accurately sensed my intention, excused
himself from Leticia and follow me.
The location is the balcony. It’s perfect since there is no one there at the moment.
“Nii-san…….”
“You sure looked depressed huh?”
“Un…..a little.”
Leo then casts his eyes down.
Seriously, he is such a troublesome younger brother.
While thinking so, I asked Leo a question.
“Leo. Have you gotten your answer? Not mine, but the answer that you come up yourself.”
As a prince, abandoning Leticia was my answer.
That also matches the wish of Leticia herself.
But that was only my answer, not Leo’s.
That’s why I asked him. Because I am sure that it is what he is worried about.
However, Leo’s response was immediate.
“I thought about it. I already have my answer.”
“Nn? Were you not troubled because you couldn’t come up with one?”
“If I can’t find my answer after mulling it over for a day then I wouldn’t be suitable to become an
emperor. As Nii-san said, I wanted to give her the best memories I can. That’s why I spent today
thinking only about her. But before I noticed, I——want her to keep living on like this.”
“Hee……then what do you want to do?”
“…….there is only one way to solve everything. I will pull her over to the Empire.”
“Defection huh. I don’t think that she will go along with that though?”
1338
“I know that. That’s why I will use my last resort.”
“Last resort?”
I can predict what he is intending to do to some extent.
I thought that if it’s Leo he would give me such an answer.
I didn’t suggest it because I want Leo to notice it himself. After all, there is no meaning unless he does
so.
Leticia will never be moved if the answer to all this wasn’t what Leo himself came up with.
We are talking about emotions after all.
“Un. I……want to have Leticia as my wife.”
“Is that so. Isn’t that great? I think you two suit each other you know?”
I repeatedly nod while being satisfied with Leo’s answer.
After all, Leo is Leo. while he was mulling over it, he came up with the best answer.
Even if you consider the succession war alone, taking Leticia in as his wife brings nothing but merit to
him. It’s a perfect move both from the personal point of view and the political point of view.
As expected of the younger brother I am proud of.
I thought that way but I noticed that Leo has a miserable expression on his face.
“A, and you see…….Nii-san…….I have some trouble……”
“Hmm? What is it?”
“…..you see……”
“What? Are you feeling ill or something?”
“Rather than feeling ill, the problem is more emotional…….Actually…..I’m troubled since I don’t know
how to propose to her……..how should I do it……what should I say to her?”
Seeing Leo who is staring at me as though he is pleading, I let out a huge sigh.
As I thought, he really is a troublesome younger brother.
1339
SPT Chapter 202
Monthly Patreon shoutout!!!!
Waifu Tier
Corrupted
Main Heroine Tier
Jasper Yu
Jerry Gergich
Omar Cruz
DigitalPanic
Tyler Fukuda
Pascal Lepsy
Sub Heroine Tier
Anon A Moose
Artaril
Loh Joo Hoe
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Knifewolf
Tinsoldaat
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Kei
Nelson N
Wacko
1340
I wasted most of it on this though.
Hi, my name is Graverobber, I am an addicted……..
-Mr.Graverobber
The Clan of Golden Eagle
“Fuuu……that was tiring wasn’t it.”
“Y, Yes….”
Night.
Leaving the party venue, Leticia and Leo are walking together in the outer area of the castle.
Leticia is in a good mood while Leo was far from it.
On the balcony, Leo told Al that he didn’t know how to propose but Al told him that he doesn’t have
that kind of experience either.
“Well, Nii-san is not be experienced in that field too huh……”
Leo sighed. He doesn’t know what to do since his brother doesn’t know what to do in such a situation
either.
1341
Since they were children, Al was like a consultant to Leo. He would always consult him if he has a
problem and Al would always give him a helpful answer.
Al who has a different perspective than the adults around them always knows what needs to be done.
That’s why Leo has been relying on Al.
However, this time he did not give him the answer. It’s not that he couldn’t. Leo knows that he chose
not to give it to him. After all, he wanted him to think for himself.
After thinking through it, he still doesn’t know what to do. In the end, Al gave him advice but he didn’t
go into detail about it. Still, Leo wanted him to be more specific here.
Thinking that it is too much for him, Leo follows behind Leticia.
The place they arrived at is the stable housing the griffons.
“Fufu……have you been well? Blanc.”
Leticia said as she stroked the head of the white griffon she rode on her way here.
From behind, a black griffon, who did not have any rider when she came here, pushed its way out as if
to say that it wanted to be patted too.
“Yes, yes. How are you, Noir?”
“Um….Leticia.”
“Yes? What is it?”
“Uhh, you rode on the white griffon on your way here didn’t you? Why did you also bring the black one
along?”
“Rather than bringing this child with me, he simply came along you know.”
Saying so, Leticia started stroking the head of the black griffon named Noir with a bitter smile.
Hearing that it came along with her, Leo has a puzzling expression on his face.
Griffons are Phantom beasts that live in the Kingdom of Perlan. They do not attack humans unless
they are provoked, that’s why they are being treated as a rare animal rather than a monster.
The clever, brave, and proud griffons rarely recognize anyone as their master. That is one of the
reasons why there are only a small number of griffon knights.
Then how comes a griffon willingly followed her here?
“The first griffon I rode on was the mother of these children. She died from illness but after that, I was
the one acting in place of their mother, that might be why these two got attached to me……..especially
Noir, this child only accepted me so he followed me everywhere I go.”
1342
“You are acting as their mother…….”
“Noir has a rough temper and I didn’t want to bring him to other countries so I left him behind at first
but it seemed like he somehow escaped……”
“I see……the bond you have must be very strong.”
“Yes, this child can find me anywhere I go. In front of me, he is simply a good child though……”
Saying so, Leticia pats Noir’s chin and Noir happily purrs.
As far as he can tell, Noir seems to be well behaved. That being said, the idea of touching him never
crossed Leo’s mind. After all, the gaze that Noir is giving him is like one that he uses on an enemy.
There’s no way he can propose to her here. If he does that, he might be bitten by this griffon after all.
With that prediction in mind, Leo proposes to change places.
“Le, Leticia. Uh….would you like to take a walk with me?”
“Take a walk, is it?”
“Yes. there is a place where you can see the entire Imperial Capital…….”
Leo notices his mistake.
Leticia who often rides through the sky on her griffon should be tired of appreciating such a view.
The place he suggested is the one that provides the best view of the imperial capital from the castle.
He is not sure whether Leticia would be impressed by such a view.
Leo started having a headache mid his sentence.
Seeing Leo like that, Leticia lightly smiles at him.
“I’m fine with appreciating the scenery but there is a place that I’d like to visit. Would you take me
there?”
“Y, Yes! Gladly!”
“Then let’s go!”
Saying so, Leticia took Leo’s hand and started running.
————————
“Wow! So there really is a hidden room here!”
Leticia joyfully said so as she looked at the secret room in the castle.
It was a hidden room that was not generally known and it was located on the lower floor of the castle.
1343
The entrance can be opened by pressing the switch hidden behind the portrait of the past emperors. It
is a hidden room that you can’t usually find.
“This is where you want to visit?”
“Yes. Do you remember? Five years ago, when I was talking to Mitsuba-sama, you and Al-sama were
talking about finding secret rooms inside the castle.”
“Ah, so it was that time.”
Around 5 years ago.
Al and Leo were obsessed with finding these kinds of hidden rooms in the castle.
The Imperial Sword Castle was modified by the emperor of each era and there were many unknown
secret rooms and passages.
Finding the secret room that even the Emperor does not know about. That was what tickled the boys’
sense of adventure.
“When I heard you two talking about them, I thought that I would like to go find one with you too……I
couldn’t say that because of my standing back then but I have always been interested in them.”
Saying so, Letiticia walks into the secret room.
The fairly large room had simple but expensive furniture and a large bed at the center.
“According to Nii-san’s research, it seems that this room was built by the emperor of five generations
ago. We think that he might be using it to meet with his mistress.”
“For an emperor, I think taking in a concubine would be normal though?”
“I don’t know the exact details but when we were researching in the library, Nii-san found a letter you
see. Judging from the content, we think that she was a mistress.”
“What was written in the letter?”
“To be short it was, [To my unrequited love, please wait for me inside the secret room]. Since it was
known that the emperor of five generations ago never took in any mistresses, we were surprised you
know.”
“I don’t think that it was praiseworthy but……I think that it was wonderful. He must have created this
room just because he wanted to meet her.”
“I think…..if it was allowed, he would have married that person. But in the end, he chose to live as an
emperor for the sake of the Empire.”
As a part of the imperial family, he should be praised.
1344
By not taking in any concubine, it can be said that he intended to strengthen the bond with his
empress. It must have been important to do so during that time, that was Leo’s speculation.
However, apart from that, his love must be one that he couldn’t give up. That was why he created this
room.
It means that the emperor as well, is a human being.
“It’s kind of sad isn’t it……”
“Yes…..”
Leo replied.
After all, he also thinks the same.
However, Al is different.
He laughed. At the emperor of five generations ago. At how stupid that emperor was.
“Nii-san said that it was the mistress who hid that letter inside the book.”
“The mistress?”
“It was a secret letter from the emperor himself. That is something you would normally get rid of once
you received it. However, the mistress chose to hide it inside a book. Nii-san thinks that the mistress
wanted it to be discovered.”
“The story turned quite muddy hasn’t it…..”
Leticia said with a troubled expression.
Leo also had a similar look when he first heard it.
According to Al, the mistress probably wanted the emperor to take her in as a consort when their
relationship was discovered.
However, the relationship between the two did not appear in any record. Regardless of what
happened at that time, Al judged the emperor of that generation as a fool.
“How could he protect the Empire without being able to protect the one he loved.”
“Is that Prince Arnold’s words?”
“Yes. Nii-san thoroughly criticizes him since the emperor couldn’t even take his loved one in as a
concubine. I thought that he went too far when he said that but……right now, I can understand. The
emperor of that time was indeed a fool.”
1345
The emperor must devote everything to the Empire. He must always think about the Empire first and
foremost. That is only natural.
However, at the same time, an emperor is also a human being. No matter how hard one tries, there
still is a limit.
It is the duty of an emperor to protect those who support him. It was a show of magnanimity.
He doesn’t know what kind of position the mistress was in. Perhaps, she was from another country.
Perhaps, she has a complicated position.
However, the one who can do something about that is the emperor.
If the emperor loved her, he should have enough capability to take her in as a consort. Sneaking
around and meeting up in secret is simply miserable.
How much does a whisper of love worth inside a secret room?
Leo raises his head up and looks straight at Leticia.
“Leticia. I have something to tell you. Can you hear me out?”
“Yes? What is it? You are being so formal.”
Leo took a deep breath.
He thought that the emperor of five generations ago was a fool but the current him is even below that.
Although it was inside a secret room, that emperor was brave enough to proclaim his love, unlike Leo
who has been holding it inside his heart.
How much does a word of love worth confining inside your own heart?
Perhaps some love can shine through without needing any word. However, Leo is different.
He can not relay it to her without telling it.
Leo remembers the conversation he had with Al.
“Y, You don’t know…..Nii-san, that’s too cruel…..”
“It’s your problem right. Don’t ask me.”
“B, But……I might get refused, you know……if that’s the case then everything will go to waste……. I will
not be able to save her……the relationship between our countries, the relationship between me and
her…..it will all go to waste…… I’m scared……..if I give it my all and she refuses……”
On top of the position he is in, the pressure he is carrying is heavy.
1346
It is not the same as a commoner proposing to another commoner.
However, Al replied with the same atmosphere as usual.
“You are being noisy. Give it your all first then think about that later. If you leap off a cliff and shatter
on impact, I will help you pick up the fragments.”
“It’s, it’s not like this is my matter alone……”
“We are twins but this matter is yours alone. It’s obvious right. She is the person who will be standing
beside you from now on after all.”
“Nii-san……”
“With that said, it will trouble me if you fail. So I will give you a piece of advice.”
Then Al left him with some advice.
With that advice in mind, Leo took a quick breath and said to her.
“Leticia. Will you become my wife?”
Leo has squeezed out more courage than ever to say that short sentence.
While clenching his hands, he thinks that facing a demon is much easier than this.
He was so scared that he couldn’t help but think so.
After all, if she refuses, many things will be lost to him.
Even so, if he didn’t say anything, he would lose even more.
To advance this relationship means that you have to abandon the current relationship he has. The
bigger he tries to move forward, the more he has to abandon. That’s why it requires courage. After all,
people are afraid of throwing away what they have.
‘However’ Leo murmured in his heart.
Think about it after you tell her. That was what Al said to him.
To think about what to do after he moved forward.
If he had time, he would have done it little by little. However, Leo had no such luxury.
Does he want to stay still, or does he want to move forward? With only 2 choices available to him,
Leo’s answer was already decided.
However.
1347
“…..it is to save me, isn’t it. If I were to marry a prince of the Empire, the Kingdom, and the Empire
would not go to war. Even though there will be problems along the way, the symbol of the strength of
the Kingdom will disappear. The voices that support the war in the Kingdom will diminish. I’m sure
that it is a good political move…….but.”
“You are wrong.”
“Wrong……?”
Leticia opens her eyes in surprise.
The last Advice Al gave him.
It was a question.
‘Will you propose to her because you only want to save her or will you propose to her because you
love her? Be clear about that.’
That was what Al said.
Leo had a clear answer to that question. He managed to arrive at it.
“Five years ago……I’ve always liked you since the first time we met. I’ve never forgotten that day.
And…..I understood it today. I love you. Ten years, twenty years, from now on, always, I want you to
stay by my side. I am no good without you. I can’t think of losing you. If someone were to rob you
away—–then I will take you back. No matter who it is, I will never hand you over to anyone.”
The clan of golden eagles.
The Imperial family, the Adler family is sometimes called as such.
The golden eagle, the emblem of the Empire, was originally the family crest of the Adler house.
This clan sometimes danced elegantly in the sky and sometimes hiding their talon, and sometimes
creating a huge ripple that runs across the continent.
Their nature is close to a hunter. The Adler house never missed their prey. With the nature of the
imperial family, if there is prey in front of their eyes, they can be very forceful.
Even in the age where the Demon King appeared, and the world was thrown into chaos, they remain
strong. Their enemies who saw how they strengthened themselves during such times ridicule them
with a moniker.
The Plunderer.
1348
TLN: Shit, wrong series……
1349
SPT Chapter 203
“If someone were to rob you away—–then I will take you back. No matter who it is, I will never hand
you over to anyone.”
Leticia was completely overwhelmed by the forceful words that she never expected would come out of
Leo’s mouth.
To that too straightforward of a proposal, Leticia casts her face down.
It was within Leticia’s expectation for Leo to propose to her in order to save her life. Leo is a gentle
person. It wouldn’t be weird for him to try to protect her by bringing her into the Imperial family. She
understands that much.
However, she never expected him to propose to her because of love.
Feeling embarrassed like never before, Leticia could only look down.
Realizing that what she is feeling is shyness, Leticia’s face dyed red.
Above all—-she was so embarrassed that she was so happy that she almost immediately gave her
reply. That was too careless and superficial of her.
Leo will never say that she causes trouble for him but if she were to accept his proposal, she is sure
that she will cause a lot of problems for him.
I must not accept it. I can’t.
With that determination, Leticia raised her face.
However, her eyes met with Leo who looked at her so seriously. At that moment, Leticia instantly
turned her face down again.
She couldn’t look at him directly. Her face is getting redder and redder as if she has a fever.
Gradually, she started to feel suffocated. If she let this keep going, she will definitely collapse.
When she thought that way, Leo opened his mouth.
“You do not have to give the reply immediately. There are two days of the festival left. Could you give
me your answer before you leave the imperial capital?”
“….Y, Yes.”
Leticia was startled by the weakness in her voice that she never thought that it would come out of her.
What should she do if she has to stay here longer than planned? If she is going to refuse anyway then
she should just do it right now.
1350
She’s glad that her inner voice is still there to scold her, however, she is also asking herself what to do
at the same time.
After all, this is her first time. That’s why Leticia is a little panicked.
It was not the first time someone proposed to her.
Several men have already proposed to Leticia ever since the time she roamed the battlefield with her
holy staff.
The soldiers who were attracted to her appearance on the battlefield with her holy staff. The nobles
who wanted to gain recognition by marrying the Saint. Her comrades that were there with her since
the beginning.
Everyone praised Leticia for being beautiful. All of them said that was the way she ought to be and
that they wanted to be by her side.
However, Leo was the only one who asked her to be on his side. The only one who was different was
Leo.
There’s a part of her that asks [So, what?]. After all, changing some words around is easy.
However, there is a part of her that couldn’t refuse him.
Leo didn’t need her to be with him as the Saint.
The title of the Saint is a stumbling block for him. Even so, Leo still proposed to her. That’s why she
was so happy.
“You must have been confused since I brought it up so suddenly but……everything I said was sincere. I
am prepared to accept it no matter what your answer is. Don’t worry.”
“Yes…..thank you very much.”
“Then I will walk you back to your room.”
Leo then casually offered her his hand.
Leticia raised her hand up but she was a little hesitant.
She felt that the act of holding hands that she has done so casually has become something extremely
embarrassing.
Seeing Leticia who slowly raised her hand up and stiffened, Leo gently took her hand.
“!?”
“It’s dark after all. Please be careful.”
1351
“Y, Yes……Prince Leonard.”
She could only reply to him with a voice that seems to be able to disappear from embarrassment.
It was the first time that she got so worked up by the words of others.
While pulling on Leticia’s hand, Leo suddenly raised his voice.
“Leo.”
“Yes…….?”
“Can you call me Leo? There aren’t many people who would call me that way.”
“Uhh……”
“I want you to call me that.”
His smile seems coercive.
Thinking so, Leticia nodded as she turned her eyes away.
That was all that happened but Leo smiled with satisfaction and continued escorting Leticia.
Then, the room of Leticia finally came into view. In front of her room, a blonde hair female knight is
standing guard.
“Welcome back. Leticia-sama.”
“Catherine….I’m sorry for coming back so late.”
“It’s nothing, please do not mind it.”
The female knight named Catherine then bowed her head.
Leticia then introduces Catherine to Leo.
“L, Leo….uh, I think you have met her several times already but this is Catherine. She is the
commander of my personal guard.”
“I will be in your care, Catherine.”
“Yes, Your Highness.”
After having such a short conversation, Leo let go of Leticia.
He then speaks to her with a refreshing smile.
“Good night. Leticia. I will be picking you up tomorrow.”
1352
“Y, Yes……”
After that, Leticia continued to gaze at Leo’s back until he left her sight.
At Leticia’s side, Catherine makes a bitter smile.
“Have you given him your reply?”
“Wh, what are you talking about?”
“He proposed didn’t he?”
“H, How did you know!?”
“I can tell just by looking at you. Judging from your response, you still haven’t given him your reply
yet, correct?”
“…..he told me that he can wait.”
“It is up to Leticia-sama to decide but…….if this can keep you safe then I don’t think that it would be a
bad thing. However.”
“However?”
“You may turn all the women in the Empire into your enemies though.”
“Uuu……he is wasted on me.”
“Do you think so? I think that you two suit each other very much though.”
Saying so, Catherine opens the door for Leticia with a smile.
Then, when Leticia entered the room, Orihime’s barrier was activated.
“Good night. Leticia-sama.”
“Yes. Good night. Catherine.”
Thus Leticia fell asleep.
Midnight.
The time all the people in the castle are asleep.
Leticia could hear a knocking sound in her room.
Leticia woke up and asked for the identity of the person at her door while rubbing her eyes.
1353
“Who is it……?”
“It’s me.”
“Le, Leo!?”
To think that he would visit her at such a time.
Leticia’s face dyed red thinking about what this visit could mean.
However, that idea quickly evaporated.
“I have something to tell you. Can you open the door for me?”
His tone was serious.
It was easy to guess that something happened.
Leticia gets up from her bed and goes to the door while calming her delusion down.
She then opened the door.
“Thank you very much. I am sorry to intrude on you so late at night.
“It’s okay…….did something happen?”
“Yes.”
Leo said so as he swept his eyes to the surroundings and entered the room, locking the door behind
him.
Thinking that it must be the matter about her assassination attempt, Leticia cast her eyes down.
“Is it an assassin……..”
“Yes. I am relieved that you are safe. There seems to be no one else in this room, correct?”
“Yes, it is only you and me.”
“Is that so.”
Leo took out a small jewel from his pocket.
He then broke it, letting out purple smoke.
“Wh, what are you doing!?”
“Please rest assured. You will only fall asleep.”
“Sleep……!?”
1354
Leticia immediately covered her mouth and nose but she had already breathed some in.
Suddenly, drowsiness strikes Leticia.
Her sight distorted, her feet lost their balance. Leticia weakly stumbles toward her bed.
Her holy staff is there.
However, Leo pulls the hand of Leticia and drag her back to the smoke.
“As expected of the Saint. It was modified so that it only works on human women but normally anyone
would immediately fall asleep. Your mental strength is certainly great.”
“You are……not…..Leo…..?”
“Well, who cares about that. You are already unrelated to all of this. You will die here after all.”
“Illu….sion……..”
Leticia cursed her carelessness.
To think that he would disguise himself as Leo. Moreover, it was just after his proposal. If she could
properly look him in the face, she would be able to immediately notice. The discomfort from seeing an
illusion can not be felt unless you give a close observation.
Feeling the heavy drowsiness weighing down on her more than she ever felt, Leticia bites her lips.
Her lips began to bleed from the strong bite, causing Leticia to feel pain. Using that pain to endure the
drowsiness, Leticia crawls toward the holy staff.
However, a moment later, her body stopped moving.
“Le, o……..”
With that final word, Leticia fell asleep.
Then the person who disguised himself as Leo muttered while looking down on Leticia.
“You are not at fault. If you want to blame someone then blame the Kingdom.”
Saying so, he pulled out the sword he hung at his waist.
The Next Morning.
Leo was heading to Leticia’s room.
There is a festival today. What fun should he have with her today? Where should they go?
1355
Leo who was thinking about such things almost started skipping.
However, when he saw the number of imperial knights in front of Leticia’s room, his legs stopped.
“…..Leticia…..”
Calling out her name, Leo immediately started running.
The imperial knights tried to stop him but he broke through them and reached the door to her room.
Elna was there.
“Leo…..”
“Step aside, Elna.”
“I won’t say anything bad…..just go back to your room for now.”
“MOVE!!”
Furious, Leo tries to enter the room.
However, Elna stopped him.
Then, a quiet voice reaches the two of them.
“Let him in. He has the right to see this.”
“Al!?”
“Nii-san……”
Hearing Al’s words, Elna relaxed the hand she used to stop Leo for a moment.
Using that moment, Leo stepped into the room.
Inside are the Emperor, the Prime Minister, Eric, and Gordon.
All of them are looking at the wall.
“A, ahh…..no……”
On the wall—-Leticia’s body was pinned to the wall with a sword.
There is a lot of blood spread throughout the room, no matter who anyone looks at the scene, she is
already dead. That was the situation.
When he saw it, something broke inside Leo.
“A…Aaa….Ahghhhh!!!”
1356
Leo’s sorrowful cry echoed throughout the room and the castle.
Holding his head, Leo keeps screaming.
This can’t be. He kept telling himself that this is only a bad dream.
Turning to such Leo, Gordon opened his mouth.
“Going mad from seeing a corpse huh. You should already be used to it right? This kind of corpse.”
Hearing that, Leo’s head instantly turned white.
He raised his face and there was Gordon and Eric in his sight.
Leto’s hand slowly reaches for his sword.
“SO IT WAS YOU!!!!”
“Elna.”
“Guh……”
Leo tried to attack Eric and Gordon but he was knocked out by Elna.
Al who gave the order let out a sigh and gave her the next instruction.
“Lock him inside his room.”
“Al…….”
Elna had a sad expression for a moment. She looked straight at Al and gave him a nod before she
carried Leo out of the room.
Al then shifts his gaze to Leticia’s body.
While he was observing the body, a report was sent to the Emperor.
“The sword used to commit the murder belong to the commander of her personal guard and her
whereabouts are currently unknown, Your Majesty.”
“What about the gatekeepers?”
“We are gathering all the guards of last night to get their testimonies but so far, they didn’t spot
anyone leaving the castle last night.”
“Then lock down the castle. Once the festival begins, they can take advantage of all the ruckus to
escape. Find them.”
In response to the command from the Emperor, the Prime Minister bowed and excused himself.
1357
While listening to the report, Al’s eyes never left Leticia’s body.
Chapter 203
The Death of the Saint
1358
-Mr.Graverobber
1359
SPT Chapter 204
Detective Arnold on the case.
-Mr.Graverobber
Ps. I started reading Shinka no Mi recently, will the translation quality getting any better in future
chapters (I’m on 31 I guess). I died inside a little bit on some chapters.
Discomfort
The castle is on lockdown and the search for the culprit begins.
While that is going on, I remain inside Leticia’s room.
“Are you perhaps regretting what happened, sir?”
Sebas said as he silently appeared behind me.
In response, I shook my head.
“Not really. Why do you think so?”
“[I should have taken her away even by force]. Were you not mulling over an idea along that line?”
“If this crime scene is not giving me this discomfort then I would probably feel that way I guess.”
“Discomfort, sir?”
Sebas tilts his head.
As I thought, I can feel a slight discomfort coming from Leticia’s body. But it is subtle, it is questionable
at best whether a member of the imperial family can spot it if they pay close attention.
Even Sebas who is quite observant doesn’t notice it. One could say that this is a perfect dead body.
But there is something wrong with it.
“I couldn’t tell, sir.”
“Then tell me what you can from what you see. Why do you think she was killed?”
“If the Saint died inside the Empire, it would be a trigger for the war between the Empire and the
Kingdom. Is that not a desirable development for the Anti-Empire faction?”
1360
“By that Captain of the personal guard that she trusted?”
“That is what the circumstantial evidence indicated, sir.”
“Circumstantial evidence huh…..Orihime’s barrier can not be broken unless Leticia opens the door
herself. In other words, the culprit is someone who can get Leticia to open the door for them. The
Captain is certainly capable of that and the murder weapon belongs to her as well.”
“Yes, that’s why-”
“It’s strange, right? To cause a war between the Empire and the Kingdom, the person that they pin the
crime on should not be the Captain of Leticia’s escort. Rather than the Empire’s, it would be the
Kingdom’s mistake in selecting their personnel.”
“That is certainly true……”
Sebas also reached the point where I felt the discomfort.
Besides the corpse, the circumstantial evidence that indicates the Captain to be the culprit is strange.
The evidence that indicates such a thing should be removed if the Captain is really the culprit.
After all, by leaving such evidence behind, anyone could make the connection.
“It would be one thing if the culprit did not have enough time to collect the evidence but………if that
person has the time to pin Leticia’s body to the wall then there should be enough time to erase the
evidence.”
“In case I push the original theory to the extreme, what if the culprit tried to do it but couldn’t pull the
sword back out, sir?”
“The Captain of the Saint’s personal guard is also a Griffon Knight. Do you think that she could be so
incompetent? Moreover, I can’t see any sign of struggle in this room. Do you think that the culprit
would impale the non-resisting victim with all their power that her body got pinned to the wall? In the
first place, someone like the Captain should be able to procure other weapons for the task.”
“I completely agree…….then wouldn’t it be bad if we recognize the culprit as the Captain, sir?”
“It’s not necessarily a bad thing. If it wasn’t the Captain’s doing then the crime would be pinned on
someone else. At the moment, Father is searching for the [Knight Captain of the Kingdom] as a
scapegoat for this case. Not to mention that he went as far as sealing the castle. After all, if she
escaped, we would miss the chance to pursue her. With the castle on lockdown, no one can go in or
out but………Our Imperial Knights, the pride of the Empire, are stuck here as well.”
“From the Kingdom’s perspective…….that would be an ideal situation. If we fail to catch the culprit,
they will be able to cite it as the Empire’s mistake.”
“If they start saying that we deliberately let the culprit escape then we will not be able to argue against
it. Even so……locking down the castle is a protocol. Whenever something happens in the castle, the
1361
Emperor would order a lockdown. The question is how our enemy knows of such protocol when it is
rarely used in the first place. They wouldn’t be able to orchestrate this flow of events otherwise. Our
enemy’s true aim is to stall us here. We have walked right into their trap.”
At that time, there is no other method to pursue the culprit besides locking down the castle. After all,
there is the possibility that the culprit is still here with us. Regardless of the enemy’s aim, Father has
no choice but to seal the castle and order a search.
In other words, this chain of events was inevitable when Leticia’s body was discovered.
The culprit managed to stall the Imperial Knights while the Kingdom got the chance to continue the
war.
“What are you planning to do, sir?”
“There’s no choice but to have someone from the Empire’s side find the culprit.”
“Would we be able to?”
“Probably not. The clues we have are too few……but, if my theory is correct, we might be able to find
more.”
“Your theory, sir?”
“That’s right. The culprit wanted to stall us while the Kingdom wanted to continue the war. Both can
benefit from this case but there is an organization that doesn’t gain anything in this.”
“Grimoire is it?”
I nod to Sebas’s words.
Grimoire, the organization that was lurking in the Imperial Capital’s underground, has no benefit in
this.
Their base was destroyed and Leticia, who they planned to use as a test subject, is dead.
The organization that is supposed to be deeply involved in all this has nothing to gain from this
incident.
“They are researchers who are obsessed with magic. Those people would never be moved with
money. At least to move them you would need something equal to Leticia in research value.”
“If we are talking about the user of the four sacred treasures, would Elna-sama fit that description?”
“That would be impossible. It would be like swallowing a blade and getting cut up from inside out.”
Elna and Leticia are different.
1362
Elna is strong even without the holy sword, but it is only because of the holy staff that Leticia could
shine in battle.
Which one of them is more viable for research purposes, there is no need to compare them.
In that case, Grimoire would only move if they can obtain Leticia in exchange.
“Perhaps the Kingdom is unrelated to Grimoire, sir?”
“I don’t know the whole truth either. But…..we only have the documents about Leticia we found at
Grimoire’s base to go on. If they are going to dispose of the evidence they should be more thorough
about it and there was no trace that they were destroying the evidence either. So, it means that we
already got everything.”
“In other words…..Grimoire already has the means to obtain Saint-sama?”
“If they were expecting her to be handed from an outsider then that would explain it. Since the
Kingdom is going to fight the Empire, they would want us to be weakened as much as possible. A
research utilizing one of the four sacred treasures, even I don’t know how much destruction it will
cause.”
“However, if they poorly manage Grimoire, won’t the damage spread to the Kingdom as well?
Grimoire is that much of a troublesome organization after all.”
“If the damage spreads, they probably expect Silver to intervene. In the off chance that Silver starts
cooperating with the Imperial army for the war then it would be a problem for them after all.”
“Is it not too dangerous for the Kingdom to plan such a thing on their own, sir? No matter how much I
think about this, this matter is far too big for the Kingdom alone.”
“That may be right, I have something that I must look into before we go to that.”
Saying so, I point at Leticia’s body.
That over there is certainly a dead body. No doubt about that.
“If they are planning to hand Leticia over to Grimoire…….then what is that?”
“…….a fake body?”
“I think so. This discomfort is surely not just my imagination. Something magical in nature must be
involved. But I can only feel slight discomfort from it. Why is that? After all, that is unmistakably a
dead body. It has both the smell of blood and entrail. It is impossible to completely disguise those
things.”
“I see. So you are saying that the missing Captain is right in front of us?”
“That way of thinking would be reasonable. So, you know what to do right?”
1363
“Yes. Even an expert in magic on the level of Arnold-sama couldn’t discern it. I am sure that it is
something that you are unfamiliar with. And we already know of one group that utilizes such
techniques.”
“That’s right. There is a certain group that suddenly accepted our invitation to the ceremony. The
Great Forest on the west side of the continent is located close to the Kingdom. It wouldn’t be strange if
they are connected. Keep an eye on the [Elves]. They are the only ones capable of disguising Leticia’s
body. This is [an abduction under the guise of muder]. If they make a move, I will leave the decision to
you.”
Wendy was disguising herself with an illusion.
Using that illusion, the elves should be able to put a show of Leticia’s dead body. Still, this illusion is
much more advanced than Wendy’s.
So it’s not her huh. Or is it not just her? In any case, it is important to keep an eye on them.
“Arnold-sama, where are you going?”
“I’m going to see Leo.”
“What about the matter of solving the illusion, sir?”
“I would do it if I can. I don’t know the secret technique of the Elves after all. I should be able to do it if
I have time but we do not have that luxury right now. First, we must convince Father of this and have
the Elves solve it themselves.”
“I see. Leonard-sama is necessary for that.”
“His voice holds much more weight than mine. Even if I say it, it will only be treated as a delusion after
all.”
Reasoning coming from the Dull Prince would not move people. Of course, if I really want to I can do it
but that would require a huge amount of effort. In that case, having Leo explain it would save more
time.
As long as Leticia is still alive, time is priceless.
“I see. It seems that the consequences of your lifestyle finally caught up to you isn’t it.”
“Shut up. Oh, and send Lynfia out as a messenger for me too.”
“The castle is still under lockdown, sir?”
“If we wait around then we might not be able to make it in time right? Just let her out where Elna’s
unit is guarding.”
“It will cause a big issue if someone found out though?”
1364
“The situation is bad enough already.”
“That’s true. To whom do you want to contact, sir?”
“Vin’s place.”
If you are only going to put on a smile and greet the VIPs then you don’t need me.
That was what Vin said before he left the Imperial Capital.
Vin is not a strategist who adapts to the situation but one that acts out his well-thought-out plan. He
operates by thinking up patterns for various situations. He should already have something planned in
case something bad happened in the Imperial Capital.
That’s why Vin must be waiting on standby at a certain place just for that.
“I see. The Narbe Ritter Garrison. However, how do you plan for them to move without any clue, sir?”
“Vin will surely be able to manage that. If we relay the suspicion we have to him, he should be able to
figure out the culprit’s escape route. Well, if they want to escape by force then they would head north.
The Eastern Border is being guarded by Aneue. We have a lot of soldiers and knights in the south for
the reconstruction. The west is the Kingdom’s border. It is the current frontline and if we are
beginning the investigation on the Kingdom then that is where our soldiers will be dispatched to. No
matter who the culprit is, the only way for them to escape is the north.”
With that said, Vin will soon reach the same conclusion as me.
The talent the Crown Prince wanted at his side is not just vainglory.
“Alright…….let’s breakthrough our enemy’s trap.”
“Understood, sir.”
Saying so, Sebas left and I headed to Leo’s room.
1365
SPT Chapter 205
Encouraging ASMR coming right up…..
Special thanks to Sean N for the new patreon pledge!!!
it’s been a while I got to say this lol
-Mr.Graverobber
Look up
When I arrived at Leo’s room, he was depressedly sitting on his chair.
Beside him, Elna is looking at such Leo with a sad expression.
“Al……”
“How is he holding up?”
“He has been like that since he woke up.”
He looked like he lost everything. It was as if his soul already left his body.
The upright Leo always has his back straight. However, he is currently facing down as he sits in his
small chair. Even I don’t know what he is looking at.
“Leo……Al is here you know?”
“……..”
Leo doesn’t react to Elna’s words.
Seeing his appearance, I let out a sigh.
He is completely down.
It couldn’t be helped. Leo just proposed to Leticia. Whatever her reply was, at that point, Leticia was
the most important person in Leo’s world.
He must have vowed to protect her no matter what happens. The moment he resolved himself for that,
everything came crashing down before he knew it.
It can’t be helped. There is nothing he could do.
Normally that would be the case.
1366
However, there are people that are allowed to think like that and those that are not.
Leo is the latter.
“Snap out of it already. Do you have enough time to be like that? The battle is yet to come. You are
fighting for the throne after all.”
“……the throne…….I don’t care about something like that anymore……”
“I see.”
Leo murmured without looking at me.
He doesn’t care about anything anymore. That is what he is saying.
.
That’s why I clenched my right hand and hit him in the face as hard as I could.
“Al!?”
Leo falls from his chair and hits the table. The sound of the items on the table fell to the floor echoing
throughout the room.
I frown at the pain running through my fist. It was a rare chance that I hit someone without the back
up of any magic so I hit him as hard as my physical ability allowed. I wonder if I got any fracture from
it.
But that is something I couldn’t care less about right now.
“Can you say that to the people who have died for you? Do you know how many people lost their lives
because they believe that you can create a better Empire?”
It can’t be helped since the person I love died.
It can’t be helped since my important person died.
There are those who are allowed to say that and those who are not.
The Imperial Family is the latter. Especially those who seek the throne. No matter what, we must not
give up. No matter how desperate you feel, you have to shake it off and raise up again.
However, after he got knocked down, Leo doesn’t move.
“Stop it……I……..am not strong as Nii-san…….”
“I am strong? That’s not it. It is you who are weak.”
“…….the person important to me died…….are you saying that being sad about it is a weakness……?”
1367
“Sadness is not a weakness. Giving up is. There is no answer for you down there. A person who fights
for the seat of the Emperor must be able to say [Even so] and stands back up.”
“……something like the throne……I don’t care about it anymore…..I didn’t fight for it for myself…….I
fought for it because I wanted to protect the people around me……but…….the person I want to protect
the most is already dead……but [even so], do I still have to continue to protect the people around
me……?
The sound of the broken man with his heartbroken reached my ears.
Right now, even if I tell him that Leticia might still be alive, he wouldn’t be able to get up.
I know it. After all, Leo is kind.
If he stands up, he will be afraid of losing someone again.
The more obsessed you are to protect someone, the greater the despair you will feel once you lose
them.
However, if you do not stand up, you can not protect anyone.
“I’m scared of losing someone again……..I don’t want to feel this sadness anymore……those are the
self-preserving instinct of a human. After all, our heart is not strong enough. But you know, if you stay
like that you will not be able to protect anyone. No matter how many times you say that you already
have nothing left………a person is never truly alone.”
Around 13 years ago.
It was the first time I learned of my mother’s illness. No matter which doctor came to treat her, they all
gave up.
To find a way to cure that disease, I have read many books. In the process, I learned about my great-
grandfather who was obsessed with ancient magic. After my investigation, I discovered a secret room
that only those who have the aptitude for ancient magic could open.
I searched the secret room and released my great-grandfather who was sealed in a book and learned
ancient magic from him.
Up until now, I wonder if there is a time I put in so much effort to do something.
Approximately 2 years later, I have mastered a certain level of ancient magic and tried to cure my
mother with the healing barrier.
However, there was no effect. In the face of my mother’s disease, ancient magic was useless.
There was a barrier in my mother’s room that made her condition gradually grow worse. I could
destroy it but the barrier’s purpose was only to accelerate the disease that already exists in her body.
It was a disease that Mother originally carried and there is nothing I can do about it.
1368
I wanted to die. It was the time where I poured my utmost effort to save my mother who accepted a
good for nothing like me. I wanted to die because I realized that all my effort was meaningless.
I stopped caring about everything. I thought that my effort was worthless. I despaired because even
after I went so far, I still couldn’t save my mother.
It would be fine as long as I can save my mother. I wanted her to always be there to watch over me.
I locked myself in my room and cried while cursing the feeling of helplessness I felt.
If I can not save her then what meaning does my power have?
I have no motivation to keep looking forward.
Even so……..I still have Leo.
He didn’t ask me anything when he brought me food and stayed with me. We only had our childish
conversation with each other.
I allowed my little brother to do that much for me——-that’s why I thought that I must not give up. I
had to look up.
That was when I realized that if I decided to stop, I can only sit back and watch as my important family
disappears.
After that, I searched the continent for legendary medicines. The medicines that I don’t know whether
if they exist or not couldn’t be obtained with a straightforward method.
Even if I become the Emperor, I’m sure that I can not obtain them.
But there was one possibility.
Because of the professional nature of an adventurer who is likely to encounter the unknown, I decided
that becoming one would provide me with the highest chance to find it.
The ingredients from the monsters of legend and phantom beasts, because of their rarity, many of
them were thought to be able to be used to create medicines.
Power would be required to subdue them but fortunately, I possessed that power.
In fact, roaming around the world would increase my chance to find them but at the time, the Empire
just lost the Crown Prince and dark clouds were hanging over the Empire.
Leo was down. The crime rate went up and he said that as a member of the Imperial Family, he must
do something about it.
That’s why I wore the donned and became Silver, the SS-rank adventurer. While reigning supreme in
the Imperial Capital, I continued to protect the Empire while searching for the faint hope of a cure.
1369
There is no point in giving up. If you only look up, there are a lot of things for you to see.
The light of possibilities might come into view. You would realize that you are not alone. You will be
able to see the people you want to protect, the people you want to save, and see the important things
around you. You will realize that you can still protect and save those people.
I protected the Empire because of my love for my mother and the younger brother that I want to save.
The ancient magic that I thought was worthless began to shine. Everything I thought was irrelevant
became colorful.
“Look up. Even if it seems like you have lost everything, you are not alone. You decided to become the
Emperor to protect the things that are mattered to you right? Are you not trying to become the
Emperor that thinks of the people? You do not want to deny all the tragedies that happened in the
Empire don’t you?”
“…..I….am a man that couldn’t even protect the person I love……a guy like me can’t protect the
Empire……someone like me shouldn’t become the emperor…..!! I am not good enough to become one!”
“Then you should aim to be good enough from now on. If you don’t want to be scared of losing
someone, if you don’t want to cry anymore then protect them all. A guy who thought that he lost
everything and fell to the depth despair is strong. After all, that person would never want to feel
something like that ever again. I’m sure that was how the emperors of the past became so strong. They
faced their sadness and overcame it by protecting everything so that they have to feel the same
sadness anymore.”
“……..BUT I……….!!”
“No matter what you say, I will keep saying this. Look up. Look at me. You are not alone. We are twins.
We’ve been together since we were born. The thing that you can’t protect, I will protect it. Instead, you
protect what I can’t protect. We will make up for each other and keep moving forward. If you stopped
in your tracks then I can not move forward either.”
“Nii-san……”
Leo slowly looked up.
The face wet with tears of his is surely the same expression I had on that day.
I offered my still aching right hand to Leo.
Leo reached out for my hand but his hand stopped halfway through. However, with a determined look,
Leo grabbed my hand.
“I am suitable to become an emperor……..that was what Leticia told me……..for her sake……I will
become the Emperor……that way……”
“As expected of Leticia. She does say something good. You can use those words to thank her later.”
1370
Saying so, I pulled Leo up.
Hearing my words, Leo’s eyes opened wide.
“Eh……?”
“She is still alive. The dead body in her room is a fake. This is an abduction fabricated as murder.”
“No…..but………”
“If you look closely at it, you should notice it too. Well, I am here to notice what you couldn’t right.”
Saying so, I grin.
However, from my side, my ear is being pulled by someone.
“Al〜? Do you care to explain〜?”
“Ouch Oww!? Stop that! Elna!”
“You know that Saint Leticia is still alive!? You knew that and put up all those acts!? Give it back! The
tears I shed for the brotherly love earlier!!”
“AHH! IT’S JUST A THEORY ALRIGHT! There’s no point in saying it while Leo was down anyway
right!?”
“Then lead with that! He would recover much earlier right!? Your personality is just rotten, you
know!?”
“I was only being considerate in my own way……..!”
“Shut up! That was too roundabout!”
After she said that, Elna kept on pulling my ear.
While I thought that my ear would get ripped off just like that, Leo’s mutter reached my ears.
“I see…..she is still alive…….”
“If my theory is correct that is. Even so, you can not be relieved yet. She is probably in the hands of a
criminal organization right now. Actually, she is currently in a big crisis you know.”
“But she is still alive…..if so, I can still save her. Right?”
“Exactly. For the time being, we have to convince Father of this. I need your power for that.”
“Sorry, but can I leave that to you? I will go save her.”
Saying so, Leo grabbed his sword and rushed out of the room.
1371
I and Elna ended up staring blankly as he left.
“Eh? Has he gone mad?”
“I wonder……well, he probably has the means to find her.”
“How? You are not saying that it is the power of love or something like that right?”
“Well, if he can find her with that then it would be good though.”
“But will it be fine if Leo went out to find Leticia-sama? You need him right?”
“Well, I will do something about it. I think that I will need to borrow your help for that though.”
“Obviously. It would bring shame to the imperial knights if we just let someone get away after doing
something like that in the castle. Most importantly………..they hurt my childhood friend. That alone is
worth all my effort. I will rip them to pieces no matter where they escape to!”
So scary.
Not only Leo’s, the culprit this time also touched on Elna’s reverse scale huh.
Well, the ones who are angry are not just them though.
They harmed the person my younger brother love.
They better prepare to face the consequence.
“Alright, let’s chase after him.”
“Right.if he really went mad then we would better bring him back after all.”
Saying so, I and Elna chase after Leo.
1372
SPT Chapter 206
Special thanks to Guess for new Patreon pledge!!
Wow, two days in a row. that’s nice
-Mr.Graverobber
Noir
Chasing after Leo, I and Elna arrived near a stable.
That stable is housing the griffons that arrived from the Kingdom.
Around the stable, the Griffon Knights were in tears.
However, in contrast with the knights, a black griffon inside the stable is acting out.
“Noir…..”
The stable is being covered with a barrier so the griffons can not break out. However, that barrier
seems like it could be broken at any moment as the black griffon keeps hitting it.
“This child just lost his master….he is currently mourning her, Your Highness…..”
The nearby Griffon Knight told us with a depressed expression.
His expression said that they share that same sadness but Leo immediately denied his words.
“That’s not it……right? Noir.”
“Squawk!!!”
Noir raises its front legs and kicks the stable door as if to agree with Leo.
His violent behavior is closer to anger than sadness.
The other griffons seem to be a little upset but this griffon alone seemed to be clearly different.
“Leo. Can you find her?”
“I don’t know. But if I follow this child, I should be able to go to where Leticia is. If she is still
alive……Noir should be able to find her.”
“Should be huh……..there’s no horse that can keep up with a griffon you know?”
1373
Griffons are even rarer than Flying Dragons. Among the creatures that humans can ride, they are at
the top of the hierarchy.
Their speed in the sky can even surpass the Flying Dragons.
Even if it can find Leticia, it’s useless unless Leo can keep up with it.
However.
“It’s alright. I will ride him.”
“Ha?”
“No good…..he really went mad……”
Elna holds her head and says so.
Well, I understand what she is trying to say. The people who can ride a griffon are rare even inside the
Kingdom. To be selected as its rider, the griffon must recognize him first.
“Hey, Leo. I don’t think that griffon would let you ride him, you know?”
“Apparently, this child doesn’t recognize anyone except Leticia you see.”
“I see……”
I inadvertently look away.
If I remember correctly, Leticia was riding on a white griffon. From the point where it doesn’t let
anyone ride it beside Leticia, I can see how hard to use this one is.
Well, it should be fine if he manages to straddle on its back but there’s a difference in speed between a
griffon with a rider and a griffon without one. Moreover, you never know which direction it will carry
you if it is not under your control.
So the problem would be solved if he can straddle on and control it. The problem is that it is easier
said than done.
“How about you have the other Griffon Knight manage it?”
“This child would never recognize other knights that can already ride on another griffon. And…..you
can call me an idiot, or a fool, and I might actually get carried away by the situation here but even if I
am dubbed as a selfish, arrogant, or egoistic man,—-I want to be the first who arrives before Leticia. I
want to be the first to tell her that everything will be okay…….is that strange?”
“Pretty much. You are probably the only guy who wants to ride a griffon with that kind of reason. Well,
it’s only once in a while so there’s no problem I guess. You doing something stupid that is.”
His words didn’t sound like Leo who is always serious about everything.
1374
Leo has always prioritized others over himself. For the Empire, for the People, this time one could say
that he wants to do it for Leticia but in the process, I can see his selfishness as well.
Some might say that it is not a good thing but I think that it is fine.
Being a little greedy is more like a human. Moreover, this is for the person he loves.
Thi much should be allowed for him.
“The problem would be whether it will allow an idiot like you riding on its back though.”
“I think it will be over with you getting kicked in the face though…….”
“I wonder about that. An idiot can be strong from times to times too you know.”
Saying so, Leo smiled and opened the door to the table and headed to the black griffon.
“Squawk!!!!”
The moment the black griffon sees Leo, it glares at him and raises its front legs to kick Leo. Leo could
avoid it if he wanted to but if he does that, he would have to leave the stable.
Hating that idea, Leo took the kick head-on with his sword still sheathed.
“I understand your anger……you lost your beloved master…..this much is only natural.”
Leo’s body is gradually pushed back.
Weight difference. In the first place, it is a difference in their basic physical strength. Competing in raw
power, there is no way that Leo would win.
Still, Leo never steps back.
“I couldn’t protect her……it was all my fault……..but if I can still make it then…I will have you lend me
your power……”
“Squawkkkk!!”
“It’s not a bad deal for you right…….We are going to save Leticia together after all…….”
Leo is being pushed back more and more.
Elna couldn’t bear it and put her hand on her sword but I stopped her.
If someone were to help him, that griffon would never accept Leo. This one is between Leo and the
black griffon alone.
“Al……”
“It’s alright. He is——my proud younger brother.”
1375
Seeing that it made no progress, the black griffon retreats once.
Then, it took a little distance and charged at Leo again.
It is trying to blow him away together with the stable.
Leo took even that attack head-on. Then he clenched his teeth, endured its struggle, and shouted.
“I AM GOING TO SAVE THE PERSON I LOVE……! LEND ME YOUR POWER! NOIR!!”
Saying so, Leo headbutt the black griffon with all his strength.
To think that he would use a headbutt. That way of attack is so unlike him.
However, it seems to work.
The black griffon retreats a few steps and glares at Leo.
However, Leo took that glare head-on and glare straight back at it.
It was the gaze of a king who doesn’t allow anyone to go against him.
Seeing the resolute light in his eyes, the black griffon slowly lowers its head.
“It can’t be……that Noir……he is lowering his head…….?”
“He never recognized anyone before……..”
The Griffon Knights around me are raising their voices in surprise.
Ignoring the knights, Leo takes Noir out from the stable and gets up on its back.
Then.
“Knights! Get ready! We are heading out to rescue your master!”
“You have been making no sense since a while ago! Leticia-sama is already–!”
“The Saint is still alive! Noir’s behavior is proof!”
“H, However……”
“Are you going to pursue this faint hope or are you going to lie down here in despair. You have two
choices! Decide now! There is no time to hesitate!”
For a moment, everyone was silent.
The figure of Leo who straddles the black griffon made them feel something. It is not his ability.
1376
It is the feeling like he will accomplish something. The feeling that if they follow this person nothing
could go wrong.
That was the reliability they see in the current Leo.
“….Allow me to accompany you.”
One Griffon Knight muttered so, and immediately ran to his griffon to begin his preparation.
Seeing that, all the Griffon Knights started to move.
They don’t know all the details but they decided to move because Leo’s words hold that much worth.
“Nii-san…….”
“Go. She is a saint who has saved countless people. Still, she didn’t have anyone to save her. After all,
there are only a few who have enough power to do that. She’s alright because she is strong, She will be
fine because she is a great person. Those things are just excuses. If anyone can save her then they
would do it. So go. Not as the Empire’s Hero, become the hero just for her. You can do that right?”
“Of course!”
The moment Leo said that.
A lot of footsteps could be heard from behind us.
So they found us huh.
Currently, the castle is on lockdown. The Emperor’s order is absolute. And getting out of here means
that you are going against it.
Even if you are a prince, such a thing is not allowed.
“Go. I will take care of this.”
“…..Sorry. I have done nothing but trouble you, Nii-san.”
“It’s alright. An elder brother is there to look out for his younger brother right.”
“Un, Thanks. I’m going.”
Saying so, Leo and the Griffon Knights fly up.
Seeing that, the Imperial Knights started shouting.
“PLEASE WAIT! PRINCE LEONARD!”
“YOU ARE VIOLATING HIS MAJESTY’S ORDER!”
“Elna…..can you get scolded together with me later?”
1377
“Seriously……you two are such a troublesome sibling.”
“Sorry for being such a troublesome childhood friend.”
“Right, you two always cause troubles and I have to clean it up but………I don’t hate that recklessness
of yours you know.”
“Then my bad but could you stop her for me.”
“—-leave her to me.”
Saying so, Elna immediately disappeared.
She then stood in front of the Imperial Knights who were trying to stop Leo.
“……Do you know the meaning of standing in my way? Elna.”
“Of course. Knight Commander Weitling.”
Saying so, Elna stared at a beautiful woman with long straight honey-colored hair.
Her name is Alida von Weitling.
Laurent’s elder sister and the younger sister of Therese-aneue.
Captain of the First Imperial Knight Corp, and the Knight Commander of the Imperial Knight Order.
“Let this go, Knight Commander. I will take all the responsibility.”
“This is not a responsibility that you can shoulder alone, Your Highness Arnold. This action is equal to
declaring a rebellion against His Majesty the Emperor.”
“I guess so. Well, can you let me stall you here for a while? It would be tough to start pursuing them
now right?”
“…..have you made up your resolve.”
“Of course.”
The moment I said that, two Imperial Knights appeared at my side.
There are some at Elna’s side as well.
Without resisting, we were taken to Father for questioning.
This is rather convenient. The rest is whether Father will believe in my story. Well, it will depend on
my words huh.
Now, let’s start my battle.
1378
SPT Chapter 207
So……Shinka no Mi………the quality definitely improved a lot at later chapters………there is still zero
consistency for the secondary characters’ names though……
-Mr.Graverobber
Explanation Time
“Alright—Do you have any excuses? Arnold?”
Inside the throne room, Father coldly speaks to me.
Franz is standing beside him and Konrad, Henrick, Eric, and Gordon are also here. All the entertainers
of the main guests were assembled.
The only one I couldn’t see here is Trau-niisan. Seriously, even though he is the one I have the best
relation with, where is he in a time like this.
“I don’t have any. Father.”
“It’s Your Majesty, Arnold.”
“It’s useless! Your Majesty! This guy assisted Leonard to violate the castle lockdown! Moreover,
Leonard just raised his sword at Aniue! They both clearly already gone mad! We still couldn’t find the
Knight Captain who is the criminal in this case but he helped his younger brother escape the castle
together with the Griffon Knights who might be in cahoot with the criminal! We must apprehend him
immediately!”
“The Lockdown wasn’t broken, you know? Henrick.”
I told Henrick who strongly wanted to incriminate me.
Hearing that, Henrick glared at me.
“What did you say? Stop spouting nonsense! Leonard just left the castle right!”
“No one opened the gate for him to go out. He flew out on top of a griffon. The castle lockdown was
untouched.”
“You think that kind of sophism will help you!?”
“It’s not a sophism. It was the duty of the Imperial Knights to prevent anyone from leaving through the
castle gates. Nothing was said about preventing someone from leaving through the sky, and in fact, no
one was blocking the sky above the castle either. That’s why I sent Leo out for a walk. If there is a
problem that then it would be the carelessness of the Imperial Knights here.”
1379
“Don’t fuck with me!”
Henrick’s face grew red as he couldn’t control his anger.
However, Father only has an astounded expression on his face while Franz who is standing beside him
starts laughing.
“Franz. What is so funny?”
“Forgive my rudeness, Your Majesty. I haven’t seen such a skilled blame-shifting for a long time.”
“It’s not something to be praised. Arnold. From the report, I heard that you used Elna to stall the other
knights from pursuing Leonard right?”
“That is only a misunderstanding. The Knight Commander was being scary. Also…….it was Leo who
killed her brother so I thought that she might start attacking him back then.”
Unable to endure it any longer, Conrad started laughing.
Seeing that, Gordon started glaring at Conrad.
“That’s imprudence. Conrad.”
“I would be troubled if you tell that to me, Aniue. Please use those words on Arnold instead.”
“Hmph….Arnold. Just answer the question seriously.”
“I have been serious you know.”
I said so with a straight face.
Hearing that, I can see blue veins appearing on Gordon’s face.
They look like they are about to burst. Well, I don’t care even if it bursts though.
However, unlike Gordon, Eric calmly stared at me.
“Arnold. You rarely do anything without a reason. You know that it will cause a ruckus if you send
Leonard out. You must have some kind of reason for doing that.”
“I see. That might really be the case.”
“Then I will ask. Just why did you send Leonard out of the castle?”
“Are you saying that you are going to take my words seriously?”
I looked at Father as I replied so.
In a situation where they are trying to punish me for the problem I caused, they will never take me
seriously no matter what I say.
1380
I would be troubled if my story got swept aside as my delusion after all. It’s no good unless they have
the reason to listen to me.
I can’t make any excuses or try to justify my action. To make them listen to me I have to avoid telling
my story in a situation where I am in a weaker position. After all, what I want to do is a proper
explanation.
However, there is no ally I can rely on here. Truthfully speaking, my position is that of a prince who
often causes problems. A weak standing.
That’s why I was playing a fool.
Perhaps thinking that this is going nowhere, Father silently gives me a nod.
He is showing his willingness to compromise.
“I will. You had some kind of reason right? Say it.”
“Then allow me to tell you what I think happened. I will be jumping to the conclusion but, Saint Leticia
is probably still alive.”
“What?”
Father squinted his eyes and the other princes sharply gaze at me.
After all, if that is true, the matter we have at hand is much bigger than the problem we originally
have.
However, Father didn’t interrupt me and continued to listen. That’s why I keep explaining my
reasoning.
“I will give you the grounds that made me think so. First, judging from the circumstantial evidence, it
would seem like the Captain of the Saint’s personal guard is the culprit but if she truly belonged to the
Anti-Empire faction, she would never leave any evidence that would lead to her at the crime scene.
After all, if the culprit is a knight captain of the Kingdom, the blame will not fall to the Empire.”
“…..He seems to have the same opinion as you, Franz.”
“I have only reached the point where the culprit is not the Captain, Your majesty. I couldn’t find
anything that would indicate that Saint Leticia is still alive. Please continue, Your Highness.”
As expected of the Prime Minister. So he also noticed the strangeness in that room huh. Even so, that
must be the only thing he knows.
The Empire’s Imperial Family has been adding the blood of highly skilled people for generations and
is one of the most prestigious bloodlines in the continent. A person with that bloodline should be able
to notice the discomfort I felt if he closely observes it.
1381
The secret lies in Leticia’s body. No matter how excellent he is, Franz who hails from the commoners
won’t be able to notice it. If he did notice something strange, he would have opposed sealing up the
castle.
The culprit was faking this as the work of the Captain of the Saint’s personal guard. With that said, it is
entirely possible that the culprit still remains in the castle.
However, that was not the truth.
“The second reason is Grimoire. Silver destroyed their base in the Imperial Capital but he also
discovered the documents regarding their plan to use Saint Leticia in a magical experiment. Father
should already have seen those, no?”
“Yeah, I’ve seen it.”
“Then have you notice how unnatural it is? Grimoire is a group of people obsessed with magical
research. Their only purpose is to pursue the extremity of magic. However, Grimoire did not plan
anything about how they would capture Saint Leticia. They only have planned out how to use her after
they captured her. Don’t you think that it was as if they think that Saint Leticia is already in their
hands?”
“So someone abducted the Saint and handed her over to Grimoire. Is that your theory?”
Eric asks.
His expression is sharper than before.
The more realistic my theory gets, the worse it is for the Empire.
“That line of thinking would be natural. But Saint Leticia’s dead body certainly exists. If that was really
the body of Saint Leticia, Grimoire has nothing to gain here. The only ones who benefit are the
Kingdom and the real culprit. The Kingdom would treat the Captain as the culprit and blame the
Empire for failing to capture her while the true culprit would have the time to escape. With such an
elaborate plan, it is likely that the real culprit has already left the castle after all.”
“Silver already destroyed Grimoire’s base. Don’t you think that it would cause them to adjust their
plan?”
“There is a possibility of that but…..from the fact that Grimoire has infiltrated the Imperial Capital, it is
almost certain that the culprit and Grimoire have some kind of cooperative relationship. And if they
are cooperating with each other, it would be natural for them to hand them their compensation.
Besides, Grimoire’s base might not only be in the Imperial Capital.”
It would be one thing if Grimoire was destroyed entirely as an organization but the only thing I
destroyed was only their base in the capital. They are a criminal organization that has existed for a
long time, they should have their members spread out in many places.
1382
Even if they can’t deliver her to them in the capital, they can still hand her over at another place and it
is possible that the one who will receive her is not the one in the capital in the first place.
There is no end to the possibilities if you start to think about it.
“Then…..you will explain what is wrong with that body right?”
“Yes. The reason I think that Saint Leticia was kidnapped was exactly because of her dead body. Did
Father and Aniue feel any discomfort from it?”
“…..I can’t say that I have a hobby of looking at dead bodies. Did you notice something from it?”
“Yes. I was observing it. Very carefully.”
For a moment, Father frowns. Eric is also the same while Gordon snorts and doesn’t take me seriously.
Their expressions say that they think that it was just a theory after all.
“So Arnold. What is so strange about that body? Isn’t it just because you are just unfamiliar with dead
bodies?”
“Then let me ask this in return, even though you are used to seeing dead bodies, you still don’t feel
anything strange from it? Gordon-aniue.”
Gordon’s eyes looked like they are about to bleed after he heard me.
He took a step forward and tried to grab me but Father stopped him.
“Gordon. Calm down.”
“Father, my pride won’t allow a failure like him to ridicule me!”
“I don’t care about your pride. If it was as Arnold said, it will be true that you didn’t notice the thing
that he did. Of course, he would make fun of you.”
“Are you going to believe Arnold’s words!?”
“It is worth checking out. Bring Saint Leticia’s body here. But……you know what will happen if no one
shares that same discomfort as yours right? Arnold.”
“Yes, do with me as you please.”
Saying so, I slightly lower my head.
I managed to reach this point.
Just one more push.
If I can prove my story the people here will change how they see me. That is not a desirable
development but———this is for my brother.
1383
There is no other choice.
In the end, having people look down on me is but one of the means. My goal is only to make Leo the
Emperor.
This time, I will do it seriously.
1384
SPT Chapter 208
Special thanks to new pledge from Stefania Barbieri!!
Wow, it seems my gacha effort is going well…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Trau’s Seriousness
Leticia’s body that was carried into the throne room was cleaned up.
It seems that they thought that if they are going to bring it before the Emperor, they should at least
make it presentable. However, the discomfort still persists.
“She’s a beauty so it makes me sad just by seeing her like this. The one who did this must be a woman.
No doubt about it.”
“Quiet, Conrad. I couldn’t care less about that right now.”
Eric warns Conrad who lightly commented so.
Henrick seems like he doesn’t want to look at the body and the only one who pays close attention to it
was Father, Eric, and Gordon.
“…..Gordon. Do you feel anything?”
“No, I couldn’t feel anything strange about it.”
“Eric. what about you?”
“It is only slightly but I do feel something strange. The feeling is ambiguous at first but when I look
closely I can certainly feel something strange from it.”
“Me too. As Arnold says, there is something strange about this dead body.”
For a moment, Gordon’s face distorted as he stared at me.
I usually avert my eyes away in a case like this but today I already decided that I will do things
seriously.
That’s why I mockingly smile at him.
“!? What is so funny! Arnold!!”
1385
“It’s nothing. I thought that it was something that any of us could notice. It seems that I am the only
incompetent here after all.”
“…..seem like you want to die huh.”
I felt like I heard the sound of something snapped.
Gordon came at me with a bright red face. He doesn’t stop even after Father or Eric tries to stop him.
The one who stopped Gordon was Alida who was standing guard inside the throne room.
She immediately gets between me and Gordon and quietly speaks.
“You are in front of His Majesty. Please calm down, Your Highness Gordon.”
“Shut up. I can’t calm down unless I can smack that damn little shit!”
“If Your Highness plans to use violence, I have no choice but to stop you by force.”
It was a warning.
The Imperial Knights are the most elite of the Empire. The captains of each of their corps have the
strength to reflect that. However, the Captains of the top three Corps are the real deal.
Alida is one of the few people who can boast that even Elna can not defeat her without using the holy
sword. At least that evaluation was given to her by Elna’s father, the Brave.
Naturally, Gordon has no chance of winning against her. Elna is said to be the strongest of the Empire
with her holy sword but if we are talking about the strongest swordsman in the Empire then that title
would belong to Alida.
Of course, that might change in a few years but at the moment, in terms of sword techniques alone,
Alida is superior to Elna.
Since she is the daughter of Elder Weitling, there are some that say that my father only keeps her at
his side because of that. However, such a person should try witnessing her sword skill once.
Even while practicing, her sword was so fast that I couldn’t follow with my eyes.
“Kuh……”
“Please withdraw. Your Highness Gordon. Your Highness Arnold as well, please keep your provocation
in moderation.”
“I will be careful.”
As she also gave me a warning, I shrugged my shoulders as I gave her my reply.
1386
Well, there is no need to provoke him any more than this. Gordon and Henrick never tried to listen to
my story and only brought up charges to punish me with. In the unlikely event that Father takes them
seriously, I will lose the opportunity to explain.
That’s why I made him angry. With this, Gordon’s opinion should be taken lightly from now on.
“…..forgive my rudeness. Your Majesty.”
“Umu.”
Gordon apologized and Father urged me to continue my explanation.
What is wrong with this dead body? That is what it comes to.
A fake body that only the members of the Imperial Family could feel the strangeness from. That is
something clearly abnormal.
Father wants the answer to explain that.
“This corpse was probably disguised using illusion. We would notice if they use a doll to substitute a
dead body so I am sure that this is a body of someone else.”
“What?”
“Is that true? Arnold.”
“This is only mine and Leo’s theory. There is no evidence to back it up.”
“If you don’t have the evidence then your story so far is worthless! Imperial Knights! Hurry up and
take that corpse away! Your Majesty! There is no need to play along with Arnold’s delusion any
longe—”
“What are you doing spouting commands to my knights? When did you become the emperor?
Henrick.”
“Hiii!? M, My deepest apologies!!”
Henrick’s face distorted as he quickly kneeled down after he was glared at by Father.
Seeing that, Farther snorts and turns his eyes toward me.
“There is no evidence. What you said so far is only a theory. There is no reason for me to believe you.
However—–it is certainly true that there is something strange about this body. What do you need to
eliminate this strangeness? Arnold.”
The second stage is clear.
Now this will not only be my request alone.
1387
If I try to summon them here, they can dismiss it as just a foolish prince’s nonsense.
However, if the Emperor himself demands the answer from them, they have no way to refuse.
“Could you summon the Elves here? The only one who can dispel this level of illusion is probably
them. With how they suddenly accepted our invitation to the ceremony and the fact that we couldn’t
find out their whereabouts on their way here, those women have too many mysteries. Please look into
them, Your Majesty.”
“Alright. Summon the Elves here.”
7 elves arrived at the throne room. It is the same number as when they arrived, not one of them is
missing.
At the center is Wendy who is disguising her body with illusion. As her entertainer, Christa was also
summoned here.
This time, Finne is waiting outside because this meeting is only for the Imperial Family.
Anxious at the sudden audience, Christa worriedly looked at me but I smiled gently back at her.
“Al-niisama……”
“It’s alright.”
Christa listens to me and quietly nods.
Then, Father’s inquiry started.
“Now, Wendy-dono. I called you here because I have some questions for you.”
“What is it? Your Majesty.”
“First of all, please take a look at this. Ahh, you don’t have to see it, Christa.”
“Yes…….”
She is probably wondering what is going on. Christa’s face turned blue and only looked to the front.
Meanwhile, Wendy and the other elves looked at Leticia’s body.
For a moment, Wendy’s expression turned sad. There is no change in the surrounding elves.
“Saint Leticia was……my condolence.”
“There’s no need. Actually, I heard that body might be something disguised by an illusion. What do you
think about it?”
1388
“Your Majesty…..do you think that we, Elves, are the culprit?”
“I am only talking about the possibilities. For you people, is it possible to disguise a dead body as
someone else?”
“That is…..”
The moment Wendy said that she glances at the woman standing next to her.
If I recall correctly, it is the elf servant who visited my room when I was talking with Leo.
Her name was Paula if I recall correctly.
Wendy is constantly observing the expression on Paula’s face. It was as if they were in a relationship
of master and slave.
“Is it possible? Is it impossible? Which is it?”
“It is possible……but there is no one who is that skilled among us here.”
Saying so, Wendy averted her eyes.
It is a typical reaction of someone who is lying. Moreover, I can see her fear when she is looking at
Paula.
With that exchange, Father should be able to discern the true nature of their relationship. At Father’s
side, Franz is making a sharp expression and uses his eyes to give the order to the Imperial Knights
who are standing by in the throne room.
The knights started taking a distance from the Elves in a natural way. The Imperial Knights here are
all the captain class and elites which Alida leads. Even if they try to escape, they won’t be able to.
Meanwhile, I started talking to Wendy.
“Princess. Is that true?”
“It’s, it’s true…..Your Highness Arnold.”
Wendy’s eyes shake.
Her line of sight is moving between me and Paula.
I want to tell her to stop shifting her eyes like that but I can not do that. Moreover, I can’t neglect the
relationship between Wendy and Paula.
Let’s solve all the problems in one go.
“You yourself are disguising your appearance with an illusion. Disguising a body should be possible
for you, no?”
1389
“Th, that is…….”
“What does that mean? Wendy-dono.”
Being questioned by Father, Wendy solved the illusion on herself with an expression that says she has
no other choice.
“I apologize for deceiving you, Your Majesty.”
“That was surprising……”
“Because my appearance is that of a child, my grandfather told me to disguise myself using illusion
magic so that it will not be rude as our representative. Please forgive me.”
“That is fine. The problem is that even though you have been displaying that illusion right in front of
us and we still couldn’t discern it.”
“My words might not have any worth in this situation but this is truly not the work of the Elves. Your
Majesty.”
Saying so, Wendy kneels down with the other elves follow suit.
Father folds his arms and squints his eyes at the sight.
Wendy’s lie must be transparent to Father who has judged so many people before. The question he
has would be why is she lying?
Father probably couldn’t come up with any reason why the Elves would be involved in all of this.
“If I say that I believe in your words…….can you dispel the illusion that was applied on this body?”
“I do not know. If you ask, I will try…….”
She is buying time.
It would be bad to keep up with this any longer.
That’s why I proposed the last resort.
“Father, I have a suggestion.”
“How many times do I have to tell you, it’s Your Majesty………seriously, whatever. Just do as you
please.”
“My apology but may I borrow something from the treasure vault?”
“I don’t think that you would bring it up but…….are you going to use the [Imperial Flag]?”
1390
“Yes. There is a barrier inside the throne room that prevents the activation of magic but that doesn’t
apply to the magic that has already been activated. Therefore, I’d like to ask for your permission to use
the [Imperial Flag] to invalidate all magic here.”
The barrier that covers the throne room is of the highest class.
It would be difficult even for me to infiltrate this room with transfer magic. Moreover, it is impossible
to activate magic here. However, the magic that has already been activated doesn’t include in that.
That was what the barrier was designed to do.
If you use a barrier that invalidates all kinds of magic, the Emperor would not be able to use magic
tools to defend himself. That’s why it doesn’t affect the magic that has already been cast. After all, the
magic on that level would be able to be handled by the Imperial Knights standing guard here.
However, there are magic tools that are more powerful than this barrier in the treasure vault.
At first glance, it would look like our national flag, a normal elaborate flag with the symbol of Golden
Eagle.
However, by giving it the blood of the Imperial Family, all magic within a certain range will be
nullified.
Despite its strength, it is a magic tool that is rarely used. This is because the Empire is usually at
advantage in battle so invalidating magic would unnecessarily cause disadvantages for us.
Moreover, the blood of the imperial family is needed in order to activate it. It is not something that can
be used so readily.
“It will require a significant amount of blood to activate it. Are you going to provide that?”
“That is my intention. In exchange, if this body proves not to be that of Saint Leticia, please admit that
Leo’s action is correct. Also, I would like to request the Third Imperial Knight Corp to be dispatched as
his reinforcement as well.”
“…….you are willing to go that far for your younger brother huh.”
“It is exactly because he is my younger brother that I have to go that far. Leo is doing the right thing. It
is my job as his elder brother to prove that.”
“Well said! I allow you to use the Imperial Flag!”
The moment my father said that.
The door to the throne room was opened. When I turned around, I found Trau-niisan entering the
room.
His hand is holding a flag with a symbol of Golden Eagle on it.
1391
“You gave the permission!? As expected of Father! To think that you would read the intention of this
Traugott so far ahead! In response to your trust, I shall personally provide my blood to activate this
flag!”
“Wha!? Wait! Traugott!!??”
“HAAAAAAAA!!!!”
“Wait! Trau-niisan!”
“Arnold! It is the duty of an elder brother to prove his younger brothers’ innocence! Leave this to this
Traugott!”
“NO, LISTEN TO ME FIRST!?”
He completely got carried away by the atmosphere.
A thread extends from the flag and starts sucking Trau-niisan’s blood.
When the Imperial Knight approached Trau-niisan, it was already too late.
The Imperial Flag activated and all the magic within the throne room was invalidated.
The illusion of what first appeared to be Leticia’s body was nullified and the body of the Captain of her
personal guard appeared. However, the body looked like it had already been a few days after her
death.
So they have switched places with her for a while now huh.
I thought so and turned my eyes to the Elves.
Then, I could see Wendy pushed Christa toward me.
“RUN!!”
Wendy screamed.
The appearance of the Elves around her are now completely different.
Their skin is all black.
Once there were Elves that turned to the Demon King for power and were given the power of Demons
to their race.
Before us are the Dark Elves.
The Dark Elves pulled out their hidden dagger and turned it toward Wendy.
I thought that she was threatened but this is far surpassed my expectation.
1392
Although I managed to move in to protect Christa who was pushed my way, I couldn’t reach Wendy in
time.
When I thought so, the Imperial Flag directly hit the Dark Elf who was turning her dagger toward
Wendy.
“WHAT ARE YOU DOING TO A LOLIFU!!”
Naturally, it was Trau who threw the Imperial Flag at them.
After using a lot of his blood to activate the flag, for him to be able to do that, I can say nothing but as
expected of him. Well, the reason he did that was questionable though.
“THIS IS THE EMPIRE! DON’T THINK THAT I WILL LET YOU DO AS YOU PLEASE!”
“THE ONE WHO IS DOING AS HE LIKES HERE IS YOU!!?? WHO WOULD ACTIVATE THAT KIND OF
THING HERE! YOU FOOL!!”
“EHHHHH!!? WHY ARE YOU GETTING ANGRY AT ME!?”
The battle between the Dark Elves and the Imperial Knights began with the conversation between a
father and his son with no sense of tension whatsoever.
With that said, this probably couldn’t be called a battle.
After all, no magic can be used here. To the Dark Elves, this would be the worst kind of situation for
them.
TLN: All Hail Traugott!!
1393
SPT Chapter 209
My phone case broke and my model is so old that no one is making any case for it anymore……….halp
-Mr.Graverobber
PS. this week chapters are so damn long…..
Achievement
The Dark Elves looked visibly impatient.
They probably didn’t expect their identity to be discovered here.
In addition, all magic that they might have prepared in advance was nullified by the Imperial Flag.
After all, they should have taken some measures when they were summoned to the throne room.
All of that was crushed by Trau-niisan though. My plan included.
Well, as a result, we managed to reach the outcome that is close to the best one possible.
The Dark Elves were Elves that were empowered by the power of the Demon King and carry a more
powerful power than regular Elves. However, their power is not hereditary. In other words, the Dark
Elves here are the survivors from the age of Demon King 500 years ago.
Their wit, magic, and combat skill are something to be feared. Though, in this situation, they are far
weaker than the Imperial Knights.
There were all apprehended without being able to put up a resistance.
“P, please get away from me!!”
Wendy who was hiding behind me shouted so and tried to run to the balcony.
I grabbed her shoulder and stopped her.
“What are you trying to do?”
“This necklace is a magic tool! It will explode!”
“Please rest assured. No magic tools will be able to exhibit its effect here.”
“B, But, is that not only temporary!? This necklace will explode if it is forcibly removed!”
“Everything will be alright. Knight Commander.”
“I have already cut it, Your Highness.”
1394
When I called out, a response came from behind me.
Wendy’s necklace was brilliantly cut off.
I pick it up and throw it to Alida. She should be able to handle the rest.
But the problem here is not that.
I once again hid Wendy behind my back.
“Father, she–”
“She was being threatened right? We will talk about that later. There is something that I must ask her
now. Wendy-dono, what happened?”
“I can not ask for forgiveness……We left the Elf Village and were traveling here on a planned route.
However, we were ambushed……….all of the Elves other than me were murdered. After that, they put
that magic necklace on me so I have no other choice but to obey their order…….”
It was probably designed to explode if she talked to others about it huh.
If that is the case then it is no wonder that Wendy couldn’t come to us about it.
“But we couldn’t locate the whereabouts of your envoy either. Was it because they were Dark Elves
that they managed to set up an ambush on your way here?”
“No…..my planned route was only known among the people of the Elf Village. Someone from inside the
Village may have leaked it……. The Elf Village has been under pressure from the Kingdom for a long
time so it would be no surprise that some of us may decide to comply with their plan out of fear……”
“I see……..then do you know of the Kingdom’s plan? I’d like you to tell me everything you know.”
“I simply overheard them so I don’t know how accurate it is but…….it seems that the Saint abduction
was a proposal from the Kingdom side. The Dark Elves were simply the ones who executed it. And,
there is also one problem.”
“A problem?”
“Yes. Among the Dark Elves here, the one who abducted Saint Leticia is missing. She is the current
Matriarch of the Dark Elves. It was her who killed and impersonated the Captain of the Saint’s guard.
She is probably already on her way to the north by now.”
“The Matriarch of the Dark Elves…….”
Father frowns.
The Dark Elves are a troublesome opponent.
1395
Although the Elves themselves already are superior to Humans as individuals, these Dark Elves are
those who were given power by the Demon King. Moreover, they are those who managed to survive
the war 500 years ago.
How troublesome an enemy would their Matriarch be?
“About the Matriarch of the Dark Elves……I have heard it from the person herself so there is no
mistake about her identity but………..she also said that she is one of the leaders of Grimoire. I have
asked her many times why she would do something like this but she only smiled and told me that it
was for a magical experiment…….I think that she was probably telling the truth.”
“So that is how they are connected huh…….”
“I have no place to say this, however,…..please immediately dispatch a rescue unit……..they were
constantly talking about the Demon King when I was with them. In the worst-case……they might use
her to summon another Demon King.”
“If it’s the Dark Elves then that is certainly possible. Your Majesty.”
The Demon King was certainly subjugated.
However, there are still many demons in the Demon World. If they are planning to summon the
demons then it is possible that they would summon something of comparable power to the Demon
King. After all, their specimen this time is the Saint.
So she was brought in as a sacrifice huh. No matter what their goal is, it is certain that it will only bring
harm to the Empire.
“Alida.”
“Sir.”
“I appoint Elna von Amsberg, the Captain of the Third Imperial Knight Corp as the Captain of the Saint
Rescue Unit. Have her bring the Fourth and the Fifth Corps and assist the Eight Prince Leonard.”
“By your command.”
After finishing giving Alida his instructions, Father tiredly leans back on the throne.
Wendy’s words alone can not be used as proof. No matter how much Wendy says that it was the
Kingdom who planned this incident, the Kingdom will never admit it. The other nations will not
challenge that either.
After all, the fact that Wendy has worked with the Dark Elves still remains.
With that being the case, if we can’t rescue Leticia, the war with the Kingdom can not be avoided.
If we fail to rescue her, we will have to deal with the Demons from the inside and an invasion from the
outside at the same time. That would exhaust the Empire.
1396
“Franz. Send the Imperial Knights to watch the Western and Northern borders. Dispatch the 2nd Corp
to the West and the 6th Corp to the North. That should be appropriate.”
“Will that be alright, Your Majesty?”
“If we move the army or the station army of other Local Lords it will stand out. We have not been
invaded yet. If we stimulate them, we might have to deal with unnecessary problems.”
“As you wish. I will arrange it immediately.”
“Eric. I will be counting on your skill as our Minister of Foreign Affair.”
“Please leave this to me. However, I can only focus my effort on one country. I can prevent the Sokol
Empire, our most troublesome opponent, from entering the war but……please forgive me as I can not
guarantee that for the other countries, I simply do not have enough men.”
“There is no helping it. The Kingdom, the United Kingdom, and the Dominion. I already expected an
invasion from those three countries. It is within one of the worst patterns in my expectations after all.
Gordon. Can I leave the military responding in your hand?”
“The defense of the Northern border is perfect. I think that the Dominion will not be able to break
through our defense there. The problem is the Western border. I think that right now we would have a
hard time defending against a full-scale assault from the Kingdom army. However, if I am allowed to
command the Central army, I will be able to move out immediately.”
“Alright. I will rely on you if they truly start their invasion. For now, you must entertain Prince William
to the best of your ability. You and he are close personally. You must try to prevent the United
Kingdom from joining the war through him.”
“Please leave that to me.”
After giving his instructions to Eric and Gordon, Father turns his eyes toward Trau-niisan.
Since he gave a large amount of blood, he is unstable on his feet and has to be supported by an
imperial knight.
“Trau. can you speak?”
“Yes, somehow…….”
“Then explain. Why did you bring the Imperial Flag here?”
“I, I heard that Leonard had left the castle and Arnold was detained so I thought that I had to do
something and went to Saint Leticia’s room. When I observed her body, I noticed something strange,
and since I thought that it was of some magical nature-”
“So you took the Imperial Flag out from the vault huh?”
1397
“Yes, I thought that if it is something of magical nature, maybe the flag will be able to nullify it. That’s
why I went to the vault, Ahh, I lied to the guards that Father needed to use it. Please forgive me.”
“Something like that, it doesn’t matter……..so, you heard that Saint Leticia’s body was brought here so
you brought the flag here to dispel it right?”
“Yes, it is exactly as you said.”
“I don’t know whether I should be getting angry or praise you here…….”
Father tiredly holds his head.
Well, it was certainly like something Trau-niisan would do. He noticed the discomfort and tried to
dispel it without thinking too deeply about it.
“Well, I will say that you did well. The only ones who noticed it was you and Arnold. In the end, the
activation of the Imperial Flag brought us a good result. Still, the barrier inside the throne room will
have to be re-established.”
“M, my deepest apologies, however, I think that it would be fine as we can have Celestial Princess-
dono erect a new barrier…….according to my observation, I am sure of her ability. I have been
watching after all.”
It is kinda sad that I don’t want to ask him what he was watching.
Since a while ago, Trau-niisan’s line of sight was nailed to Wendy.
Gently hiding her from that sight, I started speaking to my father.
“Father. I’d like to request a room for her.”
“Right. Wendy-dono. I’m sorry but I will have to limit your actions. However, you will be under our
strict protection. Please forgive me with that.”
“I have no complaints. It would not be strange if I am executed after what I have done. Please accept
my gratitude for your generous treatment, Your Majesty.”
Saying so, Wendy politely lowered her head.
After that, I along with Wendy and the worriedly looking Christa leave the throne room.
However, Father called me before I left.
“Arnold.”
“Yes?”
“Good work. This is your achievement.”
1398
“Please. This achievement is Leo’s you know.”
“Right……it belongs to both of you.”
Bitterly smiling at Father who insisted on giving me credit, I bowed and left the throne room.
After all, nothing has been solved yet.
“Seems like it went well huh.”
“Somehow.”
After I joined up with Elna who was detained in another room inside the castle, I spread the map of
the Empire’s Northern region on the table and marked all the suspicious places in it.
“The real culprit is the Matriarch of the Dark Elves, she is one of the leaders of Grimore. Such a person
should have secured a large scale hideout somewhere.”
“Don’t you think that she might have already crossed the border?”
“If that is the case then we can leave that to the Border Defense Force. But that is unlikely. They are
executing the Kingdom’s plan. As long as they want to cause trouble inside the Empire, they shouldn’t
be getting close to the border.”
“I see. So the places you marked are the points of interest right?”
“Tentatively, yes. These are abandoned castles, old military facilities, mines, and similar locations.”
“You did well finding out about all these places huh?”
“It was Vin. he told me that if something happened at the Imperial Capital, these are the places that the
enemy would escape to.”
“So it was within that poison tongue strategist’s expectations?”
“I wonder about that. Vin was probably studying these places for other purposes though……..Well, I
already sent Lynfia to him. He will probably start moving on his own now.”
When I finished explaining so, Sebas and Sieg entered the room.
I summoned them earlier.
“You need something, Kid?”
“I want you two to accompany Elna. I want all the force that we can move to head to Leo’s side.”
“Oi Oi, the Emperor already dispatched three Imperial Knight Corps that way you know?”
1399
“Even so……I want to do what I can.”
“Is that so……can’t be helped then.”
“Understood, sir.”
After receiving consent from Sieg and Sebas, I look at Elna.
On her face is a smile full of confidence.
“…..take care of Leo for me.”
“Leave him to me. I will take good care of him. Together with everyone here.”
“You really are reliable in a time like this huh. But can you make it in time?”
“Well, it would certainly be difficult to catch up with the griffons. I prepared fast horses for the time
being but I do have another plan.”
“A plan?”
“There’s a person in the capital that can easily use magic to travel far distances right? I will fully make
use of him this time.”
Elna smiled as she said so.
I see. Even as Silver, it seems I really can’t escape her huh.
Well, it saves me the trouble of butting in later so this is convenient for me.
As usual, let’s call for the secret maneuver.
1400
SPT Chapter 210
So……a battle saint, hero of the Kingdom got betrayed by her country and kidnapped by a shady
organization………..why does this remind me of a game from Black Lilith?
-Mr.Graverobber
Confusion at the Imperial Capital Guild [Again]
After seeing Elna off, I hurried back to my room.
There, Finne was waiting for me inside.
“Hey, Finne. Sorry, but I will be heading out soon.”
“Yes. Have a safe trip.”
I quickly change into Silver’s clothes and put on my mask.
Then, when I was about to head out using transfer magic, I remembered that I have something I forgot
to tell Finne.
“That’s right. Finne.”
“Yes?”
“I might bring a maid back with me. She will be your escort.”
“My escort? Was it not because it is safe that Al-sama sent Sebas-san and the others out?”
“Well, I will explain later.”
With that said, I transferred to the Adventurer Guild. If I conveniently show up at the Guild at the right
time, some might get suspicious, so I hide and observe the situation from nearby.
Then, I saw Elna enter the Guild. There are only a few knights waiting for her outside. The rest are
probably preparing their horses and food supply right now.
So Elna alone will negotiate with Silver huh.
“Silver! If you are here then come out! I, Elna von Amsberg, have arrived!”
“Sh, She came to pick a fight!!??”
“The child prodigy of the Amsberg house came to challenge him!!??”
“Damn it! Even though she is a knight, she resorts to a surprise attack huh!?”
1401
“Where’s Silver!? If we sacrifice him she should calm down!”
“So the day finally comes huh……I thought that masked man would be able to do it someday……”
“Oi! Don’t give up yet! If we stay at the Guild we will die alright!”
“For the time being let’s escape! Don’t stay near her alright! You might get a holy sword flying your
way if you met eyes with her you know!!”
“I, If I offer this meat, will she let me off…….”
“You idiot! That’s the Hero you know! Like hell she would let you off with that tiny piece of
meat…….what she wants is Silver’s meat…….I’m sure he touched her reverse scale or something…….”
“Why the hell does a Hero have a reverse scale!?”
“Like hell I know! That guy always has a foul mouth so he probably mentioned her small breasts or
something! That damn guy!! He should have known that something is better off not saying out loud!”
“That’s right! If you bad-mouthed her then at least give her a few praises for a change! Like that’s a
wonderful Holy Sword or hey, your eyes are so sharp or something!”
It was the picture of hell inside.
The adventurers who had been drinking alcohol since morning sobered up at the sight of Elna.
They knock down the table in a hurry and use it as a barricade so that they can escape Elna’s line of
sight.
It seems they are completely treating her like a monster here.
For them to casually pour oil into the fire like this, as expected of the adventurers huh.
“Seriously…..adventurers are really odd in the head huh…….!”
“Hey, she suddenly got angry!? Praise her! Quick!”
“Y, Your hair is nice and long isn’t it!”
“Right right! It’s super pink! It will surely stand out no matter where you go!”
“I think that your personality is better than Silver, Ma’am!”
“That’s right! I especially like the fact that you don’t wear a mask!”
“You could even change the terrain when you beat that Spirit Turtle too!”
“As expected of you who can’t even adjust your own power, Ma’am!”
“I heard that she has been something like an attendant of a prince you know!”
1402
“That surely can’t be imitated!”
“I like how you casually beat 10 knights in Rondine, Ma’am!”
“I also like how you can’t read the mood as well!”
“I also, also, uhh…….Oi! There’s nothing left!”
“Think of something! We can use Silver’s rude actions as our cover too!”
I wonder when they will notice that their praises are no better than bad-mouthing her.
Elna’s shoulders are quivering.
In this situation, I wouldn’t be surprised if the Guild building is reduced to rubble.
Then, the usual receptionist calls out to Elna apologetically.
“My deepest apologies…..Captain Amsberg. What kind of business do you have with the Guild today?”
“I am looking for Silver but it seems he’s not here right now. I wonder if I can do some clean up while
waiting for him.”
Saying so, Elna slowly reaches for her sword.
The adventurers screamed at that sight and some of them even started foaming and collapsed.
“S, Silver is like a phantom you know!”
“He’s a shady guy who can show up out of nowhere you know!”
“He is not here, Ma’am! Please forgive us!”
“That’s right! If I have to bet who will win if you and Silver fight, I will readily bet on you, Ma’am!”
“YOU!? Didn’t you say that the Hero couldn’t possibly catch up with Silver’s transfer magic just the
other day!?”
“Th, that’s old news!”
Thus, an ugly infighting begins.
Seriously, I can’t feel the sense of tension from these guys as always.
They love fooling around without caring about any form of etiquette. They really live as they like.
Well, I like them exactly because that is how they are though.
With that in mind, I transferred to the Guild’s entrance and slowly walked in from the front.
1403
“It looks like you are looking for me. Female Hero.”
“Yeah, there is a place I have to get to in a hurry. I will have you transfer us.”
“Starting giving me orders out of the blue huh. What is in it for me?”
“This much is fine with you right.”
Saying so, Elna tossed three coins at me.
They were rainbow-colored coins.
Rainbow Coin. it is the highest grade of imperial currency, and three of them are the standard fee to
hire an SS-rank adventurer for a quest.
There are not many who can pay such a fee so readily though.
“Rainbow coins!?”
“This my first time seeing one…….”
“And there’s three of them…….”
This is like Elna. These coins probably came from her personal money. Still, this is not the amount of
money that anyone can easily produce even for Elna. She probably determined that she absolutely
needed Silver’s cooperation this time.
That’s why I simply tossed them back to Elna.
“I don’t mind transferring you but I don’t want your money. I don’t want people to start thinking that I
will do anything as long as I am given the fee you see.”
“He returned it!!??’
“Is that guy crazy after all!?”
“Wasn’t it because he couldn’t properly see the color of the coins because of the mask……..?”
Ignoring the adventurers who are saying whatever they want, I extend my hand out for Elna.
Elna, who knew what I was asking for, immediately gave me a map.
“Can you transfer me and my knights to the marked places on this map?”
“I can do that. Do you want me to open the gates to all of these places?”
“Just three is fine. The three Corps under my command will search it one by one!”
Saying so, Elna heads out of the Guild. The Imperial Knights are lining up outside waiting for her.
1404
She straddled the horse that was prepared for her.
Since the festival is still ongoing, people are starting to make noises.
In front of the knights and the crowding people, I opened three transfer gates.
“You have my thanks. Tentatively.”
“I see. I will accept it then. Tentatively.”
“……you already know our objective anyway right? Won’t you come with us?”
“I am busy too you see. I will leave that side to you. As long as you are there, there shouldn’t be
anything to worry about.”
Hearing that, Elna quietly muttered ‘Right’, and led her men through the transfer gate.
As long as the opponent’s strength is unknown, it is wise to not disperse your troops more than
necessary.
Time is certainly of the essence but it doesn’t mean that she should allow her men to be defeated one
by one.
So the minimum number she would disperse her men would be one Corp each.
She is being quite careful. There should be nothing to worry about if I leave this to Elna.
Accompanying her is one of the viable plans but in the off chance that something happens in the
capital while I am away, I will not be able to deal with it.
“Alright then.”
I muttered so and transferred away.
The destination is the castle. However, it is not my room.
I walk down the corridor and head toward my destination.
In front of the room, the person I wanted to meet and Orihime were chatting.
“The barrier in the throne room was made up of multiple barriers through delicate and exquisite
balance…..it seems that the Empire really doesn’t understand the value of such a barrier huh, Prime
Minister?”
“My deepest apology. It was due to an emergency. Is it possible to repair it?”
“Repairing it is impossible. I will have to reconfigure everything from scratch. It will cost you, you
know?”
1405
“We have already prepared the appropriate compensation.”
Saying so, Franz lowered his head to Orihime.
The best barrier user on the continent. Many countries desire a barrier made personally by the
Celestial Princess. However, the Celestial Princess does not often offer such a service.
The fact that she is willing to do it for the Empire is not because she can obtain the appropriate
reward for her work but because Orihime personally likes the Empire.
It is easy to forget but Orihime is a super VIP on the continental scale.
Then, Orihime noticed my presence and visibly frowned.
“MuMu! Isn’t that Silver! How dare you leave me alone back then!”
“Forgive me. I thought that you wanted to sightsee around the Empire.”
“What? So that’s how it is? Certainly, I had fun on my trip back! Umu! You are forgiven!”
So easy.
While thinking so inside, I turned my eyes to Franz.
Franz seemed to understand my intention and politely bid farewell to Orihime and open the door to
his room.
“Do you have business with me?”
“Of course. I just used my transfer magic for the Imperial Knights earlier.”
“You have my gratitude. As expected of the SS-rank adventurer. Allow me to thank you as the Prime
Minister of the Empire.”
“I don’t want your gratitude. If you are the Prime Minister then I want you to do something
appropriate to your position.”
“Hou? You are saying that I haven’t been doing my job?”
“I will not let you say that you have already forgotten what happened in the East. The Emperor was
targeted when the Imperial Knights were away from the Emperor’s side. If I haven’t intervened there,
who knows what could happen.”
“Certainly. I was careless back then. However, afterward, we have recalled the Imperial Knights to His
Majesty’s side at the capital.”
“But right now, those Imperial Knights are now away from the capital again.”
The Imperial Knight Order consists of 13 Knight Corps.
1406
Three of them headed out as Leo’s reinforcement and two headed for the border.
In terms of numbers, that was only 5 Corps. However, right now almost none of the Upper Corps
remain in the Capital.
“You are anxious about the remaining Imperial Knights? What could you possibly be afraid of, Silver?”
“I am not afraid. I am worried. Unfortunately, I have no trust in the Imperial Army ever since the
summon of the Demons in the South. There was someone in the army who tried to use the kidnapped
children as a weapon of war. And now, there is a turmoil rising from inside the castle. Do you really
think that there is no traitor in your ranks?”
“…..I will refrain from commenting on that.”
“I see. Then let me be clear. In the case that Gordon Lakes Adler betrays the Empire out of the desire
for the throne, what would you do?”
“Why did you specifically bring up His Highness Gordon?”
“He has a strong influence over the army and is familiar with the internal working of the castle.
Moreover, I witnessed it first-hand how he joyfully tried to start a civil war. He is the most suspicious
man in the Imperial Family. You must have been on guard against him as well.”
“There is no need for an outsider like you to remind me of that. This is our problem. However, it would
be rude of me to turn you away. One thing that I can say is that [His Majesty the Emperor] doesn’t
think that any of his children would betray him. After all, that esteemed person thinks that his
children know full well the worth of the Empire.”
The fact that Franz emphasized Father would mean that he himself has a different idea.
That’s fine.
There is no problem if Father decided to believe in us, his children. It is not strange both as a parent
and as an emperor. It is exactly because of that that he has his subordinates by his side.
If Franz is with him, he should be able to manage.
“That is all I wanted to say. I will excuse myself now.”
“Silver. I have a question for you as well. If a civil war truly occurs, which side will you be on?”
“That’s a stupid question. I am always on the side of the people.”
“I see. That was indeed a stupid question. Forgive me.”
Thus, I left Franz’s room.
After that, I transferred to my room and removed Silver’s clothes.
1407
“Al-sama, where is maid-san you talked about?”
“Ah, I will go fetch her now. Well, I will have to persuade her first though.”
“Persuade?”
“Yeah, she has no reason to get involved with the Empire anymore after all. Well, she is in a position
where she can only wait to be recruited though.”
“You have a bad smile on your face you know?”
“Really? I will be careful.”
Alright, let’s start the preparation for this side, shall we?
If the abduction of the Saint ended up as only a smokescreen, something truly terrible will surely
follow after all.
1408
SPT Chapter 211
3070 or PS5…….
But Damn…..that Demon Souls though…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Securing an Escort
“I refuse.”
Mia declined my offer.
The place is the usual inn we use as the meeting place.
Well, of course, she would refuse. She was originally tracking Grimoire to the Empire. Right now, she
already finished what she set out to do. The rest is up to Leo after all.
That’s why there is neither reason for Mia to stay in the Empire nor to cooperate with me anymore.
“So it’s no good huh?”
“If Grimoire is not involved then I have no reason to get involved either. Moreover, if I have to act as
an escort for someone at the castle then I will have to disguise my identity. I will be in trouble if I get
caught.”
“Even if you are the Chivalrous Thief, you are still a thief huh. It’s true that it might be dangerous
but…….as long as you stay in the Imperial Capital, the danger will come to you anyway, you know?”
“I am leaving tomorrow.”
Mia said so and showed me her small amount of luggage.
However, Mia still doesn’t know.
“How do you intend to head back to the Dominion?”
“? I will just ride back on a carriage like usual.”
“The carriage service will be closed. At the moment, there is a dispute in the north so you have no way
to leave the Imperial Capital you know?”
“Th, then, I will head back on foot!”
1409
“There is a criminal organization who just abducted the Saint. The border patrol will be considerably
stricter than usual. How do you plan to sneak past them?”
“Th, that is……if a prince writes me a letter of safe passage………”
“I have no reason to go that far for you. It’s too risky for me to get involved with a thief after all.”
I crushed Mia’s hopeful thinking immediately.
Hearing that, Mia turned visibly panicked.
“I, I got done in by my own words……”
“I won’t stop you if you choose to remain here in the capital but if you get discovered I will not cover
for you.”
“The world of men is so ruthless……”
I bitterly smiled at Mia who dejected dropped her shoulders.
After all, Mia has no choice but to cooperate with me. This situation leaves her no other choice.
“Alright. I will ask you again……will you be willing to act as an escort at the castle?”
“…….I refuse. The succession war is the Empire’s internal affair. It should be someone from the Empire
to do something about it.
“That is correct. But what would you do if I tell you that the Dominion is also involved?”
“I don’t understand what you mean?”
“I am recruiting your help because in the worst-case scenario there is a possibility of a rebellion.
Moreover, it will happen along with invasion from other countries as well.”
“Would someone really cause a rebellion in conjunction with other countries’ invasion?”
“It’s true. The abduction of the Saint might be a diversion. Thanks to that, the defense of the Empire
has become considerably weakened. Taking control of the Imperial Capital, breaking through the
borders. Those things are quite possible now. This is no longer the issue of the Empire alone.”
“…….a civil war and outside invasion. At worst, the Empire will collapse.”
“That’s how it is. I want your help to prevent that. I am not saying that you should help me for free. I
will give you an appropriate reward for the task.”
Saying so, I put a coin on the table.
Seeing that, Mia frowned.
1410
“I would be troubled if you think that I am someone who would act on money alone. Even like this, I
am the Chivalrous Thief you know! Money is……..EHHHHHHH!!? ISN’T THAT A RAINBOW COIN!!??”
Surprised, Mia picked up the rainbow coin I placed on the table.
The rainbow coin, the highest grade of the imperial currency, is a rare coin that is used only by the
uppermost class of the Empire. It has considerable creditworthiness on the continental scale so their
value doesn’t change much in other countries.
Mia has been robbing various villainous nobles of the Dominion as the Chivalrous Thief but it seems
that she had never seen a rainbow coin before.
“I want you to be an escort for Finne von Kleinert. Unfortunately, there is currently a shortage of
manpower. I need someone who can protect her in the event of a rebellion.”
“The Blau Mowe…….I am to be the escort of the most beautiful woman in the Empire?”
“I can not allow the Emperor’s favorite to be taken hostage. Of course, if nothing happens, you can just
stay by her side until the end of the festival. If they don’t make a move during the festival, they will not
move for a while. How about it? If you have no choice but to stay inside the capital anyway, it is not a
bad thing to earn some money right?”
“B, B, But…..rainbow coin…..with only one of this, I can buy anything for the children at the
orphanage…….”
“If you accept my request, I shall guarantee your passage back to the Dominion as well. Well, if a
rebellion occurs, it won’t be so easy but I think that this option would be more reliable than trying to
head back on your own right?”
If Gordon started a rebellion, he must think that he has a good chance of winning. Considering what
happened so far, the Kingdom and the United Kingdom will also be involved. If that happens, the
Dominion will start to move as well.
There is no doubt that the borders defenses will tighten.
No matter how skilled Mia is, it would be difficult for someone to break through it alone.
“Safe passage back, exceptional rewards, guaranteed identity. That should be a good deal for you, no? I
will not force you if you say that as Vermillion, you can not get yourself involved in the succession war
of the Empire but I think that if you cooperate with me, it will greatly benefit the people of the
Dominion you know?”
“….I have one condition.”
“Let’s hear it then.”
“Other nations would invade the Empire if the rebellion is successful. In other words, if the rebellion
doesn’t go well, the Empire might turn the tide and start a counter-invasion.”
1411
“If you think on the national scale, then yes, that is the case.”
“At that time…..if the Empire decided to launch an attack on the Dominion, please promise to ensure
the safety of the citizens.”
“Alright. I will protect the people of the Dominion as much as I can. Do you need me to make an oath?”
“No, I am fine with only a verbal promise. I am sure…..that if it is only a verbal promise, you will work
harder for it.”
Saying so, Mia knelt down and presented me her bow.
Receiving her bow, I put it back on Mia’s hand.
“I am not a formal knight but……This Vermillion will serve you to the best of my ability. I shall
dedicate this bow and my power to you, Your Highness.”
(TLN: Kanji for Vermillion is [Knight of the Scarlet Moon]]
“Yeah, I’m glad to have you on board. Although it will only be a short time, I will be relying on you.”
Hearing that, Mia stood up.
She then glanced at the rainbow coin on the table.
“It’s an advance payment. You can use it however you want.”
“Wh, what an enviable line……Princes really are rich after all…….”
“I only give you the appropriate compensation. You are confident in your bow hand right? Are you
saying that the rainbow coin’s worth is greater than your skill?”
“…….the fee for hiring an SS-rank adventurer is three rainbow coins. I can not say that my skill is on
par with them but I am confident in my skill.”
“Then it’s alright. This is not a bad investment after all. Now then, let’s go.”
“U, Uhh……I’d like to request some time…..I grew up in an orphanage so there are a lot of children who
are like younger brothers and sisters to me……if a rebellion happens, I don’t think I can go out
shopping with peace of mind! So, I’d like some time to buy souvenirs for them!!”
Seeing she put so much effort to ask for my permission, I let out a sigh.
Actually, I want her to enter the castle as soon as possible though.
Well, whatever.
1412
“Send your luggage to the castle first. If you tell them that you are a servant of Prince Arnold, they
should let you in. Also, if you want to buy souvenirs for the children back home, you can’t buy them
with rainbow coins you know.”
“EHHHHHH!!??”
“There’s no shop that has the changes for that after all. If you are going shopping then use this.”
Saying so, I hand over the bag I had on my waist to Mia.
Receiving that, Mia slowly opens the bag.
Inside is a large amount of gold coins.
“It, it’s shining…….”
“You can use as much as you like. If you are buying souvenirs for children then make sure you buy
something good for them.”
“….it seems that you have no attachment to money at all………”
“Money is good as long as you have a need for it. Of course, you can save it up but it would be stupid to
spare it when you have to use it. Buying your goodwill with only this much money is a cheap price.
That is how much your bow is worth to me.”
“……I am honored.”
Saying so, Mia lowered her head to me.
With this, Finne’s escort is secured.
“Oh, that’s right. Your cover at the castle will be that of a maid alright.”
“…..Yes?”
“I don’t want her escort to be easily spotted after all.”
“I, I understand that but why a maid!? Can I be a female butler instead!”
“It’s impossible for you to be a butler. It would look too unnatural and they would suspect you. If that
happens then there is no point dispatching my omnipotent butler out of the capital right.”
“Th, That’s right! I was curious about that too! If you expected a rebellion then you should have
gathered all the people you can move at your side right!?”
“There is no meaning in that. They are moderately being cautious of the people around me. With Sebas
at my side, they would appropriately raise their caution. I have to send him away so that they let their
guard down.”
1413
“Y, You sent all your escorts away just to make your opponent lower their guard……?”
“Not entirely. In the unlikely event that the Imperial Capital is on lockdown, we need someone at Leo’s
side who is capable of a covert operation. If he can’t control the gate to the imperial capital then he
can’t open it after all.”
I expected Sebas and Sieg to be more active in that kind of area.
The Imperial Knights and the Narbe Ritter under Elna’s command should be able to crush a force
several times larger than them with ease in a frontal battle. However, there is no meaning unless they
can fight.
That’s why I sent someone easy-to-use to Leo’s side.
“It is as if everything is dancing on your palm isn’t it……”
“It would be good if that is the case but unfortunately, a succession war is not like that. Well, if they
are people who can only act according to my expectations then there is no need for me to come out in
the first place. Leo alone is enough. It is exactly because everything won’t go according to plans that
we are working together. Leo has been working to protect the Empire and I have been working to
protect the things that he can’t protect. But this time it is the opposite. This time Leo went out there to
protect only one person. That’s why I have to protect the Empire in his place.”
We are not working together by doing the same thing.
We are working together so that we can compensate for the other’s shortcomings.
That is what we have been doing all this time.
That is our strength, something that the other candidates don’t have.
“So this is the [Black Twin Prince of the Empire]……..”
I heard Mia mutter so as I left the room.
1414
SPT Chapter 212
Leticia’s POV
-Mr.Graverobber
That which support the Heart
“Uu……”
Leticia woke up in a dimly lit prison.
Both of her hands were bound by the chain that hung from the ceiling and she couldn’t move her body.
In her hazy mind, she realized that she was captured and deep despair covers her heart.
“I was……kidnapped……..”
What she is despairing at is not the fact that she was kidnapped. It was at the fact that it happened
inside the Empire.
She never intended to cause any trouble for the Empire. That’s why she has made many preparations.
She was supposed to establish a friendly relationship with the Empire and then die in the Kingdom.
However, she currently faced the worst possible result.
This would surely lead to war between the Empire and the Kingdom.
The man she loves and the country she holds dear will have to fight against each other.
A sharp pain runs through her heart.
Then, someone called out to such Leticia.
“Are you awake?”
“Uu……”
The prison was lit up at the arrival of the owner of that voice.
Leticia averts her eyes from the sudden brightness but when her eyes get used to it, she turns her eyes
to the owner of the voice. Then, when she saw the appearance of the person who called out to her,
Leticia made a steep expression.
There stands a bewitching beauty. The woman wears clothes that highly advertise her skin while
showing a soft smile.
1415
the woman possesses the characteristic black skin with the purplish silver hair of the Dark Elves.
“Why is a Dark Elf…….?”
“Don’t look so disgusted. I have been with you several days already after all.”
“Several days…..? Don’t tell me, Catherine was!?”
“I killed her. I extracted her memory out as well. It was a hassle but thanks to that I manage to get
close without you noticing.”
“Kuh……”
“Well, don’t blame yourself. When you are in the Empire, the imperial family who was assigned as
your entertainer will always be by your side. Even if she was the captain of your escort, she only
stands outside of your room. Without a lengthy conversation, noticing an illusion like that is
impossible. Especially when you have me as your opponent.”
Saying so, the Dark Elf snaps her fingers and changes her appearance into that of Leo.
The fake Leo has a frivolous smile that the real Leo would never have on his face.
“I can copy the appearance of the person I touched with illusion magic. Well, the only one among the
Elves who can imitate others’ appearance so perfectly is only me though.”
“Stop talking to me with that voice and appearance…..!”
“Oops, scary, scary. So you don’t like seeing the appearance of the man who loves you huh?”
Saying so, the Dark Elf reverted back to her original appearance.
Leticia glares at the Dark Elf but she also noticed the tattoo on her shoulder.
The tattoo looked like a book with a pair of devil wings sprouting from it.
Leticia recognized that symbol.
“Grimoire……!?”
“Good answer. I am Babette, one of the leaders of Grimoire. The Matriarch of the Dark Elves.”
“So foolish……to think that they would have me kidnapped by Grimoire…….!”
“As expected of Saint-sama, you have a keen mind. I told you right? You are not at fault. The one who is
to blame is the Kingdom.”
“I will not allow a fanatic who doesn’t mind sacrificing people for their own research to blemish the
name of the Kingdom!”
1416
“So you still care about the Kingdom? They told us that they wouldn’t mind handing you over as our
research material to earn our cooperation you know? In other words, you got sold out by them.”
“Even so……it is still the country I loved.”
Babette snorted at Leticia’s words.
However, dry applause can be heard from behind Babette.
Appearing from behind her is a wrinkled petite old man. The robe-wearing old man’s appearance
exudes a gloomy feeling.
“As expected of the Saint. Your spirit is truly innocent. It was like I am looking at a pure white canvas.”
“You took your time huh? Auguste.”
“It took a while to finish the preparation.”
“Alright, the Saint is already awake so let’s start right away. There are some sharp people inside the
Empire. It wouldn’t do if we take our time.”
“I know that.”
Saying so, the old man called Auguste took out a bottle.
He muttered something at the bottle and brought the bottle to Leticia.
Then, countless black chunks of smoke began to circulate around Leticia.
“This is…..dead spirits!?”
“I freshly picked them up for you. They are my dear pawns that will dye the Saint with blackness.”
“Just, what on earth are you trying to do…..?”
“We are thinking about using you to summon a Demon you see. Quite a High-ranking one too.
Normally, when summoning something like that the vessel wouldn’t be able to hold. Well, with the
user of the holy staff herself as a vessel, this should go well.”
“Are you sane? If you think that a Demon can use someone like me as a vessel then I recommend you
redo your study.”
“I know. Normally, a Demon’s vessel is a fresh corpse of someone who mentally close to the Demons. If
not then the Demon will be forced out due to rejection. Someone whose mentality is close to that of a
Demon would undoubtedly be evil. You are certainly on the other end of that spectrum. However, it
would be fine if I just turned you evil, right?”
“What……”
1417
“The Dead Spirits I collected will show you their horrific death and their unreasonable life. If you can’t
endure it and despair at the world, you will be the perfect vessel for the Demon. Moreover, you can
use the holy staff as well. This is quite a unique experiment don’t you think.”
“…..I will not give in.”
“Do your best to resist then.”
Saying so, Babette and Auguste leave the prison.
Then, one of the Dead Spirits that was circling around Leticia jumped into her body.
Before she noticed it, Leticia was standing in the middle of a village.
In front of her is a mother who is holding her child to protect him from Auguste.
Auguste used magic and strangled the child right inside the woman’s arms while laughing at them.
Seeing that, the woman screamed in despair.
After thoroughly enjoying their cry of despair, Auguste murmurs to himself.
“This is all for the sake of dyeing the Saint black. If you are going to hold a grudge then you can hold it
against the Saint.”
“WAIT!”
Leticia tried to stop him but this is only something like an illusion. It is the image of the past that
already happened. A bystander like Leticia can not stop it.
Auguste then proceeds to strangle the woman.
After the woman is dead, Auguste disappeared, leaving behind a pair of a woman and a child that has
already turned into skeletons.
Leticia was mourning their dead but a grudge filled voice was directed toward her.
[[It’s your fault…….]]
“This is…..the voice of the spirit……?”
[[You are just a false saint! If you are a saint then bring my child back to life! Why does he have to
die!?]]
“…..I’m sorry……..”
[[I don’t need your apology! Why did you get caught!? It’s all your fault! RETURN HIM TO ME! RETURN
ME BACK TO MY HUMBLE LIFE! I DON’T CARE ABOUT ANYTHING AS LONG AS HE LIVES!]]
Each word pierces Leticia’s heart.
1418
It was easy for her to refute it.
It was easy for her to tell them that she is also a victim. After all, that is the truth. However, Leticia did
not choose that.
She can’t bring herself to refute them as she is the cause of their death.
Therefore, Leticia continued to accept all their neverending grudges.
[[YOU DIE TOO! I WON’T ALLOW YOU ALONE TO SURVIVE!]]
“That is right…..if you want my life I will gladly offer it to you. However…..before that, can you wait?”
[[YOU ARE STILL HOLDING ON TO YOUR LIFE HUH! YOU HYPOCRITE!]]
“Yes. I am a hypocrite. I am called the Saint simply because I can use the holy staff but I have never
done anything like a saint at all. All I did was kill soldiers from another country for my homeland. I am
no different from a murderer. Even so……I don’t want to cause any more dead than I already have. I
will offer my life if you want me to but if I lose myself now, I am sure that many lives will be at risk.
There will be another mother who loses their children again.”
[[N, No! That is not good!]]
“Yes. That’s why I must endure this. For that sake, can you help me? So that no one else has to suffer
the same regret you have…….please give me your strength.”
Saying so, Leticia gently embraces the black smoke that floats in front of her.
Then, the black smoke shines white in an instant.
“Please have a peaceful sleep…… after I get through this….I will head over to your side as well.”
[[…..No…..if you can have a life then live…….and give birth to a child. Connect more lives in my
place…….that will be your atonement.]]
“That will be difficult……”
[[…..so you are the Saint. You are very warm.]]
After saying that, the smoke scattered away. Leticia managed to purify it with a conversation and send
it to the afterlife.
Leticia did not fight against the Dead Spirit. She simply comforts them.
The only thing she can do is to talk with them. However, to do that, she has to accept their hellish
grudges.
An ordinary person might get their heart broken immediately. After all, this is all happening inside her
mind. The plane where there is no concept of time.
1419
Still, Leticia did not stop facing the Dead Spirits.
It is not good for Dead Spirits to wander close to Leticia’s noble heart.
However, this also chipped her heart away as well. Just because she can endure it doesn’t mean that
she is not hurt.
Resisting or fighting against it would be better as Leticia’s heart was gradually getting exhausted.
Nevertheless, Leticia did not give up no matter what kind of grudge she has to face or how
nightmarish death she has to witness.
It was not the love she has for her homeland that supports her heart.
Leticia loved her country. She still loves it even now. She obtained the staff in the hope to save
everyone who lives in her country.
But right now, that country is of no concern to her.
It is something else that supports Leticia today. She is not being supported by the love she has for
most of her life but by the unwillingness to harm the Empire.
And at the bottom of her heart was the existence of the man who loved her.
She can’t bear getting consumed by a Demon and laying waste to the homeland of the man she loves
without replying to his proposal.
If she turns into a Demon vessel here, it will be a curse that binds him for his entire life. She doesn’t
want to give him such a thing.
That’s why Leticia continued to endure.
No matter how painful it was, the thought of his face gave her the strength to bear it.
She thought that seeing him cry would be more painful than this.
Then, after she sent the last Dead Spirit to the afterlife, Leticia’s consciousness returned to the prison.
She was sweating all over. Her throat is parched. Her head is aching.
In the midst of her hazy consciousness, she muttered one name.
“…..Leo…..”
He told her that he needed her not as a saint, but as herself. When was the first time she felt it?
Five years ago, when she first met him, she only saw him as a prince of another country.
But now it is different.
1420
His smile, his words, the memory of the last few days she has with him strongly supported Leticia.
She can not allow everything to end here.
I have to protect this land—I must protect Leo.
Her determination renewed, Leticia raised her gaze.
Babette and Auguste had just returned.
“Hey? How is she doing?”
“My? All the Dead Spirit disappeared……!?”
“What do you mean?”
“I can’t believe this……the freshly collected grudge filled spirits of the dead……you purified all of
them…..!?”
“I…..will not give in……”
“Hahaha!! This is good. You are above my imagination. Auguste, let’s get serious. With this, we might
be able to summon something of the Demon Lord class you know.”
“I know. Seriously……it seems like it is time for me to unleash my prided Dead Spirits.”
Saying so, Auguste takes out more bottles.
The sinister feeling she got from them is incomparable to before.
“Alright, I’m heading off to oversee the other unit. I will leave the rest to you alright?”
“Such a busy lass huh. Don’t you want to witness the moment the Saint got dyed black?”
“I am interested. But even in the off chance, I don’t want the Empire to get in our way. No matter how
much they hurried, they will not be here for a while though. Still, I need to make preparations.”
Saying so, Babette left the prison.
Auguste then joyfully deploys his Dead Spirits on Leticia.
“Guh…..! Kughh!!”
The scene she witnessed before pale in comparison to what is being shown to her right now.
They are the Dead Spirits that were killed in a way that makes them leave behind their regret and
hatred in this world as much as possible.
They are Auguste’s prided possessions. Such grudges can not be solved only through conversation.
1421
Leticia could only endure it.
Then after who knows how long the time has passed.
Doesn’t knowing where her self is anymore, Leticia’s heart has become so weak that she wants to
cover her ears to escape the voices of the Dead Spirit.
Still, Leticia desperately kept her ego intact.
She simply thinks about Leo. That she is not alone. As Leticia’s mind is hanging on the last thread,
Auguste tries to add even more Dead Spirits to her torture.
However, at that moment.
Loud noises can be heard in the prison.
“Nn? What is happening?”
“It, It’s a raid!”
“A raid!? Don’t be stupid! We remodeled this hideout from an Empire’s village! There’s no way that
they could find us so easily!”
Auguste yells at his subordinate.
If they use a place that stands out as their base then the Empire will notice them.
Therefore, Auguste remodeled a village and used it as their hideout. The first Dead Spirit that was sent
to corrupt Leticia was the inhabitant of that village.
They have a camouflage that no one should be able to see through.
Having confidence in that, Auguste denied the possibility that they got discovered.
However, at the next moment.
He had to admit the fact that they have been discovered after seeing the person who barged into the
prison.
“Prince Leonard!?”
“I will have you return Leticia to me!”
Saying so, Leo cut down Auguste’s subordinate without any hesitation and headed for Auguste.
1422
SPT Chapter 213
Special Thanks to WK for the Coffee!! We will have 6 chapters next week I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
The night Leticia was abducted.
Leo and the Griffon Knight rely on the starlight as they keep running through the night sky.
Without taking any break, they continue pursuing Leticia with Noir leading them.
Leticia was abducted around midnight. It has been almost a full day since Leticia was kidnapped.
Leo and the Griffon Knights are currently traveling on the sky above the north of the Imperial Capital.
It is a distance where you normally have to change horses many times already to cover.
Moreover, Noir wasn’t just flying in a straight path. He has been making tight turns and switching
directions many times to search for the faint traces of Leticia. The color of fatigue started to appear on
the faces of the Griffons and the Griffon Knights.
Fatigue, Weariness, Anxiety.
Many feelings assault them, giving them the reason to stop their pursuit.
Still, no one stopped.
This is because Noir, who leads them at the front, and Leo, who rides on his back, never stopped.
Many of the Anti-Empire factions in the Kingdom were the civil officials working at the Royal Castle.
On the other hand, it was the soldiers who fought on the frontline who were in the Pro-Empire faction.
That is because they are those who yearn for the Saint, as she ran through the battlefield together with
them.
The people who were selected to be her escort this time are those who accompanied Leticia from the
very beginning. They were those who always stayed close to Leticia’s side and had enough confidence
in their ability to protect her.
Their loyalty to the Saint is second to none.
That’s why if Leo doesn’t give up, they can’t allow themselves to stop. They don’t want to lose to a
prince of another country.
And there is one more reason. Another reason for them to not stop moving.
1423
Riding on the back a griffon is no easy task. The griffons are indeed the ones who do the running but
riding it also causes them fatigue. That fatigue should affect Leo the most as he is but a beginner.
However, Leo sat straight on Noir’s back and continued to lead them. His back continued to inspire the
Griffon Knights behind him.
That being said, Leo himself doesn’t have any leeway regarding that either.
Noir did not fly while considering Leo on his back. Riding on him is much more difficult than any
rampaging horses Leo has ridden.
Still, Leo never complained. He thinks that it is fine.
“Noir, please…….do your best just a little longer.”
There was no reply.
However, the speed of Noir increased a little.
It was a heavy burden for a griffon to fly around with a human on its back for a whole day.
Still, Noir continued to fly, following only on faint trace of his master.
Speaking of miscalculations on Grimoire’s side, there would be three.
One is that there are more people who are smart enough to notice their trick than they expected.
Another is that Leo took the Griffon Knights along with him in his pursuit.
And the last one is the existence of Noir.
Noir was not chasing the scent of Leticia herself. He didn’t rely on such uncertainty.
What Noir is chasing after is the trace of the Holy Staff. It is a faint trace that humans couldn’t detect.
However, Noir understood since his childhood that he would be able to find Leticia if he followed it.
And because of its rarity, Grimoire did not leave the staff behind.
That’s why their hiding place has been discovered.
“Noir!?”
Leo shouts when he sees that Noir suddenly starts descending.
He didn’t show any sign that he is so fatigued that he needs a rest.
That’s why Leo put his hand on the handle of his sword.
He knows that Noir finally found them.
1424
“DESCEND!!”
Following Leo’s command, the Griffon Knights descend one after another.
Noir keeps descending until he reaches what seems to be an ordinary village.
It is a village you can find anywhere in the Empire.
When they arrived, the villagers came out of their homes to see what’s happening.
“Y, Your Highness……is this really the place?”
Because it was such an ordinary village, one Griffon Knight asked Leo.
Without answering that question, Leo shouts.
“WHERE IS THE VILLAGE CHIEF!”
After he yelled out, an old man appeared from among the villagers.
“I, I am the Village Chief, Milord…….”
“I am the Eighth Prince of the Empire, Leonard. I am chasing after a criminal organization. Have you
seen anything unusual around here?”
“Y, Your Highness!? Forgive my rudeness!”
Saying so, the Village Chief and other villagers immediately kneel.
Their surprise is natural. Seeing that, the Griffon Knight’s expressions clouded.
No matter how they look at them, this is an ordinary village.
“Answer my question. Have you seen anything out of the ordinary?”
“I, I have not…..! Please forgive me!”
“It’s alright. I didn’t expect any good answer anyway.”
Saying so, Leo pulled out his sword and approached the Village Chief.
He then hit the Village Chief with intense murder intent.
The Village Chief’s body shakes at the strong murder intent but Leo unhesitantly keeps getting closer
and closer to him.
“Y, Your Highness…..! I apologize for my disrespect!”
“As I said, it’s okay. By the way, Village Chief. It seems that your people stay up quite late today huh?
They came out immediately after I arrived too. What were you doing?”
1425
“!!??”
Saying so, Leo brandishes his sword.
Then, the Village Chief stands up with a ball of fire in his right hand.
“DIEEEE!!”
The fire magic struck Leo.
For a moment, Leo was wrapped in flame and the Griffon Knights forgot to breathe.
However.
“I tried imitating Nii-san from time to time you see. To be honest, I was only planning to bluff. But
thank you——–Now I can kill you with a peace of mind.”
“HIII!?”
Waving the flame off with his sword, Leo decapitated the Village Chief.
At that moment, more than ten attack magics were cast toward Leo. However, Leo already started
running with his posture lowered.
“ATTACK! THERE MUST BE SOME KIND OF HIDDEN MECHANISM HERE! SEARCH EVERY HOUSE!”
Leo gives his instructions as he parries the approaching magic attacks with his sword.
He then approaches one of the mages and cuts off their head without any hesitation.
Leo has always been bad at cutting down living beings.
We might understand each other if we talk it out. If I cut my opponent down immediately then I will
lose the chance to do that.
Hearing that typical Leo’s words, the masters who taught Leo swordsmanship held their heads.
The Prince has talent but he will never be truly strong.
Every single one of them tells this to the Emperor.
A sword imbued with hesitation will never be strong. That was the absolute truth that the masters
understood.
As a swordsman, Leo is too sweet.
However, Leo was getting stronger and stronger. Whether in the monster subjugation or battles he
had with bandits, his results exceeded the expectations of his masters.
However, that did not mean Leo overcame his weakness.
1426
Leo’s swordsmanship was so good that he could defeat them even though he hesitated.
While feeling sorry for them, while regretting that it has come to this kind of result, while begging for
their forgiveness.
Leo has fought against his enemies up until now with his weakness as a swordsman exposed.
Even the recent incidents didn’t change that part of him. He keeps swinging his sword while enduring
those feelings all the while telling himself that it is the thing that must be done.
However, he was still carrying those unnecessary thoughts.
Normally, you would only think about how to defeat the enemy in front of you. After all, That is how a
swordsman should think in front of his enemy. But Leo was unable to do that.
Leo’s mind is rarely clear in battle. The only time Leo experienced such a thing was the turmoil in the
South where his opponents were lifeless monsters or Demons.
Even if he was using all of his power, he can’t get serious. That was how Leo has been up until now.
However, for the first time, by concentrating his mind only on the idea of rescuing Leticia——he is
able to get serious against human opponents.
He no longer cares about the country or other people.
The brilliance of Leo’s sword technique as he focuses himself on cutting down his enemy, despair the
mages.
If they release their magic at him, their magic will be cut down, if they try to start a chant, they will be
approached with unbelievable speed. And once he gets to them, his speed is so fast that their barrier
couldn’t protect them and their neck will part from their body with a single slash.
“How can this be…….even if he’s called the Hero Prince…….it was as if…….”
It was as if they were facing against the Hero himself.
While muttering such words, the mage’s head flew off.
Leo on the other hand murmurs a reply.
“I’d like you to not lump me together with Elna. That would be rude to her.”
Saying so, Leo uses magic and creates a flame on his right hand.
On the other side, five mages were also chanting fire attack magic as they aimed at him.
Five against one.
1427
Although it is not a difference in power that could not be covered normally, Leo uses the large amount
of magic power he inherited from the imperial bloodline and throws an enormous ball of flame at the
mages.
The flames collide midair. However, the power of five mages couldn’t compete with his as their flames
were swallowed by Leo’s flame, and the mages themselves soon follow the same fate.
With Leo’s lead, the mages who disguised themselves as villagers were mostly suppressed.
Seeing that, Leo looks for Noir.
He spots Noir smashing the wall of a certain house as he constantly raises a cry.
Leo who judged that there must be something there immediately head to the half-destroyed house.
As far as he can see, there is nothing out of the ordinary.
However, Leo did not overlook the slight discomfort he felt.
Under the broken bed. Feeling that there is something there, Leo put magic power into his sword and
slash at it.
Then, the barrier surrounding it collapsed and a hidden door leading to the basement appeared.
“So this is the place.”
“Your Highness!”
“We are heading in. Let’s go.”
After giving his short command, Leo, with the help of the Griffon Knights, opens the hidden door and
infiltrates the basement.
————————-
The basement was larger than its outer appearance suggested.
However, Leo keeps swinging his sword and gradually takes control over it.
He then breached into a certain room.
“STOPPP!!”
There was a barrier at the center of the room. Inside that barrier, a staff was enshrined in the middle.
The moment Leo saw that, he felt relief.
He is now certain that she is here.
The mages inside the room did not miss that chance.
1428
They tried to perform a pincer attack on Leo by casting attack magic at him from a close distance.
However, Leo relies on his body reflex and intercepts them.
“DON’T GET IN MY WAY!”
With a flow-like movement, Leo decapitated the mages without looking at them and slash at the
barrier. He then grabbed the staff from inside it.
For Leo who is not its true master, it is only a simple staff.
Still, it was the driving force for Leo to move forward.
After that, Leo went straight to the stairs on the other side of the room.
For some reason, he was convinced.
Leticia is just ahead.
That’s why Leo never stop his legs as he ran down the stairs.
On his way, he slashed at the man standing in front of him and reached the place that seems to be the
prison.
There, he found an old man wearing a robe, Auguste, and in front of him was a closed cage.
Leticia is inside. He can’t see her but he knows it. Joy and anger sprout in Leo’s heart at the same time.
“Prince Leonard!?”
“I will have you return Leticia to me!”
Leo rushes at the last enemy in front of him but his advance is blocked by Auguste.
Auguste has deployed a wall of Dead Spirits in front of him.
“That’s a shame! It’s impossible to physically break my dead spirit wall!”
“!?”
Leo noticed its danger before Auguste spoke.
It is a sinister wall created by layers of black smoke. The smoke constantly changes shape into that of
human faces.
It is a black wall with numerous human faces protruding from it.
Its horror was something Leo had never seen before.
1429
“I am a mage who utilizes the grudges filled souls of the dead! A Dead Spirit Mage! Hear their voices of
grudges and be driven mad!”
Saying so, Auguste advances the dead spirit wall toward Leo.
On the other hand, Leo takes a breath and stands his ground.
Then.
[[Flame descended from heaven・Save the virtuous・O supreme holy flame・Nobly burn・And destroy
the evil before me——-Holy Blaze]]
He chanted the holy flame magic.
Auguste is amazed at the advanced holy magic.
However, his carefree attitude did not collapse.
“As expected of the Hero Prince! You truly are blessed with talent! HOWEVER! With that level of
magic, you can not purify my army of the dead!”
The holy flame doesn’t have enough power to purify the wall of concentrated dead spirits.
Auguste is fully aware of that.
“You told me to return her but unfortunately Saint Leticia already belongs to Grimoire! You can not
have her back!”
If Leo dies here he will be able to acquire an even more powerful dead spirit. Regret, Grudges. The
stronger those are, the stronger the dead spirit will become.
In front of the woman he loves, to have your life ended without being able to save her.
Auguste laughs to himself at the powerful dead spirit he is about to acquire but in response, Leo raises
a voice full of anger.
“I see…..then, I only have one thing to do.”
Saying so, Leo put the holy flame on his left hand on the sword in his right hand.
Magic Sword.
It is a fusion of magic and sword techniques. This is a technique to create a pseudo magic sword.
However, the higher the level of magic is, the higher the difficulty to actually accomplish.
When it came to a magic sword that utilized holy magic, it could be said that it is the most difficult
technique to pull off. After all, among modern magic, holy magic itself is considered as the most
difficult one.
1430
However, Leo accomplished that on the spot.
Even Auguste opened his eyes wide to what is happening in front of him.
“WHAT……!?”
“This is the first time…….I’ve never felt that I want to kill someone so clearly before!”
Saying so, Leo vertically cuts through the wall of dead spirits.
The wall itself did not disappear however, the sword wreathing in holy flame created a path for him.
Before it could close up, Leo rushes toward Auguste.
“Kuh!!”
After the wall of dead spirits he has absolute confidence in was broken through, Auguste hurriedly
releases more dead spirits toward Leo.
However, Leo quickly cuts them down and closes his distance.
“Wait! If you want the Saint then I will return her!”
“No need! If you say that she already belongs to you guys then as suitable for someone of the Adler
house——-I will just plunder and steal her back from you!”
Saying so, Leo stabbed his sword into Auguste’s chest.
Perhaps it judges Auguste who is stained with dead spirit to be evil, the holy flame burns his body
from the inside.
“GYAAAAAAA!!!!”
With that death throe, Auguste turned to dust.
Then, after seeing Auguste completely turned into dust, Leo looked towards the prison.
Chapter 213
Plunderer
1431
SPT Chapter 214
AHOYY!! Did you wait!!! Did you spam the F5?? Or perhaps you are still spamming memes in
discord……..
Well, it’s up
-Mr.Graverobber
Predicament
Inside Leticia’s hazy mind, she heard the voice of Leo.
At first, she thought that it was only a hallucination but his voice was too clear to be one moreover, the
person who he is talking to sounded like Auguste.
Thus she opened her eyes.
Inside her distorted sight, she saw Leo and Auguste.
Leo is closing in on the old man.
“Wait! If you want the Saint then I will return her!”
“No need! If you say that she already belongs to you guys then as suitable for someone of the Adler
house——-I will just plunder and steal her back from you!”
Saying so, Leo stabbed his sword into Auguste’s chest.
Just like that, Auguste let out a scream and turned into dust. Then, Leo turns his eyes toward Leticia.
When their eyes met, Leo gently smiled at her.
Ahh, he’s the real Leo.
Leticia thought to herself.
The only one who can show her such a smile is him.
The moment she convinced herself of that, her consciousness started to fade.
The thread of tension was snapped with her peace of mind.
“Le, o………..”
“It’s okay now. Leticia.”
1432
Leo enters the prison cell and slashes the chain that binds Leticia’s hands then moves in to hug her.
Leticia’s relief is further deepened by the warmth of his body.
Still, Leticia manages to hold on to her consciousness.
After all, She thought that she had to say something to him. Still, she couldn’t say what she wanted as
she doesn’t have enough strength to think properly.
That’s why she simply put her thoughts into words.
“……thank you….for the miracle…..I wanted…..to meet you……”
“Me too. I wanted to meet you. From the bottom of my heart.”
“…..I have to give you my reply……..”
“Don’t worry about that. I am not in a hurry. Even if it is an eternity, I will wait for you. After all, if
someone were to rob you away from me then I will just have to steal you back.”
“….Fufu……so you can be this forceful sometimes too…..”
“You don’t know? Remember this. The Adlers never miss their prey.”
“….well, that’s scary……”
With a small smile, Leticia slowly exhales.
Then, her consciousness began to fade away again.
This time, she didn’t resist it.
Thus, Leticia slowly closed her eyes while feeling the warmth from Leo’s body.
“Leticia……”
Leo’s face distorted as he saw Leticia fainted.
There is no visible injury on her body but there is no doubt that something was done to her.
Considering the dead spirit mage he just faced, he could guess that it has something to do with him.
Glaring at the ashes of Auguste, Leo clicked his tongue at the ill-feeling he felt toward the old mage.
For Leo who could count how many times he clicked his tongue in his entire life, this ill-feeling is new
to him. He realized that even after he killed the man out of irritation, he still wanted to kill him all over
again.
So Leo takes a deep breath and calms himself down.
1433
He managed to rescue Leticia. All he is to do now is get away from this place.
Telling himself so, Leo carries Leticia and escapes the basement with the holy staff in hand.
The Griffon Knights who infiltrated the basement together with Leo were delighted to the point of
tears when they learned that Leticia was safe.
They offered to carry her but Leo refused and led them out of the basement.
“Leticia-sama!?”
“Is she safe!?”
“It’s okay. She just fainted.”
Saying so, Leo carried Leticia to Noir.
Blanc, Leticia’s ride, is also with them but Leo decided that it would be dangerous to leave the fainted
Leticia to Blanc so he chose to ride on Noir together with her.
“Your Highness! Is that not too dangerous?”
“It’s alright. Forgive me. It’s not like I do not trust you. It’s just that we have to be careful.”
The Griffon Knights then realize that they have to be wary of the possibility of an imposter replacing
them like what happened back in the castle.
Leo did not let his guard down even after he managed to get Leticia back.
He can’t be relieved until he can get her to safety.
The Griffon Knights who felt his intention did not get angry at Leo’s suspicion and apologized for their
carelessness.
“That was thoughtless of me. My deepest apology. We shall escort you, Your Highness.”
“Please do.”
Saying so, Leo straddles Noir’s back with the unconscious Leticia.
Then, when Noir flapped his wings, the other Griffons began to rise.
That was when it happened.
“MAGIC!!??”
A barrage of fireballs was fired at them from afar
1434
The fireball itself is not so difficult to evade but their number is unusually large. They can count at
least a hundred fireballs flying toward them.
The number of fireballs simply overwhelmed Leo’s group that only had ten people in it.
They could have avoided it if they are flying but they are currently gaining altitude. Moreover, the
Griffons are already exhausted from the long journey, they can not possibly avoid it.
Leo warded off the oncoming fireballs but with their number, he couldn’t defend against all of them,
and some griffons raised screams of pain as they were hit.
“Kuh! RAISE THE ALTITUDE!”
If this keeps up, they will all be shot down.
Leo who judged so ordered the Griffon Knights to forcibly raise their altitude.
Thus, although the Griffons suffered some damage, they managed to rise up to a safe altitude.
However, Leo’s eyes caught an army approaching the fake village.
Their number exceeded one thousand and many of them seemed to be mages.
Leading them is a black-skinned elf woman.
With a single glance, he can tell that she holds tremendous power.
“So the Dark Elves were connected to Grimoire huh…..”
As the situation grew worse, Leo frowned.
It is impossible not to notice an army of this scale. There must be some kind of trick as they couldn’t
spot them until now.
The Griffons they are relying on were injured so traveling a long distance is already impossible.
However, if they have to fight, he has to do something about that Dark Elf.
Moreover, with the force he has at hand, it is impossible to deal with them.
Judging so, Leo immediately gave his order.
“Escape to the East! There should be an old castle just a little ahead! That is our destination!”
After giving his command, Leo set the course toward the east.
He then took a deep breath and glanced at Leticia who is still unconscious.
“I will definitely protect you…..!”
Muttering to himself, Leo headed for an old castle to the east.
1435
The old castle was only a small abandoned castle in the east.
It was tattered and looked like it was about to collapse.
After he landed there, Leo let the Griffons rest and lie Leticia down.
“What about the enemy?”
“I can see their horsemen. Their main force will arrive soon, Your Highness.”
“How did they prepare an army of that scale inside the Imperial Capital’s territory……!”
A Griffon Knight raised his complaint while kicking away a pebble.
It was the thought that everyone there shares.
“With the festival going on, a crime organization shouldn’t be able to conduct a large scale operation
like this!”
“I know. There must be a traitor among the upper echelons of the Empire. This must be one of their
hands.”
Leo indifferently told them so.
It is nothing surprising.
It was expected that there would be a traitor inside the castle when Leticia was abducted.
After all, the Kingdom and Grimoire wouldn’t be so stupid to start something without any cooperation
from the Empire’s side.
“Uu…..where is……?”
At that timing, Leticia wakes up.
The Griffon Knights rushed to Leticia’s side. Leo wanted to talk to her but he remains silent.
“Leo…..?”
“We are at one of the Empire’s abandoned castles. The enemy prepared a thousand troops and
ambushed us on our way out. I ordered us to stop here to rest but before the Griffons could fully
recover, we would be completely surrounded.”
“…..their target is me. Please leave me and go……you wouldn’t be able to escape while taking care of
me……”
1436
“Please stop joking. If I would leave you here and run away by myself, I wouldn’t be here in the first
place.”
“But….at this rate, you will……”
“I am a prince of the Empire. Right now an army of criminals is marching on my land. I can’t overlook
it. Moreover……I must have told you this before. The Adlers never miss their prey. We would never
tolerate our prey being stolen. I have no intention to give you up.”
“Leo….you still have a future….it is foolish to hold a castle while you can’t expect any
reinforcement…..”
“I am here because I wanted you to be in that future with me. And holding this castle is not so foolish
of an idea either. I am not alone after all.”
Saying so, Leo started preparing for battle.
1437
SPT Chapter 215
Around the time when the sky began to light up.
The enemy army arrived at the castle.
Alone, Leo climbed up the castle wall that seemed like it was about to collapse. In response, Babette
also stepped forward.
“Good job on running away so far. Hero Prince. Let’s do some self-introduction. I am Babette. The
Matriarch of the Dark Elves.”
“Eighth Prince Leonard Lakes Adler. Should I say nice to meet you here?”
“It’s not our first meeting. I replaced that escort captain for a few days you see. I have been watching
you know. You and the Saint playing house.”
“I see…..so you were the one who kidnapped Leticia.
The root of all evil. The moment he discovered it, Leo’s eyes were filled with killing intent.
However, Babette doesn’t budge.
“It was so easy you know. Thanks to your face that I borrowed that is.”
“…….”
“Do you remember? There was an Elf who shook hands with you right? That was also me. Your face
seems to be convenient so I thought that I should collect it but it was even more useful than I
expected. I guess I will have to thank you for that. How about I let you go if you leave the Saint here.”
Leo was having a hard time suppressing his swelling anger.
His was not normal anger but something close to a pitch-black hatred. He doesn’t know how to control
it.
Even so, he didn’t show it on the surface.
After all, Leticia is watching him. He wouldn’t want to show her such an unsightly figure. That one
reason is the thing that pulled Leo back. Otherwise, he would have rushed down and slash Babette
already.
“…….why did you aim for Leticia?”
“It was a request from the Kingdom. They want us to experiment on her inside the Empire you see.
They did a lot of preparations too you know? Placing pressure on the Elf Village, acquiring the Elves
traveling route, finding a collaborator in the Empire, they even surprised me with how far they are
willing to go you know.”
1438
“That is Grimoire’s reason. I am asking you.”
“My personal reason? It’s oblivious, right? I want the return of the Demon King. That’s why I joined up
with Grimoire. I can’t summon a Demon King class demon without a good vessel you see. I understood
first hand how uncontrollable a Demon King would be in a direct summon. That’s why I need a vessel.”
“What would you gain from bringing the Demon King Back? Are you trying to wrap the continent in
war again?”
“You people might not know this but in the old days, it was us, the Elves, who ruled over the continent.
Humans are simply usurpers. That’s why we Dark Elves cooperated with the Demon King. we were
pissed at the Humans who treat this land like it is their own. It was convenient you know. We get more
power and we can destroy your pathetic race in the process. Well, the Demon King was far more
dangerous than we imagined so it was a relief when he was put down though. If he was left alone, he
might end up destroying everything after all.”
Babette said so as she reminisced.
500 years ago. The Demon King appeared and the entire continent was put in crisis.
Back then, all living beings of the continent cooperated and confronted the Demon King. The Hero
certainly was the one who defeated the Demon King but he did not defeat the Demon King and his
subordinates all by himself.
The army of the Demon King, who had many Demons under his control, was powerful. There is no
doubt that it was the strongest army in at least the last 500 years. Their defeat could be said to be a
miracle.
A veteran who survived that battle 500 years ago like Babette would be more experienced than the
word experienced could describe.
If he fights her he will definitely lose. That was a gap that Leo felt between their strength. He doesn’t
know whether he has any chance of defeating her or not.
He can not say that she is on the same level as Silver or Elna but there is no doubt that she is much
stronger than him. A normal elf is already more powerful than a normal human in the first place but
the person standing in front of him is the Matriarch of the Dark Elves who were empowered by the
Demon King. It is only natural.
Even so.
“Returning the Elves’ glory, revenge against the Humans. What nonsense. The ruler of the continent
always changes. It is only natural that the Elves would someday lose to Humans. It is simply because
Humans as a race are more diverse. You have tried to change that by cooperating with the Demon
King but you still failed, why can you still not understand that?”
“Such arrogance. As expected of the sinful Adler clan. Your clan of thieves won’t satisfy unless you can
plunder everything that exists in the world. Humans only have a superior reproductive ability than
1439
the Elves. Don’t you dare talk big about the race that can’t even protect themselves without relying on
some occasional freaks of nature!”
“If there are the weak among us then there are some that are strong. That is Humans’ diversity. We
used that diversity as a weapon and evolved. That’s why we managed to prosper on this continent.
Because we Humans are immature, we are full of possibilities. On the other hand, the Elves were
already completed. They are indeed a noble race but you could say that they have already reached
their limit. The proof is that the majority of the Elves do not seek to unify the continent. They do not
seek hegemony. Babette. Your dream is one that will never come true.”
“Hmph, thanks for sharing that. But unfortunately, I couldn’t care less about the Elves regaining the
continent right now. I just want to destroy the Humans because they pissed me off. Especially your
dear imperial family. I want to just slaughter you right this moment you know.”
“Is that so…….what a coincidence. I want to kill you too.”
Saying so, the two’s eyes locked.
Then, Babette suddenly appeared on the wall where Leo was standing without any sound.
“I want to just blow you away with magic but that might collapse the castle you see. It would trouble
me a lot if the Saint got buried in rubble after all. That leaves only hand to hand combat. You chose this
place because of that right? I hate that damn cunningness of you Adlers”
“I am cunning? It seems like you still don’t know the real Adler huh. I am not someone that great you
know?”
“Is that right. Well, I can agree that you are no big deal at all. In my long life, I have seen many so-
called heroes. Certainly, you are quite good. However, you are not on my level. If you think that you
stand a chance against me in close combat then I will crush you!”
Saying so, Babette pulled out a sword from her waist.
In response, Leo also unsheathed his sword.
Then, the battle of the two began.
Leo was focusing on facing Babette like never before in any battle.
It was his first time that he has concentrated to this extent.
However, Leo was pushed back.
“Kuh…..!”
“What’s wrong! Hero Prince!”
“Ugh!”
1440
Leo managed to stop a heavy blow but he couldn’t stop the momentum and was blown backward.
When Leo managed to catch his breath, Babette’s kick was already approaching Leo’s chest.
Taking Babette’s kick directly, Leo was blown away along with the castle wall.
“Ugh…..Khg…..”
“You are certainly strong but you can’t beat me. Why don’t you just give up and hand over the Saint?”
“I will never……give her up……”
Saying so, Leo stood up while bleeding all over.
Seeing from Leo’s eyes that he still hasn’t given up yet, Babette clicked her tongue.
“You Adlers are damn annoying! I have seen your kind expanding this Empire over the past 500 years!
Clan of sinners that took everything from me! That’s the Adlers! Know the feeling of the one being
plundered for once!”
“The Plunder of Adlers…….has a meaning……”
“You hypocrite! What meaning plundering could hold! Yours is the greediest clan of the Humans who
robbed this continent from us Elves! Your Clan of Golden Eagles that took away everything from us
are the worst of your miserable humankind!”
Saying so, Babette approaches the tattered Leo and tries to stab his chest.
Leo wards off the sword trajectory with his sword. Still, Babette’s sword managed to scratch Leo’s
shoulder.
“Ugh……!”
“You can’t just lie down and accept your death huh! That is also a characteristic of your kind isn’t it!”
Saying so, Babette swings her sword down from above.
Leo receives it but that was all his tattered body could do.
The blade gradually approaches Leo’s neck.
“As your last word, why don’t you tell me the so-called meaning of the Adlers’ plundering then!”
Without answering that question, Leo focuses himself.
This is a life and death crisis.
Still, Leo did not lose his calm. He can’t allow himself to lose focus.
Slowly inhaling, Leo pushed back, Babette’s sword with all his strength.
1441
“What!?”
“A payback!”
Saying so, Leo kicks at Babette.
However, Babette only blew away lightly. It was incomparable to the damage Leo received.
“Impudent…….that’s the ugliness of you Adlers.”
“Yeah, that’s right….we Adlers are ugly…..but we still choose to plunder…..”
When Leo was young.
He was resenting that his house was called the clan of plunderers. It was the Crown Prince Wilhelm
that remonstrated him.
Wilhelm said to him as he placed his hand on the young Leo’s head.
[[There are two kinds of people in this world. Those who are robbed and those who rob. We are the
ones who rob. That’s why they called us the plunderers.]]
Leo was even more resentful at what he said but Wilhelm only smiled as he patted Leo’s head.
[[That’s right. That anger is the origin of us, the Adlers. Even if you manage to stop a tragedy after it
happened, tears will still be shed. The only way to stop that was to take them all away and put them all
under our protection. That is the Adler’s creed. It is not a good thing. It is nothing to be praised. Even
so, we continue to plunder while having only one oath inside our heart.]]
Leo slowly put his left hand on his chest.
Those words still remain in his heart.
Even so, he was not fully convinced of it until now. However, right now, he understands well its
meaning.
“The Adlers’ plunder is an oath…….we will not hand over anything we have within our grasp……the
Plundering of Adler is an oath to protect everything! This country is the product of that oath! There is
no place for you in this Empire! Until our blood runs dry and our Oath disappears—–the Adlers are
the guardian of everything that we have plundered!”
Leo slowly took up his stance.
It was to unleash an attack with all he has.
Babette, who felt the danger from his eyes, braces herself.
However, albeit small, she took a step back.
1442
“What…….? I took a step back…..? I was scared of that brat!?”
Unable to believe her instinct, Babette turned her eyes toward Leo again.
Then, a shining circle of light started floating around Leo.
Babette immediately understands the identity of that circle of light.
“No way!? She can use the staff in that state!?”
“Heed my voice! Staff of the Sacred Star. O’ Staff that rules over the sacred heaven, give color to this
sad and colorless earth! The bestowed color is [Gold]!!”
The power of the holy staff is to add color.
The effect varies depending on the color selected by the user.
Among them, [Gold] is a special color.
It represents [Possibility] which allows the target to unleash their potential.
It has almost no effect on those with no potential but Leticia chooses that color.
Using the staff requires both physical and mental strength. Leticia is currently exhausted so she can
not use it for long. She could manage if all it took was physical strength but she doesn’t have enough
mental strength required for it.
That’s why she had no choice but to choose the color with the most impact.
A color that could give Leo enough strength to defeat a strong foe like Babette. A normal enhancement
would not be able to do that.
That’s why Leticia bet on Leo’s potential.
And it was a success.
“Just Who…..are you……?”
“The Eighth Prince of the Empire…….Leonard.”
“Like hell, something ridiculous like this can be allowed to exist…….with that kind of power……you are
still unsatisfied? Are you planning to be on par with those monsters!?”
“The Adlers also plundered various kinds of blood……after all, we can’t continue to plunder if we are
not strong enough, without strength we can not protect anything……..this bloodline is the proof of
Adler’s determination!”
Saying so, Leo approached Babette at the speed she couldn’t react to and slash at her with a flowing
motion.
1443
Babette was cut diagonally from chest to the torso. As blood spilled from her mouth, Leo kicks her off
the wall of the castle.
He then turned his left hand toward Babette who was still in mid-air.
A golden circle of light emerged from the sky and light began to leak from it.
It was the magic that is most incompatible with Babette who was strengthened by the Demon King.
“DAMN YOU…….!”
“–HOLY ・ GLITTER-!!”
Abandoned the chant, Leo activated the highest level of holy magic with only the magic name alone.
Then, the golden light of purification swallows and burns Babette.
Soon the golden light faded, and what remained was Babette whose body was half burned. Thanks to
the barrier she managed to erect, she escaped instant death.
However, she is at death’s door.
At that time, Leticia lost her consciousness again as she couldn’t stand the power of the staff.
Naturally, Leo returns to his normal state as well.
“Kuh……”
“….to think that I would be defeated by two brats playing house…..but that victory will not come for
free.”
Saying so, Babette raised her remaining hand up.
With that as a signal, the troops that had been on standby started to move.
Numerous lights started to glow from their side until it covered the entire army.
Every single one of them is the light from magic.
“They might be able to capture her now but……after I died, that doesn’t matter to me anymore……a
blow from more than a thousand magic…….I will have you disappear with me! Now die! Adler brat!!”
Saying so, Babette swung her arm down with a grin on her face.
Leo immediately holds his sword up and the Griffon Knights try to get Leticia on Noir’s back.
However, they will not be able to make it.
Innumerable magics fly toward the castle.
1444
It has more than enough power to destroy the whole castle.
However, all the oncoming magic was knocked down before it could reach the castle.
White cloak fluttered in front of Leo.
“Wh, at……..?”
“—-you can shoot thousands or tens of thousands more but know that it is but a foolish dream to
think that you can shoot down the Golden Eagle with only that much power. We are here after all.”
“….HERO!!”
“That name is already outdated. Right now the Brave house of Amsberg is the shield and the sword of
the Empire. We are the guardian of the Empire and its Imperial Family.”
“Again…..!? I will never forgive you! How many times do you want to stand in our way!?”
“As many times as it takes.”
Saying so, Elna appears in front of Babette and raises her sword high.
Her death is already just a matter of time.
Still, Elna put a lot of strength into her sword.
“…..you damn monster.”
“Call me whatever you want. I also have something to say to you as well. Because of you, my prince
had to hit his younger brother……that is punishable by death. Die and atone for your sin.”
Saying so, Elna swung down her sword and Babette’s existent was eradicated.
Then, Elna slowly returns her sight to the wall.
“It seems that you are safe. Leo. I’m glad.”
“Elna….how did you…….?”
“You already know the answer right? Al managed to convince his Majesty the Emperor. That’s why I
could make it in time.”
Elna smiled after she said so.
Then, following Elna, the Third Imperial Knight Corp and Sebas also arrived at the castle.
Chapter 215
1445
The Oath of Adler
TLN: Well, the shonen manga part should be over wither this. we will be back to Al in a few chapters.
1446
SPT Chapter 216
Can I treat this as double chapter? Damn it’s long…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Annihilation Battle
“Sebas…..I see. So Nii-san wants to keep our force outside of the capital huh……”
“That appears to be the case, sir. Well, perhaps he was only worried about your well-being, Leonard-
sama.”
Saying so, Sebas sweeps his eyes on the army surrounding the castle.
Although their commander is gone, they are an army of more than a thousand strong. Moreover, they
mostly consisted of mages. Their destructive capability should be several times that of a normal army
of the same size.
“Now, what do you want us to do, sir?”
“If Leo gives the order then I don’t mind wiping them out you know?”
“Captain. Please refrain from fanning the flame. There are many villages and roads in this area so you
can not use your holy sword, no? Without the holy sword, dealing with this number of enemies will be
difficult.”
Marc cautions Elna.
Their purpose of rescuing Leticia and retrieving Leonard was completed. All they have to do now is
withdraw.
Marc judged so from his common sense.
However.
“Even so,—–we can not leave that kind of army alone. We have to annihilate them here.”
“Yes? Y, Your Highness! Are you sane!? We were in a hurry so we brought around ten people with us
you know!?”
The Third Knight Corp was divided into two as one division had to hurry and follow after Elna who
rushed ahead by herself.
As they can’t afford to abandon their horse and food supply, only Marc and six other knights along
with Sebas and Sieg followed after Elna.
1447
Including Leo, they would have eleven people. It was too reckless to challenge an army with a hundred
times their number.
“Aren’t you quite belligerent today, Leo?”
“With civilian villages nearby, we can’t leave that army alone. Once they lose their commander they
will turn into groups of outlaws after all. We have to wipe them out here while they are still one single
group like this.”
“That is certainly correct but we do not have enough men for this, Your Highness!”
“I know. But the reinforcements I can expect is probably not your group alone. Isn’t that right? Sebas.”
“Yes. Lynfia-dono already headed to Vin-dono’s side to relay the situation. By this time, the Narbe
Ritter should already be nearby, sir.”
“Then we only have to fight them as flashy as possible to let them know our location. Well, Vin would
come here eventually anyway. It was him who told me about this castle after all.”
Saying so, Leo takes a deep breath and puts strength into his body.
His condition is far from perfect. If he can lie down right now he would. The desire to just lie down and
rest floats up in his mind.
Even so, Leo continues to put more strength into his body.
Retreating here would be easier and it is also common sense.
He doesn’t have to bother fighting them now as he can wait to join up with the Narbe Ritter to hunt
them down later.
However, that flow of events will cause problems for [What comes after].
“That army is in our way. With their existence, we can not move our force as we please. If we miss this
chance, we will have to chase them down later. We can not afford to do that.”
“Why can’t we do that? Your Highness.”
“Sebas is Nii-san’s trump card. By sending him out, Nii-san is now defenseless. He is exposing his
weakness to lure out the enemy. That’s Nii-san’s specialty. Right now…..I’m sure that he is trying to
smoke out the traitor in the capital. What he expects us to do is to crush that traitor from the outside.
Right now we are Nii-san’s commando unit. For us, his pieces, to move freely, that army is in our way.
Even with small numbers, we are going to charge in and stall them here. Cut each and every one of
them down. We will annihilate that army here!”
Saying so Leo raises his sword.
Seeing that figure, Marc remembered Al’s words.
1448
Back at the Principality of Albatro, when Al decided to command their ship to enter the port, Marc told
him that it was a decision that Leo couldn’t take.
In response, Al’s reply was,
“He’s my little brother. There’s nothing I can do that he can’t……..huh”
“What’s wrong? Sir Marc. Are you still not convinced?”
“No…..please allow me to accompany you.”
The current figure of Leo overlapped Al’s appearance on that day.
Their actions are unreasonable and forceful but they do have the chance of victory.
The ideal image of the younger brother that Al showed him that day. He thought that it was only an
image of an ideal but right now the appearance of Leo is that of the ideal he witnessed.
I see.
Muttering to himself, Marc pulled out his sword.
“How terrifying. Your Highnesses. When I saw you two as children, I’ve never thought that both of you
would grow up to be such reckless princes you know.”
“Sorry that you have to go along with me. Still, you once saved Nii-san’s life, didn’t you? It’s unfair, isn’t
it. I’d love to have you save my life once too.”
“Not a thank you for saving your brother’s life but treating it as unfair instead is it. If possible I
wouldn’t want to see a prince’s life in crisis twice though.”
Marc shrugs as he said so.
With a grin on his face, he turns his eyes toward the enemy. The other Imperial Knights also did the
same.
Seeing that, Leo nodded and turned his eyes to Sebas and Sieg.
“Will you lend me your power?”
“Of course, sir.”
“My service isn’t cheap you know. It was so bumpy on my way here after all. If you want me to work
then you can bow and call me Sieg-sama though.”
“You were just riding on Sebas’s shoulder, weren’t you. Get to work already. If you don’t then I don’t
mind throwing you in first as a decoy you know?”
1449
“Hmph….can’t be helped then. I am an honorable man after all. A true man of honor wouldn’t refuse a
request from another. I accept your request!”
With that said, Sieg holds up his spear and shakes his legs.
Leo bitterly smiles at Sieg’s action.
“You sure are interesting, Sieg. I like it you know, that part of yours.”
“Stop that. I can’t get happy when a man says he likes me with a straight face. Well, it looks like you
have grown a little though. I will lend you a hand.”
“Grown? Me?”
“So you are not aware of it? I will tell you then. A man gets stronger when he knows what he wants to
protect. You looked a whole lot more refined you know.”
Leo opened his eyes as if he found Sieg’s words surprising. He then turned his eyes toward Sebas.
As usual, Sebas calmly answers him.
“Certainly. I do think that you have changed a little.”
“Really……? How do you think that I’ve changed?”
“How, is it? That is a difficult question. Well, to put it simply, you have become a little similar to
Arnold-sama. Whether that is a compliment or not, that would be depending on the person though.”
Sebas said so and smiled.
At that moment, the enemy shot their magic again.
Elna stepped forward and swatted most of them down while charging at them.
After that, Leo and the others also charge at the enemy while parrying off the remaining magic.
Under that situation, Leo’s eyes turned to Sebas.
“What you said earlier, did you mean it?”
“Yes, coming from me, there is no mistake. However, you seem very happy, sir?”
“Of course, that is the best compliment I could ask for after all.”
“You are as strange as usual, sir.”
“Maybe. I’m sure that I am a weirdo. That’s why I need everyone’s help. Can I leave my back to you?”
“Glady, sir.”
1450
Saying so, following Elna, Leo rushed into the enemy.
Ten odd people charge against a thousand-odd army.
For an army that already lost their leader, that was an incomprehensible act.
However, if they are charging at them then what they only need to do is simply intercept.
Thus they decided to meet Leo’s group head-on.
However, their line of defense was brilliantly broken.
“HAAAAAAAA!!”
Elna, who was leading the charge, immediately cut all the enemy soldiers that got in her way.
She did not utilize any special technique. After all, her opponents’ head can be easily parted from their
body with only a simple swing of her sword.
Behind her, Leo continues his charge together with the Imperial Knights.
Even if they are not on Elna’s level, their opponents are still scared of their superior power.
Their heads will fly if they can get close to them. Furthermore, they hesitate to retreat since there are
only a few enemies.
It is clear that they will eventually exhaust themselves. Those who died simply had bad luck since they
had to deal with them when they are still full of power.
As that is their consensus, Leo and the others were able to rampage even more. After all, these weak
opponents don’t stand a chance against them.
“Sieg. Can you go and support Elna?”
“I don’t think that’s necessary though? A dragon would be more tamed in comparison you know?”
“Please.”
“No choice then. Alright, Oldman. Give me a little hand.”
“Certainly. Please have a safe trip.”
Saying so, Sebas picked up a fallen spear from the ground and Sieg jumped on it.
Then, Sebas swung the spear as hard as he could, sending Sieg flying toward Elna.
Sieg, who was easily sent flying due to his body’s lightness, adjusted his course and planted his feet on
the enemy soldier’s face as the soldier was aiming his bow at Elna.
1451
“Oops, my bad. Your face looked easy to land you see.”
“A BEAR!?”
“WHAT THE HELL IS THIS!? WHO THE HECK IS THIS GUY!”
“I’m cute right? I am very popular with children too you know. After all, I’m not only cute, I’m strong
too.”
Saying so, Sieg swings his spear and blows away the soldiers that were aiming at Elna from a distance.
Just like that, Sieg continues to use the enemy soldiers as his foothold as he heads toward Elna. Of
course, the enemy soldiers who served as his foothold became the prey for his spear.
Then after catching up to Elna, he landed on her shoulder.
“Fuu……see, I properly did my job right.”
“You are in the way. Get off already.”
“Oi Oi, isn’t that too cruel. I came over to help you know? You already lack the appeal in the chest area
so act a little cuter will you.”
Saying so, Sieg looks down at Elna’s chest from her shoulder.
At that moment, Elna’s hand grabbed Sieg’s head and threw him into the air.
“I told you…….”
“WHA!!?? WAIT WAIT!!”
“THAT YOU ARE IN THE WAY!!”
Overcome by her anger, Elna blew away Sieg who was still in mid-air with the handle of her sword.
Sieg, who was blown away to a place where he was surrounded by enemies and no ally nearby,
screamed as he collided with the enemy soldier’s face.
“AHHHHHHH!?? THAT’S HURT DAMN IT!?”
After he collided with the enemy soldier’s head and crashed into even more soldiers on the way, he
finally slid on the ground and managed to stop.
“That woman! She slashed at me just because I said the truth! My fur is ruined! Soaked in mud like
this……I can’t enter the castle now can I.”
Sieg murmured while looking at his body.
As he is doing that, the soldiers surround Sieg.
1452
Noticing that, Sieg glares at the soldiers around him.
“What? You wanna go? Just because I am cute do you think that you can win!?”
Saying so, Sieg looks for his spear that should be nearby.
However, the spear he had with him before he got blown away was gone.
Thinking that he must have let go of it midway, Sieg starts letting out cold sweat.
Even as skilled as he is, Sieg’s body is only that of a small bear. Fighting without any weapon would be
harsh for him.
“…….wait a minute. I’m looking for my spear.”
“LIKE HELL WE WOULD WAIT FOR YOU!!”
The enemy soldiers tried to attack Sieg but one of the soldiers was immediately skewed by a spear. It
was Sieg’s.
“OHH!? My spear!”
“If you think it’s yours then don’t let it go in the middle of a battle please.”
A cold voice echoed.
It was then followed by a mysterious sound that invited the listeners to sleep.
The enemy soldiers who were in the range to hear that sound began to feel drowsy. Then a moment
later, their consciousnesses were cut off.
All of their heads were sent flying.
“Seriously, I have to take care of you every time.”
“…Zzzz.”
“Wake up.”
“Ouch!? That’s terrible! Miss Lynfia! I was enjoying a harem you know!?”
“It might be better if you never wake up again.”
Lynfia said so with a little bitterness in her voice and handed the spear to Sieg.
Sieg who was spoken to with such a horrifyingly cold voice immediately changed the subject as he felt
the cold sweat running down his back.
“H, How did you get here?”
1453
“Come to think of it, that question would be obvious, isn’t it. The situation was read so thoroughly
after all. As expected of Vinfreid-sama.”
“It’s not a big deal. I just trust that Leo would be able to remember this place.”
Saying so, Vin appeared from behind Lynfia. Beside him is Lars, the Commander of the Narbe Ritter.
With the sudden arrival of reinforcement, the enemy started to retreat.
“May we begin our assault? Strategist-dono.”
“Yeah, I will leave it to you.”
“Oi, Oi, if you start chasing them they might run off right! The prince gave the other to annihilate every
single one of them you know!?”
“Don’t worry. We have them surrounded already.”
Saying so, Vin swung his hand down.
Accordingly, Lars led his subordinates and charged at the enemy.
Not only there, multiple units are also charging at them from different directions as the enemy was
surrounded in a semicircle.
The only way they can escape to is the direction of the castle but Elna and her subordinates are
charging at them from that direction as well. Thus, the enemy’s escape routes were completely cut off.
Furthermore, in order to prevent their enemy who turned into disorderly mobs from escaping, Vin
quickly sent out runners to complete the encirclement.
Being locked inside a formation with Elna, the enemy had no choice but to wait for their turn to be
massacred like prey.
“Hey, Vin. You saved me there.”
“There’s no next time alright. If you are going to be reckless like this then tell me in advance. I almost
fainted when I heard the report.”
Vin grumpy says so with an equally grumpy voice.
The enemy was completely annihilated and Leo and the others returned to the old castle.
When all the main casts assembled at the old castle, Leticia woke up.
“Leticia-sama! Have you regained consciousness!?”
1454
“….we won right…….?”
“It was all thanks to you. Leticia.”
“No…..I am the one who caused all this trouble after all…….I am truly sorry. It is all my fault.”
Saying so, Leticia bowed her head to everyone there.
On the other hand, Leo shakes his head.
“What I want to hear from you is not an apology, Leticia.”
“……yes. Thank you. Leo, and Knights of the Empire. Thank you very much for saving my life.”
Together with Leticia’s words of gratitude, all the Griffons Knights bowed.
After seeing that, Leo smiled and headed to Leticia’s side.
“It would be great if we can say that this is the end……but this is not. I am sure that the Empire will be
wrapped in turmoil soon.”
“Leo……”
“You are a citizen of the Kingdom. There is a way for you to go back to the Kingdom without returning
to the Imperial Capital. I will leave the choice to you. But I’d love it if you come back to the imperial
capital. Together with me.”
Saying so, Leo held Leticia’s hand.
Leticia has the choice to solve this matter as the Saintess of the Kingdom.
Before the Empire and the Kingdom collide, she might be able to suppress the flame of war inside the
Kingdom.
However, if that happens, the Kingdom will be divided in two.
With this muddy international problem, the Kingdom could become the stage of a proxy war. After all,
whether live or die, the existence of the Saint is like a flame.
Then, there is a young man who wants to take that flame as his own.
After a short moment of silence, Leticia gave her reply.
“—–Yes. I will stay by your side. I might be a woman that only causes you troubles but please take care
of me.”
“Please rest assured. No matter what kind of trouble it is, I will face it head-on.”
Leo said so with a smile.
1455
The people then stare at each other.
Then, there was a person who spoke out without reading the mood at all.
“Then we will head back to the capital right? It is only a speculation but these guys are probably just a
decoy you know.”
“Unbelievable…..can’t you at least read the air? Vin.”
“Air is not something to read, it’s something you breathe.”
“Oh really. Your previous life must be some kind of strange creature that doesn’t need to breathe then.
You can speak out in that kind of situation after all…..”
“Just say whatever you like. I am a strategist. My job is to plan for what comes next. Also, the next
problem will be in the capital.”
“Yeah…..I know. The capital’s defense has become thin. In case of an emergency, we are a valuable
force that can move freely. Let’s head back to the capital. We will take all the dispatched Imperial
Knights with us too. I’m sure that Nii-san is waiting for us.”
“Right. Right now there is no one at Al’s side after all.”
“I wonder about that? I don’t think that Nii-san would ever leave Finne-san defenseless though? Isn’t
that right? Sebas.”
“Well, I do have some idea, sir. However, it is a fact that there is very little force that he can move
inside the capital. The thing Arnold-sama can do will be very limited.”
Leo nods at Sebas’s words.
Al’s strength is how he can skillfully utilize a small amount of force to the fullest.
However, that will not be enough to defeat their opponent this time.
Someone must be there to stop them.
“We ride to the capital! Get ready!”
Thus Leo issued his command.
1456
SPT Chapter 217
Special Thanks to MyWaifyisPecorine for the delicious coffee.
Enjoy the coffee appreciation day (Pizza too, from last week)
-Mr.Graverobber
The Thing I always Do
The evening of the day Leticia was abducted.
After she finished her shopping, Mia was dressed in a maid outfit.
“I wish I could wear a cloth that is easier to move in than this(desuwa)…….”
“Even if it looks like that, the outfit was designed for ease of movement though.”
“Well, there is no use complaining about this anymore. I will make do with this(desuwa).”
“Yeah, do your best. Also, you should learn to fix your speaking habit already.”
(TLN: Reminder, she ended every of her sentences with Desuwa or Desuno)
“My speaking habit……?”
Seeing Mia’s expression which tells me that she is completely clueless of what I am talking about, I
sighed.
It seems that even now she still believes that how she talks is normal for a noble lady.
“Finne doesn’t speak like you alright.”
“There is no way that is the case(desuwa)! I’m sure that it is only the tone that is different(desuwa)!”
“This is so troublesome……well, you will see once you meet her.”
Hearing so, Mia said that she will be looking forward to it.
It would be great if she doesn’t receive any great shock. She trusts that grandfather of hers a lot after
all.
While thinking so, I open the door to my room.
Inside, Finne was waiting for me.
“Welcome back. Al-sama.”
1457
“Yeah, I’m back.”
“Awawawawa…..!! The real one(desuwa)! Such divine beauty(desuwa)? She’s so dazzling that I can’t
look at her directly(desuwa)!”
“For the record, my status is higher than her, you know?”
“You are different, Prince. How should I say it, you lack the aura, ah-!? That hurt! Please don’t pull on
my ear!”
I felt like I was being made fun of so I pulled Mia’s ear.
From now on she will be acting as a maid serving inside the castle after all. I have to properly teach
her the hierarchy here.
“Remember this well. Now that you are a maid, you have to make your conversation partner happy
even if you have to lie.”
“I, I understand…..you are really tall(desuwa), Prince.”
“Is that you trying to compliment me?”
“You are a little taller than me(desuwa)! It’s not a lie(desuwa)!”
When I tried to pull her ear again, Mia promptly took a distance.
The heights of me and Mia are not that different. Even if such a person tells me that I am tall it only
sounds sarcastic to me.
Seriously, if she keeps this up, anyone can tell that she is not a normal maid with a single glance.
When I thought that way, Finne started to giggle behind me.
“Is it that funny?”
“Yes, very. Pleased to meet you, I am Finne von Kleinert. May I ask for your name?”
“…….de.”
“De?”
“She doesn’t use [Desuwa] at all(desuwa)!!!!!!?????”
Mia who received a huge shock had her mouth hanging open like her soul was trying to leave through
it.
Aah, so she’s shocked after all.
Well, the thing she has been believing in up until now just collapsed in front of her eyes after all.
1458
“D, did I perhaps say something rude earlier……!?”
“No, she just noticed that she has been misunderstanding something until now, that’s all.”
“Misunderstanding?”
“It seems that the old man who raised her up told her that it is normal for a lady to finish her sentence
with [Desuwa] you see.”
“[Desuwa] is it…….I don’t use that at all though.”
“ *GAN*………!”
Mia who was cornered even further collapsed on the spot.
She then muttered something as though her spirit was crushed.
“E, Even though he told me that it is how a true lady speaks……..Ojii-sama is a liar(desuwa)!”
“Well, everyone can make a mistake. You can take this opportunity to fix it.”
“Eh? You are going to have her fix it? I think that it is a very cute way to speak though…..that would be
regrettable.”
“Cute(desuwa)? You don’t think that it is annoying(desuwa)?”
“Is that so? I don’t mind it at all you know?”
Saying so, Finne grins.
She is not trying to lift the mood. It seems she really thinks so.
As expected of Finne huh.
Hearing Finne’s words, Mia stood up.
She then went in front of Finne and kneeled to her as she took her hand.
“My name is Mia! I will follow you for the rest of my life(desuwa)! Finne-sama!”
“It would be exaggerating to follow me for your entire life but thank you, Mia-san. I will be in your
care.”
“Yes! I will definitely protect you with my bow(desuwa)!”
She just said that she would dedicate her bow for my sake just earlier but it seems that her target of
loyalty already changed.
Well, since I am going to leave her at Finne’s side, it should be fine.
1459
As long as she has loyalty toward us then it would be fine.
“That being said, Mia will act as your escort from now on. Finne.”
“Yes. Thank you. But…..what about your escort, Al-sama?”
“Well, I have some ideas about that. For the time being, I want to guarantee your safety first. Mia, you
have to stay by Finne’s side as much as possible. In the worst case, there might even be a Dark Elf left
in the castle after all.”
The possibility is certainly low.
Dark Elves is a race that participated in the war 500 years ago. Their ability can not be inherited by
blood. In other words, the current members of their race are those who survived for the past 500
years. Moreover, because of the danger they post, they are being hunted by every country including
the adventurer guild.
In other words, their number is small. In this incident, one can say that the Dark Elves appeared in
quite a large number. Furthermore, it is hard to think that they can still remain undetected in the
castle.
However, we have to be cautious. After all, they have infiltrated us once already.
“Roger that!”
“Finne. Use Mia properly for me okay.”
“What do you mean by that(desuwa)!?”
“Literally what I said. This time you can’t rely on distance alone. You need to use your head too.”
“I am not so confident in that regard as well though……”
Finne appeared to have shrunk for a moment.
Well, compared to Sebas and Lynfia this is certainly anxiety-inducing but this will also serve to have
our enemy let down their guard even further.
That is what is important right now.
“I will follow up for you as much as possible.”
When I said so, the door was suddenly knocked.
When I gave a reply, the door opened.
Standing there was Alois.
“Your Highness Arnold. I heard that you wanted to see me.”
1460
“Yeah, sorry for this. Alois.”
Alois has been staying at the castle to study under various people working at the castle.
He showed results and one of the Imperial Knights even praised his sword skill. It was a sword skill
that is so serene that it was unthinkable that it belonged to a child.
“Forgive me for bothering you. It has been a while. Finne-sama, and…….”
“My name is Mia. It is an honor to meet with the Hero of Gers who repelled 10,000 imperial soldiers.”
“Thank you. I haven’t done anything to earn such praise. However, I am trying my best so that I will
not be ashamed to have such rumors attached to me…..Is this an opportunity for me to show the result
of my effort? Your Highness Arnold.”
“Well, something like that. Sorry, but there are not that many people that I can trust. The castle is
currently haunted. I have no clue of who is working behind the scenes. I can predict the actions of
some of them but there are some enemies that I can’t read at all.”
“Enemies is it…….do you mean your competitors in the succession war?’
Alois asks for my confirmation.
Alois is not a fool. I’m sure that he already knows. However, he wants to hear it from my mouth.
“No. it’s the enemies of the Empire. It was clear from when the Saint was abducted that there is a
traitor inside the castle. And, this is bitter to say but we can not completely identify them yet, there is
no evidence either. I’m sure that they are waiting for a chance to launch their attack.”
“So we have to prepare ourselves for that?”
“Yeah, that’s right. As far as I am concerned, only the people in this room are the ones that I trust
enough to make a move for me. Of course, there are some that I trust outside the castle too but I can’t
move them right now. Only the people in this room will have to prepare in advance for what is
coming.”
Leo’s aides can be trusted as well but it is doubtful if they will fully obey my order. With their
complete loyalty to Leo, many of them are finding me unpleasant.
In that case, there is no choice but to rely on the people I can personally trust.
“I am honored. To receive your trust is the pride of the house of Simmel, Your Highness.”
“Even if you don’t take pride in something like that, you will have more chances to acquire the thing
that you can be proud of in the future. That’s why we can’t allow the Empire to be ruined first. The
Prime Minister and many talented vassals are at Father’s side but there are places that even they can’t
reach.”
We need someone who can act with a certain degree of freedom that is not tied to a position.
1461
As long as there is no one like that on our side, I have no choice but to do it myself.
“Well, in the end, it is what I always do though.”
“Certainly. So everyone here is to do what Al-sama always does. Is that correct?”
“That’s right. Sorry, but I will have to put you to work now. We are short on hands you see.”
When I told them so, both Finne and Alois nodded at the same time.
However, only Mia was tilting her head.
“Uhh〜…..the thing that you always do, what is it?”
I make a bitter smile at Mia’s question.
Certainly, Mia will not understand. Even if she has seen it, I have never explained it to her after all.
That’s why I grin and tell her.
“—Secret maneuver.”
Hearing my words, Mia had an expression like ‘Ahh, I see now’ on her face.
Tomorrow is the last day of the festival. If they are going to move then it will either be tomorrow or
the time that the VIPs will be heading back.
Well, either way, we only need to stop them from behind the scenes.
Don’t think that you can get away scot-free after you betrayed the Empire.
I will serve the consequence of their actions right at their faces.
With such determination, I started explaining to them our future course of action.
1462
SPT Chapter 218
Double chappadibudadooo
The One who pulled the Strings
After Leo left the castle, the night of the day Leticia was abducted.
I was visiting the inner palace by myself.
“—–that’s how it is. In case of emergency, please be prepared to evacuate together with Christa.”
“Even if you told me that, I don’t know what to think though.”
When I told my mother, The Sixth Consort, Mitsuba, I received a vague reply.
“You don’t believe me?”
“I do believe you. It’s not that I don’t think Gordon would ever start a revolt. If he is going to do that it
would be on the last day of the festival, in other words, it’s tomorrow right.”
“Yes, tomorrow we will have a fighting tournament in the arena. Including Father, many people will
leave the castle for it. He must be aiming for that timing to start the revolt. He can greatly limit
Father’s options if he can occupy the castle after all.”
The Imperial Sword Castle is the cornerstone of the Capital defense.
Firstly, it is a strong and fortified castle. If he can seize control of this castle that can easily withstand a
siege battle for several months, Father will not be able to engage in a long-term battle. Gordon has
much control over the Imperial Army but it doesn’t mean that he has complete control of them. In a
prolonged battle, reinforcements will eventually arrive at the Emperor’s aid.
And secondly, the Imperial Sword Castle is also the key to activate the huge barrier that can cover the
entire Imperial Capital.
Firmament ・Kugel
(The Great Celestial Sphere)
It is a magic that covers the entire Imperial Capital with a huge spherical barrier centered on the
Imperial Sword Castle.
In terms of category, it is something similar to ancient magic. This is because it was reproduced from a
spell found in ancient magic tomes. With that said, it is only a deteriorated form since originally it is a
1463
spell that has to be cast by a person but that was replaced by a certain mechanism. The barrier can be
activated by placing high-purity jewels to supply it with magic power.
Even so, once it is activated, nothing can enter the barrier from the outside. Well, that is only in the
case that it was activated at full-power though.
A large number of ancient magic tomes were collected in the process to create this barrier. Gramp and
I studied ancient magic from those tomes. Of course, some of them were collected personally by
Gramp but most of the tomes were collected during that time.
If the Celestial Sphere is activated, I will not be able to enter the capital from the outside. That’s why I
stay back in the Imperial Capital.
“Will it really go that well?”
“Considering the current turmoil, it is possible.”
“Right. I agree with you on that point. But what I am wondering is if can Gordon really pull it off.”
“What do you mean?”
“I don’t know about how he was in the past but right now he doesn’t listen to any of his follower’s
advice. He prefers brute-forcing his obstacles while ignoring the detailed planning right? With that
child acting alone, I can’t see him pulling this off at all.”
“…..someone is working with him?”
“I don’t know. But I don’t think that Gordon alone would be able to successfully launch such an attack.
He is not the type that can accomplish such a detailed plan after all. By that line of reasoning, it is
possible that there is someone who is pulling the strings from behind the scenes.”
Her evaluation of Gordon could be said to be terribly harsh but she is entirely correct.
My mother also knew Gordon since he was a child. She wouldn’t misread his personality either.
“This plan probably involves the Kingdom and the United Kingdom. Gordon is a friend with the
Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom. Perhaps they are in cahoot? Or maybe it is someone from the
Kingdom side. Either way, there is no use thinking about it now.”
“The possibility of that is certainly high but I think that it is someone from the Empire side.”
“Someone other than Gordon? Please don’t say that it is Eric okay?”
“That child is different. He would never give away his possession to anyone.”
That’s right. For Eric, the Empire is his. He has full confidence that the throne will be his and he has
already started thinking about what will happen after he ascended the throne.
That Eric will never go out of his way to invite outsiders to intervene with his own Empire’s affairs.
1464
If that’s the case then.
“Don’t tell me……it is those two?”
“The possibility is not entirely non-existence right?”
I frown at Mother’s words.
It is true that those two would feel rejoice from such a crisis.
However, they are in a situation where they shouldn’t be able to move freely.
“Zuzan and Zandra are currently under house arrest by Father’s order. No one can visit them as they
are under guard. I don’t think that they would be able to be involved with Gordon’s plan.”
“Normally it is certainly impossible since they can not make contact with each other. But one of
Zuzan’s maids is still never caught, no?”
“……it is not uncommon for Zuzan’s maid to disappear so it was something that they overlooked huh.”
All of Zuzan’s maids were captured. Except for one.
However, it did not become a big problem.
Zuzan and Zandra often violently abuse their maids. It is not unusual for those maids to disappear
inside the Inner Palace.
The officials probably think that the maid either escaped or was already killed by Zuzan.
It was an oversight but at the time the priority was given to find out how Zuzan and Zandra were
involved in the Southern Rebellion.
“Are you thinking that Zuzan’s maid is working from behind the scenes, Mother?”
“I think so.”
“And what is your basis on that?”
“I want to call it a woman’s intuition but that will not make sense to you right?”
“That’s obvious.”
“Yeah, then I will give you my reasoning. Gordon has launched a military campaign on the Kingdom
before. It’s hard to imagine Gordon and the Kingdom joining hands unless someone is acting as their
middleman. Moreover, Zuzan is Duke Kruger’s younger sister who started the rebellion in the south.
Do you think that Duke Kruger would simply start a rebellion without expecting any kind of
reinforcements?”
1465
“I see. So Duke Kruger and Zuzan originally have a connection with the Kingdom. If the rebellion was
prolonged, the Kingdom would have moved. However, they failed.”
“That’s right. They are commencing the plan that they originally expected launch in conjunction with
Duke Kruger’s rebellion as the centerpiece. With that line of thinking, it is natural to arrive at this
conclusion. After all, with Zuzan’s aide as their middleman, it is not strange of a conclusion at all.”
The maid who escaped is Zuzan’s pawn that moves at her command.
So she is someone like Sebas to me huh.
That person connected Gordon with the Kingdom.
A joint effort with multiple countries on such a scale is difficult. Gordon doesn’t have that the skill nor
anyone on his side that can pull that off.
However, that would be possible for Zuzan’s aide who is proficient in moving behind the scenes.
In that case, this situation would be much more troublesome than I thought.
“That would be like both Zuzan and Zandra joining hands with Gordon though?”
“That would be impossible considering their characters but Zuzan no longer has any choice. If Gordon
understands that then it is possible for them to try to use each other. Of course, either of them will
surely betray one another along the line though.”
“Two candidates for the throne are joining hands……the Kingdom, the United Kingdom, and the
Dominion might even be involved. Their cooperation can explain why so many countries are willing to
lend them a hand.”
Because they have a chance at winning, they decided to cooperate.
Even if it benefits them, I thought that the other countries are overestimating Gordon’s value for quite
a bit but with an added-value like Zuzan and Zandra, I am convinced.
“Back to the original topic, with Zuzan and Zandra involved, I think that the Inner Palace will become
the frontline. Moreover, they will probably try to target me too. I am your and Leo’s mother after all.”
“That is certainly so……..”
It could be said that it was because of Leo and me that Zuzan and Zandra lost their positions.
The two are currently being confined deep inside the inner palace but if they are cooperating with
Gordon then they will soon be freed.
Right now, the inner palace is dangerous.
“Christa is Lize’s little sister. Zuzan’s first move will surely be capturing her as a hostage. It would not
be a good plan to leave her with me.”
1466
“……then you have to evacuate too, Mother.”
“I can not leave the inner palace without permission. The Empress will attend tomorrow’s fighting
tournament, and the other consorts have already decided to stay back in the inner palace.”
Only the Empress will sit next to the Emperor tomorrow. If another consort appeared beside him,
there might be some unnecessary rumor floating around about the succession war.
In that respect, the Empress has nothing to worry about. It is a well-known fact that the Crown Prince
has already passed away and Trau-niisan has no intention to succeed the throne.
I can understand that they want to dispel unwanted rumors in this time of instability.
However, right now I am resenting Father for making that decision. It is exactly because of that, that
Mother has to stay behind in such a dangerous place.
“Then I will strengthen your escort.”
“Nothing good will come from that. You must focus on protecting Christa. I will manage by myself.”
“BUT!”
“I will be fine. I am your and Leo’s mother after all. Besides, I am not the one who you need to save.”
Saying so, my mother looks at the door leading to the room next door.
“You can come in now.”
“……Yes.”
“You are…….”
A brown-haired woman came out from the room next door.
That woman is the Seventh Consort and the mother of the Tenth Prince.
“Gianna-sama……”
“Your Highness Arnold….please save my son……..”
Saying so, she bowed to me.
1467
SPT Chapter 219
Final chap of za week.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Seventh Consort, Gianna
The Seventh Consort, Gianna is the youngest of all the Emperor’s consorts.
She is currently 28 years old. She got married to Father 11 years ago when she was 17.
Father did welcome a wife the same as age as Eric but it was not because Father sought her out
himself.
The marriage between the two was a political one.
Gianna was originally the daughter of a Duke of the Sokol empire.
11 years ago. Sokol empire, who was angry with the Empire over the matter with the Dwarves, offered
the daughter of a Duke, a distant relative to their royal family, to Father.
That Duke’s daughter is Gianna. She was sent in the pretext of a peace offering and to form a friendly
relationship between the two countries.
With her being a distant relative to their royal family, it is certainly pleasant to the ears but it also
means that she can be cut off at any time. As evidence, the Sokol empire has tried to cross our border
even after Gianna’s marriage was concluded.
Although Father did not do it, Gianna’s position was one that it would not be strange if she got
executed as a show of political power.
A sacrifice for a temporary truce. That is Gianna.
She was sacrificed by her homeland to be the Seventh Consort of a man who has a son the same age as
her.
However, being wary of deteriorating the relationship between the Empire and the Sokol empire,
Father accepted the marriage and cherished Gianna as much as he could.
My youngest brother, the Tenth Prince, Rupert is the proof.
Rupert, who is only ten years old, was an unnecessary child for Father.
Considering the age of his oldest son, Rupert will still be a child when the time calls for the succession
war to commence.
1468
He is different from Christa who is the daughter of his most beloved consort.
Still, my father had a child with Gianna. Someone abandoned by the Sokol empire, and an unneeded
consort of the Empire. He thought that she would be too pitiful to be treated like that.
However, this also led to creating a new worry for Gianna.
Gianna has no ally inside the Empire. As long as the fact that she hailed from the Sokol empire still
stands, she will forever be under suspicion. The same goes for her son, Rupert.
Rupert himself is an existence that posts the possibility of the Sokol empire interfering with the
Empire’s working.
Naturally, Gianna is aware of the suspicion placed upon her and her son so she made sure that she
doesn’t do anything extra until now. Of course, they are not in any way involved in the succession war.
That Gianna is now relying on my mother to ask for my help.
That move would not be looked upon kindly by the other candidates for the throne.
“Gianna-sama. Do you know what it means to be asking for my help?”
“Of course, Your Highness…….”
“……can I assume that you decided to join Leo’s faction?”
“….Yes.”
Gianna is not stupid.
Just because I am the one that she asked for help from, it doesn’t mean that she is trying to rely on me.
Leaving her son to the like of the Dull Prince is the same as sending him to his grave.
That’s why Gianna’s request can not be taken at face value.
She is trying to rely on Leo through me.
“Gordon’s movements are suspicious so it is reasonable to get under other faction’s protection.
However, since you originally came from the Empire, isn’t Eric a more viable option for you?”
Eric is the Minister of Foreign Affair and has close ties with the Sokol empire.
For Gianna who came from the Sokol empire, Eric should be a more reliable choice.
“I have thought about it at first……but I am scared…….the people from my empire, especially those
who belong to the royal family are all black-hearted. His Highness Eric who can negotiate with them
without batting an eye, he is terrifying for me…….”
1469
“Isn’t it because he is just that excellent?”
“It might be exactly as you say. However……His Highness Eric looks as if he doesn’t feel anything even
when he negotiates with them. It was as if he had no emotions at all. No matter how talented that
person is……I can not leave my son with him.”
“I see.”
I can understand her reason.
It does make sense. If she can’t trust Eric as a mother, she only has one other faction to rely on.
Currently, Leo’s faction is approaching Eric’s in power. It is no wonder that she chooses to rely on him.
The sooner the better.
This simply means that the future where Leo becomes an emperor is getting more realistic.
However.
“I am sorry, even if you want to rely on us, we currently can’t afford to protect you. I would
recommend you to bring this matter to Eric-aniue instead.”
“No way! At least Rupert alone–!”
“Protecting Christa alone is all I can do. Are you aware? Almost all of our faction’s strength is currently
outside the capital. Elna is currently away from the capital, as long as she doesn’t put in a word, the
Brave house can not be moved. There is little I can do. Please give up.
Gianna who lost her words looked at my mother.
I also take my eyes away from her and look at Mother.
“Al. Don’t you want to help your little brother?”
“……I want to help him if I can but right now I have neither Sebas nor Leo to rely on. With our fighting
force extremely limited, if I add more people that I have to protect, the people that I absolutely must
protect will also be at risk.”
“Adding a person is no big deal right?”
“It is. Rupert is not just any child. He’s a prince. If I want to protect him, I would need a certain amount
of strength. If I can think of someone who can lend me that strength I would consider it though.”
“…..We have no ally……..”
“I am aware. I and Leo were like that at first. If you are someone who offered us your help when we
were still at a disadvantage then I would consider it but would it not be too selfish to ask for our help
now that we gained power.”
1470
A person who sided with us when we were weak can be trusted and I will obviously feel gratitude to
such a person.
However, even if someone told us that they would become our ally when we already gained power, I
can not trust such a person and I don’t feel any gratitude toward them either. Not to mention that
Gianna has no allies. The only thing she has is enemies.
She will only bring more burden to us.
“Al. Protect her. If it’s Leo, he will never abandon the weak.”
“Unfortunately, I am not Leo. I prefer reality rather than an ideal. You can not force this on me,
Mother.”
If Gordon moves, he will surely set out to occupy the castle and activate the Celestial Sphere.
The Celestial Sphere can be activated by setting multiple Keystone Jewels on the pedestals. Once it is
activated, it can only be taken down from the inside. That’s why I remain inside its area of effect.
The forces that were called to the castle are there to protect those pedestals. They can’t afford to
escort anyone else.
If the Celestial Sphere was activated, it would be impossible for Leo and the other to get in. That’s why
the most important thing is to take down the Celestial Sphere.
As long as I have to clear that absolute condition, I can not afford to make this choice.
“Ara, is that so. Then I will protect them myself.”
“Mother….please do not force me like that. I can not do the impossible. We simply don’t have enough–”
“If it’s the forces you need then you can just borrow it.”
“Who would be willing to lend me their force?”
“Your elder brother.”
Saying so, my mother looked at the entrance of the room.
With a bad feeling, I slowly look back.
Standing there was Trau-niisan whose face is still blue from blood loss.
“I heard the story! I shall lend you my strength!”
“….why is Trau-niisan here?”
“In case you refused, I called him as insurance.”
1471
“……a normal person wouldn’t call on someone who was asleep because he just lost a lot of blood
right………”
“It’s an emergency. And I did not force him or anything. He offered to come here after he heard the
situation you know?”
“I will ask first then, what did my mother tell you, Trau-niisan?”
“I will only move for little girls! Miss Mitsuba told me that she wants me to protect Miss Christa so I
staggeringly walked here you know!!”
“……”
“Ara, so strange. It seems like we suddenly have a surplus now haven’t we?”
I pulled my face at my mother’s words.
So he pulled Trau-niisan in by feeding him Christa?
Certainly, that way he can also protect Rupert while protecting Christa.
However, there is one problem here.
“Trau-niisan……how do you plan to protect them in that kind of condition?”
“Arnold, don’t look down on your elder brother alright. I have already summoned strong helpers for
us you know!”
“Strong helpers?”
“My brother’s aides.”
“Come again?”
The helpers that he summoned have far surpassed my expectations.
1472
SPT Chapter 220
Been sick for the past few days……damn rain…
Anyway, Thanks ItzMuffins, Doocky, and N3w_Typ3 for the coffee support!! appreciate it!!
-Mr.Graverobber
For my Younger Brothers
The deceased Crown Prince had many talented subordinates.
This especially applies to his close aides. Vin was a candidate to be included in that category. In other
words, as talented as Vin is, he was at a level where he was not counted among the Crown Prince’s
aides.
That was the faction of the Crown Prince Wilhelm.
After the death of the Crown Prince whom they entrusted their dream to, they were all scattered.
Some went to serve others while many are like Vin who retired after they lost their dream. The Crown
Prince was simply that brilliant and dazzling to them.
A human can not live without the sun. For many of the Crown Prince’s subordinates, his death equated
to the death of their sun.
However, there was a possibility that they might find themselves a new sun.
The one and only person who can succeed the Crown Prince.
His younger brother who was born of the same mother as their lord and was raised in the same way.
The Fourth Prince Traugott Lakes Adler.
My brother who holds no interest in anything besides arts.
Despite being full of talent, he focuses on art, the one thing he has no talent in. An unbalanced person.
“……Did you reach out for Elder Brother’s aides?”
“Of course. I did it in secret but they are already here in the capital.”
“….have you summoned them to have them fight in the succession war?”
It wouldn’t be strange for anyone to take his action that way.
Anyone would think that he is finally motivated to succeed the late Crown Prince.
1473
At the very least, his standing will not be the same. Just as how Leo was viewed as an enemy by Eric
when he gathered more subordinates into his faction, Trau will also be viewed as his enemy.
“Do you think so?”
“I do not. However…..it wouldn’t be unthinkable for others to take it that way.”
“Then I am fine with that. I no longer care what other people think of me. I called on my brother’s
aides because I don’t have enough power to stop the Dominion in case they make a suspicious
movement. My brother’s aides who feel that they are indebted to him are quite sweet on me, his
younger brother. So, I asked them to lend me a hand this one time.”
“…..have you resolved yourself? If you do something that stands out too much, you will be regarded by
all the candidates as the most troublesome hindrance you know.”
“Certainly, I might not be able to focus on my art for a while.”
Saying so, Trau murmured about how unfortunate it is.
That is something that matters to Trau-niisan even more than his life.
After all, that is his life purpose
Even if he doesn’t have talent in it, no matter how anyone ridicules him because of it.
That is something he wants to pursue. Trau-niisan is a person who would go any length for his hobby
and he has never compromised anything when it comes to his hobby until now.
That Trau-niisan is now putting aside his hobby to take action.
This is unbelievable.
“……why did you go so far? Is it for Leo’s sake? Is it because you see his potential to become an even
better emperor than our eldest brother?”
“There is also that. Leonard will surely become a good emperor. That is what I desire him to be. That’s
why I decided to support him. But, I am standing right here for another reason.”
“Another reason?”
“I don’t want to see my brother abandoning one another. If I have to sacrifice myself to open a new
path of my brothers then so be it.”
Saying so, Trau-niisan smiled.
His smile was somewhat similar to our eldest brother.
I’m sure that I have a terrible expression on my face right now.
1474
There is a limit to what I can do.
If I can save everyone then I want to but since that is not an option, I have to choose who I will save.
But now, Trau-niisan has extended his hand for us even if it will cost his way of life.
“——Please protect Christa. I will protect Rupert without fail.”
“You can leave her to me. Using this opportunity, I’d love to be called Onii-sama by Christa.
DUFuFuFu!”
After making that dubious laughter, Trau-niisan turned back.
It seems that his business here is over.
His legs are still shaking. He really came here while pushing himself.
“Trau-niisan…..thank you very much.”
“Don’t worry. This is the Empire, and we are the Imperial Family. It is only natural for us to work hard
for our country. Don’t look down on your brother too much, okay. I will do what I can without pushing
myself. There will always be someone who could reach their hand out to the place you can’t, Arnold.”
After saying so, Trau-niisan left the room.
After I saw him off, I turned my eyes to Gianna.
“……It is as you heard. Please entrust Rupert to me.”
“Thank you very much! Thank you! Your Highness Arnold!”
“If you want to thank someone…..please thank Trau-niisan.”
Saying so, I bowed to Gianna and Mother and turned back.
With Trau-niisan’s cooperation, I have to change the force allocation on our side.
Normally, I would leave the details to Sebas but unfortunately, right now I am the only one who can do
it.
Guess I will have to stay up all night today.
“Such a shame isn’t it. If he is motivated, I think Traugott would be a great emperor.”
Commented Mother.
That was probably her real thought.
However, her words were conditional.
1475
If he’s motivated.
Gramp also said the same thing. No matter how talented they are, those who are not willing to become
an emperor can not and must not become one.
Trau-niisan has everything needed to become an emperor. Son of the Empress, younger brother of the
Crown Prince. With a single word, even the Crown Prince’s former aides can be gathered at his side.
He is raised in the same way as the Crown Prince and his real abilities are high and well-balanced.
Still, he has no intention of becoming an emperor.
His reason is that he can not become an emperor that can surpass his elder brother.
That’s why he entrusted that hope to Leo.
What he meant is that he thinks Leo will become the new sun for the Empire.
“Please rest assured. Leo will definitely be able to become an even better emperor.”
“What is the basis for that I wonder?”
“Call it a brother’s intuition.”
Saying so, I smiled and left my mother’s room behind.
Then, when I arrived back at my room, Finne was waiting for me inside.
“Thank you for your hard work. I will prepare you some tea.”
“Thanks. But I have to do something before that.”
Saying so, I took out Silver’s mask.
If the Celestial Sphere is activated, I will no longer be able to leave the capital. Tonight is my last
chance to go out.
I have to do what I can before the time is up.
Trau-niisan reminded me. That I don’t have to do everything by myself.
There are many people I can rely on.
“I understand. Please leave this place to me.”
“Yeah……Finne. Do you think Leo can save Leticia?”
The sky is starry tonight.
It was said that in the past there were people who can read the future and the weather from the stars
but unfortunately, I do not have such talents.
1476
I have sent over as much force as I could to Leo.
If that still doesn’t work then there was no choice but to give up. However, if he couldn’t save Leticia,
Leo wouldn’t be able to return for a while.
Considering the worst-case scenario, I sent out Elna. if it’s her, she will be able to stop Leo.
But if possible, I want everything to go well.
When I was having such a thought, Finne smiled.
“It will be okay! Leo-sama is Al-sama’s brother after all!”
“I don’t think that makes anything reassuring though.”
“It does! Al-sama has helped many people before! Leo-sama will be fine! That’s what I believe!”
Her answer was so optimistic that I can sigh.
However, now her words are ingrained in my heart.
“…..honestly, I was hesitating whether I should send you out of the capital as well.”
“Eh!? THAT’S TOO MUCH!”
“Yeah, I think so too. I am glad that I didn’t. You help me a lot just by being here. It was a good
decision.”
Saying so, I put on Silver’s mask and change my clothes with illusion magic.
After I am done putting on Silver’s guise, I speak to Finne.
“Just a short while, I will leave this place to you.”
“Yes. Please leave it to me.”
Saying so, I used transfer magic and left.
1477
SPT Chapter 221
Been fixing my pc for hours……that damn RAM socket……
-Mr.Graverobber
East & West Borders
The Empire’s Eastern Region.
There is one territory there that is not being ruled by an imperial noble.
The Dwarven Autonomous Dominion.
It is an autonomous territory given by Father to the Dwarves who immigrated to the Empire after
their homeland was destroyed by Sokol.
There are multiple mines in this vast territory of the Dwarves that produce many precious stones that
can be turned into jewelry.
With those precious stones circulate into the Empire’s market, those who are fascinated by their
beauty pay a hefty price for them while the craftsmen who witnessed their skill increase their effort in
order not to lose against the Dwarves.
With the Dwarves’ pocket enriched, the Empire also reaped many benefits.
Father did a great job incorporating the Dwarves into the Empire.
That is my destination.
The place is being protected by the mighty elite of the dwarves. Even inside the Empire, this territory
is one of the safest places. Another thing is that the law that governs this place is different from the
Empire.
I know that Egor would be here to keep Sonia and her family safe.
The place I transferred to is a plain house.
When I took a step forward, I heard a voice from behind me.
“What, it’s you. If you are coming then at least say hello.”
“I don’t want to hear that from someone who took my back before I could even say my greeting, Elder
Egor.”
“Even like this, I am guarding someone after all.”
1478
“I see. But since you are already in the Dwarven Dominion, isn’t this a little too overkill?”
This place is being protected by the Dwarven Warriors.
The fearless Dwarven Warriors that strengthened themselves using the precious stones they mined
are several times stronger than a normal human knight in terms of power.
The reason why the Sokol empire chose to sacrifice Gianna as a temporary peace offering to the
Empire is that they are afraid of the Dwarven Army’s revenge with the Empire at its back.
For an SS-rank adventurer like Egor to be so alert like this inside such a territory is an overkill.
However.
“I wouldn’t be this careful normally you know. The circumstances are a little special now.”
“Special?”
Saying so, I probe the surrounding area with my barrier.
Doing so, I found out that the number of Dwarves here was clearly smaller than usual.
Moreover, there are almost none of the Dwarven Warriors here.
“What happened?”
“The Dwarven King has decided to invade Sokol. He is now leading his army to the eastern border.”
“Why did he choose this timing?”
“Apparently, it was because the Empire welcomed the bigshot from Sokol to the ceremony at the
capital. The King said that he can not rely on the current Empire to retake our homeland. I tried to
stop him but he didn’t listen to me.”
Egor sighed after he said so.
It is a long-cherished wish for the Dwarves to take back their homeland.
That’s why their action is not that strange. However, the timing is simply too bad.
“Do you think that the Dwarves will really manage to start a war?”
“I don’t think so. The Marshal of the Eastern Border should be able to stop him.”
“The First Princess huh. Then it is in safe hands.”
“Right. I heard that she summoned a nearby noble to help persuade the Dwarven King too.”
“A nearby noble? Was it Duke of Reinfeld?’
1479
“I think that’s the name. I only heard the hearsays so I am not that confident though.”
Egor said so and laughed.
However, I frowned at the strangeness.
Would that Lize-aneue really summon Jurgen to the Eastern Front?
Jurgen is certainly an excellent individual. Since Lize-aneue is not that good at persuasion, he would
be a good pick to persuade the Dwarven King.
However, would Lize-aneue do that?
This is quite suspicious. The likely scenario would be that Jurgen heard about the situation and
immediately rushed to her side.
Actually, that might be the case here.
However, something is still off.
“You worried about something?”
“Yes, something along that line. Something will happen in the Imperial Capital soon. No, it is already
happening. My hands are full. I want to borrow your help.”
“I owe you after all. Of course, I will help.”
Saying so, Egor waited for my words.
I can only ask one favor from Egor. it is something that I have to use carefully.
Where I will direct him to. That decision will be very important.
Should I ask him to come to the Imperial Capital? Or should I have him keeping his eyes on something
else?
After thinking for a while, I opened my mouth.
“Alright……I want you to head to the Eastern Border. If push comes to shove, I want you to forcefully
stop the Dwarven King.”
“I don’t mind but I think that the Marshal would be able to stop him even without my help though.”
“If he clashed with the Marshal, the relationship between the Empire and the Dwarves would worsen.
The adventurers will be forced to dispatch if the security in the Empire deteriorates. The Empire’s
adventurers are not that free.”
When problems are happening in the Empire, the adventurers will be relied on.
1480
Whether it be escorting the merchant or subjugating the monsters that came out of the forest, right
now, the adventurers are having their hands full.
They can not have any more problems on their plate.
Egor nodded to my words.
“Umu, that is certainly true. Then I will go. With me at the fort, it would be harder for Sokol to make a
move after all.”
“I am thankful for your understanding.”
Egor did not participate in the war between the Dwarven Kingdom and Sokol empire. It was both
because he was an adventurer and the fact that he simply was not there when it happened.
However, this time he will be present. Even if the Sokol empire thinks that there is a gap in the Eastern
Border defense, they will not be able to make a move so easily because of Egor.
If Egor chooses to be a Dwarf first rather than an adventurer, no matter how strong their army is, it
would be meaningless.
In the worst case, the Empire might just begin a counter-invasion.
With that line of thinking, it would make sense to have Egor keep his eyes on the Eastern Border.
“Well then, I will leave this to you.”
“Umu, I accepted your request. But……you really are a busy man huh. Don’t you want to say hello to
her?”
“There’s no need. You are taking good care of her right?”
“Of course. Without relying on that child to guide me, I wouldn’t be able to get to the border after all.”
WaHaHa, Egor happily laughed.
After smiling at such Egor, I transferred away.
Unfortunately, I have no time to relax.
I stopped the capital once and immediately transferred to the West.
My destination is the Duchy of Kleinert.
I transferred in front of the mansion and quietly walked up to the gate.
“WHO ARE YOU!?”
“SS-rank adventurer, Silver. I have business with the Duke of Kleinert.”
1481
“S, Silver!?”
The gatekeeper jumped back in surprise.
He seemed to conflict a while but soon after he opened the gate and let me in.
“Ex, excuse my rudeness! The Duke has given an order to let you pass unconditionally!”
“Thanks.”
Saying so, I went through the gate and entered the mansion.
Even though it is late at night, the mansion is noisy.
People are constantly coming and going. Each of them makes a startled expression once they see me.
Why is this place so noisy today?
While wondering so, I opened the door to Duke Kleinert’s room.
“We have recalled the knights from the eastern part of the territory, sir.”
“Hurry up. I need at least 5,000 knights here by the morning.”
Inside the room was Duke Kleinert in a suit of armor.
When Duke Kleinert noticed my arrival, he told his men to leave us.
“Welcome, Silver. Unfortunately, I don’t have time to properly welcome you. Can you briefly state your
business?”
“That’s more convenient for me as well. I don’t have much time either. But before that, I need to ask
you a question. What is all this fuss?”
“That’s simple. The Western Border has contacted me that the Kingdom Army is making a suspicious
movement. With the ceremony going on at the capital, their army’s movement is unusual. The
Western Border Defense Force judged so and contacted me. They are asking for reinforcement in case
of emergency.”
“I see, as expected of the border defense force. They really are excellent.”
“I do have a question as well. Why does the Kingdom Army move even though Saint Leticia is still with
us?”
“……I have to ask you to keep what I am about to say as a secret.”
“Of course.”
1482
“—-Assassination, their target was the Saint. The culprit was the Dark Elves. They infiltrated the castle
by disguising themselves as the Elves’ representatives.”
“Th, the Saint was assassinated!?”
Duke Kleinert’s face turned blue as he stood up from his chair.
I raised both of my hands to signal him to calm down.
“That is not the case.”
“Tell me that sooner……”
“The assassination of the Saint was a diversion. The Saint was abducted. Prince Leonard is now
pursuing them. The Kingdom is probably in the know. The fact that the Kingdom Army started to
move is good proof of that.”
“……I think I am about to faint.”
Duke Kleinert looks up at the ceiling and puts his hand on his forehead.
Well, even if the Saint is still alive, the point that she was abducted didn’t make anything better after
all.
If Leo fails, the Empire will have to take the blame.
The relationship with the Kingdom will never be repaired.
“I know that you are exhausted but we need to move to the matter at hands now.”
“If I ask you to give me a break, would you?”
“That would be impossible. There is a sign of revolt in the Imperial Capital.”
“…….Prince Gordon huh.”
“Good answer. It is still only a possibility but the defense of the Imperial Capital is thin. If they planned
on doing it then it will be tomorrow. I hope nothing happens but…….if it is going to happen, there are
only a few people who can protect the Emperor.”
“I understand. If a revolt should occur, I will head to the capital.”
“I’m glad that you are quick to understand. However, in the case of a full-blown revolt, I can not
interfere. Be prepared. If I can move, I will open a portal for you to the Capital.”
“No problem. I need to prepare my army for the Kingdom’s possible invasion anyway. If time allows, I
will talk to the other Lords as well. After all, if we all head to the Imperial Capital, there will be no
reinforcement for Western Border.”
1483
Duke Kleinert quickly decided on his future course of action.
As expected of the Duke who earned the trust of the Emperor.
“Then I will excuse myself now.”
“Silver. I do have one final question.”
“What is it?”
“Was it Prince Arnold who sent you? Even if it is you, there is no way that you can know so much
about the Castle’s internal affairs. Can I take it as that Prince started to move?”
“What if he did?”
“Well, I only want you to give him my message. Please take care of my daughter.”
His face is smiling while his words are overflowing with trust.
“You seem to trust him a lot huh? That Dull Prince.”
“I do not care how others see him. I simply trust in the Prince that my daughter believes in.”
“I see……then I will tell him so.”
Saying so, I let out a small smile and opened the transfer gate.
Like father, like daughter huh.
With that thought in mind, I returned to the Capital.
1484
SPT Chapter 222
Special thanks to ItzMuffins (again)!! I guess I am gonna go with orange juice this time…..my head still
ringing…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Wings of the Crown Prince
Finne greeted me when I returned to the Imperial Capital.
Continuous use of transfer magic. Considering that I don’t know how the situation will develop it was
a necessary expense despite how costly it was. With this, even if Sokol moves, there should be no
problem and I also managed to secure a force that can move to our aid in case of emergency.
“Welcome back. Al-sama.”
“Yeah, I’m back. That being said, I still can’t rest yet.”
Saying so, I picked up a brush and spread a piece of paper on the table.
Even if we have more force to move at our disposal from Trau-niisan’s help, we must protect Rupert.
“If it’s my eldest brother’s aides then it should be [Those Two]. Christa should be in safe hands.”
“Those two?”
“Yeah, Trau-niisan summoned my eldest brother’s aides to protect Christa. My eldest brother did have
many subordinates that he could call his close aides but there are only a few people who swear their
loyalty to Trau-niisan as well.”
Truthfully speaking, the subordinates of the Crown Prince Wilhelm were fascinated by the Crown
Prince himself, they didn’t care about his blood or his family. That thought was shared among many of
his subordinates. That was why many of them chose to retire.
Among them, there were two that swore their loyalty not only to the Crown Prince but to Trau-niisan
as well.
The two were brothers, the sons of the Empress’s cousin. That makes them the Crown Prince and
Trau-niisan’s second cousins
As the Empress’s cousin, their mother, passed away earlier on in her life, the Empress summoned the
two to the castle to act as the Crown Prince’s playmates.
Thus, the two who grew up together like a family with the Empress, the Crown Prince, and Trau-niisan
became the Crown Prince’s first subordinates and have never left his side.
1485
Except for the time the Crown Prince headed out for his last campaign.
The two who were in service of the Crown Prince for many years heard the news of his passing
together with the Empress. Before the Crown Prince left for the north, the Empress had fallen ill and
he left the two with the Empress to look after her.
The two who regretted not being able to protect the Crown Prince, their important lord, and brother,
refused to serve under Father and disappeared.
The only ones who knew where they went were probably the Empress and Trau-niisan.
Their name was,
“The Raiffeisen brothers. They are the Crown Prince’s second cousins, his closest aides. The older
brother was a brave general while the younger brother was a brilliant staff officer. The Crown Prince
had many military exploits in his days but every single one of them involved these two. For the Crown
Prince and Trau-niisan, they are more like a family rather than a subordinate. They are kind of like
step-brothers to them.”
“I have heard their names before. They were called the Wings of the Crown Prince right?”
“Yeah, if those two were by his side, the Crown Prince would still be alive. They were both loyal and
clever after all.”
“If those people come to help us then we can rest easy right!”
“It is certainly encouraging but we can not be at ease yet.”
The two have once refused to serve under Father.
I don’t think that they can immediately come running to Trau-niisan’s aid whenever he asked them to.
Trau-niisan is probably thinking the same thing. I’m sure that they just happened to be in the capital
for the festival so they lend Trau-niisan their help. That should be how it went.
But in that case, their actions will be a step behind.
“If they can make it, Christa’s safety can be guaranteed but until they arrive, we have to count on Trau-
niisan alone.”
“Uhh……will that really be alright?”
“Even if he looks like that he is pretty good with the sword and is very quick-witted. He has the same
education as my eldest brother after all. I’m sure that he can keep up with your average soldiers. The
problem is when will Gordon start to move and how many generals will be on his side.”
The Imperial Army is being led by three Marshals.
1486
Two are stationed at the East and the West border respectively while the last one is in charge of
assisting the Emperor and acts as the Commanding General at the Imperial Capital.
Below them are the Generals who act as field commanders.
There are various types of generals such as honorary generals who don’t have their own army and
generals who lead elite troops but basically speaking, there is always one army under each general
that will mobilize at their order.
In other words, the more generals participating in Gordon’s plot, the greater the power Gordon has.
It would be too much to ask your average soldiers to judge whether their action is right or wrong.
After all, they were trained to treat their superior’s command as absolute.
If the generals order them to attack the Imperial Capital, albeit confused, most of them will obey.
Moreover, many generals are participating in the ceremony.
As a matter of course, those who managed to climb up to the rank of General all have strong
subordinates at their side.
Trau-niisan would have a hard time facing such opponents.
“How many generals does Al-sama think will cooperate with His Highness Gordon?”
“In the worst case, all the generals in the Capital will turn into our enemy.”
“All of them!?”
“It’s a matter of possibility. The Imperial Army is a gathering of low-ranking people who can’t become
heir to the noble houses. Their wish is to be successful in their career so they want the Emperor to
give them preferential treatment.”
“Are they saying that His Majesty has been neglecting the army?”
“It’s not that he has been neglecting them. It’s just that they want to be treated better. Currently, the
job of the Imperial Army is to guard the border. Nobles’ territories have their own Knights to take care
of their business while the adventurers are taking care of what’s left. That being the case, war is
needed for them to achieve something. However, in recent years, my father is reluctant to go to war.
It’s nothing strange. He did lose his eldest son in a war with another country after all.”
Father is also a human being.
If it was due to the succession war he would have made peace with it. After all, it is a tradition of the
Empire.
That was how Father became the Emperor in the first place. Even so, losing his son in a war with
another country is a different matter.
1487
An emperor is not allowed to wage war in anger.
My father has spent the last few years trapping his anger and sadness inside his heart.
He would look soft in the eyes of the extremists in the Imperial Army.
“He isn’t even allowed to be sad….? His Majesty.”
“He is. It is just difficult to keep everyone satisfied. Civilians who think that war is only a waste of
money would appreciate Father’s recent stance but the Imperial Army is on the opposite end. An
emperor is someone who can balance those with different ideas to coexist. Ever since the death of my
eldest brother, Father has been acting off balance.”
It was necessary to find some way to resolve the dissatisfaction of the army.
In the vampire case in the east, it was possible for him to mobilize the army instead of the Imperial
Knights. However, Father found the Imperial Knights more useful.
It is only natural in terms of ability but from the Army’s perspective, that only caused them to be more
dissatisfied.
“That’s why it is possible that all of the generals might turn into our enemy. I can hardly trust anyone
from the imperial Army anymore.”
“B, But! If all the Generals inside the Capital turned into our enemy then—……!”
“We will be outnumbered. The Imperial Capital Garrison under Leo’s jurisdiction and the Imperial
Knights. Together with them, a small number of forces will be on Father’s side. The Imperial Capital
Garrison’s duty is to maintain the security in the Imperial Capital during peacetime. Even then, that
jurisdiction is shared with the City Guards under the Minister of Justice. That’s why there are quite a
few divisions of the army stationed inside the Capital. They were gathered in the case of an
emergency.”
“The swords that are supposed to point toward our enemy are pointing at ourselves……”
“That’s right. But their eyes will surely be focused on Father. They are probably ordered to capture
him at any cost. And Father will resist. We are the force that moves behind the scene in their conflict.”
If the other side devotes their all to crush us we wouldn’t have enough power to deal with them. But
that development is impossible.
After all, their first and foremost goal is Father.
“Al-sama……somehow, it sounds like you are using His Majesty as a decoy though…..?”
“Obviously. That’s exactly what I am saying.”
“Won’t His Majesty be angry at you…..?”
1488
“He won’t complain as long as I can save his life in the end. It is not my job to protect Father in the first
place.”
“The Prime Minister is by His Majesty’s side so I think it will be okay but…….”
Finne worriedly whispered so.
It can’t be helped.
The scale of the problem this time is different than before.
This is not a matter of our faction alone but the fate of the entire Empire, the Emperor’s life is betting
on it after all.
Still,
“There’s no use worrying. We will move from inside the castle while Father will deal with the
problems outside. As long as that is all we can do, we only need to do what we can. When Gordon
starts his revolt, he will try to seal the Imperial Capital. Our role is to break that seal.”
“Then what will happen after the seal is broken?”
“I am counting on Leo for that. If I can move freely as Silver, I can bring Duke Kleinert’s army to the
Capital but Leo’s force will be important in this.”
“You are expecting Leo-sama to rescue Leticia-sama and come back to help us at the Imperial
Capital……? I do not doubt his success but would the problems on his end be resolved so quickly?”
“I don’t know that. But we can do nothing but believe and wait for him. We are already surrounded by
our enemy after all. Even if we can manage to break their encirclement, nothing will change. Our
ultimate solution is to wait for outside help.”
While saying so, I write down my future plans on paper.
There is nothing I can do but to think up as many patterns as possible.
While I was doing so, Finne offered me tea.
“Let’s do our best together!”
“Yeah, I’m counting on you.”
Saying so, I continue moving my pen.
1489
SPT Chapter 223
Special Thanks to ItzMuffins for the coffee (Again)!! lol
Now, for our monthly sponsors!!
Praise ye, my patrons!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
Corrupted
AlfonzoM6
Main Heroine Tier
Jasper Yu
Jerry Gergich
DigitalPanic
Guess
Tyler Fukuda
Sean N
Shanks
Sub Heroine Tier
Anon A Moose
Stefania Barbieri
Artaril
Loh Joo Hoe
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
1490
Tinsoldaat
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Kei
Nelson N
Oh, by the way, it’s coffee appreciation day……
Dawn
Before Dawn.
I gathered Mia, Alois, and Finne in my room.
“Sorry for summoning you so early in the morning.”
“Uuuu…..I’m finally free from the maid job…….”
“Good work. Mia-san.”
“That was really tiring!! That Head Maid! She was as strict as a demon you know!”
Mia was half-crying in her maid outfit.
She clings to Finne for comfort and starts complaining about the Head Maid.
“The bedsheets are unkempt! The room is not well cleaned! Who cares about those tiny details!”
“You are a castle maid right now after all. It’s normal for the Head Maid to care about those small
details.”
“You knew that and still sent me in!? My heart is in tatters even before the fight starts, you know!”
“Even if it’s in tatters, a contract is a contract. I am giving you appropriate compensation right. Just
work harder.”
“There’s a demon here too!? The Head Maid is one, and now the Prince too!! WAHHHHH!! Finne-sam–
a!!”
Saying so, Mia started crying on Finne’s chest.
Seeing her like that, Finne comforts her with a bitter smile.
Seriously, I can’t advance the talk at all.
When I was thinking so, Alois opened his mouth.
1491
“Your Highness. Should I act as your escort today?”
Even though he is only in his early teens, Alois is so much more mature than Mia.
The fact that he is confirming what he should do means that he already anticipates the future to some
extent.
“I thought about that but I’d like you to escort the Tenth Prince Rupert instead.”
“I am to escort the Tenth Prince? I have not acquainted myself with His Highness before though……”
“Christa and Rupert will not be acting as entertainers today and they are still young. Father will not
show them the fighting tournament in the arena. That being the case, the two will stay back in the
castle but if Gordon starts his revolt, he will aim to seize the castle first. If we can’t ensure their safety,
the two will be taken hostages.”
“I see, I understand your reason. Will Your Highness Arnold be escorting Her Highness Christa
personally?”
“No, Christa’s escort will be handled by the Fourth Prince Traugott.”
When I told him so, Alois showed a slightly uneasy expression.
Will she be alright leaving him in Trau-niisan’s care? That was what kind of expression he was
making.
Well, it is probably inevitable given his reputation.
When I thought so, Mia raised her voice as though she just remembered something.
“The Fourth Prince!? That big prince!?”
“Nn? You met him before?”
“No! That Prince! When we passed by each other! He said that I was too old you know! I am still
bursting with youth okay!!”
“That person’s hobbies and taste are a little particular you see. Well, he does have the ability so you
don’t have to worry about him.”
“I have nothing to say if Your Highness says so but……what are you going to do about your escort,
Your Highness?”
Alois’s words made me smile.
It’s natural for him to ask so huh.
What would I do if the castle became a battlefield?
1492
Finne is being escorted by Mia. Christa is in Trau-niisan’s care. Rupert will be protected by Alois.
Each of them has someone assigned to protect.
“I can take care of two people by myself!”
“I don’t expect that much from you.”
“*GAN *(Desuwa)!?”
I immediately turned down Mia who made her offer triumphantly.
Mia who was turned down in an instant is having a shocked expression on her face.
Seeing her like that, Finne starts to comfort Mia.
“He meant that you don’t have to overdo it by yourself you know.”
“It didn’t sound like that at all!”
“Al-sama’s vocabulary is limited, you see. It will be okay. Al-sama already has an escort after all. Isn’t
that right?”
Finne guides the talk.
I nodded at her.
Then, a person appeared at the front of the door.
“No need to worry. The prince’s escort—I will take care of it.”
Saying so, a mysterious person wearing a gray robe that covers himself from head to toes appeared.
With the hood over his head, no one can see his face. No matter how you look at him, he looks
suspicious.
However, the moment he saw that person, Alois’s face brightened up.
“Grau!”
“I am glad that you are well. Alois.”
“Who is this?”
“A wandering strategist, Grau. the man who defeated 10,000 Imperial troops together with Alois.”
“I heard that there was a strategist appeared in the battle of Gers but……it was you?”
“Indeed.”
“I can not trust someone like you. Especially when you use illusion magic in broad daylight like this.”
1493
As expected of Mia huh.
She immediately saw through the illusion of Grau that I created.
“I do apologize for my rudeness. But the Imperial Army is quite hostile toward me. I need to be
cautious when I appear like this. I am not even a noble after all.”
“…….Can we really trust such a suspicious person?”
“That’s quite a harsh evaluation.”
“I am confident in seeing through people! I’m sure that this person has a twisted character!!”
Mia said so as she pointed at Grau.
Naturally, her words were, in a way, directed to me so I can’t help but make a bitter smile.
“M, Mia-san! Grau is a trustworthy person! I guarantee it!”
“Alois-sama is being deceived! I know this by instinct! This man is the type that can laugh at others’
misfortunes!”
“Wai!? Mia-san!?”
Alois, who knows that Grau’s identity is Silver, panicked. On the other hand, Finne who knows that
Silver is me is giggling at the situation.
Mia doesn’t seem to trust Grau but that doesn’t matter right now.
“Mia, you don’t have to trust Grau. Each of you has a role to play so you only need to focus on your
task.”
“You are saying that you trust him?”
“At the very least I am sure that he is not on Gordon’s side. Right now, that is enough for me. We are
shorthanded. We have a lot to protect after all.”
“…….I understand. But I do not trust him okay!?”
“Yes, that’s fine.”
Saying so, I started summarizing the situation.
“Today is the last day of the festival. A large-scale fighting tournament will be held at the arena. It is
where all the eyes of the Imperial Capital will be focused on. Gordon will use that timing to seize the
castle. We will first take control of the castle, ensuring its safety. That is the first stage of our plan.
Alois will take care of Rupert, Trau-niisan will protect Christa, and Mia will look after Finne. I am
counting on you.”
1494
“As you command.”
“I got it!”
“If that stage is clear, we will move on to the second stage. Gordon will activate the Celestial Sphere,
the strongest defense mechanism of the Imperial Capital. The heart of that barrier is this castle. They
need to set up the jewels first then have a member of the Imperial Family activate it. Once activated,
we will be completely cut off from the outside world.”
“That’s right. That’s why those who can move here will be the ones who secure those jewels.”
Mia frowned at Grau’s words.
However, she didn’t complain because she knows that it was not her place to speak.
“Exactly. I and Grau will be hiding in the castle to give you instructions. You can use up to five highest-
purity jewels to activate the Celestial Sphere but you can activate it with three. I’m sure that Gordon
can prepare that much. At most he probably prepared three or four of them. If he manages to activate
it, he can completely cut us out from outside aids after all.”
“In other words, if we can take one or two of them away, he can not activate it?”
“Correct. Well, considering the force we have outside, taking one would already be enough.”
Elna’s holy sword should be able to destroy the Celestial Sphere that is being supplied with only three
jewels.
If the Celestial Sphere is destroyed, the jewels used to supply it with magic power will be decimated
along with it but there’s no use being frugal here.
Gordon would be wary of that so he probably didn’t only prepare three.
If it is activated with four, it would be tough even for the holy sword. This is why we need to work
from the inside.
“After the castle is seized, it would be very difficult to snatch those jewels as they will be under strict
guard. I am well aware of the impossibility of this job. You will probably have to risk your life for it.
There are only a few people I can rely on while we have so many enemies to face. Even so, this must be
done. Sorry but—-I want you to give your lives for me.”
What a convenient thing for me to say.
Even so, I can do nothing but ask this of them.
Everyone nods to my selfish request.
Then, the sun starts to illuminate the castle and the morning ray shines into the room.
“Alright—we are commencing the secret maneuver.”
1495
Thus, we started moving in the shadows.
1496
SPT Chapter 224
Final one of this chapter…..next we have character introductions to prep ourselves for the upcoming
conflict.
-Mr.Graverobber
Instead of the Hero
The fighting tournament will be held from noon.
Until then, events will be held in the festival which will be the liveliest at its climax, the fighting
tournament.
Originally, with the free time before the tournament, VIPs and the princes and princesses assigned to
them would go out to enjoy the festival.
However, each of the dignitaries is not so lively today. This is probably due to the Saint’s abduction
that happened the day before.
After all, it would not be strange if they themselves become the second or third victim.
Meanwhile, there is a certain VIP that is lazily rolling around in my room.
“S-O-T-I-R-E-D”
“Yes, yes. Thank you for your hard work.”
Saying so, I turned my eyes at Orihime who was lying on the sofa.
Orihime finished repairing the barrier in the throne room which was destroyed by the Imperial Flag.
In exchange, she had to stay up all night so she seemed to be quite tired.
Originally, there was supposed to be an official thank you from the Empire’s side but Orihime turned it
down and chose to laze around in my room instead.
According to the person herself, she can’t feel at ease when she is staying somewhere she is not used
to.
I have to keep it a secret from her that the thought of asking her ‘what about your own room’ did cross
my mind.
“I don’t feel any gratitude from you at all.”
“I am grateful you know. Very much so.”
1497
“I can’t feel anything like that from your words at all.”
Normally she would make a fuss by now but she stayed lying on the sofa this time.
She is probably really tired.
The throne room is where the Emperor is. It was urgent to rebuild the barrier that played a big role in
his security.
That’s why Orihime pushed herself to finish it.
For Orihime, it seems that fine-tuning a number of barriers is more mentally tiring than creating a big
one.
It seems the Empire really is in her debt this time.
“Then how would you like me to convey my gratitude?”
“U-mu……you must worship me more. In other words, praise me.”
“Even if you told me to praise you though……”
The current Orihime is exhausted and is not as energetic as her usual self.
It is no exaggeration to say that Orihime’s difficult personality is compensated by how energetic she is.
Orihime who isn’t energetic is just a self-important girl.
While thinking that there is nothing to compliment her about, I focused my eyes on her tail.
Orihime’s tail usually expresses her emotions in interesting ways but perhaps because she is tired
right now, it is only limping down.
“This has been on my mind for a while but……I think you have a good tail there.”
“Mumu! As expected of you, Arnold! So you have eyes for the good stuff after all! This tail is one of my
charm points you know!”
“Yeah, yup. Right.”
She is much happier about it than I thought.
What should I do, I blurted out a compliment on a whim so it would trouble me if she asks what is so
good about it.
“What do you think is good about it!? For me, I think that it feels very good to touch but some people
praise me for its shape you know!”
“Uhh……the shape I guess. It is kinda plump and nice after all.”
1498
“Umu! You are pretty good at complimenting me aren’t you!”
If this makes me good at complimenting others then this world would be full of compliments by now
though.
Maybe it’s just Orihime who tends to take things at her own convenience. She probably took my
random compliment and converted it to some wonderful praise in her brain.
Well, if that’s what she thinks then it’s fine. It’s better than having her in a bad mood after all.
“Excuse me. Al-sama, Orihime-sama.”
“OHH! Finne!”
Seeing Finne entering the room, Orihime jumped up.
She then hugged Finne and dragged her toward the sofa.
On Finne’s hands was a tray of sweets.
“When you are tired, sweets will always cheer you up after all!”
Saying so, Orihime sits on the sofa with Finne and begins eating the sweets.
She is eating them so fast that I thought that she would choke on it. And of course, she does.
“Guh!?”
“Yes, here, please drink some water.”
Finne, who had prepared the water in advance, promptly handed it to Orihime who received it and
vigorously poured it down her throat.
When she finally got her breathing in order, Orihime started eating the sweets again.
“Slow down a little will you.”
“I won’t! If I can use this chance to recover a little then I have to make full use of it!”
“Are you planning to participate in the tournament or something……..”
While I was astounded, Finne looked at Orihime with a smile.
Then just like that, time goes by.
I thought it would be good if this peaceful time continued but that is not the reality.
As noon approached, the entire Imperial Capital, not to mention the castle, began to get busy.
“Excuse me. Your Highness Arnold, Your Grace, Finne-sama. May I ask for your plan in the afternoon?”
1499
The Imperial Knight who was on our escort duty asked so.
Finne will of course remain in the castle. Her excuse is that she is worrying about Christa.
Christa was in danger due to the Dark Elves’ attack. No one can complain if she wants to stay at
Christa’s side.
The problem is me and Orihime.
I thought that Orihime would quietly stay in her room but now that she has become a little more
energetic, she is getting ready to head to the arena.
I would like to stay in the castle if possible but if Orihime heads out, I have to follow her as I am her
entertainer.
Well, if I am inside the Imperial Capital even if the Celestial Sphere is activated, I can freely use
transfer magic inside it and I do have ways to move around too.
Still, it is easier for me to execute my plan here and if I am with her, I will have to find a suitable
excuse to slip away naturally.
With Sebas away from my side, it would be difficult to deceive her.
If possible, I want her to say that she doesn’t want to go.
“Of course, I will go see the tournament.”
“I will be visiting Her Highness Christa.”
“Understood. We will prepare a carriage so please let us know when Your Grace is ready to go.”
Saying so, the Imperial Knight withdrew.
Well, there’s no other choice I guess.
“Well, shall we?”
“Hmm? I am planning to go alone though?”
“Haa? There’s no way that’s happening right? I am your entertainer after all.”
“You can save the sleep talk when you are actually asleep. Before being my entertainer, you are [This
Empire’s Prince] right?”
Her words took me by surprise.
Orihime stared straight at me and quietly smiled.
1500
“There’s a disturbing scent lingering around this city. It’s an unpleasant smell. Even when your
younger brother left to rescue the Saint, instead of disappearing, the scent is getting stronger. You are
planning to deal with it right?”
“Orihime……”
“Your face clearly says that you want to be in the castle. If you have to stay in the castle to deal with it
then even though it will be lonely, I will go alone. The current me can’t provide much help if something
happens in the castle after all. To be honest, it’s already hard to stand up like this. I can’t move well
and it would take my all to erect a barrier right now. I would only be a nuisance right?”
Indeed.
I don’t know what would happen if she is in perfect condition but right now Orihime is exhausted.
This is Orihime who holds the title of the Celestial Princess. She can create as many barriers as she
pleases but, physical fatigue is not something she can ignore. If her strength runs out when she is
deploying a barrier then the number of hostages will increase.
This incident will not last only a short time.
In the first place, unlike the Hero, the Celestial Princess is not a warrior.
She can’t push herself too much.
“You don’t have to push yourself. If it’s hard then you can just stay here.”
“I am not pushing myself. If you have something that you must do here then I also have something I
must do at the arena.”
“But you are exhausted, right? You just repaired the barrier in the throne room in a single night. You
can rest. This is a problem of the Empire.”
“Oya? Was I under a misunderstanding? I thought that Mizuho and the Empire are on friendly terms
though? The problem of our ally is our problem as well. Rest assured, helping the Empire once or
twice is no big deal.”
“…….”
“This is just my selfishness. I simply want to help you. I don’t want to see you making such a sad
expression. If I can not help you here then I will go to where I can. Unfortunately, the Hero is away.
Instead of that Hero, I will protect the thing that you can’t. I won’t let anyone lay even a single finger
on your father and the citizens.”
She’s putting up a strong front.
There is no way that the current her can create such a powerful barrier.
Even so, I have no choice but to accept Orihime’s help.
1501
“Someday…..I will definitely return this debt.”
“Umu! I will count on it!”
Saying so, Orihime waved her hand and left the room with a smile.
If nothing happened, I would be an insolent prince who sent a VIP to attend the event alone. But
Orihime also felt that something was off.
Something will definitely happen.
“…..she is kind isn’t she. Orihime-sama.”
“Yeah, that’s right.”
If someone from another country is willing to go so far for us, I can not afford to let this end in failure.
“We will definitely prevent it. Absolutely.”
“Yes!”
1502
SPT Chapter 225
Beginning of the new part. Damn, the build up…..
Also, Genshin Impact has consumed my life……send help……….
-Mr.Graverobber
The Noon Bell Tolls
As noon approached, the arena was filled with people
Emperor Johannes, who was watching the situation in the VIP seat located at the highest point in the
arena, sighed at the sight of his missing VIPs.
“Who has joined us so far?”
“We have the guests from the Principality of Albatro and Rondine together with our guest from Sokol,
Your Majesty.”
“The United Kingdom and the Dominion are absent huh……”
“Yes. Both of them were asked to stay in their room as important witnesses for Leticia-sama’s
abduction but it seems that they are dissatisfied with this treatment. Well, perhaps they simply do not
like being suspected as criminals.”
“Hmph, they should have known this would happen given the relationship between the Kingdom and
the United Kingdom…….”
Johannes said so and asked for the remaining guest.
“Wendy-dono and the Saint obviously can’t attend the event today but what about Celestial Princess-
dono?”
Wendy, who is their guest from the Elf Village, is currently staying in her room in the castle.
Her action was restricted and her situation is close to being under house arrest but considering the
size of the case she was involved in, this is already a generous treatment.
Leticia, the Saint on the other hand was abducted and currently not even in the Imperial Capital.
It was inevitable that the two would not be here.
However, Orihime the Celestial Princess is different.
1503
“I haven’t received any report yet but I forcefully asked her to restore the barrier inside the throne
room so……..”
“Didn’t I tell you that such a thing can be put off.”
“We can not possibly delay that, Your Majesty.”
“What would you do if she says that she won’t be coming because she is tired? The people would get
suspicious from the fact that the Saint is missing alone but if even the Celestial Princess is absent too
they will start to worry, you know?”
“Even so, the restoration of that barrier is our top priority. Besides, if the tournament smoothly
proceeds, the people’s anxiety would be minimized to some extent anyway.”
Despite problems after problems keep presenting themselves, the reason why they didn’t consider the
possibility of canceling this event was to not make their citizens anxious.
It was the result of the discussions among the Emperor’s close aides.
Also, the fact that Eric, the Minister of Foreign Affairs, guaranteed to everyone that Sokol would not
invade the Empire did play a big part.
If the Sokol empire is not involved in this incident, the meaning it holds is that their opponents are
only the Kingdom, the United Kingdom, and the Dominion.
If that is the case then it will fall into their already predicted scenario so there is nothing worth
panicking about.
Johannes has that much confidence in the defense of his borders. The confidence in the ability of the
elites he has assigned to protect them.
“That is certainly true……”
Johannes sighs at Franz’s words.
For Johannes, this tournament is a big event that will conclude the 25th anniversary of his coronation.
It also serves to allow his people to forget all the recent incidents in the Empire.
For that sake, he had invited well-known guests from other countries to reassure them.
If they do not show their faces at this tournament then it would make him doubt why he had invited
them here in the first place.
When Johannes was thinking so, the people suddenly raised their voices.
“What’s happening?”
“It seems that Celestial Princess-sama has arrived.”
1504
Orihime entered the arena while making herself as noticeable as possible.
After she waved and smiled at the people, she walked toward Johannes.
“Thanks for coming, Celestial Princess-dono.”
“Umu, It was pretty tiring. Your Majesty. I was up all night you know.”
“We apologize for the inconvenience, you have my gratitude.”
“I will accept plenty of your gratitude later. For the time being, treat me amicably. We have to put up
the show to distract them from the Saint’s absence.”
Saying so, Orihime pointed at the seat next to the Emperor.
Normally, this place only has two chairs each for the Emperor and the Empress.
Orihime is telling the Emperor to let her sit here as well.
Her aim is to show the favorable relationship between the Celestial Princess and the Emperor. If they
have something to talk about within their sight, the people will not worry about someone who isn’t
here.
“I see. Thank you again. Franz, prepare a chair.”
“Yes, as you wish.”
With that said, a luxurious chair is prepared next to Johannes.
Orihime sits down there and immediately bounced on it to check its comfort.
“Umu, so fluffy! The view is great too. It’s a special seat!”
Saying so, Orihime starts looking around.
Then, she noticed something.
“Mumu? Where is the Knight Commander that is always with you, Your Majesty.”
“I left Alida at the castle. Franz was the one who arranged that. I left the preparation today in his care.”
“Fumu, is it also related to how you want me to fix the barrier in such a hurry?”
“My deepest apology but I can not give you the details as it is related to security concerns.”
“I see. Then with the Knight Commander away, the protection around His Majesty will be thin, no?
Can’t you at least tell me something about that?”
“My apology.”
1505
“Sorry, Celestial Princess-dono. My Prime Minister is a little inflexible.”
“Mind not. A prime minister has to be secretive like this. If the Empire’s Prime Minister is not this
secretive then it would be boring.”
“Thank you very much for your understanding. Excuse me for changing the subject but where is His
Highness Arnold? Celestial Princess-sama.”
Al who is supposed to be Orihime’s entertainer is nowhere to be seen.
Franz looked around as he thought that he might be mingling with other guests but he seems to not be
here.
“Arnold huh. I left him in the castle.”
“You left him? Did that stupid son of mine did something again?”
“Arnold is doing well. I have been very entertained thanks to him. I left him there because I planned to
sit next to Your Majesty from the beginning. If I sit next to Your Majesty, he would have nowhere to sit
after all. I was only being mindful.”
“I see. Thank you for your consideration.”
“It’s me who is grateful. Arnold took good care of me. I don’t think that other princes would be able to
do the same. I took a liking to his company, you know. You chose a good prince to take care of me.”
Saying so, Orihime shows a wide smile.
Johannes was a little surprised at her evaluation of Arnold but he immediately smiled back.
“I see, I see. He is a lot like me after all.”
“Absolutely. Especially your whimsical part, Your Majesty.”
Hearing that, Johannes glares at Franz but Franz simply pretends not to see that.
While they were having such a conversation, the Empress, Brunhilde who was out greeting the guests,
returned to the room.
“My, Celestial Princess-sama.”
“Greetings, Your Majesty the Empress. I am sorry for disturbing you here but please allow this
selfishness of mine.”
“What are you saying. You are very welcome here, Celestial Princess-sama.”
Brunhilde welcomed Orihime but her true feeling can not be ascertained.
However, no one here cares about that.
1506
Johannes would prioritize Orihime’s proposal over Brunhilde’s feelings and so does Franz. Orihime is
well aware of that so she doesn’t give much consideration to Brunhilde either.
Furthermore, even Brunhilde herself understood that her feelings are only a secondary concern here.
An empress is originally that kind of existence. Even if she directly shows her displeasure, Johannes
would mercilessly move her seat even further away from him.
The gap between them has widened even more from the time with Laurenz.
In that slightly tense atmosphere, Orihime heard the sound of a bell toll.
It is the bell that announces the arrival of noon.
“It’s time huh. Well then, let’s get started.”
Johannes raises his hand while sitting on his chair.
With that as the signal, the knights lined up and blew the horns.
The sound of the horns echoes throughout the Imperial Capital.
After the sound settled, Johannes stood up from his seat and addressed his people in a loud voice.
“Hear me! I hereby announce the beginning of the Imperial Fighting Tournament!!”
A big cheer echoed.
While listening to their cheer, Orihime muttered to herself in a small voice.
“I pray for your luck…….Arnold.”
After that Orihime slowly sharpens her nerves.
After all, the unpleasant smell is now stronger than ever.
1507
SPT Chapter 226
5 star, 5 star, wherever are you……
-Mr.Graverobber
Rendezvous Point
“The noon bell huh.”
“ALRIGHT, LET’S GO I’M READY! !”
“They won’t be moving immediately you know.”
Mia who is here in my room as Finne’s escort is a little too enthusiastic.
She is ready for combat with her bow in hands. It’s alright that she’s being enthusiastic but if she is
this energetic now I am worried that she would just exhaust herself during the real deal.
“Why so?”
“Because the tournament has just begun right Al-sama?”
“Exactly.”
I affirm Finne’s answer.
That being said, Mia still tilted her head.
“If it has already begun then they should have already started moving, no? The castle’s security is now
considerably weaker because of it right?”
“Just because the tournament has begun doesn’t mean that they would enact their plan immediately.
The reason they would choose this timing is that the tournament will attract attention. The
tournament just started. If they want to move unnoticed then they would choose the time when the
people’s eyes focus solely on the tournament.”
“A secret maneuver is not meant to be seen by others. Is that right?”
“If they don’t do that then it wouldn’t be a secret after all.”
When I smiled and answered Finne, Mia whispered “He’s making an evil smile again”.
She isn’t my secret sharer for nothing huh.
“Then we should quietly wait for them to move?”
1508
“We will do what we can. Alois already went to Rupert’s side and Trau-niisan is already with Christa.
Our escorts are ready. How this goes will be depending on our opponent’s moves but I already
predicted it to some extent.”
“So roundabout! What should I do then!? Can’t I just find the enemy and immediately knock them
out!?”
‘Argh, seriously!’ said Mia as she hit the table.
Takedown the obviously bad guy! That’s how Mia fought so far. To her, my fighting style probably
seems roundabout.
Mia is the Chivalrous Thief. She finds the bad guy, ambushes them, and lays down the punishment. Her
actions are straightforward.
However, right now we are moving behind the scenes. She probably can’t get used to it immediately.
“Mia-san. Please calm down.”
“Finne-sama too!? The battle has already begun you know!? Shouldn’t we take the initiative and
quickly take down the enemy!?”
“We still haven’t identified the enemy yet. Without any proof, attacking someone will only cause
confusion in the castle. If we do that then we will be giving the initiative to the enemy instead.”
“That is……”
“Please be at ease. Al-sama is properly thinking about that. Isn’t that right?”
Finne smiles and directs the conversation toward me.
Nodding to her, I immediately started explaining.
I wouldn’t want to be interrupted again after all.
“The enemy’s primary goal is to take control of the castle as a whole. After that, they will move in to
secure hostages for themselves. Lastly, they will head to activate the Celestial Sphere, that’s where the
problem lies.”
“What is the problem?”
“To activate the Celestial Sphere, you need multiple highest purity jewels. Another name for those
jewels is the Rainbow Celestial Jewels. They are national treasure-class jewels that colorfully shine
like a rainbow. The magic power each of them contains is tremendous. They need to procure three of
that and place it in a specific location to activate the Celestial Sphere.”
“So it would be hard for them to get those national-treasure-class things?”
1509
“Even Gordon, who is a general of the Imperial Army and a candidate for the throne, will probably
only have one of his own.”
“Then he can’t activate it right?”
“The Celestial Sphere is the most important defense Mechanism of the Imperial Capital. Naturally, the
Rainbow Celestial Jewels are already prepared here in this castle.”
It is only natural to have them on hand so that the Celestial Sphere can be activated at any time.”
The problem is where they are.
“I know one place that definitely has one.”
“Hou? Where is that?”
The existence of the Rainbow Celestial Jewels is like a national secret.
It would be one thing if you are a minister or a general but it is not information that Finne can
personally obtain.
That’s why I am quite interested in her confidence.
“I know it too! It’s the treasure vault isn’t it!?”
“They won’t put it in such a standing out place.”
“Why!? It would be easier to put important things all together isn’t it!”
“Their value is different from the other treasures. From a strategic point of view, they are not a simple
valuable object. There must be some that His Majesty can access at any moment. That’s why I am sure
that there must be at least one in the throne room.”
“What is your basis for that?”
“I think that if it’s not there, His Excellency the Prime Minister wouldn’t be in such a hurry to have
Orihime-sama fix the barrier yesterday.”
I quietly nodded to Finne.
As I thought, Finne’s ability to assess the situation has been refined.
If she can do this much then I don’t need to worry about leaving Mia with her.
“Correct. There are two Rainbow Celestial Jewels at the throne room. Well, I don’t know where they
are exactly though.”
“Then we can just protect the throne room right!?”
1510
“There’s no need for us to guard the throne room ourselves. The strongest swordswoman in the
Empire is already on that.”
“So the reason why the Knight Commander is not by His Majesty’s side is to protect the throne room.”
“I can’t think of any reason other than that. Well, Father’s security will be thin but I think that the
Prime Minister probably has some measures in place regarding that.”
Alida is currently the strongest fighter in the Imperial Capital.
With the barrier restored and Alida’s presence, the security of the two jewels in the throne room is
guaranteed.
That being the case, there are three remaining in the castle. Even if Gordon prepared one by himself,
he would only have four at most. Now we can avoid the scenario where the Celestial Sphere is
activated at full-power.
The Prime Minister probably thinks that the remaining Rainbow Celestial Jewels can be protected by
the other Imperial Knights.
As evidence, in addition to the first corp, two more corps stay behind in the castle.
Only the fifth corp and below are at the Emperor’s side. Their number is not reassuring and the arena
is not exactly a place that can easily be defended.
In a sense, Father’s security details are as thin as the time when the vampires attacked.
Even so, the reason why the place with the most protection right now is the castle is to prevent the
Celestial Sphere from being activated. After all, once it is activated, he can not expect any external
reinforcements nor can he escape in case of emergency.
I could say that the Prime Minister has come up with a solid measure this time.
“Then we don’t have anything to do right?”
“There’s no way that’s the case. We have to protect the other jewels as much as possible while
escorting the other possible hostages from the enemy. First, we must ascertain an escape route then
evacuate the possible hostages to a safe place. We need to start on these two things.”
“There are other possible hostages?”
“There are. They won’t work against the Emperor but…….they are valuable enough to be used as a
bargaining chip to the people involved in this.”
“The Consorts in the Inner Palace right?”
“Yes. My mother is of course a target but that includes the other consorts as well. Moreover, there is
my sister in law. My sister-in-law is Alida’s elder sister while my mother who was originally a
1511
commoner is highly popular among the people. If the Emperor abandons them, people will grow to
distrust him.”
“ARGH! It’s getting confusing again! Can’t you just say that you want us to save your mother!?”
Mia hit the table again.
Seeing that, Finne bitterly smiled.
“That’s how the Imperial Family is. We have the duty to protect the Empire over our own family. Even
if that is how we really feel, our personal feelings cannot be prioritized.”
I decided to protect the Imperial Capital in Leo place.
That’s why I didn’t attach any escort to my mother.
I don’t even know whether the maids at the Inner Palace can help her survive through the attack.
When I was thinking so, Mia strongly hit the table again.
“Stop saying such pathetic things already!! There’s no way that a person who can’t even protect their
own family can protect their country! You think so too right!? Finne-sama!”
“Yes. I think so as well.”
“There, see! If you won’t say it no matter what then, FINE! I don’t need your permission, I can just save
her by myself! You can at least give me approval for that right!?”
Mia strongly said so.
A Chivalrous Thief has declared that she would take on a country.
Not only does she have a strong sense of justice, but she also possesses the willingness to believe that
her justice is correct.
She is a person worthy of respect.
I didn’t want to put Finne at risk too much but even if I stopped her, she would do it anyway without
my permission.
I’m grateful.
“——-I will leave her to you.”
“Alright, leave her to me!”
“Then we will be heading to the Inner Palace first. Shall we meet up after we finish rescuing the
consorts?”
1512
“Yeah, that’s fine. We will rendezvous at the throne room.”
“The throne room!? Are you sane!? We will have nowhere to escape to at the top of the castle you
know!”
“The usual entrance will be blocked and the lower you go, the more enemies will be. As long as Alida is
guarding the throne room, that place is almost impossible to breakthrough. Gordon will probably not
send any more units there either. That’s why I chose the throne room.”
“I understand that the enemy will be thinner there but…..I doubt that the Knight Commander can
overcome such a difference in numbers. If we gather all the possible hostages at the throne room, I
think that they will surely send more reinforcement though?”
“There’s no problem. There is a secret escape route at the throne room. The ones who know about it
are me, the Prime Minister, and the Knight Commander. Other than them it would only be my father
alone.”
“Isn’t that the Emperor’s personal escape route!? How did you know about such a thing……?”
“Eleven years ago, Father told me about it himself. I had to hide in the throne room back then you see.”
It was when I was told to observe his meeting with the ambassador from the Sokol empire.
Father told me to hide at the entrance of that secret passage.
I didn’t even tell Leo about it.
Father told me that it was a man-to-man promise after all.
But that promise will have to expire today.
“I’m sure that he will forgive me.”
Muttering so, I got up from my chair.
It’s about time the enemy started to move.
If we stay in the room then we will be easily apprehended.
“Alright, it’s time to act.”
Saying so, we left the room.
1513
SPT Chapter 227
Argh…….so busy this week. I want to reach AR35 damnit!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Result of Playing Around
Three Imperial Knight Corps are guarding the castle.
The first corp protects the throne room while the other two were also stationed at key locations by
the Prime Minister.
That being said, the overall protection of the castle is being left to the army.
Originally, the Imperial Knights should occupy the majority of the castle defense but it can’t be helped
that they have to use the army as they have spread out to protect the Emperor and important
locations in the castle.
It must have been a tough decision for the Prime Minister.
Many among the Imperial Army favor Gordon. If possible he wouldn’t want to use them but since he
has no other choice, he assigned a general from the moderate faction for castle defense.
That General is General Estman. He is a sixty years old senior general.
He was one of the generals who were in charge of managing the army at the central part of the
Empire. People see him as a general who is always smiling.
In fact, that impression of him is not wrong. He is a person who loves the young soldiers like they
were his own grandchildren and cultivates them with his knowledge and experiences.
His reputation is also very favorable among the Empire’s people. He is one of the few that is not only
popular among the soldiers but the people as well. Naturally, this man is well trusted by my father.
However.
“He is with Gordon huh……..”
When I was heading to the Inner Palace with Finne and Mia, I muttered as I saw the soldiers gathered
in front of the stairs.
The soldiers are walking back and forth as if they are looking for something while keeping their eyes
on the stairs.
Moreover, they seem to be alert.
1514
To guard the castle, it is enough for them to patrol the already decided route and station a few soldiers
at key locations. It’s strange that they are so alert as they are searching for something like that.
“Enemy? Then I will blow them all away.”
“It will be difficult to move if we get caught at this stage. We will have to face a lot more soldiers until
we reach the Inner Palace you know.”
“That’s true. I have to get around them somehow.”
“So roundabout…..”
Mia is upset at mine and Finne’s assessment.
I’m sure that Mia’s ability can break through their defense and get us to the Inner Palace but we have
to keep in mind that we have to escort people on our way back as well.
At the very least, I don’t want to cause a fuss until we arrive at the Inner Palace.
“Is there any way to distract them?”
“What are we going to do after we distract them?”
“I want to enter the room on the other side of the aisle.”
“We can’t get downstairs that way you know?”
“It’s alright, I have a plan.”
“Then that’s easy.”
Saying so, Mia suddenly aims her bow out the nearby window.
She then shot out an arrow made of magic power without any sound.
I couldn’t understand what she was doing for a moment but when I heard a high-pitched sound on the
opposite end of the corridor, I understood her plan.
“WHAT WAS THAT!?”
“CHECK IT OUT, HURRY!!”
The soldiers’ eyes turned toward the sound.
Seeing that, Mia gives us a signal.
“Now!”
Slipped down the aisle, Mia opened the door of the targeted room without any sound and beckoned
me and Finne.
1515
We crossed the aisle as quietly as possible and managed to enter the room.
“What did you do Mia-san?”
“She curved the arrow she shot outside to let it go through another window. It must have broken
something.”
“That’s right. I confirmed that the other window was opened beforehand. It’s simple.”
Saying so, Mia asks, [Now, what are we doing next?].
Mia said that what she did was simple but it was by no means simple at all.
Although there are differences between magic bow and magic, the principle is not so different.
That’s why, theoretically, that feat can be done by a mage.
She managed to not only maintain the magic that has already left her sight but also accurately hit the
target location without hitting anything outside the castle.
Precise control and ability to grasp the surroundings. Furthermore, she calculated the amount of
magic power that allows the arrow to not disappear mid-flight, one could say that her ability to fine-
tune her power is superb. Not to mention that she accomplished all of that in an instant.
Her skill could be said to be godly.
I understand why Vermillion managed to elude the Dominion for so long.
You would have no way to defend against her if something like this hits you in the middle of the night
without any warning.
If you left your window open even just a little, your escort will be silently sniped down. Even if she
doesn’t have a direct line of sight, she can just curve her arrow to hit you.
In front of Mia, guards pretty much serve no purpose.
“What is it? Staring at my face like that?”
“No, I just think that you actually are pretty amazing.”
“What was that ‘actually’ for!? Didn’t you recruit me because you saw my ability!? That’s rude you
know! That’s too rude you know!!”
“I always know that Mia-san is an amazing person.”
“As expected of Finne-sama! Your eyes are certainly different from this biased prince!”
“If you only speak normally, I might have evaluated you correctly though.”
1516
“I told you that it was Ojii-sama who taught me to speak this way! The true lady that Ojii-sama met
must have spoken like this, no doubt!”
“I hope so. Was that Ojii-sama also the one who taught you the magic bow?”
“That’s right! My Ojii-sama is a great person you know!”
An old man who taught Mia huh.
Someone who can teach such a specialized skill like the magic bow to Mia and trained her to be so
skilled with a bow to this extent must not be some simple old man.
Thinking of the Master of Magic Bow, there is one person that comes to mind.that old man must be
someone related to that person. Mia as well.
This piqued my interest so I want to sit down and have a nice and long talk with her but unfortunately,
I have no such luxury right now.
“Well, I will have you tell me more about your Jii-san someday. For now, let’s hurry.”
“Hurry……even if you say that, the stairs are currently blocked, you know. I can go down from the
outside but since Finne-sama will be coming with me, that would be impossible right?”
“We can’t use that kind of plan. We don’t know who will be watching after all.”
Saying so, I started changing the order of the seven portraits hanging inside this room.
Unable to understand my action, Mia tilted her head.
“What are you doing?”
“A little game.”
“You start playing games at a time like this!?”
“Yeah, I’m playing. But sometimes, playing games can be useful as well.”
Saying so, I finished changing the order of the portraits.
Some of them are in the same position while some are in different positions.
When I confirmed that, I removed the portrait at the center.
Then, a hole that shouldn’t have been there earlier appeared behind the portrait.
Putting my hand in the hole, I pressed the switch that was inside.
In response, a hidden door appeared on the wall opposite the portrait.
“WhaWhaWha!?
1517
“This castle has undergone various renovations every time we have a new emperor. The new
emperors each add more secret passages and rooms in the shadows. Those hidden passages and
rooms weren’t all passed down properly.”
“How do you know about such a room even though it wasn’t even passed down from the previous
generations!?”
“The hints of their whereabouts are not in the books that you would normally be studying, but in the
diaries that the tutors judged to be worthless instead. I didn’t study properly but I passed my time
playing around reading those diaries to find this kind of secret.”
“It means that studying is not the only thing that can come in handy isn’t it?”
“Exactly. This castle is my backyard. I have never lost a round of hide and seek or tag in my life. I guess
this is the result of me playing around huh. Let’s use this to surprise our enemy this time.”
Saying so, I entered the secret passage with a grin.
1518
SPT Chapter 228
Klee oh Klee wherever you are……
On the other gacha though
Rolled for Saitou-san, got 5* Himiko instead……….
I need them Shinsengumi damnit!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Crybaby Prince
After we moved downstairs using the first secret passage, we took multiple secret passages to get
down to the lower floor.
Then we arrived at the secret room where it is connected to a room in the Inner Palace.
“To think that this castle has a secret passage that leads right to the Inner Palace, I don’t think that
anything is impossible here anymore……”
“I had fun going through them though.”
Finne was enjoying her trip through the series of secret passages while Mia was taken aback after she
was dragged through so many of them.
“But, you have a naive side too huh, Prince?”
“A naive side? Where?”
“You have been generously showing those secret passages to me, right. I think you are already aware
but I am a thief you know.”
“And how am I naive because of that?”
“If I want to infiltrate this place, I can utilize them to my heart’s content you know.”
“Ahh, I see.”
Mia astoundedly sighed at my answer.
It certainly seems a little foolish of me huh.
Mia is certainly someone from another country, moreover, she is also more or less a criminal.
1519
I have shown her multiple secret passages in the castle not to mention that I planned our escape
through the Emperor’s exclusive secret passage.
All of them are national secrets.
But
“If you want to try then by all means. I can’t recommend it though.”
“You think I can’t pull it off right!? I am specialized in breaking into people’s mansions you know!?”
“That’s not really something that a person should take pride in right.”
“Th, that is, I am well aware of that! B, But that’s not the point!”
“Al-sama. I thought that you don’t care about sharing such national secrets because of the situation we
are in but, am I wrong? I thought that Al-sama thinks that if the secrets are leaked, you can just
suppress it though.”
“You are half correct. I do think that if Mia is careful then she should be able to pull it off. But it is also
true that even if it is leaked, there is nothing to worry about.”
Finne tilted her head.
I point to the side of the aisle that leads straight ahead.
“Do you see a small hole over there?”
“There’s an opening…..what is it?”
“A trap. To get rid of anyone who plans to enter the Inner Palace through this passage.”
“A trap!? Watch out!”
Mi was surprised and immediately pulled Finne toward herself.
That’s a good reaction.
“Don’t worry. It won’t react when a member of the Imperial Family enters the aisle.”
“I see. So even if it is okay for a member of the Imperial Family, if others try to use it……..”
“The traps will be activated. Apparently, there are some kinds of traps hidden in most secret passages
and secret rooms. That’s why if someone unintentionally discovers a secret passage in the castle, a
member of the Imperial Family would check it out first. Most of them were built by the emperor of
each generation because they have to hide something that they feel [Guilty] about. That’s why the trap
that you usually find in these kinds of passages are quite nasty.”
Hidden rooms and passages that were not passed down to later generations.
1520
Why would someone build such a thing?
The reason is that the emperor has something to hide.
In the case of this passage, it was built so that the emperor can sneak out to visit the consort without
getting caught by his empress.
You might think that an emperor visiting his consorts is normal but the empresses often hail from
powerful houses of the Empire. For an emperor that was afraid to lose his backing, he would need to
keep the empress happy.
Since the emperor knows that he can not allow himself to get caught since it won’t just end with the
empress getting angry, the trap here is unforgiving to intruders.
In some cases, there is a barrier to prevent intruders from entering and in other cases, there would be
traps that will outright kill the intruders once they step inside the secret passage.
The reason why the Imperial Family is safe from those traps is simply that we are family. It would be
outrageous if your successor dies because of a silly accident.
There are princes who love exploring the castle like me after all.
“That’s why you should not use these secret passages if you want to break into the castle. Even if you
don’t die, you will make noises when the trap is activated. The Imperial Knights will never miss that.
You wouldn’t want to fight the Imperial Knights immediately after you escaped the trap right?”
“As expected of the Empire huh, the extent you people are willing to go is clearly different from the
Dominion. I’m sorry but…….people of the Imperial Family are quite strange aren’t they.”
“You don’t have to apologize. The Adler house is a gathering of weirdos after all. Nothing can be done
about it.”
For starters, trying to unify the whole continent is already too strange.
Even if you managed to unify the continent, it’s not like there would be no more conflict. The grudges
of the people who got their home robbed away by us would be directed at the Imperial Family.
Despite knowing that, my ancestor who decided to continue plundering everything to stop the circle
of sadness. They must have mistaken themselves for a god or something.
And we, their descendants continue to have that misunderstanding.
It is not up to me to decide whether that is a good or bad thing. That kind of thing is up to the
historians to decide. However, I am sure that our ideal is not that respectable.
Thanks to that weirdo of an ancestor, this ridiculous succession war has become our tradition to this
day.
“It simply means that the Imperial Family can not be normal right.”
1521
Finne skillfully followed up for me.
Her view is not wrong either.
As long as we stand at the top of such a vast empire, we can not afford to be normal.
After all, no one would follow an ordinary guy.
“The Prince is certainly very strange so I think that is true.”
“I think of myself as a relatively decent person you know. Right? Finne.”
“No, uhh, that is a little……..”
Finne said with a vague smile on her face.
Why didn’t you follow up for me in a time like this……….
“Eric, Gordon, Zandra, and Trau-niisan. Unlike those people, I don’t have any strange quirk right.”
“That might be true but…….I think that the people you compare yourself to have one or two extremely
strange habits though.”
“Then at least I am better than Leo. How about that?”
“I wonder about that……I think that it is a close match though…….”
“A close match!? I have only heard good things about Prince Leonard you know!?”
“What are you saying. There’s no way that someone who aims to become an emperor doesn’t have a
screw or two loose right.”
In response to my words, Finne said nothing and kept the vague smile on her face.
That’s weird. I don’t think that I have any weird quirk though.
I guess it’s bad that Leo is my twin huh.
“What a troublesome younger brother.”
“Al-sama can say that but I am sure that he also shares the same feeling you know. Siblings are like
that after all.”
“Hou? Then I will ask him when he gets back.”
As expected, I can’t say that I am the most decent person among the Imperial Family either.
There is still someone in my family that is still too normal.
After a while, the exit was visible.
1522
When I opened the exit, we arrived at a storage room.
“Alright, I will leave the rest to you two.”
“Leaving the rest to us? Are you not coming?”
“Sorry, but there is a place I am more worried about you see.”
“His Highness Rupert’s group isn’t it. Please take care.”
“I will not be doing anything myself though. I will just send Grau to his place and hide. I will be hiding
in the secret passages to keep watch on the situation and help you from behind. But don’t attract too
much attention alright. If you are not near a secret passage, I can’t help you after all.”
“I understand. You are saying that I can go wild after this right?”
“If Finne gives you permission that is. I will leave her to you.”
“Yes, please leave this to me.”
Saying so, Finne bowed at me.
Seeing that, I closed the exit.
After the exit was completely shut, I changed into the appearance of Grau with illusion magic.
“Well, it’s time to go help that one normal person of the Imperial Family huh.”
Given Alois’s personality, my youngest brother, Rupert should be giving him quite a trouble right
about now.
Whether for good or bad, that child is too normal.
While thinking so, I moved to the room next to the room where Alois was given for his stay in the
castle.
Rupert should be with him now.
Then.
“WAAA! I don’t want to leave! What if I die!?”
“Your Highness, please don’t be so loud……”
I heard a loud cry from the inside.
Hearing that, I sigh.
Rupert, who has grown up under his mother’s protection, is a crybaby who can not be separated from
his mother.
1523
It can be said that it is only natural for a ten years old child to act like this but for a member of the
Imperial Family, he can not afford to rely on his mother forever.
“I guess I can’t say that since I am also being spoiled by my mother even at this age huh…..”
Muttering so, I left the room I transferred to and quietly entered Alois’s room.
Seeing me, Alois looked like he just saw his savior.
“Grau…..!”
“It looks like you have your hands full huh.”
“Who!? I can’t see his face!? Scary!”
Saying so, the petite boy clings to his bed.
A little curly brown hair and blue eyes.
His expression looked like he was half crying.
This boy is my youngest brother, Rupert.
Although he was born into the Imperial Family, he is an ordinary child.
If I am the Dull Prince then I guess he would be the Crybaby Prince.
“Nice to meet you, Your Highness Rupert. I am Grau, a wandering strategist.”
Saying so, I gracefully bowed to the frightened Rupert.
1524
SPT Chapter 229
Special thanks to ItzMuffins for the coffee!! At this rate all the fund will be going to Genshin though…..
-Mr.Graverobber
A Child
I introduced myself to Rupert but he is still looking at me with suspicion.
Seeing him like that, Alois followed up for me.
“Your Highness, Grau is a great strategist who fought against the 10,000 imperial soldiers with me. It
was thanks to him that I managed to defeat them!”
“There’s a difference between a great person and a person you can trust! I won’t trust him unless he
shows me his face!”
Saying so, Rupert clings to the bed and refuses to move.
Even though Alois should already have explained the situation to him too.
“Your Highness. Please trust us. We will definitely protect you!”
“Alois is only twelve years old right!? You are not much older than me so there’s no way that you can
keep me safe! It would be safer if I just stay in my room!”
“Ages doesn’t matter here, Your Highness. I will protect you as it is my duty as an imperial noble.
There will be knights who will be fighting alongside me as well.”
Alois looks at the knights who are also present in the room.
The number is five. All of them are knights from Simmel Earldom who faced the Imperial Army with
Alois.
“There’s only five people right!? The opponent is Gordon-aniue you know!? The generals who support
him are all skilled! If they are coming to seize the castle then I don’t want to go out with only this
many knights!!”
Rupert stubbornly insists on staying in the room.
His thoughts were based on the wishful thinking of a child.
“Prince Rupert. Defending against a siege battle without any prospect of reinforcement is a foolish
idea. Are you perhaps expecting some kind of reinforcement?”
1525
“F, Father will surely come for me! Even if he can’t, there are Imperial Knights in the castle! They will
surely—!”
“I see. Then you may stay in this room alone. I will make sure to relay your wish to Prince Arnold.”
“Eh……?”
When I told him to do as he pleased and tried to leave the room.
It was Alois who stopped me.
“Pl, Please wait a minute! Grau!”
“If he is saying that he will stay in this room then we can’t move together. You have to quickly move
out as well. The more time passes, the more control the enemy will have over the castle.”
“I understand that. But I can’t leave His Highness Rupert alone.”
“How much do you think this prince is worth when he says that this room is more reliable than us?”
“He is the younger brother of His Highness Arnold. He has that much worth to me. The Earldom of
Simmel will never forget our debt to him. His protection was entrusted to me that’s why I can not
leave his side until I die. I will not abandon him.”
“……that’s what he said, Prince Rupert. He is willing to give you his life even if you choose to cling to
that bed and keep crying you know.”
“It’s, it’s not like I asked Arnold-aniue to help me in the first place……he just did it on his own.”
“…..I think you are misunderstanding something so allow me to correct you. It wasn’t out of kindness
that Prince Arnold dispatched Alois to protect you. It was your mother who desperately begged that
dull prince. She told him that it is fine to leave her behind, it is you alone that she wants him to protect.
Prince Arnold did not choose to send someone to escort his own mother and sent Alois to your side
instead. If you don’t understand what that means then you can say it now. If you have the nerve to
trample on your mother’s wish and your brother’s feelings then I will accept it.”
From under the hood, I looked straight at Rupert.
Feeling the strong gaze directed at him, Rupert’s body shook.
“I, I………”
“Let’s say that you choose to stay in your room as you said. The number of enemies is not only a
hundred or two. This fragile door will not protect you. How much time do you think that it can buy?
Do you think that your father can send someone to rescue you in time? Let me say this, Emperor
Johannes is not so sweet and omnipotent as you think. If Prince Gordon starts the rebellion, the
Emperor’s priority would be his personal protection for the sake of preserving the Empire. If he is
forced to abandon his children then he will do it. Especially when it is a prince who has no prospect
for the throne nor any achievements to himself like you.”
1526
“Th, the Imperial Knights will come to help me! They are the Empire’s strongest!”
“Prince Gordon will try to cover the Imperial Capital with a barrier to keep anyone from escaping and
prevent any reinforcements from the outside. The Imperial Knights are guarding the key jewels. They
can not afford to protect you.”
I slowly closed off Rupert’s escape routes with powerful reasoning.
Although there was still some time to spare, the soldiers in the castle had already begun to move.
The faster we can move, the more advantage we will have but with Rupert being difficult, we ended up
wasting that advantage.
Alois may think that he has to be considerate since he is only a ten years old child.
However, we have no room to consider such childish emotions.
“You have two choices. Stay in this room or leave. If you choose to stay in this room, you will definitely
be caught. It is unlikely that the Emperor will come to help you. If you choose to leave, your life will be
in danger but you will have the possibility where you managed to escape. If you are caught together
with the other consorts and the Emperor’s beloved Princess Christa then he might actually do
everything he can to rescue you. However, the possibility that he would come to help you when you
alone got captured is zero.”
“N, No way……”
“The worst thing that could happen to you is if we succeed in escaping while you alone are captured.
In that case, the Emperor will never come to rescue you. Who would help someone who threw away
his chance of salvation? I would never help someone like that. Unless there is a reason compelling
enough for me to do so that is.”
And unfortunately, there is absolutely no such reason for me to help Rupert.
Gordon would not find much value in him as a hostage.
Considering the disadvantage of having a child as a hostage, he would choose to kill him first as a
show of power.
That’s why Rupert must escape this castle.
“Hurry and decide. Will you escape with us or will you stay here? We do not have time to wait, you
know?”
“E, even if you say that……!”
Rupert started to cry at my harsh words.
It may be a natural reaction for a normal ten years old who was raised so closely by his mother but the
circumstances surrounding him are anything but normal.
1527
Seeing him like that, Alois gently approaches such Rupert.
“Your Highness. I understand your feelings well. When the Imperial Army marched to my land, I also
wanted to cry. I wanted to close my eyes and wish that it was not real.”
“…….Alois, how did you get through it…..?”
“I thought about the things that I must protect. I had to protect the people of my land. I couldn’t
abandon my mother. That’s why I fight. Your Highness should be the same. Your esteemed mother is
important to Your Highness, no?”
“Un……”
“Then let’s escape together. Even if your mother is caught, if you run away, her value as a hostage will
increase. Even if that’s not the case, if you escape while your mother is escaping as well, the enemy
will be forced to split up. Not for the Empire, not because you are a member of the Imperial Family,
you can leave those thoughts behind. It is for the adult to think about such a thing. Still,—-even as a
child, you can do your best to protect your mother.”
In response to Alois’s words, Rupert’s face changed a little.
He is timid and even now he looks like he could start crying at any moment but.
He is not crying.
“Alois…..you are like an adult……”
“I am also a child. I can not do much yet but as Grau says, time doesn’t wait for us to grow up. Children
often picture what they want to be in the future but sometimes, crises like this visited us before we
can grow up. That’s where we are. There’s no choice but to deal with it since it has already arrived at
our door. If you wanted to be a knight then this moment is the time that you have to become one. If
you want to be a good prince then the time is now. If we have something that you want to become in
the future then this is the moment that we can become one.”
“But, we are only children you know……?”
“Even a child can be anything he wants. A child is a child. If someone thinks that they can not become
something then it is simply because that person doesn’t have enough insight. Right now, at this
moment, I am your Imperial Knight. Please come with us with confidence. The Imperial Knights are
the Empire’s strongest after all.”
Saying so, Alois reached his hand out for Rupert.
Rupert took that hand.
I thought about putting him to sleep and just take him away if this dragged on but it seems that won’t
be necessary.
1528
“Now, Grau. Please tell us your plan. His Highness Arnold told us to meet up with him at the throne
room but the road there will probably not be an easy one.”
“I understand. Leave it to me.”
The moment I answered.
I heard the sound of footsteps from outside the room.
Rupert inadvertently hugs Alois but Alois’s hand is already reaching for his sword.
Although he is only two years older than him, the difference between them probably came from
experience.
“What was that……?”
“The soldiers must be on the other side of the door.”
Saying so, I open the door.
Doing so, I saw several soldiers sleeping on the floor.
I guess they were waiting for us to come out huh.
It was just right so I used the sleep magic I was planning to use on Alois on them.
It is a magic that is not effective on those who are mentally strong but if it is just common soldiers
then they would be falling into a deep sleep.
“Y, You are a mage…..?”
“No, I’m a strategist.”
Saying so, I started walking out with a grin on my face.
Rupert seemed to be unconvinced of that answer but Alois and the knights immediately followed me
so he hurriedly followed after us.
While we walk the noise from the lower floors is starting to get louder.
So they gave up on trying to take the hostages quietly and start capturing the castle in earnest huh.
Judging from the sound, the army must have captured the middle levels already.
When I looked outside, it seems that several soldiers are trying to leave the castle but they are caught
or killed by the other soldiers who are supposed to be their comrades.
It seems that not all soldiers are willing to participate in the rebellion.
They must have tried to relay the situation to Father.
1529
However, there should be no need for that.
“I think the other side should be starting to move as well.”
Muttering so, I glance at the arena.
But that’s all I do.
Orihime is at Father’s side and the Prime Minister is there as well.
I’m sure that Gordon wouldn’t doubt the success of his revolt but he has taken Father too lightly.
It is true that Father did not expect Gordon to start a rebellion.
However, the Prime Minister is different.
“Let’s see what our Imperial Prime Minister has in store.”
If it is as I expected then Gordon would be in for a world of surprise.
1530
SPT Chapter 230
It’s finally starting…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Fool
It’s been an hour since the tournament started.
As she looked at the arena, Orihime noticed that the spectators were acting strangely.
“Mu?”
The spectators in the arena look like they are getting sick.
And it is not just one or two people.
Seeing people’s complexion turned pale one after another, Orihime frowned.
“Your Majesty.”
“What is it? Celestial Princess-dono?”
“Do you feel something strange?”
“Hou? What a coincidence. So Celestial Princess-dono also feels that something is off too huh.”
At best it is only a feeling that something is off.
Since the event is being held at midday, it is normal for a few people to get sick.
That is a normal thought process.
Even so, both Orihime and Johannes noticed that there is something strange going on.
“Bring all the VIPs here. If something happens I will protect them all with my barrier.”
“I am grateful. Franz, do you agree with this plan?”
“There is no problem. I will immediately arrange it.”
“It would be rude if we just call them here. Empress, go invite them.”
“As you wish.”
Saying so, Franz and Brunhild leave the room.
1531
When she saw Johannes ask for approval from the Prime Minister, the expression of suspicion floated
on Orihime’s face.
After all, it is strange for an emperor to ask permission from his subordinate.
“Why does Your Majesty need approval from the Prime Minister?”
“I can’t afford to interfere with the Prime Minister’s plan you see. I have left almost everything to the
Prime Minister this time after all.”
“…..so even if there is a rebellion Your Majesty will not move?”
Johannes’s eyes slightly widen at Orihime’s words. He then showed her a bitter smile.
“Did you hear that rumor from Arnold?”
“That is no rumor. I know it will happen. There’s a bad smell lingering in this city. Something will
definitely happen, you know?”
“It is not a certainty yet.”
“So you will not move without a confirmation huh? I thought that Your Majesty is better than this but
was that only my misunderstanding?”
Johannes let out a small sigh at Orihime’s words.
He then turned to look directly at Orihime.
“I do not mind how you think of me. I will never doubt my son without proof. My son is not so foolish
to cause such great damage to the Empire.”
“People will lose their lives because you are being emotional you know?”
“I am not being emotional. There simply is no proof. What if I make a mistake? If the Emperor
apprehends one of the candidates for the throne without proper evidence during the succession war,
the succession war itself will go to waste. Gordon has much control over the military. They will surely
take decisive action to clear his name. If that is the case, we will end up with a civil war.”
If he moves, there will definitely be a civil war. That is Johannes’s position.
It doesn’t matter if Gordon is actually plotting a rebellion or not.
If Gordon is punished, those under him will not sit still without proper evidence. They might take
action even without Gordon and perhaps some will hold the Emperor forever in contempt.
The succession war is there to decide the next emperor. If the current emperor were to forcefully
interfere, he will have to deal with the rebellion from all sides.
It’s not so simple to just end the matter with Gordon’s head.
1532
“Then what are you planning to do?”
“Nothing. Personally at least.”
That was Johannes’s answer.
If the Emperor couldn’t move, all he had to do was just let his subordinates handle it.
That’s why Johannes left everything to the Prime Minister.
“There should be a limit to what the Prime Minister can do. Since it is difficult for Your Majesty to
intervene personally, the Prime Minister shouldn’t be able to take direct action either. The only thing
he can do would be to prepare for what’s coming.”
“Exactly. All we can do is prepare ourselves. If he can break through everything and take the Empire
into his hands then that’s fine. That is one way to win after all.”
There were indeed a small number of candidates who tried to take control of the succession war
through brute force before.
However, none of them succeeded.
You need the Emperor’s permission to mobilize the army. It would be considered treason if you do so
without permission. Not to mention that not only the other candidates but you will also be turning the
present emperor into your enemy as well.
That’s why the succession war mostly consisted of secret maneuvers and working behind the scenes.
After all, all the candidates are well aware that it is foolish to turn the Emperor into their enemy head-
on.
“So causing a rebellion to win the throne is also a way to win?”
“The essence of the succession war is to give birth to a strong emperor. If a strong emperor is born
from the result, the process can be ignored.”
Saying so, Johannes leaned back on his chair.
To Orihime, his face looked terribly aged.
Even though he said that, his true feelings must be different. So Orihime thought.
“……if my firstborn is still alive, I wouldn’t have to be worried like this though.”
“The deceased Crown Prince huh. I heard that you didn’t allow the succession war at first but why did
you only do that for the Crown Prince”
“Because everyone acknowledged him. It was obvious that he would win and there was no one who
wanted to compete with him either, that’s why there was no need for the succession war. Everyone
1533
was looking forward to seeing their ideal emperor. He was to be the one who ended this long history
of the succession war. That was how it was supposed to be……”
If everyone is satisfied, there is no need for conflict.
If everyone recognizes that he will become a strong emperor from the start, there is no need to
compete.
That’s why the Crown Prince was supposed to be the first emperor to take the throne without going
through the succession war.
It was supposed to be the end of the tradition.
No one doubted that he would accomplish many great things in his reign.
Johannes was sure that he could come up with an alternate method to choose his successor.
“My ideal successor is no more. That’s why this succession war was brought back. I tolerated it
because I thought that for anyone beside him, the struggle of the succession war would be necessary.
But, sometimes I still wonder if that was indeed a correct decision.”
“You seem timid, Your Majesty. Is that how the Emperor of the Empire is like.”
“An emperor also has moments where he can be timid. I had expectations for my children. I thought
that using this succession war, my children could grow stronger. However…….even since the
succession war began I can’t see them grow at all. On the contrary, I can see them growing more
foolish. Even so, I want to believe that none of my children would be so foolish to shake the Empire for
their own gain.”
It was something like a wish.
However, that wish does not come true.
When the Empress and the Prime Minister returned with the VIPs.
Orihime felt a swirl of huge magic power.
That swirl of magic came from underneath the arena.
“What!?”
“It’s a curse.”
Orihime promptly erected a barrier that covered the entire room and identified the magic that was
activated under the arena.
A huge barrier of hex magic.
It was prepared underneath the arena and is now spewing curse into it.
1534
The sick people they saw were the ones who were affected by its effect before its activation.
Inside the arena, people started to cough.
Not only the spectators but also the contestants, soldiers, and knights who were participating in the
tournament as well.
It is not a curse that will instantly kill you but it can easily render you to a state where you can’t fight.
“To think they would be able to activate something like this on such a scale…….they must have
prepared it for a long time huh?”
Muttering so, Orihime turned her eyes to Johannes.
“It is a weakening curse. They must have covered the entire arena with it. You will be fine as long as
you are within my barrier but if that’s the case then we can’t put up a proper fight.”
“That seems to be the case.”
Saying so, Johannes turned toward the Prime Minister.
If the curse is only affecting people in the arena then all they have to do is get outside but if the
opponent planned to utilize such a thing, they shouldn’t make it easy for them to escape.
“I see. I was wondering what Grimoire was doing underground but it seems that they were preparing
this.”
“It’s too late to reflect on it now. You do have an appropriate countermeasure right?”
“Of course, Your Majesty. However, allow me to apologize first. I have completely overstepped my
authority, please forgive me.”
While getting a bad feeling from his Prime Minister who lowered his head to him, Johannes gives him
a nod.
Since he has left everything to him, he has no intention to complain no matter what he did.
Then, accepting the Prime Minister’s proposal, Orihime and the Emperor along with the VIPs tried to
leave the arena.
However
“I have been waiting. Father.”
At the exit, Gordon was waiting for them, fully equipped.
Behind him are soldiers armed to the teeth.
They have surrounded the arena from all sides.
1535
Seeing that, Orihime whispered in a small voice.
“So there really is a fool here.”
“It seems so. I never thought that my son would be so deplorable.”
“It is your fault, Father. You should have made me the Crown Prince from the start.”
“It is your own fault for not showing me the caliber that would suit such a position, Gordon.”
Saying so, Johannes slowly pulled out the sword that he had hanging from his waist.
“My foolish son. At least take this as a mercy from your father. Give me your head now. If you do that, I
will at least bury you as a prince.”
“You must have gone senile, Father. Do you not understand your current situation? I have many
generals supporting me! The army is now under my control! Right now, there is an overwhelming
difference between our power! You have no chance of winning!!”
Saying so, Gordon pulled out his sword and raised it high.
1536
SPT Chapter 231
More primogems please……
-Mr.Graverobber
Filial Piety
Empire’s eastern border.
There was a huge building that was erected like a wall.
It is the cornerstone of the eastern border defense.
The Fortress of Eisenwald.
It is the Imperial Army’s base for eastern border defense as well as its frontline.
“My my, I wonder when I last arrived at my intended destination this fast.”
“If you run here while ignoring your surroundings like that it is no wonder you get lost you know…….”
An old dwarf and an elf girl.
Originally the two of them should have no business being together.
That was a completely out of place combination.
It was Egor and Sonia.
At the request of Silver, Egor immediately headed to the eastern border together with Sonia. On their
journey, Sonia now understands why Egor always got lost.
Egor travels at a different speed than normal people. Even with Sonia in his arms, he used
instantaneous movement to run and simply ran past the points where he was supposed to turn.
If Sonia didn’t tell him to stop and see where they were going, Egor would have arrived at the
northern border instead.
“I guess I will have to be careful next time huh.”
“That is the habit that you couldn’t fix for hundreds of years right? I think you can’t ever fix it you
know, your lost child tendency.”
Sonia astoundedly muttered so.
This is the Lost Sword Saint. It’s already kind of his trademark.
1537
There’s no other solution besides having someone who can reign him in or stop him at his side.
This time they are doing the former but Sonia doesn’t want to experience that again.
Being held by Egor and moving at his speed was too much for her.
When she noticed that they were crossing a mountain, the dizziness from the speed made her feel sick.
However, thanks to that, they managed to arrive at the eastern border early.
“So how do you plan to turn back the Dwarf King?”
“We can’t turn them back. If I am here, Sokol will never attack. Moreover, it would be difficult to
convince the stubborn dwarves. That’s why he must be thinking of a way to prevent the battle from
starting in the first place, That Silver.”
“If it’s only that then I don’t think Silver would need Ojii-san’s help though.”
Sonia mutters so as she walks inside the fortress.
They have already given Egor’s name and the permission to meet the Dwarf King has already been
granted.
The soldier who guided them here already returned to his mission after he told them the direction and
sent them down this hallway.
If he had to hurry back to his post like that then perhaps they currently don’t have enough manpower
right now? Sonia thought.
The eastern border can be said to be the most important border of the Empire.
That’s why it is rumored that the Eastern Border Defense Force stationed here is the strongest of the
Imperial Army.
“This place is being managed by Marshal Lizelotte Lakes Adler. The first princess and the strongest
general of the Imperial Family. The Sokol empire never took any military action ever since she took
over the task of defending the eastern border. That’s how feared she is. Even without Ojii-san here, as
long as she is, I don’t think Sokol will ever attack though.”
“That’s what I told him too but Silver brought up his favor you see. I can’t stay refuse him right?”
“Maybe Silver has wasted his favor on this.”
Sonia muttered so and clears her throat in front of the room.
Inside this room, the Dwarf King and an Imperial Marshal are waiting for them.
In order not to be rude, she needs to mind her appearances. However, Egor simply opens the door and
enters the room.
1538
“Sorry for intruding〜”
“Wha!? Ojii-san!?”
He was so casual as though he was just visiting a friend’s room. He didn’t even knock on the door.
Surprised, Sonia immediately bowed and apologized.
“M, my deepest apology! This Ojii-san has already gone senile!”
“WaHaHa!! That little elf girl just said that Egor has gone senile you know! This is too funny!!”
Said a bearded dwarf as he vigorously laughed.
He started drinking alcohol from the mug in his hand like water and like a dwarf would, he spilled a
lot of the content on his beard as he happily commented on how funny he thought her earlier words
were.
Ahh, so that’s the Dwarf King. Sonia thought.
It’s a scene she has often witnessed ever since she began living with the dwarves but this is the most
vigorous dwarf she has ever seen. As expected of the Dwarf King. she began to suspect that the
Dwarves elected their king by seeing how much alcohol one can drink.
“It’s a pleasure meeting you, Your Majesty. My name is Sonia Laspade. I am currently working as Elder
Egor’s attendant.”
“I know. As long as it is within my realm, I always get all kinds of reports you know. The old geezers
were reluctant to let in an elf but I told them that we should welcome you with open arms! It is
merrier to have more young ones right!!”
The dwarf pours more alcohol for himself and continues to drink it with a smile.
The pace at which he is drinking made her worried if he will drain all the alcohol stored in this
fortress.
“Your Majesty, please take this.”
“Hmm? What is it?”
“Your beard is wet, Your Majesty. In front of a woman, Your Majesty should be careful about your
appearance. It is completely fine in front of a man though.”
“OHH! I see, I see! Sorry about that! Duke!”
Saying so the Dwarf King wiped the liquor on his beard and arranged his messy clothes. He then
introduced himself to Sonia with a dignified voice.”
1539
“Come to think of it I still haven’t given you my name yet huh. Sorry. My name is Macar, King of the
Dwarves. You don’t have to mind your words around me, I have known that old man since I was a kid
after all.”
“No no, since you have become a king, I have to be more courteous right. By the way, how’s that
alcohol, is it good? Can I have some too?”
What being more courteous.
She involuntarily retorted in her mind and held her head.
While she was doing that, the man sitting next to Macar called out to Sonia.
“Our esteemed dwarven guests don’t mind about such details. That’s a good point of the dwarves.
They’re generous and always lively. I like them because they have no ulterior motives, what about
you?”
“—–I am of the same opinion, Duke.”
Sonia immediately replied and bowed.
On top of being able to talk on friendly terms with the Dwarf King, the king also called him a duke.
Combined with the previous information she received earlier, Sonia suspected that this person is
Duke Reinfeld.
He looks like a dwarf in terms of body shape himself but perhaps he was raised as an imperial noble,
the atmosphere he is giving out is nothing but elegance and composure.
His impression is that of a successful merchant.
And that impression is not wrong.
Duke of Reinfeld is a noble that has a territory located in the southeastern region of the Empire but his
influence extends over the whole eastern region.
The current Duke Reinfeld has a commercial talent and a wide range of abilities. He has connections
with various nobles and is a highly evaluated individual both as a Duke and as a person.
“Ah, it seems I also forgot to introduce myself. I am Jurgen von Reinfeld. I am one of the dukes of the
Empire but you don’t have to mind yourself around me. Being an attendant to Elder Egor is much
more amazing after all.”
“N, no, that is……..”
“WaHaHa!! It is as the Duke says! No one has been able to work with this old man for hundreds of
years! It’s a big deal you know!”
1540
Macar said so as he drank his alcohol while loudly shouting ‘How fun’. At his side, Egor also started
joining him before she knows it.
Seeing the two, Jurgen smiles.
This is different from what she heard.
Thought Sonia as she posted a question to Jurgen.
“Duke, my apologies but if I am not mistaken…..wasn’t the Dwarf King decided to invade the Sokol
empire?”
“Yes. you are correct.”
Jurgen casually acknowledged Sonia’s words.
He then gently looked at the desk in the back of the room.
Originally, it was the place where the master of this fortress, the Marshal sits.
However, that seat is empty.
“Everything was all according to that person’s plan. The Dwarf King is here to strengthen our border
defense. [I want you to take care of the eastern border for me], that person asked me so and arranged
this.”
“Taking care of the eastern border……? Don’t tell me, the Marshal is currently absent!?”
“Yes. That person is now moving in a different location. If possible, I want to go with her…….but since
she told me that she could only entrust this place to me, I had to accept her request as a man.”
“WaHaHa!! You really are an idiot! Duke! If this information gets leaked, Sokol might just start
invading us you know! You will definitely die if that’s the case! Even if you are lucky enough to
survive, you will still be punished! How stupid!”
“Isn’t Your Majesty also in a similar position?”
“What are you saying! We dwarves owe the Empire! Moreover, I have been taken care of by that
princess many times already! And that princess told me to take care of you, you know! If I don’t accept
her request then it would dishonor the name of the Dwarf King!”
Saying so, Macar keeps drinking more and more alcohol.
All the while saying that he never has this much fun before.
“I love idiots like you! Seriously the Imperial Family of this country really is all idiots! I can’t have
enough! The father is one, the daughter is one! Now she entrusted the border defense to the Duke that
is famous for being a great merchant! The Duke is also an idiot! You agreed to do it even though you
have nothing to gain right!”
1541
“I am only here physically. When it comes to battle, I will leave it to Your Majesty and the soldiers of
this fortress. I am only here to take responsibility after all.”
“So that’s why Silver wanted Ojii-san here……..if that’s the case then is the Marshal currently at the
Imperial Capital?”
“If nothing happens, the father and daughter should be able to meet after a long time. And if
something happens, not to mention the enemy, even her allies wouldn’t notice her presence. No
matter what, it will be a surprise for His Majesty the Emperor.”
Saying so, Jurgen started to grin.
The moment Gordon raises his sword.
A clear voice echoed in the Imperial Capital.
“FIRE”
At the same time, countless arrows attacked Gordon and his group who surrounded the arena.
As the Emperor watched the scene, the Prime Minister apologized again.
“Please forgive me. There was only one person in the army that I could trust.”
“Don’t tell me……”
Johannes opened his eyes wide and looked at the group that attacked Gordon and his men.
Every one of them was wearing a hood to cover their face but what could be seen underneath those
hoods was the army’s uniform.
Dashingly leading the hooded soldiers is a woman donning a blue cloak.
In the Empire, only the three marshals can don a blue cloak over their military uniform.
And the Empire has only one female marshal.
Her long golden hair was blown by the wind. Seeing her figure, Gordon immediately shouted.
“YOU, HOW!?”
“Is it so surprising for an Imperial Marshal to rush to His Majesty’s side to protect him? Or was it that
surprising that I came here to protect Father?”
When she said that with a light smile, all of her subordinates took their hoods off all at once.
Standing there are the elites of the Eastern Border Defense Force.
1542
“Know your ignorance, Gordon. I am more of a good daughter than you think.”
“ATTACK POSITION! KILL THAT WOMAN!”
“That’s my line! All men, draw your swords!! By the order of your Marshal, Slaughter the rebels!!!!!”
Thus the Imperial Army collided with one another in the Imperial Capital.
1543
SPT Chapter 232
Stressed, angry, and depressed……….I literally can’t watch the news right now.
-Mr.Graverobber
Imperial Marshal
“What is Lizelotte doing in the capital!? What about the eastern border!?”
“I secretly asked her to come here to escort you, Your Majesty. Regarding the border, she said that she
has already appointed an appropriate proxy to oversee its defense..”
Franz said so in a small voice.
Franz and Lize only exchanged one secret letter.
Franz explained the situation to her and asked her to come to the capital to guard the Emperor and
Lize agreed.
They did not exchange any extra information because their conversation might be leaked. That’s why
Franz didn’t know who is currently guarding the eastern border.
Although he can think of some candidates, he doesn’t know who exactly it is because Lize told him to
focus his mind on this side instead.
Thinking that when it comes to the defense of the eastern border Lize would never make a mistake in
her selection, Franz didn’t push the question. The important point was how to get Lize into the capital
without anyone noticing her presence.
If the Sokol empire thinks that she is still manning the border, they will never make a move. That’s
Franz’s thought process and it is actually a fact.
“I did say that I will leave everything to you but what is the point of pulling the key to our border
defense to the capital!? Moreover, why did she come here when you called for her while she never
gave me a visit no matter how many times I sent her a letter!?”
Franz sighs at the point where his emperor is getting upset about.
When he was wondering what to say, Eric spoke to them from behind.
“Father, let’s continue this somewhere else. We are standing out in this place.”
“It is as His Highness Eric says. Let’s go Your Majesty.”
“GuNuNu……”
1544
With an expression that shows that he is still not convinced, Johannes falls back together with Franz to
behind Lize’s line of defense.
There, Franz explains the next part of his plan.
“Your Majesty. First, we must escape the capital through the east gate.”
“Escape? Are you telling me to abandon the capital?”
“It seems that more generals are supporting His Highness Gordon than I anticipated. The Brave has
already made his preparation. Let us join him. We will defeat the rebels later.”
Hearing Franz, Johannes turned his gaze to the Imperial Sword Castle for a moment.
There were still many of his consorts and children being left there.
However, Johannes soon takes his eyes away from it.
To abandon the Imperial Capital means abandoning his people. As an emperor, he can’t afford to
selfishly care about his wives and children right now.
Orihime then speaks to such Johannes.
“Be relieved. Your Majesty. Arnold is moving at the castle. He is good at moving around behind the
scenes, I am sure that he can do something about that place.”
“I am a little worried but I shall believe your words.”
In response to Orihime’s words, Johannes’s expressions soften a little.
Then he turned toward Franz.
“I understand your plan. But it would be bad if we are trapped inside the Imperial Capital, no? If it’s
Gordon, he will surely aim to activate the Celestial Sphere.”
“There is nothing more we can do about that. I have already instructed the Captains of the Imperial
Knight Order to guard the Rainbow Celestial Jewels in the castle. If he can not get his hand on at least
three of them, he can’t activate the Celestial Sphere. Also, in case of emergency, we can have the Brave
use the holy sword to cut open the barrier as well.”
“If possible I don’t want it to come to that though.”
“We can not choose our means, Your Majesty. The timing where both the dignitaries from the United
Kingdom and the Dominion are absent is suspicious. It is highly possible that they are cooperating
with His Highness Gordon. Moreover, if the Saint’s abduction was only a diversion then it is quite
possible that the Kingdom will join in as well. The more time we spend on His Highness Gordon, the
more dangerous our border will become, Your Majesty.”
Johannes instinctively clicked his tongue at Franz’s words.
1545
If this problem not only involved Gordon but foreign countries as well, the seriousness of the situation
jumped up.
Other nations are afraid of the Empire because they are a strong nation. They recognize that no matter
what they do the Empire will remain unwavering. However, this rebellion is one of the few
opportunities where they can shake the Empire.
The chaos created from this situation might be even greater than the time when they lost the Crown
Prince.
He thought that his son wouldn’t be so foolish to cause such a situation.
Even if he managed to defeat Johannes and gain control over the Empire, what would be waiting for
Gordon is a weakened nation that will be constantly at war with multiple countries.
Other nations will demand a steep price for their cooperation and the people of the Empire will not
recognize Gordon’s claim over the throne. The two Principality in the south might use this opportunity
to launch their assault to take control over the mainland as well.
Although there will be the war that Gordon so wished for, it would be an all-out war on all sides that
clearly will disadvantage the Empire.
Did he not foreseen this or did he choose to do it while knowing full well what will happen? Either
way, right now Johannes can only see him as a fool.
In Johannes’s eyes, he saw Lize and Gordon facing each other in the middle of the battlefield.
His daughter and son are trying to kill each other.
They were his children that used to compete with each other.
His hesitation lasted only for a moment. Johannes raised his voice to give his command. His voice can
be heard throughout the whole battlefield.
“Marshal Lizelotte! I do not mind if you kill him! Teach him the foolishness of going against the
Empire!!”
After he gave that command, Johannes turned back and headed for the east gate.
—————————-
Hearing Johannes’s command, Gordon snorted.
“Hmph! What foolishness! This is exactly because Father has grown weak! If he had the same strength
he had before I would never resort to a rebellion!”
“It sounds like…….you are blaming Father because he forced your hand?”
1546
“Of course. That is exactly how it is! If Father is his former self, he would have immediately realized
that the Empire right now needs a strong emperor! Eric is weak, and now that spoiled brat Leonard is
competing for the throne too! For the Empire’s own sake, we need a strong emperor!! It is because he
didn’t notice that truth that I chose to rebel!!”
Lize quietly takes a stance with her sword as Gordon justifies himself.
Gordon had his greatsword ready in his hand and prepared to attack her but as if that greatsword
wasn’t there in the first place, Lize’s sword found its way to Gordon’s neck.
“Kuh!”
Gordon’s neck didn’t part from his body because he managed to move it back in a hurry but Lize’s
slash did leave a scratch on him.
“I thought that you were a fool but it seems like your foolishness is much greater than I thought…….If
you are that confident in yourself then you should just win the succession war through your own
power. The fact that you started a rebellion here means you have admitted that you stand no chance
against Eric or Leo. You know that full well and cowardly resorted to a rebellion because of your
weakness. This is why you can’t even take the position of a marshal.”
“I am not weak! My military might can not be measured in that ridiculous succession war! The
succession war is a battle for the weak who resort to roundabout ways! It was already a mistake to try
to judge me with it!!”
“Isn’t resorting to cheap tricks and plotting a rebellion in secret exactly the roundabout way you so
despised? Everything you did was all hypocrisy. The Imperial Family is there for the sake of the
Empire, if you forget even that and choose to cause disasters to our country then you are disqualified
both as its member and a general. I pity Father for having a son like you.”
“Don’t make fun of me! What do you know when you ran away to the border without even trying to
join the succession war!!”
Saying so, Gordon puts magic power in the greatsword in his hand.
The greatsword shines and the light wraps around Gordon.
“It seems you have prepared a good magic sword huh. Are you not confident in your own power?”
“Hmph! I will not allow any insult from you! I will crush the likes of you in an instant!!”
“Then come. In the name of the Marshal of the Empire, I shall take your head.”
Gordon swings down the sword with all his strength.
Lize moved back and avoided it but Gordon’s heavy blow caused the ground to collapse.
“A magic sword that strengthens your physical strength huh. That certainly suited you.”
1547
“This is my power! You have no chance of winning!! I will cut your head off and throw it in front of
Father!”
Lize stays silent.
Without minding that, Gordon started his pursuit.
He brandished an attack to the side.
Lize received it.
Then
“I left the border and came here because I didn’t want Father to fight you himself. After losing our
elder brother, his heart is already scarred enough. Even so, if you choose to rebel, he will have to cut
you down. That’s why I came. I……..don’t want Father to be hurt any more than this.”
“NAIVE!! Have you become emotional because you have secluded yourself at the border for so long!”
“Say whatever you like……your crime of having Father ordering me to kill his own son is heavy. You
will pay for your impertinence to him with that head of yours!! Gordon!!”
As she finished saying that, Lize parried Gordon’s sword.
Then the two started fiercely exchanging blows without any intention to relent to others.
The nearby soldiers are also caught in their exchange.
Their swords wouldn’t stop until either one of them died.
When the soldiers around them started to think so.
Suddenly a huge barrier, the Firmament Kugel (Celestial Sphere) covered the entire Imperial
Capital.
1548
SPT Chapter 233
Coffee Appreciation day!!
Still depressed though…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Highness
At the time Lize appeared in the Imperial Capital.
There was a room on the lower floor of the Imperial Sword Castle. There was nothing special about
the room. In front of such a room that can be found anywhere in the castle, Zandra was standing in
front of its door.
“As expected of the Prime Minister huh. To think that he would hide two Rainbow Celestial Jewels
inside such an ordinary room. He really is brilliant.”
Saying so, Zandra touches the door.
However, two people stepped up to stop Zandra.
“Please do not move, Your Highness Zandra.”
“Please remember your position and quietly allow yourself to be detained.”
One of the men is in his early thirties. His hair is cut short and gives off the impression of a warrior.
The other man is still young. He seems to be in his late teens. He has light brown hair that reaches his
back. His expression is blank and it is hard to guess what he is thinking.
Both are wearing a white cloak that shows that they are part of the Imperial Knight Order, same as
Elna.
Hearing the voices of the two, Zandra slowly turned around.
“How strange. I wonder why two of the esteemed Captains of the Imperial Knight Order are here? Just
in case I did send soldiers to the dummy room you supposed to be protecting you know?”
“Their assault was strangely weak you see. We immediately realized that it was only a diversion. But I
never thought that it would be you who sent them.”
“Ara? Is it so surprising? Captain Oliver of the Eighth Corp.”
The name of the man in his early thirties is Oliver von Rolbach.
1549
The captain of the Eighth Imperial Knight Corp.
He has been a member of the Imperial Knights Order since he was a teenager. He is an experienced
captain and is highly trusted by the Emperor.
“Naturally. I never thought that Your Highness would be involved in His Highness Gordon’s rebellion.
Who would have thought that you two would join hands? You have been at each other’s throats for all
this time after all.”
“It is only temporary. I am merely using Gordon.”
“The other side is probably thinking about the same thing as well. Let’s get this over with, Oliver-san.
She is only trying to buy time anyway.”
Saying so the young man pulls out the sword from his scabbard.
The young man’s name is Raphael Balent.
Captain of the Tenth Corp of the Imperial Knight Order.
He is 19 years old. A genius swordsman who was recruited as an Imperial Knight at the age of 13.
The youngest Imperial Knight on the record was Elna who was selected at the age of 11 so his record
is a little overshadowed but unlike Elna who is of the Brave house of Amsberg, Raphael did not hail
from any special bloodline.
Let alone being a noble, It is not even clear whether he was born in the Empire.
The current Emperor found Raphael as a baby on the battlefield.
If he left him there, he would definitely die. However, the Emperor could not take him in himself so he
entrusted him to an orphanage run and funded by the Emperor himself.
A few years later, the Emperor who went to visit the orphanage found Raphael who brilliantly wielded
a wooden stick despite not being taught any sword skill by anyone. He was convinced that he has the
talent for the sword and decided to raise him as a swordsman.
The Emperor’s eyes were not wrong. Raphael soon became an Imperial Knight and eventually climbed
to the rank of captain.
Elna is already decided to be the next Knight Commander but if there is no special case like her,
Raphael was said to be so talented that he can take the position himself.
With the debt of gratitude, his loyalty toward the Emperor is strong and he is seen as a knight who
will carry the future of the Empire together with Elna in the future.
Zandra smiled at that young man.
“You are so impatient, Captain Raphael. Won’t you talk to me a little while longer?”
1550
“I am not good at talking to women. I am a man who only knows the sword after all.”
“Is that so? What a shame.”
“I do not think it is something I should feel bad about though. What should we do? Should we knock
her out?”
With that said, Raphael points his sword at Zandra.
On top of the fact that Zandra who wields forbidden magic can attack them at any time, the nature of
her attack is unpredictable.
Raphael expresses his worry without a change in his expression.
Hearing that, Oliver tries to take Raphael down a notch.
“Raphael, no matter how she is as a person, she is still a princess you know? I don’t want to hurt her as
much as possible.”
“She is a rebel who already participated in two rebellions. I don’t think that His Majesty would treat
her as a daughter anymore.”
“That will be up to His Majesty to decide. Listen here. Don’t be too violent with her.”
Saying so, Oliver unsheathed his sword.
He then turned to his back.
There, a brown hair maid, Xiao-Mei was standing.
“Would you please kindly step away from Her Highness Zandra, my lord?”
“She dressed like a maid but I can feel intense killing intent from her. Judging from how you handle
yourself, are you an assassin?”
“I will leave that to your imagination.”
“I see. Then I will hear you out after I defeated you!”
Saying so, Oliver clenched his sword with both hands.
On the other hand, Xiao-Mei also took out her dagger and prepared to fight.
Thinking that the maid is intending to take him head-on, Oliver grinned.
“Looked down on me huh!”
“There are all kinds of Imperial Knight Captains. I don’t know about Elna von Amsberg but if it is only
someone at your level, I can take you on.”
1551
“Then come and try!!”
Saying so, Oliver and Xiao-Mei rushed at each other and collided.
The time when they exchanged blows was only a moment.
Xiao-Mei was immediately blown away by Oliver and stuck against the wall.
“Guh…..”
Enduring the pain, Xiao-Mei tries to stand up.
On her face is a smile.
Because at the end of her line of sight, a sword protruded from Oliver’s stomach.
“Why…….”
“I don’t hate you. Oliver-san.”
“Why…..do you betray us……Raphael?”
Raphael swings the sword that he stuck inside Oliver’s stomach out sideways.
Oliver whose stomach was half torn spit out blood and crumbled to his knee on the spot.
The word ‘why’ is still rampaging in his head.
He started thinking about the possibility.
The reason why Zandra managed to find the room where the Prime Minister secretly hid the Rainbow
Celestial Jewels was probably that someone leaked the information. There are only a few who know
about this room.
But he never thought that it would be Raphael.
Raphael’s loyalty to the current Emperor was that strong.
“If I give you my reason, will you forgive me?”
“……probably not………”
Seeing that he can’t stop his blood, he calmly analyzed the situation and realized that he doesn’t have
long to live.
A swordsman of Raphael’s caliber would never miss a vital spot when he got the opportunity to attack
from behind. Moreover, he used the chance to tore out his stomach.”
His injury is so serious that his internal organs would spill out if he doesn’t hold it back with his hand.
1552
Still, Oliver did not let go of his sword.
Then.
“……the traitor…….must be purged!!”
Oliver threw his sword with all his might.
Raphael boringly swatted it away.
However, using that time, Oliver jumped out the nearby window
When Xiao Mei looked out the window, Oliver was already gone.
It seems that he re-entered the castle through a nearby window.
“Chase him! We can’t let him escape!”
“He will die anyway you know. He will probably try to inform the Knight Commander but he wouldn’t
be able to reach the throne room in that condition.”
“We can’t leave it to chance!”
Hearing Zandra’s hysterical voice, Raphael’s face was slightly distorted.
However, he immediately put the sword back in his scabbard and started walking away.
Seeing that, Zandra entered the room.
“As expected of a captain of the Imperial Knight Order……I do not think that I will be able to move for
a while.”
“Is that so. Thank you for your hard work. Please take care of that person. I will be going after Oliver-
san.”
“Please be careful. He is a captain of the Imperial Knight Order who resorted to throwing his sword
away to escape. He will not choose his means.”
“I understand. It was because I was wary of him that I asked you to help create an opening. I won’t let
my guard down.”
Saying so, Raphael leisurely walked away.
However, he suddenly stopped and looked back at Xiao-Mei.
“That’s right. Please relay my message to [Highness], that I have performed the job as instructed.”
“—–which [Highness] should I relay that message to?”
“The [Highness] that you serve.”
1553
“Certainly. I will make sure to relay your message later.”
After that exchange, Raphael starts walking again.
After that, Zandra brought the two Rainbow Celestial Jewels from the room along with the one Gordon
prepared to the Ceremonial Hall called the [Hall of the Celestial Sky] located in the middle of the castle
and set the three jewels on the pedestal at the center of the room.
Then as a final touch, she used her blood to activate the Celestial Sphere.
“AhHaHaHa!! Now you can not escape! Father! I will never forgive you for locking me and Mother
away!!”
Zandra’s cruel smile floated up as she continues to laugh maniacally.
1554
SPT Chapter 234
I want to jam Blastoise with explosive…..
-Mr.Graverobber
A Decent Strategist
“Wh, what!? The sky is getting weird!?”
Rupert was scared at the sudden activation of the Celestial Sphere.
That being said, Rupert is not the only one who was surprised by it.
But it was not the activation itself that is surprising.
It was the timing.
“Grau……this is……”
“It is too early.”
While keeping my answer short, I look towards the arena.
It is not long after the turmoil started.
Gordon probably went there to capture Father and the Prime Minister acted on his countermeasures.
But the Prime Minister should not expect the Celestial Sphere to be activated this fast.
“Hey! What is happening!?”
“It’s the Firmament Kugel. A defensive spell that protects the Imperial Capital. It can only be activated
by the Imperial Family. Once activated, no one can enter or leave the capital. At the full-power
activation, you will be able to see a 5-colors pillar of light extending from the castle reaching to the
sky.”
After hearing my explanation, Rupert looked at the top of the castle.
The pillar of light only has 3 colors.
In other words, the spell was activated at the minimum output.
“There’s only three!”
“Then it means that the enemy has obtained 3 of the Rainbow Celestial Jewels……..”
1555
“There are 2 in the throne room. The Knight Commander is probably guarding them right now. It
would be almost impossible to get through her. The other two captains should be guarding the other.
To think that anyone can break through their defense this fast………this is bad.”
The worst scenario is that we have been betrayed by the Knight Commander. However, if she really
betrayed us then it made no sense that they activated the Celestial Sphere with only 3 jewels. If she
really turned out to be a traitor, they should have no trouble gaining control over the castle and the
castle should already be overrun by now.
In that case, the possibility is that one of the other two captains or both of them has betrayed us.
“Wh, what should we do……? The throne room that we are heading to is safe right!?”
Without understanding the seriousness of this situation, Rupert raised a question.
How should I explain it to him?
While I was thinking so, Alois gently held Rupert’s hand.
“Alright, Your Highness. Please listen to me carefully okay.”
“U, Un……”
“You can use up to 5 jewels to activate the Celestial Sphere. There are 5 of them in the castle and even
His Highness Arnold who is very familiar with the castle’s layout doesn’t know where exactly they are.
That is how strict the security around them was. Our enemy’s objective is to obtain those jewels.
That’s why captains of the Imperial Knights Order are guarding them. Besides the Knight Commander
who is currently guarding the throne room, two other captains in the castle were assigned to guard
the other jewels.”
“Then, the Knight Commander was already killed!?”
“We do not know that. But If that is the case then I can say for certain that the enemy has someone
who even the captains of the Imperial Knights can not even hold out for long. Think of it that way, I
can only think that the enemy is on the same level as the Hero or an SS-rank adventurer.”
Tears started to spill from Rupert’s eyes at Alois’s words.
Hearing his explanation, he probably can’t help but think that there is such a strong opponent among
the enemies.
In fact, there is a possibility of that.
However, if the enemy has such a strong person on their side, we should have known of their
presence.
That’s why it is not the most viable possibility right now.
And Alois knows this well.
1556
“If, if the enemy has such a strong person then we can’t………”
“…….for better or worse, if the enemy truly has such a strong person on their side we would have
known. They may have kept that person hidden really well but there is a possibility that is more likely
to be the case than that.”
“Eh…….?”
“…..it is not that the captains failed to buy time for us but it was the captains of the Imperial Knight
Order who were assigned to guard those jewels turned over to the enemy’s side. If that is the case
then we can understand the speed at which they activated the Celestial Sphere.”
“Captains of the Imperial Knights…….betrayed us……?”
Rupert widened his eyes as if he couldn’t believe it.
Well, of course. For the Imperial Family, the Imperial Knight Order is our final line of protection.
If they betrayed you, you would find it hard to find someone to trust.
“Th, they wouldn’t betray us…….the Imperial Knights are the strongest……they pledged their loyalty to
the Emperor……! And there are only 13 captains in the Order! Father was the one who handpicked
them himself! Th, there’s no way that they would betray him!”
“Your Highness…….”
“Th, They…….they will never betray Father……the Emperor is………”
It seems that rather than the betrayal of the Imperial Knights, he is more shocked at the fact that they
chose to betray the Emperor.
For Rupert, Father is an existence that is above the cloud.
It is because he sees him like that, Rupert yearns to be like him. I’m sure that in Rupert’s eyes, Father
is a perfect and absolute existence.
However,
“Even the captains of the Imperial Knights are humans. So is the Emperor. If you are a human then
there are times that your feelings can change. If you are a human, the glamor you have will fade with
time. If we can grow then we can age as well. It is not strange for the relationship you once have to
change.”
“……then….it is fine even if they betrayed him? Just because their feelings changed, it is fine for them to
break their vow!?”
Even though he should be scared right now, for the first time, strong words came out of Rupert’s
mouth.
1557
I’m sure that he is glaring at me with those teary eyes of his.
It seems that Rupert can not forgive the unreasonableness of betrayal.
Maybe this is one of the traits of the Adler family huh.
I gently put my hand on Rupert’s head.
“A promise between ordinary people is different from the vow of the Imperial Knights. They have
pledged to protect the people, the country, and the Imperial Family in front of the Emperor. That’s
why they are trusted. Despite the Emperor did not commit any tyranny, if they truly have chosen to
betray not only the Emperor but all the citizens of the Empire as well. I will not forgive that. After all, I
don’t think that something like that can be forgiven. If you share the feeling as me then don’t forgive
them.”
“……Un!”
“Alright, let’s go. With the Celestial Sphere activated, the enemy should be looking for hostages in the
castle. You don’t want the enemy to get their way any more than this right? We will not allow them
even a single hostage. That’s why we can’t get caught. Are you good at playing tag, Prince Rupert?”
“Umm…..a little…..”
Rupert looks down.
Rupert is not really an athletic prince.
He is average in both study and physical ability. He is shy and has few friends. In the first place, he is
always together with his mother.
Even playing around is counted as an experience. If you have done it repeatedly you will become good
at it. If you are slow on your feet, you would find a way to escape without relying much on running.
However, there is nothing you can do without experience. Sometimes there’s an exception where a
person is good at something without ever experiencing it before. But Rupert is not like that.
That’s why being near him has its worth.
“Then rest assured. A strategist is there to help you deal with things that you are bad with after all. I
promise you that I will get you to the throne room. I can’t boast about it but I am somewhat a decent
strategist myself. You can put your trust in me.”
“You are so modest. If you are only decent then the other strategist in this world would only be
second-rate you know.”
Saying so, Alois smiles.
He then turned his eyes to Rupert.
1558
“I do not know about others nor can I see the future. That’s why I can not pledge my lifelong loyalty to
you——but right now, I swear that I will not betray you. No matter who I have to fight against, I will
definitely protect you, Your Highness.”
Alois’s words were very calm.
The fact that he didn’t say that they would run away together is probably stemmed from his resolve.
He will surely become Rupert’s shield in case of an emergency. Alois has already resolved himself for
that.
Understanding his feelings, Rupert nodded.
“Un, me too……..I will believe in Alois.”
Thus we keep making our way toward the throne room.
1559
SPT Chapter 235
The fluffy pancake really helped me. Sugar is good for anything.
Ps.It seems that there were too few Blastoises huh
-Mr.Graverobber
Strategist’s Outlook
We were walking toward the throne room at the top floor of the castle.
We have started traveling from the middle floors of the castle but we haven’t encountered any
enemies so far.
The enemy is probably busying themselves trying to take control of the lower and middle floors right
now. It is not like all soldiers will fall in line and there are Imperial Knights in the castle as well. Their
number will be inferior to the enemy’s but each of them is an elite.
Considering that they are fighting in the castle, it would not be strange if the enemy soldiers are being
pushed back by the Imperial Knights right now.
That being said, the situation has turned for the worse since there may be a traitor among the
Imperial Knights. Some of them might betray us. If that is the case we will have a situation where the
Imperial Knights start to fight against each other.
They are elites but the traitors will have the element of surprise. That should provide a huge
difference.
“It might be good to hurry.”
Alois who cautiously peeked over the corner muttered so.
Behind him, Rupert raised a question.
“Even though we managed to get here without any difficulty? We never encountered any enemy
soldiers along the way you know?”
“We haven’t encountered any friendlies either, Your Highness. There should be a lot of butlers and
maids in this castle. This huge castle can not maintain itself after all. Even so, we didn’t see anyone on
our way here. No matter how high up we go, it is too strange that we haven’t seen anyone so far.”
It is good that we didn’t encounter any enemy.
It just means that they are struggling on the lower floors.
1560
However, it is off that we haven’t found even a single ally on our way here. Just where did they
disappear to?
“M, Maybe everyone has already evacuated……”
“Where to?”
“That is…….”
“They have two choices. To go up or down. They surely know that the enemy is on the lower floor. If
their ears still work, they should be able to hear the sound of swords clashing and angry shouting
below. If that is the case, they will choose to move upstairs. Even so, despite our fast pace, it is strange
that we haven’t seen anyone at all.”
Evacuation is difficult.
After all, they don’t know where they would be safe.
In a group of ten, there will definitely be two or three people who raise such a question. Even so, it is
strange that there is no one left here.
Then why is there no one here?
The answer is simple.
“If I am on the enemy’s side, I will send an elite unit to the throne room first. Quietly that is. If we can
not find anyone then we can expect that the enemy has arrived at the upper floors before us.”
“Th, then the throne room is not safe!?”
“Normally that would be the case but right now the Knight Commander is personally guarding the
throne room. In a place where no magic can be used, a swordmaster like her would not be easily
defeated. You can think of the throne room as a safe place for now.”
“Then why do we need to hurry?”
“If the enemy was informed that their elite unit can not take over the throne room, they will dispatch
reinforcements. If we remain where we are, we will be caught in between them.”
“Exactly.”
I affirmed Alois’s excellent answer.
No matter what, we still have to get to the throne room. After all, it is the current safest place in the
castle.
However, the enemy will also try to break through that place.
1561
The more time we waste, the more our movement will be restricted. Even Alida wouldn’t be able to
help us then.
“It seems that there are no enemies here. Let’s go, Your Highness.”
In response to Alois who checked the corridor for us, we started walking again.
Then when another corner came into our sight.
Soldiers wearing the Imperial Army uniforms appeared around the corner.
They seemed surprised at our appearance for a moment but they immediately responded with a
smile.
“I see that you are still safe my lords. We are on your side. Please calm down.”
A Soldier came out to speak with us when he saw that the knights’ hands reached for their swords.
Seeing their smile, Rupert breathed out.
However, I immediately grabbed Rupert’s hand and pulled him toward me.
After all, these soldiers have a terribly bad smell.
“That would be impossible.”
While saying so, I put my hand behind myself and use a hand sign to tell Alois to step back.
Alois, who understood the hand sign, pretended to instruct the knights to calm down and slowly
began to step away.
It is a one-way passage. The number of opponents is five. We have six people on our side but Rupert
can not fight and I don’t count myself as a combatant either. That would leave us with a numerical
disadvantage.
Alois seems to have trained his sword skill at the castle but it would be better to not expect much from
him.
We need to use a plan here.
“It can’t be helped that you are suspicious of us, my lord. We are also confused after all.”
“Then tell me who you are working for.”
“We are currently acting under the command of the Knight Commander Alida. We were tasked to
bring the non-combatants in the upper floors to the throne room.”
“The Knight Commander is commanding the soldiers?”
1562
“We separated ourselves from the other soldiers since we did not participate in the rebellion, my
lord.”
“Your story makes sense and doesn’t make sense at the same time. We only have your words to go by.
Do you have any evidence to support your claim?”
“My deepest apology. We can do nothing but ask you to trust us.”
While saying so, the soldiers slowly approached us.
They even tried to circle around our backs.
While I was buying time, I instructed Alois with another hand sign to enter a nearby room.
“If you want us to believe you then how about you stopping your advance first?”
“We are in a hurry, my lord. The enemy is approaching us after all.”
“Then give us proof that you are on our side.”
“We have no such proof.”
“Then answer my question. Why is there a bloodstain on your clothes?”
It wasn’t their attitude alone that was suspicious.
Their clothes are stained with blood.
“The blood splashed on us when we cut down the rebels.”
“I see. That’s funny.”
While saying so, I bend my knees and prepare to run.
These guys are definitely enemies.
“What is funny, my lord?”
“You got bloodstain on the front of your clothes when you cut down the rebel? Above all, it is
impossible for the Knight Commander to trust someone like you so readily that she would order you
to protect the non-combatants. Her priority should be the protection of the throne room and the
Imperial Family. If she is going to give you such an order, it would be to protect the young princes and
princesses first.”
They did not react to Alois nor Rupert.
If it is Alida, she will definitely include that in her order.
1563
When he heard my words, the smile disappeared from the soldier’s face.
At that moment, I embraced Rupert and started running.
Alois and the others were already in front of the room I signaled them to enter and opened the door
for us.
Once we entered the room, the knights immediately closed the door.
From the other side, we could hear the sound of the soldiers tackling against the door.
“How did you know that they are enemies……?”
“Even if what they said were true, their attitude was completely wrong. We checked the corner every
time we had to make a turn because we were being cautious of running into an enemy. But when they
walked around the corner they were casually walking and accidentally ran into us. That gave away
their position. They were not being hunted, they were the hunter.”
“To be able to see through them in only a moment……as expected of Grau.”
“They were just being careless. They must be from a different unit that tried to take over the throne
room. Their true mission is probably to capture anyone who tries to get there.”
Since they can’t capture the throne room, their main unit can not focus on the throne room if someone
comes in from behind them.
After all, depending on our movement, their main unit might be caught in a pincer attack from behind.
“I understand but……we do not have anywhere left to run either you know?”
“Rest assured. Prince Rupert, it’s your time to shine. Try opening the drawer over there.”
As he was told, Rupert opens the drawer.
At first glance, it was a normal drawer but this drawer has double panels.
“Try removing the panel on the bottom.”
“At the bottom? Like this?”
When Rupert removes the panel, he can see a key underneath.
Picking it up, this time I have Rupert reach his hand into the drawer.
“There should be a keyhole in there. Can you find it?”
“Unn, Uhh….I found it!”
Rupert immediately inserts the key inside and turns it.
1564
Doing so, the wall slightly moved open and a hidden door appeared.
“This is…….?”
“Apparently this castle is full of hidden rooms and secret passages. Prince Arnold told me about them.
That prince really seems to be familiar with this castle.”
“I didn’t know about it at all……but now we are safe!”
Saying so, Rupert tries to enter the hidden passage.
However, I stopped him and put a finger on my mouth. It’s a gesture for him to be quiet.
I then tell the knights and Alois to hide in the room.
A room inside the castle is full of stuff.
There are many places that even an adult can hide behind.
I took Rupert and hid behind the curtain.
As we finished hiding, the door burst open.
“Where did they go!?”
“They are not here!?”
“No! Take a look! There’s a hidden door! They must have gone through it!”
“So they panicked and forgot to close the entrance huh! Follow them!!”
The soldiers confidently open the hidden door and enter inside.
Seeing that they all went in, I came out of the curtain and closed the hidden door behind them.
“Use the key to lock it, Prince Rupert.”
“Amazing! Now they are trapped! How did you know that they would go inside?”
“People believe what they see. If they thought that we ran or hid in there, they would follow us in.
Moreover, I didn’t just lock them in there. I dropped them straight to hell.”
“Eh?”
Seeing Rupert cocking his head, I put my hand on his head.
“Most of the secret passages and hidden rooms in the castle were made by the emperors of previous
generations. Naturally, they have installed plenty of traps to keep away intruders. Only the Imperial
Family alone is an exception. That’s why just in case, I had you open and close it yourself.”
1565
“Th, then, what about the soldiers that went in there earlier……?”
“Who knows. I don’t know what kind of trap is in there but they shouldn’t be able to get out of there
any time soon. Since they can not expect any rescue either, they will probably die instantly or suffer
there until they die. Either way, there’s no doubt that they just stepped into hell.”
Hearing my words, Rupert’s shoulders started to shake.
He probably feels the weight of their death huh.
“I will not say that it is okay. But as long as someone tries to take your life, you have the right to fight
back. You and I just exercised that right. So remember this well. When you try to kill someone, your
life can also be taken away like this. The enemy also has the same right as you after all.”
Hearing that, Rupert quietly nodded.
That is probably too early for a 10 years old child.
However, this situation doesn’t allow Alois or Rupert to be treated as children.
“Let’s go. Just a little more and we will reach the throne room.”
The enemy has come to attack us as expected but that is no longer the case.
From now on, it’s time to start the counterattack.
1566
SPT Chapter 236
I obtained Klee………but at what cost……my meals? my livelihood? Half my salary?
But that smoll bunny bomb though…….
-Mr.Graverobber
The Knight Commander
Personally, I do not often have the impression that someone is dangerous based on their strength.
After all the other SS-rank adventurers and Elna are one of the most out of norm people on this
continent. I could say that they are monsters that casually took a step beyond the limit of mankind.
Right now I am currently having that impression. Something that I haven’t experienced in a long time.
That is how strong Alida who is protecting the entrance to the throne room is. She seems so invincible
that the act of entering the throne room looks like an impossibility.
The enemy unit that is trying to breach the throne room is an elite one.
Their number is over a hundred and most of them have already turned into a cold lifeless body in
front of the throne room.
They were all single-handedly cut down by Alida.
“Guh! All men to assault formation! We are going to take her down together!!”
The man who seems to be their commander tried to encourage the soldiers.
However, the commander has already lost one of his arms.
No, I should say that he is lucky to escape her at the cost of only one arm.
There are about ten of them left but not one of them is unharmed.
They were the people who were lucky enough to escape Alida’s blade.
However, right now they are trying to jump back in and getting through with a mass assault.
The door to the throne room is large but it is impossible for ten adults to rush through all at once.
They will eventually have to take turns.
And that is what Alida wants.
A clear sound reverberates.
1567
Fast. That was the word that came to my mind.
Alida cut off the head of all the soldiers that rushed at her.
The only one left is their commander.
“Ridiculous…….my unit has trained so hard…….”
“If a well-trained unit can defeat an Imperial Knight then His Majesty wouldn’t use us so heavily you
know.”
“Damn it…….why do you still obey the Emperor even with that kind of power? Don’t you hate him!?
That Emperor killed your younger brother you know!!”
A desperate attempt at persuasion.
However, it is also something that accurately pierces the gap in Alida’s heart.
Alida has a reason to resent the Imperial Family.
Since I was directly involved in the incident, that was something I was worried about as well.
However.
“My younger brother took responsibility for his actions by taking his own life. It was not His Majesty’s
fault. If someone is responsible……then it is our family’s fault since we failed to teach him the
harshness of the world. My only regret is that my family has caused a great deal of trouble to His
Majesty.”
“Do you not love your family!?”
“I love them. However, I have spent a lot of time at His Majesty’s side since I became the Knight
Commander. How he has been a friend of my father since childhood, how much he thinks about the
Empire. I know that all too well. Between His Majesty who has spent his every day meeting with
people and dealing with paperwork that came to him from all over the Empire and a self-entitled
younger brother who acted out because he was only content with the fame of our house, don’t you
think that it is clear who I will favor?”
Alida said so and decapitated the commander.
She then looked at us who were observing the situation around the corner.
“—-I am glad that you are safe. Your Highness Rupert.”
Alida gently smiled at Rupert who peeked out from behind my back.
However, Rupert’s face cramped up.
After all, there are countless corpses piled up around Alida, creating a sea of blood around her.
1568
When Alida noticed that, she apologized and used wind magic to blow the corpses and blood to the
other end of the passage.
“With this, it is a little cleaner. Your Highness, this way please.”
“Ah, U, Un…….”
“So it was Earl Simmel who escorted His Highness. You have my gratitude.”
“No, I only acted as I was told. It is all thanks to His Highness Arnold and Grau, his strategist that I
managed to bring His Highness here.”
Alois said so and bowed his head.
However, Alois’s expression was like he had said something he shouldn’t have.
He probably thought that it was bad to give out my name.
She did say that she sides with the Emperor to the enemy but she probably didn’t hold any favorable
feelings toward me and Leo who was the direct cause of her brother’s death.
However, Alida showed an unexpected reaction.
“I see. So His Highness Arnold started to move. Was it His Highness who brought you to the castle,
Grau? The strategist that repelled ten thousand imperial soldiers.”
“Indeed. I do have the intention to help Alois even without his request though.”
“…….With the situation as it is, it would be better if I refrain from asking about your true identity here,
correct?”
“That would be helpful.”
“At least, if you don’t use that illusion magic, I might be able to trust you more readily though?”
“You want me to show you my real face? Forgive me but as long as the Imperial Army is hostile toward
me, I will have to do this as a safety measure.”
Alida quietly nodded to my words.
It seems that she will not ask any more questions.
After that, Alida escorts Rupert into the throne room.
However, I stop following them.
“Grau? Are you not coming?”
Rupert puzzledly tilted his head to the side when he saw that I didn’t enter the throne room.
1569
I give him a nod.
“Yes, I still have something to do.”
“B, But…..there should be a lot of soldiers below us right…..? Grau said so yourself?”
“Exactly. There are still many enemies left. It would be safer to stay here but there are still many that
are in need of help. Prince Arnold is planning to let all the possible hostages escape outside the castle.
It is indeed a good plan but that is impossible for him to accomplish alone.”
“Grau……”
Rupert uneasily looked at me.
I can see anxiety in his eyes.
However, Rupert took a deep breath and spoke to me again.
“……Arnold-aniue and Christa-aneue are still out there. Can I……entrust them to you?”
“I understand.”
Rupert brightened up at my words.
In the short while that we were together, Rupert has grown.
He came to be able to think not only about himself but Christa as well.
I don’t think that a child should grow up in a situation like this but I am still happy at my brother’s
growth.
“Alois. I will leave Prince Rupert in your care.”
“Yes. Please be careful too, Grau.”
“You too. Now them, sir Knight Commander, I will be excusing myself.”
“Shall I have one of my subordinates accompany you?”
I smiled at Alida’s offer.
Rather than a support, I’m sure that she wanted someone to keep an eye on me.
That’s why I shook my head.
“I shall refrain. I would stand out too much together with your subordinate after all.”
“I think that you are already standing out enough given your appearance though?”
“I have some plans to deal with that. Your worry is unneeded.”
1570
Alida didn’t say anything more.
She probably thinks that it is useless even if she pushes her subordinate on me.
Alida herself shouldn’t have many men to spare as well.
“—–as the Knight Commander of the Imperial Knight Order, I am ashamed to ask you this but please
protect the Imperial Family. I can not move from this spot.”
“You don’t need to say that. For a wandering strategist like me, I can’t take a liking to a rebellion like
this. After all, this is the most condemned act on the battlefield. As someone who lives on the
battlefield, I can’t calm down unless I can teach these people that it is impossible to reach true success
with a betrayal. I will have to teach them what miserable end awaits the traitors.”
Saying so, I left the throne room.
Then, I briefly activated my detection magic. The closest group right now is Christa and Trau-niisan.
It seems that they failed to join up with my eldest brother’s aides but apparently Christa is still safe.
The Imperial Army doesn’t seem to be aware of their location yet.
Rather, it seems that they can’t see the room they are currently hiding in.
“It is so ironic that the army betrayed us while the kids who have just met each other only a few days
before are still holding each other’s hands huh.”
At Christa’s side is Wendy, the dignitary from the Elf Village.
Christa probably took her out of her room. That must be why the plan was messed up and they failed
to meet up with my brother’s aides.
Still, Wendy’s illusion is hiding them from the Imperial Army.
They should be able to hold out somehow before I get there.
There is one concern though.
“Trau-niisan, will it be okay……..your rationality.”
On top of that, Rita is also at Christa’s side.
That would be like a heaven for Trau-niisan.
It would be nice if he doesn’t burst with joy and go crazy before I get there though.
Well, even like that, he is quite capable. He probably wouldn’t do anything stupid in a serious situation
like this. Definitely. Probably.
1571
That’s what I want to believe.
“……let’s hurry.”
Muttering so, I deployed a transfer gate.
1572
SPT Chapter 237
Automated post…..got to head to the office today.
-Mr.Graverobber
Trau‐aniue
I transferred to a room a little further away from where Christa and the others are hiding in. There, I
undo the illusion and revert to the appearance of Arnold.
Just like that, I quickly open up a secret passage. This passage will lead me to where Christa is.
I ran through the passage and came out inside the closet in the room they are hiding in.
Then
“Dufufufu…..three little girls…….a dreamy little girl, an energetic little girl, and Lolifu!! Precious! So
Precious! I feel like anything is possible for me!”
While muttering such a thing, a pervert is peeping at Christa and the girls from inside the closet.
Moreover, he is doing pushup for some reason.
I don’t know whether because he is tired or excited but he is panting heavily.
For the time being, he looked so disgusting so I just stepped on him.
“Oi, what are you doing ?”
“UGH!? Th, that voice, Arnold!? What are you intending to do, stepping on your brother in a situation
like this!? I don’t remember raising such a child you know!”
“I don’t recall being raised by you though. Also, Trau-niisan, I stepped on you exactly because we are
in an emergency you know. My brother is about to commit a crime after all.”
“YES! Gordon just started a rebellion! We have to stop him!”
“No, I didn’t mean Gordon alone. You were about to commit a crime too Trau-niisan.”
“M, Me too!? Impossible! Which part of me that look guilty!?”
Trau-niisan shouted so as if my accusation was unthinkable for him.
In response, I shouted back without intending to lose to him.
“EVERY PART! FROM HEAD TO TOES, NO MATTER WHERE I LOOK AT YOU, YOU ARE GUILTY!”
1573
“EVERY PART!? YOU INTEND TO DENY MY WHOLE EXISTENCE!? IS IT A CRIME TO LOOK AT LITTLE
GIRLS!?”
“OBVIOUSLY! WEREN’T YOU JUST PANTING WHILE LOOKING AT THEM!”
“IT WAS BECAUSE I WAS DOING PUSHUPS!”
“THEN WHY WERE YOU DOING PUSHUPS INSIDE A CLOSET IN THE FIRST PLACE?”
“OBVIOUSLY, TO PROTECT THE GIRLS IN CASE OF EMERGENCY! HOLDING A SWORD FOR A LONG
TIME IS TIRING YOU KNOW!”
“AND YOU JUST STARTED TRAINING NOW!? IT’S ALREADY TOO LATE!”
“NOTHING IS TOO LATE FOR ME!”
Saying so, Trau-niisan resumed his pushups.
I think that would just tire him out though. You can’t just conjure up your muscles right.
When I thought so, the closet was opened.
It was Christa.
“Trau-aniue, noisy.”
“M, My deepest apology……..Miss Christa…….B, But it’s Arnold’s fault…….”
“Don’t blame others. If Aniue starts yelling Wendy will be afraid so be quiet.”
“Yes…….I’m sorry……Ahh, I was able to talk to Miss Christa! FuFun! Are you envious of me now?
Arnold!”
The hierarchy here is completely clear.
After directing a gaze filled with pity at Trau-niisan, Christa pulled on my arm.
“Al-niisama, welcome…….come here.”
“Th, Then, me too……”
“Trau-aniue just stays there. Wendy is scared of you.”
“Yes…….”
Christa said so and Trau-niisan obediently shut the closet door.
For Christa to tell him not to approach them, he must have done something huh.
While thinking so, I was guided to the center of the room.
1574
There, Wendy and Rita are having a small tea party with tea and pastries.
“Al-nii! Welcome!”
“I am glad that you are safe. Your Highness.”
Rita cheerfully greeted me as usual while Wendy modestly bowed at me.
Well……..this place is so peaceful.
Totally different from Rupert’s side.
Well, the three here had their fair share of danger after all.
Both Christa and Rita’s lives had been endangered before and Wendy was forced to cooperate with
the Dark Elves just until recently.
Compared to that, I guess they can still deal with this level of situation.
“I’m glad that you three are safe. Was it Christa who helped Wendy-dono?”
“Un……she will get caught if she stays in her room.”
“I am truly sorry…….because of me, your plan had gone awry…….”
“Don’t mind it. It is because of Wendy’s illusion that we managed to hide so far after all.”
Christa said so and smiled at Wendy.
Even so, this is Christa who is always expressionless that we are talking about.
I am glad that she can smile now but it seems that Wendy is that important of a friend to Christa.
Since they are friends who shared a secret with each other, their relationship might be similar to mine
and Finne.
“Al-nii, how’s the castle?”
“The throne room is still under the Knight Commander’s protection. Other than that place, the castle is
mostly overrun with soldiers. There are still only a few on the upper floors but I think they will push
up soon.”
The Rainbow Celestial Jewels which is their aim is inside the throne room.
If Gordon did not prepare any jewel in advance, it will be essential for him to take control of the
throne room.
In case he prepared one, it means that there are three Rainbow Celestial Jewels that he still can’t get
his hands on.
1575
If he thinks about a countermeasure for the holy sword, Gordon’s goal would be to have four of them
in his hands. That’s why he will aim to get one of the remaining three.
Two are inside the throne room and even I don’t even know where the last one is.
This is the Prime Minister we are talking about, he must have already moved them away from where it
was originally stored.
It would be hidden in a place that could not be easily found. In the end, the most certain way would be
taking the ones in the throne room.
But since there is one more hidden in the castle, if they can find it, they will not have to deal with
Alida.
That’s why they will not pour all their effort into the throne room alone. No, they can’t.
Such a nasty plan.
The reason why the enemy can’t gather their forces in one place and currently had to disperse all over
the castle was probably that their thought could be read from the start. All that left is to minimize the
damage in case there is a traitor among their ranks.
Well, the Prime Minister probably didn’t place that much importance on that measure. He did place
most of the jewels under the trusty captains of the Imperial Knight Order after all.
The problem is that the trusty captains turned out to be traitors.
“Trau-niisan. Can you hear me?”
“What is it? I am busy doing push ups though?”
“Then please keep doing that and listen. Is there any merit for an Imperial Knight Captain to turn to
Gordon’s side?”
“Almost none at all. If a captain truly betrayed us then it is safe to assume that the captain bears a
heavy grudge against Father. Or perhaps, they had some circumstances that forced them to do so.”
“So they will not pledge their allegiance to Gordon?”
“What would they do under Gordon who heavily relies on the army? If they want to become successful
in the army then they wouldn’t become an imperial knight in the first place. Moreover, Gordon’s
rebellion is too risky. Whether it succeeds or not, the chance is only fifty-fifty.”
“Right. Even if they can defeat Father, the Lords of each territory will never recognize his claim.”
“Correct. The Lords would favor different princes or princesses to become their emperor. The only
people who can compete with Gordon are only Leonard or Eric. However, Leonard is currently outside
the capital. Since he is not at the Emperor’s side in a crisis, he will be seen as unreliable instead.”
1576
It seems that Trau-niisan’s thought is the same as mine.
In that case, it is safe to assume that someone is using the flashiness of Gordon’s rebellion to lurk in
the dark.
I get a feeling that that person is trying to stir up the situation.
I can clearly see the dark threads that are manipulating matters from behind the scenes but I can’t
trace it back to the real mastermind.
No matter what I do, all I have are only speculations. Moreover, I do not have time to carefully look
into it in the first place.
After all, we have to deal with Gordon first.
“So he provided a good cover huh, that Gordon.”
“I do think so. I don’t know what the person himself is thinking though.”
It seems that the mastermind doesn’t care even if we find out.
After all, he made it so that everyone thinks that it is impossible for him to manipulate the situation so
far.
When I thought so, the soldiers’ shout began to echo outside.
Apparently, our long-awaited escorts have arrived.
“Everyone, get ready to move. Trau-niisan, I think they’ve arrived.”
“It seems so.”
Saying so, Trau-niisan came out of the closet covered in sweat.
Seeing that Wendy let out a short scream and went to hide behind Rita.
“Th, that will leave a scar….”
“It’s Trau-aniue’s fault. It’s because you suddenly started interrogating Wendy.”
“You did that?”
“I couldn’t control myself when I saw Lolifu so…….I blanked out a little.”
Trau-niisan seems to regret his actions.
Seriously, if he isn’t like this then he would be considered a good person.
Christa said that it was because of Wendy’s illusion that they went unnoticed but the fact that this is
an inconspicuous room also played a part.
1577
It was probably Trau-niisan who chose this room.
Although it was something that can easily be overlooked, he did a good job.
“Trau-aniue, smelly.”
“GAN! My own sister told me that I am smelly!?”
Christa has no mercy on Trau-niisan.
Lize-aneue also instructed her to call him aniue instead of nii-sama as well.
In a sense, the person that Lize-aneue is most on guard against is Trau-niisan.
Trau-niisan who turned deeply depressed shifted his gaze toward the door.
He then speaks in a dignified voice.
“You may enter. Wings of my brother.”
With permission given, the door was opened.
1578
SPT Chapter 238
Have to go out to the office again today….and when I got back yesterday multiple plugins on the site
were acting weird and I don’t have time to fix it yet so I disabled like half of them, I don’t think it will
affect your reading experience though, probably………
-Mr.Graverobber
The Old Generation
“It’s been a long time. Your Highness Traugott.”
“Marx and Manuel, at your service, Your Highness.”
When the door opened, two men knelt before Trau-niisan and gave their greetings.
Both have bright blonde hair and eyes of the same color.
The elder brother, Marx von Raiffeisen is a fearless good-looking man.
The younger brother, Manuel von Raiffeisen has a gentle appearance, and perhaps due to his baby-
face, he looks much younger than his elder brother.
As Wings of the Crown Prince, if they had the chance to continue to support him, they would become
quite influential people in the Empire.
Even the Emperor himself thinks that it is a waste that they would only serve the Crown Prince.
The only person who could move them would probably be Trau-niisan alone.
“Good work, you two. I’m grateful that you were willing to listen to my unreasonable request.”
“What are you saying, Your Highness. You are the younger brother of our lord, the late Crown Prince.”
“We shall rush to your aid whenever you are in crisis.”
“I appreciate your loyalty to my brother. I apologize for using your loyalty to him. I swear, I shall never
use my brother’s name like this again.”
Their loyalty is toward the deceased Crown Prince. Trau-niisan never mistook that.
That’s why he thanked them for their loyalty and vowed not to use it anymore.
That would be the best way to grasp people’s hearts.
1579
It would be considered a great move if he deliberately pulled that off but I’m sure that his words did
not come from that kind of calculated move but his true intention instead.
He is truly sorry for using their loyalty toward our eldest brother.
It must be because Trau-niisan is like this that they came to his aid.
“We and our subordinates have already taken control of this floor. Let’s move out, Your Highness.”
“I understand. Arnold, I will leave the children in your care okay?”
“Yes.”
Trau-niisan said so and left the room.
After that, the Raiffeisen brothers follow him. When we left the room, the people who seemed to be
their subordinates were watching the surroundings outside.
There are about ten of them but these people are all the former subordinates of the late Crown Prince.
I can see strength oozing out from how they handle themselves.
Even though they have been away from the battle for quite some time, every single one of them should
be strong enough to handle an A-rank adventurer by themself.
The Raiffeisen brothers who lead them should be even stronger. The elder brother, Marx was once
considered as a talented man who could go toe to toe with Lize-aneue while even the younger brother,
Manuel has the ability on par with an AA-rank adventurer.
Their battle senses should be dulled and they shouldn’t be as powerful as in their heydays but it is
helpful to have this much strength on our side right now.
“Manuel-dono.”
“Please do not mind the honorific, Your Highness Arnold.”
“Then, Manuel. Did you disguise yourselves as soldiers and infiltrated the castle?”
The Raiffeisen brothers and their men are all wearing military uniforms.
The black military uniform of the Imperial Army.
I did consider such a plan myself but judging from their appearance, it seems to be quite effective.
“That’s correct, Your Highness. The soldiers were gathered by His Highness Gordon but only the
higher-ups know each other. The lower rank soldiers can’t distinguish themselves. However, it seems
that they have decided on a secret code that they can use to identify their ally.”
“What is the code?”
1580
“Apparently, it is [For Her Highness Zandra]. I heard it when they were checking each other and it
indeed worked so I assume that to be their code.”
“Zandra? Is it because they are cooperating?”
“I can’t say for sure. However, despite the fact that His Highness Gordon is outside the castle, the
Celestial Sphere was activated. There must be others in the Imperial Family who cooperated with him.
Among all the Imperial Family here, Her Highness Zandra is the most likely. Besides, the two have long
been in conflict. Within a rebellion started by His Highness Gordon, it would be unexpected for an
outsider to mention the name of Her Highness Zandra to them. That was probably why they chose it.”
I nodded at Manuel’s explanation.
So it is almost certain that Zandra is cooperating with Gordon huh.
But the soldiers don’t know that so they use her name as a secret code.
As a code, I can’t say that it is that good but if the code is too difficult, it can still cause confusion
among their ranks.
I guess that’s their limit.
“Many soldiers under the enemy’s command are confused. Most of them were skeptical while obeying
the orders of their superiors. The order given to them was also vague. They were told to take control
of the castle and capture everyone inside. It seems that only a few of them were actually given detailed
orders.”
“So they do not have complete control over their men huh.”
“I have no intention to give Gordon an excuse but it is indeed a daunting task to completely control all
the soldiers. The generals that are participating in this rebellion are extremists. They simply want a
war so that they can use it to obtain military achievements. Their only desire is to advance their
career and bring honor to their names. They are supporting Gordon because they have something to
gain, even if it’s not Gordon, taking control over those people would be a difficult thing to do.”
Trau-niisan explains.
Hearing him, Rita nodded. I thought that she managed to learn something using this opportunity but
judging from her expression, it seems that she doesn’t really understand anything huh.
Still, it was indeed a difficult topic.
It is easy to manipulate those who seek to benefit themselves but once they grouped up, that would be
difficult.
Why?
You can bait one of them with what they want but if you group them up, their interests will conflict.
1581
If you favor a certain person, others will be dissatisfied and distance themselves from you.
That being said,
“Gordon should know that well. He’s the type that would leave things like that alone. For Gordon, who
never trusted others and only relied on his own strength, anyone who refused to follow him is
unneeded. He probably thinks that there are many replacements he can choose from.”
“That’s correct. I thought of him better in the past but recently, he has grown worse. He doesn’t trust
anyone because of his arrogance. Nothing good will come from relying on other countries to start a
rebellion. Gordon may think that he can suppress it with force but once a rebellion occurs, chaos will
spread inside the country. Moreover, now we have to deal with outside threats as well. There’s
nothing good coming from it at all.”
“Even so, Gordon still did it. He even joined hands with Zandra. He must have done it out of
desperation.”
And it was me and Leo who drove him into the corner.
Even if it is only a small part, we do share the responsibility for this rebellion.
Couldn’t we handle it better? I couldn’t help but think about such a thing but there’s no point
regretting anything now.
The fire has already started. Putting it out should be the highest priority.
When I was thinking so, Marx who was walking in front of us signaled us to stop.
“Come out. I know that you are there.”
Marx said as he looked at the corner.
A person appeared from the corner.
The man has his stomach wrapped up in a bloody bandage. His expression is ghastly pale.
He is also donning a white cloak.
Standing there is the Captain of the Eighth Imperial Knight Corp, Oliver von Rolbach.
“Isn’t that a face I haven’t seen in a long time…….”
“Captain Oliver!? What happened!? That wound!?”
Oliver is in the same generation as the Raiffeisen brothers.
He had been serving Father as a captain in the Imperial Knight Order since the two were still serving
the Crown Prince.
1582
Naturally, they are familiar with each other.
“Haa, Haa…..the Tenth Corp Captain……..Raphael betrayed us……..”
“Impossible……..Raphael should adore His Majesty like his own father……”
“I thought so too……but it seems that’s not the case…….please relay that to the Knight
Commander…….I can’t move anymore……”
Saying so, Oliver leaned against the wall and slid down to the floor.
Blood spills on the wall and Oliver himself also vomit a small amount of blood from his mouth.
His wound is quite deep.
He probably came here while fighting off his pursuers.
It’s clear that his life can’t be saved anymore.
“…….Captain Oliver. For the loyalty you showed to the Empire, I thank you.”
“Please stop that……Your Highness Traugott…..being thankful to a fool like me………I couldn’t protect
anything…….the only thing I have left is shame………”
Oliver smiles deprecatingly.
For Oliver, who has served Father for a long time, this is the biggest blunder of his life.
And there is no chance for him to correct it.
Everyone had lost their words.
However, only Rita alone was different.
“There is no shame in it at all! Rita thinks that you are amazing! You came here without giving up after
all!!”
Saying so, Rita held Oliver’s hand.
Perhaps he found his hand much colder than she thought, she flinched a little but she never let go.
“……..to think that I would be comforted by a child…….”
“Rita is not a child! Rita is a knight candidate! One day Rita will become an Imperial Knight and protect
Cu-chan! I will become a knight who never gives up like you!!”
Just how much those words have saved Oliver.
Hearing her words, he smiled and stood up with all his power.
1583
“If a child is going so far for me…..then I can’t allow myself to show any more of my embarrassing side
huh……”
“Un! Let’s go to the throne room together! If we treat that wound then–!”
“It’s…….already too late for me……..I can’t go with you……”
Oliver takes off his white mantle.
He then used the sword he was holding to cut the bloody part of it off.
“Ahh! That’s proof of an imperial knight!”
“Yeah, that’s right……..that’s why I am giving it to you. Take good care of it.”
Oliver put the white mantle on Rita.
Rita who just received a mantle that can only be worn by an imperial knight was confused but Oliver
only gently stroked her head.
“Go, my junior. If you are Her Highness’s Imperial Knight then never leave her side. In a situation like
this, those who remain at the Imperial Family’s side are Imperial Knights………fight for them with
pride, Knight Rita.”
Oliver said so and slowly looked at the way he came.
A large number of soldiers are coming our way.
“Leave this place to me…..I will buy you some time, Raiffeisen brothers.”
“…..I pray for your luck.”
“Luck huh…..right. Maybe that’s exactly what I need……..Your Highnesses…..please tell His Majesty that
this Oliver apologized for his blunder…..”
After he said that, Oliver started walking toward the soldiers.
In response, they began to rush at him.
I carry Christa while the Raiffeisen brothers’ subordinates take care of Rita and Wendy.
After all, children can’t catch up with our pace.
“It’s not so bad being a stepping stone for the future generation huh……COME AT ME……Which one of
you will take the head of Captain Oliver of the Imperial Knight Order? My head won’t come for cheap
you know!”
Oliver shouted and started engaging the soldiers.
1584
As we ran, Rita kept her eyes on Oliver’s back until it couldn’t be seen anymore.
1585
SPT Chapter 239
It’s on the Emperor’s side this time
-Mr.Graverobber
Perfect Positions
When the Celestial Sphere was activated, Lize decided to stop her fight with Gordon and head to
escort the Emperor.
Seeing that, Gordon mockingly smiled at Lize.
“What’s wrong? Running away? [Marshal]”
“I don’t care what you think. I didn’t come here to defeat you, I came to protect Father. If you can not
even understand that then it is appropriate that you remain a general forever.”
Gordon, who received that harsh reply, grit his teeth and ordered his men to pursue her.
However, his men couldn’t get past Lize’s men.
He was forced to reorganize his troops before beginning his pursuit.
Using that time, Lize immediately headed to join the Emperor.
“Father. Are you safe?”
“Yeah, [for the time being].”
Emperor Johannes looked up at the sky.
It was the first time that the Celestial Sphere covering the sky of the capital looked so eerie.
It has been 25 years since Johannes took the throne.
Although he has seen the sphere before in an operation test, he never thought that it would be used to
confine him inside the capital like this.
Letting out a sigh, Johannes posts a question to Franz who is standing next to him.
“Is this also a part of your calculation?”
“I did expect this to happen but…..this is the worst kind of development. If the Celestial Sphere was
activated this fast, it is possible that the Imperial Knights in the castle were killed…..or that they have
betrayed us.”
1586
“I hope it is the former.”
“I agree with you, Your Majesty. However, this is the time to act. Marshal, my apology but could you
secure us a base of operation?”
“We have already secured the area around the east gate.”
Lize immediately replied.
A separate unit had already taken control of the east gate beforehand as it was supposed to be the
escape route for the Emperor.
Since the Imperial Capital is surrounded by high walls, unless you can fly, the only way to leave are the
gates.
Naturally, the enemy is also aware of that and they had already dispatched units to secure each gate as
insurance.
As the unit tasked to control the gate was under the mindset that they were the one doing a surprise
attack, Lize’s unit managed to ambush them and took them down in no time.
However.
“No matter how far we escape, we are outnumbered. It is impossible for the force you prepared
outside to destroy the Celestial Sphere right?”
“In case that Your Majesty is stuck inside the capital, the Brave will take command. Please hold on
until they arrive.”
“Is he planning to use the holy sword on the capital?”
“I wanted to avoid it if possible but right now we have no other choice.”
He wanted to let the Emperor escape without resorting to that if possible.
That was the reason he summoned Lize here but now it is impossible for them to escape anymore.
The situation is forcing them to put their hope on the forces outside.
“This is rare for you, Prime Minister. Normally you would be able to avoid people forcing your hand
like this.”
“I have no excuse…….once this incident is over, I’d like to take responsibility for this with my life.”
“It is not your fault, Prime Minister. Don’t say such depressing things in a situation like this.”
“No, it is my responsibility. I thought that I could use this chance to rid us of the pus that infested the
Empire……..but I didn’t think that it had infested us to this extent. It is my responsibility as I can’t root
them out, Your Majesty.”
1587
Franz thought that this case can be dealt with by summoning Lize here.
After all, Gordon’s rebellion was expected. On top of that, Franz wanted to use this chance to smoke
out those who are lurking behind the scenes.
Franz never underestimated Gordon but he never thought that he would be able to cause such a large-
scale rebellion either. Especially when Gordon has been overconfident in his power, he was under the
impression that even if Gordon causes a rebellion, he can somehow deal with it. It was only as simple
as mustering stronger force than Gordon could gather to his side.
In fact, Lize alone should be enough to suppress Gordon’s rebellion.
However, even the Imperial Knights joined the rebellion. Moreover, more generals agreed to join
Gordon than he expected.
Gordon alone can not accomplish this. Even with Zandra involved, the damage caused by this incident
is too great.
There is an invisible hand that is manipulating the situation from behind the scenes. He thought that
there must be someone like that and tried to smoke them out but even in this crucial moment, they
are still cautious and never show him anything that he can trace back to them.
As a result, Gordon’s rebellion has gone out of his control.
For Franz, who has stabilized the Empire for so long, this was a defeat and a blunder that he wants to
make up for with his own life.
However.
“We can discuss who to blame later. Besides…..it is my own son that rebelled. I am the one who bears
the heaviest responsibility.”
Johannes said so and looked to the front.
It is easy to grief or face down in regret.
But doing that would mean he is waiting around for Gordon to defeat him.
His predecessors would not allow him to leave this world without clearing the mess he caused.
If he is an emperor then it is natural for him to deal with this.
“If I am killed here, it will be passed down to later generations that causing a rebellion is effective.
That is what we must avoid the most. That’s why I will not die here.”
“Please rest assured. Even if Father says that you want to die, I will never let you.”
After Lize said that to Johannes, she gave an order to the soldiers in the area to withdraw to the east
gate.
1588
There are soldiers and the men from the Imperial Capital Garrison around who don’t know about the
rebellion but she did not include them into their force.
After all, she can’t be sure if they are enemies or allies.
They who only stare blankly at Lize and the Emperor so far were the people she can not bring herself
to trust so readily.
That’s why she shouted.
“ALL SOLDIERS!! LISTEN TO MY COMMAND!! IF YOU ARE LOYAL TO THE EMPEROR AND THE
PEOPLE OF THE EMPIRE THEN PROTECT YOUR PEOPLE! WHOEVER TOOK ADVANTAGE OF THIS
TURMOIL AND BRING HARM TO THE PEOPLE WILL BE CONSIDERED THE ENEMY OF HIS MAJESTY
THE EMPEROR!!”
Lize shouted so as she straddles on her horse.
It is not possible for her to bring them under her direct command but leaving them alone would be a
waste.
That’s why Lize gave them instructions.
Protect the people.
Hearing her words, many of them started to act.
Evacuating the spectators who were left behind the arena, helping those who were frozen with fear,
there was a lot left for them to do.
As if it was natural, they took off their military uniforms.
After all, the only thing the people know is that Gordon has led the army and started a rebellion.
Since the people were afraid of those in military uniforms, they took them off to make it easier for the
civilian to trust them.
“With this, they will at least help the citizens evacuate.”
“Umu, the problem left is the castle huh.”
“If this is prolonged, they can take their time to conquer the castle. They might resort to using
hostages to force our hand as well.”
“…….I am fine. But Lizelotte, will you be alright?”
As long as Lize is his enemy, Gordon will definitely aim for Christa, her sister.
That is a natural development but Lize only smiled.
1589
“I believe in my brothers and sister. I am sure that they will not quietly let themselves become
hostages.”
“…..I see.”
“Please don’t worry. I have already resolved myself. Father’s protection is my highest priority.”
“……sorry.”
Lize quietly nodded to the Emperor’s word.
She then shifted her eyes toward the castle.
It is not that she is not worried about them.
When Johannes was still young, there were many wars with other countries.
That’s why as a part of the Imperial Family, she had stood on the battlefield from a young age.
However, after Johannes began to settle down, such wars began to disappear.
That’s why her younger brothers and sister don’t know the battlefield.
The campaign that Al and Leo took part in as their first campaign was only something on the level of
bandits subjugation. Moreover, their presences weren’t even needed there.
However, Lize knew.
Her brothers and sister are growing up in their own way.
“I will leave that side to you.”
After she muttered that to herself, Lize focused on what she could do here.
She doesn’t think that she will lose to Gordon but if the battle is prolonged, her men will be fatigued.
In the end, humans can not overcome the violence of numbers.
How many days can they hold out? Will the reinforcement arrive in time.
She wants to expect help from inside the capital but right now she is forced to expect help from those
outsides.
Fortunately, the people who are perfect to deal with this situation from the outside are currently not
inside the imperial capital.
“Black Twin Prince huh……was it a well-calculated move or a simple coincidence that they are in the
perfect position to handle this I wonder.”
Leo is outside together with Elna while Al, who knows all about the castle, remains inside.
1590
Their positions will cause problems for the enemy while their ally will benefit from it. That’s why the
future moves of those two will be important to solve this situation.
Everyone knows how Leo has grown but those two are twins. If Leo is growing then so does Al. Lize
was certain of that.
However, regardless of their moves, they will need time.
She has to earn them as much time as possible.
Telling herself so, Lize escorts the Emperor to the east gate which will act as their emergency base.
1591
SPT Chapter 240
Don’t know if he will see this here but thanks for the coffee. Dahlia is like an Oasis story for me too.
-Mr.Graverobber
Each Specialized Field
Going back a little in time.
Shortly before the Celestial Sphere activated.
Finne and Mia who infiltrated the Inner Palace were surprised at a large number of soldiers they
found there.
Hiding in the room, the two watch the soldiers.
“There are quite a lot of them……”
“Maybe they are planning to take control of the inner palace first? Even so, I think that this number is
still strange.”
Finne quietly analyzes the enemy’s intentions.
First, she must grasp the situation and analyze them. That is what Al always does.
The inner palace is wide. But to use this number of soldiers to take control over it is strange.
If they want to capture all the consorts inside the inner palace first they should mobilize more men. If
that is the case then that shouldn’t be their immediate goal.
Then what is their aim here?
If their main goal is not to take complete control over the whole inner palace then it must be
somewhere smaller.
“Capturing Mitsuba-sama? But that wouldn’t make sense given where they are going.”
The place where the soldiers are heading to, and where they are most concentrated is in the opposite
direction of Mitsuba’s room.
From there, Finne made a deduction.
“It seems that they are most likely trying to free that person.”
“They are trying to free someone?”
1592
“The Fifth Consort Zuzan and the Second Princess Zandra. They need someone with the imperial
family’s blood to activate the Celestial Sphere. From His Highness Gordon’s personality, he isn’t the
type that would directly command his men here at the castle. I am sure that he will directly head to
confront His Majesty. In that case, they need someone of the Imperial Family to activate the Celestial
Sphere inside the castle……..that’s why they are trying to free Her Highness Zandra. I don’t think that
my theory will be that far off from the truth.”
She must be thinking of making her move after the Celestial Sphere is activated but if she gives Gordon
her cooperation then it will be easier for her to make a move.
Finne thought so and told Mia her plan.
“If their purpose is not to capture the consorts then this is our chance. Let’s head to Mitsuba-sama’s
side.”
“Understood. What do we do about the other consorts though?”
“There are five other consorts in the inner palace. From the third to seventh consorts, the fourth and
the fifth are on the enemy side. Our allies are the sixth and seventh consort. The only one I can’t read
what she is thinking at all is the Third Consort alone.”
Leaving the room they were hiding in, they headed straight to Mitsuba’s room.
They walked down the hallway without hiding themselves but since the soldiers went in the opposite
direction, Finne thinks that they will be okay.
Above all, even if they encounter an enemy, she has Mia at her side.
She doesn’t want to be too cautious and wastes precious time now. If they can join up with Mitsuba
before the enemy makes their moves, the difficulty of escaping will be greatly reduced.
“The Third Consort……she is the mother of the Second Prince right?”
“Yes, since she is the mother of the prince Al-sama is most on guard against, I am sure that she will do
something.”
Eric’s mother.
There was no doubt that she is the person worthy of paying their utmost attention to.
It is either that she take advantage of this situation and do something or taking the initiative to escape
first.
While under the impression that she will surely make a move, she couldn’t grasp what she will do
accurately.
“If it’s Al-sama, he would be able to predict what she would do……..”
“Finne-sama is already amazing! I was completely clueless about those things after all!”
1593
“Amazing, me? Then I think it is because I have a great role model. Before I came to the Imperial
Capital, I was not good at using my head after all. Right now I am still no good though.”
Everything Finne does is an imitation of Al.
Being the closest person to him, Finne looked at Al and followed his example. However, there is also a
limit.
The amount of experience they have is different. Al, who has played tricks on others since he was a
child, used his head in various areas while Finne only lived quietly inside her territory.
No matter how closely she observed him, she can not perfectly imitate Al.
It was impossible for Finne to analyze the enemy’s aim so accurately like him.
However, Finne didn’t think that it was something that she should be depressed over.
It is something like an added-value. Naturally, it is better that she can do it but even if she can’t,
nothing will change.
People have their own specialized field. The current Finne understands that.
“I am not good at thinking too! I always think that it would be easier for me if I could use my head
more you know!”
“Humans are lacking as living beings. It is because we are not perfect that we have our strengths and
weaknesses. But that is okay. People are together to compensate for each other after all.”
That was the reason Al chose to support Leo.
If it is in the nature of the people to compensate for each other then a person who inspires helps from
others is suitable to be a ruler.
An emperor doesn’t have to be perfect. He can rely on people around him.
As long as there are people who wish to support or help him then that’s enough.
That’s Al’s way of thinking and the reason why he wants Leo to be an emperor.
However, the two are twins.
They are on the opposite ends of the spectrum but their characters are very similar.
Both Leo and Al have the qualities that inspire people to support them.
Leo inspires others by showing how he is always aiming for a new height while Al, despite his
lackings, inspires others by showing how he does his best.
That’s how they attract the people around them.
1594
People around Leo try to push him further, while people around Al try to pull him up. Which one
people want to support will be up to their preference.
However, there is a decisive difference between the two.
Whether they are willing to become an emperor or not. That is the first and foremost condition to
become an emperor.
Leo chose to become an emperor while Al chose to support Leo.
If there is something different in this dynamic then there must be an opposite world line. Even so, this
sibling would support each other.
However, in this world, Al chose to be the one who supported his brother.
If so then it is her role to support Al at his side, Finne thought.
Then.
“That’s why–I don’t think that someone who relies on no one but themselves can become an emperor.
Will you help me? Mia-san.”
“It is already too late for that. I have already pledged this bow to you after all.”
Hearing Mia’s answer, Finne smiled.
Then, Mia quietly whispered to Finne.
“Please go ahead first. I will finish this soon.”
Saying so, Mia took out her bow and turned back.
It seems that the soldiers have already arrived behind them.
Finne leaves the soldiers to Mia and hurries to Mitsuba’s room.
Once she arrived, Finne rushed into Mitsuba’s room.
“Mitsuba-sama! Are you safe!?”
“Finne-san!? Run!”
Inside the room, Gianna was also together with Mitsuba.
However, there were not only the two that were inside the room.
They were maids who took up arms and Imperial Guards of the inner palace, she couldn’t tell enemies
from allies.
Some of the maids and guards are protecting Mitsuba and Gianna while others try to kill them.
1595
The room looked like a battlefield.
The enemy already dispatched their forces.
If they take their time here, the soldiers will soon catch up with them.
She needs to hurry.
When Finne thought so, one of the female guards noticed Finne and rushes at her
“It’s the Blau Mowe! Catch her!”
“Finne-san!”
Mitsuba’s voice echoed in the room.
However, Finne does nothing to the hand that reached out to grab her.
She knew that it would be useless no matter how she resisted.
And—-it is also because she knew that it wasn’t necessary.
“I leave this to you. Mia-san.”
“Leave it to me!”
Mia appeared from behind Finne and kicked the guard who tried to grab Finne away.
The kick sent the female guard crashing into the opposite wall.
Witnessing that, all attention was directed toward Mia for a moment.
“You all look the same so it’s hard to tell. If you are on Finne-sama’s side then throw down your
weapon. If you don’t I will blow you all away!”
Mia gives a warning and holds up her weapon.
Strong magic power was emitted from the bow.
Mitsuba, who felt the danger right away, immediately issued an order.
“DROP YOUR WEAPONS!”
In response to her command, the maids and the guards who were protecting Mitsuba and Gianna
immediately dropped their weapons and rushed to Mitsuba’s side.
The remaining enemy maids and guards pointed their weapons at Mia but they didn’t have any chance
to use them.
“Have you ever seen a scattering arrow?”
1596
Mia said so and fired a magic arrow that gave off a dazzling light.
It scattered into countless arrows and blew all the enemies to the wall, incapacitated them.
1597
SPT Chapter 241
I need new Wes Anderson’s film……….
-Mr.Graverobber
Worth
After she incapacitated the enemies, Mia immediately turned to face Finne.
“Are you okay, Finne-sama?”
“Yes, thanks to you. How about you, Mia-san?”
“That level of enemy is an easy win for me. I’m used to dealing with multiple opponents after all.”
Finne bitterly smiled at Mia’s bold statement.
Mia who acted as the Chivalrous Thief in the Dominion is always outnumbered.
She often has to deal with a large number of opponents.
Naturally, she possesses the ability to defeat multiple opponents at once but not only that, she also
knows how to prevent her opponents from using their number as an advantage as well.
One could say that she is the perfect person to rely on in a situation where they are surrounded by
enemies such as this.
Now Finne is convinced of the reason why Al spent so much of his money to recruit her to his side.
“Mitsuba-sama, Gianna-sama. I’m glad that you are safe.”
“Finne-san……why are you here?”
“Of course, to rescue the two of you.”
“We have no worth as hostages. We will only slow you down. Just leave us behind and escape. You
should be more aware of your worth.”
What Mitsuba said was true.
The Emperor will not waver even if Mitsuba or Gianna are taken hostages.
If Leo was inside the Imperial Capital, Mitsuba’s value as a hostage would increase but Leo is currently
outside while Al is not even considered a threat by the enemy.
That is why their value as hostages is low while Finne’s is much more valuable.
1598
That was why Mitsuba told Al to put aside her protection and told Finne to escape by herself.
Her decision truly seems like it would come from Al’s mother, Finne thought.
Objectively evaluating her worth without any bias and making a calm judgment on the spot.
Some would say that her decision is admirable but Finne was saddened at it.
Whether it is Al or Mitsuba, she wanted them to take better care of themselves. To be able to extend
their kindness to others while unable to do the same to themselves, in a sense, that is twisted.
And it wasn’t just Finne who thought that way.
“So it is because his mother is like this that prince turned out that way. It is a problem when someone
doesn’t do anything for others because they only care about themselves but the opposite is also true
you know?”
“……right now we have to look at the big picture. Just go.”
“Excuse me but since I have already come this far, no matter what you say I won’t leave empty handed.
Please feel free to decide your own value as you see fit but we will help you anyway! I’ve said the same
thing to your son just before we arrived here!”
Hearing Mia, Mitsuba has a troubled expression on her face.
How should I persuade her? I don’t even have the time to do that in the first place. That was the
expression on her face right now.
Finne smiled and gave Mitsuba a suggestion.
“How about we talk more about this while we walk?”
“…..it seems I don’t I have a choice.”
Mitsuba gave up on persuading them.
After all, she doesn’t want Finne to remain in this place any longer than this.
Thus, everyone started to move.
Of course, when a large group like this moves, it will attract attention.
However, once the soldiers came into view, Mia immediately blew them away.
Rather, this instead helped Mia spot the soldiers easier.
“ARGH! This place is too wide! Can’t we use the secret passage!?”
“We can’t use it since Al-sama is not with us. We have no choice but to break through them.”
1599
“What is that prince doing at a time like this!?”
It will be difficult to break through the wide and complicated inner palace.
However, Finne doesn’t reply to Mia’s complaint.
After all, Al himself should be conducting secret maneuvers around the castle right now.
Soon, Finne and her group arrived at a straight path that directly led to the castle.
“The castle is just ahead! Please do not let your guard down! There should be more of them there!!”
“Roger that!”
Saying so, Mia tries to take the lead but she stopped herself when she noticed something.
She then quietly whispers.
“There are curse traps ahead. And it’s more than twenty of them……….”
The path ahead is covered with curse magic traps.
Moreover, this kind of curse spell should already be designated as forbidden magic.
Seeing that, Mia slowly turned around.
“Your personality is quite rotten isn’t it?”
“You think so? Since this is an obvious escape route, I think that it is normal to set up traps here
though?”
“That’s not what I am talking about. I’m talking about the fact that you stood there smiling behind us
while waiting until we got caught in your traps.”
Saying so, Mia glares at the person who appeared from behind them.
A woman with her characteristic green hair.
Seeing her, Mitsuba whispered the woman’s name.
“Zuzan……”
“Good day, Mitsuba. Where are you planning to go I wonder? Don’t you have to apologize to me on
your sons’ behalf for getting me under house arrest first?”
“It was your crime that got you confined. My sons didn’t do anything wrong.”
“You think so? I see it differently though. From where I see it, If it was not for your son arresting my
brother, I wouldn’t have to suffer such miserable punishment and my daughter would have been one
step closer to the throne.”
1600
“If that’s the case then it seems that we can’t ever understand each other. So, have you joined Gordon’s
rebellion because your own brother failed in his? You don’t learn your lesson at all huh.”
“Shut up. It was all your fault. It was because you didn’t properly educate your sons. You should have
taught them that they are low-born filths born from a commoner. It came to this because they weren’t
taught that their worth is nothing compared to us nobility you know?”
Finne frowned at Zuzan’s words.
What she said wasn’t sarcasm, that was what she is truly thinking.
Finne hated people who judge people based on their statuses.
One becomes a noble because their ancestors left behind achievements deserving of a special position.
That was what she was taught ever since she was little. It is a noble’s duty to make an effort to not
blemish the achievement left behind by their ancestors and not bring shame to the position they were
given.
If a noble takes pride in the privileges they were given instead of that then Finne thinks that such
nobles are better off not existing in the first place.
“Why are you making such scary eyes? Blau Mowe. I didn’t know that you have that in you, you know?
I’m honestly surprised.”
“If possible…..I want to keep smiling. I always wonder how wonderful it would if I could do
that………..but this world is not so sweet. I understood that after I came to the Imperial Capital. And I
also learned this. I need to fight to keep on smiling. Fifth Consort Zuzan. I do not accept you. I do not
accept Princess Zandra’s claim to the throne. As a member of house Kleinert, I will not allow someone
with such an ideal to become an emperor.”
“So you at least have a mouth huh? But so what if you don’t accept me? Are you planning to fight me
now?”
Saying so, Zuzan slightly raised her hand.
Then a large number of soldiers that were concealing themselves appeared.
They can not escape as long as they can not break through that path.
Still, Finne wasn’t intimidated.
“Mia-san!”
“As you wish!”
Mia shot out scattered arrows and accurately destroyed the traps.
Seeing her traps destroyed with a single attack, Zuzan was surprised but she immediately gave an
order with a frown.
1601
“Capture them! Don’t let them escape!”
“Please run! I will stall them!”
“No! Above us!”
While running away, Finne urged Mia to look above.
With just that, Mia immediately understood what she meant.
“That’s a good plan!”
Just like that, Mia began to shoot countless arrows at the ceiling.
The ceiling could not withstand the blows from her arrows and slowly began to collapse.
Still, Mia never ceased her attack.
Then.
“It’s, it’s collapsing!?”
“R, Run!”
The soldiers charging at them were forced to retreat to avoid being crushed under the collapsing
ceiling.
Then, the ceiling completely collapsed.
The exit connecting the inner palace to the castle is now blocked with piles of rubble.
Seeing that, Zuzan was enraged.
“What are you doing!? Clear those rocks now! YOU CAN’T GET AWAY FROM ME, MITSUBA!!”
“That’s quite a scream………”
“This should delay them for a while. Mitsuba-sama, Gianna-sama. We still have to run. Are you both
okay?”
“If it’s physically then I am a little worried but it’s not like I have time to complain right. I will do my
best to keep up.”
“I, I will do my best too.”
After hearing Mitsuba and Gianna’s replies, Finne turned to Mia and nodded.
“The stairs are surely under watch. Let’s break through them.”
“Now that’s an easy to understand plan!”
1602
Saying so, Mia excitedly holds up her bow.
1603
SPT Chapter 242
I’m so lazy……. help!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Weitling Sisters
It’s probably thanks to Oliver stalling the soldiers for us that we were able to reach the throne room
relatively smoothly.
However, there was a group that arrived there just before us.
“I’m glad that you are safe. Therese-aneue.”
Saying so, Alida bowed to my sister in law, Therese, who was among the group that arrived at the
throne room.
However, it was not Therese who led the group here.
“I’m glad that you are safe as well, Third Consort-sama. Thank you very much for protecting my
sister.”
“You do not have to thank me. Knight Commander Alida. It’s natural for me to help your sister.”
Answered a blue-haired woman in glasses.
The name of the woman who is exhibiting a gentle smile as she replied to Alida is Camilla.
Third Consort of the Emperor and Eric’s mother.
Like Eric, she is a person that gives an intelligent impression but at the same time, she also exhibits
the same coldness as him.
“If it’s natural for you to help her then it would be great if you can protect the other consorts as well
though.”
I spoke out.
Looking at me, Therese sadly turned her face down while Alida squinted her eyes a little.
To this pair of sisters, I am that kind of existence.
It can’t be helped.
“Good day. Prince Arnold, Prince Traugott, and Princess Christa as well. I am glad that you are safe.”
1604
“I can’t say that this is such a good day though. For you to arrive here so quickly must mean that you
were aware of this rebellion beforehand, no? Why did you choose to only bring my sister in law here
alone?”
“Because we would have a problem if she becomes a hostage. The Weitling house was recently in
conflict with His Majesty. My apology but the Knight Commander is also a member of that house. If her
sister is taken, she might consider betraying His Majesty. Therese-san did stand up against His Majesty
for the sake of her younger brother after all. It would be problematic if the enemy exploited their
familial bond.”
Saying so, Camilla smiled thinly.
Seeing that, I can’t help but frown.
I can’t stomach this woman. Even Zuzan would be better in my eyes.
“If you think that it will be problematic if the enemy takes hostages then don’t you think that also
applies to the other consorts as well?”
“They do not have the same worth as a hostage like Therese-san. I’m sure that you are unsatisfied
because I didn’t take your esteemed mother with me but if I take Mitsuba who Zuzan is bearing
grudges against, that will endanger Therese-san instead. This is for the sake of the Empire. Please
understand.”
“For the Empire’s sake? How about you honestly say that you left them behind as a decoy for your
own escape?”
“It seems that it can be taken that way as well. How unfortunate.”
I want to punch her in the face.
I clenched my fist bearing that thought but I didn’t do anything.
If I hit her here it will cause a problem. Moreover, what she said is not wrong.
That way of thinking is similar to my mother’s. She left them there because they don’t have much
worth as hostages. That is understandable. Even with my mother’s popularity among the commoners,
the Emperor will only lose some credibility in case he chooses to abandon her. Compared to the
possibility of Alida’s betrayal, that is nothing.
I glanced at Alida.
What Camilla basically said earlier was ‘I brought your sister here because you might betray us’. That
should be outrageous for Alida who values her loyalty above all else.
However, Alida’s expression was cool.
“Do you have nothing to say, Knight Commander?”
1605
“None at all. It is natural to suspect me. My brother committed a sin while my elder sister tried to help
him by asking for Her Majesty the Empress’s help. It is a matter of course to doubt me, their sister as
well.”
“I do not think that you will betray us, Knight Commander. I simply wanted to crush all the
possibilities. Now, Therese-san, let’s head inside.”
“Yes…..Camilla-sama.”
Camilla and Therese enter the throne room.
I gaze at her back with disgust.
“Al-niisama……what about Okaa-sama……?”
“Finne already went out to help her. Even so, the enemy is probably pouring all their effort to capture
them right now.”
There are many hostage candidates in the inner palace.
The enemy will have to disperse their force to capture them all.
I am betting on Mia to be able to defeat them one by one but the fact that Camilla and Therese are here
means that Zuzan will concentrate all her forces on Mother.
There’s no doubt that it will be difficult to escape them even for Mia.
Moreover, if they captured Finne, it will be my fault.
I endangered Finne, a highly valued hostage candidate because I trust her with my mother’s safety.
Seriously…….nothing goes as planned at all.
“Will Finne and Okaa-sama be okay……?”
“They have an escort but…….I think they will not be able to get here so easily.”
“That must be the same for Miss Camilla too but……well, she is a snake-like woman, she probably
slipped through their defense somehow. If she was aware of the rebellion in advance, she might have
been observing the soldiers’ movement as well.”
“Even so, it was no coincidence that Mother was made into a decoy. Trau-niisan, please watch over the
three children. I will head to pick them up through the secret passages.”
“Alone?”
“I have a pessimist strategist on my side. I should be able to avoid the danger with his help.”
“That’s worrying. Why don’t you take someone as an escort?”
1606
“We have more men guarding the throne room now. I will dispatch my subordinate to escort you,
Your Highness.”
Alida proposed so.
Honestly, that would be a nuisance.
It is one thing if I can have a large number of escorts but if it is only a few then they will only serve as a
handicap.
After all, I can deal with almost anything by myself.
That’s why I declined.
“I will refrain. I am not going out there to fight and the route I will take will not be an ordinary one
either. That’s why I want you to make sure the area around the throne room is safe. I can’t make a
move if this place is filled with enemies after all.”
“But will it not be too dangerous?”
“It will certainly be dangerous but it would be a waste to assign someone to guard me alone. Also, it
would be dangerous to disperse the force here too much. That troublesome woman is already inside
after all.”
I talked about Camilla.
Even if she knew of the rebellion in advance, her being here this fast is too strange.
It’s not like Camilla has strong personnel ready at her side. She only has armed maids and the Imperial
Guards.
“She might be able to get here so early because she is in cahoot with the enemy. That’s possible isn’t
it.”
“In this situation, we have to doubt everyone. I will trust you to keep an eye on her.”
“…….if that is the case then I will comply. Please leave this place to me, Your Highness.”
Alida said so and withdrew.
Nodding to her, I sent Trau-niisan and the others into the throne room before I turned back.
However, Alida called out from behind me.
“Your Highness Arnold.”
“….is there anything else? Knight Commander Alida.”
1607
“….my brother suffered for seven days and seven nights. My father took care of him during that time
and I was also with him at the end. Together with my family. That is the natural result considering
what he did but……it would be a lie to say that I am not angry.”
“Obviously. Even I, if Leo is punished because he committed a crime and punished because of it……I
would be angry too.”
“……thank you for your understanding. To be honest, I can’t help but think what would happen if you
were not by Finne-sama’s side. However,…….even now, you still remain at her side. That was
something my younger brother couldn’t let go until his death. This might only trouble Your Highness
but please keep that thought in mind. If Your Highness dies and leaves Finne-sama to mourn for you, I
will not know what my brother died for. Please, for the sake of my peace——please live.”
I never expected her to say that.
Nothing was clouding over her blue eyes.
That was probably her true feelings.
Such a strange person.
“Don’t you think that it would be better if I die?”
“Who will be saved by that? If it brings Finne-sama’s smile…….then I’m sure that Laurenz will be
satisfied. It may only be naive thinking but, at least the person he loved will be smiling.”
It was exactly because he couldn’t think that way that Laurenz picked a fight with me though.
Well, if that is what she thinks then she might be saved if only a little. I have no reason to refuse.
“I understand. I don’t have any intention to die from the beginning though.”
“Please accept my sincere gratitude. I wish you good luck.”
Saying so, Alida sent me off with a smile.
1608
SPT Chapter 243
Anyone play this game?
it’s on steam, I played this since it was a weird clicker battle royale and it’s now kinda MOBA lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
True Nature
“Get out of my way!”
Mia shouted so and blew away all the soldiers who were blocking their path.
Using that chance, Finne and the others ran through the opening she created but the soldiers steadily
showed up to keep them from advancing.
They managed to reach the middle floors but the number of soldiers kept increasing as they advanced.
“There’s no end to them at all!”
“They must be focusing their forces on us.”
“That seems to be the case…….”
Finne nods to Mitsuba’s words.
In that case, there are two possibilities.
Either all the possible hostages were already in the enemy’s hand or that they all managed to safely
escape.
Finne thinks that it is the latter. With Al moving behind the scenes it’s hard to imagine the others
falling to the enemy’s hand.
If that is the case, they must have escaped to the throne room already.
The problem is the timing.
At first, Al was evacuating the possible hostages at the same time. That way, the enemy will have to
disperse their forces. However, Finne’s group was delayed.
There were more enemies in the inner palace than they expected and they had a hard time breaking
through.
1609
Due to that, they are now the target of the enemy’s concentrated assault.
Bitterly thinking that she could have done better, Finne looks at Mia’s complexion.
She still looks fine but it’s not like she isn’t tired.
If the enemy keeps using their number like this, they will eventually get overwhelmed soon.
I must do something.
Finne began to impatiently think so as they arrived at a crossroads.
At that time, Mia suddenly turned around.
Then.
“Get back!”
Mia pushes Finne into the intersecting corridor and shields Mitsuba behind her.
Then, a blade of wind flew through the place where Finne was standing and shattered the wall behind
them.
“Ara Ara……don’t move around so much. If you move I can’t kill you right?”
It was Zandra who appeared in front of them.
There were many mages behind her as well.
“I can tell just by looking at you! You are the daughter of the consort we met earlier right!? Your eyes
look exactly the same!”
While saying so, Mia positioned herself in the middle of the corridor
Although she had to push Finne to safety, she is now separated from her.
It is now impossible to join up with her without defeating Zandra first.
“Zandra is a user of forbidden art! Be careful!”
“Be careful? You think that I am someone you can defeat as long as you are careful?…..you look down
on me too much.”
Saying so, Zandra stomped the floor with her right foot.
With that as a trigger, countless shadows appeared from Zandra’s feet and headed toward Mia by
traveling on the surface of the walls and floor.
“I have never seen such a spell before!? It looks so disgusting!”
1610
While saying so, Mia shoots the approaching shadows.
Seeing that, Zandra smiles.
“Naive.”
The shadows didn’t only head for Mia.
They are also traveling on the wall toward Finne.
Zandra has a triumphant expression on her face but Mia shoots arrows at the shadows that are
heading toward Finne without even looking at them.
The arrow she shot accurately destroyed all the shadows.
“It seems that the only naive thing here is your eyes though?”
“…..Don’t get ahead of yourself! Know how rude it is for a mere escort to stand in my way!”
Saying so, Zandra creates a sphere of light in her right hand.
Feeling an unpleasant premonition from that sphere, Mia immediately covered Mitsuba and the others
the moment Zandra threw it at them.
The sphere of light slowly advances toward them while gradually becoming larger.
Its speed is not a big deal. The problem was its nature.
The sphere of light instantly turns the walls and floor it touches into dust.
She has never heard of a spell that turns everything it touches into dust but she can’t deny its
existence since it currently exists in front of her.
“It seems I can expect such a thing from a forbidden art user huh!”
Mia makes Mitsuba’s group fall back.
On the other hand, Finne was left behind.
After leaving behind a trail of destruction on the aisle, the sphere of light disappeared at the dead-end.
The spell didn’t cause any physical damage to them but the distance between them and Finne was
widened.
Thinking that the situation has grown worse, Mia readies her bow.
Zandra stood at the middle of the crossroads. She is in the position between Mia and Finne.
“Now, which one should I pick?”
1611
“Zandra-sama. Please do not harm the Blau Mowe. She has great worth as our hostage.”
They were worried that the riled up Zandra would get carried away and kill Finne.
Surprisingly, Zandra obediently nodded to that request.
“I know. She is worth a lot against the Emperor after all.”
“Thank you for your understanding. His Highness Gordon will be pleased.”
The soldier bowed.
In response, Zandra waved her left hand without saying anything.
Then, the soldier’s head dropped to the floor after it was cut off by a wind blade.
“Hmph! Who cares about Gordon! Taking hostage? Capturing her? I won’t settle with just a half baked
method! Everything was because of you! Finne von Kleinert! It was because you who have the title of
the Blau Mowe started cooperating with Leonard and Arnold that they started to get full of
themselves! Because of that, I had to live through that awful experience! I can’t calm down unless I get
to toss your lifeless head at them!!”
With that rage, Zandra turned her back on Mia.
Mia shot an arrow toward her back that was full of openings but it was blocked by the barrier created
by the mages under Zandra’s command.
“You people sure are troublesome!!”
Mia shoots a full power arrow at her and easily breaks the barrier but Zandra knocks it down with a
whip.
She could do that because the arrow was slowed down enough by the barrier.
“ARGH! So annoying!!”
Judging that she can’t let this situation go on like this, Mia decided to focus on defeating the mages that
set up the barrier.
However, using that time, Zandra approaches Finne.
Seeing that, Finne shouted.
“Mia-san! Please take care of Mitsuba-sama!!”
“Finne-sama!?”
“I will be okay! I have a plan! Please believe in me!”
1612
Saying so, Finne turned back and started running.
Seeing that, Zandra slowly follows after her.
After all, she knows that Finne alone can not escape from her.
Like she was hunting an animal, Zandra occasionally shot magic at Finne while slowly chasing her
down.
“C’mon C’mon! You will die if you don’t run faster you know!?”
“Kuh…..!”
Finne was blown away a little and fell down by the aftershock from the magic but she endures the
pain and continues to run.
The place she arrived at was Al’s room.
“Haa Haaa……”
“Ara Ara, what were you thinking running into Arnold’s room? Is there any gimmick hidden in this
room or something?”
Zandra mocks her and enters the room with a smile.
Then, she sweeps her eyes at the interior before she begins to laugh.
“AhHaHaHa!! You ran here because you expected Arnold to help you!? That Dull Prince!? If you don’t
know, I will tell you, besides his cunning, he is no hero you know? Those kinds of qualities were all
sucked up by Leonard long ago! He’s just a powerless coward! That’s Arnold’s true nature! You made a
mistake thinking that he would help you in this situation!”
“You do not understand Al-sama at all……..”
“And you want to say that you understand? Don’t make me laugh! If he’s someone who can overcome
this situation then he wouldn’t still be called the Dull Prince after all these years! If you planned to rely
on Arnold then just accept your fate and die! You would be satisfied too if you die here right! You
picked the wrong man to rely on! Accept your foolishness and die!”
Saying so, Zandra creates a wind blade inside her hand.
On the other hand, Finne fearlessly stares at her.
She deliberately took the risk of separating herself from Mia to create this situation.
Zandra who prioritizes her emotions first will not let anyone else deal with Finne. Finne knew that she
has that kind of personality. After all, she was always listening to Al’s analysis at his side.
That’s why she bet on the possibility that Zandra would chase after her alone.
1613
And her bet paid off.
Finne’s job ended when she successfully created this situation.
That’s why she muttered this word.
“—-please.”
“What? Are you trying to ask for mercy now? You are still afraid of dying huh!”
Zandra misunderstands her word and begins to laugh.
However, what she did not notice was that a man in a grey robe has appeared behind her.
1614
SPT Chapter 244
Heading out today……..don’t look for me…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Help
I appeared behind Zandra as Grau.
Finne did well in creating this situation.
It will cause problems if I use magic as Grau but it is still a hundred times more preferable than
appearing in the castle as Silver for no reason.
Thinking so, I gather magic power into my right hand.
1615
However, at that moment.
“Naive!”
Zandra turned around and attacked me with her whip.
The whip that was imbued with magic power possesses unusual speed and power.
I took a step back and avoided it.
“You can’t take me by surprise that easily!”
“As expected of the former candidate for the throne. Even rotten as you are, it seems that the Imperial
Family can’t be looked down huh.”
“Former candidate…..? I will kill you! I am the future empress of this Empire!”
“I can’t say that I am impressed with someone who set such a goal without taking a look at reality
though.”
Angered by my provocation, Zandra repeatedly attacks me with her whip.
While avoiding it, I look for a chance to counterattack.
As I am not fighting as Silver right now, I can’t afford to defeat her in one blow.
Now, how should I defeat her?
When I was thinking about how to take her down, Zandra ran out of patience and used her magic.
It’s the wind magic that Zandra is specialized in.
The wind that was refined into a sharp blade was thrown at me.
Evading it by a hair’s breadth, I took a step forward.
Zandra is good at magic battles and medium-range combat but she is weak in close quarters.
If I strengthen my physical ability with magic, I should be able to handle her.
I judged so and approached her.
However, my body stopped moving.
“What!?”
“HaHaHaHa!! Did you think that I never took any countermeasure against that ages-old conception
that a mage is weak in close combat!? Of course, I wouldn’t be so careless!”
Looking down, there is a shadow binding my legs.
1616
Clicking my tongue, I tore off the shadow but at the same time, it also created a fatal opening.
“It’s over!”
“Kuh!”
It was the wind blade that Zandra released earlier.
It was flying back from behind me.
I twisted my body to avoid it but my left arm got cut off by the wind blade.
Seeing blood spurting out from my arm, Zandra loudly laughed. However, I grin at her.
“Did you find something funny? The pain got to your head or something?”
“Pain? Whatever are you talking about?”
I paid the injury no mind and proceeded towards Zandra.
Seeing me ignoring my missing left arm like it was nothing, Zandra took a step back. In the meantime,
I regenerated my left arm.
“No way!?”
Unable to hide her surprise at how I immediately regenerated my left arm, Zandra took 2-3 steps back.
“What’s wrong? Is that all you got?”
“Kuh! Don’t mess with me! Even if you can grow your arm back, you can’t survive if I cut off your
head!!”
Saying so, Zandra cut off my neck with another wind blade.
Seeing my head dropped to the floor, Zandra was convinced of her victory.
“Serve you right! You died because you were overconfident in your regeneration!”
“Overconfident? What is it that I am overconfident at?”
My head responded to Zandra from the floor.
The head that should have been cut off is still being able to speak.
For the first time, fear can be seen in Zandra’s expression.
“No…..way…….”
“What’s wrong? Is this your first time seeing someone still alive after you cut their head off?”
1617
“It’s a lie! This is impossible! You are not human, aren’t you!? A Dullahan!?”
“No. I am human. I’m just a little bit different from others.”
Saying so, my body picks up my head and holds it in my arm.
Then, I slowly approach Zandra.
Afraid, Zandra created a sphere of light and threw it at me.
“If you turn into dust then you can’t regenerate yourself!!”
As Zandra says, when the light touched me, I turned into dust.
On the other hand, Zandra doesn’t smile at her victory this time.
It seemed that she was still wary of me.
However, after she saw that I didn’t revive even after she waited dozens of seconds, she finally calmed
down and smiled.
“What a mess.”
“Are you talking about yourself, Princess Zandra?”
I called out from behind her.
Zandra turned around in fear but I wasn’t there.
What was there was only black smoke.
However, it gradually gathered and took the form of a person until it eventually became me.
“Impossible……”
“Now…..Princess Zandra. Are you good at playing tag?”
The moment I said that, a large amount of smoke spewed out from my body.
Sensing the danger, Zandra bolted out to the corridor at high speed.
“Haa Haaa……impossible, Impossible! It’s a lie! There’s no way that’s real! There must be a trick to it!
No one can survive my forbidden art! Impossible! Impossible!”
“Your Highness Zandra! Are you safe!”
“How do I look safe to you! You damn trash! Hurry up and kill that monster!”
It was the soldiers and mages who rushed to Zandra.
1618
Reunited with her allies, Zandra regained a little of her composure.
She probably thought that at least now we will be at a stalemate huh.
But, the moment their bodies touched by the smoke, they melted. Not metaphorically, their bodies
literally melt away.
“HII!?”
“There’s no escape, Princess Zandra.”
“Kuh! Damn it!! Someone! Is there someone around here!? Hurry up and help me! I am a princess you
know!! I am Zandra Lakes Adler! I order you to help me! If you help me I will raise your position! So
help me already! HELP ME!!”
Zandra screamed.
————
After she looked at Zandra, Finne raised a question.
“Grau-sama……what is this…….?”
“Illusion. She will have to play tag with me in the illusion for a while.”
Saying so, I glanced at Zandra who stood there and kept muttering to herself.
When I appeared behind her earlier, I cast an illusion spell on Zandra.
I made the illusion at the level where she can break it by herself but even among all the illusions I have
created, that one is quite well done.
The reason I don’t want to use illusion magic to show others such nightmares is that people’s minds
can be broken with it. Well, it should be fine in Zandra’s case.
Even like this, she is still one of the Imperial Family and a great mage herself.
She should be able to break out of it with her own power.
“What are you going to do with Her Highness Zandra?
“She has no worth as a hostage and even if I killed her Gordon would just absorb her subordinates to
serve under him. It’s easy to kill her here but…….it would bring more benefits to us if we make them
fight each other instead.
Her subordinates will probably not abandon Zandra even while she is in this state.
They will surely think of a way to get her to a safe place and that should delay them enough for us to
reach the throne room.
1619
Hearing my words, Finne exhales in relief.
She probably thought I was going to kill her huh.
Killing her is an option. It was an easy and simple move.
However, nothing can be solved that way.
The root of the problem right now is not Zandra. We can’t get anything back even if we take her life
now.
Plus, it wouldn’t be worth killing her in front of Finne.
“I think that a crime should be punished by the law. After all this is over, I think that it would be better
if His Majesty passes down his judgment for Her Highness Zandra himself.”
“Right. Given that Zandra survived until then that is. Leaving us aside, Lize-aneue wouldn’t forgive this
pair of mother and daughter after all. There is no evidence but these two are in some way involved
with the death of the Second Consort. Once they showed that they are willing to become our enemy,
Lize-aneue probably won’t show them any mercy.”
There’s nothing we can do about that anymore.
It’s not that I personally don’t want her to die but right now the demerit of killing her simply
outweighed the merit of leaving her alive.
In any other situation where there is no disadvantage of taking her life, I wouldn’t show her any
mercy.
I’m sure Finne doesn’t want her killed but she is a special case.
Those who fall prey to Zandra’s plot and the people who suffered from this rebellion will surely call
for a death penalty and that is probably the punishment Father will give her after this is over as well.
It is only a matter of sooner or later.
Rather, Zandra might be happier dying right here right now rather than facing her punishment.
After all, she will have to receive the grudge of our people as she dies.
One could say that it is a suitable end for Zandra though.
“For the time being, she will stay like this for a while. Let us hurry to the throne room.”
“No, I only took Mitsuba-sama and Gianna-sama out of the inner palace. We collapsed the path
connecting that place to the castle so they should be focusing their efforts there. We should use this
opportunity to take the secret passage to get Third Consort-sama and Therese-sama out while we
can.”
1620
I smile bitterly at Finne’s words.
Although it is dangerous, she still thinks about them huh.
She grew up.
However,
“That’s a good idea but both the Third Consort and my sister in law are already in the throne room.”
“Eh? How……”
“They used my mother as a decoy and escaped the inner palace. I can’t say I like their method. That’s
why everyone beside you is already in the throne room now. Mother’s group should be almost there
as well.”
Using a detection barrier, I confirmed that my mother’s group is already near the throne room.
The reason the soldiers’ movement is sluggish is probably Zandra’s presence on this floor.
Zandra is not Gordon’s subordinate but a collaborator. Still, She has no intention to let Gordon win and
Gordon doesn’t trust Zandra either.
They put constraints on each other, and they have to be vigilant of one another. That’s why they are
dragging each other down.
They are like water and oil. They can’t work well together.
“Then everything went well right!”
“Yeah, thanks to you. You did well. You really helped me this time.”
“No, I only imitated Al-sama. I didn’t do anything great at all.”
“I don’t think that it is that easy to imitate me though.
While smiling bitterly, I pull Finne toward myself.
Then I open a transfer gate.
If there are no people around then there is no need to sneak around in the secret passages. Let’s just
teleport there.
“Alright, it’s time for us to make our exit.”
“Yes!”
Saying so, I and Finne teleported to the upper floors of the castle.
1621
SPT Chapter 245
Mistranslated a lot in this chapter so it took a lot of time to fix……..damn contexts……
-Mr.Graverobber
Escape Route
After we teleported to the upper floors and approached the throne room, we found Mia’s group
waiting for Finne there.
“Finne-sama!!”
“Mia-san.”
Once she spotted Finne, Mia jumped into Finne’s chest.
“I’m glad〜……! I was wondering what I should do if something were to happen to you〜!”
“It’s okay, Al-sama came to help me.”
“If he could come out to help you then he must have been nearby in the first place right!? He should
have come out sooner!”
“Don’t be crazy. It’s not like there are secret passages everywhere in this castle.”
While replying so, I bowed to my mother.
“I’m glad that you are safe, Mother.”
“Yes, it’s all thanks to Finne-san you know. I told them to run away by themselves though…….she is
such a troublesome child isn’t she.”
“I agree. But…..I have always been saved by that.”
Unlike me who only makes calculated moves, Finne acts according to her morals.
If she thinks that action is correct, she will take it. If she thinks that it is wrong, she will reject it.
It sometimes causes deviations in the plan but it does lead to results that I can not accomplish by
myself.
This time as well, I lowered the priority given to my mother. However, Mia and Finne decided to head
to my mother’s side.
1622
If they gave their priority to my sister in law, they would have missed her and I don’t know what will
happen to my mother if that was the case.
In the end, I made the decision based on the result I wished for. However, as long as there are lives
involved, the result is everything.
“Y, Your Highness……what about Rupert……?”
“Please rest assured. He is already inside the throne room.”
“Ahh……thank you……….”
When she heard that Rupert was safe, Gianna’s eyes teared up.
Mother then gently hugged Gianna.
Seeing that, I asked my mother a question.
“Don’t you want to ask me about Christa?”
“Traugott is by her side right. She will be okay.”
“Well, that’s true.”
I sighed at my mother’s strangely high evaluation of Trau-niisan.
Those who are familiar with Trau-niisan’s upbringing usually acknowledge his abilities.
After all, they knew that he grew up together with the Crown Prince and received the same education
as him.
The only problem is his personality.
He is very unpredictable as a person after all. Even if he has the ability, there is rarely an occasion that
he would demonstrate it.
One could say that it is a waste but that could be said to be his good point as well.
“Then shall we go? We are the last group after all.”
Saying so, we headed to the throne room.
“I am glad to see you safe, Your Highness.”
“You too, Knight Commander. How is the situation here?”
“There were several raids after Your Highness headed back down but there has been no movement
from their side since then.”
1623
“That is probably because of Zandra’s presence on the middle floors. She probably disrupted their
chain of command.
While having such a conversation, I entered the throne room with Alida.
Inside are Camilla, the Third Consort, my sister in law, Therese, Rupert, Christa, and Tau-niisan. There
were many escorts and dignitaries inside as well as the castle servants.
“Rupert! Ahh, I’m so glad that you are safe……!”
“Mother too, I’m glad……”
When Gianna spotted Rupert, she ran up to him and gave him a hug.
It was a moving reunion of a mother and her child.
Although it is not to their extent, Christa also rushed up to Mother.
“Okaa-sama, I’m glad you are safe…..”
“Christa too. You are not injured anywhere right?”
For the time being, all the people who were likely to be held hostage in the castle were gathered here.
Looking at the situation, the dignitaries from the Dominion and the United Kingdom would be on the
enemy side. They are probably not even in the castle right now.
“Ara, Mitsuba-san. I am happy to see that you are able to get here safely. I was worried you know?”
“Thank you for your concern. Camilla-sama.”
Camilla smiled and called out to my mother during that moving reunion.
I wanted to ask how she could say that but right now I have no time for that.
“Trau-niisan. Have you informed the Knight Commander about the situation in the castle?”
“Of course.”
“Is that so…..then you should already know that Raphael betrayed us right?”
“Yes. I don’t see him as someone who would betray us but I do not think that Oliver is lying either.”
“It doesn’t matter why he betrayed us. What is important is that he did. I don’t know how many of
Raphael’s men are on his side but we should assume that the Tenth Corp is on the enemy side. If that
is the case, we can not trust in the safety of this place either.”
“That is true. With him as an opponent, I will not be able to move freely.”
1624
“If we got cornered during that time then it will be over. We have this many people to slow us down
after all.”
Saying so, I sweep my eyes over the throne room.
The castle servants that managed to escape to the throne room all looked uneasy.
It was probably because they heard that this place will not be safe either.
Seeing me like that, Alida asked what I am planning to do with her eyes.
“That being said—–we are escaping.”
“Even if you say that there is nowhere to escape to though?”
Alida said.
Judging from how she said it, she probably doesn’t have any intention to disclose the Emperor’s secret
route huh.
Well, of course. Once we use it, that route will be known making it unusable in the future.
If the enemy can’t take control of the castle by normal means, using a secret passage that connects the
castle to the outside to infiltrate the castle is a viable plan after all.
Alida probably can’t disclose it at her own discretion.
Given Alida’s position, that is understandable.
Well, I already know that and I don’t expect her to share it with me either.
I grinned at Alida and headed to the corner of the throne room.
There, I triggered the mechanism that opens the hidden passage.
“If it’s the escape route then we have this one right here though.”
“……H, How did you?”
For the first time, Alida lost her cool.
Seeing her expression mixed between surprise and confusion, I nodded in satisfaction.
“Father told me about this place eleven years ago. I never thought that I would have the chance to use
it though.”
“His Majesty himself……even if you are a prince, teaching someone such a secret is……..”
Alida puts her hand on her forehead and sighs.
1625
That probably gives her a headache as the Knight Commander huh.
The fact that I was the one Father taught such a secret to is probably the root of her worry. She will
probably have to start an investigation on what secret was leaked and to whom it was leaked to once
this is over.
“…..as long as it is known, this passage will no longer be a secret. Certainly, this passage can lead us
outside. Are we going to evacuate everyone through this passage?”
“Yeah, the problem is that this passage isn’t that big.
Originally, this passage was designed to let the Emperor and his aides escape.
It was not designed to allow a large number of people to pass through.
If we are going to evacuate this many people, it would be necessary to divide the people here into
several groups.
“Then I and Therese-san will go through first. Please have some Imperial Knights escort us.”
Camilla said so as if it was the most natural thing.
On the other hand, I frowned.
As long as we can only use one escape route, it is natural that the person who uses it first will be the
most unlikely person for the enemy to discover.
“In that case, I think that we should prioritize the Imperial Family first though?”
“We should prioritize the people with the highest value as a hostage first. It would be a problem if
Therese-san fell to the enemy’s hand, no?”
“If that’s the case then sister-in-law Therese and Christa should be in the first group.”
“I can’t recommend putting two of the most valuable hostages to be in the same place. I think that we
should put them into separate groups. I do not mind accompanying Her Highness Christa myself
though.”
Saying so, Camilla glanced at Christa with her snake-like eyes.
Christa involuntarily hides behind Mother.
Personally speaking, I wanted Camilla to be in the last group to escape this place. However, as a
consort, she is the highest-ranking person here.
I can not refuse her without a solid reason.
With no other choice, I sigh and comply with her suggestion.
1626
“I understand. The first group to leave will be you and my sister in law. We will attach the Imperial
Knights to escort you two as well.”
“Thank you.”
“It’s nothing. But may I ask you to do something for us?”
“What is it? I am willing to assist any way I can though?”
Camilla smiled after saying so.
I respond to that with an evil smile.
My bad but my principle is to pay back the favor in full.
I will never forget that you used my mother as a decoy.
“Knight Commander. Are those Rainbow Celestial Jewels displayed at the throne fake?”
“Yes. They are dummies.”
Two rainbow-colored jewels are displayed behind the throne as if to show off to the enemy.
For people who are unfamiliar with it, they would think that those are Rainbow Celestial Jewels.
However, even if this is the throne room, the Prime Minister isn’t so bold to display them like that.
That’s why those are dummies.
However, common soldiers shouldn’t be able to tell the difference.
“Then, please take a dummy with you. With the Imperial Knights escorting you, the enemy soldiers
should be fooled.”
“What did you say…..?”
Camilla made an expression as if she couldn’t believe my words.
After all, I just told her to become a decoy.
Even so, she just did the same thing earlier.
I will have her get her own just dessert.
1627
SPT Chapter 246
Election day……election day……..go out and vote damn it!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Those who reap benefit
Camilla looks at me with hatred.
However, I respond to her with a smile.
“[This is for the Empire]. Please understand.”
I returned the words she used as her excuse exactly as it is.
If she can use my mother as a decoy for the sake of the Empire then it is only reasonable for her to do
the same by taking the dummy jewel and attract the enemy’s attention.
Camilla took a deep breath to recover her calm and started presenting her argument.
“Prince Arnold. Why do we need to take the dummy out of here? As long as Knight Commander Alida
is here the enemy will think that we are protecting the real thing, no? I can’t help but think that your
plan presented too many risks while offering few benefits though?”
“Please rest assured. The real jewel will be taken out as well.”
“What…….?”
Camilla looked suspiciously at me.
Alida and the First Imperial Knight Corp are protecting the throne room. She probably couldn’t
understand why we should abandon this kind of protection.
And in fact, the protection they offered here is quite strong already. For any average opponent, they
wouldn’t be able to break through them.
However, the enemy no longer consists of your average troops.
“With Captain Raphael’s betrayal, it is no longer a good plan to stay here. He will eventually come here
with the enemy’s Generals and that would be difficult for even Knight Commander Alida to defend
against.”
“I don’t think that I will lose in a fight but I admit that I am not confident that I can protect the
Rainbow Celestial Jewels.”
1628
Camilla asked if that is true with her eyes and Alida calmly replied.
In a one on one fight, there are only a few people who can beat Alida. Moreover, no magic can be used
inside the throne room. The enemy can only rely on their swordsmanship to break through her.
Winning against her in that condition is unrealistic.
However, it is still possible to stall her. For Raphael that is.
In that case, it will be up to Alida’s men to stop the enemy’s advance but even for the elite Imperial
Knights, they would eventually get overwhelmed with numbers. Especially when we have to allocate
some of them to protect Camilla’s group.
“…..then please leave the real one to us.”
“It is a well-known fact that sister-in-law Therese and Knight Commander Alida are sisters. Moreover,
as the wife of my eldest brother, my sister in law is someone whose face is widely known throughout
the country. With that being the case, who would Knight Commander Alida entrust the real jewel
to……..of course, the enemy would think that she is the obvious choice. We can not entrust her with
the real thing exactly because of that.”
“If she has to act as a decoy, she will be put in great danger you know? Is Knight Commander Alida fine
with that?”
“…..ever since my sister became the Crown Princess she has already joined the Imperial Family. Not to
mention that it is our duty as someone who hails from the house of Weitling, It is her obligation to
devote herself to the Empire. As Camilla-sama said, my younger brother left a stigma on our house. No
matter what we do or what we become, that stigma will always be attached to us. Such a stigma can
only be cleared through action. Aneue, I am also risking my life here. Please accept this task. This is for
our Father as well.”
“…….I understand. I will…….fulfill my responsibilities too.”
Persuaded by Alida, Therese agreed.
However, Camilla frowns at that.
Considering that she is doing this for the Empire, we should be grateful that Therese decided to act as
a decoy for us.
However, this will disadvantage Camilla.
First, she will be in a dangerous position. She just scared Christa by saying that Christa and Therese
should be our top priority. Now she can’t say that she won’t go with Therese.
Moreover, Camilla’s biggest concern is the case where the enemy doesn’t react to Therese who acts as
a decoy.
1629
If they were that quick to react with me and Finne when we headed down to the lower floors through
the secret passages then it is strange that Camilla could make her way up here without any fight at all.
Even though we had a hard time going through secret passages, she said that she made her way up
here only by exploiting the enemy’s opening? It would be more believable if she told me that she
knows a route that isn’t known by others.
It will be different if she moved at a very early stage but then it brings up a question of how she could
do that. And if that is not the case then how did she discover a route to the upper floors even though
the castle is crowded with soldiers.
No matter what she says, she is suspicious.
Even if I take out the personal feeling when she used my mother as a decoy, Camilla still looks
suspicious.
This is a test.
If the enemy doesn’t react to Therese then Camilla will almost certainly with them. If that is the case,
even Camilla’s son, Eric himself is the same.
In most cases, the person who stands to gain when things go wrong is suspicious.
Of the Emperor’s six consorts, Zuzan and the Fourth Consort are on the rebel side. All that remains
besides her are the Empress, Mother, and Gianna.
The Empress’s son, Trau-niisan has no intention of ascending the throne. In that case, if Mother and
Gianna die, and the rebellion is suppressed, the inner palace will mostly be under Camilla’s control.
In the unlikely event that my father died, the Empress that stays at his side will be in quite a
dangerous position as well. If that happens, Camilla’s position will solidify even more.
Both for Eric and Camilla, their obstacles will be gone after this rebellion is over. Gordon will get rid of
their obstacles for them and later they will have a just cause to get rid of Gordon.
With that line of thinking, I can faintly see the figure of the mastermind.
However, Eric will surely not leave any trace behind.
If anything, Camilla is more likely to leave such a trace for us.
If the enemy does not try to apprehend Camilla during the rebellion, she will be doubted afterward
and the evidence of their involvement might be found.
“Camilla-sama. Please take care of my sister in law.”
“……if Therese-san agreed then I can not say anything more. I understand.”
It seems that she can’t find any reason to refuse anymore as Camilla obediently accepted it.
1630
As expected of Eric’s mother huh. She does know when to give up.
Well, it could be that I am wrong and I jumped to conclusion here but with the decoy attracting the
enemy’s eyes, we can secure the safety of the real jewel.
The thing that will decide the match is the fourth Rainbow Celestial Jewel. The more time passes
without the enemy obtaining it, the more advantage it brings for us. On the contrary, if Gordon obtains
the fourth one then the Celestial Sphere will be strengthened.
That’s why we can not allow him to get it. Everything will be for nothing if it falls to his hands after all.
“Aneue. This is the dummy jewel. Please be careful.”
“Thank you, Alida. then,…..I’m going. If we survive, let us meet again with a smile.”
Saying so, Therese goes into the secret passage.
Camilla follows after her with her maids and guards and the Imperial Knights last.
After a while, we will have to send Christa out too.
I look at the pedestal on which the dummy jewel was placed until earlier.
There was a gimmick under it and when I messed with it, the bottom opened up.
A jewel about the size of a fist was hidden there.
“That is the Rainbow Celestial Jewel, isn’t it? It’s super beautiful!”
Mia whispered so while looking at it from behind me.
However, I sighed while holding the second jewel.
“This one is a dummy too huh. As expected of the Prime Minister I guess.”
“That is a dummy too!?”
Mia shouts as she couldn’t believe that this is a fake too.
That’s only natural. You can feel the magic power from this jewel, a large amount at that.
I could say that it is a waste to make it a dummy.
However, that’s exactly why it can be used as a dummy.
“If this one is also a dummy then can I assume that Knight Commander is holding on to the real one?”
“Your Highness has keen eyes for noticing it. Yes, I have the real one with me.”
Saying so, Alida took out the real Rainbow Celestial Jewel.
1631
Its appearance is exactly the same as the one I am holding. No, I should say that the dummy I have
looks exactly like the real thing huh.
Judging from appearance alone, they are indistinguishable.
However, those who are sensitive to magic power will notice the difference. The real Rainbow
Celestial Jewel holds much more magic power inside.
The amount of magic power is so tremendous that it seems like it is containing an abyss.
“I have to say, you are quite good at distinguishing the real and the fake, Your Highness.”
“I have been like this since a long time ago. I am confident that I can even beat Leo in this you know.”
Alida may have said that because of the time with Leticia’s fake dead body as well.
Because I am a liar myself, I am good at seeing through such a thing. I doubt everything around me
after all.
While I was thinking so to myself Alida took out two bags. Both of them looked the same.
One of them holds the dummy while the other holds the real one.
“Please take care of it. I will leave how to utilize it entirely to you, Your Highness.”
“Is that okay? Leaving it to me like this.”
“After you have led so many people to this place, I am expecting a lot from you, Your Highness.”
“Well, thanks. I guess I will do whatever I like with it then.”
Saying so, I took the two bags and headed toward Christa’s group.
1632
SPT Chapter 247
I’m Hangry!!!!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
What I can do
When I arrived at Christa’s group, Trau-niisan spoke to me.
“What are you planning to do? Arnold.”
“I will leave the real jewel to Trau-niisan. The problem is the dummy……”
Entrusting it to Finne is a good plan.
But if I want a convincing decoy, a member of the Imperial Family is better suited.
When I thought so, Rupert stepped up.
“I will……take it.”
“Rupert……”
If it was the previous him who offers to do such a thing on the spur of moment then I would never
consider it an option.
‘I have to do something.’
If he only does it because of such an ambiguous determination then I will be troubled.
However, Rupert’s eyes didn’t show any such ambiguity.
“I asked Grau…..to take care of Aniue and Aneue. Since he accepted my request, he is still in the castle,
right?”
“Yeah, he is lurking on the lower floors.”
“Then I will do what I can. It is……….too cowardly to only ask someone else to help me. I will do what I
can too. If that’s being a decoy….I think I am perfect.”
Saying so, Rupert showed me a bitter smile.
The timid Rupert is certainly a perfect decoy.
I glanced at Trau-niisan.
1633
He then gives me a small nod.
After seeing that, I smile and look back at Rupert.
“Alright, Rupert. Listen to me carefully.”
“Yes, Arnold-aniue.”
“The most important part of being a decoy is for you to think that you are not a decoy. No matter what
anyone says, you have to think like you are the real target. Right now, the most important thing in the
capital is inside the bag you have. That’s why you must think about your safety as a top priority. You
have to run. Just run and meet up with Father. That is your duty.”
“Yes…..I will keep it in mind.”
“Do you really understand? Even if someone is in danger right in front of you, you mustn’t help them
you know?”
“Eh…..?”
“Even if Trau-niisan is in danger, even if Christa is in danger, you must head straight to Father. That
will attract and mislead the enemy. You understand that right?”
“But…..if the real thing is in danger, even if I take the dummy and run away…….”
“If you come back to help them you will reveal that you are holding the dummy. Think only about your
own safety. Trau-niisan will not be able to help you either. It is exactly because both of you act as if
you are holding the real thing that the enemy gets confused. It will be hard, it will be painful, even so,
can you do it?”
Rupert is a little hesitant.
What I am asking him to do is to be ruthless. Even I have to ask myself if I can do it myself.
When it seems that he arrived at his answer, Rupert raised his face up.
“I understand. I am holding [the real one].”
“Good. I will trust you with it okay.”
Saying so, I stroked Rupert’s hair.
Then I handed the other bag to Trau-niisan.
“Please take care.”
“I understand.”
1634
“Trau-niisan will take care of Christa. Mia and Finne will take care of Rupert. For Mother’s group,
please act together with Finne and Mia.”
Saying so, I took a step back.
Seeing that, Finne raises a question.”
“What about Al-sama…..?”
“There is something I have to do. The plan I and Grau have to enact together.”
“Finding the last jewel huh?”
My mother sees through my goal.
I quietly nodded, thinking that I can’t get anything past her at all.
“I think that the Prime Minister hid the last one in a place that won’t be discovered so easily but if it is
inside the castle the enemy will eventually find it. If that is the case then the enemy will have four
jewels in their hands. I don’t know if the holy sword can break through the barrier if that is the case. I
want to take every single one of them away from the castle.”
“Will that be okay? What if they capture you after you find it? You would have done their work for
them you know?”
“I have a plan. For that sake, Knight Commander Alida, I’m sorry but can I ask you to cause some
diversion.”
“I originally planned to make a move myself, Your Highness. Will me heading to retrieve the other
Rainbow Celestial Jewel be enough?”
“Right. That is the most natural course of action. If possible, I want you to take down the Celestial
Sphere too.”
“Taking it down is impossible, Your Highness. Only a member of the Imperial Family can remove the
jewels. With the enemy solidified defense, it would be difficult to break through them. Escorting Your
Highness there would even be more difficult.”
“I understand. Sorry. If I’m Leo I could go with that idea though.”
When I apologized, Alida slowly shook her head.
Then she said something that I very much didn’t expect.
“No, the fact that Your Highness remains in the castle has helped us enough as it is. To be honest, I
never expected that we would be able to evacuate this many people. This is probably the result of your
actions, Your Highness.”
1635
“I never expected that I would see the day I received such praise from the Knight Commander herself.
This is the first time right?”
“If Your Highness did something good, it is natural for you to be praised. It is exactly because Your
Highness only gets serious in an emergency like this that you are considered a lazy person after all.
Please continue to get serious like this from now on as well.”
“That would be impossible.”
When I laughed it off, Alida frowned at me.
While shrugging at her, I turned my gaze toward Trau-niisan.
The second group that will be heading out is Trau-niisan and Christa. They will be guarded by my
eldest brother’s aides, the Raiffeisen brothers, and their men.
They probably don’t require any additional men from the Imperial Knights.
“Well then, Arnold. Take care of yourself okay.”
“Al-niisama……see you later.”
I nodded at Christa.
Seeing that, Christa entered the secret passage.
Following her are Trau-niisan, Rita, Wendy, and the guards.
Then after a while, it was Rupert’s group’s turn.
“Then, Arnold-aniue…..please tell Grau to take care.”
“Yeah, I will tell him so. Alois, I leave Rupert to you okay?”
“Yes, Your Highness. I will definitely protect him.”
Saying so, Rupert, Alois, and the knights entered the secret passage.
After that, it is Mother’s group.
“Al. Do push yourself but don’t die okay.”
“That is quite a difficult order though.”
Mother smiled and entered the secret passage and Gianna bowed at me then followed her.
Just in case, several Imperial Knights went with them as their escorts.
And the final group is Finne and Mia.
1636
“Mia, take care of Finne alright.”
“You can leave her to me. But will it be okay on your side? I don’t think that suspicious strategist is
that reliable though.”
“When you are working behind the scenes, it is better to act with only a small number of people.”
“Then I will teach you the move that will definitely help you survive. Listen okay? When you are in
danger, scream your lungs out. I’m sure that someone will come to help you.”
“That’s quite like you, Mia…….I will remember it.”
Saying so, I turned my eyes to Finne.
Finne herself doesn’t say anything extra.
She just said the usual words.
“I wish you luck.”
“Yeah.”
After that short conversation, Finne’s group entered the secret passage.
The remaining are the castle’s servants.
However, I will leave their evacuation to the Imperial Knights to carry out.
“Alright, I’m heading out.”
“In truth, I do not want Your Highness to act alone but…..as long as you can produce the result, I can
not complain.”
“I don’t have any worth as a hostage after all. Besides, I can move around freely. That is my strength.”
“Even so, please do not be overconfident. If Your Highness gets caught, they might kill you
immediately. If you find it impossible to proceed, please immediately come to me. I will definitely
protect you.”
“Got it. I will do so.”
Giving a nod to Alida, I leave the throne room with a smile.
Then I walk to the mountain of corpses Alida swept aside.
I picked out a still intact military uniform and tore it off from the corpse.
It’s an unpleasant thing to do but this is the only way I can get my hands on the military uniform so it
can’t be helped.
1637
Holding it in my hand, I move away from the throne room.
Then, when I entered the secret passage, I used magic to clean the uniform and put it on.
With a hat as the finishing touch, my disguise is perfected.
“Now then, I guess it’s time to begin infiltration huh.”
I walked through the secret passage with a grin on my face.
No enemy would expect a prince disguising himself as a soldier.
1638
SPT Chapter 248
Konlulu!!! ……is she back yet? I crave the eld-..
Sunset
When Finne entered the secret passage, the sun was about to set.
Gordon’s rebellion that started at noon could not conclude in one day and it has to be carried over to
the next day.
“Marshal, the enemy’s attack is starting to let up.”
“So they don’t want to continue their attack in the dark huh. That Gordon, it seems like he started to
use his head a little huh.”
Lize talked to herself while looking at the enemy army in front of her.
Lize’s force at the East Gate consists of around 2,000 men while Gordon’s army that surrounds them is
about 8,000.
The reason they could withstand the assault of an army four times their number was because of Lize’s
command and the overall quality of the Imperial Knights and her men. It was the result of many
conditions being intertwined.
However, that doesn’t change their situation. There was still a large number of rebels and the generals
who didn’t take part in the rebellion were captured so they can not expect any reinforcement from
inside the Imperial Capital.
They will be at a disadvantage if this situation is prolonged. However, if the Brave or Elna can get here,
the situation will change completely.
Being in that kind of situation, Gordon did not force his army to attack at night.
With the recognition that his soldiers couldn’t compete with Lize’s, Gordon is afraid of a counterattack
in a situation where their visibility is unclear.
Lize’s soldiers are the border defense force. They were trained to battle in any kind of situation. A
night battle will not cause any problems for them.
They might even take the chance and breakthrough their encirclement.
If Lize can let the Emperor escape in the cover of the night, their side will be more advantageous.
Lize wanted to do that in case the enemy attacked them but that plan became unusable because
Gordon chose to wait.
1639
“How is the situation, Lizelotte?”
“If Father is not here, I would ambush Gordon’s camp and take his head but since Father is here that
would be difficult. Right now we have only a few hands to play.”
“That’s…..sorry…….”
Johannes dropped his shoulders when she implied that he is currently a burden.
In response, Lize asks Johannes a question.”
“Please leave the battle to us. More importantly, Father, which side do you think will arrive here first?”
“Elna and the Brave huh?”
“Yes. only a blow from the holy sword can get us out of this situation. There are only two people who
can use the holy sword inside the Empire. Elna who went to rescue the Saint or the Brave who
prepared himself in advance, which one do you think will arrive first?”
Hearing Lize, Johannes turned silent for a short moment.
Thinking with commonsense, the Brave should arrive here earlier than Elna.
Elna who headed out to rescue the Saint will not come back until she completed what she set out to
do. On the other hand, the Brave can move at his own discretion. The difference here is too big.
However.
“If someone is going to come then it would be Elna.”
“Why do you think so?”
“Arnold is in the castle. The Amsberg house’s loyalty is high. Even though they can take over the
Empire by force anytime they want, they have always acted as a sword to the Imperial Family. Elna is
no exception. She has already given her loyalty to Arnold since she was young. The same goes for
Leonard, if they know the situation, they will desperately try to come back here to save him. That must
be what Arnold is aiming for.”
“Father is saying that Arnold planned this?”
“He is very observant. He saw through the Saint assassination ruse. It’s hard for me to think that he
wasn’t aware of Gordon’s suspicious movements. Nevertheless, Arnold sent Sebas to Leo’s side. He
probably did that to prepare them in case of an emergency. If so, the two will immediately head back
here after they rescued the Saint.”
“I see. The reason he didn’t head out himself was to motivate them to come back here as fast as
possible. That’s an Arnold-like plan.”
1640
He is good at using people but he’s even better at using himself. Arnold has little value as a hostage but
both Leonard and Elna have tremendous value if they fall into the enemy’s hands. By choosing to stay
behind, Arnold became a shackle for those two.”
If Al is inside the Imperial Capital, returning to the capital will be Leo and Elna’s top priority.
There is no doubt about that.
They will come back as fast as they can and fight Gordon.
“Was the reason he sent Sebas to their side was to stop them from going out of control?”
“Perhaps. Besides, Sebas is easy to use. He will be a very powerful force when they decide to attack the
capital.”
“If that is the case then Al is probably making his moves inside the castle isn’t he.”
“I expect that. Do you remember the time Arnold and Leonard used to search for the secret passages
in the castle?”
“Yes, I remember. They always boast that they discover a new secret in every letter they sent me. Back
then, I was wondering if they would eventually write me the layout of the whole castle but it seems
that it did become useful now. When it comes to the castle, Al knows it better than anyone.”
“I guess I could say that the time he spent playing around wasn’t a waste huh.”
Saying so, Johannes reminiscence.
He used to scold Al many times when he played in the castle. Al never showed any remorse when he
scolded him but he is now looking forward to the result Al will get from his exploration.
“Life really is full of mysteries. Just a while ago, I would never have thought that something like this
would ever happen. Of course, I never thought that there would be a time I would expect something
from Arnold either. This is really strange……”
“If we can see the future, we wouldn’t have such a hard time. Whether it be Aniue’s death or Gordon’s
rebellion, we can’t do anything about it once it happened. It is only a matter of how to deal with it. No
matter how much we prepare, unexpected things will still happen. But it is not all bad. Sometimes,
something can overcome our expectations as well. Al is a good example.”
Al has been looked down on as the Dull Prince by everyone in the country.
Johannes is well aware of that.
There were times when he thought that people went too far making fun of a prince but with the
person himself staying silent about it, as an Emperor, he couldn’t say anything.
The only thing that could be done by Johannes was to tell Al to get his act together.
1641
And whenever he told him so, small thoughts came up to his mind.
Be more proud, be more motivated.
With those in mind, Johannes kept scolding Al while Al always reflected them away.
However, the situation changed Al.
Ever since Leo joined the succession war, he began to show a side that he never showed before.
“Everyone calls Al the Dull Prince. Even if he makes some achievement, the starting point is just too
low that it barely makes any difference in his reputation. I’m sure that Gordon despises and looks
down on him. Perhaps, that might be Gordon’s fatal mistake.”
“If he can do that then I guess no one can call him the Dull Prince anymore huh.”
“I wonder about that. I’m sure that Arnold likes being treated as the Dull Prince. It is a fact that Arnold
himself lacks motivation. Someone who can only get serious in an emergency is hard to evaluate
properly after all.”
“Thinking about it, it is understandable. Those who excel in something by putting in efforts are
talented but those who excel in something without doing so are geniuses. Al is certainly the latter. Al is
a natural at outsmarting others and it is hard for a genius to be evaluated.”
“If people can see his worth then I wouldn’t be so troubled. Besides, Arnold himself doesn’t want to be
accurately evaluated either. I’m sure—-he has a side of him that he can’t show even to us.”
Johannes sighed after saying so.
He then looks at Lize and speaks to her in a small voice.
“I might be conceited too. I do have pride as a good emperor but I couldn’t see through the true nature
of my children at all. That’s why a rebellion like this happened. Forgive me. I only bring troubles to
you.”
“It is natural for a child to help their father and it is natural for a marshal to help their emperor. There
is no need for you to ask for forgiveness. It is me who should apologize. I shut myself away at the
border after Aniue’s death. It was certainly painful but as your eldest daughter, I should have stayed
and supported you. After all, Father was the one who suffered the most…..If I was by your side, a
rebellion like this wouldn’t happen. Please forgive me.”
Hearing Lize, Johannes smiles.
Then
“This rebellion isn’t all bad either. I finally get to talk to my daughter like this after all…….Lize, you
know what to do if the enemy manages to get through right?”
“….yes. If the time comes, I will definitely take Father’s life with my hands.”
1642
“Good. As an emperor, I can’t allow my head to be taken by the rebels. If I am going to be cut down, it
isn’t that bad to have you be the one who does it.”
Saying so, Johannes left with a smile.
Lize, who was left behind glanced a the enemy army that slowly encroaching them and shifted her
eyes to the castle.”
“Please rest assured….after I cut you down, I will definitely send all the fools after you, Father. I will
have them apologize for their follies in the afterlife.”
While hoping that it won’t come to that, Lize wiped the blood off her sword.
1643
SPT Chapter 249
Yup, can’t finish Dahlia and MM this week. Sorry
-Mr.Graverobber
Those who hurry
The night Gordon ceased his attack.
With the fight between Emperor Johannes and Prince Gordon continuing in silence, it is a quiet and
eerie night.
That night, there was a group rushing back to the capital.
“As expected of Saint-sama. I’m surprised that you can keep up.”
The group was divided into two, sky and land.
The land group is a cavalry corp consisting of over a thousand cavalries. The sky group is the Griffon
Knights and the Knights who could fly at the same speed as the griffons.
It’s Leo’s group.
“But it seems to take quite a toll on her though.”
“I know. If I use the holy sword like that it would be very tiring too. But…..right now we need speed.
We have no time to waste after all”
Elna whispered to Leo.
Leticia used the effect of the holy staff to increase everyone’s movement speed.
Due to that, Leo’s group managed to approach the Imperial Capital’s vicinity within half a day.
However, the price was also high.
Even if the staff can increase their movement speed, it doesn’t increase their physical strength.
The soldiers of Narbe Ritter started to become stragglers while the Griffon Knights couldn’t hide their
fatigue.
However, Leo who should be the most tired of them all was at the forefront of the group.
Riding on a griffon makes his speed greater than usual but it also consumes a considerable amount of
stamina.
1644
However, that doesn’t bother Leo.
The fact that he is pushing himself doesn’t change but this is so important that he doesn’t care about
such a thing.
“……Right. Leticia also understood our feelings and forced herself to use the holy staff. It would be
rude to her if we take our time.”
Leo said so and glanced behind him.
Leticia, who is using the holy staff, was riding behind another Griffon Knight.
Because she is using the staff while she is exhausted, they don’t know when she will lose her
consciousness.
Still, Leticia continues to use the staff.
The important force that was prepared to protect the Imperial Capital has left to rescue her.
Moreover, Al who has allocated most of his forces to her rescue is now in danger.
Leticia blames herself for everything and continues to clench the staff in her hands.
But that wasn’t the only thing in her mind.
If something happened to Al, Leo will surely break. With that feeling in mind, Leticia forces her
exhausted body.
Both for Leo and her own sake.
“I can’t laugh it off if we get there and there’s no rebellion to fight you know?”
“I wish that was the case……Vin always anticipates a lot of steps ahead and he said that a rebellion is
very likely. I’m sure that something will at least happen at the capital.”
Vin anticipated Gordon’s rebellion. He was acting with the Narbe Ritter in advance to prepare for it.
Gordon’s rebellion was within both Vin and Arnold’s expectations. What they didn’t expect was
Leticia’s abduction.
The Narbe Ritter who was standing by in a position where they can rush to the Imperial Capital at any
time is now quite far away from it.
Leticia’s staff is used to filling in for that miscalculation but it still costs them time.
That was what was worrying Leo.
“To pull off a successful rebellion, they would need to act fast. If they take their time, reinforcement
will arrive to help the Emperor after all. Gordon-aniue and the generals around him will not miss
that.”
1645
“You think that the rebellion might be over when we arrive?”
“…..right. If nothing else, the rebellion might even be successful.”
“His Majesty has the Prime Minister with him you know? I don’t think that they will go down without a
fight.”
“Yeah, I think so too. I don’t know what kind of action will he take. The result will be judged by how
much time they can buy for us.”
A half-hearted plan can only earn so much time.
If he is planning a rebellion, it will be on the final day where the tournament is held.
If the rebellion occurred the moment the tournament started at noon then it would have already been
about half a day since the rebellion started.
Will they make it in time.
The Impatience was born inside his heart but Leo forcibly suppressed it.
Even if he gets impatient, they can not go any faster. In other words, nothing will change.
“Al……will be okay right?”
“I think he will be fine. Nii-san won’t fight a battle he can’t win. The fact that he sent Sebas over to us
means that he will be okay even without his help. Let us believe in him, in Nii-san.”
“Right, Al will be okay. I’m sure he will have some evil plan as usual.”
Elna murmured as if to assure herself.
Hearing her, Leo slowly takes a deep breath.
Negative emotions are easy to spread. If he gets anxious, all the people who follow him will be anxious
too.
“Yup, even if we are not in the Imperial Capital, there are still people we can count on. We have Father
and the Prime Minister. Besides, if push comes to shove, we have Trau-aniue too. It will be okay.”
“I started to get worried when you brought up His Highness Traugott though…..”
“Well, he is certainly a little strange but he is a great person you know?”
After reassuring Elna, Leo turned to the front.
If Al is really alone then he can’t help but worry about him but he still has their family.
1646
“It’s okay. Nii-san is a person who cares about his family. With our family’s lives on the line, Nii-san is
strong you know.”
His words were pure.
A person who won’t and can’t do anything for himself. That is how Al is.
That’s why if there are people around him then he can rest assured.
“I’m sure Nii-san is doing his best right now. At the same time, he will be waiting for us. Nii-san hates
trying hard by himself after all. I’m sure he can’t wait to leave the rest to us. So let’s hurry.”
“Right, I’m sure Al would do that.”
Saying so the two hurried to the Imperial Capital.
East Gate of the Imperial Capital.
Two people were trapped inside a room that was originally used as the soldiers’ break room.
It was Gordon’s younger brother, Conrad, and Zandra’s younger brother, Henrick.
“Eric-aniue! I really didn’t know anything about this! Please release me!”
Eric appeared in front of the two.
His body was partially covered in blood.
That was because he was fighting on the front line with his sword until just now.
Although he is not that good of a swordsman, he never neglected his training. People do not follow a
man who only has a brain. A person who can’t hold up their sword in case of emergency can’t win the
trust of anyone. Eric who had observed the Crown Prince for a long time understands that well.
He doesn’t have to be strong but he needs the spirit to personally stand on the front line and inspire
the soldiers.
“Is that all you want to say? You didn’t even ask for Father’s safety, some prince you are huh?”
“Uu……that is……”
“If Eric-aniue is safe it means that Father is safe right. How delightful.”
Conrad yawns softly as he lies on the floor.
Seeing that, Eric Frowned at him.
“Henrick aside, did you hear anything about this, Conrad?”
1647
“If I know, I would have stayed in the castle you know. It’s obvious that I would be caught when the
rebellion started right. I do value my life you know.”
“Hmph, I wonder about that. But you are also someone who is directly involved. After this is over,
there will be questioning. Prepare yourself for it.”
“Scary, scary. Well, I will at least resolve myself for it then.”
Saying so, Conrad started sleeping on the floor again.
Seeing that, Eric left.
He came to visit them because he thought that they might know something useful but it seems that
they don’t know anything that can help him in the current situation.
“How was it? Your Highness Eric.”
“Prime Minister huh. It was useless. Gordon and Zandra aren’t the type that takes good care of their
family in the first place. Those two probably got abandoned by them.”
“It is that after all. I am also of the same opinion. But if that is the case, they won’t do us any good as
hostages.”
“Right. It would be a waste to attach Imperial Knights to guard two people who don’t serve any
purpose. So, I’d like to borrow some Imperial Knights that you can still spare.”
“Hou? Do you have something in mind, Your Highness?”
“There are still forces that can be moved inside the capital. I will go to them.
The Prime Minister immediately guessed Eric’s plan.
“I see. Even under the cover of night, it will still be dangerous to break out of their encirclement you
know? Moreover, I do not think that they will be willing to move so easily though?”
“I am aware of the danger but right now I am the eldest son. I have the duty to protect my father.
Besides, negotiating is my thing.”
Hearing that from Eric, the Prime Minister gives his consent.
And Eric who received his approval immediately took action.
1648
SPT Chapter 250
Never mind about childe, that guy is just a by-product……I need this……
-Mr.Graverobber
General Estman
“SOOO, Sleepy…….”
“In the end, we barely find anyone even though we searched all night huh…..”
“That’s obvious, right? All VIP immediately escaped to the throne room after all.”
The low-rank soldiers were not allowed to rest.
They were exhausted searching the castle for hostage all night.
“I wonder if we can get inside the throne room today……”
“Right. We covered almost everywhere already after all.”
“But it was the Knight Commander who is guarding the throne room you know? Will we really be able
to do anything?”
“…….it was like she was daring us to go there and die.”
Those words darkened the faces of the soldiers there.
Among them, a voice raised a question.
“I didn’t join this rebellion to get killed……”
“Me too…….it was because General Estman joined in…..we had no choice right……”
“Stop it. You will get us in trouble if the others hear us alright?”
“But……”
I understand their feelings well.
They did not participate in the rebellion of their own free will. It was because their superior chose to
participate and it was easier for them to just follow orders.
If they refused to fall in line, they would be killed.
There was no other choice for low-rank soldiers like them.
1649
They do have doubts about this rebellion. After all, they don’t know what is waiting for them at the
end.
If they could secure a large number of hostages, they could gain a sense of superiority. However, all
the possible hostages have escaped.
The easiest way to keep these soldiers’ morale up is to get the result. You can dismiss any of their
complaints if the result was produced.
However, with no result whatsoever, the soldiers will start to get anxious.
And that is especially true for a ragtag group of soldiers like this one.
“—–I heard this from the other guys you know”
There’s now way that I wouldn’t make use of their doubts.
I mixed in with the soldiers and started talking with a low voice.
The soldiers, who had been wearing out due to lack of sleep and the stresses from the rebellion,
listened to my story without questioning my existence.
“It seems General Estman was threatened to join the rebellion.”
“As I thought huh……”
“The general was so loyal to the Emperor after all……..I thought that would be the case.”
“That’s not the only problem. Apparently, the highnesses up there don’t really like the general’s
attitude in the first place. Even if this rebellion is successful, it seems that he will be executed in the
end you know. If that’s true, I wonder what will happen to us……..”
“What!? The general will get executed!?”
“That’s impossible right……”
“If our general is gone, they would only send us a new general right…….”
“I think that they wouldn’t take good care of us though………they will probably send us to the front line
immediately……..”
Anxiety started to spread among them.
Seeing that, I grinned and continued.
“At least, it would be nice if we can meet up with the general first.”
“Right! We are the general’s soldiers!”
1650
“We haven’t seen him since the rebellion began right!”
“If we can hear what he has to say, we wouldn’t be so worried like this…….”
After I further fanned their anxiety, I left them.
For them, this topic is no longer someone else’s affair.
Even if I left them alone, they will start to speculate things by themselves.
In this manner, I continue to spread rumors among their ranks.
The rumor I spread is not that far from the truth.
General Estman has earned a lot of trust from his soldiers and Father.
I don’t think General Estman who is widely known as a man of character would join Gordon’s side for
no reason.
“Well….after I instigated this much doubt in them, the soldiers should be getting a lot more curious
about what their general has to say.”
While saying so, I head to the lower floors of the castle.
If General Estman is at the castle then he would be on the lower floors.
However, there should be many officers on the lower floors as well. If they find a suspicious soldier
like me, they will immediately call me out.
That’s why I changed my appearance with illusion magic.
I don’t want to use it if possible. Well, there’s no other choice.
“I can’t say I like disguising myself as a woman though.”
Saying so, I took the appearance of Zandra with illusion magic.
While imitating the way Zandra walks, I infiltrate the lower floors of the castle.
Then one officer noticed me and saluted.
“Oh, Your Highness Zandra. Are you going to see the hostages?”
“The soldiers’ movement was sluggish. Where is the general?”
“Your Highness, we have a lot of generals on our side…..”
“I’m obviously talking about General Estman here! Don’t you even know that!?”
“HII! My, My deepest apologies! General Estman is currently inside his room!”
1651
“Bring him to me!”
“Th, that is….uhh…..the general was injured so it will attract the eyes of the soldiers so…….”
“You are saying that I should visit him myself? That’s quite the courage you have there. This means
that you refuse to obey my direct order right? I can find a lot of substitutes for someone like you, you
know?”
Saying so, I slightly wave my right hand.
The officer who thought that I was about to cast magic immediately acknowledged my command and
ran away.
Hearing my angry voice, the officers on the lower floors gathered to see what was happening but not
one of them raised a complaint.
After all, they know what would happen if Zandra gets in a bad mood.
After a while, General Estman arrived, carried by several soldiers on a stretcher.
Why is he on a stretcher?
That was because General Estman’s left foot was gone.
Many officers look away when they see him. They are probably his subordinates huh.
“We, we brought the general…….”
“Quite a sorry state you are in huh? General Estman.”
“…..like uncle like niece huh, Your Highness Zandra. It seems that the blood of a rebel couldn’t be
purified even with the precious blood of the Imperial Family……”
“What did you say…….?”
“If you are going to kill me then just do it already…….”
If General Estman is killed here, his subordinates will surely rise up against the rebels all at once.
He probably aimed for that huh.
He probably wants to at least leave behind a parting gift.
I grab the general’s chest and draw myself toward him.
“It seems you want to die huh……? If you want to die so much how about I personally send you to the
other side myself?”
“His Majesty’s biggest mistake was leaving children like you and His Highness Gordon alone……”
1652
Hearing that, I pulled myself closer to General Estman.
And then I whispered into his ear.
“If I can get you out of this situation, will you lend me your help?”
“…..who are you?”
“A wandering strategist, Grau.”
“….the strategist who helped Earl Simmel huh…….you need my help……?”
“It is much better than nothing.”
“So be it…..”
“This will hurt a little. Play along.”
“I don’t mind……do it.”
After the exchange, I removed my hand from General Estman’s chest and hit him at the area around
his wound on his left leg.
“UGHHHH!!!!!!”
“Stop blabbering that impudent mouth of yours! Don’t you care what will happen to your soldiers!?”
“I, I don’t care what happens to me……..please, my soldiers alone……..”
“Hmph! You should take that attitude from the beginning! Take him to that room! I have to talk to him
alone!!”
Saying so, I and General Estman started moving to the room.
The people around me who seemed to be the general’s subordinates are all staring at me with
murderous intent.
That’s good.
Not all the soldiers in the castle are under General Estman’s command.
However, most of the people near the front line at the throne room are his men.
It was General Estman who was originally entrusted with the castle protection. If they left his men
with him on the lower floors, they would have to be wary of his counterattack.
Let’s make their worry become a reality. If General Estman’s men refusing to obey Gordon’s command,
the search for the remaining jewel will be easier and it will support Alida’s side as well.
1653
Well, as expected, the enemy wouldn’t use his men to guard the pedestal that activated the Celestial
Sphere but our situation will improve a lot if we don’t have to be wary of them getting in our way.
While thinking so, we entered the room.
1654
SPT Chapter 251
The ‘Time’ has come people!
GO TO THE KOFI PAGE AND ENABLE MY ADDICTION!!!!!
PS. Right now I would be satisfied with Dionna though……
-Mr.Gamblingaddicted
Real and Fake
“Hey, you.”
“YES!”
“Bring me some tea and sweets. I’m thirsty.”
“Yes, Your Highness! I will have my subordinate–”
“I told you to do it! Hurry up! If you bring me some second rate tea I will kill you!”
I threatened the soldier that was standing by in the room as a guard.
The soldiers trembled at the unexpected order and left to prepare tea.
Now I am alone with General Estman.
I immediately dispel the illusion and rush over to General Estman.
1655
“I apologize for my rudeness.”
“Don’t mind it…..what are you planning to do……?”
“Get you out of here and have your soldiers on the upper floors switch to our side.”
“Easier said than done……we have enemies all around us you know…..?”
“I have a plan.”
Saying so, I turned back to Zandra.
After waiting for a while, the soldier returned.
I took the cup the soldier scarily offered me and sipped the tea inside. Then I throw the cup at the
soldier.
“HII!!??”
“Disgusting! Do you want to die!?”
“M, MY DEEPEST APOLOGY!”
“FINE! Bring all of General Estman’s aides here! I will kill them all in front of him!!”
“B, But……”
“Didn’t you hear what I just said!? You want to join them too!?”
Hearing that, the soldier went out of the room as if he was trying to escape me.
In the meantime, I explain my plan to the general.
“I will cast an illusion on you to trick the other soldiers’ eyes. You will pretend to be injured by
Princess Zandra and sneak out of this room.”
“What will you do after that……?”
“Cause a scene, I will not send out any pursuer. Head to the middle floors and go to Prince Arnold’s
room. The prince will wait for you there, escape through the secret passage with him.”
“His Highness is……how pathetic……I am supposed to be the one who protects him……..”
“If you think so then it’s time to do your job. Nothing is over yet after all.”
“Right…..it is as you say…….this time I will properly do my job.”
Saying so, General Estman grit his teeth and stood up by using the desk to support himself.
Even though he can’t stand upright with only one leg, the strength in his eyes did not decline.
1656
General Estman is known as a mild-mannered old man but he is still a fierce man in battle. The person
himself spent much of his life on the battlefield and his figure can hugely inspire others.
After a short while, the soldier brought back General Estman’s aides.
Every one of them stares at me.
The moment the soldier who brought them here closed the door, I showed him a dream with illusion
magic.
He should be seeing a happy dream by now.
“Take the general and escape. Make preparation.”
“Eh……?”
“What is going on……”
Remembering that I was still using the appearance of Zandra, I reverted to Grau.
General Estman then starts speaking to them.
“He’s an ally…..we are escaping to the middle floor……..”
“Y, Yes! As you command, sir!”
“Play along. We will pretend that General Estman was hurt by Princess Zandra.”
I gave them a short explanation and turned back to Zandra again.
Then I threw items at the general’s aides.
“Your cute aides will die here, General!!”
Saying so, I threw more stuff at the soldiers. However, the aides couldn’t keep up with my acting.
That’s why I whispered to them to prompt them to action.
“Scream. Call for help.”
“Eh? Uhh…..”
“Hurry it up. Don’t you want to help the general? Do you want me to really hurt him?”
“N, No……U,UWAAAAAAA!! HELP! ZANDRA-SAMA IS!!”
“GENERAL! Even with this you still refuse to obediently cooperate huh!? Then I guess I will do the
same thing to your aides too!!”
Saying so, I lightly hit one of the aides’ left foot.
1657
He sensed my intention and exaggeratedly fell to the ground while screaming.
“ARGHHHH!!! MY LEG!! ME LEGGGG!!”
If the soldiers outside hear this then they will think that Zandra went on a rampage and cut one of the
general’s aides’ leg.
After continuing the act for a while, I applied illusion magic to General Estman.
Then I send him out of the room together with his aides.
“ARGHH!! Damn it!!”
I immediately got out of the room and started shouting in a loud voice so that no one else could enter
the room.
Fearing Zandra, no one dares to approach the area around the room.
Of course, they know that whenever Zandra is in a bad mood, magic can come flying their way at any
moment.
I started shouting at the people around me to distract them from the fact that the General escaped.
However, when doing so, an unexpected person appeared.
“Seriously! What the hell was that! Unforgivable! He dared cast an illusion on me I will definitely
slaughter him! No! Killing him is not enough! I will make sure to keep him barely alive and make him
suffer, suffer, suffer, and suffer! I won’t let him die until he regrets what he’s done to me!”
The real one is hysterical.
I can’t possibly imitate that with my acting skill.
While having that strange admiration, I looked at Zandra who unexpectedly appeared.
The soldiers seemed to be taken aback and couldn’t say anything.
To those soldiers, I gave them an order.
“Why is there a fake me here!? Capture her!”
“Wha!? What!? What is going on!?”
If they are familiar with how Zandra usually is, the me who just threw a tantrum and cut off a soldier’s
leg is more authentic.
On the other hand, the real Zandra also has the authenticity from that demon-like appearance of hers.
“It’s you! You were the one who cast that illusion on me! Unforgivable!”
1658
“Don’t make up such a pathetic lie! I am the strongest mage of the Imperial Family who wield
forbidden magic you know! There’s no way I can be taken down by a mere illusion!!”
Saying so, I signal the soldiers to capture Zandra with my chin.
With the reason I made up earlier, it seems the soldiers’ doubt was cleared up.
Zandra, the strongest mage of the Imperial Family who wield forbidden magic, couldn’t possibly fall
victim to an illusion.
That’s what they think now.
Zandra on the other hand is getting angrier.
“What are you blabbering about! Hurry up and catch that fake!!”
“Shut up! You fake!”
“Don’t imitate me!! I can kill you all anytime I want you know!? If you don’t want to be killed then
catch that fake already! That guy is just an illusionist!”
“Like hell, we would believe that!”
“Ah, really, then die.”
Zandra suddenly muttered so in a calm voice.
Her anger has reached its peak.
She then swings her arm and cuts off the soldier’s head with a wind blade.
What a fool. I already expected you to act like that.
“Unforgivable, unforgivable, unforgivable, unforgivable, unforgivable, unforgivable, unforgivable,…….I
will slaughter all of you!!”
“That’s my line! Capture her! I won’t forgive anyone who impersonated me!”
The soldiers hold up their weapons albeit hesitant.
Whoever the real one is, they know that if they don’t rush in, they will get killed by Zandra.
Zandra is already in killing mode. The soldiers have no choice but to fight for their lives.
Under such circumstances, I left the place leaving behind an illusion of my Zandra.
“Now, this should keep them busy for a while.”
They will eventually notice that the Zandra they fight is the real one but Zandra will not forgive any
soldiers who doubt her in the first place.
1659
There was already a gap in Zandra and Gordon’s alliance from the start. This will further deepen that
gap.
What a good feeling.
It would be nice if they fight each other and their alliance collapsed.
Thinking so, I teleported to my room with transfer magic and reverted my appearance back to that of
a prince.
“The rest is whether General Estman can arrive here safely huh.”
In the unlikely case that General Estman fails to reach this room, I will have to make my move without
him.
There is no problem with that. It will just increase Alida’s burden a little and the blood of the soldiers
who unwillingly joined the rebels will be wasted.
Still, that would be a little painful to watch.
That’s why I hope that General Estman does his best and gets here safely.
“I wonder if the escaping group is safe……..”
I did what I could but I was still worried.
There are many soldiers outside the castle.
It would be difficult to sneak past them to get to Father.
“I have no choice but to believe in them huh…….”
Muttering so, I looked down at the cityscape of the Imperial Capital through the window in my room.
1660
SPT Chapter 252
So 4 copies of Dionna, 2 for Ningguang, and 3 for Beido…… not bad I guess……..
-Mr.Wastedhismoneyongachaandhastoeatcupnoodlesnow
Sister’s room
Perhaps because Zandra is going on a rampage on the lower floors, the castle has grown restless both
above and below.
Meanwhile, General Estman approached my room.
While dispelling the illusion I cast on the general, I wait for him inside my room.
The door then slowly opened and General Estman who was being supported by his aides entered.
“So you’ve come.”
“Your Highness……”
“It was a disaster huh. General.”
Hearing so, General Estman took his arms off his aides and kneeled on the floor while bowing to me.
“My deepest apology……!! It is all my fault…..! Not only can I not fulfill the duty of protecting the castle
His Majesty entrusted to me, I got captured by the enemy and my soldiers turned their blades to the
Imperial Family……..!”
General Estman apologizes as tears pour down his eyes.
“…..the Imperial Family also bears the responsibility. It’s Gordon who started the rebellion and Zandra
who joined him. It is Father and Eric-aniue’s fault for failing to suppress them. And it is Leo and my
fault to get cornered by them. So don’t worry about it too much. You do not have to bear the fault of
the Imperial Family.”
“Your Highness……”
“However, I will have you take up your responsibility as a general. Right now, there are many soldiers
who unwillingly participated in the rebellion. As a general, they are your responsibility. Stop them.
This is the task that no one else can do, General. If it is a general’s duty to guide their soldiers then this
is exactly your purpose. I won’t let you say that you can’t do it. The lives of many innocent soldiers are
on the line here. Stop them without fail.”
Hearing my words, General Estman clenched his teeth and stood up on his own without any support.
1661
“Please leave it to me……I will definitely perform my duty, Your Highness.”
“Good. then let’s go.”
Saying so, I take General Estman and his aides inside the secret passage.
There is not much time. The sun has already begun to rise. Alida will start moving out from the throne
room soon.
The more time I spend here, the more sacrifice will be made and the more burden Alida will have to
carry.
That’s why we walk there at a fast pace through the secret passage. It must be painful for General
Estman who is missing a leg and couldn’t walk without the support from his aides but he doesn’t raise
any complaints.
His eyes are burning with a mission.
General Estman probably intended to die in this castle. I know because people who prepared to die
have a certain atmosphere particular to them.
I won’t say that it is a bad thing. Each person has the right to use their life as they see fit.
However
“General, do keep this one thing in mind.”
“Yes, what is it……”
“If you waste your life I will not forgive you.”
“!?”
General Estman opens his eyes in astonishment.
He then slowly cast his eyes down with a nostalgic expression on his face.
“Your Highness……you have grown.”
“I’m already 18 after all.”
“So you have become that old now…….time sure goes by quickly. I always remember Your Highness as
a mischievous child who always got scolded by His Majesty but now……you are exactly like how His
Majesty was in his youth.”
“Stop that. I’m not good at being seen like that. Plus, let me tell you this. I already worked my life
worth today. Once this is over, I won’t leave my room for a while. You can’t let that impression of
yours slip to Father even by mistake alright? He will keep pushing troublesome things my way after
all.”
1662
“So Your Highness does take this part after His Majesty as well.”
I look unpleasantly at General Estman who is now making a nostalgic smile.
He then directed his smile at me.
“I thought that I could no longer face His Majesty but…I am looking forward to having a chat with him
now. Thank you, Your Highness.”
“Give me a break…….”
While muttering so, I approach the exit.
After watching the surroundings and checking that no one is on the other side with magic, I opened
the exit.
“This is the floor above my room. The soldiers around here should mostly be your men.”
“That appears to be the case……please leave this to me. I will take control of this floor first.”
“I will ask you to do that. Also, Knight Commander Alida will go on an offensive soon. Do stay out of
her way.”
“Will she not require our assistance?”
“Poor support will only slow her down.”
“I see, that is certainly the case. I understand. What will Your Highness do after this?”
“I will take advantage of the chaos and search for something.”
“….do you have a clue where it is?”
He didn’t ask what I will be looking for.
After all, there are only a few things I would deliberately search for in this situation.
“Of course. I caused the fuss exactly because I want to create an opportunity to look for it after all.”
I do have a clue. However, it is a place that cannot be approached unless I cause some commotion first.
If it’s now, I can get to it.
“Will you be going alone?”
“Grau will be with me. There’s no problem. You need only to focus your mind on this end, General.”
“Him huh………then I’m relieved. I wish you luck.”
Saying so, General Estman left the room together with his aides.
1663
After seeing them off, I returned back inside the secret passage and after I turned into Grau, I
teleported away.
The place I teleported to was a room.
A room fitting of royalty, filled with items of the highest quality.
Perhaps someone has been sleeping here until a while ago, the bed here is in disorder.
Seeing that, I have a fed-up expression on my face.
“I never thought that I would have to fish through my own sister’s room.
That’s right, this is Zandra’s room.
Zandra who had an illusion cast on her would have been resting here.
The reason for the commotion was to attract Zandra downstairs. Zandra who was suffering from an
illusion would have been sleeping here and in case she regained her consciousness, she will be lured
out by the commotion downstairs.
Considering the time I have to spend searching, I had to pull Zandra away from here first.
In the first place, one would doubt if the Rainbow Celestial Jewel would be here but the Prime Minister
is good at outsmarting others.
Zandra has high pride so she would never allow soldiers to search her room.
After all, it would cause a big conflict between Gordon and Zandra.
Moreover, usually, they would never have thought that he would hide such an important thing inside
the room of a potentially hostile princess.
If it’s not here then it is probably inside Gordon’s room. However, it is more likely to be in this place.
Zandra was under house arrest inside the inner palace for some time now. That’s why it should be
easier to hide things in her room.
Even if Zandra didn’t work with Gordon, Gordon would never expect it to be hidden inside Zandra’s
room. It is a good hiding place.
As long as the opponent is one of the Imperial Family, any hidden room inside the castle can be
opened.
The problem is where did he hide it.
“No choices but to search everything huh……”
A princess’s room is large.
1664
While thinking that it would be better if I bring someone to help me, I sigh and start searching.
1665
SPT Chapter 253
Thanks to ItzMuffins for becoming my enabler!!
Y’all should take example from him alright!! Whenever you see an addict you have to enable them!!
(Wait……that sounds kinda wrong…..has my brain already corrupted by the Gacha……?)
-Mr.UHeHeGachagoBRRRRRRR
———————–
Breaking Through the Siege
When Al was making his move inside the castle.
Finne and the others were heading to join Emperor Johannes.
The secret escape route in the throne room led to the upper layer of the Imperial Capital and their
group is currently moving toward the middle layer.
However, the Emperor is currently at the east gate. It is even further beyond the outermost layer of
the Imperial Capital.
Moreover, Gordon has laid a two-fold siege against the Emperor.
The first is the one encircling the east gate. The second one is in the middle layer to prevent anyone
who tries to bring reinforcement to the Emperor.
Finne’s group is approaching that.
“Breaking through forcefully here would be a bad idea as expected……”
Mia who always prefers facing the enemy head-on muttered so when she saw the enemy’s defensive
line is manned by a large number of soldiers.
While smiling bitterly at Mia, Finne thinks of a way to get past them.
If they cause a scene here, it will be difficult for them to go any further past this place.
After all, this is not the enemy’s final line of defense. According to the information from the scout, she
knows that the Emperor has established a base at the east gate. It is impossible that their encirclement
has reached all the way to this place given the distance between here and the east gate. With that
reasoning, there will surely be another defensive line near the vicinity of the east gate.
If they choose to break through them by force now, they will definitely get caught inside a pincer
attack.
That’s why they must slip through here unnoticed.
1666
However, it would be extremely difficult to get away without getting caught with Rupert, Alois,
Mitsuba, and Gianna in their group.
This number of people will make them stand out too much.
Mia and the Imperial Knights were assigned to guard them but they are only their escorts. It would be
unwise to have them fight a whole army.
Then what should they do.
[If it’s Al, what would he do], Finne starts thinking.
Al is good at threading a narrow path even if their options are limited. He does this by observing both
his allies and enemies and accurately analyzing the situation.
Their quality aside, the enemy’s number is overwhelming. On the other hand, albeit few, their escorts
are of high quality.
Their first goal is to get Rupert to Emperor Johannes. The secondary goal is to prevent anyone from
becoming a hostage.
Thinking so, Finne came up with an idea.
“Your Highness Rupert. May I talk to you for a second?”
“Wh, what is it? Finne.”
“Will Your Highness be okay even without me or Mia-san?”
For a moment, Rupert didn’t understand what she meant.
However, Mitsuba and Alois immediately noticed.
Mitsuba turned her worried gaze toward Finne but Finne smiled at her.
“Our priority is to get Your Highness Rupert to His Majesty’s side. I will act as a decoy for you.”
“A, A decoy!? Why!? I am only carrying a fake you know!? There’s no use bringing a fake to Father
right!”
“Your Highness, have you forget? What you are carrying is the real one. You must bring it to His
Majesty at any cost.”
This is the real jewel.
Remembering what Al said to him, Rupert stared at the bag.
He promised him to act with that in mind.
1667
However, Rupert was strongly reluctant to put someone’s life at risk to deliver something he knew to
be fake.
Finne then gently wraps her hands around Rupert’s.
“I am very happy that Your Highness worries about me but this is the only way. I am certain that they
will chase after me but Mia-san will be there for me. Moreover……..I also have a place I wish to go.”
“A place you want to go?”
“Yes. I don’t know whether it is appropriate for me to go there but I think that it will be worth a try.
That’s why I and Mia-san will take our own separate action. Please use that opening to get away.”
“But……if something happens to Finne……what should I say to Arnold-aniue……”
“It will be okay. Everyone is doing what they can. Al-sama too and Leo-sama as well. Your Highness’s
brothers and sister are doing their best. Your Highness has to do your best too.”
After he got persuaded by Finne, Rupert reluctantly agreed and gave her a small nod.
Finne then looks towards Mia.
“I am sorry but may I count on you?”
“Of course.”
“Thank you. Let’s head to the center of the middle layer. We are going to break through their siege.”
“It will be quite a chase you know……”
“The more attention they pay to us, the easier the others can move. Now, Your Highness. Please do
your best to escape. It does take courage to confront your enemy but you also need to be brave to run
away as well. Killing your emotions and making the right decision is very difficult……but Your
Highness is Al-sama’s younger brother. I am sure that Your Highness can do it.”
Saying so, Finne started running.
In response, Mia shoots an arrow toward the sky.
The arrow scattered and accurately hit the soldiers, making an opening in their defensive line.
“Wh, What!?”
“Magic!?”
“It’s, It’s an attack! Enemy attack!!”
As the soldiers shout so, Finne runs through the opening together with Mia.
1668
The soldiers who saw her figure then shouted.
“Blau Mowe!? It’s the Blau Mowe!! Catch her!!”
“It seems that you are quite popular, Finne-sama……”
“I usually do not like being shown favors by strangers but…..I am grateful for that now.”
Saying so, Finne smiles and continues to run with Mia.
While thinking what a bigshot she is, Mia blows away the approaching soldiers.
“My arrows are wasted on you people(Desuwa)! Don’t come after us again(Desuwa)!”
“She got a skilled escort with her! She speaks funny too!”
“Wha!? Did you just make fun of my way of speaking!? YOU!? It’s you right! I will remember your face!
I will blow you face up later!!”
While shouting so, Finne and Mia head to the center of the middle layer.
The soldiers’ eyes were completely focused on Finne’s group. After all, Finne is that famous.
One could say that she is great as a decoy.
“Your Highness…..we have to move as well.”
“Un……”
Prompted by Alois, Rupert turned his eyes away from Finne and Mia and started moving.
The enemy’s perfect line of defense was breached and Rupert’s group easily broke through it.
Then, while Finne’s group is attracting the enemy’s attention, Rupert’s group went from the middle
layer to the outer layer.
Since the first encirclement is focusing their effort on the Emperor at the east gate and the second
encirclement lured away by Finne, their journey was surprisingly smooth.
However, bad things can happen when you least expect it.
When entering the main street, Rupert saw a group of people fighting in a distance.
“That’s!? Her Highness Christa’s group!?”
Alois shouts.
Christa’s group seemed to have been discovered and now engaging the enemy.
The problem is that their enemies are not ordinary soldiers.
1669
“Dragon Knights…..”
The Dragon Knights of the United Kingdom are racing through the sky.
Christa’s group is under attack.
I have to help them.
When Rupert thought so, a person he didn’t expect to be there came into his sight.
At the place between Rupert and Christa’s group.
A small number of cavalry arrived through the alley.
Leading them was a big man with red hair.
“Gordon-aniue……”
Then, after he swept his eyes toward Christa’s group, Gordon glanced at Rupert who is in the opposite
direction.
Gordon and Rupert met eyes for a moment.
At that moment, Rupert’s body was frozen with fear.
1670
SPT Chapter 254
Special Thanks to HoneiB for more gacha fund!!!
Now, you guys ready for a long ass chapter?
-Mr.SpenttoomuchongachathatnowhecanaffordaPS5
The Dragon Prince
Going back a little in time.
Trau’s group that entered the passage before Finne was the first to pass through the enemy’s
encirclement.
This is thanks to Wendy. With her illusion, Trau’s group easily managed to elude the enemy’s eyes and
sneak past their encirclement.
After that, they proceed to head to the east gate.
However, there was one miscalculation.
Considering the burden casting the illusion will have on Wendy, Trau chose to have her use an illusion
to divert the soldiers’ attention instead of turning themselves invisible. In other words, they could not
elude the eyes in the sky.
“Once we cross the main street the east gate should be a little up ahead. There will be a siege there but
we will act as a decoy for you.”
“Please head to the east gate together with Her Highness Christa, Your Highness.”
“I will leave it to you two.”
Trau agreed to the Raiffeisen brothers’ proposal.
A vassal’s duty is to make a sacrifice for the Imperial Family. Trau doesn’t take that for granted but he
understands that right now this is their only option.
It is easy for him to raise a complaint here but if he does that, he will end up unable to protect what he
must.
It would be different if he has the power to protect someone without giving up anything but Trau
doesn’t think that he has such power.
“Everyone, it is just a little longer. Can you do your best until then?”
1671
“Okay…….”
“Rita too!”
“I’m…..okay too.”
Christa, Rita, and Wendy answered. Only Wendy seemed a little tired. This is because she has already
used her illusion many times today.
It might be dangerous to rely on her any more than this. If she loses her consciousness while using her
illusion, their whereabouts will immediately be discovered. With that in mind, Trau instructed the
group to cross the main street.
After observing the surrounding, they confirmed that there are no enemy soldiers around.
It seemed like the perfect timing for them to cross.
However, hearing the unique sound of the wind from the sky, they realized that it was a mistake.
“Your Highness!!”
Marx, the elder of the Raiffeisen brothers pulled out his sword and deflected the spear that was
thrown at Trau.
“DEFENSIVE POSITION!!”
His order was immediate.
The guards immediately get into a defensive position around Trau’s group.
In the meantime, the Dragon Knights slowly descend from the sky.
“So the Raiffeisen brothers could detect us from the sound alone huh……it seems you haven’t lost your
edge.”
Said the man straddled on a red dragon.
Reddish blonde hair and magenta(Reddish-Purple) eyes.
Although he has a neat and tidy face, he is a mysterious man that possesses a sense of wildness to him.
The name of this man is William van Drummond.
The second prince of the United Kingdom with the moniker of the Dragon Prince.
“The Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom huh……I heard that the Dragon Knights have a very strict
code of chivalry but it seems that it is nothing much given that you have participated in a cowardly
rebellion like this.”
1672
“That’s a harsh word but we can not refute that. I shall accept it. Yes, I am a coward. However, this is
also for my homeland. Was it not for your homeland that you, who lost your lord and left the
battlefield behind, are here right now?”
“We have returned to serve His Highness Traugott. We did not come here for the sake of the Empire.
This is our loyalty.”
William squints his eyes at Manuel’s words.
He then unsheathed the sword on his waist.
“How envious. I am glad that you were blessed with good vassals. Prince Traugott.”
“I completely agree with you on that. They are wasted on me. So, Prince William. Will you add my head
to the list of your military achievements?”
“Please don’t be so modest, Prince. As the direct younger brother of the Crown Prince, you have quite
a special position. Even now, you are acting outside the castle with your escorts. Perhaps you brought
something of value out with you? For example, the Rainbow Celestial Jewel that was entrusted with
the Imperial Knight Commander.”
William said so and looked at the bag hanging on Trau’s waist.
Originally, William and his Dragon Knights were supposed to wait at the castle as he thought that the
rebellion was Gordon’s responsibility to manage.
It was William’s father, the King of the United Kingdom, who chose to support Gordon. William himself
was against it. He personally came to the Empire because of his friendship with Gordon but William
wished for Gordon to take the throne without resorting to a rebellion.
It would be a different story if the current Emperor had a clear fault in his rule but there was no such
thing in Johannes’s reign. This rebellion only serves the army. The absence of war was good for the
people and is the result of the Empire’s excellent diplomacy.
The backlash is inevitable if Gordon chooses to use the military to force them to accept his rule.
The nobles will not accept him as their emperor and the other candidates will start their own
rebellion in the regions that support them if that happens, the Empire will be locked into a state of
large scale civil war.
That would be the result that not only the United Kingdom but the Dominion also desired.
The Empire that reigns over the central part of the continent has been an immovable mountain for
foreign countries that wish to expand their territory for many years. It is not that rare for their
invasion to be repelled and their countries got counter invaded instead.
However, William did not like such a method. The people’s hearts will not go with them when they
take territory from a disturbed country. It would be like taking on a huge liability.
1673
Their grudge would probably remain for hundreds of years. Moreover, if they take the entirety of the
Empire, they will be in conflict with other countries and further wars will be born.
The continent will enter a warring era. William suggested a wait-and-see approach to his father but he
was dismissed and his father decided to join Gordon.
His idea was that the United Kingdom is an island country. They are in a location where they could
observe the situation on the mainland without getting involved.
William’s idea has not changed even now. He still thinks that participating in this rebellion was a
stupid idea.
However, even if he thinks that way, it has already been done. Right now, William thinks that it is his
job to turn this rebellion into something good.
That’s why Gordon’s rebellion must succeed.
For that reason, William was monitoring the situation from the sky when he received the information
that the Imperial Knight Commander was guarding the Rainbow Celestial Jewel at the throne room. He
thought that there must be some kind of escape route they can use to sneak out of there.
At first glance, Gordon seemed to have an overwhelming advantage. However, it is still possible for the
Celestial Sphere with only three Rainbow Celestial Jewels to be destroyed by the holy sword.
If they can’t get their hand on the fourth one, the rebellion might end in failure. It is not too late to
defeat the Emperor after they secure the fourth jewel.
Thus what they should aim at is the fourth Rainbow Celestial Jewel.
That is why William, who accurately gauged the situation to be so, appeared in front of Trau’s group.
“I have no idea what you are talking about?”
“I do not mind if you wish to play dumb. I only need to see for myself.”
Saying so, William ordered his subordinates to attack Trau’s group.
The Dragon Knights are powerful.
Albeit small, a dragon is still a dragon. It has a power that no ordinary soldiers can compete with.
Even if Trau’s escort is composed of the Crown Prince’s aides, that was inevitable.
While having to mind the Dragon Knight’s sword and spear, they have to be wary of the dragon’s fangs
and claws.
They are locked in a stalemate. However, that is exactly what William wanted.
“As expected of the Wings of the Crown Prince. Even though you have been away from the frontline, it
seems that you are still my match.”
1674
“I don’t want to hear that from a person who can deal with both of us at the same time while being so
calm like that.”
William directly engages with the Raiffeisen brothers but he managed to deal with them without
taking a single step back.
Seeing that, Trau thinks that his moniker of the Dragon Prince is not an exaggeration.
However, that impression soon turned into caution.
That was because William has a small smile on his face.
Trau, who felt a sense of crisis from his smile, looked up at the sky.
“You have a good instinct, Prince.”
“Kuh!”
Looking up at the sky, several more Dragon Knights have arrived and are descending toward them.
Delayed assault. William was aiming for the moment when Trau’s escorts were distracted and his
defense weakened.
The descending Dragon Knights aim at Trau with a throwing spear.
Three spears were thrown.
Two were deflected by Trau but all he could do to the third one was to deviate its trajectory.
“UGH!?”
The spear pierced the left side of his stomach.
Trau frowns in pain.
However, he does not collapse. He knows that he can’t fall now.
The bag he was hanging on his waist flew away from him from the attack.
Trau keeps his eyes on the bag that fell on the road.
Seeing that he prioritizes the bag over his own wellbeing, William was convinced.
“Take that bag! It’s the jewel!”
In response to William’s voice, the Dragon Knights immediately moved.
The escorts tried to block their way.
Their formation collapsed and the battle has turned to chaos.
1675
Meanwhile, they heard a despair-inducing sound.
The sound of the cavalry.
Trau turned his eyes to the direction of the sound.
Gordon appeared from the back alley with a cavalry unit that seems to be his escort.
“This is bad!”
Trau shouted and headed for the bag.
As he ran, a Dragon Knight attacked him.
His shoulder was pierced.
The Dragon Knight’s eyes then turned to the bag.
However, that was a fatal mistake.
“DON’T LOOK DOWN ON ME!!”
With his shoulder still pierced, Trau swings his sword with his other arm and cuts down the Dragon
Knight.
He managed to reach the bag, but the pain from his wounds caused his consciousness to dull and he
ended up on his knee.
While regretting that he had been neglecting his training, Trau ordered his legs to move.
However, his legs do not move. During that time the enemies are closing in on him.
He has to take the bag.
In front of Trau who reached his hand for the bag, someone picked it up.
The hand was a familiar small hand.
“Leave it to me…..!”
“NO! CHRISTA!!”
It was Christa who picked up the bag.
The Dragon Knights tried to stab Christa with their spears but Rita repels them.
“Run to the street! Cu-chan!”
“Un!”
1676
Once she reaches the narrow street where houses are lined up on both sides, the Dragon Knights will
not be able to move freely.
Gordon’s group is also on horseback. If a small child runs away from them using the narrow street, he
will not be able to chase after her properly.
Her judgment was not wrong.
That’s why William ordered his men with the loudest voice since he arrived.
“DON’T LET HER ESCAPE!!”
While everyone was aiming for Christa, Rupert who received Gordon’s glare was stiffened.
What should I do.
To confront him or to run.
He knows which one he is supposed to do but his leg did not move.
Rupert had chosen to confront Gordon even though it is something that he shouldn’t do the most.
Rupert himself knew that he was wrong.
Still, his body doesn’t move as he wishes. His heart was frozen by fear.
For Rupert, his older siblings were a symbol of fear. Among them, he was especially scared of Gordon.
However, the voice of Alois who stood next to him woke him up.
“Your Highness! Your Highness! I am with you! It will be okay!”
“Alo,is…..?”
Alois grabs Rupert whose face has gone pale. His hand was terribly cold.
That was how much cornered Rupert felt.
However, he has to make his decision.
Whether to help them or run away.
Gordon was standing between Rupert and Christa.
If Rupert moved to rescue her, he would surely get in his way.
“Your Highness, your order please!”
“My order…..”
1677
Rupert was prompted by Alois and looked behind Gordon. He saw Christa being chased by the
enemies.
He thought that he had to help. At least, he wanted to send Alois to her.
However, if he does that, Rupert will be stuck.
As long as there is a siege around the east gate, he needs to have enough force to break through it.
If he helps, he can not get to the east gate.
However, what he has is a decoy. As long as what Christa is carrying is the real jewel, he must protect
her.
“Rescu–….”
The moment he muttered so.
Al’s words floated in his mind.
‘Even if someone is in danger right in front of you, you mustn’t help them you know?’
‘If you come back to help them you will reveal that you are holding the dummy.’
If he rushes to their aid, the enemy forces will concentrate on them.
If it is his duty to get away then he mustn’t help them.
It takes courage to run away.
Rupert now fully understands Finne’s words.
He doesn’t want to abandon them. He wants to help them.
He never thought that sealing those feelings away would be so painful.
However, Rupert clenched his teeth and made his decision while shedding tears.
“We are running away…..we have to attract the attention of those cavalries.”
“Your Highness…….I understand!”
Alois covers Rupert as they cross the main street and head to the east gate.
Seeing that, Gordon mockingly smiled at them.
“Hmph, what a coward. To think that such a fool is my younger brother. He makes me sick.”
“Should we let them go, Your Highness?”
1678
“Chase after them just in case. There’s no way that such a fool was entrusted with the real jewel. My
bet is on Traugott. I will head to join that side.”
“As you command. CHASE THEM!”
The cavalry chases after Rupert’s group.
Gordon who stayed back then slowly headed toward Trau’s group.
After all, he could see that William had already captured Christa.
1679
SPT Chapter 255
Oh, yes, it’s coffee appreciation day btw……
-Mr.Forgottooaddthatonthefirstrelease
Wound of Honour
Christa was within William’s reach.
While the other Dragon Knights were locked in a stalemate with the escorts, Rita alone is in the
position to protect Christa.
William easily ran past Rita and grabs Christa’s arm from the side.
“Ah…..!”
“Cu-chan!!”
William pulls Christa toward him and starts flying up on top of his dragon.
He planned to take her directly to the castle.
However.
“UWAAA!!!!! I WON’T LET YOU GO!!!!”
“Rita…….!!”
As the dragon is ascending to the sky, Rita clings to the dragon’s leg and tries to crawl up toward
Christa.
Seeing that, William gives her a warning.
“Let go, girl. I do not wish to kill you.”
“Rita is not a girl! Rita is an Imperial Knight!!”
“An Imperial Knight?”
Hearing that, William thought that the child was pulling his leg.
However, he immediately changed his mind after seeing the white cloak on her back.
That cloak certainly belongs to the Imperial Knight Order.
“It seems that’s not a joke huh……”
1680
“Rita is not joking! Release Cu-chan! If you don’t Rita will follow you all the way to hell!”
“…..I really do envy the Imperial Family.”
Christa never left any military nor political achievement. She is an ordinary princess.
Even so, she has a person that is willing to give up her life for her. A child that is of similar age to the
princess herself calling herself an Imperial Knight is desperately clinging to a dragon’s leg.
When William was around Christa’s age, he didn’t have any friends who would go so far for him. Some
may have said that they would always protect him but there was no one who actually acted on it.
“You are brave…….for the bravery you displayed, I shall spare your life. Let go.”
William slowly lowers the altitude.
It is the height where Rita can land on the roof if she let go of the dragon.
She might be injured from the fall but it will not be life-threatening.
However, Rita uses that opportunity to keep crawling up.
“Rita won’t leave Cu-chan!”
“….you will die you know?”
“Even if I have to die, I will never let go!!”
Rita climbs up the unbalanced body of the dragon and reaches for Christa.
Christa also reached her hand out for her.
With only a short distance between them, William ascended to the sky again.
Rita, who lost her balance, had no choice but to pull her hand back and cling to the dragon.
“What are you doing! William!!”
The reason William ascended was that Gordon has approached them from below.
If he stayed there, Gordon might attack Rita.
That’s why William raised the altitude.
“Your help is unneeded! Leave this to me!”
“Don’t be a fool! This is not the time for that!”
1681
“It’s your side that doesn’t have time! Moreover, I also have my reason! If it was known that the
Dragon Prince needed help to shake off a child then I would become the laughing stock of the entire
continent! If you wish to interfere then prepare to receive my blade!!”
Saying so, William takes a distance from Gordon.
He then lowers the altitude again and speaks to Rita.
“Who did you get that cloak from?”
“Captain Oliver!”
“I see…..so he entrusted it to you huh.”
An Imperial Knight Captain would never entrust the white cloak with a child for no reason.
Perhaps he saw potential in this child.
It would be easy to crush this child’s future.
However, William found that to be unpleasant.
“Let’s hear your name. Imperial Knight.”
“It’s Rita!!”
“I see, Sir Rita, it seems that cloak is still too heavy for you. That cloak is proof of strength. Once you
have become someone who is befitting of that cloak, we will meet again!”
Saying so, William took the throwing spear that was strapped on the dragon, flipped it to the blunt
side, and stabbed it at Rita.
Rita, who was struck by it, was shaken off from the dragon.
She fell on the roof but Rita endured the pain and pulled out her sword.
She then threw it at William.
“UWAAAAA!!!”
“UGH!”
Her sword flew directly at William’s face.
However, since it lacked speed, William bends his neck and avoids it. Still, the blade managed to
scratch his cheek, leaving a small wound.
On the other hand, Rita fell off the roof as she lost her balance.
“Splendid.”
1682
After giving Rita a word of praise, William turns to Gordon.
“I have the Rainbow Celestial Jewel! I’m going to head back to the castle!”
“Alright! I will activate it at the pedestal myself!”
Gordon triumphantly proclaims as he straddles himself behind one of William’s men and ascends to
the sky.
Trau’s group tried to pursue them but they couldn’t follow as they were already high in the sky.
After all, flight magic is an advanced technique and only a few people can use it to combat a dragon in
the sky.
“Ugh…..! we are heading back to the castle!”
“Your Highness! You can’t go back with those wounds!”
“This is only a scratch!”
Saying so, Trau tries to head to the castle while his blood is still pouring out from his wounds.
However, Wendy stopped him.
“Your wound must be treated first, Your Highness.”
“Miss Wendy…….”
“Your Highness has lost too much blood. Your life will be in danger if you continue to move.”
Trau had lost a lot of blood when he activated the Imperial Flag. On top of that, he also sustained new
injuries.
If he heads to the castle like this, he will surely collapse on the way there.
However.
“I have no need for my life. If I have to live without being able to protect my sister then death is much
more preferable.”
“If Your Highness dies, you will not be able to save her. Please treat your wounds first!”
Trau tries to push Wendy out of the way but Wendy refuses to move.
Meanwhile, one of the escorts carried over the tattered Rita.
“She’s not waking up!! We need to treat her right away!!”
“Rita…….”
1683
Wendy worriedly looked at Rita.
Her right shoulder was dislocated probably because she didn’t break her fall and there are small
scratches all over her body as well.
Seeing that, Trau grits his teeth.
“Absolutely unforgivable….! We will divide into two units! One unit will protect the children here and
the other will head to the castle with me!”
“Your Highness. That is too reckless. Our force is already small, it would be a bad idea to split up any
more than this.”
“Then I should stay silent and watch!?”
“That is all we can currently do. We have no choice but to put our hopes on Knight Commander Alida
and His Highness Arnold who is still at the castle.”
Trau wanted to refute those words.
He didn’t want to put his expectation on uncertainties.
However, his body couldn’t keep up with him anymore.
“Ugh…..!?”
His vision was shaky and he couldn’t stand upright.
It was due to the loss of blood.
“Please lay down! I will close the wound! Please lay Rita down here too!”
Wendy begins treating Trau and Rita, her expression was like she was about to cry.
Even Wendy herself wanted to go after Christa.
Her heart was almost crushed from the anxiety when she was the captive of the Dark Elves. It was
Christa and Rita who saved her. The time she spent with them was her time to heal.
Moreover, when the rebellion started, instead of abandoning her, Christa came for Wendy.
Wendy felt so much happiness from that.
Still, Wendy has to make a realistic decision.
If they forcefully push on, Trau will die and Rita will also be in danger.
Wendy knew well that even if she could help Christa by doing that, Christa herself wouldn’t be happy.
That’s why Wendy put all her energy into healing the two.
1684
She is not so good with healing magic but this is no time for her to say that.
Fortunately, the cavalry Gordon brought with him left to chase after Rupert’s group.
Thanks to that, they managed to secure the time to treat them.
However, it was also a fact that they have hit a huge obstacle.
Another wind blew in Gordon’s favor.
Understanding that, Gordon’s was in a merry mood as he rides on the dragon.
“HaHaHaHa!! Now my victory is guaranteed!”
While listening to Gordon’s laughter, William looks at Christa in his arms.
Christa did not move. She only gazes back at the place Rita fell.
She doesn’t think that Rita was dead but she knows that her injury will be serious.
Even in that situation, Rita did not give up until the end and aimed for William’s head.
William was convinced that once she grows up, she will become a terrifying knight.
However.
“Still, William. You let your guard down huh. With a brat like that managed to leave a scratch on you,
your reputation as the Dragon Prince will cry you know?”
“I did not let my guard down. I have been vigilant. That was exactly why my head is still intact like
this.”
“Hmph, after receiving such a humiliating wound, it can’t be helped that you are in a bad mood huh?”
“I am in a bad mood because I find your laughter unpleasant. Whether this wound is humiliating or
honorable, it is up to me to decide. This wound is from a knight that tried her best to protect her lord
without caring about herself. This is no different from the wounds I received from the enemies on the
battlefield. It is a wound of honour. Anyone who insults the knight who gave me this wound—–is
unforgivable.”
William said so and left the formation to head to the castle alone.
He then mutters quietly to himself.
“So he can not even pay respect to his enemy anymore huh……”
Time has changed his friend.
1685
While being quite shocked by that, William grew anxious about the future.
Overconfidence is a slow and insidious killer.
This has been proven time and time in history.
1686
SPT Chapter 256
More thanks to Rector, WK, and an Unnamed supporter for more gacha fund!!!
I ended up using some to treat myself a box of shrimp donut though……
-Mr.Spenttoomuchongachabutcouldn’tstophimselffromorderingexpensivefood
Blau Mowe Story – First Part
As Finne and Mia headed to the center of the middle layer, they were being chased by the soldiers.
Finne’s destination was a certain establishment there.
“Where are you going!? Finne-sama!”
“It’s just a little ahead!”
“Chase her! Don’t let her get away!”
After they ran through the narrow back alley, Finne emerged out to a street.
Then, Finne’s destination finally came into sight.
It was a familiar establishment.
The place where adventurers of the Imperial Capital operate from.
The Imperial Capital Branch Adventurer Guild.
Finn and Mia run toward it.
However, there are many pursuers on their tail.
If they enter the adventurer guild like this, the soldiers will follow them in as well.
Finne was a little hesitant to do that but all of a sudden, her arm was grabbed and she was pulled to
the side.
“KYAH!”
“My apology, Finne-sama. Please keep quiet for a minute.”
It was the receptionist of the guild that always handled the requests for Silver who pulled Finne into
the shadow of the building.
The soldiers will come after her soon.
1687
“Where did she go!? Find her!”
The soldiers spread out and search the surrounding area.
However, they were interrupted before they could properly look around.
“Aren’t you quite brave to wander around here?”
“You came to pick a fight with us, eh?”
Adventurers emerged from all over the street with their weapons in hand.
The soldiers involuntarily step back.
“W, we do not wish to fight with you gentlemen! The Blau Mowe should have escaped here! Hand her
over!”
“Can’t say I know anything about that.”
“She’s the famous beauty right. If she showed up around here, there’s no way we wouldn’t notice.”
“It seems no one saw her around here at all. You have the wrong place. Just go back.”
The adventurers play dumb and don’t even listen to the soldiers.
A young soldier couldn’t stand it anymore and pulled out his sword.
“Cut the crap! We know that she’s here! Don’t you dare get ahead of yourselves you lowly
adventurers!”
“Oi, did you hear that? He said lowly adventurers right.”
“That’s quite rich coming from a soldier who betrayed the Emperor.”
“I thought that you soldiers are better than this but was it just my misunderstanding?”
The adventurers send cold gazes toward the soldiers.
Unable to endure it, the soldiers stepped forward and pulled out their swords one after another.
“W, Wait! Calm down!”
“Like hell, we can calm down! We stood up for the Empire! We have no reason to be ashamed of that!”
“For the Empire? Don’t make me laugh. You all did it for yourselves right?”
“!!!!”
In response to the adventurers’ provocation, the young soldier tried to charge at the adventurers with
their face bright red.
1688
However, an arrow pierces the ground in front of the young soldier.
“Wha……!?”
“Oops, I would advise against it you know. We adventurers can easily shoot an arrow through a
monster’s eye from miles away. We can hit a target as big as a human’s head with our eyes closed, you
know?”
The soldiers look around.
There are more than ten adventurers on the surrounding roof aiming at the soldiers with their bow.
More adventurers steadily coming out to the street.
Under pressure, the soldiers had no choice but to give up their search.
“They ran away.”
“They really did. Thank you very much.”
“It’s nothing, Finne-sama has always been a good customer after all.”
The receptionist said with a smile.
Finne and Mia were then guided into the guild.
Many citizens had escaped to this place.
“So many people…….”
“Some of the civilians have evacuated here. Since the number of people we can protect is limited, we
divided them into groups and hid them in various places. Even so, since we can’t openly move, the
number is not that significant…..”
The receptionist says so and casts her eyes down.
Originally, it should have been the government’s duty to evacuate the citizens.
For the people.
Finne remembered that word.
“I can not thank you enough for your work. Thank you for the thing you have done.”
“No, even the adventurers are citizens of the Empire after all. We live in the Imperial Capital, we have
our friends and family here. It’s natural that we would do what we can.”
Finne thanked the adventurers once again and turned to the people who are being protected by the
guild.
1689
Most of them were elderly and children. The adventurers are playing with the children who seem to
have got separated from their parents.
Finne realized that the damage to the people was greater than she expected since the rebellion
occurred during the festival.
It was easy to apologize to them right now but it is not Finne’s job to apologize. Her duty is to put an
end to this chaos and return them to their daily life. And she came here to do just that.
“My apology but I have a request for the adventurer guild.”
“What is it?”
“Would you lend me the remote communication room? I’d like to discuss something with the guild
headquarters.”
The reason Finne came here was to ask for the adventurers’ cooperation.
However, as a general rule, adventurers may not get themselves involved in a conflict in or between
nations.
Both Lynfia and Sieg are not cooperating with Al as an adventurer. It’s just cooperation on a personal
level.
That’s why, even if Finne asks the adventurers here to lend their strength to the Emperor, no one will
move.
A few may give their cooperation personally but that will not be enough.
For that sake, Finne was planning to negotiate with the tops of the adventurer guild.
However.
“That won’t be necessary. I am talking to them right now.”
Finne opened her eyes in surprise at the person who appeared from inside the guild.
“……Your Highness Eric……”
“It seems you have noticed the same thing as me huh, Finne.”
“It appears so……”
Eric, who broke through the siege with several Imperial Knights, has arrived at the adventurer guild
earlier than her.
Moreover, he has already begun negotiations with the guild headquarters.
1690
“But it is good that you came. I will do something about the hard-headed guys at the guild
headquarters. I will have you persuade the adventurers here instead.”
“What do you mean, Your Highness?”
“I’m good at negotiating. I have connections with their upper management and I know secrets that
they want to hide as well. I am currently in the middle of negotiating with them but it is likely that
they will leave the decision to the adventurers on site. Even so, that alone will not move the
adventurers here.”
“…..if the rebellion is successful, His Highness Gordon will become the Emperor right?”
“That’s right. If they stand up against the next Emperor, they will be charged with crimes and they will
not be able to operate here anymore. They might be willing to drive away the soldiers around the
guild’s vicinity but they do not have any reason to do anything more than that.”
There is no guarantee that the Emperor will be victorious.
Rather, it was clear to everyone that Gordon has the advantage at the moment.
If they can not persuade the adventurers here, there will be no point even if they managed to receive
permission from the headquarters to interfere with the Empire’s problem.
“I am good at negotiations but when it comes to persuading them I am not the right person. You are
better suited for that.”
“…..I will do what I can.”
“I will leave it to you. My father’s life is at stake here. Please do it.”
Saying so, Eric bowed his head.
At his attitude, Finne felt a strong sense of discomfort.
This isn’t like Eric at all.
Finne has come in contact with Eric many times at the castle but he was not someone who would say
such a warm thing like that.
She had the impression that he was more of a cold and calculating person who doesn’t care about
anything but himself.
However, Finne suppressed that sense of discomfort.
Right now that doesn’t matter.
The important thing right now is to get the adventurers’ cooperation. Anything besides that is a
secondary concern.
1691
“If I have to speak honestly, I think that it will be difficult.”
“I think so too.”
Finne nodded as if agreed with the words of the receptionist and Mia.
No matter what she says, adventurers are people who move for profit. After all, that is their job.
Their iron-clad rule is For the People. That’s all.
It would be one thing if he is a fiendish person that acts against the people but Gordon ultimately
doesn’t care about them at all.
He has no interest in them but neither does he actively tries to hurt them.
It will be extremely difficult to persuade them.
Still, she must do it.
“Can you gather the adventurers for me? Please tell them that the Blau Mowe has something to talk
with them.”
Saying so, Finne embarked on the challenge of persuading the adventurers.
1692
SPT Chapter 257
Thanks for the coffee again!! I can’t see your name though….
Now, things are approaching its climax I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
Blau Mowe Story – Second Part
As she stood in front of the gathered adventurers, Finne took a deep breath.
There are about a hundred adventurers inside the guild right now. There are still many more
adventurers inside the Imperial Capital but they are currently guarding the other civilian shelters.
However, most of the adventurers that are currently here are the core members of the Imperial
Capital branch. Their ranks are high and they are quite influential.
If she can persuade them, the others will follow.
The problem here is that these people are genuine adventurers.
“Adventurers. Thank you for giving me the chance to speak to you all. I am Finne von Kleinert, you all
might know me by the name of the Blau Mowe. As you may already know, a rebellion has occurred
inside the Imperial Capital. The one who is leading this rebellion is the Third Prince, Gordon Lakes
Adler, and his followers, the extremists of the Imperial army.”
After she explained to them the details of the situation, Finne looked at the faces of the adventurers.
They all have a difficult expression on their faces.
Finne understood their feelings well. These people love freedom and always live as they please but
each one has their own way and belief of being an adventurer.
Many may call them wild and violent and that is not necessarily wrong. These people are indeed wild
and violent.
Still, Finne believes in them.
After all, the person whom Finne trusts the most believes in them.
“I have come before you all to ask for your help. The Imperial Capital is in great turmoil. I am not here
to ask you to assist His Majesty the Emperor. I simply want to ask you to be the one who protects the
citizens. Doing so might make you an enemy of His Highness Gordon. I understand well that in the
likely case where His Highness Gordon ascends the throne, it will bring great trouble to everyone
here. Even so……would you please stand up for the people of the Imperial Capital?”
1693
The adventurers look at Finne.
These people hate injustice. They became an adventurer because they hated lying to themselves or
because they hate the idea of obeying others.
To them, Gordon’s method is the very thing that they hate.
However
“Hey, Finne-sama. I have a question, may I?”
Asked a slightly scary looking brown-haired man.
It was Gai, Rita’s master, and Al’s childhood friend.
“What is it, Gai-san.”
“We adventurers are not that educated you see. We do not know much about politics but we do
understand that a rebellion is bad. Still, even if the top of this country changes to someone else, we
adventurers couldn’t care less about that. A nation does not interfere with the guild’s business and the
guild doesn’t interfere with how a country is run. It’s the job of the nobles and knights to protect the
country. Our job is only to protect the people. That should have been the established rule. If a country
falls into crisis, it should be the responsibility of the nobles and the knights to deal with it, right? So
you see, even if you asked for our help, there’s nothing we can do……besides, where and what are
those nobles doing right now?”
Being pierced with his words, Finne was silent.
There are many nobles inside the Imperial Capital. Even though a few of them possess enough
strength to stand against Gordon, rarely any of them joined the fight.
They might be unable to move due to the curse on the arena but that was only at first.
If they can get out of the arena, their strength should have returned already. However, she doesn’t see
any nobles making their move at all.
Surely, Gai and the adventurers here know what they are doing.
That’s why Finne couldn’t say anything.
“There were a lot of nobles that fled to the shelters and acted like they own the place you know. There
were some that even pushed the children and old people to save themselves too. Well, we did beat
those guys up but spare us from wiping their asses for them. All of us here only get stronger for the
sake of subduing monsters after all.”
“……I admit that there were many corrupted nobles. It’s true that there are many nobles who can’t
understand what it means to be noble and going around boasting their privilege. However, please do
not judge all of us nobles after you have only seen a part of us. Among us, there are those that put their
1694
lives on the line to fight for this country. Humans have both the good and the bad. Please do not look
only at our negative side.”
“I know. I understand that there are other nobles like you too. Even I know a lot of good ones myself.
Even so, we can’t move. In our eyes, the Emperor and that Third Prince are the same after all.”
Gai said so and turned his eyes away from Finne.
Every adventurer also averts their eyes from her.
Seeing that, a dark shadow casts on Finne’s heart.
However.
“The same? They are completely different(Desuwa)! You people should have your eyes
check(Desuwa)!?”
“Mia-san……”
“Wh, What? Who is that weirdly talking woman……”
“I am not weird(Desuwa)! You people are the weird ones(Desuwa)! the Emperor and that Third
Prince are the same? Are you all stupid (Desuno)!?”
“Stupid!? Wha—!”
“What’s wrong with calling stupid people stupid(Desuno)!? Comparing that Prince who started a
rebellion in a festival where VIPs from all over the continent gathered and the Emperor who could
escape at any time but chose not to is beyond rude(Desuwa)! If the Second Prince can get here then
the Emperor should be able to escape by himself with a small number of escorts too(Desuwa)! He
didn’t do it because he knows that the people will suffer if he does that(Desuwa)! How can you not
understand even that(Desuno)!?”
If Eric can come here then the Emperor should be able to do the same.
That way, it would have been possible to forcibly involve the adventurers here.
The adventurers do not allow the soldiers in the vicinity of the guild. If the Emperor lures them here,
he can force a situation where the two groups collide.
He has enough power to move anywhere he wants but the more he moves, the wider the battle will
spread. That way, the damage to the citizens will increase.
“Between the Third Prince that couldn’t care less about the people and the Emperor who doesn’t want
his people to get hurt, it’s clear how different they are(Desuwa)! The fact that the Emperor didn’t
forcibly involve you all in this fight is naturally because he does recognize all of you as the people that
he must protect(Desuwa)!”
1695
“Even if that’s the case! There’s no reason for us to help right! To maintain the security for the civilians
we would have to fight the soldiers! We might be able to secure some areas and evacuate the civilians
there but we will have to deal with a large number of soldiers! No matter how many lives we have it
won’t be enough!”
“If you are afraid to die then you should have said so from the start(Desuwa)! You coward!”
“Wha!?”
Gai’s cheeks cramped up at Mia’s words.
The patience of other adventurers also seems to be at its limit with Mia’s attitude.
However, against those adventurers, Mia slowly pointed her finger at the castle.
“Over there…..in that castle crawling with rebel soldiers, a prince is staying there, fighting for you all.
The prince you all ridiculed as the Dull Prince is doing everything he can to protect this country in that
castle you know.”
“Al is…….!? No way! Is that true!?”
“Yes, it’s true……”
“That idiot…..!”
Gai said as he stared at the castle.
If it was Al, he thought that he would have detected the danger early on and escaped already. At the
very least, the Al that Gai knows would do that. Al wasn’t the kind of person that would let himself get
caught in a dangerous situation.
The only possibility of that happening is when his family is in danger.
He knows that Al will never be motivated to do anything except in such cases.
“It is not just Prince Arnold(Desuwa!) Prince Rupert who is only ten years old offered to become a
decoy himself even while knowing the danger! And not only them, many people in the castle are also
willing to do what they can(Desuwa)! You people may think that it’s only natural for the Imperial
Family to give their lives for this country but that’s not how the royalty of other countries
are(Desuwa)! Do you know how blessed this country is!”
To Mia who has seen the royal family and nobles of the Dominion, she can’t recognize that the
Imperial Family of the Empire is the same as those people.
They thought that it’s obvious that they should prioritize themselves first. Most of the royalty and
nobles of the Dominion think that their country exists for themselves. She could rarely find any nobles
like Finne or Alois back in the Dominion.
The royalty and nobles of the Dominion are people that can willingly give up on their citizens.
1696
If that was not the case, Mia wouldn’t have chosen to become the chivalrous thief. If the royalty and
nobles of the Dominion have even one-tenth of the sense of responsibility the Imperial Family of the
Empire has toward their people then she wouldn’t have chosen this path.
To Mia, the attitude of the Adventurers here is something that she couldn’t stand.
If the country is in turmoil, the adventurers will also get affected. However, the adventurers in this
country are not in a panic because of the common sense that no matter which prince or princess
ascends the throne, they will at least do the minimum for them.
That was how it used to be so it should be like that in the future as well. That naive thinking can be
seen after observing the adventurers here.
“I can assure you all here(Desuwa)! If you do not stand on the Emperor’s side right now, you all will
definitely regret it!!”
Mia declared so.
The adventurers started to hesitate a little.
It was an opportunity.
While thanking Mia for turning the tide in her favor, Finne starts to address the adventurers again.
“His Highness Gordon has acquired cooperation from the United Kingdom, the Dominion, and the
Kingdom for this rebellion. After becoming the emperor, he intends to use them to suppress the
princes and princesses who don’t recognize his rule. However, no country will ask nothing in return
for their help. There will definitely be war. In war, this land will be ruined, a large number of monsters
will run rampant and the people will suffer. If it’s an adventurer’s job to subjugate monsters then is it
not your job to prevent such things?”
“………..”
The adventurers including Gai are silent.
They are hesitating and start to consider it.
Finne judges that now is the time to wrap things up.
“His Highness Gordon doesn’t care about the people. Seeing this rebellion, that much is clear. The
Emperor who does not wish to get his people involved will not try to rely on the adventurers. It is said
that the fact that there are few monsters in the Empire is due to the Empire’s funding to the guild so
that it can maintain a certain number of adventurers here. What would happen if that is gone?
Adventurers will go elsewhere in search of work. Many adventurers might be fine with that. But what
about the adventurers that have a family here? If you receive a request without being able to fill in the
necessary amount of manpower, the mortality rate of the adventurers here will surely increase.”
The Empire is quite friendly to its adventurers.
1697
Generations after generations, the emperor never looked down on the adventurers. To have a
successful rule, it is necessary to have the adventurers around to subdue the monsters. ‘For the
People’. That was the ideal that all adventurers share and it is something that all emperors value.
However, Gordon is not interested in having a successful reign.
Gordon, who always prioritizes war, will not put importance on the adventurers.
Finne explains that to them.
Still, they didn’t respond.
One more push, just one more push.
When she thought so.
A push came in a surprising way.
[[Imperial Marshal Lizelotte. Can you hear me? If you can hear this then give up the Emperor to us
immediately. Otherwise, Christa will be executed.]]
By using the voice amplifier magic tool, Gordon’s words were heard throughout the Imperial Capital.
For a moment, a chill ran down Finne’s back.
It was only an instant but the adventurers in front of her let out their killing intent.
They slowly stared at the castle.
“How old was Princess Christa?”
“I heard that she’s around twelve years old.”
“He tried to execute a child huh…….don’t screw with me.”
“That bastard, does he have no love for his family at all?”
The adventurers began to raise their complaints about Gordon.
Then one of them asked the receptionist who was standing behind Finne.
“If it is only maintaining security then we can do it right?”
“Yes. His Highness Eric has already discussed this with the headquarters. If it is only at the level of
maintaining the security to protect the citizens then they will not count this as the guild interfering
with the Empire’s business. But…..”
“But?”
“They do not allow Silver to take action.”
1698
“Ha! That’s all? The guild’s higher-ups never learn huh. Like hell, that guy would stay silent and obey
the guild’s order. He will show up if it becomes necessary. Anyway.”
“I think so as well. Then, is it okay to conclude that the Imperial Capital Branch will take on the
request of maintaining the capital security? Everyone?”
“Yeah, we will take the east side of the middle layer.”
“I hate the gut of those soldiers who walk around like they own the place anyway. This is good.”
“I didn’t like that prince from the start. I want to punch him in the face.”
“I agree on that one. Should we raid the castle after we finish securing the area?”
Finne breathed out when she saw the adventurers started talking about themselves.
These people are adventurers.
It is exactly because they are adventurers that they can honestly voice out about what they don’t like.
To them, Gordon has crossed the line.
“Finne-sama…..is Al okay?”
“……I don’t know. But as long as Al-sama is in the castle, he will never abandon Her Highness Christa.”
“Well, if it’s Al then he will never abandon her.”
Gai said so as he scratched his head.
As an old friend of Al, Gai knew that Leo and Elna were outside the Imperial Capital.
That’s why he was surprised that Al is pushing himself like this.
“…….It would be nice if he doesn’t go too crazy with this.”
While thinking that he would surely push himself, Gai muttered so.
Al will always do something unthinkable when someone important to him is involved.
‘Stay safe.’
Muttering so, Gai looked up at the sky.
The sun was dazzlingly high.
1699
SPT Chapter 258
Just lost the translated chapter of this week Dahlia’s chapter………
Pain peko.
-Mr.Graverobber
Wind of Discord
William who flew ahead of his platoon landed on the castle square which is located at the middle layer
of the Imperial Sword Castle.
He then gently lowered Christa to the ground.
Christa immediately distanced herself from William but since she is holding the bag containing the
Rainbow Celestial Jewel, William reaches his hand out for her.
“Hand it over, Your Highness Christa.”
“No……”
“I do not wish to hurt a child.”
“But you stabbed Rita…..”
“She wasn’t a child. She was your knight.”
He did show his compassion as he didn’t kill her.
However, he still treated her as a knight as he thought that it would be the least he can do to show his
respect.
However, Rita and Christa are different.
One is the one who protects and the other is the one being protected. It was brave of her to pick up the
bag and he thought that such action truly befits someone from the Adler house.
However, that’s it. Christa is no warrior.
“Now, hand it over.”
“If she doesn’t want to hand it over then it would be more efficient to just cut her arms off you know?”
“…..”
Said Gordon who just arrived as he approached Christa.
1700
As Gordon makes his way toward her, William stops Gordon’s advance by putting his spear in front of
him.
“What are you playing at?”
“It was me who captured her and the jewel. Her treatment will be decided by me.”
“Don’t screw with me. You are just my collaborator. Fall in line.”
“Fall in line huh. Then how about I put this as a reward for my accomplishment? You will not say that
you can’t give a reward to someone who performed a meritorious deed right?”
Gordon frowned at William.
However, he took a step back. Perhaps he thought that it’s not worth forcing his way any more than
this.
Seeing that, William quietly approached Christa and silently took away the bag in her hands.
“Eh…..?”
“You did well. But this is it.”
William said so and threw the bag to Gordon.
Gordon received it in an elated mood but soon after a high-pitched voice upset him again.
“Gordon!!”
“Tsk…..what are you doing here? Zandra?”
The enraged Zandra entered the square.
Gordon’s unmasked irritation makes Zandra’s anger flared up even more.
“What am I doing here? Could you not be such an idiot? The castle is in chaos because your
subordinates are all incompetent! I can’t look for the jewel now!”
“What?”
“There is an illusionist among the enemy! He disguised himself as me and let Estman escape! And
what did your subordinates do? They chased after me instead! The soldiers on the upper floor are
Estman’s men, they all turned to the enemy’s side already!”
“What…….!? The castle is supposed to be your responsibility right!”
“You are saying that it’s my fault? If you want to blame someone then blame your incompetent
subordinates that tried to catch me even after I showed them the forbidden magic! The First Imperial
1701
Knight Corp already launched their attack on the pedestal in the Hall of the Celestial Sky. Raphael is
protecting it but who knows what would happen if he has to face Alida!”
Everything should have gone well. It was supposed to.
However, problems after problems started to arise in the place he wasn’t looking.
Gordon couldn’t hold down his frustration.
This all happens because he relied on weak and incompetent fools.
“Useless, each and every one of them. That includes you too, Zandra.”
“Ha, if you have time to say that then how about you do something about it already? As long as there is
my imposter around, the soldiers won’t obey my command. Hurry up and do something, Mr.General.”
“Tsk……you go put this on the pedestal. I will take command of the castle myself.”
Saying so, Gordon handed the bag containing the jewel to Zandra and was about to head inside the
castle.
However, Zandra stopped him.
“Wait! You muscle head!!”
“What? You want to die?”
“No word can describe you better than muscle head right! Don’t you notice even after you hold it? This
is a fake!!”
Saying so, Zandra threw the bag on the ground.
The jewel that rolled out of the bag surely looked like the Rainbow Celestial Jewel. However, as one of
the best mages in the Imperial Family, Zandra immediately realized.
It was only an elaborately made fake.
“Even if the magical power and appearance are similar, the real jewel is not something like this! You
got played!”
“What……?”
Gordon opens his eyes wide and stares at the jewel that is currently rolling on the ground.
Soon after, he angrily turned toward Christa and slowly walked toward her.
“Did you trick me! Christa!”
1702
“Stop it! It was surely someone’s plan to protect the real thing! There are those that would even
deceive their own allies for things like this! It’s no use getting angry at her!”
“Annoying! Why didn’t you realize that it was a fake!?”
“How could I notice something you didn’t? Before trying to place blame on others, think about your
future actions first.”
“Kuh…..!”
While irritated, Gordon tries to sort out the situation.
The castle is in chaos and they only have three jewels in their possession. At least they have to secure
one more jewel. One last jewel is needed to guarantee his victory.
If they only look at the Imperial Capital, Gordon still has an overwhelming advantage. However,
reinforcements should be approaching from the outside.
He can not afford to prolong this any longer.
However, whether it be the castle or the east gate, he needs some time before he can take control of it.
There are many generals inside the capital and most of them are on Gordon’s side but some of them
still remain loyal to the Emperor.
There are also nobles in the capital that are accompanying by their personal guards. They are waiting
to see either Gordon or the Emperor will come up as the winner. Although it is true that some of them
do not make their move, they are being vigilant of Gordon’s movement while some of them actively
hinder Gordon’s plan. They each have different goals in mind but they do not pointlessly waste their
power and are conserving their strength.
Gordon’s disadvantage is that he can’t devote all of his strength to defeat the Emperor as he has to
place his men to keep those nobles in check.
Then what should he do?”
What can he do to take back the tailwind?
When he was asking himself so, Gordon glanced at Christa.
“Ha, HaHaHa!! We still have a chance! Bring the voice amplifier! I will give them an ultimatum!”
“What are you planning…….?”
“Lizelotte will not abandon Christa! I will use Christa as a hostage and take Lizelotte out of the
calculation!”
“Don’t be stupid! An Imperial Marshal isn’t that soft! This will only disadvantage us! Don’t do it!”
1703
“I’m tired of your petty squabble! Don’t get in my way just because of your petty chivalry code!”
“I am only advising you to make a wise decision as your ally! If you are going to do it then at least send
a messenger instead! If you give your ultimatum for all the capital to hear, you will lose the soldiers’
support and you will unnecessarily make more enemies!!”
“They will only try to buy time if I send out a messenger! I have no intention of negotiating! If they
won’t comply then it’s fine! I will just push Christa down the castle and make them realize their
mistake! If they get angry and come to attack us, I will use that chance to take Father’s head!”
Gordon said so and pulled Christa’s arm, dragging her toward the outer edge of the square.
Although it is only the middle layer of the castle, this place is higher than any building in the Imperial
Capital. If she falls off, she will definitely die.
William frowns at Gordon’s foolishness and turns his gaze toward Zandra.
“Princess Zandra. If you don’t stop him, what is waiting for us is only ruin you know?”
“Right. Gordon, you can threaten them all you want but don’t push her down. Give Christa to me.”
“What?”
“I can use her in my experiment. If you tell them that you are handing her over to Zandra, even
Lizelotte will not stay calm you know.”
Seeing the happy smile on Zandra’s face, Willam was disappointed.
He couldn’t understand how she could say that she is okay with Gordon publicly threatening the
enemy.
In response, Gordon started thinking about it.
William looks up at the sky. In such a clear sky, how nice it would be if he can just fly away and stop
thinking about this.
However, he can not escape reality forever.
Immediately after he sorted out his feelings, William continued his objection.
“Reconsider this, Gordon. Not everything will go the way you want. Look at reality and stop chasing
that naive illusion. There is no one single move that can reverse the situation for you. Mobilize all your
forces and defeat the Emperor. With my help, the chance of success will rise dramatically. As long as
the Emperor is defeated, you will not have to worry about their reinforcements. You can just abandon
the Imperial Capital and rule the Empire from the northern region where you can control.”
“Hmph! I can see through you, you know? You want me to rely on the United Kingdom right?”
1704
“What of it? What will that change? Even if your rebellion is a success, the other princes will never
recognize you. To suppress them as quickly as possible, you need help from my country right? You will
have to rely on the United Kingdom in the end. Why do I need to hesitate to suggest such an action?”
“I wonder about that. After the rebellion is over and the Empire plunged into turmoil, you will betray
us anyway right?”
William clenched his fist so much that his fingernails dug into his hand at Zandra’s words.
He wanted to just tell them to do whatever they want but he can not allow that.
After all, he is still on Gordon’s side. He would be troubled if Gordon fails. After all, William is
shouldering the fate of the United Kingdom.
In the case that Gordon fails to kill the Emperor.
The wrath of the strongest empire on the continent will turn to the United Kingdom.
Even with the alliance of the United Kingdom, the Dominion, and the Kingdom, he can’t say for sure
that they can win.
No matter how weakened it is, the Empire is still the Empire.
If the Emperor survives, the period of turmoil will be short. That way, the United Kingdom will not be
able to take advantage of the situation.
In the first place, William has no intention to rely on the Kingdom or the Dominion. The three
countries have joined forces in the name of supporting Gordon but it would be difficult to find an
alliance that is so untrusting as this even if he looked through all their history.
Allies that can betray them at any moment. The Empire is not so naive to not exploit that.
That’s why this is a one in a thousand chance.
“You can speculate my intentions all you want! I do not care! But I will have you listen to what I have
to say! Your plan will turn the forces that are staying neutral into your enemy! Even if it will be more
difficult, defeating the Emperor is a better choice!”
“If they want to become my enemy then let them! I will crush them all!”
“If you are so confident that you can crush your enemy then you have no use for a hostage in the first
place! Just admit that you are not as strong as you think! Don’t increase your enemies! You should
increase the number of your allies instead!”
“Hmph, it seems I can’t see eye to eye with you. I will just do whatever I want. If you don’t like that
then take your men and go back to your country.”
Saying so, Gordon received the voice amplifier magic tool from his subordinate and let his voice echo
through the whole Imperial Capital.
1705
[[Imperial Marshal Lizelotte. Can you hear me? If you can hear this then give up the Emperor to us
immediately. Otherwise, Christa will be executed.]]
As a Dragon Knight, William was sensitive to the flow of the wind.
When he felt that the wind started to blow in the opposite direction, he muttered.
“The wind has turned against us huh…..”
The direction of the wind has changed.
It will surely be difficult to change it to their favor again.
Still, William couldn’t give up.
William: Why can’t he listen to me!!? REEEEEEE
Sonia:
1706
SPT Chapter 259
Kobe beef………I need some Kobe beef………..
my wallet’s dried from gacha though
-Mr.DamnIwantsomeKobeBeef
The Last Rainbow Celestial Jewel
“Found it.”
As I was searching for the Rainbow Celestial Jewel in Zandra’s room, I found a dent under her bed.
And there, I found the jewel.
It’s clear when I hold it in my hand. The density of magic power inside is completely different from the
fake. This one is definitely the real thing.
“But it sure gave me quite a trouble huh.”
Saying so, I look at the room.
Since I was looking for it when Zandra was lured away from her room, I didn’t restrain myself. Clothes
and cosmetics are scattered all over the room and you can realize with one glance that someone was
looking for something here.
It would be too much trouble to clean it up so I guess it’s okay to leave it like this.
Still.
“It’s a good thing that I was the one who searched the room. This place is real scary.”
Saying so, I glance at the box I left untouched.
That ominous box definitely contains a curse.
That’s not all, there are many items like that box all over this place. Even I don’t know what some of
these do.
“There’s a magic tool like this too after all huh.”
With that said, I look at a spherical magic tool.
At first glance, it’s just a sphere but I can feel magic power from inside of it. Surely, it’s some kind of
prototype magic tool. It must be something that you use to throw at your opponent.
1707
The more I searched the more items like this came up. I almost thought that I was in an armory for a
moment.
While putting some of them in my pocket, I prepare the transfer gate.
“Now then, with this, my business inside the castle is done huh.”
I will have them try their best to search for something that is no longer here.
Thinking so, I was about to enter the transfer gate.
However, at that moment, I heard Gordon’s voice.
[[Imperial Marshal Lizelotte. Can you hear me? If you can hear this then give up the Emperor to us
immediately. Otherwise, Christa will be executed.]]
My foot that was about to step inside the gate stopped.
No matter how idiotic it sounds, the fact that he said such a thing means Christa was caught.
“I never thought that it would be Trau-niisan’s group who got discovered…….”
Even if I thought so, the fact still stands that Christa was caught. No doubt, something happened on
their end.
I changed the destination of the transfer gate.
If she got caught then I can’t abandon her. Zandra is with Gordon too after all.
If she was caught then there’s no way that they don’t know that she was only a decoy.
Thinking so, I came up with an idea.
I grinned and put on the soldier helmet to disguise myself as a soldier and entered the gate.
Thanks to General Estman, we managed to retake the upper floors of the castle.
In response, the other generals were desperately trying their best to take it again. They are probably
afraid that they would be labeled as incompetent by their master.
It seems that Alida also launched her own attack on the pedestal as well. It seems that she can’t break
through the enemy’s tight defense net yet but thanks to her, Raphael, one of the enemy’s strongest
fighters, can’t move freely anymore.
While evaluating the situation inside the castle, I head to the castle square.
There are four key characters at the square.
1708
Gordon, Zandra, Christa, and William, the Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom.
“It’s no use waiting for them to make their move! You should head out to defeat the Emperor right
now!”
“I told you that you are annoying! If I make a move now then there’s no point in taking Christa
hostage!”
“And I already told you that your plan doesn’t make sense in the first place! The horror of Marshal
Lizelotte was well understood by someone from outside the Empire! No matter how much she loves
her sister, she will never choose to abandon her duty!”
“You bastard don’t understand. I know how much Lizelotte is fond of Christa. I’m related to her by
blood so I know this well! Shut up already!”
“Kuh……! Then at least let me go out with my Dragon Knights!”
“What? Are you intending to break our alliance?”
“To reverse this situation there is only one option. By threatening them with Her Highness Christa, the
neutral forces will be swayed to the other side. You just drove your reputation to the ground. We have
to take down the Emperor while the Celestial Sphere is still up. Even if we have to push our way
through, that is our only choice.”
After saying that to Gordon, William left them behind and headed over to the Dragon Knights that
were waiting on standby for him.
How pitiful.
Even though he could analyze the situation to such an extent, he had to deal with Gordon first.
Gordon believes that Lize-aneue will make a move if he takes Christa hostage while William argues
against it.
There’s a huge difference in their belief.
Gordon is simply too hasty. He has the unfounded confidence that let him believe in whatever he
wants to.
I remember the words of Kevin, Sonia’s father.
‘His Majesty isn’t so sweet on his son that he would promote him to the rank of general if his son
always solved all his problems with violence.’
That’s right. Gordon was appointed a general by Father himself. If he was this kind of person in the
past, he would never get appointed as a general.
As expected, there’s something at play here. Still, that doesn’t matter right now.
1709
For whatever reason it is, Gordon has started a rebellion and taken his own sister hostage.
No matter how good a person he used to be, right now he is only a fool that is only capable of
repeating his mistake.
He does not listen to others’ opinions nor recognize any plan this is not his own. Gordon who is
trapped in his own delusion that everything will go his way is a walking disaster.
If he is a disaster—–then I must put him down.
“Reporting! Your Highness, we have captured the Seventh Prince, Arnold.”
“So what!? Why should I care about the likes of Arnold! Even if he was caught, that trash won’t make
any difference on the battlefield! What can a Dull Prince do? If you have time to make such a worthless
report, hurry up and take the upper floors already!!”
After I waited for William to get far enough away from Gordon and Zandra, I pretended to be a soldier
and approached them.
Then, I threw the magic tool I found in Zandra’s room at them.
“That’s a shame. I was planning to at least stall you two though.”
“That’s!?”
“What!? Cough Cough! What was that……!?”
“It’s cursed smoke! You will be paralyzed if you breathe it in!”
Perhaps because it was something that she made herself, Zandra immediately recognized it.
She immediately left Gordon behind and escaped the smoke that spewed out from the spherical magic
tool.
Gordon who was at the epicenter was still in the smoke.
During that time, I pull Christa’s hand and take her to the edge of the square.
“YOU BASTARD……! DON’T LOOK DOWN ON ME!!”
“No, no, you just said that you don’t care for the like of me right. Will you finally give me some
recognition now, Aniue?”
Saying so, I take off the helmet and show my face.
Seeing that, Gordon roared at me with a voice that could kill.
“ARNOLD!!! YOUUUU!!”
1710
“Al-niisama!”
“You alright? Christa.”
“I’m fine……but Rita was…….”
“I see….they did something bad to Rita huh. Oh, Prince William. I would advise you not to move, you
know?”
Saying so, I take out the bad and show the real Rainbow Celestial Jewel to them.
Seeing that, Zandra immediately frowned.
“Zandra-aneue must understand, right? This is the real thing. You need this, no? If you understand
then please behave yourselves. If things get violent, my hand might slip after all. The Rainbow
Celestial Jewel is certainly tough but if I let it fall from this height it will still break you know.”
“You think I can’t lop off your head before you do that?”
“Shall we put that to the test then?”
For a moment, our eyes crossed.
William slowly approached Gordon and gave him a warning with a whisper.
“Don’t be hasty now. We still got this.”
“I know that! Arnold…..you bastard, you were the one who gave Christa the fake jewel right?”
“Correct. I was holding on to the real ones from the start. Including the last one that was hidden in the
castle, I have all three.”
“Even the last one…….how did you get it!?”
“I was searching for it you know. I thought that if it’s the Prime Minister, he would hide it in a place
that would be pretty irritating to find. That’s why I went to Zandra-aneue’s room. And it was bingo.
Oh, I borrowed the earlier magic tool from your room too.”
“Inside my room……..stop fooling around! Why would he hide something like that in my room…!”
“It is you who was fooling around. What were you thinking, taking your own sister as a hostage? Still, I
thought that it would be Trau-niisan’s group who would be able to escape……from the look of it, it
seems that you have intervened haven’t you, Prince William.”
The Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom.
I have heard rumors about him but he is truly a sharp person.
1711
While adjusting my evaluation of William, I stroked Christa’s head as she has a displeased look on her
face.
“Sorry for tricking you.”
“Al-niisama, you are mean……”
“That’s harsh. Well, it is said that you need to deceive your ally to deceive your enemy, so can you
forgive me?”
Saying so, I put the jewel back into the bag.
Looking at me, Zandra takes a step forward.
“Arnold, you are getting ahead of yourself quite a bit here huh? If your plan is to use the jewel as your
leverage then I will immediately kill you if you drop it you know?”
“Yes, I know that well. That’s why let’s make a deal. I will give you the jewel in exchange for mine and
Christa’s safety. How is it?”
“That’s not a bad deal. But don’t you think that to make such a deal you would need to stand on an
equal ground first? We will be just fine even if we don’t get that jewel. It seems you’ve miscalculated
your position here, Arnold.”
“I see, then you won’t be needing this right.”
Saying so, I let go of the bag.
“Wha!?”
“No way!?”
Gordon and Zandra stepped forward with their eyes wide open.
However, I immediately caught the bag and lightly sticking my tongue out to them.
“Just kidding. So you still need it after all. Lying is bad, you know? Zandra-aneue.”
“Kuh…..I will absolutely never forgive you…….!”
“Scary scary, now then, shall we start the negotiation? I don’t want to die after all.”
I told them so with a grin on my face.
1712
SPT Chapter 260
“Let’s hear your terms, Prince Arnold.”
“As expected of the Dragon Prince. You are quite reasonable.”
After holding back the angry Gordon and Zandra, William started negotiating with me.
So I tell him my terms.
“I only have one condition. Allow the Emperor to withdraw from the capital. Lower the Celestial
Sphere and let us out.”
“Don’t….FUCK WITH ME!!!!!”
Gordon is enraged.
Even after he cornered Father to such an extent, I told him to let him go. Obviously, he would get
angry.
The Rainbow Celestial Jewel is needed to defeat the Emperor but if he lets the Emperor escapes to
obtain it, he would be putting the cart before the horse.
However.
“I can’t allow everyone to withdraw from the capital. There’s no guarantee that you will keep your
word after all.”
“Right. I just wanted to say it once. Alright then, how far are you willing to compromise?”
I playfully asked William.
As a rule of thumb for negotiations, I will not expressly say what I want. The condition must come
from the other side.
That’s why I told them the condition that they will never agree with. Now, they have the initiative to
present theirs.
If they don’t establish the minimum line of compromise then the talk can not proceed and we will only
waste our time here instead.
And that’s fine as well.
“….at the very least, I want you alone to stay. After you used your brothers and sisters as decoys, you
will not say that you are not willing to become a hostage yourself right?”
“You poked where it hurts huh. Well, that’s fine. I can stay but everyone else must be allowed outside
the Imperial Capital.”
1713
“That term is unacceptable.”
“Oh my, if you keep denying my demands like this then there’s no point to this negotiation, no?”
“Then perhaps it would be better for you to lower your demand a little.”
While holding back Gordon and Zandra from exploding on me, he does a good job maintaining his
calm while negotiating with me like this.
Normally, the two would already flare up and the negotiation would already be over.
Despite being a prince, he has ridden on his dragon and fought on the battlefield himself. The mental
strength he possesses is quite something.
“Very well, let’s see how much we can compromise then. What kind of condition would you find
acceptable?”
“Only the Emperor and the Prime Minister will be allowed to withdraw.”
“Surely, you jest. After you let those two out, you are going to strengthen the Celestial Sphere and kill
all other members of the Imperial Family left inside right. Besides, after you get Father away from his
close aides, you are planning to kill him anyway, no?”
“Unfortunately, our side wants to win too after all.”
William smiles.
I also smile in response.
What a shame. If he is not on Gordon’s side, we might be able to reach an understanding with the
United Kingdom through this prince.
When I thought so, Gordon speaks to me as if he can’t hold his anger in anymore.
“Arnold….if you want to keep your life then hand the jewel to me right now……!”
“It’s because I want to keep my life that I can’t give it to you though.”
“Okay, we will leave this place. You can hand the jewel to Prince William after that.”
“Please don’t make me laugh. It’s written on your face that you are planning to shoot your magic at me
from a distance.”
I immediately refused Zandra’s attempt at compromise with a smile.
Zandra clicks her tongue and glares at me.
So she was planning to do that after all huh. She sure is easy to understand.
1714
“Gordon, Princess Zandra, please step back. I will negotiate with him alone.”
“I hate the very idea of negotiation! Why do I have to be at the mercy of the likes of Arnold? I will
never accept this!!”
“Maybe it is because I have the Rainbow Celestial Jewel?”
“Don’t mess with me! You have no power over me! You think you can negotiate with me because you
have the jewel!? Don’t make me laugh! Leonard already took all your good points whatsoever away
the moment you were born! You Dull Prince! You can’t do anything by yourself, don’t you dare speak
to me like that when you are the laughing stock of the whole Empire!!”
Saying so, Gordon unsheathed his sword.
Christa tightened her grip on my arm.
However, I didn’t lose my composure and look straight back at Gordon.
“So? You want to cut me down? What will you do afterward? It should be difficult to defeat Father
without the jewel. The Brave or Elna might arrive before you can defeat him, no? Once they are here,
the one who will be at a disadvantage here is you.”
“Gordon……Prince Arnold is right. Put away your sword.”
“Don’t order me around! Negotiations are only something a coward would do! It’s just the trick that
the weak use to stall the strong! All you can do is stall for time! You fool have nothing! How’s that!?
Can you deny it!?”
“No, I won’t deny that. Rather, were you trying to provoke me? You want me to get angry and duel
you, Aniue? Please don’t say something so stupid. I have been ridiculed by everyone in the Empire for
half my life already you know? Why should I care what you say about me now?”
“You…..! It makes me sick to think that I am blood-related to someone like you! You disgrace of the
Imperial Family!!”
“I am still much better than a rebel though.”
I have no intention to fold. After all, I am convinced of my absolute superiority.
Gordon started shouting because he doesn’t like that. However, no matter how loud he is, there’s
nothing he can do.
He should leave this to William but he can’t do even that. He has no self-control and he can’t leave
something he can’t deal with to others.
This reaction is what I expected from Gordon who can see nothing but his own power. He’s always
trying to solve everything on his own.
“Shut up! I can just choke the life out of you now you know!?”
1715
“Feel free to do it if you think you can. Prince William will probably stop you anyway.”
“In the end, you can’t do anything without relying on others! You really know how to make yourself
pathetic huh. Both you and Rupert, why do I have to be in the same family with you trashes!? He was a
pathetic coward who didn’t even have the courage to stand up to me! Just what value do you two
have!? The Imperial Family represents absolute strength! Why do I have to share it with you
weaklings!?”
“I see……so Rupert chose to run huh.”
“Yeah, that’s right! He ran away! When Christa was about to be caught, he ran away even though he
had the strength to help her! There’s no one that is more of a coward than him!”
“The feelings he had when he decided to run away……..you will probably never understand that.”
How painful it would feel to run away even though you have the power to help someone dear to you.
In that situation, running away would be much more difficult than confronting his enemy. Considering
the criticism he will receive, it’s obvious that confronting his enemy face to face is better.
After all, most people think that it is more courageous to confront your enemy. Escaping is an option
only available to cowards. Something that a coward would do, it is easy to think like that.
However, I’m sure that Rupert didn’t run away because he was a coward.
He mustered up his courage and ran away.
“Why should I care! I don’t want to know what a coward like that feels! I have no interest in people
who have nothing like you! I am the strong, I am the ruler! I’m different from weaklings like you!”
“Hmph…….I am special, I am different from others. I’m tired of hearing you say that. Because you
inherit a great bloodline? Because you have more ability than others? If those things can decide
everything then this continent would already be under the SS-rank adventurers’ rule already.”
“Shut up! They are not fit to lead people! I have the right position and the right power! I am different
from the likes of you! I am absolute! The fact that the soldiers chose to follow me is evidence enough!
My path is righteous! The weak should just obey the strong! Just realize that you are a weakling and
obey me!!”
“This is getting ridiculous. It’s useless talking to you. You and I will never understand each other. I will
not recognize someone who can’t recognize others as an emperor. And that’s not just me. Many people
share that feeling as well.”
“If they refuse to obey me then I will simply crush them! The weak will never win against the strong!”
“I see…..let me confirm then, you think of me and Rupert as the weak right?”
“That’s what I am saying!”
1716
“Then if we win here, your ideal will shatter. I am looking forward to it. Just what kind of excuse you
will come up with to justify your ‘strength’ I wonder.”
“What!?”
I take a step back.
We were originally standing before the edge of the square.
If we take one more step back, we will fall.
Scared, Christa hugged me.
“Christa, do you trust me?”
“……I always believe in you.”
“I see……Gordon-aniue, no, Gordon. You said that I have nothing right. That might be true. I am the
Dull Prince who has nothing. But from my point of view, you are the one who has nothing. You do not
have the strongest thing in this world.”
“There’s nothing better than your own power!”
“No, there is. Humans can not live alone. We all have different strengths, weaknesses, and
personalities. Those things make up an individual. If I lack something then I can keep on living by
having others make up for me. That’s why we created a society, a country, something that can unite us.
Power is needed to create those. You need the power to create connections between people. That’s the
[Bonds]. That’s why I will deny you. Even if I have nothing………I have something that will never lose
to others. Remember this. I have the strongest childhood friend———and the best younger brother.”
Saying so, I stepped off.
I felt like my body floated for a moment, and then I began to fall.
During that time, a thunderous sound echoes from the outside.
A torrent of light wrapped around the entire Celestial Sphere and shattered like glass.
Then from beyond the sphere.
A black griffon is diving down toward us with the backdrop of the bright sun that had risen high in the
sky.
“Sorry but, I will push all the troublesome things to my brother now.”
Saying so, grinned and stretched out my right hand to Leo who is approaching us at a tremendous
speed.
1717
The Strongest Childhood Friend and the Best Younger Brother
Yes, you can press [Next] now.
1718
SPT Chapter 261
Sneaky coffee appreciation day!!!
Special thanks to 2 more unnamed coffee donors!! I really can’t do this well without names you
know…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Beyond the Outreached hand
Alois’s group managed to escape Gordon’s cavalry unit. However, when they are waiting for an
opportunity to break through the last line of defense, their feet stopped as they heard Gordon’s
ultimatum.
“Christa-aneue is…….”
Rupert stared blankly at the castle.
However, Alois scolds him.
“Your Highness! Even if we head back, there is nothing we can do! We must do what we can now!”
“But…..it was because I abandoned her……”
“You didn’t abandon her, Your Highness! You are only fulfilling the responsibility of the Imperial
Family! Her Highness Christa is the same! You chose to run because you know that by helping her, you
would only worsen the situation! If you have doubt then let me affirm you! You did nothing wrong!”
“Alois…..”
“Let’s leave Her Highness Christa to Grau and His Highness Arnold. They are both highly skilled. They
will surely be able to do something.”
“But…..their opponent is Gordon-aniue you know…..? What can they do…….”
“His Highness Gordon can not be compared to those two. Please rest assured.”
Saying so, Alois distracts Rupert’s mind from the castle.
Then, they look at the enemy’s defensive line.
‘I have to break through it to deliver Rupert to the Emperor.’
That was the only thing in Alois’s mind.
1719
The only thing that supports him right now.
It is unthinkable that the enemy would miss the Rainbow Celestial Jewel when they kidnapped
Christa. After all, she should be the person that Trau would protect will all his might. This meant that
their side was cornered so much that Trau and the others couldn’t protect her.
However, the Celestial Sphere doesn’t seem to have been strengthened yet. The other side has no need
for a hostage if they have the fourth jewel. As long as they don’t have to worry about the sphere being
destroyed from the outside, they can take their time and hunt them down.
There is no reason for them to take her hostage if that’s the case.
With that line of thinking, this would mean that the jewel that they have taken from Trau was a fake.
Thinking so, Alois wanted to bring Rupert to the Emperor as soon as possible.
Judging from the situation, the real jewel should either be in either Rupert or Arnold’s hand.
Regardless, he has enough reason to suspect that what Rupert is holding is the real one. If they take a
half baked measure here, they will end up getting surrounded instead.
That’s why Alois turned away from the castle.
After all, the only thing he can do right now is to keep Rupert safe.
——————————-
Hearing Gordon, Emperor Johannes clenched his sword so hard that his hand almost started to bleed.
“Gordon…..! He even threw away his pride as a warrior huh!”
“Please calm down, Your Majesty.”
“I am calm…..! Don’t worry! I don’t plan to launch an attack on the castle!”
“I’m relieved. Are you okay, Marshal?”
“Your worry is unfounded, Prime Minister.”
Saying so, Lize silently looks at the castle.
Seeing Lize staying calm, Franz felt a very terrible atmosphere.
If she is angry like Johannes then he can at least read her next action. However, he can not read
anything through Lize’s calmness at all.
It’s like the calm before the storm. It seemed to Franz as if it is only a matter of time before she
explodes.
1720
Lize received a telescope from her subordinate and began to observe the state of the castle.
“How is it, Lize? Has anything changed?’
“Yes. my troublesome younger brother just showed up.”
Saying so, Lize smiles and passes the telescope to Johannes.
‘Don’t tell me…..’
Muttering so, Johannes looked through the telescope.
Arnold was standing there with Christa at the edge of the square.
“What is he doing……! That’s reckless!”
“Please pay attention to his hand.”
“His hand? What!? Isn’t that the Rainbow Celestial Jewel! Why did he deliberately bring it to the
enemy……”
“He is probably using it as the leverage to get the hostage back. If he threatens to break it, he can put
Gordon’s side in check.”
“As a nation, we would be troubled if he breaks it though…….”
Lize pretends to not hear Franz’s comment.
After all, this is not a situation where they can afford to use their resource sparingly.
Meanwhile, Johannes shouts
“That fool! If you take another step back you will fall! Move to the front!!”
“Even if you shout, he can’t hear you, you know. Besides, it’s not like Al has no chance of success as
well.”
“Even if you say that…..how can he escape from there…..? He will die if he jumps off you know……”
“I can’t say that is necessarily true. But Al can perceive the world that we can not. I’m sure that it is the
same case here.”
The moment Lize said that.
Al jumped off the edge together with Christa.
“ARNOLD!! CHRISTA!!”
Johannes unintentionally cried out their names.
1721
However, his cry was drowned out by the thunderous sound that came from outside the Celestial
Sphere.
Beyond the Celestial Sphere that was shattered like glass.
After she saw a black griffon diving down from the sky, Lize grinned and gave an order to her
subordinates.
“ALL MEN, PREPARE FOR BATTLE. THE REINFORCEMENTS HAVE ARRIVED. IT’S TIME TO ATTACK!”
“Lizelotte……”
“Father, please leave the Imperial Capital with the Imperial Knights.”
“…..I understand. Be careful.”
“Please rest assured. I will go pick up my brothers and sister now.”
Saying so, Lize gets up on her horse.
————————-
Shortly before that, at the north of the Imperial Capital.
When Leo and his group finally arrived at where they could see the Imperial Capital, Leo and Elna’s
thoughts immediately synced up.
“Elna, I will leave it to you.”
“Leave it to me!”
The Celestial Sphere is covering the Imperial Capital.
It was enough for them to realize that the situation there is not normal.
That’s why Leo rises to the sky and heads for the Imperial Capital at a tremendous speed.
Even though he was leading a long forced march, he still has that much power in him. The Griffon
Knights were all stunned as to where such power came from. However, they were all shaken off that
by Leticia.
“I am going to follow him! Follow me!”
Leticia said so and followed after Leo by riding on her own griffon.
Perhaps thinking that they have to follow their lord, after a short delay, the Griffon Knights followed
them
1722
Although not as fast as them, the Narbe Ritter also speeded up as they raced toward the Imperial
Capital.
Seeing them, Vin let out a sigh.
“If she breaks the Celestial Sphere, the jewels will be destroyed too though…..those are three of the
national treasure-class jewels. It would be nice if they hesitate a little before doing that.”
“It can’t be helped, sir. That’s Elna-sama after all.”
Sebas responds to Vin’s words.
Above them, Elna is stretching her hand out to the heaven.
“Hear my voice and descend! O’ brilliant sword of the star! Now, the hero has need for you!!”
White light falls from the heaven.
Elna grabbed it and transformed the light into a silver sword.
“Let’s go! Aurora!”
Saying so, Elna holds the holy sword up high with both hands.
Then.
“I don’t know what kind of defense mechanism the capital has but don’t you dare—–get in my way!!”
The holy sword was swung down. A huge torrent of light wrapped around the Celestial Sphere and
shattered it.
Seeing that, Elna immediately put away the holy sword and flew full speed to the Imperial Capital.
After that, Elna’s subordinates and the other Imperial Knights followed her.
“Fourth Corp and Fifth Corp standby outside the Imperial Capital! With the Celestial Sphere destroyed,
His Majesty will be withdrawing outside! Escort His Majesty! Third Corp, with me!”
After instructing the other Imperial Knights, Elna speeds up even further.
She wanted to rush there as soon as possible.
However.
“It seems I have no choice but to give this one to Leo huh……”
Within Elna’s view, Leo was plunging down toward the castle.
———————-
1723
Above the Imperial Capital, Leo was preparing to descend down once Elna destroyed the Celestial
Sphere.
“You can do it right, Noir.”
As if it was trying to say ‘Of course’ Noir cries.
Encouraged by its cry, Leo descends straight down to the Imperial Capital.
On his way, the Celestial Sphere was destroyed by Elna and the castle came into clear view.
The Celestial Sphere that enveloped the capital was there to trap the Emperor inside. To activate it,
the enemy has to take control of the castle and Leo is descending directly to that castle.
However, what Leo saw as he descended was Al jumping off the castle together with Christa.
While holding himself back from reacting to that, he prompts Noir to speed up.
Noir was already flying at an unthinkable speed. It could be said that it was great that it could muster
up this speed with him riding on it.
However, Noir got even faster. It stopped minding Leo who was riding on its back.
That’s because it is what Leo is wishing for.
Noir and Leo who began to plunge down like a meteor, immediately reached Al and Christa.
Adjusting the speed, Leo maintains the same altitude as them and reaches out for Al’s outstretched
hand.
However, due to the wind, he couldn’t grab it.
“Kuh!”
Leo impatiently tries to reach out again but his eyes met with Al’s.
With only a single glance, the two withdrew their hands once and reached out for each other at the
same time.
They firmly grabbed each other’s hands and Leo drew Al and Christa toward him.
With the two riding behind him, Leo quickly pulls the reins as the ground was already close by.
They avoided colliding with the ground at the last minute and rose back up to the sky in a [U] shape.
Then.
“Yo, Leo. You sure took your time huh. I was wondering if you were taking a nap somewhere you
know?”
1724
“Hi, Nii-san. Even like this, I was flying here full speed you know. Still, you thought up quite a
dangerous game huh. Can you not do it together with Christa in the future?”
The conversation they have with each other for the first time in a few days was terribly casual.
While smiling at each other, they only exchange some carefree words.
“Leo-niisama.”
“Hi, Christa. Were you scared?”
“Un, there were a lot of scary things…..but, falling was surprisingly fun.”
“That’s troubling. You might have fun but my heart almost stopped you know?”
Leo smiles at Christa’s reply.
He then slowly looks at the state of the capital.
From the sky, he can see battles taking place here and there.
“The situation is quite terrible huh…..”
“Sorry, I wish I could have done better……”
“No, it’s enough as long as you are alive.”
Saying so, Leo pulls out his sword.
The Dragon Knights were flying from the castle toward them.
“Sorry that I have to push this to you when you are already so tired but can I leave this to you?”
“Of course. it’s [Our] turn now after all.”
Leo said as he raised his sword.
Al and Leo
1725
1726
SPT Chapter 262
Special thanks to gobycashy and another unnamed supporter for breaking the kofi goal.
More work for me, more gacha to roll.
Well, since I modified the goal for gacha roll, the next appreciation week will be twice the chapters +
the much delayed Sebas’s side story……I guess.
-Mr.Graverobber
My Knight
“I never thought that you would be back so soon.”
William, who appeared in front of Leo with his dragon, said his honest thought.
Even though their plan completely collapsed, his face was unclouded.
“Prince William. No offense, but immediately surrender to us.”
“So you think that you’ve already won huh……My Dragon Knights are still alive! If we can take the
Rainbow Celestial Jewels Prince Arnold has, we can deploy the Celestial Sphere again! The battle is not
over yet! No matter how great a hero she is, she can not use the holy sword twice!!”
“While you are fighting us, my father has already evacuated to the safe zone. You have no chance of
victory.”
“That might be the case! But if we can secure the Imperial Capital, we can continue the fight with the
help from my homeland! The winner is the one who remains standing in the end! For the glory of my
country….I will cut you down!!”
Saying so, William charges at Leo.
As long we are behind him, Leo can not fight midair at full speed.
However, a white griffon broke in between Leo and William.
“I won’t let you!”
“Saint Leticia…….!”
William immediately took a distance to evade her.
Leticia floats in front of us as if trying to shield Leo and hold up her staff.
1727
“I am happy that you are safe. Saint Leticia.”
“I never thought that you would be the one who would congratulate my safety, Prince William.”
“Yes, that is understandable. My country also played a part in your capture. Everyone from my
country should have wished for your death but……..to me that would be like admitting our defeat. We,
the United Kingdom couldn’t defeat you and has to resort to a dirty plan to make you disappear.
However, if you die, we will never get a chance to prove one thing. The fact that my Dragon Knights
are superior to your Griffon Knights. What’s done is done. I convinced myself that if the plan was
successful, it would make everyone respect the Dragon Knights but I am truly glad that you appear
before me now.”
“If you think so then you should surrender and correct your mistake now. There is nothing to justify
this rebellion. By getting involved, you will only defame the United Kingdom.”
“I have brought up such an argument countless times already. However, what my United Kingdom
desires more than honor is land. As a member of its royal family, I must enact the will of my nation.
This was all because we couldn’t take you down sooner than this. It was due to my weakness.”
Saying so, William readied his spear.
Surely, he is planning to come at us with an all-out attack.
Looking around, I can see the Griffon Knights rushing toward us. Although their number is inferior to
the Dragon Knights, the Griffon is by far stronger than Flying Dragon. The only thing Flying Dragons
have over the Griffons are its ease of breeding and training.
Well, one could say that Flying Dragon would be much more superior for military use for that reason
alone. Still, they have no choice but to compensate for their inferiority with numbers.
However, with only this much difference in number, the Griffon Knights can reverse this situation.
The only thing that is concerning me is Leticia’s condition. No matter how I look at her, she is
exhausted.
After being kidnapped, and taking a forced march back here, that might be inevitable.
“Leo……take the two to a safe place. We will buy time for you.”
“Leticia…..”
Leo looks anxiously at Leticia.
I smiled at their exchange.
“I don’t need an escort. I and Christa will make our way to Father’s place ourselves.”
“Eh?”
1728
“Leo, go protect Leticia. The Dragon Prince might be too much for her right now.”
“Please do not underestimate me. I will be fine alone. Don’t worry.”
“I can’t allow that. You are now my important (Little) sister-in-law after all.”
“Wha!? I am older you know!!”
“Unfortunately, I am Leo’s elder brother you see.”
After I said that, I stood up on top of the griffon.
Leticia’s face turned bright red and tried to appeal that she was older but I politely ignored her.
Then.
“Leo, you protect Leticia. If you already told her that you would protect her then see it through to the
end. A man’s words can not be uttered so lightly you know.”
“Nii-san……”
“Don’t worry. I have my knight to protect me.”
Saying so, I jumped off Leo’s Griffon together with Christa.
It is not as high as before but if we fall, we will almost certainly die.
Three Dragon Knights descended down to attack us.
However.
“I leave this to you—-Elna.”
The Dragon Knights who were approaching us were instantly blown away and crashed into the castle.
Then wind magic wrapped around me and Christa, allowing us to slow down and safely land on the
ground.
“It’s not as fun as last time…….it’s not high enough.”
“HaHaHa!! Then how about we try a place that is slightly higher next time.”
Saying so, I patted Christa’s head.
Then, I heard the sound of someone landing behind me.
I can tell the identity of that person with that alone.
“Good work, Sir Elna.”
1729
“Please forgive us for our tardiness, Your Highness. The Third Corp of the Imperial Knight Order has
arrived.”
The moment Elna said that.
Elna’s subordinates landed around me one after another.
Every one of them seems ready to do this. How reliable.
When I was thinking so, Gordon uses the voice amplifier again to give a command to his soldiers.
“To all the soldiers inside the Imperial Capital! Capture the 7th Prince Arnold! I don’t care if he’s dead
or alive! Take the 3 Rainbow Celestial Jewels he has with him and deliver them to me! Any reward will
be given to those who can accomplish this! Catch that Dull Prince!!”
“Ohh, scary, scary. He’s quite pissed huh.”
“It’s okay…..we will protect Al.”
“Yeah, I’m counting on you.”
While I was talking to Elna, the soldiers came out from the castle one after another.
So they mobilized every soldier they can now huh.
They went quite far just to capture me alone huh.
“There are quite a lot of them huh. I don’t think I can count them with my fingers alone.”
“There’s no use counting their number now. If you are tired, it’s okay to just take a nap you know?
Marc.”
“Please don’t make such a joke. If anyone takes a nap here they will be trampled, Captain.”
Said Marc as he shrugged at Elna.
When I smiled at their conversation, Marc pulled out his sword.
“I wonder how many times it’s been that I have saved you like this, Your Highness?”
“Who knows. I lost count already.”
Then please start counting again from now on.”
“Impossible. I don’t have enough fingers to count that after all.”
After I used his words against him, Marc let out a small sigh.
“You truly are a troublesome person, Your Highness.”
1730
“Just give up. Al is always like this after all.”
Saying so, Elna slowly raised her sword up.
Then she uses magic and lets her voice echo through the Imperial Capital.
“Knights and Soldiers of the Imperial Capital. This is Elna von Amsberg. You have done well protecting
the Imperial Capital. I salute the sweat and blood you have shed for this nation. Even so, I can’t allow
you to rest yet. If you still have the pride in the sword that you pledged to His Majesty the Emperor, if
you still honor the military uniform that you are wearing……then stand with me! Escort the princes
and princesses to His Majesty’s side! Be proud! This is the moment that will test you, the protectors of
the Empire!! If you think that it is too painful and you want to give up, Remember——The Amsbergs is
there for all those who stand with the Empire!!!”
A sword.
The words of courage that inspire the exhausted Knights and Soldiers.
The magic words that make you think you can accomplish anything.
The next moment, cheers rose from all over the capital.
The Amsberg house is having their back. It is the news that tells all the people of the Empire
everything will be okay.
“Run, Al. everyone will protect you now.”
“Yeah, thanks. You should be careful too, you know? You are tired after using the holy sword right?”
“Don’t be stupid. My condition is perfect. If it’s now, I don’t feel like losing to anyone. So go. You don’t
have to worry about this place. I will not let even a single soldier get past us.”
Saying so, Elna attacks the soldiers who came out of the castle.
The soldiers that collided with her head-on are being blown away.
“She really is in perfect condition huh.”
“Elna so strong! it will be fine!”
“Right. Then let’s do as she says, shall we. Can you run? Christa.”
“Yes…..!”
Hearing Christa’s reply, I hold Christa’s hand and start running.
Thus, I and Christa started making our way through the Imperial Capital.
1731
SPT Chapter 263
The Appreciation week finally started!!……and I have like 4 chapters left to translate plus my day
job……..FML
-Mr.ListeningtoEurobeatwhileChuggingdowncaffeine
Through the Imperial Capital – First Part
The Imperial Capital is large.
With Christa’s feet, we would never be able to get to the castle gate.
While thinking that we should procure some horses, several soldiers spotted us.
“THERE HE IS!! IT’S THE DULL PRINCE!!”
“Ahh, they found us already huh.”
Elna completely blocked the path of the enemy behind us.
However, even Elna wouldn’t be able to block the enemy that came from the side.
When I was thinking about how troublesome it is to deal with them, another group of soldiers arrived
from the opposite direction.
“PROTECT HIS HIGHNESS!!”
“CREATE A PATH FOR HIM!!”
Inspired by Elna, the soldiers who did not participate in the rebellion rose up to protect me and
Christa.
While they were holding the enemy back, I and Christa went on.
We were steadily heading to the east gate while encountering small skirmishes between small groups
of soldiers on our way.
Father would have left the Imperial Capital by now but I don’t think that Lize-aneue would accompany
him outside.
She probably saw this as an opportunity for her to attack.
Thinking so, the safest path right now is the one that leads to the east gate.
1732
“HaHaHaHa!!! So the Dull Prince ran into us himself huh!!”
“Ah.”
As we proceeded along the main street, there was a group of soldiers blocking our path.
Their number is roughly 500 to 600 men.
The one laughing is a general in his forties leading the group.
Gordon did announce that he will give any reward to the person who can catch me so he probably
can’t stop his delusion from running wild huh.
Honestly, his way of laughing is too disgusting.
“You are going to become a stepping stone for my career now! Dull Prince!!”
“Nah, spare me from that kind of thing.”
When I said so, a wounded soldier arrived from the path that leads to the north.
After he gets off his horse in front of the general, the soldier gives his report.
“Reporting! The north gate has been breached!!”
“They broke through the north gate!? What was the unit there doing! They were posted there to keep
anyone from getting out right!”
“Th, The garrison unit couldn’t rea-…….”
“Fools! They let their guard down huh!”
The general was angry but a garrisoned unit in a key position like that wouldn’t let their guard down
to an extent that they couldn’t do anything.
That being the case, it was not that they let their guard down, they simply couldn’t notice the enemy
attack.
After all, they probably never expected to be attacked from the outside.
Hearing the sound of horseshoes galloping toward us, I grin.
“I want to get through there. Can you open a path for us? Colonel.”
“Your order is my command.”
The sound of horseshoes was coming from behind us.
There is no need to look back.
1733
They probably breached the north gate and kept making their way toward me.
The moment he passed me, the man who rode at the forefront, Lars responded to my words.
Horses passed us by one after another and attacked the group that was blocking our path.
Assaulted by the momentum of the cavalry unit, the soldiers were immediately dispersed.
The horses bear the flag with a crossed-out shield on it.
The knights that bear the scar to their name by choosing to remain unwavering in their belief.
The only knight order of the Imperial Army.
“Good work, Narbe Ritter. Sorry that I have to trouble you like this all the time.”
I said that to them after they finished dispersing the enemy force.
Their response was a salute.
“This is nothing, Your Highness.”
Said the Commander of the Narbe Ritter, Colonel Lars, as he came forward. He was also pulling a horse
with him.
“That is quite considerate of you huh. I’m already tired with all this running too.”
“I thought Your Highness would say that so I found a good horse for you.”
Saying so, Lars and I smile at each other.
After I straddled the horse, I pulled up Christa and put her in front of me.
“Now, let’s go. I will entrust the escorting to you.”
“Yes, sir.”
Thus we were escorted by the Narbe Ritter as we headed to the east gate. However, Christa looked
around as if she was looking for someone.
“What’s wrong? Christa.”
“Al-niisama……where’s Sieg?”
“He will be here soon.”
Saying so, I stroked Christa’s head.
It’s Sieg we are talking about. He is probably being forced to work by Lynfia around this time.
1734
Christa seems dissatisfied without Sieg here but as long as our exact location isn’t known, they
probably had to scatter their force to look for us.
It just happened that the Narbe Ritter was nearer to our location.
Once they know our location, our forces will be able to group up.
However, that is the same for the enemy. Gordon and his subordinates have no choice but to aim for
me to have their shot at reversing this situation.
“It will probably be a tough battle, Colonel.”
“We can not ask for more. We also have our own pride, Your Highness. Even though we had rebelled
against our lords in the past, we did it for a cause. But they are different. Calling them rebels would be
a disgrace to the word itself. We will teach them how a real rebel is.”
Lars said so with a manly smile on his face.
These men were originally knights. Because their lords were corrupted they betrayed them for a
cause they believe in. Not one of them did it for their own gain.
That is their pride.
That’s why they can not overlook this rebellion.
“ENEMY COMPANY AHEAD! THEIR NUMBER IS 1,000 TO 1,500!”
“You are quite popular, Your Highness.”
“I can’t suppress my overflowing charm you see.”
“That seems to be the case. PREPARE FOR COMBAT! PROTECT HIS HIGHNESS AND
BREAKTHROUGH!!”
The Narbe Ritter grouped up around me and Christa and charged at the enemy.
Lars took the lead and opened the way for us but the enemy was also quite strong.
It must be a unit of an accomplished general.
“Finally some skilled enemies huh.”
Muttering so, two generals jumped out and aimed for my neck.
The soldiers of the Narbe Ritters intercepted their attack but it already took them their all to parry
them away from me.
So they are generals that got promoted because of their skill in martial art huh. This type of opponent
is the most troublesome.
1735
They are truly strong and just because they were parried away, they were not incapacitated yet.
“Prince Arnold!”
“Your head is mine!!”
“Can you not look down on us so much. Your side isn’t the only one that has skilled warriors you
know.”
The swords that were directed at me were repelled back by two spears.
Then, the enemy, including the two generals, were immediately blown away.
He finally arrived huh.
“Sieg-sama has cooly arrived!”
“Sieg!!”
“OUCH!! Don’t suddenly pull me like that!!”
Sieg landed on the head of the horse we were riding one but his ears immediately got pulled by
Christa and he ended up suffering from that.
While thinking what a sloppy guy he is, another reliable voice called out to me from the side.
“Leave this place to us. Please go on ahead, Al-sama.”
“As expected of you, Lynfia. Good timing.”
Unlike Sieg, Lynfia who quietly appeared used her spear and put the enemy in front of us to sleep.
“The middle layer is just ahead. The adventurers are currently colliding with the enemy. I think that
Your Highness should be able to get away using the chaos.”
“Good to know. Thanks.”
So the adventurers also stand up for us huh.
Well, those guys are whimsical.
Their criterion is only whether they like the situation or not.
They probably agreed that Gordon pissed them off huh.
When I thought so, I noticed Lynfia staring at me.
“What is it?”
“No, I was relieved that Your Highness is unhurt.”
1736
Saying so, Lynfia gives me a small smile.
It seems that I made her worried huh.
“I was worried too, you know! But you sure are full of energy, aren’t you! Oi!”
Being literally crushed by Christa, Sieg screams out.
It is a little cruel but Christa doesn’t seem to care about that.
That being said, Sieg was rescued by Lynfia.
“Ahh……Sieg was…….”
“You saved me……Miss Lynfia……”
“Stop playing around and get to work already.”
“So cruel!? AHHHHHH!!”
Lynfia throws Sieg at the enemy general.
Probably never expecting such an attack, the enemy general was caught off guard.
Not missing that chance, Sieg flipped in the air and landed on the general’s shoulder.
“WHAT……?”
“Don’t look down on a bear alright. A bear is both cute and strong after all.”
Saying so, Sieg jabs the general’s face with the handle of his spear.
Unable to react in time, the general was blown away.
Using that gap, I ran through the place with half of the Narbe Ritter accompanying me.
The rest stayed behind with Lynfia and the others to stall the enemy.
Well, Lynfia’s group should be able to control that place soon.
The difficult part is ahead.
“It would be nice if we can break through them without much trouble.”
“It probably won’t be so easy.”
I shrugged at Lars’s reply.
The enemy’s eyes are focusing on me. Naturally, they gathered up to block my path.
1737
In the first place, the enemy already has an overwhelming advantage when it comes to numbers.
If we take our time here, we will be crushed through sheer quantity.
However, it would be bad to break through them too fast.
They wouldn’t call for more reinforcement if I don’t let them focus on me for a while after all.
A grin float to my face as I ride on the horse.
“Al-niisama……you are making a bad smile again.”
“Is that so? I wasn’t intending to, you know.”
With a grin on my face, I pat Christa’s head.
1738
SPT Chapter 264
This is for Zhongli Zhongli Zhongli Zhongli Zhongli
-Mr.SimpingforZhongli
Through the Imperial Capital – Second Part
The eastern side of the capital’s middle layer has become a big battlefield between the adventurers
and the enemy.
Magic and arrows are flying all over and the sound of swords clashing can be heard from everywhere.
We are currently stuck on that battlefield.
“It seems we won’t be getting anywhere soon huh.”
“We are abandoning our horses! Everyone gets off!”
Judging that it is impossible for us to get through this place on horseback, he issued the command to
ditch the horses.
A wise decision.
The battle is in the adventurer’s favor. The reason being the enemy’s chain of command was disturbed
and the battle is now relying on individual power and judgment. This makes so much difference to the
battle because this is how adventurers normally operate in the first place.
To combat monsters’ unpredictable nature, adventurers are required to always think and choose the
appropriate response.
For them, the confused soldiers aren’t even worth being considered an enemy.
The fact that they didn’t overwhelm the rebels by now is simply because of the enemy’s large number.
The enemy probably stationed a lot of soldiers in the middle layer in the first place.
When I thought so, a sharp voice suddenly echoed.
“INCOMING!!”
A large amount of magic flew toward us who were moving along the edge of the battlefield.
The soldiers of Narbe Ritter managed to dispel or deviate their trajectory with their sword but the
blast from the magic impact still remained.
1739
A magic blasted near me and Christa. I pushed Christa away in a hurry but the blast blew me a little
distance away.
“Your Highness!!??”
“That hurts………I’m fine. More importantly, get ready……they are coming!!”
Beyond my line of sight appeared Zandra, who is burning with anger, leading a group of mages toward
us.
Her appearance truly befitted that of a witch.
The adventurers that possess an excellent sense of crisis ended up opening the way for her.
They probably judged that it would be best to not get involved huh.
“Good day, Zandra-aneue.”
“Do I look like I am having a good day?”
“Oh my? Are you perhaps angry?”
“Obviously. I want to slaughter you right now.”
“Oh please, I do feel sorry that I sneaked into your room you know. I won’t tell anyone that you have
those flashy underwear even though you don’t have anyone to show it to okay.”
A fireball immediately flew at me.
Lars managed to parry it with his twin swords but a bead of cold sweat ran down his face.
“Please keep your provocation in moderation, Your Highness………I might not be able to stop the
second one.”
“That’s no good then……..we are running away!”
I immediately turned back and started running as fast as I could.
Magic bolts flew at me from behind with tremendous speed but the Narbe Ritter managed to
somehow block them.
Although I was separated from Christa, the Narbe Ritters that are with her should be able to keep her
safe.
Moreover, the one that is in more danger now is me.
“OOH!? That one almost got me!!”
“Their aim is getting more accurate!!”
1740
Lars’s voice shows that he’s desperate.
The number of mages on the battlefield dictates their firepower.
With that firepower concentrated on me, it’s obvious that this is bad.
When I thought so, a wind blade flew toward my neck.
I tried to avoid it by rolling away but the place I rolled into was quite bad.
“It’s the Dull Prince! Get him!”
“Tsk!”
I tried to avoid rolling into the Narbe Ritters but I ended in front of an enemy soldier instead.
I wanted to avoid their sword but I probably won’t make it.
However, the enemy soldier was kicked from the side before he could swing his sword down.
“Sorry, that’s my childhood friend. Don’t be so violent with him alright.”
“OH! Gai! You came at a good time!”
“Don’t ‘yOu CAmE aT a gOod TiMe’ me! You just lured tons of enemies my way!!”
It was Gai who kicked the enemy soldier away.
While he talked to me, the enemies spread out and surrounded us. Intending to have Gai protect me, I
stood up and went behind his back.
“My bad but keep me safe. My sister is angry at me you see.”
“The hell did you do to her?”
“It was a bad move mentioning her underwear but it seems I said too much when I said that she has
no one to show them off to.”
“That’s entirely on you then.”
“You think so after all?”
“So? What color was it?”
“I found three you see.”
When I was having such a conversion with him, magic flew toward us again.
Gai parried it with his sword but it seems his arms went numb since it was more powerful than he
thought.
1741
“Ouch……it seems she’s really pissed at you.”
“I think she is intending to kill you too. Look, she’s glaring at us.”
“What did you involve me in! Seriously!”
“It’s your fault too since you kept asking alright.”
“Of course I would ask! A man would obviously be curious about a beauty’s underwear alright!
Princess Zandra, you are so beautiful! It even made me surprised that you are still single!”
“SHUT UP! JUST DIE ALREADY!!”
Zandra’s face turns bright red as she hails more and more magic at us.
However, they are not that accurate probably because of her anger. Quantity over quality huh. It
would have been fine if you just aim carefully in the first place.
“This is bad. Excuse me!! Hey adventurers! Lend me a hand!!”
Lars and the Narbe Ritters can’t get to us since they are dealing with the rain of magic from Zandra’s
subordinates.
Gai alone won’t be able to protect me so I asked the other adventurers for help.
However.
“I think that Her Highness Zandra is the most beautiful woman in the Imperial Capital!”
“Me too, Me too!”
“Ma’am, I thought that you are beautiful since a long time ago but now that I can see you up close, you
are even more beautiful than the Blau Mowe. Your angry face is also wonderful Ma’am!”
“Tsk, these guys are totally unreliable.”
The adventurers all praised Zandra because they don’t want to fight her.
They probably didn’t know that they only added more fuel to her anger.
“ALL OF YOU SHOULD JUST DISAPPEAR!!”
Saying so, Zandra prepares a large scale magic.
As she said, if we let her, we will all get wiped out together here.
At least I have to get it someplace without people.
When I thought so, I heard a loud voice from the tall building nearby.
1742
“I won’t let you(Desuwa)!”
“Please, Mia-san.”
Looking there, I found Mia and Finne.
Mia draws her bow to the limit.
She is probably planning to shoot a big one over here huh.
“Nice assist. Finne, Mia.”
Saying so, I ignored Zandra and started running.
Realizing the gradual concentration of magic power from Mia, Zandra was forced to switch her target.
Then.
“If it’s a contest of power then I will take you on!!”
“DON’T GET IN MY WAY!”
Zandra’s large scale magic and Mia’s maximum power magic arrow collide.
A white light wrapped the whole battlefield for a moment followed by a big explosion high in the sky.
The blast from the explosion put the whole battlefield to a halt.
After the blast, the battlefield was wrapped in silence.
After all, no one could recover immediately from the impact from such a blast.
However, there was a man who rushed at me without caring about that.
“ARNOLD!!!!!!!!!!”
“Oh, it’s good to see you wel-………”
Although he was supposed to be paralyzed by the magic tool I found in Zandra’s room, Gordon who
had already recovered was rushing toward me.
As expected, I can’t dodge that.
That’s why I gave up and threw the bag containing the Rainbow Celestial Jewels at him.
He probably never expected me to throw it at him.
Gordon was surprised and stopped to catch the bag.
“You fool! You value your life that much huh!”
1743
“Fool huh……let me return that word straight back to you then.”
Saying so, I grinned and urged him to open the bag.
Gordon had a suspicious expression on his face for a moment but he immediately took the jewels out
of the bag.
“What……?”
There were three round objects inside the bag
One is the jewel I found and the other two are the spherical magic tools I found in Zandra’s room.
“Good work, coming so far just for me. But unfortunately, you can’t activate the Celestial Sphere with
only one jewel you know.”
“That’s impossible………you should have all three jewels with you!!”
“I only had one from the start. Thanks for being so trusting and believing everything I said even
though you never saw the actual jewels. Thanks to you, I managed to earn precious time for this side.
Oh, also, the other jewels probably arrived at Father’s place by now.”
“Im, Impossible! If you don’t have it then who!!”
“Who is it I wonder? Maybe, it was someone you overlooked?”
I grinned.
While I grin at Gordon, I can hear an astounded voice from behind me.
“To think that you intentionally focus all eyes in the Imperial Capital to yourself, that was quite a
dangerous move you know?”
“It wouldn’t make sense if I alone am not willing to become a decoy after I made my brother and sister
ones right? Besides, I thought that if I hid it inside the castle, Aneue would have a hard time later. So
how was it? I managed to lure them all out here for you right?”
“Good work. You did well. As expected of my younger brother.”
Said Lize-aneue as she slowly appeared behind me.
Behind her are the men under her direct command.
“It’s time to put down the curtain! Gordon!”
“Kuh!”
1744
Thus the battle in the middle layer of the Imperial Capital shifted from a battle between adventurers
and rebel soldiers to a decisive battle between the Imperial Army led by Lize-aneue and the Rebel
Army led by Gordon.
1745
SPT Chapter 265
Special thanks to an unnamed supporter and Stefania for double tapping my Kofi goal. he’s dead for
sure now.
-Mr.Graverobber
A Brother’s Expectation
In the sky above the Imperial Capital, the Griffon Knights and the Dragon Knights are engaging in an
aerial battle.
The Griffon Knights are on the dominating side.
With Elna down below, the castle is almost completely sealed. To get out, they have no choice but to
dispatch the Dragon Knights since they can fly out of the castle without relying on the land route.
Although they managed to dispatch several Dragon Knights, every time they did, Elna always found an
opening and cut a few of them down, making their number steadily decreasing.
Another reason that the Griffon Knights are at advantage is that Leo is doing quite well against Prince
William in a one on one combat.
“With only a few days on top of a griffon, you managed to match me! You truly are a terrifying prince!”
William tries to get behind Leo but Leo skillfully steers Noir and tries to get behind him instead.
Griffons have a higher ability than flying dragons but the red flying dragon William is riding is a
special one that has an ability close to that of a griffon.
That’s why one could say that there’s not much difference between their rides. And that’s exactly why
William strongly felt that he had to kill Leo here.
If he can already do this when he is not that used to aerial warfare yet, he might become untouchable
on the battlefield in the future.
However, even with his best effort, William still couldn’t finish Leo off.
“Then how about this!!”
William descends and charges at Leo from underneath.
On the other hand, Leo doesn’t have a countermeasure against such an attack. This is an attack that he
has never seen before. Moreover, with the speed that even faster than that of a horse, it can’t be
helped that he can’t do anything about it.
That’s why William expected this attack to hit. This time he was sure that he can deal some damage.
1746
However, Leo managed to barely parry the spear William thrust at him.
“Kuh!”
William grinds his teeth again.
William has already outmaneuvered Leo many times already. There is a big difference between them
since William has many years of aerial combat experience under his belt.
However, Leo always managed to parry his attack.
His role is to stall William to make it easier for the other Griffon Knights to move.
It’s obvious that he would lose to William in terms of movement. Thinking that all he needs to do is to
not get incapacitate, Leo managed to parry William’s blow because his mind was focusing on defense.
However, that alone wouldn’t make William struggling as he is right now.
William, whose attack got parried, took a distance and tried to regain his posture but Leo immediately
launched an attack at him from underneath.
It was the same technique William just used on him.
William ascends at the same speed as Leo and moves sideways at the timing of his attack.
Seeing that, Leo smiles.
“I see. So that’s how you avoid it.”
Seeing Leo smiling as he learned his move, the image of his and Al’s smile when he jumped off the
castle overlapped in William’s mind.
The way they smile is different.
However, both of their smiles possess the same intensity. Their smiles instill a sense of indescribable
fear in him.
“So this is the rumored Black Twin Princes huh…….”
It is not unusual for someone to absorb their opponent’s technique in the middle of combat but for
someone to immediately be able to use the technique at a practical level against their opponent and
even learn how their opponent avoids it is something that William couldn’t do.
If Leo can perfectly imitate him then eventually the one in danger will be William.
The Empire’s Black Twin Princes. There is no doubt in his mind that they are both capable. However,
what he must truly be vigilant against is their mentality.
1747
The elder brother casually deceives others before jumping off the castle with a smile while the
younger brother carefreely starts studying his opponent’s technique during battle. Both of them are
abnormal. Describing it as them only being brave won’t cut it.
While being impressed, William adjusts his grip on the spear.
He has to quickly defeat him and support his men on the ground.
Now is the only chance to defeat him as he only started to absorb his techniques.
“Prince Leonard, you are strong. I will admit that.”
“I’m honored, Prince William.”
“It would be great if we could meet each other somewhere other than a battlefield. We would be able
to respectably meet each other that way.”
“It’s not too late. You can still correct your mistake.”
“It is already too late. Can you truly forgive the United Kingdom? After we caused such damage to the
Empire, it is impossible for us to be forgiven with no strings attached. We have already reached the
point of no return.”
“It won’t do to give up before we can even begin to negotiate. The current Empire has many enemies.
We would be glad to have the United Kingdom on our side.”
“You siblings are truly good with your words. But……the people who suffered from this incident will
not be convinced with that. They will ask for something appropriate in return. They will surely ask for
either my father’s or my brother’s head. If they can be appeased with my head alone then I will
willingly offer my head to them. But that won’t be enough. That’s why I can’t stop now. I will defeat
you and Saint Leticia then take down the Emperor. That is the only thing I can do now.”
Saying so, William hold up his spear.
In response, Leo also readied his sword.
“Then I only have to stop you by force. I will not let you kill anyone. I won’t let you do as you please in
the sky of the Empire.”
The silence lasts only a moment.
Both of them assault each other with tremendous momentum.
Their clash continues to repeat.
The battle above the Imperial Capital was still undecided.
——————————-
1748
“Just a little more, Your Highness!”
“Un……”
Alois and Rupert broke through the enemy’s encirclement and are approaching the east gate.
They are only accompanied by Alois’s knights.
Mitsuba’s group were waiting before the encirclement with the Imperial Knights guarding them.
Why did they split up?
That was because Lize had launched an assault on the enemy’s encirclement and the enemy’s
attention has turned to her.
Judging that they should be able to get past them with a small group, he told Mitsuba’s group to hide in
a nearby abandoned house. In case the enemy’s line collapsed, the Imperial Knights were instructed to
follow them as they would try to break through the enemy with his small group first.
As Alois read, the enemies that were having their hands full dealing with Lize’s assault couldn’t
respond to Alois’s attack.
Their group easily broke through and headed to the east gate where the Emperor was supposed to be.
Then.
“HALT! Who are you!”
“Viscount Alois von Simmel! I have brought His Highness Rupert!”
Alois, who was stopped by the knight, declared so in a loud voice.
Then, a voice was heard from behind the knight.
“Is that true! Rupert! You are safe!”
“Father…..”
When Emperor Johannes spotted Rupert, he immediately rushed to him.
He then checks for any injuries and tightly hugged him.
“You did well coming all this way! Good boy!”
The moment he heard those words, tears spilled from Rupert’s eyes.
Many people thought that he cried because he’s finally safe but that was wrong.
Rupert separated from Johannes and kneeled down before him.
1749
“…..please forgive me…..I am a fool……”
“What’s wrong? What happened?”
“On the way here…..I abandoned Christa’s aneue and Trau-aniue……..”
“Your Majesty! His Highness has a reason for this!”
Alois hurriedly tries to explain but Johannes interrupts him with his hand.
He then gently put his hand on Rupert’s head.
“Don’t say that you abandoned them. I can see how painful it was for you from those tears.”
“I…….I was only a decoy…….Arnold-aniue entrusted me with a fake jewel………but I was told to treat it
as the real one……..that I have to run away no matter what…….but…..even when he told me to run,
what worth does someone who can only run away have……..even though I also belong to the Imperial
family……I couldn’t do anything……”
When his country is facing a crisis, he couldn’t do anything meaningful nor could he help his family.
Why am I so weak? Why am I such a coward?
If only I was stronger.
Only regrets exist in Rupert’s mind.
However, hearing Rupert, Johannes slowly reaches for the bag hung on Rupert’s while muttering ‘It
can’t be….’.
He then opens the bag and reaches for the content inside.
There were two jewels inside.
Seeing that, Johannes slowly stands up.
“Rupert. I have to revise your evaluation.”
“Yes…..”
I’m being punished.
Rupert thought.
Naturally. Only punishment would suit someone who abandoned their own brother and sister.
That was Rupert’s thought.
“I treated you like a father would earlier but right now I must speak to you as the Emperor of this
nation. [You did well running away from them, Prince Rupert.——these are the real jewels.]”
1750
“Eh…..?”
“Arnold gave you the real thing. To deceive your enemy, first, deceive your ally. That plan is certainly
like him. He probably believes that you will definitely be able to run away. No matter how difficult or
painful it is, he believes that you will fulfill your duty and you answered his trust. Splendid work.”
Saying so, he firmly grabbed Rupert’s shoulders.
“Don’t look down on yourself! You can be proud! You have fulfilled the responsibilities of the Imperial
Family! You have lived up to your brother’s expectations! You are truly my son!”
“I..I……..”
“Don’t say it! You have no need to say anything! Alois! You did well protecting my son! When this is
over, I shall reward both of you with a medal! This achievement is worthy of that!”
Johannes also proceeds to praise Alois.
On the other hand, Alois quietly shook his head.
“Your Majesty. Since the Rainbow Celestial Jewels are already here, let us hurry. Your Majesty should
leave the Imperial Capital while His Highness Arnold is buying time for us.”
“Umu……it seems I have to give Arnold a medal too huh. He will probably hate that though.”
“Your Majesty. Beyond the enemy encirclement, Mitsuba-sama and Gianna-sama are waiting for us
with the Imperial Knights. Would you please send reinforcements her way?”
“What? So both of them were safe? As expected of you Alois. Great job.”
With that said, Johannes assigned soldiers to retrieve them.
Hearing that, Alois asked for one more thing.
“Also—-please allow me to borrow a few horses.”
“What? Where are you planning to go?”
“I will head out to assist His Highness Arnold and Her Highness Christa, Your Majesty.”
“You don’t have to worry about those two. Lizelotte already went out to pick them up herself.”
“Yes. my strength will not make any difference but I must go. I am His Highness Rupert’s knight after
all.”
Alois stands up.
He then speaks to Rupert.
1751
“I will go to them in your place, Your Highness.”
“Alois……Un! Take care of Aneue for me!”
“Your wish is my command.”
Saying so, Alois straddles on the horse Johannes prepared.
He then heads through the opening in the enemy’s encirclement that Lize created before it closes.
Seeing him off, Johannes smiled at Rupert.
“You have a good knight.”
“Yes!”
After that, the Emperor’s party left the Imperial Capital through the east gate.
1752
SPT Chapter 266
Next chapter will be 20 pages of Sebas side story yanno!! I spent too much caffeine on that one yanno!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Watchful Shadow
“Lize-anesama!!”
When Christa saw Lize, she unintentionally shouted her name.
However, her voice couldn’t reach Lize with all the noises from the battlefield.
“Your Highness! We have to leave this place. Please follow me!”
Lars, who had given up joining up with Al, has returned to Christa.
He knows well the danger this situation will pose to her.
That’s why he proposed an immediate withdrawal.
“But, Al-niisama is…….”
“Marshal Lizelotte is already at His Highness’s side! He will surely be able to get away! The one who is
in danger is us, Your Highness!”
“……I understand. I will withdraw.”
“Please, this way!”
Saying so, Lars, along with his few subordinates, starts escorting Christa away from the battlefield.
Since the situation already turned chaotic, many of the Narbe Ritters were scattered.
It would be possible to regroup if they have time but that would be too dangerous.
After all, if the enemy clashes with Lize, Christa would obviously be their first priority target.
And his judgment was not wrong.
“There she is! It’s Her Highness Christa! Catch her!”
“Tsk! They found us already! Please hurry!!”
An enemy general is rushing toward them as the enemy vanguard.
1753
Lars stops the general’s advance and hurries Christa to escape first with his subordinates.
To not be a burden for them, Christa desperately kept running away.
However, something entangled her leg.
“Kyah!”
As she unintentionally raised a scream, Christa fell.
Looking at her leg, she saw that a tree root has grown out from the ground and entangled her right leg.
“MAGES!”
The Narbe Ritters spotted a mage who is planting his hands on the ground.
It was one of Zandra’s mages.
The Narbe Ritters immediately cut the root to free Christa but while doing so, the roots keep growing
from all over the place.
As they have their hands full dealing with the roots that aim to capture Christa, they can not proceed
any further.
“Your Highness! Can you run!”
“Somehow…….”
Christa answered with a frown.
In fact, her right leg hurt so much that she can’t move freely.
The root that gripped her has sprained her right leg.
However, thinking that she can not act weak now, Christa endures the pain and begins to run away
while dragging her right leg.
However, at that speed, she couldn’t escape the mage who can freely manipulate the tree.
A root wrap around Christa’s body and pull her away.
Although she tried to resist, Christa couldn’t possibly have enough strength to do that.
For a moment, Christa’s body floats into the air.
This is bad. Thinking so, Christa reaches her right hand out for help.
However, the Narbe Ritters were having their hands full with the roots and the surrounding enemies.
No one grabbed Christa’s hand.
1754
When she thought that no one would come, a small hand grabbed Christa’s hand from the side.
“UOAHHHH!!!!! FULL POWER!!!!!”
“Rita!?”
The person who suddenly showed up to help her was Rita who has scratches all over her body.
Not allowing Christa to be taken, Rita grabbed Christa’s arm with both hands and pulled her back.
“DO YOUR BEST! CU-CHAN!! RITA IS DOING HER BEST TOO!”
“Un!”
Resistance from two children.
The mage judged that one root won’t be enough and tried to add another.
However, because of that, he didn’t notice the man who appeared beside him.
“What the hell…… ARE YOU DOING TO THEM!!!!!”
“WHA!?”
It was Trau who appeared beside the mage.
Trau pierces the mage’s body with his sword and kicks him away.
However, thanks to that, Trau also started to stagger.
“Th, the world is shaking……”
“I told you not to shout, Your Highness Traugott! You’ve lost too much blood!”
It was Wendy who took care of Trau.
Trau and Rita managed to get through the battlefield without much trouble and arrive at Christa’s side
with Wendy’s illusion.
Around them were the Raiffeisen brothers and their men.
They also went in to support Trau as he is staggering from overexerting himself.
“Your Highness, please be careful!”
“My eyes are spinning……..”
“You did that to yourself! It because you pushed yourself after you almost died alright!”
“Lolifu is getting angry with me……..”
1755
Although his words made him seemed depressed, there was a satisfied smile on Trau’s face for some
reason.
Wendy goes to Christa who has been released from the root and cast simple magic on her leg.
“It’s a pain-reducing magic.”
“Thank you, Wendy. Wendy was the one who took care of Rita and Trau-aniue right?”
“I only performed first aid. I don’t really want them to start moving yet but they said that they have to
go………even though their injuries were serious.”
“Rita is fine! It doesn’t hurt at all! Rita is a knight after all!”
“You are saying that again……”
As Wendy was astounded, Christa stood up.
Wendy then tried to apply an illusion on Christa. However, her magic didn’t activate.
“My magic power…….”
“It’s okay. Don’t push yourself.”
“Your Highness Christa! We will be withdrawing without the illusion!”
Christa nods to the Raiffeisen brothers.
However, this doesn’t mean that the reinforcement they received is that significant.
Trau is almost immobile, and the Raiffeisen brothers’ movements are also restricted since they are
supporting Trau from both sides.
The ones that can move properly right now are their men and a few Narbe Ritters accompanying her.
“THERE SHE IS! THAT’S PRINCESS CHRISTA!!”
Perhaps they were stationed outside the battlefield, several cavalrymen spotted Christa.
The Raiffeisen brothers are ready to protect Christa but another knight appears from the side before
they could.
The knight got between Christa’s group and the cavalrymen and took their heads by surprise.
Following that, other knights charged in and got rid of the rest of the cavalrymen.
“Are you safe? Your Highness Christa.”
“Alois…….”
1756
“Yes, it’s Alois von Simmel. I am here on the behest of His Highness Rupert. Please get on. We will be
withdrawing from this place.”
Saying so, Alois reached his hand out to Christa with a gentle smile on his face.
Following Alois, the knights also put Trau and Rita behind them and were ready to leave the area.
Christa nervously grabs Alois’s hand.
Alois then pulls her up and positions her behind him.
“I don’t think that it is good to say this but I’m glad that my effort didn’t go to waste. I was acting all
cool when I parted way with His Highness Rupert after all.”
“Is Rupert safe……?”
“Yes, he’s safe. He has already met up with His Majesty.”
“I’m glad….thank you. For protecting my brother.”
“I only performed my duty.”
Saying so, Alois flashed an innocent smile at Christa.
Then, after confirming that everyone was ready, Alois gave the command.
“We are withdrawing! We have injured people so we will head to the Adventurer Guild! That’s our
safest route.”
If they are lucky, they might be able to find someone who can use healing magic there.
While putting that into consideration, Alois decided to head to the adventurer guild.
If he just heads to join the Emperor then there is no doubt that he will receive even more praise and
medals.
However, Alois was totally indifferent to those things.
There was a person watching over them on top of the nearby house.
“This old man almost took away the spotlight from the young ones. That was close.”
Saying so, Sebas smiled and saw off Alois’s group.
If Alois or Trau didn’t move, Sebas was prepared to rescue Christa himself.
However, with Alois’s arrival, he can get back to performing his work behind the scenes.
Several corpses were lying beside Sebas.
1757
Soldiers, adventurers, their appearances are all different. However, every single one of them had a
sharp cut on their neck.
“That should take care of most of the assassins in the area.”
Sebas has been taking separate action from Lynfia and the others ever since their arrival at the
Imperial Capital. He has been killing the assassins who were lurking around the battlefield.
Judging that there should be almost none left now, Sebas cracks his neck.
“Now then…….I think it’s time for me to revert back to a normal butler.”
Saying so, Sebas instantly disappeared with a gentle smile on his face.
1758
SPT Chapter 267
Special thanks to someone and unnamed supporter for more coffee!! double again today…..damn the
edit is painful…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Young People These Days
Withdrawing from a battlefield.
That is something easier said than done.
“Get back here! Arnold!”
“Haaa……”
Especially when you have a persistent older sister.
Zandra ignored the big picture and kept chasing me alone.
Lize-aneue and Gordon are clashing with each other and the rebels are currently at a great
disadvantage due to their inferiority to Lize-aneue’s subordinates.
At that time, I was hoping that I could get away without much attention on me but Zandra just blew
away all the soldiers in her way and beelined straight toward me.
From there, we started a game of tag.
I didn’t want the soldiers on our side to get caught up so I get on onto the roof but Zandra kept
shooting magic at me so I have to continue moving from roof to roof.
“You are too persistent! Zandra-aneue!”
“Shut up!!”
“Seriously……without the jewels, I have no strategic value at all alright. You are just wasting time on
me!”
“I don’t care! I can use you as a hostage against Leonard and Elna later!”
“Those guys won’t stop just because of me. You will only be adding oil to the fire you know.”
“Shut up! No one asks your opinion!”
Saying so, Zandra hails magic at me again.
1759
It’s not that she is totally enraged, she really intends to use me as a hostage so she didn’t aim for my
neck.
So she didn’t just start chasing me because she was blinded by her anger huh.
Still, I can’t say that putting so much attention to me is a good plan though.
Even if she can stop Elna and Leo, their inferiority will not change. Besides, Lize-aneue will never stop
no matter who is the hostage.
The tide has already changed. The current rebels do not have the power to turn it back in their favor.
That should be the case. However, Leo and William are still fighting in the sky.
William is someone that can accurately analyze the situation. He should already have noticed what is
happening down here. It’s possible that his fight with Leo is so heated up that he didn’t pay attention
down here but that is unlikely.
I have the impression that everything he did was for the sake of the United Kingdom after all.
That being the case.
“He has a plan to revert this situation huh?”
I muttered so as I was jumping from roof to roof.
As expected, it would be difficult to do that with only the people here…….
“STOP RIGHT THERE!”
Frustrated that she can’t stop my movement, Zandra shouted at me.
The area around here was a place I used to play in when I was a kid. The cityscape here hasn’t
changed much from before.
I never forget how I ran around this place as a child.
I often moved from roof to roof to escape the angry adults. While doing that, more adults would get
angry at me because I was running on their roofs though.
I still remember pulling a prank and running away with Gai using these roofs.
We were chased by the shopkeeper when we sneaked a bite from a slice of bread at his stall but when
we managed to lose him, we found Elna’s demonic form at our tail so we immediately ran away for our
life.
Compared to that, Zandra is much gentler.
“This won’t end! Just give up already! Arnold!”
1760
“No way, my wellbeing is on the line so I can’t give up you know.”
“Fine…..then I will just force you to give up!!”
Saying so Zandra used her magic to blow away the house in front of me.
She cut off my escape route.
What a brute.
“Then I only have to escape to the back alley right.”
“You think!? You forget this already!? I have many assassins under my command! They are already
lurking around the capital! You will only get caught once you enter the back alley!”
“I wonder about that.”
“You don’t believe me huh…..Fine! Come out!!”
Zandra signals her assassins to come out.
I look around for a moment but I see no movement at all.
“Eh……? What are you doing!? Come out already!”
Zandra raised her voice in vain.
I look at such Zandra with pity.
On the other hand, Zandra’s face distorts.
“What! What with those eyes! How is this happening! Why is no one showing up!? WHERE ARE YOU!
WHERE ARE MY ASSASSINS!”
Responding to her, a man finally appeared.
However, he was drenched in blood.
“Gunther! What happened!”
“Please forgive me…….”
The man apologized and wiped the blood that was dripping down from his head.
Looking at his face, I remembered that he was the assassin who attacked me.
Thanks to him, Lynfia has cooperated with us to this day.
In a sense, he is kind of a benefactor to me.
1761
When I thought so, Gunther muttered.
“You damn Reaper……..”
“Please, I am but a simple butler, sir”
Said Sebas as he appeared behind me without a sound.
I was wondering what he was doing until now but he was dealing with the assassins huh.
“Took your time huh.”
“My deepest apology. My meddlesome nature acted up so when I saw such inexperienced juniors, I
thought that I should give them a lesson, sir.”
“Really now. Did any of your juniors manage to endure your lesson then?”
“Young people these days are no good, sir. Please rest assured. I properly gave all of them a practical
lesson.”
A practical lesson for assassins huh.
Considering that they have to learn in the process of being killed, that would be quite cruel.
That bloodied guy that is standing next to Zandra, Gunther was it, he’s probably the best among all of
them.
He’s still alive after all.
“Sebastian……don’t tell me…..my assassins….”
“So they were under Your Highness Zandra’s employ. I think that they are still too green to serve the
Imperial Family. Since they will only drag Your Highness down, I took the opportunity to take care of
them. The man standing next to Your Highness did show some promise but he should be useless to
Your Highness now though.”
After Sebas said so, Gunther staggered and collapsed.
It seems that he lost too much blood.
Sebas’s attacks are always directed at vital organs.
If you received it too many times, you will eventually bleed out.
“…..DON’T MESS WITH ME! Why are you serving Arnold when you have so much power!?”
“Does that question have any meaning? If I leave him alone, His Highness would die though?”
“Who cares about that!”
1762
“I will not answer why I serve Arnold-sama but I can answer why I did not serve you, Your Highness.
Can we settle with that?”
I burst out laughing.
Zandra’s face turned bright red but I ignored that and walked down the roof into the back alley.
“Wait! Arnold!”
“Feel free to follow me but please be careful. The back alley is the assassins’ turf after all.”
Saying so, I left the place with Sebas.
Then, after we entered an empty inn, I sat down on a chair.
“I’m tired…….”
“Thank you for your hard work, sir. It seems that you have pushed yourself quite far this time.”
“My role got reversed huh. I went all out you know.”
“Then what is your next move, sir? Will you start slacking off now?”
“Nah, William still hasn’t withdrawn yet. He must have some kind of plan. If that’s the case then we
will have to prepare for that.”
“The same as usual then, sir?”
“Yes, the same as usual. Now it’s time to start the real secret maneuver.”
Saying so, I took out the silver mask and put it on.
1763
SPT Chapter 268
Done, Imma head out now
-Mr.Graverobber
The Sleeping Bird
William still doesn’t choose to withdraw. That is certainly unnatural.
The Rainbow Celestial Jewel they obtained was a fake and since Gordon was lured outside the castle, it
should be difficult for them to maintain the Imperial Capital.
Even if they continue to fight at the middle layer, their chance of winning is slim.
With that being the case, it should be better for them to withdraw and regroup.
The generals in the Imperial Capital are not the only ones who support Gordon. If he can withdraw
from this place, Gordon should be able to group up a sizable army.
From the perspective of the United Kingdom, the Dominion, and the Kingdom, they would prefer
Gordon’s rebellion to be successful. However, even if it fails, as long as Gordon is alive, that should be a
minimum success for them.
If the Empire is divided into two, the three countries would support Gordon’s side and mobilize their
army through Gordon’s sphere of influence.
The strategic value of that alone is immeasurable.
William should understand that well. If he decides to keep the Imperial Capital and Gordon were to
lose his life here, he will not be able to utilize this plan.
Yet William still doesn’t withdraw.
“So he still sees the chance for victory huh.”
I transferred from the inn to the sky above the Imperial Capital
The place I transferred to was even higher than where Leo was.
I move above the cloud and activate the detection barrier.
Several forces were caught in the barrier.
Three forces are heading toward the Imperial Capital.
1764
The first one is from the northwest. This one is the closest. The Imperial Capital should be within their
sight soon.
The other two are clashing with each other at the northeast. One is probably the army the Prime
Minister prepared. They are crushing the enemy with overwhelming power. However, since they are
still being delayed, they will never arrive ahead of the army in the northwest.
“A faction from the central and the northern army, so that’s Gordon’s faction huh.”
Gordon was relegated to the Northern Border Defense Force.
I don’t think that the general at the northern fort would betray us but it is probably different from the
garrisoned forces stationed at various areas of the north.
They were not assigned to the front-line at the border defense army and stationed far away from the
central command.
Their career path shouldn’t be so rosy. The more rural place it is, the more authority the local nobles
will have over the Imperial army after all.
Since the knights serving the local nobles will solve most of the territory’s problems, the role of the
army is almost non-existent.
It is quite possible for those who were dissatisfied with such treatment to join Gordon’s side.
In that case, the Northern Border is in danger.
The Dominion and the Kingdom should have already started their movement in response to Gordon’s
rebellion. The Kingdom will use Leticia’s case as their official reason for their invasion but because of
how the Dominion is, they do not have to use any reason to justify their invasion.
It wouldn’t be strange if they have already started invading the northern border.
If the northern border fell, the Empire would have to take it back. However, the Imperial Capital is the
center of the Empire. Without the central command, the nobles and the Imperial Army will not be able
to consolidate.
Even if the Emperor survives, there is still enough merit to secure the Imperial Capital.
And William’s last hope. That is the reinforcement approaching us from the northwest.
Their number is 8,000 to 10,000. If they arrive, that would be a fatal development for us.
After abandoning the Imperial Capital. Father would join up with the army prepared by the Prime
Minister and retake the Imperial Capital.
Given the strength of the army, capturing the city back would be possible. However, the Imperial
Capital will be engulfed in the chaos of war. That wouldn’t be good both for the citizens and the
strategic value of the capital itself.
1765
“It would be bad for an SS-rank adventurer to interfere in a big way too.”
I don’t care about the guild’s petty words but I would like to refrain from participating in a civil war
for no good reason.
SS-rank adventurers are guardians of the people. Because we appeared that way, we are allowed to
exist.
There won’t be any problem if I move at my own discretion if I keep it to the minimum.
Do not get involved in national issues. In other words, we are being told to stay neutral.
This is also the result of consideration for the people’s acceptance.
A force that exists for everyone on the continent. That is the image the guild headquarters created for
us SS-rank adventurers.
What if one of them joins up with your opponent? That thought can make people afraid of the SS-rank
adventurers.
We SS-rank adventurers are out of standard existents on this continent.
We do not fit in the scope of normalcy.
We do not pledge our allegiance to the Emperor like the Brave house.
We are something close to wild beasts. If we are judged to be harmful, we will end up as a target for
subjugation.
“It is certainly hard to interact with them too.”
SS-rank adventurers are SS-rank adventurers.
No matter who comes for my head, it will still be the worst.
Even if I destroy the army and minimize the damage here, there is no doubt that further damage will
occur in the battle between me and the other SS-rank adventurers.
“So it seems I can’t make a move openly after all huh.”
Muttering so, I opened the transfer gate again.
If I rely on others, the number of sacrifices will increase. If I move alone, the damage can be reduced.
That’s a big dilemma for me.
I do not know what is the right thing to do.
1766
The only thing I know for sure is that [They] are waiting. It must be frustrating knowing their nation is
in crisis without being able to do anything.
No, the national crisis is probably only a secondary concern huh.
“Their important young lady is in danger after all.”
I passed through the transfer gate.
My destination is the Dukedom of Kleinert.
I transferred to the sky above the central territory and found the knights’ camping a little away from
the duchy capital.
Their number is about 5,000.
Fully equipped knights were lined up inside the camp.
After I slowly descended to the campsite, I entered the largest tent while being looked at by the
surrounding knights.
Inside, Duke Kleinert is waiting for me in his armor.
He is probably ready to head out at any time.
“So you’ve come. Silver.”
“Yes, I didn’t want to though.”
“Me too. I did not want you to come either. Your arrival means that a rebellion did occur inside the
Imperial Capital after all. No parent would not worry about their daughter.”
“There is no problem in that regard. Miss Finne is safe. But there is an army approaching the Imperial
Capital. The battle inside the Imperial Capital is being dominated by the Imperial faction but their
dominance can be overturned by the enemy reinforcement.”
“If it’s you, you can blow them all away right?”
“I would if I could. But even if we appear free, we SS-rank adventurers do not have so much freedom.”
“Hmm…..it was a joke. I understand your position. It’s already a gray zone with you being here for us.
Even so, you still came. Thank you.”
Saying so, Duke Kleinert smiled and extended his right hand for me.
Realizing that he wanted to shake hands, I also offered mine.
The Duke then smiles and firmly grabs it.
1767
“Your hand is surprisingly small huh.”
“I am a human too after all.”
“Right. No, even if you are not one, my gratitude will not change. You’ve saved my territory and
supported the prince my daughter believes in. You even informed us of our nation’s crisis and came to
create a path for us. So you don’t have to worry about it. Even if we die in this battle, it is not your
fault. It is the duty of us nobles to protect the country. The reason why we can enjoy luxuries in time of
peace is so that we can give our lives in times like this. I can not say for other nobles but that is the
Duke of Kleinert’s teaching. To be a noble, it is our duty to act like one.”
Saying so, Duke Kleinert puts on his helmet that he places on the side.
After hanging the sword at his waist, he started to slowly walk out of the tent.
After he left the tent, he issued his order at the knights who were preparing for departure.
“Get the horses! We are departing!”
“……..I will transfer you to a forest near the Imperial Capital. The enemy will probably attack from the
north side. No one is aware of the existence of this army yet. You should be able to take them by
surprise.
“Understood. Don’t worry. Even like this, I frequented the battlefield when I was young. I will not be
outmaneuvered by the army that idle in time of peace.”
That’s probably the truth.
The army is cooperating with Gordon in order to create military achievements in the first place.
The Empire has not experienced a major battle recently but that is different in the past.
When my father was young, he frequently fought with other countries. Given Duke Kleinert’s age, he
might have been on the battlefield together with Father.
Thinking so, I prepare multiple huge transfer gates for them.
It would take this much to transfer the whole army.
Meanwhile, the Duke gathered up his knights.
“Peace is built with blood. Those who are dissatisfied with it are those who have never shed blood for
it or those who are drunk with blood. This chain never stops.”
Duke Kleinert addresses the knights in front of him.
His hand is holding the flag bearing the sigil of house Kleinert.
It is a sigil that has been passed down from generation to generation.
1768
The blue and white flag depicted a picture of a bird with closed wings.
A bird that doesn’t take flight unless it is necessary. The sleeping bird.
That would be perfect for Duke Kleinert.
“BUT! Even if that chain never stops, it doesn’t mean that we have to stop fighting! If the peace is
broken, we only have to rebuild it again! We will bleed together! Finne is already there! Do not let her
be alone! For we of the Dukedom of Kleinert are one!!”
The duke handed the flag to the young man at his side.
It was the gatekeeper I met when I first visited Duke Kleinert, his eldest son and Finne’s elder brother.
I thought that he would stay behind but it seems he will be heading out too.
He looked scared but he still didn’t run away.
“Let us go! To the Imperial Capital!!”
With that said, Duke Kleinert pulled out his sword and led his men through the transfer gate.
The knights follow after him.
After confirming that everyone had passed through, I returned to the Imperial Capital.
Gordon’s reinforcement that approached the capital from the northwest finally came within sight.
1769
SPT Chapter 269
Thanks someone again for double tapping my goal. Did you take inspiration from John Wick? Goal-kun
is already so dead…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Rain of Light
“Your Majesty, the enemy army is approaching. They are about 8,000 strong. These soldiers might
have been a part of the northern army.”
“Vinfried huh. How about you being a little panicked? They are heading right at us you know.”
Emperor Johannes was a little distance away from the east gate.
There are five Imperial Knights who were originally the Emperor’s personal guards at his side.
Although they are not as powerful as the high-ranking captains, they have enough power to protect
the Emperor.
In addition, Vin who has led two of the Imperial Knight Corps under Elna’s order and a part of Narbe
Ritter is also at his side.
The total number here was a little over a thousand but in terms of ability, they have no shortcoming.
However, the opponent is eight times their number. They are clearly at a disadvantage here.
Still.
“I would be quite grateful if they chose to head toward us instead. It would be much more
troublesome if they choose to head inside the capital instead.”
“You never changed huh. But that’s right. Sorry, but I will leave the hard part to you here.”
“Yes. My apology but to catch the enemy’s eyes, we need your help, Your Majesty.”
Johannes nodded to Vin’s words and unsheathed his sword as he straddled his horse.
He then uses magic to amplify his voice and address the Imperial Knights.
“Do not let the enemy get close to the capital! My knight! Follow your Emperor!!!!!”
Saying so, Johannes took the lead and started charging at the enemy.
The Imperial Knight and the Narbe Ritters follow him.
1770
The Emperor who was supposed to run away just charged at the enemy. Moreover, with a clear
numerical disadvantage.
That fact stood out to the enemy reinforcement that just arrived.
After all, it would be their greatest military achievement if they can take down the Emperor himself.
Instead of the Imperial Capital, all of them turned to face him.
However, there were some who were frustrated by that.
“Why are they so short-sighted!”
William, who was fighting Leo in the sky, clicked his tongue as he noticed that the reinforcement had
stopped their feet.
He chose to left his subordinates to deal with Leo instead and headed toward Gordon at the middle
layer together with several of his Dragon Knights.
“HaHaHa!! It seems that our reinforcement has arrived first huh!”
“Seems so. All the more reason that I should not waste time playing with you here, Gordon.”
“FOOL!”
In the middle of the battlefield, Gordon and Lize were locked in a fierce battle.
Seeing that, William had to make a tough decision.
“Sorry! All of you! Please die for me!”
“Yes, sir! I will gladly accept my death for your sake, Your Highness!”
“Please keep on living and fight for our homeland!”
Saying so, the Dragon Knights charge down toward Lize.
No matter how strong a dragon knight is, they stand no chance against her.
Still, they charged in.
Because William ordered them to.
All for the sake of gaining time.
“Gordon! Get on!”
“Don’t get in my way! You think I’d lose!?”
“I don’t care, just get on! If you don’t, the United Kingdom will withdraw from this battle!”
1771
“What!?”
“Hurry up!!”
William grabbed Gordon’s arm and pulled him up.
While clicking his tongue, Gordon allowed himself to get pulled up.
Meanwhile, all the Dragon Knights who charged at Lize were all cut down.
While looking at the bodies of his fallen subordinates, William ascends to the sky with his face
distorted.
“What the hell was that!? If you give me some idiotic reason, I will not forgive you!”
“That’s my line!! What the hell is the commander of our reinforcement thinking!? They are trying to
take down the Emperor even in this situation you know!!!”
“What’s wrong with that!?”
“Even you!? You idiot! We can not take the Emperor’s head as long as he has already left the capital!
The Imperial Knights at his side surely have multiple ways to let him escape! Give up on taking his
head already! Right now the Imperial Capital is our priority! The reinforcement was for that sake!”
“If we can defeat the Emperor then we can end everything!”
“If he can be defeated so easily we wouldn’t have to use the Celestial Sphere in the first place! He
deliberately luring all the attention to himself! It’s obvious that he would withdraw if the situation
became dangerous! With Marshal Lizelotte in the capital, our forces here won’t stand a chance!! We
must send in the reinforcement! Just do as I say!”
William tried to take Gordon out of the Imperial Capital but Leo stood in their way.
“Your opponent is me.”
“Kuh……so you’ve already defeated my men huh……!”
William cursed the worsening situation while gritting his teeth.
As long as they can secure the Imperial Capital, even if the Emperor survives, they can put up a fight
on more than an equal ground.
If he can’t protect the Imperial Capital, the Emperor’s honor will be lost. After all, how many nobles
would choose to obey a weak Emperor?
Moreover, they can secure the capital as their strategic point. They can also declare that only someone
who can actually sit on the throne is an emperor as well.
There are many hands they can play as long as the Imperial Capital is under their control.
1772
Nevertheless, the reinforcements were distracted by the military achievement in front of them and
decided to face the Emperor. And in order to correct that mistake, William ended up sacrificing many
of his important subordinates.
Still, William did not give up.
He was in no position to do that.
“Anyone is fine! Stop Prince Leonard!”
“You are running away without a fight!? William!!”
“I don’t care about an individual battle! The important thing is for us to win the war!!”
Saying so, William turned back and flew away from Leonard.
Of course, Leo tried to chase him but the Dragon Knights who heard William’s command all headed to
obstruct him.
Using that time, William and Gordon left that place and headed for the reinforcement again.
However, a certain sound caused William to face despair.
“That sound…..!”
It was the sound of a horn.
Gordon’s reinforcements have no use blowing one.
After all, all the units were given instructions in advance.
They have no need to announce their presence to the other units.
“This is too early!? The nobles already made their move!?”
Below William.
Knights were pouring out from the west forest one after another.
———————————
“Whose army is that!?”
Johannes who heard the sound of the horn shouted so.
On the other hand, the Imperial Knight beside him squint his eyes and confirm the flag the knights are
bearing.
“Blue and white strips……..and bird with closed wings……..they are bearing Duke Kleinert’s sigil, Your
Majesty!!”
1773
“He came for us huh…….that changed the situation!”
“All men, rain down the enemy with arrows and magic. Don’t give them the chance to change
formation!”
Vin quickly issued an instruction.
The cavalry charge is certainly powerful but if they are intercepted with long-range attacks they will
suffer a heavy loss.
They can not waste the reinforcement that finally came for them.
Although his command has such an intention, they originally only have a small number and they can
not immediately switch to long-range attacks while charging at the enemy either.
That’s why the attacks from Johannes’s group could only partially block the enemy’s movement.
They have already started rearranging their formation with bows and arrows in hands.
If they can change to an intercepting formation, the power of the cavalry charge will be halved.
Vin tried to direct the attack to a location where their commander should be but the enemy’s
movement still doesn’t stop.
“Kuh……! We don’t have enough firepower huh!”
After he bitterly muttered so, countless arrows fell from the sky.
————————–
“Otou-sama!”
At the northern wall of the Imperial Capital.
Finne and Mia were standing on top of it.
They were intending to leave the battle at the middle layer to Lize and block the enemy’s escape route
to the north. However, beyond Finne’s expectation, enemy reinforcement has arrived. The Emperor
charged at them and her father appeared, leading the knights.”
She wanted time to process the situation.
However, the enemy has already changed formation to face her father’s army.
At this rate, a large number of arrows will rain down on Duke Kleinert’s army. Not everyone will die.
After all, it is natural for soldiers to die during a charging assault.
They do have shields to defend themselves but there will surely be deaths.
1774
Finne’s body started to shake.
She knew the knights of the Kleinert house well.
It’s not that she is sad because she knows them. No matter who it is, she will be sad if they die.
However, when the people she knows have to face death, she can’t help but feel this indescribable
horror.
She thought that she resolved herself for this.
Many people have already lost their lives. It would be selfish of her to not want the knights from her
territory alone to survive.
That’s why Finne didn’t say anything.
However.
“Leave this to me!”
“Mia-san……!?”
“I wanted to save this until the end but if it is for Finne-sama’s father then I have no regret!!”
Saying so, Mia took out a small arrow.
When that toy-like arrow was applied with magic power, it transformed into an elongated arrow.
Nocking that arrow on her bow, Mia aimed it high in the sky.
“All or nothing! Reach heaven and rain down! Magic bow secret move! Focused Scattered Rain of
Light!!”
Originally, Magic Bow Technique does not require chanting.
Albeit short, Mia just fired an arrow after a chant.
When the arrow of light rises high in the sky, it begins descending down toward the enemy army.
At the same time, the arrow of light began to scatter.
The scattered arrows rain down on the enemy like a rain of light.
The power of each shot is not that big.
However, if they hit, the enemy will not be able to shoot their arrows.
Their formation collapsed.
The enemy army is in chaos and the knights of Duke Kleinert rush into it and disperse the enemies.
1775
“Mia-san!”
“I did it but…..I’m dried now…….”
“Thank you very much!”
“You have already saved a lot of people, Finne-sama. That’s why it’s fine if you tell me if you want to
protect someone.”
“Mia-san…..”
Finne was so moved that she held Mia’s hand with both hands and shook it many times.
However, the sound of something that is impossible to be there reached the two’s ears.
A low and loud cry.
1776
SPT Chapter 270
the appreciation week finally end….. and it’s the final chapter of the month too lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
Malicious Smile
“That…..!”
That thing appeared after it broke through the cloud.
A giant creature with a body length of over 30 meters.
That giant creature is flying toward them through the sky.
Its cry can shake and instill fear in the heart of men.
“No way…….that thing, it can’t be……”
“Dragon…..!”
A was a dragon.
Moreover, it is not just one.
“There’s another…….”
“Red and Green Dragon…….and the Dragon Knights……..they are the United Kingdom’s Guardian Holy
Dragons…….!!”
The United Kingdom is a unique country.
It is an island country that resulted from the unification of various nations.
The most unique thing about the United Kingdom is their symbiotic relationship with the dragons.
No one knows when it begins but the United Kingdom has long been protected by the Three Colored
Dragons.
They do not attack the people of the United Kingdom nor do they fight with the other dragons in the
area.
However, they will not allow anyone to enter their territory without permission, whether it be a
monster or a human. The people that are allowed to enter the United Kingdom are only its citizens.
The people of the United Kingdom called them the Holy Dragons.
1777
However, even if they are dubbed as Holy Dragons by the United Kingdom, Dragons are still a threat to
other countries. After all, if someone accidentally enters the vast territory of the Three-Colored
Dragons, they will be mercilessly attacked.
Their territory extends out to the sea and many ships fell victim to them each year.
To enter the United Kingdom, you must travel there with someone originally from the United
Kingdom. Otherwise, you will become the dragons’ prey.
If the dragons are so dangerous to other nations, why haven’t they become the Adventurer Guild’s
subjugation target?
This is due to the agreement between the United Kingdom and the Adventurer Guild.
The Three Colored Dragons are under the United Kingdom’s jurisdiction thus there is no need for your
intervention. That was the reason they used to have the Adventurer Guild withdraw from the matter.
Even if the Guild went out of their way to subjugate them, they would unnecessarily antagonize the
United Kingdom, not to mention the massive damage that will ensue from the subjugation itself.
The United Kingdom also did not want the Adventurer Guild’s hostility either so they have made a
large donation to silent them.
That was how they became something that can not be subjugated but now those Dragons have
appeared in the sky above the Imperial Capital.
Finne and Mia were terrified at their arrival, however, there was someone who was delighted at that.
“We did it! Now our victory is assured!!”
Finne and Mia look back in the direction of that voice.
There, Zandra was joyfully looking at the sky.
“Eh, Desuwa.”
“Your Highness Zandra…….”
“I thought that I had to run but it seems that you ran out of luck first huh.”
Saying so, Zandra showed a triumphant smile.
With Gordon absent, the battle in the middle layer of the Imperial Capital turned to Lize’s favor. Seeing
that they are losing, Zandra tried to escape to the north gate.
Finne and Mia came to the north gate to cut off the enemy’s escape route but Mia who is their main
fighter can not fight properly now due to her previous attack.
Mia hid Finne behind her but Zandra only smiled as she stood in front of them.
1778
“Ara? It seems you have spent a lot of your magic power huh?”
“You truly are a hateful woman (Desuwa)………”
“AHaHaHaHaHa!!!! Finne! It seems you can’t rely on your escort anymore!”
Zandra looks at Finne and laughs.
However, there was no fear on Finne’s face.
Hating her confidence, Zandra frowned.
That is just her personality but she immediately regained her calm.
If she isn’t afraid of her then she just has to make it so.
“I’m looking forward to breaking that carefree expression of yours.”
“Finne-sama! I will buy you some time!”
“Ara? Running away now? I want to have a chat with you though.”
Saying so, Zuzan appears on top of a dragon.
Seeing that, Mia visibly frowned.
“It’s the original hateful woman!? Can you not pick a better time to show up!”
“It seems I’m good at making people feel that way about me. I’m glad that you are safe, Zandra.”
“Okaa-sama as well. How did you escape the castle?”
“Raphael was stalling Elna for me. I was able to get away during that time.”
“Raphael did? What about Alida?”
“We send a lot of soldiers to slow her down. Well, there will be a lot of casualties but I don’t care how
many of those soldiers die anyway.”
“That’s true.”
Finne let out a small sigh at Zandra who readily agreed to Zuzan’s words.
Like mother, like daughter.
People change depending on their environment.
It would be unavoidable for Zandra to turn out like this with Zuzan as her parent.
However, even knowing that, she can’t sympathize with Zandra.
1779
After all the damage caused by Zandra is too great.
“I just cornered Finne too, let’s capture her and use her as a hostage. We will surely be able to stall
Duke Kleinert.”
“Right. What about Father?”
“I can cast a curse on him to stop his movement. I won’t let him run away, obviously.”
Saying so, Zuzan and Zandra started to laugh.
During that time, Mia tried to urge Finne to escape but Finne did not move.
After all, she didn’t see the need to.
“Finne-sama.”
“It’s okay.”
“Ara? What is okay I wonder?”
“I and Mia-san are safe. Rather, shouldn’t you worry about your safety first?”
“Maybe you still don’t understand the situation yet? What kind of danger is there to us?”
“—Have you forgot how the Second Consort died? That was too unnatural, it was like someone
assassinated her, was it not? At least that’s what the rumors say. And the number one suspect was
you, Zuzan-sama.”
“And what do you want to say?”
“I do not know the truth of that incident but you have joined the rebellion. That’s why there is a
reason to cut you down now, no? That was my meaning. After all, the daughter of the Second Consort
is already here in the Imperial Capital.”
“Ha! Lizelotte is busy commanding the army! She can’t afford to chase us now.”
When Zandra said so.
The sound of someone walking up the stairs can be heard.
Zandra and Zuzan open their eyes wide at the sound of the army boots.
“Then I can just create a chance to chase you myself. If I can’t even do that then I wouldn’t be able to
become an Imperial Marshal in the first place. Still, thanks to your hateful laughter it was easy to find
you, you know. So you are here, you poisonous parasites of the Empire.”
“Lizelotte…….!”
1780
Zandra screams out Lize’s name
However, Zuzan didn’t seem to care much about her arrival.
“I never thought that you would come after us now but did you follow me?”
“Of course. I rushed over when I received the report that you ran away with the Dragon Knights. It is
too dangerous to leave a poisonous insect like you unchecked after all.”
“Ara Ara, aren’t your words a little too harsh for your stepmother.”
“I never thought of you as my stepmother. If you want to call yourself my mother then go to hell and
come back again.”
Saying so, Lize unsheathed her sword.
Zandra readied herself and watches her surroundings.
Lize’s troops only have a small number.
Judging that, Zandra tries to move but Zuzan holds Zandra back with her hand.
“It’s okay, Zandra.”
“Okaa-sama……”
“You want to kill me right, Lizelotte. Do you still think that I killed your mother?”
“Not just my mother, you had a hand in my brother’s death too right?”
“I am not involved with the assassination of the Crown Prince. I have no motivation in the first place.
His Majesty personally launched an investigation and there was no evidence of foul play you know.”
“That’s exactly why I suspect you. Your forbidden spells are the most suspicious.”
“My spells can not kill anyone in a single blow. I can weaken them but I can not assassinate them. Well,
I can tell you this one truth. [It was not me that killed the Crown Prince].”
What she denied was the assassination of the Crown Prince.
However, she was accused of two crimes.
Then what about the other crime that she didn’t deny?
“……..Zuzan!”
“Certainly, I’m involved in your mother’s death. No, I could say that I killed her myself. I’ve always
wanted to kill that woman after all.”
Zuzan said with a malicious smile on her face.
1781
SPT Chapter 271
Monthly Patreon Shoutout!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
AlfonzoM6
Main Heroine Tier
Jerry Gergich
Digitalpanic
Tyler Fukuda
Shanks
Sean N
Sub Heroine Tier
Artaril
Stefania Barbieri
Anon A Moose
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Tinsoldaat
Knifewolf
kei
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Nelson N
Thank you you all for the support!! I do feel bad that I don’t have much to offer my patrons but if you
have any suggestions do send it over in the comment or message me in Patreon. Still, with the main
1782
projects right now, I can’t take on any lengthy new project so if you have a short series or short story
you want to read, we can have a vote and I will translate it.
-Mr.Graverobber
Mother and Daughter
“—-So it was you after all.”
Lize muttered at Zuzan’s confession.
At this point, this is not surprising.
It has long been speculated among the members of the Imperial Family that it was her doing.
Leo had stopped Lize in the past since there was no evidence. The person he wanted to protect was
not Zuzan but Lize.
If she had gone on to kill Zuzan without any evidence back then, even if it’s Lize, she would not be let
off without any punishment.
That’s was why Leo stopped her.
But right now he probably will not get in her way.
With Zuzan’s confession, Lize’s desire to kill her is now justified.
“Give me your head. As an Imperial Marshal, I will execute you on the charge of assassinating an
Imperial Consort.”
“Oh, scary. But did you not listen to what I said? I was merely involved.”
“It’s the same thing.”
“It’s not the same. I guess I will explain it to you then. Certainly, your Mother, the Second Consort died
because of my curse. But it was her that directed that curse toward herself.”
“What……?”
Lize squints her eyes.
Zuzan didn’t seem like she was lying.
Seeing Lize, who seemed like she was about to lung at her, stopped in her tracks, Zuzan smiles.
“The person that I wanted to kill was that woman who received all the love from His Majesty. I wanted
to monopolize him all to myself but there was no merit in killing her. It would be different if His
1783
Majesty would turn to me after that woman dies. Instead, the ones I wanted to kill were you and
Christa.”
“Just how far have you………!”
“His Majesty has three daughters! If two of them die, his love will be concentrated on his only
remaining daughter! Zandra is my daughter. She is someone who inherited all of me! If he loves
Zandra then it means that he loves me as well. That’s why you and Christa were in my way. Receiving
a curse at a young age would put Christa in danger. As a general, if you enter the battlefield in a
weakened state, your life will be at risk. That’s why I cast a curse onto you two!! But that woman!! She
used a magic tool to concentrate all the curse onto herself! She probably never thought that it was my
curse! Such a fool! She should have known what would happen to herself if she took on a curse with
her weak constitution! She should have just gone to His Majesty! It was all because she tried to solve it
all by herself! I have never laughed as hard as that day! Do you understand now!? Your mother—–she
committed suicide.”
“!!”
Lize kicks the ground and starts running toward Zuzan.
The distance between them immediately shrunken and Lize’s sword is within the distance it can reach
Zuzan.
However.
“You really are a fool. Just like your mother.”
“What…..?”
Seeing Zuzan’s smile, Lize glances down.
A huge magic circle was deployed on the ground.
“It’s an immobilizing curse. It utilizes all kinds of effects you know. It’s my best work. Do enjoy it to
your heart’s content.”
“Kuh!”
The light glows from the magic circle up toward the sky.
Zuzan was delighted to see Lize get swallowed by it.
“Got her! Now Lizelotte can’t move with Okaa-sama’s curse! Whatever I should do with her!”
What should she do with Lize who got immobilized?
Zandra ponders so in high spirits.
1784
Seeing Zandra like that, Zuzan bitterly smiled at her like she was thinking what a troublesome
daughter she has.
That’s why.
She couldn’t react to Lize who leaped out of the pillar of light.
“Eh…..?”
Sound of the air being cut and the blood splash.
Zuzan realized that she was cut when she saw her fresh blood scattered in the air.
Being slashed upward from her torso to her chest, Zuzan was trying to find the answer to the
question.
What.
It was a meaningless question during a battle.
Question after question float to her mind. How to save herself. How could Lize move. For a warrior,
any questions besides those would be meaningless.
However, Zuzan is not a warrior.
That’s why she cast her gaze at Lize’s body while feeling the heat from her slashed wound.
There’s nothing out of place at all. It doesn’t look like she is enduring the effect of the curse either.
No matter how she looked, she couldn’t think of any possibility besides that her curse was prevented
somehow.
While the immobilizing curse’s only effect is to render the target immobile, it holds tremendous
power. That curse was something that should be able to immobilize the target for a few days with a
direct hit.
She had intentionally provoked Lize so that she would step into her trap without noticing it.
Then how…..
Zuzan desperately searched for the answer.
Then, she finally noticed a cracked pendant on Lize’s chest.
“Magic…..tool……?”
“It’s a dwarf’s special magic seal. It can redirect the magic power that aims toward me onto itself. Even
if it was a forbidden spell, it still used magic power. It’s a shame isn’t it.”
1785
“Why…..do you have something like that……….”
Zuzan staggers backward and asks such a question.
The question itself is meaningless.
However, Lize answers it with a quiet but powerful voice.
“I have brothers and sisters who wish me safe. I have a stupid man who can sacrifice anything for my
sake. I have subordinates who adore me. I can’t say I like wearing a defensive magic tool like this but
my life is no longer mine alone. When it was expected that something will happen in the Imperial
Capital, I have already thought that I will get the chance to fight you. That’s why I wore it.”
“Kuh…..!”
Hearing that, Zuzan tried to use her left hand to cast a curse on Lize.
However, Lize immediately cut her hand off.
Zuzan’s left hand flew through the air.
Seeing that, Zuzan loudly screamed due to the pain and shock.
“AAHHHHHHHH!!!! LIZELOTTE!!!!! I WILL NEVER FORGIVE YOU!!”
“Don’t be stupid. The unforgivable one here is clearly you.”
Saying so, Lize slashes at Zuzan’s legs and stabs her sword into Zuzan’s right shoulder.
Then when Zuzan’s knees touched the ground, she pulled her sword out and put it on Zuzan’s neck.
“I don’t think any amount of torture will fit the crime you did but……..my mother wouldn’t want me to
do that. I will only settle with this much.”
“Z, Zandra……help….me……”
“O, Okaa-sama……”
Zuzan turns to Zandra for help.
However.
“Don’t just get killed now! You made me lose my chance to escape!
Useless fool!!”
“Zan…..dra……?”
“Lizelotte! The one that you are bearing a grudge against is only Okaa-sama right! Just let me go!”
1786
“……betraying each other once you have no use for one another huh. You two really are mother and
child.”
Even her own mother is a tool.
Zuzan shed tears upon realizing her daughter’s thoughts.
Leaving how Zandra feels about Zuzan aside, Zandra is everything for Zuzan.
It was because she loved her that she tried to get Zandra on the throne.
Even so.
“I, I have gone so far…….just for your sake……”
“Shut up! You only wanted me on the throne for yourself right! All you ever did was project yourself
onto me because you were not loved by Father! Did you know how annoying it is! I am me!”
“How….how can a child abandon their own parent……..help me! Just help me!!”
“After you have deceived and abandoned others all your life, you are still begging for someone else to
help you. Calling you an insect would be too much of a praise. Go and apologize to my mother in the
other world.”
Saying so, Lize horizontally swings her sword.
With a sharp cutting sound, Zuzan’s head parted from her body.
Seeing that, Zandra backs away.
Judging from Lize’s eyes, she knows that she is next.
The distance is too close to use magic. There is no doubt that she will be cut down before she gets the
chance to do anything.
That’s why Zandra turned her left hand toward Finne as her last resort.
“If you kill me I will kill Finne! If you abandon her it will tarnish the honor of an Imperial Marshal
right!!”
“We soldiers do not care about honor. The only thing we care about is how to serve the country or
how to win the war. You mistook your opponent.”
“Y, You can’t fool me with that! Don’t move! Don’t you dare move! I will really kill Finne okay! No! I
will not kill her! I will mess up that beautiful face and make her hideous! Hey! Start getting scared and
scream for help already!”
“Please don’t worry about me, Lizelotte-sama.”
1787
“What…..! If you want to ruin your life that much then I will happily oblige!!”
Saying so, Zandra shoots magic at Finne.
Mia stood in the way to cover for her but before the magic could reach Finne, it was blocked by a
barrier.
An extremely thin layer of barrier.
You would never notice unless you pay close attention but Lize was aware of its presence.
“Ever since I got here there was always a barrier protecting Finne. Someone unfamiliar with magic
would probably miss it though.”
“No way….such a barrier…..who……?”
“You don’t know that? Fool. To think that you didn’t notice even though you were living inside the
Imperial Capital. You seem to be convinced that the victory is yours when the Dragons arrived but the
people of the Imperial Capital have the opposite idea. When those dragons showed up, it was already
decided that the victory would belong to the Empire.”
“No way……that’s not possible……the Holy Dragons are not subjugation targets! The Guild
Headquarters will not stay silent if they are shot down!”
“You don’t understand what an adventurer is. They are different from us. Just give up. You can’t win
this. I will not kill you. Someone will have to take the responsibility for all this after all.”
“No way…..NO!! I won’t accept this! Make it stop! I don’t want to drink the Emperor Poison Wine!”
Saying so, Zandra points her hand at herself.
However, before she could do anything, Lize closed the distance and grabbed her neck.
“With the focus is ruined, a mage can’t cast magic. And that’s especially true for someone who can only
use magic like you.”
“Ag, Ugh……”
“Sleep. Letting you kill yourself would be a waste.”
Saying so, Lize knocked Zandra out.
Duke Kleinert’s army’s charge was successful but they are struggling because the appearance of the
dragons allowed the enemy to regain their morale.
“Father! I’m so scared that I might vomit my stomach out right now!”
1788
“Swallow it down and keep fighting!”
Duke Kleinert scolded his son.
He then slashes at the enemy soldier and looks up at the dragons in the sky.
“Besides, do those Dragons look that scary to you?”
“They are obviously scary right! Those things! No one in their right mind wouldn’t be scared of
those!!”
“You fool. You have already sold a fight to a monster that treats those things like lizards before right”
“Tha, that is……”
“Hmph, don’t worry. Right now—–that monster is on our side.”
Saying so, Duke Kleinert looked at his son.
His body was covered in a thin film-like something.
Not just his son but him and all the knights of the Duchy of Kleinert as well.
Individual barriers.
There are only a few people on the continent who can provide a proper barrier for this number of
people.
And there is no such person in the United Kingdom.
After all, the United Kingdom is a country protected by Dragons. They do not know of the existence
that went far beyond the human norm.
“To think that they would readily hand the opportunity to participate in this war to someone that was
already eager for one. If they bring out such nonstandard existences like those dragons, it’s obvious
that our side will have the opportunity to do the same.”
With that said, Duke Kleinert looks up at the sky of the Imperial Capital.
A mage clad in black robe and a gleaming silver mask is descending down through the cloud.
1789
SPT Chapter 272
New kofi goal just reset and some already bought me a pizza!! Thank you Cooked Rice and another
donor whose name shall not be said, like seriously, you didn’t put your name there……
-Mr.Graverobber
To Destroy the Arrogants
Dragons are a non-standard existence.
Naturally, the people of the Empire were surprised at their appearance but it was not just them that
was surprised.
“HaHaHaHa!!! I never thought that you would lend me the Holy Dragons! That’s the United Kingdom
for you! We won!! William!!”
“I…..didn’t hear anything about this.”
The two dragons that appeared in front of them were definitely the Guardian Holy Dragons of the
United Kingdom.
The name of the Red Holy Dragon is Blood and the name of the Green Holy Dragon is Leaf.
Dragons can be ranked into young dragons, adult dragons, and elder dragons. For dragons that
possess a long life span, getting older means that they will become more powerful.
And in their long life, these two dragons have always been with the United Kingdom.
Moreover, with the King’s request, these dragons can be sent out to another land.
However, William did not know that his father has sent them out.
“Your Highness William! Are you safe!”
“Why did you bring them here!? Who ordered this!?”
William asked the Dragon Knight that arrived with the two dragons.
Only the King can send the two dragons into another country.
However, he didn’t think that the King would order such a thing without knowing the situation on-
site.
“Eh? It was His Majesty’s instruction, Your Highness……..we were told to bring them here to protect
the Imperial Capital. We have been on standby inside the Dominion until now.”
1790
“What…..? Then why did you bring them here now!!??”
“No, that’s……..we received the information that the Imperial Capital will soon be in our control………”
“Who did you get that information from…..? I haven’t sent that kind of information out yet!!”
“Th, That shouldn’t be the case, Your Highness! The ambassador of Sokol Empire that was stationed at
the Dominion said that it was Your Highness William who sent out the information! They also told us
that Sokol is preparing to join us as well!”
“I never contacted any ambassador of Sokol!!”
“Eh……?”
They were played.
However, this is no time to worry about who and how.
Right now, the problem is that the Holy Dragons have shown up at this timing.
“Take them back immediately…….”
“Yes? We have already brought them here but Your Highness is not going to use them?”
“Like hell, we can use them now! Hurry up and take them back! We still haven’t finished occupying the
Imperial Capital yet! We are still on the side of the invader! It will be different if Gordon already
claimed the throne and put it as a request! If we mobilize the Holy Dragons right now we will turn the
adventurers into our enemies!!”
“Wh, why are you getting angry, Your Highness? The Holy Dragons of our country are the target of fear
to the Adventurer Guild. Shouldn’t we simply crush them if they choose to oppose us?”
Ignorance.
That was what hurt William the most.
While grinding his teeth, William felt the burning anger inside him.
Because the United Kingdom is a country protected by the Holy Dragons, their people have a strong
faith in them. When the Adventurer Guild agreed to accept the Holy Dragons, it appeared to their
citizens that the guild is scared of their Guardians.
The United Kingdom is an island nation. There will not be any monsters that are stronger than the
dragons appear within their territory in the first place. That’s why the Holy Dragons were recognized
as the strongest creature by the people of the United Kingdom.
That is why they strongly believe that the SS-rank adventurers the Adventurer Guild is so proud of can
not hope to defeat their Guardian Holy Dragons.
1791
It was overconfidence born from ignorance. Thanks to their overflowing confidence, they believed the
words of an ambassador from another country and nonchalantly crossed the border in high spirits.
Thinking that they can beat anything that comes their way, they advanced without confirming the
truth.
However, William knew.
“The SS-rank adventurers……can defeat even Ancient Dragons……”
Elder Dragons and Ancient Dragons are both dragons but there is a distinctive difference between the
two.
In ancient times, the only dragons that existed in this area were all Ancient Dragons. Eventually, as
time went on, the descendants of the Ancient Dragons started to adapt and become creatures that can
remain active without entering a long dormancy period. Those dragons are the dragons they know
today.
Unlike the Elder Dragon, Ancient Dragons are powerful dragons that retain their ancient bloodline.
In a word, Ancient Dragons are the royalty of dragons.
And in this country, there is an adventurer who made a name for himself by subjugating one.
The mage who based himself inside the Imperial Capital that possesses the ability to travel anywhere
inside the Empire in an instant.
The reason he didn’t show up until now is that he is aware that he is a balance breaker.
However, the United Kingdom has sent out its Guardian Holy Dragons for an aggression purpose. Even
if they didn’t intend to do that, this development made it look so.
“What’s wrong? William. What are you so afraid of?”
“Of course, I am afraid! The Wizard of Silver Destruction himself is here in this Imperial Capital you
know!?”
“He won’t get involved. The Guardian Holy Dragons have been excluded from the Adventurer Guild’s
subjugation targets right!”
“There’s no way he would care about that! When we invaded the Kingdom, we also faced an SS-rank
adventurer! Let me make this clear! They do not care about the agreement made by the Guild
Headquarters!! Those people only have one rule! They only act for the people!!”
They treat all monsters that threaten human lives as enemies.
And now the Dragons have appeared, threatening the lives of the citizens of the Imperial Capital.
There is no reason for him not to move.
1792
Thinking so, William sensed a foreboding premonition from the sky.
An indescribable feeling of oppression. His body becomes tense and begins to tremble.
The dragon he was riding was also beginning to get restless.
Then.
“He’s coming……..!”
The cloud was parted and a black mage appeared with gleaming silver light.
It was as if he was a god.
While thinking so, William felt that his heart was shattered.
To be honest, if Mia didn’t move, I would use an illusion and try to intervene but I am glad that I didn’t
have to do that.
I was surprised when the Dragons appeared.
However, I can’t just stare at it. When the Dragons appeared, I set a barrier for Duke Kleinert’s knights
and Finne’s group.
The rebels in the middle layer of the Imperial Capital have already routed and there is almost no battle
inside the capital itself. Only Elna and Raphael are locked in a fierce battle but Elna should be fine by
herself.
The castle is also being taken back by General Estman and his subordinates under Alida’s command.
The battle has moved outside the Imperial Capital.
And the normal battle has already shifted to a non-standard one.
“It looks like the United Kingdom’s internal workings don’t function properly too huh.”
Saying so, I opened a small transfer gate and put my hand through it.
The destination is Gramp’s collection box. It was where the silver mask was originally stored at.
It was a collection of treasured items that can make any mages drool.
From that collection, I took out a bracelet.
Several jewels were attached on it.
It hasn’t been long since the battle with the Spirit Turtle. Even though my magic power still hasn’t fully
recovered from that yet, I crushed Grimore’s base and spent a lot of it in this rebellion.
1793
Honestly speaking, I am scraping by right now.
Saying that the sky’s the limit is in the end just an expression but it is certainly true that humans can
push their magic power beyond their limits.
As Leo did in the Southern Incident, I too can do it if I want to. However, when I do that, I will not be
able to move for a while.
Getting caught as Silver would be undesirable. However, the amount of magic power required for me
to push through now is huge.
This is a great opportunity I can interfere with the war.
It would be too wasteful to let it go. Besides, a part of me also wanted to join in.
That’s why I decided to rely on a magic tool.
The bracelet will take over the consumption of magic power. For normal mages, it would be a
powerful auxiliary item but in my case, this will only be used as a disposable magic tool.
I don’t want to use it if possible since Gramp will get angry but I don’t have time to think up another
way.
“Well, let’s close the curtain on this.”
Muttering so, I put on the bracelet and started chanting.
[[I am one who knows the principle of silver・I am one who has been chosen as the true silver]]
[[Silver star of the star ocean・Illuminate the earth and frighten the heaven]].
[[Silver Brilliance is the truth of god・That brilliant silver is the divine protection of heaven]].
[[The silent flash of silver・The brilliance of silver is eternal]].
[[O silver light, dwell in my hand・And destroy the Arogants——]]
The chanting is over.
The only thing left to do is descending down and release it.
1794
SPT Chapter 273
Special thanks to Rector and Lessdark for the coffee. Extra chap will be next week since we are
finishing this arc on 275 tho.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Man who doesn’t know when to give up
As I slowly descended down, a silver sphere appeared between my hands.
If I crush it, Silvery Ray will be unleashed.
However, someone asked me to wait.
“W, Wait! Silver! This is only a misunderstanding! We have no intention of using the Holy Dragon for
invasion!”
“You are saying that even after they have crossed the border and fly right over to the Imperial Capital?
Prince William.”
“But no damage has been done yet! I will have them withdrawn immediately! So please just wait!!”
“You are telling me to not subjugate them because they still haven’t done anything [Yet]? Sorry, but
most of the monsters that we adventurers subjugated were monsters that still haven’t done anything
[Yet] either. If it poses a threat to the people we will subdue it. That’s how us adventurers do things. It
would be too late once the damage is done after all.”
Hearing my argument, William’s face distorted for a moment.
He probably thought that he couldn’t convince me with words.
However, William continued speaking to me.
He really is great. Even though he knows that the situation is hopeless for him, he still chooses to try
and convince me huh.
“Th, the Holy Dragons are not just any monster! They are animals!”
“For the United Kingdom alone that is. This is the Empire. In the Empire, It’s obvious that I would treat
the Lizards that will not show any mercy on anyone aside from the people of the United Kingdom as
vermins, right?”
“Please, stay your hand…….I won’t let them do anything…….so…….”
1795
“If you weren’t a prince of the United Kingdom, if those lizards were not called the Holy Dragons, and
if it were not for the rebellion in the Imperial Capital, I would have been more flexible……..but it is
already too late. Don’t you think that it is too unreasonable for you to ask me to let them go without
doing anything after you have cooperated in starting this rebellion and sent those dragons here?”
“I understand your reason. You are entirely correct…..but these are the Guardian Deities of my
country…….so please, let them go…….!”
“Your country has already negotiated with the Adventurer Guild to have them excluded from the
subjugation targets right? No one would raise a complaint if they only protect the United Kingdom.
The problem here is that you have brought out your Guardian Deities to your enemy’s land.
Everything would have been fine if you keep those important dragons of yours inside your country.”
Saying so, I crush the silver sphere.
However, there was another person who tried to stop me.
“SILVER!! DON’T YOU UNDERSTAND!?”
“Understand what? Prince Gordon.”
“What you are about to do! There is an agreement between the United Kingdom and the Adventurer
Guild that the Holy Dragons can not become subjugation targets for the Adventurer Guild! If you kill
them here, the Guild will not be silent! That should pose a problem for you who belong to the Guild
right!!”
“And I was wondering what you wanted to say……..Prince Gordon. Could you not look down on us
Adventurers so much? The arrangement between the Guild and the United Kingdom? That kind of
thing has already long become irrelevant. Even if they are the Holy Dragons for the people of the
United Kingdom, they are only evil dragons for the invaded country. The arrangement with the guild
only applied when their scope of activity remained only within the United Kingdom.”
“Do you think that we will accept such a reason! The agreement they made wasn’t that detailed in the
first place! The only thing that was agreed upon was that the Holy Dragons will not become
subjugation targets! If you put them down here you will break the Guild’s agreement you know!”
“Hmph, I see. So? What about it?”
“What!?”
Gordon opened his eyes wide.
Such a reaction, it’s obvious that he was looking down on me.
It’s a big mistake if you think that an adventurer will stop just because you bring up the rule.
“Adventurers are being dubbed as outlaws by many. And that is true. We adventurers do not care
about the rules! Obviously, we would leave things like that for later! Right now, the only thing that
1796
matters is that there is a monster threatening the lives of the people! Know how foolish it is to bring
up rules to an adventurer in such a situation! There is only one rule that we adventurers value! It is for
the people! That’s the only rule! If you brought up other rules besides that we only have one thing to
say back to you! —–to hell with it!”
Saying so, I proceed to crush the silver sphere with both hands.
Then.
[[Silvery ・ Ray]]
I recite the magic’s name.
Spheres of light float around me.
The number is seven.
Their targets are the red and green dragons.
They probably felt the threat toward them as well.
They are preparing to fire their breath to resist.
However, no resistance matters before the silver light.
“I shall praise your will to stand with the United Kingdom until the end. You both are admirable for
not running away.”
With that said, I point my arm at the two dragons who chose to resist until the end. Accordingly, the
silver lights shot out.
The heads of the two dragons that were trying to release their breath disappeared and their bodies
powerlessly fell to the ground.
I catch their bodies with a barrier.
“Blood…….Leaf…….”
William muttered as he stared at the corpses of the two dragons.
For William who has grown up with the dragons since a young age and became known as the Dragon
Prince, the dragons are probably special existences to him.
It’s a pity. If I can let them go I would have done it.
Even those two dragons possessed the choice to run away. They are dragons. They should know well
the difference between our power.
Still, they chose to confront me.
1797
Just as William thinks that they are special, William and the people of the United Kingdom must have
been special to them as well.
With this, the United Kingdom has lost two out of three of their Guardian Holy Dragons. It is up to
them to decide whether to continue the fight or to quietly withdraw but it is certain that their national
power has greatly diminished.
Two other countries are our enemies.
That was why it was necessary to subdue the dragons even though I didn’t want to.
Using the magic power from the bracelet, I create two giant transfer gates. Then, at the destination of
the first two gates, I created more gates beyond that.
The destinations of the gates that were connected like a tunnel are the northern and the western
borders of the Empire.
At the northern border, the Dominion army is fighting a fierce battle with the Northern Border
Defense Force. The Northern Border Defense Force is having a hard time holding them back. It seems
that the United Kingdom has also joined in plus there are many of Gordon’s supporters in the north.
They may have some kind of plan in place there.
At the western border, the Kingdom Army has mustered up a large army. They appeared to be waiting
for the moment to attack.
I address those two armies.
“Commanders of the invading armies of the United Kingdom, the Dominion, and the Kingdom, can you
hear my voice? This is SS-rank adventurer, Silver.”
The Dominion army at the northern border that was strengthening their offensive clearly weakens.
Seeing the transfer gates that opened up in the sky, they seem to understand that the voice’s identity
was genuine.
On the other hand, the Kingdom’s army on the western border grew restless.
“Forgive me for speaking to you in this way. I have an important announcement to make. In fact, there
was a fool who tried to invade the Imperial Capital using dragons. The use of monsters in war is
synonymous with declaring war on us adventurers. In response to such a situation, I have moved to
protect the Empire as an SS-rank adventurer. I am sorry but I’d like both armies to cease actions for
the time being. If you continue your attack——I will take that as your show of support for the army
that mobilized monsters for aggression purposes, making you my subjugation target.”
The moment I said that, I send the silver spheres through the transfer gates.
The silver spheres of light float a little above the two armies.
1798
“This is not an order. Only a request. However……if you choose to ignore it, I will take the appropriate
action. At least cease activities for a week. In the meantime, the turmoil inside the Empire will subside.
If you can not make the decision then you should consult your kings. If your kings are wise, they will
not order you to press the attack. However, if your king is likely to make the wrong decision, you may
relay this message to him. [No matter which country it is, this transfer gate can be opened right inside
your castle].”
After I said that, I gradually closed the transfer gates.
At the same time, the jewels on the bracelet broke. So it ended up as disposable after all huh.
Well, it can’t be helped. If I don’t stop the invasion, the Empire will be shaken by the time we can put
the turmoil here under control.
The Adventurer Guild will tell me that I went too far but since they will complain that I took down the
Holy Dragons anyway, I better see this through.
As an SS-rank adventurer, there are some things that can only be done by Silver.
However, the opposite also holds true.
I can say it myself but I don’t think that Gordon his subordinates will notice. For them, Silver should be
an unstoppable existence.
“Impossible…..that’s impossible……my rebellion……why…..? Why did you get in the way? Why are
there people like you in this world…..? Why…..? Why, why, WHY……..”
“Gordon! Hold yourself together!!”
However, there are things that even Silver is now allowed to do.
If there was a person on the enemy side who noticed then it would only be William.
There is one flaw in my action this time. If William uses that, he can open a loophole in this situation.
It is a narrow flaw but will he notice it?
Thinking so, I look at William.
“Silver……I want you to tell me one thing…..if we do as you say……you will not lay your hands on us
right?”
Saying so, William resolutely looks at me.
Seeing him like that, I narrowed my eyes.
So he noticed it after all huh. The shackle that can bind Silver.
“It was your army that used those monsters for war though?”
1799
“That’s what you one-sidedly said about us. I had been denying your accusation and the fact remained
that the two dragons had not done anything yet. Both the fact that they provided any advantage to my
army or how harmful it will be to the Imperial Army, those things are only your conjecture. I will not
say anything regarding how you have murdered our two dragons. However, if you are going to use
that excuse to attack us, it will only be a false accusation.”
“Hou? Are you going to use that reason to run away now?”
“It might be true that you have the authority to subjugate monsters that might harm the people but
you have no say when an army might harm them. If you are going to use such a reason to destroy my
army, then by that logic, you will have the authority to eradicate all the armies in this continent, no?”
Against monsters, Silver’s authority is absolute. This is because of my position as an SS-rank
adventurer, the highest peak of the adventurers.
However, there are many restrictions placed on dealing with humans.
There is no problem as long as it ends with a threat. After all, monsters can not be reasoned with.
However, if I attack the army directly, it would be like lumping them together with the monsters.
As William says, his army did not fight together with the dragons. If an SS-rank adventurer directly
attacks the army in that situation, this case will get even more complicated and the question will be
about whether Silver can be trusted or not.
In the end, it will be the other SS-rank adventurers who come to subjugate me.
William’s reasoning could be said to only be sophism but he did poke where it hurt.
As expected of him. I wonder how many will notice the shackle that can bind Silver and even use it to
bargain like this.
Just earlier, I defeated the dragons while saying to hell with the rules.
I can’t be surprised now when I am faced with the same tactic.
In this place, my power is absolute.
And William chose to face me head-on.
The name of the Dragon Prince really can’t be looked down upon.
“……Prince William. You are still planning to fight?”
“Of course. We can not go back anymore.”
“You have already lost two Holy Dragons. Even so, you still won’t stop?”
“It was because I lost them that I can’t give up. If I can not get something of equal value to their
lives……then what did those two die for?”
1800
“………”
“I am not holding a grudge against you. You have only played your part. We also bear the fault here. I
admit that. But giving up is an entirely different story. The United Kingdom must get something from
this! For that purpose, Gordon is absolutely necessary for us! You have no ground to touch him! You
got that right!? Silver!!”
Even though I have shown him that much power, he still hasn’t given up and tried everything he could
huh.
After seeing my attack, Gordon’s face went blank.
He probably couldn’t accept that his rebellion has ended in a failure.
Perhaps, he no longer knows who is going to bear the flag of this conflict anymore.
No, it is pretty clear huh. Gordon himself is only the flag and William is the flag bearer.
Right now, their position is clear.
Just why this man has to be on Gordon’s side.
It’s regrettable. Truly regrettable.
“……So be it. This is out of my hand.”
I answered William so.
In truth, since the bracelet has already broken, it will be difficult for me to fight right now.
This time I used up too much magic power. Even though I have limited myself to use only the
minimum amount while I was moving behind the scenes, I ended up having to exert myself and even
relied on a magic tool.
My remaining magic power is enough to defeat William and his men but that’s it. It would be tough for
me to capture them or prevent them from escaping.
One could say that this is the moment the tide has turned.
I managed to stop the movement of the enemy armies and put an end to the rebellion.
I wanted to take care of Gordon now but that wasn’t the job for Silver.
Below us, Lize-aneue has already organized a pursuit unit.
William and Gordon will probably have to desperately run away from them after this.
However, William’s eyes are not dead. I’m sure that he will do everything he can to ensure Gordon’s
survival. His eyes possess the strength that made me think that way.
1801
He really is a man who doesn’t know when to give up, seriously.
But, I do not hate that.
Let’s yield to his stubbornness this time and quietly withdraw.
“Well played. Prince William.”
“All troops withdraw!! We will retreat to the north and regroup!!”
After he commanded so, the rebels began to withdraw all at once.
1802
SPT Chapter 274
Special Thanks to Mr.Doubletap(nicknamed) for the new coffee!! hehehehe that’s what you get!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Sinking to the Darkness
While watching the withdrawing rebel force, I transferred away.
The destination is behind my father.
“That was quite a disaster. Your Majesty.”
“Don’t be so tough on me now. Silver.”
Father sighed at me from on top of his horse.
His sight still set on the retreating Dragon Knights.
“The rebels bear the fault for this incident. They were the ones who started this after all. Still, it is also
the emperor’s responsibility for your inability to suppress them. It was because you placed too much
trust in your army that it came to this. Most soldiers joined the army because they were the third son
of a noble family or because they lack prospects for the future. What they seek is achievements and
that makes them easier to get lured to the other side.”
“That hurts my ears. It’s certainly my fault for neglecting them.”
“Then be more careful next time. I have bought you some time. The rest is in your hand.”
“I thank you for your help. But……what will become of your position inside the guild? You will be
criticized if you side too much with the Empire you know.”
“I don’t care about such a thing. I just helped you because I need an emperor that thinks of the people.
At least you are still better than that Third Prince. I do hope that you will not prove me wrong.”
Saying so, I turned my eyes away from Father.
Father’s responsibility is great. Obviously, such responsibility came with being an emperor.
However, there are some parts that I can sympathize with him.
Three years ago, when my eldest brother died. My father was preparing to step down and hand the
throne to him.
1803
In other words, he was already planning to retire since back then. However, his schedule was
unexpectedly changed.
Many of my eldest brother’s followers were already holding important posts in the country. When
they left after his death, Father had to rebuild the whole system.
That’s why he didn’t choose to utilize expansionist policy. Just like how Lize-aneue was stationed at
the eastern border, he placed many trustworthy generals on each border to strengthen our defense
and focus on foreign policy with the help from the Prime Minister and Eric.
The military regarded such policy as weak. However, it was certainly his only option back then.
If my eldest brother is still alive.
In the end, we would all just circle back to that.
But such a thing is meaningless. After all, he is already gone.
However, that is also a chance. A turning point.
“I will try to answer your expectations then. Within my ability that is.”
“Then you can use the corpses of those Holy Dragons as you like. You can sell it to the United Kingdom
or you can strip materials from them as well. The Adventurer Guild should be able to act as your
intermediary. The fund from that should help rebuild the Imperial Capital.”
“That was why you killed them?”
“It is one of the reasons. But if I only neutralize them, it will set a precedent. I don’t want them to think
that it’s okay to use such monsters in war again.”
I could have spared the Holy Dragons.
However, even thinking of stopping the enemy army at the border or how it will affect the future,
there is little merit in that.
We should be able to keep the United Kingdom in check with the Holy Dragons’ materials as our
leverage.
If they lost their Three-Colored Dragons then it would be one thing. However, they still have one left.
Even if we put the dragons’ material on the negotiation table, it’s clear that they will try to come at us
again.
Since they have sent out only two, they should have been more or less prepared to lose them. Even so,
the United Kingdom desires the fertile land on the mainland.
“You also have a hard time huh.”
1804
“Not as much as you. I will not be around for a while. So don’t count on me.”
“Of course. A country’s business should be handled by the country itself. Sorry that I got you involved
in all this.”
“If you want to apologize, do it to the people and make this place a better country. That’s your job as
an emperor.”
Saying so, I opened the transfer gate and left.
The destination is the inn where Sebas is waiting for me.
There, I sunk down on the bed immediately after I changed my clothes.
“You look tired, sir.”
“Well, yeah…..I used too much magic power.”
“Then should you not prevent Prince Gordon from escaping now?”
“You think he will be harder to take down once he gets away? The problem here is that such a thing
should not be left to Silver. With my current magic power, I can’t capture him while guaranteeing his
life. The only thing I am capable of now is killing him. For Gordon, getting killed by Silver might be
salvation instead. Even without the complaints from the guild or the other SS-rank adventurers, it
would be a bad idea to kill Gordon as Silver………he needs to be the vessel that bears the grudges of the
people in the Imperial Capital. Whether it be killing him or capturing him, it would be best for
someone who belongs to the Empire to do it.”
The traitor that caused so much damage was killed by an adventurer.
The people of the Imperial Capital will not be satisfied with that.
They might be fine if it’s Silver but they will have some dissatisfaction within themselves somewhere.
“Besides……if Silver takes care of everything for them, the people’s hearts will be distanced from the
Imperial Family. If the people start saying that they want Silver as their Emperor then I don’t know for
what purpose I have been fighting for.”
“That is certainly true. Even though you have moved to prevent the destruction of the Empire, you will
end up splitting it up instead. Forgive me, sir. I have overstepped my bounds.”
“It’s okay……it is true that killing him is an easier way. With a small number of men under her
command, even Lize-aneue wouldn’t be able to hunt him down. Gordon’s force will surely recover in
the north. The time to take him down will be the next battle. There will be more sacrifices……I know
that well. But I can’t stop now. If we can defeat Gordon, Leo will be on par with Eric. No, we have to
use this chance to overtake him. From now on it will no longer be only a succession war. The
difference between us and Eric will not be overcome so easily. This is the fastest way.”
“Is it not too hasty, sir?”
1805
“William is an honorable warrior. A person like that recognized Gordon as his friend. In other words,
Gordon used to be someone who was deserving of his recognition. But what has become of him now?
I thought that he only showed his ugly side to us, his family but that’s not it. With this incident, I am
convinced. There is certainly something strange going on in this succession war. There’s something
lurking behind the scenes. But I can’t say what it is for sure. That’s why I have to end this as quickly as
possible.”
When I said that, intense drowsiness attacked me.
The backlash finally came huh.
When you spend a large amount of magic power, your body will seek sleep to recover it.
This is especially true for those with more magic power than others.
There are many things I want and need to do.
The Adventurer Guild will call Silver to the Headquarters, and Leo will have to head to the battlefield
to defeat Gordon. I want to help him there.
However, I spent too much magic power subjugating the Spirit Turtle.
If I don’t rest now, I can’t do anything.
“I will sleep for a while……I don’t know how long…….tell the others that I was poisoned…..”
“Certainly, sir. Please leave the rest to me.”
“….tell them……thank you……and good work…….”
“I shall relay your message.”
Hearing Sebas’s answer, I slowly gave in to the drowsiness.
I feel like I was sinking into the darkness.
The scenery changes.
It was the scenery of my past.
Yes, it was three years ago.
It was when Crown Prince Wilhelm was about to head to visit the north.
At the castle square, my eldest brother called out to me who had skipped classes and was focusing on
a book.
“Al! So you are here. I’m going to be away from the capital again. I won’t be seeing you for a while.”
1806
“Again? Wil-aniue. As the Crown Prince, you should spend your time inside the capital more right?”
“It’s because I’m the Crown Prince that I have to go see the Empire for myself. And it’s not all that bad
you know. I get to see a lot of things you know. Want to come with me this time?”
“No way. Sounds troublesome.”
“That’s very like you. I thought you would say that.”
“If all you do is work then sister-in-law will hate you, you know?”
“Tsk Tsk Tsk! It will be fine since I and Therese are connected by love.”
“If you are going to boast about your wife then please just go. It’s not fun hearing someone else’s
happy story.”
When I said that and shooed him away with my hand, my brother turned back with a bitter smile.
Then.
“Watch over the Empire while I am away okay? Al.”
That was unusual.
He had never said something like that to me before.
However, back then, I didn’t pay it any mind.
I thought that it was just a whim of my brother and responded with a bitter smile.
“As you wish, Your Highness.”
Then, my eldest brother disappeared.
The image of his back was the last I saw of him.
I couldn’t stop regretting that. If I went with him at that time, something might have changed.
However, I can’t change the past.
What I can do now is to shape the future.
For a better tomorrow.
After renewing my determination, I let myself sunk into the darkness again.
1807
SPT Chapter 275
Special Thanks to Doubletap and Zodic_kun for new coffee, damn, Goal-kun is almost half dead
already….
That aside, this is the final chapter of this arc……….finally
-Mr.Graverobber
Similar People
“It seems that the tide has turned huh.
“Can I take it that you are ready to die then?”
Saying so, Elna stared at Raphael, the Captain of the Tenth Imperial Knight Corp.
There is not even a single scratch on Elna. On the other hand, Raphael had a number of small scratches
on him.
That was the difference between the two. Elna has outmatched Raphael in every way.
However.
“No, I don’t want to die yet so I have no such resolve.”
“Do you think that you will be forgiven? No one will forgive you for betraying His Majesty despite
being a captain of the Imperial Knight Order. Every captain will aim for your life now you know?”
“I am looking forward to that. I couldn’t fight my colleagues as an Imperial Knight Captain after all.”
“That was your reason? You betrayed us just for that?”
“That’s about half the reason I guess. I want to fight strong opponents. Being a swordsman, such
thoughts surely cross your mind too right.”
“Right……then I will be your opponent. I won’t let you escape!”
Elna’s fighting spirit overflows.
However, Raphael regretfully turned down the fight.
“I was looking forward to fighting with you with all my might but unfortunately my condition is far
from perfect from fighting with Commander Alida and you are not at full power without the Holy
Sword. I will refrain for now. If I keep fighting you here I will end up surrounded after all.”
1808
Raphael said so and took a big distance away from Elna.
However, it was a distance that Elna couldn’t care less about.
She immediately closed the distance and aimed for his head.
Within a single moment, Raphael avoided the decapitation but he ended up having a new scratch on
his neck.
“You really are strong……as expected of an Amsberg.”
“Aren’t you quite carefree? I thought I just proved to you that you can’t run away though?”
“I can. I can’t die yet and I still have something left to do after all.”
Saying so, Raphael took the distance again.
However, this time he didn’t just take his distance alone.
Many assassins appeared and rushed at Elna. They are buying time for Raphael to withdraw.
He has been relying on those around him as he fought Alida as well.
Raphael desired a one on one fight but he had always prioritized his goal first.
Even now, he frantically avoids getting killed.
He is trying to escape.
On the other hand, Elna keeps pursuing him while immediately cutting down any assassins that get in
her way.
However, no matter how powerful Elna is, she can’t catch up when a powerful opponent like Raphael
is seriously trying to escape while having to deal with the assassins.
Upon entering the outer edge of the Imperial Capital, Elna lost sight of Raphael. Trail of bodies of the
assassins scattered along her path.
“There are a lot of mysteries huh…….”
Both the betrayal of an Imperial Knight Captain and mysterious assassins.
In the first place, just because Gordon and Zandra cooperated with each other, it is strange that they
can do this much damage.
There is something else.
While feeling that way, Elna sheathed her sword.
“I wonder if Al is safe……”
1809
Worried about her missing childhood friend, Elna moved on to wipe out the remnants of the rebels in
the Imperial Capital.
————————
At the back alley near the Adventurer Guild.
Eric stood there.
“Your Highness.”
“What is the situation.”
“I have performed the task as instructed.”
“I see. What about Mother’s side?”
“I have sent a moderate amount of soldiers her way. There should be no reason to doubt her, Your
Highness.”
Behind Eric.
A voice can be heard from the shadow.
In the shadow was Xiao-mei.
“Well done. Many things have gone out of schedule but I didn’t expect Gordon’s force to rout. Leonard
and Arnold have been more active than I thought but that is still within the margin of error.”
“Yes. Then, I will proceed to act with [That person] from now on.”
“I will leave that to you. Make sure to constantly send the information my way.”
“As you wish.”
Saying so, Xiao-mei disappeared into the shadow.
Seeing that, Eric heads back to the Adventurer Guild.
Eric knew that no matter what happened in the Imperial Capital, it will be safe inside the guild.
After all, he can get in touch with anyone on the continent in an emergency situation, and there is a
large amount of well-trained adventurers protecting it.
Also.
He had expected that Silver would move if something happened.
That’s why Eric uses the Imperial Capital branch Adventurer Guild as his base.
1810
“Good work, Adventurers. You have done well.”
Eric quietly whispered.
Achievement of getting the adventurers to move and information manipulation through the
ambassador of Sokol.
He had accomplished a decisive achievement with little investment.
The ending was different from the one Eric envisioned. However, that wasn’t a problem.
If the ending changes, it is only a matter of adjusting it accordingly. That’s how Eric has always
managed to maintain his advantage.
Zandra has completely dropped out and Gordon is in a crisis.
There is no need to worry about his so-called rivals anymore.
The newly emerging Leonard faction also showed him a lot of hands during the rebellion.
“So you have been hiding your claws after all huh? Arnold.”
Leonard and Arnold have gained credit in this incident by exposing their hands.
But unlike the two, Eric barely showed anything to his opponents yet.
Once again, Eric has the upper hand.
—————————–
The east gate of the Imperial Capital.
This place was the most fortified since it was where the Emperor’s base was.
When the Emperor left the capital, he took the foreign dignitaries away from the east gate and
dedicated much of his guards to their protection.
They have joined up with Mitsuba’s group and are hiding in the Imperial Capital.
That’s why the soldiers guarding it did not expect that they would come under attack.
“Hmph, how weak they have become. Don’t you think so too? Xiao-mei.”
“It is exactly as you say, Sophia-sama.
Xiao-mei said as she reverently bowed.
A red-haired woman is standing in front of Xiao-mei.
Although she is already over 40 years old, she possesses a youthful and well-trained body.
1811
The sword in her hand has no bloodstains on it despite the fact that she just used it to cut down the
guards. She is that much of a master swordswoman.
Her name is Sophia. The Fourth Consort and Gordon’s mother.
She had been hiding since the beginning of the rebellion.
However, it was for her other son that she came to the east gate.
“You should be ashamed for getting yourself caught. How about you show me that you can break
through this level of security by yourself? Conrad.”
“My, My, Mother. You are saying something unreasonable. It was the subordinates of Lizelotte-aneue
who was guarding this place you know? Breaking through them would be impossible right.”
“Pathetic. You can’t possibly be afraid of soldiers at this level.”
“Please don’t group me together with someone who almost become an Imperial Knight Commander
like you, Mother. So, can you help me out?”
In response to Conrad, Xiao-mei opens the cell that Conrad was trapped in.
Conrad immediately did a stretch the moment he came out but there was another person who called
out to such Conrad.
“Pl, Please take me with you!”
It was Henrick.
He has already guessed the situation outside from the conversation of the guards.
Zandra joined the rebellion and failed. As her younger brother, Henrick is also guilty.
Then he should go with Conrad. That was his thought.
However.
“Hmph, Zuzan’s son huh. As expected of the son of that snake, you are just a shameless coward. You
want our help? Do we look like we need a weakling like you?”
“Pl, please wait! I will definitely be useful!”
“What power do you have? If you have something to show other than your sister’s authority then
show it to me.”
“Th, That is……”
Henrick is upset by Sophia’s words.
1812
For an average boy, Henrick is certainly excellent. However, among the Imperial Family, he is by far
inferior.
That is why he relied on Zandra’s authority.
What should I do now that is gone?
Henrick keeps asking himself that but he couldn’t find the answer.
Seeing Henrick casting his eyes down without being able to answer, Sophia snorts and continues to
speak.
“Let’s go, Conrad. Xiao-mei, take care of that useless trash.”
“Ah, are we leaving Henrick behind?”
“Of course, what use does he have?”
“I don’t know if he will be useful but I can’t stand to leave him. So please go on ahead, I will stay
behind.”
“What?”
Sophia stopped her feet at Conrad’s words.
She then strongly glared at Conrad.
“Are you serious?”
“I am. I have become friends with Henrick since we were locked up together and even if we have
different mothers, he is still my brother. I can’t abandon him right.”
“Conrad-aniue…….”
Henrick was moved to tears.
Seeing that, Xiao-mei urged them to hurry.
“We do not have time, Madam. Let’s bring His Highness Henrick with us.”
“……Conrad. You will take responsibility for him right?”
“Of course.”
“……then come.”
Saying so, Sophia turns back.
Seeing that, Conrad smiled and reached his hand out to Henrick.
1813
“We’ve got the permission. Henrick.”
“Thank you! Thank you! This Henrick will definitely repay this debt!!”
“It’s alright.”
With such a conversation, Conrad and Henrick left the room first.
“He really is evil.”
Seeing the smile on Conrad’s face, Xiao-mei muttered to herself.
Unseen by others, the smile on Conrad’s face was a smile of bottomless evil.
His smile somewhat resembled Al’s.
1814
SPT Chapter 276
Special Thanks to Double Tap for more coffee!! make sure to click the next post button as I uploaded
two today.
-Mr.Graverobber
Awakening
“Haa……seriously. This is the worst possible development.”
I complained.
Seeing me complained like that, Finne grinned at me.
“Is that really so? I am looking forward to it though.”
“I won’t say anything bad so you should drop the idea. [Those guys] are not what you think they are.
They are one of the most powerful people on the continent but they are also one of the weirdest bunch
too.”
“That’s quite an evaluation you have of them. By the way, were you not included in that group as
well?”
“I am a decent person. Compared to them, I am the person with common sense alright.”
“I see. Then I think I will see for myself when I meet them.”
Finne answers with a giggle.
Behind the mask, I frowned at how she is treating me like I am the same as those guys.
Damn it. This is why I hate getting involved with them. Just because we hold the same rank, people
always think that I am the same.
This is really unpleasant.
“Listen here alright? Finne. Just because I am also an SS-rank adventurer, you shouldn’t be grouping
me with them. It’s absolutely unthinkable to think that I am the same as those guys.”
“There are only five SS-rank adventurers on the continent. Isn’t it unavoidable that there are some
people with difficult personalities among you? A person that stands out always has a point or two that
looks strange in the eyes of a normal person after all.”
“I am a very very normal person okay. A normal person.”
1815
“Yes, of course.”
Finne smiled as she said so and casually dismissed my words.
Why……
Seriously, this is all because of all the idiots at the headquarters.
They started saying some stupid thing like Silver must be brought in for an inquiry and tried to use
this chance to get their noses into SS-rank adventurers’ business.
“To think that I stoop so low as to ask for their help…….”
Muttering so, I opened the transfer gate.
As the subject of the inquiry, I might get overwhelmed by myself.
Collecting and bringing the other SS-rank adventurers is my goal right now.
Behind me who is currently getting depressed by the idea alone is Finne who is having a wide smile on
her face.
Receiving some encouragement from that smile, I started walking to the transfer gate.
——————-
In the deep darkness.
My consciousness, which had been sinking into that darkness, suddenly awakened.
“Uhg……..”
What was waiting for me was dazzling light and thirst.
A terrible thirst.
With my eyes slightly opened, I search for some water with my hand.
Then, a glass of water was offered to me.
I drank it vigorously and finally confirmed my surroundings.
“Good morning, Arnold-sama. Have you slept well?”
“……Sebas huh………”
As usual, my butler asked something stupid as he calmly stands at the side of my bed.
There’s no way that I slept well.
1816
“How long have I been asleep……?”
“It’s been about a month and a half, sir. I have told the others that you were subjected to a curse by
Her Highness Zandra while you were being chased by her. Since there was so much confusion, there
was no one who was free enough to be skeptical about your condition.”
“I see…….I have been sleeping that long huh…….”
“It might be because of your accumulated fatigue as well, sir.”
I nod to Sebas.
After we decided to participate in the succession war, I continuously spent my magic power. This
resulted from the fact that my magic recovery couldn’t catch up with the consumption. I thought that
it would happen someday but it may have been this long because I had continued to put it off.
“How is the situation?”
“I will start with the situation of the Empire. His Highness Gordon has withdrawn from the capital and
taken control of one-third of the Empire’s northern region. We have despatched an army to retake the
area but they are still glaring at each other for the moment.”
“Glaring at each other? Our side didn’t try to overwhelm them immediately?”
“Apparently, His Majesty decided to only use the army so that the credit can be given to them, sir.”
“I see…….”
Considering the scale of the current Imperial Army, if we want to crush Gordon’s remaining forces,
that should entirely be possible. However, if we still don’t know if any of them has a connection with
Gordon, it would be difficult to utilize them effectively.
Moreover, it won’t be easy to suppress them if they really betrayed us…..
“I don’t think that we have that many trustworthy generals on our side though?”
“Yes, most of them have been sent to the western border. The Kingdom’s army has begun a full-scale
invasion, the western border defense force is currently engaging them. On that side, Leticia-sama is
heading there to show that she is safe and the Kingdom has no just cause to invade the Empire. Elna-
sama also accompanied her as her escort.”
“I thought that the Kingdom would decide on a wait and see approach but……..even with Gordon’s
rebellion ended up in a failure and a threat from Silver, they still chose to invade huh. That’s quite
bullish of them.”
“Yes, that surprised me as well. Regarding the other borders, Her Highness Lizelotte has returned to
the eastern border and the northern border was partially breached by the fierce attack from the
coalition of the Dominion and the United Kingdom’s armies. This shows that the two countries gave
their support to His Highness Gordon, sir.”
1817
“They breached the northern border? Even though I stopped their surprise invasion?”
I would not be surprised if the Dominion and the United Kingdom’s surprise attack was successful.
However, with the ceasefire, our border should be difficult for them to breakthrough.
“Initially, they managed to defend against the enemy attack but a general under His Highness Gordon
stabbed the Commander of the north fortress and it seems that the chain of command was disturbed
because of that, sir.”
“I see…….so they were attacked from the inside.”
“Yes. The Commander managed to fend off the attacker and forced himself to take command. He
caused great damage to the enemy army but……..he ended up succumbing to his injury.”
“He took the border as his responsibility huh……”
“Thanks to him, most of the defensive lines on the northern border are still functioning. However, if
the Dominion and the United Kingdom decided to go all out, His Majesty would probably have to put
the entire army there, sir.”
“And with a betrayal, doubt and suspicion will keep spreading. His result is praiseworthy but there’s
no point in him losing his life. This time the fault lies with the Imperial Family. The Commander
shouldn’t have to die.”
There are only a few generals who can be entrusted to head the border defense force. His battle result
is certainly great but its merit is too small considering that we have lost such a person.
His loss is truly regrettable.
However, there is no point regretting it now.
“I understand the situation, but that’s not it right?”
“Yes. In response to the protest from the other countries, the Adventurer Guild Headquarters has
called for an inquiry against Silver, sir. In return, Finne-sama is now heading to the Guild Headquarter
as an ambassador of the Empire.”
“To defend Silver?.”
“Officially, sir.”
“What is the other motive?”
“To buy time, sir. If you do not wake up, Silver will not be able to show up for the inquiry. By not
showing up, it might be taken that you are intending to antagonize the guild.”
“That’s a good decision. Was it Finne’s idea?”
“Yes.”
1818
Finne’s move is considerate as always.
However, if that is the choice we are going with then my options are limited.
“So I have to solve the problem relating to Silver first huh.”
“That should be wise, sir. The battle in the north still lacks a decisive factor. They should be locked in a
stalemate for a while.”
“I can’t be in two places at the same time. Guess I will hide the fact that I woke up and act as Silver for
a while. It would be trouble if someone knows Silver’s identity after all.”
“Certainly, sir. With your recent achievement, your reputation inside the Imperial Capital has
improved. Right now, some people may start associating you with Silver after all.”
“Then can I leave this place to you for the time being? I will leave an illusion of me here just in case.”
“Certainly, sir. Also, I have one final report to make.”
“There’s still more……?”
Even though I have been asleep, I can still get tired with all these reports.
When I thought that way, Sebas dropped a bomb.
“Her Highness Zandra was sentenced to death. She was subjected to the Emperor Poison Wine and
had been left for the people of the Imperial Capital to witness her suffering, sir.”
“What…….?”
“His Majesty intended to wait until Arnold-sama woke up but since the dissatisfaction of the people of
the Imperial Capital was growing……”
“……..how many days has it been? Is she already dead?”
“Today is the last day, sir.”
In other words, this is the day.
The day Zandra would die.
1819
SPT Chapter 277
In response to Sebas’s words, I started looking around.
Even though the room is dark due to the curtain, there is still light outside.
I got up from the bed and tried to open the curtain but I ended up staggering. It seems that my body is
weaker than I expected.
“Tsk……”
“Please don’t overdo it, sir. Even if you can maintain your body functions with magic, you can not
completely prevent your body from weakening.”
“My body is not that strong in the first place anyway.”
I strengthen my body with magic power and slightly open the curtain.
The sun was about to set outside.
If today is the last day then she will die tonight.”
“Is Zandra still outside?”
“No, sir. Her Highness was put on a show for the first three days but many petitions have been made
against it and she is currently confined inside her room, sir.”
“Even though they were the ones who wanted to see, now they begged us to put her away huh…….”
“The Emperor Poison Wine is a secret poison of our nation, sir. The people must have heard the
rumors about it to some extent but they would never be able to imagine its real horror. The people
who wanted to find some closure through her suffering must have been overwhelmed by its real
effect.”
“It is not that the suffering is unimaginable for them. They only lack enough imagination. A member of
the Imperial Family rebelled against the Emperor, it’s obvious that the punishment for that would be
far beyond the imagination of the common people. If they think a little then that much is obvious…….”
The suffering the Emperor Poison Wine can cause can even make the onlookers frowned.
It can cause an effect that should cause a person to die without killing them. That’s the idea of the
Emperor Poison Wine. You can only die after you have experienced seven days of hellish torture.
There is no doubt that it is the most ridiculous poison on the continent.
The fact that he used it against his own daughter means that Father has shown that he will never
forgive Zandra.
1820
I do not know his real feelings though.
“Is there someone inside the room with Zandra?”
“His Majesty has forbidden everyone to take care of her, sir. He said that a lonely death is an
appropriate punishment for a rebel.”
“I see…..then I will go. Do you have my mask?”
“Will you be visiting her as Silver, sir?”
“If it’s Father……he might think that the only one who should take care of her is himself.”
“His Majesty should be wary of the eyes from his senior vassals. I don’t think that he would do that,
sir.”
“It is just in case.”
“As you wish, sir.”
Sebas bowed and took out my mask.
After I put it on and changed my clothes, I made a transfer gate and headed to Zandra’s room.
———————————
The first thing I noticed when I transferred to the room was the smell of blood.
There were traces of blood all over Zandra’s room. It is all her blood.
For someone to spill this much blood and not die is truly strange.
And then there was Zandra who is in the middle of hell. She is lying in her bed, her hair disheveled, her
body is thin and her skin dried to dust. At first glance, it was like I was looking at a corpse.
However, albeit barely, she is still alive.
“…..Sil…..ver……?”
Zandra who noticed my presence showed me a smile.
She probably couldn’t feel pain anymore. Her death should be here soon enough.
That must be why Zandra has a surprisingly refreshing look on her face.
“Have you come to laugh……..? Did you come to rid me of any hope I have left…”
“That’s not the case. I have a few questions for you.”
“I don’t have that much time left……I will die soon…….”
1821
“I’d like you to do your best to stay alive. I need you to answer this. Tell me what you know about
Grimoire.”
Grimoire.
Hearing that name, Zandra’s eyebrows moved a little.
She then pointed her right hand toward me and magic power started to accumulate inside it.
“Do you think I will tell you that…….?”
“I wonder. But you should know a lot about them. If you wish to study forbidden magic, you should
have many benefits from contacting that organization.”
I stare directly back at Zandra.
Then Zandra’s hand shone a small light.
I can’t think of it as the magic of Zandra who made a name for herself with her study of forbidden
magic. It was the basic of the basic. The magic that emits a small ball of light from her hand.
It slowly passed by my face and hit the wall behind me.
Then as if she no longer has strength left, Zandra dropped her right hand.
“If you want to know about them……then see for yourself……”
“A hidden shelf?”
Looking back, there was a hole in the wall. It must have been a mechanism that can only be opened in
response to Zandra’s magic power.
Inside, there is a note.
“My mother…..she made contact with Grimoire more than a decade ago……….it was at that time that
she……changed…….”
“How so?”
“My mother always thinks of the Second Consort as her rival and told me not to lose to
Lizelotte……..but she started telling me to aim for the throne……..then she cast a curse on Lizelotte and
Christa and ended up causing the Second Consort’s death……..”
“You are saying that Grimoire caused that change?”
“I don’t know…….but I didn’t even doubt my mother’s words and actions………I wonder why…….?
When I was young, I have never been interested in the throne……..I should have been studying
forbidden arts for the betterment of magic, but……….I don’t know when I started studying it to put
curses on others……….”
1822
Zandra showed a self-deprecating smile.
As a result of that change, Zandra has become like this.
The succession war this time is strange. Many have felt the same. This change is not something that
suddenly happened. What if something has been gradually eroding the Imperial family for a long time
now?
The darkness is much deeper than I thought.
“There are locations of their leaders and branches written in it………do your best and crush them…….”
“Thank you.”
“…….I wonder why things have ended up like this………”
“…..even if you were used…….I can not forgive what you did. Too many lives have been lost.”
“I know……I know best how foolish I was acting……….I even tried to use my own sister…….in an
experiment…….there is nothing more terrifying to me than that. I have done many other horrifying
things too…….I must have gone crazy………”
Zandra looks at her hands. They are slightly shaking.
Her appearance unexpectedly matches with the image of Zandra I had in the past.
She was both stern and hard to please back then as well but I remember that she is not mad like she
was during recent times.
My feet stopped when I was about to step inside the transfer gate.
There is no room for sympathy for Zandra. Even if her personality was distorted by someone, the
damage she caused to the people of the Empire will not disappear. Her sins will remain forever.
However, the memories of the past still repeat in my mind.
When I was about 5 years old, I once joined Father when he took our family out for a hunt.
Back then, I found an animal in the woods and got lost. It was Zandra who found me.
Even while she was complaining, the warmth of the hand she reached out toward me never
disappeared.
“Do you still……have questions…….?”
“There are still many questions left to be asked…….but personally, I do not have any more questions.”
“I see……I am going to die alone……I abandoned Mother, and betrayed Father…….this is the obvious
punishment………”
1823
Zandra’s voice gradually began to fade.
Without thinking, I grabbed her hand.
“What….are you……….?”
“I can’t forgive you and I will not………but, it is an old debt. You might not like this but I will take care
of you until the end.”
Saying so, I removed my mask.
Zandra opened her eyes wide in surprise when she saw my face but she eventually smiled as if she
was convinced.
“I have been…..wondering why you chose Leonard instead of me but…….now I know…….”
“No way, even if Leo’s gone, I wouldn’t just simply start supporting you, you know.”
“You are as cheeky as always……seriously…..to think that a child who couldn’t use even cast an
elementary magic…….would have the aptitude for ancient magic……I’d never thought of that…….”
“Right. I was surprised myself.”
“…..but your naivety still hasn’t changed………that naivety will become your fatal weakness…….you
don’t have to sympathize with me now you know……”
Saying so, Zandra shook her hand away from mine.
Her hand moves toward my face and slowly feel it. I’m sure she can’t see me anymore.”
When her hand touches my cheek, Zandra speaks to me as she strokes it.
“As expected……of my brother…….”
“Zandra-aneue……”
“……watch out for Eric…….take care of……Otou-sama for me………”
After she said that, Zandra’s hand lost all strength and fell.
Her eyes were half-opened and the faint traces of life in her have disappeared.
Zandra, my sister, is now dead.
I grind my teeth and clench my fist.
In order to not make it look unnatural, I left her room without touching her body while only sealing
back the hidden shelf.
Then, when I returned to my room, I created an illusion of me on the bed.
1824
“Will you be leaving immediately, sir?”
“I don’t want to waste time.”
“…..did something happen, sir?”
“It’s nothing. I was only gathering information.”
“I do not think that alone would make your voice sound so sad, sir.”
“…….”
I did not answer Sebas and handed him Zandra’s note.
“Investigate Grimoire. Thoroughly.”
“Your wish is my command.”
Without saying anything more, Sebas bowed.
Seeing that, I take a deep breath and open a transfer gate.
“Then I will be off.”
“Please be careful on your way, sir.”
With that parting word, I entered the transfer gate.
The Death of Zandra
TLN: NGL, I cried. Now, it’s time to update the TOC
1825
SPT Chapter 278
This is an automated post…….don’t look for me……..I’m playing cyberpunk……
-Mr.ConesquencesbedamnedI’mplayingthatgame
The Adventurer Guild Headquarters
The Adventurer Guild Headquarters is located in the southeastern part of the continent.
There used to be a ghost town where monsters ran rampant at the south of the Sokol empire. It was a
place where no country dared to touch, that is the location of the guild headquarters.
At the time of its establishment, adventurers eliminated the monsters in the area and erected a huge
tower at the center of the ghost town.
The tower which became the headquarters for the Adventurer Guild was dubbed [Babel].
It was the tower that manages the activities of adventurers of the entire continent. The area which
was once a ghost town has now transformed into a great city of adventurers.
A neutral zone where no country can interfere in its business.
“Officially that is.”
Night.
I muttered so as I transferred to the city, [Babel].
Even though no country has moved to antagonize the guild, they do have some degree of intervention
in place. As the Guild has to oversee the activities of all adventurers on the continent, the Guild doesn’t
want to get on the bad side of any country either. That’s why most of the time the Guild will comply
with a country’s request.
The same goes for this time as well.
“Especially now when the current higher-ups of the guild care so much about what each nation thinks
of them.”
At the upper floors of the Guild Headquarters
The Guild Council is consisting of people that hold important posts of the Guild. This is where the
Adventurer Guild makes its decision.
The members of this council always change but never before has the Guild become so vulnerable to
outside influences.
1826
The majority of the time, half of the council will consist of veteran adventurers while the other half is
from the guild staff. However, at the moment, the members are heavily inclined to the latter. That’s
why there were many instances where the council decision was biased.
The inquiry into Silver’s actions is a good example. There is no way that they wouldn’t know the
consequence of holding such an inquiry.
However, it is not like all the members are of the same mind.
At the moment, there is only one veteran adventurer in the council.
Clyde, the Deputy Guild Chief of the Guild Headquarters, should be well aware of the dangers post by
conducting an inquiry on Silver’s actions.
That’s why I went to Clyde’s mansion first.
It was constructed near the Headquarters at the prime location of the city. It is a fairly large mansion.
This place is the home of Clyde, a former S-rank adventurer.
Since the sun has already set, it would be extremely rude to visit him unannounced. However, this is
not the time where I should mind such courtesy.
I cover myself with a barrier to entering the mansion without being noticed.
Then, deep inside the mansion, I entered Clyde’s room.
Clyde who was sitting in a chair looking haggard while sipping his tea speaks to me.
“You sure took your time huh? I thought that you would come sooner, you know.”
“So you noticed huh.”
“Even like this, I am still a former S-rank adventurer alright. I can at least detect presences.”
Saying so, Clyde who was sitting in his chair stood up and looked at me.
Since he has already noticed, there’s no point keeping up the barrier.
Thus I appeared to him as Silver.
“It’s been a while, Silver. Glad you look alright.”
“I am not alright. I am in the process of recovering my magic power.”
“Well, a lot happened after all. But you think that it would be bad to stay quiet and rest too huh.”
“With the current council that is.”
“Sorry. I couldn’t stop them alone. Even if I protest, I will be overruled by majority vote after all.”
1827
Clyde smiled bitterly and offered me to sit.
In response, I sit on the sofa opposite him. Then, Clyde sat down himself.
“I will ask this first. What is the reason behind this inquiry?”
“The war intervention. This is the most prominent reason. It would be troublesome when an SS-rank
adventurer can intervene in a war after all.”
“I simply dealt with the dragons. The Guild only tolerated the Holy Dragons as the United Kingdom’s
[Defense Force]. When they sent those dragons out of their territory, they were just monsters.”
“I know what you mean. Well, that was only an excuse anyway. The council only wants to put some
restrictions on you with this inquiry.”
“They want me to become the council’s dog?”
“That’s right. They want an SS-rank adventurer that will move at the council’s beck and call. They are
dying to have such authority. They were hoping to get one from among the new generation SS-rank
adventurers but since that failed, they want to put a collar on the current SS-rank adventurers instead.
That’s quite terrifying, Don’t you think?”
“It is scarier that you are the only one who understands how terrifying that is.”
There are only 5 SS-rank adventurers on the continent. Our ability is incomparable to the S-rank
adventurers. it is no exaggeration to say that it was because they are holding on to the absolute power
of the SS-rank adventurers that the Adventurer Guild can exert their influence over the entire
continent.
I can understand their desire to put a leash on such power but it would be too shallow of them to not
think about the possibility that we will turn against them instead.
“SS-rank adventurers are all problem children that have a strange habit or two. Even if you guys have
the ability, you always have a strange quirk. You belong to the guild but you can act at your own
discretion. If a person wielding that kind of power act without affiliating with either a country or the
guild, they will be marked by everyone on the continent.”
“I agree with most of that but don’t lump me with those guys.”
“What are you saying you teleporting masked monster? Just because you are more willing to comply
with the guild’s request, you are not much different from them you know.”
“I always pay attention to my surroundings. I am not like the other guys.”
“I don’t mind if you want to insist on that but I think that will be meaningless though? The mass will
always recognize SS-rank adventurers as someone abnormal after all.”
“After this is over, I think I will have to post some positive rumors about me huh.”
1828
Saying so I stood up to indicate the end of the conversation.
Then.
“I will be borrowing a room.
“I don’t mind but don’t you want to greet the ambassador from the Empire?”
“She is a formal ambassador sent by the Empire. I can’t be so rude to visit her in the middle of the
night.”
“And you are fine doing that with me?”
“I did because I thought it would be fine. I don’t have a hobby of visiting a woman’s room late at night
in the first place. Besides, she has a captain of the Empire’s proud Imperial Knight Order guarding her.
I might turn the city into a sea of fire if I suddenly visit her.”
“Can’t you visit others without resorting to teleporting right to their doorstep………?”
“Humans are always resorting to something convenient. If you learn transfer magic you would
understand.”
“Don’t make it sound so easy like that.”
Clyde tiredly sighed and shooed me away as if to say just hurry up and go.
Seeing that, I left the room with a bitter smile on my face.
1829
SPT Chapter 279
Special Thanks to Double Tap again!!
enjoy the chapter, I’m gonna peaceout now!!
-Mr.Runningawaytodasea
The 11th Imperial Knight Corp
As soon as dawn arrived, I left Clyde’s mansion.
I have already asked where Finne was staying yesterday.
There are many tourists in the city of Babel but there are many big names who visit Babel to make a
direct request to the Guild Headquarters. That’s why there are several luxury inns for those VIPs to
stay at. Finne is staying in one of those inns.
Her escort is the Eleventh Imperial Knight Corp.
It can be said that it is overkill to send an Imperial Knight Captain with her as an escort in a situation
where the Empire is in turmoil like this but it also shows how Father is serious about this matter.
Silver came under an inquiry because he helped the Empire. Father must have felt indebted to Silver
and there must also be a part of him that wants to avoid the deterrence called Silver from
disappearing from the Empire as well.
Moreover, he also selected the most qualified Imperial Knight Captain to be Finne’s escort.
Thinking so, I transferred to the inn and proceeded to the innermost room.
However, I was immediately surrounded by a group of men with swords in hand.
“As expected of the Imperial Knights huh. Even considering that I am facing the Eleventh Corp whose
missions are mainly diplomatic ones, you people really are thorough.”
All of the men here are dressed like ordinary people but they were all Imperial Knights.
The reason why they didn’t wear the white cloaks or armor that show their identity as Imperial
Knights is that this place is the headquarters of the adventurers.
The people here tend to hate the sign of intervention from foreign entities. I can say that they are quite
sensible to pose as ordinary citizens to not provoke the people here.
Among the Imperial Knight Order, the Eleventh Corp is a special case.
1830
Not long ago, it was the role of the Imperial Knights to travel around the Empire to act as the
Emperor’s eyes and ears but the Eleventh Corp’s mission is primarily outside the Empire’s territory.
They have acted as the Emperor’s messenger and met with the rulers of other countries, escorting
ambassadors for diplomatic missions, and gathered information on foreign nations. Due to the nature
of their mission, this corp places more importance on etiquette and flexibility rather than raw power.
When the question such as ‘What is the weakest corp among the Imperial Knight Order?’ is raised,
their name often came up.
However, that is not necessarily the case.
“I usually don’t dislike that kind of praise but when our opponent is an SS-rank Adventurer, that kind
of kills the mood you know.”
Said a petite woman who appeared from the back.
Her platinum blonde hair was trimmed at the shoulder and her amber eyes were looking at me with
interest.
Even though she is also dressed like a common citizen, she is much more natural at it than others.
If she walks around in the city, no one would be able to identify her as an Imperial Knight.
Her name is Olivier Serow. If I remember correctly, she is currently 18 years old.
She is the Captain of the Eleventh Knight Corp.
Although she is still a newcomer among the Imperial Knight Captains, she has won Father’s trust due
to her ability and personality.
The purpose of her mission right now is negotiation.
Among the Imperial Knights which often have dispositions of a warrior, she has an unusually gentle
personality so she is suited for this kind of mission.
“If you think so then can you dismiss your subordinates now, Captain Olivier?”
“Well, relax. Wait here for a bit, I will go inform Finne-sama now.”
Olivier casually said with a charming smile.
To have that kind of attitude against an SS-rank adventurer, as expected of an Imperial Knight Captain
huh.
She is unusually calm.
Shortly after Olivier entered the room, she immediately came out.
1831
And told her subordinates to lower their swords.
“I’ve got permission. You can enter.”
“Good grief. It really became more difficult to meet her once she became an ambassador huh.”
“You could have teleported directly inside Finne-sama’s room right?”
“I am a person with common sense you see.”
“If you have common sense then I think that you should have entered from the entrance though.”
If you have entered from the entrance, we could have welcomed you more relaxedly.
Olivier quietly complains about my transfer magic.
It is exactly as she says but it would be troublesome to walk through the entrance even though I can
use transfer magic right.
In the first place,
“I don’t want anyone to know that I am here.”
“Then why don’t you just use illusion magic?”
“……….”
“You unexpectedly hate doing troublesome things huh.”
Olivier opens the door to Finne’s room with a smirk.
Inside, she is waiting for me.
“Finne-sama told me that she would like to talk to you alone, you know.”
“I see. Will that be fine with you?”
“I will believe in the little common sense you have okay.”
It was a little unpleasant how she said it but this is not the time to mind about that now.
I immediately entered the room and erected a barrier.
Then, I called out to Finne who was in the center of the room.
“It’s been a while huh. It seems that I caused quite a lot of trouble for you.”
“No, this much is nothing at all. Good morning, Al-sama. I am glad that you have safely woken up.”
Saying so, Finne smiles and bows at me as usual.
1832
While smiling at her, I sit down on a chair.
Finne tried to prepare tea for me with a practiced hand but I stopped her.
“Don’t mind the tea. I can’t drink it now after all.”
“You can’t remove it?”
“There’s no loss in being cautious. I haven’t heard that those guys are at the headquarters but they
always act as they please. I don’t know when or where they will show up.”
“By they you mean……..?”
“The other SS-rank adventurers. No matter how powerful my barrier is, I don’t think it would pose any
trouble for them.”
The barrier I erected here can prevent someone from entering the room and contain the sound inside
the room but those guys can instantly destroy such a barrier.
I wouldn’t have enough time to put on my mask if that happened.
“We have to go that far?”
“Yes, we have to go that far. So treat me as Silver while I’m here.”
“I understand. Then, Silver-sama, I will explain the current situations now.”
“Please.”
Saying so, Finne started explaining.
To put it briefly, Clyde is the only ally we have in the council. Finne has asked to meet other council
members but they all ignored her.
“As expected huh.”
“I am sorry that I couldn’t be of help……..”
“It’s not your fault. Don’t apologize. You have already done enough. The reason why this inquiry has
been postponed so far was all thanks to you.”
“However, I still couldn’t provide you with any solution.”
“That is my job. Don’t worry, I have a plan.”
“Don’t tell me……you wouldn’t say that you would quit being an adventurer right?”
Finne nervously asked.
Since she knows my true identity, that option is possible from her perspective.
1833
However, an SS-rank adventurer can not quit being an adventurer without a good reason.
Because we are too strong.
“I will not do that. Rather, that option is impossible. An SS-rank adventurer is powerful enough to
shake an entire nation. If I quit being an adventurer, every country will try to recruit me. But all SS-
rank adventurers including me will not swear our allegiance to a nation. In that case, we would be
recognized as an individual that is too dangerous to be left alone. For their country’s safety, they will
put pressure on the guild and force them to recognize that person as a monster. We are actually more
powerful than a dragon after all.”
The reason why we can move freely is that we have the title of SS-rank adventurers.
It was because such a title will give the people peace of mind that we will direct our power toward the
monsters. However, when that disappears, doubt will arise.
They will start to wonder if such power will be used against them someday. When it comes to that, it’s
over.
It will spark the battle between SS-rank adventurers. Whatever the outcome may be, there is no doubt
that it will change the entire continent.
Triggering such a stupid thing is out of the question.
“Because you are too strong………”
“Being an SS-rank adventurer is also something that signifies my strength. Because of my strength,
this status guarantees my freedom and my support to the Adventurer Guild. However, the current
council is frustrated at how we are being liberal about our freedom. That’s why they want to put a
leash on me.”
“So the Council is acting so forceful because they are confident that you can not stop being an
adventurer……..is that right?”
“Yeah. As long as I am an Adventurer, I am inevitably influenced by the Council’s decision. It would be
hard for me to deal with this problem alone.
“I see. If you can not deal with it alone, that means you will require the help of all five of you right.”
“That’s right. I don’t want to but I will ask them for help. It is not like this is completely unrelated to
them after all.”
The council is certainly the top of the guild but SS-rank adventures also possess the same influence.
We can participate in the council meeting and we also have the right to vote.
It would be different if it is just me alone but the council would have to think first before earning the
ire of all SS-rank adventurers.
1834
They are aiming for me because they thought that I am relatively reasonable. However, the others are
different.
They are people who can say that they will quit being an adventurer at the drop of a hat.
If I can have them on my side, I will be able to turn the tide.
The problem is.
“It would be hard to find all of them…….”
Even the Adventurer Guild doesn’t know where some of them are.
Moreover, I only have so much time to find them.
This is quite an unreasonable challenge.
“Do you have any ideas where they might be?”
“Well, more or less.”
Saying so I let out a sigh.
I don’t mind finding them but meeting them is an entirely different matter.
Dealing with them is tiring after all.
1835
SPT Chapter 280
Th, the new gacha is coming……n, noooooooooo
-Mr.Graverobber
Stupid Fuss
Returning back to the beginning.
After I finished my conversation with Finne, I created a transfer gate to leave.
“Silver-sama. Who are you going to meet first?”
“There is only one person whose location I know for sure. I have to get in touch with that old man
before he gets lost again.”
“So you will be meeting with the [Lost Sword Saint] first. The rest are the [Bipolar Divine Fist], the
[Wandering Bow God]………, and the [Void Crusher Magic Swordsman] whose identity is as mysterious
as Silver. I can pretty much tell how difficult their personalities are just from the rumors but will you
be able to talk with them?”
“The one who I think will listen to me is only Egor. That person’s bad habit is that he always wanders
off but now that he is staying in one place, it is not a problem.”
If not for that, he would be the most difficult person to find since he can be lost for decades at a time.
That’s why he was originally someone who you would have a hard time locating the most.
“What about the other three?”
“I won’t know unless I meet them face to face. I don’t think that they will not help me but……it will
probably cause me a huge debt.”
I don’t think that they will cooperate with me without something in return.
Finding them alone is not hard enough. Persuading them is even harder.
They don’t listen to what people have to say after all.
“Haa……”
“Please do your best! I will do what I can here too!”
“I’m a little more motivated now that I hear you say that. Alright, I’m off.”
“Yes. please have a safe trip.”
1836
Saying so, Finne sent me off with a bow.
I transferred to a village inside the Dwarf Autonomous Zone inside the Empire.
Egor should be here protecting Sonia and her parents.
At least he shouldn’t leave yet until Gordon is completely rendered powerless.
This helped me out.
It seems Egor has taken a liking to Sonia which that in itself is quite unusual
Thinking so, I walked through the dwarven village.
I approached the hut where Sonia and her parents lived before but there was no sign of people there.
Instead, a loud noise was heard at the center of the village.
“A festival?”
No matter how I see it, that’s a lot of noise.
The heavy drinker Dwarves love their festival after all. They always find a chance to hold a festival and
have lots of drink. I’m sure it’s like that this time too.
When I judged so and kept walking to the village center, I found more and more drunken dwarves
sleeping all over.
I was wondering if I should wake them up but since they seem to be sleeping so comfortably and it’s
not like there is just one or two of them, I gave up on the idea.
Then, I heard loud laughter.
Surrounding a huge bonfire, the Dwarves were drinking and making noises. Judging from this, they
must have been partying since last night.
Among them, the noisiest one belongs to the group of strong-looking dwarves.
At the center of that group is a small dwarven old man.
“C’mon! Look at his Sword Saint’s tricks!”
“WaHaHa! Good! Another round!”
“Amazing! It’s too fast I can’t even see it!!”
“……….”
Egor was performing a trick at the center of the group of dwarves.
1837
He is naked and the trick he is performing is moving the two pot lids in his hands to hide his crotch at
high speed. As expected of the Sword Saint he switched the lids so fast that I can’t see it.
All swordsmen in this continent would be disappointed at the sight but the dwarves surrounding him
are all laughing their heads off.
It seems that this is not the first time he is showing them this trick huh.
This is why I hate dealing with SS-rank adventurers.
“Haa…….”
I sigh and look up at the sky.
What is sadder about this situation is that I have to ask that old man for help.
When I returned my eyes down to the scene before me, it had already escalated. The dwarves began to
throw something that looked like a nut at Egor’s crotch.
“GOO!!! GET HIM!”
“UOAAAAAHH!!!”
“NAIVE! DON’T THINK YOU CAN BREAK THROUGH MY ABSOLUTE DEFENSE THAT EASILY!”
With that said, Egor deflects them away with the lids.
Seeing that, the dwarves screamed out in defeat and another young dwarf rose to the challenge.
Now, what should I do?
Honestly, I don’t want to get involved with them.
When I thought so, female dwarves appeared with trays in hands.
“Yes, yes! It’s dinner! Wear some clothes!”
“What!? It’s time for that already! So no one manages to break through my defense after all huh……”
Egor disappointingly muttered so.
He wanted someone to break through that huh…….
I can’t really understand him.
When I was standing there stunned, Sonia appeared mixed in with the dwarven women who brought
the food. Then, she immediately noticed me.
“No way……? Why are you!? What happened!?”
1838
“Nn?”
Due to Sonia’s voice, the dwarves who were making merry finally look at me.
All of them had bright red faces, probably thanks to all the alcohol they drank.
“Who’s that? That gloomy looking guy?”
“Your Majesty, you don’t know him? That’s him you know, him, the guy that is famous in the Imperial
Capital………..Gold!”
“It’s Silver.”
I was so tired after witnessing all that so I didn’t have the strength to strongly retort.
I corrected them for the time being and the dwarf they called Your Majesty nodded several times
before he loudly laughed again.
“OH! I SEE! I SEE! It’s Elder Egor’s friend huh! You came at a good time! Have a drink! We got a lot of
booze from the princess and the duke at the east border you see! Drink as much as you like!!”
“Even if you say that, Your Majesty has been drinking for days now hasn’t it…..please take a rest soon.”
Sonia tells the Dwarven King with an astounded expression on her face.
It seems she got quite familiar with the dwarves huh.
When I thought that way, Egor came to me.
And he still hasn’t put on any clothes yet.
“You come at a good time! Silver! Check out my absolute defense!”
Saying so, Egor switches the lids covering his crotch at high speed.
I mean it’s amazing but I kind of felt like asking him what is he trying to do.
“……So?”
“Young people in the village won’t even give me a challenge! You do it!”
“OH! A battle between SS-rank adventurers huh! Good! Do it!”
With the Dwarven King getting on board with it, the other dwarves also cheer.
Then a fruit was handed to me.
I unintentionally glanced at Sonia but she only answered me with a bitter smile.
“I don’t think this will end unless you do it you know.”
1839
“I see…….”
“C’mon, come at me from anywhere you like!!”
Egor who is getting more enthusiastic shuffles the lid at even a faster speed.
After signing once, I strengthened my body and threw the fruit at him.
The timing doesn’t matter.
The fruit was blocked by the lid but it pierced the lid and directly hit Egor’s crotch.
“OUGHH!!??”
“WOAHHHH!!”
“Amazing! He got him!”
As expected of an SS-rank adventurer!”
“……Haa.”
How many times have I sighed since I got here.
Egor holds his crotch and mutters while crouching down.
“Y, You don’t go easy on an old man at all huh……”
“Someone who plays with pot lids like that is not an old man in my head. Anyway, I have something to
talk with you.”
“Wait a minute…..I let my guard down so it hurt a little……..”
It hurts because you let your guard down……?
With such a question in mind, I let out another sigh.
1840
SPT Chapter 281
Haa…….so depressing…..I will start stress eating now, don’t look for me…..
-Mr.IF$^%HATEDECEMBER
The Good For Nothing Bowman
“So? What did you visit me for?”
Inside a small hut, Egor who has recovered from the crotch pain sips the tea that Sonia poured him.
There was a bottle of alcohol beside him and he tried to reach for it after he’s done with the tea but
Sonia confiscated it from him.
“That’s a no, Ojii-san. You have been drinking for days already right?”
“Ahh……I was looking forward to that…….”
Egor’s shoulders droop down dejectedly.
It seems that after living together for a while the hierarchy has already been established.
Egor who grew timid shakes his teacup and keeps staring at the tea leaves.
“In short, I needed to gather the SS-rank adventurers. I want your cooperation for that.”
“Come to think of it, there was the talk about an inquiry huh.”
“It seems that the current council wants the SS-rank adventurers to be under their control.”
“Fools. I don’t mind cooperating with you but I can’t do it for free you know. I am busy after all.”
Busy?
Hearing that word, I look at Sonia who just confiscated alcohol from him.
Sonia was tiredly shaking her head.
“He has only been drinking and partying with everyone you know?”
“That certainly sounds busy.”
“Right, Right.”
Seeing Egor smiling in a good mood, I and Sonia sighed at the same time.
1841
Seriously, Aneue and the Duke are the problems as well.
Even children can understand what will happen when they give a large amount of alcohol to the
dwarves.
“So? What do you want in return?”
“I have something to ask you before that. Do you know where the others are?”
“I have some places in mind. I think I will search for those places one by one.”
“I see. But that would be a hassle right. I can tell you where they are.”
“……you know?”
“I know one for sure. The other two are fifty-fifty though.”
“That’s plenty enough. Let’s hear it.”
“The one I know for sure is the [Wandering Bow God].”
“He’s not wandering these days huh…..”
I drop my shoulders at Sonia’s retort.
The SS-rank adventurers are assigned nicknames by the Adventurer Guild.
The reason why they gave us a nickname is because it is easier to convey our characteristics to the
guild branches all over the continent.
The nickname will always include the nature of our power and our personality.
That’s why the Wandering Bow God should have been wandering somewhere now. Or that was
supposed to be the case.
“He has his reason to stop right.”
“That’s right. He is currently in a small town in the north of the Kingdom. The town is famous for the
delicious alcohol you see.”
“I see. Bayeux huh.”
Egor nods several times to my answer.
Bayeux is a famous alcohol-producing area that the Kingdom is proud of. It’s a paradise for drinkers.
So he’s there huh.
“The strongest bowman among the adventurers, Jack is resting his heart there. If you go there then
buy some alcohol for me as a souvenir. I want an expensive one okay.”
1842
“I don’t mind if you settle with that but….what happened to Jack?”
Jack, who has the nickname of the [Wandering Bow God], is someone who basically wanders the
continent.
The person himself said that he had something he has to look for but no one knew what it was.
In recent years, his activities have been concentrated on the western part of the continent and any
problems within the territory of the Kingdom are basically under Jack’s jurisdiction.
What happened to Jack for him to take time out to heal his heart?
“Jack is a pitiful man…….”
“Did he lose someone?”
“I think you can say that too.”
Egor cast his eyes down at Sonia’s question.
He sips his tea and continues after a short pause.
“It seems that among all the lovers he made all over the continent, ten of them decided to break up
with him……..”
“That’s the worst…….SS-rank adventurers are really……..”
“Don’t look at me. And don’t lump me with them either.”
Egor created an atmosphere like he was talking about something serious so I was wondering what
happened but he was only dumped huh.
Moreover, from what he said, he still has plenty of lovers left. He should get stabbed by all of them
someday.
“That’s it. Jack is washing his sorrow away with alcohol right now. He should be easy to find. If you
look for someone who spends a lot of money on women and alcohol then you should be able to find
him easily.”
“Good for nothing……”
“He used to be a fine young man. He became an SS-rank adventurer in his early twenties but soon after
his wife and daughter ran off on him so he drowned himself in alcohol and women. The irony is that
his skill now that he is drowning in alcohol and lovers is much sharper than when he was young.”
“So personality, behavior, and skills are all separated huh.”
I nod to Sonia’s words.
1843
There is no well-behaved SS-rank adventurer. A strong person is always a little different than a
normal person. Elna is a good example.
There’s even a theory that the more difficult your personality is, the stronger you can become.
“Well, he was certainly drinking when I first met him after all. From the eyes of an amateur, he would
only look like a drunk middle-aged man.”
“But he is actually strong right?”
“He is. I didn’t see his power when I first met him but on the second time, he offset my ancient magic
with his bow and stole my prey.”
Even though I wasn’t serious, that was still humiliating.
Moreover, it is a violation of etiquette to interfere with others’ quests.
If I hadn’t dealt with him like an adult then we might have a small skirmish there.
“Even though he is an SS-rank adventurer, he stole others’ prey?”
“That man spent all his money as soon as he made it after all. And after he spent it all, he will make
more. He was probably desperate for money back then.”
“When I hear you talk about him like that, it seems like you are on quite a good term with him
though?”
“What, we are both lost children after all. I often see him on my journey.”
“I’m sure that you were lost but I don’t think that Jack was though?”
“He’s definitely a lost child. In life that is.”
“I think that the person himself will deny it though.”
Egor simply lost his way while Jack lost his way in life.
In some strange way, they might be a better match than I thought.
While thinking so, I stood up.
“Then I will pay him a visit.”
“Don’t you want to ask about the other two?”
“I will ask you once I come back. I need a relay point if I want to head to the guild headquarters from
the Kingdom anyway.”
“I see. Then I will be looking forward to the souvenir alright.”
1844
“Be careful, okay. Don’t get into a fight.”
“Don’t worry. I am an adult after all.”
Saying so, I opened the transfer gate and headed to the town of Bayeux.
1845
SPT Chapter 282
Special thanks to Jenova for some delicious coffee this morning…..
Now, some announcement. Google went down and I lost some of my work so don’t count on Dahlia or
Mobmodel releases this week……will try to update Dull Prince though…..
-Mr.ShitI’msodepressed
The Town of Alcohol
Bayeux is a small town located in the northern part of the Kingdom.
Being known as the town of alcohol, it has many visitors from all over the continent that came in
search of excellent alcohol.
With drinkers being their targeted audience, the town also provides harlot services to the visitors and
it is also one of the selling points of the town.
I transferred to Bayeux and used an illusion magic to blend in with the people there.
The Empire and the Kingdom are currently at war and I am an SS-rank adventurer whose base is the
Empire. No matter what happens, that fact will never change.
If Silver suddenly appeared in the Kingdom, it would surely cause huge confusion.
“And the person under the mask is no better too.”
After all, I am a prince of the Empire.
If my identity gets exposed here, the Kingdom will surely dispatch its army.
It is so hard to move around right now.
Thinking so, I call out to the middle-aged man who is manning the storefront of an alcohol store.
“Excuse me, where do you sell the most expensive alcohol in this city?”
“Expensive one? If it’s delicious alcohol then we have it right here you know?”
“I was asked to buy an expensive one for my friend you see.”
“It seems your friend doesn’t understand alcohol at all huh.”
“I agree. But a request is still a request.”
1846
“I see. If you are looking for an expensive one then you should probably try Baldur’s place. The taste is,
well, it’s close to ours. If you just walk straight down the main street then you should be able to spot
the sign.”
The middle-aged man replied with a frown.
He probably recognizes them inside huh.
With a bitter smile on my face, I handed him a gold coin and picked up a bottle.
“Thank you. I will have one of yours.”
“Oi Oi, a gold coin is too much you know.”
“It’s an information fee. Also, it was for your honesty. You could have tried to sell me yours after all. I
will enjoy your alcohol myself.”
“O, Oh, well, we have been conducting honest business since my father’s generation after all!”
Saying so, the man shyly scratches his head.
While being seen off by him, I walked down the main street.
Then, I saw a big store with a sign saying [Baldur’s].
“This place huh.”
I enter the store and look for the owner.
Then I found a big bald man standing calmly inside the store.
“Excuse me, are you the owner of this place?”
“Yeah, that’s right. I’m the owner, Baldur.”
“My friend asked me to buy a bottle of expensive alcohol for him. I heard that yours are expensive but
the taste is perfect. Will you be willing to sell me one of your top-shelf alcohol?”
“Hmph, my products are certainly more expensive than other stores but considering the taste, I don’t
think they are expensive at all.”
“I see. I am looking forward to that.”
Baldur then confidently begins to choose a bottle for me.
The people who sell alcohol in Bayeux mostly produce their own alcohol.
Naturally, the pride they have in their products is high. After all, with so many rival stores, you would
be proud that your store manages to survive.
1847
“How about this one?”
“How much is it?”
“One gold coin a bottle.”
“That is quite a hefty price. I guess it is to be expected of a famous store huh.”
“And it’s worth every coin you spent on it.”
“Is that right. This might be a cheap price to pay for alcohol in this store huh.”
I took out a gold coin and received the bottle from him.
Not only because he managed to sell a bottle of his alcohol, but Baldur also seems to be happy about
my praise.
I ask that Baldur a question.
“But what about the economy here? Isn’t sales falling due to the war with the Empire?”
“Well, it is. But I have a good customer right now so I’m managing.”
Got him.
Jack personally prefers expensive alcohol. I thought that he would buy one from this store as well.
“A good customer?”
“Yeah, I don’t know where this millionaire guy came from but the guy has been renting out an entire
inn here and playing around for a few months already. He bought a lot from my place and kept
partying with the harlots he invited to his place for a while now.”
“So there’s a guy who can keep partying in a situation like this huh.”
“He’s a big help to me. I thought that he was someone who only aimed for expensive alcohol at first
but when I tried talking to him, the guy got quite a taste you know.”
“If he’s still here then I would like to see him. Do you know which inn he rented out?”
“Just keep going down the main street and you will know. It’s the biggest one in the city.”
“I see. I will take a look then.”
Saying so, I left the store and went down the main street again.
Doing so, I spotted a big inn. It’s probably this place.
I immediately walked toward the inn.
1848
However.
“Please accept our apologies, sir. The inn is currently fully reserved right now. Please withdraw.”
I was stopped by two men who seem to be the guards here.
So the inn has its own security guards huh.
I smile at them.
“Sorry. I will turn back now.”
Saying so, I walk straight past them.
However, the guards did not react to me.
After all, they couldn’t see my true body and only see the illusion of me turning back.
Since I don’t want to cause a scene here, I am being discrete.
Plus, I need Jack’s cooperation. It would be wise to not stand out as much as possible to not upset him.
When I enter the inn, I heard noises from deep inside.
When I followed the sound, I arrived at a fairly large room.
The door is open and I can hear the voices of a man and women from inside.
“Where are you? Come out~ Little cuti~es.”
“This way! Jack–sama!”
“No, no, this way!”
Inside is a blindfolded middle-aged old man chasing and playing with a dozen of harlots.
The old man is not stable on his feet. He’s probably drunk.
The harlots teasingly approach him and run away again and the chase begins anew.
Seriously, this guy is really a good for nothing.
When I thought so, the blindfolded old man, Jack, picked up a bottle and drank all of its content.
“PuhAA!”
“You are such a great drinker!”
“Right, Right.”
1849
Receiving the applause from the harlots, Jack laughed in a good mood.
And without any warning, he threw the empty bottle at me who was looking at him from the shadows.
I blocked the bottle with my barrier.
“I thought that the alcohol tasted bad but………it’s just a peeping tom huh.”
“If you can detect my presence then there’s no way you couldn’t detect the harlots right. You tried
hard to make this fun for you huh.”
Even if he is blindfolded, he is someone who can shoot at an enemy in the distance accurately.
That’s jack. His nickname of the Bow God isn’t just for show.
The harlots might try to call out and run away from him but if he gets serious he should be able to
catch them whenever he wants to.
In other words, it’s just a farce.
“Oi oi, I thought that the voice was so damn gloomy but it was just you huh.”
“It’s been a while, Jack.”
Saying so, I dispelled my illusion.
If Jack already saw through me then it is only a waste of magic power.
After all, this place is fully reserved.
It wouldn’t be a problem if only a few harlots saw me.
“What do you want? Silver. I’m busy alright.”
“You don’t look busy to me though?”
In response, Jack pulled the confused harlots toward him with his arms.
“I’m playing with cute girls here. If you can’t see that then ditch that lame mask already.”
“I heard that your lovers broke up with you though? If you keep doing that, then more of them might
decide to ditch you, you know?”
“Oi, you, you came to pick a fight with me or something?”
Saying so, Jack releases his hands from the harlots and stares at me.
He is like a completely different person now.
The harlots seemed to be afraid of that change and get away from Jack.
1850
“I am not looking for a fight. I have a request for you today.”
“A request? Hmph, I don’t feel like asking what it is though.”
“Hmm, are you sure that it is not because this part of you that made your wife ran away with your
child?”
That was it.
Jack immediately lunged at me.
Already expecting that, I opened the transfer gate in front of me and set the destination to Egor’s
house.
“Just go on ahead and wait for me there. I will grab your stuff for you.”
“Wha!? Silver!! You bastard!!”
Jack managed to turn back at the last second but I moved behind him and pushed him inside the gate.
Jack was sucked into the transfer gate without being able to resist.
Apprehension completed. Even if he wants to cause a scene at that side, Egor will stop him.
Yes, this is how an adult does things.
“Now then, where is his luggage?”
When I raised the question, the harlots pointed to the same place.
There was a simple bag and a bow there.
As expected of the Wandering Bow God. He always travels light.
Thinking so, I grabbed his luggage and quickly entered the transfer gate.
1851
SPT Chapter 283
Special thanks to Double Tap for some uplifting caffeine….
Guess I will take some time out in January huh.
-Mr.Graverobber
—————————–
People with no Common Sense
You need two transfer gates to travel from Bayeux to the Dwarven village. In other words, I need to
have at least one relay point.
However, to not allow Jack any chance to escape, I connect the two transfer gates like a tunnel.
Originally, even one gate would put a heavy burden on a common mage but the burden of having
multiple gates up at the same time is incomparable to that.
It is something that is simply impossible for ordinary people but this is accomplishable easily by an
SS-rank adventurer.
There is no problem regarding the burden on the caster but the transfer itself might cause some
nausea.
I might have done something terrible to Egor’s house but it should be fine. He should forgive me with
a bottle of alcohol after all.
Thinking so, I transferred to the Dwarven village.
Then.
“So it’s your fault! You damn old fart!!”
“Shut up! Is puking at others a way of greeting in your country!?”
“Shut it! It’s the damn transfer’s fault that made me feel sick!!”
“It’s because you drank too much that you got drunk!”
“Don’t just blame it on me damn it!!”
Egor’s house was half destroyed and Egor and Jack are shouting at each other outside.
Seeing them arguing with each other, I let out a sigh.
However, in that situation, someone pulled on my clothes.
1852
“Don’t just sigh at them, can’t you do anything about this?”
“Y, Yeah…….”
It was Sonia.
Even though she has a big smile on her face, I can tell by her atmosphere that Sonia is angry.
Feeling the indescribable feeling of dread, I obediently nodded.
Then, I lock the two of them in two separate barriers.
However.
“With this…..”
“Naive!”
“Weak!”
“…….”
The two broke my barrier with only a punch.
The two broke into a fight again. Even though their punches hold that much power, the fact that they
didn’t even put a scratch on each other is a testament to their strength.
“They just don’t have any common sense at all……!”
“A person that suddenly transferred a person with no common sense to another person’s house also
doesn’t have any common sense okay? You know that right?”
“Don’t lump me together with them. I won’t just get drunk like that.”
“I see, so you have no common sense even while you are sober huh.”
Even though I wanted to protest Sonia who said that like I am only slightly better than these two
drunk old men, I have no time for that.
Stopping these two take priority.
I search the half-destroyed house for Egor’s white cane. This is Egor’s favorite sword as well as his
cane.
I hold the cane with one hand while holding Jack’s bow in another and call out to them.
“Oi, you two. If you value your weapons then stop right now.”
“You are the worst…….”
1853
“At least put it as being smart.”
“Ah? Silver, you bastard……after you just shamelessly abducted me you are taking my weapon
hostage!? Quit fooling around!!”
“Hmph! My beloved sword can not be destroyed by you so easily!”
Hearing Egor, I gave him a nod.
They are weapons of two SS-rank adventurers, there is no doubt that they are weapons of the highest
grade.
If I want to break them then I would need some preparation and the two wouldn’t give me the time to
do that.
However.
“I didn’t say that I am going to break them. I will just randomly transfer them away.”
“wHaT……? Then I just have to search the continent for it! Hearing what you want to say is much more
irritating!”
“I, I can live without my cane anyway……”
“Then I guess I will just transfer them away together with this fine bottle of alcohol then.”
I add the alcohol I bought from Bayeux to the stake.
“What!? You are even holding that hostage!?”
“You brute……I thought that you are only a gloomy guy but you want to go that far!? Release the
bottle!”
“Just why is using the alcohol is more effective I wonder……..”
Sonia astoundedly muttered.
You need a non-common sense measure to negotiate with people with no common sense.
“For the time being, stop fighting and hear me out. If you do that then I will give it to you.”
“……Fine. I sobered up when I was fighting the old fart earlier anyway.”
“If I can get that alcohol then it’s alright with me.”
“Wasn’t that the alcohol that Ojii-san aske–…….”
“Keep quiet. They already agreed to the terms. The negotiation is concluded.”
“……..”
1854
Thus the fight between SS-rank adventurers came to an end.
“An inquiry? Why do I have to get involved with something so troublesome?”
Jack frowns while drinking the alcohol inside Egor’s half-destroyed house.
Egor and I are trying to persuade him so we are currently sitting down on the opposite side.
“I think that it is troublesome too. But if we allow this to pass, it will be even more troublesome for us
in the future right?”
Egor pours alcohol into his cup and drinks it up.
Without losing to him, Jack also drinks his at the same rate.
A bottle won’t be enough huh.
“If they are getting too annoying then I will just quit the Adventurer Guild. I’m going to do whatever I
want.”
“I am asking for your help so it won’t come to that. It should be enough to shut the council up this one
time. It’s not too difficult compared to asking for your help. The problem now is to make sure they
give up for good after we shut them down this time.”
If the target of this inquiry was another SS-rank adventurer instead of me, I’m sure that they will quit
the guild without any negotiation.
Considering that development, right now it would be best that we shut the council up about this for
good.
Currently, SS-rank adventurers have the freedom to act. We can go wherever and whenever we want.
That’s the reason the current council doesn’t like the SS-rank adventurers.
They think that they can manage us because they only hear about us from the report.
However, they should realize that it is a grave misunderstanding if we simply appear in front of them.
Naturally, shutting them up is not my only goal.
“If you want them to give up then you can just try throwing your magic at Barbel you know.”
“If the Adventurer Guild is in chaos then it will cause people to worry. There is already a war between
the superpowers of the continent. I want to avoid using forceful means as much as possible.”
“So you want to have a talk with them huh.”
“Exactly.”
1855
“For the people huh……must be hard.”
Jack sighs and scoops up his flaxen hair.
His eyes that possess the same color stare straight at me.
“If an SS-rank adventurer leaves the guild, the whole continent will be in chaos. I understand……..can’t
help it, I will lend you a hand this time.”
“You have my thanks.”
“But it won’t be for free. You have to help me search for what I am looking for in return.”
Well, I guess as much.
Jack always wandered around the continent because he was searching for something.
“Alright. When this is over, I will help you with your search. As much as I can that is. By the way……the
thing you are looking for…..is it your wife and child?”
“It was at first. But….. My wife died eight years ago. My daughter was raised by my mentor. It seems
that after leaving me, my wife turned to him. I only knew about that when I got the letter informing
me that my wife passed away. At least I want to apologize to her grave and see my grown-up daughter
once…….”
“The letter didn’t tell you where they are?”
“That part wasn’t included. It was sent to the guild in the first place. According to my wife’s will, it
seems that she doesn’t want me to meet my daughter. I have no intention of calling myself her father. I
don’t have the qualification to do that. But, I want to look at my own daughter at least once……”
I see.
We took a break after that and I stepped out to get some fresh air.
I take a deep breath and look up at the sky.
To be Jack’s mentor means that he would be a master of magic bow.
And I know a girl who learned some strange speaking habits and magic bow techniques from someone
she called Ojii-sama.
Given her age, it wouldn’t be strange if she is Jack’s daughter.
“Is it a coincidence……?”
The world seems to be wide yet sometimes it can be so narrow.
However, if I tell him now, he would immediately head to the Dominion.
1856
Let’s keep it to myself for the time being.
Even if it is not a coincidence but something inevitable.
I don’t know if it is something that I should just tell him.
“There’s no use thinking about it huh.”
They will have a chance to meet each other someday.
The Dominion is currently at war with the Empire anyway.
I can ask her later.
Whether she wants to try meeting her father or not.
There is also the possibility that they are complete strangers as well.
Convincing myself so, I returned inside Egor’s half-destroyed house.
1857
SPT Chapter 284
Introducing 2 more SS-rankers!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Remaining Two
I left Egor and Jack to standby in the Dwarven village for the time being and returned to the Guild
Headquarters, Babel.
If I bring them with me then the Guild will notice that I am gathering SS-rank adventurers. If they
come up with a countermeasure or move up the schedule for my inquiry then everything would go to
waste.
With Finne’s presence as the Empire’s ambassador at Babel, the council will not conduct the inquiry
yet. The reason being that an Imperial Ambassador will need to have some preliminary discussions
with the Guild’s personnel first.
However, Finne had tried to get in touch with them many times already. Our remaining time is short.
During this short time, I have to find the other two.
Using an illusion spell, I disguised myself as an inconspicuous man and entered the luxury inn where
Finne was staying from the entrance.
The Imperial Knights dressed as commoners immediately detected my presence.
“I’d like to meet Miss Finne.”
When I showed them my appearance as Silver, the Imperial Knights were understanding and led me
inside.
Immediately after, Olivier, their captain, appeared.
“Yup yup, so you properly listened to what I said that day huh.”
“I am a person with common sense after all.”
“A person with common sense would enter from the entrance without being told to from the start
though.”
She poked where it hurt again.
After that, I was escorted to Finne’s room.
1858
Inside, Finne was waiting for me with a tired expression on her face.
“Welcome back.”
“What’s wrong? You seem tired?”
“I was in talks with a council member until a while ago……it was tiring to talk with someone who has
no intention to listen…….”
“Sorry. I only trouble you.”
“No, this is all I can do after all……but the council doesn’t seem like they want to prolong this any
longer.”
“Right. When did they say that they will conduct the inquiry?”
“It is the day after tomorrow. If Al-sama hasn’t woken up yet then I would protest them as an Imperial
Ambassador though……”
“You don’t have to. Your decision is correct. It would be troublesome if they want to hold it today but I
can manage if it is in two days’ time.”
“Then you have found them right!”
“I only found two. There are still two left.”
When I told her that, Finne’s face suddenly brightened.
With the usual smile on her face, she starts brewing tea while humming.
Then she realized that she accidentally brewed my portion as well and started to panic.
“Awawa! I ended up brewing Silver-sama’s portion as well!”
“It’s alright. I will drink it this time.”
Saying so, I take off my mask and take a breather.
Seeing that, Finne opened her eyes wide.
“Is that okay?”
“I’ve found the guy I have been most vigilant about and the other two are most likely not inside the
Guild Headquarters.”
“Is that information trustworthy?”
“I can’t say for sure but it should be fine. I’ve asked Egor where they are but neither of them is the type
that would actively approach the Guild Headquarters.”
1859
“If Al-sama says so then I don’t mind but…….”
“You don’t have to worry. Besides, I need to take a break as well. Dealing with the two I found already
tired me out.”
After I cracked my neck and shoulders, I let out a sigh and drank Finne’s tea.
The hot tea heals my tired body and the usual taste calms my mind.
“Ahh……”
“Are you that tired…….?”
“Those guys don’t have any common sense after all……”
I lean back on the chair and close my eyes.
Then, I feel Finne’s hands wrap around mine.
“Would you, like to take a short break?”
“I want to but……the other two will be difficult to deal with.”
“[The Bipolar Divine Fist] and [The Void Crusher Magic Swordsman]. All I know about them is from
the rumors……..”
I nod with my eyes still closed.
Neither of them has much to do with the Empire.
“The Bipolar Divine Fist, Linares is the strangest one among the 5 SS-rank adventurers. Linares rarely
takes on any regular request you see.”
“Meaning?”
“Except for the emergency quest issued by the Guild, Linares basically only accept a defensive
contract.”
“A defensive contract is it?”
“In this continent, there are lands with an unusually high concentration of magic power. The Guild
called these lands [Singularities] and Linares only took on the contract to defend these lands. Outlaw
Mages and troublesome monsters often show up in those lands. The Guild places quite importance on
protecting them so they leave it to Linares. It’s not like there are no Singularities inside the Empire but
I have already set up my base inside the Empire so the Guild didn’t feel like issuing more contracts for
their defense. That’s why Linares has no reason to visit the Empire.”
“I see……but why does Linares-sama only accept such contracts?”
1860
“That is…….you will understand once you meet Linares. That guy leaves the search for new
singularities to the Guild and moves from Singularity to Singularity across the continent. It seems that
guy is currently protecting a certain mountain. Sorry but, to persuade Linares, I need your help.”
For a moment, Finne puzzledly tilted her head to the side. She probably doesn’t understand what I
said.
However, shortly after her face bloomed into a smile as though she finally understands my meaning.
“I can be of help……?”
“No doubt about that. Together we would stand a much bigger chance rather than me alone.”
“But I don’t know much about martial arts myself…..”
“Don’t worry. Linares is the strongest martial artist on the continent. The pinnacle of martial artists.
There’s no meaning in talking about martial arts when you stand no chance of winning against that
guy. I am bringing you with me for a different reason.”
“Is, is that so……I understand! I will do my best to help!”
When I narrowly opened my eyes to look at her, Finne was pumping her fists in front of me.
She seems quite motivated.
Well, her motivation doesn’t really mean much since her presence alone will already be effective
enough though.
“Then let’s ask for permission from Captain Olivier. Do you have plans after this?”
“None at all.”
“Then it should be fine. She’s the most flexible Imperial Knight Captain after all. She always has to say
something extra though.”
“Is that so? I think that Captain Olivier is a gentle person so I like her.”
“If she isn’t that kind of person then the Empire wouldn’t leave diplomatic tasks like this to her.”
Saying so, I once again put on the mask.
Break time is over.
Let’s give it my all.
“Come to think of it, What is the name of [Void Crusher Magic Swordsman]-san? I heard that he is as
mysterious as Silver though…..”
1861
“That guy is based inside the Sokol empire after all. It seems that only his second name managed to
reach the empire huh. Can you guess what kind of name he has?”
“Eh? It is a name that I can guess?”
“Yeah, anyone has the chance to guess his name right after all.”
“Anyone…..?”
An [?] float up above Finne’s head as she tilts her head.
Seeing her like that, I gave her the answer with a bitter smile.
“Noname. That’s his name.”
“Noname……”
“No one knows his true face, name, or gender. In terms of mystery, he is in an entirely different league
than me.”
“Does he have a reason to hide it……”
“Probably. But in terms of personality, the most troublesome one is still Linares.”
“Is that so…….”
“Yes. You should prepare yourself.—-that guy is quite intense you know.”
Saying so, I frown.
I never thought that a day would come where I would pay a visit to that guy though.
Life really is full of mysteries.
1862
SPT Chapter 285
Special Thanks to Someone, Doubletap, and Jenova…..thank you for feeding me this weekend.
It seems some of you noticed something in yesterday chapter……now, let’s meet the person.
-Mr.Graverobber
Linares
With permission from Olivier, I and Finne transferred to a Singularity located in the northeastern part
of the continent.
The Singularity located in the remote outskirts of the Sokol empire is called Shangri-La.
At first glance, it is just a huge mountain but if you approach it, you will notice its tremendous magic
power.
“So this is Shangri-La……..the air is a little stuffy here isn’t it.”
“I am covering you with a barrier. It is good that you only have some trouble breathing. I’m sure that if
you didn’t have any protection, you would collapse by now.”
“This place has that much magic power……..”
The dense magic power also affects the plants here.
The area near the summit of this mountain was filled with flowers that gave off a pale green light.
“What is this flower…..?”
“Greenglow flower. It’s a rare flower that you normally can’t find outside Singularities. Depending on
how you use it, it can be both medicine or poison. They only bloom in some Singularities so there are
usually requests to collect them.”
“They are very beautiful…..”
“They are. But this is the sight that only a few adventurers can get the chance to see. The dense magic
power here has a strong effect on monsters that live in the area. The average rank of monsters that
roam this place is around AA.”
“AA on average……..”
“They don’t cause much harm since they don’t leave the mountain because they are attracted by magic
power but they are quite a nuisance for those who want to climb up here. We just bypassed the trip
and skipped right to the summit though.”
1863
It would have been quite a trouble to get here without transfer magic.
Monsters do not approach the summit either. They are roaming the lower area of the mountain so
breaking through them won’t be easy.
“Thank you for showing me this precious scenery.”
“I’m glad that you like it but unfortunately the scenery here is just the byproduct.”
While shrugging at Finne who suddenly thanked me, I started walking toward the summit.
Then, suddenly a thundering sound echoes. Not just once, but the sound repeated many times.
“Wh, What is it!? This sound!?”
“Don’t worry.”
“H, how can’t I!”
Probably because the sound was simply too loud, Finne screamed.
I astoundedly answered Finne.
“It’s just the sound of a straight punch.”
“….yes?”
“Linares was called the Divine Fist after all. Even a mere thrust has the power equal to a powerful
magic.”
Saying so, I continue walking to the summit. If I stop then I might just give up and turn back after all.
Seeing me keep walking, Finne nervously followed me.
Eventually, we could see a figure of a person standing at the mountaintop.
Once that person reverted back to a still posture, the fist was thrust out again at a speed that is
impossible for me to follow with my eyes.
Then.
“That was quite inelegant of you to enter my garden unannounced, Silver. This is why you are no
good.”
“It was an emergency, Linares.”
“How many times do I have to tell you? Just call me Lina.”
Saying so, a big muscular man with a height of over 2 meters turned around.
1864
Long lilac hair and the same color eyes. His skin is white with light makeup applied to his face.
He appeared to be in his thirties but I don’t know his true age.
His gesture is feminine but his appearance is completely that of a male.
Because he’s like this, I don’t really want to meet him.
Linares is gay.
One could say that his personality is the most intense out of all SS-rank adventurers.
“Umm……”
“Allow me to introduce you, Miss Finne. This guy is [the Bipolar Divine Fist], Ronald Linares. His
nickname is Lina though.”
“No, no. don’t just casually use my full name like that. Don’t you have any delicacy in you?”
“Linares. This is Miss Finne von Kleinert of the Adracia Empire. You should have heard about her from
the rumors right?”
“Yes, I heard. The most beautiful woman of the Empire, the Blau Mowe. She exceeded the rumors. You
truly are beau〜tiful.”
“It, It’s a pleasure to meet you. Linares-sama. Please call me Finne.”
Saying so, Finne gracefully bows.
Then Linares looks at her from top to bottom.
“——So wonderful! Perfect! Not only the appearance, the gestures, the atmosphere, everything is so
beautiful! I have never seen such a beautiful girl other than me!!”
“Thank you very much.”
Finne obediently accepted Linares’s praise.
As you can see, Linares has a high opinion regarding his own beauty. It is so high that he could
compare himself to Finne.
Well, it was because he has such a high standard of aesthetic that he chose to stay inside a Singularity
though.
The reason this guy travels from Singularity to Singularity is for his own training and his sense of
beauty.
For his training, he wants to push himself to train in a place with strong magic power and for his
beauty, he thinks that by staying in a place like this, he can polish his beauty even further.
1865
He is also developing beauty products using Greenglow flower, this guy’s aesthetic sense is quite
thorough.
This is why Bipolar was attached to his nickname. Strength and Beauty, Man and Woman. It is because
he is extremely thorough in those things that he is called the Bipolar Divine Fist.
“Silver, even though you are still wearing that ugly mask, you managed to bring me such an amazing
child! You two are like chalk and cheese though!”
“My bad for wearing this ugly mask then. I have something to talk about with you today. For the time
being, care to invite us into your house?”
“I don’t want a lame guy like you in my house but since Finne is with you I will make an exception.
Follow me.”
“Thank you! Lina-sama!”
“AHH! You are being so formal! Since we are both beauties, let’s just ditch the honorifics okay!”
“No! I wouldn’t want to be so rude!”
“You don’t have to be reserved, you know!”
“Th, then, Lina-san……”
“My, that’s great. I brew my own special tea you know. It’s great for beauty too! Silver, you stay a little
distance away from us okay.”
“Yeah, yeah.”
I followed Linares while letting out a sigh.
It seems that Linares doesn’t like my mask as he complains about it every time we meet. I bought
Finne with me this time because he might not listen to what I want to say and it seems that was the
right call.
Linares has a twisted sense of aesthetics when it comes to himself but the standard of beauty he has
on others is quite normal.
For Linares who is so fussy about beauty, I thought that he would definitely take a liking to Finne.
Now, the first stage is cleared.
After a short walk, a fancy house finally came into sight.
Well, he did great building this kind of house on top of a mountain………
“Welcome to my house.”
1866
Saying so, Linares invites Finne inside. When I tried to follow from behind, Linares repeatedly shakes
his head as if he hates the very idea of me stepping into his house. Just how much does this guy hate
this mask?
The interior was quite feminine. it seems that he is quite particular about choosing his furniture as
there is only light purple stuff, the same color as his hair, inside this house as far as I can see.
“This room has a beautiful shade of purple! It suits Lina-san’s look really well!”
“Right! Ahh! So you understand!”
“………”
One could say that Finne has the natural talent to praise something that others wanted to be praised.
Getting on the good side of her opponent means that she can carry out a negotiation to her advantage.
Being an ambassador might be Finne’s calling huh.
Thinking so, Linares pulled out a chair for his guest.
Yes, only for Finne.
“What about me?”
“Just stand. If you touch my furniture then I will punch you all the way back to the Empire alright?”
“…….”
The words, ‘Then I will just blow this house up’ almost slipped out of my mouth but I hold it in.
We might have a chance persuading him with Finne, I don’t want to ruin it now.
And thus, we start persuading Linares.
1867
SPT Chapter 286
Special thanks to Doubletap again!! Wow, my vein is full of caffeine right now
Sorry for the delay tho, I experienced some power outage here.
-Mr.Graverobber
Aesthetics
“Alright, let’s hear it.”
“Well–
“No one asks you, I’m asking Finne. If you want to talk to me then take off that lame mask first.”
“………”
This damn guy…….!
My cheeks involuntarily cramped up but without me saying anything, Finne continues the talk.
“Then please allow me to explain. Have Lina-san heard about how Silver-sama got involved with the
Empire’s recent conflict?”
“Are you talking about the subjugation of the United Kingdom’s Holy Dragons I wonder? Being
accused of taking the Empire’s side with just the subjugation of two Elder Dragons, the matter is quite
exaggerated isn’t it.”
“However, those dragons were the guardians of the United Kingdom. His intervention saved the
Empire and forced the rebels to withdraw. The Council judged that an SS-rank adventurer shouldn’t
intervene in such a situation and they are currently trying to conduct an inquiry into Silver-sama’s
action.”
“How idiotic. Calling them [Holy Guardian Dragons] was their own business. We left them alone
because they only used the dragons to protect their country. If they used those dragons for invasion
then those dragons are just monsters. It’s the same as in the SS-rank adventurers case. If we act
outside the framework of SS-rank adventurers, we would become one of the most dangerous people
on the continent you know.”
“The Council argues that Silver-sama has acted out of that line in this incident. They said that Silver-
sama has favored the Empire too much.”
“I see. That’s a nice argument they have there. So? What is their real intention?”
1868
“I believe that they want to put SS-rank adventurers under the Council’s jurisdiction. If Silver-sama
agrees to be under the Council’s jurisdiction then it will set a precedent. I think that they will try to use
this to deprive all SS-rank adventurers of their freedom in the future.”
Hearing Finne, Linares smiled.
He then stood up silently and started preparing tea.
During that time, Finne doesn’t say anything.
People need time to think after all.
“Here, Finne.”
“Thank you.”
Linares offers Finne the tea. Sure enough, there’s none for me. Well, I don’t really mind since I can’t
drink it anyway.
Finne thanked him and smelled the tea scent.
“This has a nice scent. It calms me down.”
“Right? Greeglow flower is great for making medicine but it’s not so good for making teas. That’s why I
had to try a lot of things to make it delicious. It’s really good for your beauty you know.”
“That must be why you have such beautiful skin, Lina-san.”
“Ahhh! You are so good at praising me!”
Saying so, the two begin chatting by themselves.
The topic has nothing to do with the matter at hand but Finne responds to him with a smile.
It can be said that this is also one of Finne’s talents. Her patience really knows no limit.
I understand that waiting is also a tactic in negotiation but you need mental strength to carry it out.
Perhaps because of that, Linares finally returned to the main topic.
“…..this is only my personal opinion but…..”
“Yes.”
“It was also partly Silver’s fault that he was accused of taking the Empire’s side. Adventurers should
avoid getting involved in politics as much as possible. The higher your rank is, the stronger your
influence will become. After all, the more power we have, the more impact we can cause. I’ve been
thinking about this for a long time you know. Since you can use transfer magic, Silver, you should have
1869
stationed yourself at the Guild Headquarters and use your magic whenever the Guild issues an
emergency request. Wouldn’t it be more efficient that way?”
“You want me to cover the entire continent by myself?”
“I am telling you that you shouldn’t limit yourself to the Empire alone. I do recognize your power you
know? I don’t know about one-on-one fights but there are no SS-rank adventurers that can beat you in
terms of the variety of things you can do.”
“That’s surprising. So you do recognize my power huh.”
“Of course. I always give my recognition to anyone that earns it. So what do you think? The Council
wouldn’t oppose such a proposition, right? It’s not a bad thing considering the benefit the people of
this continent will get either.”
Linares’s eyes were trying to probe me.
Well, how should I answer this?
If I am accused of taking the Empire’s side then just relocate to the Guild Headquarters and offer my
transfer magic for the Guild’s use. Certainly, the Guild won’t have any ground to complain about such a
proposition.
Not a bad proposal at all.
However, if that happens, it will be difficult for me to move inside the Empire.
The problem comes down to my real identity.
When I was thinking that way, Finne quietly raised her voice.
“That won’t do.”
“Ara? Why so? This will benefit the people. It’s the basic principle of us adventurers you know?”
“However, before being an adventurer, everyone is a person. We have places that we want to live in,
people that we want to be with. It would be too high-handed to force someone to throw it all away.
With that proposal, all the burden will only get concentrated on Silver-sama.”
“That’s why I told you. He did it to himself.”
“I don’t think so at all. Silver-sama is doing his best within his reach. If that is wrong then just what do
adventurers believe in?”
“I am not saying that it’s wrong. There would be no problem if he is an ordinary adventurer but Silver
is an SS-rank. It is a fact that Silver’s presence gives the Empire more power and his action already
proved it.”
1870
“The Empire is already a superpower before the appearance of Silver-sama. Without Silver-sama, the
Empire would just come up with a countermeasure for our own problems. It is only sophistry to
connect the strength of Silver to the Empire’s national power. At most, the only real benefit would be
that the Empire doesn’t need to spend money to lure high-ranking adventurers to set up base in our
territory.”
“That’s right. The Empire is a powerful nation. One could say that it is the strongest nation on the
continent. This is exactly why other countries are complaining. And their complaints are not that far
off the mark too. Silver has based himself inside the Imperial Capital. Just by having the doubt if he
will suddenly show up on the battlefield alone will put considerable psychological pressure on the
Empire’s opponents. Having multiple high-ranking adventurers won’t exhibit the same effect you
know.”
For a moment, Linares and Finne’s eyes intersect.
Both are staring at each other without saying a word.
High-level psychological warfare is unfolding.
“Even if it seems like Silver-sama’s presence only benefits the Empire, he has also traveled to
neighboring counties. The case where he subjugated the Sea Dragon in the Principality’s waters is a
good example. Because we are located at the center of the continent, the whole continent will benefit
from Silver’s presence at the Imperial Capital.”
“You want others to ignore the disadvantages because of the advantages you provide huh? Then for
example, if a foreign country develops a technique to freely manipulate monsters and use them in
their army, will Silver just wipe out those monsters along with the army? That is not the problem that
other countries can just ignore you know.”
“In that case, he would only be following the basic principle of adventurers. To act for the people is to
eliminate the possible threat to them in advance. That is the adventurers’ job. Even Lina-san would do
the same in such a situation right?”
In response to Finne’s words, Linares shows a satisfied smile.
“Alright. I will cooperate with you.”
“Thank you very much!”
“I thought that if you get shut down by me then you stand no chance against those old foxes in the
council so I tried that out but…….there doesn’t seem to be a problem. To be honest, I hate being in
charge of the negotiation you see.”
“Please allow me to take on that task myself.”
“Thanks. It’s SS-rank adventurers’ job to rampage, right? None of us is exactly good at negotiating you
see.”
1871
“Could you not group me with you.”
“You are the subject of the inquiry right? You lack the power to convince them. After all, no matter
how good your defense is, they won’t care unless you have someone else to present them.”
Saying so, Linares mockingly grins at me.
I really can’t handle this guy.
“Ah, that’s right. I won’t be doing this for free you know.”
“The compensation is it? If it’s something that I can do then…….”
“No, that won’t do. The person himself has to pay the price.”
“What?”
“Take off that ugly mask. If you do that then we are square.”
“Eh!?”
Finne stares at Linares in surprise.
It seems that he will not help us unless I remove the mask.
“Fine.”
“S, Silver-sama!?”
Leaving the panicked Finne aside, I remove the mask.
Then I show my face to Linares.
“……are you taking me for an idiot?”
“No, I’m serious though?”
“I can’t see your so-called seriousness at all. I mean, your face is covered in black. You are just hiding it
with magic aren’t you.”
“I don’t remember being told not to hide my real face though.”
“YOUU…….! I can just blow away that magic cover you know?”
“If you are fine with breaking your favorite room then do it.”
“……you really are an unpleasant man.”
“Calling it smart would be more preferable.”
1872
Saying so, I put on the mask again.
Seeing that, Linares frowned.
“When I told you to take off the mask I mean permanently you know? I don’t want to cooperate with
someone wearing something lame you see.”
“Then you should have specified so from the start. I accepted the deal because it was only temporary
after all.”
“You are shameless, you know that…..!”
If he has a handkerchief with him he’s probably biting on it by now.
When I grin at him, Linares seemed like he could just punch me at any moment.
Seeing that, Finne tries to calm him down.
“Li, Lina-san! Let me make up for it myself!”
“….it’s okay. A promise is a promise. A promise is something that you hold yourself accountable to
your past self. It’s beautiful because you have to protect it. Unlike that shameless man over there, I am
not so despicable you know.”
“Your sense of aesthetic is wonderful, I will give you that.”
“Shut up! I don’t want to be praised by you! Seriously!”
Linares started to get angry and take me and Finne out of the house.
Then, he speaks to us in a serious tone.
“Now, let’s go. I have to teach those ugly people not to put a free bird in a cage. Birds are free and
beautiful after all.”
“No, I will come to pick you up just before the inquiry. I still have to look for Noname after all.”
“Noname? That child told me that he was going to visit a dungeon you know?”
“A dungeon?”
Somehow, a valuable clue just came to us from an unexpected place.
1873
SPT Chapter 287
It’s almost new year. I’m thinking about taking a break for a week or two. let’s see this sunday though.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Abnormal Goal
Leaving Linares behind, I and Finne headed to the dungeon located in the eastern part of the Sokol
empire.
This dungeon is where Noname is supposed to be.
“This is my first time in a dungeon!”
“Well, dungeons are rare these days after all.”
Dungeon is a general term for locations such as ruins of ancient civilization or ones that were made by
the Demons.
Most of the time, even getting inside one is already difficult and even when you manage to enter, you
will need to deal with monsters and various defense mechanisms.
Monsters found in these dungeons are mostly rare monsters such as those that survived in isolation or
new species that became adapted to the dungeon’s special environment.
On the defense mechanisms side, since they were built in the ancient era of the magic civilization,
there are many powerful ones and even their wreckages can fetch high prices.
Everyone knows well what the word dungeon entails. Still, even with the danger they post, people
continue to traverse the dungeons.
The reason?
Deep inside the ruins of the ancient magic civilization, there lies the precious items that can no longer
be reproduced, and for the ones that were made by the Demons, there are many relics that were made
during the Demon King Army era that can be obtained.
Knowing what they are standing to gain, people continued to dive into the dungeons even while
knowing their danger.
“Being a magically advanced country that it is, Sokol empire is very active in excavating dungeons.
Right now, it is probably the country that has the highest rate of new dungeons discovery.”
While saying so, an artificial door that was built into the mountain came into sight.
1874
It must be some kind of facility made in the ancient era.
Precious tools and weapons are probably sleeping inside this place.
If Noname is here then there’s no need to doubt that.
“That guy loves this kind of place after all.”
“Noname-san loves this kind of dungeons?”
“I guess you could say that. It is perfect for his hobby and he can make a profit here too.”
“Hobby and profits?”
“Noname is full of mysteries. He has been active as SS-rank adventurers for more than half a century
already. Still, I don’t see his ability declining at all. I don’t know if he is a human or demihuman but
what he always does is raising the level of his magic sword.”
“Raising level? Does he train himself to handle his sword better?”
“No. His beloved sword is the [Dis Pater]. When it comes to magic swords, it is probably the strongest
of its kind. Its special power is to devour magic power. A magic sword that can grow stronger by
absorbing magic power.”
“There is such a magic sword too…….”
Finne muttered in surprise.
A magic sword that can grow has already surpassed the concept of magic sword.
“His goal is to surpass the Holy Sword with this magic sword. For that purpose, he has been capturing
dungeons and defeating powerful monsters. The reason why he chose the Empire is that it is easy for
him to find new dungeons.”
“The Holy Swords, you mean the Holy Sword Elna-sama is wielding right……? He wants to surpass
that?”
“Well, for those who know how powerful the Holy Sword is, it might sound like something ridiculous
but……..Noname is seriously trying to surpass it.”
An SS-rank adventurer is seriously trying to surpass the Holy Sword.
It is something that has never been done before. After all, the Holy Sword is the strongest weapon on
the continent.
It is the strongest trump card of humanity that once was used to destroy the Demon King.
Then what does it mean to surpass that?
1875
The Holy Sword is a weapon that can only be used by a handful of the Amsberg family. In other words,
to surpass the Holy Sword is to surpass the Amsbergs.
“Surpassing the Hero. That is Noname’s goal.”
I explained that to Finne while entering the dungeon.
As a person from the Empire, hearing Noname’s goal made Finne doubt his sanity. She seems to find it
incomprehensible to the extent that she can’t afford to enjoy her first trip inside a dungeon.
Honestly, when I first heard of this, I was taken aback as well.
Even the Holy Sword used by Elna is not yet complete. The Holy Sword has yet to reveal its true
power. However, I can’t imagine something that can even surpass its current state.
“As expected of an SS-rank adventurer……”
“It is because he has such a goal that he is one of the most abnormal people on the continent. What
really set him aside is how he doesn’t choose his means to accomplish it.”
I let out a troubled sigh.
He’s an SS-rank adventurer because he doesn’t choose his means to accomplish his goal.
The Dis Pater can absorb magic power from both monsters and other magic swords. The requirement
for its absorption is to destroy the absorption target. The moment the Dis Pater defeats a monster or
destroys a magic sword, it will absorb their magic power and strengthen itself.
By becoming an SS-rank adventurer. You can fight extraordinary monsters and criminals. It’s perfect
for growing his magic sword.
“I first met him two years ago when he told me that he couldn’t find any more dungeons within the
Sokol empire.”
“As a magically advanced nation, they would never neglect to investigate new dungeons. If the
discovery rate of new dungeons has dropped all across the continent then he shouldn’t be surprised if
fewer dungeons can be discovered inside Sokol isn’t it.”
Even though the number is few, the Sokol empire has put much of its effort to discover new dungeons.
However, if another country puts in the same effort then there is no doubt that they will find more
dungeons within their territory.
“That’s why that guy told me that he’d like to expand his search into the Empire as well.”
“That’s…..as expected…….”
“Two SS-rank adventurers would give too much power to a single country. Back then, that was the
reason I used to make him give up……”
1876
When he possesses such an abnormal goal, there is no way that Noname would just give up with that.
This is just a guess but the SS-ranker who appealed to the Guild’s upper management in the Spirit
Turtle case is probably Noname. From the reaction of the other guys so far, I didn’t get the feeling that
they have something against me at all.
There is a good chance that he did something to get me to leave the Empire.
In that case, it would be very difficult to persuade him.
He might tell me to leave the Empire in return after all.
I don’t mind leaving the Empire. Linares also came up with the same proposal. The main idea here is
to have no SS-rank adventurer in the Empire after all.
However, the problem would be if Noname moved into the Empire in my place.
I don’t think that Noname would have a good relationship with the Amsbergs.
“I would be troubled if he comes to the Imperial Capital to pick a fight with Elna too…..”
“The Imperial Capital will end up destroyed…..”
“I can assure you that he will do that someday. When he is convinced that his magic sword has
surpassed the Holy Sword that is.”
Saying so, I looked around.
There are wreckages of Armored Dolls around us. They are probably a type of defense mechanism
designed to defend this place.
They were all destroyed. Thoroughly at that.
Thanks to that, I and Finne can traverse deeper inside without any obstacles.
Judging from this, Noname is probably crushing all of his obstacles as he makes his way into the
dungeon.
That’s like him.
“Maybe he already left?”
“No, he’s below us. I can sense his unique magic power.”
Accurately speaking, it is not his magic power that I sensed.
Noname is an SS-rank adventurer that possesses tremendous strength. However, there is a different
kind of magic power swirling around him.
1877
It is the magic power of Dis Pater.
“I brought you along because if I come here alone, it might end in a fight……are you scared?”
“No, I am fine as long as I am with Silver-sama.”
“Usually I would say that you can leave it to me but I am not so confident this time. At worst, if it
comes to battle then we will run away with transfer magic. Fighting him while protecting you might
end up making me into food for his magic sword after all.”
Noname doesn’t lay his hand on other SS-rank adventurers because of the possibility of retaliation. He
might even get stripped of his title as SS-rank adventurer as well.
However, now I have a handicap named Finne, and the Guild currently setting their eyes on me.
Under these conditions, there is a possibility that this is a setup. Well, I don’t think that he would start
something right in front of Finne though.
Even like that, he is still an adventurer after all.
Still, I can’t say for sure that he won’t.
I and Finne went down the long flight of stairs.
Then we found ourselves in a ridiculously wide open space. It seems to be an underground facility.
It may have been an ancient experimental site. The open space here is wide enough to conduct a
military exercise.
At the center, stand the wreckage of a giant armored doll.
And a person.
“——Noname.”
When I called his name, he looked back.
Although it was right after a battle his white clothes and black mask are completely clean.
In his hand is a terrifying black magic sword.
“Good day, Silver. What kind of business do you have with me today?”
TLN: Dis Pater is the name of Roman God of the Underworld
1878
SPT Chapter 288
Double thanks to Double tap!!! and Merry Christmas to Y’all!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Result of the Discussion
His words are polite. However, the voice is neither high nor low. I can’t tell if it belongs to a man or a
woman.
Not only the voice, but his gender also can not be determined with his mannerism. His mask probably
possesses the same effect as mine.
This person whose age, gender, or name can not be determined is Noname.
“Business huh. You should already know what I want to say right?”
“You said it as if I set this up. I have taken a handoff approach regarding your inquiry you know. The
Council simply succumbed to the pressure from the other countries, that’s all.”
“My inquiry, huh.”
“Yes. it is as you guessed. I was the one who filed my complaint to the council regarding the Spirit
Turtle incident. With all the incidents lately, you were the only one who gets the credit right.”
“So it was you after all.”
“Personally, I drew up a scenario where you become fed up with the Empire and when the S-rank
adventurers failed to subdue the Spirit Turtle, I would defeat it myself and replace you as the Empire’s
sole SS-rank adventurer. Still, you sure flipped my expectations.”
I guess I could say as expected of an SS-rank adventurer huh.
Even though he just admitted that he crossed me, I couldn’t feel any shred of fear from him at all. He is
talking about it like it is someone else’s business.
“That’s a shame wasn’t it.”
“Yes, it really was. Honestly, Sokol has already run out of patience with me as well.”
“It was because you immediately captured any dungeons they found right.”
“Dungeons are the most efficient method after all. Most monsters will immediately run away when
they sense the power of my magic sword. There is no escape for them inside the dungeons you see.”
1879
“So you only value Sokol because of their dungeons huh. Their citizens will cry if they hear that you
know.”
“I’m fine with letting them cry though. I hate them for all their demihuman discrimination anyway.”
“Hou? Hearing something honest like that from you is quite surprising. Then why have you based
yourself inside their territory for so long?”
Noname lightly shrugs at my words.
Was he serious or was he only acting? I can’t tell. And I am quite good at telling such a thing apart too.
“I do have my opinion about them but my goal is much more important to me than my opinion. To
make my magic sword stronger, I need more dungeons. Sokol empire is the only nation that took the
initiative in discovering new dungeons and supporting the adventurers for capturing them. That’s all
there is to it.”
“And they finally exhausted their usefulness so you decided to jump ship?”
“Yes. I hear that the Empire is a good country and I expect them to have a lot of unexcavated dungeons
as well. The only problem I have is that the Guild won’t allow 2 SS-rank adventurers to settle in the
same country.”
“I guess so. The Empire will probably don’t allow it as well. Too much medicine can become a poison
after all.”
Having adventurers to deal with monsters is like having medicine for your country. Among the
adventurers, one could say that SS-rank adventurers are a particularly powerful drug. Having two in
your country would be like swallowing a powerful poison instead.
That’s why in order to get the result Noname wants, he has no choice but to eliminate me.
“Exactly. You were an obstacle for me who wanted to get in the Empire and now the Council has their
eyes on you. The people of the Council favor me relatively well so after the inquiry if I put in my
request to relocate to the Empire, there should be no problem.”
“You think the Empire will allow that?”
“They will. With internal and external conflicts, they would have to be vigilant against monsters
without the presence of an SS-rank adventurer. The Empire has been heavily ravaged by monsters
these days and the overall quality of their adventurers is low. One could say that they are quite reliant
on you to combat the monster threat.”
That’s why they will accept me.
Noname concluded.
I see. What a guy. It really shows how terrifying he is thinking that he put so much thought into his
actions.
1880
However.
“You heard him? Miss Finne.”
“Yes. Unfortunately, the Empire does not accept you. Noname-sama.”
“Do you have the authority to say that? Miss Finne von Kleinert.”
“So you know.”
“Of course. The rare beauty with a blue seagull hair ornament. There is no reason not to notice your
identity. However, that’s a shame. It seems you are Silver’s ally huh?”
“I was sent to the Adventurer Guild Headquarters as an Imperial Ambassador. My opinion is one with
the Empire. Silver-sama has done his best for the sake of our country. We have no intention to accept
the inquiry nor any attempt to remove Silver-sama.”
“Hou?
A noble lady.
That was probably how Noname viewed Finne but it seems that his opinion of her changed because of
her reply.
Finne was not selected as an ambassador just because of her fame.
She has the skills required to be an ambassador and she has the experience of conducting the secret
maneuvers with me.
She should be able to handle even a minister of foreign affairs from another country.
“If you do not accept me then what do you plan to do? I think that your country is in quite a difficult
position though?”
“It is exactly as you said. However, you have also contributed to said difficult situation as well.”
“I am sorry for that. I intend to make up for it with my work.”
“That is alright. Even if Silver-sama has to leave the Empire after the inquiry, there is already another
SS-rank adventurer inside the Empire after all.”
“…….Elder Egor huh. I’m surprised that the old man is still in the Empire. But that old man’s quirk is
that he can’t settle down in one place. I do not think that he will stay in the Empire for long.”
“That doesn’t matter. Suppressing the rebels and intercept the foreign invasions. If he stays with the
Empire until everything is over, then Silver-sama can return to the Empire again. If the Council is that
prone to other countries’ pressure then after the conflict is over, I see no reason for them to not
succumb to our pressure as well.”
1881
Egor is currently staying inside the Dwarven Village for Sonia.
He will stay with the Empire at least until Gordon’s rebellion is completely suppressed. What happens
after that will depend on his mood but Finne’s assessment is correct.
If he can stay with us to that point then the Empire can just pressure the other countries to stop
pressuring the Guild as the victorious country. If that happens, the Council will lose grounds to raise
any complaints toward me.
“I am quite hated it seems.”
“That is a given with your goal is it not.”
“……I simply want to create a magic sword that can surpass the Holy Sword though.”
“That is the same as surpassing the Hero, the symbol of our country. As long as you have set such a
goal for yourself then the Empire can not cooperate with you.”
“I see. You are quite a capable lady huh. By the way, Silver. The fact that you came to me means that
you have already gained the cooperation of the other SS-rank adventurers right?”
“Of course. You are the one that is the most unlikely to cooperate after all.”
“It is all to achieve my goal. I have nothing against you personally. But I understand. I will cooperate
with you in this inquiry. Even if I choose to be on the Council’s side, the vote can be overturned with 4
SS-rank adventurers. All I can do is only sway some council members who favor me to my side
but……..I wouldn’t want to be in their debt. It would all come to waste if it ends up interfering with my
goal after all.”
Saying so, Noname raises both of his hands as if to announce his surrender.
By bringing Finne with me, I was able to remind him that the Empire would not accept Noname. Now
he has no reason to not help me.
“Give up on the Empire and look for another country.”
“I will do that. However, it was not just because of the dungeons that I wanted to relocate to the
Empire.”
“Hou?”
“It was because I want to confirm something that I wanted to go to the Empire. I want to see how
much different my magic sword is from the current Holy Sword. That was what I wanted to know.”
“…….You intend to pick a fight with the prodigy of the Brave house?”
“Please. I only wanted to see the Holy Sword with my own eyes. But you have already seen it haven’t
you. Being as powerful as you are, you should be able to tell the difference between the power of my
1882
magic sword and the Holy Sword. That’s why what I ask in return for my cooperation is a match with
you. Silver.”
Saying so, Noname pointed his jet-black magic sword, the Dis Pater, at me.
In the end, it has come to this huh……
1883
SPT Chapter 289
Merry Christmas (Finally)!!
Enjoy the chap!!
Also special thanks to the Christmas coffee, Goal-kun exploded again lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
SS‐rank VS SS‐rank: First Part
“I don’t mind fighting you but I want to refrain from doing it now.”
“May I ask why?”
“First, we have Miss Finne with us. Second, I’ve already used transfer magic many times today. I don’t
want to spend more of my magic power than necessary.”
Hearing my reasons, Noname nodded.
He then walked to the underground experimental site.
When I was wondering what he is intending to do, Noname broke the door and went inside.
“So the concept of normally opening the door doesn’t exist for him huh…..”
“He’s quite free-spirit isn’t he……”
When I and Finne were astounded at his action, Noname came back with something in his hand.
Perhaps it was his goal in capturing this dungeon.
Then, Noname throws it at me.
“This is……”
“It is a bracelet with jewels installed on it. It is filled with magic power so it should take over the
burden of magic power consumption. You should know how to use one, no?”
“Of course, I know……….but this kind of magic tool is quite valuable you know?”
“You can use it. I can give you the items behind that door as well. The Dis Pater also has its own taste
you see. Unless its prey can move, the efficiency of the magic power absorption rate isn’t so good. I
have no need for a magic tool like this one.”
He really couldn’t care less about anything other than his magic sword huh.
1884
The giant armored doll that Noname took down earlier must have been protecting many experimental
magic tools lying behind that door.
But Noname has no interest in any of that. No matter how valuable it is, if it doesn’t help raise the level
of his magic sword, it’s just a junk item to him.
It is not that bad of a deal for me. I can gain Noname’s cooperation and even get my hands on valuable
magic tools.
However, I hesitate to fight Noname right now.
“Just how much do you want to fight me?”
“It is not that I want to fight you. I only want to see the power of Dis Pater. Besides, if I leave this fight
for later, you might run away using transfer magic after all. I do not wish to get cheated on you see.”
If it’s now, you will take me on seriously right?
Saying so, Noname points the Dis Pater at me.
It seems unless I face him, he won’t let us leave huh.
“Miss Finne. Can you head back first?”
“However……”
“If you are here, I can’t fight.”
“……I understand.”
Finne seems like she wanted to stay but once I said that to her, she gives up and takes a step back.
Sorry, but if you get injured then we won’t be able to win the inquiry.
I open the transfer gate back to the Guild Headquarters.
“……I pray that you won’t get hurt.”
“I will try to avoid that as much as I can.”
Saying so, Finne entered the transfer gate and returned to the Guild Headquarters.
The only ones left were me and Noname.
I sigh and put on the bracelet.
Good grief. And I have been putting in efforts to avoid a direct fight with SS-rank adventurers too.
So he’s the only one that I can’t avoid a fight with huh.
1885
“Noname. I have one thing to say before we fight.”
“What is it?”
“You can’t complain even if that mask got peeled off your face you know?”
“That’s exactly how I want it.”
At that moment.
The magic power of me and Noname swelled up and the underground experimental site began to
tremble.
“Here I go.”
Saying so, Noname immediately closed the distance.
I parried away the Dis Pater that was swung at me with no hesitation with multiple barriers.
The Dis Pater made contact with the barrier and the barriers were cut down like paper.
Judging that the barriers won’t be able to take the blow from his sword, I cast a spell toward the Dis
Pater.
[[Descend to me, the Thunder of Blood——–Bloody Lightning]]
A giant reddish-black thunder hits the Dis Pater and causes an explosion.
The impact from the explosion causes the ground of the underground experiment site to violently
shake.
This is a challenge to see whether Noname will be satisfied first or the facility will collapse first.
I kicked the ground and let the wind pressure from the explosion carry me away from him to widen
the distance and look back at the smoke risen from the explosion.
He isn’t someone who would fold with only something at that level.
Sure enough, Noname’s figure slowly appeared from the smoke. And of course, there is not even a
single scratch on him.
“How was it? My blow compared to the Holy Sword’s.”
“It can’t be compared to that as it is now. If the prodigy of the Brave Family used the Holy Sword to
attack me at that distance, I would not be able to escape unscathed.”
“I see. The Holy Sword sure is scary isn’t it. As expected.”
1886
While saying so, Noname gathers magic power into the Dis Pater.
Even while praising the Holy Sword, it seems he has no intention to lose at all.
In truth, the power of Noname is not only at this level.
The nickname of [Void Crusher] was given to him because he could destroy everything that exists just
by wielding the Dis Pater.
If Noname was serious then the armored dolls guarding this facility would not remain intact.
There’s no doubt that he held back quite a bit in the earlier attack.
I don’t know the full extent of Dis Pater’s ability but I know its type. It does not change its shape like
Lynfia’s magic sword nor manipulate attribute magic like Ignat’s.
It has no petty trick. Like the Holy Sword, it is a magic sword that will destroy its target with
overwhelming power. That’s the basis of Dis Pater.
However, even while gathering magic power inside Dis Pater, Noname does not take the stance to
unleash it.
“What’s wrong? If you are worried about this place then this will take forever you know?”
“This place would collapse if I don’t pay attention after all. Before that, I will have to hear your opinion
about something first.”
“What kind of opinion?”
“Whether my swordsmanship—– is inferior to that of Elna von Amsberg.”
At that moment, he took my back.
He moved at a speed that exceeded the detection range of my barrier huh.
I hurriedly concentrate a huge amount of magic power on my right hand.
And with that right hand, I turn around and catch the Dis Pater.
“As expected of you, Silver.”
“I’d like to say the same. I don’t really want to do this you see.”
Right now, most of my magic power is concentrated on my right hand. That was why I can catch the
Dis Pater. However, this is no way for me to fight.
If I concentrate my magic power on my right hand, the other parts of my body will be defenseless.
1887
It would be one thing if I am an expert martial artist but no matter how much I strengthen my body, I
can’t fix how clueless I am in martial arts.
Even if the power of my right hand is equal to that of a famous magic sword, the user’s movement still
remains sloppy.
That’s why I immediately take my distance.
Noname is trying to close the distance again, so to put him in check, I cast magic toward him without
chanting.
A myriad of small light magic bullets appeared around me and headed toward Noname at high speed.
Originally, this is a spell for a situation where I have to face multiple opponents at the same time but
to put Noname’s movement in check, this number of bullets is required.
However.
“Tsk…..!”
“You are skilled at this.”
While saying so, Noname continues to approach me without receiving any of the light bullets.
Still, the distance between me and Noname does not change much. Noname is still a distance away
from me.
Even with this many bullets, he couldn’t be stopped huh.
As expected of someone who is seriously trying to surpass the Holy Sword. It is nothing less of
someone who wants to surpass the Brave House.
In other words, this guy’s goal is to defeat Elna.
“I shall admit it. Your goal is not just a fleeting dream.—–However, that female hero is still stronger.”
Saying so, I snap my finger.
Earlier, when I kicked the ground to ride the blastwave.
I set up a stationary type barrier.
Its name is the Pillar Barrier.
Noname was captured by a pillar of light protruding from the ground.
Its range is narrow and it is a spell that has little use because of its scale but it is quite suitable against
a strong opponent.
1888
Now then, allow me to widen the distance.
Saying so, I keep getting further away from Noname.
1889
SPT Chapter 290
Hi there, it’s the final coffee appreciation day of the year!!!
Special thanks to Kainsz, WK, Double tap, and Jenova for the Christmas gift!!
Enjoy
-Mr.Graverobber
SS‐rank VS SS‐rank: Second Part
By the time I finished taking the distance away from him, the pillar of light shattered and Noname
walked out from the inside.
He made it seem like it was so easy to break it.
He even looked refreshing when he did it.
“Did you grasped something when I was stopped by your barrier?”
“Even if I used a barrier stronger than the earlier one and caught the prodigy of Amsberg by complete
surprise, she would be able to escape it. I am not a swordsman so I can’t tell the difference in your
swordsmanship but……the reaction speed, the instinct, the ability to read your opponent, and the
ability to detect the dangers, yours are no match for her.”
When fighting with the same weapon, what makes the difference are your physical ability and your
skill.
There is no doubt that both Elna and Noname’s physical ability is among the tops of the continent.
There may be some differences but it is not significant enough to make a difference in battle.
However, in terms of how they respond to incoming attacks, Elna is superior. This is enough to make a
difference.
When fighting the vampires, Elna showed that she could escape from my curse barrier. So far, she is
the only one capable of escaping it.
To put the cherry on top, I and Elna were fighting on the same side back then. There was no doubt that
I caught her by surprise. Still, she managed to escape it.
That is both how amazing and terrifying Elna is.
Was it thanks to the blood of the Hero flowing in her veins or was it the result of her rigorous training
and actual battle experience, I don’t know. Either way, it is proven that a surprise attack is almost
ineffective against Elna in combat mode.
1890
“I see. You are saying that I am still inferior to her in terms of defense is it.”
“You should ask Egor if it is about sword skills. Personally, I don’t think that there is that much
difference though.”
That being said, the chance he would win against Elna with her Holy Sword is slim.
After all, there is no room for petty tricks.
There’s no doubt that their fight will be an exchange of overwhelmingly powerful blows from each
other.
Noname should know that well. Even when he was told that he is still inferior to her in terms of
defense, he isn’t bitter about it at all. Naturally, the defense is important but there is something that is
even more important than that.
“Then please assess my offense as well.”
Saying so, Noname held the Dis Pater into an upper stance.
On my side, I also start preparing my defense and transfer magic.
There’s no doubt that this experimental site will collapse.
When I thought so, the magic power of the Dis Pater gradually increased.
It is not that it is gathering magic power from the surroundings, it feels more like magic power is
overflowing from the Dis Pater itself.
The intense pressure it gave off does not lose to that of the Holy Sword.
There’s no doubt that its power is comparable to the four sacred treasures.
However.
“That really is something. I can feel the culmination of your years of effort and obsession. Still, the
Holy Sword is an extraordinary weapon even among the four treasures. the strongest weapon born of
the stars. You can’t hope to win against it with only that level of power you know?”
“So you said. But this still isn’t my best.”
Saying so, black shadow overflows from the Dis Pater. It swirls around Noname and gradually
converges on the blade.
An attack that concentrates all of its power into one point huh.
That must be the highest output of Dis Pater right now.
It won’t be easy to block it.
1891
But that doesn’t mean I can’t take it.
[[That is the shield of god that cover the heavens・Like the sea of clouds that protect the clear sky・It
covers the sky and disappears like haze・It wraps around everything and covers everything・it
represents protections・it was created for all the weak・Therefore, even the Gods can not pierce it・
Therefore, this shield is undefeated and Invincible・I call upon its name——Firmament・Aegis]]
After finishing the chant, a bluish silver shield resemblance of the clouds appeared before me.
There are many defensive spells in ancient magic but the spells with the name Aegis boast a high
defensive power among them. Among all the Aegis, the Firmament・Aegis boasts the highest defensive
power.
It is even more powerful than the Aegis I used to receive the Sea Dragon Leviathan’s breath and is one
of the three defensive spells I can use.
It is doubtful at best whether I can block a blow from the Holy Sword but if it’s Dis Pater, I think that it
should be possible.
My intuition tells me that the Dis Pater is not as powerful as the Holy Sword.
Which means, Noname is not as strong as my childhood friend.
“As expected of you, Silver. I will give you my all without holding back!”
Saying so, the Dis Pater glows with a black light.
It’s clear to the eyes that the concentrated black shadow is rampaging in search of an outlet.
“Heed my voice, Dis Pater—-You are the treasure sword of the underworld・Unleash your shadow and
destroy all creations・Your lord now desires your destruction!”
Noname swings down the Dis Pater.
Then.
“Dark Shadow Slash!!”
A torrent of black shadows was unleashed toward me.
I took it with the bluish silver shield.
The torrent of black shadows continuously trying to break through the shield but the bluish silver
shield remains unwavering on the spot.
The clash can continue forever but the result will not change.
1892
The torrent of black shadows can not penetrate the bluish silver shield.
Eventually, the torrent gradually loses its power.
Even so, the shield didn’t lose its brilliance. It stood in its place, immovable.
After a while, the torrent disappeared while the shield remained unscathed. This would not have been
the case with the Holy Sword. It would at least leave a crack or at worst, it might get completely
destroyed.
“Right now you are no match for the Hero. Even the Dis Pater won’t be able to rival the Holy Sword.
That is my answer, Noname.”
“…….”
The shield disappeared and in front of me was Noname who stood there silently while holding the Dis
Pater.
That would be shocking for him after all huh. I can see that his atmosphere is completely different
now.
I can sense his agitation.
I felt sorry for Noname but I activated the magic I prepared.
“Ah, that’s right. Like I said in the beginning, no hard feelings okay?”
“What…..!?”
Noname twists his body in a hurry.
The reason being, a light bullet was heading straight for Noname.
To stop Noname’s movement, I hit some of my light bullets around.
In addition to being agitated, his reaction probably slowed down because he just unleashed a full
power blow.
I didn’t miss the chance and shot the light bullet at him.
I adjusted the trajectory so that it would nudge Noname’s mask.
As intended, the light bullet snuck past his defense and shifted his mask.
It might not be able to even leave a scratch on the mask but with my light bullet, it should be enough
to shift it a little.
“Hou? That is surprising.”
1893
“!!??”
The mask was shifted a little and I could catch a glimpse of Noname’s real face.
Only a part of the face is visible but I can see white skin, red eyes, and silver hair.
It was the face of a stunningly beautiful girl behind that mask.
It must be because of her race that she still looked so young even while she has been an SS-rank
adventurer for more than half a century, or perhaps there is a different reason.
That piqued my interest but even if I asked her, she probably wouldn’t answer.
Noname who readjusted her mask turned her hostility toward me but unfortunately, the time is up.
“Saved by the bell huh.”
When I said that, the underground test site began to collapse.
Since it would be a problem if my promised reward got crushed by the collapse, I enclosed the door
leading to the room containing the experimental magic tools with a barrier and prepared a transfer
gate.
Then, I approached Noname and grabbed her arm.
“What!?”
“Of course, we are getting out of here right?”
While mockingly smiling at Noname who asked that stupid question, I entered the transfer gate with
her.
1894
SPT Chapter 291
For the holidays, anyone have psychological, horror, or apocalyptic manga recommendation? if not
then I will be back reading novels again……
PS. Since Goal-kun was broken again we will be back coffee appreciation week after new year.
-Mr.Graverobber
Hard to tell
The destination where I and Noname transferred to was outside of the dungeon.
Noname whose arm I was holding immediately shakes me off.
“That’s quite a horrible treatment considering that I just saved you though.”
“I have never asked for your help.”
“That’s a shame. And I was prioritizing you over the promised rewards too.”
Saying so, I open a transfer gate and return to retrieve the magic tools I protected with a barrier.
For the time being, I keep the ones that seem useful for myself and toss the one that looks like it would
fetch a high price through the transfer gate.
Then a little later.
After taking most of the magic tools from there, I returned to the surface through the gate.
“That’s a surprise. You are still here huh?”
“Should I have left somewhere then? Aren’t you going to be in trouble if I just disappeared?”
“Not really. It’s enough just getting the guarantee that you will not side with the council. Besides, in
the unlikely case that you are hostile to me, I can just disclose what I saw under your mask to the
Guild too.”
“……is that a threat?”
“Take it however you want. But the fact that you are wearing that mask is because you don’t want
others to know how you look like, right? Pale color hair and sickly white skin. Those characteristics
match that of a certain race but for some reason, I can’t seem to find the biggest characteristic of that
race on you though.”
The biggest characteristic of the Vampires is their sharp canines.
1895
I could see Noname’s mouth earlier but I couldn’t see such canines at all.
Just what could this mean?
“Don’t say anything more than that. And stop thinking about it, Silver.”
“I see. It would be better if I don’t pry any more than this huh? Are you really Noname?”
“…..what do you mean?”
“You are quite different from what I heard. Including what I heard from Elder Egor and the Guild’s
personnel, Noname was supposed to be both cautious and extremely mysterious. But you don’t seem
to be that cautious to me and someone whose identity is so mysterious wouldn’t be so careless to give
me the chance to get unmasked by me either.”
Noname and Egor should have a long relationship with each other.
It is ridiculous to think that Egor would call someone like this a mysterious person. Even with his
ability alone, that old man is quite a monster among the SS-rank adventurers.
Coupling with the feeling I got from her during the fight, I couldn’t feel that she is that proficient at all.
If I have to put it in a word, she feels quite young.
There is a gap between the Noname I heard about and this person called Noname in front of me.
“I will ask again. Are you really Noname?”
“……I am Noname.”
“I see.”
It’s useless to ask anything more than this huh.
If I keep insisting on asking her then it will be the end of our conversation.
“I understand. As we agreed, I will be taking these magic tools. Will you be attending the inquiry?”
“A promise is a promise.”
“You are an honest person huh. I wouldn’t be so cooperative if someone just unmasked me though.”
“…..if you think so then why did you aim for my mask? Maybe you don’t really want my cooperation
then?”
“My bad. When I see an opponent taking on a carefree attitude, I can’t help but knock them down a peg
you see.”
A grin floats behind my mask.
1896
Noname probably felt that.
She turned away in a bad mood.
While grinning at Noname, I opened the transfer gate back to the Guild Headquarters.
“Unlike the other guys, you can behave yourself right? Stay with Miss Finne until the day of the inquiry
for me. It’s a hassle to open a transfer gate to pick you up again you see.”
“I don’t like how you said that but fine by me. It would be a hassle when you come back to find me as
well.”
Saying so, Noname tried to enter the transfer gate but I stopped her.
“Wait a minute.”
“What is it?”
“Help me carry these.”
Saying so, I handed some magic tools to Noname without waiting for her reply.
Noname clicked her tongue but perhaps she thinks that there’s no use protesting anyway, she silently
took them and entered the transfer gate.
“Still young after all……..”
It’s not that I ruled out her being a part of a long-lived demihuman race. There are many cases where
they take longer to develop their mentality due to their longevity. Of course, it is different from
individual to individual though.
However, from Egor’s assessment of Noname, I think the chance of that is quite slim. It is possible that
she might only get caught off guard earlier but I wouldn’t describe someone who got so upset by how
the attack from Dis Pater was blocked as cautious and mysterious.
After all, the Dis Pater is a magic sword that can grow stronger.
If it can be blocked by me then her attack is not on the level of the Hero yet. But that can be solved by
just becoming stronger.
If Noname can’t switch her mindset like that then she shouldn’t be able to keep strengthening the Dis
Pater for so many years. After all, there’s no use mulling about each and every failure.
Not to mention that I was still alive after her all-out attack. It is only natural for a veteran warrior to
be wary of counterattacks.
Taking that into consideration, I can only derive one conclusion.
“A second generation huh, no, maybe more.”
1897
The second generation may have inherited the goal of the first generation.
With many generations, the more mysterious Noname is.
A descendant or a disciple. Either way, she has inherited the goal to strengthen the Dis Pater, surpass
the Holy Sword, and defeat the Hero.
Become stronger and keep evolving. There must be something supporting such a goal.
Is it an obsession, a grudge, or perhaps something entirely different?
“A vampire without canines huh…..”
I have an unpleasant premonition.
In the case that a demihuman doesn’t display their characteristic feature is likely to be because their
blood is thin.
A half or a quarter, maybe even thinner.
What if—–just a what-if.
What if her family takes in various bloodlines to become stronger?
The Brave house has been protecting their bloodline. To counter them, what if they take in strong
bloodlines and entrust their descendant with their long-cherished wish.
“Just like the Imperial Family huh.”
If there really is another foolish family then it truly is saddening. The more they are serious about
their goal, the worse it will become.
The more serious they are, the more results they can show. No, they were forced to.
As long as the goal is within sight, people will continue to move toward it.
I won’t deny that. There were many cases where an idiotic approach can lead to the right answer and
there were many cases where it is wrong to think of something as foolish.
But what if their path is to tread a steep and endless road?
Is it wrong to feel sorry for their descendants who were forced to walk the same path?
One want to protect everyone on the continent, to save them.
One want to surpass the strongest Hero of the continent and their Holy Sword.
Which one is more foolish?
“Good grief…..it really is hard to tell huh.”
1898
It really is troublesome with so many serious idiots around.
While thinking so, I entered the transfer gate.
1899
SPT Chapter 292
Final chapter of the year
-Mr.Graverobber
Finne’s Inn
When I returned to Finne’s inn, I cocked my head at the restless Imperial Knights.
“What’s wrong? Did something happen?”
“Yeah, something did happen. Your SS-rank colleague, Noname showed up through a transfer gate and
he just entered the room without permission you know.”
“No common sense at all huh. Can’t even do a simple greeting it seems.”
“A person that has common sense doesn’t just transfer a stranger to someone else’s inn without
permission though? You know what I’m talking about right? This place is entirely reserved for Finne-
sama’s use, you know?”
“I know. I wouldn’t transfer Noname here otherwise. It would trouble the other guests after all. Ah,
Noname will be staying here until the inquiry so I will ask you to prepare Noname’s meal too.”
“……..”
Even when I politely asked, Olivier still sighed as if she was tired of dealing with me.
The other Imperial Knights here also look at me like I am the bad guy.
I wonder why.
Ah, I see.
“Don’t worry. I will stay somewhere else.”
“Of course you will. If you stay here too then we will die from overwork.”
“You think so? With me and Noname then you have no need to worry about the security though.”
“You two are the most dangerous factor here but even if I explain it to you, you wouldn’t understand
huh. For the time being, Noname left those magic tools here. What should we do with it?”
Olivier said as she pointed to the magic tools that were scattered randomly in the hallway.
1900
What was she thinking, treating someone else’s precious magic tools like this? She really doesn’t know
how to treat something with care huh. These will surely fetch a high price if I sell them too.
“Carry it back to the Imperial Capital for me. Those are my rewards.”
“And why do we have to carry your rewards back with us I wonder?”
“You will return to the Imperial Capital anyway so it’s not like there’s a problem right?”
“You will return too right? You can even do it in an instant.”
“Well, it’s not really a problem but it’s a waste of magic power to keep up the transfer gate from here
to the capital. So carry them back for me.”
“Can you not use us, Imperial Knights, like we are your odd jobbers………”
Olivier said so but she still instructed her subordinates to pick up the magic tools.
It’s great that she’s a flexible person. This is very convenient.
“Take good care of them okay? I got those from a dungeon after all.”
“From a dungeon…….where did you go and what did you do?”
“I only had a duel with Noname inside a dungeon in Sokol empire. The dungeon collapsed but I
managed to recover the magic tools. It was a close call though.”
“[Only]? I’m begging you, don’t start something like that inside the Empire okay?”
“Of course. I wouldn’t destroy a precious dungeon within the Empire’s territory.”
“I wasn’t talking about destroying the dungeon, I was talking about fighting with another SS-rank
adventurer. You get it right?”
“It was only a mock battle. Don’t worry, I’m always paying attention to my surroundings.”
“Only the SS-rank adventurers are capable of collapsing a dungeon with only a mock battle you know.”
“You are being noisy. Even the Hero of the Empire is capable of that right?”
“Unlike you, Elna still has some common sense.”
“That woman has common sense……?”
To me, Elna is the woman who lacks the most common sense though……
Olivier probably doesn’t know her that well yet huh.
Poor you. You will probably have to deal with a lot of headaches from now on.
1901
While giving Olivier my condolences, I headed to Finne’s room.
“Welcome back.”
“Yeah, I’m home……”
Entering the room, I erected a barrier and sat down on a chair.
That was really tiring. Not just because of Noname, it felt like all the accumulated fatigue is assaulting
me at once.
Meeting the other four SS-rank adventurers successively in a short period of time really isn’t good for
my health.
“Captain Olivier told me that Noname-san is here though?”
“Yeah, it seems like Noname intends to keep the promise. I will be leaving Noname here until the
inquiry.”
“I understand. What about the others?”
“I will pick them up on the day of the inquiry. Those guys don’t have a shred of discretion in them.”
“Lina-san was really a lively person after all. The others must be the same.”
Describing that as lively huh. It really shows how great Finne is.
I’m sure that even Leo can’t describe him like that.
As I thought, Finne is great.
While thinking so, I tried removing my mask but I stopped.
“……..Let’s not. I’m afraid of revenge after all.”
“Revenge is it?”
“Yeah. I managed to sneak a little peek under Noname’s mask you see.”
“Eh? Why……?”
“It’s kind of my bad habit but…..when I see someone acting so carefree toward me, I like seeing that
attitude of theirs crumble. It just happened.”
“You angered him even though you were trying to ask for his help? Ah! But since he came here in the
end, maybe it was for the best? Having someone to share your secret with is reassuring too.”
Finne claps her hands as she said that.
1902
Certainly, I have Sebas and Finne to share my secret with.
Maybe a person like that is necessary for Noname too.
“I see, it does make sense. After all, if you keep holding it in you will end up bursting. I also had that
kind of experience myself.”
“Yes! So let’s get along well with Noname-san!”
“Getting along huh…….but you see, the person seems to have a lot of personal circumstances too.”
“Circumstances? Then isn’t it even more necessary to support him?”
“That’s true. I would be troubled if Noname started running out of control too. But, she’s a girl.”
“She’s a girl? Then I might be able to help! I’m good at making friends with women!”
“Even if she’s a woman, she’s an SS-rank adventurer you know?”
“I’m already used to it!”
“I see. Then try getting along with her for me. Ah……keep the things that I talked about her a secret
okay?”
“It’s okay! I will talk to her without letting her know that I know she’s a woman.”
Seeing Finne confidently pumping her fists, I give her several nods.
If Finne became close to Noname then there would be no hostility towards me either. That way, there
would be no risk of failure.
Let’s leave her to Finne for the time being huh.
If they get along well then I should get to hear her circumstances too.
Even Noname has something to gain by befriending Finne. Finne is close to Elna after all.
Even if I saw her face, she still has a lot of mysteries. It would be great if I can shed some light on that.
“Then I will leave her to you. I will be in Clyde’s mansion until the day of the inquiry. Since they’ve
already decided on the date, I don’t think that they are planning any big moves for the time being but
just in case, keep in touch with the council members.”
“To prevent them from raising their caution right?”
“That’s right. If we make it look like we are being desperate then they should let down their guard. If
we are doing this then we should use the element of surprise too. It’s rare to see all SS-rank
adventurers gathering like this after all.”
1903
Saying so, I grin.
Those council members must be feeling great about themselves since they have to put me in place
with this inquiry.
They are probably thinking that their position is untouchable but that will not be the case.
If they want to hunt down someone then they should be wary of counterattacks.
Not to mention when they have an SS-rank adventurer as their opponent.
If they are going to attack me then I will have them at least preparing for their own destruction.
“I’m looking forward to it.”
“Please refrain from doing something too cruel okay?”
“It depends on how they will move. Well, for starters, let’s kick everyone who supports the inquiry out
of the council.”
“I completely agree!”
Said Finne with her cheeks inflated.
It seems Finne is also angry in her own way.
Just a little more.
Have you prepared yourself yet? Guild Council.
1904
SPT Chapter 293
I’m back!! WITH THE COFFEE APPRECIATION WEEK!!!!!
Having a vacation once a year is not bad at all.
Thank you for all your support my patrons and coffee donors who provided your precious coffee
budget in my absence, Xoan, Lessdark, plus one unnamed supporter….(seriously it ‘s hard doing
shoutout……)
This month Patron shoutout!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
AlfonzoM6
Main Heroine Tier
Jerry Gergich
Digitalpanic
Tyler Fukuda
Sub Heroine Tier
Artaril
Stefania Barbieri
Anon A Moose
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Tinsoldaat
Knifewolf
kei
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
1905
Nelson N
Shanks
Resetting the kofi goal and as we should be done with SPT and MM in a few months, I will be holding a
new series vote on patreon soon so keep your suggestion coming.
Ps. Psst, the discord link is back….
-Mr.Graverobber
Inquiry Start
The day of the inquiry finally arrived.
I was called to the council room on the upper level of Babel tower, the guild headquarters.
Since we have already finished our preparations, I immediately transfer to the council room.
“Oh, it seems that everyone has already arrived. Am I late perhaps?”
“No, you are right on time, Silver.”
Said a blonde man.
He is an obese man wearing glasses.
His eyes visible behind the glasses are slightly smiling.
The man sitting on my opposite end of the round table is Torosin.
He is the Guild Chief as well as the chairman of this council.
On his right-hand side is the Deputy Guild Chief Clyde and on his left is a tall and extremely thin man.
He has an unhealthy complexion and stares at me like I am nothing but trouble.
He is the Chief Inspector of the Guild who checks the activities of all adventurers across the continent.
The man who proposed this inquiry. His name is Pitman. One could say that he is the Guild Chief,
Torosin’s hanger-on and he is in fact obtained his current position thanks to Torosin.
The other council members are the Secretary-General who takes care of the guild’s general affairs and
the Chief of Foreign Affairs whose job is mainly to coordinate with other countries and the Director-
General who manages the Headquarters.
These six are the members of the Guild Council.
And 5 out of these 6 people agreed to have this inquiry.
1906
Why?
The reason for that is Torosin whose influence is the highest of the Guild has agreed to this inquiry.
The only one who was against this inquiry was Clyde alone.
Clyde got to his current position through the support of the adventurers on the field but he was also a
great employee of the Guild and he is known to be quite capable in his work.
As long as you are working in a huge organization like the Adventurer Guild, the higher you go, the
more skills that you can’t obtain in the field are required. Therefore, all members of the council beside
Clyde are all those who ascended from the Guild Staff.
It’s not that these people don’t know what it’s like on the field but they are undoubtedly working far
away from it.
On the contrary, if one were to ask if the adventurers can manage the Guild themselves, the answer
would be no. That’s why there has never been any dissatisfaction when the Guild Staff get promoted to
higher positions.
In fact, the Guild can still run properly with the majority of the management from the Guild Staff. Each
generation of the council always pays their respect to the SS-rank adventurers which are the highest
peak of the adventurers and they have never treated them unreasonably. After all, that is all for the
Guild’s sake.
However, the current Guild Chief, Torosin is different.
He does have the ability to stand on top of this gigantic organization with branches all over the
continent.
In Torosin’s generation, he has greatly expanded the Guild Branches and the overall influence the
Guild has over the continent has increased.
That was surely the result of Torosin’s ability but when he became the Guild Chief, he forcefully
transferred everyone who didn’t obey him to idle or meaningless positions. Judging from that, it is
clear that Torosin has no plan to allow any defiance.
That’s why, for Torosin, the existence of the SS-rank adventurers is something he can’t accept.
“Now, since Silver has arrived, I’d like to start the inquiry.”
Said Pitman as I seated myself directly opposite of Torosin.
He said that to get the approval from the other council members.
However, Clyde raised his hand to voice his objection.
“Can I say something first?”
“What is it? Deputy Guild Chief.”
1907
“It is still not too late. Would you not consider canceling this inquiry?”
“You are still saying that? This matter has already been decided.”
“I have never heard of any case where an SS-rank adventurer being subjected to an inquiry before.
This will disturb the balance between the council and the SS-rank adventurers, I hope you all
understand that.”
The council members all frown at his words.
They probably have the same concern themselves.
However.
“Clyde-kun. I think that it is much stranger that such an inquiry has never been held before you know.”
“What do you mean? Guild Chief.”
“The Guild is run by the Council. Isn’t it much stranger that the Council has no say in the SS-rank
adventurers’ business?”
“Guild Chief, there are differences between SS-rank adventurers and other adventurers.”
“I understand. Still, it doesn’t change that they are still adventurers. Now that I am the leader of this
guild, I am planning to abolish this ridiculous non-interference policy.”
Saying so, Torosin turns to me.
I know well what he wants.
He is going to thoroughly look into my recent actions and find faults with me. Then he will use them as
the reasons to put limits on my actions and jurisdiction.
Surely, he is planning to establish a precedent and move on to bring all SS-rank adventurers under the
control of the council.
However, Torosin doesn’t understand one thing.
SS-rank adventurers do not work for any organization. It was the title called SS-rank itself that was
created to somehow get cooperation from people like us.
That’s why there are no SS-rank adventurers who work under the Council. Although we are called
adventurers, the rule which we operate under is not the same.
We would perform the work if requested but otherwise we are free to act as we please. That’s what
the council of each generation understood. The fact that SS-rank adventurers are willing to take the
Guild’s request is already a compromise.
Torosin might say that he understands this relationship but his understanding is still shallow.
1908
“Silver. Do you have anything to say before we start?”
“I’d like to confirm the reason for this inquiry. Do you mind?”
“Of course. Pitman-kun.”
“Sir! SS-rank adventurer Silver has allegedly sided with the Empire. During the rebellion started by
Gordon Lakes Adler, the Third Prince of the Empire, he had subjugated two of the United Kingdom’s
Holy Dragons. Furthermore, he had taken advantage of the situation to coerce the armies of the
Kingdom and the Dominion to stop their invasion with long-range magic. This is an act that clearly
indicates that he has excessively favored the Empire. Therefore, in my opinion, this inquiry is justified!
After Pitman looked at Torosin, he turned back and stared at me.
Pitman is an inspector that travels to various branches of the Guild and from the reports he received
he has seen many problematic behaviors from the SS-rank adventurers.
Because of that, his hostility toward the SS-rank adventurers is the highest among everyone in the
council.
Well, those guys don’t have any common sense after all. Still, even if they cause problems left and
right, it’s not my fault.
“That’s what he said. Silver, are you convinced now?”
“Convinced? Not at all. Let me ask this then. At that time, what kind of action would you consider to be
the correct answer?”
“You should have contacted the Headquarters and waited for our decision.”
“Hmph……even when many lives will be lost in the meantime?”
“That is an unavoidable sacrifice. A lone SS-rank adventurer is comparable to an army. If you take part
in the battle, the one you sides with will win. This case is a good example. Through your actions, the
Guild has lost its credibility. That’s why we can’t overlook this. The Guild must always remain neutral.”
“Always neutral? Then don’t you think that my action was neutral? The Guild tolerated the existence
of the Guardian Holy Dragons because the United Kingdom has been using them to guard their
territory. Since they had sent them out for invasion, I subjugated them and restrained the armies that
took advantage of the situation. Is there any problem with that? I was fully intending to protect the
Guild’s honor you know?”
“This matter is about how you made such a decision by yourself. Besides, the Guardian Holy Dragons
still haven’t attacked the Empire at that point.”
“Once they crossed the border, they already started their invasion.”
1909
“From the United Kingdom’s side, they told us that the Holy Dragons only got excited and entered the
Empire territory. It was just an accident. The Dragon Knights were trying to calm them down but they
have testified that it was you who agitated them.”
“Then the fault would lay with the United Kingdom for their inability to bring their dragons under
control. It is an adventurer’s job to eliminate the threat before it happens.”
“Even so, you have subjugated the dragons without the Guild’s authorization. And as a result, the
Empire gained a big advantage in a situation that caused a heavy impact on the entire continent. I
won’t let you say that you don’t understand that much.”
“How laughable. How about you people start being honest? You started this inquiry because you’ve
got pressured by other countries and gave in to their influence, isn’t that right.”
Torosin’s slightly raised his brow at my words.
On Pitman’s side, he is glaring at me like he wants to kill me this instant.
The other council members also looked slightly uneasy.
They probably can’t stomach my carefree attitude huh.
“Well, that’s alright. I understand your intention now. By the way, is it alright to call in my counsel
now? It’s Miss Finne, the ambassador from the Empire.”
“I don’t mind. This matter is directly related to the Empire after all.”
Torosin gave his permission.
In response to that, I opened a transfer gate behind me.
Then, Finne appeared from the gate.
But she’s not alone.
“Good grief, it’s finally my turn huh?”
“Tsk, I’m out of rum so my mood is the worst okay.”
“Who cares, and you stink of alcohol, Jack. You already drank a lot yesterday right?”
“Shut up. That doesn’t count. Right, old man?”
“That’s right. Something like that doesn’t count at all. I can’t remember anything from yesterday
though. WaHaHaHa!”
“Please stop with the banter. Let’s quickly get this done.”
1910
Following Finne, Egor and the others came through the transfer gate and took the seats around the
round table while carefreely chatting with each other.
The council members were stunned.
It’s only natural. The council members have the impression that the SS-rank adventurers would never
cooperate with each other. In fact, since SS-rank adventurers all possess strong quirks so we rarely
come together like this. Because they think that we will never cooperate under the same goal, each of
us was given the same authority as a council member.
However, this time I have done it.
Once everyone took a seat, Noname started speaking.
“Forgive us for arriving so suddenly. I, SS-rank adventurer Noname, am participating in Silver’s
inquiry.”
“Same for SS-rank adventurer Lina〜”
“SS-rank adventurer Egor, same.”
“Seriously, do I have to say this stiff crap too? SS-rank adventurer Jack, I’m joining this inquiry. Be
grateful. I sobered up since morning for this you know.”
When everyone finished their greetings, all council members lost the color in their faces.
Putting both of my elbows on the table, I speak to them.
“Now then, everyone’s here. Shall we start this inquiry?”
Seeing Torosin’s expression distorted, I grinned behind the mask.
1911
SPT Chapter 294
Double chapter bruh…
-Mr.Graverobber
Make up your mind
“Y, You bastards! Why are you here!?”
It was Pitman who first opened his mouth.
Although the answer to that question is quite obvious, it was probably his escapism that prompted
him to raise such a question.
“Why? Didn’t we just tell you? We are here to join Silver’s inquiry.”
“I don’t remember calling you people here!”
“Why do we have to be called by you I wonder?”
“You know what I mean! Are you making a fool out of the council!”
“Ara? You take it like that? Since SS-rank adventurers have the right to participate and vote in
council’s meetings, I thought that you were making a fool out of us when we didn’t receive any
invitation you know.”
“Wh, at…….?”
Pitman turned silent.
He probably doesn’t know that huh.
Well, it’s something that you have no use for even if you know so it’s a given that he doesn’t remember
it.
“It’s true. Chief Inspector Pitman.”
“I, I know that! I was only surprised that they know! Please do not take me for a fool! Of course, I know
of such a thing.”
“That’s good then.”
Getting that pointed out by Clyde, Pitman’s face turned red as he claimed that he already knew about
the rule.
1912
Clyde doesn’t pursue the topic any more than necessary either. He probably knows that there’s no
need for him to do that.
Honestly, with all 5 SS-rank adventurers assembled here, the meeting room is quite packed.
“As an SS-rank adventurer, I am interested in an inquiry on my colleague. That’s the reason why we
would like to participate in this inquiry. Please feel free to start.”
“I won’t get in your way. I’m only here to listen in. if your concern is legitimate, I will not say
anything.”
“I’m not here to get in your way either. I’m not interested in this inquiry from the start.”
“If you are not interested then don’t come in the first place! Just leave!”
“Haa? Why do I have to listen to you? Stop being so whiny and get this over with already. If Silver
really made a mistake as an adventurer then you can punish him or whatever. Isn’t that why you are
having this inquiry? With or without us, nothing will change anyway right?”
“That is……”
Pitman turns away when Jack glares at him.
Saying that he is a coward would be unfair. After all, not many people can talk while looking at Jack
face to face.
Meanwhile, Torosin who has been silent until now opened his mouth.
“SS-rank adventurers, welcome. It’s great to see you all gathering like this. However, I didn’t expect
your arrival. My apologies, but we were planning to conduct a light interview today. An inquiry is
quite a lengthy process. Please understand that.”
Said Torosin with a smile.
I see. So his strategy is to prolong the inquiry huh.
It is certainly an effective plan. After all, there are only 5 SS-rank adventurers on the continent.
Each of us is scattered all across the continent to respond to the threat in our immediate area. Well, 2
out of 5 of us aren’t exactly easy to locate so we actually cover the continent with 3 people.
It would be impossible for SS-rank adventurers like us to all gather like this for a prolonged amount of
time considering the balance of the continent.
In short, it is not good for the five of us to stay in the same place for a long time.
However.
“That’s unacceptable. You have to finish this by the end of today.”
1913
“Please don’t be unreasonable. Linares-kun.”
“You think that is unreasonable? I don’t think so at all you know. You already have a lot of time to
prepare after all. Surely, you have already prepared the documents and necessary information right?”
“Of course. However, we can’t just use the whole day for the inquiry alone.”
“I told you. You have until the end of the day. Or do you have other reasons you can’t finish it by
today?”
“Listen to me, Linares-kun. There is no precedent for an inquiry into SS-rank adventurer’s actions
before. This is something that we should treat with caution. Don’t you think that it would be too hasty
to conclude such a thing in one day?”
“I don’t think so. You think so too right? Finne.”
Linares smiled and directed the talk to Finne who was behind me.
He can manage just fine himself but he chose to direct it to Finne instead huh.
Finne on the other hand only nodded quietly without showing any sign of restlessness.
“Yes. As an Imperial Ambassador, I seek a quick conclusion to this inquiry. As long as the Guild’s
reason for holding this inquiry involved the Empire, we would be troubled for such an accusation to
linger. After all, the Empire would hesitate to employ the help of adventurers unless we can obtain a
clear answer from the Guild. We would like the Guild to establish a common understanding as soon as
possible.”
“That is the Empire’s matter. Ambassador Finne. We have no obligation to facilitate for the Empire’s
convenience.”
“I see. So may I take it that the stability of the Continent is only a secondary concern to the Guild?”
“…….what do you mean?”
“It is as I said. Even though we have a problem regarding the relationship between one of the great
nations and an SS-rank adventurer on our hands, you choose to postpone it. This clearly is an act of
negligence to the continent’s stability as a whole. If we can not reach a quick conclusion here, it would
be synonymous with the Guild’s approval of Silver-sama’s action.”
“Isn’t that argument quite irrational?”
“Not at all, as long as the Guild does not give its answer, it would not be strange for others to take it
like that. By prolonging this, it would mean that even if similar situations happen again, the Guild will
choose to leave it alone. With a quick conclusion, the Guild can clearly display their stance in this
matter to the entire continent. Is there any reason why the Guild would choose not to do that? What
else can we call negligence if not this kind of behavior?”
Torosin turned silent.
1914
If they are on equal footing then Torosin can present his argument. However, right now Finne has the
absolute advantage.
After all.
“But I can see your reason, Guild Chief. In case of a disagreement like this, why don’t we call for a
vote?”
“You are not a member of this council.”
“We also want to settle this quickly, you know. That reasoning of yours won’t work here.”
“…..in case of a disagreement, we should carefully consider the problem.”
“Deputy Guild Chief. Do you have anything to add?”
Finne addresses Clyde.
Clyde replied while shrugging his shoulders.
“Normally, in case of a disagreement, we either have a careful consideration or a majority vote.”
“Then let’s go by majority vote. Let’s make this quick. Anyone who is in favor of a quick conclusion,
raise your hand.”
Without waiting for Torosin to regain his composure, Linares prompts everyone to raise their hand.
5 SS-rank adventurers plus Clyde raised their hand, a total of 6 votes in favor.
That decided the majority vote.
“Done.”
“Don’t mess with me! If we are talking about the responsibilities of SS-rank adventurers then Egor and
Jack shouldn’t have the right to vote! We can’t even locate you two recently!? There’s no way that you
two are allowed to vote!”
“Then you should have taken away our SS-rank title in advance. Bringing that up now is already too
late don’t you think?”
“WHAT!?”
“Just obediently start the inquiry. That’s your only option.”
“No, not necessary.”
Torosin denied.
He then looks toward me.
1915
“Silver. You are the subject of this inquiry. Your vote is invalid. With equal amounts of votes on both
sides, the chair will make the decision.”
“Then the chair’s vote should be invalid too though.”
“Unfortunately, there is no such rule. Those who think that we should take our time in this inquiry
please raise your hand.”
Torosin mockingly smiles and urges the council members to raise their hands.
In response, Linares addresses the council with a powerful voice.
“Listen well, council members. We adventurers bet our lives on the field. With the Guild Staff
supporting us at the guild, we have no complaints about how you run things here. But as long as the
reason for this inquiry is how about our way of defeating the monster, you people should prepare to
put your lives on the line too. Since we have our own lives, and the lives of civilians on the line, I will
have you people put your lives on the line as well.”
Linares’s gaze was directed at all council members.
The Director-General, the Secretary-General, and the Chief of Foreign Affairs stopped their hands.
Torosin is admonishing them with his eyes but Linares roars at them.
“STOP MESSING AROUND AND MAKE UP YOUR GODDAMN MIND!! DON’T LOOK DOWN ON US
ADVENTURERS! WE AREN’T EXACTLY KNOWN TO BE PATIENT ALRIGHT!”
“I haven’t been exercising lately so my body is a little stiff.”
“It’s been a long time since I last practiced my bow too. A building this big should serve as a nice
practice target don’t you think?”
“If you don’t intend to start the inquiry then I am going back. Please do whatever you want afterward.”
Said Noname when Torosin was urging her to stop them with his eyes.
The threat was effective.
The Director-General, the Secretary-General, and the Chief of Foreign Affairs abstain from their vote.
“It seems we have the majority huh. Let’s get started. I am not that free either. Do get this done
quickly, Guild Chief.”
Seeing my attitude getting more and more carefree, Torosin, and Pitman’s cheeks cramped up.
1916
SPT Chapter 295
Special thanks today go to Jenova, Double Tap, and another unnamed supporter !!
Now, let’s resume the inquiry
-Mr.Graverobber
Reason for Siding
“Very well……we will start Silver’s inquiry now.”
Said Pitman after he received a nod from Torosin.
Delaying it any more than this is probably impossible.
If they are going to get overwhelmed with a majority vote anyway, it would be better to just start the
inquiry.
“In this inquiry, we will look into Silver’s recent actions one by one.”
Pitman reads out the prepared document.
If my actions were to be found inappropriate for an SS-rank adventurer then there will probably be
some penalties for me.
Using that penalty, Torosin will probably try to place some limitations on my actions.
“First of all, as you all know, the Empire is currently in the middle of a succession war. The candidate
who comes out on top will receive the title of the crown prince which makes that person the next
emperor. As one of the three great nations of the continent, the conflict within the Empire which is
located at the center of the continent will have a huge impact on the continent as a whole, regarding
this the Adventurer Guild has been keeping a close eye on its development. Among the candidates for
the Empire’s throne, it appears that Silver has been favoring one of the candidates, the Eighth Prince,
His Imperial Highness Leonard Lakes Adler. To prove this allegation, we have prepared the eviden–.”
“That is correct.”
Before Pitman got the chance to cite his evidence, I admitted that it is the truth.
As he never thought that I would admit that so readily, Pitman’s mouth hangs open. Seeing him like
that, Torosin urges Pitman to proceed with a light cough.
“Ah, th, then Silver. You are admitting that you have been participating in a major political conflict
even while being an SS-rank adventurer!?”
1917
“That was what I just said.”
“This is a clear violation of the Guild’s rule! An SS-rank adventurer is equivalent to an army, not to
mention that you are representing the adventurers as a whole! We might be able to overlook this if
you are a common adventurer but when an SS-rank adventurer shows favoritism like this, it will bring
the Guild and the Adventurer’s neutrality into question! This is clearly careless action on your part!!”
Pitman is getting heated up.
In response, I shrugged my shoulders.
Lying here is not an option. If I lie in a place like this then I will end up having to follow up on it in the
future. In the first place, I already have an overwhelming advantage here. There is no point lying to
them now.
No matter how you look at it, I am clearly more involved with Leo’s faction. Pitman’s side should
already have the proof for that. It wouldn’t be a problem if I can address them one by one but if the
proof keeps piling up then they might be able to use them against me.
Since they will be able to prove it sooner or later, it would be better to just admit it right now.
“Silver. Do you have any excuse?”
Clyde worriedly asked me.
In response, I give him a nod.
“First, I will state this. I have a cooperative relationship with Prince Leonard. I have made contact with
him many times through Miss Finne here.”
“Yes. that is correct.”
“Then it is decided! Silver! Your action is clearly inappropriate for an SS-rank adventurer!”
“Vampire.”
I said that to Pitman in a small voice.
All council members cock their heads puzzling why I brought it up.
I continued with a bitter smile.
“Sea Dragon, Demons, Spirit Turtles, Holy Dragons. Do you know what I am getting at?”
“Are you listing the monsters that you have subjugated!? You think that we can tolerate your actions
with your recent achievements!? You better think again if you think that we are going to let you go
with this!”
“That’s right, they are all high-ranking monsters that I subjugated. Don’t you think that it is strange?”
1918
“What is!?”
“Even if I am an SS-rank adventurer, don’t you think that it is too strange that I have encountered so
many high-ranking monsters in such a small amount of time?”
Clyde nodded.
The other council members’ expressions also indicate that it is surely strange.
They might have become numb to the frequent appearance of high-ranking monsters.
“Originally, the Empire is located in an area with almost zero appearance of high-ranking monsters.
Even if I encounter one, it is usually a monster that escaped into the Empire from another subjugation
attempt. In other words, in most cases, they are monsters that flowed into the Empire from other
places. It is on the level that when one appears once a year, it will cause great panic to the Empire.
Well, the Sea Dragon did appear inside the waters of the Principalities but the Empire was still an
involved party.”
“So what!? Just because you encountered more monsters, it is okay for you to get involved with a
political conflict!?”
“That’s the point. These monsters have begun to appear more frequently after the succession war
began in earnest. To be specific, this happened after Prince Leonard nominated himself as a candidate.
Curiously, Prince Leonard’s candidacy seems to have something to do with the monster appearances.”
It is a matter of course. Most of the time, I and Leo were moving together and Silver only appears to
intervene when Leo is in a pinch.
However, the amount of times Leo got into trouble lately is too strange. How come he got involved in
so many incidents?
The answer is his candidacy.
“The recent appearances of high-ranking monsters is pretty much linked to the Empire’s succession
war. I don’t know about the Sea Dragon but it would not be strange to say that its seal was broken
when Prince Leonard was sent to the Principality. And the Spirit Turtle, do you think that was only a
coincidence?”
“I wonder. That thing is a natural disaster after all. Well, the fools who provoked it and broke the seal
might be involved in some kind of scheme though.”
“Even if we leave the Spirit Turtle aside, the rate of appearance is still too abnormal. Of course, I was
busy dealing with each and every one of them. Thanks to that I need time to recover my magic power.
With that being the case, I need accurate information. That’s why I was exchanging information with
Prince Leonard who is directly involved with the succession war. Of course, he does use this
information exchange to his advantage but this is still much more preferable than finding the Empire
suddenly collapsing right?”
1919
The appearance of high-ranking monsters is related to the succession war and it often involves Leo. If
you exchange information with Leo then you can make a move even in an unexpected event. Doing
that would make me appear to side with Leo but that is inevitable.
That’s what I am saying.
On the other hand, Pitman was silent.
He’s probably thinking of a way to find fault with me.
While being glared at by Pitman, Torosin opened his mouth.
“Silver. With the power you possess, surely you could have dealt with the monsters without relying on
such information, no? You may have indeed prevented the chaos from the monster appearances but it
is still true that you are shaping the history of the Empire right now. Through your intervention,
Prince Leonard is steadily approaching the throne, no?”
“To get Prince Leonard closer to the throne is to distance the other candidates from it. Don’t you think
that this will benefit the stability of the continent as a whole? After all, two of the candidates were
clearly involved in the summoning of the Demons. The Demons were summoned because a girl with
innate magic went berserk. Princess Zandra was involved with the organization that kidnapped the
girl and a faction inside the Imperial Army was involved with the experiment responsible for making
children with innate magic went berserk. The leader of that faction is Prince Gordon. I wouldn’t mind
if you praise me for keeping those two away for the throne you know?”
Even the council has not grasped the confidential information of the Empire.
If they dig deeper then they should find that all candidates besides Leo are dangerous.
In that case, the only option is to push Leo to the throne.
However.
“Even so, that is no excuse for you to get involved in a political conflict. You should have contacted the
Guild with that information and asked for our support.”
“Would you dispatch reinforcement if I asked?”
“Of course.”
“I see. But unfortunately, I do not trust you. It would only increase my trouble if you dispatch someone
to get in my way instead.”
“You should stop using baseless conjecture like that.”
“It is not a baseless conjecture. I am telling you a fact. First, did you not bar me from the Spirit Turtle
case? If the council can grasp the situation inside the Empire and try to make the best move possible
then removing me from the case is incomprehensible. In fact, it took the cooperation between me,
1920
Elder Egor, the Hero, and the Celestial Princess to subdue the Spirit Turtle. I can imagine what would
happen if we leave such a monster to the S-ranks……”
“All of them would have died and the Empire’s northern region would have been wiped out. The
reason why the incident only ended with the terrain being leveled was how Silver gathered powerful
allies to fight it at the frontline.”
Egor gave his conclusion.
That incident showed the council’s many failures.
The more they try to place the blame on me, the more their blunders become more apparent.
Realizing that, Torosin immediately wrapped up the topic.
“I understand. Certainly, that was our mistake. I shall apologize for that. I understand why you choose
not to contact the guild and solve the incident on your own. Therefore, we will overlook the fact that
you have involved yourself with the succession war.”
So he chooses to cut his loss and change the topic huh.
But.
He seems to have forgotten that the Empire’s representative is also present here.
“Please wait for a moment. As an Imperial Ambassador, I have something that I’d like to ask the
council regarding that incident.”
This is far from over.
1921
SPT Chapter 296
Oopsie Mommy’s angry……
-Mr.Graverobber
Finne’s Wrath
“Ambassador Finne. I apologize for our lack of understanding of the Empire’s internal affairs but
please also understand that the root of this problem is your succession war. Even if we closely
monitor the situation, it is not guaranteed that we can grasp the whole situation of your country.”
“I have no qualm with the Guild regarding that. I am not saying that the Guild has intentionally
endangered the Empire either. After all, two of the Guild’s SS-rank adventurers have played a vital
part in subjugating the Spirit Turtle. The Empire and the Guild already has a joint operation to
subjugate the Spirit Turtle in the first place, we have no plan to shift all responsibility to the Guild
alone.”
“You have my thanks. However, what is it that you’d like to ask us?”
“I’d like to ask you regarding the selection of the S-rank adventurers that had been sent to the Empire.
We didn’t have the opportunity to file the protest to the Guild because of the Ceremony and the
subsequent rebellion but…..Just what were your intentions behind the selection of those
adventurers?”
“Intention? We only intend to offer the Empire the best adventurers we could offer though?”
Torosin said nonchalantly.
I have no intention to take this from a little girl like you. That was what he sounded like.
However, can he really get away so easily?
“Then what about their behaviors? In the first place, among the adventurers that you have dispatched
to the Empire, two of them originated from the Sokol empire. I can do nothing but doubt the intention
behind your selection.”
“At that time, Among the S-rank adventurers, they were the only groups that had the appropriate
ability to handle the mission. They simply happened to be operating within the Sokol empire at the
time and they have no link to the Sokol empire itself.”
“However, as a result, both of them were the ones who caused the problems. The Grom Soldat ignored
our order to gather at the Imperial Capital and went to attack the Spirit Turtle by themselves which
accelerated the awakening process of the Spirit Turtle. On the other hand, Ignat was cooperating with
1922
Grimoire and participated in a plot against the Empire. Would you kindly provide me a convincing
reason for the selection of these two?”
In the Spirit Turtle case, the council’s many blunders indirectly caused the situation to worsened.
Finne was planned as an Imperial Ambassador to inquire the Guild about this but it was delayed until
now. After all, this timing should be the most effective in pursuing the matter.
Of course, the council should already be aware of this.
Every council members’ expressions indicated that they more or less expected the Empire to pursue
this matter.
“……We are certainly responsible for appointing them but they are all independent adventurers. We
can not control their arbitrary actions.”
“So you are saying that the fault doesn’t lay with the council? Because of their actions, the awakening
of the Spirit Turtle was accelerated and the Empire was forced to take immediate action. It was thanks
to Silver-sama’s transfer magic that we managed to defuse the situation. In addition, Grimoire assisted
by Ignat had erected a huge barrier within the Empire, which threatened the life of His Imperial
Majesty the Emperor. Did the council know of this?”
“Of course, we are aware. We offer our deepest apolo–……”
“If you are already aware of that then what is your intention behind Silver-sama’s inquiry? It was
Silver-sama who came to our rescue while the adventurers selected by the council caused harm to the
Empire. By launching an inquiry on the person who prevented the disaster, I do not think that this
council’s neutrality can be trusted. This seems to me like the council is intentionally trying to weaken
the Empire.”
“We have no such intention at all. We are truly neutral.”
“Then please show me the proof of this neutrality. I can not feel that your actions so far have been
neutral at all. All I can see is that the Guild is currently colluding with other nations to weaken the
Empire.”
Saying that you are neutral is an easy thing.
Proving it is an entirely different matter.
Finne should know that well.
Right now, at this timing, the council has already tolerated me taking a side in the succession war, they
can not use that point to counter anymore.
In other words, now that they are at a disadvantage, they can not use me to escape from this.
“Even if you want us to present a proof……..since we do not belong to any country and have
contributed to the stability of the continent for many years, shouldn’t that be enough?”
1923
“Not at all. That is simply the achievements of your predecessors, it does not belong to the current
council. What I want you to prove is the neutrality of this council. If you can not provide me with a
convincing answer, I will bring this back to the Empire in which we will further discuss this problem
internally.”
“Th, That’s……!”
Pitman couldn’t hold in his scream.
What Finne just implied was that the Empire would do everything in its power to address this issue.
Specifically speaking, the Empire will hold a meeting under the name of the Emperor to discuss some
actions against the Adventurer Guild.
“As you surely are aware, the Empire is currently in a state of civil war and we have an on-going
conflict with other nations as well. We may not be able to do anything at the moment but……..please
do not underestimate the strongest army on the continent. If you think that there will be no
consequence for your actions then please know that you will regret it afterward.”
For a moment, the council members including Torosin started to tremble.
Torosin probably realized that underestimating Finne as only a little girl was a mistake.
This misunderstanding is probably the result of Finne’s many attempts to get in contact with the
council members before the inquiry. That impression probably led them to think that she is only a
pesky little girl.
Finne didn’t expend any cards before this moment and only tried to persuade them through her
words. On the other hand, the council members probably thought that she was only selected as an
ambassador because she is the Emperor’s favorite.
They never thought that she was concealing her cards so they never took any countermeasure.
For the Empire, this inquiry is important. It is something that the Empire wanted to prevent and
naturally, the council was aware of that.
That’s why they all dismissed her as a pesky little girl before even getting into a real negotiation and
judged Finne who didn’t show her hands to them at all as insignificant.
That’s quite shallow of them.
If Finne seriously acts as an Imperial Ambassador then instead of me, the subject for this inquiry
would be the council.
“Ambassador Finne. It seems that you got a little emotional. Please calm down.”
“I am completely calm. If I was being emotional then I would already curse at all of you here.”
Finne grins.
1924
Seeing that smile, Jack lowered his shoulders and looked at me.
“That’s quite a scary lady huh? She is kinda different from the Blau Mowe I imagined though?”
“What? Isn’t she lovely? Beautiful flowers always have thorns you know. The sharper the thorns are,
the colorful the flowers. Like ME!!”
“WaHaHaHa!! Don’t make this old man laugh too much!”
“Elder Egor? What are you laughing at I wonder?”
“Everything, EVERYTHING! In your case, you are more thorn than flower right!”
“My! Isn’t that rude?”
“Haa….are we done yet? The result is already clear to me though?”
The SS-rank adventurers began to chat with each other. They are probably starting to get bored.
Well, when it comes to negotiations, I am not expecting anything from them from the beginning.
The reason I went out of my way to gather all of them was to prevent the council from using their vote
against me.
By doing that, the council is at a significant disadvantage in this inquiry.
After all, they can not beat us through brute force.
With such powerful backing, Finne is proceeding the negotiation with an overwhelming advantage.
Then, she gives them the ultimatum.
“Council members. I do not think that we can gloss over this problem as well. That’s why if I can
confirm one thing with you, I am willing to withdraw the matter.”
“……what do you want to confirm?”
“It is a simple matter. You held this inquiry because you have succumbed to the influence from other
nations, correct? If the council can admit that then the Empire will not pursue the matter. How about
it?”
It was a demand that can overturn the basis of this inquiry.
Finne is smiling like always but one could feel an indescribable pressure from that smile.
This is truly unusual, it seems that she is seriously angry.
1925
SPT Chapter 297
Special thanks to Double Tap for new coffee and Xan for new patreon pledge!! Need all the help I can
get to roll Hutao lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
Subjugate
Now, what’s your move, Torosin?
The council being swayed by the pressure from other countries is like an open secret. However,
officially admitting that will prove fatal to the council.
If they admit it, this inquiry will be invalid and the neutrality of this council will be questioned.
However, if they do not admit that, the Empire will make sure that there will be consequences. It may
not be right now but the damage they can expect after the situation has settled down will be
immeasurable.
They have no choice but to pick one of the two choices. Whichever they choose, it will be hell all the
same.
Finne’s clearly angry when she offered them these choices.
She rarely corners others as she’d always prepare some kind of escape route for her opponent.
However, there is none of that this time.
Now then, how will you avoid this, Guild Chief Torosin?
“Ambassador Finne….we would be troubled if you put it like that.”
“Unfortunately, this is the seed that the council has sown. If the council was subjected to pressure
from the other countries then the Empire will not blame you. However, if that is not the case, the
consequence for the council’s actions will be grave.”
Given the history of the Adventurer Guild and its achievements so far, they can not admit to such a
thing. Up to now, the Guild has been dubbed as the sole neutral organization on the continent.
If they admit it, their credibility will be lost. And such a credit can not be regained in a short time.
However, if they do not admit it, the situation will become much more serious. Whatever action the
Empire takes, the council members will have to bear the responsibility in creating the situation.
Will they choose to maintain the Guild’s dignity or will they choose to protect the council.
1926
Finne probably couldn’t care less either way.
Torosin on the other hand lightly bit his lips and glared at Pitman.
“Pitman-kun. You’ve had meetings with many ambassadors from other countries lately right?”
“Eh? Th, that’s……”
Pitman turns silent.
Communication with other countries falls under the jurisdiction of the Chief of Foreign Affairs.
However, Pitman is responsible for secret meetings. Still, there’s no way that Torosin was not aware
of that.
This means…….
“Ambassador Finne. I give you my word. This council has not been subjected to any kind of foreign
influence…….However, Chief Inspector Pitman might have.”
“Wha!?”
“When I asked him the other day, I was told that his meetings were necessary for this inquiry but……I
doubt that now. Did you push for this inquiry because you were pressured to?”
Lizard cut its tail.
When I saw that this inquiry is being led by Pitman, I can see that Torosin already has this kind of plan
in place.
In the unlikely event that the table turned against them, he was planning to pin the fault on Pitman.
He’s a man that got into his position through all kinds of plotting. I expect no less risk management
from him.
He might be a genius at surviving.
However, that kind of method is something that Finne extremely dislikes.
When I glance at her, I can see the burning wrath in her eyes.
She is probably thinking about how to deal with Torosin now.
“Answer me! Pitman-kun!”
“Ah, Uh, Uhh…..I….I………”
Pitman restlessly sweeps his eyes around but no one is willing to throw him a lifeboat. After all, He has
been acting self-importantly flaunting Torosin’s power on a daily basis.
1927
It is inevitable for him to avoid being Torosin’s scapegoat.
Pitman’s gaze wandered around and stopped at me.
“I’m, I’m truly sorry! Since you have subjugated two of their Holy Dragons, the pressure from the
United Kingdom was very stro—-!!”
“So you were acting under pressure after all huh! This is going to be a big problem! But…..to think that
the subjugation of the Holy Dragons would cause such a ripple…….”
Torosin glanced at me.
He probably wants me to take responsibility for this as well.
However, it would be impossible to push the responsibility of the subjugation of the Holy Dragons on
me.
“May I ask you something. Guild Chief.”
“What is it?”
“Do you think that the subjugation of the Holy Dragons was a mistake?”
“…..if we consider the result, then yes.”
“Then let me ask all of the SS-rank adventurers here. What would you do if you were to be in the same
position as me? Will you subjugate them? Or will you leave them alone?”
There are two reasons why I gathered these guys.
One is to prevent the council from using their vote.
The other is to deal with the problem of subjugating the Holy Dragon.
The council placed great importance on this issue.
Since it was the Guild’s decision to leave them alone, subjugating them is nothing short of a rebellion
against the Guild.
To save their face, the council will never let this issue go.
I knew that so I gathered all of them.
After all, I already knew their answer.
“ “ “ “- – – -Subjugate them.” “ “ “
After a short pause, everyone’s said that at the same time.
Torosin’s expression looked like he just ate a can of worms.
1928
He showed me all kinds of expressions today huh.
“In the first place, it was the council that dubbed the United Kingdom’s dragons as Guardian Holy
Dragons and excluded them from subjugation targets. When the United Kingdom used those so-called
Guardian Holy Dragons to invade other nations, shouldn’t the council also bear some kind of
responsibility?”
“The United Kingdom did not use them for invasion.”
“We couldn’t care less about their intention, Guild Chief. I am talking about the result. If subjugating
them was a mistake as you said, you should bear the responsibility when they crossed the border.
Right?”
“That’s right. If they could accidentally cross it then there would be no point for a border to exist in the
first place.”
“We should just subjugate them from the beginning. Do you know how many ships were sunk around
the United Kingdom because of those dragons? The only one who would complain if we subjugate
them is only the United Kingdom you know?”
“However, isn’t it because of that, that the council allowed their existence for defensive purpose?”
Among the voices that kept blaming the council’s decision, Noname hesitantly came to the council’s
defense.
Seeing that, Torosin nodded and took the chance.
“Yes! That’s right! We never thought that the United Kingdom would do-……”
“They probably thought that there would be no consequence even if they broke their promise right.
Perhaps they think that they can just silence the council later anyway.”
“What……?”
“Simply put, you people are being underestimated. I can clearly see that from how the council is so
willing to put the blame on the United Kingdom even though you just admitted earlier that you gave in
to their pressure.”
“Th, That was Pitman-kun’s–!”
“You place the blame on him but you did not give out your punishment. Doing nothing is the same as
giving in to their pressure you know. Guild Chief.”
Torosin’s shoulders tremble with anger at Noname’s words.
Among the SS-rank adventurers, he probably believed that Noname alone was on his side.
“……I have done many things for you in the past right? Noname.”
1929
“You have my gratitude for that. I wanted to continue having this favorable relationship with you but
you just made a grave mistake.”
“I made a mistake?”
“Yes, you turned them into your enemies. It would be troubling if you are going to rely on me as a
deterrent. Spare me from dealing with all four of them alone. Having that role pushed on me would be
too much right? Sorry but I am jumping off this sinking ship.”
“…..damn you……..!”
Torosin glares at all SS-rank adventurers.
However, all of us met his glare head-on.
Receiving an unexpected counterattack, Torosin fell off his chair.
While mockingly smiling at him, I give him a proposal.
“After succumbing to foreign pressure, it would be impossible for this council to operate the
Adventurer Guild properly. As an SS-rank adventurer, I propose the dissolution of this council.”
The members of the Guild Council are decided by the Guild Chief.
The only ones who can obtain a seat without that are only the Guild Chief and the Deputy Guild Chief.
If the Guild Chief wishes, even a branch chief in a remote region can be a member of this council.
However, it would be inconvenient to contact a branch manager in a faraway place so normally, the
chief would appoint the department heads that work at the headquarters. That’s why the structure of
the council has remained mostly unchanged until now.
Then, what does it mean to dissolve this council?
The term of office of the Guild Chief is three years. After that, an election will be held. The candidates
will be from either adventurers or guild staff of a certain rank or higher.
If the Guild Chief changes then so will the council.
In other words, I proposed the dismissal of the current Guild Chief.
Torosin stood up and glared at me.
“…..is there any reason for me to accept such a proposal? I still have more than a year of my term left!”
“What if that is what all the SS-rank adventurers here want? Anyone who is in favor, raise your hand.”
In response, everyone raised their hands.
1930
Even if you are the Guild Chief, you can not ignore a majority vote.
1931
SPT Chapter 298
Anyone have any good simple strawberry recipe? My mom bought a lot so I have to figure out what to
do with them…..
-Mr.Graverobber
The Lack of Common Sense
“……Fine. But I will only agree to dissolve this council. I will not resign from my position.”
“Do we have to spell it out for you? The current council that you personally selected the members for
has made blunders after blunders and thus became untrustworthy. We can not allow you to keep your
position any longer. Consider it as our kindness that we didn’t directly tell you to resign.”
“Don’t mess with me…..! If the council has to dissolve each time SS-rank adventurers raise a complaint
then we would have to forever live in your shadow! We can not create such a precedent for the future
of this council!”
“If you want to avoid creating a precedent then what you should be more worried about is leaving
behind the record that this council has been mocked to this extent by other countries. Whether it be a
country or an organization, you would need a strong power to maintain neutrality. No matter what
anyone tries to do to you, you must always remain neutral. Right now that illusion of neutrality of
yours has already collapsed. That’s why you need to dissolve this council. If you do not comply then
we will force you to.”
“How you do not choose any means to get what you want is so adventurer-like of you! Silver! If you
think that you can use violence to have your way here then I have something in mind too!”
“We will not resort to violence. I will simply let every adventurer on this continent know that we SS-
rank adventurers do not support the current Guild Chief. That alone should destroy your position as
the Guild Chief, no? Do you want to go there?”
If all SS-rank adventurers clearly state that they do not support the Guild Chief, no matter how much
time he has left in his term, he will be dragged down from his position.
Torosin frowned.
“In other words…….if I agree to resign now, you will not do that?”
“We don’t personally feel like going out of our way to spread the word of what happened here. You
can conclude the matter by saying that Chief Inspector Pitman acted under the pressure of another
country and to take responsibility for that mistake as the Guild Chief, you choose to dissolve the
council. If you want to take your position back then you can just enter an election again.”
1932
“…..What are you planning?”
“SS-rank adventurers possess the freedom of action however we do not possess the right to choose
the leader of the Guild. The people who will decide that are the adventurers and the guild staff. Even
so, this is indeed sudden. The branches probably can’t take part in this. It will probably end up as a
small election only for the adventurers and the staff at the headquarters.”
It would be easy to completely crush Torosin now.
However, if we do that, it would be established that SS-rank adventurers outranked the council.
If such a group of unruly people stands on top of the Guild it will surely lead to chaos.
With me here right now, things might still be fine but it could be a problem in the future.
The council should respect the SS-rank adventurers and we SS-rank adventurers should also respect
the decision of the council.
That’s why we will leave Torosin to the adventurers and the staff.
As long as it was Pitman who committed the blunder, Torosin will have a disadvantage as it is well
known that Pitman is his follower. So if despite that Torosin becomes the Guild Chief again then
there’s nothing we can do.
“Can I take that as the consensus of all SS-rank adventurers……?”
“I don’t mind. It was Silver who got dragged into this idiotic inquiry in the first place. I’m fine if the
decision comes from him. It still felt kinda lukewarm to me though.”
“Same here.”
“I don’t get why we can’t just kick your ass out right now but well, I don’t really care.”
“I don’t mind.”
With everyone’s consent, Torosin said with a frown.
“Very well…..I will dissolve this council and resign my position as the Guild Chief. After that, I will hold
an election for the new Guild Chief. Is that good enough?”
“We have no problem regarding that. We will leave the details to the new Guild Chief.”
Saying so, I lean back on the chair.
Then, I tap my finger on the round table and speak to Torosin.
“Still, how are you feeling right now, Guild Chief? You never expected that you would be forced to
resign right?”
1933
I specifically chose my words to be provoking.
In response, Torosin snorts.
“It seems you favor Clyde quite a bit huh. From your tone, you probably think that the next Guild Chief
will definitely be him right.”
“Of course.”
“Naive…..how do you think that I got to this position in the first place? I was elected. With tremendous
support from both adventurers and staff you see. If the next Guild Chief will be decided by another
election then I will just win it again.”
“Do you think that it would go so well?”
“It will. The ones with the right to vote are adventurers and the staff. Do you think that those people
have enough brains to think so far ahead like you?”
“What do you mean?”
In response, Torosin mockingly smiles at me.
From my side, Finne frowned at his smile.
“Adventurers are nothing but fools. That includes the large portion of staff that support them too.
Getting heated up about their idiotic ideal, only fools would work so hard for such an ambiguous cause
like ‘for the sake of the people’. From my point of view, they are nothing but idiots.”
“That’s surprising. I never thought that I would hear something like that from the Chief of the
Adventurer Guild himself.”
“Never once in my life have I worked for the sake of the people. Still, I am standing here right now as
the Guild Chief. You know why? Because those people don’t even have enough brains to judge a
person. They just shut their brain and support me when I used some nice words and dangling some
profit in front of them. That’s how it was.”
“……It might be true that adventurers really are idiots huh. Working so hard only to live day to day,
spending all their hard-earned money for alcohol and women, it brings tears to my eyes just talking
about that. Leaving everything to their emotions, never think before acting. Still…….I like those
adventurers.”
Many adventurers are those who have no other path in life.
Although they have the ability, they can not become a knight. The reason being they can’t follow the
rules.
If they wish for it, they could always turn to the life of crimes but they still chose to use their power for
the people.
1934
There are many who don’t have a choice but how many of them have it in their hearts to commit
themselves to the people?
Some people really have no choice but to become an adventurer in order to live.
Still, many adventurers enjoy this way of life.
Live as you please and earn your pay with your skills.
How happy would it be to be able to live like that?
“When the Sea Dragon appeared in the Principality…….the voice of the princess reached all branches
of the Adventurer Guild. I still remember how the adventurers of the Imperial Capital became so
frustrated at how they couldn’t do anything. I am certain that is how adventurers should be.
Adventurers are people who respond to the cry for help. Even if they are idiotic and thoughtless at
times, they have my full support. The figure of the adventurers across the continent who responded to
the princess’s cry for help was my ideal. Whether you are a guild chief or an emperor——–I will not
allow you to insult them.”
“Isn’t that wonderful! Anyone who listened to you would probably all praise such an ideal! However,
not every human is so wonderful nor we can live by beautiful ideals alone! With profit to be made,
they will all support me and look forward to the realistic results! That was how I expanded this guild!
It is undeniable that many adventurers have benefitted from that! No matter what I do, they will
continue to support me as long as I can make a profit for them! That’s how adventurers are! What’s so
wrong with insulting them!”
“Hmm, how terrible.”
“Totally.”
Egor and Linares muttered astoundedly.
Jack annoyingly frowned while Noname only sat quietly.
Torosin who thought that he managed to silent us, snorted and continued to speak.
“Say whatever you want! I will be elected again! After that, I will make sure that all SS-rank
adventurers are under the council’s control! Don’t think that you can act however you want like you
are now!? I will not let anyone oppose me!”
“Guild Chief……I think that a person like you would be great leading a company instead you know.”
Clyde said to Torosin.
I agree with him.
Torosin certainly has an effective business mind. However, his mindset is incompatible with
adventurers.
1935
“Still, the Chief of the Adventurer Guild is not supposed to be a businessman. If what you care about
most is your own profit then you can not lead the adventurers scattered all across this continent.
Adventurers have played a vital role ever since the appearance of the Demon King. We pledge no
allegiance to any country as our only job is to defeat the monsters. We are the ones who maintain the
balance of the continent. To do that, we need an ideal to follow. And the person standing on top of this
guild must not forget that.”
“Don’t you dare lecture me! I only left your Deputy Chief position alone because you have the trust of
the adventurers! If you are against me then I have no need for you! You can try getting elected with
that ideal of yours! But don’t think for a second that you can win! In the end, what you need to win is
the vote count! As long as I have my connections and resources I will never lose!”
Torosin declared.
On the other hand, Finne was about to open her mouth as she can’t take any more of this.
However, I stopped her with my hand.
There is no need for her to say anything.
After all, there is only one thing we need to say to Torosin.
And all SS-rank adventurers say it at the same time.
“ “ “ “ “ Don’t look down on adventurers” “ “ “ “
The moment we said that, hectic footsteps can be heard from the outside.
Then the door violently swung open.
“Chief! It’s a disaster!”
“What! Did a monster appear!?”
“No, sir! The adventurers in the headquarters are rioting. They are demanding to meet you, sir!
Rather, even the staff are joining them now…..”
“What? How did that happen!?”
“That is……since earlier, your words have been echoing through the headquarters……”
This guy is probably one of Torosin’s followers.
I can see the despair on his face.
That’s right, Torosin just doomed himself.
Realizing that, Torosin turned his eyes toward me.
1936
In response, I grinned behind my mask.
“…….it’s you…….?”
“Sorry but even with one small gesture, I can easily activate a spell that can carry your voice to
everyone in the guild you see.”
Saying so, I tap my finger on the round table again.
The reason why I provoked Torosin was to have Torosin destroy himself.
He did put on quite a show too.
The SS-rank adventurers were aware of it so Egor and Linares were only astounded at my evil plan
while Jack was annoyed at my roundabout way of doing things.
“Th, that’s not what you promise! Didn’t you give me your word that you will not say anything to
them!!”
“The only promise we made was to not say anything to them personally. I was only expressing my love
to the adventurers here. Everything else came directly from your mouth, no?”
“Do you think that I will let such a quibble pass!?”
“You will. Didn’t you say it yourself? Not every human is so wonderful. That is absolutely right. People
have been telling me that I have no common sense you see. It seems like it was thoughtless of me to
arbitrarily spread your words to others huh. Forgive me, Guild Chief. It seems I really do lack common
sense.”
When I said that, Torosin bitterly distorted his face while the SS-rank adventurers plus Clyde and
Finne all sigh at the same time.
1937
SPT Chapter 299
Special Thanks today goes to an unnamed coffee donor. I spend it on an omelet tho…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Urgent Report
The council members including Torosin left the room to control the situation.
Only the SS-rank adventurers and Clyde remained in the meeting room.
“If you still lose after this then I don’t know what to do okay?”
“Don’t worry. There was originally a lot of dissatisfaction and opposition to how the Chief runs things.
No one will vote for him this time.”
“That’s reassuring. It was worth the effort to collect all SS-rank adventurers.”
“You saved me. It seems that I have troubled everyone huh.”
“Exactly. There won’t be next time okay? Clyde.”
“I know.”
Clyde nods to Jack.
Clyde is the person most likely to win the election. There should be a lot of people who will give up
this election because of him. That’s how strong Clyde’s influence is.
As a former adventurer, he knows what it’s like on the field, and even after joining the council his
priority is still to those adventurers.
One could say that the chief position is suitable for him.
“Will you change the members of the council?”
“There won’t be much change. They are the head of their respective department. I will have them
continue their work as council members.”
“Even though they were wagging their tails to Torosin?”
“That’s also a valid move. They did what they could while doing their best to protect their
subordinates. Torosin has been transferring people out left and right after all.”
“Well, if you are fine with it.”
1938
Linares muttered so and concluded the topic.
His face is saying that doesn’t like such a development but if it is what Clyde decided then he will not
say anything extra about it.
“Clyde. Sorry but I’m getting thirsty here.”
“I will immediately prepare something. Elder Egor.”
“If it’s over then I’m going back.”
“Ahh, thank you. Noname. I never thought that you would give Silver a hand.”
“I was only betting on the winning side. There’s no need to thank me.”
“Not at all! Your help is much appreciated! Thank you very much! Noname-san!”
“I have done nothing that warrants your gratitude. Miss Finne.”
“But you did throw us a lifeboat, didn’t you! Thanks to you, Silver-sama was able to smoothly proceed
with the negotiation!”
“That’s……I only want to quickly conclude the negotiation.”
Great. They are getting along.
To be able to make Noname talk to her so much with only a few days. As expected of Finne.
While I was impressed with Finne’s feat, Clyde suggested something to me.
“Silver. When I become the chief, I am thinking about establishing a certain rule.”
“A certain rule? What is it?”
“It’s a rule that involves all SS-rank adventurers. In case that all SS-rank adventurers agree, the council
can be dissolved. I think that such a rule is necessary to prevent something troublesome like this from
happening again.”
“I won’t stop you if you want to make that a rule but it won’t have much meaning you know?”
“I know. The only one who can gather all SS-rank adventurers that are scattered all over the continent
is you alone. This rule would be a powerful tool with your ability but without you, it can’t do much.
However, with such a rule in place, it will make the council think twice before pulling something like
this again.”
“Do whatever you want. With or without that rule, SS-rank adventurers will be the same as always.
We will live as we pleased and take down anyone who gets in our way. That’s it.”
Clyde bitterly smiled in response.
1939
Clyde who has traveled the continent as an S-rank adventurer was subjected to the whimsical nature
of the SS-rank adventurers so he has a good understanding of us.
Of course, SS-rank adventurers rarely cooperate with each other so he must understand that this time
is a special case.
That’s why he is proposing this rule.
It will serve to remind future councils that this might happen to them too.
That’s quite thorough of him.
“Clyde, the tea still isn’t ready yet?”
“I’m sorry. I will get to it now.”
“Elder Egor. You should stop having the Deputy Guild Chief brew the tea for you okay.”
“I’m thirsty. And he used to brew the tea for me you know? When he was still a novice that is.”
“When the Deputy Guild Chief was still a novice? Just how long ago was that?…..seriously, you really
have a strange sense of time.”
“Never mind that, where’s my tea, My TEA.”
“Wine for me please.”
“I’m going home.”
Seriously, how can they be so selfish?
Compared to these guys, I am still the one who has common sense after all.
Thinking so, I started preparing a transfer gate for each of them.
However, I was immediately disrupted.
Suddenly, the door swung open.
“Deputy Guild Chief!! It’s an emergency!”
“What? Did the chief do something?”
“No, the turmoil outside is still ongoing but……we just received information that a giant monster has
appeared in the Sokol empire’s western region!”
The person who entered the meeting room was a young woman.
They must have been contacted by remote communication.
1940
Even in this turmoil, she is still seriously doing her job huh.
Still, she must have been quite panicked as Clyde is the only one who reflected in her eyes right now.
“We were told that Sokol has dispatched their army to intercept the monster. They are mobilizing
from Karelia, the largest city in their western region. The adventurers in the area are inadequate to
handle the monster, every branch in the Sokol empire is requesting us to dispatch SS-rank
adventurers, sir!”
“A giant monster appearing inside Sokol empire huh. We need more information.”
“There’s no need, right? With everyone here.”
Saying so, I open the transfer gate to Karelia.
“I alone should be enough.”
“Don’t say that, Noname. I was bored sitting here already.”
“Me too. It’s okay, I will let you have the finishing blow.”
They each have their reason.
However, all SS-rank adventurers stood up.
Perhaps she finally noticed the identity of the people gathered here, the young woman’s body tremble.
“T, they are all…..here……”
“By my order as the Deputy Guild Chief, all SS-rank adventurers are allowed to participate in this
quest. Still, since all five of you will be going, do not level the terrain okay?”
“That will depend on the monster.”
“I can’t say I’m good at that.”
“This old body isn’t good at it either.”
“Me too.”
“We will do our best to avoid that. But I will be the one who takes the finishing blow.”
“…….”
Clyde turned his uneasy gaze toward us.
Meanwhile, Finne quietly lowered her head.
“Have a safe trip, everyone.”
1941
While lightly raising my hand to Finne say goodbye to Finne, we entered the transfer gate.
1942
SPT Chapter 300
It’s actually the start of a new sub-arc!!
It’s from the perspective of the people of Karelia tho.
-Mr.Graverobber
Five
“The 7th Division that was dispatched to intercept the monster is almost wiped out! The giant
monster is still steadily heading toward the city, sir!”
“Kuh…..”
Vengerov, Lord of Karelia, the largest city of the western region of the Sokol empire couldn’t help but
moan at the worsening situation.
He has long gray hair and a white beard. Despite being over 60 years old, Vengerov is still the Lord of
one of the largest cities in Sokol empire. This man is also experienced in warfare as he has fought
countless battles against the Empire. Still, even with so much experience under his belt, Vengerov has
never encountered a monster that can wipe out an entire interception unit this quickly.
“What’s the adventurer guild’s opinion?”
“They said that judging from its appearance, it seems to be a [Green Plant Tiger] but they have never
recorded any with this size before, sir………they think that it might be a mutated species.”
“Ridiculous……how could such a monster suddenly appear inside a powerful nation like ours……are
they saying that a sudden mutation like this could happen at any time!?”
Vengerov slams his sword on the ground.
IT has been his companion that fought together with him for many years but right now it is no
different from a wooden stick.
“……what are the characteristics of Green Plant Tiger?”
“Although it resembles a tiger, it is a plant-type monster that possesses high regeneration power and
it can also produce a copy of itself. The recorded size has reached up to dozens of meters large but
according to the adventurer guild, it can produce enough copies of itself to overwhelm an army,
sir……..”
“An almost unkillable monster that can face off against an entire army…….”
Vengerov looks up at the high wall surrounding Karelia.
1943
Cities located in the western region of the Sokol empire which neighbor the Empire’s border have
more than adequate preparation for a defensive battle. Among them, Karelia boasts its defensive
capability as one of the Sokol empire’s key cities. However, that was against human opponents.
“To think that I would see the day when Karelia seems so unreliable…….”
Vengerov has no family. His wife passed away at a young age and his eldest son lost his life shielding
Vengerov in a battle against the Empire.
For Vengerov, the people of Karelia are his family.
That’s why Vengerov immediately made his decision.
“…..gather up the children, the women, and the elderly. We will evacuate them away from Karelia.”
“U, understood! However, where would they go…….? It would be too dangerous to direct them toward
the central region!”
The monster is blocking their path toward the center of the empire so it would be dangerous to escape
there. However, even if they choose to evacuate the civilians to a nearby city, the monster threat still
remains.
They have no safe escape route.
Except for one.
“Evacuate them to the Empire’s eastern border.”
“The Empire’s eastern border!? Are you sane, sir!?”
“Of course I am. I have fought against the Empire countless times already. That’s why I know the Adler
clan well. They are the clan of dream chasers that still managed to rule the middle part of the
continent to this day. Each one of the Imperial Family that they sent to the frontline were all
annoyingly excellent.”
“Exactly, sir! Even Young Master was–!”
“They did take away my son. Still, it was my fault for bringing my son along even though he was
against the war. The Imperial Army only repelled our invading army. I have fought my share after that.
Battle after battle and ceasefire after ceasefire, each time their Imperial Family was always present. I
couldn’t help but want to kill them. But……that is exactly why we can trust them. They will never
abandon the civilians.”
“However! Right now they are in the middle of a civil war! Even the Empire surely can not afford to
accept any refugee right now!”
“I don’t care about that. To them, their circumstances don’t matter. Their Imperial Family took it up as
a duty to accept and manage the people that come their way. They are excellent enough to do that.
Especially that Princess General. In this kind of situation, no general is more reliable than her.”
1944
As soon as he concluded that, Vengerov gave out his order again.
“Gather up the civilians and evacuate them to the west gate! Those who can fight are to gather at the
east gate! Even if it only amounts to one second, we will stall that monster as long as possible!”
“As, as you command! I hope the SS-rank adventurer will be able to get here in time……”
“SS-rank adventurers can show up anywhere. If Silver can come and go anywhere like a phantom as
the rumor says then we might be able to expect that…….it’s a shame though, that man has always
operated around the Empire’s capital. He has never appeared in Sokol. Noname won’t make it in time.
This incident is all too sudden after all.”
They have already requested the dispatch of SS-rank adventurers.
For a monster that can annihilate an entire army, dispatching normal high ranking adventurers would
be useless.
Although it might be excessive, it is common sense to hit something like that with the highest
firepower. That’s where SS-rank adventurers come in.
However, there are times when they can not respond to a sudden threat like this. Vengerov knows
that to be the case this time.
That’s why he gave an evacuation order.
“Let’s go.”
Prepared for death, Vengerov picked up his sword and put it on his waist.
Rzhev, an A-rank adventurer of the Karelia branch adventurer guild, was a young man with a dream.
He became an adventurer due to his desire to be a hero.
He believed that one day he would encounter a mighty foe, defeat it after a battle to the death and
make a name for himself.
However, in front of the mighty monster he had dreamt of, Rzhev couldn’t even take a step.
The monster that has approached the city of Karelia is a Green Plant Tiger.
Its height was dozens of meters and its length from head to tail seemed to have exceeded a hundred
meters.
In front of that giant tiger, Rzhev couldn’t even hold up his beloved sword.
“Ha, Haha……”
1945
A dry laugh escaped him.
The Lord, his knights, and the adventurers have gathered on top of the city wall. The arrows and spells
that they have fired at it in desperation seem to have no effect.
Reality is much crueler than the illusion he dreamt of.
He thought that even if it is a monster that requires an SS-rank adventurer to defeat, he would at least
be able to put up a fight.
However, when he stood in front of it, he immediately realized.
There’s no way that he can fight that thing.
“We are just a pebble to that beast……”
Just as how humans don’t care about the pebbles on the street, this monster doesn’t even pay any
attention to them.
And like how a pebble can’t possibly fight a human, a human can not fight this monster either.
They can’t even serve as its opponent.
His sword technique and the experiences with monsters that he has accumulated as an adventurer are
meaningless against this thing.
The scale is too different.
Why did he dream about encountering such a thing?
Rzhev resented his child self.
He had dreamt of becoming an adventurer who could help anyone. That was how he got here only to
realize how meaningless his effort is.
As long as you are a human, you can not beat this monster.
It is something that was decided on the species level.
Thinking so, Rzhev cast his eyes down.
Then, the sky became dark.
Wondering what happened, Rzhev looked up at the sky and muttered.
“Ahh…..so it was only a stupid dream after all.”
The monster raised its forelegs high above the wall.
And it came down.
1946
Like trampling on a pebble on the side of the road, this monster will just crush the wall and break
through Karelia.
Thinking so, Rzhev’s body shakes.
Not because of fear.
But his boiling anger.
“Don’t fuck with me……Don’t you dare look down on humans!!”
Rzhev raised his sword to the sky even though he knows that it would be useless.
Even when he knew that it was completely useless, he at least wanted to get a hit in.
No matter how small it is, he wanted to inflict pain upon this monster.
That was the feeling behind his sword.
However.
“Eh…..?”
At that moment, the monster was blown away from the city.
Did my hidden power awaken and blew away the monster?
With a short-lived misunderstanding, Rzhev trembled with joy for a moment but soon he felt the
sense of intimidation that was strong enough to blow away his joy and looked up at the sky.
There stood a mage clad in a black robe whose face was concealed by a silver mask.
“You have done well enduring so far, knights and adventurers of Karelia. Now, five of us SS-rank
adventurers will defeat the enemy monster. Repeat—— Five of us SS-rank adventurers will defeat the
enemy monster. Leave the rest to us.”
Those words were heard by everyone who stood on top of the wall.
Every single one of them doubted those words before their bodies trembled and rejoice.
“Five……?”
1947
SPT Chapter 301
It’s beginning to a new week. I still have no idea what to do with the strawberry….
-Mr.Graverobber
Correction, Four
A giant monster was about to trample the wall of Karelia.
I stopped it from bringing its forefeet down with a barrier and pushed it back with the same,
restricting its movement.
Then.
“You have done well enduring so far, knights and adventurers of Karelia. Now, five of us SS-rank
adventurers will defeat the enemy monster. Repeat—— Five of us SS-rank adventurers will defeat the
enemy monster. Leave the rest to us.”
I issued a ‘warning’ to everyone standing on the walls.
After all, the force needed to repel this kind of monster will be quite powerful.
“They’ve come to save us huh……”
On top of the wall.
An old man with a white beard muttered so.
Around him are several knights that seem to be his escorts.
“Are you the Lord of this city?”
“Indeed. I am Vengerov, the Lord of Karelia. I have a question in return. Are you Silver?”
“Yeah, that’s right. I happened to be at the headquarters earlier so I came. Together with the other
four.”
“I, I see……so the Guild thought that it required all of you together to defeat it huh…….?”
“That’s not the case.”
“We only came because we were free.”
Before I knew it, Noname arrived next to me who was floating midair.
1948
And Egor who answered the Lord’s question casually pulled out a chair, placed it next to the Lord, and
started sipping tea.
Vengerov lost his posture and stepped back at his sudden appearance but there was a person who
supported him from behind.
“You have to consider your attitude more, Elder Egor. Ah, sorry about that, Lord-san.”
“…….”
It was Linares who appeared behind Vengerov.
As expected, these guys are really fast huh.
I transferred them to the outskirts of the city and headed to the wall first using another transfer magic
but they caught up with me using normal means of travel. Egor even procured a chair and tea in the
process.
“What about Jack?”
“He said that he is going to grab a drink.”
“I see. Excuse me, Lord-dono. It seems that it will only be the four of us here.”
“Me alone is enough.”
When I corrected myself, Noname pulled out the Dis Pater.
I released the barrier holding down the giant monster and instead erected one to cover the
surrounding, preventing the Dis Pater from destroying it.
Noname held her sword up and swung it down with all she got.
Then, a slash composed of a large amount of magic power heads toward the giant monster.
The slash splendidly hit the giant monster and a curtain of smoke was raised from the impact.
“No matter how big it is, it’s still a Green Plant Tiger. It’s not a monster that is worth our time in the
first place.”
I sigh at Noname’s words.
Then I ask Egor for his opinion since he is the one who is most familiar with monsters here.
“Elder Egor. Have you ever seen such a huge Green Plant Tiger?”
“Can’t say I have. A Green Plant Tiger wasn’t supposed to be that big in the first place.”
“Maybe it’s a mutant?”
1949
“Probably. But there’s also another possibility too.”
“You are thinking what I am thinking right?”
“Probably.”
Egor sips his tea while replying so.
As we were having such a conversation, the dust cleared up.
From behind the dust emerged two Green Plant Tigers.
However, they seem to be unscathed and are probably preparing their counterattack.”
“It made a copy of itself after receiving my blow?”
“Even if it’s a Green Plant Tiger, that regeneration speed is too fast.”
The Green Plant Tigers surely are monsters that possess high regenerative ability. Since they are
originally a plant, it can continue to regenerate itself if it maintains contact with the earth.
While they were designated as AAA-rank monsters, their regeneration shouldn’t be able to keep up
with the damage from Noname’s attack.
On top of the mutation that increased its size, this ability is going to be troublesome.
“So it is not a normal mutation. And? Any opinion, you two?”
“…….it’s probably an evolution slime.”
“There’s no other possibility.”
“Haa……..that super rare monster huh.”
Linares tiredly muttered.
Evolution slime is only a simple slime at first glance.
However, it can consume other creatures and makes its appearance and characteristics its own. The
troublesome part about this ability is that this slime can exert more power than the consumed
creature.
It is indeed an evolution. By consuming its target, it can evolve further than the target itself.
However, its ability is rarely seen since it is only a normal slime if it doesn’t assimilate anything.
They are often overlooked because of their powerlessness and they normally got preyed on naturally
as they possess no power to survive in the wild against other monsters.
1950
They are a super rare type of monster. No one knows how they are born and it is said that they are a
mutated species of slime but some even say that it is an entirely different species.
“An evolution slime that consumed a Green Plant Tiger. That should be its true identity. It would raise
a question of how did an evolution slime consume an AAA-rank Green Plant Tiger though.
“Let’s leave that to the Guild. We should worry more about how to handle the monster in front of us
first.”
There are two ways to deal with these troublesome slimes. You either annihilate it entirely or destroy
the small core inside its body.”
“Annihilation it is.”
“Annihilation of course.”
“Annihilation huh.”
“Haa…….”
Egor stands up from his chair while Linares lightly cracks his shoulder.
Perhaps wanting to unleash an even more powerful blow, Noname began gathering magic power into
Dis Pater.
I have one thing to say to those three.
“I don’t mind you doing that but don’t level the terrain in the process.”
“That’s a tall order. I am planning to gouge it out from the ground.”
“To annihilate something like that, the two mountains behind that thing will have to disappear in the
process.”
“Are you holding back because you are the Empire’s SS-rank adventurer? Please don’t mind about
something like that. It will cause more damage if we leave it alone after all.”
“Didn’t you people listen? Clyde said it himself. Do not level the terrain.”
Egor frowns at my words while Linares put his hand on his cheek as though he found it to be
troublesome.
There’s no change in Noname’s attitude as she is still holding up the Dis Pater.
“Since Clyde’s dominant in the Guild right now, if we change the landscape here, the responsibility
might fall on him. So no leveling the terrain.”
“Right, since we all came here together, we have to keep our promise huh.”
1951
“Even so, it’s hard to find such a small core you know?”
“…….if we can’t level the terrain because there are five of us here then if all of you go back, wouldn’t
that mean I can do whatever I want?”
“You think I will let you do whatever you want after I used my transfer magic for you? I will not allow
you to do as you please.”
“That’s strange isn’t it. If the Sokol empire suffers, the Empire will have it much easier, you know? The
Eastern Border Defense Force can use the chance to move after all.”
“It doesn’t matter what country we are in. it is the people that should be our priority. This monster
already caused a lot of damage to this area. We should avoid damaging this place any more than this.”
Saying so, I look around.
Even if this area is damaged, the military power of the Sokol empire will not decline. That’s how this
country is.
Causing damage here will only be giving the people in this area a hard time in the future.
Plus, right now I am not a Prince of the Empire.
I am an adventurer.
“I will explain the content of this mission. Minimize the damage to the surroundings and search for the
core of the evolution slime. Don’t even by mistake release any powerful attack alright?”
“Good grief……for a time-killing quest, this one sure is difficult huh.”
“I’m troubled〜. I’m not good at holding back too.”
“I will be the one that delivers the final blow to the core. That is my condition.”
“Do whatever you want. Now then…….we will be intercepting its attack for the time being. It’s
coming.”
The moment I said that.
The evolution slime’s regeneration was completed and it has sent countless objects flying our way.
1952
SPT Chapter 302
Special Thanks to Double Tap and Alto for new delicious coffee.
At this rate I am going to throw those strawberries inside the coffee……..
Wait, that doesn’t sound so bad.
-Mr.Graverobber
Artificial
Flying at us were Green Plant Tigers.
Every one of them is about the same size as a normal Green Plant Tiger. They are probably clones the
evolution slime made.
Over a thousand of those clones flew at us.
If they are birds it would be one thing but it’s quite a rare sight to witness a horde of tigers flying your
way. Tigers do not fly in the first place and they won’t come at you with this number either.
“Hiiiiiiii!!??”
“What the hell is that!?”
“They are coming this way!!”
Screams were raised at various parts of the wall.
But I do not do anything in particular about it.
“I will leave the city defense to you guys. I will be looking for the core.”
“You are supposed to be the one who’s best at defending right?”
“If you think you can find the core then by all means change places with me.”
“How unpleasant. It will make us seem incompetent you know, seriously.”
Saying so, Linares consecutively shot his straight fist into the sky.
The released straight fists were accompanied by thunderous sound and the flock of tigers that were
covering the sky was pierced with a big hole.
However, that is still not enough.
1953
“It’s a hassle to hold back you see.”
“It can’t be helped. I will take care of the rest. If some get past me please take care of it, Elder Egor.”
“Got it.”
Saying so, Noname slashes the flock of tigers with Dis Pater.
With that single slash, most of the tigers were wiped out.
There are only a few left.
They are currently trying to get past the wall.
Since there are still many people who have not evacuated, it would be bad to let them breach the city.
However, Egor does not move.
“S, Silver-sama! The tigers are–!!”
Vengerov asks me for help since Egor did not move.
However, I did not respond because I was concentrating on searching for the core.
Instead, Egor opened his mouth.
“I already cut them.”
“Eh…..?”
Vengerov looked at the remaining tigers astonishingly.
The tigers that landed around the center of the city fell apart and completely lost their form after
taking only a few steps.
If it was shredded to such an extent then it shouldn’t be able to regenerate anymore.
“Hurry up, Silver. We are not particularly fond of being on the receiving end.”
“Don’t rush me. I am searching for a tiny core inside that giant moving target. It would be nice if you
can understand how hard that is.”
“How about throwing it into the sky with your transfer magic? If it’s midair then you don’t have to
worry about the terrain you know?”
“How much magic power do you think I would need to keep that giant monster in the sky? Searching
for the core is much more efficient whether I use transfer magic or just holding it up using other
magic.”
1954
I would resort to that if there’s no other way but there are many skilled people who hold the same
rank as me around.
That’s why I don’t feel like resorting to that method.
In the first place, I have to use transfer magic again to send them home so I don’t want to waste any
more magic power than this.
Even though I have recovered some of it, I might fall asleep again if I wasted any more than this.
Moreover, this appearance of the evolution slime seems artificial.
If it was only me who attended the inquiry, I would have to handle this alone. Moreover, if I unleash an
attack that will terraform the area here, there’s no doubt that it will be used against me in the inquiry.
In that case, I would have no choice but to spend my magic power.
Magic power and time. I will be robbed of both.
Is it someone from the Empire or another country? I don’t know what their goal is but it is certain now
that someone does not want the presence of Silver in the Empire. If that’s the case then I can see this
as one of their moves.
If the inquiry was also their work then…….it would be unwise to go all out here. It’s a hassle but I will
make use of these problem children to save my magic power.
“You should probably close an eye even if the terrain were to change a bit.”
“With this many SS-rank adventurers, we would be laughed at if we can’t at least avoid that you
know?”
“I’d love to let them laugh as much as they want but…….since Deputy Guild Chief’s standing is also on
the line, let’s keep going with this.”
“Seriously……It’d be nice if Jack could take my place now.”
“Right. This is his specialty after all.”
Certainly, if we have Jack then we would have a much easier time.
I’d left the defense to Jack and quickly search for the core.
With these three, I was worried that they would accidentally level the terrain so I couldn’t concentrate
so easily.
When I thought so, the evolution slime expanded for a moment.
I can stop its movement with a barrier but I can’t prevent it from discharging more of its clones.
1955
If I want to completely prevent that, I’d have to completely cover it with a barrier. However, it is
difficult to create a barrier like that.
“It’s going to do something again.”
The moment I said that.
The appearance of the evolution slime changed.
From a tiger to a bird.
I adjusted the barrier to block its main body but it is still releasing countless clones of itself.
So it didn’t only consume a Green Plant Tiger huh.
“Thorny Sparrow huh. This is getting more and more troublesome.”
Egor judged the name of the monster by the form the slime took.
As the name suggests, the Thorny Sparrows are sparrows that are covered with thorns.
Their thorns can be shot out but what makes them troublesome is the speed.
A Thorny Sparrow is a monster that will charge at you with a bullet-like speed and damages you with
its thorns.
“I wonder how a slime could capture such a thing.”
“Someone must have fed it.”
If it’s only the Green Plant Tiger then it could still barely be glossed over as a coincidence. However, a
slime capturing a Thorny Sparrow that can fly in the sky at high speed is simply impossible.
Evolution slime can not consume corpses nor can it consecutively assimilate multiple preys.
The only case where it can exhibit the characteristics of two separate monsters is when it consumes
two monsters at the same time. There’s no way that it would be able to find a dying Thorny Sparrow
and Green Plant Tiger lying around in the wild.
This is bad.
“No more probing. I will take care of it now.”
“Keep looking. We will do what we can to intercept them as much as possible.”
“As much as possible won’t cut it here though?”
“There’s no problem even if some get past us. Jack is in the city after all.”
“You are telling me to trust that drunkard?”
1956
“Don’t look down on him. Even like that, he is still one of the best adventurers I know. He won’t let any
monsters do as they pleased.”
“……Then I will trust in your judgment, Elder Egor.”
I continue searching for the core without intercepting the enemy.
Countless Thorny Sparrows are flying toward us.
If we ignore the collateral damage then each of us has enough power to blow them all away with a
single attack but since that is prohibited, it will be difficult for us to completely intercept them.
These guys are apparently worse at holding back more than I thought. The power they are exhibiting
is not to the level I expected because they are trying too much to decrease their firepower.
“It’s surprising to me that Elder Egor is holding Jack in such a high regard you know〜”
“Obviously. There’s no way that a fellow drinker like him is a bad person.”
“……If it seems like the people in the city will be hurt then I will take care of it. Silver, If it comes to that
then I will use my full power to eliminate that slime.”
“Let’s pray that it won’t happen then.”
While having a little regret believing in Egor’s groundless judgment, I look at the evolution slime that
got caught inside my barrier.
In case of emergency, there would be no choice but to annihilate it without caring about collateral
damage.
Evolution slime can not consecutively assimilate new targets but it can do that after a period of time. If
we let these winged clones go unchecked, the situation will become even more troublesome.
Such a nasty monster.
A group that would do such a stupid thing would be Grimoire but I don’t know whether they are
related to this incident or not.
But if they are really related then.
“Just how much disaster will they spread until they are satisfied…….”
Although I already judged them as my enemy, they might be a foe worthy of all the SS-rank
adventurers here to band together to destroy.
Thinking so, I saw the Thorny Sparrows steadily breaching into the city at the edge of my vision and
lightly clicked my tongue.
1957
SPT Chapter 303
Strawberry, Strawberry,……..what a menace…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Jack
Upon arriving in Karelia, Jack immediately parted ways with the other SS-rank adventurers and set
out on a journey in search of delicious alcohol.
However.
“They all closed up shop huh………”
Jack mutters as he walks through the empty city.
Of course, no one would open their store when a giant monster is approaching their city.
Plus, many have already evacuated to the west gate so there’s no point for anyone to open up shop
now.
“Alcohol, Alcohol, Alcohol……isn’t there anywhere I can find one……..?”
Wandering around like a street thug, Jack continues his search through the city for alcohol.
Then, Jack found an inn that is still operating.
“An inn!? They should at least have some stocked up right!”
As soon as he found the inn, Jack immediately opened the door.
Several old men were lightly drinking inside. They all puzzledly looked at Jack.
“Who are you? Haven’t seen you around before?”
“I’ve been traveling you see. Mind if I join in?”
“Arriving here at a time like this, you sure are unlucky huh.”
The old men muttered so with a bitter smile.
They all looked like they already gave up on running away.
“Old-timers like us can’t live anywhere else. We want to die in this city. But you are different right? We
won’t badmouth you or anything, just run away while you can.”
1958
“I came all this way to have the taste of Karelia’s alcohol. I can’t escape without trying one you know.”
“You really are a strange one. Nina-chan! Someone as weird as you finally came you know!”
Saying so, the old men call out to the back of the inn.
Then a girl in an apron who seemed to be in her late teens came out from the back of the inn.
She is a girl with brown hair and a few freckles on her face. She shows Jack a charming smile and
urges him to sit.
“Yes yes! Welcome! Are you alone?”
“Yeah, I’m alone. For the time being give me some alcohol. Some snacks too.”
“Yes! Certainly! Please wait a moment!”
She is probably the only one working right now.
The girl called Nina is busy returning back and forth serving the food to the old men.
Jack waits for his alcohol while observing the situation.
Then, soon after, alcohol and snacks arrive at Jack’s table.
“Thank you, Miss.”
“No, no, Karelia’s alcohol is really excellent after all! Please enjoy it!”
“Nina-chan. You’ve already done serving us customers right. You should escape now. We won’t think
badly of you at all.”
“Even if I run away, there’s no guarantee that I can escape right? Then rather than running away, I’d
prefer protecting my sleeping father and his shop like this. My dad opened this inn for adventurers. If
we have to close up shop because of a monster then there’s no meaning to this inn right!”
After pouring alcohol into a glass, Jack gulps it down.
Even Jack who has tried many alcohols before finds its taste to be pleasant. After admiring the
delicious famous alcohol of Karelia, Jack speaks to Nina.
“You are quite courageous……Miss. What’s wrong with your dad?”
“He’s sleeping because of an illness. It’s nothing serious but traveling is……..”
The bright Nina showed a dark expression for the first time.
After seeing that expression, his drink didn’t taste as good as it was the first time.
Thinking that alcohol is best enjoyed in a pleasant mood, Jack sighs.
1959
Meanwhile, there was a rattling noise coming from the second floor.
Nina’s gaze turned to the stairs.
“Wait!? Otou-san! What are you doing!?”
“That’s my line…..hurry up and escape already……!”
Grabbing the railing, Nina’s father came down the stairs.
Then he turned toward Jack who was drinking by himself.
“You…..are you an adventurer……?”
“What if I am?”
“I beg you, take my daughter and run away…….”
Nina’s father who opened an inn for adventurers for many years could see a part of Jack’s ability.
In the first place, there would be no one who can casually drink alcohol in a situation like this.
An inexperienced adventurer would see this as an opportunity and headed to intercept the monster.
And if it is a veteran adventurer then, he would go to escort the evacuating people already.
Jack, who is neither of those, seemed mysterious in Nina’s father’s eyes but that is exactly why he
wanted to entrust her with Jack.
“It’s too late to run away now you know. The monster is already at the wall. The adventurers are
probably intercepting it right now.”
“Even if the monster was stopped….there might be aftermath…….”
“High-ranking adventurers from the Guild already arrived at the wall. It won’t come to that.”
“We don’t know that for sure……! Please…..!”
“This is getting tedious. No matter how many times you ask, I will not accept the quest. I don’t want to
force myself on someone who doesn’t want to escape in the first place.”
“That’s right! Otou-san! I will stay here in this inn with you! I already decided that!”
Nina says so and pushes her father back upstairs.
Perhaps because he was pushing himself, he couldn’t resist Nina at all.
After a while, Nina came back.
She then gave another bottle of alcohol to Jack.
1960
“I didn’t order that you know?”
“It is the trouble fee. I am sorry for my father.”
“…..it’s natural for a father to act like that.”
Seeing his beloved daughter trying to protect himself and his inn.
How happy would that be?
However, it is exactly because of that feeling that he can’t accept this.
Jack understood the feelings of Nina’s father.
However.
“Then, why did you not accept the request…..?”
“I can’t let a parent selfishly make a decision for their child. I have a daughter too you see…….”
It was because he felt Nina’s iron will to stay that he refused the request.
It is natural for a parent to want their child to escape. But the daughter also has her own feelings.
For Jack whose wife took his daughter and ran away, it is a request that he can’t accept.
“What kind of girl is she?”
“Well, I haven’t seen her in a long time. I hope that I can get to see her someday but…….I’ve already
decided. I will never deny her way of life.”
Jack drinks while remembering his small daughter.
However, the taste of alcohol keeps getting worse.
It was natural. The last time he saw his small daughter was when she was crying and reaching her
hand out for Jack as he headed out for a mission.
When she told him not to leave, he didn’t pay it any mind.
Back then, he only prioritized climbing through the rank of adventurers.
That bitter memory ruined the taste of alcohol for him.
It’s always like this. He could only think of the first sip as delicious. After that, the taste will only get
worse and worse.
“You are a good father, dear customer.”
1961
“A good father? Me? Let me tell you this, my wife and daughter ran out on me you know? All because
of my own selfishness.”
“But even now you are still thinking about your daughter right? You are the same as my dad.”
“Ha……I am not such a wonderful father like your dad, Miss.”
Saying so, Jack smiled at himself.
The old men started making noise.
“Nina-chan! There’s a monster outside!”
“Quick! Hide!!”
At that time, a Thorny Sparrow rushed in from outside the inn.
It broke the window, and the old men and Nina screamed.
However, in that instant, the sparrow was immediately pulverized.
“Eh……?”
“What happened to them……….?”
While astounded at the monster’s appearance, Jack put the bow in his hand on his shoulder.
He then searched his shirt pocket.
“Oh? I was sure that I have one left……Hmm, ah, there it is.”
Saying so, Jack looked at the coin he pulled out from his pocket and frowned.
Still, thinking that there’s nothing he can do, he put the coin on the table.
“The alcohol and snacks were delicious. Don’t worry about the change.”
“Eh? Eh, eh, EEEEEEEHHH!!??”
When Nina saw the color of the coin he put on the table, she yelled and started shaking.
After all, what he just put down was a rainbow coin.
“Th, th, the change……”
“Just use it for your father’s medical expenses. That’s the only coin I have with me right now.”
“No, no way! We can not possibly accept this!”
1962
“It’s for the delicious alcohol…..and your bravery, Miss. if you can’t spend it all then I will be using the
rest when I come back.”
“……who are……you…….?”
“The name is Jack. An SS-rank adventurer. Even looking like this, I am the best bowman on the
continent you know? My wife and daughter ran out on me though.”
Saying so, Jack leaves the inn.
He then looked up at the sky and sighed.
“What are those guys doing?”
Countless Thorny Sparrows are flying above the city.
It seemed that Egor and the others were trying to keep them out of the city but it seemed that since
they don’t have enough hands, the monsters gradually breached their defense and came in little by
little.
Seeing that, Jack took out a small toy-like arrow.
When magic power flow through the toy-like arrow, it changes into an elongated arrow.
Jack then nocked it on his bow and aimed it to the sky.
“All or nothing! Reach heaven and rain down! Magic bow secret move!……. Focused Scattered Rain of
Light!!”
It was the secret technique of the magic bow that Mia once used. After chanting the same incantation,
Jack fired the arrow.
The giant arrow of light soars to the sky and descends down toward the city.
At the same time, the arrow of light began to diffuse.
The number is not the same as Mia’s. Over 10,000 small light arrows rain on the city.
The amazing thing about this is that all of them perfectly hit their marks.
Each one of them hit the sparrows that were flying in the sky.
With just one attack, the sparrows were wiped out.
After confirming that, Jack instantly scaled up the wall.
“What kind of wind carried you here? Jack.”
1963
“Since you guys played around too much, those guys ended up ruining my drinks. I’m cleaning this
up.”
Saying so, Jack’s sight turned toward the evolution slime.
1964
SPT Chapter 304
Coffee Appreciation Day!!! Slime busting Edition!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Correction, Five
“As expected of you, Jack. You completely wiped out those birds.”
“A number advantage doesn’t work on a user of magic bow after all. That aside, what were you guys
doing? That kind of monster, you could just blow it away with a single blow right?”
Jack suspiciously stares at us.
In response, I immediately answered.
“I am busy looking for the core of that slime.”
“Slime……? Did your mask block your eye holes or something? That’s clearly a bird right?”
“Since you are being serious, I will let that slide.”
“You wanna go punk?”
Hearing my reply, Jack angrily glares at me.
I almost respond to that by letting out killing intent.
Calm down. I’m the person with common sense here.
“……that’s an evolution slime. It’s a super rare monster that evolves by assimilating other monsters.”
“Why is such an annoying monster here? In the first place, why are you looking for a slime core in a
situation like this? Are you an idiot?”
I sigh at the expected question.
This guy also didn’t listen to a word from Clyde huh. No, he didn’t even want to take part in this in the
first place. I guess that’s a natural question.
“We were told by Clyde to not level the area here right. We gave up on annihilating the slime and
switched to searching for its core instead. I am searching for the core while those three are fighting
the clones while holding back.”
“Holding back? Those guys? Having a dragon try knitting would be easier you know?”
1965
“I think so too but we don’t have enough manpower. If you joined us from the beginning then there
wouldn’t be a problem in the first place though?”
“Are they mocking us or something?”
“It couldn’t be helped. We are bad at holding back after all.”
“I’ve been saying this from the start right. We shouldn’t consider not destroying the area here in the
first place.”
Each of them has their own reaction.
Linares has a complicated expression on his face, Egor already gave up arguing, and Noname claimed
that our method was wrong from the start.
These guys are useless in a situation like this probably because they are all power type.
It would somehow work out if the opponent is a single strong individual but this time it is trying to
overwhelm us with numbers.
A great number of opponents and these guys who always cause damage to the surrounding have poor
compatibility.
Well, originally such incompatibility won’t have any effect in the first place though.
“With 4 SS-rank adventurers gathered together, who would think that all of you would do something
so roundabout like this. I thought that there wouldn’t be a turn for me in the first palace.”
“Just give up. We can use nothing more than half of our power.”
“Then isn’t it okay if the reward is only divided between me and Silver? Once he finds the core, I will
shoot it down.”
“That’s not the deal. I am supposed to be the one giving it the finishing blow.”
“I want to work out a little bit more too〜”
“Me three〜”
“Haaa…….”
No matter what is happening, it seems like they are still playing huh.
It is true that it will take us some time to take it down while holding back but each of them can blow
that monster away with a single attack if they feel like it.
Still, this is a monster that isn’t worth using their real power against so they can’t take the situation
seriously.
1966
“So? Silver. Where’s the core at? Don’t tell me you still couldn’t find it alright?”
“Don’t take me for a fool. Of course, I already found it.”
I create a small barrier just below the center of the slime.
That will serve as a mark. The slime’s core is there.
“Alright, I will take it from here.”
“Why would I leave it to a useless guy like you. What would you do if you fail?”
“Who are you calling useless huh?”
“It’s you. You useless mask.”
“……Jack. I don’t mind fighting you before that monster you know?”
“Ha! You want to fight me even though you can’t even adjust your strength? Leave the sleep talking
when you are actually asleep.”
“I have no need to hold back against you right.”
“What you said just now showed a clear difference between us. As an adventurer, you are inferior to
Silver. You want to fight me in the country that you are based in? This country will be destroyed you
know?”
“That’s how I want it. I have no attachment to this country after all.”
Jack and Noname’s killing intent swell up.
Egor and Linares seem to have given up on stopping them.
Seriously, it’s so troublesome that their personalities clash like this.
“What a pointless quarrel. If you are an adventurer then show your ability through the result.”
“The result?”
“I am going to intercept its clones. The one who destroys the slime’s core first win. Of course, without
leveling the terrain here.”
We can’t allow a battle between two SS-rank adventurers here.
This is not only about subjugating the monster after all.
“What is in it for me if I win?”
“I will give you my share of the reward.”
1967
“Ha! Well, that’s not so bad.”
“I have nothing to gain here. I am not troubled with money, and it was me who was supposed to give
the finishing blow in the first place.”
“What? You chickened out? Then I will just shoot that thing down now. Just stay out of my way.”
“……Fine. I will buy that cheap provocation of yours.”
Jack made a cheap provocation at Noname and she bought it all out
This is the pinnacle of adventurers. While thinking that this doesn’t seem like a conversation between
SS-rank adventurers at all, I didn’t say anything as this is the best solution.
“Linares, Elder Egor. are you two fine with this?”
“It’s alright with me. Then, I will bet on Noname’s side using my share of the reward okay.”
“Then I will bet on Jack. You don’t mind us helping them out right? Silver.”
“Do whatever you want……”
Seriously.
In this case, the Adventurer Guild was only requested to dispatch an SS-rank adventurer. It was only
on a whim that five of us came here.
The standard fee of 3 rainbow coins will probably not be applied here. Perhaps we will get one or two
rainbow coins each. Still, it is truly surreal to see them betting such an amount of money so easily.
With this amount of rainbow coins flowing, an economy of a small nation would lose its stability.
“Sorry, Lord-dono. There’s some correction. There will be five SS-rank adventurers participating in
this quest. And I am very sorry but we will treat this subjugation as a competition.”
“W, Well…….if you can subjugate that monster then……”
“In an emergency case, I will protect the area around here using a barrier. I don’t know what these
guys will do once they get heated up after all.”
While saying that to Vengerov, I look at Egor and Linares with a frown under my mask.
If they all get excited here then it will be difficult to protect the terrain here.
“……the match will be decided at the destruction of the core. Noname will be supported by Linares.
Elder Egor will support Jack. I will be on the defensive. If you destroy the landscape then you will lose
by default. Understood? This applies to everyone, alright?”
“Leave it to me.”
1968
“I got it.”
“Hurry up and start already. It will be an instant kill anyway.”
“I’m ready.”
This is super worrying.
What should I do.
If I let them start like this I might end up having to use some kind of ridiculous barrier here.
Suddenly, I came up with an idea.
That’s right. Let’s think about this in reverse.
“In the unlikely event that the terrain is destroyed, the person responsible will have to compensate for
it on their own. Okay?”
“What!? I never agreed to that!?”
“Fine by me.”
“By the way, if you don’t show me that you really want to prevent that then you will lose okay? Don’t
think that you will just pay for it once you’ve destroyed everything alright?”
“…..of course.”
She really thought about it.
What a woman.
That was dangerous.
I can’t let down my guard at all.
Still, after I already said that much they probably won’t do that deliberately.
I have already done everything I can.
The rest is up to the gods.
“Then, get ready. Start!”
At the same time as I said that, Jack fired an arrow at the speed of god.
1969
SPT Chapter 305
Guess I will just order some japanese crepe and throw the strawberry in the blender with some
yogurt……
Is it just me or is my diet resemble the JK lately……Kyahh
-Mr.Graverobber
The Final Struggle
“Ara Ara, an impatient man will be hated, you know?”
Linares was the first to respond to Jack’s god speed arrow.
Or rather, you wouldn’t be able to intercept something like that unless you anticipate it and act at the
same time.
Linares leaped forward and jumped to the sky, blocking the trajectory of Jack’s arrow.
“HAAAAA!?”
The arrow’s trajectory was diverted and missed the core.
With that being an arrow shot by Jack, it would be almost impossible for it to miss but since that’s
Linares, there’s no helping it. It was almost like he just kicked it away.
“Oi! Silver! That is allowed!?”
“Well, he didn’t interfere directly with you after all.”
“Tsk! Don’t mess with me!”
While Jack was cursing, Linares already moved into an attacking position.
In response, the evolution slime tries to intercept Linares by extending its countless thorns at him
while maintaining its form as a Thorny Sparrow.
However.
“Ara? Nice footholds.”
Linares approaches the slime without any difficulty using its own thorns as his foothold.
Even if he is bad at holding back, the difference in power here is clear.
Attacks from the evolution slime will not do anything to the SS-rank adventurers.
1970
Linares rushed through the incoming thorns and tried to hit the evolution slime. Noname will be the
one who delivers the finishing blow but Linares is probably thinking that he should prevent its
counterattack beforehand.
However.
“That’s terrible! Elder Egor!”
“Oops? You were standing on that? My bad, my bad.”
Egor smiles at him from on top of the city wall.
He didn’t seem to move at all but the thorns of the evolution slime were all cut.
He was so fast that I didn’t even notice when he unsheathed his sword.
If he went out of his way to take a stance then he might end up slashing the terrain too huh.
Linares who lost his footholds landed on the ground.
That move indeed stopped Linares but the true attacker, Noname has already made her move.
Noname and I are the only SS-rank adventurers that can fly in the sky.
That Noname is right now descending from the sky and plunging toward the evolution slime’s core.
There should be no counterattack coming from it now. She should be able to destroy the core while it
is regenerating from the earlier attack.
Direct interference is not allowed.
In response, Jack also fired his arrow but Noname is faster.
“This is the end.”
Saying so, Noname wields the Dis Pater.
However, at that moment.
Countless amounts of cores have grown from the slime.
Noname definitely cut one down but the evolution slime did not begin to collapse.
“What is this?”
“They all seem to be real. Just cut all of them.”
When I examine it with my barrier, all of the cores seem to be genuine.
Not dummies, all of them are genuine cores.
1971
So from its earlier experience, it judged that dividing itself is more effective than defending huh.
However, if that is the case then this situation is dangerous.
“Ha! It seems like this is my win!”
Jack nocked an arrow with an intention to shoot at all of the cores.
On the other hand, the evolution slime creates a giant Thorny Sparrow clone.
The diffused arrow that Jack shot out was blocked by the giant sparrow.
“Tsk!”
The destructive power of the diffused arrow is not that strong individually.
To deal with such a thing, creating one powerful clone that can block such an attack is a wise move.
However, if that happens, another one of us will have a turn to shine.
“Ara? Is it alright creating only one of that?”
Linares jumped up from the ground and delivered a kick to the cloned sparrow.
The big sparrow that received his kick got blown away high in the sky and exploded midair.
“Nice assist! You Drag Queen!”
“Excuse you.”
Jack shoots a countless diffused arrow at the cores again.
However, Linares jumped at one of them and used it as a foothold again.
“Oi!?”
“Thank you for this. Do it now, Noname.”
“I appreciate your help.”
Jack’s arrow brilliantly pierced the cores but Linares shifted the trajectory of one of them, leaving only
one of the core intact.
Without missing that chance, Noname moved in to cut it.
After using its thorns to attack, dividing its core, and creating a huge clone, it seems that the evolution
slime is already exhausted so it doesn’t look like it can divide its core again.
This is the end.
1972
The moment I thought so.
Egor swings his katana.
“I won’t let you.”
Egor’s slash bisected the evolution slime in two.
The evolution slime that was horizontally bisected, lost its lower half and collapsed while losing its
form.
As a result, the position of the core shifted and Noname lost her chance to attack.
The problem was that earlier slash.
It was far from his full power but if I hadn’t set up a barrier behind the evolution slime it would surely
cause damage to the surroundings.
“There’s no next time okay. Elder Egor.”
“That’s only a little prank. More importantly, let’s continue.”
“Of course.”
Jack was ready.
This should be the end.
However, at that moment, the evolution slime produces a large number of sparrows as its last stand.
The sparrows all head to the city of Karelia.
There is no guarantee that they will immediately disappear if we destroy the main core.
When I was preparing to intercept them.
“Tsk!”
Jack shot down the flock of sparrows while clicking his tongue.
“Wh, What are you doing!!??”
When Egor lets out his scream, Noname has already cut the core.
And the evolution slime’s body slowly collapses.
1973
SPT Chapter 306
Special Thanks to Double Tap for Atarashii Coffee!!
I am making strawberry crepe today…….
-Mr.Graverobber
After the Subjugation
“What are you doing!? No sane adventurer would do that you know!?”
“Shut up! I can’t help but aim at them right! You old fart!”
“What do you think you have support for!? Did you drink too much and forget the basics of
teamwork!?”
“This got nothing to do with how much I drank! You were too slow to deal with it in the first place!”
“If I couldn’t make it then there is still Silver!”
“Don’t just rely on others to wipe your own ass!”
Jack and Egor are engaging in an unsightly fistfight with each other on top of the wall.
The people who were on the wall already went down to avoid getting caught up in their fight.
Seriously…..
“Cut it out already, you two.”
“It’s already ended so we won’t be troubling anyone here! C’mon you old fart!”
“You fool! You didn’t get serious because you don’t have anything to lose right!”
“WHAT!? Nn……?”
Jack stopped himself and think about what Egor just said for a moment.
That’s right, Jack has nothing to lose in case of his defeat.
I said that I will give Noname my portion of the reward if she wins against Jack but She didn’t say
anything other than that.
She said that she didn’t have any trouble with money in the first place so she will probably not pursue
the matter either.
1974
On the other hand, Linares and Egor selfishly placed a bet and supported them on their own. As long
as Jack loses, Egor’s reward will be given to Linares instead. However, Jack will just normally receive
his share of the reward.
What Egor said earlier was also correct. Both I and Egor were on the wall to intercept the slime’s
attack.
If Jack just intercepted the attack himself then there would be no point having me and Egor there. In
that case, Egor would be better off fighting at the frontline.
When he realized that he didn’t have to give up his reward, Jack grinned at Egor.
Then.
“Serve you right, you old fart.”
“Whose fault do you think it is!?”
“You just selfishly placed a bet on me on your own right! You reap what you sowed!”
“What did you say!? Even after I stick up for you because I see you as a drinking friend! Hand over that
bottle!”
“Like hell I would do that! I bought that myself so it’s mine!”
“I won’t let you off anymore!”
“Come at me then!”
The halted boxing match started again.
Meanwhile, Noname and Linares returned to the wall.
“Ara ara, you are fighting your friend ow? It’s unsightly you know?”
“Like hell I am friends with this old bastard!”
“That’s my line!”
While responding to Linares, the two continue to dish out their fists.
It’s no longer a speed that normal adventurers can keep up.
“…..Jack. I have something I want to ask you.”
“WHAT?”
“AN OPENING!”
“LIKE HELL THERE IS!!”
1975
Egor mercilessly performed a right straight toward Jack who responded to Noname.
On the other hand, Jack also made a right straight.
Neither missed their target, they both hit each other on the cheeks and blew away.
“WOAH!?”
“You’ve done it now!?”
Both of them were trying to close in on each other again but Noname came in between them.
Then she faces Jack.
“I have something I have to ask you.”
“So persistent…..what is it?”
“Why didn’t you shoot at the core?”
“Like hell I know. My body just moved on its own.”
“Someone as strong as you should be able to stop a reaction like that.”
“…….the alcohol in this city was delicious. That’s all there is to it.”
Saying so, Jack turned back while clicking his tongue.
Apparently, he doesn’t want to fight anymore.
“In case of an unlikely emergency, one of us should stay behind here. Though?”
“I will stay.”
“No, I will.”
Jack offered to stay but Noname suddenly volunteered herself.
That’s unusual.
“What are you doing? You said that you have no interest in this country right?”
“I should be the right person for this.”
“That is true but what are you standing to gain by staying here?”
“Once in a while, I want to act like a proper adventurer as well.”
“So you felt the difference between you and Jack huh?”
1976
“…..I will leave it to your imagination.”
Saying so, Noname goes down the wall.
Jack has a suspicious expression on his face but he doesn’t seem to object to Noname staying behind.
“Anyone else wants to stay?”
“Not me.”
“No.”
“If that guy wants to stay, then let him do whatever he wants.”
After hearing all of their responses, I opened a transfer gate to the Guild Headquarters.
The next day.
I was in Finne’s room.
“For the time being, it seems that everything is all good on this side huh.”
“It is thanks to everyone’s help.”
“Well, I felt like the number of problems has also increased too though.”
As I sighed, Finne smiles gently at me.
However, her smile quickly turned into a serious expression.
“However, this is still not the end.”
“Right. The Empire’s problems still haven’t been solved yet. You will head back today right?”
“Yes, I will return to the capital as soon as possible.”
“You don’t have to push yourself. You have already done more than enough on this side. Just take it
slow.”
“I can’t do that. If I don’t hurry and return then Captain Olivier will have to be stuck with me after all.”
It is true that an Imperial Knight Captain is crucial in a situation like this.
The faster Olivier can return to the capital, the less the burden the other captains will have to bear. It
means that we will have more options.
However.
1977
“Even so, be careful on your way back. Well, with Olivier with you, I probably don’t have to worry
though.”
“…..So there is no room for a negotiation after all?”
“There is no point negotiating with Gordon anymore. We have no other choice but to take him down.”
“Is..that so…….”
Finne has a depressed expression on her face.
It is not that she felt sympathy for Gordon.
Whether it’s me or Leo, one of us going to have to kill our own brother.
“……this problem is the Imperial Family’s. It’s natural that we have to clean it up on our own.”
“However, even an Imperial Family member is still a human.”
“Right. That’s why…….when I and Leo return, be there for us in the Imperial Capital.”
“Yes. definitely.”
Finne gently holds my hand and replies.
For a while, I will have to part with this warmth.
Finne will be returning to the Imperial Capital today but after I sent off the other SS-rank adventurers,
I will head straight back to the capital.
It is possible for me to bring Finne back right away but if I take everyone including the escorts then
the consumption of magic power will be large.
“See you later. Be careful.”
“Yes, Al-sama as well.”
I let go of her hand and open a transfer gate.
She called me Al-sama because she knows that I will be fighting as Arnold from now on.
Finne is probably worried about me.
“…….I wish you good luck.”
“Yeah, thank you. This time…..a lot of blood will be shed after all.”
“Because I know that Al-sama is someone who will do everything you can to reduce that……..I believe
in you.”
1978
“That’s a tall order. Well, I will do my best.”
I parted ways with Finne and entered the transfer gate with a bitter smile.
1979
SPT Chapter 307
It’s Wednesday!! We start with the epilogue of the previous part and tomorrow it will be Al’s turn.
-Mr.Graverobber
Sabotage
“Alright, let’s go.”
Saying so, I transferred away with the other 3 SS-rank adventurers.
It would be too much of a hassle to send them away one by one so I decided to do it all at once.
First is Linares.
“We are here.”
“Ahh, such a refreshing air. The outside air was really harsh on my skin and hair you know.”
“If the air can affect you that much then that’s probably because you are getting old right.”
“Jac〜k? Do you want me to punch you all the way back to the Kingdom from here?”
The topic of age is taboo for Linares.
The killing intent behind his smile is even greater than when we confronted the evolution slime.
Perhaps he also felt that, Jack took a distance from Linares.
“Hurry up and open the transfer gate! Silver!”
“Ara Ara? You are leaving already? Don’t you want to join me for a cup of tea?”
“I refuse! You say something too, you old fart!”
“This wine sure is delicious. It really is excellent! Silver.”
“I’m glad you like it.”
Even after we returned to the Headquarters, Egor was depressed since he can’t buy a drink without
his reward so I gave him a super-luxurious bottle of wine.
Thanks to that, he’s in a good mood even in front of Jack and he has been drinking it the entire time.
While looking at Egor thinking that he can’t rely on him Jack begins to escape from Linares who is
intimidatingly approaching him.
1980
“Haa…..”
Since it would be a problem to let them fight here, I open the transfer gate.
“Good Job!”
Seeing that, Jack jumped into the gate as if he was diving into the water.
He really is an idiot huh. The gate isn’t even connected to a sea or a river in the first place.
“The next time I see him I will make sure to beat him up.”
“I wonder when you will meet him again though. It’s already so strange that we were all together like
this in the first place.”
“…..that’s true. It seems that there won’t be a chance for us to come together like this again.”
“That is kind of lonely isn’t it.”
Saying so, Egor also entered the transfer gate.
I was about to follow him but Linares stopped me.
“Silver.”
“What is it?”
“Stop getting yourself involved with the Empire any further than this.”
“….the succession war this time is too strange. I am sure that there is something lurking in the dark.”
“Is that something that you need to get yourself involved with?”
“Who knows. Still, I have already stepped into their problem. I can’t pull out now.”
“……right. Then do your best and be careful alright.”
“Thanks for the advice. Also…..you really saved me this time. Thank you for everything.”
When I honestly thanked him, Linares showed a bitter smile.
Then I entered the transfer gate.
The destination of the transfer gate was the Dwarven Village.
There.
“Don’t you just casually drink my alcohol after you messed up my house!”
“Stop being stingy!”
1981
Egor and Jack were fighting over a bottle of alcohol.
Hearing the commotion, Sonia showed her face.
“Ah, welcome back! Have you finished your business?”
“Somehow, yeah. I am returning Elder Egor to you now.”
“Don’t treat me like an object! I am the one protecting her you know!”
“Ah–!! You are drinking again! I’m confiscating that!!”
“AHHH——–!!??”
Egor was robbed of the super-luxurious wine he was drinking and raised a sad cry.
Seeing that, Jack was astonished.
“Wh, What a terrifying lady…….”
“Just one glass! One glass please!”
“No! You said that but you are planning to drink the whole bottle aren’t you! You are already old, I
have to watch out for your health!”
“Alcohol is good for your body〜……..”
“If you drink too much then even medicine can turn poisonous!”
With that said, Sonia puts the bottle on a high shelf.
Egor could get it if he wanted to but he would be scolded by Sonia in return.
“Since you suddenly came back I didn’t prepare anything for your stay. I am going to call His Majesty
okay.”
“It’s okay. I will leave soon.”
“Is that so? Otou-san said that he wanted to see you though…….”
“I will leave that to next time. Take care of Elder Egor for me.”
“Un, Leave him to me.”
Saying so, Sonia smiles at me.
It’s a smile with no ulterior motive. She’s probably happy here huh.
That’s good.
1982
Getting to see that smile means that our actions have some meaning no matter how little it is.
Making people carry such a smile and protect them, that is Leo’s ideal.
“What’s wrong?”
“No, it’s nothing. Well then, excuse me.”
I said so and opened a transfer gate.
Jack then followed after me.
The place we arrived at was the city of alcohol, Bayeux.
No, it’s not.
“Hmm? Where is this?”
“It’s near the east border of the Dominion.”
“HAAAA!?”
The place we are currently inside a forest near the Dominion’s eastern border.
From Jack’s point of view, it is a destination that doesn’t make any sense.
“What are you doing? You want me to stop drinking too?”
“It’s your reward.”
“What? This is my reward!? I told that you have to help me sea—”
Jack’s expression turned into that of a surprise mid-sentence.
In response, I give him a nod.
“I don’t know if she is your daughter or not but I know a girl in her late teens who uses magic bow. She
is quite skillful as well. If it’s your master who raised her then it makes sense.”
“Wh, where is she!? Where!? No, why is she living in the Dominion in the first place!? Don’t you know
how dangerous this country is!”
“I don’t know about that. But she is certainly doing something a little dangerous in this country.”
“….tell me. What is the girl who might be my daughter doing?”
“A chivalrous thief. The name is Vermillion. You must have heard the name before right?”
“Only the name…….but a chivalrous thief? That’s my daughter?”
1983
Jack muttered as though he finds it unbelievable.
He then sits down on a large rock nearby.
“What’s wrong? Don’t you want to see for yourself?”
“…..if the chivalrous thief really is my daughter……it would be dangerous if I look for her……”
“If it’s you, you might be able to find her but once she was found, it would be hard for her to go into
hiding again huh.”
The nobles of the Dominion are Mia’s enemy. Until now, they couldn’t grasp her true identity at all.
However, if Jack snoops around gathering information and eventually finds her, there is a possibility
that the nobles might notice.
Even if it’s only a minuscule possibility.
Jack doesn’t want to endanger his daughter.
What a troublesome guy.
“Vermillion is the enemy of the Dominion’s nobles and Grimoire. If you go after them then you might
be able to meet her you know?”
“…..so there’s no problem if I crush a criminal organization huh?”
“That’s right. But it would be bad if you go after the nobles you know? There is no clean authority in
this country. Even if you expose their wrongdoings, you will only get put on their watch list. She
probably understands that and chose the path of a chivalrous thief.”
“Tsk…..it would be nice if I can just shoot them all down……..”
“……..”
“What?”
“No, it’s nothing.”
These two might really be connected by blood.
Their thinking and behavior are the same.
So I propose a deal to Jack.
“Jack. I have a deal for you.”
“…….what is it?”
1984
“This Vermillion who may or may not be your daughter, you want to find and help her if you can
right?”
“Of course. I don’t mind her being a chivalrous thief. It’s my daughter’s decision after all. But, it is still
dangerous. I want her to quit if possible.”
“Right. But it is a bad move to go after the nobles. If you do it poorly then you might be barred from
entering the Dominion after all.”
“Yeah, they might really do it if it is this country.”
“That’s where my proposal comes in. I want you to attack the nobles of this country without getting
caught. Keep hitting them so hard that they can’t recover from it. Anyway, I want you to plunge this
country’s upper management into chaos.”
Jack looks suspiciously at me.
However, I continue without minding him.
“If you do that, I will get in touch with the Imperial Family of the Empire. Once they invade this
country and occupy it, their first course of action will be punishing the corrupted nobles of this
country.”
“…..in other words, you want me to sabotage them?”
“Exactly. The Empire is currently in a state of civil war but they are also being invaded from both the
North and the West. To overcome this situation, they need to repel the enemy on either front. And one
of the Imperial Family’s goals is surely the defeat of Prince Gordon. To do that, the United Kingdom
and the Dominion who are backing him are in the way. If we spread confusion inside the Dominion, it
will be difficult for the United Kingdom to make their move.”
“What is the guarantee that the Empire will counter-invade when the civil war is over?”
“The Empire will never forgive the countries that took advantage of the civil war. Besides, the
Dominion is a perfect target for them to let out their anger. After all, this is the country that murdered
their Crown Prince. The Emperor will not be so forgiving this time.”
“I see……”
What I asked Jack to do was to sabotage the Dominion.
The nobles of the Dominions are corrupt but what is more important is how they only care about
themselves.
Even when they act as though they are doing everything for the sake of their country, they all only
care about their profit.
If Jack goes on a rampage inside their country, they will surely focus their efforts internally. That
would create a rift between the United Kingdom and Gordon.
1985
If it becomes impossible for them to smoothly transport reinforcements to Gordon then Gordon’s
camp will not be able to maintain the status quo.
On the other hand, what Jack will be given in return is how Mia can quit being a chivalrous thief.
If the Dominion becomes a good country, Mia will have no reason to continue being one. This is a bit of
a hassle but it is a cheap price for Jack’s cooperation.
“……alright. I accept.”
“I will leave the methods to you. But do not let them know your true identity. You will be banished
from the country and that will be the end. Also, in the unlikely case that they found out, do not go on a
rampage. If you do that, the others will be forced to subdue you after all.”
“You sure have a lot of requests huh…..well, fine. I will do it.”
Said Jack as he walked straight toward the Dominion.
After seeing him off, I finally take a breather.
For the time being, I have secured a saboteur. The only thing left to deal with is the Empire’s force.
While thinking about that, I transferred to the Imperial Capital.
“Welcome back, sir.”
“Yeah, I’m back. What’s the situation?”
Sebas welcomes me back to my room as usual.
It’s been less than a week yet I feel like I’ve been away for a long time.
Still, that nostalgic feeling was immediately blown away by Sebas.
“The army led by Prince William has routed the army of the Northern Lords on our defensive line. The
front that Leonard-sama built had collapsed and the rebel is currently dominating the battle in the
North, sir.”
“As I thought, that Dragon Prince is a formidable opponent. I will lead the reinforcements there
myself.”
“As you wish, sir. His Majesty is currently holding an emergency meeting inside the throne room.”
“That’s convenient. Alright, follow me. We are going to conduct the secret maneuver at the battlefield
this time.”
With that said, I don my imperial mantle and head to the throne room.
1986
SPT Chapter 308
Special thanks to LessDark for Ze coffee and don’t give in to the temptation damn it!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
————————
Self Nomination
“How much has the situation changed?”
I asked Sebas as I make my way to the throne room.
While I was acting as Silver, in addition to the on-going civil war, the Empire was invaded by other
countries. Even the slightest move could cause the whole situation to change.
“The most serious situation is the North, sir. Leonard-sama had erected a defensive line with three
armies using the main force, the army of the Union of the Northern Lords and the Imperial army but
they can not maintain the defensive line because the army of the Northern Lords was routed.
Currently, Leonard-sama is leading the main army and fighting defensively in a castle but the castle in
question is being besieged, sir.”
“His decision not to withdraw immediately was wise. If Leo withdraws from that place then most of
the Northern Lords will migrate to Gordon’s camp instead. That alone is enough to decide the battle.”
“However, Leonard-sama is being besieged in return. The Imperial army led by the generals is still
locked in a stalemate with the enemy army. It is a situation where he can not expect any on-site
rescue, sir.”
“That’s why I will bring up the topic of dispatching reinforcements from the Imperial Capital. Leo will
have a hard time dealing with the Dragon Prince after all. The United Kingdom probably dispatched
reinforcements anyway right? They still have their Dragon Knight Order after all.”
“Yes. The enemy army initially has 40,000 men and Leonard-sama’s army also has the same number.
However, with 20,000 reinforcements from the United Kingdom and the Dominion, including the
Dragon Knights led directly by the Dragon Prince, the Northern Lords couldn’t cope with them, sir.”
“Rather than they couldn’t cope with the enemy, it is more like they didn’t feel like doing it in the first
place. The Northern Lords don’t have a strong sense of duty to help the Imperial Family from the start
after all.”
I sigh.
Three years ago. Since the death of the Crown Prince, the Northern Lords have been treated coldly.
They were slandered and accused that they let the Crown Prince die while some even say that they
were directly involved in his death.
1987
There were almost no attendees from the North at the festival in the Imperial Capital so it can be said
that our relationship with the North has gone cold.
Even if we call them the Union of the Northern Lords, it doesn’t mean that every Lord in the North has
participated in this war and the morale of those participating is not that high.
“In the first place, the Fourth Consort’s birthplace is the North. One could say that it is Gordon’s
faction’s turf. Apparently, their relationship with Gordon was not so good but it will probably make it
awkward for them to fight him aggressively. Is Duke Lowenstein still retaining his neutrality?”
“Yes. Using his illness as the reason, he still hasn’t joined either side, sir.”
The Duke of Lowenstein is the most influential aristocrat in the North.
The family head is the father of the Fourth Consort. As a general of the Imperial Army, he was once
feared as the [Thunder God]. He is a powerful piece that will turn the tide of the war regardless of the
side he joins.
However, he was once a great general of the Imperial Army. Even if he is his grandson, Gordon is still a
member of the Imperial family and Leo is naturally the same. It seems that he has no intention to
participate in our internal conflict.
“I understand the situation in the North now. What about the West?”
“The commander of the Western Front is His Highness Traugott and Leticia-sama is also providing her
assistance there, sir. The Griffon Knights of the Royal Army are aware that Leticia-sama is on our side
so they refuse to mobilize. Due to that, the Kingdom’s invasion is stalled and they are currently in a
deadlock, sir.”
“You told me before that Elna also went there as their escort right? Since the Kingdom has no idea
when she might take out the Holy Sword, they will probably take a wait and see approach for the time
being. Still, Trau-niisan really went out huh?”
It’s not just how he went all the way out to the West Border despite the rebellion at the capital that
surprised me. I thought of him as one of the Imperial family members who practically never moved
away from the Imperial Capital itself.
“It was a direct order from His Majesty, sir. His Majesty intends to take control of the situation there
by sending his most trusted generals of the Imperial Army, an Imperial family member, and the
Imperial Knights.”
“With a prince and the Imperial Knights, the army will not try anything strange huh. But then there
would be a limit to the troops we can mobilize right?”
“Yes. That is what His Majesty is currently discussing, sir.”
1988
The most trustworthy personnel of the imperial army are probably together with Trau-niisan and Leo
already. We should still have an army left to be dispatched at the capital but the question is whether
they can be trusted or not.
Father probably thinks that it is dangerous to send them out on their own. Even so, Leo still needs
reinforcements.
“There are no more princes or princesses that he can move. He can’t send Christa or Rupert to the
battlefield and if Father or the Brave personally join the frontline then the war will escalate even
further.”
If Father or the Brave goes out personally then the accompanying army will be both strong and huge.
If we defeat the United Kingdom and the Dominion with such an army then they will dispatch even
more reinforcements. If we handle this poorly the civil war will only be prolonged instead.
“Yes, it may not be exactly as what Arnold-sama desires but this development should allow Arnold-
sama to be the one who leads the reinforcements there personally.”
Hearing Sebas, I shrug.
If it’s an ordinary opponent then it would be fine.
However, our opponent this time is anything but normal. They surely have countermeasures in place.
“It would be fine if our opponent is only Gordon and the Imperial Army but they also have the Dragon
Prince on their side. I already played him in the capital so he will probably put up his guard against me
this time. If I make a big move then they will immediately find a way to counter me. They will try to
prevent me from joining up with Leo and they might try to take Leo out as soon as possible too.”
“Then what do you plan to do, sir?”
“The same as usual. I will move in the shadows”
“I see. So even on a battlefield, you will be conducting secret maneuvers, correct.”
“Exactly. I am better off that way anyway. I will leave leading the army to Leo.”
I grin.
The Imperial Army’s impression of me has not changed much. This is due to the deep-rooted image of
the Dull Prince that they have. However, Prince William is different.
He probably analyzed what happened in the capital already and realized that I had been sabotaging
the rebellion throughout the incident.
With Leo who is good at a direct assault and me who moves behind the scenes, he is probably thinking
that it would be bad for him if I can join up with Leo.
1989
That is an opening I can exploit. I will not appear on the front and continue to move behind the scenes.
However, I will continue to give him hints of my presence. Having him think that I am lurking in the
shadows and stay on guard against me is already the best result I can hope for.
After all, the battlefield in the North will not change immediately.
The key is the Northern Lords. Unless we can not make them move in earnest then we won’t be able to
see the conclusion of this battle.
Leo fighting inside the castle is convenient for me. He is indeed in need of assistance but William’s
eyes will be focused on him. He probably won’t be able to monitor all the Northern Lords.
Using that time, if I can unite the Northern Lords then we will be able to destroy the enemy army in
one go.
That is the earliest way to settle this as far as I can think of.
“If we can not end this civil war then we can’t get back to the succession war after all. Besides…..the
Imperial Family should clean up its own mess.”
Gordon is a member of the Imperial Family. If he rebelled then it is our responsibility to suppress him.
No one would say out loud that it is the Imperial Family or the Emperor’s fault. Still, such thoughts will
linger in their mind. And we of the Imperial Family must engrave it in ours.
When I thought so far, I was already in front of the throne room.
The knights guarding the entrance are staring at me in surprise.
Then, a loud angry voice can be heard from the inside.
“If we send out an army that we can not trust then it will only serve as the enemy’s reinforcements!
Can’t you think of any usable plan at all!?”
It was Father’s voice.
Since the Ministers probably give him the usual answers, Father must have been frustrated.
The Ministers are also pitiful.
I slowly push the door to the throne room open with both hands.
The door opened with a creaking noise and the eyes of the people inside all drawn toward me.
“I will lead the army to Leo’s rescue myself. Ahh, please don’t worry. I will be gathering the
reinforcements on that side so—.”
‘Please lend only some elites to accompany me.’
1990
After I said that, Father’s cheeks cramped up.
1991
SPT Chapter 309
Special Thanks to Puregold for the Macchiato!!
Also, a bit late to upload today………
Well, I had a strange dream. I visited a Vietnamese embassy, got kidnapped by Jon Hamm and flew
over to Nepal to fight cartel consisted of warrior monks. (Don’t ask me, it doesn’t make any sense to
me either)
I must be high on something……
-Mr.WTFJUSTHAPPENEDINMYDREAM
Al’s Plan
“Y, Your Highness Arnold!?”
“Have you regained consciousness!?”
The senior ministers attending the meeting raised their voices in surprise.
Ignoring them, I turned my eyes to Father and Franz who was standing next to him.
“You really are………….even after you slept for a while, you still haven’t changed huh.”
“People won’t just change with only a month and a half you know.”
“That’s true…….is your body okay? Are you feeling alright?”
“Yes. I am fine. I’m sorry to make you worried.”
“It’s fine…..it’s good that you are in good health.”
Saying so, Father smiled a little. It was a smile of relief. It seems that he was worried about me quite a
bit.
Still, his expression immediately reverted to that of an emperor and turned his attention toward
Franz.
“With His Highness Arnold, our options have greatly expanded, Your Majesty.”
“Right. But it seems that Arnold has a plan of his own, right?”
1992
“It’s not something that I put that much thought into it though I only heard about the situation from
Sebas earlier. Even so, please spare me from bringing other generals with me. I don’t want to die after
all.”
“Your escorts will be the Imperial Knights, Your Highness.”
“That is not what I am worried about. The problem right now is the Dragon Prince. I made a fool of
him in the capital so he will never let me do as I pleased. As soon as he knows that I departed from the
capital, he will definitely come out.”
“……the chance of that happening is certainly high.”
Father turns to Franz and Franz gives him a quiet nod.
It would not be good if the person who got dispatched as reinforcements to be the target instead.
If I attracted the enemy’s attention then Leo could move freely but I would be subject to the enemy’s
fierce attack instead. Leaving the trustworthiness of the army aside, I don’t think that I can survive
such a thing.
It would only be doubtful at best.
“Then, what are you planning?”
“I propose that we keep it secret. Please spread the words that I am still unconscious in the Imperial
Capital.”
“…..Leonard is currently under siege. At least he would need some kind of military support. Don’t you
need an army to provide that?”
“We can’t do much even if we dispatch a large army. The enemy will probably block both the land and
the sky after all.”
At my words, Father frowned and Franz squinted his eyes.
The force I am trying to mobilize.
They probably saw through it immediately.
“For formality, I will ask. How do you plan to break through them?”
“The fastest corp of the Imperial Knights. I plan to use the 6th Imperial Knight Corp. They are our
precious air force after all.”
Hearing me, the ministers started making noises.
Our precious air force. There is a reason why we haven’t mobilized them until now.
1993
“The 6th Corp is only a ceremonial unit! If it is a reconnaissance or liaison mission then it might be
acceptable but we must never allow them to participate in a full-scale battle!”
“They ride the Divine Falcons, the phantom beasts that once were an object of worship! Only a few of
them can be found within the Empire and there are only about 50 Falcon Knights that can mount
them! How many years does Your Highness think it will take to replenish their numbers if we lost
them!?”
It’s a storm of criticism. Well, of course. It was probably on their mind already but they didn’t propose
it.
The 6th Imperial Knight Corps is one that mounts the phantom beasts called the Divine Falcons. The
Divine Falcons can fly faster than the Flying Dragons of the United Kingdom and the Griffon of the
Kingdom. Each one of them possesses overwhelming power but they are difficult to train and the
number is small.
They are also a phantom beast that was once worshipped in the Empire and because of that, the 6th
Corp has been regarded as a ceremonial unit that is only active in festivals.
Their power is guaranteed but their number is small and we can not replenish them easily. Moreover,
as they were phantom beasts that once worshipped, it would be bad to involve them in war.
Those are the reasons why they haven’t participated in any battle.
However.
“If we lose a candidate for the throne in the North then there will be nothing that we can use to unite
the Northern Lords. Even when they have been treated coldly until now, they will think that their
treatment will become even more terrible in the future. If that is the case then they will think of
joining Gordon’s side. If it has come to that then it will only be too late you know?”
“……if we are going to mobilize them then we will have to guarantee our victory.”
“Of course. This war would be meaningless if we don’t win. That’s why it is essential that we send
reinforcements to Leo. With their help, we can do that from the sky.”
“That was what Franz was thinking too. But if we have the Divine Falcons carry the troops then it
would erase the advantages we have.”
“Yes, that’s why the 6th Corp will act as escorts. We will utilize other means to carry the troops.”
Hearing my explanation, the ministers seemed doubtful.
There are few air forces in the Empire.
Although we can overwhelm the United Kingdom in terms of the ground force, we lose to them in
terms of air forces. That is also the cause of our struggle in the North.
1994
We have no Griffon Knights like the Kingdom. In order to deal with the United Kingdom which has a
considerable number of Flying Dragons, we have to find a way to obstruct the Dragon Knights from
moving freely in the sky.
“Your Highness Arnold. It seems that you do not know this but the Empire has only a few air forces.
Even if Your Highness wishes to use more, they can not just spring out of the floor you know?”
“That is probably the case. But there is something that we can use that is not yet a fighting force. In the
North, Flying Dragons and Dragon Knights have been trained for quite some time now. I have been
told that only a few of them are likely to be able to be used in combat but they should be capable
enough as a luggage carrier. We will secure our air superiority with the 6th Corp and let them be the
one who transports our troops.”
Fighting in the sky requires a certain amount of mobility. A Flying Dragon that is too big will only
become a big target so it can not be used on a battlefield. The United Kingdom has a lot of know-how
regarding that but the Empire does not.
It is still in the trial stage so even if it is true that they can fly, they do not have enough mobility. We
can not count them as a fighting force but they should be enough for a transport mission.
“It is certainly true that we are training our own Dragon Knights in the North. That project was led by
Marquis Greisner. However, he should already be by His Highness Leonard’s side by now.”
“I was wondering what to do if he turned out to be an enemy but with this, we have our solution. To be
honest, I think that this is our only option you know?”
In response, Father started considering it.
The silence continued for a while and he called out to Franz.
“What do you think?”
“This strategy relies too much on the 6th Corp but I do not think that it is a bad plan. There are some
safety issues but I think that we do not have time to worry about that now.”
“…..I think so too. But what are you going to do after that? Arnold.”
Well, right.
After I deliver troops to Leo, how will I affect the war situation.
Delivering reinforcements to Leo only serves to prolong his life.
It is not a solution.
That’s why there is no choice but to spank the butt of those who still refused to move.
“I am going to unite the Northern Lords.”
1995
“They are no longer in any shape to do that. Are you planning to rebuild their alliance?”
“We can not call them an alliance of the Northern Lords when only some of them participated in it. We
need to unite all of the Northern Lords and have them work together. That’s why I will persuade them
myself.”
“…….the Northern Lords held animosity toward the Imperial Family.”
“Of course, they would hate us. We selfishly blamed them for the death of the Crown Prince after all. It
is certainly true that he might have survived if the Northern Lords responded to the situation faster
than they did. But that is only a possibility. Even so, we treated them as if they were the ones who
caused his death and treated them coldly until now. The reason why they still haven’t betrayed us yet
is that the chance of each side winning is still 50-50 and the fact that Gordon is also a member of the
Imperial Family. That’s all there is to it.”
“Your Highness is confident that you can persuade them even though you already know that?”
I thought a little about Franz’s words.
I can not say that I can definitely persuade them. After all, it will depend on them.
However, they will surely listen to what I have to say. If it’s Leo then they won’t even lend an ear. That
is a huge difference and if they are willing to hear us out then I stand a better chance.
“They are those whose loyalty has grown dull and I am the Dull Prince. Since we share such dullness,
we might get along well with each other. Being ridiculed and treated coldly, I can understand their
feelings.”
“……You are different from the Northern Nobles.”
“We are the same. I know that they have been enduring. They had to……Father, will you allow me to
handle this matter? The nobles who have been treated coldly by the Imperial Family and a prince who
has been ridiculed by everyone in the Empire, is it not an interesting matchup.”
Saying so, I bowed my head.
I want him to let me handle this for the sake of the Northern Lords as well.
“…….Fine. if you are willing to go so far then I will leave the 6th Corp to you.”
“Your Majesty!?”
“Please reconsider! The 6th Corp is the strongest air force in the Empire! If we lose them then it will
greatly boost the enemy’s morale!”
“We have no other choice. I have already decided that I will leave this in Arnold’s hands.”
“This is directly linked to the survival of the Empire, Your Majesty! At least please rely on Marshal
Lizelotte on the East Border!”
1996
“I will not allow any objection. It seems that you all do not think that Arnold is reliable but……we have
experienced a danger of the Empire’s survival once already. At that time, Arnold had reversed the
situation through his unpredictable move. In recognition of his achievement, I am entrusting this
matter to Arnold.”
“I am grateful for your decision.”
“But Arnold. If you fail, I will have to take tough measures. Do not forget that.”
“Yes. Father.”
I understand what he wants to say.
Either Father or the Brave will lead out the Imperial Knights in case I failed.
In any case, the battle in the North will intensify.
Both for the sake of the Northern Lords and their citizens, failure is unacceptable.
1997
SPT Chapter 310
It’s Coffee Appreciation Day!!! Let’s go!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Minister of Technology Cuber
“By my order, the 7th Prince, Arnold Lakes Adler shall lead the 6th Imperial Knight Corp to rescue the
8th Prince Leonard.”
“Your wish is my command.”
I received a sword from Father as I was kneeling before him.
I thought that I stood out too much during the rebellion but the result was alright in the end.
A person who is too incompetent will not be allowed to enter the battlefield. It is exactly because of
the way I stood out during the rebellion that I can receive the sword from Father like this.
Originally, I planned to leave this role to someone else but there is no other imperial family member
that can move beside me. It seems that the number of Imperial family members has grown thinner
and thinner.
The fact that Eric isn’t here means that he is either at the Sokol Empire or the East Border.
He is probably doing his best to put the Sokol empire in check right now.
This really is a problem. No matter how much Leo is given credit for fighting on the frontline, the more
chaotic the situation becomes the more credit Eric will gain as well. After all, he is stalling our
troublesome opponent like the Sokol empire through his own connections alone.
In that regard, all credit goes to Eric. By preventing the Sokol empire from making its move, that alone
makes Eric a meritorious individual in this civil war.
With his position as the Minister of Foreign Affairs, he will be rewarded just by doing well at his job.
This provides Eric’s absolute dominance.
Gordon and Zandra were rushing themselves to break the status quo but in the end, they couldn’t
touch him. The fact that they took forceful measures was because they knew full well that they can’t
compete with him straightforwardly.
From now on, we have to break this absolute advantage of his. The first step to that is to end this civil
war.
“Be careful. Arnold.”
1998
“Well, please look forward to the good news.”
Saying so, I stood up.
We can defeat Gordon and credit Leo with this. I have to wrap this up as soon as possible and unite the
Northern Lords.
There are many things to do but this is the same as usual.
Let’s hope for a good secret maneuver again this time.
When I was thinking so, Franz called out to me.
“Your Highness. The 6th Corp is currently testing prototype weapons near the Imperial Capital.”
“Prototype weapon?”
“It was developed by the Minister of Technology. Your Highness should understand what it is when
you arrive. Rather than calling them back here, it would be better for your Highness to head there and
see them directly, what do you think?”
It’s a suggestion from this peerless prime minister.
It would be stupid to say no.
I am getting curious about this prototype as well.
“Then I will see for myself.”
“I will prepare a fast horse for you. Apparently, the Minister of Technology was also looking forward
to Your Highness awakening as well.”
“The Minister of Technology? He’s waiting for me?”
“Yes. Apparently, he has created another prototype weapon that was designed for Your Highness.”
“He really is persistent huh.”
I sighed.
In a large forest near the Imperial Capital.
Unknown to anyone, an operational test of a new prototype weapon was being conducted here.
“A magic wand huh.”
“It is a wand that activates magic just by letting your magic power flow through it, sir. Apparently, the
prototype that can finally be used in real combat has been completed.”
1999
While walking through the woods, I nodded to Sebas.
A magic wand is a magic tool that allows you to use magic even if you are not a magician.
Until now, we can produce simple magic tools but not a magic wand that could effectively be used
against enemy soldiers in an actual battle.
In preparation for an invasion from a magical superpower like the Sokol empire, the Empire was one
of the first to put serious efforts into researching magic wands. The Empire is serious enough about
this that we established a position called the Minister of Technology and invited many brilliant
researchers to our country.
It seems that our effort finally bears fruit but it’s not like everything has gone well.
“How are you doing? Minister Cuber.”
“Hmm? OH! Prince Arnold! You have finally woken up from your hibernation!”
A thin middle-aged man wearing glasses and a dirty lab coat saw me and started spouting something
nonsensical.
He may not look anything like an Imperial Minister but he’s our respectable Minister of Technology.
That being said, he is in a special position where he is exempted from attending Father’s privy council.
A strange person who spends most of the year holding up inside his room to do his research.
That is Cuber, the Minister of Technology.
“I was not hibernating but well, I’m awake now. Is the 6th Corp testing the prototype weapons?”
“Yes, YES! Exactly! It is the type-61 magic wand! It can produce spells from the fire magic system just
by supplying it with magic power! It has enough power for interpersonal combat now Your Highness!”
“Seems so.”
Saying so, I dexterously avoid the big tree and stare at the members of the 6th Imperial Knight Corp
who just hit the prepared target with flame bullets.
They are all straddling on the falcons with black and white fur, the Divine Falcons.
They are currently manipulating the Divine Falcons which boast tremendous speed and make their
way through the forest at low altitudes. Even though that feat alone is already amazing, the flame
bullets they shot out hit exactly at the mark. Well, this is only a training exercise though.
They are all carrying a wand that looks like a spear at first glance. That’s probably the type-61 magic
wand huh.
Its length is a little shorter than a normal long spear but the weight probably can not be measured at
the same ratio. The Imperial Knights are all using it while fixing the wand to their belt. They probably
can not support it with their arms alone.
2000
“So it’s unavoidable to increase its size huh.”
“Yes, that is exactly right! I couldn’t downsize its internal structure any more than this……but the
Prime Minister gave me the suggestion that the 6th Imperial Knight Corp should be able to operate it!”
Their performance is guaranteed but it is still a large magic wand. So he foregoes the inclusion of
flying magic by letting the 6th Corp use it huh.
Aerial battles mostly consisted of close-range combat. If we can shoot the enemy from mid to long-
range then we can secure a tremendous advantage.
The enemy had no choice but to shoot an arrow in return but what we are shooting at them is
powerful magic. Moreover, its accuracy is not something to sneeze at.
I never thought that the already powerful 6th Corp can get even stronger. The fact that he
implemented his kind of thing is probably because he planned to use the 6th Corp in real combat in
the future.
However, it is certainly risky to make them use a weapon that is still under test operation on a real
mission. The fact that he did not immediately suggest that we use this weapon right away is showing
that the Prime Minister is being cautious as always.
“We are researching a way to reduce its size to a level where it can be handled by a human riding on a
horse at the moment but it is still very very difficult…..However! That’s exactly why it’s worth doing!”
“I am happy that you are so enthusiastic about this. So? It seems that you have developed a weapon
for me [Again] right?”
“Ah! That’s right! That’s it, Your Highness! This time I am confident about it!”
You said that every time though.
I smiled bitterly at Cuber who looks like a child presenting a toy he is proud of.
Cuber has been devising weapons for someone who possesses magic power but no magical talent like
me.
He has never been successful in his attempts so far. Mostly because the magic tool he prepared
couldn’t stand the magic power I pour into it.
“Prince Al! This is it! This is the type-62 Magic Wand! Although it can not be miniaturized any further,
it exceeds type-61 in all performances!”
“What are the drawbacks?”
“It consumes a large amount of magic power! However! If it’s Prince Al then that should not be a
problem!”
Saying so, Cuber leads me to the place he stored the type-62 to have me test firing it.
2001
The size and shape of type-62 that was placed on the ground are not that much different from those of
type-61. However, it has golden paint and looked like a luxurious version of the wands I saw earlier.
“You never learned even after I break it each and every time huh.”
“It will be alright this time Your Highness!”
“That’s what you always say.”
While muttering so, I pick up the type-62 with Cuber’s help.
It is quite heavy even when I fixed it to my belt.
His assistants support my body so I can maintain my posture but I will probably fall immediately if
they let go.
“It sure is heavy…….is it alright if I shoot now?”
“Yes, Your Highness! Please pour your magic power into it!!”
Cuber excitedly said so.
I poured magic power into it as I was told.
Then.
“Ahhhhh……”
“AHHHHHHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!??????”
No magic was fired from type-62 but instead, it broke in half.
As usual, Cuber rushed over with a sad crying voice.
He lifted the broken part up as if he was carrying his child and slowly muttered.
“…..rest in peace……..”
“I see. The usual huh.”
“Damn it! Why is it a failure each and every time!”
Cuber repeatedly punched the ground with regret.
The reason for this failure is simply its lack of endurance.
I am not good at controlling my magic power. No, I am not exactly bad at it either.
Suppose that the magic power required to activate modern magic and this magic wand is ten, I can
hardly adjust my magic power to that level.
2002
After all, the magic power I usually control is in the hundreds.
That being the case, most magic tools would end up like this.
Ancient magic requires magic power in the hundreds so I have no problem using it and since I am
good at controlling magic power at such an amount, it is one of the reasons I am good at ancient magic.
For example, if the question is whether you can use ancient magic if you have enough magic power
then the answer would be no.
“Recover already. It’s the same as usual right?”
“I am only being sad as usual!”
Saying so, Cuber started dejectedly drawing circles on the ground.
He really is a strange person. Well, his skill is real though.
“Minister Cuber. Can you make another one of this?”
“Just in case, I made two prototypes so I still have another one…..”
“Then I will let Leo try it out. I’m heading to the frontline you see.”
“WHOA!? In other words, Your Highness will be taking the 6th Corp right!? Together with the type-
61!”
“That seems to be the case.”
When I answered Cuber, an Imperial Knight gently landed beside me.
He is wearing the white mantle that only the imperial knights are permitted to wear. His mantle is
special because it has delicate details sewn into it, the kind that only an Imperial Knight Captain can
don.
“It’s been a long time. Captain Lambert. Sorry for the suddenness but I will have you accompany me to
the frontline this time.”
“The Prime Minister has already contacted us, Your Highness. We have been looking forward to your
arrival. The 6th Corp is ready to depart at any time.”
Saying so, the Captain of the 6th Imperial Knight Corp, Lambert von Meier smiled.
2003
SPT Chapter 311
I don’t know why but I am in the mood for Sabaton…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Disguised Departure
The 6th Corp Captain, Lambert is a tan man.
He is in his early thirties.
Born as the fourth son of a rural noble house, he has little to no chance of succeeding his house. With
that being the case, Lambert aimed to climb through the ranks of the Imperial Army. However, when
he was recognized for his aptitude with the Divine Falcons, he decided to follow the path of a Falcon
Knight.
Lambert who joined the 6th Corp gradually advanced his career by contributing to the Empire
through various liaison and reconnaissance missions.
However, what he has always requested was a chance for him to fight on the frontline
He believes that the 6th Corp is the strongest air force on the continent and in fact, that is not
overconfidence. However, people only tell the stories of the Griffon Knights and the Dragon Knights.
The Falcon Knights who never appeared on the battlefield were never recognized as the strongest.
That’s why this dispatch is like a wish comes true for him.
Of course, he might have other reasons to be on the battlefield though.
“Let us rout the Dragon Knights of the United Kingdom Your Highness.”
“You sure are reliable. Still, I have one thing to say before we head out.”
“What is it?”
“Our mission is to assist Leo. That is our primary mission. Keep that in mind.”
“Naturally. There is no need to remind me.”
“Is that really true? Don’t you want to take revenge for your friend?”
Lambert turned silent.
2004
Lambert had a close friend. He was the same age as him and a fellow Imperial Knight Captain, Captain
Oliver.
Lambert was on the North border during the rebellion in the Imperial Capital. He was there to
immediately relay the news of the Dominion’s expected invasion.
Lambert knows that such a mission is the job of the 6th Corp but he can’t help but wish he were in the
Imperial Capital at the time.
Oliver’s body was eventually discovered with a large number of swords stabbed inside. He literally
used his entire body to stall the rebels for us.
However, the direct cause of his death was a wound he received in his abdomen. A surprise attack
from behind him.
Raphael, the traitorous Imperial Knight Captain was the one who inflicted that wound on him. And
right now, Raphael is currently serving Gordon.
We might encounter him once we joined the northern front.
When such a time arrives, can Lambert stay composed?
“……is it wrong to desire revenge for my close friend………”
“I am not saying that it’s wrong. That feeling is natural. But Oliver was acting as an Imperial Knight
until the end. He did what he could for the sake of the Empire. If you abandon your mission and run off
to avenge him, you would betray Oliver’s feelings.”
“……I understand that but……..”
“If you understand then it’s fine. You are a Captain of the Imperial Knight Order. Once you have
fulfilled your mission, you can have your revenge. I have no complaint as long as the mission is
successful.”
“Your Highness…..”
“To be honest, if we meet him then I would like to punch him once myself. If you found Raphael then
do it for me. Well, we are prioritizing the mission though.”
It is useless to tell someone to control their feelings. Surely when the time comes, their body will move
on its own.
In that case, it would be better if the person himself recognized that feeling. Still, I do have something
that I can not compromise. This mission needs to be successful.
If he can do that then I won’t complain.
However.
2005
“Even so, you must never be defeated. Of all the Imperial Knight Captains, one has already died and
one has betrayed us. Many Captains are away from the Imperial Capital as well. If we lose any more
than this, it will be difficult to guarantee Father’s safety.”
“Understood. I shall engrave Your Highness’s words into my heart.”
Saying so, Lambert quietly bowed.
The Next Day.
I was going to depart yesterday but the Prime Minister told me to wait.
Since he was saying that he is gathering more elites for the force, I have nothing to do but pick
something that looks like it can be used from Minister Cuber’s stash and try them out.
And the unit that responded to the Prime Minister’s call was someone unexpected.
“We heard that Your Highness is going to depart to the frontline so we literally flew to your side you
know.”
“The Prime Minister is also unexpectedly overprotective huh. Not only the Imperial Knights, I never
thought that he would dispatch you guys as well.”
There was a unit of about 100 strong in front of me.
Their leader was a person I knew well.
It’s the Commander of the Narbe Ritter, Colonel Lars.
Apparently, the Prime Minister summoned 100 Narbe Ritters just for me.
The Narbe Ritter’s main mission is to defend the central part of the Empire. Since we do not know
when and which army division would rebel, they are highly trusted in this situation.
That’s why they were kept close to the Central Part of the Empire.
Even if it is just a hundred of them, for him to include Colonel Lars for me as well is quite gracious.
“Ever since that day, everyone wanted to fight under Your Highness’s command. We leave our lives in
your hands, Your Highness.”
“I did take commands of your guys during the rebellion though?”
“At that level, we can’t say that you took command of us at all. Everyone is looking forward to serving
you, Your Highness.”
“I’d like you to stop saying that if possible though.”
2006
With that said, I shrug and prepare a black hooded cloak.
Obviously, I am officially still in a coma.
I can’t be careless and let anyone know the truth.
“Alright, let’s head out. First, we will head west. The enemy has eyes in the Imperial Capital after all.
We will pretend to march to the west until nightfall.”
“So the plan is to use the cover of darkness to move to the north, correct?”
“That’s how it is. We have quite a few things that we have to bring along after all. Let’s pretend that
this is a transport mission.”
Saying so, I point to several nearby carriages. They are all packed with Cuber’s inventions.
There were many failed works but I picked out some that seem useful depending on the situation.
“Has the 6th Corp already gone ahead?”
“That’s right. It would be too noticeable if we act together after all. We will meet them in the North.
Sebas, I will leave watching our surroundings to you.”
“Certainly, sir.”
Saying so, Sebas disappeared without a sound.
We will sniff out the enemy’s suspicious moves and have Sebas follow up for us.
Well, even without Sebas, it would be hard to keep track of the Narbe Ritter’s movement.
The Narbe Ritter is a unit that has a high level of training, they can handle any missions be it a frontal
battle or a covert operation.
No one would dare to take the risk and pursue us. After all, keeping track of the movements inside the
Imperial Capital is also an important mission for the enemy. If they do not have enough resolve to lose
their unit then they will not dispatch anyone to follow the Narbe Ritter that is clearly heading to the
West.
“Even so, with the 6th Corp and the Narbe Ritter, it seems that failure is not tolerable this time huh.”
“Since you have no plan to fail, please stop pretending to be worried, Your Highness.”
“Oi Oi, I’m not that confident you know? I really do think that I might fail here.”
“Your expression begs to differ, Your Highness. I can clearly see that you are thinking about ways to
deceive our enemy.”
“Don’t say it like I am some kind of scammer.”
2007
“Personally, I think the word scammer would still be too kind though. So, how do you plan to move
this time, Your Highness? If it is alright, can you please share it with me?”
“It’s nothing much. Well, I will explain it along the way. I need you all’s strength to pull it off anyway.”
Saying so, I try to climb up on horseback.
However, I was stopped by a knight who rushed over in a panic.
“Your Highness! His Majesty wanted Your Highness to visit him before you depart!”
“Haa? I have already greeted him before I left right?”
“That is the case but…..”
The knight looked troubled.
There’s no point troubling him any more than this huh.
“Alright. I will go.”
I said so and headed to the castle.
Inside the Throne Room.
There was only me and Father.
And the reason for my summon is probably this big war banner.
The banner has a black and a white sword crossing over a red background.
It’s a war banner that I have never seen before.
“Are you saying that you want me to take this with me?”
“….it’s the same as Leonard’s war banner but the color scheme of the sword is the opposite of his.”
“Did you make it by mistake?”
“It was deliberate, you fool. I made it for you to use during ceremonies.”
“You’ve made something troublesome again…….so I have to bring it with me?”
“That’s right.”
“I won’t be leading any army and nobody would be able to tell the difference on the battlefield you
know?”
2008
“Use it however you want. Just bring it with you.”
Father doesn’t allow any objection.
Seeing him like that, I muttered.
“After all this time, you are getting worried?”
“I am worried. Since I have to send you to a battlefield after all this time, I thought that I should have
forced you to learn more about warfare in the past.”
“After all this time huh.”
“Indeed.”
The silence continues for a while.
Father is sitting on the throne like an Emperor but his face belongs to that of a father.
When the Prime Minister is not around, he shows his soft side from time to time.
It wasn’t until the Crown Prince passed away that I began this aspect of his.
Zandra has already died as well.
It could be said that his children are going to keep dying steadily like this.
However.
“——-I am a member of this Imperial Family. And you are the Emperor.”
“…..I know.”
“Then it couldn’t be helped right. I think that Father already knows but Oliver was apologizing to you,
you know. He must have felt responsible for what happened.”
“Yeah, I heard. Traugott and Christa told me.”
“That was what our Imperial Family has done. Everything is our responsibility. But instead, an
Imperial Knight felt that he was responsible for escalating the rebellion. It’s a funny story. It is the
soldiers, the knights, and the citizens who ended up dying but their grudges filled voices never
reached us. They were all saying that it was all Gordon’s fault.”
“Right……”
“But the people are watching us. The soldiers and the knights are also watching us. Surely, such
thoughts are still inside them. We should solve this incident as quickly as possible with all the power
that the Imperial family can muster with our own blood and lives on the line. You are the Emperor and
I am your son, it is only natural that I would be on the frontline.”
2009
“I might have bought that if it was the others. But you have abandoned such obligations so far and
continued to be ridiculed for that. It is too strange that you are citing such an obligation now. Even if
you start doing it now, the insults you received in the past will not disappear. Don’t you feel bitter?
Don’t you feel saddened by it? Don’t you think that such a thing is unreasonable?”
Those words were probably Father’s true feelings.
The Imperial Family is respected because of our bloodline and the obligation we carry.
Since I abandoned such obligations, I was ridiculed.
That’s why I understand why he finds it strange that I am now bound by those obligations.
However.
“Everything was my choice. I abandoned my responsibility and obligations so I was called the Dull
Prince. That is no one else’s fault. And this time, I chose to be on the frontline. I chose to do it because I
felt obliged to. But I am heading out to the battlefield for the sake of the Empire. I am doing this for the
sake of the people who are close to me and my family. I——-don’t want to see a future where my own
family and the people close to me have to apologize in their last moments.”
That’s the reason I choose to go.
With that said, I bowed to Father and turned back.
Seeing me leave, Father raised his voice.
“……good luck.”
“Please look forward to the good news, Your Majesty.”
Saying so, I left the throne room and departed from the Imperial Capital.
2010
SPT Chapter 312
Double Tap, you crazy………
Warning, incoming Coffee Appreciation Week.
-Mr.Graverobber
Ps. You thought that it would be Arnold’s story but it was me!! GORDON!!
Gordon’s Wife
Eastside of the Empire’s Northern Region.
Gordon has used a medium-sized city called Wismar as his base of operation.
The Lords who ruled this area tried to intercept Gordon’s forces that came here to build a base in the
east of the Northern Region after their failed rebellion attempt but they were chased away and now
Gordon is the new lord of this area.
Inside the largest building in Wismar is William, the Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom.
“Excuse me. How are you doing? Bianca-dono.”
“Oh, Prince William. I am doing well. This child as well.”
Saying so, the blonde woman called Bianca shifts her gaze to the bed.
There was a red-haired baby girl sleeping there embraced by her maid.
William shows a gentle smile at the sleeping baby.
“She looks so gentle just like you. I was wondering what the baby would turn out if you have a girl.”
“Fufufu, we still don’t know yet. A baby can change in a day after all.”
Bianca said with a smile.
Even though she was able to smile like that after she became a mother. It gave off the feeling that she
really has become one.
While admiring how a woman can change after childbirth, William tries to approach the sleeping baby
but the baby begins to squirm as though she hates it.
“Oops…..it seems that I am hated…….”
2011
“This child doesn’t like the sound of armor. She would cry even if that person were to carry her with
his armor on after all.”
“I see. She has good ears.”
Saying so, William slowly walks away and looks at Bianca.
Thinking that he has something to talk to her about, Bianca left her seat and left the room with
William.
They entered a room next to where they were.
There, William began to talk.
“About your request to move to the United Kingdom, it seems that we will receive the permission
soon.”
“Is that true? Thank you very much.”
“No, even I don’t know when this battle will be over after all. I can understand your feelings.”
“……that person is against it but……I can’t leave this child in a place like this.”
“Hmm….he probably said something along the line like it would affect morale if the general’s wife
were to run away right?”
“You understand him well.”
“We are friends after all.”
Bianca was relieved at his words.
Bianca’s husband, Gordon, has few people that he trusts. Since even after all this time, William is still
calling him a friend, she thought that no matter what happens, it will be okay.
“Please…….take care of my husband. Since his defeat in the capital, it seems that he has become
unstable again.”
“It was that much of a shock after all. Please rest assured. I and the United Kingdom have his back.”
“……I will definitely repay this debt.”
Bianca bowed.
However, the feelings in her heart are complicated.
Bianca married Gordon 5 years ago.
2012
She was originally a noble lady of the United Kingdom. One day, she met an unknown man who was
accompanying William when she was walking inside the castle of the United Kingdom.
Since he was with the Prince, she wondered if he was a high-ranking noble.
A few days after that accidental encounter, the man came to visit her at her house.
He then suddenly said to her father that he wanted to marry her.
Bianca’s father was furious at this unknown man and kicked him out. However, the man visited again
and again without being discouraged.
It was love at first sight. She is the only one who can be my wife.
The man preached his love for Bianca.
Her father gradually softened his attitude at the man’s foolish actions and finally gave his permission.
Receiving the permission, Bianca finally appeared in front of the man.
The last time they met, it was only a light greeting. Bianca was amazed that their first-ever
conversation was to be a proposal but once the man spotted Bianca, he finally introduced himself.
My name is Gordon Lakes Adler, the Third Prince of the Empire. I want you to be my wife.
Bianca’s smile burst out when she saw the face of her father who never thought that he would be the
Third Prince of the Empire.
She then joyfully gave him her reply.
If he used his title as a prince of the Empire then he would be able to meet Bianca right away but he
didn’t. After that, he honestly tells her that he is a prince of the Empire and lets her know that she will
have to come to the Empire after they are married. Bianca was attracted to his straightforwardness.
Bianca then went to the Empire and spent her time there as Gordon’s wife.
Even though the Empire has many princes and princesses, only the Crown Prince and the Second
Prince were married. Moreover, they still have no children.
High expectations were placed on Bianca but unfortunately, Bianca was not blessed with a child right
away.
But when her first child was born.
Bianca was at the height of her happiness when she discovered that she was pregnant. Her happiness
did not diminish even when Gordon was relegated to the North Border because of the Southern
incident.
2013
She went against everyone’s opposition and followed Gordon here. She had decided to be near Gordon
when she gave birth.
Then the child was finally born.
However, the situation was quite different from when the pregnancy was discovered.
Gordon was obsessed with the suppression of the North. He was not there for Bianca, and the
relationship between her and the Emperor who was looking forward to seeing his first grandchild has
turned hostile.
Why did this happen? Ever since he joined the succession war, Gordon has turned strange.
At the very least, the man who proposed to Bianca back then was not someone who would rebel
against his own country.
It was the United Kingdom that increased Gordon’s mental instability. His best friend is a prince of the
United Kingdom and his wife is a noble lady of the same country.
Gordon was deeply involved with the United Kingdom and the United Kingdom had decided to
support Gordon since early on. Even if it is Gordon, he would not start a rebellion if he has no chance
of winning.
However, the United Kingdom has offered him that chance.
That’s why Bianca’s inner feelings were complicated.
“You don’t have to feel indebted to me. It is me who should be indebted to you.”
“Prince William is? What on earth are you talking about?”
“Truthfully speaking, even if it was my father’s order, I did not wish for the United Kingdom to move.
After all, the chance for Gordon’s plan to succeed is very low. Still, it was your letter that persuaded
me.”
“I sent you that letter because my husband told me to.”
“But it still persuaded me. The current situation is truly terrible and I have nothing but regret………but
thanks to that letter, I am here. If I hadn’t moved, the weight of how I abandoned my friend would
linger with me forever. Compared to that, I much prefer this situation.”
“…..that is why you listened to my request?”
Only a few people know that Bianca has safely given birth.
Gordon wanted to publicize the birth of his child in an exaggerated manner but Bianca was against it
and William listened to Bianca’s request and persuaded Gordon for her.
2014
A boy would be one thing but if it’s a girl then it won’t affect the morale that much. Moreover, if he
learns that his granddaughter was born, judging from the Emperor’s personality, he will do everything
in his power to take her away.
This should be hidden until the situation improves.
In the meantime, William was in frequent contact with his home country and sent them the request to
relocate Bianca and her child to the United Kingdom.
It was yesterday that he managed to persuade his reluctant father and started arranging for it.
William came all the way back from the front line to deliver this news.
“I only listened to your request because it was reasonable. Don’t worry about it.”
Saying so, William bowed and left.
William is in charge of the siege of the castle where the Eighth Prince Leonard currently barricaded
himself in.
The place is surrounded on all sides and the sky is being monitored by the Dragon Knights. It was a
rock-solid lineup but William is still anxious.
He was done in by Leonard in the Imperial Capital.
That’s why he wanted to be on the highest alert against him. However, that wasn’t the cause of his
anxiety.
He is aware that the Seventh Prince Arnold has been in a coma in the Imperial Capital all this time.
William didn’t take that information for granted.
He worried that it might be misinformation and he might suddenly show up on the battlefield.
“I won’t let you do as you pleased this time. You will never meet up with each other, Black Twin
Princes.”
The union of the two princes.
William judged that to be the biggest cause of their defeat in the Imperial Capital.
Individually the two are already dangerous but if they join forces, the degree of danger will rise
exponentially.
He won’t let them do so this time.
Renewing his determination, William soars to the sky on the back of his dragon.
2015
SPT Chapter 313
Special Thanks to Accel for Moar Coffee!!
I’m resetting the Goal. Why? It’s the Coffee Appreciation Week People!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The City of Thale
After we pretended to head west, we took advantage of the darkness and headed north.
We arrived at a medium-sized city called Thale located on the southern side of the north. It’s a city
that is close to the Imperial Capital.
The ruler of this city is Marquis Greisner.
Using the fact that his territory held many mountainous areas that are suitable for raising Flying
Dragons, he is a senior noble who has been working on training Flying Dragons and Dragon Knights
for over 10 years.
Although he struggled at first due to the lack of know-how, he now possesses a unit that has enough
strength to call themselves Dragon Knights.
He is an unusual person among the Northern Lords as he held strong loyalty toward the Imperial
Family and he is also the person who gathers the Northern Nobles to his side.
After the rout of the Northern Lords’ army, his army joined Leo’s main army and he is currently
supporting him in the siege battle.
That’s why it was his eldest son who is currently taking care of the territory.
“I can not provide Your Highness with an appropriate welcome. Please accept my deepest
apology………”
“It’s fine. Rather, if you throw us a big welcome party we would be troubled instead.”
At the Lord’s mansion.
There, his eldest son, Berner von Greisne looked visibly confused.
Berner is a young man in his early twenties.
An ordinary young man with brown hair. It’s normal that he is confused.
“Uh….Your Highness…..?”
2016
“What is it?”
“No……I’d like to ask Your Highness a question…….Are Your Highness and the troops accompanying
you the only reinforcements…..?”
“That’s right?”
Berner showed a blatantly shocked expression.
He is an honest guy. It would be fine if he wasn’t the eldest son of a noble house but he can’t control
his feelings from showing like this then he will have a hard time in the future.
Well, I guess that is something his father should instill in him.
It’s not something that I should point out myself.
“Are you dissatisfied?”
“No….but, His Highness Leonard and Father are currently under siege so I thought that we should
send more reinforcements to them right away……”
“I understand that. That’s why I came here.”
Thale also functions as a supply base which is Leo’s lifeline. However, Berner could not deliver the
supply to the castle.
Since Leo’s position is completely surrounded, there is no way for Berner to get close enough to
deliver the supply to him.
“The reinforcements from the central are the Imperial Knights of the 6th Corp and a few of the Narbe
Ritter. We did not dispatch any large army. There are a lot of circumstances surrounding this you see.”
“I understand that well. I am aware that we have only a few trustworthy armies in the Imperial army
but……..the enemy commander is the United Kingdom’s Dragon Prince. I think that the chance for a
small group of reinforcements to break through their encirclement is highly unlikely…….”
‘Should we not ask His Majesty to dispatch more reinforcements?’
Berner was very careful with his words but I can clearly see that he thinks that it is impossible with
the forces we have.
Well, normally it would be impossible.
There are tens of thousands of men under Leo’s command but they are still surrounded. Our numbers
can’t even be counted as a fighting force.
For a straightforward approach, we should dispatch a large army to break the siege and let Leo’s
group escape.
2017
However, the Dragon Prince will not allow us to do such a thing.
The Northern Nobles are well familiar with how terrifying William is. After all, William’s presence was
the reason why Gordon could conquer one-third of the North so quickly.
However, no one is truly omnipotent.
“Then what will you do if we have a larger army?”
“……I will apologize if I fail.”
“Saying that you won’t know unless you try is certainly irresponsible. What would you do if you fail? I
can understand that kind of concern. But….sometimes there is no choice but to do it. Are you going to
lay down and wait for your father’s death? My dispatch was the Emperor’s direct order. In other
words, the Emperor will not move unless I fail. We have no choice but to do it. If we want to save our
family that is.”
“HOWEVER! THIS IS JUST IMPOSSIBLE!”
“That’s right. The enemies are proud of their perfect lineup. Their ground forces completely
surrounded the castle and the sky is being monitored by their proud Dragon Knights. Moreover, they
have Prince William as their commander. No matter what kind of enemy arrives, there is no need to
worry. Most of the enemies are probably thinking like that. And that’s our chance.”
There is none of the Imperial Family who can move at the moment. Even if the Emperor or the Brave
personally joins the battle, they can always detect their arrival in advance by observing the movement
of their large army. On the contrary, a small force can not hope to break through their defense.
That is the enemy’s thinking and the cause that will lead to their carelessness.
The fact that they managed to successfully corner Leo also boosted their confidence.
“Their morale is being boosted by their confidence, Your Highness……..breaking through them using
only a small number is……..”
“It’s possible. I will break through them when they are most confident. Anyway, I will take control of
all Thale’s available forces. Berner, you just make sure that my existence does not leak to the outside.”
“…….Understood. However, there are not many available forces left in Thale…….”
“You still have a stereotypical view. Everything can be used depending on how you utilize them.”
Saying so, I got up from the sofa I was sitting on and left the place.
The next day.
Lambert, the captain of the 6th Corp arrived in Thale.
2018
The 6th Corp who had entered the North earlier had set up a camp away from the city to avoid the
enemy’s eyes.
His arrival in Thale is for our strategy meeting.
“Now, I already explained the details to Colonel Lars on my way here but I will ask you to hear it
again.”
“Yes, sir!”
The only ones in the room are Lars, Lambert, and Me.
Berner is preparing the supply that we are going to deliver to Leo. I am worried but I get the feeling
that he is telling himself that he has to do it. Well, if he is willing to move then it is not a bad thing.
“The enemy’s encirclement is almost perfect. The castle is besieged from all sides and the sky is being
watched by the Dragon Knights. Even if we were to act together with Leo’s forces in the castle, on top
of being routed, he will be cut off from his troops due to the enemy encirclement. It wouldn’t be
impossible if only Leo himself escape but that way, the main army will take a major hit.”
“If that is the case then we can not hope for a counterattack.”
“That’s right. If he runs away the Northern Noble will leave Leo. Knowing that, Leo chose to take on
the siege without withdrawing. That’s why we can not break that stance. We can not completely break
through the enemy’s encirclement without a large army but if it is only a part of it then it is possible.
As long as we can deliver the supply to him then Leo should be able to hold on for a while. That way,
the Dragon Prince will not be able to take his eyes away from Leo.”
“I understand what Your Highness means but the challenge here is how will we deliver the supply to
the castle.”
“It’s not really a challenge. In fact, it is quite easy. We will carry the supply to him from the sky. For
that, I want the 6th Corp to be the escort.”
Lambert frowned when he heard my plan.
I understand what Your Highness wanted to say but that is too dangerous. That’s what he probably
wanted to say.
Well, of course.
The enemy will not expect us to attack from the sky so a surprise attack is possible.
However.
“The Flying Dragons that remain in Thale are large and suitable for carrying the supply but they are
too sluggish, Your Highness. If we have them carry the supply then that will be extra weight. I think
that they will be shot down before we can land in the castle.”
2019
“You can not keep them safe?”
“We have to transport tens of thousands of soldiers worth of supply. Large Flying Dragons certainly
possess enough power to carry a fair amount of luggage but this operation will not be concluded in a
short amount of time. Until then, it will fall to us to maintain air superiority by ourselves. Don’t you
think that it is impossible?”
“Well, that’s right. But what if the enemy’s air force is not that large?”
“…….Your Highness has a method to thin their number?”
My question was returned with another question.
In response, I grinned and nodded.
“What the enemy army is doing is a siege battle. Their plan is certainly effective but it also has its
drawbacks. Namely, they also need supplies to maintain the siege.
“I see. So we are going to cut off their supply, correct?”
“We are not doing something as grand as completely cut off their supply. But they will surely panic if
their supplies got attacked right? Try thinking about it from the enemy’s perspective. I will leave that
role to Colonel Lars and the Narbe Ritter.”
“Please leave it to me. If it is only to make the enemy panic then it is only an easy task.”
The enemy is not even expecting an attack
So what will they think when their supplies in the back get cut off.
They will send their fastest unit to control the situation.
In other words, the Dragons Knights will be lured away.
William might realize that it is a diversion but even that will not affect the plan. If the Dragon Knights
do not move, we can just thoroughly destroy all their supplies.
Leo would continue to be in a tight spot but so is the enemy.
It is the supplies that feed tens of thousands of troops. They won’t be able to replenish it right away.
The Dominion is located between the United Kingdom and the Northern part of the Empire. It is
where the enemy has to come through to send the supplies.
However, the Dominion is unstable and the quality of their nobles is also poor. Moreover, I have
already taken measures to further send them into chaos.
It should be quite difficult for them already to deliver a large amount of supply.
2020
“However, Your Highness, destroying the enemy’s supplies is certainly a good idea but……do you
know where it is?”
“How should I know that?”
“………”
Lambert’s expression frozen.
He probably didn’t expect me to reply that I don’t know.
Seeing him like that, Lars started smiling.
“Your personality is bad as always, Your Highness.”
“I just answered him honestly though. Well, I didn’t tell him everything yet.”
“Your Highness has a plan, correct?”
“It’s not something great like a plan. It’s a place that can hold supplies for tens of thousands of troops
we are talking about. It should be considerably big. In other words, the locations they can use is
limited. Moreover, the enemy has no city of their own near the castle where Leo is. They have no
choice but to build a temporary base. In a place as well-hidden as possible, that is.”
Such a location can be predicted by looking at the enemy army’s placement.
When I told him that, Lambert’s eyes opened in surprise.
2021
SPT Chapter 314
Eh? New Character?
-Mr.Graverobber
Useless Flying Dragon
The strategy has been decided.
The rest is to wait for the opportunity to act.
I have already tasked Sebas to look into the placement of the enemy’s supply.
The detailed strategy will be decided depending on the information we can gather and the enemy’s
movement.
In the meantime, the city of Thale has gotten busy.
After all, we have to deliver a large amount of supply ourselves.
“So we have about 300 large Flying Dragons huh.”
To make small turns, Flying Dragons should not be larger than necessary.
However, as we gathered up the available forces in Thale, we found that there were many Flying
Dragons that were not suitable to be used by Dragon Knights. The number is 300. Each one of them
should have the power to carry about 5 carriages.
A simple calculation would result in 1,500 carriages worth of supply.
Of course, this doesn’t mean that we can just hang the carriage from the dragons.
To let the Large Flying Dragons easily carry the carriages, we need to attach a loading platform to
them.
The ones riding on the Large Flying Dragons are the Dragon Knight Candidates. Most of our Dragon
Knights who are ready to fight are already on the frontline so we have no choice but to use the Dragon
Knights that are still in training.
However, these candidates have undergone rigorous training. Even if we are having them fly while
carrying heavy loads, they should be able to fly the dragons in a stable manner.
That’s why there should be almost no problem in regard to our transportation corps.
Rather, I am a little worried about the 6th Corp who will be their escort.
2022
There is no problem regarding their ability but we only have a few of them.
Although they all are carrying the type-61 that boast an advantage in aerial battles, it will take time
before they can secure air superiority.
In the meantime, the Dragon Knights who got lured away might come back.
If we can not maintain air superiority then we can not keep up the transportation.
We should be able to deliver Leo a certain amount of troops but it will depend on them whether we
will be able to deliver enough or not.
“I don’t know how skilled the Dragon Knights are at Leo’s side after all……”
I muttered as I looked up at the sky.
In the sky, the Dragon Knights were doing something that seemed to be a mock battle. It’s hard to
describe their movements as smart even as flattery. Is it because they are still in the middle of their
training? Maybe these Dragon Knight Apprentices are not even ready for the operation.
As I was observing them for a while, I noticed something.
The mock battle was a one-to-five.
Five apprentices are challenging a Dragon Knight.
However, it seems that the five Dragon Knight Apprentices can not even touch their single opponent.
The reason is clear. He’s fast.
Obviously, his flying speed is faster but his turning speed is much faster than his opponents. When the
five thought that they managed to take his back, he immediately circled around them instead.
In a real battle, the five apprentices would have been wiped out already.
The Lone Dragon Knight who should be their instructor is straddling on an unusual white Flying
Dragon. However, that white Flying Dragon was small. It is one size smaller than a normal Flying
Dragon.
The Dragon Knight straddling it is also petite.
However, taking advantage of their small size, they are capable of flying freely in the sky.
Even while dealing with 5 opponents at the same time, I get the feeling that is not his real ability.
“I thought all veteran Dragon Knights are already on the battlefield……..”
2023
There shouldn’t be many Dragon Knights who can manipulate their dragons as skillfully as that even
in the United Kingdom. Besides, the mobility of this small Flying Dragon might even be comparable to
or better than that of a regular Divine Falcon.
Berner said that Thale has almost no fighting forces left. In other words, that Dragon Knight is not
seen as a fighting force.
There’s probably some kind of circumstance huh.
With that in mind, I started walking to the descending Dragon Knights who were just done with their
mock battle.
I arrived at the Dragon Stable.
There, the petite young boy who I thought to be a Dragon Knight was feeding the white Flying Dragon.
He should be around 16 or maybe 17.
He’s petite and baby-faced so I can’t tell his exact age. He has well-organized facial features and I can
easily mistake him for a girl. However, perhaps because due to his training as a Dragon Knight, his
body is firm despite him being thin.
I am taller than him but I probably won’t be able to win against him in terms of physical strength.
He casually lifts up the feed that seems to be quite heavy and feeds it to the white Flying Dragon.
“Good work again today, Nova.”
“Kyuu-!”
When the Dragon Knight strokes his head, the white Flying Dragon happily squints its eyes and rubs
its head at him as if it wants more.
“You two are quite close huh.”
When I suddenly called out, the Dragon Knight boy looked back.
After looking at me, the boy was puzzled for a moment and smiled.
“Who are you, sir?”
“That doesn’t matter right. I was only a little curious after I saw your mock battle earlier.”
“Ah, I see. They are newcomers after all.”
“So you can go 5 to 1 against newcomers huh. The Dragon Knights of Thale really are amazing aren’t
they.”
2024
‘There’s no way that is the case though’ I added with a whisper.
No matter how green those newcomers were, normally, you wouldn’t be able to fight them 5 to 1 so
casually. The fact that he managed to do that shows how capable this young boy and the white dragon
are.
Other Dragon Knights won’t be able to do that.
The boy probably understands that, he smiles while shrugging his shoulders.
“I want to hear your name. White Dragon Knight-dono.”
“I am not someone who is worth offering my name to others.”
“Please, just this once.”
“……You really are a strange person. My name is Finn. Finn Brost.”
He seems so gentle but he refers to himself as [Ore] huh.
That’s surprising. I thought that he would use [Boku] or [Watashi]. Well, if he uses any of those then
he might be mistaken for a woman so he probably doesn’t like the idea I guess.
While I was thinking so, Finn, the Dragon Knight shifts his gaze to the White Flying Dragon.
“This child is Nova. He is my partner.”
“Kyuu-!”
Nova happily cried. Maybe it is saying confirming that they are truly buddies.
Seeing that, I felt a slight sense of discomfort.
This has been on my mind for a while now but after thinking about it a little, I understand it.
There is something strange about them.
“……I heard that Flying Dragons hate those with high magical power though?”
Whether it be Griffons or Divine Falcons, they all hate those with too much magical power.
There is no problem if such a person approaches a Griffon or a Divine Falcon but if it’s a Flying Dragon
then it would start to threaten a person with high magical power.
Therefore, the Imperial Family is often disliked by the Flying Dragons. Trained Flying Dragons rarely
attack people but we are still told not to approach them unnecessarily.
2025
Among the Imperial Family members, I possessed the most magical power by far. The fact that Leo
managed to ride that Griffon back then was because it was raised by Leticia who has high magical
power.
If that is not the case, he wouldn’t be able to ride even a tolerant Griffon.
Even so.
Nova is letting out a happy cry without minding me.
Moreover.
As far as I can see, Finn also possesses quite a magic power himself.
“This child is special. He even let me ride him after all.”
“…..so that’s why you are here huh.”
“…..yes. I can only ride Nova. Even though Nova is fast, he is not doing well in close combat. With only
a clash of spears, we would get blown away. That’s why I and Nova can not join the battle……”
Finne bitterly says so.
Meanwhile, Nova rubbed its forehead against Finn many times to comfort him.
Aerial battles are usually fought with long spears. If you get blown away at every exchange then you
certainly can not fight.
So a Flying Dragon that can not fight and a Dragon Knight who can only ride that dragon huh.
What a waste.
No, I should say that it was a waste.
“Tell me…….If you can fight. Are you willing to?”
“Of course! I’ve been trying to become a Dragon Knight for ten years! I’ve raised Nova since he was a
hatchling and came this far! Everyone always says that fighting is not everything! BUT! All of my
childhood friends who grew up together with me already joined the battlefield with the other Dragon
Knights! Only I was left behind! My skill is second to none! Even if it’s Nova, when it comes to speed
then he won’t lose to anyone! If only we can fight, we would be able to help a lot of people! But…….we
can’t.”
“…….”
I’ve always dreamed…….I want to fight as Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knight……but even when my
hometown is in crisis, and all my friends already headed off to battle……I am still here…….”
What he is feeling is helplessness.
2026
A feeling of despair at the realization that his efforts will never bear fruit.
And the feelings he held toward his childhood friends.
I have felt the same feeling.
So I speak to Finn.
“…..you will do anything as long as you can fight right?”
“Eh….”
“Answer me, Dragon Knight Finn. Are you willing to do anything as long as you can fight? Are you
willing to throw away everything if it means that you can save your friends?”
“…..who are…….?”
Unable to understand my question, Finn was confused.
To that Finn, I say to him again.
“——I am the Seventh Prince of the Empire, Arnold Lakes Adler. I ask you, Dragon Knight Finn. If you
can fight……are you willing to abandon your dream?”
2027
SPT Chapter 315
Monthly Patrons Shoutout!!!!!!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
AlfonzoM6
Main Heroine Tier
Jerry Gergich
Xan
Sub Heroine Tier
Artaril
Stefania Barbieri
Anon A Moose
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Tinsoldaat
Knifewolf
kei
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Nelson N
Shanks
Thank you as always for the support!! You really funded my addiction!!
-Mr.Graverobber
2028
The Condition
“——I am the Seventh Prince of the Empire, Arnold Lakes Adler. I ask you, Dragon Knight Finn. If you
can fight……are you willing to abandon your dream?”
Hearing my name, Finn’s expression turned blank.
When I smiled at his confusion, Finn immediately knelt down.
“!? F, forgive my rudeness, I didn’t know that it was Your Highness! Please accept my deepest
apology!!”
“You have no need to be so polite to the Dull Prince. If you have time to kneel then answer my
question. Do you have enough resolve to give up your dream?”
“That means……to stop trying to become Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knight…….?”
“That’s right.”
I can give him the means to fight.
However, if I do that Finn’s dream will not come true.
I originally planned to have Leo use the type-62 developed by Cuber but from what I saw, Finn is more
suitable for it.
A skilled Dragon Knight who can move at high-speed would perfectly fit the medium to long-range
shooting weapons.
There is no problem regarding his magic power either.
As the development of weapons progresses, the standard of the battlefield will change.
The common sense that aerial combat has to be conducted through close combat will be overturned
and Flying Dragons will be required to be smaller and more mobile in the future.
Until now, there have not been Dragon Knights who possess high magic power nor have anyone put in
efforts to train such a person since Flying Dragons hated humans with high magic power. However,
from now on, it will be the norm to train Flying Dragons to get used to such humans and create that
kind of Dragon Knight.
The Empire’s magic wand will turn the traditional Dragon Knights obsolete.
No, I should say that it will be due to the Empire’s magic wand, Finn, and Nova together.
Finn and Nova who were perceived as an inferior pair until today will become the model for the future
Dragon Knights with the addition of the type-62 wand. Considering that it will take time to train new
Flying Dragons and Dragon Knights, Finn should be able to dominate the sky for the next decade.
2029
However, there is a problem there.
He will become the Dragon Knight who wields the latest prototype weapon of the Empire. Moreover, if
he uses it, we can expect overwhelming success from him.
We can not allow such a Dragon Knight to only serve a Marquis. Not only due to his strength, but he
will also become a prominent figure in the future.
So if Finn chooses to fight, he can not be just a Dragon Knight who serves Marquis Greisner.
“You have worked hard for your dream. But that dream is too small for someone like you. If you want
to fight then I will have you become my knight. That is the condition I have for giving you the power to
fight.”
“……”
“It will be some time before I head out but it doesn’t mean that I can wait for your answer forever.
Make up your mind by the end of today.”
Saying so, I turned back.
However, Finn stopped me.
“Please wait!”
“…..have you decided on your answer?”
“…..I have. My dream was to become a Dragon Knight in service of Marquis Greisner but……if I choose
to stay here I will regret it for the rest of my life. If Your Highness can give me the power to save my
friends then……please give it to me.”
After he said that, Finn lowered his head.
Even though it was a big decision for him, he managed to immediately make up his mind.
Still, that was not without any hesitation. Well, that is fine.
After all, I can’t trust someone who can immediately throw away their dream.
Finn simply chose to prioritize the lives of his friends here.
I have to reward his resolve.
“Well said. Then from now on, you are my knight. And be prepared. The power I will give to you is
powerful and for the better or worse, it will make you stand out. You will earn the trust of your allies
and the enemies will be fixated on defeating you. You can not only resolve yourself to enter the
battlefield. You will have to shoulder the pride of the Empire’s military might on your back. If that
scared you then you can still turn back. That way you will be able to enjoy a much more peaceful life
you know?”
2030
“……what can I accomplish by living a peaceful life? It is quite costly to take care of a Flying Dragon,
Your Highness. Eventually, Nova will be deemed useless and abandoned. I am much more afraid of
that. If I can not show my value then I will lose my partner. If I don’t choose to fight here…..I will lose
my friends, my partner, I will lose everything. There is nothing that can scare me more than that.”
Saying so, Finn lifted his face.
There is a strong will in his eyes.
His eyes are telling me that he has considered all the risks and decided to move forward. Those are
not the eyes of someone desperate or reckless.
I can feel his confidence and determination.
Those are good eyes.
“Follow me. I will have you try it out right away.”
With that said, I took Finn to the Lord’s mansion.
————————–
“This is a Type-62 magic wand. It is the state-of-the-art magic weapon developed by the Empire that I
was intending to give to my younger brother Leo. There is only one so use it carefully.”
“A magic wand that can be used in actual combat…..so it has been completed…….”
Finn touches the type-62 as if he was inspired by it.
Then he lifted it up.
“It is heavy…….a normal person would find it difficult to move freely while carrying this.”
“But that won’t be a problem for a Dragon Knight right.”
“…..that is a splendid idea. This will completely change future aerial battles.”
“The one who thought up the idea was the Prime Minister. Besides, it is not the idea that will change
the face of aerial battle. It will be you and Nova.”
Wouldn’t a Dragon Knight be strong if he/she can fire magic from the sky?
Such an idea would cross even a child’s mind. After all, mages that can fly are strong. However, there
are not many mages who can fly freely in the sky.
There are some in the Imperial Knight Order that can do it but those people are special.
It is not realistic to send them to the frontline in every battle.
2031
That’s why the magic wands were developed and first given to the 6th Corp. if the results were good, it
would eventually have been given to the Dragon Knights of Thale.
However, at the earliest, that would still be a few years away. After all, there are many points to
improve the type-61s.
For Finn to receive a magic wand at this stage is frankly unusual.
It wouldn’t be strange if someone gets angry at me for this.
“…….You have my gratitude, Your Highness.”
“You don’t have to thank me. We can’t win a war with gratitude alone after all.”
When I said that to Finn, I heard a loud voice from the hallway.
It was Berner, the acting lord, and Lambert, the 6th Corp Captain.
The two just received my messages.
Berner was told that I am recruiting Finn, a Dragon Knight serving Greisner house and Lambert was
told that I am planning to give the type-62 to Finn since I think that he might become an interesting
Dragon Knight.
Obviously, since I can’t send him out to an actual battle, I am going to have him fight the knights of the
6th Corp in a mock battle.
“It seems that there is some kind of commotion there…….”
“The acting lord probably got angry. I just selfishly took away one of his Dragon Knights after all.”
The moment I said that.
The door was opened.
It was Berner who looked clearly unsatisfied.
“Your Highness! What are you planning to do by taking away one of my house’s Dragon Knights!?
Please explain yourself!”
“I meant what I said. I am recruiting Finn. I have no intention to return him to you. When this civil war
is over, I will officially make him a Dragon Knight directly serving the Imperial Family.”
“How selfish!? In what country does its royal family rob a knight from their vassal!?”
“It is better than letting him rot away here. You people can not use Finn. At best, you would only be
able to use him as a reconnaissance or a messenger right? I hate being wasteful.”
“That is not a reason! Your Highness is being too selfish here!”
2032
“You can think of me as selfish or whatever. I told you from the beginning, right? I am taking care of all
of Thale’s forces. If you have any complaints then submit it after the war is over.”
I brush off Berner’s complaint and shift my gaze to Lambert.
Lambert’s expression doesn’t look like he is dissatisfied with the development. However, he seems to
be evaluating Finn.
“You need to test his power first right? Captain Lambert.”
“Of course. If Your Highness wants him to participate in the operation he must have enough power to
convince my subordinates. If he has the ability then we will accept him. We can’t afford to bring
someone out to play after all.”
“All right. We will have a mock battle. Pick out a few of your men.”
“…..it won’t be one against one?”
“Do you think they can win in a one on one fight?”
It will bring shame to the Imperial Knights if they lose. Even in a mock battle.
Moreover, some might not accept him even if he beat one knight.
What is important here is to convince them. Then the only choice left here is to have him fight a truly
strong opponent.
Perhaps he guessed my intention, Lambert nodded with a bitter smile.
“Please settle with my vice-captain.”
“That’s what he said. Your opponent will be a vice-captain of the Imperial Knight Order. He would be a
worthy opponent right.”
Finn’s face cramped up when he was suddenly arranged to have a mock battle with a ridiculous
opponent.
However, his eyes didn’t look scared.
This is going to be interesting.
2033
SPT Chapter 316
I don’t even have time to play eroge these days……damn strawberry…….
-Mr.Graverobber
Aerial Battle
At a training ground a little away from Thale. Two knights were fighting in the sky.
Aerial battles usually involved many flying-bys.
After all, you need to get close to attack your opponent.
However, that is not the case in this battle.
This is because the two knights can attack each other from a great distance.
“So how strong is your vice-captain?”
“He is only second to me in terms of the falcon handling. He has also achieved excellent results in the
training with the type-61.”
“In other words, if Finn can win then there is no doubt that he is strong right?”
“No, if he manages to fight on par with my vice-captain then that will be enough for us to recognize his
strength.”
Lambert looks at the sky with a serious expression.
The on-going aerial battle seems to be in a stalemate. Right now, they are trying to take each other’s
back and use their wand to shoot magic at their opponent.
The rule for this battle is whoever lands the first blow win.
To adjust the wand’s firepower, we have removed the jewels from their wands so the wands are
currently set in training mode.
Even if you get hit, it will only hurt.
The type-61s were set to fire a fireball but the type-62 was set to fire a lightning strike. The type-62
has the edge on power and speed but right now it can’t exhibit its full potential.
In other words, this match will be decided through Finn and Nova’s ability.
“I guess this won’t be settled right away huh?”
2034
“I wonder about that. Vice-captain seems to have his hands full just to keep up with him though.”
“His hands are full just to keep up? They are not fighting on par with each other?”
“It is probably because Finn doesn’t try to forcefully attack and make any unnecessary openings, Your
Highness.”
“……he is surprisingly cautious huh.”
“It is important to be cautious. Still, it takes courage to fight in the sky.”
The moment Lambert said that.
Finn moved.
He stopped circling around his opponent and rapidly gaining altitude, it was like he was performing a
somersault.
He forcefully performed a vertical movement while flying sideways.
The vice-captain begins to turn to avoid Finn getting behind him but he can not perform a tight turn
when traveling at high-speed.
After all, a large flying beast has to deal with air resistance.
There was a decisive difference between the vice-captain’s Divine Falcon and Nova.
In terms of making small turns, Nova is better.
“I thought that there was no Flying Dragon that could beat a Divine Falcon but……it seems that the
world is a wide yet narrow place.”
“There is one right here in the Empire after all huh.”
Finn who managed to take the vice-captain’s back immediately proceeded to close the distance.
The magic wand can attack from a distance but he is fighting against a fast-moving opponent.
The shorter the distance, the higher his hit rate becomes.
Perhaps he had predicted such a move from Finn, the vice-captain forcibly held the magic wand with
one hand and fired a fireball behind him.
Normally, the magic wand would be fixed to the knights’ belt so it shows how skilled he is to be able to
handle it with one hand.
Moreover, his aim is accurate.
2035
I thought that Finn would be defeated due to their difference in experience but Finn immediately
performed a barrel roll and evaded the fireball.
“He performed a barrel roll at that speed……!”
“Is it that amazing?”
“Does Your Highness want to try? You will be thrown off mid-air you know.”
“Don’t try doing it when I ride with you okay.”
Finn who avoided the fireball gently strokes the vice-captain.
Then the two slowly descended.
“How was he? Vice-captain.”
“I have nothing to say. It is as you see, Captain. It was my complete defeat.”
The vice-captain answers Lambert’s question with a bitter smile.
Even so, his expression afterward seems so refreshing despite his defeat.
After all, this is only a mock battle. Since they will become allies, he probably thinks of him as reliable.
In the first place, the Imperial Knight Order is a meritocracy.
They have no qualm against recognizing the strength of others. Even when their opponent is a Dragon
Knight.
“Well done. Dragon Knight Finn.”
“Yes, sir! It was all thanks to the type-62 that Your Highness has given me!”
“You don’t have to be modest. There was not much difference in the weapons’ performance this time.
Besides, the strength of your weapon is also your strength on the battlefield.”
“It is exactly as His Highness says. That was splendid, Finn. How about it? Don’t you want to join the
Imperial Knight Order?”
“Eh? Ah, Uhh…….”
Lambert honestly praises Finn’s ability and begins to invite him to join the Imperial Knight Order.
Becoming an Imperial Knight is not a bad thing.
But.
“The 6th Corp is the Divine Falcon unit. There will probably be opposition to let a Dragon Knight join.”
2036
“Can’t Your Highness put in a word for us?”
“No way. The Ministers will give me an earful. Rather than that, he should be able to join other Corp
much more smoothly.”
“Finn will be isolated if he joins other Corp, Your Highness. Please allow him to join us at the 6th
Corp!”
“That’s what he said. He seems pretty enthusiastic you know?”
“Uh, I……I will follow Your Highness’s will.”
While being mindful of Lambert, Finn bowed his head.
When he said it like that Lambert couldn’t say anything more.
Although he seems to be still unsatisfied, he gave up the solicitation.
However, it was not only Lambert who was dissatisfied.
“Finn! You are a Dragon Knight of Marquis Greisner! It must have been your dream to fight together
with everyone right!”
Berner, the acting lord, approached Finn and began to persuade him.
It is certainly disrespectful of him but it was me who was being much more disrespectful first by
selfishly taking away one of my vassal’s knights so I can’t say anything to him in that regard.
“Berner-sama. That was certainly my dream. I still remember the gratitude I have toward the Greisner
house. But I want to fight. I want to be there for everyone. Please understand.”
“If you wish for it then even His Highness can not force you! You are strong! You just proved that! Your
current position is different from what it has been until now!”
As long as we recognize Finn’s strength, it is almost certain that we will include him in the operation.
Right now, it is no longer possible to take away the type-62 from Finn.
Berner is telling him to take advantage of his current position and voice his opinion.
He sure is desperate. Well, obviously.
A Dragon Knight is precious. It takes ten years to raise one. It was already a problem when I tried to
recruit him but now Finn has shown a new power.
From now on, he will receive much attention from both enemies and allies.
To lose such a person to a prince while the Lord was away would be seen as Berner’s failure.
2037
Depending on the perspective, one could say that he left because he was dissatisfied with Berner.
In fact, Berner had judged that Finn should not be included in the fighting force. The same is true for
the Large Flying Dragons. He didn’t think about how to make use of them. Everything leads me to
evaluate him as mediocre.
“Berner, just give up already.”
“Please stay silent, Your Highness! Just what is the Imperial Family thinking while trying to rob one of
its vassal’s knights in the first place!?”
“If you mean the recruitment then I am doing it even now though.”
“That was due to our mutual agreement. Taking away a noble’s knight without consulting him first is
an abuse of authority!”
“That might be the case. So why don’t you make an appeal? You can claim Dragon Knight Finn who
was given the Empire’s state-of-the-art prototype weapon by me as your own knight. Everyone would
think that Marquis Greisner is trying to get the prototype weapon for his own.”
“–!! I don’t mind doing that! Finn is a Dragon Knight serving under my house! My sister who is also a
Dragon Knight considered Finn to be good enough to become the instructor of our future Dragon
Knight Apprentices! Please do not think that you can just have your way with us!”
His little sister is a Dragon Knight?
So Marquis Greisner’s daughter is also a Dragon Knight huh.
Since Marquis Greisner is currently with Leo, she should be there as well.
When I thought so far, I noticed that Finn was looking a little down.
He didn’t lose against the vice-captain so why is he making that kind of face?
Is he that scared of that Dragon Knight Lady?
Or perhaps—.
“Well, we will talk about this later. I will accept any complaints you have but the first thing we need to
do is making this operation a success.”
“…….please don’t just put it off for later.”
“Then I promise. I guarantee you that I will find time to discuss more details with you about this. The
results are already clear to me though.”
Saying so, I muttered to Finn in a small voice so that only he could hear it.
“So you want to join the frontline for the sake of the young lady huh?”
2038
“Wha!? Th, th, that’s not it! I am doing this for everyone’s sake!”
“Well, let’s go with that.”
While grinning at Finn’s panicked expression, I left the place.
2039
SPT Chapter 317
Special Thanks to Double Tap again for funding the glorious weeks.
Now, let’s get back to strategy meeting.
-Mr.Graverobber
Strategy Planning
“Alright, I am going to explain our strategy.”
Saying so, I started the strategy meeting for Lambert and his air force.
Sebas, who was sent out to scout out the enemy’s movement has returned after he grasped the rough
understanding of their personnel placements.
To show that, he put pieces to indicate their locations on a large map that was spread on top of the
table.
“For the time being, we are reviewing the locations of our enemies and allies. Leo is currently at Castle
Dick. Well, that castle is actually a strong fortress. It was originally built when the Empire’s border
was still around this area and has been renovated many times in the past.”
“So their defense is perfect?”
“Yes. right now the enemy troops are trying to besiege Castle Dick but they can’t directly attack it
because they can not get past its branch castle.”
Castle Dick is a robust military base.
Even so, if the castle is exposed to intense attacks every day then even this strong fortress will
eventually wear out.
However, in order to launch a full-scale attack on the castle, the enemy must take down its branch
castle first.
After all, if they can not take the branch castle which acts as Leo’s forward base, it is possible for Leo’s
group to break through the siege.
“The branch castle of Castle Dick is located on a hill. Leo has placed 3,000 elites in this castle to block
the way of the enemy’s army. They are probably using the advantage of their high ground to hold the
enemy at bay. The enemy seems to have challenged it many times already but they were repelled each
and every time so they decided to change their strategy.”
As long as the hill is ours, the enemy can not benefit from that vantage point.
2040
Even if they want to take down the branch castle first, the hill where it is located is easy to defend and
difficult to attack.
Such an elevated position made it difficult for the enemy to take advantage of their large number and
forced them to send only small units.
If they took too much damage before taking on the main castle, they will not be able to topple Castle
Dick.
That’s why the enemy has switched their strategy to encirclement.
“As long as the branch castle is still standing, Castle Dick is safe. But in the meantime, the enemy will
use that time to strengthen their army. Before that happens, we must deliver supplies to Leo. They
can’t move without enough supply after all.”
At the same time, I want to destroy the enemy’s supplies as much as possible.
After all, the enemy can not move without supply as well.
That is our current situation.
And here is the main subject.
I turned my eyes to the map.
The enemy has surrounded Castle Dick and placed an army at the branch castle to restrain the branch
castle from making any move.
Behind that army is the enemy’s reserve force with a mountainous area spread out behind them.
There is no doubt that the enemy’s base is somewhere inside those mountains.
The problem is its exact location.
“The enemy has a base somewhere in these mountains. Moreover, it is hard to locate its exact
location.”
“If we know that they are somewhere in these mountains then isn’t it better if we scout out their
location from the sky?”
“The fact that it is hard to find means that their ground movements are also restricted. The reason
why they built a base in such a location is that they have Dragon Knights under their command. The
surveillance in the sky will be much stricter than on the ground.”
“I see……..then we have no choice but to steadily search for them right?”
I shook my head at Lambert.
We have no time to do that.
2041
If we don’t move quickly then the enemy might realize that we are trying to do something.
We can’t waste time here.
“Taking our time to search for them will only increase the risk of being discovered. This time we will
work with a prediction.”
“And in case the prediction is wrong?”
“It is exactly fine because we can be wrong.”
Saying so, I put a number of small pieces on the map.
It was the confirmed placements of the enemy’s small units.
They are probably liaison units or transport units that travel to and from their supply base.
I put the pieces down on the map and simulate their routes in my head.
Assuming that there is Base-A inside these mountains, if there are some strange or unreasonable
movements of these units then it is unlikely that Base-A is on that mountain.
When doing so, one mountain stood out.
The confirmed movements of the enemy units here are linked without any waste in their movements.
I point at a mountain located in the middle of the spreading mountainous area.
“The enemy’s supply base is here.”
“Excuse my rudeness but what is your basis, Your Highness?”
“That was what the movements of their smaller units pointed out. Given that their supply base is
hidden in a difficult to find location, it is unlikely that their transport units will use a camouflaged or
decoy route. They are not at disadvantage enough to be so careful. After all, if they do that, it will
significantly delay their supply transportation. That’s why judging from the movements of the enemy
around this area, I concluded that the base is somewhere on this mountain.”
“……I heard that Your Highness had a very poor performance in military tactics class though?”
“Well, I mostly skipped or slept through the lesson. Besides, I don’t need any military tactic to do this.
All I did was just predicting the enemy’s movements. I don’t need to rely on a theory to do that.”
Military tactics are the accumulation of the knowledge from past wars.
You will be able to apply that knowledge if you studied them but you can manage without them as
well.
Well, I ended up learning a lot of it from Gramp when he taught me ancient magic though.
2042
There is no need to bother explaining that anyway.
“I will leave the surprise attack on their supply base to the Narbe Ritter. I will accompany you halfway
there. After that, we will withdraw and make our way to persuade the Northern Nobles.”
“What should we do in case the plan fails, Your Highness?”
“You should think in terms of [Even if the plan fails] instead. If the supply base isn’t there and the
Dragon Knights are not distracted, the Narbe Ritter will continue to sabotage the enemy from behind.
That way the enemy’s eyes should be more or less attracted. Just use that time to carry the supplies to
Leo as much as you can.”
“That will be easier said than done, Your Highness……”
“I think that you all are capable enough to pull it off after all. Well, that’s my plan. The problem now is
you guys.”
Even if the Dragon Knights were successfully lured away, there would still be a lot of Dragon Knights
around Castle Dick.
Even if the quality of our air force is higher, they have greater numbers.
It is necessary to come up with a plan to compensate for that.
“Our mounts, weapons, and skills are all superior to the enemy. We have enough factors to gain
dominance over them but I want to win this without suffering any loss if possible.”
“Isn’t that hoping for too much, Your Highness?”
“There is nothing wrong with hoping for more. Now, let’s think in our enemy’s shoes. Are all the
Dragon Knights always on the lookout in the sky during the siege? The answer would be No. only a
few of them would be on alert while the majority of them are on the ground.”
The Flying Dragons can not fly forever nor do the Dragon Knights can keep up their focus.
They are probably taking turns watching the sky in a shift.
That’s why.
“Finn. You are going to charge ahead first and attack the Dragon Knights who are on standby on the
ground. If possible, I want you to incapacitate their Flying Dragons. It would be enough if you damage
them enough so that they can not be deployed.”
“I, I’m going alone……..?”
“That’s right. You are going to assault tens of thousands of troops alone. Using the element of surprise,
you will attack them from the sky and withdraw toward Castle Dick. Of course, the enemy will chase
you. This time, the 6th Corp will intercept your pursuers with concentrated fire.”
2043
Finn has two roles.
Neutralization of the enemy Flying Dragons and acting as a decoy.
If they want to pursue Finn who escapes to the sky above Castle Dick, the enemy will have no choice
but to use their air force.
Using that chance the 6th Corp will descend and shoot them down.
If all goes well, we should be able to get rid of a considerable number of their Dragon Knights.
“If the enemy spots the Divine Falcons, they will realize that it is the 6th Imperial Knight Corp.
Moreover, we need the firepower of the type-62 to pull this off.”
The type-62 wand has multiple firing modes.
There is a mode that shoots one thunder magic and a diffused mode that shoots multiple lightning at
the same time.
It consumes a lot of magic power but it can be used to defeat multiple enemies at once. This firing
mode is exclusive to the type-62.
It is the perfect fit for this operation.
“What do you say? If you hate the idea then we can go with another strategy. I have never heard of a
lone rider taking on an entire enemy army either. There is no shame in refusing you know?”
“……does Your Highness think that I can do it?”
“I think that you are more than capable enough to pull it off though?”
Hearing my words, Finn kept silent for a while.
He then slowly opened his mouth.
“…..I will do it. Please let me do it.”
“If you fail, it will affect the operation as a whole. Do you have the confidence?’
“……I don’t know if I have enough confidence but there is one thing I am sure of.”
“Hou? And that is?”
“Nova is faster than any Dragon Knights in the sky. I think that it is possible to escape after I assaulted
their position.”
Hearing that, I give him a nod.
If he is not scared then there is no problem.
2044
“Then it is decided. We will go with this strategy. I will leave it to you all.”
In response to my words, everyone who was there gave me an affirmative reply.
2045
SPT Chapter 318
So, I started playing some AI Dungeon lately, you know, with all the translating here I am doing good
narrating story for the the AI…….Somehow all my characters ended up in a *** dungeon though.
I wonder why……
-Mr.Graverobber
First Love
Our strategy has been decided.
However, it doesn’t mean that we can commence the strategy immediately.
After all, the Narbe Ritter must get behind the enemy line without them noticing first.
After carefully planning our route, Lars concluded that it will take us two days before we can arrive at
their rear while avoiding enemy detection.
That’s why I and the Narbe Ritter will head out first.
“I wish you good luck, Your Highness.”
“Good luck to you too, Captain Lambert.”
“We will be fine. At worst, we can always withdraw. However, Your Highness will be acting with the
Narbe Ritter, no?”
“Halfway there that is. The surprise attack itself will be done by the Narbe Ritter. After we can confirm
the location of their supply base, I will be waiting on standby at a distance away.”
“Even so, it doesn’t change that Your Highness will be advancing to the enemy position. Is that not too
dangerous?”
As long as I can only have a small number of troops accompanying me, his worry isn’t so strange.
Originally, my protective details were left to Lambert and his subordinates.
Since I have absolute confidence in my personal safety, I came up with a strategy that gets me close to
danger. I was being inconsiderate to the people around me.
“It is certainly dangerous but it would take too long if I wait for the Narbe Ritter’s return here. Besides,
If I want to persuade the Northern Nobles, I will have to meet the nobles who are at the frontline.
Putting myself in danger is already inevitable. Don’t worry. The Narbe Ritter is a versatile unit. If it
just to let me escape then they will manage just fine.”
2046
“You are being optimistic…….please be careful, Your Highness. If something happens to you, you will
not be able to get back at the people who ridiculed you after all.”
“I don’t really feel like getting back at them though. I don’t really hate being called the Dull Prince
either. Rather, I don’t want people to treat me differently, can’t say that I am a fan of seeing that
happening at all.”
It’s fine to make a fool out of me. I can just make a fool out of them in return.
But I don’t want people to suddenly treat me differently just because I raised some achievements.
Their fake smiles only serve to irritate me. If you want to make fun of me then just keep it up.
They might recognize me for my recent achievements but I want them to say that such achievements
can not override what I have been doing until now. Such a person is more trustworthy and way more
pleasant to see.
“Even if Your Highness doesn’t like it, this war will still change the way people look at you. No, I think
that they have already begun to see you differently. Both enemies and allies have begun to understand
how skilled you are with the rebellion at the Imperial Capital. Working with Your Highness directly
like this made me think that such an evaluation is still too naive of them though.”
“That’s troublesome. Even though I want to stay as I am now, it seems that they will not let me huh.
The troublesome thing about this is that if I act like a prince and tackle our national crisis, my wish
will never come true.”
“You really are a strange person, Your Highness. I think people often call someone like Your Highness
a genius though.”
“A genius huh. Won’t Leo fit that description better than me?”
“I have thought so at first. However, I am sure that His Highness Leonard is a hard worker. Your
Highness is a genius at inspiring others. I was always wondering to myself. Ever since His Highness
Leonard was a child, he was always compared to you. If a normal kid were to be told that he is much
more excellent than his incompetent brother, that kid might become overconfident. But His Highness
Leonard did not turn out like that at all. He worked even harder instead. Now I understand him. Since
His Highness was closer to you than anyone, he truly understands how amazing you are.”
“That’s an exaggeration. Leo is just a serious person, that’s all.”
“If Your Highness says that then it must be so.”
When I said that to him with a sigh, Lambert replied with a bitter smile.
He then bowed and took his leave.
Instead, Finn came up to me.
“Your Highness, please be careful.”
2047
“Don’t worry. As long as you perform your duty well, you have no need to worry about me.”
“Please rest assured.”
Saying so, Finn looks straight at me.
There is no hesitation in his eyes.
“It seems like I can rest easy huh. Alright, let’s have a small chat for a change. What kind of person is
the daughter of Marquis Greisner? She rides a dragon even though she’s a noble lady right. A normal
young lady wouldn’t do that, no?”
“W, what is Your Highness asking so suddenly……!”
“Come on, just answer. What kind of person is she?”
“……..Ojou-sama is a straightforward person, Your Highness. She does what she thinks is right and she
is strong enough to do it. Moreover, she is an extremely gentle person.”
Finn smiles.
That’s a soft smile. So he is that proud of his young lady huh.
“So, when did you start to like her?”
“……If the question is whether I like or dislike her then I think I like her. But, I still don’t know if that is
the love for the opposite sex or not. I was an orphan. It was Ojou-sama who saved me when I was all
alone. She showed me the path of a Dragon Knight and tread it with me. I owe her a great debt of
gratitude. My desire is to repay that debt to her.”
“…..I see. Well, I guess that is a normal feeling people have toward their childhood friend huh.
Eventually, the feeling of like or dislike will just disappear on its own.”
“You are quite familiar with this, Your Highness. I heard that Your Highness’s childhood friend is the
young lady of the Brave house. What has become of that?”
Finn asks about Elna as a counterattack.
However, such a counterattack can not faze me.
“Like or dislike huh, if I have to pick one then I have to say that I like her. She was my first love after
all.”
“…..yes?”
Finn looked like he just heard something strange.
The Prince’s first love is the prodigy young lady of the Brave house. That’s probably a big deal but
right now it doesn’t matter anymore.
2048
“I also have a heavy debt of gratitude toward my childhood friend. I want to repay her someday as
well. And from now on, I want to walk on the same path as her. Whether in the end we are together or
not——we will never change. Even the Holy Sword can not cut this magic tie that is our bond even if
we wanted to. Even Silver himself can not undo this tie. That’s how important a childhood friend
is…….so go help her. Right now, you already have the power to do it after all.”
The feeling of helplessness.
The feeling of despair that no matter how much I put in my effort, it won’t bear fruit.
Those feelings will never go to waste.
Every time you think back upon it, you will remember the gratitude you have toward your childhood
friend that was there for you.
When you felt weak when you felt that there is nothing you can do.
The person who was there for you becomes important. A childhood friend who will always stay by
your side is not something that anyone can get.
That’s why such a person is important. That’s why such a person is worth struggling to the death for.
“Your Highness……”
“Finn, this is your first battle. I am sure that there will be many thoughts that can make you hesitate on
the battlefield. When the time comes, just listen to your heart. You already took a step forward
because you have someone you want to protect. If you ignore your heart you will have to live with
regrets. Even if things become worse because you listened to your heart………you now have the power
to overcome it.”
You can not accomplish anything if you are weak.
You can accomplish one thing if you are mediocre.
And if you are strong, you can accomplish everything.
That’s the privilege of the strong. Protect your childhood friend and make the strategy successful.
Finn has the power to do that.
“…..I will carve Your Highness’s words into my heart.”
“Just show me with the result. Let me witness your strength. The sky of this Empire belongs to you.”
“Yes…..I will do my best to meet Your Highness’s expectations. I will definitely bring you the good
news.”
Saying so, Finn’s eyes become even stronger.
2049
The feeling I get from his eyes is the determination to protect.
When I first met him, what I saw was a wish to protect.
Eventually, that wish changed into determination. It has become a firm belief.
The little worry he still has before has disappeared.
If that is the case then I have no need to worry anymore.
I parted from Finn and started walking. Waiting for me are the Narbe Ritter who all don a black
hooded cloak.
I also covered myself with the hood and straddled on the horse they prepared for me.
“Let’s go. Be bold but not careless. We must get behind the enemy line without them noticing.”
“Yes, sir!”
And thus the Narbe Ritter and I left the city of Thale.
2050
SPT Chapter 319
Special Thanks to Double Tap again…..this might become a habit……
BTW, This Chapter is from William’s POV
-Mr.Graverobber
Hateful Strategy
“Prince William. General Bartel and General Fidessa are seeking an audience with you, sir.”
William let out another sigh at the soldier’s report.
However, he can’t keep sighing forever.
He told the soldier to let them in and erased his troubled expression.
“Excuse us, Prince William.”
Said the two men entering his tent.
The generals who served under Gordon are now under William’s command.
Both of them are middle-aged. Bartel is a bearded man and Fidessa is a quiet man with a mean gaze.
Both of them were the youngest child of a noble house and climbed through the ranks of the Imperial
army becoming generals through their own abilities.
Perhaps due to the confidence they carry through their long career, the two’s attitude was anything
but reverent.
“Please give us the order for a full-scale assault, Prince William.”
Bartel frankly said that to him with Fidessa looking like that is an obvious course of action.
So William calmly responds.
“We will not change our strategy. We are starving them out.”
“The enemy’s supply is already running low! Right now is the time to attack!”
“Exactly. The enemy’s morale is already declining.”
“A siege is a test of patience. If you rush to attack them you will only suffer from their counterattack.
Have you already forgotten your lesson?”
2051
Originally, it was Bartel and Fidessa who pursued Leo’s army when they were withdrawing to the
castle after their defensive line was broken.
The two immediately started to besiege the castle but they can’t even take down the branch castle.
That’s why William came here with the reinforcements.
Gordon wanted to lead the reinforcements here himself but William persuaded him otherwise and
came here instead.
Gordon is the cornerstone of the rebel army. If he is killed, everything will be for nothing.
He proposed that Gordon should convince the generals that are supporting the Emperor to come over
to his side. In other words, William left the task of suppressing the army to Gordon. He then personally
came out to face Leo himself.
However, no matter how cooperative the generals here are, he is a prince of another country. Both
generals were not happy to serve under him. As a result, they opposed William’s plan to switch from a
full-scale siege battle to simply encirclement after their failed initial battle.
“The situation now is different.”
“It is the same. The other side is waiting for an opportunity to fight back. If we handle this poorly, we
will only be losing more soldiers instead.”
“It is the commander’s job to win the war not to spare the soldiers’ lives! “
“We are here to win the war, generals. The complete control of this army was entrusted to me. If you
are dissatisfied with that then you can bring it up to Prince Gordon.”
“His Highness is too busy for this!”
“Then you have no choice but to obey me do you.”
Saying so, William ordered the two generals to leave the tent.
While glaring at him, the two left.
After confirming that no one is around, William let out a big sigh.
William wasn’t so optimistic to think that he can smoothly lead another country’s army. However, he
is now keenly aware that it was much more difficult than he first thought.
“Normally, I would just shut them up with the result though…..”
If you move poorly, you will get a counterattack.
Eliminating the enemy after cornering them to the point that they can no longer muster up any
opposition. This policy alone is something that William is not willing to change.
2052
William was unprecedentedly cautious in this battle.
The cause of this is the power Leo showed him at the Imperial Capital. And the existence in the
Imperial Capital that still hasn’t moved.
The situation has changed. It is clear that Leo needs reinforcements.
However, there is still no movement from the Imperial Capital.
“It definitely is not because they can not move……”
William gazes at an empty space.
He is looking at the past, the final phase of the rebellion at the Imperial Capital.
There is no mistake that they have the table turned against them when Leo appeared.
However, someone has bought enough time for his arrival. Someone who read that Leo was coming
and earned time for him.
It was Leo’s elder brother, Al.
“Are you really still sleeping? Can really I believe that he still hasn’t woken up?”
It is certainly possible for him to sleep for a long time after being subjected to poison or some kind of
magic.
However, William could not take such a thing for granted.
He can’t help but think that Al is out there waiting for a chance to strike.
William has struggled to secure one-third of the North for Gordon.
After he was shown the power of Silver, William has encouraged and scolded Gordon who lost his
spirit. He then secured a supply route through the Dominion and quickly occupied the eastern side of
the North which is easy to reach from the Dominion and set up a base there.
He managed to get them this far. If they can join the Kingdom in a united front, they should be able to
occupy the North in its entirety.
If that happens, the armies of the Dominion and the United Kingdom can march into the North, and
from there they can march south to the Imperial Capital or assist the Kingdom’s invasion in the west.
Their options will only expand.
However, the enemy is not stupid either.
Eventually, the Empire will also form an alliance with the Sokol empire. If that happens, the Eastern
Border Defense Force will march North.
2053
Compared to the army that was sent to face the Kingdom’s army, Leo’s army is on a smaller scale.
After all, everything will be fine as long as he can buy time.
And that still hasn’t changed.
Being besieged without any prospect of reinforcements is a bad idea but if you know that the
strongest army of the Empire will come as long as you hold out, such a thing is not bad at all.
“It would be nice if the Emperor ran out of patience and personally came out though…….”
If the Emperor came out the United Kingdom would send in its military in earnest.
Right now they are only in a cooperative relationship but if the Emperor comes out it will become a
full-scale war.
After all, if they can defeat the Emperor, they can win this war.
The candidates for the Empire’s throne will resist but such resistance will be insignificant.
Therefore, the Emperor chose not to appear. Originally, this was a situation for the Brave to appear
but Wiliam bet on the side that the Brave will not come out.
During the rebellion at the Imperial Capital, the Brave was on standby with his army.
However, he did not make it in time. It might be due to the army that they sent to stall him but the
Brave’s movement was simply too slow.
Why is that?
It was because there’s discord among his army.
The Brave house has three branch houses. One of them went against the Brave and delayed him.
Because of that, the Brave’s movement was slowed down in a situation where timing is essential.
Due to the information he received, William determined that the Brave will not appear.
“The alliance with the Sokol empire still hasn’t yet been finalized and neither the Emperor nor the
Brave will come out.”
He had enough information to conclude that there will be no enemy reinforcements.
However, is it okay for him to judge the situation like that only from the information available to him?
The enemy may have laid a trap for him somewhere.
“You Villain…….”
William mutters at the figure of Al he can’t grasp.
2054
It is exactly because he can’t grasp his figure that he is worrying like this.
How good would it be if he can just come out?
When William thought so.
A report suddenly came in.
“Urgent report! Smokes have been spotted at our rear supply base! It appears to be an enemy’s
assault, sir!!”
“What!?”
The supply base was set up personally by William.
It is clear that the enemy will target their supply. That’s why he hid it in a place that the enemy
shouldn’t be able to discover. Still, they found it.
William was terrified.
There has been no movement from Leo’s side. Moreover, even if it is Leo, he can’t command an outside
army when his castle is being surrounded.
In other words, this is not Leo’s work.
“Damn it!”
He can see the figure of Al grinning at him.
He knows that there is a possibility that it might be a trap but if he left things as it is, their supply will
be destroyed.
If they lose their supply base and their supply route is cut off, William’s army will be isolated.
Given that he is in an unstable position where he has to lead the army of a different country, losing the
supply might lead to a mutiny.
When he thought that far, Bartel rushed into his tent.
“Prince William! Our supply is being targeted!”
“I heard the report. I am thinking right now.”
“We have no time to be so carefree like that! Please lead the Dragon Knights there immediately!”
“…….is that a request?”
“Of course!”
William nodded when he managed to drag out what he wanted the general to say.
2055
Even if this is a trap, the blame will not lie with William.
“Then I will entrust the command of this place to General Bartel. Please try to be flexible.”
“Yes, sir! Please leave this place to me!”
“Just to be safe, I will leave some of the Dragon Knights here with you. They will concentrate on
monitoring the sky. They are my direct subordinates. You may not give them any order, is that clear?”
“……..Understood.”
After he made sure of that, William left the tent.
With this, they can not attack the castle with the Dragon Knights. After all, that would go against his
order.
If he ends up using only the ground troops to attack then there is nothing he can do. Weeding them
out is necessary. If they suffer from the enemy counterattack then those generals should shut up a
little bit.
The problem here is whether the attack on their supply base is a diversion or not.
Such a hateful strategy. Even if you realize that it is a trap, you have no choice but to deal with it.
It is a strategy that only a person who thoroughly knows how to rile up others can come up with.
“……so you finally came out. Arnold.”
William muttered as if he was convinced.
While worrying that he might already be dancing on the palm of Al’s hand.
2056
SPT Chapter 320
Back to Al’s POV
-Mr.Graverobber
Rising Smoke
“Excellent as always, Your Highness.”
“You don’t have to flatter me. With that much information, anyone would be able to predict their
location with a little headache.”
Lars and I were having such a conversation while looking at the mountain which is our original
destination.
It has already been confirmed that the enemy transport unit has come out from that mountain.
That is probably where their supply base is.
Gordon’s military supplies are collected from the United Kingdom and the Dominion.
The supply collected by the United Kingdom came through the Dominion and was transported to the
Empire through a hole in the northern border.
And the supplies that maintain William’s army which is engaging in a siege battle at the frontline are
stored here.
However, this doesn’t mean that they have an unlimited supply.
It costs a lot to transport the supply in from another country and the hole in our border defense is too
small for mass transportation. If the enemy utilizes a large convoy, the Northern border patrol will be
able to stop them.
That’s why they have no choice but to transport them over little by little.
Of course, they are not entirely living on this supply. Still, they would be in a tight spot if they lost it.
That’s where we will attack them.
“After we ambush the base, set fire to their supplies and immediately withdraw.”
“Should we not make sure that their supplies are thoroughly destroyed first?”
“Giving them the chance to put out the fire will delay their response. Our goal here is not to destroy all
their supply after all.”
2057
An army that has run out of supply is no different from a group of bandits. They will start plundering
the surrounding villages for supply instead.
As long as we can not get rid of the enemy army in one go, I want to avoid destroying their supply
completely.
Our purpose here is only to earn time.
“However, our enemy has the fast-moving Dragon Knights. Once they see the smoke, they will
immediately rush over. If they judge that the damage here is small, they might turn back.”
“That’s the reason for our immediate withdrawal. We will make them think that the situation here is
much more serious.”
Saying so, I grinned.
The general commanding the enemy army is William. Leading an army of another country should give
him a hard time.
He must be especially concerned about the supply in this situation.
I can see that from the fact that he hid his supply base here.
If that is the case then there is one way that we can definitely gain his attention.
“Do you have a plan, Your Highness?”
“We will target the enemy incoming supply convoy. Well, we will at least make it seem like that.”
If their supplies get damaged, their incoming supplies will be very crucial to them.
If it seems like it is being targeted, the enemy would dispatch troops to protect it while searching for
us even if they judged that the attack is only a diversion.
“I see. So how do we make it look like we are targeting their supply convoy?”
“We will raise some smoke.”
“You mean to do it flashily? Will they fall for that?”
“They have no other choice. If they leave us alone then we can actually proceed to destroy their
convoy after all.”
If they won’t fall for it then let them.
At that point, the defense of the sky above Castle Dick will be thin. We should be able to smoothly
secure air superiority and transport the supplies to Leo by then.
2058
If William turns back the Dragon Knights, we will not be able to deliver much supply to the castle but
in return, we will be able to significantly reduce their supply.
I don’t really want to do it. If they don’t have enough supply, it is highly likely that they will target the
civilians. But we can not win if we don’t do that and I also have faith in William.
If he doesn’t have enough supply I trust that William will be reasonable enough to withdraw. He is a
commander who can make that judgment.
That’s why I will not hold back if he chooses not to fall for the diversion.
“Well, Colonel Lars. I will leave the rest to you.”
“Yes, sir.”
“I am going to fall back. I am mapping out their transport route for you so you can just raise some
smokes at these locations. That should frighten them.”
“Understood.”
I told him to immediately fall back once they are done and put some marks on the map.
William’s face should cramp up when he saw smoke rising from the direction of the supply convoy.
By the time he sees that, the Narbe Ritter would have already left. Still, he can not leave it unattended.
Since he can’t afford to let the supply get destroyed, he will dispatch search parties and a unit to
protect the convoy.
Their personnel should be dedicated to putting out the fire and most of the Dragon Knights should be
lured away.
What William can do is to leave this place to a reliable commander and turn back to the castle with a
small number of his subordinates.
That being said, he won’t be able to turn the table with only a few more Dragon Knights.
“I feel bad that for your lack of reliable subordinates and how you can’t just fight as a Dragon Knight
but…..I am going to wreak some havoc here, Prince William.”
Saying so, I raised my right hand up and swung it down silently.
With that as a signal, the Narbe Ritter silently moved out.
The operation was successful.
2059
The Dragon Knights standing by around the castle rushed over immediately after they spotted smoke
rising from the supply base.
When they saw smoke rising away from the base, they divided into smaller units and behaved as I
expected them to do.
“They are falling for it.”
“Seems so.”
I squint my eyes at the Dragon Knights who are hurriedly flying toward the smoke from a distance.
Their behavior was as I expected but their responses are faster than I thought.
What a swift judgment.
As expected of William I guess. He realized that it was a diversion but he understood that he can’t
leave the situation alone so he immediately entrusted the scene to a reliable subordinate and turned
back.
He probably expects that something is going on on that side huh.
Still, even if he turns back now, it is impossible for him to prevent what is coming. I threw in a trump
card for him after all.
Well, I don’t think that the famous Dragon Prince would just take this lying down though.
“I guess that isn’t my job to deal with huh.”
“Yes?”
“Just talking to myself. Let’s head out. Now let’s start our journey to persuade the Northern Nobles.”
“That seems like a fun journey, Your Highness.”
“There’s nothing fun about this. Absolutely not fun. And stop calling me Your Highness. We are not a
prince and the Narbe Ritter here.”
Wearing a black hooded cloak, my face was completely hidden.
William might be able to see through my identity but others won’t.
After all, I am officially still sleeping in the Imperial Capital, plus nobody would believe that I came up
with this strategy myself.
However, once they confirmed my identity, they will have no choice but to acknowledge that.
That’s why I hide my identity.
2060
“From now on, we are a mercenary group that came from a faraway land. I am your leader and you
guys are my subordinates. Keep that in mind. I will reveal my identity to the Local Lords but I want to
avoid leaking information as much as possible.”
“Understood. But are you not too young to be the leader of a mercenary group?”
“Is it strange?”
“Somewhat, yes. So let us call you Waka-sama(Youngmaster) and we are the mercenaries serving your
father. How about that?”
“That’s fine. It’s not really a lie after all.”
We can come up with a more detailed background on the way.
First, we must leave this place.
“We are heading to Marquis Zweig’s territory but is there really something that warrants your visit
there?”
“Marquis Zweig is the only Lord I can trust in the North. He helped me a long time ago. He is a person I
respect.”
Saying so, I straddled the horse and headed out.
2061
SPT Chapter 321
Special Thanks to Double Tap for ze coffefe…..this really has become a daily thing hasn’t it
BTW, It’s from Finn’s POV dayo
-Mr.Graverobber
Meteor Descend
Finn’s vision is filled with the color blue.
It was the color of the blue sky.
A clear sky that spreads far and wide.
The sky was so large that it seems like he was the only one who exists in this world.
At the wide sky that seems like it is going to swallow him whole, Finn takes a deep breath and slowly
raises his face.
Finn is currently flying above cloud level.
He has confirmed that the enemy Dragon Knights have left before climbing into the sky.
Hiding in the clouds, Finn is approaching the sky above the enemy location to make a surprise attack.
“It feels so strange, isn’t it…..Nova.”
“Kyu-”
Nova cried out as he stroked its neck.
Since Dragon Knights are being protected by the magic power of their dragons, it also protects them
from the intense air resistance.
Even so, flying above cloud level was still a difficult task. However, this is not much different from
taking a walk to Finn.
What was different for him this time is the fact that he has a weapon in hand and that the success or
failure of the mission was hung on his shoulders.
“Fighting……It is what I always wanted……..but when I am actually doing it, it is scary isn’t it.”
“Kyu–……..”
“There was no other choice. To be with you……..this is the only choice for me.”
2062
There is no place for a useless Dragon Knight nor a useless Flying Dragon.
The only one who thinks that Finn is fit to be an instructor for the Dragon Knights Apprentices is the
young lady alone. And it is true that her thought came from her personal feelings.
He can’t stand to abuse his position as her childhood friend. Moreover, there is no doubt that his
position will be an unstable one and unless he can produce results, he will have to remain like that
forever.
That’s why Finn chose to fly into the battlefield.
However.
“…….to kill another human being……to kill another’s dragon……”
If he takes up weapons to solidify his position then it is inevitable for him to kick others down.
Just how many Dragon Knights will lose their lives and how many Flying Dragons will be injured by
his surprise attack.
Those people also have their family and friends. They must have spent as much time as him with their
dragons.
They are no different than him.
He has contained such hesitation in his heart so far but looking at the sky like this makes him doubt
himself.
The scary thoughts keep growing and growing.
However, he can not stay lost like this.
Finn firmly grabbed the type-62.
This power to fight has been entrusted to him.
“……His Highness is waiting for me.”
He slowly takes a deep breath.
The mission he was given is to neutralize the enemy.
He was told to prevent the enemy Flying Dragons from taking off. Right now, he understands well how
considerate the prince was to him.
The prince has granted his wish to fight.
He gave him the power to protect his childhood friend.
2063
The prince was being so considerate to his feelings even when he sent Finn off.
Finn can not bear to trouble the prince any more than this.
There is still doubt in his heart. However, he was told that when he became lost, he can just follow the
voice of his heart.
That’s why Finn decided to heed the loudest voice in his heart.
“Alright, Nova…….for His Highness.”
“Kyuu–!”
When he pulls the reins, Nova rises a little and dives down through the cloud with its wings folded.
The thick clouds are a cover to hide his approach.
If he continues to hide there, the enemy probably will not even notice them.
However, he can’t just remain hiding.
He has promised.
That he will deliver the good news to the prince.
He is not the only one fighting on the frontline.
A person who no one would complain if he chose to stay behind in a safe place has stepped out. He is
placing himself in danger.
For the sake of the Empire, the people, and his family.
He can not compare his feelings to the prince’s but he still wanted to help.
“Let’s go! Nova!”
Cutting through the clouds with his warcry, Finn and Nova dive directly down to the enemy
encampment.
No one seems to have noticed them yet.
After all, they have not expected to be attacked from above.
Finn continues to descend down toward the enemy’s camp without slowing down.
His target is their dragon stable.
“There it is!”
2064
Finn squinted his eyes searching for the enemy Flying Dragons and he discovered a place where a
large number of them had gathered.
It’s the enemy dragon stable.
Although it was only a temporary one, it was so big, unlike the one he has seen before. This means that
the enemy has that many Dragon Knights with them.
Now he understands the importance of the words ‘Do not let them take off’.
He adjusted the direction and increased the descent speed toward it.
Then, the soldiers underneath began to notice him.
“Oi…….What is that?”
“Nn? Just a Dragon Knight right? That’s probably one of our own.”
“No, but……”
Even if they noticed him, they can not react immediately.
The main force of their army is the Imperial Army but they recognize most Dragon Knights as their
allies so they are not accustomed to an attack from the sky.
They can not respond to something that they weren’t trained for so suddenly.
Among the confusion and suspicion, Finn descends down toward them like a meteor.
“I’m counting on you, type-62.”
He inserted his magic power into the type-62.
The Diffused fire mode can defeat multiple enemies at once but it requires a huge amount of magic
power.
He sends the magic power to the type-62 steadily and eventually, the tip of the type-62 begins to
discharge with a crackle.
It is now ready to fire.
At the same time, the dragon stable also entered Finn’s range.
From here, he has to play it by ear.
Below him, the Dragon Knights who noticed that something was off were about to lift off.
However, it was too late.
“HAAAA!!!!”
2065
An arrow shot by a soldier underneath approaches Finn.
After he rotated his trajectory and evaded the arrow, Finn fires off the diffused lighting of the type-62
Many lightning strikes hit the dragon stable.
A fire broke out in the building and the Flying Dragons that got hit by the lightning strikes on their
wings screamed out in pain.
However, his attack doesn’t end there.
Finn continues firing lightning strikes at the dragon stable.
Repeatedly attacked by the lightning strikes, the dragon stable fell into complete chaos.
When the Dragon Knights who were patrolling the sky above the castle rushed back, the dragon stable
was almost completely destroyed and the Dragon Knights and Flying Dragons inside are no longer in
any shape to be deployed.
Seeing their comrades in such a state, the Dragon Knights’ anger reached its boiling point.
“Don’t let him escape! Kill that White Dragon Knight!!”
There were dozens of Dragon Knights still in the sky.
Furthermore, the Dragon Knights who were away from the stable are now lifting off to chase after
him.
Among the Dragon Knights that started to deploy one after another, the Dragon Knights who are
proud of their speed started chasing after Finn.
They are the elites of the United Kingdom’s Dragon Knights Order.
Still, Finn doesn’t panic.
“Good……come after me!”
The Dragon Knights who are so proud of their speed couldn’t take his back.
On the contrary, Finn continues to counterattack and decrease their number.
The Dragon Knights of the United Kingdom immediately realized that they were not dealing with any
normal opponent and gave up the reckless pursuit, choosing to surround Finn with their number
instead.
Although Finn and Nova have superior mobility in the sky, it is meaningless if they are surrounded.
After all, they can not do anything if they have nowhere to run.
That was supposed to be the case.
2066
However, now he possesses a weapon that he can use to secure an opening space.
“Damn it! What was that!?”
“It’s a magic wand! He’s shooting us!? AHH!? ARGHH!!”
Finn shoots down the Dragon Knights who were blocking his way and continue to escape.
If they can not stop them then they have no hope of stopping Finn and Nova.
Seeing the Dragon Knights unable to deal with the situation, a large number of archers were getting
ready to fire at him from the ground.
After all, they are dealing with a Dragon Knight. It’s a normal strategy to shoot him down with arrows.
However, Finn boldly lowered his attitude toward the archers.
“UWAAAA!!??”
“HE RUSHED IN!?”
“DON’T SHOOT! HE’S TOO CLOSE!!”
With the ground force confused and unable to attack him, Finn makes his way toward Castle Dick.
Finn and Nova who have been moving dexterously to avoid the Dragon Knights getting behind them
are now flying straight at the castle.
Seeing that, the Dragon Knights started to accelerate and pursue him.
“Like hell we will let you escape!”
“We will tear you to pieces!”
The Dragon Knights approach Finn and Nova while angrily yelling at them.
About 30 Dragon Knights are chasing after them. And there is another 20 closing in from behind.
After confirming that they are chasing him, Finn accelerated toward the castle wall.
Many Dragon Knights slowed down in fear of crashing into the wall but some Dragon Knights couldn’t
stop as they had their attention solely focused on Finn and Nova.
As if to mock those Dragon Knights, Finn and Nova soar up at the last minute.
“Damn it!? ARRGHH!!”
Unable to decelerate, the Dragon Knights crashed into the wall.
However, the number of their pursuers doesn’t decrease that much.
2067
“He flew up! There’s nothing in the way anymore! Accelerate!”
“STOP RIGHT THERE!”
A total of about 40 Dragon Knights chased after Finn and Nova and headed straight toward Castle
Dick.
Just a little more.
When one Dragon Knight managed to reach within the range where he can use his long spear to attack
Finn.
Finn and Nova suddenly accelerated even further.
Finn and Nova left the Dragon Knights behind as if the chase so far was a lie.
“What, the hell……?”
It didn’t take long before they realized that they were baited.
But why did he want to lure them here?
The answer to that question appeared to them in the form of the men in white mantle straddling on
black falcons cutting through the clouds.
The Dragon Knights who were focusing on climbing the altitude are vulnerable.
They are not in any kind of formation.
“To hell with you…..Damn Imperial!”
“Evade! EVADE!”
“We won’t make it! They are too fast!”
On the other hand, the 6th Corp descended toward them in an orderly formation.
Like a pack of hunting birds of prey.
The Dragon Knights who were chasing after Finn are being fired upon by countless fireballs from
above.
Then, the knights in white mantle spread out to protect the sky above the castle.
As if they are announcing their presence.
“It’s the 6th Corp…….It’s the Divine Falcons!”
“Reinforcements! His Majesty’s reinforcements have arrived!”
2068
“We can win! We can win!”
The soldiers in Leo’s main army who had been holding up in the castle enduring the enemy’s siege
excitedly shouted.
However, the remaining enemy Dragon Knights gather up and immediately charge at the castle as
though such a cry of victory is not permitted.
Their number was still higher than that of the 6th Corp.
“Prepare to intercept! Secure air superiority! By the name of His Imperial Majesty! Do not let any
single one of them reach the castle!”
Lambert shouted his command and the Knights of the 6th Corp formed a line.
In response, the Dragon Knights of the United Kingdom also form a formation.
However, they have forgotten. No, they did not notice.
The despairing fact that there is a meteor descending down from above them.
2069
SPT Chapter 322
Special thanks to Double Tap, Grax, and Rector!!
Enjoy the war chapters. This week chapters are so loooooooong
-Mr.Graverrober
Securing Air Superiority
“The enemy is the 6th Imperial Knight Corp! Those Falcons are no match for our Dragons! They are
just a ceremonial unit! Teach them who is the true ruler of the sky!!”
Upon hearing the enemy’s command, Lambert grinned and ordered his men to group up.
This is to concentrate their firepower.
“Aim at the gap in their formation!”
“Like hell, we would have such a gap in our formation!”
“There is.”
Saying so, Lambert himself ready his type-61 wand.
Buying into his provocation, the enemy captain launched an assault with his men.
However, at that moment.
The wings of his dragon were shot through by lightning strikes from the sky.
“WHAT!!??”
It wasn’t just the captain’s dragon that was shot.
All the Flying Dragons near him were all shot in the wings.
In an assault position, if the leading charge collapsed, the men behind will not be able to form a
formation.
And the 6th Corp will not let that opportunity pass.
“Fire!!”
In response to Lambert’s command, a large number of fireballs were fired using the type-61 wands.
The dragons that still managed to fly with their wings shot couldn’t possibly avoid that.
2070
Even if they try blocking the fireballs with their spears, such an effort would be useless.
“DAMN IT ALL!!!!!”
Receiving a fireball on his shoulder, the enemy captain screamed and fell.
The Dragon Knights who were trying to rescue him from the fall were also being showered by the rain
of fireballs.
Meanwhile, the Dragon Knights who managed to avoid the fireballs by leaving the formation were also
hunted down with the Divine Falcons’ superior mobility.
“All men spread out! Wipe out the remaining enemies!”
Receiving the order, the Falcon Knights of the 6th Corp began to hunt down the scattering Dragon
Knights.
It was no longer a battle.
Their formation was completely destroyed rendering cooperation impossible. Moreover, their
opponents are too much for them to handle individually.
“Don’t waste time! Hurry up!”
After ordering his men to hurry, Lambert slowly turned his gaze to Finn who had descended to his
level.
“Good work. You really were something.”
“No, I only caught the enemy off guard.”
“That might be true. Still, it was your skill that managed to lure the enemy here. Be proud of that.”
“……it was because our strategy was excellent. Besides, the enemy main force is still up.”
Lambert nodded to Finn.
They have received info about the enemy army.
The United Kingdom prided elites, the Black Dragon Knights.
They are Prince William’s direct subordinates but they still couldn’t spot any so far.
Black Flying Dragons are known to have a rough temper and not suitable to be mounted by a Dragon
Knight. Thus the Dragon Knights who ride those Black Dragons to battle are the elites among their
ranks.
If such an elite unit comes out, things will not be as smooth as they are now.
2071
“You should standby for now.”
“But the enemy ground forces are also mobilizing.”
“You think they can hit us with an arrow from that distance? Don’t worry. Your turn will come when
the enemy’s main force shows up.”
After giving Finn an order, Lambert looks around.
Most of the Dragon Knights who rose to the sky could be shot down by his subordinates.
Due to Finn’s surprise attack, many Dragon Knights can only look up at the sky with regret.
Seeing the situation, Lambert raises one of his hands.
“Secure air superiority and maintain it!”
Following Lambert’s command, the 6th Corp surrounds the sky above the castle.
The circle was drawn in the air.
A defensive formation that does not allow any outside invasion.
They all point type-61 wands outward and ready themselves for anti-air fire in all directions.
As soon as the circle was established, Large Flying Dragons began to descend from the sky.
———————
The Large Flying Dragons that are descending to the castle are all carrying a huge loading platform.
Realizing that they are delivering them the supply, the soldiers inside the castle cheered.
“Food! They brought us supplies!”
“As long as we have supply we have nothing to fear!”
“His Majesty didn’t abandon us!”
“All hail the Empire! All hail the Empire!!”
Among such cheers, Marquis Greisner looked up at the sky in astonishment.
The fearless man with his dark brown hair cut short. That’s Marquis Hagen von Greisner.
“Not only Finn…….even the Large Flying Dragons…..to think that they can be utilized like that…..”
“I don’t think that it is Onii-sama’s idea.”
The girl who muttered so next to the Marquis was a girl with dark brown hair.
2072
The name of this dignified girl is Katrina von Greisner.
She is the eldest daughter of Marquis Greisner and the Captain of their Dragon Knights.
The ones who they didn’t consider as fighting forces and left behind back in their territory are now on
the battlefield performing their own role. However, Katrina wasn’t surprised about that.
After all, they are performing the roles that she thought might be possible to them in the future.
However, to utilize the Large Flying Dragons as a transport unit you would need enough forces to
protect them. Moreover, there was no magic wand that allowed Finn and Nova to be useful on the
battlefield.
The theories on top of her table have now become a reality in front of her.
There must be someone who made it happen.
And that someone is certainly not her older brother who adheres strictly to the traditional theories.
“Katrina-ojousama! The supplies have arrived! They are still delivering us more! It’s not just Finn!
Everyone is here!”
“Yes, that’s right. Take the food from the first cargo and feed our dragons. If we let them eat a little
they should be able to fly.”
The number of Dragon Knights under Marquis Greisner has been diminishing during the siege.
The reason is that the enemy Dragon Knights are all full-fledged and their lack of food supply. In the
first place, their Flying Dragons were still not perfected.
With their imperfection, it would be bad to let their number get reduced any more so Leo forbids the
Dragon Knights under his command from going up to the sky. As a result, the enemy Dragon Knights
gained complete air superiority. Still, no matter how threatening they may be, the castle will not be
taken down with the Dragon Knights alone.
Katrina obediently followed that order. She had no choice but to obey.
Still, she couldn’t let go of the bitterness in her heart.
After all, she has her own pride as an Imperial Dragon Knight.
“Even if they can’t fight now they should be able to help guide in the supplies. We are racing against
time. Hurry up.”
“Yes, ma’am!”
The Dragon Knight who came to deliver her the report wiped the tears in his eyes and ran back.
2073
His tears were natural. After all, their supply has been diminishing each day and it was no longer
possible to feed their dragons properly.
They have cut a portion of their own meal to secure the dragons’ share but that too has its limits.
There is no Dragon Knight whose heart doesn’t hurt when they have to see their dragon gradually
wither away.
Katrina herself would already cry in relief if she wasn’t in a position where she needed to lead her
subordinates.
Her position doesn’t allow that.
“Are you going out?”
“Yes. I will do what I can.”
“They look reliable enough though?”
“…..Finn is fighting in the sky, I can’t stay here and only look up at him. Everyone should feel the same
as well. This is the day we have been waiting for.”
They grew up and raised their dragons together.
They have trained and failed many times.
They have supported each other so far and reached this place.
Among them, Finn was the most skilled.
He simply lacked the means to fight. It was hard for Finn himself but all his childhood friends
including Katrina also felt the same.
To fight together someday. That was their shared wish.
And it is about to come true right now.
She can not bear to stay still.
“Can I leave reporting to His Highness to you, Father?”
“I understand. Go.”
Marquis Greisner did not try to stop his beloved daughter.
After all, this is also necessary for the battle as a whole.
The Large Flying Dragons are descending toward the castle while carrying the loading platform
containing the supplies. The task was surprisingly difficult and it would be too hard to describe their
speed as anything but slow.
2074
They have secured air superiority with much effort. It would be best if they can finish the
transportation while they still have air superiority.
That being the case, they need someone to guide them in.
With that in mind, Marquis Greisner rushed to Leo’s place.
Then when he arrived at the command post, Marquis Greisner was greeted with something
unexpected.
“Marquis Greisner! There is an order from His Highness! You are to take command of the army!”
“What!? What do you mean!? Where is His Highness Leonard!?”
“That is……His Highness said that he is going to join the aerial battle……”
“His Highness did……?”
Leo never went up to the sky during the siege.
He was devoted to commanding his army.
That Leo just flew off.
This means that the situation requires Leo to be in the sky.
“Did His Highness say anything else…..?”
“He said that his opponent is coming…..”
“The United Kingdom’s Dragon Prince…..! Send a warning to the entire army! The enemy’s main force
is coming!!”
Even while he shouted that command, Marquis Greisner knew that it is meaningless.
The stage of the battle is in the sky.
Ground troops will be mobilized but the decisive battle will be in the sky. That’s why Leo went up
there.
No matter how vigilant they have been on the ground, they can’t do anything to the enemy in the sky.
Not to mention that their opponent are the elites of the United Kingdom under the direct command of
the Dragon Prince.
“I don’t think that the 6th Corp will lose but……”
He can not be confident that they will win.
2075
Marquis Greisner perished the thought and firmly ordered his men to place a priority on the transport
unit.
2076
SPT Chapter 323
Special Thanks to our lord, Double Tap. May his coffee farm be ever more succesful.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Black Dragon Knights
Seeing several Dragon Knights rising from the castle, Finn tried to head toward them.
After all, he was ordered to be on standby and has nothing to do.
However, Lambert stopped him.
“Say hi to them later. We have no time for that right now.”
“Eh?”
“The enemy’s main force is coming.”
Lambert says as he stares behind the enemy.
There, about thirty Dragon Knights are heading toward them in a formation.
The Black Dragon Knight Unit.
“The strongest of the United Kingdom, the Black Dragon Knights. Moreover, they are being led by–”
“The Dragon Prince himself…..!”
Leading them at the forefront is William straddling on his red dragon.
Not only the Black Dragon Knights, Finn is well familiar with the Dragon Prince.
As a Dragon Knight, William was the ideal that he aimed to be like. And that ideal is now flying toward
him as an enemy.
Finn isn’t the only one nervous about his presence.
Tension ran high among the members of the 6th Corp including Lambert.
They resolved to fight. And he is someone they already expected to battle against.
However, when he appears in front of them, they can not help but be astounded at his ability.
Lambert and his subordinates whose main battlefield is the sky can understand the ability of their
opponent just by looking at the way they fly.
2077
William is of course very skilled but the Black Dragon Knights following behind him are also
exceptional.
They all stay on high alert because they understand that.
However.
“You don’t have to be so nervous. If they are the strongest of the United Kingdom then you are the
strongest air force of the Empire. Your white mantles are not for show right. You don’t have to
evaluate your opponent higher than necessary.”
“Your Highness…..”
“Thanks for the Reinforcements, Captain Lambert. You saved me.”
“Yes, sir! I am simply here by His Majesty’s order.”
Leo who came up to them relaxed the tension in the knights of the 6th Corp.
They will not be defeated through pure skills. However, there is certainly a difference in their practical
experience.
The 6th Corp had an inferiority complex there which made the enemy look stronger in their mind.
Leo simply got rid of that.
“His Majesty sent you at the right time. I was wondering if I should make my move but it seems that
waiting was the right choice huh.”
“It was all thanks to His Majesty and His Excellency the Prime Minister’s ingenious plan, Your
Highness.”
“Right. Using Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knights was certainly a good strategy. What’s more, your
plan even involved the destruction of the enemy’s supply. The person who came up with this plan
really knows how to upset others doesn’t he.”
“……..”
Lambert stays silent at Leo’s smile.
Al’s presence here is a secret. He is under a strict order not to reveal it even to Leo himself.
Officially the success of this transportation plan is credited to the Emperor and they were told to act
like that is the case.
However, Leo’s words make it seem like he knows everything.
That’s why Lambert had no choice but to stay quiet.
2078
While laughing lightly at Lambert, Leo shifts his gaze to Finn.
“That was a great success. White Dragon Knight. You mind giving me your name?”
“Y, Yes, sir! I am Finn Brost! I belong to……”
Finn freezes when he is about to say that he is a Dragon Knight in service of Marquis Greisner.
After all, he doesn’t know how to answer.
Lambert sighs at Finn’s honest personality. Finn is probably thinking that he would tell a lie if he says
that he is Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knight.
Seeing Finn like that, Leo gives him a nod.
“That’s a good magic wand you have there. It seems that it is different from the others huh.”
“Uhh, this is…..um………”
“……Is it a prototype weapon created for me? It was a good decision to entrust it to him, Captain
Lambert.”
“Yes, sir. I apologize for my arbitrary action.”
Lambert quietly bows his head.
As though feeling left behind, Finn confusedly shifts his gaze between the two.
When he was acting like that, Leo pulled out his sword.
Then.
“You now belong to the Imperial Family. In other words, You are the [Dragon Knight of Adler]. Will
you be able to live up to my expectations? Dragon Knight Finn.”
“Y, Yes! Certainly!”
“Those are good eyes. Good. We are going to stop the advance of the enemy’s main force. I will stall
Prince William myself. Your role is to stand out as much as you can and attract the enemy’s attention.
Still, you have to value your life, understand? It doesn’t count as a journey until you get home after
all.”
Said Leo with a smile.
He then raised his sword high and spoke to everyone in the castle with a powerful voice.
“6th Imperial Knight Corp! I hereby take command of your unit! The enemy is the Black Dragon
Knights led by the Dragon Prince! There is no better opponent than this! The time of waiting is over!
2079
It’s time we fly! We will put an end to the debate of who is the ruler of the sky! Advance! Imperial
Knights! Let them all know that the sky of the Empire belongs to you!!”
“CHARGE! FOLLOW HIS HIGHNESS!!”
The supplies transportation is not over yet.
Compared to the enemy reinforcements, the 6th Corp were superior in number. However, if they have
to leave some behind to protect the transport unit then their number is almost equal. There was no
numerical advantage here.
The quality of their weapons was excellent but their opponents were all strong men who had tasted
many battlefields before.
This will be a battle between the quality of their weapon and their experiences.
They are not opponents that they can half-heartedly face. That’s why Leo took the lead himself and
charged at William.
“So you came out! Leonard!”
“I found a chance to leave the command to someone else you see.”
“What a coincidence! Me too!”
The supply transport in the air cannot be prevented by the enemy’s large ground forces.
If that is the case then there is no need to carefully direct such an army personally.
Both the attacker and defender.
Although their positions were different, both of them were released from the chains that bind them.
Now they can fight as warriors.
“It seems your skills still haven’t grown dull huh!”
“You too!”
After several flybys, the two took a distance away from each other.
In the space between the two.
The Black Dragon Knights and the Falcon Knights engage each other.
They both failed to take down their opponents’ general. Right now, the battle is turning into a high-
level aerial battle.
An all-out skirmish.
2080
However, their abilities are on par and none of them fell.
That’s why the situation has entered a stalemate.
However, William is frowning.
After all, they can not advance any further. Moreover–
“You Imperials sure hid quite a ridiculous trump card huh!”
“The Empire never neglected the research on Aerial combat you see.”
“You think we will believe that such a monster can be born through research alone!? Where did you
find him! No, who?”
“His Majesty, obviously.”
“You sure are bad at lying huh! How about you just honestly admit that it is the work of that elder
brother you are so proud of!?”
William forcibly closes the distance to approach Leo.
Locked into a contest of strength, William managed to stop Leo’s movement.
A young Black Dragon Knight who was waiting for that moment immediately approached Leo.
“LEONARD!!!!! YOUR HEAD IS MINE!”
“Sorry but, my head is not that cheap you know.”
The moment Leo said that.
A lightning strike broke in between Leo and the Black Dragon Knight.
The Black Dragon Knight who barely evaded the lightning felt a chill run on his back.
And without checking what is behind him, he started moving away at his fastest speed.
“Damn it!”
His judgment was correct.
Finn was already behind him and the type-62 was aimed at his back.
However, the Black Dragon Knight managed to get away by leaving the movement entirely to his
dragon.
The Black Dragon Knight finally turned around to make sure that he got away.
There was no one there.
2081
“What…..? He disappeared……?”
That was his last word.
At the time he muttered that, he was hit by multiple lightning strikes from directly above him and fell
to the ground without being able to do anything.
Then Finn returns to Leo’s side.
“Are you safe! Your Highness!”
“Yeah, thanks to you.”
Leo answered and looked at William.
William slowly takes a deep breath while turning his gaze toward Finn.
He recognized Finn as an opponent who can take down his elite Black Dragon Knight.
He won’t say that they are equal to each other.
He’s an opponent that he has no choice but to stop with all his might.
Judging so, William tries to leave another Black Dragon Knight to handle Leo.
However, a Black Dragon Knight rushed in from behind William.
The Black Dragon Knight does not hesitate and heads straight for Finn.
Feeling a chill from his charge, Finn fired a lightning strike while keeping a distance away from the
approaching Black Dragon Knight. However, the Black Dragon Knight simply parried away the
lightning with his black sword and closed in on Finn.
“Leave him to me! Your Highness William!”
He appears to be a man over forty years old with black hair and a black beard.
His appearances seem crude at first glance.
The man who would otherwise be mistaken for a pirate or a bandit if he wasn’t mounting on a dragon,
grins, and swings his blade down.
In response, Finn spun and avoided it.
“OH! So you can dodge that too huh!”
“Roger! What are you doing!? I ordered you to protect our supply convoy right!?”
“We can get more supplies even if we lose them but we can’t replace you, Your Highness! I already left
the place to one of my subordinates! Besides, that was only a diversion anyway!”
2082
“A guy like you is really……..”
William muttered in a dismayed manner.
The man called Roger then points his sword at Finn with a big smile.
“I have found a good opponent! Give me your name! White Dragon Knight!!”
“…..Finn Brost. A Dragon Knight of Adler.”
“A Dragon Knight under the direct command of the Imperial Family huh! Interesting! I am Roger! I
belong to the Dragon Knight Order of the United Kingdom! Captain of the Black Dragon Knights! I will
take your head!!”
With that said, Roger immediately accelerated his dragon toward Finn.
Responding in kind, Finn also accelerated Nova as they rushed toward him.
2083
SPT Chapter 324
Special Thanks to Double Tap and another cofefe donor who wishes not to be named.
We shall be forever grateful.
-Mr.Graverobber
Voice of the Heart
He’s strong.
Finn thought to himself while keeping his eyes on Roger who is currently chasing after him.
So far, he is the first person who Finn can’t shake off even with serious effort.
Moreover, he is actively approaching Finn for a chance to attack as though he read Finn’s every
movement.
Finn is managing to keep up for now but how long can he do that.
“So this is the strongest Dragon Knight of the United Kingdom…..!”
This Captain of the elite Black Dragon Knights is even stronger than William.
The strongest Dragon Knight of the United Kingdom both in name and reality.
Even though Finn’s skills in aerial combat are not losing to his, Finn can not surpass Roger.
Finn wanted to reverse the situation with the power of type-62 but Roger can use his big sword as a
shield and ward off the lightning strikes he fired.
Excellent offense and defense, no opening whatsoever.
Both the performance of the weapon and the power of their mount, Finn’s are superior. Still, Roger
managed to fill that gap with his experience alone.
“Ugh!”
Finn increases the altitude to get away from the approaching Roger. However, as if he was expecting
that, Roger rises up at almost the same time and does not allow him to widen the distance.
“Using your superior mobility to raise the altitude huh! It might work against another Dragon Knight
but–!”
‘That won’t work against me.’
2084
Roger brandishes his sword.
Finn twisted his body to evade it but using that opening, Roger spins his dragon.
A strike with a dragon’s tail.
It was a surprise attack.
To cover for Finn, Nova directly received the tail strike.
The damage wasn’t fatal but due to the difference in their size, Finn and Nova were blown away.
“UGGH!! Nova! Are you okay!?”
“Kyu–!”
Nova responded as if to say that it was nothing.
Finn was relieved to see that but the crisis is not over yet.
Roger is still unharmed and standing in their way.
If Finn is defeated, Roger will lead the enemy force to attack the convoy. If that happens, the transport
will be interrupted.
On the other hand, if Finn can defeat Roger, the enemy will lose their chance to make a decisive move.
Their battle is affecting the balance of the battlefield itself.
He can not allow himself to fall here.
That thought slowed Finn’s movement and judgment.
“You are wide open!”
Seeing that Finn tries to take a distance again, Roger immediately closed in.
Roger’s immediate charge is without hesitation.
Finn was surprised but Roger wouldn’t wait for him to recover.
He keeps pursuing Finn who is still trying to get away.
Even when he realizes that the situation is getting ugly, Finn knows that it is difficult to turn the table
once he falls into a disadvantage.
Thus Finn desperately concentrated on avoiding the incoming attacks.
Meanwhile, Lambert’s voice reached Finn’s ears.
2085
“Your Highness! It’s an ambush!!”
Hearing that, he gazes at the transport unit.
Three enemy Dragon Knights managed to slip past their defense.
The Black Dragon Knights are keeping the 6th Corp occupied. As a result, they were late to notice the
Dragon Knights that flew in low from another direction.
Moreover, the 6th Corp was rotating their injured members to escort the transport unit. In their place,
the knights who were originally escorting the transport unit are joining the battle at the front.
That also played a part in making them late to notice the enemy’s ambush.
The injured knights desperately fire fireballs to protect the convoy with all their might.
The Large Flying Dragons which are the main means of transport can not possibly avoid the enemy’s
attack.
If they drop down the supply they are carrying at the wrong height, it will cause harm to their allies
below them instead.
Therefore, Katrina and the Dragon Knights of Marquis Greisner who were guiding the Large Flying
Dragons moved to intercept the approaching enemy.
“Don’t let them approach!”
“Get out of my way! You half-baked Dragon Knights!”
There was a difference in their skills in the first place.
Moreover, their dragons are exhausted and are far from perfect condition.
Even so, Katrina and her subordinates stood in their way.
Instead of avoiding the approaching spears, they received it with theirs and let their dragons take
them head-on.
Being locked in place, the enemy can not ignore them.
“Damn you!”
“You won’t get through!”
“Don’t you get carried away!”
While their dragons are colliding, they continue battling each other with their spear.
They are at a disadvantage at close distance but if they widen the distance, the enemy will be able to
approach the convoy.
2086
Therefore, Katrina and her subordinates did not withdraw. If their opponents try to widen the
distance, they will immediately close in.
However, they are restricting the enemy’s movement at the cost of entering the distance where the
enemy can cause fatal damage to them.
The enemy Dragon Knight’s spear shallowly pierces Katrina’s shoulder.
In response, Katrina grabbed the spear handle.
The same goes for all of Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knights.
In the literal sense, they are stopping the enemy’s advance with their own bodies.
“Kgh! Let go!!”
“Don’t you look down on the Empire’s Dragon Knights!”
Every time their opponent moves, the spear causes them severe pain.
Even so, Katrina kept gripping on their spear.
Even if it is only one second, she knows how precious the time she can earn is.
Unless they do this much, they can not earn time for the transport. The Dragon Knights of Marquis
Greisner had taken a portion of their food to feed their dragons. Including Katrina, they all can barely
stand up themselves.
The enemy Dragon Knights are terrified at how Katrina and the others are stopping them at the cost of
suffering such a wound but they couldn’t afford to stop resisting either.
Letting go of their spears, they widen the distance.
They then pull out their sword and try to cut down Katrina and her subordinates who are getting
sluggish from the pain.
Finn who saw that from a distance tried to turn the type-62 toward them but—–he hesitated.
Right now, what would happen if he let Roger do as he pleased.
Given the situation of the battle, he can’t leave this place.
Finn faces Roger while trying to make his decision but he still hesitates.
However, his heart wasn’t there anymore.
“To still worry about others while facing me, you are looking down on me Eh!”
2087
Roger made a forceful maneuver unlike the traditional linear movement he was sticking with until
now and swung his sword down toward Finn.
While looking at the big sword that is approaching him, Finn recalled Al’s words.
‘Finn, this is your first battle. I am sure that there will be many thoughts that can make you hesitate on
the battlefield. When the time comes, just listen to your heart.’
Considering that battle situation, he should not leave this place.
Right now, the only one who can keep up with Roger is him.
Even so, Finn still wanted to go to Katrina and his friends. After all, that was the reason he chose to
come here in the first place.
He knows that it will cause their side to be at a disadvantage. His action will be a selfish one.
He knows that.
However, his heart still tells him to do it.
Even if things get worse, I have to go.
“Let’s go—-Nova.”
Muttering so, Finn jumped backward by himself.
The big sword passed through the place where Finn used to be.
Roger opened his eyes wide to that sudden action.
For the first time, Finn did something that he didn’t expect.
For a Dragon Knight, the back of their dragon is like a rooftop. No one would dare to leap off.
However, Finn did it.
He jumped backward and aimed the type-62 at Roger from point-blank.
“I am putting this battle on hold.”
Saying so, Finn fired off a lightning strike, flicking away Roger’s big sword.
“UGGHH!?”
How long has it been since he has been disarmed like this.
Roger was both surprised and impressed.
“What a guy……”
2088
While falling, Finn looks toward Katrina.
They are at an overwhelming disadvantage.
He has no way to get back to them or to get back on Nova himself.
Still, he has to stop the enemy Dragon Knights.
At the same time, the knights of the 6th Corp were also heading their way.
Surely, they will make it in time to protect the convoy. However, that doesn’t guarantee the safety of
Katrina and his friends.
After all, Katrina and the others are putting their lives on the line so that the enemy can not ignore
them. They will have to kill Katrina and the others to get past.
That’s the reason why the knights of the 6th corp will make it in time.
But he can not allow that.
Al already told him.
He told him to save them.
“I am going to save you!!”
As he keeps falling, he flows his magic power into the type-62.
He will probably hit the ground as is, he might even get attacked mid-fall.
However, Finn pays no mind to those unnecessary thoughts.
He knows.
He knows that his trusted partner will come to his side.
That’s why Finn was able to concentrate on helping Katrina and his friends.
“GOOOOOO!!”
More than a dozen lightning strikes were fired.
They headed straight toward the castle and hit the Dragon Knights in front of Katrina and the others.
It was an attack that none of them expected.
They had no way to prevent it.
In front of Katrina and the others, they all fell to the ground powerlessly.
2089
Katrina then turns toward the direction where the lightning strikes were coming from.
Finn was falling.
“Finn!?”
Katrina unconsciously reached her hand out to that impossible sight.
But she can’t reach him.
Instead, she saw Nova matching Finn’s falling speed.
She then saw Finn grab the reins of Nova and get back on.
“How reckless…..”
It was quite a feat.
She would be scared for him even if they are not in the middle of a battle.
It was something that you can’t pull off unless you have trust in your dragon and your own skills.
However, that peace of mind is fleeting.
A Black Dragon Knight was approaching from behind Finn and Nova.
“Ugh! I am counting on you! Nova!”
“Kyu–!!”
After Finn got back on, Nova was slowing down its descent.
Spreading its wings, Nova desperately tried to decrease the speed and land on the castle wall.
Finn strokes his chest in relief at the feeling that he finally touched the ground but a Black Dragon
Knight was charging in from behind him.
“Your head is mine now!”
“!?”
He was completely caught off guard.
Even if it is Nova, its movement would be slowed when it just touched the ground.
Looking back, Finn decided that he had no choice but to use his hand to intercept the incoming spear
and counterattack with the type-62.
After all these times, he isn’t afraid of getting hurt now.
2090
Such times have already passed.
However.
“You flew well. Young Dragon Knight.”
“Eh?”
Above Finn’s head.
Something just descended and spoke to him.
The incoming spear was parried away and the Black Dragon Knight was blown off the back of his
dragon.
What just happened.
As Finn still couldn’t make sense of the situation, the person who helped him showed his form.
“Sieg-sama brilliantly joined the battle!”
“….a bear?”
“Cute right?”
Finn’s face cramped up as he saw the bear smirking in reply.
2091
SPT Chapter 325
Special Thanks to LessDark for today coffee!!
And Happy Birthday to Double Tap, our coffee lord! Y’all make sure to sing Happy Birthday aight!
Now, for the Birthday present. Go Double Chapters Go!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
Won’t be Defeated lying down
Around the time when the fierce aerial battle was fought above the castle.
There was movement on the ground as well.
“All men advance! We are going to topple that castle! As long as we can take it down, there is no point
to their supplies!”
General Bartel, the acting commander of the rebel army issued his order to attack.
It was, of course, tactically correct.
If they can apply pressure to their enemy on the ground, the enemy will have no choice but to relocate
their personnel to protect the castle. Moreover, this is to prevent the enemy from having a proper
meal and rest.
This attack will serve to prevent their enemy from recovering.
However, apart from that, General Bartel was also impatient.
“Damn you…..! William!”
General Bartel has requested that William takes his men out to the supply base.
In other words, General Bartel will be the one who bears the most responsibility for falling into the
enemy’s trap.
William was only pretending to be hesitant and tricked General Bartel into the position where he has
to bear the responsibility in the unlikely event.
If the enemy can safely deliver the supply, General Bartel will surely be removed from the frontline.
Perhaps, even his position as a general might be in jeopardy.
He has to prevent the enemy from delivering supply to the castle at all cost.
2092
With a frown on his face, General Bartel keeps giving orders to his men.
As a man who became a general through only his military achievements, General Bartel is quite
flexible.
He shrinks down the encirclement and puts pressure on the enemy by attacking the castle with siege
weapons.
The catapult attack is unlikely to hit the flying dragons but there is still a slight chance that it might hit
the enemy transport unit in the back. If he can make the enemy think like that then the plan is
successful enough.
The rest will depend on the battle in the sky.
If William can get past the enemy then their transport will be interrupted.
The fact that he has to rely on William, who shifted the responsibility to him, disgusted General Bartel
but he held it in.
“Have the whole army shout Prince William’s name. If we can raise the morale then our winning
chance will increase.”
It is a small thing. Still, it is better than nothing.
However, a doubt raised into his mind when the messenger who should be beside him did not
respond.
General Bartel is now at the temporary command post. There are many commanders there
communicating General Bartel’s commands to their units.
Messengers always remain on standby and it is impossible for any of his commands to go unheard.
“Don’t tell me……!?”
General Bartel puts his hand on the sword at his waist and tries to look behind him.
The eyes of the people at the command post were focused on the castle in front.
It is difficult for them to notice what’s going on behind them.
They got him.
When he thought so, a blade was already pierced through his stomach.
“Ugh……”
“Good guess, General. I am here for your life.”
Behind him was a petite soldier.
2093
However, that soldier is not a soldier under his command.
That soldier is, of course, not one of William’s either.
“You….coward…..”
“A rebel doesn’t have any right to call others a coward. Besides, deception is also a tactic you know.”
With that said, the soldier pulls the sword out.
General collapsed with a loud noise.
Finally, those at the command post noticed that General Bartel was attacked.
The command post fell into complete chaos.
However.
“Calm down! Treat the general! We will pursue the attacker!”
A cavalry unit that was nearby calmed the chaotic command post and chased after the attacker who
ran away.
Those inside the command post leave pursuing the attacker to them and rush to General Bartel.
“Sir! Please hang on!”
“Keep pressure on the wound! He is bleeding out!”
“You, idiots…”
General Bartel stops his aides who tried to treat him.
It is not a wound that he can survive.
He intuitively knew that such a wound was inflicted on purpose. He was not killed instantly because
they wanted him to bleed out slowly.
Why?
To make his aides occupied with treating him of course.
During that time, the ground forces that lost their commander will be in chaos. The longer his aides
are away, the worse the confusion.
And there is also another reason.
“We have no…..cavalry near this place……..”
General spoke while spitting out blood.
2094
He knows the placement of all nearby units.
There is no cavalry here. All of them should already be on the frontline.
In other words.
“That unit….was also an enemy……”
“Yes!? General!? Please say it again! We can’t hear you!”
General Bartel heard that and gave up speaking.
He probably can’t speak properly anymore.
Giving up everything, General Bartel let go of the strength in his body.
But he has only one regret.
“Please forgive this weak subordinate……Your Highness Gordon……”
He couldn’t live to witness the supremacy of the lord he served.
However, that is not so bad either.
If the result turns out ugly, he will not have to look at it.
Dying while seeing a good dream might be his one true desire.
While picturing the image of Gordon sitting on the throne, General Bartel slowly closed his eyes.
“Excellently done. Vinfried-sama.”
“Excellent huh. The enemy was just caught off guard.”
Lynfia smiles as she looks at the moody Vin who is saying that he should be able to do it better.
This strategist of Leo has incredibly low self-esteem.
“However, I still managed to assassinate the enemy general and slip away successfully.”
“Something like that was just a blind imitation of Al’s strategy. If that is excellent then it just means
that Al’s plan is excellent, that’s all.”
Vin was a strategist that has almost no connections with unconventional ideas.
He is not the type to create new things by himself.
That’s why Vin sees himself as a third-rate strategist.
2095
However, according to Lynfia’s evaluation of him, that is not the case.
As proof of that, Vin has led 3,000 elite troops and repelled the enemy attack at the branch castle time
after time.
Certainly, there was nothing new in the tactics he used. However, he has the ability to quickly decide
on a strategist appropriate to the situation.
Even if he can’t come up with a plan to invade the enemy command post like this time, he has the
power to arrange it immediately.
“Don’t you think that you are being too strict with yourself?”
“I am not strict with myself at all. I am the future emperor’s strategist. It’s a matter of course that I can
do this much.”
He set his view high and those who are above that view were set as his standard.
That was the distorted point of Vin.
However, the strong aspiration inside him was similar to Leo’s.
A vassal that resembles his lord.
While gazing at the castle, Lynfia thinks that it might actually be a good combination.
“Will Sieg be in time I wonder.”
“I don’t know. Well, no one would care if a bear walked on the battlefield. He can probably get inside
the castle without any trouble.”
When the enemy Dragon Knights began to move, Vin formed a surprise attack unit and was mobilizing
them to defeat the enemy general.
During that time, Vin sent Sieg to the castle.
He thought that it would be better to have someone at Leo’s side.
The main battlefield is the sky. No matter how hard he tries, he can not fly.
He doesn’t know if Sieg will be useful but it’s better than nothing.
Thinking so, Vin was frustrated at his own incompetence.
If Sieg ended up not being of help, it means that he just discarded a precious piece on the board.
Seeing his mood turning bad at the possibility that his plan was too naive, Lynfia sighs at him.
2096
“Now! Defeat Prince Leonard!!”
When Finn and Nova fell to the ground and the enemy formation was disturbed.
The Black Dragon Knights didn’t miss that chance to close in on Leo.
As though to not allow them to do as they please, the 6th Corp took position around Leo.
However.
“No! Their aim is not me!”
If they really aim for Leo’s head then either William or Roger will move first.
However, the two are currently absent from Leo’s view.
Their real aim is not him.
Leo then realized their true aim.
“Everyone, take cover! Their aim is the magic wands!”
The purpose of making the injured knights fall back to the rear was to avoid the magic wands falling
into the enemy’s hands.
Even if the escort of the convoy was getting thinner because of it, the magic wands have the worth to
be protected.
After all, it is a weapon that provides a big advantage in the sky.
William and Roger must be aiming for it.
The 6th Corp already moved in to protect Leo.
Their formation that covers a lot of areas was shrunk to center around Leo. They can not get to the
Imperial Knights who were fighting far away in time.
Momentary isolation.
Without missing that, William and Roger were aiming for the Imperial Knights.
“Kuh!”
“Right! Roger!”
“Got it!”
An Imperial Knight was caught in a pincer attack by William and Roger.
When he realized that he can not win, he jumped off his falcon with his magic wand.
2097
He couldn’t hand it over.
The others might be able to recover it if it falls to the ground but if he got caught here, the wand will
definitely get taken away.
It was his loyalty as an Imperial Knight.
However, the moment he jumped off.
Roger’s sword pierced the Imperial Knight and William grabbed his arm that was holding the magic
wand. He then cut it off along with the wand.
“All men withdraw! We can no longer stop their convoy! Don’t let them cause any more damage!”
“Damn it! Chase him! Don’t let the Dragon Prince escape!”
Lambert issued his command and the 6th Corp was ready to pursue him.
Finn also joined up with them.
However.
“You don’t have to chase him. It will just increase the damage on our side.”
“But!”
“It’s unnecessary.”
Leo said and advanced a little by himself.
Seeing that, William who was trying to withdraw turns to face Leo.
“I will let you have the supply. But I am taking this.”
“As expected of the Dragon Prince. It seems that you will not accept defeat lying down huh.”
“…….that’s quite carefree of you though?”
“Do I look like that?”
There is no change in Leo’s tone or expressions.
Still, William felt absolute confidence behind his actions.
I have to be careful.
With that renewed determination, William left the place.
“Finn Brost! Dragon Knight of Adler! I will let you have this duel! Your head will be mine next time!”
2098
With that said, Roger followed after William.
While keeping an eye on their withdrawal, he gives an order to hurry the supply transportation and
distribution.
“It’s over……”
“No, it’s only the beginning.”
“Your Highness?”
“As long as I am here, Prince William can not move freely. I will have to keep his eyes on me as much
as possible. That’s the purpose of our fight from now on. Will you help me?”
“Yes, sir! I will definitely be useful!”
Said Finn as he lowered his head.
Thus, the supply delivery operation was successful.
2099
SPT Chapter 326
Doubly chappuru!!
-Mr.Graverobbe3r
Marquis Zweig
Marquis Zweig’s territory is located near the center of the Empire’s northern region.
Since Gordon has taken control over the eastern side, this place is now rather close to the frontline.
The capital of Marquis Zweig’s territory is Deuce.
That is our destination.
“Speaking of Lord Zweig, I heard that he is an elderly noble of the pro-imperial family faction but does
he have any tie with you, Young Master?”
Lars raised that question as we are approaching the city of Deuce.
I have to wonder how to answer that question.
After all, the basis of that question was wrong in the first place.
“To begin with…..Marquis Zweig does not belong to a pro-imperial family faction.”
“Yes?”
“After the death of the Crown Prince, he was the one who kept attending ceremonies and festivals at
the Imperial Capital as the representative of the Northern Nobles. That might be why he is seen as a
royalist but that is actually not the case.”
“His actions were nothing but loyal though?”
“His actions, yes.”
After the death of the Crown Prince, people began to treat the Northern Nobles coldly.
At first, they were only cold but it continues to accelerate as the Northern Nobles who felt that his
death was not their fault couldn’t forgive such treatments.
At the time, the relationship between us and them wouldn’t be so cold if the Northern Nobles were
more understanding of the feelings of the people in the Imperial Capital. On the contrary, if the people
in the Imperial Capital could control their emotions better then……..
2100
However, the relationship between the two has become colder and colder.
One after another, the Northern Nobles moved away from the central part of the Empire. As they kept
moving away to the north the Northern Nobles became stronger.
Even so, Marquis Zweig did not stop his interaction with the central.
However, he didn’t do it out of his loyalty toward the Imperial Family.
“That person was thinking of the Empire as a whole. If the Imperial Family and the Northern Nobles
continue to grow more estranged, the country would eventually break. Because of that, he continued
to appear as the representative of the Northern Nobles. He was showered with curses. No matter how
unreasonable they treated him, he never spoke out. He thought that if by doing such a thing can
alleviate the sadness of losing the Crown Prince. He thought, if he can take it all himself instead of
letting the whole Northern Nobles become subjected to it, it will be fine.”
He didn’t visit the Imperial Capital because he liked it. Of course, he would hate such a thing.
Even so, he always came.
The Empire became unstable after the loss of the Crown Prince. However, Father could not use the
simplest method to restabilize the Empire by invading the Dominion.
If you have no outlet for their emotions, their anger will only smolder.
The sadness of losing the Crown Prince and the anger they have toward the Dominion were directed
toward the Northern Nobles. They were used as that outlet.
I can understand their feelings that such a thing is unreasonable. Father knew about it but he did
nothing. If we are to stop the cold treatment toward the Northern Nobles, we need to find another
outlet.
And Father couldn’t find any. After all, he already had his hands full with just himself.
To my father, Marquis Zweig was like a savior.
For the sake of our country, Marquis Zweig became the vessel of everyone’s grudges.
Malicious gossip alone is not enough. The people’s anger was so great that they needed to let it out
directly. That’s why Marquis Zweig always attended the events.
“That person has always been enduring. He had been the subject of the unreasonable grudges that the
people in the capital hold toward the Northern Nobles alone. He didn’t willingly attend the events in
the Imperial Capital because he is loyal. He came for the sake of our country. Without any complaints,
just taking in the grudges of the people. Everything….for the country, for our people.”
That was supposed to be what the Imperial Family should do.
If we lost the Crown Prince, it is our job to raise up a new beacon of hope and rule the country well.
2101
Since we couldn’t do that, we pushed everything to one old man.
“I see…….is that why you respect him?”
“Well, yeah.”
I cut the conversation short.
The rest of the story is not something that I should just tell people.
It’s an important memory in my heart.
When I was young, when the Crown Prince was still alive.
I was being bullied by Gied and his gang.
They have done it until it became a habit. And the troublesome thing was that it was not only Gied
who got so used to bullying me but his entourage as well.
I knew it since I was a kid. If I use my status as a royal, I can hurt others.
That’s why I didn’t use it. I couldn’t.
I was scared.
After all, I was bullied.
If I tell Father about it, how much punishment will befall them?
The more I thought about it, the more I couldn’t bring myself to tell him. Over time, they became
addicted to bullying me and their sins just become heavier and heavier. All the more reason why I
couldn’t say anything.
I was being a coward and it was stupid of me.
Because I didn’t say it right away, things got bigger until I could not do anything about it.
If it was Gied alone then I might be able to. Gied is the eldest son of a powerful noble. The most he will
receive is a heavy rebuke. But what of his entourage?
There were also young nobles from less powerful houses that reluctantly went along with Gied
because they were worried about their relationship with Duke Horsvath. They had no choice but to
follow Gied’s orders.
I’m sure that their houses will be destroyed.
It was Gied who involved them. However, it was me who continued to be Gied’s outlet of stress until
the problem became too big.
2102
That way, more and more noble children were involved. Eventually, I was labeled as the Dull Prince
and became a target of ridicule.
When it became like that, I couldn’t tell it anymore.
I know my father’s personality well. As long as I don’t tell, he won’t do anything. So I didn’t. I thought it
would be fine if I just put up with it.
And eventually, I got used to it too.
Around that time, I met Marquis Zweig.
He yelled at Gied and his entourage and helped me.
At the time, I must have an annoying look on my face. Most nobles do not try to help me. After all, to
them, the eldest son of Horsvath house is much scarier than a prince who can’t even stand up for
himself.
Still, it’s not that there were no nobles who tried to help me. The first time that happened, I only
thought that it was troublesome to cover up for them.
Still, Marquis Zweig did not help me out of his kindness alone.
I can still remember what he said to me back then.
“It is my pleasure to meet you, Your Highness. I am Marquis Zweig, a noble from the North. You are—
—truly splendid, Your Highness. Your Highness’s conduct touched me to the depth of my heart.”
I had been comforted.
I had been scolded.
But this is the first time that someone praised me.
Marquis Zweig noticed the reason why I chose to stay silent.
“Your Highness is kind and strong. I shall strive to be like you.”
Saying so, Marquis Zweig walked away.
To convey his feelings, the Marquis chose to yell at Gied and knelt down for me.
Surely, it was because he did that for me that I didn’t think that what I have been doing was wrong.
It was easy to improve my situation but that would require a lot of blood to be shed.
Laurenz was a good example. No matter how well I try to handle it, it will still result in death. After all,
that’s how you treat a rebel.
2103
If I had cried to my father when I was a kid who couldn’t intervene with the situation, it would
probably have resulted in an undesired outcome.
That’s why I felt gratitude toward him. That’s why he has my respect.
I want to repay that favor someday.
For the last three years, I couldn’t do anything to Marquis Zweig. And the Marquis didn’t ask to be
helped either.
All I could do was solve the Empire’s problems as Silver. But it is different now.
I start to act like a prince.
I will take this opportunity to fix the relationship between the Northern Nobles and the Imperial
Family. After all, if we can’t do that, we won’t be able to win.
How nice would it be if we could do it together.
Even if it is a little, I might be able to show him that I have grown.
At that time, I wanted Marquis Zweig to think that it was not a mistake to kneel to me back then.
“Young Master, Deuce will be within our sight soon.”
“I see. Then I will leave it to you alright?”
Along the way, we hashed out the details for our cover.
Unless the Narbe Ritter does not take down their hood, my identity won’t be leaked.
The Northern Nobles have little to do with the central.
In other words, they hardly know the face of the Imperial Family.
They might know our characteristics but only knowing that I have black hair and eyes would be too
little to find me out. Moreover, I am supposed to be sleeping in the Imperial Capital.
Anyone that can notice my identity now must be quite a praiseworthy individual.
When I was thinking so, the city of Deuce came into sight.
However,
“Young Master! Smoke is rising from the city! Something seems to be happening!”
“I know! Hurry!”
I kick the belly of my horse and start rushing toward the city.
2104
Seeing that, the Narbe Ritter followed me.
2105
SPT Chapter 327
Special Thanks to day go to Accel and Double Tap!!
Also, it’s valentine? What’s that? is it edible?
-Mr.Graverobber
Schwartz
When we reach the gate of Deuce.
A huge lightning strike struck down inside the city.
It’s daytime. Moreover, the sky is clear blue.
That was not a natural phenomenon.
“Magic huh.”
“Quite a powerful one at that too.”
There is no doubt that it was a modern magic spell but the level of the user is quite high.
There is a high-level mage inside this city.
What is going on here?
The gatekeeper is absent, the city is too defenseless.
We decided to enter Deuce just like that.
My heart is beating rapidly with an unpleasant premonition.
And my gut is often right.
That’s why I hurried the horse forward by myself.
When I reached the city square what entered my sight was a battle.
There were knights present on both sides but on one side, the knights are with bandits while the other
is protecting crying citizens.
Which one should I side with? That’s plenty obvious.
Some houses seem to have been burned down and some looked ransacked.
2106
The number of bandits is overwhelmingly higher.
However, that didn’t matter to me.
At the center of the square.
There was a scorch mark. The lightning strike earlier must have struck there.
And beyond that scorch mark.
Was a black coffin.
It seems like a grand funeral was being held here.
The bandits must have broken into the city while it was being held.
“Shilling! Why did you betray our gracious lord!”
“The lord is dead! There is no law here anymore! I will gift this place to His Highness Gordon! He will
surely reward me handsomely!”
Those words entered my ears but I couldn’t understand them well.
I just slowly advance my horse.
Lars seems to be screaming something in the back but his words didn’t enter my ears either.
I rushed my horse forward in a daze, breaking in between the two conflicting sides.
Seeing a stranger wandering into the scene, a bandit stood in my way.
“Hey, punk!? Who the hell are you!? This place is ours alright!?”
“…..shut up or I will kill you.”
“HII, HIIIIIIIII!!??”
I glared at him with the intent to kill.
The bandit fell on his back and desperately crawled away.
After seeing him crawl away, I got off my horse and approached the coffin.
There was a name inscribed onto the coffin.
“Marquis Adam von Zweig…….!”
It was the full name of Marquis Zweig.
Why, How.
2107
My attempt to understand the situation floated in my mind but I still couldn’t process the word death.
There is the me that can calmly accept his death and another me that is still confused and unable to
understand it.
My emotions mixed together and became uncontrollable.
When I slowly reached out to the coffin, only the feeling of coldness came back.
That coldness made me understand it.
My benefactor is dead.
“What are you doing! Just kill that guy already!”
It was the young knight that was called Shilling from earlier.
Using the Marquis’s funeral as his opportunity, he betrayed Marquis Zweig and brought in the bandits.
A fool who got caught in Gordon’s scheme.
A ridiculous fool who sullied Marquis Zweig’s funeral and tried to destroy his city.
Ah, that’s right.
There was one thing that can sort out this emotion.
It was something that Shilling said.
If I just order my men to kill them all, I would feel refreshed.
I have the subordinates that will comply with that order with me.
It would be easy to subdue them. Slaughtering them all is fine as well.
Even so.
Such a simple order won’t leave my mouth. The more I try to say it, the more my heart tries to reject it.
I understand the reason.
I wanted to show my growth to the Marquis. I wanted to prove to him that it was not a mistake when
he kneeled for me.
Even so, I can’t do what I did in the past. I can’t expose such a shameful figure to him.
Marquis Zweig was not someone dominated by emotions. He was someone who acted while thinking
ahead.
Back then, he didn’t say any simple words either. He didn’t choose the easy way out.
2108
Right now, I can’t choose such an easy way out either.
“I realize your greatness again today……”
It is difficult to control your emotions.
Marquis Zweig continued to endure his unreasonable treatments without any complaints.
He had been killing his emotions. All for the future that lies ahead of us.
Because he believed that was for the best.
I can’t afford to show my ugly side to such a person.
I have to get my emotions under control. What would happen if I ordered my men to kill them? I will
just feel refreshed.
There are more important things than that.
To keep my presence here a secret.
And to persuade the Northern Nobles.
Then there is only one thing I can do.
“This land is ruled by the greatest noble of the North. Such conflict doesn’t suit his land. And—-we
have no need for thieves. Protect his citizens! Do not let them suffer any more harm than this!!”
“As you wish.”
With that said, Lars leaped out in front of the bandits and instantly cut down several of them.
Then.
“Is incapacitating them enough, Young Master?”
“Yes. minimize the killing. Apprehend the ringleader.”
“Yes, sir!”
The Narbe Ritter in black cloak unsheathe their swords and began hunting down the bandits.
The knights who were with them are caught.
As expected of the Narbe Ritter, they didn’t miss any single one of them.
Had I order them to slaughter the bandits, it would only plunge the situation into chaos. The damage
would have increased and some bandits would have fled.
This is good. Still, the emptiness remains in my heart.
2109
The situation should be in our complete control soon.
I turned my eyes to the coffin and touched it again.
“It’s cold after all……”
Why does it always like this?
I couldn’t cure my mother’s illness, and when I am finally going to pay back my benefactor, he is
already dead.
Even though I was pushing Leo to become the emperor for the sake of our country and the people,
both the country and the people have to suffer because of the succession war.
Why can’t anything I do go well?
“I wanted to hear your advice…….”
My hand that was touching the coffin gradually turned into a fist.
There was a feeling of water flowing down my cheeks.
“Are you crying…..?”
When I turned my eyes to the voice, a beautiful blonde girl was standing there while being supported
by a maid.
She has long hair tied on the left and right sides and is dressed in a simple long white dress. Perhaps
she was ill, her complexion seemed pale and it felt like she has a hard time standing.
A girl that leaves the impression of being sick.
The girl’s left eye is green while her right is reddish-brown.
Odd eyes. That might be the reason why I can feel a large amount of magic power from her.
There were tears in her eyes as well.
“You seem to be crying too though……”
“Of course, I am crying. After all……I am the granddaughter of the person sleeping in the coffin you are
touching…….”
“…..I see. How did the Marquis die?”
“He was bedridden for a long time. The other day, his conditions worsened……it must be because of
the war. The anxiety must have shortened Ojii-sama’s life.”
“….that’s a shame.”
2110
While putting various emotions into words, I slowly kneeled in front of the girl.
“My name is Schwartz. I lead a mercenary corps. A long time ago, I was taken care of by the Marquis. I
came here thinking that I might have found the chance to repay my debt.”
“Schwartz(black) huh…..is that an alias?”
“I inherited it from my father.”
“I see…..my name is Charlotte. You saved me, Schwartz-san. I think we can have a slow funeral now.
Do you…..want to join us?”
“Of course.”
“Thank you……”
Charlotte sadly muttered so her atmosphere turned sorrowful.
For some reason, her figure overlapped with my mother and I turned my gaze away.
2111
SPT Chapter 328
Special Thanks go to LessDark, Wk, and Double Tap for beating Goal-kun to a pulp…….Goal-kun got a
taste for some Ma!@#@#t these days……..
-Mr.Graverobber
Charlotte
The funeral proceeded in peace.
It wasn’t flashy and all the attending citizens were crying.
At night.
Because I helped them today, I was able to get a room inside the lord’s mansion.
Originally, I intended to talk with Marquis Zweig about the future but now my schedule is all messed
up.
I intended to use Marquis Zweig’s influence to persuade the Northern Nobles but now I need to
persuade them one by one.
But to persuade them, I need personal connections. After all, I am currently a young leader of a
mercenary corp who doesn’t have any influence.
If I have to reveal my identity each time I visit one of them then it is likely that my existence will be
leaked and I would be taken lightly by the nobles here.
I want to choose the right timing to reveal myself.
Every Northern Noble should be indebted to Marquis Zweig so they wouldn’t refuse his request but
Marquis Zweig who has enough influence to persuade them is already gone.
I wanted to use his connections to gather the nobles for a meeting but I can’t use that plan anymore.
“This is troubling.”
“What is?”
When I talked to myself inside my room, I somehow got a reply.
I immediately turned to look at the balcony of my room and found Charlotte there.
Even though she looked so pale during the day, it seems she is quite energetic.
2112
“……that’s dangerous you know?”
“It’s fine. I am in good shape today after all.”
Said Charlotte with a light grin.
I can’t believe that at all.
“It’s not about your health. What would happen if you fall?”
“Hmm…..it will hurt.”
“If you already know that then get down.”
“But the wind feels so good tonight. Why don’t you join me instead, Schwartz?”
She said that and laughed.
She is a child with vibrant expressions.
I can’t think of her as someone who just lost her grandfather at all.
“I am in mourning though?”
“Me too. I’m just in the mood to talk to someone. So, talk to me.”
“Haa……”
It seems that going somewhere else is not an option for her huh.
When I gave up and went out to the balcony, Charlotte was looking up at the sky with her legs
dangling out the railings.
The starry sky is beautiful.
“How did you come to be indebted to my grandfather?”
“……he helped me when I was a child. Not only that, he was the one who showed me the path.”
“That sure sounds like Ojii-sama. He was a good person after all.”
“…..it’s regretful that he’s gone. I wish I could have come sooner.”
“Since he couldn’t get up from his bed for some time now, you don’t have to beat yourself up because
of it. The doctors told me that they couldn’t do anything either. He had been hard at work for a long
time now too, it can’t be helped.”
Charlotte muttered so and sighed.
2113
The cause of his hardship was probably the conflict between the northern nobles and the imperial
family. He had been the one who maintained that dangerous balance alone for all this time. There’s no
way that he can be in good health if he has to keep up with that.
“……can I ask you one thing?”
“Please. Ask me anything.”
“Why did you forgive the rebelled knights? Are they the only knights in your territory?”
“……you know about the war in the North right? Because of that, security has been deteriorating
around here. The knights were posted all over the territory to deal with that. That’s why I forgave
them. And it was my fault too.”
“Yours?”
To think that she would say that it was her fault.
Because I never thought she would say that, I asked her back in surprise.
Without minding my tone, Charlotte nods.
“Yes. it was my fault. Even like this, I am still a super strong mage after all.”
“……..”
“Ahh-, you are doubting me huh. It’s true, okay.”
“I don’t doubt that. I know that you have a great amount of magic power and I also saw the lightning
strike before entering the city too.”
“Yes, yes. That was my magic. But I’m sick……If I was in good condition, something like that would
never have happened.”
That is not necessarily wrong.
If she can easily use such a high-level spell then it wouldn’t be difficult to control the situation.
So they were relying on Charlotte’s power to keep order while dispatching the knights out to maintain
public security huh. That’s why she’s thinking that it was her fault.
Well, I understand her.
But.
“I can’t say that I am impressed with a city that counts a sick person as their fighting force though.”
“My illness is special you see. I am in good condition most of the time. But sometimes I will suddenly
have a seizure. I don’t know when it will happen and sometimes I can quickly recover but there are
2114
times that it lasts for a long time too. I never thought that I would have a seizure right after I shot my
magic…….”
“It’s a good thing we came.”
“Right. Thank you.”
She is probably truly grateful.
I can feel that special feeling from her words.
The attack earlier today didn’t cause any civilian casualties. There were only a few who got injured.
The damage to the houses is also kept to the minimum.
Considering that bandits managed to breach the city, it was probably a miraculous result.
That must be why she is grateful to us.
However, she should not direct such gratitude toward me.
Why is it that the North turned so dangerous in the first place?
It was because Gordon set up his base here and Leo came to deal with him.
The security here is deteriorating because the two armies are glaring at each other. The military
deserters and the opportunist bandits who want to rob supply convoys have become rampant.
Everything is the Imperial Family’s fault.
Charlotte who surely thought so is coldly staring at the city.
“…..if there was damage to the city, I wonder what would happen?”
“Well, maybe another lord will move?”
“Right, Ojii-sama had a lot of connections after all…..but you see, I hate the northern nobles. They had
always pushed everything to Ojii-sama. Even if they start helping us now, I wouldn’t be grateful
toward them.”
“…..then you must hate the Imperial Family even more right?”
“Yes. They might be the people I hate the most in the entire world. They used my grandfather as a
scapegoat for their selfish hatred and waging war in the north. Because of that Ojii-sama was……”
I understand Charlotte’s feelings.
Those feelings should be obvious if you are related to Marquis Zweig.
The northern nobles are one thing but the Imperial Family never rewarded Marquis Zweig.
2115
He was the only one who made an effort to suppress the conflict from happening in the north. Yet,
because of the succession war, an actual war broke out right at his doorstep.
“I hate the Emperor. I hate the princes and princesses. But the one I can not forgive the most is
Gordon.”
“He is the prince that should be the closest to the north after all huh.”
“That’s right! Even so, Gordon never did anything for us! He only thought about how to gain the
Emperor’s favor and when his rebellion failed, he fled to the north and brought war straight toward
us! I will absolutely never forgive him! Even though Ojii-sama had always been…….protecting this
place.”
“I share your sentiment. That was the reason why I wanted to meet the Marquis. I also think that we
can’t leave that prince alone. I thought that I could help him.”
“…..Ojii-sama had been moving quietly. He was writing to all the northern noble houses. It was an
invitation to discuss the problem of the north.”
“As expected of the Marquis huh.”
He didn’t outright say that they should join hands with Leo.
After all, that would strike the nerves of the northern nobles.
As a result, he probably judged that he needed to guide them to arrive at the answer themselves.
“What becomes of the letters now?”
“I kept it.”
“Then, will you finish his work? If you are going to do that then I am willing to cooperate with you.”
It could be said that those letters are Marquis Zweig’s last will.
If we have that, many of the northern nobles will move.
Not to mention that it will have a tremendous effect if his granddaughter is the one who leads the
movement.
However.
“It’s impossible. After all, Ojii-sama didn’t write the letter to the only person that only Ojii-sama can
persuade.”
“…..Duke Lowenstein huh.”
2116
“Yes. if that person doesn’t move then the northern nobles won’t move. Since he’s a stubborn person,
it would be useless to try to convince him. The only one who could do that was only Ojii-sama. But he
is no longer here.”
“Is it impossible for you?”
“It is because it is me that it is impossible. He is not someone that would be convinced to move by his
own grandchild. Besides, I hate my grandfather on that side too.”
“…..what?”
Just now, what did Charlotte just say?”
His own grandchild?
What does she mean?
“Ah, I never introduced myself properly huh. My name is Charlotte von Lowenstein. My father was a
son of Duke Lowenstein and my mother was the daughter of Marquis Zweig.”
So in other words.
She is also Gordon’s cousin.
2117
SPT Chapter 329
Special Thanks go to Double Tap for mercilessly tapping Goal-kun again.
**blush**
ahhhh, I want to play Nioh2….
-Mr.Graverobber
Marquis Zweig’s Will
“Sebas.”
“Right here, sir.”
The next morning.
I summoned Sebas.
It would be suspicious for a leader of a mercenary corp to have a butler so I ordered him to collect
information.
Well, among other things.
Still, what we need right now is information.
“So who exactly is Charlotte?”
“She is the daughter of Duke Lowenstein’s second son, sir. The Duke has three children including two
sons and a daughter. It is already decided that the eldest son will inherit the headship but since he is
sickly and seems unreliable, some say that Lady Charlotte will be the next Duchess of Lowenstein, sir.”
“What about the eldest son’s children?”
“Only one daughter, sir. And she is still quite young as well.”
“…..and Charlotte’s parents?”
“They already passed away, sir. Until three years ago, Lady Charlotte was raised as Marquis Zweig’s
daughter but she was returned to the Lowensteins as per the Marquis’s will.”
Certainly, Marquis Zweig only had one daughter.
The Lowenstein house originally had a spare so they allowed Charlotte to be raised by Marquis Zweig.
Otherwise, Marquis Zweig wouldn’t marry off his daughter.
2118
After all, his line will be cut off.
However, he returned his precious heir to Duke Lowenstein.
He must have done it out of consideration for Charlotte.
“So he wanted to keep Charlotte away because of the slander huh…..”
“It would seem so, sir. Lady Charlotte came over to take care of the Marquis because his conditions
were worsening. Since she was originally his step-daughter, Lady Charlotte is currently in charge of
his house.”
“What of her ability?”
“It is said that she has inherited the talent that earned Duke Lowenstein his second name as the
[Thunder God], sir. According to her reputation, she seems to be quite a talented thunder mage. She
probably is one of the best modern mages in the Empire.”
One of the best of the Empire.
I frowned when I heard that.
Right. After all, the best high-class modern mage of the Empire has just recently passed away.
Noticing my expression, Sebas lowered his head.
“Please forgive me. I was being inconsiderate.”
“I don’t mind. I was just being sentimental. It was my fault for being affected by it.”
What would I do if it hurt my heart every time I remember it?
Will the person who died come back?
Neither Zandra-aneue nor Marquis Zweig will return.
What the living should do is not obsess over the dead.
Something like that should be left out until we can obtain peace.
“—Since Marquis Zweig is already gone, we have no choice but to have Charlotte take his place.”
“Are you sure, sir? It would mean that you will be using Marquis Zweig’s granddaughter though?”
“It’s too late to say that now. Besides, Marquis Zweig probably intended Charlotte to finish his work
from the start too.”
“What do you mean by that?”
2119
“He must have known that he didn’t have long to live. Even so, he didn’t write the most important
letter, the one intended for Duke Lowenstein. That should be what he wrote first but he put it off. He
probably intended to leave the rest to Charlotte.”
It will not be easy for Charlotte to persuade Duke Lowenstein.
However, it is not entirely impossible either.
As the granddaughter as well as the step-daughter of Marquis Zweig who was entrusted to Duke
Lowenstein, she might be able to move his heart.
That’s why Marquis Zweig wrote the letters to all other nobles. As long as Duke Lowenstein is willing
to move, we should be able to unite all the northern nobles.
“The question is whether Charlotte is willing to do that or not.”
“I am against leaving such a huge responsibility to a young lady who just lost her family, sir. We don’t
know when she will collapse.”
“Well, that’s right too. But, she is the granddaughter of Marquis Zweig. That alone should be worth
placing expectations on her.”
With that said, Sebas didn’t object any further.
“What will Schwartz do after this?”
When I was invited to join her at breakfast, Charlotte raised such a question.
What should I do?
The one who should answer that is not me but Charlotte.
“Heading out to the frontline is an option but this is a civil war. If we are on the losing side, it will
affect our subsequent work.”
“Mercenaries also have it hard huh. How about being hired by the Zweig house? We are shorthanded
after all.”
“I don’t mind that but I would hate to be hired without knowing my employer’s future prospects. What
are you planning to do from now on?”
“…….keeping the territory safe, I think.”
“Then what will you do if Prince Leonard loses? Will you lower your knees to the rebels?”
“If it comes to that then we will fight.”
2120
“If you are going to fight anyway, why don’t you join the winning side. Cooperating with Prince
Leonard would provide you a higher chance of winning you know?”
If Leo loses, Gordon will set his sight on the northern nobles who refused his rule.
It is doubtful whether they can beat Gordon who gains momentum from his victory.
Even if Gordon was to exhaust himself defeating Leo, there will be reinforcements from the Dominion
and the United Kingdom.
The northern border is still there because of Leo. if he loses, it will collapse.
After all, the northern nobles couldn’t care less which side they are on.
“I don’t want to join hands with the Imperial Family even if it increases our chance of winning. I think
most northern nobles share the same opinion.”
“It seems to me that some of them already went out to support Prince Leonard though?”
“They are those who have lost their territory or royalists. Those people…….they are pretty smart.”
I can understand from her words.
Charlotte has a firm grasp of the benefits of joining Leo.
However, her feelings are still in the way.
“If Prince Leonards beats Gordon, he will become the only candidate for the throne beside Eric. if you
gain the favor of the next emperor then the north will no longer receive a cold shoulder. That is what
they are probably thinking huh.”
“I know. That’s why they are smart. I’ve heard Prince Leonard’s reputation before. The hero who
saved the south. He seems to be a good person.”
“But his current situation is still inferior. No matter how good a reputation he has, it won’t amount to
anything if he loses.”
“That’s a mercenary-like opinion. For reference, let me ask you a question. What would you do if you
were in my place?”
Charlotte asked.
Her green and reddish-brown eyes are looking at me as if she is trying to test me.
This answer is important. My intuition tells me so.
If I give her a bad answer then I can not get Charlotte’s trust.
On the contrary, if I can give her a good answer, she might come to trust me.
2121
“…..if it was me, I would finish Marquis Zweig’s work.”
“…..you mean to assemble the northern nobles?”
“No. Marquis Zweig wouldn’t want to immediately assemble them. He tried to set up a meeting to form
a discussion. That’s the will of Marquis Zweig.”
“…..but I can’t do it. They will never attend a meeting that Duke Lowenstein does not attend.”
“Then you only have to make him participate.”
“Don’t be crazy. He is not an ordinary old man you know?”
“It seems that Marquis Zweigh thought you could do it though? The reason why he didn’t write that
letter was that he intended to leave it to you. He probably intended to have you persuade Duke
Lowenstein yourself.”
Or perhaps he thought that even with his letter, Duke Lowenstein wouldn’t move.
If he is that stubborn a person then that is certainly possible.
“Ojii-sama was?”
“If you can move Duke Lowenstein then most northern nobles will also move. With that line of
thinking, the first letter he should have written would be a letter to the Duke himself. The fact that
such a letter does not exist means that he wanted to leave it to you.”
“….you are pretty smart too huh. I can’t think that far at all.”
“Even like this, I am still the leader of my men after all. It’s up to you whether you want to believe my
earlier guess or not. But if you want to try to finish his work then I will cooperate with you.”
After I said that, I stood up.
The conversation so far is not bad at all. The rest is up to Charlotte to decide.
When I thought so, I was called from behind.
“Schwartz-san.”
“You don’t have to add an honorific. You are the granddaughter of my benefactor after all. Besides, you
are an aristocrat.”
“Then, Schwartz. Do you…..think that I can finish Ojii-sama’s work?”
“I have never met Duke Lowenstein so I don’t know if it will be successful or not but…..the fact that
you inherited the blood of Marquis Zweig and that you were raised as his stepdaughter will never
change. I envy you. Even I wanted to learn a lot of things from that person as well.”
2122
That is my true feeling.
There were many things I could learn from him.
This person must have learned a lot from Marquis Zweig.
“You are…..really strange. When I hear you say it, it makes me feel like I can really do it.”
“It’s a leader’s job to motivate their subordinates after all.”
“Right…….let me think it over for a few days. Will you stay with us until then?”
“Fine by me.”
“Also…….you can just call me Char as well. We are not that different in age after all.”
With the conversation concluded, Char quickly returned to her room.
2123
SPT Chapter 330
Help! Double Tap is murdering Goal-kun again!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
It is important to Doubt
The night a few days later.
I was thinking of the next move inside my room.
Char still doesn’t give me her reply.
We don’t have much time. If we keep loitering around the enemy will start moving first
“You are making a difficult face again.”
“Whose fault do you think it is?”
I heard a voice.
From the balcony.
When I turned my eyes toward the voice, Char was sitting there on the railing again.
“I will say it just in case, it’s dangerous you know?”
“It’s fine, it’s fine.”
Saying so, Char laughed and started dangling her legs off the railing again.
Such a carefree attitude from someone who could have a seizure at any time.
I went to the balcony and started talking to her.
“Haa…did you come to give your answer?”
“Mostly, yes. But I am here to confirm something too.”
“Confirm what?”
Char nods.
She then started talking about her past nostalgically.
2124
“My parents died when I was little and Ojii-sama took it upon himself to raise me. I learned a lot from
him.”
“That’s enviable.”
“Right? So, Ojii-sama also taught me this——it is important to doubt.”
“……that is certainly something Marquis Zweig would say.”
Doubt can stem from anywhere.
If you are trapped inside it, you will never be able to build a trusting relationship.
However, doubts are certainly important.
After all, the stronger the doubt, the more you can trust if you can resolve it.
“No matter how good someone seems to be, never trust a person that makes you doubt. On the
contrary, no matter how bad a person may seem, if that person can clear your doubts, that person is
worthy of trust. That was what he taught me.”
“I see…..in other words, you have some doubts about me right?”
“Yes. I’ve been asking my grandfather’s aides including the ones that are already retired for the past
few days whether they remember any mercenary corps that Ojii-sama used to help.”
“And their answer is?”
“No one remembers someone like that at all.”
Char’s eyes which were fixed on the starry sky turned to me.
I can see the doubts in her eyes.
If I can not clear it up, I will not be able to earn Char’s trust.
“Who exactly are you? Schwartz.”
A former noble from a faraway country.
When I was deprived of my status, I took my vassals and became a mercenary, that was when Marquis
Zweig had taken care of us.
That was the setting.
It would be easy to lie here but it will only give raises to new doubts instead.
Whether there is someone like that or not, Char has no way to look it up.
I don’t have anything to prove it either. After all, we didn’t prepare any proof.
2125
Marquis Zweig left behind some good lessons.
That’s about right for someone who will become a head of a noble house huh.
Doubt everyone and see how the other party responds. That’s how you measure your opponent.
The other party has to be the one who takes the initiative.
If you want my trust then earn it. If you challenge your opponent like that they will have no choice but
to do their best to gain your trust.
It is difficult to lie without giving birth to more doubt. Especially when the other party is already
suspicious of you.
The troublesome thing is that everything depends on my response.
“If you are not going to say anything then I have nothing to say to you either.”
“….it seems that you properly learned from Marquis Zweig huh.”
“Of course. I intend to succeed him after all.”
That’s right.
This person in front of me is Marquis Zweig’s successor.
She is the granddaughter of Duke Lowenstein but before that, she was Marquis Zweig’s stepdaughter
as well as his successor.
I can’t be dishonest with her, no, lying to her will not work.
“I also have a teacher. I was often told by him that nothing is as fragile as a lie that you have to force
yourself to tell.”
“What does that mean?”
“It means you can not lie to yourself. If you realize that your lie will not work, it would be better to just
raise the white flag.”
My own Jii-san is the man who became Emperor by winning the succession war.
His words have enough convincing power.
People can lie to others all they want but it is not that easy to lie to themselves.
It takes a lot of effort to deceive yourself, if you have your hands full doing that then you won’t be able
to deceive others.
So, if you think it is impossible then don’t do it in the first place.
2126
I will not lie and I don’t want to lie.
I do not want to deceive and I don’t want to be deceived.
When your heart tells you that it is impossible, you should give up on lying.
I slowly lower my hood.
Then I introduce myself to her again.
“I am the 7th Prince of the Empire, Arnold Lakes Adler. Even though I had no other choice, I apologize
for the deception. Lady Charlotte von Lowenstein.”
“……why didn’t you lie? If you wanted to deceive me then you should have done that. You already
know how much I hate the Imperial Family, Why did you choose to give me your name?”
“There may have been a way to deceive you but I thought that it won’t work. As long as that is my true
feeling, I have no choice but to obediently tell you the truth.”
Char’s eyes never leave me.
However, there are no longer doubts in her eyes.
If Char really hates the Imperial Family then I have no hand left to play.
The only choice left would be to forcibly visit Duke Lowenstein by myself. I doubt that it will succeed
but that would still be much easier than deceiving Char here.
“……I’m troubled.”
“With what?”
It is the opposite of when we first talk with each other here.
While having a bitter smile on her face, Char looked up at the starry sky.
“Ojii-sama used to tell me a story about when he helped a prince with black-haired and black eyes.
That is why I have a suspicion that you belong to the Imperial Family.”
“The Marquis was unexpectedly talkative huh.”
“Ojii-sama liked telling old stories but his favorite was the story when he helped out that prince. He
always smiled and told me how much the event touched him while telling it.”
“Is that so…..”
“There are two princes with black hair and eyes in the Imperial Family. You and your twin brother.
Which one of you did Ojii-sama help?”
2127
“Unfortunately, it was me.”
“I see……I would understand why he admired the prince so much if it was Prince Leonard but it was
you who was called the Dull Prince instead huh.”
Char’s words are not malicious.
She only relays the content of her heart.
“Ojii-sama…..after the Crown Prince’s death, he took it upon himself to prevent the country from
dividing. The Imperial Family did nothing. They only use him because he was convenient. That’s why I
hate the Imperial Family.”
“Yes, that is correct.”
I can’t say that I understand it.
Since I belong on the side of the people who wronged her, there is no way that I can understand her
feelings.
I can imagine what it must be like but that is far from understanding it.
Such a pain can only be understood by those who were directly subjected to it or those who have been
around to witness it happen. It is not something that a person who is on the side that inflicting such
pain can understand.
“But…..I still can not forgive Gordon for betraying Ojii-sama’s earnest wish. If we leave things as they
are, Gordon might be able to win. Duke Lowenstein might be fine with that but the Zweig house is
different. I will not allow such a future to exist.”
Char said with a strong and determined voice.
She then got off the railing and stood in front of me.
Her odd eyes are staring right through me.
“What is the chance that we can persuade Duke Lowenstein?”
“50-50. It depends on how much the Duke treasures his house and the north.”
“Our chances are not so bad huh. Alright. The Zweig house will side with you.”
“…..you hate the Imperial Family right?”
“I do. But Ojii-sama taught me that a title is still nothing but a title. I choose to believe in you who I can
see right in front of me rather than judging you by the title of the Imperial family you carry. You have
shown sincerity in response to my doubts. I know that you are a good person. To be honest, at first, I
thought that you will lie until the very end since you are one of the Imperial Family. I was prepared to
strike you with thunder at first……..but you didn’t choose to lie as I thought you would. That’s why I
2128
believe in you. Rather than holding on to the prejudice from your title, I think that I should trust in my
own impression of you.”
Saying so, Char knelt down in front of me.
“One of the 47 clans of the north, the house of Zweig shall be Your Highness’s power. I pledge the
knowledge given to me by Ojii-sama and my thunder to Your Highness.”
“……thank you. And what do you wish for in return?”
“…..I do not mind if it will be after the war but allow me to succeed the title of Marquis Zweig. I can not
have any other family name other than this.”
“I understand. That is a cheap price to pay.”
Marquis Zweig didn’t have any successor.
If he wanted to keep his house alive then he should have adopted an heir but rather than that, he
thought it would be better to leave everything to Char.
The problem is Duke Lowenstein but let’s include this in the negotiation with him as well.
“House Lowenstein also has a deep-rooted grudge against the Imperial Family you know?”
“I know. That’s why I came here personally. If it is about being persecuted then I won’t lose too after
all.”
I said so and showed her a grin.
2129
SPT Chapter 331
Special Thanks to Double Tap with his silent murder rage at the coffee table….
It’s story on Gordon’s side btw…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Gordon’s Subordinates
Eastside of the Empire’s northern region.
Aside from Leo’s army that is fighting in a siege battle on the west side of Gordon’s base, there was an
army facing down Gordon’s at the south.
It was an army that was judged to be trustworthy among the whole Imperial army.
The general of that army is called Harnisch.
He is a young man in his late twenties who was originally an adjutant to General Estman.
During the rebellion in the Imperial Capital, he was involved in the reconstruction of the South and
came to serve under Leo by the recommendation of General Estman.
Including the 3,000 men who served General Estman who is now half-retired due to the loss of one of
his legs, and 10,000 men of his own, he is leading a total of 13,000 soldiers.
Angry at what the rebels did to General Estman who he looks up to as his father, he came out to the
battlefield to take his anger out on Gordon but now he has no choice but to seal his anger.
“Did the enemy make any move?”
“None, sir.”
Harnisch sighed at the unchanging reply and stared at the enemy army.
He wants to go rescue Leo’s main army but the opposing army does not allow that.
The enemy army consisted of 20,000 soldiers.
The general leading that army is Gordon himself.
“He really looked down on us.”
The reason why the enemy supreme commander came out here personally is to say that he is
confident that he can not be defeated by the likes of Harnisch.
2130
He had been tempted to break that prideful attitude many times but he managed to restrain himself.
Gordon might be restraining Harnisch’s army right now but on the contrary, it could be said that
Harnisch is also restraining Gordon.
20,000 enemy soldiers coupled with the enemy’s supreme commander. It’s not so bad if you put it like
that.
Of course, this will not improve the situation. However, the situation will not worsen as well.
“What about the letter?”
“We received another one, sir. This one is signed by Gordon as well.”
“If it was signed by Her Highness Lizelotte then I would have framed it and hung it inside my room
though. Burn it, I have no need for such a letter.”
“Yes, sir.”
He read the first one but he never read any subsequent letters from Gordon.
Gordon stated his wish for Harnisch to join him.
Of course, Harnisch understands why he would wish for that.
Surprisingly, only a few generals of the Imperial Army have joined Gordon’s side. There are still many
armies that can breathe down on Gordon’s neck.
However, most of them chose a wait-and-see approach. After all, Gordon failed his attempted rebellion
at the Imperial Capital.
Whether to jump on board with Gordon when he already missed his greatest opportunity. That was
the question that made many generals hesitate.
The Emperor is aware of that. That’s why he only sent the trustworthy generals to the frontline.
However, if Harnisch switches over to Gordon’s side, the momentum will change.
If Harnisch, who originally didn’t belong to Gordon’s faction, chooses to join his side, it will indicate
that Gordon has the advantage. All the generals that sway toward Gordon’s side will choose to join
him.
That was Gordon’s aim.
“Hmph, ridiculous.”
Harnisch suspects that it is a suggestion from the influential noble on Gordon’s side.
2131
After all, Gordon’s army is only blocking his path to join Leo’s main army but not cut off his
withdrawal route.
Even if they can’t come to an agreement, the momentum will still change if they can get him to
withdraw.
After all, withdrawing here means abandoning Leo.
How shrewd.
It is a strategy that can not be done without political skills. One that is aware of their own advantages.
If this is prolonged, it will only be harder on Leo’s side.
The alliance with the Sokol empire will not be finalized anytime soon either. After all, the Sokol empire
has nothing to gain in this.
Moreover, it is Eric who is in charge of negotiating the alliance. Harnisch can’t think of any reason why
Eric would help Leo at all.
“Damn you Duke Horsvath. He just keeps injecting something unnecessary into Gordon’s head.”
Harnisch curses the name of the noble who currently should be at Gordon’s side while glaring at the
enemy army.
“There is no movement in the enemy army, Your Highness Gordon.”
“Hmph! I thought as much.”
At Gordon’s camp.
There, a brown-haired middle-aged man is making his report to Gordon. The man with his
characteristic calm and cold atmosphere was Rolf von Horsvath.
The family head of the prestigious Horsvath ducal house.
During the rebellion at the Imperial Capital, he chose Gordon’s side.
In this succession war, Rolf has set himself up with the Gordon faction while sending his second son to
Eric faction as insurance.
It doesn’t matter to him which one of them wins.
The Horsvath house will be able to maintain its status.
However, during the rebellion, he decided to bet on Gordon and took both his eldest son Gied and
second son Reiner with him to join Gordon.
2132
Seeing that Rolf had chosen Gordon, many nobles followed him. As a result, Rolf has a solid position in
the Gordon faction.
Together with the knights under the command of his aristocrat followers, he possesses a sizable force
and Gordon also respects his opinion.
That’s why Gordon followed Rolf’s plan even though it was a roundabout plan that Gordon dislikes.
“Duke Horsvath. It appears that William allowed the enemy to replenish their supply, do you think
that we can still maintain this carefree attitude?”
“The situation hasn’t changed, Your Highness. Even with all the supplies he received, all Prince
Leonard can do is stay on the defensive. No matter how long he can hold out unless the situation
changes, there will be no alliance with the Sokol empire.”
“You are saying that no reinforcement will come no matter how long he endured?”
“Exactly, Your Highness. And over time, more and more generals will convert to our side. His Highness
William has also succeeded in seizing the enemy’s prototype weapon in exchange for allowing them to
resupply. We have already begun analysis on it. Time is on our side.”
Gordon nods at Rolf’s reasoning.
He wanted to crush the army in front of him immediately but he can’t help but let that desire go.
No matter how long it takes, he must guarantee his victory.
Gordon is now hungry for a win.
Knowing that, Rolf proposed an endurance battle. With the Empire being surrounded by enemy
nations, the worst thing that can happen is the prolongation of this civil war.
“Come to think of it, His Highness Henrick has submitted a request to be dispatched again.”
“Henrick huh……do you think he will betray us?”
“I wonder about that. Since he is the younger brother of Her Highness Zandra, it might be in his
nature. However, he already has no place in the Empire. I doubt that he has the courage to betray us.”
“I agree. Conrad and Mother are acting separately from us after all. We do not have enough pawns. It
would be bad to carelessly use one.”
“Then, how about we give him command of a unit?”
“Right. William will need reinforcements. I will appoint him as a commander. Let him take your eldest
son with him.”
“As you wish. What about my second son, Reiner, Your Highness?”
2133
“That one is excellent. We need him to take care of domestic affairs in Wismar so leave him there.”
“Yes, sir.”
Finished giving his orders, Gordon stands up.
After all, he knows that the enemy army will never move.
“I am going to sleep. Don’t wake me up unless necessary.”
“As you wish.”
Rolf said and reverently bowed.
While thinking that his gesture looked nothing but shady, Gordon ignored him.
No matter how much he doubts Rolf, he is still usable.
It’s fine if Rolf chooses to betray him as well.
When the time comes he only needs to crush it.
Even if Rolf betrayed him, Gordon’s dominance in the north will not change.
“I still have a trump card to play after all.”
While muttering so, Gordon gets ready to sleep.
2134
SPT Chapter 332
Now back to Al.
-Mr.Graverobber
‐San
“Schwartz-san. I’ve finished handing the letter to the lord here.”
We were heading to Duke Lowenstein’s territory together with Char.
It would take too long to send the letter to each northern nobles after persuading Duke Lowenstein, so
Char decided to hand the letter to each of them on our way to Duke Lowenstein’s territory.
For the lords whose territory is far away, we dispatch some of the Narbe Ritter to deliver the letter.
They are entrusted with Marquis Zweig’s letter as well as Char’s personal letter.
The content of her letter is that she is on her way to persuade Duke Lowenstein. If Duke Lowenstein
moved, she wanted them to agree to a meeting as per Marquis Zweig’s letter. Those lords will now pay
close attention to the movement of Duke Lowenstein. They should leave their territory and approach
Duke Lowenstein’s territory. With that being the case, it will not be difficult to convene the meeting of
the northern nobles.
Well, that is fine and all but……
“Why are you using -san again? You don’t need to add honorifics while referring to me..”
“…….”
Only me and Char are inside the room.
I understand that she can’t call me Arnold but I couldn’t understand why she chose to add -san to my
name again.
“Is that an order? Your Highness.”
“You really hate the Imperial Family huh. And yes, I don’t want you to add honorifics when calling me.”
“…..then I apologize for my rudeness. I decided to trust you and bent my knees but getting along with
you is still an entirely different matter. I still hate the Imperial Family after all.”
“Didn’t you say that you won’t judge me based on my title?”
“The crisis we are facing does affect the entirety of the North so I will not judge you by your title but
my personal feeling is still a different matter.”
2135
With that said, Char had an indescribable expression on her face.
It looks like a mix of disgust and friendliness.
I can understand that her heart is still in conflict with that alone.
“I see. I still want to get along with you though?”
“Impossible. You would find it a pain to eat something you don’t like right?”
“It should be fun to overcome that though?”
“It is still troublesome to force someone to eat what they don’t like, right?”
“Certainly.”
Char already has her conclusion
Since she can’t erase her disgust toward the Imperial Family, she decided to stay a distance away from
me
A person who knows that and tries to shorten that distance must be troublesome for her
Still, since we are going to persuade Duke Lowenstein together, it wouldn’t do if the relationship
between us is weak
If I couldn’t get along with Char then it would be impossible to persuade Duke Lowenstein
“But not getting along with you would negatively impact our chance of persuading Duke Lowenstein
right”
“I can put up an act”
“He will surely see through you. So, why don’t we put in some effort to get along with each other?”
“……what do you have in mind?”
Char sat down in the chair while squinting her eyes at me, her unpleasant mood exuded from her
entire body.
It seems that at least she is willing to cooperate.
At least the first barrier is down huh.
“For the time being, let me confirm one thing. What do you hate about the Imperial Family?”
“Your blood. I can’t even stand someone who has the blood of the Imperial Family.”
“You get right down to business huh……”
2136
As expected, there is nothing I can do about my bloodline.
She rejected my whole being from the start.
Still, I am not someone who would give up just because of that.
I took off the hood I was wearing and lightly brushed my hair up.
“There aren’t many black-haired emperors. The reason why I have black hair is that my mother is
from the east.”
“So?”
“If we are talking about blood then I am a half commoner myself since my mother was one. I only have
a few qualities of someone that belong to the Imperial Family. Since the characteristics of the blood
you loath so much don’t appear on me, it is the same as I don’t possess that blood.”
“But you still belong to the Imperial Family right?”
“I am not proud about it and I’ve rarely been treated like a prince. Among my brothers and sisters, I
am the only one who got thrown in jail as a child you know.”
“I don’t think that is something that you should brag about though……”
Char sighs astoundedly.
Of all the members of the Imperial Family, I am the farthest from being treated like one. Even if she
says that she dislikes me because I belong to the Imperial Family, I have almost no such
characteristics.
Even I can’t wrap my head around such an argument myself.
“How about it? Do you still think I am one of the Imperial Family?”
“I do.”
“…..why?”
“But you are one right. There are people who would treat you as one after all.”
“……I have childhood friends who tried to kill me several times with wooden swords you know. For
argument’s sake, they are supposed to be my vassals too though……..”
“That’s surprising, so no one tried to stop them even though you were about to get killed……”
Char’s words made me smile.
The adults around me pretty much all have a non-interference policy.
2137
They never get in the way of the children.
“I didn’t say anything after all. Besides if I exercised my privileges as a prince, I wouldn’t be able to
establish an equal friendship too.”
“…….so you just silently accepted it? Was that how Ojii-sama helped you?”
“That’s right. I could have told my father that I was being bullied but at worst, the ones who have low
standing might even receive a death sentence. It’s scary, right? Childish bullying between children can
even result in the death penalty. That’s why I didn’t say anything. At that time, Marquis Zweig helped
me. He said that he understood what I was doing and was touched by it. It made me really happy.”
“……so you’ve been so adult-like since you were a kid huh. If it was me I would already cry to my
parents. I wouldn’t think about what could happen after that at all.”
“I have no shortage of role models after all. In that sense, I might have benefited from being a member
of the Imperial Family.”
As a child.
I had my eldest brother and Lize-aneue around me.
They set the example of what being an Imperial Family member should be like.
So I was able to embody that in my own way. That was all there was to it.
“You…..really are not like someone who belongs to the Imperial Family. Even so…..you are still one of
the people who abandoned Ojii-sama.”
“Right, I can not erase that fact. But that was exactly why I came to him. I thought that I finally got the
chance to repay him after all.”
“Repay him?”
“That’s right. The Imperial Family has an inerasable debt toward Marquis Zweig. After the death of the
Crown Prince, the Empire was shaken. We had so many things to do that we were short on hand. At
that time, It was Marquis Zweig who appeared and solved the problem of the North for us. It was
convenient. That’s why we didn’t do anything. I am not trying to justify it. After all, the Imperial Family
had taken advantage of his feelings toward the North and used him.”
“That’s quite a way to say it……”
“It is the truth that will not change. My father made a cold decision and didn’t give the Marquis
anything in return. I think that I should have done something earlier. Still, I kept putting it off. That
will never change. However, I should be able to repay him with what I am about to do. A debt is
something that is meant to be repaid after all.”
“…….the one who abandoned Ojii-sama was the Emperor, not you.”
2138
“Just like you who want to succeed Marquis Zweig, I am the son of that Emperor. Moreover, I am also a
part of the Imperial Family. That should be enough of a reason for me. As a member of the Imperial
Family, I will repay the debt that my father built up. First, I will unite all of the Northern Nobles. After
all, the ones who can save the north are only the clans of the North themselves.”
I and the Northern Nobles are similar.
I had put up with the bullying to protect the noble children.
The Northern Nobles endured the cold treatment to protect the northern region.
They could have protested as much as they wanted but they chose to only take their distance. They
could have touched on the topic of the Crown Prince’s death as well.
Still, the topic of his death was too sensitive at the time. If they have done that, the situation now
might even be worse than this.
That’s why they stayed silent and endured. To not turn the north into a battlefield.
It is because they are like that that we can rely on them in a situation like this.
“Don’t people often call you a weird person?”
“I am often told that.”
“Right. Whether you belong to a noble house or the Imperial Family, your way of thinking is still
strange. Even though you said that people rarely treated you like a prince…….why are you still saying
that you have to fulfill the obligations of the Imperial Family?”
“Even you have been removed from the position of Marquis Zweig’s successor right. Even so, you still
choose to inherit his work. Why?”
“I just thought that I should do it.”
“My answer is the same. Positions and titles might help you make a decision but it doesn’t mean that
they can determine everything. It is up to us to decide. I am here right now because I think that I must
fulfill my obligations as a part of the Imperial Family. How people treated me in the past has nothing
to do with that, no?”
Even if people continue to call me the Dull Prince, it is up to me to decide whether I want to fulfill my
obligations or not.
I was raised that way.
Everything is my responsibility.
“……in the end, a title is only a title. Right now, I think can understand the true meaning of those
words.”
2139
Said Char as she stood up and tried to leave the room.
I stopped her.
“Char. My nickname is Al, will you call me that?”
“…..I will call you that when you manage to repay your debt. Until then, you are Schwartz.”
Char leaves the room after saying so.
It is still strange to call our relationship a friendly one but it is at least better than her using -san to call
me.
Still.
“If Char is this tough then it seems that I will have a much harder time with Duke Lowenstein huh.”
I sighed and leaned back on my chair.
2140
SPT Chapter 333
3 3 3 hehe, nice.
Special Thanks Double Tap again for preping me for Hu Tao…..there will be pain……..
-Mr.Graverobber
Duke Lowenstein
At the center of the Lowenstein’s territory.
The city of Alla.
It is the largest city in the north and is its de facto center.
We are currently at a big mansion located in the center of that city.
“Charlotte-sama. Please kindly wait here. Duke Lowenstein is currently attending a meeting.”
“I understand.”
Char nodded to the butler without any complaints.
Seeing that, I muttered in surprise.
“He is prioritizing a meeting over his own granddaughter huh.”
“Ojii-sama is that kind of person. He doesn’t mix personal business and his work. As long as the
Imperial Family isn’t involved, I might be able to arrange something though.”
“You sure said it.”
“You should abandon that optimism of yours. If you got found out, you might get a bolt of lightning
flying your way you know. Make no mistake, he will kill you.”
“Don’t say such a scary thing now…….”
“I’m not kidding okay. He is the kind of person that will seriously do it. If you want to reveal your
identity then I recommend you choose the timing wisely.”
I give her a nod.
Although I have dealt with many people who ridiculed me as the Dull Prince, I have little experience
dealing with people who hold a grudge against me.
That is how strong the Imperial Family is in the Empire.
2141
There is no need to remind me not to let my guard down.
My opponent this time is the [Thunder God] of Lowenstein.
I have met him once before. I briefly spoke to him at the feast of my tenth birthday celebration. I can
still remember how intense he was.
Despite being an heir to a ducal house, he joined the army and climbed to the rank of general with his
magical ability.
He is a veteran general who fought numerous battles and contributed greatly to the expansion of the
Empire.
His battle record remains undefeated. Using the personal army of house Lowenstein together with the
soldiers of the Imperial Army, it could be said that his force was never inferior to that of the enemy’s
both in terms of quality and quantity. Still, it is undeniable that his record is still extraordinary.
It is different from saying that the Emperor never lost a battle. A battle in which a general and an
emperor head out to is different in the first place. The Emperor does not appear in battles that post
high-risk of losing moreover, he is always accompanied by the Imperial Knights. It is much more
difficult for an emperor to lose a battle.
He is currently the only person in the Empire to outperform Lize-aneue in terms of battle records.
When he is far from the frontline, he shows his capability as a wise general and when he personally
engages the enemy army, he shows everyone that he is more than capable to lead his men out
personally.
A general with both wisdom and courage.
That is the Duke of Lowenstein.
“Are you nervous?”
“I don’t know. But I do think that it would be bad if I fail here.”
“……if Ojii-sama gets angry then I will protect you. At the very least, I should be able to stall him.”
“I will count on you if the time comes.”
When I smiled at her, Char’s eyes went round and she immediately frowned at me.
She probably thinks that I am being optimistic huh.
“As I thought, you really are a weird person.”
“You think so?”
2142
“Among the current Imperial Family, do you know anyone who has enough spirit to stand up against
my grandfather?”
“Who knows. Well, if a person comes to mind then it would be Lize-aneue, I think?”
Whether it be Eric or Leo, they would have a problem if they have to face him alone. They will never
rely on their guts alone and will definitely face him with an escort.
While I was thinking that far, Char let out a sigh.
“I am confident that the Princess General wouldn’t lose to him but what about you?”
“I have my confidence too.”
“What kind of confidence?”
“The confidence that you will protect me. I’m counting on you.”
“Haa…..you don’t even consider the possibility that I am going to stand by and do nothing?”
“But you will protect me right?”
“What if I just gave you some empty words?”
“If it is like that then I will just accept my fate and chalk it up as I don’t have eyes for people. Even
Duke Lowenstein wouldn’t suddenly murder a prince right. He will probably let me off with an arm or
two.”
Char frowned at my words.
She tries to say something again but the butler returned before she could.
“The meeting has concluded, my lady. This way please.”
“!?”
“You are not going?”
“I am going. Just stay behind me. Never leave my side okay?”
“Yes, yes.”
I replied as I shrugged my shoulders.
We were guided to a large audience room.
This room is probably the one you use to convey your request to the lord.
2143
And waiting back inside the room was.
A red-haired old man sitting on a chair.
His big-frame body resembles Gordon and like a former general he is, his back is straight.
His sharp red eyes were looking at Char first and then me.
This old man is Duke Victor von Lowenstein, the person who was nicknamed Thunder God.
“I, Charlotte, have come to greet you, Ojii-sama.”
“—-good work. Did Marquis Zweig say anything at the end?”
“No…….”
“I see……he can be so cruel. Even though we had a promise that we would have a drink together.”
Saying so, Duke Lowenstein closed his eyes.
He must be reminiscing the memory of Marquis Zweig.
After all, he was his ally who supported the north for the longest time.
Their children got married and they finally became relatives. If not for this situation, Duke Lowenstein
probably would have visited the Marquis to see him off himself.
Probably understanding that, the vassals in the audience room also stay silent.
“……is your body doing fine?”
“Yes. I had a seizure but it was nothing serious.”
“I see. That is good to hear.”
“Ojii-sama, there is actually someone I would like to introduce to you. At the funeral of Marquis Zwig, a
group of bandits invaded the city. When I could not handle the situation because of my seizure, this
Schwartz and his mercenaries helped us deal with them. He has a debt of gratitude with Marquis
Zweig and he has taken care of me.”
“Hou?”
The Duke said so and paid his attention to me.
In response, I lower my head and greet him.
“It is my pleasure meeting you. My name is Schwartz.”
“I see. You have taken care of my granddaughter huh.”
2144
“No, I have owed a great deal of gratitude to Marquis Zweig. I visited him thinking that it was my
chance to repay it but I couldn’t make it in time. I want to repay that favor to Lady Charlotte instead.”
“That’s a good heart you got there. So? Was it your suggestion that Charlotte has been sending letters
to each and every noble here?”
Duke Lowenstein’s gaze turned sharp.
When she saw that, Charlotte hurriedly comes to my defense.
“O, Ojii-sama! That was all my doing! Marquis Zweig believed that every noble of the north should find
a way out of this conflict together. For that sake, he had written letters to every noble to invite them to
a meeting!”
“I see. So, is there a letter addressed to me?”
“No……he decided that I should be the one who personally persuades Ojii-sama.”
“Marquis Zweig really knows me well huh. No matter what he writes to me, I will not move. That’s
why he decided to entrust that to you huh, Charlotte. I can understand that……I understand it but it’s a
failure since you brought along a mouse to persuade me.”
“Schwartz is only an escort. I will be the one who-!”
“That’s not it. Seriously, it seems you have looked down on me huh. A pleasure meeting me? Don’t
make me laugh. Didn’t every noble of the Empire have the pleasure to meet you already on your tenth
birthday? I have already met you back then. I have even personally held you in my arms when you
were a baby you know?”
Saying so, Duke Lowenstein stands up from his chair.
The atmosphere immediately turned heavy.
Even his aides are having cold sweat.
“Hmph…..I never thought that I would be found out so quickly.”
“If you wanted to hide your identity then you should have tried hiding those eyes. It’s the same eyes
that the guy who robbed away my daughter only to strengthen his bloodline had. I can tell with a
single glance. No one hates the eyes of that man as much as me after all!”
Duke Lowenstein’s voice turned to a roar.
While listening to his roaring voice, I stood up and took down my hood.
“I will apologize for the deception. I didn’t want to get killed you see.”
“Hmph! You have grown to be quite a bold man huh? That attitude and that way of speaking, it’s the
exact same as the Emperor when he was still young you know?”
2145
“We are parent and child after all. I never thought that you would recognize me since it has been a
long time since we last met. And it was supposed to be a light greeting too…..it is truly something, that
grudge against the Imperial Family of yours.”
“So you came to talk even though you already know that? Arnold Lakes Adler!”
Said Duke Lowenstein as he immediately identified me.
2146
SPT Chapter 334
Special Thanks to Double Tap who splendidly fell to the cliff last sunday
HoHoHoHo
-Mr.Graverobber
Forged Letters
That was surprising.
And it wasn’t about how he immediately recognized me as a prince. I already expected him to be able
to tell that much. I am not so naive to think that he would be so easily deceived.
What surprised me was how he correctly identified who I am.
“Was there an information leak? I am supposed to be sleeping at the Imperial Capital though?”
“It is just a guess. Before the battle truly began in the north, your younger brother came to visit me.
Secretly with only a few Imperial Knights accompanying him that is.”
“I see. So you recognized me from Leo’s face huh.”
“There is that too. But it was your brother who said that if the war goes on, his elder brother will come
to me. He said that he will leave it to you to persuade me when the time comes. That’s why I can tell
right away.”
“He sure said some extra thing…….”
I sighed and crumpled my hair.
I’m not surprised that Leo was here before me. Rather, it is a given. After all, Duke Lowenstein has that
important of a position.
However, I was surprised that he told the Duke I would come.
Certainly, the longer the war, the higher the probability that visiting the Duke would be included in my
course of actions.
Considering the members of the Imperial Family left in the capital, it can be predicted that I would be
the one who will be dispatched to the north.
However, it was impossible to certainly predict that I will come to persuade Duke Lowenstein here.
2147
After all, there is a possibility that I would just lead out the army from the Imperial Capital or that Leo
is not even at a disadvantage in the first place.
So it was not a prediction based on the situation at the time. It was the result of thinking about what
he would do if he was me.
He knows that I dislike leading a large force.
He knows that I don’t want to leave the problem of the Northern Nobles alone.
After all, if we leave the problem of the North as it is it will only be an ember for future problems after
we win the war.
That’s why he thought that I will definitely try to solve the problem of the North in one go. With that
line of thinking, persuading Duke Lowenstein is inevitable.
Even if he is my own younger brother, he sure understands me well.
“That Hero Prince seemed to be confident that you can persuade me but if you rely on a disguise like
that then I guess I can’t expect much from you huh.”
“I was only hiding my identity to hide my existence from the enemy. It has nothing to do with
persuading you.”
“Hou? Then what kind of bargain have you brought to my table? You came all the way here with my
granddaughter, don’t think I will just let you go back to the capital if you bring out some boring deal
alright?”
The duke said as thunder crackled from his body and struck the floor.
It seems he doesn’t like the idea of me using Char to approach him huh.
Well, that much is obvious.
Judging from his words, the root of his grudge against the Imperial Family was how we took away his
daughter. It wouldn’t be strange for him to be protective of his granddaughter.
“Don’t think I will just let you go back to the capital, huh…….I have no intention of heading back to the
capital without attending to the problems in the north. You said that I looked down on you? Let me
repeat that back to you then. My own younger brother is fighting right now, I have no plan to run
away by myself. Also, as a member of the Imperial Family, I will not neglect the problem of the north
any longer. Don’t underestimate me too much. Even if people call me the Dull Prince, I am still a prince
of this nation.”
Duke Lowenstein listened and sat back on his chair.
His eyes were even sharper than before.
2148
“What Dull Prince. You were only pretending to be incompetent right? Your father was the same. He
pretended to be lazy about everything and gradually showed his claws in the succession war. It is
extremely difficult to be on guard against someone who you are so used to look down on. His
opponents were defeated without being able to see his full ability. You give off the same smell as he
did you know?”
“My father, Emperor Johannes had the ambition to ascend the emperor’s throne. That was the reason
he hid his claws. But I am different. I can not protect my family unless I enter the succession war with
my brother. That’s why we joined the succession war in the first place. If not for the succession war, I
would have continued to be the Dull Prince and I have no problem with that at all.”
“If there was no succession war, you would choose to continue being ridiculed for the rest of your life?
Don’t make me laugh.”
“Exactly. At the very least, I think I have proven that for 10 years already.”
Father was hiding his abilities to take the throne. He was not like me who had no such ambition and
ended up not showing my abilities.
Father had a clear purpose while I didn’t.
It would be rude to my father to compare myself to him.
“Hmph, whatever. So you are saying that you unwillingly participated in the succession war? That this
is no place for others to see your abilities? Don’t you think that this is the opportunity to make those
who looked down on you kneel before you instead?”
“You are correct. Besides, I do not enjoy making others kneel to me in the first place. I am not exactly
like the old men of the previous generation you see.”
“……to take a knee is an ancient tradition. It has a deep meaning to it.”
“Proof of loyalty, proof of heartfelt gratitude. I am well aware of those meanings. It is exactly because I
am aware of its meaning that I do not wish for it. When you force another person to kneel before you
through a show of force, what meaning does it have? If the person kneels before me out of recognition
then I will gladly accept it but if that is not the case then it will only make me feel sick instead.”
“……despite being a part of the Imperial Family, you can still make some sense huh. Souls do not dwell
in meaningless actions. If you already understand that then what are you trying to do by persuading
me? To save your younger brother?”
It seems that I gained a little of his recognition.
If he kept testing me as he was, I would never be able to get down to the main topic.
This is good.
2149
“Of course, there is that too. Leo is needed for the future of the Empire. I know that there are people
who ridicule his idealism. He certainly still has many shortcomings. Still, there is no future for an
Emperor who can not go through with his ideal.”
“……for the Empire huh.”
Disappointment appears on Duke Lowenstein’s face.
He probably didn’t expect such a mundane answer.
He averted his eyes away as though there is no worth listening to me anymore.
At that moment, I continued to speak.
“That’s why—–I will not leave the problems as is. I want the Empire under Leo’s rule to be
better…..that’s why I decided to solve the problems of the north.”
“…….the Imperial Family is always like this. Misleading its vassals with nothing but words that are
only pleased to the ear.”
“That’s right. That is what it means to stand on top of people. We mislead people and make them
dream. That’s the role of the people who stand on top. After all, people can not live without dreams.”
“People can’t live without dreams? That might be true. But you can not live with your dream alone.”
“I understand that too. That’s why the Emperor assembled talented people at his side. To realize the
dream he has envisioned. It is not an emperor’s job to solve problems.”
Leo left this to me.
That’s why I can not fail.
After all, Leo didn’t even have it in his mind that I would.
If I can’t do this much for him then I can’t retain my dignity as his older brother.
“And you are saying that you are one of those talented people? If you do then answer me! How will
you solve the problems of the north!? If we side with the Emperor’s side now we will only be punished
for being too slow to act! We have no path left! Just what do you expect us to do in this situation!?”
“That is not really the case. [You have already made your move after all].”
Unable to understand the meaning of my words, Duke Lowenstein looks at me suspiciously.
In response, I muttered a name with a grin.
“Sebas.”
“Right here, sir.”
2150
Sebas appeared behind me without producing any sound.
I extended my hand out toward him and he handed me a bundle of papers in return.
“After the war, the people of the Empire will probably think this. ‘It’s impossible for the Dull Prince to
suddenly raise a military achievement like that’. It is as you said. It is extremely difficult to be on guard
against someone who you are so used to look down on. Reputation works the same way. That’s why
no one will believe in what I achieved.”
“People are like that. But if you keep repeating such achievements then they will have no choice but to
recognize you.”
“That’s right. But I don’t want them to recognize me. I came to like the nickname of the Dull Prince you
see.”
When I said that, I handed the bundle of papers to Duke Lowenstein’s aide.
The aide then handed it to the duke.
“These are….letters?”
“That’s right. [It’s the letters from you to me].”
“…..you bastard……! You are planning to give all the credit to me!?”
“As expected of the Duke. You saw right through it.”
“What do you mean……?”
Char asked with a confused expression.
Seeing that, the Duke roughly opened the letter and read it.
He then showed it to Char while sharply gazing at me.
“This is……!? Ojii-sama’s handwriting!?”
“Naturally, that wasn’t written by me. But it was elaborately forged. No one besides me would be able
to tell that it is fake.”
“My butler is quite skilled at forging letters you see.”
“It has been a long time but these are my masterpieces, sir. I’m so glad that there were so many
samples in Deuce.”
What I ordered Sebas to do in Deuce was to gather information and forge a letter with Duke
Lowenstein’s handwriting.
2151
There were many letters that the Duke had exchanged with Marquis Zweig inside the vault of his
mansion.
If it was impossible for Sebas then I would have done it myself but with so many samples, he managed
to do something about it. After all, Sebas became quite good at imitating others’ handwriting from his
old profession.
“Transport the supply with Large Flying Dragons, the enemy supply base is inside the
mountains……..these are all instructions?”
“That’s right. Prince Leonard’s main army was locked in a siege battle. To combat that, the 6th
Imperial Knight Corp who came to the north as reinforcements conducts a supply transport operation.
They managed to deliver a lot of supply from the sky and the only one on the enemy side who could
respond appropriately was the Dragon Prince.”
“That’s……”
“Considering the situation, the only one who could come up with such a strange strategy would be this
prince. But now he is saying that he is willing to hand over all the credit to us.”
“Since Duke Lowenstein is a big presence in the north, if he moves personally, he will alert the enemy.
He has been working for the Emperor and the Empire from the beginning. Ever since I came to the
north, he has contacted me through Sebas and gave me precise instructions to pull off the operation.
With this, not only for his future merits he will also gain credit for everything that has happened so
far. There is no need to worry about any punishment anymore.”
Some may feel uncomfortable about this.
But with the letter and my testimony as evidence, no one would bother to complain about it.
“That was why you visited Deuce first?”
“I was going to talk to Marquis Zweig about this strategy. In the end, I couldn’t make it in time but
Marquis Zweig was also planning a meeting with the other northern nobles. He probably wouldn’t say
no to my plan. That’s why I went with it. I have to apologize to you for not telling you beforehand,
Char. I’m sorry.”
“That’s fine but…….with this letter, everything you did would……..”
“I have no need for such credits. I’m not interested in it in the first place. I will not let anyone say that
the northern nobles were uncooperative. Your achievements are the achievements of the northern
nobles. You can protect both the north and your house with this. Of course, it is up to you to decide
what you want to do from now on.”
That was the path I showed to Duke Lowenstein.
2152
SPT Chapter 335
Special Thanks to Double Tap and LessDark bullying Goal-kun again…..may he rest in peace.
-Mr.Graverobber
Reason for the Stubbornness
“I can protect both the north and my house huh…….”
Duke Lowenstein muttered and touched the armrest of his chair.
I showed him my hand.
Considering the situation, the duke should accept my proposal.
Initially, the northern nobles as a whole did not side with Leo. There was bad blood between them and
the Imperial Family so even if there were some that went out to help him, there were still some bad
feelings lingering around.
Gordon lost his momentum with his defeat in the Imperial Capital. Still, our initial plan to combat him
was to surround him and lock him into a battle of endurance. With that being the case, all the
achievements will go to Lize-aneue who will march to the north later.
They have no reason to participate in the war if they can not gain credit. Many of the northern nobles
used many excuses to decline Leo’s request to participate in the war at first because Leo has the
advantage at the time.
However, the situation has completely changed.
While they were declining his request, William rebuilt Gordon’s force, Leo was cornered, and they lost
the timing to participate.
Moreover, the cause of Leo getting cornered was the rout of the few northern nobles who had joined
Leo.
It is obvious that they might get punished for their delay which led to the Emperor’s side
disadvantage.
That’s why the northern nobles did not move.
However, with my proposal, the story will turn to one that the northern nobles have been moving to
support the Emperor in secret.
With this, their delay will not be a problem and it is possible to cancel out their failure.
2153
After that, if they lend us their power to defeat Gordon, they will be able to build a huge debt to the
Imperial Family. There is no doubt that their treatment will be much more favorable in the future.
“Looks like everything went according to your plan huh?”
“Not at all. If everything went according to plan then I would still be sleeping in the Imperial Capital
after all.”
I am here against my will.
When I told him that, the Duke mockingly smiled at me.
“What an irresponsible man. You are saying that you are not even willing to talk to me personally in
the first place?”
“Of course. I wouldn’t come to the north unless Leo was in trouble.”
The duke squinted at my words.
Seeing that, I shrugged.
After all, I just gave him what he wanted to hear.
“Since your brother is in trouble, you want to help him no matter what. Is that right?”
“Exactly.”
“And it requires our power to do that. Which means we have the advantage here.”
“You think that you have a future with Gordon?”
“I will not rely on such a tyrant. But the Dragon Prince of the United Kingdom is quite capable. If he
presents me with a peace treaty with the north then cooperating with him is not so bad.”
“Instead of Gordon, you are willing to listen to the Dragon Prince huh.”
It is not an impossible plan.
If he truly dislikes the Imperial Family then leaving the Empire is one of the options.
Fortunately for them, the United Kingdom has allowed the Dominion to keep its autonomy. With the
same agreement, they should be able to rule over the north.
If all the northern nobles turned, the northern border would disappear. The army of the Dominion and
the United Kingdom will march south undisturbed. The situation will completely change again.
Still, Duke Lowenstein probably will not choose that plan.
If the situation turns to that, the Empire will no longer care about appearance.
2154
A non-aggression pact will be signed with the Sokol empire under some unfavorable conditions and
Lize-aneue will march north.
If that still can not handle the situation then even the use of the holy sword might be considered.
If that happens, the North will be thoroughly destroyed. After all, it will become the frontline where
large armies collide.
The northern nobles who have endured the cold treatment for the sake of the north so far would not
consider that as an option.
They may no longer have any loyalty toward the Imperial Family but they have not lost their pride in
protecting their territory and people.
If they have already lost that pride then would have joined Gordon’s side by now.
He only promoted his advantage to negotiate with me advantageously.
Looks like he won’t easily accept the proposal huh.
“What do you want in return?”
“Nothing.”
“That is strange. If you hope for nothing then why did you bring up negotiating with the Dragon
Prince?”
“I am just saying that I will not let everything go your way.”
“I have proposed to you a method that causes the least damage to the north and its people though?
What are you dissatisfied with?”
While listening, the Duke’s eyes kept on observing me.
There is suspicion in his eyes.
The Duke still doesn’t trust me so the negotiation is not concluded yet.
If I can not somehow gain his trust then this negotiation will not be settled.
Originally, I planned to have Marquis Zweig intervene here since he already has the Duke’s trust. It
really hurt since I can’t use that plan now.
“What I am dissatisfied with is you. I can not trust the Imperial Family, let alone a prince who
resembles the Emperor so much like you.”
“You think I will go back on my word?”
2155
“The Imperial Family has already betrayed me once. I allowed my daughter to marry the Emperor as
insurance in case something happens to the north. And what has become of that? We were unjustly
blamed and treated coldly for the death of the Crown Prince!”
“That is certainly a sin of the Imperial Family. Even so, the Emperor had a lot on his plate at the time.
You should know well how he had no choice but to leave the problem of the north alone at the time,
Duke.”
At that time, Father had already begun the preparation for his abdication.
However, the heir he was delegating his power to suddenly passed away. Father had to work hard to
bring the Empire under his rule again.
Of course, somewhere in his heart was a resentment toward the north since they couldn’t rescue the
Crown Prince in time.
That’s why he wasn’t that enthusiastic to solve the problem of the north. It can be said that he left it
unattended until he was free. There was a mountain of other things to do after all.
Duke Lowenstein couldn’t forgive that.
“Those things have nothing to do with it! Even though my daughter was young, she made her name as
the best swordswoman in the north! She wanted to live on the path of the sword! I lost my wife and
raised my children all by myself! I wanted them to be happy! I wanted them to live their dreams! Even
so, I had to marry off my daughter! All for the sake of the north!”
When he married the Fourth Consort, Father was still a crown prince.
Even so, the power delegation was almost at its end and he was about to ascend the throne.
He had other consorts and it was not a marriage of love.
It was only to strengthen our bloodline and stabilize the national power. A complete political
marriage.
As someone who wanted to live as a swordswoman, it was probably humiliating for the Fourth
Consort to be married off as a woman.
Still, that is what being a duke’s daughter is.
There may be many noble ladies who are more than willing to become the emperor’s wife. One could
say that it was unfortunate since she was not your typical noble lady.
“When I sent off my daughter, I lowered my head to both the emperor and the crown prince asking
them to take good care of the north! Still, even after they acknowledged that and my daughter became
an imperial consort, they abandoned the north! How can I believe in you!?”
“Leaving believe or not believe aside, you surely are aware that you have no other choice.”
2156
“What if you break your promise? Who will guarantee that you will give the credit to the north? Right
now, you only want the power of the northern nobles to save your younger brother. But what if the
war is over? The next thing you want is an advantage in the succession war. You would need
achievements to win that. You will probably gladly take all your credit and make a big leap forward for
your brother right!”
“I won’t do that. If I make a big achievement, it will divide our support. Moreover, we will lose the
trust of the northern nobles. I will not make such a stupid move. It is obvious that working for you and
obtaining your support is better.”
“You can say whatever you want with just words!”
Strange.
He is too stubborn.
The Duke shouldn’t have any merit in prolonging this negotiation.
“If you want me to accept your proposal then bring either the Emperor or the Prime Minister here!
Without a written pledge, I will never trust you!”
“Don’t be absurd. Under these circumstances, there is no way that either of them can leave the
Imperial Capital.”
“Then bring me a pledge. Do whatever you need and bring me a pledge. That is my demand.”
With that said, the Duke stood up from his chair as though he no longer has nothing left to say.
However, for a moment, the Duke staggered.
After a coughing fit, the Duke left the place.
“Ojii-sama! Please wait!”
Char follows after him but Duke Lowenstein ignores her.
Char is the daughter of his dear son and the granddaughter of his close friend.
She should be important to Duke Lowenstein.
I can see that from the anger he showed before the negotiation.
However, his attitude right now is too cold.
“How do you see it?”
“Probably the same as you, Arnold-sama.”
“…..I see.”
2157
I listened to Sebas’s reply and turned back.
The duke is probably ill.
That’s why he needs clear evidence.
Something his granddaughter can use after he passes away.
2158
SPT Chapter 336
Special Thanks to LessDark and Double Tap for double killing Goal-kun.
He’s very pleased he gets to die twice.
-Mr.Graverobber
Status of a Prince
One night passed and I couldn’t get close to the mansion since the audience.
Although I was allowed to join up with the Narbe Ritter that was waiting at a nearby inn, I was not
allowed to meet Char, let alone the Duke.
“So he doesn’t want me to do something unnecessary huh.”
“It seems that the Duke will not back down on that pledge, sir.”
I sighed at Sebas’s words.
I don’t have enough time to return to the capital and persuade Father.
I have to convince the Duke somehow.
“Have you confirmed that the Duke really is ill?”
Inside a room at the inn.
There are only three people inside, me, Sebas, and Lars.
Lars is the only one that I told about Duke Lowenstein’s possible illness.
However, Lars is still in doubt.
“It is almost certain, sir.”
Many have seen him holding back his coughing fit and staggering steps.
He is probably suffering from the same disease as my mother. And Char probably has the same thing
as well.
The symptoms are too similar.
“It certainly looks that way but if that is the case, will the Duke be able to head to battle?”
2159
“That will depend on the progress of the illness but from how stubborn he acted, it seems he knows
that he doesn’t have much time left. If not then he wouldn’t reject my proposal and demand something
unreasonable like a pledge.”
The reason for his unreasonable demand was because of necessity.
Duke Lowenstein is the symbol of the north.
As long as we have him, the north will be united and the presence of the northern nobles will only
grow stronger. If he passed away after the war, the northern nobles would end up as a disorderly
mob. Even if I go back on my word, they would have no power to protest.
Since it is possible that the north will be taken lightly without him, he wants a pledge to guarantee
that we will respect the will of the north.
“With the Duke, we would have many hands to play but the Duke doesn’t have long and he has no
replacement. The only one who could have taken his place died before him after all.”
“It must be hard for Lady Charlotte.”
“……..”
Losing two grandfathers at the same time is truly unfortunate.
If possible, I would like to give her time to make peace with it but I can not do that.
Ancient magic is meaningless against illness.
As long as I can’t cure my mother, I can not cure the Duke.
In times like this, I resent how my power only caters to destruction.
“The Duke is hiding his illness from Char. he probably doesn’t want to shock Char……but it is
impossible to hide it from her forever.”
“Do we make contact with Lady Charlotte, sir?”
“We have no other choice. Everything will depend on Char.”
To succeed Marquis Zweig means that she has to deny the Duke.
On the contrary, if she wishes for peaceful days with the Duke then she will not be able to succeed
Marquis Zweig.
She has to choose one of the two paths.
Rather than thinking about what we should do, it would be better to hear what Char wants to do.
“We are going to infiltrate the mansion. You can do it right?”
2160
“Piece of cake, Your Highness.”
Saying so, Lars triumphantly took out the map of the mansion.
“Your preparation is quite thorough it seems?”
“We were willing to seize control of the place in case of emergency after all.”
“I’m glad that the negotiations ended in peace.”
Saying so, I began listening to Lars’s briefing.
The security of Duke Lowenstein’s mansion was much more rigorous than a normal noble mansion.
However, with how long he has retired from the army, his vassals who accompanied him to the
battlefields also got old.
With the Narbe Ritter who constantly undergoes harsh training, it was not so difficult to infiltrate.
“Please be careful.”
Lars who quickly incapacitated the security on the west side of the mansion sent me and Sebas off.
Once inside the mansion, Sebas alone should be able to handle the rest.
With the map of the mansion in my head, I look for the room where Char is probably at.
Doing so, I found a room with two guards standing in front.
It’s not the Duke’s room.
I give Sebas a look and head straight to the room.
The guards who noticed me opened their eyes wide but they were immediately incapacitated by Sebas
who went behind them.
“Char! I’m coming in!”
I lightly knocked on the door and opened it.
Like Elna, I have some reservations about entering a girl’s room but I can not be so timid now.
“Schwartz!?”
A surprised voice can be heard from inside.
However, the scene before me is more surprising than I expected.
2161
Char was about to jump off the balcony. She had tied the curtains together and made a rope out of it.
I was wondering what she was doing as I rushed over to her but it seemed that she lost her balance
because of me and began to stagger.
“Wa WA WAA!!”
“Oi, Oi!!”
I hurriedly close the distance and grabs Char’s arm with both hands.
I managed to pull her back up to the balcony before starting to speak to her.
“Haa Haaa……I told you that was dangerous right?”
“Ahaha……right. Sorry.”
Char stands up with a bitter smile.
She was about to leave.
She must have some kind of aim.
“I have to go see my grandfather. Help me.”
“I don’t mind but…..is that okay? The Duke might be ill you know?”
“Yeah……maybe it is the same disease I have. The cause of my illness is unknown. When it gets bad, I
cough out blood and I can’t even stand up. But when I am fine I can move about without any problem.
It’s a nasty disease isn’t it.”
“……you and the Duke are different. He is already old. The more he pushes himself, the shorter his life
will be.”
“I know…….but as the granddaughter of Duke Lowenstein and Marquis Zweig, I have the duty to do
what I can for the north. My reason is the same as yours.”
Saying so, Char smiled and turned back toward the door.
To be honest, I took her resolves lightly.
Char has already made up her mind.
“Sorry. I have to apologize to you.”
“What for?”
“I took you too lightly.”
2162
“Right. It would be best if you don’t underestimate me. I am the granddaughter of the Thunder God
after all.”
“Let me through. I have to talk to my grandfather.”
“Charlotte-sama…..but…..”
“Do you prefer I use force instead?”
Thunder began to crackle in Char’s right hand.
Seeing that, the guards protecting the Duke’s room opened a path for her.
Char then slowly opened the door.
“You tomboy granddaughter……I wonder who you took after.”
The Duke was lying in his bed.
His face seemed like he had aged 10 years since yesterday.
His illness may be worse than I think.
“It’s you I took after, Ojii-sama.”
“Really now…….”
Char urged me inside the room and closed the door.
Duke Lowenstein looked at me and squinted.
“To start moving immediately the day after……you really have no patience huh……”
“I don’t have time you see.”
“I see…..I guess we are the same then.”
Saying so, the Duke gets up. His face distorted in pain.
Char hurriedly went to support him but the Duke violently coughed.
“Cough! Cough! Haa haa……as you can see……I can’t move as I pleased anymore…….”
“That’s why you need a pledge?”
“That’s right…..after I died…..I need there to be solid proof that you will respect the will of the
north……no matter how much I hate the Emperor…..I know that he is not so foolish as to not know the
consequences of breaking a pledge……”
2163
If the Emperor broke a written pledge, he would lose the trust of every noble.
Being attacked by other nations, Father would not be so foolish as to cause such domestic problems.
That’s why the Duke wanted the pledge no matter what.
However.
“My father will never write a pledge. If he yields to a vassal’s request, the central power will diminish.”
“It’s your job to do something about that…..”
“It will take time to persuade him. In the meantime, the effect of the war on the north will be
irreversible. We have no time to waste. Believe in me. Not in my father, the Emperor, but in me as a
prince.”
“You are telling me to trust the Dull Prince……? Do you have the power to guarantee your end of the
deal?”
“…….I will write the pledge myself. I will put my strongest card on the line and win the respect back
for the northern nobles.”
“Your strongest card…..?”
“I will bet my status as a prince. With my blood, I can not end up as a commoner but I will accept any
position, political marriage, or even experiments. I am willing to protect the north at the cost of my
freedom. So……I want you to trust in my pledge.”
Saying so, I slowly kneeled down and bowed to the Duke.
Bowing to a vassal is something that a member of the Imperial Family must never do.
However, my head doesn’t have that much worth. If lowering it is all it needs then I will lower it as
many times as I have to.
If I show him that then my words will carry some weight.
It is telling the Duke that I am not attached to my position as a prince.
Even if it’s Father, if he sees that I am willing to bet my position, he will not say no to me. My action
means that I will definitely raise distinguished war services for the northern nobles. In response, he
needs to give me something of equitable worth. Moreover, if he denies me, it will damage the trust of
those around him.
“Why…..do you go that far…..?”
“I told you. I owe a great debt to Marquis Zweig. I am going to repay it back to Char. Let’s solve the
problems of the north and secure the status of the northern nobles together. I am doing this for
myself, not for someone else’s sake.”
2164
“…..Charlotte. Do you believe him?”
“……I do. I’m sure…..if I ask him to die with us, he will do it. He is that kind of person.”
Duke Lowenstein nodded to Charlotte and let out a long sigh as if he was tired.
Then.
“So…….what do you want to do?”
“I am going to succeed Marquis Zweig. We will hold a meeting with every northern clan and hear their
opinions.”
“And what if they are willing to fight……?”
“I will propose the Union of the Northern Lords. I am the granddaughter of Marquis Zweig after all.”
Hearing Char, Duke Lowenstein showed a small smile.
2165
SPT Chapter 337
Special Thanks to LessDark and Double Tap and Double Tap.
Yes, that was intentional. He literally just double tap himself…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Ps. It’s Coffee Appreciation day btw
Give me Your Life
“…..Union of the Northern Lords huh.”
“Yes.”
“But….you still need something for them to rally under. A pledge from the Emperor might certainly
boost their morale but a pledge from a prince will not have the same effect.”
The cause of the northern nobles’ previous defeat was due to low morale and disorganization.
That was the opening William exploited.
Even if we head to battle with more numbers than last time, if we do not solve this problem, we will
only repeat the first defeat.
“…….I will convince them.”
“……you don’t have enough time. Once you assemble all the lords and hold a meeting, you have to start
preparing for battle immediately. Isn’t that right? Prince Arnold.”
“That’s right. We have no time.”
“Then, what are you going to do……?”
Duke Lowenstein asked to test me.
The fact that he asked me instead of Char was probably due to his last act of love for his
granddaughter.
After all, the answer to that question is very cruel.
There is only one way to establish the Union of the Northern Lords that Char proposed.
“I need you—–to give me your life.”
“As I thought…..that is the only way huh….”
2166
Char says nothing.
She only holds the Duke’s hand with her quivering hands. And the Duke squeezed them back.
“I never thought that there would be a young man who could come up to my face and tell me to
die……..”
“If you personally head out, we will be able to form the Union of the Northern Lords. It will greatly
boost their morale as well.”
“And in exchange……my death will be certain. I understand that much. I wanted to die here, in the land
I was born and raised in……you are saying that you can not allow me even that?”
“Surrounded by family and peacefully going to heaven is certainly a good way to die. But……if you still
have strength left in you, I can not allow you to do that. I want you to squeeze the last bit of your life
until the very end. For the north.”
For the north, huh.
What a convenient thing to say.
I am telling this man who sacrificed his own daughter for the north to give us his last remaining days.
How selfish.
If he is allowed to rest peacefully, he might be able to live half a year or even a year longer. Who
knows how much his life will be shortened if he has to ride out to battle in this condition.
This will be a battle that he can not expect to come back from.
Some may feel honored for dying on a battlefield but this is an old man who has already retired from
the army.
It is too cruel to pull him away from his home and ask him to die in battle.
“Charlotte……I devoted everything to this family and the north. You…..know that right…….?”
“Yes….”
“Then let me ask…….between a grandfather who gets to leisurely die in peace……..and a grandfather
who decides to fight until the end……which one do you like more……?”
“Ojii-sama……”
“Duke…..”
Duke Lowenstein is trying to get Char to decide.
My face distorted in surprise but the Duke only smiled when he saw it.
2167
“I thought that I should have you shoulder all the responsibility……but……it is unpleasant to have my
final fight be for the Imperial Family. At least at the end…..I want it to be for my family. This life of
mine…..belongs to my family.”
“…..I……have always respected the Duke of Lowenstein who fought for the north……please…..show me
the figure of the Thunder God who has protected us…….I will burn it into my eyes.”
“I understand……Prince Arnold…..are you confident that you can use my life well?”
“…..yes.”
“Then let me give it to you……send the news to all northern nobles……..tell them that the Duke of
Lowenstein is going.”
Saying so, the Duke showed a fierce smile.
It is the smile of a man who is prepared to die.
Char is quietly sobbing beside him.
It was her decision that sent her grandfather to battle. That much is obvious.
Duke Lowenstein put his hand on Char’s head and staggered out of his bed.
“Now…..TO BATTLE!!”
With that said, Duke Lowenstein opens the door.
The guards were kneeling outside.
He speaks to them with a loud voice.
“Prepare for battle! Summon all the old coots who want to die with me! Gather as much force as
possible!”
“Yes, as you command!”
“Prince Arnold…..where do you want to hold the meeting? What is the place that best suits this
occasion?”
“That would be Gnade hill.”
“…..not bad.”
With that said, the Duke walked with a step that I couldn’t think belonged to the old man who was so
exhausted on the bed earlier.
Gnade hill can be said to be a sacred place in the north.
2168
500 years ago.
It is the place where the knights of the north challenged the demons who ravaged their land.
There were many sacrifices. However, the knights of the north were able to repel the demons on their
own.
A place that symbolizes the strength of the north.
There would be no better place to establish the Union of the Northern Lords.
The nobles who received the letter are probably inside the Lowenstein territory already.
They will be watching out for the news of the Duke’s movement.
That is how important Duke Lowenstein is in the north.
“……are you okay?”
“……I’m not………”
After seeing off Duke Lowenstein, I returned to the room.
There, Char put her hand on his bed and closed her eyes.
Her voice is a tearful one.
“Is there anything I can do?”
“…..no. Go……once this warmth disappears…..I will recover….”
“……I understand.”
No matter how powerful my ancient magic is, I can not cure their illness.
No matter which tactic I use, I can not stop her tears.
I quietly left the room.
“I really am…..powerless huh.”
“Is that not why you are here? If Arnold-sama can do everything by yourself then there wouldn’t be a
need for you to be here. Is it not because of our powerlessness that we are trying to obtain a better
future? Both until and from now on.”
I don’t know when he arrived behind me but I smiled at Sebas’s words.
That’s it.
I am here because I am powerless.
2169
I am not omnipotent.
“Let’s go. We are going to unite the north……and defeat Gordon.”
“Yes, sir.”
I said that and started walking.
2170
SPT Chapter 338
As the citizens of my discord know, I am not feeling so good this week so I won’t be updating Dahlia
and MM……sry
-Mr.Graverobber
Gied’s Departure
Wismar, the base of Gordon’s faction.
There, Reiner, the second son of Duke Horsvath was managing the supply for their army.
Without betraying his reputation for being excellent, he manages Wismar which despite being a
conquered city, there has never been a rebellion.
His excellence was appreciated and it was left to him to manage the supply that came into Wismar
irregularly from the United Kingdom and the Dominion.
Today as Reiner worked, Gied entered his room wearing armor that seemed difficult to move in.
The design emphasizes appearance rather than functionality. Moreover, the aim of this design does
not seem to raise the soldier’s morale at all.
Reiner has no intention of commenting on his brother’s taste but it is still inappropriate for a noble
who is heading to the frontline to prioritize his personal sense of aesthetics.
Of course, Reiner didn’t show that thought outwardly.
“Oh, Aniue. Are you about to depart?”
“That’s right! I will head to the frontline as His Highness Henrick’s [Close Aide].”
Seeing Gied proudly emphasized on the close aide part, Reiner smiled bitterly at him.
There are already Gordon’s aides serving around Henrick. Gied is simply a latch-on bonus.
His true role is only Henrick’s conversation partner.
He was not selected because of his ability.
It would be plenty obvious if he thinks about it.
Gied has never entered a battlefield or raised any achievement.
Normally, a person would think ‘Why me?’.
2171
But Gied just accepted the assignment as a matter of course. It was probably thanks to his high self-
esteem.
I hail from an excellent bloodline. It is obvious that I would be selected for such an important
assignment.
Wondering if such a thing is truly circling inside his brother’s mind, Reiner had to hide his sigh.
“What?”
“Nothing, I was only wondering if you are nervous to enter your first battle.”
“Nervous? You think I am scared of Leonard? Why should I be afraid of a guy who can only hide in a
castle.”
“How brave of you.”
“I am the eldest son of Duke Horsvath. That much is obvious! The one who will succeed the house is
me! You are already disqualified! Just curse your own powerlessness and keep doing your
paperwork!”
With that said, Gied left Reiner’s room with a burst of roaring laughter.
Seeing that, Reiner can only mockingly smile at his brother.
After all, that was just too hilarious.
“The Horsvath house has been a family of civil servants for generations. The bloodline that Aniue
boasted so much about won’t do you any good in battle though.”
By cleverly maneuvering in every succession war, the Horsvath house has survived until today.
Although they sometimes appeared on the battlefield, they always avoided dealing with strong
enemies.
Regardless of whether he is holding up in a castle or not, the Hero Prince is still the Hero Prince.
Facing a prince who raised so many military achievements in such a short period of time with that
attitude is nothing but foolishness.
The fact that he heads out with such a triumphant attitude is already proof of how much of a fool he is.
Normally, you would at least be somewhat wary with Prince Leonard as your opponent.
“To not realize that he is just a disposable pawn….even if he is my brother, he is just an idiot.”
“Reiner-sama. May I receive the report for the current situation?”
From the shadow of the room.
2172
Xiao-mei appears silently.
Without looking back at her, Reiner plainly answers.
“Prince Henrick and my brother are heading off to face Prince Leonard. With their presence, Prince
William’s chain of command would be disrupted and they would surely sabotage him intentionally.
The generals we sent with them are also those who dislike working under Prince William. They
probably won’t stop those two.”
“Then, all is according to plan?”
“Yeah. I will not let anyone else have jurisdiction over the supply. Father will probably be placed
behind the battlefield and will be held responsible for Aniue’s actions as well. We will not fight Prince
Leonard. Everything is on schedule.”
“Understood. What about the Fourth Consort?”
“Covert mission. My father and I don’t know the details either. Well, it’s that person we are talking
about after all. They should be able to do something about the situation with their sword on that side.
There’s no need to worry right?”
“I wonder about that. I do not know what they are doing after all.”
“Is there really anything that you don’t know? You are His Highness’s eyes and ears after all. You made
it look so easy to make contact with us too. For the record, this place is still an enemy’s base you
know?”
“The enemy’s eyes are focused on Prince Leonard after all.”
Hearing her reply, Reiner gave up pursuing the matter.
He stands no chance against this maid. Mentally that is.
It is thanks to her ability that he can contact various groups like this.
“Well, that’s alright. Give His Highness a message for me. The Horsvath house is ready to betra—
….that’s not it, tell him that we are ready to turn over at any time.”
“Understood.”
Saying so, Xiao-mei disappears.
Without confirming that she really left, Reiner returned to his work.
From the beginning, he did not work for Gordon. He was sabotaging him from the inside.
Gordon was suspicious of the Horsvath house as well but since he lacked human resources, he had to
use them.
2173
Thanks to that, they managed to get into important positions. But what is left now is to crush him.
Gordon who has practically only lived on the battlefield only moves intuitively.
An extremely troublesome characteristic for those who act with a plan.
The timing for them to make their move has to be the time when Gordon can be surely cornered.
“Alright, back to work then.”
With that said, Reiner earnestly resumed his work.
Without cutting any corners.
After all, it is necessary to supply the frontline efficiently.
This is for the unlikely event where Gordon can defeat Leo.
In such a situation, the Horsvath house will adjust its plan accordingly.
This is the way that the Horsvath house survived until now.
No matter which side wins, they will survive.
And they don’t care what plan they have to use.
Survival alone is justice.
That is the teaching that has been passed down in the Horsvath house for generations.
“To accomplish that, using your own family is not too bad……..”
Reiner whispered to himself.
For Reiner, who had been taught personally by Rolf since he was a child, he saw everyone as a pawn.
Whether it be his brother or his father.
“I’m looking forward to the person who will take the throne.”
Saying so, Reiner continued doing his paperwork.
A few days later.
10,000 troops led by Henrick arrived at the frontline as William’s reinforcements.
“It is finally the time for me to settle the score with Leonard huh….”
“Yes, Your Highness Henrick. Let’s show them our power!”
2174
Henrick and Gied slowly walk their horses while gazing at Leo’s castle.
Welcoming them are the Dragon Knights of Prince William.
“We have been expecting you, Your Highness Henrick. His Highness William is waiting for you.”
“Waiting for me? Why didn’t he come to welcome me himself?”
“Yes?”
“That’s right! Do you take a prince of the United Kingdom and His Highness Henrick to be of the same
standing?”
Henrick nods to Gied’s words.
The Dragon Knights’ cheeks cramped up at their attitude but they managed to suppress their anger
with their strong self-control.
“My apologies but since we are currently on a battlefield, the commander here is His Highness
William.”
“Hmph! Can’t say I like that at all. I will do whatever I want, let him know that.”
“That is certainly for the best, Your Highness. After all, he is a prince of another country. We don’t
know what he is actually planning after all.”
“…..You want me to relay that to Prince William?”
“What? You think I am scared of William!? I am Henrick Lakes Adler! The Ninth Prince of the Empire! I
am Gordon-aniue’s younger brother you know!?”
“…….as you wish, Your Highness.”
The Dragon Knights stepped back with a bow.
Seeing that, Henrick snorted and ordered his men to set up camp away from William’s.
While keeping on to the supply meant for William’s troops.
2175
SPT Chapter 339
Special Thanks to Double Tap and Infornography…..I means are you guys trying to kill Goal-kun
thrice?
-Mr.Graverobber
The 47 Clans of the North
It was two days later that the northern nobles assembled at a camp on Gnade hill.
There are 47 heads of the northern noble houses known as the 47 Clans of the North.
7 of them are currently at Leo’s side and 40 have gathered at the hill.
Duke Lowenstein has already finished his war preparation and the others could probably guess that
they are going to war.
The question is which one of them will be against it.
Inside a huge tent, a long desk was prepared and Duke Lowenstein sat on the highest seat. From there,
the northern nobles line up and Char sits in the lowest seat. Behind her, I stand waiting.
The reason Char is at the lowest seat here is that she is considered Marquis Zweig’s representative
and out of consideration for the other northern nobles.
Char’s lineage is certainly the highest in the north but if a little girl suddenly takes a big position it
might lead to her being distrusted by the others.
Duke Lowenstein is acting as the highest seat of this table. Char was the one who decided on the seat
arrangement.
“Everyone. Thank you for traveling so far for this meeting.”
“What are you saying? With a letter from the late Marquis Zweig and the news of Duke Lowenstein’s
departure, there is no way that a member of the 47 Clans would not respond.”
“Exactly!”
“Duke! Please tell us your plan!”
“Let’s work together and solve this crisis of the north!!”
They raised their voice one after another.
2176
It was a response that I couldn’t think belonged to those who denied Leo’s request without giving it
any consideration.
After waiting for them to settle down, the Duke started speaking to them.
“I will fight. But this is my personal decision, it does not represent the decision of everyone in the
north. The late Marquis Zweig sent you all a letter, hoping that you would agree to fight. What do you
all think of this situation?”
“His Highness Gordon has gone too far!”
“That is exactly right! He spilled the blood of the north while not thinking about the north at all!”
“But the Emperor is also to blame! He sent a prince with no experience in large-scale warfare to
suppress the rebellion and prolonged the battle! He is supposed to form an alliance with the Sokol
empires as soon as possible and end this civil war but instead, he has done nothing but damaging the
north!”
“That’s right! If the Princess General came to the north from the start, we wouldn’t take a wait-and-see
approach! It was the Emperor who created a situation where either side could win!”
The opinions are split in half.
However, there is no one that wants to side with Gordon.
They don’t want to side with Gordon but they also have their dissatisfaction toward the Emperor.
Gordon should have tried to assimilate the northern nobles when he fled here but it seems that he was
not in the condition where he could move properly due to his defeat in the capital.
That’s why William took command and they ended up earning no cooperation from the northern
nobles.
He probably can’t blame William either. If they do not solidify their base in the north, they will have no
choice but to escape to the Dominion. And the only way to do that was to forcibly seize territories
from the northern nobles.
After all, there is a limit to what William who is a prince of another country can do. Still, it was thanks
to William that they managed to last this long.
“Do you have an opinion on this, Duke?”
“My opinion huh….Gordon is the son of my beloved daughter. Even if he belongs to the Imperial
Family, he is still my grandson. However, blood is nothing compared to the bond we share in the
north. I will not side with Gordon.”
“Then what about the Emperor?”
2177
“Hmph…..It’s a shame. Before the war began, my daughter came to me for the first time in a while. She
asked me to help Gordon. While flaunting her power as well. My daughter was never so unsightly. It
was because she entered that devil’s den of an inner palace. The Emperor is to blame for this.”
He said that as though he wanted to puke.
When the others heard that, they all looked confused.
With such an attitude, they can’t think that the Duke would support the Emperor at all.
He has no plan to work with Gordon nor the Emperor.
Then who will he side with?
The answer to that question lies at the end of the Duke’s line of sight.
Char was at the receiving end of his stare and the eyes of the northern nobles began to turn toward
her.
“It seems that Lady Charlotte has the answer we seek. Can you tell us?”
“Then, I’d like to propose something. I am currently here as Marquis Zweig’s representative. It was me
who sent his letter to everyone here. I—-wish to form the Union of the Northern Lords. To put an end
to the cause of the turmoil to the north, Gordon.”
“…….you propose that we take the Emperor’s side?”
“No, I propose that we take the side of the next emperor. I intend to have the person who has a direct
connection with him be the leader of this union.”
Saying so, Char vacated her seat to me.
I paved the road for you, the rest is in your hands huh.
Certainly, the other nobles would not suddenly leave the meeting at this point. They have no other
choice after all.
With the Duke leading us, the morale is high.
However, as long as I am involved, I can not deny that morale might decline in the future. The distrust
the northern nobles have toward the Imperial Family is that great.
That’s why she pushed this absurd task to me.
It’s an absurdly hard task but……..Char also invested a lot in me.
I can not and must not refuse this.
2178
“Most of you would be meeting me for the first time so let me start with a self-introduction. I am the
Seventh Prince, Arnold Lakes Adler.”
I took off the black hood I was covering my face with and showed myself to the northern nobles.
At that moment, their gazes were filled with hatred.
A pressure that would render a weak-minded person unable to speak.
However, I am already used to this much pressure.
“……Dull Prince!”
“What is the meaning of this? Lady Charlotte?”
“It is as you see. We will ally ourselves to Prince Leonard and form the Union of the Northern Lords
centered around Prince Arnold. This is the only way for the north to be safe after the war.”
No one argues against Char’s words.
It is not uncommon to attach yourselves to the next emperor. It might be rarer in the rural area but it
is still not that strange.
After all, the reward will be great.
They may be dissatisfied with the current situation of the battle but Leo is still fighting with the north
in mind. There is a big difference compared to Gordon. That’s why there’s no objection.
However, their consent is not without antipathy.
“You all seem like you wanted to say something huh. Do you hate the Imperial Family that much?”
“Hate? That word is not enough to explain our feelings, Your Highness.”
“You looked like you wanted to kill me huh. So, why don’t you give it a try?”
“That’s how I want it! I will send your head back to the Emperor!”
One of them vigorously stands up but the surrounding nobles stopped him.
That is the answer and also their strength.
“What’s wrong? You are not going to kill me? It’s not like you can’t just push them aside right?”
“Ugh…..!”
“…….I apologize for my rudeness earlier. I know that the other would try to stop you so I provoked
you.”
“What……!?”
2179
I slightly bowed my head and started walking.
This is to see the face of each northern nobles gathered here.
“Everyone here has been treated coldly by the people of the central part of the Empire. It was due to
the death of the Crown Prince at the northern border three years ago. Their sadness turned into anger
and they use you, the nobles of the north as their outlet.”
Nobody says anything.
They only keep their eyes on me.
“You have endured it. Marquis Zweig took the brunt of it but I am sure that you all have suffered.
Still—–you did not retaliate. You all chose to endure. Why? Such treatment must have been a
humiliation for the brave nobles of the north. Starting a rebellion must have also been an option for
you. So why did you not do it?”
Arriving at the end of the long desk, I looked at Duke Lowenstein.
His eyes were sharp but it seems that he still finds this situation amusing.
Being encouraged by his eyes, I look back.
“The answer is that you are protecting this land as a noble of the north. Your pride couldn’t allow it to
be destroyed! You know that if you lash out, the north would be engulfed in the flame of war and the
people of the north would suffer. That’s why you all chose to endure. But…..right now, the north has
already become a battlefield. What you have endured so much to protect is being trampled. Are you all
fine with that? No way!!”
I put my fist on my chest.
These people resemble me.
They only move with their own belief. For something that they can not give up.
“The people of the Empire have ridiculed me as the Dull Prince. That includes you all and I’m also
thinking of myself that way. My brother may have a lot of things on his shoulders but it doesn’t mean
that I am not carrying anything. Even I have something that I carry. The responsibility to the Imperial
Family, the responsibility to my younger brother, and the responsibility to the people. There would be
no end if I have to keep going. No matter how much I try to squeeze out there will always be
something left. Is that not the same for you? When you lose your loyalty toward the Imperial Family,
you should still have your feelings for the north. Even if you have no respect left for the Imperial
Family, There must be a feeling toward the people of the north left in you. You have endured so much
because you couldn’t give that feeling up! That’s wonderful—–It truly touched me!”
I tell them the same words I received from Marquis Zweig.
It feels good to be recognized. No matter by who.
2180
As long as they endured, they will want to be acknowledged. It is normal for a human to seek
recognition.
I used to be like that.
These people got used to enduring.
The northern nobles were always passive. If Marquis Zweig did not write his letters, they will not
gather like this and if Duke Lowenstein doesn’t move, their morale will not rise.
Even if they have their own opinions, they will not act.
There is no strength in following the strong.
Surely, sparks might fly all over the north if they move individually. It must have been due to that risk
that they chose not to move.
After all, their movement is restricted by that fear.
However, it should not be like that.
I am not going to rule over them. I am here to lift them up.
To let them protect what they want.
“Enduring alone is not enough anymore! The land of the north is being devastated! This should give
you enough reason to rise up! How long are you intending to be on the receiving end!? Why did you
not stand up for yourselves when the north was being devastated!? You all waited for my brother to
arrive and now that he is here, you are still waiting! To whom does the north belong to!? Does it
belong to the Imperial Family!? Then why have you all endured so far!? If this land is not important to
you then you can just abandon it! You endured everything because you love this place right! How long
are you people going to stay still when the people of the north suffer!? What kind of noble are you if
you can not even protect your own land! This land was created by the bravery of the noble of the
north! Can you face your ancestors like this!”
“If you want to say something then say it!!”
“What does a prince who grew up in a warm castle know about our suffering!?”
“Like hell I know! But I am here! I am ready to face the problems of the north! You all are already a
step behind the Dull Prince! If you want to laugh at the Dull Prince then laugh! If you want to mock me
then mock away! But I have no intention of being ridiculed by a bunch of incompetent fools that can’t
even take a step forward! I am the Dull Prince! A fool that is being ridiculed by everyone in the
Empire! But—-I will not allow anyone who can not even overtake me to mock my effort!”
Saying so, I strongly hit the desk.
And says.
2181
“I am giving you an order……..the enemy is the rebel, Gordon! For the sake of the north, I am going to
defeat him without fail! You are to unite as the Union of the Northern Lords!! Any noble who has
enough backbone to not lose to the Dull Prince! Proudly give me your name and state your support!!”
The room turned silent for a moment.
The first one who took a knee first was Char.
“The Zweig house swears fealty to Your Highness.”
Seeing that, two young nobles also kneeled.
“Viscount Bornefled of the Bornefeld house swears fealty to Your Highness. We only have less than a
hundred knights but their ability on the battlefield is second to none. It is my pleasure to serve.”
“Earl of Zenkel swears fealty to Your Highness. If Your Highness has a need for vanguards, please rely
on my house.”
Starting with them, the northern nobles began to kneel one after another.
They all sound proactive.
Then finally, it is Duke Lowenstein’s turn.
“The Duke of Lowenstein swears fealty to Your Highness. We, the 47 Clans of the North are at Your
Highness Arnold and His Highness Leonard’s command. We’d like Your Highness to be the leader of
our Union, will you accept this position, Your Highness?”
“I accept. But it is only in name. You have full authority over this Union, Duke.”
“Thank you, Your Highness. To strengthen our force, we will wait for all troops to gather here. In the
meantime, the nobles who are near the frontline will head to His Highness Leonard as
reinforcements.”
“I leave everything to you.”
Hearing that the Duke gave me a nod and ordered every noble to gather their soldiers.
2182
SPT Chapter 340
Monthly Patrons Shoutout!!!!!!!
Iori Tier
Wacko
Waifu Tier
AlfonzoM6
Main Heroine Tier
Jerry Gergich
Xan
Sub Heroine Tier
Artaril
Stefania Barbieri
Rifki Allam
Victor Diaz
Tinsoldaat
kei
Python33ChangesHashFnBehavior
Nelson N
Shanks
And Special Thanks to LessDark, Double Tap, and Rector for thoroughly taking care of Goal-kun. He’s
in therapy now……
I’m still a bit sick so let’s see how long I can keep up this month’s appreciation week.
-Mr.Graverobber
William’s Fear
2183
“What are you trying to do? Prince Henrick.”
At Henrick’s camp.
As soon as he arrived, William asked that question and glared at Henrick.
His glare was so intense that the general by Henrick’s side started sweating cold.
His anger is obvious and the reason for that is clear as day.
Henrick did not deliver the supply that he was supposed to deliver to William’s camp.
However, even in the face of William, Henrick was still carefree. Rather than firm, his attitude belongs
to a person who is slow in the head but to the generals who hate William, such an attitude looked
reliable.
“What’s with you all of a sudden? Prince William.”
“Please stop pretending. You are supposed to transport the supply to my army.”
“That’s right. But we don’t have enough you see. I only brought enough to feed my army. Yours was
not included.”
“Stop fooling around! Do you want to starve the soldiers that are fighting on the frontline!?”
“It would be wrong for you to take your anger out on me. Our side has agreed to not interfere with
how the United Kingdom and the Dominion handle the supply right. The amount of supply they sent
us is sparse at best. I should be the one asking that question, no?”
“The reason for that should have been explained already! There was a thief who recently appeared in
the Dominion that is targeting our supply convoy! We have already increased the number of escorts
for the convoy as well!”
“But there is still no result, yes? Why don’t you head there to see the situation yourself?”
“…….you want me to leave the frontline?”
William is now clearly aware of Henrick’s intention.
The reason he didn’t deliver the supply is that he doesn’t want William in the battle anymore.
If William is gone, the command would be given to Henrick instead as he is the second in rank.
Although Henrick’s action is a clear act of sabotage, their supply transportation was indeed delayed.
Reiner’s supply management is excellent but that still isn’t enough to combat the shortage of supply.
And to top it off, William’s original supply was also burned.
2184
Right now the room is strongly against William. Even if he voices his complaints, there will surely be a
few who will stand up to defend Henrick.
Even Gordon will see this as a battle for credit on the frontline and won’t interfere.
William has no hand to play here.
“You are the United Kingdom’s Dragon Prince. You have your reputations. Even if you retire from this
place, nobody would think less of you.”
“I couldn’t care less about that. All I care about is how to take down Leonard’s castle. You think you
can do that by yourself?”
“They are just a defeated general and his army. Even if they received some supply, they can’t possibly
stand a chance against me.”
“Then I want to ask you one thing…….what is your battle record?”
“This is my first battle.”
“Our opponent is the Hero Prince, not just some bandit you know!? He fought against a Sea Dragon in
the Principality, he defeated Demons and even Duke Kruger in the south! Don’t you know that!?”
“His achievements have never been one that includes leading a large army! Even if he is skilled as an
individual, it doesn’t mean that he is a good general!”
“That person always has someone who can compensate for his shortcomings at his side! That is
already enough proof that he is a good general! Look at the reality, even if we got him surrounded, we
still can not take the castle!”
“Anyone can do that much if they just hold themselves in a castle!”
“Don’t bark nonsense when you have never done it even once yourself! A Prince who never starves
will never understand! A siege battle is a terrible test of patience! It is something that truly tests a
general! Right now none of Leonard’s soldiers has deserted or betrayed him! It’s clear that he has
complete control of his army!”
After he roared at Henrick, William glances at the nearby generals.
William didn’t go so far for his own sake.
He knows that if he leaves this place to Henrick, they will lose.
The dominance Gordon’s faction currently has will be blown away.
Leo will be able to move unchecked. They will have to give up the advantage they have acquired and
take a defensive stance instead.
2185
Once an advantage is lost to the enemy, it is difficult to regain it. The opportunistic nobles of the north
might make their move.
That was William’s fear.
“Figuratively speaking, a prince is someone the army will rally under. The ones moving that army are
the generals. Are you all confident that the enemy will not break through the encirclement?”
“The enemy aims to earn time. They will not launch an assault. Please rest assured.”
“That’s it, Prince William. No one is saying anything about attacking the castle. This is only a trip for
you to confirm the situation of your home country while we keep this place safe and firm for you.”
William clenched his teeth so much that the sound is audible to the generals.
They will not go on an offensive?
Who is going to guarantee that?
Who can guarantee that a prince who refused to deliver the supply because he wanted to raise a
military achievement of his own will not arbitrarily attack the castle?
He can’t imagine these generals stopping the prince either.
If that happens, the soldiers on the frontline will become sacrifices.
The army under William’s direct command includes the Black Dragon Knights, several Dragon
Knights, and about 3,000 soldiers of the United Kingdom.
Ordering them to withdraw would be easy but asking the others to do the same will be difficult.
“…….Fine. I am going to confirm the situation back in my home country. My direct subordinates and
soldiers who wish to fall back will withdraw to the rear. Is this good enough?”
“Yes, please do so. If there are such soldiers that is.”
William left the place while Henrick saw him off with a sarcastic smile.
The situation was serious.
Initially, Leo’s main army has about 20,000 soldiers in the castle. However, William estimated that
only about half that number could fight given that there were many injured in their rout.
That’s why William deployed 20,000 soldiers to encircle the castle. After all, there was no other army
that could help Leo break the siege.
His only concern, the Imperial Army numbering 20,000 is being restricted by Gordon.
2186
It was a perfect setup. However, the enemy managed to resupply by air transportation.
Leo’s main army which now has more soldiers that can fight has become more dangerous.
That’s the reason he asked for reinforcements. However, Henrick had no intention of cooperating with
William.
“That is the current situation. My direct subordinates will be withdrawing to the rear. Prince Henrick
will assume commands when I’m away. Those who do not wish to stay can withdraw to the rear with
them.”
William sighed to himself while telling the generals of the news.
He thought that no one would follow him.
However, one general raised his voice.
“There are many injured men in my unit. I wish to withdraw to the rear with Prince William.”
“General Fidessa……..”
It was an unexpected person.
Together with General Bartel who passed away in battle, Fidessa should have hated William the most.
Why is he following him now?
That question struck William.
“No one else wishes to withdraw?”
“General Fidessa. I won’t say anything bad but please don’t do it.”
“Why?”
“Prince Henrick is the younger brother of His Highness Gordon. Even if they are only half-related by
blood, he is often appointed to important posts like this. If you go against him, your position will be
jeopardized, no?”
“Hmph…..my life is much more important. I don’t want to die under an incompetent commander.”
Saying so, Fidessa heads to William’s side.
He then showed William a sword.
“This is Bartel’s sword. He swore that he would win this war for His Highness Gordon with it. I can’t
allow his death to go to waste. Please take my men with you.”
“I understand. I will arrange it.”
2187
After saying that, William turned his eyes to the remaining generals.
Nobody looked at William.
Having no other choice but to give up, William dismisses them.
“……I thought that you hated me.”
“If I have to pick between like or hate then I guess hate would be correct.”
“Then why?”
“Prince Leonard cannot be stopped by a prince who has never fought a war. Unlike when I and Bartel
launched our attack, their strength is recovering. If you are gone, it will surely give them the
opportunity to move.”
His thoughts are in line with William’s fear.
Bartel and Fidessa didn’t attack Leo’s army without a chance of winning.
They got the table turned against them in the end but pursuing a routed army is not a wrong tactic.
Fidessa who climbed to the rank of general with his own ability can see the same thing William is
seeing.
Do you think that they can stop him?”
“Impossible. The generals at Prince Henrick’s side are those who refused to follow you when you set
out. They don’t understand the situation and they are not willing to give up the credit on the front
line.”
Gordon’s faction has one miscalculation. The number of generals that joined his side was not as much
as he expected.
Although the number of soldiers and commanders joining him is gradually increasing, there are only a
few generals that have a proven track record.
Gordon, who failed the rebellion at the Imperial Capital, has little chance of winning.
The excellent generals would be able to see that much and choose not to move.
That’s why they are greatly shorthanded.
“……we must avoid a huge loss at all cost.”
“Certainly.”
“I will head to the rear but you should lead the troops and remain nearby. It would be great if nothing
happened but in case that our ally is routed, please go help them.”
2188
“That’s a good idea.”
William straddles on his dragon after entrusting it to Fidessa to deal with the situation in case of
emergency.
Confirming their supply situation is something that William has to deal with sooner or later.
Telling himself that he is just doing this earlier than expected, William went up into the sky.
“It seems that we can not settle our score yet huh, Leonard.”
At the Imperial Capital, and a series of exchanges here.
He still can not settle the score with this prince who he perceived as a strong foe.
However, if Henrick loses here, his chance will arrive soon.
‘Let’s postpone our duel until the time comes’
Muttering so, William headed to Henrick’s camp to inform him of his withdrawal.
And after a while, Leo’s camp confirmed that the Dragon Knights have withdrawn from the frontline.
2189
SPT Chapter 341
Appreciation week commenced……if I get too sick I will postpone some double post to next week
tho…..
-Mr.Graverobber
Char’s Departure
“Are you going?”
The meeting of the northern nobles was over.
Each lord will be returning to their territory to prepare their knights.
However, that will take some time.
That’s why it was decided that the nobles who are close to the frontline will advance first.
And leading them is Char who is representing Marquis Zweig.
“Yeah, rather than waiting for the knights here, it would be faster if I go myself.”
“I see…….is your body okay?”
“I’m fine. Don’t worry.”
“…..be careful alright?”
“That’s my line. It is going to be much tougher from now on you know?”
“…….I guess so.”
After a short conversation, Char smiles at me and turns back.
From now on, I have to organize an army of the northern nobles who are gradually gathering.
That is a difficult task. However, it is not dangerous.
“Char.”
“What is it?”
“Take the Narbe Ritter with you.”
“You want me to take a unit that is guarding you instead of the Imperial Knights with me? What about
your protection?”
2190
“Sebas is here. There is no problem.”
“All I can see are problems though……”
Char turned her gaze back with a bitter smile.
At the end of her sight are Lars and his subordinates.
“We can not afford to leave your side, Your Highness.”
“I understand your feelings but Char needs more manpower.”
“Even so, we can’t leave Your Highness with inadequate protection.”
“……please go with her. It will give me peace of mind.”
Appealing to Lars with reason won’t work.
It is the same with the nobles of the north.
If reason doesn’t work then I have no choice but to appeal to their emotions.
“Then we will divide the unit into two.”
“It would be foolish to divide a hundred-man unit. You all go with her.”
“……..we wish to fight under your command, Your Highness.”
“I can’t afford to let our elite troops loitering around here. Besides, I will follow you soon. Take care of
Leo and Char for me.”
“…….it can’t be helped. We will obey your order.”
Lars sighed as if he had given up and followed my wish.
Thus the Narbe Ritter is also preparing for departure.
“I won’t be able to face anyone if the leader of the Union of the Northern Lords got assassinated first
you know?”
“I hid my existence to the last minute and I also gave a strict gag order to the gathered nobles so they
won’t go out of their way to assassinate me. Gordon and his allies don’t have that much leeway after
all. Rather than that, targeting the nobles who are bringing us reinforcements would be more likely.”
“That’s why you attached your escorts to me?”
“Yes, more or less.”
With that said, I turned back.
2191
It would be dangerous to talk any more than this. I might tell her to give up the idea of heading off to
the frontline after all.
As I walked away, Char asked me a question.
“Seriously……..you are already the leader of this union, should I not fix the way I speak to you?”
“I hate dealing with people who suddenly turned nice to me.”
“So……I can keep speaking to you like this?”
“Yeah, I value people who can talk casually with me. From now on as well……it would be nice if you
can treat me like a friend. Very nice.”
“Well, if you say that then there’s no helping it. I will be your friend.”
Saying so, Char leaves.
As he is seeing her off, Sebas speaks to me.
“It has become easier to move now isn’t it, sir”
“Right……”
“If you are worried then should you not interfere as Silver, sir?”
“I will not intervene in this war. My trip to the headquarters would become a waste after all.”
“But you seem to have quite an interest in her, sir.”
“Char is a friend……and the only granddaughter of my benefactor. If I let her die……..I will not be able
to forgive myself for the rest of my life.”
I can assign her to the rear but that will go against Char’s will.
In exchange for my peace of mind, I will hurt Char instead.
Duke Lowenstein is betting his life in this battle. It’s only natural that Char wants to do something as
well.
“Then, what should we do, sir? I do not think that we have anything left to do here though.”
“Right……let’s do what we can then.”
“You have a plan in mind, sir?”
“Send men to Thale and have them bring Minister Cuber’s invention that I brought from the capital
here. There’s a trump card we can use there.”
2192
“Certainly, there was something like that. We shouldn’t use it unless we have to though. It is directly
related to the Minister of Technology’s wellbeing after all.”
“It’s obvious that we should use it. I told them that I wanted to bring it with me because it was
necessary right? If it’s the complaints then we can just silence them with the result.”
“That is quite a twisted logic, sir. Well, that is best suited Arnold-sama though.”
Saying so, Sebas shrugged.
How will the enemy move now?
I can predict that to some extent but there is no guarantee that they will move according to my
expectations.
The enemy is William, someone who managed to escape the capital by exploiting that narrow
loophole.
It is quite possible that he will be able to go beyond my expectations.
However, I can mostly read what Gordon is likely to do.
Back at the Imperial Capital, I could predict what he was intending to do when he was cornered.
That’s why I brought a countermeasure.
He will try to use his trump card to win but we also have a trump card of our own. If it turns to that
then our victory is almost guaranteed.
“Well,…….even if he is rotten, he is still my older brother. I want to think that he hasn’t fallen that far
though.”
“If my memory serves me right, His Highness Gordon very much despises cowardly behavior on the
battlefield though…..”
“Gordon is different now. It’s the same as Zandra-aneue’s case…….”
“Please be careful with your words, sir. If it reaches His Majesty’s ears, it might cause an uproar after
all. Please keep in mind that Princess Zandra was a rebel.”
“Right…….”
I can’t even call her Aneue now.
Her sin was that grave. It can not be helped. A part of me thinks so but at the same time, I also believe
that there is a mastermind who corrupted her.
I am sure that Gordon is the same. The more I think about it, the more I can’t stop thinking that way.
2193
A sin is a sin. Even in madness, Gordon started a rebellion and Zandra-aneue joined him. The death
penalty is naturally the punishment.
I can understand that but I can’t accept it.
“I wonder when did the succession war go wrong? Is it limited to this time only? Or was it wrong from
the start?”
“I can’t say, sir. However, it is clear that this succession war is strange. With such opinions from the
people outside of the succession war instead of its participants, something must be interfering with
it.”
“……Grimoire huh.”
“It seems that we can not say that for sure unless we conduct an investigation. I am currently tracking
their movements but first, we have to solve our internal problems, sir.”
“Right. We need to end this succession war as soon as possible……”
I have to make Leo take the credit.
In other words, Leo must defeat Gordon.
Regarding that, my heart is a little disturbed.
If he is the same as Zandra-aneue then…..
I’m sure that only a cruel future is waiting for us.
“The mastermind who is intervening in the succession war is aiming directly at the Imperial Family.
It’s like……they see the Imperial Family as a hindrance. Don’t you think so?”
“There is no family that has more enemies than the Adler after all, sir.”
“A long-standing grudge huh. Well, it doesn’t matter. For whatever reason…..it was them who started
this. I won’t let them do something convenient like attacking us from the dark like this forever. I will
definitely drag them out from the shadows.”
Saying so, I reached for an empty space.
To do that, I have no choice but to end this conflict first.
I have no other choice.
The anger toward those that created this suffocating situation is rising up.
“Once I end this conflict…….I will absolutely find and crush them with my own hands.”
I closed my palm into a fist and put my determination to words.
2194
When I said that, a fair number of horse riders left the main camp.
That’s probably Char’s group.
“I hope nothing bad happens to them.”
“You are so prone to worry, sir. Please rest assured. Our enemy is not the only one on the frontline.
Your proud younger brother is also there.”
“…..that’s true.”
Becoming a little relaxed, I looked up at the blue sky.
After fixing my mood, I spoke to Sebas.
“I will return to the capital for the time being.”
“Understood, sir.”
After that exchange, I returned to my own tent and transferred back to the Imperial Capital.
2195
SPT Chapter 342
Special Thanks to Double Tap for dealing the first blow to Goal-kun this month.
Here we go again….
-Mr.Graverobber
Withdrawal Reason
After observing the withdrawal of the enemy Dragon Knights, Leo held a war council inside the castle.
“How do you see it? Marquis Greisner.”
“It might be a trap. Or perhaps they are simply replacing their troops because their reinforcements
just arrived.”
“So you see it like that too huh.”
“The Dragon Knights can rush back to the frontline immediately even if they are a little far away. If we
use this opportunity to attack then I think we can expect the enemy to counterattack.”
“……how many of them withdrew from the frontline?”
“The report estimated around 7,000 to 8,000 soldiers, Your Highness.”
“….That’s a lot.”
Leo was stuck.
Why would the enemy lower the number of their soldiers when their reinforcements just arrived.
If they withdrew only their injured soldiers then it would make sense but the number of Dragon
Knights and troops that withdrew from the frontline is too large.
He couldn’t understand their intention at all.
Marquis Greisner suspects that this is an enemy’s trap but if it really is a trap then their way of doing it
is too obvious.
Using this timing to go on an offensive wouldn’t be reckless for them either.
Leo doesn’t think that the Dragon Prince would misread his opponent’s ability like that.
It is all too unnatural.
“What do you think? Katrina.”
2196
Among those who participated in the war council, only Katrina has a difficult expression on her face.
Thinking that she might notice the unnaturalness of this situation, Leo asked for her opinion.
“If we think about it normally then this might certainly be a trap. However, we estimated the number
of their reinforcements to be around 10,000. To withdraw 8,000 troops with that amount of
reinforcements is too unnatural. If this is truly a trap then I think that it is too crude to be the Dragon
Prince’s work.”
“I think so as well. He wasn’t someone optimistic enough to think that we would not leave the castle
when the Dragon Knights are away from the frontline. Still, this might actually be a show he put on for
us.”
“Perhaps he aims to confuse us?”
“But Katrina, what do they stand to gain by deploying a confusion tactic now? With 10,000
reinforcements added to their number, their siege is perfect. Even if 8,000 of them withdrew, they
would still have 2,000 more soldiers than before. The one who should deploy such tactics should be
us, no?”
“Yes, Otou-sama. I am confused about that as well. I still can’t wrap my head around why they would
do this.”
Since they have the upper hand, they don’t need to go that far to confuse their enemy.
Leo’s goal here is to earn time but there is no reason for William to panic either. Right now, he
couldn’t understand the reason behind the enemy’s movement.
If it is not about time then it must be about their supply.
However.
“The reinforcements that just arrived had a lot of carriages with them. Their supply situation should
be good enough.”
“They have both time and supply. Then why would they resort to a trick………”
Leo ponders on it and completely shuts out all the sounds around him.
As he dives into his thoughts to find the reason behind William’s action, one thing stood out.
Why would he do something that would not provide a clear result when it is unnecessary? The answer
is that it is in some way necessary.
Then what necessitated such a large-scale troops withdrawal?
He has no problem with time and supply.
Even so, he exaggeratedly put on a show for them to see his movement—–
2197
“His withdrawal is real……..”
“Meaning?”
“The enemy Dragon Knights have actually withdrawn. Perhaps alongside thousands of troops. That’s
why he exaggerated his withdrawal to confuse us.”
“Even so, it doesn’t change the fact that the enemy still has the advantage though?”
“That’s right. This withdrawal shouldn’t affect their superiority. But they still resorted to a trick like
this. In other words, the enemy’s internal working is worse than we think.”
“……..Not only the Dragon Knights but the Dragon Prince himself also withdrew?”
“If we think of it like that then it makes sense. If the commander changes, they wouldn’t want to be
attacked while their chain of command is in chaos.”
Leo looks at the map on his desk.
Among the pieces placed on it, Leo points to the large piece on the enemy side.
“Who is the commander of the enemy’s reinforcements?”
“We still couldn’t confirm yet, Your Highness.”
“Look into it. If it is as I expected then this might be our biggest opportunity to strike.”
William’s weakness in this battle is that he is a prince of another country.
This is Gordon’s rebellion. If William plays too much role, it would be hard to tell the real leader of
their faction.
Even if Gordon can tolerate that, the others won’t.
Until now they may not raise any complaint but recently William has committed blunders of losing a
portion of his supply and allowing Leo’s side to transport supply in from the outside.
It is not just William’s responsibility alone but there is a good chance that someone on the enemy side
is taking advantage of it.
“Gordon is not here. So the commander that has a high enough rank for the generals to follow would
be either Conrad or Henrick.”
“If the enemy’s commander changed from the Dragon Prince to an inexperienced prince…….I think
that the enemy will lose a significant amount of their strength.”
“If the enemy’s commander has really changed, will we use this opportunity to launch an offensive?”
When that question was raised by Katrina, Leo shakes his head.
2198
The situation may seem to be in Leo’s favor but this is just one side of the coin.
If he misread the situation, they will be the ones who got lured out instead.
“If the commander of their reinforcements is really Henrick then we will attack. But if it is Conrad we
will not move. It is almost certain that it will be a trap after all.”
“What do you mean, Your Highness?”
“Henrick has a lot of pride. It is likely for him to collide with Prince William. But Conrad is different. He
always does things properly and won’t be putting himself at risk by fighting against a strong opponent
without the chance of winning. That’s why if it is Conrad who leads the reinforcements, it is likely that
it will be a trap.”
Leo said so why remembering the faint smile on Conrad’s face.
He is the one who is most similar to Al among the princes. That is Leo’s impression of Conrad. For Leo,
that impression is the highest evaluation that he can give to anyone.
“We should be wary of Prince Conrad? I have not heard much good reputation about him though…….”
“Remember this well. It is those who have a bad reputation among the Imperial Family that you
should be especially wary of.”
Whether it be Traugott or Al, their reputation is the worst.
However, reputation doesn’t equate to real ability.
Leo gets that same feeling from Conrad.
“Then we will focus on reconnaissance. Since the Dragon Knights are absent, conducting
reconnaissance from the sky should be easy.”
“I leave it to you. Try not to get noticed as much as possible.”
“That will take time. Are you sure, Your Highness?”
“I don’t mind. If Prince William really went so far as to confuse us then the new commander must be
unreliable. If that is the case then it is almost certain that it’s Henrick. And if it is Henrick then we will
have plenty of opportunities to strike.”
“However, Prince Henrick has absorbed some of Princess Zandra’s former subordinates. There might
be a unit of mages gathering around him.”
“They will not become a threat. If Henrick was in cahoot with his mother and sister then it would be
one thing but he distanced himself from them because of their bad reputations. We have no need to be
wary of Henrick’s ability on the battlefield.”
Declaring so, Leo turned his gaze back to the map.
2199
The only thoughts in his head are how to break through the enemy’s encirclement.
For Leo, Henrick was not someone that he has to be vigilant about.
Henrick, who had studied both academic and arts of war is quite an excellent individual. However,
since he has nothing that he specialized in, he never stood out.
His balance might be good but he is not skilled.
If he kept learning then he might be able to be a jack of all trades but he did not reach that level.
Henrick himself is aware of that.
That’s why he saw Leo as his rival.
After all, they are of the same lineage.
However, Leo has elevated himself to the level where he could do everything at an excellent level.
For Leo, what he is wary about are those who excel in one specialized field.
To him, a half-baked jack of all trades like Henrick is the easiest opponent.
“Since his position is not secured, he wanted some credits of his own huh…….”
It is because of their advantage that they have enough leeway to fight each other for credit.
However, the status quo of this battle will soon change.
An experienced general would know how much credit they can claim on the frontline. After all, if they
ended up losing, there would be nothing left to claim.
However, Henrick doesn’t have a sense of that yet.
“It is obvious that someone like Henrick is incompatible with Prince William though……”
Gordon might not be able to recognize that.
Leo understands him.
For Gordon, William is his ally and best friend. He wouldn’t expect Henrick to go against him.
However, the people around Gordon should notice that.
“It seems that the other side is not so united huh……..”
While thinking about the struggle William has to go through, Leo sighs.
Gordon’s side may not be solidly united but the Empire is not either.
2200
A good proof of that is the fact that Eric, who should be someone that is very skilled at negotiating
with the Sokol empire, still couldn’t conclude the alliance yet.
Not long ago, a giant monster appeared in the Sokol empire and caused large-scale damage to their
land.
Allying itself with the Empire, for the time being, is not a bad deal for Sokol either.
The reason why the negotiation is still not finished yet even though their interests are aligned means
that it is intentionally delayed.
Leo predicts that the negotiation will not conclude until he is defeated.
However, that is within his expectations.
After all, the reinforcements he is expecting are not the Eastern Border Defense Force led by Lize.
“Now……let’s think up some plans for a counterattack.”
Saying so, Leo started moving the pieces on the map.
2201
SPT Chapter 343
The thought that we only have around 100 more chapters kinda depress me.
-Mr.Graverobber
Eve of the Battle
A few days have passed and both armies are still staring down each other.
And the first person who chose to break that status quo was Henrick.
“I was asked by Conrad-aniue to support Gordon-aniue. That’s why I am going to put Gordon-aniue on
the throne.”
Henrick said that to the generals that have gathered in front of him.
Henrick had a debt of gratitude to Conrad who took him out of the prison.
That debt has turned into loyalty.
For Conrad’s sake, Henrick is willing to assist Gordon and eliminate every obstacle in their way. That’s
why the current situation is undesirable.
“This……is a battle for the Empire. Defeating Leonard by just surrounding him as the Dragon Prince
planned will only give the Dragon Prince more credit……After Aniue takes the throne, if he is to go
around boasting his achievements in this war, it will surely bring disgrace to the Empire! That’s why I
am going! We are launching an all-out attack!”
“Wonderful, Your Highness! Please allow me to be your vanguard!”
“No! Allow me!”
More than half of the generals supported Henrick’s plan and began preparing for battle.
Although the remaining generals have their concerns, they did not actively oppose him.
As Henrick says, the only way to overcome William’s achievements in this war is to go on an offensive
here.
If they defeat Leo in a long-term siege as William planned, the achievement for his defeat will go to
William first. To prevent that, they have no choice but to defeat Leo themselves now.
There were also many who thought that Henrick would not listen to their protest anyway and gave up.
2202
They thought that he would change his mind once his attack got repelled back so, in the end, the
generals who oppose the attack are not that anxious about it.
The battle for the position of vanguard continued for a while and Henrick finally decided on the
winner.
“I will leave the vanguard to General Ruman!”
“I gladly accept!”
“Good! Serve the soldiers with alcohol and the food we brought! They have a big day tomorrow!”
“To the whole army? Your Highness.”
“Of course! I allow no discrimination! Treat them all equally!”
“However……..we also have those on patrol duty.”
“What would you do if they became dissatisfied with their treatment? It will affect the morale you
know?”
“Before dissatisfaction, the soldiers might feel anxiety instead. Please reconsider, Your Highness.”
“Fine, if you are going to say that much then only give the lookouts the food.”
The generals bowed at Henrick’s decision.
Accepting advice and do not disregard the soldiers.
Henrick was proud of himself for making a good decision.
He is properly observing his surroundings and decides on his move accordingly.
Personally, Henrick has his reason to eliminate William and launch this attack.
“How was it? Gied. Am I a good commander?”
“You are a splendid commander, Your Highness. No general would go so far for every soldier like you.”
Henrick’s confidence was boosted at Gied’s words.
He has the blood of Adler that excels in warfare and now that blood is in full bloom.
He will not be defeated by the like of Leo.
“It’s finally the time for my decisive battle with Leonard. Should I be heading out to face him myself?”
“Hmm, don’t be too reckless alright? If something were to happen to you then I will not be able to face
Duke Horsvath after all.”
2203
“I will be careful, Your Highness.”
The two look forward to their battle tomorrow with a smile.
Meanwhile, at the castle, Leo received a report.
“The leader of the enemy’s reinforcements is Prince Henrick, Your Highness.”
“So it seems.”
Leo was staring at the enemy camp while listening to Marquis Greisner’s report.
Smoke from cooking is rising from their camp.
That in itself is not unusual.
However, Leo detected a significant change.
“How do you see this? Marquis Greisner.”
“Yes…..? They are probably preparing their meal…….”
“The scale is too large. Ever since the battle started, I have never seen them preparing meals on such a
scale. Given the limited supply of their army, it is unlikely that they will suddenly increase today’s
portion. Unless the enemy is trying to boost their soldiers’ morale that is.”
“!? Then are they going to attack!?”
“It’s Henrick we are talking about. He probably doesn’t want William to have all the credit. Also, I can
see his personality from the attitude of their army. They treated it as though they have already won
the rebellion.”
The match is not decided until the last moment.
To talk about who gets the credit means that the opponent is already thinking about what happened
once they won.
It is not necessarily a bad thing but if that is the only thing in the head of the commander who leads
tens of thousands of troops then they can not win.
Only a great genius is capable of that.
“Dispatch the cavalry through the back gate. Be swift and silent.”
“To take the initiative, I see. As you wish.”
2204
“Katrina and the Dragon Knights are to standby in the sky. Let me know immediately if something
happens.”
“Yes, sir! Should I inform Vinfried-dono and the others at the branch castle as well?”
“I don’t want to risk being detected. If it’s Vin then he should be watching our movements right now
and act accordingly. Be discreet.”
“Yes, sir! I will tell the men to be discreet.”
Saying so, Marquis Greisner bows and leaves the room.
Then, someone arrived at Leo’s side as though to replace the Marquis.
“We are going to attack?”
“Yeah, I will count on you too okay? Sieg.”
“There’s finally a chance to attack huh. All the waiting made my shoulders stiff already.”
“Should I give you a massage?”
“A man is no good. It doesn’t feel right unless it’s the soft hands of a beautiful woman.”
“HaHaHa, then it looks like we have to get back to the capital soon huh. It’s hard to see beautiful
women on a battlefield after all.”
Leo laughed and turned his eyes to the enemy.
At that time, Char who led a total of 5,000 troops from the nobles’ territories near the frontline was
also in a position where the enemy camp could be seen.
“We received a report that a lot of cooking smoke rose from the enemy’s encampment. How should we
proceed?”
“I’ve seen it too. Even if they have excess supply, that is still way too much. They might plan to make a
big move tomorrow so stay on alert.”
Following the report of a member of the Narbe Ritter who went out for reconnaissance, Char turned
her gaze to the enemy camp.
It appears that the enemy is serving meals to the whole army and the sound of them partying could be
heard from a distance. They probably served alcohol as well.
The reason for such an action should be to boost the soldiers’ morale.
It is something that often happens before launching an attack.
2205
That’s why Char ordered her soldiers to be on alert.
So that they can move out immediately when something happens.
“If it’s me I would target the enemy’s headquarters now though.”
“I would do that as well but we are only reinforcements. The one who will move is Prince Leonard. We
will watch out for his movement and match it accordingly.”
“If he doesn’t move then we will be stuck though?”
“We are not an elite unit. The Narbe Ritter might be able to pull off an attack on their headquarters but
in the end, most of our soldiers are a gathering of local nobles’ knights and soldiers. Even if all 5,000 of
us attack, the enemy will not retreat. So if we are going to get stuck anyway then we might as well use
it as a chance to wait for the Union’s main force.”
“I see, I was thoughtless. Please forgive me.”
“It’s okay. We might have to ambush their headquarters if Prince Leonard’s force can’t withstand the
attack after all. When the time comes I will leave it to you.”
“Please rest assured. With that degree of defense, We can break through them while half asleep.”
While bitterly smiling at Lars, Char begins to consider a plan in case Leo goes on an offensive.
2206
SPT Chapter 344
Special Thanks to Double Tap who is still bashing Goal-kun with critical hits over at Kofi…….RIP
-Mr.Graverobber
At the Headquarters
Morning of the next day.
Gied left his tent amidst the cold.
“Good morning. Gied-sama.”
“Hmph……it seems I didn’t do well holding my excitement huh.”
While muttering so in a drunken tone, Gied brushes his hair up.
He then gives an order to a soldier who was standing guard at his tent.
“Prepare a horse. I will head to the headquarters.”
“Yes, sir!”
While waiting for his ride, Gied stares at the castle.
The image of him brilliantly breaking through the enemy’s counterattack and climbing the castle wall
is vivid in his mind.
As if to give blessing to Gied, a noise that sounded like a cheer rose from the frontline.
“The soldiers are raring to do this huh………this battle is as good as won.”
It is not common for morale to be this high.
Leo’s army which was defeated by the Dragon Prince and could only escape to the castle would stand
no chance against this army.
As he thinks so, Gied heard hoses’ footsteps approaching him.
However, the number was too big.
“Wh, what is going on…….?”
“REPORTING! ENEMY ATTACK! THE ENEMY HAS LAUNCHED AN ATTACK!!”
“Enemy attack!? Weren’t they supposed to be inside the castle!?”
2207
“They rode out, sir! Our frontline was easily torn apart and the whole army is in confusion!”
When he received that report, the soldier who brought the horse to Gied looked at his complexion.
It was a complete surprise attack.
The only way for them to recover from this is for the commander to head to the frontline and take
command or order the entire army to withdraw immediately.
However, Gied did not give those orders.
“Damn it! Hand it over!”
“Gied-sama!?”
Gied took the horse rein from the soldier and straddles on the horse.
He then gives this order to the surprised soldier.
“Protect this place to the death! Don’t let any of them pass even if it costs you your life! I will head to
His Highness Henrick!”
“We can’t possibly hold out for long, sir!”
“Even if it’s only a minute longer you have to buy time for me! Failure is unacceptable!”
Just like that, Gied rode off to the headquarters.
The place no longer has a commander.
He left without giving any good instructions.
The soldier’s face distorted in frustration but the footsteps of the horses only got louder.
The enemy’s surprise attack unit was just around the corner.
“Damn it!”
The soldier wields his spear and runs toward the approaching horsemen.
A young knight was leading the charge.
The soldier stabs his spear out at the knight.
“YAAAAAA!!”
However, the spear was cut in half at the handle.
He couldn’t see the movement of the sword at all.
2208
The soldier closes his eyes, preparing for death.
However, it never came.
“Do not kill unnecessarily! If they do not resist then leave them alone.”
“……Eh?”
“Don’t worry about the small fishes! Our target is the enemy’s headquarters! Only those who have
entrusted their lives to this Leonard may follow me!!”
The young knight, Leonard, passed by the soldier while giving out his command.
Just like that, many horsemen rode past the soldier.
Realizing that the one who attacked him was the enemy’s commander, the soldier was convinced of
his defeat.
There is no way that an army whose general fled at the first sign of danger can win against such an
army.
“Your Highness Henrick!”
“Gied! It’s a surprise attack! Leonard launched a surprise attack on us! That damn coward!”
“Yes! I received the report!”
At the command tent.
Gied kneels in front of the upset Henrick.
He then immediately proposed a plan.
“They are aiming for you, Your Highness. Let us fall back first and relocate our headquarters.”
“Don’t be absurd! If we do that the whole army will collapse on itself! Your Highness! Let’s push them
back from the headquarters and launch a counteroffensive!”
The general who was standing at Henrick’s side was furious at Gied’s proposal.
If the headquarters withdraw alone, it is like the commander running away by himself. If that
happens, no soldiers would have the will to put up a fight against the enemy.
However.
“It is as Gied says……Leonard’s aim is me……..I’m retreating!”
“As expected of you, Your Highness!”
2209
“Your Highness Henrick! If that is your plan then please order the whole army to retreat! The high
command should never retreat alone!”
“If the whole army retreated, who will stall Leonard for me!? I am the commander here you know!?
Everything will be over if I’m killed!”
“At this rate, the whole army will collapse, Your Highness!? If only the commanders at the
headquarters fall back, our side will be at a disadvantage! Are you planning to leave your name here as
a war criminal!? Even if you are His Highness Gordon’s younger brother, he will not spare your life
you know!?”
“N, No way……”
“Your Highness Henrick! There is no problem at all! Everything was William’s fault for leaving the
frontline unattended! This would never have happened if he was here!”
Despite the fact that it was them who forced William to withdraw from the frontline, Gied pulled out
that twisted logic.
However, Henrick seemed to be convinced with that.
All he has to do is blame everything on William.
If he does that he can run away.
As his body trembled, Henrick repeatedly nodded.
He continued to see Leonard as his rival because he was afraid of being compared to him.
Henrick knew well how excellent Leonard is.
Both in academics and warfare.
Leonard has always been above him.
It’s that Leonard they are dealing with here. There is no mistake that he is leading the charge himself.
He can picture his head dropping at the swing of Leonard’s sword.
“Your Highness! You must not lose your will! Please look! Every general is still here fighting for you!
Since it is a surprise attack, there are surely not that many of them! We must push back from the
headquarter and establish contact with our generals! Let’s get through this together! If we can endure
this then you will be a hero!”
“A hero….that’s right……I’m……!”
Henrick’s fear started to take hold of him but he remembered the reason he came here.
He came here for Conrad’s sake and to make a name for himself.
2210
Seeing Henrick like that, Gied’s cheeks cramped up.
He can’t escape unless Henrick does first.
However, when Henrick was about to recover, a sound echoed that dropped him right to the depth of
despair.
The low sound of a warhorn.
“Wh, What!?”
“A warhorn……don’t tell me……”
“The Imperial Army does not use a warhorn, Your Highness! It’s the Northern Nobles!”
When Gied’s scream rang out.
A big thunder struck down in the direction where the sound of the warhorn was coming from.
[[O’ thunders of the sky・Show me your malevolent figure・Shining Flashes・Gather and form a single
line・Scorch and illuminate the earth——-Thunder・Fall]]
5 verses thunder magic.
After chanting that on horseback, Char swung down her right hand.
At the same time, a huge thunder struck the enemy army from the sky.
Breaking through the confused army, Char and her soldiers head to the enemy’s headquarters.
Seeing them rushing in, the already confused soldiers screamed in fear and ran away.
“It’s the Thunder God……! The Thunder God is here!”
“It’s Duke Lowenstein!”
They didn’t confirm the caster’s identity.
They simply saw a powerful thunder magic but the soldiers could connect that to Duke Lowenstein
with that alone.
And the words quickly spread throughout the enemy army.
“It went well.”
“Not yet. I have to take down the enemy headquarters while they are still confused.”
2211
“Reporting! The enemy headquarters has begun to retreat”
“What?”
Lars frowned at his subordinate’s report.
No movement indicates the enemy army’s withdrawal.
If that report is true then it means that the enemy commander is retreating by himself.
That thought came to Lars but he hesitated to say it out loud because he doesn’t think that there is a
commander who would do that.
However, Char is not a soldier so she doesn’t share that same hesitation.
“The enemy’s commander is withdrawing! Are you people going to fight for those that abandoned
you!? If you do not resist then we will not take your life! Make way!”
Char’s voice shaved off the enemy soldiers’ fighting spirit.
Seeing the flag of their headquarters getting farther away, the soldiers’ morale greatly diminished.
Naturally, even if they try to stop the approaching enemy, they can not hope for any reinforcement.
They are just disposable pawns.
No one risks their life to earn time for their retreat. After all, Henrick has not yet acquired that level of
loyalty.
“All men advance! We are chasing the enemy’s commander!”
Char issued her command when she saw that the enemy soldiers completely stopped resisting.
In that situation, Lars runs up to Char’s side.
“Please fall back a little behind us. There might be an ambush ahead.”
“If there is then I will just blow them all up!”
“Seriously……”
Char gallops her horse ahead without listening to Lars’s advice.
While sighing at her figure, Lars orders his subordinates to protect her surroundings.
Just like that, Char and her force broke through the enemy’s flank and approached the enemy’s
commander.
2212
SPT Chapter 345
Is it raining season already?
-Mr.Graverobber
Confusion on the Battlefield
The battlefield fell into chaos.
Henrick had about 20,000 troops surrounding the castle.
Leonard personally launched a surprise attack on them with 5,000 cavalries.
Henrick’s army which partied with alcohol on the eve of the battle thought that they would be the
ones who will launch the attack so they could not respond to the surprise attack at all.
Their front easily collapsed and they could not put up any organized resistance.
In addition, 5,000 reinforcements from the Northern Nobles led by Char blitzed into Henrick’s army’s
right flank.
The soldiers who misunderstood Char’s preemptive lightning strike to be the doing of Duke
Lowenstein are in a panic.
To top it off, the withdrawal of their commander further plunged them into chaos.
The generals who were trying to rebuild their forces on various fronts can do nothing but curse at
such foolishness.
Still, they command their subordinates and continue to fight. After all, if they lose here, there is
nothing left for them but to be treated as a criminal.
Getting defeated here is the worst development given that they just went out of their way to get
William away from the frontline.
Among those generals, the generals on the left-wing side try to put together a unit to flank Leo since
they are least affected by the confusion of Leo’s attack at the center of their formation.
As the people at the headquarters retreated, it became necessary for Leo and his men to plunge
deeper into their army.
Therefore, it was possible for them to flank him from the left-wing.
The decision to abandon the headquarters was made only by the generals there and it was not a
strategy to lure Leo deeper inside at all.
2213
However, to Char’s group that doesn’t know about their circumstances, this appeared like some kind
of strategy to them.
“His Highness Leonard’s unit at the center is in danger!”
“So they only pretend to retreat to lure His Highness in!?”
Lars also saw it as the enemy’s tactic.
In fact, such a tactic is not uncommon at all.
If they can not quickly settle this, the surprise attack unit itself will be the one who ends up
surrounded.
However, Char disagreed.
“This was an arbitrary decision. If this was really a strategy then they should have done it better.”
“But……”
“Moreover, it seems that His Highness came prepared. We will keep pursuing the enemy commander.”
Char said so while looking up at the sky.
The enemy unit from the left-wing tried to flank Leo’s unit.
However, the Dragon Knights descended down to attack them.
The enemy’s intention is obvious from the sky.
Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knights were not so naive to allow them to do that.
And there is another reason.
There was another unit that is actively protecting Leo’s group.
“Good grief……..I think that his reliance on my guessing ability is too reckless though.”
“His Highness must’ve placed that much trust in Vinfried-sama, no?”
As Vin sighed on top of his horse, Lynfia does a follow-up for Leo.
Vin who had been entrusted with the branch castle led his 1,000 elite troops out of the castle when he
read that Leo was planning to go on an offensive.
The reason that his arrival was a little delayed was not that he couldn’t prepare the troops in time but
because he was getting rid of the enemy soldiers who were heading for the castle and watch out for
those that may try to flank Leo from behind.
2214
And sure enough, a unit from the enemy’s left wing was trying to flank him.
“Do you think that their retreat was a trick?”
“I can’t say. Henrick may be mediocre among the princes but he is still an Adler. I don’t doubt that he is
capable of such a strategy. If he is calm enough to do that, that is.”
“You are saying that he is panicking?”
“Even if he was appointed as the commander, he is a prince that knows little about the battlefield you
know? He just received a surprise attack when he was about to launch a full-scale assault. Moreover,
Leo is leading the charge himself. Once he notices that his life is in danger, he will surely get scared.”
“Then it was an on-spot decision? It seems that the enemy also has some decent generals isn’t it.”
“Even if there are, it is just a matter of stopping them though. A wise general would obey Gordon and
rely on the Dragon Prince from the start. A good general would never give Henrick the command after
all.”
After the enemy unit’s movement was stopped by the Dragon Knights, Vin ordered his men to attack
them with arrows.
Even if you charge a 1,000 men unit at the enemy, they will only be engaged in a melee.
For a unit that has to pay attention to the sky, raining them down with arrows should be enough to
confuse them.
Going that far is plenty enough.
“UOOOOOOO!!?? Arrows! They are shooting at us!”
“Damn it! Watch out for the Dragon Knights!”
Vin gazed at the Dragon Knights who are running through the sky.
There is no White Flying Dragon among them.
“That Leo……he already read that the enemy’s commander would choose to retreat huh?”
“Vinfried-sama. The enemy is heading toward the castle.”
“Too few. They won’t be able to take the castle with that many. It seems like Leo got some
preparations in place too.”
Vin glanced at the castle and immediately averted his eyes away from it.
Above the castle wall.
The Knights of the 6th Imperial Knights Corp are flying at low altitudes.
2215
They are repelling the enemy troops that are approaching the castle by barraging them with their
magic wands.
If they concentrated their firepower, a small group of enemies shouldn’t be able to get close to the
castle.
The one who can make a decision to launch a large-scale assault is no longer present. The enemy
generals have no choice but to command their units individually. In other words, they have no way to
cooperate.
Such sporadic attacks cannot change the situation for them.
“We are going to keep harassing them like this. Lynfia, I’m giving you a hundred men. Find and defeat
their generals.”
“10 would be enough. I would stand out less that way too.”
“That’s a great help.”
While shrugging his shoulders, Vin kept issuing instructions to his men.
His plan is to attack the enemies that are recovering and prolong this chaos as much as possible.
Separating herself from Vin’s unit, Lynfia took her men and cut into the enemy’s camp.
She sewn through the confused and fleeing soldiers and cut down their commanding officers. if she
keeps this up, she will eventually reach their generals.
The result was mostly decided already.
The Dragon Knights were watching Leo’s unit from the sky from the beginning.
If the enemy made any movement, they were ordered to intercept them.
However, there was one Dragon Knight who received a different instruction.
Not knowing that, the enemy’s high command withdrew toward the mountains.
Henrick decided to go through the mountains and retreat to the city located behind it.
Henrick knew Leo well. He is a man who will go through with it once he sets his mind on something.
He will never make a half-hearted attack.
As long as his aim is the commander, he will use every method at his disposal to get to Henrick.
Henrick’s brain is desperately working on a way to ensure his safety.
2216
The reason why he rushed into the mountains was that Leo’s unit was a cavalry unit.
Cavalry can not exhibit their full power in places other than flat plain.
Also, the mountainous area is perfect for setting up an ambush.
This will make Leo feel wary of ambush and discourage the pursuit.
Henrick’s army has greater numbers and the confusion will not last forever.
Leo will eventually have to retire once the generals on the scene recover and become able to organize
the army again.
Henrick’s plan was to run away until then.
The idea behind it wasn’t wrong. In fact, Vin is doing everything he can to prolong the chaos and Leo
instructed the Dragon Knights to intercept the enemy’s movements for that very reason.
However, that wasn’t the only move Leo made.
While he took actions to prolong the confusion, he also took steps to guarantee that everything will be
over swiftly.
“Haa Haaa! Run! Just Run!”
Henrick runs through the mountains while rushing his own escorts.
He already got separated from Gied but that wasn’t important to Henrick right now.
The important thing is his life.
That’s why Henrick continued to run. However, the escorts that were running beside him were struck
down by a lightning strike from above.
He knew.
Leo had used his strongest trump card to corner him.
“It’s the White Dragon Knight!!!!!!!”
“Intercept! Intercept!!”
“Impossible! This guy!? He’s coming at us while sewing between the trees! UOOOAHHHHH!!”
It was Finn who flew down at them from the sky.
While avoiding the trees, Finn continued to attack Henrick’s group.
Being occupied by the thought of escaping, Henrick’s group couldn’t put up much resistance at all.
2217
SPT Chapter 346
Special Thanks to Double Tap: anyone has a pokemon with Harden? Goal-kun can’t hold out much
longer.
-Mr.Graverobber
Escape Plan
When the enemy commander withdrew to the mountains, Finn who had been ordered to pursue him,
launched an attack at the most guarded place in their formation.
The area with the most escort soldiers.
However, Finn noticed something.
“Nova!”
While capturing Henrick in his sight, Finn pulled Nova’s reins and flew up to the sky.
A knife flew past the place Finn and Nova were at earlier.
There are assassins among Henrick’s escorts.
Henrick has inherited about 30 percent of Zandra’s faction and some among them were assassins.
Leading them was an elite assassin and Zandra’s close aide, Gunther.
At the rebellion in the capital, Gunther was fatally wounded by Sebas but he succeeded in escaping the
Imperial Capital after receiving some medical treatment.
And right now he is here to serve Henrick.
“Your Highness, please run.”
“Gunther! I leave this to you.”
With an expression of relief, Henrick keeps running away with his other escorts.
Finn tried to chase them but the moment he approached Henrick-
A magically created knife flew at him from behind.
Finn managed to avoid it at the last second but he had to give up chasing after Henrick.
Against other assassins, he might not have done that but he judged that if he turned his back against
this person, he would die.
2218
He can escape to the sky and give chase again but they would only be repeating this again.
“What’s wrong? Don’t you want to run off to the sky?”
“I’m not the only one chasing him………I……will stop you here.”
“The one who does the stopping here is me. No one is as troublesome as you after all. White Dragon
Knight.”
A person that can freely fly in the sky and attack from a long distance.
Running away safely from such a person is impossible.
He is someone that they need to stall in order to escape but there were only a few on Gordon’s side
that can forcibly stop Finn and Nova.
All they can do right now is to draw his attention away and make the person himself choose to stop his
pursuit.
The plan was successful.
The only thing left is to earn time for Henrick to getaway.
“Let’s go!”
Gunther threw several knives at Finn.
Finn moved sideways to avoid it but the knives kept homing at him.
Finn parried them off with his magic wand and fired off a lightning strike.
However, Gunther’s figure disappeared when he lightly jumped up into a tree.
His figure is nowhere to be seen but there is no doubt that he is still around.
“Nova. I’m counting on you.”
“Kyuu–!”
Finn is a first-rate Dragon Knight but his skill set is not very useful when fighting on the ground.
He is plenty stronger than your average soldier. As long as he can use his magic wand, he is no
different from a fast-moving mage. However, when he has to face a strong opponent, he will be forced
into a difficult spot.
The firepower of the magic wand is certainly powerful but it is not extraordinary.
Gunther also has many experiences fighting against mages. Compared to them, Finn’s firepower is not
that much different. The troublesome part for Gunther here is that Finn is capable of rapid-fire.
2219
However, if he disappears, his opponent would not have any target to hit.
a surprise attack is an assassin’s specialty.
Gunther who has drawn Finn into his area of expertise threw knives at Finn from his blind spot.
He threw two knives at Finn. One is a real knife while the other is a magical one following behind the
first.
Even if Finn can parry the first, the second one will hit its target.
It was Gunther’s favorite tactic.
However, Finn avoided that without even turning around.
To be accurate, it was not Finn who did that but Nova instead.
Nova immediately flew off and flipped in midair.
Gunther may be able to hide his presence from other humans and perform a surprise attack.
However, against a Flying Dragon, that is not enough.
Gunther opened his eyes in surprise while Finn fired off a lightning strike at him.
He jumped off the tree in a hurry but the lightning struck his right shoulder in midair.
“UGH!!”
The pain caused his movement to slow for a moment.
And Finn does not miss that.
Nova accelerated and brandished its sharp claws at Gunther.
He managed to avoid it but he couldn’t escape Nova’s momentum.
Gunther was blown away and hit the ground, unable to move.
However, a smile was spreading on Gunther’s face.
“What’s so funny?”
“It is funny…….I never thought that it would go so well you see…….”
“Go well?”
“I didn’t think that His Highness Henrick……..could win from the start…….After all, his subordinates
were only borrowed…….no one would choose to die for him……….that’s why we came up with an
escape plan……”
2220
The moment Gunther said that.
Assassins who had been lying in wait appeared around Gunther.
At the same time, a wall of flame was created between Gunther and Finn.
“Ugh!”
Seeing the rising wall of flame, Finn took a distance in a hurry.
The firewall is not a big deal in itself but they are currently inside a mountain.
The forest will burn if flame magic is used.
However, Finn soon noticed an abnormal development.
It was not only this place that is burning.
“No way!?”
“Hurry up and go back to your allies……they might get burned to death you know…….?”
“Are you sane!? You won’t be able to escape too right!?”
Finn can escape to the sky any time he wants but Gunther and his men have no choice but to travel on
land.
Depending on the direction of the flame, he won’t be able to survive this.
However, Gunther roared at him.
“What good does holding on to our lives have…..our master has already passed away. Why do we have
to hesitate to cross over to the other side……!”
“Damn it!”
Those eyes weren’t joking.
It’s not a bluff.
Even if they couldn’t escape themselves, they will not allow anyone to chase after Henrick.
Finn saw that and immediately abandoned the battle.
Leo’s troops are already in the mountains.
If they do not withdraw as soon as possible, they will be swallowed by the forest fire. Moreover, most
of the enemy army still remains.
He might be able to chase after Henrick but that will not guarantee the end of the battle.
2221
However, if Leo is killed the battle will be over.
Finn went up to the sky and looked for Leo’s unit.
After seeing him left, Gunther began to retreat into the mountains with his assassins.
Depending on the situation, they won’t be able to escape with their lives but Henrick still needs their
help.
Now that Zandra has died, Gunther’s only master is Henrick.
“Let’s go…..with this much obstacle, they should give up their pursuit…….”
Gunther began to retreat while dragging his aching body.
Leo’s troops in the mountain quickly withdrew and regrouped. They then plan a route to bypass the
mountains.
By that time, Henrick’s army had already begun to retreat with the individual general scatteringly
leading their own unit back to the rear.
That is a natural decision given that they will only be exposed to attacks if they choose to remain in
their position.
The number of deserting soldiers is increasing and many soldiers chose to stay because they couldn’t
fight anymore.
Thus Henrick’s army disappeared from the castle frontline.
2222
SPT Chapter 347
Yep, still alive. that’s the end of double chaps this week.
Who knew I could make it lol.
-Mr.Graverobber
Town Ambush
Henrick’s group continued to flee and entered a small town called Lage.
When they arrived in Lage, Henrick’s force was less than 500 soldiers. Moreover, they were all
exhausted and are in no condition to fight.
Their position was accurately grasped by Leo.
“As far as we can see from the sky, the enemy’s number is less than 500. They are all exhausted, Your
Highness.”
“I see…….”
Near Lage, Leo has 5,000 men on standby.
They can attack the town at any time at Leo’s order.
However, Leo didn’t give his order to attack.
“Your Highness……..I think that this is our opportunity to strike……..”
Although their ways were blocked by a forest fire, Leo read that Henrick was escaping to Lage and
used the shortest route to travel here. That’s why they managed to close the distance in such a small
amount of time.
The enemy is disorderly withdrawing. There is no sign that the rest of their army will join up with
Henrick’s group here.
After all, the main target here is Henrick and their high command.
No general would come to help a commander that abandoned them.
No matter how they think about it, this is an opportunity to attack.
However.
“It is too quiet.”
2223
“Quiet, is it? The enemy is exhausted, is it not because of that?”
“But that doesn’t apply to the civilians in the town. It should be clear that their town might become a
battlefield but let alone escaping, none of them is making any noise at all. Did you see any civilian from
the sky?”
“Certainly……..I will take a look again.”
“Please do.”
After asking Finn to scout the place out again, Leo split his unit in two and placed them at the east and
west side of the town.
The sound of cavalry moving is loud.
Ordinary people would scream in fear if they hear that.
However, there is no change in the town.
“Nothing huh…..”
On top of his horse, Leo started to think.
At that time, Finn returned.
“How was it?”
“I couldn’t spot any civilian at all, Your Highness. There was no reaction to the army’s movement
either.”
“I see. Relay this to everyone. We are withdrawing.”
“Withdraw…….?”
“Henrick isn’t worth the risk. Rather than civilians, there are probably soldiers hiding in those houses.
It’s probably a unit that Prince William prepared.”
Leo sighs and shrugs.
He expected that it won’t be so easy but he is better than Leo thought.
When he withdrew, he must have ordered his troops to be on standby for the worst-case scenario.
Even if he wasn’t on the battlefield himself, he still affected it.
It’s clear that if he forcefully aims for Henrick now, he can expect a severe counterattack.
“Our victory is already decided. We shouldn’t taint our victory. Let’s cleanly finish this up.”
“As you wish.”
2224
“……”
After thinking for a moment, Leo summoned a mage from his unit.
Then he ordered the mage to use a voice amplifying spell and turn toward the town.
“To the commander of the troops lurking in the town. This is Leonard. That’s a brilliant ambush plan.
Tell Prince William that it was a good move. And Henrick. If you value your life then start relying on
Prince William. He understands the situation better than you.”
And thus Leo’s unit started withdrawing.
Next to him.
Finn asked him a question while flying at low altitudes.
“Why did you give him advice, Your Highness? Is it because he is your younger brother?”
“You think I was being too naive?”
“If the only reason is that he is your brother then it was certainly too naive. He is a rebel after all.”
“Right. Well, it was partly because he is my brother though. But that’s not all.”
“Do you mind telling me your other reason?”
“It’s simple. Gordon will try to kill Henrick for this. To put on an example you see. But Prince William
will stop him. In this situation, it would be bad for Gordon to kill his own brother. Although Henrick
had made a mistake, the generals who couldn’t stop him were also to blame. If he kills his own
younger brother for this, their lives might be forfeit as well. Those generals will surely think like that.
Prince William will not overlook that seed of conflict. Especially if he was asked for help.”
“I see. But I can only think that your advice will only benefit the enemy though?”
“If Henrick survives, he will surely cause some kind of blunder again. By helping Henrick, Prince
William will have to go against Gordon. Don’t you think that it’s a good move?”
Leo knows how dangerous William is.
If he has Gordon’s complete trust and gets entrusted with the entire army, Leo can not imagine how
difficult their situation will become.
So it is clear that Gordon is wary of William.
The United Kingdom wants a puppet leader. Gordon is too strong for that.
It’s safe to assume that they will try to keep Henrick alive as a puppet.
Whether or not that is William’s intention, It is clear that is the United Kingdom’s intention.
2225
That’s why Gordon can not fully trust William.
“Not only martial arts, Your Highness is also good at plotting too.”
“I’m not that good at it you know. I’m just imitating it from someone……I have nothing on a real
tactician after all.”
“You are being too humble, Your Highness.”
“I’m not being humble. It’s the truth.”
Leo says with a smile.
After all, he is still wondering what that real tactician is doing behind the scenes right now.
Realizing that Leo has noticed the ambush, General Fidessa who was hiding in the town clicked his
tongue.
“As expected of the Hero Prince huh…….”
The commander has escaped.
Since they finally cornered the commander, you would normally want to take this chance to settle the
battle.
In order to exploit that opening, he had relocated the civilians and moved the troops in to prepare an
ambush. It was William’s suggestion.
However, the ambush was detected by only a slight sense of incongruity.
If it was him, he would definitely charge in.
“I can’t match him at all…….”
While muttering so, Fidessa left the house.
In the end, they still managed to protect Henrick.
If Leo is a hero in this situation, William is one as well.
After all, he managed to stop Leo’s advance even when he wasn’t on the battlefield.
As a general, he has to recognize that these two are vastly above him.
“I hope His Highness can accept that too though.”
Saying so, Fidessa headed to Henrick who is still trembling at the center of the town.
2226
Henrick was hiding his figure inside a sheet of cloth.
“Your Highness. Leonard’s army has retreated. Let us return to our home base.”
“N, No……Gordon-aniue…….he will kill me…….”
“It was a big defeat after all. I don’t know if this will end with just the commander’s head.”
“It, It, It was not my fault! It’s because William withdrew from the frontline!”
“Have you forgotten? It was Your Highness who made him do that.”
“Everyone agreed with me right!”
“Even so, Your Highness is the commander. Leonard left a piece of parting advice. If you don’t want to
die please rely on Prince William. I will leave it to Your Highness to decide.”
Saying so, Fidessa left.
Meanwhile, cavalries arrived in Lage.
The one leading them was Gied.
“Your Highness! Your Highness! It’s Gied!”
Gied tried to approach Henrick in a hurry.
However, Fidessa grabbed his shoulder.
“What!? How insolent!? Who do you think I am!?”
“His Highness’s aide, the eldest son of Duke Horsvath right?”
“If you already know that then let me go!”
“I have a question for you. Where have you been?”
“Do I have to report everything to you!?”
“Watch your tongue. I just lost my chance to fight Leonard’s army so I am quite frustrated right now.
Where have you been?”
Looking at Fidessa’s sharp eyes, Gied raised a small scream.
The soldiers around Gied were also glared at by Fidessa’s subordinates and couldn’t move.
Gied has no choice but to reply.
“I, I got separated from His Highness so I came here while fighting off the enemy!”
2227
“Hou? You fought and slipped through them? With your armor that clean?”
There was not even a single scratch on Gied’s armor.
Even Henrick’s armor has innumerable small scratches on it.
Fidessa glares at Gied with anger in his eyes.
“I have no intention to defend His Highness Henrick who escaped first but I am not going to forgive
those who used him as a decoy to ensure his own safety like you! How many soldiers do you think
have lost their lives in this!? Stop trying to save your face!”
“Wh, What did you say!? I am the eldest son of Duke Horsvath you know! Do you think I will allow
such an insult!?”
“What are you going to do about it then!? And that is what I should say to you in the first place! Even
though you should have given your life for His Highness, why did you escape by yourself!? What on
earth did you come to the battlefield for!? You damn incompetent!!”
“In, Incompetent!? It, It was the fault of the generals that we lost! It was not my fault!”
“When the people at the headquarters escaped first without giving out any order what can the
generals do!? Where and what were you doing back then!? According to His Highness’s escorts, it was
the eldest son of Duke Horsvath that advised His Highness to withdraw first, did you know that!?”
“I, ……Uwaaaaa!!?? What are you doing!?”
Fidessa pushed Gied to the ground in anger.
He then proceeded to kick Gied in the gut.
“With your armor that clean and uninjured body, you will only be mistaken by His Highness as a
coward who escaped by himself. That will surely tarnish the name of Duke Horsvath, no? We will help
you look like someone who just fought a fierce battle. Do it.”
“UWaaaaaaa!!?? Stop! It hurts! It hurts!!”
Fidessa ordered his men to beat up Gied.
Gied’s subordinates were subjected to the same thing.
Soon after, Gied and his men were covered in dirt and suffered countless small scratches.
“Uuu…..stop…..forgive me…..”
“This should make it more believable. After you got separated, you broke through the enemy and
came here, tell that to His Highness.”
“Uuu……”
2228
Seeing Gied hugging himself, Fidessa’s urge to kill Gied subsided a little.
They need someone to take responsibility for this big defeat.
This man is not a general but he still holds a high rank.
Gied’s responsibility is Duke Horsvath’s responsibility.
“Keep watch on him. Never let him out of sight. Prince William should be able to use him well.”
“Yes, sir!”
After giving that order, Fidessa began preparing a retreat.
2229
SPT Chapter 348
Special thanks to Mina, LessDark, and Double Tap…….RIP Goal-kun
-Mr.Graverobber
Great‐Grandfather and Great‐Grandson
At the hidden room inside the Imperial Sword Castle
I transferred inside it
“How are you doing? Gramp”
“Do I look like I can get sick? Rather, I should be the one who asks that question. How are you doing?”
“So-so I guess.”
The room belongs to this old man, my great-grandfather and my master.
It is full of precious spellbooks and grimoires. An ordinary mage would be overwhelmed with just a
glance of this room.
However, I have no business with those books today.
“I have a question to ask you.”
“A question? That’s rare. You didn’t even rely on me during the rebellion after all.”
“There were too many eyes. Your existence might be revealed and the movement of the rebels was
pretty much predictable in the first place. There was no need to borrow your wisdom for that.”
“Hou? So you have come to borrow my wisdom this time?”
“Right. First, I have to confirm one thing…….does the condition for innate magic to activate differ from
normal magic activation?”
There were many cases where we still couldn’t find out the condition for activating innate magic in a
person.
Why was it not available for that person since birth?
Why did it suddenly activate?
We don’t know the answer to those questions.
However, Gramp answered my question immediately.
2230
“Innate magic is still magic. The activation itself is not different. The user just uses it unconsciously.
That’s also a form of magic after all.”
“I see…..then I’m relieved.”
“I won’t pry why you asked me such a question then. Anything else?”
“As you are my predecessor who actually won the succession war, I want to ask you one thing. Have
you heard about the situation in the north from Sebas?”
“I heard. The third son established a base in the north and the northern nobles chose to remain
neutral right?”
“We have succeeded in uniting the northern nobles. All that left is to crush the enemy base in the
north.”
“I see. So what do you want to ask?”
“The war in the north was in a stalemate. If it’s you, what would you do?”
“Easy. I would assassinate the Emperor.”
As I thought.
It is the quickest way to cause a disturbance to our side and reverse the situation in one move.
The only problem is that the difficulty of that is too high.
“An elaborate assassination plan huh. Gordon’s mother is a skilled swordfighter comparable to the
Knight Commander. Father should already have some countermeasures in place though…….”
“If it’s a former consort then she should be able to understand the Emperor’s character well. If it’s you,
how would you do it?”
“…..launch an attack aiming at the citizens of the capital as a diversion. Father will never overlook an
attack right under his nose.”
“The Emperor’s protection will be weaker so they might aim for that chance to do it. But there should
be many advisers around the Emperor. It will not be easy to pull it off.”
“I’m not worried about that. The assassination won’t be successful. The problem is the turmoil in the
Imperial Capital.”
The rebellion just plunged the capital into chaos.
The situation calmed down while I was sleeping but it still isn’t back to normal yet.
If the enemy causes even greater chaos here, it will affect the other regions as well.
2231
The Imperial Capital is at the center of the Empire. It is the main relay point for our logistics.
“After the battle in the north is over, the reconstruction will require a large amount of manpower and
supplies. If the Imperial Capital is in turmoil at that time then we can send neither of that to the
north.”
“People will abandon their home if the battle is near. There will surely be a lot of people who lost their
homes, their jobs, and their families. Certainly, you would be troubled if the capital is in chaos.”
Gramp said it like it was someone else’s affair.
He is no longer an emperor.
He was already retired when his body was stolen by the demon.
That’s why he has already given up his responsibilities as an emperor.
However.
“If the Capital is in chaos, you can’t get your precious spellbooks even if you ask Sebas right?”
“Wha-t? That’s certainly true……”
There are two types of spellbooks here. One was those that Gramp collected before he was sealed and
the other were ones that Sebas procured.
Gramps read them all days so he had already finished them all. He uses knowledge from those books
to study new magic but it doesn’t mean that he doesn’t want new ones.
He always wants something new so he often asks Sebas to procure new spellbooks for him. One could
say that it is something that he lives for.
“That’s troubling…..what do you want me to do?”
“As Silver, I want you to minimize the turmoil in the Imperial Capital. I can’t leave the north after all.”
“Good grief……..I have died a long time ago. It is only a coincidence that I am still here. To rely on
chance like this, it seems that you still have a long way to go huh.”
“Only for this one time. I will handle the rest myself.”
“Well, that’s fine. It doesn’t involve the succession war that much anyway.”
With that said, Gramp accepted my request.
Gramp taught me ancient magic because he was thankful for his release and that my ultimate goal is to
cure my mother.
It was not for me to win the succession war.
2232
The people of this age should do something about this age themselves. That’s Gramp’s view.
Although he lends me his knowledge, he doesn’t lend me much power.
Since I know that, I didn’t rely on him before.
However.
“Gramp…..this succession war, it’s too strange. Don’t you think so?”
“Does it matter whether I think it is or not? What matters should be what you think of it.”
“…..I think that it is strange. When people got involved with the succession war, they changed. I can
understand that but…….this time the changes are too strange.”
“Then what will you do? Are you going to put it on hold?”
“Right now that is impossible. I……can only end it as soon as possible.”
“If it isn’t going to change what you must do then don’t mull over it. But you should still prepare
yourself.”
“I know. That’s why I have to ask. When you got your body stolen by a demon, you studied the demons
along with ancient magic right.”
“Right. That’s the reason why I bought the spellbook that the demon was sealed in.”
Gramp said with an expression of regret.
The reason he studied ancient magic in the first place was that he was studying the demons.
He judged that ancient magic would be an effective countermeasure against them so he began to study
it.
He ended up unable to fight the demon but his research itself was not in vain.
“Was the Demon King really defeated by the Hero 500 years ago?”
“No doubt about it. No matter which book I got my hand on, it clearly said that the Demon King was
defeated. It was the ancestor of that Brave house right? There’s no way that they would let the Demon
King escape.”
“Well, certainly……then, what about the Demon King’s subordinates?”
The Demon King has invaded this world together with many demons.
The demon who hijacked Gramp’s body was one of them.
In various shapes and forms, they have survived.
2233
There might be others.
“All the important aides were defeated by the Hero. Such tenaciousness may have been in their family
huh.”
“Then none of the powerful demons survived at all?”
“Yes. But…..there is one Demon that may have survived.”
“May have survived?”
“There is a great demon whose name always comes up when you study the demons, especially those
associated with the Demon King army. Why? Because that demon was purged by the Demon King
early in the war. That Demon was preaching the danger of the Hero and urged the Demon King to
withdraw.”
“There was such a demon?”
“There certainly was. He was an executive of the Demon King army and a powerful figure that pulled
the strings from the shadows. The Demon Duke Dantalion. He was the only aide of the Demon King
who did not fall at the hand of the Hero.”
If we proceed on the premise that the Hero did not overlook any demons, the demon who was not
defeated by the Hero may be alive.
However, it would be strange for a demon who got purged by the Demon King himself to survive.
I have heard how powerful the Demon King was. Even the Hero could not win against him without the
Holy Sword. He was that level of opponent.
“Is there any proof of his survival?”
“None. But if one of the Demon King’s aides were to survive, it would be Dantalion. Well, if he really
survived the purge then it’s natural to assume that he did not survive in one piece.”
“So he might have been gathering up power and started to move now?”
“Assuming that he only started to move now is wrong. He may have been making his moves since a
long time ago. If Dantalion is alive and still possesses the same ambition……it may not be a coincidence
that a demon hijacked my body.”
Saying so, Gramp’s face looked unprecedentedly serious.
It might not be wrong of me to say that the old man is thinking too much but given how strange this
succession war has become, I can not rule out the possibility that a demon might be involved.
In fact, Gramp himself has survived using a special way. Dantalion may have survived his
predicaments with a similar method.
2234
And if so, there must be some kind of cover.
“Gramp, let me ask this for the record. Where did you get the spellbook that the demon was sealed in
from?”
“I got it from Grimoire. I heard that it was a spellbook that was recently discovered you see.”
“You were careless huh.”
“Absolutely.”
I astoundedly sigh and Gramp also does the same.
Grimoire huh.
So that name came out here as well.
“It looks like we have to do a thorough investigation huh.”
“Do you have any clues?”
“More or less.”
The locations of their bases were written in the diary Zandra-aneue left me.
When the civil war is over, it might be better to give my priority to that.
“Alright, take care of the capital for me.”
“Going already? And I just came up with a magical composition too…..”
“I will join you when I return. Sorry but my brother is waiting.”
Saying so, I left the place while waving to the old man.
2235
SPT Chapter 349
Speicla Thanks to LessDark and DoubleTap.
It has become a competition in there now…..
Well, let’s start with a short chapter this week.
-Mr.Graverobber
All Forces Assembled
A few days later 12,000 knights gathered on Gnade hill.
If we wait longer their number will probably increase but we can’t afford to delay any more than this.
“Shall we go? Your Highness.”
Duke Lowenstein came to my tent for my approval.
My existence is known only to the nobles and some knights who participated in the meeting.
It would be okay for me to come out openly here but that will only serve to split their loyalty when we
join up with Leo.
Right now, I want them to think that it was the Northern Nobles’ move.
“Yeah. I will be troubling you to take the role of the commander for a while, Duke.”
“Fine. But I will have you show up before our decisive battle alright? It will help with the morale.”
“I think that the morale will only drop if I come out though.”
“It’s a commander’s job to do something about that.”
I shrugged at the harsh reply.
As we had such a conversation, Sebas appeared in the tent.
“Apologies for the interruption, sir. A report has come in.”
“What is it?”
“Leonard-sama has launched a counteroffensive, sir.”
“Leo did?”
2236
So there was a movement on the frontline too huh.
Even if we sent Char’s group ahead, I didn’t expect there to be a major movement before our main
force arrived……
“Did he clash with the Dragon Prince?”
Sebas shook his head at Duke Lowenstein’s question.
“No, sir. Prince William seems to have left the frontline. It was Prince Henrick who was in command of
the siege.”
“Henrick? How did it come to that?”
Things have become confusing.
The reason Leo couldn’t make his move was William’s presence.
However, the enemy removed William from the frontline and put Henrick in charge.
It was like they were trying to lure Leo out.
“I did not grasp the full picture of the enemy’s internal affairs but when the enemy withdrawal was
observed, Leonard-sama led 5,000 cavalries out for a surprise attack. It appears that Charlotte-sama’s
group also launched an attack accordingly. Unable to endure the assault, the enemy’s commander
retreated first resulting in the defeat of their whole army, sir.”
“The commander fled by himself huh……..that certainly sounds like Henrick.”
I muttered so while pondering on the situation.
Leo can now move freely.
We are no longer needed at the castle.
“Duke, how do you think the enemy will proceed next?”
“If they can’t keep Prince Leonard in check, they have no choice but to reorganize their forces and
rethink their strategy.”
“Judging from Gordon’s personality, he will try to bring Leo into a decisive battle. Prince William
shouldn’t oppose that either.”
The question is when and where.
It is possible for both Leo and Gordon to attack first.
If we can’t anticipate their movements then we can’t take advantage of the situation.
2237
“Sebas, look into the enemy’s forces. Both Gordon and William will not allow their forces to be inferior
to ours.”
“You are saying that they might be requesting reinforcements, sir?”
“No, they should have already requested it. To break the stalemate at the castle that is. But things have
changed. We have to adjust the strategy ourselves too.”
“But if we wait here we will not be able to make it in time. We must march to the frontline.”
I nod to Duke Lowenstein.
No matter how it will go, we won’t be able to do anything unless we are at the frontline.
“Advance the army to the frontline. Do not let our soldiers let their guard down. We must advance
carefully while observing the situation.”
“To not lure the enemy’s attention toward us huh……with Charlotte’s presence at the earlier battle,
they should already be plenty cautious of us though?”
“There’s no helping it if they are already cautious of us but I do not want to actively invite their
attention. This is for the sake of the north as well.”
Perhaps he understood what I wanted to say, the Duke nodded and left the tent.
There is a difference between when the northern nobles rush to Leo’s aid and when Leo to theirs.
Well, I don’t think that the enemy has enough leeway to pay attention to us though.
“Gordon has taken a huge hit with this huh.”
“No matter what form it takes, a defeat is a defeat after all.”
“Now, let’s look forward to how he will raise morale. If he kills Henrick, his whole army will be
overwhelmed by fear. But if he let Henrick off without any punishment, it will indicate that he agreed
that Henrick had no choice but to withdraw.”
Let’s see Gordon and William’s skills.
If he wants to kill Henrick then he should be able to come up with a trick to spare the generals.
However, if he wants to raise morale without cutting down Henrick then cheap tricks won’t cut it.
“Let’s see how this plays out shall we.”
When I said that, Sebas bowed and left.
While looking at the map of the north, I started thinking what Leo would do in this situation.
2238
SPT Chapter 350
Special Thanks to LessDark for dealing more dmg to Goal-kun. his second life is almost depleted
now….
Well, we are done with the short chapter, let’s get to the loooooooooooooooooooooooong one.
-Mr.Graverobber
Loyalty
“It was lucky of you that I arrived here before Gordon huh.”
Said William to Henrick who is currently hanging his head in front of him.
Following Henrick’s retreat, Gordon who had been restraining General Harnisch’s army was on his
way back to Wismar.
If nothing is done, he will eventually get caught between Leo and Harnisch.
Henrick’s defeat was an event that affected their whole war situation.
Soon, Gordon will arrive in Wismar.
Henrick who was brought back to Wismar like a criminal was waiting for his arrival but the moment
Gordon arrived, it would be his end.
However, Henrick still looked at William as if he was trying to snarl at him.
Seeing such Henrick, William sighed.
William was working on the supply transportation in the Dominion.
Two Chivalrous Thieves are rampaging in the Dominion’s territory.
The first one is an archer named Vermillion, the Chivalrous Thief that has long been battling against
the corrupted aristocrats of the Dominion. Due to the presence of this thief, the nobles of the
Dominion can not move as they pleased.
However, that alone did not hinder their supply transportation.
There is another thief who actively targeting their supply convoy.
What is more troublesome is that this new thief has not even shown his figure.
2239
What they could grasp was that he is an expert archer who can wipe out their whole convoy without
even the need to show up at the scene.
Due to the success of this unnamed archer, the nobles of the Dominion became reluctant in matters
involving military supplies. As a result, the United Kingdom is having a hard time delivering supply
through the Dominion.
William has threatened those nobles in an easy-to-understand way and promised them that he will
take care of the thieves in exchange for their facilitation of the supply transport.
That was what William had to do eventually but he knew that if he left the frontline, Leo would be
freed to move as he pleased. That’s why he didn’t do it sooner.
And it was proved that his fear was not unfounded.
Hearing of Henrick’s defeat, William rushed back to Wismar.
Thanks to that, he arrived a little earlier than Gordon and he can now talk to Henrick before Gordon
arrives.
“…..Don’t you have anything to say to me? Prince Henrick.”
“……For disrespecting you. I am truly………sorry…….”
“I don’t care about the disrespect. What I want to hear is what you have learned from your defeat.”
“…..I……didn’t want you to have all the credit……it was my mistake…….”
“That’s not a mistake. I am a person from another country. As a member of the Imperial Family who
sided with Gordon, it is not a mistake to try to eliminate me. That was an option. But you did not have
something that was absolutely needed to pull it off. Do you know what that is?”
“……is it experience……..”
Henrick timidly murmured.
In response, William shook his head.
“You lack the objective eyes to look at yourself. If you can look at yourself objectively, you will be able
to look at others in the same way. If you can see others objectively then you can objectively assess the
situation. Your choice to alienate me was a mistake. No, the choice to alienate me itself was not a
mistake but it was the situation you chose to do it in. You saw Leonard’s attack coming but you chose
to send me away because you were being overconfident. You are not as excellent as you would like to
think.”
“I, I never……!”
“The fact that you still can’t accept your defeat now is the proof. A good general can learn from their
failure and defeat.”
2240
Henrick couldn’t honestly accept those words because he is well aware of it in his heart.
Henrick sent William away because his pride did not allow him to lose to Leo. To top it off, he was not
cautious against Leo because his pride told him that he is superior.
William understands that the underlying problem here was Henrick’s high self-esteem.
“I……I!”
“When a commander ran away, it meant that he had abandoned his soldiers. As long as soldiers are
punished for deserting, the commander will also have to be punished.”
“No way……please help me!”
“How about you start by presenting me some benefits of helping you then?”
“I, I’m……a member of the Imperial Family! From the United Kingdom’s point of view, I should be easy
to use!”
“You are aware that you are the one responsible for this huge defeat right? I don’t feel like it’s worth
the trouble to help you here just because you seem easy to use.”
“No…..I…..I…..”
“You have no track record. You have no power. No experience, no skill. The only thing you can be
proud of is your blood. The fact that it was the only thing you brought up when you were cornered so
far proved my point.”
When William struck the reality in front of him, Henrick’s shoulders drooped down.
He desperately tries to come up with an argument but he couldn’t think of any.
Then he finally realized.
It is as William said.
“I….am not worthy of the Imperial Family…..”
“The Adler is excellent. You carry their blood but you do not have the readiness to learn. Those who
cannot grasp their own strength will never be strong.”
Henrick is not incompetent enough to not be worthy of his bloodline.
However, the person he chose to compare himself to was just too bad a match.
Unnecessary overreaching can only be harmful.
Each person has things they are good at.
2241
As long as a person understands that, they can stand up again.
“I will save your life. Stay by my side and learn. If you value the lives of the soldiers who died because
of you then do not waste this mistake.”
“You are…..going to help me……”
“I do not want my best friend to end his younger brother’s life with his own hand. Besides…..do you
think you can trust a general who can cut down his own younger brother?”
After telling Henrick to leave everything to him, William left the room.
Shortly after, Gordon arrived at Wismar
His destination is the room where Henrick is.
A sword was held in his hand.
“HENRICK!! DO YOU HAVE A LAST WORD!!”
Gordon, who kicked the door and entered the room, roared at Henrick.
In response, Henrick rubbed his forehead on the floor and apologized.
“I am sorry………everything……was my fault.”
“Exactly! Give me your head! I will cut it off and show it to the whole army!”
Gordon said and lifted his sword up.
However, William grabbed his arm.
“Stop, Gordon.”
“Why are you stopping me!?”
“If you cut him down now the generals will be wary of you. Don’t do it.”
“The whole headquarters fled without giving any command to the army you know!? If I don’t punish
the generals who ran away with him, how can I face the soldiers they abandoned on the frontline! It
will only set a bad example!”
“Prince Henrick is only a commander in name! There were generals who poisoned his ears! I am the
original commander of that front! It was those generals that sent me away to secure their own
achievements! If you kill Prince Henrick here, you will have to kill all of them too right!?”
“Then I will just cut them all down! I don’t need fools who can’t even read the situation!”
2242
“Is this the time where you can say that!? You have a decisive battle with Leonard waiting for you
right!? Right now you should forgive them and give them a chance to make up for their mistake!”
“Why are you going so far for Henrick? Did your country order you to protect him!?”
Gordon has no doubt in his friendship with William.
However, he does not fully trust the United Kingdom which is William’s home country.
He already expected them to try using Henrick to take his place.
However.
“If anyone tries to usurp you then I will kill my father! I came here for you! Do not mistake it! I am
protecting Prince Henrick to protect you and your army!”
William and Gordon’s eyes intensely locked and they glared at each other for a while.
The tense atmosphere dominated the room and the soldiers standing nearby couldn’t move.
At that moment that felt like an eternity, Henrick continued to rub his head against the floor.
He knows that if Gordon swings his sword down, his head will part from his body. However, Henrick
had no choice but to leave everything to William.
Then.
“…..do you not feel bitter at all?”
“You think I value my bitterness more than your victory?”
“…..fine. I will do it your way. I will spare Henrick.”
Saying so, Gordon lowered his hand.
However, their problem still remains.
“I’m fine with giving them a second chance but are you going to let those generals off the hook?”
“Punishment is still necessary. I want to have the Horsvath house take the blame but…..is that fine
with you? Duke.”
William asks Rolf who was standing outside the room.
To that question, Rolf reverently bowed his head.
“Please do, our humble house is at Your Highness’s command.”
2243
“Apparently, it was your eldest son, Gied who advised Henrick to withdraw. No matter what kind of
punishment awaits him, you have no objection, right? Of course, you will not be able to remain in your
current position either.”
“It was my son’s blunder. Naturally, I accept all responsibilities.”
Hearing Rolf, William frowns.
William didn’t like Rolf in the first place since he can not fathom his real intention.
Even though his son is at risk here, he doesn’t even protest.
He can not take a liking to such a person at all.
“Everyone, leave. I want to talk with Gordon alone.”
William dismissed everyone including Henrick and Rolf.
He then speaks to Gordon.
“Did you see how he was?”
“He didn’t even look like he was enduring it.”
“His face was saying that he was willing to see his son get executed. At worst, he might use that as a
reason for betraying us.”
“Then what do you have in mind? If we do not kill Henrick then, killing Gied here is the second-best
option.”
“Not necessary. You don’t need to use only his head to boost morale after all.”
Saying so, William quietly touched his sword.
Gordon gathered up the army stationed in Wismar.
He then stood on a podium and began giving a speech to his entire army.
“As you’ve heard, our army failed to restrain Leonard. In other words, we were defeated!”
Gordon who never admits defeat is telling his men that they’ve lost a battle.
The soldiers started making some noises at that but Gordon continued without minding them.
“I know the cause of our defeat! It was due to my younger brother, Henrick! Despite being the
commander, he chose to listen to cowardly advice! That’s why I came here intending to kill him! It is
2244
only natural! If I think about the soldiers who lost their lives, even if he is my family, his sin is
unforgivable!”
However, Gordon continues.
Something wrapped in cloth was held in his hand.
Removing the cloth, Gordon raised the object up for everyone to see.
It was an arm.
“When I was about to cut Henrick’s head,! Gied von Horsvath, his aide, cut off his own arm! He said
that he wanted me to delay the punishment! He begged me to give Henrick a second chance! A son of a
noble offered me his arm in exchange for Henrick’s life! I know that this arm is not nearly enough to
compensate for Henrick’s defeat! However! I decided to give Henrick a second chance! Why!? It was
because of the loyalty Gied has shown!! I too shall swear! To all of you here! I will put on a fight that is
worthy of Gied’s loyalty! We will win this war without fail!! No longer shall we suffer a defeat again!!”
In response to Gordon’s words, the entire army cheers.
They all cheer the name of Gied.
However, the truth is often disappointing.
“To make my brother out to be the prime example of a loyal subject and raise the morale of the whole
army………should I say that it is as expected of His Highness?”
A mansion in Wismar.
Inside a room in that mansion.
There, Reiner speaks to William.
Gied was sleeping on the bed in that room.
Doctors and maids are attending to him.
Since he got his arm lopped off earlier and was bleeding profusely, his life is still slightly in danger.
The reason for that was Gied crying and thrashing around so much that the doctor couldn’t treat him
immediately.
Gied, of course, did not agree to William’s proposal. After all, Gied is not someone that could willingly
offer his arm for someone else.
However, William cut off Gied’s arm without any hesitation.
For William, Gied’s will is of no concern.
2245
Every soldier at Henrick’s headquarters is now incorporated into William’s force and they will not
spread unnecessary rumors about what happened.
For their own sake, the generals who know the truth of what happened would desperately do their
best in the next battle. After all, the purpose of this was not to raise morale alone. It was also a
warning.
“Even when your brother’s life is in danger, you are still quite carefree huh?”
“He is a failure of a brother after all. I don’t mind even if he dies you know. I was raised by my father
but he was spoiled by my mother all his life. I thought that he would eventually commit a blunder
someday. My father seemed to expect a little from him though.”
“I see. So that’s why I can never read both you or your father huh?”
William said so as he glared at Reiner.
He couldn’t think that Rolf would expect something from Gied at all.
And from both of their reactions, William arrived at one conclusion.
“You expected Gied to fail right? But Duke Horsvath is still an important figure in Gordon’s faction. You
knew that we wouldn’t take his life. That’s why you are so carefree about this.”
Duke Horsvath is the leader of the nobles of Gordon’s faction.
Many nobles have joined Gordon’s faction because of him.
Unlike Henrick, He is someone that Gordon can not simply cut off.
And after he had made Gied into the symbol of a loyal subject, he can not demote Rolf into an idle
position either.
An untrustworthy subordinate that can not be removed.
Because they knew that, the Horsvath house has no need to panic.
“If that is truly the case…..what will you do about it?”
“If you betray us—I will kill you.”
William pulled out his sword at a speed that Reiner’s eyes couldn’t follow and put it at Reiner’s neck.
Even if it’s Reiner, his face still cramped up and cold sweat started running down his back.
Satisfied with that expression, William sheathed his sword and walked past Reiner.
“In our battle against Leonard, I will leave the vanguard to the Horsvath house. So do your best. No
one would object when the Horsvath house is so loyal after all.”
2246
“……I’m honored.”
If they might betray then just use everything they have to offer first.
Understanding William’s intention, Reiner glared at William’s back as he left.
2247
SPT Chapter 351
Goal-kun is safe today!!!!! (He’s already dead tho)
We are still at Gordon’s side of the story btw.
-Mr.Graverobber
The Place for the Decisive Battle
“A pleasure to meet you, Your Highness Leonard. I am Charlotte, the granddaughter of Marquis
Zweig.”
“It is nice to meet you, Lady Charlotte. I apologize for the earlier messenger.”
After Leo withdrew from Lage, he was receiving Char’s greeting.
When the forest fire broke out, Leo immediately sent a messenger to Char.
To relay that he wants her to help extinguish the fire with water magic.
Char acknowledged that command and left the pursuit to Leo to deal with the forest fire.
“No, we can not leave that fire alone after all.”
“You really saved us. And for the reinforcements as well, you arrived at a good time.”
“I am glad that I was able to be of use to you, Your Highness.”
Char still doesn’t bring up Al in this conversation.
After all, the information may leak to the enemy.
If the enemy knows of Al’s existence then they might make them think that they will have a decisive
battle with Leo while actually head to attack Al instead.
“For the time being, we have managed to break the siege. Lady Charlotte, how do you think the enemy
will move now?”
That question was to test Char.
Leo already understood how well she can judge the situation by the timing she chose to charge in but
he is testing how far she can read the war situation.
Depending on her ability, he will have to adjust how much work he is going to leave to her.
2248
“Whatever form it may be, a defeat is a defeat. The enemy needs a win. They will probably reorganize
their army for a decisive battle. They do not have enough leeway to fight a war on multiple fronts after
all.”
Leo nods to Char’s answer.
Leo also shared that opinion.
Whether he takes Gordon’s personality or the current situation into account, it is unlikely that he will
stay passive after suffering a loss like this.
A decisive battle with Gordon at the lead is the most probable.
“Then what do you suggest we do?”
“Let us gather our forces here as well. If we take long then more reinforcements may arrive for them
but the larger their army is, the harsher their supply situation will become.”
“Good. We will go with that. I want you to stay by my side and share your opinion. Is that okay with
you?”
“Yes, please leave it to me.”
Leo decided to add Char to his aides and instructed his army to enter the castle.
Then he sent a messenger to General Harnisch.
The message was to have him join them as soon as possible.
Thus both armies are moving toward a decisive battle.
It has been a week since Henrick’s defeat.
Gordon and William were in the process of reorganizing their army.
Among 22,000 of Henrick’s troops, 15,000 of them managed to withdraw to Wismar while nearly
7,000 soldiers went missing.
Some probably were lost to the battlefield and others likely deserted.
His defeat and the loss of 7,000 soldiers weren’t cheap.
“The only fortunate thing here is that most of the losses came from the Dominion’s army huh.”
William says nothing to Gordon’s words.
He doesn’t want to say that their deaths were fortunate.
2249
However, he does not deny it as it is a fact.
Initially, the number of troops that arrived at Gordon’s side was 20,000. 5,000 of them came from the
United Kingdom and 15,000 came from the Dominion.
Of these 20,000 soldiers, 5,000 of the United Kingdom’s soldiers joined William along with another
5,000 from the Dominion. The 10,000 remaining soldiers were split between Gordon and Henrick who
was ordered to join William at the frontline.
Soldiers of the United Kingdom withdrew from the frontline along with some from the Imperial Army
before Henrick’s defeat.
Most of the lost 7,000 troops were soldiers from the Dominion’s army. Their morale and skill are
already inferior to the other armies so when they were placed on the frontline, they couldn’t react or
cope with the surprise attack at all.
The number of deserters is likely to be large but that is not their concern right now.
Their army has indeed decreased in number but in terms of strength, they did not suffer that much
loss.
William and Gordon are on the same page on that.
“With you taking the lead, the Imperial army should be gathered around you. I will lead the armies of
the United Kingdom and the Dominion myself.”
“I don’t see any other option here. What about the reinforcements from the United Kingdom?”
“I expect around 10,000 men. All of them are from the United Kingdom’s Army. the Dominion can not
afford to send any more troops over anymore.”
“Including the noble’s army and the unit that remained to protect Wismar, we have a little over 60,000
men huh.”
That number was dissatisfying for Gordon.
Originally, Gordon had 40,000 soldiers. With the addition of 20,000 reinforcements, he had 60,000.
Despite the loss of 7,000, he can make up for it with another 10,000 reinforcements.
However, Gordon’s original plan was to elicit generals and soldiers from the Empire to join his side.
Of course, some have joined him but the number is considerably less than he expected.
Counting in the troops needed to maintain and secure their base, he only has about 60,000 troops
available.
On the opposite side, Leo has around 30,000 to 40,000 troops. However, the information he received
suggested that the northern nobles have begun to move so there is a possibility that their number will
increase even further.
2250
“We need to carefully pick the battlefield to secure our absolute victory huh.”
“The question is whether they will accept our challenge or not. They won’t fall for a place that clearly
disadvantages them you know.”
“With Leonard’s personality, he will want to end this battle as quickly as possible. He will accept some
disadvantages if it’s a decisive battle.”
“A long-term conflict is undesirable for our side too after all. We still have the problem with the supply
as well.”
While saying so, William and Gordon unfold a map to figure out where their battlefield should be and
what kind of strategy would guarantee their victory.
They started discussing.
They had many discussions like this back in the United Kingdom.
The discussion continued for a while and eventually, they agreed on one place.
“As I thought, this place is the only option huh…..”
William said and pointed to a place on the map.
It was a plain.
However, its terrain is surrounded by mountains in the north and rivers to the south. Both armies can
only fight each other in the middle.
If they can secure the mountain they can maintain an overwhelming advantage here.
“Oster plain…..if we can secure Mt. Haina in the north then our victory is secure.”
Oster plain was a plain located between Leo’s castle and Wismar.
Although it is a little closer to Gordon in terms of distance, it is highly possible that Leo will accept the
battle here.
It was the best battlefield for Gordon as it is large enough for tens of thousands of soldiers from both
armies to deploy here.
“The problem is how to lure Leonard here though…..”
“I will handle that. I will make it look like the whole army is moving there. Once Leonard sees our
movement he will surely try to get there before us but by that time we will already have full control of
the mountain with the Dragon Knights. There’s no problem at all.”
“What would you do if he doesn’t buy it?”
2251
“We will have to adjust our strategy but they do not have enough leeway to afford that. Even if it
smells like a trap, he doesn’t have any choice but to accept it.”
“It’s fine if that’s the case but there is one problem left.”
“Hmm? Is there anything else?”
William nods.
He then put two pieces on the plain.
One is representing Leo’s army while the other is Gordon’s.
In addition, William placed another piece behind Gordon’s army.
“Because our back is blocked by mountains and rivers respectively, the means for escape of both
armies is to escape to the east or west side. If our rear is compromised, we will be locked in a pincer
attack.”
“They do not have the army to do that.”
“They will if the northern nobles joined them. Do not let your guard down.”
“Even if those people move, we are the one who decides the battlefield. Considering the distance, they
do not have enough time to march behind us. Besides, even if they try to cross the mountain, the
Dragon Knights will be there to alert us. They can’t possibly attack our rear by surprise.”
“That is certainly true……”
“You worried too much. Even if the enemy appears behind us, we can concentrate on one side and
break through them. As long as they can not cross the mountain, we will have the advantage on this
plain.”
What Gordon said was not incorrect.
Among the armies facing Gordon, Leo’s army is at the forefront while the army of the northern nobles
is further behind him.
Expecting a scenario where such an army outmaneuvered him is unrealistic.
“Gordon…..I might be thinking too much into this but until now, the Emperor still doesn’t make his
move. Does this not seem strange to you?”
“He is busy dealing with the Sokol empire and the Kingdom. If he dispatches the army, he won’t know
for sure which side they will choose to join after all.”
“Right. It is as you said. But don’t you think that that way of thinking is too convenient for us? Is it not
possible that the Emperor has already dispatched reinforcements?”
2252
“There has been no report of the army’s movement you know?”
“Our defeat in the capital was due to Leonard and Arnold who secretly sabotaged our move. If Arnold
is somewhere in the north…….he might be coming at us with some ridiculous plan again.”
“You are being too cautious. The Imperial Capital was his backyard but the north is different. You
don’t have to be so vigilant about him.”
Saying so, Gordon laughed at William’s words.
However, William’s clouded expression does not clear up.
Since they have the advantage here, William couldn’t help but doubt everything.
He fears that there might be someone who can turn the table on them.
However, he still couldn’t see how.
In the end, Gordon’s army decided on the Oster plain to be their battlefield.
2253
SPT Chapter 352
Coffee Appreciation Dayyyy!!!! It’s the weekly celebration of Goal-kun’s death yanno!! BE HAPPY!!!!
Also, I got dragged out today so it’s an automated chapter…….
-MR.Graverobber
The Awe Inspiring Brother
“As expected they wouldn’t let us take it so easily huh.”
The sky above Oster plain.
Marquis Greisner’s Dragon Knights led by Katrina were observing the situation from midair.
They were instructed to secure a key location of the battlefield, Mt. Haina before the main army’s
arrival but the enemy has already set up their base there.
Katrina was told to immediately withdraw if the task is impossible so she ordered her men to fall back
immediately as her unit is not nearly enough to take on the enemy base.
However, the United Kingdom’s Dragon Knights are not so sweet that they would allow them to scout
the place as they pleased.
From the mountain, Black Flying Dragons rose to the sky one after another.
“The Black Dragon Knights……”
Katrina muttered as he turned her back away from them.
She knew that this is not the time to fight them yet.
The other side should understand that as well.
They don’t seem to want to pursue them seriously.
‘You are an eyesore so leave.’ That’s the meaning behind their sortie.
She wanted to conduct a detailed reconnaissance before the battle if possible but she had no choice
but to give up.
However, something entered Katrina’s sight. A Black Dragon Knight is rushing toward their direction.
He’s a middle-aged man with a characteristic black beard.
A man who if not for the fact that he is riding a dragon, would be mistaken for a pirate or a bandit.
2254
“Thinning down some enemy Dragon Knights here is not bad at all!”
Saying so, he rushes toward one of them.
Without even an intention to adjust their formation, a smile escaped Katrina because of Roger’s
charge.
Katrina already heard information about this Black Dragon Knight so she immediately recognized him.
“As expected of the Captain of the Black Dragon Knight, Roger-dono. You are as bold as I heard.”
“Your head is mine! Female Dragon Knight!”
“But our Dragon Knight won’t lose to you either you know?”
Katrina’s relaxed attitude came from the fact that she has a strong ally on her side as well.
A lightning strike came down from the sky.
It was aimed at Roger’s exact position.
However, Roger parries it away with his greatsword.
“So you came after all huh! Finn Brost!!”
With a happy smile on his face, Roger rises toward the descending White Dragon Knight, Finn.
“Defeating you here is not bad either!”
“If you can do it then try me!”
Roger smiled as he parried Finn’s lightning strike.
Every lightning strike was aimed at Roger’s vitals. His accuracy is incomparable to before.
Finn is getting even stronger.
Normally, that would be problematic for Roger but he is happy about that growth instead.
No one in the United Kingdom could rival Roger in the sky. William is a part of the Royal Family so he
is not someone that Roger can find a chance to fight so easily.
For Roger, Finn is a rival that he finally discovered. If he is getting even stronger then all the better.
Besides, it wasn’t just Finn who got stronger.
“Don’t you think that you will be safe if you keep the distance like before alright!!”
Roger said and pulled out the magic wand from his back.
2255
It was the magic wand he stole in the earlier battle.
Since it was already dismantled and the internal analysis was completed, it was entrusted to Roger
after reassembling.
There was not enough time for them to make a duplicate so this is the only magic wand on the United
Kingdom’s side.
The strongest weapon was given to their strongest warrior.
Roger is now capable of fighting at long-range.
However.
“That much won’t change anything!!”
Finn shot several lightning strikes at Roger while avoiding the incoming fireballs.
Unlike the magic wand used by the Falcon Knights, what Finn is wielding is the type-62 magic wand
that was originally a custom-made prototype designed for the Imperial Family.
In addition, Finn possesses enough magic power to master it.
There is no one on par with Finn in a magic wand battle in the sky.
Finn evaded Roger’s aim while moving at high speed and returned fire many times the number of
fireballs Roger fired at him.
In response, Roger parries them away with the greatsword in his left hand.
The exchange that intended to finish each other off continued for a while.
Katrina and her men continued to withdraw and even the other Black Dragon Knights could not join in
as their levels were just too different.
In this sky, only the two of them can fly freely through it.
Their offense and defense seemed to last forever.
However, the two suddenly took a distance.
“Hmph! It seems that we will have to settle this in the real battle huh.”
“It seems so.”
Saying so, the two turned their eyes downward.
There were two cavalry corps approaching each other.
One is led by Gordon from the east.
2256
Another is being led by Leo from the west.
The cavalry separated from the main army leaving both of their armies behind.
Seeing their arrival, Roger and Finn returned to their respective base.
Because they knew.
The protagonists of this battle are not them.
“It’s been a long time. Gordon-aniue.”
“Long time no see. Leonard.”
Gordon and Leo came forward without any escort and exchanged their greeting.
If they unsheath their sword here, they are within the range to cut each other down.
However, neither of them does that.
“This will be a decisive battle that will decide the fate of the north. I’m sure that a lot of blood will flow
today.”
“Right.”
“If you still have the Imperial Family’s sense of responsibility then please surrender.”
“Surrendering is too late now right? Besides, I am the one who has the upper hand here.”
“Fighting…..and fighting……..just what are you trying to accomplish here?”
“To reign over the Empire and conquer the continent. You are a stepping stone for that ambition. A
page in my war record.”
“……..”
Leo didn’t say anything back.
He knew that his brother has always relied on violence.
However, he was not someone who is so blind to his surroundings like this.
Is it because of time? Or is it because of his environment?
While looking at his changed brother, Leo slowly unsheathed his sword.
“Do you still remember? A long time ago, you were the one who taught me the sword.”
2257
“You were pretty persistent back then. No matter how many times I beat you down you kept coming
back up.”
“Back then you praised me for that. You scolded me to not give up and waited for me to stand up every
time I fell.”
Gordon also pulls out his sword.
Tension ran in both armies.
However, no one moves.
No, none of them could move.
If they suddenly move then they might accidentally start the battle.
And they knew that the commanders of both armies do not wish for that.
This is their last conversation.
It was already certain that they can not back down anymore.
“Gordon-aniue…..I always respected you for taking lead on the battlefield. But it was not because of
how strong you are. I respected you because I believed that you will always do everything in your
power to protect your allies no matter the situation.”
“I was a general. But now it’s different! I will become an emperor!”
“I used to look up to you as my elder brother. You were awe-inspiring. But……you are no longer the
old you!”
Leo slowly takes a stance with his sword.
Gordon also raised his sword up.
Leo never expected him to obediently surrender.
The time for that has already passed.
Still, he wanted him to surrender. Considering the amount of blood that will flow today, it was for the
best.
The older brother he used to see off from the castle as he gallantly march to battle is no more.
The older brother who led many soldiers in battle and returned triumphantly.
The older brother who everyone praised for his bravery.
The older brother who everyone praised for his military achievements.
2258
The older brother who proudly boasted the wound he took to protect his subordinate is no longer
here.
“Gordon…….I WILL KILL YOU!!”
“IF YOU CAN DO IT THEN COME AT ME!!”
Their swords collide with a high-pitched sound that echoed through the battlefield.
With a strong blow, their swords bounced off each other, creating a distance between them.
It is a gap that will never be bridged.
Their path is already divided.
If Gordon is saying that he has no intention to fulfill the responsibilities of the Imperial Family or even
show a little shred of conscience.
Then there is no other option but to cut him down.
No matter how much blood will be shed.
The two glared at each other and fell back to their base.
The negotiations broke down.
It would not be strange for the battle to start at any time.
However, even after two days, nothing happened.
Both sides waited for the arrival of their infantry.
Gordon’s army totaled 60,000.
35,000 of them which is the combination of the Imperial Army and the noble army are standing by at
the plain.
The other 25,000 which is the joint army of the United Kingdom and the Dominion are waiting on Mt.
Haina.
Leonard’s army totaled 40,000.
All of them set up camp on the plain.
Gordon has both the number and geographical advantages.
That’s why everyone thought that they wouldn’t make the first move.
However, Leo traces a certain route with his finger while looking at the map.
Further north of Mt. Haina. There is another big mountain there.
2259
It was not selected as a battlefield because there is a torrential river there that divides the east and the
west.
If Gordon chose that place then Leo would have to cross that torrential river and Leo wouldn’t accept
such an unfavorable battlefield.
That’s why Gordon’s side did not station any men there.
After all, they have already thoroughly examined that place and judged that it would be impossible for
a large army to cross such a violent river.
However, Char told Leo something.
The flow of that river is irregular and once every few days there will be a time where its torrent will
weaken.
With a small smile on his face, Leo notified the entire army.
“Prepare for battle. We are going to war.”
It will take two days to cross the river and get behind Gordon’s army.
With a grin on his face, Leo’s sight was set beyond Gordon’s army.
2260
SPT Chapter 353
Yup, still automated……
-Mr.Graverobber
The Time for Battle
“Gordon’s army has begun to move. Their destination is likely to be the Oster plain, sir.”
“As you predicted, they really chose Oster plain huh.”
Receiving the report, I and Duke Lowenstein look at the map.
Taking Mt. Haina as their high vantage point and having the battle on the plain.
Everything went according to our prediction so far.
“Well, if it’s in this area then that is the only likely place. They would be the one at a disadvantage
instead if they choose to fight Leo at his castle after all.”
“So you’ve ruled out the castle from the start huh?”
“There are several reasons for that. The first one is that Gordon is more skilled in fighting on a plain.
The second is that it takes time to win a siege battle. Third, if they want to make full use of their
Dragon Knights, fighting on a plain is better than a siege. With the reasons I mentioned, it is safe to
assume that Gordon will not try to attack the castle.”
“You are speaking like an experienced general.”
“I’m good at predicting others you see.”
Gordon and William’s major problem right now is their supply.
The more troops they gathered, the more they would have to expend their supply.
That’s why they will not use a strategy that takes too much time.
Moreover, Gordon wants a win to recover from his loss. And as soon as possible as well.
With that being the case, they would have a big problem if Leo chose to not leave his castle.
“A place that they will have the advantage and is acceptable for Leo. The best place that fills such
conditions around here is only Oster plain. Since this will be a decisive battle, they will surely be quite
thorough in the selection. That’s why they will definitely choose the best battlefield possible for them.
They still think that we are way behind Leo’s army after all.”
2261
Our current position is only a short distance away from the northern border.
Both Gordon and Leo couldn’t afford to look for us since they are focusing on scouting each other out.
We set up a flag on Gnade hill and left the camp there without disassembling it. For good measure, we
also left some soldiers there to man it.
That’s why Gordon should still think that the army of the northern lords is still behind Leo. They
probably came up with their strategy based on that premise.
However, in truth, we are closer to the battlefield than anyone else.
This is Gordon’s miscalculation.
“Should we use this chance to take Mt. Haina first?”
“The fact that Gordon’s army is marching now means that William has already made his move. The
Dragon Knights have superior mobility so they must have left to secure the base first. We might
indeed be able to take them by surprise but I don’t think that our attack would be that effective in the
big picture.”
“Then……the only option left is to pincer them from behind after the battle begins huh.”
“That would be our best option. If we can take their rear, Gordon’s escape route will be cut off after
all.”
“If it goes well, we should be able to completely surround him. With mountains in the north and rivers
in the south, there is no escape route. But, will Prince Leonard move as we predicted?”
Duke Lowenstein’s concerns are justified.
It would be too late if Leo’s army started the battle after we attacked Gordon from the rear.
I want to show up behind Gordon when the battle has already started and Gordon’s attention turns
toward Leo.
To accomplish that, our timing has to be in sync with him.
Gordon’s army has a geographical advantage. It would be a different case if the battle is prolonged but
it probably won’t go that easily.
“From this place, we have to cross a violent river to reach Oster plain. Only the locals know when the
flow weakens. As long as the enemy has the assumption that no army can cross this river then we
don’t have to worry about being discovered. But once we cross it, that will be an entirely different
matter. The closer we are to the enemy, the greater the risk of detection will be.”
It is as Duke Lowenstein says.
We are an army of over 10,000 men.
2262
Even when we limited the size of our encampment to one camp, we already stood out enough. We can
not stand around and wait for Leo to finish his preparations forever. That being said, the period where
we can cross the river is fixed.
If we do not cross the river when flow weakens then we might not be able to make it in time for the
battle.
“Should I dispatch a messenger?”
“No need. Just like how I know Leo, Leo also knows me.”
“You want me to believe in a special bond between twins?”
“It is not something that superficial. We are reading each other’s movements. It is like how the
generals read every small detail of the battlefield through their experiences. Don’t worry. He will
move.”
“My life is already in your hand. I don’t mind such a thing now. Still, it is a different story for the other
nobles you know?”
“Just tell them that Char is relaying our strategy to Leo on that side. Let them know that everything is
according to plan.”
“When things go wrong, it will not be easy to recover, you know?”
“When the time comes, we will break through them from the front.”
The Duke astoundedly sighed at me.
Then.
“Where did that confidence come from? Gordon is a veteran general you know?”
“In the past that is.”
“He is different now?”
“I will not lose to someone who values his life more than victory in battle.”
“You…..do you not value your life?”
“Is it permissible to let someone else risk their lives for me without risking mine? If it is necessary to
throw down my life to obtain victory then I will do it with no hesitation. Of course, I will do my best to
make sure that it won’t come to that though.”
That is the last resort.
If the situation calls for the need for me to throw down my life then it would be when we are in a real
crisis.
2263
The Imperial Family is a banner that leads. It is our duty to avoid throwing away our lives.
“Order the army to depart. We are crossing that river.”
“Understood.”
Thus we waited for the moment when the torrent weakened and successfully crossed the river.
After that, we bypassed the mountain and circled behind Gordon’s army.
“Prince Leonard has launched an attack, sir!”
Behind Gordon’s army.
A place that no one would think that there would be an army lying in wait.
The Union of Northern Lords’ army was waiting there.
“He really did it huh……..”
“I told you so right?”
“It’s kind of irritating that I have nothing to say back to that proud face of yours……Very well, is it okay
for us to march out now? Commander.”
“Of course.”
“Then please give us your command.”
The army of the Union of the Northern Lords numbered over 10,000.
Aside from the nobles, their knights just recently learned that the leader of this army was me.
Some of them are probably still reluctant to fight under the Imperial Family.
So, I walked out and addressed all of them.
“We are about to depart. This will be a battle where the fate of the north will be decided. So—fight for
what you hold dear.”
That command was unheard of from a general who commanded soldiers at the frontline.
Right now is the time for the general to raise morale.
However, even if a prince like me shouts loudly at them, the knights of the north’s morale would not
be affected.
After all, the Imperial Family has long oppressed their lords.
2264
There is no way that they would suddenly empathize with me.
That’s why.
“I will not ask you, the knights of the north to be loyal to the Imperial Family. I don’t think that I am in
any position to ask that from you. So fight for what you hold dear. Whether it be your family, your
friends, your loved ones, you only need to fight for them. Just follow your heart. Whatever happens, I
will bear full responsibility for you!”
Even in name, I am still their commander.
The people of the north should fight to preserve the will of the north.
It wouldn’t do otherwise.
“I will not ask you to follow me. Do as you like. Show the enemy the emotions you have suppressed all
these years on the battlefields. And live on. The fate of the north can only be carried by those who
protected it. Know that your lives are not cheap enough for you to throw away so easily! Show
everyone on the continent the bravery and tenacity of knights of the north!!”
Saying so, I gazed at the nobles who lined up in front of me.
Their faces are full of aspiration.
That’s a good expression.
“I leave the left-wing to Viscount Bornefeld, Earl Zenkel will take command of the right. I am expecting
a lot from you two!”
“Y, Y, Yes, sir!!”
“Please leave it to me!”
“I am counting on you to take command of the center, Duke Lowenstein.”
“Yes, please leave it to me, Your Highness.”
“I have left the vanguards of both wings to our young and fierce warriors! So! I will not allow any
failure from those behind them! Everyone! I am counting on you all!”
“OOOOHHH!”
“Let’s show them some pain!”
I added that so that the other nobles will not become dissatisfied.
The vanguard position is an honor but it is not the most important position in fighting a war.
The most important position is those who support them from behind support.
2265
They are not allowed to collapse so I need the most prudence nobles to take charge of it.
Our lineup is almost done.
The rest is to march to battle.
“All men advance—–it’s time for battle.”
When I swung my hand down, 10,000 knights took a step toward the battlefield.
2266
SPT Chapter 354
Special Thanks to LessDark for another blow to Goal-kun…….his mind is almost breaking now.
-Mr.Graverobber
Commander
“Seriously……our plan is completely ruined now huh? Reiner.”
“No, no. Considering that Aniue was made into a loyal subject, fighting on the frontline is only a minor
problem right.”
“Even so, if he had begged William, this should have been avoidable don’t you think?”
“Prince William was wary of us. It would be better for us to fight on the frontline now rather than
being secretly purged, no?”
“But, what should we do now?”
At the forefront of Gordon’s army.
Rolf and Reiner of the Horsvath house were stationed there. They are currently discussing their future
while watching Leo’s army.
Their original plan was to be assigned to the rear as their way of taking responsibility for Gied’s
blunder. They planned to take control of Gordon’s base while Leo and Gordon were fighting.
However, due to William’s plan, Gied was made out to be the prime example of a loyal subject and the
Horsvath house was appointed the vanguard position.
As long as they have their allies behind them, it would be difficult for them to make unnecessary
movements.
“It seems that our only choice is to fight here.”
“Our opponent is the Hero Prince though?”
“We only need to put up a fight. Their aim is Prince Gordon’s head. We are not even in their sight. If we
show them an opening, they will surely use it to break through the front line.”
“I see. We were ordered to take the lead but we weren’t ordered to fight hard after all.”
“Exactly, Father. Due to the terrain, Prince Gordon will not leave the mountainside area. The one who
will attack first is Prince Leonard. We will place our knights on the mountainside while stationing the
2267
other knights on the riverside. If we set up our formation properly, Prince Leonard will surely break
through the riverside.”
The noble army on Gordon’s side numbered around 5,000. Among that number, 3,000 of them were
the knights of Horsvath house.
Their skill and number are incomparable to other nobles’ knights.
Leo will almost certainly aim for the knights of the other nobles.
With that being the case, the Horsvath house’s obligation will be fulfilled.
“We should find a chance to separate ourselves to the north and pretend to flank the enemy. That way
we can establish ourselves as the third force as well.”
Mt. Haina is in the north of Oster plain but you can bypass it and head north without climbing it. This
is possible for them exactly because they were appointed as the vanguard.
If they climb the mountain they will have to deal with William.
However, if they head the enemy’s flank, they can remain on standby while saying that they couldn’t
make a move yet because the enemy is vigilant of them.
Then once Gordon is at a disadvantage, they can just switch sides.
“If we let the enemy easily break through the frontline, the battle will surely be dominated by Prince
Leonard. He came out here fully aware of the disadvantages. He must have some kind of plan in mind.
Prince Gordon probably will not win this.”
“But Reiner, don’t forget. As long as we can not take control of their base, we need to weaken Gordon
or William in this battle. Otherwise, all credit will be going to Prince Leonard instead.”
“I know. Let’s do this.”
The pair of father and son smiled.
A distance away from the Horsvaths.
Gordon, the commander of this army, was staring at the enemy army.
There, someone called out to him.
It was not one of his soldiers.
“The enemy seems to have some kind of plan. Do you wish to mobilize us? Your Highness Gordon.”
“If I have a use for you then it will be at the very last minute. You are my insurance. Do not head out on
your own.”
2268
It was a mage donning a black hood.
Gordon does not hide his disgust at this suspicious mage.
Still, he placed this mage beside him because he is worthy of use.
“We would like that as well. Our plan is not exactly easy to use after all.”
“I know. It’s best not to spend my trump card unnecessarily. The battle has just about to begin after
all.”
“Well, in case of emergency, please feel free to summon us. We are ready at any time.”
Saying so, the mage retired to his own tent.
Even Gordon’s close aides do not know what unfolds there.
After glaring at the mage, Gordon’s eyes turned toward Leo’s army again.
Then finally, the army shows a sign of movement.
“So you finally come huh…..Leonard!”
The enemy army is attacking.
Seeing that, Gordon notified his vanguards to prepare for battle.
“So Leonard chose to attack from the front huh.”
William, who was in the mountain camp saw Leo launching an attack and sent a messenger to the
army on the plain.
The entire mountain was being fortified by William’s men and a large number of archer units were
placed on the hillside.
Leo’s vanguard must fight the rain of arrows from the mountain along with their soldiers in the plain
The setup was perfect.
Leo should have known that.
“Your Highness, are you perhaps worried about something?”
“Roger huh…….the enemy’s plan bugged me a bit you see.”
“If even Your Highness doesn’t know what they are planning then I have no idea either.”
WaHaHa laughed Roger.
2269
William smiled at him and relaxed his shoulders.
If he can’t figure out the enemy’s plan no matter how hard he thinks then he has no choice but to be
ready for anything.
“Reporting! Enemy aerial unit spotted! They are aiming for this place, sir!”
“Oh! They came huh! Your Highness! I’m heading out!”
“Be careful. The magic wand is a weapon that is unsuitable for Dragon Knights’ use. From the test run,
how many shots did you think is the limit?’
“I think it is around 15 shots. It seems that the enemy can shoot as many as they want though.”
“He’s truly a monster huh, that guy.”
“Even so, if we do not stop him, we will be deprived of our air superiority. Please rest assured. This
Roger will stop them.”
Roger said with a grin before running off to prepare for battle.
With this, battles will occur in various places.
The sky will be left to Roger while William will command their army in the mountain and adjust the
strategy according to Gordon’s army’s movement.
Leo’s vanguard unit which had a hard time dealing with attacks from both the mountain and the plain
succeeded in breaking through Gordon’s army’s frontline through their vulnerable part in the noble
army.
The knights belonging to the Horsvath house saw that and temporarily left the battlefield to head to a
flanking position.
William clicked his tongue when he saw that.
If they put up a proper fight, it should have been possible for their army to push back the enemy but
they chose to step aside resulting in the enemy easily breaking through.
“I did not expect anything from them from the beginning but……..I guess I will have to deal with them
later huh.”
If they were wiped out, he would have one less worry.
William sighs as he tries to move a part of his army.
However, at that moment.
Chills ran through William’s back.
The intuition honed by his many battle experiences is telling him.
2270
That something bad is happening.
“!!?? Deploy the backup Dragon Knights! Follow me! We are heading to the rear!!”
William moved behind Gordon’s army with the Dragon Knights he stationed at the base as the reserve
force.
The low sound of a warhorn reached William’s ears.
It did not only affect William alone but the entire battlefield.
“Damn it……! So the rear is truly our ruin huh!”
William said that as he hurriedly descended.
In his eyes reflected an army of over 10,000 knights.
The flags they raised have many colors but all of them belong to the northern nobles.
“Intercepting position!! The knights are rushing in! Archers to the front!”
William quickly prepares for defense and gives his order to Gordon’s army that fell into confusion
At that time.
A particularly large banner was erected at the center of the enemy army.
The banner depicts a black and a white sword crossing over each other over a red background.
“It’s a twin sword banner! It seems that the northern nobles have come to Leonard’s aid, sir!”
The Dragon Knight flying beside him said so but William himself felt something off from that banner.
And that strange feeling was soon resolved.
The color scheme of the twin swords is the opposite of Leonard’s.
Everything else is the same.
And it was not by mistake.
He was convinced of that.
“No…..the color scheme of the swords is reversed.”
“Eh? Perhaps they made it in a hurry…….”
“Do you think the Empire would make such a mistake? That is intentional. There is only one person
who can use a banner that resembles Leonard’s so much like that!”
2271
William dives down at high speed and orders the mage behind him to use voice amplifying magic.
He then speaks to the whole battlefield.
“The Northern Lords’ army is at our rear! Their commander is the 7th Prince, Arnold Lakes Adler!!
Anyone who dares to underestimate the Dull Prince will be cut down by me! Do not let your guard
down! Our defeat at the Imperial Capital was due to the Black Twin Princes! Do not let them
rendezvous! We are paying them back for the Imperial Capital!!”
William tries to boost the army’s morale.
However, with a momentum that can swallow their morale whole, the allied forces of the northern
nobles begin the assault with their swords raised high.
2272
SPT Chapter 355
I’d like to say my special thanks to WK here but I know that he/she read Dahlia so I guess I will thanks
for the coffee this Saturday lol.
Also, welcome to the week long war.
-Mr.Graverobber
Invention and Usage
“I should say as expected of William huh.”
I originally intended to let the army charge in while the enemy soldiers in the rear are still confused
from the sound of the warhorn and breaking through them all at once but he managed to get them into
a defensive formation.
But, there is no stopping us now.
“I’m counting on you alright?”
“Please leave it to me.”
The knights who have to charge in first will face a lot of risks.
So, I was made to command the army from the rear.
That’s why I have no choice but to entrust the frontline to Duke Lowenstein.
I stopped my advance and waved my hand at him to send him off.
Acknowledging that, Duke Lowenstein slowly moves his horse forward and heads off. Following him
are the knights at the center and subsequently our left and right wings.
The vanguard of the Northern Lords army has begun to advance.
Their pace is still slow.
Then, Duke Lowenstein addressed the whole army.
“We have pledged ourselves to the Black Twin Princes! Our duty is to destroy every obstacle in their
way! Knights of the North! Do not retreat! Do not stop! Do not be afraid! This charge is our great step
toward the future! Raise your voice! Let’s make this first step be a proud one!!”
The knights cheer.
2273
Their horses galloping faster and faster.
They charge toward the enemy like a tidal wave.
However, William will not take on that silently either.
The biggest weakness of cavalry charge is the moment they are charging.
No matter how hard the armor they covered themselves with they will not come out unscathed from a
rain of arrows.
Just by using simple bows and arrows, the enemy can significantly reduce their number.
That is the reason why no country uses knights as its main force.
The knights are the elites of your army. It takes a huge amount of time and effort to train them. It
would be a waste to let them die at the tip of a single arrow.
Using the knights to charge at the enemy is not cost-effective.
The tactics the army utilizes a cavalry charge in are those that exploit the enemy’s opening. It is rare to
see cavalry charge directly at the enemy from the front.
However, that is how you use a knight.
The reason why knights are not used in expeditions anymore is the high mortality rate.
Some people even ridiculed the knights as an outdated existence.
Certainly, you could call them that. Especially in the age where magic and weapons have developed so
much.
Charging at the enemy head-on without any plan is certainly an outdated strategy.
However.
“If something is outdated then you can just modernize it.”
If a charge is not enough by itself then we can always use it in combination with 2 or 3 other tactics.
The combined power of the knights’ charge is comparable to a powerful spell. In other words, they are
capable enough to blow away the enemy’s formation.
That in itself already made them worth using.
If they have a weakness then I just have to compensate for it with something else.
“Ready the archers. As we practiced.”
“Yes, Your Highness! ARCHERS! TO THE FRONT!!”
2274
The archers that were selected beforehand moved a certain distance away to the front.
These archers are expert marksmen selected from every noble’s army that specialized in shooting at
long distances.
A strangely shaped ball was tied to their arrow.
The size of the ball is around that of a big toe.
This is the thing that will compensate the knights’ weakness.
“Nock.”
“NO—CK!!”
The order was shouted for all to hear.
The archers hold up their longbows diagonally and pull the bowstrings.
Silence took over for a moment.
During that time I focused my eyes on the enemy.
The enemy is also watching for their timing to unleash their arrows.
Thanks to William’s swift action, there are archer units at the enemy’s rear. They are probably waiting
for the order for a coordinated attack.
If we leave them alone, the number of our knights will decrease. If the number of our knights
decreases, their charging power will also decrease. If that happens, we will not be able to tear a path
through them.
In other words.
“We cannot afford to lose any.”
While muttering so, I saw a small movement from William who was giving instructions from the sky.
“Fire.”
“FIREEEEEE!!”
Arrows were let loose all at once.
The enemy’s arrows were also fired a beat later.
Our arrows steadily rose up and reached the sky above our vanguards.
This means that the enemy’s arrows are also flying toward us.
2275
A simple arrow can not stop them.
However, what we fired just now weren’t just arrows.
“Even a failed product has its use depend on the way you use it huh.”
“Completely agree on that, sir.”
Sebas who was quietly waiting behind me nodded.
Then, the balls that were tied to the arrows started to let out a small glow.
Suddenly, the balls burst out a blast of air.
A strong gust of wind is blowing above the vanguards.
It became a barrier that repels all arrows.
Since it’s already difficult for arrows to find their target, the wind is their natural enemy. With a
sudden gust blowing out of nowhere, they can do nothing against it.
The enemy arrows have their trajectories changed and landed far away from the vanguards.
The name of this invention is [Breeze Ball].
A defective product developed by Cuber, our Minister of Technology.
It was supposed to be a magic tool that let you cool down on a hot day with a soft breeze. However,
the finished product ended up blasting out a gust so strong that it can blow furniture in the room
away.
Moreover, since it uses up all the magic power accumulated inside when it is used, you can only use it
once.
Certainly, a defective product.
However, unexpectedly, it has some uses here.
I feel bad for William but even with the archer units he tried so hard to assemble couldn’t cut down
the number of the northern knights.
The vanguards continued to move forward without losing any momentum.
I can clearly see the enemy drawing back at the inevitable.
That’s a matter of course given that the one leading this charge is Duke Lowenstein, the Thunder God
himself.
Even children can understand what comes next.
2276
A roaring sound echoed through the battlefield and a huge thunder struck down on the enemy.
It was a thunder magic of Duke Lowenstein. Like his namesake of the Thunder God suggests, both its
power and range are slightly higher than those of a coordinated thunder spell cast by a group of
ordinary mages.
Normally, if you want to cover that distance then you would need a unit of 100 mages. The Duke is
capable of doing that by himself. From the enemy’s point of view, they probably couldn’t help but run
away.
The enemy’s rear which was in an intercepting formation fell into chaos.
Using that opening, the vanguards charged in.
Without slowing down, the northern knights overrun the enemy army.
Even William should find this difficult to recover from.
“Prepare the second and third assault units. Have the second unit charge after our vanguard. Deploy
the third unit in the direction of Mt. Haina. If the enemy shows signs of movement then instruct the
third unit to charge up the mountain. Once the enemy descends the mountain there is nothing they
can do.”
“Yes, sir! SECOND AND THIRD UNITS! GET READY!!”
While giving out my orders, I look at the enemy’s movement.
For the time being, we are dominating them.
How the situation will develop depends on how they will respond.
They will probably not fold with only this much.
If it ends with only this much then there should not be the need for me to come out here in the first
place.
“You are one of the few strong enemies I recognized. This is not all you’ve got right? William.”
He sensed the surprise attack and managed to set up an intercepting formation.
Our current situation is one that we managed to breach that formation and stole the initiative.
If he is a general who can’t even regain the initiative in this situation then people wouldn’t dub him as
the Dragon Prince.
The battle has just begun.
Even I don’t know what will happen next.
2277
SPT Chapter 356
Special Thanks to LessDark and Double Tap, again for mercilessly murdering Goal-kun……I mean, at
this point Goal-kun might not have enough horcruxes to revive from anymore…..
-Mr.Graverobber
A Good Lineup
“Ugh! They breached through!”
Although they managed to set up an intercepting formation, the enemy was allowed through it.
If he allows them to charge in as they pleased then the rear army will be destroyed.
Gordon will be caught in a pincer attack and their escape route will be cut off.
He has to stop their momentum here.
“Fight! Move the line back! Temporarily fall back!”
Gordon is currently holding the frontline on the other side.
William tried to make his instructions easier to understand but by moving the rear line back means
that they are pushing Gordon toward Leo.
Gordon’s army is being attacked from the front. Their withdrawal here won’t cause Gordon to be
crushed by his own allies but it will definitely make the battlefield cramped up, rendering him unable
to move as he pleased.
Even so, William ordered them to fall back.
In the meantime, he is leading his Dragon Knights out to lock the enemy vanguard in a stalemate.
“I assumed that you are Duke Lowenstein, the Thunder God.”
“So you are the Dragon Prince huh?”
“Indeed. Why did you choose to side with our enemy? You should have received many messengers
from our side, no?”
“You won’t understand unless I spell it out for you huh”
“I will not. Gordon is your grandson. Allying yourself with Gordon would make more sense wouldn’t
it!?”
2278
As Duke Lowenstein led the charge into the enemy army, William descended down in front of him and
stalled the vanguard’s advance.
Knowing that they will be attacked if they ignore him, the duke has no choice but to engage William
here. After all, the duke is the only one here who can fight against him.
Duke Lowenstein held up his spear and cracked his neck.
The strongest advantages of the vanguard unit were the surprise element and Duke Lowenstein who
led the charge. His presence not only boosts their morale but their overall strength.
Since Duke Lowenstein can simply destroy his enemy’s formation, it is much easier for the men
behind him to follow. And since the center of William’s rear army has collapsed, the vanguards on
both wings also have an easier time breaking through.
The only way to stop the Northern Lords’ army’s momentum is to stop Duke Lowenstein.
That’s why William appeared before him.
“To think that you would try to stop me with words. It seems that you are in a much tighter spot than I
expected huh?”
“I have my hands full because of a certain prince you see.”
“Hmph…..then is that not enough of an answer? We were touched by that certain prince and chose to
follow him, we were fascinated. A prince so fascinating that we want to lay down our lives. Even while
I am connected to Gordon by blood, I felt no such thing from him. The feelings of the north are heavy.
There is only one prince who can carry it on his back. A prince that everyone makes light of is the only
prince for us who has been looked down on all this time. That prince has entered the war. If we ignore
that then we will have no pride left as aristocrats! So how about it? Prince William. Won’t you switch
to our side?”
“That is a tempting offer but……if it’s about being fascinating then our side has one as well! I called
him my friend and gave him my word that we will march to war together! This William will never
betray that feeling!! Even if we have to fight on two fronts we will never give in!! I shall engrave
Gordon’s name into the great history of war.”
William pushed up his spear and raised his sword.
Seeing that, the morale of the soldiers behind William rose all at once.
Duke Lowenstein looks at them without advancing further.
His instinct tells him that the enemy has some kind of plan.
However, the left and right wings started pushing in again.
“No! Get back!”
2279
“Prepare yourself!!”
The moment the duke looked away.
William saw an opening and charged toward Duke Lowenstein.
It was a thrust with the acceleration speed of a flying dragon.
In response, Duke Lowenstein parried it away with a swing from his spear using both of his arms.
The duke and William locked eyes and Wiliam flew away at a low altitude.
Seeing the signal, several huge arrows flew at the vanguards from the mountain.
“Tsk! They have ballistae installed on the mountain huh!”
Duke Lowenstein clicked his tongue while using his magic to intercept the ballista arrows that flew his
way.
The reason William did not use it from the start was because of the location of his allies and the
vanguard’s mobility.
And no matter how one thinks about it, aiming the ballistae that should have been aiming toward the
front in this direction in such a short time is impossible.
“So he set those up just in case huh……he’s good!”
William, who arrived at the battlefield earlier than anyone else, had time to imagine many battle
scenarios after he finished setting up his base in the mountain.
Using that time, he created a base that can support the rear army in case the enemy army should
appear behind them.
He had mobile ballistae set up in the mountain base.
The number itself is not large but it is enough to buy time for them.
The troops that temporarily withdrew are now ready to fight again.
“How’re the wings!?”
“They were shot in their charge, sir! They suffered huge damage!”
“Tell them to temporarily retreat! If we do not do something about that mountain then we will only
pile up the casualties!”
If they continue to attack as they were they should be able to expect some result but in return, many
knights will be lost.
2280
To have a pincer attack means that the armies on both sides are strong enough to contain the enemy
caught in the middle. If one side is weakened, the enemy will push through.
If that happens, their chance of victory will be lost.
In the first place, the main attacker here is not the army of the Northern Lords. If they can distract
William’s attention here then that should already provide enough support.
“Send a messenger to the commander! Tell him that we will stall Prince William here!”
“Yes, sir!”
While sending a messenger to the rear, Duke Lowenstein ordered the damaged wings to fall back
while retreating a little distance away.
In Duke Lowenstein’s eyes, he can see William rallying up his soldiers while flying at low altitudes.
“He’s quite a good young man isn’t he…….he’s a waste on my failed grandson.”
While saying so, Duke Lowenstein shot a spell at William.
William easily avoided it.
Seeing that, the morale of the enemy soldiers rises even further.
But that was good.
As long as William is wary of him and unable to move away, that’s good enough.
The enemy’s morale is riding on William’s shoulders. Whenever William leaves the frontline, it will
inevitably drop.
That’s why William can not move away from this place.
“I will have you accompany this old man for a while.”
It was a decision backed by his battle experiences.
Realizing the aim of this old veteran, William had to grind his teeth as he could not move away.
Leo’s headquarters.
Information was coming in one after another.
“The vanguards led by General Harnisch are struggling with enemy support fire from the mountain!”
“The Northern Lords’ army that appeared behind the enemy is being stalled by Prince William!”
2281
“Duke Horsvath army that moved to the side still shows no sign of moving!”
“The aerial unit heading for Mt. Haina is engaging with the enemy Dragon Knights!”
Leo who silently listened to all those reports was thinking about the next move.
It would be difficult to advance forward without capturing the mountain first. However, the mountain
is an enemy’s base. Even if they try to capture it from the sky, the enemy Dragon Knights will be
blocking their path.
“It’s a good lineup. Don’t you think so? Vin.”
“What are you praising the enemy for? Seriously……you don’t seem surprised at Al’s appearance at the
enemy’s rear at all huh? Did you know beforehand?”
“No. But I did expect it.”
“At least I wanted you to say that you heard it from Lady Charlotte you know. You creepy twins.”
To be capable of this means that the two of them are able to coordinate at a strategic level even in a
situation where communication is impossible.
From a tactician’s point of view, that is beyond the level of a headache.
If the enemy’s reinforcements suddenly appeared at the rear, it wouldn’t be strange for an army to
collapse.
“That’s a bad way to put it.”
“I thought that I was already being kind though? More importantly, what are you going to do?”
“What’s your opinion as a strategist?”
“If we can not settle the battle in the sky then we can not capture the mountain. We should continue
our attack from the riverside where the enemy’s fire support won’t reach.”
“Right. But the enemy’s defense will be strong there.”
“Then we should send in another unit. A highly destructive one if possible.”
“It seems that is our only play. Can I count on you? Lady Charlotte.”
Hearing Leo’s question, Char bowed.
She then replies.
“Please leave it to me. I will let them witness the power of the 47 clans of the north.”
“If that’s how you want to do it then may I head out as well? Your Highness?”
2282
“I would be troubled if even Marquis Greisner heads out as well. I would have no one who can
command the main army here after all.”
“It’s alright. I won’t be going out myself for the time being.”
“For the time being huh…….”
When he can easily predict the future where he will be forced to take command of the whole army, Vin
frowns.
To such Vin, Marquis Greisner speaks to him with a bitter smile.
“Forgive me, Vinfried-dono. The 47 clans of the north have finally united. I wouldn’t be able to do my
part if I stay behind and take command here.”
“Seriously……please don’t overdo it okay? If the unit that has the highest morale is defeated then we
wouldn’t be able to recover.”
“I understand.”
With that said, Char and Marquis Greisner left to prepare their unit.
While seeing those two off, Vin expressed his concern to Leo.
“Be careful. Gordon is the type of general that leads from the front. The fact that he remains in the
back means that he has some kind of plan.”
“I think so too. Their elites still haven’t come out yet either. I’ve got a bad feeling about this.”
The eyes of the two are focused at the center of the enemy army.
There was still no movement there.
2283
SPT Chapter 357
Special Thanks to Double Tap for le Cofefe, now I can afford a coffee machine…….wait……
-Mr.Graverobber
End of the Assassins
“Ballistas on the mountain huh. It seems they have properly fortified their position.”
“It would seem so, sir. What will you do now?”
“The Northern Lords’ army consisted mostly of cavalry. They won’t be able to take the mountain. We
can attack the rear army for now but everything else will be depending on Leo.”
“It seems that they also have their own problem on that side though?”
“Well, it wouldn’t be so easy right.”
Saying so, I fall back with Sebas. The knights tried to follow us but I told them that I needed time to
think so they kept their distance.
The battlefield has entered a stalemate.
Duke Lowenstein and William, who is commanding the enemy rear army, can only stare at each other
and the only one who has the potential to break the stalemate for them is the army on the mountain
which is pointing the ballistae our way.
However, if they recklessly descend the mountain they can expect to suffer great damage. The only
thing that is forcing a stalemate on us is their presence on the mountain. If Mt. Haina is taken when
they descend the mountain then Gordon’s army will have no chance of winning.
William understands that as well.
If he is going to move them then it would be the time he is willing to bet everything.
Until then, there should only be some minor exchanges.
For example,
“Sending an assassin, right.”
“It’s been a long time. Dull Prince.”
When we fell back to our rear, we were surrounded by multiple assassins. Their total number is seven.
2284
On a horseback, the hooded man who seemed to be their leader called out to me.
His voice was familiar.
“Zandra-aneue’s assassin huh. You are quite tenacious aren’t you? To think that you survived.”
“We are avenging Zandra-sama’s death.”
If I recalled correctly, his name was Gunther, was it?
An assassin who uses magic. This is the second time that he came to assassinate me. Well, he was
ordered to do that the first time but in the end, he changed his mind and tried to abduct me though.
I can see that he is a subordinate who has Zandra-aneue’s best interest in his mind.
Gunther takes off his hood.
There was a big burning scar on his face.
His movement is also awkward. Perhaps it was not only his face that was burnt.
Even though he survived, it seems that he still had to cross a dangerous bridge huh.
“Even if you kill me, Zandra-aneue won’t come back you know?”
“Even so, Zandra-sama’s name will remain…….every one of us here are those whose lives were saved
by Zandra-sama……….She was our savior. We couldn’t die together with her…….but at least we can
deliver your head to her soul!!”
With that said, Gunther jumps at me.
He put everything into that attack.
However, Sebas easily intercepted Gunther’s dagger.
“UOOOOOO!!”
“I can’t say that I’m impressed. Do you think that if you put your feelings into your strike it will
become stronger?”
“Ugh!”
When Sebas said that with a small voice, an assassin tried to attack me from behind.
Of course, his blade never reached me.
On the contrary, the assassin fell forward without saying anything.
A dagger was stuck in his neck. It was a dagger that Sebas hid on his leg.
2285
He sent it flying using a kicking momentum.
It’s not something that everyone can do. That much is obvious given the surprised look on Gunther
and his assassins’ faces. Sending it flying is already hard enough and there should still be a problem
with the aim.
Even so, Sebas did it without any difficulty.
There is a decisive difference in their skill as an assassin.
Even if all 7 of them attack together, they have no chance of winning.
Gunther has lost the moment he fails his surprise attack.
“Push in! Even one blow can kill Arnold!!”
Saying so, Gunther tries to restrict Sebas’s movement.
However, Sebas simply threw his daggers at the assassins while dealing with Gunther.
All of them hit their marks. With a dagger stuck in their vital, the assassins fall down one after another.
Even when they try to throw their dagger in response, Sebas just parries them away.
Soon after, all six assassins collapsed, leaving only Gunther as the last man.
“Guh!”
Gunther stopped the dagger Sebas swung at him with his shoulder.
Since he knew that he couldn’t avoid it, he probably took the blow like that to protect his neck.
With his shoulder deeply pierced, Gunther grabbed Sebas’s other arm.
“DO IT!!!!!”
When Gunther shouted, the eighth assassin came out from hiding and dashed toward me.
The basic of assassination is surprise attack.
Humans will always believe only in what they see.
It would be natural to concentrate your focus on the last enemy.
An assassination plan that uses the lives of 6 of their comrades.
The fact that he did not appear until now was to make us think that there is no longer anyone waiting
in ambush.
It’s a good tactic.
2286
“It might have worked if Sebas wasn’t my escort huh.”
A loud noise echoed.
And when I noticed, Sebas already slashed the eighth assassin.
How did he get out of the restraint?
The answer lies in his right arm which is currently hanging down.
He dislodged his joint.
Multiple joints.
It is not uncommon for an assassin to be able to dislocate one of their joints.
However, Sebas is capable of dislocating multiple joints all over his body. Moreover, he can still freely
move his limbs. He can even do it with his muscles alone.
How did he train to acquire such a body?
That is one of the biggest mysteries about Sebas.
“If you wanted to restrain me, then you should have used magic instead.”
“How many mages do you think that is capable enough to restrain someone like you?”
“I can at least think of one.”
Saying so, Sebas approaches Gunther from the front.
Gunther throws a dagger at Sebas but he only grabs it.
He then uses it to offset the flaming magical dagger that was hidden behind it.
“Damn you…..! Death……!”
“You fought well with that body. You should give up now.”
“Give up…..? Don’t mess with me! If your own younger brother was murdered would you just give up
on revenge!?”
“That is a stupid question. I would not allow my brother to get killed in the first place.”
Gunther frowned at my words.
He must be thinking of me as the one who killed his master.
However, that is not the case.
2287
“You chose the wrong guy to ask that question to. You can not reason with someone from the Adler
clan.”
“What…….?”
“In a situation where you have to pick one out of two, the Adler clan is those that will choose to have
both. We are the most unreasonable clan on the whole continent. That’s why—–we are worth serving.
You must have experienced that same unreasonableness before right?”
“……….that’s right.”
Gunther whispers and points his dagger at himself.
He probably wants to take his own life.
That’s not a bad choice either. If he wants to end it then it would be fine to let him.
But.
“Gunther. You say that by killing me, Zandra-aneue’s name will remain right? But killing me will not
make her name be remembered.”
“……what…….”
“You are Aneue’s aide. I do not want you to die with regret. So I will tell you. The name of Zandra
Lakes Adler will not disappear. I will never forget it. No matter what form it is, I will make sure that
she will be remembered. Not as a sinner but my elder sister.”
“Even after she tried to take your life……..why……..?”
“I’m her younger brother.”
When he heard that, Gunther broke his poker face and laughed aloud.
After laughing for a while, he speaks to me.
“……you are crazy, you know that?”
“We are that kind of family. We are beyond help already. We are trying to do God’s deed with the
mortal body. Do you know when we started becoming like this? It was when the Demon King
appeared. Back then the continent was saved by the Hero and the Holy Sword. But the Adler clan
relied on no miracle. We sought out better successors to cultivate our bloodline for the coming
disaster. Since there is no guarantee that the Hero will win next time——the Adler clan has been
preparing.”
For hundreds of years, we prepared for something that we did not know for certain if it would actually
come.
People would call us crazy.
2288
However, the Adler clan is serious.
If we were not serious then we would not be able to be one of the most prominent clans on the
continent. That’s the kind of lineage I’ve got.
However, that is exactly why we possess the charm that attracts people.
After all, people always seek out what they do not have.
“At every turning point of the era, there’s always a big fool at the center of it. Calling us crazy is only a
compliment you know?”
“Hmph…..what a clan……”
“It was the same clan that you were fascinated by. Zandra-aneue was also an Adler. So I will never
forget her. If you loyally served an Adler then show me an unforgettable ending!”
“To the Dull Prince huh……”
Gunther said with a smile on his face.
He then readjusted his dagger and turned it toward Sebas.
With his dagger wrapped in flames, he unleashed a blow at Sebas with all he’s got.
The two crossed each other and Sebas’s cheek was scratched.
“It was a good blow. I will remember your name. Gunther.”
“Ughaa-…..”
Gunther vomits blood and collapses on his knees.
With a dagger stuck in his chest, there is no saving his life anymore.
“……do you have anything left to say?”
“……Gordon…is being helped by…..a suspicious mage…..”
“I see.”
“…..you have…..some countermeasure…….right? This is [the second time] after all……?”
“Of course. I’ve already thoroughly prepared for it.”
“Hmph…..as expected of Zandra-sama’s younger brother……you didn’t miss anything at all.”
Saying so, Gunther collapsed.
Seeing that, Sebas squints his eyes at Gunther’s body.
2289
“Winning an assassin’s loyalty is no easy task. He lived for Zandra-sama until the very end.”
“Right…..”
Muttering so, I sigh.
An Adler would always choose to save two in a situation where you can only save one but we can not
always do that.
Keep becoming stronger, Keep moving forward.
It was because we have always strengthened our bloodline that I was born as a perfect mage.
Still, there are times that I feel helpless.
There are always those that we can not save.
“I have always wondered, you know. What would it be like if I was born a commoner.”
“People always wish for something that they can not have, sir. As most commoners can never dream
to be royalty, someone from the Imperial Family can never be a commoner.”
“Right…..as long as I was born to this family, I have to fulfill its obligation.”
With that said, I made my determination again.
Next time, I will defeat my elder brother.
2290
SPT Chapter 358
Coffee appreciation day!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Also, Special Thanks to Double Tap dayo!!!
The war ain’t finished yet….
-Mr.Graverobber
The Next Step
Leo’s vanguards are being led by General Harnisch.
However, after they have broken through the enemy noble army, their momentum has fallen.
“Relocate the shield infantries to the left! Harden our defense on the mountainside!”
William’s army is providing support fire for Gordon’s army from Mt. Haina.
The closer they push closer to Gordon’s main army, the more intense it becomes.
Furthermore, what lies waiting for them are now the imperial soldiers who sided with Gordon.
In terms of skill, they are equivalent to the army led by Harnisch.
Right now Harnisch is focusing on maintaining the frontline as assaulting the enemy would only lead
to an increase in casualty.
“Seriously……! Even when I was told about it beforehand, this sure is a tough role!”
While saying so, Harnisch brandishes his spear.
Before the battle, Harnisch was told the role of his vanguard unit by Vin, Leo’s strategist.
The enemy army will provide fire support from the mountain. It is almost certain that the vanguards’
advance will be stopped. That’s why the vanguards have the duty to stall the enemy.
Their real attacker will be the second assault unit.
Originally, the vanguard position is a prestigious role in battle but this time it is an ugly role to have.
Still, he accepted the task while knowing what he must do.
Harnisch is a soldier.
A soldier is not a knight.
2291
On the battlefield, the only thing that should be in a soldier’s mind is how to win.
During his days as General Estman’s adjutant, that was what he was taught.
That’s why Harnisch took on the most difficult role.
He will be the shield that endures the enemy’s counterattack and hold this position.
When will reinforcements arrive?
This is also a battle against such impatient thoughts.
Still, Harnisch persevered.
“Sir! It’s the warhorn!”
“So they’ve arrived huh!!”
Only knights blow warhorn into battle.
From Harnisch’s unit’s right side.
The second assault unit is coming up from the riverside.
At the same time, lightning struck the enemy army.
Harnisch laughs at that scene.
“HaHaHa!! The enemy probably wouldn’t have thought that there would be two thunder gods huh!
Good! Let’s push up too! Make some noise and lure their attention here!!”
Harnisch raised his spear and started dedicating himself to supporting the second unit with a smile.
[[O’ thunders of the sky・Show me your malevolent figure・Shining Flashes・Gather and form a single
line・Scorch and illuminate the earth——-Thunder・Fall]]
The lightning strike destroyed the enemy’s formation.
Using that chance, Char charges at the enemy army while raining down lightning strikes upon the
enemy.
Seeing that figure of hers, the knights of the northern lords’ army have their morale boosted while the
enemy was instilled with fear.
“Th, the Thunder God!!??”
“Fall back! Fall back!!”
2292
Some soldiers that almost fell victim to Char’s thunder screamed and began to retreat.
Seeing that, Char tried to rush further in but she stopped when she saw that an enemy general was
regaining control of his soldiers.
“Do not fall back! What would you do if you run!? The Thunder God will be right behind you! There is
no escape! Do not be afraid of a little girl!! The only way to survive is forward! Charge!!”
It was General Fidessa who issued that command.
He sensed the danger of a frontal collapse and personally came out to the frontline.
Wielding his spear, Fidea tries to restrain Char’s movement.
Seeing that, Char put a thunder on her right hand.
“Girl! I know that you belong to the Lowenstein family! Name yourself!”
“One of the 47 clans of the north, Charlotte of the Zweig house. Are you going to be my opponent?
General.”
“The granddaughter of the Thunder God huh! I couldn’t ask for a better opponent!”
Fidessa galloped his horse toward Char and thrust his spear out at her.
However, Char blocked it using her arm which was clad in lightning.
“With that kind of thrust……do you think you can stop the thunder of the north!?”
“Ugh!??”
With Fidessa’s spear stopped with her right hand, Char shoots lightning at him with her left hand.
When battling a mage, you have to be careful of both of their hands. After all, a mage can attack you
even without any weapon.
He received the lightning using his right arm and severe pain ran through it.
He shouldn’t be able to move it freely for a while.
However, Fidessa only frowns and repositions his spear.
Fidessa has been standing on the battlefield since he was still a child. He was a son of a noble house
who had no chance of succeeding his family. That’s why the easiest way for him to make something for
himself is to prove his worth on the battlefield.
As he climbed up to the rank of general, he has faced death many times already.
There were many times that his arms were rendered useless.
2293
To that Fidessa, this kind of injury is nothing special.
“Behold! Soldiers! My arm is still working! If it was the real Thunder God then my whole body would
have been charred already! Do not be afraid of the false Thunder God! There is only one Thunder God
in the north! Prince William is already dealing with him! A prince of another country is fighting our
war, if you run away in fear then what will that make you!? Remember your harsh training! Right now
is the time to use it!!”
It was a severe burn.
He had a gauntlet on so it was inconspicuous but it was an injury that should cause him tremendous
pain just by raising his arm.
Still, Fidessa decided to raise it up and flaunt it to his soldiers.
To destroy the illusion of the Thunder God.
“Charge!! Counterattack!!”
Saying so, Fidessa thrusts his spear toward Char again.
While she is able to defend against it with one hand, the thrust is much sharper and all she could do
was stay defensive.
Seeing that, the morale of Gordon’s army rose further.
In that situation, Fidessa raised his spear up.
Using that as a signal, 5 soldiers leaped out from behind Fidessa.
They are all holding a crossbow.
And it wasn’t just a simple crossbow.
It was the state of the art [Rotating Magic Crossbow].
Because they only have a few, it was only distributed among the main army but Fidessa brought a few
of them here to the front line.
After all, a half-hearted attack is not enough to kill a powerful mage.
“Ugh!”
Char sensed the danger and put up a lightning barrier.
However, without relenting, Fidessar swung his spear down.
“FIRE!!”
2294
Multiple bolts hit Char’s lightning barrier.
To keep up with that overwhelming fire rate, Char pour more magic power into her barrier.
However, that made her become less vigilant to the surrounding threats.
When the bolts stopped.
Char’s barrier managed to hold on.
However, she didn’t notice.
That a threat is descending down from the sky.
“Good work. General Fidessa.”
It was William who was supposed to be confronting Duke Lowenstein who descended from the sky.
His spear is pointed at the now defenseless Char.
Char tries to divert his spear but William’s thrust is unlike that of Fidessa.
She could take it for a moment but soon its momentum pushed the tip into her arm.
Then, the spear steadily homes into Char’s chest.
However.
“Is it not a courtesy to greet a lady first? Prince William.”
The spear was parried away by a sword from the side.
Leo was there straddling on Noir.
“If you do not start with a self-introduction first then the ladies will hate you, you know?”
“It seems that I will have to settle the score with you first huh! Leonard!!”
William holds up his spear against the grinning Leo.
They then went up to the sky and exchanged blows midair.
2295
SPT Chapter 359
Do picture the battlefield as you read….
Al’s side btw
-Mr.Graverobber
Diagonal Formation
It was a while ago that I felt something wrong on the frontline.
Although William had left, the enemy soldiers’ morale did not drop at all. On the contrary, their morale
is only rising.
I thought that he was back and resumed command but it seems that is not the case.
“Move the headquarters forward. We are going to join Duke Lowenstein.”
“Yes, Your Highness! All men! Advance!”
While giving instructions to the army, I am looking forward to seeing what the enemy has done.
“They managed to switch commander before we noticed huh.”
“But the only person who can take Prince William’s place is.”
“Yeah. Gordon probably came out from his main camp. Gordon has good compatibility against the
Northern Lords army which consisted mostly of cavalry. On the other side, Leo’s army has access to
aerial units and Leo himself can fight in the sky. Rather than Gordon, William is better suited to deal
with him.”
Having said that, to be able to change their commander without us noticing, the enemy must have
deployed some advanced trick.
Gordon who just came out from their headquarters smoothly took command of the rear army from
William.
Of course, it is difficult to take over command halfway through.
You can’t do that unless the commander knows each other well.
“Even rotten as he is, they are still friends huh.”
“Then is it correct to assume that Prince William went to face Leonard-sama? Will that be alright, sir?”
2296
“It will be fine. In terms of compatibility, Leo has better compatibility against William than Gordon.
William is a well-balanced general after all.”
When I said that to Sebas, we arrived at the frontline.
The attack has stopped. Perhaps Duke Lowenstein has noticed that something is wrong as well.”
“Duke. It appears that Gordon came out you know.”
“So he came after all…….we couldn’t restrain the Dragon Prince huh.”
“It’s not exactly a bad thing since you managed to lure out the enemy’s commander.”
While approaching Duke Lowenstein on horseback, I look at the enemy.
Then, the enemy soldiers began to cheer.
Since he saw that we came out to the front, he came out to welcome us huh.
“Can I speak to him?”
When I asked the Duke so, he summoned a mage for me.
Voice amplifying magic is not that difficult of a spell. However, you have to conserve magic power on
the battlefield.
There is still much work left for Duke Lowenstein here and he probably understands that as well.
“The spell is ready, sir.”
“Good……it’s been a long time, hasn’t it? Gordon. We haven’t met since the Imperial Capital right?”
My voice reaches the enemy.
In response, the enemy replied with a loud voice.
“Hmph, cheeky as always huh? Arnold.”
Saying so, Gordon appeared on horseback.
A carefree expression floats on his face.
Apparently, it seems that this situation is still within Gordon’s expectation.
“So, what is someone who has always loathed being a prince like you doing here with all the nobles of
the north? You have never been the type that would eagerly fulfill your responsibility as a prince
right.”
2297
“I still hate living like a prince. I am not someone that lives like an Adler. But I can’t prioritize my own
safety when I just ordered more than ten thousand men to risk their lives. Until this war end—–I’ve
decided to live like an Adler.”
The Adlers have a charm that attracts people.
That charm is very easy to understand.
Some may think that I’m a fool to come out here. However, some people do prefer such a fool.
That also applied to the northern nobles.
They were made light of because of Father’s realistic judgment.
That’s why it’s necessary to give them a dream.
That’s why the best thing I can do is to behave like an Adler should.
It’s not acting.
It is more accurate to say that I am showing them one side of me.
No matter what happens, I am still an Imperial Prince.
The arrogance and greed of Adler are flowing in my vein.
“So what will you do as an Adler?”
“I will not give up. No matter the difficulty, I will seek the best result possible. This war is a conflict
between Adlers. So I will settle this as an Adler would.”
With the northern lords united, I will win the war. Leo will be credited for the victory and we will have
the advantage in the succession war.
And I will save the lives that can be saved.
As Leo always does.
“Don’t make me laugh! What is waiting for you is no happy ending! It will be your greatest failure!”
“Then show it to me. You went so far as to cause a rebellion because you believed that you are worthy
enough to become an emperor right. Why don’t you show me what you’re made of here!?”
“You don’t have to ask! All men! To attack position!”
Gordon gave his command and launched a fierce assault.
“The right-wing is falling back! The enemy’s offensive is intensifying, sir!”
2298
“The Left-wing is engaging the enemy! They are pushing the enemy back, sir!!”
I close my eyes while listening to the report.
I imagine the top-down image of the battlefield.
What is going on now if viewed from above is perfectly reproduced in my head.
“The enemy is concentrating their offensive on the right-wing you know? Are you sure that you want
the right-wing to keep retreating like this?”
“Let them fall back. The center will remain in the same position. Instruct the left-wing to push
forward.”
“What are you planning? If this keeps up, the right-wing will be pushed too far back and we will be
flanked by their main army you know?”
“I am not going to make such a mistake.”
Saying so, I look at the enemy and wait for the timing.
My aim is the moment when the enemy puts all their effort into attacking the right-wing.
Our right-wing is being pushed back while our left-wing is advancing forward.
This will form an upward-sloping diagonal formation.
Because we are still in formation, the enemy will want to get serious and push the right-wing further
back to destroy it.
And that moment will be the time when the enemy is most vulnerable.
“Come on, Come on, Come on……..”
While looking at the enemy’s main unit, I muttered so.
Perhaps they heard my impatient muttering the enemy main unit showed signs of movement.
And I’m not so kind as to miss that.
“Send a signal to the third assault unit standing by at the mountainside!! Have them flank the enemy’s
left-wing!!”
“As you command!”
The fact that our formation is a slant that rises to the left means that the enemy’s left-wing is
protruding forward.
Originally, their flank should be protected by the mountains but now they’ve lost that protection.
2299
Moreover, the greatest strength of the Northern Lords’ army is its cavalry. In other words, an assault.
Since they must continue to run, they are not good in a situation where they have to stop and fight.
It was necessary to somehow create a situation where they can continue to assault the enemy.
That’s the reason behind this diagonal formation and why I let the enemy push heavily on one side.
Gordon was caught in that trap and concentrated on the right-wing. If it was William he might have
been cautious of it but Gordon still couldn’t shake off his impression of me.
That’s why even though he doubts that it might be a trap, he lightly chose to push on without thinking
too much about it.
Right now the enemy is focusing on breaking through our right-wing.
That’s why their response to the third assault unit that charged in from their flank was greatly
delayed.
They managed to skew the enemy’s flank and overrun their formation.
In conjunction, I also rebuilt our formation and pushed the enemy back.
“Ugh! Fall back! Fall back!!”
“We can’t, sir! Our allies are behind us!”
“What!?”
The enemy’s screams can be heard.
The third assault team was stationed near the mountain to prevent the enemy from descending the
mountain.
If they left, the enemy would see it as an opportunity to rush down. After all, they’ve been waiting for
such an opportunity.
However, in exchange, they will leave no space for their allies on the frontline to fall back.
Since they temporarily can not retreat, their formation was disturbed.
Once that happens, what awaits is their total collapse
Seeing the enemy’s frontline fell into chaos, I ordered the third assault unit to temporarily fall back.
“Duke, let the soldiers rest. It will take the enemy sometime to rebuild their formation. Let them rest
during that time.”
“Understood. What are you planning to do next?”
2300
“That will depend on the enemy. They will not carelessly attack us anymore. We will probably end up
glaring at each other for a while.”
“As I thought, the deciding factor here is the sky huh.”
“Yes.”
Saying so, I and Duke Lowenstein looked up at the sky.
2301
SPT Chapter 360
Special Thanks to LessDark for killing Goal-kun……again………I’m worried that he might not be able to
respawn now….
Also, the arc is ending soon so I will update the TOC next week
-Mr.Graverobber
One on One Aerial Showdown
Leo’s aerial unit was a mix of the 6th Imperial Knight Corp and the Dragon Knights of the Greisner
house.
On the other side, the enemy is the elite Dragon Knights under William’s direct command centered
around the Black Dragon Knights.
Both in terms of quantity and quality, William’s Dragon Knights are superior to Marquis Greisner’s.
The reason they can fight evenly with them now was because of the 6th Imperial Knights corp.
Katrina, who leads the Dragon Knights was frustrated at the situation but she managed to suppress it
down.
She knows that the battle on the ground is in a stalemate.
No matter how well their offensive is, it would be difficult to cause significant damage to the enemy
unless the mountain is taken.
In the end, they need air superiority.
That’s why Katrina did not carelessly attack.
“Fight in pairs! If you get defeated one by one then it will only increase the burden on our allies!
Prioritize your own survival!!”
While issuing her command, she swings her spear to intercept the enemy Dragon Knight that
approached her from below.
The Dragon Knights of the Greisner house knew well that they were inferior to the enemy. That is why
they will not break formation nor carelessly chase after the enemy even if they were provoked.
There was a common understanding among them.
The time for them to attack is when their ace wins.
2302
“We will survive until Finn comes back!”
Katrina raised her voice.
Above where Katrina and the others are fighting.
Two Dragon Knights are fighting against each other.
It was Finn and Roger.
Since the battle started, the two had been engaging in single combat.
And they did not do that because they chose to.
The reason it became single combat was simply that there was no one who could keep up with them.
So inevitably, their battle turned into a one-on-one fight. This means that if one of them is defeated,
the battle situation will tilt to the side of the winner.
“I can’t just fight you one on one like this forever you know!”
Roger, who received Finn’s lightning strike with his greatsword, suddenly shouted and thrust straight
toward Finn.
If the battle was prolonged, Roger would be at a disadvantage.
As he battled Roger, Finn understood that and chose to gradually attack Roger from a distance.
He understood intuitively that Roger can’t use the magic wand consecutively for long.
However, Roger understood that as well.
The magic wand is just one of the means and he doesn’t rely much on it.
That’s why Roger mostly relied on his skill and techniques as a Dragon Knight.
Finn shoots a lightning strike at Roger who is rushing straight at him.
However, Roger narrowly avoided it and immediately closed the distance.
“Ugh!”
“I will have your head now! Finn Brost!!”
Roger brandishes his greatsword with a scream.
On the other hand, Finn fires multiple lightning strikes at his sword.
The greatsword that was swung down got pushed back and Finn took the chance to widen the
distance.
2303
And in the same motion, Finn turns the type-62 wand toward Roger.
“I can not afford to lose either.”
“You are truly a worthy opponent! But the same trick won’t work twice you know!”
Roger on the offense and Finn on the defense.
This exchange continues and the two are locked in a stalemate.
The attacking side wants to quickly settle the battle while the defending side has to prolong the battle
in frustration.
For Finn, wasting more time here meant putting his allies at risk.
With Finn’s absence, the aerial battle is currently in a stalemate. However, over time, the Greisner
Dragon Knights will be defeated and they will fall behind.
However, Finn suppressed his frustration.
“I can’t rush…….I have to believe in everyone.”
He mutters to himself.
The chance will surely arrive.
He decided to endure it until then.
If he falls here the enemy will gain the advantage. If that happens the overall battle will lean in favor of
the enemy.
He must avoid making any careless attacks.
“He’s coming, Nova.”
“Kyuu!”
After speaking to his partner, Finn moves on to intercept Roger who has charged at him again.
While shooting lightning strikes at him, Finn continues to look for the chance.
And suddenly, it arrived.
“Your Highness!?”
The scene of fighting between William and Leo entered Roger’s field of view.
For a brief moment, he was distracted.
Finn did not miss that moment.
2304
Suddenly, Finn and Nova disappear from the front of Roger.
And when he noticed them, Roger found that they were above him.
It is the first time this has happened since the two started fighting.
The offense and defense are being reversed.
“Tsk!!”
“HAAAAAA!!”
Clicking his tongue, Roger descends while using his greatsword to shield himself.
On the other hand, Finn started chasing him while firing lightning strikes.
They continued battling each other as they dived down.
Even when the both of them had to think about crashing into the ground, Finn and Roger did not cease
fighting.
A momentary misjudgment would be fatal.
Even so, Finn desperately continues to fire lightning strikes.
A chance like this will never arrive again. He was convinced of that.
“Nova!!”
“Kyu–!!”
Finn further increased his descending speed.
Seeing that, Roger’s eyes opened wide in surprise.
For them to raise their speed here is a dare to Roger to rise up to avoid crashing.
Roger couldn’t believe such a suicidal plan
“You are that desperate to settle this huh!”
Roger stopped descending at the last minute.
In return, Finn shot a lightning strike at Roger as he flew past him.
It was a decisive blow.
Roger couldn’t avoid it and his right foot was hit by the lightning strike.
“Ugh!!”
2305
To maintain your balance on a flying dragon’s back, your feet are necessary.
With this, Roger will not be able to move freely anymore.
However, with this, Finn will crash into the ground.
Rising up now is impossible.
Or so Roger thought.
However, that was not the case.
“Don’t——–look down on the Dragon Knight of Adler!!”
A normal Dragon Knight would have crashed.
However, Finn and Nova forcibly changed their course to the side.
Doing so, Finn is now flying above Gordon’s army at low altitude.
Before soaring back up to the sky, he unleashed multiple lightning strikes at the enemy soldiers as a
parting gift.
Gordon’s army fell into chaos due to the lightning strikes and after witnessing that superb maneuver,
Leo’s army cheers.
Then the stage is once again returned to the sky.
Roger whose right foot was injured tried to engage Finn again but he was stopped by William.
“Stop, Roger. You can’t win against him with your foot like that.”
“Even if I can’t win…….I have to settle this myself.”
“Don’t be stubborn now.”
Saying so, William moved up to Roger’s side
Realizing his intention, Roger was surprised and smiled at William.
“I see. This is not so bad either.”
“Right?”
Before the two smiling men, Leo appeared.
Finn also rose up to Leo’s side.
“Hey, Finn. That was a good blow.”
2306
“I’m honored, Your Highness.”
“It seems that the other side wants to have a tag-team battle now you know?”
“No matter what kind of battle it is, I will not lose.”
“That’s a good reply. Let’s settle this before Nii-san gets tired waiting for us.”
“Yes!”
With that as a signal, the one on one has turned into two on two.
2307
SPT Chapter 361
Special Thanks to Double Tap for ze coffee.
Now the battle continues.
-Mr.Graverobber
For my Friend
The first who got into a combat position was William and Roger.
William has taken the front while Roger held the magic wand from behind him.
A formation that took Roger’s leg injury into account.
On the other side, Leo and Finn did not move.
It’s not that they are not going to fight together.
Their opponents are William and Roger. Two warriors who have been comrades in arms through
many battlefields.
That’s why Leo and Finn are not trying to compete with them through cooperation.
Their aim is to split William and Roger up and take them one by one.
So they didn’t move first.
“If you are not going to come then I will!”
Saying so, William thrusts his spear.
Leo received it from the front.
“You are way more aggressive than usual huh. Prince William.”
“I want to settle this before your brother starts something again!”
“Then don’t worry. My brother won’t do anything this time.”
Said Leo with a smile.
The battlefield is locked in a stalemate.
That is Al’s aim from the start.
2308
To put a stop to Gordon’s overwhelming advantage.
If the battle can not be settled on the ground then the importance of the sky will increase.
And Al does not think that they will lose the battle in the sky.
Not because he trusts in Leo.
Even with his trust in Leo, Al is not a fool that would think that he can beat William. After all, it was
where William will have the advantage.
Even if it’s Leo, he would still be inferior in terms of experience. That’s what many generals would say.
However, such a lack of experience can be compensated through overwhelming strength.
And preparation has already been made to guarantee that.
“The title of the Strongest Dragon Knight is no longer the United Kingdom’s alone.”
“I wonder about that!”
After several offenses and defenses, William suddenly spins his dragon.
From behind, Roger fired a fireball toward Leo.
William and Roger were in sync. Even a slight mistake in their coordination would mean that Roger’s
attack will hit William’s back instead.
That’s why Leo didn’t move.
After all, Finn was already prepared for it.
A lightning strike flew in from the side and offset the fireball.
William, who was aiming for the chance to strike when Leo evaded the fireball, was caught off guard.
Seeing that, Leo grinned.
“You should be more careful. The understanding of your normal aerial battle has already been
destroyed after all.”
Before they noticed, Finn had moved to William and Roger’s side. When the two have to look at Leo
and Finn alternatively, Finn fires lightning strikes toward them.
Knowing that Finn can not fight well in close quarters combat, William charged at Finn to isolate him.
He does not doubt that Leo would charge in to protect him.
That’s why he thought that he has no need to fear Finn’s lightning strikes at close range and started
worrying about Leo’s strike instead.
2309
However, that is not the case.
Finn wasn’t just playing around after Al entrusted him with the wand.
He had continued to practice and master the use of the type-62 magic wand.
He kept shooting and shooting.
As A result, he has acquired pin-point accuracy even when Nova is moving at full speed.
Even so, he continued practicing.
It was already more than enough and the result was satisfying but he still put in more effort.
Finn already expressed his gratitude to Al when he received the type-62 but Al said that he didn’t have
to thank him. That a victory can not be obtained with gratitude alone.
That was when Finn decided.
He shall repay this debt through military service.
That’s why he can’t just be satisfied with himself and stop. He has to become stronger and aim higher.
He has decided to become a Dragon Knight that can single-handedly turn the tide of a battle.
And Finn is now raining down lightning strikes after lightning strikes upon William and Roger.
“Ugh!!”
The two retreat while defending against the lightning strikes.
They judged that if they can take a certain distance they should be able to somehow retaliate.
However, Finn’s lightning strikes never ceased.
Both of them are completely on the defensive side.
“Your Highness!!”
In order to try breaking through their predicament, Roger shot fireballs at Finn.
However, before the rain of lightning, it was like a raindrop on a hot stone.
Finn’s offensive can not be disrupted and the fireballs were simply offset by the lightning.
“He is this strong!!?”
William manages to parry away a lightning strike and looks for Leo.
He knows that once they are distracted by the rain of lightning, Leo would launch an attack at them.
2310
With that in mind, William continues to look for Leo.
However, he was nowhere to be seen.
“Blindspot huh!?”
William flips his dragon and looks behind him.
Leo was there.
However, he does not show any signs of attacking.
He simply sneaked behind Roger and William.
The reason he did not enter the range of the rain of lightning was that it would be dangerous even to
Leo himself.
“Your Highness!! Leonard is only a decoy!!”
Roger shouted as he parried away the lightning.
Roger, who has already experienced three fights against Finn was already accustomed to the lightning
strikes.
Even with his injured leg, he can still parry it with his greatsword.
However, William is different. He can not parry them unless he concentrates.
Because he knew that, Leo went around his back.
He was counting on William’s vigilance toward him to delay his response to the lightning strike.
When William realized this, 2 lightning strikes flew toward him and he parried one away with one
hand.
Then he was about to do the same to the second lighting.
He noticed that it was different from the lighting strikes so far.
A converged lightning strike.
An attack with more power than the normal one.
William tried to parry it with one hand again.
“Ugh!? WOAAAH!!”
A decisive blow.
William managed to redirect it.
2311
By letting go of the spear he was using.
For William, letting go of his spear on the battlefield was nothing less than humiliation. However, if he
didn’t do that he would have fallen prey to the lighting strike.
And now he will probably become prey to Leo who would exploit that opening instead.
“DO YOU THINK I WILL GO DOWN THAT EASILY!!?”
William unsheathed his sword and blocked Leo’s blow without even looking.
William and Leo locked eyes.
However, he has already entered Leo’s range.
Leo received William’s sword swing and flicked the sword out of William’s hand.
After receiving the converged lightning strike, William’s grip was not in perfect condition.
“Your head—–is mine!!”
Leo swings his sword at William’s neck.
This is the end, William thought.
However, that blow did not reach William.
“YOUR HIGHNESSSSSSSSS!!!”
Roger slammed his dragon into William’s and caught the sword with his body.
Leo’s sword deeply cut into Roger’s flank.
However.
“I CAUGHT YOU NOW!!”
Roger tosses his greatsword at William and grabs Leo’s sword with his now free hands.
Roger’s body was already full of wounds.
Naturally, he did not reach William’s side without Finn noticing.
He had taken multiple lightning strikes to make it to William.
And he is now trusting William to deal the finishing blow.
“DON’T MIND IT!!”
“Forgive me!!”
2312
Roger was willing to be cut down together with Leo.
With one word from him, William immediately understood his intention.
He swings the greatsword down with the intention of slashing both Leo together with Roger.
However, another person slammed into William again.
It was Finn.
“YOU THINK I WILL ALLOW IT!!?”
Seeing Roger charging toward William without caring about the lightning strikes, Finn immediately
rushed to Leo.
If he can take the blows then he only has to get close.
As he didn’t expect Finn to willingly get close to him, William loses his balance.
“Don’t get in my way!!”
However, he quickly rebuilds his stance and blows Finn and Nova away with his dragon’s tail.
With Finn and Nova’s small physique, they were blown away from the difference in size. With that
disadvantage they have in close quarters combat, they were originally deemed unsuitable to fight.
However, their tackle did earn Leo time.
If it was a lightning strike then the opponent can endure it but they went in to make William miss his
greatest opportunity.
William’s eyes saw Leo pulling out his sword from Roger’s body.
However, William is still faster.
As he watches Roger fall, William swings his sword down with all he’s got.
“THE VICTORY—–IS OURS!!!!!”
They have made many sacrifices.
Some were unreasonable and some he couldn’t accept.
Every time he has to tell himself that ‘even so he has to win’.
All for the sake of his friend.
To deliver him a victory.
2313
If he defeats Leo here, the enemy army will collapse. No matter how skilled Al might be, he will not be
able to rebuild it.
At this big turning point, William gathers all the power in his body into the greatsword.
In response, Leo took a surprising response to the blow.
He jumped.
He leaped off his griffon, Noir, and onto William’s Flying Dragon.
Leo left the striking range of the greatsword.
William released one of his hands from the greatsword and tried to slash at him again but when Leo
landed on the dragon’s head, he jumped again.
“I understand your feelings. But with Nii-san here, I can not afford to lose either!!!”
Leo wields his sword as he passes by William.
A diagonal slash from his shoulder to his flank.
Getting attacked from the side, William can not respond.
“Gugha…..”
Vomiting blood, William’s body leans to the front.
However, his dragon flew away as if to protect William.
Leo who has lost his foothold was thrown into the air but that was already expected.
“Noir!!”
Leo calls Noir as he falls.
Arriving at his side, Noir gives him a look as if telling him to quickly get back on.
Seeing that, Leo grabbed on the reins and straddled Noir with a bitter smile.
Then, when he regained his balance, Finn rushed to his side.
“Are you safe, Your Highness!?”
“Somehow. But I don’t know if that was a finishing blow or not.”
The cut wound was not light.
He felt it.
2314
However, it is still not certain.
That’s why he was about to give chase.
However, multiple Dragon Knights have arrived to protect Roger and William.
“Evacuate His Highness and Captain to the mountain!! We will buy you some time!!”
“Protect them with your lives!!”
The Dragon Knights who were fighting the 6th Imperial Knights Corp and the Greisner’s Dragon
Knights gathered in front of them.
Thus the battle between Leo’s group who tries to give chase and the defending Dragon Knights began.
2315
SPT Chapter 362
Switch back to Al’s POV dayo
-Mr.Graverobber
The True Master
There was a movement in the sky.
I can tell that Leo and Finn are trying to pursue William.
The Dragon Knights are trying to evacuate to the mountain while Leo’s group is chasing them.
Still, I don’t have the full information.
“It looked like we have gained dominance but I don’t know if they have finished him off or not.”
“With the Dragon Knights struggling so much as they are right now, he is probably still alive.”
I nod at Duke Lowenstein’s opinion.
The Dragon Knights are desperately trying to prevent Leo’s pursuit.
No matter how many of them fell, they are showing that they are willing to fight to the death.
That is how someone who desperately wants to protect their master moves.
“They didn’t manage to deal the final blow huh…..”
“You looked disappointed huh? I think that it is enough to chase them back to the mountain though?”
“The Dragon Knights will show their strength when they are cornered. Moreover, if he is injured then
they can just patch him up. I wanted to take him down while he is still on the frontline.”
“Isn’t that just an ideal result?”
“Yeah, it’s ideal.”
There is no helping it now.
Although we can not obtain the ideal result, if William who has been supporting the enemy’s frontline
has retreated to the mountain we will be able to gain the advantage.
“It would be a waste to ignore this opportunity huh….Duke, put some pressure on the enemy.”
“Understood.”
2316
Saying so, the duke head to the frontline.
Gordon is at the rear army.
The news of William’s defeat may have reached him but it doesn’t seem to shake him that much.
However, the enemy at the front is different.
It would be bad for us if Gordon can go calm them down.
That’s why we will go on an offensive here.
“Advance the right-wing around the center. Do not let the enemy escape to the side.”
While giving out orders, I kept my eyes on the enemy’s movement.
It’s been a while since I started putting pressure on the rear army.
A Dragon Knight flies over the riverside and came to us.
“That was quite an achievement, wasn’t it? Finn.”
“It was all thanks to Your Highness.”
Saying so, Finn, the White Dragon Knight, knelt in front of me.
For the main army to send Finn who is their main fighting power over.
Leo must have given up on the full-scale capture of the mountain huh.
“I bring a message from His Highness Leonard. The enemy general, William, and the Captain of the
Black Dragon Knights are seriously injured and have retreated to the mountain. However, with the
enemy Dragon Knights’ tenacious resistance, the pursuit did not go well. His Highness Leonard plans
to pin the army in the mountain in place and use the chance to attack the enemy ground forces.”
“I understand. I will pick a good timing to launch an attack on our side as well.”
If William was seriously injured, the soldiers of the United Kingdom should fortify their defense of the
mountain. That will create a gap between their mountain and ground army.
With inefficient support from the mountain, Gordon will be caught in a pincer.
Number inferiority is inevitable.
The rest will depend on how Gordon will respond.
Even if he wants to move the army in the mountain, it would be difficult unless he goes there in person
since their chain of command is already messed up.
2317
However, if he does that, his ground forces may collapse in his absence.
William has left the frontline and Gordon doesn’t have enough hands to deal with the situation.
“Being cornered so far, I wonder what he will do now?”
“Yes?”
“Just talking to myself. What about you? What did Leo say?”
“Yes. His Highness told me to return to Your Highness Arnold side.”
“It would be a waste to use you to hold the enemy on the mountain huh.”
Finn is indispensable if Leo wants to capture the mountain through force but if he only wants to pin
the enemy there then the 6th Imperial Knight Corp and the other Dragon Knights should be enough.
Finn’s strength will shine more when he is on the attacking side.
And it is here that we will use it. Gordon is in command of the enemy here and our number is inferior
to theirs.
With many skilled generals at his side, it would be difficult to break through without Finn’s help.
“Any other reports?”
“That is……is it alright to say it here?”
“…….we are moving back, Sebas.”
“Understood, sir.”
I moved to the back with Finn and Sebas and resumed receiving Finn’s report in a place where the
other knights couldn’t hear us.
“So? What happened?”
“Yes. Vinfried-sama said that this is confidential but actually the Horsvath house that took the position
at Leonard-sama’s army’s flank has sent us a messenger. It seems that they want to switch sides.”
“That does sound like the Horsvath house.”
Seeing William’s defeat, they probably saw it as a chance huh.
Shrewd as always.
“What did Vin say?”
“He asked them for proof of loyalty and they presented us with a decree from Prince Eric. It appeared
that they were tasked to spy on Gordon’s army.”
2318
“So Eric is the true master of the Horsvath house huh. Well, that’s reasonable.”
There is no surprise there.
It was already unnatural for the Horsvath house who continued to survive every power struggle to
side with Gordon.
They were not in a situation where they have no choice but to join Gordon’s side.
If it was on Eric’s order then it would be convincing.
There is proof that Eric ordered them to do so from the beginning and if Eric actually guarantees them
then they will be welcomed back as a meritorious party.
Even when he is not directly involved in the war, Eric will be able to gain credit from it.
With this development, it would seem like we were all dancing on Eric’s palm from the beginning.
“Keeping his hands clean as he gains credit while watching the bloodshed on the ivory tower huh. He
sure used some cunning plan.”
I am in no place to say this but he does have quite a bad personality.
With this, even if Leo wins the war, the overwhelming advantage will not be his. This is Eric we are
talking about. He probably informed Father about the Horsvath house already.
The Prime Minister probably already received the information as well.
Even though we were fighting in the north, the central wasn’t so impatient because they always knew
what the enemy was doing.
This betrayal of theirs at the end of the battle will gain them a big credit as well.
“What will you do, Your Highness……?
“There’s nothing I can do. I doubt Vin can do anything either. The enemy on our flank is offering to
switch sides. There is no loss in accepting it.”
“But will that not affect the succession war?”
“Even if it will affect the succession war, it is more important to win this war now. Besides, you should
not alienate your allies even if you dislike them. The Horsvath army is on Leo’s flank. If Leo pushes in
from the center now, the enemy will think that there is still their ally in a position to intercept Leo.
They were our enemy just until a while ago after all. This will surely cause confusion among the
enemy. That’s why the Horsvath army has been maintaining its position at the mountainside.”
After that, since they are already in position, we probably have no choice but to order them to circle
behind the mountain to cut off William’s escape route.
2319
Even if we tell them to remain on standby they will probably not obey it anyway.
Most enemies will likely escape to the back of the mountain after all.
After all, that is their escape route.
It might be dangerous but between an exhausted army and a lively one, an army that is trying to
escape and an army that is lying in wait, it is obvious that the latter will have the advantage.
“Well…..it wouldn’t matter if Leo can defeat Gordon here though.”
“His Highness Leonard also said the same thing. He said that he will defeat Gordon himself.”
“If that’s what he said then our course of actions is simple.”
“To corner the enemy, correct?”
“That’s right. Finn, you will support us from the sky. There’s no need to push deeper than necessary.”
“As you command. However……if Your Highness wishes, I can damage the enemy as much as I can by
myself. I am not that tired yet after all.”
“I know. But I want you to stay above my position. There will be a time when I need you. At that time, I
will be counting on your full power.”
I said with a bitter smile.
Finn is very enthusiastic for some reason but I don’t want to escalate the situation to one where I have
to use him.
If the situation develops as I expected it to then it means the fall of my brother.
If possible, I want him to die with some dignity.
However, my intuition tells me that it will not be like that.
That’s why I brought this thing from the Imperial Capital.
“Sebas, get it ready.”
“So we have to use it after all….”
“Are you dissatisfied?”
“Bringing it along at your own discretion and use it without permission…….I afraid that you will be
reprimanded later, sir.”
“I’m prepared for it. Father too, if I can produce the result then he won’t complain.”
“I hope so, sir……..”
2320
Sebas left with a sigh.
He was heading for the carriage packed with the Minister of Technology’s failed works.
The many failed works were put there as camouflage.
The item was hidden under the double bottom compartment of the carriage.
“Now, shall we.”
Saying so, I ordered the entire army to attack.
2321
SPT Chapter 363
Should I call this an intermission?
We are taking a look at what’s happening in the capital.
-Mr.Graverobber
Swordsman’s Aspiration
Around the time when the decisive battle was taking place in the north.
Something was happening in the Imperial Capital.
A fire broke out sporadically all over the capital.
“My store!!”
“You idiot! You have a death wish!?”
“My child is gone!? Where is he!?”
“It seems the children are stuck inside!!”
Stores and houses.
Fire has broken out in all kinds of places at the same time.
The Imperial Capital has fallen into chaos.
With the growing panic, Emperor Johannes has dispatched the Imperial Knights to take control of the
situation.
However, before they arrived, someone had already moved.
Al’s great-grandfather, Gustav, who was staying inside the hidden room in the Imperial Sword Castle
sensed the turmoil and flew to the sky above the Imperial Capital.
“Good grief…….”
A single look would make it clear that this is only a diversion.
However, even though it is only a diversion, the culprit has chosen places that fire is easy to spread.
Even if you know that it is a diversion, you have to deal with the fire or the capital will suffer damage.
A plan that only someone familiar with the Imperial Capital can come up with.
2322
If it was according to Al’s expectation then this should be a trap laid out by the Fourth Consort.
If the Empire side devotes their manpower to deal with the situation, the Emperor’s protection will be
weakened.
However, that doesn’t mean the Emperor is without protection.
“This generation’s emperor sure have it hard. His successor died and he is being betrayed by his
consorts and children. If it was me, I would have already retired from all these political affairs.”
Even while saying so, Gustav knows that if he was in the Emperor’s shoes, he would not choose to
abandon his responsibility either.
An emperor must never abandon their people.
A throne is won by trampling over the feelings of many. Whether you are betrayed by your wives or
children, you must never let go of it.
The throne is not something that is given. It must be won.
Therefore, the Emperor can never give up.
After all, the price they paid to obtain the throne is already too high.
“As a fellow emperor, I guess I will lend a hand here.”
‘I have to keep my promise with my great-grandson too’, said Gustav as he used illusion magic and
transformed his appearance.
An appearance of a black-robed man with a silver mask.
The Empire’s SS-rank Adventurer.
Silver.
As he collected magic power in his hands, Gustav smiled.
“It’s been a long time since I last used magic.”
Gustav, who has lost his body, has also lost the ability to produce magic power.
What he uses is Al’s magic power that Al accumulated inside the book he is sealed in.
When he was teaching Al ancient magic, he used Al’s magic power to show him a sample but after Al
was capable enough on his own, that opportunity disappeared.
Gustav himself was also busy researching magic so he did prefer it that way.
Still, it was refreshing to use magic outside again.
2323
[Pour down, O’ rain of mystery—–・Mystic Rain]
What he cast was a magic that caused rainfall over a wide area.
However, there is no rain cloud in the sky. The rain simply appears out of thin air.
For those who don’t have knowledge of magic, it would be a mysterious rain.
The rain fell on the Imperial Capital and quickly extinguished the fire.
“It’s raining! It’s raining!”
“The fire is gone!!”
“Hey, the children are safe!!”
Cheers rose from all over the capital.
Many people looked up, wondering what caused the mysterious rain.
What they see is a single mage floating in the sky.
“It’s Silver!”
“Silver came to save us!!”
Gustave smiles as he listens to the cheers of the people.
He was not happy because of the cheers.
The reputation of ancient magic among the people of the Empire is the worst.
The reason why such a reputation has declined so much that people are now cheering for a user of
ancient magic was due to Al’s extensive work as Silver.
He spared no effort and continued to work for the people.
Able to confirm the achievements of his disciple, Gustav disappeared from the sky with satisfaction.
“So Silver has moved huh……”
Emperor Johannes muttered at the sight of the sudden rain as he sat on the throne.
Then, the door to the throne room suddenly opened.
When the fire broke out, Johannes cleared away his escort and left the door unguarded.
2324
“So you open an infiltration route to avoid casualty huh?”
Coming through the door is a red-haired woman, the Fourth Consort Sophia.
Her beloved old sword was held in her hand.
It was clear that she did not come here to talk.
“So it’s you after all…….do you hate me that much?”
“I have already thrown away my hatred. I had a grudge against you in the beginning for trapping me
inside that boring inner palace. But now I couldn’t care less about that.”
Saying so, Sophia slowly approaches Johannes.
However, there was a person standing in her way.
“Knight Commander Alida…….so you will be my opponent.”
“It’s a shame, Sophia-sama. I have always respected you as a swordsman.”
“Respect huh……isn’t that quite humble from someone who became a knight commander at that age.”
Saying so, Sophia gently leans her body forward.
Then, the next movement.
She snuck up to Alida’s chest.
A high-pitched sound echoes inside the throne room.
“It’s a wonderful technique.”
“I don’t want to hear it from someone who stopped it so easily.”
For Sophia, Alida was someone that envisioned her possible self.
If she didn’t enter the inner palace as a consort and continued on the path of the sword, it wouldn’t be
a dream for her to become an imperial knight commander.
However, that path was taken from her by her father and the Emperor.
At that point, Sophia knew that her self was already dead.
She gave birth to a prince as a consort and raised Gordon up as a warrior.
However, that was only the duty required of her.
She didn’t want to do it.
2325
The only thing she didn’t stop doing was honing her sword skill.
There was no place to make use of it. No swordsman would fight an Emperor’s wife.
Even if an assassin appears, they would be long dead before they can reach Sophia.
Just like that, it was like she was only waiting for her skill to rot away.
And when she was about to give up, the succession war happened.
Sophia saw this as an opportunity.
“Even if I attack the Emperor as a consort, you won’t fight me at full power. That’s why I came here as
a rebel. Now come at me with all you’ve got.”
“You participated in the rebellion for that kind of reason?”
“For you who can swing your sword as you like, it might not be important. But this fight is important
to me. Why hone my skill? Why master my swordsmanship? It was for the sake of proving my strength
by defeating a strong opponent.”
Sophia was looking for a place where she can wield the sword skill she kept honing.
She was waiting for a chance where she can fight a strong opponent without being disturbed by her
position as a consort.
That was the reason Sophia came here. The thought of escaping has never been in her mind.
She came here to die.
The reason she came to assassinate the Emperor here was that she knew that Alida would be her
opponent.
“NOW…… Let’s kill each other!!”
With that said, Sophia brandishes her sword.
Alida received it and the exchange of offense and defense began.
The exchange was at blinding speed but both of them easily received each other’s blows.
If you live by the sword, it is a duel that you must burn into your eyes.
However, that exchange did not last long.
“Stop right there. Sophia.”
It was Eric who appeared in the throne room.
Around him, Captains of the Imperial Knight Orders spread out to protect the surroundings.
2326
Knowing that Sophia would come, the captains pretended to be away from the castle.
“Eric huh…..what happened to the negotiation with Sokol?”
“It has already been concluded. The Eastern Border Defense Force has already begun preparing to
march north. This civil war is your defeat.”
“I don’t care. There’s no meaning in winning or losing in the first place.”
“I see. Then just come with us quietly.”
“So you want to get in my way?”
“That’s right.”
The moment he replied.
Sophia rushed straight at Eric.
However, the Imperial Knights Captains around him stopped her.
Sophia retreated to the door to avoid being surrounded.
As a result, the captains are standing around Alida.
It would be one thing if they are small fries but there are multiple captain-class opponents in front of
her.
Even Sophia would find it hard to breakthrough.
However, Sophia’s reinforcements have also arrived.
“You ran ahead by yourself again, Mother.”
“You finally came huh, Conrad.”
It was Conrad who led the reinforcements.
Sophia and Conrad were acting separately.
Sophia infiltrated the castle alone while Conrad led another infiltration unit through the castle’s secret
passages.
With Sophia absent at the agreed meeting point, Conrad had to rush the reinforcements to the throne
room.
“Take care of Eric and the captains. Alida is mine.”
“Got it.”
2327
Saying so, Conrad used his hand to order the men to engage the captains.
They brought only the elites among the elites. Even with Imperial Knight Captains as their opponent,
they should be able to earn some time.
In that situation, Sophia tries to get the defenseless Eric but Alida stepped in front of him and stopped
her.
The two’s swords collide with each other multiple times. Alida’s sword scratched Sophia’s cheek and
blood dripped down from it. However, Sophia accepted that with a smile.
She felt that she was finally alive after a long time.
“Knight Commander…….I will take your head and prove my power!!”
Saying so, Sophia brandishes her sword.
However, that blow was blocked by Alida. Feeling that the blow she put everything into was blocked
with room to spare, Sophia frowns.
Alida who is younger and has gone through many missions as an Imperial Knight is stronger.
Sophia was not discouraged by that fact.
If that is the case then she will just keep fighting as a swordsman and die as a swordsman.
Using your skill until you exhaust it and die with nothing left to give your opponent.
That is her aspiration as a swordsman.
As she was thinking so, Sophia felt severe pain in her back and her movement stopped.
“Ugh……”
Blood overflows from her mouth.
A blade protruded from her chest.
There was no killing intent. Even if it is Alida, there is no way that she wouldn’t notice her killing
intent.
It was a stab in the back with no emotion behind it.
Turning back, Sophia bears the wrathful expression at the attacker.
“CON…..RADDDDDD………!!”
“Well…..if you want to die then please go ahead and die by yourself. Mother.”
Said Conrad with a grin on his face.
2328
TLN: Well, it finally happen.
2329
SPT Chapter 364
Special Thanks to Double Tap who might cause Goal-kun to go on life support…….again……
BTW, It’s Coffee Appreciation Day Dayo!!!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Imperial Flag’s Whereabouts
“Ugh…..You dare……betrayed your own mother…..!”
Sophia shouted as blood spilled from her mouth.
However, that grudgeful voice completely went over Conrad.
The elites that he brought along have already been detained by the captains.
Then, that Conrad slowly walked over to Eric’s side and turned to Sophia.
“I have never thought of you as my mother you know. Have you ever done something like a mother for
me before?”
Unlike Gordon, Conrad was not raised by Sophia.
As she raised Gordon as a warrior, Sophia was completely indifferent to Conrad, her second child.
“I gave birth……to you……”
“So, what difference does that make?”
“You…..! Ugh……my single wish…….to die as a swordsman, you want to deny me even that….!? “
“Please don’t act like a victim now. How many sacrifices have you made to fulfill that wish of yours? If
you want to fight a strong opponent and die then you could have challenged an SS-rank adventurer
and die alone. Instead, you plotted a rebellion with Gordon-aniue and aimed for Father’s life. It seems
that you still couldn’t let go of your grudges until the end right?”
“A coward backstabber like you is preaching me now…….?”
“Being stabbed in the back on the battlefield is way worse you know. Before being your son, I am an
Adler. I’ve just done what any Imperial Prince would do so you should be proud of me instead
though.”
Saying so, Conrad turned his eyes toward Eric.
2330
Eric gives him a nod and speaks.
“Thanks for the hard work.”
“A hard work indeed. I’m all tired now.”
“Conrad…….you betrayed us…….from the start……?”
“It would be nice if you can stop putting it like that you know. I only chose my father and brother over
you after all.”
“You ingrate……it was you who instigated him right!!”
Sophia throws her sword at Eric.
However, it was parried away by Alida.
Seeing her sword powerlessly lying on the floor, Sophia vomits blood.
Her body then powerlessly collapsed to the floor.
The Emperor’s face was reflected in her eyes.
“Sophia…..”
“Don’t take pity on me now……”
“When I went to welcome you as my wife……I told you right. It’s fine if you want to turn it down.”
“If I had refused……that responsibility will fall over to other nobles of the north……..I am a
Lowenstein……I will not…..force something that I hate…..onto others…….”
That’s right.
She was once like that.
She made a decision to abandon her self for the sake of the north.
However, that has changed.
How did it turn out like this?
Sophia gently closed her eyes with such regrets.
“…….”
“She is gone, Your Majesty.”
“….clean her body.”
2331
Saying so, Johannes tiredly sits back on the throne.
Conrad quietly kneeled in front of Johannes.
“Even as a spy, I have joined the rebellion. Please forgive me, Your Majesty.”
“It’s fine……Eric told me from the start. Good work.”
“It is the question of appearance, Your Majesty. Please punish me.”
“……then you will be placed under house arrest for a while. It will be until this is over. I’m tired.”
Johannes said and let out a long sigh.
However, Conrad sits upright and starts another topic.
“I am sorry to say this while you are tired, Your Majesty, but I need to make a report.”
“What?”
“Gordon is connected to Grimoire. And it appears that Grimoire is also linked to the kidnapping
organization in the South as well.”
“At this point, nothing will surprise me anymore.”
“About that……it appears that he has made preparations to use children as weapons again. Originally,
the cause of the demon appearances in the south was the military hardliners’ order to the
organization to conduct experiments to use the children with odd eyes as weapons. The leader of
those hardliners was Gordon.”
Johannes frowned at Conrad’s words.
The problem that occurred in the south has made its way to the north.
While feeling horrified by the thought of using children as weapons, Johannes asked.
“Any way to prevent it?”
“None that I am aware of. However, since the principle behind it is making innate magic run wild, I
think that we may have a countermeasure.”
“The Imperial Flag huh?”
Eric who was listening to the side said in a small voice.
And Conrad nodded.
“If it is a form of magic then it can not be used without magic power. If we negate it before its
activation and consume their large amount of magic power, we might be able to prevent it.”
2332
“Your Majesty. I will personally carry the Imperial Flag to the north.”
Eric volunteered himself.
However, it was Alida who rained down on his parade.
“Your Majesty.”
“What is it? Alida.”
“I also have to make a report. Actually—the Imperial Flag has already been brought to the north.”
“….what, –did you say……?”
Johannes’s eyes opened wide.
The flag is one of the national treasures. It should have been strictly guarded inside the vault.
Traugott was able to bring it out because he was a prince and he only used it inside the castle.
“What do you mean?”
“Before his departure, His Highness Arnold brought it out saying that he will need it. It was when he
was looking for Minister Cuber’s inventions inside the vault, some of the minister’s inventions were
stored there.”
“Wait, wait…….how did he bring it out? The Imperial Knights should have been standing guard……”
Johannes noticed it mid-sentence.
Why does Alida know about it?
“I overlooked it because His Highness said that he will definitely need it in the north.”
“With no report to me……..”
“I was instructed to stay silent, Your Majesty. His Highness said that he doesn’t know where the
information may leak to the outside.”
“Then…….a prince, a minister, and the knight commander have colluded to smuggle out a national
treasure? You know what this means right?”
“I understand it well, Your Majesty. However, in truth, the situation will require the use of the flag.
Also, it is just His Highness’s Arnold’s excuse but he says that it is just a matter of saving Your Majesty
the trouble.”
“That fool of a son!! You and Cuber too!? If Arnold doesn’t come back with some big achievement, you
all will be punished you know!!”
2333
“I understand.”
Said Alida without a change in her expression.
After all, if Al can read the situation so far ahead, there is no way that he would not succeed.
Even children can understand that you will be punished for such an act without any outstanding
achievement.
Alida thought that Al would make an achievement big enough to silent the Emperor.
The Imperial Flag is powerful but there are only a limited number of places where it can be utilized.
Moreover, it can only be used by a member of the Imperial Family. Even if the incident ends with no
need to use it, it will not be a loss for the Empire.
Alida and Cuber are still necessary to the Empire. Johannes can not afford to keep them away for long.
That’s why any rebuke or punishment will be concentrated on Al.
Johannes was frustrated because he is aware of that.
He can see Al’s grinning face in his mind.
“Seriously…..just who did he take after.”
Saying so, Johannes let out another sigh.
Oster Plain, the battlefield.
The ones who have the advantage now are Leo and Al.
In order to avoid the collapse of the entire army, Gordon left the rear army and assumed command at
the headquarters.
However, because of that, the rear army could not suppress the enemy’s offensive and Gordon’s army
is now being cornered from both the front and the back.
In that situation, Gordon summoned a mage.
“Did you call?”
“…..use it.”
“As you wish.”
With a reverent bow, the mage set off to prepare.
Seeing that, Gordon ordered his army to evacuate to the mountain.
2334
“The victory…….is mine!”
2335
SPT Chapter 365
Now back to the north
-Mr.Graverobber
Magic Bomb
When Leo received the report that Gordon’s army had begun to retreat to the mountain, he dispatched
his elites that had been standing by at the headquarters.
This is to cause damage to the enemy army as much as possible before they reach the mountain.
“Good grief…..it’s finally my turn huh.”
Said the soaking wet Sieg as he appeared on the frontline.
Thinking that he should be able to swim along the river and reach the enemy’s headquarters, he ended
up drowning immediately after jumping into the fast-flowing river.
“Stop acting so self-importantly. I will throw you back in the river you know?”
“So cruel!?”
Next to Sieg was the frowning Lynfia.
Originally, Sieg was supposed to be standing by at the headquarters while Lynfia headed to the
frontline ahead of him.
However, because Sieg became unable to move, Lynfia was also put on standby.
“Battlefield is so boring…….everyone is so stiff now.”
“You are just too calm.”
In a situation where lives are at stake, there’s nothing wrong with being nervous.
Only a strong person can act normally.
However, such strong people are few in number.
While having such a conversation, the two arrived at the frontline.
The enemy is on the defensive to prevent them from advancing further.
With spears in their hands, they are grouping up in a tight formation.
“Lynfia. So you’ve come.”
2336
“Charlotte-sama.”
Char who was in command of the frontline spotted Lynfia and called out to her.
There was a large amount of sweat on her face.
Char was exhausting her magic power as he continued to cast thunder magic on the frontline.
“Are you okay?”
“I’m still fine, somehow. But, I want to take a short break.”
“Understood, we will take care of the enemy’s defensive line.”
During such a conversation, Sieg brought a towel.
He then jumps toward Char.
“Charlotte-samaaa!! Let me wipe your sweat!!!”
“Your opponents are that way.”
“AHHHHHHH!!??”
Sieg who jumped toward Char was grabbed midair by Lynfia and thrown at the enemy.
Drawing a parabola, Sieg fell behind the enemy line.
With the sudden appearance of a bear, the enemy was confused.
Without missing that chance, Lynfia transformed her sword into a spear and rushed at the enemy.
“Everyone, get behind me. I can’t control it well so don’t get caught.”
With that said, Lynfia began spinning her spear.
There was no strange sound. However, the eyelids of the enemy soldiers who were manning the
defensive formation steadily got heavy.
They were in a state of extreme tension. They did not fall asleep but they couldn’t concentrate on the
enemy in front of them.
Then, Lynfia cut through those soldiers with her spear.
With their difference in ability in the first place, the soldiers stood no chance against Lynfia when they
were attacked by drowsiness.
A hole opened up in their defensive line. However, the soldiers that were supposed to fill that hole
were far away from it.
2337
“TEEEEEERYAAAA!!”
Swinging his spear, Sieg knocks down the soldiers on the enemy backline.
They were first surprised that a bear is capable of wielding a spear but now they are afraid of how
terribly strong the bear is. Some were pushed by fear and attacked Sieg but they had to despair at
Sieg’s small body which make it hard for them to hit him.
Sieg is rampaging at the enemy backline like a hurricane.
With weapons thrusting at him from all sides, Sieg lightly repelled them all away with his superior
spear handling.
He was then joined by Lynfia.
The two are now in the middle of the enemy.
Although they were surrounded on all sides, the enemy’s attack doesn’t pose any danger to them at all.
While the enemy was distracted by the two, Char did not miss that chance.
Leading her elite troops, Char broke through the enemy’s defense.
Just like that, she continues to take out the enemy’s frontline.
However, what remains were the soldiers at the very front. The enemy formation has become a
hollow shell.
“They should be in the middle of climbing the mountain! Scout the surroundings!”
Reaching the enemy headquarters, Char gave her instructions.
At that moment.
From inside the enemy headquarters, a pillar of red light rose to the sky.
Seeing that, Char’s eyes opened wide.
That looked similar to a phenomenon where a mage’s magic power is running wild. However, it
appears to be something different here.
“All men! Fall back!!!!”
To deal with the situation, Char turned to the light and ordered the scouts around her to fall back.
Normal soldiers can do nothing against berserking magic power.
Char then found a tent where the light was emitting from.
When she carefully stepped into the tent, Char turned speechless to what was inside.
2338
“No way….”
“Uu–…..”
There were about 10 children inside.
Blindfolded and gagged.
All ten of them are chained together by restraints.
They probably were not eating well as they are extremely thin.
She immediately tries to help them but the red light is shot up to the sky again.
And It was bigger than before.
“Their out-of-control magic power is synced together…….?”
She can tell that these children possess high magic power just by looking at them.
The little boy with the most magic power is the one whose power is running out of control. The other
children seemed to have only been synced with him.
“The other children’s magic power is resonating and amplifying his berserking magic power……”
After she analyzed so, she tries to touch the restraints.
However, the children reacted to her actions and the red light grew even bigger.
If stimulated, they could explode at any moment. They were set up like that.
Char looks around her to look for any clue that might have been left here.
However, Char noticed that there was a huge barrier set up on the mountain.
“…..so they planned to use these children as a suicide bomb……..”
Leo and Al’s armies broke through most of the enemy frontline already.
It would be extremely difficult to withdraw the army now.
If a huge spell is activated here, both armies will suffer great damage.
While trying to think of a way to prevent that, cold sweat flows down on her back.
However, no matter how desperately she thought about it, she couldn’t find a way to save these
children.
The children are scared and their power is out of control.
2339
She would pull the trigger herself if she approaches them.
In that situation, the blindfold of the boy whose magic power is running out of control came off.
Seeing that, Char made her decision.
“To the whole army! This is Charlotte von Lowenstein! The enemy has laid a trap inside their
headquarters! Withdraw as far away as possible!”
Char said that using voice amplifying magic and erected a lightning barrier around the tent.
They can not be saved. If that is the case then the only thing left was to make a realistic decision.
To suppress the damage as much as possible.
However, even Char’s best barrier will not be able to contain this.
That’s why Char covered the whole tent with a barrier with herself inside of it.
As long as this is a case of berserking magic power, it can be prevented if the boy regains
consciousness.
She planned to keep talking to the boy until the last minute.
However, she had another reason to cage herself inside this barrier.
“I’m sorry…….I couldn’t help you……”
Char stares at the boy as she apologized.
He has odd eyes.
She had heard many stories about children with odd eyes being kidnapped.
Char did not have innate magic but she had high magic power and a high aptitude for magic.
She was safe because she was a child of a powerful noble house.
It was something that could have happened to herself. Char who saw herself overlapped with these
children couldn’t make the choice of running away.
“It’s okay…….it’s already okay………”
The child did not awaken.
Still, Char continued to call out to him.
2340
“Having an odd-eye child with innate magic to go berserk and link the children with the ability to
amplify magic around him. That way, the power of the berserking magic will be amplified.”
“I heard that you failed in the south though?”
“That was a completely berserked magic and it was a failure from the beginning since the child’s
innate magic was of a summoning system. This time the child that is running berserk has the innate
magic of the explosion system. The entire battlefield will be wrapped by an explosion, Your Highness.”
It was the mage who happily explained that to Gordon.
The creator of this trap is a mage involved with Grimoire.
He was dispatched to Gordon’s side to prepare a magical weapon for Gordon.
“It’s a disposable weapon. The power is guaranteed right?”
“Of course, Your Highness. Besides, children with magic amplification quality are not that rare. It’s a
selling point for that weapon since it doesn’t require high ability from each of them. We call it a magic
bomb.”
Saying so, the mage continues to explain its features.
He spoke in a way that clearly shows that he doesn’t think of people as people.
If William was here, he would have been enraged by now.
Because he knows that, Gordon didn’t want to use it until William is away.
Even if it’s Gordon, he is not comfortable with using children as weapons.
Even so, he decided to taint his hands.
“No matter how dirty of a plan I have to use, I must win. The result will justify everything.”
If he loses, he loses everything.
That’s why Gordon stood in an open area where he could clearly see the headquarters. A place where
he can see all movements there.
“Is it fine to leave Duke Lowenstein’s granddaughter there?”
“No problem at all. The children are already dominated by fear after all.”
“There is still a chance. Go get rid of her.”
“…….as you wish. I will send our mages to take care of her.”
Said the mage as he rudely bowed to Gordon.
2341
At that time, a voice echoed throughout the battlefield.
“I’m coming. Do not give up.”
Gordon frowned at that voice.
2342
SPT Chapter 366
Hehehehehehe MuHahahaHahahaHA
-Mr.Graverobber
The Voice that reaches them
“To the whole army! This is Charlotte von Lowenstein! The enemy has laid a trap inside their
headquarters! Withdraw as far away as possible!”
When he heard that, Duke Lowenstein’s breath turned erratic as he hurried his horse forward.
His right hand is clutching his chest.
“My lord! Charlotte-sama is–!”
“I know…..!”
While somehow pushing out that response, Duke Lowenstein shook his head to clear up his blurred
vision.
Despite his old body, he went to the frontline and used magic multiple times. Perhaps due to his
tiredness, his illness is acting up.
It is still too soon.
He can’t let it end yet.
While telling that to his body, Duke Lowenstein advances his horse forward.
However, he couldn’t stand even the slight tremor.
Losing his balance, the Duke started to slip off his horse.
The vassal nearby hurriedly went in to support him.
“My lord!?”
“Haa Haaa……”
“No good! He’s having a seizure! Take the Duke back to the rear!!”
“No…….I must go……”
“You can’t reach milady with that body my lord!!”
2343
After that exchange, the Duke was taken off his horse by his vassals.
They tried to carry him back to the rear but the duke desperately resisted.
“I…….can’t…….!”
“Your life is at risk, my lord!”
“I’ve already given my life to this!!”
“At least please wait until the symptoms subside!”
“My granddaughter will die by the time I recover! Why do you think there is a lightning barrier at the
enemy headquarters even though the enemy laid a trap there…..!? Charlotte is still there!”
Duke Lowenstein even resorted to crawling if it meant he could move forward but he couldn’t get far.
His breathing is out of order and his vision is turning more and more blurry.
He never thought that he could become so pathetic as he is now.
He reached his hand out to the enemy headquarters knowing that he won’t be able to get there.
Even so, he can’t suppress his feelings.
So the duke raised his voice.
“Anyone is fine! Go and save Charlotte! Save my granddaughter!”
He was dubbed the Thunder God as he sent many soldiers to hell with his lightning.
He thought that his illness might be the punishment for that.
A punishment for him who has killed far too many.
However, Char is different.
She was born with odd eyes and grew up with the feeling that she was different from others. Still, she
grew up to be a good person. Even so, she still suffered the same illness as his.
After losing her parents at an early age, she also recently lost her beloved grandfather.
And he, the only one left for her, will soon be gone.
At least he wants to give her happiness.
He will not accept this kind of ending.
He will not accept it, Never.
2344
Thinking so, the duke continues to move forward.
At that time, he heard a voice.
“I’m coming. Do not give up.”
Hearing that voice, the duke stopped moving.
Instead, his body started to shake.
He then muttered to his vassals.
“……..raise it up.”
‘“Yes? Wh, What, my lord!?”
“Raise the twin swords flag…..! His Highness is going……!”
While giving that order, the duke squeezed out his power and got up on his horse with the support of
his vassals.
“Don’t be scared……everyone is together with you…..”
Char kept talking to the children in the barrier.
A large number of mages appeared at the headquarters to get rid of Char.
Their number was over 20.
Where on earth did the enemy hide these mages before?
Each of their abilities is not too bad.
If they were placed on the frontline from the start, the enemy might be able to push back their
offensive.
Char thought while glaring at the mages through the barrier.
“So this is your work?”
“Indeed. They are our product.”
One mage replied so.
Char was angry at that answer.
“Product? Just what do you think these children are!?”
2345
“A tool?”
Without even thinking, the mage naturally replied.
It is clear that is his true thought.
They are all twisted.
Thinking so, Char began to realize the graveness of her situation.
Because they are twisted, they will not hesitate no matter what action they will have to take.
The mages turned their hands to Char’s barrier.
They are trying to break it with their magic.
“Our product is not something that can be stopped with this kind of barrier but it would be a problem
if you suppressed its power.”
Saying so, the mages begin to chant their magic.
However, their chant was immediately interrupted.
“The great Sieg-sama is here!”
“What!?”
When Sieg who had fallen from the sky landed on one of the mages’ head, he cut the head of a nearby
mage off and proceeded to decapitate the mage he landed on.
Two of them were killed instantly.
As a result, Sieg is now their main target.
However, another person has arrived in the meantime.
“Are you safe? Charlotte-sama.”
“Lynfia….why…..?”
“That’s right! Why are you here!? You all will be caught up in the explosion you know!?”
When will the children explode?
Unlike the mages, Sieg and Lynfia lacked that information.
That’s why this place was supposed to be equivalent to a dead zone to them.
However.
2346
“We were told not to give up.”
“There is no way to prevent it! Hurry up and run away!”
“It seems that the kid doesn’t think so you know?”
Sieg, who was fighting one of the mages, retreated to Lynfia’s side.
The two hold up their weapons.
“Al-sama wouldn’t come out here without any kind of plan.”
“You don’t know if that plan will work! Order the whole army to retreat right now! Stop him too!”
“If he is the kind of person that would stop if we tell him to then we wouldn’t have such a headache
you know. The younger one too.”
The moment Sieg said that.
A black griffon flew down from the sky.
“No way! Even the commander!?”
“I can’t settle down unless I come out myself you see.”
Saying so, Leo cut down the confused mages.
Then the battle began.
Leo’s side is disadvantageous in terms of number but they are gradually reducing the mages’ number
while protecting each other’s back.
Then, only one mage was left.
A black-robed mage who spoke to Gordon.
“This is a surprise. Prince Leonard.”
“What is?”
“Your stupidity.”
“I’m often told that.”
While saying so, Leo got off Noir’s back and slowly walked toward the mage.
The mage controls the black shadow-like whip and attacks Leo but Leo cuts it down with a single
slash.
2347
The mage opens his eyes wide at how his magic was easily cut down but his carefree attitude does not
disappear.
“That’s quite skilled of you……..still, you won’t be able to stop it.”
“I know. I don’t have any countermeasure for this after all.”
“Then why come here? If the commander dies, the whole army will collapse, no?”
“That is probably the case. But it seems my brother has a way to deal with this.”
“It’s just some reckless courage. Such a thing won’t save anyone.”
“I wonder about that. I do believe in my brother though.”
“Believe? In that Dull Prince? You don’t seem to understand the weight of your life huh.”
Saying so, the mage activates his magic.
A black shadow covers the area around Leo.
And it struck at him from all sides.
“Fool! This happens because of your idiotic belief in your incompetent brother!”
“You are lucky that your opponent is me.”
“What……?”
Leo broke through the shadow unscathed.
He then snuck up to the mage’s chest.
“If you said that to Elna’s face, you would die a painful death you know. She hates people who make
fun of Nii-san after all.”
“Ugh! You all will be accompanying me anyway. There is no escape for those who can not enter the
barrier at the mountain.”
“Even so, I still believe in Nii-san.”
With that said, Leo cut off the mage’s head.
After eliminating all enemies, Leo approached Char.
“Your Highness…..”
“Nii-san will be here soon. Wait just a little longer okay.”
“Then at least please fall back, Your Highness!”
2348
“It’s too late for that now.”
Leo answers with a smile.
At that time, Gordon’s voice reached Leo’s group.
“To all soldiers! Stop Arnold! Absolutely do not let him advance forward! If this operation is
successful, the victory will be ours! We are the Adler’s army! Let’s take what we want! Like a predator,
let’s take the victory along with this country together!!”
Said Gordon as he moved out to stop Al.
TLN: Finally, all according to Keikaku
2349
SPT Chapter 367
Finally, the arc will end this sunday.
-Mr.Graverobber
—————–
Imperial Flag Activation
“To the whole army! This is Charlotte von Lowenstein! The enemy has laid a trap inside their
headquarters! Withdraw as far away as possible!”
Hearing Char’s voice, I looked up to the sky.
In response, Finn who was standing by above me descended down.
Then, I call out to a nearby mage.
“Can you use voice amplifying spell?”
“Any time you wish, Your Highness.”
“I see. I’m counting on you.”
After confirming that the mage can use the voice amplifying spell, I took a deep breath and spoke.
“I’m going. Do not give up.”
I can’t afford to give specific instructions.
The rest is up to everyone’s judgment.
“Finn! You can fly with me on the back right?”
“If it is just flying then it is doable, sir!”
“Alright! Take me straight to the middle of the battlefield!”
Saying so, I straddle behind nova who just landed on the ground.
It is a little cramp for two people to ride on Nova’s small body.
Asking him to fight like this would be impossible.
However, this is still the fastest way.
“Arnold-sama. Here it is, sir.”
2350
Said Sebas as he handed me a flag.
It was the Imperial Flag that we smuggled out of the vault.
If it was as we predicted then it should work. Gramp said that innate magic is still magic after all.
“Alright, I’m heading out.”
“Have a safe trip, sir.”
After being sent off by Sebas’s bow, Nova fluttered its wings and brought me and Finn to the sky.
However, I immediately complain.
“Don’t raise the altitude! Fly low!”
“However, if we fly at low altitude, the enemy will attack us, sir!”
“Don’t mind them. If I move, my escort will move as well.”
When I said so.
Gordon issued his command through voice amplifying magic.
“To all soldiers! Stop Arnold! Absolutely do not let him advance forward! If this operation is
successful, the victory will be ours! We are the Adler’s army! Let’s take what we want! Like a predator,
let’s take the victory along with this country together!!”
That’s a Gordon-like command.
Still, in response to his order, multiple Dragon Knights moved out from the mountain.
They probably didn’t know the full picture of his plan.
They should have been protecting William until now.
Even so, as William was injured, Gordon was the only one they can rely on.
Since Gordon said that this directly involved their victory, they came out at his command.
“Your Highness! The enemy Dragon Knights are heading toward us!”
“Don’t stop. Just fly straight ahead.”
“We will be shot down you know!?”
“Don’t worry. We are not the only one flying here.”
The Dragon Knights were trying to block our path but most of them were forced to withdraw due to
the barrage of fireballs.
2351
“Leave your protection to us, Your Highness.”
“I’m counting on you, Captain Lambert.”
“Please enjoy your flight.”
Saying so, Lambert the captain of the 6th Imperial Knight Corp smiled cheerfully and headed off to
engage the enemy Dragon Knights.
The Knights of the 6th Corp descended from the sky one after another, stopping the enemy Dragon
Knights.
“But Your Highness still hasn’t given your order……”
“They are Imperial Knights, even without an order, they will protect the Imperial Family.”
If they waited for instructions every time then they wouldn’t be able to protect the Imperial Family.
The Imperial Knights can act at their own discretion. They were given that authority.
There is no need to give them specific instructions. Especially in a tense situation like this.
“Your Highness! The enemy still has their archers!”
“They won’t be shooting at us.”
The enemy archers were beginning to aim at us as we are flying at low altitudes.
Since the Dragon Knights couldn’t stop us, the archers are their only hope.
Hearing Gordon’s command, the scattered enemy archer units are gathering up one after another.
They probably plan to shoot us down before we reach the headquarters.
And with me on Nova’s back, we can’t take an evasive maneuver.
“I will fly right through them! That is fine right, Your Highness!?”
“So you learned something after all. Do not change course. Speed up and fly right through them.”
In response to my words, Finn rushed straight toward the direction where the enemy archers were
waiting for us.
However, a black griffon was flying toward them at tremendous speed from the side.
“Get ready! Take aim!”
“W, wait! To the side! Look to the side!!”
The griffon which rushed in at an incredible speed literally swept up the enemy archer unit.
2352
Its speed was faster than a horse.
If something rushed at you from your defenseless side at that speed, it wouldn’t end with just some
minor injuries.
While the enemy was dealing with that, we passed over them and entered the enemy headquarters.
Nova thrusts his feet to the ground and slows us down while scraping the ground.
It’s a rough landing.
However, I made it in time.
“Well done. Dragon Knight Finn.”
“I, I’m grateful for your praise, sir.”
Finn is letting out a sigh of relief at our safety.
I got off Nova’s back while smiling bitterly at Finn.
Then, a black griffon landed next to me.
“Hey, Nii-san. You are late.”
“I even stopped napping and rushed over. You should be crying tears of gratitude already.”
It was our first conversation in over a month.
Still, nothing changed between me and Leo.
While smiling at each other, we approached where Char was.
“Yo, Char. Quite a crisis you find yourself in isn’t it.”
“Run away…….these kids are already reaching their limit…….”
“I know. This is already the second time after all.”
The same thing happened in the south.
In the end, the children were safe but it was nothing short of a miracle.
I subdued the Demons as Silver but the children were saved because Lynfia’s sister was taken into the
sphere with the other children around her.
It was just a coincidence.
Even if the Demons were successfully subdued, many children would have died.
2353
In that regard, I couldn’t make it in time to save them.
However, there is no point regretting it now.
It would be difficult to hope for a better result than that.
No one could have predicted that such a thing would happen.
However.
“Since this is already the second time, I have already taken measures against it.”
The children’s magic power is swelling up.
I want to activate the flag immediately and release them but this can only be activated once. If I
activate it while they are still in the middle of running berserk then their berserking magic power will
continue to run wild.
There is only one moment I can activate it. When their magic reaches the critical point. If possible I
want to keep the activation up for some time but in a wide area like this, my blood alone won’t be
enough.
That’s why one moment will decide it all.
While I was waiting for that, Gordon’s voice reached me.
“It’s no use bringing out the Imperial Flag here! Arnold! You can not counter the berserking magic
power!!”
Those words made me grin.
I then look at Leo who is standing to my left.
Realizing what I want, Leo used the voice amplifying magic.
“Have you ever tried it out?”
“That is not a normal magic! Even without a trial that much is obvious!”
“That’s why you have such a narrow sight. There are many things in this world that you won’t know
until you try you know? Because you always think like that, you were tricked so easily by Rupert back
in the capital after all.”
“Shut up! If you want to do it then fine! Are you prepared to bet your life on it!?”
“Are you trying to threaten me? I have already put my life on the line since a long time ago.”
Saying so, I raised the flag.
2354
The golden eagle was drawn on the flag.
The [Imperial Flag], our national treasure.
An ancient magic tool that can only be activated by the blood of the Imperial Family.
“Remember this well——Adlers never rely on miracles.”
It was the Adlers’ will to take people in to protect them.
Every time the lives that we want to protect are in danger, we wouldn’t be able to protect them if we
always rely on miracles.
A miracle is only needed once. The second time we will protect them with careful planning.
That’s what it means to protect.
“Imperial Flag—-Activate!!”
When the magic power of the children reached a critical point.
I activated the Imperial Flag.
The string wraps around my arm and sucks my blood.
Then, the area was wrapped in blinding light.
The blinding light covers everything and robs everyone of their sight.
The activation range is the entire battlefield.
Using my blood which held a large amount of magic power, this much is possible.
The visibility is still rough.
However, I can see that my surroundings are still intact.
It means that nothing has been blown away.
When my field of vision slowly returned.
Char was sitting in front of me with a surprised expression.
The children are lying down next to her. Of course, they are still breathing.
With the best result achieved, I grinned.
2355
SPT Chapter 368
Aight, here’s the chapter……I’m off to deal with centipedes infestation……….
-Mr.Graverobber
The Order of the Black Twin Princes
“We are still……alive?”
“Seems so.”
I answered Char’s muttering.
After collecting herself, Char rushed to the children.
They seem to be pretty debilitated but their lives don’t seem to be in danger.
Judging so, Char sighs in relief.
Passing by Char, I proceeded forward.
To be honest, I am about to collapse because of the amount of blood I lost but I still have something to
do.
The battlefield was in chaos.
After all, the Flying Dragons that were flying at low altitudes all fell to the ground.
Flying Dragons use their magic power to fly. If that is erased, it will naturally affect their ability to fly.
The 6th Corp were not affected probably because they knew that I would use the Imperial Flag and
fled to the sky. The same is true for the Dragon Knights on our side.
That’s why the time is now.
We now held the advantage on both ground and the sky.
It’s time to play some trick.
“Char. can you amplify my voice?”
“Un.”
“Then let’s get started.”
The enemy is still confused.
2356
But there is confusion on our side as well.
That’s why I have to calm them down while directing them to the enemy.
“How was it? Gordon. It seems that your trump card has been taken out of the picture now though?”
“….KILL HIM! ALL SOLDIERS! KILL ARNOLD AND EVERYONE AT THE HEADQUARTERS! ADVANCE!
THEIR DEFENSE IS THIN RIGHT NOW!”
That’s right. We forcibly broke through the enemy’s line of defense with a small number of elites.
There are still many enemy soldiers around us. And they are enough to surround us.
However.
“I am addressing every soldier on the battlefield. Let me explain what just happened. Earlier, at the
enemy headquarters, there were multiple children with odd-eyes whose magic power were running
wild. To be precise, they were rigged to run wild. The same thing happened once already in the south
of the Empire. An experiment on producing a magic weapon using children as tools. We just countered
it with our national treasure, [the Imperial Flag]. If we failed, this whole battlefield would have
already been turned into a crater by now.”
“IT’S NONSENSE! DON’T BE FOOLED!”
“I don’t really mind if you don’t believe me. However, I want you to think twice about your
commander who just abandoned you here. I want the Dragon Knights who selflessly charged at us
without knowing the whole plan to think about what just happened. You have no cause to fight for. Let
me tell you something that anyone should be able to understand. Humans are creatures that continue
their bloodline through their children. That’s why children are our future. Taking advantage of those
children and using them like a tool is the same as compromising our future. If you do not care about
that then just come at us. We will not forgive anyone who would tolerate such a thing.”
The whole battlefield was still.
They should already know that Gordon was planning to activate some kind of trap. They knew that
they were abandoned even if they didn’t know what for.
That’s originally how a battlefield is.
Some may have been wanting to fight with their lives on the line. However, they shouldn’t desire the
cause they are fighting for to be one that is fine with using such inhumane weapons.
It seems that the enemy Dragon Knights who were up in the sky and managed to avoid the effect of the
flag are also confused.
They are wondering if the enemy is lying to them or not but they can’t decide.
“How dare you spouting such lies!? Everyone! Do not be fooled by him! Just crush the enemy!”
2357
“Alright, then what were you trying to use just now?”
“What?”
“What was the trap that guaranteed your victory? How did we stop it and what did your men fight to
protect? If you are saying that I lied then explain yourself.”
“I HAVE NO NEED TO EXPLAIN ANYTHING TO THE LIKES OF YOU!”
Well, of course, he couldn’t explain it.
However, it is still necessary to clear up doubts in his allies.
He probably couldn’t come with any good excuse so he doesn’t even attempt to deceive his men.
After all, if he says something wrong, his lies will be called out.
“Having no consideration for others, taking things for your own. Using force to rob, using force to
make others obey. Never listen to the people around you and take them all for granted. Let me put this
clearly, you are unsuitable to be an emperor.”
“WHAT DO THE LIKES OF YOU KNOW!? ADLER IS A CLAN OF CONQUEROR! WHAT WE DO IS
CONQUER! IT IS EXACTLY BECAUSE WE NEED A TRUE CONQUEROR AS A RULER THAT I AM THE
MOST SUITABLE FOR THE THRONE.”
So he started trying to justify himself huh.
Fool.
Now, what Gordon should do is not talk about how he should be an emperor.
He should have tried to calm down his subordinates.
How does he deserve to be an emperor? That is pointless given that anything he brings up can be
countered.
Above all——he is mistaken in his interpretation of Adler.
“Sure, Adler is a clan of conquerors. We couldn’t stand being robbed so we decided to rob everything
and keep them under our protection. We vowed to protect everything under the wings of the golden
eagle. To do that, it is true that we have to be aggressive at times. That is undeniable. But the will of
Adler isn’t what you just described.”
“AND YOU ARE SAYING THAT YOU BASTARD UNDERSTOOD WHAT ADLER STAND FOR!?”
“I am also an Adler after all. So I will tell you. The true meaning of Adler’s conquest is [to Conquer
through Admiration and Devotion]. Only a second-rate conqueror would rely on brute force to make
others submit. To fascinate people is to be an Adler. Don’t you dare talk about Adler with that narrow
insight of yours, Gordon.”
2358
We have invaded those that we couldn’t have come to an understanding with.
However, we kept moving forward with our cause in mind.
Many bend their knees in front of the Adlers because of that.
We will not take everything by force.
Through our ideals, we gain allies.
Sometimes we conquer by force and other times we conquer by words. That is Adler.
The idea of conquering everything through force alone is not Adler.
Power is needed but you also need the ability to fascinate people.
Naturally, either is not enough by itself.
“I don’t know if that was the right thing to do but the Adler has conquered and put many under our
wings. The Adlers still remain the guardian of the conquered. If there is a vassal in need, we rush to
their aid. If there is a vassal who was wronged we will right it. Never! Would we use children as
weapons, we would never abandon our subordinates to use that kind of weapon! Someone that
rebelled against your own country and brought disasters to the people who you are supposed to
protect is not an Adler at all! If you say that you are still suitable to be an emperor then show me your
resolve!!”
When I said that, I raised the Imperial Flag high.
So that Gordon can take a good look at it.
“To all soldiers that sided with Gordon! If you think that your action is wrong even a little then
immediately surrender! But if you think that there is still a future waiting for you at the expense of
these children then stay in place and tremble! Now, our whole army will go over to take your heads!
To everyone who belongs to the Imperial Army and the Northern Lords’ army! BE ANGRY! BE
FURIOUS! LET YOUR EMOTIONS EXPLODE! WHAT YOU FEEL RIGHT NOW IS CORRECT! NO ONE ON
THIS CONTINENT SHOULD FORGIVE SUCH AN ENEMY!”
With that said, I tilt the flag to the side.
Leo who was on my left held the sword in his right hand and raised it to cross the flag.
At the same time, the twin sword standards were raised by both armies.
The morale of the soldiers is at an all-time high.
“ “ BY THE ORDER OF THE BLACK TWIN PRINCES! DEFEAT THE REBELS! ” “
Me with the Imperial Flag and Leo with the sword.
2359
We swing both down.
With that as a signal, the entire army began an offensive.
The first to move was the Northern Lords’ army.
Leading is Duke Lowenstein.
At the forefront, the duke wields his lightning.
Then.
[—FOR HIS HIGHNESSES——-!!!!!!!!]
He raised such a warcry as he head for the enemy army with the twin sword standard banner raised
high.
2360
SPT Chapter 369
Thinking about the appreciation week, we might immediately burn through an arc in two weeks lol.
PS.After I dealt with the centipedes, now I am dealing with a new religious sect in my
country……..apparently they want to unite all the religions in the world under this new prophet, you
know, the usual stuff……
-Mr.Graverobber
The Bear, Didn’t Turn Back
“Alright then.”
“Kid! Hey Kid!!”
When I was about to head out to command the battle, I was approached by Sieg from behind.
When I turned around, Sieg was standing there with his eyes closed.
“You just used the rumored treasure of the Imperial Family that can erase all kinds of magic right? Am
I back to being human yet!?”
“Why don’t you open your eyes and see for yourself?”
“No, no! Just answer me alright!?”
“You can put your hope up you know.”
“Really!? So I finally changed b—-NO!”
I bitterly smiled at Sieg who collapsed to the ground in his bear body.
So he did get his hope up a bit huh.
“Good for you right. You can still be popular with children after all.”
“I want to be popular with hot women!”
“Give up. The Imperial Flag’s ability to negate magic is guaranteed. That’s why if you still haven’t
changed back, it means that the cause is something else.”
“Come on, seriously–.”
Sieg looked even sulkier as he collapsed on the ground.
.
2361
It was something that I already expected. If Ancient magic can only change someone’s appearance
temporarily, no magic can turn someone into an entirely different being for such a long period of time.
As long as it is not magic, it can not be canceled by the Imperial Flag.
The same with illnesses.
“How are you feeling? Char.”
“Normal. I’m not expecting to be cured or anything so I’m fine.”
“I see……”
Char’s illness is the same as my mother’s.
It will stick with you no matter what. If the Imperial Flag can erase my mother’s illness away then I
wouldn’t be so troubled in the first place.
Char wasn’t shocked at it either. It seems that she is more relieved that the children were saved.
However, when Char tried to take care of the children, I stopped her.
“If you can still move then you should go.”
“Eh…..?”
“This is the final battle of the Thunder God of Lowenstein. If you don’t go and see it for yourself then
you will regret it for your life you know?”
“But…..the children.”
“Sieg is here. He came here because he decided to guard the children after all.”
“Don’t just decide that on your own. That being said, if it’s a request from a beauty then I don’t mind
doing it though.”
Because he couldn’t return to being a human, Sieg’s tension was strangely high.
He’s in a slightly bad mood but it seems that he accepted the job.
This guy is somewhat kind to children after all.
“Un……Ok. Thank you.”
With that said, Char stood up and started running.
We are launching attacks on the mountain. Cavalry charge would be difficult so it is better to go on
foot.
“Can you take care of Char for me? Lynfia.”
2362
“Yes, please leave her to me.”
After saying so, Lynfia bowed and tried to follow Char.
Before she left I called out to her with a grin.
“By the way, Al-sama huh?”
“Th, That is……I already called Your Highness like that once so it would be strange to not use it
now……….Everyone is calling Your Highness that way as well. If Your Highness does not like that then
I will change back.”
“It’s alright. It felt better that way and kinda cozier too. How about you start calling Leo by his
nickname too?”
“That is a little……..”
“You can do it for Nii-san but you can’t do it for me?”
“U, Uhhh……I will think about it!”
With that said, Lynfia went after Char as if she was trying to escape.
Seeing her like that, Leo and I smile.
However, the battle is not over yet.
We can’t keep smiling here forever.
“Then I’m heading out too.”
“To settle it huh?”
“Un, if we don’t defeat the enemy commander let alone the rebellion, this battle won’t end. We have to
remove their leader.”
“I see…….”
He has no compassion left for Gordon now.
What worries me is whether Leo can really lay his hand on his own brother.
It was different in Zandra-aneue’s case.
He has to do it with his own hands.
Seeing me having such a worry, Leo smiles at me.
“It’s okay. I am not weak-minded after all.”
2363
“Is that so?”
“I tell you, it’s okay. If it’s so painful that I can’t bear it then I will go cry to Leticia.”
“…….Hey, Sieg. this guy, while I was away did he turn into a no-good man?”
“Right!? I thought so too! He acted like he is different from everyone else now! Just because you got
together with the Saint, you think you are hot stuff now!? This punk sure is enviable!!”
It seems that his true thought came out in the second half. It looked like he wanted me to say more
too.
Well, since he is able to rely on others now, I guess this is progress huh.
It is still troublesome that his partner is Saint Leticia though.
“I didn’t mean to brag though.”
“I can’t say that I like this side of yours though.”
“That’s right! That’s right!”
Leo smiled seeing us like that.
He then called Noir.
“Well, let’s talk more about it after the war is over.”
“Right. Right now the war is more important.”
“This is way more important than the war right!? A guy who is fortunate enough to randomly met a
beautiful girl in the north like you really is unreliable! I was trapped in the castle the whole time you
know!?”
Sieg continued to complain but we ignored him.
If we kept him company then we won’t be able to move forward after all.
“Adler’s true meaning is [Conquering through Admiration and Devotion] huh. I think that is correct.”
“You think so too?”
“Yeah. But there are some people that we can’t reason with and some that will never bend their
beliefs. In times like those, we have to wield our strength. After all, something can’t be protected by
just covering them with our wings. So I am going. My sword exists for that purpose after all.”
Saying so, Leo straddled on Noir.
There is a big contradiction between wielding your sword and protecting someone.
2364
After all, you would be hurting others in order to protect yourself and the people that you want to
protect.
Human beings have that kind of limit but nothing can be achieved by thinking about it alone.
The Adler clan decided to act.
However, Leo seems to have found the answer in his own way.
“We are putting an end to this battle! Those who are in the sky! Follow this Leonard Lakes Adler! We
are taking Gordon’s head!!”
Saying so, Leo led an air force and launched an assault on the mountain.
Sky and ground.
Mt. Haina is being attacked from above and below.
Just by looking at the mountain, I can see many enemy soldiers descending the mountain. They
probably are deserters.
Gordon already lost control of his army.
The number advantage has reversed. They can no longer stop our morale.
“It’s just a matter of time now huh…….”
“Don’t you have to go yourself?”
“My role is to be here. I’ve already finished what I have to do after all.”
“Is that right. Then I guess I will take care of these children huh.”
Saying so, Sieg approaches the collapsed children and breaks their restraints.
Then, he rushed around the enemy headquarters to find some clothes and cover the children with
them. These children are wearing literal rags after all.
He then called out to the nearby soldiers to take the children to another tent.
After they were carried away, Sieg brandished his spear and destroyed the tent where the children
were held with a single blow.
“Now it’s all good!”
“Does that has any meaning?”
“You don’t want them to recall the bad memory right? Children should be free. I don’t want them to be
trapped by their memories.”
2365
With that said, Sieg breathed out after a job well done and went to the tent where the children were
carried to.
The children who woke up would be surprised.
They would be greeted by a bear cub after ll.
Well, it’s better than having them see the soldiers.
“I leave them to you, Sieg.”
“OH! If anyone tries to take these children then I will beat them all up! But will you be fine by
yourself?”
“It’s okay. I have my own escort.”
“Am I late perhaps, sir?”
Sebas soundlessly appeared.
Seeing him, Sieg was convinced of my safety and went inside the tent.
With this lineup, we are set.
The rest depends on the people on the frontline.
“It would be great if they can end this soon……..”
2366
SPT Chapter 370
Oh, Gordon…..
-Mr.Graverobber
You’ve Became Weak
There were several small defensive bases on Mt. Haina.
Duke Lowenstein who is leading the charge is destroying them one by one.
“Advance! We are going to topple that base too!”
Shouting so, the duke rains down lightning on the enemy base.
The enemy soldiers who were in the base screamed and many escaped. They have no will to fight
anymore.
Hesitation has no place on the battlefield.
If soldiers think that what they are fighting for might be wrong, they won’t be able to fight.
That’s why you need the commander to remove such doubts.
However, Gordon couldn’t do that.
On the other hand, Leo and Al’s army are advancing forward while believing that they are righteous.
The simple goal of protecting the children boosted the soldiers’ morale. Rather than being told to fight
for their country, this is much easier to understand.
“Trample them all!!”
With that said, Duke Lowenstein hit the enemy base with his lightning again and entered it.
He was about to destroy the whole base with the lightning.
However, before he could do that, his heart screamed out in pain.
He was originally in a state where he was far from perfect condition.
He moved his body that was in no condition to move with his feelings alone.
Each of his movements was backed by the feeling that it might be his last.
With the realization that he doesn’t have much time left, he decided to burn it out now.
2367
To shine like thunder even for a brief moment.
[[O’ thunders of the s—COUGH–…..”
The chant didn’t continue.
He couldn’t concentrate or even move his body.
Blood spills from his mouth.
However, Duke Lowenstein did not fall.
If he falls now, the morale will plummet.
He has already pledged himself to the prince that swore to protect everything that he cares about.
He wanted to use the last bit of his power for that prince.
He will not allow himself to be a burden to that prince.
“N, Now is the chance! The enemy general is at death’s door! Take down the Thunder God!!”
An enemy general noticed the condition of Duke Lowenstein.
In response to his command, the soldiers inside the base take up bows and arrows.
The duke wanted to defend himself but right now he can not use magic.
‘This is it huh.”
When he was about to give up.
He heard a voice from behind.
[[O’ thunders of the sky・Show me your malevolent figure・Shining Flashes・Gather and form a single
line・Scorch and illuminate the earth——-Thunder・Fall]]
A large thunder struck down on the enemy base in front of the duke.
The soldiers who took up bows earlier were blown away.
“Raise your voice! Squeeze out your strength! The thunder of Lowenstein is always with the north!!”
Said Char as she appeared next to the duke.
She immediately went to support the duke who was about to collapse.
“Ojii-sama…….”
“You came…..Charlotte.”
2368
Saying so, Duke Lowenstein relaxed the strength in his body and entrusted his body to Char.
His body couldn’t move properly any longer.
“What about…..His Highness….?”
“He is commanding the army.”
“Then…….I can’t fall yet…….”
“I will take care of the frontline. Please take command from the rear, Ojii-sama.”
“Okay……you should not be impatient in an uphill battle like this. Crushing their base one by one is the
safest and the most certain plan to victory. That way it will limit the number of sacrifices as well.”
“I understand.”
Saying so, the duke went back and devoted himself to command the army.
However, Char’s performance on the frontline could be mistaken as though the Thunder God never
left the battlefield. Steadily, the enemy bases are being destroyed one by one and they are cornered to
the top of the mountain.
It happened all of a sudden.
As the Imperial Army and the Northern Lords’ army intensified their offensive, Gordon was trying to
maintain the frontline by fighting on it himself.
He rushed to the defensive base that was being cornered and pushed the enemy back. By showing off
his martial skills, the morale was also boosted.
He has been repeating that process and moving from base to base.
However, he was stopped.
Someone suddenly appeared in front of Gordon and blocked his way.
“Leonard!”
“I am the one who will defeat you!”
Leo descends from the sky and brandishes his sword at Gordon.
Gordon blocks it but because it was a surprise attack, he had to jump off his horse and take a distance.
Leo also jumped off Noir and pursued him.
A one-on-one battle began.
2369
Gordon’s escorts are being held back by the 6th Imperial Knight Corp who accompanied Leo.
No one will get in their way now.
Aiming for Gordon’s neck, Leo thrusts his sword out.
Gordon forcefully flicked it away and powerfully swung his sword down toward Leo.
Leo did not receive the blow but instead relaxed the strength in his body and evaded it.
Leo has never beat Gordon in a fight before.
There was a difference in their ages and experience. Still, the difference was so much that Leo used to
wonder if there would really be a day where he can defeat his brother.
However, he doesn’t think so now.
Gordon’s swordsmanship is certainly sharp and heavy.
Still, it couldn’t satisfy Leo.
In the past, he felt an indescribable fascination from each of his brother’s blows.
He was in awe of them.
However, that greatness is now gone.
That’s why Leo is not scared of Gordon’s sword.
“You have……become weaker.”
“Fool! There’s no way that this me would become weak!!”
Saying so, Gordon brandishes his sword from the side.
This time Leo took it head-on.
Gordon who never expected him to receive it directly opens his eyes wide.
“Gordon Lakes Adler is not someone whose sword can be stopped by the likes of me.”
“Ugh!”
Gordon’s movement was upset by Leo’s unexpected behavior.
Without overlooking such an opening, Leo immediately gets close to Gordon’s chest.
Deciding that he won’t be able to defend with his sword in time, he hits Leo with his left hand.
However, Leo stopped his fist with a headbutt.
2370
“Such a weak punch won’t be able to stop me!”
“Tsk!!”
Gordon manages to keep a distance but Leo does not allow him to keep it for long.
With just a twist of his body, Leo closed in again.
The sword pierced Gordon’s armor and deeply lodged itself into Gordon’s stomach.
“GaHaa……”
“I’m not done yet!!”
Leo pulls out his sword and continues going after him.
Trying to evade it by twisting his body, Gordon’s body was pierced at the flank.
It is not a fatal injury.
This time Leo swings his sword down from above but Gordon blocks it this time.
The blood on the sword splattered on Gordon’s face.
Gordon was puzzled at how he is being cornered.
It should be impossible for him to lose in single combat.
“I……WILL NOT BE DEFEATED!!”
With that said, Gordon pushes Leo’s sword back and gets ready to counterattack.
However, Leo swept his leg up and kicked Gordon’s flank that has just been stabbed.
Gordon’s movement slowed down due to the pain and Leo closed in on Gordon again.
To defend his head, Gordon covers it with his arms but this time Leo aimed at his feet.
He then slashed Gordon in the leg and stabbed his knee.
Spinning around one more time, Leo pierced Gordon’s in the chest.
This time there was no response.
The light disappears from Gordon’s eyes and his body loses power.
However, many soldiers came to Gordon’s aid.
“Your Highness!!!!!”
2371
It was a unit led by General Fidessa.”
At this rate, they will be surrounded.
Suppressing his desire to end everything now, Leo ordered the knights of the 6th corp to withdraw.
With Leo’s sword pulled out of his body, Gordon fell to the ground.
The winner of this single combat was Leo.
It also carries the meaning that Gordon’s side no longer has any chance of winning.
2372
SPT Chapter 371
More Double!!
-Mr.Graverobber
The Thunder God
With the steady effort to capture the enemy defense bases, most bases on Mt. Haina were already
incapacitated.
However, thanks to their tenacious resistance, Leo’s side still couldn’t finish them off.
“I heard that Prince Gordon received a fatal wound but…….”
“Leo said that he felt the blow. I’m sure that he will succumb to his wound sooner or later. Still, the fact
that the enemy’s morale is still up means that another commander has taken his place.”
But I don’t know who it is for sure.
That being said, I have spotted the enemy Dragon Knights becoming active on the battlefield once
again.
In other words.
“Gordon was defeated but William probably took his place.”
“That is surprising. To think that Prince William still sides with Prince Gordon.”
“I’m not that surprised though. He is someone that will never go back on his words after all.
He probably will be on Gordon’s side no matter what.
One could say that he is being unreasonable here but if he is your ally, that is the quality that you
would want to count on.
It’s a shame.
“The enemy’s only base left is the one at the mountaintop. I really want to go there and finish it
myself.”
Still, due to a circumstance on our side, we couldn’t do that.
When I thought that way, a messenger arrived.
It’s finally time huh.
2373
“I’m heading out.”
“Have a safe trip, sir.”
Being saw off by Sebas, I headed out.
To the tent where Duke Lowenstein is.
“So you came……”
“Yeah. I hope I’m not interrupting.”
“I called for you…….there’s no way that you are unwanted here……”
The duke was lying on a bed.
Char and the other nobles of the north are by his side.
This is the reason why we can’t attack.
The Northern Lords’ army is centered around Duke Lowenstein.
We can not move at the moment because he is in such a condition.
“I’m sorry…..I made you halt the offensive……”
“The enemy is at death’s door. They won’t have a chance to recover anymore. I don’t mind even if we
have to finish them off tomorrow.”
“……was my life useful…….?”
“Of course. You have my gratitude.”
“It is me who should be grateful……..I was able to have a good fight in the end…….I wanted to live a
little longer……..but dying on the battlefield as a warrior is not so bad……..I have no regret…….”
Saying so, the duke urged me to come close.
I silently obey him.
Duke Lowenstein then weakly raised his hand.
“But……I still have worry…….will you get rid of it for me…….?”
“You have no need to worry about anything. I shall swear here. I will win the war and restore the
honor to the north. You can leave it all to me.”
“……sorry for everything…….”
2374
“I told you from the start that I will take care of everything. It’s a matter of course.”
“……then will you listen to my last selfish request……?”
“What is it?”
“Take care…..of Charlotte…….she is my important granddaughter……”
“I will protect her without fail. Is that enough?”
“Hmph…..that’s fine…….Ah….I get to see a good dream at the end…….”
Saying so, Duke Lowenstein’s hand lost its power.
At that moment, the northern nobles began to cry aloud.
“Ojii-sama…..! Ojii-sama…….!!”
Char also keeps crying next to the duke.
I slowly stood up and left the place without saying anything.
When I walked a little distance away, Leo was there waiting for me.
“How did it go?”
“He was like himself until the end. Worrying about the people around him until his final moment.”
“I see. I wanted to learn a lot from him but it seems that I will not have the chance huh.”
Leo regretfully muttered.
But he soon turned his gaze to the mountain.
“Our side is exhausted.”
Four offensive.
In other words, we have tried to climb the mountain four times already.
After the battle on the plain, we immediately moved on to the battle in the mountain.
No one is not tired after that.
There is also Duke Lowenstein’s death.
We can’t raise morale now.
If we forcibly attack again, we might suffer a lot of damage from the enemy counterattack instead.
2375
“The enemy remaining troops are around 10,000. More than half of them are injured. The
commanders they are relying on also suffered serious injuries. There is no way that they can reverse
the situation now.”
“Un, I think so as well.”
However, there is a reason that I want to finish the battle today.
When I thought that it was about time he arrived, a young man came up to us with General Harnisch.
“My apologies for the interruption, Your Highnesses. I’ve brought Reiner, the Horsvath house
representative.”
“Greetings, Your Highnesses. My name is Reiner von Horsvath.”
“Hey, Reiner. It’s been a while.”
“It has been a while, Your Highness Leonard.”
“So, what kind of business do you have with us?”
“Yes. Actually, the Horsvath army will commence an attack on the enemy base. I came to report the
situation.”
Reiner told us like it was a matter of informing us.
Even after showing us that they will not obey any of our requests, they want to attack the enemy when
they are most weakened huh.
They sure are full of motivation when it is about snatching credits.
“Then can we ask why you didn’t listen to our request before? If I remember correctly, you said that
you would join our side though?”
“My deepest apology. Some of our knights acted up in protest when we switched sides so we had to
suppress them. It is a normal occurrence when you switch sides, Your Highness.”
The knights were upset because their commander decided to switch sides on their own?
If they are soldiers then it would be one thing, but such behavior from the knights? I think not.
We are not on the losing side. Rather, we are winning.
Gordon always took his allies for granted. There’s no way that there would be a knight who would side
with him.
Since long ago, the Horsvath house is a noble house that rarely appears on the battlefields.
2376
However, they are famous for switching sides in political conflicts. A noble house that always
prioritizes their own survival. Would any knight of such a house be upset about their lord for a
betrayal like this?
“Then we will dispatch our elites as well.”
“There is no need for that, Your Highness. We won’t be able to cooperate well with them so if they
want to fight, it would be better to do it separately.”
Even though everyone should want a swift end to Gordon and William, Leo’s offer was refused.
We may be able to dispatch our elites but sending our army is not an option right now.
We certainly can mobilize the exhausted soldiers but that will only increase the number of casualties.
On the other hand, the Horsvath army has hardly participated in the battle.
In this situation, they are the perfect ones to play the role of our ace.
The enemy is much more exhausted.
They should be able to win and since it’s what they offered themselves, there is no reason to decline.
If we refuse here, they could bring it up later that Leo wants to hog all the credit to himself.
However, if we let them do as they want, they might be able to bring us Gordon’s or even William’s
head.
Even if Gordon was fatally wounded by Leo, they can still claim that they were the ones who delivered
the finishing blow. After all, we are dealing with the Horsvath house here.
Now, what should we do?
When I was thinking about what to do, I suddenly heard a loud cheer from the mountaintop.
Where did they get such energy from?
Well, if their morale is that high then there shouldn’t be a problem accepting the Horsvath’s offer.
“If you can do it then fine by me.”
“…..it seems that the enemy still has some energy left. Your Highness, it might be more effective to
perform a pincer attack instead, don’t you think so?”
“The soldiers just received the news of Duke Lowenstein’s death, they won’t be able to move. If you
are going to do it then you have to do it by yourself.”
“…..are you ordering us, your vassals to die?”
2377
“Our vassals? When did you become our vassals again?”
“Our loyalty always lies with the Imperial Family.”
“Well said! Then let me give you an order! Climb that mountain and get us Gordon and William’s
heads! If you can’t do it then you will be punished for being late to the battle. Even with Eric-aniue’s
order, you seemed a little too opportunistic you see.”
Turning the table without giving them any chance to counter.
Reiner seems to be thinking about how to respond.
However, that is in vain.
After all, the voice from the mountaintop echoed to the entire battlefield.
“EVERYONE, YOU HAVE FOUGHT WELL! THIS IS OUR LAST BATTLE! FOLLOW THIS GORDON AND GO
TO WAR! KEEP YOUR EYES ON MY BACK! AS LONG AS MY BACK IS STILL VISIBLE TO YOU, I WILL
NEVER FALL! REMEMBER, I AM ALWAYS IN FRONT OF ALL OF YOU! I WILL NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO
FALL BEHIND! FIGHT WITH ME! CHARGE! ! ! ! ! !”
Their entire army rose in cheers.
However, it was not in our direction that they charged at.
“Deploy the units that can still move and circle around the mountain. The enemy will be stalled by the
Horsvath army. We will use that time to surround them!”
After giving orders that are appropriate to the situation, Leo headed out to the other side of the
mountain.
That is where the enemy will withdraw after they break through the Horsvath army.
He is energetically trying to break through the Horsvath army instead of ours. This is a little strange
from the Gordon that we have been fighting against so far.
“Beating his enemy to the punch……that is certainly a strategy that Prince Gordon used to be known
for. It’s been a while, sir.”
“Right. We are going too. The Northern Lords’ army will hold this position. Absolutely do not let the
enemy escape.”
With that said, we started moving to the other side of the mountain.
2378
SPT Chapter 372
F–R–I–E–N–D
-Mr.Graverobber
Friend
Gordon woke up inside a tent.
Fidessa was by his side.
“I’m glad! You’ve regained your consciousness! Your Highness! Can you understand me?”
“Fidessa huh…….how did the battle go…….?”
“…….due to the enemy’s offensive, we lost all defensive bases. Only the main base at the mountaintop
is left. His Highness William managed to assume command but…….”
“…….you have endured well.”
Gordon praised Fidessa’s hard work and got up while frowning at the pain.
When he sees his body full of wounds, he smiles.
“So…..I lost huh.”
“Not yet, Your Highness! If we can get off this mountain, there is still a chance for us to recover!”
“Right……but, that will require help from the United Kingdom.”
Saying so, Gordon looks at the entrance of his tent.
Standing there was William whose body is as much damaged as his.
Perhaps it’s hard to even for him to walk, he is now using his spear as a cane.
“You woke up…..Gordon.”
“It was a brush with death……”
“I’m glad that you are alright. Now, do you have anything you want to say to me?”
William implicitly talks about how Gordon used children as weapons.
Hearing that, Fidessa’s face also clouded over.
2379
Even if it is to win the war, there are still things that are okay and not okay to do.
As a result, their whole army collapsed because of that one incident. There is no doubt that his men
are seeing him as a villain now.
However, Gordon smiles.
“Using the children as weapons huh……..I think that what I did was wrong too.”
“That’s all?”
“Do you want my apology……? What can you do with it? The children are safe. My brothers helped
them. That is good enough right.”
Gordon said so as he got out of bed and wore his armor with the help of Fidessa.
Seeing that Gordon now has a different atmosphere from before, William stares at him.
“Are you…..really Gordon……?”
“Who else can you see other than me…….? Did you lose too much blood……..?”
“…….I’m just thinking that you were acting strange.”
“You idiot. If you think that I have changed then you should have just abandoned me………you are the
only idiot who sided with me through this rebellion where I was clearly on the inferior side you
know.”
“I didn’t side with you because I like it.”
“Right. Your father really has no eyes for people. Helping me is nothing but a fool’s errand.”
Said Gordon as he hangs a sword on his waist.
He is ready to battle.
Still, even when he hid it with his armor, the wounds he received were deep.
He might survive if he rests and is given proper care. That’s how grave his wounds are.
However, Gordon did not want to rest.
“My idiot friend……do you still think of me as your friend?”
“To be honest, I do want to quit being your friend………but it seems that our friendship can not be
broken so easily.”
“Is that so……then I want you to hear out my wish.”
“What? You want a rematch with Leonard? Get in line.”
2380
“No……I want you to head to Wismar and withdraw with the rest of the troops. Take my wife and
daughter, no—– Take care of my [Family] for me.”
“…….are you telling me to run away by myself?”
William asks with an angry voice.
However, Gordon only nods to him quietly.
“I know that you understand……..right now the only place they can withdraw to is the United
Kingdom. They won’t be able to do that without you.”
“Don’t make me laugh…..my father will surely kill me as soon as I get there. As a peace offering to the
Empire that is.”
“Even though our soldiers are injured, if you lead an army of nearly 10,000 men back to the United
Kingdom, even your father won’t be so hasty. The rest will depend on you.”
Gordon said with a big smile.
He then sticks out his fist.
“If you really think of me as your friend…….I want you to do this for me.”
“I……wanted you to ask me to die with you.”
“Sorry. For everything……for making you go along with this rebellion, for making you go through all
the pain…….I am truly sorry. But I still have something left to do.”
“What are you planning?”
“I must purge the traitor. As long as our army is exhausted, they will be attacking us with an army that
is still in perfect condition. Those guys are Eric’s pawns. They will never give the credit to Leonard.”
“Then isn’t that all the more reason for you to run too?”
“We can’t both run away. I’m sure that they will chase us. I am going to lead the charge and stop the
enemy. Then……I will finish off Duke Horsvath. I will never give my head to a coward. It was my
younger brothers who have devised the strategies and gathered many allies under their wings who
defeated me. Let alone letting some hyenas steal their achievements, It would be strange if I don’t give
them some reward right? “
Seeing the will behind Gordon’s eyes, William sticks out his fist as well.
The two fists collided.
“I will honor your last wish. I will take care of everything. Leave your family to me.”
“I’m counting on you.”
2381
Gordon passed by William.
To such Gordon, William raises his voice.
“I’m glad……that I have you as a friend.”
“Being friends with someone like me is only a stigma to you right……still, I am honored. Going to the
United Kingdom and meeting you was the most fortunate thing of my life. Thank you…….for being my
friend. From my heart, you are a true friend.”
William unintentionally turns around.
However, Gordon doesn’t look back.
He went straight toward the soldiers and spoke to them in a loud voice.
“We are breaking through the Horsvath army on the other side of the mountain and let the injured
soldiers escape. I want only those who are prepared to die with me for this assault.”
With that said, Gordon begins preparing his horse.
Seeing that, the soldiers who had been looking at the ground all this time started to stand up.
Eventually, the base which was overcome with despair began to regain its vitality.
The morale rose even further when Gordon straddles on his horse and raises his sword.
“EVERYONE, YOU HAVE FOUGHT WELL! THIS IS OUR LAST BATTLE! FOLLOW THIS GORDON AND GO
TO WAR! KEEP YOUR EYES ON MY BACK! AS LONG AS MY BACK IS STILL VISIBLE TO YOU, i WILL
NEVER FALL! REMEMBER, I AM ALWAYS IN FRONT OF ALL OF YOU! I WILL NOT ALLOW ANYONE TO
FALL BEHIND! FIGHT WITH ME! CHARGE! ! ! ! ! !”
After Gordon gave his command he led the cavalry and charged down the mountain.
Only 500 riders followed Gordon.
There were only that many soldiers who could still move satisfactorily.
Some injured soldiers insisted on fighting with him until the end but they were all entrusted to
William.
On the other hand, the army of Duke Horsvath is 3,000 strong.
The difference in numbers is six times.
However, they were able to surprise the enemy by beating them to a punch.
2382
Duke Horsvath who had begun to climb the mountain to attack Gordon’s base could not set up the
defensive in time.
“Hmph!!”
Gordon blows away several knights with a single swing and opens the path for his men.
He was followed by a suicide squad.
When they decided to die with Gordon, they became much stronger.
Even if they were stabbed in the belly, dragged down from their horses, they never let go of their
swords and take the knights around them with them.
Duke Horsvath’s army was confused by the situation and could not stop Gordon’s assault.
However, with the difference in numbers, Gordon’s side will eventually wear out.
Nevertheless, Gordon came to the front and headed directly toward Rolf, the head of the Horsvath
house.
“I’m going to give you the proper reward for your betrayal……TRAITOR.”
“My my, Prince Gordon. It seems that you are quite angry aren’t you?”
“Yeah, I am. I’m already sickened by a credit-hungry bastard like you!”
Blowing away his escorts, Gordon points his sword at Rolf.
However, at that moment.
Gordon was wrapped in flame.
“Fool! There’s no way that I didn’t come prepared when I have to deal with a monster like you!”
It was magic.
Then mages who had been standing by around Rolf burned Gordon with flame magic.
The flame constantly attacks Gordon.
“We of the Horsvath house have always carefully prepared to protect our bloodline! We are not so
foolish like the Adler who always causes only more conflicts!!”
Saying so, Rolf smiled, convinced at his victory.
However, before his eyes, an arm protruded out from the flame.
“Wh, at…….?”
2383
Gordon’s arm strangles Rolf.
Rolf whose movement was stopped with one hand tried to say something but when he saw Gordon
coming out of the flames, his face can only distort in horror.
“You talk too much…….it turned out like this because you didn’t run away immediately……”
“GaA, Uagh…….!”
“Cowardice is the strength of the Horsvath house. And it is exactly because of that that you are not
suited to be the Duke of Horsvath…..”
“Wa, ait……..”
“Remember well……if the Horsvath house has been protecting its bloodline…….then the Adler house
has been polishing ours!! It is not something that the likes of you can ridicule!!!!!”
Saying so, Gordon swings his sword and bisects Rolf’s body.
He then throws the upper half at the mages.
“You thought that you could stop this Gordon with that kind of flame!!”
Said Gordon as he slashed at the mages.
The Horsvath army lost its chains of command with the death of its master.
Gordon and his men immediately broke through them.
This is to prevent the pursuit.
William’s army only has injured Soldiers and they had just gone down the mountain. Now, they have
to make their way to Wismar.
Gordon turns his gaze in their direction.
A red Flying Dragon was flying in the sky.
It was William’s.
On top of his dragon, William raised his spear.
“I pray for your good luck!!”
“……luck huh……..”
With that said, Gordon turned his gaze to the opposite direction.
An army led by Leo was just around the corner.
2384
He must stop that army from pursuing William.
However, there were less than 200 men of his suicide squad left.
Leo’s army exceeded 5,000 in number.
There will be many exhausted soldiers but in terms of morale, theirs is incomparable to the Horsvath
army.
Even so, Gordon smiles.
“Fidessa.”
“Yes! Right here, sir!”
“This sure brings back memories, isn’t it…….I was only capable of attacking and only know how to
order an assault……”
“I do remember because that made it so easy to raise military achievements, sir.”
“I see…….will you keep up with me until the end?”
“Gladly!”
“Good! Same as before! Follow my back!! As long as you can see my back! I will not allow anyone to
give up! Let’s go!! Charge!!”
2385
SPT Chapter 373
“WOAHHHHHHHH!!”
Gordon led his suicide squad toward Leo’s army.
However, he didn’t rush in head-on.
Leo had split his army in two to chase William.
The one Gordon is attacking is the one tasked with pursuing them.
“CHARGE! TO ME!!”
Blood spills from Gordon’s mouth as he wields his sword at the forefront.
The wounds that Leo inflicted on him have opened but that doesn’t stop him.
After all, he can’t afford to stop his subordinates behind him.
If he stops they will also stop.
“LEONARDDDDDDDDD!!!”
Gordon rallies himself up and shouts in a loud voice.
He is trying to stop them from pursuing William.
If Gordon focuses his attack on the pursuit unit alone, it is possible that Leo will chase after William
himself and let the pursuit unit deal with him.
That’s why Gordon kept shouting.
To let his brother knows that he is here.
“LEONARDDDDDDDDDDDDD!!!!”
After several of his screams, his brother’s face came into sight.
However, it was not Leo.
It was Al who was leading the pursuit unit.
Al’s appearance put a smile on Gordon’s face.
He thought that Leo would come out to face him but it was Al instead.
However, instead of approaching, the enemy began to rapidly take distance.
2386
Gordon and his men who had already reached their limit could not follow them.
Then, the enemy deployed archers.
“Even if he is my brother……he can be despicable some time huh.”
It was the development that is most undesirable to him at the moment.
Do not engage in a brawl, rebuild formation and attack from a distance.
His skill is much different than Rolf. Al committed to a despicable tactic exactly because he doesn’t
look down on his opponent.
As expected, even Gordon can do nothing about this.
When the arrows were fired, Gordon can only look at them.
However, someone’s back suddenly covered his sight.
A moment after.
He recognized that it was Fidessa who had taken countless arrows instead of him.
“Fidessa!!”
“….please charge on……your last ride……we shall open the path for you…….”
With that said, Fidessa with his body ridden with arrows moves his horse forward.
Gordon’s subordinates followed him.
The arrows continue flying toward them but they do not stop.
Gordon follows their path.
“UOAHHHHHH!!!!”
The enemy’s arrows were relentless.
However, with his men as a shield, Gordon broke through.
“Fidessa–!!”
He could no longer hear the voice of his subordinate.
Gordon rushed into the archer corp while distorting his face.
“CHARGE!!!!”
Gordon’s assault was devilish.
2387
That’s why when he broke through the archer corp, Leo was waiting for him.
Leo descended before Gordon.
His troops surround them.
They gave up pursuing William and decided to defeat Gordon here.
“So you want the credit of defeating me huh! If you chase William, you might be able to get him too,
you know!”
“I’m not seeking the credit. I am only here because I acknowledge you.”
Leo holds up his sword.
And assault Gordon on top of Noir.
However, Gordon counterattacked.
Their swords collided.
It was a contest of power and Gordon flicked Leo away.
Getting thrown off Noir, Leo landed on the ground.
His hands were incredibly numb.
Gordon’s swing was so strong that he couldn’t believe that it was a blow from someone who is at
death’s door.
“It’s heavy right…..that’s the weight of mine and my subordinates’ lives……..if you can take it then
show it to me!!!!”
Saying so, Gordon gallops his horse toward Leo and slashes down.
Gordon’s greatest strength is offensive.
His strongest point that has never been demonstrated until now is being shown in its full glory.
Leo also puts up a fight but as if that is exactly what he wants, Gordon brandishes his sword in return.
In the end, Leo’s attack couldn’t stop Gordon’s
The blow was heavy and Leo was blown away each time he received Gordon’s sword.
Time after time, Leo was blown away.
“Ugh…..!”
“Stand up……stand up and face me!!”
2388
It was the words that he once said to Leo.
Gordon gets down his horse.
He wanted to fight him on equal terms.
Like in the past.
“HAAAAA!!”
“NAIVE!!”
Leo gets up and launches a series of attacks.
It was a continuous attack that won’t leave his opponent any room to breathe.
However, Gordon overcame it and kicked Leo.
“You think that you can become an emperor when you can’t even beat me…..? Don’t make me laugh!
The Emperor of the Empire is not that weak! Do you think that a naive and weak person like you is
suitable for the throne!!?”
“I’m not…….the old me anymore.”
“Then prove it……I am not going to approve an emperor that is weaker than me!!”
Saying so, Gordon slowly walks toward Leo.
Leo could feel an indescribable pressure from him.
It was the same awe-inspiring feeling he once felt.
An atmosphere of a general who leads his subordinates on the frontline.
The pride he carries as a general who stood on the battlefield with many comrades behind him.
His sword has that weight behind it.
Leo was blown away many times without being able to take it.
However, Leo did not give up.
He continues to receive the blows until he is eventually able to take them.
After that began a fierce exchange of blows.
“UOAHHHH!!!!”
“HAAAAAA!!!!!”
2389
Each blow is capable of knocking away his consciousness if he does not pay attention. Leo received
them and launched his own counterattack.
Still, to Gordon who has already prepared for death, a half-hearted attack will not work.
Even so, Leo did not run from Gordon.
Gordon also seems to smile at such Leo.
Unlike his rotten self, his brother grew up properly.
He had taught his brother that a general can never give up. If the general does not give up then their
soldier will not give up either.
Leo was faithfully practicing that teaching. After all, he always has an option to keep his distance and
wait for Gordon to exhaust himself.
However, Leo did not use such a tactic. After all, they are being watched by the soldiers.
Leo wants to defeat his brother head-on because he was told that he would not be recognized as an
emperor otherwise.
And Gordon is now beginning to recognize it.
The fact that his younger brother has gotten stronger.
While desperately holding on to his consciousness, Gordon squeezed out his last bit of power and
pushed on.
It was a serious blow aimed at Leo’s neck.
However, Leo avoided it and dived into Gordon’s chest.
Once again, Leo’s sword pierced Gordon.
This time, it pierced his heart.
A perfect blow.
“……good work……as expected……of my younger brother……..”
“Gordon….aniue……why…..?”
“Forgive me…….I was a fool……for all the things I made you go through……I’m sorry…….”
Gordon raised his face up after saying so.
Al was in his sight.
Al bows to Gordon.
2390
When he saw that, Gordon smiled and spoke to Leo.
“I had the luxury of choosing how I die……I was fortunate……..to see my brother grow up on a
battlefield……”
“If you think that way…..then why the rebellion……?”
“I wonder why…….but, what’s done is done……at my final moment, I want you to show
me…….your……victory……..”
With that said, Gordon pushes Leo and removes Leo’s sword from his body.
And just like that, he fell back.
However, his eyes are always fixed on Leo.
As he was being watched by his brother, Leo raised his word high to the sky.
“The rebel! Gordon Lakes Adler has been defeated by the Eighth Prince Leonard!!”
After burning the figure of his brother in his eyes, Gordon gently shut his eyes.
His younger brother has surpassed him.
A strange feeling of satisfaction overwhelmed Gordon.
Then, a voice reaches Gordon’s ears.
“You are a muscle brain as always
“Don’t say that…..this is the only thing I can do after all.”
“Well, it’s fine as long as you are satisfied right? Let’s leave the rest to these children.”
“Right….let’s leave the rest to our younger brothers.”
Saying so, Gordon’s consciousness slowly faded away.
Thus the Gordon Rebellion that began in the Imperial Capital finally reached its end.
The Death of Gordon
-Mr.Graverobber
2391
SPT SS1
Sebas’s Side story
It’s super long………
-Mr.Graverobber
Sebas
“The two have decided to participate in the succession war, Ma’am.”
The night of the day when Al and Leo decided to join the succession war.
In a room inside the Inner Palace, Sebas knelt down and made his report.
The master who received his report, Mitsuba gives him a small nod and replies.
“I see. So those children have something that they couldn’t give up huh.”
“That seems to be the case, Ma’am. The road ahead will surely be harsh for them.”
“I agree. But…….they can only be recognized after they tread down a harsh road. That’s what it means
to stand on top of people. No one will recognize them with just their blood alone after all.”
“Are you not worried, Ma’am?”
“I’m worried. But there’s no helping it. It is something that those children decided. It’s a parent’s job to
give them a push right?”
This person is strong.
While thinking so, Sebas lowered his head again.
She possesses the strength to remain unwavering like this since a long time ago.
He was saved by that strength.
He was attracted by that strength.
That’s why.
“—-Even if it costs me my life, I will definitely protect your sons.”
“Stop it. I don’t want to see my sons cry. You already know that don’t you? The living is always
stronger than the dead, right?”
2392
“That’s certainly true. I can not protect them if I die after all.”
“That’s right. That’s why you must live. I don’t feel like entrusting my sons to anyone beside you after
all.”
Saying so, Mitsuba sips her tea.
She never changed.
She has been like this since 18 years ago, so Sebas thought as he started reminiscing.
18 years ago.
Sebas, who was known throughout the continent as the [Grim Reaper], was thinking of washing his
hand from the criminal underworld.
In other words, he had decided to retire as an assassin.
The problem is the end.
What kind of work should he take as his final job.
What kind of work would leave his name behind in history.
That was what Sebas was thinking about.
During that time, there was a contract to assassinate the Sixth Consort of the Emperor of Adraxia
Empire.
The strongest nation on the continent. Assassinating one of the Emperor’s consorts would cause a
huge incident.
In the first place, the Inner Palace where the Consorts live is a place that is isolated from the outside
world. It can be said that it is difficult enough just to get close to that place.
However, the difficulty instead motivated Sebas.
After all, an assassination target that can build a legend for him is hard to come by.
Sebas took on the contract.
And thus, Sebas started preparing for this assassination.
First, infiltration. Sebas has posed as a butler and infiltrated the castle. As a veteran assassin, Sebas
was versatile, moreover, a butler’s task was easy to perform.
“You truly are excellent. I think someday we can make you a prince’s exclusive butler.”
2393
“I’m honored, sir.”
Sebas was so good that the head butler who manages all butlers in the castle praised him so.
A few months after the infiltration.
Sebas, who established a solid position among the butlers, finally put his assassination plan into
practice.
He has infiltrated the Inner Palace many times already and he has memorized the route to the Sixth
Consort’s room as well as all the security details.
Even with the strict security of the Inner Palace, there are still some blind spots.
Sebas infiltrated the Inner Palace with no problem by cleverly using those blind spots.
Once inside, the job is practically done as most of the troublesome Imperial Knights can not enter the
Inner Palace that restricts male entry.
There are also female Imperial Knights but they are very few and rarely any of them will come to the
Inner Palace.
The rest is how to finish the job.
When Sebas thought so, he sensed a presence behind him.
Sebas, who was ready to react at any time, instantly knocked out the female guard who accidentally
walked behind him.
The female guards were specially trained to protect the Inner Palace. He has no problem dealing with
them one on one but it will be troublesome if he gives them a chance to gather. That’s why he took his
time to explore the blind spots but the troublesome thing about the Inner Palace is that these guards
do not have a fixed patrol route.
“I might have fractured her bones huh.”
A smile floats up on Sebas’s face as he whispers to himself.
This job is worthwhile exactly because of its difficulty.
Sebas hides the knocked out female guard and heads inside.
He has already confirmed the location of the Sixth Consort’s room but he has no other information
about her at all. This is because the Sixth Consort hasn’t left the Inner Palace at all in the last few
months.
Even while he was investigating her location, he couldn’t find any personal information about her at
all. After all, he couldn’t investigate the inside of her room.
2394
However, Sebas still chose to finish the job today.
He had already taken risks several times to investigate the Inner Palace and it isn’t like he can
completely deceive everyone around him.
The several months he has used to infiltrate this place is already posing a lot of risk for an assassin
like him.
He can not afford to fail. This is his one chance to pull this off.
Sebas proceeds with maximum caution.
Then, he stopped near the room of the Sixth Consort.
“A protective barrier………a powerful one at that. As expected of the Inner Palace of the Empire huh.”
While appraising the barrier, Sebas changes his plan.
Until now, there was no barrier here. With it covering the place like this, he can not use the usual
route.
The barrier is spread all over the floor and it’s difficult to proceed.
That’s why Sebas sticks to the ceiling and starts moving.
If he doesn’t touch the floor then the barrier’s effect will not activate. Plus, even though the barrier is
covering a wide area, it did not cover the entire room.
After all, it would require a huge amount of magic power to maintain such a barrier.
“No matter how good the barrier is, all it needs to get through is some improvisation.”
While analyzing so, Sebas quickly approached the room while avoiding the barrier.
There is no barrier in front of the door. Upon confirming that, Sebas listens to the sound inside.
It seems that someone is talking inside, but that is convenient for Sebas.
After all, it would be easy to sneak in through the door if the owner of the room doesn’t pay attention
to it.
The door was opened silently and Sebas successfully sneaked into the room of the Sixt Consort.
He then took out his old companion, the black dagger.
However, the sight Sebas witnessed in the room was far from what he had expected.
“Mitsuba-sama! Just a little bit more! Please hang on!”
“Bring me more clothes!”
2395
Female doctors were standing beside the bed in white clothes.
The bed was full of blood.
For a moment, Sebas’s mind went blank. It was something he never experienced ever since he started
as an assassin.
The word [Childbirth] floats up in his blank mind. As he recognized that, he finally connected the dots.
The fact that she didn’t leave the Inner Palace even once in the past several months, the fact that the
barrier was set up outside just for today.
It was for this reason.
His client cannot possibly be unaware of this. Naturally, those who want the Sixt Consort dead would
be those who are related to the upper echelon of the Empire.
This detail was intentionally left out.
Sebas was angry at that. However, as long as he had taken on this job, he needs to see it through to the
end.
When he thought so and adjusted his grip on the dagger.
Sebas was suddenly called out.
“Welcome…….Mr.Assassin……”
“!?”
Mitsuba, the Sixth Consort that is currently lying on the center of the bed, was looking straight at
Sebas while breathing heavily.
Was it only a coincidence that she noticed Sebas before anyone else despite the fact that she is giving
birth? Or is this only due to her mother’s instinct?
Either way, he closed the distance in an instant and put his dagger against Mitsuba’s throat.
However, Mitsuba did not move.
“His Majesty……Haa…Haaa….was wary about this…….he thought that someone would come for my life
soon…….”
“If you have any last word, I am willing to hear it.”
“You are a strange assassin……but I do have something to say……”
“Let’s hear it then.”
2396
It was an unusual act for Sebas who was feared as the god of death in the underworld.
The usual Sebas would never point his dagger at his target and ask for their last word. Normally, once
he closed the distance, his dagger would already be inside his target’s neck.
Why did he do this?
Even Sebas himself doesn’t know.
He thought that it was him being whimsical as this is his final job.
Sebas waited for Mitsuba’s words while using that to convince himself.
“Haa Haaa…….are you the best of the assassins……?”
“…….yes. I take pride in that.”
“I see……then I wonder if you can wait until I deliver this baby……? The one who gave you the
job……only want me dead right……..?”
“Why do you think so? I might have been told to assassinate both the consort and her child you
know?”
“If that was your order then you wouldn’t be so shocked when you entered the room……..Haa
Haa…..maybe, you didn’t know that I am pregnant right……”
Sebas stays silent.
She saw through him.
So this is a mother huh. Sebas wonders.
Sebas has no memory of childhood. When he became aware, he was already inside the world where he
must kill to survive.
Kill to live. That was how he became so talented at killing people.
Eventually, he killed the master who used him as a pawn and even reigned the underworld as a free
assassin.
For Sebas, this is the first mother he met.
“If you……think that you are the best assassin…….then you should only kill your target……Haa Haa……a
professional assassin that kills random people…….is the same as any common murderer right…….?”
“…..if someone comes in, my job will fail. Since I am a professional, I have to be practical.”
“It’s okay……if it is someone from the Empire…..I will protect you……”
2397
“Even from the Emperor?”
“Of course……Haa Haa…….a mother won’t lie………”
With that said, Mitsuba stared intensely at Sebas.
If he puts a little strength into his hand, she will die. That is Mitsuba’s current situation.
Her life is in Sebas’s hand.
The weak always desperately beg for their life. He is used to taking those lives. However, Sebas, who
has lived in the underworld for a long time, can see when people lie.
Mitsuba’s eyes were undeniably serious. For her to say such a thing with such intensity, she is
probably intending to protect him from the Emperor for real.
When he thought so, Sebas slowly pulled the dagger away.
Believing in Mitsuba’s words, Sebas followed her request. He couldn’t say that this is a sane decision.
Still, Sebas put down the dagger. He thought that killing Mitsuba now would go against his aesthetics.
Sebas wanted to leave his name in history. That is why he has inserted a certain aesthetics in his
works.
Killing no one besides the intended target as quietly as possible.
He has been dubbed the Grim Reaper exactly because of the accuracy of his work and how tranquil his
job appeared. He can not allow his aesthetics to be smeared at his last job.
However, Sebas immediately reconsiders.
It was not that this idea came to him naturally. He was made to think this way.
He stared at the strong will in Mitsuba’s eyes. He feels that if he kills Mitsuba who is trying to protect
her child with such a conviction, he will lose something. He will become just another assassin that has
abandoned their beliefs.
Even so.
He is glad that he didn’t cut her throat. If he had abandoned his aesthetics, he would have to suffer a
lifetime of regret.
While thinking so, Seba slowly looked back at the door.
There were assassins who silently entered the room the same way as Sebas.
The number is five.
2398
It is common to hire multiple assassins for a job. However, it should be difficult to get here without
any problems.
Sebas stood there as he smiled bitterly at them.
“Did you follow me.”
“That’s right. Thanks for guiding us here, Reaper. I’m surprised that you haven’t killed the target yet. I
was going to kill you and take the credit but……I don’t think that will be necessary now.”
“What do you mean?”
“You didn’t kill her immediately because your emotions got in the way right? Then we will take it from
here.”
Saying so, one of them heads for Mitsuba.
However, he is stopped by the knife Sebas throws at him.
The assassin that was heading for Mitsuba collapses down on the spot with a knight piercing his head.
“HIIIII!?”
“Please go ahead. I will take care of them.”
Sebas tells the doctor who let out a short small scream as he grips his black dagger.
The remaining four assassins became alert after one of their companions got killed by Sebas.
“Are you crazy!?”
“This is very normal. Sixth Consort Mitsuba’s life is mine to take. I can not afford to give that right to
you.”
“Then just kill her now!”
“I can not do that. My target is only Mitsuba-dono alone. Her child is not within the scope of the
request. I will take her life after the child is born.”
“DON’T FUCK WITH ME!!”
Saying so, the four rushed toward Sebas all at once.
Although they did follow the path Sebas scouted out, these four are assassins who has enough ability
to infiltrate the Inner Palace.
No matter how skillful Sebas is, he would have trouble taking them head-on. However, Sebas chose to
intercept all of them head-on.
2399
A high-speed battle between assassins takes place inside the room.
Blood splatters and heads fly after a short delay.
In that situation, the doctors desperately concentrated on delivering the child.
They were doctors selected by the Emperor himself as they were entrusted with the task of taking
care of Mitsuba and her child.
If something were to happen to Mitsuba or the child here, even if the assassins don’t kill them, they
will receive the wrath of the Emperor.
These doctors are also betting their lives as well.
Many people are risking their lives to deliver this child.
Then the time finally came.
“Ogyaaaaaa!!”
A healthy cry echoed inside the room.
While listening to that cry, Sebas was frowning with pain.
The last assassin’s knife managed to find its way to his left shoulder but in return, Sebas’s dagger has
deeply pierced the assassin’s neck.
“Mitsuba-sama! Congratulations! They are healthy boys! You just gave birth to a twin!”
“Haa Haa…Fufu, their eyes look just like His Majesty’s……..”
Saying so, Mitsuba received the children with her trembling hands.
The children still keep crying healthily.
Mitsuba slowly stroked the children’s cheeks while looking at them with a smile.
“I’m glad……you have a brother……even without me, you two won’t be lonely.”
Saying so, Mitsuba kisses the foreheads of her two sons.
Then, she left the babies to the doctor and smiled at Sebas.
“Sorry that I kept you waiting……now, feel free to take my life…….”
“……are you not scared?”
“I’m scared. But…..I am protecting my children……..I have made up my mind for this ever since I
decided to bear His Majesty’s child.”
2400
Saying so, Mitsuba closed her eyes and lay down on her bed.
Sebas was troubled by her attitude. It was like she is telling him that he can kill her any time he wants.
The targets he has killed so far were all afraid of him and despair for their life.
Those who beg him to let them go, those who offered him money, those who tried to resist. They all
varied but no one was willing to accept their death.
That’s where Sebas realized why he wanted to retire as an assassin. His body still functions properly.
But in the depth of his heart, he no longer wants to face those horrified looks anymore.
He had nothing he wanted to do after he retired. He just didn’t want to see any more of that.
He has grown tiresome of seeing the faces of the people that are afraid for their lives. That’s why
decided that this is his last job.
He chose as big a contract as possible in order to mark his existence in history.
For such an ambition, he had prepared himself to witness that horrified expression for one last time.
However, his last target does not show that expression to him.
That made Sebas hesitate to move his right hand.
“What’s wrong? Don’t you want to kill me?”
“……why are you……so strong? Is it because you are the Emperor’s consort?”
“It’s not like that…..I would do the same thing even if I am not the Emperor’s consort…..I am a mother.
I am this twin’s mother, Mitsuba. My standing doesn’t change that.”
“Because you are a mother……”
“Come to think of it, I haven’t heard your name yet. Can you tell me?”
He never thought that she would ask for his name.
Sebas was surprised but after thinking for a moment, he gave her his name.
“My name is…..Sebastian. I am more famous by the name Grim Reaper these days. I do not know if
Sebastian is even my real name or not either.”
“I see……so your name is Sebastian. the name of the person who kills me. I will remember it.”
Mitsuba smiled after she said that.
The moment he saw that smile, Sebas’s right hand was moving.
He raised his dagger and strongly swung it down.
2401
“…..what’s wrong?”
“It seems…..I do not possess the blade to kill you……”
Sebas’s right hand stopped.
He just can’t kill Mitsuba.
If he does not complete this job, he will not be able to become a legend. He can not leave his name in
history.
However, such a goal seemed so shallow in front of Mitsuba.
He wanted to leave his name in history because he wanted proof that he was alive. He wanted to be
recognized as someone.
For Sebas, that was his driving force as he lived in the underworld.
For Sebas who has nothing, that was his everything.
However, the moment Mitsuba said that she would remember his name.
Sebas was satisfied. He has no regret as long as this person remembers him.
“I’ve killed a lot of people……but this is the first time I met someone like you……”
“Me too…..this is the first time I met an assassin like you. Are you not too kind for an assassin?”
“….I’ve killed others in order to survive. After that, I wanted to be recognized. I wanted someone to see
me. That’s why I kept on killing. But that is over now. This is the end of the Grim Reaper……an assassin
that is unable to kill his target……”
The moment Sebas muttered that, a man burst into the room.
“Mitsuba! Are you safe!!”
A large number of Imperial Knights followed behind the man.
There is only one person who can call Mitsuba, the Emperor’s consort, without any honorific in this
world.
The Emperor himself.
And before the Emperor said anything, Sebas was captured by a large number of Imperial Knights.
“Your Majesty…..we have twin boys…….”
2402
“OHH!! What great news!! They will be the 7th and the 8th princes! This is just right! I thought up two
good names and couldn’t decide between the two! Now I can use both! The older one will be Arnold
and the younger one is Leonard!”
“I think those are good names.”
“Right! I stayed up thinking about this for days you know!!”
With so much joy, the Emperor picks up the children and then hugs Mitsuba on her bed.
Then, after savoring that joy for a while, the Emperor angrily glared at Sebas.
“So……who is that man over there?”
“H, He’s an assassin! Your Majesty! It seems that he is known as the Grim Reaper!”
One of the doctors reports so.
On the other hand, Sebas says nothing.
Even the Grim Reaper himself can not break through the defense of the Inner Palace. It is because this
is that kind of place that he thought that he can become a legend if he can pull this off.
“The Grim Reaper huh…….so the famous assassin of the underworld himself has infiltrated the
castle…….who is your client?”
“There were many clients who submitted this request, Your Majesty. I can not say for sure.”
That was a fact.
However, there are only a limited number of people who think of Mitsuba as an obstacle.
That’s why the Emperor doesn’t care much about that.
“I see. Then how did you infiltrate the Inner Palace?”
“I entered the castle as a butler and gained credibility over the course of several months, Your
Majesty.”
“Hmph, it seems I have to review the security of the castle. If you can’t find even a single mouse then
what purpose do you serve!? The lives of my consort and princes were threatened you know!?”
The Emperor’s anger turns to the Imperial Knights.
The Imperial Knight could only silently accept their failure.
The Emperor, who seemed to still be angry, turned his anger toward Sebas.
“You will not vomit out the name of your client right?”
2403
“I have said no lies, Your Majesty.”
“I see. Then I no longer have use for you.”
Saying so, the Emperor himself pulls out his sword.
However, he was stopped by Mitsuba.
“Your Majesty, please wait.”
“Hm? Mitsuba, what is it? Oh! Sorry. I shouldn’t do this in front of you and the princes. I’m sorry for
being inconsiderate.”
Saying so, the Emperor urges the Imperial Knights to take Sebas outside with his chin.
However, Mitsub shakes her head.
“That’s not it. I do not want Your Majesty to execute him.”
“What? You are saying that I should let him go!?”
“There is no point in his death, Your Majesty. That person there is called Sebas. I want him to become
these children’s butler.”
“Wha!?”
The Emperor who thought that she was going to ask him to only spare Sebas’s life had his mouth
hanging open to Mitsuba’s request that went far beyond his expectation.
The same goes for Sebas.
He never thought that he would suddenly get nominated as a butler in this situation.
Appointing an assassin who was aiming for her life until just a moment ago to be the butler of her
children, there’s no way that is a sane action.
“Wha, Wha Wha, What are you saying!? This guy is an assassin! He just aimed for your life you
know!?”
“Yes, what about it?”
“You can’t dismiss it like that! Are you intending to trust him to be the butler of the princes!?”
“Yes. I’ve already decided that. So let go of your swords.”
The Imperial Knights comply with Mitsuba’s order.
That was how powerful the current Mitsuba feels to them.
2404
“Do you think I can allow such a thing!? This guy is a criminal! He infiltrated my castle, broke into the
Inner Palace, and even got as far as your room! I can not simply forgive him!”
“He is just that good. Won’t he be the perfect butler for them?”
“That’s not the problem here! Do you think that I can allow such selfishness!?”
“Of course. Have you forgotten what Your Majesty told me when you proposed? Did you not give me
your word that you will not interfere with how I educate my children? Appointing a butler for them is
also a part of their education. That’s why I have the right to decide this.”
“Do you think I will let such sophism pass! He is an assassin that tried to kill you, you know!? How can
I trust him!?”
“Sebas didn’t kill me when he could do it at any time he wished. He didn’t do it because the children
were not his target. And in the end, he didn’t kill me either. He is no longer an assassin. So all he did
was protect these children. Don’t you think that he should be rewarded for that?”
“No! An assassin is still an assassin! I will never allow this! I will not allow him to be my children’s
butler! I am going to execute him right now!”
“Can’t the Emperor of the Empire even keep the promise he made to his consort!”
The Emperor unintentionally flinched when he was suddenly shouted at.
He couldn’t bear to receive Mitsuba’s powerful stare and had to turn his eyes away.
Not overlooking that opening, Mitsuba lowered her head.
“I owe a debt to Sebas. Please allow this one selfishness of mine, Your Majesty.”
“Ugh……”
The Emperor grinds his teeth at her request.
If he continues to refuse her, it would be like he is a small-minded person.
Thinking so, the Emperor sheaths his sword.
“…..Fine. I will forgive him for you, Mitsuba.”
“I will make him a butler okay.”
“Kuh! Do whatever you like! That was the promise! I will treat it as nothing happened here!”
Saying so, the emperor turned his back and tried to leave.
Half of the Imperial Knights follow the Emperor and the other half remain in place as a precaution.
2405
Then, the Emperor stopped his feet.
He then speaks to Sebas without turning back.
“Sebastian. Prove to me that my wife’s eyes weren’t wrong. If I judge that you can’t do that, you will be
disposed of.”
“…..Yes, Your Majesty. Your wish is my command.”
The Emperor left the room after he finished saying what he wanted.
Mitsuba then shows the two children to Sebas.
“How is it? Aren’t they cute? My children.”
“…..you have done something quite ridiculous.”
“Ara? I only kept my promise right. Didn’t I tell you? I would protect you even from the Emperor.”
Having said that, Mitsuba entrusted her two sons to Sebas.
In his arms that have continued to take lives to this day, two small lives were entrusted.
They were the heaviest and warmest thing Sebas ever held.
Sebas who felt the weight and the warmth of the children then whispers in a small voice.
“I will…..protect you without fail.”
“Yes, I will leave them to you.”
Thus Sebas became the butler of the two princes thanks to Mitsuba’s unreasonable request and the
Emperor’s generosity.
It has been 18 years since then.
The two princes grew up and decided to aim for the throne.
Their road will be difficult. However, the two princes had grown into someone strong enough to tread
that path.
“Take care of the two of them for me. That being said, haven’t you become exclusive to Al lately?”
“It is because Arnold-sama is always the one who freely acts on his own after all.”
“Leo always studies like a good boy but Al always sneaks out of the castle without permission. What a
troublesome boy he is. Well, that’s why I asked you to take care of him in the first place. So what do
you think? How is Al?”
2406
“Please rest assured. Arnold-sama has also inherited your blood. He has become a splendid prince that
holds a strong belief and a charm that can move others, Ma’am.”
When Sebas told her so with so much confidence, Mitsuba nodded at him with a smile.
Her eyes were not mistaken.
Sebas has become someone that is like a father to her two children in place of the busy Emperor. He is
also someone that can rein in Al who has grown up to be someone who enjoys the life of freedom.
“I’m glad that I made you their butler, Sebas.”
“It is my honor to serve.”
Sebas said that and reverently bowed his head.
2407
Table of Contents
1. Prologue: The Beginning of the Two.
2. Secret Maneuver Begin
3. Double Roles
4. SS Rank Adventurer
5. Sharer of Secret
6. Imperial Capital Tour
7. Rivals
8. My Natural Enemy The Hero
9. The Strongest Knight and The Strongest Adventurer
10. Those Who Move Behind the Scene
11. Commence
12. A Good Start
13. Tsunami Outbreak
14. S Class Bounty
15. The Eastern Knights
16. Noble
17. Price of the Plan
18. Black and White
19. Schemer gets caught in his own Scheme
20. Mother of Three
21. Choose your Bride carefully.
22. The Fisherman’s gain
23. The Emperor’s Feelings
2408
24. House of the Heroes
25. Escort Request
26. Hat Girl
27. Immigrant’s Problem
28. People have things they are not good at
29. Prince and Princess of Albatro
30. Bitter Rescue
31. Will to live, Will to save
32. Meanwhile, they…..
33. A Decision that cannot be made
34. Situation at the Imperial Capital
35. SPT Chapter 34
36. The Silver Haired Vampire
37. The Scene I have seen many times
38. The Situation in Rondine
39. The Sea Route to Rondine
40. The Switch
41. Alliance Signed
42. Remote Consultation
43. The one and only Sharer
44. The Fourth Prince Traugott
45. Eva’s plea
46. The Hero and the Masked Adventurer
47. Oath of the Childhood Friend
48. Steadfast Resolution – First Part
2409
49. Inspector
50. The Second and The Fifth Consort
51. How to use Finne
52. The Outermost layer of the Imperial Capital
53. Her Name is Rita
54. Sometime the Elder, Always the Younger
55. Heading to the South
56. The Earnest Duke
57. Reason for the Weight
58. Manpower Shortage
59. The Best Sword
60. Malice and Good Will
61. The First Princess
62. The Unreasonable Sister
63. The Blau Mowe Effect
64. The Leaked Secret
65. The Approaching Future
66. The Changing Conclusion
67. Those that lurk in the dark
68. The Current State of The South
69. Cry of Collapse
70. Mistake Three Years Ago
71. Path of Light
72. Reason for Trying
73. Black Sphere
2410
74. Blue Seagull’s Rescue
75. SPT Chapter 81
76. SPT Chapter 82
77. SPT Chapter 83
78. SPT Chapter 84
79. SPT Chapter 85
80. SPT Chapter 86
81. SPT Chapter 87
82. SPT Chapter 88
83. SPT Chapter 89
84. SPT Chapter 90
85. SPT Chapter 91
86. SPT Chapter 92
87. SPT Chapter 93
88. SPT Chapter 94
89. SPT Chapter 95
90. Night Battle Begin
91. SPT Chapter 97
92. SPT Chapter 98
93. SPT Chapter 99
94. SPT Chapter 100
95. SPT Chapter 101
96. SPT Chapter 102
97. SPT Chapter 103
98. SPT Chapter 104
2411
99. SPT Chapter 105
100. SPT Chapter 106
101. SPT Chapter 107
102. SPT Chapter 108
103. SPT Chapter 109
104. SPT Chapter 110
105. SPT Chapter 111
106. SPT Chapter 112
107. SPT Chapter 113
108. SPT Chapter 114
109. SPT Chapter 115
110. SPT Chapter 116
111. SPT Chapter 117
112. SPT Chapter 118
113. SPT Chapter 119
114. SPT Chapter 120
115. SPT Chapter 121
116. SPT Chapter 122
117. SPT Chapter 123
118. SPT Chapter 124
119. SPT Chapter 125
120. SPT Chapter 126
121. Alois
122. SPT Chapter 129
123. SPT Chapter 130
2412
124. SPT Chapter 131
125. SPT Chapter 132
126. SPT Chapter 133
127. SPT Chapter 134
128. SPT Chapter 135
129. SPT Chapter 136
130. SPT Chapter 137
131. SPT Chapter 138
132. SPT Chapter 139
133. SPT Chapter 140
134. SPT Chapter 141
135. SPT Chapter 142
136. SPT Chapter 143
137. SPT Chapter 144
138. SPT Chapter 145
139. SPT Chapter 146
140. SPT Chapter 147
141. SPT Chapter 148
142. SPT Chapter 149
143. SPT Chapter 150
144. SPT Chapter 151
145. SPT Chapter 152
146. SPT Chapter 153
147. SPT Chapter 154
148. SPT Chapter 155
2413
149. SPT Chapter 156
150. SPT Chapter 157
151. SPT Chapter 158
152. SPT Chapter 159
153. SPT Chapter 160
154. SPT Chapter 161
155. SPT Chapter 162
156. SPT Chapter 163
157. SPT Chapter 164
158. SPT Chapter 165
159. SPT Chapter 166
160. SPT Chapter 167
161. SPT Chapter 168
162. SPT Chapter 169
163. SPT Chapter 170
164. SPT Chapter 171
165. SPT Chapter 172
166. SPT Chapter 173
167. SPT Character Introductions
168. SPT Chapter 174
169. SPT Chapter 175
170. SPT Chapter 176
171. SPT Chapter 177
172. SPT Chapter 178
173. SPT Chapter 179
2414
174. SPT Chapter 180
175. SPT Chapter 181
176. SPT Chapter 182
177. SPT Chapter 183
178. SPT Chapter 184
179. SPT Chapter 185
180. SPT Chapter 186
181. SPT Chapter 187
182. SPT Chapter 188
183. SPT Chapter 189
184. SPT Chapter 190
185. SPT Chapter 191
186. SPT Chapter 192
187. SPT Chapter 193
188. SPT Chapter 194
189. SPT Chapter 195
190. SPT Chapter 196
191. SPT Chapter 197
192. SPT Chapter 198
193. SPT Chapter 199
194. SPT Chapter 200
195. SPT Chapter 201
196. SPT Chapter 202
197. SPT Chapter 203
198. SPT Chapter 204
2415
199. SPT Chapter 205
200. SPT Chapter 206
201. SPT Chapter 207
202. SPT Chapter 208
203. SPT Chapter 209
204. SPT Chapter 210
205. SPT Chapter 211
206. SPT Chapter 212
207. SPT Chapter 213
208. SPT Chapter 214
209. SPT Chapter 215
210. SPT Chapter 216
211. SPT Chapter 217
212. SPT Chapter 218
213. SPT Chapter 219
214. SPT Chapter 220
215. SPT Chapter 221
216. SPT Chapter 222
217. SPT Chapter 223
218. SPT Chapter 224
219. SPT Chapter 225
220. SPT Chapter 226
221. SPT Chapter 227
222. SPT Chapter 228
223. SPT Chapter 229
2416
224. SPT Chapter 230
225. SPT Chapter 231
226. SPT Chapter 232
227. SPT Chapter 233
228. SPT Chapter 234
229. SPT Chapter 235
230. SPT Chapter 236
231. SPT Chapter 237
232. SPT Chapter 238
233. SPT Chapter 239
234. SPT Chapter 240
235. SPT Chapter 241
236. SPT Chapter 242
237. SPT Chapter 243
238. SPT Chapter 244
239. SPT Chapter 245
240. SPT Chapter 246
241. SPT Chapter 247
242. SPT Chapter 248
243. SPT Chapter 249
244. SPT Chapter 250
245. SPT Chapter 251
246. SPT Chapter 252
247. SPT Chapter 253
248. SPT Chapter 254
2417
249. SPT Chapter 255
250. SPT Chapter 256
251. SPT Chapter 257
252. SPT Chapter 258
253. SPT Chapter 259
254. SPT Chapter 260
255. SPT Chapter 261
256. SPT Chapter 262
257. SPT Chapter 263
258. SPT Chapter 264
259. SPT Chapter 265
260. SPT Chapter 266
261. SPT Chapter 267
262. SPT Chapter 268
263. SPT Chapter 269
264. SPT Chapter 270
265. SPT Chapter 271
266. SPT Chapter 272
267. SPT Chapter 273
268. SPT Chapter 274
269. SPT Chapter 275
270. SPT Chapter 276
271. SPT Chapter 277
272. SPT Chapter 278
273. SPT Chapter 279
2418
274. SPT Chapter 280
275. SPT Chapter 281
276. SPT Chapter 282
277. SPT Chapter 283
278. SPT Chapter 284
279. SPT Chapter 285
280. SPT Chapter 286
281. SPT Chapter 287
282. SPT Chapter 288
283. SPT Chapter 289
284. SPT Chapter 290
285. SPT Chapter 291
286. SPT Chapter 292
287. SPT Chapter 293
288. SPT Chapter 294
289. SPT Chapter 295
290. SPT Chapter 296
291. SPT Chapter 297
292. SPT Chapter 298
293. SPT Chapter 299
294. SPT Chapter 300
295. SPT Chapter 301
296. SPT Chapter 302
297. SPT Chapter 303
298. SPT Chapter 304
2419
299. SPT Chapter 305
300. SPT Chapter 306
301. SPT Chapter 307
302. SPT Chapter 308
303. SPT Chapter 309
304. SPT Chapter 310
305. SPT Chapter 311
306. SPT Chapter 312
307. SPT Chapter 313
308. SPT Chapter 314
309. SPT Chapter 315
310. SPT Chapter 316
311. SPT Chapter 317
312. SPT Chapter 318
313. SPT Chapter 319
314. SPT Chapter 320
315. SPT Chapter 321
316. SPT Chapter 322
317. SPT Chapter 323
318. SPT Chapter 324
319. SPT Chapter 325
320. SPT Chapter 326
321. SPT Chapter 327
322. SPT Chapter 328
323. SPT Chapter 329
2420
324. SPT Chapter 330
325. SPT Chapter 331
326. SPT Chapter 332
327. SPT Chapter 333
328. SPT Chapter 334
329. SPT Chapter 335
330. SPT Chapter 336
331. SPT Chapter 337
332. SPT Chapter 338
333. SPT Chapter 339
334. SPT Chapter 340
335. SPT Chapter 341
336. SPT Chapter 342
337. SPT Chapter 343
338. SPT Chapter 344
339. SPT Chapter 345
340. SPT Chapter 346
341. SPT Chapter 347
342. SPT Chapter 348
343. SPT Chapter 349
344. SPT Chapter 350
345. SPT Chapter 351
346. SPT Chapter 352
347. SPT Chapter 353
348. SPT Chapter 354
2421
349. SPT Chapter 355
350. SPT Chapter 356
351. SPT Chapter 357
352. SPT Chapter 358
353. SPT Chapter 359
354. SPT Chapter 360
355. SPT Chapter 361
356. SPT Chapter 362
357. SPT Chapter 363
358. SPT Chapter 364
359. SPT Chapter 365
360. SPT Chapter 366
361. SPT Chapter 367
362. SPT Chapter 368
363. SPT Chapter 369
364. SPT Chapter 370
365. SPT Chapter 371
366. SPT Chapter 372
367. SPT Chapter 373
368. SPT SS1
Landmarks
1. Cover
2422
You might also like
- Ill Be A Matriarch in This Life - Complete94% (16)Ill Be A Matriarch in This Life - Complete2,354 pages
- Whether You Call Me a Guardian Dragon or Not, Im Going to Sleep_01No ratings yetWhether You Call Me a Guardian Dragon or Not, Im Going to Sleep_01390 pages
- Instant ebooks textbook Reputation Management The Key to Successful Public Relations and Corporate Communication 2e Wei Zhi download all chapters100% (1)Instant ebooks textbook Reputation Management The Key to Successful Public Relations and Corporate Communication 2e Wei Zhi download all chapters34 pages
- Death March To The Parallel World Rhapsody - Volume 01No ratings yetDeath March To The Parallel World Rhapsody - Volume 01227 pages
- Legend of The Mythological Genes c1-517 - Fish Leaping To The PeakNo ratings yetLegend of The Mythological Genes c1-517 - Fish Leaping To The Peak3,911 pages
- Star Martial God Technique - Mad SnailNo ratings yetStar Martial God Technique - Mad Snail1,562 pages
- General Act of The Algeciras The Affairs of Morocco 2100% (2)General Act of The Algeciras The Affairs of Morocco 226 pages
- Picking Up Attributes From Today - Panda ReunionNo ratings yetPicking Up Attributes From Today - Panda Reunion3,143 pages
- Virtual World - Peerless White EmperorNo ratings yetVirtual World - Peerless White Emperor8,311 pages
- I Became A Flashing Genius At The Magic Academy_01_(v2)100% (1)I Became A Flashing Genius At The Magic Academy_01_(v2)575 pages
- Reborn As A Space Mercenary - 01 (Seven Seas)No ratings yetReborn As A Space Mercenary - 01 (Seven Seas)224 pages
- Evolving Infinitely From Ground Zero c1-392No ratings yetEvolving Infinitely From Ground Zero c1-3922,580 pages
- Reincarnated As A Wolf With Cheats - Chapter 1-40No ratings yetReincarnated As A Wolf With Cheats - Chapter 1-40178 pages
- I Became A Flashing Genius At The Magic Academy_02No ratings yetI Became A Flashing Genius At The Magic Academy_02662 pages
- How to Feed an Abyss c1-249 (Jiang Weiji, 江为竭) (Z-Library)No ratings yetHow to Feed an Abyss c1-249 (Jiang Weiji, 江为竭) (Z-Library)1,208 pages
- Reincarnated As A Wolf With Cheats - Chapter 41-100No ratings yetReincarnated As A Wolf With Cheats - Chapter 41-100283 pages
- Reincarnation of The Strongest Sword God - Chapter 3632 - 706 - Difference Between Powers? - Lib ReadNo ratings yetReincarnation of The Strongest Sword God - Chapter 3632 - 706 - Difference Between Powers? - Lib Read5 pages
- Reborn As A Space Mercenary - 02 (Seven Seas)No ratings yetReborn As A Space Mercenary - 02 (Seven Seas)206 pages
- The Man Picked Up by The Gods (Reboot) - 04No ratings yetThe Man Picked Up by The Gods (Reboot) - 04272 pages
- The Man Picked Up by The Gods (Reboot) - 03No ratings yetThe Man Picked Up by The Gods (Reboot) - 03232 pages
- The Legendary Moonlight Sculptor Volume 5 PDFNo ratings yetThe Legendary Moonlight Sculptor Volume 5 PDF184 pages
- Banished From The Hero - S Party - I Decided To Live A Quiet Life in The Countryside Vol 2No ratings yetBanished From The Hero - S Party - I Decided To Live A Quiet Life in The Countryside Vol 2219 pages
- LN - Hachinan Tte, Sore Wa Nai Deshou! - Volume 14No ratings yetLN - Hachinan Tte, Sore Wa Nai Deshou! - Volume 14406 pages
- (WWW - Asianovel.com) - Who Touched My Tail Chapter 153 - Chapter 208No ratings yet(WWW - Asianovel.com) - Who Touched My Tail Chapter 153 - Chapter 208505 pages
- Instant Download Computer Forensics Incident Response Essentials 1st PDF All ChapterNo ratings yetInstant Download Computer Forensics Incident Response Essentials 1st PDF All Chapter34 pages
- Women of Foreign Superstition - Christianity and Gender in ImperiaNo ratings yetWomen of Foreign Superstition - Christianity and Gender in Imperia261 pages
- Gurps 4th Edition Supporting Cast Age Of Sail Pirate Crew Nicholas Lovell instant downloadNo ratings yetGurps 4th Edition Supporting Cast Age Of Sail Pirate Crew Nicholas Lovell instant download31 pages
- Full download Exploratory Data Analysis with Python Cookbook: Over 50 recipes to analyze, visualize, and extract insights from structured and unstructured data Oluleye pdf docx100% (4)Full download Exploratory Data Analysis with Python Cookbook: Over 50 recipes to analyze, visualize, and extract insights from structured and unstructured data Oluleye pdf docx41 pages
- Kobelco Hydraulic Excavator k909a k909alc Parts Catalog s3lq1028 en JpNo ratings yetKobelco Hydraulic Excavator k909a k909alc Parts Catalog s3lq1028 en Jp23 pages
- Test Bank for Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 4th Edition, Gerard Cachon, Christian Terwiesch - Instantly Accessible In Full PDF Version100% (4)Test Bank for Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 4th Edition, Gerard Cachon, Christian Terwiesch - Instantly Accessible In Full PDF Version46 pages
- What Is Bureaucratic Leadership? How Rules Can Guide PeopleNo ratings yetWhat Is Bureaucratic Leadership? How Rules Can Guide People6 pages
- Psellos' Epistle (Του Αυτου) Προσ Τον Βασιλεα Of God On EarthNo ratings yetPsellos' Epistle (Του Αυτου) Προσ Τον Βασιλεα Of God On Earth12 pages
- The Genius Prince_s Guide to Raising a Nation Out of Debt (Hey, How About Treason_), Vol. 7 (light novel) (The Genius Prince_s Guide to Raising a Nation ... (Hey, How About Treason_) (light novel))No ratings yetThe Genius Prince_s Guide to Raising a Nation Out of Debt (Hey, How About Treason_), Vol. 7 (light novel) (The Genius Prince_s Guide to Raising a Nation ... (Hey, How About Treason_) (light novel))157 pages
- Aristakes Lastivertc'i's History of The ArmeniansNo ratings yetAristakes Lastivertc'i's History of The Armenians59 pages
- A Topical Approach To Lifespan 10th Edition John W Santrock instant downloadNo ratings yetA Topical Approach To Lifespan 10th Edition John W Santrock instant download31 pages
- Texto 2 - Donnelly - Human Rights - A New Standard of CivilizationNo ratings yetTexto 2 - Donnelly - Human Rights - A New Standard of Civilization23 pages
- Download full Exploring Management 5th Edition ebook all chapters100% (3)Download full Exploring Management 5th Edition ebook all chapters24 pages
- On the track a guide to contemporary film scoring 2nd Edition Fred Karlin - Download the ebook now for instant access to all chapters100% (2)On the track a guide to contemporary film scoring 2nd Edition Fred Karlin - Download the ebook now for instant access to all chapters47 pages
- Annabel Teh Gallop - The Genealogical Seal of The Mughal Emperors of India (1999)No ratings yetAnnabel Teh Gallop - The Genealogical Seal of The Mughal Emperors of India (1999)65 pages
- Papercuts 6 The Eagle Has Crash Landed Colin Bateman download100% (1)Papercuts 6 The Eagle Has Crash Landed Colin Bateman download34 pages
- MegaTraveller - Players Guide_to_MegaTravellerNo ratings yetMegaTraveller - Players Guide_to_MegaTraveller18 pages
- How To Survive As A Villain On The Verge of Death100% (2)How To Survive As A Villain On The Verge of Death2,458 pages
- Fr. Alexander Schmemann - Church and State - The Orthodox Christian Experience With A View Towards The FutureNo ratings yetFr. Alexander Schmemann - Church and State - The Orthodox Christian Experience With A View Towards The Future11 pages
